v3, file/build organization

223 files changed, 101950 insertions, 5651 deletions

diff --git a/.gitignore b/.gitignore
index caf2550..16374f3 100644
--- a/.gitignore
+++ b/.gitignore
@@ -1,4 +1,5 @@
 bin/*
+dependencies/bin/*
 compile_commands.json
 build_ops
 imgui.ini
diff --git a/.gitmodules b/.gitmodules
index 76917ac..e69de29 100644
--- a/.gitmodules
+++ b/.gitmodules
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-[submodule "docking"]
-	path = imgui
-	url = https://github.com/ocornut/imgui
-	branch = docking
diff --git a/COMPILATION.txt b/COMPILATION.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..481d224
--- /dev/null
+++ b/COMPILATION.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+
+Windows (MSVC only)
+-------
+
+    1. Obtain libraries for SDL2 and FFmpeg.
+        * If you want to use the libraries that get statically linked to the
+          official binaries, download them from here and place them in
+          dependencies/bin.
+        * url
+        * You can also just use the more common dynamic versions. Make sure
+          they're in your PATH and that you set STATIC=0 in build.bat.
+    2. Set ARM=1 if on ARM. (is there a way to auto-detect?)
+    3. Activate the VS environment by opening a Visual Studio terminal or running vcvarsall.bat.
+    4. Run build.bat.
+
+OSX/Unix
+--------
+
+    1. Obtain libraries for SDL2 and FFmpeg.
+        * In most package managers they're simply "sdl2" and "ffmpeg".
+    2. Install dylibbundler if you want the application bundle (.app) to be generated.
+        * url
+    3. Run build.sh.
+
+
+Extra
+-----
+
+    * Turn on program-level debug info and checking by setting DEBUG=1.
+    * Speed up compilation times after your first build by setting IMGUI=0.
diff --git a/build.bat b/build.bat
index 7f644ee..00451d6 100755
--- a/build.bat
+++ b/build.bat
@@ -1,22 +1,21 @@
 @echo off

-REM call "C:\Program Files (x86)\Microsoft Visual Studio\2022\BuildTools\VC\Auxiliary\Build\vcvarsall.bat" x64

 

-set SDL2_DIR=C:\lib\SDL2-2.0.22

-set FFMPEG_DIR=C:\lib\ffmpeg-n5.0-latest-win64-lgpl-shared-5.0

+set STATIC=1

+set LIB_FILES=dependencies/bin/*

 

 REM /Zi /O2

 set OPTIMIZATION=/O2

 set DEBUG=0

-set IMGUI=1

+set IMGUI=0

 set ARM=0

 set PERF=0

 set STABLE=0

 

-REM /I%FFMPEG_DIR%\include

-set INCLUDES=/I.. /Iimgui /I%SDL2_DIR%\include /IC:\lib\glew-2.1.0\include /Ilib/glad/include /Icurl

-set SDL_LIBS=/LIBPATH:%SDL2_DIR%\lib\x64 SDL2.lib SDL2main.lib opengl32.lib shell32.lib

-set FFMPEG_LIBS=/LIBPATH:%FFMPEG_DIR%\lib avcodec.lib avfilter.lib avformat.lib swscale.lib avutil.lib

-set IMGUI_FILES=imgui\backends\imgui_impl_sdl.cpp imgui\backends\imgui_impl_opengl3.cpp imgui\imgui*.cpp

+if %STATIC%==1 ( set STATIC_LIB_NAMES=version.lib ole32.lib oleaut32.lib advapi32.lib setupapi.lib imm32.lib gdi32.lib winmm.lib user32.lib shell32.lib kernel32.lib shell32.lib bcrypt.lib )

+

+REM what did we need glew for again? /Icurl

+set INCLUDES=/I.. /Isrc /Isrc/include /Idependencies/include /Idependencies/src /Ilib/glad/include /Idependencies/include/SDL

+set IMGUI_FILES=dependencies\src\imgui\imgui_impl_sdl.cpp dependencies\src\imgui\imgui_impl_opengl3.cpp dependencies\src\imgui\imgui*.cpp

 set WARNING_FLAGS=/W2 /wd4805 /wd4477 /wd4244 /wd4305

 

 set PREPROCESSORS="/DWINDOWS=1"

@@ -24,10 +23,9 @@ if %DEBUG%==1 ( set PREPROCESSORS=%PREPROCESSORS% "/DDEBUG=1" )
 if %PERF%==1 ( set PREPROCESSORS=%PREPROCESSORS% "/DPERF=1" )

 if %STABLE%==1 ( set PREPROCESSORS=%PREPROCESSORS% "/DSTABLE=1" )

 

-cl /nologo %OPTIMIZATION% /MD /I.. /Iimgui /I%SDL2_DIR%\include my_imgui_internal_widgets.cpp /Fobin/ /c

-if %IMGUI%==1 ( cl /nologo %OPTIMIZATION% /MD /I.. /Iimgui /I%SDL2_DIR%\include %IMGUI_FILES% /Fobin/ /c )

-

-cl /nologo %OPTIMIZATION% /MD /I.. /Ilib/glad/include lib/glad.c /Fobin/ /c

+cl /nologo %OPTIMIZATION% /MD  /Isrc/include /Idependencies/include src/imgui_helper_internal.cpp /Fobin/ /c

+if %IMGUI%==1 ( cl /nologo %OPTIMIZATION% /MD /Idependencies/include /Idependencies/include/SDL %IMGUI_FILES% /Fobin/ /c )

+cl /nologo %OPTIMIZATION% /MD /I.. /Idependencies/include dependencies/src/glad.c /Fobin/ /c

+cl /c /nologo /Zi /MT %WARNING_FLAGS% %PREPROCESSORS% %INCLUDES% src/main.cpp /Fobin/

 

-REM /link %SDL_LIBS% %FFMPEG_LIBS%

-cl /nologo /Zi /MD %WARNING_FLAGS% %PREPROCESSORS% %INCLUDES% main.cpp bin/*.obj /Febin/real2d.exe /Fobin/ /link %SDL_LIBS% /subsystem:console

+link /nologo bin/*.obj %LIB_FILES% %STATIC_LIB_NAMES% /OUT:bin/real2d.exe /subsystem:console

diff --git a/build.sh b/build.sh
index 750146b..f826b87 100755
--- a/build.sh
+++ b/build.sh
@@ -12,7 +12,6 @@ if test -f build_ops; then
 fi
 
 FFMPEG_LIBS="
-    libavdevice
     libavformat
     libavfilter
     libavcodec
@@ -27,9 +26,6 @@ IMGUI_FILES="
     imgui_draw
     imgui_tables
     imgui_widgets
-"
-
-IMGUI_FILES_IMPL="
     imgui_impl_sdl
     imgui_impl_opengl3
 "
@@ -70,53 +66,47 @@ else
     "
     WARNING_FLAGS="$WARNING_FLAGS -DARM=1"
 fi
+
+IMGUI_FLAGS="
+    -Idependencies/include/imgui -Idependencies/ $OPTIMIZATION -Wall -Wformat `sdl2-config --cflags` -c
+"
+
 if [[ "$OSTYPE" =~ ^darwin ]]; then
     OSNAME="mac"
     IMGUI_FLAGS="
-        -std=c++11 -Iimgui -Iimgui/backends $OPTIMIZATION -Wall -Wformat `sdl2-config --cflags` -I/usr/local/include -I/opt/local/include -c
+        $IMGUI_FLAGS -std=c++11 -I/usr/local/include -I/opt/local/include -c
     "
     SDL_ARGS="
         `sdl2-config --cflags` -framework OpenGL -ldl `sdl2-config --libs`
     "
 else
     OSNAME="linux"
-    IMGUI_FLAGS="
-        -Iimgui -Iimgui/backends $OPTIMIZATION -Wall -Wformat `sdl2-config --cflags` -c
-    "
     SDL_ARGS="
         `sdl2-config --cflags` -lGL -ldl `sdl2-config --libs`
     "
 fi
 
-GLAD_FLAGS="
-    -Ilib/glad/include
-"
-
 [[ -d bin ]] || mkdir bin
 
-clang $IMGUI_FLAGS -o bin/my_imgui_internal_widgets.o my_imgui_internal_widgets.cpp
+clang $IMGUI_FLAGS -Isrc/include -o bin/imgui_helper_internal.o src/imgui_helper_internal.cpp
 
 if [[ "$IMGUI" == 1 ]]; then
     for i in $IMGUI_FILES
     do
-        clang $IMGUI_FLAGS -o bin/$i.o imgui/$i.cpp
-    done
-    for i in $IMGUI_FILES_IMPL
-    do
-        clang $IMGUI_FLAGS -o bin/$i.o imgui/backends/$i.cpp
+        clang $IMGUI_FLAGS -o bin/$i.o dependencies/src/imgui/$i.cpp
     done
 fi
 
-clang lib/glad.c $GLAD_FLAGS  -I/usr/local/include -I/opt/local/include -c  \
+clang dependencies/src/glad.c -Idependencies/include -I/usr/local/include -I/opt/local/include -c  \
     $WARNING_FLAGS $OPTIMIZATION $ADDITIONAL_FLAGS -o bin/glad.o
-clang main.cpp  $WARNING_FLAGS $OPTIMIZATION $ADDITIONAL_FLAGS -o bin/real2d_"$ARCHNAME"_"$OSNAME" bin/*.o  \
-    $GLAD_FLAGS \
-    -std=c++11 -lstdc++ -Iimgui -Iimgui/backends  \
+
+clang src/main.cpp  $WARNING_FLAGS $OPTIMIZATION $ADDITIONAL_FLAGS -o bin/real2d_"$ARCHNAME"_"$OSNAME" bin/*.o  \
+    -Idependencies/include -Idependencies/include/imgui -Idependencies/src -Isrc/include \
+    -std=c++11 -lstdc++   \
     $SDL_ARGS \
     $OPTIONAL_FLAGS \
     -I . \
-    -lm -I /usr/local/include # $(pkg-config --cflags --libs $FFMPEG_LIBS)
-
+    -lm -I /usr/local/include $(pkg-config --cflags --libs $FFMPEG_LIBS)
 
 if [[ "$OSTYPE" =~ ^darwin ]]; then
 mv bin/real2d_"$ARCHNAME"_"$OSNAME" lib/mac_app_template/Contents/MacOS/real
diff --git a/caching.cpp b/caching.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index c35189e..0000000
--- a/caching.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,171 +0,0 @@
-
-#if 0
-static void
-CacheFrame(cache *Cache, pixel_buffer *CompBuffer)
-{
-
-    int MinX = 0;
-    int MinY = 0;
-    int MaxX = CompBuffer->Width;
-    int MaxY = CompBuffer->Height;
-
-
-    uint8 *Row = ((uint8 *)Cache->Address +
-                     CompBuffer->BytesPerPixel +
-                     MinY*CompBuffer->Pitch);
-    uint8 *CompRow = ((uint8 *)CompBuffer->OriginalBuffer +
-                     CompBuffer->BytesPerPixel +
-                     CompBuffer->Pitch);
-    for(int Y = MinY;
-        Y < MaxY;
-        ++Y)
-    {
-        uint32 *Pixel = (uint32 *)Row + MinX;
-        uint32 *CompPixel = (uint32 *)CompRow;
-        for(int X = MinX;
-            X < MaxX;
-            ++X)
-        {
-            *(uint32 *)Pixel++ = *(uint32 *)CompPixel;
-            CompPixel++;
-        }
-        Row += CompBuffer->Pitch;
-        CompRow += CompBuffer->Pitch;
-    }
-}
-
-static void
-FetchCache(cache *Cache, pixel_buffer *CompBuffer)
-{
-
-    int MinX = 0;
-    int MinY = 0;
-    int MaxX = CompBuffer->Width;
-    int MaxY = CompBuffer->Height;
-
-
-    uint8 *Row = ((uint8 *)Cache->Address +
-                     CompBuffer->BytesPerPixel +
-                     MinY*CompBuffer->Pitch);
-    uint8 *CompRow = ((uint8 *)CompBuffer->OriginalBuffer +
-                     CompBuffer->BytesPerPixel +
-                     CompBuffer->Pitch);
-    for(int Y = MinY;
-        Y < MaxY;
-        ++Y)
-    {
-        uint32 *Pixel = (uint32 *)Row + MinX;
-        uint32 *CompPixel = (uint32 *)CompRow;
-        for(int X = MinX;
-            X < MaxX;
-            ++X)
-        {
-            *(uint32 *)CompPixel = *(uint32 *)Pixel++;
-            CompPixel++;
-        }
-        Row += CompBuffer->Pitch;
-        CompRow += CompBuffer->Pitch;
-    }
-}
-
-static void
-InteractToComp(pixel_buffer *CompBuffer, cache_pool *Cache)
-{
-    int MinX = 0;
-    int MinY = 0;
-    int MaxX = CompBuffer->Width;
-    int MaxY = CompBuffer->Height;
-
-    uint8 *CompRow = ((uint8 *)CompBuffer->OriginalBuffer +
-                     CompBuffer->BytesPerPixel +
-                     CompBuffer->Pitch);
-    uint8 *Row0 = ((uint8 *)Cache->Intermediate[0].Address +
-                     CompBuffer->BytesPerPixel +
-                     CompBuffer->Pitch);
-    uint8 *Row1 = ((uint8 *)Cache->Intermediate[1].Address +
-                     CompBuffer->BytesPerPixel +
-                     CompBuffer->Pitch);
-    uint8 *Row2 = ((uint8 *)Cache->Intermediate[2].Address +
-                     CompBuffer->BytesPerPixel +
-                     CompBuffer->Pitch);
-    for(int Y = MinY;
-        Y < MaxY;
-        ++Y)
-    {
-        uint32 *CompPixel = (uint32 *)CompRow;
-        uint32 *Pixel0 = (uint32 *)Row0;
-        uint32 *Pixel1 = (uint32 *)Row1;
-        uint32 *Pixel2 = (uint32 *)Row2;
-        for(int X = MinX;
-            X < MaxX;
-            ++X)
-        {
-            RenderAlpha(CompPixel, *Pixel0);
-            RenderAlpha(CompPixel, *Pixel1);
-            RenderAlpha(CompPixel, *Pixel2);
-            CompPixel++;
-            Pixel0++;
-            Pixel1++;
-            Pixel2++;
-        }
-        CompRow += CompBuffer->Pitch;
-        Row0 += CompBuffer->Pitch;
-        Row1 += CompBuffer->Pitch;
-        Row2 += CompBuffer->Pitch;
-    }
-}
-
-static void
-UncacheFrames(int16 Min, int16 Max, cache_pool *Cache)
-{
-    for (int16 i = Min; i < Max; i++)
-        Cache->Frame[i].Cached = false;
-};
-
-static void
-CacheKeyframeAtIndex(uint16 i, struct property_channel *Property, cache_pool *Cache)
-{
-    Assert(Property->NumberOfKeyframes > 0);
-    uint16 *Sorted = Property->Sorted + i;
-    if (Property->NumberOfKeyframes == 1) {
-        // nothing happens
-    } else if (Property->NumberOfKeyframes == 2) {
-        UncacheFrames(Property->Keyframe[0].FrameNumber, Property->Keyframe[1].FrameNumber, Cache);
-    } else if (i == 0) {
-        UncacheFrames(Property->Keyframe[*Sorted].FrameNumber, Property->Keyframe[*(Sorted+1)].FrameNumber, Cache);
-    } else if (i == Property->NumberOfKeyframes - 1) {
-        UncacheFrames(Property->Keyframe[*(Sorted-1)].FrameNumber, Property->Keyframe[*Sorted].FrameNumber, Cache);
-    } else {
-        UncacheFrames(Property->Keyframe[*(Sorted-1)].FrameNumber, Property->Keyframe[*(Sorted+1)].FrameNumber, Cache);
-    }
-}
-
-static void
-SortAndCacheKeyframeAtFrame(uint16 f, struct property_channel *Property, cache_pool *Cache)
-{
-    Assert(Property->NumberOfKeyframes > 0);
-    if (Property->NumberOfKeyframes == 1) {
-    } else if (Property->NumberOfKeyframes == 2) {
-        UncacheFrames(Property->KeyframePTR[0]->FrameNumber, Property->KeyframePTR[1]->FrameNumber, Cache);
-    } else {
-        int i = 0;
-        for (; i < Property->NumberOfKeyframes - 1; i++) {
-            if (Property->KeyframePTR[i]->FrameNumber > Property->KeyframePTR[i+1]->FrameNumber) {
-                struct keyframe *Temp = Property->KeyframePTR[i];
-                Property->KeyframePTR[i] = Property->KeyframePTR[i+1];
-                Property->KeyframePTR[i+1] = Temp;
-                break;
-            }
-            if (Property->KeyframePTR[i]->FrameNumber >= f)
-                break;
-        }
-        if (i == 0) {
-            UncacheFrames(Property->KeyframePTR[i]->FrameNumber, Property->KeyframePTR[i+1]->FrameNumber, Cache);
-        } else if (i == Property->NumberOfKeyframes - 1) {
-            UncacheFrames(Property->KeyframePTR[i-1]->FrameNumber, Property->KeyframePTR[i]->FrameNumber, Cache);
-        } else {
-            UncacheFrames(Property->KeyframePTR[i-1]->FrameNumber, Property->KeyframePTR[i+1]->FrameNumber, Cache);
-        }
-    }
-}
-#endif
diff --git a/dependencies/include/avcodec.h b/dependencies/include/avcodec.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..23dbd89
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/avcodec.h
@@ -0,0 +1,3181 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2001 Fabrice Bellard
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_AVCODEC_H
+#define AVCODEC_AVCODEC_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup libavc
+ * Libavcodec external API header
+ */
+
+#include "libavutil/samplefmt.h"
+#include "libavutil/attributes.h"
+#include "libavutil/avutil.h"
+#include "libavutil/buffer.h"
+#include "libavutil/dict.h"
+#include "libavutil/frame.h"
+#include "libavutil/log.h"
+#include "libavutil/pixfmt.h"
+#include "libavutil/rational.h"
+
+#include "codec.h"
+#include "codec_desc.h"
+#include "codec_par.h"
+#include "codec_id.h"
+#include "defs.h"
+#include "packet.h"
+#include "version_major.h"
+#ifndef HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H
+/* When included as part of the ffmpeg build, only include the major version
+ * to avoid unnecessary rebuilds. When included externally, keep including
+ * the full version information. */
+#include "version.h"
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup libavc libavcodec
+ * Encoding/Decoding Library
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavc_decoding Decoding
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavc_encoding Encoding
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavc_codec Codecs
+ * @{
+ * @defgroup lavc_codec_native Native Codecs
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ * @defgroup lavc_codec_wrappers External library wrappers
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ * @defgroup lavc_codec_hwaccel Hardware Accelerators bridge
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ * @}
+ * @defgroup lavc_internal Internal
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @ingroup libavc
+ * @defgroup lavc_encdec send/receive encoding and decoding API overview
+ * @{
+ *
+ * The avcodec_send_packet()/avcodec_receive_frame()/avcodec_send_frame()/
+ * avcodec_receive_packet() functions provide an encode/decode API, which
+ * decouples input and output.
+ *
+ * The API is very similar for encoding/decoding and audio/video, and works as
+ * follows:
+ * - Set up and open the AVCodecContext as usual.
+ * - Send valid input:
+ *   - For decoding, call avcodec_send_packet() to give the decoder raw
+ *     compressed data in an AVPacket.
+ *   - For encoding, call avcodec_send_frame() to give the encoder an AVFrame
+ *     containing uncompressed audio or video.
+ *
+ *   In both cases, it is recommended that AVPackets and AVFrames are
+ *   refcounted, or libavcodec might have to copy the input data. (libavformat
+ *   always returns refcounted AVPackets, and av_frame_get_buffer() allocates
+ *   refcounted AVFrames.)
+ * - Receive output in a loop. Periodically call one of the avcodec_receive_*()
+ *   functions and process their output:
+ *   - For decoding, call avcodec_receive_frame(). On success, it will return
+ *     an AVFrame containing uncompressed audio or video data.
+ *   - For encoding, call avcodec_receive_packet(). On success, it will return
+ *     an AVPacket with a compressed frame.
+ *
+ *   Repeat this call until it returns AVERROR(EAGAIN) or an error. The
+ *   AVERROR(EAGAIN) return value means that new input data is required to
+ *   return new output. In this case, continue with sending input. For each
+ *   input frame/packet, the codec will typically return 1 output frame/packet,
+ *   but it can also be 0 or more than 1.
+ *
+ * At the beginning of decoding or encoding, the codec might accept multiple
+ * input frames/packets without returning a frame, until its internal buffers
+ * are filled. This situation is handled transparently if you follow the steps
+ * outlined above.
+ *
+ * In theory, sending input can result in EAGAIN - this should happen only if
+ * not all output was received. You can use this to structure alternative decode
+ * or encode loops other than the one suggested above. For example, you could
+ * try sending new input on each iteration, and try to receive output if that
+ * returns EAGAIN.
+ *
+ * End of stream situations. These require "flushing" (aka draining) the codec,
+ * as the codec might buffer multiple frames or packets internally for
+ * performance or out of necessity (consider B-frames).
+ * This is handled as follows:
+ * - Instead of valid input, send NULL to the avcodec_send_packet() (decoding)
+ *   or avcodec_send_frame() (encoding) functions. This will enter draining
+ *   mode.
+ * - Call avcodec_receive_frame() (decoding) or avcodec_receive_packet()
+ *   (encoding) in a loop until AVERROR_EOF is returned. The functions will
+ *   not return AVERROR(EAGAIN), unless you forgot to enter draining mode.
+ * - Before decoding can be resumed again, the codec has to be reset with
+ *   avcodec_flush_buffers().
+ *
+ * Using the API as outlined above is highly recommended. But it is also
+ * possible to call functions outside of this rigid schema. For example, you can
+ * call avcodec_send_packet() repeatedly without calling
+ * avcodec_receive_frame(). In this case, avcodec_send_packet() will succeed
+ * until the codec's internal buffer has been filled up (which is typically of
+ * size 1 per output frame, after initial input), and then reject input with
+ * AVERROR(EAGAIN). Once it starts rejecting input, you have no choice but to
+ * read at least some output.
+ *
+ * Not all codecs will follow a rigid and predictable dataflow; the only
+ * guarantee is that an AVERROR(EAGAIN) return value on a send/receive call on
+ * one end implies that a receive/send call on the other end will succeed, or
+ * at least will not fail with AVERROR(EAGAIN). In general, no codec will
+ * permit unlimited buffering of input or output.
+ *
+ * A codec is not allowed to return AVERROR(EAGAIN) for both sending and receiving. This
+ * would be an invalid state, which could put the codec user into an endless
+ * loop. The API has no concept of time either: it cannot happen that trying to
+ * do avcodec_send_packet() results in AVERROR(EAGAIN), but a repeated call 1 second
+ * later accepts the packet (with no other receive/flush API calls involved).
+ * The API is a strict state machine, and the passage of time is not supposed
+ * to influence it. Some timing-dependent behavior might still be deemed
+ * acceptable in certain cases. But it must never result in both send/receive
+ * returning EAGAIN at the same time at any point. It must also absolutely be
+ * avoided that the current state is "unstable" and can "flip-flop" between
+ * the send/receive APIs allowing progress. For example, it's not allowed that
+ * the codec randomly decides that it actually wants to consume a packet now
+ * instead of returning a frame, after it just returned AVERROR(EAGAIN) on an
+ * avcodec_send_packet() call.
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_core Core functions/structures.
+ * @ingroup libavc
+ *
+ * Basic definitions, functions for querying libavcodec capabilities,
+ * allocating core structures, etc.
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @ingroup lavc_encoding
+ * minimum encoding buffer size
+ * Used to avoid some checks during header writing.
+ */
+#define AV_INPUT_BUFFER_MIN_SIZE 16384
+
+/**
+ * @ingroup lavc_encoding
+ */
+typedef struct RcOverride{
+    int start_frame;
+    int end_frame;
+    int qscale; // If this is 0 then quality_factor will be used instead.
+    float quality_factor;
+} RcOverride;
+
+/* encoding support
+   These flags can be passed in AVCodecContext.flags before initialization.
+   Note: Not everything is supported yet.
+*/
+
+/**
+ * Allow decoders to produce frames with data planes that are not aligned
+ * to CPU requirements (e.g. due to cropping).
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_UNALIGNED       (1 <<  0)
+/**
+ * Use fixed qscale.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_QSCALE          (1 <<  1)
+/**
+ * 4 MV per MB allowed / advanced prediction for H.263.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_4MV             (1 <<  2)
+/**
+ * Output even those frames that might be corrupted.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_OUTPUT_CORRUPT  (1 <<  3)
+/**
+ * Use qpel MC.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_QPEL            (1 <<  4)
+/**
+ * Don't output frames whose parameters differ from first
+ * decoded frame in stream.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_DROPCHANGED     (1 <<  5)
+/**
+ * Request the encoder to output reconstructed frames, i.e. frames that would be
+ * produced by decoding the encoded bistream. These frames may be retrieved by
+ * calling avcodec_receive_frame() immediately after a successful call to
+ * avcodec_receive_packet().
+ *
+ * Should only be used with encoders flagged with the
+ * AV_CODEC_CAP_ENCODER_RECON_FRAME capability.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_RECON_FRAME     (1 <<  6)
+/**
+ * Use internal 2pass ratecontrol in first pass mode.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_PASS1           (1 <<  9)
+/**
+ * Use internal 2pass ratecontrol in second pass mode.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_PASS2           (1 << 10)
+/**
+ * loop filter.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_LOOP_FILTER     (1 << 11)
+/**
+ * Only decode/encode grayscale.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_GRAY            (1 << 13)
+/**
+ * error[?] variables will be set during encoding.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_PSNR            (1 << 15)
+#if FF_API_FLAG_TRUNCATED
+/**
+ * Input bitstream might be truncated at a random location
+ * instead of only at frame boundaries.
+ *
+ * @deprecated use codec parsers for packetizing input
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_TRUNCATED       (1 << 16)
+#endif
+/**
+ * Use interlaced DCT.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_INTERLACED_DCT  (1 << 18)
+/**
+ * Force low delay.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_LOW_DELAY       (1 << 19)
+/**
+ * Place global headers in extradata instead of every keyframe.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_GLOBAL_HEADER   (1 << 22)
+/**
+ * Use only bitexact stuff (except (I)DCT).
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_BITEXACT        (1 << 23)
+/* Fx : Flag for H.263+ extra options */
+/**
+ * H.263 advanced intra coding / MPEG-4 AC prediction
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_AC_PRED         (1 << 24)
+/**
+ * interlaced motion estimation
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_INTERLACED_ME   (1 << 29)
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_CLOSED_GOP      (1U << 31)
+
+/**
+ * Allow non spec compliant speedup tricks.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG2_FAST           (1 <<  0)
+/**
+ * Skip bitstream encoding.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG2_NO_OUTPUT      (1 <<  2)
+/**
+ * Place global headers at every keyframe instead of in extradata.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG2_LOCAL_HEADER   (1 <<  3)
+
+/**
+ * timecode is in drop frame format. DEPRECATED!!!!
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG2_DROP_FRAME_TIMECODE (1 << 13)
+
+/**
+ * Input bitstream might be truncated at a packet boundaries
+ * instead of only at frame boundaries.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG2_CHUNKS         (1 << 15)
+/**
+ * Discard cropping information from SPS.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG2_IGNORE_CROP    (1 << 16)
+
+/**
+ * Show all frames before the first keyframe
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG2_SHOW_ALL       (1 << 22)
+/**
+ * Export motion vectors through frame side data
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG2_EXPORT_MVS     (1 << 28)
+/**
+ * Do not skip samples and export skip information as frame side data
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG2_SKIP_MANUAL    (1 << 29)
+/**
+ * Do not reset ASS ReadOrder field on flush (subtitles decoding)
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG2_RO_FLUSH_NOOP  (1 << 30)
+/**
+ * Generate/parse ICC profiles on encode/decode, as appropriate for the type of
+ * file. No effect on codecs which cannot contain embedded ICC profiles, or
+ * when compiled without support for lcms2.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG2_ICC_PROFILES   (1U << 31)
+
+/* Exported side data.
+   These flags can be passed in AVCodecContext.export_side_data before initialization.
+*/
+/**
+ * Export motion vectors through frame side data
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_EXPORT_DATA_MVS         (1 << 0)
+/**
+ * Export encoder Producer Reference Time through packet side data
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_EXPORT_DATA_PRFT        (1 << 1)
+/**
+ * Decoding only.
+ * Export the AVVideoEncParams structure through frame side data.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_EXPORT_DATA_VIDEO_ENC_PARAMS (1 << 2)
+/**
+ * Decoding only.
+ * Do not apply film grain, export it instead.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_EXPORT_DATA_FILM_GRAIN (1 << 3)
+
+/**
+ * The decoder will keep a reference to the frame and may reuse it later.
+ */
+#define AV_GET_BUFFER_FLAG_REF (1 << 0)
+
+/**
+ * The encoder will keep a reference to the packet and may reuse it later.
+ */
+#define AV_GET_ENCODE_BUFFER_FLAG_REF (1 << 0)
+
+struct AVCodecInternal;
+
+/**
+ * main external API structure.
+ * New fields can be added to the end with minor version bumps.
+ * Removal, reordering and changes to existing fields require a major
+ * version bump.
+ * You can use AVOptions (av_opt* / av_set/get*()) to access these fields from user
+ * applications.
+ * The name string for AVOptions options matches the associated command line
+ * parameter name and can be found in libavcodec/options_table.h
+ * The AVOption/command line parameter names differ in some cases from the C
+ * structure field names for historic reasons or brevity.
+ * sizeof(AVCodecContext) must not be used outside libav*.
+ */
+typedef struct AVCodecContext {
+    /**
+     * information on struct for av_log
+     * - set by avcodec_alloc_context3
+     */
+    const AVClass *av_class;
+    int log_level_offset;
+
+    enum AVMediaType codec_type; /* see AVMEDIA_TYPE_xxx */
+    const struct AVCodec  *codec;
+    enum AVCodecID     codec_id; /* see AV_CODEC_ID_xxx */
+
+    /**
+     * fourcc (LSB first, so "ABCD" -> ('D'<<24) + ('C'<<16) + ('B'<<8) + 'A').
+     * This is used to work around some encoder bugs.
+     * A demuxer should set this to what is stored in the field used to identify the codec.
+     * If there are multiple such fields in a container then the demuxer should choose the one
+     * which maximizes the information about the used codec.
+     * If the codec tag field in a container is larger than 32 bits then the demuxer should
+     * remap the longer ID to 32 bits with a table or other structure. Alternatively a new
+     * extra_codec_tag + size could be added but for this a clear advantage must be demonstrated
+     * first.
+     * - encoding: Set by user, if not then the default based on codec_id will be used.
+     * - decoding: Set by user, will be converted to uppercase by libavcodec during init.
+     */
+    unsigned int codec_tag;
+
+    void *priv_data;
+
+    /**
+     * Private context used for internal data.
+     *
+     * Unlike priv_data, this is not codec-specific. It is used in general
+     * libavcodec functions.
+     */
+    struct AVCodecInternal *internal;
+
+    /**
+     * Private data of the user, can be used to carry app specific stuff.
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    void *opaque;
+
+    /**
+     * the average bitrate
+     * - encoding: Set by user; unused for constant quantizer encoding.
+     * - decoding: Set by user, may be overwritten by libavcodec
+     *             if this info is available in the stream
+     */
+    int64_t bit_rate;
+
+    /**
+     * number of bits the bitstream is allowed to diverge from the reference.
+     *           the reference can be CBR (for CBR pass1) or VBR (for pass2)
+     * - encoding: Set by user; unused for constant quantizer encoding.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int bit_rate_tolerance;
+
+    /**
+     * Global quality for codecs which cannot change it per frame.
+     * This should be proportional to MPEG-1/2/4 qscale.
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int global_quality;
+
+    /**
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int compression_level;
+#define FF_COMPRESSION_DEFAULT -1
+
+    /**
+     * AV_CODEC_FLAG_*.
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    int flags;
+
+    /**
+     * AV_CODEC_FLAG2_*
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    int flags2;
+
+    /**
+     * some codecs need / can use extradata like Huffman tables.
+     * MJPEG: Huffman tables
+     * rv10: additional flags
+     * MPEG-4: global headers (they can be in the bitstream or here)
+     * The allocated memory should be AV_INPUT_BUFFER_PADDING_SIZE bytes larger
+     * than extradata_size to avoid problems if it is read with the bitstream reader.
+     * The bytewise contents of extradata must not depend on the architecture or CPU endianness.
+     * Must be allocated with the av_malloc() family of functions.
+     * - encoding: Set/allocated/freed by libavcodec.
+     * - decoding: Set/allocated/freed by user.
+     */
+    uint8_t *extradata;
+    int extradata_size;
+
+    /**
+     * This is the fundamental unit of time (in seconds) in terms
+     * of which frame timestamps are represented. For fixed-fps content,
+     * timebase should be 1/framerate and timestamp increments should be
+     * identically 1.
+     * This often, but not always is the inverse of the frame rate or field rate
+     * for video. 1/time_base is not the average frame rate if the frame rate is not
+     * constant.
+     *
+     * Like containers, elementary streams also can store timestamps, 1/time_base
+     * is the unit in which these timestamps are specified.
+     * As example of such codec time base see ISO/IEC 14496-2:2001(E)
+     * vop_time_increment_resolution and fixed_vop_rate
+     * (fixed_vop_rate == 0 implies that it is different from the framerate)
+     *
+     * - encoding: MUST be set by user.
+     * - decoding: the use of this field for decoding is deprecated.
+     *             Use framerate instead.
+     */
+    AVRational time_base;
+
+    /**
+     * For some codecs, the time base is closer to the field rate than the frame rate.
+     * Most notably, H.264 and MPEG-2 specify time_base as half of frame duration
+     * if no telecine is used ...
+     *
+     * Set to time_base ticks per frame. Default 1, e.g., H.264/MPEG-2 set it to 2.
+     */
+    int ticks_per_frame;
+
+    /**
+     * Codec delay.
+     *
+     * Encoding: Number of frames delay there will be from the encoder input to
+     *           the decoder output. (we assume the decoder matches the spec)
+     * Decoding: Number of frames delay in addition to what a standard decoder
+     *           as specified in the spec would produce.
+     *
+     * Video:
+     *   Number of frames the decoded output will be delayed relative to the
+     *   encoded input.
+     *
+     * Audio:
+     *   For encoding, this field is unused (see initial_padding).
+     *
+     *   For decoding, this is the number of samples the decoder needs to
+     *   output before the decoder's output is valid. When seeking, you should
+     *   start decoding this many samples prior to your desired seek point.
+     *
+     * - encoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     */
+    int delay;
+
+
+    /* video only */
+    /**
+     * picture width / height.
+     *
+     * @note Those fields may not match the values of the last
+     * AVFrame output by avcodec_receive_frame() due frame
+     * reordering.
+     *
+     * - encoding: MUST be set by user.
+     * - decoding: May be set by the user before opening the decoder if known e.g.
+     *             from the container. Some decoders will require the dimensions
+     *             to be set by the caller. During decoding, the decoder may
+     *             overwrite those values as required while parsing the data.
+     */
+    int width, height;
+
+    /**
+     * Bitstream width / height, may be different from width/height e.g. when
+     * the decoded frame is cropped before being output or lowres is enabled.
+     *
+     * @note Those field may not match the value of the last
+     * AVFrame output by avcodec_receive_frame() due frame
+     * reordering.
+     *
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: May be set by the user before opening the decoder if known
+     *             e.g. from the container. During decoding, the decoder may
+     *             overwrite those values as required while parsing the data.
+     */
+    int coded_width, coded_height;
+
+    /**
+     * the number of pictures in a group of pictures, or 0 for intra_only
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int gop_size;
+
+    /**
+     * Pixel format, see AV_PIX_FMT_xxx.
+     * May be set by the demuxer if known from headers.
+     * May be overridden by the decoder if it knows better.
+     *
+     * @note This field may not match the value of the last
+     * AVFrame output by avcodec_receive_frame() due frame
+     * reordering.
+     *
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by user if known, overridden by libavcodec while
+     *             parsing the data.
+     */
+    enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt;
+
+    /**
+     * If non NULL, 'draw_horiz_band' is called by the libavcodec
+     * decoder to draw a horizontal band. It improves cache usage. Not
+     * all codecs can do that. You must check the codec capabilities
+     * beforehand.
+     * When multithreading is used, it may be called from multiple threads
+     * at the same time; threads might draw different parts of the same AVFrame,
+     * or multiple AVFrames, and there is no guarantee that slices will be drawn
+     * in order.
+     * The function is also used by hardware acceleration APIs.
+     * It is called at least once during frame decoding to pass
+     * the data needed for hardware render.
+     * In that mode instead of pixel data, AVFrame points to
+     * a structure specific to the acceleration API. The application
+     * reads the structure and can change some fields to indicate progress
+     * or mark state.
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     * @param height the height of the slice
+     * @param y the y position of the slice
+     * @param type 1->top field, 2->bottom field, 3->frame
+     * @param offset offset into the AVFrame.data from which the slice should be read
+     */
+    void (*draw_horiz_band)(struct AVCodecContext *s,
+                            const AVFrame *src, int offset[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS],
+                            int y, int type, int height);
+
+    /**
+     * Callback to negotiate the pixel format. Decoding only, may be set by the
+     * caller before avcodec_open2().
+     *
+     * Called by some decoders to select the pixel format that will be used for
+     * the output frames. This is mainly used to set up hardware acceleration,
+     * then the provided format list contains the corresponding hwaccel pixel
+     * formats alongside the "software" one. The software pixel format may also
+     * be retrieved from \ref sw_pix_fmt.
+     *
+     * This callback will be called when the coded frame properties (such as
+     * resolution, pixel format, etc.) change and more than one output format is
+     * supported for those new properties. If a hardware pixel format is chosen
+     * and initialization for it fails, the callback may be called again
+     * immediately.
+     *
+     * This callback may be called from different threads if the decoder is
+     * multi-threaded, but not from more than one thread simultaneously.
+     *
+     * @param fmt list of formats which may be used in the current
+     *            configuration, terminated by AV_PIX_FMT_NONE.
+     * @warning Behavior is undefined if the callback returns a value other
+     *          than one of the formats in fmt or AV_PIX_FMT_NONE.
+     * @return the chosen format or AV_PIX_FMT_NONE
+     */
+    enum AVPixelFormat (*get_format)(struct AVCodecContext *s, const enum AVPixelFormat * fmt);
+
+    /**
+     * maximum number of B-frames between non-B-frames
+     * Note: The output will be delayed by max_b_frames+1 relative to the input.
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int max_b_frames;
+
+    /**
+     * qscale factor between IP and B-frames
+     * If > 0 then the last P-frame quantizer will be used (q= lastp_q*factor+offset).
+     * If < 0 then normal ratecontrol will be done (q= -normal_q*factor+offset).
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    float b_quant_factor;
+
+    /**
+     * qscale offset between IP and B-frames
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    float b_quant_offset;
+
+    /**
+     * Size of the frame reordering buffer in the decoder.
+     * For MPEG-2 it is 1 IPB or 0 low delay IP.
+     * - encoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     */
+    int has_b_frames;
+
+    /**
+     * qscale factor between P- and I-frames
+     * If > 0 then the last P-frame quantizer will be used (q = lastp_q * factor + offset).
+     * If < 0 then normal ratecontrol will be done (q= -normal_q*factor+offset).
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    float i_quant_factor;
+
+    /**
+     * qscale offset between P and I-frames
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    float i_quant_offset;
+
+    /**
+     * luminance masking (0-> disabled)
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    float lumi_masking;
+
+    /**
+     * temporary complexity masking (0-> disabled)
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    float temporal_cplx_masking;
+
+    /**
+     * spatial complexity masking (0-> disabled)
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    float spatial_cplx_masking;
+
+    /**
+     * p block masking (0-> disabled)
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    float p_masking;
+
+    /**
+     * darkness masking (0-> disabled)
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    float dark_masking;
+
+    /**
+     * slice count
+     * - encoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     * - decoding: Set by user (or 0).
+     */
+    int slice_count;
+
+    /**
+     * slice offsets in the frame in bytes
+     * - encoding: Set/allocated by libavcodec.
+     * - decoding: Set/allocated by user (or NULL).
+     */
+    int *slice_offset;
+
+    /**
+     * sample aspect ratio (0 if unknown)
+     * That is the width of a pixel divided by the height of the pixel.
+     * Numerator and denominator must be relatively prime and smaller than 256 for some video standards.
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     */
+    AVRational sample_aspect_ratio;
+
+    /**
+     * motion estimation comparison function
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int me_cmp;
+    /**
+     * subpixel motion estimation comparison function
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int me_sub_cmp;
+    /**
+     * macroblock comparison function (not supported yet)
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int mb_cmp;
+    /**
+     * interlaced DCT comparison function
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int ildct_cmp;
+#define FF_CMP_SAD          0
+#define FF_CMP_SSE          1
+#define FF_CMP_SATD         2
+#define FF_CMP_DCT          3
+#define FF_CMP_PSNR         4
+#define FF_CMP_BIT          5
+#define FF_CMP_RD           6
+#define FF_CMP_ZERO         7
+#define FF_CMP_VSAD         8
+#define FF_CMP_VSSE         9
+#define FF_CMP_NSSE         10
+#define FF_CMP_W53          11
+#define FF_CMP_W97          12
+#define FF_CMP_DCTMAX       13
+#define FF_CMP_DCT264       14
+#define FF_CMP_MEDIAN_SAD   15
+#define FF_CMP_CHROMA       256
+
+    /**
+     * ME diamond size & shape
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int dia_size;
+
+    /**
+     * amount of previous MV predictors (2a+1 x 2a+1 square)
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int last_predictor_count;
+
+    /**
+     * motion estimation prepass comparison function
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int me_pre_cmp;
+
+    /**
+     * ME prepass diamond size & shape
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int pre_dia_size;
+
+    /**
+     * subpel ME quality
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int me_subpel_quality;
+
+    /**
+     * maximum motion estimation search range in subpel units
+     * If 0 then no limit.
+     *
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int me_range;
+
+    /**
+     * slice flags
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    int slice_flags;
+#define SLICE_FLAG_CODED_ORDER    0x0001 ///< draw_horiz_band() is called in coded order instead of display
+#define SLICE_FLAG_ALLOW_FIELD    0x0002 ///< allow draw_horiz_band() with field slices (MPEG-2 field pics)
+#define SLICE_FLAG_ALLOW_PLANE    0x0004 ///< allow draw_horiz_band() with 1 component at a time (SVQ1)
+
+    /**
+     * macroblock decision mode
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int mb_decision;
+#define FF_MB_DECISION_SIMPLE 0        ///< uses mb_cmp
+#define FF_MB_DECISION_BITS   1        ///< chooses the one which needs the fewest bits
+#define FF_MB_DECISION_RD     2        ///< rate distortion
+
+    /**
+     * custom intra quantization matrix
+     * Must be allocated with the av_malloc() family of functions, and will be freed in
+     * avcodec_free_context().
+     * - encoding: Set/allocated by user, freed by libavcodec. Can be NULL.
+     * - decoding: Set/allocated/freed by libavcodec.
+     */
+    uint16_t *intra_matrix;
+
+    /**
+     * custom inter quantization matrix
+     * Must be allocated with the av_malloc() family of functions, and will be freed in
+     * avcodec_free_context().
+     * - encoding: Set/allocated by user, freed by libavcodec. Can be NULL.
+     * - decoding: Set/allocated/freed by libavcodec.
+     */
+    uint16_t *inter_matrix;
+
+    /**
+     * precision of the intra DC coefficient - 8
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+     */
+    int intra_dc_precision;
+
+    /**
+     * Number of macroblock rows at the top which are skipped.
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    int skip_top;
+
+    /**
+     * Number of macroblock rows at the bottom which are skipped.
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    int skip_bottom;
+
+    /**
+     * minimum MB Lagrange multiplier
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int mb_lmin;
+
+    /**
+     * maximum MB Lagrange multiplier
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int mb_lmax;
+
+    /**
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int bidir_refine;
+
+    /**
+     * minimum GOP size
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int keyint_min;
+
+    /**
+     * number of reference frames
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by lavc.
+     */
+    int refs;
+
+    /**
+     * Note: Value depends upon the compare function used for fullpel ME.
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int mv0_threshold;
+
+    /**
+     * Chromaticity coordinates of the source primaries.
+     * - encoding: Set by user
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+     */
+    enum AVColorPrimaries color_primaries;
+
+    /**
+     * Color Transfer Characteristic.
+     * - encoding: Set by user
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+     */
+    enum AVColorTransferCharacteristic color_trc;
+
+    /**
+     * YUV colorspace type.
+     * - encoding: Set by user
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+     */
+    enum AVColorSpace colorspace;
+
+    /**
+     * MPEG vs JPEG YUV range.
+     * - encoding: Set by user
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+     */
+    enum AVColorRange color_range;
+
+    /**
+     * This defines the location of chroma samples.
+     * - encoding: Set by user
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+     */
+    enum AVChromaLocation chroma_sample_location;
+
+    /**
+     * Number of slices.
+     * Indicates number of picture subdivisions. Used for parallelized
+     * decoding.
+     * - encoding: Set by user
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int slices;
+
+    /** Field order
+     * - encoding: set by libavcodec
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    enum AVFieldOrder field_order;
+
+    /* audio only */
+    int sample_rate; ///< samples per second
+
+#if FF_API_OLD_CHANNEL_LAYOUT
+    /**
+     * number of audio channels
+     * @deprecated use ch_layout.nb_channels
+     */
+    attribute_deprecated
+    int channels;
+#endif
+
+    /**
+     * audio sample format
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     */
+    enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt;  ///< sample format
+
+    /* The following data should not be initialized. */
+    /**
+     * Number of samples per channel in an audio frame.
+     *
+     * - encoding: set by libavcodec in avcodec_open2(). Each submitted frame
+     *   except the last must contain exactly frame_size samples per channel.
+     *   May be 0 when the codec has AV_CODEC_CAP_VARIABLE_FRAME_SIZE set, then the
+     *   frame size is not restricted.
+     * - decoding: may be set by some decoders to indicate constant frame size
+     */
+    int frame_size;
+
+    /**
+     * Frame counter, set by libavcodec.
+     *
+     * - decoding: total number of frames returned from the decoder so far.
+     * - encoding: total number of frames passed to the encoder so far.
+     *
+     *   @note the counter is not incremented if encoding/decoding resulted in
+     *   an error.
+     */
+    int frame_number;
+
+    /**
+     * number of bytes per packet if constant and known or 0
+     * Used by some WAV based audio codecs.
+     */
+    int block_align;
+
+    /**
+     * Audio cutoff bandwidth (0 means "automatic")
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int cutoff;
+
+#if FF_API_OLD_CHANNEL_LAYOUT
+    /**
+     * Audio channel layout.
+     * - encoding: set by user.
+     * - decoding: set by user, may be overwritten by libavcodec.
+     * @deprecated use ch_layout
+     */
+    attribute_deprecated
+    uint64_t channel_layout;
+
+    /**
+     * Request decoder to use this channel layout if it can (0 for default)
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     * @deprecated use "downmix" codec private option
+     */
+    attribute_deprecated
+    uint64_t request_channel_layout;
+#endif
+
+    /**
+     * Type of service that the audio stream conveys.
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     */
+    enum AVAudioServiceType audio_service_type;
+
+    /**
+     * desired sample format
+     * - encoding: Not used.
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     * Decoder will decode to this format if it can.
+     */
+    enum AVSampleFormat request_sample_fmt;
+
+    /**
+     * This callback is called at the beginning of each frame to get data
+     * buffer(s) for it. There may be one contiguous buffer for all the data or
+     * there may be a buffer per each data plane or anything in between. What
+     * this means is, you may set however many entries in buf[] you feel necessary.
+     * Each buffer must be reference-counted using the AVBuffer API (see description
+     * of buf[] below).
+     *
+     * The following fields will be set in the frame before this callback is
+     * called:
+     * - format
+     * - width, height (video only)
+     * - sample_rate, channel_layout, nb_samples (audio only)
+     * Their values may differ from the corresponding values in
+     * AVCodecContext. This callback must use the frame values, not the codec
+     * context values, to calculate the required buffer size.
+     *
+     * This callback must fill the following fields in the frame:
+     * - data[]
+     * - linesize[]
+     * - extended_data:
+     *   * if the data is planar audio with more than 8 channels, then this
+     *     callback must allocate and fill extended_data to contain all pointers
+     *     to all data planes. data[] must hold as many pointers as it can.
+     *     extended_data must be allocated with av_malloc() and will be freed in
+     *     av_frame_unref().
+     *   * otherwise extended_data must point to data
+     * - buf[] must contain one or more pointers to AVBufferRef structures. Each of
+     *   the frame's data and extended_data pointers must be contained in these. That
+     *   is, one AVBufferRef for each allocated chunk of memory, not necessarily one
+     *   AVBufferRef per data[] entry. See: av_buffer_create(), av_buffer_alloc(),
+     *   and av_buffer_ref().
+     * - extended_buf and nb_extended_buf must be allocated with av_malloc() by
+     *   this callback and filled with the extra buffers if there are more
+     *   buffers than buf[] can hold. extended_buf will be freed in
+     *   av_frame_unref().
+     *
+     * If AV_CODEC_CAP_DR1 is not set then get_buffer2() must call
+     * avcodec_default_get_buffer2() instead of providing buffers allocated by
+     * some other means.
+     *
+     * Each data plane must be aligned to the maximum required by the target
+     * CPU.
+     *
+     * @see avcodec_default_get_buffer2()
+     *
+     * Video:
+     *
+     * If AV_GET_BUFFER_FLAG_REF is set in flags then the frame may be reused
+     * (read and/or written to if it is writable) later by libavcodec.
+     *
+     * avcodec_align_dimensions2() should be used to find the required width and
+     * height, as they normally need to be rounded up to the next multiple of 16.
+     *
+     * Some decoders do not support linesizes changing between frames.
+     *
+     * If frame multithreading is used, this callback may be called from a
+     * different thread, but not from more than one at once. Does not need to be
+     * reentrant.
+     *
+     * @see avcodec_align_dimensions2()
+     *
+     * Audio:
+     *
+     * Decoders request a buffer of a particular size by setting
+     * AVFrame.nb_samples prior to calling get_buffer2(). The decoder may,
+     * however, utilize only part of the buffer by setting AVFrame.nb_samples
+     * to a smaller value in the output frame.
+     *
+     * As a convenience, av_samples_get_buffer_size() and
+     * av_samples_fill_arrays() in libavutil may be used by custom get_buffer2()
+     * functions to find the required data size and to fill data pointers and
+     * linesize. In AVFrame.linesize, only linesize[0] may be set for audio
+     * since all planes must be the same size.
+     *
+     * @see av_samples_get_buffer_size(), av_samples_fill_arrays()
+     *
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec, user can override.
+     */
+    int (*get_buffer2)(struct AVCodecContext *s, AVFrame *frame, int flags);
+
+    /* - encoding parameters */
+    float qcompress;  ///< amount of qscale change between easy & hard scenes (0.0-1.0)
+    float qblur;      ///< amount of qscale smoothing over time (0.0-1.0)
+
+    /**
+     * minimum quantizer
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int qmin;
+
+    /**
+     * maximum quantizer
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int qmax;
+
+    /**
+     * maximum quantizer difference between frames
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int max_qdiff;
+
+    /**
+     * decoder bitstream buffer size
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int rc_buffer_size;
+
+    /**
+     * ratecontrol override, see RcOverride
+     * - encoding: Allocated/set/freed by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int rc_override_count;
+    RcOverride *rc_override;
+
+    /**
+     * maximum bitrate
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by user, may be overwritten by libavcodec.
+     */
+    int64_t rc_max_rate;
+
+    /**
+     * minimum bitrate
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int64_t rc_min_rate;
+
+    /**
+     * Ratecontrol attempt to use, at maximum, <value> of what can be used without an underflow.
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused.
+     */
+    float rc_max_available_vbv_use;
+
+    /**
+     * Ratecontrol attempt to use, at least, <value> times the amount needed to prevent a vbv overflow.
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused.
+     */
+    float rc_min_vbv_overflow_use;
+
+    /**
+     * Number of bits which should be loaded into the rc buffer before decoding starts.
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int rc_initial_buffer_occupancy;
+
+    /**
+     * trellis RD quantization
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int trellis;
+
+    /**
+     * pass1 encoding statistics output buffer
+     * - encoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    char *stats_out;
+
+    /**
+     * pass2 encoding statistics input buffer
+     * Concatenated stuff from stats_out of pass1 should be placed here.
+     * - encoding: Allocated/set/freed by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    char *stats_in;
+
+    /**
+     * Work around bugs in encoders which sometimes cannot be detected automatically.
+     * - encoding: Set by user
+     * - decoding: Set by user
+     */
+    int workaround_bugs;
+#define FF_BUG_AUTODETECT       1  ///< autodetection
+#define FF_BUG_XVID_ILACE       4
+#define FF_BUG_UMP4             8
+#define FF_BUG_NO_PADDING       16
+#define FF_BUG_AMV              32
+#define FF_BUG_QPEL_CHROMA      64
+#define FF_BUG_STD_QPEL         128
+#define FF_BUG_QPEL_CHROMA2     256
+#define FF_BUG_DIRECT_BLOCKSIZE 512
+#define FF_BUG_EDGE             1024
+#define FF_BUG_HPEL_CHROMA      2048
+#define FF_BUG_DC_CLIP          4096
+#define FF_BUG_MS               8192 ///< Work around various bugs in Microsoft's broken decoders.
+#define FF_BUG_TRUNCATED       16384
+#define FF_BUG_IEDGE           32768
+
+    /**
+     * strictly follow the standard (MPEG-4, ...).
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     * Setting this to STRICT or higher means the encoder and decoder will
+     * generally do stupid things, whereas setting it to unofficial or lower
+     * will mean the encoder might produce output that is not supported by all
+     * spec-compliant decoders. Decoders don't differentiate between normal,
+     * unofficial and experimental (that is, they always try to decode things
+     * when they can) unless they are explicitly asked to behave stupidly
+     * (=strictly conform to the specs)
+     * This may only be set to one of the FF_COMPLIANCE_* values in defs.h.
+     */
+    int strict_std_compliance;
+
+    /**
+     * error concealment flags
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    int error_concealment;
+#define FF_EC_GUESS_MVS   1
+#define FF_EC_DEBLOCK     2
+#define FF_EC_FAVOR_INTER 256
+
+    /**
+     * debug
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    int debug;
+#define FF_DEBUG_PICT_INFO   1
+#define FF_DEBUG_RC          2
+#define FF_DEBUG_BITSTREAM   4
+#define FF_DEBUG_MB_TYPE     8
+#define FF_DEBUG_QP          16
+#define FF_DEBUG_DCT_COEFF   0x00000040
+#define FF_DEBUG_SKIP        0x00000080
+#define FF_DEBUG_STARTCODE   0x00000100
+#define FF_DEBUG_ER          0x00000400
+#define FF_DEBUG_MMCO        0x00000800
+#define FF_DEBUG_BUGS        0x00001000
+#define FF_DEBUG_BUFFERS     0x00008000
+#define FF_DEBUG_THREADS     0x00010000
+#define FF_DEBUG_GREEN_MD    0x00800000
+#define FF_DEBUG_NOMC        0x01000000
+
+    /**
+     * Error recognition; may misdetect some more or less valid parts as errors.
+     * This is a bitfield of the AV_EF_* values defined in defs.h.
+     *
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    int err_recognition;
+
+    /**
+     * opaque 64-bit number (generally a PTS) that will be reordered and
+     * output in AVFrame.reordered_opaque
+     * - encoding: Set by libavcodec to the reordered_opaque of the input
+     *             frame corresponding to the last returned packet. Only
+     *             supported by encoders with the
+     *             AV_CODEC_CAP_ENCODER_REORDERED_OPAQUE capability.
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    int64_t reordered_opaque;
+
+    /**
+     * Hardware accelerator in use
+     * - encoding: unused.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+     */
+    const struct AVHWAccel *hwaccel;
+
+    /**
+     * Legacy hardware accelerator context.
+     *
+     * For some hardware acceleration methods, the caller may use this field to
+     * signal hwaccel-specific data to the codec. The struct pointed to by this
+     * pointer is hwaccel-dependent and defined in the respective header. Please
+     * refer to the FFmpeg HW accelerator documentation to know how to fill
+     * this.
+     *
+     * In most cases this field is optional - the necessary information may also
+     * be provided to libavcodec through @ref hw_frames_ctx or @ref
+     * hw_device_ctx (see avcodec_get_hw_config()). However, in some cases it
+     * may be the only method of signalling some (optional) information.
+     *
+     * The struct and its contents are owned by the caller.
+     *
+     * - encoding: May be set by the caller before avcodec_open2(). Must remain
+     *             valid until avcodec_free_context().
+     * - decoding: May be set by the caller in the get_format() callback.
+     *             Must remain valid until the next get_format() call,
+     *             or avcodec_free_context() (whichever comes first).
+     */
+    void *hwaccel_context;
+
+    /**
+     * error
+     * - encoding: Set by libavcodec if flags & AV_CODEC_FLAG_PSNR.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    uint64_t error[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS];
+
+    /**
+     * DCT algorithm, see FF_DCT_* below
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int dct_algo;
+#define FF_DCT_AUTO    0
+#define FF_DCT_FASTINT 1
+#define FF_DCT_INT     2
+#define FF_DCT_MMX     3
+#define FF_DCT_ALTIVEC 5
+#define FF_DCT_FAAN    6
+
+    /**
+     * IDCT algorithm, see FF_IDCT_* below.
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    int idct_algo;
+#define FF_IDCT_AUTO          0
+#define FF_IDCT_INT           1
+#define FF_IDCT_SIMPLE        2
+#define FF_IDCT_SIMPLEMMX     3
+#define FF_IDCT_ARM           7
+#define FF_IDCT_ALTIVEC       8
+#define FF_IDCT_SIMPLEARM     10
+#define FF_IDCT_XVID          14
+#define FF_IDCT_SIMPLEARMV5TE 16
+#define FF_IDCT_SIMPLEARMV6   17
+#define FF_IDCT_FAAN          20
+#define FF_IDCT_SIMPLENEON    22
+#if FF_API_IDCT_NONE
+// formerly used by xvmc
+#define FF_IDCT_NONE          24
+#endif
+#define FF_IDCT_SIMPLEAUTO    128
+
+    /**
+     * bits per sample/pixel from the demuxer (needed for huffyuv).
+     * - encoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+     int bits_per_coded_sample;
+
+    /**
+     * Bits per sample/pixel of internal libavcodec pixel/sample format.
+     * - encoding: set by user.
+     * - decoding: set by libavcodec.
+     */
+    int bits_per_raw_sample;
+
+    /**
+     * low resolution decoding, 1-> 1/2 size, 2->1/4 size
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+     int lowres;
+
+    /**
+     * thread count
+     * is used to decide how many independent tasks should be passed to execute()
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    int thread_count;
+
+    /**
+     * Which multithreading methods to use.
+     * Use of FF_THREAD_FRAME will increase decoding delay by one frame per thread,
+     * so clients which cannot provide future frames should not use it.
+     *
+     * - encoding: Set by user, otherwise the default is used.
+     * - decoding: Set by user, otherwise the default is used.
+     */
+    int thread_type;
+#define FF_THREAD_FRAME   1 ///< Decode more than one frame at once
+#define FF_THREAD_SLICE   2 ///< Decode more than one part of a single frame at once
+
+    /**
+     * Which multithreading methods are in use by the codec.
+     * - encoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     */
+    int active_thread_type;
+
+#if FF_API_THREAD_SAFE_CALLBACKS
+    /**
+     * Set by the client if its custom get_buffer() callback can be called
+     * synchronously from another thread, which allows faster multithreaded decoding.
+     * draw_horiz_band() will be called from other threads regardless of this setting.
+     * Ignored if the default get_buffer() is used.
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     *
+     * @deprecated the custom get_buffer2() callback should always be
+     *   thread-safe. Thread-unsafe get_buffer2() implementations will be
+     *   invalid starting with LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR=60; in other words,
+     *   libavcodec will behave as if this field was always set to 1.
+     *   Callers that want to be forward compatible with future libavcodec
+     *   versions should wrap access to this field in
+     *     `#if LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 60`
+     */
+    attribute_deprecated
+    int thread_safe_callbacks;
+#endif
+
+    /**
+     * The codec may call this to execute several independent things.
+     * It will return only after finishing all tasks.
+     * The user may replace this with some multithreaded implementation,
+     * the default implementation will execute the parts serially.
+     * @param count the number of things to execute
+     * - encoding: Set by libavcodec, user can override.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec, user can override.
+     */
+    int (*execute)(struct AVCodecContext *c, int (*func)(struct AVCodecContext *c2, void *arg), void *arg2, int *ret, int count, int size);
+
+    /**
+     * The codec may call this to execute several independent things.
+     * It will return only after finishing all tasks.
+     * The user may replace this with some multithreaded implementation,
+     * the default implementation will execute the parts serially.
+     * @param c context passed also to func
+     * @param count the number of things to execute
+     * @param arg2 argument passed unchanged to func
+     * @param ret return values of executed functions, must have space for "count" values. May be NULL.
+     * @param func function that will be called count times, with jobnr from 0 to count-1.
+     *             threadnr will be in the range 0 to c->thread_count-1 < MAX_THREADS and so that no
+     *             two instances of func executing at the same time will have the same threadnr.
+     * @return always 0 currently, but code should handle a future improvement where when any call to func
+     *         returns < 0 no further calls to func may be done and < 0 is returned.
+     * - encoding: Set by libavcodec, user can override.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec, user can override.
+     */
+    int (*execute2)(struct AVCodecContext *c, int (*func)(struct AVCodecContext *c2, void *arg, int jobnr, int threadnr), void *arg2, int *ret, int count);
+
+    /**
+     * noise vs. sse weight for the nsse comparison function
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+     int nsse_weight;
+
+    /**
+     * profile
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     */
+     int profile;
+#define FF_PROFILE_UNKNOWN -99
+#define FF_PROFILE_RESERVED -100
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_AAC_MAIN 0
+#define FF_PROFILE_AAC_LOW  1
+#define FF_PROFILE_AAC_SSR  2
+#define FF_PROFILE_AAC_LTP  3
+#define FF_PROFILE_AAC_HE   4
+#define FF_PROFILE_AAC_HE_V2 28
+#define FF_PROFILE_AAC_LD   22
+#define FF_PROFILE_AAC_ELD  38
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG2_AAC_LOW 128
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG2_AAC_HE  131
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_DNXHD         0
+#define FF_PROFILE_DNXHR_LB      1
+#define FF_PROFILE_DNXHR_SQ      2
+#define FF_PROFILE_DNXHR_HQ      3
+#define FF_PROFILE_DNXHR_HQX     4
+#define FF_PROFILE_DNXHR_444     5
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_DTS         20
+#define FF_PROFILE_DTS_ES      30
+#define FF_PROFILE_DTS_96_24   40
+#define FF_PROFILE_DTS_HD_HRA  50
+#define FF_PROFILE_DTS_HD_MA   60
+#define FF_PROFILE_DTS_EXPRESS 70
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG2_422    0
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG2_HIGH   1
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG2_SS     2
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG2_SNR_SCALABLE  3
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG2_MAIN   4
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG2_SIMPLE 5
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_CONSTRAINED  (1<<9)  // 8+1; constraint_set1_flag
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_INTRA        (1<<11) // 8+3; constraint_set3_flag
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_BASELINE             66
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_CONSTRAINED_BASELINE (66|FF_PROFILE_H264_CONSTRAINED)
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_MAIN                 77
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_EXTENDED             88
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_HIGH                 100
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_HIGH_10              110
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_HIGH_10_INTRA        (110|FF_PROFILE_H264_INTRA)
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_MULTIVIEW_HIGH       118
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_HIGH_422             122
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_HIGH_422_INTRA       (122|FF_PROFILE_H264_INTRA)
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_STEREO_HIGH          128
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_HIGH_444             144
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_HIGH_444_PREDICTIVE  244
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_HIGH_444_INTRA       (244|FF_PROFILE_H264_INTRA)
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_CAVLC_444            44
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_VC1_SIMPLE   0
+#define FF_PROFILE_VC1_MAIN     1
+#define FF_PROFILE_VC1_COMPLEX  2
+#define FF_PROFILE_VC1_ADVANCED 3
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_SIMPLE                     0
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_SIMPLE_SCALABLE            1
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_CORE                       2
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_MAIN                       3
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_N_BIT                      4
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_SCALABLE_TEXTURE           5
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_SIMPLE_FACE_ANIMATION      6
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_BASIC_ANIMATED_TEXTURE     7
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_HYBRID                     8
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_ADVANCED_REAL_TIME         9
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_CORE_SCALABLE             10
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_ADVANCED_CODING           11
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_ADVANCED_CORE             12
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_ADVANCED_SCALABLE_TEXTURE 13
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_SIMPLE_STUDIO             14
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_ADVANCED_SIMPLE           15
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_JPEG2000_CSTREAM_RESTRICTION_0   1
+#define FF_PROFILE_JPEG2000_CSTREAM_RESTRICTION_1   2
+#define FF_PROFILE_JPEG2000_CSTREAM_NO_RESTRICTION  32768
+#define FF_PROFILE_JPEG2000_DCINEMA_2K              3
+#define FF_PROFILE_JPEG2000_DCINEMA_4K              4
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_VP9_0                            0
+#define FF_PROFILE_VP9_1                            1
+#define FF_PROFILE_VP9_2                            2
+#define FF_PROFILE_VP9_3                            3
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_HEVC_MAIN                        1
+#define FF_PROFILE_HEVC_MAIN_10                     2
+#define FF_PROFILE_HEVC_MAIN_STILL_PICTURE          3
+#define FF_PROFILE_HEVC_REXT                        4
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_VVC_MAIN_10                      1
+#define FF_PROFILE_VVC_MAIN_10_444                 33
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_AV1_MAIN                         0
+#define FF_PROFILE_AV1_HIGH                         1
+#define FF_PROFILE_AV1_PROFESSIONAL                 2
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_MJPEG_HUFFMAN_BASELINE_DCT            0xc0
+#define FF_PROFILE_MJPEG_HUFFMAN_EXTENDED_SEQUENTIAL_DCT 0xc1
+#define FF_PROFILE_MJPEG_HUFFMAN_PROGRESSIVE_DCT         0xc2
+#define FF_PROFILE_MJPEG_HUFFMAN_LOSSLESS                0xc3
+#define FF_PROFILE_MJPEG_JPEG_LS                         0xf7
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_SBC_MSBC                         1
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_PRORES_PROXY     0
+#define FF_PROFILE_PRORES_LT        1
+#define FF_PROFILE_PRORES_STANDARD  2
+#define FF_PROFILE_PRORES_HQ        3
+#define FF_PROFILE_PRORES_4444      4
+#define FF_PROFILE_PRORES_XQ        5
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_ARIB_PROFILE_A 0
+#define FF_PROFILE_ARIB_PROFILE_C 1
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_KLVA_SYNC 0
+#define FF_PROFILE_KLVA_ASYNC 1
+
+    /**
+     * level
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     */
+     int level;
+#define FF_LEVEL_UNKNOWN -99
+
+    /**
+     * Skip loop filtering for selected frames.
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    enum AVDiscard skip_loop_filter;
+
+    /**
+     * Skip IDCT/dequantization for selected frames.
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    enum AVDiscard skip_idct;
+
+    /**
+     * Skip decoding for selected frames.
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    enum AVDiscard skip_frame;
+
+    /**
+     * Header containing style information for text subtitles.
+     * For SUBTITLE_ASS subtitle type, it should contain the whole ASS
+     * [Script Info] and [V4+ Styles] section, plus the [Events] line and
+     * the Format line following. It shouldn't include any Dialogue line.
+     * - encoding: Set/allocated/freed by user (before avcodec_open2())
+     * - decoding: Set/allocated/freed by libavcodec (by avcodec_open2())
+     */
+    uint8_t *subtitle_header;
+    int subtitle_header_size;
+
+    /**
+     * Audio only. The number of "priming" samples (padding) inserted by the
+     * encoder at the beginning of the audio. I.e. this number of leading
+     * decoded samples must be discarded by the caller to get the original audio
+     * without leading padding.
+     *
+     * - decoding: unused
+     * - encoding: Set by libavcodec. The timestamps on the output packets are
+     *             adjusted by the encoder so that they always refer to the
+     *             first sample of the data actually contained in the packet,
+     *             including any added padding.  E.g. if the timebase is
+     *             1/samplerate and the timestamp of the first input sample is
+     *             0, the timestamp of the first output packet will be
+     *             -initial_padding.
+     */
+    int initial_padding;
+
+    /**
+     * - decoding: For codecs that store a framerate value in the compressed
+     *             bitstream, the decoder may export it here. { 0, 1} when
+     *             unknown.
+     * - encoding: May be used to signal the framerate of CFR content to an
+     *             encoder.
+     */
+    AVRational framerate;
+
+    /**
+     * Nominal unaccelerated pixel format, see AV_PIX_FMT_xxx.
+     * - encoding: unused.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec before calling get_format()
+     */
+    enum AVPixelFormat sw_pix_fmt;
+
+    /**
+     * Timebase in which pkt_dts/pts and AVPacket.dts/pts are.
+     * - encoding unused.
+     * - decoding set by user.
+     */
+    AVRational pkt_timebase;
+
+    /**
+     * AVCodecDescriptor
+     * - encoding: unused.
+     * - decoding: set by libavcodec.
+     */
+    const AVCodecDescriptor *codec_descriptor;
+
+    /**
+     * Current statistics for PTS correction.
+     * - decoding: maintained and used by libavcodec, not intended to be used by user apps
+     * - encoding: unused
+     */
+    int64_t pts_correction_num_faulty_pts; /// Number of incorrect PTS values so far
+    int64_t pts_correction_num_faulty_dts; /// Number of incorrect DTS values so far
+    int64_t pts_correction_last_pts;       /// PTS of the last frame
+    int64_t pts_correction_last_dts;       /// DTS of the last frame
+
+    /**
+     * Character encoding of the input subtitles file.
+     * - decoding: set by user
+     * - encoding: unused
+     */
+    char *sub_charenc;
+
+    /**
+     * Subtitles character encoding mode. Formats or codecs might be adjusting
+     * this setting (if they are doing the conversion themselves for instance).
+     * - decoding: set by libavcodec
+     * - encoding: unused
+     */
+    int sub_charenc_mode;
+#define FF_SUB_CHARENC_MODE_DO_NOTHING  -1  ///< do nothing (demuxer outputs a stream supposed to be already in UTF-8, or the codec is bitmap for instance)
+#define FF_SUB_CHARENC_MODE_AUTOMATIC    0  ///< libavcodec will select the mode itself
+#define FF_SUB_CHARENC_MODE_PRE_DECODER  1  ///< the AVPacket data needs to be recoded to UTF-8 before being fed to the decoder, requires iconv
+#define FF_SUB_CHARENC_MODE_IGNORE       2  ///< neither convert the subtitles, nor check them for valid UTF-8
+
+    /**
+     * Skip processing alpha if supported by codec.
+     * Note that if the format uses pre-multiplied alpha (common with VP6,
+     * and recommended due to better video quality/compression)
+     * the image will look as if alpha-blended onto a black background.
+     * However for formats that do not use pre-multiplied alpha
+     * there might be serious artefacts (though e.g. libswscale currently
+     * assumes pre-multiplied alpha anyway).
+     *
+     * - decoding: set by user
+     * - encoding: unused
+     */
+    int skip_alpha;
+
+    /**
+     * Number of samples to skip after a discontinuity
+     * - decoding: unused
+     * - encoding: set by libavcodec
+     */
+    int seek_preroll;
+
+#if FF_API_DEBUG_MV
+    /**
+     * @deprecated unused
+     */
+    attribute_deprecated
+    int debug_mv;
+#define FF_DEBUG_VIS_MV_P_FOR  0x00000001 //visualize forward predicted MVs of P frames
+#define FF_DEBUG_VIS_MV_B_FOR  0x00000002 //visualize forward predicted MVs of B frames
+#define FF_DEBUG_VIS_MV_B_BACK 0x00000004 //visualize backward predicted MVs of B frames
+#endif
+
+    /**
+     * custom intra quantization matrix
+     * - encoding: Set by user, can be NULL.
+     * - decoding: unused.
+     */
+    uint16_t *chroma_intra_matrix;
+
+    /**
+     * dump format separator.
+     * can be ", " or "\n      " or anything else
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    uint8_t *dump_separator;
+
+    /**
+     * ',' separated list of allowed decoders.
+     * If NULL then all are allowed
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: set by user
+     */
+    char *codec_whitelist;
+
+    /**
+     * Properties of the stream that gets decoded
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: set by libavcodec
+     */
+    unsigned properties;
+#define FF_CODEC_PROPERTY_LOSSLESS        0x00000001
+#define FF_CODEC_PROPERTY_CLOSED_CAPTIONS 0x00000002
+#define FF_CODEC_PROPERTY_FILM_GRAIN      0x00000004
+
+    /**
+     * Additional data associated with the entire coded stream.
+     *
+     * - decoding: unused
+     * - encoding: may be set by libavcodec after avcodec_open2().
+     */
+    AVPacketSideData *coded_side_data;
+    int            nb_coded_side_data;
+
+    /**
+     * A reference to the AVHWFramesContext describing the input (for encoding)
+     * or output (decoding) frames. The reference is set by the caller and
+     * afterwards owned (and freed) by libavcodec - it should never be read by
+     * the caller after being set.
+     *
+     * - decoding: This field should be set by the caller from the get_format()
+     *             callback. The previous reference (if any) will always be
+     *             unreffed by libavcodec before the get_format() call.
+     *
+     *             If the default get_buffer2() is used with a hwaccel pixel
+     *             format, then this AVHWFramesContext will be used for
+     *             allocating the frame buffers.
+     *
+     * - encoding: For hardware encoders configured to use a hwaccel pixel
+     *             format, this field should be set by the caller to a reference
+     *             to the AVHWFramesContext describing input frames.
+     *             AVHWFramesContext.format must be equal to
+     *             AVCodecContext.pix_fmt.
+     *
+     *             This field should be set before avcodec_open2() is called.
+     */
+    AVBufferRef *hw_frames_ctx;
+
+#if FF_API_SUB_TEXT_FORMAT
+    /**
+     * @deprecated unused
+     */
+    attribute_deprecated
+    int sub_text_format;
+#define FF_SUB_TEXT_FMT_ASS              0
+#endif
+
+    /**
+     * Audio only. The amount of padding (in samples) appended by the encoder to
+     * the end of the audio. I.e. this number of decoded samples must be
+     * discarded by the caller from the end of the stream to get the original
+     * audio without any trailing padding.
+     *
+     * - decoding: unused
+     * - encoding: unused
+     */
+    int trailing_padding;
+
+    /**
+     * The number of pixels per image to maximally accept.
+     *
+     * - decoding: set by user
+     * - encoding: set by user
+     */
+    int64_t max_pixels;
+
+    /**
+     * A reference to the AVHWDeviceContext describing the device which will
+     * be used by a hardware encoder/decoder.  The reference is set by the
+     * caller and afterwards owned (and freed) by libavcodec.
+     *
+     * This should be used if either the codec device does not require
+     * hardware frames or any that are used are to be allocated internally by
+     * libavcodec.  If the user wishes to supply any of the frames used as
+     * encoder input or decoder output then hw_frames_ctx should be used
+     * instead.  When hw_frames_ctx is set in get_format() for a decoder, this
+     * field will be ignored while decoding the associated stream segment, but
+     * may again be used on a following one after another get_format() call.
+     *
+     * For both encoders and decoders this field should be set before
+     * avcodec_open2() is called and must not be written to thereafter.
+     *
+     * Note that some decoders may require this field to be set initially in
+     * order to support hw_frames_ctx at all - in that case, all frames
+     * contexts used must be created on the same device.
+     */
+    AVBufferRef *hw_device_ctx;
+
+    /**
+     * Bit set of AV_HWACCEL_FLAG_* flags, which affect hardware accelerated
+     * decoding (if active).
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user (either before avcodec_open2(), or in the
+     *             AVCodecContext.get_format callback)
+     */
+    int hwaccel_flags;
+
+    /**
+     * Video decoding only. Certain video codecs support cropping, meaning that
+     * only a sub-rectangle of the decoded frame is intended for display.  This
+     * option controls how cropping is handled by libavcodec.
+     *
+     * When set to 1 (the default), libavcodec will apply cropping internally.
+     * I.e. it will modify the output frame width/height fields and offset the
+     * data pointers (only by as much as possible while preserving alignment, or
+     * by the full amount if the AV_CODEC_FLAG_UNALIGNED flag is set) so that
+     * the frames output by the decoder refer only to the cropped area. The
+     * crop_* fields of the output frames will be zero.
+     *
+     * When set to 0, the width/height fields of the output frames will be set
+     * to the coded dimensions and the crop_* fields will describe the cropping
+     * rectangle. Applying the cropping is left to the caller.
+     *
+     * @warning When hardware acceleration with opaque output frames is used,
+     * libavcodec is unable to apply cropping from the top/left border.
+     *
+     * @note when this option is set to zero, the width/height fields of the
+     * AVCodecContext and output AVFrames have different meanings. The codec
+     * context fields store display dimensions (with the coded dimensions in
+     * coded_width/height), while the frame fields store the coded dimensions
+     * (with the display dimensions being determined by the crop_* fields).
+     */
+    int apply_cropping;
+
+    /*
+     * Video decoding only.  Sets the number of extra hardware frames which
+     * the decoder will allocate for use by the caller.  This must be set
+     * before avcodec_open2() is called.
+     *
+     * Some hardware decoders require all frames that they will use for
+     * output to be defined in advance before decoding starts.  For such
+     * decoders, the hardware frame pool must therefore be of a fixed size.
+     * The extra frames set here are on top of any number that the decoder
+     * needs internally in order to operate normally (for example, frames
+     * used as reference pictures).
+     */
+    int extra_hw_frames;
+
+    /**
+     * The percentage of damaged samples to discard a frame.
+     *
+     * - decoding: set by user
+     * - encoding: unused
+     */
+    int discard_damaged_percentage;
+
+    /**
+     * The number of samples per frame to maximally accept.
+     *
+     * - decoding: set by user
+     * - encoding: set by user
+     */
+    int64_t max_samples;
+
+    /**
+     * Bit set of AV_CODEC_EXPORT_DATA_* flags, which affects the kind of
+     * metadata exported in frame, packet, or coded stream side data by
+     * decoders and encoders.
+     *
+     * - decoding: set by user
+     * - encoding: set by user
+     */
+    int export_side_data;
+
+    /**
+     * This callback is called at the beginning of each packet to get a data
+     * buffer for it.
+     *
+     * The following field will be set in the packet before this callback is
+     * called:
+     * - size
+     * This callback must use the above value to calculate the required buffer size,
+     * which must padded by at least AV_INPUT_BUFFER_PADDING_SIZE bytes.
+     *
+     * In some specific cases, the encoder may not use the entire buffer allocated by this
+     * callback. This will be reflected in the size value in the packet once returned by
+     * avcodec_receive_packet().
+     *
+     * This callback must fill the following fields in the packet:
+     * - data: alignment requirements for AVPacket apply, if any. Some architectures and
+     *   encoders may benefit from having aligned data.
+     * - buf: must contain a pointer to an AVBufferRef structure. The packet's
+     *   data pointer must be contained in it. See: av_buffer_create(), av_buffer_alloc(),
+     *   and av_buffer_ref().
+     *
+     * If AV_CODEC_CAP_DR1 is not set then get_encode_buffer() must call
+     * avcodec_default_get_encode_buffer() instead of providing a buffer allocated by
+     * some other means.
+     *
+     * The flags field may contain a combination of AV_GET_ENCODE_BUFFER_FLAG_ flags.
+     * They may be used for example to hint what use the buffer may get after being
+     * created.
+     * Implementations of this callback may ignore flags they don't understand.
+     * If AV_GET_ENCODE_BUFFER_FLAG_REF is set in flags then the packet may be reused
+     * (read and/or written to if it is writable) later by libavcodec.
+     *
+     * This callback must be thread-safe, as when frame threading is used, it may
+     * be called from multiple threads simultaneously.
+     *
+     * @see avcodec_default_get_encode_buffer()
+     *
+     * - encoding: Set by libavcodec, user can override.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int (*get_encode_buffer)(struct AVCodecContext *s, AVPacket *pkt, int flags);
+
+    /**
+     * Audio channel layout.
+     * - encoding: must be set by the caller, to one of AVCodec.ch_layouts.
+     * - decoding: may be set by the caller if known e.g. from the container.
+     *             The decoder can then override during decoding as needed.
+     */
+    AVChannelLayout ch_layout;
+} AVCodecContext;
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_hwaccel AVHWAccel
+ *
+ * @note  Nothing in this structure should be accessed by the user.  At some
+ *        point in future it will not be externally visible at all.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+typedef struct AVHWAccel {
+    /**
+     * Name of the hardware accelerated codec.
+     * The name is globally unique among encoders and among decoders (but an
+     * encoder and a decoder can share the same name).
+     */
+    const char *name;
+
+    /**
+     * Type of codec implemented by the hardware accelerator.
+     *
+     * See AVMEDIA_TYPE_xxx
+     */
+    enum AVMediaType type;
+
+    /**
+     * Codec implemented by the hardware accelerator.
+     *
+     * See AV_CODEC_ID_xxx
+     */
+    enum AVCodecID id;
+
+    /**
+     * Supported pixel format.
+     *
+     * Only hardware accelerated formats are supported here.
+     */
+    enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt;
+
+    /**
+     * Hardware accelerated codec capabilities.
+     * see AV_HWACCEL_CODEC_CAP_*
+     */
+    int capabilities;
+
+    /*****************************************************************
+     * No fields below this line are part of the public API. They
+     * may not be used outside of libavcodec and can be changed and
+     * removed at will.
+     * New public fields should be added right above.
+     *****************************************************************
+     */
+
+    /**
+     * Allocate a custom buffer
+     */
+    int (*alloc_frame)(AVCodecContext *avctx, AVFrame *frame);
+
+    /**
+     * Called at the beginning of each frame or field picture.
+     *
+     * Meaningful frame information (codec specific) is guaranteed to
+     * be parsed at this point. This function is mandatory.
+     *
+     * Note that buf can be NULL along with buf_size set to 0.
+     * Otherwise, this means the whole frame is available at this point.
+     *
+     * @param avctx the codec context
+     * @param buf the frame data buffer base
+     * @param buf_size the size of the frame in bytes
+     * @return zero if successful, a negative value otherwise
+     */
+    int (*start_frame)(AVCodecContext *avctx, const uint8_t *buf, uint32_t buf_size);
+
+    /**
+     * Callback for parameter data (SPS/PPS/VPS etc).
+     *
+     * Useful for hardware decoders which keep persistent state about the
+     * video parameters, and need to receive any changes to update that state.
+     *
+     * @param avctx the codec context
+     * @param type the nal unit type
+     * @param buf the nal unit data buffer
+     * @param buf_size the size of the nal unit in bytes
+     * @return zero if successful, a negative value otherwise
+     */
+    int (*decode_params)(AVCodecContext *avctx, int type, const uint8_t *buf, uint32_t buf_size);
+
+    /**
+     * Callback for each slice.
+     *
+     * Meaningful slice information (codec specific) is guaranteed to
+     * be parsed at this point. This function is mandatory.
+     *
+     * @param avctx the codec context
+     * @param buf the slice data buffer base
+     * @param buf_size the size of the slice in bytes
+     * @return zero if successful, a negative value otherwise
+     */
+    int (*decode_slice)(AVCodecContext *avctx, const uint8_t *buf, uint32_t buf_size);
+
+    /**
+     * Called at the end of each frame or field picture.
+     *
+     * The whole picture is parsed at this point and can now be sent
+     * to the hardware accelerator. This function is mandatory.
+     *
+     * @param avctx the codec context
+     * @return zero if successful, a negative value otherwise
+     */
+    int (*end_frame)(AVCodecContext *avctx);
+
+    /**
+     * Size of per-frame hardware accelerator private data.
+     *
+     * Private data is allocated with av_mallocz() before
+     * AVCodecContext.get_buffer() and deallocated after
+     * AVCodecContext.release_buffer().
+     */
+    int frame_priv_data_size;
+
+    /**
+     * Initialize the hwaccel private data.
+     *
+     * This will be called from ff_get_format(), after hwaccel and
+     * hwaccel_context are set and the hwaccel private data in AVCodecInternal
+     * is allocated.
+     */
+    int (*init)(AVCodecContext *avctx);
+
+    /**
+     * Uninitialize the hwaccel private data.
+     *
+     * This will be called from get_format() or avcodec_close(), after hwaccel
+     * and hwaccel_context are already uninitialized.
+     */
+    int (*uninit)(AVCodecContext *avctx);
+
+    /**
+     * Size of the private data to allocate in
+     * AVCodecInternal.hwaccel_priv_data.
+     */
+    int priv_data_size;
+
+    /**
+     * Internal hwaccel capabilities.
+     */
+    int caps_internal;
+
+    /**
+     * Fill the given hw_frames context with current codec parameters. Called
+     * from get_format. Refer to avcodec_get_hw_frames_parameters() for
+     * details.
+     *
+     * This CAN be called before AVHWAccel.init is called, and you must assume
+     * that avctx->hwaccel_priv_data is invalid.
+     */
+    int (*frame_params)(AVCodecContext *avctx, AVBufferRef *hw_frames_ctx);
+} AVHWAccel;
+
+/**
+ * HWAccel is experimental and is thus avoided in favor of non experimental
+ * codecs
+ */
+#define AV_HWACCEL_CODEC_CAP_EXPERIMENTAL 0x0200
+
+/**
+ * Hardware acceleration should be used for decoding even if the codec level
+ * used is unknown or higher than the maximum supported level reported by the
+ * hardware driver.
+ *
+ * It's generally a good idea to pass this flag unless you have a specific
+ * reason not to, as hardware tends to under-report supported levels.
+ */
+#define AV_HWACCEL_FLAG_IGNORE_LEVEL (1 << 0)
+
+/**
+ * Hardware acceleration can output YUV pixel formats with a different chroma
+ * sampling than 4:2:0 and/or other than 8 bits per component.
+ */
+#define AV_HWACCEL_FLAG_ALLOW_HIGH_DEPTH (1 << 1)
+
+/**
+ * Hardware acceleration should still be attempted for decoding when the
+ * codec profile does not match the reported capabilities of the hardware.
+ *
+ * For example, this can be used to try to decode baseline profile H.264
+ * streams in hardware - it will often succeed, because many streams marked
+ * as baseline profile actually conform to constrained baseline profile.
+ *
+ * @warning If the stream is actually not supported then the behaviour is
+ *          undefined, and may include returning entirely incorrect output
+ *          while indicating success.
+ */
+#define AV_HWACCEL_FLAG_ALLOW_PROFILE_MISMATCH (1 << 2)
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+enum AVSubtitleType {
+    SUBTITLE_NONE,
+
+    SUBTITLE_BITMAP,                ///< A bitmap, pict will be set
+
+    /**
+     * Plain text, the text field must be set by the decoder and is
+     * authoritative. ass and pict fields may contain approximations.
+     */
+    SUBTITLE_TEXT,
+
+    /**
+     * Formatted text, the ass field must be set by the decoder and is
+     * authoritative. pict and text fields may contain approximations.
+     */
+    SUBTITLE_ASS,
+};
+
+#define AV_SUBTITLE_FLAG_FORCED 0x00000001
+
+typedef struct AVSubtitleRect {
+    int x;         ///< top left corner  of pict, undefined when pict is not set
+    int y;         ///< top left corner  of pict, undefined when pict is not set
+    int w;         ///< width            of pict, undefined when pict is not set
+    int h;         ///< height           of pict, undefined when pict is not set
+    int nb_colors; ///< number of colors in pict, undefined when pict is not set
+
+    /**
+     * data+linesize for the bitmap of this subtitle.
+     * Can be set for text/ass as well once they are rendered.
+     */
+    uint8_t *data[4];
+    int linesize[4];
+
+    enum AVSubtitleType type;
+
+    char *text;                     ///< 0 terminated plain UTF-8 text
+
+    /**
+     * 0 terminated ASS/SSA compatible event line.
+     * The presentation of this is unaffected by the other values in this
+     * struct.
+     */
+    char *ass;
+
+    int flags;
+} AVSubtitleRect;
+
+typedef struct AVSubtitle {
+    uint16_t format; /* 0 = graphics */
+    uint32_t start_display_time; /* relative to packet pts, in ms */
+    uint32_t end_display_time; /* relative to packet pts, in ms */
+    unsigned num_rects;
+    AVSubtitleRect **rects;
+    int64_t pts;    ///< Same as packet pts, in AV_TIME_BASE
+} AVSubtitle;
+
+/**
+ * Return the LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_INT constant.
+ */
+unsigned avcodec_version(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libavcodec build-time configuration.
+ */
+const char *avcodec_configuration(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libavcodec license.
+ */
+const char *avcodec_license(void);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVCodecContext and set its fields to default values. The
+ * resulting struct should be freed with avcodec_free_context().
+ *
+ * @param codec if non-NULL, allocate private data and initialize defaults
+ *              for the given codec. It is illegal to then call avcodec_open2()
+ *              with a different codec.
+ *              If NULL, then the codec-specific defaults won't be initialized,
+ *              which may result in suboptimal default settings (this is
+ *              important mainly for encoders, e.g. libx264).
+ *
+ * @return An AVCodecContext filled with default values or NULL on failure.
+ */
+AVCodecContext *avcodec_alloc_context3(const AVCodec *codec);
+
+/**
+ * Free the codec context and everything associated with it and write NULL to
+ * the provided pointer.
+ */
+void avcodec_free_context(AVCodecContext **avctx);
+
+/**
+ * Get the AVClass for AVCodecContext. It can be used in combination with
+ * AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ for examining options.
+ *
+ * @see av_opt_find().
+ */
+const AVClass *avcodec_get_class(void);
+
+#if FF_API_GET_FRAME_CLASS
+/**
+ * @deprecated This function should not be used.
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+const AVClass *avcodec_get_frame_class(void);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Get the AVClass for AVSubtitleRect. It can be used in combination with
+ * AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ for examining options.
+ *
+ * @see av_opt_find().
+ */
+const AVClass *avcodec_get_subtitle_rect_class(void);
+
+/**
+ * Fill the parameters struct based on the values from the supplied codec
+ * context. Any allocated fields in par are freed and replaced with duplicates
+ * of the corresponding fields in codec.
+ *
+ * @return >= 0 on success, a negative AVERROR code on failure
+ */
+int avcodec_parameters_from_context(AVCodecParameters *par,
+                                    const AVCodecContext *codec);
+
+/**
+ * Fill the codec context based on the values from the supplied codec
+ * parameters. Any allocated fields in codec that have a corresponding field in
+ * par are freed and replaced with duplicates of the corresponding field in par.
+ * Fields in codec that do not have a counterpart in par are not touched.
+ *
+ * @return >= 0 on success, a negative AVERROR code on failure.
+ */
+int avcodec_parameters_to_context(AVCodecContext *codec,
+                                  const AVCodecParameters *par);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize the AVCodecContext to use the given AVCodec. Prior to using this
+ * function the context has to be allocated with avcodec_alloc_context3().
+ *
+ * The functions avcodec_find_decoder_by_name(), avcodec_find_encoder_by_name(),
+ * avcodec_find_decoder() and avcodec_find_encoder() provide an easy way for
+ * retrieving a codec.
+ *
+ * @note Always call this function before using decoding routines (such as
+ * @ref avcodec_receive_frame()).
+ *
+ * @code
+ * av_dict_set(&opts, "b", "2.5M", 0);
+ * codec = avcodec_find_decoder(AV_CODEC_ID_H264);
+ * if (!codec)
+ *     exit(1);
+ *
+ * context = avcodec_alloc_context3(codec);
+ *
+ * if (avcodec_open2(context, codec, opts) < 0)
+ *     exit(1);
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * @param avctx The context to initialize.
+ * @param codec The codec to open this context for. If a non-NULL codec has been
+ *              previously passed to avcodec_alloc_context3() or
+ *              for this context, then this parameter MUST be either NULL or
+ *              equal to the previously passed codec.
+ * @param options A dictionary filled with AVCodecContext and codec-private options.
+ *                On return this object will be filled with options that were not found.
+ *
+ * @return zero on success, a negative value on error
+ * @see avcodec_alloc_context3(), avcodec_find_decoder(), avcodec_find_encoder(),
+ *      av_dict_set(), av_opt_find().
+ */
+int avcodec_open2(AVCodecContext *avctx, const AVCodec *codec, AVDictionary **options);
+
+/**
+ * Close a given AVCodecContext and free all the data associated with it
+ * (but not the AVCodecContext itself).
+ *
+ * Calling this function on an AVCodecContext that hasn't been opened will free
+ * the codec-specific data allocated in avcodec_alloc_context3() with a non-NULL
+ * codec. Subsequent calls will do nothing.
+ *
+ * @note Do not use this function. Use avcodec_free_context() to destroy a
+ * codec context (either open or closed). Opening and closing a codec context
+ * multiple times is not supported anymore -- use multiple codec contexts
+ * instead.
+ */
+int avcodec_close(AVCodecContext *avctx);
+
+/**
+ * Free all allocated data in the given subtitle struct.
+ *
+ * @param sub AVSubtitle to free.
+ */
+void avsubtitle_free(AVSubtitle *sub);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavc_decoding
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * The default callback for AVCodecContext.get_buffer2(). It is made public so
+ * it can be called by custom get_buffer2() implementations for decoders without
+ * AV_CODEC_CAP_DR1 set.
+ */
+int avcodec_default_get_buffer2(AVCodecContext *s, AVFrame *frame, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * The default callback for AVCodecContext.get_encode_buffer(). It is made public so
+ * it can be called by custom get_encode_buffer() implementations for encoders without
+ * AV_CODEC_CAP_DR1 set.
+ */
+int avcodec_default_get_encode_buffer(AVCodecContext *s, AVPacket *pkt, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Modify width and height values so that they will result in a memory
+ * buffer that is acceptable for the codec if you do not use any horizontal
+ * padding.
+ *
+ * May only be used if a codec with AV_CODEC_CAP_DR1 has been opened.
+ */
+void avcodec_align_dimensions(AVCodecContext *s, int *width, int *height);
+
+/**
+ * Modify width and height values so that they will result in a memory
+ * buffer that is acceptable for the codec if you also ensure that all
+ * line sizes are a multiple of the respective linesize_align[i].
+ *
+ * May only be used if a codec with AV_CODEC_CAP_DR1 has been opened.
+ */
+void avcodec_align_dimensions2(AVCodecContext *s, int *width, int *height,
+                               int linesize_align[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS]);
+
+#ifdef FF_API_AVCODEC_CHROMA_POS
+/**
+ * Converts AVChromaLocation to swscale x/y chroma position.
+ *
+ * The positions represent the chroma (0,0) position in a coordinates system
+ * with luma (0,0) representing the origin and luma(1,1) representing 256,256
+ *
+ * @param xpos  horizontal chroma sample position
+ * @param ypos  vertical   chroma sample position
+ * @deprecated Use av_chroma_location_enum_to_pos() instead.
+ */
+ attribute_deprecated
+int avcodec_enum_to_chroma_pos(int *xpos, int *ypos, enum AVChromaLocation pos);
+
+/**
+ * Converts swscale x/y chroma position to AVChromaLocation.
+ *
+ * The positions represent the chroma (0,0) position in a coordinates system
+ * with luma (0,0) representing the origin and luma(1,1) representing 256,256
+ *
+ * @param xpos  horizontal chroma sample position
+ * @param ypos  vertical   chroma sample position
+ * @deprecated Use av_chroma_location_pos_to_enum() instead.
+ */
+ attribute_deprecated
+enum AVChromaLocation avcodec_chroma_pos_to_enum(int xpos, int ypos);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Decode a subtitle message.
+ * Return a negative value on error, otherwise return the number of bytes used.
+ * If no subtitle could be decompressed, got_sub_ptr is zero.
+ * Otherwise, the subtitle is stored in *sub.
+ * Note that AV_CODEC_CAP_DR1 is not available for subtitle codecs. This is for
+ * simplicity, because the performance difference is expected to be negligible
+ * and reusing a get_buffer written for video codecs would probably perform badly
+ * due to a potentially very different allocation pattern.
+ *
+ * Some decoders (those marked with AV_CODEC_CAP_DELAY) have a delay between input
+ * and output. This means that for some packets they will not immediately
+ * produce decoded output and need to be flushed at the end of decoding to get
+ * all the decoded data. Flushing is done by calling this function with packets
+ * with avpkt->data set to NULL and avpkt->size set to 0 until it stops
+ * returning subtitles. It is safe to flush even those decoders that are not
+ * marked with AV_CODEC_CAP_DELAY, then no subtitles will be returned.
+ *
+ * @note The AVCodecContext MUST have been opened with @ref avcodec_open2()
+ * before packets may be fed to the decoder.
+ *
+ * @param avctx the codec context
+ * @param[out] sub The preallocated AVSubtitle in which the decoded subtitle will be stored,
+ *                 must be freed with avsubtitle_free if *got_sub_ptr is set.
+ * @param[in,out] got_sub_ptr Zero if no subtitle could be decompressed, otherwise, it is nonzero.
+ * @param[in] avpkt The input AVPacket containing the input buffer.
+ */
+int avcodec_decode_subtitle2(AVCodecContext *avctx, AVSubtitle *sub,
+                            int *got_sub_ptr,
+                            AVPacket *avpkt);
+
+/**
+ * Supply raw packet data as input to a decoder.
+ *
+ * Internally, this call will copy relevant AVCodecContext fields, which can
+ * influence decoding per-packet, and apply them when the packet is actually
+ * decoded. (For example AVCodecContext.skip_frame, which might direct the
+ * decoder to drop the frame contained by the packet sent with this function.)
+ *
+ * @warning The input buffer, avpkt->data must be AV_INPUT_BUFFER_PADDING_SIZE
+ *          larger than the actual read bytes because some optimized bitstream
+ *          readers read 32 or 64 bits at once and could read over the end.
+ *
+ * @note The AVCodecContext MUST have been opened with @ref avcodec_open2()
+ *       before packets may be fed to the decoder.
+ *
+ * @param avctx codec context
+ * @param[in] avpkt The input AVPacket. Usually, this will be a single video
+ *                  frame, or several complete audio frames.
+ *                  Ownership of the packet remains with the caller, and the
+ *                  decoder will not write to the packet. The decoder may create
+ *                  a reference to the packet data (or copy it if the packet is
+ *                  not reference-counted).
+ *                  Unlike with older APIs, the packet is always fully consumed,
+ *                  and if it contains multiple frames (e.g. some audio codecs),
+ *                  will require you to call avcodec_receive_frame() multiple
+ *                  times afterwards before you can send a new packet.
+ *                  It can be NULL (or an AVPacket with data set to NULL and
+ *                  size set to 0); in this case, it is considered a flush
+ *                  packet, which signals the end of the stream. Sending the
+ *                  first flush packet will return success. Subsequent ones are
+ *                  unnecessary and will return AVERROR_EOF. If the decoder
+ *                  still has frames buffered, it will return them after sending
+ *                  a flush packet.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, otherwise negative error code:
+ *      AVERROR(EAGAIN):   input is not accepted in the current state - user
+ *                         must read output with avcodec_receive_frame() (once
+ *                         all output is read, the packet should be resent, and
+ *                         the call will not fail with EAGAIN).
+ *      AVERROR_EOF:       the decoder has been flushed, and no new packets can
+ *                         be sent to it (also returned if more than 1 flush
+ *                         packet is sent)
+ *      AVERROR(EINVAL):   codec not opened, it is an encoder, or requires flush
+ *      AVERROR(ENOMEM):   failed to add packet to internal queue, or similar
+ *      other errors: legitimate decoding errors
+ */
+int avcodec_send_packet(AVCodecContext *avctx, const AVPacket *avpkt);
+
+/**
+ * Return decoded output data from a decoder or encoder (when the
+ * AV_CODEC_FLAG_RECON_FRAME flag is used).
+ *
+ * @param avctx codec context
+ * @param frame This will be set to a reference-counted video or audio
+ *              frame (depending on the decoder type) allocated by the
+ *              codec. Note that the function will always call
+ *              av_frame_unref(frame) before doing anything else.
+ *
+ * @return
+ *      0:                 success, a frame was returned
+ *      AVERROR(EAGAIN):   output is not available in this state - user must try
+ *                         to send new input
+ *      AVERROR_EOF:       the codec has been fully flushed, and there will be
+ *                         no more output frames
+ *      AVERROR(EINVAL):   codec not opened, or it is an encoder without
+ *                         the AV_CODEC_FLAG_RECON_FRAME flag enabled
+ *      AVERROR_INPUT_CHANGED:   current decoded frame has changed parameters
+ *                               with respect to first decoded frame. Applicable
+ *                               when flag AV_CODEC_FLAG_DROPCHANGED is set.
+ *      other negative values: legitimate decoding errors
+ */
+int avcodec_receive_frame(AVCodecContext *avctx, AVFrame *frame);
+
+/**
+ * Supply a raw video or audio frame to the encoder. Use avcodec_receive_packet()
+ * to retrieve buffered output packets.
+ *
+ * @param avctx     codec context
+ * @param[in] frame AVFrame containing the raw audio or video frame to be encoded.
+ *                  Ownership of the frame remains with the caller, and the
+ *                  encoder will not write to the frame. The encoder may create
+ *                  a reference to the frame data (or copy it if the frame is
+ *                  not reference-counted).
+ *                  It can be NULL, in which case it is considered a flush
+ *                  packet.  This signals the end of the stream. If the encoder
+ *                  still has packets buffered, it will return them after this
+ *                  call. Once flushing mode has been entered, additional flush
+ *                  packets are ignored, and sending frames will return
+ *                  AVERROR_EOF.
+ *
+ *                  For audio:
+ *                  If AV_CODEC_CAP_VARIABLE_FRAME_SIZE is set, then each frame
+ *                  can have any number of samples.
+ *                  If it is not set, frame->nb_samples must be equal to
+ *                  avctx->frame_size for all frames except the last.
+ *                  The final frame may be smaller than avctx->frame_size.
+ * @return 0 on success, otherwise negative error code:
+ *      AVERROR(EAGAIN):   input is not accepted in the current state - user
+ *                         must read output with avcodec_receive_packet() (once
+ *                         all output is read, the packet should be resent, and
+ *                         the call will not fail with EAGAIN).
+ *      AVERROR_EOF:       the encoder has been flushed, and no new frames can
+ *                         be sent to it
+ *      AVERROR(EINVAL):   codec not opened, it is a decoder, or requires flush
+ *      AVERROR(ENOMEM):   failed to add packet to internal queue, or similar
+ *      other errors: legitimate encoding errors
+ */
+int avcodec_send_frame(AVCodecContext *avctx, const AVFrame *frame);
+
+/**
+ * Read encoded data from the encoder.
+ *
+ * @param avctx codec context
+ * @param avpkt This will be set to a reference-counted packet allocated by the
+ *              encoder. Note that the function will always call
+ *              av_packet_unref(avpkt) before doing anything else.
+ * @return 0 on success, otherwise negative error code:
+ *      AVERROR(EAGAIN):   output is not available in the current state - user
+ *                         must try to send input
+ *      AVERROR_EOF:       the encoder has been fully flushed, and there will be
+ *                         no more output packets
+ *      AVERROR(EINVAL):   codec not opened, or it is a decoder
+ *      other errors: legitimate encoding errors
+ */
+int avcodec_receive_packet(AVCodecContext *avctx, AVPacket *avpkt);
+
+/**
+ * Create and return a AVHWFramesContext with values adequate for hardware
+ * decoding. This is meant to get called from the get_format callback, and is
+ * a helper for preparing a AVHWFramesContext for AVCodecContext.hw_frames_ctx.
+ * This API is for decoding with certain hardware acceleration modes/APIs only.
+ *
+ * The returned AVHWFramesContext is not initialized. The caller must do this
+ * with av_hwframe_ctx_init().
+ *
+ * Calling this function is not a requirement, but makes it simpler to avoid
+ * codec or hardware API specific details when manually allocating frames.
+ *
+ * Alternatively to this, an API user can set AVCodecContext.hw_device_ctx,
+ * which sets up AVCodecContext.hw_frames_ctx fully automatically, and makes
+ * it unnecessary to call this function or having to care about
+ * AVHWFramesContext initialization at all.
+ *
+ * There are a number of requirements for calling this function:
+ *
+ * - It must be called from get_format with the same avctx parameter that was
+ *   passed to get_format. Calling it outside of get_format is not allowed, and
+ *   can trigger undefined behavior.
+ * - The function is not always supported (see description of return values).
+ *   Even if this function returns successfully, hwaccel initialization could
+ *   fail later. (The degree to which implementations check whether the stream
+ *   is actually supported varies. Some do this check only after the user's
+ *   get_format callback returns.)
+ * - The hw_pix_fmt must be one of the choices suggested by get_format. If the
+ *   user decides to use a AVHWFramesContext prepared with this API function,
+ *   the user must return the same hw_pix_fmt from get_format.
+ * - The device_ref passed to this function must support the given hw_pix_fmt.
+ * - After calling this API function, it is the user's responsibility to
+ *   initialize the AVHWFramesContext (returned by the out_frames_ref parameter),
+ *   and to set AVCodecContext.hw_frames_ctx to it. If done, this must be done
+ *   before returning from get_format (this is implied by the normal
+ *   AVCodecContext.hw_frames_ctx API rules).
+ * - The AVHWFramesContext parameters may change every time time get_format is
+ *   called. Also, AVCodecContext.hw_frames_ctx is reset before get_format. So
+ *   you are inherently required to go through this process again on every
+ *   get_format call.
+ * - It is perfectly possible to call this function without actually using
+ *   the resulting AVHWFramesContext. One use-case might be trying to reuse a
+ *   previously initialized AVHWFramesContext, and calling this API function
+ *   only to test whether the required frame parameters have changed.
+ * - Fields that use dynamically allocated values of any kind must not be set
+ *   by the user unless setting them is explicitly allowed by the documentation.
+ *   If the user sets AVHWFramesContext.free and AVHWFramesContext.user_opaque,
+ *   the new free callback must call the potentially set previous free callback.
+ *   This API call may set any dynamically allocated fields, including the free
+ *   callback.
+ *
+ * The function will set at least the following fields on AVHWFramesContext
+ * (potentially more, depending on hwaccel API):
+ *
+ * - All fields set by av_hwframe_ctx_alloc().
+ * - Set the format field to hw_pix_fmt.
+ * - Set the sw_format field to the most suited and most versatile format. (An
+ *   implication is that this will prefer generic formats over opaque formats
+ *   with arbitrary restrictions, if possible.)
+ * - Set the width/height fields to the coded frame size, rounded up to the
+ *   API-specific minimum alignment.
+ * - Only _if_ the hwaccel requires a pre-allocated pool: set the initial_pool_size
+ *   field to the number of maximum reference surfaces possible with the codec,
+ *   plus 1 surface for the user to work (meaning the user can safely reference
+ *   at most 1 decoded surface at a time), plus additional buffering introduced
+ *   by frame threading. If the hwaccel does not require pre-allocation, the
+ *   field is left to 0, and the decoder will allocate new surfaces on demand
+ *   during decoding.
+ * - Possibly AVHWFramesContext.hwctx fields, depending on the underlying
+ *   hardware API.
+ *
+ * Essentially, out_frames_ref returns the same as av_hwframe_ctx_alloc(), but
+ * with basic frame parameters set.
+ *
+ * The function is stateless, and does not change the AVCodecContext or the
+ * device_ref AVHWDeviceContext.
+ *
+ * @param avctx The context which is currently calling get_format, and which
+ *              implicitly contains all state needed for filling the returned
+ *              AVHWFramesContext properly.
+ * @param device_ref A reference to the AVHWDeviceContext describing the device
+ *                   which will be used by the hardware decoder.
+ * @param hw_pix_fmt The hwaccel format you are going to return from get_format.
+ * @param out_frames_ref On success, set to a reference to an _uninitialized_
+ *                       AVHWFramesContext, created from the given device_ref.
+ *                       Fields will be set to values required for decoding.
+ *                       Not changed if an error is returned.
+ * @return zero on success, a negative value on error. The following error codes
+ *         have special semantics:
+ *      AVERROR(ENOENT): the decoder does not support this functionality. Setup
+ *                       is always manual, or it is a decoder which does not
+ *                       support setting AVCodecContext.hw_frames_ctx at all,
+ *                       or it is a software format.
+ *      AVERROR(EINVAL): it is known that hardware decoding is not supported for
+ *                       this configuration, or the device_ref is not supported
+ *                       for the hwaccel referenced by hw_pix_fmt.
+ */
+int avcodec_get_hw_frames_parameters(AVCodecContext *avctx,
+                                     AVBufferRef *device_ref,
+                                     enum AVPixelFormat hw_pix_fmt,
+                                     AVBufferRef **out_frames_ref);
+
+
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_parsing Frame parsing
+ * @{
+ */
+
+enum AVPictureStructure {
+    AV_PICTURE_STRUCTURE_UNKNOWN,      ///< unknown
+    AV_PICTURE_STRUCTURE_TOP_FIELD,    ///< coded as top field
+    AV_PICTURE_STRUCTURE_BOTTOM_FIELD, ///< coded as bottom field
+    AV_PICTURE_STRUCTURE_FRAME,        ///< coded as frame
+};
+
+typedef struct AVCodecParserContext {
+    void *priv_data;
+    const struct AVCodecParser *parser;
+    int64_t frame_offset; /* offset of the current frame */
+    int64_t cur_offset; /* current offset
+                           (incremented by each av_parser_parse()) */
+    int64_t next_frame_offset; /* offset of the next frame */
+    /* video info */
+    int pict_type; /* XXX: Put it back in AVCodecContext. */
+    /**
+     * This field is used for proper frame duration computation in lavf.
+     * It signals, how much longer the frame duration of the current frame
+     * is compared to normal frame duration.
+     *
+     * frame_duration = (1 + repeat_pict) * time_base
+     *
+     * It is used by codecs like H.264 to display telecined material.
+     */
+    int repeat_pict; /* XXX: Put it back in AVCodecContext. */
+    int64_t pts;     /* pts of the current frame */
+    int64_t dts;     /* dts of the current frame */
+
+    /* private data */
+    int64_t last_pts;
+    int64_t last_dts;
+    int fetch_timestamp;
+
+#define AV_PARSER_PTS_NB 4
+    int cur_frame_start_index;
+    int64_t cur_frame_offset[AV_PARSER_PTS_NB];
+    int64_t cur_frame_pts[AV_PARSER_PTS_NB];
+    int64_t cur_frame_dts[AV_PARSER_PTS_NB];
+
+    int flags;
+#define PARSER_FLAG_COMPLETE_FRAMES           0x0001
+#define PARSER_FLAG_ONCE                      0x0002
+/// Set if the parser has a valid file offset
+#define PARSER_FLAG_FETCHED_OFFSET            0x0004
+#define PARSER_FLAG_USE_CODEC_TS              0x1000
+
+    int64_t offset;      ///< byte offset from starting packet start
+    int64_t cur_frame_end[AV_PARSER_PTS_NB];
+
+    /**
+     * Set by parser to 1 for key frames and 0 for non-key frames.
+     * It is initialized to -1, so if the parser doesn't set this flag,
+     * old-style fallback using AV_PICTURE_TYPE_I picture type as key frames
+     * will be used.
+     */
+    int key_frame;
+
+    // Timestamp generation support:
+    /**
+     * Synchronization point for start of timestamp generation.
+     *
+     * Set to >0 for sync point, 0 for no sync point and <0 for undefined
+     * (default).
+     *
+     * For example, this corresponds to presence of H.264 buffering period
+     * SEI message.
+     */
+    int dts_sync_point;
+
+    /**
+     * Offset of the current timestamp against last timestamp sync point in
+     * units of AVCodecContext.time_base.
+     *
+     * Set to INT_MIN when dts_sync_point unused. Otherwise, it must
+     * contain a valid timestamp offset.
+     *
+     * Note that the timestamp of sync point has usually a nonzero
+     * dts_ref_dts_delta, which refers to the previous sync point. Offset of
+     * the next frame after timestamp sync point will be usually 1.
+     *
+     * For example, this corresponds to H.264 cpb_removal_delay.
+     */
+    int dts_ref_dts_delta;
+
+    /**
+     * Presentation delay of current frame in units of AVCodecContext.time_base.
+     *
+     * Set to INT_MIN when dts_sync_point unused. Otherwise, it must
+     * contain valid non-negative timestamp delta (presentation time of a frame
+     * must not lie in the past).
+     *
+     * This delay represents the difference between decoding and presentation
+     * time of the frame.
+     *
+     * For example, this corresponds to H.264 dpb_output_delay.
+     */
+    int pts_dts_delta;
+
+    /**
+     * Position of the packet in file.
+     *
+     * Analogous to cur_frame_pts/dts
+     */
+    int64_t cur_frame_pos[AV_PARSER_PTS_NB];
+
+    /**
+     * Byte position of currently parsed frame in stream.
+     */
+    int64_t pos;
+
+    /**
+     * Previous frame byte position.
+     */
+    int64_t last_pos;
+
+    /**
+     * Duration of the current frame.
+     * For audio, this is in units of 1 / AVCodecContext.sample_rate.
+     * For all other types, this is in units of AVCodecContext.time_base.
+     */
+    int duration;
+
+    enum AVFieldOrder field_order;
+
+    /**
+     * Indicate whether a picture is coded as a frame, top field or bottom field.
+     *
+     * For example, H.264 field_pic_flag equal to 0 corresponds to
+     * AV_PICTURE_STRUCTURE_FRAME. An H.264 picture with field_pic_flag
+     * equal to 1 and bottom_field_flag equal to 0 corresponds to
+     * AV_PICTURE_STRUCTURE_TOP_FIELD.
+     */
+    enum AVPictureStructure picture_structure;
+
+    /**
+     * Picture number incremented in presentation or output order.
+     * This field may be reinitialized at the first picture of a new sequence.
+     *
+     * For example, this corresponds to H.264 PicOrderCnt.
+     */
+    int output_picture_number;
+
+    /**
+     * Dimensions of the decoded video intended for presentation.
+     */
+    int width;
+    int height;
+
+    /**
+     * Dimensions of the coded video.
+     */
+    int coded_width;
+    int coded_height;
+
+    /**
+     * The format of the coded data, corresponds to enum AVPixelFormat for video
+     * and for enum AVSampleFormat for audio.
+     *
+     * Note that a decoder can have considerable freedom in how exactly it
+     * decodes the data, so the format reported here might be different from the
+     * one returned by a decoder.
+     */
+    int format;
+} AVCodecParserContext;
+
+typedef struct AVCodecParser {
+    int codec_ids[7]; /* several codec IDs are permitted */
+    int priv_data_size;
+    int (*parser_init)(AVCodecParserContext *s);
+    /* This callback never returns an error, a negative value means that
+     * the frame start was in a previous packet. */
+    int (*parser_parse)(AVCodecParserContext *s,
+                        AVCodecContext *avctx,
+                        const uint8_t **poutbuf, int *poutbuf_size,
+                        const uint8_t *buf, int buf_size);
+    void (*parser_close)(AVCodecParserContext *s);
+    int (*split)(AVCodecContext *avctx, const uint8_t *buf, int buf_size);
+} AVCodecParser;
+
+/**
+ * Iterate over all registered codec parsers.
+ *
+ * @param opaque a pointer where libavcodec will store the iteration state. Must
+ *               point to NULL to start the iteration.
+ *
+ * @return the next registered codec parser or NULL when the iteration is
+ *         finished
+ */
+const AVCodecParser *av_parser_iterate(void **opaque);
+
+AVCodecParserContext *av_parser_init(int codec_id);
+
+/**
+ * Parse a packet.
+ *
+ * @param s             parser context.
+ * @param avctx         codec context.
+ * @param poutbuf       set to pointer to parsed buffer or NULL if not yet finished.
+ * @param poutbuf_size  set to size of parsed buffer or zero if not yet finished.
+ * @param buf           input buffer.
+ * @param buf_size      buffer size in bytes without the padding. I.e. the full buffer
+                        size is assumed to be buf_size + AV_INPUT_BUFFER_PADDING_SIZE.
+                        To signal EOF, this should be 0 (so that the last frame
+                        can be output).
+ * @param pts           input presentation timestamp.
+ * @param dts           input decoding timestamp.
+ * @param pos           input byte position in stream.
+ * @return the number of bytes of the input bitstream used.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ * @code
+ *   while(in_len){
+ *       len = av_parser_parse2(myparser, AVCodecContext, &data, &size,
+ *                                        in_data, in_len,
+ *                                        pts, dts, pos);
+ *       in_data += len;
+ *       in_len  -= len;
+ *
+ *       if(size)
+ *          decode_frame(data, size);
+ *   }
+ * @endcode
+ */
+int av_parser_parse2(AVCodecParserContext *s,
+                     AVCodecContext *avctx,
+                     uint8_t **poutbuf, int *poutbuf_size,
+                     const uint8_t *buf, int buf_size,
+                     int64_t pts, int64_t dts,
+                     int64_t pos);
+
+void av_parser_close(AVCodecParserContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavc_encoding
+ * @{
+ */
+
+int avcodec_encode_subtitle(AVCodecContext *avctx, uint8_t *buf, int buf_size,
+                            const AVSubtitle *sub);
+
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_misc Utility functions
+ * @ingroup libavc
+ *
+ * Miscellaneous utility functions related to both encoding and decoding
+ * (or neither).
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_misc_pixfmt Pixel formats
+ *
+ * Functions for working with pixel formats.
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Return a value representing the fourCC code associated to the
+ * pixel format pix_fmt, or 0 if no associated fourCC code can be
+ * found.
+ */
+unsigned int avcodec_pix_fmt_to_codec_tag(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Find the best pixel format to convert to given a certain source pixel
+ * format.  When converting from one pixel format to another, information loss
+ * may occur.  For example, when converting from RGB24 to GRAY, the color
+ * information will be lost. Similarly, other losses occur when converting from
+ * some formats to other formats. avcodec_find_best_pix_fmt_of_2() searches which of
+ * the given pixel formats should be used to suffer the least amount of loss.
+ * The pixel formats from which it chooses one, are determined by the
+ * pix_fmt_list parameter.
+ *
+ *
+ * @param[in] pix_fmt_list AV_PIX_FMT_NONE terminated array of pixel formats to choose from
+ * @param[in] src_pix_fmt source pixel format
+ * @param[in] has_alpha Whether the source pixel format alpha channel is used.
+ * @param[out] loss_ptr Combination of flags informing you what kind of losses will occur.
+ * @return The best pixel format to convert to or -1 if none was found.
+ */
+enum AVPixelFormat avcodec_find_best_pix_fmt_of_list(const enum AVPixelFormat *pix_fmt_list,
+                                            enum AVPixelFormat src_pix_fmt,
+                                            int has_alpha, int *loss_ptr);
+
+enum AVPixelFormat avcodec_default_get_format(struct AVCodecContext *s, const enum AVPixelFormat * fmt);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+void avcodec_string(char *buf, int buf_size, AVCodecContext *enc, int encode);
+
+int avcodec_default_execute(AVCodecContext *c, int (*func)(AVCodecContext *c2, void *arg2),void *arg, int *ret, int count, int size);
+int avcodec_default_execute2(AVCodecContext *c, int (*func)(AVCodecContext *c2, void *arg2, int, int),void *arg, int *ret, int count);
+//FIXME func typedef
+
+/**
+ * Fill AVFrame audio data and linesize pointers.
+ *
+ * The buffer buf must be a preallocated buffer with a size big enough
+ * to contain the specified samples amount. The filled AVFrame data
+ * pointers will point to this buffer.
+ *
+ * AVFrame extended_data channel pointers are allocated if necessary for
+ * planar audio.
+ *
+ * @param frame       the AVFrame
+ *                    frame->nb_samples must be set prior to calling the
+ *                    function. This function fills in frame->data,
+ *                    frame->extended_data, frame->linesize[0].
+ * @param nb_channels channel count
+ * @param sample_fmt  sample format
+ * @param buf         buffer to use for frame data
+ * @param buf_size    size of buffer
+ * @param align       plane size sample alignment (0 = default)
+ * @return            >=0 on success, negative error code on failure
+ * @todo return the size in bytes required to store the samples in
+ * case of success, at the next libavutil bump
+ */
+int avcodec_fill_audio_frame(AVFrame *frame, int nb_channels,
+                             enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt, const uint8_t *buf,
+                             int buf_size, int align);
+
+/**
+ * Reset the internal codec state / flush internal buffers. Should be called
+ * e.g. when seeking or when switching to a different stream.
+ *
+ * @note for decoders, this function just releases any references the decoder
+ * might keep internally, but the caller's references remain valid.
+ *
+ * @note for encoders, this function will only do something if the encoder
+ * declares support for AV_CODEC_CAP_ENCODER_FLUSH. When called, the encoder
+ * will drain any remaining packets, and can then be re-used for a different
+ * stream (as opposed to sending a null frame which will leave the encoder
+ * in a permanent EOF state after draining). This can be desirable if the
+ * cost of tearing down and replacing the encoder instance is high.
+ */
+void avcodec_flush_buffers(AVCodecContext *avctx);
+
+/**
+ * Return audio frame duration.
+ *
+ * @param avctx        codec context
+ * @param frame_bytes  size of the frame, or 0 if unknown
+ * @return             frame duration, in samples, if known. 0 if not able to
+ *                     determine.
+ */
+int av_get_audio_frame_duration(AVCodecContext *avctx, int frame_bytes);
+
+/* memory */
+
+/**
+ * Same behaviour av_fast_malloc but the buffer has additional
+ * AV_INPUT_BUFFER_PADDING_SIZE at the end which will always be 0.
+ *
+ * In addition the whole buffer will initially and after resizes
+ * be 0-initialized so that no uninitialized data will ever appear.
+ */
+void av_fast_padded_malloc(void *ptr, unsigned int *size, size_t min_size);
+
+/**
+ * Same behaviour av_fast_padded_malloc except that buffer will always
+ * be 0-initialized after call.
+ */
+void av_fast_padded_mallocz(void *ptr, unsigned int *size, size_t min_size);
+
+/**
+ * @return a positive value if s is open (i.e. avcodec_open2() was called on it
+ * with no corresponding avcodec_close()), 0 otherwise.
+ */
+int avcodec_is_open(AVCodecContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_AVCODEC_H */
+
diff --git a/lib/base64.h b/dependencies/include/base64.h
index aa21fd0..aa21fd0 100644
--- a/lib/base64.h
+++ b/dependencies/include/base64.h
diff --git a/lib/glad/include/glad/glad.h b/dependencies/include/glad.h
index 1fc8c70..139fbf2 100644
--- a/lib/glad/include/glad/glad.h
+++ b/dependencies/include/glad.h
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
     APIs: gl=3.3
     Profile: core
     Extensions:
-        
+
     Loader: True
     Local files: False
     Omit khrplatform: False
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ GLAPI int gladLoadGL(void);
 
 GLAPI int gladLoadGLLoader(GLADloadproc);
 
-#include <KHR/khrplatform.h>
+#include <khrplatform.h>
 typedef unsigned int GLenum;
 typedef unsigned char GLboolean;
 typedef unsigned int GLbitfield;
@@ -2127,3 +2127,4 @@ GLAPI PFNGLSECONDARYCOLORP3UIVPROC glad_glSecondaryColorP3uiv;
 #endif
 
 #endif
+
diff --git a/dependencies/include/imgui/imconfig.h b/dependencies/include/imgui/imconfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e3dc27f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/imgui/imconfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,125 @@
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// COMPILE-TIME OPTIONS FOR DEAR IMGUI
+// Runtime options (clipboard callbacks, enabling various features, etc.) can generally be set via the ImGuiIO structure.
+// You can use ImGui::SetAllocatorFunctions() before calling ImGui::CreateContext() to rewire memory allocation functions.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// A) You may edit imconfig.h (and not overwrite it when updating Dear ImGui, or maintain a patch/rebased branch with your modifications to it)
+// B) or '#define IMGUI_USER_CONFIG "my_imgui_config.h"' in your project and then add directives in your own file without touching this template.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// You need to make sure that configuration settings are defined consistently _everywhere_ Dear ImGui is used, which include the imgui*.cpp
+// files but also _any_ of your code that uses Dear ImGui. This is because some compile-time options have an affect on data structures.
+// Defining those options in imconfig.h will ensure every compilation unit gets to see the same data structure layouts.
+// Call IMGUI_CHECKVERSION() from your .cpp files to verify that the data structures your files are using are matching the ones imgui.cpp is using.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#pragma once
+
+//---- Define assertion handler. Defaults to calling assert().
+// If your macro uses multiple statements, make sure is enclosed in a 'do { .. } while (0)' block so it can be used as a single statement.
+//#define IM_ASSERT(_EXPR)  MyAssert(_EXPR)
+//#define IM_ASSERT(_EXPR)  ((void)(_EXPR))     // Disable asserts
+
+//---- Define attributes of all API symbols declarations, e.g. for DLL under Windows
+// Using Dear ImGui via a shared library is not recommended, because of function call overhead and because we don't guarantee backward nor forward ABI compatibility.
+// DLL users: heaps and globals are not shared across DLL boundaries! You will need to call SetCurrentContext() + SetAllocatorFunctions()
+// for each static/DLL boundary you are calling from. Read "Context and Memory Allocators" section of imgui.cpp for more details.
+//#define IMGUI_API __declspec( dllexport )
+//#define IMGUI_API __declspec( dllimport )
+
+//---- Don't define obsolete functions/enums/behaviors. Consider enabling from time to time after updating to avoid using soon-to-be obsolete function/names.
+//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO                      // 1.87: disable legacy io.KeyMap[]+io.KeysDown[] in favor io.AddKeyEvent(). This will be folded into IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS in a few versions.
+
+//---- Disable all of Dear ImGui or don't implement standard windows/tools.
+// It is very strongly recommended to NOT disable the demo windows and debug tool during development. They are extremely useful in day to day work. Please read comments in imgui_demo.cpp.
+//#define IMGUI_DISABLE                                     // Disable everything: all headers and source files will be empty.
+//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_DEMO_WINDOWS                        // Disable demo windows: ShowDemoWindow()/ShowStyleEditor() will be empty.
+//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS                         // Disable metrics/debugger and other debug tools: ShowMetricsWindow(), ShowDebugLogWindow() and ShowStackToolWindow() will be empty (this was called IMGUI_DISABLE_METRICS_WINDOW before 1.88).
+
+//---- Don't implement some functions to reduce linkage requirements.
+//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS   // [Win32] Don't implement default clipboard handler. Won't use and link with OpenClipboard/GetClipboardData/CloseClipboard etc. (user32.lib/.a, kernel32.lib/.a)
+//#define IMGUI_ENABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS          // [Win32] [Default with Visual Studio] Implement default IME handler (require imm32.lib/.a, auto-link for Visual Studio, -limm32 on command-line for MinGW)
+//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS         // [Win32] [Default with non-Visual Studio compilers] Don't implement default IME handler (won't require imm32.lib/.a)
+//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_FUNCTIONS                     // [Win32] Won't use and link with any Win32 function (clipboard, ime).
+//#define IMGUI_ENABLE_OSX_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS      // [OSX] Implement default OSX clipboard handler (need to link with '-framework ApplicationServices', this is why this is not the default).
+//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FORMAT_FUNCTIONS            // Don't implement ImFormatString/ImFormatStringV so you can implement them yourself (e.g. if you don't want to link with vsnprintf)
+//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_MATH_FUNCTIONS              // Don't implement ImFabs/ImSqrt/ImPow/ImFmod/ImCos/ImSin/ImAcos/ImAtan2 so you can implement them yourself.
+//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_FILE_FUNCTIONS                      // Don't implement ImFileOpen/ImFileClose/ImFileRead/ImFileWrite and ImFileHandle at all (replace them with dummies)
+//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FILE_FUNCTIONS              // Don't implement ImFileOpen/ImFileClose/ImFileRead/ImFileWrite and ImFileHandle so you can implement them yourself if you don't want to link with fopen/fclose/fread/fwrite. This will also disable the LogToTTY() function.
+//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_ALLOCATORS                  // Don't implement default allocators calling malloc()/free() to avoid linking with them. You will need to call ImGui::SetAllocatorFunctions().
+//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_SSE                                 // Disable use of SSE intrinsics even if available
+
+//---- Include imgui_user.h at the end of imgui.h as a convenience
+//#define IMGUI_INCLUDE_IMGUI_USER_H
+
+//---- Pack colors to BGRA8 instead of RGBA8 (to avoid converting from one to another)
+//#define IMGUI_USE_BGRA_PACKED_COLOR
+
+//---- Use 32-bit for ImWchar (default is 16-bit) to support unicode planes 1-16. (e.g. point beyond 0xFFFF like emoticons, dingbats, symbols, shapes, ancient languages, etc...)
+//#define IMGUI_USE_WCHAR32
+
+//---- Avoid multiple STB libraries implementations, or redefine path/filenames to prioritize another version
+// By default the embedded implementations are declared static and not available outside of Dear ImGui sources files.
+//#define IMGUI_STB_TRUETYPE_FILENAME   "my_folder/stb_truetype.h"
+//#define IMGUI_STB_RECT_PACK_FILENAME  "my_folder/stb_rect_pack.h"
+//#define IMGUI_STB_SPRINTF_FILENAME    "my_folder/stb_sprintf.h"    // only used if enabled
+//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION
+//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_STB_RECT_PACK_IMPLEMENTATION
+
+//---- Use stb_sprintf.h for a faster implementation of vsnprintf instead of the one from libc (unless IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FORMAT_FUNCTIONS is defined)
+// Compatibility checks of arguments and formats done by clang and GCC will be disabled in order to support the extra formats provided by stb_sprintf.h.
+//#define IMGUI_USE_STB_SPRINTF
+
+//---- Use FreeType to build and rasterize the font atlas (instead of stb_truetype which is embedded by default in Dear ImGui)
+// Requires FreeType headers to be available in the include path. Requires program to be compiled with 'misc/freetype/imgui_freetype.cpp' (in this repository) + the FreeType library (not provided).
+// On Windows you may use vcpkg with 'vcpkg install freetype --triplet=x64-windows' + 'vcpkg integrate install'.
+//#define IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE
+
+//---- Use stb_truetype to build and rasterize the font atlas (default)
+// The only purpose of this define is if you want force compilation of the stb_truetype backend ALONG with the FreeType backend.
+//#define IMGUI_ENABLE_STB_TRUETYPE
+
+//---- Define constructor and implicit cast operators to convert back<>forth between your math types and ImVec2/ImVec4.
+// This will be inlined as part of ImVec2 and ImVec4 class declarations.
+/*
+#define IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA                                                     \
+        constexpr ImVec2(const MyVec2& f) : x(f.x), y(f.y) {}                   \
+        operator MyVec2() const { return MyVec2(x,y); }
+
+#define IM_VEC4_CLASS_EXTRA                                                     \
+        constexpr ImVec4(const MyVec4& f) : x(f.x), y(f.y), z(f.z), w(f.w) {}   \
+        operator MyVec4() const { return MyVec4(x,y,z,w); }
+*/
+
+//---- Use 32-bit vertex indices (default is 16-bit) is one way to allow large meshes with more than 64K vertices.
+// Your renderer backend will need to support it (most example renderer backends support both 16/32-bit indices).
+// Another way to allow large meshes while keeping 16-bit indices is to handle ImDrawCmd::VtxOffset in your renderer.
+// Read about ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset for details.
+//#define ImDrawIdx unsigned int
+
+//---- Override ImDrawCallback signature (will need to modify renderer backends accordingly)
+//struct ImDrawList;
+//struct ImDrawCmd;
+//typedef void (*MyImDrawCallback)(const ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImDrawCmd* cmd, void* my_renderer_user_data);
+//#define ImDrawCallback MyImDrawCallback
+
+//---- Debug Tools: Macro to break in Debugger
+// (use 'Metrics->Tools->Item Picker' to pick widgets with the mouse and break into them for easy debugging.)
+//#define IM_DEBUG_BREAK  IM_ASSERT(0)
+//#define IM_DEBUG_BREAK  __debugbreak()
+
+//---- Debug Tools: Have the Item Picker break in the ItemAdd() function instead of ItemHoverable(),
+// (which comes earlier in the code, will catch a few extra items, allow picking items other than Hovered one.)
+// This adds a small runtime cost which is why it is not enabled by default.
+//#define IMGUI_DEBUG_TOOL_ITEM_PICKER_EX
+
+//---- Debug Tools: Enable slower asserts
+//#define IMGUI_DEBUG_PARANOID
+
+//---- Tip: You can add extra functions within the ImGui:: namespace, here or in your own headers files.
+/*
+namespace ImGui
+{
+    void MyFunction(const char* name, const MyMatrix44& v);
+}
+*/
diff --git a/dependencies/include/imgui/imgui.h b/dependencies/include/imgui/imgui.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0160c70
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/imgui/imgui.h
@@ -0,0 +1,3296 @@
+// dear imgui, v1.89 WIP
+// (headers)
+
+// Help:
+// - Read FAQ at http://dearimgui.org/faq
+// - Newcomers, read 'Programmer guide' in imgui.cpp for notes on how to setup Dear ImGui in your codebase.
+// - Call and read ImGui::ShowDemoWindow() in imgui_demo.cpp. All applications in examples/ are doing that.
+// Read imgui.cpp for details, links and comments.
+
+// Resources:
+// - FAQ                   http://dearimgui.org/faq
+// - Homepage & latest     https://github.com/ocornut/imgui
+// - Releases & changelog  https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/releases
+// - Gallery               https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/5243 (please post your screenshots/video there!)
+// - Wiki                  https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki (lots of good stuff there)
+// - Glossary              https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Glossary
+// - Issues & support      https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues
+
+// Getting Started?
+// - For first-time users having issues compiling/linking/running or issues loading fonts:
+//   please post in https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/discussions if you cannot find a solution in resources above.
+
+/*
+
+Index of this file:
+// [SECTION] Header mess
+// [SECTION] Forward declarations and basic types
+// [SECTION] Dear ImGui end-user API functions
+// [SECTION] Flags & Enumerations
+// [SECTION] Helpers: Memory allocations macros, ImVector<>
+// [SECTION] ImGuiStyle
+// [SECTION] ImGuiIO
+// [SECTION] Misc data structures (ImGuiInputTextCallbackData, ImGuiSizeCallbackData, ImGuiWindowClass, ImGuiPayload, ImGuiTableSortSpecs, ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs)
+// [SECTION] Helpers (ImGuiOnceUponAFrame, ImGuiTextFilter, ImGuiTextBuffer, ImGuiStorage, ImGuiListClipper, ImColor)
+// [SECTION] Drawing API (ImDrawCallback, ImDrawCmd, ImDrawIdx, ImDrawVert, ImDrawChannel, ImDrawListSplitter, ImDrawFlags, ImDrawListFlags, ImDrawList, ImDrawData)
+// [SECTION] Font API (ImFontConfig, ImFontGlyph, ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder, ImFontAtlasFlags, ImFontAtlas, ImFont)
+// [SECTION] Viewports (ImGuiViewportFlags, ImGuiViewport)
+// [SECTION] Platform Dependent Interfaces (ImGuiPlatformIO, ImGuiPlatformMonitor, ImGuiPlatformImeData)
+// [SECTION] Obsolete functions and types
+
+*/
+
+#pragma once
+
+// Configuration file with compile-time options (edit imconfig.h or '#define IMGUI_USER_CONFIG "myfilename.h" from your build system')
+#ifdef IMGUI_USER_CONFIG
+#include IMGUI_USER_CONFIG
+#endif
+#if !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_INCLUDE_IMCONFIG_H) || defined(IMGUI_INCLUDE_IMCONFIG_H)
+#include "imconfig.h"
+#endif
+
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Header mess
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Includes
+#include <float.h>                  // FLT_MIN, FLT_MAX
+#include <stdarg.h>                 // va_list, va_start, va_end
+#include <stddef.h>                 // ptrdiff_t, NULL
+#include <string.h>                 // memset, memmove, memcpy, strlen, strchr, strcpy, strcmp
+
+// Version
+// (Integer encoded as XYYZZ for use in #if preprocessor conditionals. Work in progress versions typically starts at XYY99 then bounce up to XYY00, XYY01 etc. when release tagging happens)
+#define IMGUI_VERSION               "1.89 WIP"
+#define IMGUI_VERSION_NUM           18804
+#define IMGUI_CHECKVERSION()        ImGui::DebugCheckVersionAndDataLayout(IMGUI_VERSION, sizeof(ImGuiIO), sizeof(ImGuiStyle), sizeof(ImVec2), sizeof(ImVec4), sizeof(ImDrawVert), sizeof(ImDrawIdx))
+#define IMGUI_HAS_TABLE
+#define IMGUI_HAS_VIEWPORT          // Viewport WIP branch
+#define IMGUI_HAS_DOCK              // Docking WIP branch
+
+// Define attributes of all API symbols declarations (e.g. for DLL under Windows)
+// IMGUI_API is used for core imgui functions, IMGUI_IMPL_API is used for the default backends files (imgui_impl_xxx.h)
+// Using dear imgui via a shared library is not recommended, because we don't guarantee backward nor forward ABI compatibility (also function call overhead, as dear imgui is a call-heavy API)
+#ifndef IMGUI_API
+#define IMGUI_API
+#endif
+#ifndef IMGUI_IMPL_API
+#define IMGUI_IMPL_API              IMGUI_API
+#endif
+
+// Helper Macros
+#ifndef IM_ASSERT
+#include <assert.h>
+#define IM_ASSERT(_EXPR)            assert(_EXPR)                               // You can override the default assert handler by editing imconfig.h
+#endif
+#define IM_ARRAYSIZE(_ARR)          ((int)(sizeof(_ARR) / sizeof(*(_ARR))))     // Size of a static C-style array. Don't use on pointers!
+#define IM_UNUSED(_VAR)             ((void)(_VAR))                              // Used to silence "unused variable warnings". Often useful as asserts may be stripped out from final builds.
+#define IM_OFFSETOF(_TYPE,_MEMBER)  offsetof(_TYPE, _MEMBER)                    // Offset of _MEMBER within _TYPE. Standardized as offsetof() in C++11
+
+// Helper Macros - IM_FMTARGS, IM_FMTLIST: Apply printf-style warnings to our formatting functions.
+#if !defined(IMGUI_USE_STB_SPRINTF) && defined(__MINGW32__) && !defined(__clang__)
+#define IM_FMTARGS(FMT)             __attribute__((format(gnu_printf, FMT, FMT+1)))
+#define IM_FMTLIST(FMT)             __attribute__((format(gnu_printf, FMT, 0)))
+#elif !defined(IMGUI_USE_STB_SPRINTF) && (defined(__clang__) || defined(__GNUC__))
+#define IM_FMTARGS(FMT)             __attribute__((format(printf, FMT, FMT+1)))
+#define IM_FMTLIST(FMT)             __attribute__((format(printf, FMT, 0)))
+#else
+#define IM_FMTARGS(FMT)
+#define IM_FMTLIST(FMT)
+#endif
+
+// Disable some of MSVC most aggressive Debug runtime checks in function header/footer (used in some simple/low-level functions)
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(__clang__)  && !defined(__INTEL_COMPILER) && !defined(IMGUI_DEBUG_PARANOID)
+#define IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF      __pragma(runtime_checks("",off))     __pragma(check_stack(off)) __pragma(strict_gs_check(push,off))
+#define IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_RESTORE  __pragma(runtime_checks("",restore)) __pragma(check_stack())    __pragma(strict_gs_check(pop))
+#else
+#define IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF
+#define IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_RESTORE
+#endif
+
+// Warnings
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+#pragma warning (push)
+#pragma warning (disable: 26495)    // [Static Analyzer] Variable 'XXX' is uninitialized. Always initialize a member variable (type.6).
+#endif
+#if defined(__clang__)
+#pragma clang diagnostic push
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast"
+#if __has_warning("-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant")
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant"
+#endif
+#elif defined(__GNUC__)
+#pragma GCC diagnostic push
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wpragmas"          // warning: unknown option after '#pragma GCC diagnostic' kind
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wclass-memaccess"  // [__GNUC__ >= 8] warning: 'memset/memcpy' clearing/writing an object of type 'xxxx' with no trivial copy-assignment; use assignment or value-initialization instead
+#endif
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Forward declarations and basic types
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Forward declarations
+struct ImDrawChannel;               // Temporary storage to output draw commands out of order, used by ImDrawListSplitter and ImDrawList::ChannelsSplit()
+struct ImDrawCmd;                   // A single draw command within a parent ImDrawList (generally maps to 1 GPU draw call, unless it is a callback)
+struct ImDrawData;                  // All draw command lists required to render the frame + pos/size coordinates to use for the projection matrix.
+struct ImDrawList;                  // A single draw command list (generally one per window, conceptually you may see this as a dynamic "mesh" builder)
+struct ImDrawListSharedData;        // Data shared among multiple draw lists (typically owned by parent ImGui context, but you may create one yourself)
+struct ImDrawListSplitter;          // Helper to split a draw list into different layers which can be drawn into out of order, then flattened back.
+struct ImDrawVert;                  // A single vertex (pos + uv + col = 20 bytes by default. Override layout with IMGUI_OVERRIDE_DRAWVERT_STRUCT_LAYOUT)
+struct ImFont;                      // Runtime data for a single font within a parent ImFontAtlas
+struct ImFontAtlas;                 // Runtime data for multiple fonts, bake multiple fonts into a single texture, TTF/OTF font loader
+struct ImFontBuilderIO;             // Opaque interface to a font builder (stb_truetype or FreeType).
+struct ImFontConfig;                // Configuration data when adding a font or merging fonts
+struct ImFontGlyph;                 // A single font glyph (code point + coordinates within in ImFontAtlas + offset)
+struct ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder;    // Helper to build glyph ranges from text/string data
+struct ImColor;                     // Helper functions to create a color that can be converted to either u32 or float4 (*OBSOLETE* please avoid using)
+struct ImGuiContext;                // Dear ImGui context (opaque structure, unless including imgui_internal.h)
+struct ImGuiIO;                     // Main configuration and I/O between your application and ImGui
+struct ImGuiInputTextCallbackData;  // Shared state of InputText() when using custom ImGuiInputTextCallback (rare/advanced use)
+struct ImGuiKeyData;                // Storage for ImGuiIO and IsKeyDown(), IsKeyPressed() etc functions.
+struct ImGuiListClipper;            // Helper to manually clip large list of items
+struct ImGuiOnceUponAFrame;         // Helper for running a block of code not more than once a frame
+struct ImGuiPayload;                // User data payload for drag and drop operations
+struct ImGuiPlatformIO;             // Multi-viewport support: interface for Platform/Renderer backends + viewports to render
+struct ImGuiPlatformMonitor;        // Multi-viewport support: user-provided bounds for each connected monitor/display. Used when positioning popups and tooltips to avoid them straddling monitors
+struct ImGuiPlatformImeData;        // Platform IME data for io.SetPlatformImeDataFn() function.
+struct ImGuiSizeCallbackData;       // Callback data when using SetNextWindowSizeConstraints() (rare/advanced use)
+struct ImGuiStorage;                // Helper for key->value storage
+struct ImGuiStyle;                  // Runtime data for styling/colors
+struct ImGuiTableSortSpecs;         // Sorting specifications for a table (often handling sort specs for a single column, occasionally more)
+struct ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs;   // Sorting specification for one column of a table
+struct ImGuiTextBuffer;             // Helper to hold and append into a text buffer (~string builder)
+struct ImGuiTextFilter;             // Helper to parse and apply text filters (e.g. "aaaaa[,bbbbb][,ccccc]")
+struct ImGuiViewport;               // A Platform Window (always 1 unless multi-viewport are enabled. One per platform window to output to). In the future may represent Platform Monitor
+struct ImGuiWindowClass;            // Window class (rare/advanced uses: provide hints to the platform backend via altered viewport flags and parent/child info)
+
+// Enums/Flags (declared as int for compatibility with old C++, to allow using as flags without overhead, and to not pollute the top of this file)
+// - Tip: Use your programming IDE navigation facilities on the names in the _central column_ below to find the actual flags/enum lists!
+//   In Visual Studio IDE: CTRL+comma ("Edit.GoToAll") can follow symbols in comments, whereas CTRL+F12 ("Edit.GoToImplementation") cannot.
+//   With Visual Assist installed: ALT+G ("VAssistX.GoToImplementation") can also follow symbols in comments.
+typedef int ImGuiCol;               // -> enum ImGuiCol_             // Enum: A color identifier for styling
+typedef int ImGuiCond;              // -> enum ImGuiCond_            // Enum: A condition for many Set*() functions
+typedef int ImGuiDataType;          // -> enum ImGuiDataType_        // Enum: A primary data type
+typedef int ImGuiDir;               // -> enum ImGuiDir_             // Enum: A cardinal direction
+typedef int ImGuiKey;               // -> enum ImGuiKey_             // Enum: A key identifier
+typedef int ImGuiMouseButton;       // -> enum ImGuiMouseButton_     // Enum: A mouse button identifier (0=left, 1=right, 2=middle)
+typedef int ImGuiMouseCursor;       // -> enum ImGuiMouseCursor_     // Enum: A mouse cursor identifier
+typedef int ImGuiSortDirection;     // -> enum ImGuiSortDirection_   // Enum: A sorting direction (ascending or descending)
+typedef int ImGuiStyleVar;          // -> enum ImGuiStyleVar_        // Enum: A variable identifier for styling
+typedef int ImGuiTableBgTarget;     // -> enum ImGuiTableBgTarget_   // Enum: A color target for TableSetBgColor()
+typedef int ImDrawFlags;            // -> enum ImDrawFlags_          // Flags: for ImDrawList functions
+typedef int ImDrawListFlags;        // -> enum ImDrawListFlags_      // Flags: for ImDrawList instance
+typedef int ImFontAtlasFlags;       // -> enum ImFontAtlasFlags_     // Flags: for ImFontAtlas build
+typedef int ImGuiBackendFlags;      // -> enum ImGuiBackendFlags_    // Flags: for io.BackendFlags
+typedef int ImGuiButtonFlags;       // -> enum ImGuiButtonFlags_     // Flags: for InvisibleButton()
+typedef int ImGuiColorEditFlags;    // -> enum ImGuiColorEditFlags_  // Flags: for ColorEdit4(), ColorPicker4() etc.
+typedef int ImGuiConfigFlags;       // -> enum ImGuiConfigFlags_     // Flags: for io.ConfigFlags
+typedef int ImGuiComboFlags;        // -> enum ImGuiComboFlags_      // Flags: for BeginCombo()
+typedef int ImGuiDockNodeFlags;     // -> enum ImGuiDockNodeFlags_   // Flags: for DockSpace()
+typedef int ImGuiDragDropFlags;     // -> enum ImGuiDragDropFlags_   // Flags: for BeginDragDropSource(), AcceptDragDropPayload()
+typedef int ImGuiFocusedFlags;      // -> enum ImGuiFocusedFlags_    // Flags: for IsWindowFocused()
+typedef int ImGuiHoveredFlags;      // -> enum ImGuiHoveredFlags_    // Flags: for IsItemHovered(), IsWindowHovered() etc.
+typedef int ImGuiInputTextFlags;    // -> enum ImGuiInputTextFlags_  // Flags: for InputText(), InputTextMultiline()
+typedef int ImGuiModFlags;          // -> enum ImGuiModFlags_        // Flags: for io.KeyMods (Ctrl/Shift/Alt/Super)
+typedef int ImGuiPopupFlags;        // -> enum ImGuiPopupFlags_      // Flags: for OpenPopup*(), BeginPopupContext*(), IsPopupOpen()
+typedef int ImGuiSelectableFlags;   // -> enum ImGuiSelectableFlags_ // Flags: for Selectable()
+typedef int ImGuiSliderFlags;       // -> enum ImGuiSliderFlags_     // Flags: for DragFloat(), DragInt(), SliderFloat(), SliderInt() etc.
+typedef int ImGuiTabBarFlags;       // -> enum ImGuiTabBarFlags_     // Flags: for BeginTabBar()
+typedef int ImGuiTabItemFlags;      // -> enum ImGuiTabItemFlags_    // Flags: for BeginTabItem()
+typedef int ImGuiTableFlags;        // -> enum ImGuiTableFlags_      // Flags: For BeginTable()
+typedef int ImGuiTableColumnFlags;  // -> enum ImGuiTableColumnFlags_// Flags: For TableSetupColumn()
+typedef int ImGuiTableRowFlags;     // -> enum ImGuiTableRowFlags_   // Flags: For TableNextRow()
+typedef int ImGuiTreeNodeFlags;     // -> enum ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_   // Flags: for TreeNode(), TreeNodeEx(), CollapsingHeader()
+typedef int ImGuiViewportFlags;     // -> enum ImGuiViewportFlags_   // Flags: for ImGuiViewport
+typedef int ImGuiWindowFlags;       // -> enum ImGuiWindowFlags_     // Flags: for Begin(), BeginChild()
+
+// ImTexture: user data for renderer backend to identify a texture [Compile-time configurable type]
+// - To use something else than an opaque void* pointer: override with e.g. '#define ImTextureID MyTextureType*' in your imconfig.h file.
+// - This can be whatever to you want it to be! read the FAQ about ImTextureID for details.
+#ifndef ImTextureID
+typedef void* ImTextureID;          // Default: store a pointer or an integer fitting in a pointer (most renderer backends are ok with that)
+#endif
+
+// ImDrawIdx: vertex index. [Compile-time configurable type]
+// - To use 16-bit indices + allow large meshes: backend need to set 'io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset' and handle ImDrawCmd::VtxOffset (recommended).
+// - To use 32-bit indices: override with '#define ImDrawIdx unsigned int' in your imconfig.h file.
+#ifndef ImDrawIdx
+typedef unsigned short ImDrawIdx;   // Default: 16-bit (for maximum compatibility with renderer backends)
+#endif
+
+// Scalar data types
+typedef unsigned int        ImGuiID;// A unique ID used by widgets (typically the result of hashing a stack of string)
+typedef signed char         ImS8;   // 8-bit signed integer
+typedef unsigned char       ImU8;   // 8-bit unsigned integer
+typedef signed short        ImS16;  // 16-bit signed integer
+typedef unsigned short      ImU16;  // 16-bit unsigned integer
+typedef signed int          ImS32;  // 32-bit signed integer == int
+typedef unsigned int        ImU32;  // 32-bit unsigned integer (often used to store packed colors)
+typedef signed   long long  ImS64;  // 64-bit signed integer
+typedef unsigned long long  ImU64;  // 64-bit unsigned integer
+
+// Character types
+// (we generally use UTF-8 encoded string in the API. This is storage specifically for a decoded character used for keyboard input and display)
+typedef unsigned short ImWchar16;   // A single decoded U16 character/code point. We encode them as multi bytes UTF-8 when used in strings.
+typedef unsigned int ImWchar32;     // A single decoded U32 character/code point. We encode them as multi bytes UTF-8 when used in strings.
+#ifdef IMGUI_USE_WCHAR32            // ImWchar [configurable type: override in imconfig.h with '#define IMGUI_USE_WCHAR32' to support Unicode planes 1-16]
+typedef ImWchar32 ImWchar;
+#else
+typedef ImWchar16 ImWchar;
+#endif
+
+// Callback and functions types
+typedef int     (*ImGuiInputTextCallback)(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData* data);    // Callback function for ImGui::InputText()
+typedef void    (*ImGuiSizeCallback)(ImGuiSizeCallbackData* data);              // Callback function for ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints()
+typedef void*   (*ImGuiMemAllocFunc)(size_t sz, void* user_data);               // Function signature for ImGui::SetAllocatorFunctions()
+typedef void    (*ImGuiMemFreeFunc)(void* ptr, void* user_data);                // Function signature for ImGui::SetAllocatorFunctions()
+
+// ImVec2: 2D vector used to store positions, sizes etc. [Compile-time configurable type]
+// This is a frequently used type in the API. Consider using IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA to create implicit cast from/to our preferred type.
+IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF
+struct ImVec2
+{
+    float                                   x, y;
+    constexpr ImVec2()                      : x(0.0f), y(0.0f) { }
+    constexpr ImVec2(float _x, float _y)    : x(_x), y(_y) { }
+    float  operator[] (size_t idx) const    { IM_ASSERT(idx <= 1); return (&x)[idx]; }    // We very rarely use this [] operator, the assert overhead is fine.
+    float& operator[] (size_t idx)          { IM_ASSERT(idx <= 1); return (&x)[idx]; }    // We very rarely use this [] operator, the assert overhead is fine.
+#ifdef IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA
+    IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA     // Define additional constructors and implicit cast operators in imconfig.h to convert back and forth between your math types and ImVec2.
+#endif
+};
+
+// ImVec4: 4D vector used to store clipping rectangles, colors etc. [Compile-time configurable type]
+struct ImVec4
+{
+    float                                                     x, y, z, w;
+    constexpr ImVec4()                                        : x(0.0f), y(0.0f), z(0.0f), w(0.0f) { }
+    constexpr ImVec4(float _x, float _y, float _z, float _w)  : x(_x), y(_y), z(_z), w(_w) { }
+#ifdef IM_VEC4_CLASS_EXTRA
+    IM_VEC4_CLASS_EXTRA     // Define additional constructors and implicit cast operators in imconfig.h to convert back and forth between your math types and ImVec4.
+#endif
+};
+IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_RESTORE
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Dear ImGui end-user API functions
+// (Note that ImGui:: being a namespace, you can add extra ImGui:: functions in your own separate file. Please don't modify imgui source files!)
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+namespace ImGui
+{
+    // Context creation and access
+    // - Each context create its own ImFontAtlas by default. You may instance one yourself and pass it to CreateContext() to share a font atlas between contexts.
+    // - DLL users: heaps and globals are not shared across DLL boundaries! You will need to call SetCurrentContext() + SetAllocatorFunctions()
+    //   for each static/DLL boundary you are calling from. Read "Context and Memory Allocators" section of imgui.cpp for details.
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiContext* CreateContext(ImFontAtlas* shared_font_atlas = NULL);
+    IMGUI_API void          DestroyContext(ImGuiContext* ctx = NULL);   // NULL = destroy current context
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiContext* GetCurrentContext();
+    IMGUI_API void          SetCurrentContext(ImGuiContext* ctx);
+
+    // Main
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiIO&      GetIO();                                    // access the IO structure (mouse/keyboard/gamepad inputs, time, various configuration options/flags)
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiStyle&   GetStyle();                                 // access the Style structure (colors, sizes). Always use PushStyleCol(), PushStyleVar() to modify style mid-frame!
+    IMGUI_API void          NewFrame();                                 // start a new Dear ImGui frame, you can submit any command from this point until Render()/EndFrame().
+    IMGUI_API void          EndFrame();                                 // ends the Dear ImGui frame. automatically called by Render(). If you don't need to render data (skipping rendering) you may call EndFrame() without Render()... but you'll have wasted CPU already! If you don't need to render, better to not create any windows and not call NewFrame() at all!
+    IMGUI_API void          Render();                                   // ends the Dear ImGui frame, finalize the draw data. You can then get call GetDrawData().
+    IMGUI_API ImDrawData*   GetDrawData();                              // valid after Render() and until the next call to NewFrame(). this is what you have to render.
+
+    // Demo, Debug, Information
+    IMGUI_API void          ShowDemoWindow(bool* p_open = NULL);        // create Demo window. demonstrate most ImGui features. call this to learn about the library! try to make it always available in your application!
+    IMGUI_API void          ShowMetricsWindow(bool* p_open = NULL);     // create Metrics/Debugger window. display Dear ImGui internals: windows, draw commands, various internal state, etc.
+    IMGUI_API void          ShowDebugLogWindow(bool* p_open = NULL);    // create Debug Log window. display a simplified log of important dear imgui events.
+    IMGUI_API void          ShowStackToolWindow(bool* p_open = NULL);   // create Stack Tool window. hover items with mouse to query information about the source of their unique ID.
+    IMGUI_API void          ShowAboutWindow(bool* p_open = NULL);       // create About window. display Dear ImGui version, credits and build/system information.
+    IMGUI_API void          ShowStyleEditor(ImGuiStyle* ref = NULL);    // add style editor block (not a window). you can pass in a reference ImGuiStyle structure to compare to, revert to and save to (else it uses the default style)
+    IMGUI_API bool          ShowStyleSelector(const char* label);       // add style selector block (not a window), essentially a combo listing the default styles.
+    IMGUI_API void          ShowFontSelector(const char* label);        // add font selector block (not a window), essentially a combo listing the loaded fonts.
+    IMGUI_API void          ShowUserGuide();                            // add basic help/info block (not a window): how to manipulate ImGui as a end-user (mouse/keyboard controls).
+    IMGUI_API const char*   GetVersion();                               // get the compiled version string e.g. "1.80 WIP" (essentially the value for IMGUI_VERSION from the compiled version of imgui.cpp)
+
+    // Styles
+    IMGUI_API void          StyleColorsDark(ImGuiStyle* dst = NULL);    // new, recommended style (default)
+    IMGUI_API void          StyleColorsLight(ImGuiStyle* dst = NULL);   // best used with borders and a custom, thicker font
+    IMGUI_API void          StyleColorsClassic(ImGuiStyle* dst = NULL); // classic imgui style
+
+    // Windows
+    // - Begin() = push window to the stack and start appending to it. End() = pop window from the stack.
+    // - Passing 'bool* p_open != NULL' shows a window-closing widget in the upper-right corner of the window,
+    //   which clicking will set the boolean to false when clicked.
+    // - You may append multiple times to the same window during the same frame by calling Begin()/End() pairs multiple times.
+    //   Some information such as 'flags' or 'p_open' will only be considered by the first call to Begin().
+    // - Begin() return false to indicate the window is collapsed or fully clipped, so you may early out and omit submitting
+    //   anything to the window. Always call a matching End() for each Begin() call, regardless of its return value!
+    //   [Important: due to legacy reason, this is inconsistent with most other functions such as BeginMenu/EndMenu,
+    //    BeginPopup/EndPopup, etc. where the EndXXX call should only be called if the corresponding BeginXXX function
+    //    returned true. Begin and BeginChild are the only odd ones out. Will be fixed in a future update.]
+    // - Note that the bottom of window stack always contains a window called "Debug".
+    IMGUI_API bool          Begin(const char* name, bool* p_open = NULL, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API void          End();
+
+    // Child Windows
+    // - Use child windows to begin into a self-contained independent scrolling/clipping regions within a host window. Child windows can embed their own child.
+    // - For each independent axis of 'size': ==0.0f: use remaining host window size / >0.0f: fixed size / <0.0f: use remaining window size minus abs(size) / Each axis can use a different mode, e.g. ImVec2(0,400).
+    // - BeginChild() returns false to indicate the window is collapsed or fully clipped, so you may early out and omit submitting anything to the window.
+    //   Always call a matching EndChild() for each BeginChild() call, regardless of its return value.
+    //   [Important: due to legacy reason, this is inconsistent with most other functions such as BeginMenu/EndMenu,
+    //    BeginPopup/EndPopup, etc. where the EndXXX call should only be called if the corresponding BeginXXX function
+    //    returned true. Begin and BeginChild are the only odd ones out. Will be fixed in a future update.]
+    IMGUI_API bool          BeginChild(const char* str_id, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0), bool border = false, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          BeginChild(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0), bool border = false, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API void          EndChild();
+
+    // Windows Utilities
+    // - 'current window' = the window we are appending into while inside a Begin()/End() block. 'next window' = next window we will Begin() into.
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsWindowAppearing();
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsWindowCollapsed();
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags flags=0); // is current window focused? or its root/child, depending on flags. see flags for options.
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags flags=0); // is current window hovered (and typically: not blocked by a popup/modal)? see flags for options. NB: If you are trying to check whether your mouse should be dispatched to imgui or to your app, you should use the 'io.WantCaptureMouse' boolean for that! Please read the FAQ!
+    IMGUI_API ImDrawList*   GetWindowDrawList();                        // get draw list associated to the current window, to append your own drawing primitives
+    IMGUI_API float         GetWindowDpiScale();                        // get DPI scale currently associated to the current window's viewport.
+    IMGUI_API ImVec2        GetWindowPos();                             // get current window position in screen space (useful if you want to do your own drawing via the DrawList API)
+    IMGUI_API ImVec2        GetWindowSize();                            // get current window size
+    IMGUI_API float         GetWindowWidth();                           // get current window width (shortcut for GetWindowSize().x)
+    IMGUI_API float         GetWindowHeight();                          // get current window height (shortcut for GetWindowSize().y)
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiViewport*GetWindowViewport();                        // get viewport currently associated to the current window.
+
+    // Window manipulation
+    // - Prefer using SetNextXXX functions (before Begin) rather that SetXXX functions (after Begin).
+    IMGUI_API void          SetNextWindowPos(const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond = 0, const ImVec2& pivot = ImVec2(0, 0)); // set next window position. call before Begin(). use pivot=(0.5f,0.5f) to center on given point, etc.
+    IMGUI_API void          SetNextWindowSize(const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond = 0);                  // set next window size. set axis to 0.0f to force an auto-fit on this axis. call before Begin()
+    IMGUI_API void          SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(const ImVec2& size_min, const ImVec2& size_max, ImGuiSizeCallback custom_callback = NULL, void* custom_callback_data = NULL); // set next window size limits. use -1,-1 on either X/Y axis to preserve the current size. Sizes will be rounded down. Use callback to apply non-trivial programmatic constraints.
+    IMGUI_API void          SetNextWindowContentSize(const ImVec2& size);                               // set next window content size (~ scrollable client area, which enforce the range of scrollbars). Not including window decorations (title bar, menu bar, etc.) nor WindowPadding. set an axis to 0.0f to leave it automatic. call before Begin()
+    IMGUI_API void          SetNextWindowCollapsed(bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond = 0);                 // set next window collapsed state. call before Begin()
+    IMGUI_API void          SetNextWindowFocus();                                                       // set next window to be focused / top-most. call before Begin()
+    IMGUI_API void          SetNextWindowBgAlpha(float alpha);                                          // set next window background color alpha. helper to easily override the Alpha component of ImGuiCol_WindowBg/ChildBg/PopupBg. you may also use ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground.
+    IMGUI_API void          SetNextWindowViewport(ImGuiID viewport_id);                                 // set next window viewport
+    IMGUI_API void          SetWindowPos(const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond = 0);                        // (not recommended) set current window position - call within Begin()/End(). prefer using SetNextWindowPos(), as this may incur tearing and side-effects.
+    IMGUI_API void          SetWindowSize(const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond = 0);                      // (not recommended) set current window size - call within Begin()/End(). set to ImVec2(0, 0) to force an auto-fit. prefer using SetNextWindowSize(), as this may incur tearing and minor side-effects.
+    IMGUI_API void          SetWindowCollapsed(bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond = 0);                     // (not recommended) set current window collapsed state. prefer using SetNextWindowCollapsed().
+    IMGUI_API void          SetWindowFocus();                                                           // (not recommended) set current window to be focused / top-most. prefer using SetNextWindowFocus().
+    IMGUI_API void          SetWindowFontScale(float scale);                                            // [OBSOLETE] set font scale. Adjust IO.FontGlobalScale if you want to scale all windows. This is an old API! For correct scaling, prefer to reload font + rebuild ImFontAtlas + call style.ScaleAllSizes().
+    IMGUI_API void          SetWindowPos(const char* name, const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond = 0);      // set named window position.
+    IMGUI_API void          SetWindowSize(const char* name, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond = 0);    // set named window size. set axis to 0.0f to force an auto-fit on this axis.
+    IMGUI_API void          SetWindowCollapsed(const char* name, bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond = 0);   // set named window collapsed state
+    IMGUI_API void          SetWindowFocus(const char* name);                                           // set named window to be focused / top-most. use NULL to remove focus.
+
+    // Content region
+    // - Retrieve available space from a given point. GetContentRegionAvail() is frequently useful.
+    // - Those functions are bound to be redesigned (they are confusing, incomplete and the Min/Max return values are in local window coordinates which increases confusion)
+    IMGUI_API ImVec2        GetContentRegionAvail();                                        // == GetContentRegionMax() - GetCursorPos()
+    IMGUI_API ImVec2        GetContentRegionMax();                                          // current content boundaries (typically window boundaries including scrolling, or current column boundaries), in windows coordinates
+    IMGUI_API ImVec2        GetWindowContentRegionMin();                                    // content boundaries min for the full window (roughly (0,0)-Scroll), in window coordinates
+    IMGUI_API ImVec2        GetWindowContentRegionMax();                                    // content boundaries max for the full window (roughly (0,0)+Size-Scroll) where Size can be override with SetNextWindowContentSize(), in window coordinates
+
+    // Windows Scrolling
+    IMGUI_API float         GetScrollX();                                                   // get scrolling amount [0 .. GetScrollMaxX()]
+    IMGUI_API float         GetScrollY();                                                   // get scrolling amount [0 .. GetScrollMaxY()]
+    IMGUI_API void          SetScrollX(float scroll_x);                                     // set scrolling amount [0 .. GetScrollMaxX()]
+    IMGUI_API void          SetScrollY(float scroll_y);                                     // set scrolling amount [0 .. GetScrollMaxY()]
+    IMGUI_API float         GetScrollMaxX();                                                // get maximum scrolling amount ~~ ContentSize.x - WindowSize.x - DecorationsSize.x
+    IMGUI_API float         GetScrollMaxY();                                                // get maximum scrolling amount ~~ ContentSize.y - WindowSize.y - DecorationsSize.y
+    IMGUI_API void          SetScrollHereX(float center_x_ratio = 0.5f);                    // adjust scrolling amount to make current cursor position visible. center_x_ratio=0.0: left, 0.5: center, 1.0: right. When using to make a "default/current item" visible, consider using SetItemDefaultFocus() instead.
+    IMGUI_API void          SetScrollHereY(float center_y_ratio = 0.5f);                    // adjust scrolling amount to make current cursor position visible. center_y_ratio=0.0: top, 0.5: center, 1.0: bottom. When using to make a "default/current item" visible, consider using SetItemDefaultFocus() instead.
+    IMGUI_API void          SetScrollFromPosX(float local_x, float center_x_ratio = 0.5f);  // adjust scrolling amount to make given position visible. Generally GetCursorStartPos() + offset to compute a valid position.
+    IMGUI_API void          SetScrollFromPosY(float local_y, float center_y_ratio = 0.5f);  // adjust scrolling amount to make given position visible. Generally GetCursorStartPos() + offset to compute a valid position.
+
+    // Parameters stacks (shared)
+    IMGUI_API void          PushFont(ImFont* font);                                         // use NULL as a shortcut to push default font
+    IMGUI_API void          PopFont();
+    IMGUI_API void          PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol idx, ImU32 col);                        // modify a style color. always use this if you modify the style after NewFrame().
+    IMGUI_API void          PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol idx, const ImVec4& col);
+    IMGUI_API void          PopStyleColor(int count = 1);
+    IMGUI_API void          PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar idx, float val);                     // modify a style float variable. always use this if you modify the style after NewFrame().
+    IMGUI_API void          PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar idx, const ImVec2& val);             // modify a style ImVec2 variable. always use this if you modify the style after NewFrame().
+    IMGUI_API void          PopStyleVar(int count = 1);
+    IMGUI_API void          PushAllowKeyboardFocus(bool allow_keyboard_focus);              // == tab stop enable. Allow focusing using TAB/Shift-TAB, enabled by default but you can disable it for certain widgets
+    IMGUI_API void          PopAllowKeyboardFocus();
+    IMGUI_API void          PushButtonRepeat(bool repeat);                                  // in 'repeat' mode, Button*() functions return repeated true in a typematic manner (using io.KeyRepeatDelay/io.KeyRepeatRate setting). Note that you can call IsItemActive() after any Button() to tell if the button is held in the current frame.
+    IMGUI_API void          PopButtonRepeat();
+
+    // Parameters stacks (current window)
+    IMGUI_API void          PushItemWidth(float item_width);                                // push width of items for common large "item+label" widgets. >0.0f: width in pixels, <0.0f align xx pixels to the right of window (so -FLT_MIN always align width to the right side).
+    IMGUI_API void          PopItemWidth();
+    IMGUI_API void          SetNextItemWidth(float item_width);                             // set width of the _next_ common large "item+label" widget. >0.0f: width in pixels, <0.0f align xx pixels to the right of window (so -FLT_MIN always align width to the right side)
+    IMGUI_API float         CalcItemWidth();                                                // width of item given pushed settings and current cursor position. NOT necessarily the width of last item unlike most 'Item' functions.
+    IMGUI_API void          PushTextWrapPos(float wrap_local_pos_x = 0.0f);                 // push word-wrapping position for Text*() commands. < 0.0f: no wrapping; 0.0f: wrap to end of window (or column); > 0.0f: wrap at 'wrap_pos_x' position in window local space
+    IMGUI_API void          PopTextWrapPos();
+
+    // Style read access
+    // - Use the style editor (ShowStyleEditor() function) to interactively see what the colors are)
+    IMGUI_API ImFont*       GetFont();                                                      // get current font
+    IMGUI_API float         GetFontSize();                                                  // get current font size (= height in pixels) of current font with current scale applied
+    IMGUI_API ImVec2        GetFontTexUvWhitePixel();                                       // get UV coordinate for a while pixel, useful to draw custom shapes via the ImDrawList API
+    IMGUI_API ImU32         GetColorU32(ImGuiCol idx, float alpha_mul = 1.0f);              // retrieve given style color with style alpha applied and optional extra alpha multiplier, packed as a 32-bit value suitable for ImDrawList
+    IMGUI_API ImU32         GetColorU32(const ImVec4& col);                                 // retrieve given color with style alpha applied, packed as a 32-bit value suitable for ImDrawList
+    IMGUI_API ImU32         GetColorU32(ImU32 col);                                         // retrieve given color with style alpha applied, packed as a 32-bit value suitable for ImDrawList
+    IMGUI_API const ImVec4& GetStyleColorVec4(ImGuiCol idx);                                // retrieve style color as stored in ImGuiStyle structure. use to feed back into PushStyleColor(), otherwise use GetColorU32() to get style color with style alpha baked in.
+
+    // Cursor / Layout
+    // - By "cursor" we mean the current output position.
+    // - The typical widget behavior is to output themselves at the current cursor position, then move the cursor one line down.
+    // - You can call SameLine() between widgets to undo the last carriage return and output at the right of the preceding widget.
+    // - Attention! We currently have inconsistencies between window-local and absolute positions we will aim to fix with future API:
+    //    Window-local coordinates:   SameLine(), GetCursorPos(), SetCursorPos(), GetCursorStartPos(), GetContentRegionMax(), GetWindowContentRegion*(), PushTextWrapPos()
+    //    Absolute coordinate:        GetCursorScreenPos(), SetCursorScreenPos(), all ImDrawList:: functions.
+    IMGUI_API void          Separator();                                                    // separator, generally horizontal. inside a menu bar or in horizontal layout mode, this becomes a vertical separator.
+    IMGUI_API void          SameLine(float offset_from_start_x=0.0f, float spacing=-1.0f);  // call between widgets or groups to layout them horizontally. X position given in window coordinates.
+    IMGUI_API void          NewLine();                                                      // undo a SameLine() or force a new line when in an horizontal-layout context.
+    IMGUI_API void          Spacing();                                                      // add vertical spacing.
+    IMGUI_API void          Dummy(const ImVec2& size);                                      // add a dummy item of given size. unlike InvisibleButton(), Dummy() won't take the mouse click or be navigable into.
+    IMGUI_API void          Indent(float indent_w = 0.0f);                                  // move content position toward the right, by indent_w, or style.IndentSpacing if indent_w <= 0
+    IMGUI_API void          Unindent(float indent_w = 0.0f);                                // move content position back to the left, by indent_w, or style.IndentSpacing if indent_w <= 0
+    IMGUI_API void          BeginGroup();                                                   // lock horizontal starting position
+    IMGUI_API void          EndGroup();                                                     // unlock horizontal starting position + capture the whole group bounding box into one "item" (so you can use IsItemHovered() or layout primitives such as SameLine() on whole group, etc.)
+    IMGUI_API ImVec2        GetCursorPos();                                                 // cursor position in window coordinates (relative to window position)
+    IMGUI_API float         GetCursorPosX();                                                //   (some functions are using window-relative coordinates, such as: GetCursorPos, GetCursorStartPos, GetContentRegionMax, GetWindowContentRegion* etc.
+    IMGUI_API float         GetCursorPosY();                                                //    other functions such as GetCursorScreenPos or everything in ImDrawList::
+    IMGUI_API void          SetCursorPos(const ImVec2& local_pos);                          //    are using the main, absolute coordinate system.
+    IMGUI_API void          SetCursorPosX(float local_x);                                   //    GetWindowPos() + GetCursorPos() == GetCursorScreenPos() etc.)
+    IMGUI_API void          SetCursorPosY(float local_y);                                   //
+    IMGUI_API ImVec2        GetCursorStartPos();                                            // initial cursor position in window coordinates
+    IMGUI_API ImVec2        GetCursorScreenPos();                                           // cursor position in absolute coordinates (useful to work with ImDrawList API). generally top-left == GetMainViewport()->Pos == (0,0) in single viewport mode, and bottom-right == GetMainViewport()->Pos+Size == io.DisplaySize in single-viewport mode.
+    IMGUI_API void          SetCursorScreenPos(const ImVec2& pos);                          // cursor position in absolute coordinates
+    IMGUI_API void          AlignTextToFramePadding();                                      // vertically align upcoming text baseline to FramePadding.y so that it will align properly to regularly framed items (call if you have text on a line before a framed item)
+    IMGUI_API float         GetTextLineHeight();                                            // ~ FontSize
+    IMGUI_API float         GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing();                                 // ~ FontSize + style.ItemSpacing.y (distance in pixels between 2 consecutive lines of text)
+    IMGUI_API float         GetFrameHeight();                                               // ~ FontSize + style.FramePadding.y * 2
+    IMGUI_API float         GetFrameHeightWithSpacing();                                    // ~ FontSize + style.FramePadding.y * 2 + style.ItemSpacing.y (distance in pixels between 2 consecutive lines of framed widgets)
+
+    // ID stack/scopes
+    // Read the FAQ (docs/FAQ.md or http://dearimgui.org/faq) for more details about how ID are handled in dear imgui.
+    // - Those questions are answered and impacted by understanding of the ID stack system:
+    //   - "Q: Why is my widget not reacting when I click on it?"
+    //   - "Q: How can I have widgets with an empty label?"
+    //   - "Q: How can I have multiple widgets with the same label?"
+    // - Short version: ID are hashes of the entire ID stack. If you are creating widgets in a loop you most likely
+    //   want to push a unique identifier (e.g. object pointer, loop index) to uniquely differentiate them.
+    // - You can also use the "Label##foobar" syntax within widget label to distinguish them from each others.
+    // - In this header file we use the "label"/"name" terminology to denote a string that will be displayed + used as an ID,
+    //   whereas "str_id" denote a string that is only used as an ID and not normally displayed.
+    IMGUI_API void          PushID(const char* str_id);                                     // push string into the ID stack (will hash string).
+    IMGUI_API void          PushID(const char* str_id_begin, const char* str_id_end);       // push string into the ID stack (will hash string).
+    IMGUI_API void          PushID(const void* ptr_id);                                     // push pointer into the ID stack (will hash pointer).
+    IMGUI_API void          PushID(int int_id);                                             // push integer into the ID stack (will hash integer).
+    IMGUI_API void          PopID();                                                        // pop from the ID stack.
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiID       GetID(const char* str_id);                                      // calculate unique ID (hash of whole ID stack + given parameter). e.g. if you want to query into ImGuiStorage yourself
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiID       GetID(const char* str_id_begin, const char* str_id_end);
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiID       GetID(const void* ptr_id);
+
+    // Widgets: Text
+    IMGUI_API void          TextUnformatted(const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL); // raw text without formatting. Roughly equivalent to Text("%s", text) but: A) doesn't require null terminated string if 'text_end' is specified, B) it's faster, no memory copy is done, no buffer size limits, recommended for long chunks of text.
+    IMGUI_API void          Text(const char* fmt, ...)                                      IM_FMTARGS(1); // formatted text
+    IMGUI_API void          TextV(const char* fmt, va_list args)                            IM_FMTLIST(1);
+    IMGUI_API void          TextColored(const ImVec4& col, const char* fmt, ...)            IM_FMTARGS(2); // shortcut for PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, col); Text(fmt, ...); PopStyleColor();
+    IMGUI_API void          TextColoredV(const ImVec4& col, const char* fmt, va_list args)  IM_FMTLIST(2);
+    IMGUI_API void          TextDisabled(const char* fmt, ...)                              IM_FMTARGS(1); // shortcut for PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]); Text(fmt, ...); PopStyleColor();
+    IMGUI_API void          TextDisabledV(const char* fmt, va_list args)                    IM_FMTLIST(1);
+    IMGUI_API void          TextWrapped(const char* fmt, ...)                               IM_FMTARGS(1); // shortcut for PushTextWrapPos(0.0f); Text(fmt, ...); PopTextWrapPos();. Note that this won't work on an auto-resizing window if there's no other widgets to extend the window width, yoy may need to set a size using SetNextWindowSize().
+    IMGUI_API void          TextWrappedV(const char* fmt, va_list args)                     IM_FMTLIST(1);
+    IMGUI_API void          LabelText(const char* label, const char* fmt, ...)              IM_FMTARGS(2); // display text+label aligned the same way as value+label widgets
+    IMGUI_API void          LabelTextV(const char* label, const char* fmt, va_list args)    IM_FMTLIST(2);
+    IMGUI_API void          BulletText(const char* fmt, ...)                                IM_FMTARGS(1); // shortcut for Bullet()+Text()
+    IMGUI_API void          BulletTextV(const char* fmt, va_list args)                      IM_FMTLIST(1);
+
+    // Widgets: Main
+    // - Most widgets return true when the value has been changed or when pressed/selected
+    // - You may also use one of the many IsItemXXX functions (e.g. IsItemActive, IsItemHovered, etc.) to query widget state.
+    IMGUI_API bool          Button(const char* label, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0));   // button
+    IMGUI_API bool          SmallButton(const char* label);                                 // button with FramePadding=(0,0) to easily embed within text
+    IMGUI_API bool          InvisibleButton(const char* str_id, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiButtonFlags flags = 0); // flexible button behavior without the visuals, frequently useful to build custom behaviors using the public api (along with IsItemActive, IsItemHovered, etc.)
+    IMGUI_API bool          ArrowButton(const char* str_id, ImGuiDir dir);                  // square button with an arrow shape
+    IMGUI_API void          Image(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0 = ImVec2(0, 0), const ImVec2& uv1 = ImVec2(1,1), const ImVec4& tint_col = ImVec4(1,1,1,1), const ImVec4& border_col = ImVec4(0,0,0,0));
+    IMGUI_API bool          ImageButton(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0 = ImVec2(0, 0),  const ImVec2& uv1 = ImVec2(1,1), int frame_padding = -1, const ImVec4& bg_col = ImVec4(0,0,0,0), const ImVec4& tint_col = ImVec4(1,1,1,1));    // <0 frame_padding uses default frame padding settings. 0 for no padding
+    IMGUI_API bool          Checkbox(const char* label, bool* v);
+    IMGUI_API bool          CheckboxFlags(const char* label, int* flags, int flags_value);
+    IMGUI_API bool          CheckboxFlags(const char* label, unsigned int* flags, unsigned int flags_value);
+    IMGUI_API bool          RadioButton(const char* label, bool active);                    // use with e.g. if (RadioButton("one", my_value==1)) { my_value = 1; }
+    IMGUI_API bool          RadioButton(const char* label, int* v, int v_button);           // shortcut to handle the above pattern when value is an integer
+    IMGUI_API void          ProgressBar(float fraction, const ImVec2& size_arg = ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, 0), const char* overlay = NULL);
+    IMGUI_API void          Bullet();                                                       // draw a small circle + keep the cursor on the same line. advance cursor x position by GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing(), same distance that TreeNode() uses
+
+    // Widgets: Combo Box
+    // - The BeginCombo()/EndCombo() api allows you to manage your contents and selection state however you want it, by creating e.g. Selectable() items.
+    // - The old Combo() api are helpers over BeginCombo()/EndCombo() which are kept available for convenience purpose. This is analogous to how ListBox are created.
+    IMGUI_API bool          BeginCombo(const char* label, const char* preview_value, ImGuiComboFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API void          EndCombo(); // only call EndCombo() if BeginCombo() returns true!
+    IMGUI_API bool          Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* const items[], int items_count, int popup_max_height_in_items = -1);
+    IMGUI_API bool          Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* items_separated_by_zeros, int popup_max_height_in_items = -1);      // Separate items with \0 within a string, end item-list with \0\0. e.g. "One\0Two\0Three\0"
+    IMGUI_API bool          Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, bool(*items_getter)(void* data, int idx, const char** out_text), void* data, int items_count, int popup_max_height_in_items = -1);
+
+    // Widgets: Drag Sliders
+    // - CTRL+Click on any drag box to turn them into an input box. Manually input values aren't clamped by default and can go off-bounds. Use ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp to always clamp.
+    // - For all the Float2/Float3/Float4/Int2/Int3/Int4 versions of every functions, note that a 'float v[X]' function argument is the same as 'float* v',
+    //   the array syntax is just a way to document the number of elements that are expected to be accessible. You can pass address of your first element out of a contiguous set, e.g. &myvector.x
+    // - Adjust format string to decorate the value with a prefix, a suffix, or adapt the editing and display precision e.g. "%.3f" -> 1.234; "%5.2f secs" -> 01.23 secs; "Biscuit: %.0f" -> Biscuit: 1; etc.
+    // - Format string may also be set to NULL or use the default format ("%f" or "%d").
+    // - Speed are per-pixel of mouse movement (v_speed=0.2f: mouse needs to move by 5 pixels to increase value by 1). For gamepad/keyboard navigation, minimum speed is Max(v_speed, minimum_step_at_given_precision).
+    // - Use v_min < v_max to clamp edits to given limits. Note that CTRL+Click manual input can override those limits if ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp is not used.
+    // - Use v_max = FLT_MAX / INT_MAX etc to avoid clamping to a maximum, same with v_min = -FLT_MAX / INT_MIN to avoid clamping to a minimum.
+    // - We use the same sets of flags for DragXXX() and SliderXXX() functions as the features are the same and it makes it easier to swap them.
+    // - Legacy: Pre-1.78 there are DragXXX() function signatures that takes a final `float power=1.0f' argument instead of the `ImGuiSliderFlags flags=0' argument.
+    //   If you get a warning converting a float to ImGuiSliderFlags, read https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/3361
+    IMGUI_API bool          DragFloat(const char* label, float* v, float v_speed = 1.0f, float v_min = 0.0f, float v_max = 0.0f, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);     // If v_min >= v_max we have no bound
+    IMGUI_API bool          DragFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], float v_speed = 1.0f, float v_min = 0.0f, float v_max = 0.0f, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          DragFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], float v_speed = 1.0f, float v_min = 0.0f, float v_max = 0.0f, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          DragFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], float v_speed = 1.0f, float v_min = 0.0f, float v_max = 0.0f, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          DragFloatRange2(const char* label, float* v_current_min, float* v_current_max, float v_speed = 1.0f, float v_min = 0.0f, float v_max = 0.0f, const char* format = "%.3f", const char* format_max = NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          DragInt(const char* label, int* v, float v_speed = 1.0f, int v_min = 0, int v_max = 0, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);  // If v_min >= v_max we have no bound
+    IMGUI_API bool          DragInt2(const char* label, int v[2], float v_speed = 1.0f, int v_min = 0, int v_max = 0, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          DragInt3(const char* label, int v[3], float v_speed = 1.0f, int v_min = 0, int v_max = 0, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          DragInt4(const char* label, int v[4], float v_speed = 1.0f, int v_min = 0, int v_max = 0, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          DragIntRange2(const char* label, int* v_current_min, int* v_current_max, float v_speed = 1.0f, int v_min = 0, int v_max = 0, const char* format = "%d", const char* format_max = NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          DragScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, float v_speed = 1.0f, const void* p_min = NULL, const void* p_max = NULL, const char* format = NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          DragScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, int components, float v_speed = 1.0f, const void* p_min = NULL, const void* p_max = NULL, const char* format = NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
+
+    // Widgets: Regular Sliders
+    // - CTRL+Click on any slider to turn them into an input box. Manually input values aren't clamped by default and can go off-bounds. Use ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp to always clamp.
+    // - Adjust format string to decorate the value with a prefix, a suffix, or adapt the editing and display precision e.g. "%.3f" -> 1.234; "%5.2f secs" -> 01.23 secs; "Biscuit: %.0f" -> Biscuit: 1; etc.
+    // - Format string may also be set to NULL or use the default format ("%f" or "%d").
+    // - Legacy: Pre-1.78 there are SliderXXX() function signatures that takes a final `float power=1.0f' argument instead of the `ImGuiSliderFlags flags=0' argument.
+    //   If you get a warning converting a float to ImGuiSliderFlags, read https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/3361
+    IMGUI_API bool          SliderFloat(const char* label, float* v, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);     // adjust format to decorate the value with a prefix or a suffix for in-slider labels or unit display.
+    IMGUI_API bool          SliderFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          SliderFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          SliderFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          SliderAngle(const char* label, float* v_rad, float v_degrees_min = -360.0f, float v_degrees_max = +360.0f, const char* format = "%.0f deg", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          SliderInt(const char* label, int* v, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          SliderInt2(const char* label, int v[2], int v_min, int v_max, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          SliderInt3(const char* label, int v[3], int v_min, int v_max, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          SliderInt4(const char* label, int v[4], int v_min, int v_max, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          SliderScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format = NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          SliderScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, int components, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format = NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          VSliderFloat(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, float* v, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          VSliderInt(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, int* v, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format = "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          VSliderScalar(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format = NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags flags = 0);
+
+    // Widgets: Input with Keyboard
+    // - If you want to use InputText() with std::string or any custom dynamic string type, see misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h and comments in imgui_demo.cpp.
+    // - Most of the ImGuiInputTextFlags flags are only useful for InputText() and not for InputFloatX, InputIntX, InputDouble etc.
+    IMGUI_API bool          InputText(const char* label, char* buf, size_t buf_size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback = NULL, void* user_data = NULL);
+    IMGUI_API bool          InputTextMultiline(const char* label, char* buf, size_t buf_size, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0), ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback = NULL, void* user_data = NULL);
+    IMGUI_API bool          InputTextWithHint(const char* label, const char* hint, char* buf, size_t buf_size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback = NULL, void* user_data = NULL);
+    IMGUI_API bool          InputFloat(const char* label, float* v, float step = 0.0f, float step_fast = 0.0f, const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          InputFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          InputFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          InputFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], const char* format = "%.3f", ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          InputInt(const char* label, int* v, int step = 1, int step_fast = 100, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          InputInt2(const char* label, int v[2], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          InputInt3(const char* label, int v[3], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          InputInt4(const char* label, int v[4], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          InputDouble(const char* label, double* v, double step = 0.0, double step_fast = 0.0, const char* format = "%.6f", ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          InputScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_step = NULL, const void* p_step_fast = NULL, const char* format = NULL, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          InputScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, int components, const void* p_step = NULL, const void* p_step_fast = NULL, const char* format = NULL, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0);
+
+    // Widgets: Color Editor/Picker (tip: the ColorEdit* functions have a little color square that can be left-clicked to open a picker, and right-clicked to open an option menu.)
+    // - Note that in C++ a 'float v[X]' function argument is the _same_ as 'float* v', the array syntax is just a way to document the number of elements that are expected to be accessible.
+    // - You can pass the address of a first float element out of a contiguous structure, e.g. &myvector.x
+    IMGUI_API bool          ColorEdit3(const char* label, float col[3], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          ColorEdit4(const char* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          ColorPicker3(const char* label, float col[3], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          ColorPicker4(const char* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0, const float* ref_col = NULL);
+    IMGUI_API bool          ColorButton(const char* desc_id, const ImVec4& col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0)); // display a color square/button, hover for details, return true when pressed.
+    IMGUI_API void          SetColorEditOptions(ImGuiColorEditFlags flags);                     // initialize current options (generally on application startup) if you want to select a default format, picker type, etc. User will be able to change many settings, unless you pass the _NoOptions flag to your calls.
+
+    // Widgets: Trees
+    // - TreeNode functions return true when the node is open, in which case you need to also call TreePop() when you are finished displaying the tree node contents.
+    IMGUI_API bool          TreeNode(const char* label);
+    IMGUI_API bool          TreeNode(const char* str_id, const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(2);   // helper variation to easily decorelate the id from the displayed string. Read the FAQ about why and how to use ID. to align arbitrary text at the same level as a TreeNode() you can use Bullet().
+    IMGUI_API bool          TreeNode(const void* ptr_id, const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(2);   // "
+    IMGUI_API bool          TreeNodeV(const char* str_id, const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(2);
+    IMGUI_API bool          TreeNodeV(const void* ptr_id, const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(2);
+    IMGUI_API bool          TreeNodeEx(const char* label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          TreeNodeEx(const char* str_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(3);
+    IMGUI_API bool          TreeNodeEx(const void* ptr_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(3);
+    IMGUI_API bool          TreeNodeExV(const char* str_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(3);
+    IMGUI_API bool          TreeNodeExV(const void* ptr_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(3);
+    IMGUI_API void          TreePush(const char* str_id);                                       // ~ Indent()+PushId(). Already called by TreeNode() when returning true, but you can call TreePush/TreePop yourself if desired.
+    IMGUI_API void          TreePush(const void* ptr_id = NULL);                                // "
+    IMGUI_API void          TreePop();                                                          // ~ Unindent()+PopId()
+    IMGUI_API float         GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing();                                        // horizontal distance preceding label when using TreeNode*() or Bullet() == (g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.x*2) for a regular unframed TreeNode
+    IMGUI_API bool          CollapsingHeader(const char* label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags = 0);  // if returning 'true' the header is open. doesn't indent nor push on ID stack. user doesn't have to call TreePop().
+    IMGUI_API bool          CollapsingHeader(const char* label, bool* p_visible, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags = 0); // when 'p_visible != NULL': if '*p_visible==true' display an additional small close button on upper right of the header which will set the bool to false when clicked, if '*p_visible==false' don't display the header.
+    IMGUI_API void          SetNextItemOpen(bool is_open, ImGuiCond cond = 0);                  // set next TreeNode/CollapsingHeader open state.
+
+    // Widgets: Selectables
+    // - A selectable highlights when hovered, and can display another color when selected.
+    // - Neighbors selectable extend their highlight bounds in order to leave no gap between them. This is so a series of selected Selectable appear contiguous.
+    IMGUI_API bool          Selectable(const char* label, bool selected = false, ImGuiSelectableFlags flags = 0, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0)); // "bool selected" carry the selection state (read-only). Selectable() is clicked is returns true so you can modify your selection state. size.x==0.0: use remaining width, size.x>0.0: specify width. size.y==0.0: use label height, size.y>0.0: specify height
+    IMGUI_API bool          Selectable(const char* label, bool* p_selected, ImGuiSelectableFlags flags = 0, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0));      // "bool* p_selected" point to the selection state (read-write), as a convenient helper.
+
+    // Widgets: List Boxes
+    // - This is essentially a thin wrapper to using BeginChild/EndChild with some stylistic changes.
+    // - The BeginListBox()/EndListBox() api allows you to manage your contents and selection state however you want it, by creating e.g. Selectable() or any items.
+    // - The simplified/old ListBox() api are helpers over BeginListBox()/EndListBox() which are kept available for convenience purpose. This is analoguous to how Combos are created.
+    // - Choose frame width:   size.x > 0.0f: custom  /  size.x < 0.0f or -FLT_MIN: right-align   /  size.x = 0.0f (default): use current ItemWidth
+    // - Choose frame height:  size.y > 0.0f: custom  /  size.y < 0.0f or -FLT_MIN: bottom-align  /  size.y = 0.0f (default): arbitrary default height which can fit ~7 items
+    IMGUI_API bool          BeginListBox(const char* label, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0)); // open a framed scrolling region
+    IMGUI_API void          EndListBox();                                                       // only call EndListBox() if BeginListBox() returned true!
+    IMGUI_API bool          ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* const items[], int items_count, int height_in_items = -1);
+    IMGUI_API bool          ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, bool (*items_getter)(void* data, int idx, const char** out_text), void* data, int items_count, int height_in_items = -1);
+
+    // Widgets: Data Plotting
+    // - Consider using ImPlot (https://github.com/epezent/implot) which is much better!
+    IMGUI_API void          PlotLines(const char* label, const float* values, int values_count, int values_offset = 0, const char* overlay_text = NULL, float scale_min = FLT_MAX, float scale_max = FLT_MAX, ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0, 0), int stride = sizeof(float));
+    IMGUI_API void          PlotLines(const char* label, float(*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset = 0, const char* overlay_text = NULL, float scale_min = FLT_MAX, float scale_max = FLT_MAX, ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0, 0));
+    IMGUI_API void          PlotHistogram(const char* label, const float* values, int values_count, int values_offset = 0, const char* overlay_text = NULL, float scale_min = FLT_MAX, float scale_max = FLT_MAX, ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0, 0), int stride = sizeof(float));
+    IMGUI_API void          PlotHistogram(const char* label, float(*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset = 0, const char* overlay_text = NULL, float scale_min = FLT_MAX, float scale_max = FLT_MAX, ImVec2 graph_size = ImVec2(0, 0));
+
+    // Widgets: Value() Helpers.
+    // - Those are merely shortcut to calling Text() with a format string. Output single value in "name: value" format (tip: freely declare more in your code to handle your types. you can add functions to the ImGui namespace)
+    IMGUI_API void          Value(const char* prefix, bool b);
+    IMGUI_API void          Value(const char* prefix, int v);
+    IMGUI_API void          Value(const char* prefix, unsigned int v);
+    IMGUI_API void          Value(const char* prefix, float v, const char* float_format = NULL);
+
+    // Widgets: Menus
+    // - Use BeginMenuBar() on a window ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar to append to its menu bar.
+    // - Use BeginMainMenuBar() to create a menu bar at the top of the screen and append to it.
+    // - Use BeginMenu() to create a menu. You can call BeginMenu() multiple time with the same identifier to append more items to it.
+    // - Not that MenuItem() keyboardshortcuts are displayed as a convenience but _not processed_ by Dear ImGui at the moment.
+    IMGUI_API bool          BeginMenuBar();                                                     // append to menu-bar of current window (requires ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar flag set on parent window).
+    IMGUI_API void          EndMenuBar();                                                       // only call EndMenuBar() if BeginMenuBar() returns true!
+    IMGUI_API bool          BeginMainMenuBar();                                                 // create and append to a full screen menu-bar.
+    IMGUI_API void          EndMainMenuBar();                                                   // only call EndMainMenuBar() if BeginMainMenuBar() returns true!
+    IMGUI_API bool          BeginMenu(const char* label, bool enabled = true);                  // create a sub-menu entry. only call EndMenu() if this returns true!
+    IMGUI_API void          EndMenu();                                                          // only call EndMenu() if BeginMenu() returns true!
+    IMGUI_API bool          MenuItem(const char* label, const char* shortcut = NULL, bool selected = false, bool enabled = true);  // return true when activated.
+    IMGUI_API bool          MenuItem(const char* label, const char* shortcut, bool* p_selected, bool enabled = true);              // return true when activated + toggle (*p_selected) if p_selected != NULL
+
+    // Tooltips
+    // - Tooltip are windows following the mouse. They do not take focus away.
+    IMGUI_API void          BeginTooltip();                                                     // begin/append a tooltip window. to create full-featured tooltip (with any kind of items).
+    IMGUI_API void          EndTooltip();
+    IMGUI_API void          SetTooltip(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(1);                     // set a text-only tooltip, typically use with ImGui::IsItemHovered(). override any previous call to SetTooltip().
+    IMGUI_API void          SetTooltipV(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1);
+
+    // Popups, Modals
+    //  - They block normal mouse hovering detection (and therefore most mouse interactions) behind them.
+    //  - If not modal: they can be closed by clicking anywhere outside them, or by pressing ESCAPE.
+    //  - Their visibility state (~bool) is held internally instead of being held by the programmer as we are used to with regular Begin*() calls.
+    //  - The 3 properties above are related: we need to retain popup visibility state in the library because popups may be closed as any time.
+    //  - You can bypass the hovering restriction by using ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup when calling IsItemHovered() or IsWindowHovered().
+    //  - IMPORTANT: Popup identifiers are relative to the current ID stack, so OpenPopup and BeginPopup generally needs to be at the same level of the stack.
+    //    This is sometimes leading to confusing mistakes. May rework this in the future.
+
+    // Popups: begin/end functions
+    //  - BeginPopup(): query popup state, if open start appending into the window. Call EndPopup() afterwards. ImGuiWindowFlags are forwarded to the window.
+    //  - BeginPopupModal(): block every interactions behind the window, cannot be closed by user, add a dimming background, has a title bar.
+    IMGUI_API bool          BeginPopup(const char* str_id, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0);                         // return true if the popup is open, and you can start outputting to it.
+    IMGUI_API bool          BeginPopupModal(const char* name, bool* p_open = NULL, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0); // return true if the modal is open, and you can start outputting to it.
+    IMGUI_API void          EndPopup();                                                                         // only call EndPopup() if BeginPopupXXX() returns true!
+
+    // Popups: open/close functions
+    //  - OpenPopup(): set popup state to open. ImGuiPopupFlags are available for opening options.
+    //  - If not modal: they can be closed by clicking anywhere outside them, or by pressing ESCAPE.
+    //  - CloseCurrentPopup(): use inside the BeginPopup()/EndPopup() scope to close manually.
+    //  - CloseCurrentPopup() is called by default by Selectable()/MenuItem() when activated (FIXME: need some options).
+    //  - Use ImGuiPopupFlags_NoOpenOverExistingPopup to avoid opening a popup if there's already one at the same level. This is equivalent to e.g. testing for !IsAnyPopupOpen() prior to OpenPopup().
+    //  - Use IsWindowAppearing() after BeginPopup() to tell if a window just opened.
+    //  - IMPORTANT: Notice that for OpenPopupOnItemClick() we exceptionally default flags to 1 (== ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight) for backward compatibility with older API taking 'int mouse_button = 1' parameter
+    IMGUI_API void          OpenPopup(const char* str_id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = 0);                     // call to mark popup as open (don't call every frame!).
+    IMGUI_API void          OpenPopup(ImGuiID id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = 0);                             // id overload to facilitate calling from nested stacks
+    IMGUI_API void          OpenPopupOnItemClick(const char* str_id = NULL, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = 1);   // helper to open popup when clicked on last item. Default to ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight == 1. (note: actually triggers on the mouse _released_ event to be consistent with popup behaviors)
+    IMGUI_API void          CloseCurrentPopup();                                                                // manually close the popup we have begin-ed into.
+
+    // Popups: open+begin combined functions helpers
+    //  - Helpers to do OpenPopup+BeginPopup where the Open action is triggered by e.g. hovering an item and right-clicking.
+    //  - They are convenient to easily create context menus, hence the name.
+    //  - IMPORTANT: Notice that BeginPopupContextXXX takes ImGuiPopupFlags just like OpenPopup() and unlike BeginPopup(). For full consistency, we may add ImGuiWindowFlags to the BeginPopupContextXXX functions in the future.
+    //  - IMPORTANT: Notice that we exceptionally default their flags to 1 (== ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight) for backward compatibility with older API taking 'int mouse_button = 1' parameter, so if you add other flags remember to re-add the ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight.
+    IMGUI_API bool          BeginPopupContextItem(const char* str_id = NULL, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = 1);  // open+begin popup when clicked on last item. Use str_id==NULL to associate the popup to previous item. If you want to use that on a non-interactive item such as Text() you need to pass in an explicit ID here. read comments in .cpp!
+    IMGUI_API bool          BeginPopupContextWindow(const char* str_id = NULL, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = 1);// open+begin popup when clicked on current window.
+    IMGUI_API bool          BeginPopupContextVoid(const char* str_id = NULL, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = 1);  // open+begin popup when clicked in void (where there are no windows).
+
+    // Popups: query functions
+    //  - IsPopupOpen(): return true if the popup is open at the current BeginPopup() level of the popup stack.
+    //  - IsPopupOpen() with ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupId: return true if any popup is open at the current BeginPopup() level of the popup stack.
+    //  - IsPopupOpen() with ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupId + ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupLevel: return true if any popup is open.
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsPopupOpen(const char* str_id, ImGuiPopupFlags flags = 0);                         // return true if the popup is open.
+
+    // Tables
+    // - Full-featured replacement for old Columns API.
+    // - See Demo->Tables for demo code. See top of imgui_tables.cpp for general commentary.
+    // - See ImGuiTableFlags_ and ImGuiTableColumnFlags_ enums for a description of available flags.
+    // The typical call flow is:
+    // - 1. Call BeginTable(), early out if returning false.
+    // - 2. Optionally call TableSetupColumn() to submit column name/flags/defaults.
+    // - 3. Optionally call TableSetupScrollFreeze() to request scroll freezing of columns/rows.
+    // - 4. Optionally call TableHeadersRow() to submit a header row. Names are pulled from TableSetupColumn() data.
+    // - 5. Populate contents:
+    //    - In most situations you can use TableNextRow() + TableSetColumnIndex(N) to start appending into a column.
+    //    - If you are using tables as a sort of grid, where every columns is holding the same type of contents,
+    //      you may prefer using TableNextColumn() instead of TableNextRow() + TableSetColumnIndex().
+    //      TableNextColumn() will automatically wrap-around into the next row if needed.
+    //    - IMPORTANT: Comparatively to the old Columns() API, we need to call TableNextColumn() for the first column!
+    //    - Summary of possible call flow:
+    //        --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+    //        TableNextRow() -> TableSetColumnIndex(0) -> Text("Hello 0") -> TableSetColumnIndex(1) -> Text("Hello 1")  // OK
+    //        TableNextRow() -> TableNextColumn()      -> Text("Hello 0") -> TableNextColumn()      -> Text("Hello 1")  // OK
+    //                          TableNextColumn()      -> Text("Hello 0") -> TableNextColumn()      -> Text("Hello 1")  // OK: TableNextColumn() automatically gets to next row!
+    //        TableNextRow()                           -> Text("Hello 0")                                               // Not OK! Missing TableSetColumnIndex() or TableNextColumn()! Text will not appear!
+    //        --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+    // - 5. Call EndTable()
+    IMGUI_API bool          BeginTable(const char* str_id, int column, ImGuiTableFlags flags = 0, const ImVec2& outer_size = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f), float inner_width = 0.0f);
+    IMGUI_API void          EndTable();                                         // only call EndTable() if BeginTable() returns true!
+    IMGUI_API void          TableNextRow(ImGuiTableRowFlags row_flags = 0, float min_row_height = 0.0f); // append into the first cell of a new row.
+    IMGUI_API bool          TableNextColumn();                                  // append into the next column (or first column of next row if currently in last column). Return true when column is visible.
+    IMGUI_API bool          TableSetColumnIndex(int column_n);                  // append into the specified column. Return true when column is visible.
+
+    // Tables: Headers & Columns declaration
+    // - Use TableSetupColumn() to specify label, resizing policy, default width/weight, id, various other flags etc.
+    // - Use TableHeadersRow() to create a header row and automatically submit a TableHeader() for each column.
+    //   Headers are required to perform: reordering, sorting, and opening the context menu.
+    //   The context menu can also be made available in columns body using ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody.
+    // - You may manually submit headers using TableNextRow() + TableHeader() calls, but this is only useful in
+    //   some advanced use cases (e.g. adding custom widgets in header row).
+    // - Use TableSetupScrollFreeze() to lock columns/rows so they stay visible when scrolled.
+    IMGUI_API void          TableSetupColumn(const char* label, ImGuiTableColumnFlags flags = 0, float init_width_or_weight = 0.0f, ImGuiID user_id = 0);
+    IMGUI_API void          TableSetupScrollFreeze(int cols, int rows);         // lock columns/rows so they stay visible when scrolled.
+    IMGUI_API void          TableHeadersRow();                                  // submit all headers cells based on data provided to TableSetupColumn() + submit context menu
+    IMGUI_API void          TableHeader(const char* label);                     // submit one header cell manually (rarely used)
+
+    // Tables: Sorting & Miscellaneous functions
+    // - Sorting: call TableGetSortSpecs() to retrieve latest sort specs for the table. NULL when not sorting.
+    //   When 'sort_specs->SpecsDirty == true' you should sort your data. It will be true when sorting specs have
+    //   changed since last call, or the first time. Make sure to set 'SpecsDirty = false' after sorting,
+    //   else you may wastefully sort your data every frame!
+    // - Functions args 'int column_n' treat the default value of -1 as the same as passing the current column index.
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiTableSortSpecs*  TableGetSortSpecs();                        // get latest sort specs for the table (NULL if not sorting).  Lifetime: don't hold on this pointer over multiple frames or past any subsequent call to BeginTable().
+    IMGUI_API int                   TableGetColumnCount();                      // return number of columns (value passed to BeginTable)
+    IMGUI_API int                   TableGetColumnIndex();                      // return current column index.
+    IMGUI_API int                   TableGetRowIndex();                         // return current row index.
+    IMGUI_API const char*           TableGetColumnName(int column_n = -1);      // return "" if column didn't have a name declared by TableSetupColumn(). Pass -1 to use current column.
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiTableColumnFlags TableGetColumnFlags(int column_n = -1);     // return column flags so you can query their Enabled/Visible/Sorted/Hovered status flags. Pass -1 to use current column.
+    IMGUI_API void                  TableSetColumnEnabled(int column_n, bool v);// change user accessible enabled/disabled state of a column. Set to false to hide the column. User can use the context menu to change this themselves (right-click in headers, or right-click in columns body with ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody)
+    IMGUI_API void                  TableSetBgColor(ImGuiTableBgTarget target, ImU32 color, int column_n = -1);  // change the color of a cell, row, or column. See ImGuiTableBgTarget_ flags for details.
+
+    // Legacy Columns API (prefer using Tables!)
+    // - You can also use SameLine(pos_x) to mimic simplified columns.
+    IMGUI_API void          Columns(int count = 1, const char* id = NULL, bool border = true);
+    IMGUI_API void          NextColumn();                                                       // next column, defaults to current row or next row if the current row is finished
+    IMGUI_API int           GetColumnIndex();                                                   // get current column index
+    IMGUI_API float         GetColumnWidth(int column_index = -1);                              // get column width (in pixels). pass -1 to use current column
+    IMGUI_API void          SetColumnWidth(int column_index, float width);                      // set column width (in pixels). pass -1 to use current column
+    IMGUI_API float         GetColumnOffset(int column_index = -1);                             // get position of column line (in pixels, from the left side of the contents region). pass -1 to use current column, otherwise 0..GetColumnsCount() inclusive. column 0 is typically 0.0f
+    IMGUI_API void          SetColumnOffset(int column_index, float offset_x);                  // set position of column line (in pixels, from the left side of the contents region). pass -1 to use current column
+    IMGUI_API int           GetColumnsCount();
+
+    // Tab Bars, Tabs
+    // Note: Tabs are automatically created by the docking system. Use this to create tab bars/tabs yourself without docking being involved.
+    IMGUI_API bool          BeginTabBar(const char* str_id, ImGuiTabBarFlags flags = 0);        // create and append into a TabBar
+    IMGUI_API void          EndTabBar();                                                        // only call EndTabBar() if BeginTabBar() returns true!
+    IMGUI_API bool          BeginTabItem(const char* label, bool* p_open = NULL, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags = 0); // create a Tab. Returns true if the Tab is selected.
+    IMGUI_API void          EndTabItem();                                                       // only call EndTabItem() if BeginTabItem() returns true!
+    IMGUI_API bool          TabItemButton(const char* label, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags = 0);      // create a Tab behaving like a button. return true when clicked. cannot be selected in the tab bar.
+    IMGUI_API void          SetTabItemClosed(const char* tab_or_docked_window_label);           // notify TabBar or Docking system of a closed tab/window ahead (useful to reduce visual flicker on reorderable tab bars). For tab-bar: call after BeginTabBar() and before Tab submissions. Otherwise call with a window name.
+
+    // Docking
+    // [BETA API] Enable with io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_DockingEnable.
+    // Note: You can use most Docking facilities without calling any API. You DO NOT need to call DockSpace() to use Docking!
+    // - Drag from window title bar or their tab to dock/undock. Hold SHIFT to disable docking/undocking.
+    // - Drag from window menu button (upper-left button) to undock an entire node (all windows).
+    // - When io.ConfigDockingWithShift == true, you instead need to hold SHIFT to _enable_ docking/undocking.
+    // About dockspaces:
+    // - Use DockSpace() to create an explicit dock node _within_ an existing window. See Docking demo for details.
+    // - Use DockSpaceOverViewport() to create an explicit dock node covering the screen or a specific viewport.
+    //   This is often used with ImGuiDockNodeFlags_PassthruCentralNode.
+    // - Important: Dockspaces need to be submitted _before_ any window they can host. Submit it early in your frame!
+    // - Important: Dockspaces need to be kept alive if hidden, otherwise windows docked into it will be undocked.
+    //   e.g. if you have multiple tabs with a dockspace inside each tab: submit the non-visible dockspaces with ImGuiDockNodeFlags_KeepAliveOnly.
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiID       DockSpace(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0), ImGuiDockNodeFlags flags = 0, const ImGuiWindowClass* window_class = NULL);
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiID       DockSpaceOverViewport(const ImGuiViewport* viewport = NULL, ImGuiDockNodeFlags flags = 0, const ImGuiWindowClass* window_class = NULL);
+    IMGUI_API void          SetNextWindowDockID(ImGuiID dock_id, ImGuiCond cond = 0);           // set next window dock id
+    IMGUI_API void          SetNextWindowClass(const ImGuiWindowClass* window_class);           // set next window class (control docking compatibility + provide hints to platform backend via custom viewport flags and platform parent/child relationship)
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiID       GetWindowDockID();
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsWindowDocked();                                                   // is current window docked into another window?
+
+    // Logging/Capture
+    // - All text output from the interface can be captured into tty/file/clipboard. By default, tree nodes are automatically opened during logging.
+    IMGUI_API void          LogToTTY(int auto_open_depth = -1);                                 // start logging to tty (stdout)
+    IMGUI_API void          LogToFile(int auto_open_depth = -1, const char* filename = NULL);   // start logging to file
+    IMGUI_API void          LogToClipboard(int auto_open_depth = -1);                           // start logging to OS clipboard
+    IMGUI_API void          LogFinish();                                                        // stop logging (close file, etc.)
+    IMGUI_API void          LogButtons();                                                       // helper to display buttons for logging to tty/file/clipboard
+    IMGUI_API void          LogText(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(1);                        // pass text data straight to log (without being displayed)
+    IMGUI_API void          LogTextV(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1);
+
+    // Drag and Drop
+    // - On source items, call BeginDragDropSource(), if it returns true also call SetDragDropPayload() + EndDragDropSource().
+    // - On target candidates, call BeginDragDropTarget(), if it returns true also call AcceptDragDropPayload() + EndDragDropTarget().
+    // - If you stop calling BeginDragDropSource() the payload is preserved however it won't have a preview tooltip (we currently display a fallback "..." tooltip, see #1725)
+    // - An item can be both drag source and drop target.
+    IMGUI_API bool          BeginDragDropSource(ImGuiDragDropFlags flags = 0);                                      // call after submitting an item which may be dragged. when this return true, you can call SetDragDropPayload() + EndDragDropSource()
+    IMGUI_API bool          SetDragDropPayload(const char* type, const void* data, size_t sz, ImGuiCond cond = 0);  // type is a user defined string of maximum 32 characters. Strings starting with '_' are reserved for dear imgui internal types. Data is copied and held by imgui. Return true when payload has been accepted.
+    IMGUI_API void          EndDragDropSource();                                                                    // only call EndDragDropSource() if BeginDragDropSource() returns true!
+    IMGUI_API bool                  BeginDragDropTarget();                                                          // call after submitting an item that may receive a payload. If this returns true, you can call AcceptDragDropPayload() + EndDragDropTarget()
+    IMGUI_API const ImGuiPayload*   AcceptDragDropPayload(const char* type, ImGuiDragDropFlags flags = 0);          // accept contents of a given type. If ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptBeforeDelivery is set you can peek into the payload before the mouse button is released.
+    IMGUI_API void                  EndDragDropTarget();                                                            // only call EndDragDropTarget() if BeginDragDropTarget() returns true!
+    IMGUI_API const ImGuiPayload*   GetDragDropPayload();                                                           // peek directly into the current payload from anywhere. may return NULL. use ImGuiPayload::IsDataType() to test for the payload type.
+
+    // Disabling [BETA API]
+    // - Disable all user interactions and dim items visuals (applying style.DisabledAlpha over current colors)
+    // - Those can be nested but it cannot be used to enable an already disabled section (a single BeginDisabled(true) in the stack is enough to keep everything disabled)
+    // - BeginDisabled(false) essentially does nothing useful but is provided to facilitate use of boolean expressions. If you can avoid calling BeginDisabled(False)/EndDisabled() best to avoid it.
+    IMGUI_API void          BeginDisabled(bool disabled = true);
+    IMGUI_API void          EndDisabled();
+
+    // Clipping
+    // - Mouse hovering is affected by ImGui::PushClipRect() calls, unlike direct calls to ImDrawList::PushClipRect() which are render only.
+    IMGUI_API void          PushClipRect(const ImVec2& clip_rect_min, const ImVec2& clip_rect_max, bool intersect_with_current_clip_rect);
+    IMGUI_API void          PopClipRect();
+
+    // Focus, Activation
+    // - Prefer using "SetItemDefaultFocus()" over "if (IsWindowAppearing()) SetScrollHereY()" when applicable to signify "this is the default item"
+    IMGUI_API void          SetItemDefaultFocus();                                              // make last item the default focused item of a window.
+    IMGUI_API void          SetKeyboardFocusHere(int offset = 0);                               // focus keyboard on the next widget. Use positive 'offset' to access sub components of a multiple component widget. Use -1 to access previous widget.
+
+    // Item/Widgets Utilities and Query Functions
+    // - Most of the functions are referring to the previous Item that has been submitted.
+    // - See Demo Window under "Widgets->Querying Status" for an interactive visualization of most of those functions.
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags flags = 0);                         // is the last item hovered? (and usable, aka not blocked by a popup, etc.). See ImGuiHoveredFlags for more options.
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsItemActive();                                                     // is the last item active? (e.g. button being held, text field being edited. This will continuously return true while holding mouse button on an item. Items that don't interact will always return false)
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsItemFocused();                                                    // is the last item focused for keyboard/gamepad navigation?
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsItemClicked(ImGuiMouseButton mouse_button = 0);                   // is the last item hovered and mouse clicked on? (**)  == IsMouseClicked(mouse_button) && IsItemHovered()Important. (**) this it NOT equivalent to the behavior of e.g. Button(). Read comments in function definition.
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsItemVisible();                                                    // is the last item visible? (items may be out of sight because of clipping/scrolling)
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsItemEdited();                                                     // did the last item modify its underlying value this frame? or was pressed? This is generally the same as the "bool" return value of many widgets.
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsItemActivated();                                                  // was the last item just made active (item was previously inactive).
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsItemDeactivated();                                                // was the last item just made inactive (item was previously active). Useful for Undo/Redo patterns with widgets that requires continuous editing.
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit();                                       // was the last item just made inactive and made a value change when it was active? (e.g. Slider/Drag moved). Useful for Undo/Redo patterns with widgets that requires continuous editing. Note that you may get false positives (some widgets such as Combo()/ListBox()/Selectable() will return true even when clicking an already selected item).
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsItemToggledOpen();                                                // was the last item open state toggled? set by TreeNode().
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsAnyItemHovered();                                                 // is any item hovered?
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsAnyItemActive();                                                  // is any item active?
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsAnyItemFocused();                                                 // is any item focused?
+    IMGUI_API ImVec2        GetItemRectMin();                                                   // get upper-left bounding rectangle of the last item (screen space)
+    IMGUI_API ImVec2        GetItemRectMax();                                                   // get lower-right bounding rectangle of the last item (screen space)
+    IMGUI_API ImVec2        GetItemRectSize();                                                  // get size of last item
+    IMGUI_API void          SetItemAllowOverlap();                                              // allow last item to be overlapped by a subsequent item. sometimes useful with invisible buttons, selectables, etc. to catch unused area.
+
+    // Viewports
+    // - Currently represents the Platform Window created by the application which is hosting our Dear ImGui windows.
+    // - In 'docking' branch with multi-viewport enabled, we extend this concept to have multiple active viewports.
+    // - In the future we will extend this concept further to also represent Platform Monitor and support a "no main platform window" operation mode.
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiViewport* GetMainViewport();                                                 // return primary/default viewport. This can never be NULL.
+
+    // Background/Foreground Draw Lists
+    IMGUI_API ImDrawList*   GetBackgroundDrawList();                                            // get background draw list for the viewport associated to the current window. this draw list will be the first rendering one. Useful to quickly draw shapes/text behind dear imgui contents.
+    IMGUI_API ImDrawList*   GetForegroundDrawList();                                            // get foreground draw list for the viewport associated to the current window. this draw list will be the last rendered one. Useful to quickly draw shapes/text over dear imgui contents.
+    IMGUI_API ImDrawList*   GetBackgroundDrawList(ImGuiViewport* viewport);                     // get background draw list for the given viewport. this draw list will be the first rendering one. Useful to quickly draw shapes/text behind dear imgui contents.
+    IMGUI_API ImDrawList*   GetForegroundDrawList(ImGuiViewport* viewport);                     // get foreground draw list for the given viewport. this draw list will be the last rendered one. Useful to quickly draw shapes/text over dear imgui contents.
+
+    // Miscellaneous Utilities
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsRectVisible(const ImVec2& size);                                  // test if rectangle (of given size, starting from cursor position) is visible / not clipped.
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsRectVisible(const ImVec2& rect_min, const ImVec2& rect_max);      // test if rectangle (in screen space) is visible / not clipped. to perform coarse clipping on user's side.
+    IMGUI_API double        GetTime();                                                          // get global imgui time. incremented by io.DeltaTime every frame.
+    IMGUI_API int           GetFrameCount();                                                    // get global imgui frame count. incremented by 1 every frame.
+    IMGUI_API ImDrawListSharedData* GetDrawListSharedData();                                    // you may use this when creating your own ImDrawList instances.
+    IMGUI_API const char*   GetStyleColorName(ImGuiCol idx);                                    // get a string corresponding to the enum value (for display, saving, etc.).
+    IMGUI_API void          SetStateStorage(ImGuiStorage* storage);                             // replace current window storage with our own (if you want to manipulate it yourself, typically clear subsection of it)
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiStorage* GetStateStorage();
+    IMGUI_API bool          BeginChildFrame(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiWindowFlags flags = 0); // helper to create a child window / scrolling region that looks like a normal widget frame
+    IMGUI_API void          EndChildFrame();                                                    // always call EndChildFrame() regardless of BeginChildFrame() return values (which indicates a collapsed/clipped window)
+
+    // Text Utilities
+    IMGUI_API ImVec2        CalcTextSize(const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL, bool hide_text_after_double_hash = false, float wrap_width = -1.0f);
+
+    // Color Utilities
+    IMGUI_API ImVec4        ColorConvertU32ToFloat4(ImU32 in);
+    IMGUI_API ImU32         ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(const ImVec4& in);
+    IMGUI_API void          ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(float r, float g, float b, float& out_h, float& out_s, float& out_v);
+    IMGUI_API void          ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(float h, float s, float v, float& out_r, float& out_g, float& out_b);
+
+    // Inputs Utilities: Keyboard
+    // Without IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO: (legacy support)
+    //   - For 'ImGuiKey key' you can still use your legacy native/user indices according to how your backend/engine stored them in io.KeysDown[].
+    // With IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO: (this is the way forward)
+    //   - Any use of 'ImGuiKey' will assert when key < 512 will be passed, previously reserved as native/user keys indices
+    //   - GetKeyIndex() is pass-through and therefore deprecated (gone if IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO is defined)
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey key);                                            // is key being held.
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey key, bool repeat = true);                     // was key pressed (went from !Down to Down)? if repeat=true, uses io.KeyRepeatDelay / KeyRepeatRate
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsKeyReleased(ImGuiKey key);                                        // was key released (went from Down to !Down)?
+    IMGUI_API int           GetKeyPressedAmount(ImGuiKey key, float repeat_delay, float rate);  // uses provided repeat rate/delay. return a count, most often 0 or 1 but might be >1 if RepeatRate is small enough that DeltaTime > RepeatRate
+    IMGUI_API const char*   GetKeyName(ImGuiKey key);                                           // [DEBUG] returns English name of the key. Those names a provided for debugging purpose and are not meant to be saved persistently not compared.
+    IMGUI_API void          SetNextFrameWantCaptureKeyboard(bool want_capture_keyboard);        // Override io.WantCaptureKeyboard flag next frame (said flag is left for your application to handle, typically when true it instructs your app to ignore inputs). e.g. force capture keyboard when your widget is being hovered. This is equivalent to setting "io.WantCaptureKeyboard = want_capture_keyboard"; after the next NewFrame() call.
+
+    // Inputs Utilities: Mouse
+    // - To refer to a mouse button, you may use named enums in your code e.g. ImGuiMouseButton_Left, ImGuiMouseButton_Right.
+    // - You can also use regular integer: it is forever guaranteed that 0=Left, 1=Right, 2=Middle.
+    // - Dragging operations are only reported after mouse has moved a certain distance away from the initial clicking position (see 'lock_threshold' and 'io.MouseDraggingThreshold')
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton button);                               // is mouse button held?
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsMouseClicked(ImGuiMouseButton button, bool repeat = false);       // did mouse button clicked? (went from !Down to Down). Same as GetMouseClickedCount() == 1.
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsMouseReleased(ImGuiMouseButton button);                           // did mouse button released? (went from Down to !Down)
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsMouseDoubleClicked(ImGuiMouseButton button);                      // did mouse button double-clicked? Same as GetMouseClickedCount() == 2. (note that a double-click will also report IsMouseClicked() == true)
+    IMGUI_API int           GetMouseClickedCount(ImGuiMouseButton button);                      // return the number of successive mouse-clicks at the time where a click happen (otherwise 0).
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsMouseHoveringRect(const ImVec2& r_min, const ImVec2& r_max, bool clip = true);// is mouse hovering given bounding rect (in screen space). clipped by current clipping settings, but disregarding of other consideration of focus/window ordering/popup-block.
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsMousePosValid(const ImVec2* mouse_pos = NULL);                    // by convention we use (-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX) to denote that there is no mouse available
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsAnyMouseDown();                                                   // [WILL OBSOLETE] is any mouse button held? This was designed for backends, but prefer having backend maintain a mask of held mouse buttons, because upcoming input queue system will make this invalid.
+    IMGUI_API ImVec2        GetMousePos();                                                      // shortcut to ImGui::GetIO().MousePos provided by user, to be consistent with other calls
+    IMGUI_API ImVec2        GetMousePosOnOpeningCurrentPopup();                                 // retrieve mouse position at the time of opening popup we have BeginPopup() into (helper to avoid user backing that value themselves)
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton button, float lock_threshold = -1.0f);         // is mouse dragging? (if lock_threshold < -1.0f, uses io.MouseDraggingThreshold)
+    IMGUI_API ImVec2        GetMouseDragDelta(ImGuiMouseButton button = 0, float lock_threshold = -1.0f);   // return the delta from the initial clicking position while the mouse button is pressed or was just released. This is locked and return 0.0f until the mouse moves past a distance threshold at least once (if lock_threshold < -1.0f, uses io.MouseDraggingThreshold)
+    IMGUI_API void          ResetMouseDragDelta(ImGuiMouseButton button = 0);                   //
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiMouseCursor GetMouseCursor();                                                // get desired cursor type, reset in ImGui::NewFrame(), this is updated during the frame. valid before Render(). If you use software rendering by setting io.MouseDrawCursor ImGui will render those for you
+    IMGUI_API void          SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor cursor_type);                       // set desired cursor type
+    IMGUI_API void          SetNextFrameWantCaptureMouse(bool want_capture_mouse);              // Override io.WantCaptureMouse flag next frame (said flag is left for your application to handle, typical when true it instucts your app to ignore inputs). This is equivalent to setting "io.WantCaptureMouse = want_capture_mouse;" after the next NewFrame() call.
+
+    // Clipboard Utilities
+    // - Also see the LogToClipboard() function to capture GUI into clipboard, or easily output text data to the clipboard.
+    IMGUI_API const char*   GetClipboardText();
+    IMGUI_API void          SetClipboardText(const char* text);
+
+    // Settings/.Ini Utilities
+    // - The disk functions are automatically called if io.IniFilename != NULL (default is "imgui.ini").
+    // - Set io.IniFilename to NULL to load/save manually. Read io.WantSaveIniSettings description about handling .ini saving manually.
+    // - Important: default value "imgui.ini" is relative to current working dir! Most apps will want to lock this to an absolute path (e.g. same path as executables).
+    IMGUI_API void          LoadIniSettingsFromDisk(const char* ini_filename);                  // call after CreateContext() and before the first call to NewFrame(). NewFrame() automatically calls LoadIniSettingsFromDisk(io.IniFilename).
+    IMGUI_API void          LoadIniSettingsFromMemory(const char* ini_data, size_t ini_size=0); // call after CreateContext() and before the first call to NewFrame() to provide .ini data from your own data source.
+    IMGUI_API void          SaveIniSettingsToDisk(const char* ini_filename);                    // this is automatically called (if io.IniFilename is not empty) a few seconds after any modification that should be reflected in the .ini file (and also by DestroyContext).
+    IMGUI_API const char*   SaveIniSettingsToMemory(size_t* out_ini_size = NULL);               // return a zero-terminated string with the .ini data which you can save by your own mean. call when io.WantSaveIniSettings is set, then save data by your own mean and clear io.WantSaveIniSettings.
+
+    // Debug Utilities
+    IMGUI_API void          DebugTextEncoding(const char* text);
+    IMGUI_API bool          DebugCheckVersionAndDataLayout(const char* version_str, size_t sz_io, size_t sz_style, size_t sz_vec2, size_t sz_vec4, size_t sz_drawvert, size_t sz_drawidx); // This is called by IMGUI_CHECKVERSION() macro.
+
+    // Memory Allocators
+    // - Those functions are not reliant on the current context.
+    // - DLL users: heaps and globals are not shared across DLL boundaries! You will need to call SetCurrentContext() + SetAllocatorFunctions()
+    //   for each static/DLL boundary you are calling from. Read "Context and Memory Allocators" section of imgui.cpp for more details.
+    IMGUI_API void          SetAllocatorFunctions(ImGuiMemAllocFunc alloc_func, ImGuiMemFreeFunc free_func, void* user_data = NULL);
+    IMGUI_API void          GetAllocatorFunctions(ImGuiMemAllocFunc* p_alloc_func, ImGuiMemFreeFunc* p_free_func, void** p_user_data);
+    IMGUI_API void*         MemAlloc(size_t size);
+    IMGUI_API void          MemFree(void* ptr);
+
+    // (Optional) Platform/OS interface for multi-viewport support
+    // Read comments around the ImGuiPlatformIO structure for more details.
+    // Note: You may use GetWindowViewport() to get the current viewport of the current window.
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiPlatformIO&  GetPlatformIO();                                                // platform/renderer functions, for backend to setup + viewports list.
+    IMGUI_API void              UpdatePlatformWindows();                                        // call in main loop. will call CreateWindow/ResizeWindow/etc. platform functions for each secondary viewport, and DestroyWindow for each inactive viewport.
+    IMGUI_API void              RenderPlatformWindowsDefault(void* platform_render_arg = NULL, void* renderer_render_arg = NULL); // call in main loop. will call RenderWindow/SwapBuffers platform functions for each secondary viewport which doesn't have the ImGuiViewportFlags_Minimized flag set. May be reimplemented by user for custom rendering needs.
+    IMGUI_API void              DestroyPlatformWindows();                                       // call DestroyWindow platform functions for all viewports. call from backend Shutdown() if you need to close platform windows before imgui shutdown. otherwise will be called by DestroyContext().
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiViewport*    FindViewportByID(ImGuiID id);                                   // this is a helper for backends.
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiViewport*    FindViewportByPlatformHandle(void* platform_handle);            // this is a helper for backends. the type platform_handle is decided by the backend (e.g. HWND, MyWindow*, GLFWwindow* etc.)
+
+} // namespace ImGui
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Flags & Enumerations
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Flags for ImGui::Begin()
+enum ImGuiWindowFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_None                   = 0,
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar             = 1 << 0,   // Disable title-bar
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize               = 1 << 1,   // Disable user resizing with the lower-right grip
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove                 = 1 << 2,   // Disable user moving the window
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar            = 1 << 3,   // Disable scrollbars (window can still scroll with mouse or programmatically)
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse      = 1 << 4,   // Disable user vertically scrolling with mouse wheel. On child window, mouse wheel will be forwarded to the parent unless NoScrollbar is also set.
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse             = 1 << 5,   // Disable user collapsing window by double-clicking on it. Also referred to as Window Menu Button (e.g. within a docking node).
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize       = 1 << 6,   // Resize every window to its content every frame
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground           = 1 << 7,   // Disable drawing background color (WindowBg, etc.) and outside border. Similar as using SetNextWindowBgAlpha(0.0f).
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings        = 1 << 8,   // Never load/save settings in .ini file
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs          = 1 << 9,   // Disable catching mouse, hovering test with pass through.
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar                = 1 << 10,  // Has a menu-bar
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar    = 1 << 11,  // Allow horizontal scrollbar to appear (off by default). You may use SetNextWindowContentSize(ImVec2(width,0.0f)); prior to calling Begin() to specify width. Read code in imgui_demo in the "Horizontal Scrolling" section.
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing     = 1 << 12,  // Disable taking focus when transitioning from hidden to visible state
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus  = 1 << 13,  // Disable bringing window to front when taking focus (e.g. clicking on it or programmatically giving it focus)
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysVerticalScrollbar= 1 << 14,  // Always show vertical scrollbar (even if ContentSize.y < Size.y)
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysHorizontalScrollbar=1<< 15,  // Always show horizontal scrollbar (even if ContentSize.x < Size.x)
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysUseWindowPadding = 1 << 16,  // Ensure child windows without border uses style.WindowPadding (ignored by default for non-bordered child windows, because more convenient)
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs            = 1 << 18,  // No gamepad/keyboard navigation within the window
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus             = 1 << 19,  // No focusing toward this window with gamepad/keyboard navigation (e.g. skipped by CTRL+TAB)
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_UnsavedDocument        = 1 << 20,  // Display a dot next to the title. When used in a tab/docking context, tab is selected when clicking the X + closure is not assumed (will wait for user to stop submitting the tab). Otherwise closure is assumed when pressing the X, so if you keep submitting the tab may reappear at end of tab bar.
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDocking              = 1 << 21,  // Disable docking of this window
+
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNav                  = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus,
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDecoration           = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse,
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs               = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus,
+
+    // [Internal]
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened           = 1 << 23,  // [BETA] On child window: allow gamepad/keyboard navigation to cross over parent border to this child or between sibling child windows.
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow            = 1 << 24,  // Don't use! For internal use by BeginChild()
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip                = 1 << 25,  // Don't use! For internal use by BeginTooltip()
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup                  = 1 << 26,  // Don't use! For internal use by BeginPopup()
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal                  = 1 << 27,  // Don't use! For internal use by BeginPopupModal()
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu              = 1 << 28,  // Don't use! For internal use by BeginMenu()
+    ImGuiWindowFlags_DockNodeHost           = 1 << 29,  // Don't use! For internal use by Begin()/NewFrame()
+};
+
+// Flags for ImGui::InputText()
+enum ImGuiInputTextFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags_None                = 0,
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal        = 1 << 0,   // Allow 0123456789.+-*/
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal    = 1 << 1,   // Allow 0123456789ABCDEFabcdef
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase      = 1 << 2,   // Turn a..z into A..Z
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank        = 1 << 3,   // Filter out spaces, tabs
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll       = 1 << 4,   // Select entire text when first taking mouse focus
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue    = 1 << 5,   // Return 'true' when Enter is pressed (as opposed to every time the value was modified). Consider looking at the IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit() function.
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion  = 1 << 6,   // Callback on pressing TAB (for completion handling)
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory     = 1 << 7,   // Callback on pressing Up/Down arrows (for history handling)
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways      = 1 << 8,   // Callback on each iteration. User code may query cursor position, modify text buffer.
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter  = 1 << 9,   // Callback on character inputs to replace or discard them. Modify 'EventChar' to replace or discard, or return 1 in callback to discard.
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput       = 1 << 10,  // Pressing TAB input a '\t' character into the text field
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags_CtrlEnterForNewLine = 1 << 11,  // In multi-line mode, unfocus with Enter, add new line with Ctrl+Enter (default is opposite: unfocus with Ctrl+Enter, add line with Enter).
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoHorizontalScroll  = 1 << 12,  // Disable following the cursor horizontally
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags_AlwaysOverwrite     = 1 << 13,  // Overwrite mode
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly            = 1 << 14,  // Read-only mode
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password            = 1 << 15,  // Password mode, display all characters as '*'
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoUndoRedo          = 1 << 16,  // Disable undo/redo. Note that input text owns the text data while active, if you want to provide your own undo/redo stack you need e.g. to call ClearActiveID().
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific     = 1 << 17,  // Allow 0123456789.+-*/eE (Scientific notation input)
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize      = 1 << 18,  // Callback on buffer capacity changes request (beyond 'buf_size' parameter value), allowing the string to grow. Notify when the string wants to be resized (for string types which hold a cache of their Size). You will be provided a new BufSize in the callback and NEED to honor it. (see misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h for an example of using this)
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackEdit        = 1 << 19,  // Callback on any edit (note that InputText() already returns true on edit, the callback is useful mainly to manipulate the underlying buffer while focus is active)
+
+    // Obsolete names (will be removed soon)
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags_AlwaysInsertMode    = ImGuiInputTextFlags_AlwaysOverwrite   // [renamed in 1.82] name was not matching behavior
+#endif
+};
+
+// Flags for ImGui::TreeNodeEx(), ImGui::CollapsingHeader*()
+enum ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_None                 = 0,
+    ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Selected             = 1 << 0,   // Draw as selected
+    ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Framed               = 1 << 1,   // Draw frame with background (e.g. for CollapsingHeader)
+    ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap     = 1 << 2,   // Hit testing to allow subsequent widgets to overlap this one
+    ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen     = 1 << 3,   // Don't do a TreePush() when open (e.g. for CollapsingHeader) = no extra indent nor pushing on ID stack
+    ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoAutoOpenOnLog      = 1 << 4,   // Don't automatically and temporarily open node when Logging is active (by default logging will automatically open tree nodes)
+    ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen          = 1 << 5,   // Default node to be open
+    ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick    = 1 << 6,   // Need double-click to open node
+    ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow          = 1 << 7,   // Only open when clicking on the arrow part. If ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick is also set, single-click arrow or double-click all box to open.
+    ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf                 = 1 << 8,   // No collapsing, no arrow (use as a convenience for leaf nodes).
+    ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet               = 1 << 9,   // Display a bullet instead of arrow
+    ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_FramePadding         = 1 << 10,  // Use FramePadding (even for an unframed text node) to vertically align text baseline to regular widget height. Equivalent to calling AlignTextToFramePadding().
+    ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAvailWidth       = 1 << 11,  // Extend hit box to the right-most edge, even if not framed. This is not the default in order to allow adding other items on the same line. In the future we may refactor the hit system to be front-to-back, allowing natural overlaps and then this can become the default.
+    ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth        = 1 << 12,  // Extend hit box to the left-most and right-most edges (bypass the indented area).
+    ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NavLeftJumpsBackHere = 1 << 13,  // (WIP) Nav: left direction may move to this TreeNode() from any of its child (items submitted between TreeNode and TreePop)
+    //ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoScrollOnOpen     = 1 << 14,  // FIXME: TODO: Disable automatic scroll on TreePop() if node got just open and contents is not visible
+    ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader     = ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Framed | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoAutoOpenOnLog,
+};
+
+// Flags for OpenPopup*(), BeginPopupContext*(), IsPopupOpen() functions.
+// - To be backward compatible with older API which took an 'int mouse_button = 1' argument, we need to treat
+//   small flags values as a mouse button index, so we encode the mouse button in the first few bits of the flags.
+//   It is therefore guaranteed to be legal to pass a mouse button index in ImGuiPopupFlags.
+// - For the same reason, we exceptionally default the ImGuiPopupFlags argument of BeginPopupContextXXX functions to 1 instead of 0.
+//   IMPORTANT: because the default parameter is 1 (==ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight), if you rely on the default parameter
+//   and want to another another flag, you need to pass in the ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight flag.
+// - Multiple buttons currently cannot be combined/or-ed in those functions (we could allow it later).
+enum ImGuiPopupFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiPopupFlags_None                    = 0,
+    ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonLeft         = 0,        // For BeginPopupContext*(): open on Left Mouse release. Guaranteed to always be == 0 (same as ImGuiMouseButton_Left)
+    ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight        = 1,        // For BeginPopupContext*(): open on Right Mouse release. Guaranteed to always be == 1 (same as ImGuiMouseButton_Right)
+    ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonMiddle       = 2,        // For BeginPopupContext*(): open on Middle Mouse release. Guaranteed to always be == 2 (same as ImGuiMouseButton_Middle)
+    ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonMask_        = 0x1F,
+    ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonDefault_     = 1,
+    ImGuiPopupFlags_NoOpenOverExistingPopup = 1 << 5,   // For OpenPopup*(), BeginPopupContext*(): don't open if there's already a popup at the same level of the popup stack
+    ImGuiPopupFlags_NoOpenOverItems         = 1 << 6,   // For BeginPopupContextWindow(): don't return true when hovering items, only when hovering empty space
+    ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupId              = 1 << 7,   // For IsPopupOpen(): ignore the ImGuiID parameter and test for any popup.
+    ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupLevel           = 1 << 8,   // For IsPopupOpen(): search/test at any level of the popup stack (default test in the current level)
+    ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopup                = ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupId | ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupLevel,
+};
+
+// Flags for ImGui::Selectable()
+enum ImGuiSelectableFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiSelectableFlags_None               = 0,
+    ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups    = 1 << 0,   // Clicking this don't close parent popup window
+    ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns     = 1 << 1,   // Selectable frame can span all columns (text will still fit in current column)
+    ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowDoubleClick   = 1 << 2,   // Generate press events on double clicks too
+    ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled           = 1 << 3,   // Cannot be selected, display grayed out text
+    ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowItemOverlap   = 1 << 4,   // (WIP) Hit testing to allow subsequent widgets to overlap this one
+};
+
+// Flags for ImGui::BeginCombo()
+enum ImGuiComboFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiComboFlags_None                    = 0,
+    ImGuiComboFlags_PopupAlignLeft          = 1 << 0,   // Align the popup toward the left by default
+    ImGuiComboFlags_HeightSmall             = 1 << 1,   // Max ~4 items visible. Tip: If you want your combo popup to be a specific size you can use SetNextWindowSizeConstraints() prior to calling BeginCombo()
+    ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular           = 1 << 2,   // Max ~8 items visible (default)
+    ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLarge             = 1 << 3,   // Max ~20 items visible
+    ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLargest           = 1 << 4,   // As many fitting items as possible
+    ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton           = 1 << 5,   // Display on the preview box without the square arrow button
+    ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview               = 1 << 6,   // Display only a square arrow button
+    ImGuiComboFlags_HeightMask_             = ImGuiComboFlags_HeightSmall | ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular | ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLarge | ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLargest,
+};
+
+// Flags for ImGui::BeginTabBar()
+enum ImGuiTabBarFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiTabBarFlags_None                           = 0,
+    ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable                    = 1 << 0,   // Allow manually dragging tabs to re-order them + New tabs are appended at the end of list
+    ImGuiTabBarFlags_AutoSelectNewTabs              = 1 << 1,   // Automatically select new tabs when they appear
+    ImGuiTabBarFlags_TabListPopupButton             = 1 << 2,   // Disable buttons to open the tab list popup
+    ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton   = 1 << 3,   // Disable behavior of closing tabs (that are submitted with p_open != NULL) with middle mouse button. You can still repro this behavior on user's side with if (IsItemHovered() && IsMouseClicked(2)) *p_open = false.
+    ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoTabListScrollingButtons      = 1 << 4,   // Disable scrolling buttons (apply when fitting policy is ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll)
+    ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoTooltip                      = 1 << 5,   // Disable tooltips when hovering a tab
+    ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown        = 1 << 6,   // Resize tabs when they don't fit
+    ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll            = 1 << 7,   // Add scroll buttons when tabs don't fit
+    ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyMask_             = ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown | ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll,
+    ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyDefault_          = ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown,
+};
+
+// Flags for ImGui::BeginTabItem()
+enum ImGuiTabItemFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiTabItemFlags_None                          = 0,
+    ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument               = 1 << 0,   // Display a dot next to the title + tab is selected when clicking the X + closure is not assumed (will wait for user to stop submitting the tab). Otherwise closure is assumed when pressing the X, so if you keep submitting the tab may reappear at end of tab bar.
+    ImGuiTabItemFlags_SetSelected                   = 1 << 1,   // Trigger flag to programmatically make the tab selected when calling BeginTabItem()
+    ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton  = 1 << 2,   // Disable behavior of closing tabs (that are submitted with p_open != NULL) with middle mouse button. You can still repro this behavior on user's side with if (IsItemHovered() && IsMouseClicked(2)) *p_open = false.
+    ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoPushId                      = 1 << 3,   // Don't call PushID(tab->ID)/PopID() on BeginTabItem()/EndTabItem()
+    ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoTooltip                     = 1 << 4,   // Disable tooltip for the given tab
+    ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoReorder                     = 1 << 5,   // Disable reordering this tab or having another tab cross over this tab
+    ImGuiTabItemFlags_Leading                       = 1 << 6,   // Enforce the tab position to the left of the tab bar (after the tab list popup button)
+    ImGuiTabItemFlags_Trailing                      = 1 << 7,   // Enforce the tab position to the right of the tab bar (before the scrolling buttons)
+};
+
+// Flags for ImGui::BeginTable()
+// - Important! Sizing policies have complex and subtle side effects, much more so than you would expect.
+//   Read comments/demos carefully + experiment with live demos to get acquainted with them.
+// - The DEFAULT sizing policies are:
+//    - Default to ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit    if ScrollX is on, or if host window has ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize.
+//    - Default to ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame if ScrollX is off.
+// - When ScrollX is off:
+//    - Table defaults to ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame -> all Columns defaults to ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch with same weight.
+//    - Columns sizing policy allowed: Stretch (default), Fixed/Auto.
+//    - Fixed Columns (if any) will generally obtain their requested width (unless the table cannot fit them all).
+//    - Stretch Columns will share the remaining width according to their respective weight.
+//    - Mixed Fixed/Stretch columns is possible but has various side-effects on resizing behaviors.
+//      The typical use of mixing sizing policies is: any number of LEADING Fixed columns, followed by one or two TRAILING Stretch columns.
+//      (this is because the visible order of columns have subtle but necessary effects on how they react to manual resizing).
+// - When ScrollX is on:
+//    - Table defaults to ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit -> all Columns defaults to ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed
+//    - Columns sizing policy allowed: Fixed/Auto mostly.
+//    - Fixed Columns can be enlarged as needed. Table will show an horizontal scrollbar if needed.
+//    - When using auto-resizing (non-resizable) fixed columns, querying the content width to use item right-alignment e.g. SetNextItemWidth(-FLT_MIN) doesn't make sense, would create a feedback loop.
+//    - Using Stretch columns OFTEN DOES NOT MAKE SENSE if ScrollX is on, UNLESS you have specified a value for 'inner_width' in BeginTable().
+//      If you specify a value for 'inner_width' then effectively the scrolling space is known and Stretch or mixed Fixed/Stretch columns become meaningful again.
+// - Read on documentation at the top of imgui_tables.cpp for details.
+enum ImGuiTableFlags_
+{
+    // Features
+    ImGuiTableFlags_None                       = 0,
+    ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable                  = 1 << 0,   // Enable resizing columns.
+    ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable                = 1 << 1,   // Enable reordering columns in header row (need calling TableSetupColumn() + TableHeadersRow() to display headers)
+    ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable                   = 1 << 2,   // Enable hiding/disabling columns in context menu.
+    ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable                   = 1 << 3,   // Enable sorting. Call TableGetSortSpecs() to obtain sort specs. Also see ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti and ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate.
+    ImGuiTableFlags_NoSavedSettings            = 1 << 4,   // Disable persisting columns order, width and sort settings in the .ini file.
+    ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody          = 1 << 5,   // Right-click on columns body/contents will display table context menu. By default it is available in TableHeadersRow().
+    // Decorations
+    ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg                      = 1 << 6,   // Set each RowBg color with ImGuiCol_TableRowBg or ImGuiCol_TableRowBgAlt (equivalent of calling TableSetBgColor with ImGuiTableBgFlags_RowBg0 on each row manually)
+    ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH              = 1 << 7,   // Draw horizontal borders between rows.
+    ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH              = 1 << 8,   // Draw horizontal borders at the top and bottom.
+    ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV              = 1 << 9,   // Draw vertical borders between columns.
+    ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV              = 1 << 10,  // Draw vertical borders on the left and right sides.
+    ImGuiTableFlags_BordersH                   = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH, // Draw horizontal borders.
+    ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV                   = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV, // Draw vertical borders.
+    ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInner               = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH, // Draw inner borders.
+    ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter               = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH, // Draw outer borders.
+    ImGuiTableFlags_Borders                    = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInner | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter,   // Draw all borders.
+    ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody            = 1 << 11,  // [ALPHA] Disable vertical borders in columns Body (borders will always appears in Headers). -> May move to style
+    ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize = 1 << 12,  // [ALPHA] Disable vertical borders in columns Body until hovered for resize (borders will always appears in Headers). -> May move to style
+    // Sizing Policy (read above for defaults)
+    ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit             = 1 << 13,  // Columns default to _WidthFixed or _WidthAuto (if resizable or not resizable), matching contents width.
+    ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame            = 2 << 13,  // Columns default to _WidthFixed or _WidthAuto (if resizable or not resizable), matching the maximum contents width of all columns. Implicitly enable ImGuiTableFlags_NoKeepColumnsVisible.
+    ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchProp          = 3 << 13,  // Columns default to _WidthStretch with default weights proportional to each columns contents widths.
+    ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame          = 4 << 13,  // Columns default to _WidthStretch with default weights all equal, unless overridden by TableSetupColumn().
+    // Sizing Extra Options
+    ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX              = 1 << 16,  // Make outer width auto-fit to columns, overriding outer_size.x value. Only available when ScrollX/ScrollY are disabled and Stretch columns are not used.
+    ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY              = 1 << 17,  // Make outer height stop exactly at outer_size.y (prevent auto-extending table past the limit). Only available when ScrollX/ScrollY are disabled. Data below the limit will be clipped and not visible.
+    ImGuiTableFlags_NoKeepColumnsVisible       = 1 << 18,  // Disable keeping column always minimally visible when ScrollX is off and table gets too small. Not recommended if columns are resizable.
+    ImGuiTableFlags_PreciseWidths              = 1 << 19,  // Disable distributing remainder width to stretched columns (width allocation on a 100-wide table with 3 columns: Without this flag: 33,33,34. With this flag: 33,33,33). With larger number of columns, resizing will appear to be less smooth.
+    // Clipping
+    ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip                     = 1 << 20,  // Disable clipping rectangle for every individual columns (reduce draw command count, items will be able to overflow into other columns). Generally incompatible with TableSetupScrollFreeze().
+    // Padding
+    ImGuiTableFlags_PadOuterX                  = 1 << 21,  // Default if BordersOuterV is on. Enable outer-most padding. Generally desirable if you have headers.
+    ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadOuterX                = 1 << 22,  // Default if BordersOuterV is off. Disable outer-most padding.
+    ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadInnerX                = 1 << 23,  // Disable inner padding between columns (double inner padding if BordersOuterV is on, single inner padding if BordersOuterV is off).
+    // Scrolling
+    ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX                    = 1 << 24,  // Enable horizontal scrolling. Require 'outer_size' parameter of BeginTable() to specify the container size. Changes default sizing policy. Because this create a child window, ScrollY is currently generally recommended when using ScrollX.
+    ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY                    = 1 << 25,  // Enable vertical scrolling. Require 'outer_size' parameter of BeginTable() to specify the container size.
+    // Sorting
+    ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti                  = 1 << 26,  // Hold shift when clicking headers to sort on multiple column. TableGetSortSpecs() may return specs where (SpecsCount > 1).
+    ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate               = 1 << 27,  // Allow no sorting, disable default sorting. TableGetSortSpecs() may return specs where (SpecsCount == 0).
+
+    // [Internal] Combinations and masks
+    ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_                = ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchProp | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame,
+
+    // Obsolete names (will be removed soon)
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+    //, ImGuiTableFlags_ColumnsWidthFixed = ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit, ImGuiTableFlags_ColumnsWidthStretch = ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame   // WIP Tables 2020/12
+    //, ImGuiTableFlags_SizingPolicyFixed = ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit, ImGuiTableFlags_SizingPolicyStretch = ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame   // WIP Tables 2021/01
+#endif
+};
+
+// Flags for ImGui::TableSetupColumn()
+enum ImGuiTableColumnFlags_
+{
+    // Input configuration flags
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_None                  = 0,
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_Disabled              = 1 << 0,   // Overriding/master disable flag: hide column, won't show in context menu (unlike calling TableSetColumnEnabled() which manipulates the user accessible state)
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultHide           = 1 << 1,   // Default as a hidden/disabled column.
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultSort           = 1 << 2,   // Default as a sorting column.
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch          = 1 << 3,   // Column will stretch. Preferable with horizontal scrolling disabled (default if table sizing policy is _SizingStretchSame or _SizingStretchProp).
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed            = 1 << 4,   // Column will not stretch. Preferable with horizontal scrolling enabled (default if table sizing policy is _SizingFixedFit and table is resizable).
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize              = 1 << 5,   // Disable manual resizing.
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoReorder             = 1 << 6,   // Disable manual reordering this column, this will also prevent other columns from crossing over this column.
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHide                = 1 << 7,   // Disable ability to hide/disable this column.
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoClip                = 1 << 8,   // Disable clipping for this column (all NoClip columns will render in a same draw command).
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort                = 1 << 9,   // Disable ability to sort on this field (even if ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable is set on the table).
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortAscending       = 1 << 10,  // Disable ability to sort in the ascending direction.
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortDescending      = 1 << 11,  // Disable ability to sort in the descending direction.
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHeaderLabel         = 1 << 12,  // TableHeadersRow() will not submit label for this column. Convenient for some small columns. Name will still appear in context menu.
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHeaderWidth         = 1 << 13,  // Disable header text width contribution to automatic column width.
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortAscending   = 1 << 14,  // Make the initial sort direction Ascending when first sorting on this column (default).
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortDescending  = 1 << 15,  // Make the initial sort direction Descending when first sorting on this column.
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentEnable          = 1 << 16,  // Use current Indent value when entering cell (default for column 0).
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentDisable         = 1 << 17,  // Ignore current Indent value when entering cell (default for columns > 0). Indentation changes _within_ the cell will still be honored.
+
+    // Output status flags, read-only via TableGetColumnFlags()
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsEnabled             = 1 << 24,  // Status: is enabled == not hidden by user/api (referred to as "Hide" in _DefaultHide and _NoHide) flags.
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsVisible             = 1 << 25,  // Status: is visible == is enabled AND not clipped by scrolling.
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsSorted              = 1 << 26,  // Status: is currently part of the sort specs
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsHovered             = 1 << 27,  // Status: is hovered by mouse
+
+    // [Internal] Combinations and masks
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthMask_            = ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed,
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentMask_           = ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentEnable | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentDisable,
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_StatusMask_           = ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsEnabled | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsVisible | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsSorted | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsHovered,
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoDirectResize_       = 1 << 30,  // [Internal] Disable user resizing this column directly (it may however we resized indirectly from its left edge)
+
+    // Obsolete names (will be removed soon)
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+    //ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthAuto           = ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize, // Column will not stretch and keep resizing based on submitted contents.
+#endif
+};
+
+// Flags for ImGui::TableNextRow()
+enum ImGuiTableRowFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiTableRowFlags_None                     = 0,
+    ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers                  = 1 << 0,   // Identify header row (set default background color + width of its contents accounted differently for auto column width)
+};
+
+// Enum for ImGui::TableSetBgColor()
+// Background colors are rendering in 3 layers:
+//  - Layer 0: draw with RowBg0 color if set, otherwise draw with ColumnBg0 if set.
+//  - Layer 1: draw with RowBg1 color if set, otherwise draw with ColumnBg1 if set.
+//  - Layer 2: draw with CellBg color if set.
+// The purpose of the two row/columns layers is to let you decide if a background color changes should override or blend with the existing color.
+// When using ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg on the table, each row has the RowBg0 color automatically set for odd/even rows.
+// If you set the color of RowBg0 target, your color will override the existing RowBg0 color.
+// If you set the color of RowBg1 or ColumnBg1 target, your color will blend over the RowBg0 color.
+enum ImGuiTableBgTarget_
+{
+    ImGuiTableBgTarget_None                     = 0,
+    ImGuiTableBgTarget_RowBg0                   = 1,        // Set row background color 0 (generally used for background, automatically set when ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg is used)
+    ImGuiTableBgTarget_RowBg1                   = 2,        // Set row background color 1 (generally used for selection marking)
+    ImGuiTableBgTarget_CellBg                   = 3,        // Set cell background color (top-most color)
+};
+
+// Flags for ImGui::IsWindowFocused()
+enum ImGuiFocusedFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiFocusedFlags_None                          = 0,
+    ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows                  = 1 << 0,   // Return true if any children of the window is focused
+    ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow                    = 1 << 1,   // Test from root window (top most parent of the current hierarchy)
+    ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow                     = 1 << 2,   // Return true if any window is focused. Important: If you are trying to tell how to dispatch your low-level inputs, do NOT use this. Use 'io.WantCaptureMouse' instead! Please read the FAQ!
+    ImGuiFocusedFlags_NoPopupHierarchy              = 1 << 3,   // Do not consider popup hierarchy (do not treat popup emitter as parent of popup) (when used with _ChildWindows or _RootWindow)
+    ImGuiFocusedFlags_DockHierarchy                 = 1 << 4,   // Consider docking hierarchy (treat dockspace host as parent of docked window) (when used with _ChildWindows or _RootWindow)
+    ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootAndChildWindows           = ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows,
+};
+
+// Flags for ImGui::IsItemHovered(), ImGui::IsWindowHovered()
+// Note: if you are trying to check whether your mouse should be dispatched to Dear ImGui or to your app, you should use 'io.WantCaptureMouse' instead! Please read the FAQ!
+// Note: windows with the ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs flag are ignored by IsWindowHovered() calls.
+enum ImGuiHoveredFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiHoveredFlags_None                          = 0,        // Return true if directly over the item/window, not obstructed by another window, not obstructed by an active popup or modal blocking inputs under them.
+    ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows                  = 1 << 0,   // IsWindowHovered() only: Return true if any children of the window is hovered
+    ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow                    = 1 << 1,   // IsWindowHovered() only: Test from root window (top most parent of the current hierarchy)
+    ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow                     = 1 << 2,   // IsWindowHovered() only: Return true if any window is hovered
+    ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoPopupHierarchy              = 1 << 3,   // IsWindowHovered() only: Do not consider popup hierarchy (do not treat popup emitter as parent of popup) (when used with _ChildWindows or _RootWindow)
+    ImGuiHoveredFlags_DockHierarchy                 = 1 << 4,   // IsWindowHovered() only: Consider docking hierarchy (treat dockspace host as parent of docked window) (when used with _ChildWindows or _RootWindow)
+    ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup       = 1 << 5,   // Return true even if a popup window is normally blocking access to this item/window
+    //ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByModal     = 1 << 6,   // Return true even if a modal popup window is normally blocking access to this item/window. FIXME-TODO: Unavailable yet.
+    ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem  = 1 << 7,   // Return true even if an active item is blocking access to this item/window. Useful for Drag and Drop patterns.
+    ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlapped           = 1 << 8,   // IsItemHovered() only: Return true even if the position is obstructed or overlapped by another window
+    ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenDisabled             = 1 << 9,   // IsItemHovered() only: Return true even if the item is disabled
+    ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoNavOverride                 = 1 << 10,  // Disable using gamepad/keyboard navigation state when active, always query mouse.
+    ImGuiHoveredFlags_RectOnly                      = ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup | ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem | ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlapped,
+    ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootAndChildWindows           = ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows,
+};
+
+// Flags for ImGui::DockSpace(), shared/inherited by child nodes.
+// (Some flags can be applied to individual nodes directly)
+// FIXME-DOCK: Also see ImGuiDockNodeFlagsPrivate_ which may involve using the WIP and internal DockBuilder api.
+enum ImGuiDockNodeFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags_None                         = 0,
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags_KeepAliveOnly                = 1 << 0,   // Shared       // Don't display the dockspace node but keep it alive. Windows docked into this dockspace node won't be undocked.
+    //ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoCentralNode              = 1 << 1,   // Shared       // Disable Central Node (the node which can stay empty)
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingInCentralNode       = 1 << 2,   // Shared       // Disable docking inside the Central Node, which will be always kept empty.
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags_PassthruCentralNode          = 1 << 3,   // Shared       // Enable passthru dockspace: 1) DockSpace() will render a ImGuiCol_WindowBg background covering everything excepted the Central Node when empty. Meaning the host window should probably use SetNextWindowBgAlpha(0.0f) prior to Begin() when using this. 2) When Central Node is empty: let inputs pass-through + won't display a DockingEmptyBg background. See demo for details.
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoSplit                      = 1 << 4,   // Shared/Local // Disable splitting the node into smaller nodes. Useful e.g. when embedding dockspaces into a main root one (the root one may have splitting disabled to reduce confusion). Note: when turned off, existing splits will be preserved.
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResize                     = 1 << 5,   // Shared/Local // Disable resizing node using the splitter/separators. Useful with programmatically setup dockspaces.
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags_AutoHideTabBar               = 1 << 6,   // Shared/Local // Tab bar will automatically hide when there is a single window in the dock node.
+};
+
+// Flags for ImGui::BeginDragDropSource(), ImGui::AcceptDragDropPayload()
+enum ImGuiDragDropFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiDragDropFlags_None                         = 0,
+    // BeginDragDropSource() flags
+    ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoPreviewTooltip       = 1 << 0,   // By default, a successful call to BeginDragDropSource opens a tooltip so you can display a preview or description of the source contents. This flag disable this behavior.
+    ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoDisableHover         = 1 << 1,   // By default, when dragging we clear data so that IsItemHovered() will return false, to avoid subsequent user code submitting tooltips. This flag disable this behavior so you can still call IsItemHovered() on the source item.
+    ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoHoldToOpenOthers     = 1 << 2,   // Disable the behavior that allows to open tree nodes and collapsing header by holding over them while dragging a source item.
+    ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceAllowNullID            = 1 << 3,   // Allow items such as Text(), Image() that have no unique identifier to be used as drag source, by manufacturing a temporary identifier based on their window-relative position. This is extremely unusual within the dear imgui ecosystem and so we made it explicit.
+    ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceExtern                 = 1 << 4,   // External source (from outside of dear imgui), won't attempt to read current item/window info. Will always return true. Only one Extern source can be active simultaneously.
+    ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceAutoExpirePayload      = 1 << 5,   // Automatically expire the payload if the source cease to be submitted (otherwise payloads are persisting while being dragged)
+    // AcceptDragDropPayload() flags
+    ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptBeforeDelivery         = 1 << 10,  // AcceptDragDropPayload() will returns true even before the mouse button is released. You can then call IsDelivery() to test if the payload needs to be delivered.
+    ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoDrawDefaultRect      = 1 << 11,  // Do not draw the default highlight rectangle when hovering over target.
+    ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoPreviewTooltip       = 1 << 12,  // Request hiding the BeginDragDropSource tooltip from the BeginDragDropTarget site.
+    ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptPeekOnly               = ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptBeforeDelivery | ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoDrawDefaultRect, // For peeking ahead and inspecting the payload before delivery.
+};
+
+// Standard Drag and Drop payload types. You can define you own payload types using short strings. Types starting with '_' are defined by Dear ImGui.
+#define IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F     "_COL3F"    // float[3]: Standard type for colors, without alpha. User code may use this type.
+#define IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F     "_COL4F"    // float[4]: Standard type for colors. User code may use this type.
+
+// A primary data type
+enum ImGuiDataType_
+{
+    ImGuiDataType_S8,       // signed char / char (with sensible compilers)
+    ImGuiDataType_U8,       // unsigned char
+    ImGuiDataType_S16,      // short
+    ImGuiDataType_U16,      // unsigned short
+    ImGuiDataType_S32,      // int
+    ImGuiDataType_U32,      // unsigned int
+    ImGuiDataType_S64,      // long long / __int64
+    ImGuiDataType_U64,      // unsigned long long / unsigned __int64
+    ImGuiDataType_Float,    // float
+    ImGuiDataType_Double,   // double
+    ImGuiDataType_COUNT
+};
+
+// A cardinal direction
+enum ImGuiDir_
+{
+    ImGuiDir_None    = -1,
+    ImGuiDir_Left    = 0,
+    ImGuiDir_Right   = 1,
+    ImGuiDir_Up      = 2,
+    ImGuiDir_Down    = 3,
+    ImGuiDir_COUNT
+};
+
+// A sorting direction
+enum ImGuiSortDirection_
+{
+    ImGuiSortDirection_None         = 0,
+    ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending    = 1,    // Ascending = 0->9, A->Z etc.
+    ImGuiSortDirection_Descending   = 2     // Descending = 9->0, Z->A etc.
+};
+
+// Keys value 0 to 511 are left unused as legacy native/opaque key values (< 1.87)
+// Keys value >= 512 are named keys (>= 1.87)
+enum ImGuiKey_
+{
+    // Keyboard
+    ImGuiKey_None = 0,
+    ImGuiKey_Tab = 512,             // == ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN
+    ImGuiKey_LeftArrow,
+    ImGuiKey_RightArrow,
+    ImGuiKey_UpArrow,
+    ImGuiKey_DownArrow,
+    ImGuiKey_PageUp,
+    ImGuiKey_PageDown,
+    ImGuiKey_Home,
+    ImGuiKey_End,
+    ImGuiKey_Insert,
+    ImGuiKey_Delete,
+    ImGuiKey_Backspace,
+    ImGuiKey_Space,
+    ImGuiKey_Enter,
+    ImGuiKey_Escape,
+    ImGuiKey_LeftCtrl, ImGuiKey_LeftShift, ImGuiKey_LeftAlt, ImGuiKey_LeftSuper,
+    ImGuiKey_RightCtrl, ImGuiKey_RightShift, ImGuiKey_RightAlt, ImGuiKey_RightSuper,
+    ImGuiKey_Menu,
+    ImGuiKey_0, ImGuiKey_1, ImGuiKey_2, ImGuiKey_3, ImGuiKey_4, ImGuiKey_5, ImGuiKey_6, ImGuiKey_7, ImGuiKey_8, ImGuiKey_9,
+    ImGuiKey_A, ImGuiKey_B, ImGuiKey_C, ImGuiKey_D, ImGuiKey_E, ImGuiKey_F, ImGuiKey_G, ImGuiKey_H, ImGuiKey_I, ImGuiKey_J,
+    ImGuiKey_K, ImGuiKey_L, ImGuiKey_M, ImGuiKey_N, ImGuiKey_O, ImGuiKey_P, ImGuiKey_Q, ImGuiKey_R, ImGuiKey_S, ImGuiKey_T,
+    ImGuiKey_U, ImGuiKey_V, ImGuiKey_W, ImGuiKey_X, ImGuiKey_Y, ImGuiKey_Z,
+    ImGuiKey_F1, ImGuiKey_F2, ImGuiKey_F3, ImGuiKey_F4, ImGuiKey_F5, ImGuiKey_F6,
+    ImGuiKey_F7, ImGuiKey_F8, ImGuiKey_F9, ImGuiKey_F10, ImGuiKey_F11, ImGuiKey_F12,
+    ImGuiKey_Apostrophe,        // '
+    ImGuiKey_Comma,             // ,
+    ImGuiKey_Minus,             // -
+    ImGuiKey_Period,            // .
+    ImGuiKey_Slash,             // /
+    ImGuiKey_Semicolon,         // ;
+    ImGuiKey_Equal,             // =
+    ImGuiKey_LeftBracket,       // [
+    ImGuiKey_Backslash,         // \ (this text inhibit multiline comment caused by backslash)
+    ImGuiKey_RightBracket,      // ]
+    ImGuiKey_GraveAccent,       // `
+    ImGuiKey_CapsLock,
+    ImGuiKey_ScrollLock,
+    ImGuiKey_NumLock,
+    ImGuiKey_PrintScreen,
+    ImGuiKey_Pause,
+    ImGuiKey_Keypad0, ImGuiKey_Keypad1, ImGuiKey_Keypad2, ImGuiKey_Keypad3, ImGuiKey_Keypad4,
+    ImGuiKey_Keypad5, ImGuiKey_Keypad6, ImGuiKey_Keypad7, ImGuiKey_Keypad8, ImGuiKey_Keypad9,
+    ImGuiKey_KeypadDecimal,
+    ImGuiKey_KeypadDivide,
+    ImGuiKey_KeypadMultiply,
+    ImGuiKey_KeypadSubtract,
+    ImGuiKey_KeypadAdd,
+    ImGuiKey_KeypadEnter,
+    ImGuiKey_KeypadEqual,
+
+    // Gamepad (some of those are analog values, 0.0f to 1.0f)                          // GAME NAVIGATION ACTION
+    // (download controller mapping PNG/PSD at http://dearimgui.org/controls_sheets)
+    ImGuiKey_GamepadStart,          // Menu (Xbox)      + (Switch)   Start/Options (PS)
+    ImGuiKey_GamepadBack,           // View (Xbox)      - (Switch)   Share (PS)
+    ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceLeft,       // X (Xbox)         Y (Switch)   Square (PS)        // Tap: Toggle Menu. Hold: Windowing mode (Focus/Move/Resize windows)
+    ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceRight,      // B (Xbox)         A (Switch)   Circle (PS)        // Cancel / Close / Exit
+    ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceUp,         // Y (Xbox)         X (Switch)   Triangle (PS)      // Text Input / On-screen Keyboard
+    ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceDown,       // A (Xbox)         B (Switch)   Cross (PS)         // Activate / Open / Toggle / Tweak
+    ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadLeft,       // D-pad Left                                       // Move / Tweak / Resize Window (in Windowing mode)
+    ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadRight,      // D-pad Right                                      // Move / Tweak / Resize Window (in Windowing mode)
+    ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadUp,         // D-pad Up                                         // Move / Tweak / Resize Window (in Windowing mode)
+    ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadDown,       // D-pad Down                                       // Move / Tweak / Resize Window (in Windowing mode)
+    ImGuiKey_GamepadL1,             // L Bumper (Xbox)  L (Switch)   L1 (PS)            // Tweak Slower / Focus Previous (in Windowing mode)
+    ImGuiKey_GamepadR1,             // R Bumper (Xbox)  R (Switch)   R1 (PS)            // Tweak Faster / Focus Next (in Windowing mode)
+    ImGuiKey_GamepadL2,             // L Trig. (Xbox)   ZL (Switch)  L2 (PS) [Analog]
+    ImGuiKey_GamepadR2,             // R Trig. (Xbox)   ZR (Switch)  R2 (PS) [Analog]
+    ImGuiKey_GamepadL3,             // L Stick (Xbox)   L3 (Switch)  L3 (PS)
+    ImGuiKey_GamepadR3,             // R Stick (Xbox)   R3 (Switch)  R3 (PS)
+    ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickLeft,     // [Analog]                                         // Move Window (in Windowing mode)
+    ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickRight,    // [Analog]                                         // Move Window (in Windowing mode)
+    ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickUp,       // [Analog]                                         // Move Window (in Windowing mode)
+    ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickDown,     // [Analog]                                         // Move Window (in Windowing mode)
+    ImGuiKey_GamepadRStickLeft,     // [Analog]
+    ImGuiKey_GamepadRStickRight,    // [Analog]
+    ImGuiKey_GamepadRStickUp,       // [Analog]
+    ImGuiKey_GamepadRStickDown,     // [Analog]
+
+    // Keyboard Modifiers (explicitly submitted by backend via AddKeyEvent() calls)
+    // - This is mirroring the data also written to io.KeyCtrl, io.KeyShift, io.KeyAlt, io.KeySuper, in a format allowing
+    //   them to be accessed via standard key API, allowing calls such as IsKeyPressed(), IsKeyReleased(), querying duration etc.
+    // - Code polling every keys (e.g. an interface to detect a key press for input mapping) might want to ignore those
+    //   and prefer using the real keys (e.g. ImGuiKey_LeftCtrl, ImGuiKey_RightCtrl instead of ImGuiKey_ModCtrl).
+    // - In theory the value of keyboard modifiers should be roughly equivalent to a logical or of the equivalent left/right keys.
+    //   In practice: it's complicated; mods are often provided from different sources. Keyboard layout, IME, sticky keys and
+    //   backends tend to interfere and break that equivalence. The safer decision is to relay that ambiguity down to the end-user...
+    ImGuiKey_ModCtrl, ImGuiKey_ModShift, ImGuiKey_ModAlt, ImGuiKey_ModSuper,
+
+    // End of list
+    ImGuiKey_COUNT,                 // No valid ImGuiKey is ever greater than this value
+
+    // [Internal] Prior to 1.87 we required user to fill io.KeysDown[512] using their own native index + a io.KeyMap[] array.
+    // We are ditching this method but keeping a legacy path for user code doing e.g. IsKeyPressed(MY_NATIVE_KEY_CODE)
+    ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN         = 512,
+    ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END           = ImGuiKey_COUNT,
+    ImGuiKey_NamedKey_COUNT         = ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END - ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN,
+#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
+    ImGuiKey_KeysData_SIZE          = ImGuiKey_NamedKey_COUNT,          // Size of KeysData[]: only hold named keys
+    ImGuiKey_KeysData_OFFSET        = ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN,          // First key stored in io.KeysData[0]. Accesses to io.KeysData[] must use (key - ImGuiKey_KeysData_OFFSET).
+#else
+    ImGuiKey_KeysData_SIZE          = ImGuiKey_COUNT,                   // Size of KeysData[]: hold legacy 0..512 keycodes + named keys
+    ImGuiKey_KeysData_OFFSET        = 0,                                // First key stored in io.KeysData[0]. Accesses to io.KeysData[] must use (key - ImGuiKey_KeysData_OFFSET).
+#endif
+
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+    ImGuiKey_KeyPadEnter = ImGuiKey_KeypadEnter,    // Renamed in 1.87
+#endif
+};
+
+// Helper "flags" version of key-mods to store and compare multiple key-mods easily. Sometimes used for storage (e.g. io.KeyMods) but otherwise not much used in public API.
+enum ImGuiModFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiModFlags_None              = 0,
+    ImGuiModFlags_Ctrl              = 1 << 0,
+    ImGuiModFlags_Shift             = 1 << 1,
+    ImGuiModFlags_Alt               = 1 << 2,   // Menu
+    ImGuiModFlags_Super             = 1 << 3,   // Cmd/Super/Windows key
+};
+
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
+// OBSOLETED in 1.88 (from July 2022): ImGuiNavInput and io.NavInputs[].
+// Official backends between 1.60 and 1.86: will keep working and feed gamepad inputs as long as IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO is not set.
+// Custom backends: feed gamepad inputs via io.AddKeyEvent() and ImGuiKey_GamepadXXX enums.
+enum ImGuiNavInput
+{
+    ImGuiNavInput_Activate, ImGuiNavInput_Cancel, ImGuiNavInput_Input, ImGuiNavInput_Menu, ImGuiNavInput_DpadLeft, ImGuiNavInput_DpadRight, ImGuiNavInput_DpadUp, ImGuiNavInput_DpadDown,
+    ImGuiNavInput_LStickLeft, ImGuiNavInput_LStickRight, ImGuiNavInput_LStickUp, ImGuiNavInput_LStickDown, ImGuiNavInput_FocusPrev, ImGuiNavInput_FocusNext, ImGuiNavInput_TweakSlow, ImGuiNavInput_TweakFast,
+    ImGuiNavInput_COUNT,
+};
+#endif
+
+// Configuration flags stored in io.ConfigFlags. Set by user/application.
+enum ImGuiConfigFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiConfigFlags_None                   = 0,
+    ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard      = 1 << 0,   // Master keyboard navigation enable flag.
+    ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad       = 1 << 1,   // Master gamepad navigation enable flag. Backend also needs to set ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad.
+    ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos   = 1 << 2,   // Instruct navigation to move the mouse cursor. May be useful on TV/console systems where moving a virtual mouse is awkward. Will update io.MousePos and set io.WantSetMousePos=true. If enabled you MUST honor io.WantSetMousePos requests in your backend, otherwise ImGui will react as if the mouse is jumping around back and forth.
+    ImGuiConfigFlags_NavNoCaptureKeyboard   = 1 << 3,   // Instruct navigation to not set the io.WantCaptureKeyboard flag when io.NavActive is set.
+    ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouse                = 1 << 4,   // Instruct imgui to clear mouse position/buttons in NewFrame(). This allows ignoring the mouse information set by the backend.
+    ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouseCursorChange    = 1 << 5,   // Instruct backend to not alter mouse cursor shape and visibility. Use if the backend cursor changes are interfering with yours and you don't want to use SetMouseCursor() to change mouse cursor. You may want to honor requests from imgui by reading GetMouseCursor() yourself instead.
+
+    // [BETA] Docking
+    ImGuiConfigFlags_DockingEnable          = 1 << 6,   // Docking enable flags.
+
+    // [BETA] Viewports
+    // When using viewports it is recommended that your default value for ImGuiCol_WindowBg is opaque (Alpha=1.0) so transition to a viewport won't be noticeable.
+    ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable        = 1 << 10,  // Viewport enable flags (require both ImGuiBackendFlags_PlatformHasViewports + ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasViewports set by the respective backends)
+    ImGuiConfigFlags_DpiEnableScaleViewports= 1 << 14,  // [BETA: Don't use] FIXME-DPI: Reposition and resize imgui windows when the DpiScale of a viewport changed (mostly useful for the main viewport hosting other window). Note that resizing the main window itself is up to your application.
+    ImGuiConfigFlags_DpiEnableScaleFonts    = 1 << 15,  // [BETA: Don't use] FIXME-DPI: Request bitmap-scaled fonts to match DpiScale. This is a very low-quality workaround. The correct way to handle DPI is _currently_ to replace the atlas and/or fonts in the Platform_OnChangedViewport callback, but this is all early work in progress.
+
+    // User storage (to allow your backend/engine to communicate to code that may be shared between multiple projects. Those flags are NOT used by core Dear ImGui)
+    ImGuiConfigFlags_IsSRGB                 = 1 << 20,  // Application is SRGB-aware.
+    ImGuiConfigFlags_IsTouchScreen          = 1 << 21,  // Application is using a touch screen instead of a mouse.
+};
+
+// Backend capabilities flags stored in io.BackendFlags. Set by imgui_impl_xxx or custom backend.
+enum ImGuiBackendFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiBackendFlags_None                  = 0,
+    ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad            = 1 << 0,   // Backend Platform supports gamepad and currently has one connected.
+    ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors       = 1 << 1,   // Backend Platform supports honoring GetMouseCursor() value to change the OS cursor shape.
+    ImGuiBackendFlags_HasSetMousePos        = 1 << 2,   // Backend Platform supports io.WantSetMousePos requests to reposition the OS mouse position (only used if ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos is set).
+    ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset  = 1 << 3,   // Backend Renderer supports ImDrawCmd::VtxOffset. This enables output of large meshes (64K+ vertices) while still using 16-bit indices.
+
+    // [BETA] Viewports
+    ImGuiBackendFlags_PlatformHasViewports  = 1 << 10,  // Backend Platform supports multiple viewports.
+    ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseHoveredViewport=1 << 11,  // Backend Platform supports calling io.AddMouseViewportEvent() with the viewport under the mouse. IF POSSIBLE, ignore viewports with the ImGuiViewportFlags_NoInputs flag (Win32 backend, GLFW 3.30+ backend can do this, SDL backend cannot). If this cannot be done, Dear ImGui needs to use a flawed heuristic to find the viewport under.
+    ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasViewports  = 1 << 12,  // Backend Renderer supports multiple viewports.
+};
+
+// Enumeration for PushStyleColor() / PopStyleColor()
+enum ImGuiCol_
+{
+    ImGuiCol_Text,
+    ImGuiCol_TextDisabled,
+    ImGuiCol_WindowBg,              // Background of normal windows
+    ImGuiCol_ChildBg,               // Background of child windows
+    ImGuiCol_PopupBg,               // Background of popups, menus, tooltips windows
+    ImGuiCol_Border,
+    ImGuiCol_BorderShadow,
+    ImGuiCol_FrameBg,               // Background of checkbox, radio button, plot, slider, text input
+    ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered,
+    ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive,
+    ImGuiCol_TitleBg,
+    ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive,
+    ImGuiCol_TitleBgCollapsed,
+    ImGuiCol_MenuBarBg,
+    ImGuiCol_ScrollbarBg,
+    ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrab,
+    ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabHovered,
+    ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabActive,
+    ImGuiCol_CheckMark,
+    ImGuiCol_SliderGrab,
+    ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive,
+    ImGuiCol_Button,
+    ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered,
+    ImGuiCol_ButtonActive,
+    ImGuiCol_Header,                // Header* colors are used for CollapsingHeader, TreeNode, Selectable, MenuItem
+    ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered,
+    ImGuiCol_HeaderActive,
+    ImGuiCol_Separator,
+    ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered,
+    ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive,
+    ImGuiCol_ResizeGrip,            // Resize grip in lower-right and lower-left corners of windows.
+    ImGuiCol_ResizeGripHovered,
+    ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive,
+    ImGuiCol_Tab,                   // TabItem in a TabBar
+    ImGuiCol_TabHovered,
+    ImGuiCol_TabActive,
+    ImGuiCol_TabUnfocused,
+    ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive,
+    ImGuiCol_DockingPreview,        // Preview overlay color when about to docking something
+    ImGuiCol_DockingEmptyBg,        // Background color for empty node (e.g. CentralNode with no window docked into it)
+    ImGuiCol_PlotLines,
+    ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered,
+    ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram,
+    ImGuiCol_PlotHistogramHovered,
+    ImGuiCol_TableHeaderBg,         // Table header background
+    ImGuiCol_TableBorderStrong,     // Table outer and header borders (prefer using Alpha=1.0 here)
+    ImGuiCol_TableBorderLight,      // Table inner borders (prefer using Alpha=1.0 here)
+    ImGuiCol_TableRowBg,            // Table row background (even rows)
+    ImGuiCol_TableRowBgAlt,         // Table row background (odd rows)
+    ImGuiCol_TextSelectedBg,
+    ImGuiCol_DragDropTarget,        // Rectangle highlighting a drop target
+    ImGuiCol_NavHighlight,          // Gamepad/keyboard: current highlighted item
+    ImGuiCol_NavWindowingHighlight, // Highlight window when using CTRL+TAB
+    ImGuiCol_NavWindowingDimBg,     // Darken/colorize entire screen behind the CTRL+TAB window list, when active
+    ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg,      // Darken/colorize entire screen behind a modal window, when one is active
+    ImGuiCol_COUNT
+};
+
+// Enumeration for PushStyleVar() / PopStyleVar() to temporarily modify the ImGuiStyle structure.
+// - The enum only refers to fields of ImGuiStyle which makes sense to be pushed/popped inside UI code.
+//   During initialization or between frames, feel free to just poke into ImGuiStyle directly.
+// - Tip: Use your programming IDE navigation facilities on the names in the _second column_ below to find the actual members and their description.
+//   In Visual Studio IDE: CTRL+comma ("Edit.GoToAll") can follow symbols in comments, whereas CTRL+F12 ("Edit.GoToImplementation") cannot.
+//   With Visual Assist installed: ALT+G ("VAssistX.GoToImplementation") can also follow symbols in comments.
+// - When changing this enum, you need to update the associated internal table GStyleVarInfo[] accordingly. This is where we link enum values to members offset/type.
+enum ImGuiStyleVar_
+{
+    // Enum name --------------------- // Member in ImGuiStyle structure (see ImGuiStyle for descriptions)
+    ImGuiStyleVar_Alpha,               // float     Alpha
+    ImGuiStyleVar_DisabledAlpha,       // float     DisabledAlpha
+    ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding,       // ImVec2    WindowPadding
+    ImGuiStyleVar_WindowRounding,      // float     WindowRounding
+    ImGuiStyleVar_WindowBorderSize,    // float     WindowBorderSize
+    ImGuiStyleVar_WindowMinSize,       // ImVec2    WindowMinSize
+    ImGuiStyleVar_WindowTitleAlign,    // ImVec2    WindowTitleAlign
+    ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding,       // float     ChildRounding
+    ImGuiStyleVar_ChildBorderSize,     // float     ChildBorderSize
+    ImGuiStyleVar_PopupRounding,       // float     PopupRounding
+    ImGuiStyleVar_PopupBorderSize,     // float     PopupBorderSize
+    ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding,        // ImVec2    FramePadding
+    ImGuiStyleVar_FrameRounding,       // float     FrameRounding
+    ImGuiStyleVar_FrameBorderSize,     // float     FrameBorderSize
+    ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing,         // ImVec2    ItemSpacing
+    ImGuiStyleVar_ItemInnerSpacing,    // ImVec2    ItemInnerSpacing
+    ImGuiStyleVar_IndentSpacing,       // float     IndentSpacing
+    ImGuiStyleVar_CellPadding,         // ImVec2    CellPadding
+    ImGuiStyleVar_ScrollbarSize,       // float     ScrollbarSize
+    ImGuiStyleVar_ScrollbarRounding,   // float     ScrollbarRounding
+    ImGuiStyleVar_GrabMinSize,         // float     GrabMinSize
+    ImGuiStyleVar_GrabRounding,        // float     GrabRounding
+    ImGuiStyleVar_TabRounding,         // float     TabRounding
+    ImGuiStyleVar_ButtonTextAlign,     // ImVec2    ButtonTextAlign
+    ImGuiStyleVar_SelectableTextAlign, // ImVec2    SelectableTextAlign
+    ImGuiStyleVar_COUNT
+};
+
+// Flags for InvisibleButton() [extended in imgui_internal.h]
+enum ImGuiButtonFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiButtonFlags_None                   = 0,
+    ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonLeft        = 1 << 0,   // React on left mouse button (default)
+    ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonRight       = 1 << 1,   // React on right mouse button
+    ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonMiddle      = 1 << 2,   // React on center mouse button
+
+    // [Internal]
+    ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonMask_       = ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonLeft | ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonRight | ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonMiddle,
+    ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonDefault_    = ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonLeft,
+};
+
+// Flags for ColorEdit3() / ColorEdit4() / ColorPicker3() / ColorPicker4() / ColorButton()
+enum ImGuiColorEditFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_None            = 0,
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha         = 1 << 1,   //              // ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton: ignore Alpha component (will only read 3 components from the input pointer).
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker        = 1 << 2,   //              // ColorEdit: disable picker when clicking on color square.
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions       = 1 << 3,   //              // ColorEdit: disable toggling options menu when right-clicking on inputs/small preview.
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview  = 1 << 4,   //              // ColorEdit, ColorPicker: disable color square preview next to the inputs. (e.g. to show only the inputs)
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs        = 1 << 5,   //              // ColorEdit, ColorPicker: disable inputs sliders/text widgets (e.g. to show only the small preview color square).
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip       = 1 << 6,   //              // ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton: disable tooltip when hovering the preview.
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel         = 1 << 7,   //              // ColorEdit, ColorPicker: disable display of inline text label (the label is still forwarded to the tooltip and picker).
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview   = 1 << 8,   //              // ColorPicker: disable bigger color preview on right side of the picker, use small color square preview instead.
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop      = 1 << 9,   //              // ColorEdit: disable drag and drop target. ColorButton: disable drag and drop source.
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoBorder        = 1 << 10,  //              // ColorButton: disable border (which is enforced by default)
+
+    // User Options (right-click on widget to change some of them).
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar        = 1 << 16,  //              // ColorEdit, ColorPicker: show vertical alpha bar/gradient in picker.
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview    = 1 << 17,  //              // ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton: display preview as a transparent color over a checkerboard, instead of opaque.
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf= 1 << 18,  //              // ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton: display half opaque / half checkerboard, instead of opaque.
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR             = 1 << 19,  //              // (WIP) ColorEdit: Currently only disable 0.0f..1.0f limits in RGBA edition (note: you probably want to use ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float flag as well).
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB      = 1 << 20,  // [Display]    // ColorEdit: override _display_ type among RGB/HSV/Hex. ColorPicker: select any combination using one or more of RGB/HSV/Hex.
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV      = 1 << 21,  // [Display]    // "
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex      = 1 << 22,  // [Display]    // "
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8           = 1 << 23,  // [DataType]   // ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton: _display_ values formatted as 0..255.
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float           = 1 << 24,  // [DataType]   // ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton: _display_ values formatted as 0.0f..1.0f floats instead of 0..255 integers. No round-trip of value via integers.
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar    = 1 << 25,  // [Picker]     // ColorPicker: bar for Hue, rectangle for Sat/Value.
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel  = 1 << 26,  // [Picker]     // ColorPicker: wheel for Hue, triangle for Sat/Value.
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB        = 1 << 27,  // [Input]      // ColorEdit, ColorPicker: input and output data in RGB format.
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV        = 1 << 28,  // [Input]      // ColorEdit, ColorPicker: input and output data in HSV format.
+
+    // Defaults Options. You can set application defaults using SetColorEditOptions(). The intent is that you probably don't want to
+    // override them in most of your calls. Let the user choose via the option menu and/or call SetColorEditOptions() once during startup.
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_DefaultOptions_ = ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8 | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar,
+
+    // [Internal] Masks
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_    = ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex,
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_   = ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8 | ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float,
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_     = ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel | ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar,
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_      = ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV,
+
+    // Obsolete names (will be removed)
+    // ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB = ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB, ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV = ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV, ImGuiColorEditFlags_HEX = ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex  // [renamed in 1.69]
+};
+
+// Flags for DragFloat(), DragInt(), SliderFloat(), SliderInt() etc.
+// We use the same sets of flags for DragXXX() and SliderXXX() functions as the features are the same and it makes it easier to swap them.
+enum ImGuiSliderFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiSliderFlags_None                   = 0,
+    ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp            = 1 << 4,       // Clamp value to min/max bounds when input manually with CTRL+Click. By default CTRL+Click allows going out of bounds.
+    ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic            = 1 << 5,       // Make the widget logarithmic (linear otherwise). Consider using ImGuiSliderFlags_NoRoundToFormat with this if using a format-string with small amount of digits.
+    ImGuiSliderFlags_NoRoundToFormat        = 1 << 6,       // Disable rounding underlying value to match precision of the display format string (e.g. %.3f values are rounded to those 3 digits)
+    ImGuiSliderFlags_NoInput                = 1 << 7,       // Disable CTRL+Click or Enter key allowing to input text directly into the widget
+    ImGuiSliderFlags_InvalidMask_           = 0x7000000F,   // [Internal] We treat using those bits as being potentially a 'float power' argument from the previous API that has got miscast to this enum, and will trigger an assert if needed.
+
+    // Obsolete names (will be removed)
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+    ImGuiSliderFlags_ClampOnInput = ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp, // [renamed in 1.79]
+#endif
+};
+
+// Identify a mouse button.
+// Those values are guaranteed to be stable and we frequently use 0/1 directly. Named enums provided for convenience.
+enum ImGuiMouseButton_
+{
+    ImGuiMouseButton_Left = 0,
+    ImGuiMouseButton_Right = 1,
+    ImGuiMouseButton_Middle = 2,
+    ImGuiMouseButton_COUNT = 5
+};
+
+// Enumeration for GetMouseCursor()
+// User code may request backend to display given cursor by calling SetMouseCursor(), which is why we have some cursors that are marked unused here
+enum ImGuiMouseCursor_
+{
+    ImGuiMouseCursor_None = -1,
+    ImGuiMouseCursor_Arrow = 0,
+    ImGuiMouseCursor_TextInput,         // When hovering over InputText, etc.
+    ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeAll,         // (Unused by Dear ImGui functions)
+    ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNS,          // When hovering over an horizontal border
+    ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW,          // When hovering over a vertical border or a column
+    ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNESW,        // When hovering over the bottom-left corner of a window
+    ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNWSE,        // When hovering over the bottom-right corner of a window
+    ImGuiMouseCursor_Hand,              // (Unused by Dear ImGui functions. Use for e.g. hyperlinks)
+    ImGuiMouseCursor_NotAllowed,        // When hovering something with disallowed interaction. Usually a crossed circle.
+    ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT
+};
+
+// Enumeration for ImGui::SetWindow***(), SetNextWindow***(), SetNextItem***() functions
+// Represent a condition.
+// Important: Treat as a regular enum! Do NOT combine multiple values using binary operators! All the functions above treat 0 as a shortcut to ImGuiCond_Always.
+enum ImGuiCond_
+{
+    ImGuiCond_None          = 0,        // No condition (always set the variable), same as _Always
+    ImGuiCond_Always        = 1 << 0,   // No condition (always set the variable)
+    ImGuiCond_Once          = 1 << 1,   // Set the variable once per runtime session (only the first call will succeed)
+    ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver  = 1 << 2,   // Set the variable if the object/window has no persistently saved data (no entry in .ini file)
+    ImGuiCond_Appearing     = 1 << 3,   // Set the variable if the object/window is appearing after being hidden/inactive (or the first time)
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Helpers: Memory allocations macros, ImVector<>
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// IM_MALLOC(), IM_FREE(), IM_NEW(), IM_PLACEMENT_NEW(), IM_DELETE()
+// We call C++ constructor on own allocated memory via the placement "new(ptr) Type()" syntax.
+// Defining a custom placement new() with a custom parameter allows us to bypass including <new> which on some platforms complains when user has disabled exceptions.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+struct ImNewWrapper {};
+inline void* operator new(size_t, ImNewWrapper, void* ptr) { return ptr; }
+inline void  operator delete(void*, ImNewWrapper, void*)   {} // This is only required so we can use the symmetrical new()
+#define IM_ALLOC(_SIZE)                     ImGui::MemAlloc(_SIZE)
+#define IM_FREE(_PTR)                       ImGui::MemFree(_PTR)
+#define IM_PLACEMENT_NEW(_PTR)              new(ImNewWrapper(), _PTR)
+#define IM_NEW(_TYPE)                       new(ImNewWrapper(), ImGui::MemAlloc(sizeof(_TYPE))) _TYPE
+template<typename T> void IM_DELETE(T* p)   { if (p) { p->~T(); ImGui::MemFree(p); } }
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// ImVector<>
+// Lightweight std::vector<>-like class to avoid dragging dependencies (also, some implementations of STL with debug enabled are absurdly slow, we bypass it so our code runs fast in debug).
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - You generally do NOT need to care or use this ever. But we need to make it available in imgui.h because some of our public structures are relying on it.
+// - We use std-like naming convention here, which is a little unusual for this codebase.
+// - Important: clear() frees memory, resize(0) keep the allocated buffer. We use resize(0) a lot to intentionally recycle allocated buffers across frames and amortize our costs.
+// - Important: our implementation does NOT call C++ constructors/destructors, we treat everything as raw data! This is intentional but be extra mindful of that,
+//   Do NOT use this class as a std::vector replacement in your own code! Many of the structures used by dear imgui can be safely initialized by a zero-memset.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF
+template<typename T>
+struct ImVector
+{
+    int                 Size;
+    int                 Capacity;
+    T*                  Data;
+
+    // Provide standard typedefs but we don't use them ourselves.
+    typedef T                   value_type;
+    typedef value_type*         iterator;
+    typedef const value_type*   const_iterator;
+
+    // Constructors, destructor
+    inline ImVector()                                       { Size = Capacity = 0; Data = NULL; }
+    inline ImVector(const ImVector<T>& src)                 { Size = Capacity = 0; Data = NULL; operator=(src); }
+    inline ImVector<T>& operator=(const ImVector<T>& src)   { clear(); resize(src.Size); memcpy(Data, src.Data, (size_t)Size * sizeof(T)); return *this; }
+    inline ~ImVector()                                      { if (Data) IM_FREE(Data); } // Important: does not destruct anything
+
+    inline void         clear()                             { if (Data) { Size = Capacity = 0; IM_FREE(Data); Data = NULL; } }  // Important: does not destruct anything
+    inline void         clear_delete()                      { for (int n = 0; n < Size; n++) IM_DELETE(Data[n]); clear(); }     // Important: never called automatically! always explicit.
+    inline void         clear_destruct()                    { for (int n = 0; n < Size; n++) Data[n].~T(); clear(); }           // Important: never called automatically! always explicit.
+
+    inline bool         empty() const                       { return Size == 0; }
+    inline int          size() const                        { return Size; }
+    inline int          size_in_bytes() const               { return Size * (int)sizeof(T); }
+    inline int          max_size() const                    { return 0x7FFFFFFF / (int)sizeof(T); }
+    inline int          capacity() const                    { return Capacity; }
+    inline T&           operator[](int i)                   { IM_ASSERT(i >= 0 && i < Size); return Data[i]; }
+    inline const T&     operator[](int i) const             { IM_ASSERT(i >= 0 && i < Size); return Data[i]; }
+
+    inline T*           begin()                             { return Data; }
+    inline const T*     begin() const                       { return Data; }
+    inline T*           end()                               { return Data + Size; }
+    inline const T*     end() const                         { return Data + Size; }
+    inline T&           front()                             { IM_ASSERT(Size > 0); return Data[0]; }
+    inline const T&     front() const                       { IM_ASSERT(Size > 0); return Data[0]; }
+    inline T&           back()                              { IM_ASSERT(Size > 0); return Data[Size - 1]; }
+    inline const T&     back() const                        { IM_ASSERT(Size > 0); return Data[Size - 1]; }
+    inline void         swap(ImVector<T>& rhs)              { int rhs_size = rhs.Size; rhs.Size = Size; Size = rhs_size; int rhs_cap = rhs.Capacity; rhs.Capacity = Capacity; Capacity = rhs_cap; T* rhs_data = rhs.Data; rhs.Data = Data; Data = rhs_data; }
+
+    inline int          _grow_capacity(int sz) const        { int new_capacity = Capacity ? (Capacity + Capacity / 2) : 8; return new_capacity > sz ? new_capacity : sz; }
+    inline void         resize(int new_size)                { if (new_size > Capacity) reserve(_grow_capacity(new_size)); Size = new_size; }
+    inline void         resize(int new_size, const T& v)    { if (new_size > Capacity) reserve(_grow_capacity(new_size)); if (new_size > Size) for (int n = Size; n < new_size; n++) memcpy(&Data[n], &v, sizeof(v)); Size = new_size; }
+    inline void         shrink(int new_size)                { IM_ASSERT(new_size <= Size); Size = new_size; } // Resize a vector to a smaller size, guaranteed not to cause a reallocation
+    inline void         reserve(int new_capacity)           { if (new_capacity <= Capacity) return; T* new_data = (T*)IM_ALLOC((size_t)new_capacity * sizeof(T)); if (Data) { memcpy(new_data, Data, (size_t)Size * sizeof(T)); IM_FREE(Data); } Data = new_data; Capacity = new_capacity; }
+    inline void         reserve_discard(int new_capacity)   { if (new_capacity <= Capacity) return; if (Data) IM_FREE(Data); Data = (T*)IM_ALLOC((size_t)new_capacity * sizeof(T)); Capacity = new_capacity; }
+
+    // NB: It is illegal to call push_back/push_front/insert with a reference pointing inside the ImVector data itself! e.g. v.push_back(v[10]) is forbidden.
+    inline void         push_back(const T& v)               { if (Size == Capacity) reserve(_grow_capacity(Size + 1)); memcpy(&Data[Size], &v, sizeof(v)); Size++; }
+    inline void         pop_back()                          { IM_ASSERT(Size > 0); Size--; }
+    inline void         push_front(const T& v)              { if (Size == 0) push_back(v); else insert(Data, v); }
+    inline T*           erase(const T* it)                  { IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it < Data + Size); const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; memmove(Data + off, Data + off + 1, ((size_t)Size - (size_t)off - 1) * sizeof(T)); Size--; return Data + off; }
+    inline T*           erase(const T* it, const T* it_last){ IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it < Data + Size && it_last >= it && it_last <= Data + Size); const ptrdiff_t count = it_last - it; const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; memmove(Data + off, Data + off + count, ((size_t)Size - (size_t)off - (size_t)count) * sizeof(T)); Size -= (int)count; return Data + off; }
+    inline T*           erase_unsorted(const T* it)         { IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it < Data + Size);  const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; if (it < Data + Size - 1) memcpy(Data + off, Data + Size - 1, sizeof(T)); Size--; return Data + off; }
+    inline T*           insert(const T* it, const T& v)     { IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it <= Data + Size); const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; if (Size == Capacity) reserve(_grow_capacity(Size + 1)); if (off < (int)Size) memmove(Data + off + 1, Data + off, ((size_t)Size - (size_t)off) * sizeof(T)); memcpy(&Data[off], &v, sizeof(v)); Size++; return Data + off; }
+    inline bool         contains(const T& v) const          { const T* data = Data;  const T* data_end = Data + Size; while (data < data_end) if (*data++ == v) return true; return false; }
+    inline T*           find(const T& v)                    { T* data = Data;  const T* data_end = Data + Size; while (data < data_end) if (*data == v) break; else ++data; return data; }
+    inline const T*     find(const T& v) const              { const T* data = Data;  const T* data_end = Data + Size; while (data < data_end) if (*data == v) break; else ++data; return data; }
+    inline bool         find_erase(const T& v)              { const T* it = find(v); if (it < Data + Size) { erase(it); return true; } return false; }
+    inline bool         find_erase_unsorted(const T& v)     { const T* it = find(v); if (it < Data + Size) { erase_unsorted(it); return true; } return false; }
+    inline int          index_from_ptr(const T* it) const   { IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it < Data + Size); const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; return (int)off; }
+};
+IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_RESTORE
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] ImGuiStyle
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// You may modify the ImGui::GetStyle() main instance during initialization and before NewFrame().
+// During the frame, use ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_XXXX)/PopStyleVar() to alter the main style values,
+// and ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_XXX)/PopStyleColor() for colors.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+struct ImGuiStyle
+{
+    float       Alpha;                      // Global alpha applies to everything in Dear ImGui.
+    float       DisabledAlpha;              // Additional alpha multiplier applied by BeginDisabled(). Multiply over current value of Alpha.
+    ImVec2      WindowPadding;              // Padding within a window.
+    float       WindowRounding;             // Radius of window corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular windows. Large values tend to lead to variety of artifacts and are not recommended.
+    float       WindowBorderSize;           // Thickness of border around windows. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. (Other values are not well tested and more CPU/GPU costly).
+    ImVec2      WindowMinSize;              // Minimum window size. This is a global setting. If you want to constraint individual windows, use SetNextWindowSizeConstraints().
+    ImVec2      WindowTitleAlign;           // Alignment for title bar text. Defaults to (0.0f,0.5f) for left-aligned,vertically centered.
+    ImGuiDir    WindowMenuButtonPosition;   // Side of the collapsing/docking button in the title bar (None/Left/Right). Defaults to ImGuiDir_Left.
+    float       ChildRounding;              // Radius of child window corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular windows.
+    float       ChildBorderSize;            // Thickness of border around child windows. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. (Other values are not well tested and more CPU/GPU costly).
+    float       PopupRounding;              // Radius of popup window corners rounding. (Note that tooltip windows use WindowRounding)
+    float       PopupBorderSize;            // Thickness of border around popup/tooltip windows. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. (Other values are not well tested and more CPU/GPU costly).
+    ImVec2      FramePadding;               // Padding within a framed rectangle (used by most widgets).
+    float       FrameRounding;              // Radius of frame corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular frame (used by most widgets).
+    float       FrameBorderSize;            // Thickness of border around frames. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. (Other values are not well tested and more CPU/GPU costly).
+    ImVec2      ItemSpacing;                // Horizontal and vertical spacing between widgets/lines.
+    ImVec2      ItemInnerSpacing;           // Horizontal and vertical spacing between within elements of a composed widget (e.g. a slider and its label).
+    ImVec2      CellPadding;                // Padding within a table cell
+    ImVec2      TouchExtraPadding;          // Expand reactive bounding box for touch-based system where touch position is not accurate enough. Unfortunately we don't sort widgets so priority on overlap will always be given to the first widget. So don't grow this too much!
+    float       IndentSpacing;              // Horizontal indentation when e.g. entering a tree node. Generally == (FontSize + FramePadding.x*2).
+    float       ColumnsMinSpacing;          // Minimum horizontal spacing between two columns. Preferably > (FramePadding.x + 1).
+    float       ScrollbarSize;              // Width of the vertical scrollbar, Height of the horizontal scrollbar.
+    float       ScrollbarRounding;          // Radius of grab corners for scrollbar.
+    float       GrabMinSize;                // Minimum width/height of a grab box for slider/scrollbar.
+    float       GrabRounding;               // Radius of grabs corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular slider grabs.
+    float       LogSliderDeadzone;          // The size in pixels of the dead-zone around zero on logarithmic sliders that cross zero.
+    float       TabRounding;                // Radius of upper corners of a tab. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular tabs.
+    float       TabBorderSize;              // Thickness of border around tabs.
+    float       TabMinWidthForCloseButton;  // Minimum width for close button to appears on an unselected tab when hovered. Set to 0.0f to always show when hovering, set to FLT_MAX to never show close button unless selected.
+    ImGuiDir    ColorButtonPosition;        // Side of the color button in the ColorEdit4 widget (left/right). Defaults to ImGuiDir_Right.
+    ImVec2      ButtonTextAlign;            // Alignment of button text when button is larger than text. Defaults to (0.5f, 0.5f) (centered).
+    ImVec2      SelectableTextAlign;        // Alignment of selectable text. Defaults to (0.0f, 0.0f) (top-left aligned). It's generally important to keep this left-aligned if you want to lay multiple items on a same line.
+    ImVec2      DisplayWindowPadding;       // Window position are clamped to be visible within the display area or monitors by at least this amount. Only applies to regular windows.
+    ImVec2      DisplaySafeAreaPadding;     // If you cannot see the edges of your screen (e.g. on a TV) increase the safe area padding. Apply to popups/tooltips as well regular windows. NB: Prefer configuring your TV sets correctly!
+    float       MouseCursorScale;           // Scale software rendered mouse cursor (when io.MouseDrawCursor is enabled). We apply per-monitor DPI scaling over this scale. May be removed later.
+    bool        AntiAliasedLines;           // Enable anti-aliased lines/borders. Disable if you are really tight on CPU/GPU. Latched at the beginning of the frame (copied to ImDrawList).
+    bool        AntiAliasedLinesUseTex;     // Enable anti-aliased lines/borders using textures where possible. Require backend to render with bilinear filtering (NOT point/nearest filtering). Latched at the beginning of the frame (copied to ImDrawList).
+    bool        AntiAliasedFill;            // Enable anti-aliased edges around filled shapes (rounded rectangles, circles, etc.). Disable if you are really tight on CPU/GPU. Latched at the beginning of the frame (copied to ImDrawList).
+    float       CurveTessellationTol;       // Tessellation tolerance when using PathBezierCurveTo() without a specific number of segments. Decrease for highly tessellated curves (higher quality, more polygons), increase to reduce quality.
+    float       CircleTessellationMaxError; // Maximum error (in pixels) allowed when using AddCircle()/AddCircleFilled() or drawing rounded corner rectangles with no explicit segment count specified. Decrease for higher quality but more geometry.
+    ImVec4      Colors[ImGuiCol_COUNT];
+
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiStyle();
+    IMGUI_API void ScaleAllSizes(float scale_factor);
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] ImGuiIO
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Communicate most settings and inputs/outputs to Dear ImGui using this structure.
+// Access via ImGui::GetIO(). Read 'Programmer guide' section in .cpp file for general usage.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// [Internal] Storage used by IsKeyDown(), IsKeyPressed() etc functions.
+// If prior to 1.87 you used io.KeysDownDuration[] (which was marked as internal), you should use GetKeyData(key)->DownDuration and not io.KeysData[key]->DownDuration.
+struct ImGuiKeyData
+{
+    bool        Down;               // True for if key is down
+    float       DownDuration;       // Duration the key has been down (<0.0f: not pressed, 0.0f: just pressed, >0.0f: time held)
+    float       DownDurationPrev;   // Last frame duration the key has been down
+    float       AnalogValue;        // 0.0f..1.0f for gamepad values
+};
+
+struct ImGuiIO
+{
+    //------------------------------------------------------------------
+    // Configuration                            // Default value
+    //------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+    ImGuiConfigFlags   ConfigFlags;             // = 0              // See ImGuiConfigFlags_ enum. Set by user/application. Gamepad/keyboard navigation options, etc.
+    ImGuiBackendFlags  BackendFlags;            // = 0              // See ImGuiBackendFlags_ enum. Set by backend (imgui_impl_xxx files or custom backend) to communicate features supported by the backend.
+    ImVec2      DisplaySize;                    // <unset>          // Main display size, in pixels (generally == GetMainViewport()->Size). May change every frame.
+    float       DeltaTime;                      // = 1.0f/60.0f     // Time elapsed since last frame, in seconds. May change every frame.
+    float       IniSavingRate;                  // = 5.0f           // Minimum time between saving positions/sizes to .ini file, in seconds.
+    const char* IniFilename;                    // = "imgui.ini"    // Path to .ini file (important: default "imgui.ini" is relative to current working dir!). Set NULL to disable automatic .ini loading/saving or if you want to manually call LoadIniSettingsXXX() / SaveIniSettingsXXX() functions.
+    const char* LogFilename;                    // = "imgui_log.txt"// Path to .log file (default parameter to ImGui::LogToFile when no file is specified).
+    float       MouseDoubleClickTime;           // = 0.30f          // Time for a double-click, in seconds.
+    float       MouseDoubleClickMaxDist;        // = 6.0f           // Distance threshold to stay in to validate a double-click, in pixels.
+    float       MouseDragThreshold;             // = 6.0f           // Distance threshold before considering we are dragging.
+    float       KeyRepeatDelay;                 // = 0.250f         // When holding a key/button, time before it starts repeating, in seconds (for buttons in Repeat mode, etc.).
+    float       KeyRepeatRate;                  // = 0.050f         // When holding a key/button, rate at which it repeats, in seconds.
+    void*       UserData;                       // = NULL           // Store your own data for retrieval by callbacks.
+
+    ImFontAtlas*Fonts;                          // <auto>           // Font atlas: load, rasterize and pack one or more fonts into a single texture.
+    float       FontGlobalScale;                // = 1.0f           // Global scale all fonts
+    bool        FontAllowUserScaling;           // = false          // Allow user scaling text of individual window with CTRL+Wheel.
+    ImFont*     FontDefault;                    // = NULL           // Font to use on NewFrame(). Use NULL to uses Fonts->Fonts[0].
+    ImVec2      DisplayFramebufferScale;        // = (1, 1)         // For retina display or other situations where window coordinates are different from framebuffer coordinates. This generally ends up in ImDrawData::FramebufferScale.
+
+    // Docking options (when ImGuiConfigFlags_DockingEnable is set)
+    bool        ConfigDockingNoSplit;           // = false          // Simplified docking mode: disable window splitting, so docking is limited to merging multiple windows together into tab-bars.
+    bool        ConfigDockingWithShift;         // = false          // Enable docking with holding Shift key (reduce visual noise, allows dropping in wider space)
+    bool        ConfigDockingAlwaysTabBar;      // = false          // [BETA] [FIXME: This currently creates regression with auto-sizing and general overhead] Make every single floating window display within a docking node.
+    bool        ConfigDockingTransparentPayload;// = false          // [BETA] Make window or viewport transparent when docking and only display docking boxes on the target viewport. Useful if rendering of multiple viewport cannot be synced. Best used with ConfigViewportsNoAutoMerge.
+
+    // Viewport options (when ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable is set)
+    bool        ConfigViewportsNoAutoMerge;     // = false;         // Set to make all floating imgui windows always create their own viewport. Otherwise, they are merged into the main host viewports when overlapping it. May also set ImGuiViewportFlags_NoAutoMerge on individual viewport.
+    bool        ConfigViewportsNoTaskBarIcon;   // = false          // Disable default OS task bar icon flag for secondary viewports. When a viewport doesn't want a task bar icon, ImGuiViewportFlags_NoTaskBarIcon will be set on it.
+    bool        ConfigViewportsNoDecoration;    // = true           // Disable default OS window decoration flag for secondary viewports. When a viewport doesn't want window decorations, ImGuiViewportFlags_NoDecoration will be set on it. Enabling decoration can create subsequent issues at OS levels (e.g. minimum window size).
+    bool        ConfigViewportsNoDefaultParent; // = false          // Disable default OS parenting to main viewport for secondary viewports. By default, viewports are marked with ParentViewportId = <main_viewport>, expecting the platform backend to setup a parent/child relationship between the OS windows (some backend may ignore this). Set to true if you want the default to be 0, then all viewports will be top-level OS windows.
+
+    // Miscellaneous options
+    bool        MouseDrawCursor;                // = false          // Request ImGui to draw a mouse cursor for you (if you are on a platform without a mouse cursor). Cannot be easily renamed to 'io.ConfigXXX' because this is frequently used by backend implementations.
+    bool        ConfigMacOSXBehaviors;          // = defined(__APPLE__) // OS X style: Text editing cursor movement using Alt instead of Ctrl, Shortcuts using Cmd/Super instead of Ctrl, Line/Text Start and End using Cmd+Arrows instead of Home/End, Double click selects by word instead of selecting whole text, Multi-selection in lists uses Cmd/Super instead of Ctrl.
+    bool        ConfigInputTrickleEventQueue;   // = true           // Enable input queue trickling: some types of events submitted during the same frame (e.g. button down + up) will be spread over multiple frames, improving interactions with low framerates.
+    bool        ConfigInputTextCursorBlink;     // = true           // Enable blinking cursor (optional as some users consider it to be distracting).
+    bool        ConfigInputTextEnterKeepActive; // = false          // [BETA] Pressing Enter will keep item active and select contents (single-line only).
+    bool        ConfigDragClickToInputText;     // = false          // [BETA] Enable turning DragXXX widgets into text input with a simple mouse click-release (without moving). Not desirable on devices without a keyboard.
+    bool        ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges;   // = true           // Enable resizing of windows from their edges and from the lower-left corner. This requires (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors) because it needs mouse cursor feedback. (This used to be a per-window ImGuiWindowFlags_ResizeFromAnySide flag)
+    bool        ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly; // = false       // Enable allowing to move windows only when clicking on their title bar. Does not apply to windows without a title bar.
+    float       ConfigMemoryCompactTimer;       // = 60.0f          // Timer (in seconds) to free transient windows/tables memory buffers when unused. Set to -1.0f to disable.
+
+    //------------------------------------------------------------------
+    // Platform Functions
+    // (the imgui_impl_xxxx backend files are setting those up for you)
+    //------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+    // Optional: Platform/Renderer backend name (informational only! will be displayed in About Window) + User data for backend/wrappers to store their own stuff.
+    const char* BackendPlatformName;            // = NULL
+    const char* BackendRendererName;            // = NULL
+    void*       BackendPlatformUserData;        // = NULL           // User data for platform backend
+    void*       BackendRendererUserData;        // = NULL           // User data for renderer backend
+    void*       BackendLanguageUserData;        // = NULL           // User data for non C++ programming language backend
+
+    // Optional: Access OS clipboard
+    // (default to use native Win32 clipboard on Windows, otherwise uses a private clipboard. Override to access OS clipboard on other architectures)
+    const char* (*GetClipboardTextFn)(void* user_data);
+    void        (*SetClipboardTextFn)(void* user_data, const char* text);
+    void*       ClipboardUserData;
+
+    // Optional: Notify OS Input Method Editor of the screen position of your cursor for text input position (e.g. when using Japanese/Chinese IME on Windows)
+    // (default to use native imm32 api on Windows)
+    void        (*SetPlatformImeDataFn)(ImGuiViewport* viewport, ImGuiPlatformImeData* data);
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+    void*       ImeWindowHandle;                // = NULL           // [Obsolete] Set ImGuiViewport::PlatformHandleRaw instead. Set this to your HWND to get automatic IME cursor positioning.
+#else
+    void*       _UnusedPadding;                                     // Unused field to keep data structure the same size.
+#endif
+
+    //------------------------------------------------------------------
+    // Input - Call before calling NewFrame()
+    //------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+    // Input Functions
+    IMGUI_API void  AddKeyEvent(ImGuiKey key, bool down);                   // Queue a new key down/up event. Key should be "translated" (as in, generally ImGuiKey_A matches the key end-user would use to emit an 'A' character)
+    IMGUI_API void  AddKeyAnalogEvent(ImGuiKey key, bool down, float v);    // Queue a new key down/up event for analog values (e.g. ImGuiKey_Gamepad_ values). Dead-zones should be handled by the backend.
+    IMGUI_API void  AddMousePosEvent(float x, float y);                     // Queue a mouse position update. Use -FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX to signify no mouse (e.g. app not focused and not hovered)
+    IMGUI_API void  AddMouseButtonEvent(int button, bool down);             // Queue a mouse button change
+    IMGUI_API void  AddMouseWheelEvent(float wh_x, float wh_y);             // Queue a mouse wheel update
+    IMGUI_API void  AddMouseViewportEvent(ImGuiID id);                      // Queue a mouse hovered viewport. Requires backend to set ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseHoveredViewport to call this (for multi-viewport support).
+    IMGUI_API void  AddFocusEvent(bool focused);                            // Queue a gain/loss of focus for the application (generally based on OS/platform focus of your window)
+    IMGUI_API void  AddInputCharacter(unsigned int c);                      // Queue a new character input
+    IMGUI_API void  AddInputCharacterUTF16(ImWchar16 c);                    // Queue a new character input from an UTF-16 character, it can be a surrogate
+    IMGUI_API void  AddInputCharactersUTF8(const char* str);                // Queue a new characters input from an UTF-8 string
+
+    IMGUI_API void  SetKeyEventNativeData(ImGuiKey key, int native_keycode, int native_scancode, int native_legacy_index = -1); // [Optional] Specify index for legacy <1.87 IsKeyXXX() functions with native indices + specify native keycode, scancode.
+    IMGUI_API void  SetAppAcceptingEvents(bool accepting_events);           // Set master flag for accepting key/mouse/text events (default to true). Useful if you have native dialog boxes that are interrupting your application loop/refresh, and you want to disable events being queued while your app is frozen.
+    IMGUI_API void  ClearInputCharacters();                                 // [Internal] Clear the text input buffer manually
+    IMGUI_API void  ClearInputKeys();                                       // [Internal] Release all keys
+
+    //------------------------------------------------------------------
+    // Output - Updated by NewFrame() or EndFrame()/Render()
+    // (when reading from the io.WantCaptureMouse, io.WantCaptureKeyboard flags to dispatch your inputs, it is
+    //  generally easier and more correct to use their state BEFORE calling NewFrame(). See FAQ for details!)
+    //------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+    bool        WantCaptureMouse;                   // Set when Dear ImGui will use mouse inputs, in this case do not dispatch them to your main game/application (either way, always pass on mouse inputs to imgui). (e.g. unclicked mouse is hovering over an imgui window, widget is active, mouse was clicked over an imgui window, etc.).
+    bool        WantCaptureKeyboard;                // Set when Dear ImGui will use keyboard inputs, in this case do not dispatch them to your main game/application (either way, always pass keyboard inputs to imgui). (e.g. InputText active, or an imgui window is focused and navigation is enabled, etc.).
+    bool        WantTextInput;                      // Mobile/console: when set, you may display an on-screen keyboard. This is set by Dear ImGui when it wants textual keyboard input to happen (e.g. when a InputText widget is active).
+    bool        WantSetMousePos;                    // MousePos has been altered, backend should reposition mouse on next frame. Rarely used! Set only when ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos flag is enabled.
+    bool        WantSaveIniSettings;                // When manual .ini load/save is active (io.IniFilename == NULL), this will be set to notify your application that you can call SaveIniSettingsToMemory() and save yourself. Important: clear io.WantSaveIniSettings yourself after saving!
+    bool        NavActive;                          // Keyboard/Gamepad navigation is currently allowed (will handle ImGuiKey_NavXXX events) = a window is focused and it doesn't use the ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs flag.
+    bool        NavVisible;                         // Keyboard/Gamepad navigation is visible and allowed (will handle ImGuiKey_NavXXX events).
+    float       Framerate;                          // Estimate of application framerate (rolling average over 60 frames, based on io.DeltaTime), in frame per second. Solely for convenience. Slow applications may not want to use a moving average or may want to reset underlying buffers occasionally.
+    int         MetricsRenderVertices;              // Vertices output during last call to Render()
+    int         MetricsRenderIndices;               // Indices output during last call to Render() = number of triangles * 3
+    int         MetricsRenderWindows;               // Number of visible windows
+    int         MetricsActiveWindows;               // Number of active windows
+    int         MetricsActiveAllocations;           // Number of active allocations, updated by MemAlloc/MemFree based on current context. May be off if you have multiple imgui contexts.
+    ImVec2      MouseDelta;                         // Mouse delta. Note that this is zero if either current or previous position are invalid (-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX), so a disappearing/reappearing mouse won't have a huge delta.
+
+    // Legacy: before 1.87, we required backend to fill io.KeyMap[] (imgui->native map) during initialization and io.KeysDown[] (native indices) every frame.
+    // This is still temporarily supported as a legacy feature. However the new preferred scheme is for backend to call io.AddKeyEvent().
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
+    int         KeyMap[ImGuiKey_COUNT];             // [LEGACY] Input: map of indices into the KeysDown[512] entries array which represent your "native" keyboard state. The first 512 are now unused and should be kept zero. Legacy backend will write into KeyMap[] using ImGuiKey_ indices which are always >512.
+    bool        KeysDown[ImGuiKey_COUNT];           // [LEGACY] Input: Keyboard keys that are pressed (ideally left in the "native" order your engine has access to keyboard keys, so you can use your own defines/enums for keys). This used to be [512] sized. It is now ImGuiKey_COUNT to allow legacy io.KeysDown[GetKeyIndex(...)] to work without an overflow.
+    float       NavInputs[ImGuiNavInput_COUNT];     // [LEGACY] Since 1.88, NavInputs[] was removed. Backends from 1.60 to 1.86 won't build. Feed gamepad inputs via io.AddKeyEvent() and ImGuiKey_GamepadXXX enums.
+#endif
+
+    //------------------------------------------------------------------
+    // [Internal] Dear ImGui will maintain those fields. Forward compatibility not guaranteed!
+    //------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+    // Main Input State
+    // (this block used to be written by backend, since 1.87 it is best to NOT write to those directly, call the AddXXX functions above instead)
+    // (reading from those variables is fair game, as they are extremely unlikely to be moving anywhere)
+    ImVec2      MousePos;                           // Mouse position, in pixels. Set to ImVec2(-FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX) if mouse is unavailable (on another screen, etc.)
+    bool        MouseDown[5];                       // Mouse buttons: 0=left, 1=right, 2=middle + extras (ImGuiMouseButton_COUNT == 5). Dear ImGui mostly uses left and right buttons. Others buttons allows us to track if the mouse is being used by your application + available to user as a convenience via IsMouse** API.
+    float       MouseWheel;                         // Mouse wheel Vertical: 1 unit scrolls about 5 lines text.
+    float       MouseWheelH;                        // Mouse wheel Horizontal. Most users don't have a mouse with an horizontal wheel, may not be filled by all backends.
+    ImGuiID     MouseHoveredViewport;               // (Optional) Modify using io.AddMouseViewportEvent(). With multi-viewports: viewport the OS mouse is hovering. If possible _IGNORING_ viewports with the ImGuiViewportFlags_NoInputs flag is much better (few backends can handle that). Set io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseHoveredViewport if you can provide this info. If you don't imgui will infer the value using the rectangles and last focused time of the viewports it knows about (ignoring other OS windows).
+    bool        KeyCtrl;                            // Keyboard modifier down: Control
+    bool        KeyShift;                           // Keyboard modifier down: Shift
+    bool        KeyAlt;                             // Keyboard modifier down: Alt
+    bool        KeySuper;                           // Keyboard modifier down: Cmd/Super/Windows
+
+    // Other state maintained from data above + IO function calls
+    ImGuiModFlags KeyMods;                          // Key mods flags (same as io.KeyCtrl/KeyShift/KeyAlt/KeySuper but merged into flags), updated by NewFrame()
+    ImGuiKeyData KeysData[ImGuiKey_KeysData_SIZE];  // Key state for all known keys. Use IsKeyXXX() functions to access this.
+    bool        WantCaptureMouseUnlessPopupClose;   // Alternative to WantCaptureMouse: (WantCaptureMouse == true && WantCaptureMouseUnlessPopupClose == false) when a click over void is expected to close a popup.
+    ImVec2      MousePosPrev;                       // Previous mouse position (note that MouseDelta is not necessary == MousePos-MousePosPrev, in case either position is invalid)
+    ImVec2      MouseClickedPos[5];                 // Position at time of clicking
+    double      MouseClickedTime[5];                // Time of last click (used to figure out double-click)
+    bool        MouseClicked[5];                    // Mouse button went from !Down to Down (same as MouseClickedCount[x] != 0)
+    bool        MouseDoubleClicked[5];              // Has mouse button been double-clicked? (same as MouseClickedCount[x] == 2)
+    ImU16       MouseClickedCount[5];               // == 0 (not clicked), == 1 (same as MouseClicked[]), == 2 (double-clicked), == 3 (triple-clicked) etc. when going from !Down to Down
+    ImU16       MouseClickedLastCount[5];           // Count successive number of clicks. Stays valid after mouse release. Reset after another click is done.
+    bool        MouseReleased[5];                   // Mouse button went from Down to !Down
+    bool        MouseDownOwned[5];                  // Track if button was clicked inside a dear imgui window or over void blocked by a popup. We don't request mouse capture from the application if click started outside ImGui bounds.
+    bool        MouseDownOwnedUnlessPopupClose[5];  // Track if button was clicked inside a dear imgui window.
+    float       MouseDownDuration[5];               // Duration the mouse button has been down (0.0f == just clicked)
+    float       MouseDownDurationPrev[5];           // Previous time the mouse button has been down
+    ImVec2      MouseDragMaxDistanceAbs[5];         // Maximum distance, absolute, on each axis, of how much mouse has traveled from the clicking point
+    float       MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[5];         // Squared maximum distance of how much mouse has traveled from the clicking point (used for moving thresholds)
+    float       PenPressure;                        // Touch/Pen pressure (0.0f to 1.0f, should be >0.0f only when MouseDown[0] == true). Helper storage currently unused by Dear ImGui.
+    bool        AppFocusLost;                       // Only modify via AddFocusEvent()
+    bool        AppAcceptingEvents;                 // Only modify via SetAppAcceptingEvents()
+    ImS8        BackendUsingLegacyKeyArrays;        // -1: unknown, 0: using AddKeyEvent(), 1: using legacy io.KeysDown[]
+    bool        BackendUsingLegacyNavInputArray;    // 0: using AddKeyAnalogEvent(), 1: writing to legacy io.NavInputs[] directly
+    ImWchar16   InputQueueSurrogate;                // For AddInputCharacterUTF16()
+    ImVector<ImWchar> InputQueueCharacters;         // Queue of _characters_ input (obtained by platform backend). Fill using AddInputCharacter() helper.
+
+    IMGUI_API   ImGuiIO();
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Misc data structures
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Shared state of InputText(), passed as an argument to your callback when a ImGuiInputTextFlags_Callback* flag is used.
+// The callback function should return 0 by default.
+// Callbacks (follow a flag name and see comments in ImGuiInputTextFlags_ declarations for more details)
+// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackEdit:        Callback on buffer edit (note that InputText() already returns true on edit, the callback is useful mainly to manipulate the underlying buffer while focus is active)
+// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways:      Callback on each iteration
+// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion:  Callback on pressing TAB
+// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory:     Callback on pressing Up/Down arrows
+// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter:  Callback on character inputs to replace or discard them. Modify 'EventChar' to replace or discard, or return 1 in callback to discard.
+// - ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize:      Callback on buffer capacity changes request (beyond 'buf_size' parameter value), allowing the string to grow.
+struct ImGuiInputTextCallbackData
+{
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags EventFlag;      // One ImGuiInputTextFlags_Callback*    // Read-only
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags Flags;          // What user passed to InputText()      // Read-only
+    void*               UserData;       // What user passed to InputText()      // Read-only
+
+    // Arguments for the different callback events
+    // - To modify the text buffer in a callback, prefer using the InsertChars() / DeleteChars() function. InsertChars() will take care of calling the resize callback if necessary.
+    // - If you know your edits are not going to resize the underlying buffer allocation, you may modify the contents of 'Buf[]' directly. You need to update 'BufTextLen' accordingly (0 <= BufTextLen < BufSize) and set 'BufDirty'' to true so InputText can update its internal state.
+    ImWchar             EventChar;      // Character input                      // Read-write   // [CharFilter] Replace character with another one, or set to zero to drop. return 1 is equivalent to setting EventChar=0;
+    ImGuiKey            EventKey;       // Key pressed (Up/Down/TAB)            // Read-only    // [Completion,History]
+    char*               Buf;            // Text buffer                          // Read-write   // [Resize] Can replace pointer / [Completion,History,Always] Only write to pointed data, don't replace the actual pointer!
+    int                 BufTextLen;     // Text length (in bytes)               // Read-write   // [Resize,Completion,History,Always] Exclude zero-terminator storage. In C land: == strlen(some_text), in C++ land: string.length()
+    int                 BufSize;        // Buffer size (in bytes) = capacity+1  // Read-only    // [Resize,Completion,History,Always] Include zero-terminator storage. In C land == ARRAYSIZE(my_char_array), in C++ land: string.capacity()+1
+    bool                BufDirty;       // Set if you modify Buf/BufTextLen!    // Write        // [Completion,History,Always]
+    int                 CursorPos;      //                                      // Read-write   // [Completion,History,Always]
+    int                 SelectionStart; //                                      // Read-write   // [Completion,History,Always] == to SelectionEnd when no selection)
+    int                 SelectionEnd;   //                                      // Read-write   // [Completion,History,Always]
+
+    // Helper functions for text manipulation.
+    // Use those function to benefit from the CallbackResize behaviors. Calling those function reset the selection.
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiInputTextCallbackData();
+    IMGUI_API void      DeleteChars(int pos, int bytes_count);
+    IMGUI_API void      InsertChars(int pos, const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL);
+    void                SelectAll()             { SelectionStart = 0; SelectionEnd = BufTextLen; }
+    void                ClearSelection()        { SelectionStart = SelectionEnd = BufTextLen; }
+    bool                HasSelection() const    { return SelectionStart != SelectionEnd; }
+};
+
+// Resizing callback data to apply custom constraint. As enabled by SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(). Callback is called during the next Begin().
+// NB: For basic min/max size constraint on each axis you don't need to use the callback! The SetNextWindowSizeConstraints() parameters are enough.
+struct ImGuiSizeCallbackData
+{
+    void*   UserData;       // Read-only.   What user passed to SetNextWindowSizeConstraints()
+    ImVec2  Pos;            // Read-only.   Window position, for reference.
+    ImVec2  CurrentSize;    // Read-only.   Current window size.
+    ImVec2  DesiredSize;    // Read-write.  Desired size, based on user's mouse position. Write to this field to restrain resizing.
+};
+
+// [ALPHA] Rarely used / very advanced uses only. Use with SetNextWindowClass() and DockSpace() functions.
+// Important: the content of this class is still highly WIP and likely to change and be refactored
+// before we stabilize Docking features. Please be mindful if using this.
+// Provide hints:
+// - To the platform backend via altered viewport flags (enable/disable OS decoration, OS task bar icons, etc.)
+// - To the platform backend for OS level parent/child relationships of viewport.
+// - To the docking system for various options and filtering.
+struct ImGuiWindowClass
+{
+    ImGuiID             ClassId;                    // User data. 0 = Default class (unclassed). Windows of different classes cannot be docked with each others.
+    ImGuiID             ParentViewportId;           // Hint for the platform backend. -1: use default. 0: request platform backend to not parent the platform. != 0: request platform backend to create a parent<>child relationship between the platform windows. Not conforming backends are free to e.g. parent every viewport to the main viewport or not.
+    ImGuiViewportFlags  ViewportFlagsOverrideSet;   // Viewport flags to set when a window of this class owns a viewport. This allows you to enforce OS decoration or task bar icon, override the defaults on a per-window basis.
+    ImGuiViewportFlags  ViewportFlagsOverrideClear; // Viewport flags to clear when a window of this class owns a viewport. This allows you to enforce OS decoration or task bar icon, override the defaults on a per-window basis.
+    ImGuiTabItemFlags   TabItemFlagsOverrideSet;    // [EXPERIMENTAL] TabItem flags to set when a window of this class gets submitted into a dock node tab bar. May use with ImGuiTabItemFlags_Leading or ImGuiTabItemFlags_Trailing.
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags  DockNodeFlagsOverrideSet;   // [EXPERIMENTAL] Dock node flags to set when a window of this class is hosted by a dock node (it doesn't have to be selected!)
+    bool                DockingAlwaysTabBar;        // Set to true to enforce single floating windows of this class always having their own docking node (equivalent of setting the global io.ConfigDockingAlwaysTabBar)
+    bool                DockingAllowUnclassed;      // Set to true to allow windows of this class to be docked/merged with an unclassed window. // FIXME-DOCK: Move to DockNodeFlags override?
+
+    ImGuiWindowClass() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); ParentViewportId = (ImGuiID)-1; DockingAllowUnclassed = true; }
+};
+
+// Data payload for Drag and Drop operations: AcceptDragDropPayload(), GetDragDropPayload()
+struct ImGuiPayload
+{
+    // Members
+    void*           Data;               // Data (copied and owned by dear imgui)
+    int             DataSize;           // Data size
+
+    // [Internal]
+    ImGuiID         SourceId;           // Source item id
+    ImGuiID         SourceParentId;     // Source parent id (if available)
+    int             DataFrameCount;     // Data timestamp
+    char            DataType[32 + 1];   // Data type tag (short user-supplied string, 32 characters max)
+    bool            Preview;            // Set when AcceptDragDropPayload() was called and mouse has been hovering the target item (nb: handle overlapping drag targets)
+    bool            Delivery;           // Set when AcceptDragDropPayload() was called and mouse button is released over the target item.
+
+    ImGuiPayload()  { Clear(); }
+    void Clear()    { SourceId = SourceParentId = 0; Data = NULL; DataSize = 0; memset(DataType, 0, sizeof(DataType)); DataFrameCount = -1; Preview = Delivery = false; }
+    bool IsDataType(const char* type) const { return DataFrameCount != -1 && strcmp(type, DataType) == 0; }
+    bool IsPreview() const                  { return Preview; }
+    bool IsDelivery() const                 { return Delivery; }
+};
+
+// Sorting specification for one column of a table (sizeof == 12 bytes)
+struct ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs
+{
+    ImGuiID                     ColumnUserID;       // User id of the column (if specified by a TableSetupColumn() call)
+    ImS16                       ColumnIndex;        // Index of the column
+    ImS16                       SortOrder;          // Index within parent ImGuiTableSortSpecs (always stored in order starting from 0, tables sorted on a single criteria will always have a 0 here)
+    ImGuiSortDirection          SortDirection : 8;  // ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending or ImGuiSortDirection_Descending (you can use this or SortSign, whichever is more convenient for your sort function)
+
+    ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+};
+
+// Sorting specifications for a table (often handling sort specs for a single column, occasionally more)
+// Obtained by calling TableGetSortSpecs().
+// When 'SpecsDirty == true' you can sort your data. It will be true with sorting specs have changed since last call, or the first time.
+// Make sure to set 'SpecsDirty = false' after sorting, else you may wastefully sort your data every frame!
+struct ImGuiTableSortSpecs
+{
+    const ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs* Specs;     // Pointer to sort spec array.
+    int                         SpecsCount;     // Sort spec count. Most often 1. May be > 1 when ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti is enabled. May be == 0 when ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate is enabled.
+    bool                        SpecsDirty;     // Set to true when specs have changed since last time! Use this to sort again, then clear the flag.
+
+    ImGuiTableSortSpecs()       { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Helpers (ImGuiOnceUponAFrame, ImGuiTextFilter, ImGuiTextBuffer, ImGuiStorage, ImGuiListClipper, ImColor)
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Helper: Unicode defines
+#define IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_INVALID 0xFFFD     // Invalid Unicode code point (standard value).
+#ifdef IMGUI_USE_WCHAR32
+#define IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX     0x10FFFF   // Maximum Unicode code point supported by this build.
+#else
+#define IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX     0xFFFF     // Maximum Unicode code point supported by this build.
+#endif
+
+// Helper: Execute a block of code at maximum once a frame. Convenient if you want to quickly create an UI within deep-nested code that runs multiple times every frame.
+// Usage: static ImGuiOnceUponAFrame oaf; if (oaf) ImGui::Text("This will be called only once per frame");
+struct ImGuiOnceUponAFrame
+{
+    ImGuiOnceUponAFrame() { RefFrame = -1; }
+    mutable int RefFrame;
+    operator bool() const { int current_frame = ImGui::GetFrameCount(); if (RefFrame == current_frame) return false; RefFrame = current_frame; return true; }
+};
+
+// Helper: Parse and apply text filters. In format "aaaaa[,bbbb][,ccccc]"
+struct ImGuiTextFilter
+{
+    IMGUI_API           ImGuiTextFilter(const char* default_filter = "");
+    IMGUI_API bool      Draw(const char* label = "Filter (inc,-exc)", float width = 0.0f);  // Helper calling InputText+Build
+    IMGUI_API bool      PassFilter(const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL) const;
+    IMGUI_API void      Build();
+    void                Clear()          { InputBuf[0] = 0; Build(); }
+    bool                IsActive() const { return !Filters.empty(); }
+
+    // [Internal]
+    struct ImGuiTextRange
+    {
+        const char*     b;
+        const char*     e;
+
+        ImGuiTextRange()                                { b = e = NULL; }
+        ImGuiTextRange(const char* _b, const char* _e)  { b = _b; e = _e; }
+        bool            empty() const                   { return b == e; }
+        IMGUI_API void  split(char separator, ImVector<ImGuiTextRange>* out) const;
+    };
+    char                    InputBuf[256];
+    ImVector<ImGuiTextRange>Filters;
+    int                     CountGrep;
+};
+
+// Helper: Growable text buffer for logging/accumulating text
+// (this could be called 'ImGuiTextBuilder' / 'ImGuiStringBuilder')
+struct ImGuiTextBuffer
+{
+    ImVector<char>      Buf;
+    IMGUI_API static char EmptyString[1];
+
+    ImGuiTextBuffer()   { }
+    inline char         operator[](int i) const { IM_ASSERT(Buf.Data != NULL); return Buf.Data[i]; }
+    const char*         begin() const           { return Buf.Data ? &Buf.front() : EmptyString; }
+    const char*         end() const             { return Buf.Data ? &Buf.back() : EmptyString; }   // Buf is zero-terminated, so end() will point on the zero-terminator
+    int                 size() const            { return Buf.Size ? Buf.Size - 1 : 0; }
+    bool                empty() const           { return Buf.Size <= 1; }
+    void                clear()                 { Buf.clear(); }
+    void                reserve(int capacity)   { Buf.reserve(capacity); }
+    const char*         c_str() const           { return Buf.Data ? Buf.Data : EmptyString; }
+    IMGUI_API void      append(const char* str, const char* str_end = NULL);
+    IMGUI_API void      appendf(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(2);
+    IMGUI_API void      appendfv(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(2);
+};
+
+// Helper: Key->Value storage
+// Typically you don't have to worry about this since a storage is held within each Window.
+// We use it to e.g. store collapse state for a tree (Int 0/1)
+// This is optimized for efficient lookup (dichotomy into a contiguous buffer) and rare insertion (typically tied to user interactions aka max once a frame)
+// You can use it as custom user storage for temporary values. Declare your own storage if, for example:
+// - You want to manipulate the open/close state of a particular sub-tree in your interface (tree node uses Int 0/1 to store their state).
+// - You want to store custom debug data easily without adding or editing structures in your code (probably not efficient, but convenient)
+// Types are NOT stored, so it is up to you to make sure your Key don't collide with different types.
+struct ImGuiStorage
+{
+    // [Internal]
+    struct ImGuiStoragePair
+    {
+        ImGuiID key;
+        union { int val_i; float val_f; void* val_p; };
+        ImGuiStoragePair(ImGuiID _key, int _val_i)      { key = _key; val_i = _val_i; }
+        ImGuiStoragePair(ImGuiID _key, float _val_f)    { key = _key; val_f = _val_f; }
+        ImGuiStoragePair(ImGuiID _key, void* _val_p)    { key = _key; val_p = _val_p; }
+    };
+
+    ImVector<ImGuiStoragePair>      Data;
+
+    // - Get***() functions find pair, never add/allocate. Pairs are sorted so a query is O(log N)
+    // - Set***() functions find pair, insertion on demand if missing.
+    // - Sorted insertion is costly, paid once. A typical frame shouldn't need to insert any new pair.
+    void                Clear() { Data.clear(); }
+    IMGUI_API int       GetInt(ImGuiID key, int default_val = 0) const;
+    IMGUI_API void      SetInt(ImGuiID key, int val);
+    IMGUI_API bool      GetBool(ImGuiID key, bool default_val = false) const;
+    IMGUI_API void      SetBool(ImGuiID key, bool val);
+    IMGUI_API float     GetFloat(ImGuiID key, float default_val = 0.0f) const;
+    IMGUI_API void      SetFloat(ImGuiID key, float val);
+    IMGUI_API void*     GetVoidPtr(ImGuiID key) const; // default_val is NULL
+    IMGUI_API void      SetVoidPtr(ImGuiID key, void* val);
+
+    // - Get***Ref() functions finds pair, insert on demand if missing, return pointer. Useful if you intend to do Get+Set.
+    // - References are only valid until a new value is added to the storage. Calling a Set***() function or a Get***Ref() function invalidates the pointer.
+    // - A typical use case where this is convenient for quick hacking (e.g. add storage during a live Edit&Continue session if you can't modify existing struct)
+    //      float* pvar = ImGui::GetFloatRef(key); ImGui::SliderFloat("var", pvar, 0, 100.0f); some_var += *pvar;
+    IMGUI_API int*      GetIntRef(ImGuiID key, int default_val = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool*     GetBoolRef(ImGuiID key, bool default_val = false);
+    IMGUI_API float*    GetFloatRef(ImGuiID key, float default_val = 0.0f);
+    IMGUI_API void**    GetVoidPtrRef(ImGuiID key, void* default_val = NULL);
+
+    // Use on your own storage if you know only integer are being stored (open/close all tree nodes)
+    IMGUI_API void      SetAllInt(int val);
+
+    // For quicker full rebuild of a storage (instead of an incremental one), you may add all your contents and then sort once.
+    IMGUI_API void      BuildSortByKey();
+};
+
+// Helper: Manually clip large list of items.
+// If you have lots evenly spaced items and you have a random access to the list, you can perform coarse
+// clipping based on visibility to only submit items that are in view.
+// The clipper calculates the range of visible items and advance the cursor to compensate for the non-visible items we have skipped.
+// (Dear ImGui already clip items based on their bounds but: it needs to first layout the item to do so, and generally
+//  fetching/submitting your own data incurs additional cost. Coarse clipping using ImGuiListClipper allows you to easily
+//  scale using lists with tens of thousands of items without a problem)
+// Usage:
+//   ImGuiListClipper clipper;
+//   clipper.Begin(1000);         // We have 1000 elements, evenly spaced.
+//   while (clipper.Step())
+//       for (int i = clipper.DisplayStart; i < clipper.DisplayEnd; i++)
+//           ImGui::Text("line number %d", i);
+// Generally what happens is:
+// - Clipper lets you process the first element (DisplayStart = 0, DisplayEnd = 1) regardless of it being visible or not.
+// - User code submit that one element.
+// - Clipper can measure the height of the first element
+// - Clipper calculate the actual range of elements to display based on the current clipping rectangle, position the cursor before the first visible element.
+// - User code submit visible elements.
+// - The clipper also handles various subtleties related to keyboard/gamepad navigation, wrapping etc.
+struct ImGuiListClipper
+{
+    int             DisplayStart;       // First item to display, updated by each call to Step()
+    int             DisplayEnd;         // End of items to display (exclusive)
+    int             ItemsCount;         // [Internal] Number of items
+    float           ItemsHeight;        // [Internal] Height of item after a first step and item submission can calculate it
+    float           StartPosY;          // [Internal] Cursor position at the time of Begin() or after table frozen rows are all processed
+    void*           TempData;           // [Internal] Internal data
+
+    // items_count: Use INT_MAX if you don't know how many items you have (in which case the cursor won't be advanced in the final step)
+    // items_height: Use -1.0f to be calculated automatically on first step. Otherwise pass in the distance between your items, typically GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() or GetFrameHeightWithSpacing().
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiListClipper();
+    IMGUI_API ~ImGuiListClipper();
+    IMGUI_API void  Begin(int items_count, float items_height = -1.0f);
+    IMGUI_API void  End();             // Automatically called on the last call of Step() that returns false.
+    IMGUI_API bool  Step();            // Call until it returns false. The DisplayStart/DisplayEnd fields will be set and you can process/draw those items.
+
+    // Call ForceDisplayRangeByIndices() before first call to Step() if you need a range of items to be displayed regardless of visibility.
+    IMGUI_API void  ForceDisplayRangeByIndices(int item_min, int item_max); // item_max is exclusive e.g. use (42, 42+1) to make item 42 always visible BUT due to alignment/padding of certain items it is likely that an extra item may be included on either end of the display range.
+
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+    inline ImGuiListClipper(int items_count, float items_height = -1.0f) { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); ItemsCount = -1; Begin(items_count, items_height); } // [removed in 1.79]
+#endif
+};
+
+// Helpers macros to generate 32-bit encoded colors
+// User can declare their own format by #defining the 5 _SHIFT/_MASK macros in their imconfig file.
+#ifndef IM_COL32_R_SHIFT
+#ifdef IMGUI_USE_BGRA_PACKED_COLOR
+#define IM_COL32_R_SHIFT    16
+#define IM_COL32_G_SHIFT    8
+#define IM_COL32_B_SHIFT    0
+#define IM_COL32_A_SHIFT    24
+#define IM_COL32_A_MASK     0xFF000000
+#else
+#define IM_COL32_R_SHIFT    0
+#define IM_COL32_G_SHIFT    8
+#define IM_COL32_B_SHIFT    16
+#define IM_COL32_A_SHIFT    24
+#define IM_COL32_A_MASK     0xFF000000
+#endif
+#endif
+#define IM_COL32(R,G,B,A)    (((ImU32)(A)<<IM_COL32_A_SHIFT) | ((ImU32)(B)<<IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) | ((ImU32)(G)<<IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) | ((ImU32)(R)<<IM_COL32_R_SHIFT))
+#define IM_COL32_WHITE       IM_COL32(255,255,255,255)  // Opaque white = 0xFFFFFFFF
+#define IM_COL32_BLACK       IM_COL32(0,0,0,255)        // Opaque black
+#define IM_COL32_BLACK_TRANS IM_COL32(0,0,0,0)          // Transparent black = 0x00000000
+
+// Helper: ImColor() implicitly converts colors to either ImU32 (packed 4x1 byte) or ImVec4 (4x1 float)
+// Prefer using IM_COL32() macros if you want a guaranteed compile-time ImU32 for usage with ImDrawList API.
+// **Avoid storing ImColor! Store either u32 of ImVec4. This is not a full-featured color class. MAY OBSOLETE.
+// **None of the ImGui API are using ImColor directly but you can use it as a convenience to pass colors in either ImU32 or ImVec4 formats. Explicitly cast to ImU32 or ImVec4 if needed.
+struct ImColor
+{
+    ImVec4          Value;
+
+    constexpr ImColor()                                             { }
+    constexpr ImColor(float r, float g, float b, float a = 1.0f)    : Value(r, g, b, a) { }
+    constexpr ImColor(const ImVec4& col)                            : Value(col) {}
+    ImColor(int r, int g, int b, int a = 255)                       { float sc = 1.0f / 255.0f; Value.x = (float)r * sc; Value.y = (float)g * sc; Value.z = (float)b * sc; Value.w = (float)a * sc; }
+    ImColor(ImU32 rgba)                                             { float sc = 1.0f / 255.0f; Value.x = (float)((rgba >> IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * sc; Value.y = (float)((rgba >> IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * sc; Value.z = (float)((rgba >> IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * sc; Value.w = (float)((rgba >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * sc; }
+    inline operator ImU32() const                                   { return ImGui::ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(Value); }
+    inline operator ImVec4() const                                  { return Value; }
+
+    // FIXME-OBSOLETE: May need to obsolete/cleanup those helpers.
+    inline void    SetHSV(float h, float s, float v, float a = 1.0f){ ImGui::ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(h, s, v, Value.x, Value.y, Value.z); Value.w = a; }
+    static ImColor HSV(float h, float s, float v, float a = 1.0f)   { float r, g, b; ImGui::ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(h, s, v, r, g, b); return ImColor(r, g, b, a); }
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Drawing API (ImDrawCmd, ImDrawIdx, ImDrawVert, ImDrawChannel, ImDrawListSplitter, ImDrawListFlags, ImDrawList, ImDrawData)
+// Hold a series of drawing commands. The user provides a renderer for ImDrawData which essentially contains an array of ImDrawList.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// The maximum line width to bake anti-aliased textures for. Build atlas with ImFontAtlasFlags_NoBakedLines to disable baking.
+#ifndef IM_DRAWLIST_TEX_LINES_WIDTH_MAX
+#define IM_DRAWLIST_TEX_LINES_WIDTH_MAX     (63)
+#endif
+
+// ImDrawCallback: Draw callbacks for advanced uses [configurable type: override in imconfig.h]
+// NB: You most likely do NOT need to use draw callbacks just to create your own widget or customized UI rendering,
+// you can poke into the draw list for that! Draw callback may be useful for example to:
+//  A) Change your GPU render state,
+//  B) render a complex 3D scene inside a UI element without an intermediate texture/render target, etc.
+// The expected behavior from your rendering function is 'if (cmd.UserCallback != NULL) { cmd.UserCallback(parent_list, cmd); } else { RenderTriangles() }'
+// If you want to override the signature of ImDrawCallback, you can simply use e.g. '#define ImDrawCallback MyDrawCallback' (in imconfig.h) + update rendering backend accordingly.
+#ifndef ImDrawCallback
+typedef void (*ImDrawCallback)(const ImDrawList* parent_list, const ImDrawCmd* cmd);
+#endif
+
+// Special Draw callback value to request renderer backend to reset the graphics/render state.
+// The renderer backend needs to handle this special value, otherwise it will crash trying to call a function at this address.
+// This is useful for example if you submitted callbacks which you know have altered the render state and you want it to be restored.
+// It is not done by default because they are many perfectly useful way of altering render state for imgui contents (e.g. changing shader/blending settings before an Image call).
+#define ImDrawCallback_ResetRenderState     (ImDrawCallback)(-1)
+
+// Typically, 1 command = 1 GPU draw call (unless command is a callback)
+// - VtxOffset: When 'io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset' is enabled,
+//   this fields allow us to render meshes larger than 64K vertices while keeping 16-bit indices.
+//   Backends made for <1.71. will typically ignore the VtxOffset fields.
+// - The ClipRect/TextureId/VtxOffset fields must be contiguous as we memcmp() them together (this is asserted for).
+struct ImDrawCmd
+{
+    ImVec4          ClipRect;           // 4*4  // Clipping rectangle (x1, y1, x2, y2). Subtract ImDrawData->DisplayPos to get clipping rectangle in "viewport" coordinates
+    ImTextureID     TextureId;          // 4-8  // User-provided texture ID. Set by user in ImfontAtlas::SetTexID() for fonts or passed to Image*() functions. Ignore if never using images or multiple fonts atlas.
+    unsigned int    VtxOffset;          // 4    // Start offset in vertex buffer. ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset: always 0, otherwise may be >0 to support meshes larger than 64K vertices with 16-bit indices.
+    unsigned int    IdxOffset;          // 4    // Start offset in index buffer.
+    unsigned int    ElemCount;          // 4    // Number of indices (multiple of 3) to be rendered as triangles. Vertices are stored in the callee ImDrawList's vtx_buffer[] array, indices in idx_buffer[].
+    ImDrawCallback  UserCallback;       // 4-8  // If != NULL, call the function instead of rendering the vertices. clip_rect and texture_id will be set normally.
+    void*           UserCallbackData;   // 4-8  // The draw callback code can access this.
+
+    ImDrawCmd() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); } // Also ensure our padding fields are zeroed
+
+    // Since 1.83: returns ImTextureID associated with this draw call. Warning: DO NOT assume this is always same as 'TextureId' (we will change this function for an upcoming feature)
+    inline ImTextureID GetTexID() const { return TextureId; }
+};
+
+// Vertex layout
+#ifndef IMGUI_OVERRIDE_DRAWVERT_STRUCT_LAYOUT
+struct ImDrawVert
+{
+    ImVec2  pos;
+    ImVec2  uv;
+    ImU32   col;
+};
+#else
+// You can override the vertex format layout by defining IMGUI_OVERRIDE_DRAWVERT_STRUCT_LAYOUT in imconfig.h
+// The code expect ImVec2 pos (8 bytes), ImVec2 uv (8 bytes), ImU32 col (4 bytes), but you can re-order them or add other fields as needed to simplify integration in your engine.
+// The type has to be described within the macro (you can either declare the struct or use a typedef). This is because ImVec2/ImU32 are likely not declared a the time you'd want to set your type up.
+// NOTE: IMGUI DOESN'T CLEAR THE STRUCTURE AND DOESN'T CALL A CONSTRUCTOR SO ANY CUSTOM FIELD WILL BE UNINITIALIZED. IF YOU ADD EXTRA FIELDS (SUCH AS A 'Z' COORDINATES) YOU WILL NEED TO CLEAR THEM DURING RENDER OR TO IGNORE THEM.
+IMGUI_OVERRIDE_DRAWVERT_STRUCT_LAYOUT;
+#endif
+
+// [Internal] For use by ImDrawList
+struct ImDrawCmdHeader
+{
+    ImVec4          ClipRect;
+    ImTextureID     TextureId;
+    unsigned int    VtxOffset;
+};
+
+// [Internal] For use by ImDrawListSplitter
+struct ImDrawChannel
+{
+    ImVector<ImDrawCmd>         _CmdBuffer;
+    ImVector<ImDrawIdx>         _IdxBuffer;
+};
+
+
+// Split/Merge functions are used to split the draw list into different layers which can be drawn into out of order.
+// This is used by the Columns/Tables API, so items of each column can be batched together in a same draw call.
+struct ImDrawListSplitter
+{
+    int                         _Current;    // Current channel number (0)
+    int                         _Count;      // Number of active channels (1+)
+    ImVector<ImDrawChannel>     _Channels;   // Draw channels (not resized down so _Count might be < Channels.Size)
+
+    inline ImDrawListSplitter()  { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+    inline ~ImDrawListSplitter() { ClearFreeMemory(); }
+    inline void                 Clear() { _Current = 0; _Count = 1; } // Do not clear Channels[] so our allocations are reused next frame
+    IMGUI_API void              ClearFreeMemory();
+    IMGUI_API void              Split(ImDrawList* draw_list, int count);
+    IMGUI_API void              Merge(ImDrawList* draw_list);
+    IMGUI_API void              SetCurrentChannel(ImDrawList* draw_list, int channel_idx);
+};
+
+// Flags for ImDrawList functions
+// (Legacy: bit 0 must always correspond to ImDrawFlags_Closed to be backward compatible with old API using a bool. Bits 1..3 must be unused)
+enum ImDrawFlags_
+{
+    ImDrawFlags_None                        = 0,
+    ImDrawFlags_Closed                      = 1 << 0, // PathStroke(), AddPolyline(): specify that shape should be closed (Important: this is always == 1 for legacy reason)
+    ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft         = 1 << 4, // AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), PathRect(): enable rounding top-left corner only (when rounding > 0.0f, we default to all corners). Was 0x01.
+    ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight        = 1 << 5, // AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), PathRect(): enable rounding top-right corner only (when rounding > 0.0f, we default to all corners). Was 0x02.
+    ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft      = 1 << 6, // AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), PathRect(): enable rounding bottom-left corner only (when rounding > 0.0f, we default to all corners). Was 0x04.
+    ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight     = 1 << 7, // AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), PathRect(): enable rounding bottom-right corner only (when rounding > 0.0f, we default to all corners). Wax 0x08.
+    ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone            = 1 << 8, // AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), PathRect(): disable rounding on all corners (when rounding > 0.0f). This is NOT zero, NOT an implicit flag!
+    ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTop             = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight,
+    ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottom          = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight,
+    ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersLeft            = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft,
+    ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersRight           = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight,
+    ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll             = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight,
+    ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersDefault_        = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll, // Default to ALL corners if none of the _RoundCornersXX flags are specified.
+    ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersMask_           = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone,
+};
+
+// Flags for ImDrawList instance. Those are set automatically by ImGui:: functions from ImGuiIO settings, and generally not manipulated directly.
+// It is however possible to temporarily alter flags between calls to ImDrawList:: functions.
+enum ImDrawListFlags_
+{
+    ImDrawListFlags_None                    = 0,
+    ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLines        = 1 << 0,  // Enable anti-aliased lines/borders (*2 the number of triangles for 1.0f wide line or lines thin enough to be drawn using textures, otherwise *3 the number of triangles)
+    ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLinesUseTex  = 1 << 1,  // Enable anti-aliased lines/borders using textures when possible. Require backend to render with bilinear filtering (NOT point/nearest filtering).
+    ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedFill         = 1 << 2,  // Enable anti-aliased edge around filled shapes (rounded rectangles, circles).
+    ImDrawListFlags_AllowVtxOffset          = 1 << 3,  // Can emit 'VtxOffset > 0' to allow large meshes. Set when 'ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset' is enabled.
+};
+
+// Draw command list
+// This is the low-level list of polygons that ImGui:: functions are filling. At the end of the frame,
+// all command lists are passed to your ImGuiIO::RenderDrawListFn function for rendering.
+// Each dear imgui window contains its own ImDrawList. You can use ImGui::GetWindowDrawList() to
+// access the current window draw list and draw custom primitives.
+// You can interleave normal ImGui:: calls and adding primitives to the current draw list.
+// In single viewport mode, top-left is == GetMainViewport()->Pos (generally 0,0), bottom-right is == GetMainViewport()->Pos+Size (generally io.DisplaySize).
+// You are totally free to apply whatever transformation matrix to want to the data (depending on the use of the transformation you may want to apply it to ClipRect as well!)
+// Important: Primitives are always added to the list and not culled (culling is done at higher-level by ImGui:: functions), if you use this API a lot consider coarse culling your drawn objects.
+struct ImDrawList
+{
+    // This is what you have to render
+    ImVector<ImDrawCmd>     CmdBuffer;          // Draw commands. Typically 1 command = 1 GPU draw call, unless the command is a callback.
+    ImVector<ImDrawIdx>     IdxBuffer;          // Index buffer. Each command consume ImDrawCmd::ElemCount of those
+    ImVector<ImDrawVert>    VtxBuffer;          // Vertex buffer.
+    ImDrawListFlags         Flags;              // Flags, you may poke into these to adjust anti-aliasing settings per-primitive.
+
+    // [Internal, used while building lists]
+    unsigned int            _VtxCurrentIdx;     // [Internal] generally == VtxBuffer.Size unless we are past 64K vertices, in which case this gets reset to 0.
+    const ImDrawListSharedData* _Data;          // Pointer to shared draw data (you can use ImGui::GetDrawListSharedData() to get the one from current ImGui context)
+    const char*             _OwnerName;         // Pointer to owner window's name for debugging
+    ImDrawVert*             _VtxWritePtr;       // [Internal] point within VtxBuffer.Data after each add command (to avoid using the ImVector<> operators too much)
+    ImDrawIdx*              _IdxWritePtr;       // [Internal] point within IdxBuffer.Data after each add command (to avoid using the ImVector<> operators too much)
+    ImVector<ImVec4>        _ClipRectStack;     // [Internal]
+    ImVector<ImTextureID>   _TextureIdStack;    // [Internal]
+    ImVector<ImVec2>        _Path;              // [Internal] current path building
+    ImDrawCmdHeader         _CmdHeader;         // [Internal] template of active commands. Fields should match those of CmdBuffer.back().
+    ImDrawListSplitter      _Splitter;          // [Internal] for channels api (note: prefer using your own persistent instance of ImDrawListSplitter!)
+    float                   _FringeScale;       // [Internal] anti-alias fringe is scaled by this value, this helps to keep things sharp while zooming at vertex buffer content
+
+    // If you want to create ImDrawList instances, pass them ImGui::GetDrawListSharedData() or create and use your own ImDrawListSharedData (so you can use ImDrawList without ImGui)
+    ImDrawList(const ImDrawListSharedData* shared_data) { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); _Data = shared_data; }
+
+    ~ImDrawList() { _ClearFreeMemory(); }
+    IMGUI_API void  PushClipRect(const ImVec2& clip_rect_min, const ImVec2& clip_rect_max, bool intersect_with_current_clip_rect = false);  // Render-level scissoring. This is passed down to your render function but not used for CPU-side coarse clipping. Prefer using higher-level ImGui::PushClipRect() to affect logic (hit-testing and widget culling)
+    IMGUI_API void  PushClipRectFullScreen();
+    IMGUI_API void  PopClipRect();
+    IMGUI_API void  PushTextureID(ImTextureID texture_id);
+    IMGUI_API void  PopTextureID();
+    inline ImVec2   GetClipRectMin() const { const ImVec4& cr = _ClipRectStack.back(); return ImVec2(cr.x, cr.y); }
+    inline ImVec2   GetClipRectMax() const { const ImVec4& cr = _ClipRectStack.back(); return ImVec2(cr.z, cr.w); }
+
+    // Primitives
+    // - Filled shapes must always use clockwise winding order. The anti-aliasing fringe depends on it. Counter-clockwise shapes will have "inward" anti-aliasing.
+    // - For rectangular primitives, "p_min" and "p_max" represent the upper-left and lower-right corners.
+    // - For circle primitives, use "num_segments == 0" to automatically calculate tessellation (preferred).
+    //   In older versions (until Dear ImGui 1.77) the AddCircle functions defaulted to num_segments == 12.
+    //   In future versions we will use textures to provide cheaper and higher-quality circles.
+    //   Use AddNgon() and AddNgonFilled() functions if you need to guaranteed a specific number of sides.
+    IMGUI_API void  AddLine(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, ImU32 col, float thickness = 1.0f);
+    IMGUI_API void  AddRect(const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, ImU32 col, float rounding = 0.0f, ImDrawFlags flags = 0, float thickness = 1.0f);   // a: upper-left, b: lower-right (== upper-left + size)
+    IMGUI_API void  AddRectFilled(const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, ImU32 col, float rounding = 0.0f, ImDrawFlags flags = 0);                     // a: upper-left, b: lower-right (== upper-left + size)
+    IMGUI_API void  AddRectFilledMultiColor(const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, ImU32 col_upr_left, ImU32 col_upr_right, ImU32 col_bot_right, ImU32 col_bot_left);
+    IMGUI_API void  AddQuad(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, ImU32 col, float thickness = 1.0f);
+    IMGUI_API void  AddQuadFilled(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, ImU32 col);
+    IMGUI_API void  AddTriangle(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, ImU32 col, float thickness = 1.0f);
+    IMGUI_API void  AddTriangleFilled(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, ImU32 col);
+    IMGUI_API void  AddCircle(const ImVec2& center, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments = 0, float thickness = 1.0f);
+    IMGUI_API void  AddCircleFilled(const ImVec2& center, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments = 0);
+    IMGUI_API void  AddNgon(const ImVec2& center, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments, float thickness = 1.0f);
+    IMGUI_API void  AddNgonFilled(const ImVec2& center, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments);
+    IMGUI_API void  AddText(const ImVec2& pos, ImU32 col, const char* text_begin, const char* text_end = NULL);
+    IMGUI_API void  AddText(const ImFont* font, float font_size, const ImVec2& pos, ImU32 col, const char* text_begin, const char* text_end = NULL, float wrap_width = 0.0f, const ImVec4* cpu_fine_clip_rect = NULL);
+    IMGUI_API void  AddPolyline(const ImVec2* points, int num_points, ImU32 col, ImDrawFlags flags, float thickness);
+    IMGUI_API void  AddConvexPolyFilled(const ImVec2* points, int num_points, ImU32 col);
+    IMGUI_API void  AddBezierCubic(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, ImU32 col, float thickness, int num_segments = 0); // Cubic Bezier (4 control points)
+    IMGUI_API void  AddBezierQuadratic(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, ImU32 col, float thickness, int num_segments = 0);               // Quadratic Bezier (3 control points)
+
+    // Image primitives
+    // - Read FAQ to understand what ImTextureID is.
+    // - "p_min" and "p_max" represent the upper-left and lower-right corners of the rectangle.
+    // - "uv_min" and "uv_max" represent the normalized texture coordinates to use for those corners. Using (0,0)->(1,1) texture coordinates will generally display the entire texture.
+    IMGUI_API void  AddImage(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, const ImVec2& uv_min = ImVec2(0, 0), const ImVec2& uv_max = ImVec2(1, 1), ImU32 col = IM_COL32_WHITE);
+    IMGUI_API void  AddImageQuad(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, const ImVec2& uv1 = ImVec2(0, 0), const ImVec2& uv2 = ImVec2(1, 0), const ImVec2& uv3 = ImVec2(1, 1), const ImVec2& uv4 = ImVec2(0, 1), ImU32 col = IM_COL32_WHITE);
+    IMGUI_API void  AddImageRounded(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, const ImVec2& uv_min, const ImVec2& uv_max, ImU32 col, float rounding, ImDrawFlags flags = 0);
+
+    // Stateful path API, add points then finish with PathFillConvex() or PathStroke()
+    // - Filled shapes must always use clockwise winding order. The anti-aliasing fringe depends on it. Counter-clockwise shapes will have "inward" anti-aliasing.
+    inline    void  PathClear()                                                 { _Path.Size = 0; }
+    inline    void  PathLineTo(const ImVec2& pos)                               { _Path.push_back(pos); }
+    inline    void  PathLineToMergeDuplicate(const ImVec2& pos)                 { if (_Path.Size == 0 || memcmp(&_Path.Data[_Path.Size - 1], &pos, 8) != 0) _Path.push_back(pos); }
+    inline    void  PathFillConvex(ImU32 col)                                   { AddConvexPolyFilled(_Path.Data, _Path.Size, col); _Path.Size = 0; }
+    inline    void  PathStroke(ImU32 col, ImDrawFlags flags = 0, float thickness = 1.0f) { AddPolyline(_Path.Data, _Path.Size, col, flags, thickness); _Path.Size = 0; }
+    IMGUI_API void  PathArcTo(const ImVec2& center, float radius, float a_min, float a_max, int num_segments = 0);
+    IMGUI_API void  PathArcToFast(const ImVec2& center, float radius, int a_min_of_12, int a_max_of_12);                // Use precomputed angles for a 12 steps circle
+    IMGUI_API void  PathBezierCubicCurveTo(const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, int num_segments = 0); // Cubic Bezier (4 control points)
+    IMGUI_API void  PathBezierQuadraticCurveTo(const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, int num_segments = 0);               // Quadratic Bezier (3 control points)
+    IMGUI_API void  PathRect(const ImVec2& rect_min, const ImVec2& rect_max, float rounding = 0.0f, ImDrawFlags flags = 0);
+
+    // Advanced
+    IMGUI_API void  AddCallback(ImDrawCallback callback, void* callback_data);  // Your rendering function must check for 'UserCallback' in ImDrawCmd and call the function instead of rendering triangles.
+    IMGUI_API void  AddDrawCmd();                                               // This is useful if you need to forcefully create a new draw call (to allow for dependent rendering / blending). Otherwise primitives are merged into the same draw-call as much as possible
+    IMGUI_API ImDrawList* CloneOutput() const;                                  // Create a clone of the CmdBuffer/IdxBuffer/VtxBuffer.
+
+    // Advanced: Channels
+    // - Use to split render into layers. By switching channels to can render out-of-order (e.g. submit FG primitives before BG primitives)
+    // - Use to minimize draw calls (e.g. if going back-and-forth between multiple clipping rectangles, prefer to append into separate channels then merge at the end)
+    // - FIXME-OBSOLETE: This API shouldn't have been in ImDrawList in the first place!
+    //   Prefer using your own persistent instance of ImDrawListSplitter as you can stack them.
+    //   Using the ImDrawList::ChannelsXXXX you cannot stack a split over another.
+    inline void     ChannelsSplit(int count)    { _Splitter.Split(this, count); }
+    inline void     ChannelsMerge()             { _Splitter.Merge(this); }
+    inline void     ChannelsSetCurrent(int n)   { _Splitter.SetCurrentChannel(this, n); }
+
+    // Advanced: Primitives allocations
+    // - We render triangles (three vertices)
+    // - All primitives needs to be reserved via PrimReserve() beforehand.
+    IMGUI_API void  PrimReserve(int idx_count, int vtx_count);
+    IMGUI_API void  PrimUnreserve(int idx_count, int vtx_count);
+    IMGUI_API void  PrimRect(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, ImU32 col);      // Axis aligned rectangle (composed of two triangles)
+    IMGUI_API void  PrimRectUV(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& uv_a, const ImVec2& uv_b, ImU32 col);
+    IMGUI_API void  PrimQuadUV(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& c, const ImVec2& d, const ImVec2& uv_a, const ImVec2& uv_b, const ImVec2& uv_c, const ImVec2& uv_d, ImU32 col);
+    inline    void  PrimWriteVtx(const ImVec2& pos, const ImVec2& uv, ImU32 col)    { _VtxWritePtr->pos = pos; _VtxWritePtr->uv = uv; _VtxWritePtr->col = col; _VtxWritePtr++; _VtxCurrentIdx++; }
+    inline    void  PrimWriteIdx(ImDrawIdx idx)                                     { *_IdxWritePtr = idx; _IdxWritePtr++; }
+    inline    void  PrimVtx(const ImVec2& pos, const ImVec2& uv, ImU32 col)         { PrimWriteIdx((ImDrawIdx)_VtxCurrentIdx); PrimWriteVtx(pos, uv, col); } // Write vertex with unique index
+
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+    inline    void  AddBezierCurve(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, ImU32 col, float thickness, int num_segments = 0) { AddBezierCubic(p1, p2, p3, p4, col, thickness, num_segments); } // OBSOLETED in 1.80 (Jan 2021)
+    inline    void  PathBezierCurveTo(const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, int num_segments = 0) { PathBezierCubicCurveTo(p2, p3, p4, num_segments); } // OBSOLETED in 1.80 (Jan 2021)
+#endif
+
+    // [Internal helpers]
+    IMGUI_API void  _ResetForNewFrame();
+    IMGUI_API void  _ClearFreeMemory();
+    IMGUI_API void  _PopUnusedDrawCmd();
+    IMGUI_API void  _TryMergeDrawCmds();
+    IMGUI_API void  _OnChangedClipRect();
+    IMGUI_API void  _OnChangedTextureID();
+    IMGUI_API void  _OnChangedVtxOffset();
+    IMGUI_API int   _CalcCircleAutoSegmentCount(float radius) const;
+    IMGUI_API void  _PathArcToFastEx(const ImVec2& center, float radius, int a_min_sample, int a_max_sample, int a_step);
+    IMGUI_API void  _PathArcToN(const ImVec2& center, float radius, float a_min, float a_max, int num_segments);
+};
+
+// All draw data to render a Dear ImGui frame
+// (NB: the style and the naming convention here is a little inconsistent, we currently preserve them for backward compatibility purpose,
+// as this is one of the oldest structure exposed by the library! Basically, ImDrawList == CmdList)
+struct ImDrawData
+{
+    bool            Valid;                  // Only valid after Render() is called and before the next NewFrame() is called.
+    int             CmdListsCount;          // Number of ImDrawList* to render
+    int             TotalIdxCount;          // For convenience, sum of all ImDrawList's IdxBuffer.Size
+    int             TotalVtxCount;          // For convenience, sum of all ImDrawList's VtxBuffer.Size
+    ImDrawList**    CmdLists;               // Array of ImDrawList* to render. The ImDrawList are owned by ImGuiContext and only pointed to from here.
+    ImVec2          DisplayPos;             // Top-left position of the viewport to render (== top-left of the orthogonal projection matrix to use) (== GetMainViewport()->Pos for the main viewport, == (0.0) in most single-viewport applications)
+    ImVec2          DisplaySize;            // Size of the viewport to render (== GetMainViewport()->Size for the main viewport, == io.DisplaySize in most single-viewport applications)
+    ImVec2          FramebufferScale;       // Amount of pixels for each unit of DisplaySize. Based on io.DisplayFramebufferScale. Generally (1,1) on normal display, (2,2) on OSX with Retina display.
+    ImGuiViewport*  OwnerViewport;          // Viewport carrying the ImDrawData instance, might be of use to the renderer (generally not).
+
+    // Functions
+    ImDrawData()    { Clear(); }
+    void Clear()    { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }     // The ImDrawList are owned by ImGuiContext!
+    IMGUI_API void  DeIndexAllBuffers();                    // Helper to convert all buffers from indexed to non-indexed, in case you cannot render indexed. Note: this is slow and most likely a waste of resources. Always prefer indexed rendering!
+    IMGUI_API void  ScaleClipRects(const ImVec2& fb_scale); // Helper to scale the ClipRect field of each ImDrawCmd. Use if your final output buffer is at a different scale than Dear ImGui expects, or if there is a difference between your window resolution and framebuffer resolution.
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Font API (ImFontConfig, ImFontGlyph, ImFontAtlasFlags, ImFontAtlas, ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder, ImFont)
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+struct ImFontConfig
+{
+    void*           FontData;               //          // TTF/OTF data
+    int             FontDataSize;           //          // TTF/OTF data size
+    bool            FontDataOwnedByAtlas;   // true     // TTF/OTF data ownership taken by the container ImFontAtlas (will delete memory itself).
+    int             FontNo;                 // 0        // Index of font within TTF/OTF file
+    float           SizePixels;             //          // Size in pixels for rasterizer (more or less maps to the resulting font height).
+    int             OversampleH;            // 3        // Rasterize at higher quality for sub-pixel positioning. Note the difference between 2 and 3 is minimal so you can reduce this to 2 to save memory. Read https://github.com/nothings/stb/blob/master/tests/oversample/README.md for details.
+    int             OversampleV;            // 1        // Rasterize at higher quality for sub-pixel positioning. This is not really useful as we don't use sub-pixel positions on the Y axis.
+    bool            PixelSnapH;             // false    // Align every glyph to pixel boundary. Useful e.g. if you are merging a non-pixel aligned font with the default font. If enabled, you can set OversampleH/V to 1.
+    ImVec2          GlyphExtraSpacing;      // 0, 0     // Extra spacing (in pixels) between glyphs. Only X axis is supported for now.
+    ImVec2          GlyphOffset;            // 0, 0     // Offset all glyphs from this font input.
+    const ImWchar*  GlyphRanges;            // NULL     // Pointer to a user-provided list of Unicode range (2 value per range, values are inclusive, zero-terminated list). THE ARRAY DATA NEEDS TO PERSIST AS LONG AS THE FONT IS ALIVE.
+    float           GlyphMinAdvanceX;       // 0        // Minimum AdvanceX for glyphs, set Min to align font icons, set both Min/Max to enforce mono-space font
+    float           GlyphMaxAdvanceX;       // FLT_MAX  // Maximum AdvanceX for glyphs
+    bool            MergeMode;              // false    // Merge into previous ImFont, so you can combine multiple inputs font into one ImFont (e.g. ASCII font + icons + Japanese glyphs). You may want to use GlyphOffset.y when merge font of different heights.
+    unsigned int    FontBuilderFlags;       // 0        // Settings for custom font builder. THIS IS BUILDER IMPLEMENTATION DEPENDENT. Leave as zero if unsure.
+    float           RasterizerMultiply;     // 1.0f     // Brighten (>1.0f) or darken (<1.0f) font output. Brightening small fonts may be a good workaround to make them more readable.
+    ImWchar         EllipsisChar;           // -1       // Explicitly specify unicode codepoint of ellipsis character. When fonts are being merged first specified ellipsis will be used.
+
+    // [Internal]
+    char            Name[40];               // Name (strictly to ease debugging)
+    ImFont*         DstFont;
+
+    IMGUI_API ImFontConfig();
+};
+
+// Hold rendering data for one glyph.
+// (Note: some language parsers may fail to convert the 31+1 bitfield members, in this case maybe drop store a single u32 or we can rework this)
+struct ImFontGlyph
+{
+    unsigned int    Colored : 1;        // Flag to indicate glyph is colored and should generally ignore tinting (make it usable with no shift on little-endian as this is used in loops)
+    unsigned int    Visible : 1;        // Flag to indicate glyph has no visible pixels (e.g. space). Allow early out when rendering.
+    unsigned int    Codepoint : 30;     // 0x0000..0x10FFFF
+    float           AdvanceX;           // Distance to next character (= data from font + ImFontConfig::GlyphExtraSpacing.x baked in)
+    float           X0, Y0, X1, Y1;     // Glyph corners
+    float           U0, V0, U1, V1;     // Texture coordinates
+};
+
+// Helper to build glyph ranges from text/string data. Feed your application strings/characters to it then call BuildRanges().
+// This is essentially a tightly packed of vector of 64k booleans = 8KB storage.
+struct ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder
+{
+    ImVector<ImU32> UsedChars;            // Store 1-bit per Unicode code point (0=unused, 1=used)
+
+    ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder()              { Clear(); }
+    inline void     Clear()                 { int size_in_bytes = (IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX + 1) / 8; UsedChars.resize(size_in_bytes / (int)sizeof(ImU32)); memset(UsedChars.Data, 0, (size_t)size_in_bytes); }
+    inline bool     GetBit(size_t n) const  { int off = (int)(n >> 5); ImU32 mask = 1u << (n & 31); return (UsedChars[off] & mask) != 0; }  // Get bit n in the array
+    inline void     SetBit(size_t n)        { int off = (int)(n >> 5); ImU32 mask = 1u << (n & 31); UsedChars[off] |= mask; }               // Set bit n in the array
+    inline void     AddChar(ImWchar c)      { SetBit(c); }                      // Add character
+    IMGUI_API void  AddText(const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL);     // Add string (each character of the UTF-8 string are added)
+    IMGUI_API void  AddRanges(const ImWchar* ranges);                           // Add ranges, e.g. builder.AddRanges(ImFontAtlas::GetGlyphRangesDefault()) to force add all of ASCII/Latin+Ext
+    IMGUI_API void  BuildRanges(ImVector<ImWchar>* out_ranges);                 // Output new ranges
+};
+
+// See ImFontAtlas::AddCustomRectXXX functions.
+struct ImFontAtlasCustomRect
+{
+    unsigned short  Width, Height;  // Input    // Desired rectangle dimension
+    unsigned short  X, Y;           // Output   // Packed position in Atlas
+    unsigned int    GlyphID;        // Input    // For custom font glyphs only (ID < 0x110000)
+    float           GlyphAdvanceX;  // Input    // For custom font glyphs only: glyph xadvance
+    ImVec2          GlyphOffset;    // Input    // For custom font glyphs only: glyph display offset
+    ImFont*         Font;           // Input    // For custom font glyphs only: target font
+    ImFontAtlasCustomRect()         { Width = Height = 0; X = Y = 0xFFFF; GlyphID = 0; GlyphAdvanceX = 0.0f; GlyphOffset = ImVec2(0, 0); Font = NULL; }
+    bool IsPacked() const           { return X != 0xFFFF; }
+};
+
+// Flags for ImFontAtlas build
+enum ImFontAtlasFlags_
+{
+    ImFontAtlasFlags_None               = 0,
+    ImFontAtlasFlags_NoPowerOfTwoHeight = 1 << 0,   // Don't round the height to next power of two
+    ImFontAtlasFlags_NoMouseCursors     = 1 << 1,   // Don't build software mouse cursors into the atlas (save a little texture memory)
+    ImFontAtlasFlags_NoBakedLines       = 1 << 2,   // Don't build thick line textures into the atlas (save a little texture memory, allow support for point/nearest filtering). The AntiAliasedLinesUseTex features uses them, otherwise they will be rendered using polygons (more expensive for CPU/GPU).
+};
+
+// Load and rasterize multiple TTF/OTF fonts into a same texture. The font atlas will build a single texture holding:
+//  - One or more fonts.
+//  - Custom graphics data needed to render the shapes needed by Dear ImGui.
+//  - Mouse cursor shapes for software cursor rendering (unless setting 'Flags |= ImFontAtlasFlags_NoMouseCursors' in the font atlas).
+// It is the user-code responsibility to setup/build the atlas, then upload the pixel data into a texture accessible by your graphics api.
+//  - Optionally, call any of the AddFont*** functions. If you don't call any, the default font embedded in the code will be loaded for you.
+//  - Call GetTexDataAsAlpha8() or GetTexDataAsRGBA32() to build and retrieve pixels data.
+//  - Upload the pixels data into a texture within your graphics system (see imgui_impl_xxxx.cpp examples)
+//  - Call SetTexID(my_tex_id); and pass the pointer/identifier to your texture in a format natural to your graphics API.
+//    This value will be passed back to you during rendering to identify the texture. Read FAQ entry about ImTextureID for more details.
+// Common pitfalls:
+// - If you pass a 'glyph_ranges' array to AddFont*** functions, you need to make sure that your array persist up until the
+//   atlas is build (when calling GetTexData*** or Build()). We only copy the pointer, not the data.
+// - Important: By default, AddFontFromMemoryTTF() takes ownership of the data. Even though we are not writing to it, we will free the pointer on destruction.
+//   You can set font_cfg->FontDataOwnedByAtlas=false to keep ownership of your data and it won't be freed,
+// - Even though many functions are suffixed with "TTF", OTF data is supported just as well.
+// - This is an old API and it is currently awkward for those and and various other reasons! We will address them in the future!
+struct ImFontAtlas
+{
+    IMGUI_API ImFontAtlas();
+    IMGUI_API ~ImFontAtlas();
+    IMGUI_API ImFont*           AddFont(const ImFontConfig* font_cfg);
+    IMGUI_API ImFont*           AddFontDefault(const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL);
+    IMGUI_API ImFont*           AddFontFromFileTTF(const char* filename, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = NULL);
+    IMGUI_API ImFont*           AddFontFromMemoryTTF(void* font_data, int font_size, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = NULL); // Note: Transfer ownership of 'ttf_data' to ImFontAtlas! Will be deleted after destruction of the atlas. Set font_cfg->FontDataOwnedByAtlas=false to keep ownership of your data and it won't be freed.
+    IMGUI_API ImFont*           AddFontFromMemoryCompressedTTF(const void* compressed_font_data, int compressed_font_size, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = NULL); // 'compressed_font_data' still owned by caller. Compress with binary_to_compressed_c.cpp.
+    IMGUI_API ImFont*           AddFontFromMemoryCompressedBase85TTF(const char* compressed_font_data_base85, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg = NULL, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = NULL);              // 'compressed_font_data_base85' still owned by caller. Compress with binary_to_compressed_c.cpp with -base85 parameter.
+    IMGUI_API void              ClearInputData();           // Clear input data (all ImFontConfig structures including sizes, TTF data, glyph ranges, etc.) = all the data used to build the texture and fonts.
+    IMGUI_API void              ClearTexData();             // Clear output texture data (CPU side). Saves RAM once the texture has been copied to graphics memory.
+    IMGUI_API void              ClearFonts();               // Clear output font data (glyphs storage, UV coordinates).
+    IMGUI_API void              Clear();                    // Clear all input and output.
+
+    // Build atlas, retrieve pixel data.
+    // User is in charge of copying the pixels into graphics memory (e.g. create a texture with your engine). Then store your texture handle with SetTexID().
+    // The pitch is always = Width * BytesPerPixels (1 or 4)
+    // Building in RGBA32 format is provided for convenience and compatibility, but note that unless you manually manipulate or copy color data into
+    // the texture (e.g. when using the AddCustomRect*** api), then the RGB pixels emitted will always be white (~75% of memory/bandwidth waste.
+    IMGUI_API bool              Build();                    // Build pixels data. This is called automatically for you by the GetTexData*** functions.
+    IMGUI_API void              GetTexDataAsAlpha8(unsigned char** out_pixels, int* out_width, int* out_height, int* out_bytes_per_pixel = NULL);  // 1 byte per-pixel
+    IMGUI_API void              GetTexDataAsRGBA32(unsigned char** out_pixels, int* out_width, int* out_height, int* out_bytes_per_pixel = NULL);  // 4 bytes-per-pixel
+    bool                        IsBuilt() const             { return Fonts.Size > 0 && TexReady; } // Bit ambiguous: used to detect when user didn't built texture but effectively we should check TexID != 0 except that would be backend dependent...
+    void                        SetTexID(ImTextureID id)    { TexID = id; }
+
+    //-------------------------------------------
+    // Glyph Ranges
+    //-------------------------------------------
+
+    // Helpers to retrieve list of common Unicode ranges (2 value per range, values are inclusive, zero-terminated list)
+    // NB: Make sure that your string are UTF-8 and NOT in your local code page. In C++11, you can create UTF-8 string literal using the u8"Hello world" syntax. See FAQ for details.
+    // NB: Consider using ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder to build glyph ranges from textual data.
+    IMGUI_API const ImWchar*    GetGlyphRangesDefault();                // Basic Latin, Extended Latin
+    IMGUI_API const ImWchar*    GetGlyphRangesKorean();                 // Default + Korean characters
+    IMGUI_API const ImWchar*    GetGlyphRangesJapanese();               // Default + Hiragana, Katakana, Half-Width, Selection of 2999 Ideographs
+    IMGUI_API const ImWchar*    GetGlyphRangesChineseFull();            // Default + Half-Width + Japanese Hiragana/Katakana + full set of about 21000 CJK Unified Ideographs
+    IMGUI_API const ImWchar*    GetGlyphRangesChineseSimplifiedCommon();// Default + Half-Width + Japanese Hiragana/Katakana + set of 2500 CJK Unified Ideographs for common simplified Chinese
+    IMGUI_API const ImWchar*    GetGlyphRangesCyrillic();               // Default + about 400 Cyrillic characters
+    IMGUI_API const ImWchar*    GetGlyphRangesThai();                   // Default + Thai characters
+    IMGUI_API const ImWchar*    GetGlyphRangesVietnamese();             // Default + Vietnamese characters
+
+    //-------------------------------------------
+    // [BETA] Custom Rectangles/Glyphs API
+    //-------------------------------------------
+
+    // You can request arbitrary rectangles to be packed into the atlas, for your own purposes.
+    // - After calling Build(), you can query the rectangle position and render your pixels.
+    // - If you render colored output, set 'atlas->TexPixelsUseColors = true' as this may help some backends decide of prefered texture format.
+    // - You can also request your rectangles to be mapped as font glyph (given a font + Unicode point),
+    //   so you can render e.g. custom colorful icons and use them as regular glyphs.
+    // - Read docs/FONTS.md for more details about using colorful icons.
+    // - Note: this API may be redesigned later in order to support multi-monitor varying DPI settings.
+    IMGUI_API int               AddCustomRectRegular(int width, int height);
+    IMGUI_API int               AddCustomRectFontGlyph(ImFont* font, ImWchar id, int width, int height, float advance_x, const ImVec2& offset = ImVec2(0, 0));
+    ImFontAtlasCustomRect*      GetCustomRectByIndex(int index) { IM_ASSERT(index >= 0); return &CustomRects[index]; }
+
+    // [Internal]
+    IMGUI_API void              CalcCustomRectUV(const ImFontAtlasCustomRect* rect, ImVec2* out_uv_min, ImVec2* out_uv_max) const;
+    IMGUI_API bool              GetMouseCursorTexData(ImGuiMouseCursor cursor, ImVec2* out_offset, ImVec2* out_size, ImVec2 out_uv_border[2], ImVec2 out_uv_fill[2]);
+
+    //-------------------------------------------
+    // Members
+    //-------------------------------------------
+
+    ImFontAtlasFlags            Flags;              // Build flags (see ImFontAtlasFlags_)
+    ImTextureID                 TexID;              // User data to refer to the texture once it has been uploaded to user's graphic systems. It is passed back to you during rendering via the ImDrawCmd structure.
+    int                         TexDesiredWidth;    // Texture width desired by user before Build(). Must be a power-of-two. If have many glyphs your graphics API have texture size restrictions you may want to increase texture width to decrease height.
+    int                         TexGlyphPadding;    // Padding between glyphs within texture in pixels. Defaults to 1. If your rendering method doesn't rely on bilinear filtering you may set this to 0 (will also need to set AntiAliasedLinesUseTex = false).
+    bool                        Locked;             // Marked as Locked by ImGui::NewFrame() so attempt to modify the atlas will assert.
+
+    // [Internal]
+    // NB: Access texture data via GetTexData*() calls! Which will setup a default font for you.
+    bool                        TexReady;           // Set when texture was built matching current font input
+    bool                        TexPixelsUseColors; // Tell whether our texture data is known to use colors (rather than just alpha channel), in order to help backend select a format.
+    unsigned char*              TexPixelsAlpha8;    // 1 component per pixel, each component is unsigned 8-bit. Total size = TexWidth * TexHeight
+    unsigned int*               TexPixelsRGBA32;    // 4 component per pixel, each component is unsigned 8-bit. Total size = TexWidth * TexHeight * 4
+    int                         TexWidth;           // Texture width calculated during Build().
+    int                         TexHeight;          // Texture height calculated during Build().
+    ImVec2                      TexUvScale;         // = (1.0f/TexWidth, 1.0f/TexHeight)
+    ImVec2                      TexUvWhitePixel;    // Texture coordinates to a white pixel
+    ImVector<ImFont*>           Fonts;              // Hold all the fonts returned by AddFont*. Fonts[0] is the default font upon calling ImGui::NewFrame(), use ImGui::PushFont()/PopFont() to change the current font.
+    ImVector<ImFontAtlasCustomRect> CustomRects;    // Rectangles for packing custom texture data into the atlas.
+    ImVector<ImFontConfig>      ConfigData;         // Configuration data
+    ImVec4                      TexUvLines[IM_DRAWLIST_TEX_LINES_WIDTH_MAX + 1];  // UVs for baked anti-aliased lines
+
+    // [Internal] Font builder
+    const ImFontBuilderIO*      FontBuilderIO;      // Opaque interface to a font builder (default to stb_truetype, can be changed to use FreeType by defining IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE).
+    unsigned int                FontBuilderFlags;   // Shared flags (for all fonts) for custom font builder. THIS IS BUILD IMPLEMENTATION DEPENDENT. Per-font override is also available in ImFontConfig.
+
+    // [Internal] Packing data
+    int                         PackIdMouseCursors; // Custom texture rectangle ID for white pixel and mouse cursors
+    int                         PackIdLines;        // Custom texture rectangle ID for baked anti-aliased lines
+
+    // [Obsolete]
+    //typedef ImFontAtlasCustomRect    CustomRect;         // OBSOLETED in 1.72+
+    //typedef ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder GlyphRangesBuilder; // OBSOLETED in 1.67+
+};
+
+// Font runtime data and rendering
+// ImFontAtlas automatically loads a default embedded font for you when you call GetTexDataAsAlpha8() or GetTexDataAsRGBA32().
+struct ImFont
+{
+    // Members: Hot ~20/24 bytes (for CalcTextSize)
+    ImVector<float>             IndexAdvanceX;      // 12-16 // out //            // Sparse. Glyphs->AdvanceX in a directly indexable way (cache-friendly for CalcTextSize functions which only this this info, and are often bottleneck in large UI).
+    float                       FallbackAdvanceX;   // 4     // out // = FallbackGlyph->AdvanceX
+    float                       FontSize;           // 4     // in  //            // Height of characters/line, set during loading (don't change after loading)
+
+    // Members: Hot ~28/40 bytes (for CalcTextSize + render loop)
+    ImVector<ImWchar>           IndexLookup;        // 12-16 // out //            // Sparse. Index glyphs by Unicode code-point.
+    ImVector<ImFontGlyph>       Glyphs;             // 12-16 // out //            // All glyphs.
+    const ImFontGlyph*          FallbackGlyph;      // 4-8   // out // = FindGlyph(FontFallbackChar)
+
+    // Members: Cold ~32/40 bytes
+    ImFontAtlas*                ContainerAtlas;     // 4-8   // out //            // What we has been loaded into
+    const ImFontConfig*         ConfigData;         // 4-8   // in  //            // Pointer within ContainerAtlas->ConfigData
+    short                       ConfigDataCount;    // 2     // in  // ~ 1        // Number of ImFontConfig involved in creating this font. Bigger than 1 when merging multiple font sources into one ImFont.
+    ImWchar                     FallbackChar;       // 2     // out // = FFFD/'?' // Character used if a glyph isn't found.
+    ImWchar                     EllipsisChar;       // 2     // out // = '...'    // Character used for ellipsis rendering.
+    ImWchar                     DotChar;            // 2     // out // = '.'      // Character used for ellipsis rendering (if a single '...' character isn't found)
+    bool                        DirtyLookupTables;  // 1     // out //
+    float                       Scale;              // 4     // in  // = 1.f      // Base font scale, multiplied by the per-window font scale which you can adjust with SetWindowFontScale()
+    float                       Ascent, Descent;    // 4+4   // out //            // Ascent: distance from top to bottom of e.g. 'A' [0..FontSize]
+    int                         MetricsTotalSurface;// 4     // out //            // Total surface in pixels to get an idea of the font rasterization/texture cost (not exact, we approximate the cost of padding between glyphs)
+    ImU8                        Used4kPagesMap[(IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX+1)/4096/8]; // 2 bytes if ImWchar=ImWchar16, 34 bytes if ImWchar==ImWchar32. Store 1-bit for each block of 4K codepoints that has one active glyph. This is mainly used to facilitate iterations across all used codepoints.
+
+    // Methods
+    IMGUI_API ImFont();
+    IMGUI_API ~ImFont();
+    IMGUI_API const ImFontGlyph*FindGlyph(ImWchar c) const;
+    IMGUI_API const ImFontGlyph*FindGlyphNoFallback(ImWchar c) const;
+    float                       GetCharAdvance(ImWchar c) const     { return ((int)c < IndexAdvanceX.Size) ? IndexAdvanceX[(int)c] : FallbackAdvanceX; }
+    bool                        IsLoaded() const                    { return ContainerAtlas != NULL; }
+    const char*                 GetDebugName() const                { return ConfigData ? ConfigData->Name : "<unknown>"; }
+
+    // 'max_width' stops rendering after a certain width (could be turned into a 2d size). FLT_MAX to disable.
+    // 'wrap_width' enable automatic word-wrapping across multiple lines to fit into given width. 0.0f to disable.
+    IMGUI_API ImVec2            CalcTextSizeA(float size, float max_width, float wrap_width, const char* text_begin, const char* text_end = NULL, const char** remaining = NULL) const; // utf8
+    IMGUI_API const char*       CalcWordWrapPositionA(float scale, const char* text, const char* text_end, float wrap_width) const;
+    IMGUI_API void              RenderChar(ImDrawList* draw_list, float size, const ImVec2& pos, ImU32 col, ImWchar c) const;
+    IMGUI_API void              RenderText(ImDrawList* draw_list, float size, const ImVec2& pos, ImU32 col, const ImVec4& clip_rect, const char* text_begin, const char* text_end, float wrap_width = 0.0f, bool cpu_fine_clip = false) const;
+
+    // [Internal] Don't use!
+    IMGUI_API void              BuildLookupTable();
+    IMGUI_API void              ClearOutputData();
+    IMGUI_API void              GrowIndex(int new_size);
+    IMGUI_API void              AddGlyph(const ImFontConfig* src_cfg, ImWchar c, float x0, float y0, float x1, float y1, float u0, float v0, float u1, float v1, float advance_x);
+    IMGUI_API void              AddRemapChar(ImWchar dst, ImWchar src, bool overwrite_dst = true); // Makes 'dst' character/glyph points to 'src' character/glyph. Currently needs to be called AFTER fonts have been built.
+    IMGUI_API void              SetGlyphVisible(ImWchar c, bool visible);
+    IMGUI_API bool              IsGlyphRangeUnused(unsigned int c_begin, unsigned int c_last);
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Viewports
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Flags stored in ImGuiViewport::Flags, giving indications to the platform backends.
+enum ImGuiViewportFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiViewportFlags_None                     = 0,
+    ImGuiViewportFlags_IsPlatformWindow         = 1 << 0,   // Represent a Platform Window
+    ImGuiViewportFlags_IsPlatformMonitor        = 1 << 1,   // Represent a Platform Monitor (unused yet)
+    ImGuiViewportFlags_OwnedByApp               = 1 << 2,   // Platform Window: is created/managed by the application (rather than a dear imgui backend)
+    ImGuiViewportFlags_NoDecoration             = 1 << 3,   // Platform Window: Disable platform decorations: title bar, borders, etc. (generally set all windows, but if ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsDecoration is set we only set this on popups/tooltips)
+    ImGuiViewportFlags_NoTaskBarIcon            = 1 << 4,   // Platform Window: Disable platform task bar icon (generally set on popups/tooltips, or all windows if ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsNoTaskBarIcon is set)
+    ImGuiViewportFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing       = 1 << 5,   // Platform Window: Don't take focus when created.
+    ImGuiViewportFlags_NoFocusOnClick           = 1 << 6,   // Platform Window: Don't take focus when clicked on.
+    ImGuiViewportFlags_NoInputs                 = 1 << 7,   // Platform Window: Make mouse pass through so we can drag this window while peaking behind it.
+    ImGuiViewportFlags_NoRendererClear          = 1 << 8,   // Platform Window: Renderer doesn't need to clear the framebuffer ahead (because we will fill it entirely).
+    ImGuiViewportFlags_TopMost                  = 1 << 9,   // Platform Window: Display on top (for tooltips only).
+    ImGuiViewportFlags_Minimized                = 1 << 10,  // Platform Window: Window is minimized, can skip render. When minimized we tend to avoid using the viewport pos/size for clipping window or testing if they are contained in the viewport.
+    ImGuiViewportFlags_NoAutoMerge              = 1 << 11,  // Platform Window: Avoid merging this window into another host window. This can only be set via ImGuiWindowClass viewport flags override (because we need to now ahead if we are going to create a viewport in the first place!).
+    ImGuiViewportFlags_CanHostOtherWindows      = 1 << 12,  // Main viewport: can host multiple imgui windows (secondary viewports are associated to a single window).
+};
+
+// - Currently represents the Platform Window created by the application which is hosting our Dear ImGui windows.
+// - With multi-viewport enabled, we extend this concept to have multiple active viewports.
+// - In the future we will extend this concept further to also represent Platform Monitor and support a "no main platform window" operation mode.
+// - About Main Area vs Work Area:
+//   - Main Area = entire viewport.
+//   - Work Area = entire viewport minus sections used by main menu bars (for platform windows), or by task bar (for platform monitor).
+//   - Windows are generally trying to stay within the Work Area of their host viewport.
+struct ImGuiViewport
+{
+    ImGuiID             ID;                     // Unique identifier for the viewport
+    ImGuiViewportFlags  Flags;                  // See ImGuiViewportFlags_
+    ImVec2              Pos;                    // Main Area: Position of the viewport (Dear ImGui coordinates are the same as OS desktop/native coordinates)
+    ImVec2              Size;                   // Main Area: Size of the viewport.
+    ImVec2              WorkPos;                // Work Area: Position of the viewport minus task bars, menus bars, status bars (>= Pos)
+    ImVec2              WorkSize;               // Work Area: Size of the viewport minus task bars, menu bars, status bars (<= Size)
+    float               DpiScale;               // 1.0f = 96 DPI = No extra scale.
+    ImGuiID             ParentViewportId;       // (Advanced) 0: no parent. Instruct the platform backend to setup a parent/child relationship between platform windows.
+    ImDrawData*         DrawData;               // The ImDrawData corresponding to this viewport. Valid after Render() and until the next call to NewFrame().
+
+    // Platform/Backend Dependent Data
+    // Our design separate the Renderer and Platform backends to facilitate combining default backends with each others.
+    // When our create your own backend for a custom engine, it is possible that both Renderer and Platform will be handled
+    // by the same system and you may not need to use all the UserData/Handle fields.
+    // The library never uses those fields, they are merely storage to facilitate backend implementation.
+    void*               RendererUserData;       // void* to hold custom data structure for the renderer (e.g. swap chain, framebuffers etc.). generally set by your Renderer_CreateWindow function.
+    void*               PlatformUserData;       // void* to hold custom data structure for the OS / platform (e.g. windowing info, render context). generally set by your Platform_CreateWindow function.
+    void*               PlatformHandle;         // void* for FindViewportByPlatformHandle(). (e.g. suggested to use natural platform handle such as HWND, GLFWWindow*, SDL_Window*)
+    void*               PlatformHandleRaw;      // void* to hold lower-level, platform-native window handle (under Win32 this is expected to be a HWND, unused for other platforms), when using an abstraction layer like GLFW or SDL (where PlatformHandle would be a SDL_Window*)
+    bool                PlatformRequestMove;    // Platform window requested move (e.g. window was moved by the OS / host window manager, authoritative position will be OS window position)
+    bool                PlatformRequestResize;  // Platform window requested resize (e.g. window was resized by the OS / host window manager, authoritative size will be OS window size)
+    bool                PlatformRequestClose;   // Platform window requested closure (e.g. window was moved by the OS / host window manager, e.g. pressing ALT-F4)
+
+    ImGuiViewport()     { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+    ~ImGuiViewport()    { IM_ASSERT(PlatformUserData == NULL && RendererUserData == NULL); }
+
+    // Helpers
+    ImVec2              GetCenter() const       { return ImVec2(Pos.x + Size.x * 0.5f, Pos.y + Size.y * 0.5f); }
+    ImVec2              GetWorkCenter() const   { return ImVec2(WorkPos.x + WorkSize.x * 0.5f, WorkPos.y + WorkSize.y * 0.5f); }
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Platform Dependent Interfaces (for e.g. multi-viewport support)
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [BETA] (Optional) This is completely optional, for advanced users!
+// If you are new to Dear ImGui and trying to integrate it into your engine, you can probably ignore this for now.
+//
+// This feature allows you to seamlessly drag Dear ImGui windows outside of your application viewport.
+// This is achieved by creating new Platform/OS windows on the fly, and rendering into them.
+// Dear ImGui manages the viewport structures, and the backend create and maintain one Platform/OS window for each of those viewports.
+//
+// See Glossary https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Glossary for details about some of the terminology.
+// See Thread https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/1542 for gifs, news and questions about this evolving feature.
+//
+// About the coordinates system:
+// - When multi-viewports are enabled, all Dear ImGui coordinates become absolute coordinates (same as OS coordinates!)
+// - So e.g. ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(ImVec2(0,0)) will position a window relative to your primary monitor!
+// - If you want to position windows relative to your main application viewport, use ImGui::GetMainViewport()->Pos as a base position.
+//
+// Steps to use multi-viewports in your application, when using a default backend from the examples/ folder:
+// - Application:  Enable feature with 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable'.
+// - Backend:      The backend initialization will setup all necessary ImGuiPlatformIO's functions and update monitors info every frame.
+// - Application:  In your main loop, call ImGui::UpdatePlatformWindows(), ImGui::RenderPlatformWindowsDefault() after EndFrame() or Render().
+// - Application:  Fix absolute coordinates used in ImGui::SetWindowPos() or ImGui::SetNextWindowPos() calls.
+//
+// Steps to use multi-viewports in your application, when using a custom backend:
+// - Important:    THIS IS NOT EASY TO DO and comes with many subtleties not described here!
+//                 It's also an experimental feature, so some of the requirements may evolve.
+//                 Consider using default backends if you can. Either way, carefully follow and refer to examples/ backends for details.
+// - Application:  Enable feature with 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable'.
+// - Backend:      Hook ImGuiPlatformIO's Platform_* and Renderer_* callbacks (see below).
+//                 Set 'io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_PlatformHasViewports' and 'io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_PlatformHasViewports'.
+//                 Update ImGuiPlatformIO's Monitors list every frame.
+//                 Update MousePos every frame, in absolute coordinates.
+// - Application:  In your main loop, call ImGui::UpdatePlatformWindows(), ImGui::RenderPlatformWindowsDefault() after EndFrame() or Render().
+//                 You may skip calling RenderPlatformWindowsDefault() if its API is not convenient for your needs. Read comments below.
+// - Application:  Fix absolute coordinates used in ImGui::SetWindowPos() or ImGui::SetNextWindowPos() calls.
+//
+// About ImGui::RenderPlatformWindowsDefault():
+// - This function is a mostly a _helper_ for the common-most cases, and to facilitate using default backends.
+// - You can check its simple source code to understand what it does.
+//   It basically iterates secondary viewports and call 4 functions that are setup in ImGuiPlatformIO, if available:
+//     Platform_RenderWindow(), Renderer_RenderWindow(), Platform_SwapBuffers(), Renderer_SwapBuffers()
+//   Those functions pointers exists only for the benefit of RenderPlatformWindowsDefault().
+// - If you have very specific rendering needs (e.g. flipping multiple swap-chain simultaneously, unusual sync/threading issues, etc.),
+//   you may be tempted to ignore RenderPlatformWindowsDefault() and write customized code to perform your renderingg.
+//   You may decide to setup the platform_io's *RenderWindow and *SwapBuffers pointers and call your functions through those pointers,
+//   or you may decide to never setup those pointers and call your code directly. They are a convenience, not an obligatory interface.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// (Optional) Access via ImGui::GetPlatformIO()
+struct ImGuiPlatformIO
+{
+    //------------------------------------------------------------------
+    // Input - Backend interface/functions + Monitor List
+    //------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+    // (Optional) Platform functions (e.g. Win32, GLFW, SDL2)
+    // For reference, the second column shows which function are generally calling the Platform Functions:
+    //   N = ImGui::NewFrame()                        ~ beginning of the dear imgui frame: read info from platform/OS windows (latest size/position)
+    //   F = ImGui::Begin(), ImGui::EndFrame()        ~ during the dear imgui frame
+    //   U = ImGui::UpdatePlatformWindows()           ~ after the dear imgui frame: create and update all platform/OS windows
+    //   R = ImGui::RenderPlatformWindowsDefault()    ~ render
+    //   D = ImGui::DestroyPlatformWindows()          ~ shutdown
+    // The general idea is that NewFrame() we will read the current Platform/OS state, and UpdatePlatformWindows() will write to it.
+    //
+    // The functions are designed so we can mix and match 2 imgui_impl_xxxx files, one for the Platform (~window/input handling), one for Renderer.
+    // Custom engine backends will often provide both Platform and Renderer interfaces and so may not need to use all functions.
+    // Platform functions are typically called before their Renderer counterpart, apart from Destroy which are called the other way.
+
+    // Platform function --------------------------------------------------- Called by -----
+    void    (*Platform_CreateWindow)(ImGuiViewport* vp);                    // . . U . .  // Create a new platform window for the given viewport
+    void    (*Platform_DestroyWindow)(ImGuiViewport* vp);                   // N . U . D  //
+    void    (*Platform_ShowWindow)(ImGuiViewport* vp);                      // . . U . .  // Newly created windows are initially hidden so SetWindowPos/Size/Title can be called on them before showing the window
+    void    (*Platform_SetWindowPos)(ImGuiViewport* vp, ImVec2 pos);        // . . U . .  // Set platform window position (given the upper-left corner of client area)
+    ImVec2  (*Platform_GetWindowPos)(ImGuiViewport* vp);                    // N . . . .  //
+    void    (*Platform_SetWindowSize)(ImGuiViewport* vp, ImVec2 size);      // . . U . .  // Set platform window client area size (ignoring OS decorations such as OS title bar etc.)
+    ImVec2  (*Platform_GetWindowSize)(ImGuiViewport* vp);                   // N . . . .  // Get platform window client area size
+    void    (*Platform_SetWindowFocus)(ImGuiViewport* vp);                  // N . . . .  // Move window to front and set input focus
+    bool    (*Platform_GetWindowFocus)(ImGuiViewport* vp);                  // . . U . .  //
+    bool    (*Platform_GetWindowMinimized)(ImGuiViewport* vp);              // N . . . .  // Get platform window minimized state. When minimized, we generally won't attempt to get/set size and contents will be culled more easily
+    void    (*Platform_SetWindowTitle)(ImGuiViewport* vp, const char* str); // . . U . .  // Set platform window title (given an UTF-8 string)
+    void    (*Platform_SetWindowAlpha)(ImGuiViewport* vp, float alpha);     // . . U . .  // (Optional) Setup global transparency (not per-pixel transparency)
+    void    (*Platform_UpdateWindow)(ImGuiViewport* vp);                    // . . U . .  // (Optional) Called by UpdatePlatformWindows(). Optional hook to allow the platform backend from doing general book-keeping every frame.
+    void    (*Platform_RenderWindow)(ImGuiViewport* vp, void* render_arg);  // . . . R .  // (Optional) Main rendering (platform side! This is often unused, or just setting a "current" context for OpenGL bindings). 'render_arg' is the value passed to RenderPlatformWindowsDefault().
+    void    (*Platform_SwapBuffers)(ImGuiViewport* vp, void* render_arg);   // . . . R .  // (Optional) Call Present/SwapBuffers (platform side! This is often unused!). 'render_arg' is the value passed to RenderPlatformWindowsDefault().
+    float   (*Platform_GetWindowDpiScale)(ImGuiViewport* vp);               // N . . . .  // (Optional) [BETA] FIXME-DPI: DPI handling: Return DPI scale for this viewport. 1.0f = 96 DPI.
+    void    (*Platform_OnChangedViewport)(ImGuiViewport* vp);               // . F . . .  // (Optional) [BETA] FIXME-DPI: DPI handling: Called during Begin() every time the viewport we are outputting into changes, so backend has a chance to swap fonts to adjust style.
+    int     (*Platform_CreateVkSurface)(ImGuiViewport* vp, ImU64 vk_inst, const void* vk_allocators, ImU64* out_vk_surface); // (Optional) For a Vulkan Renderer to call into Platform code (since the surface creation needs to tie them both).
+
+    // (Optional) Renderer functions (e.g. DirectX, OpenGL, Vulkan)
+    void    (*Renderer_CreateWindow)(ImGuiViewport* vp);                    // . . U . .  // Create swap chain, frame buffers etc. (called after Platform_CreateWindow)
+    void    (*Renderer_DestroyWindow)(ImGuiViewport* vp);                   // N . U . D  // Destroy swap chain, frame buffers etc. (called before Platform_DestroyWindow)
+    void    (*Renderer_SetWindowSize)(ImGuiViewport* vp, ImVec2 size);      // . . U . .  // Resize swap chain, frame buffers etc. (called after Platform_SetWindowSize)
+    void    (*Renderer_RenderWindow)(ImGuiViewport* vp, void* render_arg);  // . . . R .  // (Optional) Clear framebuffer, setup render target, then render the viewport->DrawData. 'render_arg' is the value passed to RenderPlatformWindowsDefault().
+    void    (*Renderer_SwapBuffers)(ImGuiViewport* vp, void* render_arg);   // . . . R .  // (Optional) Call Present/SwapBuffers. 'render_arg' is the value passed to RenderPlatformWindowsDefault().
+
+    // (Optional) Monitor list
+    // - Updated by: app/backend. Update every frame to dynamically support changing monitor or DPI configuration.
+    // - Used by: dear imgui to query DPI info, clamp popups/tooltips within same monitor and not have them straddle monitors.
+    ImVector<ImGuiPlatformMonitor>  Monitors;
+
+    //------------------------------------------------------------------
+    // Output - List of viewports to render into platform windows
+    //------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+    // Viewports list (the list is updated by calling ImGui::EndFrame or ImGui::Render)
+    // (in the future we will attempt to organize this feature to remove the need for a "main viewport")
+    ImVector<ImGuiViewport*>        Viewports;                              // Main viewports, followed by all secondary viewports.
+    ImGuiPlatformIO()               { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }     // Zero clear
+};
+
+// (Optional) This is required when enabling multi-viewport. Represent the bounds of each connected monitor/display and their DPI.
+// We use this information for multiple DPI support + clamping the position of popups and tooltips so they don't straddle multiple monitors.
+struct ImGuiPlatformMonitor
+{
+    ImVec2  MainPos, MainSize;      // Coordinates of the area displayed on this monitor (Min = upper left, Max = bottom right)
+    ImVec2  WorkPos, WorkSize;      // Coordinates without task bars / side bars / menu bars. Used to avoid positioning popups/tooltips inside this region. If you don't have this info, please copy the value for MainPos/MainSize.
+    float   DpiScale;               // 1.0f = 96 DPI
+    ImGuiPlatformMonitor()          { MainPos = MainSize = WorkPos = WorkSize = ImVec2(0, 0); DpiScale = 1.0f; }
+};
+
+// (Optional) Support for IME (Input Method Editor) via the io.SetPlatformImeDataFn() function.
+struct ImGuiPlatformImeData
+{
+    bool    WantVisible;        // A widget wants the IME to be visible
+    ImVec2  InputPos;           // Position of the input cursor
+    float   InputLineHeight;    // Line height
+
+    ImGuiPlatformImeData() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Obsolete functions and types
+// (Will be removed! Read 'API BREAKING CHANGES' section in imgui.cpp for details)
+// Please keep your copy of dear imgui up to date! Occasionally set '#define IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS' in imconfig.h to stay ahead.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+namespace ImGui
+{
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
+    IMGUI_API int       GetKeyIndex(ImGuiKey key);  // map ImGuiKey_* values into legacy native key index. == io.KeyMap[key]
+#else
+    static inline int   GetKeyIndex(ImGuiKey key)   { IM_ASSERT(key >= ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN && key < ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END && "ImGuiKey and native_index was merged together and native_index is disabled by IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO. Please switch to ImGuiKey."); return key; }
+#endif
+}
+
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+namespace ImGui
+{
+    // OBSOLETED in 1.88 (from May 2022)
+    static inline void  CaptureKeyboardFromApp(bool want_capture_keyboard = true)   { SetNextFrameWantCaptureKeyboard(want_capture_keyboard); } // Renamed as name was misleading + removed default value.
+    static inline void  CaptureMouseFromApp(bool want_capture_mouse = true)         { SetNextFrameWantCaptureMouse(want_capture_mouse); }       // Renamed as name was misleading + removed default value.
+    // OBSOLETED in 1.86 (from November 2021)
+    IMGUI_API void      CalcListClipping(int items_count, float items_height, int* out_items_display_start, int* out_items_display_end); // Calculate coarse clipping for large list of evenly sized items. Prefer using ImGuiListClipper.
+    // OBSOLETED in 1.85 (from August 2021)
+    static inline float GetWindowContentRegionWidth()                               { return GetWindowContentRegionMax().x - GetWindowContentRegionMin().x; }
+    // OBSOLETED in 1.81 (from February 2021)
+    IMGUI_API bool      ListBoxHeader(const char* label, int items_count, int height_in_items = -1); // Helper to calculate size from items_count and height_in_items
+    static inline bool  ListBoxHeader(const char* label, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0))         { return BeginListBox(label, size); }
+    static inline void  ListBoxFooter() { EndListBox(); }
+    // OBSOLETED in 1.79 (from August 2020)
+    static inline void  OpenPopupContextItem(const char* str_id = NULL, ImGuiMouseButton mb = 1)    { OpenPopupOnItemClick(str_id, mb); } // Bool return value removed. Use IsWindowAppearing() in BeginPopup() instead. Renamed in 1.77, renamed back in 1.79. Sorry!
+    // OBSOLETED in 1.78 (from June 2020)
+    // Old drag/sliders functions that took a 'float power = 1.0' argument instead of flags.
+    // For shared code, you can version check at compile-time with `#if IMGUI_VERSION_NUM >= 17704`.
+    IMGUI_API bool      DragScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, float v_speed, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, float power);
+    IMGUI_API bool      DragScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, int components, float v_speed, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, float power);
+    static inline bool  DragFloat(const char* label, float* v, float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)    { return DragScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); }
+    static inline bool  DragFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power) { return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); }
+    static inline bool  DragFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power) { return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); }
+    static inline bool  DragFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power) { return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); }
+    IMGUI_API bool      SliderScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, float power);
+    IMGUI_API bool      SliderScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, int components, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, float power);
+    static inline bool  SliderFloat(const char* label, float* v, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)                 { return SliderScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); }
+    static inline bool  SliderFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)              { return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); }
+    static inline bool  SliderFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)              { return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); }
+    static inline bool  SliderFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, float power)              { return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, &v_min, &v_max, format, power); }
+    // OBSOLETED in 1.77 (from June 2020)
+    static inline bool  BeginPopupContextWindow(const char* str_id, ImGuiMouseButton mb, bool over_items) { return BeginPopupContextWindow(str_id, mb | (over_items ? 0 : ImGuiPopupFlags_NoOpenOverItems)); }
+
+    // Some of the older obsolete names along with their replacement (commented out so they are not reported in IDE)
+    //static inline void  TreeAdvanceToLabelPos()               { SetCursorPosX(GetCursorPosX() + GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing()); }   // OBSOLETED in 1.72 (from July 2019)
+    //static inline void  SetNextTreeNodeOpen(bool open, ImGuiCond cond = 0) { SetNextItemOpen(open, cond); }                       // OBSOLETED in 1.71 (from June 2019)
+    //static inline float GetContentRegionAvailWidth()          { return GetContentRegionAvail().x; }                               // OBSOLETED in 1.70 (from May 2019)
+    //static inline ImDrawList* GetOverlayDrawList()            { return GetForegroundDrawList(); }                                 // OBSOLETED in 1.69 (from Mar 2019)
+    //static inline void  SetScrollHere(float ratio = 0.5f)     { SetScrollHereY(ratio); }                                          // OBSOLETED in 1.66 (from Nov 2018)
+    //static inline bool  IsItemDeactivatedAfterChange()        { return IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit(); }                            // OBSOLETED in 1.63 (from Aug 2018)
+    //static inline bool  IsAnyWindowFocused()                  { return IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow); }            // OBSOLETED in 1.60 (from Apr 2018)
+    //static inline bool  IsAnyWindowHovered()                  { return IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow); }            // OBSOLETED in 1.60 (between Dec 2017 and Apr 2018)
+    //static inline void  ShowTestWindow()                      { return ShowDemoWindow(); }                                        // OBSOLETED in 1.53 (between Oct 2017 and Dec 2017)
+    //static inline bool  IsRootWindowFocused()                 { return IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow); }           // OBSOLETED in 1.53 (between Oct 2017 and Dec 2017)
+    //static inline bool  IsRootWindowOrAnyChildFocused()       { return IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootAndChildWindows); }  // OBSOLETED in 1.53 (between Oct 2017 and Dec 2017)
+    //static inline void  SetNextWindowContentWidth(float w)    { SetNextWindowContentSize(ImVec2(w, 0.0f)); }                      // OBSOLETED in 1.53 (between Oct 2017 and Dec 2017)
+    //static inline float GetItemsLineHeightWithSpacing()       { return GetFrameHeightWithSpacing(); }                             // OBSOLETED in 1.53 (between Oct 2017 and Dec 2017)
+}
+
+// OBSOLETED in 1.82 (from Mars 2021): flags for AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), AddImageRounded(), PathRect()
+typedef ImDrawFlags ImDrawCornerFlags;
+enum ImDrawCornerFlags_
+{
+    ImDrawCornerFlags_None      = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone,         // Was == 0 prior to 1.82, this is now == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone which is != 0 and not implicit
+    ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft   = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft,      // Was == 0x01 (1 << 0) prior to 1.82. Order matches ImDrawFlags_NoRoundCorner* flag (we exploit this internally).
+    ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight  = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight,     // Was == 0x02 (1 << 1) prior to 1.82.
+    ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft   = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft,   // Was == 0x04 (1 << 2) prior to 1.82.
+    ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight  = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight,  // Was == 0x08 (1 << 3) prior to 1.82.
+    ImDrawCornerFlags_All       = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll,          // Was == 0x0F prior to 1.82
+    ImDrawCornerFlags_Top       = ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft | ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight,
+    ImDrawCornerFlags_Bot       = ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft | ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight,
+    ImDrawCornerFlags_Left      = ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft | ImDrawCornerFlags_BotLeft,
+    ImDrawCornerFlags_Right     = ImDrawCornerFlags_TopRight | ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight,
+};
+
+// RENAMED ImGuiKeyModFlags -> ImGuiModFlags in 1.88 (from April 2022)
+typedef int ImGuiKeyModFlags;
+enum ImGuiKeyModFlags_ { ImGuiKeyModFlags_None = ImGuiModFlags_None, ImGuiKeyModFlags_Ctrl = ImGuiModFlags_Ctrl, ImGuiKeyModFlags_Shift = ImGuiModFlags_Shift, ImGuiKeyModFlags_Alt = ImGuiModFlags_Alt, ImGuiKeyModFlags_Super = ImGuiModFlags_Super };
+
+#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+
+// RENAMED IMGUI_DISABLE_METRICS_WINDOW > IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS in 1.88 (from June 2022)
+#if defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_METRICS_WINDOW) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS)
+#define IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS
+#endif
+#if defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_METRICS_WINDOW) && defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS)
+#error IMGUI_DISABLE_METRICS_WINDOW was renamed to IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS, please use new name.
+#endif
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__clang__)
+#pragma clang diagnostic pop
+#elif defined(__GNUC__)
+#pragma GCC diagnostic pop
+#endif
+
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+#pragma warning (pop)
+#endif
+
+// Include imgui_user.h at the end of imgui.h (convenient for user to only explicitly include vanilla imgui.h)
+#ifdef IMGUI_INCLUDE_IMGUI_USER_H
+#include "imgui_user.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE
diff --git a/dependencies/include/imgui/imgui_impl_opengl3.h b/dependencies/include/imgui/imgui_impl_opengl3.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..81722bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/imgui/imgui_impl_opengl3.h
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+// dear imgui: Renderer Backend for modern OpenGL with shaders / programmatic pipeline
+// - Desktop GL: 2.x 3.x 4.x
+// - Embedded GL: ES 2.0 (WebGL 1.0), ES 3.0 (WebGL 2.0)
+// This needs to be used along with a Platform Backend (e.g. GLFW, SDL, Win32, custom..)
+
+// Implemented features:
+//  [X] Renderer: User texture binding. Use 'GLuint' OpenGL texture identifier as void*/ImTextureID. Read the FAQ about ImTextureID!
+//  [X] Renderer: Multi-viewport support (multiple windows). Enable with 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable'.
+//  [x] Renderer: Large meshes support (64k+ vertices) with 16-bit indices (Desktop OpenGL only).
+
+// You can use unmodified imgui_impl_* files in your project. See examples/ folder for examples of using this.
+// Prefer including the entire imgui/ repository into your project (either as a copy or as a submodule), and only build the backends you need.
+// If you are new to Dear ImGui, read documentation from the docs/ folder + read the top of imgui.cpp.
+// Read online: https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/tree/master/docs
+
+// About GLSL version:
+//  The 'glsl_version' initialization parameter should be NULL (default) or a "#version XXX" string.
+//  On computer platform the GLSL version default to "#version 130". On OpenGL ES 3 platform it defaults to "#version 300 es"
+//  Only override if your GL version doesn't handle this GLSL version. See GLSL version table at the top of imgui_impl_opengl3.cpp.
+
+#pragma once
+#include "imgui.h"      // IMGUI_IMPL_API
+
+// Backend API
+IMGUI_IMPL_API bool     ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_Init(const char* glsl_version = NULL);
+IMGUI_IMPL_API void     ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_Shutdown();
+IMGUI_IMPL_API void     ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_NewFrame();
+IMGUI_IMPL_API void     ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_RenderDrawData(ImDrawData* draw_data);
+
+// (Optional) Called by Init/NewFrame/Shutdown
+IMGUI_IMPL_API bool     ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_CreateFontsTexture();
+IMGUI_IMPL_API void     ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_DestroyFontsTexture();
+IMGUI_IMPL_API bool     ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_CreateDeviceObjects();
+IMGUI_IMPL_API void     ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_DestroyDeviceObjects();
+
+// Specific OpenGL ES versions
+//#define IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_ES2     // Auto-detected on Emscripten
+//#define IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_ES3     // Auto-detected on iOS/Android
+
+// You can explicitly select GLES2 or GLES3 API by using one of the '#define IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_LOADER_XXX' in imconfig.h or compiler command-line.
+#if !defined(IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_ES2) \
+ && !defined(IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_ES3)
+
+// Try to detect GLES on matching platforms
+#if defined(__APPLE__)
+#include <TargetConditionals.h>
+#endif
+#if (defined(__APPLE__) && (TARGET_OS_IOS || TARGET_OS_TV)) || (defined(__ANDROID__))
+#define IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_ES3               // iOS, Android  -> GL ES 3, "#version 300 es"
+#elif defined(__EMSCRIPTEN__) || defined(__amigaos4__)
+#define IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_ES2               // Emscripten    -> GL ES 2, "#version 100"
+#else
+// Otherwise imgui_impl_opengl3_loader.h will be used.
+#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/dependencies/include/imgui/imgui_impl_opengl3_loader.h b/dependencies/include/imgui/imgui_impl_opengl3_loader.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d576235
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/imgui/imgui_impl_opengl3_loader.h
@@ -0,0 +1,786 @@
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// About imgui_impl_opengl3_loader.h:
+//
+// We embed our own OpenGL loader to not require user to provide their own or to have to use ours,
+// which proved to be endless problems for users.
+// Our loader is custom-generated, based on gl3w but automatically filtered to only include
+// enums/functions that we use in our imgui_impl_opengl3.cpp source file in order to be small.
+//
+// YOU SHOULD NOT NEED TO INCLUDE/USE THIS DIRECTLY. THIS IS USED BY imgui_impl_opengl3.cpp ONLY.
+// THE REST OF YOUR APP SHOULD USE A DIFFERENT GL LOADER: ANY GL LOADER OF YOUR CHOICE.
+//
+// Regenerate with:
+//   python gl3w_gen.py --output ../imgui/backends/imgui_impl_opengl3_loader.h --ref ../imgui/backends/imgui_impl_opengl3.cpp ./extra_symbols.txt
+//
+// More info:
+//   https://github.com/dearimgui/gl3w_stripped
+//   https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/4445
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+/*
+ * This file was generated with gl3w_gen.py, part of imgl3w
+ * (hosted at https://github.com/dearimgui/gl3w_stripped)
+ *
+ * This is free and unencumbered software released into the public domain.
+ *
+ * Anyone is free to copy, modify, publish, use, compile, sell, or
+ * distribute this software, either in source code form or as a compiled
+ * binary, for any purpose, commercial or non-commercial, and by any
+ * means.
+ *
+ * In jurisdictions that recognize copyright laws, the author or authors
+ * of this software dedicate any and all copyright interest in the
+ * software to the public domain. We make this dedication for the benefit
+ * of the public at large and to the detriment of our heirs and
+ * successors. We intend this dedication to be an overt act of
+ * relinquishment in perpetuity of all present and future rights to this
+ * software under copyright law.
+ *
+ * THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+ * EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+ * MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
+ * IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
+ * OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
+ * ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
+ * OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+ */
+
+#ifndef __gl3w_h_
+#define __gl3w_h_
+
+// Adapted from KHR/khrplatform.h to avoid including entire file.
+#ifndef __khrplatform_h_
+typedef          float         khronos_float_t;
+typedef signed   char          khronos_int8_t;
+typedef unsigned char          khronos_uint8_t;
+typedef signed   short int     khronos_int16_t;
+typedef unsigned short int     khronos_uint16_t;
+#ifdef _WIN64
+typedef signed   long long int khronos_intptr_t;
+typedef signed   long long int khronos_ssize_t;
+#else
+typedef signed   long  int     khronos_intptr_t;
+typedef signed   long  int     khronos_ssize_t;
+#endif
+
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(__clang__)
+typedef signed   __int64       khronos_int64_t;
+typedef unsigned __int64       khronos_uint64_t;
+#elif (defined(__clang__) || defined(__GNUC__)) && (__cplusplus < 201100)
+#include <stdint.h>
+typedef          int64_t       khronos_int64_t;
+typedef          uint64_t      khronos_uint64_t;
+#else
+typedef signed   long long     khronos_int64_t;
+typedef unsigned long long     khronos_uint64_t;
+#endif
+#endif  // __khrplatform_h_
+
+#ifndef __gl_glcorearb_h_
+#define __gl_glcorearb_h_ 1
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C" {
+#endif
+/*
+** Copyright 2013-2020 The Khronos Group Inc.
+** SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
+**
+** This header is generated from the Khronos OpenGL / OpenGL ES XML
+** API Registry. The current version of the Registry, generator scripts
+** used to make the header, and the header can be found at
+**   https://github.com/KhronosGroup/OpenGL-Registry
+*/
+#if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(APIENTRY) && !defined(__CYGWIN__) && !defined(__SCITECH_SNAP__)
+#ifndef WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
+#define WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN 1
+#endif
+#include <windows.h>
+#endif
+#ifndef APIENTRY
+#define APIENTRY
+#endif
+#ifndef APIENTRYP
+#define APIENTRYP APIENTRY *
+#endif
+#ifndef GLAPI
+#define GLAPI extern
+#endif
+/* glcorearb.h is for use with OpenGL core profile implementations.
+** It should should be placed in the same directory as gl.h and
+** included as <GL/glcorearb.h>.
+**
+** glcorearb.h includes only APIs in the latest OpenGL core profile
+** implementation together with APIs in newer ARB extensions which 
+** can be supported by the core profile. It does not, and never will
+** include functionality removed from the core profile, such as
+** fixed-function vertex and fragment processing.
+**
+** Do not #include both <GL/glcorearb.h> and either of <GL/gl.h> or
+** <GL/glext.h> in the same source file.
+*/
+/* Generated C header for:
+ * API: gl
+ * Profile: core
+ * Versions considered: .*
+ * Versions emitted: .*
+ * Default extensions included: glcore
+ * Additional extensions included: _nomatch_^
+ * Extensions removed: _nomatch_^
+ */
+#ifndef GL_VERSION_1_0
+typedef void GLvoid;
+typedef unsigned int GLenum;
+
+typedef khronos_float_t GLfloat;
+typedef int GLint;
+typedef int GLsizei;
+typedef unsigned int GLbitfield;
+typedef double GLdouble;
+typedef unsigned int GLuint;
+typedef unsigned char GLboolean;
+typedef khronos_uint8_t GLubyte;
+#define GL_COLOR_BUFFER_BIT               0x00004000
+#define GL_FALSE                          0
+#define GL_TRUE                           1
+#define GL_TRIANGLES                      0x0004
+#define GL_ONE                            1
+#define GL_SRC_ALPHA                      0x0302
+#define GL_ONE_MINUS_SRC_ALPHA            0x0303
+#define GL_FRONT_AND_BACK                 0x0408
+#define GL_POLYGON_MODE                   0x0B40
+#define GL_CULL_FACE                      0x0B44
+#define GL_DEPTH_TEST                     0x0B71
+#define GL_STENCIL_TEST                   0x0B90
+#define GL_VIEWPORT                       0x0BA2
+#define GL_BLEND                          0x0BE2
+#define GL_SCISSOR_BOX                    0x0C10
+#define GL_SCISSOR_TEST                   0x0C11
+#define GL_UNPACK_ROW_LENGTH              0x0CF2
+#define GL_PACK_ALIGNMENT                 0x0D05
+#define GL_TEXTURE_2D                     0x0DE1
+#define GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE                  0x1401
+#define GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT                 0x1403
+#define GL_UNSIGNED_INT                   0x1405
+#define GL_FLOAT                          0x1406
+#define GL_RGBA                           0x1908
+#define GL_FILL                           0x1B02
+#define GL_VENDOR                         0x1F00
+#define GL_RENDERER                       0x1F01
+#define GL_VERSION                        0x1F02
+#define GL_EXTENSIONS                     0x1F03
+#define GL_LINEAR                         0x2601
+#define GL_TEXTURE_MAG_FILTER             0x2800
+#define GL_TEXTURE_MIN_FILTER             0x2801
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLPOLYGONMODEPROC) (GLenum face, GLenum mode);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLSCISSORPROC) (GLint x, GLint y, GLsizei width, GLsizei height);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLTEXPARAMETERIPROC) (GLenum target, GLenum pname, GLint param);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLTEXIMAGE2DPROC) (GLenum target, GLint level, GLint internalformat, GLsizei width, GLsizei height, GLint border, GLenum format, GLenum type, const void *pixels);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLCLEARPROC) (GLbitfield mask);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLCLEARCOLORPROC) (GLfloat red, GLfloat green, GLfloat blue, GLfloat alpha);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLDISABLEPROC) (GLenum cap);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLENABLEPROC) (GLenum cap);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLFLUSHPROC) (void);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLPIXELSTOREIPROC) (GLenum pname, GLint param);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLREADPIXELSPROC) (GLint x, GLint y, GLsizei width, GLsizei height, GLenum format, GLenum type, void *pixels);
+typedef GLenum (APIENTRYP PFNGLGETERRORPROC) (void);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLGETINTEGERVPROC) (GLenum pname, GLint *data);
+typedef const GLubyte *(APIENTRYP PFNGLGETSTRINGPROC) (GLenum name);
+typedef GLboolean (APIENTRYP PFNGLISENABLEDPROC) (GLenum cap);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLVIEWPORTPROC) (GLint x, GLint y, GLsizei width, GLsizei height);
+#ifdef GL_GLEXT_PROTOTYPES
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glPolygonMode (GLenum face, GLenum mode);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glScissor (GLint x, GLint y, GLsizei width, GLsizei height);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glTexParameteri (GLenum target, GLenum pname, GLint param);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glTexImage2D (GLenum target, GLint level, GLint internalformat, GLsizei width, GLsizei height, GLint border, GLenum format, GLenum type, const void *pixels);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glClear (GLbitfield mask);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glClearColor (GLfloat red, GLfloat green, GLfloat blue, GLfloat alpha);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glDisable (GLenum cap);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glEnable (GLenum cap);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glFlush (void);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glPixelStorei (GLenum pname, GLint param);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glReadPixels (GLint x, GLint y, GLsizei width, GLsizei height, GLenum format, GLenum type, void *pixels);
+GLAPI GLenum APIENTRY glGetError (void);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glGetIntegerv (GLenum pname, GLint *data);
+GLAPI const GLubyte *APIENTRY glGetString (GLenum name);
+GLAPI GLboolean APIENTRY glIsEnabled (GLenum cap);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glViewport (GLint x, GLint y, GLsizei width, GLsizei height);
+#endif
+#endif /* GL_VERSION_1_0 */
+#ifndef GL_VERSION_1_1
+typedef khronos_float_t GLclampf;
+typedef double GLclampd;
+#define GL_TEXTURE_BINDING_2D             0x8069
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLDRAWELEMENTSPROC) (GLenum mode, GLsizei count, GLenum type, const void *indices);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLBINDTEXTUREPROC) (GLenum target, GLuint texture);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLDELETETEXTURESPROC) (GLsizei n, const GLuint *textures);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLGENTEXTURESPROC) (GLsizei n, GLuint *textures);
+#ifdef GL_GLEXT_PROTOTYPES
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glDrawElements (GLenum mode, GLsizei count, GLenum type, const void *indices);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glBindTexture (GLenum target, GLuint texture);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glDeleteTextures (GLsizei n, const GLuint *textures);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glGenTextures (GLsizei n, GLuint *textures);
+#endif
+#endif /* GL_VERSION_1_1 */
+#ifndef GL_VERSION_1_3
+#define GL_TEXTURE0                       0x84C0
+#define GL_ACTIVE_TEXTURE                 0x84E0
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLACTIVETEXTUREPROC) (GLenum texture);
+#ifdef GL_GLEXT_PROTOTYPES
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glActiveTexture (GLenum texture);
+#endif
+#endif /* GL_VERSION_1_3 */
+#ifndef GL_VERSION_1_4
+#define GL_BLEND_DST_RGB                  0x80C8
+#define GL_BLEND_SRC_RGB                  0x80C9
+#define GL_BLEND_DST_ALPHA                0x80CA
+#define GL_BLEND_SRC_ALPHA                0x80CB
+#define GL_FUNC_ADD                       0x8006
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLBLENDFUNCSEPARATEPROC) (GLenum sfactorRGB, GLenum dfactorRGB, GLenum sfactorAlpha, GLenum dfactorAlpha);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLBLENDEQUATIONPROC) (GLenum mode);
+#ifdef GL_GLEXT_PROTOTYPES
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glBlendFuncSeparate (GLenum sfactorRGB, GLenum dfactorRGB, GLenum sfactorAlpha, GLenum dfactorAlpha);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glBlendEquation (GLenum mode);
+#endif
+#endif /* GL_VERSION_1_4 */
+#ifndef GL_VERSION_1_5
+typedef khronos_ssize_t GLsizeiptr;
+typedef khronos_intptr_t GLintptr;
+#define GL_ARRAY_BUFFER                   0x8892
+#define GL_ELEMENT_ARRAY_BUFFER           0x8893
+#define GL_ARRAY_BUFFER_BINDING           0x8894
+#define GL_ELEMENT_ARRAY_BUFFER_BINDING   0x8895
+#define GL_STREAM_DRAW                    0x88E0
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLBINDBUFFERPROC) (GLenum target, GLuint buffer);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLDELETEBUFFERSPROC) (GLsizei n, const GLuint *buffers);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLGENBUFFERSPROC) (GLsizei n, GLuint *buffers);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLBUFFERDATAPROC) (GLenum target, GLsizeiptr size, const void *data, GLenum usage);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLBUFFERSUBDATAPROC) (GLenum target, GLintptr offset, GLsizeiptr size, const void *data);
+#ifdef GL_GLEXT_PROTOTYPES
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glBindBuffer (GLenum target, GLuint buffer);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glDeleteBuffers (GLsizei n, const GLuint *buffers);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glGenBuffers (GLsizei n, GLuint *buffers);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glBufferData (GLenum target, GLsizeiptr size, const void *data, GLenum usage);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glBufferSubData (GLenum target, GLintptr offset, GLsizeiptr size, const void *data);
+#endif
+#endif /* GL_VERSION_1_5 */
+#ifndef GL_VERSION_2_0
+typedef char GLchar;
+typedef khronos_int16_t GLshort;
+typedef khronos_int8_t GLbyte;
+typedef khronos_uint16_t GLushort;
+#define GL_BLEND_EQUATION_RGB             0x8009
+#define GL_VERTEX_ATTRIB_ARRAY_ENABLED    0x8622
+#define GL_VERTEX_ATTRIB_ARRAY_SIZE       0x8623
+#define GL_VERTEX_ATTRIB_ARRAY_STRIDE     0x8624
+#define GL_VERTEX_ATTRIB_ARRAY_TYPE       0x8625
+#define GL_VERTEX_ATTRIB_ARRAY_POINTER    0x8645
+#define GL_BLEND_EQUATION_ALPHA           0x883D
+#define GL_VERTEX_ATTRIB_ARRAY_NORMALIZED 0x886A
+#define GL_FRAGMENT_SHADER                0x8B30
+#define GL_VERTEX_SHADER                  0x8B31
+#define GL_COMPILE_STATUS                 0x8B81
+#define GL_LINK_STATUS                    0x8B82
+#define GL_INFO_LOG_LENGTH                0x8B84
+#define GL_CURRENT_PROGRAM                0x8B8D
+#define GL_UPPER_LEFT                     0x8CA2
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLBLENDEQUATIONSEPARATEPROC) (GLenum modeRGB, GLenum modeAlpha);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLATTACHSHADERPROC) (GLuint program, GLuint shader);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLCOMPILESHADERPROC) (GLuint shader);
+typedef GLuint (APIENTRYP PFNGLCREATEPROGRAMPROC) (void);
+typedef GLuint (APIENTRYP PFNGLCREATESHADERPROC) (GLenum type);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLDELETEPROGRAMPROC) (GLuint program);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLDELETESHADERPROC) (GLuint shader);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLDETACHSHADERPROC) (GLuint program, GLuint shader);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLDISABLEVERTEXATTRIBARRAYPROC) (GLuint index);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLENABLEVERTEXATTRIBARRAYPROC) (GLuint index);
+typedef GLint (APIENTRYP PFNGLGETATTRIBLOCATIONPROC) (GLuint program, const GLchar *name);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLGETPROGRAMIVPROC) (GLuint program, GLenum pname, GLint *params);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLGETPROGRAMINFOLOGPROC) (GLuint program, GLsizei bufSize, GLsizei *length, GLchar *infoLog);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLGETSHADERIVPROC) (GLuint shader, GLenum pname, GLint *params);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLGETSHADERINFOLOGPROC) (GLuint shader, GLsizei bufSize, GLsizei *length, GLchar *infoLog);
+typedef GLint (APIENTRYP PFNGLGETUNIFORMLOCATIONPROC) (GLuint program, const GLchar *name);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLGETVERTEXATTRIBIVPROC) (GLuint index, GLenum pname, GLint *params);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLGETVERTEXATTRIBPOINTERVPROC) (GLuint index, GLenum pname, void **pointer);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLLINKPROGRAMPROC) (GLuint program);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLSHADERSOURCEPROC) (GLuint shader, GLsizei count, const GLchar *const*string, const GLint *length);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLUSEPROGRAMPROC) (GLuint program);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLUNIFORM1IPROC) (GLint location, GLint v0);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLUNIFORMMATRIX4FVPROC) (GLint location, GLsizei count, GLboolean transpose, const GLfloat *value);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLVERTEXATTRIBPOINTERPROC) (GLuint index, GLint size, GLenum type, GLboolean normalized, GLsizei stride, const void *pointer);
+#ifdef GL_GLEXT_PROTOTYPES
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glBlendEquationSeparate (GLenum modeRGB, GLenum modeAlpha);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glAttachShader (GLuint program, GLuint shader);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glCompileShader (GLuint shader);
+GLAPI GLuint APIENTRY glCreateProgram (void);
+GLAPI GLuint APIENTRY glCreateShader (GLenum type);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glDeleteProgram (GLuint program);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glDeleteShader (GLuint shader);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glDetachShader (GLuint program, GLuint shader);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glDisableVertexAttribArray (GLuint index);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glEnableVertexAttribArray (GLuint index);
+GLAPI GLint APIENTRY glGetAttribLocation (GLuint program, const GLchar *name);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glGetProgramiv (GLuint program, GLenum pname, GLint *params);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glGetProgramInfoLog (GLuint program, GLsizei bufSize, GLsizei *length, GLchar *infoLog);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glGetShaderiv (GLuint shader, GLenum pname, GLint *params);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glGetShaderInfoLog (GLuint shader, GLsizei bufSize, GLsizei *length, GLchar *infoLog);
+GLAPI GLint APIENTRY glGetUniformLocation (GLuint program, const GLchar *name);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glGetVertexAttribiv (GLuint index, GLenum pname, GLint *params);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glGetVertexAttribPointerv (GLuint index, GLenum pname, void **pointer);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glLinkProgram (GLuint program);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glShaderSource (GLuint shader, GLsizei count, const GLchar *const*string, const GLint *length);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glUseProgram (GLuint program);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glUniform1i (GLint location, GLint v0);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glUniformMatrix4fv (GLint location, GLsizei count, GLboolean transpose, const GLfloat *value);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glVertexAttribPointer (GLuint index, GLint size, GLenum type, GLboolean normalized, GLsizei stride, const void *pointer);
+#endif
+#endif /* GL_VERSION_2_0 */
+#ifndef GL_VERSION_3_0
+typedef khronos_uint16_t GLhalf;
+#define GL_MAJOR_VERSION                  0x821B
+#define GL_MINOR_VERSION                  0x821C
+#define GL_NUM_EXTENSIONS                 0x821D
+#define GL_FRAMEBUFFER_SRGB               0x8DB9
+#define GL_VERTEX_ARRAY_BINDING           0x85B5
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLGETBOOLEANI_VPROC) (GLenum target, GLuint index, GLboolean *data);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLGETINTEGERI_VPROC) (GLenum target, GLuint index, GLint *data);
+typedef const GLubyte *(APIENTRYP PFNGLGETSTRINGIPROC) (GLenum name, GLuint index);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLBINDVERTEXARRAYPROC) (GLuint array);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLDELETEVERTEXARRAYSPROC) (GLsizei n, const GLuint *arrays);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLGENVERTEXARRAYSPROC) (GLsizei n, GLuint *arrays);
+#ifdef GL_GLEXT_PROTOTYPES
+GLAPI const GLubyte *APIENTRY glGetStringi (GLenum name, GLuint index);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glBindVertexArray (GLuint array);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glDeleteVertexArrays (GLsizei n, const GLuint *arrays);
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glGenVertexArrays (GLsizei n, GLuint *arrays);
+#endif
+#endif /* GL_VERSION_3_0 */
+#ifndef GL_VERSION_3_1
+#define GL_VERSION_3_1 1
+#define GL_PRIMITIVE_RESTART              0x8F9D
+#endif /* GL_VERSION_3_1 */
+#ifndef GL_VERSION_3_2
+#define GL_VERSION_3_2 1
+typedef struct __GLsync *GLsync;
+typedef khronos_uint64_t GLuint64;
+typedef khronos_int64_t GLint64;
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLDRAWELEMENTSBASEVERTEXPROC) (GLenum mode, GLsizei count, GLenum type, const void *indices, GLint basevertex);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLGETINTEGER64I_VPROC) (GLenum target, GLuint index, GLint64 *data);
+#ifdef GL_GLEXT_PROTOTYPES
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glDrawElementsBaseVertex (GLenum mode, GLsizei count, GLenum type, const void *indices, GLint basevertex);
+#endif
+#endif /* GL_VERSION_3_2 */
+#ifndef GL_VERSION_3_3
+#define GL_VERSION_3_3 1
+#define GL_SAMPLER_BINDING                0x8919
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLBINDSAMPLERPROC) (GLuint unit, GLuint sampler);
+#ifdef GL_GLEXT_PROTOTYPES
+GLAPI void APIENTRY glBindSampler (GLuint unit, GLuint sampler);
+#endif
+#endif /* GL_VERSION_3_3 */
+#ifndef GL_VERSION_4_1
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLGETFLOATI_VPROC) (GLenum target, GLuint index, GLfloat *data);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLGETDOUBLEI_VPROC) (GLenum target, GLuint index, GLdouble *data);
+#endif /* GL_VERSION_4_1 */
+#ifndef GL_VERSION_4_3
+typedef void (APIENTRY  *GLDEBUGPROC)(GLenum source,GLenum type,GLuint id,GLenum severity,GLsizei length,const GLchar *message,const void *userParam);
+#endif /* GL_VERSION_4_3 */
+#ifndef GL_VERSION_4_5
+#define GL_CLIP_ORIGIN                    0x935C
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLGETTRANSFORMFEEDBACKI_VPROC) (GLuint xfb, GLenum pname, GLuint index, GLint *param);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLGETTRANSFORMFEEDBACKI64_VPROC) (GLuint xfb, GLenum pname, GLuint index, GLint64 *param);
+#endif /* GL_VERSION_4_5 */
+#ifndef GL_ARB_bindless_texture
+typedef khronos_uint64_t GLuint64EXT;
+#endif /* GL_ARB_bindless_texture */
+#ifndef GL_ARB_cl_event
+struct _cl_context;
+struct _cl_event;
+#endif /* GL_ARB_cl_event */
+#ifndef GL_ARB_clip_control
+#define GL_ARB_clip_control 1
+#endif /* GL_ARB_clip_control */
+#ifndef GL_ARB_debug_output
+typedef void (APIENTRY  *GLDEBUGPROCARB)(GLenum source,GLenum type,GLuint id,GLenum severity,GLsizei length,const GLchar *message,const void *userParam);
+#endif /* GL_ARB_debug_output */
+#ifndef GL_EXT_EGL_image_storage
+typedef void *GLeglImageOES;
+#endif /* GL_EXT_EGL_image_storage */
+#ifndef GL_EXT_direct_state_access
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLGETFLOATI_VEXTPROC) (GLenum pname, GLuint index, GLfloat *params);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLGETDOUBLEI_VEXTPROC) (GLenum pname, GLuint index, GLdouble *params);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLGETPOINTERI_VEXTPROC) (GLenum pname, GLuint index, void **params);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLGETVERTEXARRAYINTEGERI_VEXTPROC) (GLuint vaobj, GLuint index, GLenum pname, GLint *param);
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLGETVERTEXARRAYPOINTERI_VEXTPROC) (GLuint vaobj, GLuint index, GLenum pname, void **param);
+#endif /* GL_EXT_direct_state_access */
+#ifndef GL_NV_draw_vulkan_image
+typedef void (APIENTRY  *GLVULKANPROCNV)(void);
+#endif /* GL_NV_draw_vulkan_image */
+#ifndef GL_NV_gpu_shader5
+typedef khronos_int64_t GLint64EXT;
+#endif /* GL_NV_gpu_shader5 */
+#ifndef GL_NV_vertex_buffer_unified_memory
+typedef void (APIENTRYP PFNGLGETINTEGERUI64I_VNVPROC) (GLenum value, GLuint index, GLuint64EXT *result);
+#endif /* GL_NV_vertex_buffer_unified_memory */
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+}
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#ifndef GL3W_API
+#define GL3W_API
+#endif
+
+#ifndef __gl_h_
+#define __gl_h_
+#endif
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C" {
+#endif
+
+#define GL3W_OK 0
+#define GL3W_ERROR_INIT -1
+#define GL3W_ERROR_LIBRARY_OPEN -2
+#define GL3W_ERROR_OPENGL_VERSION -3
+
+typedef void (*GL3WglProc)(void);
+typedef GL3WglProc (*GL3WGetProcAddressProc)(const char *proc);
+
+/* gl3w api */
+GL3W_API int imgl3wInit(void);
+GL3W_API int imgl3wInit2(GL3WGetProcAddressProc proc);
+GL3W_API int imgl3wIsSupported(int major, int minor);
+GL3W_API GL3WglProc imgl3wGetProcAddress(const char *proc);
+
+/* gl3w internal state */
+union GL3WProcs {
+    GL3WglProc ptr[58];
+    struct {
+        PFNGLACTIVETEXTUREPROC            ActiveTexture;
+        PFNGLATTACHSHADERPROC             AttachShader;
+        PFNGLBINDBUFFERPROC               BindBuffer;
+        PFNGLBINDSAMPLERPROC              BindSampler;
+        PFNGLBINDTEXTUREPROC              BindTexture;
+        PFNGLBINDVERTEXARRAYPROC          BindVertexArray;
+        PFNGLBLENDEQUATIONPROC            BlendEquation;
+        PFNGLBLENDEQUATIONSEPARATEPROC    BlendEquationSeparate;
+        PFNGLBLENDFUNCSEPARATEPROC        BlendFuncSeparate;
+        PFNGLBUFFERDATAPROC               BufferData;
+        PFNGLBUFFERSUBDATAPROC            BufferSubData;
+        PFNGLCLEARPROC                    Clear;
+        PFNGLCLEARCOLORPROC               ClearColor;
+        PFNGLCOMPILESHADERPROC            CompileShader;
+        PFNGLCREATEPROGRAMPROC            CreateProgram;
+        PFNGLCREATESHADERPROC             CreateShader;
+        PFNGLDELETEBUFFERSPROC            DeleteBuffers;
+        PFNGLDELETEPROGRAMPROC            DeleteProgram;
+        PFNGLDELETESHADERPROC             DeleteShader;
+        PFNGLDELETETEXTURESPROC           DeleteTextures;
+        PFNGLDELETEVERTEXARRAYSPROC       DeleteVertexArrays;
+        PFNGLDETACHSHADERPROC             DetachShader;
+        PFNGLDISABLEPROC                  Disable;
+        PFNGLDISABLEVERTEXATTRIBARRAYPROC DisableVertexAttribArray;
+        PFNGLDRAWELEMENTSPROC             DrawElements;
+        PFNGLDRAWELEMENTSBASEVERTEXPROC   DrawElementsBaseVertex;
+        PFNGLENABLEPROC                   Enable;
+        PFNGLENABLEVERTEXATTRIBARRAYPROC  EnableVertexAttribArray;
+        PFNGLFLUSHPROC                    Flush;
+        PFNGLGENBUFFERSPROC               GenBuffers;
+        PFNGLGENTEXTURESPROC              GenTextures;
+        PFNGLGENVERTEXARRAYSPROC          GenVertexArrays;
+        PFNGLGETATTRIBLOCATIONPROC        GetAttribLocation;
+        PFNGLGETERRORPROC                 GetError;
+        PFNGLGETINTEGERVPROC              GetIntegerv;
+        PFNGLGETPROGRAMINFOLOGPROC        GetProgramInfoLog;
+        PFNGLGETPROGRAMIVPROC             GetProgramiv;
+        PFNGLGETSHADERINFOLOGPROC         GetShaderInfoLog;
+        PFNGLGETSHADERIVPROC              GetShaderiv;
+        PFNGLGETSTRINGPROC                GetString;
+        PFNGLGETSTRINGIPROC               GetStringi;
+        PFNGLGETUNIFORMLOCATIONPROC       GetUniformLocation;
+        PFNGLGETVERTEXATTRIBPOINTERVPROC  GetVertexAttribPointerv;
+        PFNGLGETVERTEXATTRIBIVPROC        GetVertexAttribiv;
+        PFNGLISENABLEDPROC                IsEnabled;
+        PFNGLLINKPROGRAMPROC              LinkProgram;
+        PFNGLPIXELSTOREIPROC              PixelStorei;
+        PFNGLPOLYGONMODEPROC              PolygonMode;
+        PFNGLREADPIXELSPROC               ReadPixels;
+        PFNGLSCISSORPROC                  Scissor;
+        PFNGLSHADERSOURCEPROC             ShaderSource;
+        PFNGLTEXIMAGE2DPROC               TexImage2D;
+        PFNGLTEXPARAMETERIPROC            TexParameteri;
+        PFNGLUNIFORM1IPROC                Uniform1i;
+        PFNGLUNIFORMMATRIX4FVPROC         UniformMatrix4fv;
+        PFNGLUSEPROGRAMPROC               UseProgram;
+        PFNGLVERTEXATTRIBPOINTERPROC      VertexAttribPointer;
+        PFNGLVIEWPORTPROC                 Viewport;
+    } gl;
+};
+
+GL3W_API extern union GL3WProcs imgl3wProcs;
+
+/* OpenGL functions */
+#define glActiveTexture                   imgl3wProcs.gl.ActiveTexture
+#define glAttachShader                    imgl3wProcs.gl.AttachShader
+#define glBindBuffer                      imgl3wProcs.gl.BindBuffer
+#define glBindSampler                     imgl3wProcs.gl.BindSampler
+#define glBindTexture                     imgl3wProcs.gl.BindTexture
+#define glBindVertexArray                 imgl3wProcs.gl.BindVertexArray
+#define glBlendEquation                   imgl3wProcs.gl.BlendEquation
+#define glBlendEquationSeparate           imgl3wProcs.gl.BlendEquationSeparate
+#define glBlendFuncSeparate               imgl3wProcs.gl.BlendFuncSeparate
+#define glBufferData                      imgl3wProcs.gl.BufferData
+#define glBufferSubData                   imgl3wProcs.gl.BufferSubData
+#define glClear                           imgl3wProcs.gl.Clear
+#define glClearColor                      imgl3wProcs.gl.ClearColor
+#define glCompileShader                   imgl3wProcs.gl.CompileShader
+#define glCreateProgram                   imgl3wProcs.gl.CreateProgram
+#define glCreateShader                    imgl3wProcs.gl.CreateShader
+#define glDeleteBuffers                   imgl3wProcs.gl.DeleteBuffers
+#define glDeleteProgram                   imgl3wProcs.gl.DeleteProgram
+#define glDeleteShader                    imgl3wProcs.gl.DeleteShader
+#define glDeleteTextures                  imgl3wProcs.gl.DeleteTextures
+#define glDeleteVertexArrays              imgl3wProcs.gl.DeleteVertexArrays
+#define glDetachShader                    imgl3wProcs.gl.DetachShader
+#define glDisable                         imgl3wProcs.gl.Disable
+#define glDisableVertexAttribArray        imgl3wProcs.gl.DisableVertexAttribArray
+#define glDrawElements                    imgl3wProcs.gl.DrawElements
+#define glDrawElementsBaseVertex          imgl3wProcs.gl.DrawElementsBaseVertex
+#define glEnable                          imgl3wProcs.gl.Enable
+#define glEnableVertexAttribArray         imgl3wProcs.gl.EnableVertexAttribArray
+#define glFlush                           imgl3wProcs.gl.Flush
+#define glGenBuffers                      imgl3wProcs.gl.GenBuffers
+#define glGenTextures                     imgl3wProcs.gl.GenTextures
+#define glGenVertexArrays                 imgl3wProcs.gl.GenVertexArrays
+#define glGetAttribLocation               imgl3wProcs.gl.GetAttribLocation
+#define glGetError                        imgl3wProcs.gl.GetError
+#define glGetIntegerv                     imgl3wProcs.gl.GetIntegerv
+#define glGetProgramInfoLog               imgl3wProcs.gl.GetProgramInfoLog
+#define glGetProgramiv                    imgl3wProcs.gl.GetProgramiv
+#define glGetShaderInfoLog                imgl3wProcs.gl.GetShaderInfoLog
+#define glGetShaderiv                     imgl3wProcs.gl.GetShaderiv
+#define glGetString                       imgl3wProcs.gl.GetString
+#define glGetStringi                      imgl3wProcs.gl.GetStringi
+#define glGetUniformLocation              imgl3wProcs.gl.GetUniformLocation
+#define glGetVertexAttribPointerv         imgl3wProcs.gl.GetVertexAttribPointerv
+#define glGetVertexAttribiv               imgl3wProcs.gl.GetVertexAttribiv
+#define glIsEnabled                       imgl3wProcs.gl.IsEnabled
+#define glLinkProgram                     imgl3wProcs.gl.LinkProgram
+#define glPixelStorei                     imgl3wProcs.gl.PixelStorei
+#define glPolygonMode                     imgl3wProcs.gl.PolygonMode
+#define glReadPixels                      imgl3wProcs.gl.ReadPixels
+#define glScissor                         imgl3wProcs.gl.Scissor
+#define glShaderSource                    imgl3wProcs.gl.ShaderSource
+#define glTexImage2D                      imgl3wProcs.gl.TexImage2D
+#define glTexParameteri                   imgl3wProcs.gl.TexParameteri
+#define glUniform1i                       imgl3wProcs.gl.Uniform1i
+#define glUniformMatrix4fv                imgl3wProcs.gl.UniformMatrix4fv
+#define glUseProgram                      imgl3wProcs.gl.UseProgram
+#define glVertexAttribPointer             imgl3wProcs.gl.VertexAttribPointer
+#define glViewport                        imgl3wProcs.gl.Viewport
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
+#ifdef IMGL3W_IMPL
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C" {
+#endif
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+
+#define ARRAY_SIZE(x)  (sizeof(x) / sizeof((x)[0]))
+
+#if defined(_WIN32)
+#ifndef WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
+#define WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN 1
+#endif
+#include <windows.h>
+
+static HMODULE libgl;
+typedef PROC(__stdcall* GL3WglGetProcAddr)(LPCSTR);
+static GL3WglGetProcAddr wgl_get_proc_address;
+
+static int open_libgl(void)
+{
+    libgl = LoadLibraryA("opengl32.dll");
+    if (!libgl)
+        return GL3W_ERROR_LIBRARY_OPEN;
+    wgl_get_proc_address = (GL3WglGetProcAddr)GetProcAddress(libgl, "wglGetProcAddress");
+    return GL3W_OK;
+}
+
+static void close_libgl(void) { FreeLibrary(libgl); }
+static GL3WglProc get_proc(const char *proc)
+{
+    GL3WglProc res;
+    res = (GL3WglProc)wgl_get_proc_address(proc);
+    if (!res)
+        res = (GL3WglProc)GetProcAddress(libgl, proc);
+    return res;
+}
+#elif defined(__APPLE__)
+#include <dlfcn.h>
+
+static void *libgl;
+static int open_libgl(void)
+{
+    libgl = dlopen("/System/Library/Frameworks/OpenGL.framework/OpenGL", RTLD_LAZY | RTLD_LOCAL);
+    if (!libgl)
+        return GL3W_ERROR_LIBRARY_OPEN;
+    return GL3W_OK;
+}
+
+static void close_libgl(void) { dlclose(libgl); }
+
+static GL3WglProc get_proc(const char *proc)
+{
+    GL3WglProc res;
+    *(void **)(&res) = dlsym(libgl, proc);
+    return res;
+}
+#else
+#include <dlfcn.h>
+
+static void *libgl;
+static GL3WglProc (*glx_get_proc_address)(const GLubyte *);
+
+static int open_libgl(void)
+{
+    libgl = dlopen("libGL.so.1", RTLD_LAZY | RTLD_LOCAL);
+    if (!libgl)
+        return GL3W_ERROR_LIBRARY_OPEN;
+    *(void **)(&glx_get_proc_address) = dlsym(libgl, "glXGetProcAddressARB");
+    return GL3W_OK;
+}
+
+static void close_libgl(void) { dlclose(libgl); }
+
+static GL3WglProc get_proc(const char *proc)
+{
+    GL3WglProc res;
+    res = glx_get_proc_address((const GLubyte *)proc);
+    if (!res)
+        *(void **)(&res) = dlsym(libgl, proc);
+    return res;
+}
+#endif
+
+static struct { int major, minor; } version;
+
+static int parse_version(void)
+{
+    if (!glGetIntegerv)
+        return GL3W_ERROR_INIT;
+    glGetIntegerv(GL_MAJOR_VERSION, &version.major);
+    glGetIntegerv(GL_MINOR_VERSION, &version.minor);
+    if (version.major < 3)
+        return GL3W_ERROR_OPENGL_VERSION;
+    return GL3W_OK;
+}
+
+static void load_procs(GL3WGetProcAddressProc proc);
+
+int imgl3wInit(void)
+{
+    int res = open_libgl();
+    if (res)
+        return res;
+    atexit(close_libgl);
+    return imgl3wInit2(get_proc);
+}
+
+int imgl3wInit2(GL3WGetProcAddressProc proc)
+{
+    load_procs(proc);
+    return parse_version();
+}
+
+int imgl3wIsSupported(int major, int minor)
+{
+    if (major < 3)
+        return 0;
+    if (version.major == major)
+        return version.minor >= minor;
+    return version.major >= major;
+}
+
+GL3WglProc imgl3wGetProcAddress(const char *proc) { return get_proc(proc); }
+
+static const char *proc_names[] = {
+    "glActiveTexture",
+    "glAttachShader",
+    "glBindBuffer",
+    "glBindSampler",
+    "glBindTexture",
+    "glBindVertexArray",
+    "glBlendEquation",
+    "glBlendEquationSeparate",
+    "glBlendFuncSeparate",
+    "glBufferData",
+    "glBufferSubData",
+    "glClear",
+    "glClearColor",
+    "glCompileShader",
+    "glCreateProgram",
+    "glCreateShader",
+    "glDeleteBuffers",
+    "glDeleteProgram",
+    "glDeleteShader",
+    "glDeleteTextures",
+    "glDeleteVertexArrays",
+    "glDetachShader",
+    "glDisable",
+    "glDisableVertexAttribArray",
+    "glDrawElements",
+    "glDrawElementsBaseVertex",
+    "glEnable",
+    "glEnableVertexAttribArray",
+    "glFlush",
+    "glGenBuffers",
+    "glGenTextures",
+    "glGenVertexArrays",
+    "glGetAttribLocation",
+    "glGetError",
+    "glGetIntegerv",
+    "glGetProgramInfoLog",
+    "glGetProgramiv",
+    "glGetShaderInfoLog",
+    "glGetShaderiv",
+    "glGetString",
+    "glGetStringi",
+    "glGetUniformLocation",
+    "glGetVertexAttribPointerv",
+    "glGetVertexAttribiv",
+    "glIsEnabled",
+    "glLinkProgram",
+    "glPixelStorei",
+    "glPolygonMode",
+    "glReadPixels",
+    "glScissor",
+    "glShaderSource",
+    "glTexImage2D",
+    "glTexParameteri",
+    "glUniform1i",
+    "glUniformMatrix4fv",
+    "glUseProgram",
+    "glVertexAttribPointer",
+    "glViewport",
+};
+
+GL3W_API union GL3WProcs imgl3wProcs;
+
+static void load_procs(GL3WGetProcAddressProc proc)
+{
+    size_t i;
+    for (i = 0; i < ARRAY_SIZE(proc_names); i++)
+        imgl3wProcs.ptr[i] = proc(proc_names[i]);
+}
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+}
+#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/dependencies/include/imgui/imgui_impl_sdl.h b/dependencies/include/imgui/imgui_impl_sdl.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9275541
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/imgui/imgui_impl_sdl.h
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+// dear imgui: Platform Backend for SDL2
+// This needs to be used along with a Renderer (e.g. DirectX11, OpenGL3, Vulkan..)
+// (Info: SDL2 is a cross-platform general purpose library for handling windows, inputs, graphics context creation, etc.)
+
+// Implemented features:
+//  [X] Platform: Clipboard support.
+//  [X] Platform: Keyboard support. Since 1.87 we are using the io.AddKeyEvent() function. Pass ImGuiKey values to all key functions e.g. ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Space). [Legacy SDL_SCANCODE_* values will also be supported unless IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO is set]
+//  [X] Platform: Gamepad support. Enabled with 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad'.
+//  [X] Platform: Mouse cursor shape and visibility. Disable with 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouseCursorChange'.
+//  [X] Platform: Multi-viewport support (multiple windows). Enable with 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable'.
+// Missing features:
+//  [ ] Platform: SDL2 handling of IME under Windows appears to be broken and it explicitly disable the regular Windows IME. You can restore Windows IME by compiling SDL with SDL_DISABLE_WINDOWS_IME.
+//  [ ] Platform: Multi-viewport + Minimized windows seems to break mouse wheel events (at least under Windows).
+
+// You can use unmodified imgui_impl_* files in your project. See examples/ folder for examples of using this.
+// Prefer including the entire imgui/ repository into your project (either as a copy or as a submodule), and only build the backends you need.
+// If you are new to Dear ImGui, read documentation from the docs/ folder + read the top of imgui.cpp.
+// Read online: https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/tree/master/docs
+
+#pragma once
+#include "imgui.h"      // IMGUI_IMPL_API
+
+struct SDL_Window;
+struct SDL_Renderer;
+typedef union SDL_Event SDL_Event;
+
+IMGUI_IMPL_API bool     ImGui_ImplSDL2_InitForOpenGL(SDL_Window* window, void* sdl_gl_context);
+IMGUI_IMPL_API bool     ImGui_ImplSDL2_InitForVulkan(SDL_Window* window);
+IMGUI_IMPL_API bool     ImGui_ImplSDL2_InitForD3D(SDL_Window* window);
+IMGUI_IMPL_API bool     ImGui_ImplSDL2_InitForMetal(SDL_Window* window);
+IMGUI_IMPL_API bool     ImGui_ImplSDL2_InitForSDLRenderer(SDL_Window* window, SDL_Renderer* renderer);
+IMGUI_IMPL_API void     ImGui_ImplSDL2_Shutdown();
+IMGUI_IMPL_API void     ImGui_ImplSDL2_NewFrame();
+IMGUI_IMPL_API bool     ImGui_ImplSDL2_ProcessEvent(const SDL_Event* event);
+
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+static inline void ImGui_ImplSDL2_NewFrame(SDL_Window*) { ImGui_ImplSDL2_NewFrame(); } // 1.84: removed unnecessary parameter
+#endif
diff --git a/dependencies/include/imgui/imgui_internal.h b/dependencies/include/imgui/imgui_internal.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f168440
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/imgui/imgui_internal.h
@@ -0,0 +1,3285 @@
+// dear imgui, v1.89 WIP
+// (internal structures/api)
+
+// You may use this file to debug, understand or extend ImGui features but we don't provide any guarantee of forward compatibility!
+// Set:
+//   #define IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS
+// To implement maths operators for ImVec2 (disabled by default to not collide with using IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA along with your own math types+operators)
+
+/*
+
+Index of this file:
+
+// [SECTION] Header mess
+// [SECTION] Forward declarations
+// [SECTION] Context pointer
+// [SECTION] STB libraries includes
+// [SECTION] Macros
+// [SECTION] Generic helpers
+// [SECTION] ImDrawList support
+// [SECTION] Widgets support: flags, enums, data structures
+// [SECTION] Inputs support
+// [SECTION] Clipper support
+// [SECTION] Navigation support
+// [SECTION] Columns support
+// [SECTION] Multi-select support
+// [SECTION] Docking support
+// [SECTION] Viewport support
+// [SECTION] Settings support
+// [SECTION] Metrics, Debug tools
+// [SECTION] Generic context hooks
+// [SECTION] ImGuiContext (main imgui context)
+// [SECTION] ImGuiWindowTempData, ImGuiWindow
+// [SECTION] Tab bar, Tab item support
+// [SECTION] Table support
+// [SECTION] ImGui internal API
+// [SECTION] ImFontAtlas internal API
+// [SECTION] Test Engine specific hooks (imgui_test_engine)
+
+*/
+
+#pragma once
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Header mess
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#ifndef IMGUI_VERSION
+#include "imgui.h"
+#endif
+
+#include <stdio.h>      // FILE*, sscanf
+#include <stdlib.h>     // NULL, malloc, free, qsort, atoi, atof
+#include <math.h>       // sqrtf, fabsf, fmodf, powf, floorf, ceilf, cosf, sinf
+#include <limits.h>     // INT_MIN, INT_MAX
+
+// Enable SSE intrinsics if available
+#if (defined __SSE__ || defined __x86_64__ || defined _M_X64) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_SSE)
+#define IMGUI_ENABLE_SSE
+#include <immintrin.h>
+#endif
+
+// Visual Studio warnings
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+#pragma warning (push)
+#pragma warning (disable: 4251)     // class 'xxx' needs to have dll-interface to be used by clients of struct 'xxx' // when IMGUI_API is set to__declspec(dllexport)
+#pragma warning (disable: 26812)    // The enum type 'xxx' is unscoped. Prefer 'enum class' over 'enum' (Enum.3). [MSVC Static Analyzer)
+#pragma warning (disable: 26495)    // [Static Analyzer] Variable 'XXX' is uninitialized. Always initialize a member variable (type.6).
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER >= 1922 // MSVC 2019 16.2 or later
+#pragma warning (disable: 5054)     // operator '|': deprecated between enumerations of different types
+#endif
+#endif
+
+// Clang/GCC warnings with -Weverything
+#if defined(__clang__)
+#pragma clang diagnostic push
+#if __has_warning("-Wunknown-warning-option")
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-warning-option"         // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx'
+#endif
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-pragmas"                // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx'
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wfloat-equal"                    // warning: comparing floating point with == or != is unsafe // storing and comparing against same constants ok, for ImFloorSigned()
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunused-function"                // for stb_textedit.h
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wmissing-prototypes"             // for stb_textedit.h
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast"
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant"
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion"
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wimplicit-int-float-conversion"  // warning: implicit conversion from 'xxx' to 'float' may lose precision
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wmissing-noreturn"               // warning: function 'xxx' could be declared with attribute 'noreturn'
+#elif defined(__GNUC__)
+#pragma GCC diagnostic push
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wpragmas"              // warning: unknown option after '#pragma GCC diagnostic' kind
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wclass-memaccess"      // [__GNUC__ >= 8] warning: 'memset/memcpy' clearing/writing an object of type 'xxxx' with no trivial copy-assignment; use assignment or value-initialization instead
+#endif
+
+// Legacy defines
+#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_FORMAT_STRING_FUNCTIONS            // Renamed in 1.74
+#error Use IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FORMAT_FUNCTIONS
+#endif
+#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_MATH_FUNCTIONS                     // Renamed in 1.74
+#error Use IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_MATH_FUNCTIONS
+#endif
+
+// Enable stb_truetype by default unless FreeType is enabled.
+// You can compile with both by defining both IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE and IMGUI_ENABLE_STB_TRUETYPE together.
+#ifndef IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE
+#define IMGUI_ENABLE_STB_TRUETYPE
+#endif
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Forward declarations
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+struct ImBitVector;                 // Store 1-bit per value
+struct ImRect;                      // An axis-aligned rectangle (2 points)
+struct ImDrawDataBuilder;           // Helper to build a ImDrawData instance
+struct ImDrawListSharedData;        // Data shared between all ImDrawList instances
+struct ImGuiColorMod;               // Stacked color modifier, backup of modified data so we can restore it
+struct ImGuiContext;                // Main Dear ImGui context
+struct ImGuiContextHook;            // Hook for extensions like ImGuiTestEngine
+struct ImGuiDataTypeInfo;           // Type information associated to a ImGuiDataType enum
+struct ImGuiDockContext;            // Docking system context
+struct ImGuiDockRequest;            // Docking system dock/undock queued request
+struct ImGuiDockNode;               // Docking system node (hold a list of Windows OR two child dock nodes)
+struct ImGuiDockNodeSettings;       // Storage for a dock node in .ini file (we preserve those even if the associated dock node isn't active during the session)
+struct ImGuiGroupData;              // Stacked storage data for BeginGroup()/EndGroup()
+struct ImGuiInputTextState;         // Internal state of the currently focused/edited text input box
+struct ImGuiLastItemData;           // Status storage for last submitted items
+struct ImGuiMenuColumns;            // Simple column measurement, currently used for MenuItem() only
+struct ImGuiNavItemData;            // Result of a gamepad/keyboard directional navigation move query result
+struct ImGuiMetricsConfig;          // Storage for ShowMetricsWindow() and DebugNodeXXX() functions
+struct ImGuiNextWindowData;         // Storage for SetNextWindow** functions
+struct ImGuiNextItemData;           // Storage for SetNextItem** functions
+struct ImGuiOldColumnData;          // Storage data for a single column for legacy Columns() api
+struct ImGuiOldColumns;             // Storage data for a columns set for legacy Columns() api
+struct ImGuiPopupData;              // Storage for current popup stack
+struct ImGuiSettingsHandler;        // Storage for one type registered in the .ini file
+struct ImGuiStackSizes;             // Storage of stack sizes for debugging/asserting
+struct ImGuiStyleMod;               // Stacked style modifier, backup of modified data so we can restore it
+struct ImGuiTabBar;                 // Storage for a tab bar
+struct ImGuiTabItem;                // Storage for a tab item (within a tab bar)
+struct ImGuiTable;                  // Storage for a table
+struct ImGuiTableColumn;            // Storage for one column of a table
+struct ImGuiTableInstanceData;      // Storage for one instance of a same table
+struct ImGuiTableTempData;          // Temporary storage for one table (one per table in the stack), shared between tables.
+struct ImGuiTableSettings;          // Storage for a table .ini settings
+struct ImGuiTableColumnsSettings;   // Storage for a column .ini settings
+struct ImGuiWindow;                 // Storage for one window
+struct ImGuiWindowTempData;         // Temporary storage for one window (that's the data which in theory we could ditch at the end of the frame, in practice we currently keep it for each window)
+struct ImGuiWindowSettings;         // Storage for a window .ini settings (we keep one of those even if the actual window wasn't instanced during this session)
+
+// Use your programming IDE "Go to definition" facility on the names of the center columns to find the actual flags/enum lists.
+typedef int ImGuiDataAuthority;         // -> enum ImGuiDataAuthority_      // Enum: for storing the source authority (dock node vs window) of a field
+typedef int ImGuiLayoutType;            // -> enum ImGuiLayoutType_         // Enum: Horizontal or vertical
+typedef int ImGuiActivateFlags;         // -> enum ImGuiActivateFlags_      // Flags: for navigation/focus function (will be for ActivateItem() later)
+typedef int ImGuiDebugLogFlags;         // -> enum ImGuiDebugLogFlags_      // Flags: for ShowDebugLogWindow(), g.DebugLogFlags
+typedef int ImGuiInputReadFlags;        // -> enum ImGuiInputReadFlags_     // Flags: for IsKeyPressedEx()
+typedef int ImGuiItemFlags;             // -> enum ImGuiItemFlags_          // Flags: for PushItemFlag()
+typedef int ImGuiItemStatusFlags;       // -> enum ImGuiItemStatusFlags_    // Flags: for DC.LastItemStatusFlags
+typedef int ImGuiOldColumnFlags;        // -> enum ImGuiOldColumnFlags_     // Flags: for BeginColumns()
+typedef int ImGuiNavHighlightFlags;     // -> enum ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_  // Flags: for RenderNavHighlight()
+typedef int ImGuiNavMoveFlags;          // -> enum ImGuiNavMoveFlags_       // Flags: for navigation requests
+typedef int ImGuiNextItemDataFlags;     // -> enum ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_  // Flags: for SetNextItemXXX() functions
+typedef int ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags;   // -> enum ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_// Flags: for SetNextWindowXXX() functions
+typedef int ImGuiScrollFlags;           // -> enum ImGuiScrollFlags_        // Flags: for ScrollToItem() and navigation requests
+typedef int ImGuiSeparatorFlags;        // -> enum ImGuiSeparatorFlags_     // Flags: for SeparatorEx()
+typedef int ImGuiTextFlags;             // -> enum ImGuiTextFlags_          // Flags: for TextEx()
+typedef int ImGuiTooltipFlags;          // -> enum ImGuiTooltipFlags_       // Flags: for BeginTooltipEx()
+
+typedef void (*ImGuiErrorLogCallback)(void* user_data, const char* fmt, ...);
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Context pointer
+// See implementation of this variable in imgui.cpp for comments and details.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#ifndef GImGui
+extern IMGUI_API ImGuiContext* GImGui;  // Current implicit context pointer
+#endif
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] STB libraries includes
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+namespace ImStb
+{
+
+#undef STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING
+#undef STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING             ImGuiInputTextState
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE           ImWchar
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE   (-1.0f)
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT     99
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT      999
+#include "imstb_textedit.h"
+
+} // namespace ImStb
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Macros
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Internal Drag and Drop payload types. String starting with '_' are reserved for Dear ImGui.
+#define IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_WINDOW       "_IMWINDOW"     // Payload == ImGuiWindow*
+
+// Debug Printing Into TTY
+// (since IMGUI_VERSION_NUM >= 18729: IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG was reworked into IMGUI_DEBUG_PRINTF (and removed framecount from it). If you were using a #define IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG please rename)
+#ifndef IMGUI_DEBUG_PRINTF
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FORMAT_FUNCTIONS
+#define IMGUI_DEBUG_PRINTF(_FMT,...)    printf(_FMT, __VA_ARGS__)
+#else
+#define IMGUI_DEBUG_PRINTF(_FMT,...)
+#endif
+#endif
+
+// Debug Logging for ShowDebugLogWindow(). This is designed for relatively rare events so please don't spam.
+#define IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG(...)            ImGui::DebugLog(__VA_ARGS__);
+#define IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_ACTIVEID(...)   do { if (g.DebugLogFlags & ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventActiveId) IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG(__VA_ARGS__); } while (0)
+#define IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_FOCUS(...)      do { if (g.DebugLogFlags & ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventFocus)    IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG(__VA_ARGS__); } while (0)
+#define IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_POPUP(...)      do { if (g.DebugLogFlags & ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventPopup)    IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG(__VA_ARGS__); } while (0)
+#define IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_NAV(...)        do { if (g.DebugLogFlags & ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventNav)      IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG(__VA_ARGS__); } while (0)
+#define IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_IO(...)         do { if (g.DebugLogFlags & ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventIO)       IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG(__VA_ARGS__); } while (0)
+#define IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_DOCKING(...)    do { if (g.DebugLogFlags & ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventDocking)  IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG(__VA_ARGS__); } while (0)
+#define IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_VIEWPORT(...)   do { if (g.DebugLogFlags & ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventViewport) IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG(__VA_ARGS__); } while (0)
+
+// Static Asserts
+#define IM_STATIC_ASSERT(_COND)         static_assert(_COND, "")
+
+// "Paranoid" Debug Asserts are meant to only be enabled during specific debugging/work, otherwise would slow down the code too much.
+// We currently don't have many of those so the effect is currently negligible, but onward intent to add more aggressive ones in the code.
+//#define IMGUI_DEBUG_PARANOID
+#ifdef IMGUI_DEBUG_PARANOID
+#define IM_ASSERT_PARANOID(_EXPR)       IM_ASSERT(_EXPR)
+#else
+#define IM_ASSERT_PARANOID(_EXPR)
+#endif
+
+// Error handling
+// Down the line in some frameworks/languages we would like to have a way to redirect those to the programmer and recover from more faults.
+#ifndef IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR
+#define IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(_EXP,_MSG) IM_ASSERT((_EXP) && _MSG)   // Recoverable User Error
+#endif
+
+// Misc Macros
+#define IM_PI                           3.14159265358979323846f
+#ifdef _WIN32
+#define IM_NEWLINE                      "\r\n"   // Play it nice with Windows users (Update: since 2018-05, Notepad finally appears to support Unix-style carriage returns!)
+#else
+#define IM_NEWLINE                      "\n"
+#endif
+#define IM_TABSIZE                      (4)
+#define IM_MEMALIGN(_OFF,_ALIGN)        (((_OFF) + ((_ALIGN) - 1)) & ~((_ALIGN) - 1))           // Memory align e.g. IM_ALIGN(0,4)=0, IM_ALIGN(1,4)=4, IM_ALIGN(4,4)=4, IM_ALIGN(5,4)=8
+#define IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(_VAL)    ((int)((_VAL) * 255.0f + ((_VAL)>=0 ? 0.5f : -0.5f)))   // Unsaturated, for display purpose
+#define IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(_VAL)        ((int)(ImSaturate(_VAL) * 255.0f + 0.5f))               // Saturated, always output 0..255
+#define IM_FLOOR(_VAL)                  ((float)(int)(_VAL))                                    // ImFloor() is not inlined in MSVC debug builds
+#define IM_ROUND(_VAL)                  ((float)(int)((_VAL) + 0.5f))                           //
+
+// Enforce cdecl calling convention for functions called by the standard library, in case compilation settings changed the default to e.g. __vectorcall
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+#define IMGUI_CDECL __cdecl
+#else
+#define IMGUI_CDECL
+#endif
+
+// Warnings
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(__clang__)
+#define IM_MSVC_WARNING_SUPPRESS(XXXX)  __pragma(warning(suppress: XXXX))
+#else
+#define IM_MSVC_WARNING_SUPPRESS(XXXX)
+#endif
+
+// Debug Tools
+// Use 'Metrics/Debugger->Tools->Item Picker' to break into the call-stack of a specific item.
+// This will call IM_DEBUG_BREAK() which you may redefine yourself. See https://github.com/scottt/debugbreak for more reference.
+#ifndef IM_DEBUG_BREAK
+#if defined (_MSC_VER)
+#define IM_DEBUG_BREAK()    __debugbreak()
+#elif defined(__clang__)
+#define IM_DEBUG_BREAK()    __builtin_debugtrap()
+#elif defined(__GNUC__) && (defined(__i386__) || defined(__x86_64__))
+#define IM_DEBUG_BREAK()    __asm__ volatile("int $0x03")
+#elif defined(__GNUC__) && defined(__thumb__)
+#define IM_DEBUG_BREAK()    __asm__ volatile(".inst 0xde01")
+#elif defined(__GNUC__) && defined(__arm__) && !defined(__thumb__)
+#define IM_DEBUG_BREAK()    __asm__ volatile(".inst 0xe7f001f0");
+#else
+#define IM_DEBUG_BREAK()    IM_ASSERT(0)    // It is expected that you define IM_DEBUG_BREAK() into something that will break nicely in a debugger!
+#endif
+#endif // #ifndef IM_DEBUG_BREAK
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Generic helpers
+// Note that the ImXXX helpers functions are lower-level than ImGui functions.
+// ImGui functions or the ImGui context are never called/used from other ImXXX functions.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - Helpers: Hashing
+// - Helpers: Sorting
+// - Helpers: Bit manipulation
+// - Helpers: String
+// - Helpers: Formatting
+// - Helpers: UTF-8 <> wchar conversions
+// - Helpers: ImVec2/ImVec4 operators
+// - Helpers: Maths
+// - Helpers: Geometry
+// - Helper: ImVec1
+// - Helper: ImVec2ih
+// - Helper: ImRect
+// - Helper: ImBitArray
+// - Helper: ImBitVector
+// - Helper: ImSpan<>, ImSpanAllocator<>
+// - Helper: ImPool<>
+// - Helper: ImChunkStream<>
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Helpers: Hashing
+IMGUI_API ImGuiID       ImHashData(const void* data, size_t data_size, ImU32 seed = 0);
+IMGUI_API ImGuiID       ImHashStr(const char* data, size_t data_size = 0, ImU32 seed = 0);
+
+// Helpers: Sorting
+#ifndef ImQsort
+static inline void      ImQsort(void* base, size_t count, size_t size_of_element, int(IMGUI_CDECL *compare_func)(void const*, void const*)) { if (count > 1) qsort(base, count, size_of_element, compare_func); }
+#endif
+
+// Helpers: Color Blending
+IMGUI_API ImU32         ImAlphaBlendColors(ImU32 col_a, ImU32 col_b);
+
+// Helpers: Bit manipulation
+static inline bool      ImIsPowerOfTwo(int v)           { return v != 0 && (v & (v - 1)) == 0; }
+static inline bool      ImIsPowerOfTwo(ImU64 v)         { return v != 0 && (v & (v - 1)) == 0; }
+static inline int       ImUpperPowerOfTwo(int v)        { v--; v |= v >> 1; v |= v >> 2; v |= v >> 4; v |= v >> 8; v |= v >> 16; v++; return v; }
+
+// Helpers: String
+IMGUI_API int           ImStricmp(const char* str1, const char* str2);
+IMGUI_API int           ImStrnicmp(const char* str1, const char* str2, size_t count);
+IMGUI_API void          ImStrncpy(char* dst, const char* src, size_t count);
+IMGUI_API char*         ImStrdup(const char* str);
+IMGUI_API char*         ImStrdupcpy(char* dst, size_t* p_dst_size, const char* str);
+IMGUI_API const char*   ImStrchrRange(const char* str_begin, const char* str_end, char c);
+IMGUI_API int           ImStrlenW(const ImWchar* str);
+IMGUI_API const char*   ImStreolRange(const char* str, const char* str_end);                // End end-of-line
+IMGUI_API const ImWchar*ImStrbolW(const ImWchar* buf_mid_line, const ImWchar* buf_begin);   // Find beginning-of-line
+IMGUI_API const char*   ImStristr(const char* haystack, const char* haystack_end, const char* needle, const char* needle_end);
+IMGUI_API void          ImStrTrimBlanks(char* str);
+IMGUI_API const char*   ImStrSkipBlank(const char* str);
+static inline bool      ImCharIsBlankA(char c)          { return c == ' ' || c == '\t'; }
+static inline bool      ImCharIsBlankW(unsigned int c)  { return c == ' ' || c == '\t' || c == 0x3000; }
+
+// Helpers: Formatting
+IMGUI_API int           ImFormatString(char* buf, size_t buf_size, const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(3);
+IMGUI_API int           ImFormatStringV(char* buf, size_t buf_size, const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(3);
+IMGUI_API void          ImFormatStringToTempBuffer(const char** out_buf, const char** out_buf_end, const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(3);
+IMGUI_API void          ImFormatStringToTempBufferV(const char** out_buf, const char** out_buf_end, const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(3);
+IMGUI_API const char*   ImParseFormatFindStart(const char* format);
+IMGUI_API const char*   ImParseFormatFindEnd(const char* format);
+IMGUI_API const char*   ImParseFormatTrimDecorations(const char* format, char* buf, size_t buf_size);
+IMGUI_API void          ImParseFormatSanitizeForPrinting(const char* fmt_in, char* fmt_out, size_t fmt_out_size);
+IMGUI_API const char*   ImParseFormatSanitizeForScanning(const char* fmt_in, char* fmt_out, size_t fmt_out_size);
+IMGUI_API int           ImParseFormatPrecision(const char* format, int default_value);
+
+// Helpers: UTF-8 <> wchar conversions
+IMGUI_API const char*   ImTextCharToUtf8(char out_buf[5], unsigned int c);                                                      // return out_buf
+IMGUI_API int           ImTextStrToUtf8(char* out_buf, int out_buf_size, const ImWchar* in_text, const ImWchar* in_text_end);   // return output UTF-8 bytes count
+IMGUI_API int           ImTextCharFromUtf8(unsigned int* out_char, const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end);               // read one character. return input UTF-8 bytes count
+IMGUI_API int           ImTextStrFromUtf8(ImWchar* out_buf, int out_buf_size, const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end, const char** in_remaining = NULL);   // return input UTF-8 bytes count
+IMGUI_API int           ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end);                                 // return number of UTF-8 code-points (NOT bytes count)
+IMGUI_API int           ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromChar(const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end);                             // return number of bytes to express one char in UTF-8
+IMGUI_API int           ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(const ImWchar* in_text, const ImWchar* in_text_end);                        // return number of bytes to express string in UTF-8
+
+// Helpers: ImVec2/ImVec4 operators
+// We are keeping those disabled by default so they don't leak in user space, to allow user enabling implicit cast operators between ImVec2 and their own types (using IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA etc.)
+// We unfortunately don't have a unary- operator for ImVec2 because this would needs to be defined inside the class itself.
+#ifdef IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS
+IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF
+static inline ImVec2 operator*(const ImVec2& lhs, const float rhs)              { return ImVec2(lhs.x * rhs, lhs.y * rhs); }
+static inline ImVec2 operator/(const ImVec2& lhs, const float rhs)              { return ImVec2(lhs.x / rhs, lhs.y / rhs); }
+static inline ImVec2 operator+(const ImVec2& lhs, const ImVec2& rhs)            { return ImVec2(lhs.x + rhs.x, lhs.y + rhs.y); }
+static inline ImVec2 operator-(const ImVec2& lhs, const ImVec2& rhs)            { return ImVec2(lhs.x - rhs.x, lhs.y - rhs.y); }
+static inline ImVec2 operator*(const ImVec2& lhs, const ImVec2& rhs)            { return ImVec2(lhs.x * rhs.x, lhs.y * rhs.y); }
+static inline ImVec2 operator/(const ImVec2& lhs, const ImVec2& rhs)            { return ImVec2(lhs.x / rhs.x, lhs.y / rhs.y); }
+static inline ImVec2& operator*=(ImVec2& lhs, const float rhs)                  { lhs.x *= rhs; lhs.y *= rhs; return lhs; }
+static inline ImVec2& operator/=(ImVec2& lhs, const float rhs)                  { lhs.x /= rhs; lhs.y /= rhs; return lhs; }
+static inline ImVec2& operator+=(ImVec2& lhs, const ImVec2& rhs)                { lhs.x += rhs.x; lhs.y += rhs.y; return lhs; }
+static inline ImVec2& operator-=(ImVec2& lhs, const ImVec2& rhs)                { lhs.x -= rhs.x; lhs.y -= rhs.y; return lhs; }
+static inline ImVec2& operator*=(ImVec2& lhs, const ImVec2& rhs)                { lhs.x *= rhs.x; lhs.y *= rhs.y; return lhs; }
+static inline ImVec2& operator/=(ImVec2& lhs, const ImVec2& rhs)                { lhs.x /= rhs.x; lhs.y /= rhs.y; return lhs; }
+static inline ImVec4 operator+(const ImVec4& lhs, const ImVec4& rhs)            { return ImVec4(lhs.x + rhs.x, lhs.y + rhs.y, lhs.z + rhs.z, lhs.w + rhs.w); }
+static inline ImVec4 operator-(const ImVec4& lhs, const ImVec4& rhs)            { return ImVec4(lhs.x - rhs.x, lhs.y - rhs.y, lhs.z - rhs.z, lhs.w - rhs.w); }
+static inline ImVec4 operator*(const ImVec4& lhs, const ImVec4& rhs)            { return ImVec4(lhs.x * rhs.x, lhs.y * rhs.y, lhs.z * rhs.z, lhs.w * rhs.w); }
+IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_RESTORE
+#endif
+
+// Helpers: File System
+#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_FILE_FUNCTIONS
+#define IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FILE_FUNCTIONS
+typedef void* ImFileHandle;
+static inline ImFileHandle  ImFileOpen(const char*, const char*)                    { return NULL; }
+static inline bool          ImFileClose(ImFileHandle)                               { return false; }
+static inline ImU64         ImFileGetSize(ImFileHandle)                             { return (ImU64)-1; }
+static inline ImU64         ImFileRead(void*, ImU64, ImU64, ImFileHandle)           { return 0; }
+static inline ImU64         ImFileWrite(const void*, ImU64, ImU64, ImFileHandle)    { return 0; }
+#endif
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FILE_FUNCTIONS
+typedef FILE* ImFileHandle;
+IMGUI_API ImFileHandle      ImFileOpen(const char* filename, const char* mode);
+IMGUI_API bool              ImFileClose(ImFileHandle file);
+IMGUI_API ImU64             ImFileGetSize(ImFileHandle file);
+IMGUI_API ImU64             ImFileRead(void* data, ImU64 size, ImU64 count, ImFileHandle file);
+IMGUI_API ImU64             ImFileWrite(const void* data, ImU64 size, ImU64 count, ImFileHandle file);
+#else
+#define IMGUI_DISABLE_TTY_FUNCTIONS // Can't use stdout, fflush if we are not using default file functions
+#endif
+IMGUI_API void*             ImFileLoadToMemory(const char* filename, const char* mode, size_t* out_file_size = NULL, int padding_bytes = 0);
+
+// Helpers: Maths
+IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF
+// - Wrapper for standard libs functions. (Note that imgui_demo.cpp does _not_ use them to keep the code easy to copy)
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_MATH_FUNCTIONS
+#define ImFabs(X)           fabsf(X)
+#define ImSqrt(X)           sqrtf(X)
+#define ImFmod(X, Y)        fmodf((X), (Y))
+#define ImCos(X)            cosf(X)
+#define ImSin(X)            sinf(X)
+#define ImAcos(X)           acosf(X)
+#define ImAtan2(Y, X)       atan2f((Y), (X))
+#define ImAtof(STR)         atof(STR)
+//#define ImFloorStd(X)     floorf(X)           // We use our own, see ImFloor() and ImFloorSigned()
+#define ImCeil(X)           ceilf(X)
+static inline float  ImPow(float x, float y)    { return powf(x, y); }          // DragBehaviorT/SliderBehaviorT uses ImPow with either float/double and need the precision
+static inline double ImPow(double x, double y)  { return pow(x, y); }
+static inline float  ImLog(float x)             { return logf(x); }             // DragBehaviorT/SliderBehaviorT uses ImLog with either float/double and need the precision
+static inline double ImLog(double x)            { return log(x); }
+static inline int    ImAbs(int x)               { return x < 0 ? -x : x; }
+static inline float  ImAbs(float x)             { return fabsf(x); }
+static inline double ImAbs(double x)            { return fabs(x); }
+static inline float  ImSign(float x)            { return (x < 0.0f) ? -1.0f : (x > 0.0f) ? 1.0f : 0.0f; } // Sign operator - returns -1, 0 or 1 based on sign of argument
+static inline double ImSign(double x)           { return (x < 0.0) ? -1.0 : (x > 0.0) ? 1.0 : 0.0; }
+#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_SSE
+static inline float  ImRsqrt(float x)           { return _mm_cvtss_f32(_mm_rsqrt_ss(_mm_set_ss(x))); }
+#else
+static inline float  ImRsqrt(float x)           { return 1.0f / sqrtf(x); }
+#endif
+static inline double ImRsqrt(double x)          { return 1.0 / sqrt(x); }
+#endif
+// - ImMin/ImMax/ImClamp/ImLerp/ImSwap are used by widgets which support variety of types: signed/unsigned int/long long float/double
+// (Exceptionally using templates here but we could also redefine them for those types)
+template<typename T> static inline T ImMin(T lhs, T rhs)                        { return lhs < rhs ? lhs : rhs; }
+template<typename T> static inline T ImMax(T lhs, T rhs)                        { return lhs >= rhs ? lhs : rhs; }
+template<typename T> static inline T ImClamp(T v, T mn, T mx)                   { return (v < mn) ? mn : (v > mx) ? mx : v; }
+template<typename T> static inline T ImLerp(T a, T b, float t)                  { return (T)(a + (b - a) * t); }
+template<typename T> static inline void ImSwap(T& a, T& b)                      { T tmp = a; a = b; b = tmp; }
+template<typename T> static inline T ImAddClampOverflow(T a, T b, T mn, T mx)   { if (b < 0 && (a < mn - b)) return mn; if (b > 0 && (a > mx - b)) return mx; return a + b; }
+template<typename T> static inline T ImSubClampOverflow(T a, T b, T mn, T mx)   { if (b > 0 && (a < mn + b)) return mn; if (b < 0 && (a > mx + b)) return mx; return a - b; }
+// - Misc maths helpers
+static inline ImVec2 ImMin(const ImVec2& lhs, const ImVec2& rhs)                { return ImVec2(lhs.x < rhs.x ? lhs.x : rhs.x, lhs.y < rhs.y ? lhs.y : rhs.y); }
+static inline ImVec2 ImMax(const ImVec2& lhs, const ImVec2& rhs)                { return ImVec2(lhs.x >= rhs.x ? lhs.x : rhs.x, lhs.y >= rhs.y ? lhs.y : rhs.y); }
+static inline ImVec2 ImClamp(const ImVec2& v, const ImVec2& mn, ImVec2 mx)      { return ImVec2((v.x < mn.x) ? mn.x : (v.x > mx.x) ? mx.x : v.x, (v.y < mn.y) ? mn.y : (v.y > mx.y) ? mx.y : v.y); }
+static inline ImVec2 ImLerp(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, float t)          { return ImVec2(a.x + (b.x - a.x) * t, a.y + (b.y - a.y) * t); }
+static inline ImVec2 ImLerp(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& t)  { return ImVec2(a.x + (b.x - a.x) * t.x, a.y + (b.y - a.y) * t.y); }
+static inline ImVec4 ImLerp(const ImVec4& a, const ImVec4& b, float t)          { return ImVec4(a.x + (b.x - a.x) * t, a.y + (b.y - a.y) * t, a.z + (b.z - a.z) * t, a.w + (b.w - a.w) * t); }
+static inline float  ImSaturate(float f)                                        { return (f < 0.0f) ? 0.0f : (f > 1.0f) ? 1.0f : f; }
+static inline float  ImLengthSqr(const ImVec2& lhs)                             { return (lhs.x * lhs.x) + (lhs.y * lhs.y); }
+static inline float  ImLengthSqr(const ImVec4& lhs)                             { return (lhs.x * lhs.x) + (lhs.y * lhs.y) + (lhs.z * lhs.z) + (lhs.w * lhs.w); }
+static inline float  ImInvLength(const ImVec2& lhs, float fail_value)           { float d = (lhs.x * lhs.x) + (lhs.y * lhs.y); if (d > 0.0f) return ImRsqrt(d); return fail_value; }
+static inline float  ImFloor(float f)                                           { return (float)(int)(f); }
+static inline float  ImFloorSigned(float f)                                     { return (float)((f >= 0 || (float)(int)f == f) ? (int)f : (int)f - 1); } // Decent replacement for floorf()
+static inline ImVec2 ImFloor(const ImVec2& v)                                   { return ImVec2((float)(int)(v.x), (float)(int)(v.y)); }
+static inline ImVec2 ImFloorSigned(const ImVec2& v)                             { return ImVec2(ImFloorSigned(v.x), ImFloorSigned(v.y)); }
+static inline int    ImModPositive(int a, int b)                                { return (a + b) % b; }
+static inline float  ImDot(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b)                    { return a.x * b.x + a.y * b.y; }
+static inline ImVec2 ImRotate(const ImVec2& v, float cos_a, float sin_a)        { return ImVec2(v.x * cos_a - v.y * sin_a, v.x * sin_a + v.y * cos_a); }
+static inline float  ImLinearSweep(float current, float target, float speed)    { if (current < target) return ImMin(current + speed, target); if (current > target) return ImMax(current - speed, target); return current; }
+static inline ImVec2 ImMul(const ImVec2& lhs, const ImVec2& rhs)                { return ImVec2(lhs.x * rhs.x, lhs.y * rhs.y); }
+static inline bool   ImIsFloatAboveGuaranteedIntegerPrecision(float f)          { return f <= -16777216 || f >= 16777216; }
+IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_RESTORE
+
+// Helpers: Geometry
+IMGUI_API ImVec2     ImBezierCubicCalc(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, float t);
+IMGUI_API ImVec2     ImBezierCubicClosestPoint(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, const ImVec2& p, int num_segments);       // For curves with explicit number of segments
+IMGUI_API ImVec2     ImBezierCubicClosestPointCasteljau(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, const ImVec2& p, float tess_tol);// For auto-tessellated curves you can use tess_tol = style.CurveTessellationTol
+IMGUI_API ImVec2     ImBezierQuadraticCalc(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, float t);
+IMGUI_API ImVec2     ImLineClosestPoint(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& p);
+IMGUI_API bool       ImTriangleContainsPoint(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& c, const ImVec2& p);
+IMGUI_API ImVec2     ImTriangleClosestPoint(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& c, const ImVec2& p);
+IMGUI_API void       ImTriangleBarycentricCoords(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& c, const ImVec2& p, float& out_u, float& out_v, float& out_w);
+inline float         ImTriangleArea(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& c) { return ImFabs((a.x * (b.y - c.y)) + (b.x * (c.y - a.y)) + (c.x * (a.y - b.y))) * 0.5f; }
+IMGUI_API ImGuiDir   ImGetDirQuadrantFromDelta(float dx, float dy);
+
+// Helper: ImVec1 (1D vector)
+// (this odd construct is used to facilitate the transition between 1D and 2D, and the maintenance of some branches/patches)
+IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_OFF
+struct ImVec1
+{
+    float   x;
+    constexpr ImVec1()         : x(0.0f) { }
+    constexpr ImVec1(float _x) : x(_x) { }
+};
+
+// Helper: ImVec2ih (2D vector, half-size integer, for long-term packed storage)
+struct ImVec2ih
+{
+    short   x, y;
+    constexpr ImVec2ih()                           : x(0), y(0) {}
+    constexpr ImVec2ih(short _x, short _y)         : x(_x), y(_y) {}
+    constexpr explicit ImVec2ih(const ImVec2& rhs) : x((short)rhs.x), y((short)rhs.y) {}
+};
+
+// Helper: ImRect (2D axis aligned bounding-box)
+// NB: we can't rely on ImVec2 math operators being available here!
+struct IMGUI_API ImRect
+{
+    ImVec2      Min;    // Upper-left
+    ImVec2      Max;    // Lower-right
+
+    constexpr ImRect()                                        : Min(0.0f, 0.0f), Max(0.0f, 0.0f)  {}
+    constexpr ImRect(const ImVec2& min, const ImVec2& max)    : Min(min), Max(max)                {}
+    constexpr ImRect(const ImVec4& v)                         : Min(v.x, v.y), Max(v.z, v.w)      {}
+    constexpr ImRect(float x1, float y1, float x2, float y2)  : Min(x1, y1), Max(x2, y2)          {}
+
+    ImVec2      GetCenter() const                   { return ImVec2((Min.x + Max.x) * 0.5f, (Min.y + Max.y) * 0.5f); }
+    ImVec2      GetSize() const                     { return ImVec2(Max.x - Min.x, Max.y - Min.y); }
+    float       GetWidth() const                    { return Max.x - Min.x; }
+    float       GetHeight() const                   { return Max.y - Min.y; }
+    float       GetArea() const                     { return (Max.x - Min.x) * (Max.y - Min.y); }
+    ImVec2      GetTL() const                       { return Min; }                   // Top-left
+    ImVec2      GetTR() const                       { return ImVec2(Max.x, Min.y); }  // Top-right
+    ImVec2      GetBL() const                       { return ImVec2(Min.x, Max.y); }  // Bottom-left
+    ImVec2      GetBR() const                       { return Max; }                   // Bottom-right
+    bool        Contains(const ImVec2& p) const     { return p.x     >= Min.x && p.y     >= Min.y && p.x     <  Max.x && p.y     <  Max.y; }
+    bool        Contains(const ImRect& r) const     { return r.Min.x >= Min.x && r.Min.y >= Min.y && r.Max.x <= Max.x && r.Max.y <= Max.y; }
+    bool        Overlaps(const ImRect& r) const     { return r.Min.y <  Max.y && r.Max.y >  Min.y && r.Min.x <  Max.x && r.Max.x >  Min.x; }
+    void        Add(const ImVec2& p)                { if (Min.x > p.x)     Min.x = p.x;     if (Min.y > p.y)     Min.y = p.y;     if (Max.x < p.x)     Max.x = p.x;     if (Max.y < p.y)     Max.y = p.y; }
+    void        Add(const ImRect& r)                { if (Min.x > r.Min.x) Min.x = r.Min.x; if (Min.y > r.Min.y) Min.y = r.Min.y; if (Max.x < r.Max.x) Max.x = r.Max.x; if (Max.y < r.Max.y) Max.y = r.Max.y; }
+    void        Expand(const float amount)          { Min.x -= amount;   Min.y -= amount;   Max.x += amount;   Max.y += amount; }
+    void        Expand(const ImVec2& amount)        { Min.x -= amount.x; Min.y -= amount.y; Max.x += amount.x; Max.y += amount.y; }
+    void        Translate(const ImVec2& d)          { Min.x += d.x; Min.y += d.y; Max.x += d.x; Max.y += d.y; }
+    void        TranslateX(float dx)                { Min.x += dx; Max.x += dx; }
+    void        TranslateY(float dy)                { Min.y += dy; Max.y += dy; }
+    void        ClipWith(const ImRect& r)           { Min = ImMax(Min, r.Min); Max = ImMin(Max, r.Max); }                   // Simple version, may lead to an inverted rectangle, which is fine for Contains/Overlaps test but not for display.
+    void        ClipWithFull(const ImRect& r)       { Min = ImClamp(Min, r.Min, r.Max); Max = ImClamp(Max, r.Min, r.Max); } // Full version, ensure both points are fully clipped.
+    void        Floor()                             { Min.x = IM_FLOOR(Min.x); Min.y = IM_FLOOR(Min.y); Max.x = IM_FLOOR(Max.x); Max.y = IM_FLOOR(Max.y); }
+    bool        IsInverted() const                  { return Min.x > Max.x || Min.y > Max.y; }
+    ImVec4      ToVec4() const                      { return ImVec4(Min.x, Min.y, Max.x, Max.y); }
+};
+IM_MSVC_RUNTIME_CHECKS_RESTORE
+
+// Helper: ImBitArray
+inline bool     ImBitArrayTestBit(const ImU32* arr, int n)      { ImU32 mask = (ImU32)1 << (n & 31); return (arr[n >> 5] & mask) != 0; }
+inline void     ImBitArrayClearBit(ImU32* arr, int n)           { ImU32 mask = (ImU32)1 << (n & 31); arr[n >> 5] &= ~mask; }
+inline void     ImBitArraySetBit(ImU32* arr, int n)             { ImU32 mask = (ImU32)1 << (n & 31); arr[n >> 5] |= mask; }
+inline void     ImBitArraySetBitRange(ImU32* arr, int n, int n2) // Works on range [n..n2)
+{
+    n2--;
+    while (n <= n2)
+    {
+        int a_mod = (n & 31);
+        int b_mod = (n2 > (n | 31) ? 31 : (n2 & 31)) + 1;
+        ImU32 mask = (ImU32)(((ImU64)1 << b_mod) - 1) & ~(ImU32)(((ImU64)1 << a_mod) - 1);
+        arr[n >> 5] |= mask;
+        n = (n + 32) & ~31;
+    }
+}
+
+// Helper: ImBitArray class (wrapper over ImBitArray functions)
+// Store 1-bit per value.
+template<int BITCOUNT, int OFFSET = 0>
+struct ImBitArray
+{
+    ImU32           Storage[(BITCOUNT + 31) >> 5];
+    ImBitArray()                                { ClearAllBits(); }
+    void            ClearAllBits()              { memset(Storage, 0, sizeof(Storage)); }
+    void            SetAllBits()                { memset(Storage, 255, sizeof(Storage)); }
+    bool            TestBit(int n) const        { n += OFFSET; IM_ASSERT(n >= 0 && n < BITCOUNT); return ImBitArrayTestBit(Storage, n); }
+    void            SetBit(int n)               { n += OFFSET; IM_ASSERT(n >= 0 && n < BITCOUNT); ImBitArraySetBit(Storage, n); }
+    void            ClearBit(int n)             { n += OFFSET; IM_ASSERT(n >= 0 && n < BITCOUNT); ImBitArrayClearBit(Storage, n); }
+    void            SetBitRange(int n, int n2)  { n += OFFSET; n2 += OFFSET; IM_ASSERT(n >= 0 && n < BITCOUNT && n2 > n && n2 <= BITCOUNT); ImBitArraySetBitRange(Storage, n, n2); } // Works on range [n..n2)
+    bool            operator[](int n) const     { n += OFFSET; IM_ASSERT(n >= 0 && n < BITCOUNT); return ImBitArrayTestBit(Storage, n); }
+};
+
+// Helper: ImBitVector
+// Store 1-bit per value.
+struct IMGUI_API ImBitVector
+{
+    ImVector<ImU32> Storage;
+    void            Create(int sz)              { Storage.resize((sz + 31) >> 5); memset(Storage.Data, 0, (size_t)Storage.Size * sizeof(Storage.Data[0])); }
+    void            Clear()                     { Storage.clear(); }
+    bool            TestBit(int n) const        { IM_ASSERT(n < (Storage.Size << 5)); return ImBitArrayTestBit(Storage.Data, n); }
+    void            SetBit(int n)               { IM_ASSERT(n < (Storage.Size << 5)); ImBitArraySetBit(Storage.Data, n); }
+    void            ClearBit(int n)             { IM_ASSERT(n < (Storage.Size << 5)); ImBitArrayClearBit(Storage.Data, n); }
+};
+
+// Helper: ImSpan<>
+// Pointing to a span of data we don't own.
+template<typename T>
+struct ImSpan
+{
+    T*                  Data;
+    T*                  DataEnd;
+
+    // Constructors, destructor
+    inline ImSpan()                                 { Data = DataEnd = NULL; }
+    inline ImSpan(T* data, int size)                { Data = data; DataEnd = data + size; }
+    inline ImSpan(T* data, T* data_end)             { Data = data; DataEnd = data_end; }
+
+    inline void         set(T* data, int size)      { Data = data; DataEnd = data + size; }
+    inline void         set(T* data, T* data_end)   { Data = data; DataEnd = data_end; }
+    inline int          size() const                { return (int)(ptrdiff_t)(DataEnd - Data); }
+    inline int          size_in_bytes() const       { return (int)(ptrdiff_t)(DataEnd - Data) * (int)sizeof(T); }
+    inline T&           operator[](int i)           { T* p = Data + i; IM_ASSERT(p >= Data && p < DataEnd); return *p; }
+    inline const T&     operator[](int i) const     { const T* p = Data + i; IM_ASSERT(p >= Data && p < DataEnd); return *p; }
+
+    inline T*           begin()                     { return Data; }
+    inline const T*     begin() const               { return Data; }
+    inline T*           end()                       { return DataEnd; }
+    inline const T*     end() const                 { return DataEnd; }
+
+    // Utilities
+    inline int  index_from_ptr(const T* it) const   { IM_ASSERT(it >= Data && it < DataEnd); const ptrdiff_t off = it - Data; return (int)off; }
+};
+
+// Helper: ImSpanAllocator<>
+// Facilitate storing multiple chunks into a single large block (the "arena")
+// - Usage: call Reserve() N times, allocate GetArenaSizeInBytes() worth, pass it to SetArenaBasePtr(), call GetSpan() N times to retrieve the aligned ranges.
+template<int CHUNKS>
+struct ImSpanAllocator
+{
+    char*   BasePtr;
+    int     CurrOff;
+    int     CurrIdx;
+    int     Offsets[CHUNKS];
+    int     Sizes[CHUNKS];
+
+    ImSpanAllocator()                               { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+    inline void  Reserve(int n, size_t sz, int a=4) { IM_ASSERT(n == CurrIdx && n < CHUNKS); CurrOff = IM_MEMALIGN(CurrOff, a); Offsets[n] = CurrOff; Sizes[n] = (int)sz; CurrIdx++; CurrOff += (int)sz; }
+    inline int   GetArenaSizeInBytes()              { return CurrOff; }
+    inline void  SetArenaBasePtr(void* base_ptr)    { BasePtr = (char*)base_ptr; }
+    inline void* GetSpanPtrBegin(int n)             { IM_ASSERT(n >= 0 && n < CHUNKS && CurrIdx == CHUNKS); return (void*)(BasePtr + Offsets[n]); }
+    inline void* GetSpanPtrEnd(int n)               { IM_ASSERT(n >= 0 && n < CHUNKS && CurrIdx == CHUNKS); return (void*)(BasePtr + Offsets[n] + Sizes[n]); }
+    template<typename T>
+    inline void  GetSpan(int n, ImSpan<T>* span)    { span->set((T*)GetSpanPtrBegin(n), (T*)GetSpanPtrEnd(n)); }
+};
+
+// Helper: ImPool<>
+// Basic keyed storage for contiguous instances, slow/amortized insertion, O(1) indexable, O(Log N) queries by ID over a dense/hot buffer,
+// Honor constructor/destructor. Add/remove invalidate all pointers. Indexes have the same lifetime as the associated object.
+typedef int ImPoolIdx;
+template<typename T>
+struct ImPool
+{
+    ImVector<T>     Buf;        // Contiguous data
+    ImGuiStorage    Map;        // ID->Index
+    ImPoolIdx       FreeIdx;    // Next free idx to use
+    ImPoolIdx       AliveCount; // Number of active/alive items (for display purpose)
+
+    ImPool()    { FreeIdx = AliveCount = 0; }
+    ~ImPool()   { Clear(); }
+    T*          GetByKey(ImGuiID key)               { int idx = Map.GetInt(key, -1); return (idx != -1) ? &Buf[idx] : NULL; }
+    T*          GetByIndex(ImPoolIdx n)             { return &Buf[n]; }
+    ImPoolIdx   GetIndex(const T* p) const          { IM_ASSERT(p >= Buf.Data && p < Buf.Data + Buf.Size); return (ImPoolIdx)(p - Buf.Data); }
+    T*          GetOrAddByKey(ImGuiID key)          { int* p_idx = Map.GetIntRef(key, -1); if (*p_idx != -1) return &Buf[*p_idx]; *p_idx = FreeIdx; return Add(); }
+    bool        Contains(const T* p) const          { return (p >= Buf.Data && p < Buf.Data + Buf.Size); }
+    void        Clear()                             { for (int n = 0; n < Map.Data.Size; n++) { int idx = Map.Data[n].val_i; if (idx != -1) Buf[idx].~T(); } Map.Clear(); Buf.clear(); FreeIdx = AliveCount = 0; }
+    T*          Add()                               { int idx = FreeIdx; if (idx == Buf.Size) { Buf.resize(Buf.Size + 1); FreeIdx++; } else { FreeIdx = *(int*)&Buf[idx]; } IM_PLACEMENT_NEW(&Buf[idx]) T(); AliveCount++; return &Buf[idx]; }
+    void        Remove(ImGuiID key, const T* p)     { Remove(key, GetIndex(p)); }
+    void        Remove(ImGuiID key, ImPoolIdx idx)  { Buf[idx].~T(); *(int*)&Buf[idx] = FreeIdx; FreeIdx = idx; Map.SetInt(key, -1); AliveCount--; }
+    void        Reserve(int capacity)               { Buf.reserve(capacity); Map.Data.reserve(capacity); }
+
+    // To iterate a ImPool: for (int n = 0; n < pool.GetMapSize(); n++) if (T* t = pool.TryGetMapData(n)) { ... }
+    // Can be avoided if you know .Remove() has never been called on the pool, or AliveCount == GetMapSize()
+    int         GetAliveCount() const               { return AliveCount; }      // Number of active/alive items in the pool (for display purpose)
+    int         GetBufSize() const                  { return Buf.Size; }
+    int         GetMapSize() const                  { return Map.Data.Size; }   // It is the map we need iterate to find valid items, since we don't have "alive" storage anywhere
+    T*          TryGetMapData(ImPoolIdx n)          { int idx = Map.Data[n].val_i; if (idx == -1) return NULL; return GetByIndex(idx); }
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+    int         GetSize()                           { return GetMapSize(); } // For ImPlot: should use GetMapSize() from (IMGUI_VERSION_NUM >= 18304)
+#endif
+};
+
+// Helper: ImChunkStream<>
+// Build and iterate a contiguous stream of variable-sized structures.
+// This is used by Settings to store persistent data while reducing allocation count.
+// We store the chunk size first, and align the final size on 4 bytes boundaries.
+// The tedious/zealous amount of casting is to avoid -Wcast-align warnings.
+template<typename T>
+struct ImChunkStream
+{
+    ImVector<char>  Buf;
+
+    void    clear()                     { Buf.clear(); }
+    bool    empty() const               { return Buf.Size == 0; }
+    int     size() const                { return Buf.Size; }
+    T*      alloc_chunk(size_t sz)      { size_t HDR_SZ = 4; sz = IM_MEMALIGN(HDR_SZ + sz, 4u); int off = Buf.Size; Buf.resize(off + (int)sz); ((int*)(void*)(Buf.Data + off))[0] = (int)sz; return (T*)(void*)(Buf.Data + off + (int)HDR_SZ); }
+    T*      begin()                     { size_t HDR_SZ = 4; if (!Buf.Data) return NULL; return (T*)(void*)(Buf.Data + HDR_SZ); }
+    T*      next_chunk(T* p)            { size_t HDR_SZ = 4; IM_ASSERT(p >= begin() && p < end()); p = (T*)(void*)((char*)(void*)p + chunk_size(p)); if (p == (T*)(void*)((char*)end() + HDR_SZ)) return (T*)0; IM_ASSERT(p < end()); return p; }
+    int     chunk_size(const T* p)      { return ((const int*)p)[-1]; }
+    T*      end()                       { return (T*)(void*)(Buf.Data + Buf.Size); }
+    int     offset_from_ptr(const T* p) { IM_ASSERT(p >= begin() && p < end()); const ptrdiff_t off = (const char*)p - Buf.Data; return (int)off; }
+    T*      ptr_from_offset(int off)    { IM_ASSERT(off >= 4 && off < Buf.Size); return (T*)(void*)(Buf.Data + off); }
+    void    swap(ImChunkStream<T>& rhs) { rhs.Buf.swap(Buf); }
+
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] ImDrawList support
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// ImDrawList: Helper function to calculate a circle's segment count given its radius and a "maximum error" value.
+// Estimation of number of circle segment based on error is derived using method described in https://stackoverflow.com/a/2244088/15194693
+// Number of segments (N) is calculated using equation:
+//   N = ceil ( pi / acos(1 - error / r) )     where r > 0, error <= r
+// Our equation is significantly simpler that one in the post thanks for choosing segment that is
+// perpendicular to X axis. Follow steps in the article from this starting condition and you will
+// will get this result.
+//
+// Rendering circles with an odd number of segments, while mathematically correct will produce
+// asymmetrical results on the raster grid. Therefore we're rounding N to next even number (7->8, 8->8, 9->10 etc.)
+#define IM_ROUNDUP_TO_EVEN(_V)                                  ((((_V) + 1) / 2) * 2)
+#define IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_MIN                     4
+#define IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_MAX                     512
+#define IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_CALC(_RAD,_MAXERROR)    ImClamp(IM_ROUNDUP_TO_EVEN((int)ImCeil(IM_PI / ImAcos(1 - ImMin((_MAXERROR), (_RAD)) / (_RAD)))), IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_MIN, IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_MAX)
+
+// Raw equation from IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_CALC rewritten for 'r' and 'error'.
+#define IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_CALC_R(_N,_MAXERROR)    ((_MAXERROR) / (1 - ImCos(IM_PI / ImMax((float)(_N), IM_PI))))
+#define IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_CALC_ERROR(_N,_RAD)     ((1 - ImCos(IM_PI / ImMax((float)(_N), IM_PI))) / (_RAD))
+
+// ImDrawList: Lookup table size for adaptive arc drawing, cover full circle.
+#ifndef IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_TABLE_SIZE
+#define IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_TABLE_SIZE                          48 // Number of samples in lookup table.
+#endif
+#define IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX                          IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_TABLE_SIZE // Sample index _PathArcToFastEx() for 360 angle.
+
+// Data shared between all ImDrawList instances
+// You may want to create your own instance of this if you want to use ImDrawList completely without ImGui. In that case, watch out for future changes to this structure.
+struct IMGUI_API ImDrawListSharedData
+{
+    ImVec2          TexUvWhitePixel;            // UV of white pixel in the atlas
+    ImFont*         Font;                       // Current/default font (optional, for simplified AddText overload)
+    float           FontSize;                   // Current/default font size (optional, for simplified AddText overload)
+    float           CurveTessellationTol;       // Tessellation tolerance when using PathBezierCurveTo()
+    float           CircleSegmentMaxError;      // Number of circle segments to use per pixel of radius for AddCircle() etc
+    ImVec4          ClipRectFullscreen;         // Value for PushClipRectFullscreen()
+    ImDrawListFlags InitialFlags;               // Initial flags at the beginning of the frame (it is possible to alter flags on a per-drawlist basis afterwards)
+
+    // [Internal] Lookup tables
+    ImVec2          ArcFastVtx[IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_TABLE_SIZE]; // Sample points on the quarter of the circle.
+    float           ArcFastRadiusCutoff;                        // Cutoff radius after which arc drawing will fallback to slower PathArcTo()
+    ImU8            CircleSegmentCounts[64];    // Precomputed segment count for given radius before we calculate it dynamically (to avoid calculation overhead)
+    const ImVec4*   TexUvLines;                 // UV of anti-aliased lines in the atlas
+
+    ImDrawListSharedData();
+    void SetCircleTessellationMaxError(float max_error);
+};
+
+struct ImDrawDataBuilder
+{
+    ImVector<ImDrawList*>   Layers[2];           // Global layers for: regular, tooltip
+
+    void Clear()                    { for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(Layers); n++) Layers[n].resize(0); }
+    void ClearFreeMemory()          { for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(Layers); n++) Layers[n].clear(); }
+    int  GetDrawListCount() const   { int count = 0; for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(Layers); n++) count += Layers[n].Size; return count; }
+    IMGUI_API void FlattenIntoSingleLayer();
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets support: flags, enums, data structures
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Transient per-window flags, reset at the beginning of the frame. For child window, inherited from parent on first Begin().
+// This is going to be exposed in imgui.h when stabilized enough.
+enum ImGuiItemFlags_
+{
+    // Controlled by user
+    ImGuiItemFlags_None                     = 0,
+    ImGuiItemFlags_NoTabStop                = 1 << 0,  // false     // Disable keyboard tabbing (FIXME: should merge with _NoNav)
+    ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat             = 1 << 1,  // false     // Button() will return true multiple times based on io.KeyRepeatDelay and io.KeyRepeatRate settings.
+    ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled                 = 1 << 2,  // false     // Disable interactions but doesn't affect visuals. See BeginDisabled()/EndDisabled(). See github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/211
+    ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav                    = 1 << 3,  // false     // Disable keyboard/gamepad directional navigation (FIXME: should merge with _NoTabStop)
+    ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus        = 1 << 4,  // false     // Disable item being a candidate for default focus (e.g. used by title bar items)
+    ImGuiItemFlags_SelectableDontClosePopup = 1 << 5,  // false     // Disable MenuItem/Selectable() automatically closing their popup window
+    ImGuiItemFlags_MixedValue               = 1 << 6,  // false     // [BETA] Represent a mixed/indeterminate value, generally multi-selection where values differ. Currently only supported by Checkbox() (later should support all sorts of widgets)
+    ImGuiItemFlags_ReadOnly                 = 1 << 7,  // false     // [ALPHA] Allow hovering interactions but underlying value is not changed.
+
+    // Controlled by widget code
+    ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable                = 1 << 8,  // false     // [WIP] Auto-activate input mode when tab focused. Currently only used and supported by a few items before it becomes a generic feature.
+};
+
+// Storage for LastItem data
+enum ImGuiItemStatusFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiItemStatusFlags_None               = 0,
+    ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect        = 1 << 0,   // Mouse position is within item rectangle (does NOT mean that the window is in correct z-order and can be hovered!, this is only one part of the most-common IsItemHovered test)
+    ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDisplayRect     = 1 << 1,   // g.LastItemData.DisplayRect is valid
+    ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Edited             = 1 << 2,   // Value exposed by item was edited in the current frame (should match the bool return value of most widgets)
+    ImGuiItemStatusFlags_ToggledSelection   = 1 << 3,   // Set when Selectable(), TreeNode() reports toggling a selection. We can't report "Selected", only state changes, in order to easily handle clipping with less issues.
+    ImGuiItemStatusFlags_ToggledOpen        = 1 << 4,   // Set when TreeNode() reports toggling their open state.
+    ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDeactivated     = 1 << 5,   // Set if the widget/group is able to provide data for the ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Deactivated flag.
+    ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Deactivated        = 1 << 6,   // Only valid if ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDeactivated is set.
+    ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredWindow      = 1 << 7,   // Override the HoveredWindow test to allow cross-window hover testing.
+    ImGuiItemStatusFlags_FocusedByTabbing   = 1 << 8,   // Set when the Focusable item just got focused by Tabbing (FIXME: to be removed soon)
+
+#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_TEST_ENGINE
+    ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Openable           = 1 << 20,  // Item is an openable (e.g. TreeNode)
+    ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Opened             = 1 << 21,  //
+    ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checkable          = 1 << 22,  // Item is a checkable (e.g. CheckBox, MenuItem)
+    ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checked            = 1 << 23,  //
+#endif
+};
+
+// Extend ImGuiInputTextFlags_
+enum ImGuiInputTextFlagsPrivate_
+{
+    // [Internal]
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline           = 1 << 26,  // For internal use by InputTextMultiline()
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoMarkEdited        = 1 << 27,  // For internal use by functions using InputText() before reformatting data
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags_MergedItem          = 1 << 28,  // For internal use by TempInputText(), will skip calling ItemAdd(). Require bounding-box to strictly match.
+};
+
+// Extend ImGuiButtonFlags_
+enum ImGuiButtonFlagsPrivate_
+{
+    ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick         = 1 << 4,   // return true on click (mouse down event)
+    ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease  = 1 << 5,   // [Default] return true on click + release on same item <-- this is what the majority of Button are using
+    ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickReleaseAnywhere = 1 << 6, // return true on click + release even if the release event is not done while hovering the item
+    ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnRelease       = 1 << 7,   // return true on release (default requires click+release)
+    ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick   = 1 << 8,   // return true on double-click (default requires click+release)
+    ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold  = 1 << 9,   // return true when held into while we are drag and dropping another item (used by e.g. tree nodes, collapsing headers)
+    ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat                 = 1 << 10,  // hold to repeat
+    ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren        = 1 << 11,  // allow interactions even if a child window is overlapping
+    ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap       = 1 << 12,  // require previous frame HoveredId to either match id or be null before being usable, use along with SetItemAllowOverlap()
+    ImGuiButtonFlags_DontClosePopups        = 1 << 13,  // disable automatically closing parent popup on press // [UNUSED]
+    //ImGuiButtonFlags_Disabled             = 1 << 14,  // disable interactions -> use BeginDisabled() or ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled
+    ImGuiButtonFlags_AlignTextBaseLine      = 1 << 15,  // vertically align button to match text baseline - ButtonEx() only // FIXME: Should be removed and handled by SmallButton(), not possible currently because of DC.CursorPosPrevLine
+    ImGuiButtonFlags_NoKeyModifiers         = 1 << 16,  // disable mouse interaction if a key modifier is held
+    ImGuiButtonFlags_NoHoldingActiveId      = 1 << 17,  // don't set ActiveId while holding the mouse (ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick only)
+    ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus             = 1 << 18,  // don't override navigation focus when activated
+    ImGuiButtonFlags_NoHoveredOnFocus       = 1 << 19,  // don't report as hovered when nav focus is on this item
+    ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnMask_         = ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickReleaseAnywhere | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnRelease | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold,
+    ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDefault_      = ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease,
+};
+
+// Extend ImGuiComboFlags_
+enum ImGuiComboFlagsPrivate_
+{
+    ImGuiComboFlags_CustomPreview           = 1 << 20,  // enable BeginComboPreview()
+};
+
+// Extend ImGuiSliderFlags_
+enum ImGuiSliderFlagsPrivate_
+{
+    ImGuiSliderFlags_Vertical               = 1 << 20,  // Should this slider be orientated vertically?
+    ImGuiSliderFlags_ReadOnly               = 1 << 21,
+};
+
+// Extend ImGuiSelectableFlags_
+enum ImGuiSelectableFlagsPrivate_
+{
+    // NB: need to be in sync with last value of ImGuiSelectableFlags_
+    ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoHoldingActiveID      = 1 << 20,
+    ImGuiSelectableFlags_SelectOnNav            = 1 << 21,  // (WIP) Auto-select when moved into. This is not exposed in public API as to handle multi-select and modifiers we will need user to explicitly control focus scope. May be replaced with a BeginSelection() API.
+    ImGuiSelectableFlags_SelectOnClick          = 1 << 22,  // Override button behavior to react on Click (default is Click+Release)
+    ImGuiSelectableFlags_SelectOnRelease        = 1 << 23,  // Override button behavior to react on Release (default is Click+Release)
+    ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAvailWidth         = 1 << 24,  // Span all avail width even if we declared less for layout purpose. FIXME: We may be able to remove this (added in 6251d379, 2bcafc86 for menus)
+    ImGuiSelectableFlags_DrawHoveredWhenHeld    = 1 << 25,  // Always show active when held, even is not hovered. This concept could probably be renamed/formalized somehow.
+    ImGuiSelectableFlags_SetNavIdOnHover        = 1 << 26,  // Set Nav/Focus ID on mouse hover (used by MenuItem)
+    ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoPadWithHalfSpacing   = 1 << 27,  // Disable padding each side with ItemSpacing * 0.5f
+};
+
+// Extend ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_
+enum ImGuiTreeNodeFlagsPrivate_
+{
+    ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_ClipLabelForTrailingButton = 1 << 20,
+};
+
+enum ImGuiSeparatorFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiSeparatorFlags_None                    = 0,
+    ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Horizontal              = 1 << 0,   // Axis default to current layout type, so generally Horizontal unless e.g. in a menu bar
+    ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical                = 1 << 1,
+    ImGuiSeparatorFlags_SpanAllColumns          = 1 << 2,
+};
+
+enum ImGuiTextFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiTextFlags_None                         = 0,
+    ImGuiTextFlags_NoWidthForLargeClippedText   = 1 << 0,
+};
+
+enum ImGuiTooltipFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiTooltipFlags_None                      = 0,
+    ImGuiTooltipFlags_OverridePreviousTooltip   = 1 << 0,   // Override will clear/ignore previously submitted tooltip (defaults to append)
+};
+
+// FIXME: this is in development, not exposed/functional as a generic feature yet.
+// Horizontal/Vertical enums are fixed to 0/1 so they may be used to index ImVec2
+enum ImGuiLayoutType_
+{
+    ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal = 0,
+    ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical = 1
+};
+
+enum ImGuiLogType
+{
+    ImGuiLogType_None = 0,
+    ImGuiLogType_TTY,
+    ImGuiLogType_File,
+    ImGuiLogType_Buffer,
+    ImGuiLogType_Clipboard,
+};
+
+// X/Y enums are fixed to 0/1 so they may be used to index ImVec2
+enum ImGuiAxis
+{
+    ImGuiAxis_None = -1,
+    ImGuiAxis_X = 0,
+    ImGuiAxis_Y = 1
+};
+
+enum ImGuiPlotType
+{
+    ImGuiPlotType_Lines,
+    ImGuiPlotType_Histogram,
+};
+
+enum ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy
+{
+    ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_Default,
+    ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_ComboBox,
+    ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_Tooltip,
+};
+
+struct ImGuiDataTypeTempStorage
+{
+    ImU8        Data[8];        // Can fit any data up to ImGuiDataType_COUNT
+};
+
+// Type information associated to one ImGuiDataType. Retrieve with DataTypeGetInfo().
+struct ImGuiDataTypeInfo
+{
+    size_t      Size;           // Size in bytes
+    const char* Name;           // Short descriptive name for the type, for debugging
+    const char* PrintFmt;       // Default printf format for the type
+    const char* ScanFmt;        // Default scanf format for the type
+};
+
+// Extend ImGuiDataType_
+enum ImGuiDataTypePrivate_
+{
+    ImGuiDataType_String = ImGuiDataType_COUNT + 1,
+    ImGuiDataType_Pointer,
+    ImGuiDataType_ID,
+};
+
+// Stacked color modifier, backup of modified data so we can restore it
+struct ImGuiColorMod
+{
+    ImGuiCol        Col;
+    ImVec4          BackupValue;
+};
+
+// Stacked style modifier, backup of modified data so we can restore it. Data type inferred from the variable.
+struct ImGuiStyleMod
+{
+    ImGuiStyleVar   VarIdx;
+    union           { int BackupInt[2]; float BackupFloat[2]; };
+    ImGuiStyleMod(ImGuiStyleVar idx, int v)     { VarIdx = idx; BackupInt[0] = v; }
+    ImGuiStyleMod(ImGuiStyleVar idx, float v)   { VarIdx = idx; BackupFloat[0] = v; }
+    ImGuiStyleMod(ImGuiStyleVar idx, ImVec2 v)  { VarIdx = idx; BackupFloat[0] = v.x; BackupFloat[1] = v.y; }
+};
+
+// Storage data for BeginComboPreview()/EndComboPreview()
+struct IMGUI_API ImGuiComboPreviewData
+{
+    ImRect          PreviewRect;
+    ImVec2          BackupCursorPos;
+    ImVec2          BackupCursorMaxPos;
+    ImVec2          BackupCursorPosPrevLine;
+    float           BackupPrevLineTextBaseOffset;
+    ImGuiLayoutType BackupLayout;
+
+    ImGuiComboPreviewData() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+};
+
+// Stacked storage data for BeginGroup()/EndGroup()
+struct IMGUI_API ImGuiGroupData
+{
+    ImGuiID     WindowID;
+    ImVec2      BackupCursorPos;
+    ImVec2      BackupCursorMaxPos;
+    ImVec1      BackupIndent;
+    ImVec1      BackupGroupOffset;
+    ImVec2      BackupCurrLineSize;
+    float       BackupCurrLineTextBaseOffset;
+    ImGuiID     BackupActiveIdIsAlive;
+    bool        BackupActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive;
+    bool        BackupHoveredIdIsAlive;
+    bool        EmitItem;
+};
+
+// Simple column measurement, currently used for MenuItem() only.. This is very short-sighted/throw-away code and NOT a generic helper.
+struct IMGUI_API ImGuiMenuColumns
+{
+    ImU32       TotalWidth;
+    ImU32       NextTotalWidth;
+    ImU16       Spacing;
+    ImU16       OffsetIcon;         // Always zero for now
+    ImU16       OffsetLabel;        // Offsets are locked in Update()
+    ImU16       OffsetShortcut;
+    ImU16       OffsetMark;
+    ImU16       Widths[4];          // Width of:   Icon, Label, Shortcut, Mark  (accumulators for current frame)
+
+    ImGuiMenuColumns() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+    void        Update(float spacing, bool window_reappearing);
+    float       DeclColumns(float w_icon, float w_label, float w_shortcut, float w_mark);
+    void        CalcNextTotalWidth(bool update_offsets);
+};
+
+// Internal state of the currently focused/edited text input box
+// For a given item ID, access with ImGui::GetInputTextState()
+struct IMGUI_API ImGuiInputTextState
+{
+    ImGuiID                 ID;                     // widget id owning the text state
+    int                     CurLenW, CurLenA;       // we need to maintain our buffer length in both UTF-8 and wchar format. UTF-8 length is valid even if TextA is not.
+    ImVector<ImWchar>       TextW;                  // edit buffer, we need to persist but can't guarantee the persistence of the user-provided buffer. so we copy into own buffer.
+    ImVector<char>          TextA;                  // temporary UTF8 buffer for callbacks and other operations. this is not updated in every code-path! size=capacity.
+    ImVector<char>          InitialTextA;           // backup of end-user buffer at the time of focus (in UTF-8, unaltered)
+    bool                    TextAIsValid;           // temporary UTF8 buffer is not initially valid before we make the widget active (until then we pull the data from user argument)
+    int                     BufCapacityA;           // end-user buffer capacity
+    float                   ScrollX;                // horizontal scrolling/offset
+    ImStb::STB_TexteditState Stb;                   // state for stb_textedit.h
+    float                   CursorAnim;             // timer for cursor blink, reset on every user action so the cursor reappears immediately
+    bool                    CursorFollow;           // set when we want scrolling to follow the current cursor position (not always!)
+    bool                    SelectedAllMouseLock;   // after a double-click to select all, we ignore further mouse drags to update selection
+    bool                    Edited;                 // edited this frame
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags     Flags;                  // copy of InputText() flags
+
+    ImGuiInputTextState()                   { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+    void        ClearText()                 { CurLenW = CurLenA = 0; TextW[0] = 0; TextA[0] = 0; CursorClamp(); }
+    void        ClearFreeMemory()           { TextW.clear(); TextA.clear(); InitialTextA.clear(); }
+    int         GetUndoAvailCount() const   { return Stb.undostate.undo_point; }
+    int         GetRedoAvailCount() const   { return STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT - Stb.undostate.redo_point; }
+    void        OnKeyPressed(int key);      // Cannot be inline because we call in code in stb_textedit.h implementation
+
+    // Cursor & Selection
+    void        CursorAnimReset()           { CursorAnim = -0.30f; }                                   // After a user-input the cursor stays on for a while without blinking
+    void        CursorClamp()               { Stb.cursor = ImMin(Stb.cursor, CurLenW); Stb.select_start = ImMin(Stb.select_start, CurLenW); Stb.select_end = ImMin(Stb.select_end, CurLenW); }
+    bool        HasSelection() const        { return Stb.select_start != Stb.select_end; }
+    void        ClearSelection()            { Stb.select_start = Stb.select_end = Stb.cursor; }
+    int         GetCursorPos() const        { return Stb.cursor; }
+    int         GetSelectionStart() const   { return Stb.select_start; }
+    int         GetSelectionEnd() const     { return Stb.select_end; }
+    void        SelectAll()                 { Stb.select_start = 0; Stb.cursor = Stb.select_end = CurLenW; Stb.has_preferred_x = 0; }
+};
+
+// Storage for current popup stack
+struct ImGuiPopupData
+{
+    ImGuiID             PopupId;        // Set on OpenPopup()
+    ImGuiWindow*        Window;         // Resolved on BeginPopup() - may stay unresolved if user never calls OpenPopup()
+    ImGuiWindow*        SourceWindow;   // Set on OpenPopup() copy of NavWindow at the time of opening the popup
+    int                 ParentNavLayer; // Resolved on BeginPopup(). Actually a ImGuiNavLayer type (declared down below), initialized to -1 which is not part of an enum, but serves well-enough as "not any of layers" value
+    int                 OpenFrameCount; // Set on OpenPopup()
+    ImGuiID             OpenParentId;   // Set on OpenPopup(), we need this to differentiate multiple menu sets from each others (e.g. inside menu bar vs loose menu items)
+    ImVec2              OpenPopupPos;   // Set on OpenPopup(), preferred popup position (typically == OpenMousePos when using mouse)
+    ImVec2              OpenMousePos;   // Set on OpenPopup(), copy of mouse position at the time of opening popup
+
+    ImGuiPopupData()    { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); ParentNavLayer = OpenFrameCount = -1; }
+};
+
+enum ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_None               = 0,
+    ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasPos             = 1 << 0,
+    ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSize            = 1 << 1,
+    ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasContentSize     = 1 << 2,
+    ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasCollapsed       = 1 << 3,
+    ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSizeConstraint  = 1 << 4,
+    ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasFocus           = 1 << 5,
+    ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasBgAlpha         = 1 << 6,
+    ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasScroll          = 1 << 7,
+    ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasViewport        = 1 << 8,
+    ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasDock            = 1 << 9,
+    ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasWindowClass     = 1 << 10,
+};
+
+// Storage for SetNexWindow** functions
+struct ImGuiNextWindowData
+{
+    ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags    Flags;
+    ImGuiCond                   PosCond;
+    ImGuiCond                   SizeCond;
+    ImGuiCond                   CollapsedCond;
+    ImGuiCond                   DockCond;
+    ImVec2                      PosVal;
+    ImVec2                      PosPivotVal;
+    ImVec2                      SizeVal;
+    ImVec2                      ContentSizeVal;
+    ImVec2                      ScrollVal;
+    bool                        PosUndock;
+    bool                        CollapsedVal;
+    ImRect                      SizeConstraintRect;
+    ImGuiSizeCallback           SizeCallback;
+    void*                       SizeCallbackUserData;
+    float                       BgAlphaVal;             // Override background alpha
+    ImGuiID                     ViewportId;
+    ImGuiID                     DockId;
+    ImGuiWindowClass            WindowClass;
+    ImVec2                      MenuBarOffsetMinVal;    // (Always on) This is not exposed publicly, so we don't clear it and it doesn't have a corresponding flag (could we? for consistency?)
+
+    ImGuiNextWindowData()       { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+    inline void ClearFlags()    { Flags = ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_None; }
+};
+
+enum ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_None     = 0,
+    ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_HasWidth = 1 << 0,
+    ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_HasOpen  = 1 << 1,
+};
+
+struct ImGuiNextItemData
+{
+    ImGuiNextItemDataFlags      Flags;
+    float                       Width;          // Set by SetNextItemWidth()
+    ImGuiID                     FocusScopeId;   // Set by SetNextItemMultiSelectData() (!= 0 signify value has been set, so it's an alternate version of HasSelectionData, we don't use Flags for this because they are cleared too early. This is mostly used for debugging)
+    ImGuiCond                   OpenCond;
+    bool                        OpenVal;        // Set by SetNextItemOpen()
+
+    ImGuiNextItemData()         { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+    inline void ClearFlags()    { Flags = ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_None; } // Also cleared manually by ItemAdd()!
+};
+
+// Status storage for the last submitted item
+struct ImGuiLastItemData
+{
+    ImGuiID                 ID;
+    ImGuiItemFlags          InFlags;            // See ImGuiItemFlags_
+    ImGuiItemStatusFlags    StatusFlags;        // See ImGuiItemStatusFlags_
+    ImRect                  Rect;               // Full rectangle
+    ImRect                  NavRect;            // Navigation scoring rectangle (not displayed)
+    ImRect                  DisplayRect;        // Display rectangle (only if ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDisplayRect is set)
+
+    ImGuiLastItemData()     { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+};
+
+struct IMGUI_API ImGuiStackSizes
+{
+    short   SizeOfIDStack;
+    short   SizeOfColorStack;
+    short   SizeOfStyleVarStack;
+    short   SizeOfFontStack;
+    short   SizeOfFocusScopeStack;
+    short   SizeOfGroupStack;
+    short   SizeOfItemFlagsStack;
+    short   SizeOfBeginPopupStack;
+    short   SizeOfDisabledStack;
+
+    ImGuiStackSizes() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+    void SetToCurrentState();
+    void CompareWithCurrentState();
+};
+
+// Data saved for each window pushed into the stack
+struct ImGuiWindowStackData
+{
+    ImGuiWindow*            Window;
+    ImGuiLastItemData       ParentLastItemDataBackup;
+    ImGuiStackSizes         StackSizesOnBegin;      // Store size of various stacks for asserting
+};
+
+struct ImGuiShrinkWidthItem
+{
+    int         Index;
+    float       Width;
+    float       InitialWidth;
+};
+
+struct ImGuiPtrOrIndex
+{
+    void*       Ptr;            // Either field can be set, not both. e.g. Dock node tab bars are loose while BeginTabBar() ones are in a pool.
+    int         Index;          // Usually index in a main pool.
+
+    ImGuiPtrOrIndex(void* ptr)  { Ptr = ptr; Index = -1; }
+    ImGuiPtrOrIndex(int index)  { Ptr = NULL; Index = index; }
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Inputs support
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+typedef ImBitArray<ImGuiKey_NamedKey_COUNT, -ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN>    ImBitArrayForNamedKeys;
+
+// Extend ImGuiKey_
+enum ImGuiKeyPrivate_
+{
+    ImGuiKey_LegacyNativeKey_BEGIN  = 0,
+    ImGuiKey_LegacyNativeKey_END    = 512,
+    ImGuiKey_Gamepad_BEGIN          = ImGuiKey_GamepadStart,
+    ImGuiKey_Gamepad_END            = ImGuiKey_GamepadRStickDown + 1,
+
+    // [Internal] Named shortcuts for Navigation
+    ImGuiKey_NavKeyboardTweakSlow   = ImGuiKey_ModCtrl,
+    ImGuiKey_NavKeyboardTweakFast   = ImGuiKey_ModShift,
+    ImGuiKey_NavGamepadTweakSlow    = ImGuiKey_GamepadL1,
+    ImGuiKey_NavGamepadTweakFast    = ImGuiKey_GamepadR1,
+    ImGuiKey_NavGamepadActivate     = ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceDown,
+    ImGuiKey_NavGamepadCancel       = ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceRight,
+    ImGuiKey_NavGamepadMenu         = ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceLeft,
+    ImGuiKey_NavGamepadInput        = ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceUp,
+};
+
+enum ImGuiInputEventType
+{
+    ImGuiInputEventType_None = 0,
+    ImGuiInputEventType_MousePos,
+    ImGuiInputEventType_MouseWheel,
+    ImGuiInputEventType_MouseButton,
+    ImGuiInputEventType_MouseViewport,
+    ImGuiInputEventType_Key,
+    ImGuiInputEventType_Text,
+    ImGuiInputEventType_Focus,
+    ImGuiInputEventType_COUNT
+};
+
+enum ImGuiInputSource
+{
+    ImGuiInputSource_None = 0,
+    ImGuiInputSource_Mouse,
+    ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard,
+    ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad,
+    ImGuiInputSource_Clipboard,     // Currently only used by InputText()
+    ImGuiInputSource_Nav,           // Stored in g.ActiveIdSource only
+    ImGuiInputSource_COUNT
+};
+
+// FIXME: Structures in the union below need to be declared as anonymous unions appears to be an extension?
+// Using ImVec2() would fail on Clang 'union member 'MousePos' has a non-trivial default constructor'
+struct ImGuiInputEventMousePos      { float PosX, PosY; };
+struct ImGuiInputEventMouseWheel    { float WheelX, WheelY; };
+struct ImGuiInputEventMouseButton   { int Button; bool Down; };
+struct ImGuiInputEventMouseViewport { ImGuiID HoveredViewportID; };
+struct ImGuiInputEventKey           { ImGuiKey Key; bool Down; float AnalogValue; };
+struct ImGuiInputEventText          { unsigned int Char; };
+struct ImGuiInputEventAppFocused    { bool Focused; };
+
+struct ImGuiInputEvent
+{
+    ImGuiInputEventType             Type;
+    ImGuiInputSource                Source;
+    union
+    {
+        ImGuiInputEventMousePos     MousePos;       // if Type == ImGuiInputEventType_MousePos
+        ImGuiInputEventMouseWheel   MouseWheel;     // if Type == ImGuiInputEventType_MouseWheel
+        ImGuiInputEventMouseButton  MouseButton;    // if Type == ImGuiInputEventType_MouseButton
+        ImGuiInputEventMouseViewport MouseViewport; // if Type == ImGuiInputEventType_MouseViewport
+        ImGuiInputEventKey          Key;            // if Type == ImGuiInputEventType_Key
+        ImGuiInputEventText         Text;           // if Type == ImGuiInputEventType_Text
+        ImGuiInputEventAppFocused   AppFocused;     // if Type == ImGuiInputEventType_Focus
+    };
+    bool                            AddedByTestEngine;
+
+    ImGuiInputEvent() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+};
+
+// Flags for IsKeyPressedEx(). In upcoming feature this will be used more (and IsKeyPressedEx() renamed)
+// Don't mistake with ImGuiInputTextFlags! (for ImGui::InputText() function)
+enum ImGuiInputReadFlags_
+{
+    // Flags for IsKeyPressedEx()
+    ImGuiInputReadFlags_None                = 0,
+    ImGuiInputReadFlags_Repeat              = 1 << 0,   // Return true on successive repeats. Default for legacy IsKeyPressed(). NOT Default for legacy IsMouseClicked(). MUST BE == 1.
+
+    // Repeat rate
+    ImGuiInputReadFlags_RepeatRateDefault   = 1 << 1,   // Regular
+    ImGuiInputReadFlags_RepeatRateNavMove   = 1 << 2,   // Fast
+    ImGuiInputReadFlags_RepeatRateNavTweak  = 1 << 3,   // Faster
+    ImGuiInputReadFlags_RepeatRateMask_     = ImGuiInputReadFlags_RepeatRateDefault | ImGuiInputReadFlags_RepeatRateNavMove | ImGuiInputReadFlags_RepeatRateNavTweak,
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Clipper support
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+struct ImGuiListClipperRange
+{
+    int     Min;
+    int     Max;
+    bool    PosToIndexConvert;      // Begin/End are absolute position (will be converted to indices later)
+    ImS8    PosToIndexOffsetMin;    // Add to Min after converting to indices
+    ImS8    PosToIndexOffsetMax;    // Add to Min after converting to indices
+
+    static ImGuiListClipperRange    FromIndices(int min, int max)                               { ImGuiListClipperRange r = { min, max, false, 0, 0 }; return r; }
+    static ImGuiListClipperRange    FromPositions(float y1, float y2, int off_min, int off_max) { ImGuiListClipperRange r = { (int)y1, (int)y2, true, (ImS8)off_min, (ImS8)off_max }; return r; }
+};
+
+// Temporary clipper data, buffers shared/reused between instances
+struct ImGuiListClipperData
+{
+    ImGuiListClipper*               ListClipper;
+    float                           LossynessOffset;
+    int                             StepNo;
+    int                             ItemsFrozen;
+    ImVector<ImGuiListClipperRange> Ranges;
+
+    ImGuiListClipperData()          { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+    void                            Reset(ImGuiListClipper* clipper) { ListClipper = clipper; StepNo = ItemsFrozen = 0; Ranges.resize(0); }
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Navigation support
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+enum ImGuiActivateFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiActivateFlags_None                 = 0,
+    ImGuiActivateFlags_PreferInput          = 1 << 0,       // Favor activation that requires keyboard text input (e.g. for Slider/Drag). Default if keyboard is available.
+    ImGuiActivateFlags_PreferTweak          = 1 << 1,       // Favor activation for tweaking with arrows or gamepad (e.g. for Slider/Drag). Default if keyboard is not available.
+    ImGuiActivateFlags_TryToPreserveState   = 1 << 2,       // Request widget to preserve state if it can (e.g. InputText will try to preserve cursor/selection)
+};
+
+// Early work-in-progress API for ScrollToItem()
+enum ImGuiScrollFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiScrollFlags_None                   = 0,
+    ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeX       = 1 << 0,       // If item is not visible: scroll as little as possible on X axis to bring item back into view [default for X axis]
+    ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeY       = 1 << 1,       // If item is not visible: scroll as little as possible on Y axis to bring item back into view [default for Y axis for windows that are already visible]
+    ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleCenterX     = 1 << 2,       // If item is not visible: scroll to make the item centered on X axis [rarely used]
+    ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleCenterY     = 1 << 3,       // If item is not visible: scroll to make the item centered on Y axis
+    ImGuiScrollFlags_AlwaysCenterX          = 1 << 4,       // Always center the result item on X axis [rarely used]
+    ImGuiScrollFlags_AlwaysCenterY          = 1 << 5,       // Always center the result item on Y axis [default for Y axis for appearing window)
+    ImGuiScrollFlags_NoScrollParent         = 1 << 6,       // Disable forwarding scrolling to parent window if required to keep item/rect visible (only scroll window the function was applied to).
+    ImGuiScrollFlags_MaskX_                 = ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeX | ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleCenterX | ImGuiScrollFlags_AlwaysCenterX,
+    ImGuiScrollFlags_MaskY_                 = ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeY | ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleCenterY | ImGuiScrollFlags_AlwaysCenterY,
+};
+
+enum ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_None             = 0,
+    ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeDefault      = 1 << 0,
+    ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin         = 1 << 1,
+    ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_AlwaysDraw       = 1 << 2,       // Draw rectangular highlight if (g.NavId == id) _even_ when using the mouse.
+    ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_NoRounding       = 1 << 3,
+};
+
+enum ImGuiNavMoveFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiNavMoveFlags_None                  = 0,
+    ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopX                 = 1 << 0,   // On failed request, restart from opposite side
+    ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopY                 = 1 << 1,
+    ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX                 = 1 << 2,   // On failed request, request from opposite side one line down (when NavDir==right) or one line up (when NavDir==left)
+    ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapY                 = 1 << 3,   // This is not super useful but provided for completeness
+    ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AllowCurrentNavId     = 1 << 4,   // Allow scoring and considering the current NavId as a move target candidate. This is used when the move source is offset (e.g. pressing PageDown actually needs to send a Up move request, if we are pressing PageDown from the bottom-most item we need to stay in place)
+    ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AlsoScoreVisibleSet   = 1 << 5,   // Store alternate result in NavMoveResultLocalVisible that only comprise elements that are already fully visible (used by PageUp/PageDown)
+    ImGuiNavMoveFlags_ScrollToEdgeY         = 1 << 6,   // Force scrolling to min/max (used by Home/End) // FIXME-NAV: Aim to remove or reword, probably unnecessary
+    ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Forwarded             = 1 << 7,
+    ImGuiNavMoveFlags_DebugNoResult         = 1 << 8,   // Dummy scoring for debug purpose, don't apply result
+    ImGuiNavMoveFlags_FocusApi              = 1 << 9,
+    ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Tabbing               = 1 << 10,  // == Focus + Activate if item is Inputable + DontChangeNavHighlight
+    ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Activate              = 1 << 11,
+    ImGuiNavMoveFlags_DontSetNavHighlight   = 1 << 12,  // Do not alter the visible state of keyboard vs mouse nav highlight
+};
+
+enum ImGuiNavLayer
+{
+    ImGuiNavLayer_Main  = 0,    // Main scrolling layer
+    ImGuiNavLayer_Menu  = 1,    // Menu layer (access with Alt)
+    ImGuiNavLayer_COUNT
+};
+
+struct ImGuiNavItemData
+{
+    ImGuiWindow*        Window;         // Init,Move    // Best candidate window (result->ItemWindow->RootWindowForNav == request->Window)
+    ImGuiID             ID;             // Init,Move    // Best candidate item ID
+    ImGuiID             FocusScopeId;   // Init,Move    // Best candidate focus scope ID
+    ImRect              RectRel;        // Init,Move    // Best candidate bounding box in window relative space
+    ImGuiItemFlags      InFlags;        // ????,Move    // Best candidate item flags
+    float               DistBox;        //      Move    // Best candidate box distance to current NavId
+    float               DistCenter;     //      Move    // Best candidate center distance to current NavId
+    float               DistAxial;      //      Move    // Best candidate axial distance to current NavId
+
+    ImGuiNavItemData()  { Clear(); }
+    void Clear()        { Window = NULL; ID = FocusScopeId = 0; InFlags = 0; DistBox = DistCenter = DistAxial = FLT_MAX; }
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Columns support
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Flags for internal's BeginColumns(). Prefix using BeginTable() nowadays!
+enum ImGuiOldColumnFlags_
+{
+    ImGuiOldColumnFlags_None                    = 0,
+    ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoBorder                = 1 << 0,   // Disable column dividers
+    ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoResize                = 1 << 1,   // Disable resizing columns when clicking on the dividers
+    ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoPreserveWidths        = 1 << 2,   // Disable column width preservation when adjusting columns
+    ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoForceWithinWindow     = 1 << 3,   // Disable forcing columns to fit within window
+    ImGuiOldColumnFlags_GrowParentContentsSize  = 1 << 4,   // (WIP) Restore pre-1.51 behavior of extending the parent window contents size but _without affecting the columns width at all_. Will eventually remove.
+
+    // Obsolete names (will be removed)
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+    ImGuiColumnsFlags_None                      = ImGuiOldColumnFlags_None,
+    ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoBorder                  = ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoBorder,
+    ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoResize                  = ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoResize,
+    ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoPreserveWidths          = ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoPreserveWidths,
+    ImGuiColumnsFlags_NoForceWithinWindow       = ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoForceWithinWindow,
+    ImGuiColumnsFlags_GrowParentContentsSize    = ImGuiOldColumnFlags_GrowParentContentsSize,
+#endif
+};
+
+struct ImGuiOldColumnData
+{
+    float               OffsetNorm;             // Column start offset, normalized 0.0 (far left) -> 1.0 (far right)
+    float               OffsetNormBeforeResize;
+    ImGuiOldColumnFlags Flags;                  // Not exposed
+    ImRect              ClipRect;
+
+    ImGuiOldColumnData() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+};
+
+struct ImGuiOldColumns
+{
+    ImGuiID             ID;
+    ImGuiOldColumnFlags Flags;
+    bool                IsFirstFrame;
+    bool                IsBeingResized;
+    int                 Current;
+    int                 Count;
+    float               OffMinX, OffMaxX;       // Offsets from HostWorkRect.Min.x
+    float               LineMinY, LineMaxY;
+    float               HostCursorPosY;         // Backup of CursorPos at the time of BeginColumns()
+    float               HostCursorMaxPosX;      // Backup of CursorMaxPos at the time of BeginColumns()
+    ImRect              HostInitialClipRect;    // Backup of ClipRect at the time of BeginColumns()
+    ImRect              HostBackupClipRect;     // Backup of ClipRect during PushColumnsBackground()/PopColumnsBackground()
+    ImRect              HostBackupParentWorkRect;//Backup of WorkRect at the time of BeginColumns()
+    ImVector<ImGuiOldColumnData> Columns;
+    ImDrawListSplitter  Splitter;
+
+    ImGuiOldColumns()   { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Multi-select support
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#ifdef IMGUI_HAS_MULTI_SELECT
+// <this is filled in 'range_select' branch>
+#endif // #ifdef IMGUI_HAS_MULTI_SELECT
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Docking support
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#ifdef IMGUI_HAS_DOCK
+
+// Extend ImGuiDockNodeFlags_
+enum ImGuiDockNodeFlagsPrivate_
+{
+    // [Internal]
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags_DockSpace                = 1 << 10,  // Local, Saved  // A dockspace is a node that occupy space within an existing user window. Otherwise the node is floating and create its own window.
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags_CentralNode              = 1 << 11,  // Local, Saved  // The central node has 2 main properties: stay visible when empty, only use "remaining" spaces from its neighbor.
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoTabBar                 = 1 << 12,  // Local, Saved  // Tab bar is completely unavailable. No triangle in the corner to enable it back.
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags_HiddenTabBar             = 1 << 13,  // Local, Saved  // Tab bar is hidden, with a triangle in the corner to show it again (NB: actual tab-bar instance may be destroyed as this is only used for single-window tab bar)
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoWindowMenuButton       = 1 << 14,  // Local, Saved  // Disable window/docking menu (that one that appears instead of the collapse button)
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoCloseButton            = 1 << 15,  // Local, Saved  //
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDocking                = 1 << 16,  // Local, Saved  // Disable any form of docking in this dockspace or individual node. (On a whole dockspace, this pretty much defeat the purpose of using a dockspace at all). Note: when turned on, existing docked nodes will be preserved.
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingSplitMe         = 1 << 17,  // [EXPERIMENTAL] Prevent another window/node from splitting this node.
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingSplitOther      = 1 << 18,  // [EXPERIMENTAL] Prevent this node from splitting another window/node.
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingOverMe          = 1 << 19,  // [EXPERIMENTAL] Prevent another window/node to be docked over this node.
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingOverOther       = 1 << 20,  // [EXPERIMENTAL] Prevent this node to be docked over another window or non-empty node.
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingOverEmpty       = 1 << 21,  // [EXPERIMENTAL] Prevent this node to be docked over an empty node (e.g. DockSpace with no other windows)
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResizeX                = 1 << 22,  // [EXPERIMENTAL]
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResizeY                = 1 << 23,  // [EXPERIMENTAL]
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags_SharedFlagsInheritMask_  = ~0,
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResizeFlagsMask_       = ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResize | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResizeX | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResizeY,
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags_LocalFlagsMask_          = ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoSplit | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResizeFlagsMask_ | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_AutoHideTabBar | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_DockSpace | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_CentralNode | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoTabBar | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_HiddenTabBar | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoWindowMenuButton | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoCloseButton | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDocking,
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags_LocalFlagsTransferMask_  = ImGuiDockNodeFlags_LocalFlagsMask_ & ~ImGuiDockNodeFlags_DockSpace,  // When splitting those flags are moved to the inheriting child, never duplicated
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags_SavedFlagsMask_          = ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResizeFlagsMask_ | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_DockSpace | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_CentralNode | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoTabBar | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_HiddenTabBar | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoWindowMenuButton | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoCloseButton | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDocking
+};
+
+// Store the source authority (dock node vs window) of a field
+enum ImGuiDataAuthority_
+{
+    ImGuiDataAuthority_Auto,
+    ImGuiDataAuthority_DockNode,
+    ImGuiDataAuthority_Window,
+};
+
+enum ImGuiDockNodeState
+{
+    ImGuiDockNodeState_Unknown,
+    ImGuiDockNodeState_HostWindowHiddenBecauseSingleWindow,
+    ImGuiDockNodeState_HostWindowHiddenBecauseWindowsAreResizing,
+    ImGuiDockNodeState_HostWindowVisible,
+};
+
+// sizeof() 156~192
+struct IMGUI_API ImGuiDockNode
+{
+    ImGuiID                 ID;
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags      SharedFlags;                // (Write) Flags shared by all nodes of a same dockspace hierarchy (inherited from the root node)
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags      LocalFlags;                 // (Write) Flags specific to this node
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags      LocalFlagsInWindows;        // (Write) Flags specific to this node, applied from windows
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags      MergedFlags;                // (Read)  Effective flags (== SharedFlags | LocalFlagsInNode | LocalFlagsInWindows)
+    ImGuiDockNodeState      State;
+    ImGuiDockNode*          ParentNode;
+    ImGuiDockNode*          ChildNodes[2];              // [Split node only] Child nodes (left/right or top/bottom). Consider switching to an array.
+    ImVector<ImGuiWindow*>  Windows;                    // Note: unordered list! Iterate TabBar->Tabs for user-order.
+    ImGuiTabBar*            TabBar;
+    ImVec2                  Pos;                        // Current position
+    ImVec2                  Size;                       // Current size
+    ImVec2                  SizeRef;                    // [Split node only] Last explicitly written-to size (overridden when using a splitter affecting the node), used to calculate Size.
+    ImGuiAxis               SplitAxis;                  // [Split node only] Split axis (X or Y)
+    ImGuiWindowClass        WindowClass;                // [Root node only]
+    ImU32                   LastBgColor;
+
+    ImGuiWindow*            HostWindow;
+    ImGuiWindow*            VisibleWindow;              // Generally point to window which is ID is == SelectedTabID, but when CTRL+Tabbing this can be a different window.
+    ImGuiDockNode*          CentralNode;                // [Root node only] Pointer to central node.
+    ImGuiDockNode*          OnlyNodeWithWindows;        // [Root node only] Set when there is a single visible node within the hierarchy.
+    int                     CountNodeWithWindows;       // [Root node only]
+    int                     LastFrameAlive;             // Last frame number the node was updated or kept alive explicitly with DockSpace() + ImGuiDockNodeFlags_KeepAliveOnly
+    int                     LastFrameActive;            // Last frame number the node was updated.
+    int                     LastFrameFocused;           // Last frame number the node was focused.
+    ImGuiID                 LastFocusedNodeId;          // [Root node only] Which of our child docking node (any ancestor in the hierarchy) was last focused.
+    ImGuiID                 SelectedTabId;              // [Leaf node only] Which of our tab/window is selected.
+    ImGuiID                 WantCloseTabId;             // [Leaf node only] Set when closing a specific tab/window.
+    ImGuiDataAuthority      AuthorityForPos         :3;
+    ImGuiDataAuthority      AuthorityForSize        :3;
+    ImGuiDataAuthority      AuthorityForViewport    :3;
+    bool                    IsVisible               :1; // Set to false when the node is hidden (usually disabled as it has no active window)
+    bool                    IsFocused               :1;
+    bool                    IsBgDrawnThisFrame      :1;
+    bool                    HasCloseButton          :1; // Provide space for a close button (if any of the docked window has one). Note that button may be hidden on window without one.
+    bool                    HasWindowMenuButton     :1;
+    bool                    HasCentralNodeChild     :1;
+    bool                    WantCloseAll            :1; // Set when closing all tabs at once.
+    bool                    WantLockSizeOnce        :1;
+    bool                    WantMouseMove           :1; // After a node extraction we need to transition toward moving the newly created host window
+    bool                    WantHiddenTabBarUpdate  :1;
+    bool                    WantHiddenTabBarToggle  :1;
+
+    ImGuiDockNode(ImGuiID id);
+    ~ImGuiDockNode();
+    bool                    IsRootNode() const      { return ParentNode == NULL; }
+    bool                    IsDockSpace() const     { return (MergedFlags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_DockSpace) != 0; }
+    bool                    IsFloatingNode() const  { return ParentNode == NULL && (MergedFlags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_DockSpace) == 0; }
+    bool                    IsCentralNode() const   { return (MergedFlags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_CentralNode) != 0; }
+    bool                    IsHiddenTabBar() const  { return (MergedFlags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_HiddenTabBar) != 0; } // Hidden tab bar can be shown back by clicking the small triangle
+    bool                    IsNoTabBar() const      { return (MergedFlags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoTabBar) != 0; }     // Never show a tab bar
+    bool                    IsSplitNode() const     { return ChildNodes[0] != NULL; }
+    bool                    IsLeafNode() const      { return ChildNodes[0] == NULL; }
+    bool                    IsEmpty() const         { return ChildNodes[0] == NULL && Windows.Size == 0; }
+    ImRect                  Rect() const            { return ImRect(Pos.x, Pos.y, Pos.x + Size.x, Pos.y + Size.y); }
+
+    void                    SetLocalFlags(ImGuiDockNodeFlags flags) { LocalFlags = flags; UpdateMergedFlags(); }
+    void                    UpdateMergedFlags()     { MergedFlags = SharedFlags | LocalFlags | LocalFlagsInWindows; }
+};
+
+// List of colors that are stored at the time of Begin() into Docked Windows.
+// We currently store the packed colors in a simple array window->DockStyle.Colors[].
+// A better solution may involve appending into a log of colors in ImGuiContext + store offsets into those arrays in ImGuiWindow,
+// but it would be more complex as we'd need to double-buffer both as e.g. drop target may refer to window from last frame.
+enum ImGuiWindowDockStyleCol
+{
+    ImGuiWindowDockStyleCol_Text,
+    ImGuiWindowDockStyleCol_Tab,
+    ImGuiWindowDockStyleCol_TabHovered,
+    ImGuiWindowDockStyleCol_TabActive,
+    ImGuiWindowDockStyleCol_TabUnfocused,
+    ImGuiWindowDockStyleCol_TabUnfocusedActive,
+    ImGuiWindowDockStyleCol_COUNT
+};
+
+struct ImGuiWindowDockStyle
+{
+    ImU32 Colors[ImGuiWindowDockStyleCol_COUNT];
+};
+
+struct ImGuiDockContext
+{
+    ImGuiStorage                    Nodes;          // Map ID -> ImGuiDockNode*: Active nodes
+    ImVector<ImGuiDockRequest>      Requests;
+    ImVector<ImGuiDockNodeSettings> NodesSettings;
+    bool                            WantFullRebuild;
+    ImGuiDockContext()              { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+};
+
+#endif // #ifdef IMGUI_HAS_DOCK
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Viewport support
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// ImGuiViewport Private/Internals fields (cardinal sin: we are using inheritance!)
+// Every instance of ImGuiViewport is in fact a ImGuiViewportP.
+struct ImGuiViewportP : public ImGuiViewport
+{
+    int                 Idx;
+    int                 LastFrameActive;        // Last frame number this viewport was activated by a window
+    int                 LastFrontMostStampCount;// Last stamp number from when a window hosted by this viewport was made front-most (by comparing this value between two viewport we have an implicit viewport z-order
+    ImGuiID             LastNameHash;
+    ImVec2              LastPos;
+    float               Alpha;                  // Window opacity (when dragging dockable windows/viewports we make them transparent)
+    float               LastAlpha;
+    short               PlatformMonitor;
+    bool                PlatformWindowCreated;
+    ImGuiWindow*        Window;                 // Set when the viewport is owned by a window (and ImGuiViewportFlags_CanHostOtherWindows is NOT set)
+    int                 DrawListsLastFrame[2];  // Last frame number the background (0) and foreground (1) draw lists were used
+    ImDrawList*         DrawLists[2];           // Convenience background (0) and foreground (1) draw lists. We use them to draw software mouser cursor when io.MouseDrawCursor is set and to draw most debug overlays.
+    ImDrawData          DrawDataP;
+    ImDrawDataBuilder   DrawDataBuilder;
+    ImVec2              LastPlatformPos;
+    ImVec2              LastPlatformSize;
+    ImVec2              LastRendererSize;
+    ImVec2              WorkOffsetMin;          // Work Area: Offset from Pos to top-left corner of Work Area. Generally (0,0) or (0,+main_menu_bar_height). Work Area is Full Area but without menu-bars/status-bars (so WorkArea always fit inside Pos/Size!)
+    ImVec2              WorkOffsetMax;          // Work Area: Offset from Pos+Size to bottom-right corner of Work Area. Generally (0,0) or (0,-status_bar_height).
+    ImVec2              BuildWorkOffsetMin;     // Work Area: Offset being built during current frame. Generally >= 0.0f.
+    ImVec2              BuildWorkOffsetMax;     // Work Area: Offset being built during current frame. Generally <= 0.0f.
+
+    ImGuiViewportP()                    { Idx = -1; LastFrameActive = DrawListsLastFrame[0] = DrawListsLastFrame[1] = LastFrontMostStampCount = -1; LastNameHash = 0; Alpha = LastAlpha = 1.0f; PlatformMonitor = -1; PlatformWindowCreated = false; Window = NULL; DrawLists[0] = DrawLists[1] = NULL; LastPlatformPos = LastPlatformSize = LastRendererSize = ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX); }
+    ~ImGuiViewportP()                   { if (DrawLists[0]) IM_DELETE(DrawLists[0]); if (DrawLists[1]) IM_DELETE(DrawLists[1]); }
+    void    ClearRequestFlags()         { PlatformRequestClose = PlatformRequestMove = PlatformRequestResize = false; }
+
+    // Calculate work rect pos/size given a set of offset (we have 1 pair of offset for rect locked from last frame data, and 1 pair for currently building rect)
+    ImVec2  CalcWorkRectPos(const ImVec2& off_min) const                            { return ImVec2(Pos.x + off_min.x, Pos.y + off_min.y); }
+    ImVec2  CalcWorkRectSize(const ImVec2& off_min, const ImVec2& off_max) const    { return ImVec2(ImMax(0.0f, Size.x - off_min.x + off_max.x), ImMax(0.0f, Size.y - off_min.y + off_max.y)); }
+    void    UpdateWorkRect()            { WorkPos = CalcWorkRectPos(WorkOffsetMin); WorkSize = CalcWorkRectSize(WorkOffsetMin, WorkOffsetMax); } // Update public fields
+
+    // Helpers to retrieve ImRect (we don't need to store BuildWorkRect as every access tend to change it, hence the code asymmetry)
+    ImRect  GetMainRect() const         { return ImRect(Pos.x, Pos.y, Pos.x + Size.x, Pos.y + Size.y); }
+    ImRect  GetWorkRect() const         { return ImRect(WorkPos.x, WorkPos.y, WorkPos.x + WorkSize.x, WorkPos.y + WorkSize.y); }
+    ImRect  GetBuildWorkRect() const    { ImVec2 pos = CalcWorkRectPos(BuildWorkOffsetMin); ImVec2 size = CalcWorkRectSize(BuildWorkOffsetMin, BuildWorkOffsetMax); return ImRect(pos.x, pos.y, pos.x + size.x, pos.y + size.y); }
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Settings support
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Windows data saved in imgui.ini file
+// Because we never destroy or rename ImGuiWindowSettings, we can store the names in a separate buffer easily.
+// (this is designed to be stored in a ImChunkStream buffer, with the variable-length Name following our structure)
+struct ImGuiWindowSettings
+{
+    ImGuiID     ID;
+    ImVec2ih    Pos;            // NB: Settings position are stored RELATIVE to the viewport! Whereas runtime ones are absolute positions.
+    ImVec2ih    Size;
+    ImVec2ih    ViewportPos;
+    ImGuiID     ViewportId;
+    ImGuiID     DockId;         // ID of last known DockNode (even if the DockNode is invisible because it has only 1 active window), or 0 if none.
+    ImGuiID     ClassId;        // ID of window class if specified
+    short       DockOrder;      // Order of the last time the window was visible within its DockNode. This is used to reorder windows that are reappearing on the same frame. Same value between windows that were active and windows that were none are possible.
+    bool        Collapsed;
+    bool        WantApply;      // Set when loaded from .ini data (to enable merging/loading .ini data into an already running context)
+
+    ImGuiWindowSettings()       { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); DockOrder = -1; }
+    char* GetName()             { return (char*)(this + 1); }
+};
+
+struct ImGuiSettingsHandler
+{
+    const char* TypeName;       // Short description stored in .ini file. Disallowed characters: '[' ']'
+    ImGuiID     TypeHash;       // == ImHashStr(TypeName)
+    void        (*ClearAllFn)(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler);                                // Clear all settings data
+    void        (*ReadInitFn)(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler);                                // Read: Called before reading (in registration order)
+    void*       (*ReadOpenFn)(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler, const char* name);              // Read: Called when entering into a new ini entry e.g. "[Window][Name]"
+    void        (*ReadLineFn)(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler, void* entry, const char* line); // Read: Called for every line of text within an ini entry
+    void        (*ApplyAllFn)(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler);                                // Read: Called after reading (in registration order)
+    void        (*WriteAllFn)(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler, ImGuiTextBuffer* out_buf);      // Write: Output every entries into 'out_buf'
+    void*       UserData;
+
+    ImGuiSettingsHandler() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Metrics, Debug Tools
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+enum ImGuiDebugLogFlags_
+{
+    // Event types
+    ImGuiDebugLogFlags_None             = 0,
+    ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventActiveId    = 1 << 0,
+    ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventFocus       = 1 << 1,
+    ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventPopup       = 1 << 2,
+    ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventNav         = 1 << 3,
+    ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventIO          = 1 << 4,
+    ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventDocking     = 1 << 5,
+    ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventViewport    = 1 << 6,
+    ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventMask_       = ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventActiveId  | ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventFocus | ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventPopup | ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventNav | ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventIO | ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventDocking | ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventViewport,
+    ImGuiDebugLogFlags_OutputToTTY      = 1 << 10,  // Also send output to TTY
+};
+
+struct ImGuiMetricsConfig
+{
+    bool        ShowDebugLog;
+    bool        ShowStackTool;
+    bool        ShowWindowsRects;
+    bool        ShowWindowsBeginOrder;
+    bool        ShowTablesRects;
+    bool        ShowDrawCmdMesh;
+    bool        ShowDrawCmdBoundingBoxes;
+    bool        ShowDockingNodes;
+    int         ShowWindowsRectsType;
+    int         ShowTablesRectsType;
+
+    ImGuiMetricsConfig()
+    {
+        ShowDebugLog = ShowStackTool = ShowWindowsRects = ShowWindowsBeginOrder = ShowTablesRects = false;
+        ShowDrawCmdMesh = true;
+        ShowDrawCmdBoundingBoxes = true;
+        ShowDockingNodes = false;
+        ShowWindowsRectsType = ShowTablesRectsType = -1;
+    }
+};
+
+struct ImGuiStackLevelInfo
+{
+    ImGuiID                 ID;
+    ImS8                    QueryFrameCount;            // >= 1: Query in progress
+    bool                    QuerySuccess;               // Obtained result from DebugHookIdInfo()
+    ImGuiDataType           DataType : 8;
+    char                    Desc[57];                   // Arbitrarily sized buffer to hold a result (FIXME: could replace Results[] with a chunk stream?) FIXME: Now that we added CTRL+C this should be fixed.
+
+    ImGuiStackLevelInfo()   { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+};
+
+// State for Stack tool queries
+struct ImGuiStackTool
+{
+    int                     LastActiveFrame;
+    int                     StackLevel;                 // -1: query stack and resize Results, >= 0: individual stack level
+    ImGuiID                 QueryId;                    // ID to query details for
+    ImVector<ImGuiStackLevelInfo> Results;
+    bool                    CopyToClipboardOnCtrlC;
+    float                   CopyToClipboardLastTime;
+
+    ImGuiStackTool()        { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); CopyToClipboardLastTime = -FLT_MAX; }
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Generic context hooks
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+typedef void (*ImGuiContextHookCallback)(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiContextHook* hook);
+enum ImGuiContextHookType { ImGuiContextHookType_NewFramePre, ImGuiContextHookType_NewFramePost, ImGuiContextHookType_EndFramePre, ImGuiContextHookType_EndFramePost, ImGuiContextHookType_RenderPre, ImGuiContextHookType_RenderPost, ImGuiContextHookType_Shutdown, ImGuiContextHookType_PendingRemoval_ };
+
+struct ImGuiContextHook
+{
+    ImGuiID                     HookId;     // A unique ID assigned by AddContextHook()
+    ImGuiContextHookType        Type;
+    ImGuiID                     Owner;
+    ImGuiContextHookCallback    Callback;
+    void*                       UserData;
+
+    ImGuiContextHook()          { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] ImGuiContext (main Dear ImGui context)
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+struct ImGuiContext
+{
+    bool                    Initialized;
+    bool                    FontAtlasOwnedByContext;            // IO.Fonts-> is owned by the ImGuiContext and will be destructed along with it.
+    ImGuiIO                 IO;
+    ImGuiPlatformIO         PlatformIO;
+    ImVector<ImGuiInputEvent> InputEventsQueue;                 // Input events which will be tricked/written into IO structure.
+    ImVector<ImGuiInputEvent> InputEventsTrail;                 // Past input events processed in NewFrame(). This is to allow domain-specific application to access e.g mouse/pen trail.
+    ImGuiStyle              Style;
+    ImGuiConfigFlags        ConfigFlagsCurrFrame;               // = g.IO.ConfigFlags at the time of NewFrame()
+    ImGuiConfigFlags        ConfigFlagsLastFrame;
+    ImFont*                 Font;                               // (Shortcut) == FontStack.empty() ? IO.Font : FontStack.back()
+    float                   FontSize;                           // (Shortcut) == FontBaseSize * g.CurrentWindow->FontWindowScale == window->FontSize(). Text height for current window.
+    float                   FontBaseSize;                       // (Shortcut) == IO.FontGlobalScale * Font->Scale * Font->FontSize. Base text height.
+    ImDrawListSharedData    DrawListSharedData;
+    double                  Time;
+    int                     FrameCount;
+    int                     FrameCountEnded;
+    int                     FrameCountPlatformEnded;
+    int                     FrameCountRendered;
+    bool                    WithinFrameScope;                   // Set by NewFrame(), cleared by EndFrame()
+    bool                    WithinFrameScopeWithImplicitWindow; // Set by NewFrame(), cleared by EndFrame() when the implicit debug window has been pushed
+    bool                    WithinEndChild;                     // Set within EndChild()
+    bool                    GcCompactAll;                       // Request full GC
+    bool                    TestEngineHookItems;                // Will call test engine hooks: ImGuiTestEngineHook_ItemAdd(), ImGuiTestEngineHook_ItemInfo(), ImGuiTestEngineHook_Log()
+    void*                   TestEngine;                         // Test engine user data
+
+    // Windows state
+    ImVector<ImGuiWindow*>  Windows;                            // Windows, sorted in display order, back to front
+    ImVector<ImGuiWindow*>  WindowsFocusOrder;                  // Root windows, sorted in focus order, back to front.
+    ImVector<ImGuiWindow*>  WindowsTempSortBuffer;              // Temporary buffer used in EndFrame() to reorder windows so parents are kept before their child
+    ImVector<ImGuiWindowStackData> CurrentWindowStack;
+    ImGuiStorage            WindowsById;                        // Map window's ImGuiID to ImGuiWindow*
+    int                     WindowsActiveCount;                 // Number of unique windows submitted by frame
+    ImVec2                  WindowsHoverPadding;                // Padding around resizable windows for which hovering on counts as hovering the window == ImMax(style.TouchExtraPadding, WINDOWS_HOVER_PADDING)
+    ImGuiWindow*            CurrentWindow;                      // Window being drawn into
+    ImGuiWindow*            HoveredWindow;                      // Window the mouse is hovering. Will typically catch mouse inputs.
+    ImGuiWindow*            HoveredWindowUnderMovingWindow;     // Hovered window ignoring MovingWindow. Only set if MovingWindow is set.
+    ImGuiDockNode*          HoveredDockNode;                    // [Debug] Hovered dock node.
+    ImGuiWindow*            MovingWindow;                       // Track the window we clicked on (in order to preserve focus). The actual window that is moved is generally MovingWindow->RootWindowDockTree.
+    ImGuiWindow*            WheelingWindow;                     // Track the window we started mouse-wheeling on. Until a timer elapse or mouse has moved, generally keep scrolling the same window even if during the course of scrolling the mouse ends up hovering a child window.
+    ImVec2                  WheelingWindowRefMousePos;
+    float                   WheelingWindowTimer;
+
+    // Item/widgets state and tracking information
+    ImGuiID                 DebugHookIdInfo;                    // Will call core hooks: DebugHookIdInfo() from GetID functions, used by Stack Tool [next HoveredId/ActiveId to not pull in an extra cache-line]
+    ImGuiID                 HoveredId;                          // Hovered widget, filled during the frame
+    ImGuiID                 HoveredIdPreviousFrame;
+    bool                    HoveredIdAllowOverlap;
+    bool                    HoveredIdUsingMouseWheel;           // Hovered widget will use mouse wheel. Blocks scrolling the underlying window.
+    bool                    HoveredIdPreviousFrameUsingMouseWheel;
+    bool                    HoveredIdDisabled;                  // At least one widget passed the rect test, but has been discarded by disabled flag or popup inhibit. May be true even if HoveredId == 0.
+    float                   HoveredIdTimer;                     // Measure contiguous hovering time
+    float                   HoveredIdNotActiveTimer;            // Measure contiguous hovering time where the item has not been active
+    ImGuiID                 ActiveId;                           // Active widget
+    ImGuiID                 ActiveIdIsAlive;                    // Active widget has been seen this frame (we can't use a bool as the ActiveId may change within the frame)
+    float                   ActiveIdTimer;
+    bool                    ActiveIdIsJustActivated;            // Set at the time of activation for one frame
+    bool                    ActiveIdAllowOverlap;               // Active widget allows another widget to steal active id (generally for overlapping widgets, but not always)
+    bool                    ActiveIdNoClearOnFocusLoss;         // Disable losing active id if the active id window gets unfocused.
+    bool                    ActiveIdHasBeenPressedBefore;       // Track whether the active id led to a press (this is to allow changing between PressOnClick and PressOnRelease without pressing twice). Used by range_select branch.
+    bool                    ActiveIdHasBeenEditedBefore;        // Was the value associated to the widget Edited over the course of the Active state.
+    bool                    ActiveIdHasBeenEditedThisFrame;
+    ImVec2                  ActiveIdClickOffset;                // Clicked offset from upper-left corner, if applicable (currently only set by ButtonBehavior)
+    ImGuiWindow*            ActiveIdWindow;
+    ImGuiInputSource        ActiveIdSource;                     // Activating with mouse or nav (gamepad/keyboard)
+    int                     ActiveIdMouseButton;
+    ImGuiID                 ActiveIdPreviousFrame;
+    bool                    ActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive;
+    bool                    ActiveIdPreviousFrameHasBeenEditedBefore;
+    ImGuiWindow*            ActiveIdPreviousFrameWindow;
+    ImGuiID                 LastActiveId;                       // Store the last non-zero ActiveId, useful for animation.
+    float                   LastActiveIdTimer;                  // Store the last non-zero ActiveId timer since the beginning of activation, useful for animation.
+
+    // Input Ownership
+    bool                    ActiveIdUsingMouseWheel;            // Active widget will want to read mouse wheel. Blocks scrolling the underlying window.
+    ImU32                   ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask;            // Active widget will want to read those nav move requests (e.g. can activate a button and move away from it)
+    ImBitArrayForNamedKeys  ActiveIdUsingKeyInputMask;          // Active widget will want to read those key inputs. When we grow the ImGuiKey enum we'll need to either to order the enum to make useful keys come first, either redesign this into e.g. a small array.
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
+    ImU32                   ActiveIdUsingNavInputMask;          // If you used this. Since (IMGUI_VERSION_NUM >= 18804) : 'g.ActiveIdUsingNavInputMask |= (1 << ImGuiNavInput_Cancel);' becomes 'SetActiveIdUsingKey(ImGuiKey_Escape); SetActiveIdUsingKey(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadCancel);'
+#endif
+
+    // Next window/item data
+    ImGuiItemFlags          CurrentItemFlags;                   // == g.ItemFlagsStack.back()
+    ImGuiNextItemData       NextItemData;                       // Storage for SetNextItem** functions
+    ImGuiLastItemData       LastItemData;                       // Storage for last submitted item (setup by ItemAdd)
+    ImGuiNextWindowData     NextWindowData;                     // Storage for SetNextWindow** functions
+
+    // Shared stacks
+    ImVector<ImGuiColorMod> ColorStack;                         // Stack for PushStyleColor()/PopStyleColor() - inherited by Begin()
+    ImVector<ImGuiStyleMod> StyleVarStack;                      // Stack for PushStyleVar()/PopStyleVar() - inherited by Begin()
+    ImVector<ImFont*>       FontStack;                          // Stack for PushFont()/PopFont() - inherited by Begin()
+    ImVector<ImGuiID>       FocusScopeStack;                    // Stack for PushFocusScope()/PopFocusScope() - not inherited by Begin(), unless child window
+    ImVector<ImGuiItemFlags>ItemFlagsStack;                     // Stack for PushItemFlag()/PopItemFlag() - inherited by Begin()
+    ImVector<ImGuiGroupData>GroupStack;                         // Stack for BeginGroup()/EndGroup() - not inherited by Begin()
+    ImVector<ImGuiPopupData>OpenPopupStack;                     // Which popups are open (persistent)
+    ImVector<ImGuiPopupData>BeginPopupStack;                    // Which level of BeginPopup() we are in (reset every frame)
+    int                     BeginMenuCount;
+
+    // Viewports
+    ImVector<ImGuiViewportP*> Viewports;                        // Active viewports (always 1+, and generally 1 unless multi-viewports are enabled). Each viewports hold their copy of ImDrawData.
+    float                   CurrentDpiScale;                    // == CurrentViewport->DpiScale
+    ImGuiViewportP*         CurrentViewport;                    // We track changes of viewport (happening in Begin) so we can call Platform_OnChangedViewport()
+    ImGuiViewportP*         MouseViewport;
+    ImGuiViewportP*         MouseLastHoveredViewport;           // Last known viewport that was hovered by mouse (even if we are not hovering any viewport any more) + honoring the _NoInputs flag.
+    ImGuiID                 PlatformLastFocusedViewportId;
+    ImGuiPlatformMonitor    FallbackMonitor;                    // Virtual monitor used as fallback if backend doesn't provide monitor information.
+    int                     ViewportFrontMostStampCount;        // Every time the front-most window changes, we stamp its viewport with an incrementing counter
+
+    // Gamepad/keyboard Navigation
+    ImGuiWindow*            NavWindow;                          // Focused window for navigation. Could be called 'FocusedWindow'
+    ImGuiID                 NavId;                              // Focused item for navigation
+    ImGuiID                 NavFocusScopeId;                    // Identify a selection scope (selection code often wants to "clear other items" when landing on an item of the selection set)
+    ImGuiID                 NavActivateId;                      // ~~ (g.ActiveId == 0) && (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Space) || IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadActivate)) ? NavId : 0, also set when calling ActivateItem()
+    ImGuiID                 NavActivateDownId;                  // ~~ IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_Space) || IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadActivate) ? NavId : 0
+    ImGuiID                 NavActivatePressedId;               // ~~ IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Space) || IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadActivate) ? NavId : 0 (no repeat)
+    ImGuiID                 NavActivateInputId;                 // ~~ IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Enter) || IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadInput) ? NavId : 0; ImGuiActivateFlags_PreferInput will be set and NavActivateId will be 0.
+    ImGuiActivateFlags      NavActivateFlags;
+    ImGuiID                 NavJustMovedToId;                   // Just navigated to this id (result of a successfully MoveRequest).
+    ImGuiID                 NavJustMovedToFocusScopeId;         // Just navigated to this focus scope id (result of a successfully MoveRequest).
+    ImGuiModFlags           NavJustMovedToKeyMods;
+    ImGuiID                 NavNextActivateId;                  // Set by ActivateItem(), queued until next frame.
+    ImGuiActivateFlags      NavNextActivateFlags;
+    ImGuiInputSource        NavInputSource;                     // Keyboard or Gamepad mode? THIS WILL ONLY BE None or NavGamepad or NavKeyboard.
+    ImGuiNavLayer           NavLayer;                           // Layer we are navigating on. For now the system is hard-coded for 0=main contents and 1=menu/title bar, may expose layers later.
+    bool                    NavIdIsAlive;                       // Nav widget has been seen this frame ~~ NavRectRel is valid
+    bool                    NavMousePosDirty;                   // When set we will update mouse position if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos) if set (NB: this not enabled by default)
+    bool                    NavDisableHighlight;                // When user starts using mouse, we hide gamepad/keyboard highlight (NB: but they are still available, which is why NavDisableHighlight isn't always != NavDisableMouseHover)
+    bool                    NavDisableMouseHover;               // When user starts using gamepad/keyboard, we hide mouse hovering highlight until mouse is touched again.
+
+    // Navigation: Init & Move Requests
+    bool                    NavAnyRequest;                      // ~~ NavMoveRequest || NavInitRequest this is to perform early out in ItemAdd()
+    bool                    NavInitRequest;                     // Init request for appearing window to select first item
+    bool                    NavInitRequestFromMove;
+    ImGuiID                 NavInitResultId;                    // Init request result (first item of the window, or one for which SetItemDefaultFocus() was called)
+    ImRect                  NavInitResultRectRel;               // Init request result rectangle (relative to parent window)
+    bool                    NavMoveSubmitted;                   // Move request submitted, will process result on next NewFrame()
+    bool                    NavMoveScoringItems;                // Move request submitted, still scoring incoming items
+    bool                    NavMoveForwardToNextFrame;
+    ImGuiNavMoveFlags       NavMoveFlags;
+    ImGuiScrollFlags        NavMoveScrollFlags;
+    ImGuiModFlags           NavMoveKeyMods;
+    ImGuiDir                NavMoveDir;                         // Direction of the move request (left/right/up/down)
+    ImGuiDir                NavMoveDirForDebug;
+    ImGuiDir                NavMoveClipDir;                     // FIXME-NAV: Describe the purpose of this better. Might want to rename?
+    ImRect                  NavScoringRect;                     // Rectangle used for scoring, in screen space. Based of window->NavRectRel[], modified for directional navigation scoring.
+    ImRect                  NavScoringNoClipRect;               // Some nav operations (such as PageUp/PageDown) enforce a region which clipper will attempt to always keep submitted
+    int                     NavScoringDebugCount;               // Metrics for debugging
+    int                     NavTabbingDir;                      // Generally -1 or +1, 0 when tabbing without a nav id
+    int                     NavTabbingCounter;                  // >0 when counting items for tabbing
+    ImGuiNavItemData        NavMoveResultLocal;                 // Best move request candidate within NavWindow
+    ImGuiNavItemData        NavMoveResultLocalVisible;          // Best move request candidate within NavWindow that are mostly visible (when using ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AlsoScoreVisibleSet flag)
+    ImGuiNavItemData        NavMoveResultOther;                 // Best move request candidate within NavWindow's flattened hierarchy (when using ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened flag)
+    ImGuiNavItemData        NavTabbingResultFirst;              // First tabbing request candidate within NavWindow and flattened hierarchy
+
+    // Navigation: Windowing (CTRL+TAB for list, or Menu button + keys or directional pads to move/resize)
+    ImGuiWindow*            NavWindowingTarget;                 // Target window when doing CTRL+Tab (or Pad Menu + FocusPrev/Next), this window is temporarily displayed top-most!
+    ImGuiWindow*            NavWindowingTargetAnim;             // Record of last valid NavWindowingTarget until DimBgRatio and NavWindowingHighlightAlpha becomes 0.0f, so the fade-out can stay on it.
+    ImGuiWindow*            NavWindowingListWindow;             // Internal window actually listing the CTRL+Tab contents
+    float                   NavWindowingTimer;
+    float                   NavWindowingHighlightAlpha;
+    bool                    NavWindowingToggleLayer;
+    ImVec2                  NavWindowingAccumDeltaPos;
+    ImVec2                  NavWindowingAccumDeltaSize;
+
+    // Render
+    float                   DimBgRatio;                         // 0.0..1.0 animation when fading in a dimming background (for modal window and CTRL+TAB list)
+    ImGuiMouseCursor        MouseCursor;
+
+    // Drag and Drop
+    bool                    DragDropActive;
+    bool                    DragDropWithinSource;               // Set when within a BeginDragDropXXX/EndDragDropXXX block for a drag source.
+    bool                    DragDropWithinTarget;               // Set when within a BeginDragDropXXX/EndDragDropXXX block for a drag target.
+    ImGuiDragDropFlags      DragDropSourceFlags;
+    int                     DragDropSourceFrameCount;
+    int                     DragDropMouseButton;
+    ImGuiPayload            DragDropPayload;
+    ImRect                  DragDropTargetRect;                 // Store rectangle of current target candidate (we favor small targets when overlapping)
+    ImGuiID                 DragDropTargetId;
+    ImGuiDragDropFlags      DragDropAcceptFlags;
+    float                   DragDropAcceptIdCurrRectSurface;    // Target item surface (we resolve overlapping targets by prioritizing the smaller surface)
+    ImGuiID                 DragDropAcceptIdCurr;               // Target item id (set at the time of accepting the payload)
+    ImGuiID                 DragDropAcceptIdPrev;               // Target item id from previous frame (we need to store this to allow for overlapping drag and drop targets)
+    int                     DragDropAcceptFrameCount;           // Last time a target expressed a desire to accept the source
+    ImGuiID                 DragDropHoldJustPressedId;          // Set when holding a payload just made ButtonBehavior() return a press.
+    ImVector<unsigned char> DragDropPayloadBufHeap;             // We don't expose the ImVector<> directly, ImGuiPayload only holds pointer+size
+    unsigned char           DragDropPayloadBufLocal[16];        // Local buffer for small payloads
+
+    // Clipper
+    int                             ClipperTempDataStacked;
+    ImVector<ImGuiListClipperData>  ClipperTempData;
+
+    // Tables
+    ImGuiTable*                     CurrentTable;
+    int                             TablesTempDataStacked;      // Temporary table data size (because we leave previous instances undestructed, we generally don't use TablesTempData.Size)
+    ImVector<ImGuiTableTempData>    TablesTempData;             // Temporary table data (buffers reused/shared across instances, support nesting)
+    ImPool<ImGuiTable>              Tables;                     // Persistent table data
+    ImVector<float>                 TablesLastTimeActive;       // Last used timestamp of each tables (SOA, for efficient GC)
+    ImVector<ImDrawChannel>         DrawChannelsTempMergeBuffer;
+
+    // Tab bars
+    ImGuiTabBar*                    CurrentTabBar;
+    ImPool<ImGuiTabBar>             TabBars;
+    ImVector<ImGuiPtrOrIndex>       CurrentTabBarStack;
+    ImVector<ImGuiShrinkWidthItem>  ShrinkWidthBuffer;
+
+    // Widget state
+    ImVec2                  MouseLastValidPos;
+    ImGuiInputTextState     InputTextState;
+    ImFont                  InputTextPasswordFont;
+    ImGuiID                 TempInputId;                        // Temporary text input when CTRL+clicking on a slider, etc.
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags     ColorEditOptions;                   // Store user options for color edit widgets
+    float                   ColorEditLastHue;                   // Backup of last Hue associated to LastColor, so we can restore Hue in lossy RGB<>HSV round trips
+    float                   ColorEditLastSat;                   // Backup of last Saturation associated to LastColor, so we can restore Saturation in lossy RGB<>HSV round trips
+    ImU32                   ColorEditLastColor;                 // RGB value with alpha set to 0.
+    ImVec4                  ColorPickerRef;                     // Initial/reference color at the time of opening the color picker.
+    ImGuiComboPreviewData   ComboPreviewData;
+    float                   SliderGrabClickOffset;
+    float                   SliderCurrentAccum;                 // Accumulated slider delta when using navigation controls.
+    bool                    SliderCurrentAccumDirty;            // Has the accumulated slider delta changed since last time we tried to apply it?
+    bool                    DragCurrentAccumDirty;
+    float                   DragCurrentAccum;                   // Accumulator for dragging modification. Always high-precision, not rounded by end-user precision settings
+    float                   DragSpeedDefaultRatio;              // If speed == 0.0f, uses (max-min) * DragSpeedDefaultRatio
+    float                   ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter;    // Distance between mouse and center of grab box, normalized in parent space. Use storage?
+    float                   DisabledAlphaBackup;                // Backup for style.Alpha for BeginDisabled()
+    short                   DisabledStackSize;
+    short                   TooltipOverrideCount;
+    float                   TooltipSlowDelay;                   // Time before slow tooltips appears (FIXME: This is temporary until we merge in tooltip timer+priority work)
+    ImVector<char>          ClipboardHandlerData;               // If no custom clipboard handler is defined
+    ImVector<ImGuiID>       MenusIdSubmittedThisFrame;          // A list of menu IDs that were rendered at least once
+
+    // Platform support
+    ImGuiPlatformImeData    PlatformImeData;                    // Data updated by current frame
+    ImGuiPlatformImeData    PlatformImeDataPrev;                // Previous frame data (when changing we will call io.SetPlatformImeDataFn
+    ImGuiID                 PlatformImeViewport;
+    char                    PlatformLocaleDecimalPoint;         // '.' or *localeconv()->decimal_point
+
+    // Extensions
+    // FIXME: We could provide an API to register one slot in an array held in ImGuiContext?
+    ImGuiDockContext        DockContext;
+
+    // Settings
+    bool                    SettingsLoaded;
+    float                   SettingsDirtyTimer;                 // Save .ini Settings to memory when time reaches zero
+    ImGuiTextBuffer         SettingsIniData;                    // In memory .ini settings
+    ImVector<ImGuiSettingsHandler>      SettingsHandlers;       // List of .ini settings handlers
+    ImChunkStream<ImGuiWindowSettings>  SettingsWindows;        // ImGuiWindow .ini settings entries
+    ImChunkStream<ImGuiTableSettings>   SettingsTables;         // ImGuiTable .ini settings entries
+    ImVector<ImGuiContextHook>          Hooks;                  // Hooks for extensions (e.g. test engine)
+    ImGuiID                             HookIdNext;             // Next available HookId
+
+    // Capture/Logging
+    bool                    LogEnabled;                         // Currently capturing
+    ImGuiLogType            LogType;                            // Capture target
+    ImFileHandle            LogFile;                            // If != NULL log to stdout/ file
+    ImGuiTextBuffer         LogBuffer;                          // Accumulation buffer when log to clipboard. This is pointer so our GImGui static constructor doesn't call heap allocators.
+    const char*             LogNextPrefix;
+    const char*             LogNextSuffix;
+    float                   LogLinePosY;
+    bool                    LogLineFirstItem;
+    int                     LogDepthRef;
+    int                     LogDepthToExpand;
+    int                     LogDepthToExpandDefault;            // Default/stored value for LogDepthMaxExpand if not specified in the LogXXX function call.
+
+    // Debug Tools
+    ImGuiDebugLogFlags      DebugLogFlags;
+    ImGuiTextBuffer         DebugLogBuf;
+    bool                    DebugItemPickerActive;              // Item picker is active (started with DebugStartItemPicker())
+    ImU8                    DebugItemPickerMouseButton;
+    ImGuiID                 DebugItemPickerBreakId;             // Will call IM_DEBUG_BREAK() when encountering this ID
+    ImGuiMetricsConfig      DebugMetricsConfig;
+    ImGuiStackTool          DebugStackTool;
+
+    // Misc
+    float                   FramerateSecPerFrame[60];           // Calculate estimate of framerate for user over the last 60 frames..
+    int                     FramerateSecPerFrameIdx;
+    int                     FramerateSecPerFrameCount;
+    float                   FramerateSecPerFrameAccum;
+    int                     WantCaptureMouseNextFrame;          // Explicit capture override via SetNextFrameWantCaptureMouse()/SetNextFrameWantCaptureKeyboard(). Default to -1.
+    int                     WantCaptureKeyboardNextFrame;       // "
+    int                     WantTextInputNextFrame;
+    ImVector<char>          TempBuffer;                         // Temporary text buffer
+
+    ImGuiContext(ImFontAtlas* shared_font_atlas)
+    {
+        Initialized = false;
+        ConfigFlagsCurrFrame = ConfigFlagsLastFrame = ImGuiConfigFlags_None;
+        FontAtlasOwnedByContext = shared_font_atlas ? false : true;
+        Font = NULL;
+        FontSize = FontBaseSize = 0.0f;
+        IO.Fonts = shared_font_atlas ? shared_font_atlas : IM_NEW(ImFontAtlas)();
+        Time = 0.0f;
+        FrameCount = 0;
+        FrameCountEnded = FrameCountPlatformEnded = FrameCountRendered = -1;
+        WithinFrameScope = WithinFrameScopeWithImplicitWindow = WithinEndChild = false;
+        GcCompactAll = false;
+        TestEngineHookItems = false;
+        TestEngine = NULL;
+
+        WindowsActiveCount = 0;
+        CurrentWindow = NULL;
+        HoveredWindow = NULL;
+        HoveredWindowUnderMovingWindow = NULL;
+        HoveredDockNode = NULL;
+        MovingWindow = NULL;
+        WheelingWindow = NULL;
+        WheelingWindowTimer = 0.0f;
+
+        DebugHookIdInfo = 0;
+        HoveredId = HoveredIdPreviousFrame = 0;
+        HoveredIdAllowOverlap = false;
+        HoveredIdUsingMouseWheel = HoveredIdPreviousFrameUsingMouseWheel = false;
+        HoveredIdDisabled = false;
+        HoveredIdTimer = HoveredIdNotActiveTimer = 0.0f;
+        ActiveId = 0;
+        ActiveIdIsAlive = 0;
+        ActiveIdTimer = 0.0f;
+        ActiveIdIsJustActivated = false;
+        ActiveIdAllowOverlap = false;
+        ActiveIdNoClearOnFocusLoss = false;
+        ActiveIdHasBeenPressedBefore = false;
+        ActiveIdHasBeenEditedBefore = false;
+        ActiveIdHasBeenEditedThisFrame = false;
+        ActiveIdClickOffset = ImVec2(-1, -1);
+        ActiveIdWindow = NULL;
+        ActiveIdSource = ImGuiInputSource_None;
+        ActiveIdMouseButton = -1;
+        ActiveIdPreviousFrame = 0;
+        ActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive = false;
+        ActiveIdPreviousFrameHasBeenEditedBefore = false;
+        ActiveIdPreviousFrameWindow = NULL;
+        LastActiveId = 0;
+        LastActiveIdTimer = 0.0f;
+
+        ActiveIdUsingMouseWheel = false;
+        ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask = 0x00;
+        ActiveIdUsingKeyInputMask.ClearAllBits();
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
+        ActiveIdUsingNavInputMask = 0x00;
+#endif
+
+        CurrentItemFlags = ImGuiItemFlags_None;
+        BeginMenuCount = 0;
+
+        CurrentDpiScale = 0.0f;
+        CurrentViewport = NULL;
+        MouseViewport = MouseLastHoveredViewport = NULL;
+        PlatformLastFocusedViewportId = 0;
+        ViewportFrontMostStampCount = 0;
+
+        NavWindow = NULL;
+        NavId = NavFocusScopeId = NavActivateId = NavActivateDownId = NavActivatePressedId = NavActivateInputId = 0;
+        NavJustMovedToId = NavJustMovedToFocusScopeId = NavNextActivateId = 0;
+        NavActivateFlags = NavNextActivateFlags = ImGuiActivateFlags_None;
+        NavJustMovedToKeyMods = ImGuiModFlags_None;
+        NavInputSource = ImGuiInputSource_None;
+        NavLayer = ImGuiNavLayer_Main;
+        NavIdIsAlive = false;
+        NavMousePosDirty = false;
+        NavDisableHighlight = true;
+        NavDisableMouseHover = false;
+        NavAnyRequest = false;
+        NavInitRequest = false;
+        NavInitRequestFromMove = false;
+        NavInitResultId = 0;
+        NavMoveSubmitted = false;
+        NavMoveScoringItems = false;
+        NavMoveForwardToNextFrame = false;
+        NavMoveFlags = ImGuiNavMoveFlags_None;
+        NavMoveScrollFlags = ImGuiScrollFlags_None;
+        NavMoveKeyMods = ImGuiModFlags_None;
+        NavMoveDir = NavMoveDirForDebug = NavMoveClipDir = ImGuiDir_None;
+        NavScoringDebugCount = 0;
+        NavTabbingDir = 0;
+        NavTabbingCounter = 0;
+
+        NavWindowingTarget = NavWindowingTargetAnim = NavWindowingListWindow = NULL;
+        NavWindowingTimer = NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = 0.0f;
+        NavWindowingToggleLayer = false;
+
+        DimBgRatio = 0.0f;
+        MouseCursor = ImGuiMouseCursor_Arrow;
+
+        DragDropActive = DragDropWithinSource = DragDropWithinTarget = false;
+        DragDropSourceFlags = ImGuiDragDropFlags_None;
+        DragDropSourceFrameCount = -1;
+        DragDropMouseButton = -1;
+        DragDropTargetId = 0;
+        DragDropAcceptFlags = ImGuiDragDropFlags_None;
+        DragDropAcceptIdCurrRectSurface = 0.0f;
+        DragDropAcceptIdPrev = DragDropAcceptIdCurr = 0;
+        DragDropAcceptFrameCount = -1;
+        DragDropHoldJustPressedId = 0;
+        memset(DragDropPayloadBufLocal, 0, sizeof(DragDropPayloadBufLocal));
+
+        ClipperTempDataStacked = 0;
+
+        CurrentTable = NULL;
+        TablesTempDataStacked = 0;
+        CurrentTabBar = NULL;
+
+        TempInputId = 0;
+        ColorEditOptions = ImGuiColorEditFlags_DefaultOptions_;
+        ColorEditLastHue = ColorEditLastSat = 0.0f;
+        ColorEditLastColor = 0;
+        SliderGrabClickOffset = 0.0f;
+        SliderCurrentAccum = 0.0f;
+        SliderCurrentAccumDirty = false;
+        DragCurrentAccumDirty = false;
+        DragCurrentAccum = 0.0f;
+        DragSpeedDefaultRatio = 1.0f / 100.0f;
+        DisabledAlphaBackup = 0.0f;
+        DisabledStackSize = 0;
+        ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter = 0.0f;
+        TooltipOverrideCount = 0;
+        TooltipSlowDelay = 0.50f;
+
+        PlatformImeData.InputPos = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+        PlatformImeDataPrev.InputPos = ImVec2(-1.0f, -1.0f); // Different to ensure initial submission
+        PlatformImeViewport = 0;
+        PlatformLocaleDecimalPoint = '.';
+
+        SettingsLoaded = false;
+        SettingsDirtyTimer = 0.0f;
+        HookIdNext = 0;
+
+        LogEnabled = false;
+        LogType = ImGuiLogType_None;
+        LogNextPrefix = LogNextSuffix = NULL;
+        LogFile = NULL;
+        LogLinePosY = FLT_MAX;
+        LogLineFirstItem = false;
+        LogDepthRef = 0;
+        LogDepthToExpand = LogDepthToExpandDefault = 2;
+
+        DebugLogFlags = ImGuiDebugLogFlags_OutputToTTY;
+        DebugItemPickerActive = false;
+        DebugItemPickerMouseButton = ImGuiMouseButton_Left;
+        DebugItemPickerBreakId = 0;
+
+        memset(FramerateSecPerFrame, 0, sizeof(FramerateSecPerFrame));
+        FramerateSecPerFrameIdx = FramerateSecPerFrameCount = 0;
+        FramerateSecPerFrameAccum = 0.0f;
+        WantCaptureMouseNextFrame = WantCaptureKeyboardNextFrame = WantTextInputNextFrame = -1;
+    }
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] ImGuiWindowTempData, ImGuiWindow
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Transient per-window data, reset at the beginning of the frame. This used to be called ImGuiDrawContext, hence the DC variable name in ImGuiWindow.
+// (That's theory, in practice the delimitation between ImGuiWindow and ImGuiWindowTempData is quite tenuous and could be reconsidered..)
+// (This doesn't need a constructor because we zero-clear it as part of ImGuiWindow and all frame-temporary data are setup on Begin)
+struct IMGUI_API ImGuiWindowTempData
+{
+    // Layout
+    ImVec2                  CursorPos;              // Current emitting position, in absolute coordinates.
+    ImVec2                  CursorPosPrevLine;
+    ImVec2                  CursorStartPos;         // Initial position after Begin(), generally ~ window position + WindowPadding.
+    ImVec2                  CursorMaxPos;           // Used to implicitly calculate ContentSize at the beginning of next frame, for scrolling range and auto-resize. Always growing during the frame.
+    ImVec2                  IdealMaxPos;            // Used to implicitly calculate ContentSizeIdeal at the beginning of next frame, for auto-resize only. Always growing during the frame.
+    ImVec2                  CurrLineSize;
+    ImVec2                  PrevLineSize;
+    float                   CurrLineTextBaseOffset; // Baseline offset (0.0f by default on a new line, generally == style.FramePadding.y when a framed item has been added).
+    float                   PrevLineTextBaseOffset;
+    bool                    IsSameLine;
+    ImVec1                  Indent;                 // Indentation / start position from left of window (increased by TreePush/TreePop, etc.)
+    ImVec1                  ColumnsOffset;          // Offset to the current column (if ColumnsCurrent > 0). FIXME: This and the above should be a stack to allow use cases like Tree->Column->Tree. Need revamp columns API.
+    ImVec1                  GroupOffset;
+    ImVec2                  CursorStartPosLossyness;// Record the loss of precision of CursorStartPos due to really large scrolling amount. This is used by clipper to compensentate and fix the most common use case of large scroll area.
+
+    // Keyboard/Gamepad navigation
+    ImGuiNavLayer           NavLayerCurrent;        // Current layer, 0..31 (we currently only use 0..1)
+    short                   NavLayersActiveMask;    // Which layers have been written to (result from previous frame)
+    short                   NavLayersActiveMaskNext;// Which layers have been written to (accumulator for current frame)
+    ImGuiID                 NavFocusScopeIdCurrent; // Current focus scope ID while appending
+    bool                    NavHideHighlightOneFrame;
+    bool                    NavHasScroll;           // Set when scrolling can be used (ScrollMax > 0.0f)
+
+    // Miscellaneous
+    bool                    MenuBarAppending;       // FIXME: Remove this
+    ImVec2                  MenuBarOffset;          // MenuBarOffset.x is sort of equivalent of a per-layer CursorPos.x, saved/restored as we switch to the menu bar. The only situation when MenuBarOffset.y is > 0 if when (SafeAreaPadding.y > FramePadding.y), often used on TVs.
+    ImGuiMenuColumns        MenuColumns;            // Simplified columns storage for menu items measurement
+    int                     TreeDepth;              // Current tree depth.
+    ImU32                   TreeJumpToParentOnPopMask; // Store a copy of !g.NavIdIsAlive for TreeDepth 0..31.. Could be turned into a ImU64 if necessary.
+    ImVector<ImGuiWindow*>  ChildWindows;
+    ImGuiStorage*           StateStorage;           // Current persistent per-window storage (store e.g. tree node open/close state)
+    ImGuiOldColumns*        CurrentColumns;         // Current columns set
+    int                     CurrentTableIdx;        // Current table index (into g.Tables)
+    ImGuiLayoutType         LayoutType;
+    ImGuiLayoutType         ParentLayoutType;       // Layout type of parent window at the time of Begin()
+
+    // Local parameters stacks
+    // We store the current settings outside of the vectors to increase memory locality (reduce cache misses). The vectors are rarely modified. Also it allows us to not heap allocate for short-lived windows which are not using those settings.
+    float                   ItemWidth;              // Current item width (>0.0: width in pixels, <0.0: align xx pixels to the right of window).
+    float                   TextWrapPos;            // Current text wrap pos.
+    ImVector<float>         ItemWidthStack;         // Store item widths to restore (attention: .back() is not == ItemWidth)
+    ImVector<float>         TextWrapPosStack;       // Store text wrap pos to restore (attention: .back() is not == TextWrapPos)
+};
+
+// Storage for one window
+struct IMGUI_API ImGuiWindow
+{
+    char*                   Name;                               // Window name, owned by the window.
+    ImGuiID                 ID;                                 // == ImHashStr(Name)
+    ImGuiWindowFlags        Flags, FlagsPreviousFrame;          // See enum ImGuiWindowFlags_
+    ImGuiWindowClass        WindowClass;                        // Advanced users only. Set with SetNextWindowClass()
+    ImGuiViewportP*         Viewport;                           // Always set in Begin(). Inactive windows may have a NULL value here if their viewport was discarded.
+    ImGuiID                 ViewportId;                         // We backup the viewport id (since the viewport may disappear or never be created if the window is inactive)
+    ImVec2                  ViewportPos;                        // We backup the viewport position (since the viewport may disappear or never be created if the window is inactive)
+    int                     ViewportAllowPlatformMonitorExtend; // Reset to -1 every frame (index is guaranteed to be valid between NewFrame..EndFrame), only used in the Appearing frame of a tooltip/popup to enforce clamping to a given monitor
+    ImVec2                  Pos;                                // Position (always rounded-up to nearest pixel)
+    ImVec2                  Size;                               // Current size (==SizeFull or collapsed title bar size)
+    ImVec2                  SizeFull;                           // Size when non collapsed
+    ImVec2                  ContentSize;                        // Size of contents/scrollable client area (calculated from the extents reach of the cursor) from previous frame. Does not include window decoration or window padding.
+    ImVec2                  ContentSizeIdeal;
+    ImVec2                  ContentSizeExplicit;                // Size of contents/scrollable client area explicitly request by the user via SetNextWindowContentSize().
+    ImVec2                  WindowPadding;                      // Window padding at the time of Begin().
+    float                   WindowRounding;                     // Window rounding at the time of Begin(). May be clamped lower to avoid rendering artifacts with title bar, menu bar etc.
+    float                   WindowBorderSize;                   // Window border size at the time of Begin().
+    int                     NameBufLen;                         // Size of buffer storing Name. May be larger than strlen(Name)!
+    ImGuiID                 MoveId;                             // == window->GetID("#MOVE")
+    ImGuiID                 TabId;                              // == window->GetID("#TAB")
+    ImGuiID                 ChildId;                            // ID of corresponding item in parent window (for navigation to return from child window to parent window)
+    ImVec2                  Scroll;
+    ImVec2                  ScrollMax;
+    ImVec2                  ScrollTarget;                       // target scroll position. stored as cursor position with scrolling canceled out, so the highest point is always 0.0f. (FLT_MAX for no change)
+    ImVec2                  ScrollTargetCenterRatio;            // 0.0f = scroll so that target position is at top, 0.5f = scroll so that target position is centered
+    ImVec2                  ScrollTargetEdgeSnapDist;           // 0.0f = no snapping, >0.0f snapping threshold
+    ImVec2                  ScrollbarSizes;                     // Size taken by each scrollbars on their smaller axis. Pay attention! ScrollbarSizes.x == width of the vertical scrollbar, ScrollbarSizes.y = height of the horizontal scrollbar.
+    bool                    ScrollbarX, ScrollbarY;             // Are scrollbars visible?
+    bool                    ViewportOwned;
+    bool                    Active;                             // Set to true on Begin(), unless Collapsed
+    bool                    WasActive;
+    bool                    WriteAccessed;                      // Set to true when any widget access the current window
+    bool                    Collapsed;                          // Set when collapsing window to become only title-bar
+    bool                    WantCollapseToggle;
+    bool                    SkipItems;                          // Set when items can safely be all clipped (e.g. window not visible or collapsed)
+    bool                    Appearing;                          // Set during the frame where the window is appearing (or re-appearing)
+    bool                    Hidden;                             // Do not display (== HiddenFrames*** > 0)
+    bool                    IsFallbackWindow;                   // Set on the "Debug##Default" window.
+    bool                    IsExplicitChild;                    // Set when passed _ChildWindow, left to false by BeginDocked()
+    bool                    HasCloseButton;                     // Set when the window has a close button (p_open != NULL)
+    signed char             ResizeBorderHeld;                   // Current border being held for resize (-1: none, otherwise 0-3)
+    short                   BeginCount;                         // Number of Begin() during the current frame (generally 0 or 1, 1+ if appending via multiple Begin/End pairs)
+    short                   BeginOrderWithinParent;             // Begin() order within immediate parent window, if we are a child window. Otherwise 0.
+    short                   BeginOrderWithinContext;            // Begin() order within entire imgui context. This is mostly used for debugging submission order related issues.
+    short                   FocusOrder;                         // Order within WindowsFocusOrder[], altered when windows are focused.
+    ImGuiID                 PopupId;                            // ID in the popup stack when this window is used as a popup/menu (because we use generic Name/ID for recycling)
+    ImS8                    AutoFitFramesX, AutoFitFramesY;
+    ImS8                    AutoFitChildAxises;
+    bool                    AutoFitOnlyGrows;
+    ImGuiDir                AutoPosLastDirection;
+    ImS8                    HiddenFramesCanSkipItems;           // Hide the window for N frames
+    ImS8                    HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems;        // Hide the window for N frames while allowing items to be submitted so we can measure their size
+    ImS8                    HiddenFramesForRenderOnly;          // Hide the window until frame N at Render() time only
+    ImS8                    DisableInputsFrames;                // Disable window interactions for N frames
+    ImGuiCond               SetWindowPosAllowFlags : 8;         // store acceptable condition flags for SetNextWindowPos() use.
+    ImGuiCond               SetWindowSizeAllowFlags : 8;        // store acceptable condition flags for SetNextWindowSize() use.
+    ImGuiCond               SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags : 8;   // store acceptable condition flags for SetNextWindowCollapsed() use.
+    ImGuiCond               SetWindowDockAllowFlags : 8;        // store acceptable condition flags for SetNextWindowDock() use.
+    ImVec2                  SetWindowPosVal;                    // store window position when using a non-zero Pivot (position set needs to be processed when we know the window size)
+    ImVec2                  SetWindowPosPivot;                  // store window pivot for positioning. ImVec2(0, 0) when positioning from top-left corner; ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f) for centering; ImVec2(1, 1) for bottom right.
+
+    ImVector<ImGuiID>       IDStack;                            // ID stack. ID are hashes seeded with the value at the top of the stack. (In theory this should be in the TempData structure)
+    ImGuiWindowTempData     DC;                                 // Temporary per-window data, reset at the beginning of the frame. This used to be called ImGuiDrawContext, hence the "DC" variable name.
+
+    // The best way to understand what those rectangles are is to use the 'Metrics->Tools->Show Windows Rectangles' viewer.
+    // The main 'OuterRect', omitted as a field, is window->Rect().
+    ImRect                  OuterRectClipped;                   // == Window->Rect() just after setup in Begin(). == window->Rect() for root window.
+    ImRect                  InnerRect;                          // Inner rectangle (omit title bar, menu bar, scroll bar)
+    ImRect                  InnerClipRect;                      // == InnerRect shrunk by WindowPadding*0.5f on each side, clipped within viewport or parent clip rect.
+    ImRect                  WorkRect;                           // Initially covers the whole scrolling region. Reduced by containers e.g columns/tables when active. Shrunk by WindowPadding*1.0f on each side. This is meant to replace ContentRegionRect over time (from 1.71+ onward).
+    ImRect                  ParentWorkRect;                     // Backup of WorkRect before entering a container such as columns/tables. Used by e.g. SpanAllColumns functions to easily access. Stacked containers are responsible for maintaining this. // FIXME-WORKRECT: Could be a stack?
+    ImRect                  ClipRect;                           // Current clipping/scissoring rectangle, evolve as we are using PushClipRect(), etc. == DrawList->clip_rect_stack.back().
+    ImRect                  ContentRegionRect;                  // FIXME: This is currently confusing/misleading. It is essentially WorkRect but not handling of scrolling. We currently rely on it as right/bottom aligned sizing operation need some size to rely on.
+    ImVec2ih                HitTestHoleSize;                    // Define an optional rectangular hole where mouse will pass-through the window.
+    ImVec2ih                HitTestHoleOffset;
+
+    int                     LastFrameActive;                    // Last frame number the window was Active.
+    int                     LastFrameJustFocused;               // Last frame number the window was made Focused.
+    float                   LastTimeActive;                     // Last timestamp the window was Active (using float as we don't need high precision there)
+    float                   ItemWidthDefault;
+    ImGuiStorage            StateStorage;
+    ImVector<ImGuiOldColumns> ColumnsStorage;
+    float                   FontWindowScale;                    // User scale multiplier per-window, via SetWindowFontScale()
+    float                   FontDpiScale;
+    int                     SettingsOffset;                     // Offset into SettingsWindows[] (offsets are always valid as we only grow the array from the back)
+
+    ImDrawList*             DrawList;                           // == &DrawListInst (for backward compatibility reason with code using imgui_internal.h we keep this a pointer)
+    ImDrawList              DrawListInst;
+    ImGuiWindow*            ParentWindow;                       // If we are a child _or_ popup _or_ docked window, this is pointing to our parent. Otherwise NULL.
+    ImGuiWindow*            ParentWindowInBeginStack;
+    ImGuiWindow*            RootWindow;                         // Point to ourself or first ancestor that is not a child window. Doesn't cross through popups/dock nodes.
+    ImGuiWindow*            RootWindowPopupTree;                // Point to ourself or first ancestor that is not a child window. Cross through popups parent<>child.
+    ImGuiWindow*            RootWindowDockTree;                 // Point to ourself or first ancestor that is not a child window. Cross through dock nodes.
+    ImGuiWindow*            RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight;     // Point to ourself or first ancestor which will display TitleBgActive color when this window is active.
+    ImGuiWindow*            RootWindowForNav;                   // Point to ourself or first ancestor which doesn't have the NavFlattened flag.
+
+    ImGuiWindow*            NavLastChildNavWindow;              // When going to the menu bar, we remember the child window we came from. (This could probably be made implicit if we kept g.Windows sorted by last focused including child window.)
+    ImGuiID                 NavLastIds[ImGuiNavLayer_COUNT];    // Last known NavId for this window, per layer (0/1)
+    ImRect                  NavRectRel[ImGuiNavLayer_COUNT];    // Reference rectangle, in window relative space
+
+    int                     MemoryDrawListIdxCapacity;          // Backup of last idx/vtx count, so when waking up the window we can preallocate and avoid iterative alloc/copy
+    int                     MemoryDrawListVtxCapacity;
+    bool                    MemoryCompacted;                    // Set when window extraneous data have been garbage collected
+
+    // Docking
+    bool                    DockIsActive        :1;             // When docking artifacts are actually visible. When this is set, DockNode is guaranteed to be != NULL. ~~ (DockNode != NULL) && (DockNode->Windows.Size > 1).
+    bool                    DockNodeIsVisible   :1;
+    bool                    DockTabIsVisible    :1;             // Is our window visible this frame? ~~ is the corresponding tab selected?
+    bool                    DockTabWantClose    :1;
+    short                   DockOrder;                          // Order of the last time the window was visible within its DockNode. This is used to reorder windows that are reappearing on the same frame. Same value between windows that were active and windows that were none are possible.
+    ImGuiWindowDockStyle    DockStyle;
+    ImGuiDockNode*          DockNode;                           // Which node are we docked into. Important: Prefer testing DockIsActive in many cases as this will still be set when the dock node is hidden.
+    ImGuiDockNode*          DockNodeAsHost;                     // Which node are we owning (for parent windows)
+    ImGuiID                 DockId;                             // Backup of last valid DockNode->ID, so single window remember their dock node id even when they are not bound any more
+    ImGuiItemStatusFlags    DockTabItemStatusFlags;
+    ImRect                  DockTabItemRect;
+
+public:
+    ImGuiWindow(ImGuiContext* context, const char* name);
+    ~ImGuiWindow();
+
+    ImGuiID     GetID(const char* str, const char* str_end = NULL);
+    ImGuiID     GetID(const void* ptr);
+    ImGuiID     GetID(int n);
+    ImGuiID     GetIDFromRectangle(const ImRect& r_abs);
+
+    // We don't use g.FontSize because the window may be != g.CurrentWidow.
+    ImRect      Rect() const            { return ImRect(Pos.x, Pos.y, Pos.x + Size.x, Pos.y + Size.y); }
+    float       CalcFontSize() const    { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; float scale = g.FontBaseSize * FontWindowScale * FontDpiScale; if (ParentWindow) scale *= ParentWindow->FontWindowScale; return scale; }
+    float       TitleBarHeight() const  { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return (Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) ? 0.0f : CalcFontSize() + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f; }
+    ImRect      TitleBarRect() const    { return ImRect(Pos, ImVec2(Pos.x + SizeFull.x, Pos.y + TitleBarHeight())); }
+    float       MenuBarHeight() const   { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return (Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar) ? DC.MenuBarOffset.y + CalcFontSize() + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f : 0.0f; }
+    ImRect      MenuBarRect() const     { float y1 = Pos.y + TitleBarHeight(); return ImRect(Pos.x, y1, Pos.x + SizeFull.x, y1 + MenuBarHeight()); }
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Tab bar, Tab item support
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Extend ImGuiTabBarFlags_
+enum ImGuiTabBarFlagsPrivate_
+{
+    ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode                   = 1 << 20,  // Part of a dock node [we don't use this in the master branch but it facilitate branch syncing to keep this around]
+    ImGuiTabBarFlags_IsFocused                  = 1 << 21,
+    ImGuiTabBarFlags_SaveSettings               = 1 << 22,  // FIXME: Settings are handled by the docking system, this only request the tab bar to mark settings dirty when reordering tabs
+};
+
+// Extend ImGuiTabItemFlags_
+enum ImGuiTabItemFlagsPrivate_
+{
+    ImGuiTabItemFlags_SectionMask_              = ImGuiTabItemFlags_Leading | ImGuiTabItemFlags_Trailing,
+    ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton             = 1 << 20,  // Track whether p_open was set or not (we'll need this info on the next frame to recompute ContentWidth during layout)
+    ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button                    = 1 << 21,  // Used by TabItemButton, change the tab item behavior to mimic a button
+    ImGuiTabItemFlags_Unsorted                  = 1 << 22,  // [Docking] Trailing tabs with the _Unsorted flag will be sorted based on the DockOrder of their Window.
+    ImGuiTabItemFlags_Preview                   = 1 << 23,  // [Docking] Display tab shape for docking preview (height is adjusted slightly to compensate for the yet missing tab bar)
+};
+
+// Storage for one active tab item (sizeof() 48 bytes)
+struct ImGuiTabItem
+{
+    ImGuiID             ID;
+    ImGuiTabItemFlags   Flags;
+    ImGuiWindow*        Window;                 // When TabItem is part of a DockNode's TabBar, we hold on to a window.
+    int                 LastFrameVisible;
+    int                 LastFrameSelected;      // This allows us to infer an ordered list of the last activated tabs with little maintenance
+    float               Offset;                 // Position relative to beginning of tab
+    float               Width;                  // Width currently displayed
+    float               ContentWidth;           // Width of label, stored during BeginTabItem() call
+    float               RequestedWidth;         // Width optionally requested by caller, -1.0f is unused
+    ImS32               NameOffset;             // When Window==NULL, offset to name within parent ImGuiTabBar::TabsNames
+    ImS16               BeginOrder;             // BeginTabItem() order, used to re-order tabs after toggling ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable
+    ImS16               IndexDuringLayout;      // Index only used during TabBarLayout()
+    bool                WantClose;              // Marked as closed by SetTabItemClosed()
+
+    ImGuiTabItem()      { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); LastFrameVisible = LastFrameSelected = -1; NameOffset = -1; BeginOrder = IndexDuringLayout = -1; }
+};
+
+// Storage for a tab bar (sizeof() 152 bytes)
+struct IMGUI_API ImGuiTabBar
+{
+    ImVector<ImGuiTabItem> Tabs;
+    ImGuiTabBarFlags    Flags;
+    ImGuiID             ID;                     // Zero for tab-bars used by docking
+    ImGuiID             SelectedTabId;          // Selected tab/window
+    ImGuiID             NextSelectedTabId;      // Next selected tab/window. Will also trigger a scrolling animation
+    ImGuiID             VisibleTabId;           // Can occasionally be != SelectedTabId (e.g. when previewing contents for CTRL+TAB preview)
+    int                 CurrFrameVisible;
+    int                 PrevFrameVisible;
+    ImRect              BarRect;
+    float               CurrTabsContentsHeight;
+    float               PrevTabsContentsHeight; // Record the height of contents submitted below the tab bar
+    float               WidthAllTabs;           // Actual width of all tabs (locked during layout)
+    float               WidthAllTabsIdeal;      // Ideal width if all tabs were visible and not clipped
+    float               ScrollingAnim;
+    float               ScrollingTarget;
+    float               ScrollingTargetDistToVisibility;
+    float               ScrollingSpeed;
+    float               ScrollingRectMinX;
+    float               ScrollingRectMaxX;
+    ImGuiID             ReorderRequestTabId;
+    ImS16               ReorderRequestOffset;
+    ImS8                BeginCount;
+    bool                WantLayout;
+    bool                VisibleTabWasSubmitted;
+    bool                TabsAddedNew;           // Set to true when a new tab item or button has been added to the tab bar during last frame
+    ImS16               TabsActiveCount;        // Number of tabs submitted this frame.
+    ImS16               LastTabItemIdx;         // Index of last BeginTabItem() tab for use by EndTabItem()
+    float               ItemSpacingY;
+    ImVec2              FramePadding;           // style.FramePadding locked at the time of BeginTabBar()
+    ImVec2              BackupCursorPos;
+    ImGuiTextBuffer     TabsNames;              // For non-docking tab bar we re-append names in a contiguous buffer.
+
+    ImGuiTabBar();
+    int                 GetTabOrder(const ImGuiTabItem* tab) const  { return Tabs.index_from_ptr(tab); }
+    const char*         GetTabName(const ImGuiTabItem* tab) const
+    {
+        if (tab->Window)
+            return tab->Window->Name;
+        IM_ASSERT(tab->NameOffset != -1 && tab->NameOffset < TabsNames.Buf.Size);
+        return TabsNames.Buf.Data + tab->NameOffset;
+    }
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Table support
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#define IM_COL32_DISABLE                IM_COL32(0,0,0,1)   // Special sentinel code which cannot be used as a regular color.
+#define IMGUI_TABLE_MAX_COLUMNS         64                  // sizeof(ImU64) * 8. This is solely because we frequently encode columns set in a ImU64.
+#define IMGUI_TABLE_MAX_DRAW_CHANNELS   (4 + 64 * 2)        // See TableSetupDrawChannels()
+
+// Our current column maximum is 64 but we may raise that in the future.
+typedef ImS8 ImGuiTableColumnIdx;
+typedef ImU8 ImGuiTableDrawChannelIdx;
+
+// [Internal] sizeof() ~ 104
+// We use the terminology "Enabled" to refer to a column that is not Hidden by user/api.
+// We use the terminology "Clipped" to refer to a column that is out of sight because of scrolling/clipping.
+// This is in contrast with some user-facing api such as IsItemVisible() / IsRectVisible() which use "Visible" to mean "not clipped".
+struct ImGuiTableColumn
+{
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags   Flags;                          // Flags after some patching (not directly same as provided by user). See ImGuiTableColumnFlags_
+    float                   WidthGiven;                     // Final/actual width visible == (MaxX - MinX), locked in TableUpdateLayout(). May be > WidthRequest to honor minimum width, may be < WidthRequest to honor shrinking columns down in tight space.
+    float                   MinX;                           // Absolute positions
+    float                   MaxX;
+    float                   WidthRequest;                   // Master width absolute value when !(Flags & _WidthStretch). When Stretch this is derived every frame from StretchWeight in TableUpdateLayout()
+    float                   WidthAuto;                      // Automatic width
+    float                   StretchWeight;                  // Master width weight when (Flags & _WidthStretch). Often around ~1.0f initially.
+    float                   InitStretchWeightOrWidth;       // Value passed to TableSetupColumn(). For Width it is a content width (_without padding_).
+    ImRect                  ClipRect;                       // Clipping rectangle for the column
+    ImGuiID                 UserID;                         // Optional, value passed to TableSetupColumn()
+    float                   WorkMinX;                       // Contents region min ~(MinX + CellPaddingX + CellSpacingX1) == cursor start position when entering column
+    float                   WorkMaxX;                       // Contents region max ~(MaxX - CellPaddingX - CellSpacingX2)
+    float                   ItemWidth;                      // Current item width for the column, preserved across rows
+    float                   ContentMaxXFrozen;              // Contents maximum position for frozen rows (apart from headers), from which we can infer content width.
+    float                   ContentMaxXUnfrozen;
+    float                   ContentMaxXHeadersUsed;         // Contents maximum position for headers rows (regardless of freezing). TableHeader() automatically softclip itself + report ideal desired size, to avoid creating extraneous draw calls
+    float                   ContentMaxXHeadersIdeal;
+    ImS16                   NameOffset;                     // Offset into parent ColumnsNames[]
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx     DisplayOrder;                   // Index within Table's IndexToDisplayOrder[] (column may be reordered by users)
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx     IndexWithinEnabledSet;          // Index within enabled/visible set (<= IndexToDisplayOrder)
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx     PrevEnabledColumn;              // Index of prev enabled/visible column within Columns[], -1 if first enabled/visible column
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx     NextEnabledColumn;              // Index of next enabled/visible column within Columns[], -1 if last enabled/visible column
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx     SortOrder;                      // Index of this column within sort specs, -1 if not sorting on this column, 0 for single-sort, may be >0 on multi-sort
+    ImGuiTableDrawChannelIdx DrawChannelCurrent;            // Index within DrawSplitter.Channels[]
+    ImGuiTableDrawChannelIdx DrawChannelFrozen;             // Draw channels for frozen rows (often headers)
+    ImGuiTableDrawChannelIdx DrawChannelUnfrozen;           // Draw channels for unfrozen rows
+    bool                    IsEnabled;                      // IsUserEnabled && (Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_Disabled) == 0
+    bool                    IsUserEnabled;                  // Is the column not marked Hidden by the user? (unrelated to being off view, e.g. clipped by scrolling).
+    bool                    IsUserEnabledNextFrame;
+    bool                    IsVisibleX;                     // Is actually in view (e.g. overlapping the host window clipping rectangle, not scrolled).
+    bool                    IsVisibleY;
+    bool                    IsRequestOutput;                // Return value for TableSetColumnIndex() / TableNextColumn(): whether we request user to output contents or not.
+    bool                    IsSkipItems;                    // Do we want item submissions to this column to be completely ignored (no layout will happen).
+    bool                    IsPreserveWidthAuto;
+    ImS8                    NavLayerCurrent;                // ImGuiNavLayer in 1 byte
+    ImU8                    AutoFitQueue;                   // Queue of 8 values for the next 8 frames to request auto-fit
+    ImU8                    CannotSkipItemsQueue;           // Queue of 8 values for the next 8 frames to disable Clipped/SkipItem
+    ImU8                    SortDirection : 2;              // ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending or ImGuiSortDirection_Descending
+    ImU8                    SortDirectionsAvailCount : 2;   // Number of available sort directions (0 to 3)
+    ImU8                    SortDirectionsAvailMask : 4;    // Mask of available sort directions (1-bit each)
+    ImU8                    SortDirectionsAvailList;        // Ordered of available sort directions (2-bits each)
+
+    ImGuiTableColumn()
+    {
+        memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this));
+        StretchWeight = WidthRequest = -1.0f;
+        NameOffset = -1;
+        DisplayOrder = IndexWithinEnabledSet = -1;
+        PrevEnabledColumn = NextEnabledColumn = -1;
+        SortOrder = -1;
+        SortDirection = ImGuiSortDirection_None;
+        DrawChannelCurrent = DrawChannelFrozen = DrawChannelUnfrozen = (ImU8)-1;
+    }
+};
+
+// Transient cell data stored per row.
+// sizeof() ~ 6
+struct ImGuiTableCellData
+{
+    ImU32                       BgColor;    // Actual color
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx         Column;     // Column number
+};
+
+// Per-instance data that needs preserving across frames (seemingly most others do not need to be preserved aside from debug needs, does that needs they could be moved to ImGuiTableTempData ?)
+struct ImGuiTableInstanceData
+{
+    float                       LastOuterHeight;            // Outer height from last frame // FIXME: multi-instance issue (#3955)
+    float                       LastFirstRowHeight;         // Height of first row from last frame // FIXME: possible multi-instance issue?
+
+    ImGuiTableInstanceData()    { LastOuterHeight = LastFirstRowHeight = 0.0f; }
+};
+
+// FIXME-TABLE: more transient data could be stored in a per-stacked table structure: DrawSplitter, SortSpecs, incoming RowData
+struct IMGUI_API ImGuiTable
+{
+    ImGuiID                     ID;
+    ImGuiTableFlags             Flags;
+    void*                       RawData;                    // Single allocation to hold Columns[], DisplayOrderToIndex[] and RowCellData[]
+    ImGuiTableTempData*         TempData;                   // Transient data while table is active. Point within g.CurrentTableStack[]
+    ImSpan<ImGuiTableColumn>    Columns;                    // Point within RawData[]
+    ImSpan<ImGuiTableColumnIdx> DisplayOrderToIndex;        // Point within RawData[]. Store display order of columns (when not reordered, the values are 0...Count-1)
+    ImSpan<ImGuiTableCellData>  RowCellData;                // Point within RawData[]. Store cells background requests for current row.
+    ImU64                       EnabledMaskByDisplayOrder;  // Column DisplayOrder -> IsEnabled map
+    ImU64                       EnabledMaskByIndex;         // Column Index -> IsEnabled map (== not hidden by user/api) in a format adequate for iterating column without touching cold data
+    ImU64                       VisibleMaskByIndex;         // Column Index -> IsVisibleX|IsVisibleY map (== not hidden by user/api && not hidden by scrolling/cliprect)
+    ImU64                       RequestOutputMaskByIndex;   // Column Index -> IsVisible || AutoFit (== expect user to submit items)
+    ImGuiTableFlags             SettingsLoadedFlags;        // Which data were loaded from the .ini file (e.g. when order is not altered we won't save order)
+    int                         SettingsOffset;             // Offset in g.SettingsTables
+    int                         LastFrameActive;
+    int                         ColumnsCount;               // Number of columns declared in BeginTable()
+    int                         CurrentRow;
+    int                         CurrentColumn;
+    ImS16                       InstanceCurrent;            // Count of BeginTable() calls with same ID in the same frame (generally 0). This is a little bit similar to BeginCount for a window, but multiple table with same ID look are multiple tables, they are just synched.
+    ImS16                       InstanceInteracted;         // Mark which instance (generally 0) of the same ID is being interacted with
+    float                       RowPosY1;
+    float                       RowPosY2;
+    float                       RowMinHeight;               // Height submitted to TableNextRow()
+    float                       RowTextBaseline;
+    float                       RowIndentOffsetX;
+    ImGuiTableRowFlags          RowFlags : 16;              // Current row flags, see ImGuiTableRowFlags_
+    ImGuiTableRowFlags          LastRowFlags : 16;
+    int                         RowBgColorCounter;          // Counter for alternating background colors (can be fast-forwarded by e.g clipper), not same as CurrentRow because header rows typically don't increase this.
+    ImU32                       RowBgColor[2];              // Background color override for current row.
+    ImU32                       BorderColorStrong;
+    ImU32                       BorderColorLight;
+    float                       BorderX1;
+    float                       BorderX2;
+    float                       HostIndentX;
+    float                       MinColumnWidth;
+    float                       OuterPaddingX;
+    float                       CellPaddingX;               // Padding from each borders
+    float                       CellPaddingY;
+    float                       CellSpacingX1;              // Spacing between non-bordered cells
+    float                       CellSpacingX2;
+    float                       InnerWidth;                 // User value passed to BeginTable(), see comments at the top of BeginTable() for details.
+    float                       ColumnsGivenWidth;          // Sum of current column width
+    float                       ColumnsAutoFitWidth;        // Sum of ideal column width in order nothing to be clipped, used for auto-fitting and content width submission in outer window
+    float                       ColumnsStretchSumWeights;   // Sum of weight of all enabled stretching columns
+    float                       ResizedColumnNextWidth;
+    float                       ResizeLockMinContentsX2;    // Lock minimum contents width while resizing down in order to not create feedback loops. But we allow growing the table.
+    float                       RefScale;                   // Reference scale to be able to rescale columns on font/dpi changes.
+    ImRect                      OuterRect;                  // Note: for non-scrolling table, OuterRect.Max.y is often FLT_MAX until EndTable(), unless a height has been specified in BeginTable().
+    ImRect                      InnerRect;                  // InnerRect but without decoration. As with OuterRect, for non-scrolling tables, InnerRect.Max.y is
+    ImRect                      WorkRect;
+    ImRect                      InnerClipRect;
+    ImRect                      BgClipRect;                 // We use this to cpu-clip cell background color fill, evolve during the frame as we cross frozen rows boundaries
+    ImRect                      Bg0ClipRectForDrawCmd;      // Actual ImDrawCmd clip rect for BG0/1 channel. This tends to be == OuterWindow->ClipRect at BeginTable() because output in BG0/BG1 is cpu-clipped
+    ImRect                      Bg2ClipRectForDrawCmd;      // Actual ImDrawCmd clip rect for BG2 channel. This tends to be a correct, tight-fit, because output to BG2 are done by widgets relying on regular ClipRect.
+    ImRect                      HostClipRect;               // This is used to check if we can eventually merge our columns draw calls into the current draw call of the current window.
+    ImRect                      HostBackupInnerClipRect;    // Backup of InnerWindow->ClipRect during PushTableBackground()/PopTableBackground()
+    ImGuiWindow*                OuterWindow;                // Parent window for the table
+    ImGuiWindow*                InnerWindow;                // Window holding the table data (== OuterWindow or a child window)
+    ImGuiTextBuffer             ColumnsNames;               // Contiguous buffer holding columns names
+    ImDrawListSplitter*         DrawSplitter;               // Shortcut to TempData->DrawSplitter while in table. Isolate draw commands per columns to avoid switching clip rect constantly
+    ImGuiTableInstanceData      InstanceDataFirst;
+    ImVector<ImGuiTableInstanceData>    InstanceDataExtra;  // FIXME-OPT: Using a small-vector pattern would be good.
+    ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs   SortSpecsSingle;
+    ImVector<ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs> SortSpecsMulti;     // FIXME-OPT: Using a small-vector pattern would be good.
+    ImGuiTableSortSpecs         SortSpecs;                  // Public facing sorts specs, this is what we return in TableGetSortSpecs()
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx         SortSpecsCount;
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx         ColumnsEnabledCount;        // Number of enabled columns (<= ColumnsCount)
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx         ColumnsEnabledFixedCount;   // Number of enabled columns (<= ColumnsCount)
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx         DeclColumnsCount;           // Count calls to TableSetupColumn()
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx         HoveredColumnBody;          // Index of column whose visible region is being hovered. Important: == ColumnsCount when hovering empty region after the right-most column!
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx         HoveredColumnBorder;        // Index of column whose right-border is being hovered (for resizing).
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx         AutoFitSingleColumn;        // Index of single column requesting auto-fit.
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx         ResizedColumn;              // Index of column being resized. Reset when InstanceCurrent==0.
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx         LastResizedColumn;          // Index of column being resized from previous frame.
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx         HeldHeaderColumn;           // Index of column header being held.
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx         ReorderColumn;              // Index of column being reordered. (not cleared)
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx         ReorderColumnDir;           // -1 or +1
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx         LeftMostEnabledColumn;      // Index of left-most non-hidden column.
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx         RightMostEnabledColumn;     // Index of right-most non-hidden column.
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx         LeftMostStretchedColumn;    // Index of left-most stretched column.
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx         RightMostStretchedColumn;   // Index of right-most stretched column.
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx         ContextPopupColumn;         // Column right-clicked on, of -1 if opening context menu from a neutral/empty spot
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx         FreezeRowsRequest;          // Requested frozen rows count
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx         FreezeRowsCount;            // Actual frozen row count (== FreezeRowsRequest, or == 0 when no scrolling offset)
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx         FreezeColumnsRequest;       // Requested frozen columns count
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx         FreezeColumnsCount;         // Actual frozen columns count (== FreezeColumnsRequest, or == 0 when no scrolling offset)
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx         RowCellDataCurrent;         // Index of current RowCellData[] entry in current row
+    ImGuiTableDrawChannelIdx    DummyDrawChannel;           // Redirect non-visible columns here.
+    ImGuiTableDrawChannelIdx    Bg2DrawChannelCurrent;      // For Selectable() and other widgets drawing across columns after the freezing line. Index within DrawSplitter.Channels[]
+    ImGuiTableDrawChannelIdx    Bg2DrawChannelUnfrozen;
+    bool                        IsLayoutLocked;             // Set by TableUpdateLayout() which is called when beginning the first row.
+    bool                        IsInsideRow;                // Set when inside TableBeginRow()/TableEndRow().
+    bool                        IsInitializing;
+    bool                        IsSortSpecsDirty;
+    bool                        IsUsingHeaders;             // Set when the first row had the ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers flag.
+    bool                        IsContextPopupOpen;         // Set when default context menu is open (also see: ContextPopupColumn, InstanceInteracted).
+    bool                        IsSettingsRequestLoad;
+    bool                        IsSettingsDirty;            // Set when table settings have changed and needs to be reported into ImGuiTableSetttings data.
+    bool                        IsDefaultDisplayOrder;      // Set when display order is unchanged from default (DisplayOrder contains 0...Count-1)
+    bool                        IsResetAllRequest;
+    bool                        IsResetDisplayOrderRequest;
+    bool                        IsUnfrozenRows;             // Set when we got past the frozen row.
+    bool                        IsDefaultSizingPolicy;      // Set if user didn't explicitly set a sizing policy in BeginTable()
+    bool                        MemoryCompacted;
+    bool                        HostSkipItems;              // Backup of InnerWindow->SkipItem at the end of BeginTable(), because we will overwrite InnerWindow->SkipItem on a per-column basis
+
+    ImGuiTable()                { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); LastFrameActive = -1; }
+    ~ImGuiTable()               { IM_FREE(RawData); }
+};
+
+// Transient data that are only needed between BeginTable() and EndTable(), those buffers are shared (1 per level of stacked table).
+// - Accessing those requires chasing an extra pointer so for very frequently used data we leave them in the main table structure.
+// - We also leave out of this structure data that tend to be particularly useful for debugging/metrics.
+struct IMGUI_API ImGuiTableTempData
+{
+    int                         TableIndex;                 // Index in g.Tables.Buf[] pool
+    float                       LastTimeActive;             // Last timestamp this structure was used
+
+    ImVec2                      UserOuterSize;              // outer_size.x passed to BeginTable()
+    ImDrawListSplitter          DrawSplitter;
+
+    ImRect                      HostBackupWorkRect;         // Backup of InnerWindow->WorkRect at the end of BeginTable()
+    ImRect                      HostBackupParentWorkRect;   // Backup of InnerWindow->ParentWorkRect at the end of BeginTable()
+    ImVec2                      HostBackupPrevLineSize;     // Backup of InnerWindow->DC.PrevLineSize at the end of BeginTable()
+    ImVec2                      HostBackupCurrLineSize;     // Backup of InnerWindow->DC.CurrLineSize at the end of BeginTable()
+    ImVec2                      HostBackupCursorMaxPos;     // Backup of InnerWindow->DC.CursorMaxPos at the end of BeginTable()
+    ImVec1                      HostBackupColumnsOffset;    // Backup of OuterWindow->DC.ColumnsOffset at the end of BeginTable()
+    float                       HostBackupItemWidth;        // Backup of OuterWindow->DC.ItemWidth at the end of BeginTable()
+    int                         HostBackupItemWidthStackSize;//Backup of OuterWindow->DC.ItemWidthStack.Size at the end of BeginTable()
+
+    ImGuiTableTempData()        { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); LastTimeActive = -1.0f; }
+};
+
+// sizeof() ~ 12
+struct ImGuiTableColumnSettings
+{
+    float                   WidthOrWeight;
+    ImGuiID                 UserID;
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx     Index;
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx     DisplayOrder;
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx     SortOrder;
+    ImU8                    SortDirection : 2;
+    ImU8                    IsEnabled : 1; // "Visible" in ini file
+    ImU8                    IsStretch : 1;
+
+    ImGuiTableColumnSettings()
+    {
+        WidthOrWeight = 0.0f;
+        UserID = 0;
+        Index = -1;
+        DisplayOrder = SortOrder = -1;
+        SortDirection = ImGuiSortDirection_None;
+        IsEnabled = 1;
+        IsStretch = 0;
+    }
+};
+
+// This is designed to be stored in a single ImChunkStream (1 header followed by N ImGuiTableColumnSettings, etc.)
+struct ImGuiTableSettings
+{
+    ImGuiID                     ID;                     // Set to 0 to invalidate/delete the setting
+    ImGuiTableFlags             SaveFlags;              // Indicate data we want to save using the Resizable/Reorderable/Sortable/Hideable flags (could be using its own flags..)
+    float                       RefScale;               // Reference scale to be able to rescale columns on font/dpi changes.
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx         ColumnsCount;
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx         ColumnsCountMax;        // Maximum number of columns this settings instance can store, we can recycle a settings instance with lower number of columns but not higher
+    bool                        WantApply;              // Set when loaded from .ini data (to enable merging/loading .ini data into an already running context)
+
+    ImGuiTableSettings()        { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+    ImGuiTableColumnSettings*   GetColumnSettings()     { return (ImGuiTableColumnSettings*)(this + 1); }
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] ImGui internal API
+// No guarantee of forward compatibility here!
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+namespace ImGui
+{
+    // Windows
+    // We should always have a CurrentWindow in the stack (there is an implicit "Debug" window)
+    // If this ever crash because g.CurrentWindow is NULL it means that either
+    // - ImGui::NewFrame() has never been called, which is illegal.
+    // - You are calling ImGui functions after ImGui::EndFrame()/ImGui::Render() and before the next ImGui::NewFrame(), which is also illegal.
+    inline    ImGuiWindow*  GetCurrentWindowRead()      { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.CurrentWindow; }
+    inline    ImGuiWindow*  GetCurrentWindow()          { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; g.CurrentWindow->WriteAccessed = true; return g.CurrentWindow; }
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiWindow*  FindWindowByID(ImGuiID id);
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiWindow*  FindWindowByName(const char* name);
+    IMGUI_API void          UpdateWindowParentAndRootLinks(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindowFlags flags, ImGuiWindow* parent_window);
+    IMGUI_API ImVec2        CalcWindowNextAutoFitSize(ImGuiWindow* window);
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsWindowChildOf(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindow* potential_parent, bool popup_hierarchy, bool dock_hierarchy);
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsWindowWithinBeginStackOf(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindow* potential_parent);
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsWindowAbove(ImGuiWindow* potential_above, ImGuiWindow* potential_below);
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsWindowNavFocusable(ImGuiWindow* window);
+    IMGUI_API void          SetWindowPos(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond = 0);
+    IMGUI_API void          SetWindowSize(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond = 0);
+    IMGUI_API void          SetWindowCollapsed(ImGuiWindow* window, bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond = 0);
+    IMGUI_API void          SetWindowHitTestHole(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& pos, const ImVec2& size);
+    inline ImRect           WindowRectAbsToRel(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& r) { ImVec2 off = window->DC.CursorStartPos; return ImRect(r.Min.x - off.x, r.Min.y - off.y, r.Max.x - off.x, r.Max.y - off.y); }
+    inline ImRect           WindowRectRelToAbs(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& r) { ImVec2 off = window->DC.CursorStartPos; return ImRect(r.Min.x + off.x, r.Min.y + off.y, r.Max.x + off.x, r.Max.y + off.y); }
+
+    // Windows: Display Order and Focus Order
+    IMGUI_API void          FocusWindow(ImGuiWindow* window);
+    IMGUI_API void          FocusTopMostWindowUnderOne(ImGuiWindow* under_this_window, ImGuiWindow* ignore_window);
+    IMGUI_API void          BringWindowToFocusFront(ImGuiWindow* window);
+    IMGUI_API void          BringWindowToDisplayFront(ImGuiWindow* window);
+    IMGUI_API void          BringWindowToDisplayBack(ImGuiWindow* window);
+    IMGUI_API void          BringWindowToDisplayBehind(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindow* above_window);
+    IMGUI_API int           FindWindowDisplayIndex(ImGuiWindow* window);
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiWindow*  FindBottomMostVisibleWindowWithinBeginStack(ImGuiWindow* window);
+
+    // Fonts, drawing
+    IMGUI_API void          SetCurrentFont(ImFont* font);
+    inline ImFont*          GetDefaultFont() { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.IO.FontDefault ? g.IO.FontDefault : g.IO.Fonts->Fonts[0]; }
+    inline ImDrawList*      GetForegroundDrawList(ImGuiWindow* window) { return GetForegroundDrawList(window->Viewport); }
+
+    // Init
+    IMGUI_API void          Initialize();
+    IMGUI_API void          Shutdown();    // Since 1.60 this is a _private_ function. You can call DestroyContext() to destroy the context created by CreateContext().
+
+    // NewFrame
+    IMGUI_API void          UpdateInputEvents(bool trickle_fast_inputs);
+    IMGUI_API void          UpdateHoveredWindowAndCaptureFlags();
+    IMGUI_API void          StartMouseMovingWindow(ImGuiWindow* window);
+    IMGUI_API void          StartMouseMovingWindowOrNode(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiDockNode* node, bool undock_floating_node);
+    IMGUI_API void          UpdateMouseMovingWindowNewFrame();
+    IMGUI_API void          UpdateMouseMovingWindowEndFrame();
+
+    // Generic context hooks
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiID       AddContextHook(ImGuiContext* context, const ImGuiContextHook* hook);
+    IMGUI_API void          RemoveContextHook(ImGuiContext* context, ImGuiID hook_to_remove);
+    IMGUI_API void          CallContextHooks(ImGuiContext* context, ImGuiContextHookType type);
+
+    // Viewports
+    IMGUI_API void          TranslateWindowsInViewport(ImGuiViewportP* viewport, const ImVec2& old_pos, const ImVec2& new_pos);
+    IMGUI_API void          ScaleWindowsInViewport(ImGuiViewportP* viewport, float scale);
+    IMGUI_API void          DestroyPlatformWindow(ImGuiViewportP* viewport);
+    IMGUI_API void          SetWindowViewport(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiViewportP* viewport);
+    IMGUI_API void          SetCurrentViewport(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiViewportP* viewport);
+    IMGUI_API const ImGuiPlatformMonitor*   GetViewportPlatformMonitor(ImGuiViewport* viewport);
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiViewportP*               FindHoveredViewportFromPlatformWindowStack(const ImVec2& mouse_platform_pos);
+
+    // Settings
+    IMGUI_API void                  MarkIniSettingsDirty();
+    IMGUI_API void                  MarkIniSettingsDirty(ImGuiWindow* window);
+    IMGUI_API void                  ClearIniSettings();
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiWindowSettings*  CreateNewWindowSettings(const char* name);
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiWindowSettings*  FindWindowSettings(ImGuiID id);
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiWindowSettings*  FindOrCreateWindowSettings(const char* name);
+    IMGUI_API void                  AddSettingsHandler(const ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler);
+    IMGUI_API void                  RemoveSettingsHandler(const char* type_name);
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiSettingsHandler* FindSettingsHandler(const char* type_name);
+
+    // Scrolling
+    IMGUI_API void          SetNextWindowScroll(const ImVec2& scroll); // Use -1.0f on one axis to leave as-is
+    IMGUI_API void          SetScrollX(ImGuiWindow* window, float scroll_x);
+    IMGUI_API void          SetScrollY(ImGuiWindow* window, float scroll_y);
+    IMGUI_API void          SetScrollFromPosX(ImGuiWindow* window, float local_x, float center_x_ratio);
+    IMGUI_API void          SetScrollFromPosY(ImGuiWindow* window, float local_y, float center_y_ratio);
+
+    // Early work-in-progress API (ScrollToItem() will become public)
+    IMGUI_API void          ScrollToItem(ImGuiScrollFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API void          ScrollToRect(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& rect, ImGuiScrollFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API ImVec2        ScrollToRectEx(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& rect, ImGuiScrollFlags flags = 0);
+//#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+    inline void             ScrollToBringRectIntoView(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& rect) { ScrollToRect(window, rect, ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeY); }
+//#endif
+
+    // Basic Accessors
+    inline ImGuiID          GetItemID()     { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.LastItemData.ID; }   // Get ID of last item (~~ often same ImGui::GetID(label) beforehand)
+    inline ImGuiItemStatusFlags GetItemStatusFlags(){ ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.LastItemData.StatusFlags; }
+    inline ImGuiItemFlags   GetItemFlags()  { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.LastItemData.InFlags; }
+    inline ImGuiID          GetActiveID()   { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.ActiveId; }
+    inline ImGuiID          GetFocusID()    { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.NavId; }
+    IMGUI_API void          SetActiveID(ImGuiID id, ImGuiWindow* window);
+    IMGUI_API void          SetFocusID(ImGuiID id, ImGuiWindow* window);
+    IMGUI_API void          ClearActiveID();
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiID       GetHoveredID();
+    IMGUI_API void          SetHoveredID(ImGuiID id);
+    IMGUI_API void          KeepAliveID(ImGuiID id);
+    IMGUI_API void          MarkItemEdited(ImGuiID id);     // Mark data associated to given item as "edited", used by IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit() function.
+    IMGUI_API void          PushOverrideID(ImGuiID id);     // Push given value as-is at the top of the ID stack (whereas PushID combines old and new hashes)
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiID       GetIDWithSeed(const char* str_id_begin, const char* str_id_end, ImGuiID seed);
+
+    // Basic Helpers for widget code
+    IMGUI_API void          ItemSize(const ImVec2& size, float text_baseline_y = -1.0f);
+    inline void             ItemSize(const ImRect& bb, float text_baseline_y = -1.0f) { ItemSize(bb.GetSize(), text_baseline_y); } // FIXME: This is a misleading API since we expect CursorPos to be bb.Min.
+    IMGUI_API bool          ItemAdd(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, const ImRect* nav_bb = NULL, ImGuiItemFlags extra_flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          ItemHoverable(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id);
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsClippedEx(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id);
+    IMGUI_API void          SetLastItemData(ImGuiID item_id, ImGuiItemFlags in_flags, ImGuiItemStatusFlags status_flags, const ImRect& item_rect);
+    IMGUI_API ImVec2        CalcItemSize(ImVec2 size, float default_w, float default_h);
+    IMGUI_API float         CalcWrapWidthForPos(const ImVec2& pos, float wrap_pos_x);
+    IMGUI_API void          PushMultiItemsWidths(int components, float width_full);
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsItemToggledSelection();                                   // Was the last item selection toggled? (after Selectable(), TreeNode() etc. We only returns toggle _event_ in order to handle clipping correctly)
+    IMGUI_API ImVec2        GetContentRegionMaxAbs();
+    IMGUI_API void          ShrinkWidths(ImGuiShrinkWidthItem* items, int count, float width_excess);
+
+    // Parameter stacks
+    IMGUI_API void          PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags option, bool enabled);
+    IMGUI_API void          PopItemFlag();
+
+    // Logging/Capture
+    IMGUI_API void          LogBegin(ImGuiLogType type, int auto_open_depth);           // -> BeginCapture() when we design v2 api, for now stay under the radar by using the old name.
+    IMGUI_API void          LogToBuffer(int auto_open_depth = -1);                      // Start logging/capturing to internal buffer
+    IMGUI_API void          LogRenderedText(const ImVec2* ref_pos, const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL);
+    IMGUI_API void          LogSetNextTextDecoration(const char* prefix, const char* suffix);
+
+    // Popups, Modals, Tooltips
+    IMGUI_API bool          BeginChildEx(const char* name, ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size_arg, bool border, ImGuiWindowFlags flags);
+    IMGUI_API void          OpenPopupEx(ImGuiID id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags = ImGuiPopupFlags_None);
+    IMGUI_API void          ClosePopupToLevel(int remaining, bool restore_focus_to_window_under_popup);
+    IMGUI_API void          ClosePopupsOverWindow(ImGuiWindow* ref_window, bool restore_focus_to_window_under_popup);
+    IMGUI_API void          ClosePopupsExceptModals();
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsPopupOpen(ImGuiID id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags);
+    IMGUI_API bool          BeginPopupEx(ImGuiID id, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_flags);
+    IMGUI_API void          BeginTooltipEx(ImGuiTooltipFlags tooltip_flags, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_window_flags);
+    IMGUI_API ImRect        GetPopupAllowedExtentRect(ImGuiWindow* window);
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiWindow*  GetTopMostPopupModal();
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiWindow*  GetTopMostAndVisiblePopupModal();
+    IMGUI_API ImVec2        FindBestWindowPosForPopup(ImGuiWindow* window);
+    IMGUI_API ImVec2        FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(const ImVec2& ref_pos, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiDir* last_dir, const ImRect& r_outer, const ImRect& r_avoid, ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy policy);
+
+    // Menus
+    IMGUI_API bool          BeginViewportSideBar(const char* name, ImGuiViewport* viewport, ImGuiDir dir, float size, ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags);
+    IMGUI_API bool          BeginMenuEx(const char* label, const char* icon, bool enabled = true);
+    IMGUI_API bool          MenuItemEx(const char* label, const char* icon, const char* shortcut = NULL, bool selected = false, bool enabled = true);
+
+    // Combos
+    IMGUI_API bool          BeginComboPopup(ImGuiID popup_id, const ImRect& bb, ImGuiComboFlags flags);
+    IMGUI_API bool          BeginComboPreview();
+    IMGUI_API void          EndComboPreview();
+
+    // Gamepad/Keyboard Navigation
+    IMGUI_API void          NavInitWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, bool force_reinit);
+    IMGUI_API void          NavInitRequestApplyResult();
+    IMGUI_API bool          NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet();
+    IMGUI_API void          NavMoveRequestSubmit(ImGuiDir move_dir, ImGuiDir clip_dir, ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags, ImGuiScrollFlags scroll_flags);
+    IMGUI_API void          NavMoveRequestForward(ImGuiDir move_dir, ImGuiDir clip_dir, ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags, ImGuiScrollFlags scroll_flags);
+    IMGUI_API void          NavMoveRequestResolveWithLastItem(ImGuiNavItemData* result);
+    IMGUI_API void          NavMoveRequestCancel();
+    IMGUI_API void          NavMoveRequestApplyResult();
+    IMGUI_API void          NavMoveRequestTryWrapping(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags);
+    IMGUI_API void          ActivateItem(ImGuiID id);   // Remotely activate a button, checkbox, tree node etc. given its unique ID. activation is queued and processed on the next frame when the item is encountered again.
+    IMGUI_API void          SetNavWindow(ImGuiWindow* window);
+    IMGUI_API void          SetNavID(ImGuiID id, ImGuiNavLayer nav_layer, ImGuiID focus_scope_id, const ImRect& rect_rel);
+
+    // Focus Scope (WIP)
+    // This is generally used to identify a selection set (multiple of which may be in the same window), as selection
+    // patterns generally need to react (e.g. clear selection) when landing on an item of the set.
+    IMGUI_API void          PushFocusScope(ImGuiID id);
+    IMGUI_API void          PopFocusScope();
+    inline ImGuiID          GetFocusedFocusScope()          { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.NavFocusScopeId; }                            // Focus scope which is actually active
+    inline ImGuiID          GetFocusScope()                 { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.CurrentWindow->DC.NavFocusScopeIdCurrent; }   // Focus scope we are outputting into, set by PushFocusScope()
+
+    // Inputs
+    // FIXME: Eventually we should aim to move e.g. IsActiveIdUsingKey() into IsKeyXXX functions.
+    inline bool             IsNamedKey(ImGuiKey key)                                    { return key >= ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN && key < ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END; }
+    inline bool             IsLegacyKey(ImGuiKey key)                                   { return key >= ImGuiKey_LegacyNativeKey_BEGIN && key < ImGuiKey_LegacyNativeKey_END; }
+    inline bool             IsGamepadKey(ImGuiKey key)                                  { return key >= ImGuiKey_Gamepad_BEGIN && key < ImGuiKey_Gamepad_END; }
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiKeyData* GetKeyData(ImGuiKey key);
+    IMGUI_API void          SetItemUsingMouseWheel();
+    IMGUI_API void          SetActiveIdUsingNavAndKeys();
+    inline bool             IsActiveIdUsingNavDir(ImGuiDir dir)                         { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return (g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask & (1 << dir)) != 0; }
+    inline bool             IsActiveIdUsingKey(ImGuiKey key)                            { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.ActiveIdUsingKeyInputMask[key]; }
+    inline void             SetActiveIdUsingKey(ImGuiKey key)                           { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; g.ActiveIdUsingKeyInputMask.SetBit(key); }
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsMouseDragPastThreshold(ImGuiMouseButton button, float lock_threshold = -1.0f);
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiModFlags GetMergedModFlags();
+    IMGUI_API ImVec2        GetKeyVector2d(ImGuiKey key_left, ImGuiKey key_right, ImGuiKey key_up, ImGuiKey key_down);
+    IMGUI_API float         GetNavTweakPressedAmount(ImGuiAxis axis);
+    IMGUI_API int           CalcTypematicRepeatAmount(float t0, float t1, float repeat_delay, float repeat_rate);
+    IMGUI_API void          GetTypematicRepeatRate(ImGuiInputReadFlags flags, float* repeat_delay, float* repeat_rate);
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsKeyPressedEx(ImGuiKey key, ImGuiInputReadFlags flags = 0);
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
+    inline bool             IsKeyPressedMap(ImGuiKey key, bool repeat = true)           { IM_ASSERT(IsNamedKey(key)); return IsKeyPressed(key, repeat); } // [removed in 1.87]
+#endif
+
+    // Docking
+    // (some functions are only declared in imgui.cpp, see Docking section)
+    IMGUI_API void          DockContextInitialize(ImGuiContext* ctx);
+    IMGUI_API void          DockContextShutdown(ImGuiContext* ctx);
+    IMGUI_API void          DockContextClearNodes(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiID root_id, bool clear_settings_refs); // Use root_id==0 to clear all
+    IMGUI_API void          DockContextRebuildNodes(ImGuiContext* ctx);
+    IMGUI_API void          DockContextNewFrameUpdateUndocking(ImGuiContext* ctx);
+    IMGUI_API void          DockContextNewFrameUpdateDocking(ImGuiContext* ctx);
+    IMGUI_API void          DockContextEndFrame(ImGuiContext* ctx);
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiID       DockContextGenNodeID(ImGuiContext* ctx);
+    IMGUI_API void          DockContextQueueDock(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiWindow* target, ImGuiDockNode* target_node, ImGuiWindow* payload, ImGuiDir split_dir, float split_ratio, bool split_outer);
+    IMGUI_API void          DockContextQueueUndockWindow(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiWindow* window);
+    IMGUI_API void          DockContextQueueUndockNode(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiDockNode* node);
+    IMGUI_API bool          DockContextCalcDropPosForDocking(ImGuiWindow* target, ImGuiDockNode* target_node, ImGuiWindow* payload, ImGuiDir split_dir, bool split_outer, ImVec2* out_pos);
+    IMGUI_API bool          DockNodeBeginAmendTabBar(ImGuiDockNode* node);
+    IMGUI_API void          DockNodeEndAmendTabBar();
+    inline ImGuiDockNode*   DockNodeGetRootNode(ImGuiDockNode* node)                 { while (node->ParentNode) node = node->ParentNode; return node; }
+    inline bool             DockNodeIsInHierarchyOf(ImGuiDockNode* node, ImGuiDockNode* parent) { while (node) { if (node == parent) return true; node = node->ParentNode; } return false; }
+    inline int              DockNodeGetDepth(const ImGuiDockNode* node)              { int depth = 0; while (node->ParentNode) { node = node->ParentNode; depth++; } return depth; }
+    inline ImGuiID          DockNodeGetWindowMenuButtonId(const ImGuiDockNode* node) { return ImHashStr("#COLLAPSE", 0, node->ID); }
+    inline ImGuiDockNode*   GetWindowDockNode()                                      { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.CurrentWindow->DockNode; }
+    IMGUI_API bool          GetWindowAlwaysWantOwnTabBar(ImGuiWindow* window);
+    IMGUI_API void          BeginDocked(ImGuiWindow* window, bool* p_open);
+    IMGUI_API void          BeginDockableDragDropSource(ImGuiWindow* window);
+    IMGUI_API void          BeginDockableDragDropTarget(ImGuiWindow* window);
+    IMGUI_API void          SetWindowDock(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiID dock_id, ImGuiCond cond);
+
+    // Docking - Builder function needs to be generally called before the node is used/submitted.
+    // - The DockBuilderXXX functions are designed to _eventually_ become a public API, but it is too early to expose it and guarantee stability.
+    // - Do not hold on ImGuiDockNode* pointers! They may be invalidated by any split/merge/remove operation and every frame.
+    // - To create a DockSpace() node, make sure to set the ImGuiDockNodeFlags_DockSpace flag when calling DockBuilderAddNode().
+    //   You can create dockspace nodes (attached to a window) _or_ floating nodes (carry its own window) with this API.
+    // - DockBuilderSplitNode() create 2 child nodes within 1 node. The initial node becomes a parent node.
+    // - If you intend to split the node immediately after creation using DockBuilderSplitNode(), make sure
+    //   to call DockBuilderSetNodeSize() beforehand. If you don't, the resulting split sizes may not be reliable.
+    // - Call DockBuilderFinish() after you are done.
+    IMGUI_API void          DockBuilderDockWindow(const char* window_name, ImGuiID node_id);
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiDockNode*DockBuilderGetNode(ImGuiID node_id);
+    inline ImGuiDockNode*   DockBuilderGetCentralNode(ImGuiID node_id)              { ImGuiDockNode* node = DockBuilderGetNode(node_id); if (!node) return NULL; return DockNodeGetRootNode(node)->CentralNode; }
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiID       DockBuilderAddNode(ImGuiID node_id = 0, ImGuiDockNodeFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API void          DockBuilderRemoveNode(ImGuiID node_id);                 // Remove node and all its child, undock all windows
+    IMGUI_API void          DockBuilderRemoveNodeDockedWindows(ImGuiID node_id, bool clear_settings_refs = true);
+    IMGUI_API void          DockBuilderRemoveNodeChildNodes(ImGuiID node_id);       // Remove all split/hierarchy. All remaining docked windows will be re-docked to the remaining root node (node_id).
+    IMGUI_API void          DockBuilderSetNodePos(ImGuiID node_id, ImVec2 pos);
+    IMGUI_API void          DockBuilderSetNodeSize(ImGuiID node_id, ImVec2 size);
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiID       DockBuilderSplitNode(ImGuiID node_id, ImGuiDir split_dir, float size_ratio_for_node_at_dir, ImGuiID* out_id_at_dir, ImGuiID* out_id_at_opposite_dir); // Create 2 child nodes in this parent node.
+    IMGUI_API void          DockBuilderCopyDockSpace(ImGuiID src_dockspace_id, ImGuiID dst_dockspace_id, ImVector<const char*>* in_window_remap_pairs);
+    IMGUI_API void          DockBuilderCopyNode(ImGuiID src_node_id, ImGuiID dst_node_id, ImVector<ImGuiID>* out_node_remap_pairs);
+    IMGUI_API void          DockBuilderCopyWindowSettings(const char* src_name, const char* dst_name);
+    IMGUI_API void          DockBuilderFinish(ImGuiID node_id);
+
+    // Drag and Drop
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsDragDropActive();
+    IMGUI_API bool          BeginDragDropTargetCustom(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id);
+    IMGUI_API void          ClearDragDrop();
+    IMGUI_API bool          IsDragDropPayloadBeingAccepted();
+
+    // Internal Columns API (this is not exposed because we will encourage transitioning to the Tables API)
+    IMGUI_API void          SetWindowClipRectBeforeSetChannel(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& clip_rect);
+    IMGUI_API void          BeginColumns(const char* str_id, int count, ImGuiOldColumnFlags flags = 0); // setup number of columns. use an identifier to distinguish multiple column sets. close with EndColumns().
+    IMGUI_API void          EndColumns();                                                               // close columns
+    IMGUI_API void          PushColumnClipRect(int column_index);
+    IMGUI_API void          PushColumnsBackground();
+    IMGUI_API void          PopColumnsBackground();
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiID       GetColumnsID(const char* str_id, int count);
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiOldColumns* FindOrCreateColumns(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiID id);
+    IMGUI_API float         GetColumnOffsetFromNorm(const ImGuiOldColumns* columns, float offset_norm);
+    IMGUI_API float         GetColumnNormFromOffset(const ImGuiOldColumns* columns, float offset);
+
+    // Tables: Candidates for public API
+    IMGUI_API void          TableOpenContextMenu(int column_n = -1);
+    IMGUI_API void          TableSetColumnWidth(int column_n, float width);
+    IMGUI_API void          TableSetColumnSortDirection(int column_n, ImGuiSortDirection sort_direction, bool append_to_sort_specs);
+    IMGUI_API int           TableGetHoveredColumn(); // May use (TableGetColumnFlags() & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsHovered) instead. Return hovered column. return -1 when table is not hovered. return columns_count if the unused space at the right of visible columns is hovered.
+    IMGUI_API float         TableGetHeaderRowHeight();
+    IMGUI_API void          TablePushBackgroundChannel();
+    IMGUI_API void          TablePopBackgroundChannel();
+
+    // Tables: Internals
+    inline    ImGuiTable*   GetCurrentTable() { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.CurrentTable; }
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiTable*   TableFindByID(ImGuiID id);
+    IMGUI_API bool          BeginTableEx(const char* name, ImGuiID id, int columns_count, ImGuiTableFlags flags = 0, const ImVec2& outer_size = ImVec2(0, 0), float inner_width = 0.0f);
+    IMGUI_API void          TableBeginInitMemory(ImGuiTable* table, int columns_count);
+    IMGUI_API void          TableBeginApplyRequests(ImGuiTable* table);
+    IMGUI_API void          TableSetupDrawChannels(ImGuiTable* table);
+    IMGUI_API void          TableUpdateLayout(ImGuiTable* table);
+    IMGUI_API void          TableUpdateBorders(ImGuiTable* table);
+    IMGUI_API void          TableUpdateColumnsWeightFromWidth(ImGuiTable* table);
+    IMGUI_API void          TableDrawBorders(ImGuiTable* table);
+    IMGUI_API void          TableDrawContextMenu(ImGuiTable* table);
+    IMGUI_API bool          TableBeginContextMenuPopup(ImGuiTable* table);
+    IMGUI_API void          TableMergeDrawChannels(ImGuiTable* table);
+    inline ImGuiTableInstanceData*   TableGetInstanceData(ImGuiTable* table, int instance_no) { if (instance_no == 0) return &table->InstanceDataFirst; return &table->InstanceDataExtra[instance_no - 1]; }
+    IMGUI_API void          TableSortSpecsSanitize(ImGuiTable* table);
+    IMGUI_API void          TableSortSpecsBuild(ImGuiTable* table);
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiSortDirection TableGetColumnNextSortDirection(ImGuiTableColumn* column);
+    IMGUI_API void          TableFixColumnSortDirection(ImGuiTable* table, ImGuiTableColumn* column);
+    IMGUI_API float         TableGetColumnWidthAuto(ImGuiTable* table, ImGuiTableColumn* column);
+    IMGUI_API void          TableBeginRow(ImGuiTable* table);
+    IMGUI_API void          TableEndRow(ImGuiTable* table);
+    IMGUI_API void          TableBeginCell(ImGuiTable* table, int column_n);
+    IMGUI_API void          TableEndCell(ImGuiTable* table);
+    IMGUI_API ImRect        TableGetCellBgRect(const ImGuiTable* table, int column_n);
+    IMGUI_API const char*   TableGetColumnName(const ImGuiTable* table, int column_n);
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiID       TableGetColumnResizeID(const ImGuiTable* table, int column_n, int instance_no = 0);
+    IMGUI_API float         TableGetMaxColumnWidth(const ImGuiTable* table, int column_n);
+    IMGUI_API void          TableSetColumnWidthAutoSingle(ImGuiTable* table, int column_n);
+    IMGUI_API void          TableSetColumnWidthAutoAll(ImGuiTable* table);
+    IMGUI_API void          TableRemove(ImGuiTable* table);
+    IMGUI_API void          TableGcCompactTransientBuffers(ImGuiTable* table);
+    IMGUI_API void          TableGcCompactTransientBuffers(ImGuiTableTempData* table);
+    IMGUI_API void          TableGcCompactSettings();
+
+    // Tables: Settings
+    IMGUI_API void                  TableLoadSettings(ImGuiTable* table);
+    IMGUI_API void                  TableSaveSettings(ImGuiTable* table);
+    IMGUI_API void                  TableResetSettings(ImGuiTable* table);
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiTableSettings*   TableGetBoundSettings(ImGuiTable* table);
+    IMGUI_API void                  TableSettingsAddSettingsHandler();
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiTableSettings*   TableSettingsCreate(ImGuiID id, int columns_count);
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiTableSettings*   TableSettingsFindByID(ImGuiID id);
+
+    // Tab Bars
+    IMGUI_API bool          BeginTabBarEx(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const ImRect& bb, ImGuiTabBarFlags flags, ImGuiDockNode* dock_node);
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiTabItem* TabBarFindTabByID(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiID tab_id);
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiTabItem* TabBarFindMostRecentlySelectedTabForActiveWindow(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar);
+    IMGUI_API void          TabBarAddTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiTabItemFlags tab_flags, ImGuiWindow* window);
+    IMGUI_API void          TabBarRemoveTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiID tab_id);
+    IMGUI_API void          TabBarCloseTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiTabItem* tab);
+    IMGUI_API void          TabBarQueueReorder(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const ImGuiTabItem* tab, int offset);
+    IMGUI_API void          TabBarQueueReorderFromMousePos(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const ImGuiTabItem* tab, ImVec2 mouse_pos);
+    IMGUI_API bool          TabBarProcessReorder(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar);
+    IMGUI_API bool          TabItemEx(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const char* label, bool* p_open, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags, ImGuiWindow* docked_window);
+    IMGUI_API ImVec2        TabItemCalcSize(const char* label, bool has_close_button);
+    IMGUI_API void          TabItemBackground(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& bb, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags, ImU32 col);
+    IMGUI_API void          TabItemLabelAndCloseButton(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& bb, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags, ImVec2 frame_padding, const char* label, ImGuiID tab_id, ImGuiID close_button_id, bool is_contents_visible, bool* out_just_closed, bool* out_text_clipped);
+
+    // Render helpers
+    // AVOID USING OUTSIDE OF IMGUI.CPP! NOT FOR PUBLIC CONSUMPTION. THOSE FUNCTIONS ARE A MESS. THEIR SIGNATURE AND BEHAVIOR WILL CHANGE, THEY NEED TO BE REFACTORED INTO SOMETHING DECENT.
+    // NB: All position are in absolute pixels coordinates (we are never using window coordinates internally)
+    IMGUI_API void          RenderText(ImVec2 pos, const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL, bool hide_text_after_hash = true);
+    IMGUI_API void          RenderTextWrapped(ImVec2 pos, const char* text, const char* text_end, float wrap_width);
+    IMGUI_API void          RenderTextClipped(const ImVec2& pos_min, const ImVec2& pos_max, const char* text, const char* text_end, const ImVec2* text_size_if_known, const ImVec2& align = ImVec2(0, 0), const ImRect* clip_rect = NULL);
+    IMGUI_API void          RenderTextClippedEx(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImVec2& pos_min, const ImVec2& pos_max, const char* text, const char* text_end, const ImVec2* text_size_if_known, const ImVec2& align = ImVec2(0, 0), const ImRect* clip_rect = NULL);
+    IMGUI_API void          RenderTextEllipsis(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImVec2& pos_min, const ImVec2& pos_max, float clip_max_x, float ellipsis_max_x, const char* text, const char* text_end, const ImVec2* text_size_if_known);
+    IMGUI_API void          RenderFrame(ImVec2 p_min, ImVec2 p_max, ImU32 fill_col, bool border = true, float rounding = 0.0f);
+    IMGUI_API void          RenderFrameBorder(ImVec2 p_min, ImVec2 p_max, float rounding = 0.0f);
+    IMGUI_API void          RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 p_min, ImVec2 p_max, ImU32 fill_col, float grid_step, ImVec2 grid_off, float rounding = 0.0f, ImDrawFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API void          RenderNavHighlight(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags flags = ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeDefault); // Navigation highlight
+    IMGUI_API const char*   FindRenderedTextEnd(const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL); // Find the optional ## from which we stop displaying text.
+    IMGUI_API void          RenderMouseCursor(ImVec2 pos, float scale, ImGuiMouseCursor mouse_cursor, ImU32 col_fill, ImU32 col_border, ImU32 col_shadow);
+
+    // Render helpers (those functions don't access any ImGui state!)
+    IMGUI_API void          RenderArrow(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImU32 col, ImGuiDir dir, float scale = 1.0f);
+    IMGUI_API void          RenderBullet(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImU32 col);
+    IMGUI_API void          RenderCheckMark(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImU32 col, float sz);
+    IMGUI_API void          RenderArrowPointingAt(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImVec2 half_sz, ImGuiDir direction, ImU32 col);
+    IMGUI_API void          RenderArrowDockMenu(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 p_min, float sz, ImU32 col);
+    IMGUI_API void          RenderRectFilledRangeH(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& rect, ImU32 col, float x_start_norm, float x_end_norm, float rounding);
+    IMGUI_API void          RenderRectFilledWithHole(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& outer, const ImRect& inner, ImU32 col, float rounding);
+    IMGUI_API ImDrawFlags   CalcRoundingFlagsForRectInRect(const ImRect& r_in, const ImRect& r_outer, float threshold);
+
+    // Widgets
+    IMGUI_API void          TextEx(const char* text, const char* text_end = NULL, ImGuiTextFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          ButtonEx(const char* label, const ImVec2& size_arg = ImVec2(0, 0), ImGuiButtonFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          CloseButton(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& pos);
+    IMGUI_API bool          CollapseButton(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiDockNode* dock_node);
+    IMGUI_API bool          ArrowButtonEx(const char* str_id, ImGuiDir dir, ImVec2 size_arg, ImGuiButtonFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API void          Scrollbar(ImGuiAxis axis);
+    IMGUI_API bool          ScrollbarEx(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiAxis axis, ImS64* p_scroll_v, ImS64 avail_v, ImS64 contents_v, ImDrawFlags flags);
+    IMGUI_API bool          ImageButtonEx(ImGuiID id, ImTextureID texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0, const ImVec2& uv1, const ImVec2& padding, const ImVec4& bg_col, const ImVec4& tint_col);
+    IMGUI_API ImRect        GetWindowScrollbarRect(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiAxis axis);
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiID       GetWindowScrollbarID(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiAxis axis);
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiID       GetWindowResizeCornerID(ImGuiWindow* window, int n); // 0..3: corners
+    IMGUI_API ImGuiID       GetWindowResizeBorderID(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiDir dir);
+    IMGUI_API void          SeparatorEx(ImGuiSeparatorFlags flags);
+    IMGUI_API bool          CheckboxFlags(const char* label, ImS64* flags, ImS64 flags_value);
+    IMGUI_API bool          CheckboxFlags(const char* label, ImU64* flags, ImU64 flags_value);
+
+    // Widgets low-level behaviors
+    IMGUI_API bool          ButtonBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, bool* out_hovered, bool* out_held, ImGuiButtonFlags flags = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          DragBehavior(ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_v, float v_speed, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags);
+    IMGUI_API bool          SliderBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_v, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags, ImRect* out_grab_bb);
+    IMGUI_API bool          SplitterBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiAxis axis, float* size1, float* size2, float min_size1, float min_size2, float hover_extend = 0.0f, float hover_visibility_delay = 0.0f, ImU32 bg_col = 0);
+    IMGUI_API bool          TreeNodeBehavior(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* label, const char* label_end = NULL);
+    IMGUI_API void          TreePushOverrideID(ImGuiID id);
+    IMGUI_API void          TreeNodeSetOpen(ImGuiID id, bool open);
+    IMGUI_API bool          TreeNodeUpdateNextOpen(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags);   // Return open state. Consume previous SetNextItemOpen() data, if any. May return true when logging.
+
+    // Template functions are instantiated in imgui_widgets.cpp for a finite number of types.
+    // To use them externally (for custom widget) you may need an "extern template" statement in your code in order to link to existing instances and silence Clang warnings (see #2036).
+    // e.g. " extern template IMGUI_API float RoundScalarWithFormatT<float, float>(const char* format, ImGuiDataType data_type, float v); "
+    template<typename T, typename SIGNED_T, typename FLOAT_T>   IMGUI_API float ScaleRatioFromValueT(ImGuiDataType data_type, T v, T v_min, T v_max, bool is_logarithmic, float logarithmic_zero_epsilon, float zero_deadzone_size);
+    template<typename T, typename SIGNED_T, typename FLOAT_T>   IMGUI_API T     ScaleValueFromRatioT(ImGuiDataType data_type, float t, T v_min, T v_max, bool is_logarithmic, float logarithmic_zero_epsilon, float zero_deadzone_size);
+    template<typename T, typename SIGNED_T, typename FLOAT_T>   IMGUI_API bool  DragBehaviorT(ImGuiDataType data_type, T* v, float v_speed, T v_min, T v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags);
+    template<typename T, typename SIGNED_T, typename FLOAT_T>   IMGUI_API bool  SliderBehaviorT(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, T* v, T v_min, T v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags, ImRect* out_grab_bb);
+    template<typename T>                                        IMGUI_API T     RoundScalarWithFormatT(const char* format, ImGuiDataType data_type, T v);
+    template<typename T>                                        IMGUI_API bool  CheckboxFlagsT(const char* label, T* flags, T flags_value);
+
+    // Data type helpers
+    IMGUI_API const ImGuiDataTypeInfo*  DataTypeGetInfo(ImGuiDataType data_type);
+    IMGUI_API int           DataTypeFormatString(char* buf, int buf_size, ImGuiDataType data_type, const void* p_data, const char* format);
+    IMGUI_API void          DataTypeApplyOp(ImGuiDataType data_type, int op, void* output, const void* arg_1, const void* arg_2);
+    IMGUI_API bool          DataTypeApplyFromText(const char* buf, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const char* format);
+    IMGUI_API int           DataTypeCompare(ImGuiDataType data_type, const void* arg_1, const void* arg_2);
+    IMGUI_API bool          DataTypeClamp(ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_min, const void* p_max);
+
+    // InputText
+    IMGUI_API bool          InputTextEx(const char* label, const char* hint, char* buf, int buf_size, const ImVec2& size_arg, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback = NULL, void* user_data = NULL);
+    IMGUI_API bool          TempInputText(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, const char* label, char* buf, int buf_size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags);
+    IMGUI_API bool          TempInputScalar(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const char* format, const void* p_clamp_min = NULL, const void* p_clamp_max = NULL);
+    inline bool             TempInputIsActive(ImGuiID id)       { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return (g.ActiveId == id && g.TempInputId == id); }
+    inline ImGuiInputTextState* GetInputTextState(ImGuiID id)   { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return (id != 0 && g.InputTextState.ID == id) ? &g.InputTextState : NULL; } // Get input text state if active
+
+    // Color
+    IMGUI_API void          ColorTooltip(const char* text, const float* col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags);
+    IMGUI_API void          ColorEditOptionsPopup(const float* col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags);
+    IMGUI_API void          ColorPickerOptionsPopup(const float* ref_col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags);
+
+    // Plot
+    IMGUI_API int           PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType plot_type, const char* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 frame_size);
+
+    // Shade functions (write over already created vertices)
+    IMGUI_API void          ShadeVertsLinearColorGradientKeepAlpha(ImDrawList* draw_list, int vert_start_idx, int vert_end_idx, ImVec2 gradient_p0, ImVec2 gradient_p1, ImU32 col0, ImU32 col1);
+    IMGUI_API void          ShadeVertsLinearUV(ImDrawList* draw_list, int vert_start_idx, int vert_end_idx, const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& uv_a, const ImVec2& uv_b, bool clamp);
+
+    // Garbage collection
+    IMGUI_API void          GcCompactTransientMiscBuffers();
+    IMGUI_API void          GcCompactTransientWindowBuffers(ImGuiWindow* window);
+    IMGUI_API void          GcAwakeTransientWindowBuffers(ImGuiWindow* window);
+
+    // Debug Log
+    IMGUI_API void          DebugLog(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(1);
+    IMGUI_API void          DebugLogV(const char* fmt, va_list args) IM_FMTLIST(1);
+
+    // Debug Tools
+    IMGUI_API void          ErrorCheckEndFrameRecover(ImGuiErrorLogCallback log_callback, void* user_data = NULL);
+    IMGUI_API void          ErrorCheckEndWindowRecover(ImGuiErrorLogCallback log_callback, void* user_data = NULL);
+    inline void             DebugDrawItemRect(ImU32 col = IM_COL32(255,0,0,255))    { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow; GetForegroundDrawList(window)->AddRect(g.LastItemData.Rect.Min, g.LastItemData.Rect.Max, col); }
+    inline void             DebugStartItemPicker()                                  { ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; g.DebugItemPickerActive = true; }
+    IMGUI_API void          ShowFontAtlas(ImFontAtlas* atlas);
+    IMGUI_API void          DebugHookIdInfo(ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, const void* data_id, const void* data_id_end);
+    IMGUI_API void          DebugNodeColumns(ImGuiOldColumns* columns);
+    IMGUI_API void          DebugNodeDockNode(ImGuiDockNode* node, const char* label);
+    IMGUI_API void          DebugNodeDrawList(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiViewportP* viewport, const ImDrawList* draw_list, const char* label);
+    IMGUI_API void          DebugNodeDrawCmdShowMeshAndBoundingBox(ImDrawList* out_draw_list, const ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImDrawCmd* draw_cmd, bool show_mesh, bool show_aabb);
+    IMGUI_API void          DebugNodeFont(ImFont* font);
+    IMGUI_API void          DebugNodeFontGlyph(ImFont* font, const ImFontGlyph* glyph);
+    IMGUI_API void          DebugNodeStorage(ImGuiStorage* storage, const char* label);
+    IMGUI_API void          DebugNodeTabBar(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const char* label);
+    IMGUI_API void          DebugNodeTable(ImGuiTable* table);
+    IMGUI_API void          DebugNodeTableSettings(ImGuiTableSettings* settings);
+    IMGUI_API void          DebugNodeInputTextState(ImGuiInputTextState* state);
+    IMGUI_API void          DebugNodeWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, const char* label);
+    IMGUI_API void          DebugNodeWindowSettings(ImGuiWindowSettings* settings);
+    IMGUI_API void          DebugNodeWindowsList(ImVector<ImGuiWindow*>* windows, const char* label);
+    IMGUI_API void          DebugNodeWindowsListByBeginStackParent(ImGuiWindow** windows, int windows_size, ImGuiWindow* parent_in_begin_stack);
+    IMGUI_API void          DebugNodeViewport(ImGuiViewportP* viewport);
+    IMGUI_API void          DebugRenderViewportThumbnail(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImGuiViewportP* viewport, const ImRect& bb);
+
+    // Obsolete functions
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+    inline bool     TreeNodeBehaviorIsOpen(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags = 0)    { return TreeNodeUpdateNextOpen(id, flags); }   // Renamed in 1.89
+
+    // Refactored focus/nav/tabbing system in 1.82 and 1.84. If you have old/custom copy-and-pasted widgets that used FocusableItemRegister():
+    //  (Old) IMGUI_VERSION_NUM  < 18209: using 'ItemAdd(....)'                              and 'bool tab_focused = FocusableItemRegister(...)'
+    //  (Old) IMGUI_VERSION_NUM >= 18209: using 'ItemAdd(..., ImGuiItemAddFlags_Focusable)'  and 'bool tab_focused = (GetItemStatusFlags() & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Focused) != 0'
+    //  (New) IMGUI_VERSION_NUM >= 18413: using 'ItemAdd(..., ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable)'     and 'bool tab_focused = (GetItemStatusFlags() & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_FocusedTabbing) != 0 || g.NavActivateInputId == id' (WIP)
+    // Widget code are simplified as there's no need to call FocusableItemUnregister() while managing the transition from regular widget to TempInputText()
+    inline bool     FocusableItemRegister(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiID id)              { IM_ASSERT(0); IM_UNUSED(window); IM_UNUSED(id); return false; } // -> pass ImGuiItemAddFlags_Inputable flag to ItemAdd()
+    inline void     FocusableItemUnregister(ImGuiWindow* window)                        { IM_ASSERT(0); IM_UNUSED(window); }                              // -> unnecessary: TempInputText() uses ImGuiInputTextFlags_MergedItem
+#endif
+
+} // namespace ImGui
+
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] ImFontAtlas internal API
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// This structure is likely to evolve as we add support for incremental atlas updates
+struct ImFontBuilderIO
+{
+    bool    (*FontBuilder_Build)(ImFontAtlas* atlas);
+};
+
+// Helper for font builder
+#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_STB_TRUETYPE
+IMGUI_API const ImFontBuilderIO* ImFontAtlasGetBuilderForStbTruetype();
+#endif
+IMGUI_API void      ImFontAtlasBuildInit(ImFontAtlas* atlas);
+IMGUI_API void      ImFontAtlasBuildSetupFont(ImFontAtlas* atlas, ImFont* font, ImFontConfig* font_config, float ascent, float descent);
+IMGUI_API void      ImFontAtlasBuildPackCustomRects(ImFontAtlas* atlas, void* stbrp_context_opaque);
+IMGUI_API void      ImFontAtlasBuildFinish(ImFontAtlas* atlas);
+IMGUI_API void      ImFontAtlasBuildRender8bppRectFromString(ImFontAtlas* atlas, int x, int y, int w, int h, const char* in_str, char in_marker_char, unsigned char in_marker_pixel_value);
+IMGUI_API void      ImFontAtlasBuildRender32bppRectFromString(ImFontAtlas* atlas, int x, int y, int w, int h, const char* in_str, char in_marker_char, unsigned int in_marker_pixel_value);
+IMGUI_API void      ImFontAtlasBuildMultiplyCalcLookupTable(unsigned char out_table[256], float in_multiply_factor);
+IMGUI_API void      ImFontAtlasBuildMultiplyRectAlpha8(const unsigned char table[256], unsigned char* pixels, int x, int y, int w, int h, int stride);
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Test Engine specific hooks (imgui_test_engine)
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_TEST_ENGINE
+extern void         ImGuiTestEngineHook_ItemAdd(ImGuiContext* ctx, const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id);
+extern void         ImGuiTestEngineHook_ItemInfo(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiID id, const char* label, ImGuiItemStatusFlags flags);
+extern void         ImGuiTestEngineHook_Log(ImGuiContext* ctx, const char* fmt, ...);
+extern const char*  ImGuiTestEngine_FindItemDebugLabel(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiID id);
+
+#define IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_ADD(_BB,_ID)                 if (g.TestEngineHookItems) ImGuiTestEngineHook_ItemAdd(&g, _BB, _ID)               // Register item bounding box
+#define IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(_ID,_LABEL,_FLAGS)      if (g.TestEngineHookItems) ImGuiTestEngineHook_ItemInfo(&g, _ID, _LABEL, _FLAGS)   // Register item label and status flags (optional)
+#define IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_LOG(_FMT,...)                     if (g.TestEngineHookItems) ImGuiTestEngineHook_Log(&g, _FMT, __VA_ARGS__)          // Custom log entry from user land into test log
+#else
+#define IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_ADD(_BB,_ID)                 ((void)0)
+#define IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(_ID,_LABEL,_FLAGS)      ((void)g)
+#endif
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(__clang__)
+#pragma clang diagnostic pop
+#elif defined(__GNUC__)
+#pragma GCC diagnostic pop
+#endif
+
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+#pragma warning (pop)
+#endif
+
+#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE
+
diff --git a/dependencies/include/imgui/imstb_rectpack.h b/dependencies/include/imgui/imstb_rectpack.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f6917e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/imgui/imstb_rectpack.h
@@ -0,0 +1,627 @@
+// [DEAR IMGUI]
+// This is a slightly modified version of stb_rect_pack.h 1.01.
+// Grep for [DEAR IMGUI] to find the changes.
+// 
+// stb_rect_pack.h - v1.01 - public domain - rectangle packing
+// Sean Barrett 2014
+//
+// Useful for e.g. packing rectangular textures into an atlas.
+// Does not do rotation.
+//
+// Before #including,
+//
+//    #define STB_RECT_PACK_IMPLEMENTATION
+//
+// in the file that you want to have the implementation.
+//
+// Not necessarily the awesomest packing method, but better than
+// the totally naive one in stb_truetype (which is primarily what
+// this is meant to replace).
+//
+// Has only had a few tests run, may have issues.
+//
+// More docs to come.
+//
+// No memory allocations; uses qsort() and assert() from stdlib.
+// Can override those by defining STBRP_SORT and STBRP_ASSERT.
+//
+// This library currently uses the Skyline Bottom-Left algorithm.
+//
+// Please note: better rectangle packers are welcome! Please
+// implement them to the same API, but with a different init
+// function.
+//
+// Credits
+//
+//  Library
+//    Sean Barrett
+//  Minor features
+//    Martins Mozeiko
+//    github:IntellectualKitty
+//
+//  Bugfixes / warning fixes
+//    Jeremy Jaussaud
+//    Fabian Giesen
+//
+// Version history:
+//
+//     1.01  (2021-07-11)  always use large rect mode, expose STBRP__MAXVAL in public section
+//     1.00  (2019-02-25)  avoid small space waste; gracefully fail too-wide rectangles
+//     0.99  (2019-02-07)  warning fixes
+//     0.11  (2017-03-03)  return packing success/fail result
+//     0.10  (2016-10-25)  remove cast-away-const to avoid warnings
+//     0.09  (2016-08-27)  fix compiler warnings
+//     0.08  (2015-09-13)  really fix bug with empty rects (w=0 or h=0)
+//     0.07  (2015-09-13)  fix bug with empty rects (w=0 or h=0)
+//     0.06  (2015-04-15)  added STBRP_SORT to allow replacing qsort
+//     0.05:  added STBRP_ASSERT to allow replacing assert
+//     0.04:  fixed minor bug in STBRP_LARGE_RECTS support
+//     0.01:  initial release
+//
+// LICENSE
+//
+//   See end of file for license information.
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+//       INCLUDE SECTION
+//
+
+#ifndef STB_INCLUDE_STB_RECT_PACK_H
+#define STB_INCLUDE_STB_RECT_PACK_H
+
+#define STB_RECT_PACK_VERSION  1
+
+#ifdef STBRP_STATIC
+#define STBRP_DEF static
+#else
+#define STBRP_DEF extern
+#endif
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C" {
+#endif
+
+typedef struct stbrp_context stbrp_context;
+typedef struct stbrp_node    stbrp_node;
+typedef struct stbrp_rect    stbrp_rect;
+
+typedef int            stbrp_coord;
+
+#define STBRP__MAXVAL  0x7fffffff
+// Mostly for internal use, but this is the maximum supported coordinate value.
+
+STBRP_DEF int stbrp_pack_rects (stbrp_context *context, stbrp_rect *rects, int num_rects);
+// Assign packed locations to rectangles. The rectangles are of type
+// 'stbrp_rect' defined below, stored in the array 'rects', and there
+// are 'num_rects' many of them.
+//
+// Rectangles which are successfully packed have the 'was_packed' flag
+// set to a non-zero value and 'x' and 'y' store the minimum location
+// on each axis (i.e. bottom-left in cartesian coordinates, top-left
+// if you imagine y increasing downwards). Rectangles which do not fit
+// have the 'was_packed' flag set to 0.
+//
+// You should not try to access the 'rects' array from another thread
+// while this function is running, as the function temporarily reorders
+// the array while it executes.
+//
+// To pack into another rectangle, you need to call stbrp_init_target
+// again. To continue packing into the same rectangle, you can call
+// this function again. Calling this multiple times with multiple rect
+// arrays will probably produce worse packing results than calling it
+// a single time with the full rectangle array, but the option is
+// available.
+//
+// The function returns 1 if all of the rectangles were successfully
+// packed and 0 otherwise.
+
+struct stbrp_rect
+{
+   // reserved for your use:
+   int            id;
+
+   // input:
+   stbrp_coord    w, h;
+
+   // output:
+   stbrp_coord    x, y;
+   int            was_packed;  // non-zero if valid packing
+
+}; // 16 bytes, nominally
+
+
+STBRP_DEF void stbrp_init_target (stbrp_context *context, int width, int height, stbrp_node *nodes, int num_nodes);
+// Initialize a rectangle packer to:
+//    pack a rectangle that is 'width' by 'height' in dimensions
+//    using temporary storage provided by the array 'nodes', which is 'num_nodes' long
+//
+// You must call this function every time you start packing into a new target.
+//
+// There is no "shutdown" function. The 'nodes' memory must stay valid for
+// the following stbrp_pack_rects() call (or calls), but can be freed after
+// the call (or calls) finish.
+//
+// Note: to guarantee best results, either:
+//       1. make sure 'num_nodes' >= 'width'
+//   or  2. call stbrp_allow_out_of_mem() defined below with 'allow_out_of_mem = 1'
+//
+// If you don't do either of the above things, widths will be quantized to multiples
+// of small integers to guarantee the algorithm doesn't run out of temporary storage.
+//
+// If you do #2, then the non-quantized algorithm will be used, but the algorithm
+// may run out of temporary storage and be unable to pack some rectangles.
+
+STBRP_DEF void stbrp_setup_allow_out_of_mem (stbrp_context *context, int allow_out_of_mem);
+// Optionally call this function after init but before doing any packing to
+// change the handling of the out-of-temp-memory scenario, described above.
+// If you call init again, this will be reset to the default (false).
+
+
+STBRP_DEF void stbrp_setup_heuristic (stbrp_context *context, int heuristic);
+// Optionally select which packing heuristic the library should use. Different
+// heuristics will produce better/worse results for different data sets.
+// If you call init again, this will be reset to the default.
+
+enum
+{
+   STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_default=0,
+   STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_BL_sortHeight = STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_default,
+   STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_BF_sortHeight
+};
+
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// the details of the following structures don't matter to you, but they must
+// be visible so you can handle the memory allocations for them
+
+struct stbrp_node
+{
+   stbrp_coord  x,y;
+   stbrp_node  *next;
+};
+
+struct stbrp_context
+{
+   int width;
+   int height;
+   int align;
+   int init_mode;
+   int heuristic;
+   int num_nodes;
+   stbrp_node *active_head;
+   stbrp_node *free_head;
+   stbrp_node extra[2]; // we allocate two extra nodes so optimal user-node-count is 'width' not 'width+2'
+};
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+//     IMPLEMENTATION SECTION
+//
+
+#ifdef STB_RECT_PACK_IMPLEMENTATION
+#ifndef STBRP_SORT
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#define STBRP_SORT qsort
+#endif
+
+#ifndef STBRP_ASSERT
+#include <assert.h>
+#define STBRP_ASSERT assert
+#endif
+
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+#define STBRP__NOTUSED(v)  (void)(v)
+#define STBRP__CDECL       __cdecl
+#else
+#define STBRP__NOTUSED(v)  (void)sizeof(v)
+#define STBRP__CDECL
+#endif
+
+enum
+{
+   STBRP__INIT_skyline = 1
+};
+
+STBRP_DEF void stbrp_setup_heuristic(stbrp_context *context, int heuristic)
+{
+   switch (context->init_mode) {
+      case STBRP__INIT_skyline:
+         STBRP_ASSERT(heuristic == STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_BL_sortHeight || heuristic == STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_BF_sortHeight);
+         context->heuristic = heuristic;
+         break;
+      default:
+         STBRP_ASSERT(0);
+   }
+}
+
+STBRP_DEF void stbrp_setup_allow_out_of_mem(stbrp_context *context, int allow_out_of_mem)
+{
+   if (allow_out_of_mem)
+      // if it's ok to run out of memory, then don't bother aligning them;
+      // this gives better packing, but may fail due to OOM (even though
+      // the rectangles easily fit). @TODO a smarter approach would be to only
+      // quantize once we've hit OOM, then we could get rid of this parameter.
+      context->align = 1;
+   else {
+      // if it's not ok to run out of memory, then quantize the widths
+      // so that num_nodes is always enough nodes.
+      //
+      // I.e. num_nodes * align >= width
+      //                  align >= width / num_nodes
+      //                  align = ceil(width/num_nodes)
+
+      context->align = (context->width + context->num_nodes-1) / context->num_nodes;
+   }
+}
+
+STBRP_DEF void stbrp_init_target(stbrp_context *context, int width, int height, stbrp_node *nodes, int num_nodes)
+{
+   int i;
+
+   for (i=0; i < num_nodes-1; ++i)
+      nodes[i].next = &nodes[i+1];
+   nodes[i].next = NULL;
+   context->init_mode = STBRP__INIT_skyline;
+   context->heuristic = STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_default;
+   context->free_head = &nodes[0];
+   context->active_head = &context->extra[0];
+   context->width = width;
+   context->height = height;
+   context->num_nodes = num_nodes;
+   stbrp_setup_allow_out_of_mem(context, 0);
+
+   // node 0 is the full width, node 1 is the sentinel (lets us not store width explicitly)
+   context->extra[0].x = 0;
+   context->extra[0].y = 0;
+   context->extra[0].next = &context->extra[1];
+   context->extra[1].x = (stbrp_coord) width;
+   context->extra[1].y = (1<<30);
+   context->extra[1].next = NULL;
+}
+
+// find minimum y position if it starts at x1
+static int stbrp__skyline_find_min_y(stbrp_context *c, stbrp_node *first, int x0, int width, int *pwaste)
+{
+   stbrp_node *node = first;
+   int x1 = x0 + width;
+   int min_y, visited_width, waste_area;
+
+   STBRP__NOTUSED(c);
+
+   STBRP_ASSERT(first->x <= x0);
+
+   #if 0
+   // skip in case we're past the node
+   while (node->next->x <= x0)
+      ++node;
+   #else
+   STBRP_ASSERT(node->next->x > x0); // we ended up handling this in the caller for efficiency
+   #endif
+
+   STBRP_ASSERT(node->x <= x0);
+
+   min_y = 0;
+   waste_area = 0;
+   visited_width = 0;
+   while (node->x < x1) {
+      if (node->y > min_y) {
+         // raise min_y higher.
+         // we've accounted for all waste up to min_y,
+         // but we'll now add more waste for everything we've visted
+         waste_area += visited_width * (node->y - min_y);
+         min_y = node->y;
+         // the first time through, visited_width might be reduced
+         if (node->x < x0)
+            visited_width += node->next->x - x0;
+         else
+            visited_width += node->next->x - node->x;
+      } else {
+         // add waste area
+         int under_width = node->next->x - node->x;
+         if (under_width + visited_width > width)
+            under_width = width - visited_width;
+         waste_area += under_width * (min_y - node->y);
+         visited_width += under_width;
+      }
+      node = node->next;
+   }
+
+   *pwaste = waste_area;
+   return min_y;
+}
+
+typedef struct
+{
+   int x,y;
+   stbrp_node **prev_link;
+} stbrp__findresult;
+
+static stbrp__findresult stbrp__skyline_find_best_pos(stbrp_context *c, int width, int height)
+{
+   int best_waste = (1<<30), best_x, best_y = (1 << 30);
+   stbrp__findresult fr;
+   stbrp_node **prev, *node, *tail, **best = NULL;
+
+   // align to multiple of c->align
+   width = (width + c->align - 1);
+   width -= width % c->align;
+   STBRP_ASSERT(width % c->align == 0);
+
+   // if it can't possibly fit, bail immediately
+   if (width > c->width || height > c->height) {
+      fr.prev_link = NULL;
+      fr.x = fr.y = 0;
+      return fr;
+   }
+
+   node = c->active_head;
+   prev = &c->active_head;
+   while (node->x + width <= c->width) {
+      int y,waste;
+      y = stbrp__skyline_find_min_y(c, node, node->x, width, &waste);
+      if (c->heuristic == STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_BL_sortHeight) { // actually just want to test BL
+         // bottom left
+         if (y < best_y) {
+            best_y = y;
+            best = prev;
+         }
+      } else {
+         // best-fit
+         if (y + height <= c->height) {
+            // can only use it if it first vertically
+            if (y < best_y || (y == best_y && waste < best_waste)) {
+               best_y = y;
+               best_waste = waste;
+               best = prev;
+            }
+         }
+      }
+      prev = &node->next;
+      node = node->next;
+   }
+
+   best_x = (best == NULL) ? 0 : (*best)->x;
+
+   // if doing best-fit (BF), we also have to try aligning right edge to each node position
+   //
+   // e.g, if fitting
+   //
+   //     ____________________
+   //    |____________________|
+   //
+   //            into
+   //
+   //   |                         |
+   //   |             ____________|
+   //   |____________|
+   //
+   // then right-aligned reduces waste, but bottom-left BL is always chooses left-aligned
+   //
+   // This makes BF take about 2x the time
+
+   if (c->heuristic == STBRP_HEURISTIC_Skyline_BF_sortHeight) {
+      tail = c->active_head;
+      node = c->active_head;
+      prev = &c->active_head;
+      // find first node that's admissible
+      while (tail->x < width)
+         tail = tail->next;
+      while (tail) {
+         int xpos = tail->x - width;
+         int y,waste;
+         STBRP_ASSERT(xpos >= 0);
+         // find the left position that matches this
+         while (node->next->x <= xpos) {
+            prev = &node->next;
+            node = node->next;
+         }
+         STBRP_ASSERT(node->next->x > xpos && node->x <= xpos);
+         y = stbrp__skyline_find_min_y(c, node, xpos, width, &waste);
+         if (y + height <= c->height) {
+            if (y <= best_y) {
+               if (y < best_y || waste < best_waste || (waste==best_waste && xpos < best_x)) {
+                  best_x = xpos;
+                  //STBRP_ASSERT(y <= best_y); [DEAR IMGUI]
+                  best_y = y;
+                  best_waste = waste;
+                  best = prev;
+               }
+            }
+         }
+         tail = tail->next;
+      }
+   }
+
+   fr.prev_link = best;
+   fr.x = best_x;
+   fr.y = best_y;
+   return fr;
+}
+
+static stbrp__findresult stbrp__skyline_pack_rectangle(stbrp_context *context, int width, int height)
+{
+   // find best position according to heuristic
+   stbrp__findresult res = stbrp__skyline_find_best_pos(context, width, height);
+   stbrp_node *node, *cur;
+
+   // bail if:
+   //    1. it failed
+   //    2. the best node doesn't fit (we don't always check this)
+   //    3. we're out of memory
+   if (res.prev_link == NULL || res.y + height > context->height || context->free_head == NULL) {
+      res.prev_link = NULL;
+      return res;
+   }
+
+   // on success, create new node
+   node = context->free_head;
+   node->x = (stbrp_coord) res.x;
+   node->y = (stbrp_coord) (res.y + height);
+
+   context->free_head = node->next;
+
+   // insert the new node into the right starting point, and
+   // let 'cur' point to the remaining nodes needing to be
+   // stiched back in
+
+   cur = *res.prev_link;
+   if (cur->x < res.x) {
+      // preserve the existing one, so start testing with the next one
+      stbrp_node *next = cur->next;
+      cur->next = node;
+      cur = next;
+   } else {
+      *res.prev_link = node;
+   }
+
+   // from here, traverse cur and free the nodes, until we get to one
+   // that shouldn't be freed
+   while (cur->next && cur->next->x <= res.x + width) {
+      stbrp_node *next = cur->next;
+      // move the current node to the free list
+      cur->next = context->free_head;
+      context->free_head = cur;
+      cur = next;
+   }
+
+   // stitch the list back in
+   node->next = cur;
+
+   if (cur->x < res.x + width)
+      cur->x = (stbrp_coord) (res.x + width);
+
+#ifdef _DEBUG
+   cur = context->active_head;
+   while (cur->x < context->width) {
+      STBRP_ASSERT(cur->x < cur->next->x);
+      cur = cur->next;
+   }
+   STBRP_ASSERT(cur->next == NULL);
+
+   {
+      int count=0;
+      cur = context->active_head;
+      while (cur) {
+         cur = cur->next;
+         ++count;
+      }
+      cur = context->free_head;
+      while (cur) {
+         cur = cur->next;
+         ++count;
+      }
+      STBRP_ASSERT(count == context->num_nodes+2);
+   }
+#endif
+
+   return res;
+}
+
+static int STBRP__CDECL rect_height_compare(const void *a, const void *b)
+{
+   const stbrp_rect *p = (const stbrp_rect *) a;
+   const stbrp_rect *q = (const stbrp_rect *) b;
+   if (p->h > q->h)
+      return -1;
+   if (p->h < q->h)
+      return  1;
+   return (p->w > q->w) ? -1 : (p->w < q->w);
+}
+
+static int STBRP__CDECL rect_original_order(const void *a, const void *b)
+{
+   const stbrp_rect *p = (const stbrp_rect *) a;
+   const stbrp_rect *q = (const stbrp_rect *) b;
+   return (p->was_packed < q->was_packed) ? -1 : (p->was_packed > q->was_packed);
+}
+
+STBRP_DEF int stbrp_pack_rects(stbrp_context *context, stbrp_rect *rects, int num_rects)
+{
+   int i, all_rects_packed = 1;
+
+   // we use the 'was_packed' field internally to allow sorting/unsorting
+   for (i=0; i < num_rects; ++i) {
+      rects[i].was_packed = i;
+   }
+
+   // sort according to heuristic
+   STBRP_SORT(rects, num_rects, sizeof(rects[0]), rect_height_compare);
+
+   for (i=0; i < num_rects; ++i) {
+      if (rects[i].w == 0 || rects[i].h == 0) {
+         rects[i].x = rects[i].y = 0;  // empty rect needs no space
+      } else {
+         stbrp__findresult fr = stbrp__skyline_pack_rectangle(context, rects[i].w, rects[i].h);
+         if (fr.prev_link) {
+            rects[i].x = (stbrp_coord) fr.x;
+            rects[i].y = (stbrp_coord) fr.y;
+         } else {
+            rects[i].x = rects[i].y = STBRP__MAXVAL;
+         }
+      }
+   }
+
+   // unsort
+   STBRP_SORT(rects, num_rects, sizeof(rects[0]), rect_original_order);
+
+   // set was_packed flags and all_rects_packed status
+   for (i=0; i < num_rects; ++i) {
+      rects[i].was_packed = !(rects[i].x == STBRP__MAXVAL && rects[i].y == STBRP__MAXVAL);
+      if (!rects[i].was_packed)
+         all_rects_packed = 0;
+   }
+
+   // return the all_rects_packed status
+   return all_rects_packed;
+}
+#endif
+
+/*
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+This software is available under 2 licenses -- choose whichever you prefer.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ALTERNATIVE A - MIT License
+Copyright (c) 2017 Sean Barrett
+Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of
+this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in
+the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to
+use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
+of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do
+so, subject to the following conditions:
+The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all
+copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
+IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
+FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
+AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
+LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
+OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
+SOFTWARE.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ALTERNATIVE B - Public Domain (www.unlicense.org)
+This is free and unencumbered software released into the public domain.
+Anyone is free to copy, modify, publish, use, compile, sell, or distribute this
+software, either in source code form or as a compiled binary, for any purpose,
+commercial or non-commercial, and by any means.
+In jurisdictions that recognize copyright laws, the author or authors of this
+software dedicate any and all copyright interest in the software to the public
+domain. We make this dedication for the benefit of the public at large and to
+the detriment of our heirs and successors. We intend this dedication to be an
+overt act of relinquishment in perpetuity of all present and future rights to
+this software under copyright law.
+THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
+IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
+FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
+AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
+ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+*/
diff --git a/dependencies/include/imgui/imstb_textedit.h b/dependencies/include/imgui/imstb_textedit.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..75a159d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/imgui/imstb_textedit.h
@@ -0,0 +1,1447 @@
+// [DEAR IMGUI]
+// This is a slightly modified version of stb_textedit.h 1.14.
+// Those changes would need to be pushed into nothings/stb:
+// - Fix in stb_textedit_discard_redo (see https://github.com/nothings/stb/issues/321)
+// Grep for [DEAR IMGUI] to find the changes.
+
+// stb_textedit.h - v1.14  - public domain - Sean Barrett
+// Development of this library was sponsored by RAD Game Tools
+//
+// This C header file implements the guts of a multi-line text-editing
+// widget; you implement display, word-wrapping, and low-level string
+// insertion/deletion, and stb_textedit will map user inputs into
+// insertions & deletions, plus updates to the cursor position,
+// selection state, and undo state.
+//
+// It is intended for use in games and other systems that need to build
+// their own custom widgets and which do not have heavy text-editing
+// requirements (this library is not recommended for use for editing large
+// texts, as its performance does not scale and it has limited undo).
+//
+// Non-trivial behaviors are modelled after Windows text controls.
+//
+//
+// LICENSE
+//
+// See end of file for license information.
+//
+//
+// DEPENDENCIES
+//
+// Uses the C runtime function 'memmove', which you can override
+// by defining STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove before the implementation.
+// Uses no other functions. Performs no runtime allocations.
+//
+//
+// VERSION HISTORY
+//
+//   1.14 (2021-07-11) page up/down, various fixes
+//   1.13 (2019-02-07) fix bug in undo size management
+//   1.12 (2018-01-29) user can change STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTYPE, fix redo to avoid crash
+//   1.11 (2017-03-03) fix HOME on last line, dragging off single-line textfield
+//   1.10 (2016-10-25) supress warnings about casting away const with -Wcast-qual
+//   1.9  (2016-08-27) customizable move-by-word
+//   1.8  (2016-04-02) better keyboard handling when mouse button is down
+//   1.7  (2015-09-13) change y range handling in case baseline is non-0
+//   1.6  (2015-04-15) allow STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove
+//   1.5  (2014-09-10) add support for secondary keys for OS X
+//   1.4  (2014-08-17) fix signed/unsigned warnings
+//   1.3  (2014-06-19) fix mouse clicking to round to nearest char boundary
+//   1.2  (2014-05-27) fix some RAD types that had crept into the new code
+//   1.1  (2013-12-15) move-by-word (requires STB_TEXTEDIT_IS_SPACE )
+//   1.0  (2012-07-26) improve documentation, initial public release
+//   0.3  (2012-02-24) bugfixes, single-line mode; insert mode
+//   0.2  (2011-11-28) fixes to undo/redo
+//   0.1  (2010-07-08) initial version
+//
+// ADDITIONAL CONTRIBUTORS
+//
+//   Ulf Winklemann: move-by-word in 1.1
+//   Fabian Giesen: secondary key inputs in 1.5
+//   Martins Mozeiko: STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove in 1.6
+//   Louis Schnellbach: page up/down in 1.14
+//
+//   Bugfixes:
+//      Scott Graham
+//      Daniel Keller
+//      Omar Cornut
+//      Dan Thompson
+//
+// USAGE
+//
+// This file behaves differently depending on what symbols you define
+// before including it.
+//
+//
+// Header-file mode:
+//
+//   If you do not define STB_TEXTEDIT_IMPLEMENTATION before including this,
+//   it will operate in "header file" mode. In this mode, it declares a
+//   single public symbol, STB_TexteditState, which encapsulates the current
+//   state of a text widget (except for the string, which you will store
+//   separately).
+//
+//   To compile in this mode, you must define STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE to a
+//   primitive type that defines a single character (e.g. char, wchar_t, etc).
+//
+//   To save space or increase undo-ability, you can optionally define the
+//   following things that are used by the undo system:
+//
+//      STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE         small int type encoding a valid cursor position
+//      STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT       the number of undo states to allow
+//      STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT        the number of characters to store in the undo buffer
+//
+//   If you don't define these, they are set to permissive types and
+//   moderate sizes. The undo system does no memory allocations, so
+//   it grows STB_TexteditState by the worst-case storage which is (in bytes):
+//
+//        [4 + 3 * sizeof(STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE)] * STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT
+//      +          sizeof(STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE)      * STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT
+//
+//
+// Implementation mode:
+//
+//   If you define STB_TEXTEDIT_IMPLEMENTATION before including this, it
+//   will compile the implementation of the text edit widget, depending
+//   on a large number of symbols which must be defined before the include.
+//
+//   The implementation is defined only as static functions. You will then
+//   need to provide your own APIs in the same file which will access the
+//   static functions.
+//
+//   The basic concept is that you provide a "string" object which
+//   behaves like an array of characters. stb_textedit uses indices to
+//   refer to positions in the string, implicitly representing positions
+//   in the displayed textedit. This is true for both plain text and
+//   rich text; even with rich text stb_truetype interacts with your
+//   code as if there was an array of all the displayed characters.
+//
+// Symbols that must be the same in header-file and implementation mode:
+//
+//     STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE             the character type
+//     STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE         small type that is a valid cursor position
+//     STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT       the number of undo states to allow
+//     STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT        the number of characters to store in the undo buffer
+//
+// Symbols you must define for implementation mode:
+//
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING               the type of object representing a string being edited,
+//                                      typically this is a wrapper object with other data you need
+//
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(obj)       the length of the string (ideally O(1))
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r,obj,n)  returns the results of laying out a line of characters
+//                                        starting from character #n (see discussion below)
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(obj,n,i)    returns the pixel delta from the xpos of the i'th character
+//                                        to the xpos of the i+1'th char for a line of characters
+//                                        starting at character #n (i.e. accounts for kerning
+//                                        with previous char)
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTOTEXT(k)         maps a keyboard input to an insertable character
+//                                        (return type is int, -1 means not valid to insert)
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(obj,i)       returns the i'th character of obj, 0-based
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE              the character returned by _GETCHAR() we recognize
+//                                        as manually wordwrapping for end-of-line positioning
+//
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(obj,i,n)      delete n characters starting at i
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(obj,i,c*,n)   insert n characters at i (pointed to by STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE*)
+//
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT       a power of two that is or'd in to a keyboard input to represent the shift key
+//
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT        keyboard input to move cursor left
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT       keyboard input to move cursor right
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP          keyboard input to move cursor up
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN        keyboard input to move cursor down
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGUP        keyboard input to move cursor up a page
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGDOWN      keyboard input to move cursor down a page
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART   keyboard input to move cursor to start of line  // e.g. HOME
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND     keyboard input to move cursor to end of line    // e.g. END
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART   keyboard input to move cursor to start of text  // e.g. ctrl-HOME
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND     keyboard input to move cursor to end of text    // e.g. ctrl-END
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE      keyboard input to delete selection or character under cursor
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE   keyboard input to delete selection or character left of cursor
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UNDO        keyboard input to perform undo
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_K_REDO        keyboard input to perform redo
+//
+// Optional:
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_K_INSERT              keyboard input to toggle insert mode
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_IS_SPACE(ch)          true if character is whitespace (e.g. 'isspace'),
+//                                          required for default WORDLEFT/WORDRIGHT handlers
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT(obj,i)   custom handler for WORDLEFT, returns index to move cursor to
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT(obj,i)  custom handler for WORDRIGHT, returns index to move cursor to
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT            keyboard input to move cursor left one word // e.g. ctrl-LEFT
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT           keyboard input to move cursor right one word // e.g. ctrl-RIGHT
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART2          secondary keyboard input to move cursor to start of line
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND2            secondary keyboard input to move cursor to end of line
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART2          secondary keyboard input to move cursor to start of text
+//    STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND2            secondary keyboard input to move cursor to end of text
+//
+// Keyboard input must be encoded as a single integer value; e.g. a character code
+// and some bitflags that represent shift states. to simplify the interface, SHIFT must
+// be a bitflag, so we can test the shifted state of cursor movements to allow selection,
+// i.e. (STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT|STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT) should be shifted right-arrow.
+//
+// You can encode other things, such as CONTROL or ALT, in additional bits, and
+// then test for their presence in e.g. STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT. For example,
+// my Windows implementations add an additional CONTROL bit, and an additional KEYDOWN
+// bit. Then all of the STB_TEXTEDIT_K_ values bitwise-or in the KEYDOWN bit,
+// and I pass both WM_KEYDOWN and WM_CHAR events to the "key" function in the
+// API below. The control keys will only match WM_KEYDOWN events because of the
+// keydown bit I add, and STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTOTEXT only tests for the KEYDOWN
+// bit so it only decodes WM_CHAR events.
+//
+// STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW returns information about the shape of one displayed
+// row of characters assuming they start on the i'th character--the width and
+// the height and the number of characters consumed. This allows this library
+// to traverse the entire layout incrementally. You need to compute word-wrapping
+// here.
+//
+// Each textfield keeps its own insert mode state, which is not how normal
+// applications work. To keep an app-wide insert mode, update/copy the
+// "insert_mode" field of STB_TexteditState before/after calling API functions.
+//
+// API
+//
+//    void stb_textedit_initialize_state(STB_TexteditState *state, int is_single_line)
+//
+//    void stb_textedit_click(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, float x, float y)
+//    void stb_textedit_drag(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, float x, float y)
+//    int  stb_textedit_cut(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state)
+//    int  stb_textedit_paste(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE *text, int len)
+//    void stb_textedit_key(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, STB_TEXEDIT_KEYTYPE key)
+//
+//    Each of these functions potentially updates the string and updates the
+//    state.
+//
+//      initialize_state:
+//          set the textedit state to a known good default state when initially
+//          constructing the textedit.
+//
+//      click:
+//          call this with the mouse x,y on a mouse down; it will update the cursor
+//          and reset the selection start/end to the cursor point. the x,y must
+//          be relative to the text widget, with (0,0) being the top left.
+//
+//      drag:
+//          call this with the mouse x,y on a mouse drag/up; it will update the
+//          cursor and the selection end point
+//
+//      cut:
+//          call this to delete the current selection; returns true if there was
+//          one. you should FIRST copy the current selection to the system paste buffer.
+//          (To copy, just copy the current selection out of the string yourself.)
+//
+//      paste:
+//          call this to paste text at the current cursor point or over the current
+//          selection if there is one.
+//
+//      key:
+//          call this for keyboard inputs sent to the textfield. you can use it
+//          for "key down" events or for "translated" key events. if you need to
+//          do both (as in Win32), or distinguish Unicode characters from control
+//          inputs, set a high bit to distinguish the two; then you can define the
+//          various definitions like STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT have the is-key-event bit
+//          set, and make STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTOCHAR check that the is-key-event bit is
+//          clear. STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTYPE defaults to int, but you can #define it to
+//          anything other type you wante before including.
+//
+//
+//   When rendering, you can read the cursor position and selection state from
+//   the STB_TexteditState.
+//
+//
+// Notes:
+//
+// This is designed to be usable in IMGUI, so it allows for the possibility of
+// running in an IMGUI that has NOT cached the multi-line layout. For this
+// reason, it provides an interface that is compatible with computing the
+// layout incrementally--we try to make sure we make as few passes through
+// as possible. (For example, to locate the mouse pointer in the text, we
+// could define functions that return the X and Y positions of characters
+// and binary search Y and then X, but if we're doing dynamic layout this
+// will run the layout algorithm many times, so instead we manually search
+// forward in one pass. Similar logic applies to e.g. up-arrow and
+// down-arrow movement.)
+//
+// If it's run in a widget that *has* cached the layout, then this is less
+// efficient, but it's not horrible on modern computers. But you wouldn't
+// want to edit million-line files with it.
+
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+////
+////   Header-file mode
+////
+////
+
+#ifndef INCLUDE_STB_TEXTEDIT_H
+#define INCLUDE_STB_TEXTEDIT_H
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+//     STB_TexteditState
+//
+// Definition of STB_TexteditState which you should store
+// per-textfield; it includes cursor position, selection state,
+// and undo state.
+//
+
+#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT   99
+#endif
+#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT   999
+#endif
+#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE        int
+#endif
+#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE    int
+#endif
+
+typedef struct
+{
+   // private data
+   STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE  where;
+   STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE  insert_length;
+   STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE  delete_length;
+   int                        char_storage;
+} StbUndoRecord;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+   // private data
+   StbUndoRecord          undo_rec [STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT];
+   STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE  undo_char[STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT];
+   short undo_point, redo_point;
+   int undo_char_point, redo_char_point;
+} StbUndoState;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+   /////////////////////
+   //
+   // public data
+   //
+
+   int cursor;
+   // position of the text cursor within the string
+
+   int select_start;          // selection start point
+   int select_end;
+   // selection start and end point in characters; if equal, no selection.
+   // note that start may be less than or greater than end (e.g. when
+   // dragging the mouse, start is where the initial click was, and you
+   // can drag in either direction)
+
+   unsigned char insert_mode;
+   // each textfield keeps its own insert mode state. to keep an app-wide
+   // insert mode, copy this value in/out of the app state
+
+   int row_count_per_page;
+   // page size in number of row.
+   // this value MUST be set to >0 for pageup or pagedown in multilines documents.
+
+   /////////////////////
+   //
+   // private data
+   //
+   unsigned char cursor_at_end_of_line; // not implemented yet
+   unsigned char initialized;
+   unsigned char has_preferred_x;
+   unsigned char single_line;
+   unsigned char padding1, padding2, padding3;
+   float preferred_x; // this determines where the cursor up/down tries to seek to along x
+   StbUndoState undostate;
+} STB_TexteditState;
+
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+//     StbTexteditRow
+//
+// Result of layout query, used by stb_textedit to determine where
+// the text in each row is.
+
+// result of layout query
+typedef struct
+{
+   float x0,x1;             // starting x location, end x location (allows for align=right, etc)
+   float baseline_y_delta;  // position of baseline relative to previous row's baseline
+   float ymin,ymax;         // height of row above and below baseline
+   int num_chars;
+} StbTexteditRow;
+#endif //INCLUDE_STB_TEXTEDIT_H
+
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+////
+////   Implementation mode
+////
+////
+
+
+// implementation isn't include-guarded, since it might have indirectly
+// included just the "header" portion
+#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_IMPLEMENTATION
+
+#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove
+#include <string.h>
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove memmove
+#endif
+
+
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+//      Mouse input handling
+//
+
+// traverse the layout to locate the nearest character to a display position
+static int stb_text_locate_coord(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, float x, float y)
+{
+   StbTexteditRow r;
+   int n = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
+   float base_y = 0, prev_x;
+   int i=0, k;
+
+   r.x0 = r.x1 = 0;
+   r.ymin = r.ymax = 0;
+   r.num_chars = 0;
+
+   // search rows to find one that straddles 'y'
+   while (i < n) {
+      STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r, str, i);
+      if (r.num_chars <= 0)
+         return n;
+
+      if (i==0 && y < base_y + r.ymin)
+         return 0;
+
+      if (y < base_y + r.ymax)
+         break;
+
+      i += r.num_chars;
+      base_y += r.baseline_y_delta;
+   }
+
+   // below all text, return 'after' last character
+   if (i >= n)
+      return n;
+
+   // check if it's before the beginning of the line
+   if (x < r.x0)
+      return i;
+
+   // check if it's before the end of the line
+   if (x < r.x1) {
+      // search characters in row for one that straddles 'x'
+      prev_x = r.x0;
+      for (k=0; k < r.num_chars; ++k) {
+         float w = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(str, i, k);
+         if (x < prev_x+w) {
+            if (x < prev_x+w/2)
+               return k+i;
+            else
+               return k+i+1;
+         }
+         prev_x += w;
+      }
+      // shouldn't happen, but if it does, fall through to end-of-line case
+   }
+
+   // if the last character is a newline, return that. otherwise return 'after' the last character
+   if (STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, i+r.num_chars-1) == STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE)
+      return i+r.num_chars-1;
+   else
+      return i+r.num_chars;
+}
+
+// API click: on mouse down, move the cursor to the clicked location, and reset the selection
+static void stb_textedit_click(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, float x, float y)
+{
+   // In single-line mode, just always make y = 0. This lets the drag keep working if the mouse
+   // goes off the top or bottom of the text
+   if( state->single_line )
+   {
+      StbTexteditRow r;
+      STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r, str, 0);
+      y = r.ymin;
+   }
+
+   state->cursor = stb_text_locate_coord(str, x, y);
+   state->select_start = state->cursor;
+   state->select_end = state->cursor;
+   state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+}
+
+// API drag: on mouse drag, move the cursor and selection endpoint to the clicked location
+static void stb_textedit_drag(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, float x, float y)
+{
+   int p = 0;
+
+   // In single-line mode, just always make y = 0. This lets the drag keep working if the mouse
+   // goes off the top or bottom of the text
+   if( state->single_line )
+   {
+      StbTexteditRow r;
+      STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r, str, 0);
+      y = r.ymin;
+   }
+
+   if (state->select_start == state->select_end)
+      state->select_start = state->cursor;
+
+   p = stb_text_locate_coord(str, x, y);
+   state->cursor = state->select_end = p;
+}
+
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+//      Keyboard input handling
+//
+
+// forward declarations
+static void stb_text_undo(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state);
+static void stb_text_redo(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state);
+static void stb_text_makeundo_delete(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int length);
+static void stb_text_makeundo_insert(STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int length);
+static void stb_text_makeundo_replace(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int old_length, int new_length);
+
+typedef struct
+{
+   float x,y;    // position of n'th character
+   float height; // height of line
+   int first_char, length; // first char of row, and length
+   int prev_first;  // first char of previous row
+} StbFindState;
+
+// find the x/y location of a character, and remember info about the previous row in
+// case we get a move-up event (for page up, we'll have to rescan)
+static void stb_textedit_find_charpos(StbFindState *find, STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, int n, int single_line)
+{
+   StbTexteditRow r;
+   int prev_start = 0;
+   int z = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
+   int i=0, first;
+
+   if (n == z) {
+      // if it's at the end, then find the last line -- simpler than trying to
+      // explicitly handle this case in the regular code
+      if (single_line) {
+         STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r, str, 0);
+         find->y = 0;
+         find->first_char = 0;
+         find->length = z;
+         find->height = r.ymax - r.ymin;
+         find->x = r.x1;
+      } else {
+         find->y = 0;
+         find->x = 0;
+         find->height = 1;
+         while (i < z) {
+            STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r, str, i);
+            prev_start = i;
+            i += r.num_chars;
+         }
+         find->first_char = i;
+         find->length = 0;
+         find->prev_first = prev_start;
+      }
+      return;
+   }
+
+   // search rows to find the one that straddles character n
+   find->y = 0;
+
+   for(;;) {
+      STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&r, str, i);
+      if (n < i + r.num_chars)
+         break;
+      prev_start = i;
+      i += r.num_chars;
+      find->y += r.baseline_y_delta;
+   }
+
+   find->first_char = first = i;
+   find->length = r.num_chars;
+   find->height = r.ymax - r.ymin;
+   find->prev_first = prev_start;
+
+   // now scan to find xpos
+   find->x = r.x0;
+   for (i=0; first+i < n; ++i)
+      find->x += STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(str, first, i);
+}
+
+#define STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(s)   ((s)->select_start != (s)->select_end)
+
+// make the selection/cursor state valid if client altered the string
+static void stb_textedit_clamp(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state)
+{
+   int n = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
+   if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) {
+      if (state->select_start > n) state->select_start = n;
+      if (state->select_end   > n) state->select_end = n;
+      // if clamping forced them to be equal, move the cursor to match
+      if (state->select_start == state->select_end)
+         state->cursor = state->select_start;
+   }
+   if (state->cursor > n) state->cursor = n;
+}
+
+// delete characters while updating undo
+static void stb_textedit_delete(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int len)
+{
+   stb_text_makeundo_delete(str, state, where, len);
+   STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(str, where, len);
+   state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+}
+
+// delete the section
+static void stb_textedit_delete_selection(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state)
+{
+   stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+   if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) {
+      if (state->select_start < state->select_end) {
+         stb_textedit_delete(str, state, state->select_start, state->select_end - state->select_start);
+         state->select_end = state->cursor = state->select_start;
+      } else {
+         stb_textedit_delete(str, state, state->select_end, state->select_start - state->select_end);
+         state->select_start = state->cursor = state->select_end;
+      }
+      state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+   }
+}
+
+// canoncialize the selection so start <= end
+static void stb_textedit_sortselection(STB_TexteditState *state)
+{
+   if (state->select_end < state->select_start) {
+      int temp = state->select_end;
+      state->select_end = state->select_start;
+      state->select_start = temp;
+   }
+}
+
+// move cursor to first character of selection
+static void stb_textedit_move_to_first(STB_TexteditState *state)
+{
+   if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) {
+      stb_textedit_sortselection(state);
+      state->cursor = state->select_start;
+      state->select_end = state->select_start;
+      state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+   }
+}
+
+// move cursor to last character of selection
+static void stb_textedit_move_to_last(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state)
+{
+   if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) {
+      stb_textedit_sortselection(state);
+      stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+      state->cursor = state->select_end;
+      state->select_start = state->select_end;
+      state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+   }
+}
+
+#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_IS_SPACE
+static int is_word_boundary( STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, int idx )
+{
+   return idx > 0 ? (STB_TEXTEDIT_IS_SPACE( STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str,idx-1) ) && !STB_TEXTEDIT_IS_SPACE( STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, idx) ) ) : 1;
+}
+
+#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT
+static int stb_textedit_move_to_word_previous( STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, int c )
+{
+   --c; // always move at least one character
+   while( c >= 0 && !is_word_boundary( str, c ) )
+      --c;
+
+   if( c < 0 )
+      c = 0;
+
+   return c;
+}
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT stb_textedit_move_to_word_previous
+#endif
+
+#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT
+static int stb_textedit_move_to_word_next( STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, int c )
+{
+   const int len = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
+   ++c; // always move at least one character
+   while( c < len && !is_word_boundary( str, c ) )
+      ++c;
+
+   if( c > len )
+      c = len;
+
+   return c;
+}
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT stb_textedit_move_to_word_next
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
+// update selection and cursor to match each other
+static void stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(STB_TexteditState *state)
+{
+   if (!STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
+      state->select_start = state->select_end = state->cursor;
+   else
+      state->cursor = state->select_end;
+}
+
+// API cut: delete selection
+static int stb_textedit_cut(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state)
+{
+   if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state)) {
+      stb_textedit_delete_selection(str,state); // implicitly clamps
+      state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+      return 1;
+   }
+   return 0;
+}
+
+// API paste: replace existing selection with passed-in text
+static int stb_textedit_paste_internal(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE *text, int len)
+{
+   // if there's a selection, the paste should delete it
+   stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+   stb_textedit_delete_selection(str,state);
+   // try to insert the characters
+   if (STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(str, state->cursor, text, len)) {
+      stb_text_makeundo_insert(state, state->cursor, len);
+      state->cursor += len;
+      state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+      return 1;
+   }
+   // note: paste failure will leave deleted selection, may be restored with an undo (see https://github.com/nothings/stb/issues/734 for details)
+   return 0;
+}
+
+#ifndef STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTYPE
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTYPE int
+#endif
+
+// API key: process a keyboard input
+static void stb_textedit_key(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTYPE key)
+{
+retry:
+   switch (key) {
+      default: {
+         int c = STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTOTEXT(key);
+         if (c > 0) {
+            STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE ch = (STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE) c;
+
+            // can't add newline in single-line mode
+            if (c == '\n' && state->single_line)
+               break;
+
+            if (state->insert_mode && !STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state) && state->cursor < STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str)) {
+               stb_text_makeundo_replace(str, state, state->cursor, 1, 1);
+               STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(str, state->cursor, 1);
+               if (STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(str, state->cursor, &ch, 1)) {
+                  ++state->cursor;
+                  state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+               }
+            } else {
+               stb_textedit_delete_selection(str,state); // implicitly clamps
+               if (STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(str, state->cursor, &ch, 1)) {
+                  stb_text_makeundo_insert(state, state->cursor, 1);
+                  ++state->cursor;
+                  state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+               }
+            }
+         }
+         break;
+      }
+
+#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_INSERT
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_INSERT:
+         state->insert_mode = !state->insert_mode;
+         break;
+#endif
+
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UNDO:
+         stb_text_undo(str, state);
+         state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+         break;
+
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_REDO:
+         stb_text_redo(str, state);
+         state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+         break;
+
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT:
+         // if currently there's a selection, move cursor to start of selection
+         if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
+            stb_textedit_move_to_first(state);
+         else
+            if (state->cursor > 0)
+               --state->cursor;
+         state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+         break;
+
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT:
+         // if currently there's a selection, move cursor to end of selection
+         if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
+            stb_textedit_move_to_last(str, state);
+         else
+            ++state->cursor;
+         stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+         state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+         break;
+
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+         stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+         stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
+         // move selection left
+         if (state->select_end > 0)
+            --state->select_end;
+         state->cursor = state->select_end;
+         state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+         break;
+
+#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT:
+         if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
+            stb_textedit_move_to_first(state);
+         else {
+            state->cursor = STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT(str, state->cursor);
+            stb_textedit_clamp( str, state );
+         }
+         break;
+
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+         if( !STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION( state ) )
+            stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
+
+         state->cursor = STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT(str, state->cursor);
+         state->select_end = state->cursor;
+
+         stb_textedit_clamp( str, state );
+         break;
+#endif
+
+#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT:
+         if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
+            stb_textedit_move_to_last(str, state);
+         else {
+            state->cursor = STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT(str, state->cursor);
+            stb_textedit_clamp( str, state );
+         }
+         break;
+
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+         if( !STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION( state ) )
+            stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
+
+         state->cursor = STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT(str, state->cursor);
+         state->select_end = state->cursor;
+
+         stb_textedit_clamp( str, state );
+         break;
+#endif
+
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+         stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
+         // move selection right
+         ++state->select_end;
+         stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+         state->cursor = state->select_end;
+         state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+         break;
+
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN:
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGDOWN:
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGDOWN | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: {
+         StbFindState find;
+         StbTexteditRow row;
+         int i, j, sel = (key & STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT) != 0;
+         int is_page = (key & ~STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT) == STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGDOWN;
+         int row_count = is_page ? state->row_count_per_page : 1;
+
+         if (!is_page && state->single_line) {
+            // on windows, up&down in single-line behave like left&right
+            key = STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT | (key & STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
+            goto retry;
+         }
+
+         if (sel)
+            stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
+         else if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
+            stb_textedit_move_to_last(str, state);
+
+         // compute current position of cursor point
+         stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+         stb_textedit_find_charpos(&find, str, state->cursor, state->single_line);
+
+         for (j = 0; j < row_count; ++j) {
+            float x, goal_x = state->has_preferred_x ? state->preferred_x : find.x;
+            int start = find.first_char + find.length;
+
+            if (find.length == 0)
+               break;
+
+            // [DEAR IMGUI]
+            // going down while being on the last line shouldn't bring us to that line end
+            if (STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, find.first_char + find.length - 1) != STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE)
+               break;
+
+            // now find character position down a row
+            state->cursor = start;
+            STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&row, str, state->cursor);
+            x = row.x0;
+            for (i=0; i < row.num_chars; ++i) {
+               float dx = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(str, start, i);
+               #ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE
+               if (dx == STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE)
+                  break;
+               #endif
+               x += dx;
+               if (x > goal_x)
+                  break;
+               ++state->cursor;
+            }
+            stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+
+            state->has_preferred_x = 1;
+            state->preferred_x = goal_x;
+
+            if (sel)
+               state->select_end = state->cursor;
+
+            // go to next line
+            find.first_char = find.first_char + find.length;
+            find.length = row.num_chars;
+         }
+         break;
+      }
+
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP:
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGUP:
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGUP | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: {
+         StbFindState find;
+         StbTexteditRow row;
+         int i, j, prev_scan, sel = (key & STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT) != 0;
+         int is_page = (key & ~STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT) == STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGUP;
+         int row_count = is_page ? state->row_count_per_page : 1;
+
+         if (!is_page && state->single_line) {
+            // on windows, up&down become left&right
+            key = STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT | (key & STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
+            goto retry;
+         }
+
+         if (sel)
+            stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
+         else if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
+            stb_textedit_move_to_first(state);
+
+         // compute current position of cursor point
+         stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+         stb_textedit_find_charpos(&find, str, state->cursor, state->single_line);
+
+         for (j = 0; j < row_count; ++j) {
+            float  x, goal_x = state->has_preferred_x ? state->preferred_x : find.x;
+
+            // can only go up if there's a previous row
+            if (find.prev_first == find.first_char)
+               break;
+
+            // now find character position up a row
+            state->cursor = find.prev_first;
+            STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(&row, str, state->cursor);
+            x = row.x0;
+            for (i=0; i < row.num_chars; ++i) {
+               float dx = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(str, find.prev_first, i);
+               #ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE
+               if (dx == STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE)
+                  break;
+               #endif
+               x += dx;
+               if (x > goal_x)
+                  break;
+               ++state->cursor;
+            }
+            stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+
+            state->has_preferred_x = 1;
+            state->preferred_x = goal_x;
+
+            if (sel)
+               state->select_end = state->cursor;
+
+            // go to previous line
+            // (we need to scan previous line the hard way. maybe we could expose this as a new API function?)
+            prev_scan = find.prev_first > 0 ? find.prev_first - 1 : 0;
+            while (prev_scan > 0 && STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, prev_scan - 1) != STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE)
+               --prev_scan;
+            find.first_char = find.prev_first;
+            find.prev_first = prev_scan;
+         }
+         break;
+      }
+
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE:
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+         if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
+            stb_textedit_delete_selection(str, state);
+         else {
+            int n = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
+            if (state->cursor < n)
+               stb_textedit_delete(str, state, state->cursor, 1);
+         }
+         state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+         break;
+
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE:
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+         if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(state))
+            stb_textedit_delete_selection(str, state);
+         else {
+            stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+            if (state->cursor > 0) {
+               stb_textedit_delete(str, state, state->cursor-1, 1);
+               --state->cursor;
+            }
+         }
+         state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+         break;
+
+#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART2
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART2:
+#endif
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART:
+         state->cursor = state->select_start = state->select_end = 0;
+         state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+         break;
+
+#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND2
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND2:
+#endif
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND:
+         state->cursor = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
+         state->select_start = state->select_end = 0;
+         state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+         break;
+
+#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART2
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART2 | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+#endif
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+         stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
+         state->cursor = state->select_end = 0;
+         state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+         break;
+
+#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND2
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND2 | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+#endif
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+         stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
+         state->cursor = state->select_end = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
+         state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+         break;
+
+
+#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART2
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART2:
+#endif
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART:
+         stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+         stb_textedit_move_to_first(state);
+         if (state->single_line)
+            state->cursor = 0;
+         else while (state->cursor > 0 && STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, state->cursor-1) != STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE)
+            --state->cursor;
+         state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+         break;
+
+#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND2
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND2:
+#endif
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND: {
+         int n = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
+         stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+         stb_textedit_move_to_first(state);
+         if (state->single_line)
+             state->cursor = n;
+         else while (state->cursor < n && STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, state->cursor) != STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE)
+             ++state->cursor;
+         state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+         break;
+      }
+
+#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART2
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART2 | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+#endif
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+         stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+         stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
+         if (state->single_line)
+            state->cursor = 0;
+         else while (state->cursor > 0 && STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, state->cursor-1) != STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE)
+            --state->cursor;
+         state->select_end = state->cursor;
+         state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+         break;
+
+#ifdef STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND2
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND2 | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT:
+#endif
+      case STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT: {
+         int n = STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(str);
+         stb_textedit_clamp(str, state);
+         stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(state);
+         if (state->single_line)
+             state->cursor = n;
+         else while (state->cursor < n && STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, state->cursor) != STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE)
+            ++state->cursor;
+         state->select_end = state->cursor;
+         state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+         break;
+      }
+   }
+}
+
+/////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+//      Undo processing
+//
+// @OPTIMIZE: the undo/redo buffer should be circular
+
+static void stb_textedit_flush_redo(StbUndoState *state)
+{
+   state->redo_point = STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT;
+   state->redo_char_point = STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT;
+}
+
+// discard the oldest entry in the undo list
+static void stb_textedit_discard_undo(StbUndoState *state)
+{
+   if (state->undo_point > 0) {
+      // if the 0th undo state has characters, clean those up
+      if (state->undo_rec[0].char_storage >= 0) {
+         int n = state->undo_rec[0].insert_length, i;
+         // delete n characters from all other records
+         state->undo_char_point -= n;
+         STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove(state->undo_char, state->undo_char + n, (size_t) (state->undo_char_point*sizeof(STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE)));
+         for (i=0; i < state->undo_point; ++i)
+            if (state->undo_rec[i].char_storage >= 0)
+               state->undo_rec[i].char_storage -= n; // @OPTIMIZE: get rid of char_storage and infer it
+      }
+      --state->undo_point;
+      STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove(state->undo_rec, state->undo_rec+1, (size_t) (state->undo_point*sizeof(state->undo_rec[0])));
+   }
+}
+
+// discard the oldest entry in the redo list--it's bad if this
+// ever happens, but because undo & redo have to store the actual
+// characters in different cases, the redo character buffer can
+// fill up even though the undo buffer didn't
+static void stb_textedit_discard_redo(StbUndoState *state)
+{
+   int k = STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT-1;
+
+   if (state->redo_point <= k) {
+      // if the k'th undo state has characters, clean those up
+      if (state->undo_rec[k].char_storage >= 0) {
+         int n = state->undo_rec[k].insert_length, i;
+         // move the remaining redo character data to the end of the buffer
+         state->redo_char_point += n;
+         STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove(state->undo_char + state->redo_char_point, state->undo_char + state->redo_char_point-n, (size_t) ((STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT - state->redo_char_point)*sizeof(STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE)));
+         // adjust the position of all the other records to account for above memmove
+         for (i=state->redo_point; i < k; ++i)
+            if (state->undo_rec[i].char_storage >= 0)
+               state->undo_rec[i].char_storage += n;
+      }
+      // now move all the redo records towards the end of the buffer; the first one is at 'redo_point'
+      // [DEAR IMGUI]
+      size_t move_size = (size_t)((STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT - state->redo_point - 1) * sizeof(state->undo_rec[0]));
+      const char* buf_begin = (char*)state->undo_rec; (void)buf_begin;
+      const char* buf_end   = (char*)state->undo_rec + sizeof(state->undo_rec); (void)buf_end;
+      IM_ASSERT(((char*)(state->undo_rec + state->redo_point)) >= buf_begin);
+      IM_ASSERT(((char*)(state->undo_rec + state->redo_point + 1) + move_size) <= buf_end);
+      STB_TEXTEDIT_memmove(state->undo_rec + state->redo_point+1, state->undo_rec + state->redo_point, move_size);
+
+      // now move redo_point to point to the new one
+      ++state->redo_point;
+   }
+}
+
+static StbUndoRecord *stb_text_create_undo_record(StbUndoState *state, int numchars)
+{
+   // any time we create a new undo record, we discard redo
+   stb_textedit_flush_redo(state);
+
+   // if we have no free records, we have to make room, by sliding the
+   // existing records down
+   if (state->undo_point == STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT)
+      stb_textedit_discard_undo(state);
+
+   // if the characters to store won't possibly fit in the buffer, we can't undo
+   if (numchars > STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT) {
+      state->undo_point = 0;
+      state->undo_char_point = 0;
+      return NULL;
+   }
+
+   // if we don't have enough free characters in the buffer, we have to make room
+   while (state->undo_char_point + numchars > STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT)
+      stb_textedit_discard_undo(state);
+
+   return &state->undo_rec[state->undo_point++];
+}
+
+static STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE *stb_text_createundo(StbUndoState *state, int pos, int insert_len, int delete_len)
+{
+   StbUndoRecord *r = stb_text_create_undo_record(state, insert_len);
+   if (r == NULL)
+      return NULL;
+
+   r->where = pos;
+   r->insert_length = (STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE) insert_len;
+   r->delete_length = (STB_TEXTEDIT_POSITIONTYPE) delete_len;
+
+   if (insert_len == 0) {
+      r->char_storage = -1;
+      return NULL;
+   } else {
+      r->char_storage = state->undo_char_point;
+      state->undo_char_point += insert_len;
+      return &state->undo_char[r->char_storage];
+   }
+}
+
+static void stb_text_undo(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state)
+{
+   StbUndoState *s = &state->undostate;
+   StbUndoRecord u, *r;
+   if (s->undo_point == 0)
+      return;
+
+   // we need to do two things: apply the undo record, and create a redo record
+   u = s->undo_rec[s->undo_point-1];
+   r = &s->undo_rec[s->redo_point-1];
+   r->char_storage = -1;
+
+   r->insert_length = u.delete_length;
+   r->delete_length = u.insert_length;
+   r->where = u.where;
+
+   if (u.delete_length) {
+      // if the undo record says to delete characters, then the redo record will
+      // need to re-insert the characters that get deleted, so we need to store
+      // them.
+
+      // there are three cases:
+      //    there's enough room to store the characters
+      //    characters stored for *redoing* don't leave room for redo
+      //    characters stored for *undoing* don't leave room for redo
+      // if the last is true, we have to bail
+
+      if (s->undo_char_point + u.delete_length >= STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT) {
+         // the undo records take up too much character space; there's no space to store the redo characters
+         r->insert_length = 0;
+      } else {
+         int i;
+
+         // there's definitely room to store the characters eventually
+         while (s->undo_char_point + u.delete_length > s->redo_char_point) {
+            // should never happen:
+            if (s->redo_point == STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT)
+               return;
+            // there's currently not enough room, so discard a redo record
+            stb_textedit_discard_redo(s);
+         }
+         r = &s->undo_rec[s->redo_point-1];
+
+         r->char_storage = s->redo_char_point - u.delete_length;
+         s->redo_char_point = s->redo_char_point - u.delete_length;
+
+         // now save the characters
+         for (i=0; i < u.delete_length; ++i)
+            s->undo_char[r->char_storage + i] = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, u.where + i);
+      }
+
+      // now we can carry out the deletion
+      STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(str, u.where, u.delete_length);
+   }
+
+   // check type of recorded action:
+   if (u.insert_length) {
+      // easy case: was a deletion, so we need to insert n characters
+      STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(str, u.where, &s->undo_char[u.char_storage], u.insert_length);
+      s->undo_char_point -= u.insert_length;
+   }
+
+   state->cursor = u.where + u.insert_length;
+
+   s->undo_point--;
+   s->redo_point--;
+}
+
+static void stb_text_redo(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state)
+{
+   StbUndoState *s = &state->undostate;
+   StbUndoRecord *u, r;
+   if (s->redo_point == STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT)
+      return;
+
+   // we need to do two things: apply the redo record, and create an undo record
+   u = &s->undo_rec[s->undo_point];
+   r = s->undo_rec[s->redo_point];
+
+   // we KNOW there must be room for the undo record, because the redo record
+   // was derived from an undo record
+
+   u->delete_length = r.insert_length;
+   u->insert_length = r.delete_length;
+   u->where = r.where;
+   u->char_storage = -1;
+
+   if (r.delete_length) {
+      // the redo record requires us to delete characters, so the undo record
+      // needs to store the characters
+
+      if (s->undo_char_point + u->insert_length > s->redo_char_point) {
+         u->insert_length = 0;
+         u->delete_length = 0;
+      } else {
+         int i;
+         u->char_storage = s->undo_char_point;
+         s->undo_char_point = s->undo_char_point + u->insert_length;
+
+         // now save the characters
+         for (i=0; i < u->insert_length; ++i)
+            s->undo_char[u->char_storage + i] = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, u->where + i);
+      }
+
+      STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(str, r.where, r.delete_length);
+   }
+
+   if (r.insert_length) {
+      // easy case: need to insert n characters
+      STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(str, r.where, &s->undo_char[r.char_storage], r.insert_length);
+      s->redo_char_point += r.insert_length;
+   }
+
+   state->cursor = r.where + r.insert_length;
+
+   s->undo_point++;
+   s->redo_point++;
+}
+
+static void stb_text_makeundo_insert(STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int length)
+{
+   stb_text_createundo(&state->undostate, where, 0, length);
+}
+
+static void stb_text_makeundo_delete(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int length)
+{
+   int i;
+   STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE *p = stb_text_createundo(&state->undostate, where, length, 0);
+   if (p) {
+      for (i=0; i < length; ++i)
+         p[i] = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, where+i);
+   }
+}
+
+static void stb_text_makeundo_replace(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, int where, int old_length, int new_length)
+{
+   int i;
+   STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE *p = stb_text_createundo(&state->undostate, where, old_length, new_length);
+   if (p) {
+      for (i=0; i < old_length; ++i)
+         p[i] = STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(str, where+i);
+   }
+}
+
+// reset the state to default
+static void stb_textedit_clear_state(STB_TexteditState *state, int is_single_line)
+{
+   state->undostate.undo_point = 0;
+   state->undostate.undo_char_point = 0;
+   state->undostate.redo_point = STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT;
+   state->undostate.redo_char_point = STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOCHARCOUNT;
+   state->select_end = state->select_start = 0;
+   state->cursor = 0;
+   state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+   state->preferred_x = 0;
+   state->cursor_at_end_of_line = 0;
+   state->initialized = 1;
+   state->single_line = (unsigned char) is_single_line;
+   state->insert_mode = 0;
+   state->row_count_per_page = 0;
+}
+
+// API initialize
+static void stb_textedit_initialize_state(STB_TexteditState *state, int is_single_line)
+{
+   stb_textedit_clear_state(state, is_single_line);
+}
+
+#if defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__clang__)
+#pragma GCC diagnostic push
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wcast-qual"
+#endif
+
+static int stb_textedit_paste(STB_TEXTEDIT_STRING *str, STB_TexteditState *state, STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE const *ctext, int len)
+{
+   return stb_textedit_paste_internal(str, state, (STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE *) ctext, len);
+}
+
+#if defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__clang__)
+#pragma GCC diagnostic pop
+#endif
+
+#endif//STB_TEXTEDIT_IMPLEMENTATION
+
+/*
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+This software is available under 2 licenses -- choose whichever you prefer.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ALTERNATIVE A - MIT License
+Copyright (c) 2017 Sean Barrett
+Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of
+this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in
+the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to
+use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
+of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do
+so, subject to the following conditions:
+The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all
+copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
+IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
+FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
+AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
+LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
+OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
+SOFTWARE.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ALTERNATIVE B - Public Domain (www.unlicense.org)
+This is free and unencumbered software released into the public domain.
+Anyone is free to copy, modify, publish, use, compile, sell, or distribute this
+software, either in source code form or as a compiled binary, for any purpose,
+commercial or non-commercial, and by any means.
+In jurisdictions that recognize copyright laws, the author or authors of this
+software dedicate any and all copyright interest in the software to the public
+domain. We make this dedication for the benefit of the public at large and to
+the detriment of our heirs and successors. We intend this dedication to be an
+overt act of relinquishment in perpetuity of all present and future rights to
+this software under copyright law.
+THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
+IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
+FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
+AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
+ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+*/
diff --git a/dependencies/include/imgui/imstb_truetype.h b/dependencies/include/imgui/imstb_truetype.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..643d378
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/imgui/imstb_truetype.h
@@ -0,0 +1,5085 @@
+// [DEAR IMGUI]
+// This is a slightly modified version of stb_truetype.h 1.26.
+// Mostly fixing for compiler and static analyzer warnings.
+// Grep for [DEAR IMGUI] to find the changes.
+
+// stb_truetype.h - v1.26 - public domain
+// authored from 2009-2021 by Sean Barrett / RAD Game Tools
+//
+// =======================================================================
+//
+//    NO SECURITY GUARANTEE -- DO NOT USE THIS ON UNTRUSTED FONT FILES
+//
+// This library does no range checking of the offsets found in the file,
+// meaning an attacker can use it to read arbitrary memory.
+//
+// =======================================================================
+//
+//   This library processes TrueType files:
+//        parse files
+//        extract glyph metrics
+//        extract glyph shapes
+//        render glyphs to one-channel bitmaps with antialiasing (box filter)
+//        render glyphs to one-channel SDF bitmaps (signed-distance field/function)
+//
+//   Todo:
+//        non-MS cmaps
+//        crashproof on bad data
+//        hinting? (no longer patented)
+//        cleartype-style AA?
+//        optimize: use simple memory allocator for intermediates
+//        optimize: build edge-list directly from curves
+//        optimize: rasterize directly from curves?
+//
+// ADDITIONAL CONTRIBUTORS
+//
+//   Mikko Mononen: compound shape support, more cmap formats
+//   Tor Andersson: kerning, subpixel rendering
+//   Dougall Johnson: OpenType / Type 2 font handling
+//   Daniel Ribeiro Maciel: basic GPOS-based kerning
+//
+//   Misc other:
+//       Ryan Gordon
+//       Simon Glass
+//       github:IntellectualKitty
+//       Imanol Celaya
+//       Daniel Ribeiro Maciel
+//
+//   Bug/warning reports/fixes:
+//       "Zer" on mollyrocket       Fabian "ryg" Giesen   github:NiLuJe
+//       Cass Everitt               Martins Mozeiko       github:aloucks
+//       stoiko (Haemimont Games)   Cap Petschulat        github:oyvindjam
+//       Brian Hook                 Omar Cornut           github:vassvik
+//       Walter van Niftrik         Ryan Griege
+//       David Gow                  Peter LaValle
+//       David Given                Sergey Popov
+//       Ivan-Assen Ivanov          Giumo X. Clanjor
+//       Anthony Pesch              Higor Euripedes
+//       Johan Duparc               Thomas Fields
+//       Hou Qiming                 Derek Vinyard
+//       Rob Loach                  Cort Stratton
+//       Kenney Phillis Jr.         Brian Costabile
+//       Ken Voskuil (kaesve)
+//
+// VERSION HISTORY
+//
+//   1.26 (2021-08-28) fix broken rasterizer
+//   1.25 (2021-07-11) many fixes
+//   1.24 (2020-02-05) fix warning
+//   1.23 (2020-02-02) query SVG data for glyphs; query whole kerning table (but only kern not GPOS)
+//   1.22 (2019-08-11) minimize missing-glyph duplication; fix kerning if both 'GPOS' and 'kern' are defined
+//   1.21 (2019-02-25) fix warning
+//   1.20 (2019-02-07) PackFontRange skips missing codepoints; GetScaleFontVMetrics()
+//   1.19 (2018-02-11) GPOS kerning, STBTT_fmod
+//   1.18 (2018-01-29) add missing function
+//   1.17 (2017-07-23) make more arguments const; doc fix
+//   1.16 (2017-07-12) SDF support
+//   1.15 (2017-03-03) make more arguments const
+//   1.14 (2017-01-16) num-fonts-in-TTC function
+//   1.13 (2017-01-02) support OpenType fonts, certain Apple fonts
+//   1.12 (2016-10-25) suppress warnings about casting away const with -Wcast-qual
+//   1.11 (2016-04-02) fix unused-variable warning
+//   1.10 (2016-04-02) user-defined fabs(); rare memory leak; remove duplicate typedef
+//   1.09 (2016-01-16) warning fix; avoid crash on outofmem; use allocation userdata properly
+//   1.08 (2015-09-13) document stbtt_Rasterize(); fixes for vertical & horizontal edges
+//   1.07 (2015-08-01) allow PackFontRanges to accept arrays of sparse codepoints;
+//                     variant PackFontRanges to pack and render in separate phases;
+//                     fix stbtt_GetFontOFfsetForIndex (never worked for non-0 input?);
+//                     fixed an assert() bug in the new rasterizer
+//                     replace assert() with STBTT_assert() in new rasterizer
+//
+//   Full history can be found at the end of this file.
+//
+// LICENSE
+//
+//   See end of file for license information.
+//
+// USAGE
+//
+//   Include this file in whatever places need to refer to it. In ONE C/C++
+//   file, write:
+//      #define STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION
+//   before the #include of this file. This expands out the actual
+//   implementation into that C/C++ file.
+//
+//   To make the implementation private to the file that generates the implementation,
+//      #define STBTT_STATIC
+//
+//   Simple 3D API (don't ship this, but it's fine for tools and quick start)
+//           stbtt_BakeFontBitmap()               -- bake a font to a bitmap for use as texture
+//           stbtt_GetBakedQuad()                 -- compute quad to draw for a given char
+//
+//   Improved 3D API (more shippable):
+//           #include "stb_rect_pack.h"           -- optional, but you really want it
+//           stbtt_PackBegin()
+//           stbtt_PackSetOversampling()          -- for improved quality on small fonts
+//           stbtt_PackFontRanges()               -- pack and renders
+//           stbtt_PackEnd()
+//           stbtt_GetPackedQuad()
+//
+//   "Load" a font file from a memory buffer (you have to keep the buffer loaded)
+//           stbtt_InitFont()
+//           stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex()        -- indexing for TTC font collections
+//           stbtt_GetNumberOfFonts()             -- number of fonts for TTC font collections
+//
+//   Render a unicode codepoint to a bitmap
+//           stbtt_GetCodepointBitmap()           -- allocates and returns a bitmap
+//           stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmap()          -- renders into bitmap you provide
+//           stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBox()        -- how big the bitmap must be
+//
+//   Character advance/positioning
+//           stbtt_GetCodepointHMetrics()
+//           stbtt_GetFontVMetrics()
+//           stbtt_GetFontVMetricsOS2()
+//           stbtt_GetCodepointKernAdvance()
+//
+//   Starting with version 1.06, the rasterizer was replaced with a new,
+//   faster and generally-more-precise rasterizer. The new rasterizer more
+//   accurately measures pixel coverage for anti-aliasing, except in the case
+//   where multiple shapes overlap, in which case it overestimates the AA pixel
+//   coverage. Thus, anti-aliasing of intersecting shapes may look wrong. If
+//   this turns out to be a problem, you can re-enable the old rasterizer with
+//        #define STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION 1
+//   which will incur about a 15% speed hit.
+//
+// ADDITIONAL DOCUMENTATION
+//
+//   Immediately after this block comment are a series of sample programs.
+//
+//   After the sample programs is the "header file" section. This section
+//   includes documentation for each API function.
+//
+//   Some important concepts to understand to use this library:
+//
+//      Codepoint
+//         Characters are defined by unicode codepoints, e.g. 65 is
+//         uppercase A, 231 is lowercase c with a cedilla, 0x7e30 is
+//         the hiragana for "ma".
+//
+//      Glyph
+//         A visual character shape (every codepoint is rendered as
+//         some glyph)
+//
+//      Glyph index
+//         A font-specific integer ID representing a glyph
+//
+//      Baseline
+//         Glyph shapes are defined relative to a baseline, which is the
+//         bottom of uppercase characters. Characters extend both above
+//         and below the baseline.
+//
+//      Current Point
+//         As you draw text to the screen, you keep track of a "current point"
+//         which is the origin of each character. The current point's vertical
+//         position is the baseline. Even "baked fonts" use this model.
+//
+//      Vertical Font Metrics
+//         The vertical qualities of the font, used to vertically position
+//         and space the characters. See docs for stbtt_GetFontVMetrics.
+//
+//      Font Size in Pixels or Points
+//         The preferred interface for specifying font sizes in stb_truetype
+//         is to specify how tall the font's vertical extent should be in pixels.
+//         If that sounds good enough, skip the next paragraph.
+//
+//         Most font APIs instead use "points", which are a common typographic
+//         measurement for describing font size, defined as 72 points per inch.
+//         stb_truetype provides a point API for compatibility. However, true
+//         "per inch" conventions don't make much sense on computer displays
+//         since different monitors have different number of pixels per
+//         inch. For example, Windows traditionally uses a convention that
+//         there are 96 pixels per inch, thus making 'inch' measurements have
+//         nothing to do with inches, and thus effectively defining a point to
+//         be 1.333 pixels. Additionally, the TrueType font data provides
+//         an explicit scale factor to scale a given font's glyphs to points,
+//         but the author has observed that this scale factor is often wrong
+//         for non-commercial fonts, thus making fonts scaled in points
+//         according to the TrueType spec incoherently sized in practice.
+//
+// DETAILED USAGE:
+//
+//  Scale:
+//    Select how high you want the font to be, in points or pixels.
+//    Call ScaleForPixelHeight or ScaleForMappingEmToPixels to compute
+//    a scale factor SF that will be used by all other functions.
+//
+//  Baseline:
+//    You need to select a y-coordinate that is the baseline of where
+//    your text will appear. Call GetFontBoundingBox to get the baseline-relative
+//    bounding box for all characters. SF*-y0 will be the distance in pixels
+//    that the worst-case character could extend above the baseline, so if
+//    you want the top edge of characters to appear at the top of the
+//    screen where y=0, then you would set the baseline to SF*-y0.
+//
+//  Current point:
+//    Set the current point where the first character will appear. The
+//    first character could extend left of the current point; this is font
+//    dependent. You can either choose a current point that is the leftmost
+//    point and hope, or add some padding, or check the bounding box or
+//    left-side-bearing of the first character to be displayed and set
+//    the current point based on that.
+//
+//  Displaying a character:
+//    Compute the bounding box of the character. It will contain signed values
+//    relative to <current_point, baseline>. I.e. if it returns x0,y0,x1,y1,
+//    then the character should be displayed in the rectangle from
+//    <current_point+SF*x0, baseline+SF*y0> to <current_point+SF*x1,baseline+SF*y1).
+//
+//  Advancing for the next character:
+//    Call GlyphHMetrics, and compute 'current_point += SF * advance'.
+//
+//
+// ADVANCED USAGE
+//
+//   Quality:
+//
+//    - Use the functions with Subpixel at the end to allow your characters
+//      to have subpixel positioning. Since the font is anti-aliased, not
+//      hinted, this is very import for quality. (This is not possible with
+//      baked fonts.)
+//
+//    - Kerning is now supported, and if you're supporting subpixel rendering
+//      then kerning is worth using to give your text a polished look.
+//
+//   Performance:
+//
+//    - Convert Unicode codepoints to glyph indexes and operate on the glyphs;
+//      if you don't do this, stb_truetype is forced to do the conversion on
+//      every call.
+//
+//    - There are a lot of memory allocations. We should modify it to take
+//      a temp buffer and allocate from the temp buffer (without freeing),
+//      should help performance a lot.
+//
+// NOTES
+//
+//   The system uses the raw data found in the .ttf file without changing it
+//   and without building auxiliary data structures. This is a bit inefficient
+//   on little-endian systems (the data is big-endian), but assuming you're
+//   caching the bitmaps or glyph shapes this shouldn't be a big deal.
+//
+//   It appears to be very hard to programmatically determine what font a
+//   given file is in a general way. I provide an API for this, but I don't
+//   recommend it.
+//
+//
+// PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENTS FOR 1.06:
+//
+//                      32-bit     64-bit
+//   Previous release:  8.83 s     7.68 s
+//   Pool allocations:  7.72 s     6.34 s
+//   Inline sort     :  6.54 s     5.65 s
+//   New rasterizer  :  5.63 s     5.00 s
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+////
+////  SAMPLE PROGRAMS
+////
+//
+//  Incomplete text-in-3d-api example, which draws quads properly aligned to be lossless.
+//  See "tests/truetype_demo_win32.c" for a complete version.
+#if 0
+#define STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION  // force following include to generate implementation
+#include "stb_truetype.h"
+
+unsigned char ttf_buffer[1<<20];
+unsigned char temp_bitmap[512*512];
+
+stbtt_bakedchar cdata[96]; // ASCII 32..126 is 95 glyphs
+GLuint ftex;
+
+void my_stbtt_initfont(void)
+{
+   fread(ttf_buffer, 1, 1<<20, fopen("c:/windows/fonts/times.ttf", "rb"));
+   stbtt_BakeFontBitmap(ttf_buffer,0, 32.0, temp_bitmap,512,512, 32,96, cdata); // no guarantee this fits!
+   // can free ttf_buffer at this point
+   glGenTextures(1, &ftex);
+   glBindTexture(GL_TEXTURE_2D, ftex);
+   glTexImage2D(GL_TEXTURE_2D, 0, GL_ALPHA, 512,512, 0, GL_ALPHA, GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, temp_bitmap);
+   // can free temp_bitmap at this point
+   glTexParameteri(GL_TEXTURE_2D, GL_TEXTURE_MIN_FILTER, GL_LINEAR);
+}
+
+void my_stbtt_print(float x, float y, char *text)
+{
+   // assume orthographic projection with units = screen pixels, origin at top left
+   glEnable(GL_BLEND);
+   glBlendFunc(GL_SRC_ALPHA, GL_ONE_MINUS_SRC_ALPHA);
+   glEnable(GL_TEXTURE_2D);
+   glBindTexture(GL_TEXTURE_2D, ftex);
+   glBegin(GL_QUADS);
+   while (*text) {
+      if (*text >= 32 && *text < 128) {
+         stbtt_aligned_quad q;
+         stbtt_GetBakedQuad(cdata, 512,512, *text-32, &x,&y,&q,1);//1=opengl & d3d10+,0=d3d9
+         glTexCoord2f(q.s0,q.t0); glVertex2f(q.x0,q.y0);
+         glTexCoord2f(q.s1,q.t0); glVertex2f(q.x1,q.y0);
+         glTexCoord2f(q.s1,q.t1); glVertex2f(q.x1,q.y1);
+         glTexCoord2f(q.s0,q.t1); glVertex2f(q.x0,q.y1);
+      }
+      ++text;
+   }
+   glEnd();
+}
+#endif
+//
+//
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// Complete program (this compiles): get a single bitmap, print as ASCII art
+//
+#if 0
+#include <stdio.h>
+#define STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION  // force following include to generate implementation
+#include "stb_truetype.h"
+
+char ttf_buffer[1<<25];
+
+int main(int argc, char **argv)
+{
+   stbtt_fontinfo font;
+   unsigned char *bitmap;
+   int w,h,i,j,c = (argc > 1 ? atoi(argv[1]) : 'a'), s = (argc > 2 ? atoi(argv[2]) : 20);
+
+   fread(ttf_buffer, 1, 1<<25, fopen(argc > 3 ? argv[3] : "c:/windows/fonts/arialbd.ttf", "rb"));
+
+   stbtt_InitFont(&font, ttf_buffer, stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex(ttf_buffer,0));
+   bitmap = stbtt_GetCodepointBitmap(&font, 0,stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(&font, s), c, &w, &h, 0,0);
+
+   for (j=0; j < h; ++j) {
+      for (i=0; i < w; ++i)
+         putchar(" .:ioVM@"[bitmap[j*w+i]>>5]);
+      putchar('\n');
+   }
+   return 0;
+}
+#endif
+//
+// Output:
+//
+//     .ii.
+//    @@@@@@.
+//   V@Mio@@o
+//   :i.  V@V
+//     :oM@@M
+//   :@@@MM@M
+//   @@o  o@M
+//  :@@.  M@M
+//   @@@o@@@@
+//   :M@@V:@@.
+//
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// Complete program: print "Hello World!" banner, with bugs
+//
+#if 0
+char buffer[24<<20];
+unsigned char screen[20][79];
+
+int main(int arg, char **argv)
+{
+   stbtt_fontinfo font;
+   int i,j,ascent,baseline,ch=0;
+   float scale, xpos=2; // leave a little padding in case the character extends left
+   char *text = "Heljo World!"; // intentionally misspelled to show 'lj' brokenness
+
+   fread(buffer, 1, 1000000, fopen("c:/windows/fonts/arialbd.ttf", "rb"));
+   stbtt_InitFont(&font, buffer, 0);
+
+   scale = stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(&font, 15);
+   stbtt_GetFontVMetrics(&font, &ascent,0,0);
+   baseline = (int) (ascent*scale);
+
+   while (text[ch]) {
+      int advance,lsb,x0,y0,x1,y1;
+      float x_shift = xpos - (float) floor(xpos);
+      stbtt_GetCodepointHMetrics(&font, text[ch], &advance, &lsb);
+      stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBoxSubpixel(&font, text[ch], scale,scale,x_shift,0, &x0,&y0,&x1,&y1);
+      stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixel(&font, &screen[baseline + y0][(int) xpos + x0], x1-x0,y1-y0, 79, scale,scale,x_shift,0, text[ch]);
+      // note that this stomps the old data, so where character boxes overlap (e.g. 'lj') it's wrong
+      // because this API is really for baking character bitmaps into textures. if you want to render
+      // a sequence of characters, you really need to render each bitmap to a temp buffer, then
+      // "alpha blend" that into the working buffer
+      xpos += (advance * scale);
+      if (text[ch+1])
+         xpos += scale*stbtt_GetCodepointKernAdvance(&font, text[ch],text[ch+1]);
+      ++ch;
+   }
+
+   for (j=0; j < 20; ++j) {
+      for (i=0; i < 78; ++i)
+         putchar(" .:ioVM@"[screen[j][i]>>5]);
+      putchar('\n');
+   }
+
+   return 0;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+////
+////   INTEGRATION WITH YOUR CODEBASE
+////
+////   The following sections allow you to supply alternate definitions
+////   of C library functions used by stb_truetype, e.g. if you don't
+////   link with the C runtime library.
+
+#ifdef STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION
+   // #define your own (u)stbtt_int8/16/32 before including to override this
+   #ifndef stbtt_uint8
+   typedef unsigned char   stbtt_uint8;
+   typedef signed   char   stbtt_int8;
+   typedef unsigned short  stbtt_uint16;
+   typedef signed   short  stbtt_int16;
+   typedef unsigned int    stbtt_uint32;
+   typedef signed   int    stbtt_int32;
+   #endif
+
+   typedef char stbtt__check_size32[sizeof(stbtt_int32)==4 ? 1 : -1];
+   typedef char stbtt__check_size16[sizeof(stbtt_int16)==2 ? 1 : -1];
+
+   // e.g. #define your own STBTT_ifloor/STBTT_iceil() to avoid math.h
+   #ifndef STBTT_ifloor
+   #include <math.h>
+   #define STBTT_ifloor(x)   ((int) floor(x))
+   #define STBTT_iceil(x)    ((int) ceil(x))
+   #endif
+
+   #ifndef STBTT_sqrt
+   #include <math.h>
+   #define STBTT_sqrt(x)      sqrt(x)
+   #define STBTT_pow(x,y)     pow(x,y)
+   #endif
+
+   #ifndef STBTT_fmod
+   #include <math.h>
+   #define STBTT_fmod(x,y)    fmod(x,y)
+   #endif
+
+   #ifndef STBTT_cos
+   #include <math.h>
+   #define STBTT_cos(x)       cos(x)
+   #define STBTT_acos(x)      acos(x)
+   #endif
+
+   #ifndef STBTT_fabs
+   #include <math.h>
+   #define STBTT_fabs(x)      fabs(x)
+   #endif
+
+   // #define your own functions "STBTT_malloc" / "STBTT_free" to avoid malloc.h
+   #ifndef STBTT_malloc
+   #include <stdlib.h>
+   #define STBTT_malloc(x,u)  ((void)(u),malloc(x))
+   #define STBTT_free(x,u)    ((void)(u),free(x))
+   #endif
+
+   #ifndef STBTT_assert
+   #include <assert.h>
+   #define STBTT_assert(x)    assert(x)
+   #endif
+
+   #ifndef STBTT_strlen
+   #include <string.h>
+   #define STBTT_strlen(x)    strlen(x)
+   #endif
+
+   #ifndef STBTT_memcpy
+   #include <string.h>
+   #define STBTT_memcpy       memcpy
+   #define STBTT_memset       memset
+   #endif
+#endif
+
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+////
+////   INTERFACE
+////
+////
+
+#ifndef __STB_INCLUDE_STB_TRUETYPE_H__
+#define __STB_INCLUDE_STB_TRUETYPE_H__
+
+#ifdef STBTT_STATIC
+#define STBTT_DEF static
+#else
+#define STBTT_DEF extern
+#endif
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C" {
+#endif
+
+// private structure
+typedef struct
+{
+   unsigned char *data;
+   int cursor;
+   int size;
+} stbtt__buf;
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// TEXTURE BAKING API
+//
+// If you use this API, you only have to call two functions ever.
+//
+
+typedef struct
+{
+   unsigned short x0,y0,x1,y1; // coordinates of bbox in bitmap
+   float xoff,yoff,xadvance;
+} stbtt_bakedchar;
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_BakeFontBitmap(const unsigned char *data, int offset,  // font location (use offset=0 for plain .ttf)
+                                float pixel_height,                     // height of font in pixels
+                                unsigned char *pixels, int pw, int ph,  // bitmap to be filled in
+                                int first_char, int num_chars,          // characters to bake
+                                stbtt_bakedchar *chardata);             // you allocate this, it's num_chars long
+// if return is positive, the first unused row of the bitmap
+// if return is negative, returns the negative of the number of characters that fit
+// if return is 0, no characters fit and no rows were used
+// This uses a very crappy packing.
+
+typedef struct
+{
+   float x0,y0,s0,t0; // top-left
+   float x1,y1,s1,t1; // bottom-right
+} stbtt_aligned_quad;
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetBakedQuad(const stbtt_bakedchar *chardata, int pw, int ph,  // same data as above
+                               int char_index,             // character to display
+                               float *xpos, float *ypos,   // pointers to current position in screen pixel space
+                               stbtt_aligned_quad *q,      // output: quad to draw
+                               int opengl_fillrule);       // true if opengl fill rule; false if DX9 or earlier
+// Call GetBakedQuad with char_index = 'character - first_char', and it
+// creates the quad you need to draw and advances the current position.
+//
+// The coordinate system used assumes y increases downwards.
+//
+// Characters will extend both above and below the current position;
+// see discussion of "BASELINE" above.
+//
+// It's inefficient; you might want to c&p it and optimize it.
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetScaledFontVMetrics(const unsigned char *fontdata, int index, float size, float *ascent, float *descent, float *lineGap);
+// Query the font vertical metrics without having to create a font first.
+
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// NEW TEXTURE BAKING API
+//
+// This provides options for packing multiple fonts into one atlas, not
+// perfectly but better than nothing.
+
+typedef struct
+{
+   unsigned short x0,y0,x1,y1; // coordinates of bbox in bitmap
+   float xoff,yoff,xadvance;
+   float xoff2,yoff2;
+} stbtt_packedchar;
+
+typedef struct stbtt_pack_context stbtt_pack_context;
+typedef struct stbtt_fontinfo stbtt_fontinfo;
+#ifndef STB_RECT_PACK_VERSION
+typedef struct stbrp_rect stbrp_rect;
+#endif
+
+STBTT_DEF int  stbtt_PackBegin(stbtt_pack_context *spc, unsigned char *pixels, int width, int height, int stride_in_bytes, int padding, void *alloc_context);
+// Initializes a packing context stored in the passed-in stbtt_pack_context.
+// Future calls using this context will pack characters into the bitmap passed
+// in here: a 1-channel bitmap that is width * height. stride_in_bytes is
+// the distance from one row to the next (or 0 to mean they are packed tightly
+// together). "padding" is the amount of padding to leave between each
+// character (normally you want '1' for bitmaps you'll use as textures with
+// bilinear filtering).
+//
+// Returns 0 on failure, 1 on success.
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackEnd  (stbtt_pack_context *spc);
+// Cleans up the packing context and frees all memory.
+
+#define STBTT_POINT_SIZE(x)   (-(x))
+
+STBTT_DEF int  stbtt_PackFontRange(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const unsigned char *fontdata, int font_index, float font_size,
+                                int first_unicode_char_in_range, int num_chars_in_range, stbtt_packedchar *chardata_for_range);
+// Creates character bitmaps from the font_index'th font found in fontdata (use
+// font_index=0 if you don't know what that is). It creates num_chars_in_range
+// bitmaps for characters with unicode values starting at first_unicode_char_in_range
+// and increasing. Data for how to render them is stored in chardata_for_range;
+// pass these to stbtt_GetPackedQuad to get back renderable quads.
+//
+// font_size is the full height of the character from ascender to descender,
+// as computed by stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight. To use a point size as computed
+// by stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels, wrap the point size in STBTT_POINT_SIZE()
+// and pass that result as 'font_size':
+//       ...,                  20 , ... // font max minus min y is 20 pixels tall
+//       ..., STBTT_POINT_SIZE(20), ... // 'M' is 20 pixels tall
+
+typedef struct
+{
+   float font_size;
+   int first_unicode_codepoint_in_range;  // if non-zero, then the chars are continuous, and this is the first codepoint
+   int *array_of_unicode_codepoints;       // if non-zero, then this is an array of unicode codepoints
+   int num_chars;
+   stbtt_packedchar *chardata_for_range; // output
+   unsigned char h_oversample, v_oversample; // don't set these, they're used internally
+} stbtt_pack_range;
+
+STBTT_DEF int  stbtt_PackFontRanges(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const unsigned char *fontdata, int font_index, stbtt_pack_range *ranges, int num_ranges);
+// Creates character bitmaps from multiple ranges of characters stored in
+// ranges. This will usually create a better-packed bitmap than multiple
+// calls to stbtt_PackFontRange. Note that you can call this multiple
+// times within a single PackBegin/PackEnd.
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackSetOversampling(stbtt_pack_context *spc, unsigned int h_oversample, unsigned int v_oversample);
+// Oversampling a font increases the quality by allowing higher-quality subpixel
+// positioning, and is especially valuable at smaller text sizes.
+//
+// This function sets the amount of oversampling for all following calls to
+// stbtt_PackFontRange(s) or stbtt_PackFontRangesGatherRects for a given
+// pack context. The default (no oversampling) is achieved by h_oversample=1
+// and v_oversample=1. The total number of pixels required is
+// h_oversample*v_oversample larger than the default; for example, 2x2
+// oversampling requires 4x the storage of 1x1. For best results, render
+// oversampled textures with bilinear filtering. Look at the readme in
+// stb/tests/oversample for information about oversampled fonts
+//
+// To use with PackFontRangesGather etc., you must set it before calls
+// call to PackFontRangesGatherRects.
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackSetSkipMissingCodepoints(stbtt_pack_context *spc, int skip);
+// If skip != 0, this tells stb_truetype to skip any codepoints for which
+// there is no corresponding glyph. If skip=0, which is the default, then
+// codepoints without a glyph recived the font's "missing character" glyph,
+// typically an empty box by convention.
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetPackedQuad(const stbtt_packedchar *chardata, int pw, int ph,  // same data as above
+                               int char_index,             // character to display
+                               float *xpos, float *ypos,   // pointers to current position in screen pixel space
+                               stbtt_aligned_quad *q,      // output: quad to draw
+                               int align_to_integer);
+
+STBTT_DEF int  stbtt_PackFontRangesGatherRects(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_pack_range *ranges, int num_ranges, stbrp_rect *rects);
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackFontRangesPackRects(stbtt_pack_context *spc, stbrp_rect *rects, int num_rects);
+STBTT_DEF int  stbtt_PackFontRangesRenderIntoRects(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_pack_range *ranges, int num_ranges, stbrp_rect *rects);
+// Calling these functions in sequence is roughly equivalent to calling
+// stbtt_PackFontRanges(). If you more control over the packing of multiple
+// fonts, or if you want to pack custom data into a font texture, take a look
+// at the source to of stbtt_PackFontRanges() and create a custom version
+// using these functions, e.g. call GatherRects multiple times,
+// building up a single array of rects, then call PackRects once,
+// then call RenderIntoRects repeatedly. This may result in a
+// better packing than calling PackFontRanges multiple times
+// (or it may not).
+
+// this is an opaque structure that you shouldn't mess with which holds
+// all the context needed from PackBegin to PackEnd.
+struct stbtt_pack_context {
+   void *user_allocator_context;
+   void *pack_info;
+   int   width;
+   int   height;
+   int   stride_in_bytes;
+   int   padding;
+   int   skip_missing;
+   unsigned int   h_oversample, v_oversample;
+   unsigned char *pixels;
+   void  *nodes;
+};
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// FONT LOADING
+//
+//
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetNumberOfFonts(const unsigned char *data);
+// This function will determine the number of fonts in a font file.  TrueType
+// collection (.ttc) files may contain multiple fonts, while TrueType font
+// (.ttf) files only contain one font. The number of fonts can be used for
+// indexing with the previous function where the index is between zero and one
+// less than the total fonts. If an error occurs, -1 is returned.
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex(const unsigned char *data, int index);
+// Each .ttf/.ttc file may have more than one font. Each font has a sequential
+// index number starting from 0. Call this function to get the font offset for
+// a given index; it returns -1 if the index is out of range. A regular .ttf
+// file will only define one font and it always be at offset 0, so it will
+// return '0' for index 0, and -1 for all other indices.
+
+// The following structure is defined publicly so you can declare one on
+// the stack or as a global or etc, but you should treat it as opaque.
+struct stbtt_fontinfo
+{
+   void           * userdata;
+   unsigned char  * data;              // pointer to .ttf file
+   int              fontstart;         // offset of start of font
+
+   int numGlyphs;                     // number of glyphs, needed for range checking
+
+   int loca,head,glyf,hhea,hmtx,kern,gpos,svg; // table locations as offset from start of .ttf
+   int index_map;                     // a cmap mapping for our chosen character encoding
+   int indexToLocFormat;              // format needed to map from glyph index to glyph
+
+   stbtt__buf cff;                    // cff font data
+   stbtt__buf charstrings;            // the charstring index
+   stbtt__buf gsubrs;                 // global charstring subroutines index
+   stbtt__buf subrs;                  // private charstring subroutines index
+   stbtt__buf fontdicts;              // array of font dicts
+   stbtt__buf fdselect;               // map from glyph to fontdict
+};
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_InitFont(stbtt_fontinfo *info, const unsigned char *data, int offset);
+// Given an offset into the file that defines a font, this function builds
+// the necessary cached info for the rest of the system. You must allocate
+// the stbtt_fontinfo yourself, and stbtt_InitFont will fill it out. You don't
+// need to do anything special to free it, because the contents are pure
+// value data with no additional data structures. Returns 0 on failure.
+
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// CHARACTER TO GLYPH-INDEX CONVERSIOn
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int unicode_codepoint);
+// If you're going to perform multiple operations on the same character
+// and you want a speed-up, call this function with the character you're
+// going to process, then use glyph-based functions instead of the
+// codepoint-based functions.
+// Returns 0 if the character codepoint is not defined in the font.
+
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// CHARACTER PROPERTIES
+//
+
+STBTT_DEF float stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float pixels);
+// computes a scale factor to produce a font whose "height" is 'pixels' tall.
+// Height is measured as the distance from the highest ascender to the lowest
+// descender; in other words, it's equivalent to calling stbtt_GetFontVMetrics
+// and computing:
+//       scale = pixels / (ascent - descent)
+// so if you prefer to measure height by the ascent only, use a similar calculation.
+
+STBTT_DEF float stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float pixels);
+// computes a scale factor to produce a font whose EM size is mapped to
+// 'pixels' tall. This is probably what traditional APIs compute, but
+// I'm not positive.
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetFontVMetrics(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int *ascent, int *descent, int *lineGap);
+// ascent is the coordinate above the baseline the font extends; descent
+// is the coordinate below the baseline the font extends (i.e. it is typically negative)
+// lineGap is the spacing between one row's descent and the next row's ascent...
+// so you should advance the vertical position by "*ascent - *descent + *lineGap"
+//   these are expressed in unscaled coordinates, so you must multiply by
+//   the scale factor for a given size
+
+STBTT_DEF int  stbtt_GetFontVMetricsOS2(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int *typoAscent, int *typoDescent, int *typoLineGap);
+// analogous to GetFontVMetrics, but returns the "typographic" values from the OS/2
+// table (specific to MS/Windows TTF files).
+//
+// Returns 1 on success (table present), 0 on failure.
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetFontBoundingBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1);
+// the bounding box around all possible characters
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetCodepointHMetrics(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int codepoint, int *advanceWidth, int *leftSideBearing);
+// leftSideBearing is the offset from the current horizontal position to the left edge of the character
+// advanceWidth is the offset from the current horizontal position to the next horizontal position
+//   these are expressed in unscaled coordinates
+
+STBTT_DEF int  stbtt_GetCodepointKernAdvance(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int ch1, int ch2);
+// an additional amount to add to the 'advance' value between ch1 and ch2
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetCodepointBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int codepoint, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1);
+// Gets the bounding box of the visible part of the glyph, in unscaled coordinates
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetGlyphHMetrics(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, int *advanceWidth, int *leftSideBearing);
+STBTT_DEF int  stbtt_GetGlyphKernAdvance(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph1, int glyph2);
+STBTT_DEF int  stbtt_GetGlyphBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1);
+// as above, but takes one or more glyph indices for greater efficiency
+
+typedef struct stbtt_kerningentry
+{
+   int glyph1; // use stbtt_FindGlyphIndex
+   int glyph2;
+   int advance;
+} stbtt_kerningentry;
+
+STBTT_DEF int  stbtt_GetKerningTableLength(const stbtt_fontinfo *info);
+STBTT_DEF int  stbtt_GetKerningTable(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_kerningentry* table, int table_length);
+// Retrieves a complete list of all of the kerning pairs provided by the font
+// stbtt_GetKerningTable never writes more than table_length entries and returns how many entries it did write.
+// The table will be sorted by (a.glyph1 == b.glyph1)?(a.glyph2 < b.glyph2):(a.glyph1 < b.glyph1)
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// GLYPH SHAPES (you probably don't need these, but they have to go before
+// the bitmaps for C declaration-order reasons)
+//
+
+#ifndef STBTT_vmove // you can predefine these to use different values (but why?)
+   enum {
+      STBTT_vmove=1,
+      STBTT_vline,
+      STBTT_vcurve,
+      STBTT_vcubic
+   };
+#endif
+
+#ifndef stbtt_vertex // you can predefine this to use different values
+                   // (we share this with other code at RAD)
+   #define stbtt_vertex_type short // can't use stbtt_int16 because that's not visible in the header file
+   typedef struct
+   {
+      stbtt_vertex_type x,y,cx,cy,cx1,cy1;
+      unsigned char type,padding;
+   } stbtt_vertex;
+#endif
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_IsGlyphEmpty(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index);
+// returns non-zero if nothing is drawn for this glyph
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetCodepointShape(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int unicode_codepoint, stbtt_vertex **vertices);
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetGlyphShape(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, stbtt_vertex **vertices);
+// returns # of vertices and fills *vertices with the pointer to them
+//   these are expressed in "unscaled" coordinates
+//
+// The shape is a series of contours. Each one starts with
+// a STBTT_moveto, then consists of a series of mixed
+// STBTT_lineto and STBTT_curveto segments. A lineto
+// draws a line from previous endpoint to its x,y; a curveto
+// draws a quadratic bezier from previous endpoint to
+// its x,y, using cx,cy as the bezier control point.
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_FreeShape(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_vertex *vertices);
+// frees the data allocated above
+
+STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_FindSVGDoc(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int gl);
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetCodepointSVG(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int unicode_codepoint, const char **svg);
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetGlyphSVG(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int gl, const char **svg);
+// fills svg with the character's SVG data.
+// returns data size or 0 if SVG not found.
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// BITMAP RENDERING
+//
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_FreeBitmap(unsigned char *bitmap, void *userdata);
+// frees the bitmap allocated below
+
+STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetCodepointBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, int codepoint, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff);
+// allocates a large-enough single-channel 8bpp bitmap and renders the
+// specified character/glyph at the specified scale into it, with
+// antialiasing. 0 is no coverage (transparent), 255 is fully covered (opaque).
+// *width & *height are filled out with the width & height of the bitmap,
+// which is stored left-to-right, top-to-bottom.
+//
+// xoff/yoff are the offset it pixel space from the glyph origin to the top-left of the bitmap
+
+STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int codepoint, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff);
+// the same as stbtt_GetCodepoitnBitmap, but you can specify a subpixel
+// shift for the character
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, int codepoint);
+// the same as stbtt_GetCodepointBitmap, but you pass in storage for the bitmap
+// in the form of 'output', with row spacing of 'out_stride' bytes. the bitmap
+// is clipped to out_w/out_h bytes. Call stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBox to get the
+// width and height and positioning info for it first.
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int codepoint);
+// same as stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmap, but you can specify a subpixel
+// shift for the character
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixelPrefilter(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int oversample_x, int oversample_y, float *sub_x, float *sub_y, int codepoint);
+// same as stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixel, but prefiltering
+// is performed (see stbtt_PackSetOversampling)
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int codepoint, float scale_x, float scale_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1);
+// get the bbox of the bitmap centered around the glyph origin; so the
+// bitmap width is ix1-ix0, height is iy1-iy0, and location to place
+// the bitmap top left is (leftSideBearing*scale,iy0).
+// (Note that the bitmap uses y-increases-down, but the shape uses
+// y-increases-up, so CodepointBitmapBox and CodepointBox are inverted.)
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBoxSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int codepoint, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1);
+// same as stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBox, but you can specify a subpixel
+// shift for the character
+
+// the following functions are equivalent to the above functions, but operate
+// on glyph indices instead of Unicode codepoints (for efficiency)
+STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetGlyphBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, int glyph, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff);
+STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int glyph, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff);
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, int glyph);
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int glyph);
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixelPrefilter(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int oversample_x, int oversample_y, float *sub_x, float *sub_y, int glyph);
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int glyph, float scale_x, float scale_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1);
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int glyph, float scale_x, float scale_y,float shift_x, float shift_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1);
+
+
+// @TODO: don't expose this structure
+typedef struct
+{
+   int w,h,stride;
+   unsigned char *pixels;
+} stbtt__bitmap;
+
+// rasterize a shape with quadratic beziers into a bitmap
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_Rasterize(stbtt__bitmap *result,        // 1-channel bitmap to draw into
+                               float flatness_in_pixels,     // allowable error of curve in pixels
+                               stbtt_vertex *vertices,       // array of vertices defining shape
+                               int num_verts,                // number of vertices in above array
+                               float scale_x, float scale_y, // scale applied to input vertices
+                               float shift_x, float shift_y, // translation applied to input vertices
+                               int x_off, int y_off,         // another translation applied to input
+                               int invert,                   // if non-zero, vertically flip shape
+                               void *userdata);              // context for to STBTT_MALLOC
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// Signed Distance Function (or Field) rendering
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_FreeSDF(unsigned char *bitmap, void *userdata);
+// frees the SDF bitmap allocated below
+
+STBTT_DEF unsigned char * stbtt_GetGlyphSDF(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale, int glyph, int padding, unsigned char onedge_value, float pixel_dist_scale, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff);
+STBTT_DEF unsigned char * stbtt_GetCodepointSDF(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale, int codepoint, int padding, unsigned char onedge_value, float pixel_dist_scale, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff);
+// These functions compute a discretized SDF field for a single character, suitable for storing
+// in a single-channel texture, sampling with bilinear filtering, and testing against
+// larger than some threshold to produce scalable fonts.
+//        info              --  the font
+//        scale             --  controls the size of the resulting SDF bitmap, same as it would be creating a regular bitmap
+//        glyph/codepoint   --  the character to generate the SDF for
+//        padding           --  extra "pixels" around the character which are filled with the distance to the character (not 0),
+//                                 which allows effects like bit outlines
+//        onedge_value      --  value 0-255 to test the SDF against to reconstruct the character (i.e. the isocontour of the character)
+//        pixel_dist_scale  --  what value the SDF should increase by when moving one SDF "pixel" away from the edge (on the 0..255 scale)
+//                                 if positive, > onedge_value is inside; if negative, < onedge_value is inside
+//        width,height      --  output height & width of the SDF bitmap (including padding)
+//        xoff,yoff         --  output origin of the character
+//        return value      --  a 2D array of bytes 0..255, width*height in size
+//
+// pixel_dist_scale & onedge_value are a scale & bias that allows you to make
+// optimal use of the limited 0..255 for your application, trading off precision
+// and special effects. SDF values outside the range 0..255 are clamped to 0..255.
+//
+// Example:
+//      scale = stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(22)
+//      padding = 5
+//      onedge_value = 180
+//      pixel_dist_scale = 180/5.0 = 36.0
+//
+//      This will create an SDF bitmap in which the character is about 22 pixels
+//      high but the whole bitmap is about 22+5+5=32 pixels high. To produce a filled
+//      shape, sample the SDF at each pixel and fill the pixel if the SDF value
+//      is greater than or equal to 180/255. (You'll actually want to antialias,
+//      which is beyond the scope of this example.) Additionally, you can compute
+//      offset outlines (e.g. to stroke the character border inside & outside,
+//      or only outside). For example, to fill outside the character up to 3 SDF
+//      pixels, you would compare against (180-36.0*3)/255 = 72/255. The above
+//      choice of variables maps a range from 5 pixels outside the shape to
+//      2 pixels inside the shape to 0..255; this is intended primarily for apply
+//      outside effects only (the interior range is needed to allow proper
+//      antialiasing of the font at *smaller* sizes)
+//
+// The function computes the SDF analytically at each SDF pixel, not by e.g.
+// building a higher-res bitmap and approximating it. In theory the quality
+// should be as high as possible for an SDF of this size & representation, but
+// unclear if this is true in practice (perhaps building a higher-res bitmap
+// and computing from that can allow drop-out prevention).
+//
+// The algorithm has not been optimized at all, so expect it to be slow
+// if computing lots of characters or very large sizes.
+
+
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// Finding the right font...
+//
+// You should really just solve this offline, keep your own tables
+// of what font is what, and don't try to get it out of the .ttf file.
+// That's because getting it out of the .ttf file is really hard, because
+// the names in the file can appear in many possible encodings, in many
+// possible languages, and e.g. if you need a case-insensitive comparison,
+// the details of that depend on the encoding & language in a complex way
+// (actually underspecified in truetype, but also gigantic).
+//
+// But you can use the provided functions in two possible ways:
+//     stbtt_FindMatchingFont() will use *case-sensitive* comparisons on
+//             unicode-encoded names to try to find the font you want;
+//             you can run this before calling stbtt_InitFont()
+//
+//     stbtt_GetFontNameString() lets you get any of the various strings
+//             from the file yourself and do your own comparisons on them.
+//             You have to have called stbtt_InitFont() first.
+
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_FindMatchingFont(const unsigned char *fontdata, const char *name, int flags);
+// returns the offset (not index) of the font that matches, or -1 if none
+//   if you use STBTT_MACSTYLE_DONTCARE, use a font name like "Arial Bold".
+//   if you use any other flag, use a font name like "Arial"; this checks
+//     the 'macStyle' header field; i don't know if fonts set this consistently
+#define STBTT_MACSTYLE_DONTCARE     0
+#define STBTT_MACSTYLE_BOLD         1
+#define STBTT_MACSTYLE_ITALIC       2
+#define STBTT_MACSTYLE_UNDERSCORE   4
+#define STBTT_MACSTYLE_NONE         8   // <= not same as 0, this makes us check the bitfield is 0
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian(const char *s1, int len1, const char *s2, int len2);
+// returns 1/0 whether the first string interpreted as utf8 is identical to
+// the second string interpreted as big-endian utf16... useful for strings from next func
+
+STBTT_DEF const char *stbtt_GetFontNameString(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int *length, int platformID, int encodingID, int languageID, int nameID);
+// returns the string (which may be big-endian double byte, e.g. for unicode)
+// and puts the length in bytes in *length.
+//
+// some of the values for the IDs are below; for more see the truetype spec:
+//     http://developer.apple.com/textfonts/TTRefMan/RM06/Chap6name.html
+//     http://www.microsoft.com/typography/otspec/name.htm
+
+enum { // platformID
+   STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_UNICODE   =0,
+   STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MAC       =1,
+   STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_ISO       =2,
+   STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MICROSOFT =3
+};
+
+enum { // encodingID for STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_UNICODE
+   STBTT_UNICODE_EID_UNICODE_1_0    =0,
+   STBTT_UNICODE_EID_UNICODE_1_1    =1,
+   STBTT_UNICODE_EID_ISO_10646      =2,
+   STBTT_UNICODE_EID_UNICODE_2_0_BMP=3,
+   STBTT_UNICODE_EID_UNICODE_2_0_FULL=4
+};
+
+enum { // encodingID for STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MICROSOFT
+   STBTT_MS_EID_SYMBOL        =0,
+   STBTT_MS_EID_UNICODE_BMP   =1,
+   STBTT_MS_EID_SHIFTJIS      =2,
+   STBTT_MS_EID_UNICODE_FULL  =10
+};
+
+enum { // encodingID for STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MAC; same as Script Manager codes
+   STBTT_MAC_EID_ROMAN        =0,   STBTT_MAC_EID_ARABIC       =4,
+   STBTT_MAC_EID_JAPANESE     =1,   STBTT_MAC_EID_HEBREW       =5,
+   STBTT_MAC_EID_CHINESE_TRAD =2,   STBTT_MAC_EID_GREEK        =6,
+   STBTT_MAC_EID_KOREAN       =3,   STBTT_MAC_EID_RUSSIAN      =7
+};
+
+enum { // languageID for STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MICROSOFT; same as LCID...
+       // problematic because there are e.g. 16 english LCIDs and 16 arabic LCIDs
+   STBTT_MS_LANG_ENGLISH     =0x0409,   STBTT_MS_LANG_ITALIAN     =0x0410,
+   STBTT_MS_LANG_CHINESE     =0x0804,   STBTT_MS_LANG_JAPANESE    =0x0411,
+   STBTT_MS_LANG_DUTCH       =0x0413,   STBTT_MS_LANG_KOREAN      =0x0412,
+   STBTT_MS_LANG_FRENCH      =0x040c,   STBTT_MS_LANG_RUSSIAN     =0x0419,
+   STBTT_MS_LANG_GERMAN      =0x0407,   STBTT_MS_LANG_SPANISH     =0x0409,
+   STBTT_MS_LANG_HEBREW      =0x040d,   STBTT_MS_LANG_SWEDISH     =0x041D
+};
+
+enum { // languageID for STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MAC
+   STBTT_MAC_LANG_ENGLISH      =0 ,   STBTT_MAC_LANG_JAPANESE     =11,
+   STBTT_MAC_LANG_ARABIC       =12,   STBTT_MAC_LANG_KOREAN       =23,
+   STBTT_MAC_LANG_DUTCH        =4 ,   STBTT_MAC_LANG_RUSSIAN      =32,
+   STBTT_MAC_LANG_FRENCH       =1 ,   STBTT_MAC_LANG_SPANISH      =6 ,
+   STBTT_MAC_LANG_GERMAN       =2 ,   STBTT_MAC_LANG_SWEDISH      =5 ,
+   STBTT_MAC_LANG_HEBREW       =10,   STBTT_MAC_LANG_CHINESE_SIMPLIFIED =33,
+   STBTT_MAC_LANG_ITALIAN      =3 ,   STBTT_MAC_LANG_CHINESE_TRAD =19
+};
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif // __STB_INCLUDE_STB_TRUETYPE_H__
+
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+////
+////   IMPLEMENTATION
+////
+////
+
+#ifdef STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION
+
+#ifndef STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE
+#define STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE   8
+#endif
+
+#if STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE > 255
+#error "STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE cannot be > 255"
+#endif
+
+typedef int stbtt__test_oversample_pow2[(STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE & (STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE-1)) == 0 ? 1 : -1];
+
+#ifndef STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION
+#define STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION 2
+#endif
+
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+#define STBTT__NOTUSED(v)  (void)(v)
+#else
+#define STBTT__NOTUSED(v)  (void)sizeof(v)
+#endif
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// stbtt__buf helpers to parse data from file
+//
+
+static stbtt_uint8 stbtt__buf_get8(stbtt__buf *b)
+{
+   if (b->cursor >= b->size)
+      return 0;
+   return b->data[b->cursor++];
+}
+
+static stbtt_uint8 stbtt__buf_peek8(stbtt__buf *b)
+{
+   if (b->cursor >= b->size)
+      return 0;
+   return b->data[b->cursor];
+}
+
+static void stbtt__buf_seek(stbtt__buf *b, int o)
+{
+   STBTT_assert(!(o > b->size || o < 0));
+   b->cursor = (o > b->size || o < 0) ? b->size : o;
+}
+
+static void stbtt__buf_skip(stbtt__buf *b, int o)
+{
+   stbtt__buf_seek(b, b->cursor + o);
+}
+
+static stbtt_uint32 stbtt__buf_get(stbtt__buf *b, int n)
+{
+   stbtt_uint32 v = 0;
+   int i;
+   STBTT_assert(n >= 1 && n <= 4);
+   for (i = 0; i < n; i++)
+      v = (v << 8) | stbtt__buf_get8(b);
+   return v;
+}
+
+static stbtt__buf stbtt__new_buf(const void *p, size_t size)
+{
+   stbtt__buf r;
+   STBTT_assert(size < 0x40000000);
+   r.data = (stbtt_uint8*) p;
+   r.size = (int) size;
+   r.cursor = 0;
+   return r;
+}
+
+#define stbtt__buf_get16(b)  stbtt__buf_get((b), 2)
+#define stbtt__buf_get32(b)  stbtt__buf_get((b), 4)
+
+static stbtt__buf stbtt__buf_range(const stbtt__buf *b, int o, int s)
+{
+   stbtt__buf r = stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0);
+   if (o < 0 || s < 0 || o > b->size || s > b->size - o) return r;
+   r.data = b->data + o;
+   r.size = s;
+   return r;
+}
+
+static stbtt__buf stbtt__cff_get_index(stbtt__buf *b)
+{
+   int count, start, offsize;
+   start = b->cursor;
+   count = stbtt__buf_get16(b);
+   if (count) {
+      offsize = stbtt__buf_get8(b);
+      STBTT_assert(offsize >= 1 && offsize <= 4);
+      stbtt__buf_skip(b, offsize * count);
+      stbtt__buf_skip(b, stbtt__buf_get(b, offsize) - 1);
+   }
+   return stbtt__buf_range(b, start, b->cursor - start);
+}
+
+static stbtt_uint32 stbtt__cff_int(stbtt__buf *b)
+{
+   int b0 = stbtt__buf_get8(b);
+   if (b0 >= 32 && b0 <= 246)       return b0 - 139;
+   else if (b0 >= 247 && b0 <= 250) return (b0 - 247)*256 + stbtt__buf_get8(b) + 108;
+   else if (b0 >= 251 && b0 <= 254) return -(b0 - 251)*256 - stbtt__buf_get8(b) - 108;
+   else if (b0 == 28)               return stbtt__buf_get16(b);
+   else if (b0 == 29)               return stbtt__buf_get32(b);
+   STBTT_assert(0);
+   return 0;
+}
+
+static void stbtt__cff_skip_operand(stbtt__buf *b) {
+   int v, b0 = stbtt__buf_peek8(b);
+   STBTT_assert(b0 >= 28);
+   if (b0 == 30) {
+      stbtt__buf_skip(b, 1);
+      while (b->cursor < b->size) {
+         v = stbtt__buf_get8(b);
+         if ((v & 0xF) == 0xF || (v >> 4) == 0xF)
+            break;
+      }
+   } else {
+      stbtt__cff_int(b);
+   }
+}
+
+static stbtt__buf stbtt__dict_get(stbtt__buf *b, int key)
+{
+   stbtt__buf_seek(b, 0);
+   while (b->cursor < b->size) {
+      int start = b->cursor, end, op;
+      while (stbtt__buf_peek8(b) >= 28)
+         stbtt__cff_skip_operand(b);
+      end = b->cursor;
+      op = stbtt__buf_get8(b);
+      if (op == 12)  op = stbtt__buf_get8(b) | 0x100;
+      if (op == key) return stbtt__buf_range(b, start, end-start);
+   }
+   return stbtt__buf_range(b, 0, 0);
+}
+
+static void stbtt__dict_get_ints(stbtt__buf *b, int key, int outcount, stbtt_uint32 *out)
+{
+   int i;
+   stbtt__buf operands = stbtt__dict_get(b, key);
+   for (i = 0; i < outcount && operands.cursor < operands.size; i++)
+      out[i] = stbtt__cff_int(&operands);
+}
+
+static int stbtt__cff_index_count(stbtt__buf *b)
+{
+   stbtt__buf_seek(b, 0);
+   return stbtt__buf_get16(b);
+}
+
+static stbtt__buf stbtt__cff_index_get(stbtt__buf b, int i)
+{
+   int count, offsize, start, end;
+   stbtt__buf_seek(&b, 0);
+   count = stbtt__buf_get16(&b);
+   offsize = stbtt__buf_get8(&b);
+   STBTT_assert(i >= 0 && i < count);
+   STBTT_assert(offsize >= 1 && offsize <= 4);
+   stbtt__buf_skip(&b, i*offsize);
+   start = stbtt__buf_get(&b, offsize);
+   end = stbtt__buf_get(&b, offsize);
+   return stbtt__buf_range(&b, 2+(count+1)*offsize+start, end - start);
+}
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// accessors to parse data from file
+//
+
+// on platforms that don't allow misaligned reads, if we want to allow
+// truetype fonts that aren't padded to alignment, define ALLOW_UNALIGNED_TRUETYPE
+
+#define ttBYTE(p)     (* (stbtt_uint8 *) (p))
+#define ttCHAR(p)     (* (stbtt_int8 *) (p))
+#define ttFixed(p)    ttLONG(p)
+
+static stbtt_uint16 ttUSHORT(stbtt_uint8 *p) { return p[0]*256 + p[1]; }
+static stbtt_int16 ttSHORT(stbtt_uint8 *p)   { return p[0]*256 + p[1]; }
+static stbtt_uint32 ttULONG(stbtt_uint8 *p)  { return (p[0]<<24) + (p[1]<<16) + (p[2]<<8) + p[3]; }
+static stbtt_int32 ttLONG(stbtt_uint8 *p)    { return (p[0]<<24) + (p[1]<<16) + (p[2]<<8) + p[3]; }
+
+#define stbtt_tag4(p,c0,c1,c2,c3) ((p)[0] == (c0) && (p)[1] == (c1) && (p)[2] == (c2) && (p)[3] == (c3))
+#define stbtt_tag(p,str)           stbtt_tag4(p,str[0],str[1],str[2],str[3])
+
+static int stbtt__isfont(stbtt_uint8 *font)
+{
+   // check the version number
+   if (stbtt_tag4(font, '1',0,0,0))  return 1; // TrueType 1
+   if (stbtt_tag(font, "typ1"))   return 1; // TrueType with type 1 font -- we don't support this!
+   if (stbtt_tag(font, "OTTO"))   return 1; // OpenType with CFF
+   if (stbtt_tag4(font, 0,1,0,0)) return 1; // OpenType 1.0
+   if (stbtt_tag(font, "true"))   return 1; // Apple specification for TrueType fonts
+   return 0;
+}
+
+// @OPTIMIZE: binary search
+static stbtt_uint32 stbtt__find_table(stbtt_uint8 *data, stbtt_uint32 fontstart, const char *tag)
+{
+   stbtt_int32 num_tables = ttUSHORT(data+fontstart+4);
+   stbtt_uint32 tabledir = fontstart + 12;
+   stbtt_int32 i;
+   for (i=0; i < num_tables; ++i) {
+      stbtt_uint32 loc = tabledir + 16*i;
+      if (stbtt_tag(data+loc+0, tag))
+         return ttULONG(data+loc+8);
+   }
+   return 0;
+}
+
+static int stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex_internal(unsigned char *font_collection, int index)
+{
+   // if it's just a font, there's only one valid index
+   if (stbtt__isfont(font_collection))
+      return index == 0 ? 0 : -1;
+
+   // check if it's a TTC
+   if (stbtt_tag(font_collection, "ttcf")) {
+      // version 1?
+      if (ttULONG(font_collection+4) == 0x00010000 || ttULONG(font_collection+4) == 0x00020000) {
+         stbtt_int32 n = ttLONG(font_collection+8);
+         if (index >= n)
+            return -1;
+         return ttULONG(font_collection+12+index*4);
+      }
+   }
+   return -1;
+}
+
+static int stbtt_GetNumberOfFonts_internal(unsigned char *font_collection)
+{
+   // if it's just a font, there's only one valid font
+   if (stbtt__isfont(font_collection))
+      return 1;
+
+   // check if it's a TTC
+   if (stbtt_tag(font_collection, "ttcf")) {
+      // version 1?
+      if (ttULONG(font_collection+4) == 0x00010000 || ttULONG(font_collection+4) == 0x00020000) {
+         return ttLONG(font_collection+8);
+      }
+   }
+   return 0;
+}
+
+static stbtt__buf stbtt__get_subrs(stbtt__buf cff, stbtt__buf fontdict)
+{
+   stbtt_uint32 subrsoff = 0, private_loc[2] = { 0, 0 };
+   stbtt__buf pdict;
+   stbtt__dict_get_ints(&fontdict, 18, 2, private_loc);
+   if (!private_loc[1] || !private_loc[0]) return stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0);
+   pdict = stbtt__buf_range(&cff, private_loc[1], private_loc[0]);
+   stbtt__dict_get_ints(&pdict, 19, 1, &subrsoff);
+   if (!subrsoff) return stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0);
+   stbtt__buf_seek(&cff, private_loc[1]+subrsoff);
+   return stbtt__cff_get_index(&cff);
+}
+
+// since most people won't use this, find this table the first time it's needed
+static int stbtt__get_svg(stbtt_fontinfo *info)
+{
+   stbtt_uint32 t;
+   if (info->svg < 0) {
+      t = stbtt__find_table(info->data, info->fontstart, "SVG ");
+      if (t) {
+         stbtt_uint32 offset = ttULONG(info->data + t + 2);
+         info->svg = t + offset;
+      } else {
+         info->svg = 0;
+      }
+   }
+   return info->svg;
+}
+
+static int stbtt_InitFont_internal(stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *data, int fontstart)
+{
+   stbtt_uint32 cmap, t;
+   stbtt_int32 i,numTables;
+
+   info->data = data;
+   info->fontstart = fontstart;
+   info->cff = stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0);
+
+   cmap = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "cmap");       // required
+   info->loca = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "loca"); // required
+   info->head = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "head"); // required
+   info->glyf = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "glyf"); // required
+   info->hhea = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "hhea"); // required
+   info->hmtx = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "hmtx"); // required
+   info->kern = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "kern"); // not required
+   info->gpos = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "GPOS"); // not required
+
+   if (!cmap || !info->head || !info->hhea || !info->hmtx)
+      return 0;
+   if (info->glyf) {
+      // required for truetype
+      if (!info->loca) return 0;
+   } else {
+      // initialization for CFF / Type2 fonts (OTF)
+      stbtt__buf b, topdict, topdictidx;
+      stbtt_uint32 cstype = 2, charstrings = 0, fdarrayoff = 0, fdselectoff = 0;
+      stbtt_uint32 cff;
+
+      cff = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "CFF ");
+      if (!cff) return 0;
+
+      info->fontdicts = stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0);
+      info->fdselect = stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0);
+
+      // @TODO this should use size from table (not 512MB)
+      info->cff = stbtt__new_buf(data+cff, 512*1024*1024);
+      b = info->cff;
+
+      // read the header
+      stbtt__buf_skip(&b, 2);
+      stbtt__buf_seek(&b, stbtt__buf_get8(&b)); // hdrsize
+
+      // @TODO the name INDEX could list multiple fonts,
+      // but we just use the first one.
+      stbtt__cff_get_index(&b);  // name INDEX
+      topdictidx = stbtt__cff_get_index(&b);
+      topdict = stbtt__cff_index_get(topdictidx, 0);
+      stbtt__cff_get_index(&b);  // string INDEX
+      info->gsubrs = stbtt__cff_get_index(&b);
+
+      stbtt__dict_get_ints(&topdict, 17, 1, &charstrings);
+      stbtt__dict_get_ints(&topdict, 0x100 | 6, 1, &cstype);
+      stbtt__dict_get_ints(&topdict, 0x100 | 36, 1, &fdarrayoff);
+      stbtt__dict_get_ints(&topdict, 0x100 | 37, 1, &fdselectoff);
+      info->subrs = stbtt__get_subrs(b, topdict);
+
+      // we only support Type 2 charstrings
+      if (cstype != 2) return 0;
+      if (charstrings == 0) return 0;
+
+      if (fdarrayoff) {
+         // looks like a CID font
+         if (!fdselectoff) return 0;
+         stbtt__buf_seek(&b, fdarrayoff);
+         info->fontdicts = stbtt__cff_get_index(&b);
+         info->fdselect = stbtt__buf_range(&b, fdselectoff, b.size-fdselectoff);
+      }
+
+      stbtt__buf_seek(&b, charstrings);
+      info->charstrings = stbtt__cff_get_index(&b);
+   }
+
+   t = stbtt__find_table(data, fontstart, "maxp");
+   if (t)
+      info->numGlyphs = ttUSHORT(data+t+4);
+   else
+      info->numGlyphs = 0xffff;
+
+   info->svg = -1;
+
+   // find a cmap encoding table we understand *now* to avoid searching
+   // later. (todo: could make this installable)
+   // the same regardless of glyph.
+   numTables = ttUSHORT(data + cmap + 2);
+   info->index_map = 0;
+   for (i=0; i < numTables; ++i) {
+      stbtt_uint32 encoding_record = cmap + 4 + 8 * i;
+      // find an encoding we understand:
+      switch(ttUSHORT(data+encoding_record)) {
+         case STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_MICROSOFT:
+            switch (ttUSHORT(data+encoding_record+2)) {
+               case STBTT_MS_EID_UNICODE_BMP:
+               case STBTT_MS_EID_UNICODE_FULL:
+                  // MS/Unicode
+                  info->index_map = cmap + ttULONG(data+encoding_record+4);
+                  break;
+            }
+            break;
+        case STBTT_PLATFORM_ID_UNICODE:
+            // Mac/iOS has these
+            // all the encodingIDs are unicode, so we don't bother to check it
+            info->index_map = cmap + ttULONG(data+encoding_record+4);
+            break;
+      }
+   }
+   if (info->index_map == 0)
+      return 0;
+
+   info->indexToLocFormat = ttUSHORT(data+info->head + 50);
+   return 1;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int unicode_codepoint)
+{
+   stbtt_uint8 *data = info->data;
+   stbtt_uint32 index_map = info->index_map;
+
+   stbtt_uint16 format = ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 0);
+   if (format == 0) { // apple byte encoding
+      stbtt_int32 bytes = ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 2);
+      if (unicode_codepoint < bytes-6)
+         return ttBYTE(data + index_map + 6 + unicode_codepoint);
+      return 0;
+   } else if (format == 6) {
+      stbtt_uint32 first = ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 6);
+      stbtt_uint32 count = ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 8);
+      if ((stbtt_uint32) unicode_codepoint >= first && (stbtt_uint32) unicode_codepoint < first+count)
+         return ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 10 + (unicode_codepoint - first)*2);
+      return 0;
+   } else if (format == 2) {
+      STBTT_assert(0); // @TODO: high-byte mapping for japanese/chinese/korean
+      return 0;
+   } else if (format == 4) { // standard mapping for windows fonts: binary search collection of ranges
+      stbtt_uint16 segcount = ttUSHORT(data+index_map+6) >> 1;
+      stbtt_uint16 searchRange = ttUSHORT(data+index_map+8) >> 1;
+      stbtt_uint16 entrySelector = ttUSHORT(data+index_map+10);
+      stbtt_uint16 rangeShift = ttUSHORT(data+index_map+12) >> 1;
+
+      // do a binary search of the segments
+      stbtt_uint32 endCount = index_map + 14;
+      stbtt_uint32 search = endCount;
+
+      if (unicode_codepoint > 0xffff)
+         return 0;
+
+      // they lie from endCount .. endCount + segCount
+      // but searchRange is the nearest power of two, so...
+      if (unicode_codepoint >= ttUSHORT(data + search + rangeShift*2))
+         search += rangeShift*2;
+
+      // now decrement to bias correctly to find smallest
+      search -= 2;
+      while (entrySelector) {
+         stbtt_uint16 end;
+         searchRange >>= 1;
+         end = ttUSHORT(data + search + searchRange*2);
+         if (unicode_codepoint > end)
+            search += searchRange*2;
+         --entrySelector;
+      }
+      search += 2;
+
+      {
+         stbtt_uint16 offset, start, last;
+         stbtt_uint16 item = (stbtt_uint16) ((search - endCount) >> 1);
+
+         start = ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 14 + segcount*2 + 2 + 2*item);
+         last = ttUSHORT(data + endCount + 2*item);
+         if (unicode_codepoint < start || unicode_codepoint > last)
+            return 0;
+
+         offset = ttUSHORT(data + index_map + 14 + segcount*6 + 2 + 2*item);
+         if (offset == 0)
+            return (stbtt_uint16) (unicode_codepoint + ttSHORT(data + index_map + 14 + segcount*4 + 2 + 2*item));
+
+         return ttUSHORT(data + offset + (unicode_codepoint-start)*2 + index_map + 14 + segcount*6 + 2 + 2*item);
+      }
+   } else if (format == 12 || format == 13) {
+      stbtt_uint32 ngroups = ttULONG(data+index_map+12);
+      stbtt_int32 low,high;
+      low = 0; high = (stbtt_int32)ngroups;
+      // Binary search the right group.
+      while (low < high) {
+         stbtt_int32 mid = low + ((high-low) >> 1); // rounds down, so low <= mid < high
+         stbtt_uint32 start_char = ttULONG(data+index_map+16+mid*12);
+         stbtt_uint32 end_char = ttULONG(data+index_map+16+mid*12+4);
+         if ((stbtt_uint32) unicode_codepoint < start_char)
+            high = mid;
+         else if ((stbtt_uint32) unicode_codepoint > end_char)
+            low = mid+1;
+         else {
+            stbtt_uint32 start_glyph = ttULONG(data+index_map+16+mid*12+8);
+            if (format == 12)
+               return start_glyph + unicode_codepoint-start_char;
+            else // format == 13
+               return start_glyph;
+         }
+      }
+      return 0; // not found
+   }
+   // @TODO
+   STBTT_assert(0);
+   return 0;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetCodepointShape(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int unicode_codepoint, stbtt_vertex **vertices)
+{
+   return stbtt_GetGlyphShape(info, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info, unicode_codepoint), vertices);
+}
+
+static void stbtt_setvertex(stbtt_vertex *v, stbtt_uint8 type, stbtt_int32 x, stbtt_int32 y, stbtt_int32 cx, stbtt_int32 cy)
+{
+   v->type = type;
+   v->x = (stbtt_int16) x;
+   v->y = (stbtt_int16) y;
+   v->cx = (stbtt_int16) cx;
+   v->cy = (stbtt_int16) cy;
+}
+
+static int stbtt__GetGlyfOffset(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index)
+{
+   int g1,g2;
+
+   STBTT_assert(!info->cff.size);
+
+   if (glyph_index >= info->numGlyphs) return -1; // glyph index out of range
+   if (info->indexToLocFormat >= 2)    return -1; // unknown index->glyph map format
+
+   if (info->indexToLocFormat == 0) {
+      g1 = info->glyf + ttUSHORT(info->data + info->loca + glyph_index * 2) * 2;
+      g2 = info->glyf + ttUSHORT(info->data + info->loca + glyph_index * 2 + 2) * 2;
+   } else {
+      g1 = info->glyf + ttULONG (info->data + info->loca + glyph_index * 4);
+      g2 = info->glyf + ttULONG (info->data + info->loca + glyph_index * 4 + 4);
+   }
+
+   return g1==g2 ? -1 : g1; // if length is 0, return -1
+}
+
+static int stbtt__GetGlyphInfoT2(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1);
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetGlyphBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1)
+{
+   if (info->cff.size) {
+      stbtt__GetGlyphInfoT2(info, glyph_index, x0, y0, x1, y1);
+   } else {
+      int g = stbtt__GetGlyfOffset(info, glyph_index);
+      if (g < 0) return 0;
+
+      if (x0) *x0 = ttSHORT(info->data + g + 2);
+      if (y0) *y0 = ttSHORT(info->data + g + 4);
+      if (x1) *x1 = ttSHORT(info->data + g + 6);
+      if (y1) *y1 = ttSHORT(info->data + g + 8);
+   }
+   return 1;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetCodepointBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int codepoint, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1)
+{
+   return stbtt_GetGlyphBox(info, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,codepoint), x0,y0,x1,y1);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_IsGlyphEmpty(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index)
+{
+   stbtt_int16 numberOfContours;
+   int g;
+   if (info->cff.size)
+      return stbtt__GetGlyphInfoT2(info, glyph_index, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL) == 0;
+   g = stbtt__GetGlyfOffset(info, glyph_index);
+   if (g < 0) return 1;
+   numberOfContours = ttSHORT(info->data + g);
+   return numberOfContours == 0;
+}
+
+static int stbtt__close_shape(stbtt_vertex *vertices, int num_vertices, int was_off, int start_off,
+    stbtt_int32 sx, stbtt_int32 sy, stbtt_int32 scx, stbtt_int32 scy, stbtt_int32 cx, stbtt_int32 cy)
+{
+   if (start_off) {
+      if (was_off)
+         stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vcurve, (cx+scx)>>1, (cy+scy)>>1, cx,cy);
+      stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vcurve, sx,sy,scx,scy);
+   } else {
+      if (was_off)
+         stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vcurve,sx,sy,cx,cy);
+      else
+         stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vline,sx,sy,0,0);
+   }
+   return num_vertices;
+}
+
+static int stbtt__GetGlyphShapeTT(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, stbtt_vertex **pvertices)
+{
+   stbtt_int16 numberOfContours;
+   stbtt_uint8 *endPtsOfContours;
+   stbtt_uint8 *data = info->data;
+   stbtt_vertex *vertices=0;
+   int num_vertices=0;
+   int g = stbtt__GetGlyfOffset(info, glyph_index);
+
+   *pvertices = NULL;
+
+   if (g < 0) return 0;
+
+   numberOfContours = ttSHORT(data + g);
+
+   if (numberOfContours > 0) {
+      stbtt_uint8 flags=0,flagcount;
+      stbtt_int32 ins, i,j=0,m,n, next_move, was_off=0, off, start_off=0;
+      stbtt_int32 x,y,cx,cy,sx,sy, scx,scy;
+      stbtt_uint8 *points;
+      endPtsOfContours = (data + g + 10);
+      ins = ttUSHORT(data + g + 10 + numberOfContours * 2);
+      points = data + g + 10 + numberOfContours * 2 + 2 + ins;
+
+      n = 1+ttUSHORT(endPtsOfContours + numberOfContours*2-2);
+
+      m = n + 2*numberOfContours;  // a loose bound on how many vertices we might need
+      vertices = (stbtt_vertex *) STBTT_malloc(m * sizeof(vertices[0]), info->userdata);
+      if (vertices == 0)
+         return 0;
+
+      next_move = 0;
+      flagcount=0;
+
+      // in first pass, we load uninterpreted data into the allocated array
+      // above, shifted to the end of the array so we won't overwrite it when
+      // we create our final data starting from the front
+
+      off = m - n; // starting offset for uninterpreted data, regardless of how m ends up being calculated
+
+      // first load flags
+
+      for (i=0; i < n; ++i) {
+         if (flagcount == 0) {
+            flags = *points++;
+            if (flags & 8)
+               flagcount = *points++;
+         } else
+            --flagcount;
+         vertices[off+i].type = flags;
+      }
+
+      // now load x coordinates
+      x=0;
+      for (i=0; i < n; ++i) {
+         flags = vertices[off+i].type;
+         if (flags & 2) {
+            stbtt_int16 dx = *points++;
+            x += (flags & 16) ? dx : -dx; // ???
+         } else {
+            if (!(flags & 16)) {
+               x = x + (stbtt_int16) (points[0]*256 + points[1]);
+               points += 2;
+            }
+         }
+         vertices[off+i].x = (stbtt_int16) x;
+      }
+
+      // now load y coordinates
+      y=0;
+      for (i=0; i < n; ++i) {
+         flags = vertices[off+i].type;
+         if (flags & 4) {
+            stbtt_int16 dy = *points++;
+            y += (flags & 32) ? dy : -dy; // ???
+         } else {
+            if (!(flags & 32)) {
+               y = y + (stbtt_int16) (points[0]*256 + points[1]);
+               points += 2;
+            }
+         }
+         vertices[off+i].y = (stbtt_int16) y;
+      }
+
+      // now convert them to our format
+      num_vertices=0;
+      sx = sy = cx = cy = scx = scy = 0;
+      for (i=0; i < n; ++i) {
+         flags = vertices[off+i].type;
+         x     = (stbtt_int16) vertices[off+i].x;
+         y     = (stbtt_int16) vertices[off+i].y;
+
+         if (next_move == i) {
+            if (i != 0)
+               num_vertices = stbtt__close_shape(vertices, num_vertices, was_off, start_off, sx,sy,scx,scy,cx,cy);
+
+            // now start the new one
+            start_off = !(flags & 1);
+            if (start_off) {
+               // if we start off with an off-curve point, then when we need to find a point on the curve
+               // where we can start, and we need to save some state for when we wraparound.
+               scx = x;
+               scy = y;
+               if (!(vertices[off+i+1].type & 1)) {
+                  // next point is also a curve point, so interpolate an on-point curve
+                  sx = (x + (stbtt_int32) vertices[off+i+1].x) >> 1;
+                  sy = (y + (stbtt_int32) vertices[off+i+1].y) >> 1;
+               } else {
+                  // otherwise just use the next point as our start point
+                  sx = (stbtt_int32) vertices[off+i+1].x;
+                  sy = (stbtt_int32) vertices[off+i+1].y;
+                  ++i; // we're using point i+1 as the starting point, so skip it
+               }
+            } else {
+               sx = x;
+               sy = y;
+            }
+            stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vmove,sx,sy,0,0);
+            was_off = 0;
+            next_move = 1 + ttUSHORT(endPtsOfContours+j*2);
+            ++j;
+         } else {
+            if (!(flags & 1)) { // if it's a curve
+               if (was_off) // two off-curve control points in a row means interpolate an on-curve midpoint
+                  stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vcurve, (cx+x)>>1, (cy+y)>>1, cx, cy);
+               cx = x;
+               cy = y;
+               was_off = 1;
+            } else {
+               if (was_off)
+                  stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vcurve, x,y, cx, cy);
+               else
+                  stbtt_setvertex(&vertices[num_vertices++], STBTT_vline, x,y,0,0);
+               was_off = 0;
+            }
+         }
+      }
+      num_vertices = stbtt__close_shape(vertices, num_vertices, was_off, start_off, sx,sy,scx,scy,cx,cy);
+   } else if (numberOfContours < 0) {
+      // Compound shapes.
+      int more = 1;
+      stbtt_uint8 *comp = data + g + 10;
+      num_vertices = 0;
+      vertices = 0;
+      while (more) {
+         stbtt_uint16 flags, gidx;
+         int comp_num_verts = 0, i;
+         stbtt_vertex *comp_verts = 0, *tmp = 0;
+         float mtx[6] = {1,0,0,1,0,0}, m, n;
+
+         flags = ttSHORT(comp); comp+=2;
+         gidx = ttSHORT(comp); comp+=2;
+
+         if (flags & 2) { // XY values
+            if (flags & 1) { // shorts
+               mtx[4] = ttSHORT(comp); comp+=2;
+               mtx[5] = ttSHORT(comp); comp+=2;
+            } else {
+               mtx[4] = ttCHAR(comp); comp+=1;
+               mtx[5] = ttCHAR(comp); comp+=1;
+            }
+         }
+         else {
+            // @TODO handle matching point
+            STBTT_assert(0);
+         }
+         if (flags & (1<<3)) { // WE_HAVE_A_SCALE
+            mtx[0] = mtx[3] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2;
+            mtx[1] = mtx[2] = 0;
+         } else if (flags & (1<<6)) { // WE_HAVE_AN_X_AND_YSCALE
+            mtx[0] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2;
+            mtx[1] = mtx[2] = 0;
+            mtx[3] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2;
+         } else if (flags & (1<<7)) { // WE_HAVE_A_TWO_BY_TWO
+            mtx[0] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2;
+            mtx[1] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2;
+            mtx[2] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2;
+            mtx[3] = ttSHORT(comp)/16384.0f; comp+=2;
+         }
+
+         // Find transformation scales.
+         m = (float) STBTT_sqrt(mtx[0]*mtx[0] + mtx[1]*mtx[1]);
+         n = (float) STBTT_sqrt(mtx[2]*mtx[2] + mtx[3]*mtx[3]);
+
+         // Get indexed glyph.
+         comp_num_verts = stbtt_GetGlyphShape(info, gidx, &comp_verts);
+         if (comp_num_verts > 0) {
+            // Transform vertices.
+            for (i = 0; i < comp_num_verts; ++i) {
+               stbtt_vertex* v = &comp_verts[i];
+               stbtt_vertex_type x,y;
+               x=v->x; y=v->y;
+               v->x = (stbtt_vertex_type)(m * (mtx[0]*x + mtx[2]*y + mtx[4]));
+               v->y = (stbtt_vertex_type)(n * (mtx[1]*x + mtx[3]*y + mtx[5]));
+               x=v->cx; y=v->cy;
+               v->cx = (stbtt_vertex_type)(m * (mtx[0]*x + mtx[2]*y + mtx[4]));
+               v->cy = (stbtt_vertex_type)(n * (mtx[1]*x + mtx[3]*y + mtx[5]));
+            }
+            // Append vertices.
+            tmp = (stbtt_vertex*)STBTT_malloc((num_vertices+comp_num_verts)*sizeof(stbtt_vertex), info->userdata);
+            if (!tmp) {
+               if (vertices) STBTT_free(vertices, info->userdata);
+               if (comp_verts) STBTT_free(comp_verts, info->userdata);
+               return 0;
+            }
+            if (num_vertices > 0 && vertices) STBTT_memcpy(tmp, vertices, num_vertices*sizeof(stbtt_vertex));
+            STBTT_memcpy(tmp+num_vertices, comp_verts, comp_num_verts*sizeof(stbtt_vertex));
+            if (vertices) STBTT_free(vertices, info->userdata);
+            vertices = tmp;
+            STBTT_free(comp_verts, info->userdata);
+            num_vertices += comp_num_verts;
+         }
+         // More components ?
+         more = flags & (1<<5);
+      }
+   } else {
+      // numberOfCounters == 0, do nothing
+   }
+
+   *pvertices = vertices;
+   return num_vertices;
+}
+
+typedef struct
+{
+   int bounds;
+   int started;
+   float first_x, first_y;
+   float x, y;
+   stbtt_int32 min_x, max_x, min_y, max_y;
+
+   stbtt_vertex *pvertices;
+   int num_vertices;
+} stbtt__csctx;
+
+#define STBTT__CSCTX_INIT(bounds) {bounds,0, 0,0, 0,0, 0,0,0,0, NULL, 0}
+
+static void stbtt__track_vertex(stbtt__csctx *c, stbtt_int32 x, stbtt_int32 y)
+{
+   if (x > c->max_x || !c->started) c->max_x = x;
+   if (y > c->max_y || !c->started) c->max_y = y;
+   if (x < c->min_x || !c->started) c->min_x = x;
+   if (y < c->min_y || !c->started) c->min_y = y;
+   c->started = 1;
+}
+
+static void stbtt__csctx_v(stbtt__csctx *c, stbtt_uint8 type, stbtt_int32 x, stbtt_int32 y, stbtt_int32 cx, stbtt_int32 cy, stbtt_int32 cx1, stbtt_int32 cy1)
+{
+   if (c->bounds) {
+      stbtt__track_vertex(c, x, y);
+      if (type == STBTT_vcubic) {
+         stbtt__track_vertex(c, cx, cy);
+         stbtt__track_vertex(c, cx1, cy1);
+      }
+   } else {
+      stbtt_setvertex(&c->pvertices[c->num_vertices], type, x, y, cx, cy);
+      c->pvertices[c->num_vertices].cx1 = (stbtt_int16) cx1;
+      c->pvertices[c->num_vertices].cy1 = (stbtt_int16) cy1;
+   }
+   c->num_vertices++;
+}
+
+static void stbtt__csctx_close_shape(stbtt__csctx *ctx)
+{
+   if (ctx->first_x != ctx->x || ctx->first_y != ctx->y)
+      stbtt__csctx_v(ctx, STBTT_vline, (int)ctx->first_x, (int)ctx->first_y, 0, 0, 0, 0);
+}
+
+static void stbtt__csctx_rmove_to(stbtt__csctx *ctx, float dx, float dy)
+{
+   stbtt__csctx_close_shape(ctx);
+   ctx->first_x = ctx->x = ctx->x + dx;
+   ctx->first_y = ctx->y = ctx->y + dy;
+   stbtt__csctx_v(ctx, STBTT_vmove, (int)ctx->x, (int)ctx->y, 0, 0, 0, 0);
+}
+
+static void stbtt__csctx_rline_to(stbtt__csctx *ctx, float dx, float dy)
+{
+   ctx->x += dx;
+   ctx->y += dy;
+   stbtt__csctx_v(ctx, STBTT_vline, (int)ctx->x, (int)ctx->y, 0, 0, 0, 0);
+}
+
+static void stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(stbtt__csctx *ctx, float dx1, float dy1, float dx2, float dy2, float dx3, float dy3)
+{
+   float cx1 = ctx->x + dx1;
+   float cy1 = ctx->y + dy1;
+   float cx2 = cx1 + dx2;
+   float cy2 = cy1 + dy2;
+   ctx->x = cx2 + dx3;
+   ctx->y = cy2 + dy3;
+   stbtt__csctx_v(ctx, STBTT_vcubic, (int)ctx->x, (int)ctx->y, (int)cx1, (int)cy1, (int)cx2, (int)cy2);
+}
+
+static stbtt__buf stbtt__get_subr(stbtt__buf idx, int n)
+{
+   int count = stbtt__cff_index_count(&idx);
+   int bias = 107;
+   if (count >= 33900)
+      bias = 32768;
+   else if (count >= 1240)
+      bias = 1131;
+   n += bias;
+   if (n < 0 || n >= count)
+      return stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0);
+   return stbtt__cff_index_get(idx, n);
+}
+
+static stbtt__buf stbtt__cid_get_glyph_subrs(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index)
+{
+   stbtt__buf fdselect = info->fdselect;
+   int nranges, start, end, v, fmt, fdselector = -1, i;
+
+   stbtt__buf_seek(&fdselect, 0);
+   fmt = stbtt__buf_get8(&fdselect);
+   if (fmt == 0) {
+      // untested
+      stbtt__buf_skip(&fdselect, glyph_index);
+      fdselector = stbtt__buf_get8(&fdselect);
+   } else if (fmt == 3) {
+      nranges = stbtt__buf_get16(&fdselect);
+      start = stbtt__buf_get16(&fdselect);
+      for (i = 0; i < nranges; i++) {
+         v = stbtt__buf_get8(&fdselect);
+         end = stbtt__buf_get16(&fdselect);
+         if (glyph_index >= start && glyph_index < end) {
+            fdselector = v;
+            break;
+         }
+         start = end;
+      }
+   }
+   if (fdselector == -1) stbtt__new_buf(NULL, 0);
+   return stbtt__get_subrs(info->cff, stbtt__cff_index_get(info->fontdicts, fdselector));
+}
+
+static int stbtt__run_charstring(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, stbtt__csctx *c)
+{
+   int in_header = 1, maskbits = 0, subr_stack_height = 0, sp = 0, v, i, b0;
+   int has_subrs = 0, clear_stack;
+   float s[48];
+   stbtt__buf subr_stack[10], subrs = info->subrs, b;
+   float f;
+
+#define STBTT__CSERR(s) (0)
+
+   // this currently ignores the initial width value, which isn't needed if we have hmtx
+   b = stbtt__cff_index_get(info->charstrings, glyph_index);
+   while (b.cursor < b.size) {
+      i = 0;
+      clear_stack = 1;
+      b0 = stbtt__buf_get8(&b);
+      switch (b0) {
+      // @TODO implement hinting
+      case 0x13: // hintmask
+      case 0x14: // cntrmask
+         if (in_header)
+            maskbits += (sp / 2); // implicit "vstem"
+         in_header = 0;
+         stbtt__buf_skip(&b, (maskbits + 7) / 8);
+         break;
+
+      case 0x01: // hstem
+      case 0x03: // vstem
+      case 0x12: // hstemhm
+      case 0x17: // vstemhm
+         maskbits += (sp / 2);
+         break;
+
+      case 0x15: // rmoveto
+         in_header = 0;
+         if (sp < 2) return STBTT__CSERR("rmoveto stack");
+         stbtt__csctx_rmove_to(c, s[sp-2], s[sp-1]);
+         break;
+      case 0x04: // vmoveto
+         in_header = 0;
+         if (sp < 1) return STBTT__CSERR("vmoveto stack");
+         stbtt__csctx_rmove_to(c, 0, s[sp-1]);
+         break;
+      case 0x16: // hmoveto
+         in_header = 0;
+         if (sp < 1) return STBTT__CSERR("hmoveto stack");
+         stbtt__csctx_rmove_to(c, s[sp-1], 0);
+         break;
+
+      case 0x05: // rlineto
+         if (sp < 2) return STBTT__CSERR("rlineto stack");
+         for (; i + 1 < sp; i += 2)
+            stbtt__csctx_rline_to(c, s[i], s[i+1]);
+         break;
+
+      // hlineto/vlineto and vhcurveto/hvcurveto alternate horizontal and vertical
+      // starting from a different place.
+
+      case 0x07: // vlineto
+         if (sp < 1) return STBTT__CSERR("vlineto stack");
+         goto vlineto;
+      case 0x06: // hlineto
+         if (sp < 1) return STBTT__CSERR("hlineto stack");
+         for (;;) {
+            if (i >= sp) break;
+            stbtt__csctx_rline_to(c, s[i], 0);
+            i++;
+      vlineto:
+            if (i >= sp) break;
+            stbtt__csctx_rline_to(c, 0, s[i]);
+            i++;
+         }
+         break;
+
+      case 0x1F: // hvcurveto
+         if (sp < 4) return STBTT__CSERR("hvcurveto stack");
+         goto hvcurveto;
+      case 0x1E: // vhcurveto
+         if (sp < 4) return STBTT__CSERR("vhcurveto stack");
+         for (;;) {
+            if (i + 3 >= sp) break;
+            stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, 0, s[i], s[i+1], s[i+2], s[i+3], (sp - i == 5) ? s[i + 4] : 0.0f);
+            i += 4;
+      hvcurveto:
+            if (i + 3 >= sp) break;
+            stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, s[i], 0, s[i+1], s[i+2], (sp - i == 5) ? s[i+4] : 0.0f, s[i+3]);
+            i += 4;
+         }
+         break;
+
+      case 0x08: // rrcurveto
+         if (sp < 6) return STBTT__CSERR("rcurveline stack");
+         for (; i + 5 < sp; i += 6)
+            stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, s[i], s[i+1], s[i+2], s[i+3], s[i+4], s[i+5]);
+         break;
+
+      case 0x18: // rcurveline
+         if (sp < 8) return STBTT__CSERR("rcurveline stack");
+         for (; i + 5 < sp - 2; i += 6)
+            stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, s[i], s[i+1], s[i+2], s[i+3], s[i+4], s[i+5]);
+         if (i + 1 >= sp) return STBTT__CSERR("rcurveline stack");
+         stbtt__csctx_rline_to(c, s[i], s[i+1]);
+         break;
+
+      case 0x19: // rlinecurve
+         if (sp < 8) return STBTT__CSERR("rlinecurve stack");
+         for (; i + 1 < sp - 6; i += 2)
+            stbtt__csctx_rline_to(c, s[i], s[i+1]);
+         if (i + 5 >= sp) return STBTT__CSERR("rlinecurve stack");
+         stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, s[i], s[i+1], s[i+2], s[i+3], s[i+4], s[i+5]);
+         break;
+
+      case 0x1A: // vvcurveto
+      case 0x1B: // hhcurveto
+         if (sp < 4) return STBTT__CSERR("(vv|hh)curveto stack");
+         f = 0.0;
+         if (sp & 1) { f = s[i]; i++; }
+         for (; i + 3 < sp; i += 4) {
+            if (b0 == 0x1B)
+               stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, s[i], f, s[i+1], s[i+2], s[i+3], 0.0);
+            else
+               stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, f, s[i], s[i+1], s[i+2], 0.0, s[i+3]);
+            f = 0.0;
+         }
+         break;
+
+      case 0x0A: // callsubr
+         if (!has_subrs) {
+            if (info->fdselect.size)
+               subrs = stbtt__cid_get_glyph_subrs(info, glyph_index);
+            has_subrs = 1;
+         }
+         // FALLTHROUGH
+      case 0x1D: // callgsubr
+         if (sp < 1) return STBTT__CSERR("call(g|)subr stack");
+         v = (int) s[--sp];
+         if (subr_stack_height >= 10) return STBTT__CSERR("recursion limit");
+         subr_stack[subr_stack_height++] = b;
+         b = stbtt__get_subr(b0 == 0x0A ? subrs : info->gsubrs, v);
+         if (b.size == 0) return STBTT__CSERR("subr not found");
+         b.cursor = 0;
+         clear_stack = 0;
+         break;
+
+      case 0x0B: // return
+         if (subr_stack_height <= 0) return STBTT__CSERR("return outside subr");
+         b = subr_stack[--subr_stack_height];
+         clear_stack = 0;
+         break;
+
+      case 0x0E: // endchar
+         stbtt__csctx_close_shape(c);
+         return 1;
+
+      case 0x0C: { // two-byte escape
+         float dx1, dx2, dx3, dx4, dx5, dx6, dy1, dy2, dy3, dy4, dy5, dy6;
+         float dx, dy;
+         int b1 = stbtt__buf_get8(&b);
+         switch (b1) {
+         // @TODO These "flex" implementations ignore the flex-depth and resolution,
+         // and always draw beziers.
+         case 0x22: // hflex
+            if (sp < 7) return STBTT__CSERR("hflex stack");
+            dx1 = s[0];
+            dx2 = s[1];
+            dy2 = s[2];
+            dx3 = s[3];
+            dx4 = s[4];
+            dx5 = s[5];
+            dx6 = s[6];
+            stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx1, 0, dx2, dy2, dx3, 0);
+            stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx4, 0, dx5, -dy2, dx6, 0);
+            break;
+
+         case 0x23: // flex
+            if (sp < 13) return STBTT__CSERR("flex stack");
+            dx1 = s[0];
+            dy1 = s[1];
+            dx2 = s[2];
+            dy2 = s[3];
+            dx3 = s[4];
+            dy3 = s[5];
+            dx4 = s[6];
+            dy4 = s[7];
+            dx5 = s[8];
+            dy5 = s[9];
+            dx6 = s[10];
+            dy6 = s[11];
+            //fd is s[12]
+            stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx1, dy1, dx2, dy2, dx3, dy3);
+            stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx4, dy4, dx5, dy5, dx6, dy6);
+            break;
+
+         case 0x24: // hflex1
+            if (sp < 9) return STBTT__CSERR("hflex1 stack");
+            dx1 = s[0];
+            dy1 = s[1];
+            dx2 = s[2];
+            dy2 = s[3];
+            dx3 = s[4];
+            dx4 = s[5];
+            dx5 = s[6];
+            dy5 = s[7];
+            dx6 = s[8];
+            stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx1, dy1, dx2, dy2, dx3, 0);
+            stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx4, 0, dx5, dy5, dx6, -(dy1+dy2+dy5));
+            break;
+
+         case 0x25: // flex1
+            if (sp < 11) return STBTT__CSERR("flex1 stack");
+            dx1 = s[0];
+            dy1 = s[1];
+            dx2 = s[2];
+            dy2 = s[3];
+            dx3 = s[4];
+            dy3 = s[5];
+            dx4 = s[6];
+            dy4 = s[7];
+            dx5 = s[8];
+            dy5 = s[9];
+            dx6 = dy6 = s[10];
+            dx = dx1+dx2+dx3+dx4+dx5;
+            dy = dy1+dy2+dy3+dy4+dy5;
+            if (STBTT_fabs(dx) > STBTT_fabs(dy))
+               dy6 = -dy;
+            else
+               dx6 = -dx;
+            stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx1, dy1, dx2, dy2, dx3, dy3);
+            stbtt__csctx_rccurve_to(c, dx4, dy4, dx5, dy5, dx6, dy6);
+            break;
+
+         default:
+            return STBTT__CSERR("unimplemented");
+         }
+      } break;
+
+      default:
+         if (b0 != 255 && b0 != 28 && b0 < 32)
+            return STBTT__CSERR("reserved operator");
+
+         // push immediate
+         if (b0 == 255) {
+            f = (float)(stbtt_int32)stbtt__buf_get32(&b) / 0x10000;
+         } else {
+            stbtt__buf_skip(&b, -1);
+            f = (float)(stbtt_int16)stbtt__cff_int(&b);
+         }
+         if (sp >= 48) return STBTT__CSERR("push stack overflow");
+         s[sp++] = f;
+         clear_stack = 0;
+         break;
+      }
+      if (clear_stack) sp = 0;
+   }
+   return STBTT__CSERR("no endchar");
+
+#undef STBTT__CSERR
+}
+
+static int stbtt__GetGlyphShapeT2(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, stbtt_vertex **pvertices)
+{
+   // runs the charstring twice, once to count and once to output (to avoid realloc)
+   stbtt__csctx count_ctx = STBTT__CSCTX_INIT(1);
+   stbtt__csctx output_ctx = STBTT__CSCTX_INIT(0);
+   if (stbtt__run_charstring(info, glyph_index, &count_ctx)) {
+      *pvertices = (stbtt_vertex*)STBTT_malloc(count_ctx.num_vertices*sizeof(stbtt_vertex), info->userdata);
+      output_ctx.pvertices = *pvertices;
+      if (stbtt__run_charstring(info, glyph_index, &output_ctx)) {
+         STBTT_assert(output_ctx.num_vertices == count_ctx.num_vertices);
+         return output_ctx.num_vertices;
+      }
+   }
+   *pvertices = NULL;
+   return 0;
+}
+
+static int stbtt__GetGlyphInfoT2(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1)
+{
+   stbtt__csctx c = STBTT__CSCTX_INIT(1);
+   int r = stbtt__run_charstring(info, glyph_index, &c);
+   if (x0)  *x0 = r ? c.min_x : 0;
+   if (y0)  *y0 = r ? c.min_y : 0;
+   if (x1)  *x1 = r ? c.max_x : 0;
+   if (y1)  *y1 = r ? c.max_y : 0;
+   return r ? c.num_vertices : 0;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetGlyphShape(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, stbtt_vertex **pvertices)
+{
+   if (!info->cff.size)
+      return stbtt__GetGlyphShapeTT(info, glyph_index, pvertices);
+   else
+      return stbtt__GetGlyphShapeT2(info, glyph_index, pvertices);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetGlyphHMetrics(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph_index, int *advanceWidth, int *leftSideBearing)
+{
+   stbtt_uint16 numOfLongHorMetrics = ttUSHORT(info->data+info->hhea + 34);
+   if (glyph_index < numOfLongHorMetrics) {
+      if (advanceWidth)     *advanceWidth    = ttSHORT(info->data + info->hmtx + 4*glyph_index);
+      if (leftSideBearing)  *leftSideBearing = ttSHORT(info->data + info->hmtx + 4*glyph_index + 2);
+   } else {
+      if (advanceWidth)     *advanceWidth    = ttSHORT(info->data + info->hmtx + 4*(numOfLongHorMetrics-1));
+      if (leftSideBearing)  *leftSideBearing = ttSHORT(info->data + info->hmtx + 4*numOfLongHorMetrics + 2*(glyph_index - numOfLongHorMetrics));
+   }
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int  stbtt_GetKerningTableLength(const stbtt_fontinfo *info)
+{
+   stbtt_uint8 *data = info->data + info->kern;
+
+   // we only look at the first table. it must be 'horizontal' and format 0.
+   if (!info->kern)
+      return 0;
+   if (ttUSHORT(data+2) < 1) // number of tables, need at least 1
+      return 0;
+   if (ttUSHORT(data+8) != 1) // horizontal flag must be set in format
+      return 0;
+
+   return ttUSHORT(data+10);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetKerningTable(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_kerningentry* table, int table_length)
+{
+   stbtt_uint8 *data = info->data + info->kern;
+   int k, length;
+
+   // we only look at the first table. it must be 'horizontal' and format 0.
+   if (!info->kern)
+      return 0;
+   if (ttUSHORT(data+2) < 1) // number of tables, need at least 1
+      return 0;
+   if (ttUSHORT(data+8) != 1) // horizontal flag must be set in format
+      return 0;
+
+   length = ttUSHORT(data+10);
+   if (table_length < length)
+      length = table_length;
+
+   for (k = 0; k < length; k++)
+   {
+      table[k].glyph1 = ttUSHORT(data+18+(k*6));
+      table[k].glyph2 = ttUSHORT(data+20+(k*6));
+      table[k].advance = ttSHORT(data+22+(k*6));
+   }
+
+   return length;
+}
+
+static int stbtt__GetGlyphKernInfoAdvance(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph1, int glyph2)
+{
+   stbtt_uint8 *data = info->data + info->kern;
+   stbtt_uint32 needle, straw;
+   int l, r, m;
+
+   // we only look at the first table. it must be 'horizontal' and format 0.
+   if (!info->kern)
+      return 0;
+   if (ttUSHORT(data+2) < 1) // number of tables, need at least 1
+      return 0;
+   if (ttUSHORT(data+8) != 1) // horizontal flag must be set in format
+      return 0;
+
+   l = 0;
+   r = ttUSHORT(data+10) - 1;
+   needle = glyph1 << 16 | glyph2;
+   while (l <= r) {
+      m = (l + r) >> 1;
+      straw = ttULONG(data+18+(m*6)); // note: unaligned read
+      if (needle < straw)
+         r = m - 1;
+      else if (needle > straw)
+         l = m + 1;
+      else
+         return ttSHORT(data+22+(m*6));
+   }
+   return 0;
+}
+
+static stbtt_int32 stbtt__GetCoverageIndex(stbtt_uint8 *coverageTable, int glyph)
+{
+   stbtt_uint16 coverageFormat = ttUSHORT(coverageTable);
+   switch (coverageFormat) {
+      case 1: {
+         stbtt_uint16 glyphCount = ttUSHORT(coverageTable + 2);
+
+         // Binary search.
+         stbtt_int32 l=0, r=glyphCount-1, m;
+         int straw, needle=glyph;
+         while (l <= r) {
+            stbtt_uint8 *glyphArray = coverageTable + 4;
+            stbtt_uint16 glyphID;
+            m = (l + r) >> 1;
+            glyphID = ttUSHORT(glyphArray + 2 * m);
+            straw = glyphID;
+            if (needle < straw)
+               r = m - 1;
+            else if (needle > straw)
+               l = m + 1;
+            else {
+               return m;
+            }
+         }
+         break;
+      }
+
+      case 2: {
+         stbtt_uint16 rangeCount = ttUSHORT(coverageTable + 2);
+         stbtt_uint8 *rangeArray = coverageTable + 4;
+
+         // Binary search.
+         stbtt_int32 l=0, r=rangeCount-1, m;
+         int strawStart, strawEnd, needle=glyph;
+         while (l <= r) {
+            stbtt_uint8 *rangeRecord;
+            m = (l + r) >> 1;
+            rangeRecord = rangeArray + 6 * m;
+            strawStart = ttUSHORT(rangeRecord);
+            strawEnd = ttUSHORT(rangeRecord + 2);
+            if (needle < strawStart)
+               r = m - 1;
+            else if (needle > strawEnd)
+               l = m + 1;
+            else {
+               stbtt_uint16 startCoverageIndex = ttUSHORT(rangeRecord + 4);
+               return startCoverageIndex + glyph - strawStart;
+            }
+         }
+         break;
+      }
+
+      default: return -1; // unsupported
+   }
+
+   return -1;
+}
+
+static stbtt_int32  stbtt__GetGlyphClass(stbtt_uint8 *classDefTable, int glyph)
+{
+   stbtt_uint16 classDefFormat = ttUSHORT(classDefTable);
+   switch (classDefFormat)
+   {
+      case 1: {
+         stbtt_uint16 startGlyphID = ttUSHORT(classDefTable + 2);
+         stbtt_uint16 glyphCount = ttUSHORT(classDefTable + 4);
+         stbtt_uint8 *classDef1ValueArray = classDefTable + 6;
+
+         if (glyph >= startGlyphID && glyph < startGlyphID + glyphCount)
+            return (stbtt_int32)ttUSHORT(classDef1ValueArray + 2 * (glyph - startGlyphID));
+         break;
+      }
+
+      case 2: {
+         stbtt_uint16 classRangeCount = ttUSHORT(classDefTable + 2);
+         stbtt_uint8 *classRangeRecords = classDefTable + 4;
+
+         // Binary search.
+         stbtt_int32 l=0, r=classRangeCount-1, m;
+         int strawStart, strawEnd, needle=glyph;
+         while (l <= r) {
+            stbtt_uint8 *classRangeRecord;
+            m = (l + r) >> 1;
+            classRangeRecord = classRangeRecords + 6 * m;
+            strawStart = ttUSHORT(classRangeRecord);
+            strawEnd = ttUSHORT(classRangeRecord + 2);
+            if (needle < strawStart)
+               r = m - 1;
+            else if (needle > strawEnd)
+               l = m + 1;
+            else
+               return (stbtt_int32)ttUSHORT(classRangeRecord + 4);
+         }
+         break;
+      }
+
+      default:
+         return -1; // Unsupported definition type, return an error.
+   }
+
+   // "All glyphs not assigned to a class fall into class 0". (OpenType spec)
+   return 0;
+}
+
+// Define to STBTT_assert(x) if you want to break on unimplemented formats.
+#define STBTT_GPOS_TODO_assert(x)
+
+static stbtt_int32 stbtt__GetGlyphGPOSInfoAdvance(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int glyph1, int glyph2)
+{
+   stbtt_uint16 lookupListOffset;
+   stbtt_uint8 *lookupList;
+   stbtt_uint16 lookupCount;
+   stbtt_uint8 *data;
+   stbtt_int32 i, sti;
+
+   if (!info->gpos) return 0;
+
+   data = info->data + info->gpos;
+
+   if (ttUSHORT(data+0) != 1) return 0; // Major version 1
+   if (ttUSHORT(data+2) != 0) return 0; // Minor version 0
+
+   lookupListOffset = ttUSHORT(data+8);
+   lookupList = data + lookupListOffset;
+   lookupCount = ttUSHORT(lookupList);
+
+   for (i=0; i<lookupCount; ++i) {
+      stbtt_uint16 lookupOffset = ttUSHORT(lookupList + 2 + 2 * i);
+      stbtt_uint8 *lookupTable = lookupList + lookupOffset;
+
+      stbtt_uint16 lookupType = ttUSHORT(lookupTable);
+      stbtt_uint16 subTableCount = ttUSHORT(lookupTable + 4);
+      stbtt_uint8 *subTableOffsets = lookupTable + 6;
+      if (lookupType != 2) // Pair Adjustment Positioning Subtable
+         continue;
+
+      for (sti=0; sti<subTableCount; sti++) {
+         stbtt_uint16 subtableOffset = ttUSHORT(subTableOffsets + 2 * sti);
+         stbtt_uint8 *table = lookupTable + subtableOffset;
+         stbtt_uint16 posFormat = ttUSHORT(table);
+         stbtt_uint16 coverageOffset = ttUSHORT(table + 2);
+         stbtt_int32 coverageIndex = stbtt__GetCoverageIndex(table + coverageOffset, glyph1);
+         if (coverageIndex == -1) continue;
+
+         switch (posFormat) {
+            case 1: {
+               stbtt_int32 l, r, m;
+               int straw, needle;
+               stbtt_uint16 valueFormat1 = ttUSHORT(table + 4);
+               stbtt_uint16 valueFormat2 = ttUSHORT(table + 6);
+               if (valueFormat1 == 4 && valueFormat2 == 0) { // Support more formats?
+                  stbtt_int32 valueRecordPairSizeInBytes = 2;
+                  stbtt_uint16 pairSetCount = ttUSHORT(table + 8);
+                  stbtt_uint16 pairPosOffset = ttUSHORT(table + 10 + 2 * coverageIndex);
+                  stbtt_uint8 *pairValueTable = table + pairPosOffset;
+                  stbtt_uint16 pairValueCount = ttUSHORT(pairValueTable);
+                  stbtt_uint8 *pairValueArray = pairValueTable + 2;
+
+                  if (coverageIndex >= pairSetCount) return 0;
+
+                  needle=glyph2;
+                  r=pairValueCount-1;
+                  l=0;
+
+                  // Binary search.
+                  while (l <= r) {
+                     stbtt_uint16 secondGlyph;
+                     stbtt_uint8 *pairValue;
+                     m = (l + r) >> 1;
+                     pairValue = pairValueArray + (2 + valueRecordPairSizeInBytes) * m;
+                     secondGlyph = ttUSHORT(pairValue);
+                     straw = secondGlyph;
+                     if (needle < straw)
+                        r = m - 1;
+                     else if (needle > straw)
+                        l = m + 1;
+                     else {
+                        stbtt_int16 xAdvance = ttSHORT(pairValue + 2);
+                        return xAdvance;
+                     }
+                  }
+               } else
+                  return 0;
+               break;
+            }
+
+            case 2: {
+               stbtt_uint16 valueFormat1 = ttUSHORT(table + 4);
+               stbtt_uint16 valueFormat2 = ttUSHORT(table + 6);
+               if (valueFormat1 == 4 && valueFormat2 == 0) { // Support more formats?
+                  stbtt_uint16 classDef1Offset = ttUSHORT(table + 8);
+                  stbtt_uint16 classDef2Offset = ttUSHORT(table + 10);
+                  int glyph1class = stbtt__GetGlyphClass(table + classDef1Offset, glyph1);
+                  int glyph2class = stbtt__GetGlyphClass(table + classDef2Offset, glyph2);
+
+                  stbtt_uint16 class1Count = ttUSHORT(table + 12);
+                  stbtt_uint16 class2Count = ttUSHORT(table + 14);
+                  stbtt_uint8 *class1Records, *class2Records;
+                  stbtt_int16 xAdvance;
+
+                  if (glyph1class < 0 || glyph1class >= class1Count) return 0; // malformed
+                  if (glyph2class < 0 || glyph2class >= class2Count) return 0; // malformed
+
+                  class1Records = table + 16;
+                  class2Records = class1Records + 2 * (glyph1class * class2Count);
+                  xAdvance = ttSHORT(class2Records + 2 * glyph2class);
+                  return xAdvance;
+               } else
+                  return 0;
+               break;
+            }
+
+            default:
+               return 0; // Unsupported position format
+         }
+      }
+   }
+
+   return 0;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int  stbtt_GetGlyphKernAdvance(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int g1, int g2)
+{
+   int xAdvance = 0;
+
+   if (info->gpos)
+      xAdvance += stbtt__GetGlyphGPOSInfoAdvance(info, g1, g2);
+   else if (info->kern)
+      xAdvance += stbtt__GetGlyphKernInfoAdvance(info, g1, g2);
+
+   return xAdvance;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int  stbtt_GetCodepointKernAdvance(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int ch1, int ch2)
+{
+   if (!info->kern && !info->gpos) // if no kerning table, don't waste time looking up both codepoint->glyphs
+      return 0;
+   return stbtt_GetGlyphKernAdvance(info, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,ch1), stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,ch2));
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetCodepointHMetrics(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int codepoint, int *advanceWidth, int *leftSideBearing)
+{
+   stbtt_GetGlyphHMetrics(info, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,codepoint), advanceWidth, leftSideBearing);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetFontVMetrics(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int *ascent, int *descent, int *lineGap)
+{
+   if (ascent ) *ascent  = ttSHORT(info->data+info->hhea + 4);
+   if (descent) *descent = ttSHORT(info->data+info->hhea + 6);
+   if (lineGap) *lineGap = ttSHORT(info->data+info->hhea + 8);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int  stbtt_GetFontVMetricsOS2(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int *typoAscent, int *typoDescent, int *typoLineGap)
+{
+   int tab = stbtt__find_table(info->data, info->fontstart, "OS/2");
+   if (!tab)
+      return 0;
+   if (typoAscent ) *typoAscent  = ttSHORT(info->data+tab + 68);
+   if (typoDescent) *typoDescent = ttSHORT(info->data+tab + 70);
+   if (typoLineGap) *typoLineGap = ttSHORT(info->data+tab + 72);
+   return 1;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetFontBoundingBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int *x0, int *y0, int *x1, int *y1)
+{
+   *x0 = ttSHORT(info->data + info->head + 36);
+   *y0 = ttSHORT(info->data + info->head + 38);
+   *x1 = ttSHORT(info->data + info->head + 40);
+   *y1 = ttSHORT(info->data + info->head + 42);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF float stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float height)
+{
+   int fheight = ttSHORT(info->data + info->hhea + 4) - ttSHORT(info->data + info->hhea + 6);
+   return (float) height / fheight;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF float stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float pixels)
+{
+   int unitsPerEm = ttUSHORT(info->data + info->head + 18);
+   return pixels / unitsPerEm;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_FreeShape(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_vertex *v)
+{
+   STBTT_free(v, info->userdata);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF stbtt_uint8 *stbtt_FindSVGDoc(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int gl)
+{
+   int i;
+   stbtt_uint8 *data = info->data;
+   stbtt_uint8 *svg_doc_list = data + stbtt__get_svg((stbtt_fontinfo *) info);
+
+   int numEntries = ttUSHORT(svg_doc_list);
+   stbtt_uint8 *svg_docs = svg_doc_list + 2;
+
+   for(i=0; i<numEntries; i++) {
+      stbtt_uint8 *svg_doc = svg_docs + (12 * i);
+      if ((gl >= ttUSHORT(svg_doc)) && (gl <= ttUSHORT(svg_doc + 2)))
+         return svg_doc;
+   }
+   return 0;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetGlyphSVG(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int gl, const char **svg)
+{
+   stbtt_uint8 *data = info->data;
+   stbtt_uint8 *svg_doc;
+
+   if (info->svg == 0)
+      return 0;
+
+   svg_doc = stbtt_FindSVGDoc(info, gl);
+   if (svg_doc != NULL) {
+      *svg = (char *) data + info->svg + ttULONG(svg_doc + 4);
+      return ttULONG(svg_doc + 8);
+   } else {
+      return 0;
+   }
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetCodepointSVG(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, int unicode_codepoint, const char **svg)
+{
+   return stbtt_GetGlyphSVG(info, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info, unicode_codepoint), svg);
+}
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// antialiasing software rasterizer
+//
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int glyph, float scale_x, float scale_y,float shift_x, float shift_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1)
+{
+   int x0=0,y0=0,x1,y1; // =0 suppresses compiler warning
+   if (!stbtt_GetGlyphBox(font, glyph, &x0,&y0,&x1,&y1)) {
+      // e.g. space character
+      if (ix0) *ix0 = 0;
+      if (iy0) *iy0 = 0;
+      if (ix1) *ix1 = 0;
+      if (iy1) *iy1 = 0;
+   } else {
+      // move to integral bboxes (treating pixels as little squares, what pixels get touched)?
+      if (ix0) *ix0 = STBTT_ifloor( x0 * scale_x + shift_x);
+      if (iy0) *iy0 = STBTT_ifloor(-y1 * scale_y + shift_y);
+      if (ix1) *ix1 = STBTT_iceil ( x1 * scale_x + shift_x);
+      if (iy1) *iy1 = STBTT_iceil (-y0 * scale_y + shift_y);
+   }
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int glyph, float scale_x, float scale_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1)
+{
+   stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(font, glyph, scale_x, scale_y,0.0f,0.0f, ix0, iy0, ix1, iy1);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBoxSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int codepoint, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1)
+{
+   stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(font, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(font,codepoint), scale_x, scale_y,shift_x,shift_y, ix0,iy0,ix1,iy1);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBox(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int codepoint, float scale_x, float scale_y, int *ix0, int *iy0, int *ix1, int *iy1)
+{
+   stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapBoxSubpixel(font, codepoint, scale_x, scale_y,0.0f,0.0f, ix0,iy0,ix1,iy1);
+}
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+//  Rasterizer
+
+typedef struct stbtt__hheap_chunk
+{
+   struct stbtt__hheap_chunk *next;
+} stbtt__hheap_chunk;
+
+typedef struct stbtt__hheap
+{
+   struct stbtt__hheap_chunk *head;
+   void   *first_free;
+   int    num_remaining_in_head_chunk;
+} stbtt__hheap;
+
+static void *stbtt__hheap_alloc(stbtt__hheap *hh, size_t size, void *userdata)
+{
+   if (hh->first_free) {
+      void *p = hh->first_free;
+      hh->first_free = * (void **) p;
+      return p;
+   } else {
+      if (hh->num_remaining_in_head_chunk == 0) {
+         int count = (size < 32 ? 2000 : size < 128 ? 800 : 100);
+         stbtt__hheap_chunk *c = (stbtt__hheap_chunk *) STBTT_malloc(sizeof(stbtt__hheap_chunk) + size * count, userdata);
+         if (c == NULL)
+            return NULL;
+         c->next = hh->head;
+         hh->head = c;
+         hh->num_remaining_in_head_chunk = count;
+      }
+      --hh->num_remaining_in_head_chunk;
+      return (char *) (hh->head) + sizeof(stbtt__hheap_chunk) + size * hh->num_remaining_in_head_chunk;
+   }
+}
+
+static void stbtt__hheap_free(stbtt__hheap *hh, void *p)
+{
+   *(void **) p = hh->first_free;
+   hh->first_free = p;
+}
+
+static void stbtt__hheap_cleanup(stbtt__hheap *hh, void *userdata)
+{
+   stbtt__hheap_chunk *c = hh->head;
+   while (c) {
+      stbtt__hheap_chunk *n = c->next;
+      STBTT_free(c, userdata);
+      c = n;
+   }
+}
+
+typedef struct stbtt__edge {
+   float x0,y0, x1,y1;
+   int invert;
+} stbtt__edge;
+
+
+typedef struct stbtt__active_edge
+{
+   struct stbtt__active_edge *next;
+   #if STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION==1
+   int x,dx;
+   float ey;
+   int direction;
+   #elif STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION==2
+   float fx,fdx,fdy;
+   float direction;
+   float sy;
+   float ey;
+   #else
+   #error "Unrecognized value of STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION"
+   #endif
+} stbtt__active_edge;
+
+#if STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION == 1
+#define STBTT_FIXSHIFT   10
+#define STBTT_FIX        (1 << STBTT_FIXSHIFT)
+#define STBTT_FIXMASK    (STBTT_FIX-1)
+
+static stbtt__active_edge *stbtt__new_active(stbtt__hheap *hh, stbtt__edge *e, int off_x, float start_point, void *userdata)
+{
+   stbtt__active_edge *z = (stbtt__active_edge *) stbtt__hheap_alloc(hh, sizeof(*z), userdata);
+   float dxdy = (e->x1 - e->x0) / (e->y1 - e->y0);
+   STBTT_assert(z != NULL);
+   if (!z) return z;
+
+   // round dx down to avoid overshooting
+   if (dxdy < 0)
+      z->dx = -STBTT_ifloor(STBTT_FIX * -dxdy);
+   else
+      z->dx = STBTT_ifloor(STBTT_FIX * dxdy);
+
+   z->x = STBTT_ifloor(STBTT_FIX * e->x0 + z->dx * (start_point - e->y0)); // use z->dx so when we offset later it's by the same amount
+   z->x -= off_x * STBTT_FIX;
+
+   z->ey = e->y1;
+   z->next = 0;
+   z->direction = e->invert ? 1 : -1;
+   return z;
+}
+#elif STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION == 2
+static stbtt__active_edge *stbtt__new_active(stbtt__hheap *hh, stbtt__edge *e, int off_x, float start_point, void *userdata)
+{
+   stbtt__active_edge *z = (stbtt__active_edge *) stbtt__hheap_alloc(hh, sizeof(*z), userdata);
+   float dxdy = (e->x1 - e->x0) / (e->y1 - e->y0);
+   STBTT_assert(z != NULL);
+   //STBTT_assert(e->y0 <= start_point);
+   if (!z) return z;
+   z->fdx = dxdy;
+   z->fdy = dxdy != 0.0f ? (1.0f/dxdy) : 0.0f;
+   z->fx = e->x0 + dxdy * (start_point - e->y0);
+   z->fx -= off_x;
+   z->direction = e->invert ? 1.0f : -1.0f;
+   z->sy = e->y0;
+   z->ey = e->y1;
+   z->next = 0;
+   return z;
+}
+#else
+#error "Unrecognized value of STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION"
+#endif
+
+#if STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION == 1
+// note: this routine clips fills that extend off the edges... ideally this
+// wouldn't happen, but it could happen if the truetype glyph bounding boxes
+// are wrong, or if the user supplies a too-small bitmap
+static void stbtt__fill_active_edges(unsigned char *scanline, int len, stbtt__active_edge *e, int max_weight)
+{
+   // non-zero winding fill
+   int x0=0, w=0;
+
+   while (e) {
+      if (w == 0) {
+         // if we're currently at zero, we need to record the edge start point
+         x0 = e->x; w += e->direction;
+      } else {
+         int x1 = e->x; w += e->direction;
+         // if we went to zero, we need to draw
+         if (w == 0) {
+            int i = x0 >> STBTT_FIXSHIFT;
+            int j = x1 >> STBTT_FIXSHIFT;
+
+            if (i < len && j >= 0) {
+               if (i == j) {
+                  // x0,x1 are the same pixel, so compute combined coverage
+                  scanline[i] = scanline[i] + (stbtt_uint8) ((x1 - x0) * max_weight >> STBTT_FIXSHIFT);
+               } else {
+                  if (i >= 0) // add antialiasing for x0
+                     scanline[i] = scanline[i] + (stbtt_uint8) (((STBTT_FIX - (x0 & STBTT_FIXMASK)) * max_weight) >> STBTT_FIXSHIFT);
+                  else
+                     i = -1; // clip
+
+                  if (j < len) // add antialiasing for x1
+                     scanline[j] = scanline[j] + (stbtt_uint8) (((x1 & STBTT_FIXMASK) * max_weight) >> STBTT_FIXSHIFT);
+                  else
+                     j = len; // clip
+
+                  for (++i; i < j; ++i) // fill pixels between x0 and x1
+                     scanline[i] = scanline[i] + (stbtt_uint8) max_weight;
+               }
+            }
+         }
+      }
+
+      e = e->next;
+   }
+}
+
+static void stbtt__rasterize_sorted_edges(stbtt__bitmap *result, stbtt__edge *e, int n, int vsubsample, int off_x, int off_y, void *userdata)
+{
+   stbtt__hheap hh = { 0, 0, 0 };
+   stbtt__active_edge *active = NULL;
+   int y,j=0;
+   int max_weight = (255 / vsubsample);  // weight per vertical scanline
+   int s; // vertical subsample index
+   unsigned char scanline_data[512], *scanline;
+
+   if (result->w > 512)
+      scanline = (unsigned char *) STBTT_malloc(result->w, userdata);
+   else
+      scanline = scanline_data;
+
+   y = off_y * vsubsample;
+   e[n].y0 = (off_y + result->h) * (float) vsubsample + 1;
+
+   while (j < result->h) {
+      STBTT_memset(scanline, 0, result->w);
+      for (s=0; s < vsubsample; ++s) {
+         // find center of pixel for this scanline
+         float scan_y = y + 0.5f;
+         stbtt__active_edge **step = &active;
+
+         // update all active edges;
+         // remove all active edges that terminate before the center of this scanline
+         while (*step) {
+            stbtt__active_edge * z = *step;
+            if (z->ey <= scan_y) {
+               *step = z->next; // delete from list
+               STBTT_assert(z->direction);
+               z->direction = 0;
+               stbtt__hheap_free(&hh, z);
+            } else {
+               z->x += z->dx; // advance to position for current scanline
+               step = &((*step)->next); // advance through list
+            }
+         }
+
+         // resort the list if needed
+         for(;;) {
+            int changed=0;
+            step = &active;
+            while (*step && (*step)->next) {
+               if ((*step)->x > (*step)->next->x) {
+                  stbtt__active_edge *t = *step;
+                  stbtt__active_edge *q = t->next;
+
+                  t->next = q->next;
+                  q->next = t;
+                  *step = q;
+                  changed = 1;
+               }
+               step = &(*step)->next;
+            }
+            if (!changed) break;
+         }
+
+         // insert all edges that start before the center of this scanline -- omit ones that also end on this scanline
+         while (e->y0 <= scan_y) {
+            if (e->y1 > scan_y) {
+               stbtt__active_edge *z = stbtt__new_active(&hh, e, off_x, scan_y, userdata);
+               if (z != NULL) {
+                  // find insertion point
+                  if (active == NULL)
+                     active = z;
+                  else if (z->x < active->x) {
+                     // insert at front
+                     z->next = active;
+                     active = z;
+                  } else {
+                     // find thing to insert AFTER
+                     stbtt__active_edge *p = active;
+                     while (p->next && p->next->x < z->x)
+                        p = p->next;
+                     // at this point, p->next->x is NOT < z->x
+                     z->next = p->next;
+                     p->next = z;
+                  }
+               }
+            }
+            ++e;
+         }
+
+         // now process all active edges in XOR fashion
+         if (active)
+            stbtt__fill_active_edges(scanline, result->w, active, max_weight);
+
+         ++y;
+      }
+      STBTT_memcpy(result->pixels + j * result->stride, scanline, result->w);
+      ++j;
+   }
+
+   stbtt__hheap_cleanup(&hh, userdata);
+
+   if (scanline != scanline_data)
+      STBTT_free(scanline, userdata);
+}
+
+#elif STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION == 2
+
+// the edge passed in here does not cross the vertical line at x or the vertical line at x+1
+// (i.e. it has already been clipped to those)
+static void stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(float *scanline, int x, stbtt__active_edge *e, float x0, float y0, float x1, float y1)
+{
+   if (y0 == y1) return;
+   STBTT_assert(y0 < y1);
+   STBTT_assert(e->sy <= e->ey);
+   if (y0 > e->ey) return;
+   if (y1 < e->sy) return;
+   if (y0 < e->sy) {
+      x0 += (x1-x0) * (e->sy - y0) / (y1-y0);
+      y0 = e->sy;
+   }
+   if (y1 > e->ey) {
+      x1 += (x1-x0) * (e->ey - y1) / (y1-y0);
+      y1 = e->ey;
+   }
+
+   if (x0 == x)
+      STBTT_assert(x1 <= x+1);
+   else if (x0 == x+1)
+      STBTT_assert(x1 >= x);
+   else if (x0 <= x)
+      STBTT_assert(x1 <= x);
+   else if (x0 >= x+1)
+      STBTT_assert(x1 >= x+1);
+   else
+      STBTT_assert(x1 >= x && x1 <= x+1);
+
+   if (x0 <= x && x1 <= x)
+      scanline[x] += e->direction * (y1-y0);
+   else if (x0 >= x+1 && x1 >= x+1)
+      ;
+   else {
+      STBTT_assert(x0 >= x && x0 <= x+1 && x1 >= x && x1 <= x+1);
+      scanline[x] += e->direction * (y1-y0) * (1-((x0-x)+(x1-x))/2); // coverage = 1 - average x position
+   }
+}
+
+static float stbtt__sized_trapezoid_area(float height, float top_width, float bottom_width)
+{
+   STBTT_assert(top_width >= 0);
+   STBTT_assert(bottom_width >= 0);
+   return (top_width + bottom_width) / 2.0f * height;
+}
+
+static float stbtt__position_trapezoid_area(float height, float tx0, float tx1, float bx0, float bx1)
+{
+   return stbtt__sized_trapezoid_area(height, tx1 - tx0, bx1 - bx0);
+}
+
+static float stbtt__sized_triangle_area(float height, float width)
+{
+   return height * width / 2;
+}
+
+static void stbtt__fill_active_edges_new(float *scanline, float *scanline_fill, int len, stbtt__active_edge *e, float y_top)
+{
+   float y_bottom = y_top+1;
+
+   while (e) {
+      // brute force every pixel
+
+      // compute intersection points with top & bottom
+      STBTT_assert(e->ey >= y_top);
+
+      if (e->fdx == 0) {
+         float x0 = e->fx;
+         if (x0 < len) {
+            if (x0 >= 0) {
+               stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,(int) x0,e, x0,y_top, x0,y_bottom);
+               stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline_fill-1,(int) x0+1,e, x0,y_top, x0,y_bottom);
+            } else {
+               stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline_fill-1,0,e, x0,y_top, x0,y_bottom);
+            }
+         }
+      } else {
+         float x0 = e->fx;
+         float dx = e->fdx;
+         float xb = x0 + dx;
+         float x_top, x_bottom;
+         float sy0,sy1;
+         float dy = e->fdy;
+         STBTT_assert(e->sy <= y_bottom && e->ey >= y_top);
+
+         // compute endpoints of line segment clipped to this scanline (if the
+         // line segment starts on this scanline. x0 is the intersection of the
+         // line with y_top, but that may be off the line segment.
+         if (e->sy > y_top) {
+            x_top = x0 + dx * (e->sy - y_top);
+            sy0 = e->sy;
+         } else {
+            x_top = x0;
+            sy0 = y_top;
+         }
+         if (e->ey < y_bottom) {
+            x_bottom = x0 + dx * (e->ey - y_top);
+            sy1 = e->ey;
+         } else {
+            x_bottom = xb;
+            sy1 = y_bottom;
+         }
+
+         if (x_top >= 0 && x_bottom >= 0 && x_top < len && x_bottom < len) {
+            // from here on, we don't have to range check x values
+
+            if ((int) x_top == (int) x_bottom) {
+               float height;
+               // simple case, only spans one pixel
+               int x = (int) x_top;
+               height = (sy1 - sy0) * e->direction;
+               STBTT_assert(x >= 0 && x < len);
+               scanline[x]      += stbtt__position_trapezoid_area(height, x_top, x+1.0f, x_bottom, x+1.0f);
+               scanline_fill[x] += height; // everything right of this pixel is filled
+            } else {
+               int x,x1,x2;
+               float y_crossing, y_final, step, sign, area;
+               // covers 2+ pixels
+               if (x_top > x_bottom) {
+                  // flip scanline vertically; signed area is the same
+                  float t;
+                  sy0 = y_bottom - (sy0 - y_top);
+                  sy1 = y_bottom - (sy1 - y_top);
+                  t = sy0, sy0 = sy1, sy1 = t;
+                  t = x_bottom, x_bottom = x_top, x_top = t;
+                  dx = -dx;
+                  dy = -dy;
+                  t = x0, x0 = xb, xb = t;
+               }
+               STBTT_assert(dy >= 0);
+               STBTT_assert(dx >= 0);
+
+               x1 = (int) x_top;
+               x2 = (int) x_bottom;
+               // compute intersection with y axis at x1+1
+               y_crossing = y_top + dy * (x1+1 - x0);
+
+               // compute intersection with y axis at x2
+               y_final = y_top + dy * (x2 - x0);
+
+               //           x1    x_top                            x2    x_bottom
+               //     y_top  +------|-----+------------+------------+--------|---+------------+
+               //            |            |            |            |            |            |
+               //            |            |            |            |            |            |
+               //       sy0  |      Txxxxx|............|............|............|............|
+               // y_crossing |            *xxxxx.......|............|............|............|
+               //            |            |     xxxxx..|............|............|............|
+               //            |            |     /-   xx*xxxx........|............|............|
+               //            |            | dy <       |    xxxxxx..|............|............|
+               //   y_final  |            |     \-     |          xx*xxx.........|............|
+               //       sy1  |            |            |            |   xxxxxB...|............|
+               //            |            |            |            |            |            |
+               //            |            |            |            |            |            |
+               //  y_bottom  +------------+------------+------------+------------+------------+
+               //
+               // goal is to measure the area covered by '.' in each pixel
+
+               // if x2 is right at the right edge of x1, y_crossing can blow up, github #1057
+               // @TODO: maybe test against sy1 rather than y_bottom?
+               if (y_crossing > y_bottom)
+                  y_crossing = y_bottom;
+
+               sign = e->direction;
+
+               // area of the rectangle covered from sy0..y_crossing
+               area = sign * (y_crossing-sy0);
+
+               // area of the triangle (x_top,sy0), (x1+1,sy0), (x1+1,y_crossing)
+               scanline[x1] += stbtt__sized_triangle_area(area, x1+1 - x_top);
+
+               // check if final y_crossing is blown up; no test case for this
+               if (y_final > y_bottom) {
+                  int denom = (x2 - (x1+1));
+                  y_final = y_bottom;
+                  if (denom != 0) { // [DEAR IMGUI] Avoid div by zero (https://github.com/nothings/stb/issues/1316)
+                     dy = (y_final - y_crossing ) / denom; // if denom=0, y_final = y_crossing, so y_final <= y_bottom
+                  }
+               }
+
+               // in second pixel, area covered by line segment found in first pixel
+               // is always a rectangle 1 wide * the height of that line segment; this
+               // is exactly what the variable 'area' stores. it also gets a contribution
+               // from the line segment within it. the THIRD pixel will get the first
+               // pixel's rectangle contribution, the second pixel's rectangle contribution,
+               // and its own contribution. the 'own contribution' is the same in every pixel except
+               // the leftmost and rightmost, a trapezoid that slides down in each pixel.
+               // the second pixel's contribution to the third pixel will be the
+               // rectangle 1 wide times the height change in the second pixel, which is dy.
+
+               step = sign * dy * 1; // dy is dy/dx, change in y for every 1 change in x,
+               // which multiplied by 1-pixel-width is how much pixel area changes for each step in x
+               // so the area advances by 'step' every time
+
+               for (x = x1+1; x < x2; ++x) {
+                  scanline[x] += area + step/2; // area of trapezoid is 1*step/2
+                  area += step;
+               }
+               STBTT_assert(STBTT_fabs(area) <= 1.01f); // accumulated error from area += step unless we round step down
+               STBTT_assert(sy1 > y_final-0.01f);
+
+               // area covered in the last pixel is the rectangle from all the pixels to the left,
+               // plus the trapezoid filled by the line segment in this pixel all the way to the right edge
+               scanline[x2] += area + sign * stbtt__position_trapezoid_area(sy1-y_final, (float) x2, x2+1.0f, x_bottom, x2+1.0f);
+
+               // the rest of the line is filled based on the total height of the line segment in this pixel
+               scanline_fill[x2] += sign * (sy1-sy0);
+            }
+         } else {
+            // if edge goes outside of box we're drawing, we require
+            // clipping logic. since this does not match the intended use
+            // of this library, we use a different, very slow brute
+            // force implementation
+            // note though that this does happen some of the time because
+            // x_top and x_bottom can be extrapolated at the top & bottom of
+            // the shape and actually lie outside the bounding box
+            int x;
+            for (x=0; x < len; ++x) {
+               // cases:
+               //
+               // there can be up to two intersections with the pixel. any intersection
+               // with left or right edges can be handled by splitting into two (or three)
+               // regions. intersections with top & bottom do not necessitate case-wise logic.
+               //
+               // the old way of doing this found the intersections with the left & right edges,
+               // then used some simple logic to produce up to three segments in sorted order
+               // from top-to-bottom. however, this had a problem: if an x edge was epsilon
+               // across the x border, then the corresponding y position might not be distinct
+               // from the other y segment, and it might ignored as an empty segment. to avoid
+               // that, we need to explicitly produce segments based on x positions.
+
+               // rename variables to clearly-defined pairs
+               float y0 = y_top;
+               float x1 = (float) (x);
+               float x2 = (float) (x+1);
+               float x3 = xb;
+               float y3 = y_bottom;
+
+               // x = e->x + e->dx * (y-y_top)
+               // (y-y_top) = (x - e->x) / e->dx
+               // y = (x - e->x) / e->dx + y_top
+               float y1 = (x - x0) / dx + y_top;
+               float y2 = (x+1 - x0) / dx + y_top;
+
+               if (x0 < x1 && x3 > x2) {         // three segments descending down-right
+                  stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x1,y1);
+                  stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x1,y1, x2,y2);
+                  stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x2,y2, x3,y3);
+               } else if (x3 < x1 && x0 > x2) {  // three segments descending down-left
+                  stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x2,y2);
+                  stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x2,y2, x1,y1);
+                  stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x1,y1, x3,y3);
+               } else if (x0 < x1 && x3 > x1) {  // two segments across x, down-right
+                  stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x1,y1);
+                  stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x1,y1, x3,y3);
+               } else if (x3 < x1 && x0 > x1) {  // two segments across x, down-left
+                  stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x1,y1);
+                  stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x1,y1, x3,y3);
+               } else if (x0 < x2 && x3 > x2) {  // two segments across x+1, down-right
+                  stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x2,y2);
+                  stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x2,y2, x3,y3);
+               } else if (x3 < x2 && x0 > x2) {  // two segments across x+1, down-left
+                  stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x2,y2);
+                  stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x2,y2, x3,y3);
+               } else {  // one segment
+                  stbtt__handle_clipped_edge(scanline,x,e, x0,y0, x3,y3);
+               }
+            }
+         }
+      }
+      e = e->next;
+   }
+}
+
+// directly AA rasterize edges w/o supersampling
+static void stbtt__rasterize_sorted_edges(stbtt__bitmap *result, stbtt__edge *e, int n, int vsubsample, int off_x, int off_y, void *userdata)
+{
+   stbtt__hheap hh = { 0, 0, 0 };
+   stbtt__active_edge *active = NULL;
+   int y,j=0, i;
+   float scanline_data[129], *scanline, *scanline2;
+
+   STBTT__NOTUSED(vsubsample);
+
+   if (result->w > 64)
+      scanline = (float *) STBTT_malloc((result->w*2+1) * sizeof(float), userdata);
+   else
+      scanline = scanline_data;
+
+   scanline2 = scanline + result->w;
+
+   y = off_y;
+   e[n].y0 = (float) (off_y + result->h) + 1;
+
+   while (j < result->h) {
+      // find center of pixel for this scanline
+      float scan_y_top    = y + 0.0f;
+      float scan_y_bottom = y + 1.0f;
+      stbtt__active_edge **step = &active;
+
+      STBTT_memset(scanline , 0, result->w*sizeof(scanline[0]));
+      STBTT_memset(scanline2, 0, (result->w+1)*sizeof(scanline[0]));
+
+      // update all active edges;
+      // remove all active edges that terminate before the top of this scanline
+      while (*step) {
+         stbtt__active_edge * z = *step;
+         if (z->ey <= scan_y_top) {
+            *step = z->next; // delete from list
+            STBTT_assert(z->direction);
+            z->direction = 0;
+            stbtt__hheap_free(&hh, z);
+         } else {
+            step = &((*step)->next); // advance through list
+         }
+      }
+
+      // insert all edges that start before the bottom of this scanline
+      while (e->y0 <= scan_y_bottom) {
+         if (e->y0 != e->y1) {
+            stbtt__active_edge *z = stbtt__new_active(&hh, e, off_x, scan_y_top, userdata);
+            if (z != NULL) {
+               if (j == 0 && off_y != 0) {
+                  if (z->ey < scan_y_top) {
+                     // this can happen due to subpixel positioning and some kind of fp rounding error i think
+                     z->ey = scan_y_top;
+                  }
+               }
+               STBTT_assert(z->ey >= scan_y_top); // if we get really unlucky a tiny bit of an edge can be out of bounds
+               // insert at front
+               z->next = active;
+               active = z;
+            }
+         }
+         ++e;
+      }
+
+      // now process all active edges
+      if (active)
+         stbtt__fill_active_edges_new(scanline, scanline2+1, result->w, active, scan_y_top);
+
+      {
+         float sum = 0;
+         for (i=0; i < result->w; ++i) {
+            float k;
+            int m;
+            sum += scanline2[i];
+            k = scanline[i] + sum;
+            k = (float) STBTT_fabs(k)*255 + 0.5f;
+            m = (int) k;
+            if (m > 255) m = 255;
+            result->pixels[j*result->stride + i] = (unsigned char) m;
+         }
+      }
+      // advance all the edges
+      step = &active;
+      while (*step) {
+         stbtt__active_edge *z = *step;
+         z->fx += z->fdx; // advance to position for current scanline
+         step = &((*step)->next); // advance through list
+      }
+
+      ++y;
+      ++j;
+   }
+
+   stbtt__hheap_cleanup(&hh, userdata);
+
+   if (scanline != scanline_data)
+      STBTT_free(scanline, userdata);
+}
+#else
+#error "Unrecognized value of STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION"
+#endif
+
+#define STBTT__COMPARE(a,b)  ((a)->y0 < (b)->y0)
+
+static void stbtt__sort_edges_ins_sort(stbtt__edge *p, int n)
+{
+   int i,j;
+   for (i=1; i < n; ++i) {
+      stbtt__edge t = p[i], *a = &t;
+      j = i;
+      while (j > 0) {
+         stbtt__edge *b = &p[j-1];
+         int c = STBTT__COMPARE(a,b);
+         if (!c) break;
+         p[j] = p[j-1];
+         --j;
+      }
+      if (i != j)
+         p[j] = t;
+   }
+}
+
+static void stbtt__sort_edges_quicksort(stbtt__edge *p, int n)
+{
+   /* threshold for transitioning to insertion sort */
+   while (n > 12) {
+      stbtt__edge t;
+      int c01,c12,c,m,i,j;
+
+      /* compute median of three */
+      m = n >> 1;
+      c01 = STBTT__COMPARE(&p[0],&p[m]);
+      c12 = STBTT__COMPARE(&p[m],&p[n-1]);
+      /* if 0 >= mid >= end, or 0 < mid < end, then use mid */
+      if (c01 != c12) {
+         /* otherwise, we'll need to swap something else to middle */
+         int z;
+         c = STBTT__COMPARE(&p[0],&p[n-1]);
+         /* 0>mid && mid<n:  0>n => n; 0<n => 0 */
+         /* 0<mid && mid>n:  0>n => 0; 0<n => n */
+         z = (c == c12) ? 0 : n-1;
+         t = p[z];
+         p[z] = p[m];
+         p[m] = t;
+      }
+      /* now p[m] is the median-of-three */
+      /* swap it to the beginning so it won't move around */
+      t = p[0];
+      p[0] = p[m];
+      p[m] = t;
+
+      /* partition loop */
+      i=1;
+      j=n-1;
+      for(;;) {
+         /* handling of equality is crucial here */
+         /* for sentinels & efficiency with duplicates */
+         for (;;++i) {
+            if (!STBTT__COMPARE(&p[i], &p[0])) break;
+         }
+         for (;;--j) {
+            if (!STBTT__COMPARE(&p[0], &p[j])) break;
+         }
+         /* make sure we haven't crossed */
+         if (i >= j) break;
+         t = p[i];
+         p[i] = p[j];
+         p[j] = t;
+
+         ++i;
+         --j;
+      }
+      /* recurse on smaller side, iterate on larger */
+      if (j < (n-i)) {
+         stbtt__sort_edges_quicksort(p,j);
+         p = p+i;
+         n = n-i;
+      } else {
+         stbtt__sort_edges_quicksort(p+i, n-i);
+         n = j;
+      }
+   }
+}
+
+static void stbtt__sort_edges(stbtt__edge *p, int n)
+{
+   stbtt__sort_edges_quicksort(p, n);
+   stbtt__sort_edges_ins_sort(p, n);
+}
+
+typedef struct
+{
+   float x,y;
+} stbtt__point;
+
+static void stbtt__rasterize(stbtt__bitmap *result, stbtt__point *pts, int *wcount, int windings, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int off_x, int off_y, int invert, void *userdata)
+{
+   float y_scale_inv = invert ? -scale_y : scale_y;
+   stbtt__edge *e;
+   int n,i,j,k,m;
+#if STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION == 1
+   int vsubsample = result->h < 8 ? 15 : 5;
+#elif STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION == 2
+   int vsubsample = 1;
+#else
+   #error "Unrecognized value of STBTT_RASTERIZER_VERSION"
+#endif
+   // vsubsample should divide 255 evenly; otherwise we won't reach full opacity
+
+   // now we have to blow out the windings into explicit edge lists
+   n = 0;
+   for (i=0; i < windings; ++i)
+      n += wcount[i];
+
+   e = (stbtt__edge *) STBTT_malloc(sizeof(*e) * (n+1), userdata); // add an extra one as a sentinel
+   if (e == 0) return;
+   n = 0;
+
+   m=0;
+   for (i=0; i < windings; ++i) {
+      stbtt__point *p = pts + m;
+      m += wcount[i];
+      j = wcount[i]-1;
+      for (k=0; k < wcount[i]; j=k++) {
+         int a=k,b=j;
+         // skip the edge if horizontal
+         if (p[j].y == p[k].y)
+            continue;
+         // add edge from j to k to the list
+         e[n].invert = 0;
+         if (invert ? p[j].y > p[k].y : p[j].y < p[k].y) {
+            e[n].invert = 1;
+            a=j,b=k;
+         }
+         e[n].x0 = p[a].x * scale_x + shift_x;
+         e[n].y0 = (p[a].y * y_scale_inv + shift_y) * vsubsample;
+         e[n].x1 = p[b].x * scale_x + shift_x;
+         e[n].y1 = (p[b].y * y_scale_inv + shift_y) * vsubsample;
+         ++n;
+      }
+   }
+
+   // now sort the edges by their highest point (should snap to integer, and then by x)
+   //STBTT_sort(e, n, sizeof(e[0]), stbtt__edge_compare);
+   stbtt__sort_edges(e, n);
+
+   // now, traverse the scanlines and find the intersections on each scanline, use xor winding rule
+   stbtt__rasterize_sorted_edges(result, e, n, vsubsample, off_x, off_y, userdata);
+
+   STBTT_free(e, userdata);
+}
+
+static void stbtt__add_point(stbtt__point *points, int n, float x, float y)
+{
+   if (!points) return; // during first pass, it's unallocated
+   points[n].x = x;
+   points[n].y = y;
+}
+
+// tessellate until threshold p is happy... @TODO warped to compensate for non-linear stretching
+static int stbtt__tesselate_curve(stbtt__point *points, int *num_points, float x0, float y0, float x1, float y1, float x2, float y2, float objspace_flatness_squared, int n)
+{
+   // midpoint
+   float mx = (x0 + 2*x1 + x2)/4;
+   float my = (y0 + 2*y1 + y2)/4;
+   // versus directly drawn line
+   float dx = (x0+x2)/2 - mx;
+   float dy = (y0+y2)/2 - my;
+   if (n > 16) // 65536 segments on one curve better be enough!
+      return 1;
+   if (dx*dx+dy*dy > objspace_flatness_squared) { // half-pixel error allowed... need to be smaller if AA
+      stbtt__tesselate_curve(points, num_points, x0,y0, (x0+x1)/2.0f,(y0+y1)/2.0f, mx,my, objspace_flatness_squared,n+1);
+      stbtt__tesselate_curve(points, num_points, mx,my, (x1+x2)/2.0f,(y1+y2)/2.0f, x2,y2, objspace_flatness_squared,n+1);
+   } else {
+      stbtt__add_point(points, *num_points,x2,y2);
+      *num_points = *num_points+1;
+   }
+   return 1;
+}
+
+static void stbtt__tesselate_cubic(stbtt__point *points, int *num_points, float x0, float y0, float x1, float y1, float x2, float y2, float x3, float y3, float objspace_flatness_squared, int n)
+{
+   // @TODO this "flatness" calculation is just made-up nonsense that seems to work well enough
+   float dx0 = x1-x0;
+   float dy0 = y1-y0;
+   float dx1 = x2-x1;
+   float dy1 = y2-y1;
+   float dx2 = x3-x2;
+   float dy2 = y3-y2;
+   float dx = x3-x0;
+   float dy = y3-y0;
+   float longlen = (float) (STBTT_sqrt(dx0*dx0+dy0*dy0)+STBTT_sqrt(dx1*dx1+dy1*dy1)+STBTT_sqrt(dx2*dx2+dy2*dy2));
+   float shortlen = (float) STBTT_sqrt(dx*dx+dy*dy);
+   float flatness_squared = longlen*longlen-shortlen*shortlen;
+
+   if (n > 16) // 65536 segments on one curve better be enough!
+      return;
+
+   if (flatness_squared > objspace_flatness_squared) {
+      float x01 = (x0+x1)/2;
+      float y01 = (y0+y1)/2;
+      float x12 = (x1+x2)/2;
+      float y12 = (y1+y2)/2;
+      float x23 = (x2+x3)/2;
+      float y23 = (y2+y3)/2;
+
+      float xa = (x01+x12)/2;
+      float ya = (y01+y12)/2;
+      float xb = (x12+x23)/2;
+      float yb = (y12+y23)/2;
+
+      float mx = (xa+xb)/2;
+      float my = (ya+yb)/2;
+
+      stbtt__tesselate_cubic(points, num_points, x0,y0, x01,y01, xa,ya, mx,my, objspace_flatness_squared,n+1);
+      stbtt__tesselate_cubic(points, num_points, mx,my, xb,yb, x23,y23, x3,y3, objspace_flatness_squared,n+1);
+   } else {
+      stbtt__add_point(points, *num_points,x3,y3);
+      *num_points = *num_points+1;
+   }
+}
+
+// returns number of contours
+static stbtt__point *stbtt_FlattenCurves(stbtt_vertex *vertices, int num_verts, float objspace_flatness, int **contour_lengths, int *num_contours, void *userdata)
+{
+   stbtt__point *points=0;
+   int num_points=0;
+
+   float objspace_flatness_squared = objspace_flatness * objspace_flatness;
+   int i,n=0,start=0, pass;
+
+   // count how many "moves" there are to get the contour count
+   for (i=0; i < num_verts; ++i)
+      if (vertices[i].type == STBTT_vmove)
+         ++n;
+
+   *num_contours = n;
+   if (n == 0) return 0;
+
+   *contour_lengths = (int *) STBTT_malloc(sizeof(**contour_lengths) * n, userdata);
+
+   if (*contour_lengths == 0) {
+      *num_contours = 0;
+      return 0;
+   }
+
+   // make two passes through the points so we don't need to realloc
+   for (pass=0; pass < 2; ++pass) {
+      float x=0,y=0;
+      if (pass == 1) {
+         points = (stbtt__point *) STBTT_malloc(num_points * sizeof(points[0]), userdata);
+         if (points == NULL) goto error;
+      }
+      num_points = 0;
+      n= -1;
+      for (i=0; i < num_verts; ++i) {
+         switch (vertices[i].type) {
+            case STBTT_vmove:
+               // start the next contour
+               if (n >= 0)
+                  (*contour_lengths)[n] = num_points - start;
+               ++n;
+               start = num_points;
+
+               x = vertices[i].x, y = vertices[i].y;
+               stbtt__add_point(points, num_points++, x,y);
+               break;
+            case STBTT_vline:
+               x = vertices[i].x, y = vertices[i].y;
+               stbtt__add_point(points, num_points++, x, y);
+               break;
+            case STBTT_vcurve:
+               stbtt__tesselate_curve(points, &num_points, x,y,
+                                        vertices[i].cx, vertices[i].cy,
+                                        vertices[i].x,  vertices[i].y,
+                                        objspace_flatness_squared, 0);
+               x = vertices[i].x, y = vertices[i].y;
+               break;
+            case STBTT_vcubic:
+               stbtt__tesselate_cubic(points, &num_points, x,y,
+                                        vertices[i].cx, vertices[i].cy,
+                                        vertices[i].cx1, vertices[i].cy1,
+                                        vertices[i].x,  vertices[i].y,
+                                        objspace_flatness_squared, 0);
+               x = vertices[i].x, y = vertices[i].y;
+               break;
+         }
+      }
+      (*contour_lengths)[n] = num_points - start;
+   }
+
+   return points;
+error:
+   STBTT_free(points, userdata);
+   STBTT_free(*contour_lengths, userdata);
+   *contour_lengths = 0;
+   *num_contours = 0;
+   return NULL;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_Rasterize(stbtt__bitmap *result, float flatness_in_pixels, stbtt_vertex *vertices, int num_verts, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int x_off, int y_off, int invert, void *userdata)
+{
+   float scale            = scale_x > scale_y ? scale_y : scale_x;
+   int winding_count      = 0;
+   int *winding_lengths   = NULL;
+   stbtt__point *windings = stbtt_FlattenCurves(vertices, num_verts, flatness_in_pixels / scale, &winding_lengths, &winding_count, userdata);
+   if (windings) {
+      stbtt__rasterize(result, windings, winding_lengths, winding_count, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, x_off, y_off, invert, userdata);
+      STBTT_free(winding_lengths, userdata);
+      STBTT_free(windings, userdata);
+   }
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_FreeBitmap(unsigned char *bitmap, void *userdata)
+{
+   STBTT_free(bitmap, userdata);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int glyph, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff)
+{
+   int ix0,iy0,ix1,iy1;
+   stbtt__bitmap gbm;
+   stbtt_vertex *vertices;
+   int num_verts = stbtt_GetGlyphShape(info, glyph, &vertices);
+
+   if (scale_x == 0) scale_x = scale_y;
+   if (scale_y == 0) {
+      if (scale_x == 0) {
+         STBTT_free(vertices, info->userdata);
+         return NULL;
+      }
+      scale_y = scale_x;
+   }
+
+   stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(info, glyph, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, &ix0,&iy0,&ix1,&iy1);
+
+   // now we get the size
+   gbm.w = (ix1 - ix0);
+   gbm.h = (iy1 - iy0);
+   gbm.pixels = NULL; // in case we error
+
+   if (width ) *width  = gbm.w;
+   if (height) *height = gbm.h;
+   if (xoff  ) *xoff   = ix0;
+   if (yoff  ) *yoff   = iy0;
+
+   if (gbm.w && gbm.h) {
+      gbm.pixels = (unsigned char *) STBTT_malloc(gbm.w * gbm.h, info->userdata);
+      if (gbm.pixels) {
+         gbm.stride = gbm.w;
+
+         stbtt_Rasterize(&gbm, 0.35f, vertices, num_verts, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, ix0, iy0, 1, info->userdata);
+      }
+   }
+   STBTT_free(vertices, info->userdata);
+   return gbm.pixels;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetGlyphBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, int glyph, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff)
+{
+   return stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapSubpixel(info, scale_x, scale_y, 0.0f, 0.0f, glyph, width, height, xoff, yoff);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int glyph)
+{
+   int ix0,iy0;
+   stbtt_vertex *vertices;
+   int num_verts = stbtt_GetGlyphShape(info, glyph, &vertices);
+   stbtt__bitmap gbm;
+
+   stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(info, glyph, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, &ix0,&iy0,0,0);
+   gbm.pixels = output;
+   gbm.w = out_w;
+   gbm.h = out_h;
+   gbm.stride = out_stride;
+
+   if (gbm.w && gbm.h)
+      stbtt_Rasterize(&gbm, 0.35f, vertices, num_verts, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, ix0,iy0, 1, info->userdata);
+
+   STBTT_free(vertices, info->userdata);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, int glyph)
+{
+   stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixel(info, output, out_w, out_h, out_stride, scale_x, scale_y, 0.0f,0.0f, glyph);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int codepoint, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff)
+{
+   return stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapSubpixel(info, scale_x, scale_y,shift_x,shift_y, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,codepoint), width,height,xoff,yoff);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixelPrefilter(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int oversample_x, int oversample_y, float *sub_x, float *sub_y, int codepoint)
+{
+   stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixelPrefilter(info, output, out_w, out_h, out_stride, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, oversample_x, oversample_y, sub_x, sub_y, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,codepoint));
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixel(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int codepoint)
+{
+   stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixel(info, output, out_w, out_h, out_stride, scale_x, scale_y, shift_x, shift_y, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info,codepoint));
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF unsigned char *stbtt_GetCodepointBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale_x, float scale_y, int codepoint, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff)
+{
+   return stbtt_GetCodepointBitmapSubpixel(info, scale_x, scale_y, 0.0f,0.0f, codepoint, width,height,xoff,yoff);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmap(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, int codepoint)
+{
+   stbtt_MakeCodepointBitmapSubpixel(info, output, out_w, out_h, out_stride, scale_x, scale_y, 0.0f,0.0f, codepoint);
+}
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// bitmap baking
+//
+// This is SUPER-CRAPPY packing to keep source code small
+
+static int stbtt_BakeFontBitmap_internal(unsigned char *data, int offset,  // font location (use offset=0 for plain .ttf)
+                                float pixel_height,                     // height of font in pixels
+                                unsigned char *pixels, int pw, int ph,  // bitmap to be filled in
+                                int first_char, int num_chars,          // characters to bake
+                                stbtt_bakedchar *chardata)
+{
+   float scale;
+   int x,y,bottom_y, i;
+   stbtt_fontinfo f;
+   f.userdata = NULL;
+   if (!stbtt_InitFont(&f, data, offset))
+      return -1;
+   STBTT_memset(pixels, 0, pw*ph); // background of 0 around pixels
+   x=y=1;
+   bottom_y = 1;
+
+   scale = stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(&f, pixel_height);
+
+   for (i=0; i < num_chars; ++i) {
+      int advance, lsb, x0,y0,x1,y1,gw,gh;
+      int g = stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(&f, first_char + i);
+      stbtt_GetGlyphHMetrics(&f, g, &advance, &lsb);
+      stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBox(&f, g, scale,scale, &x0,&y0,&x1,&y1);
+      gw = x1-x0;
+      gh = y1-y0;
+      if (x + gw + 1 >= pw)
+         y = bottom_y, x = 1; // advance to next row
+      if (y + gh + 1 >= ph) // check if it fits vertically AFTER potentially moving to next row
+         return -i;
+      STBTT_assert(x+gw < pw);
+      STBTT_assert(y+gh < ph);
+      stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmap(&f, pixels+x+y*pw, gw,gh,pw, scale,scale, g);
+      chardata[i].x0 = (stbtt_int16) x;
+      chardata[i].y0 = (stbtt_int16) y;
+      chardata[i].x1 = (stbtt_int16) (x + gw);
+      chardata[i].y1 = (stbtt_int16) (y + gh);
+      chardata[i].xadvance = scale * advance;
+      chardata[i].xoff     = (float) x0;
+      chardata[i].yoff     = (float) y0;
+      x = x + gw + 1;
+      if (y+gh+1 > bottom_y)
+         bottom_y = y+gh+1;
+   }
+   return bottom_y;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetBakedQuad(const stbtt_bakedchar *chardata, int pw, int ph, int char_index, float *xpos, float *ypos, stbtt_aligned_quad *q, int opengl_fillrule)
+{
+   float d3d_bias = opengl_fillrule ? 0 : -0.5f;
+   float ipw = 1.0f / pw, iph = 1.0f / ph;
+   const stbtt_bakedchar *b = chardata + char_index;
+   int round_x = STBTT_ifloor((*xpos + b->xoff) + 0.5f);
+   int round_y = STBTT_ifloor((*ypos + b->yoff) + 0.5f);
+
+   q->x0 = round_x + d3d_bias;
+   q->y0 = round_y + d3d_bias;
+   q->x1 = round_x + b->x1 - b->x0 + d3d_bias;
+   q->y1 = round_y + b->y1 - b->y0 + d3d_bias;
+
+   q->s0 = b->x0 * ipw;
+   q->t0 = b->y0 * iph;
+   q->s1 = b->x1 * ipw;
+   q->t1 = b->y1 * iph;
+
+   *xpos += b->xadvance;
+}
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// rectangle packing replacement routines if you don't have stb_rect_pack.h
+//
+
+#ifndef STB_RECT_PACK_VERSION
+
+typedef int stbrp_coord;
+
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//                                                                                //
+//                                                                                //
+// COMPILER WARNING ?!?!?                                                         //
+//                                                                                //
+//                                                                                //
+// if you get a compile warning due to these symbols being defined more than      //
+// once, move #include "stb_rect_pack.h" before #include "stb_truetype.h"         //
+//                                                                                //
+////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+
+typedef struct
+{
+   int width,height;
+   int x,y,bottom_y;
+} stbrp_context;
+
+typedef struct
+{
+   unsigned char x;
+} stbrp_node;
+
+struct stbrp_rect
+{
+   stbrp_coord x,y;
+   int id,w,h,was_packed;
+};
+
+static void stbrp_init_target(stbrp_context *con, int pw, int ph, stbrp_node *nodes, int num_nodes)
+{
+   con->width  = pw;
+   con->height = ph;
+   con->x = 0;
+   con->y = 0;
+   con->bottom_y = 0;
+   STBTT__NOTUSED(nodes);
+   STBTT__NOTUSED(num_nodes);
+}
+
+static void stbrp_pack_rects(stbrp_context *con, stbrp_rect *rects, int num_rects)
+{
+   int i;
+   for (i=0; i < num_rects; ++i) {
+      if (con->x + rects[i].w > con->width) {
+         con->x = 0;
+         con->y = con->bottom_y;
+      }
+      if (con->y + rects[i].h > con->height)
+         break;
+      rects[i].x = con->x;
+      rects[i].y = con->y;
+      rects[i].was_packed = 1;
+      con->x += rects[i].w;
+      if (con->y + rects[i].h > con->bottom_y)
+         con->bottom_y = con->y + rects[i].h;
+   }
+   for (   ; i < num_rects; ++i)
+      rects[i].was_packed = 0;
+}
+#endif
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// bitmap baking
+//
+// This is SUPER-AWESOME (tm Ryan Gordon) packing using stb_rect_pack.h. If
+// stb_rect_pack.h isn't available, it uses the BakeFontBitmap strategy.
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackBegin(stbtt_pack_context *spc, unsigned char *pixels, int pw, int ph, int stride_in_bytes, int padding, void *alloc_context)
+{
+   stbrp_context *context = (stbrp_context *) STBTT_malloc(sizeof(*context)            ,alloc_context);
+   int            num_nodes = pw - padding;
+   stbrp_node    *nodes   = (stbrp_node    *) STBTT_malloc(sizeof(*nodes  ) * num_nodes,alloc_context);
+
+   if (context == NULL || nodes == NULL) {
+      if (context != NULL) STBTT_free(context, alloc_context);
+      if (nodes   != NULL) STBTT_free(nodes  , alloc_context);
+      return 0;
+   }
+
+   spc->user_allocator_context = alloc_context;
+   spc->width = pw;
+   spc->height = ph;
+   spc->pixels = pixels;
+   spc->pack_info = context;
+   spc->nodes = nodes;
+   spc->padding = padding;
+   spc->stride_in_bytes = stride_in_bytes != 0 ? stride_in_bytes : pw;
+   spc->h_oversample = 1;
+   spc->v_oversample = 1;
+   spc->skip_missing = 0;
+
+   stbrp_init_target(context, pw-padding, ph-padding, nodes, num_nodes);
+
+   if (pixels)
+      STBTT_memset(pixels, 0, pw*ph); // background of 0 around pixels
+
+   return 1;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackEnd  (stbtt_pack_context *spc)
+{
+   STBTT_free(spc->nodes    , spc->user_allocator_context);
+   STBTT_free(spc->pack_info, spc->user_allocator_context);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackSetOversampling(stbtt_pack_context *spc, unsigned int h_oversample, unsigned int v_oversample)
+{
+   STBTT_assert(h_oversample <= STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE);
+   STBTT_assert(v_oversample <= STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE);
+   if (h_oversample <= STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE)
+      spc->h_oversample = h_oversample;
+   if (v_oversample <= STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE)
+      spc->v_oversample = v_oversample;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackSetSkipMissingCodepoints(stbtt_pack_context *spc, int skip)
+{
+   spc->skip_missing = skip;
+}
+
+#define STBTT__OVER_MASK  (STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE-1)
+
+static void stbtt__h_prefilter(unsigned char *pixels, int w, int h, int stride_in_bytes, unsigned int kernel_width)
+{
+   unsigned char buffer[STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE];
+   int safe_w = w - kernel_width;
+   int j;
+   STBTT_memset(buffer, 0, STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE); // suppress bogus warning from VS2013 -analyze
+   for (j=0; j < h; ++j) {
+      int i;
+      unsigned int total;
+      STBTT_memset(buffer, 0, kernel_width);
+
+      total = 0;
+
+      // make kernel_width a constant in common cases so compiler can optimize out the divide
+      switch (kernel_width) {
+         case 2:
+            for (i=0; i <= safe_w; ++i) {
+               total += pixels[i] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
+               buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i];
+               pixels[i] = (unsigned char) (total / 2);
+            }
+            break;
+         case 3:
+            for (i=0; i <= safe_w; ++i) {
+               total += pixels[i] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
+               buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i];
+               pixels[i] = (unsigned char) (total / 3);
+            }
+            break;
+         case 4:
+            for (i=0; i <= safe_w; ++i) {
+               total += pixels[i] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
+               buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i];
+               pixels[i] = (unsigned char) (total / 4);
+            }
+            break;
+         case 5:
+            for (i=0; i <= safe_w; ++i) {
+               total += pixels[i] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
+               buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i];
+               pixels[i] = (unsigned char) (total / 5);
+            }
+            break;
+         default:
+            for (i=0; i <= safe_w; ++i) {
+               total += pixels[i] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
+               buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i];
+               pixels[i] = (unsigned char) (total / kernel_width);
+            }
+            break;
+      }
+
+      for (; i < w; ++i) {
+         STBTT_assert(pixels[i] == 0);
+         total -= buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
+         pixels[i] = (unsigned char) (total / kernel_width);
+      }
+
+      pixels += stride_in_bytes;
+   }
+}
+
+static void stbtt__v_prefilter(unsigned char *pixels, int w, int h, int stride_in_bytes, unsigned int kernel_width)
+{
+   unsigned char buffer[STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE];
+   int safe_h = h - kernel_width;
+   int j;
+   STBTT_memset(buffer, 0, STBTT_MAX_OVERSAMPLE); // suppress bogus warning from VS2013 -analyze
+   for (j=0; j < w; ++j) {
+      int i;
+      unsigned int total;
+      STBTT_memset(buffer, 0, kernel_width);
+
+      total = 0;
+
+      // make kernel_width a constant in common cases so compiler can optimize out the divide
+      switch (kernel_width) {
+         case 2:
+            for (i=0; i <= safe_h; ++i) {
+               total += pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
+               buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i*stride_in_bytes];
+               pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] = (unsigned char) (total / 2);
+            }
+            break;
+         case 3:
+            for (i=0; i <= safe_h; ++i) {
+               total += pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
+               buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i*stride_in_bytes];
+               pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] = (unsigned char) (total / 3);
+            }
+            break;
+         case 4:
+            for (i=0; i <= safe_h; ++i) {
+               total += pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
+               buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i*stride_in_bytes];
+               pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] = (unsigned char) (total / 4);
+            }
+            break;
+         case 5:
+            for (i=0; i <= safe_h; ++i) {
+               total += pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
+               buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i*stride_in_bytes];
+               pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] = (unsigned char) (total / 5);
+            }
+            break;
+         default:
+            for (i=0; i <= safe_h; ++i) {
+               total += pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] - buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
+               buffer[(i+kernel_width) & STBTT__OVER_MASK] = pixels[i*stride_in_bytes];
+               pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] = (unsigned char) (total / kernel_width);
+            }
+            break;
+      }
+
+      for (; i < h; ++i) {
+         STBTT_assert(pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] == 0);
+         total -= buffer[i & STBTT__OVER_MASK];
+         pixels[i*stride_in_bytes] = (unsigned char) (total / kernel_width);
+      }
+
+      pixels += 1;
+   }
+}
+
+static float stbtt__oversample_shift(int oversample)
+{
+   if (!oversample)
+      return 0.0f;
+
+   // The prefilter is a box filter of width "oversample",
+   // which shifts phase by (oversample - 1)/2 pixels in
+   // oversampled space. We want to shift in the opposite
+   // direction to counter this.
+   return (float)-(oversample - 1) / (2.0f * (float)oversample);
+}
+
+// rects array must be big enough to accommodate all characters in the given ranges
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRangesGatherRects(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_pack_range *ranges, int num_ranges, stbrp_rect *rects)
+{
+   int i,j,k;
+   int missing_glyph_added = 0;
+
+   k=0;
+   for (i=0; i < num_ranges; ++i) {
+      float fh = ranges[i].font_size;
+      float scale = fh > 0 ? stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(info, fh) : stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels(info, -fh);
+      ranges[i].h_oversample = (unsigned char) spc->h_oversample;
+      ranges[i].v_oversample = (unsigned char) spc->v_oversample;
+      for (j=0; j < ranges[i].num_chars; ++j) {
+         int x0,y0,x1,y1;
+         int codepoint = ranges[i].array_of_unicode_codepoints == NULL ? ranges[i].first_unicode_codepoint_in_range + j : ranges[i].array_of_unicode_codepoints[j];
+         int glyph = stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info, codepoint);
+         if (glyph == 0 && (spc->skip_missing || missing_glyph_added)) {
+            rects[k].w = rects[k].h = 0;
+         } else {
+            stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(info,glyph,
+                                            scale * spc->h_oversample,
+                                            scale * spc->v_oversample,
+                                            0,0,
+                                            &x0,&y0,&x1,&y1);
+            rects[k].w = (stbrp_coord) (x1-x0 + spc->padding + spc->h_oversample-1);
+            rects[k].h = (stbrp_coord) (y1-y0 + spc->padding + spc->v_oversample-1);
+            if (glyph == 0)
+               missing_glyph_added = 1;
+         }
+         ++k;
+      }
+   }
+
+   return k;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixelPrefilter(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, unsigned char *output, int out_w, int out_h, int out_stride, float scale_x, float scale_y, float shift_x, float shift_y, int prefilter_x, int prefilter_y, float *sub_x, float *sub_y, int glyph)
+{
+   stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixel(info,
+                                 output,
+                                 out_w - (prefilter_x - 1),
+                                 out_h - (prefilter_y - 1),
+                                 out_stride,
+                                 scale_x,
+                                 scale_y,
+                                 shift_x,
+                                 shift_y,
+                                 glyph);
+
+   if (prefilter_x > 1)
+      stbtt__h_prefilter(output, out_w, out_h, out_stride, prefilter_x);
+
+   if (prefilter_y > 1)
+      stbtt__v_prefilter(output, out_w, out_h, out_stride, prefilter_y);
+
+   *sub_x = stbtt__oversample_shift(prefilter_x);
+   *sub_y = stbtt__oversample_shift(prefilter_y);
+}
+
+// rects array must be big enough to accommodate all characters in the given ranges
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRangesRenderIntoRects(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const stbtt_fontinfo *info, stbtt_pack_range *ranges, int num_ranges, stbrp_rect *rects)
+{
+   int i,j,k, missing_glyph = -1, return_value = 1;
+
+   // save current values
+   int old_h_over = spc->h_oversample;
+   int old_v_over = spc->v_oversample;
+
+   k = 0;
+   for (i=0; i < num_ranges; ++i) {
+      float fh = ranges[i].font_size;
+      float scale = fh > 0 ? stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(info, fh) : stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels(info, -fh);
+      float recip_h,recip_v,sub_x,sub_y;
+      spc->h_oversample = ranges[i].h_oversample;
+      spc->v_oversample = ranges[i].v_oversample;
+      recip_h = 1.0f / spc->h_oversample;
+      recip_v = 1.0f / spc->v_oversample;
+      sub_x = stbtt__oversample_shift(spc->h_oversample);
+      sub_y = stbtt__oversample_shift(spc->v_oversample);
+      for (j=0; j < ranges[i].num_chars; ++j) {
+         stbrp_rect *r = &rects[k];
+         if (r->was_packed && r->w != 0 && r->h != 0) {
+            stbtt_packedchar *bc = &ranges[i].chardata_for_range[j];
+            int advance, lsb, x0,y0,x1,y1;
+            int codepoint = ranges[i].array_of_unicode_codepoints == NULL ? ranges[i].first_unicode_codepoint_in_range + j : ranges[i].array_of_unicode_codepoints[j];
+            int glyph = stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info, codepoint);
+            stbrp_coord pad = (stbrp_coord) spc->padding;
+
+            // pad on left and top
+            r->x += pad;
+            r->y += pad;
+            r->w -= pad;
+            r->h -= pad;
+            stbtt_GetGlyphHMetrics(info, glyph, &advance, &lsb);
+            stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBox(info, glyph,
+                                    scale * spc->h_oversample,
+                                    scale * spc->v_oversample,
+                                    &x0,&y0,&x1,&y1);
+            stbtt_MakeGlyphBitmapSubpixel(info,
+                                          spc->pixels + r->x + r->y*spc->stride_in_bytes,
+                                          r->w - spc->h_oversample+1,
+                                          r->h - spc->v_oversample+1,
+                                          spc->stride_in_bytes,
+                                          scale * spc->h_oversample,
+                                          scale * spc->v_oversample,
+                                          0,0,
+                                          glyph);
+
+            if (spc->h_oversample > 1)
+               stbtt__h_prefilter(spc->pixels + r->x + r->y*spc->stride_in_bytes,
+                                  r->w, r->h, spc->stride_in_bytes,
+                                  spc->h_oversample);
+
+            if (spc->v_oversample > 1)
+               stbtt__v_prefilter(spc->pixels + r->x + r->y*spc->stride_in_bytes,
+                                  r->w, r->h, spc->stride_in_bytes,
+                                  spc->v_oversample);
+
+            bc->x0       = (stbtt_int16)  r->x;
+            bc->y0       = (stbtt_int16)  r->y;
+            bc->x1       = (stbtt_int16) (r->x + r->w);
+            bc->y1       = (stbtt_int16) (r->y + r->h);
+            bc->xadvance =                scale * advance;
+            bc->xoff     =       (float)  x0 * recip_h + sub_x;
+            bc->yoff     =       (float)  y0 * recip_v + sub_y;
+            bc->xoff2    =                (x0 + r->w) * recip_h + sub_x;
+            bc->yoff2    =                (y0 + r->h) * recip_v + sub_y;
+
+            if (glyph == 0)
+               missing_glyph = j;
+         } else if (spc->skip_missing) {
+            return_value = 0;
+         } else if (r->was_packed && r->w == 0 && r->h == 0 && missing_glyph >= 0) {
+            ranges[i].chardata_for_range[j] = ranges[i].chardata_for_range[missing_glyph];
+         } else {
+            return_value = 0; // if any fail, report failure
+         }
+
+         ++k;
+      }
+   }
+
+   // restore original values
+   spc->h_oversample = old_h_over;
+   spc->v_oversample = old_v_over;
+
+   return return_value;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_PackFontRangesPackRects(stbtt_pack_context *spc, stbrp_rect *rects, int num_rects)
+{
+   stbrp_pack_rects((stbrp_context *) spc->pack_info, rects, num_rects);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRanges(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const unsigned char *fontdata, int font_index, stbtt_pack_range *ranges, int num_ranges)
+{
+   stbtt_fontinfo info;
+   int i, j, n, return_value; // [DEAR IMGUI] removed = 1;
+   //stbrp_context *context = (stbrp_context *) spc->pack_info;
+   stbrp_rect    *rects;
+
+   // flag all characters as NOT packed
+   for (i=0; i < num_ranges; ++i)
+      for (j=0; j < ranges[i].num_chars; ++j)
+         ranges[i].chardata_for_range[j].x0 =
+         ranges[i].chardata_for_range[j].y0 =
+         ranges[i].chardata_for_range[j].x1 =
+         ranges[i].chardata_for_range[j].y1 = 0;
+
+   n = 0;
+   for (i=0; i < num_ranges; ++i)
+      n += ranges[i].num_chars;
+
+   rects = (stbrp_rect *) STBTT_malloc(sizeof(*rects) * n, spc->user_allocator_context);
+   if (rects == NULL)
+      return 0;
+
+   info.userdata = spc->user_allocator_context;
+   stbtt_InitFont(&info, fontdata, stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex(fontdata,font_index));
+
+   n = stbtt_PackFontRangesGatherRects(spc, &info, ranges, num_ranges, rects);
+
+   stbtt_PackFontRangesPackRects(spc, rects, n);
+
+   return_value = stbtt_PackFontRangesRenderIntoRects(spc, &info, ranges, num_ranges, rects);
+
+   STBTT_free(rects, spc->user_allocator_context);
+   return return_value;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_PackFontRange(stbtt_pack_context *spc, const unsigned char *fontdata, int font_index, float font_size,
+            int first_unicode_codepoint_in_range, int num_chars_in_range, stbtt_packedchar *chardata_for_range)
+{
+   stbtt_pack_range range;
+   range.first_unicode_codepoint_in_range = first_unicode_codepoint_in_range;
+   range.array_of_unicode_codepoints = NULL;
+   range.num_chars                   = num_chars_in_range;
+   range.chardata_for_range          = chardata_for_range;
+   range.font_size                   = font_size;
+   return stbtt_PackFontRanges(spc, fontdata, font_index, &range, 1);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetScaledFontVMetrics(const unsigned char *fontdata, int index, float size, float *ascent, float *descent, float *lineGap)
+{
+   int i_ascent, i_descent, i_lineGap;
+   float scale;
+   stbtt_fontinfo info;
+   stbtt_InitFont(&info, fontdata, stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex(fontdata, index));
+   scale = size > 0 ? stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(&info, size) : stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels(&info, -size);
+   stbtt_GetFontVMetrics(&info, &i_ascent, &i_descent, &i_lineGap);
+   *ascent  = (float) i_ascent  * scale;
+   *descent = (float) i_descent * scale;
+   *lineGap = (float) i_lineGap * scale;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_GetPackedQuad(const stbtt_packedchar *chardata, int pw, int ph, int char_index, float *xpos, float *ypos, stbtt_aligned_quad *q, int align_to_integer)
+{
+   float ipw = 1.0f / pw, iph = 1.0f / ph;
+   const stbtt_packedchar *b = chardata + char_index;
+
+   if (align_to_integer) {
+      float x = (float) STBTT_ifloor((*xpos + b->xoff) + 0.5f);
+      float y = (float) STBTT_ifloor((*ypos + b->yoff) + 0.5f);
+      q->x0 = x;
+      q->y0 = y;
+      q->x1 = x + b->xoff2 - b->xoff;
+      q->y1 = y + b->yoff2 - b->yoff;
+   } else {
+      q->x0 = *xpos + b->xoff;
+      q->y0 = *ypos + b->yoff;
+      q->x1 = *xpos + b->xoff2;
+      q->y1 = *ypos + b->yoff2;
+   }
+
+   q->s0 = b->x0 * ipw;
+   q->t0 = b->y0 * iph;
+   q->s1 = b->x1 * ipw;
+   q->t1 = b->y1 * iph;
+
+   *xpos += b->xadvance;
+}
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// sdf computation
+//
+
+#define STBTT_min(a,b)  ((a) < (b) ? (a) : (b))
+#define STBTT_max(a,b)  ((a) < (b) ? (b) : (a))
+
+static int stbtt__ray_intersect_bezier(float orig[2], float ray[2], float q0[2], float q1[2], float q2[2], float hits[2][2])
+{
+   float q0perp = q0[1]*ray[0] - q0[0]*ray[1];
+   float q1perp = q1[1]*ray[0] - q1[0]*ray[1];
+   float q2perp = q2[1]*ray[0] - q2[0]*ray[1];
+   float roperp = orig[1]*ray[0] - orig[0]*ray[1];
+
+   float a = q0perp - 2*q1perp + q2perp;
+   float b = q1perp - q0perp;
+   float c = q0perp - roperp;
+
+   float s0 = 0., s1 = 0.;
+   int num_s = 0;
+
+   if (a != 0.0) {
+      float discr = b*b - a*c;
+      if (discr > 0.0) {
+         float rcpna = -1 / a;
+         float d = (float) STBTT_sqrt(discr);
+         s0 = (b+d) * rcpna;
+         s1 = (b-d) * rcpna;
+         if (s0 >= 0.0 && s0 <= 1.0)
+            num_s = 1;
+         if (d > 0.0 && s1 >= 0.0 && s1 <= 1.0) {
+            if (num_s == 0) s0 = s1;
+            ++num_s;
+         }
+      }
+   } else {
+      // 2*b*s + c = 0
+      // s = -c / (2*b)
+      s0 = c / (-2 * b);
+      if (s0 >= 0.0 && s0 <= 1.0)
+         num_s = 1;
+   }
+
+   if (num_s == 0)
+      return 0;
+   else {
+      float rcp_len2 = 1 / (ray[0]*ray[0] + ray[1]*ray[1]);
+      float rayn_x = ray[0] * rcp_len2, rayn_y = ray[1] * rcp_len2;
+
+      float q0d =   q0[0]*rayn_x +   q0[1]*rayn_y;
+      float q1d =   q1[0]*rayn_x +   q1[1]*rayn_y;
+      float q2d =   q2[0]*rayn_x +   q2[1]*rayn_y;
+      float rod = orig[0]*rayn_x + orig[1]*rayn_y;
+
+      float q10d = q1d - q0d;
+      float q20d = q2d - q0d;
+      float q0rd = q0d - rod;
+
+      hits[0][0] = q0rd + s0*(2.0f - 2.0f*s0)*q10d + s0*s0*q20d;
+      hits[0][1] = a*s0+b;
+
+      if (num_s > 1) {
+         hits[1][0] = q0rd + s1*(2.0f - 2.0f*s1)*q10d + s1*s1*q20d;
+         hits[1][1] = a*s1+b;
+         return 2;
+      } else {
+         return 1;
+      }
+   }
+}
+
+static int equal(float *a, float *b)
+{
+   return (a[0] == b[0] && a[1] == b[1]);
+}
+
+static int stbtt__compute_crossings_x(float x, float y, int nverts, stbtt_vertex *verts)
+{
+   int i;
+   float orig[2], ray[2] = { 1, 0 };
+   float y_frac;
+   int winding = 0;
+
+   // make sure y never passes through a vertex of the shape
+   y_frac = (float) STBTT_fmod(y, 1.0f);
+   if (y_frac < 0.01f)
+      y += 0.01f;
+   else if (y_frac > 0.99f)
+      y -= 0.01f;
+
+   orig[0] = x;
+   orig[1] = y;
+
+   // test a ray from (-infinity,y) to (x,y)
+   for (i=0; i < nverts; ++i) {
+      if (verts[i].type == STBTT_vline) {
+         int x0 = (int) verts[i-1].x, y0 = (int) verts[i-1].y;
+         int x1 = (int) verts[i  ].x, y1 = (int) verts[i  ].y;
+         if (y > STBTT_min(y0,y1) && y < STBTT_max(y0,y1) && x > STBTT_min(x0,x1)) {
+            float x_inter = (y - y0) / (y1 - y0) * (x1-x0) + x0;
+            if (x_inter < x)
+               winding += (y0 < y1) ? 1 : -1;
+         }
+      }
+      if (verts[i].type == STBTT_vcurve) {
+         int x0 = (int) verts[i-1].x , y0 = (int) verts[i-1].y ;
+         int x1 = (int) verts[i  ].cx, y1 = (int) verts[i  ].cy;
+         int x2 = (int) verts[i  ].x , y2 = (int) verts[i  ].y ;
+         int ax = STBTT_min(x0,STBTT_min(x1,x2)), ay = STBTT_min(y0,STBTT_min(y1,y2));
+         int by = STBTT_max(y0,STBTT_max(y1,y2));
+         if (y > ay && y < by && x > ax) {
+            float q0[2],q1[2],q2[2];
+            float hits[2][2];
+            q0[0] = (float)x0;
+            q0[1] = (float)y0;
+            q1[0] = (float)x1;
+            q1[1] = (float)y1;
+            q2[0] = (float)x2;
+            q2[1] = (float)y2;
+            if (equal(q0,q1) || equal(q1,q2)) {
+               x0 = (int)verts[i-1].x;
+               y0 = (int)verts[i-1].y;
+               x1 = (int)verts[i  ].x;
+               y1 = (int)verts[i  ].y;
+               if (y > STBTT_min(y0,y1) && y < STBTT_max(y0,y1) && x > STBTT_min(x0,x1)) {
+                  float x_inter = (y - y0) / (y1 - y0) * (x1-x0) + x0;
+                  if (x_inter < x)
+                     winding += (y0 < y1) ? 1 : -1;
+               }
+            } else {
+               int num_hits = stbtt__ray_intersect_bezier(orig, ray, q0, q1, q2, hits);
+               if (num_hits >= 1)
+                  if (hits[0][0] < 0)
+                     winding += (hits[0][1] < 0 ? -1 : 1);
+               if (num_hits >= 2)
+                  if (hits[1][0] < 0)
+                     winding += (hits[1][1] < 0 ? -1 : 1);
+            }
+         }
+      }
+   }
+   return winding;
+}
+
+static float stbtt__cuberoot( float x )
+{
+   if (x<0)
+      return -(float) STBTT_pow(-x,1.0f/3.0f);
+   else
+      return  (float) STBTT_pow( x,1.0f/3.0f);
+}
+
+// x^3 + a*x^2 + b*x + c = 0
+static int stbtt__solve_cubic(float a, float b, float c, float* r)
+{
+   float s = -a / 3;
+   float p = b - a*a / 3;
+   float q = a * (2*a*a - 9*b) / 27 + c;
+   float p3 = p*p*p;
+   float d = q*q + 4*p3 / 27;
+   if (d >= 0) {
+      float z = (float) STBTT_sqrt(d);
+      float u = (-q + z) / 2;
+      float v = (-q - z) / 2;
+      u = stbtt__cuberoot(u);
+      v = stbtt__cuberoot(v);
+      r[0] = s + u + v;
+      return 1;
+   } else {
+      float u = (float) STBTT_sqrt(-p/3);
+      float v = (float) STBTT_acos(-STBTT_sqrt(-27/p3) * q / 2) / 3; // p3 must be negative, since d is negative
+      float m = (float) STBTT_cos(v);
+      float n = (float) STBTT_cos(v-3.141592/2)*1.732050808f;
+      r[0] = s + u * 2 * m;
+      r[1] = s - u * (m + n);
+      r[2] = s - u * (m - n);
+
+      //STBTT_assert( STBTT_fabs(((r[0]+a)*r[0]+b)*r[0]+c) < 0.05f);  // these asserts may not be safe at all scales, though they're in bezier t parameter units so maybe?
+      //STBTT_assert( STBTT_fabs(((r[1]+a)*r[1]+b)*r[1]+c) < 0.05f);
+      //STBTT_assert( STBTT_fabs(((r[2]+a)*r[2]+b)*r[2]+c) < 0.05f);
+      return 3;
+   }
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF unsigned char * stbtt_GetGlyphSDF(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale, int glyph, int padding, unsigned char onedge_value, float pixel_dist_scale, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff)
+{
+   float scale_x = scale, scale_y = scale;
+   int ix0,iy0,ix1,iy1;
+   int w,h;
+   unsigned char *data;
+
+   if (scale == 0) return NULL;
+
+   stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(info, glyph, scale, scale, 0.0f,0.0f, &ix0,&iy0,&ix1,&iy1);
+
+   // if empty, return NULL
+   if (ix0 == ix1 || iy0 == iy1)
+      return NULL;
+
+   ix0 -= padding;
+   iy0 -= padding;
+   ix1 += padding;
+   iy1 += padding;
+
+   w = (ix1 - ix0);
+   h = (iy1 - iy0);
+
+   if (width ) *width  = w;
+   if (height) *height = h;
+   if (xoff  ) *xoff   = ix0;
+   if (yoff  ) *yoff   = iy0;
+
+   // invert for y-downwards bitmaps
+   scale_y = -scale_y;
+
+   {
+      int x,y,i,j;
+      float *precompute;
+      stbtt_vertex *verts;
+      int num_verts = stbtt_GetGlyphShape(info, glyph, &verts);
+      data = (unsigned char *) STBTT_malloc(w * h, info->userdata);
+      precompute = (float *) STBTT_malloc(num_verts * sizeof(float), info->userdata);
+
+      for (i=0,j=num_verts-1; i < num_verts; j=i++) {
+         if (verts[i].type == STBTT_vline) {
+            float x0 = verts[i].x*scale_x, y0 = verts[i].y*scale_y;
+            float x1 = verts[j].x*scale_x, y1 = verts[j].y*scale_y;
+            float dist = (float) STBTT_sqrt((x1-x0)*(x1-x0) + (y1-y0)*(y1-y0));
+            precompute[i] = (dist == 0) ? 0.0f : 1.0f / dist;
+         } else if (verts[i].type == STBTT_vcurve) {
+            float x2 = verts[j].x *scale_x, y2 = verts[j].y *scale_y;
+            float x1 = verts[i].cx*scale_x, y1 = verts[i].cy*scale_y;
+            float x0 = verts[i].x *scale_x, y0 = verts[i].y *scale_y;
+            float bx = x0 - 2*x1 + x2, by = y0 - 2*y1 + y2;
+            float len2 = bx*bx + by*by;
+            if (len2 != 0.0f)
+               precompute[i] = 1.0f / (bx*bx + by*by);
+            else
+               precompute[i] = 0.0f;
+         } else
+            precompute[i] = 0.0f;
+      }
+
+      for (y=iy0; y < iy1; ++y) {
+         for (x=ix0; x < ix1; ++x) {
+            float val;
+            float min_dist = 999999.0f;
+            float sx = (float) x + 0.5f;
+            float sy = (float) y + 0.5f;
+            float x_gspace = (sx / scale_x);
+            float y_gspace = (sy / scale_y);
+
+            int winding = stbtt__compute_crossings_x(x_gspace, y_gspace, num_verts, verts); // @OPTIMIZE: this could just be a rasterization, but needs to be line vs. non-tesselated curves so a new path
+
+            for (i=0; i < num_verts; ++i) {
+               float x0 = verts[i].x*scale_x, y0 = verts[i].y*scale_y;
+
+               if (verts[i].type == STBTT_vline && precompute[i] != 0.0f) {
+                  float x1 = verts[i-1].x*scale_x, y1 = verts[i-1].y*scale_y;
+
+                  float dist,dist2 = (x0-sx)*(x0-sx) + (y0-sy)*(y0-sy);
+                  if (dist2 < min_dist*min_dist)
+                     min_dist = (float) STBTT_sqrt(dist2);
+
+                  // coarse culling against bbox
+                  //if (sx > STBTT_min(x0,x1)-min_dist && sx < STBTT_max(x0,x1)+min_dist &&
+                  //    sy > STBTT_min(y0,y1)-min_dist && sy < STBTT_max(y0,y1)+min_dist)
+                  dist = (float) STBTT_fabs((x1-x0)*(y0-sy) - (y1-y0)*(x0-sx)) * precompute[i];
+                  STBTT_assert(i != 0);
+                  if (dist < min_dist) {
+                     // check position along line
+                     // x' = x0 + t*(x1-x0), y' = y0 + t*(y1-y0)
+                     // minimize (x'-sx)*(x'-sx)+(y'-sy)*(y'-sy)
+                     float dx = x1-x0, dy = y1-y0;
+                     float px = x0-sx, py = y0-sy;
+                     // minimize (px+t*dx)^2 + (py+t*dy)^2 = px*px + 2*px*dx*t + t^2*dx*dx + py*py + 2*py*dy*t + t^2*dy*dy
+                     // derivative: 2*px*dx + 2*py*dy + (2*dx*dx+2*dy*dy)*t, set to 0 and solve
+                     float t = -(px*dx + py*dy) / (dx*dx + dy*dy);
+                     if (t >= 0.0f && t <= 1.0f)
+                        min_dist = dist;
+                  }
+               } else if (verts[i].type == STBTT_vcurve) {
+                  float x2 = verts[i-1].x *scale_x, y2 = verts[i-1].y *scale_y;
+                  float x1 = verts[i  ].cx*scale_x, y1 = verts[i  ].cy*scale_y;
+                  float box_x0 = STBTT_min(STBTT_min(x0,x1),x2);
+                  float box_y0 = STBTT_min(STBTT_min(y0,y1),y2);
+                  float box_x1 = STBTT_max(STBTT_max(x0,x1),x2);
+                  float box_y1 = STBTT_max(STBTT_max(y0,y1),y2);
+                  // coarse culling against bbox to avoid computing cubic unnecessarily
+                  if (sx > box_x0-min_dist && sx < box_x1+min_dist && sy > box_y0-min_dist && sy < box_y1+min_dist) {
+                     int num=0;
+                     float ax = x1-x0, ay = y1-y0;
+                     float bx = x0 - 2*x1 + x2, by = y0 - 2*y1 + y2;
+                     float mx = x0 - sx, my = y0 - sy;
+                     float res[3] = {0.f,0.f,0.f};
+                     float px,py,t,it,dist2;
+                     float a_inv = precompute[i];
+                     if (a_inv == 0.0) { // if a_inv is 0, it's 2nd degree so use quadratic formula
+                        float a = 3*(ax*bx + ay*by);
+                        float b = 2*(ax*ax + ay*ay) + (mx*bx+my*by);
+                        float c = mx*ax+my*ay;
+                        if (a == 0.0) { // if a is 0, it's linear
+                           if (b != 0.0) {
+                              res[num++] = -c/b;
+                           }
+                        } else {
+                           float discriminant = b*b - 4*a*c;
+                           if (discriminant < 0)
+                              num = 0;
+                           else {
+                              float root = (float) STBTT_sqrt(discriminant);
+                              res[0] = (-b - root)/(2*a);
+                              res[1] = (-b + root)/(2*a);
+                              num = 2; // don't bother distinguishing 1-solution case, as code below will still work
+                           }
+                        }
+                     } else {
+                        float b = 3*(ax*bx + ay*by) * a_inv; // could precompute this as it doesn't depend on sample point
+                        float c = (2*(ax*ax + ay*ay) + (mx*bx+my*by)) * a_inv;
+                        float d = (mx*ax+my*ay) * a_inv;
+                        num = stbtt__solve_cubic(b, c, d, res);
+                     }
+                     dist2 = (x0-sx)*(x0-sx) + (y0-sy)*(y0-sy);
+                     if (dist2 < min_dist*min_dist)
+                        min_dist = (float) STBTT_sqrt(dist2);
+
+                     if (num >= 1 && res[0] >= 0.0f && res[0] <= 1.0f) {
+                        t = res[0], it = 1.0f - t;
+                        px = it*it*x0 + 2*t*it*x1 + t*t*x2;
+                        py = it*it*y0 + 2*t*it*y1 + t*t*y2;
+                        dist2 = (px-sx)*(px-sx) + (py-sy)*(py-sy);
+                        if (dist2 < min_dist * min_dist)
+                           min_dist = (float) STBTT_sqrt(dist2);
+                     }
+                     if (num >= 2 && res[1] >= 0.0f && res[1] <= 1.0f) {
+                        t = res[1], it = 1.0f - t;
+                        px = it*it*x0 + 2*t*it*x1 + t*t*x2;
+                        py = it*it*y0 + 2*t*it*y1 + t*t*y2;
+                        dist2 = (px-sx)*(px-sx) + (py-sy)*(py-sy);
+                        if (dist2 < min_dist * min_dist)
+                           min_dist = (float) STBTT_sqrt(dist2);
+                     }
+                     if (num >= 3 && res[2] >= 0.0f && res[2] <= 1.0f) {
+                        t = res[2], it = 1.0f - t;
+                        px = it*it*x0 + 2*t*it*x1 + t*t*x2;
+                        py = it*it*y0 + 2*t*it*y1 + t*t*y2;
+                        dist2 = (px-sx)*(px-sx) + (py-sy)*(py-sy);
+                        if (dist2 < min_dist * min_dist)
+                           min_dist = (float) STBTT_sqrt(dist2);
+                     }
+                  }
+               }
+            }
+            if (winding == 0)
+               min_dist = -min_dist;  // if outside the shape, value is negative
+            val = onedge_value + pixel_dist_scale * min_dist;
+            if (val < 0)
+               val = 0;
+            else if (val > 255)
+               val = 255;
+            data[(y-iy0)*w+(x-ix0)] = (unsigned char) val;
+         }
+      }
+      STBTT_free(precompute, info->userdata);
+      STBTT_free(verts, info->userdata);
+   }
+   return data;
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF unsigned char * stbtt_GetCodepointSDF(const stbtt_fontinfo *info, float scale, int codepoint, int padding, unsigned char onedge_value, float pixel_dist_scale, int *width, int *height, int *xoff, int *yoff)
+{
+   return stbtt_GetGlyphSDF(info, scale, stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(info, codepoint), padding, onedge_value, pixel_dist_scale, width, height, xoff, yoff);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF void stbtt_FreeSDF(unsigned char *bitmap, void *userdata)
+{
+   STBTT_free(bitmap, userdata);
+}
+
+//////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
+//
+// font name matching -- recommended not to use this
+//
+
+// check if a utf8 string contains a prefix which is the utf16 string; if so return length of matching utf8 string
+static stbtt_int32 stbtt__CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian_prefix(stbtt_uint8 *s1, stbtt_int32 len1, stbtt_uint8 *s2, stbtt_int32 len2)
+{
+   stbtt_int32 i=0;
+
+   // convert utf16 to utf8 and compare the results while converting
+   while (len2) {
+      stbtt_uint16 ch = s2[0]*256 + s2[1];
+      if (ch < 0x80) {
+         if (i >= len1) return -1;
+         if (s1[i++] != ch) return -1;
+      } else if (ch < 0x800) {
+         if (i+1 >= len1) return -1;
+         if (s1[i++] != 0xc0 + (ch >> 6)) return -1;
+         if (s1[i++] != 0x80 + (ch & 0x3f)) return -1;
+      } else if (ch >= 0xd800 && ch < 0xdc00) {
+         stbtt_uint32 c;
+         stbtt_uint16 ch2 = s2[2]*256 + s2[3];
+         if (i+3 >= len1) return -1;
+         c = ((ch - 0xd800) << 10) + (ch2 - 0xdc00) + 0x10000;
+         if (s1[i++] != 0xf0 + (c >> 18)) return -1;
+         if (s1[i++] != 0x80 + ((c >> 12) & 0x3f)) return -1;
+         if (s1[i++] != 0x80 + ((c >>  6) & 0x3f)) return -1;
+         if (s1[i++] != 0x80 + ((c      ) & 0x3f)) return -1;
+         s2 += 2; // plus another 2 below
+         len2 -= 2;
+      } else if (ch >= 0xdc00 && ch < 0xe000) {
+         return -1;
+      } else {
+         if (i+2 >= len1) return -1;
+         if (s1[i++] != 0xe0 + (ch >> 12)) return -1;
+         if (s1[i++] != 0x80 + ((ch >> 6) & 0x3f)) return -1;
+         if (s1[i++] != 0x80 + ((ch     ) & 0x3f)) return -1;
+      }
+      s2 += 2;
+      len2 -= 2;
+   }
+   return i;
+}
+
+static int stbtt_CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian_internal(char *s1, int len1, char *s2, int len2)
+{
+   return len1 == stbtt__CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian_prefix((stbtt_uint8*) s1, len1, (stbtt_uint8*) s2, len2);
+}
+
+// returns results in whatever encoding you request... but note that 2-byte encodings
+// will be BIG-ENDIAN... use stbtt_CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian() to compare
+STBTT_DEF const char *stbtt_GetFontNameString(const stbtt_fontinfo *font, int *length, int platformID, int encodingID, int languageID, int nameID)
+{
+   stbtt_int32 i,count,stringOffset;
+   stbtt_uint8 *fc = font->data;
+   stbtt_uint32 offset = font->fontstart;
+   stbtt_uint32 nm = stbtt__find_table(fc, offset, "name");
+   if (!nm) return NULL;
+
+   count = ttUSHORT(fc+nm+2);
+   stringOffset = nm + ttUSHORT(fc+nm+4);
+   for (i=0; i < count; ++i) {
+      stbtt_uint32 loc = nm + 6 + 12 * i;
+      if (platformID == ttUSHORT(fc+loc+0) && encodingID == ttUSHORT(fc+loc+2)
+          && languageID == ttUSHORT(fc+loc+4) && nameID == ttUSHORT(fc+loc+6)) {
+         *length = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+8);
+         return (const char *) (fc+stringOffset+ttUSHORT(fc+loc+10));
+      }
+   }
+   return NULL;
+}
+
+static int stbtt__matchpair(stbtt_uint8 *fc, stbtt_uint32 nm, stbtt_uint8 *name, stbtt_int32 nlen, stbtt_int32 target_id, stbtt_int32 next_id)
+{
+   stbtt_int32 i;
+   stbtt_int32 count = ttUSHORT(fc+nm+2);
+   stbtt_int32 stringOffset = nm + ttUSHORT(fc+nm+4);
+
+   for (i=0; i < count; ++i) {
+      stbtt_uint32 loc = nm + 6 + 12 * i;
+      stbtt_int32 id = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+6);
+      if (id == target_id) {
+         // find the encoding
+         stbtt_int32 platform = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+0), encoding = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+2), language = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+4);
+
+         // is this a Unicode encoding?
+         if (platform == 0 || (platform == 3 && encoding == 1) || (platform == 3 && encoding == 10)) {
+            stbtt_int32 slen = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+8);
+            stbtt_int32 off = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+10);
+
+            // check if there's a prefix match
+            stbtt_int32 matchlen = stbtt__CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian_prefix(name, nlen, fc+stringOffset+off,slen);
+            if (matchlen >= 0) {
+               // check for target_id+1 immediately following, with same encoding & language
+               if (i+1 < count && ttUSHORT(fc+loc+12+6) == next_id && ttUSHORT(fc+loc+12) == platform && ttUSHORT(fc+loc+12+2) == encoding && ttUSHORT(fc+loc+12+4) == language) {
+                  slen = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+12+8);
+                  off = ttUSHORT(fc+loc+12+10);
+                  if (slen == 0) {
+                     if (matchlen == nlen)
+                        return 1;
+                  } else if (matchlen < nlen && name[matchlen] == ' ') {
+                     ++matchlen;
+                     if (stbtt_CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian_internal((char*) (name+matchlen), nlen-matchlen, (char*)(fc+stringOffset+off),slen))
+                        return 1;
+                  }
+               } else {
+                  // if nothing immediately following
+                  if (matchlen == nlen)
+                     return 1;
+               }
+            }
+         }
+
+         // @TODO handle other encodings
+      }
+   }
+   return 0;
+}
+
+static int stbtt__matches(stbtt_uint8 *fc, stbtt_uint32 offset, stbtt_uint8 *name, stbtt_int32 flags)
+{
+   stbtt_int32 nlen = (stbtt_int32) STBTT_strlen((char *) name);
+   stbtt_uint32 nm,hd;
+   if (!stbtt__isfont(fc+offset)) return 0;
+
+   // check italics/bold/underline flags in macStyle...
+   if (flags) {
+      hd = stbtt__find_table(fc, offset, "head");
+      if ((ttUSHORT(fc+hd+44) & 7) != (flags & 7)) return 0;
+   }
+
+   nm = stbtt__find_table(fc, offset, "name");
+   if (!nm) return 0;
+
+   if (flags) {
+      // if we checked the macStyle flags, then just check the family and ignore the subfamily
+      if (stbtt__matchpair(fc, nm, name, nlen, 16, -1))  return 1;
+      if (stbtt__matchpair(fc, nm, name, nlen,  1, -1))  return 1;
+      if (stbtt__matchpair(fc, nm, name, nlen,  3, -1))  return 1;
+   } else {
+      if (stbtt__matchpair(fc, nm, name, nlen, 16, 17))  return 1;
+      if (stbtt__matchpair(fc, nm, name, nlen,  1,  2))  return 1;
+      if (stbtt__matchpair(fc, nm, name, nlen,  3, -1))  return 1;
+   }
+
+   return 0;
+}
+
+static int stbtt_FindMatchingFont_internal(unsigned char *font_collection, char *name_utf8, stbtt_int32 flags)
+{
+   stbtt_int32 i;
+   for (i=0;;++i) {
+      stbtt_int32 off = stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex(font_collection, i);
+      if (off < 0) return off;
+      if (stbtt__matches((stbtt_uint8 *) font_collection, off, (stbtt_uint8*) name_utf8, flags))
+         return off;
+   }
+}
+
+#if defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__clang__)
+#pragma GCC diagnostic push
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wcast-qual"
+#endif
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_BakeFontBitmap(const unsigned char *data, int offset,
+                                float pixel_height, unsigned char *pixels, int pw, int ph,
+                                int first_char, int num_chars, stbtt_bakedchar *chardata)
+{
+   return stbtt_BakeFontBitmap_internal((unsigned char *) data, offset, pixel_height, pixels, pw, ph, first_char, num_chars, chardata);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex(const unsigned char *data, int index)
+{
+   return stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex_internal((unsigned char *) data, index);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_GetNumberOfFonts(const unsigned char *data)
+{
+   return stbtt_GetNumberOfFonts_internal((unsigned char *) data);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_InitFont(stbtt_fontinfo *info, const unsigned char *data, int offset)
+{
+   return stbtt_InitFont_internal(info, (unsigned char *) data, offset);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_FindMatchingFont(const unsigned char *fontdata, const char *name, int flags)
+{
+   return stbtt_FindMatchingFont_internal((unsigned char *) fontdata, (char *) name, flags);
+}
+
+STBTT_DEF int stbtt_CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian(const char *s1, int len1, const char *s2, int len2)
+{
+   return stbtt_CompareUTF8toUTF16_bigendian_internal((char *) s1, len1, (char *) s2, len2);
+}
+
+#if defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__clang__)
+#pragma GCC diagnostic pop
+#endif
+
+#endif // STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION
+
+
+// FULL VERSION HISTORY
+//
+//   1.25 (2021-07-11) many fixes
+//   1.24 (2020-02-05) fix warning
+//   1.23 (2020-02-02) query SVG data for glyphs; query whole kerning table (but only kern not GPOS)
+//   1.22 (2019-08-11) minimize missing-glyph duplication; fix kerning if both 'GPOS' and 'kern' are defined
+//   1.21 (2019-02-25) fix warning
+//   1.20 (2019-02-07) PackFontRange skips missing codepoints; GetScaleFontVMetrics()
+//   1.19 (2018-02-11) OpenType GPOS kerning (horizontal only), STBTT_fmod
+//   1.18 (2018-01-29) add missing function
+//   1.17 (2017-07-23) make more arguments const; doc fix
+//   1.16 (2017-07-12) SDF support
+//   1.15 (2017-03-03) make more arguments const
+//   1.14 (2017-01-16) num-fonts-in-TTC function
+//   1.13 (2017-01-02) support OpenType fonts, certain Apple fonts
+//   1.12 (2016-10-25) suppress warnings about casting away const with -Wcast-qual
+//   1.11 (2016-04-02) fix unused-variable warning
+//   1.10 (2016-04-02) allow user-defined fabs() replacement
+//                     fix memory leak if fontsize=0.0
+//                     fix warning from duplicate typedef
+//   1.09 (2016-01-16) warning fix; avoid crash on outofmem; use alloc userdata for PackFontRanges
+//   1.08 (2015-09-13) document stbtt_Rasterize(); fixes for vertical & horizontal edges
+//   1.07 (2015-08-01) allow PackFontRanges to accept arrays of sparse codepoints;
+//                     allow PackFontRanges to pack and render in separate phases;
+//                     fix stbtt_GetFontOFfsetForIndex (never worked for non-0 input?);
+//                     fixed an assert() bug in the new rasterizer
+//                     replace assert() with STBTT_assert() in new rasterizer
+//   1.06 (2015-07-14) performance improvements (~35% faster on x86 and x64 on test machine)
+//                     also more precise AA rasterizer, except if shapes overlap
+//                     remove need for STBTT_sort
+//   1.05 (2015-04-15) fix misplaced definitions for STBTT_STATIC
+//   1.04 (2015-04-15) typo in example
+//   1.03 (2015-04-12) STBTT_STATIC, fix memory leak in new packing, various fixes
+//   1.02 (2014-12-10) fix various warnings & compile issues w/ stb_rect_pack, C++
+//   1.01 (2014-12-08) fix subpixel position when oversampling to exactly match
+//                        non-oversampled; STBTT_POINT_SIZE for packed case only
+//   1.00 (2014-12-06) add new PackBegin etc. API, w/ support for oversampling
+//   0.99 (2014-09-18) fix multiple bugs with subpixel rendering (ryg)
+//   0.9  (2014-08-07) support certain mac/iOS fonts without an MS platformID
+//   0.8b (2014-07-07) fix a warning
+//   0.8  (2014-05-25) fix a few more warnings
+//   0.7  (2013-09-25) bugfix: subpixel glyph bug fixed in 0.5 had come back
+//   0.6c (2012-07-24) improve documentation
+//   0.6b (2012-07-20) fix a few more warnings
+//   0.6  (2012-07-17) fix warnings; added stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels,
+//                        stbtt_GetFontBoundingBox, stbtt_IsGlyphEmpty
+//   0.5  (2011-12-09) bugfixes:
+//                        subpixel glyph renderer computed wrong bounding box
+//                        first vertex of shape can be off-curve (FreeSans)
+//   0.4b (2011-12-03) fixed an error in the font baking example
+//   0.4  (2011-12-01) kerning, subpixel rendering (tor)
+//                    bugfixes for:
+//                        codepoint-to-glyph conversion using table fmt=12
+//                        codepoint-to-glyph conversion using table fmt=4
+//                        stbtt_GetBakedQuad with non-square texture (Zer)
+//                    updated Hello World! sample to use kerning and subpixel
+//                    fixed some warnings
+//   0.3  (2009-06-24) cmap fmt=12, compound shapes (MM)
+//                    userdata, malloc-from-userdata, non-zero fill (stb)
+//   0.2  (2009-03-11) Fix unsigned/signed char warnings
+//   0.1  (2009-03-09) First public release
+//
+
+/*
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+This software is available under 2 licenses -- choose whichever you prefer.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ALTERNATIVE A - MIT License
+Copyright (c) 2017 Sean Barrett
+Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of
+this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in
+the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to
+use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
+of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do
+so, subject to the following conditions:
+The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all
+copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
+IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
+FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
+AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
+LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
+OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
+SOFTWARE.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ALTERNATIVE B - Public Domain (www.unlicense.org)
+This is free and unencumbered software released into the public domain.
+Anyone is free to copy, modify, publish, use, compile, sell, or distribute this
+software, either in source code form or as a compiled binary, for any purpose,
+commercial or non-commercial, and by any means.
+In jurisdictions that recognize copyright laws, the author or authors of this
+software dedicate any and all copyright interest in the software to the public
+domain. We make this dedication for the benefit of the public at large and to
+the detriment of our heirs and successors. We intend this dedication to be an
+overt act of relinquishment in perpetuity of all present and future rights to
+this software under copyright law.
+THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
+IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
+FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
+AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
+ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
+WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+*/
diff --git a/lib/glad/include/KHR/khrplatform.h b/dependencies/include/khrplatform.h
index 0164644..0164644 100644
--- a/lib/glad/include/KHR/khrplatform.h
+++ b/dependencies/include/khrplatform.h
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavcodec/ac3_parser.h b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/ac3_parser.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ff8cc4c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/ac3_parser.h
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+/*
+ * AC-3 parser prototypes
+ * Copyright (c) 2003 Fabrice Bellard
+ * Copyright (c) 2003 Michael Niedermayer
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_AC3_PARSER_H
+#define AVCODEC_AC3_PARSER_H
+
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+/**
+ * Extract the bitstream ID and the frame size from AC-3 data.
+ */
+int av_ac3_parse_header(const uint8_t *buf, size_t size,
+                        uint8_t *bitstream_id, uint16_t *frame_size);
+
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_AC3_PARSER_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavcodec/adts_parser.h b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/adts_parser.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f85becd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/adts_parser.h
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_ADTS_PARSER_H
+#define AVCODEC_ADTS_PARSER_H
+
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+#define AV_AAC_ADTS_HEADER_SIZE 7
+
+/**
+ * Extract the number of samples and frames from AAC data.
+ * @param[in]  buf     pointer to AAC data buffer
+ * @param[out] samples Pointer to where number of samples is written
+ * @param[out] frames  Pointer to where number of frames is written
+ * @return Returns 0 on success, error code on failure.
+ */
+int av_adts_header_parse(const uint8_t *buf, uint32_t *samples,
+                         uint8_t *frames);
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_ADTS_PARSER_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavcodec/avcodec.h b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/avcodec.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3edd8e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/avcodec.h
@@ -0,0 +1,3180 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2001 Fabrice Bellard
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_AVCODEC_H
+#define AVCODEC_AVCODEC_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup libavc
+ * Libavcodec external API header
+ */
+
+#include "libavutil/samplefmt.h"
+#include "libavutil/attributes.h"
+#include "libavutil/avutil.h"
+#include "libavutil/buffer.h"
+#include "libavutil/dict.h"
+#include "libavutil/frame.h"
+#include "libavutil/log.h"
+#include "libavutil/pixfmt.h"
+#include "libavutil/rational.h"
+
+#include "codec.h"
+#include "codec_desc.h"
+#include "codec_par.h"
+#include "codec_id.h"
+#include "defs.h"
+#include "packet.h"
+#include "version_major.h"
+#ifndef HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H
+/* When included as part of the ffmpeg build, only include the major version
+ * to avoid unnecessary rebuilds. When included externally, keep including
+ * the full version information. */
+#include "version.h"
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup libavc libavcodec
+ * Encoding/Decoding Library
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavc_decoding Decoding
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavc_encoding Encoding
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavc_codec Codecs
+ * @{
+ * @defgroup lavc_codec_native Native Codecs
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ * @defgroup lavc_codec_wrappers External library wrappers
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ * @defgroup lavc_codec_hwaccel Hardware Accelerators bridge
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ * @}
+ * @defgroup lavc_internal Internal
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @ingroup libavc
+ * @defgroup lavc_encdec send/receive encoding and decoding API overview
+ * @{
+ *
+ * The avcodec_send_packet()/avcodec_receive_frame()/avcodec_send_frame()/
+ * avcodec_receive_packet() functions provide an encode/decode API, which
+ * decouples input and output.
+ *
+ * The API is very similar for encoding/decoding and audio/video, and works as
+ * follows:
+ * - Set up and open the AVCodecContext as usual.
+ * - Send valid input:
+ *   - For decoding, call avcodec_send_packet() to give the decoder raw
+ *     compressed data in an AVPacket.
+ *   - For encoding, call avcodec_send_frame() to give the encoder an AVFrame
+ *     containing uncompressed audio or video.
+ *
+ *   In both cases, it is recommended that AVPackets and AVFrames are
+ *   refcounted, or libavcodec might have to copy the input data. (libavformat
+ *   always returns refcounted AVPackets, and av_frame_get_buffer() allocates
+ *   refcounted AVFrames.)
+ * - Receive output in a loop. Periodically call one of the avcodec_receive_*()
+ *   functions and process their output:
+ *   - For decoding, call avcodec_receive_frame(). On success, it will return
+ *     an AVFrame containing uncompressed audio or video data.
+ *   - For encoding, call avcodec_receive_packet(). On success, it will return
+ *     an AVPacket with a compressed frame.
+ *
+ *   Repeat this call until it returns AVERROR(EAGAIN) or an error. The
+ *   AVERROR(EAGAIN) return value means that new input data is required to
+ *   return new output. In this case, continue with sending input. For each
+ *   input frame/packet, the codec will typically return 1 output frame/packet,
+ *   but it can also be 0 or more than 1.
+ *
+ * At the beginning of decoding or encoding, the codec might accept multiple
+ * input frames/packets without returning a frame, until its internal buffers
+ * are filled. This situation is handled transparently if you follow the steps
+ * outlined above.
+ *
+ * In theory, sending input can result in EAGAIN - this should happen only if
+ * not all output was received. You can use this to structure alternative decode
+ * or encode loops other than the one suggested above. For example, you could
+ * try sending new input on each iteration, and try to receive output if that
+ * returns EAGAIN.
+ *
+ * End of stream situations. These require "flushing" (aka draining) the codec,
+ * as the codec might buffer multiple frames or packets internally for
+ * performance or out of necessity (consider B-frames).
+ * This is handled as follows:
+ * - Instead of valid input, send NULL to the avcodec_send_packet() (decoding)
+ *   or avcodec_send_frame() (encoding) functions. This will enter draining
+ *   mode.
+ * - Call avcodec_receive_frame() (decoding) or avcodec_receive_packet()
+ *   (encoding) in a loop until AVERROR_EOF is returned. The functions will
+ *   not return AVERROR(EAGAIN), unless you forgot to enter draining mode.
+ * - Before decoding can be resumed again, the codec has to be reset with
+ *   avcodec_flush_buffers().
+ *
+ * Using the API as outlined above is highly recommended. But it is also
+ * possible to call functions outside of this rigid schema. For example, you can
+ * call avcodec_send_packet() repeatedly without calling
+ * avcodec_receive_frame(). In this case, avcodec_send_packet() will succeed
+ * until the codec's internal buffer has been filled up (which is typically of
+ * size 1 per output frame, after initial input), and then reject input with
+ * AVERROR(EAGAIN). Once it starts rejecting input, you have no choice but to
+ * read at least some output.
+ *
+ * Not all codecs will follow a rigid and predictable dataflow; the only
+ * guarantee is that an AVERROR(EAGAIN) return value on a send/receive call on
+ * one end implies that a receive/send call on the other end will succeed, or
+ * at least will not fail with AVERROR(EAGAIN). In general, no codec will
+ * permit unlimited buffering of input or output.
+ *
+ * A codec is not allowed to return AVERROR(EAGAIN) for both sending and receiving. This
+ * would be an invalid state, which could put the codec user into an endless
+ * loop. The API has no concept of time either: it cannot happen that trying to
+ * do avcodec_send_packet() results in AVERROR(EAGAIN), but a repeated call 1 second
+ * later accepts the packet (with no other receive/flush API calls involved).
+ * The API is a strict state machine, and the passage of time is not supposed
+ * to influence it. Some timing-dependent behavior might still be deemed
+ * acceptable in certain cases. But it must never result in both send/receive
+ * returning EAGAIN at the same time at any point. It must also absolutely be
+ * avoided that the current state is "unstable" and can "flip-flop" between
+ * the send/receive APIs allowing progress. For example, it's not allowed that
+ * the codec randomly decides that it actually wants to consume a packet now
+ * instead of returning a frame, after it just returned AVERROR(EAGAIN) on an
+ * avcodec_send_packet() call.
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_core Core functions/structures.
+ * @ingroup libavc
+ *
+ * Basic definitions, functions for querying libavcodec capabilities,
+ * allocating core structures, etc.
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @ingroup lavc_encoding
+ * minimum encoding buffer size
+ * Used to avoid some checks during header writing.
+ */
+#define AV_INPUT_BUFFER_MIN_SIZE 16384
+
+/**
+ * @ingroup lavc_encoding
+ */
+typedef struct RcOverride{
+    int start_frame;
+    int end_frame;
+    int qscale; // If this is 0 then quality_factor will be used instead.
+    float quality_factor;
+} RcOverride;
+
+/* encoding support
+   These flags can be passed in AVCodecContext.flags before initialization.
+   Note: Not everything is supported yet.
+*/
+
+/**
+ * Allow decoders to produce frames with data planes that are not aligned
+ * to CPU requirements (e.g. due to cropping).
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_UNALIGNED       (1 <<  0)
+/**
+ * Use fixed qscale.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_QSCALE          (1 <<  1)
+/**
+ * 4 MV per MB allowed / advanced prediction for H.263.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_4MV             (1 <<  2)
+/**
+ * Output even those frames that might be corrupted.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_OUTPUT_CORRUPT  (1 <<  3)
+/**
+ * Use qpel MC.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_QPEL            (1 <<  4)
+/**
+ * Don't output frames whose parameters differ from first
+ * decoded frame in stream.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_DROPCHANGED     (1 <<  5)
+/**
+ * Request the encoder to output reconstructed frames, i.e. frames that would be
+ * produced by decoding the encoded bistream. These frames may be retrieved by
+ * calling avcodec_receive_frame() immediately after a successful call to
+ * avcodec_receive_packet().
+ *
+ * Should only be used with encoders flagged with the
+ * AV_CODEC_CAP_ENCODER_RECON_FRAME capability.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_RECON_FRAME     (1 <<  6)
+/**
+ * Use internal 2pass ratecontrol in first pass mode.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_PASS1           (1 <<  9)
+/**
+ * Use internal 2pass ratecontrol in second pass mode.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_PASS2           (1 << 10)
+/**
+ * loop filter.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_LOOP_FILTER     (1 << 11)
+/**
+ * Only decode/encode grayscale.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_GRAY            (1 << 13)
+/**
+ * error[?] variables will be set during encoding.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_PSNR            (1 << 15)
+#if FF_API_FLAG_TRUNCATED
+/**
+ * Input bitstream might be truncated at a random location
+ * instead of only at frame boundaries.
+ *
+ * @deprecated use codec parsers for packetizing input
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_TRUNCATED       (1 << 16)
+#endif
+/**
+ * Use interlaced DCT.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_INTERLACED_DCT  (1 << 18)
+/**
+ * Force low delay.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_LOW_DELAY       (1 << 19)
+/**
+ * Place global headers in extradata instead of every keyframe.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_GLOBAL_HEADER   (1 << 22)
+/**
+ * Use only bitexact stuff (except (I)DCT).
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_BITEXACT        (1 << 23)
+/* Fx : Flag for H.263+ extra options */
+/**
+ * H.263 advanced intra coding / MPEG-4 AC prediction
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_AC_PRED         (1 << 24)
+/**
+ * interlaced motion estimation
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_INTERLACED_ME   (1 << 29)
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG_CLOSED_GOP      (1U << 31)
+
+/**
+ * Allow non spec compliant speedup tricks.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG2_FAST           (1 <<  0)
+/**
+ * Skip bitstream encoding.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG2_NO_OUTPUT      (1 <<  2)
+/**
+ * Place global headers at every keyframe instead of in extradata.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG2_LOCAL_HEADER   (1 <<  3)
+
+/**
+ * timecode is in drop frame format. DEPRECATED!!!!
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG2_DROP_FRAME_TIMECODE (1 << 13)
+
+/**
+ * Input bitstream might be truncated at a packet boundaries
+ * instead of only at frame boundaries.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG2_CHUNKS         (1 << 15)
+/**
+ * Discard cropping information from SPS.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG2_IGNORE_CROP    (1 << 16)
+
+/**
+ * Show all frames before the first keyframe
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG2_SHOW_ALL       (1 << 22)
+/**
+ * Export motion vectors through frame side data
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG2_EXPORT_MVS     (1 << 28)
+/**
+ * Do not skip samples and export skip information as frame side data
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG2_SKIP_MANUAL    (1 << 29)
+/**
+ * Do not reset ASS ReadOrder field on flush (subtitles decoding)
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG2_RO_FLUSH_NOOP  (1 << 30)
+/**
+ * Generate/parse ICC profiles on encode/decode, as appropriate for the type of
+ * file. No effect on codecs which cannot contain embedded ICC profiles, or
+ * when compiled without support for lcms2.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_FLAG2_ICC_PROFILES   (1U << 31)
+
+/* Exported side data.
+   These flags can be passed in AVCodecContext.export_side_data before initialization.
+*/
+/**
+ * Export motion vectors through frame side data
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_EXPORT_DATA_MVS         (1 << 0)
+/**
+ * Export encoder Producer Reference Time through packet side data
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_EXPORT_DATA_PRFT        (1 << 1)
+/**
+ * Decoding only.
+ * Export the AVVideoEncParams structure through frame side data.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_EXPORT_DATA_VIDEO_ENC_PARAMS (1 << 2)
+/**
+ * Decoding only.
+ * Do not apply film grain, export it instead.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_EXPORT_DATA_FILM_GRAIN (1 << 3)
+
+/**
+ * The decoder will keep a reference to the frame and may reuse it later.
+ */
+#define AV_GET_BUFFER_FLAG_REF (1 << 0)
+
+/**
+ * The encoder will keep a reference to the packet and may reuse it later.
+ */
+#define AV_GET_ENCODE_BUFFER_FLAG_REF (1 << 0)
+
+struct AVCodecInternal;
+
+/**
+ * main external API structure.
+ * New fields can be added to the end with minor version bumps.
+ * Removal, reordering and changes to existing fields require a major
+ * version bump.
+ * You can use AVOptions (av_opt* / av_set/get*()) to access these fields from user
+ * applications.
+ * The name string for AVOptions options matches the associated command line
+ * parameter name and can be found in libavcodec/options_table.h
+ * The AVOption/command line parameter names differ in some cases from the C
+ * structure field names for historic reasons or brevity.
+ * sizeof(AVCodecContext) must not be used outside libav*.
+ */
+typedef struct AVCodecContext {
+    /**
+     * information on struct for av_log
+     * - set by avcodec_alloc_context3
+     */
+    const AVClass *av_class;
+    int log_level_offset;
+
+    enum AVMediaType codec_type; /* see AVMEDIA_TYPE_xxx */
+    const struct AVCodec  *codec;
+    enum AVCodecID     codec_id; /* see AV_CODEC_ID_xxx */
+
+    /**
+     * fourcc (LSB first, so "ABCD" -> ('D'<<24) + ('C'<<16) + ('B'<<8) + 'A').
+     * This is used to work around some encoder bugs.
+     * A demuxer should set this to what is stored in the field used to identify the codec.
+     * If there are multiple such fields in a container then the demuxer should choose the one
+     * which maximizes the information about the used codec.
+     * If the codec tag field in a container is larger than 32 bits then the demuxer should
+     * remap the longer ID to 32 bits with a table or other structure. Alternatively a new
+     * extra_codec_tag + size could be added but for this a clear advantage must be demonstrated
+     * first.
+     * - encoding: Set by user, if not then the default based on codec_id will be used.
+     * - decoding: Set by user, will be converted to uppercase by libavcodec during init.
+     */
+    unsigned int codec_tag;
+
+    void *priv_data;
+
+    /**
+     * Private context used for internal data.
+     *
+     * Unlike priv_data, this is not codec-specific. It is used in general
+     * libavcodec functions.
+     */
+    struct AVCodecInternal *internal;
+
+    /**
+     * Private data of the user, can be used to carry app specific stuff.
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    void *opaque;
+
+    /**
+     * the average bitrate
+     * - encoding: Set by user; unused for constant quantizer encoding.
+     * - decoding: Set by user, may be overwritten by libavcodec
+     *             if this info is available in the stream
+     */
+    int64_t bit_rate;
+
+    /**
+     * number of bits the bitstream is allowed to diverge from the reference.
+     *           the reference can be CBR (for CBR pass1) or VBR (for pass2)
+     * - encoding: Set by user; unused for constant quantizer encoding.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int bit_rate_tolerance;
+
+    /**
+     * Global quality for codecs which cannot change it per frame.
+     * This should be proportional to MPEG-1/2/4 qscale.
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int global_quality;
+
+    /**
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int compression_level;
+#define FF_COMPRESSION_DEFAULT -1
+
+    /**
+     * AV_CODEC_FLAG_*.
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    int flags;
+
+    /**
+     * AV_CODEC_FLAG2_*
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    int flags2;
+
+    /**
+     * some codecs need / can use extradata like Huffman tables.
+     * MJPEG: Huffman tables
+     * rv10: additional flags
+     * MPEG-4: global headers (they can be in the bitstream or here)
+     * The allocated memory should be AV_INPUT_BUFFER_PADDING_SIZE bytes larger
+     * than extradata_size to avoid problems if it is read with the bitstream reader.
+     * The bytewise contents of extradata must not depend on the architecture or CPU endianness.
+     * Must be allocated with the av_malloc() family of functions.
+     * - encoding: Set/allocated/freed by libavcodec.
+     * - decoding: Set/allocated/freed by user.
+     */
+    uint8_t *extradata;
+    int extradata_size;
+
+    /**
+     * This is the fundamental unit of time (in seconds) in terms
+     * of which frame timestamps are represented. For fixed-fps content,
+     * timebase should be 1/framerate and timestamp increments should be
+     * identically 1.
+     * This often, but not always is the inverse of the frame rate or field rate
+     * for video. 1/time_base is not the average frame rate if the frame rate is not
+     * constant.
+     *
+     * Like containers, elementary streams also can store timestamps, 1/time_base
+     * is the unit in which these timestamps are specified.
+     * As example of such codec time base see ISO/IEC 14496-2:2001(E)
+     * vop_time_increment_resolution and fixed_vop_rate
+     * (fixed_vop_rate == 0 implies that it is different from the framerate)
+     *
+     * - encoding: MUST be set by user.
+     * - decoding: the use of this field for decoding is deprecated.
+     *             Use framerate instead.
+     */
+    AVRational time_base;
+
+    /**
+     * For some codecs, the time base is closer to the field rate than the frame rate.
+     * Most notably, H.264 and MPEG-2 specify time_base as half of frame duration
+     * if no telecine is used ...
+     *
+     * Set to time_base ticks per frame. Default 1, e.g., H.264/MPEG-2 set it to 2.
+     */
+    int ticks_per_frame;
+
+    /**
+     * Codec delay.
+     *
+     * Encoding: Number of frames delay there will be from the encoder input to
+     *           the decoder output. (we assume the decoder matches the spec)
+     * Decoding: Number of frames delay in addition to what a standard decoder
+     *           as specified in the spec would produce.
+     *
+     * Video:
+     *   Number of frames the decoded output will be delayed relative to the
+     *   encoded input.
+     *
+     * Audio:
+     *   For encoding, this field is unused (see initial_padding).
+     *
+     *   For decoding, this is the number of samples the decoder needs to
+     *   output before the decoder's output is valid. When seeking, you should
+     *   start decoding this many samples prior to your desired seek point.
+     *
+     * - encoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     */
+    int delay;
+
+
+    /* video only */
+    /**
+     * picture width / height.
+     *
+     * @note Those fields may not match the values of the last
+     * AVFrame output by avcodec_receive_frame() due frame
+     * reordering.
+     *
+     * - encoding: MUST be set by user.
+     * - decoding: May be set by the user before opening the decoder if known e.g.
+     *             from the container. Some decoders will require the dimensions
+     *             to be set by the caller. During decoding, the decoder may
+     *             overwrite those values as required while parsing the data.
+     */
+    int width, height;
+
+    /**
+     * Bitstream width / height, may be different from width/height e.g. when
+     * the decoded frame is cropped before being output or lowres is enabled.
+     *
+     * @note Those field may not match the value of the last
+     * AVFrame output by avcodec_receive_frame() due frame
+     * reordering.
+     *
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: May be set by the user before opening the decoder if known
+     *             e.g. from the container. During decoding, the decoder may
+     *             overwrite those values as required while parsing the data.
+     */
+    int coded_width, coded_height;
+
+    /**
+     * the number of pictures in a group of pictures, or 0 for intra_only
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int gop_size;
+
+    /**
+     * Pixel format, see AV_PIX_FMT_xxx.
+     * May be set by the demuxer if known from headers.
+     * May be overridden by the decoder if it knows better.
+     *
+     * @note This field may not match the value of the last
+     * AVFrame output by avcodec_receive_frame() due frame
+     * reordering.
+     *
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by user if known, overridden by libavcodec while
+     *             parsing the data.
+     */
+    enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt;
+
+    /**
+     * If non NULL, 'draw_horiz_band' is called by the libavcodec
+     * decoder to draw a horizontal band. It improves cache usage. Not
+     * all codecs can do that. You must check the codec capabilities
+     * beforehand.
+     * When multithreading is used, it may be called from multiple threads
+     * at the same time; threads might draw different parts of the same AVFrame,
+     * or multiple AVFrames, and there is no guarantee that slices will be drawn
+     * in order.
+     * The function is also used by hardware acceleration APIs.
+     * It is called at least once during frame decoding to pass
+     * the data needed for hardware render.
+     * In that mode instead of pixel data, AVFrame points to
+     * a structure specific to the acceleration API. The application
+     * reads the structure and can change some fields to indicate progress
+     * or mark state.
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     * @param height the height of the slice
+     * @param y the y position of the slice
+     * @param type 1->top field, 2->bottom field, 3->frame
+     * @param offset offset into the AVFrame.data from which the slice should be read
+     */
+    void (*draw_horiz_band)(struct AVCodecContext *s,
+                            const AVFrame *src, int offset[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS],
+                            int y, int type, int height);
+
+    /**
+     * Callback to negotiate the pixel format. Decoding only, may be set by the
+     * caller before avcodec_open2().
+     *
+     * Called by some decoders to select the pixel format that will be used for
+     * the output frames. This is mainly used to set up hardware acceleration,
+     * then the provided format list contains the corresponding hwaccel pixel
+     * formats alongside the "software" one. The software pixel format may also
+     * be retrieved from \ref sw_pix_fmt.
+     *
+     * This callback will be called when the coded frame properties (such as
+     * resolution, pixel format, etc.) change and more than one output format is
+     * supported for those new properties. If a hardware pixel format is chosen
+     * and initialization for it fails, the callback may be called again
+     * immediately.
+     *
+     * This callback may be called from different threads if the decoder is
+     * multi-threaded, but not from more than one thread simultaneously.
+     *
+     * @param fmt list of formats which may be used in the current
+     *            configuration, terminated by AV_PIX_FMT_NONE.
+     * @warning Behavior is undefined if the callback returns a value other
+     *          than one of the formats in fmt or AV_PIX_FMT_NONE.
+     * @return the chosen format or AV_PIX_FMT_NONE
+     */
+    enum AVPixelFormat (*get_format)(struct AVCodecContext *s, const enum AVPixelFormat * fmt);
+
+    /**
+     * maximum number of B-frames between non-B-frames
+     * Note: The output will be delayed by max_b_frames+1 relative to the input.
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int max_b_frames;
+
+    /**
+     * qscale factor between IP and B-frames
+     * If > 0 then the last P-frame quantizer will be used (q= lastp_q*factor+offset).
+     * If < 0 then normal ratecontrol will be done (q= -normal_q*factor+offset).
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    float b_quant_factor;
+
+    /**
+     * qscale offset between IP and B-frames
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    float b_quant_offset;
+
+    /**
+     * Size of the frame reordering buffer in the decoder.
+     * For MPEG-2 it is 1 IPB or 0 low delay IP.
+     * - encoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     */
+    int has_b_frames;
+
+    /**
+     * qscale factor between P- and I-frames
+     * If > 0 then the last P-frame quantizer will be used (q = lastp_q * factor + offset).
+     * If < 0 then normal ratecontrol will be done (q= -normal_q*factor+offset).
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    float i_quant_factor;
+
+    /**
+     * qscale offset between P and I-frames
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    float i_quant_offset;
+
+    /**
+     * luminance masking (0-> disabled)
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    float lumi_masking;
+
+    /**
+     * temporary complexity masking (0-> disabled)
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    float temporal_cplx_masking;
+
+    /**
+     * spatial complexity masking (0-> disabled)
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    float spatial_cplx_masking;
+
+    /**
+     * p block masking (0-> disabled)
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    float p_masking;
+
+    /**
+     * darkness masking (0-> disabled)
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    float dark_masking;
+
+    /**
+     * slice count
+     * - encoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     * - decoding: Set by user (or 0).
+     */
+    int slice_count;
+
+    /**
+     * slice offsets in the frame in bytes
+     * - encoding: Set/allocated by libavcodec.
+     * - decoding: Set/allocated by user (or NULL).
+     */
+    int *slice_offset;
+
+    /**
+     * sample aspect ratio (0 if unknown)
+     * That is the width of a pixel divided by the height of the pixel.
+     * Numerator and denominator must be relatively prime and smaller than 256 for some video standards.
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     */
+    AVRational sample_aspect_ratio;
+
+    /**
+     * motion estimation comparison function
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int me_cmp;
+    /**
+     * subpixel motion estimation comparison function
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int me_sub_cmp;
+    /**
+     * macroblock comparison function (not supported yet)
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int mb_cmp;
+    /**
+     * interlaced DCT comparison function
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int ildct_cmp;
+#define FF_CMP_SAD          0
+#define FF_CMP_SSE          1
+#define FF_CMP_SATD         2
+#define FF_CMP_DCT          3
+#define FF_CMP_PSNR         4
+#define FF_CMP_BIT          5
+#define FF_CMP_RD           6
+#define FF_CMP_ZERO         7
+#define FF_CMP_VSAD         8
+#define FF_CMP_VSSE         9
+#define FF_CMP_NSSE         10
+#define FF_CMP_W53          11
+#define FF_CMP_W97          12
+#define FF_CMP_DCTMAX       13
+#define FF_CMP_DCT264       14
+#define FF_CMP_MEDIAN_SAD   15
+#define FF_CMP_CHROMA       256
+
+    /**
+     * ME diamond size & shape
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int dia_size;
+
+    /**
+     * amount of previous MV predictors (2a+1 x 2a+1 square)
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int last_predictor_count;
+
+    /**
+     * motion estimation prepass comparison function
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int me_pre_cmp;
+
+    /**
+     * ME prepass diamond size & shape
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int pre_dia_size;
+
+    /**
+     * subpel ME quality
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int me_subpel_quality;
+
+    /**
+     * maximum motion estimation search range in subpel units
+     * If 0 then no limit.
+     *
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int me_range;
+
+    /**
+     * slice flags
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    int slice_flags;
+#define SLICE_FLAG_CODED_ORDER    0x0001 ///< draw_horiz_band() is called in coded order instead of display
+#define SLICE_FLAG_ALLOW_FIELD    0x0002 ///< allow draw_horiz_band() with field slices (MPEG-2 field pics)
+#define SLICE_FLAG_ALLOW_PLANE    0x0004 ///< allow draw_horiz_band() with 1 component at a time (SVQ1)
+
+    /**
+     * macroblock decision mode
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int mb_decision;
+#define FF_MB_DECISION_SIMPLE 0        ///< uses mb_cmp
+#define FF_MB_DECISION_BITS   1        ///< chooses the one which needs the fewest bits
+#define FF_MB_DECISION_RD     2        ///< rate distortion
+
+    /**
+     * custom intra quantization matrix
+     * Must be allocated with the av_malloc() family of functions, and will be freed in
+     * avcodec_free_context().
+     * - encoding: Set/allocated by user, freed by libavcodec. Can be NULL.
+     * - decoding: Set/allocated/freed by libavcodec.
+     */
+    uint16_t *intra_matrix;
+
+    /**
+     * custom inter quantization matrix
+     * Must be allocated with the av_malloc() family of functions, and will be freed in
+     * avcodec_free_context().
+     * - encoding: Set/allocated by user, freed by libavcodec. Can be NULL.
+     * - decoding: Set/allocated/freed by libavcodec.
+     */
+    uint16_t *inter_matrix;
+
+    /**
+     * precision of the intra DC coefficient - 8
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+     */
+    int intra_dc_precision;
+
+    /**
+     * Number of macroblock rows at the top which are skipped.
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    int skip_top;
+
+    /**
+     * Number of macroblock rows at the bottom which are skipped.
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    int skip_bottom;
+
+    /**
+     * minimum MB Lagrange multiplier
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int mb_lmin;
+
+    /**
+     * maximum MB Lagrange multiplier
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int mb_lmax;
+
+    /**
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int bidir_refine;
+
+    /**
+     * minimum GOP size
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int keyint_min;
+
+    /**
+     * number of reference frames
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by lavc.
+     */
+    int refs;
+
+    /**
+     * Note: Value depends upon the compare function used for fullpel ME.
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int mv0_threshold;
+
+    /**
+     * Chromaticity coordinates of the source primaries.
+     * - encoding: Set by user
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+     */
+    enum AVColorPrimaries color_primaries;
+
+    /**
+     * Color Transfer Characteristic.
+     * - encoding: Set by user
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+     */
+    enum AVColorTransferCharacteristic color_trc;
+
+    /**
+     * YUV colorspace type.
+     * - encoding: Set by user
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+     */
+    enum AVColorSpace colorspace;
+
+    /**
+     * MPEG vs JPEG YUV range.
+     * - encoding: Set by user
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+     */
+    enum AVColorRange color_range;
+
+    /**
+     * This defines the location of chroma samples.
+     * - encoding: Set by user
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+     */
+    enum AVChromaLocation chroma_sample_location;
+
+    /**
+     * Number of slices.
+     * Indicates number of picture subdivisions. Used for parallelized
+     * decoding.
+     * - encoding: Set by user
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int slices;
+
+    /** Field order
+     * - encoding: set by libavcodec
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    enum AVFieldOrder field_order;
+
+    /* audio only */
+    int sample_rate; ///< samples per second
+
+#if FF_API_OLD_CHANNEL_LAYOUT
+    /**
+     * number of audio channels
+     * @deprecated use ch_layout.nb_channels
+     */
+    attribute_deprecated
+    int channels;
+#endif
+
+    /**
+     * audio sample format
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     */
+    enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt;  ///< sample format
+
+    /* The following data should not be initialized. */
+    /**
+     * Number of samples per channel in an audio frame.
+     *
+     * - encoding: set by libavcodec in avcodec_open2(). Each submitted frame
+     *   except the last must contain exactly frame_size samples per channel.
+     *   May be 0 when the codec has AV_CODEC_CAP_VARIABLE_FRAME_SIZE set, then the
+     *   frame size is not restricted.
+     * - decoding: may be set by some decoders to indicate constant frame size
+     */
+    int frame_size;
+
+    /**
+     * Frame counter, set by libavcodec.
+     *
+     * - decoding: total number of frames returned from the decoder so far.
+     * - encoding: total number of frames passed to the encoder so far.
+     *
+     *   @note the counter is not incremented if encoding/decoding resulted in
+     *   an error.
+     */
+    int frame_number;
+
+    /**
+     * number of bytes per packet if constant and known or 0
+     * Used by some WAV based audio codecs.
+     */
+    int block_align;
+
+    /**
+     * Audio cutoff bandwidth (0 means "automatic")
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int cutoff;
+
+#if FF_API_OLD_CHANNEL_LAYOUT
+    /**
+     * Audio channel layout.
+     * - encoding: set by user.
+     * - decoding: set by user, may be overwritten by libavcodec.
+     * @deprecated use ch_layout
+     */
+    attribute_deprecated
+    uint64_t channel_layout;
+
+    /**
+     * Request decoder to use this channel layout if it can (0 for default)
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     * @deprecated use "downmix" codec private option
+     */
+    attribute_deprecated
+    uint64_t request_channel_layout;
+#endif
+
+    /**
+     * Type of service that the audio stream conveys.
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     */
+    enum AVAudioServiceType audio_service_type;
+
+    /**
+     * desired sample format
+     * - encoding: Not used.
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     * Decoder will decode to this format if it can.
+     */
+    enum AVSampleFormat request_sample_fmt;
+
+    /**
+     * This callback is called at the beginning of each frame to get data
+     * buffer(s) for it. There may be one contiguous buffer for all the data or
+     * there may be a buffer per each data plane or anything in between. What
+     * this means is, you may set however many entries in buf[] you feel necessary.
+     * Each buffer must be reference-counted using the AVBuffer API (see description
+     * of buf[] below).
+     *
+     * The following fields will be set in the frame before this callback is
+     * called:
+     * - format
+     * - width, height (video only)
+     * - sample_rate, channel_layout, nb_samples (audio only)
+     * Their values may differ from the corresponding values in
+     * AVCodecContext. This callback must use the frame values, not the codec
+     * context values, to calculate the required buffer size.
+     *
+     * This callback must fill the following fields in the frame:
+     * - data[]
+     * - linesize[]
+     * - extended_data:
+     *   * if the data is planar audio with more than 8 channels, then this
+     *     callback must allocate and fill extended_data to contain all pointers
+     *     to all data planes. data[] must hold as many pointers as it can.
+     *     extended_data must be allocated with av_malloc() and will be freed in
+     *     av_frame_unref().
+     *   * otherwise extended_data must point to data
+     * - buf[] must contain one or more pointers to AVBufferRef structures. Each of
+     *   the frame's data and extended_data pointers must be contained in these. That
+     *   is, one AVBufferRef for each allocated chunk of memory, not necessarily one
+     *   AVBufferRef per data[] entry. See: av_buffer_create(), av_buffer_alloc(),
+     *   and av_buffer_ref().
+     * - extended_buf and nb_extended_buf must be allocated with av_malloc() by
+     *   this callback and filled with the extra buffers if there are more
+     *   buffers than buf[] can hold. extended_buf will be freed in
+     *   av_frame_unref().
+     *
+     * If AV_CODEC_CAP_DR1 is not set then get_buffer2() must call
+     * avcodec_default_get_buffer2() instead of providing buffers allocated by
+     * some other means.
+     *
+     * Each data plane must be aligned to the maximum required by the target
+     * CPU.
+     *
+     * @see avcodec_default_get_buffer2()
+     *
+     * Video:
+     *
+     * If AV_GET_BUFFER_FLAG_REF is set in flags then the frame may be reused
+     * (read and/or written to if it is writable) later by libavcodec.
+     *
+     * avcodec_align_dimensions2() should be used to find the required width and
+     * height, as they normally need to be rounded up to the next multiple of 16.
+     *
+     * Some decoders do not support linesizes changing between frames.
+     *
+     * If frame multithreading is used, this callback may be called from a
+     * different thread, but not from more than one at once. Does not need to be
+     * reentrant.
+     *
+     * @see avcodec_align_dimensions2()
+     *
+     * Audio:
+     *
+     * Decoders request a buffer of a particular size by setting
+     * AVFrame.nb_samples prior to calling get_buffer2(). The decoder may,
+     * however, utilize only part of the buffer by setting AVFrame.nb_samples
+     * to a smaller value in the output frame.
+     *
+     * As a convenience, av_samples_get_buffer_size() and
+     * av_samples_fill_arrays() in libavutil may be used by custom get_buffer2()
+     * functions to find the required data size and to fill data pointers and
+     * linesize. In AVFrame.linesize, only linesize[0] may be set for audio
+     * since all planes must be the same size.
+     *
+     * @see av_samples_get_buffer_size(), av_samples_fill_arrays()
+     *
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec, user can override.
+     */
+    int (*get_buffer2)(struct AVCodecContext *s, AVFrame *frame, int flags);
+
+    /* - encoding parameters */
+    float qcompress;  ///< amount of qscale change between easy & hard scenes (0.0-1.0)
+    float qblur;      ///< amount of qscale smoothing over time (0.0-1.0)
+
+    /**
+     * minimum quantizer
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int qmin;
+
+    /**
+     * maximum quantizer
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int qmax;
+
+    /**
+     * maximum quantizer difference between frames
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int max_qdiff;
+
+    /**
+     * decoder bitstream buffer size
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int rc_buffer_size;
+
+    /**
+     * ratecontrol override, see RcOverride
+     * - encoding: Allocated/set/freed by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int rc_override_count;
+    RcOverride *rc_override;
+
+    /**
+     * maximum bitrate
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by user, may be overwritten by libavcodec.
+     */
+    int64_t rc_max_rate;
+
+    /**
+     * minimum bitrate
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int64_t rc_min_rate;
+
+    /**
+     * Ratecontrol attempt to use, at maximum, <value> of what can be used without an underflow.
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused.
+     */
+    float rc_max_available_vbv_use;
+
+    /**
+     * Ratecontrol attempt to use, at least, <value> times the amount needed to prevent a vbv overflow.
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused.
+     */
+    float rc_min_vbv_overflow_use;
+
+    /**
+     * Number of bits which should be loaded into the rc buffer before decoding starts.
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int rc_initial_buffer_occupancy;
+
+    /**
+     * trellis RD quantization
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int trellis;
+
+    /**
+     * pass1 encoding statistics output buffer
+     * - encoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    char *stats_out;
+
+    /**
+     * pass2 encoding statistics input buffer
+     * Concatenated stuff from stats_out of pass1 should be placed here.
+     * - encoding: Allocated/set/freed by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    char *stats_in;
+
+    /**
+     * Work around bugs in encoders which sometimes cannot be detected automatically.
+     * - encoding: Set by user
+     * - decoding: Set by user
+     */
+    int workaround_bugs;
+#define FF_BUG_AUTODETECT       1  ///< autodetection
+#define FF_BUG_XVID_ILACE       4
+#define FF_BUG_UMP4             8
+#define FF_BUG_NO_PADDING       16
+#define FF_BUG_AMV              32
+#define FF_BUG_QPEL_CHROMA      64
+#define FF_BUG_STD_QPEL         128
+#define FF_BUG_QPEL_CHROMA2     256
+#define FF_BUG_DIRECT_BLOCKSIZE 512
+#define FF_BUG_EDGE             1024
+#define FF_BUG_HPEL_CHROMA      2048
+#define FF_BUG_DC_CLIP          4096
+#define FF_BUG_MS               8192 ///< Work around various bugs in Microsoft's broken decoders.
+#define FF_BUG_TRUNCATED       16384
+#define FF_BUG_IEDGE           32768
+
+    /**
+     * strictly follow the standard (MPEG-4, ...).
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     * Setting this to STRICT or higher means the encoder and decoder will
+     * generally do stupid things, whereas setting it to unofficial or lower
+     * will mean the encoder might produce output that is not supported by all
+     * spec-compliant decoders. Decoders don't differentiate between normal,
+     * unofficial and experimental (that is, they always try to decode things
+     * when they can) unless they are explicitly asked to behave stupidly
+     * (=strictly conform to the specs)
+     * This may only be set to one of the FF_COMPLIANCE_* values in defs.h.
+     */
+    int strict_std_compliance;
+
+    /**
+     * error concealment flags
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    int error_concealment;
+#define FF_EC_GUESS_MVS   1
+#define FF_EC_DEBLOCK     2
+#define FF_EC_FAVOR_INTER 256
+
+    /**
+     * debug
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    int debug;
+#define FF_DEBUG_PICT_INFO   1
+#define FF_DEBUG_RC          2
+#define FF_DEBUG_BITSTREAM   4
+#define FF_DEBUG_MB_TYPE     8
+#define FF_DEBUG_QP          16
+#define FF_DEBUG_DCT_COEFF   0x00000040
+#define FF_DEBUG_SKIP        0x00000080
+#define FF_DEBUG_STARTCODE   0x00000100
+#define FF_DEBUG_ER          0x00000400
+#define FF_DEBUG_MMCO        0x00000800
+#define FF_DEBUG_BUGS        0x00001000
+#define FF_DEBUG_BUFFERS     0x00008000
+#define FF_DEBUG_THREADS     0x00010000
+#define FF_DEBUG_GREEN_MD    0x00800000
+#define FF_DEBUG_NOMC        0x01000000
+
+    /**
+     * Error recognition; may misdetect some more or less valid parts as errors.
+     * This is a bitfield of the AV_EF_* values defined in defs.h.
+     *
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    int err_recognition;
+
+    /**
+     * opaque 64-bit number (generally a PTS) that will be reordered and
+     * output in AVFrame.reordered_opaque
+     * - encoding: Set by libavcodec to the reordered_opaque of the input
+     *             frame corresponding to the last returned packet. Only
+     *             supported by encoders with the
+     *             AV_CODEC_CAP_ENCODER_REORDERED_OPAQUE capability.
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    int64_t reordered_opaque;
+
+    /**
+     * Hardware accelerator in use
+     * - encoding: unused.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+     */
+    const struct AVHWAccel *hwaccel;
+
+    /**
+     * Legacy hardware accelerator context.
+     *
+     * For some hardware acceleration methods, the caller may use this field to
+     * signal hwaccel-specific data to the codec. The struct pointed to by this
+     * pointer is hwaccel-dependent and defined in the respective header. Please
+     * refer to the FFmpeg HW accelerator documentation to know how to fill
+     * this.
+     *
+     * In most cases this field is optional - the necessary information may also
+     * be provided to libavcodec through @ref hw_frames_ctx or @ref
+     * hw_device_ctx (see avcodec_get_hw_config()). However, in some cases it
+     * may be the only method of signalling some (optional) information.
+     *
+     * The struct and its contents are owned by the caller.
+     *
+     * - encoding: May be set by the caller before avcodec_open2(). Must remain
+     *             valid until avcodec_free_context().
+     * - decoding: May be set by the caller in the get_format() callback.
+     *             Must remain valid until the next get_format() call,
+     *             or avcodec_free_context() (whichever comes first).
+     */
+    void *hwaccel_context;
+
+    /**
+     * error
+     * - encoding: Set by libavcodec if flags & AV_CODEC_FLAG_PSNR.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    uint64_t error[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS];
+
+    /**
+     * DCT algorithm, see FF_DCT_* below
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int dct_algo;
+#define FF_DCT_AUTO    0
+#define FF_DCT_FASTINT 1
+#define FF_DCT_INT     2
+#define FF_DCT_MMX     3
+#define FF_DCT_ALTIVEC 5
+#define FF_DCT_FAAN    6
+
+    /**
+     * IDCT algorithm, see FF_IDCT_* below.
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    int idct_algo;
+#define FF_IDCT_AUTO          0
+#define FF_IDCT_INT           1
+#define FF_IDCT_SIMPLE        2
+#define FF_IDCT_SIMPLEMMX     3
+#define FF_IDCT_ARM           7
+#define FF_IDCT_ALTIVEC       8
+#define FF_IDCT_SIMPLEARM     10
+#define FF_IDCT_XVID          14
+#define FF_IDCT_SIMPLEARMV5TE 16
+#define FF_IDCT_SIMPLEARMV6   17
+#define FF_IDCT_FAAN          20
+#define FF_IDCT_SIMPLENEON    22
+#if FF_API_IDCT_NONE
+// formerly used by xvmc
+#define FF_IDCT_NONE          24
+#endif
+#define FF_IDCT_SIMPLEAUTO    128
+
+    /**
+     * bits per sample/pixel from the demuxer (needed for huffyuv).
+     * - encoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+     int bits_per_coded_sample;
+
+    /**
+     * Bits per sample/pixel of internal libavcodec pixel/sample format.
+     * - encoding: set by user.
+     * - decoding: set by libavcodec.
+     */
+    int bits_per_raw_sample;
+
+    /**
+     * low resolution decoding, 1-> 1/2 size, 2->1/4 size
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+     int lowres;
+
+    /**
+     * thread count
+     * is used to decide how many independent tasks should be passed to execute()
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    int thread_count;
+
+    /**
+     * Which multithreading methods to use.
+     * Use of FF_THREAD_FRAME will increase decoding delay by one frame per thread,
+     * so clients which cannot provide future frames should not use it.
+     *
+     * - encoding: Set by user, otherwise the default is used.
+     * - decoding: Set by user, otherwise the default is used.
+     */
+    int thread_type;
+#define FF_THREAD_FRAME   1 ///< Decode more than one frame at once
+#define FF_THREAD_SLICE   2 ///< Decode more than one part of a single frame at once
+
+    /**
+     * Which multithreading methods are in use by the codec.
+     * - encoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     */
+    int active_thread_type;
+
+#if FF_API_THREAD_SAFE_CALLBACKS
+    /**
+     * Set by the client if its custom get_buffer() callback can be called
+     * synchronously from another thread, which allows faster multithreaded decoding.
+     * draw_horiz_band() will be called from other threads regardless of this setting.
+     * Ignored if the default get_buffer() is used.
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     *
+     * @deprecated the custom get_buffer2() callback should always be
+     *   thread-safe. Thread-unsafe get_buffer2() implementations will be
+     *   invalid starting with LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR=60; in other words,
+     *   libavcodec will behave as if this field was always set to 1.
+     *   Callers that want to be forward compatible with future libavcodec
+     *   versions should wrap access to this field in
+     *     `#if LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 60`
+     */
+    attribute_deprecated
+    int thread_safe_callbacks;
+#endif
+
+    /**
+     * The codec may call this to execute several independent things.
+     * It will return only after finishing all tasks.
+     * The user may replace this with some multithreaded implementation,
+     * the default implementation will execute the parts serially.
+     * @param count the number of things to execute
+     * - encoding: Set by libavcodec, user can override.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec, user can override.
+     */
+    int (*execute)(struct AVCodecContext *c, int (*func)(struct AVCodecContext *c2, void *arg), void *arg2, int *ret, int count, int size);
+
+    /**
+     * The codec may call this to execute several independent things.
+     * It will return only after finishing all tasks.
+     * The user may replace this with some multithreaded implementation,
+     * the default implementation will execute the parts serially.
+     * @param c context passed also to func
+     * @param count the number of things to execute
+     * @param arg2 argument passed unchanged to func
+     * @param ret return values of executed functions, must have space for "count" values. May be NULL.
+     * @param func function that will be called count times, with jobnr from 0 to count-1.
+     *             threadnr will be in the range 0 to c->thread_count-1 < MAX_THREADS and so that no
+     *             two instances of func executing at the same time will have the same threadnr.
+     * @return always 0 currently, but code should handle a future improvement where when any call to func
+     *         returns < 0 no further calls to func may be done and < 0 is returned.
+     * - encoding: Set by libavcodec, user can override.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec, user can override.
+     */
+    int (*execute2)(struct AVCodecContext *c, int (*func)(struct AVCodecContext *c2, void *arg, int jobnr, int threadnr), void *arg2, int *ret, int count);
+
+    /**
+     * noise vs. sse weight for the nsse comparison function
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+     int nsse_weight;
+
+    /**
+     * profile
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     */
+     int profile;
+#define FF_PROFILE_UNKNOWN -99
+#define FF_PROFILE_RESERVED -100
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_AAC_MAIN 0
+#define FF_PROFILE_AAC_LOW  1
+#define FF_PROFILE_AAC_SSR  2
+#define FF_PROFILE_AAC_LTP  3
+#define FF_PROFILE_AAC_HE   4
+#define FF_PROFILE_AAC_HE_V2 28
+#define FF_PROFILE_AAC_LD   22
+#define FF_PROFILE_AAC_ELD  38
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG2_AAC_LOW 128
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG2_AAC_HE  131
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_DNXHD         0
+#define FF_PROFILE_DNXHR_LB      1
+#define FF_PROFILE_DNXHR_SQ      2
+#define FF_PROFILE_DNXHR_HQ      3
+#define FF_PROFILE_DNXHR_HQX     4
+#define FF_PROFILE_DNXHR_444     5
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_DTS         20
+#define FF_PROFILE_DTS_ES      30
+#define FF_PROFILE_DTS_96_24   40
+#define FF_PROFILE_DTS_HD_HRA  50
+#define FF_PROFILE_DTS_HD_MA   60
+#define FF_PROFILE_DTS_EXPRESS 70
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG2_422    0
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG2_HIGH   1
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG2_SS     2
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG2_SNR_SCALABLE  3
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG2_MAIN   4
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG2_SIMPLE 5
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_CONSTRAINED  (1<<9)  // 8+1; constraint_set1_flag
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_INTRA        (1<<11) // 8+3; constraint_set3_flag
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_BASELINE             66
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_CONSTRAINED_BASELINE (66|FF_PROFILE_H264_CONSTRAINED)
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_MAIN                 77
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_EXTENDED             88
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_HIGH                 100
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_HIGH_10              110
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_HIGH_10_INTRA        (110|FF_PROFILE_H264_INTRA)
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_MULTIVIEW_HIGH       118
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_HIGH_422             122
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_HIGH_422_INTRA       (122|FF_PROFILE_H264_INTRA)
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_STEREO_HIGH          128
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_HIGH_444             144
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_HIGH_444_PREDICTIVE  244
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_HIGH_444_INTRA       (244|FF_PROFILE_H264_INTRA)
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_CAVLC_444            44
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_VC1_SIMPLE   0
+#define FF_PROFILE_VC1_MAIN     1
+#define FF_PROFILE_VC1_COMPLEX  2
+#define FF_PROFILE_VC1_ADVANCED 3
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_SIMPLE                     0
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_SIMPLE_SCALABLE            1
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_CORE                       2
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_MAIN                       3
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_N_BIT                      4
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_SCALABLE_TEXTURE           5
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_SIMPLE_FACE_ANIMATION      6
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_BASIC_ANIMATED_TEXTURE     7
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_HYBRID                     8
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_ADVANCED_REAL_TIME         9
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_CORE_SCALABLE             10
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_ADVANCED_CODING           11
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_ADVANCED_CORE             12
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_ADVANCED_SCALABLE_TEXTURE 13
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_SIMPLE_STUDIO             14
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_ADVANCED_SIMPLE           15
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_JPEG2000_CSTREAM_RESTRICTION_0   1
+#define FF_PROFILE_JPEG2000_CSTREAM_RESTRICTION_1   2
+#define FF_PROFILE_JPEG2000_CSTREAM_NO_RESTRICTION  32768
+#define FF_PROFILE_JPEG2000_DCINEMA_2K              3
+#define FF_PROFILE_JPEG2000_DCINEMA_4K              4
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_VP9_0                            0
+#define FF_PROFILE_VP9_1                            1
+#define FF_PROFILE_VP9_2                            2
+#define FF_PROFILE_VP9_3                            3
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_HEVC_MAIN                        1
+#define FF_PROFILE_HEVC_MAIN_10                     2
+#define FF_PROFILE_HEVC_MAIN_STILL_PICTURE          3
+#define FF_PROFILE_HEVC_REXT                        4
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_VVC_MAIN_10                      1
+#define FF_PROFILE_VVC_MAIN_10_444                 33
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_AV1_MAIN                         0
+#define FF_PROFILE_AV1_HIGH                         1
+#define FF_PROFILE_AV1_PROFESSIONAL                 2
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_MJPEG_HUFFMAN_BASELINE_DCT            0xc0
+#define FF_PROFILE_MJPEG_HUFFMAN_EXTENDED_SEQUENTIAL_DCT 0xc1
+#define FF_PROFILE_MJPEG_HUFFMAN_PROGRESSIVE_DCT         0xc2
+#define FF_PROFILE_MJPEG_HUFFMAN_LOSSLESS                0xc3
+#define FF_PROFILE_MJPEG_JPEG_LS                         0xf7
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_SBC_MSBC                         1
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_PRORES_PROXY     0
+#define FF_PROFILE_PRORES_LT        1
+#define FF_PROFILE_PRORES_STANDARD  2
+#define FF_PROFILE_PRORES_HQ        3
+#define FF_PROFILE_PRORES_4444      4
+#define FF_PROFILE_PRORES_XQ        5
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_ARIB_PROFILE_A 0
+#define FF_PROFILE_ARIB_PROFILE_C 1
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_KLVA_SYNC 0
+#define FF_PROFILE_KLVA_ASYNC 1
+
+    /**
+     * level
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     */
+     int level;
+#define FF_LEVEL_UNKNOWN -99
+
+    /**
+     * Skip loop filtering for selected frames.
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    enum AVDiscard skip_loop_filter;
+
+    /**
+     * Skip IDCT/dequantization for selected frames.
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    enum AVDiscard skip_idct;
+
+    /**
+     * Skip decoding for selected frames.
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    enum AVDiscard skip_frame;
+
+    /**
+     * Header containing style information for text subtitles.
+     * For SUBTITLE_ASS subtitle type, it should contain the whole ASS
+     * [Script Info] and [V4+ Styles] section, plus the [Events] line and
+     * the Format line following. It shouldn't include any Dialogue line.
+     * - encoding: Set/allocated/freed by user (before avcodec_open2())
+     * - decoding: Set/allocated/freed by libavcodec (by avcodec_open2())
+     */
+    uint8_t *subtitle_header;
+    int subtitle_header_size;
+
+    /**
+     * Audio only. The number of "priming" samples (padding) inserted by the
+     * encoder at the beginning of the audio. I.e. this number of leading
+     * decoded samples must be discarded by the caller to get the original audio
+     * without leading padding.
+     *
+     * - decoding: unused
+     * - encoding: Set by libavcodec. The timestamps on the output packets are
+     *             adjusted by the encoder so that they always refer to the
+     *             first sample of the data actually contained in the packet,
+     *             including any added padding.  E.g. if the timebase is
+     *             1/samplerate and the timestamp of the first input sample is
+     *             0, the timestamp of the first output packet will be
+     *             -initial_padding.
+     */
+    int initial_padding;
+
+    /**
+     * - decoding: For codecs that store a framerate value in the compressed
+     *             bitstream, the decoder may export it here. { 0, 1} when
+     *             unknown.
+     * - encoding: May be used to signal the framerate of CFR content to an
+     *             encoder.
+     */
+    AVRational framerate;
+
+    /**
+     * Nominal unaccelerated pixel format, see AV_PIX_FMT_xxx.
+     * - encoding: unused.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec before calling get_format()
+     */
+    enum AVPixelFormat sw_pix_fmt;
+
+    /**
+     * Timebase in which pkt_dts/pts and AVPacket.dts/pts are.
+     * - encoding unused.
+     * - decoding set by user.
+     */
+    AVRational pkt_timebase;
+
+    /**
+     * AVCodecDescriptor
+     * - encoding: unused.
+     * - decoding: set by libavcodec.
+     */
+    const AVCodecDescriptor *codec_descriptor;
+
+    /**
+     * Current statistics for PTS correction.
+     * - decoding: maintained and used by libavcodec, not intended to be used by user apps
+     * - encoding: unused
+     */
+    int64_t pts_correction_num_faulty_pts; /// Number of incorrect PTS values so far
+    int64_t pts_correction_num_faulty_dts; /// Number of incorrect DTS values so far
+    int64_t pts_correction_last_pts;       /// PTS of the last frame
+    int64_t pts_correction_last_dts;       /// DTS of the last frame
+
+    /**
+     * Character encoding of the input subtitles file.
+     * - decoding: set by user
+     * - encoding: unused
+     */
+    char *sub_charenc;
+
+    /**
+     * Subtitles character encoding mode. Formats or codecs might be adjusting
+     * this setting (if they are doing the conversion themselves for instance).
+     * - decoding: set by libavcodec
+     * - encoding: unused
+     */
+    int sub_charenc_mode;
+#define FF_SUB_CHARENC_MODE_DO_NOTHING  -1  ///< do nothing (demuxer outputs a stream supposed to be already in UTF-8, or the codec is bitmap for instance)
+#define FF_SUB_CHARENC_MODE_AUTOMATIC    0  ///< libavcodec will select the mode itself
+#define FF_SUB_CHARENC_MODE_PRE_DECODER  1  ///< the AVPacket data needs to be recoded to UTF-8 before being fed to the decoder, requires iconv
+#define FF_SUB_CHARENC_MODE_IGNORE       2  ///< neither convert the subtitles, nor check them for valid UTF-8
+
+    /**
+     * Skip processing alpha if supported by codec.
+     * Note that if the format uses pre-multiplied alpha (common with VP6,
+     * and recommended due to better video quality/compression)
+     * the image will look as if alpha-blended onto a black background.
+     * However for formats that do not use pre-multiplied alpha
+     * there might be serious artefacts (though e.g. libswscale currently
+     * assumes pre-multiplied alpha anyway).
+     *
+     * - decoding: set by user
+     * - encoding: unused
+     */
+    int skip_alpha;
+
+    /**
+     * Number of samples to skip after a discontinuity
+     * - decoding: unused
+     * - encoding: set by libavcodec
+     */
+    int seek_preroll;
+
+#if FF_API_DEBUG_MV
+    /**
+     * @deprecated unused
+     */
+    attribute_deprecated
+    int debug_mv;
+#define FF_DEBUG_VIS_MV_P_FOR  0x00000001 //visualize forward predicted MVs of P frames
+#define FF_DEBUG_VIS_MV_B_FOR  0x00000002 //visualize forward predicted MVs of B frames
+#define FF_DEBUG_VIS_MV_B_BACK 0x00000004 //visualize backward predicted MVs of B frames
+#endif
+
+    /**
+     * custom intra quantization matrix
+     * - encoding: Set by user, can be NULL.
+     * - decoding: unused.
+     */
+    uint16_t *chroma_intra_matrix;
+
+    /**
+     * dump format separator.
+     * can be ", " or "\n      " or anything else
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by user.
+     */
+    uint8_t *dump_separator;
+
+    /**
+     * ',' separated list of allowed decoders.
+     * If NULL then all are allowed
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: set by user
+     */
+    char *codec_whitelist;
+
+    /**
+     * Properties of the stream that gets decoded
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: set by libavcodec
+     */
+    unsigned properties;
+#define FF_CODEC_PROPERTY_LOSSLESS        0x00000001
+#define FF_CODEC_PROPERTY_CLOSED_CAPTIONS 0x00000002
+#define FF_CODEC_PROPERTY_FILM_GRAIN      0x00000004
+
+    /**
+     * Additional data associated with the entire coded stream.
+     *
+     * - decoding: unused
+     * - encoding: may be set by libavcodec after avcodec_open2().
+     */
+    AVPacketSideData *coded_side_data;
+    int            nb_coded_side_data;
+
+    /**
+     * A reference to the AVHWFramesContext describing the input (for encoding)
+     * or output (decoding) frames. The reference is set by the caller and
+     * afterwards owned (and freed) by libavcodec - it should never be read by
+     * the caller after being set.
+     *
+     * - decoding: This field should be set by the caller from the get_format()
+     *             callback. The previous reference (if any) will always be
+     *             unreffed by libavcodec before the get_format() call.
+     *
+     *             If the default get_buffer2() is used with a hwaccel pixel
+     *             format, then this AVHWFramesContext will be used for
+     *             allocating the frame buffers.
+     *
+     * - encoding: For hardware encoders configured to use a hwaccel pixel
+     *             format, this field should be set by the caller to a reference
+     *             to the AVHWFramesContext describing input frames.
+     *             AVHWFramesContext.format must be equal to
+     *             AVCodecContext.pix_fmt.
+     *
+     *             This field should be set before avcodec_open2() is called.
+     */
+    AVBufferRef *hw_frames_ctx;
+
+#if FF_API_SUB_TEXT_FORMAT
+    /**
+     * @deprecated unused
+     */
+    attribute_deprecated
+    int sub_text_format;
+#define FF_SUB_TEXT_FMT_ASS              0
+#endif
+
+    /**
+     * Audio only. The amount of padding (in samples) appended by the encoder to
+     * the end of the audio. I.e. this number of decoded samples must be
+     * discarded by the caller from the end of the stream to get the original
+     * audio without any trailing padding.
+     *
+     * - decoding: unused
+     * - encoding: unused
+     */
+    int trailing_padding;
+
+    /**
+     * The number of pixels per image to maximally accept.
+     *
+     * - decoding: set by user
+     * - encoding: set by user
+     */
+    int64_t max_pixels;
+
+    /**
+     * A reference to the AVHWDeviceContext describing the device which will
+     * be used by a hardware encoder/decoder.  The reference is set by the
+     * caller and afterwards owned (and freed) by libavcodec.
+     *
+     * This should be used if either the codec device does not require
+     * hardware frames or any that are used are to be allocated internally by
+     * libavcodec.  If the user wishes to supply any of the frames used as
+     * encoder input or decoder output then hw_frames_ctx should be used
+     * instead.  When hw_frames_ctx is set in get_format() for a decoder, this
+     * field will be ignored while decoding the associated stream segment, but
+     * may again be used on a following one after another get_format() call.
+     *
+     * For both encoders and decoders this field should be set before
+     * avcodec_open2() is called and must not be written to thereafter.
+     *
+     * Note that some decoders may require this field to be set initially in
+     * order to support hw_frames_ctx at all - in that case, all frames
+     * contexts used must be created on the same device.
+     */
+    AVBufferRef *hw_device_ctx;
+
+    /**
+     * Bit set of AV_HWACCEL_FLAG_* flags, which affect hardware accelerated
+     * decoding (if active).
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user (either before avcodec_open2(), or in the
+     *             AVCodecContext.get_format callback)
+     */
+    int hwaccel_flags;
+
+    /**
+     * Video decoding only. Certain video codecs support cropping, meaning that
+     * only a sub-rectangle of the decoded frame is intended for display.  This
+     * option controls how cropping is handled by libavcodec.
+     *
+     * When set to 1 (the default), libavcodec will apply cropping internally.
+     * I.e. it will modify the output frame width/height fields and offset the
+     * data pointers (only by as much as possible while preserving alignment, or
+     * by the full amount if the AV_CODEC_FLAG_UNALIGNED flag is set) so that
+     * the frames output by the decoder refer only to the cropped area. The
+     * crop_* fields of the output frames will be zero.
+     *
+     * When set to 0, the width/height fields of the output frames will be set
+     * to the coded dimensions and the crop_* fields will describe the cropping
+     * rectangle. Applying the cropping is left to the caller.
+     *
+     * @warning When hardware acceleration with opaque output frames is used,
+     * libavcodec is unable to apply cropping from the top/left border.
+     *
+     * @note when this option is set to zero, the width/height fields of the
+     * AVCodecContext and output AVFrames have different meanings. The codec
+     * context fields store display dimensions (with the coded dimensions in
+     * coded_width/height), while the frame fields store the coded dimensions
+     * (with the display dimensions being determined by the crop_* fields).
+     */
+    int apply_cropping;
+
+    /*
+     * Video decoding only.  Sets the number of extra hardware frames which
+     * the decoder will allocate for use by the caller.  This must be set
+     * before avcodec_open2() is called.
+     *
+     * Some hardware decoders require all frames that they will use for
+     * output to be defined in advance before decoding starts.  For such
+     * decoders, the hardware frame pool must therefore be of a fixed size.
+     * The extra frames set here are on top of any number that the decoder
+     * needs internally in order to operate normally (for example, frames
+     * used as reference pictures).
+     */
+    int extra_hw_frames;
+
+    /**
+     * The percentage of damaged samples to discard a frame.
+     *
+     * - decoding: set by user
+     * - encoding: unused
+     */
+    int discard_damaged_percentage;
+
+    /**
+     * The number of samples per frame to maximally accept.
+     *
+     * - decoding: set by user
+     * - encoding: set by user
+     */
+    int64_t max_samples;
+
+    /**
+     * Bit set of AV_CODEC_EXPORT_DATA_* flags, which affects the kind of
+     * metadata exported in frame, packet, or coded stream side data by
+     * decoders and encoders.
+     *
+     * - decoding: set by user
+     * - encoding: set by user
+     */
+    int export_side_data;
+
+    /**
+     * This callback is called at the beginning of each packet to get a data
+     * buffer for it.
+     *
+     * The following field will be set in the packet before this callback is
+     * called:
+     * - size
+     * This callback must use the above value to calculate the required buffer size,
+     * which must padded by at least AV_INPUT_BUFFER_PADDING_SIZE bytes.
+     *
+     * In some specific cases, the encoder may not use the entire buffer allocated by this
+     * callback. This will be reflected in the size value in the packet once returned by
+     * avcodec_receive_packet().
+     *
+     * This callback must fill the following fields in the packet:
+     * - data: alignment requirements for AVPacket apply, if any. Some architectures and
+     *   encoders may benefit from having aligned data.
+     * - buf: must contain a pointer to an AVBufferRef structure. The packet's
+     *   data pointer must be contained in it. See: av_buffer_create(), av_buffer_alloc(),
+     *   and av_buffer_ref().
+     *
+     * If AV_CODEC_CAP_DR1 is not set then get_encode_buffer() must call
+     * avcodec_default_get_encode_buffer() instead of providing a buffer allocated by
+     * some other means.
+     *
+     * The flags field may contain a combination of AV_GET_ENCODE_BUFFER_FLAG_ flags.
+     * They may be used for example to hint what use the buffer may get after being
+     * created.
+     * Implementations of this callback may ignore flags they don't understand.
+     * If AV_GET_ENCODE_BUFFER_FLAG_REF is set in flags then the packet may be reused
+     * (read and/or written to if it is writable) later by libavcodec.
+     *
+     * This callback must be thread-safe, as when frame threading is used, it may
+     * be called from multiple threads simultaneously.
+     *
+     * @see avcodec_default_get_encode_buffer()
+     *
+     * - encoding: Set by libavcodec, user can override.
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int (*get_encode_buffer)(struct AVCodecContext *s, AVPacket *pkt, int flags);
+
+    /**
+     * Audio channel layout.
+     * - encoding: must be set by the caller, to one of AVCodec.ch_layouts.
+     * - decoding: may be set by the caller if known e.g. from the container.
+     *             The decoder can then override during decoding as needed.
+     */
+    AVChannelLayout ch_layout;
+} AVCodecContext;
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_hwaccel AVHWAccel
+ *
+ * @note  Nothing in this structure should be accessed by the user.  At some
+ *        point in future it will not be externally visible at all.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+typedef struct AVHWAccel {
+    /**
+     * Name of the hardware accelerated codec.
+     * The name is globally unique among encoders and among decoders (but an
+     * encoder and a decoder can share the same name).
+     */
+    const char *name;
+
+    /**
+     * Type of codec implemented by the hardware accelerator.
+     *
+     * See AVMEDIA_TYPE_xxx
+     */
+    enum AVMediaType type;
+
+    /**
+     * Codec implemented by the hardware accelerator.
+     *
+     * See AV_CODEC_ID_xxx
+     */
+    enum AVCodecID id;
+
+    /**
+     * Supported pixel format.
+     *
+     * Only hardware accelerated formats are supported here.
+     */
+    enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt;
+
+    /**
+     * Hardware accelerated codec capabilities.
+     * see AV_HWACCEL_CODEC_CAP_*
+     */
+    int capabilities;
+
+    /*****************************************************************
+     * No fields below this line are part of the public API. They
+     * may not be used outside of libavcodec and can be changed and
+     * removed at will.
+     * New public fields should be added right above.
+     *****************************************************************
+     */
+
+    /**
+     * Allocate a custom buffer
+     */
+    int (*alloc_frame)(AVCodecContext *avctx, AVFrame *frame);
+
+    /**
+     * Called at the beginning of each frame or field picture.
+     *
+     * Meaningful frame information (codec specific) is guaranteed to
+     * be parsed at this point. This function is mandatory.
+     *
+     * Note that buf can be NULL along with buf_size set to 0.
+     * Otherwise, this means the whole frame is available at this point.
+     *
+     * @param avctx the codec context
+     * @param buf the frame data buffer base
+     * @param buf_size the size of the frame in bytes
+     * @return zero if successful, a negative value otherwise
+     */
+    int (*start_frame)(AVCodecContext *avctx, const uint8_t *buf, uint32_t buf_size);
+
+    /**
+     * Callback for parameter data (SPS/PPS/VPS etc).
+     *
+     * Useful for hardware decoders which keep persistent state about the
+     * video parameters, and need to receive any changes to update that state.
+     *
+     * @param avctx the codec context
+     * @param type the nal unit type
+     * @param buf the nal unit data buffer
+     * @param buf_size the size of the nal unit in bytes
+     * @return zero if successful, a negative value otherwise
+     */
+    int (*decode_params)(AVCodecContext *avctx, int type, const uint8_t *buf, uint32_t buf_size);
+
+    /**
+     * Callback for each slice.
+     *
+     * Meaningful slice information (codec specific) is guaranteed to
+     * be parsed at this point. This function is mandatory.
+     *
+     * @param avctx the codec context
+     * @param buf the slice data buffer base
+     * @param buf_size the size of the slice in bytes
+     * @return zero if successful, a negative value otherwise
+     */
+    int (*decode_slice)(AVCodecContext *avctx, const uint8_t *buf, uint32_t buf_size);
+
+    /**
+     * Called at the end of each frame or field picture.
+     *
+     * The whole picture is parsed at this point and can now be sent
+     * to the hardware accelerator. This function is mandatory.
+     *
+     * @param avctx the codec context
+     * @return zero if successful, a negative value otherwise
+     */
+    int (*end_frame)(AVCodecContext *avctx);
+
+    /**
+     * Size of per-frame hardware accelerator private data.
+     *
+     * Private data is allocated with av_mallocz() before
+     * AVCodecContext.get_buffer() and deallocated after
+     * AVCodecContext.release_buffer().
+     */
+    int frame_priv_data_size;
+
+    /**
+     * Initialize the hwaccel private data.
+     *
+     * This will be called from ff_get_format(), after hwaccel and
+     * hwaccel_context are set and the hwaccel private data in AVCodecInternal
+     * is allocated.
+     */
+    int (*init)(AVCodecContext *avctx);
+
+    /**
+     * Uninitialize the hwaccel private data.
+     *
+     * This will be called from get_format() or avcodec_close(), after hwaccel
+     * and hwaccel_context are already uninitialized.
+     */
+    int (*uninit)(AVCodecContext *avctx);
+
+    /**
+     * Size of the private data to allocate in
+     * AVCodecInternal.hwaccel_priv_data.
+     */
+    int priv_data_size;
+
+    /**
+     * Internal hwaccel capabilities.
+     */
+    int caps_internal;
+
+    /**
+     * Fill the given hw_frames context with current codec parameters. Called
+     * from get_format. Refer to avcodec_get_hw_frames_parameters() for
+     * details.
+     *
+     * This CAN be called before AVHWAccel.init is called, and you must assume
+     * that avctx->hwaccel_priv_data is invalid.
+     */
+    int (*frame_params)(AVCodecContext *avctx, AVBufferRef *hw_frames_ctx);
+} AVHWAccel;
+
+/**
+ * HWAccel is experimental and is thus avoided in favor of non experimental
+ * codecs
+ */
+#define AV_HWACCEL_CODEC_CAP_EXPERIMENTAL 0x0200
+
+/**
+ * Hardware acceleration should be used for decoding even if the codec level
+ * used is unknown or higher than the maximum supported level reported by the
+ * hardware driver.
+ *
+ * It's generally a good idea to pass this flag unless you have a specific
+ * reason not to, as hardware tends to under-report supported levels.
+ */
+#define AV_HWACCEL_FLAG_IGNORE_LEVEL (1 << 0)
+
+/**
+ * Hardware acceleration can output YUV pixel formats with a different chroma
+ * sampling than 4:2:0 and/or other than 8 bits per component.
+ */
+#define AV_HWACCEL_FLAG_ALLOW_HIGH_DEPTH (1 << 1)
+
+/**
+ * Hardware acceleration should still be attempted for decoding when the
+ * codec profile does not match the reported capabilities of the hardware.
+ *
+ * For example, this can be used to try to decode baseline profile H.264
+ * streams in hardware - it will often succeed, because many streams marked
+ * as baseline profile actually conform to constrained baseline profile.
+ *
+ * @warning If the stream is actually not supported then the behaviour is
+ *          undefined, and may include returning entirely incorrect output
+ *          while indicating success.
+ */
+#define AV_HWACCEL_FLAG_ALLOW_PROFILE_MISMATCH (1 << 2)
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+enum AVSubtitleType {
+    SUBTITLE_NONE,
+
+    SUBTITLE_BITMAP,                ///< A bitmap, pict will be set
+
+    /**
+     * Plain text, the text field must be set by the decoder and is
+     * authoritative. ass and pict fields may contain approximations.
+     */
+    SUBTITLE_TEXT,
+
+    /**
+     * Formatted text, the ass field must be set by the decoder and is
+     * authoritative. pict and text fields may contain approximations.
+     */
+    SUBTITLE_ASS,
+};
+
+#define AV_SUBTITLE_FLAG_FORCED 0x00000001
+
+typedef struct AVSubtitleRect {
+    int x;         ///< top left corner  of pict, undefined when pict is not set
+    int y;         ///< top left corner  of pict, undefined when pict is not set
+    int w;         ///< width            of pict, undefined when pict is not set
+    int h;         ///< height           of pict, undefined when pict is not set
+    int nb_colors; ///< number of colors in pict, undefined when pict is not set
+
+    /**
+     * data+linesize for the bitmap of this subtitle.
+     * Can be set for text/ass as well once they are rendered.
+     */
+    uint8_t *data[4];
+    int linesize[4];
+
+    enum AVSubtitleType type;
+
+    char *text;                     ///< 0 terminated plain UTF-8 text
+
+    /**
+     * 0 terminated ASS/SSA compatible event line.
+     * The presentation of this is unaffected by the other values in this
+     * struct.
+     */
+    char *ass;
+
+    int flags;
+} AVSubtitleRect;
+
+typedef struct AVSubtitle {
+    uint16_t format; /* 0 = graphics */
+    uint32_t start_display_time; /* relative to packet pts, in ms */
+    uint32_t end_display_time; /* relative to packet pts, in ms */
+    unsigned num_rects;
+    AVSubtitleRect **rects;
+    int64_t pts;    ///< Same as packet pts, in AV_TIME_BASE
+} AVSubtitle;
+
+/**
+ * Return the LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_INT constant.
+ */
+unsigned avcodec_version(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libavcodec build-time configuration.
+ */
+const char *avcodec_configuration(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libavcodec license.
+ */
+const char *avcodec_license(void);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVCodecContext and set its fields to default values. The
+ * resulting struct should be freed with avcodec_free_context().
+ *
+ * @param codec if non-NULL, allocate private data and initialize defaults
+ *              for the given codec. It is illegal to then call avcodec_open2()
+ *              with a different codec.
+ *              If NULL, then the codec-specific defaults won't be initialized,
+ *              which may result in suboptimal default settings (this is
+ *              important mainly for encoders, e.g. libx264).
+ *
+ * @return An AVCodecContext filled with default values or NULL on failure.
+ */
+AVCodecContext *avcodec_alloc_context3(const AVCodec *codec);
+
+/**
+ * Free the codec context and everything associated with it and write NULL to
+ * the provided pointer.
+ */
+void avcodec_free_context(AVCodecContext **avctx);
+
+/**
+ * Get the AVClass for AVCodecContext. It can be used in combination with
+ * AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ for examining options.
+ *
+ * @see av_opt_find().
+ */
+const AVClass *avcodec_get_class(void);
+
+#if FF_API_GET_FRAME_CLASS
+/**
+ * @deprecated This function should not be used.
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+const AVClass *avcodec_get_frame_class(void);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Get the AVClass for AVSubtitleRect. It can be used in combination with
+ * AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ for examining options.
+ *
+ * @see av_opt_find().
+ */
+const AVClass *avcodec_get_subtitle_rect_class(void);
+
+/**
+ * Fill the parameters struct based on the values from the supplied codec
+ * context. Any allocated fields in par are freed and replaced with duplicates
+ * of the corresponding fields in codec.
+ *
+ * @return >= 0 on success, a negative AVERROR code on failure
+ */
+int avcodec_parameters_from_context(AVCodecParameters *par,
+                                    const AVCodecContext *codec);
+
+/**
+ * Fill the codec context based on the values from the supplied codec
+ * parameters. Any allocated fields in codec that have a corresponding field in
+ * par are freed and replaced with duplicates of the corresponding field in par.
+ * Fields in codec that do not have a counterpart in par are not touched.
+ *
+ * @return >= 0 on success, a negative AVERROR code on failure.
+ */
+int avcodec_parameters_to_context(AVCodecContext *codec,
+                                  const AVCodecParameters *par);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize the AVCodecContext to use the given AVCodec. Prior to using this
+ * function the context has to be allocated with avcodec_alloc_context3().
+ *
+ * The functions avcodec_find_decoder_by_name(), avcodec_find_encoder_by_name(),
+ * avcodec_find_decoder() and avcodec_find_encoder() provide an easy way for
+ * retrieving a codec.
+ *
+ * @note Always call this function before using decoding routines (such as
+ * @ref avcodec_receive_frame()).
+ *
+ * @code
+ * av_dict_set(&opts, "b", "2.5M", 0);
+ * codec = avcodec_find_decoder(AV_CODEC_ID_H264);
+ * if (!codec)
+ *     exit(1);
+ *
+ * context = avcodec_alloc_context3(codec);
+ *
+ * if (avcodec_open2(context, codec, opts) < 0)
+ *     exit(1);
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * @param avctx The context to initialize.
+ * @param codec The codec to open this context for. If a non-NULL codec has been
+ *              previously passed to avcodec_alloc_context3() or
+ *              for this context, then this parameter MUST be either NULL or
+ *              equal to the previously passed codec.
+ * @param options A dictionary filled with AVCodecContext and codec-private options.
+ *                On return this object will be filled with options that were not found.
+ *
+ * @return zero on success, a negative value on error
+ * @see avcodec_alloc_context3(), avcodec_find_decoder(), avcodec_find_encoder(),
+ *      av_dict_set(), av_opt_find().
+ */
+int avcodec_open2(AVCodecContext *avctx, const AVCodec *codec, AVDictionary **options);
+
+/**
+ * Close a given AVCodecContext and free all the data associated with it
+ * (but not the AVCodecContext itself).
+ *
+ * Calling this function on an AVCodecContext that hasn't been opened will free
+ * the codec-specific data allocated in avcodec_alloc_context3() with a non-NULL
+ * codec. Subsequent calls will do nothing.
+ *
+ * @note Do not use this function. Use avcodec_free_context() to destroy a
+ * codec context (either open or closed). Opening and closing a codec context
+ * multiple times is not supported anymore -- use multiple codec contexts
+ * instead.
+ */
+int avcodec_close(AVCodecContext *avctx);
+
+/**
+ * Free all allocated data in the given subtitle struct.
+ *
+ * @param sub AVSubtitle to free.
+ */
+void avsubtitle_free(AVSubtitle *sub);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavc_decoding
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * The default callback for AVCodecContext.get_buffer2(). It is made public so
+ * it can be called by custom get_buffer2() implementations for decoders without
+ * AV_CODEC_CAP_DR1 set.
+ */
+int avcodec_default_get_buffer2(AVCodecContext *s, AVFrame *frame, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * The default callback for AVCodecContext.get_encode_buffer(). It is made public so
+ * it can be called by custom get_encode_buffer() implementations for encoders without
+ * AV_CODEC_CAP_DR1 set.
+ */
+int avcodec_default_get_encode_buffer(AVCodecContext *s, AVPacket *pkt, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Modify width and height values so that they will result in a memory
+ * buffer that is acceptable for the codec if you do not use any horizontal
+ * padding.
+ *
+ * May only be used if a codec with AV_CODEC_CAP_DR1 has been opened.
+ */
+void avcodec_align_dimensions(AVCodecContext *s, int *width, int *height);
+
+/**
+ * Modify width and height values so that they will result in a memory
+ * buffer that is acceptable for the codec if you also ensure that all
+ * line sizes are a multiple of the respective linesize_align[i].
+ *
+ * May only be used if a codec with AV_CODEC_CAP_DR1 has been opened.
+ */
+void avcodec_align_dimensions2(AVCodecContext *s, int *width, int *height,
+                               int linesize_align[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS]);
+
+#ifdef FF_API_AVCODEC_CHROMA_POS
+/**
+ * Converts AVChromaLocation to swscale x/y chroma position.
+ *
+ * The positions represent the chroma (0,0) position in a coordinates system
+ * with luma (0,0) representing the origin and luma(1,1) representing 256,256
+ *
+ * @param xpos  horizontal chroma sample position
+ * @param ypos  vertical   chroma sample position
+ * @deprecated Use av_chroma_location_enum_to_pos() instead.
+ */
+ attribute_deprecated
+int avcodec_enum_to_chroma_pos(int *xpos, int *ypos, enum AVChromaLocation pos);
+
+/**
+ * Converts swscale x/y chroma position to AVChromaLocation.
+ *
+ * The positions represent the chroma (0,0) position in a coordinates system
+ * with luma (0,0) representing the origin and luma(1,1) representing 256,256
+ *
+ * @param xpos  horizontal chroma sample position
+ * @param ypos  vertical   chroma sample position
+ * @deprecated Use av_chroma_location_pos_to_enum() instead.
+ */
+ attribute_deprecated
+enum AVChromaLocation avcodec_chroma_pos_to_enum(int xpos, int ypos);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Decode a subtitle message.
+ * Return a negative value on error, otherwise return the number of bytes used.
+ * If no subtitle could be decompressed, got_sub_ptr is zero.
+ * Otherwise, the subtitle is stored in *sub.
+ * Note that AV_CODEC_CAP_DR1 is not available for subtitle codecs. This is for
+ * simplicity, because the performance difference is expected to be negligible
+ * and reusing a get_buffer written for video codecs would probably perform badly
+ * due to a potentially very different allocation pattern.
+ *
+ * Some decoders (those marked with AV_CODEC_CAP_DELAY) have a delay between input
+ * and output. This means that for some packets they will not immediately
+ * produce decoded output and need to be flushed at the end of decoding to get
+ * all the decoded data. Flushing is done by calling this function with packets
+ * with avpkt->data set to NULL and avpkt->size set to 0 until it stops
+ * returning subtitles. It is safe to flush even those decoders that are not
+ * marked with AV_CODEC_CAP_DELAY, then no subtitles will be returned.
+ *
+ * @note The AVCodecContext MUST have been opened with @ref avcodec_open2()
+ * before packets may be fed to the decoder.
+ *
+ * @param avctx the codec context
+ * @param[out] sub The preallocated AVSubtitle in which the decoded subtitle will be stored,
+ *                 must be freed with avsubtitle_free if *got_sub_ptr is set.
+ * @param[in,out] got_sub_ptr Zero if no subtitle could be decompressed, otherwise, it is nonzero.
+ * @param[in] avpkt The input AVPacket containing the input buffer.
+ */
+int avcodec_decode_subtitle2(AVCodecContext *avctx, AVSubtitle *sub,
+                            int *got_sub_ptr,
+                            AVPacket *avpkt);
+
+/**
+ * Supply raw packet data as input to a decoder.
+ *
+ * Internally, this call will copy relevant AVCodecContext fields, which can
+ * influence decoding per-packet, and apply them when the packet is actually
+ * decoded. (For example AVCodecContext.skip_frame, which might direct the
+ * decoder to drop the frame contained by the packet sent with this function.)
+ *
+ * @warning The input buffer, avpkt->data must be AV_INPUT_BUFFER_PADDING_SIZE
+ *          larger than the actual read bytes because some optimized bitstream
+ *          readers read 32 or 64 bits at once and could read over the end.
+ *
+ * @note The AVCodecContext MUST have been opened with @ref avcodec_open2()
+ *       before packets may be fed to the decoder.
+ *
+ * @param avctx codec context
+ * @param[in] avpkt The input AVPacket. Usually, this will be a single video
+ *                  frame, or several complete audio frames.
+ *                  Ownership of the packet remains with the caller, and the
+ *                  decoder will not write to the packet. The decoder may create
+ *                  a reference to the packet data (or copy it if the packet is
+ *                  not reference-counted).
+ *                  Unlike with older APIs, the packet is always fully consumed,
+ *                  and if it contains multiple frames (e.g. some audio codecs),
+ *                  will require you to call avcodec_receive_frame() multiple
+ *                  times afterwards before you can send a new packet.
+ *                  It can be NULL (or an AVPacket with data set to NULL and
+ *                  size set to 0); in this case, it is considered a flush
+ *                  packet, which signals the end of the stream. Sending the
+ *                  first flush packet will return success. Subsequent ones are
+ *                  unnecessary and will return AVERROR_EOF. If the decoder
+ *                  still has frames buffered, it will return them after sending
+ *                  a flush packet.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, otherwise negative error code:
+ *      AVERROR(EAGAIN):   input is not accepted in the current state - user
+ *                         must read output with avcodec_receive_frame() (once
+ *                         all output is read, the packet should be resent, and
+ *                         the call will not fail with EAGAIN).
+ *      AVERROR_EOF:       the decoder has been flushed, and no new packets can
+ *                         be sent to it (also returned if more than 1 flush
+ *                         packet is sent)
+ *      AVERROR(EINVAL):   codec not opened, it is an encoder, or requires flush
+ *      AVERROR(ENOMEM):   failed to add packet to internal queue, or similar
+ *      other errors: legitimate decoding errors
+ */
+int avcodec_send_packet(AVCodecContext *avctx, const AVPacket *avpkt);
+
+/**
+ * Return decoded output data from a decoder or encoder (when the
+ * AV_CODEC_FLAG_RECON_FRAME flag is used).
+ *
+ * @param avctx codec context
+ * @param frame This will be set to a reference-counted video or audio
+ *              frame (depending on the decoder type) allocated by the
+ *              codec. Note that the function will always call
+ *              av_frame_unref(frame) before doing anything else.
+ *
+ * @return
+ *      0:                 success, a frame was returned
+ *      AVERROR(EAGAIN):   output is not available in this state - user must try
+ *                         to send new input
+ *      AVERROR_EOF:       the codec has been fully flushed, and there will be
+ *                         no more output frames
+ *      AVERROR(EINVAL):   codec not opened, or it is an encoder without
+ *                         the AV_CODEC_FLAG_RECON_FRAME flag enabled
+ *      AVERROR_INPUT_CHANGED:   current decoded frame has changed parameters
+ *                               with respect to first decoded frame. Applicable
+ *                               when flag AV_CODEC_FLAG_DROPCHANGED is set.
+ *      other negative values: legitimate decoding errors
+ */
+int avcodec_receive_frame(AVCodecContext *avctx, AVFrame *frame);
+
+/**
+ * Supply a raw video or audio frame to the encoder. Use avcodec_receive_packet()
+ * to retrieve buffered output packets.
+ *
+ * @param avctx     codec context
+ * @param[in] frame AVFrame containing the raw audio or video frame to be encoded.
+ *                  Ownership of the frame remains with the caller, and the
+ *                  encoder will not write to the frame. The encoder may create
+ *                  a reference to the frame data (or copy it if the frame is
+ *                  not reference-counted).
+ *                  It can be NULL, in which case it is considered a flush
+ *                  packet.  This signals the end of the stream. If the encoder
+ *                  still has packets buffered, it will return them after this
+ *                  call. Once flushing mode has been entered, additional flush
+ *                  packets are ignored, and sending frames will return
+ *                  AVERROR_EOF.
+ *
+ *                  For audio:
+ *                  If AV_CODEC_CAP_VARIABLE_FRAME_SIZE is set, then each frame
+ *                  can have any number of samples.
+ *                  If it is not set, frame->nb_samples must be equal to
+ *                  avctx->frame_size for all frames except the last.
+ *                  The final frame may be smaller than avctx->frame_size.
+ * @return 0 on success, otherwise negative error code:
+ *      AVERROR(EAGAIN):   input is not accepted in the current state - user
+ *                         must read output with avcodec_receive_packet() (once
+ *                         all output is read, the packet should be resent, and
+ *                         the call will not fail with EAGAIN).
+ *      AVERROR_EOF:       the encoder has been flushed, and no new frames can
+ *                         be sent to it
+ *      AVERROR(EINVAL):   codec not opened, it is a decoder, or requires flush
+ *      AVERROR(ENOMEM):   failed to add packet to internal queue, or similar
+ *      other errors: legitimate encoding errors
+ */
+int avcodec_send_frame(AVCodecContext *avctx, const AVFrame *frame);
+
+/**
+ * Read encoded data from the encoder.
+ *
+ * @param avctx codec context
+ * @param avpkt This will be set to a reference-counted packet allocated by the
+ *              encoder. Note that the function will always call
+ *              av_packet_unref(avpkt) before doing anything else.
+ * @return 0 on success, otherwise negative error code:
+ *      AVERROR(EAGAIN):   output is not available in the current state - user
+ *                         must try to send input
+ *      AVERROR_EOF:       the encoder has been fully flushed, and there will be
+ *                         no more output packets
+ *      AVERROR(EINVAL):   codec not opened, or it is a decoder
+ *      other errors: legitimate encoding errors
+ */
+int avcodec_receive_packet(AVCodecContext *avctx, AVPacket *avpkt);
+
+/**
+ * Create and return a AVHWFramesContext with values adequate for hardware
+ * decoding. This is meant to get called from the get_format callback, and is
+ * a helper for preparing a AVHWFramesContext for AVCodecContext.hw_frames_ctx.
+ * This API is for decoding with certain hardware acceleration modes/APIs only.
+ *
+ * The returned AVHWFramesContext is not initialized. The caller must do this
+ * with av_hwframe_ctx_init().
+ *
+ * Calling this function is not a requirement, but makes it simpler to avoid
+ * codec or hardware API specific details when manually allocating frames.
+ *
+ * Alternatively to this, an API user can set AVCodecContext.hw_device_ctx,
+ * which sets up AVCodecContext.hw_frames_ctx fully automatically, and makes
+ * it unnecessary to call this function or having to care about
+ * AVHWFramesContext initialization at all.
+ *
+ * There are a number of requirements for calling this function:
+ *
+ * - It must be called from get_format with the same avctx parameter that was
+ *   passed to get_format. Calling it outside of get_format is not allowed, and
+ *   can trigger undefined behavior.
+ * - The function is not always supported (see description of return values).
+ *   Even if this function returns successfully, hwaccel initialization could
+ *   fail later. (The degree to which implementations check whether the stream
+ *   is actually supported varies. Some do this check only after the user's
+ *   get_format callback returns.)
+ * - The hw_pix_fmt must be one of the choices suggested by get_format. If the
+ *   user decides to use a AVHWFramesContext prepared with this API function,
+ *   the user must return the same hw_pix_fmt from get_format.
+ * - The device_ref passed to this function must support the given hw_pix_fmt.
+ * - After calling this API function, it is the user's responsibility to
+ *   initialize the AVHWFramesContext (returned by the out_frames_ref parameter),
+ *   and to set AVCodecContext.hw_frames_ctx to it. If done, this must be done
+ *   before returning from get_format (this is implied by the normal
+ *   AVCodecContext.hw_frames_ctx API rules).
+ * - The AVHWFramesContext parameters may change every time time get_format is
+ *   called. Also, AVCodecContext.hw_frames_ctx is reset before get_format. So
+ *   you are inherently required to go through this process again on every
+ *   get_format call.
+ * - It is perfectly possible to call this function without actually using
+ *   the resulting AVHWFramesContext. One use-case might be trying to reuse a
+ *   previously initialized AVHWFramesContext, and calling this API function
+ *   only to test whether the required frame parameters have changed.
+ * - Fields that use dynamically allocated values of any kind must not be set
+ *   by the user unless setting them is explicitly allowed by the documentation.
+ *   If the user sets AVHWFramesContext.free and AVHWFramesContext.user_opaque,
+ *   the new free callback must call the potentially set previous free callback.
+ *   This API call may set any dynamically allocated fields, including the free
+ *   callback.
+ *
+ * The function will set at least the following fields on AVHWFramesContext
+ * (potentially more, depending on hwaccel API):
+ *
+ * - All fields set by av_hwframe_ctx_alloc().
+ * - Set the format field to hw_pix_fmt.
+ * - Set the sw_format field to the most suited and most versatile format. (An
+ *   implication is that this will prefer generic formats over opaque formats
+ *   with arbitrary restrictions, if possible.)
+ * - Set the width/height fields to the coded frame size, rounded up to the
+ *   API-specific minimum alignment.
+ * - Only _if_ the hwaccel requires a pre-allocated pool: set the initial_pool_size
+ *   field to the number of maximum reference surfaces possible with the codec,
+ *   plus 1 surface for the user to work (meaning the user can safely reference
+ *   at most 1 decoded surface at a time), plus additional buffering introduced
+ *   by frame threading. If the hwaccel does not require pre-allocation, the
+ *   field is left to 0, and the decoder will allocate new surfaces on demand
+ *   during decoding.
+ * - Possibly AVHWFramesContext.hwctx fields, depending on the underlying
+ *   hardware API.
+ *
+ * Essentially, out_frames_ref returns the same as av_hwframe_ctx_alloc(), but
+ * with basic frame parameters set.
+ *
+ * The function is stateless, and does not change the AVCodecContext or the
+ * device_ref AVHWDeviceContext.
+ *
+ * @param avctx The context which is currently calling get_format, and which
+ *              implicitly contains all state needed for filling the returned
+ *              AVHWFramesContext properly.
+ * @param device_ref A reference to the AVHWDeviceContext describing the device
+ *                   which will be used by the hardware decoder.
+ * @param hw_pix_fmt The hwaccel format you are going to return from get_format.
+ * @param out_frames_ref On success, set to a reference to an _uninitialized_
+ *                       AVHWFramesContext, created from the given device_ref.
+ *                       Fields will be set to values required for decoding.
+ *                       Not changed if an error is returned.
+ * @return zero on success, a negative value on error. The following error codes
+ *         have special semantics:
+ *      AVERROR(ENOENT): the decoder does not support this functionality. Setup
+ *                       is always manual, or it is a decoder which does not
+ *                       support setting AVCodecContext.hw_frames_ctx at all,
+ *                       or it is a software format.
+ *      AVERROR(EINVAL): it is known that hardware decoding is not supported for
+ *                       this configuration, or the device_ref is not supported
+ *                       for the hwaccel referenced by hw_pix_fmt.
+ */
+int avcodec_get_hw_frames_parameters(AVCodecContext *avctx,
+                                     AVBufferRef *device_ref,
+                                     enum AVPixelFormat hw_pix_fmt,
+                                     AVBufferRef **out_frames_ref);
+
+
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_parsing Frame parsing
+ * @{
+ */
+
+enum AVPictureStructure {
+    AV_PICTURE_STRUCTURE_UNKNOWN,      ///< unknown
+    AV_PICTURE_STRUCTURE_TOP_FIELD,    ///< coded as top field
+    AV_PICTURE_STRUCTURE_BOTTOM_FIELD, ///< coded as bottom field
+    AV_PICTURE_STRUCTURE_FRAME,        ///< coded as frame
+};
+
+typedef struct AVCodecParserContext {
+    void *priv_data;
+    const struct AVCodecParser *parser;
+    int64_t frame_offset; /* offset of the current frame */
+    int64_t cur_offset; /* current offset
+                           (incremented by each av_parser_parse()) */
+    int64_t next_frame_offset; /* offset of the next frame */
+    /* video info */
+    int pict_type; /* XXX: Put it back in AVCodecContext. */
+    /**
+     * This field is used for proper frame duration computation in lavf.
+     * It signals, how much longer the frame duration of the current frame
+     * is compared to normal frame duration.
+     *
+     * frame_duration = (1 + repeat_pict) * time_base
+     *
+     * It is used by codecs like H.264 to display telecined material.
+     */
+    int repeat_pict; /* XXX: Put it back in AVCodecContext. */
+    int64_t pts;     /* pts of the current frame */
+    int64_t dts;     /* dts of the current frame */
+
+    /* private data */
+    int64_t last_pts;
+    int64_t last_dts;
+    int fetch_timestamp;
+
+#define AV_PARSER_PTS_NB 4
+    int cur_frame_start_index;
+    int64_t cur_frame_offset[AV_PARSER_PTS_NB];
+    int64_t cur_frame_pts[AV_PARSER_PTS_NB];
+    int64_t cur_frame_dts[AV_PARSER_PTS_NB];
+
+    int flags;
+#define PARSER_FLAG_COMPLETE_FRAMES           0x0001
+#define PARSER_FLAG_ONCE                      0x0002
+/// Set if the parser has a valid file offset
+#define PARSER_FLAG_FETCHED_OFFSET            0x0004
+#define PARSER_FLAG_USE_CODEC_TS              0x1000
+
+    int64_t offset;      ///< byte offset from starting packet start
+    int64_t cur_frame_end[AV_PARSER_PTS_NB];
+
+    /**
+     * Set by parser to 1 for key frames and 0 for non-key frames.
+     * It is initialized to -1, so if the parser doesn't set this flag,
+     * old-style fallback using AV_PICTURE_TYPE_I picture type as key frames
+     * will be used.
+     */
+    int key_frame;
+
+    // Timestamp generation support:
+    /**
+     * Synchronization point for start of timestamp generation.
+     *
+     * Set to >0 for sync point, 0 for no sync point and <0 for undefined
+     * (default).
+     *
+     * For example, this corresponds to presence of H.264 buffering period
+     * SEI message.
+     */
+    int dts_sync_point;
+
+    /**
+     * Offset of the current timestamp against last timestamp sync point in
+     * units of AVCodecContext.time_base.
+     *
+     * Set to INT_MIN when dts_sync_point unused. Otherwise, it must
+     * contain a valid timestamp offset.
+     *
+     * Note that the timestamp of sync point has usually a nonzero
+     * dts_ref_dts_delta, which refers to the previous sync point. Offset of
+     * the next frame after timestamp sync point will be usually 1.
+     *
+     * For example, this corresponds to H.264 cpb_removal_delay.
+     */
+    int dts_ref_dts_delta;
+
+    /**
+     * Presentation delay of current frame in units of AVCodecContext.time_base.
+     *
+     * Set to INT_MIN when dts_sync_point unused. Otherwise, it must
+     * contain valid non-negative timestamp delta (presentation time of a frame
+     * must not lie in the past).
+     *
+     * This delay represents the difference between decoding and presentation
+     * time of the frame.
+     *
+     * For example, this corresponds to H.264 dpb_output_delay.
+     */
+    int pts_dts_delta;
+
+    /**
+     * Position of the packet in file.
+     *
+     * Analogous to cur_frame_pts/dts
+     */
+    int64_t cur_frame_pos[AV_PARSER_PTS_NB];
+
+    /**
+     * Byte position of currently parsed frame in stream.
+     */
+    int64_t pos;
+
+    /**
+     * Previous frame byte position.
+     */
+    int64_t last_pos;
+
+    /**
+     * Duration of the current frame.
+     * For audio, this is in units of 1 / AVCodecContext.sample_rate.
+     * For all other types, this is in units of AVCodecContext.time_base.
+     */
+    int duration;
+
+    enum AVFieldOrder field_order;
+
+    /**
+     * Indicate whether a picture is coded as a frame, top field or bottom field.
+     *
+     * For example, H.264 field_pic_flag equal to 0 corresponds to
+     * AV_PICTURE_STRUCTURE_FRAME. An H.264 picture with field_pic_flag
+     * equal to 1 and bottom_field_flag equal to 0 corresponds to
+     * AV_PICTURE_STRUCTURE_TOP_FIELD.
+     */
+    enum AVPictureStructure picture_structure;
+
+    /**
+     * Picture number incremented in presentation or output order.
+     * This field may be reinitialized at the first picture of a new sequence.
+     *
+     * For example, this corresponds to H.264 PicOrderCnt.
+     */
+    int output_picture_number;
+
+    /**
+     * Dimensions of the decoded video intended for presentation.
+     */
+    int width;
+    int height;
+
+    /**
+     * Dimensions of the coded video.
+     */
+    int coded_width;
+    int coded_height;
+
+    /**
+     * The format of the coded data, corresponds to enum AVPixelFormat for video
+     * and for enum AVSampleFormat for audio.
+     *
+     * Note that a decoder can have considerable freedom in how exactly it
+     * decodes the data, so the format reported here might be different from the
+     * one returned by a decoder.
+     */
+    int format;
+} AVCodecParserContext;
+
+typedef struct AVCodecParser {
+    int codec_ids[7]; /* several codec IDs are permitted */
+    int priv_data_size;
+    int (*parser_init)(AVCodecParserContext *s);
+    /* This callback never returns an error, a negative value means that
+     * the frame start was in a previous packet. */
+    int (*parser_parse)(AVCodecParserContext *s,
+                        AVCodecContext *avctx,
+                        const uint8_t **poutbuf, int *poutbuf_size,
+                        const uint8_t *buf, int buf_size);
+    void (*parser_close)(AVCodecParserContext *s);
+    int (*split)(AVCodecContext *avctx, const uint8_t *buf, int buf_size);
+} AVCodecParser;
+
+/**
+ * Iterate over all registered codec parsers.
+ *
+ * @param opaque a pointer where libavcodec will store the iteration state. Must
+ *               point to NULL to start the iteration.
+ *
+ * @return the next registered codec parser or NULL when the iteration is
+ *         finished
+ */
+const AVCodecParser *av_parser_iterate(void **opaque);
+
+AVCodecParserContext *av_parser_init(int codec_id);
+
+/**
+ * Parse a packet.
+ *
+ * @param s             parser context.
+ * @param avctx         codec context.
+ * @param poutbuf       set to pointer to parsed buffer or NULL if not yet finished.
+ * @param poutbuf_size  set to size of parsed buffer or zero if not yet finished.
+ * @param buf           input buffer.
+ * @param buf_size      buffer size in bytes without the padding. I.e. the full buffer
+                        size is assumed to be buf_size + AV_INPUT_BUFFER_PADDING_SIZE.
+                        To signal EOF, this should be 0 (so that the last frame
+                        can be output).
+ * @param pts           input presentation timestamp.
+ * @param dts           input decoding timestamp.
+ * @param pos           input byte position in stream.
+ * @return the number of bytes of the input bitstream used.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ * @code
+ *   while(in_len){
+ *       len = av_parser_parse2(myparser, AVCodecContext, &data, &size,
+ *                                        in_data, in_len,
+ *                                        pts, dts, pos);
+ *       in_data += len;
+ *       in_len  -= len;
+ *
+ *       if(size)
+ *          decode_frame(data, size);
+ *   }
+ * @endcode
+ */
+int av_parser_parse2(AVCodecParserContext *s,
+                     AVCodecContext *avctx,
+                     uint8_t **poutbuf, int *poutbuf_size,
+                     const uint8_t *buf, int buf_size,
+                     int64_t pts, int64_t dts,
+                     int64_t pos);
+
+void av_parser_close(AVCodecParserContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavc_encoding
+ * @{
+ */
+
+int avcodec_encode_subtitle(AVCodecContext *avctx, uint8_t *buf, int buf_size,
+                            const AVSubtitle *sub);
+
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_misc Utility functions
+ * @ingroup libavc
+ *
+ * Miscellaneous utility functions related to both encoding and decoding
+ * (or neither).
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_misc_pixfmt Pixel formats
+ *
+ * Functions for working with pixel formats.
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Return a value representing the fourCC code associated to the
+ * pixel format pix_fmt, or 0 if no associated fourCC code can be
+ * found.
+ */
+unsigned int avcodec_pix_fmt_to_codec_tag(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Find the best pixel format to convert to given a certain source pixel
+ * format.  When converting from one pixel format to another, information loss
+ * may occur.  For example, when converting from RGB24 to GRAY, the color
+ * information will be lost. Similarly, other losses occur when converting from
+ * some formats to other formats. avcodec_find_best_pix_fmt_of_2() searches which of
+ * the given pixel formats should be used to suffer the least amount of loss.
+ * The pixel formats from which it chooses one, are determined by the
+ * pix_fmt_list parameter.
+ *
+ *
+ * @param[in] pix_fmt_list AV_PIX_FMT_NONE terminated array of pixel formats to choose from
+ * @param[in] src_pix_fmt source pixel format
+ * @param[in] has_alpha Whether the source pixel format alpha channel is used.
+ * @param[out] loss_ptr Combination of flags informing you what kind of losses will occur.
+ * @return The best pixel format to convert to or -1 if none was found.
+ */
+enum AVPixelFormat avcodec_find_best_pix_fmt_of_list(const enum AVPixelFormat *pix_fmt_list,
+                                            enum AVPixelFormat src_pix_fmt,
+                                            int has_alpha, int *loss_ptr);
+
+enum AVPixelFormat avcodec_default_get_format(struct AVCodecContext *s, const enum AVPixelFormat * fmt);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+void avcodec_string(char *buf, int buf_size, AVCodecContext *enc, int encode);
+
+int avcodec_default_execute(AVCodecContext *c, int (*func)(AVCodecContext *c2, void *arg2),void *arg, int *ret, int count, int size);
+int avcodec_default_execute2(AVCodecContext *c, int (*func)(AVCodecContext *c2, void *arg2, int, int),void *arg, int *ret, int count);
+//FIXME func typedef
+
+/**
+ * Fill AVFrame audio data and linesize pointers.
+ *
+ * The buffer buf must be a preallocated buffer with a size big enough
+ * to contain the specified samples amount. The filled AVFrame data
+ * pointers will point to this buffer.
+ *
+ * AVFrame extended_data channel pointers are allocated if necessary for
+ * planar audio.
+ *
+ * @param frame       the AVFrame
+ *                    frame->nb_samples must be set prior to calling the
+ *                    function. This function fills in frame->data,
+ *                    frame->extended_data, frame->linesize[0].
+ * @param nb_channels channel count
+ * @param sample_fmt  sample format
+ * @param buf         buffer to use for frame data
+ * @param buf_size    size of buffer
+ * @param align       plane size sample alignment (0 = default)
+ * @return            >=0 on success, negative error code on failure
+ * @todo return the size in bytes required to store the samples in
+ * case of success, at the next libavutil bump
+ */
+int avcodec_fill_audio_frame(AVFrame *frame, int nb_channels,
+                             enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt, const uint8_t *buf,
+                             int buf_size, int align);
+
+/**
+ * Reset the internal codec state / flush internal buffers. Should be called
+ * e.g. when seeking or when switching to a different stream.
+ *
+ * @note for decoders, this function just releases any references the decoder
+ * might keep internally, but the caller's references remain valid.
+ *
+ * @note for encoders, this function will only do something if the encoder
+ * declares support for AV_CODEC_CAP_ENCODER_FLUSH. When called, the encoder
+ * will drain any remaining packets, and can then be re-used for a different
+ * stream (as opposed to sending a null frame which will leave the encoder
+ * in a permanent EOF state after draining). This can be desirable if the
+ * cost of tearing down and replacing the encoder instance is high.
+ */
+void avcodec_flush_buffers(AVCodecContext *avctx);
+
+/**
+ * Return audio frame duration.
+ *
+ * @param avctx        codec context
+ * @param frame_bytes  size of the frame, or 0 if unknown
+ * @return             frame duration, in samples, if known. 0 if not able to
+ *                     determine.
+ */
+int av_get_audio_frame_duration(AVCodecContext *avctx, int frame_bytes);
+
+/* memory */
+
+/**
+ * Same behaviour av_fast_malloc but the buffer has additional
+ * AV_INPUT_BUFFER_PADDING_SIZE at the end which will always be 0.
+ *
+ * In addition the whole buffer will initially and after resizes
+ * be 0-initialized so that no uninitialized data will ever appear.
+ */
+void av_fast_padded_malloc(void *ptr, unsigned int *size, size_t min_size);
+
+/**
+ * Same behaviour av_fast_padded_malloc except that buffer will always
+ * be 0-initialized after call.
+ */
+void av_fast_padded_mallocz(void *ptr, unsigned int *size, size_t min_size);
+
+/**
+ * @return a positive value if s is open (i.e. avcodec_open2() was called on it
+ * with no corresponding avcodec_close()), 0 otherwise.
+ */
+int avcodec_is_open(AVCodecContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_AVCODEC_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavcodec/avdct.h b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/avdct.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6411fab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/avdct.h
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_AVDCT_H
+#define AVCODEC_AVDCT_H
+
+#include "libavutil/opt.h"
+
+/**
+ * AVDCT context.
+ * @note function pointers can be NULL if the specific features have been
+ *       disabled at build time.
+ */
+typedef struct AVDCT {
+    const AVClass *av_class;
+
+    void (*idct)(int16_t *block /* align 16 */);
+
+    /**
+     * IDCT input permutation.
+     * Several optimized IDCTs need a permutated input (relative to the
+     * normal order of the reference IDCT).
+     * This permutation must be performed before the idct_put/add.
+     * Note, normally this can be merged with the zigzag/alternate scan<br>
+     * An example to avoid confusion:
+     * - (->decode coeffs -> zigzag reorder -> dequant -> reference IDCT -> ...)
+     * - (x -> reference DCT -> reference IDCT -> x)
+     * - (x -> reference DCT -> simple_mmx_perm = idct_permutation
+     *    -> simple_idct_mmx -> x)
+     * - (-> decode coeffs -> zigzag reorder -> simple_mmx_perm -> dequant
+     *    -> simple_idct_mmx -> ...)
+     */
+    uint8_t idct_permutation[64];
+
+    void (*fdct)(int16_t *block /* align 16 */);
+
+
+    /**
+     * DCT algorithm.
+     * must use AVOptions to set this field.
+     */
+    int dct_algo;
+
+    /**
+     * IDCT algorithm.
+     * must use AVOptions to set this field.
+     */
+    int idct_algo;
+
+    void (*get_pixels)(int16_t *block /* align 16 */,
+                       const uint8_t *pixels /* align 8 */,
+                       ptrdiff_t line_size);
+
+    int bits_per_sample;
+
+    void (*get_pixels_unaligned)(int16_t *block /* align 16 */,
+                       const uint8_t *pixels,
+                       ptrdiff_t line_size);
+} AVDCT;
+
+/**
+ * Allocates a AVDCT context.
+ * This needs to be initialized with avcodec_dct_init() after optionally
+ * configuring it with AVOptions.
+ *
+ * To free it use av_free()
+ */
+AVDCT *avcodec_dct_alloc(void);
+int avcodec_dct_init(AVDCT *);
+
+const AVClass *avcodec_dct_get_class(void);
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_AVDCT_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavcodec/avfft.h b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/avfft.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0c0f9b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/avfft.h
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_AVFFT_H
+#define AVCODEC_AVFFT_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavc_fft
+ * FFT functions
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_fft FFT functions
+ * @ingroup lavc_misc
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+typedef float FFTSample;
+
+typedef struct FFTComplex {
+    FFTSample re, im;
+} FFTComplex;
+
+typedef struct FFTContext FFTContext;
+
+/**
+ * Set up a complex FFT.
+ * @param nbits           log2 of the length of the input array
+ * @param inverse         if 0 perform the forward transform, if 1 perform the inverse
+ */
+FFTContext *av_fft_init(int nbits, int inverse);
+
+/**
+ * Do the permutation needed BEFORE calling ff_fft_calc().
+ */
+void av_fft_permute(FFTContext *s, FFTComplex *z);
+
+/**
+ * Do a complex FFT with the parameters defined in av_fft_init(). The
+ * input data must be permuted before. No 1.0/sqrt(n) normalization is done.
+ */
+void av_fft_calc(FFTContext *s, FFTComplex *z);
+
+void av_fft_end(FFTContext *s);
+
+FFTContext *av_mdct_init(int nbits, int inverse, double scale);
+void av_imdct_calc(FFTContext *s, FFTSample *output, const FFTSample *input);
+void av_imdct_half(FFTContext *s, FFTSample *output, const FFTSample *input);
+void av_mdct_calc(FFTContext *s, FFTSample *output, const FFTSample *input);
+void av_mdct_end(FFTContext *s);
+
+/* Real Discrete Fourier Transform */
+
+enum RDFTransformType {
+    DFT_R2C,
+    IDFT_C2R,
+    IDFT_R2C,
+    DFT_C2R,
+};
+
+typedef struct RDFTContext RDFTContext;
+
+/**
+ * Set up a real FFT.
+ * @param nbits           log2 of the length of the input array
+ * @param trans           the type of transform
+ */
+RDFTContext *av_rdft_init(int nbits, enum RDFTransformType trans);
+void av_rdft_calc(RDFTContext *s, FFTSample *data);
+void av_rdft_end(RDFTContext *s);
+
+/* Discrete Cosine Transform */
+
+typedef struct DCTContext DCTContext;
+
+enum DCTTransformType {
+    DCT_II = 0,
+    DCT_III,
+    DCT_I,
+    DST_I,
+};
+
+/**
+ * Set up DCT.
+ *
+ * @param nbits           size of the input array:
+ *                        (1 << nbits)     for DCT-II, DCT-III and DST-I
+ *                        (1 << nbits) + 1 for DCT-I
+ * @param type            the type of transform
+ *
+ * @note the first element of the input of DST-I is ignored
+ */
+DCTContext *av_dct_init(int nbits, enum DCTTransformType type);
+void av_dct_calc(DCTContext *s, FFTSample *data);
+void av_dct_end (DCTContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_AVFFT_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavcodec/bsf.h b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/bsf.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a09c69f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/bsf.h
@@ -0,0 +1,332 @@
+/*
+ * Bitstream filters public API
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_BSF_H
+#define AVCODEC_BSF_H
+
+#include "libavutil/dict.h"
+#include "libavutil/log.h"
+#include "libavutil/rational.h"
+
+#include "codec_id.h"
+#include "codec_par.h"
+#include "packet.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_bsf Bitstream filters
+ * @ingroup libavc
+ *
+ * Bitstream filters transform encoded media data without decoding it. This
+ * allows e.g. manipulating various header values. Bitstream filters operate on
+ * @ref AVPacket "AVPackets".
+ *
+ * The bitstream filtering API is centered around two structures:
+ * AVBitStreamFilter and AVBSFContext. The former represents a bitstream filter
+ * in abstract, the latter a specific filtering process. Obtain an
+ * AVBitStreamFilter using av_bsf_get_by_name() or av_bsf_iterate(), then pass
+ * it to av_bsf_alloc() to create an AVBSFContext. Fill in the user-settable
+ * AVBSFContext fields, as described in its documentation, then call
+ * av_bsf_init() to prepare the filter context for use.
+ *
+ * Submit packets for filtering using av_bsf_send_packet(), obtain filtered
+ * results with av_bsf_receive_packet(). When no more input packets will be
+ * sent, submit a NULL AVPacket to signal the end of the stream to the filter.
+ * av_bsf_receive_packet() will then return trailing packets, if any are
+ * produced by the filter.
+ *
+ * Finally, free the filter context with av_bsf_free().
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * The bitstream filter state.
+ *
+ * This struct must be allocated with av_bsf_alloc() and freed with
+ * av_bsf_free().
+ *
+ * The fields in the struct will only be changed (by the caller or by the
+ * filter) as described in their documentation, and are to be considered
+ * immutable otherwise.
+ */
+typedef struct AVBSFContext {
+    /**
+     * A class for logging and AVOptions
+     */
+    const AVClass *av_class;
+
+    /**
+     * The bitstream filter this context is an instance of.
+     */
+    const struct AVBitStreamFilter *filter;
+
+    /**
+     * Opaque filter-specific private data. If filter->priv_class is non-NULL,
+     * this is an AVOptions-enabled struct.
+     */
+    void *priv_data;
+
+    /**
+     * Parameters of the input stream. This field is allocated in
+     * av_bsf_alloc(), it needs to be filled by the caller before
+     * av_bsf_init().
+     */
+    AVCodecParameters *par_in;
+
+    /**
+     * Parameters of the output stream. This field is allocated in
+     * av_bsf_alloc(), it is set by the filter in av_bsf_init().
+     */
+    AVCodecParameters *par_out;
+
+    /**
+     * The timebase used for the timestamps of the input packets. Set by the
+     * caller before av_bsf_init().
+     */
+    AVRational time_base_in;
+
+    /**
+     * The timebase used for the timestamps of the output packets. Set by the
+     * filter in av_bsf_init().
+     */
+    AVRational time_base_out;
+} AVBSFContext;
+
+typedef struct AVBitStreamFilter {
+    const char *name;
+
+    /**
+     * A list of codec ids supported by the filter, terminated by
+     * AV_CODEC_ID_NONE.
+     * May be NULL, in that case the bitstream filter works with any codec id.
+     */
+    const enum AVCodecID *codec_ids;
+
+    /**
+     * A class for the private data, used to declare bitstream filter private
+     * AVOptions. This field is NULL for bitstream filters that do not declare
+     * any options.
+     *
+     * If this field is non-NULL, the first member of the filter private data
+     * must be a pointer to AVClass, which will be set by libavcodec generic
+     * code to this class.
+     */
+    const AVClass *priv_class;
+} AVBitStreamFilter;
+
+/**
+ * @return a bitstream filter with the specified name or NULL if no such
+ *         bitstream filter exists.
+ */
+const AVBitStreamFilter *av_bsf_get_by_name(const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * Iterate over all registered bitstream filters.
+ *
+ * @param opaque a pointer where libavcodec will store the iteration state. Must
+ *               point to NULL to start the iteration.
+ *
+ * @return the next registered bitstream filter or NULL when the iteration is
+ *         finished
+ */
+const AVBitStreamFilter *av_bsf_iterate(void **opaque);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a context for a given bitstream filter. The caller must fill in the
+ * context parameters as described in the documentation and then call
+ * av_bsf_init() before sending any data to the filter.
+ *
+ * @param filter the filter for which to allocate an instance.
+ * @param[out] ctx a pointer into which the pointer to the newly-allocated context
+ *                 will be written. It must be freed with av_bsf_free() after the
+ *                 filtering is done.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR code on failure
+ */
+int av_bsf_alloc(const AVBitStreamFilter *filter, AVBSFContext **ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Prepare the filter for use, after all the parameters and options have been
+ * set.
+ *
+ * @param ctx a AVBSFContext previously allocated with av_bsf_alloc()
+ */
+int av_bsf_init(AVBSFContext *ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Submit a packet for filtering.
+ *
+ * After sending each packet, the filter must be completely drained by calling
+ * av_bsf_receive_packet() repeatedly until it returns AVERROR(EAGAIN) or
+ * AVERROR_EOF.
+ *
+ * @param ctx an initialized AVBSFContext
+ * @param pkt the packet to filter. The bitstream filter will take ownership of
+ * the packet and reset the contents of pkt. pkt is not touched if an error occurs.
+ * If pkt is empty (i.e. NULL, or pkt->data is NULL and pkt->side_data_elems zero),
+ * it signals the end of the stream (i.e. no more non-empty packets will be sent;
+ * sending more empty packets does nothing) and will cause the filter to output
+ * any packets it may have buffered internally.
+ *
+ * @return
+ *  - 0 on success.
+ *  - AVERROR(EAGAIN) if packets need to be retrieved from the filter (using
+ *    av_bsf_receive_packet()) before new input can be consumed.
+ *  - Another negative AVERROR value if an error occurs.
+ */
+int av_bsf_send_packet(AVBSFContext *ctx, AVPacket *pkt);
+
+/**
+ * Retrieve a filtered packet.
+ *
+ * @param ctx an initialized AVBSFContext
+ * @param[out] pkt this struct will be filled with the contents of the filtered
+ *                 packet. It is owned by the caller and must be freed using
+ *                 av_packet_unref() when it is no longer needed.
+ *                 This parameter should be "clean" (i.e. freshly allocated
+ *                 with av_packet_alloc() or unreffed with av_packet_unref())
+ *                 when this function is called. If this function returns
+ *                 successfully, the contents of pkt will be completely
+ *                 overwritten by the returned data. On failure, pkt is not
+ *                 touched.
+ *
+ * @return
+ *  - 0 on success.
+ *  - AVERROR(EAGAIN) if more packets need to be sent to the filter (using
+ *    av_bsf_send_packet()) to get more output.
+ *  - AVERROR_EOF if there will be no further output from the filter.
+ *  - Another negative AVERROR value if an error occurs.
+ *
+ * @note one input packet may result in several output packets, so after sending
+ * a packet with av_bsf_send_packet(), this function needs to be called
+ * repeatedly until it stops returning 0. It is also possible for a filter to
+ * output fewer packets than were sent to it, so this function may return
+ * AVERROR(EAGAIN) immediately after a successful av_bsf_send_packet() call.
+ */
+int av_bsf_receive_packet(AVBSFContext *ctx, AVPacket *pkt);
+
+/**
+ * Reset the internal bitstream filter state. Should be called e.g. when seeking.
+ */
+void av_bsf_flush(AVBSFContext *ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Free a bitstream filter context and everything associated with it; write NULL
+ * into the supplied pointer.
+ */
+void av_bsf_free(AVBSFContext **ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Get the AVClass for AVBSFContext. It can be used in combination with
+ * AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ for examining options.
+ *
+ * @see av_opt_find().
+ */
+const AVClass *av_bsf_get_class(void);
+
+/**
+ * Structure for chain/list of bitstream filters.
+ * Empty list can be allocated by av_bsf_list_alloc().
+ */
+typedef struct AVBSFList AVBSFList;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate empty list of bitstream filters.
+ * The list must be later freed by av_bsf_list_free()
+ * or finalized by av_bsf_list_finalize().
+ *
+ * @return Pointer to @ref AVBSFList on success, NULL in case of failure
+ */
+AVBSFList *av_bsf_list_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Free list of bitstream filters.
+ *
+ * @param lst Pointer to pointer returned by av_bsf_list_alloc()
+ */
+void av_bsf_list_free(AVBSFList **lst);
+
+/**
+ * Append bitstream filter to the list of bitstream filters.
+ *
+ * @param lst List to append to
+ * @param bsf Filter context to be appended
+ *
+ * @return >=0 on success, negative AVERROR in case of failure
+ */
+int av_bsf_list_append(AVBSFList *lst, AVBSFContext *bsf);
+
+/**
+ * Construct new bitstream filter context given it's name and options
+ * and append it to the list of bitstream filters.
+ *
+ * @param lst      List to append to
+ * @param bsf_name Name of the bitstream filter
+ * @param options  Options for the bitstream filter, can be set to NULL
+ *
+ * @return >=0 on success, negative AVERROR in case of failure
+ */
+int av_bsf_list_append2(AVBSFList *lst, const char * bsf_name, AVDictionary **options);
+/**
+ * Finalize list of bitstream filters.
+ *
+ * This function will transform @ref AVBSFList to single @ref AVBSFContext,
+ * so the whole chain of bitstream filters can be treated as single filter
+ * freshly allocated by av_bsf_alloc().
+ * If the call is successful, @ref AVBSFList structure is freed and lst
+ * will be set to NULL. In case of failure, caller is responsible for
+ * freeing the structure by av_bsf_list_free()
+ *
+ * @param      lst Filter list structure to be transformed
+ * @param[out] bsf Pointer to be set to newly created @ref AVBSFContext structure
+ *                 representing the chain of bitstream filters
+ *
+ * @return >=0 on success, negative AVERROR in case of failure
+ */
+int av_bsf_list_finalize(AVBSFList **lst, AVBSFContext **bsf);
+
+/**
+ * Parse string describing list of bitstream filters and create single
+ * @ref AVBSFContext describing the whole chain of bitstream filters.
+ * Resulting @ref AVBSFContext can be treated as any other @ref AVBSFContext freshly
+ * allocated by av_bsf_alloc().
+ *
+ * @param      str String describing chain of bitstream filters in format
+ *                 `bsf1[=opt1=val1:opt2=val2][,bsf2]`
+ * @param[out] bsf Pointer to be set to newly created @ref AVBSFContext structure
+ *                 representing the chain of bitstream filters
+ *
+ * @return >=0 on success, negative AVERROR in case of failure
+ */
+int av_bsf_list_parse_str(const char *str, AVBSFContext **bsf);
+
+/**
+ * Get null/pass-through bitstream filter.
+ *
+ * @param[out] bsf Pointer to be set to new instance of pass-through bitstream filter
+ *
+ * @return
+ */
+int av_bsf_get_null_filter(AVBSFContext **bsf);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif // AVCODEC_BSF_H
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavcodec/codec.h b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/codec.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..77a1a3f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/codec.h
@@ -0,0 +1,395 @@
+/*
+ * AVCodec public API
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_CODEC_H
+#define AVCODEC_CODEC_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+#include "libavutil/avutil.h"
+#include "libavutil/hwcontext.h"
+#include "libavutil/log.h"
+#include "libavutil/pixfmt.h"
+#include "libavutil/rational.h"
+#include "libavutil/samplefmt.h"
+
+#include "libavcodec/codec_id.h"
+#include "libavcodec/version_major.h"
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavc_core
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Decoder can use draw_horiz_band callback.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_CAP_DRAW_HORIZ_BAND     (1 <<  0)
+/**
+ * Codec uses get_buffer() or get_encode_buffer() for allocating buffers and
+ * supports custom allocators.
+ * If not set, it might not use get_buffer() or get_encode_buffer() at all, or
+ * use operations that assume the buffer was allocated by
+ * avcodec_default_get_buffer2 or avcodec_default_get_encode_buffer.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_CAP_DR1                 (1 <<  1)
+#if FF_API_FLAG_TRUNCATED
+/**
+ * @deprecated Use parsers to always send proper frames.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_CAP_TRUNCATED           (1 <<  3)
+#endif
+/**
+ * Encoder or decoder requires flushing with NULL input at the end in order to
+ * give the complete and correct output.
+ *
+ * NOTE: If this flag is not set, the codec is guaranteed to never be fed with
+ *       with NULL data. The user can still send NULL data to the public encode
+ *       or decode function, but libavcodec will not pass it along to the codec
+ *       unless this flag is set.
+ *
+ * Decoders:
+ * The decoder has a non-zero delay and needs to be fed with avpkt->data=NULL,
+ * avpkt->size=0 at the end to get the delayed data until the decoder no longer
+ * returns frames.
+ *
+ * Encoders:
+ * The encoder needs to be fed with NULL data at the end of encoding until the
+ * encoder no longer returns data.
+ *
+ * NOTE: For encoders implementing the AVCodec.encode2() function, setting this
+ *       flag also means that the encoder must set the pts and duration for
+ *       each output packet. If this flag is not set, the pts and duration will
+ *       be determined by libavcodec from the input frame.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_CAP_DELAY               (1 <<  5)
+/**
+ * Codec can be fed a final frame with a smaller size.
+ * This can be used to prevent truncation of the last audio samples.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_CAP_SMALL_LAST_FRAME    (1 <<  6)
+
+/**
+ * Codec can output multiple frames per AVPacket
+ * Normally demuxers return one frame at a time, demuxers which do not do
+ * are connected to a parser to split what they return into proper frames.
+ * This flag is reserved to the very rare category of codecs which have a
+ * bitstream that cannot be split into frames without timeconsuming
+ * operations like full decoding. Demuxers carrying such bitstreams thus
+ * may return multiple frames in a packet. This has many disadvantages like
+ * prohibiting stream copy in many cases thus it should only be considered
+ * as a last resort.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_CAP_SUBFRAMES           (1 <<  8)
+/**
+ * Codec is experimental and is thus avoided in favor of non experimental
+ * encoders
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_CAP_EXPERIMENTAL        (1 <<  9)
+/**
+ * Codec should fill in channel configuration and samplerate instead of container
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_CAP_CHANNEL_CONF        (1 << 10)
+/**
+ * Codec supports frame-level multithreading.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_CAP_FRAME_THREADS       (1 << 12)
+/**
+ * Codec supports slice-based (or partition-based) multithreading.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_CAP_SLICE_THREADS       (1 << 13)
+/**
+ * Codec supports changed parameters at any point.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_CAP_PARAM_CHANGE        (1 << 14)
+/**
+ * Codec supports multithreading through a method other than slice- or
+ * frame-level multithreading. Typically this marks wrappers around
+ * multithreading-capable external libraries.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_CAP_OTHER_THREADS       (1 << 15)
+#if FF_API_AUTO_THREADS
+#define AV_CODEC_CAP_AUTO_THREADS        AV_CODEC_CAP_OTHER_THREADS
+#endif
+/**
+ * Audio encoder supports receiving a different number of samples in each call.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_CAP_VARIABLE_FRAME_SIZE (1 << 16)
+/**
+ * Decoder is not a preferred choice for probing.
+ * This indicates that the decoder is not a good choice for probing.
+ * It could for example be an expensive to spin up hardware decoder,
+ * or it could simply not provide a lot of useful information about
+ * the stream.
+ * A decoder marked with this flag should only be used as last resort
+ * choice for probing.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_CAP_AVOID_PROBING       (1 << 17)
+
+#if FF_API_UNUSED_CODEC_CAPS
+/**
+ * Deprecated and unused. Use AVCodecDescriptor.props instead
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_CAP_INTRA_ONLY       0x40000000
+/**
+ * Deprecated and unused. Use AVCodecDescriptor.props instead
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_CAP_LOSSLESS         0x80000000
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Codec is backed by a hardware implementation. Typically used to
+ * identify a non-hwaccel hardware decoder. For information about hwaccels, use
+ * avcodec_get_hw_config() instead.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_CAP_HARDWARE            (1 << 18)
+
+/**
+ * Codec is potentially backed by a hardware implementation, but not
+ * necessarily. This is used instead of AV_CODEC_CAP_HARDWARE, if the
+ * implementation provides some sort of internal fallback.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_CAP_HYBRID              (1 << 19)
+
+/**
+ * This codec takes the reordered_opaque field from input AVFrames
+ * and returns it in the corresponding field in AVCodecContext after
+ * encoding.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_CAP_ENCODER_REORDERED_OPAQUE (1 << 20)
+
+/**
+ * This encoder can be flushed using avcodec_flush_buffers(). If this flag is
+ * not set, the encoder must be closed and reopened to ensure that no frames
+ * remain pending.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_CAP_ENCODER_FLUSH   (1 << 21)
+
+/**
+ * The encoder is able to output reconstructed frame data, i.e. raw frames that
+ * would be produced by decoding the encoded bitstream.
+ *
+ * Reconstructed frame output is enabled by the AV_CODEC_FLAG_RECON_FRAME flag.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_CAP_ENCODER_RECON_FRAME (1 << 22)
+
+/**
+ * AVProfile.
+ */
+typedef struct AVProfile {
+    int profile;
+    const char *name; ///< short name for the profile
+} AVProfile;
+
+/**
+ * AVCodec.
+ */
+typedef struct AVCodec {
+    /**
+     * Name of the codec implementation.
+     * The name is globally unique among encoders and among decoders (but an
+     * encoder and a decoder can share the same name).
+     * This is the primary way to find a codec from the user perspective.
+     */
+    const char *name;
+    /**
+     * Descriptive name for the codec, meant to be more human readable than name.
+     * You should use the NULL_IF_CONFIG_SMALL() macro to define it.
+     */
+    const char *long_name;
+    enum AVMediaType type;
+    enum AVCodecID id;
+    /**
+     * Codec capabilities.
+     * see AV_CODEC_CAP_*
+     */
+    int capabilities;
+    uint8_t max_lowres;                     ///< maximum value for lowres supported by the decoder
+    const AVRational *supported_framerates; ///< array of supported framerates, or NULL if any, array is terminated by {0,0}
+    const enum AVPixelFormat *pix_fmts;     ///< array of supported pixel formats, or NULL if unknown, array is terminated by -1
+    const int *supported_samplerates;       ///< array of supported audio samplerates, or NULL if unknown, array is terminated by 0
+    const enum AVSampleFormat *sample_fmts; ///< array of supported sample formats, or NULL if unknown, array is terminated by -1
+#if FF_API_OLD_CHANNEL_LAYOUT
+    /**
+     * @deprecated use ch_layouts instead
+     */
+    attribute_deprecated
+    const uint64_t *channel_layouts;         ///< array of support channel layouts, or NULL if unknown. array is terminated by 0
+#endif
+    const AVClass *priv_class;              ///< AVClass for the private context
+    const AVProfile *profiles;              ///< array of recognized profiles, or NULL if unknown, array is terminated by {FF_PROFILE_UNKNOWN}
+
+    /**
+     * Group name of the codec implementation.
+     * This is a short symbolic name of the wrapper backing this codec. A
+     * wrapper uses some kind of external implementation for the codec, such
+     * as an external library, or a codec implementation provided by the OS or
+     * the hardware.
+     * If this field is NULL, this is a builtin, libavcodec native codec.
+     * If non-NULL, this will be the suffix in AVCodec.name in most cases
+     * (usually AVCodec.name will be of the form "<codec_name>_<wrapper_name>").
+     */
+    const char *wrapper_name;
+
+    /**
+     * Array of supported channel layouts, terminated with a zeroed layout.
+     */
+    const AVChannelLayout *ch_layouts;
+} AVCodec;
+
+/**
+ * Iterate over all registered codecs.
+ *
+ * @param opaque a pointer where libavcodec will store the iteration state. Must
+ *               point to NULL to start the iteration.
+ *
+ * @return the next registered codec or NULL when the iteration is
+ *         finished
+ */
+const AVCodec *av_codec_iterate(void **opaque);
+
+/**
+ * Find a registered decoder with a matching codec ID.
+ *
+ * @param id AVCodecID of the requested decoder
+ * @return A decoder if one was found, NULL otherwise.
+ */
+const AVCodec *avcodec_find_decoder(enum AVCodecID id);
+
+/**
+ * Find a registered decoder with the specified name.
+ *
+ * @param name name of the requested decoder
+ * @return A decoder if one was found, NULL otherwise.
+ */
+const AVCodec *avcodec_find_decoder_by_name(const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * Find a registered encoder with a matching codec ID.
+ *
+ * @param id AVCodecID of the requested encoder
+ * @return An encoder if one was found, NULL otherwise.
+ */
+const AVCodec *avcodec_find_encoder(enum AVCodecID id);
+
+/**
+ * Find a registered encoder with the specified name.
+ *
+ * @param name name of the requested encoder
+ * @return An encoder if one was found, NULL otherwise.
+ */
+const AVCodec *avcodec_find_encoder_by_name(const char *name);
+/**
+ * @return a non-zero number if codec is an encoder, zero otherwise
+ */
+int av_codec_is_encoder(const AVCodec *codec);
+
+/**
+ * @return a non-zero number if codec is a decoder, zero otherwise
+ */
+int av_codec_is_decoder(const AVCodec *codec);
+
+/**
+ * Return a name for the specified profile, if available.
+ *
+ * @param codec the codec that is searched for the given profile
+ * @param profile the profile value for which a name is requested
+ * @return A name for the profile if found, NULL otherwise.
+ */
+const char *av_get_profile_name(const AVCodec *codec, int profile);
+
+enum {
+    /**
+     * The codec supports this format via the hw_device_ctx interface.
+     *
+     * When selecting this format, AVCodecContext.hw_device_ctx should
+     * have been set to a device of the specified type before calling
+     * avcodec_open2().
+     */
+    AV_CODEC_HW_CONFIG_METHOD_HW_DEVICE_CTX = 0x01,
+    /**
+     * The codec supports this format via the hw_frames_ctx interface.
+     *
+     * When selecting this format for a decoder,
+     * AVCodecContext.hw_frames_ctx should be set to a suitable frames
+     * context inside the get_format() callback.  The frames context
+     * must have been created on a device of the specified type.
+     *
+     * When selecting this format for an encoder,
+     * AVCodecContext.hw_frames_ctx should be set to the context which
+     * will be used for the input frames before calling avcodec_open2().
+     */
+    AV_CODEC_HW_CONFIG_METHOD_HW_FRAMES_CTX = 0x02,
+    /**
+     * The codec supports this format by some internal method.
+     *
+     * This format can be selected without any additional configuration -
+     * no device or frames context is required.
+     */
+    AV_CODEC_HW_CONFIG_METHOD_INTERNAL      = 0x04,
+    /**
+     * The codec supports this format by some ad-hoc method.
+     *
+     * Additional settings and/or function calls are required.  See the
+     * codec-specific documentation for details.  (Methods requiring
+     * this sort of configuration are deprecated and others should be
+     * used in preference.)
+     */
+    AV_CODEC_HW_CONFIG_METHOD_AD_HOC        = 0x08,
+};
+
+typedef struct AVCodecHWConfig {
+    /**
+     * For decoders, a hardware pixel format which that decoder may be
+     * able to decode to if suitable hardware is available.
+     *
+     * For encoders, a pixel format which the encoder may be able to
+     * accept.  If set to AV_PIX_FMT_NONE, this applies to all pixel
+     * formats supported by the codec.
+     */
+    enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt;
+    /**
+     * Bit set of AV_CODEC_HW_CONFIG_METHOD_* flags, describing the possible
+     * setup methods which can be used with this configuration.
+     */
+    int methods;
+    /**
+     * The device type associated with the configuration.
+     *
+     * Must be set for AV_CODEC_HW_CONFIG_METHOD_HW_DEVICE_CTX and
+     * AV_CODEC_HW_CONFIG_METHOD_HW_FRAMES_CTX, otherwise unused.
+     */
+    enum AVHWDeviceType device_type;
+} AVCodecHWConfig;
+
+/**
+ * Retrieve supported hardware configurations for a codec.
+ *
+ * Values of index from zero to some maximum return the indexed configuration
+ * descriptor; all other values return NULL.  If the codec does not support
+ * any hardware configurations then it will always return NULL.
+ */
+const AVCodecHWConfig *avcodec_get_hw_config(const AVCodec *codec, int index);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_CODEC_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavcodec/codec_desc.h b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/codec_desc.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..126b52d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/codec_desc.h
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+/*
+ * Codec descriptors public API
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_CODEC_DESC_H
+#define AVCODEC_CODEC_DESC_H
+
+#include "libavutil/avutil.h"
+
+#include "codec_id.h"
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavc_core
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * This struct describes the properties of a single codec described by an
+ * AVCodecID.
+ * @see avcodec_descriptor_get()
+ */
+typedef struct AVCodecDescriptor {
+    enum AVCodecID     id;
+    enum AVMediaType type;
+    /**
+     * Name of the codec described by this descriptor. It is non-empty and
+     * unique for each codec descriptor. It should contain alphanumeric
+     * characters and '_' only.
+     */
+    const char      *name;
+    /**
+     * A more descriptive name for this codec. May be NULL.
+     */
+    const char *long_name;
+    /**
+     * Codec properties, a combination of AV_CODEC_PROP_* flags.
+     */
+    int             props;
+    /**
+     * MIME type(s) associated with the codec.
+     * May be NULL; if not, a NULL-terminated array of MIME types.
+     * The first item is always non-NULL and is the preferred MIME type.
+     */
+    const char *const *mime_types;
+    /**
+     * If non-NULL, an array of profiles recognized for this codec.
+     * Terminated with FF_PROFILE_UNKNOWN.
+     */
+    const struct AVProfile *profiles;
+} AVCodecDescriptor;
+
+/**
+ * Codec uses only intra compression.
+ * Video and audio codecs only.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_PROP_INTRA_ONLY    (1 << 0)
+/**
+ * Codec supports lossy compression. Audio and video codecs only.
+ * @note a codec may support both lossy and lossless
+ * compression modes
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_PROP_LOSSY         (1 << 1)
+/**
+ * Codec supports lossless compression. Audio and video codecs only.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_PROP_LOSSLESS      (1 << 2)
+/**
+ * Codec supports frame reordering. That is, the coded order (the order in which
+ * the encoded packets are output by the encoders / stored / input to the
+ * decoders) may be different from the presentation order of the corresponding
+ * frames.
+ *
+ * For codecs that do not have this property set, PTS and DTS should always be
+ * equal.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_PROP_REORDER       (1 << 3)
+/**
+ * Subtitle codec is bitmap based
+ * Decoded AVSubtitle data can be read from the AVSubtitleRect->pict field.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_PROP_BITMAP_SUB    (1 << 16)
+/**
+ * Subtitle codec is text based.
+ * Decoded AVSubtitle data can be read from the AVSubtitleRect->ass field.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_PROP_TEXT_SUB      (1 << 17)
+
+/**
+ * @return descriptor for given codec ID or NULL if no descriptor exists.
+ */
+const AVCodecDescriptor *avcodec_descriptor_get(enum AVCodecID id);
+
+/**
+ * Iterate over all codec descriptors known to libavcodec.
+ *
+ * @param prev previous descriptor. NULL to get the first descriptor.
+ *
+ * @return next descriptor or NULL after the last descriptor
+ */
+const AVCodecDescriptor *avcodec_descriptor_next(const AVCodecDescriptor *prev);
+
+/**
+ * @return codec descriptor with the given name or NULL if no such descriptor
+ *         exists.
+ */
+const AVCodecDescriptor *avcodec_descriptor_get_by_name(const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif // AVCODEC_CODEC_DESC_H
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavcodec/codec_id.h b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/codec_id.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f436a2b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/codec_id.h
@@ -0,0 +1,646 @@
+/*
+ * Codec IDs
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_CODEC_ID_H
+#define AVCODEC_CODEC_ID_H
+
+#include "libavutil/avutil.h"
+#include "libavutil/samplefmt.h"
+
+#include "version_major.h"
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavc_core
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Identify the syntax and semantics of the bitstream.
+ * The principle is roughly:
+ * Two decoders with the same ID can decode the same streams.
+ * Two encoders with the same ID can encode compatible streams.
+ * There may be slight deviations from the principle due to implementation
+ * details.
+ *
+ * If you add a codec ID to this list, add it so that
+ * 1. no value of an existing codec ID changes (that would break ABI),
+ * 2. it is as close as possible to similar codecs
+ *
+ * After adding new codec IDs, do not forget to add an entry to the codec
+ * descriptor list and bump libavcodec minor version.
+ */
+enum AVCodecID {
+    AV_CODEC_ID_NONE,
+
+    /* video codecs */
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MPEG1VIDEO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MPEG2VIDEO, ///< preferred ID for MPEG-1/2 video decoding
+    AV_CODEC_ID_H261,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_H263,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_RV10,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_RV20,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MJPEG,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MJPEGB,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_LJPEG,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SP5X,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_JPEGLS,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MPEG4,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_RAWVIDEO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MSMPEG4V1,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MSMPEG4V2,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MSMPEG4V3,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_WMV1,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_WMV2,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_H263P,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_H263I,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_FLV1,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SVQ1,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SVQ3,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DVVIDEO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_HUFFYUV,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_CYUV,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_H264,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_INDEO3,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_VP3,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_THEORA,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ASV1,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ASV2,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_FFV1,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_4XM,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_VCR1,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_CLJR,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MDEC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ROQ,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_INTERPLAY_VIDEO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_XAN_WC3,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_XAN_WC4,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_RPZA,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_CINEPAK,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_WS_VQA,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MSRLE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MSVIDEO1,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_IDCIN,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_8BPS,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SMC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_FLIC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_TRUEMOTION1,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_VMDVIDEO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MSZH,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ZLIB,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_QTRLE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_TSCC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ULTI,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_QDRAW,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_VIXL,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_QPEG,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PNG,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PPM,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PBM,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PGM,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PGMYUV,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PAM,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_FFVHUFF,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_RV30,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_RV40,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_VC1,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_WMV3,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_LOCO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_WNV1,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_AASC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_INDEO2,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_FRAPS,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_TRUEMOTION2,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_BMP,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_CSCD,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MMVIDEO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ZMBV,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_AVS,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SMACKVIDEO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_NUV,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_KMVC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_FLASHSV,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_CAVS,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_JPEG2000,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_VMNC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_VP5,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_VP6,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_VP6F,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_TARGA,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DSICINVIDEO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_TIERTEXSEQVIDEO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_TIFF,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_GIF,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DXA,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DNXHD,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_THP,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SGI,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_C93,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_BETHSOFTVID,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PTX,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_TXD,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_VP6A,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_AMV,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_VB,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCX,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SUNRAST,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_INDEO4,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_INDEO5,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MIMIC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_RL2,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ESCAPE124,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DIRAC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_BFI,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_CMV,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MOTIONPIXELS,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_TGV,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_TGQ,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_TQI,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_AURA,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_AURA2,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_V210X,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_TMV,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_V210,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DPX,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MAD,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_FRWU,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_FLASHSV2,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_CDGRAPHICS,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_R210,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ANM,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_BINKVIDEO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_IFF_ILBM,
+#define AV_CODEC_ID_IFF_BYTERUN1 AV_CODEC_ID_IFF_ILBM
+    AV_CODEC_ID_KGV1,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_YOP,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_VP8,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PICTOR,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ANSI,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_A64_MULTI,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_A64_MULTI5,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_R10K,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MXPEG,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_LAGARITH,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PRORES,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_JV,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DFA,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_WMV3IMAGE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_VC1IMAGE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_UTVIDEO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_BMV_VIDEO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_VBLE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DXTORY,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_V410,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_XWD,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_CDXL,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_XBM,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ZEROCODEC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MSS1,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MSA1,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_TSCC2,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MTS2,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_CLLC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MSS2,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_VP9,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_AIC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ESCAPE130,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_G2M,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_WEBP,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_HNM4_VIDEO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_HEVC,
+#define AV_CODEC_ID_H265 AV_CODEC_ID_HEVC
+    AV_CODEC_ID_FIC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ALIAS_PIX,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_BRENDER_PIX,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PAF_VIDEO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_EXR,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_VP7,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SANM,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SGIRLE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MVC1,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MVC2,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_HQX,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_TDSC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_HQ_HQA,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_HAP,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DDS,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DXV,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SCREENPRESSO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_RSCC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_AVS2,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PGX,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_AVS3,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MSP2,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_VVC,
+#define AV_CODEC_ID_H266 AV_CODEC_ID_VVC
+    AV_CODEC_ID_Y41P,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_AVRP,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_012V,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_AVUI,
+#if FF_API_AYUV_CODECID
+    AV_CODEC_ID_AYUV,
+#endif
+    AV_CODEC_ID_TARGA_Y216,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_V308,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_V408,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_YUV4,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_AVRN,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_CPIA,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_XFACE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SNOW,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SMVJPEG,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_APNG,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DAALA,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_CFHD,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_TRUEMOTION2RT,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_M101,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MAGICYUV,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SHEERVIDEO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_YLC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PSD,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PIXLET,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SPEEDHQ,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_FMVC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SCPR,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_CLEARVIDEO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_XPM,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_AV1,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_BITPACKED,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MSCC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SRGC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SVG,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_GDV,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_FITS,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_IMM4,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PROSUMER,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MWSC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_WCMV,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_RASC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_HYMT,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ARBC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_AGM,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_LSCR,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_VP4,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_IMM5,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MVDV,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MVHA,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_CDTOONS,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MV30,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_NOTCHLC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PFM,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MOBICLIP,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PHOTOCD,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_IPU,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ARGO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_CRI,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SIMBIOSIS_IMX,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SGA_VIDEO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_GEM,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_VBN,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_JPEGXL,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_QOI,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PHM,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_RADIANCE_HDR,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_WBMP,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MEDIA100,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_VQC,
+
+    /* various PCM "codecs" */
+    AV_CODEC_ID_FIRST_AUDIO = 0x10000,     ///< A dummy id pointing at the start of audio codecs
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S16LE = 0x10000,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S16BE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_U16LE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_U16BE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S8,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_U8,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_MULAW,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_ALAW,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S32LE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S32BE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_U32LE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_U32BE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S24LE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S24BE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_U24LE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_U24BE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S24DAUD,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_ZORK,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S16LE_PLANAR,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_DVD,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_F32BE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_F32LE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_F64BE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_F64LE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_BLURAY,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_LXF,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_S302M,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S8_PLANAR,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S24LE_PLANAR,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S32LE_PLANAR,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S16BE_PLANAR,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S64LE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S64BE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_F16LE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_F24LE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_VIDC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_SGA,
+
+    /* various ADPCM codecs */
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_QT = 0x11000,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_WAV,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_DK3,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_DK4,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_WS,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_SMJPEG,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_MS,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_4XM,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_XA,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_ADX,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_EA,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_G726,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_CT,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_SWF,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_YAMAHA,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_SBPRO_4,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_SBPRO_3,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_SBPRO_2,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_THP,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_AMV,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_EA_R1,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_EA_R3,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_EA_R2,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_EA_SEAD,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_EA_EACS,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_EA_XAS,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_EA_MAXIS_XA,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_ISS,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_G722,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_APC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_VIMA,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_AFC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_OKI,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_DTK,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_RAD,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_G726LE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_THP_LE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_PSX,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_AICA,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_DAT4,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_MTAF,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_AGM,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_ARGO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_SSI,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_ZORK,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_APM,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_ALP,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_MTF,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_CUNNING,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_MOFLEX,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_ACORN,
+
+    /* AMR */
+    AV_CODEC_ID_AMR_NB = 0x12000,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_AMR_WB,
+
+    /* RealAudio codecs*/
+    AV_CODEC_ID_RA_144 = 0x13000,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_RA_288,
+
+    /* various DPCM codecs */
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ROQ_DPCM = 0x14000,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_INTERPLAY_DPCM,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_XAN_DPCM,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SOL_DPCM,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SDX2_DPCM,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_GREMLIN_DPCM,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DERF_DPCM,
+
+    /* audio codecs */
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MP2 = 0x15000,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MP3, ///< preferred ID for decoding MPEG audio layer 1, 2 or 3
+    AV_CODEC_ID_AAC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_AC3,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DTS,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_VORBIS,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DVAUDIO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_WMAV1,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_WMAV2,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MACE3,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MACE6,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_VMDAUDIO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_FLAC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MP3ADU,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MP3ON4,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SHORTEN,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ALAC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_WESTWOOD_SND1,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_GSM, ///< as in Berlin toast format
+    AV_CODEC_ID_QDM2,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_COOK,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_TRUESPEECH,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_TTA,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SMACKAUDIO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_QCELP,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_WAVPACK,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DSICINAUDIO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_IMC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MUSEPACK7,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MLP,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_GSM_MS, /* as found in WAV */
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ATRAC3,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_APE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_NELLYMOSER,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MUSEPACK8,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SPEEX,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_WMAVOICE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_WMAPRO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_WMALOSSLESS,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ATRAC3P,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_EAC3,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SIPR,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MP1,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_TWINVQ,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_TRUEHD,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MP4ALS,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ATRAC1,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_BINKAUDIO_RDFT,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_BINKAUDIO_DCT,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_AAC_LATM,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_QDMC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_CELT,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_G723_1,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_G729,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_8SVX_EXP,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_8SVX_FIB,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_BMV_AUDIO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_RALF,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_IAC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ILBC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_OPUS,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_COMFORT_NOISE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_TAK,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_METASOUND,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PAF_AUDIO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ON2AVC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DSS_SP,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_CODEC2,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_FFWAVESYNTH,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SONIC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SONIC_LS,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_EVRC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SMV,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DSD_LSBF,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DSD_MSBF,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DSD_LSBF_PLANAR,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DSD_MSBF_PLANAR,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_4GV,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_INTERPLAY_ACM,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_XMA1,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_XMA2,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DST,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ATRAC3AL,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ATRAC3PAL,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DOLBY_E,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_APTX,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_APTX_HD,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SBC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ATRAC9,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_HCOM,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ACELP_KELVIN,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MPEGH_3D_AUDIO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SIREN,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_HCA,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_FASTAUDIO,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MSNSIREN,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DFPWM,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_BONK,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MISC4,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_APAC,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_FTR,
+
+    /* subtitle codecs */
+    AV_CODEC_ID_FIRST_SUBTITLE = 0x17000,          ///< A dummy ID pointing at the start of subtitle codecs.
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DVD_SUBTITLE = 0x17000,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DVB_SUBTITLE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_TEXT,  ///< raw UTF-8 text
+    AV_CODEC_ID_XSUB,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SSA,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MOV_TEXT,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_HDMV_PGS_SUBTITLE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DVB_TELETEXT,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SRT,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MICRODVD,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_EIA_608,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_JACOSUB,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SAMI,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_REALTEXT,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_STL,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SUBVIEWER1,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SUBVIEWER,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SUBRIP,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_WEBVTT,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MPL2,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_VPLAYER,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PJS,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ASS,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_HDMV_TEXT_SUBTITLE,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_TTML,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_ARIB_CAPTION,
+
+    /* other specific kind of codecs (generally used for attachments) */
+    AV_CODEC_ID_FIRST_UNKNOWN = 0x18000,           ///< A dummy ID pointing at the start of various fake codecs.
+    AV_CODEC_ID_TTF = 0x18000,
+
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SCTE_35, ///< Contain timestamp estimated through PCR of program stream.
+    AV_CODEC_ID_EPG,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_BINTEXT,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_XBIN,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_IDF,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_OTF,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_SMPTE_KLV,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_DVD_NAV,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_TIMED_ID3,
+    AV_CODEC_ID_BIN_DATA,
+
+
+    AV_CODEC_ID_PROBE = 0x19000, ///< codec_id is not known (like AV_CODEC_ID_NONE) but lavf should attempt to identify it
+
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MPEG2TS = 0x20000, /**< _FAKE_ codec to indicate a raw MPEG-2 TS
+                                * stream (only used by libavformat) */
+    AV_CODEC_ID_MPEG4SYSTEMS = 0x20001, /**< _FAKE_ codec to indicate a MPEG-4 Systems
+                                * stream (only used by libavformat) */
+    AV_CODEC_ID_FFMETADATA = 0x21000,   ///< Dummy codec for streams containing only metadata information.
+    AV_CODEC_ID_WRAPPED_AVFRAME = 0x21001, ///< Passthrough codec, AVFrames wrapped in AVPacket
+};
+
+/**
+ * Get the type of the given codec.
+ */
+enum AVMediaType avcodec_get_type(enum AVCodecID codec_id);
+
+/**
+ * Get the name of a codec.
+ * @return  a static string identifying the codec; never NULL
+ */
+const char *avcodec_get_name(enum AVCodecID id);
+
+/**
+ * Return codec bits per sample.
+ *
+ * @param[in] codec_id the codec
+ * @return Number of bits per sample or zero if unknown for the given codec.
+ */
+int av_get_bits_per_sample(enum AVCodecID codec_id);
+
+/**
+ * Return codec bits per sample.
+ * Only return non-zero if the bits per sample is exactly correct, not an
+ * approximation.
+ *
+ * @param[in] codec_id the codec
+ * @return Number of bits per sample or zero if unknown for the given codec.
+ */
+int av_get_exact_bits_per_sample(enum AVCodecID codec_id);
+
+/**
+ * Return a name for the specified profile, if available.
+ *
+ * @param codec_id the ID of the codec to which the requested profile belongs
+ * @param profile the profile value for which a name is requested
+ * @return A name for the profile if found, NULL otherwise.
+ *
+ * @note unlike av_get_profile_name(), which searches a list of profiles
+ *       supported by a specific decoder or encoder implementation, this
+ *       function searches the list of profiles from the AVCodecDescriptor
+ */
+const char *avcodec_profile_name(enum AVCodecID codec_id, int profile);
+
+/**
+ * Return the PCM codec associated with a sample format.
+ * @param be  endianness, 0 for little, 1 for big,
+ *            -1 (or anything else) for native
+ * @return  AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_* or AV_CODEC_ID_NONE
+ */
+enum AVCodecID av_get_pcm_codec(enum AVSampleFormat fmt, int be);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif // AVCODEC_CODEC_ID_H
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavcodec/codec_par.h b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/codec_par.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f51d27c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/codec_par.h
@@ -0,0 +1,247 @@
+/*
+ * Codec parameters public API
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_CODEC_PAR_H
+#define AVCODEC_CODEC_PAR_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+#include "libavutil/avutil.h"
+#include "libavutil/channel_layout.h"
+#include "libavutil/rational.h"
+#include "libavutil/pixfmt.h"
+
+#include "codec_id.h"
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavc_core
+ * @{
+ */
+
+enum AVFieldOrder {
+    AV_FIELD_UNKNOWN,
+    AV_FIELD_PROGRESSIVE,
+    AV_FIELD_TT,          ///< Top coded_first, top displayed first
+    AV_FIELD_BB,          ///< Bottom coded first, bottom displayed first
+    AV_FIELD_TB,          ///< Top coded first, bottom displayed first
+    AV_FIELD_BT,          ///< Bottom coded first, top displayed first
+};
+
+/**
+ * This struct describes the properties of an encoded stream.
+ *
+ * sizeof(AVCodecParameters) is not a part of the public ABI, this struct must
+ * be allocated with avcodec_parameters_alloc() and freed with
+ * avcodec_parameters_free().
+ */
+typedef struct AVCodecParameters {
+    /**
+     * General type of the encoded data.
+     */
+    enum AVMediaType codec_type;
+    /**
+     * Specific type of the encoded data (the codec used).
+     */
+    enum AVCodecID   codec_id;
+    /**
+     * Additional information about the codec (corresponds to the AVI FOURCC).
+     */
+    uint32_t         codec_tag;
+
+    /**
+     * Extra binary data needed for initializing the decoder, codec-dependent.
+     *
+     * Must be allocated with av_malloc() and will be freed by
+     * avcodec_parameters_free(). The allocated size of extradata must be at
+     * least extradata_size + AV_INPUT_BUFFER_PADDING_SIZE, with the padding
+     * bytes zeroed.
+     */
+    uint8_t *extradata;
+    /**
+     * Size of the extradata content in bytes.
+     */
+    int      extradata_size;
+
+    /**
+     * - video: the pixel format, the value corresponds to enum AVPixelFormat.
+     * - audio: the sample format, the value corresponds to enum AVSampleFormat.
+     */
+    int format;
+
+    /**
+     * The average bitrate of the encoded data (in bits per second).
+     */
+    int64_t bit_rate;
+
+    /**
+     * The number of bits per sample in the codedwords.
+     *
+     * This is basically the bitrate per sample. It is mandatory for a bunch of
+     * formats to actually decode them. It's the number of bits for one sample in
+     * the actual coded bitstream.
+     *
+     * This could be for example 4 for ADPCM
+     * For PCM formats this matches bits_per_raw_sample
+     * Can be 0
+     */
+    int bits_per_coded_sample;
+
+    /**
+     * This is the number of valid bits in each output sample. If the
+     * sample format has more bits, the least significant bits are additional
+     * padding bits, which are always 0. Use right shifts to reduce the sample
+     * to its actual size. For example, audio formats with 24 bit samples will
+     * have bits_per_raw_sample set to 24, and format set to AV_SAMPLE_FMT_S32.
+     * To get the original sample use "(int32_t)sample >> 8"."
+     *
+     * For ADPCM this might be 12 or 16 or similar
+     * Can be 0
+     */
+    int bits_per_raw_sample;
+
+    /**
+     * Codec-specific bitstream restrictions that the stream conforms to.
+     */
+    int profile;
+    int level;
+
+    /**
+     * Video only. The dimensions of the video frame in pixels.
+     */
+    int width;
+    int height;
+
+    /**
+     * Video only. The aspect ratio (width / height) which a single pixel
+     * should have when displayed.
+     *
+     * When the aspect ratio is unknown / undefined, the numerator should be
+     * set to 0 (the denominator may have any value).
+     */
+    AVRational sample_aspect_ratio;
+
+    /**
+     * Video only. The order of the fields in interlaced video.
+     */
+    enum AVFieldOrder                  field_order;
+
+    /**
+     * Video only. Additional colorspace characteristics.
+     */
+    enum AVColorRange                  color_range;
+    enum AVColorPrimaries              color_primaries;
+    enum AVColorTransferCharacteristic color_trc;
+    enum AVColorSpace                  color_space;
+    enum AVChromaLocation              chroma_location;
+
+    /**
+     * Video only. Number of delayed frames.
+     */
+    int video_delay;
+
+#if FF_API_OLD_CHANNEL_LAYOUT
+    /**
+     * Audio only. The channel layout bitmask. May be 0 if the channel layout is
+     * unknown or unspecified, otherwise the number of bits set must be equal to
+     * the channels field.
+     * @deprecated use ch_layout
+     */
+    attribute_deprecated
+    uint64_t channel_layout;
+    /**
+     * Audio only. The number of audio channels.
+     * @deprecated use ch_layout.nb_channels
+     */
+    attribute_deprecated
+    int      channels;
+#endif
+    /**
+     * Audio only. The number of audio samples per second.
+     */
+    int      sample_rate;
+    /**
+     * Audio only. The number of bytes per coded audio frame, required by some
+     * formats.
+     *
+     * Corresponds to nBlockAlign in WAVEFORMATEX.
+     */
+    int      block_align;
+    /**
+     * Audio only. Audio frame size, if known. Required by some formats to be static.
+     */
+    int      frame_size;
+
+    /**
+     * Audio only. The amount of padding (in samples) inserted by the encoder at
+     * the beginning of the audio. I.e. this number of leading decoded samples
+     * must be discarded by the caller to get the original audio without leading
+     * padding.
+     */
+    int initial_padding;
+    /**
+     * Audio only. The amount of padding (in samples) appended by the encoder to
+     * the end of the audio. I.e. this number of decoded samples must be
+     * discarded by the caller from the end of the stream to get the original
+     * audio without any trailing padding.
+     */
+    int trailing_padding;
+    /**
+     * Audio only. Number of samples to skip after a discontinuity.
+     */
+    int seek_preroll;
+
+    /**
+     * Audio only. The channel layout and number of channels.
+     */
+    AVChannelLayout ch_layout;
+} AVCodecParameters;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a new AVCodecParameters and set its fields to default values
+ * (unknown/invalid/0). The returned struct must be freed with
+ * avcodec_parameters_free().
+ */
+AVCodecParameters *avcodec_parameters_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Free an AVCodecParameters instance and everything associated with it and
+ * write NULL to the supplied pointer.
+ */
+void avcodec_parameters_free(AVCodecParameters **par);
+
+/**
+ * Copy the contents of src to dst. Any allocated fields in dst are freed and
+ * replaced with newly allocated duplicates of the corresponding fields in src.
+ *
+ * @return >= 0 on success, a negative AVERROR code on failure.
+ */
+int avcodec_parameters_copy(AVCodecParameters *dst, const AVCodecParameters *src);
+
+/**
+ * This function is the same as av_get_audio_frame_duration(), except it works
+ * with AVCodecParameters instead of an AVCodecContext.
+ */
+int av_get_audio_frame_duration2(AVCodecParameters *par, int frame_bytes);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif // AVCODEC_CODEC_PAR_H
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavcodec/d3d11va.h b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/d3d11va.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6816b6c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/d3d11va.h
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+/*
+ * Direct3D11 HW acceleration
+ *
+ * copyright (c) 2009 Laurent Aimar
+ * copyright (c) 2015 Steve Lhomme
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_D3D11VA_H
+#define AVCODEC_D3D11VA_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavc_codec_hwaccel_d3d11va
+ * Public libavcodec D3D11VA header.
+ */
+
+#if !defined(_WIN32_WINNT) || _WIN32_WINNT < 0x0602
+#undef _WIN32_WINNT
+#define _WIN32_WINNT 0x0602
+#endif
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include <d3d11.h>
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_codec_hwaccel_d3d11va Direct3D11
+ * @ingroup lavc_codec_hwaccel
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#define FF_DXVA2_WORKAROUND_SCALING_LIST_ZIGZAG 1 ///< Work around for Direct3D11 and old UVD/UVD+ ATI video cards
+#define FF_DXVA2_WORKAROUND_INTEL_CLEARVIDEO    2 ///< Work around for Direct3D11 and old Intel GPUs with ClearVideo interface
+
+/**
+ * This structure is used to provides the necessary configurations and data
+ * to the Direct3D11 FFmpeg HWAccel implementation.
+ *
+ * The application must make it available as AVCodecContext.hwaccel_context.
+ *
+ * Use av_d3d11va_alloc_context() exclusively to allocate an AVD3D11VAContext.
+ */
+typedef struct AVD3D11VAContext {
+    /**
+     * D3D11 decoder object
+     */
+    ID3D11VideoDecoder *decoder;
+
+    /**
+      * D3D11 VideoContext
+      */
+    ID3D11VideoContext *video_context;
+
+    /**
+     * D3D11 configuration used to create the decoder
+     */
+    D3D11_VIDEO_DECODER_CONFIG *cfg;
+
+    /**
+     * The number of surface in the surface array
+     */
+    unsigned surface_count;
+
+    /**
+     * The array of Direct3D surfaces used to create the decoder
+     */
+    ID3D11VideoDecoderOutputView **surface;
+
+    /**
+     * A bit field configuring the workarounds needed for using the decoder
+     */
+    uint64_t workaround;
+
+    /**
+     * Private to the FFmpeg AVHWAccel implementation
+     */
+    unsigned report_id;
+
+    /**
+      * Mutex to access video_context
+      */
+    HANDLE  context_mutex;
+} AVD3D11VAContext;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVD3D11VAContext.
+ *
+ * @return Newly-allocated AVD3D11VAContext or NULL on failure.
+ */
+AVD3D11VAContext *av_d3d11va_alloc_context(void);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_D3D11VA_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavcodec/defs.h b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/defs.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fbe3254
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/defs.h
@@ -0,0 +1,192 @@
+/*
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_DEFS_H
+#define AVCODEC_DEFS_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup libavc
+ * Misc types and constants that do not belong anywhere else.
+ */
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+
+/**
+ * @ingroup lavc_decoding
+ * Required number of additionally allocated bytes at the end of the input bitstream for decoding.
+ * This is mainly needed because some optimized bitstream readers read
+ * 32 or 64 bit at once and could read over the end.<br>
+ * Note: If the first 23 bits of the additional bytes are not 0, then damaged
+ * MPEG bitstreams could cause overread and segfault.
+ */
+#define AV_INPUT_BUFFER_PADDING_SIZE 64
+
+/**
+ * Verify checksums embedded in the bitstream (could be of either encoded or
+ * decoded data, depending on the format) and print an error message on mismatch.
+ * If AV_EF_EXPLODE is also set, a mismatching checksum will result in the
+ * decoder/demuxer returning an error.
+ */
+#define AV_EF_CRCCHECK       (1<<0)
+#define AV_EF_BITSTREAM      (1<<1)   ///< detect bitstream specification deviations
+#define AV_EF_BUFFER         (1<<2)   ///< detect improper bitstream length
+#define AV_EF_EXPLODE        (1<<3)   ///< abort decoding on minor error detection
+
+#define AV_EF_IGNORE_ERR     (1<<15)  ///< ignore errors and continue
+#define AV_EF_CAREFUL        (1<<16)  ///< consider things that violate the spec, are fast to calculate and have not been seen in the wild as errors
+#define AV_EF_COMPLIANT      (1<<17)  ///< consider all spec non compliances as errors
+#define AV_EF_AGGRESSIVE     (1<<18)  ///< consider things that a sane encoder/muxer should not do as an error
+
+#define FF_COMPLIANCE_VERY_STRICT   2 ///< Strictly conform to an older more strict version of the spec or reference software.
+#define FF_COMPLIANCE_STRICT        1 ///< Strictly conform to all the things in the spec no matter what consequences.
+#define FF_COMPLIANCE_NORMAL        0
+#define FF_COMPLIANCE_UNOFFICIAL   -1 ///< Allow unofficial extensions
+#define FF_COMPLIANCE_EXPERIMENTAL -2 ///< Allow nonstandardized experimental things.
+
+/**
+ * @ingroup lavc_decoding
+ */
+enum AVDiscard{
+    /* We leave some space between them for extensions (drop some
+     * keyframes for intra-only or drop just some bidir frames). */
+    AVDISCARD_NONE    =-16, ///< discard nothing
+    AVDISCARD_DEFAULT =  0, ///< discard useless packets like 0 size packets in avi
+    AVDISCARD_NONREF  =  8, ///< discard all non reference
+    AVDISCARD_BIDIR   = 16, ///< discard all bidirectional frames
+    AVDISCARD_NONINTRA= 24, ///< discard all non intra frames
+    AVDISCARD_NONKEY  = 32, ///< discard all frames except keyframes
+    AVDISCARD_ALL     = 48, ///< discard all
+};
+
+enum AVAudioServiceType {
+    AV_AUDIO_SERVICE_TYPE_MAIN              = 0,
+    AV_AUDIO_SERVICE_TYPE_EFFECTS           = 1,
+    AV_AUDIO_SERVICE_TYPE_VISUALLY_IMPAIRED = 2,
+    AV_AUDIO_SERVICE_TYPE_HEARING_IMPAIRED  = 3,
+    AV_AUDIO_SERVICE_TYPE_DIALOGUE          = 4,
+    AV_AUDIO_SERVICE_TYPE_COMMENTARY        = 5,
+    AV_AUDIO_SERVICE_TYPE_EMERGENCY         = 6,
+    AV_AUDIO_SERVICE_TYPE_VOICE_OVER        = 7,
+    AV_AUDIO_SERVICE_TYPE_KARAOKE           = 8,
+    AV_AUDIO_SERVICE_TYPE_NB                   , ///< Not part of ABI
+};
+
+/**
+ * Pan Scan area.
+ * This specifies the area which should be displayed.
+ * Note there may be multiple such areas for one frame.
+ */
+typedef struct AVPanScan {
+    /**
+     * id
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     */
+    int id;
+
+    /**
+     * width and height in 1/16 pel
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     */
+    int width;
+    int height;
+
+    /**
+     * position of the top left corner in 1/16 pel for up to 3 fields/frames
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     */
+    int16_t position[3][2];
+} AVPanScan;
+
+/**
+ * This structure describes the bitrate properties of an encoded bitstream. It
+ * roughly corresponds to a subset the VBV parameters for MPEG-2 or HRD
+ * parameters for H.264/HEVC.
+ */
+typedef struct AVCPBProperties {
+    /**
+     * Maximum bitrate of the stream, in bits per second.
+     * Zero if unknown or unspecified.
+     */
+    int64_t max_bitrate;
+    /**
+     * Minimum bitrate of the stream, in bits per second.
+     * Zero if unknown or unspecified.
+     */
+    int64_t min_bitrate;
+    /**
+     * Average bitrate of the stream, in bits per second.
+     * Zero if unknown or unspecified.
+     */
+    int64_t avg_bitrate;
+
+    /**
+     * The size of the buffer to which the ratecontrol is applied, in bits.
+     * Zero if unknown or unspecified.
+     */
+    int64_t buffer_size;
+
+    /**
+     * The delay between the time the packet this structure is associated with
+     * is received and the time when it should be decoded, in periods of a 27MHz
+     * clock.
+     *
+     * UINT64_MAX when unknown or unspecified.
+     */
+    uint64_t vbv_delay;
+} AVCPBProperties;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a CPB properties structure and initialize its fields to default
+ * values.
+ *
+ * @param size if non-NULL, the size of the allocated struct will be written
+ *             here. This is useful for embedding it in side data.
+ *
+ * @return the newly allocated struct or NULL on failure
+ */
+AVCPBProperties *av_cpb_properties_alloc(size_t *size);
+
+/**
+ * This structure supplies correlation between a packet timestamp and a wall clock
+ * production time. The definition follows the Producer Reference Time ('prft')
+ * as defined in ISO/IEC 14496-12
+ */
+typedef struct AVProducerReferenceTime {
+    /**
+     * A UTC timestamp, in microseconds, since Unix epoch (e.g, av_gettime()).
+     */
+    int64_t wallclock;
+    int flags;
+} AVProducerReferenceTime;
+
+/**
+ * Encode extradata length to a buffer. Used by xiph codecs.
+ *
+ * @param s buffer to write to; must be at least (v/255+1) bytes long
+ * @param v size of extradata in bytes
+ * @return number of bytes written to the buffer.
+ */
+unsigned int av_xiphlacing(unsigned char *s, unsigned int v);
+
+#endif // AVCODEC_DEFS_H
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavcodec/dirac.h b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/dirac.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e6d9d34
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/dirac.h
@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (C) 2007 Marco Gerards <marco@gnu.org>
+ * Copyright (C) 2009 David Conrad
+ * Copyright (C) 2011 Jordi Ortiz
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_DIRAC_H
+#define AVCODEC_DIRAC_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * Interface to Dirac Decoder/Encoder
+ * @author Marco Gerards <marco@gnu.org>
+ * @author David Conrad
+ * @author Jordi Ortiz
+ */
+
+#include "avcodec.h"
+
+/**
+ * The spec limits the number of wavelet decompositions to 4 for both
+ * level 1 (VC-2) and 128 (long-gop default).
+ * 5 decompositions is the maximum before >16-bit buffers are needed.
+ * Schroedinger allows this for DD 9,7 and 13,7 wavelets only, limiting
+ * the others to 4 decompositions (or 3 for the fidelity filter).
+ *
+ * We use this instead of MAX_DECOMPOSITIONS to save some memory.
+ */
+#define MAX_DWT_LEVELS 5
+
+/**
+ * Parse code values:
+ *
+ * Dirac Specification ->
+ * 9.6.1  Table 9.1
+ *
+ * VC-2 Specification  ->
+ * 10.4.1 Table 10.1
+ */
+
+enum DiracParseCodes {
+    DIRAC_PCODE_SEQ_HEADER      = 0x00,
+    DIRAC_PCODE_END_SEQ         = 0x10,
+    DIRAC_PCODE_AUX             = 0x20,
+    DIRAC_PCODE_PAD             = 0x30,
+    DIRAC_PCODE_PICTURE_CODED   = 0x08,
+    DIRAC_PCODE_PICTURE_RAW     = 0x48,
+    DIRAC_PCODE_PICTURE_LOW_DEL = 0xC8,
+    DIRAC_PCODE_PICTURE_HQ      = 0xE8,
+    DIRAC_PCODE_INTER_NOREF_CO1 = 0x0A,
+    DIRAC_PCODE_INTER_NOREF_CO2 = 0x09,
+    DIRAC_PCODE_INTER_REF_CO1   = 0x0D,
+    DIRAC_PCODE_INTER_REF_CO2   = 0x0E,
+    DIRAC_PCODE_INTRA_REF_CO    = 0x0C,
+    DIRAC_PCODE_INTRA_REF_RAW   = 0x4C,
+    DIRAC_PCODE_INTRA_REF_PICT  = 0xCC,
+    DIRAC_PCODE_MAGIC           = 0x42424344,
+};
+
+typedef struct DiracVersionInfo {
+    int major;
+    int minor;
+} DiracVersionInfo;
+
+typedef struct AVDiracSeqHeader {
+    unsigned width;
+    unsigned height;
+    uint8_t chroma_format;          ///< 0: 444  1: 422  2: 420
+
+    uint8_t interlaced;
+    uint8_t top_field_first;
+
+    uint8_t frame_rate_index;       ///< index into dirac_frame_rate[]
+    uint8_t aspect_ratio_index;     ///< index into dirac_aspect_ratio[]
+
+    uint16_t clean_width;
+    uint16_t clean_height;
+    uint16_t clean_left_offset;
+    uint16_t clean_right_offset;
+
+    uint8_t pixel_range_index;      ///< index into dirac_pixel_range_presets[]
+    uint8_t color_spec_index;       ///< index into dirac_color_spec_presets[]
+
+    int profile;
+    int level;
+
+    AVRational framerate;
+    AVRational sample_aspect_ratio;
+
+    enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt;
+    enum AVColorRange color_range;
+    enum AVColorPrimaries color_primaries;
+    enum AVColorTransferCharacteristic color_trc;
+    enum AVColorSpace colorspace;
+
+    DiracVersionInfo version;
+    int bit_depth;
+} AVDiracSeqHeader;
+
+/**
+ * Parse a Dirac sequence header.
+ *
+ * @param dsh this function will allocate and fill an AVDiracSeqHeader struct
+ *            and write it into this pointer. The caller must free it with
+ *            av_free().
+ * @param buf the data buffer
+ * @param buf_size the size of the data buffer in bytes
+ * @param log_ctx if non-NULL, this function will log errors here
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR code on failure
+ */
+int av_dirac_parse_sequence_header(AVDiracSeqHeader **dsh,
+                                   const uint8_t *buf, size_t buf_size,
+                                   void *log_ctx);
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_DIRAC_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavcodec/dv_profile.h b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/dv_profile.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4365f1b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/dv_profile.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_DV_PROFILE_H
+#define AVCODEC_DV_PROFILE_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+#include "libavutil/pixfmt.h"
+#include "libavutil/rational.h"
+
+/* minimum number of bytes to read from a DV stream in order to
+ * determine the profile */
+#define DV_PROFILE_BYTES (6 * 80) /* 6 DIF blocks */
+
+
+/*
+ * AVDVProfile is used to express the differences between various
+ * DV flavors. For now it's primarily used for differentiating
+ * 525/60 and 625/50, but the plans are to use it for various
+ * DV specs as well (e.g. SMPTE314M vs. IEC 61834).
+ */
+typedef struct AVDVProfile {
+    int              dsf;                   /* value of the dsf in the DV header */
+    int              video_stype;           /* stype for VAUX source pack */
+    int              frame_size;            /* total size of one frame in bytes */
+    int              difseg_size;           /* number of DIF segments per DIF channel */
+    int              n_difchan;             /* number of DIF channels per frame */
+    AVRational       time_base;             /* 1/framerate */
+    int              ltc_divisor;           /* FPS from the LTS standpoint */
+    int              height;                /* picture height in pixels */
+    int              width;                 /* picture width in pixels */
+    AVRational       sar[2];                /* sample aspect ratios for 4:3 and 16:9 */
+    enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt;             /* picture pixel format */
+    int              bpm;                   /* blocks per macroblock */
+    const uint8_t   *block_sizes;           /* AC block sizes, in bits */
+    int              audio_stride;          /* size of audio_shuffle table */
+    int              audio_min_samples[3];  /* min amount of audio samples */
+                                            /* for 48kHz, 44.1kHz and 32kHz */
+    int              audio_samples_dist[5]; /* how many samples are supposed to be */
+                                            /* in each frame in a 5 frames window */
+    const uint8_t  (*audio_shuffle)[9];     /* PCM shuffling table */
+} AVDVProfile;
+
+/**
+ * Get a DV profile for the provided compressed frame.
+ *
+ * @param sys the profile used for the previous frame, may be NULL
+ * @param frame the compressed data buffer
+ * @param buf_size size of the buffer in bytes
+ * @return the DV profile for the supplied data or NULL on failure
+ */
+const AVDVProfile *av_dv_frame_profile(const AVDVProfile *sys,
+                                       const uint8_t *frame, unsigned buf_size);
+
+/**
+ * Get a DV profile for the provided stream parameters.
+ */
+const AVDVProfile *av_dv_codec_profile(int width, int height, enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Get a DV profile for the provided stream parameters.
+ * The frame rate is used as a best-effort parameter.
+ */
+const AVDVProfile *av_dv_codec_profile2(int width, int height, enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, AVRational frame_rate);
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_DV_PROFILE_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavcodec/dxva2.h b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/dxva2.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..22c9399
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/dxva2.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+ * DXVA2 HW acceleration
+ *
+ * copyright (c) 2009 Laurent Aimar
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_DXVA2_H
+#define AVCODEC_DXVA2_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavc_codec_hwaccel_dxva2
+ * Public libavcodec DXVA2 header.
+ */
+
+#if !defined(_WIN32_WINNT) || _WIN32_WINNT < 0x0602
+#undef _WIN32_WINNT
+#define _WIN32_WINNT 0x0602
+#endif
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include <d3d9.h>
+#include <dxva2api.h>
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_codec_hwaccel_dxva2 DXVA2
+ * @ingroup lavc_codec_hwaccel
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#define FF_DXVA2_WORKAROUND_SCALING_LIST_ZIGZAG 1 ///< Work around for DXVA2 and old UVD/UVD+ ATI video cards
+#define FF_DXVA2_WORKAROUND_INTEL_CLEARVIDEO    2 ///< Work around for DXVA2 and old Intel GPUs with ClearVideo interface
+
+/**
+ * This structure is used to provides the necessary configurations and data
+ * to the DXVA2 FFmpeg HWAccel implementation.
+ *
+ * The application must make it available as AVCodecContext.hwaccel_context.
+ */
+struct dxva_context {
+    /**
+     * DXVA2 decoder object
+     */
+    IDirectXVideoDecoder *decoder;
+
+    /**
+     * DXVA2 configuration used to create the decoder
+     */
+    const DXVA2_ConfigPictureDecode *cfg;
+
+    /**
+     * The number of surface in the surface array
+     */
+    unsigned surface_count;
+
+    /**
+     * The array of Direct3D surfaces used to create the decoder
+     */
+    LPDIRECT3DSURFACE9 *surface;
+
+    /**
+     * A bit field configuring the workarounds needed for using the decoder
+     */
+    uint64_t workaround;
+
+    /**
+     * Private to the FFmpeg AVHWAccel implementation
+     */
+    unsigned report_id;
+};
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_DXVA2_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavcodec/jni.h b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/jni.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dd99e92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/jni.h
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+/*
+ * JNI public API functions
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 2015-2016 Matthieu Bouron <matthieu.bouron stupeflix.com>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_JNI_H
+#define AVCODEC_JNI_H
+
+/*
+ * Manually set a Java virtual machine which will be used to retrieve the JNI
+ * environment. Once a Java VM is set it cannot be changed afterwards, meaning
+ * you can call multiple times av_jni_set_java_vm with the same Java VM pointer
+ * however it will error out if you try to set a different Java VM.
+ *
+ * @param vm Java virtual machine
+ * @param log_ctx context used for logging, can be NULL
+ * @return 0 on success, < 0 otherwise
+ */
+int av_jni_set_java_vm(void *vm, void *log_ctx);
+
+/*
+ * Get the Java virtual machine which has been set with av_jni_set_java_vm.
+ *
+ * @param vm Java virtual machine
+ * @return a pointer to the Java virtual machine
+ */
+void *av_jni_get_java_vm(void *log_ctx);
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_JNI_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavcodec/mediacodec.h b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/mediacodec.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4e9b56a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/mediacodec.h
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+/*
+ * Android MediaCodec public API
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 2016 Matthieu Bouron <matthieu.bouron stupeflix.com>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_MEDIACODEC_H
+#define AVCODEC_MEDIACODEC_H
+
+#include "libavcodec/avcodec.h"
+
+/**
+ * This structure holds a reference to a android/view/Surface object that will
+ * be used as output by the decoder.
+ *
+ */
+typedef struct AVMediaCodecContext {
+
+    /**
+     * android/view/Surface object reference.
+     */
+    void *surface;
+
+} AVMediaCodecContext;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate and initialize a MediaCodec context.
+ *
+ * When decoding with MediaCodec is finished, the caller must free the
+ * MediaCodec context with av_mediacodec_default_free.
+ *
+ * @return a pointer to a newly allocated AVMediaCodecContext on success, NULL otherwise
+ */
+AVMediaCodecContext *av_mediacodec_alloc_context(void);
+
+/**
+ * Convenience function that sets up the MediaCodec context.
+ *
+ * @param avctx codec context
+ * @param ctx MediaCodec context to initialize
+ * @param surface reference to an android/view/Surface
+ * @return 0 on success, < 0 otherwise
+ */
+int av_mediacodec_default_init(AVCodecContext *avctx, AVMediaCodecContext *ctx, void *surface);
+
+/**
+ * This function must be called to free the MediaCodec context initialized with
+ * av_mediacodec_default_init().
+ *
+ * @param avctx codec context
+ */
+void av_mediacodec_default_free(AVCodecContext *avctx);
+
+/**
+ * Opaque structure representing a MediaCodec buffer to render.
+ */
+typedef struct MediaCodecBuffer AVMediaCodecBuffer;
+
+/**
+ * Release a MediaCodec buffer and render it to the surface that is associated
+ * with the decoder. This function should only be called once on a given
+ * buffer, once released the underlying buffer returns to the codec, thus
+ * subsequent calls to this function will have no effect.
+ *
+ * @param buffer the buffer to render
+ * @param render 1 to release and render the buffer to the surface or 0 to
+ * discard the buffer
+ * @return 0 on success, < 0 otherwise
+ */
+int av_mediacodec_release_buffer(AVMediaCodecBuffer *buffer, int render);
+
+/**
+ * Release a MediaCodec buffer and render it at the given time to the surface
+ * that is associated with the decoder. The timestamp must be within one second
+ * of the current `java/lang/System#nanoTime()` (which is implemented using
+ * `CLOCK_MONOTONIC` on Android). See the Android MediaCodec documentation
+ * of [`android/media/MediaCodec#releaseOutputBuffer(int,long)`][0] for more details.
+ *
+ * @param buffer the buffer to render
+ * @param time timestamp in nanoseconds of when to render the buffer
+ * @return 0 on success, < 0 otherwise
+ *
+ * [0]: https://developer.android.com/reference/android/media/MediaCodec#releaseOutputBuffer(int,%20long)
+ */
+int av_mediacodec_render_buffer_at_time(AVMediaCodecBuffer *buffer, int64_t time);
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_MEDIACODEC_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavcodec/packet.h b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/packet.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f28e7e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/packet.h
@@ -0,0 +1,731 @@
+/*
+ * AVPacket public API
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_PACKET_H
+#define AVCODEC_PACKET_H
+
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+#include "libavutil/attributes.h"
+#include "libavutil/buffer.h"
+#include "libavutil/dict.h"
+#include "libavutil/rational.h"
+#include "libavutil/version.h"
+
+#include "libavcodec/version_major.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_packet AVPacket
+ *
+ * Types and functions for working with AVPacket.
+ * @{
+ */
+enum AVPacketSideDataType {
+    /**
+     * An AV_PKT_DATA_PALETTE side data packet contains exactly AVPALETTE_SIZE
+     * bytes worth of palette. This side data signals that a new palette is
+     * present.
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_PALETTE,
+
+    /**
+     * The AV_PKT_DATA_NEW_EXTRADATA is used to notify the codec or the format
+     * that the extradata buffer was changed and the receiving side should
+     * act upon it appropriately. The new extradata is embedded in the side
+     * data buffer and should be immediately used for processing the current
+     * frame or packet.
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_NEW_EXTRADATA,
+
+    /**
+     * An AV_PKT_DATA_PARAM_CHANGE side data packet is laid out as follows:
+     * @code
+     * u32le param_flags
+     * if (param_flags & AV_SIDE_DATA_PARAM_CHANGE_CHANNEL_COUNT)
+     *     s32le channel_count
+     * if (param_flags & AV_SIDE_DATA_PARAM_CHANGE_CHANNEL_LAYOUT)
+     *     u64le channel_layout
+     * if (param_flags & AV_SIDE_DATA_PARAM_CHANGE_SAMPLE_RATE)
+     *     s32le sample_rate
+     * if (param_flags & AV_SIDE_DATA_PARAM_CHANGE_DIMENSIONS)
+     *     s32le width
+     *     s32le height
+     * @endcode
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_PARAM_CHANGE,
+
+    /**
+     * An AV_PKT_DATA_H263_MB_INFO side data packet contains a number of
+     * structures with info about macroblocks relevant to splitting the
+     * packet into smaller packets on macroblock edges (e.g. as for RFC 2190).
+     * That is, it does not necessarily contain info about all macroblocks,
+     * as long as the distance between macroblocks in the info is smaller
+     * than the target payload size.
+     * Each MB info structure is 12 bytes, and is laid out as follows:
+     * @code
+     * u32le bit offset from the start of the packet
+     * u8    current quantizer at the start of the macroblock
+     * u8    GOB number
+     * u16le macroblock address within the GOB
+     * u8    horizontal MV predictor
+     * u8    vertical MV predictor
+     * u8    horizontal MV predictor for block number 3
+     * u8    vertical MV predictor for block number 3
+     * @endcode
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_H263_MB_INFO,
+
+    /**
+     * This side data should be associated with an audio stream and contains
+     * ReplayGain information in form of the AVReplayGain struct.
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_REPLAYGAIN,
+
+    /**
+     * This side data contains a 3x3 transformation matrix describing an affine
+     * transformation that needs to be applied to the decoded video frames for
+     * correct presentation.
+     *
+     * See libavutil/display.h for a detailed description of the data.
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_DISPLAYMATRIX,
+
+    /**
+     * This side data should be associated with a video stream and contains
+     * Stereoscopic 3D information in form of the AVStereo3D struct.
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_STEREO3D,
+
+    /**
+     * This side data should be associated with an audio stream and corresponds
+     * to enum AVAudioServiceType.
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_AUDIO_SERVICE_TYPE,
+
+    /**
+     * This side data contains quality related information from the encoder.
+     * @code
+     * u32le quality factor of the compressed frame. Allowed range is between 1 (good) and FF_LAMBDA_MAX (bad).
+     * u8    picture type
+     * u8    error count
+     * u16   reserved
+     * u64le[error count] sum of squared differences between encoder in and output
+     * @endcode
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_QUALITY_STATS,
+
+    /**
+     * This side data contains an integer value representing the stream index
+     * of a "fallback" track.  A fallback track indicates an alternate
+     * track to use when the current track can not be decoded for some reason.
+     * e.g. no decoder available for codec.
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_FALLBACK_TRACK,
+
+    /**
+     * This side data corresponds to the AVCPBProperties struct.
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_CPB_PROPERTIES,
+
+    /**
+     * Recommmends skipping the specified number of samples
+     * @code
+     * u32le number of samples to skip from start of this packet
+     * u32le number of samples to skip from end of this packet
+     * u8    reason for start skip
+     * u8    reason for end   skip (0=padding silence, 1=convergence)
+     * @endcode
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_SKIP_SAMPLES,
+
+    /**
+     * An AV_PKT_DATA_JP_DUALMONO side data packet indicates that
+     * the packet may contain "dual mono" audio specific to Japanese DTV
+     * and if it is true, recommends only the selected channel to be used.
+     * @code
+     * u8    selected channels (0=main/left, 1=sub/right, 2=both)
+     * @endcode
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_JP_DUALMONO,
+
+    /**
+     * A list of zero terminated key/value strings. There is no end marker for
+     * the list, so it is required to rely on the side data size to stop.
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_STRINGS_METADATA,
+
+    /**
+     * Subtitle event position
+     * @code
+     * u32le x1
+     * u32le y1
+     * u32le x2
+     * u32le y2
+     * @endcode
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_SUBTITLE_POSITION,
+
+    /**
+     * Data found in BlockAdditional element of matroska container. There is
+     * no end marker for the data, so it is required to rely on the side data
+     * size to recognize the end. 8 byte id (as found in BlockAddId) followed
+     * by data.
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_MATROSKA_BLOCKADDITIONAL,
+
+    /**
+     * The optional first identifier line of a WebVTT cue.
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_WEBVTT_IDENTIFIER,
+
+    /**
+     * The optional settings (rendering instructions) that immediately
+     * follow the timestamp specifier of a WebVTT cue.
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_WEBVTT_SETTINGS,
+
+    /**
+     * A list of zero terminated key/value strings. There is no end marker for
+     * the list, so it is required to rely on the side data size to stop. This
+     * side data includes updated metadata which appeared in the stream.
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_METADATA_UPDATE,
+
+    /**
+     * MPEGTS stream ID as uint8_t, this is required to pass the stream ID
+     * information from the demuxer to the corresponding muxer.
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_MPEGTS_STREAM_ID,
+
+    /**
+     * Mastering display metadata (based on SMPTE-2086:2014). This metadata
+     * should be associated with a video stream and contains data in the form
+     * of the AVMasteringDisplayMetadata struct.
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_MASTERING_DISPLAY_METADATA,
+
+    /**
+     * This side data should be associated with a video stream and corresponds
+     * to the AVSphericalMapping structure.
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_SPHERICAL,
+
+    /**
+     * Content light level (based on CTA-861.3). This metadata should be
+     * associated with a video stream and contains data in the form of the
+     * AVContentLightMetadata struct.
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_CONTENT_LIGHT_LEVEL,
+
+    /**
+     * ATSC A53 Part 4 Closed Captions. This metadata should be associated with
+     * a video stream. A53 CC bitstream is stored as uint8_t in AVPacketSideData.data.
+     * The number of bytes of CC data is AVPacketSideData.size.
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_A53_CC,
+
+    /**
+     * This side data is encryption initialization data.
+     * The format is not part of ABI, use av_encryption_init_info_* methods to
+     * access.
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_ENCRYPTION_INIT_INFO,
+
+    /**
+     * This side data contains encryption info for how to decrypt the packet.
+     * The format is not part of ABI, use av_encryption_info_* methods to access.
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_ENCRYPTION_INFO,
+
+    /**
+     * Active Format Description data consisting of a single byte as specified
+     * in ETSI TS 101 154 using AVActiveFormatDescription enum.
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_AFD,
+
+    /**
+     * Producer Reference Time data corresponding to the AVProducerReferenceTime struct,
+     * usually exported by some encoders (on demand through the prft flag set in the
+     * AVCodecContext export_side_data field).
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_PRFT,
+
+    /**
+     * ICC profile data consisting of an opaque octet buffer following the
+     * format described by ISO 15076-1.
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_ICC_PROFILE,
+
+    /**
+     * DOVI configuration
+     * ref:
+     * dolby-vision-bitstreams-within-the-iso-base-media-file-format-v2.1.2, section 2.2
+     * dolby-vision-bitstreams-in-mpeg-2-transport-stream-multiplex-v1.2, section 3.3
+     * Tags are stored in struct AVDOVIDecoderConfigurationRecord.
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_DOVI_CONF,
+
+    /**
+     * Timecode which conforms to SMPTE ST 12-1:2014. The data is an array of 4 uint32_t
+     * where the first uint32_t describes how many (1-3) of the other timecodes are used.
+     * The timecode format is described in the documentation of av_timecode_get_smpte_from_framenum()
+     * function in libavutil/timecode.h.
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_S12M_TIMECODE,
+
+    /**
+     * HDR10+ dynamic metadata associated with a video frame. The metadata is in
+     * the form of the AVDynamicHDRPlus struct and contains
+     * information for color volume transform - application 4 of
+     * SMPTE 2094-40:2016 standard.
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_DYNAMIC_HDR10_PLUS,
+
+    /**
+     * The number of side data types.
+     * This is not part of the public API/ABI in the sense that it may
+     * change when new side data types are added.
+     * This must stay the last enum value.
+     * If its value becomes huge, some code using it
+     * needs to be updated as it assumes it to be smaller than other limits.
+     */
+    AV_PKT_DATA_NB
+};
+
+#define AV_PKT_DATA_QUALITY_FACTOR AV_PKT_DATA_QUALITY_STATS //DEPRECATED
+
+typedef struct AVPacketSideData {
+    uint8_t *data;
+    size_t   size;
+    enum AVPacketSideDataType type;
+} AVPacketSideData;
+
+/**
+ * This structure stores compressed data. It is typically exported by demuxers
+ * and then passed as input to decoders, or received as output from encoders and
+ * then passed to muxers.
+ *
+ * For video, it should typically contain one compressed frame. For audio it may
+ * contain several compressed frames. Encoders are allowed to output empty
+ * packets, with no compressed data, containing only side data
+ * (e.g. to update some stream parameters at the end of encoding).
+ *
+ * The semantics of data ownership depends on the buf field.
+ * If it is set, the packet data is dynamically allocated and is
+ * valid indefinitely until a call to av_packet_unref() reduces the
+ * reference count to 0.
+ *
+ * If the buf field is not set av_packet_ref() would make a copy instead
+ * of increasing the reference count.
+ *
+ * The side data is always allocated with av_malloc(), copied by
+ * av_packet_ref() and freed by av_packet_unref().
+ *
+ * sizeof(AVPacket) being a part of the public ABI is deprecated. once
+ * av_init_packet() is removed, new packets will only be able to be allocated
+ * with av_packet_alloc(), and new fields may be added to the end of the struct
+ * with a minor bump.
+ *
+ * @see av_packet_alloc
+ * @see av_packet_ref
+ * @see av_packet_unref
+ */
+typedef struct AVPacket {
+    /**
+     * A reference to the reference-counted buffer where the packet data is
+     * stored.
+     * May be NULL, then the packet data is not reference-counted.
+     */
+    AVBufferRef *buf;
+    /**
+     * Presentation timestamp in AVStream->time_base units; the time at which
+     * the decompressed packet will be presented to the user.
+     * Can be AV_NOPTS_VALUE if it is not stored in the file.
+     * pts MUST be larger or equal to dts as presentation cannot happen before
+     * decompression, unless one wants to view hex dumps. Some formats misuse
+     * the terms dts and pts/cts to mean something different. Such timestamps
+     * must be converted to true pts/dts before they are stored in AVPacket.
+     */
+    int64_t pts;
+    /**
+     * Decompression timestamp in AVStream->time_base units; the time at which
+     * the packet is decompressed.
+     * Can be AV_NOPTS_VALUE if it is not stored in the file.
+     */
+    int64_t dts;
+    uint8_t *data;
+    int   size;
+    int   stream_index;
+    /**
+     * A combination of AV_PKT_FLAG values
+     */
+    int   flags;
+    /**
+     * Additional packet data that can be provided by the container.
+     * Packet can contain several types of side information.
+     */
+    AVPacketSideData *side_data;
+    int side_data_elems;
+
+    /**
+     * Duration of this packet in AVStream->time_base units, 0 if unknown.
+     * Equals next_pts - this_pts in presentation order.
+     */
+    int64_t duration;
+
+    int64_t pos;                            ///< byte position in stream, -1 if unknown
+
+    /**
+     * for some private data of the user
+     */
+    void *opaque;
+
+    /**
+     * AVBufferRef for free use by the API user. FFmpeg will never check the
+     * contents of the buffer ref. FFmpeg calls av_buffer_unref() on it when
+     * the packet is unreferenced. av_packet_copy_props() calls create a new
+     * reference with av_buffer_ref() for the target packet's opaque_ref field.
+     *
+     * This is unrelated to the opaque field, although it serves a similar
+     * purpose.
+     */
+    AVBufferRef *opaque_ref;
+
+    /**
+     * Time base of the packet's timestamps.
+     * In the future, this field may be set on packets output by encoders or
+     * demuxers, but its value will be by default ignored on input to decoders
+     * or muxers.
+     */
+    AVRational time_base;
+} AVPacket;
+
+#if FF_API_INIT_PACKET
+attribute_deprecated
+typedef struct AVPacketList {
+    AVPacket pkt;
+    struct AVPacketList *next;
+} AVPacketList;
+#endif
+
+#define AV_PKT_FLAG_KEY     0x0001 ///< The packet contains a keyframe
+#define AV_PKT_FLAG_CORRUPT 0x0002 ///< The packet content is corrupted
+/**
+ * Flag is used to discard packets which are required to maintain valid
+ * decoder state but are not required for output and should be dropped
+ * after decoding.
+ **/
+#define AV_PKT_FLAG_DISCARD   0x0004
+/**
+ * The packet comes from a trusted source.
+ *
+ * Otherwise-unsafe constructs such as arbitrary pointers to data
+ * outside the packet may be followed.
+ */
+#define AV_PKT_FLAG_TRUSTED   0x0008
+/**
+ * Flag is used to indicate packets that contain frames that can
+ * be discarded by the decoder.  I.e. Non-reference frames.
+ */
+#define AV_PKT_FLAG_DISPOSABLE 0x0010
+
+enum AVSideDataParamChangeFlags {
+#if FF_API_OLD_CHANNEL_LAYOUT
+    /**
+     * @deprecated those are not used by any decoder
+     */
+    AV_SIDE_DATA_PARAM_CHANGE_CHANNEL_COUNT  = 0x0001,
+    AV_SIDE_DATA_PARAM_CHANGE_CHANNEL_LAYOUT = 0x0002,
+#endif
+    AV_SIDE_DATA_PARAM_CHANGE_SAMPLE_RATE    = 0x0004,
+    AV_SIDE_DATA_PARAM_CHANGE_DIMENSIONS     = 0x0008,
+};
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVPacket and set its fields to default values.  The resulting
+ * struct must be freed using av_packet_free().
+ *
+ * @return An AVPacket filled with default values or NULL on failure.
+ *
+ * @note this only allocates the AVPacket itself, not the data buffers. Those
+ * must be allocated through other means such as av_new_packet.
+ *
+ * @see av_new_packet
+ */
+AVPacket *av_packet_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Create a new packet that references the same data as src.
+ *
+ * This is a shortcut for av_packet_alloc()+av_packet_ref().
+ *
+ * @return newly created AVPacket on success, NULL on error.
+ *
+ * @see av_packet_alloc
+ * @see av_packet_ref
+ */
+AVPacket *av_packet_clone(const AVPacket *src);
+
+/**
+ * Free the packet, if the packet is reference counted, it will be
+ * unreferenced first.
+ *
+ * @param pkt packet to be freed. The pointer will be set to NULL.
+ * @note passing NULL is a no-op.
+ */
+void av_packet_free(AVPacket **pkt);
+
+#if FF_API_INIT_PACKET
+/**
+ * Initialize optional fields of a packet with default values.
+ *
+ * Note, this does not touch the data and size members, which have to be
+ * initialized separately.
+ *
+ * @param pkt packet
+ *
+ * @see av_packet_alloc
+ * @see av_packet_unref
+ *
+ * @deprecated This function is deprecated. Once it's removed,
+               sizeof(AVPacket) will not be a part of the ABI anymore.
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+void av_init_packet(AVPacket *pkt);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Allocate the payload of a packet and initialize its fields with
+ * default values.
+ *
+ * @param pkt packet
+ * @param size wanted payload size
+ * @return 0 if OK, AVERROR_xxx otherwise
+ */
+int av_new_packet(AVPacket *pkt, int size);
+
+/**
+ * Reduce packet size, correctly zeroing padding
+ *
+ * @param pkt packet
+ * @param size new size
+ */
+void av_shrink_packet(AVPacket *pkt, int size);
+
+/**
+ * Increase packet size, correctly zeroing padding
+ *
+ * @param pkt packet
+ * @param grow_by number of bytes by which to increase the size of the packet
+ */
+int av_grow_packet(AVPacket *pkt, int grow_by);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize a reference-counted packet from av_malloc()ed data.
+ *
+ * @param pkt packet to be initialized. This function will set the data, size,
+ *        and buf fields, all others are left untouched.
+ * @param data Data allocated by av_malloc() to be used as packet data. If this
+ *        function returns successfully, the data is owned by the underlying AVBuffer.
+ *        The caller may not access the data through other means.
+ * @param size size of data in bytes, without the padding. I.e. the full buffer
+ *        size is assumed to be size + AV_INPUT_BUFFER_PADDING_SIZE.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on error
+ */
+int av_packet_from_data(AVPacket *pkt, uint8_t *data, int size);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate new information of a packet.
+ *
+ * @param pkt packet
+ * @param type side information type
+ * @param size side information size
+ * @return pointer to fresh allocated data or NULL otherwise
+ */
+uint8_t* av_packet_new_side_data(AVPacket *pkt, enum AVPacketSideDataType type,
+                                 size_t size);
+
+/**
+ * Wrap an existing array as a packet side data.
+ *
+ * @param pkt packet
+ * @param type side information type
+ * @param data the side data array. It must be allocated with the av_malloc()
+ *             family of functions. The ownership of the data is transferred to
+ *             pkt.
+ * @param size side information size
+ * @return a non-negative number on success, a negative AVERROR code on
+ *         failure. On failure, the packet is unchanged and the data remains
+ *         owned by the caller.
+ */
+int av_packet_add_side_data(AVPacket *pkt, enum AVPacketSideDataType type,
+                            uint8_t *data, size_t size);
+
+/**
+ * Shrink the already allocated side data buffer
+ *
+ * @param pkt packet
+ * @param type side information type
+ * @param size new side information size
+ * @return 0 on success, < 0 on failure
+ */
+int av_packet_shrink_side_data(AVPacket *pkt, enum AVPacketSideDataType type,
+                               size_t size);
+
+/**
+ * Get side information from packet.
+ *
+ * @param pkt packet
+ * @param type desired side information type
+ * @param size If supplied, *size will be set to the size of the side data
+ *             or to zero if the desired side data is not present.
+ * @return pointer to data if present or NULL otherwise
+ */
+uint8_t* av_packet_get_side_data(const AVPacket *pkt, enum AVPacketSideDataType type,
+                                 size_t *size);
+
+const char *av_packet_side_data_name(enum AVPacketSideDataType type);
+
+/**
+ * Pack a dictionary for use in side_data.
+ *
+ * @param dict The dictionary to pack.
+ * @param size pointer to store the size of the returned data
+ * @return pointer to data if successful, NULL otherwise
+ */
+uint8_t *av_packet_pack_dictionary(AVDictionary *dict, size_t *size);
+/**
+ * Unpack a dictionary from side_data.
+ *
+ * @param data data from side_data
+ * @param size size of the data
+ * @param dict the metadata storage dictionary
+ * @return 0 on success, < 0 on failure
+ */
+int av_packet_unpack_dictionary(const uint8_t *data, size_t size,
+                                AVDictionary **dict);
+
+/**
+ * Convenience function to free all the side data stored.
+ * All the other fields stay untouched.
+ *
+ * @param pkt packet
+ */
+void av_packet_free_side_data(AVPacket *pkt);
+
+/**
+ * Setup a new reference to the data described by a given packet
+ *
+ * If src is reference-counted, setup dst as a new reference to the
+ * buffer in src. Otherwise allocate a new buffer in dst and copy the
+ * data from src into it.
+ *
+ * All the other fields are copied from src.
+ *
+ * @see av_packet_unref
+ *
+ * @param dst Destination packet. Will be completely overwritten.
+ * @param src Source packet
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on error. On error, dst
+ *         will be blank (as if returned by av_packet_alloc()).
+ */
+int av_packet_ref(AVPacket *dst, const AVPacket *src);
+
+/**
+ * Wipe the packet.
+ *
+ * Unreference the buffer referenced by the packet and reset the
+ * remaining packet fields to their default values.
+ *
+ * @param pkt The packet to be unreferenced.
+ */
+void av_packet_unref(AVPacket *pkt);
+
+/**
+ * Move every field in src to dst and reset src.
+ *
+ * @see av_packet_unref
+ *
+ * @param src Source packet, will be reset
+ * @param dst Destination packet
+ */
+void av_packet_move_ref(AVPacket *dst, AVPacket *src);
+
+/**
+ * Copy only "properties" fields from src to dst.
+ *
+ * Properties for the purpose of this function are all the fields
+ * beside those related to the packet data (buf, data, size)
+ *
+ * @param dst Destination packet
+ * @param src Source packet
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success AVERROR on failure.
+ */
+int av_packet_copy_props(AVPacket *dst, const AVPacket *src);
+
+/**
+ * Ensure the data described by a given packet is reference counted.
+ *
+ * @note This function does not ensure that the reference will be writable.
+ *       Use av_packet_make_writable instead for that purpose.
+ *
+ * @see av_packet_ref
+ * @see av_packet_make_writable
+ *
+ * @param pkt packet whose data should be made reference counted.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on error. On failure, the
+ *         packet is unchanged.
+ */
+int av_packet_make_refcounted(AVPacket *pkt);
+
+/**
+ * Create a writable reference for the data described by a given packet,
+ * avoiding data copy if possible.
+ *
+ * @param pkt Packet whose data should be made writable.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on failure. On failure, the
+ *         packet is unchanged.
+ */
+int av_packet_make_writable(AVPacket *pkt);
+
+/**
+ * Convert valid timing fields (timestamps / durations) in a packet from one
+ * timebase to another. Timestamps with unknown values (AV_NOPTS_VALUE) will be
+ * ignored.
+ *
+ * @param pkt packet on which the conversion will be performed
+ * @param tb_src source timebase, in which the timing fields in pkt are
+ *               expressed
+ * @param tb_dst destination timebase, to which the timing fields will be
+ *               converted
+ */
+void av_packet_rescale_ts(AVPacket *pkt, AVRational tb_src, AVRational tb_dst);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif // AVCODEC_PACKET_H
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavcodec/qsv.h b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/qsv.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c156b08
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/qsv.h
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+/*
+ * Intel MediaSDK QSV public API
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_QSV_H
+#define AVCODEC_QSV_H
+
+#include <mfxvideo.h>
+
+#include "libavutil/buffer.h"
+
+/**
+ * This struct is used for communicating QSV parameters between libavcodec and
+ * the caller. It is managed by the caller and must be assigned to
+ * AVCodecContext.hwaccel_context.
+ * - decoding: hwaccel_context must be set on return from the get_format()
+ *             callback
+ * - encoding: hwaccel_context must be set before avcodec_open2()
+ */
+typedef struct AVQSVContext {
+    /**
+     * If non-NULL, the session to use for encoding or decoding.
+     * Otherwise, libavcodec will try to create an internal session.
+     */
+    mfxSession session;
+
+    /**
+     * The IO pattern to use.
+     */
+    int iopattern;
+
+    /**
+     * Extra buffers to pass to encoder or decoder initialization.
+     */
+    mfxExtBuffer **ext_buffers;
+    int         nb_ext_buffers;
+
+    /**
+     * Encoding only. If this field is set to non-zero by the caller, libavcodec
+     * will create an mfxExtOpaqueSurfaceAlloc extended buffer and pass it to
+     * the encoder initialization. This only makes sense if iopattern is also
+     * set to MFX_IOPATTERN_IN_OPAQUE_MEMORY.
+     *
+     * The number of allocated opaque surfaces will be the sum of the number
+     * required by the encoder and the user-provided value nb_opaque_surfaces.
+     * The array of the opaque surfaces will be exported to the caller through
+     * the opaque_surfaces field.
+     *
+     * The caller must set this field to zero for oneVPL (MFX_VERSION >= 2.0)
+     */
+    int opaque_alloc;
+
+    /**
+     * Encoding only, and only if opaque_alloc is set to non-zero. Before
+     * calling avcodec_open2(), the caller should set this field to the number
+     * of extra opaque surfaces to allocate beyond what is required by the
+     * encoder.
+     *
+     * On return from avcodec_open2(), this field will be set by libavcodec to
+     * the total number of allocated opaque surfaces.
+     */
+    int nb_opaque_surfaces;
+
+    /**
+     * Encoding only, and only if opaque_alloc is set to non-zero. On return
+     * from avcodec_open2(), this field will be used by libavcodec to export the
+     * array of the allocated opaque surfaces to the caller, so they can be
+     * passed to other parts of the pipeline.
+     *
+     * The buffer reference exported here is owned and managed by libavcodec,
+     * the callers should make their own reference with av_buffer_ref() and free
+     * it with av_buffer_unref() when it is no longer needed.
+     *
+     * The buffer data is an nb_opaque_surfaces-sized array of mfxFrameSurface1.
+     */
+    AVBufferRef *opaque_surfaces;
+
+    /**
+     * Encoding only, and only if opaque_alloc is set to non-zero. On return
+     * from avcodec_open2(), this field will be set to the surface type used in
+     * the opaque allocation request.
+     */
+    int opaque_alloc_type;
+} AVQSVContext;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a new context.
+ *
+ * It must be freed by the caller with av_free().
+ */
+AVQSVContext *av_qsv_alloc_context(void);
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_QSV_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavcodec/vdpau.h b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/vdpau.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..35c4b10
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/vdpau.h
@@ -0,0 +1,157 @@
+/*
+ * The Video Decode and Presentation API for UNIX (VDPAU) is used for
+ * hardware-accelerated decoding of MPEG-1/2, H.264 and VC-1.
+ *
+ * Copyright (C) 2008 NVIDIA
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_VDPAU_H
+#define AVCODEC_VDPAU_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavc_codec_hwaccel_vdpau
+ * Public libavcodec VDPAU header.
+ */
+
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_codec_hwaccel_vdpau VDPAU Decoder and Renderer
+ * @ingroup lavc_codec_hwaccel
+ *
+ * VDPAU hardware acceleration has two modules
+ * - VDPAU decoding
+ * - VDPAU presentation
+ *
+ * The VDPAU decoding module parses all headers using FFmpeg
+ * parsing mechanisms and uses VDPAU for the actual decoding.
+ *
+ * As per the current implementation, the actual decoding
+ * and rendering (API calls) are done as part of the VDPAU
+ * presentation (vo_vdpau.c) module.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#include <vdpau/vdpau.h>
+
+#include "libavutil/avconfig.h"
+#include "libavutil/attributes.h"
+
+#include "avcodec.h"
+
+struct AVCodecContext;
+struct AVFrame;
+
+typedef int (*AVVDPAU_Render2)(struct AVCodecContext *, struct AVFrame *,
+                               const VdpPictureInfo *, uint32_t,
+                               const VdpBitstreamBuffer *);
+
+/**
+ * This structure is used to share data between the libavcodec library and
+ * the client video application.
+ * The user shall allocate the structure via the av_alloc_vdpau_hwaccel
+ * function and make it available as
+ * AVCodecContext.hwaccel_context. Members can be set by the user once
+ * during initialization or through each AVCodecContext.get_buffer()
+ * function call. In any case, they must be valid prior to calling
+ * decoding functions.
+ *
+ * The size of this structure is not a part of the public ABI and must not
+ * be used outside of libavcodec. Use av_vdpau_alloc_context() to allocate an
+ * AVVDPAUContext.
+ */
+typedef struct AVVDPAUContext {
+    /**
+     * VDPAU decoder handle
+     *
+     * Set by user.
+     */
+    VdpDecoder decoder;
+
+    /**
+     * VDPAU decoder render callback
+     *
+     * Set by the user.
+     */
+    VdpDecoderRender *render;
+
+    AVVDPAU_Render2 render2;
+} AVVDPAUContext;
+
+/**
+ * @brief allocation function for AVVDPAUContext
+ *
+ * Allows extending the struct without breaking API/ABI
+ */
+AVVDPAUContext *av_alloc_vdpaucontext(void);
+
+AVVDPAU_Render2 av_vdpau_hwaccel_get_render2(const AVVDPAUContext *);
+void av_vdpau_hwaccel_set_render2(AVVDPAUContext *, AVVDPAU_Render2);
+
+/**
+ * Associate a VDPAU device with a codec context for hardware acceleration.
+ * This function is meant to be called from the get_format() codec callback,
+ * or earlier. It can also be called after avcodec_flush_buffers() to change
+ * the underlying VDPAU device mid-stream (e.g. to recover from non-transparent
+ * display preemption).
+ *
+ * @note get_format() must return AV_PIX_FMT_VDPAU if this function completes
+ * successfully.
+ *
+ * @param avctx decoding context whose get_format() callback is invoked
+ * @param device VDPAU device handle to use for hardware acceleration
+ * @param get_proc_address VDPAU device driver
+ * @param flags zero of more OR'd AV_HWACCEL_FLAG_* flags
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, an AVERROR code on failure.
+ */
+int av_vdpau_bind_context(AVCodecContext *avctx, VdpDevice device,
+                          VdpGetProcAddress *get_proc_address, unsigned flags);
+
+/**
+ * Gets the parameters to create an adequate VDPAU video surface for the codec
+ * context using VDPAU hardware decoding acceleration.
+ *
+ * @note Behavior is undefined if the context was not successfully bound to a
+ * VDPAU device using av_vdpau_bind_context().
+ *
+ * @param avctx the codec context being used for decoding the stream
+ * @param type storage space for the VDPAU video surface chroma type
+ *              (or NULL to ignore)
+ * @param width storage space for the VDPAU video surface pixel width
+ *              (or NULL to ignore)
+ * @param height storage space for the VDPAU video surface pixel height
+ *              (or NULL to ignore)
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR code on failure.
+ */
+int av_vdpau_get_surface_parameters(AVCodecContext *avctx, VdpChromaType *type,
+                                    uint32_t *width, uint32_t *height);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVVDPAUContext.
+ *
+ * @return Newly-allocated AVVDPAUContext or NULL on failure.
+ */
+AVVDPAUContext *av_vdpau_alloc_context(void);
+
+/** @} */
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_VDPAU_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavcodec/version.h b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/version.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d149bc6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/version.h
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_VERSION_H
+#define AVCODEC_VERSION_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup libavc
+ * Libavcodec version macros.
+ */
+
+#include "libavutil/version.h"
+
+#include "version_major.h"
+
+#define LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MINOR  54
+#define LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MICRO 100
+
+#define LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_INT  AV_VERSION_INT(LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR, \
+                                               LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MINOR, \
+                                               LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBAVCODEC_VERSION      AV_VERSION(LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR,    \
+                                           LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MINOR,    \
+                                           LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBAVCODEC_BUILD        LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_INT
+
+#define LIBAVCODEC_IDENT        "Lavc" AV_STRINGIFY(LIBAVCODEC_VERSION)
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_VERSION_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavcodec/version_major.h b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/version_major.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..12f863d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/version_major.h
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR_H
+#define AVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup libavc
+ * Libavcodec version macros.
+ */
+
+#define LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR  59
+
+/**
+ * FF_API_* defines may be placed below to indicate public API that will be
+ * dropped at a future version bump. The defines themselves are not part of
+ * the public API and may change, break or disappear at any time.
+ *
+ * @note, when bumping the major version it is recommended to manually
+ * disable each FF_API_* in its own commit instead of disabling them all
+ * at once through the bump. This improves the git bisect-ability of the change.
+ */
+
+#define FF_API_OPENH264_SLICE_MODE (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 60)
+#define FF_API_OPENH264_CABAC      (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 60)
+#define FF_API_UNUSED_CODEC_CAPS   (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 60)
+#define FF_API_THREAD_SAFE_CALLBACKS (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 60)
+#define FF_API_DEBUG_MV          (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 60)
+#define FF_API_GET_FRAME_CLASS     (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 60)
+#define FF_API_AUTO_THREADS        (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 60)
+#define FF_API_INIT_PACKET         (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 60)
+#define FF_API_AVCTX_TIMEBASE    (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 60)
+#define FF_API_FLAG_TRUNCATED      (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 60)
+#define FF_API_SUB_TEXT_FORMAT     (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 60)
+#define FF_API_IDCT_NONE           (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 60)
+#define FF_API_SVTAV1_OPTS         (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 60)
+#define FF_API_AYUV_CODECID        (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 60)
+#define FF_API_VT_OUTPUT_CALLBACK  (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 60)
+#define FF_API_AVCODEC_CHROMA_POS  (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 60)
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavcodec/videotoolbox.h b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/videotoolbox.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..25a747a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/videotoolbox.h
@@ -0,0 +1,141 @@
+/*
+ * Videotoolbox hardware acceleration
+ *
+ * copyright (c) 2012 Sebastien Zwickert
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_VIDEOTOOLBOX_H
+#define AVCODEC_VIDEOTOOLBOX_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavc_codec_hwaccel_videotoolbox
+ * Public libavcodec Videotoolbox header.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_codec_hwaccel_videotoolbox VideoToolbox Decoder
+ * @ingroup lavc_codec_hwaccel
+ *
+ * Hardware accelerated decoding using VideoToolbox on Apple Platforms
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+#define Picture QuickdrawPicture
+#include <VideoToolbox/VideoToolbox.h>
+#undef Picture
+
+#include "libavcodec/avcodec.h"
+
+#include "libavutil/attributes.h"
+
+/**
+ * This struct holds all the information that needs to be passed
+ * between the caller and libavcodec for initializing Videotoolbox decoding.
+ * Its size is not a part of the public ABI, it must be allocated with
+ * av_videotoolbox_alloc_context() and freed with av_free().
+ */
+typedef struct AVVideotoolboxContext {
+    /**
+     * Videotoolbox decompression session object.
+     * Created and freed the caller.
+     */
+    VTDecompressionSessionRef session;
+
+#if FF_API_VT_OUTPUT_CALLBACK
+    /**
+     * The output callback that must be passed to the session.
+     * Set by av_videottoolbox_default_init()
+     */
+    attribute_deprecated
+    VTDecompressionOutputCallback output_callback;
+#endif
+
+    /**
+     * CVPixelBuffer Format Type that Videotoolbox will use for decoded frames.
+     * set by the caller. If this is set to 0, then no specific format is
+     * requested from the decoder, and its native format is output.
+     */
+    OSType cv_pix_fmt_type;
+
+    /**
+     * CoreMedia Format Description that Videotoolbox will use to create the decompression session.
+     * Set by the caller.
+     */
+    CMVideoFormatDescriptionRef cm_fmt_desc;
+
+    /**
+     * CoreMedia codec type that Videotoolbox will use to create the decompression session.
+     * Set by the caller.
+     */
+    int cm_codec_type;
+} AVVideotoolboxContext;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate and initialize a Videotoolbox context.
+ *
+ * This function should be called from the get_format() callback when the caller
+ * selects the AV_PIX_FMT_VIDETOOLBOX format. The caller must then create
+ * the decoder object (using the output callback provided by libavcodec) that
+ * will be used for Videotoolbox-accelerated decoding.
+ *
+ * When decoding with Videotoolbox is finished, the caller must destroy the decoder
+ * object and free the Videotoolbox context using av_free().
+ *
+ * @return the newly allocated context or NULL on failure
+ */
+AVVideotoolboxContext *av_videotoolbox_alloc_context(void);
+
+/**
+ * This is a convenience function that creates and sets up the Videotoolbox context using
+ * an internal implementation.
+ *
+ * @param avctx the corresponding codec context
+ *
+ * @return >= 0 on success, a negative AVERROR code on failure
+ */
+int av_videotoolbox_default_init(AVCodecContext *avctx);
+
+/**
+ * This is a convenience function that creates and sets up the Videotoolbox context using
+ * an internal implementation.
+ *
+ * @param avctx the corresponding codec context
+ * @param vtctx the Videotoolbox context to use
+ *
+ * @return >= 0 on success, a negative AVERROR code on failure
+ */
+int av_videotoolbox_default_init2(AVCodecContext *avctx, AVVideotoolboxContext *vtctx);
+
+/**
+ * This function must be called to free the Videotoolbox context initialized with
+ * av_videotoolbox_default_init().
+ *
+ * @param avctx the corresponding codec context
+ */
+void av_videotoolbox_default_free(AVCodecContext *avctx);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_VIDEOTOOLBOX_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavcodec/vorbis_parser.h b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/vorbis_parser.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..789932a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/vorbis_parser.h
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * A public API for Vorbis parsing
+ *
+ * Determines the duration for each packet.
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_VORBIS_PARSER_H
+#define AVCODEC_VORBIS_PARSER_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+typedef struct AVVorbisParseContext AVVorbisParseContext;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate and initialize the Vorbis parser using headers in the extradata.
+ */
+AVVorbisParseContext *av_vorbis_parse_init(const uint8_t *extradata,
+                                           int extradata_size);
+
+/**
+ * Free the parser and everything associated with it.
+ */
+void av_vorbis_parse_free(AVVorbisParseContext **s);
+
+#define VORBIS_FLAG_HEADER  0x00000001
+#define VORBIS_FLAG_COMMENT 0x00000002
+#define VORBIS_FLAG_SETUP   0x00000004
+
+/**
+ * Get the duration for a Vorbis packet.
+ *
+ * If @p flags is @c NULL,
+ * special frames are considered invalid.
+ *
+ * @param s        Vorbis parser context
+ * @param buf      buffer containing a Vorbis frame
+ * @param buf_size size of the buffer
+ * @param flags    flags for special frames
+ */
+int av_vorbis_parse_frame_flags(AVVorbisParseContext *s, const uint8_t *buf,
+                                int buf_size, int *flags);
+
+/**
+ * Get the duration for a Vorbis packet.
+ *
+ * @param s        Vorbis parser context
+ * @param buf      buffer containing a Vorbis frame
+ * @param buf_size size of the buffer
+ */
+int av_vorbis_parse_frame(AVVorbisParseContext *s, const uint8_t *buf,
+                          int buf_size);
+
+void av_vorbis_parse_reset(AVVorbisParseContext *s);
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_VORBIS_PARSER_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavcodec/xvmc.h b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/xvmc.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..52e70c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavcodec/xvmc.h
@@ -0,0 +1,171 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (C) 2003 Ivan Kalvachev
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_XVMC_H
+#define AVCODEC_XVMC_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavc_codec_hwaccel_xvmc
+ * Public libavcodec XvMC header.
+ */
+
+#pragma message("XvMC is no longer supported; this header is deprecated and will be removed")
+
+#include <X11/extensions/XvMC.h>
+
+#include "libavutil/attributes.h"
+#include "avcodec.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_codec_hwaccel_xvmc XvMC
+ * @ingroup lavc_codec_hwaccel
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#define AV_XVMC_ID                    0x1DC711C0  /**< special value to ensure that regular pixel routines haven't corrupted the struct
+                                                       the number is 1337 speak for the letters IDCT MCo (motion compensation) */
+
+struct attribute_deprecated xvmc_pix_fmt {
+    /** The field contains the special constant value AV_XVMC_ID.
+        It is used as a test that the application correctly uses the API,
+        and that there is no corruption caused by pixel routines.
+        - application - set during initialization
+        - libavcodec  - unchanged
+    */
+    int             xvmc_id;
+
+    /** Pointer to the block array allocated by XvMCCreateBlocks().
+        The array has to be freed by XvMCDestroyBlocks().
+        Each group of 64 values represents one data block of differential
+        pixel information (in MoCo mode) or coefficients for IDCT.
+        - application - set the pointer during initialization
+        - libavcodec  - fills coefficients/pixel data into the array
+    */
+    short*          data_blocks;
+
+    /** Pointer to the macroblock description array allocated by
+        XvMCCreateMacroBlocks() and freed by XvMCDestroyMacroBlocks().
+        - application - set the pointer during initialization
+        - libavcodec  - fills description data into the array
+    */
+    XvMCMacroBlock* mv_blocks;
+
+    /** Number of macroblock descriptions that can be stored in the mv_blocks
+        array.
+        - application - set during initialization
+        - libavcodec  - unchanged
+    */
+    int             allocated_mv_blocks;
+
+    /** Number of blocks that can be stored at once in the data_blocks array.
+        - application - set during initialization
+        - libavcodec  - unchanged
+    */
+    int             allocated_data_blocks;
+
+    /** Indicate that the hardware would interpret data_blocks as IDCT
+        coefficients and perform IDCT on them.
+        - application - set during initialization
+        - libavcodec  - unchanged
+    */
+    int             idct;
+
+    /** In MoCo mode it indicates that intra macroblocks are assumed to be in
+        unsigned format; same as the XVMC_INTRA_UNSIGNED flag.
+        - application - set during initialization
+        - libavcodec  - unchanged
+    */
+    int             unsigned_intra;
+
+    /** Pointer to the surface allocated by XvMCCreateSurface().
+        It has to be freed by XvMCDestroySurface() on application exit.
+        It identifies the frame and its state on the video hardware.
+        - application - set during initialization
+        - libavcodec  - unchanged
+    */
+    XvMCSurface*    p_surface;
+
+/** Set by the decoder before calling ff_draw_horiz_band(),
+    needed by the XvMCRenderSurface function. */
+//@{
+    /** Pointer to the surface used as past reference
+        - application - unchanged
+        - libavcodec  - set
+    */
+    XvMCSurface*    p_past_surface;
+
+    /** Pointer to the surface used as future reference
+        - application - unchanged
+        - libavcodec  - set
+    */
+    XvMCSurface*    p_future_surface;
+
+    /** top/bottom field or frame
+        - application - unchanged
+        - libavcodec  - set
+    */
+    unsigned int    picture_structure;
+
+    /** XVMC_SECOND_FIELD - 1st or 2nd field in the sequence
+        - application - unchanged
+        - libavcodec  - set
+    */
+    unsigned int    flags;
+//}@
+
+    /** Number of macroblock descriptions in the mv_blocks array
+        that have already been passed to the hardware.
+        - application - zeroes it on get_buffer().
+                        A successful ff_draw_horiz_band() may increment it
+                        with filled_mb_block_num or zero both.
+        - libavcodec  - unchanged
+    */
+    int             start_mv_blocks_num;
+
+    /** Number of new macroblock descriptions in the mv_blocks array (after
+        start_mv_blocks_num) that are filled by libavcodec and have to be
+        passed to the hardware.
+        - application - zeroes it on get_buffer() or after successful
+                        ff_draw_horiz_band().
+        - libavcodec  - increment with one of each stored MB
+    */
+    int             filled_mv_blocks_num;
+
+    /** Number of the next free data block; one data block consists of
+        64 short values in the data_blocks array.
+        All blocks before this one have already been claimed by placing their
+        position into the corresponding block description structure field,
+        that are part of the mv_blocks array.
+        - application - zeroes it on get_buffer().
+                        A successful ff_draw_horiz_band() may zero it together
+                        with start_mb_blocks_num.
+        - libavcodec  - each decoded macroblock increases it by the number
+                        of coded blocks it contains.
+    */
+    int             next_free_data_block_num;
+};
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_XVMC_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavfilter/avfilter.h b/dependencies/include/libavfilter/avfilter.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6d68ebe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavfilter/avfilter.h
@@ -0,0 +1,1203 @@
+/*
+ * filter layer
+ * Copyright (c) 2007 Bobby Bingham
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVFILTER_AVFILTER_H
+#define AVFILTER_AVFILTER_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavfi
+ * Main libavfilter public API header
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavfi libavfilter
+ * Graph-based frame editing library.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#include <stddef.h>
+
+#include "libavutil/attributes.h"
+#include "libavutil/avutil.h"
+#include "libavutil/buffer.h"
+#include "libavutil/dict.h"
+#include "libavutil/frame.h"
+#include "libavutil/log.h"
+#include "libavutil/samplefmt.h"
+#include "libavutil/pixfmt.h"
+#include "libavutil/rational.h"
+
+#include "libavfilter/version_major.h"
+#ifndef HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H
+/* When included as part of the ffmpeg build, only include the major version
+ * to avoid unnecessary rebuilds. When included externally, keep including
+ * the full version information. */
+#include "libavfilter/version.h"
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Return the LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_INT constant.
+ */
+unsigned avfilter_version(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libavfilter build-time configuration.
+ */
+const char *avfilter_configuration(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libavfilter license.
+ */
+const char *avfilter_license(void);
+
+typedef struct AVFilterContext AVFilterContext;
+typedef struct AVFilterLink    AVFilterLink;
+typedef struct AVFilterPad     AVFilterPad;
+typedef struct AVFilterFormats AVFilterFormats;
+typedef struct AVFilterChannelLayouts AVFilterChannelLayouts;
+
+#if FF_API_PAD_COUNT
+/**
+ * Get the number of elements in an AVFilter's inputs or outputs array.
+ *
+ * @deprecated Use avfilter_filter_pad_count() instead.
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int avfilter_pad_count(const AVFilterPad *pads);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Get the name of an AVFilterPad.
+ *
+ * @param pads an array of AVFilterPads
+ * @param pad_idx index of the pad in the array; it is the caller's
+ *                responsibility to ensure the index is valid
+ *
+ * @return name of the pad_idx'th pad in pads
+ */
+const char *avfilter_pad_get_name(const AVFilterPad *pads, int pad_idx);
+
+/**
+ * Get the type of an AVFilterPad.
+ *
+ * @param pads an array of AVFilterPads
+ * @param pad_idx index of the pad in the array; it is the caller's
+ *                responsibility to ensure the index is valid
+ *
+ * @return type of the pad_idx'th pad in pads
+ */
+enum AVMediaType avfilter_pad_get_type(const AVFilterPad *pads, int pad_idx);
+
+/**
+ * The number of the filter inputs is not determined just by AVFilter.inputs.
+ * The filter might add additional inputs during initialization depending on the
+ * options supplied to it.
+ */
+#define AVFILTER_FLAG_DYNAMIC_INPUTS        (1 << 0)
+/**
+ * The number of the filter outputs is not determined just by AVFilter.outputs.
+ * The filter might add additional outputs during initialization depending on
+ * the options supplied to it.
+ */
+#define AVFILTER_FLAG_DYNAMIC_OUTPUTS       (1 << 1)
+/**
+ * The filter supports multithreading by splitting frames into multiple parts
+ * and processing them concurrently.
+ */
+#define AVFILTER_FLAG_SLICE_THREADS         (1 << 2)
+/**
+ * The filter is a "metadata" filter - it does not modify the frame data in any
+ * way. It may only affect the metadata (i.e. those fields copied by
+ * av_frame_copy_props()).
+ *
+ * More precisely, this means:
+ * - video: the data of any frame output by the filter must be exactly equal to
+ *   some frame that is received on one of its inputs. Furthermore, all frames
+ *   produced on a given output must correspond to frames received on the same
+ *   input and their order must be unchanged. Note that the filter may still
+ *   drop or duplicate the frames.
+ * - audio: the data produced by the filter on any of its outputs (viewed e.g.
+ *   as an array of interleaved samples) must be exactly equal to the data
+ *   received by the filter on one of its inputs.
+ */
+#define AVFILTER_FLAG_METADATA_ONLY         (1 << 3)
+/**
+ * Some filters support a generic "enable" expression option that can be used
+ * to enable or disable a filter in the timeline. Filters supporting this
+ * option have this flag set. When the enable expression is false, the default
+ * no-op filter_frame() function is called in place of the filter_frame()
+ * callback defined on each input pad, thus the frame is passed unchanged to
+ * the next filters.
+ */
+#define AVFILTER_FLAG_SUPPORT_TIMELINE_GENERIC  (1 << 16)
+/**
+ * Same as AVFILTER_FLAG_SUPPORT_TIMELINE_GENERIC, except that the filter will
+ * have its filter_frame() callback(s) called as usual even when the enable
+ * expression is false. The filter will disable filtering within the
+ * filter_frame() callback(s) itself, for example executing code depending on
+ * the AVFilterContext->is_disabled value.
+ */
+#define AVFILTER_FLAG_SUPPORT_TIMELINE_INTERNAL (1 << 17)
+/**
+ * Handy mask to test whether the filter supports or no the timeline feature
+ * (internally or generically).
+ */
+#define AVFILTER_FLAG_SUPPORT_TIMELINE (AVFILTER_FLAG_SUPPORT_TIMELINE_GENERIC | AVFILTER_FLAG_SUPPORT_TIMELINE_INTERNAL)
+
+/**
+ * Filter definition. This defines the pads a filter contains, and all the
+ * callback functions used to interact with the filter.
+ */
+typedef struct AVFilter {
+    /**
+     * Filter name. Must be non-NULL and unique among filters.
+     */
+    const char *name;
+
+    /**
+     * A description of the filter. May be NULL.
+     *
+     * You should use the NULL_IF_CONFIG_SMALL() macro to define it.
+     */
+    const char *description;
+
+    /**
+     * List of static inputs.
+     *
+     * NULL if there are no (static) inputs. Instances of filters with
+     * AVFILTER_FLAG_DYNAMIC_INPUTS set may have more inputs than present in
+     * this list.
+     */
+    const AVFilterPad *inputs;
+
+    /**
+     * List of static outputs.
+     *
+     * NULL if there are no (static) outputs. Instances of filters with
+     * AVFILTER_FLAG_DYNAMIC_OUTPUTS set may have more outputs than present in
+     * this list.
+     */
+    const AVFilterPad *outputs;
+
+    /**
+     * A class for the private data, used to declare filter private AVOptions.
+     * This field is NULL for filters that do not declare any options.
+     *
+     * If this field is non-NULL, the first member of the filter private data
+     * must be a pointer to AVClass, which will be set by libavfilter generic
+     * code to this class.
+     */
+    const AVClass *priv_class;
+
+    /**
+     * A combination of AVFILTER_FLAG_*
+     */
+    int flags;
+
+    /*****************************************************************
+     * All fields below this line are not part of the public API. They
+     * may not be used outside of libavfilter and can be changed and
+     * removed at will.
+     * New public fields should be added right above.
+     *****************************************************************
+     */
+
+    /**
+     * The number of entries in the list of inputs.
+     */
+    uint8_t nb_inputs;
+
+    /**
+     * The number of entries in the list of outputs.
+     */
+    uint8_t nb_outputs;
+
+    /**
+     * This field determines the state of the formats union.
+     * It is an enum FilterFormatsState value.
+     */
+    uint8_t formats_state;
+
+    /**
+     * Filter pre-initialization function
+     *
+     * This callback will be called immediately after the filter context is
+     * allocated, to allow allocating and initing sub-objects.
+     *
+     * If this callback is not NULL, the uninit callback will be called on
+     * allocation failure.
+     *
+     * @return 0 on success,
+     *         AVERROR code on failure (but the code will be
+     *           dropped and treated as ENOMEM by the calling code)
+     */
+    int (*preinit)(AVFilterContext *ctx);
+
+    /**
+     * Filter initialization function.
+     *
+     * This callback will be called only once during the filter lifetime, after
+     * all the options have been set, but before links between filters are
+     * established and format negotiation is done.
+     *
+     * Basic filter initialization should be done here. Filters with dynamic
+     * inputs and/or outputs should create those inputs/outputs here based on
+     * provided options. No more changes to this filter's inputs/outputs can be
+     * done after this callback.
+     *
+     * This callback must not assume that the filter links exist or frame
+     * parameters are known.
+     *
+     * @ref AVFilter.uninit "uninit" is guaranteed to be called even if
+     * initialization fails, so this callback does not have to clean up on
+     * failure.
+     *
+     * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on failure
+     */
+    int (*init)(AVFilterContext *ctx);
+
+    /**
+     * Should be set instead of @ref AVFilter.init "init" by the filters that
+     * want to pass a dictionary of AVOptions to nested contexts that are
+     * allocated during init.
+     *
+     * On return, the options dict should be freed and replaced with one that
+     * contains all the options which could not be processed by this filter (or
+     * with NULL if all the options were processed).
+     *
+     * Otherwise the semantics is the same as for @ref AVFilter.init "init".
+     */
+    int (*init_dict)(AVFilterContext *ctx, AVDictionary **options);
+
+    /**
+     * Filter uninitialization function.
+     *
+     * Called only once right before the filter is freed. Should deallocate any
+     * memory held by the filter, release any buffer references, etc. It does
+     * not need to deallocate the AVFilterContext.priv memory itself.
+     *
+     * This callback may be called even if @ref AVFilter.init "init" was not
+     * called or failed, so it must be prepared to handle such a situation.
+     */
+    void (*uninit)(AVFilterContext *ctx);
+
+    /**
+     * The state of the following union is determined by formats_state.
+     * See the documentation of enum FilterFormatsState in internal.h.
+     */
+    union {
+        /**
+         * Query formats supported by the filter on its inputs and outputs.
+         *
+         * This callback is called after the filter is initialized (so the inputs
+         * and outputs are fixed), shortly before the format negotiation. This
+         * callback may be called more than once.
+         *
+         * This callback must set ::AVFilterLink's
+         * @ref AVFilterFormatsConfig.formats "outcfg.formats"
+         * on every input link and
+         * @ref AVFilterFormatsConfig.formats "incfg.formats"
+         * on every output link to a list of pixel/sample formats that the filter
+         * supports on that link.
+         * For audio links, this filter must also set
+         * @ref AVFilterFormatsConfig.samplerates "incfg.samplerates"
+         *  /
+         * @ref AVFilterFormatsConfig.samplerates "outcfg.samplerates"
+         * and @ref AVFilterFormatsConfig.channel_layouts "incfg.channel_layouts"
+         *  /
+         * @ref AVFilterFormatsConfig.channel_layouts "outcfg.channel_layouts"
+         * analogously.
+         *
+         * This callback must never be NULL if the union is in this state.
+         *
+         * @return zero on success, a negative value corresponding to an
+         * AVERROR code otherwise
+         */
+        int (*query_func)(AVFilterContext *);
+        /**
+         * A pointer to an array of admissible pixel formats delimited
+         * by AV_PIX_FMT_NONE. The generic code will use this list
+         * to indicate that this filter supports each of these pixel formats,
+         * provided that all inputs and outputs use the same pixel format.
+         *
+         * This list must never be NULL if the union is in this state.
+         * The type of all inputs and outputs of filters using this must
+         * be AVMEDIA_TYPE_VIDEO.
+         */
+        const enum AVPixelFormat *pixels_list;
+        /**
+         * Analogous to pixels, but delimited by AV_SAMPLE_FMT_NONE
+         * and restricted to filters that only have AVMEDIA_TYPE_AUDIO
+         * inputs and outputs.
+         *
+         * In addition to that the generic code will mark all inputs
+         * and all outputs as supporting all sample rates and every
+         * channel count and channel layout, as long as all inputs
+         * and outputs use the same sample rate and channel count/layout.
+         */
+        const enum AVSampleFormat *samples_list;
+        /**
+         * Equivalent to { pix_fmt, AV_PIX_FMT_NONE } as pixels_list.
+         */
+        enum AVPixelFormat  pix_fmt;
+        /**
+         * Equivalent to { sample_fmt, AV_SAMPLE_FMT_NONE } as samples_list.
+         */
+        enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt;
+    } formats;
+
+    int priv_size;      ///< size of private data to allocate for the filter
+
+    int flags_internal; ///< Additional flags for avfilter internal use only.
+
+    /**
+     * Make the filter instance process a command.
+     *
+     * @param cmd    the command to process, for handling simplicity all commands must be alphanumeric only
+     * @param arg    the argument for the command
+     * @param res    a buffer with size res_size where the filter(s) can return a response. This must not change when the command is not supported.
+     * @param flags  if AVFILTER_CMD_FLAG_FAST is set and the command would be
+     *               time consuming then a filter should treat it like an unsupported command
+     *
+     * @returns >=0 on success otherwise an error code.
+     *          AVERROR(ENOSYS) on unsupported commands
+     */
+    int (*process_command)(AVFilterContext *, const char *cmd, const char *arg, char *res, int res_len, int flags);
+
+    /**
+     * Filter activation function.
+     *
+     * Called when any processing is needed from the filter, instead of any
+     * filter_frame and request_frame on pads.
+     *
+     * The function must examine inlinks and outlinks and perform a single
+     * step of processing. If there is nothing to do, the function must do
+     * nothing and not return an error. If more steps are or may be
+     * possible, it must use ff_filter_set_ready() to schedule another
+     * activation.
+     */
+    int (*activate)(AVFilterContext *ctx);
+} AVFilter;
+
+/**
+ * Get the number of elements in an AVFilter's inputs or outputs array.
+ */
+unsigned avfilter_filter_pad_count(const AVFilter *filter, int is_output);
+
+/**
+ * Process multiple parts of the frame concurrently.
+ */
+#define AVFILTER_THREAD_SLICE (1 << 0)
+
+typedef struct AVFilterInternal AVFilterInternal;
+
+/** An instance of a filter */
+struct AVFilterContext {
+    const AVClass *av_class;        ///< needed for av_log() and filters common options
+
+    const AVFilter *filter;         ///< the AVFilter of which this is an instance
+
+    char *name;                     ///< name of this filter instance
+
+    AVFilterPad   *input_pads;      ///< array of input pads
+    AVFilterLink **inputs;          ///< array of pointers to input links
+    unsigned    nb_inputs;          ///< number of input pads
+
+    AVFilterPad   *output_pads;     ///< array of output pads
+    AVFilterLink **outputs;         ///< array of pointers to output links
+    unsigned    nb_outputs;         ///< number of output pads
+
+    void *priv;                     ///< private data for use by the filter
+
+    struct AVFilterGraph *graph;    ///< filtergraph this filter belongs to
+
+    /**
+     * Type of multithreading being allowed/used. A combination of
+     * AVFILTER_THREAD_* flags.
+     *
+     * May be set by the caller before initializing the filter to forbid some
+     * or all kinds of multithreading for this filter. The default is allowing
+     * everything.
+     *
+     * When the filter is initialized, this field is combined using bit AND with
+     * AVFilterGraph.thread_type to get the final mask used for determining
+     * allowed threading types. I.e. a threading type needs to be set in both
+     * to be allowed.
+     *
+     * After the filter is initialized, libavfilter sets this field to the
+     * threading type that is actually used (0 for no multithreading).
+     */
+    int thread_type;
+
+    /**
+     * An opaque struct for libavfilter internal use.
+     */
+    AVFilterInternal *internal;
+
+    struct AVFilterCommand *command_queue;
+
+    char *enable_str;               ///< enable expression string
+    void *enable;                   ///< parsed expression (AVExpr*)
+    double *var_values;             ///< variable values for the enable expression
+    int is_disabled;                ///< the enabled state from the last expression evaluation
+
+    /**
+     * For filters which will create hardware frames, sets the device the
+     * filter should create them in.  All other filters will ignore this field:
+     * in particular, a filter which consumes or processes hardware frames will
+     * instead use the hw_frames_ctx field in AVFilterLink to carry the
+     * hardware context information.
+     */
+    AVBufferRef *hw_device_ctx;
+
+    /**
+     * Max number of threads allowed in this filter instance.
+     * If <= 0, its value is ignored.
+     * Overrides global number of threads set per filter graph.
+     */
+    int nb_threads;
+
+    /**
+     * Ready status of the filter.
+     * A non-0 value means that the filter needs activating;
+     * a higher value suggests a more urgent activation.
+     */
+    unsigned ready;
+
+    /**
+     * Sets the number of extra hardware frames which the filter will
+     * allocate on its output links for use in following filters or by
+     * the caller.
+     *
+     * Some hardware filters require all frames that they will use for
+     * output to be defined in advance before filtering starts.  For such
+     * filters, any hardware frame pools used for output must therefore be
+     * of fixed size.  The extra frames set here are on top of any number
+     * that the filter needs internally in order to operate normally.
+     *
+     * This field must be set before the graph containing this filter is
+     * configured.
+     */
+    int extra_hw_frames;
+};
+
+/**
+ * Lists of formats / etc. supported by an end of a link.
+ *
+ * This structure is directly part of AVFilterLink, in two copies:
+ * one for the source filter, one for the destination filter.
+
+ * These lists are used for negotiating the format to actually be used,
+ * which will be loaded into the format and channel_layout members of
+ * AVFilterLink, when chosen.
+ */
+typedef struct AVFilterFormatsConfig {
+
+    /**
+     * List of supported formats (pixel or sample).
+     */
+    AVFilterFormats *formats;
+
+    /**
+     * Lists of supported sample rates, only for audio.
+     */
+    AVFilterFormats  *samplerates;
+
+    /**
+     * Lists of supported channel layouts, only for audio.
+     */
+    AVFilterChannelLayouts  *channel_layouts;
+
+} AVFilterFormatsConfig;
+
+/**
+ * A link between two filters. This contains pointers to the source and
+ * destination filters between which this link exists, and the indexes of
+ * the pads involved. In addition, this link also contains the parameters
+ * which have been negotiated and agreed upon between the filter, such as
+ * image dimensions, format, etc.
+ *
+ * Applications must not normally access the link structure directly.
+ * Use the buffersrc and buffersink API instead.
+ * In the future, access to the header may be reserved for filters
+ * implementation.
+ */
+struct AVFilterLink {
+    AVFilterContext *src;       ///< source filter
+    AVFilterPad *srcpad;        ///< output pad on the source filter
+
+    AVFilterContext *dst;       ///< dest filter
+    AVFilterPad *dstpad;        ///< input pad on the dest filter
+
+    enum AVMediaType type;      ///< filter media type
+
+    /* These parameters apply only to video */
+    int w;                      ///< agreed upon image width
+    int h;                      ///< agreed upon image height
+    AVRational sample_aspect_ratio; ///< agreed upon sample aspect ratio
+    /* These parameters apply only to audio */
+#if FF_API_OLD_CHANNEL_LAYOUT
+    /**
+     * channel layout of current buffer (see libavutil/channel_layout.h)
+     * @deprecated use ch_layout
+     */
+    attribute_deprecated
+    uint64_t channel_layout;
+#endif
+    int sample_rate;            ///< samples per second
+
+    int format;                 ///< agreed upon media format
+
+    /**
+     * Define the time base used by the PTS of the frames/samples
+     * which will pass through this link.
+     * During the configuration stage, each filter is supposed to
+     * change only the output timebase, while the timebase of the
+     * input link is assumed to be an unchangeable property.
+     */
+    AVRational time_base;
+
+    AVChannelLayout ch_layout;  ///< channel layout of current buffer (see libavutil/channel_layout.h)
+
+    /*****************************************************************
+     * All fields below this line are not part of the public API. They
+     * may not be used outside of libavfilter and can be changed and
+     * removed at will.
+     * New public fields should be added right above.
+     *****************************************************************
+     */
+
+    /**
+     * Lists of supported formats / etc. supported by the input filter.
+     */
+    AVFilterFormatsConfig incfg;
+
+    /**
+     * Lists of supported formats / etc. supported by the output filter.
+     */
+    AVFilterFormatsConfig outcfg;
+
+    /** stage of the initialization of the link properties (dimensions, etc) */
+    enum {
+        AVLINK_UNINIT = 0,      ///< not started
+        AVLINK_STARTINIT,       ///< started, but incomplete
+        AVLINK_INIT             ///< complete
+    } init_state;
+
+    /**
+     * Graph the filter belongs to.
+     */
+    struct AVFilterGraph *graph;
+
+    /**
+     * Current timestamp of the link, as defined by the most recent
+     * frame(s), in link time_base units.
+     */
+    int64_t current_pts;
+
+    /**
+     * Current timestamp of the link, as defined by the most recent
+     * frame(s), in AV_TIME_BASE units.
+     */
+    int64_t current_pts_us;
+
+    /**
+     * Index in the age array.
+     */
+    int age_index;
+
+    /**
+     * Frame rate of the stream on the link, or 1/0 if unknown or variable;
+     * if left to 0/0, will be automatically copied from the first input
+     * of the source filter if it exists.
+     *
+     * Sources should set it to the best estimation of the real frame rate.
+     * If the source frame rate is unknown or variable, set this to 1/0.
+     * Filters should update it if necessary depending on their function.
+     * Sinks can use it to set a default output frame rate.
+     * It is similar to the r_frame_rate field in AVStream.
+     */
+    AVRational frame_rate;
+
+    /**
+     * Minimum number of samples to filter at once. If filter_frame() is
+     * called with fewer samples, it will accumulate them in fifo.
+     * This field and the related ones must not be changed after filtering
+     * has started.
+     * If 0, all related fields are ignored.
+     */
+    int min_samples;
+
+    /**
+     * Maximum number of samples to filter at once. If filter_frame() is
+     * called with more samples, it will split them.
+     */
+    int max_samples;
+
+    /**
+     * Number of past frames sent through the link.
+     */
+    int64_t frame_count_in, frame_count_out;
+
+    /**
+     * Number of past samples sent through the link.
+     */
+    int64_t sample_count_in, sample_count_out;
+
+    /**
+     * A pointer to a FFFramePool struct.
+     */
+    void *frame_pool;
+
+    /**
+     * True if a frame is currently wanted on the output of this filter.
+     * Set when ff_request_frame() is called by the output,
+     * cleared when a frame is filtered.
+     */
+    int frame_wanted_out;
+
+    /**
+     * For hwaccel pixel formats, this should be a reference to the
+     * AVHWFramesContext describing the frames.
+     */
+    AVBufferRef *hw_frames_ctx;
+
+#ifndef FF_INTERNAL_FIELDS
+
+    /**
+     * Internal structure members.
+     * The fields below this limit are internal for libavfilter's use
+     * and must in no way be accessed by applications.
+     */
+    char reserved[0xF000];
+
+#else /* FF_INTERNAL_FIELDS */
+
+    /**
+     * Queue of frames waiting to be filtered.
+     */
+    FFFrameQueue fifo;
+
+    /**
+     * If set, the source filter can not generate a frame as is.
+     * The goal is to avoid repeatedly calling the request_frame() method on
+     * the same link.
+     */
+    int frame_blocked_in;
+
+    /**
+     * Link input status.
+     * If not zero, all attempts of filter_frame will fail with the
+     * corresponding code.
+     */
+    int status_in;
+
+    /**
+     * Timestamp of the input status change.
+     */
+    int64_t status_in_pts;
+
+    /**
+     * Link output status.
+     * If not zero, all attempts of request_frame will fail with the
+     * corresponding code.
+     */
+    int status_out;
+
+#endif /* FF_INTERNAL_FIELDS */
+
+};
+
+/**
+ * Link two filters together.
+ *
+ * @param src    the source filter
+ * @param srcpad index of the output pad on the source filter
+ * @param dst    the destination filter
+ * @param dstpad index of the input pad on the destination filter
+ * @return       zero on success
+ */
+int avfilter_link(AVFilterContext *src, unsigned srcpad,
+                  AVFilterContext *dst, unsigned dstpad);
+
+/**
+ * Free the link in *link, and set its pointer to NULL.
+ */
+void avfilter_link_free(AVFilterLink **link);
+
+/**
+ * Negotiate the media format, dimensions, etc of all inputs to a filter.
+ *
+ * @param filter the filter to negotiate the properties for its inputs
+ * @return       zero on successful negotiation
+ */
+int avfilter_config_links(AVFilterContext *filter);
+
+#define AVFILTER_CMD_FLAG_ONE   1 ///< Stop once a filter understood the command (for target=all for example), fast filters are favored automatically
+#define AVFILTER_CMD_FLAG_FAST  2 ///< Only execute command when its fast (like a video out that supports contrast adjustment in hw)
+
+/**
+ * Make the filter instance process a command.
+ * It is recommended to use avfilter_graph_send_command().
+ */
+int avfilter_process_command(AVFilterContext *filter, const char *cmd, const char *arg, char *res, int res_len, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Iterate over all registered filters.
+ *
+ * @param opaque a pointer where libavfilter will store the iteration state. Must
+ *               point to NULL to start the iteration.
+ *
+ * @return the next registered filter or NULL when the iteration is
+ *         finished
+ */
+const AVFilter *av_filter_iterate(void **opaque);
+
+/**
+ * Get a filter definition matching the given name.
+ *
+ * @param name the filter name to find
+ * @return     the filter definition, if any matching one is registered.
+ *             NULL if none found.
+ */
+const AVFilter *avfilter_get_by_name(const char *name);
+
+
+/**
+ * Initialize a filter with the supplied parameters.
+ *
+ * @param ctx  uninitialized filter context to initialize
+ * @param args Options to initialize the filter with. This must be a
+ *             ':'-separated list of options in the 'key=value' form.
+ *             May be NULL if the options have been set directly using the
+ *             AVOptions API or there are no options that need to be set.
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on failure
+ */
+int avfilter_init_str(AVFilterContext *ctx, const char *args);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize a filter with the supplied dictionary of options.
+ *
+ * @param ctx     uninitialized filter context to initialize
+ * @param options An AVDictionary filled with options for this filter. On
+ *                return this parameter will be destroyed and replaced with
+ *                a dict containing options that were not found. This dictionary
+ *                must be freed by the caller.
+ *                May be NULL, then this function is equivalent to
+ *                avfilter_init_str() with the second parameter set to NULL.
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on failure
+ *
+ * @note This function and avfilter_init_str() do essentially the same thing,
+ * the difference is in manner in which the options are passed. It is up to the
+ * calling code to choose whichever is more preferable. The two functions also
+ * behave differently when some of the provided options are not declared as
+ * supported by the filter. In such a case, avfilter_init_str() will fail, but
+ * this function will leave those extra options in the options AVDictionary and
+ * continue as usual.
+ */
+int avfilter_init_dict(AVFilterContext *ctx, AVDictionary **options);
+
+/**
+ * Free a filter context. This will also remove the filter from its
+ * filtergraph's list of filters.
+ *
+ * @param filter the filter to free
+ */
+void avfilter_free(AVFilterContext *filter);
+
+/**
+ * Insert a filter in the middle of an existing link.
+ *
+ * @param link the link into which the filter should be inserted
+ * @param filt the filter to be inserted
+ * @param filt_srcpad_idx the input pad on the filter to connect
+ * @param filt_dstpad_idx the output pad on the filter to connect
+ * @return     zero on success
+ */
+int avfilter_insert_filter(AVFilterLink *link, AVFilterContext *filt,
+                           unsigned filt_srcpad_idx, unsigned filt_dstpad_idx);
+
+/**
+ * @return AVClass for AVFilterContext.
+ *
+ * @see av_opt_find().
+ */
+const AVClass *avfilter_get_class(void);
+
+typedef struct AVFilterGraphInternal AVFilterGraphInternal;
+
+/**
+ * A function pointer passed to the @ref AVFilterGraph.execute callback to be
+ * executed multiple times, possibly in parallel.
+ *
+ * @param ctx the filter context the job belongs to
+ * @param arg an opaque parameter passed through from @ref
+ *            AVFilterGraph.execute
+ * @param jobnr the index of the job being executed
+ * @param nb_jobs the total number of jobs
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on error
+ */
+typedef int (avfilter_action_func)(AVFilterContext *ctx, void *arg, int jobnr, int nb_jobs);
+
+/**
+ * A function executing multiple jobs, possibly in parallel.
+ *
+ * @param ctx the filter context to which the jobs belong
+ * @param func the function to be called multiple times
+ * @param arg the argument to be passed to func
+ * @param ret a nb_jobs-sized array to be filled with return values from each
+ *            invocation of func
+ * @param nb_jobs the number of jobs to execute
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on error
+ */
+typedef int (avfilter_execute_func)(AVFilterContext *ctx, avfilter_action_func *func,
+                                    void *arg, int *ret, int nb_jobs);
+
+typedef struct AVFilterGraph {
+    const AVClass *av_class;
+    AVFilterContext **filters;
+    unsigned nb_filters;
+
+    char *scale_sws_opts; ///< sws options to use for the auto-inserted scale filters
+
+    /**
+     * Type of multithreading allowed for filters in this graph. A combination
+     * of AVFILTER_THREAD_* flags.
+     *
+     * May be set by the caller at any point, the setting will apply to all
+     * filters initialized after that. The default is allowing everything.
+     *
+     * When a filter in this graph is initialized, this field is combined using
+     * bit AND with AVFilterContext.thread_type to get the final mask used for
+     * determining allowed threading types. I.e. a threading type needs to be
+     * set in both to be allowed.
+     */
+    int thread_type;
+
+    /**
+     * Maximum number of threads used by filters in this graph. May be set by
+     * the caller before adding any filters to the filtergraph. Zero (the
+     * default) means that the number of threads is determined automatically.
+     */
+    int nb_threads;
+
+    /**
+     * Opaque object for libavfilter internal use.
+     */
+    AVFilterGraphInternal *internal;
+
+    /**
+     * Opaque user data. May be set by the caller to an arbitrary value, e.g. to
+     * be used from callbacks like @ref AVFilterGraph.execute.
+     * Libavfilter will not touch this field in any way.
+     */
+    void *opaque;
+
+    /**
+     * This callback may be set by the caller immediately after allocating the
+     * graph and before adding any filters to it, to provide a custom
+     * multithreading implementation.
+     *
+     * If set, filters with slice threading capability will call this callback
+     * to execute multiple jobs in parallel.
+     *
+     * If this field is left unset, libavfilter will use its internal
+     * implementation, which may or may not be multithreaded depending on the
+     * platform and build options.
+     */
+    avfilter_execute_func *execute;
+
+    char *aresample_swr_opts; ///< swr options to use for the auto-inserted aresample filters, Access ONLY through AVOptions
+
+    /**
+     * Private fields
+     *
+     * The following fields are for internal use only.
+     * Their type, offset, number and semantic can change without notice.
+     */
+
+    AVFilterLink **sink_links;
+    int sink_links_count;
+
+    unsigned disable_auto_convert;
+} AVFilterGraph;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a filter graph.
+ *
+ * @return the allocated filter graph on success or NULL.
+ */
+AVFilterGraph *avfilter_graph_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Create a new filter instance in a filter graph.
+ *
+ * @param graph graph in which the new filter will be used
+ * @param filter the filter to create an instance of
+ * @param name Name to give to the new instance (will be copied to
+ *             AVFilterContext.name). This may be used by the caller to identify
+ *             different filters, libavfilter itself assigns no semantics to
+ *             this parameter. May be NULL.
+ *
+ * @return the context of the newly created filter instance (note that it is
+ *         also retrievable directly through AVFilterGraph.filters or with
+ *         avfilter_graph_get_filter()) on success or NULL on failure.
+ */
+AVFilterContext *avfilter_graph_alloc_filter(AVFilterGraph *graph,
+                                             const AVFilter *filter,
+                                             const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * Get a filter instance identified by instance name from graph.
+ *
+ * @param graph filter graph to search through.
+ * @param name filter instance name (should be unique in the graph).
+ * @return the pointer to the found filter instance or NULL if it
+ * cannot be found.
+ */
+AVFilterContext *avfilter_graph_get_filter(AVFilterGraph *graph, const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * Create and add a filter instance into an existing graph.
+ * The filter instance is created from the filter filt and inited
+ * with the parameter args. opaque is currently ignored.
+ *
+ * In case of success put in *filt_ctx the pointer to the created
+ * filter instance, otherwise set *filt_ctx to NULL.
+ *
+ * @param name the instance name to give to the created filter instance
+ * @param graph_ctx the filter graph
+ * @return a negative AVERROR error code in case of failure, a non
+ * negative value otherwise
+ */
+int avfilter_graph_create_filter(AVFilterContext **filt_ctx, const AVFilter *filt,
+                                 const char *name, const char *args, void *opaque,
+                                 AVFilterGraph *graph_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Enable or disable automatic format conversion inside the graph.
+ *
+ * Note that format conversion can still happen inside explicitly inserted
+ * scale and aresample filters.
+ *
+ * @param flags  any of the AVFILTER_AUTO_CONVERT_* constants
+ */
+void avfilter_graph_set_auto_convert(AVFilterGraph *graph, unsigned flags);
+
+enum {
+    AVFILTER_AUTO_CONVERT_ALL  =  0, /**< all automatic conversions enabled */
+    AVFILTER_AUTO_CONVERT_NONE = -1, /**< all automatic conversions disabled */
+};
+
+/**
+ * Check validity and configure all the links and formats in the graph.
+ *
+ * @param graphctx the filter graph
+ * @param log_ctx context used for logging
+ * @return >= 0 in case of success, a negative AVERROR code otherwise
+ */
+int avfilter_graph_config(AVFilterGraph *graphctx, void *log_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Free a graph, destroy its links, and set *graph to NULL.
+ * If *graph is NULL, do nothing.
+ */
+void avfilter_graph_free(AVFilterGraph **graph);
+
+/**
+ * A linked-list of the inputs/outputs of the filter chain.
+ *
+ * This is mainly useful for avfilter_graph_parse() / avfilter_graph_parse2(),
+ * where it is used to communicate open (unlinked) inputs and outputs from and
+ * to the caller.
+ * This struct specifies, per each not connected pad contained in the graph, the
+ * filter context and the pad index required for establishing a link.
+ */
+typedef struct AVFilterInOut {
+    /** unique name for this input/output in the list */
+    char *name;
+
+    /** filter context associated to this input/output */
+    AVFilterContext *filter_ctx;
+
+    /** index of the filt_ctx pad to use for linking */
+    int pad_idx;
+
+    /** next input/input in the list, NULL if this is the last */
+    struct AVFilterInOut *next;
+} AVFilterInOut;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a single AVFilterInOut entry.
+ * Must be freed with avfilter_inout_free().
+ * @return allocated AVFilterInOut on success, NULL on failure.
+ */
+AVFilterInOut *avfilter_inout_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Free the supplied list of AVFilterInOut and set *inout to NULL.
+ * If *inout is NULL, do nothing.
+ */
+void avfilter_inout_free(AVFilterInOut **inout);
+
+/**
+ * Add a graph described by a string to a graph.
+ *
+ * @note The caller must provide the lists of inputs and outputs,
+ * which therefore must be known before calling the function.
+ *
+ * @note The inputs parameter describes inputs of the already existing
+ * part of the graph; i.e. from the point of view of the newly created
+ * part, they are outputs. Similarly the outputs parameter describes
+ * outputs of the already existing filters, which are provided as
+ * inputs to the parsed filters.
+ *
+ * @param graph   the filter graph where to link the parsed graph context
+ * @param filters string to be parsed
+ * @param inputs  linked list to the inputs of the graph
+ * @param outputs linked list to the outputs of the graph
+ * @return zero on success, a negative AVERROR code on error
+ */
+int avfilter_graph_parse(AVFilterGraph *graph, const char *filters,
+                         AVFilterInOut *inputs, AVFilterInOut *outputs,
+                         void *log_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Add a graph described by a string to a graph.
+ *
+ * In the graph filters description, if the input label of the first
+ * filter is not specified, "in" is assumed; if the output label of
+ * the last filter is not specified, "out" is assumed.
+ *
+ * @param graph   the filter graph where to link the parsed graph context
+ * @param filters string to be parsed
+ * @param inputs  pointer to a linked list to the inputs of the graph, may be NULL.
+ *                If non-NULL, *inputs is updated to contain the list of open inputs
+ *                after the parsing, should be freed with avfilter_inout_free().
+ * @param outputs pointer to a linked list to the outputs of the graph, may be NULL.
+ *                If non-NULL, *outputs is updated to contain the list of open outputs
+ *                after the parsing, should be freed with avfilter_inout_free().
+ * @return non negative on success, a negative AVERROR code on error
+ */
+int avfilter_graph_parse_ptr(AVFilterGraph *graph, const char *filters,
+                             AVFilterInOut **inputs, AVFilterInOut **outputs,
+                             void *log_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Add a graph described by a string to a graph.
+ *
+ * @param[in]  graph   the filter graph where to link the parsed graph context
+ * @param[in]  filters string to be parsed
+ * @param[out] inputs  a linked list of all free (unlinked) inputs of the
+ *                     parsed graph will be returned here. It is to be freed
+ *                     by the caller using avfilter_inout_free().
+ * @param[out] outputs a linked list of all free (unlinked) outputs of the
+ *                     parsed graph will be returned here. It is to be freed by the
+ *                     caller using avfilter_inout_free().
+ * @return zero on success, a negative AVERROR code on error
+ *
+ * @note This function returns the inputs and outputs that are left
+ * unlinked after parsing the graph and the caller then deals with
+ * them.
+ * @note This function makes no reference whatsoever to already
+ * existing parts of the graph and the inputs parameter will on return
+ * contain inputs of the newly parsed part of the graph.  Analogously
+ * the outputs parameter will contain outputs of the newly created
+ * filters.
+ */
+int avfilter_graph_parse2(AVFilterGraph *graph, const char *filters,
+                          AVFilterInOut **inputs,
+                          AVFilterInOut **outputs);
+
+/**
+ * Send a command to one or more filter instances.
+ *
+ * @param graph  the filter graph
+ * @param target the filter(s) to which the command should be sent
+ *               "all" sends to all filters
+ *               otherwise it can be a filter or filter instance name
+ *               which will send the command to all matching filters.
+ * @param cmd    the command to send, for handling simplicity all commands must be alphanumeric only
+ * @param arg    the argument for the command
+ * @param res    a buffer with size res_size where the filter(s) can return a response.
+ *
+ * @returns >=0 on success otherwise an error code.
+ *              AVERROR(ENOSYS) on unsupported commands
+ */
+int avfilter_graph_send_command(AVFilterGraph *graph, const char *target, const char *cmd, const char *arg, char *res, int res_len, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Queue a command for one or more filter instances.
+ *
+ * @param graph  the filter graph
+ * @param target the filter(s) to which the command should be sent
+ *               "all" sends to all filters
+ *               otherwise it can be a filter or filter instance name
+ *               which will send the command to all matching filters.
+ * @param cmd    the command to sent, for handling simplicity all commands must be alphanumeric only
+ * @param arg    the argument for the command
+ * @param ts     time at which the command should be sent to the filter
+ *
+ * @note As this executes commands after this function returns, no return code
+ *       from the filter is provided, also AVFILTER_CMD_FLAG_ONE is not supported.
+ */
+int avfilter_graph_queue_command(AVFilterGraph *graph, const char *target, const char *cmd, const char *arg, int flags, double ts);
+
+
+/**
+ * Dump a graph into a human-readable string representation.
+ *
+ * @param graph    the graph to dump
+ * @param options  formatting options; currently ignored
+ * @return  a string, or NULL in case of memory allocation failure;
+ *          the string must be freed using av_free
+ */
+char *avfilter_graph_dump(AVFilterGraph *graph, const char *options);
+
+/**
+ * Request a frame on the oldest sink link.
+ *
+ * If the request returns AVERROR_EOF, try the next.
+ *
+ * Note that this function is not meant to be the sole scheduling mechanism
+ * of a filtergraph, only a convenience function to help drain a filtergraph
+ * in a balanced way under normal circumstances.
+ *
+ * Also note that AVERROR_EOF does not mean that frames did not arrive on
+ * some of the sinks during the process.
+ * When there are multiple sink links, in case the requested link
+ * returns an EOF, this may cause a filter to flush pending frames
+ * which are sent to another sink link, although unrequested.
+ *
+ * @return  the return value of ff_request_frame(),
+ *          or AVERROR_EOF if all links returned AVERROR_EOF
+ */
+int avfilter_graph_request_oldest(AVFilterGraph *graph);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVFILTER_AVFILTER_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavfilter/buffersink.h b/dependencies/include/libavfilter/buffersink.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..01e7c74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavfilter/buffersink.h
@@ -0,0 +1,209 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVFILTER_BUFFERSINK_H
+#define AVFILTER_BUFFERSINK_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavfi_buffersink
+ * memory buffer sink API for audio and video
+ */
+
+#include "avfilter.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavfi_buffersink Buffer sink API
+ * @ingroup lavfi
+ * @{
+ *
+ * The buffersink and abuffersink filters are there to connect filter graphs
+ * to applications. They have a single input, connected to the graph, and no
+ * output. Frames must be extracted using av_buffersink_get_frame() or
+ * av_buffersink_get_samples().
+ *
+ * The format negotiated by the graph during configuration can be obtained
+ * using the accessor functions:
+ * - av_buffersink_get_time_base(),
+ * - av_buffersink_get_format(),
+ * - av_buffersink_get_frame_rate(),
+ * - av_buffersink_get_w(),
+ * - av_buffersink_get_h(),
+ * - av_buffersink_get_sample_aspect_ratio(),
+ * - av_buffersink_get_channels(),
+ * - av_buffersink_get_ch_layout(),
+ * - av_buffersink_get_sample_rate().
+ *
+ * The layout returned by av_buffersink_get_ch_layout() must de uninitialized
+ * by the caller.
+ *
+ * The format can be constrained by setting options, using av_opt_set() and
+ * related functions with the AV_OPT_SEARCH_CHILDREN flag.
+ *  - pix_fmts (int list),
+ *  - sample_fmts (int list),
+ *  - sample_rates (int list),
+ *  - ch_layouts (string),
+ *  - channel_counts (int list),
+ *  - all_channel_counts (bool).
+ * Most of these options are of type binary, and should be set using
+ * av_opt_set_int_list() or av_opt_set_bin(). If they are not set, all
+ * corresponding formats are accepted.
+ *
+ * As a special case, if ch_layouts is not set, all valid channel layouts are
+ * accepted except for UNSPEC layouts, unless all_channel_counts is set.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Get a frame with filtered data from sink and put it in frame.
+ *
+ * @param ctx    pointer to a buffersink or abuffersink filter context.
+ * @param frame  pointer to an allocated frame that will be filled with data.
+ *               The data must be freed using av_frame_unref() / av_frame_free()
+ * @param flags  a combination of AV_BUFFERSINK_FLAG_* flags
+ *
+ * @return  >= 0 in for success, a negative AVERROR code for failure.
+ */
+int av_buffersink_get_frame_flags(AVFilterContext *ctx, AVFrame *frame, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Tell av_buffersink_get_buffer_ref() to read video/samples buffer
+ * reference, but not remove it from the buffer. This is useful if you
+ * need only to read a video/samples buffer, without to fetch it.
+ */
+#define AV_BUFFERSINK_FLAG_PEEK 1
+
+/**
+ * Tell av_buffersink_get_buffer_ref() not to request a frame from its input.
+ * If a frame is already buffered, it is read (and removed from the buffer),
+ * but if no frame is present, return AVERROR(EAGAIN).
+ */
+#define AV_BUFFERSINK_FLAG_NO_REQUEST 2
+
+#if FF_API_BUFFERSINK_ALLOC
+/**
+ * Deprecated and unused struct to use for initializing a buffersink context.
+ */
+typedef struct AVBufferSinkParams {
+    const enum AVPixelFormat *pixel_fmts; ///< list of allowed pixel formats, terminated by AV_PIX_FMT_NONE
+} AVBufferSinkParams;
+
+/**
+ * Create an AVBufferSinkParams structure.
+ *
+ * Must be freed with av_free().
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+AVBufferSinkParams *av_buffersink_params_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Deprecated and unused struct to use for initializing an abuffersink context.
+ */
+typedef struct AVABufferSinkParams {
+    const enum AVSampleFormat *sample_fmts; ///< list of allowed sample formats, terminated by AV_SAMPLE_FMT_NONE
+    const int64_t *channel_layouts;         ///< list of allowed channel layouts, terminated by -1
+    const int *channel_counts;              ///< list of allowed channel counts, terminated by -1
+    int all_channel_counts;                 ///< if not 0, accept any channel count or layout
+    int *sample_rates;                      ///< list of allowed sample rates, terminated by -1
+} AVABufferSinkParams;
+
+/**
+ * Create an AVABufferSinkParams structure.
+ *
+ * Must be freed with av_free().
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+AVABufferSinkParams *av_abuffersink_params_alloc(void);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Set the frame size for an audio buffer sink.
+ *
+ * All calls to av_buffersink_get_buffer_ref will return a buffer with
+ * exactly the specified number of samples, or AVERROR(EAGAIN) if there is
+ * not enough. The last buffer at EOF will be padded with 0.
+ */
+void av_buffersink_set_frame_size(AVFilterContext *ctx, unsigned frame_size);
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavfi_buffersink_accessors Buffer sink accessors
+ * Get the properties of the stream
+ * @{
+ */
+
+enum AVMediaType av_buffersink_get_type                (const AVFilterContext *ctx);
+AVRational       av_buffersink_get_time_base           (const AVFilterContext *ctx);
+int              av_buffersink_get_format              (const AVFilterContext *ctx);
+
+AVRational       av_buffersink_get_frame_rate          (const AVFilterContext *ctx);
+int              av_buffersink_get_w                   (const AVFilterContext *ctx);
+int              av_buffersink_get_h                   (const AVFilterContext *ctx);
+AVRational       av_buffersink_get_sample_aspect_ratio (const AVFilterContext *ctx);
+
+int              av_buffersink_get_channels            (const AVFilterContext *ctx);
+#if FF_API_OLD_CHANNEL_LAYOUT
+attribute_deprecated
+uint64_t         av_buffersink_get_channel_layout      (const AVFilterContext *ctx);
+#endif
+int              av_buffersink_get_ch_layout           (const AVFilterContext *ctx,
+                                                        AVChannelLayout *ch_layout);
+int              av_buffersink_get_sample_rate         (const AVFilterContext *ctx);
+
+AVBufferRef *    av_buffersink_get_hw_frames_ctx       (const AVFilterContext *ctx);
+
+/** @} */
+
+/**
+ * Get a frame with filtered data from sink and put it in frame.
+ *
+ * @param ctx pointer to a context of a buffersink or abuffersink AVFilter.
+ * @param frame pointer to an allocated frame that will be filled with data.
+ *              The data must be freed using av_frame_unref() / av_frame_free()
+ *
+ * @return
+ *         - >= 0 if a frame was successfully returned.
+ *         - AVERROR(EAGAIN) if no frames are available at this point; more
+ *           input frames must be added to the filtergraph to get more output.
+ *         - AVERROR_EOF if there will be no more output frames on this sink.
+ *         - A different negative AVERROR code in other failure cases.
+ */
+int av_buffersink_get_frame(AVFilterContext *ctx, AVFrame *frame);
+
+/**
+ * Same as av_buffersink_get_frame(), but with the ability to specify the number
+ * of samples read. This function is less efficient than
+ * av_buffersink_get_frame(), because it copies the data around.
+ *
+ * @param ctx pointer to a context of the abuffersink AVFilter.
+ * @param frame pointer to an allocated frame that will be filled with data.
+ *              The data must be freed using av_frame_unref() / av_frame_free()
+ *              frame will contain exactly nb_samples audio samples, except at
+ *              the end of stream, when it can contain less than nb_samples.
+ *
+ * @return The return codes have the same meaning as for
+ *         av_buffersink_get_frame().
+ *
+ * @warning do not mix this function with av_buffersink_get_frame(). Use only one or
+ * the other with a single sink, not both.
+ */
+int av_buffersink_get_samples(AVFilterContext *ctx, AVFrame *frame, int nb_samples);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVFILTER_BUFFERSINK_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavfilter/buffersrc.h b/dependencies/include/libavfilter/buffersrc.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3b248b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavfilter/buffersrc.h
@@ -0,0 +1,218 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVFILTER_BUFFERSRC_H
+#define AVFILTER_BUFFERSRC_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavfi_buffersrc
+ * Memory buffer source API.
+ */
+
+#include "avfilter.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavfi_buffersrc Buffer source API
+ * @ingroup lavfi
+ * @{
+ */
+
+enum {
+
+    /**
+     * Do not check for format changes.
+     */
+    AV_BUFFERSRC_FLAG_NO_CHECK_FORMAT = 1,
+
+    /**
+     * Immediately push the frame to the output.
+     */
+    AV_BUFFERSRC_FLAG_PUSH = 4,
+
+    /**
+     * Keep a reference to the frame.
+     * If the frame if reference-counted, create a new reference; otherwise
+     * copy the frame data.
+     */
+    AV_BUFFERSRC_FLAG_KEEP_REF = 8,
+
+};
+
+/**
+ * Get the number of failed requests.
+ *
+ * A failed request is when the request_frame method is called while no
+ * frame is present in the buffer.
+ * The number is reset when a frame is added.
+ */
+unsigned av_buffersrc_get_nb_failed_requests(AVFilterContext *buffer_src);
+
+/**
+ * This structure contains the parameters describing the frames that will be
+ * passed to this filter.
+ *
+ * It should be allocated with av_buffersrc_parameters_alloc() and freed with
+ * av_free(). All the allocated fields in it remain owned by the caller.
+ */
+typedef struct AVBufferSrcParameters {
+    /**
+     * video: the pixel format, value corresponds to enum AVPixelFormat
+     * audio: the sample format, value corresponds to enum AVSampleFormat
+     */
+    int format;
+    /**
+     * The timebase to be used for the timestamps on the input frames.
+     */
+    AVRational time_base;
+
+    /**
+     * Video only, the display dimensions of the input frames.
+     */
+    int width, height;
+
+    /**
+     * Video only, the sample (pixel) aspect ratio.
+     */
+    AVRational sample_aspect_ratio;
+
+    /**
+     * Video only, the frame rate of the input video. This field must only be
+     * set to a non-zero value if input stream has a known constant framerate
+     * and should be left at its initial value if the framerate is variable or
+     * unknown.
+     */
+    AVRational frame_rate;
+
+    /**
+     * Video with a hwaccel pixel format only. This should be a reference to an
+     * AVHWFramesContext instance describing the input frames.
+     */
+    AVBufferRef *hw_frames_ctx;
+
+    /**
+     * Audio only, the audio sampling rate in samples per second.
+     */
+    int sample_rate;
+
+#if FF_API_OLD_CHANNEL_LAYOUT
+    /**
+     * Audio only, the audio channel layout
+     * @deprecated use ch_layout
+     */
+    attribute_deprecated
+    uint64_t channel_layout;
+#endif
+
+    /**
+     * Audio only, the audio channel layout
+     */
+    AVChannelLayout ch_layout;
+} AVBufferSrcParameters;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a new AVBufferSrcParameters instance. It should be freed by the
+ * caller with av_free().
+ */
+AVBufferSrcParameters *av_buffersrc_parameters_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize the buffersrc or abuffersrc filter with the provided parameters.
+ * This function may be called multiple times, the later calls override the
+ * previous ones. Some of the parameters may also be set through AVOptions, then
+ * whatever method is used last takes precedence.
+ *
+ * @param ctx an instance of the buffersrc or abuffersrc filter
+ * @param param the stream parameters. The frames later passed to this filter
+ *              must conform to those parameters. All the allocated fields in
+ *              param remain owned by the caller, libavfilter will make internal
+ *              copies or references when necessary.
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR code on failure.
+ */
+int av_buffersrc_parameters_set(AVFilterContext *ctx, AVBufferSrcParameters *param);
+
+/**
+ * Add a frame to the buffer source.
+ *
+ * @param ctx   an instance of the buffersrc filter
+ * @param frame frame to be added. If the frame is reference counted, this
+ * function will make a new reference to it. Otherwise the frame data will be
+ * copied.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on error
+ *
+ * This function is equivalent to av_buffersrc_add_frame_flags() with the
+ * AV_BUFFERSRC_FLAG_KEEP_REF flag.
+ */
+av_warn_unused_result
+int av_buffersrc_write_frame(AVFilterContext *ctx, const AVFrame *frame);
+
+/**
+ * Add a frame to the buffer source.
+ *
+ * @param ctx   an instance of the buffersrc filter
+ * @param frame frame to be added. If the frame is reference counted, this
+ * function will take ownership of the reference(s) and reset the frame.
+ * Otherwise the frame data will be copied. If this function returns an error,
+ * the input frame is not touched.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on error.
+ *
+ * @note the difference between this function and av_buffersrc_write_frame() is
+ * that av_buffersrc_write_frame() creates a new reference to the input frame,
+ * while this function takes ownership of the reference passed to it.
+ *
+ * This function is equivalent to av_buffersrc_add_frame_flags() without the
+ * AV_BUFFERSRC_FLAG_KEEP_REF flag.
+ */
+av_warn_unused_result
+int av_buffersrc_add_frame(AVFilterContext *ctx, AVFrame *frame);
+
+/**
+ * Add a frame to the buffer source.
+ *
+ * By default, if the frame is reference-counted, this function will take
+ * ownership of the reference(s) and reset the frame. This can be controlled
+ * using the flags.
+ *
+ * If this function returns an error, the input frame is not touched.
+ *
+ * @param buffer_src  pointer to a buffer source context
+ * @param frame       a frame, or NULL to mark EOF
+ * @param flags       a combination of AV_BUFFERSRC_FLAG_*
+ * @return            >= 0 in case of success, a negative AVERROR code
+ *                    in case of failure
+ */
+av_warn_unused_result
+int av_buffersrc_add_frame_flags(AVFilterContext *buffer_src,
+                                 AVFrame *frame, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Close the buffer source after EOF.
+ *
+ * This is similar to passing NULL to av_buffersrc_add_frame_flags()
+ * except it takes the timestamp of the EOF, i.e. the timestamp of the end
+ * of the last frame.
+ */
+int av_buffersrc_close(AVFilterContext *ctx, int64_t pts, unsigned flags);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVFILTER_BUFFERSRC_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavfilter/version.h b/dependencies/include/libavfilter/version.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..69f3af5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavfilter/version.h
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+/*
+ * Version macros.
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVFILTER_VERSION_H
+#define AVFILTER_VERSION_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavfi
+ * Libavfilter version macros
+ */
+
+#include "libavutil/version.h"
+
+#include "version_major.h"
+
+#define LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MINOR  51
+#define LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MICRO 100
+
+
+#define LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_INT AV_VERSION_INT(LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MAJOR, \
+                                               LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MINOR, \
+                                               LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBAVFILTER_VERSION     AV_VERSION(LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MAJOR,   \
+                                           LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MINOR,   \
+                                           LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBAVFILTER_BUILD       LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_INT
+
+#define LIBAVFILTER_IDENT       "Lavfi" AV_STRINGIFY(LIBAVFILTER_VERSION)
+
+#endif /* AVFILTER_VERSION_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavfilter/version_major.h b/dependencies/include/libavfilter/version_major.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..de0cf6e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavfilter/version_major.h
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+/*
+ * Version macros.
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVFILTER_VERSION_MAJOR_H
+#define AVFILTER_VERSION_MAJOR_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavfi
+ * Libavfilter version macros
+ */
+
+#define LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MAJOR   8
+
+/**
+ * FF_API_* defines may be placed below to indicate public API that will be
+ * dropped at a future version bump. The defines themselves are not part of
+ * the public API and may change, break or disappear at any time.
+ */
+
+#define FF_API_SWS_PARAM_OPTION             (LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MAJOR < 9)
+#define FF_API_BUFFERSINK_ALLOC             (LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MAJOR < 9)
+#define FF_API_PAD_COUNT                    (LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MAJOR < 9)
+
+#endif /* AVFILTER_VERSION_MAJOR_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavformat/avformat.h b/dependencies/include/libavformat/avformat.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1d97d56
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavformat/avformat.h
@@ -0,0 +1,2936 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2001 Fabrice Bellard
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVFORMAT_AVFORMAT_H
+#define AVFORMAT_AVFORMAT_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup libavf
+ * Main libavformat public API header
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup libavf libavformat
+ * I/O and Muxing/Demuxing Library
+ *
+ * Libavformat (lavf) is a library for dealing with various media container
+ * formats. Its main two purposes are demuxing - i.e. splitting a media file
+ * into component streams, and the reverse process of muxing - writing supplied
+ * data in a specified container format. It also has an @ref lavf_io
+ * "I/O module" which supports a number of protocols for accessing the data (e.g.
+ * file, tcp, http and others).
+ * Unless you are absolutely sure you won't use libavformat's network
+ * capabilities, you should also call avformat_network_init().
+ *
+ * A supported input format is described by an AVInputFormat struct, conversely
+ * an output format is described by AVOutputFormat. You can iterate over all
+ * input/output formats using the  av_demuxer_iterate / av_muxer_iterate() functions.
+ * The protocols layer is not part of the public API, so you can only get the names
+ * of supported protocols with the avio_enum_protocols() function.
+ *
+ * Main lavf structure used for both muxing and demuxing is AVFormatContext,
+ * which exports all information about the file being read or written. As with
+ * most Libavformat structures, its size is not part of public ABI, so it cannot be
+ * allocated on stack or directly with av_malloc(). To create an
+ * AVFormatContext, use avformat_alloc_context() (some functions, like
+ * avformat_open_input() might do that for you).
+ *
+ * Most importantly an AVFormatContext contains:
+ * @li the @ref AVFormatContext.iformat "input" or @ref AVFormatContext.oformat
+ * "output" format. It is either autodetected or set by user for input;
+ * always set by user for output.
+ * @li an @ref AVFormatContext.streams "array" of AVStreams, which describe all
+ * elementary streams stored in the file. AVStreams are typically referred to
+ * using their index in this array.
+ * @li an @ref AVFormatContext.pb "I/O context". It is either opened by lavf or
+ * set by user for input, always set by user for output (unless you are dealing
+ * with an AVFMT_NOFILE format).
+ *
+ * @section lavf_options Passing options to (de)muxers
+ * It is possible to configure lavf muxers and demuxers using the @ref avoptions
+ * mechanism. Generic (format-independent) libavformat options are provided by
+ * AVFormatContext, they can be examined from a user program by calling
+ * av_opt_next() / av_opt_find() on an allocated AVFormatContext (or its AVClass
+ * from avformat_get_class()). Private (format-specific) options are provided by
+ * AVFormatContext.priv_data if and only if AVInputFormat.priv_class /
+ * AVOutputFormat.priv_class of the corresponding format struct is non-NULL.
+ * Further options may be provided by the @ref AVFormatContext.pb "I/O context",
+ * if its AVClass is non-NULL, and the protocols layer. See the discussion on
+ * nesting in @ref avoptions documentation to learn how to access those.
+ *
+ * @section urls
+ * URL strings in libavformat are made of a scheme/protocol, a ':', and a
+ * scheme specific string. URLs without a scheme and ':' used for local files
+ * are supported but deprecated. "file:" should be used for local files.
+ *
+ * It is important that the scheme string is not taken from untrusted
+ * sources without checks.
+ *
+ * Note that some schemes/protocols are quite powerful, allowing access to
+ * both local and remote files, parts of them, concatenations of them, local
+ * audio and video devices and so on.
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavf_decoding Demuxing
+ * @{
+ * Demuxers read a media file and split it into chunks of data (@em packets). A
+ * @ref AVPacket "packet" contains one or more encoded frames which belongs to a
+ * single elementary stream. In the lavf API this process is represented by the
+ * avformat_open_input() function for opening a file, av_read_frame() for
+ * reading a single packet and finally avformat_close_input(), which does the
+ * cleanup.
+ *
+ * @section lavf_decoding_open Opening a media file
+ * The minimum information required to open a file is its URL, which
+ * is passed to avformat_open_input(), as in the following code:
+ * @code
+ * const char    *url = "file:in.mp3";
+ * AVFormatContext *s = NULL;
+ * int ret = avformat_open_input(&s, url, NULL, NULL);
+ * if (ret < 0)
+ *     abort();
+ * @endcode
+ * The above code attempts to allocate an AVFormatContext, open the
+ * specified file (autodetecting the format) and read the header, exporting the
+ * information stored there into s. Some formats do not have a header or do not
+ * store enough information there, so it is recommended that you call the
+ * avformat_find_stream_info() function which tries to read and decode a few
+ * frames to find missing information.
+ *
+ * In some cases you might want to preallocate an AVFormatContext yourself with
+ * avformat_alloc_context() and do some tweaking on it before passing it to
+ * avformat_open_input(). One such case is when you want to use custom functions
+ * for reading input data instead of lavf internal I/O layer.
+ * To do that, create your own AVIOContext with avio_alloc_context(), passing
+ * your reading callbacks to it. Then set the @em pb field of your
+ * AVFormatContext to newly created AVIOContext.
+ *
+ * Since the format of the opened file is in general not known until after
+ * avformat_open_input() has returned, it is not possible to set demuxer private
+ * options on a preallocated context. Instead, the options should be passed to
+ * avformat_open_input() wrapped in an AVDictionary:
+ * @code
+ * AVDictionary *options = NULL;
+ * av_dict_set(&options, "video_size", "640x480", 0);
+ * av_dict_set(&options, "pixel_format", "rgb24", 0);
+ *
+ * if (avformat_open_input(&s, url, NULL, &options) < 0)
+ *     abort();
+ * av_dict_free(&options);
+ * @endcode
+ * This code passes the private options 'video_size' and 'pixel_format' to the
+ * demuxer. They would be necessary for e.g. the rawvideo demuxer, since it
+ * cannot know how to interpret raw video data otherwise. If the format turns
+ * out to be something different than raw video, those options will not be
+ * recognized by the demuxer and therefore will not be applied. Such unrecognized
+ * options are then returned in the options dictionary (recognized options are
+ * consumed). The calling program can handle such unrecognized options as it
+ * wishes, e.g.
+ * @code
+ * AVDictionaryEntry *e;
+ * if (e = av_dict_get(options, "", NULL, AV_DICT_IGNORE_SUFFIX)) {
+ *     fprintf(stderr, "Option %s not recognized by the demuxer.\n", e->key);
+ *     abort();
+ * }
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * After you have finished reading the file, you must close it with
+ * avformat_close_input(). It will free everything associated with the file.
+ *
+ * @section lavf_decoding_read Reading from an opened file
+ * Reading data from an opened AVFormatContext is done by repeatedly calling
+ * av_read_frame() on it. Each call, if successful, will return an AVPacket
+ * containing encoded data for one AVStream, identified by
+ * AVPacket.stream_index. This packet may be passed straight into the libavcodec
+ * decoding functions avcodec_send_packet() or avcodec_decode_subtitle2() if the
+ * caller wishes to decode the data.
+ *
+ * AVPacket.pts, AVPacket.dts and AVPacket.duration timing information will be
+ * set if known. They may also be unset (i.e. AV_NOPTS_VALUE for
+ * pts/dts, 0 for duration) if the stream does not provide them. The timing
+ * information will be in AVStream.time_base units, i.e. it has to be
+ * multiplied by the timebase to convert them to seconds.
+ *
+ * A packet returned by av_read_frame() is always reference-counted,
+ * i.e. AVPacket.buf is set and the user may keep it indefinitely.
+ * The packet must be freed with av_packet_unref() when it is no
+ * longer needed.
+ *
+ * @section lavf_decoding_seek Seeking
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavf_encoding Muxing
+ * @{
+ * Muxers take encoded data in the form of @ref AVPacket "AVPackets" and write
+ * it into files or other output bytestreams in the specified container format.
+ *
+ * The main API functions for muxing are avformat_write_header() for writing the
+ * file header, av_write_frame() / av_interleaved_write_frame() for writing the
+ * packets and av_write_trailer() for finalizing the file.
+ *
+ * At the beginning of the muxing process, the caller must first call
+ * avformat_alloc_context() to create a muxing context. The caller then sets up
+ * the muxer by filling the various fields in this context:
+ *
+ * - The @ref AVFormatContext.oformat "oformat" field must be set to select the
+ *   muxer that will be used.
+ * - Unless the format is of the AVFMT_NOFILE type, the @ref AVFormatContext.pb
+ *   "pb" field must be set to an opened IO context, either returned from
+ *   avio_open2() or a custom one.
+ * - Unless the format is of the AVFMT_NOSTREAMS type, at least one stream must
+ *   be created with the avformat_new_stream() function. The caller should fill
+ *   the @ref AVStream.codecpar "stream codec parameters" information, such as the
+ *   codec @ref AVCodecParameters.codec_type "type", @ref AVCodecParameters.codec_id
+ *   "id" and other parameters (e.g. width / height, the pixel or sample format,
+ *   etc.) as known. The @ref AVStream.time_base "stream timebase" should
+ *   be set to the timebase that the caller desires to use for this stream (note
+ *   that the timebase actually used by the muxer can be different, as will be
+ *   described later).
+ * - It is advised to manually initialize only the relevant fields in
+ *   AVCodecParameters, rather than using @ref avcodec_parameters_copy() during
+ *   remuxing: there is no guarantee that the codec context values remain valid
+ *   for both input and output format contexts.
+ * - The caller may fill in additional information, such as @ref
+ *   AVFormatContext.metadata "global" or @ref AVStream.metadata "per-stream"
+ *   metadata, @ref AVFormatContext.chapters "chapters", @ref
+ *   AVFormatContext.programs "programs", etc. as described in the
+ *   AVFormatContext documentation. Whether such information will actually be
+ *   stored in the output depends on what the container format and the muxer
+ *   support.
+ *
+ * When the muxing context is fully set up, the caller must call
+ * avformat_write_header() to initialize the muxer internals and write the file
+ * header. Whether anything actually is written to the IO context at this step
+ * depends on the muxer, but this function must always be called. Any muxer
+ * private options must be passed in the options parameter to this function.
+ *
+ * The data is then sent to the muxer by repeatedly calling av_write_frame() or
+ * av_interleaved_write_frame() (consult those functions' documentation for
+ * discussion on the difference between them; only one of them may be used with
+ * a single muxing context, they should not be mixed). Do note that the timing
+ * information on the packets sent to the muxer must be in the corresponding
+ * AVStream's timebase. That timebase is set by the muxer (in the
+ * avformat_write_header() step) and may be different from the timebase
+ * requested by the caller.
+ *
+ * Once all the data has been written, the caller must call av_write_trailer()
+ * to flush any buffered packets and finalize the output file, then close the IO
+ * context (if any) and finally free the muxing context with
+ * avformat_free_context().
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavf_io I/O Read/Write
+ * @{
+ * @section lavf_io_dirlist Directory listing
+ * The directory listing API makes it possible to list files on remote servers.
+ *
+ * Some of possible use cases:
+ * - an "open file" dialog to choose files from a remote location,
+ * - a recursive media finder providing a player with an ability to play all
+ * files from a given directory.
+ *
+ * @subsection lavf_io_dirlist_open Opening a directory
+ * At first, a directory needs to be opened by calling avio_open_dir()
+ * supplied with a URL and, optionally, ::AVDictionary containing
+ * protocol-specific parameters. The function returns zero or positive
+ * integer and allocates AVIODirContext on success.
+ *
+ * @code
+ * AVIODirContext *ctx = NULL;
+ * if (avio_open_dir(&ctx, "smb://example.com/some_dir", NULL) < 0) {
+ *     fprintf(stderr, "Cannot open directory.\n");
+ *     abort();
+ * }
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * This code tries to open a sample directory using smb protocol without
+ * any additional parameters.
+ *
+ * @subsection lavf_io_dirlist_read Reading entries
+ * Each directory's entry (i.e. file, another directory, anything else
+ * within ::AVIODirEntryType) is represented by AVIODirEntry.
+ * Reading consecutive entries from an opened AVIODirContext is done by
+ * repeatedly calling avio_read_dir() on it. Each call returns zero or
+ * positive integer if successful. Reading can be stopped right after the
+ * NULL entry has been read -- it means there are no entries left to be
+ * read. The following code reads all entries from a directory associated
+ * with ctx and prints their names to standard output.
+ * @code
+ * AVIODirEntry *entry = NULL;
+ * for (;;) {
+ *     if (avio_read_dir(ctx, &entry) < 0) {
+ *         fprintf(stderr, "Cannot list directory.\n");
+ *         abort();
+ *     }
+ *     if (!entry)
+ *         break;
+ *     printf("%s\n", entry->name);
+ *     avio_free_directory_entry(&entry);
+ * }
+ * @endcode
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavf_codec Demuxers
+ * @{
+ * @defgroup lavf_codec_native Native Demuxers
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ * @defgroup lavf_codec_wrappers External library wrappers
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ * @}
+ * @defgroup lavf_protos I/O Protocols
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ * @defgroup lavf_internal Internal
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#include <time.h>
+#include <stdio.h>  /* FILE */
+
+#include "libavcodec/codec.h"
+#include "libavcodec/codec_par.h"
+#include "libavcodec/defs.h"
+#include "libavcodec/packet.h"
+
+#include "libavutil/dict.h"
+#include "libavutil/log.h"
+
+#include "avio.h"
+#include "libavformat/version_major.h"
+#ifndef HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H
+/* When included as part of the ffmpeg build, only include the major version
+ * to avoid unnecessary rebuilds. When included externally, keep including
+ * the full version information. */
+#include "libavformat/version.h"
+#endif
+
+struct AVFormatContext;
+struct AVStream;
+
+struct AVDeviceInfoList;
+struct AVDeviceCapabilitiesQuery;
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup metadata_api Public Metadata API
+ * @{
+ * @ingroup libavf
+ * The metadata API allows libavformat to export metadata tags to a client
+ * application when demuxing. Conversely it allows a client application to
+ * set metadata when muxing.
+ *
+ * Metadata is exported or set as pairs of key/value strings in the 'metadata'
+ * fields of the AVFormatContext, AVStream, AVChapter and AVProgram structs
+ * using the @ref lavu_dict "AVDictionary" API. Like all strings in FFmpeg,
+ * metadata is assumed to be UTF-8 encoded Unicode. Note that metadata
+ * exported by demuxers isn't checked to be valid UTF-8 in most cases.
+ *
+ * Important concepts to keep in mind:
+ * -  Keys are unique; there can never be 2 tags with the same key. This is
+ *    also meant semantically, i.e., a demuxer should not knowingly produce
+ *    several keys that are literally different but semantically identical.
+ *    E.g., key=Author5, key=Author6. In this example, all authors must be
+ *    placed in the same tag.
+ * -  Metadata is flat, not hierarchical; there are no subtags. If you
+ *    want to store, e.g., the email address of the child of producer Alice
+ *    and actor Bob, that could have key=alice_and_bobs_childs_email_address.
+ * -  Several modifiers can be applied to the tag name. This is done by
+ *    appending a dash character ('-') and the modifier name in the order
+ *    they appear in the list below -- e.g. foo-eng-sort, not foo-sort-eng.
+ *    -  language -- a tag whose value is localized for a particular language
+ *       is appended with the ISO 639-2/B 3-letter language code.
+ *       For example: Author-ger=Michael, Author-eng=Mike
+ *       The original/default language is in the unqualified "Author" tag.
+ *       A demuxer should set a default if it sets any translated tag.
+ *    -  sorting  -- a modified version of a tag that should be used for
+ *       sorting will have '-sort' appended. E.g. artist="The Beatles",
+ *       artist-sort="Beatles, The".
+ * - Some protocols and demuxers support metadata updates. After a successful
+ *   call to av_read_frame(), AVFormatContext.event_flags or AVStream.event_flags
+ *   will be updated to indicate if metadata changed. In order to detect metadata
+ *   changes on a stream, you need to loop through all streams in the AVFormatContext
+ *   and check their individual event_flags.
+ *
+ * -  Demuxers attempt to export metadata in a generic format, however tags
+ *    with no generic equivalents are left as they are stored in the container.
+ *    Follows a list of generic tag names:
+ *
+ @verbatim
+ album        -- name of the set this work belongs to
+ album_artist -- main creator of the set/album, if different from artist.
+                 e.g. "Various Artists" for compilation albums.
+ artist       -- main creator of the work
+ comment      -- any additional description of the file.
+ composer     -- who composed the work, if different from artist.
+ copyright    -- name of copyright holder.
+ creation_time-- date when the file was created, preferably in ISO 8601.
+ date         -- date when the work was created, preferably in ISO 8601.
+ disc         -- number of a subset, e.g. disc in a multi-disc collection.
+ encoder      -- name/settings of the software/hardware that produced the file.
+ encoded_by   -- person/group who created the file.
+ filename     -- original name of the file.
+ genre        -- <self-evident>.
+ language     -- main language in which the work is performed, preferably
+                 in ISO 639-2 format. Multiple languages can be specified by
+                 separating them with commas.
+ performer    -- artist who performed the work, if different from artist.
+                 E.g for "Also sprach Zarathustra", artist would be "Richard
+                 Strauss" and performer "London Philharmonic Orchestra".
+ publisher    -- name of the label/publisher.
+ service_name     -- name of the service in broadcasting (channel name).
+ service_provider -- name of the service provider in broadcasting.
+ title        -- name of the work.
+ track        -- number of this work in the set, can be in form current/total.
+ variant_bitrate -- the total bitrate of the bitrate variant that the current stream is part of
+ @endverbatim
+ *
+ * Look in the examples section for an application example how to use the Metadata API.
+ *
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/* packet functions */
+
+
+/**
+ * Allocate and read the payload of a packet and initialize its
+ * fields with default values.
+ *
+ * @param s    associated IO context
+ * @param pkt packet
+ * @param size desired payload size
+ * @return >0 (read size) if OK, AVERROR_xxx otherwise
+ */
+int av_get_packet(AVIOContext *s, AVPacket *pkt, int size);
+
+
+/**
+ * Read data and append it to the current content of the AVPacket.
+ * If pkt->size is 0 this is identical to av_get_packet.
+ * Note that this uses av_grow_packet and thus involves a realloc
+ * which is inefficient. Thus this function should only be used
+ * when there is no reasonable way to know (an upper bound of)
+ * the final size.
+ *
+ * @param s    associated IO context
+ * @param pkt packet
+ * @param size amount of data to read
+ * @return >0 (read size) if OK, AVERROR_xxx otherwise, previous data
+ *         will not be lost even if an error occurs.
+ */
+int av_append_packet(AVIOContext *s, AVPacket *pkt, int size);
+
+/*************************************************/
+/* input/output formats */
+
+struct AVCodecTag;
+
+/**
+ * This structure contains the data a format has to probe a file.
+ */
+typedef struct AVProbeData {
+    const char *filename;
+    unsigned char *buf; /**< Buffer must have AVPROBE_PADDING_SIZE of extra allocated bytes filled with zero. */
+    int buf_size;       /**< Size of buf except extra allocated bytes */
+    const char *mime_type; /**< mime_type, when known. */
+} AVProbeData;
+
+#define AVPROBE_SCORE_RETRY (AVPROBE_SCORE_MAX/4)
+#define AVPROBE_SCORE_STREAM_RETRY (AVPROBE_SCORE_MAX/4-1)
+
+#define AVPROBE_SCORE_EXTENSION  50 ///< score for file extension
+#define AVPROBE_SCORE_MIME       75 ///< score for file mime type
+#define AVPROBE_SCORE_MAX       100 ///< maximum score
+
+#define AVPROBE_PADDING_SIZE 32             ///< extra allocated bytes at the end of the probe buffer
+
+/// Demuxer will use avio_open, no opened file should be provided by the caller.
+#define AVFMT_NOFILE        0x0001
+#define AVFMT_NEEDNUMBER    0x0002 /**< Needs '%d' in filename. */
+/**
+ * The muxer/demuxer is experimental and should be used with caution.
+ *
+ * - demuxers: will not be selected automatically by probing, must be specified
+ *             explicitly.
+ */
+#define AVFMT_EXPERIMENTAL  0x0004
+#define AVFMT_SHOW_IDS      0x0008 /**< Show format stream IDs numbers. */
+#define AVFMT_GLOBALHEADER  0x0040 /**< Format wants global header. */
+#define AVFMT_NOTIMESTAMPS  0x0080 /**< Format does not need / have any timestamps. */
+#define AVFMT_GENERIC_INDEX 0x0100 /**< Use generic index building code. */
+#define AVFMT_TS_DISCONT    0x0200 /**< Format allows timestamp discontinuities. Note, muxers always require valid (monotone) timestamps */
+#define AVFMT_VARIABLE_FPS  0x0400 /**< Format allows variable fps. */
+#define AVFMT_NODIMENSIONS  0x0800 /**< Format does not need width/height */
+#define AVFMT_NOSTREAMS     0x1000 /**< Format does not require any streams */
+#define AVFMT_NOBINSEARCH   0x2000 /**< Format does not allow to fall back on binary search via read_timestamp */
+#define AVFMT_NOGENSEARCH   0x4000 /**< Format does not allow to fall back on generic search */
+#define AVFMT_NO_BYTE_SEEK  0x8000 /**< Format does not allow seeking by bytes */
+#define AVFMT_ALLOW_FLUSH  0x10000 /**< Format allows flushing. If not set, the muxer will not receive a NULL packet in the write_packet function. */
+#define AVFMT_TS_NONSTRICT 0x20000 /**< Format does not require strictly
+                                        increasing timestamps, but they must
+                                        still be monotonic */
+#define AVFMT_TS_NEGATIVE  0x40000 /**< Format allows muxing negative
+                                        timestamps. If not set the timestamp
+                                        will be shifted in av_write_frame and
+                                        av_interleaved_write_frame so they
+                                        start from 0.
+                                        The user or muxer can override this through
+                                        AVFormatContext.avoid_negative_ts
+                                        */
+
+#define AVFMT_SEEK_TO_PTS   0x4000000 /**< Seeking is based on PTS */
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavf_encoding
+ * @{
+ */
+typedef struct AVOutputFormat {
+    const char *name;
+    /**
+     * Descriptive name for the format, meant to be more human-readable
+     * than name. You should use the NULL_IF_CONFIG_SMALL() macro
+     * to define it.
+     */
+    const char *long_name;
+    const char *mime_type;
+    const char *extensions; /**< comma-separated filename extensions */
+    /* output support */
+    enum AVCodecID audio_codec;    /**< default audio codec */
+    enum AVCodecID video_codec;    /**< default video codec */
+    enum AVCodecID subtitle_codec; /**< default subtitle codec */
+    /**
+     * can use flags: AVFMT_NOFILE, AVFMT_NEEDNUMBER,
+     * AVFMT_GLOBALHEADER, AVFMT_NOTIMESTAMPS, AVFMT_VARIABLE_FPS,
+     * AVFMT_NODIMENSIONS, AVFMT_NOSTREAMS, AVFMT_ALLOW_FLUSH,
+     * AVFMT_TS_NONSTRICT, AVFMT_TS_NEGATIVE
+     */
+    int flags;
+
+    /**
+     * List of supported codec_id-codec_tag pairs, ordered by "better
+     * choice first". The arrays are all terminated by AV_CODEC_ID_NONE.
+     */
+    const struct AVCodecTag * const *codec_tag;
+
+
+    const AVClass *priv_class; ///< AVClass for the private context
+
+    /*****************************************************************
+     * No fields below this line are part of the public API. They
+     * may not be used outside of libavformat and can be changed and
+     * removed at will.
+     * New public fields should be added right above.
+     *****************************************************************
+     */
+    /**
+     * size of private data so that it can be allocated in the wrapper
+     */
+    int priv_data_size;
+
+    /**
+     * Internal flags. See FF_FMT_FLAG_* in internal.h.
+     */
+    int flags_internal;
+
+    int (*write_header)(struct AVFormatContext *);
+    /**
+     * Write a packet. If AVFMT_ALLOW_FLUSH is set in flags,
+     * pkt can be NULL in order to flush data buffered in the muxer.
+     * When flushing, return 0 if there still is more data to flush,
+     * or 1 if everything was flushed and there is no more buffered
+     * data.
+     */
+    int (*write_packet)(struct AVFormatContext *, AVPacket *pkt);
+    int (*write_trailer)(struct AVFormatContext *);
+    /**
+     * A format-specific function for interleavement.
+     * If unset, packets will be interleaved by dts.
+     *
+     * @param s           An AVFormatContext for output. pkt will be added to
+     *                    resp. taken from its packet buffer.
+     * @param[in,out] pkt A packet to be interleaved if has_packet is set;
+     *                    also used to return packets. If no packet is returned
+     *                    (e.g. on error), pkt is blank on return.
+     * @param flush       1 if no further packets are available as input and
+     *                    all remaining packets should be output.
+     * @param has_packet  If set, pkt contains a packet to be interleaved
+     *                    on input; otherwise pkt is blank on input.
+     * @return 1 if a packet was output, 0 if no packet could be output,
+     *         < 0 if an error occurred
+     */
+    int (*interleave_packet)(struct AVFormatContext *s, AVPacket *pkt,
+                             int flush, int has_packet);
+    /**
+     * Test if the given codec can be stored in this container.
+     *
+     * @return 1 if the codec is supported, 0 if it is not.
+     *         A negative number if unknown.
+     *         MKTAG('A', 'P', 'I', 'C') if the codec is only supported as AV_DISPOSITION_ATTACHED_PIC
+     */
+    int (*query_codec)(enum AVCodecID id, int std_compliance);
+
+    void (*get_output_timestamp)(struct AVFormatContext *s, int stream,
+                                 int64_t *dts, int64_t *wall);
+    /**
+     * Allows sending messages from application to device.
+     */
+    int (*control_message)(struct AVFormatContext *s, int type,
+                           void *data, size_t data_size);
+
+    /**
+     * Write an uncoded AVFrame.
+     *
+     * See av_write_uncoded_frame() for details.
+     *
+     * The library will free *frame afterwards, but the muxer can prevent it
+     * by setting the pointer to NULL.
+     */
+    int (*write_uncoded_frame)(struct AVFormatContext *, int stream_index,
+                               AVFrame **frame, unsigned flags);
+    /**
+     * Returns device list with it properties.
+     * @see avdevice_list_devices() for more details.
+     */
+    int (*get_device_list)(struct AVFormatContext *s, struct AVDeviceInfoList *device_list);
+    enum AVCodecID data_codec; /**< default data codec */
+    /**
+     * Initialize format. May allocate data here, and set any AVFormatContext or
+     * AVStream parameters that need to be set before packets are sent.
+     * This method must not write output.
+     *
+     * Return 0 if streams were fully configured, 1 if not, negative AVERROR on failure
+     *
+     * Any allocations made here must be freed in deinit().
+     */
+    int (*init)(struct AVFormatContext *);
+    /**
+     * Deinitialize format. If present, this is called whenever the muxer is being
+     * destroyed, regardless of whether or not the header has been written.
+     *
+     * If a trailer is being written, this is called after write_trailer().
+     *
+     * This is called if init() fails as well.
+     */
+    void (*deinit)(struct AVFormatContext *);
+    /**
+     * Set up any necessary bitstream filtering and extract any extra data needed
+     * for the global header.
+     *
+     * @note pkt might have been directly forwarded by a meta-muxer; therefore
+     *       pkt->stream_index as well as the pkt's timebase might be invalid.
+     * Return 0 if more packets from this stream must be checked; 1 if not.
+     */
+    int (*check_bitstream)(struct AVFormatContext *s, struct AVStream *st,
+                           const AVPacket *pkt);
+} AVOutputFormat;
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavf_decoding
+ * @{
+ */
+typedef struct AVInputFormat {
+    /**
+     * A comma separated list of short names for the format. New names
+     * may be appended with a minor bump.
+     */
+    const char *name;
+
+    /**
+     * Descriptive name for the format, meant to be more human-readable
+     * than name. You should use the NULL_IF_CONFIG_SMALL() macro
+     * to define it.
+     */
+    const char *long_name;
+
+    /**
+     * Can use flags: AVFMT_NOFILE, AVFMT_NEEDNUMBER, AVFMT_SHOW_IDS,
+     * AVFMT_NOTIMESTAMPS, AVFMT_GENERIC_INDEX, AVFMT_TS_DISCONT, AVFMT_NOBINSEARCH,
+     * AVFMT_NOGENSEARCH, AVFMT_NO_BYTE_SEEK, AVFMT_SEEK_TO_PTS.
+     */
+    int flags;
+
+    /**
+     * If extensions are defined, then no probe is done. You should
+     * usually not use extension format guessing because it is not
+     * reliable enough
+     */
+    const char *extensions;
+
+    const struct AVCodecTag * const *codec_tag;
+
+    const AVClass *priv_class; ///< AVClass for the private context
+
+    /**
+     * Comma-separated list of mime types.
+     * It is used check for matching mime types while probing.
+     * @see av_probe_input_format2
+     */
+    const char *mime_type;
+
+    /*****************************************************************
+     * No fields below this line are part of the public API. They
+     * may not be used outside of libavformat and can be changed and
+     * removed at will.
+     * New public fields should be added right above.
+     *****************************************************************
+     */
+    /**
+     * Raw demuxers store their codec ID here.
+     */
+    int raw_codec_id;
+
+    /**
+     * Size of private data so that it can be allocated in the wrapper.
+     */
+    int priv_data_size;
+
+    /**
+     * Internal flags. See FF_FMT_FLAG_* in internal.h.
+     */
+    int flags_internal;
+
+    /**
+     * Tell if a given file has a chance of being parsed as this format.
+     * The buffer provided is guaranteed to be AVPROBE_PADDING_SIZE bytes
+     * big so you do not have to check for that unless you need more.
+     */
+    int (*read_probe)(const AVProbeData *);
+
+    /**
+     * Read the format header and initialize the AVFormatContext
+     * structure. Return 0 if OK. 'avformat_new_stream' should be
+     * called to create new streams.
+     */
+    int (*read_header)(struct AVFormatContext *);
+
+    /**
+     * Read one packet and put it in 'pkt'. pts and flags are also
+     * set. 'avformat_new_stream' can be called only if the flag
+     * AVFMTCTX_NOHEADER is used and only in the calling thread (not in a
+     * background thread).
+     * @return 0 on success, < 0 on error.
+     *         Upon returning an error, pkt must be unreferenced by the caller.
+     */
+    int (*read_packet)(struct AVFormatContext *, AVPacket *pkt);
+
+    /**
+     * Close the stream. The AVFormatContext and AVStreams are not
+     * freed by this function
+     */
+    int (*read_close)(struct AVFormatContext *);
+
+    /**
+     * Seek to a given timestamp relative to the frames in
+     * stream component stream_index.
+     * @param stream_index Must not be -1.
+     * @param flags Selects which direction should be preferred if no exact
+     *              match is available.
+     * @return >= 0 on success (but not necessarily the new offset)
+     */
+    int (*read_seek)(struct AVFormatContext *,
+                     int stream_index, int64_t timestamp, int flags);
+
+    /**
+     * Get the next timestamp in stream[stream_index].time_base units.
+     * @return the timestamp or AV_NOPTS_VALUE if an error occurred
+     */
+    int64_t (*read_timestamp)(struct AVFormatContext *s, int stream_index,
+                              int64_t *pos, int64_t pos_limit);
+
+    /**
+     * Start/resume playing - only meaningful if using a network-based format
+     * (RTSP).
+     */
+    int (*read_play)(struct AVFormatContext *);
+
+    /**
+     * Pause playing - only meaningful if using a network-based format
+     * (RTSP).
+     */
+    int (*read_pause)(struct AVFormatContext *);
+
+    /**
+     * Seek to timestamp ts.
+     * Seeking will be done so that the point from which all active streams
+     * can be presented successfully will be closest to ts and within min/max_ts.
+     * Active streams are all streams that have AVStream.discard < AVDISCARD_ALL.
+     */
+    int (*read_seek2)(struct AVFormatContext *s, int stream_index, int64_t min_ts, int64_t ts, int64_t max_ts, int flags);
+
+    /**
+     * Returns device list with it properties.
+     * @see avdevice_list_devices() for more details.
+     */
+    int (*get_device_list)(struct AVFormatContext *s, struct AVDeviceInfoList *device_list);
+
+} AVInputFormat;
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+enum AVStreamParseType {
+    AVSTREAM_PARSE_NONE,
+    AVSTREAM_PARSE_FULL,       /**< full parsing and repack */
+    AVSTREAM_PARSE_HEADERS,    /**< Only parse headers, do not repack. */
+    AVSTREAM_PARSE_TIMESTAMPS, /**< full parsing and interpolation of timestamps for frames not starting on a packet boundary */
+    AVSTREAM_PARSE_FULL_ONCE,  /**< full parsing and repack of the first frame only, only implemented for H.264 currently */
+    AVSTREAM_PARSE_FULL_RAW,   /**< full parsing and repack with timestamp and position generation by parser for raw
+                                    this assumes that each packet in the file contains no demuxer level headers and
+                                    just codec level data, otherwise position generation would fail */
+};
+
+typedef struct AVIndexEntry {
+    int64_t pos;
+    int64_t timestamp;        /**<
+                               * Timestamp in AVStream.time_base units, preferably the time from which on correctly decoded frames are available
+                               * when seeking to this entry. That means preferable PTS on keyframe based formats.
+                               * But demuxers can choose to store a different timestamp, if it is more convenient for the implementation or nothing better
+                               * is known
+                               */
+#define AVINDEX_KEYFRAME 0x0001
+#define AVINDEX_DISCARD_FRAME  0x0002    /**
+                                          * Flag is used to indicate which frame should be discarded after decoding.
+                                          */
+    int flags:2;
+    int size:30; //Yeah, trying to keep the size of this small to reduce memory requirements (it is 24 vs. 32 bytes due to possible 8-byte alignment).
+    int min_distance;         /**< Minimum distance between this and the previous keyframe, used to avoid unneeded searching. */
+} AVIndexEntry;
+
+/**
+ * The stream should be chosen by default among other streams of the same type,
+ * unless the user has explicitly specified otherwise.
+ */
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_DEFAULT              (1 << 0)
+/**
+ * The stream is not in original language.
+ *
+ * @note AV_DISPOSITION_ORIGINAL is the inverse of this disposition. At most
+ *       one of them should be set in properly tagged streams.
+ * @note This disposition may apply to any stream type, not just audio.
+ */
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_DUB                  (1 << 1)
+/**
+ * The stream is in original language.
+ *
+ * @see the notes for AV_DISPOSITION_DUB
+ */
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_ORIGINAL             (1 << 2)
+/**
+ * The stream is a commentary track.
+ */
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_COMMENT              (1 << 3)
+/**
+ * The stream contains song lyrics.
+ */
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_LYRICS               (1 << 4)
+/**
+ * The stream contains karaoke audio.
+ */
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_KARAOKE              (1 << 5)
+
+/**
+ * Track should be used during playback by default.
+ * Useful for subtitle track that should be displayed
+ * even when user did not explicitly ask for subtitles.
+ */
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_FORCED               (1 << 6)
+/**
+ * The stream is intended for hearing impaired audiences.
+ */
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_HEARING_IMPAIRED     (1 << 7)
+/**
+ * The stream is intended for visually impaired audiences.
+ */
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_VISUAL_IMPAIRED      (1 << 8)
+/**
+ * The audio stream contains music and sound effects without voice.
+ */
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_CLEAN_EFFECTS        (1 << 9)
+/**
+ * The stream is stored in the file as an attached picture/"cover art" (e.g.
+ * APIC frame in ID3v2). The first (usually only) packet associated with it
+ * will be returned among the first few packets read from the file unless
+ * seeking takes place. It can also be accessed at any time in
+ * AVStream.attached_pic.
+ */
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_ATTACHED_PIC         (1 << 10)
+/**
+ * The stream is sparse, and contains thumbnail images, often corresponding
+ * to chapter markers. Only ever used with AV_DISPOSITION_ATTACHED_PIC.
+ */
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_TIMED_THUMBNAILS     (1 << 11)
+
+/**
+ * The stream is intended to be mixed with a spatial audio track. For example,
+ * it could be used for narration or stereo music, and may remain unchanged by
+ * listener head rotation.
+ */
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_NON_DIEGETIC         (1 << 12)
+
+/**
+ * The subtitle stream contains captions, providing a transcription and possibly
+ * a translation of audio. Typically intended for hearing-impaired audiences.
+ */
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_CAPTIONS             (1 << 16)
+/**
+ * The subtitle stream contains a textual description of the video content.
+ * Typically intended for visually-impaired audiences or for the cases where the
+ * video cannot be seen.
+ */
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_DESCRIPTIONS         (1 << 17)
+/**
+ * The subtitle stream contains time-aligned metadata that is not intended to be
+ * directly presented to the user.
+ */
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_METADATA             (1 << 18)
+/**
+ * The audio stream is intended to be mixed with another stream before
+ * presentation.
+ * Corresponds to mix_type=0 in mpegts.
+ */
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_DEPENDENT            (1 << 19)
+/**
+ * The video stream contains still images.
+ */
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_STILL_IMAGE          (1 << 20)
+
+/**
+ * @return The AV_DISPOSITION_* flag corresponding to disp or a negative error
+ *         code if disp does not correspond to a known stream disposition.
+ */
+int av_disposition_from_string(const char *disp);
+
+/**
+ * @param disposition a combination of AV_DISPOSITION_* values
+ * @return The string description corresponding to the lowest set bit in
+ *         disposition. NULL when the lowest set bit does not correspond
+ *         to a known disposition or when disposition is 0.
+ */
+const char *av_disposition_to_string(int disposition);
+
+/**
+ * Options for behavior on timestamp wrap detection.
+ */
+#define AV_PTS_WRAP_IGNORE      0   ///< ignore the wrap
+#define AV_PTS_WRAP_ADD_OFFSET  1   ///< add the format specific offset on wrap detection
+#define AV_PTS_WRAP_SUB_OFFSET  -1  ///< subtract the format specific offset on wrap detection
+
+/**
+ * Stream structure.
+ * New fields can be added to the end with minor version bumps.
+ * Removal, reordering and changes to existing fields require a major
+ * version bump.
+ * sizeof(AVStream) must not be used outside libav*.
+ */
+typedef struct AVStream {
+#if FF_API_AVSTREAM_CLASS
+    /**
+     * A class for @ref avoptions. Set on stream creation.
+     */
+    const AVClass *av_class;
+#endif
+
+    int index;    /**< stream index in AVFormatContext */
+    /**
+     * Format-specific stream ID.
+     * decoding: set by libavformat
+     * encoding: set by the user, replaced by libavformat if left unset
+     */
+    int id;
+
+    void *priv_data;
+
+    /**
+     * This is the fundamental unit of time (in seconds) in terms
+     * of which frame timestamps are represented.
+     *
+     * decoding: set by libavformat
+     * encoding: May be set by the caller before avformat_write_header() to
+     *           provide a hint to the muxer about the desired timebase. In
+     *           avformat_write_header(), the muxer will overwrite this field
+     *           with the timebase that will actually be used for the timestamps
+     *           written into the file (which may or may not be related to the
+     *           user-provided one, depending on the format).
+     */
+    AVRational time_base;
+
+    /**
+     * Decoding: pts of the first frame of the stream in presentation order, in stream time base.
+     * Only set this if you are absolutely 100% sure that the value you set
+     * it to really is the pts of the first frame.
+     * This may be undefined (AV_NOPTS_VALUE).
+     * @note The ASF header does NOT contain a correct start_time the ASF
+     * demuxer must NOT set this.
+     */
+    int64_t start_time;
+
+    /**
+     * Decoding: duration of the stream, in stream time base.
+     * If a source file does not specify a duration, but does specify
+     * a bitrate, this value will be estimated from bitrate and file size.
+     *
+     * Encoding: May be set by the caller before avformat_write_header() to
+     * provide a hint to the muxer about the estimated duration.
+     */
+    int64_t duration;
+
+    int64_t nb_frames;                 ///< number of frames in this stream if known or 0
+
+    /**
+     * Stream disposition - a combination of AV_DISPOSITION_* flags.
+     * - demuxing: set by libavformat when creating the stream or in
+     *             avformat_find_stream_info().
+     * - muxing: may be set by the caller before avformat_write_header().
+     */
+    int disposition;
+
+    enum AVDiscard discard; ///< Selects which packets can be discarded at will and do not need to be demuxed.
+
+    /**
+     * sample aspect ratio (0 if unknown)
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavformat.
+     */
+    AVRational sample_aspect_ratio;
+
+    AVDictionary *metadata;
+
+    /**
+     * Average framerate
+     *
+     * - demuxing: May be set by libavformat when creating the stream or in
+     *             avformat_find_stream_info().
+     * - muxing: May be set by the caller before avformat_write_header().
+     */
+    AVRational avg_frame_rate;
+
+    /**
+     * For streams with AV_DISPOSITION_ATTACHED_PIC disposition, this packet
+     * will contain the attached picture.
+     *
+     * decoding: set by libavformat, must not be modified by the caller.
+     * encoding: unused
+     */
+    AVPacket attached_pic;
+
+    /**
+     * An array of side data that applies to the whole stream (i.e. the
+     * container does not allow it to change between packets).
+     *
+     * There may be no overlap between the side data in this array and side data
+     * in the packets. I.e. a given side data is either exported by the muxer
+     * (demuxing) / set by the caller (muxing) in this array, then it never
+     * appears in the packets, or the side data is exported / sent through
+     * the packets (always in the first packet where the value becomes known or
+     * changes), then it does not appear in this array.
+     *
+     * - demuxing: Set by libavformat when the stream is created.
+     * - muxing: May be set by the caller before avformat_write_header().
+     *
+     * Freed by libavformat in avformat_free_context().
+     *
+     * @see av_format_inject_global_side_data()
+     */
+    AVPacketSideData *side_data;
+    /**
+     * The number of elements in the AVStream.side_data array.
+     */
+    int            nb_side_data;
+
+    /**
+     * Flags indicating events happening on the stream, a combination of
+     * AVSTREAM_EVENT_FLAG_*.
+     *
+     * - demuxing: may be set by the demuxer in avformat_open_input(),
+     *   avformat_find_stream_info() and av_read_frame(). Flags must be cleared
+     *   by the user once the event has been handled.
+     * - muxing: may be set by the user after avformat_write_header(). to
+     *   indicate a user-triggered event.  The muxer will clear the flags for
+     *   events it has handled in av_[interleaved]_write_frame().
+     */
+    int event_flags;
+/**
+ * - demuxing: the demuxer read new metadata from the file and updated
+ *     AVStream.metadata accordingly
+ * - muxing: the user updated AVStream.metadata and wishes the muxer to write
+ *     it into the file
+ */
+#define AVSTREAM_EVENT_FLAG_METADATA_UPDATED 0x0001
+/**
+ * - demuxing: new packets for this stream were read from the file. This
+ *   event is informational only and does not guarantee that new packets
+ *   for this stream will necessarily be returned from av_read_frame().
+ */
+#define AVSTREAM_EVENT_FLAG_NEW_PACKETS (1 << 1)
+
+    /**
+     * Real base framerate of the stream.
+     * This is the lowest framerate with which all timestamps can be
+     * represented accurately (it is the least common multiple of all
+     * framerates in the stream). Note, this value is just a guess!
+     * For example, if the time base is 1/90000 and all frames have either
+     * approximately 3600 or 1800 timer ticks, then r_frame_rate will be 50/1.
+     */
+    AVRational r_frame_rate;
+
+    /**
+     * Codec parameters associated with this stream. Allocated and freed by
+     * libavformat in avformat_new_stream() and avformat_free_context()
+     * respectively.
+     *
+     * - demuxing: filled by libavformat on stream creation or in
+     *             avformat_find_stream_info()
+     * - muxing: filled by the caller before avformat_write_header()
+     */
+    AVCodecParameters *codecpar;
+
+    /**
+     * Number of bits in timestamps. Used for wrapping control.
+     *
+     * - demuxing: set by libavformat
+     * - muxing: set by libavformat
+     *
+     */
+    int pts_wrap_bits;
+} AVStream;
+
+struct AVCodecParserContext *av_stream_get_parser(const AVStream *s);
+
+#if FF_API_GET_END_PTS
+/**
+ * Returns the pts of the last muxed packet + its duration
+ *
+ * the retuned value is undefined when used with a demuxer.
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int64_t    av_stream_get_end_pts(const AVStream *st);
+#endif
+
+#define AV_PROGRAM_RUNNING 1
+
+/**
+ * New fields can be added to the end with minor version bumps.
+ * Removal, reordering and changes to existing fields require a major
+ * version bump.
+ * sizeof(AVProgram) must not be used outside libav*.
+ */
+typedef struct AVProgram {
+    int            id;
+    int            flags;
+    enum AVDiscard discard;        ///< selects which program to discard and which to feed to the caller
+    unsigned int   *stream_index;
+    unsigned int   nb_stream_indexes;
+    AVDictionary *metadata;
+
+    int program_num;
+    int pmt_pid;
+    int pcr_pid;
+    int pmt_version;
+
+    /*****************************************************************
+     * All fields below this line are not part of the public API. They
+     * may not be used outside of libavformat and can be changed and
+     * removed at will.
+     * New public fields should be added right above.
+     *****************************************************************
+     */
+    int64_t start_time;
+    int64_t end_time;
+
+    int64_t pts_wrap_reference;    ///< reference dts for wrap detection
+    int pts_wrap_behavior;         ///< behavior on wrap detection
+} AVProgram;
+
+#define AVFMTCTX_NOHEADER      0x0001 /**< signal that no header is present
+                                         (streams are added dynamically) */
+#define AVFMTCTX_UNSEEKABLE    0x0002 /**< signal that the stream is definitely
+                                         not seekable, and attempts to call the
+                                         seek function will fail. For some
+                                         network protocols (e.g. HLS), this can
+                                         change dynamically at runtime. */
+
+typedef struct AVChapter {
+    int64_t id;             ///< unique ID to identify the chapter
+    AVRational time_base;   ///< time base in which the start/end timestamps are specified
+    int64_t start, end;     ///< chapter start/end time in time_base units
+    AVDictionary *metadata;
+} AVChapter;
+
+
+/**
+ * Callback used by devices to communicate with application.
+ */
+typedef int (*av_format_control_message)(struct AVFormatContext *s, int type,
+                                         void *data, size_t data_size);
+
+typedef int (*AVOpenCallback)(struct AVFormatContext *s, AVIOContext **pb, const char *url, int flags,
+                              const AVIOInterruptCB *int_cb, AVDictionary **options);
+
+/**
+ * The duration of a video can be estimated through various ways, and this enum can be used
+ * to know how the duration was estimated.
+ */
+enum AVDurationEstimationMethod {
+    AVFMT_DURATION_FROM_PTS,    ///< Duration accurately estimated from PTSes
+    AVFMT_DURATION_FROM_STREAM, ///< Duration estimated from a stream with a known duration
+    AVFMT_DURATION_FROM_BITRATE ///< Duration estimated from bitrate (less accurate)
+};
+
+/**
+ * Format I/O context.
+ * New fields can be added to the end with minor version bumps.
+ * Removal, reordering and changes to existing fields require a major
+ * version bump.
+ * sizeof(AVFormatContext) must not be used outside libav*, use
+ * avformat_alloc_context() to create an AVFormatContext.
+ *
+ * Fields can be accessed through AVOptions (av_opt*),
+ * the name string used matches the associated command line parameter name and
+ * can be found in libavformat/options_table.h.
+ * The AVOption/command line parameter names differ in some cases from the C
+ * structure field names for historic reasons or brevity.
+ */
+typedef struct AVFormatContext {
+    /**
+     * A class for logging and @ref avoptions. Set by avformat_alloc_context().
+     * Exports (de)muxer private options if they exist.
+     */
+    const AVClass *av_class;
+
+    /**
+     * The input container format.
+     *
+     * Demuxing only, set by avformat_open_input().
+     */
+    const struct AVInputFormat *iformat;
+
+    /**
+     * The output container format.
+     *
+     * Muxing only, must be set by the caller before avformat_write_header().
+     */
+    const struct AVOutputFormat *oformat;
+
+    /**
+     * Format private data. This is an AVOptions-enabled struct
+     * if and only if iformat/oformat.priv_class is not NULL.
+     *
+     * - muxing: set by avformat_write_header()
+     * - demuxing: set by avformat_open_input()
+     */
+    void *priv_data;
+
+    /**
+     * I/O context.
+     *
+     * - demuxing: either set by the user before avformat_open_input() (then
+     *             the user must close it manually) or set by avformat_open_input().
+     * - muxing: set by the user before avformat_write_header(). The caller must
+     *           take care of closing / freeing the IO context.
+     *
+     * Do NOT set this field if AVFMT_NOFILE flag is set in
+     * iformat/oformat.flags. In such a case, the (de)muxer will handle
+     * I/O in some other way and this field will be NULL.
+     */
+    AVIOContext *pb;
+
+    /* stream info */
+    /**
+     * Flags signalling stream properties. A combination of AVFMTCTX_*.
+     * Set by libavformat.
+     */
+    int ctx_flags;
+
+    /**
+     * Number of elements in AVFormatContext.streams.
+     *
+     * Set by avformat_new_stream(), must not be modified by any other code.
+     */
+    unsigned int nb_streams;
+    /**
+     * A list of all streams in the file. New streams are created with
+     * avformat_new_stream().
+     *
+     * - demuxing: streams are created by libavformat in avformat_open_input().
+     *             If AVFMTCTX_NOHEADER is set in ctx_flags, then new streams may also
+     *             appear in av_read_frame().
+     * - muxing: streams are created by the user before avformat_write_header().
+     *
+     * Freed by libavformat in avformat_free_context().
+     */
+    AVStream **streams;
+
+    /**
+     * input or output URL. Unlike the old filename field, this field has no
+     * length restriction.
+     *
+     * - demuxing: set by avformat_open_input(), initialized to an empty
+     *             string if url parameter was NULL in avformat_open_input().
+     * - muxing: may be set by the caller before calling avformat_write_header()
+     *           (or avformat_init_output() if that is called first) to a string
+     *           which is freeable by av_free(). Set to an empty string if it
+     *           was NULL in avformat_init_output().
+     *
+     * Freed by libavformat in avformat_free_context().
+     */
+    char *url;
+
+    /**
+     * Position of the first frame of the component, in
+     * AV_TIME_BASE fractional seconds. NEVER set this value directly:
+     * It is deduced from the AVStream values.
+     *
+     * Demuxing only, set by libavformat.
+     */
+    int64_t start_time;
+
+    /**
+     * Duration of the stream, in AV_TIME_BASE fractional
+     * seconds. Only set this value if you know none of the individual stream
+     * durations and also do not set any of them. This is deduced from the
+     * AVStream values if not set.
+     *
+     * Demuxing only, set by libavformat.
+     */
+    int64_t duration;
+
+    /**
+     * Total stream bitrate in bit/s, 0 if not
+     * available. Never set it directly if the file_size and the
+     * duration are known as FFmpeg can compute it automatically.
+     */
+    int64_t bit_rate;
+
+    unsigned int packet_size;
+    int max_delay;
+
+    /**
+     * Flags modifying the (de)muxer behaviour. A combination of AVFMT_FLAG_*.
+     * Set by the user before avformat_open_input() / avformat_write_header().
+     */
+    int flags;
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_GENPTS       0x0001 ///< Generate missing pts even if it requires parsing future frames.
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_IGNIDX       0x0002 ///< Ignore index.
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_NONBLOCK     0x0004 ///< Do not block when reading packets from input.
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_IGNDTS       0x0008 ///< Ignore DTS on frames that contain both DTS & PTS
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_NOFILLIN     0x0010 ///< Do not infer any values from other values, just return what is stored in the container
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_NOPARSE      0x0020 ///< Do not use AVParsers, you also must set AVFMT_FLAG_NOFILLIN as the fillin code works on frames and no parsing -> no frames. Also seeking to frames can not work if parsing to find frame boundaries has been disabled
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_NOBUFFER     0x0040 ///< Do not buffer frames when possible
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_CUSTOM_IO    0x0080 ///< The caller has supplied a custom AVIOContext, don't avio_close() it.
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_DISCARD_CORRUPT  0x0100 ///< Discard frames marked corrupted
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_FLUSH_PACKETS    0x0200 ///< Flush the AVIOContext every packet.
+/**
+ * When muxing, try to avoid writing any random/volatile data to the output.
+ * This includes any random IDs, real-time timestamps/dates, muxer version, etc.
+ *
+ * This flag is mainly intended for testing.
+ */
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_BITEXACT         0x0400
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_SORT_DTS    0x10000 ///< try to interleave outputted packets by dts (using this flag can slow demuxing down)
+#if FF_API_LAVF_PRIV_OPT
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_PRIV_OPT    0x20000 ///< Enable use of private options by delaying codec open (deprecated, does nothing)
+#endif
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_FAST_SEEK   0x80000 ///< Enable fast, but inaccurate seeks for some formats
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_SHORTEST   0x100000 ///< Stop muxing when the shortest stream stops.
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_AUTO_BSF   0x200000 ///< Add bitstream filters as requested by the muxer
+
+    /**
+     * Maximum number of bytes read from input in order to determine stream
+     * properties. Used when reading the global header and in
+     * avformat_find_stream_info().
+     *
+     * Demuxing only, set by the caller before avformat_open_input().
+     *
+     * @note this is \e not  used for determining the \ref AVInputFormat
+     *       "input format"
+     * @sa format_probesize
+     */
+    int64_t probesize;
+
+    /**
+     * Maximum duration (in AV_TIME_BASE units) of the data read
+     * from input in avformat_find_stream_info().
+     * Demuxing only, set by the caller before avformat_find_stream_info().
+     * Can be set to 0 to let avformat choose using a heuristic.
+     */
+    int64_t max_analyze_duration;
+
+    const uint8_t *key;
+    int keylen;
+
+    unsigned int nb_programs;
+    AVProgram **programs;
+
+    /**
+     * Forced video codec_id.
+     * Demuxing: Set by user.
+     */
+    enum AVCodecID video_codec_id;
+
+    /**
+     * Forced audio codec_id.
+     * Demuxing: Set by user.
+     */
+    enum AVCodecID audio_codec_id;
+
+    /**
+     * Forced subtitle codec_id.
+     * Demuxing: Set by user.
+     */
+    enum AVCodecID subtitle_codec_id;
+
+    /**
+     * Maximum amount of memory in bytes to use for the index of each stream.
+     * If the index exceeds this size, entries will be discarded as
+     * needed to maintain a smaller size. This can lead to slower or less
+     * accurate seeking (depends on demuxer).
+     * Demuxers for which a full in-memory index is mandatory will ignore
+     * this.
+     * - muxing: unused
+     * - demuxing: set by user
+     */
+    unsigned int max_index_size;
+
+    /**
+     * Maximum amount of memory in bytes to use for buffering frames
+     * obtained from realtime capture devices.
+     */
+    unsigned int max_picture_buffer;
+
+    /**
+     * Number of chapters in AVChapter array.
+     * When muxing, chapters are normally written in the file header,
+     * so nb_chapters should normally be initialized before write_header
+     * is called. Some muxers (e.g. mov and mkv) can also write chapters
+     * in the trailer.  To write chapters in the trailer, nb_chapters
+     * must be zero when write_header is called and non-zero when
+     * write_trailer is called.
+     * - muxing: set by user
+     * - demuxing: set by libavformat
+     */
+    unsigned int nb_chapters;
+    AVChapter **chapters;
+
+    /**
+     * Metadata that applies to the whole file.
+     *
+     * - demuxing: set by libavformat in avformat_open_input()
+     * - muxing: may be set by the caller before avformat_write_header()
+     *
+     * Freed by libavformat in avformat_free_context().
+     */
+    AVDictionary *metadata;
+
+    /**
+     * Start time of the stream in real world time, in microseconds
+     * since the Unix epoch (00:00 1st January 1970). That is, pts=0 in the
+     * stream was captured at this real world time.
+     * - muxing: Set by the caller before avformat_write_header(). If set to
+     *           either 0 or AV_NOPTS_VALUE, then the current wall-time will
+     *           be used.
+     * - demuxing: Set by libavformat. AV_NOPTS_VALUE if unknown. Note that
+     *             the value may become known after some number of frames
+     *             have been received.
+     */
+    int64_t start_time_realtime;
+
+    /**
+     * The number of frames used for determining the framerate in
+     * avformat_find_stream_info().
+     * Demuxing only, set by the caller before avformat_find_stream_info().
+     */
+    int fps_probe_size;
+
+    /**
+     * Error recognition; higher values will detect more errors but may
+     * misdetect some more or less valid parts as errors.
+     * Demuxing only, set by the caller before avformat_open_input().
+     */
+    int error_recognition;
+
+    /**
+     * Custom interrupt callbacks for the I/O layer.
+     *
+     * demuxing: set by the user before avformat_open_input().
+     * muxing: set by the user before avformat_write_header()
+     * (mainly useful for AVFMT_NOFILE formats). The callback
+     * should also be passed to avio_open2() if it's used to
+     * open the file.
+     */
+    AVIOInterruptCB interrupt_callback;
+
+    /**
+     * Flags to enable debugging.
+     */
+    int debug;
+#define FF_FDEBUG_TS        0x0001
+
+    /**
+     * Maximum buffering duration for interleaving.
+     *
+     * To ensure all the streams are interleaved correctly,
+     * av_interleaved_write_frame() will wait until it has at least one packet
+     * for each stream before actually writing any packets to the output file.
+     * When some streams are "sparse" (i.e. there are large gaps between
+     * successive packets), this can result in excessive buffering.
+     *
+     * This field specifies the maximum difference between the timestamps of the
+     * first and the last packet in the muxing queue, above which libavformat
+     * will output a packet regardless of whether it has queued a packet for all
+     * the streams.
+     *
+     * Muxing only, set by the caller before avformat_write_header().
+     */
+    int64_t max_interleave_delta;
+
+    /**
+     * Allow non-standard and experimental extension
+     * @see AVCodecContext.strict_std_compliance
+     */
+    int strict_std_compliance;
+
+    /**
+     * Flags indicating events happening on the file, a combination of
+     * AVFMT_EVENT_FLAG_*.
+     *
+     * - demuxing: may be set by the demuxer in avformat_open_input(),
+     *   avformat_find_stream_info() and av_read_frame(). Flags must be cleared
+     *   by the user once the event has been handled.
+     * - muxing: may be set by the user after avformat_write_header() to
+     *   indicate a user-triggered event.  The muxer will clear the flags for
+     *   events it has handled in av_[interleaved]_write_frame().
+     */
+    int event_flags;
+/**
+ * - demuxing: the demuxer read new metadata from the file and updated
+ *   AVFormatContext.metadata accordingly
+ * - muxing: the user updated AVFormatContext.metadata and wishes the muxer to
+ *   write it into the file
+ */
+#define AVFMT_EVENT_FLAG_METADATA_UPDATED 0x0001
+
+    /**
+     * Maximum number of packets to read while waiting for the first timestamp.
+     * Decoding only.
+     */
+    int max_ts_probe;
+
+    /**
+     * Avoid negative timestamps during muxing.
+     * Any value of the AVFMT_AVOID_NEG_TS_* constants.
+     * Note, this works better when using av_interleaved_write_frame().
+     * - muxing: Set by user
+     * - demuxing: unused
+     */
+    int avoid_negative_ts;
+#define AVFMT_AVOID_NEG_TS_AUTO             -1 ///< Enabled when required by target format
+#define AVFMT_AVOID_NEG_TS_DISABLED          0 ///< Do not shift timestamps even when they are negative.
+#define AVFMT_AVOID_NEG_TS_MAKE_NON_NEGATIVE 1 ///< Shift timestamps so they are non negative
+#define AVFMT_AVOID_NEG_TS_MAKE_ZERO         2 ///< Shift timestamps so that they start at 0
+
+    /**
+     * Transport stream id.
+     * This will be moved into demuxer private options. Thus no API/ABI compatibility
+     */
+    int ts_id;
+
+    /**
+     * Audio preload in microseconds.
+     * Note, not all formats support this and unpredictable things may happen if it is used when not supported.
+     * - encoding: Set by user
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int audio_preload;
+
+    /**
+     * Max chunk time in microseconds.
+     * Note, not all formats support this and unpredictable things may happen if it is used when not supported.
+     * - encoding: Set by user
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int max_chunk_duration;
+
+    /**
+     * Max chunk size in bytes
+     * Note, not all formats support this and unpredictable things may happen if it is used when not supported.
+     * - encoding: Set by user
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int max_chunk_size;
+
+    /**
+     * forces the use of wallclock timestamps as pts/dts of packets
+     * This has undefined results in the presence of B frames.
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user
+     */
+    int use_wallclock_as_timestamps;
+
+    /**
+     * avio flags, used to force AVIO_FLAG_DIRECT.
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user
+     */
+    int avio_flags;
+
+    /**
+     * The duration field can be estimated through various ways, and this field can be used
+     * to know how the duration was estimated.
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Read by user
+     */
+    enum AVDurationEstimationMethod duration_estimation_method;
+
+    /**
+     * Skip initial bytes when opening stream
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user
+     */
+    int64_t skip_initial_bytes;
+
+    /**
+     * Correct single timestamp overflows
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user
+     */
+    unsigned int correct_ts_overflow;
+
+    /**
+     * Force seeking to any (also non key) frames.
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Set by user
+     */
+    int seek2any;
+
+    /**
+     * Flush the I/O context after each packet.
+     * - encoding: Set by user
+     * - decoding: unused
+     */
+    int flush_packets;
+
+    /**
+     * format probing score.
+     * The maximal score is AVPROBE_SCORE_MAX, its set when the demuxer probes
+     * the format.
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: set by avformat, read by user
+     */
+    int probe_score;
+
+    /**
+     * Maximum number of bytes read from input in order to identify the
+     * \ref AVInputFormat "input format". Only used when the format is not set
+     * explicitly by the caller.
+     *
+     * Demuxing only, set by the caller before avformat_open_input().
+     *
+     * @sa probesize
+     */
+    int format_probesize;
+
+    /**
+     * ',' separated list of allowed decoders.
+     * If NULL then all are allowed
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: set by user
+     */
+    char *codec_whitelist;
+
+    /**
+     * ',' separated list of allowed demuxers.
+     * If NULL then all are allowed
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: set by user
+     */
+    char *format_whitelist;
+
+    /**
+     * IO repositioned flag.
+     * This is set by avformat when the underlaying IO context read pointer
+     * is repositioned, for example when doing byte based seeking.
+     * Demuxers can use the flag to detect such changes.
+     */
+    int io_repositioned;
+
+    /**
+     * Forced video codec.
+     * This allows forcing a specific decoder, even when there are multiple with
+     * the same codec_id.
+     * Demuxing: Set by user
+     */
+    const AVCodec *video_codec;
+
+    /**
+     * Forced audio codec.
+     * This allows forcing a specific decoder, even when there are multiple with
+     * the same codec_id.
+     * Demuxing: Set by user
+     */
+    const AVCodec *audio_codec;
+
+    /**
+     * Forced subtitle codec.
+     * This allows forcing a specific decoder, even when there are multiple with
+     * the same codec_id.
+     * Demuxing: Set by user
+     */
+    const AVCodec *subtitle_codec;
+
+    /**
+     * Forced data codec.
+     * This allows forcing a specific decoder, even when there are multiple with
+     * the same codec_id.
+     * Demuxing: Set by user
+     */
+    const AVCodec *data_codec;
+
+    /**
+     * Number of bytes to be written as padding in a metadata header.
+     * Demuxing: Unused.
+     * Muxing: Set by user via av_format_set_metadata_header_padding.
+     */
+    int metadata_header_padding;
+
+    /**
+     * User data.
+     * This is a place for some private data of the user.
+     */
+    void *opaque;
+
+    /**
+     * Callback used by devices to communicate with application.
+     */
+    av_format_control_message control_message_cb;
+
+    /**
+     * Output timestamp offset, in microseconds.
+     * Muxing: set by user
+     */
+    int64_t output_ts_offset;
+
+    /**
+     * dump format separator.
+     * can be ", " or "\n      " or anything else
+     * - muxing: Set by user.
+     * - demuxing: Set by user.
+     */
+    uint8_t *dump_separator;
+
+    /**
+     * Forced Data codec_id.
+     * Demuxing: Set by user.
+     */
+    enum AVCodecID data_codec_id;
+
+    /**
+     * ',' separated list of allowed protocols.
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: set by user
+     */
+    char *protocol_whitelist;
+
+    /**
+     * A callback for opening new IO streams.
+     *
+     * Whenever a muxer or a demuxer needs to open an IO stream (typically from
+     * avformat_open_input() for demuxers, but for certain formats can happen at
+     * other times as well), it will call this callback to obtain an IO context.
+     *
+     * @param s the format context
+     * @param pb on success, the newly opened IO context should be returned here
+     * @param url the url to open
+     * @param flags a combination of AVIO_FLAG_*
+     * @param options a dictionary of additional options, with the same
+     *                semantics as in avio_open2()
+     * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR code on failure
+     *
+     * @note Certain muxers and demuxers do nesting, i.e. they open one or more
+     * additional internal format contexts. Thus the AVFormatContext pointer
+     * passed to this callback may be different from the one facing the caller.
+     * It will, however, have the same 'opaque' field.
+     */
+    int (*io_open)(struct AVFormatContext *s, AVIOContext **pb, const char *url,
+                   int flags, AVDictionary **options);
+
+    /**
+     * A callback for closing the streams opened with AVFormatContext.io_open().
+     */
+    void (*io_close)(struct AVFormatContext *s, AVIOContext *pb);
+
+    /**
+     * ',' separated list of disallowed protocols.
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: set by user
+     */
+    char *protocol_blacklist;
+
+    /**
+     * The maximum number of streams.
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: set by user
+     */
+    int max_streams;
+
+    /**
+     * Skip duration calcuation in estimate_timings_from_pts.
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: set by user
+     */
+    int skip_estimate_duration_from_pts;
+
+    /**
+     * Maximum number of packets that can be probed
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: set by user
+     */
+    int max_probe_packets;
+
+    /**
+     * A callback for closing the streams opened with AVFormatContext.io_open().
+     *
+     * Using this is preferred over io_close, because this can return an error.
+     * Therefore this callback is used instead of io_close by the generic
+     * libavformat code if io_close is NULL or the default.
+     *
+     * @param s the format context
+     * @param pb IO context to be closed and freed
+     * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR code on failure
+     */
+    int (*io_close2)(struct AVFormatContext *s, AVIOContext *pb);
+} AVFormatContext;
+
+/**
+ * This function will cause global side data to be injected in the next packet
+ * of each stream as well as after any subsequent seek.
+ */
+void av_format_inject_global_side_data(AVFormatContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * Returns the method used to set ctx->duration.
+ *
+ * @return AVFMT_DURATION_FROM_PTS, AVFMT_DURATION_FROM_STREAM, or AVFMT_DURATION_FROM_BITRATE.
+ */
+enum AVDurationEstimationMethod av_fmt_ctx_get_duration_estimation_method(const AVFormatContext* ctx);
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavf_core Core functions
+ * @ingroup libavf
+ *
+ * Functions for querying libavformat capabilities, allocating core structures,
+ * etc.
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Return the LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_INT constant.
+ */
+unsigned avformat_version(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libavformat build-time configuration.
+ */
+const char *avformat_configuration(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libavformat license.
+ */
+const char *avformat_license(void);
+
+/**
+ * Do global initialization of network libraries. This is optional,
+ * and not recommended anymore.
+ *
+ * This functions only exists to work around thread-safety issues
+ * with older GnuTLS or OpenSSL libraries. If libavformat is linked
+ * to newer versions of those libraries, or if you do not use them,
+ * calling this function is unnecessary. Otherwise, you need to call
+ * this function before any other threads using them are started.
+ *
+ * This function will be deprecated once support for older GnuTLS and
+ * OpenSSL libraries is removed, and this function has no purpose
+ * anymore.
+ */
+int avformat_network_init(void);
+
+/**
+ * Undo the initialization done by avformat_network_init. Call it only
+ * once for each time you called avformat_network_init.
+ */
+int avformat_network_deinit(void);
+
+/**
+ * Iterate over all registered muxers.
+ *
+ * @param opaque a pointer where libavformat will store the iteration state. Must
+ *               point to NULL to start the iteration.
+ *
+ * @return the next registered muxer or NULL when the iteration is
+ *         finished
+ */
+const AVOutputFormat *av_muxer_iterate(void **opaque);
+
+/**
+ * Iterate over all registered demuxers.
+ *
+ * @param opaque a pointer where libavformat will store the iteration state.
+ *               Must point to NULL to start the iteration.
+ *
+ * @return the next registered demuxer or NULL when the iteration is
+ *         finished
+ */
+const AVInputFormat *av_demuxer_iterate(void **opaque);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVFormatContext.
+ * avformat_free_context() can be used to free the context and everything
+ * allocated by the framework within it.
+ */
+AVFormatContext *avformat_alloc_context(void);
+
+/**
+ * Free an AVFormatContext and all its streams.
+ * @param s context to free
+ */
+void avformat_free_context(AVFormatContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * Get the AVClass for AVFormatContext. It can be used in combination with
+ * AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ for examining options.
+ *
+ * @see av_opt_find().
+ */
+const AVClass *avformat_get_class(void);
+
+/**
+ * Get the AVClass for AVStream. It can be used in combination with
+ * AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ for examining options.
+ *
+ * @see av_opt_find().
+ */
+const AVClass *av_stream_get_class(void);
+
+/**
+ * Add a new stream to a media file.
+ *
+ * When demuxing, it is called by the demuxer in read_header(). If the
+ * flag AVFMTCTX_NOHEADER is set in s.ctx_flags, then it may also
+ * be called in read_packet().
+ *
+ * When muxing, should be called by the user before avformat_write_header().
+ *
+ * User is required to call avformat_free_context() to clean up the allocation
+ * by avformat_new_stream().
+ *
+ * @param s media file handle
+ * @param c unused, does nothing
+ *
+ * @return newly created stream or NULL on error.
+ */
+AVStream *avformat_new_stream(AVFormatContext *s, const AVCodec *c);
+
+/**
+ * Wrap an existing array as stream side data.
+ *
+ * @param st   stream
+ * @param type side information type
+ * @param data the side data array. It must be allocated with the av_malloc()
+ *             family of functions. The ownership of the data is transferred to
+ *             st.
+ * @param size side information size
+ *
+ * @return zero on success, a negative AVERROR code on failure. On failure,
+ *         the stream is unchanged and the data remains owned by the caller.
+ */
+int av_stream_add_side_data(AVStream *st, enum AVPacketSideDataType type,
+                            uint8_t *data, size_t size);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate new information from stream.
+ *
+ * @param stream stream
+ * @param type   desired side information type
+ * @param size   side information size
+ *
+ * @return pointer to fresh allocated data or NULL otherwise
+ */
+uint8_t *av_stream_new_side_data(AVStream *stream,
+                                 enum AVPacketSideDataType type, size_t size);
+/**
+ * Get side information from stream.
+ *
+ * @param stream stream
+ * @param type   desired side information type
+ * @param size   If supplied, *size will be set to the size of the side data
+ *               or to zero if the desired side data is not present.
+ *
+ * @return pointer to data if present or NULL otherwise
+ */
+uint8_t *av_stream_get_side_data(const AVStream *stream,
+                                 enum AVPacketSideDataType type, size_t *size);
+
+AVProgram *av_new_program(AVFormatContext *s, int id);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVFormatContext for an output format.
+ * avformat_free_context() can be used to free the context and
+ * everything allocated by the framework within it.
+ *
+ * @param ctx           pointee is set to the created format context,
+ *                      or to NULL in case of failure
+ * @param oformat       format to use for allocating the context, if NULL
+ *                      format_name and filename are used instead
+ * @param format_name   the name of output format to use for allocating the
+ *                      context, if NULL filename is used instead
+ * @param filename      the name of the filename to use for allocating the
+ *                      context, may be NULL
+ *
+ * @return  >= 0 in case of success, a negative AVERROR code in case of
+ *          failure
+ */
+int avformat_alloc_output_context2(AVFormatContext **ctx, const AVOutputFormat *oformat,
+                                   const char *format_name, const char *filename);
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavf_decoding
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Find AVInputFormat based on the short name of the input format.
+ */
+const AVInputFormat *av_find_input_format(const char *short_name);
+
+/**
+ * Guess the file format.
+ *
+ * @param pd        data to be probed
+ * @param is_opened Whether the file is already opened; determines whether
+ *                  demuxers with or without AVFMT_NOFILE are probed.
+ */
+const AVInputFormat *av_probe_input_format(const AVProbeData *pd, int is_opened);
+
+/**
+ * Guess the file format.
+ *
+ * @param pd        data to be probed
+ * @param is_opened Whether the file is already opened; determines whether
+ *                  demuxers with or without AVFMT_NOFILE are probed.
+ * @param score_max A probe score larger that this is required to accept a
+ *                  detection, the variable is set to the actual detection
+ *                  score afterwards.
+ *                  If the score is <= AVPROBE_SCORE_MAX / 4 it is recommended
+ *                  to retry with a larger probe buffer.
+ */
+const AVInputFormat *av_probe_input_format2(const AVProbeData *pd,
+                                            int is_opened, int *score_max);
+
+/**
+ * Guess the file format.
+ *
+ * @param is_opened Whether the file is already opened; determines whether
+ *                  demuxers with or without AVFMT_NOFILE are probed.
+ * @param score_ret The score of the best detection.
+ */
+const AVInputFormat *av_probe_input_format3(const AVProbeData *pd,
+                                            int is_opened, int *score_ret);
+
+/**
+ * Probe a bytestream to determine the input format. Each time a probe returns
+ * with a score that is too low, the probe buffer size is increased and another
+ * attempt is made. When the maximum probe size is reached, the input format
+ * with the highest score is returned.
+ *
+ * @param pb             the bytestream to probe
+ * @param fmt            the input format is put here
+ * @param url            the url of the stream
+ * @param logctx         the log context
+ * @param offset         the offset within the bytestream to probe from
+ * @param max_probe_size the maximum probe buffer size (zero for default)
+ *
+ * @return the score in case of success, a negative value corresponding to an
+ *         the maximal score is AVPROBE_SCORE_MAX
+ *         AVERROR code otherwise
+ */
+int av_probe_input_buffer2(AVIOContext *pb, const AVInputFormat **fmt,
+                           const char *url, void *logctx,
+                           unsigned int offset, unsigned int max_probe_size);
+
+/**
+ * Like av_probe_input_buffer2() but returns 0 on success
+ */
+int av_probe_input_buffer(AVIOContext *pb, const AVInputFormat **fmt,
+                          const char *url, void *logctx,
+                          unsigned int offset, unsigned int max_probe_size);
+
+/**
+ * Open an input stream and read the header. The codecs are not opened.
+ * The stream must be closed with avformat_close_input().
+ *
+ * @param ps       Pointer to user-supplied AVFormatContext (allocated by
+ *                 avformat_alloc_context). May be a pointer to NULL, in
+ *                 which case an AVFormatContext is allocated by this
+ *                 function and written into ps.
+ *                 Note that a user-supplied AVFormatContext will be freed
+ *                 on failure.
+ * @param url      URL of the stream to open.
+ * @param fmt      If non-NULL, this parameter forces a specific input format.
+ *                 Otherwise the format is autodetected.
+ * @param options  A dictionary filled with AVFormatContext and demuxer-private
+ *                 options.
+ *                 On return this parameter will be destroyed and replaced with
+ *                 a dict containing options that were not found. May be NULL.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on failure.
+ *
+ * @note If you want to use custom IO, preallocate the format context and set its pb field.
+ */
+int avformat_open_input(AVFormatContext **ps, const char *url,
+                        const AVInputFormat *fmt, AVDictionary **options);
+
+/**
+ * Read packets of a media file to get stream information. This
+ * is useful for file formats with no headers such as MPEG. This
+ * function also computes the real framerate in case of MPEG-2 repeat
+ * frame mode.
+ * The logical file position is not changed by this function;
+ * examined packets may be buffered for later processing.
+ *
+ * @param ic media file handle
+ * @param options  If non-NULL, an ic.nb_streams long array of pointers to
+ *                 dictionaries, where i-th member contains options for
+ *                 codec corresponding to i-th stream.
+ *                 On return each dictionary will be filled with options that were not found.
+ * @return >=0 if OK, AVERROR_xxx on error
+ *
+ * @note this function isn't guaranteed to open all the codecs, so
+ *       options being non-empty at return is a perfectly normal behavior.
+ *
+ * @todo Let the user decide somehow what information is needed so that
+ *       we do not waste time getting stuff the user does not need.
+ */
+int avformat_find_stream_info(AVFormatContext *ic, AVDictionary **options);
+
+/**
+ * Find the programs which belong to a given stream.
+ *
+ * @param ic    media file handle
+ * @param last  the last found program, the search will start after this
+ *              program, or from the beginning if it is NULL
+ * @param s     stream index
+ *
+ * @return the next program which belongs to s, NULL if no program is found or
+ *         the last program is not among the programs of ic.
+ */
+AVProgram *av_find_program_from_stream(AVFormatContext *ic, AVProgram *last, int s);
+
+void av_program_add_stream_index(AVFormatContext *ac, int progid, unsigned int idx);
+
+/**
+ * Find the "best" stream in the file.
+ * The best stream is determined according to various heuristics as the most
+ * likely to be what the user expects.
+ * If the decoder parameter is non-NULL, av_find_best_stream will find the
+ * default decoder for the stream's codec; streams for which no decoder can
+ * be found are ignored.
+ *
+ * @param ic                media file handle
+ * @param type              stream type: video, audio, subtitles, etc.
+ * @param wanted_stream_nb  user-requested stream number,
+ *                          or -1 for automatic selection
+ * @param related_stream    try to find a stream related (eg. in the same
+ *                          program) to this one, or -1 if none
+ * @param decoder_ret       if non-NULL, returns the decoder for the
+ *                          selected stream
+ * @param flags             flags; none are currently defined
+ *
+ * @return  the non-negative stream number in case of success,
+ *          AVERROR_STREAM_NOT_FOUND if no stream with the requested type
+ *          could be found,
+ *          AVERROR_DECODER_NOT_FOUND if streams were found but no decoder
+ *
+ * @note  If av_find_best_stream returns successfully and decoder_ret is not
+ *        NULL, then *decoder_ret is guaranteed to be set to a valid AVCodec.
+ */
+int av_find_best_stream(AVFormatContext *ic,
+                        enum AVMediaType type,
+                        int wanted_stream_nb,
+                        int related_stream,
+                        const AVCodec **decoder_ret,
+                        int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Return the next frame of a stream.
+ * This function returns what is stored in the file, and does not validate
+ * that what is there are valid frames for the decoder. It will split what is
+ * stored in the file into frames and return one for each call. It will not
+ * omit invalid data between valid frames so as to give the decoder the maximum
+ * information possible for decoding.
+ *
+ * On success, the returned packet is reference-counted (pkt->buf is set) and
+ * valid indefinitely. The packet must be freed with av_packet_unref() when
+ * it is no longer needed. For video, the packet contains exactly one frame.
+ * For audio, it contains an integer number of frames if each frame has
+ * a known fixed size (e.g. PCM or ADPCM data). If the audio frames have
+ * a variable size (e.g. MPEG audio), then it contains one frame.
+ *
+ * pkt->pts, pkt->dts and pkt->duration are always set to correct
+ * values in AVStream.time_base units (and guessed if the format cannot
+ * provide them). pkt->pts can be AV_NOPTS_VALUE if the video format
+ * has B-frames, so it is better to rely on pkt->dts if you do not
+ * decompress the payload.
+ *
+ * @return 0 if OK, < 0 on error or end of file. On error, pkt will be blank
+ *         (as if it came from av_packet_alloc()).
+ *
+ * @note pkt will be initialized, so it may be uninitialized, but it must not
+ *       contain data that needs to be freed.
+ */
+int av_read_frame(AVFormatContext *s, AVPacket *pkt);
+
+/**
+ * Seek to the keyframe at timestamp.
+ * 'timestamp' in 'stream_index'.
+ *
+ * @param s            media file handle
+ * @param stream_index If stream_index is (-1), a default stream is selected,
+ *                     and timestamp is automatically converted from
+ *                     AV_TIME_BASE units to the stream specific time_base.
+ * @param timestamp    Timestamp in AVStream.time_base units or, if no stream
+ *                     is specified, in AV_TIME_BASE units.
+ * @param flags        flags which select direction and seeking mode
+ *
+ * @return >= 0 on success
+ */
+int av_seek_frame(AVFormatContext *s, int stream_index, int64_t timestamp,
+                  int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Seek to timestamp ts.
+ * Seeking will be done so that the point from which all active streams
+ * can be presented successfully will be closest to ts and within min/max_ts.
+ * Active streams are all streams that have AVStream.discard < AVDISCARD_ALL.
+ *
+ * If flags contain AVSEEK_FLAG_BYTE, then all timestamps are in bytes and
+ * are the file position (this may not be supported by all demuxers).
+ * If flags contain AVSEEK_FLAG_FRAME, then all timestamps are in frames
+ * in the stream with stream_index (this may not be supported by all demuxers).
+ * Otherwise all timestamps are in units of the stream selected by stream_index
+ * or if stream_index is -1, in AV_TIME_BASE units.
+ * If flags contain AVSEEK_FLAG_ANY, then non-keyframes are treated as
+ * keyframes (this may not be supported by all demuxers).
+ * If flags contain AVSEEK_FLAG_BACKWARD, it is ignored.
+ *
+ * @param s            media file handle
+ * @param stream_index index of the stream which is used as time base reference
+ * @param min_ts       smallest acceptable timestamp
+ * @param ts           target timestamp
+ * @param max_ts       largest acceptable timestamp
+ * @param flags        flags
+ * @return >=0 on success, error code otherwise
+ *
+ * @note This is part of the new seek API which is still under construction.
+ */
+int avformat_seek_file(AVFormatContext *s, int stream_index, int64_t min_ts, int64_t ts, int64_t max_ts, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Discard all internally buffered data. This can be useful when dealing with
+ * discontinuities in the byte stream. Generally works only with formats that
+ * can resync. This includes headerless formats like MPEG-TS/TS but should also
+ * work with NUT, Ogg and in a limited way AVI for example.
+ *
+ * The set of streams, the detected duration, stream parameters and codecs do
+ * not change when calling this function. If you want a complete reset, it's
+ * better to open a new AVFormatContext.
+ *
+ * This does not flush the AVIOContext (s->pb). If necessary, call
+ * avio_flush(s->pb) before calling this function.
+ *
+ * @param s media file handle
+ * @return >=0 on success, error code otherwise
+ */
+int avformat_flush(AVFormatContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * Start playing a network-based stream (e.g. RTSP stream) at the
+ * current position.
+ */
+int av_read_play(AVFormatContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * Pause a network-based stream (e.g. RTSP stream).
+ *
+ * Use av_read_play() to resume it.
+ */
+int av_read_pause(AVFormatContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * Close an opened input AVFormatContext. Free it and all its contents
+ * and set *s to NULL.
+ */
+void avformat_close_input(AVFormatContext **s);
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#define AVSEEK_FLAG_BACKWARD 1 ///< seek backward
+#define AVSEEK_FLAG_BYTE     2 ///< seeking based on position in bytes
+#define AVSEEK_FLAG_ANY      4 ///< seek to any frame, even non-keyframes
+#define AVSEEK_FLAG_FRAME    8 ///< seeking based on frame number
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavf_encoding
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#define AVSTREAM_INIT_IN_WRITE_HEADER 0 ///< stream parameters initialized in avformat_write_header
+#define AVSTREAM_INIT_IN_INIT_OUTPUT  1 ///< stream parameters initialized in avformat_init_output
+
+/**
+ * Allocate the stream private data and write the stream header to
+ * an output media file.
+ *
+ * @param s        Media file handle, must be allocated with
+ *                 avformat_alloc_context().
+ *                 Its \ref AVFormatContext.oformat "oformat" field must be set
+ *                 to the desired output format;
+ *                 Its \ref AVFormatContext.pb "pb" field must be set to an
+ *                 already opened ::AVIOContext.
+ * @param options  An ::AVDictionary filled with AVFormatContext and
+ *                 muxer-private options.
+ *                 On return this parameter will be destroyed and replaced with
+ *                 a dict containing options that were not found. May be NULL.
+ *
+ * @retval AVSTREAM_INIT_IN_WRITE_HEADER On success, if the codec had not already been
+ *                                       fully initialized in avformat_init_output().
+ * @retval AVSTREAM_INIT_IN_INIT_OUTPUT  On success, if the codec had already been fully
+ *                                       initialized in avformat_init_output().
+ * @retval AVERROR                       A negative AVERROR on failure.
+ *
+ * @see av_opt_find, av_dict_set, avio_open, av_oformat_next, avformat_init_output.
+ */
+av_warn_unused_result
+int avformat_write_header(AVFormatContext *s, AVDictionary **options);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate the stream private data and initialize the codec, but do not write the header.
+ * May optionally be used before avformat_write_header() to initialize stream parameters
+ * before actually writing the header.
+ * If using this function, do not pass the same options to avformat_write_header().
+ *
+ * @param s        Media file handle, must be allocated with
+ *                 avformat_alloc_context().
+ *                 Its \ref AVFormatContext.oformat "oformat" field must be set
+ *                 to the desired output format;
+ *                 Its \ref AVFormatContext.pb "pb" field must be set to an
+ *                 already opened ::AVIOContext.
+ * @param options  An ::AVDictionary filled with AVFormatContext and
+ *                 muxer-private options.
+ *                 On return this parameter will be destroyed and replaced with
+ *                 a dict containing options that were not found. May be NULL.
+ *
+ * @retval AVSTREAM_INIT_IN_WRITE_HEADER On success, if the codec requires
+ *                                       avformat_write_header to fully initialize.
+ * @retval AVSTREAM_INIT_IN_INIT_OUTPUT  On success, if the codec has been fully
+ *                                       initialized.
+ * @retval AVERROR                       Anegative AVERROR on failure.
+ *
+ * @see av_opt_find, av_dict_set, avio_open, av_oformat_next, avformat_write_header.
+ */
+av_warn_unused_result
+int avformat_init_output(AVFormatContext *s, AVDictionary **options);
+
+/**
+ * Write a packet to an output media file.
+ *
+ * This function passes the packet directly to the muxer, without any buffering
+ * or reordering. The caller is responsible for correctly interleaving the
+ * packets if the format requires it. Callers that want libavformat to handle
+ * the interleaving should call av_interleaved_write_frame() instead of this
+ * function.
+ *
+ * @param s media file handle
+ * @param pkt The packet containing the data to be written. Note that unlike
+ *            av_interleaved_write_frame(), this function does not take
+ *            ownership of the packet passed to it (though some muxers may make
+ *            an internal reference to the input packet).
+ *            <br>
+ *            This parameter can be NULL (at any time, not just at the end), in
+ *            order to immediately flush data buffered within the muxer, for
+ *            muxers that buffer up data internally before writing it to the
+ *            output.
+ *            <br>
+ *            Packet's @ref AVPacket.stream_index "stream_index" field must be
+ *            set to the index of the corresponding stream in @ref
+ *            AVFormatContext.streams "s->streams".
+ *            <br>
+ *            The timestamps (@ref AVPacket.pts "pts", @ref AVPacket.dts "dts")
+ *            must be set to correct values in the stream's timebase (unless the
+ *            output format is flagged with the AVFMT_NOTIMESTAMPS flag, then
+ *            they can be set to AV_NOPTS_VALUE).
+ *            The dts for subsequent packets passed to this function must be strictly
+ *            increasing when compared in their respective timebases (unless the
+ *            output format is flagged with the AVFMT_TS_NONSTRICT, then they
+ *            merely have to be nondecreasing).  @ref AVPacket.duration
+ *            "duration") should also be set if known.
+ * @return < 0 on error, = 0 if OK, 1 if flushed and there is no more data to flush
+ *
+ * @see av_interleaved_write_frame()
+ */
+int av_write_frame(AVFormatContext *s, AVPacket *pkt);
+
+/**
+ * Write a packet to an output media file ensuring correct interleaving.
+ *
+ * This function will buffer the packets internally as needed to make sure the
+ * packets in the output file are properly interleaved, usually ordered by
+ * increasing dts. Callers doing their own interleaving should call
+ * av_write_frame() instead of this function.
+ *
+ * Using this function instead of av_write_frame() can give muxers advance
+ * knowledge of future packets, improving e.g. the behaviour of the mp4
+ * muxer for VFR content in fragmenting mode.
+ *
+ * @param s media file handle
+ * @param pkt The packet containing the data to be written.
+ *            <br>
+ *            If the packet is reference-counted, this function will take
+ *            ownership of this reference and unreference it later when it sees
+ *            fit. If the packet is not reference-counted, libavformat will
+ *            make a copy.
+ *            The returned packet will be blank (as if returned from
+ *            av_packet_alloc()), even on error.
+ *            <br>
+ *            This parameter can be NULL (at any time, not just at the end), to
+ *            flush the interleaving queues.
+ *            <br>
+ *            Packet's @ref AVPacket.stream_index "stream_index" field must be
+ *            set to the index of the corresponding stream in @ref
+ *            AVFormatContext.streams "s->streams".
+ *            <br>
+ *            The timestamps (@ref AVPacket.pts "pts", @ref AVPacket.dts "dts")
+ *            must be set to correct values in the stream's timebase (unless the
+ *            output format is flagged with the AVFMT_NOTIMESTAMPS flag, then
+ *            they can be set to AV_NOPTS_VALUE).
+ *            The dts for subsequent packets in one stream must be strictly
+ *            increasing (unless the output format is flagged with the
+ *            AVFMT_TS_NONSTRICT, then they merely have to be nondecreasing).
+ *            @ref AVPacket.duration "duration" should also be set if known.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on error.
+ *
+ * @see av_write_frame(), AVFormatContext.max_interleave_delta
+ */
+int av_interleaved_write_frame(AVFormatContext *s, AVPacket *pkt);
+
+/**
+ * Write an uncoded frame to an output media file.
+ *
+ * The frame must be correctly interleaved according to the container
+ * specification; if not, av_interleaved_write_uncoded_frame() must be used.
+ *
+ * See av_interleaved_write_uncoded_frame() for details.
+ */
+int av_write_uncoded_frame(AVFormatContext *s, int stream_index,
+                           AVFrame *frame);
+
+/**
+ * Write an uncoded frame to an output media file.
+ *
+ * If the muxer supports it, this function makes it possible to write an AVFrame
+ * structure directly, without encoding it into a packet.
+ * It is mostly useful for devices and similar special muxers that use raw
+ * video or PCM data and will not serialize it into a byte stream.
+ *
+ * To test whether it is possible to use it with a given muxer and stream,
+ * use av_write_uncoded_frame_query().
+ *
+ * The caller gives up ownership of the frame and must not access it
+ * afterwards.
+ *
+ * @return  >=0 for success, a negative code on error
+ */
+int av_interleaved_write_uncoded_frame(AVFormatContext *s, int stream_index,
+                                       AVFrame *frame);
+
+/**
+ * Test whether a muxer supports uncoded frame.
+ *
+ * @return  >=0 if an uncoded frame can be written to that muxer and stream,
+ *          <0 if not
+ */
+int av_write_uncoded_frame_query(AVFormatContext *s, int stream_index);
+
+/**
+ * Write the stream trailer to an output media file and free the
+ * file private data.
+ *
+ * May only be called after a successful call to avformat_write_header.
+ *
+ * @param s media file handle
+ * @return 0 if OK, AVERROR_xxx on error
+ */
+int av_write_trailer(AVFormatContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * Return the output format in the list of registered output formats
+ * which best matches the provided parameters, or return NULL if
+ * there is no match.
+ *
+ * @param short_name if non-NULL checks if short_name matches with the
+ *                   names of the registered formats
+ * @param filename   if non-NULL checks if filename terminates with the
+ *                   extensions of the registered formats
+ * @param mime_type  if non-NULL checks if mime_type matches with the
+ *                   MIME type of the registered formats
+ */
+const AVOutputFormat *av_guess_format(const char *short_name,
+                                      const char *filename,
+                                      const char *mime_type);
+
+/**
+ * Guess the codec ID based upon muxer and filename.
+ */
+enum AVCodecID av_guess_codec(const AVOutputFormat *fmt, const char *short_name,
+                              const char *filename, const char *mime_type,
+                              enum AVMediaType type);
+
+/**
+ * Get timing information for the data currently output.
+ * The exact meaning of "currently output" depends on the format.
+ * It is mostly relevant for devices that have an internal buffer and/or
+ * work in real time.
+ * @param s          media file handle
+ * @param stream     stream in the media file
+ * @param[out] dts   DTS of the last packet output for the stream, in stream
+ *                   time_base units
+ * @param[out] wall  absolute time when that packet whas output,
+ *                   in microsecond
+ * @retval  0               Success
+ * @retval  AVERROR(ENOSYS) The format does not support it
+ *
+ * @note Some formats or devices may not allow to measure dts and wall
+ *       atomically.
+ */
+int av_get_output_timestamp(struct AVFormatContext *s, int stream,
+                            int64_t *dts, int64_t *wall);
+
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavf_misc Utility functions
+ * @ingroup libavf
+ * @{
+ *
+ * Miscellaneous utility functions related to both muxing and demuxing
+ * (or neither).
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Send a nice hexadecimal dump of a buffer to the specified file stream.
+ *
+ * @param f The file stream pointer where the dump should be sent to.
+ * @param buf buffer
+ * @param size buffer size
+ *
+ * @see av_hex_dump_log, av_pkt_dump2, av_pkt_dump_log2
+ */
+void av_hex_dump(FILE *f, const uint8_t *buf, int size);
+
+/**
+ * Send a nice hexadecimal dump of a buffer to the log.
+ *
+ * @param avcl A pointer to an arbitrary struct of which the first field is a
+ * pointer to an AVClass struct.
+ * @param level The importance level of the message, lower values signifying
+ * higher importance.
+ * @param buf buffer
+ * @param size buffer size
+ *
+ * @see av_hex_dump, av_pkt_dump2, av_pkt_dump_log2
+ */
+void av_hex_dump_log(void *avcl, int level, const uint8_t *buf, int size);
+
+/**
+ * Send a nice dump of a packet to the specified file stream.
+ *
+ * @param f The file stream pointer where the dump should be sent to.
+ * @param pkt packet to dump
+ * @param dump_payload True if the payload must be displayed, too.
+ * @param st AVStream that the packet belongs to
+ */
+void av_pkt_dump2(FILE *f, const AVPacket *pkt, int dump_payload, const AVStream *st);
+
+
+/**
+ * Send a nice dump of a packet to the log.
+ *
+ * @param avcl A pointer to an arbitrary struct of which the first field is a
+ * pointer to an AVClass struct.
+ * @param level The importance level of the message, lower values signifying
+ * higher importance.
+ * @param pkt packet to dump
+ * @param dump_payload True if the payload must be displayed, too.
+ * @param st AVStream that the packet belongs to
+ */
+void av_pkt_dump_log2(void *avcl, int level, const AVPacket *pkt, int dump_payload,
+                      const AVStream *st);
+
+/**
+ * Get the AVCodecID for the given codec tag tag.
+ * If no codec id is found returns AV_CODEC_ID_NONE.
+ *
+ * @param tags list of supported codec_id-codec_tag pairs, as stored
+ * in AVInputFormat.codec_tag and AVOutputFormat.codec_tag
+ * @param tag  codec tag to match to a codec ID
+ */
+enum AVCodecID av_codec_get_id(const struct AVCodecTag * const *tags, unsigned int tag);
+
+/**
+ * Get the codec tag for the given codec id id.
+ * If no codec tag is found returns 0.
+ *
+ * @param tags list of supported codec_id-codec_tag pairs, as stored
+ * in AVInputFormat.codec_tag and AVOutputFormat.codec_tag
+ * @param id   codec ID to match to a codec tag
+ */
+unsigned int av_codec_get_tag(const struct AVCodecTag * const *tags, enum AVCodecID id);
+
+/**
+ * Get the codec tag for the given codec id.
+ *
+ * @param tags list of supported codec_id - codec_tag pairs, as stored
+ * in AVInputFormat.codec_tag and AVOutputFormat.codec_tag
+ * @param id codec id that should be searched for in the list
+ * @param tag A pointer to the found tag
+ * @return 0 if id was not found in tags, > 0 if it was found
+ */
+int av_codec_get_tag2(const struct AVCodecTag * const *tags, enum AVCodecID id,
+                      unsigned int *tag);
+
+int av_find_default_stream_index(AVFormatContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * Get the index for a specific timestamp.
+ *
+ * @param st        stream that the timestamp belongs to
+ * @param timestamp timestamp to retrieve the index for
+ * @param flags if AVSEEK_FLAG_BACKWARD then the returned index will correspond
+ *                 to the timestamp which is <= the requested one, if backward
+ *                 is 0, then it will be >=
+ *              if AVSEEK_FLAG_ANY seek to any frame, only keyframes otherwise
+ * @return < 0 if no such timestamp could be found
+ */
+int av_index_search_timestamp(AVStream *st, int64_t timestamp, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Get the index entry count for the given AVStream.
+ *
+ * @param st stream
+ * @return the number of index entries in the stream
+ */
+int avformat_index_get_entries_count(const AVStream *st);
+
+/**
+ * Get the AVIndexEntry corresponding to the given index.
+ *
+ * @param st          Stream containing the requested AVIndexEntry.
+ * @param idx         The desired index.
+ * @return A pointer to the requested AVIndexEntry if it exists, NULL otherwise.
+ *
+ * @note The pointer returned by this function is only guaranteed to be valid
+ *       until any function that takes the stream or the parent AVFormatContext
+ *       as input argument is called.
+ */
+const AVIndexEntry *avformat_index_get_entry(AVStream *st, int idx);
+
+/**
+ * Get the AVIndexEntry corresponding to the given timestamp.
+ *
+ * @param st          Stream containing the requested AVIndexEntry.
+ * @param wanted_timestamp   Timestamp to retrieve the index entry for.
+ * @param flags       If AVSEEK_FLAG_BACKWARD then the returned entry will correspond
+ *                    to the timestamp which is <= the requested one, if backward
+ *                    is 0, then it will be >=
+ *                    if AVSEEK_FLAG_ANY seek to any frame, only keyframes otherwise.
+ * @return A pointer to the requested AVIndexEntry if it exists, NULL otherwise.
+ *
+ * @note The pointer returned by this function is only guaranteed to be valid
+ *       until any function that takes the stream or the parent AVFormatContext
+ *       as input argument is called.
+ */
+const AVIndexEntry *avformat_index_get_entry_from_timestamp(AVStream *st,
+                                                            int64_t wanted_timestamp,
+                                                            int flags);
+/**
+ * Add an index entry into a sorted list. Update the entry if the list
+ * already contains it.
+ *
+ * @param timestamp timestamp in the time base of the given stream
+ */
+int av_add_index_entry(AVStream *st, int64_t pos, int64_t timestamp,
+                       int size, int distance, int flags);
+
+
+/**
+ * Split a URL string into components.
+ *
+ * The pointers to buffers for storing individual components may be null,
+ * in order to ignore that component. Buffers for components not found are
+ * set to empty strings. If the port is not found, it is set to a negative
+ * value.
+ *
+ * @param proto the buffer for the protocol
+ * @param proto_size the size of the proto buffer
+ * @param authorization the buffer for the authorization
+ * @param authorization_size the size of the authorization buffer
+ * @param hostname the buffer for the host name
+ * @param hostname_size the size of the hostname buffer
+ * @param port_ptr a pointer to store the port number in
+ * @param path the buffer for the path
+ * @param path_size the size of the path buffer
+ * @param url the URL to split
+ */
+void av_url_split(char *proto,         int proto_size,
+                  char *authorization, int authorization_size,
+                  char *hostname,      int hostname_size,
+                  int *port_ptr,
+                  char *path,          int path_size,
+                  const char *url);
+
+
+/**
+ * Print detailed information about the input or output format, such as
+ * duration, bitrate, streams, container, programs, metadata, side data,
+ * codec and time base.
+ *
+ * @param ic        the context to analyze
+ * @param index     index of the stream to dump information about
+ * @param url       the URL to print, such as source or destination file
+ * @param is_output Select whether the specified context is an input(0) or output(1)
+ */
+void av_dump_format(AVFormatContext *ic,
+                    int index,
+                    const char *url,
+                    int is_output);
+
+
+#define AV_FRAME_FILENAME_FLAGS_MULTIPLE 1 ///< Allow multiple %d
+
+/**
+ * Return in 'buf' the path with '%d' replaced by a number.
+ *
+ * Also handles the '%0nd' format where 'n' is the total number
+ * of digits and '%%'.
+ *
+ * @param buf destination buffer
+ * @param buf_size destination buffer size
+ * @param path numbered sequence string
+ * @param number frame number
+ * @param flags AV_FRAME_FILENAME_FLAGS_*
+ * @return 0 if OK, -1 on format error
+ */
+int av_get_frame_filename2(char *buf, int buf_size,
+                          const char *path, int number, int flags);
+
+int av_get_frame_filename(char *buf, int buf_size,
+                          const char *path, int number);
+
+/**
+ * Check whether filename actually is a numbered sequence generator.
+ *
+ * @param filename possible numbered sequence string
+ * @return 1 if a valid numbered sequence string, 0 otherwise
+ */
+int av_filename_number_test(const char *filename);
+
+/**
+ * Generate an SDP for an RTP session.
+ *
+ * Note, this overwrites the id values of AVStreams in the muxer contexts
+ * for getting unique dynamic payload types.
+ *
+ * @param ac array of AVFormatContexts describing the RTP streams. If the
+ *           array is composed by only one context, such context can contain
+ *           multiple AVStreams (one AVStream per RTP stream). Otherwise,
+ *           all the contexts in the array (an AVCodecContext per RTP stream)
+ *           must contain only one AVStream.
+ * @param n_files number of AVCodecContexts contained in ac
+ * @param buf buffer where the SDP will be stored (must be allocated by
+ *            the caller)
+ * @param size the size of the buffer
+ * @return 0 if OK, AVERROR_xxx on error
+ */
+int av_sdp_create(AVFormatContext *ac[], int n_files, char *buf, int size);
+
+/**
+ * Return a positive value if the given filename has one of the given
+ * extensions, 0 otherwise.
+ *
+ * @param filename   file name to check against the given extensions
+ * @param extensions a comma-separated list of filename extensions
+ */
+int av_match_ext(const char *filename, const char *extensions);
+
+/**
+ * Test if the given container can store a codec.
+ *
+ * @param ofmt           container to check for compatibility
+ * @param codec_id       codec to potentially store in container
+ * @param std_compliance standards compliance level, one of FF_COMPLIANCE_*
+ *
+ * @return 1 if codec with ID codec_id can be stored in ofmt, 0 if it cannot.
+ *         A negative number if this information is not available.
+ */
+int avformat_query_codec(const AVOutputFormat *ofmt, enum AVCodecID codec_id,
+                         int std_compliance);
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup riff_fourcc RIFF FourCCs
+ * @{
+ * Get the tables mapping RIFF FourCCs to libavcodec AVCodecIDs. The tables are
+ * meant to be passed to av_codec_get_id()/av_codec_get_tag() as in the
+ * following code:
+ * @code
+ * uint32_t tag = MKTAG('H', '2', '6', '4');
+ * const struct AVCodecTag *table[] = { avformat_get_riff_video_tags(), 0 };
+ * enum AVCodecID id = av_codec_get_id(table, tag);
+ * @endcode
+ */
+/**
+ * @return the table mapping RIFF FourCCs for video to libavcodec AVCodecID.
+ */
+const struct AVCodecTag *avformat_get_riff_video_tags(void);
+/**
+ * @return the table mapping RIFF FourCCs for audio to AVCodecID.
+ */
+const struct AVCodecTag *avformat_get_riff_audio_tags(void);
+/**
+ * @return the table mapping MOV FourCCs for video to libavcodec AVCodecID.
+ */
+const struct AVCodecTag *avformat_get_mov_video_tags(void);
+/**
+ * @return the table mapping MOV FourCCs for audio to AVCodecID.
+ */
+const struct AVCodecTag *avformat_get_mov_audio_tags(void);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Guess the sample aspect ratio of a frame, based on both the stream and the
+ * frame aspect ratio.
+ *
+ * Since the frame aspect ratio is set by the codec but the stream aspect ratio
+ * is set by the demuxer, these two may not be equal. This function tries to
+ * return the value that you should use if you would like to display the frame.
+ *
+ * Basic logic is to use the stream aspect ratio if it is set to something sane
+ * otherwise use the frame aspect ratio. This way a container setting, which is
+ * usually easy to modify can override the coded value in the frames.
+ *
+ * @param format the format context which the stream is part of
+ * @param stream the stream which the frame is part of
+ * @param frame the frame with the aspect ratio to be determined
+ * @return the guessed (valid) sample_aspect_ratio, 0/1 if no idea
+ */
+AVRational av_guess_sample_aspect_ratio(AVFormatContext *format, AVStream *stream, AVFrame *frame);
+
+/**
+ * Guess the frame rate, based on both the container and codec information.
+ *
+ * @param ctx the format context which the stream is part of
+ * @param stream the stream which the frame is part of
+ * @param frame the frame for which the frame rate should be determined, may be NULL
+ * @return the guessed (valid) frame rate, 0/1 if no idea
+ */
+AVRational av_guess_frame_rate(AVFormatContext *ctx, AVStream *stream, AVFrame *frame);
+
+/**
+ * Check if the stream st contained in s is matched by the stream specifier
+ * spec.
+ *
+ * See the "stream specifiers" chapter in the documentation for the syntax
+ * of spec.
+ *
+ * @return  >0 if st is matched by spec;
+ *          0  if st is not matched by spec;
+ *          AVERROR code if spec is invalid
+ *
+ * @note  A stream specifier can match several streams in the format.
+ */
+int avformat_match_stream_specifier(AVFormatContext *s, AVStream *st,
+                                    const char *spec);
+
+int avformat_queue_attached_pictures(AVFormatContext *s);
+
+enum AVTimebaseSource {
+    AVFMT_TBCF_AUTO = -1,
+    AVFMT_TBCF_DECODER,
+    AVFMT_TBCF_DEMUXER,
+#if FF_API_R_FRAME_RATE
+    AVFMT_TBCF_R_FRAMERATE,
+#endif
+};
+
+/**
+ * Transfer internal timing information from one stream to another.
+ *
+ * This function is useful when doing stream copy.
+ *
+ * @param ofmt     target output format for ost
+ * @param ost      output stream which needs timings copy and adjustments
+ * @param ist      reference input stream to copy timings from
+ * @param copy_tb  define from where the stream codec timebase needs to be imported
+ */
+int avformat_transfer_internal_stream_timing_info(const AVOutputFormat *ofmt,
+                                                  AVStream *ost, const AVStream *ist,
+                                                  enum AVTimebaseSource copy_tb);
+
+/**
+ * Get the internal codec timebase from a stream.
+ *
+ * @param st  input stream to extract the timebase from
+ */
+AVRational av_stream_get_codec_timebase(const AVStream *st);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVFORMAT_AVFORMAT_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavformat/avio.h b/dependencies/include/libavformat/avio.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4bf6b1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavformat/avio.h
@@ -0,0 +1,847 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2001 Fabrice Bellard
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+#ifndef AVFORMAT_AVIO_H
+#define AVFORMAT_AVIO_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavf_io
+ * Buffered I/O operations
+ */
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+
+#include "libavutil/attributes.h"
+#include "libavutil/dict.h"
+#include "libavutil/log.h"
+
+#include "libavformat/version_major.h"
+
+/**
+ * Seeking works like for a local file.
+ */
+#define AVIO_SEEKABLE_NORMAL (1 << 0)
+
+/**
+ * Seeking by timestamp with avio_seek_time() is possible.
+ */
+#define AVIO_SEEKABLE_TIME   (1 << 1)
+
+/**
+ * Callback for checking whether to abort blocking functions.
+ * AVERROR_EXIT is returned in this case by the interrupted
+ * function. During blocking operations, callback is called with
+ * opaque as parameter. If the callback returns 1, the
+ * blocking operation will be aborted.
+ *
+ * No members can be added to this struct without a major bump, if
+ * new elements have been added after this struct in AVFormatContext
+ * or AVIOContext.
+ */
+typedef struct AVIOInterruptCB {
+    int (*callback)(void*);
+    void *opaque;
+} AVIOInterruptCB;
+
+/**
+ * Directory entry types.
+ */
+enum AVIODirEntryType {
+    AVIO_ENTRY_UNKNOWN,
+    AVIO_ENTRY_BLOCK_DEVICE,
+    AVIO_ENTRY_CHARACTER_DEVICE,
+    AVIO_ENTRY_DIRECTORY,
+    AVIO_ENTRY_NAMED_PIPE,
+    AVIO_ENTRY_SYMBOLIC_LINK,
+    AVIO_ENTRY_SOCKET,
+    AVIO_ENTRY_FILE,
+    AVIO_ENTRY_SERVER,
+    AVIO_ENTRY_SHARE,
+    AVIO_ENTRY_WORKGROUP,
+};
+
+/**
+ * Describes single entry of the directory.
+ *
+ * Only name and type fields are guaranteed be set.
+ * Rest of fields are protocol or/and platform dependent and might be unknown.
+ */
+typedef struct AVIODirEntry {
+    char *name;                           /**< Filename */
+    int type;                             /**< Type of the entry */
+    int utf8;                             /**< Set to 1 when name is encoded with UTF-8, 0 otherwise.
+                                               Name can be encoded with UTF-8 even though 0 is set. */
+    int64_t size;                         /**< File size in bytes, -1 if unknown. */
+    int64_t modification_timestamp;       /**< Time of last modification in microseconds since unix
+                                               epoch, -1 if unknown. */
+    int64_t access_timestamp;             /**< Time of last access in microseconds since unix epoch,
+                                               -1 if unknown. */
+    int64_t status_change_timestamp;      /**< Time of last status change in microseconds since unix
+                                               epoch, -1 if unknown. */
+    int64_t user_id;                      /**< User ID of owner, -1 if unknown. */
+    int64_t group_id;                     /**< Group ID of owner, -1 if unknown. */
+    int64_t filemode;                     /**< Unix file mode, -1 if unknown. */
+} AVIODirEntry;
+
+#if FF_API_AVIODIRCONTEXT
+typedef struct AVIODirContext {
+    struct URLContext *url_context;
+} AVIODirContext;
+#else
+typedef struct AVIODirContext AVIODirContext;
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Different data types that can be returned via the AVIO
+ * write_data_type callback.
+ */
+enum AVIODataMarkerType {
+    /**
+     * Header data; this needs to be present for the stream to be decodeable.
+     */
+    AVIO_DATA_MARKER_HEADER,
+    /**
+     * A point in the output bytestream where a decoder can start decoding
+     * (i.e. a keyframe). A demuxer/decoder given the data flagged with
+     * AVIO_DATA_MARKER_HEADER, followed by any AVIO_DATA_MARKER_SYNC_POINT,
+     * should give decodeable results.
+     */
+    AVIO_DATA_MARKER_SYNC_POINT,
+    /**
+     * A point in the output bytestream where a demuxer can start parsing
+     * (for non self synchronizing bytestream formats). That is, any
+     * non-keyframe packet start point.
+     */
+    AVIO_DATA_MARKER_BOUNDARY_POINT,
+    /**
+     * This is any, unlabelled data. It can either be a muxer not marking
+     * any positions at all, it can be an actual boundary/sync point
+     * that the muxer chooses not to mark, or a later part of a packet/fragment
+     * that is cut into multiple write callbacks due to limited IO buffer size.
+     */
+    AVIO_DATA_MARKER_UNKNOWN,
+    /**
+     * Trailer data, which doesn't contain actual content, but only for
+     * finalizing the output file.
+     */
+    AVIO_DATA_MARKER_TRAILER,
+    /**
+     * A point in the output bytestream where the underlying AVIOContext might
+     * flush the buffer depending on latency or buffering requirements. Typically
+     * means the end of a packet.
+     */
+    AVIO_DATA_MARKER_FLUSH_POINT,
+};
+
+/**
+ * Bytestream IO Context.
+ * New public fields can be added with minor version bumps.
+ * Removal, reordering and changes to existing public fields require
+ * a major version bump.
+ * sizeof(AVIOContext) must not be used outside libav*.
+ *
+ * @note None of the function pointers in AVIOContext should be called
+ *       directly, they should only be set by the client application
+ *       when implementing custom I/O. Normally these are set to the
+ *       function pointers specified in avio_alloc_context()
+ */
+typedef struct AVIOContext {
+    /**
+     * A class for private options.
+     *
+     * If this AVIOContext is created by avio_open2(), av_class is set and
+     * passes the options down to protocols.
+     *
+     * If this AVIOContext is manually allocated, then av_class may be set by
+     * the caller.
+     *
+     * warning -- this field can be NULL, be sure to not pass this AVIOContext
+     * to any av_opt_* functions in that case.
+     */
+    const AVClass *av_class;
+
+    /*
+     * The following shows the relationship between buffer, buf_ptr,
+     * buf_ptr_max, buf_end, buf_size, and pos, when reading and when writing
+     * (since AVIOContext is used for both):
+     *
+     **********************************************************************************
+     *                                   READING
+     **********************************************************************************
+     *
+     *                            |              buffer_size              |
+     *                            |---------------------------------------|
+     *                            |                                       |
+     *
+     *                         buffer          buf_ptr       buf_end
+     *                            +---------------+-----------------------+
+     *                            |/ / / / / / / /|/ / / / / / /|         |
+     *  read buffer:              |/ / consumed / | to be read /|         |
+     *                            |/ / / / / / / /|/ / / / / / /|         |
+     *                            +---------------+-----------------------+
+     *
+     *                                                         pos
+     *              +-------------------------------------------+-----------------+
+     *  input file: |                                           |                 |
+     *              +-------------------------------------------+-----------------+
+     *
+     *
+     **********************************************************************************
+     *                                   WRITING
+     **********************************************************************************
+     *
+     *                             |          buffer_size                 |
+     *                             |--------------------------------------|
+     *                             |                                      |
+     *
+     *                                                buf_ptr_max
+     *                          buffer                 (buf_ptr)       buf_end
+     *                             +-----------------------+--------------+
+     *                             |/ / / / / / / / / / / /|              |
+     *  write buffer:              | / / to be flushed / / |              |
+     *                             |/ / / / / / / / / / / /|              |
+     *                             +-----------------------+--------------+
+     *                               buf_ptr can be in this
+     *                               due to a backward seek
+     *
+     *                            pos
+     *               +-------------+----------------------------------------------+
+     *  output file: |             |                                              |
+     *               +-------------+----------------------------------------------+
+     *
+     */
+    unsigned char *buffer;  /**< Start of the buffer. */
+    int buffer_size;        /**< Maximum buffer size */
+    unsigned char *buf_ptr; /**< Current position in the buffer */
+    unsigned char *buf_end; /**< End of the data, may be less than
+                                 buffer+buffer_size if the read function returned
+                                 less data than requested, e.g. for streams where
+                                 no more data has been received yet. */
+    void *opaque;           /**< A private pointer, passed to the read/write/seek/...
+                                 functions. */
+    int (*read_packet)(void *opaque, uint8_t *buf, int buf_size);
+    int (*write_packet)(void *opaque, uint8_t *buf, int buf_size);
+    int64_t (*seek)(void *opaque, int64_t offset, int whence);
+    int64_t pos;            /**< position in the file of the current buffer */
+    int eof_reached;        /**< true if was unable to read due to error or eof */
+    int error;              /**< contains the error code or 0 if no error happened */
+    int write_flag;         /**< true if open for writing */
+    int max_packet_size;
+    int min_packet_size;    /**< Try to buffer at least this amount of data
+                                 before flushing it. */
+    unsigned long checksum;
+    unsigned char *checksum_ptr;
+    unsigned long (*update_checksum)(unsigned long checksum, const uint8_t *buf, unsigned int size);
+    /**
+     * Pause or resume playback for network streaming protocols - e.g. MMS.
+     */
+    int (*read_pause)(void *opaque, int pause);
+    /**
+     * Seek to a given timestamp in stream with the specified stream_index.
+     * Needed for some network streaming protocols which don't support seeking
+     * to byte position.
+     */
+    int64_t (*read_seek)(void *opaque, int stream_index,
+                         int64_t timestamp, int flags);
+    /**
+     * A combination of AVIO_SEEKABLE_ flags or 0 when the stream is not seekable.
+     */
+    int seekable;
+
+    /**
+     * avio_read and avio_write should if possible be satisfied directly
+     * instead of going through a buffer, and avio_seek will always
+     * call the underlying seek function directly.
+     */
+    int direct;
+
+    /**
+     * ',' separated list of allowed protocols.
+     */
+    const char *protocol_whitelist;
+
+    /**
+     * ',' separated list of disallowed protocols.
+     */
+    const char *protocol_blacklist;
+
+    /**
+     * A callback that is used instead of write_packet.
+     */
+    int (*write_data_type)(void *opaque, uint8_t *buf, int buf_size,
+                           enum AVIODataMarkerType type, int64_t time);
+    /**
+     * If set, don't call write_data_type separately for AVIO_DATA_MARKER_BOUNDARY_POINT,
+     * but ignore them and treat them as AVIO_DATA_MARKER_UNKNOWN (to avoid needlessly
+     * small chunks of data returned from the callback).
+     */
+    int ignore_boundary_point;
+
+#if FF_API_AVIOCONTEXT_WRITTEN
+    /**
+     * @deprecated field utilized privately by libavformat. For a public
+     *             statistic of how many bytes were written out, see
+     *             AVIOContext::bytes_written.
+     */
+    attribute_deprecated
+    int64_t written;
+#endif
+
+    /**
+     * Maximum reached position before a backward seek in the write buffer,
+     * used keeping track of already written data for a later flush.
+     */
+    unsigned char *buf_ptr_max;
+
+    /**
+     * Read-only statistic of bytes read for this AVIOContext.
+     */
+    int64_t bytes_read;
+
+    /**
+     * Read-only statistic of bytes written for this AVIOContext.
+     */
+    int64_t bytes_written;
+} AVIOContext;
+
+/**
+ * Return the name of the protocol that will handle the passed URL.
+ *
+ * NULL is returned if no protocol could be found for the given URL.
+ *
+ * @return Name of the protocol or NULL.
+ */
+const char *avio_find_protocol_name(const char *url);
+
+/**
+ * Return AVIO_FLAG_* access flags corresponding to the access permissions
+ * of the resource in url, or a negative value corresponding to an
+ * AVERROR code in case of failure. The returned access flags are
+ * masked by the value in flags.
+ *
+ * @note This function is intrinsically unsafe, in the sense that the
+ * checked resource may change its existence or permission status from
+ * one call to another. Thus you should not trust the returned value,
+ * unless you are sure that no other processes are accessing the
+ * checked resource.
+ */
+int avio_check(const char *url, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Open directory for reading.
+ *
+ * @param s       directory read context. Pointer to a NULL pointer must be passed.
+ * @param url     directory to be listed.
+ * @param options A dictionary filled with protocol-private options. On return
+ *                this parameter will be destroyed and replaced with a dictionary
+ *                containing options that were not found. May be NULL.
+ * @return >=0 on success or negative on error.
+ */
+int avio_open_dir(AVIODirContext **s, const char *url, AVDictionary **options);
+
+/**
+ * Get next directory entry.
+ *
+ * Returned entry must be freed with avio_free_directory_entry(). In particular
+ * it may outlive AVIODirContext.
+ *
+ * @param s         directory read context.
+ * @param[out] next next entry or NULL when no more entries.
+ * @return >=0 on success or negative on error. End of list is not considered an
+ *             error.
+ */
+int avio_read_dir(AVIODirContext *s, AVIODirEntry **next);
+
+/**
+ * Close directory.
+ *
+ * @note Entries created using avio_read_dir() are not deleted and must be
+ * freeded with avio_free_directory_entry().
+ *
+ * @param s         directory read context.
+ * @return >=0 on success or negative on error.
+ */
+int avio_close_dir(AVIODirContext **s);
+
+/**
+ * Free entry allocated by avio_read_dir().
+ *
+ * @param entry entry to be freed.
+ */
+void avio_free_directory_entry(AVIODirEntry **entry);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate and initialize an AVIOContext for buffered I/O. It must be later
+ * freed with avio_context_free().
+ *
+ * @param buffer Memory block for input/output operations via AVIOContext.
+ *        The buffer must be allocated with av_malloc() and friends.
+ *        It may be freed and replaced with a new buffer by libavformat.
+ *        AVIOContext.buffer holds the buffer currently in use,
+ *        which must be later freed with av_free().
+ * @param buffer_size The buffer size is very important for performance.
+ *        For protocols with fixed blocksize it should be set to this blocksize.
+ *        For others a typical size is a cache page, e.g. 4kb.
+ * @param write_flag Set to 1 if the buffer should be writable, 0 otherwise.
+ * @param opaque An opaque pointer to user-specific data.
+ * @param read_packet  A function for refilling the buffer, may be NULL.
+ *                     For stream protocols, must never return 0 but rather
+ *                     a proper AVERROR code.
+ * @param write_packet A function for writing the buffer contents, may be NULL.
+ *        The function may not change the input buffers content.
+ * @param seek A function for seeking to specified byte position, may be NULL.
+ *
+ * @return Allocated AVIOContext or NULL on failure.
+ */
+AVIOContext *avio_alloc_context(
+                  unsigned char *buffer,
+                  int buffer_size,
+                  int write_flag,
+                  void *opaque,
+                  int (*read_packet)(void *opaque, uint8_t *buf, int buf_size),
+                  int (*write_packet)(void *opaque, uint8_t *buf, int buf_size),
+                  int64_t (*seek)(void *opaque, int64_t offset, int whence));
+
+/**
+ * Free the supplied IO context and everything associated with it.
+ *
+ * @param s Double pointer to the IO context. This function will write NULL
+ * into s.
+ */
+void avio_context_free(AVIOContext **s);
+
+void avio_w8(AVIOContext *s, int b);
+void avio_write(AVIOContext *s, const unsigned char *buf, int size);
+void avio_wl64(AVIOContext *s, uint64_t val);
+void avio_wb64(AVIOContext *s, uint64_t val);
+void avio_wl32(AVIOContext *s, unsigned int val);
+void avio_wb32(AVIOContext *s, unsigned int val);
+void avio_wl24(AVIOContext *s, unsigned int val);
+void avio_wb24(AVIOContext *s, unsigned int val);
+void avio_wl16(AVIOContext *s, unsigned int val);
+void avio_wb16(AVIOContext *s, unsigned int val);
+
+/**
+ * Write a NULL-terminated string.
+ * @return number of bytes written.
+ */
+int avio_put_str(AVIOContext *s, const char *str);
+
+/**
+ * Convert an UTF-8 string to UTF-16LE and write it.
+ * @param s the AVIOContext
+ * @param str NULL-terminated UTF-8 string
+ *
+ * @return number of bytes written.
+ */
+int avio_put_str16le(AVIOContext *s, const char *str);
+
+/**
+ * Convert an UTF-8 string to UTF-16BE and write it.
+ * @param s the AVIOContext
+ * @param str NULL-terminated UTF-8 string
+ *
+ * @return number of bytes written.
+ */
+int avio_put_str16be(AVIOContext *s, const char *str);
+
+/**
+ * Mark the written bytestream as a specific type.
+ *
+ * Zero-length ranges are omitted from the output.
+ *
+ * @param s    the AVIOContext
+ * @param time the stream time the current bytestream pos corresponds to
+ *             (in AV_TIME_BASE units), or AV_NOPTS_VALUE if unknown or not
+ *             applicable
+ * @param type the kind of data written starting at the current pos
+ */
+void avio_write_marker(AVIOContext *s, int64_t time, enum AVIODataMarkerType type);
+
+/**
+ * ORing this as the "whence" parameter to a seek function causes it to
+ * return the filesize without seeking anywhere. Supporting this is optional.
+ * If it is not supported then the seek function will return <0.
+ */
+#define AVSEEK_SIZE 0x10000
+
+/**
+ * Passing this flag as the "whence" parameter to a seek function causes it to
+ * seek by any means (like reopening and linear reading) or other normally unreasonable
+ * means that can be extremely slow.
+ * This may be ignored by the seek code.
+ */
+#define AVSEEK_FORCE 0x20000
+
+/**
+ * fseek() equivalent for AVIOContext.
+ * @return new position or AVERROR.
+ */
+int64_t avio_seek(AVIOContext *s, int64_t offset, int whence);
+
+/**
+ * Skip given number of bytes forward
+ * @return new position or AVERROR.
+ */
+int64_t avio_skip(AVIOContext *s, int64_t offset);
+
+/**
+ * ftell() equivalent for AVIOContext.
+ * @return position or AVERROR.
+ */
+static av_always_inline int64_t avio_tell(AVIOContext *s)
+{
+    return avio_seek(s, 0, SEEK_CUR);
+}
+
+/**
+ * Get the filesize.
+ * @return filesize or AVERROR
+ */
+int64_t avio_size(AVIOContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * Similar to feof() but also returns nonzero on read errors.
+ * @return non zero if and only if at end of file or a read error happened when reading.
+ */
+int avio_feof(AVIOContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * Writes a formatted string to the context taking a va_list.
+ * @return number of bytes written, < 0 on error.
+ */
+int avio_vprintf(AVIOContext *s, const char *fmt, va_list ap);
+
+/**
+ * Writes a formatted string to the context.
+ * @return number of bytes written, < 0 on error.
+ */
+int avio_printf(AVIOContext *s, const char *fmt, ...) av_printf_format(2, 3);
+
+/**
+ * Write a NULL terminated array of strings to the context.
+ * Usually you don't need to use this function directly but its macro wrapper,
+ * avio_print.
+ */
+void avio_print_string_array(AVIOContext *s, const char *strings[]);
+
+/**
+ * Write strings (const char *) to the context.
+ * This is a convenience macro around avio_print_string_array and it
+ * automatically creates the string array from the variable argument list.
+ * For simple string concatenations this function is more performant than using
+ * avio_printf since it does not need a temporary buffer.
+ */
+#define avio_print(s, ...) \
+    avio_print_string_array(s, (const char*[]){__VA_ARGS__, NULL})
+
+/**
+ * Force flushing of buffered data.
+ *
+ * For write streams, force the buffered data to be immediately written to the output,
+ * without to wait to fill the internal buffer.
+ *
+ * For read streams, discard all currently buffered data, and advance the
+ * reported file position to that of the underlying stream. This does not
+ * read new data, and does not perform any seeks.
+ */
+void avio_flush(AVIOContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * Read size bytes from AVIOContext into buf.
+ * @return number of bytes read or AVERROR
+ */
+int avio_read(AVIOContext *s, unsigned char *buf, int size);
+
+/**
+ * Read size bytes from AVIOContext into buf. Unlike avio_read(), this is allowed
+ * to read fewer bytes than requested. The missing bytes can be read in the next
+ * call. This always tries to read at least 1 byte.
+ * Useful to reduce latency in certain cases.
+ * @return number of bytes read or AVERROR
+ */
+int avio_read_partial(AVIOContext *s, unsigned char *buf, int size);
+
+/**
+ * @name Functions for reading from AVIOContext
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @note return 0 if EOF, so you cannot use it if EOF handling is
+ *       necessary
+ */
+int          avio_r8  (AVIOContext *s);
+unsigned int avio_rl16(AVIOContext *s);
+unsigned int avio_rl24(AVIOContext *s);
+unsigned int avio_rl32(AVIOContext *s);
+uint64_t     avio_rl64(AVIOContext *s);
+unsigned int avio_rb16(AVIOContext *s);
+unsigned int avio_rb24(AVIOContext *s);
+unsigned int avio_rb32(AVIOContext *s);
+uint64_t     avio_rb64(AVIOContext *s);
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Read a string from pb into buf. The reading will terminate when either
+ * a NULL character was encountered, maxlen bytes have been read, or nothing
+ * more can be read from pb. The result is guaranteed to be NULL-terminated, it
+ * will be truncated if buf is too small.
+ * Note that the string is not interpreted or validated in any way, it
+ * might get truncated in the middle of a sequence for multi-byte encodings.
+ *
+ * @return number of bytes read (is always <= maxlen).
+ * If reading ends on EOF or error, the return value will be one more than
+ * bytes actually read.
+ */
+int avio_get_str(AVIOContext *pb, int maxlen, char *buf, int buflen);
+
+/**
+ * Read a UTF-16 string from pb and convert it to UTF-8.
+ * The reading will terminate when either a null or invalid character was
+ * encountered or maxlen bytes have been read.
+ * @return number of bytes read (is always <= maxlen)
+ */
+int avio_get_str16le(AVIOContext *pb, int maxlen, char *buf, int buflen);
+int avio_get_str16be(AVIOContext *pb, int maxlen, char *buf, int buflen);
+
+
+/**
+ * @name URL open modes
+ * The flags argument to avio_open must be one of the following
+ * constants, optionally ORed with other flags.
+ * @{
+ */
+#define AVIO_FLAG_READ  1                                      /**< read-only */
+#define AVIO_FLAG_WRITE 2                                      /**< write-only */
+#define AVIO_FLAG_READ_WRITE (AVIO_FLAG_READ|AVIO_FLAG_WRITE)  /**< read-write pseudo flag */
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Use non-blocking mode.
+ * If this flag is set, operations on the context will return
+ * AVERROR(EAGAIN) if they can not be performed immediately.
+ * If this flag is not set, operations on the context will never return
+ * AVERROR(EAGAIN).
+ * Note that this flag does not affect the opening/connecting of the
+ * context. Connecting a protocol will always block if necessary (e.g. on
+ * network protocols) but never hang (e.g. on busy devices).
+ * Warning: non-blocking protocols is work-in-progress; this flag may be
+ * silently ignored.
+ */
+#define AVIO_FLAG_NONBLOCK 8
+
+/**
+ * Use direct mode.
+ * avio_read and avio_write should if possible be satisfied directly
+ * instead of going through a buffer, and avio_seek will always
+ * call the underlying seek function directly.
+ */
+#define AVIO_FLAG_DIRECT 0x8000
+
+/**
+ * Create and initialize a AVIOContext for accessing the
+ * resource indicated by url.
+ * @note When the resource indicated by url has been opened in
+ * read+write mode, the AVIOContext can be used only for writing.
+ *
+ * @param s Used to return the pointer to the created AVIOContext.
+ * In case of failure the pointed to value is set to NULL.
+ * @param url resource to access
+ * @param flags flags which control how the resource indicated by url
+ * is to be opened
+ * @return >= 0 in case of success, a negative value corresponding to an
+ * AVERROR code in case of failure
+ */
+int avio_open(AVIOContext **s, const char *url, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Create and initialize a AVIOContext for accessing the
+ * resource indicated by url.
+ * @note When the resource indicated by url has been opened in
+ * read+write mode, the AVIOContext can be used only for writing.
+ *
+ * @param s Used to return the pointer to the created AVIOContext.
+ * In case of failure the pointed to value is set to NULL.
+ * @param url resource to access
+ * @param flags flags which control how the resource indicated by url
+ * is to be opened
+ * @param int_cb an interrupt callback to be used at the protocols level
+ * @param options  A dictionary filled with protocol-private options. On return
+ * this parameter will be destroyed and replaced with a dict containing options
+ * that were not found. May be NULL.
+ * @return >= 0 in case of success, a negative value corresponding to an
+ * AVERROR code in case of failure
+ */
+int avio_open2(AVIOContext **s, const char *url, int flags,
+               const AVIOInterruptCB *int_cb, AVDictionary **options);
+
+/**
+ * Close the resource accessed by the AVIOContext s and free it.
+ * This function can only be used if s was opened by avio_open().
+ *
+ * The internal buffer is automatically flushed before closing the
+ * resource.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, an AVERROR < 0 on error.
+ * @see avio_closep
+ */
+int avio_close(AVIOContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * Close the resource accessed by the AVIOContext *s, free it
+ * and set the pointer pointing to it to NULL.
+ * This function can only be used if s was opened by avio_open().
+ *
+ * The internal buffer is automatically flushed before closing the
+ * resource.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, an AVERROR < 0 on error.
+ * @see avio_close
+ */
+int avio_closep(AVIOContext **s);
+
+
+/**
+ * Open a write only memory stream.
+ *
+ * @param s new IO context
+ * @return zero if no error.
+ */
+int avio_open_dyn_buf(AVIOContext **s);
+
+/**
+ * Return the written size and a pointer to the buffer.
+ * The AVIOContext stream is left intact.
+ * The buffer must NOT be freed.
+ * No padding is added to the buffer.
+ *
+ * @param s IO context
+ * @param pbuffer pointer to a byte buffer
+ * @return the length of the byte buffer
+ */
+int avio_get_dyn_buf(AVIOContext *s, uint8_t **pbuffer);
+
+/**
+ * Return the written size and a pointer to the buffer. The buffer
+ * must be freed with av_free().
+ * Padding of AV_INPUT_BUFFER_PADDING_SIZE is added to the buffer.
+ *
+ * @param s IO context
+ * @param pbuffer pointer to a byte buffer
+ * @return the length of the byte buffer
+ */
+int avio_close_dyn_buf(AVIOContext *s, uint8_t **pbuffer);
+
+/**
+ * Iterate through names of available protocols.
+ *
+ * @param opaque A private pointer representing current protocol.
+ *        It must be a pointer to NULL on first iteration and will
+ *        be updated by successive calls to avio_enum_protocols.
+ * @param output If set to 1, iterate over output protocols,
+ *               otherwise over input protocols.
+ *
+ * @return A static string containing the name of current protocol or NULL
+ */
+const char *avio_enum_protocols(void **opaque, int output);
+
+/**
+ * Get AVClass by names of available protocols.
+ *
+ * @return A AVClass of input protocol name or NULL
+ */
+const AVClass *avio_protocol_get_class(const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * Pause and resume playing - only meaningful if using a network streaming
+ * protocol (e.g. MMS).
+ *
+ * @param h     IO context from which to call the read_pause function pointer
+ * @param pause 1 for pause, 0 for resume
+ */
+int     avio_pause(AVIOContext *h, int pause);
+
+/**
+ * Seek to a given timestamp relative to some component stream.
+ * Only meaningful if using a network streaming protocol (e.g. MMS.).
+ *
+ * @param h IO context from which to call the seek function pointers
+ * @param stream_index The stream index that the timestamp is relative to.
+ *        If stream_index is (-1) the timestamp should be in AV_TIME_BASE
+ *        units from the beginning of the presentation.
+ *        If a stream_index >= 0 is used and the protocol does not support
+ *        seeking based on component streams, the call will fail.
+ * @param timestamp timestamp in AVStream.time_base units
+ *        or if there is no stream specified then in AV_TIME_BASE units.
+ * @param flags Optional combination of AVSEEK_FLAG_BACKWARD, AVSEEK_FLAG_BYTE
+ *        and AVSEEK_FLAG_ANY. The protocol may silently ignore
+ *        AVSEEK_FLAG_BACKWARD and AVSEEK_FLAG_ANY, but AVSEEK_FLAG_BYTE will
+ *        fail if used and not supported.
+ * @return >= 0 on success
+ * @see AVInputFormat::read_seek
+ */
+int64_t avio_seek_time(AVIOContext *h, int stream_index,
+                       int64_t timestamp, int flags);
+
+/* Avoid a warning. The header can not be included because it breaks c++. */
+struct AVBPrint;
+
+/**
+ * Read contents of h into print buffer, up to max_size bytes, or up to EOF.
+ *
+ * @return 0 for success (max_size bytes read or EOF reached), negative error
+ * code otherwise
+ */
+int avio_read_to_bprint(AVIOContext *h, struct AVBPrint *pb, size_t max_size);
+
+/**
+ * Accept and allocate a client context on a server context.
+ * @param  s the server context
+ * @param  c the client context, must be unallocated
+ * @return   >= 0 on success or a negative value corresponding
+ *           to an AVERROR on failure
+ */
+int avio_accept(AVIOContext *s, AVIOContext **c);
+
+/**
+ * Perform one step of the protocol handshake to accept a new client.
+ * This function must be called on a client returned by avio_accept() before
+ * using it as a read/write context.
+ * It is separate from avio_accept() because it may block.
+ * A step of the handshake is defined by places where the application may
+ * decide to change the proceedings.
+ * For example, on a protocol with a request header and a reply header, each
+ * one can constitute a step because the application may use the parameters
+ * from the request to change parameters in the reply; or each individual
+ * chunk of the request can constitute a step.
+ * If the handshake is already finished, avio_handshake() does nothing and
+ * returns 0 immediately.
+ *
+ * @param  c the client context to perform the handshake on
+ * @return   0   on a complete and successful handshake
+ *           > 0 if the handshake progressed, but is not complete
+ *           < 0 for an AVERROR code
+ */
+int avio_handshake(AVIOContext *c);
+#endif /* AVFORMAT_AVIO_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavformat/version.h b/dependencies/include/libavformat/version.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a7e5a9a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavformat/version.h
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+/*
+ * Version macros.
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVFORMAT_VERSION_H
+#define AVFORMAT_VERSION_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup libavf
+ * Libavformat version macros
+ */
+
+#include "libavutil/version.h"
+
+#include "version_major.h"
+
+#define LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MINOR  34
+#define LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MICRO 102
+
+#define LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_INT AV_VERSION_INT(LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MAJOR, \
+                                               LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MINOR, \
+                                               LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION     AV_VERSION(LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MAJOR,   \
+                                           LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MINOR,   \
+                                           LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBAVFORMAT_BUILD       LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_INT
+
+#define LIBAVFORMAT_IDENT       "Lavf" AV_STRINGIFY(LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION)
+
+#endif /* AVFORMAT_VERSION_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavformat/version_major.h b/dependencies/include/libavformat/version_major.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..86af3ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavformat/version_major.h
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+/*
+ * Version macros.
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVFORMAT_VERSION_MAJOR_H
+#define AVFORMAT_VERSION_MAJOR_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup libavf
+ * Libavformat version macros
+ */
+
+// Major bumping may affect Ticket5467, 5421, 5451(compatibility with Chromium)
+// Also please add any ticket numbers that you believe might be affected here
+#define LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MAJOR  59
+
+/**
+ * FF_API_* defines may be placed below to indicate public API that will be
+ * dropped at a future version bump. The defines themselves are not part of
+ * the public API and may change, break or disappear at any time.
+ *
+ * @note, when bumping the major version it is recommended to manually
+ * disable each FF_API_* in its own commit instead of disabling them all
+ * at once through the bump. This improves the git bisect-ability of the change.
+ *
+ */
+#define FF_API_LAVF_PRIV_OPT            (LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MAJOR < 60)
+#define FF_API_COMPUTE_PKT_FIELDS2      (LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MAJOR < 60)
+#define FF_API_AVIOCONTEXT_WRITTEN      (LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MAJOR < 60)
+#define FF_HLS_TS_OPTIONS               (LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MAJOR < 60)
+#define FF_API_AVSTREAM_CLASS           (LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MAJOR > 59)
+#define FF_API_GET_END_PTS              (LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MAJOR < 60)
+#define FF_API_AVIODIRCONTEXT           (LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MAJOR < 60)
+
+
+#define FF_API_R_FRAME_RATE            1
+
+#endif /* AVFORMAT_VERSION_MAJOR_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/adler32.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/adler32.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..232d07f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/adler32.h
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2006 Mans Rullgard
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavu_adler32
+ * Public header for Adler-32 hash function implementation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_ADLER32_H
+#define AVUTIL_ADLER32_H
+
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include "attributes.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_adler32 Adler-32
+ * @ingroup lavu_hash
+ * Adler-32 hash function implementation.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+typedef uint32_t AVAdler;
+
+/**
+ * Calculate the Adler32 checksum of a buffer.
+ *
+ * Passing the return value to a subsequent av_adler32_update() call
+ * allows the checksum of multiple buffers to be calculated as though
+ * they were concatenated.
+ *
+ * @param adler initial checksum value
+ * @param buf   pointer to input buffer
+ * @param len   size of input buffer
+ * @return      updated checksum
+ */
+AVAdler av_adler32_update(AVAdler adler, const uint8_t *buf,
+                          size_t len) av_pure;
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_ADLER32_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/aes.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/aes.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4e73473
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/aes.h
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2007 Michael Niedermayer <michaelni@gmx.at>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_AES_H
+#define AVUTIL_AES_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+#include "attributes.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_aes AES
+ * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+ * @{
+ */
+
+extern const int av_aes_size;
+
+struct AVAES;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVAES context.
+ */
+struct AVAES *av_aes_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize an AVAES context.
+ *
+ * @param a The AVAES context
+ * @param key Pointer to the key
+ * @param key_bits 128, 192 or 256
+ * @param decrypt 0 for encryption, 1 for decryption
+ */
+int av_aes_init(struct AVAES *a, const uint8_t *key, int key_bits, int decrypt);
+
+/**
+ * Encrypt or decrypt a buffer using a previously initialized context.
+ *
+ * @param a The AVAES context
+ * @param dst destination array, can be equal to src
+ * @param src source array, can be equal to dst
+ * @param count number of 16 byte blocks
+ * @param iv initialization vector for CBC mode, if NULL then ECB will be used
+ * @param decrypt 0 for encryption, 1 for decryption
+ */
+void av_aes_crypt(struct AVAES *a, uint8_t *dst, const uint8_t *src, int count, uint8_t *iv, int decrypt);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_AES_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/aes_ctr.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/aes_ctr.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d98c071
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/aes_ctr.h
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+/*
+ * AES-CTR cipher
+ * Copyright (c) 2015 Eran Kornblau <erankor at gmail dot com>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_AES_CTR_H
+#define AVUTIL_AES_CTR_H
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_aes_ctr AES-CTR
+ * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+#include "attributes.h"
+
+#define AES_CTR_KEY_SIZE (16)
+#define AES_CTR_IV_SIZE (8)
+
+struct AVAESCTR;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVAESCTR context.
+ */
+struct AVAESCTR *av_aes_ctr_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize an AVAESCTR context.
+ *
+ * @param a The AVAESCTR context to initialize
+ * @param key encryption key, must have a length of AES_CTR_KEY_SIZE
+ */
+int av_aes_ctr_init(struct AVAESCTR *a, const uint8_t *key);
+
+/**
+ * Release an AVAESCTR context.
+ *
+ * @param a The AVAESCTR context
+ */
+void av_aes_ctr_free(struct AVAESCTR *a);
+
+/**
+ * Process a buffer using a previously initialized context.
+ *
+ * @param a The AVAESCTR context
+ * @param dst destination array, can be equal to src
+ * @param src source array, can be equal to dst
+ * @param size the size of src and dst
+ */
+void av_aes_ctr_crypt(struct AVAESCTR *a, uint8_t *dst, const uint8_t *src, int size);
+
+/**
+ * Get the current iv
+ */
+const uint8_t* av_aes_ctr_get_iv(struct AVAESCTR *a);
+
+/**
+ * Generate a random iv
+ */
+void av_aes_ctr_set_random_iv(struct AVAESCTR *a);
+
+/**
+ * Forcefully change the 8-byte iv
+ */
+void av_aes_ctr_set_iv(struct AVAESCTR *a, const uint8_t* iv);
+
+/**
+ * Forcefully change the "full" 16-byte iv, including the counter
+ */
+void av_aes_ctr_set_full_iv(struct AVAESCTR *a, const uint8_t* iv);
+
+/**
+ * Increment the top 64 bit of the iv (performed after each frame)
+ */
+void av_aes_ctr_increment_iv(struct AVAESCTR *a);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_AES_CTR_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/attributes.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/attributes.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..04c615c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/attributes.h
@@ -0,0 +1,173 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2006 Michael Niedermayer <michaelni@gmx.at>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * Macro definitions for various function/variable attributes
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_ATTRIBUTES_H
+#define AVUTIL_ATTRIBUTES_H
+
+#ifdef __GNUC__
+#    define AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(x,y) (__GNUC__ > (x) || __GNUC__ == (x) && __GNUC_MINOR__ >= (y))
+#    define AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_MOST(x,y)  (__GNUC__ < (x) || __GNUC__ == (x) && __GNUC_MINOR__ <= (y))
+#else
+#    define AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(x,y) 0
+#    define AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_MOST(x,y)  0
+#endif
+
+#ifdef __has_builtin
+#    define AV_HAS_BUILTIN(x) __has_builtin(x)
+#else
+#    define AV_HAS_BUILTIN(x) 0
+#endif
+
+#ifndef av_always_inline
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(3,1)
+#    define av_always_inline __attribute__((always_inline)) inline
+#elif defined(_MSC_VER)
+#    define av_always_inline __forceinline
+#else
+#    define av_always_inline inline
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#ifndef av_extern_inline
+#if defined(__ICL) && __ICL >= 1210 || defined(__GNUC_STDC_INLINE__)
+#    define av_extern_inline extern inline
+#else
+#    define av_extern_inline inline
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(3,4)
+#    define av_warn_unused_result __attribute__((warn_unused_result))
+#else
+#    define av_warn_unused_result
+#endif
+
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(3,1)
+#    define av_noinline __attribute__((noinline))
+#elif defined(_MSC_VER)
+#    define av_noinline __declspec(noinline)
+#else
+#    define av_noinline
+#endif
+
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(3,1) || defined(__clang__)
+#    define av_pure __attribute__((pure))
+#else
+#    define av_pure
+#endif
+
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(2,6) || defined(__clang__)
+#    define av_const __attribute__((const))
+#else
+#    define av_const
+#endif
+
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(4,3) || defined(__clang__)
+#    define av_cold __attribute__((cold))
+#else
+#    define av_cold
+#endif
+
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(4,1) && !defined(__llvm__)
+#    define av_flatten __attribute__((flatten))
+#else
+#    define av_flatten
+#endif
+
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(3,1)
+#    define attribute_deprecated __attribute__((deprecated))
+#elif defined(_MSC_VER)
+#    define attribute_deprecated __declspec(deprecated)
+#else
+#    define attribute_deprecated
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Disable warnings about deprecated features
+ * This is useful for sections of code kept for backward compatibility and
+ * scheduled for removal.
+ */
+#ifndef AV_NOWARN_DEPRECATED
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(4,6) || defined(__clang__)
+#    define AV_NOWARN_DEPRECATED(code) \
+        _Pragma("GCC diagnostic push") \
+        _Pragma("GCC diagnostic ignored \"-Wdeprecated-declarations\"") \
+        code \
+        _Pragma("GCC diagnostic pop")
+#elif defined(_MSC_VER)
+#    define AV_NOWARN_DEPRECATED(code) \
+        __pragma(warning(push)) \
+        __pragma(warning(disable : 4996)) \
+        code; \
+        __pragma(warning(pop))
+#else
+#    define AV_NOWARN_DEPRECATED(code) code
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#if defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__clang__)
+#    define av_unused __attribute__((unused))
+#else
+#    define av_unused
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Mark a variable as used and prevent the compiler from optimizing it
+ * away.  This is useful for variables accessed only from inline
+ * assembler without the compiler being aware.
+ */
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(3,1) || defined(__clang__)
+#    define av_used __attribute__((used))
+#else
+#    define av_used
+#endif
+
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(3,3) || defined(__clang__)
+#   define av_alias __attribute__((may_alias))
+#else
+#   define av_alias
+#endif
+
+#if (defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__clang__)) && !defined(__INTEL_COMPILER)
+#    define av_uninit(x) x=x
+#else
+#    define av_uninit(x) x
+#endif
+
+#if defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__clang__)
+#    define av_builtin_constant_p __builtin_constant_p
+#    define av_printf_format(fmtpos, attrpos) __attribute__((__format__(__printf__, fmtpos, attrpos)))
+#else
+#    define av_builtin_constant_p(x) 0
+#    define av_printf_format(fmtpos, attrpos)
+#endif
+
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(2,5) || defined(__clang__)
+#    define av_noreturn __attribute__((noreturn))
+#else
+#    define av_noreturn
+#endif
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_ATTRIBUTES_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/audio_fifo.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/audio_fifo.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d1e4c85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/audio_fifo.h
@@ -0,0 +1,186 @@
+/*
+ * Audio FIFO
+ * Copyright (c) 2012 Justin Ruggles <justin.ruggles@gmail.com>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * Audio FIFO Buffer
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_AUDIO_FIFO_H
+#define AVUTIL_AUDIO_FIFO_H
+
+#include "attributes.h"
+#include "samplefmt.h"
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_audio
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_audiofifo Audio FIFO Buffer
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Context for an Audio FIFO Buffer.
+ *
+ * - Operates at the sample level rather than the byte level.
+ * - Supports multiple channels with either planar or packed sample format.
+ * - Automatic reallocation when writing to a full buffer.
+ */
+typedef struct AVAudioFifo AVAudioFifo;
+
+/**
+ * Free an AVAudioFifo.
+ *
+ * @param af  AVAudioFifo to free
+ */
+void av_audio_fifo_free(AVAudioFifo *af);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVAudioFifo.
+ *
+ * @param sample_fmt  sample format
+ * @param channels    number of channels
+ * @param nb_samples  initial allocation size, in samples
+ * @return            newly allocated AVAudioFifo, or NULL on error
+ */
+AVAudioFifo *av_audio_fifo_alloc(enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt, int channels,
+                                 int nb_samples);
+
+/**
+ * Reallocate an AVAudioFifo.
+ *
+ * @param af          AVAudioFifo to reallocate
+ * @param nb_samples  new allocation size, in samples
+ * @return            0 if OK, or negative AVERROR code on failure
+ */
+av_warn_unused_result
+int av_audio_fifo_realloc(AVAudioFifo *af, int nb_samples);
+
+/**
+ * Write data to an AVAudioFifo.
+ *
+ * The AVAudioFifo will be reallocated automatically if the available space
+ * is less than nb_samples.
+ *
+ * @see enum AVSampleFormat
+ * The documentation for AVSampleFormat describes the data layout.
+ *
+ * @param af          AVAudioFifo to write to
+ * @param data        audio data plane pointers
+ * @param nb_samples  number of samples to write
+ * @return            number of samples actually written, or negative AVERROR
+ *                    code on failure. If successful, the number of samples
+ *                    actually written will always be nb_samples.
+ */
+int av_audio_fifo_write(AVAudioFifo *af, void **data, int nb_samples);
+
+/**
+ * Peek data from an AVAudioFifo.
+ *
+ * @see enum AVSampleFormat
+ * The documentation for AVSampleFormat describes the data layout.
+ *
+ * @param af          AVAudioFifo to read from
+ * @param data        audio data plane pointers
+ * @param nb_samples  number of samples to peek
+ * @return            number of samples actually peek, or negative AVERROR code
+ *                    on failure. The number of samples actually peek will not
+ *                    be greater than nb_samples, and will only be less than
+ *                    nb_samples if av_audio_fifo_size is less than nb_samples.
+ */
+int av_audio_fifo_peek(AVAudioFifo *af, void **data, int nb_samples);
+
+/**
+ * Peek data from an AVAudioFifo.
+ *
+ * @see enum AVSampleFormat
+ * The documentation for AVSampleFormat describes the data layout.
+ *
+ * @param af          AVAudioFifo to read from
+ * @param data        audio data plane pointers
+ * @param nb_samples  number of samples to peek
+ * @param offset      offset from current read position
+ * @return            number of samples actually peek, or negative AVERROR code
+ *                    on failure. The number of samples actually peek will not
+ *                    be greater than nb_samples, and will only be less than
+ *                    nb_samples if av_audio_fifo_size is less than nb_samples.
+ */
+int av_audio_fifo_peek_at(AVAudioFifo *af, void **data, int nb_samples, int offset);
+
+/**
+ * Read data from an AVAudioFifo.
+ *
+ * @see enum AVSampleFormat
+ * The documentation for AVSampleFormat describes the data layout.
+ *
+ * @param af          AVAudioFifo to read from
+ * @param data        audio data plane pointers
+ * @param nb_samples  number of samples to read
+ * @return            number of samples actually read, or negative AVERROR code
+ *                    on failure. The number of samples actually read will not
+ *                    be greater than nb_samples, and will only be less than
+ *                    nb_samples if av_audio_fifo_size is less than nb_samples.
+ */
+int av_audio_fifo_read(AVAudioFifo *af, void **data, int nb_samples);
+
+/**
+ * Drain data from an AVAudioFifo.
+ *
+ * Removes the data without reading it.
+ *
+ * @param af          AVAudioFifo to drain
+ * @param nb_samples  number of samples to drain
+ * @return            0 if OK, or negative AVERROR code on failure
+ */
+int av_audio_fifo_drain(AVAudioFifo *af, int nb_samples);
+
+/**
+ * Reset the AVAudioFifo buffer.
+ *
+ * This empties all data in the buffer.
+ *
+ * @param af  AVAudioFifo to reset
+ */
+void av_audio_fifo_reset(AVAudioFifo *af);
+
+/**
+ * Get the current number of samples in the AVAudioFifo available for reading.
+ *
+ * @param af  the AVAudioFifo to query
+ * @return    number of samples available for reading
+ */
+int av_audio_fifo_size(AVAudioFifo *af);
+
+/**
+ * Get the current number of samples in the AVAudioFifo available for writing.
+ *
+ * @param af  the AVAudioFifo to query
+ * @return    number of samples available for writing
+ */
+int av_audio_fifo_space(AVAudioFifo *af);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_AUDIO_FIFO_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/avassert.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/avassert.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..51e462b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/avassert.h
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2010 Michael Niedermayer <michaelni@gmx.at>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * simple assert() macros that are a bit more flexible than ISO C assert().
+ * @author Michael Niedermayer <michaelni@gmx.at>
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_AVASSERT_H
+#define AVUTIL_AVASSERT_H
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include "log.h"
+#include "macros.h"
+
+/**
+ * assert() equivalent, that is always enabled.
+ */
+#define av_assert0(cond) do {                                           \
+    if (!(cond)) {                                                      \
+        av_log(NULL, AV_LOG_PANIC, "Assertion %s failed at %s:%d\n",    \
+               AV_STRINGIFY(cond), __FILE__, __LINE__);                 \
+        abort();                                                        \
+    }                                                                   \
+} while (0)
+
+
+/**
+ * assert() equivalent, that does not lie in speed critical code.
+ * These asserts() thus can be enabled without fearing speed loss.
+ */
+#if defined(ASSERT_LEVEL) && ASSERT_LEVEL > 0
+#define av_assert1(cond) av_assert0(cond)
+#else
+#define av_assert1(cond) ((void)0)
+#endif
+
+
+/**
+ * assert() equivalent, that does lie in speed critical code.
+ */
+#if defined(ASSERT_LEVEL) && ASSERT_LEVEL > 1
+#define av_assert2(cond) av_assert0(cond)
+#define av_assert2_fpu() av_assert0_fpu()
+#else
+#define av_assert2(cond) ((void)0)
+#define av_assert2_fpu() ((void)0)
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Assert that floating point operations can be executed.
+ *
+ * This will av_assert0() that the cpu is not in MMX state on X86
+ */
+void av_assert0_fpu(void);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_AVASSERT_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/avconfig.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/avconfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c289fbb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/avconfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+/* Generated by ffmpeg configure */
+#ifndef AVUTIL_AVCONFIG_H
+#define AVUTIL_AVCONFIG_H
+#define AV_HAVE_BIGENDIAN 0
+#define AV_HAVE_FAST_UNALIGNED 1
+#endif /* AVUTIL_AVCONFIG_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/avstring.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/avstring.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..74aa4cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/avstring.h
@@ -0,0 +1,438 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2007 Mans Rullgard
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_AVSTRING_H
+#define AVUTIL_AVSTRING_H
+
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include "attributes.h"
+#include "version.h"
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_string
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Return non-zero if pfx is a prefix of str. If it is, *ptr is set to
+ * the address of the first character in str after the prefix.
+ *
+ * @param str input string
+ * @param pfx prefix to test
+ * @param ptr updated if the prefix is matched inside str
+ * @return non-zero if the prefix matches, zero otherwise
+ */
+int av_strstart(const char *str, const char *pfx, const char **ptr);
+
+/**
+ * Return non-zero if pfx is a prefix of str independent of case. If
+ * it is, *ptr is set to the address of the first character in str
+ * after the prefix.
+ *
+ * @param str input string
+ * @param pfx prefix to test
+ * @param ptr updated if the prefix is matched inside str
+ * @return non-zero if the prefix matches, zero otherwise
+ */
+int av_stristart(const char *str, const char *pfx, const char **ptr);
+
+/**
+ * Locate the first case-independent occurrence in the string haystack
+ * of the string needle.  A zero-length string needle is considered to
+ * match at the start of haystack.
+ *
+ * This function is a case-insensitive version of the standard strstr().
+ *
+ * @param haystack string to search in
+ * @param needle   string to search for
+ * @return         pointer to the located match within haystack
+ *                 or a null pointer if no match
+ */
+char *av_stristr(const char *haystack, const char *needle);
+
+/**
+ * Locate the first occurrence of the string needle in the string haystack
+ * where not more than hay_length characters are searched. A zero-length
+ * string needle is considered to match at the start of haystack.
+ *
+ * This function is a length-limited version of the standard strstr().
+ *
+ * @param haystack   string to search in
+ * @param needle     string to search for
+ * @param hay_length length of string to search in
+ * @return           pointer to the located match within haystack
+ *                   or a null pointer if no match
+ */
+char *av_strnstr(const char *haystack, const char *needle, size_t hay_length);
+
+/**
+ * Copy the string src to dst, but no more than size - 1 bytes, and
+ * null-terminate dst.
+ *
+ * This function is the same as BSD strlcpy().
+ *
+ * @param dst destination buffer
+ * @param src source string
+ * @param size size of destination buffer
+ * @return the length of src
+ *
+ * @warning since the return value is the length of src, src absolutely
+ * _must_ be a properly 0-terminated string, otherwise this will read beyond
+ * the end of the buffer and possibly crash.
+ */
+size_t av_strlcpy(char *dst, const char *src, size_t size);
+
+/**
+ * Append the string src to the string dst, but to a total length of
+ * no more than size - 1 bytes, and null-terminate dst.
+ *
+ * This function is similar to BSD strlcat(), but differs when
+ * size <= strlen(dst).
+ *
+ * @param dst destination buffer
+ * @param src source string
+ * @param size size of destination buffer
+ * @return the total length of src and dst
+ *
+ * @warning since the return value use the length of src and dst, these
+ * absolutely _must_ be a properly 0-terminated strings, otherwise this
+ * will read beyond the end of the buffer and possibly crash.
+ */
+size_t av_strlcat(char *dst, const char *src, size_t size);
+
+/**
+ * Append output to a string, according to a format. Never write out of
+ * the destination buffer, and always put a terminating 0 within
+ * the buffer.
+ * @param dst destination buffer (string to which the output is
+ *  appended)
+ * @param size total size of the destination buffer
+ * @param fmt printf-compatible format string, specifying how the
+ *  following parameters are used
+ * @return the length of the string that would have been generated
+ *  if enough space had been available
+ */
+size_t av_strlcatf(char *dst, size_t size, const char *fmt, ...) av_printf_format(3, 4);
+
+/**
+ * Get the count of continuous non zero chars starting from the beginning.
+ *
+ * @param s   the string whose length to count
+ * @param len maximum number of characters to check in the string, that
+ *            is the maximum value which is returned by the function
+ */
+static inline size_t av_strnlen(const char *s, size_t len)
+{
+    size_t i;
+    for (i = 0; i < len && s[i]; i++)
+        ;
+    return i;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Print arguments following specified format into a large enough auto
+ * allocated buffer. It is similar to GNU asprintf().
+ * @param fmt printf-compatible format string, specifying how the
+ *            following parameters are used.
+ * @return the allocated string
+ * @note You have to free the string yourself with av_free().
+ */
+char *av_asprintf(const char *fmt, ...) av_printf_format(1, 2);
+
+#if FF_API_D2STR
+/**
+ * Convert a number to an av_malloced string.
+ * @deprecated  use av_asprintf() with "%f" or a more specific format
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+char *av_d2str(double d);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Unescape the given string until a non escaped terminating char,
+ * and return the token corresponding to the unescaped string.
+ *
+ * The normal \ and ' escaping is supported. Leading and trailing
+ * whitespaces are removed, unless they are escaped with '\' or are
+ * enclosed between ''.
+ *
+ * @param buf the buffer to parse, buf will be updated to point to the
+ * terminating char
+ * @param term a 0-terminated list of terminating chars
+ * @return the malloced unescaped string, which must be av_freed by
+ * the user, NULL in case of allocation failure
+ */
+char *av_get_token(const char **buf, const char *term);
+
+/**
+ * Split the string into several tokens which can be accessed by
+ * successive calls to av_strtok().
+ *
+ * A token is defined as a sequence of characters not belonging to the
+ * set specified in delim.
+ *
+ * On the first call to av_strtok(), s should point to the string to
+ * parse, and the value of saveptr is ignored. In subsequent calls, s
+ * should be NULL, and saveptr should be unchanged since the previous
+ * call.
+ *
+ * This function is similar to strtok_r() defined in POSIX.1.
+ *
+ * @param s the string to parse, may be NULL
+ * @param delim 0-terminated list of token delimiters, must be non-NULL
+ * @param saveptr user-provided pointer which points to stored
+ * information necessary for av_strtok() to continue scanning the same
+ * string. saveptr is updated to point to the next character after the
+ * first delimiter found, or to NULL if the string was terminated
+ * @return the found token, or NULL when no token is found
+ */
+char *av_strtok(char *s, const char *delim, char **saveptr);
+
+/**
+ * Locale-independent conversion of ASCII isdigit.
+ */
+static inline av_const int av_isdigit(int c)
+{
+    return c >= '0' && c <= '9';
+}
+
+/**
+ * Locale-independent conversion of ASCII isgraph.
+ */
+static inline av_const int av_isgraph(int c)
+{
+    return c > 32 && c < 127;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Locale-independent conversion of ASCII isspace.
+ */
+static inline av_const int av_isspace(int c)
+{
+    return c == ' ' || c == '\f' || c == '\n' || c == '\r' || c == '\t' ||
+           c == '\v';
+}
+
+/**
+ * Locale-independent conversion of ASCII characters to uppercase.
+ */
+static inline av_const int av_toupper(int c)
+{
+    if (c >= 'a' && c <= 'z')
+        c ^= 0x20;
+    return c;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Locale-independent conversion of ASCII characters to lowercase.
+ */
+static inline av_const int av_tolower(int c)
+{
+    if (c >= 'A' && c <= 'Z')
+        c ^= 0x20;
+    return c;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Locale-independent conversion of ASCII isxdigit.
+ */
+static inline av_const int av_isxdigit(int c)
+{
+    c = av_tolower(c);
+    return av_isdigit(c) || (c >= 'a' && c <= 'f');
+}
+
+/**
+ * Locale-independent case-insensitive compare.
+ * @note This means only ASCII-range characters are case-insensitive
+ */
+int av_strcasecmp(const char *a, const char *b);
+
+/**
+ * Locale-independent case-insensitive compare.
+ * @note This means only ASCII-range characters are case-insensitive
+ */
+int av_strncasecmp(const char *a, const char *b, size_t n);
+
+/**
+ * Locale-independent strings replace.
+ * @note This means only ASCII-range characters are replace
+ */
+char *av_strireplace(const char *str, const char *from, const char *to);
+
+/**
+ * Thread safe basename.
+ * @param path the string to parse, on DOS both \ and / are considered separators.
+ * @return pointer to the basename substring.
+ * If path does not contain a slash, the function returns a copy of path.
+ * If path is a NULL pointer or points to an empty string, a pointer
+ * to a string "." is returned.
+ */
+const char *av_basename(const char *path);
+
+/**
+ * Thread safe dirname.
+ * @param path the string to parse, on DOS both \ and / are considered separators.
+ * @return A pointer to a string that's the parent directory of path.
+ * If path is a NULL pointer or points to an empty string, a pointer
+ * to a string "." is returned.
+ * @note the function may modify the contents of the path, so copies should be passed.
+ */
+const char *av_dirname(char *path);
+
+/**
+ * Match instances of a name in a comma-separated list of names.
+ * List entries are checked from the start to the end of the names list,
+ * the first match ends further processing. If an entry prefixed with '-'
+ * matches, then 0 is returned. The "ALL" list entry is considered to
+ * match all names.
+ *
+ * @param name  Name to look for.
+ * @param names List of names.
+ * @return 1 on match, 0 otherwise.
+ */
+int av_match_name(const char *name, const char *names);
+
+/**
+ * Append path component to the existing path.
+ * Path separator '/' is placed between when needed.
+ * Resulting string have to be freed with av_free().
+ * @param path      base path
+ * @param component component to be appended
+ * @return new path or NULL on error.
+ */
+char *av_append_path_component(const char *path, const char *component);
+
+enum AVEscapeMode {
+    AV_ESCAPE_MODE_AUTO,      ///< Use auto-selected escaping mode.
+    AV_ESCAPE_MODE_BACKSLASH, ///< Use backslash escaping.
+    AV_ESCAPE_MODE_QUOTE,     ///< Use single-quote escaping.
+    AV_ESCAPE_MODE_XML,       ///< Use XML non-markup character data escaping.
+};
+
+/**
+ * Consider spaces special and escape them even in the middle of the
+ * string.
+ *
+ * This is equivalent to adding the whitespace characters to the special
+ * characters lists, except it is guaranteed to use the exact same list
+ * of whitespace characters as the rest of libavutil.
+ */
+#define AV_ESCAPE_FLAG_WHITESPACE (1 << 0)
+
+/**
+ * Escape only specified special characters.
+ * Without this flag, escape also any characters that may be considered
+ * special by av_get_token(), such as the single quote.
+ */
+#define AV_ESCAPE_FLAG_STRICT (1 << 1)
+
+/**
+ * Within AV_ESCAPE_MODE_XML, additionally escape single quotes for single
+ * quoted attributes.
+ */
+#define AV_ESCAPE_FLAG_XML_SINGLE_QUOTES (1 << 2)
+
+/**
+ * Within AV_ESCAPE_MODE_XML, additionally escape double quotes for double
+ * quoted attributes.
+ */
+#define AV_ESCAPE_FLAG_XML_DOUBLE_QUOTES (1 << 3)
+
+
+/**
+ * Escape string in src, and put the escaped string in an allocated
+ * string in *dst, which must be freed with av_free().
+ *
+ * @param dst           pointer where an allocated string is put
+ * @param src           string to escape, must be non-NULL
+ * @param special_chars string containing the special characters which
+ *                      need to be escaped, can be NULL
+ * @param mode          escape mode to employ, see AV_ESCAPE_MODE_* macros.
+ *                      Any unknown value for mode will be considered equivalent to
+ *                      AV_ESCAPE_MODE_BACKSLASH, but this behaviour can change without
+ *                      notice.
+ * @param flags         flags which control how to escape, see AV_ESCAPE_FLAG_ macros
+ * @return the length of the allocated string, or a negative error code in case of error
+ * @see av_bprint_escape()
+ */
+av_warn_unused_result
+int av_escape(char **dst, const char *src, const char *special_chars,
+              enum AVEscapeMode mode, int flags);
+
+#define AV_UTF8_FLAG_ACCEPT_INVALID_BIG_CODES          1 ///< accept codepoints over 0x10FFFF
+#define AV_UTF8_FLAG_ACCEPT_NON_CHARACTERS             2 ///< accept non-characters - 0xFFFE and 0xFFFF
+#define AV_UTF8_FLAG_ACCEPT_SURROGATES                 4 ///< accept UTF-16 surrogates codes
+#define AV_UTF8_FLAG_EXCLUDE_XML_INVALID_CONTROL_CODES 8 ///< exclude control codes not accepted by XML
+
+#define AV_UTF8_FLAG_ACCEPT_ALL \
+    AV_UTF8_FLAG_ACCEPT_INVALID_BIG_CODES|AV_UTF8_FLAG_ACCEPT_NON_CHARACTERS|AV_UTF8_FLAG_ACCEPT_SURROGATES
+
+/**
+ * Read and decode a single UTF-8 code point (character) from the
+ * buffer in *buf, and update *buf to point to the next byte to
+ * decode.
+ *
+ * In case of an invalid byte sequence, the pointer will be updated to
+ * the next byte after the invalid sequence and the function will
+ * return an error code.
+ *
+ * Depending on the specified flags, the function will also fail in
+ * case the decoded code point does not belong to a valid range.
+ *
+ * @note For speed-relevant code a carefully implemented use of
+ * GET_UTF8() may be preferred.
+ *
+ * @param codep   pointer used to return the parsed code in case of success.
+ *                The value in *codep is set even in case the range check fails.
+ * @param bufp    pointer to the address the first byte of the sequence
+ *                to decode, updated by the function to point to the
+ *                byte next after the decoded sequence
+ * @param buf_end pointer to the end of the buffer, points to the next
+ *                byte past the last in the buffer. This is used to
+ *                avoid buffer overreads (in case of an unfinished
+ *                UTF-8 sequence towards the end of the buffer).
+ * @param flags   a collection of AV_UTF8_FLAG_* flags
+ * @return >= 0 in case a sequence was successfully read, a negative
+ * value in case of invalid sequence
+ */
+av_warn_unused_result
+int av_utf8_decode(int32_t *codep, const uint8_t **bufp, const uint8_t *buf_end,
+                   unsigned int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Check if a name is in a list.
+ * @returns 0 if not found, or the 1 based index where it has been found in the
+ *            list.
+ */
+int av_match_list(const char *name, const char *list, char separator);
+
+/**
+ * See libc sscanf manual for more information.
+ * Locale-independent sscanf implementation.
+ */
+int av_sscanf(const char *string, const char *format, ...);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_AVSTRING_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/avutil.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/avutil.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..64b68bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/avutil.h
@@ -0,0 +1,371 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2006 Michael Niedermayer <michaelni@gmx.at>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_AVUTIL_H
+#define AVUTIL_AVUTIL_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavu
+ * Convenience header that includes @ref lavu "libavutil"'s core.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @mainpage
+ *
+ * @section ffmpeg_intro Introduction
+ *
+ * This document describes the usage of the different libraries
+ * provided by FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * @li @ref libavc "libavcodec" encoding/decoding library
+ * @li @ref lavfi "libavfilter" graph-based frame editing library
+ * @li @ref libavf "libavformat" I/O and muxing/demuxing library
+ * @li @ref lavd "libavdevice" special devices muxing/demuxing library
+ * @li @ref lavu "libavutil" common utility library
+ * @li @ref lswr "libswresample" audio resampling, format conversion and mixing
+ * @li @ref lpp  "libpostproc" post processing library
+ * @li @ref libsws "libswscale" color conversion and scaling library
+ *
+ * @section ffmpeg_versioning Versioning and compatibility
+ *
+ * Each of the FFmpeg libraries contains a version.h header, which defines a
+ * major, minor and micro version number with the
+ * <em>LIBRARYNAME_VERSION_{MAJOR,MINOR,MICRO}</em> macros. The major version
+ * number is incremented with backward incompatible changes - e.g. removing
+ * parts of the public API, reordering public struct members, etc. The minor
+ * version number is incremented for backward compatible API changes or major
+ * new features - e.g. adding a new public function or a new decoder. The micro
+ * version number is incremented for smaller changes that a calling program
+ * might still want to check for - e.g. changing behavior in a previously
+ * unspecified situation.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg guarantees backward API and ABI compatibility for each library as long
+ * as its major version number is unchanged. This means that no public symbols
+ * will be removed or renamed. Types and names of the public struct members and
+ * values of public macros and enums will remain the same (unless they were
+ * explicitly declared as not part of the public API). Documented behavior will
+ * not change.
+ *
+ * In other words, any correct program that works with a given FFmpeg snapshot
+ * should work just as well without any changes with any later snapshot with the
+ * same major versions. This applies to both rebuilding the program against new
+ * FFmpeg versions or to replacing the dynamic FFmpeg libraries that a program
+ * links against.
+ *
+ * However, new public symbols may be added and new members may be appended to
+ * public structs whose size is not part of public ABI (most public structs in
+ * FFmpeg). New macros and enum values may be added. Behavior in undocumented
+ * situations may change slightly (and be documented). All those are accompanied
+ * by an entry in doc/APIchanges and incrementing either the minor or micro
+ * version number.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu libavutil
+ * Common code shared across all FFmpeg libraries.
+ *
+ * @note
+ * libavutil is designed to be modular. In most cases, in order to use the
+ * functions provided by one component of libavutil you must explicitly include
+ * the specific header containing that feature. If you are only using
+ * media-related components, you could simply include libavutil/avutil.h, which
+ * brings in most of the "core" components.
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_crypto Crypto and Hashing
+ *
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_math Mathematics
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_string String Manipulation
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_mem Memory Management
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_data Data Structures
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_video Video related
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_audio Audio related
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_error Error Codes
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_log Logging Facility
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_misc Other
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @defgroup preproc_misc Preprocessor String Macros
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup version_utils Library Version Macros
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @}
+ */
+
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_ver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Return the LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_INT constant.
+ */
+unsigned avutil_version(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return an informative version string. This usually is the actual release
+ * version number or a git commit description. This string has no fixed format
+ * and can change any time. It should never be parsed by code.
+ */
+const char *av_version_info(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libavutil build-time configuration.
+ */
+const char *avutil_configuration(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libavutil license.
+ */
+const char *avutil_license(void);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_media Media Type
+ * @brief Media Type
+ */
+
+enum AVMediaType {
+    AVMEDIA_TYPE_UNKNOWN = -1,  ///< Usually treated as AVMEDIA_TYPE_DATA
+    AVMEDIA_TYPE_VIDEO,
+    AVMEDIA_TYPE_AUDIO,
+    AVMEDIA_TYPE_DATA,          ///< Opaque data information usually continuous
+    AVMEDIA_TYPE_SUBTITLE,
+    AVMEDIA_TYPE_ATTACHMENT,    ///< Opaque data information usually sparse
+    AVMEDIA_TYPE_NB
+};
+
+/**
+ * Return a string describing the media_type enum, NULL if media_type
+ * is unknown.
+ */
+const char *av_get_media_type_string(enum AVMediaType media_type);
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_const Constants
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_enc Encoding specific
+ *
+ * @note those definition should move to avcodec
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#define FF_LAMBDA_SHIFT 7
+#define FF_LAMBDA_SCALE (1<<FF_LAMBDA_SHIFT)
+#define FF_QP2LAMBDA 118 ///< factor to convert from H.263 QP to lambda
+#define FF_LAMBDA_MAX (256*128-1)
+
+#define FF_QUALITY_SCALE FF_LAMBDA_SCALE //FIXME maybe remove
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ * @defgroup lavu_time Timestamp specific
+ *
+ * FFmpeg internal timebase and timestamp definitions
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Undefined timestamp value
+ *
+ * Usually reported by demuxer that work on containers that do not provide
+ * either pts or dts.
+ */
+
+#define AV_NOPTS_VALUE          ((int64_t)UINT64_C(0x8000000000000000))
+
+/**
+ * Internal time base represented as integer
+ */
+
+#define AV_TIME_BASE            1000000
+
+/**
+ * Internal time base represented as fractional value
+ */
+
+#define AV_TIME_BASE_Q          (AVRational){1, AV_TIME_BASE}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ * @}
+ * @defgroup lavu_picture Image related
+ *
+ * AVPicture types, pixel formats and basic image planes manipulation.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+enum AVPictureType {
+    AV_PICTURE_TYPE_NONE = 0, ///< Undefined
+    AV_PICTURE_TYPE_I,     ///< Intra
+    AV_PICTURE_TYPE_P,     ///< Predicted
+    AV_PICTURE_TYPE_B,     ///< Bi-dir predicted
+    AV_PICTURE_TYPE_S,     ///< S(GMC)-VOP MPEG-4
+    AV_PICTURE_TYPE_SI,    ///< Switching Intra
+    AV_PICTURE_TYPE_SP,    ///< Switching Predicted
+    AV_PICTURE_TYPE_BI,    ///< BI type
+};
+
+/**
+ * Return a single letter to describe the given picture type
+ * pict_type.
+ *
+ * @param[in] pict_type the picture type @return a single character
+ * representing the picture type, '?' if pict_type is unknown
+ */
+char av_get_picture_type_char(enum AVPictureType pict_type);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#include "common.h"
+#include "error.h"
+#include "rational.h"
+#include "version.h"
+#include "macros.h"
+#include "mathematics.h"
+#include "log.h"
+#include "pixfmt.h"
+
+/**
+ * Return x default pointer in case p is NULL.
+ */
+static inline void *av_x_if_null(const void *p, const void *x)
+{
+    return (void *)(intptr_t)(p ? p : x);
+}
+
+/**
+ * Compute the length of an integer list.
+ *
+ * @param elsize  size in bytes of each list element (only 1, 2, 4 or 8)
+ * @param term    list terminator (usually 0 or -1)
+ * @param list    pointer to the list
+ * @return  length of the list, in elements, not counting the terminator
+ */
+unsigned av_int_list_length_for_size(unsigned elsize,
+                                     const void *list, uint64_t term) av_pure;
+
+/**
+ * Compute the length of an integer list.
+ *
+ * @param term  list terminator (usually 0 or -1)
+ * @param list  pointer to the list
+ * @return  length of the list, in elements, not counting the terminator
+ */
+#define av_int_list_length(list, term) \
+    av_int_list_length_for_size(sizeof(*(list)), list, term)
+
+#if FF_API_AV_FOPEN_UTF8
+/**
+ * Open a file using a UTF-8 filename.
+ * The API of this function matches POSIX fopen(), errors are returned through
+ * errno.
+ * @deprecated Avoid using it, as on Windows, the FILE* allocated by this
+ *             function may be allocated with a different CRT than the caller
+ *             who uses the FILE*. No replacement provided in public API.
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+FILE *av_fopen_utf8(const char *path, const char *mode);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Return the fractional representation of the internal time base.
+ */
+AVRational av_get_time_base_q(void);
+
+#define AV_FOURCC_MAX_STRING_SIZE 32
+
+#define av_fourcc2str(fourcc) av_fourcc_make_string((char[AV_FOURCC_MAX_STRING_SIZE]){0}, fourcc)
+
+/**
+ * Fill the provided buffer with a string containing a FourCC (four-character
+ * code) representation.
+ *
+ * @param buf    a buffer with size in bytes of at least AV_FOURCC_MAX_STRING_SIZE
+ * @param fourcc the fourcc to represent
+ * @return the buffer in input
+ */
+char *av_fourcc_make_string(char *buf, uint32_t fourcc);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_AVUTIL_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/base64.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/base64.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2954c12
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/base64.h
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2006 Ryan Martell. (rdm4@martellventures.com)
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_BASE64_H
+#define AVUTIL_BASE64_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_base64 Base64
+ * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Decode a base64-encoded string.
+ *
+ * @param out      buffer for decoded data
+ * @param in       null-terminated input string
+ * @param out_size size in bytes of the out buffer, must be at
+ *                 least 3/4 of the length of in, that is AV_BASE64_DECODE_SIZE(strlen(in))
+ * @return         number of bytes written, or a negative value in case of
+ *                 invalid input
+ */
+int av_base64_decode(uint8_t *out, const char *in, int out_size);
+
+/**
+ * Calculate the output size in bytes needed to decode a base64 string
+ * with length x to a data buffer.
+ */
+#define AV_BASE64_DECODE_SIZE(x) ((x) * 3LL / 4)
+
+/**
+ * Encode data to base64 and null-terminate.
+ *
+ * @param out      buffer for encoded data
+ * @param out_size size in bytes of the out buffer (including the
+ *                 null terminator), must be at least AV_BASE64_SIZE(in_size)
+ * @param in       input buffer containing the data to encode
+ * @param in_size  size in bytes of the in buffer
+ * @return         out or NULL in case of error
+ */
+char *av_base64_encode(char *out, int out_size, const uint8_t *in, int in_size);
+
+/**
+ * Calculate the output size needed to base64-encode x bytes to a
+ * null-terminated string.
+ */
+#define AV_BASE64_SIZE(x)  (((x)+2) / 3 * 4 + 1)
+
+ /**
+  * @}
+  */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_BASE64_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/blowfish.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/blowfish.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9e289a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/blowfish.h
@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+/*
+ * Blowfish algorithm
+ * Copyright (c) 2012 Samuel Pitoiset
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_BLOWFISH_H
+#define AVUTIL_BLOWFISH_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_blowfish Blowfish
+ * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#define AV_BF_ROUNDS 16
+
+typedef struct AVBlowfish {
+    uint32_t p[AV_BF_ROUNDS + 2];
+    uint32_t s[4][256];
+} AVBlowfish;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVBlowfish context.
+ */
+AVBlowfish *av_blowfish_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize an AVBlowfish context.
+ *
+ * @param ctx an AVBlowfish context
+ * @param key a key
+ * @param key_len length of the key
+ */
+void av_blowfish_init(struct AVBlowfish *ctx, const uint8_t *key, int key_len);
+
+/**
+ * Encrypt or decrypt a buffer using a previously initialized context.
+ *
+ * @param ctx an AVBlowfish context
+ * @param xl left four bytes halves of input to be encrypted
+ * @param xr right four bytes halves of input to be encrypted
+ * @param decrypt 0 for encryption, 1 for decryption
+ */
+void av_blowfish_crypt_ecb(struct AVBlowfish *ctx, uint32_t *xl, uint32_t *xr,
+                           int decrypt);
+
+/**
+ * Encrypt or decrypt a buffer using a previously initialized context.
+ *
+ * @param ctx an AVBlowfish context
+ * @param dst destination array, can be equal to src
+ * @param src source array, can be equal to dst
+ * @param count number of 8 byte blocks
+ * @param iv initialization vector for CBC mode, if NULL ECB will be used
+ * @param decrypt 0 for encryption, 1 for decryption
+ */
+void av_blowfish_crypt(struct AVBlowfish *ctx, uint8_t *dst, const uint8_t *src,
+                       int count, uint8_t *iv, int decrypt);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_BLOWFISH_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/bprint.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/bprint.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f27d30f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/bprint.h
@@ -0,0 +1,251 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2012 Nicolas George
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavu_avbprint
+ * AVBPrint public header
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_BPRINT_H
+#define AVUTIL_BPRINT_H
+
+#include <stdarg.h>
+
+#include "attributes.h"
+#include "avstring.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_avbprint AVBPrint
+ * @ingroup lavu_data
+ *
+ * A buffer to print data progressively
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Define a structure with extra padding to a fixed size
+ * This helps ensuring binary compatibility with future versions.
+ */
+
+#define FF_PAD_STRUCTURE(name, size, ...) \
+struct ff_pad_helper_##name { __VA_ARGS__ }; \
+typedef struct name { \
+    __VA_ARGS__ \
+    char reserved_padding[size - sizeof(struct ff_pad_helper_##name)]; \
+} name;
+
+/**
+ * Buffer to print data progressively
+ *
+ * The string buffer grows as necessary and is always 0-terminated.
+ * The content of the string is never accessed, and thus is
+ * encoding-agnostic and can even hold binary data.
+ *
+ * Small buffers are kept in the structure itself, and thus require no
+ * memory allocation at all (unless the contents of the buffer is needed
+ * after the structure goes out of scope). This is almost as lightweight as
+ * declaring a local `char buf[512]`.
+ *
+ * The length of the string can go beyond the allocated size: the buffer is
+ * then truncated, but the functions still keep account of the actual total
+ * length.
+ *
+ * In other words, AVBPrint.len can be greater than AVBPrint.size and records
+ * the total length of what would have been to the buffer if there had been
+ * enough memory.
+ *
+ * Append operations do not need to be tested for failure: if a memory
+ * allocation fails, data stop being appended to the buffer, but the length
+ * is still updated. This situation can be tested with
+ * av_bprint_is_complete().
+ *
+ * The AVBPrint.size_max field determines several possible behaviours:
+ * - `size_max = -1` (= `UINT_MAX`) or any large value will let the buffer be
+ *   reallocated as necessary, with an amortized linear cost.
+ * - `size_max = 0` prevents writing anything to the buffer: only the total
+ *   length is computed. The write operations can then possibly be repeated in
+ *   a buffer with exactly the necessary size
+ *   (using `size_init = size_max = len + 1`).
+ * - `size_max = 1` is automatically replaced by the exact size available in the
+ *   structure itself, thus ensuring no dynamic memory allocation. The
+ *   internal buffer is large enough to hold a reasonable paragraph of text,
+ *   such as the current paragraph.
+ */
+
+FF_PAD_STRUCTURE(AVBPrint, 1024,
+    char *str;         /**< string so far */
+    unsigned len;      /**< length so far */
+    unsigned size;     /**< allocated memory */
+    unsigned size_max; /**< maximum allocated memory */
+    char reserved_internal_buffer[1];
+)
+
+/**
+ * @name Max size special values
+ * Convenience macros for special values for av_bprint_init() size_max
+ * parameter.
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Buffer will be reallocated as necessary, with an amortized linear cost.
+ */
+#define AV_BPRINT_SIZE_UNLIMITED  ((unsigned)-1)
+/**
+ * Use the exact size available in the AVBPrint structure itself.
+ *
+ * Thus ensuring no dynamic memory allocation. The internal buffer is large
+ * enough to hold a reasonable paragraph of text, such as the current paragraph.
+ */
+#define AV_BPRINT_SIZE_AUTOMATIC  1
+/**
+ * Do not write anything to the buffer, only calculate the total length.
+ *
+ * The write operations can then possibly be repeated in a buffer with
+ * exactly the necessary size (using `size_init = size_max = AVBPrint.len + 1`).
+ */
+#define AV_BPRINT_SIZE_COUNT_ONLY 0
+/** @} */
+
+/**
+ * Init a print buffer.
+ *
+ * @param buf        buffer to init
+ * @param size_init  initial size (including the final 0)
+ * @param size_max   maximum size;
+ *                   - `0` means do not write anything, just count the length
+ *                   - `1` is replaced by the maximum value for automatic storage
+ *                       any large value means that the internal buffer will be
+ *                       reallocated as needed up to that limit
+ *                   - `-1` is converted to `UINT_MAX`, the largest limit possible.
+ *                   Check also `AV_BPRINT_SIZE_*` macros.
+ */
+void av_bprint_init(AVBPrint *buf, unsigned size_init, unsigned size_max);
+
+/**
+ * Init a print buffer using a pre-existing buffer.
+ *
+ * The buffer will not be reallocated.
+ *
+ * @param buf     buffer structure to init
+ * @param buffer  byte buffer to use for the string data
+ * @param size    size of buffer
+ */
+void av_bprint_init_for_buffer(AVBPrint *buf, char *buffer, unsigned size);
+
+/**
+ * Append a formatted string to a print buffer.
+ */
+void av_bprintf(AVBPrint *buf, const char *fmt, ...) av_printf_format(2, 3);
+
+/**
+ * Append a formatted string to a print buffer.
+ */
+void av_vbprintf(AVBPrint *buf, const char *fmt, va_list vl_arg);
+
+/**
+ * Append char c n times to a print buffer.
+ */
+void av_bprint_chars(AVBPrint *buf, char c, unsigned n);
+
+/**
+ * Append data to a print buffer.
+ *
+ * param buf  bprint buffer to use
+ * param data pointer to data
+ * param size size of data
+ */
+void av_bprint_append_data(AVBPrint *buf, const char *data, unsigned size);
+
+struct tm;
+/**
+ * Append a formatted date and time to a print buffer.
+ *
+ * param buf  bprint buffer to use
+ * param fmt  date and time format string, see strftime()
+ * param tm   broken-down time structure to translate
+ *
+ * @note due to poor design of the standard strftime function, it may
+ * produce poor results if the format string expands to a very long text and
+ * the bprint buffer is near the limit stated by the size_max option.
+ */
+void av_bprint_strftime(AVBPrint *buf, const char *fmt, const struct tm *tm);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate bytes in the buffer for external use.
+ *
+ * @param[in]  buf          buffer structure
+ * @param[in]  size         required size
+ * @param[out] mem          pointer to the memory area
+ * @param[out] actual_size  size of the memory area after allocation;
+ *                          can be larger or smaller than size
+ */
+void av_bprint_get_buffer(AVBPrint *buf, unsigned size,
+                          unsigned char **mem, unsigned *actual_size);
+
+/**
+ * Reset the string to "" but keep internal allocated data.
+ */
+void av_bprint_clear(AVBPrint *buf);
+
+/**
+ * Test if the print buffer is complete (not truncated).
+ *
+ * It may have been truncated due to a memory allocation failure
+ * or the size_max limit (compare size and size_max if necessary).
+ */
+static inline int av_bprint_is_complete(const AVBPrint *buf)
+{
+    return buf->len < buf->size;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Finalize a print buffer.
+ *
+ * The print buffer can no longer be used afterwards,
+ * but the len and size fields are still valid.
+ *
+ * @arg[out] ret_str  if not NULL, used to return a permanent copy of the
+ *                    buffer contents, or NULL if memory allocation fails;
+ *                    if NULL, the buffer is discarded and freed
+ * @return  0 for success or error code (probably AVERROR(ENOMEM))
+ */
+int av_bprint_finalize(AVBPrint *buf, char **ret_str);
+
+/**
+ * Escape the content in src and append it to dstbuf.
+ *
+ * @param dstbuf        already inited destination bprint buffer
+ * @param src           string containing the text to escape
+ * @param special_chars string containing the special characters which
+ *                      need to be escaped, can be NULL
+ * @param mode          escape mode to employ, see AV_ESCAPE_MODE_* macros.
+ *                      Any unknown value for mode will be considered equivalent to
+ *                      AV_ESCAPE_MODE_BACKSLASH, but this behaviour can change without
+ *                      notice.
+ * @param flags         flags which control how to escape, see AV_ESCAPE_FLAG_* macros
+ */
+void av_bprint_escape(AVBPrint *dstbuf, const char *src, const char *special_chars,
+                      enum AVEscapeMode mode, int flags);
+
+/** @} */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_BPRINT_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/bswap.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/bswap.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4840ab4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/bswap.h
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2006 Michael Niedermayer <michaelni@gmx.at>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * byte swapping routines
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_BSWAP_H
+#define AVUTIL_BSWAP_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include "libavutil/avconfig.h"
+#include "attributes.h"
+
+#ifdef HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H
+
+#include "config.h"
+
+#if   ARCH_AARCH64
+#   include "aarch64/bswap.h"
+#elif ARCH_ARM
+#   include "arm/bswap.h"
+#elif ARCH_AVR32
+#   include "avr32/bswap.h"
+#elif ARCH_RISCV
+#   include "riscv/bswap.h"
+#elif ARCH_SH4
+#   include "sh4/bswap.h"
+#elif ARCH_X86
+#   include "x86/bswap.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif /* HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H */
+
+#define AV_BSWAP16C(x) (((x) << 8 & 0xff00)  | ((x) >> 8 & 0x00ff))
+#define AV_BSWAP32C(x) (AV_BSWAP16C(x) << 16 | AV_BSWAP16C((x) >> 16))
+#define AV_BSWAP64C(x) (AV_BSWAP32C(x) << 32 | AV_BSWAP32C((x) >> 32))
+
+#define AV_BSWAPC(s, x) AV_BSWAP##s##C(x)
+
+#ifndef av_bswap16
+static av_always_inline av_const uint16_t av_bswap16(uint16_t x)
+{
+    x= (x>>8) | (x<<8);
+    return x;
+}
+#endif
+
+#ifndef av_bswap32
+static av_always_inline av_const uint32_t av_bswap32(uint32_t x)
+{
+    return AV_BSWAP32C(x);
+}
+#endif
+
+#ifndef av_bswap64
+static inline uint64_t av_const av_bswap64(uint64_t x)
+{
+    return (uint64_t)av_bswap32(x) << 32 | av_bswap32(x >> 32);
+}
+#endif
+
+// be2ne ... big-endian to native-endian
+// le2ne ... little-endian to native-endian
+
+#if AV_HAVE_BIGENDIAN
+#define av_be2ne16(x) (x)
+#define av_be2ne32(x) (x)
+#define av_be2ne64(x) (x)
+#define av_le2ne16(x) av_bswap16(x)
+#define av_le2ne32(x) av_bswap32(x)
+#define av_le2ne64(x) av_bswap64(x)
+#define AV_BE2NEC(s, x) (x)
+#define AV_LE2NEC(s, x) AV_BSWAPC(s, x)
+#else
+#define av_be2ne16(x) av_bswap16(x)
+#define av_be2ne32(x) av_bswap32(x)
+#define av_be2ne64(x) av_bswap64(x)
+#define av_le2ne16(x) (x)
+#define av_le2ne32(x) (x)
+#define av_le2ne64(x) (x)
+#define AV_BE2NEC(s, x) AV_BSWAPC(s, x)
+#define AV_LE2NEC(s, x) (x)
+#endif
+
+#define AV_BE2NE16C(x) AV_BE2NEC(16, x)
+#define AV_BE2NE32C(x) AV_BE2NEC(32, x)
+#define AV_BE2NE64C(x) AV_BE2NEC(64, x)
+#define AV_LE2NE16C(x) AV_LE2NEC(16, x)
+#define AV_LE2NE32C(x) AV_LE2NEC(32, x)
+#define AV_LE2NE64C(x) AV_LE2NEC(64, x)
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_BSWAP_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/buffer.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/buffer.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e1ef5b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/buffer.h
@@ -0,0 +1,322 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavu_buffer
+ * refcounted data buffer API
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_BUFFER_H
+#define AVUTIL_BUFFER_H
+
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_buffer AVBuffer
+ * @ingroup lavu_data
+ *
+ * @{
+ * AVBuffer is an API for reference-counted data buffers.
+ *
+ * There are two core objects in this API -- AVBuffer and AVBufferRef. AVBuffer
+ * represents the data buffer itself; it is opaque and not meant to be accessed
+ * by the caller directly, but only through AVBufferRef. However, the caller may
+ * e.g. compare two AVBuffer pointers to check whether two different references
+ * are describing the same data buffer. AVBufferRef represents a single
+ * reference to an AVBuffer and it is the object that may be manipulated by the
+ * caller directly.
+ *
+ * There are two functions provided for creating a new AVBuffer with a single
+ * reference -- av_buffer_alloc() to just allocate a new buffer, and
+ * av_buffer_create() to wrap an existing array in an AVBuffer. From an existing
+ * reference, additional references may be created with av_buffer_ref().
+ * Use av_buffer_unref() to free a reference (this will automatically free the
+ * data once all the references are freed).
+ *
+ * The convention throughout this API and the rest of FFmpeg is such that the
+ * buffer is considered writable if there exists only one reference to it (and
+ * it has not been marked as read-only). The av_buffer_is_writable() function is
+ * provided to check whether this is true and av_buffer_make_writable() will
+ * automatically create a new writable buffer when necessary.
+ * Of course nothing prevents the calling code from violating this convention,
+ * however that is safe only when all the existing references are under its
+ * control.
+ *
+ * @note Referencing and unreferencing the buffers is thread-safe and thus
+ * may be done from multiple threads simultaneously without any need for
+ * additional locking.
+ *
+ * @note Two different references to the same buffer can point to different
+ * parts of the buffer (i.e. their AVBufferRef.data will not be equal).
+ */
+
+/**
+ * A reference counted buffer type. It is opaque and is meant to be used through
+ * references (AVBufferRef).
+ */
+typedef struct AVBuffer AVBuffer;
+
+/**
+ * A reference to a data buffer.
+ *
+ * The size of this struct is not a part of the public ABI and it is not meant
+ * to be allocated directly.
+ */
+typedef struct AVBufferRef {
+    AVBuffer *buffer;
+
+    /**
+     * The data buffer. It is considered writable if and only if
+     * this is the only reference to the buffer, in which case
+     * av_buffer_is_writable() returns 1.
+     */
+    uint8_t *data;
+    /**
+     * Size of data in bytes.
+     */
+    size_t   size;
+} AVBufferRef;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVBuffer of the given size using av_malloc().
+ *
+ * @return an AVBufferRef of given size or NULL when out of memory
+ */
+AVBufferRef *av_buffer_alloc(size_t size);
+
+/**
+ * Same as av_buffer_alloc(), except the returned buffer will be initialized
+ * to zero.
+ */
+AVBufferRef *av_buffer_allocz(size_t size);
+
+/**
+ * Always treat the buffer as read-only, even when it has only one
+ * reference.
+ */
+#define AV_BUFFER_FLAG_READONLY (1 << 0)
+
+/**
+ * Create an AVBuffer from an existing array.
+ *
+ * If this function is successful, data is owned by the AVBuffer. The caller may
+ * only access data through the returned AVBufferRef and references derived from
+ * it.
+ * If this function fails, data is left untouched.
+ * @param data   data array
+ * @param size   size of data in bytes
+ * @param free   a callback for freeing this buffer's data
+ * @param opaque parameter to be got for processing or passed to free
+ * @param flags  a combination of AV_BUFFER_FLAG_*
+ *
+ * @return an AVBufferRef referring to data on success, NULL on failure.
+ */
+AVBufferRef *av_buffer_create(uint8_t *data, size_t size,
+                              void (*free)(void *opaque, uint8_t *data),
+                              void *opaque, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Default free callback, which calls av_free() on the buffer data.
+ * This function is meant to be passed to av_buffer_create(), not called
+ * directly.
+ */
+void av_buffer_default_free(void *opaque, uint8_t *data);
+
+/**
+ * Create a new reference to an AVBuffer.
+ *
+ * @return a new AVBufferRef referring to the same AVBuffer as buf or NULL on
+ * failure.
+ */
+AVBufferRef *av_buffer_ref(const AVBufferRef *buf);
+
+/**
+ * Free a given reference and automatically free the buffer if there are no more
+ * references to it.
+ *
+ * @param buf the reference to be freed. The pointer is set to NULL on return.
+ */
+void av_buffer_unref(AVBufferRef **buf);
+
+/**
+ * @return 1 if the caller may write to the data referred to by buf (which is
+ * true if and only if buf is the only reference to the underlying AVBuffer).
+ * Return 0 otherwise.
+ * A positive answer is valid until av_buffer_ref() is called on buf.
+ */
+int av_buffer_is_writable(const AVBufferRef *buf);
+
+/**
+ * @return the opaque parameter set by av_buffer_create.
+ */
+void *av_buffer_get_opaque(const AVBufferRef *buf);
+
+int av_buffer_get_ref_count(const AVBufferRef *buf);
+
+/**
+ * Create a writable reference from a given buffer reference, avoiding data copy
+ * if possible.
+ *
+ * @param buf buffer reference to make writable. On success, buf is either left
+ *            untouched, or it is unreferenced and a new writable AVBufferRef is
+ *            written in its place. On failure, buf is left untouched.
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on failure.
+ */
+int av_buffer_make_writable(AVBufferRef **buf);
+
+/**
+ * Reallocate a given buffer.
+ *
+ * @param buf  a buffer reference to reallocate. On success, buf will be
+ *             unreferenced and a new reference with the required size will be
+ *             written in its place. On failure buf will be left untouched. *buf
+ *             may be NULL, then a new buffer is allocated.
+ * @param size required new buffer size.
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on failure.
+ *
+ * @note the buffer is actually reallocated with av_realloc() only if it was
+ * initially allocated through av_buffer_realloc(NULL) and there is only one
+ * reference to it (i.e. the one passed to this function). In all other cases
+ * a new buffer is allocated and the data is copied.
+ */
+int av_buffer_realloc(AVBufferRef **buf, size_t size);
+
+/**
+ * Ensure dst refers to the same data as src.
+ *
+ * When *dst is already equivalent to src, do nothing. Otherwise unreference dst
+ * and replace it with a new reference to src.
+ *
+ * @param dst Pointer to either a valid buffer reference or NULL. On success,
+ *            this will point to a buffer reference equivalent to src. On
+ *            failure, dst will be left untouched.
+ * @param src A buffer reference to replace dst with. May be NULL, then this
+ *            function is equivalent to av_buffer_unref(dst).
+ * @return 0 on success
+ *         AVERROR(ENOMEM) on memory allocation failure.
+ */
+int av_buffer_replace(AVBufferRef **dst, const AVBufferRef *src);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_bufferpool AVBufferPool
+ * @ingroup lavu_data
+ *
+ * @{
+ * AVBufferPool is an API for a lock-free thread-safe pool of AVBuffers.
+ *
+ * Frequently allocating and freeing large buffers may be slow. AVBufferPool is
+ * meant to solve this in cases when the caller needs a set of buffers of the
+ * same size (the most obvious use case being buffers for raw video or audio
+ * frames).
+ *
+ * At the beginning, the user must call av_buffer_pool_init() to create the
+ * buffer pool. Then whenever a buffer is needed, call av_buffer_pool_get() to
+ * get a reference to a new buffer, similar to av_buffer_alloc(). This new
+ * reference works in all aspects the same way as the one created by
+ * av_buffer_alloc(). However, when the last reference to this buffer is
+ * unreferenced, it is returned to the pool instead of being freed and will be
+ * reused for subsequent av_buffer_pool_get() calls.
+ *
+ * When the caller is done with the pool and no longer needs to allocate any new
+ * buffers, av_buffer_pool_uninit() must be called to mark the pool as freeable.
+ * Once all the buffers are released, it will automatically be freed.
+ *
+ * Allocating and releasing buffers with this API is thread-safe as long as
+ * either the default alloc callback is used, or the user-supplied one is
+ * thread-safe.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * The buffer pool. This structure is opaque and not meant to be accessed
+ * directly. It is allocated with av_buffer_pool_init() and freed with
+ * av_buffer_pool_uninit().
+ */
+typedef struct AVBufferPool AVBufferPool;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate and initialize a buffer pool.
+ *
+ * @param size size of each buffer in this pool
+ * @param alloc a function that will be used to allocate new buffers when the
+ * pool is empty. May be NULL, then the default allocator will be used
+ * (av_buffer_alloc()).
+ * @return newly created buffer pool on success, NULL on error.
+ */
+AVBufferPool *av_buffer_pool_init(size_t size, AVBufferRef* (*alloc)(size_t size));
+
+/**
+ * Allocate and initialize a buffer pool with a more complex allocator.
+ *
+ * @param size size of each buffer in this pool
+ * @param opaque arbitrary user data used by the allocator
+ * @param alloc a function that will be used to allocate new buffers when the
+ *              pool is empty. May be NULL, then the default allocator will be
+ *              used (av_buffer_alloc()).
+ * @param pool_free a function that will be called immediately before the pool
+ *                  is freed. I.e. after av_buffer_pool_uninit() is called
+ *                  by the caller and all the frames are returned to the pool
+ *                  and freed. It is intended to uninitialize the user opaque
+ *                  data. May be NULL.
+ * @return newly created buffer pool on success, NULL on error.
+ */
+AVBufferPool *av_buffer_pool_init2(size_t size, void *opaque,
+                                   AVBufferRef* (*alloc)(void *opaque, size_t size),
+                                   void (*pool_free)(void *opaque));
+
+/**
+ * Mark the pool as being available for freeing. It will actually be freed only
+ * once all the allocated buffers associated with the pool are released. Thus it
+ * is safe to call this function while some of the allocated buffers are still
+ * in use.
+ *
+ * @param pool pointer to the pool to be freed. It will be set to NULL.
+ */
+void av_buffer_pool_uninit(AVBufferPool **pool);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a new AVBuffer, reusing an old buffer from the pool when available.
+ * This function may be called simultaneously from multiple threads.
+ *
+ * @return a reference to the new buffer on success, NULL on error.
+ */
+AVBufferRef *av_buffer_pool_get(AVBufferPool *pool);
+
+/**
+ * Query the original opaque parameter of an allocated buffer in the pool.
+ *
+ * @param ref a buffer reference to a buffer returned by av_buffer_pool_get.
+ * @return the opaque parameter set by the buffer allocator function of the
+ *         buffer pool.
+ *
+ * @note the opaque parameter of ref is used by the buffer pool implementation,
+ * therefore you have to use this function to access the original opaque
+ * parameter of an allocated buffer.
+ */
+void *av_buffer_pool_buffer_get_opaque(const AVBufferRef *ref);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_BUFFER_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/camellia.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/camellia.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9678710
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/camellia.h
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+/*
+ * An implementation of the CAMELLIA algorithm as mentioned in RFC3713
+ * Copyright (c) 2014 Supraja Meedinti
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_CAMELLIA_H
+#define AVUTIL_CAMELLIA_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+
+/**
+  * @file
+  * @brief Public header for libavutil CAMELLIA algorithm
+  * @defgroup lavu_camellia CAMELLIA
+  * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+  * @{
+  */
+
+extern const int av_camellia_size;
+
+struct AVCAMELLIA;
+
+/**
+  * Allocate an AVCAMELLIA context
+  * To free the struct: av_free(ptr)
+  */
+struct AVCAMELLIA *av_camellia_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+  * Initialize an AVCAMELLIA context.
+  *
+  * @param ctx an AVCAMELLIA context
+  * @param key a key of 16, 24, 32 bytes used for encryption/decryption
+  * @param key_bits number of keybits: possible are 128, 192, 256
+ */
+int av_camellia_init(struct AVCAMELLIA *ctx, const uint8_t *key, int key_bits);
+
+/**
+  * Encrypt or decrypt a buffer using a previously initialized context
+  *
+  * @param ctx an AVCAMELLIA context
+  * @param dst destination array, can be equal to src
+  * @param src source array, can be equal to dst
+  * @param count number of 16 byte blocks
+  * @param iv initialization vector for CBC mode, NULL for ECB mode
+  * @param decrypt 0 for encryption, 1 for decryption
+ */
+void av_camellia_crypt(struct AVCAMELLIA *ctx, uint8_t *dst, const uint8_t *src, int count, uint8_t* iv, int decrypt);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+#endif /* AVUTIL_CAMELLIA_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/cast5.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/cast5.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ad5b347
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/cast5.h
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+/*
+ * An implementation of the CAST128 algorithm as mentioned in RFC2144
+ * Copyright (c) 2014 Supraja Meedinti
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_CAST5_H
+#define AVUTIL_CAST5_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+
+/**
+  * @file
+  * @brief Public header for libavutil CAST5 algorithm
+  * @defgroup lavu_cast5 CAST5
+  * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+  * @{
+  */
+
+extern const int av_cast5_size;
+
+struct AVCAST5;
+
+/**
+  * Allocate an AVCAST5 context
+  * To free the struct: av_free(ptr)
+  */
+struct AVCAST5 *av_cast5_alloc(void);
+/**
+  * Initialize an AVCAST5 context.
+  *
+  * @param ctx an AVCAST5 context
+  * @param key a key of 5,6,...16 bytes used for encryption/decryption
+  * @param key_bits number of keybits: possible are 40,48,...,128
+  * @return 0 on success, less than 0 on failure
+ */
+int av_cast5_init(struct AVCAST5 *ctx, const uint8_t *key, int key_bits);
+
+/**
+  * Encrypt or decrypt a buffer using a previously initialized context, ECB mode only
+  *
+  * @param ctx an AVCAST5 context
+  * @param dst destination array, can be equal to src
+  * @param src source array, can be equal to dst
+  * @param count number of 8 byte blocks
+  * @param decrypt 0 for encryption, 1 for decryption
+ */
+void av_cast5_crypt(struct AVCAST5 *ctx, uint8_t *dst, const uint8_t *src, int count, int decrypt);
+
+/**
+  * Encrypt or decrypt a buffer using a previously initialized context
+  *
+  * @param ctx an AVCAST5 context
+  * @param dst destination array, can be equal to src
+  * @param src source array, can be equal to dst
+  * @param count number of 8 byte blocks
+  * @param iv initialization vector for CBC mode, NULL for ECB mode
+  * @param decrypt 0 for encryption, 1 for decryption
+ */
+void av_cast5_crypt2(struct AVCAST5 *ctx, uint8_t *dst, const uint8_t *src, int count, uint8_t *iv, int decrypt);
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+#endif /* AVUTIL_CAST5_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/channel_layout.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/channel_layout.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f345415
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/channel_layout.h
@@ -0,0 +1,783 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2006 Michael Niedermayer <michaelni@gmx.at>
+ * Copyright (c) 2008 Peter Ross
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_H
+#define AVUTIL_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+
+#include "version.h"
+#include "attributes.h"
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavu_audio_channels
+ * Public libavutil channel layout APIs header.
+ */
+
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_audio_channels Audio channels
+ * @ingroup lavu_audio
+ *
+ * Audio channel layout utility functions
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+enum AVChannel {
+    ///< Invalid channel index
+    AV_CHAN_NONE = -1,
+    AV_CHAN_FRONT_LEFT,
+    AV_CHAN_FRONT_RIGHT,
+    AV_CHAN_FRONT_CENTER,
+    AV_CHAN_LOW_FREQUENCY,
+    AV_CHAN_BACK_LEFT,
+    AV_CHAN_BACK_RIGHT,
+    AV_CHAN_FRONT_LEFT_OF_CENTER,
+    AV_CHAN_FRONT_RIGHT_OF_CENTER,
+    AV_CHAN_BACK_CENTER,
+    AV_CHAN_SIDE_LEFT,
+    AV_CHAN_SIDE_RIGHT,
+    AV_CHAN_TOP_CENTER,
+    AV_CHAN_TOP_FRONT_LEFT,
+    AV_CHAN_TOP_FRONT_CENTER,
+    AV_CHAN_TOP_FRONT_RIGHT,
+    AV_CHAN_TOP_BACK_LEFT,
+    AV_CHAN_TOP_BACK_CENTER,
+    AV_CHAN_TOP_BACK_RIGHT,
+    /** Stereo downmix. */
+    AV_CHAN_STEREO_LEFT = 29,
+    /** See above. */
+    AV_CHAN_STEREO_RIGHT,
+    AV_CHAN_WIDE_LEFT,
+    AV_CHAN_WIDE_RIGHT,
+    AV_CHAN_SURROUND_DIRECT_LEFT,
+    AV_CHAN_SURROUND_DIRECT_RIGHT,
+    AV_CHAN_LOW_FREQUENCY_2,
+    AV_CHAN_TOP_SIDE_LEFT,
+    AV_CHAN_TOP_SIDE_RIGHT,
+    AV_CHAN_BOTTOM_FRONT_CENTER,
+    AV_CHAN_BOTTOM_FRONT_LEFT,
+    AV_CHAN_BOTTOM_FRONT_RIGHT,
+
+    /** Channel is empty can be safely skipped. */
+    AV_CHAN_UNUSED = 0x200,
+
+    /** Channel contains data, but its position is unknown. */
+    AV_CHAN_UNKNOWN = 0x300,
+
+    /**
+     * Range of channels between AV_CHAN_AMBISONIC_BASE and
+     * AV_CHAN_AMBISONIC_END represent Ambisonic components using the ACN system.
+     *
+     * Given a channel id `<i>` between AV_CHAN_AMBISONIC_BASE and
+     * AV_CHAN_AMBISONIC_END (inclusive), the ACN index of the channel `<n>` is
+     * `<n> = <i> - AV_CHAN_AMBISONIC_BASE`.
+     *
+     * @note these values are only used for AV_CHANNEL_ORDER_CUSTOM channel
+     * orderings, the AV_CHANNEL_ORDER_AMBISONIC ordering orders the channels
+     * implicitly by their position in the stream.
+     */
+    AV_CHAN_AMBISONIC_BASE = 0x400,
+    // leave space for 1024 ids, which correspond to maximum order-32 harmonics,
+    // which should be enough for the foreseeable use cases
+    AV_CHAN_AMBISONIC_END  = 0x7ff,
+};
+
+enum AVChannelOrder {
+    /**
+     * Only the channel count is specified, without any further information
+     * about the channel order.
+     */
+    AV_CHANNEL_ORDER_UNSPEC,
+    /**
+     * The native channel order, i.e. the channels are in the same order in
+     * which they are defined in the AVChannel enum. This supports up to 63
+     * different channels.
+     */
+    AV_CHANNEL_ORDER_NATIVE,
+    /**
+     * The channel order does not correspond to any other predefined order and
+     * is stored as an explicit map. For example, this could be used to support
+     * layouts with 64 or more channels, or with empty/skipped (AV_CHAN_SILENCE)
+     * channels at arbitrary positions.
+     */
+    AV_CHANNEL_ORDER_CUSTOM,
+    /**
+     * The audio is represented as the decomposition of the sound field into
+     * spherical harmonics. Each channel corresponds to a single expansion
+     * component. Channels are ordered according to ACN (Ambisonic Channel
+     * Number).
+     *
+     * The channel with the index n in the stream contains the spherical
+     * harmonic of degree l and order m given by
+     * @code{.unparsed}
+     *   l   = floor(sqrt(n)),
+     *   m   = n - l * (l + 1).
+     * @endcode
+     *
+     * Conversely given a spherical harmonic of degree l and order m, the
+     * corresponding channel index n is given by
+     * @code{.unparsed}
+     *   n = l * (l + 1) + m.
+     * @endcode
+     *
+     * Normalization is assumed to be SN3D (Schmidt Semi-Normalization)
+     * as defined in AmbiX format $ 2.1.
+     */
+    AV_CHANNEL_ORDER_AMBISONIC,
+};
+
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup channel_masks Audio channel masks
+ *
+ * A channel layout is a 64-bits integer with a bit set for every channel.
+ * The number of bits set must be equal to the number of channels.
+ * The value 0 means that the channel layout is not known.
+ * @note this data structure is not powerful enough to handle channels
+ * combinations that have the same channel multiple times, such as
+ * dual-mono.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+#define AV_CH_FRONT_LEFT             (1ULL << AV_CHAN_FRONT_LEFT           )
+#define AV_CH_FRONT_RIGHT            (1ULL << AV_CHAN_FRONT_RIGHT          )
+#define AV_CH_FRONT_CENTER           (1ULL << AV_CHAN_FRONT_CENTER         )
+#define AV_CH_LOW_FREQUENCY          (1ULL << AV_CHAN_LOW_FREQUENCY        )
+#define AV_CH_BACK_LEFT              (1ULL << AV_CHAN_BACK_LEFT            )
+#define AV_CH_BACK_RIGHT             (1ULL << AV_CHAN_BACK_RIGHT           )
+#define AV_CH_FRONT_LEFT_OF_CENTER   (1ULL << AV_CHAN_FRONT_LEFT_OF_CENTER )
+#define AV_CH_FRONT_RIGHT_OF_CENTER  (1ULL << AV_CHAN_FRONT_RIGHT_OF_CENTER)
+#define AV_CH_BACK_CENTER            (1ULL << AV_CHAN_BACK_CENTER          )
+#define AV_CH_SIDE_LEFT              (1ULL << AV_CHAN_SIDE_LEFT            )
+#define AV_CH_SIDE_RIGHT             (1ULL << AV_CHAN_SIDE_RIGHT           )
+#define AV_CH_TOP_CENTER             (1ULL << AV_CHAN_TOP_CENTER           )
+#define AV_CH_TOP_FRONT_LEFT         (1ULL << AV_CHAN_TOP_FRONT_LEFT       )
+#define AV_CH_TOP_FRONT_CENTER       (1ULL << AV_CHAN_TOP_FRONT_CENTER     )
+#define AV_CH_TOP_FRONT_RIGHT        (1ULL << AV_CHAN_TOP_FRONT_RIGHT      )
+#define AV_CH_TOP_BACK_LEFT          (1ULL << AV_CHAN_TOP_BACK_LEFT        )
+#define AV_CH_TOP_BACK_CENTER        (1ULL << AV_CHAN_TOP_BACK_CENTER      )
+#define AV_CH_TOP_BACK_RIGHT         (1ULL << AV_CHAN_TOP_BACK_RIGHT       )
+#define AV_CH_STEREO_LEFT            (1ULL << AV_CHAN_STEREO_LEFT          )
+#define AV_CH_STEREO_RIGHT           (1ULL << AV_CHAN_STEREO_RIGHT         )
+#define AV_CH_WIDE_LEFT              (1ULL << AV_CHAN_WIDE_LEFT            )
+#define AV_CH_WIDE_RIGHT             (1ULL << AV_CHAN_WIDE_RIGHT           )
+#define AV_CH_SURROUND_DIRECT_LEFT   (1ULL << AV_CHAN_SURROUND_DIRECT_LEFT )
+#define AV_CH_SURROUND_DIRECT_RIGHT  (1ULL << AV_CHAN_SURROUND_DIRECT_RIGHT)
+#define AV_CH_LOW_FREQUENCY_2        (1ULL << AV_CHAN_LOW_FREQUENCY_2      )
+#define AV_CH_TOP_SIDE_LEFT          (1ULL << AV_CHAN_TOP_SIDE_LEFT        )
+#define AV_CH_TOP_SIDE_RIGHT         (1ULL << AV_CHAN_TOP_SIDE_RIGHT       )
+#define AV_CH_BOTTOM_FRONT_CENTER    (1ULL << AV_CHAN_BOTTOM_FRONT_CENTER  )
+#define AV_CH_BOTTOM_FRONT_LEFT      (1ULL << AV_CHAN_BOTTOM_FRONT_LEFT    )
+#define AV_CH_BOTTOM_FRONT_RIGHT     (1ULL << AV_CHAN_BOTTOM_FRONT_RIGHT   )
+
+#if FF_API_OLD_CHANNEL_LAYOUT
+/** Channel mask value used for AVCodecContext.request_channel_layout
+    to indicate that the user requests the channel order of the decoder output
+    to be the native codec channel order.
+    @deprecated channel order is now indicated in a special field in
+                AVChannelLayout
+    */
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_NATIVE          0x8000000000000000ULL
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ * @defgroup channel_mask_c Audio channel layouts
+ * @{
+ * */
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_MONO              (AV_CH_FRONT_CENTER)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_STEREO            (AV_CH_FRONT_LEFT|AV_CH_FRONT_RIGHT)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_2POINT1           (AV_CH_LAYOUT_STEREO|AV_CH_LOW_FREQUENCY)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_2_1               (AV_CH_LAYOUT_STEREO|AV_CH_BACK_CENTER)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_SURROUND          (AV_CH_LAYOUT_STEREO|AV_CH_FRONT_CENTER)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_3POINT1           (AV_CH_LAYOUT_SURROUND|AV_CH_LOW_FREQUENCY)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_4POINT0           (AV_CH_LAYOUT_SURROUND|AV_CH_BACK_CENTER)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_4POINT1           (AV_CH_LAYOUT_4POINT0|AV_CH_LOW_FREQUENCY)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_2_2               (AV_CH_LAYOUT_STEREO|AV_CH_SIDE_LEFT|AV_CH_SIDE_RIGHT)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_QUAD              (AV_CH_LAYOUT_STEREO|AV_CH_BACK_LEFT|AV_CH_BACK_RIGHT)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT0           (AV_CH_LAYOUT_SURROUND|AV_CH_SIDE_LEFT|AV_CH_SIDE_RIGHT)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT1           (AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT0|AV_CH_LOW_FREQUENCY)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT0_BACK      (AV_CH_LAYOUT_SURROUND|AV_CH_BACK_LEFT|AV_CH_BACK_RIGHT)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT1_BACK      (AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT0_BACK|AV_CH_LOW_FREQUENCY)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_6POINT0           (AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT0|AV_CH_BACK_CENTER)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_6POINT0_FRONT     (AV_CH_LAYOUT_2_2|AV_CH_FRONT_LEFT_OF_CENTER|AV_CH_FRONT_RIGHT_OF_CENTER)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_HEXAGONAL         (AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT0_BACK|AV_CH_BACK_CENTER)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_6POINT1           (AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT1|AV_CH_BACK_CENTER)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_6POINT1_BACK      (AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT1_BACK|AV_CH_BACK_CENTER)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_6POINT1_FRONT     (AV_CH_LAYOUT_6POINT0_FRONT|AV_CH_LOW_FREQUENCY)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_7POINT0           (AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT0|AV_CH_BACK_LEFT|AV_CH_BACK_RIGHT)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_7POINT0_FRONT     (AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT0|AV_CH_FRONT_LEFT_OF_CENTER|AV_CH_FRONT_RIGHT_OF_CENTER)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_7POINT1           (AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT1|AV_CH_BACK_LEFT|AV_CH_BACK_RIGHT)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_7POINT1_WIDE      (AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT1|AV_CH_FRONT_LEFT_OF_CENTER|AV_CH_FRONT_RIGHT_OF_CENTER)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_7POINT1_WIDE_BACK (AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT1_BACK|AV_CH_FRONT_LEFT_OF_CENTER|AV_CH_FRONT_RIGHT_OF_CENTER)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_7POINT1_TOP_BACK  (AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT1_BACK|AV_CH_TOP_FRONT_LEFT|AV_CH_TOP_FRONT_RIGHT)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_OCTAGONAL         (AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT0|AV_CH_BACK_LEFT|AV_CH_BACK_CENTER|AV_CH_BACK_RIGHT)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_CUBE              (AV_CH_LAYOUT_QUAD|AV_CH_TOP_FRONT_LEFT|AV_CH_TOP_FRONT_RIGHT|AV_CH_TOP_BACK_LEFT|AV_CH_TOP_BACK_RIGHT)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_HEXADECAGONAL     (AV_CH_LAYOUT_OCTAGONAL|AV_CH_WIDE_LEFT|AV_CH_WIDE_RIGHT|AV_CH_TOP_BACK_LEFT|AV_CH_TOP_BACK_RIGHT|AV_CH_TOP_BACK_CENTER|AV_CH_TOP_FRONT_CENTER|AV_CH_TOP_FRONT_LEFT|AV_CH_TOP_FRONT_RIGHT)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_STEREO_DOWNMIX    (AV_CH_STEREO_LEFT|AV_CH_STEREO_RIGHT)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_22POINT2          (AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT1_BACK|AV_CH_FRONT_LEFT_OF_CENTER|AV_CH_FRONT_RIGHT_OF_CENTER|AV_CH_BACK_CENTER|AV_CH_LOW_FREQUENCY_2|AV_CH_SIDE_LEFT|AV_CH_SIDE_RIGHT|AV_CH_TOP_FRONT_LEFT|AV_CH_TOP_FRONT_RIGHT|AV_CH_TOP_FRONT_CENTER|AV_CH_TOP_CENTER|AV_CH_TOP_BACK_LEFT|AV_CH_TOP_BACK_RIGHT|AV_CH_TOP_SIDE_LEFT|AV_CH_TOP_SIDE_RIGHT|AV_CH_TOP_BACK_CENTER|AV_CH_BOTTOM_FRONT_CENTER|AV_CH_BOTTOM_FRONT_LEFT|AV_CH_BOTTOM_FRONT_RIGHT)
+
+enum AVMatrixEncoding {
+    AV_MATRIX_ENCODING_NONE,
+    AV_MATRIX_ENCODING_DOLBY,
+    AV_MATRIX_ENCODING_DPLII,
+    AV_MATRIX_ENCODING_DPLIIX,
+    AV_MATRIX_ENCODING_DPLIIZ,
+    AV_MATRIX_ENCODING_DOLBYEX,
+    AV_MATRIX_ENCODING_DOLBYHEADPHONE,
+    AV_MATRIX_ENCODING_NB
+};
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * An AVChannelCustom defines a single channel within a custom order layout
+ *
+ * Unlike most structures in FFmpeg, sizeof(AVChannelCustom) is a part of the
+ * public ABI.
+ *
+ * No new fields may be added to it without a major version bump.
+ */
+typedef struct AVChannelCustom {
+    enum AVChannel id;
+    char name[16];
+    void *opaque;
+} AVChannelCustom;
+
+/**
+ * An AVChannelLayout holds information about the channel layout of audio data.
+ *
+ * A channel layout here is defined as a set of channels ordered in a specific
+ * way (unless the channel order is AV_CHANNEL_ORDER_UNSPEC, in which case an
+ * AVChannelLayout carries only the channel count).
+ * All orders may be treated as if they were AV_CHANNEL_ORDER_UNSPEC by
+ * ignoring everything but the channel count, as long as av_channel_layout_check()
+ * considers they are valid.
+ *
+ * Unlike most structures in FFmpeg, sizeof(AVChannelLayout) is a part of the
+ * public ABI and may be used by the caller. E.g. it may be allocated on stack
+ * or embedded in caller-defined structs.
+ *
+ * AVChannelLayout can be initialized as follows:
+ * - default initialization with {0}, followed by setting all used fields
+ *   correctly;
+ * - by assigning one of the predefined AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_* initializers;
+ * - with a constructor function, such as av_channel_layout_default(),
+ *   av_channel_layout_from_mask() or av_channel_layout_from_string().
+ *
+ * The channel layout must be unitialized with av_channel_layout_uninit()
+ *
+ * Copying an AVChannelLayout via assigning is forbidden,
+ * av_channel_layout_copy() must be used instead (and its return value should
+ * be checked)
+ *
+ * No new fields may be added to it without a major version bump, except for
+ * new elements of the union fitting in sizeof(uint64_t).
+ */
+typedef struct AVChannelLayout {
+    /**
+     * Channel order used in this layout.
+     * This is a mandatory field.
+     */
+    enum AVChannelOrder order;
+
+    /**
+     * Number of channels in this layout. Mandatory field.
+     */
+    int nb_channels;
+
+    /**
+     * Details about which channels are present in this layout.
+     * For AV_CHANNEL_ORDER_UNSPEC, this field is undefined and must not be
+     * used.
+     */
+    union {
+        /**
+         * This member must be used for AV_CHANNEL_ORDER_NATIVE, and may be used
+         * for AV_CHANNEL_ORDER_AMBISONIC to signal non-diegetic channels.
+         * It is a bitmask, where the position of each set bit means that the
+         * AVChannel with the corresponding value is present.
+         *
+         * I.e. when (mask & (1 << AV_CHAN_FOO)) is non-zero, then AV_CHAN_FOO
+         * is present in the layout. Otherwise it is not present.
+         *
+         * @note when a channel layout using a bitmask is constructed or
+         * modified manually (i.e.  not using any of the av_channel_layout_*
+         * functions), the code doing it must ensure that the number of set bits
+         * is equal to nb_channels.
+         */
+        uint64_t mask;
+        /**
+         * This member must be used when the channel order is
+         * AV_CHANNEL_ORDER_CUSTOM. It is a nb_channels-sized array, with each
+         * element signalling the presence of the AVChannel with the
+         * corresponding value in map[i].id.
+         *
+         * I.e. when map[i].id is equal to AV_CHAN_FOO, then AV_CH_FOO is the
+         * i-th channel in the audio data.
+         *
+         * When map[i].id is in the range between AV_CHAN_AMBISONIC_BASE and
+         * AV_CHAN_AMBISONIC_END (inclusive), the channel contains an ambisonic
+         * component with ACN index (as defined above)
+         * n = map[i].id - AV_CHAN_AMBISONIC_BASE.
+         *
+         * map[i].name may be filled with a 0-terminated string, in which case
+         * it will be used for the purpose of identifying the channel with the
+         * convenience functions below. Otherise it must be zeroed.
+         */
+        AVChannelCustom *map;
+    } u;
+
+    /**
+     * For some private data of the user.
+     */
+    void *opaque;
+} AVChannelLayout;
+
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(nb, m) \
+    { .order = AV_CHANNEL_ORDER_NATIVE, .nb_channels = (nb), .u = { .mask = (m) }}
+
+/**
+ * @name Common pre-defined channel layouts
+ * @{
+ */
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MONO              AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(1,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_MONO)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_STEREO            AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(2,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_STEREO)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_2POINT1           AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(3,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_2POINT1)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_2_1               AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(3,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_2_1)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_SURROUND          AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(3,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_SURROUND)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_3POINT1           AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(4,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_3POINT1)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_4POINT0           AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(4,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_4POINT0)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_4POINT1           AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(5,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_4POINT1)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_2_2               AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(4,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_2_2)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_QUAD              AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(4,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_QUAD)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_5POINT0           AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(5,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT0)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_5POINT1           AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(6,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT1)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_5POINT0_BACK      AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(5,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT0_BACK)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_5POINT1_BACK      AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(6,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT1_BACK)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_6POINT0           AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(6,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_6POINT0)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_6POINT0_FRONT     AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(6,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_6POINT0_FRONT)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_HEXAGONAL         AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(6,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_HEXAGONAL)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_6POINT1           AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(7,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_6POINT1)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_6POINT1_BACK      AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(7,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_6POINT1_BACK)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_6POINT1_FRONT     AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(7,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_6POINT1_FRONT)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_7POINT0           AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(7,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_7POINT0)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_7POINT0_FRONT     AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(7,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_7POINT0_FRONT)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_7POINT1           AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(8,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_7POINT1)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_7POINT1_WIDE      AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(8,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_7POINT1_WIDE)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_7POINT1_WIDE_BACK AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(8,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_7POINT1_WIDE_BACK)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_7POINT1_TOP_BACK  AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(8,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_7POINT1_TOP_BACK)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_OCTAGONAL         AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(8,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_OCTAGONAL)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_CUBE              AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(8,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_CUBE)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_HEXADECAGONAL     AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(16, AV_CH_LAYOUT_HEXADECAGONAL)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_STEREO_DOWNMIX    AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(2,  AV_CH_LAYOUT_STEREO_DOWNMIX)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_22POINT2          AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_MASK(24, AV_CH_LAYOUT_22POINT2)
+#define AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_AMBISONIC_FIRST_ORDER \
+    { .order = AV_CHANNEL_ORDER_AMBISONIC, .nb_channels = 4, .u = { .mask = 0 }}
+/** @} */
+
+struct AVBPrint;
+
+#if FF_API_OLD_CHANNEL_LAYOUT
+/**
+ * @name Deprecated Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Return a channel layout id that matches name, or 0 if no match is found.
+ *
+ * name can be one or several of the following notations,
+ * separated by '+' or '|':
+ * - the name of an usual channel layout (mono, stereo, 4.0, quad, 5.0,
+ *   5.0(side), 5.1, 5.1(side), 7.1, 7.1(wide), downmix);
+ * - the name of a single channel (FL, FR, FC, LFE, BL, BR, FLC, FRC, BC,
+ *   SL, SR, TC, TFL, TFC, TFR, TBL, TBC, TBR, DL, DR);
+ * - a number of channels, in decimal, followed by 'c', yielding
+ *   the default channel layout for that number of channels (@see
+ *   av_get_default_channel_layout);
+ * - a channel layout mask, in hexadecimal starting with "0x" (see the
+ *   AV_CH_* macros).
+ *
+ * Example: "stereo+FC" = "2c+FC" = "2c+1c" = "0x7"
+ *
+ * @deprecated use av_channel_layout_from_string()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+uint64_t av_get_channel_layout(const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * Return a channel layout and the number of channels based on the specified name.
+ *
+ * This function is similar to (@see av_get_channel_layout), but can also parse
+ * unknown channel layout specifications.
+ *
+ * @param[in]  name             channel layout specification string
+ * @param[out] channel_layout   parsed channel layout (0 if unknown)
+ * @param[out] nb_channels      number of channels
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, AVERROR(EINVAL) if the parsing fails.
+ * @deprecated use av_channel_layout_from_string()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_get_extended_channel_layout(const char *name, uint64_t* channel_layout, int* nb_channels);
+
+/**
+ * Return a description of a channel layout.
+ * If nb_channels is <= 0, it is guessed from the channel_layout.
+ *
+ * @param buf put here the string containing the channel layout
+ * @param buf_size size in bytes of the buffer
+ * @param nb_channels number of channels
+ * @param channel_layout channel layout bitset
+ * @deprecated use av_channel_layout_describe()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+void av_get_channel_layout_string(char *buf, int buf_size, int nb_channels, uint64_t channel_layout);
+
+/**
+ * Append a description of a channel layout to a bprint buffer.
+ * @deprecated use av_channel_layout_describe()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+void av_bprint_channel_layout(struct AVBPrint *bp, int nb_channels, uint64_t channel_layout);
+
+/**
+ * Return the number of channels in the channel layout.
+ * @deprecated use AVChannelLayout.nb_channels
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_get_channel_layout_nb_channels(uint64_t channel_layout);
+
+/**
+ * Return default channel layout for a given number of channels.
+ *
+ * @deprecated use av_channel_layout_default()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int64_t av_get_default_channel_layout(int nb_channels);
+
+/**
+ * Get the index of a channel in channel_layout.
+ *
+ * @param channel_layout channel layout bitset
+ * @param channel a channel layout describing exactly one channel which must be
+ *                present in channel_layout.
+ *
+ * @return index of channel in channel_layout on success, a negative AVERROR
+ *         on error.
+ *
+ * @deprecated use av_channel_layout_index_from_channel()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_get_channel_layout_channel_index(uint64_t channel_layout,
+                                        uint64_t channel);
+
+/**
+ * Get the channel with the given index in channel_layout.
+ * @deprecated use av_channel_layout_channel_from_index()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+uint64_t av_channel_layout_extract_channel(uint64_t channel_layout, int index);
+
+/**
+ * Get the name of a given channel.
+ *
+ * @return channel name on success, NULL on error.
+ *
+ * @deprecated use av_channel_name()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+const char *av_get_channel_name(uint64_t channel);
+
+/**
+ * Get the description of a given channel.
+ *
+ * @param channel  a channel layout with a single channel
+ * @return  channel description on success, NULL on error
+ * @deprecated use av_channel_description()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+const char *av_get_channel_description(uint64_t channel);
+
+/**
+ * Get the value and name of a standard channel layout.
+ *
+ * @param[in]  index   index in an internal list, starting at 0
+ * @param[out] layout  channel layout mask
+ * @param[out] name    name of the layout
+ * @return  0  if the layout exists,
+ *          <0 if index is beyond the limits
+ * @deprecated use av_channel_layout_standard()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_get_standard_channel_layout(unsigned index, uint64_t *layout,
+                                   const char **name);
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Get a human readable string in an abbreviated form describing a given channel.
+ * This is the inverse function of @ref av_channel_from_string().
+ *
+ * @param buf pre-allocated buffer where to put the generated string
+ * @param buf_size size in bytes of the buffer.
+ * @param channel the AVChannel whose name to get
+ * @return amount of bytes needed to hold the output string, or a negative AVERROR
+ *         on failure. If the returned value is bigger than buf_size, then the
+ *         string was truncated.
+ */
+int av_channel_name(char *buf, size_t buf_size, enum AVChannel channel);
+
+/**
+ * bprint variant of av_channel_name().
+ *
+ * @note the string will be appended to the bprint buffer.
+ */
+void av_channel_name_bprint(struct AVBPrint *bp, enum AVChannel channel_id);
+
+/**
+ * Get a human readable string describing a given channel.
+ *
+ * @param buf pre-allocated buffer where to put the generated string
+ * @param buf_size size in bytes of the buffer.
+ * @param channel the AVChannel whose description to get
+ * @return amount of bytes needed to hold the output string, or a negative AVERROR
+ *         on failure. If the returned value is bigger than buf_size, then the
+ *         string was truncated.
+ */
+int av_channel_description(char *buf, size_t buf_size, enum AVChannel channel);
+
+/**
+ * bprint variant of av_channel_description().
+ *
+ * @note the string will be appended to the bprint buffer.
+ */
+void av_channel_description_bprint(struct AVBPrint *bp, enum AVChannel channel_id);
+
+/**
+ * This is the inverse function of @ref av_channel_name().
+ *
+ * @return the channel with the given name
+ *         AV_CHAN_NONE when name does not identify a known channel
+ */
+enum AVChannel av_channel_from_string(const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize a native channel layout from a bitmask indicating which channels
+ * are present.
+ *
+ * @param channel_layout the layout structure to be initialized
+ * @param mask bitmask describing the channel layout
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success
+ *         AVERROR(EINVAL) for invalid mask values
+ */
+int av_channel_layout_from_mask(AVChannelLayout *channel_layout, uint64_t mask);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize a channel layout from a given string description.
+ * The input string can be represented by:
+ *  - the formal channel layout name (returned by av_channel_layout_describe())
+ *  - single or multiple channel names (returned by av_channel_name(), eg. "FL",
+ *    or concatenated with "+", each optionally containing a custom name after
+ *    a "@", eg. "FL@Left+FR@Right+LFE")
+ *  - a decimal or hexadecimal value of a native channel layout (eg. "4" or "0x4")
+ *  - the number of channels with default layout (eg. "4c")
+ *  - the number of unordered channels (eg. "4C" or "4 channels")
+ *  - the ambisonic order followed by optional non-diegetic channels (eg.
+ *    "ambisonic 2+stereo")
+ *
+ * @param channel_layout input channel layout
+ * @param str string describing the channel layout
+ * @return 0 channel layout was detected, AVERROR_INVALIDATATA otherwise
+ */
+int av_channel_layout_from_string(AVChannelLayout *channel_layout,
+                                  const char *str);
+
+/**
+ * Get the default channel layout for a given number of channels.
+ *
+ * @param ch_layout the layout structure to be initialized
+ * @param nb_channels number of channels
+ */
+void av_channel_layout_default(AVChannelLayout *ch_layout, int nb_channels);
+
+/**
+ * Iterate over all standard channel layouts.
+ *
+ * @param opaque a pointer where libavutil will store the iteration state. Must
+ *               point to NULL to start the iteration.
+ *
+ * @return the standard channel layout or NULL when the iteration is
+ *         finished
+ */
+const AVChannelLayout *av_channel_layout_standard(void **opaque);
+
+/**
+ * Free any allocated data in the channel layout and reset the channel
+ * count to 0.
+ *
+ * @param channel_layout the layout structure to be uninitialized
+ */
+void av_channel_layout_uninit(AVChannelLayout *channel_layout);
+
+/**
+ * Make a copy of a channel layout. This differs from just assigning src to dst
+ * in that it allocates and copies the map for AV_CHANNEL_ORDER_CUSTOM.
+ *
+ * @note the destination channel_layout will be always uninitialized before copy.
+ *
+ * @param dst destination channel layout
+ * @param src source channel layout
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on error.
+ */
+int av_channel_layout_copy(AVChannelLayout *dst, const AVChannelLayout *src);
+
+/**
+ * Get a human-readable string describing the channel layout properties.
+ * The string will be in the same format that is accepted by
+ * @ref av_channel_layout_from_string(), allowing to rebuild the same
+ * channel layout, except for opaque pointers.
+ *
+ * @param channel_layout channel layout to be described
+ * @param buf pre-allocated buffer where to put the generated string
+ * @param buf_size size in bytes of the buffer.
+ * @return amount of bytes needed to hold the output string, or a negative AVERROR
+ *         on failure. If the returned value is bigger than buf_size, then the
+ *         string was truncated.
+ */
+int av_channel_layout_describe(const AVChannelLayout *channel_layout,
+                               char *buf, size_t buf_size);
+
+/**
+ * bprint variant of av_channel_layout_describe().
+ *
+ * @note the string will be appended to the bprint buffer.
+ * @return 0 on success, or a negative AVERROR value on failure.
+ */
+int av_channel_layout_describe_bprint(const AVChannelLayout *channel_layout,
+                                      struct AVBPrint *bp);
+
+/**
+ * Get the channel with the given index in a channel layout.
+ *
+ * @param channel_layout input channel layout
+ * @param idx index of the channel
+ * @return channel with the index idx in channel_layout on success or
+ *         AV_CHAN_NONE on failure (if idx is not valid or the channel order is
+ *         unspecified)
+ */
+enum AVChannel
+av_channel_layout_channel_from_index(const AVChannelLayout *channel_layout, unsigned int idx);
+
+/**
+ * Get the index of a given channel in a channel layout. In case multiple
+ * channels are found, only the first match will be returned.
+ *
+ * @param channel_layout input channel layout
+ * @param channel the channel whose index to obtain
+ * @return index of channel in channel_layout on success or a negative number if
+ *         channel is not present in channel_layout.
+ */
+int av_channel_layout_index_from_channel(const AVChannelLayout *channel_layout,
+                                         enum AVChannel channel);
+
+/**
+ * Get the index in a channel layout of a channel described by the given string.
+ * In case multiple channels are found, only the first match will be returned.
+ *
+ * This function accepts channel names in the same format as
+ * @ref av_channel_from_string().
+ *
+ * @param channel_layout input channel layout
+ * @param name string describing the channel whose index to obtain
+ * @return a channel index described by the given string, or a negative AVERROR
+ *         value.
+ */
+int av_channel_layout_index_from_string(const AVChannelLayout *channel_layout,
+                                        const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * Get a channel described by the given string.
+ *
+ * This function accepts channel names in the same format as
+ * @ref av_channel_from_string().
+ *
+ * @param channel_layout input channel layout
+ * @param name string describing the channel to obtain
+ * @return a channel described by the given string in channel_layout on success
+ *         or AV_CHAN_NONE on failure (if the string is not valid or the channel
+ *         order is unspecified)
+ */
+enum AVChannel
+av_channel_layout_channel_from_string(const AVChannelLayout *channel_layout,
+                                      const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * Find out what channels from a given set are present in a channel layout,
+ * without regard for their positions.
+ *
+ * @param channel_layout input channel layout
+ * @param mask a combination of AV_CH_* representing a set of channels
+ * @return a bitfield representing all the channels from mask that are present
+ *         in channel_layout
+ */
+uint64_t av_channel_layout_subset(const AVChannelLayout *channel_layout,
+                                  uint64_t mask);
+
+/**
+ * Check whether a channel layout is valid, i.e. can possibly describe audio
+ * data.
+ *
+ * @param channel_layout input channel layout
+ * @return 1 if channel_layout is valid, 0 otherwise.
+ */
+int av_channel_layout_check(const AVChannelLayout *channel_layout);
+
+/**
+ * Check whether two channel layouts are semantically the same, i.e. the same
+ * channels are present on the same positions in both.
+ *
+ * If one of the channel layouts is AV_CHANNEL_ORDER_UNSPEC, while the other is
+ * not, they are considered to be unequal. If both are AV_CHANNEL_ORDER_UNSPEC,
+ * they are considered equal iff the channel counts are the same in both.
+ *
+ * @param chl input channel layout
+ * @param chl1 input channel layout
+ * @return 0 if chl and chl1 are equal, 1 if they are not equal. A negative
+ *         AVERROR code if one or both are invalid.
+ */
+int av_channel_layout_compare(const AVChannelLayout *chl, const AVChannelLayout *chl1);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/common.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/common.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fd1404b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/common.h
@@ -0,0 +1,578 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2006 Michael Niedermayer <michaelni@gmx.at>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * common internal and external API header
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_COMMON_H
+#define AVUTIL_COMMON_H
+
+#if defined(__cplusplus) && !defined(__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS) && !defined(UINT64_C)
+#error missing -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS / #define __STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+#endif
+
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <inttypes.h>
+#include <limits.h>
+#include <math.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+
+#include "attributes.h"
+#include "macros.h"
+
+//rounded division & shift
+#define RSHIFT(a,b) ((a) > 0 ? ((a) + ((1<<(b))>>1))>>(b) : ((a) + ((1<<(b))>>1)-1)>>(b))
+/* assume b>0 */
+#define ROUNDED_DIV(a,b) (((a)>=0 ? (a) + ((b)>>1) : (a) - ((b)>>1))/(b))
+/* Fast a/(1<<b) rounded toward +inf. Assume a>=0 and b>=0 */
+#define AV_CEIL_RSHIFT(a,b) (!av_builtin_constant_p(b) ? -((-(a)) >> (b)) \
+                                                       : ((a) + (1<<(b)) - 1) >> (b))
+/* Backwards compat. */
+#define FF_CEIL_RSHIFT AV_CEIL_RSHIFT
+
+#define FFUDIV(a,b) (((a)>0 ?(a):(a)-(b)+1) / (b))
+#define FFUMOD(a,b) ((a)-(b)*FFUDIV(a,b))
+
+/**
+ * Absolute value, Note, INT_MIN / INT64_MIN result in undefined behavior as they
+ * are not representable as absolute values of their type. This is the same
+ * as with *abs()
+ * @see FFNABS()
+ */
+#define FFABS(a) ((a) >= 0 ? (a) : (-(a)))
+#define FFSIGN(a) ((a) > 0 ? 1 : -1)
+
+/**
+ * Negative Absolute value.
+ * this works for all integers of all types.
+ * As with many macros, this evaluates its argument twice, it thus must not have
+ * a sideeffect, that is FFNABS(x++) has undefined behavior.
+ */
+#define FFNABS(a) ((a) <= 0 ? (a) : (-(a)))
+
+/**
+ * Unsigned Absolute value.
+ * This takes the absolute value of a signed int and returns it as a unsigned.
+ * This also works with INT_MIN which would otherwise not be representable
+ * As with many macros, this evaluates its argument twice.
+ */
+#define FFABSU(a) ((a) <= 0 ? -(unsigned)(a) : (unsigned)(a))
+#define FFABS64U(a) ((a) <= 0 ? -(uint64_t)(a) : (uint64_t)(a))
+
+/* misc math functions */
+
+#ifdef HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H
+#   include "config.h"
+#   include "intmath.h"
+#endif
+
+#ifndef av_ceil_log2
+#   define av_ceil_log2     av_ceil_log2_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_clip
+#   define av_clip          av_clip_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_clip64
+#   define av_clip64        av_clip64_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_clip_uint8
+#   define av_clip_uint8    av_clip_uint8_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_clip_int8
+#   define av_clip_int8     av_clip_int8_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_clip_uint16
+#   define av_clip_uint16   av_clip_uint16_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_clip_int16
+#   define av_clip_int16    av_clip_int16_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_clipl_int32
+#   define av_clipl_int32   av_clipl_int32_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_clip_intp2
+#   define av_clip_intp2    av_clip_intp2_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_clip_uintp2
+#   define av_clip_uintp2   av_clip_uintp2_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_mod_uintp2
+#   define av_mod_uintp2    av_mod_uintp2_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_sat_add32
+#   define av_sat_add32     av_sat_add32_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_sat_dadd32
+#   define av_sat_dadd32    av_sat_dadd32_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_sat_sub32
+#   define av_sat_sub32     av_sat_sub32_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_sat_dsub32
+#   define av_sat_dsub32    av_sat_dsub32_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_sat_add64
+#   define av_sat_add64     av_sat_add64_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_sat_sub64
+#   define av_sat_sub64     av_sat_sub64_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_clipf
+#   define av_clipf         av_clipf_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_clipd
+#   define av_clipd         av_clipd_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_popcount
+#   define av_popcount      av_popcount_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_popcount64
+#   define av_popcount64    av_popcount64_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_parity
+#   define av_parity        av_parity_c
+#endif
+
+#ifndef av_log2
+av_const int av_log2(unsigned v);
+#endif
+
+#ifndef av_log2_16bit
+av_const int av_log2_16bit(unsigned v);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Clip a signed integer value into the amin-amax range.
+ * @param a value to clip
+ * @param amin minimum value of the clip range
+ * @param amax maximum value of the clip range
+ * @return clipped value
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const int av_clip_c(int a, int amin, int amax)
+{
+#if defined(HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H) && defined(ASSERT_LEVEL) && ASSERT_LEVEL >= 2
+    if (amin > amax) abort();
+#endif
+    if      (a < amin) return amin;
+    else if (a > amax) return amax;
+    else               return a;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Clip a signed 64bit integer value into the amin-amax range.
+ * @param a value to clip
+ * @param amin minimum value of the clip range
+ * @param amax maximum value of the clip range
+ * @return clipped value
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const int64_t av_clip64_c(int64_t a, int64_t amin, int64_t amax)
+{
+#if defined(HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H) && defined(ASSERT_LEVEL) && ASSERT_LEVEL >= 2
+    if (amin > amax) abort();
+#endif
+    if      (a < amin) return amin;
+    else if (a > amax) return amax;
+    else               return a;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Clip a signed integer value into the 0-255 range.
+ * @param a value to clip
+ * @return clipped value
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const uint8_t av_clip_uint8_c(int a)
+{
+    if (a&(~0xFF)) return (~a)>>31;
+    else           return a;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Clip a signed integer value into the -128,127 range.
+ * @param a value to clip
+ * @return clipped value
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const int8_t av_clip_int8_c(int a)
+{
+    if ((a+0x80U) & ~0xFF) return (a>>31) ^ 0x7F;
+    else                  return a;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Clip a signed integer value into the 0-65535 range.
+ * @param a value to clip
+ * @return clipped value
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const uint16_t av_clip_uint16_c(int a)
+{
+    if (a&(~0xFFFF)) return (~a)>>31;
+    else             return a;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Clip a signed integer value into the -32768,32767 range.
+ * @param a value to clip
+ * @return clipped value
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const int16_t av_clip_int16_c(int a)
+{
+    if ((a+0x8000U) & ~0xFFFF) return (a>>31) ^ 0x7FFF;
+    else                      return a;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Clip a signed 64-bit integer value into the -2147483648,2147483647 range.
+ * @param a value to clip
+ * @return clipped value
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const int32_t av_clipl_int32_c(int64_t a)
+{
+    if ((a+0x80000000u) & ~UINT64_C(0xFFFFFFFF)) return (int32_t)((a>>63) ^ 0x7FFFFFFF);
+    else                                         return (int32_t)a;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Clip a signed integer into the -(2^p),(2^p-1) range.
+ * @param  a value to clip
+ * @param  p bit position to clip at
+ * @return clipped value
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const int av_clip_intp2_c(int a, int p)
+{
+    if (((unsigned)a + (1 << p)) & ~((2 << p) - 1))
+        return (a >> 31) ^ ((1 << p) - 1);
+    else
+        return a;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Clip a signed integer to an unsigned power of two range.
+ * @param  a value to clip
+ * @param  p bit position to clip at
+ * @return clipped value
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const unsigned av_clip_uintp2_c(int a, int p)
+{
+    if (a & ~((1<<p) - 1)) return (~a) >> 31 & ((1<<p) - 1);
+    else                   return  a;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Clear high bits from an unsigned integer starting with specific bit position
+ * @param  a value to clip
+ * @param  p bit position to clip at
+ * @return clipped value
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const unsigned av_mod_uintp2_c(unsigned a, unsigned p)
+{
+    return a & ((1U << p) - 1);
+}
+
+/**
+ * Add two signed 32-bit values with saturation.
+ *
+ * @param  a one value
+ * @param  b another value
+ * @return sum with signed saturation
+ */
+static av_always_inline int av_sat_add32_c(int a, int b)
+{
+    return av_clipl_int32((int64_t)a + b);
+}
+
+/**
+ * Add a doubled value to another value with saturation at both stages.
+ *
+ * @param  a first value
+ * @param  b value doubled and added to a
+ * @return sum sat(a + sat(2*b)) with signed saturation
+ */
+static av_always_inline int av_sat_dadd32_c(int a, int b)
+{
+    return av_sat_add32(a, av_sat_add32(b, b));
+}
+
+/**
+ * Subtract two signed 32-bit values with saturation.
+ *
+ * @param  a one value
+ * @param  b another value
+ * @return difference with signed saturation
+ */
+static av_always_inline int av_sat_sub32_c(int a, int b)
+{
+    return av_clipl_int32((int64_t)a - b);
+}
+
+/**
+ * Subtract a doubled value from another value with saturation at both stages.
+ *
+ * @param  a first value
+ * @param  b value doubled and subtracted from a
+ * @return difference sat(a - sat(2*b)) with signed saturation
+ */
+static av_always_inline int av_sat_dsub32_c(int a, int b)
+{
+    return av_sat_sub32(a, av_sat_add32(b, b));
+}
+
+/**
+ * Add two signed 64-bit values with saturation.
+ *
+ * @param  a one value
+ * @param  b another value
+ * @return sum with signed saturation
+ */
+static av_always_inline int64_t av_sat_add64_c(int64_t a, int64_t b) {
+#if (!defined(__INTEL_COMPILER) && AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(5,1)) || AV_HAS_BUILTIN(__builtin_add_overflow)
+    int64_t tmp;
+    return !__builtin_add_overflow(a, b, &tmp) ? tmp : (tmp < 0 ? INT64_MAX : INT64_MIN);
+#else
+    int64_t s = a+(uint64_t)b;
+    if ((int64_t)(a^b | ~s^b) >= 0)
+        return INT64_MAX ^ (b >> 63);
+    return s;
+#endif
+}
+
+/**
+ * Subtract two signed 64-bit values with saturation.
+ *
+ * @param  a one value
+ * @param  b another value
+ * @return difference with signed saturation
+ */
+static av_always_inline int64_t av_sat_sub64_c(int64_t a, int64_t b) {
+#if (!defined(__INTEL_COMPILER) && AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(5,1)) || AV_HAS_BUILTIN(__builtin_sub_overflow)
+    int64_t tmp;
+    return !__builtin_sub_overflow(a, b, &tmp) ? tmp : (tmp < 0 ? INT64_MAX : INT64_MIN);
+#else
+    if (b <= 0 && a >= INT64_MAX + b)
+        return INT64_MAX;
+    if (b >= 0 && a <= INT64_MIN + b)
+        return INT64_MIN;
+    return a - b;
+#endif
+}
+
+/**
+ * Clip a float value into the amin-amax range.
+ * If a is nan or -inf amin will be returned.
+ * If a is +inf amax will be returned.
+ * @param a value to clip
+ * @param amin minimum value of the clip range
+ * @param amax maximum value of the clip range
+ * @return clipped value
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const float av_clipf_c(float a, float amin, float amax)
+{
+#if defined(HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H) && defined(ASSERT_LEVEL) && ASSERT_LEVEL >= 2
+    if (amin > amax) abort();
+#endif
+    return FFMIN(FFMAX(a, amin), amax);
+}
+
+/**
+ * Clip a double value into the amin-amax range.
+ * If a is nan or -inf amin will be returned.
+ * If a is +inf amax will be returned.
+ * @param a value to clip
+ * @param amin minimum value of the clip range
+ * @param amax maximum value of the clip range
+ * @return clipped value
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const double av_clipd_c(double a, double amin, double amax)
+{
+#if defined(HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H) && defined(ASSERT_LEVEL) && ASSERT_LEVEL >= 2
+    if (amin > amax) abort();
+#endif
+    return FFMIN(FFMAX(a, amin), amax);
+}
+
+/** Compute ceil(log2(x)).
+ * @param x value used to compute ceil(log2(x))
+ * @return computed ceiling of log2(x)
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const int av_ceil_log2_c(int x)
+{
+    return av_log2((x - 1U) << 1);
+}
+
+/**
+ * Count number of bits set to one in x
+ * @param x value to count bits of
+ * @return the number of bits set to one in x
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const int av_popcount_c(uint32_t x)
+{
+    x -= (x >> 1) & 0x55555555;
+    x = (x & 0x33333333) + ((x >> 2) & 0x33333333);
+    x = (x + (x >> 4)) & 0x0F0F0F0F;
+    x += x >> 8;
+    return (x + (x >> 16)) & 0x3F;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Count number of bits set to one in x
+ * @param x value to count bits of
+ * @return the number of bits set to one in x
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const int av_popcount64_c(uint64_t x)
+{
+    return av_popcount((uint32_t)x) + av_popcount((uint32_t)(x >> 32));
+}
+
+static av_always_inline av_const int av_parity_c(uint32_t v)
+{
+    return av_popcount(v) & 1;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Convert a UTF-8 character (up to 4 bytes) to its 32-bit UCS-4 encoded form.
+ *
+ * @param val      Output value, must be an lvalue of type uint32_t.
+ * @param GET_BYTE Expression reading one byte from the input.
+ *                 Evaluated up to 7 times (4 for the currently
+ *                 assigned Unicode range).  With a memory buffer
+ *                 input, this could be *ptr++, or if you want to make sure
+ *                 that *ptr stops at the end of a NULL terminated string then
+ *                 *ptr ? *ptr++ : 0
+ * @param ERROR    Expression to be evaluated on invalid input,
+ *                 typically a goto statement.
+ *
+ * @warning ERROR should not contain a loop control statement which
+ * could interact with the internal while loop, and should force an
+ * exit from the macro code (e.g. through a goto or a return) in order
+ * to prevent undefined results.
+ */
+#define GET_UTF8(val, GET_BYTE, ERROR)\
+    val= (GET_BYTE);\
+    {\
+        uint32_t top = (val & 128) >> 1;\
+        if ((val & 0xc0) == 0x80 || val >= 0xFE)\
+            {ERROR}\
+        while (val & top) {\
+            unsigned int tmp = (GET_BYTE) - 128;\
+            if(tmp>>6)\
+                {ERROR}\
+            val= (val<<6) + tmp;\
+            top <<= 5;\
+        }\
+        val &= (top << 1) - 1;\
+    }
+
+/**
+ * Convert a UTF-16 character (2 or 4 bytes) to its 32-bit UCS-4 encoded form.
+ *
+ * @param val       Output value, must be an lvalue of type uint32_t.
+ * @param GET_16BIT Expression returning two bytes of UTF-16 data converted
+ *                  to native byte order.  Evaluated one or two times.
+ * @param ERROR     Expression to be evaluated on invalid input,
+ *                  typically a goto statement.
+ */
+#define GET_UTF16(val, GET_16BIT, ERROR)\
+    val = (GET_16BIT);\
+    {\
+        unsigned int hi = val - 0xD800;\
+        if (hi < 0x800) {\
+            val = (GET_16BIT) - 0xDC00;\
+            if (val > 0x3FFU || hi > 0x3FFU)\
+                {ERROR}\
+            val += (hi<<10) + 0x10000;\
+        }\
+    }\
+
+/**
+ * @def PUT_UTF8(val, tmp, PUT_BYTE)
+ * Convert a 32-bit Unicode character to its UTF-8 encoded form (up to 4 bytes long).
+ * @param val is an input-only argument and should be of type uint32_t. It holds
+ * a UCS-4 encoded Unicode character that is to be converted to UTF-8. If
+ * val is given as a function it is executed only once.
+ * @param tmp is a temporary variable and should be of type uint8_t. It
+ * represents an intermediate value during conversion that is to be
+ * output by PUT_BYTE.
+ * @param PUT_BYTE writes the converted UTF-8 bytes to any proper destination.
+ * It could be a function or a statement, and uses tmp as the input byte.
+ * For example, PUT_BYTE could be "*output++ = tmp;" PUT_BYTE will be
+ * executed up to 4 times for values in the valid UTF-8 range and up to
+ * 7 times in the general case, depending on the length of the converted
+ * Unicode character.
+ */
+#define PUT_UTF8(val, tmp, PUT_BYTE)\
+    {\
+        int bytes, shift;\
+        uint32_t in = val;\
+        if (in < 0x80) {\
+            tmp = in;\
+            PUT_BYTE\
+        } else {\
+            bytes = (av_log2(in) + 4) / 5;\
+            shift = (bytes - 1) * 6;\
+            tmp = (256 - (256 >> bytes)) | (in >> shift);\
+            PUT_BYTE\
+            while (shift >= 6) {\
+                shift -= 6;\
+                tmp = 0x80 | ((in >> shift) & 0x3f);\
+                PUT_BYTE\
+            }\
+        }\
+    }
+
+/**
+ * @def PUT_UTF16(val, tmp, PUT_16BIT)
+ * Convert a 32-bit Unicode character to its UTF-16 encoded form (2 or 4 bytes).
+ * @param val is an input-only argument and should be of type uint32_t. It holds
+ * a UCS-4 encoded Unicode character that is to be converted to UTF-16. If
+ * val is given as a function it is executed only once.
+ * @param tmp is a temporary variable and should be of type uint16_t. It
+ * represents an intermediate value during conversion that is to be
+ * output by PUT_16BIT.
+ * @param PUT_16BIT writes the converted UTF-16 data to any proper destination
+ * in desired endianness. It could be a function or a statement, and uses tmp
+ * as the input byte.  For example, PUT_BYTE could be "*output++ = tmp;"
+ * PUT_BYTE will be executed 1 or 2 times depending on input character.
+ */
+#define PUT_UTF16(val, tmp, PUT_16BIT)\
+    {\
+        uint32_t in = val;\
+        if (in < 0x10000) {\
+            tmp = in;\
+            PUT_16BIT\
+        } else {\
+            tmp = 0xD800 | ((in - 0x10000) >> 10);\
+            PUT_16BIT\
+            tmp = 0xDC00 | ((in - 0x10000) & 0x3FF);\
+            PUT_16BIT\
+        }\
+    }\
+
+
+
+#include "mem.h"
+
+#ifdef HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H
+#    include "internal.h"
+#endif /* HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_COMMON_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/cpu.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/cpu.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8fa5ea9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/cpu.h
@@ -0,0 +1,134 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001, 2002 Fabrice Bellard
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_CPU_H
+#define AVUTIL_CPU_H
+
+#include <stddef.h>
+
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_FORCE    0x80000000 /* force usage of selected flags (OR) */
+
+    /* lower 16 bits - CPU features */
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_MMX          0x0001 ///< standard MMX
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_MMXEXT       0x0002 ///< SSE integer functions or AMD MMX ext
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_MMX2         0x0002 ///< SSE integer functions or AMD MMX ext
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_3DNOW        0x0004 ///< AMD 3DNOW
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_SSE          0x0008 ///< SSE functions
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_SSE2         0x0010 ///< PIV SSE2 functions
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_SSE2SLOW 0x40000000 ///< SSE2 supported, but usually not faster
+                                        ///< than regular MMX/SSE (e.g. Core1)
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_3DNOWEXT     0x0020 ///< AMD 3DNowExt
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_SSE3         0x0040 ///< Prescott SSE3 functions
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_SSE3SLOW 0x20000000 ///< SSE3 supported, but usually not faster
+                                        ///< than regular MMX/SSE (e.g. Core1)
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_SSSE3        0x0080 ///< Conroe SSSE3 functions
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_SSSE3SLOW 0x4000000 ///< SSSE3 supported, but usually not faster
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_ATOM     0x10000000 ///< Atom processor, some SSSE3 instructions are slower
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_SSE4         0x0100 ///< Penryn SSE4.1 functions
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_SSE42        0x0200 ///< Nehalem SSE4.2 functions
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_AESNI       0x80000 ///< Advanced Encryption Standard functions
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_AVX          0x4000 ///< AVX functions: requires OS support even if YMM registers aren't used
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_AVXSLOW   0x8000000 ///< AVX supported, but slow when using YMM registers (e.g. Bulldozer)
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_XOP          0x0400 ///< Bulldozer XOP functions
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_FMA4         0x0800 ///< Bulldozer FMA4 functions
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_CMOV         0x1000 ///< supports cmov instruction
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_AVX2         0x8000 ///< AVX2 functions: requires OS support even if YMM registers aren't used
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_FMA3        0x10000 ///< Haswell FMA3 functions
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_BMI1        0x20000 ///< Bit Manipulation Instruction Set 1
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_BMI2        0x40000 ///< Bit Manipulation Instruction Set 2
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_AVX512     0x100000 ///< AVX-512 functions: requires OS support even if YMM/ZMM registers aren't used
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_AVX512ICL  0x200000 ///< F/CD/BW/DQ/VL/VNNI/IFMA/VBMI/VBMI2/VPOPCNTDQ/BITALG/GFNI/VAES/VPCLMULQDQ
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_SLOW_GATHER  0x2000000 ///< CPU has slow gathers.
+
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_ALTIVEC      0x0001 ///< standard
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_VSX          0x0002 ///< ISA 2.06
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_POWER8       0x0004 ///< ISA 2.07
+
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_ARMV5TE      (1 << 0)
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_ARMV6        (1 << 1)
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_ARMV6T2      (1 << 2)
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_VFP          (1 << 3)
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_VFPV3        (1 << 4)
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_NEON         (1 << 5)
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_ARMV8        (1 << 6)
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_VFP_VM       (1 << 7) ///< VFPv2 vector mode, deprecated in ARMv7-A and unavailable in various CPUs implementations
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_SETEND       (1 <<16)
+
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_MMI          (1 << 0)
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_MSA          (1 << 1)
+
+//Loongarch SIMD extension.
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_LSX          (1 << 0)
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_LASX         (1 << 1)
+
+// RISC-V extensions
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_RVI          (1 << 0) ///< I (full GPR bank)
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_RVF          (1 << 1) ///< F (single precision FP)
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_RVD          (1 << 2) ///< D (double precision FP)
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_RVV_I32      (1 << 3) ///< Vectors of 8/16/32-bit int's */
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_RVV_F32      (1 << 4) ///< Vectors of float's */
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_RVV_I64      (1 << 5) ///< Vectors of 64-bit int's */
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_RVV_F64      (1 << 6) ///< Vectors of double's
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_RVB_BASIC    (1 << 7) ///< Basic bit-manipulations
+
+/**
+ * Return the flags which specify extensions supported by the CPU.
+ * The returned value is affected by av_force_cpu_flags() if that was used
+ * before. So av_get_cpu_flags() can easily be used in an application to
+ * detect the enabled cpu flags.
+ */
+int av_get_cpu_flags(void);
+
+/**
+ * Disables cpu detection and forces the specified flags.
+ * -1 is a special case that disables forcing of specific flags.
+ */
+void av_force_cpu_flags(int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Parse CPU caps from a string and update the given AV_CPU_* flags based on that.
+ *
+ * @return negative on error.
+ */
+int av_parse_cpu_caps(unsigned *flags, const char *s);
+
+/**
+ * @return the number of logical CPU cores present.
+ */
+int av_cpu_count(void);
+
+/**
+ * Overrides cpu count detection and forces the specified count.
+ * Count < 1 disables forcing of specific count.
+ */
+void av_cpu_force_count(int count);
+
+/**
+ * Get the maximum data alignment that may be required by FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * Note that this is affected by the build configuration and the CPU flags mask,
+ * so e.g. if the CPU supports AVX, but libavutil has been built with
+ * --disable-avx or the AV_CPU_FLAG_AVX flag has been disabled through
+ *  av_set_cpu_flags_mask(), then this function will behave as if AVX is not
+ *  present.
+ */
+size_t av_cpu_max_align(void);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_CPU_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/crc.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/crc.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7f59812
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/crc.h
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2006 Michael Niedermayer <michaelni@gmx.at>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavu_crc32
+ * Public header for CRC hash function implementation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_CRC_H
+#define AVUTIL_CRC_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include "attributes.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_crc32 CRC
+ * @ingroup lavu_hash
+ * CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) hash function implementation.
+ *
+ * This module supports numerous CRC polynomials, in addition to the most
+ * widely used CRC-32-IEEE. See @ref AVCRCId for a list of available
+ * polynomials.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+typedef uint32_t AVCRC;
+
+typedef enum {
+    AV_CRC_8_ATM,
+    AV_CRC_16_ANSI,
+    AV_CRC_16_CCITT,
+    AV_CRC_32_IEEE,
+    AV_CRC_32_IEEE_LE,  /*< reversed bitorder version of AV_CRC_32_IEEE */
+    AV_CRC_16_ANSI_LE,  /*< reversed bitorder version of AV_CRC_16_ANSI */
+    AV_CRC_24_IEEE,
+    AV_CRC_8_EBU,
+    AV_CRC_MAX,         /*< Not part of public API! Do not use outside libavutil. */
+}AVCRCId;
+
+/**
+ * Initialize a CRC table.
+ * @param ctx must be an array of size sizeof(AVCRC)*257 or sizeof(AVCRC)*1024
+ * @param le If 1, the lowest bit represents the coefficient for the highest
+ *           exponent of the corresponding polynomial (both for poly and
+ *           actual CRC).
+ *           If 0, you must swap the CRC parameter and the result of av_crc
+ *           if you need the standard representation (can be simplified in
+ *           most cases to e.g. bswap16):
+ *           av_bswap32(crc << (32-bits))
+ * @param bits number of bits for the CRC
+ * @param poly generator polynomial without the x**bits coefficient, in the
+ *             representation as specified by le
+ * @param ctx_size size of ctx in bytes
+ * @return <0 on failure
+ */
+int av_crc_init(AVCRC *ctx, int le, int bits, uint32_t poly, int ctx_size);
+
+/**
+ * Get an initialized standard CRC table.
+ * @param crc_id ID of a standard CRC
+ * @return a pointer to the CRC table or NULL on failure
+ */
+const AVCRC *av_crc_get_table(AVCRCId crc_id);
+
+/**
+ * Calculate the CRC of a block.
+ * @param ctx initialized AVCRC array (see av_crc_init())
+ * @param crc CRC of previous blocks if any or initial value for CRC
+ * @param buffer buffer whose CRC to calculate
+ * @param length length of the buffer
+ * @return CRC updated with the data from the given block
+ *
+ * @see av_crc_init() "le" parameter
+ */
+uint32_t av_crc(const AVCRC *ctx, uint32_t crc,
+                const uint8_t *buffer, size_t length) av_pure;
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_CRC_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/csp.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/csp.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..18ef208
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/csp.h
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2016 Ronald S. Bultje <rsbultje@gmail.com>
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_CSP_H
+#define AVUTIL_CSP_H
+
+#include "pixfmt.h"
+#include "rational.h"
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * Colorspace value utility functions for libavutil.
+ * @ingroup lavu_math_csp
+ * @author Ronald S. Bultje <rsbultje@gmail.com>
+ * @author Leo Izen <leo.izen@gmail.com>
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_math_csp Colorspace Utility
+ * @ingroup lavu_math
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Struct containing luma coefficients to be used for RGB to YUV/YCoCg, or similar
+ * calculations.
+ */
+typedef struct AVLumaCoefficients {
+    AVRational cr, cg, cb;
+} AVLumaCoefficients;
+
+/**
+ * Struct containing chromaticity x and y values for the standard CIE 1931
+ * chromaticity definition.
+ */
+typedef struct AVCIExy {
+    AVRational x, y;
+} AVCIExy;
+
+/**
+ * Struct defining the red, green, and blue primary locations in terms of CIE
+ * 1931 chromaticity x and y.
+ */
+typedef struct AVPrimaryCoefficients {
+    AVCIExy r, g, b;
+} AVPrimaryCoefficients;
+
+/**
+ * Struct defining white point location in terms of CIE 1931 chromaticity x
+ * and y.
+ */
+typedef AVCIExy AVWhitepointCoefficients;
+
+/**
+ * Struct that contains both white point location and primaries location, providing
+ * the complete description of a color gamut.
+ */
+typedef struct AVColorPrimariesDesc {
+    AVWhitepointCoefficients wp;
+    AVPrimaryCoefficients prim;
+} AVColorPrimariesDesc;
+
+/**
+ * Retrieves the Luma coefficients necessary to construct a conversion matrix
+ * from an enum constant describing the colorspace.
+ * @param csp An enum constant indicating YUV or similar colorspace.
+ * @return The Luma coefficients associated with that colorspace, or NULL
+ *     if the constant is unknown to libavutil.
+ */
+const AVLumaCoefficients *av_csp_luma_coeffs_from_avcsp(enum AVColorSpace csp);
+
+/**
+ * Retrieves a complete gamut description from an enum constant describing the
+ * color primaries.
+ * @param prm An enum constant indicating primaries
+ * @return A description of the colorspace gamut associated with that enum
+ *     constant, or NULL if the constant is unknown to libavutil.
+ */
+const AVColorPrimariesDesc *av_csp_primaries_desc_from_id(enum AVColorPrimaries prm);
+
+/**
+ * Detects which enum AVColorPrimaries constant corresponds to the given complete
+ * gamut description.
+ * @see enum AVColorPrimaries
+ * @param prm A description of the colorspace gamut
+ * @return The enum constant associated with this gamut, or
+ *     AVCOL_PRI_UNSPECIFIED if no clear match can be idenitified.
+ */
+enum AVColorPrimaries av_csp_primaries_id_from_desc(const AVColorPrimariesDesc *prm);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_CSP_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/des.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/des.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3a3e6fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/des.h
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+/*
+ * DES encryption/decryption
+ * Copyright (c) 2007 Reimar Doeffinger
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_DES_H
+#define AVUTIL_DES_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_des DES
+ * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+ * @{
+ */
+
+typedef struct AVDES {
+    uint64_t round_keys[3][16];
+    int triple_des;
+} AVDES;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVDES context.
+ */
+AVDES *av_des_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes an AVDES context.
+ *
+ * @param d pointer to a AVDES structure to initialize
+ * @param key pointer to the key to use
+ * @param key_bits must be 64 or 192
+ * @param decrypt 0 for encryption/CBC-MAC, 1 for decryption
+ * @return zero on success, negative value otherwise
+ */
+int av_des_init(struct AVDES *d, const uint8_t *key, int key_bits, int decrypt);
+
+/**
+ * @brief Encrypts / decrypts using the DES algorithm.
+ *
+ * @param d pointer to the AVDES structure
+ * @param dst destination array, can be equal to src, must be 8-byte aligned
+ * @param src source array, can be equal to dst, must be 8-byte aligned, may be NULL
+ * @param count number of 8 byte blocks
+ * @param iv initialization vector for CBC mode, if NULL then ECB will be used,
+ *           must be 8-byte aligned
+ * @param decrypt 0 for encryption, 1 for decryption
+ */
+void av_des_crypt(struct AVDES *d, uint8_t *dst, const uint8_t *src, int count, uint8_t *iv, int decrypt);
+
+/**
+ * @brief Calculates CBC-MAC using the DES algorithm.
+ *
+ * @param d pointer to the AVDES structure
+ * @param dst destination array, can be equal to src, must be 8-byte aligned
+ * @param src source array, can be equal to dst, must be 8-byte aligned, may be NULL
+ * @param count number of 8 byte blocks
+ */
+void av_des_mac(struct AVDES *d, uint8_t *dst, const uint8_t *src, int count);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_DES_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/detection_bbox.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/detection_bbox.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0119880
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/detection_bbox.h
@@ -0,0 +1,108 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_DETECTION_BBOX_H
+#define AVUTIL_DETECTION_BBOX_H
+
+#include "rational.h"
+#include "avassert.h"
+#include "frame.h"
+
+typedef struct AVDetectionBBox {
+    /**
+     * Distance in pixels from the left/top edge of the frame,
+     * together with width and height, defining the bounding box.
+     */
+    int x;
+    int y;
+    int w;
+    int h;
+
+#define AV_DETECTION_BBOX_LABEL_NAME_MAX_SIZE 64
+
+    /**
+     * Detect result with confidence
+     */
+    char detect_label[AV_DETECTION_BBOX_LABEL_NAME_MAX_SIZE];
+    AVRational detect_confidence;
+
+    /**
+     * At most 4 classifications based on the detected bounding box.
+     * For example, we can get max 4 different attributes with 4 different
+     * DNN models on one bounding box.
+     * classify_count is zero if no classification.
+     */
+#define AV_NUM_DETECTION_BBOX_CLASSIFY 4
+    uint32_t classify_count;
+    char classify_labels[AV_NUM_DETECTION_BBOX_CLASSIFY][AV_DETECTION_BBOX_LABEL_NAME_MAX_SIZE];
+    AVRational classify_confidences[AV_NUM_DETECTION_BBOX_CLASSIFY];
+} AVDetectionBBox;
+
+typedef struct AVDetectionBBoxHeader {
+    /**
+     * Information about how the bounding box is generated.
+     * for example, the DNN model name.
+     */
+    char source[256];
+
+    /**
+     * Number of bounding boxes in the array.
+     */
+    uint32_t nb_bboxes;
+
+    /**
+     * Offset in bytes from the beginning of this structure at which
+     * the array of bounding boxes starts.
+     */
+    size_t bboxes_offset;
+
+    /**
+     * Size of each bounding box in bytes.
+     */
+    size_t bbox_size;
+} AVDetectionBBoxHeader;
+
+/*
+ * Get the bounding box at the specified {@code idx}. Must be between 0 and nb_bboxes.
+ */
+static av_always_inline AVDetectionBBox *
+av_get_detection_bbox(const AVDetectionBBoxHeader *header, unsigned int idx)
+{
+    av_assert0(idx < header->nb_bboxes);
+    return (AVDetectionBBox *)((uint8_t *)header + header->bboxes_offset +
+                               idx * header->bbox_size);
+}
+
+/**
+ * Allocates memory for AVDetectionBBoxHeader, plus an array of {@code nb_bboxes}
+ * AVDetectionBBox, and initializes the variables.
+ * Can be freed with a normal av_free() call.
+ *
+ * @param nb_bboxes number of AVDetectionBBox structures to allocate
+ * @param out_size if non-NULL, the size in bytes of the resulting data array is
+ * written here.
+ */
+AVDetectionBBoxHeader *av_detection_bbox_alloc(uint32_t nb_bboxes, size_t *out_size);
+
+/**
+ * Allocates memory for AVDetectionBBoxHeader, plus an array of {@code nb_bboxes}
+ * AVDetectionBBox, in the given AVFrame {@code frame} as AVFrameSideData of type
+ * AV_FRAME_DATA_DETECTION_BBOXES and initializes the variables.
+ */
+AVDetectionBBoxHeader *av_detection_bbox_create_side_data(AVFrame *frame, uint32_t nb_bboxes);
+#endif
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/dict.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/dict.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..713c9e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/dict.h
@@ -0,0 +1,241 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * Public dictionary API.
+ * @deprecated
+ *  AVDictionary is provided for compatibility with libav. It is both in
+ *  implementation as well as API inefficient. It does not scale and is
+ *  extremely slow with large dictionaries.
+ *  It is recommended that new code uses our tree container from tree.c/h
+ *  where applicable, which uses AVL trees to achieve O(log n) performance.
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_DICT_H
+#define AVUTIL_DICT_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_dict AVDictionary
+ * @ingroup lavu_data
+ *
+ * @brief Simple key:value store
+ *
+ * @{
+ * Dictionaries are used for storing key-value pairs.
+ *
+ * - To **create an AVDictionary**, simply pass an address of a NULL
+ *   pointer to av_dict_set(). NULL can be used as an empty dictionary
+ *   wherever a pointer to an AVDictionary is required.
+ * - To **insert an entry**, use av_dict_set().
+ * - Use av_dict_get() to **retrieve an entry**.
+ * - To **iterate over all entries**, use av_dict_iterate().
+ * - In order to **free the dictionary and all its contents**, use av_dict_free().
+ *
+ @code
+   AVDictionary *d = NULL;           // "create" an empty dictionary
+   AVDictionaryEntry *t = NULL;
+
+   av_dict_set(&d, "foo", "bar", 0); // add an entry
+
+   char *k = av_strdup("key");       // if your strings are already allocated,
+   char *v = av_strdup("value");     // you can avoid copying them like this
+   av_dict_set(&d, k, v, AV_DICT_DONT_STRDUP_KEY | AV_DICT_DONT_STRDUP_VAL);
+
+   while ((t = av_dict_iterate(d, t))) {
+       <....>                        // iterate over all entries in d
+   }
+   av_dict_free(&d);
+ @endcode
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @name AVDictionary Flags
+ * Flags that influence behavior of the matching of keys or insertion to the dictionary.
+ * @{
+ */
+#define AV_DICT_MATCH_CASE      1   /**< Only get an entry with exact-case key match. Only relevant in av_dict_get(). */
+#define AV_DICT_IGNORE_SUFFIX   2   /**< Return first entry in a dictionary whose first part corresponds to the search key,
+                                         ignoring the suffix of the found key string. Only relevant in av_dict_get(). */
+#define AV_DICT_DONT_STRDUP_KEY 4   /**< Take ownership of a key that's been
+                                         allocated with av_malloc() or another memory allocation function. */
+#define AV_DICT_DONT_STRDUP_VAL 8   /**< Take ownership of a value that's been
+                                         allocated with av_malloc() or another memory allocation function. */
+#define AV_DICT_DONT_OVERWRITE 16   /**< Don't overwrite existing entries. */
+#define AV_DICT_APPEND         32   /**< If the entry already exists, append to it.  Note that no
+                                         delimiter is added, the strings are simply concatenated. */
+#define AV_DICT_MULTIKEY       64   /**< Allow to store several equal keys in the dictionary */
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+typedef struct AVDictionaryEntry {
+    char *key;
+    char *value;
+} AVDictionaryEntry;
+
+typedef struct AVDictionary AVDictionary;
+
+/**
+ * Get a dictionary entry with matching key.
+ *
+ * The returned entry key or value must not be changed, or it will
+ * cause undefined behavior.
+ *
+ * @param prev  Set to the previous matching element to find the next.
+ *              If set to NULL the first matching element is returned.
+ * @param key   Matching key
+ * @param flags A collection of AV_DICT_* flags controlling how the
+ *              entry is retrieved
+ *
+ * @return      Found entry or NULL in case no matching entry was found in the dictionary
+ */
+AVDictionaryEntry *av_dict_get(const AVDictionary *m, const char *key,
+                               const AVDictionaryEntry *prev, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Iterate over a dictionary
+ *
+ * Iterates through all entries in the dictionary.
+ *
+ * @warning The returned AVDictionaryEntry key/value must not be changed.
+ *
+ * @warning As av_dict_set() invalidates all previous entries returned
+ * by this function, it must not be called while iterating over the dict.
+ *
+ * Typical usage:
+ * @code
+ * const AVDictionaryEntry *e = NULL;
+ * while ((e = av_dict_iterate(m, e))) {
+ *     // ...
+ * }
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * @param m     The dictionary to iterate over
+ * @param prev  Pointer to the previous AVDictionaryEntry, NULL initially
+ *
+ * @retval AVDictionaryEntry* The next element in the dictionary
+ * @retval NULL               No more elements in the dictionary
+ */
+const AVDictionaryEntry *av_dict_iterate(const AVDictionary *m,
+                                         const AVDictionaryEntry *prev);
+
+/**
+ * Get number of entries in dictionary.
+ *
+ * @param m dictionary
+ * @return  number of entries in dictionary
+ */
+int av_dict_count(const AVDictionary *m);
+
+/**
+ * Set the given entry in *pm, overwriting an existing entry.
+ *
+ * Note: If AV_DICT_DONT_STRDUP_KEY or AV_DICT_DONT_STRDUP_VAL is set,
+ * these arguments will be freed on error.
+ *
+ * @warning Adding a new entry to a dictionary invalidates all existing entries
+ * previously returned with av_dict_get() or av_dict_iterate().
+ *
+ * @param pm        Pointer to a pointer to a dictionary struct. If *pm is NULL
+ *                  a dictionary struct is allocated and put in *pm.
+ * @param key       Entry key to add to *pm (will either be av_strduped or added as a new key depending on flags)
+ * @param value     Entry value to add to *pm (will be av_strduped or added as a new key depending on flags).
+ *                  Passing a NULL value will cause an existing entry to be deleted.
+ *
+ * @return          >= 0 on success otherwise an error code <0
+ */
+int av_dict_set(AVDictionary **pm, const char *key, const char *value, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Convenience wrapper for av_dict_set() that converts the value to a string
+ * and stores it.
+ *
+ * Note: If ::AV_DICT_DONT_STRDUP_KEY is set, key will be freed on error.
+ */
+int av_dict_set_int(AVDictionary **pm, const char *key, int64_t value, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Parse the key/value pairs list and add the parsed entries to a dictionary.
+ *
+ * In case of failure, all the successfully set entries are stored in
+ * *pm. You may need to manually free the created dictionary.
+ *
+ * @param key_val_sep  A 0-terminated list of characters used to separate
+ *                     key from value
+ * @param pairs_sep    A 0-terminated list of characters used to separate
+ *                     two pairs from each other
+ * @param flags        Flags to use when adding to the dictionary.
+ *                     ::AV_DICT_DONT_STRDUP_KEY and ::AV_DICT_DONT_STRDUP_VAL
+ *                     are ignored since the key/value tokens will always
+ *                     be duplicated.
+ *
+ * @return             0 on success, negative AVERROR code on failure
+ */
+int av_dict_parse_string(AVDictionary **pm, const char *str,
+                         const char *key_val_sep, const char *pairs_sep,
+                         int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Copy entries from one AVDictionary struct into another.
+ *
+ * @note Metadata is read using the ::AV_DICT_IGNORE_SUFFIX flag
+ *
+ * @param dst   Pointer to a pointer to a AVDictionary struct to copy into. If *dst is NULL,
+ *              this function will allocate a struct for you and put it in *dst
+ * @param src   Pointer to the source AVDictionary struct to copy items from.
+ * @param flags Flags to use when setting entries in *dst
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, negative AVERROR code on failure. If dst was allocated
+ *           by this function, callers should free the associated memory.
+ */
+int av_dict_copy(AVDictionary **dst, const AVDictionary *src, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Free all the memory allocated for an AVDictionary struct
+ * and all keys and values.
+ */
+void av_dict_free(AVDictionary **m);
+
+/**
+ * Get dictionary entries as a string.
+ *
+ * Create a string containing dictionary's entries.
+ * Such string may be passed back to av_dict_parse_string().
+ * @note String is escaped with backslashes ('\').
+ *
+ * @warning Separators cannot be neither '\\' nor '\0'. They also cannot be the same.
+ *
+ * @param[in]  m             The dictionary
+ * @param[out] buffer        Pointer to buffer that will be allocated with string containg entries.
+ *                           Buffer must be freed by the caller when is no longer needed.
+ * @param[in]  key_val_sep   Character used to separate key from value
+ * @param[in]  pairs_sep     Character used to separate two pairs from each other
+ *
+ * @return                   >= 0 on success, negative on error
+ */
+int av_dict_get_string(const AVDictionary *m, char **buffer,
+                       const char key_val_sep, const char pairs_sep);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_DICT_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/display.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/display.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..50f2b44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/display.h
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2014 Vittorio Giovara <vittorio.giovara@gmail.com>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavu_video_display
+ * Display matrix
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_DISPLAY_H
+#define AVUTIL_DISPLAY_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_video_display Display transformation matrix functions
+ * @ingroup lavu_video
+ *
+ * The display transformation matrix specifies an affine transformation that
+ * should be applied to video frames for correct presentation. It is compatible
+ * with the matrices stored in the ISO/IEC 14496-12 container format.
+ *
+ * The data is a 3x3 matrix represented as a 9-element array:
+ *
+ * @code{.unparsed}
+ *                                  | a b u |
+ *   (a, b, u, c, d, v, x, y, w) -> | c d v |
+ *                                  | x y w |
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * All numbers are stored in native endianness, as 16.16 fixed-point values,
+ * except for u, v and w, which are stored as 2.30 fixed-point values.
+ *
+ * The transformation maps a point (p, q) in the source (pre-transformation)
+ * frame to the point (p', q') in the destination (post-transformation) frame as
+ * follows:
+ *
+ * @code{.unparsed}
+ *               | a b u |
+ *   (p, q, 1) . | c d v | = z * (p', q', 1)
+ *               | x y w |
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * The transformation can also be more explicitly written in components as
+ * follows:
+ *
+ * @code{.unparsed}
+ *   p' = (a * p + c * q + x) / z;
+ *   q' = (b * p + d * q + y) / z;
+ *   z  =  u * p + v * q + w
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Extract the rotation component of the transformation matrix.
+ *
+ * @param matrix the transformation matrix
+ * @return the angle (in degrees) by which the transformation rotates the frame
+ *         counterclockwise. The angle will be in range [-180.0, 180.0],
+ *         or NaN if the matrix is singular.
+ *
+ * @note floating point numbers are inherently inexact, so callers are
+ *       recommended to round the return value to nearest integer before use.
+ */
+double av_display_rotation_get(const int32_t matrix[9]);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize a transformation matrix describing a pure clockwise
+ * rotation by the specified angle (in degrees).
+ *
+ * @param[out] matrix a transformation matrix (will be fully overwritten
+ *                    by this function)
+ * @param angle rotation angle in degrees.
+ */
+void av_display_rotation_set(int32_t matrix[9], double angle);
+
+/**
+ * Flip the input matrix horizontally and/or vertically.
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] matrix a transformation matrix
+ * @param hflip whether the matrix should be flipped horizontally
+ * @param vflip whether the matrix should be flipped vertically
+ */
+void av_display_matrix_flip(int32_t matrix[9], int hflip, int vflip);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_DISPLAY_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/dovi_meta.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/dovi_meta.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3d11e02
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/dovi_meta.h
@@ -0,0 +1,236 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2020 Vacing Fang <vacingfang@tencent.com>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * DOVI configuration
+ */
+
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_DOVI_META_H
+#define AVUTIL_DOVI_META_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include "rational.h"
+
+/*
+ * DOVI configuration
+ * ref: dolby-vision-bitstreams-within-the-iso-base-media-file-format-v2.1.2
+        dolby-vision-bitstreams-in-mpeg-2-transport-stream-multiplex-v1.2
+ * @code
+ * uint8_t  dv_version_major, the major version number that the stream complies with
+ * uint8_t  dv_version_minor, the minor version number that the stream complies with
+ * uint8_t  dv_profile, the Dolby Vision profile
+ * uint8_t  dv_level, the Dolby Vision level
+ * uint8_t  rpu_present_flag
+ * uint8_t  el_present_flag
+ * uint8_t  bl_present_flag
+ * uint8_t  dv_bl_signal_compatibility_id
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * @note The struct must be allocated with av_dovi_alloc() and
+ *       its size is not a part of the public ABI.
+ */
+typedef struct AVDOVIDecoderConfigurationRecord {
+    uint8_t dv_version_major;
+    uint8_t dv_version_minor;
+    uint8_t dv_profile;
+    uint8_t dv_level;
+    uint8_t rpu_present_flag;
+    uint8_t el_present_flag;
+    uint8_t bl_present_flag;
+    uint8_t dv_bl_signal_compatibility_id;
+} AVDOVIDecoderConfigurationRecord;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a AVDOVIDecoderConfigurationRecord structure and initialize its
+ * fields to default values.
+ *
+ * @return the newly allocated struct or NULL on failure
+ */
+AVDOVIDecoderConfigurationRecord *av_dovi_alloc(size_t *size);
+
+/**
+ * Dolby Vision RPU data header.
+ *
+ * @note sizeof(AVDOVIRpuDataHeader) is not part of the public ABI.
+ */
+typedef struct AVDOVIRpuDataHeader {
+    uint8_t rpu_type;
+    uint16_t rpu_format;
+    uint8_t vdr_rpu_profile;
+    uint8_t vdr_rpu_level;
+    uint8_t chroma_resampling_explicit_filter_flag;
+    uint8_t coef_data_type; /* informative, lavc always converts to fixed */
+    uint8_t coef_log2_denom;
+    uint8_t vdr_rpu_normalized_idc;
+    uint8_t bl_video_full_range_flag;
+    uint8_t bl_bit_depth; /* [8, 16] */
+    uint8_t el_bit_depth; /* [8, 16] */
+    uint8_t vdr_bit_depth; /* [8, 16] */
+    uint8_t spatial_resampling_filter_flag;
+    uint8_t el_spatial_resampling_filter_flag;
+    uint8_t disable_residual_flag;
+} AVDOVIRpuDataHeader;
+
+enum AVDOVIMappingMethod {
+    AV_DOVI_MAPPING_POLYNOMIAL = 0,
+    AV_DOVI_MAPPING_MMR = 1,
+};
+
+/**
+ * Coefficients of a piece-wise function. The pieces of the function span the
+ * value ranges between two adjacent pivot values.
+ */
+#define AV_DOVI_MAX_PIECES 8
+typedef struct AVDOVIReshapingCurve {
+    uint8_t num_pivots;                         /* [2, 9] */
+    uint16_t pivots[AV_DOVI_MAX_PIECES + 1];    /* sorted ascending */
+    enum AVDOVIMappingMethod mapping_idc[AV_DOVI_MAX_PIECES];
+    /* AV_DOVI_MAPPING_POLYNOMIAL */
+    uint8_t poly_order[AV_DOVI_MAX_PIECES];     /* [1, 2] */
+    int64_t poly_coef[AV_DOVI_MAX_PIECES][3];   /* x^0, x^1, x^2 */
+    /* AV_DOVI_MAPPING_MMR */
+    uint8_t mmr_order[AV_DOVI_MAX_PIECES];      /* [1, 3] */
+    int64_t mmr_constant[AV_DOVI_MAX_PIECES];
+    int64_t mmr_coef[AV_DOVI_MAX_PIECES][3/* order - 1 */][7];
+} AVDOVIReshapingCurve;
+
+enum AVDOVINLQMethod {
+    AV_DOVI_NLQ_NONE = -1,
+    AV_DOVI_NLQ_LINEAR_DZ = 0,
+};
+
+/**
+ * Coefficients of the non-linear inverse quantization. For the interpretation
+ * of these, see ETSI GS CCM 001.
+ */
+typedef struct AVDOVINLQParams {
+    uint16_t nlq_offset;
+    uint64_t vdr_in_max;
+    /* AV_DOVI_NLQ_LINEAR_DZ */
+    uint64_t linear_deadzone_slope;
+    uint64_t linear_deadzone_threshold;
+} AVDOVINLQParams;
+
+/**
+ * Dolby Vision RPU data mapping parameters.
+ *
+ * @note sizeof(AVDOVIDataMapping) is not part of the public ABI.
+ */
+typedef struct AVDOVIDataMapping {
+    uint8_t vdr_rpu_id;
+    uint8_t mapping_color_space;
+    uint8_t mapping_chroma_format_idc;
+    AVDOVIReshapingCurve curves[3]; /* per component */
+
+    /* Non-linear inverse quantization */
+    enum AVDOVINLQMethod nlq_method_idc;
+    uint32_t num_x_partitions;
+    uint32_t num_y_partitions;
+    AVDOVINLQParams nlq[3]; /* per component */
+} AVDOVIDataMapping;
+
+/**
+ * Dolby Vision RPU colorspace metadata parameters.
+ *
+ * @note sizeof(AVDOVIColorMetadata) is not part of the public ABI.
+ */
+typedef struct AVDOVIColorMetadata {
+    uint8_t dm_metadata_id;
+    uint8_t scene_refresh_flag;
+
+    /**
+     * Coefficients of the custom Dolby Vision IPT-PQ matrices. These are to be
+     * used instead of the matrices indicated by the frame's colorspace tags.
+     * The output of rgb_to_lms_matrix is to be fed into a BT.2020 LMS->RGB
+     * matrix based on a Hunt-Pointer-Estevez transform, but without any
+     * crosstalk. (See the definition of the ICtCp colorspace for more
+     * information.)
+     */
+    AVRational ycc_to_rgb_matrix[9]; /* before PQ linearization */
+    AVRational ycc_to_rgb_offset[3]; /* input offset of neutral value */
+    AVRational rgb_to_lms_matrix[9]; /* after PQ linearization */
+
+    /**
+     * Extra signal metadata (see Dolby patents for more info).
+     */
+    uint16_t signal_eotf;
+    uint16_t signal_eotf_param0;
+    uint16_t signal_eotf_param1;
+    uint32_t signal_eotf_param2;
+    uint8_t signal_bit_depth;
+    uint8_t signal_color_space;
+    uint8_t signal_chroma_format;
+    uint8_t signal_full_range_flag; /* [0, 3] */
+    uint16_t source_min_pq;
+    uint16_t source_max_pq;
+    uint16_t source_diagonal;
+} AVDOVIColorMetadata;
+
+/**
+ * Combined struct representing a combination of header, mapping and color
+ * metadata, for attaching to frames as side data.
+ *
+ * @note The struct must be allocated with av_dovi_metadata_alloc() and
+ *       its size is not a part of the public ABI.
+ */
+
+typedef struct AVDOVIMetadata {
+    /**
+     * Offset in bytes from the beginning of this structure at which the
+     * respective structs start.
+     */
+    size_t header_offset;   /* AVDOVIRpuDataHeader */
+    size_t mapping_offset;  /* AVDOVIDataMapping */
+    size_t color_offset;    /* AVDOVIColorMetadata */
+} AVDOVIMetadata;
+
+static av_always_inline AVDOVIRpuDataHeader *
+av_dovi_get_header(const AVDOVIMetadata *data)
+{
+    return (AVDOVIRpuDataHeader *)((uint8_t *) data + data->header_offset);
+}
+
+static av_always_inline AVDOVIDataMapping *
+av_dovi_get_mapping(const AVDOVIMetadata *data)
+{
+    return (AVDOVIDataMapping *)((uint8_t *) data + data->mapping_offset);
+}
+
+static av_always_inline AVDOVIColorMetadata *
+av_dovi_get_color(const AVDOVIMetadata *data)
+{
+    return (AVDOVIColorMetadata *)((uint8_t *) data + data->color_offset);
+}
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVDOVIMetadata structure and initialize its
+ * fields to default values.
+ *
+ * @param size If this parameter is non-NULL, the size in bytes of the
+ *             allocated struct will be written here on success
+ *
+ * @return the newly allocated struct or NULL on failure
+ */
+AVDOVIMetadata *av_dovi_metadata_alloc(size_t *size);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_DOVI_META_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/downmix_info.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/downmix_info.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..221cf5b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/downmix_info.h
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2014 Tim Walker <tdskywalker@gmail.com>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_DOWNMIX_INFO_H
+#define AVUTIL_DOWNMIX_INFO_H
+
+#include "frame.h"
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * audio downmix medatata
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_audio
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup downmix_info Audio downmix metadata
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Possible downmix types.
+ */
+enum AVDownmixType {
+    AV_DOWNMIX_TYPE_UNKNOWN, /**< Not indicated. */
+    AV_DOWNMIX_TYPE_LORO,    /**< Lo/Ro 2-channel downmix (Stereo). */
+    AV_DOWNMIX_TYPE_LTRT,    /**< Lt/Rt 2-channel downmix, Dolby Surround compatible. */
+    AV_DOWNMIX_TYPE_DPLII,   /**< Lt/Rt 2-channel downmix, Dolby Pro Logic II compatible. */
+    AV_DOWNMIX_TYPE_NB       /**< Number of downmix types. Not part of ABI. */
+};
+
+/**
+ * This structure describes optional metadata relevant to a downmix procedure.
+ *
+ * All fields are set by the decoder to the value indicated in the audio
+ * bitstream (if present), or to a "sane" default otherwise.
+ */
+typedef struct AVDownmixInfo {
+    /**
+     * Type of downmix preferred by the mastering engineer.
+     */
+    enum AVDownmixType preferred_downmix_type;
+
+    /**
+     * Absolute scale factor representing the nominal level of the center
+     * channel during a regular downmix.
+     */
+    double center_mix_level;
+
+    /**
+     * Absolute scale factor representing the nominal level of the center
+     * channel during an Lt/Rt compatible downmix.
+     */
+    double center_mix_level_ltrt;
+
+    /**
+     * Absolute scale factor representing the nominal level of the surround
+     * channels during a regular downmix.
+     */
+    double surround_mix_level;
+
+    /**
+     * Absolute scale factor representing the nominal level of the surround
+     * channels during an Lt/Rt compatible downmix.
+     */
+    double surround_mix_level_ltrt;
+
+    /**
+     * Absolute scale factor representing the level at which the LFE data is
+     * mixed into L/R channels during downmixing.
+     */
+    double lfe_mix_level;
+} AVDownmixInfo;
+
+/**
+ * Get a frame's AV_FRAME_DATA_DOWNMIX_INFO side data for editing.
+ *
+ * If the side data is absent, it is created and added to the frame.
+ *
+ * @param frame the frame for which the side data is to be obtained or created
+ *
+ * @return the AVDownmixInfo structure to be edited by the caller, or NULL if
+ *         the structure cannot be allocated.
+ */
+AVDownmixInfo *av_downmix_info_update_side_data(AVFrame *frame);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_DOWNMIX_INFO_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/encryption_info.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/encryption_info.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8fe7ebf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/encryption_info.h
@@ -0,0 +1,205 @@
+/**
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_ENCRYPTION_INFO_H
+#define AVUTIL_ENCRYPTION_INFO_H
+
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+typedef struct AVSubsampleEncryptionInfo {
+    /** The number of bytes that are clear. */
+    unsigned int bytes_of_clear_data;
+
+    /**
+     * The number of bytes that are protected.  If using pattern encryption,
+     * the pattern applies to only the protected bytes; if not using pattern
+     * encryption, all these bytes are encrypted.
+     */
+    unsigned int bytes_of_protected_data;
+} AVSubsampleEncryptionInfo;
+
+/**
+ * This describes encryption info for a packet.  This contains frame-specific
+ * info for how to decrypt the packet before passing it to the decoder.
+ *
+ * The size of this struct is not part of the public ABI.
+ */
+typedef struct AVEncryptionInfo {
+    /** The fourcc encryption scheme, in big-endian byte order. */
+    uint32_t scheme;
+
+    /**
+     * Only used for pattern encryption.  This is the number of 16-byte blocks
+     * that are encrypted.
+     */
+    uint32_t crypt_byte_block;
+
+    /**
+     * Only used for pattern encryption.  This is the number of 16-byte blocks
+     * that are clear.
+     */
+    uint32_t skip_byte_block;
+
+    /**
+     * The ID of the key used to encrypt the packet.  This should always be
+     * 16 bytes long, but may be changed in the future.
+     */
+    uint8_t *key_id;
+    uint32_t key_id_size;
+
+    /**
+     * The initialization vector.  This may have been zero-filled to be the
+     * correct block size.  This should always be 16 bytes long, but may be
+     * changed in the future.
+     */
+    uint8_t *iv;
+    uint32_t iv_size;
+
+    /**
+     * An array of subsample encryption info specifying how parts of the sample
+     * are encrypted.  If there are no subsamples, then the whole sample is
+     * encrypted.
+     */
+    AVSubsampleEncryptionInfo *subsamples;
+    uint32_t subsample_count;
+} AVEncryptionInfo;
+
+/**
+ * This describes info used to initialize an encryption key system.
+ *
+ * The size of this struct is not part of the public ABI.
+ */
+typedef struct AVEncryptionInitInfo {
+    /**
+     * A unique identifier for the key system this is for, can be NULL if it
+     * is not known.  This should always be 16 bytes, but may change in the
+     * future.
+     */
+    uint8_t* system_id;
+    uint32_t system_id_size;
+
+    /**
+     * An array of key IDs this initialization data is for.  All IDs are the
+     * same length.  Can be NULL if there are no known key IDs.
+     */
+    uint8_t** key_ids;
+    /** The number of key IDs. */
+    uint32_t num_key_ids;
+    /**
+     * The number of bytes in each key ID.  This should always be 16, but may
+     * change in the future.
+     */
+    uint32_t key_id_size;
+
+    /**
+     * Key-system specific initialization data.  This data is copied directly
+     * from the file and the format depends on the specific key system.  This
+     * can be NULL if there is no initialization data; in that case, there
+     * will be at least one key ID.
+     */
+    uint8_t* data;
+    uint32_t data_size;
+
+    /**
+     * An optional pointer to the next initialization info in the list.
+     */
+    struct AVEncryptionInitInfo *next;
+} AVEncryptionInitInfo;
+
+/**
+ * Allocates an AVEncryptionInfo structure and sub-pointers to hold the given
+ * number of subsamples.  This will allocate pointers for the key ID, IV,
+ * and subsample entries, set the size members, and zero-initialize the rest.
+ *
+ * @param subsample_count The number of subsamples.
+ * @param key_id_size The number of bytes in the key ID, should be 16.
+ * @param iv_size The number of bytes in the IV, should be 16.
+ *
+ * @return The new AVEncryptionInfo structure, or NULL on error.
+ */
+AVEncryptionInfo *av_encryption_info_alloc(uint32_t subsample_count, uint32_t key_id_size, uint32_t iv_size);
+
+/**
+ * Allocates an AVEncryptionInfo structure with a copy of the given data.
+ * @return The new AVEncryptionInfo structure, or NULL on error.
+ */
+AVEncryptionInfo *av_encryption_info_clone(const AVEncryptionInfo *info);
+
+/**
+ * Frees the given encryption info object.  This MUST NOT be used to free the
+ * side-data data pointer, that should use normal side-data methods.
+ */
+void av_encryption_info_free(AVEncryptionInfo *info);
+
+/**
+ * Creates a copy of the AVEncryptionInfo that is contained in the given side
+ * data.  The resulting object should be passed to av_encryption_info_free()
+ * when done.
+ *
+ * @return The new AVEncryptionInfo structure, or NULL on error.
+ */
+AVEncryptionInfo *av_encryption_info_get_side_data(const uint8_t *side_data, size_t side_data_size);
+
+/**
+ * Allocates and initializes side data that holds a copy of the given encryption
+ * info.  The resulting pointer should be either freed using av_free or given
+ * to av_packet_add_side_data().
+ *
+ * @return The new side-data pointer, or NULL.
+ */
+uint8_t *av_encryption_info_add_side_data(
+      const AVEncryptionInfo *info, size_t *side_data_size);
+
+
+/**
+ * Allocates an AVEncryptionInitInfo structure and sub-pointers to hold the
+ * given sizes.  This will allocate pointers and set all the fields.
+ *
+ * @return The new AVEncryptionInitInfo structure, or NULL on error.
+ */
+AVEncryptionInitInfo *av_encryption_init_info_alloc(
+    uint32_t system_id_size, uint32_t num_key_ids, uint32_t key_id_size, uint32_t data_size);
+
+/**
+ * Frees the given encryption init info object.  This MUST NOT be used to free
+ * the side-data data pointer, that should use normal side-data methods.
+ */
+void av_encryption_init_info_free(AVEncryptionInitInfo* info);
+
+/**
+ * Creates a copy of the AVEncryptionInitInfo that is contained in the given
+ * side data.  The resulting object should be passed to
+ * av_encryption_init_info_free() when done.
+ *
+ * @return The new AVEncryptionInitInfo structure, or NULL on error.
+ */
+AVEncryptionInitInfo *av_encryption_init_info_get_side_data(
+    const uint8_t* side_data, size_t side_data_size);
+
+/**
+ * Allocates and initializes side data that holds a copy of the given encryption
+ * init info.  The resulting pointer should be either freed using av_free or
+ * given to av_packet_add_side_data().
+ *
+ * @return The new side-data pointer, or NULL.
+ */
+uint8_t *av_encryption_init_info_add_side_data(
+    const AVEncryptionInitInfo *info, size_t *side_data_size);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_ENCRYPTION_INFO_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/error.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/error.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0d3269a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/error.h
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * error code definitions
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_ERROR_H
+#define AVUTIL_ERROR_H
+
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <stddef.h>
+
+#include "macros.h"
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_error
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+
+/* error handling */
+#if EDOM > 0
+#define AVERROR(e) (-(e))   ///< Returns a negative error code from a POSIX error code, to return from library functions.
+#define AVUNERROR(e) (-(e)) ///< Returns a POSIX error code from a library function error return value.
+#else
+/* Some platforms have E* and errno already negated. */
+#define AVERROR(e) (e)
+#define AVUNERROR(e) (e)
+#endif
+
+#define FFERRTAG(a, b, c, d) (-(int)MKTAG(a, b, c, d))
+
+#define AVERROR_BSF_NOT_FOUND      FFERRTAG(0xF8,'B','S','F') ///< Bitstream filter not found
+#define AVERROR_BUG                FFERRTAG( 'B','U','G','!') ///< Internal bug, also see AVERROR_BUG2
+#define AVERROR_BUFFER_TOO_SMALL   FFERRTAG( 'B','U','F','S') ///< Buffer too small
+#define AVERROR_DECODER_NOT_FOUND  FFERRTAG(0xF8,'D','E','C') ///< Decoder not found
+#define AVERROR_DEMUXER_NOT_FOUND  FFERRTAG(0xF8,'D','E','M') ///< Demuxer not found
+#define AVERROR_ENCODER_NOT_FOUND  FFERRTAG(0xF8,'E','N','C') ///< Encoder not found
+#define AVERROR_EOF                FFERRTAG( 'E','O','F',' ') ///< End of file
+#define AVERROR_EXIT               FFERRTAG( 'E','X','I','T') ///< Immediate exit was requested; the called function should not be restarted
+#define AVERROR_EXTERNAL           FFERRTAG( 'E','X','T',' ') ///< Generic error in an external library
+#define AVERROR_FILTER_NOT_FOUND   FFERRTAG(0xF8,'F','I','L') ///< Filter not found
+#define AVERROR_INVALIDDATA        FFERRTAG( 'I','N','D','A') ///< Invalid data found when processing input
+#define AVERROR_MUXER_NOT_FOUND    FFERRTAG(0xF8,'M','U','X') ///< Muxer not found
+#define AVERROR_OPTION_NOT_FOUND   FFERRTAG(0xF8,'O','P','T') ///< Option not found
+#define AVERROR_PATCHWELCOME       FFERRTAG( 'P','A','W','E') ///< Not yet implemented in FFmpeg, patches welcome
+#define AVERROR_PROTOCOL_NOT_FOUND FFERRTAG(0xF8,'P','R','O') ///< Protocol not found
+
+#define AVERROR_STREAM_NOT_FOUND   FFERRTAG(0xF8,'S','T','R') ///< Stream not found
+/**
+ * This is semantically identical to AVERROR_BUG
+ * it has been introduced in Libav after our AVERROR_BUG and with a modified value.
+ */
+#define AVERROR_BUG2               FFERRTAG( 'B','U','G',' ')
+#define AVERROR_UNKNOWN            FFERRTAG( 'U','N','K','N') ///< Unknown error, typically from an external library
+#define AVERROR_EXPERIMENTAL       (-0x2bb2afa8) ///< Requested feature is flagged experimental. Set strict_std_compliance if you really want to use it.
+#define AVERROR_INPUT_CHANGED      (-0x636e6701) ///< Input changed between calls. Reconfiguration is required. (can be OR-ed with AVERROR_OUTPUT_CHANGED)
+#define AVERROR_OUTPUT_CHANGED     (-0x636e6702) ///< Output changed between calls. Reconfiguration is required. (can be OR-ed with AVERROR_INPUT_CHANGED)
+/* HTTP & RTSP errors */
+#define AVERROR_HTTP_BAD_REQUEST   FFERRTAG(0xF8,'4','0','0')
+#define AVERROR_HTTP_UNAUTHORIZED  FFERRTAG(0xF8,'4','0','1')
+#define AVERROR_HTTP_FORBIDDEN     FFERRTAG(0xF8,'4','0','3')
+#define AVERROR_HTTP_NOT_FOUND     FFERRTAG(0xF8,'4','0','4')
+#define AVERROR_HTTP_OTHER_4XX     FFERRTAG(0xF8,'4','X','X')
+#define AVERROR_HTTP_SERVER_ERROR  FFERRTAG(0xF8,'5','X','X')
+
+#define AV_ERROR_MAX_STRING_SIZE 64
+
+/**
+ * Put a description of the AVERROR code errnum in errbuf.
+ * In case of failure the global variable errno is set to indicate the
+ * error. Even in case of failure av_strerror() will print a generic
+ * error message indicating the errnum provided to errbuf.
+ *
+ * @param errnum      error code to describe
+ * @param errbuf      buffer to which description is written
+ * @param errbuf_size the size in bytes of errbuf
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative value if a description for errnum
+ * cannot be found
+ */
+int av_strerror(int errnum, char *errbuf, size_t errbuf_size);
+
+/**
+ * Fill the provided buffer with a string containing an error string
+ * corresponding to the AVERROR code errnum.
+ *
+ * @param errbuf         a buffer
+ * @param errbuf_size    size in bytes of errbuf
+ * @param errnum         error code to describe
+ * @return the buffer in input, filled with the error description
+ * @see av_strerror()
+ */
+static inline char *av_make_error_string(char *errbuf, size_t errbuf_size, int errnum)
+{
+    av_strerror(errnum, errbuf, errbuf_size);
+    return errbuf;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Convenience macro, the return value should be used only directly in
+ * function arguments but never stand-alone.
+ */
+#define av_err2str(errnum) \
+    av_make_error_string((char[AV_ERROR_MAX_STRING_SIZE]){0}, AV_ERROR_MAX_STRING_SIZE, errnum)
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_ERROR_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/eval.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/eval.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ee8cffb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/eval.h
@@ -0,0 +1,140 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2002 Michael Niedermayer <michaelni@gmx.at>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * simple arithmetic expression evaluator
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_EVAL_H
+#define AVUTIL_EVAL_H
+
+typedef struct AVExpr AVExpr;
+
+/**
+ * Parse and evaluate an expression.
+ * Note, this is significantly slower than av_expr_eval().
+ *
+ * @param res a pointer to a double where is put the result value of
+ * the expression, or NAN in case of error
+ * @param s expression as a zero terminated string, for example "1+2^3+5*5+sin(2/3)"
+ * @param const_names NULL terminated array of zero terminated strings of constant identifiers, for example {"PI", "E", 0}
+ * @param const_values a zero terminated array of values for the identifiers from const_names
+ * @param func1_names NULL terminated array of zero terminated strings of funcs1 identifiers
+ * @param funcs1 NULL terminated array of function pointers for functions which take 1 argument
+ * @param func2_names NULL terminated array of zero terminated strings of funcs2 identifiers
+ * @param funcs2 NULL terminated array of function pointers for functions which take 2 arguments
+ * @param opaque a pointer which will be passed to all functions from funcs1 and funcs2
+ * @param log_offset log level offset, can be used to silence error messages
+ * @param log_ctx parent logging context
+ * @return >= 0 in case of success, a negative value corresponding to an
+ * AVERROR code otherwise
+ */
+int av_expr_parse_and_eval(double *res, const char *s,
+                           const char * const *const_names, const double *const_values,
+                           const char * const *func1_names, double (* const *funcs1)(void *, double),
+                           const char * const *func2_names, double (* const *funcs2)(void *, double, double),
+                           void *opaque, int log_offset, void *log_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Parse an expression.
+ *
+ * @param expr a pointer where is put an AVExpr containing the parsed
+ * value in case of successful parsing, or NULL otherwise.
+ * The pointed to AVExpr must be freed with av_expr_free() by the user
+ * when it is not needed anymore.
+ * @param s expression as a zero terminated string, for example "1+2^3+5*5+sin(2/3)"
+ * @param const_names NULL terminated array of zero terminated strings of constant identifiers, for example {"PI", "E", 0}
+ * @param func1_names NULL terminated array of zero terminated strings of funcs1 identifiers
+ * @param funcs1 NULL terminated array of function pointers for functions which take 1 argument
+ * @param func2_names NULL terminated array of zero terminated strings of funcs2 identifiers
+ * @param funcs2 NULL terminated array of function pointers for functions which take 2 arguments
+ * @param log_offset log level offset, can be used to silence error messages
+ * @param log_ctx parent logging context
+ * @return >= 0 in case of success, a negative value corresponding to an
+ * AVERROR code otherwise
+ */
+int av_expr_parse(AVExpr **expr, const char *s,
+                  const char * const *const_names,
+                  const char * const *func1_names, double (* const *funcs1)(void *, double),
+                  const char * const *func2_names, double (* const *funcs2)(void *, double, double),
+                  int log_offset, void *log_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Evaluate a previously parsed expression.
+ *
+ * @param e the AVExpr to evaluate
+ * @param const_values a zero terminated array of values for the identifiers from av_expr_parse() const_names
+ * @param opaque a pointer which will be passed to all functions from funcs1 and funcs2
+ * @return the value of the expression
+ */
+double av_expr_eval(AVExpr *e, const double *const_values, void *opaque);
+
+/**
+ * Track the presence of variables and their number of occurrences in a parsed expression
+ *
+ * @param e the AVExpr to track variables in
+ * @param counter a zero-initialized array where the count of each variable will be stored
+ * @param size size of array
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative value indicates that no expression or array was passed
+ * or size was zero
+ */
+int av_expr_count_vars(AVExpr *e, unsigned *counter, int size);
+
+/**
+ * Track the presence of user provided functions and their number of occurrences
+ * in a parsed expression.
+ *
+ * @param e the AVExpr to track user provided functions in
+ * @param counter a zero-initialized array where the count of each function will be stored
+ *                if you passed 5 functions with 2 arguments to av_expr_parse()
+ *                then for arg=2 this will use upto 5 entries.
+ * @param size size of array
+ * @param arg number of arguments the counted functions have
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative value indicates that no expression or array was passed
+ * or size was zero
+ */
+int av_expr_count_func(AVExpr *e, unsigned *counter, int size, int arg);
+
+/**
+ * Free a parsed expression previously created with av_expr_parse().
+ */
+void av_expr_free(AVExpr *e);
+
+/**
+ * Parse the string in numstr and return its value as a double. If
+ * the string is empty, contains only whitespaces, or does not contain
+ * an initial substring that has the expected syntax for a
+ * floating-point number, no conversion is performed. In this case,
+ * returns a value of zero and the value returned in tail is the value
+ * of numstr.
+ *
+ * @param numstr a string representing a number, may contain one of
+ * the International System number postfixes, for example 'K', 'M',
+ * 'G'. If 'i' is appended after the postfix, powers of 2 are used
+ * instead of powers of 10. The 'B' postfix multiplies the value by
+ * 8, and can be appended after another postfix or used alone. This
+ * allows using for example 'KB', 'MiB', 'G' and 'B' as postfix.
+ * @param tail if non-NULL puts here the pointer to the char next
+ * after the last parsed character
+ */
+double av_strtod(const char *numstr, char **tail);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_EVAL_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/ffversion.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/ffversion.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..db56165
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/ffversion.h
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+/* Automatically generated by version.sh, do not manually edit! */
+#ifndef AVUTIL_FFVERSION_H
+#define AVUTIL_FFVERSION_H
+#define FFMPEG_VERSION "N-109379-g2eb7151261"
+#endif /* AVUTIL_FFVERSION_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/fifo.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/fifo.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..70f9376
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/fifo.h
@@ -0,0 +1,448 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavu_fifo
+ * A generic FIFO API
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_FIFO_H
+#define AVUTIL_FIFO_H
+
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+#include "attributes.h"
+#include "version.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_fifo AVFifo
+ * @ingroup lavu_data
+ *
+ * @{
+ * A generic FIFO API
+ */
+
+typedef struct AVFifo AVFifo;
+
+/**
+ * Callback for writing or reading from a FIFO, passed to (and invoked from) the
+ * av_fifo_*_cb() functions. It may be invoked multiple times from a single
+ * av_fifo_*_cb() call and may process less data than the maximum size indicated
+ * by nb_elems.
+ *
+ * @param opaque the opaque pointer provided to the av_fifo_*_cb() function
+ * @param buf the buffer for reading or writing the data, depending on which
+ *            av_fifo_*_cb function is called
+ * @param nb_elems On entry contains the maximum number of elements that can be
+ *                 read from / written into buf. On success, the callback should
+ *                 update it to contain the number of elements actually written.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative error code on failure (will be returned from
+ *         the invoking av_fifo_*_cb() function)
+ */
+typedef int AVFifoCB(void *opaque, void *buf, size_t *nb_elems);
+
+/**
+ * Automatically resize the FIFO on writes, so that the data fits. This
+ * automatic resizing happens up to a limit that can be modified with
+ * av_fifo_auto_grow_limit().
+ */
+#define AV_FIFO_FLAG_AUTO_GROW      (1 << 0)
+
+/**
+ * Allocate and initialize an AVFifo with a given element size.
+ *
+ * @param elems     initial number of elements that can be stored in the FIFO
+ * @param elem_size Size in bytes of a single element. Further operations on
+ *                  the returned FIFO will implicitly use this element size.
+ * @param flags a combination of AV_FIFO_FLAG_*
+ *
+ * @return newly-allocated AVFifo on success, a negative error code on failure
+ */
+AVFifo *av_fifo_alloc2(size_t elems, size_t elem_size,
+                       unsigned int flags);
+
+/**
+ * @return Element size for FIFO operations. This element size is set at
+ *         FIFO allocation and remains constant during its lifetime
+ */
+size_t av_fifo_elem_size(const AVFifo *f);
+
+/**
+ * Set the maximum size (in elements) to which the FIFO can be resized
+ * automatically. Has no effect unless AV_FIFO_FLAG_AUTO_GROW is used.
+ */
+void av_fifo_auto_grow_limit(AVFifo *f, size_t max_elems);
+
+/**
+ * @return number of elements available for reading from the given FIFO.
+ */
+size_t av_fifo_can_read(const AVFifo *f);
+
+/**
+ * @return Number of elements that can be written into the given FIFO without
+ *         growing it.
+ *
+ *         In other words, this number of elements or less is guaranteed to fit
+ *         into the FIFO. More data may be written when the
+ *         AV_FIFO_FLAG_AUTO_GROW flag was specified at FIFO creation, but this
+ *         may involve memory allocation, which can fail.
+ */
+size_t av_fifo_can_write(const AVFifo *f);
+
+/**
+ * Enlarge an AVFifo.
+ *
+ * On success, the FIFO will be large enough to hold exactly
+ * inc + av_fifo_can_read() + av_fifo_can_write()
+ * elements. In case of failure, the old FIFO is kept unchanged.
+ *
+ * @param f AVFifo to resize
+ * @param inc number of elements to allocate for, in addition to the current
+ *            allocated size
+ * @return a non-negative number on success, a negative error code on failure
+ */
+int av_fifo_grow2(AVFifo *f, size_t inc);
+
+/**
+ * Write data into a FIFO.
+ *
+ * In case nb_elems > av_fifo_can_write(f) and the AV_FIFO_FLAG_AUTO_GROW flag
+ * was not specified at FIFO creation, nothing is written and an error
+ * is returned.
+ *
+ * Calling function is guaranteed to succeed if nb_elems <= av_fifo_can_write(f).
+ *
+ * @param f the FIFO buffer
+ * @param buf Data to be written. nb_elems * av_fifo_elem_size(f) bytes will be
+ *            read from buf on success.
+ * @param nb_elems number of elements to write into FIFO
+ *
+ * @return a non-negative number on success, a negative error code on failure
+ */
+int av_fifo_write(AVFifo *f, const void *buf, size_t nb_elems);
+
+/**
+ * Write data from a user-provided callback into a FIFO.
+ *
+ * @param f the FIFO buffer
+ * @param read_cb Callback supplying the data to the FIFO. May be called
+ *                multiple times.
+ * @param opaque opaque user data to be provided to read_cb
+ * @param nb_elems Should point to the maximum number of elements that can be
+ *                 written. Will be updated to contain the number of elements
+ *                 actually written.
+ *
+ * @return non-negative number on success, a negative error code on failure
+ */
+int av_fifo_write_from_cb(AVFifo *f, AVFifoCB read_cb,
+                          void *opaque, size_t *nb_elems);
+
+/**
+ * Read data from a FIFO.
+ *
+ * In case nb_elems > av_fifo_can_read(f), nothing is read and an error
+ * is returned.
+ *
+ * @param f the FIFO buffer
+ * @param buf Buffer to store the data. nb_elems * av_fifo_elem_size(f) bytes
+ *            will be written into buf on success.
+ * @param nb_elems number of elements to read from FIFO
+ *
+ * @return a non-negative number on success, a negative error code on failure
+ */
+int av_fifo_read(AVFifo *f, void *buf, size_t nb_elems);
+
+/**
+ * Feed data from a FIFO into a user-provided callback.
+ *
+ * @param f the FIFO buffer
+ * @param write_cb Callback the data will be supplied to. May be called
+ *                 multiple times.
+ * @param opaque opaque user data to be provided to write_cb
+ * @param nb_elems Should point to the maximum number of elements that can be
+ *                 read. Will be updated to contain the total number of elements
+ *                 actually sent to the callback.
+ *
+ * @return non-negative number on success, a negative error code on failure
+ */
+int av_fifo_read_to_cb(AVFifo *f, AVFifoCB write_cb,
+                       void *opaque, size_t *nb_elems);
+
+/**
+ * Read data from a FIFO without modifying FIFO state.
+ *
+ * Returns an error if an attempt is made to peek to nonexistent elements
+ * (i.e. if offset + nb_elems is larger than av_fifo_can_read(f)).
+ *
+ * @param f the FIFO buffer
+ * @param buf Buffer to store the data. nb_elems * av_fifo_elem_size(f) bytes
+ *            will be written into buf.
+ * @param nb_elems number of elements to read from FIFO
+ * @param offset number of initial elements to skip.
+ *
+ * @return a non-negative number on success, a negative error code on failure
+ */
+int av_fifo_peek(AVFifo *f, void *buf, size_t nb_elems, size_t offset);
+
+/**
+ * Feed data from a FIFO into a user-provided callback.
+ *
+ * @param f the FIFO buffer
+ * @param write_cb Callback the data will be supplied to. May be called
+ *                 multiple times.
+ * @param opaque opaque user data to be provided to write_cb
+ * @param nb_elems Should point to the maximum number of elements that can be
+ *                 read. Will be updated to contain the total number of elements
+ *                 actually sent to the callback.
+ * @param offset number of initial elements to skip; offset + *nb_elems must not
+ *               be larger than av_fifo_can_read(f).
+ *
+ * @return a non-negative number on success, a negative error code on failure
+ */
+int av_fifo_peek_to_cb(AVFifo *f, AVFifoCB write_cb, void *opaque,
+                       size_t *nb_elems, size_t offset);
+
+/**
+ * Discard the specified amount of data from an AVFifo.
+ * @param size number of elements to discard, MUST NOT be larger than
+ *             av_fifo_can_read(f)
+ */
+void av_fifo_drain2(AVFifo *f, size_t size);
+
+/*
+ * Empty the AVFifo.
+ * @param f AVFifo to reset
+ */
+void av_fifo_reset2(AVFifo *f);
+
+/**
+ * Free an AVFifo and reset pointer to NULL.
+ * @param f Pointer to an AVFifo to free. *f == NULL is allowed.
+ */
+void av_fifo_freep2(AVFifo **f);
+
+
+#if FF_API_FIFO_OLD_API
+typedef struct AVFifoBuffer {
+    uint8_t *buffer;
+    uint8_t *rptr, *wptr, *end;
+    uint32_t rndx, wndx;
+} AVFifoBuffer;
+
+/**
+ * Initialize an AVFifoBuffer.
+ * @param size of FIFO
+ * @return AVFifoBuffer or NULL in case of memory allocation failure
+ * @deprecated use av_fifo_alloc2()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+AVFifoBuffer *av_fifo_alloc(unsigned int size);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize an AVFifoBuffer.
+ * @param nmemb number of elements
+ * @param size  size of the single element
+ * @return AVFifoBuffer or NULL in case of memory allocation failure
+ * @deprecated use av_fifo_alloc2()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+AVFifoBuffer *av_fifo_alloc_array(size_t nmemb, size_t size);
+
+/**
+ * Free an AVFifoBuffer.
+ * @param f AVFifoBuffer to free
+ * @deprecated use the AVFifo API with av_fifo_freep2()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+void av_fifo_free(AVFifoBuffer *f);
+
+/**
+ * Free an AVFifoBuffer and reset pointer to NULL.
+ * @param f AVFifoBuffer to free
+ * @deprecated use the AVFifo API with av_fifo_freep2()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+void av_fifo_freep(AVFifoBuffer **f);
+
+/**
+ * Reset the AVFifoBuffer to the state right after av_fifo_alloc, in particular it is emptied.
+ * @param f AVFifoBuffer to reset
+ * @deprecated use av_fifo_reset2() with the new AVFifo-API
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+void av_fifo_reset(AVFifoBuffer *f);
+
+/**
+ * Return the amount of data in bytes in the AVFifoBuffer, that is the
+ * amount of data you can read from it.
+ * @param f AVFifoBuffer to read from
+ * @return size
+ * @deprecated use av_fifo_can_read() with the new AVFifo-API
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_fifo_size(const AVFifoBuffer *f);
+
+/**
+ * Return the amount of space in bytes in the AVFifoBuffer, that is the
+ * amount of data you can write into it.
+ * @param f AVFifoBuffer to write into
+ * @return size
+ * @deprecated use av_fifo_can_write() with the new AVFifo-API
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_fifo_space(const AVFifoBuffer *f);
+
+/**
+ * Feed data at specific position from an AVFifoBuffer to a user-supplied callback.
+ * Similar as av_fifo_gereric_read but without discarding data.
+ * @param f AVFifoBuffer to read from
+ * @param offset offset from current read position
+ * @param buf_size number of bytes to read
+ * @param func generic read function
+ * @param dest data destination
+ *
+ * @return a non-negative number on success, a negative error code on failure
+ *
+ * @deprecated use the new AVFifo-API with av_fifo_peek() when func == NULL,
+ *             av_fifo_peek_to_cb() otherwise
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_fifo_generic_peek_at(AVFifoBuffer *f, void *dest, int offset, int buf_size, void (*func)(void*, void*, int));
+
+/**
+ * Feed data from an AVFifoBuffer to a user-supplied callback.
+ * Similar as av_fifo_gereric_read but without discarding data.
+ * @param f AVFifoBuffer to read from
+ * @param buf_size number of bytes to read
+ * @param func generic read function
+ * @param dest data destination
+ *
+ * @return a non-negative number on success, a negative error code on failure
+ *
+ * @deprecated use the new AVFifo-API with av_fifo_peek() when func == NULL,
+ *             av_fifo_peek_to_cb() otherwise
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_fifo_generic_peek(AVFifoBuffer *f, void *dest, int buf_size, void (*func)(void*, void*, int));
+
+/**
+ * Feed data from an AVFifoBuffer to a user-supplied callback.
+ * @param f AVFifoBuffer to read from
+ * @param buf_size number of bytes to read
+ * @param func generic read function
+ * @param dest data destination
+ *
+ * @return a non-negative number on success, a negative error code on failure
+ *
+ * @deprecated use the new AVFifo-API with av_fifo_read() when func == NULL,
+ *             av_fifo_read_to_cb() otherwise
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_fifo_generic_read(AVFifoBuffer *f, void *dest, int buf_size, void (*func)(void*, void*, int));
+
+/**
+ * Feed data from a user-supplied callback to an AVFifoBuffer.
+ * @param f AVFifoBuffer to write to
+ * @param src data source; non-const since it may be used as a
+ * modifiable context by the function defined in func
+ * @param size number of bytes to write
+ * @param func generic write function; the first parameter is src,
+ * the second is dest_buf, the third is dest_buf_size.
+ * func must return the number of bytes written to dest_buf, or <= 0 to
+ * indicate no more data available to write.
+ * If func is NULL, src is interpreted as a simple byte array for source data.
+ * @return the number of bytes written to the FIFO or a negative error code on failure
+ *
+ * @deprecated use the new AVFifo-API with av_fifo_write() when func == NULL,
+ *             av_fifo_write_from_cb() otherwise
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_fifo_generic_write(AVFifoBuffer *f, void *src, int size, int (*func)(void*, void*, int));
+
+/**
+ * Resize an AVFifoBuffer.
+ * In case of reallocation failure, the old FIFO is kept unchanged.
+ *
+ * @param f AVFifoBuffer to resize
+ * @param size new AVFifoBuffer size in bytes
+ * @return <0 for failure, >=0 otherwise
+ *
+ * @deprecated use the new AVFifo-API with av_fifo_grow2() to increase FIFO size,
+ *             decreasing FIFO size is not supported
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_fifo_realloc2(AVFifoBuffer *f, unsigned int size);
+
+/**
+ * Enlarge an AVFifoBuffer.
+ * In case of reallocation failure, the old FIFO is kept unchanged.
+ * The new fifo size may be larger than the requested size.
+ *
+ * @param f AVFifoBuffer to resize
+ * @param additional_space the amount of space in bytes to allocate in addition to av_fifo_size()
+ * @return <0 for failure, >=0 otherwise
+ *
+ * @deprecated use the new AVFifo-API with av_fifo_grow2(); note that unlike
+ * this function it adds to the allocated size, rather than to the used size
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_fifo_grow(AVFifoBuffer *f, unsigned int additional_space);
+
+/**
+ * Read and discard the specified amount of data from an AVFifoBuffer.
+ * @param f AVFifoBuffer to read from
+ * @param size amount of data to read in bytes
+ *
+ * @deprecated use the new AVFifo-API with av_fifo_drain2()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+void av_fifo_drain(AVFifoBuffer *f, int size);
+
+#if FF_API_FIFO_PEEK2
+/**
+ * Return a pointer to the data stored in a FIFO buffer at a certain offset.
+ * The FIFO buffer is not modified.
+ *
+ * @param f    AVFifoBuffer to peek at, f must be non-NULL
+ * @param offs an offset in bytes, its absolute value must be less
+ *             than the used buffer size or the returned pointer will
+ *             point outside to the buffer data.
+ *             The used buffer size can be checked with av_fifo_size().
+ * @deprecated use the new AVFifo-API with av_fifo_peek() or av_fifo_peek_to_cb()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+static inline uint8_t *av_fifo_peek2(const AVFifoBuffer *f, int offs)
+{
+    uint8_t *ptr = f->rptr + offs;
+    if (ptr >= f->end)
+        ptr = f->buffer + (ptr - f->end);
+    else if (ptr < f->buffer)
+        ptr = f->end - (f->buffer - ptr);
+    return ptr;
+}
+#endif
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_FIFO_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/file.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/file.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fc87a9c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/file.h
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_FILE_H
+#define AVUTIL_FILE_H
+
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+#include "version.h"
+#include "attributes.h"
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * Misc file utilities.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Read the file with name filename, and put its content in a newly
+ * allocated buffer or map it with mmap() when available.
+ * In case of success set *bufptr to the read or mmapped buffer, and
+ * *size to the size in bytes of the buffer in *bufptr.
+ * Unlike mmap this function succeeds with zero sized files, in this
+ * case *bufptr will be set to NULL and *size will be set to 0.
+ * The returned buffer must be released with av_file_unmap().
+ *
+ * @param filename path to the file
+ * @param[out] bufptr pointee is set to the mapped or allocated buffer
+ * @param[out] size pointee is set to the size in bytes of the buffer
+ * @param log_offset loglevel offset used for logging
+ * @param log_ctx context used for logging
+ * @return a non negative number in case of success, a negative value
+ * corresponding to an AVERROR error code in case of failure
+ */
+av_warn_unused_result
+int av_file_map(const char *filename, uint8_t **bufptr, size_t *size,
+                int log_offset, void *log_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Unmap or free the buffer bufptr created by av_file_map().
+ *
+ * @param bufptr the buffer previously created with av_file_map()
+ * @param size size in bytes of bufptr, must be the same as returned
+ * by av_file_map()
+ */
+void av_file_unmap(uint8_t *bufptr, size_t size);
+
+#if FF_API_AV_FOPEN_UTF8
+/**
+ * Wrapper to work around the lack of mkstemp() on mingw.
+ * Also, tries to create file in /tmp first, if possible.
+ * *prefix can be a character constant; *filename will be allocated internally.
+ * @return file descriptor of opened file (or negative value corresponding to an
+ * AVERROR code on error)
+ * and opened file name in **filename.
+ * @note On very old libcs it is necessary to set a secure umask before
+ *       calling this, av_tempfile() can't call umask itself as it is used in
+ *       libraries and could interfere with the calling application.
+ * @deprecated as fd numbers cannot be passed saftely between libs on some platforms
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_tempfile(const char *prefix, char **filename, int log_offset, void *log_ctx);
+#endif
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_FILE_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/film_grain_params.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/film_grain_params.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f3bd0a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/film_grain_params.h
@@ -0,0 +1,260 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_FILM_GRAIN_PARAMS_H
+#define AVUTIL_FILM_GRAIN_PARAMS_H
+
+#include "frame.h"
+
+enum AVFilmGrainParamsType {
+    AV_FILM_GRAIN_PARAMS_NONE = 0,
+
+    /**
+     * The union is valid when interpreted as AVFilmGrainAOMParams (codec.aom)
+     */
+    AV_FILM_GRAIN_PARAMS_AV1,
+
+    /**
+     * The union is valid when interpreted as AVFilmGrainH274Params (codec.h274)
+     */
+    AV_FILM_GRAIN_PARAMS_H274,
+};
+
+/**
+ * This structure describes how to handle film grain synthesis for AOM codecs.
+ *
+ * @note The struct must be allocated as part of AVFilmGrainParams using
+ *       av_film_grain_params_alloc(). Its size is not a part of the public ABI.
+ */
+typedef struct AVFilmGrainAOMParams {
+    /**
+     * Number of points, and the scale and value for each point of the
+     * piecewise linear scaling function for the uma plane.
+     */
+    int num_y_points;
+    uint8_t y_points[14][2 /* value, scaling */];
+
+    /**
+     * Signals whether to derive the chroma scaling function from the luma.
+     * Not equivalent to copying the luma values and scales.
+     */
+    int chroma_scaling_from_luma;
+
+    /**
+     * If chroma_scaling_from_luma is set to 0, signals the chroma scaling
+     * function parameters.
+     */
+    int num_uv_points[2 /* cb, cr */];
+    uint8_t uv_points[2 /* cb, cr */][10][2 /* value, scaling */];
+
+    /**
+     * Specifies the shift applied to the chroma components. For AV1, its within
+     * [8; 11] and determines the range and quantization of the film grain.
+     */
+    int scaling_shift;
+
+    /**
+     * Specifies the auto-regression lag.
+     */
+    int ar_coeff_lag;
+
+    /**
+     * Luma auto-regression coefficients. The number of coefficients is given by
+     * 2 * ar_coeff_lag * (ar_coeff_lag + 1).
+     */
+    int8_t ar_coeffs_y[24];
+
+    /**
+     * Chroma auto-regression coefficients. The number of coefficients is given by
+     * 2 * ar_coeff_lag * (ar_coeff_lag + 1) + !!num_y_points.
+     */
+    int8_t ar_coeffs_uv[2 /* cb, cr */][25];
+
+    /**
+     * Specifies the range of the auto-regressive coefficients. Values of 6,
+     * 7, 8 and so on represent a range of [-2, 2), [-1, 1), [-0.5, 0.5) and
+     * so on. For AV1 must be between 6 and 9.
+     */
+    int ar_coeff_shift;
+
+    /**
+     * Signals the down shift applied to the generated gaussian numbers during
+     * synthesis.
+     */
+    int grain_scale_shift;
+
+    /**
+     * Specifies the luma/chroma multipliers for the index to the component
+     * scaling function.
+     */
+    int uv_mult[2 /* cb, cr */];
+    int uv_mult_luma[2 /* cb, cr */];
+
+    /**
+     * Offset used for component scaling function. For AV1 its a 9-bit value
+     * with a range [-256, 255]
+     */
+    int uv_offset[2 /* cb, cr */];
+
+    /**
+     * Signals whether to overlap film grain blocks.
+     */
+    int overlap_flag;
+
+    /**
+     * Signals to clip to limited color levels after film grain application.
+     */
+    int limit_output_range;
+} AVFilmGrainAOMParams;
+
+/**
+ * This structure describes how to handle film grain synthesis for codecs using
+ * the ITU-T H.274 Versatile suplemental enhancement information message.
+ *
+ * @note The struct must be allocated as part of AVFilmGrainParams using
+ *       av_film_grain_params_alloc(). Its size is not a part of the public ABI.
+ */
+typedef struct AVFilmGrainH274Params {
+    /**
+     * Specifies the film grain simulation mode.
+     * 0 = Frequency filtering, 1 = Auto-regression
+     */
+    int model_id;
+
+    /**
+     * Specifies the bit depth used for the luma component.
+     */
+    int bit_depth_luma;
+
+    /**
+     * Specifies the bit depth used for the chroma components.
+     */
+    int bit_depth_chroma;
+
+    enum AVColorRange                  color_range;
+    enum AVColorPrimaries              color_primaries;
+    enum AVColorTransferCharacteristic color_trc;
+    enum AVColorSpace                  color_space;
+
+    /**
+     * Specifies the blending mode used to blend the simulated film grain
+     * with the decoded images.
+     *
+     * 0 = Additive, 1 = Multiplicative
+     */
+    int blending_mode_id;
+
+    /**
+     * Specifies a scale factor used in the film grain characterization equations.
+     */
+    int log2_scale_factor;
+
+    /**
+     * Indicates if the modelling of film grain for a given component is present.
+     */
+    int component_model_present[3 /* y, cb, cr */];
+
+    /**
+     * Specifies the number of intensity intervals for which a specific set of
+     * model values has been estimated, with a range of [1, 256].
+     */
+    uint16_t num_intensity_intervals[3 /* y, cb, cr */];
+
+    /**
+     * Specifies the number of model values present for each intensity interval
+     * in which the film grain has been modelled, with a range of [1, 6].
+     */
+    uint8_t num_model_values[3 /* y, cb, cr */];
+
+    /**
+     * Specifies the lower ounds of each intensity interval for whichthe set of
+     * model values applies for the component.
+     */
+    uint8_t intensity_interval_lower_bound[3 /* y, cb, cr */][256 /* intensity interval */];
+
+    /**
+     * Specifies the upper bound of each intensity interval for which the set of
+     * model values applies for the component.
+     */
+    uint8_t intensity_interval_upper_bound[3 /* y, cb, cr */][256 /* intensity interval */];
+
+    /**
+     * Specifies the model values for the component for each intensity interval.
+     * - When model_id == 0, the following applies:
+     *     For comp_model_value[y], the range of values is [0, 2^bit_depth_luma - 1]
+     *     For comp_model_value[cb..cr], the range of values is [0, 2^bit_depth_chroma - 1]
+     * - Otherwise, the following applies:
+     *     For comp_model_value[y], the range of values is [-2^(bit_depth_luma - 1), 2^(bit_depth_luma - 1) - 1]
+     *     For comp_model_value[cb..cr], the range of values is [-2^(bit_depth_chroma - 1), 2^(bit_depth_chroma - 1) - 1]
+     */
+    int16_t comp_model_value[3 /* y, cb, cr */][256 /* intensity interval */][6 /* model value */];
+} AVFilmGrainH274Params;
+
+/**
+ * This structure describes how to handle film grain synthesis in video
+ * for specific codecs. Must be present on every frame where film grain is
+ * meant to be synthesised for correct presentation.
+ *
+ * @note The struct must be allocated with av_film_grain_params_alloc() and
+ *       its size is not a part of the public ABI.
+ */
+typedef struct AVFilmGrainParams {
+    /**
+     * Specifies the codec for which this structure is valid.
+     */
+    enum AVFilmGrainParamsType type;
+
+    /**
+     * Seed to use for the synthesis process, if the codec allows for it.
+     *
+     * @note For H.264, this refers to `pic_offset` as defined in
+     *       SMPTE RDD 5-2006.
+     */
+    uint64_t seed;
+
+    /**
+     * Additional fields may be added both here and in any structure included.
+     * If a codec's film grain structure differs slightly over another
+     * codec's, fields within may change meaning depending on the type.
+     */
+    union {
+        AVFilmGrainAOMParams aom;
+        AVFilmGrainH274Params h274;
+    } codec;
+} AVFilmGrainParams;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVFilmGrainParams structure and set its fields to
+ * default values. The resulting struct can be freed using av_freep().
+ * If size is not NULL it will be set to the number of bytes allocated.
+ *
+ * @return An AVFilmGrainParams filled with default values or NULL
+ *         on failure.
+ */
+AVFilmGrainParams *av_film_grain_params_alloc(size_t *size);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a complete AVFilmGrainParams and add it to the frame.
+ *
+ * @param frame The frame which side data is added to.
+ *
+ * @return The AVFilmGrainParams structure to be filled by caller.
+ */
+AVFilmGrainParams *av_film_grain_params_create_side_data(AVFrame *frame);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_FILM_GRAIN_PARAMS_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/frame.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/frame.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e60a82f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/frame.h
@@ -0,0 +1,959 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavu_frame
+ * reference-counted frame API
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_FRAME_H
+#define AVUTIL_FRAME_H
+
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+#include "avutil.h"
+#include "buffer.h"
+#include "channel_layout.h"
+#include "dict.h"
+#include "rational.h"
+#include "samplefmt.h"
+#include "pixfmt.h"
+#include "version.h"
+
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_frame AVFrame
+ * @ingroup lavu_data
+ *
+ * @{
+ * AVFrame is an abstraction for reference-counted raw multimedia data.
+ */
+
+enum AVFrameSideDataType {
+    /**
+     * The data is the AVPanScan struct defined in libavcodec.
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_DATA_PANSCAN,
+    /**
+     * ATSC A53 Part 4 Closed Captions.
+     * A53 CC bitstream is stored as uint8_t in AVFrameSideData.data.
+     * The number of bytes of CC data is AVFrameSideData.size.
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_DATA_A53_CC,
+    /**
+     * Stereoscopic 3d metadata.
+     * The data is the AVStereo3D struct defined in libavutil/stereo3d.h.
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_DATA_STEREO3D,
+    /**
+     * The data is the AVMatrixEncoding enum defined in libavutil/channel_layout.h.
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_DATA_MATRIXENCODING,
+    /**
+     * Metadata relevant to a downmix procedure.
+     * The data is the AVDownmixInfo struct defined in libavutil/downmix_info.h.
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_DATA_DOWNMIX_INFO,
+    /**
+     * ReplayGain information in the form of the AVReplayGain struct.
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_DATA_REPLAYGAIN,
+    /**
+     * This side data contains a 3x3 transformation matrix describing an affine
+     * transformation that needs to be applied to the frame for correct
+     * presentation.
+     *
+     * See libavutil/display.h for a detailed description of the data.
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_DATA_DISPLAYMATRIX,
+    /**
+     * Active Format Description data consisting of a single byte as specified
+     * in ETSI TS 101 154 using AVActiveFormatDescription enum.
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_DATA_AFD,
+    /**
+     * Motion vectors exported by some codecs (on demand through the export_mvs
+     * flag set in the libavcodec AVCodecContext flags2 option).
+     * The data is the AVMotionVector struct defined in
+     * libavutil/motion_vector.h.
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_DATA_MOTION_VECTORS,
+    /**
+     * Recommmends skipping the specified number of samples. This is exported
+     * only if the "skip_manual" AVOption is set in libavcodec.
+     * This has the same format as AV_PKT_DATA_SKIP_SAMPLES.
+     * @code
+     * u32le number of samples to skip from start of this packet
+     * u32le number of samples to skip from end of this packet
+     * u8    reason for start skip
+     * u8    reason for end   skip (0=padding silence, 1=convergence)
+     * @endcode
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_DATA_SKIP_SAMPLES,
+    /**
+     * This side data must be associated with an audio frame and corresponds to
+     * enum AVAudioServiceType defined in avcodec.h.
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_DATA_AUDIO_SERVICE_TYPE,
+    /**
+     * Mastering display metadata associated with a video frame. The payload is
+     * an AVMasteringDisplayMetadata type and contains information about the
+     * mastering display color volume.
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_DATA_MASTERING_DISPLAY_METADATA,
+    /**
+     * The GOP timecode in 25 bit timecode format. Data format is 64-bit integer.
+     * This is set on the first frame of a GOP that has a temporal reference of 0.
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_DATA_GOP_TIMECODE,
+
+    /**
+     * The data represents the AVSphericalMapping structure defined in
+     * libavutil/spherical.h.
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_DATA_SPHERICAL,
+
+    /**
+     * Content light level (based on CTA-861.3). This payload contains data in
+     * the form of the AVContentLightMetadata struct.
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_DATA_CONTENT_LIGHT_LEVEL,
+
+    /**
+     * The data contains an ICC profile as an opaque octet buffer following the
+     * format described by ISO 15076-1 with an optional name defined in the
+     * metadata key entry "name".
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_DATA_ICC_PROFILE,
+
+    /**
+     * Timecode which conforms to SMPTE ST 12-1. The data is an array of 4 uint32_t
+     * where the first uint32_t describes how many (1-3) of the other timecodes are used.
+     * The timecode format is described in the documentation of av_timecode_get_smpte_from_framenum()
+     * function in libavutil/timecode.h.
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_DATA_S12M_TIMECODE,
+
+    /**
+     * HDR dynamic metadata associated with a video frame. The payload is
+     * an AVDynamicHDRPlus type and contains information for color
+     * volume transform - application 4 of SMPTE 2094-40:2016 standard.
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_DATA_DYNAMIC_HDR_PLUS,
+
+    /**
+     * Regions Of Interest, the data is an array of AVRegionOfInterest type, the number of
+     * array element is implied by AVFrameSideData.size / AVRegionOfInterest.self_size.
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_DATA_REGIONS_OF_INTEREST,
+
+    /**
+     * Encoding parameters for a video frame, as described by AVVideoEncParams.
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_DATA_VIDEO_ENC_PARAMS,
+
+    /**
+     * User data unregistered metadata associated with a video frame.
+     * This is the H.26[45] UDU SEI message, and shouldn't be used for any other purpose
+     * The data is stored as uint8_t in AVFrameSideData.data which is 16 bytes of
+     * uuid_iso_iec_11578 followed by AVFrameSideData.size - 16 bytes of user_data_payload_byte.
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_DATA_SEI_UNREGISTERED,
+
+    /**
+     * Film grain parameters for a frame, described by AVFilmGrainParams.
+     * Must be present for every frame which should have film grain applied.
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_DATA_FILM_GRAIN_PARAMS,
+
+    /**
+     * Bounding boxes for object detection and classification,
+     * as described by AVDetectionBBoxHeader.
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_DATA_DETECTION_BBOXES,
+
+    /**
+     * Dolby Vision RPU raw data, suitable for passing to x265
+     * or other libraries. Array of uint8_t, with NAL emulation
+     * bytes intact.
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_DATA_DOVI_RPU_BUFFER,
+
+    /**
+     * Parsed Dolby Vision metadata, suitable for passing to a software
+     * implementation. The payload is the AVDOVIMetadata struct defined in
+     * libavutil/dovi_meta.h.
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_DATA_DOVI_METADATA,
+
+    /**
+     * HDR Vivid dynamic metadata associated with a video frame. The payload is
+     * an AVDynamicHDRVivid type and contains information for color
+     * volume transform - CUVA 005.1-2021.
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_DATA_DYNAMIC_HDR_VIVID,
+};
+
+enum AVActiveFormatDescription {
+    AV_AFD_SAME         = 8,
+    AV_AFD_4_3          = 9,
+    AV_AFD_16_9         = 10,
+    AV_AFD_14_9         = 11,
+    AV_AFD_4_3_SP_14_9  = 13,
+    AV_AFD_16_9_SP_14_9 = 14,
+    AV_AFD_SP_4_3       = 15,
+};
+
+
+/**
+ * Structure to hold side data for an AVFrame.
+ *
+ * sizeof(AVFrameSideData) is not a part of the public ABI, so new fields may be added
+ * to the end with a minor bump.
+ */
+typedef struct AVFrameSideData {
+    enum AVFrameSideDataType type;
+    uint8_t *data;
+    size_t   size;
+    AVDictionary *metadata;
+    AVBufferRef *buf;
+} AVFrameSideData;
+
+/**
+ * Structure describing a single Region Of Interest.
+ *
+ * When multiple regions are defined in a single side-data block, they
+ * should be ordered from most to least important - some encoders are only
+ * capable of supporting a limited number of distinct regions, so will have
+ * to truncate the list.
+ *
+ * When overlapping regions are defined, the first region containing a given
+ * area of the frame applies.
+ */
+typedef struct AVRegionOfInterest {
+    /**
+     * Must be set to the size of this data structure (that is,
+     * sizeof(AVRegionOfInterest)).
+     */
+    uint32_t self_size;
+    /**
+     * Distance in pixels from the top edge of the frame to the top and
+     * bottom edges and from the left edge of the frame to the left and
+     * right edges of the rectangle defining this region of interest.
+     *
+     * The constraints on a region are encoder dependent, so the region
+     * actually affected may be slightly larger for alignment or other
+     * reasons.
+     */
+    int top;
+    int bottom;
+    int left;
+    int right;
+    /**
+     * Quantisation offset.
+     *
+     * Must be in the range -1 to +1.  A value of zero indicates no quality
+     * change.  A negative value asks for better quality (less quantisation),
+     * while a positive value asks for worse quality (greater quantisation).
+     *
+     * The range is calibrated so that the extreme values indicate the
+     * largest possible offset - if the rest of the frame is encoded with the
+     * worst possible quality, an offset of -1 indicates that this region
+     * should be encoded with the best possible quality anyway.  Intermediate
+     * values are then interpolated in some codec-dependent way.
+     *
+     * For example, in 10-bit H.264 the quantisation parameter varies between
+     * -12 and 51.  A typical qoffset value of -1/10 therefore indicates that
+     * this region should be encoded with a QP around one-tenth of the full
+     * range better than the rest of the frame.  So, if most of the frame
+     * were to be encoded with a QP of around 30, this region would get a QP
+     * of around 24 (an offset of approximately -1/10 * (51 - -12) = -6.3).
+     * An extreme value of -1 would indicate that this region should be
+     * encoded with the best possible quality regardless of the treatment of
+     * the rest of the frame - that is, should be encoded at a QP of -12.
+     */
+    AVRational qoffset;
+} AVRegionOfInterest;
+
+/**
+ * This structure describes decoded (raw) audio or video data.
+ *
+ * AVFrame must be allocated using av_frame_alloc(). Note that this only
+ * allocates the AVFrame itself, the buffers for the data must be managed
+ * through other means (see below).
+ * AVFrame must be freed with av_frame_free().
+ *
+ * AVFrame is typically allocated once and then reused multiple times to hold
+ * different data (e.g. a single AVFrame to hold frames received from a
+ * decoder). In such a case, av_frame_unref() will free any references held by
+ * the frame and reset it to its original clean state before it
+ * is reused again.
+ *
+ * The data described by an AVFrame is usually reference counted through the
+ * AVBuffer API. The underlying buffer references are stored in AVFrame.buf /
+ * AVFrame.extended_buf. An AVFrame is considered to be reference counted if at
+ * least one reference is set, i.e. if AVFrame.buf[0] != NULL. In such a case,
+ * every single data plane must be contained in one of the buffers in
+ * AVFrame.buf or AVFrame.extended_buf.
+ * There may be a single buffer for all the data, or one separate buffer for
+ * each plane, or anything in between.
+ *
+ * sizeof(AVFrame) is not a part of the public ABI, so new fields may be added
+ * to the end with a minor bump.
+ *
+ * Fields can be accessed through AVOptions, the name string used, matches the
+ * C structure field name for fields accessible through AVOptions. The AVClass
+ * for AVFrame can be obtained from avcodec_get_frame_class()
+ */
+typedef struct AVFrame {
+#define AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS 8
+    /**
+     * pointer to the picture/channel planes.
+     * This might be different from the first allocated byte. For video,
+     * it could even point to the end of the image data.
+     *
+     * All pointers in data and extended_data must point into one of the
+     * AVBufferRef in buf or extended_buf.
+     *
+     * Some decoders access areas outside 0,0 - width,height, please
+     * see avcodec_align_dimensions2(). Some filters and swscale can read
+     * up to 16 bytes beyond the planes, if these filters are to be used,
+     * then 16 extra bytes must be allocated.
+     *
+     * NOTE: Pointers not needed by the format MUST be set to NULL.
+     *
+     * @attention In case of video, the data[] pointers can point to the
+     * end of image data in order to reverse line order, when used in
+     * combination with negative values in the linesize[] array.
+     */
+    uint8_t *data[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS];
+
+    /**
+     * For video, a positive or negative value, which is typically indicating
+     * the size in bytes of each picture line, but it can also be:
+     * - the negative byte size of lines for vertical flipping
+     *   (with data[n] pointing to the end of the data
+     * - a positive or negative multiple of the byte size as for accessing
+     *   even and odd fields of a frame (possibly flipped)
+     *
+     * For audio, only linesize[0] may be set. For planar audio, each channel
+     * plane must be the same size.
+     *
+     * For video the linesizes should be multiples of the CPUs alignment
+     * preference, this is 16 or 32 for modern desktop CPUs.
+     * Some code requires such alignment other code can be slower without
+     * correct alignment, for yet other it makes no difference.
+     *
+     * @note The linesize may be larger than the size of usable data -- there
+     * may be extra padding present for performance reasons.
+     *
+     * @attention In case of video, line size values can be negative to achieve
+     * a vertically inverted iteration over image lines.
+     */
+    int linesize[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS];
+
+    /**
+     * pointers to the data planes/channels.
+     *
+     * For video, this should simply point to data[].
+     *
+     * For planar audio, each channel has a separate data pointer, and
+     * linesize[0] contains the size of each channel buffer.
+     * For packed audio, there is just one data pointer, and linesize[0]
+     * contains the total size of the buffer for all channels.
+     *
+     * Note: Both data and extended_data should always be set in a valid frame,
+     * but for planar audio with more channels that can fit in data,
+     * extended_data must be used in order to access all channels.
+     */
+    uint8_t **extended_data;
+
+    /**
+     * @name Video dimensions
+     * Video frames only. The coded dimensions (in pixels) of the video frame,
+     * i.e. the size of the rectangle that contains some well-defined values.
+     *
+     * @note The part of the frame intended for display/presentation is further
+     * restricted by the @ref cropping "Cropping rectangle".
+     * @{
+     */
+    int width, height;
+    /**
+     * @}
+     */
+
+    /**
+     * number of audio samples (per channel) described by this frame
+     */
+    int nb_samples;
+
+    /**
+     * format of the frame, -1 if unknown or unset
+     * Values correspond to enum AVPixelFormat for video frames,
+     * enum AVSampleFormat for audio)
+     */
+    int format;
+
+    /**
+     * 1 -> keyframe, 0-> not
+     */
+    int key_frame;
+
+    /**
+     * Picture type of the frame.
+     */
+    enum AVPictureType pict_type;
+
+    /**
+     * Sample aspect ratio for the video frame, 0/1 if unknown/unspecified.
+     */
+    AVRational sample_aspect_ratio;
+
+    /**
+     * Presentation timestamp in time_base units (time when frame should be shown to user).
+     */
+    int64_t pts;
+
+    /**
+     * DTS copied from the AVPacket that triggered returning this frame. (if frame threading isn't used)
+     * This is also the Presentation time of this AVFrame calculated from
+     * only AVPacket.dts values without pts values.
+     */
+    int64_t pkt_dts;
+
+    /**
+     * Time base for the timestamps in this frame.
+     * In the future, this field may be set on frames output by decoders or
+     * filters, but its value will be by default ignored on input to encoders
+     * or filters.
+     */
+    AVRational time_base;
+
+    /**
+     * picture number in bitstream order
+     */
+    int coded_picture_number;
+    /**
+     * picture number in display order
+     */
+    int display_picture_number;
+
+    /**
+     * quality (between 1 (good) and FF_LAMBDA_MAX (bad))
+     */
+    int quality;
+
+    /**
+     * for some private data of the user
+     */
+    void *opaque;
+
+    /**
+     * When decoding, this signals how much the picture must be delayed.
+     * extra_delay = repeat_pict / (2*fps)
+     */
+    int repeat_pict;
+
+    /**
+     * The content of the picture is interlaced.
+     */
+    int interlaced_frame;
+
+    /**
+     * If the content is interlaced, is top field displayed first.
+     */
+    int top_field_first;
+
+    /**
+     * Tell user application that palette has changed from previous frame.
+     */
+    int palette_has_changed;
+
+    /**
+     * reordered opaque 64 bits (generally an integer or a double precision float
+     * PTS but can be anything).
+     * The user sets AVCodecContext.reordered_opaque to represent the input at
+     * that time,
+     * the decoder reorders values as needed and sets AVFrame.reordered_opaque
+     * to exactly one of the values provided by the user through AVCodecContext.reordered_opaque
+     */
+    int64_t reordered_opaque;
+
+    /**
+     * Sample rate of the audio data.
+     */
+    int sample_rate;
+
+#if FF_API_OLD_CHANNEL_LAYOUT
+    /**
+     * Channel layout of the audio data.
+     * @deprecated use ch_layout instead
+     */
+    attribute_deprecated
+    uint64_t channel_layout;
+#endif
+
+    /**
+     * AVBuffer references backing the data for this frame. All the pointers in
+     * data and extended_data must point inside one of the buffers in buf or
+     * extended_buf. This array must be filled contiguously -- if buf[i] is
+     * non-NULL then buf[j] must also be non-NULL for all j < i.
+     *
+     * There may be at most one AVBuffer per data plane, so for video this array
+     * always contains all the references. For planar audio with more than
+     * AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS channels, there may be more buffers than can fit in
+     * this array. Then the extra AVBufferRef pointers are stored in the
+     * extended_buf array.
+     */
+    AVBufferRef *buf[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS];
+
+    /**
+     * For planar audio which requires more than AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS
+     * AVBufferRef pointers, this array will hold all the references which
+     * cannot fit into AVFrame.buf.
+     *
+     * Note that this is different from AVFrame.extended_data, which always
+     * contains all the pointers. This array only contains the extra pointers,
+     * which cannot fit into AVFrame.buf.
+     *
+     * This array is always allocated using av_malloc() by whoever constructs
+     * the frame. It is freed in av_frame_unref().
+     */
+    AVBufferRef **extended_buf;
+    /**
+     * Number of elements in extended_buf.
+     */
+    int        nb_extended_buf;
+
+    AVFrameSideData **side_data;
+    int            nb_side_data;
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_frame_flags AV_FRAME_FLAGS
+ * @ingroup lavu_frame
+ * Flags describing additional frame properties.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * The frame data may be corrupted, e.g. due to decoding errors.
+ */
+#define AV_FRAME_FLAG_CORRUPT       (1 << 0)
+/**
+ * A flag to mark the frames which need to be decoded, but shouldn't be output.
+ */
+#define AV_FRAME_FLAG_DISCARD   (1 << 2)
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+    /**
+     * Frame flags, a combination of @ref lavu_frame_flags
+     */
+    int flags;
+
+    /**
+     * MPEG vs JPEG YUV range.
+     * - encoding: Set by user
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+     */
+    enum AVColorRange color_range;
+
+    enum AVColorPrimaries color_primaries;
+
+    enum AVColorTransferCharacteristic color_trc;
+
+    /**
+     * YUV colorspace type.
+     * - encoding: Set by user
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+     */
+    enum AVColorSpace colorspace;
+
+    enum AVChromaLocation chroma_location;
+
+    /**
+     * frame timestamp estimated using various heuristics, in stream time base
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: set by libavcodec, read by user.
+     */
+    int64_t best_effort_timestamp;
+
+    /**
+     * reordered pos from the last AVPacket that has been input into the decoder
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Read by user.
+     */
+    int64_t pkt_pos;
+
+#if FF_API_PKT_DURATION
+    /**
+     * duration of the corresponding packet, expressed in
+     * AVStream->time_base units, 0 if unknown.
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Read by user.
+     *
+     * @deprecated use duration instead
+     */
+    attribute_deprecated
+    int64_t pkt_duration;
+#endif
+
+    /**
+     * metadata.
+     * - encoding: Set by user.
+     * - decoding: Set by libavcodec.
+     */
+    AVDictionary *metadata;
+
+    /**
+     * decode error flags of the frame, set to a combination of
+     * FF_DECODE_ERROR_xxx flags if the decoder produced a frame, but there
+     * were errors during the decoding.
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: set by libavcodec, read by user.
+     */
+    int decode_error_flags;
+#define FF_DECODE_ERROR_INVALID_BITSTREAM   1
+#define FF_DECODE_ERROR_MISSING_REFERENCE   2
+#define FF_DECODE_ERROR_CONCEALMENT_ACTIVE  4
+#define FF_DECODE_ERROR_DECODE_SLICES       8
+
+#if FF_API_OLD_CHANNEL_LAYOUT
+    /**
+     * number of audio channels, only used for audio.
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: Read by user.
+     * @deprecated use ch_layout instead
+     */
+    attribute_deprecated
+    int channels;
+#endif
+
+    /**
+     * size of the corresponding packet containing the compressed
+     * frame.
+     * It is set to a negative value if unknown.
+     * - encoding: unused
+     * - decoding: set by libavcodec, read by user.
+     */
+    int pkt_size;
+
+    /**
+     * For hwaccel-format frames, this should be a reference to the
+     * AVHWFramesContext describing the frame.
+     */
+    AVBufferRef *hw_frames_ctx;
+
+    /**
+     * AVBufferRef for free use by the API user. FFmpeg will never check the
+     * contents of the buffer ref. FFmpeg calls av_buffer_unref() on it when
+     * the frame is unreferenced. av_frame_copy_props() calls create a new
+     * reference with av_buffer_ref() for the target frame's opaque_ref field.
+     *
+     * This is unrelated to the opaque field, although it serves a similar
+     * purpose.
+     */
+    AVBufferRef *opaque_ref;
+
+    /**
+     * @anchor cropping
+     * @name Cropping
+     * Video frames only. The number of pixels to discard from the the
+     * top/bottom/left/right border of the frame to obtain the sub-rectangle of
+     * the frame intended for presentation.
+     * @{
+     */
+    size_t crop_top;
+    size_t crop_bottom;
+    size_t crop_left;
+    size_t crop_right;
+    /**
+     * @}
+     */
+
+    /**
+     * AVBufferRef for internal use by a single libav* library.
+     * Must not be used to transfer data between libraries.
+     * Has to be NULL when ownership of the frame leaves the respective library.
+     *
+     * Code outside the FFmpeg libs should never check or change the contents of the buffer ref.
+     *
+     * FFmpeg calls av_buffer_unref() on it when the frame is unreferenced.
+     * av_frame_copy_props() calls create a new reference with av_buffer_ref()
+     * for the target frame's private_ref field.
+     */
+    AVBufferRef *private_ref;
+
+    /**
+     * Channel layout of the audio data.
+     */
+    AVChannelLayout ch_layout;
+
+    /**
+     * Duration of the frame, in the same units as pts. 0 if unknown.
+     */
+    int64_t duration;
+} AVFrame;
+
+
+#if FF_API_COLORSPACE_NAME
+/**
+ * Get the name of a colorspace.
+ * @return a static string identifying the colorspace; can be NULL.
+ * @deprecated use av_color_space_name()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+const char *av_get_colorspace_name(enum AVColorSpace val);
+#endif
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVFrame and set its fields to default values.  The resulting
+ * struct must be freed using av_frame_free().
+ *
+ * @return An AVFrame filled with default values or NULL on failure.
+ *
+ * @note this only allocates the AVFrame itself, not the data buffers. Those
+ * must be allocated through other means, e.g. with av_frame_get_buffer() or
+ * manually.
+ */
+AVFrame *av_frame_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Free the frame and any dynamically allocated objects in it,
+ * e.g. extended_data. If the frame is reference counted, it will be
+ * unreferenced first.
+ *
+ * @param frame frame to be freed. The pointer will be set to NULL.
+ */
+void av_frame_free(AVFrame **frame);
+
+/**
+ * Set up a new reference to the data described by the source frame.
+ *
+ * Copy frame properties from src to dst and create a new reference for each
+ * AVBufferRef from src.
+ *
+ * If src is not reference counted, new buffers are allocated and the data is
+ * copied.
+ *
+ * @warning: dst MUST have been either unreferenced with av_frame_unref(dst),
+ *           or newly allocated with av_frame_alloc() before calling this
+ *           function, or undefined behavior will occur.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on error
+ */
+int av_frame_ref(AVFrame *dst, const AVFrame *src);
+
+/**
+ * Create a new frame that references the same data as src.
+ *
+ * This is a shortcut for av_frame_alloc()+av_frame_ref().
+ *
+ * @return newly created AVFrame on success, NULL on error.
+ */
+AVFrame *av_frame_clone(const AVFrame *src);
+
+/**
+ * Unreference all the buffers referenced by frame and reset the frame fields.
+ */
+void av_frame_unref(AVFrame *frame);
+
+/**
+ * Move everything contained in src to dst and reset src.
+ *
+ * @warning: dst is not unreferenced, but directly overwritten without reading
+ *           or deallocating its contents. Call av_frame_unref(dst) manually
+ *           before calling this function to ensure that no memory is leaked.
+ */
+void av_frame_move_ref(AVFrame *dst, AVFrame *src);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate new buffer(s) for audio or video data.
+ *
+ * The following fields must be set on frame before calling this function:
+ * - format (pixel format for video, sample format for audio)
+ * - width and height for video
+ * - nb_samples and ch_layout for audio
+ *
+ * This function will fill AVFrame.data and AVFrame.buf arrays and, if
+ * necessary, allocate and fill AVFrame.extended_data and AVFrame.extended_buf.
+ * For planar formats, one buffer will be allocated for each plane.
+ *
+ * @warning: if frame already has been allocated, calling this function will
+ *           leak memory. In addition, undefined behavior can occur in certain
+ *           cases.
+ *
+ * @param frame frame in which to store the new buffers.
+ * @param align Required buffer size alignment. If equal to 0, alignment will be
+ *              chosen automatically for the current CPU. It is highly
+ *              recommended to pass 0 here unless you know what you are doing.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on error.
+ */
+int av_frame_get_buffer(AVFrame *frame, int align);
+
+/**
+ * Check if the frame data is writable.
+ *
+ * @return A positive value if the frame data is writable (which is true if and
+ * only if each of the underlying buffers has only one reference, namely the one
+ * stored in this frame). Return 0 otherwise.
+ *
+ * If 1 is returned the answer is valid until av_buffer_ref() is called on any
+ * of the underlying AVBufferRefs (e.g. through av_frame_ref() or directly).
+ *
+ * @see av_frame_make_writable(), av_buffer_is_writable()
+ */
+int av_frame_is_writable(AVFrame *frame);
+
+/**
+ * Ensure that the frame data is writable, avoiding data copy if possible.
+ *
+ * Do nothing if the frame is writable, allocate new buffers and copy the data
+ * if it is not. Non-refcounted frames behave as non-writable, i.e. a copy
+ * is always made.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on error.
+ *
+ * @see av_frame_is_writable(), av_buffer_is_writable(),
+ * av_buffer_make_writable()
+ */
+int av_frame_make_writable(AVFrame *frame);
+
+/**
+ * Copy the frame data from src to dst.
+ *
+ * This function does not allocate anything, dst must be already initialized and
+ * allocated with the same parameters as src.
+ *
+ * This function only copies the frame data (i.e. the contents of the data /
+ * extended data arrays), not any other properties.
+ *
+ * @return >= 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on error.
+ */
+int av_frame_copy(AVFrame *dst, const AVFrame *src);
+
+/**
+ * Copy only "metadata" fields from src to dst.
+ *
+ * Metadata for the purpose of this function are those fields that do not affect
+ * the data layout in the buffers.  E.g. pts, sample rate (for audio) or sample
+ * aspect ratio (for video), but not width/height or channel layout.
+ * Side data is also copied.
+ */
+int av_frame_copy_props(AVFrame *dst, const AVFrame *src);
+
+/**
+ * Get the buffer reference a given data plane is stored in.
+ *
+ * @param frame the frame to get the plane's buffer from
+ * @param plane index of the data plane of interest in frame->extended_data.
+ *
+ * @return the buffer reference that contains the plane or NULL if the input
+ * frame is not valid.
+ */
+AVBufferRef *av_frame_get_plane_buffer(AVFrame *frame, int plane);
+
+/**
+ * Add a new side data to a frame.
+ *
+ * @param frame a frame to which the side data should be added
+ * @param type type of the added side data
+ * @param size size of the side data
+ *
+ * @return newly added side data on success, NULL on error
+ */
+AVFrameSideData *av_frame_new_side_data(AVFrame *frame,
+                                        enum AVFrameSideDataType type,
+                                        size_t size);
+
+/**
+ * Add a new side data to a frame from an existing AVBufferRef
+ *
+ * @param frame a frame to which the side data should be added
+ * @param type  the type of the added side data
+ * @param buf   an AVBufferRef to add as side data. The ownership of
+ *              the reference is transferred to the frame.
+ *
+ * @return newly added side data on success, NULL on error. On failure
+ *         the frame is unchanged and the AVBufferRef remains owned by
+ *         the caller.
+ */
+AVFrameSideData *av_frame_new_side_data_from_buf(AVFrame *frame,
+                                                 enum AVFrameSideDataType type,
+                                                 AVBufferRef *buf);
+
+/**
+ * @return a pointer to the side data of a given type on success, NULL if there
+ * is no side data with such type in this frame.
+ */
+AVFrameSideData *av_frame_get_side_data(const AVFrame *frame,
+                                        enum AVFrameSideDataType type);
+
+/**
+ * Remove and free all side data instances of the given type.
+ */
+void av_frame_remove_side_data(AVFrame *frame, enum AVFrameSideDataType type);
+
+
+/**
+ * Flags for frame cropping.
+ */
+enum {
+    /**
+     * Apply the maximum possible cropping, even if it requires setting the
+     * AVFrame.data[] entries to unaligned pointers. Passing unaligned data
+     * to FFmpeg API is generally not allowed, and causes undefined behavior
+     * (such as crashes). You can pass unaligned data only to FFmpeg APIs that
+     * are explicitly documented to accept it. Use this flag only if you
+     * absolutely know what you are doing.
+     */
+    AV_FRAME_CROP_UNALIGNED     = 1 << 0,
+};
+
+/**
+ * Crop the given video AVFrame according to its crop_left/crop_top/crop_right/
+ * crop_bottom fields. If cropping is successful, the function will adjust the
+ * data pointers and the width/height fields, and set the crop fields to 0.
+ *
+ * In all cases, the cropping boundaries will be rounded to the inherent
+ * alignment of the pixel format. In some cases, such as for opaque hwaccel
+ * formats, the left/top cropping is ignored. The crop fields are set to 0 even
+ * if the cropping was rounded or ignored.
+ *
+ * @param frame the frame which should be cropped
+ * @param flags Some combination of AV_FRAME_CROP_* flags, or 0.
+ *
+ * @return >= 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on error. If the cropping fields
+ * were invalid, AVERROR(ERANGE) is returned, and nothing is changed.
+ */
+int av_frame_apply_cropping(AVFrame *frame, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * @return a string identifying the side data type
+ */
+const char *av_frame_side_data_name(enum AVFrameSideDataType type);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_FRAME_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/hash.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hash.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..94151de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hash.h
@@ -0,0 +1,264 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (C) 2013 Reimar Döffinger <Reimar.Doeffinger@gmx.de>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavu_hash_generic
+ * Generic hashing API
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_HASH_H
+#define AVUTIL_HASH_H
+
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_hash Hash Functions
+ * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+ * Hash functions useful in multimedia.
+ *
+ * Hash functions are widely used in multimedia, from error checking and
+ * concealment to internal regression testing. libavutil has efficient
+ * implementations of a variety of hash functions that may be useful for
+ * FFmpeg and other multimedia applications.
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_hash_generic Generic Hashing API
+ * An abstraction layer for all hash functions supported by libavutil.
+ *
+ * If your application needs to support a wide range of different hash
+ * functions, then the Generic Hashing API is for you. It provides a generic,
+ * reusable API for @ref lavu_hash "all hash functions" implemented in libavutil.
+ * If you just need to use one particular hash function, use the @ref lavu_hash
+ * "individual hash" directly.
+ *
+ * @section Sample Code
+ *
+ * A basic template for using the Generic Hashing API follows:
+ *
+ * @code
+ * struct AVHashContext *ctx = NULL;
+ * const char *hash_name = NULL;
+ * uint8_t *output_buf = NULL;
+ *
+ * // Select from a string returned by av_hash_names()
+ * hash_name = ...;
+ *
+ * // Allocate a hash context
+ * ret = av_hash_alloc(&ctx, hash_name);
+ * if (ret < 0)
+ *     return ret;
+ *
+ * // Initialize the hash context
+ * av_hash_init(ctx);
+ *
+ * // Update the hash context with data
+ * while (data_left) {
+ *     av_hash_update(ctx, data, size);
+ * }
+ *
+ * // Now we have no more data, so it is time to finalize the hash and get the
+ * // output. But we need to first allocate an output buffer. Note that you can
+ * // use any memory allocation function, including malloc(), not just
+ * // av_malloc().
+ * output_buf = av_malloc(av_hash_get_size(ctx));
+ * if (!output_buf)
+ *     return AVERROR(ENOMEM);
+ *
+ * // Finalize the hash context.
+ * // You can use any of the av_hash_final*() functions provided, for other
+ * // output formats. If you do so, be sure to adjust the memory allocation
+ * // above. See the function documentation below for the exact amount of extra
+ * // memory needed.
+ * av_hash_final(ctx, output_buffer);
+ *
+ * // Free the context
+ * av_hash_freep(&ctx);
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * @section Hash Function-Specific Information
+ * If the CRC32 hash is selected, the #AV_CRC_32_IEEE polynomial will be
+ * used.
+ *
+ * If the Murmur3 hash is selected, the default seed will be used. See @ref
+ * lavu_murmur3_seedinfo "Murmur3" for more information.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @example ffhash.c
+ * This example is a simple command line application that takes one or more
+ * arguments. It demonstrates a typical use of the hashing API with allocation,
+ * initialization, updating, and finalizing.
+ */
+
+struct AVHashContext;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a hash context for the algorithm specified by name.
+ *
+ * @return  >= 0 for success, a negative error code for failure
+ *
+ * @note The context is not initialized after a call to this function; you must
+ * call av_hash_init() to do so.
+ */
+int av_hash_alloc(struct AVHashContext **ctx, const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * Get the names of available hash algorithms.
+ *
+ * This function can be used to enumerate the algorithms.
+ *
+ * @param[in] i  Index of the hash algorithm, starting from 0
+ * @return       Pointer to a static string or `NULL` if `i` is out of range
+ */
+const char *av_hash_names(int i);
+
+/**
+ * Get the name of the algorithm corresponding to the given hash context.
+ */
+const char *av_hash_get_name(const struct AVHashContext *ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Maximum value that av_hash_get_size() will currently return.
+ *
+ * You can use this if you absolutely want or need to use static allocation for
+ * the output buffer and are fine with not supporting hashes newly added to
+ * libavutil without recompilation.
+ *
+ * @warning
+ * Adding new hashes with larger sizes, and increasing the macro while doing
+ * so, will not be considered an ABI change. To prevent your code from
+ * overflowing a buffer, either dynamically allocate the output buffer with
+ * av_hash_get_size(), or limit your use of the Hashing API to hashes that are
+ * already in FFmpeg during the time of compilation.
+ */
+#define AV_HASH_MAX_SIZE 64
+
+/**
+ * Get the size of the resulting hash value in bytes.
+ *
+ * The maximum value this function will currently return is available as macro
+ * #AV_HASH_MAX_SIZE.
+ *
+ * @param[in]     ctx Hash context
+ * @return            Size of the hash value in bytes
+ */
+int av_hash_get_size(const struct AVHashContext *ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize or reset a hash context.
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] ctx Hash context
+ */
+void av_hash_init(struct AVHashContext *ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Update a hash context with additional data.
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] ctx Hash context
+ * @param[in]     src Data to be added to the hash context
+ * @param[in]     len Size of the additional data
+ */
+void av_hash_update(struct AVHashContext *ctx, const uint8_t *src, size_t len);
+
+/**
+ * Finalize a hash context and compute the actual hash value.
+ *
+ * The minimum size of `dst` buffer is given by av_hash_get_size() or
+ * #AV_HASH_MAX_SIZE. The use of the latter macro is discouraged.
+ *
+ * It is not safe to update or finalize a hash context again, if it has already
+ * been finalized.
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] ctx Hash context
+ * @param[out]    dst Where the final hash value will be stored
+ *
+ * @see av_hash_final_bin() provides an alternative API
+ */
+void av_hash_final(struct AVHashContext *ctx, uint8_t *dst);
+
+/**
+ * Finalize a hash context and store the actual hash value in a buffer.
+ *
+ * It is not safe to update or finalize a hash context again, if it has already
+ * been finalized.
+ *
+ * If `size` is smaller than the hash size (given by av_hash_get_size()), the
+ * hash is truncated; if size is larger, the buffer is padded with 0.
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] ctx  Hash context
+ * @param[out]    dst  Where the final hash value will be stored
+ * @param[in]     size Number of bytes to write to `dst`
+ */
+void av_hash_final_bin(struct AVHashContext *ctx, uint8_t *dst, int size);
+
+/**
+ * Finalize a hash context and store the hexadecimal representation of the
+ * actual hash value as a string.
+ *
+ * It is not safe to update or finalize a hash context again, if it has already
+ * been finalized.
+ *
+ * The string is always 0-terminated.
+ *
+ * If `size` is smaller than `2 * hash_size + 1`, where `hash_size` is the
+ * value returned by av_hash_get_size(), the string will be truncated.
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] ctx  Hash context
+ * @param[out]    dst  Where the string will be stored
+ * @param[in]     size Maximum number of bytes to write to `dst`
+ */
+void av_hash_final_hex(struct AVHashContext *ctx, uint8_t *dst, int size);
+
+/**
+ * Finalize a hash context and store the Base64 representation of the
+ * actual hash value as a string.
+ *
+ * It is not safe to update or finalize a hash context again, if it has already
+ * been finalized.
+ *
+ * The string is always 0-terminated.
+ *
+ * If `size` is smaller than AV_BASE64_SIZE(hash_size), where `hash_size` is
+ * the value returned by av_hash_get_size(), the string will be truncated.
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] ctx  Hash context
+ * @param[out]    dst  Where the final hash value will be stored
+ * @param[in]     size Maximum number of bytes to write to `dst`
+ */
+void av_hash_final_b64(struct AVHashContext *ctx, uint8_t *dst, int size);
+
+/**
+ * Free hash context and set hash context pointer to `NULL`.
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] ctx  Pointer to hash context
+ */
+void av_hash_freep(struct AVHashContext **ctx);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_HASH_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/hdr_dynamic_metadata.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hdr_dynamic_metadata.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2d72de5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hdr_dynamic_metadata.h
@@ -0,0 +1,343 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2018 Mohammad Izadi <moh.izadi at gmail.com>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_HDR_DYNAMIC_METADATA_H
+#define AVUTIL_HDR_DYNAMIC_METADATA_H
+
+#include "frame.h"
+#include "rational.h"
+
+/**
+ * Option for overlapping elliptical pixel selectors in an image.
+ */
+enum AVHDRPlusOverlapProcessOption {
+    AV_HDR_PLUS_OVERLAP_PROCESS_WEIGHTED_AVERAGING = 0,
+    AV_HDR_PLUS_OVERLAP_PROCESS_LAYERING = 1,
+};
+
+/**
+ * Represents the percentile at a specific percentage in
+ * a distribution.
+ */
+typedef struct AVHDRPlusPercentile {
+    /**
+     * The percentage value corresponding to a specific percentile linearized
+     * RGB value in the processing window in the scene. The value shall be in
+     * the range of 0 to100, inclusive.
+     */
+    uint8_t percentage;
+
+    /**
+     * The linearized maxRGB value at a specific percentile in the processing
+     * window in the scene. The value shall be in the range of 0 to 1, inclusive
+     * and in multiples of 0.00001.
+     */
+    AVRational percentile;
+} AVHDRPlusPercentile;
+
+/**
+ * Color transform parameters at a processing window in a dynamic metadata for
+ * SMPTE 2094-40.
+ */
+typedef struct AVHDRPlusColorTransformParams {
+    /**
+     * The relative x coordinate of the top left pixel of the processing
+     * window. The value shall be in the range of 0 and 1, inclusive and
+     * in multiples of 1/(width of Picture - 1). The value 1 corresponds
+     * to the absolute coordinate of width of Picture - 1. The value for
+     * first processing window shall be 0.
+     */
+    AVRational window_upper_left_corner_x;
+
+    /**
+     * The relative y coordinate of the top left pixel of the processing
+     * window. The value shall be in the range of 0 and 1, inclusive and
+     * in multiples of 1/(height of Picture - 1). The value 1 corresponds
+     * to the absolute coordinate of height of Picture - 1. The value for
+     * first processing window shall be 0.
+     */
+    AVRational window_upper_left_corner_y;
+
+    /**
+     * The relative x coordinate of the bottom right pixel of the processing
+     * window. The value shall be in the range of 0 and 1, inclusive and
+     * in multiples of 1/(width of Picture - 1). The value 1 corresponds
+     * to the absolute coordinate of width of Picture - 1. The value for
+     * first processing window shall be 1.
+     */
+    AVRational window_lower_right_corner_x;
+
+    /**
+     * The relative y coordinate of the bottom right pixel of the processing
+     * window. The value shall be in the range of 0 and 1, inclusive and
+     * in multiples of 1/(height of Picture - 1). The value 1 corresponds
+     * to the absolute coordinate of height of Picture - 1. The value for
+     * first processing window shall be 1.
+     */
+    AVRational window_lower_right_corner_y;
+
+    /**
+     * The x coordinate of the center position of the concentric internal and
+     * external ellipses of the elliptical pixel selector in the processing
+     * window. The value shall be in the range of 0 to (width of Picture - 1),
+     * inclusive and in multiples of 1 pixel.
+     */
+    uint16_t center_of_ellipse_x;
+
+    /**
+     * The y coordinate of the center position of the concentric internal and
+     * external ellipses of the elliptical pixel selector in the processing
+     * window. The value shall be in the range of 0 to (height of Picture - 1),
+     * inclusive and in multiples of 1 pixel.
+     */
+    uint16_t center_of_ellipse_y;
+
+    /**
+     * The clockwise rotation angle in degree of arc with respect to the
+     * positive direction of the x-axis of the concentric internal and external
+     * ellipses of the elliptical pixel selector in the processing window. The
+     * value shall be in the range of 0 to 180, inclusive and in multiples of 1.
+     */
+    uint8_t rotation_angle;
+
+    /**
+     * The semi-major axis value of the internal ellipse of the elliptical pixel
+     * selector in amount of pixels in the processing window. The value shall be
+     * in the range of 1 to 65535, inclusive and in multiples of 1 pixel.
+     */
+    uint16_t semimajor_axis_internal_ellipse;
+
+    /**
+     * The semi-major axis value of the external ellipse of the elliptical pixel
+     * selector in amount of pixels in the processing window. The value
+     * shall not be less than semimajor_axis_internal_ellipse of the current
+     * processing window. The value shall be in the range of 1 to 65535,
+     * inclusive and in multiples of 1 pixel.
+     */
+    uint16_t semimajor_axis_external_ellipse;
+
+    /**
+     * The semi-minor axis value of the external ellipse of the elliptical pixel
+     * selector in amount of pixels in the processing window. The value shall be
+     * in the range of 1 to 65535, inclusive and in multiples of 1 pixel.
+     */
+    uint16_t semiminor_axis_external_ellipse;
+
+    /**
+     * Overlap process option indicates one of the two methods of combining
+     * rendered pixels in the processing window in an image with at least one
+     * elliptical pixel selector. For overlapping elliptical pixel selectors
+     * in an image, overlap_process_option shall have the same value.
+     */
+    enum AVHDRPlusOverlapProcessOption overlap_process_option;
+
+    /**
+     * The maximum of the color components of linearized RGB values in the
+     * processing window in the scene. The values should be in the range of 0 to
+     * 1, inclusive and in multiples of 0.00001. maxscl[ 0 ], maxscl[ 1 ], and
+     * maxscl[ 2 ] are corresponding to R, G, B color components respectively.
+     */
+    AVRational maxscl[3];
+
+    /**
+     * The average of linearized maxRGB values in the processing window in the
+     * scene. The value should be in the range of 0 to 1, inclusive and in
+     * multiples of 0.00001.
+     */
+    AVRational average_maxrgb;
+
+    /**
+     * The number of linearized maxRGB values at given percentiles in the
+     * processing window in the scene. The maximum value shall be 15.
+     */
+    uint8_t num_distribution_maxrgb_percentiles;
+
+    /**
+     * The linearized maxRGB values at given percentiles in the
+     * processing window in the scene.
+     */
+    AVHDRPlusPercentile distribution_maxrgb[15];
+
+    /**
+     * The fraction of selected pixels in the image that contains the brightest
+     * pixel in the scene. The value shall be in the range of 0 to 1, inclusive
+     * and in multiples of 0.001.
+     */
+    AVRational fraction_bright_pixels;
+
+    /**
+     * This flag indicates that the metadata for the tone mapping function in
+     * the processing window is present (for value of 1).
+     */
+    uint8_t tone_mapping_flag;
+
+    /**
+     * The x coordinate of the separation point between the linear part and the
+     * curved part of the tone mapping function. The value shall be in the range
+     * of 0 to 1, excluding 0 and in multiples of 1/4095.
+     */
+    AVRational knee_point_x;
+
+    /**
+     * The y coordinate of the separation point between the linear part and the
+     * curved part of the tone mapping function. The value shall be in the range
+     * of 0 to 1, excluding 0 and in multiples of 1/4095.
+     */
+    AVRational knee_point_y;
+
+    /**
+     * The number of the intermediate anchor parameters of the tone mapping
+     * function in the processing window. The maximum value shall be 15.
+     */
+    uint8_t num_bezier_curve_anchors;
+
+    /**
+     * The intermediate anchor parameters of the tone mapping function in the
+     * processing window in the scene. The values should be in the range of 0
+     * to 1, inclusive and in multiples of 1/1023.
+     */
+    AVRational bezier_curve_anchors[15];
+
+    /**
+     * This flag shall be equal to 0 in bitstreams conforming to this version of
+     * this Specification. Other values are reserved for future use.
+     */
+    uint8_t color_saturation_mapping_flag;
+
+    /**
+     * The color saturation gain in the processing window in the scene. The
+     * value shall be in the range of 0 to 63/8, inclusive and in multiples of
+     * 1/8. The default value shall be 1.
+     */
+    AVRational color_saturation_weight;
+} AVHDRPlusColorTransformParams;
+
+/**
+ * This struct represents dynamic metadata for color volume transform -
+ * application 4 of SMPTE 2094-40:2016 standard.
+ *
+ * To be used as payload of a AVFrameSideData or AVPacketSideData with the
+ * appropriate type.
+ *
+ * @note The struct should be allocated with
+ * av_dynamic_hdr_plus_alloc() and its size is not a part of
+ * the public ABI.
+ */
+typedef struct AVDynamicHDRPlus {
+    /**
+     * Country code by Rec. ITU-T T.35 Annex A. The value shall be 0xB5.
+     */
+    uint8_t itu_t_t35_country_code;
+
+    /**
+     * Application version in the application defining document in ST-2094
+     * suite. The value shall be set to 0.
+     */
+    uint8_t application_version;
+
+    /**
+     * The number of processing windows. The value shall be in the range
+     * of 1 to 3, inclusive.
+     */
+    uint8_t num_windows;
+
+    /**
+     * The color transform parameters for every processing window.
+     */
+    AVHDRPlusColorTransformParams params[3];
+
+    /**
+     * The nominal maximum display luminance of the targeted system display,
+     * in units of 0.0001 candelas per square metre. The value shall be in
+     * the range of 0 to 10000, inclusive.
+     */
+    AVRational targeted_system_display_maximum_luminance;
+
+    /**
+     * This flag shall be equal to 0 in bit streams conforming to this version
+     * of this Specification. The value 1 is reserved for future use.
+     */
+    uint8_t targeted_system_display_actual_peak_luminance_flag;
+
+    /**
+     * The number of rows in the targeted system_display_actual_peak_luminance
+     * array. The value shall be in the range of 2 to 25, inclusive.
+     */
+    uint8_t num_rows_targeted_system_display_actual_peak_luminance;
+
+    /**
+     * The number of columns in the
+     * targeted_system_display_actual_peak_luminance array. The value shall be
+     * in the range of 2 to 25, inclusive.
+     */
+    uint8_t num_cols_targeted_system_display_actual_peak_luminance;
+
+    /**
+     * The normalized actual peak luminance of the targeted system display. The
+     * values should be in the range of 0 to 1, inclusive and in multiples of
+     * 1/15.
+     */
+    AVRational targeted_system_display_actual_peak_luminance[25][25];
+
+    /**
+     * This flag shall be equal to 0 in bitstreams conforming to this version of
+     * this Specification. The value 1 is reserved for future use.
+     */
+    uint8_t mastering_display_actual_peak_luminance_flag;
+
+    /**
+     * The number of rows in the mastering_display_actual_peak_luminance array.
+     * The value shall be in the range of 2 to 25, inclusive.
+     */
+    uint8_t num_rows_mastering_display_actual_peak_luminance;
+
+    /**
+     * The number of columns in the mastering_display_actual_peak_luminance
+     * array. The value shall be in the range of 2 to 25, inclusive.
+     */
+    uint8_t num_cols_mastering_display_actual_peak_luminance;
+
+    /**
+     * The normalized actual peak luminance of the mastering display used for
+     * mastering the image essence. The values should be in the range of 0 to 1,
+     * inclusive and in multiples of 1/15.
+     */
+    AVRational mastering_display_actual_peak_luminance[25][25];
+} AVDynamicHDRPlus;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVDynamicHDRPlus structure and set its fields to
+ * default values. The resulting struct can be freed using av_freep().
+ *
+ * @return An AVDynamicHDRPlus filled with default values or NULL
+ *         on failure.
+ */
+AVDynamicHDRPlus *av_dynamic_hdr_plus_alloc(size_t *size);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a complete AVDynamicHDRPlus and add it to the frame.
+ * @param frame The frame which side data is added to.
+ *
+ * @return The AVDynamicHDRPlus structure to be filled by caller or NULL
+ *         on failure.
+ */
+AVDynamicHDRPlus *av_dynamic_hdr_plus_create_side_data(AVFrame *frame);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_HDR_DYNAMIC_METADATA_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/hdr_dynamic_vivid_metadata.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hdr_dynamic_vivid_metadata.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a34f830
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hdr_dynamic_vivid_metadata.h
@@ -0,0 +1,285 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2021 Limin Wang <lance.lmwang at gmail.com>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_HDR_DYNAMIC_VIVID_METADATA_H
+#define AVUTIL_HDR_DYNAMIC_VIVID_METADATA_H
+
+#include "frame.h"
+#include "rational.h"
+
+/**
+ * Color tone mapping parameters at a processing window in a dynamic metadata for
+ * CUVA 005.1:2021.
+ */
+typedef struct AVHDRVividColorToneMappingParams {
+    /**
+     * The nominal maximum display luminance of the targeted system display,
+     * in multiples of 1.0/4095 candelas per square metre. The value shall be in
+     * the range of 0.0 to 1.0, inclusive.
+     */
+    AVRational targeted_system_display_maximum_luminance;
+
+    /**
+     * This flag indicates that transfer the base paramter(for value of 1)
+     */
+    int base_enable_flag;
+
+    /**
+     * base_param_m_p in the base parameter,
+     * in multiples of 1.0/16383. The value shall be in
+     * the range of 0.0 to 1.0, inclusive.
+     */
+    AVRational base_param_m_p;
+
+    /**
+     * base_param_m_m in the base parameter,
+     * in multiples of 1.0/10. The value shall be in
+     * the range of 0.0 to 6.3, inclusive.
+     */
+    AVRational base_param_m_m;
+
+    /**
+     * base_param_m_a in the base parameter,
+     * in multiples of 1.0/1023. The value shall be in
+     * the range of 0.0 to 1.0 inclusive.
+     */
+    AVRational base_param_m_a;
+
+    /**
+     * base_param_m_b in the base parameter,
+     * in multiples of 1/1023. The value shall be in
+     * the range of 0.0 to 1.0, inclusive.
+     */
+    AVRational base_param_m_b;
+
+    /**
+     * base_param_m_n in the base parameter,
+     * in multiples of 1.0/10. The value shall be in
+     * the range of 0.0 to 6.3, inclusive.
+     */
+    AVRational base_param_m_n;
+
+    /**
+     * indicates k1_0 in the base parameter,
+     * base_param_k1 <= 1: k1_0 = base_param_k1
+     * base_param_k1 > 1: reserved
+     */
+    int base_param_k1;
+
+    /**
+     * indicates k2_0 in the base parameter,
+     * base_param_k2 <= 1: k2_0 = base_param_k2
+     * base_param_k2 > 1: reserved
+     */
+    int base_param_k2;
+
+    /**
+     * indicates k3_0 in the base parameter,
+     * base_param_k3 == 1: k3_0 = base_param_k3
+     * base_param_k3 == 2: k3_0 = maximum_maxrgb
+     * base_param_k3 > 2: reserved
+     */
+    int base_param_k3;
+
+    /**
+     * This flag indicates that delta mode of base paramter(for value of 1)
+     */
+    int base_param_Delta_enable_mode;
+
+    /**
+     * base_param_Delta in the base parameter,
+     * in multiples of 1.0/127. The value shall be in
+     * the range of 0.0 to 1.0, inclusive.
+     */
+    AVRational base_param_Delta;
+
+    /**
+     * indicates 3Spline_enable_flag in the base parameter,
+     * This flag indicates that transfer three Spline of base paramter(for value of 1)
+     */
+    int three_Spline_enable_flag;
+
+    /**
+     * The number of three Spline. The value shall be in the range
+     * of 1 to 2, inclusive.
+     */
+    int three_Spline_num;
+
+    /**
+     * The mode of three Spline. the value shall be in the range
+     * of 0 to 3, inclusive.
+     */
+    int three_Spline_TH_mode;
+
+    /**
+     * three_Spline_TH_enable_MB is in the range of 0.0 to 1.0, inclusive
+     * and in multiples of 1.0/255.
+     *
+     */
+    AVRational three_Spline_TH_enable_MB;
+
+    /**
+     * 3Spline_TH_enable of three Spline.
+     * The value shall be in the range of 0.0 to 1.0, inclusive.
+     * and in multiples of 1.0/4095.
+     */
+    AVRational three_Spline_TH_enable;
+
+    /**
+     * 3Spline_TH_Delta1 of three Spline.
+     * The value shall be in the range of 0.0 to 0.25, inclusive,
+     * and in multiples of 0.25/1023.
+     */
+    AVRational three_Spline_TH_Delta1;
+
+    /**
+     * 3Spline_TH_Delta2 of three Spline.
+     * The value shall be in the range of 0.0 to 0.25, inclusive,
+     * and in multiples of 0.25/1023.
+     */
+    AVRational three_Spline_TH_Delta2;
+
+    /**
+     * 3Spline_enable_Strength of three Spline.
+     * The value shall be in the range of 0.0 to 1.0, inclusive,
+     * and in multiples of 1.0/255.
+     */
+    AVRational three_Spline_enable_Strength;
+} AVHDRVividColorToneMappingParams;
+
+
+/**
+ * Color transform parameters at a processing window in a dynamic metadata for
+ * CUVA 005.1:2021.
+ */
+typedef struct AVHDRVividColorTransformParams {
+    /**
+     * Indicates the minimum brightness of the displayed content.
+     * The values should be in the range of 0.0 to 1.0,
+     * inclusive and in multiples of 1/4095.
+     */
+    AVRational minimum_maxrgb;
+
+    /**
+     * Indicates the average brightness of the displayed content.
+     * The values should be in the range of 0.0 to 1.0,
+     * inclusive and in multiples of 1/4095.
+     */
+    AVRational average_maxrgb;
+
+    /**
+     * Indicates the variance brightness of the displayed content.
+     * The values should be in the range of 0.0 to 1.0,
+     * inclusive and in multiples of 1/4095.
+     */
+    AVRational variance_maxrgb;
+
+    /**
+     * Indicates the maximum brightness of the displayed content.
+     * The values should be in the range of 0.0 to 1.0, inclusive
+     * and in multiples of 1/4095.
+     */
+    AVRational maximum_maxrgb;
+
+    /**
+     * This flag indicates that the metadata for the tone mapping function in
+     * the processing window is present (for value of 1).
+     */
+    int tone_mapping_mode_flag;
+
+    /**
+     * The number of tone mapping param. The value shall be in the range
+     * of 1 to 2, inclusive.
+     */
+    int tone_mapping_param_num;
+
+    /**
+     * The color tone mapping parameters.
+     */
+    AVHDRVividColorToneMappingParams tm_params[2];
+
+    /**
+     * This flag indicates that the metadata for the color saturation mapping in
+     * the processing window is present (for value of 1).
+     */
+    int color_saturation_mapping_flag;
+
+    /**
+     * The number of color saturation param. The value shall be in the range
+     * of 0 to 7, inclusive.
+     */
+    int color_saturation_num;
+
+    /**
+     * Indicates the color correction strength parameter.
+     * The values should be in the range of 0.0 to 2.0, inclusive
+     * and in multiples of 1/128.
+     */
+    AVRational color_saturation_gain[8];
+} AVHDRVividColorTransformParams;
+
+/**
+ * This struct represents dynamic metadata for color volume transform -
+ * CUVA 005.1:2021 standard
+ *
+ * To be used as payload of a AVFrameSideData or AVPacketSideData with the
+ * appropriate type.
+ *
+ * @note The struct should be allocated with
+ * av_dynamic_hdr_vivid_alloc() and its size is not a part of
+ * the public ABI.
+ */
+typedef struct AVDynamicHDRVivid {
+    /**
+     * The system start code. The value shall be set to 0x01.
+     */
+    uint8_t system_start_code;
+
+    /**
+     * The number of processing windows. The value shall be set to 0x01
+     * if the system_start_code is 0x01.
+     */
+    uint8_t num_windows;
+
+    /**
+     * The color transform parameters for every processing window.
+     */
+    AVHDRVividColorTransformParams params[3];
+} AVDynamicHDRVivid;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVDynamicHDRVivid structure and set its fields to
+ * default values. The resulting struct can be freed using av_freep().
+ *
+ * @return An AVDynamicHDRVivid filled with default values or NULL
+ *         on failure.
+ */
+AVDynamicHDRVivid *av_dynamic_hdr_vivid_alloc(size_t *size);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a complete AVDynamicHDRVivid and add it to the frame.
+ * @param frame The frame which side data is added to.
+ *
+ * @return The AVDynamicHDRVivid structure to be filled by caller or NULL
+ *         on failure.
+ */
+AVDynamicHDRVivid *av_dynamic_hdr_vivid_create_side_data(AVFrame *frame);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_HDR_DYNAMIC_VIVID_METADATA_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/hmac.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hmac.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ca4da6a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hmac.h
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (C) 2012 Martin Storsjo
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_HMAC_H
+#define AVUTIL_HMAC_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_hmac HMAC
+ * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+ * @{
+ */
+
+enum AVHMACType {
+    AV_HMAC_MD5,
+    AV_HMAC_SHA1,
+    AV_HMAC_SHA224,
+    AV_HMAC_SHA256,
+    AV_HMAC_SHA384,
+    AV_HMAC_SHA512,
+};
+
+typedef struct AVHMAC AVHMAC;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVHMAC context.
+ * @param type The hash function used for the HMAC.
+ */
+AVHMAC *av_hmac_alloc(enum AVHMACType type);
+
+/**
+ * Free an AVHMAC context.
+ * @param ctx The context to free, may be NULL
+ */
+void av_hmac_free(AVHMAC *ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize an AVHMAC context with an authentication key.
+ * @param ctx    The HMAC context
+ * @param key    The authentication key
+ * @param keylen The length of the key, in bytes
+ */
+void av_hmac_init(AVHMAC *ctx, const uint8_t *key, unsigned int keylen);
+
+/**
+ * Hash data with the HMAC.
+ * @param ctx  The HMAC context
+ * @param data The data to hash
+ * @param len  The length of the data, in bytes
+ */
+void av_hmac_update(AVHMAC *ctx, const uint8_t *data, unsigned int len);
+
+/**
+ * Finish hashing and output the HMAC digest.
+ * @param ctx    The HMAC context
+ * @param out    The output buffer to write the digest into
+ * @param outlen The length of the out buffer, in bytes
+ * @return       The number of bytes written to out, or a negative error code.
+ */
+int av_hmac_final(AVHMAC *ctx, uint8_t *out, unsigned int outlen);
+
+/**
+ * Hash an array of data with a key.
+ * @param ctx    The HMAC context
+ * @param data   The data to hash
+ * @param len    The length of the data, in bytes
+ * @param key    The authentication key
+ * @param keylen The length of the key, in bytes
+ * @param out    The output buffer to write the digest into
+ * @param outlen The length of the out buffer, in bytes
+ * @return       The number of bytes written to out, or a negative error code.
+ */
+int av_hmac_calc(AVHMAC *ctx, const uint8_t *data, unsigned int len,
+                 const uint8_t *key, unsigned int keylen,
+                 uint8_t *out, unsigned int outlen);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_HMAC_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7ff08c8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext.h
@@ -0,0 +1,610 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_H
+#define AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_H
+
+#include "buffer.h"
+#include "frame.h"
+#include "log.h"
+#include "pixfmt.h"
+
+enum AVHWDeviceType {
+    AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_NONE,
+    AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_VDPAU,
+    AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_CUDA,
+    AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_VAAPI,
+    AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_DXVA2,
+    AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_QSV,
+    AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_VIDEOTOOLBOX,
+    AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_D3D11VA,
+    AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_DRM,
+    AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_OPENCL,
+    AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_MEDIACODEC,
+    AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_VULKAN,
+};
+
+typedef struct AVHWDeviceInternal AVHWDeviceInternal;
+
+/**
+ * This struct aggregates all the (hardware/vendor-specific) "high-level" state,
+ * i.e. state that is not tied to a concrete processing configuration.
+ * E.g., in an API that supports hardware-accelerated encoding and decoding,
+ * this struct will (if possible) wrap the state that is common to both encoding
+ * and decoding and from which specific instances of encoders or decoders can be
+ * derived.
+ *
+ * This struct is reference-counted with the AVBuffer mechanism. The
+ * av_hwdevice_ctx_alloc() constructor yields a reference, whose data field
+ * points to the actual AVHWDeviceContext. Further objects derived from
+ * AVHWDeviceContext (such as AVHWFramesContext, describing a frame pool with
+ * specific properties) will hold an internal reference to it. After all the
+ * references are released, the AVHWDeviceContext itself will be freed,
+ * optionally invoking a user-specified callback for uninitializing the hardware
+ * state.
+ */
+typedef struct AVHWDeviceContext {
+    /**
+     * A class for logging. Set by av_hwdevice_ctx_alloc().
+     */
+    const AVClass *av_class;
+
+    /**
+     * Private data used internally by libavutil. Must not be accessed in any
+     * way by the caller.
+     */
+    AVHWDeviceInternal *internal;
+
+    /**
+     * This field identifies the underlying API used for hardware access.
+     *
+     * This field is set when this struct is allocated and never changed
+     * afterwards.
+     */
+    enum AVHWDeviceType type;
+
+    /**
+     * The format-specific data, allocated and freed by libavutil along with
+     * this context.
+     *
+     * Should be cast by the user to the format-specific context defined in the
+     * corresponding header (hwcontext_*.h) and filled as described in the
+     * documentation before calling av_hwdevice_ctx_init().
+     *
+     * After calling av_hwdevice_ctx_init() this struct should not be modified
+     * by the caller.
+     */
+    void *hwctx;
+
+    /**
+     * This field may be set by the caller before calling av_hwdevice_ctx_init().
+     *
+     * If non-NULL, this callback will be called when the last reference to
+     * this context is unreferenced, immediately before it is freed.
+     *
+     * @note when other objects (e.g an AVHWFramesContext) are derived from this
+     *       struct, this callback will be invoked after all such child objects
+     *       are fully uninitialized and their respective destructors invoked.
+     */
+    void (*free)(struct AVHWDeviceContext *ctx);
+
+    /**
+     * Arbitrary user data, to be used e.g. by the free() callback.
+     */
+    void *user_opaque;
+} AVHWDeviceContext;
+
+typedef struct AVHWFramesInternal AVHWFramesInternal;
+
+/**
+ * This struct describes a set or pool of "hardware" frames (i.e. those with
+ * data not located in normal system memory). All the frames in the pool are
+ * assumed to be allocated in the same way and interchangeable.
+ *
+ * This struct is reference-counted with the AVBuffer mechanism and tied to a
+ * given AVHWDeviceContext instance. The av_hwframe_ctx_alloc() constructor
+ * yields a reference, whose data field points to the actual AVHWFramesContext
+ * struct.
+ */
+typedef struct AVHWFramesContext {
+    /**
+     * A class for logging.
+     */
+    const AVClass *av_class;
+
+    /**
+     * Private data used internally by libavutil. Must not be accessed in any
+     * way by the caller.
+     */
+    AVHWFramesInternal *internal;
+
+    /**
+     * A reference to the parent AVHWDeviceContext. This reference is owned and
+     * managed by the enclosing AVHWFramesContext, but the caller may derive
+     * additional references from it.
+     */
+    AVBufferRef *device_ref;
+
+    /**
+     * The parent AVHWDeviceContext. This is simply a pointer to
+     * device_ref->data provided for convenience.
+     *
+     * Set by libavutil in av_hwframe_ctx_init().
+     */
+    AVHWDeviceContext *device_ctx;
+
+    /**
+     * The format-specific data, allocated and freed automatically along with
+     * this context.
+     *
+     * Should be cast by the user to the format-specific context defined in the
+     * corresponding header (hwframe_*.h) and filled as described in the
+     * documentation before calling av_hwframe_ctx_init().
+     *
+     * After any frames using this context are created, the contents of this
+     * struct should not be modified by the caller.
+     */
+    void *hwctx;
+
+    /**
+     * This field may be set by the caller before calling av_hwframe_ctx_init().
+     *
+     * If non-NULL, this callback will be called when the last reference to
+     * this context is unreferenced, immediately before it is freed.
+     */
+    void (*free)(struct AVHWFramesContext *ctx);
+
+    /**
+     * Arbitrary user data, to be used e.g. by the free() callback.
+     */
+    void *user_opaque;
+
+    /**
+     * A pool from which the frames are allocated by av_hwframe_get_buffer().
+     * This field may be set by the caller before calling av_hwframe_ctx_init().
+     * The buffers returned by calling av_buffer_pool_get() on this pool must
+     * have the properties described in the documentation in the corresponding hw
+     * type's header (hwcontext_*.h). The pool will be freed strictly before
+     * this struct's free() callback is invoked.
+     *
+     * This field may be NULL, then libavutil will attempt to allocate a pool
+     * internally. Note that certain device types enforce pools allocated at
+     * fixed size (frame count), which cannot be extended dynamically. In such a
+     * case, initial_pool_size must be set appropriately.
+     */
+    AVBufferPool *pool;
+
+    /**
+     * Initial size of the frame pool. If a device type does not support
+     * dynamically resizing the pool, then this is also the maximum pool size.
+     *
+     * May be set by the caller before calling av_hwframe_ctx_init(). Must be
+     * set if pool is NULL and the device type does not support dynamic pools.
+     */
+    int initial_pool_size;
+
+    /**
+     * The pixel format identifying the underlying HW surface type.
+     *
+     * Must be a hwaccel format, i.e. the corresponding descriptor must have the
+     * AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_HWACCEL flag set.
+     *
+     * Must be set by the user before calling av_hwframe_ctx_init().
+     */
+    enum AVPixelFormat format;
+
+    /**
+     * The pixel format identifying the actual data layout of the hardware
+     * frames.
+     *
+     * Must be set by the caller before calling av_hwframe_ctx_init().
+     *
+     * @note when the underlying API does not provide the exact data layout, but
+     * only the colorspace/bit depth, this field should be set to the fully
+     * planar version of that format (e.g. for 8-bit 420 YUV it should be
+     * AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P, not AV_PIX_FMT_NV12 or anything else).
+     */
+    enum AVPixelFormat sw_format;
+
+    /**
+     * The allocated dimensions of the frames in this pool.
+     *
+     * Must be set by the user before calling av_hwframe_ctx_init().
+     */
+    int width, height;
+} AVHWFramesContext;
+
+/**
+ * Look up an AVHWDeviceType by name.
+ *
+ * @param name String name of the device type (case-insensitive).
+ * @return The type from enum AVHWDeviceType, or AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_NONE if
+ *         not found.
+ */
+enum AVHWDeviceType av_hwdevice_find_type_by_name(const char *name);
+
+/** Get the string name of an AVHWDeviceType.
+ *
+ * @param type Type from enum AVHWDeviceType.
+ * @return Pointer to a static string containing the name, or NULL if the type
+ *         is not valid.
+ */
+const char *av_hwdevice_get_type_name(enum AVHWDeviceType type);
+
+/**
+ * Iterate over supported device types.
+ *
+ * @param prev AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_NONE initially, then the previous type
+ *             returned by this function in subsequent iterations.
+ * @return The next usable device type from enum AVHWDeviceType, or
+ *         AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_NONE if there are no more.
+ */
+enum AVHWDeviceType av_hwdevice_iterate_types(enum AVHWDeviceType prev);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVHWDeviceContext for a given hardware type.
+ *
+ * @param type the type of the hardware device to allocate.
+ * @return a reference to the newly created AVHWDeviceContext on success or NULL
+ *         on failure.
+ */
+AVBufferRef *av_hwdevice_ctx_alloc(enum AVHWDeviceType type);
+
+/**
+ * Finalize the device context before use. This function must be called after
+ * the context is filled with all the required information and before it is
+ * used in any way.
+ *
+ * @param ref a reference to the AVHWDeviceContext
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR code on failure
+ */
+int av_hwdevice_ctx_init(AVBufferRef *ref);
+
+/**
+ * Open a device of the specified type and create an AVHWDeviceContext for it.
+ *
+ * This is a convenience function intended to cover the simple cases. Callers
+ * who need to fine-tune device creation/management should open the device
+ * manually and then wrap it in an AVHWDeviceContext using
+ * av_hwdevice_ctx_alloc()/av_hwdevice_ctx_init().
+ *
+ * The returned context is already initialized and ready for use, the caller
+ * should not call av_hwdevice_ctx_init() on it. The user_opaque/free fields of
+ * the created AVHWDeviceContext are set by this function and should not be
+ * touched by the caller.
+ *
+ * @param device_ctx On success, a reference to the newly-created device context
+ *                   will be written here. The reference is owned by the caller
+ *                   and must be released with av_buffer_unref() when no longer
+ *                   needed. On failure, NULL will be written to this pointer.
+ * @param type The type of the device to create.
+ * @param device A type-specific string identifying the device to open.
+ * @param opts A dictionary of additional (type-specific) options to use in
+ *             opening the device. The dictionary remains owned by the caller.
+ * @param flags currently unused
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR code on failure.
+ */
+int av_hwdevice_ctx_create(AVBufferRef **device_ctx, enum AVHWDeviceType type,
+                           const char *device, AVDictionary *opts, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Create a new device of the specified type from an existing device.
+ *
+ * If the source device is a device of the target type or was originally
+ * derived from such a device (possibly through one or more intermediate
+ * devices of other types), then this will return a reference to the
+ * existing device of the same type as is requested.
+ *
+ * Otherwise, it will attempt to derive a new device from the given source
+ * device.  If direct derivation to the new type is not implemented, it will
+ * attempt the same derivation from each ancestor of the source device in
+ * turn looking for an implemented derivation method.
+ *
+ * @param dst_ctx On success, a reference to the newly-created
+ *                AVHWDeviceContext.
+ * @param type    The type of the new device to create.
+ * @param src_ctx A reference to an existing AVHWDeviceContext which will be
+ *                used to create the new device.
+ * @param flags   Currently unused; should be set to zero.
+ * @return        Zero on success, a negative AVERROR code on failure.
+ */
+int av_hwdevice_ctx_create_derived(AVBufferRef **dst_ctx,
+                                   enum AVHWDeviceType type,
+                                   AVBufferRef *src_ctx, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Create a new device of the specified type from an existing device.
+ *
+ * This function performs the same action as av_hwdevice_ctx_create_derived,
+ * however, it is able to set options for the new device to be derived.
+ *
+ * @param dst_ctx On success, a reference to the newly-created
+ *                AVHWDeviceContext.
+ * @param type    The type of the new device to create.
+ * @param src_ctx A reference to an existing AVHWDeviceContext which will be
+ *                used to create the new device.
+ * @param options Options for the new device to create, same format as in
+ *                av_hwdevice_ctx_create.
+ * @param flags   Currently unused; should be set to zero.
+ * @return        Zero on success, a negative AVERROR code on failure.
+ */
+int av_hwdevice_ctx_create_derived_opts(AVBufferRef **dst_ctx,
+                                        enum AVHWDeviceType type,
+                                        AVBufferRef *src_ctx,
+                                        AVDictionary *options, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVHWFramesContext tied to a given device context.
+ *
+ * @param device_ctx a reference to a AVHWDeviceContext. This function will make
+ *                   a new reference for internal use, the one passed to the
+ *                   function remains owned by the caller.
+ * @return a reference to the newly created AVHWFramesContext on success or NULL
+ *         on failure.
+ */
+AVBufferRef *av_hwframe_ctx_alloc(AVBufferRef *device_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Finalize the context before use. This function must be called after the
+ * context is filled with all the required information and before it is attached
+ * to any frames.
+ *
+ * @param ref a reference to the AVHWFramesContext
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR code on failure
+ */
+int av_hwframe_ctx_init(AVBufferRef *ref);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a new frame attached to the given AVHWFramesContext.
+ *
+ * @param hwframe_ctx a reference to an AVHWFramesContext
+ * @param frame an empty (freshly allocated or unreffed) frame to be filled with
+ *              newly allocated buffers.
+ * @param flags currently unused, should be set to zero
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR code on failure
+ */
+int av_hwframe_get_buffer(AVBufferRef *hwframe_ctx, AVFrame *frame, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Copy data to or from a hw surface. At least one of dst/src must have an
+ * AVHWFramesContext attached.
+ *
+ * If src has an AVHWFramesContext attached, then the format of dst (if set)
+ * must use one of the formats returned by av_hwframe_transfer_get_formats(src,
+ * AV_HWFRAME_TRANSFER_DIRECTION_FROM).
+ * If dst has an AVHWFramesContext attached, then the format of src must use one
+ * of the formats returned by av_hwframe_transfer_get_formats(dst,
+ * AV_HWFRAME_TRANSFER_DIRECTION_TO)
+ *
+ * dst may be "clean" (i.e. with data/buf pointers unset), in which case the
+ * data buffers will be allocated by this function using av_frame_get_buffer().
+ * If dst->format is set, then this format will be used, otherwise (when
+ * dst->format is AV_PIX_FMT_NONE) the first acceptable format will be chosen.
+ *
+ * The two frames must have matching allocated dimensions (i.e. equal to
+ * AVHWFramesContext.width/height), since not all device types support
+ * transferring a sub-rectangle of the whole surface. The display dimensions
+ * (i.e. AVFrame.width/height) may be smaller than the allocated dimensions, but
+ * also have to be equal for both frames. When the display dimensions are
+ * smaller than the allocated dimensions, the content of the padding in the
+ * destination frame is unspecified.
+ *
+ * @param dst the destination frame. dst is not touched on failure.
+ * @param src the source frame.
+ * @param flags currently unused, should be set to zero
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR error code on failure.
+ */
+int av_hwframe_transfer_data(AVFrame *dst, const AVFrame *src, int flags);
+
+enum AVHWFrameTransferDirection {
+    /**
+     * Transfer the data from the queried hw frame.
+     */
+    AV_HWFRAME_TRANSFER_DIRECTION_FROM,
+
+    /**
+     * Transfer the data to the queried hw frame.
+     */
+    AV_HWFRAME_TRANSFER_DIRECTION_TO,
+};
+
+/**
+ * Get a list of possible source or target formats usable in
+ * av_hwframe_transfer_data().
+ *
+ * @param hwframe_ctx the frame context to obtain the information for
+ * @param dir the direction of the transfer
+ * @param formats the pointer to the output format list will be written here.
+ *                The list is terminated with AV_PIX_FMT_NONE and must be freed
+ *                by the caller when no longer needed using av_free().
+ *                If this function returns successfully, the format list will
+ *                have at least one item (not counting the terminator).
+ *                On failure, the contents of this pointer are unspecified.
+ * @param flags currently unused, should be set to zero
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR code on failure.
+ */
+int av_hwframe_transfer_get_formats(AVBufferRef *hwframe_ctx,
+                                    enum AVHWFrameTransferDirection dir,
+                                    enum AVPixelFormat **formats, int flags);
+
+
+/**
+ * This struct describes the constraints on hardware frames attached to
+ * a given device with a hardware-specific configuration.  This is returned
+ * by av_hwdevice_get_hwframe_constraints() and must be freed by
+ * av_hwframe_constraints_free() after use.
+ */
+typedef struct AVHWFramesConstraints {
+    /**
+     * A list of possible values for format in the hw_frames_ctx,
+     * terminated by AV_PIX_FMT_NONE.  This member will always be filled.
+     */
+    enum AVPixelFormat *valid_hw_formats;
+
+    /**
+     * A list of possible values for sw_format in the hw_frames_ctx,
+     * terminated by AV_PIX_FMT_NONE.  Can be NULL if this information is
+     * not known.
+     */
+    enum AVPixelFormat *valid_sw_formats;
+
+    /**
+     * The minimum size of frames in this hw_frames_ctx.
+     * (Zero if not known.)
+     */
+    int min_width;
+    int min_height;
+
+    /**
+     * The maximum size of frames in this hw_frames_ctx.
+     * (INT_MAX if not known / no limit.)
+     */
+    int max_width;
+    int max_height;
+} AVHWFramesConstraints;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a HW-specific configuration structure for a given HW device.
+ * After use, the user must free all members as required by the specific
+ * hardware structure being used, then free the structure itself with
+ * av_free().
+ *
+ * @param device_ctx a reference to the associated AVHWDeviceContext.
+ * @return The newly created HW-specific configuration structure on
+ *         success or NULL on failure.
+ */
+void *av_hwdevice_hwconfig_alloc(AVBufferRef *device_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Get the constraints on HW frames given a device and the HW-specific
+ * configuration to be used with that device.  If no HW-specific
+ * configuration is provided, returns the maximum possible capabilities
+ * of the device.
+ *
+ * @param ref a reference to the associated AVHWDeviceContext.
+ * @param hwconfig a filled HW-specific configuration structure, or NULL
+ *        to return the maximum possible capabilities of the device.
+ * @return AVHWFramesConstraints structure describing the constraints
+ *         on the device, or NULL if not available.
+ */
+AVHWFramesConstraints *av_hwdevice_get_hwframe_constraints(AVBufferRef *ref,
+                                                           const void *hwconfig);
+
+/**
+ * Free an AVHWFrameConstraints structure.
+ *
+ * @param constraints The (filled or unfilled) AVHWFrameConstraints structure.
+ */
+void av_hwframe_constraints_free(AVHWFramesConstraints **constraints);
+
+
+/**
+ * Flags to apply to frame mappings.
+ */
+enum {
+    /**
+     * The mapping must be readable.
+     */
+    AV_HWFRAME_MAP_READ      = 1 << 0,
+    /**
+     * The mapping must be writeable.
+     */
+    AV_HWFRAME_MAP_WRITE     = 1 << 1,
+    /**
+     * The mapped frame will be overwritten completely in subsequent
+     * operations, so the current frame data need not be loaded.  Any values
+     * which are not overwritten are unspecified.
+     */
+    AV_HWFRAME_MAP_OVERWRITE = 1 << 2,
+    /**
+     * The mapping must be direct.  That is, there must not be any copying in
+     * the map or unmap steps.  Note that performance of direct mappings may
+     * be much lower than normal memory.
+     */
+    AV_HWFRAME_MAP_DIRECT    = 1 << 3,
+};
+
+/**
+ * Map a hardware frame.
+ *
+ * This has a number of different possible effects, depending on the format
+ * and origin of the src and dst frames.  On input, src should be a usable
+ * frame with valid buffers and dst should be blank (typically as just created
+ * by av_frame_alloc()).  src should have an associated hwframe context, and
+ * dst may optionally have a format and associated hwframe context.
+ *
+ * If src was created by mapping a frame from the hwframe context of dst,
+ * then this function undoes the mapping - dst is replaced by a reference to
+ * the frame that src was originally mapped from.
+ *
+ * If both src and dst have an associated hwframe context, then this function
+ * attempts to map the src frame from its hardware context to that of dst and
+ * then fill dst with appropriate data to be usable there.  This will only be
+ * possible if the hwframe contexts and associated devices are compatible -
+ * given compatible devices, av_hwframe_ctx_create_derived() can be used to
+ * create a hwframe context for dst in which mapping should be possible.
+ *
+ * If src has a hwframe context but dst does not, then the src frame is
+ * mapped to normal memory and should thereafter be usable as a normal frame.
+ * If the format is set on dst, then the mapping will attempt to create dst
+ * with that format and fail if it is not possible.  If format is unset (is
+ * AV_PIX_FMT_NONE) then dst will be mapped with whatever the most appropriate
+ * format to use is (probably the sw_format of the src hwframe context).
+ *
+ * A return value of AVERROR(ENOSYS) indicates that the mapping is not
+ * possible with the given arguments and hwframe setup, while other return
+ * values indicate that it failed somehow.
+ *
+ * On failure, the destination frame will be left blank, except for the
+ * hw_frames_ctx/format fields thay may have been set by the caller - those will
+ * be preserved as they were.
+ *
+ * @param dst Destination frame, to contain the mapping.
+ * @param src Source frame, to be mapped.
+ * @param flags Some combination of AV_HWFRAME_MAP_* flags.
+ * @return Zero on success, negative AVERROR code on failure.
+ */
+int av_hwframe_map(AVFrame *dst, const AVFrame *src, int flags);
+
+
+/**
+ * Create and initialise an AVHWFramesContext as a mapping of another existing
+ * AVHWFramesContext on a different device.
+ *
+ * av_hwframe_ctx_init() should not be called after this.
+ *
+ * @param derived_frame_ctx  On success, a reference to the newly created
+ *                           AVHWFramesContext.
+ * @param format             The AVPixelFormat for the derived context.
+ * @param derived_device_ctx A reference to the device to create the new
+ *                           AVHWFramesContext on.
+ * @param source_frame_ctx   A reference to an existing AVHWFramesContext
+ *                           which will be mapped to the derived context.
+ * @param flags  Some combination of AV_HWFRAME_MAP_* flags, defining the
+ *               mapping parameters to apply to frames which are allocated
+ *               in the derived device.
+ * @return       Zero on success, negative AVERROR code on failure.
+ */
+int av_hwframe_ctx_create_derived(AVBufferRef **derived_frame_ctx,
+                                  enum AVPixelFormat format,
+                                  AVBufferRef *derived_device_ctx,
+                                  AVBufferRef *source_frame_ctx,
+                                  int flags);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_cuda.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_cuda.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cefbe0c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_cuda.h
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_CUDA_H
+#define AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_CUDA_H
+
+#ifndef CUDA_VERSION
+#include <cuda.h>
+#endif
+
+#include "pixfmt.h"
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * An API-specific header for AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_CUDA.
+ *
+ * This API supports dynamic frame pools. AVHWFramesContext.pool must return
+ * AVBufferRefs whose data pointer is a CUdeviceptr.
+ */
+
+typedef struct AVCUDADeviceContextInternal AVCUDADeviceContextInternal;
+
+/**
+ * This struct is allocated as AVHWDeviceContext.hwctx
+ */
+typedef struct AVCUDADeviceContext {
+    CUcontext cuda_ctx;
+    CUstream stream;
+    AVCUDADeviceContextInternal *internal;
+} AVCUDADeviceContext;
+
+/**
+ * AVHWFramesContext.hwctx is currently not used
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup hwcontext_cuda Device context creation flags
+ *
+ * Flags for av_hwdevice_ctx_create.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Use primary device context instead of creating a new one.
+ */
+#define AV_CUDA_USE_PRIMARY_CONTEXT (1 << 0)
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_CUDA_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_d3d11va.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_d3d11va.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..77d2d72
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_d3d11va.h
@@ -0,0 +1,178 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_D3D11VA_H
+#define AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_D3D11VA_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * An API-specific header for AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_D3D11VA.
+ *
+ * The default pool implementation will be fixed-size if initial_pool_size is
+ * set (and allocate elements from an array texture). Otherwise it will allocate
+ * individual textures. Be aware that decoding requires a single array texture.
+ *
+ * Using sw_format==AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P has special semantics, and maps to
+ * DXGI_FORMAT_420_OPAQUE. av_hwframe_transfer_data() is not supported for
+ * this format. Refer to MSDN for details.
+ *
+ * av_hwdevice_ctx_create() for this device type supports a key named "debug"
+ * for the AVDictionary entry. If this is set to any value, the device creation
+ * code will try to load various supported D3D debugging layers.
+ */
+
+#include <d3d11.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+/**
+ * This struct is allocated as AVHWDeviceContext.hwctx
+ */
+typedef struct AVD3D11VADeviceContext {
+    /**
+     * Device used for texture creation and access. This can also be used to
+     * set the libavcodec decoding device.
+     *
+     * Must be set by the user. This is the only mandatory field - the other
+     * device context fields are set from this and are available for convenience.
+     *
+     * Deallocating the AVHWDeviceContext will always release this interface,
+     * and it does not matter whether it was user-allocated.
+     */
+    ID3D11Device        *device;
+
+    /**
+     * If unset, this will be set from the device field on init.
+     *
+     * Deallocating the AVHWDeviceContext will always release this interface,
+     * and it does not matter whether it was user-allocated.
+     */
+    ID3D11DeviceContext *device_context;
+
+    /**
+     * If unset, this will be set from the device field on init.
+     *
+     * Deallocating the AVHWDeviceContext will always release this interface,
+     * and it does not matter whether it was user-allocated.
+     */
+    ID3D11VideoDevice   *video_device;
+
+    /**
+     * If unset, this will be set from the device_context field on init.
+     *
+     * Deallocating the AVHWDeviceContext will always release this interface,
+     * and it does not matter whether it was user-allocated.
+     */
+    ID3D11VideoContext  *video_context;
+
+    /**
+     * Callbacks for locking. They protect accesses to device_context and
+     * video_context calls. They also protect access to the internal staging
+     * texture (for av_hwframe_transfer_data() calls). They do NOT protect
+     * access to hwcontext or decoder state in general.
+     *
+     * If unset on init, the hwcontext implementation will set them to use an
+     * internal mutex.
+     *
+     * The underlying lock must be recursive. lock_ctx is for free use by the
+     * locking implementation.
+     */
+    void (*lock)(void *lock_ctx);
+    void (*unlock)(void *lock_ctx);
+    void *lock_ctx;
+} AVD3D11VADeviceContext;
+
+/**
+ * D3D11 frame descriptor for pool allocation.
+ *
+ * In user-allocated pools, AVHWFramesContext.pool must return AVBufferRefs
+ * with the data pointer pointing at an object of this type describing the
+ * planes of the frame.
+ *
+ * This has no use outside of custom allocation, and AVFrame AVBufferRef do not
+ * necessarily point to an instance of this struct.
+ */
+typedef struct AVD3D11FrameDescriptor {
+    /**
+     * The texture in which the frame is located. The reference count is
+     * managed by the AVBufferRef, and destroying the reference will release
+     * the interface.
+     *
+     * Normally stored in AVFrame.data[0].
+     */
+    ID3D11Texture2D *texture;
+
+    /**
+     * The index into the array texture element representing the frame, or 0
+     * if the texture is not an array texture.
+     *
+     * Normally stored in AVFrame.data[1] (cast from intptr_t).
+     */
+    intptr_t index;
+} AVD3D11FrameDescriptor;
+
+/**
+ * This struct is allocated as AVHWFramesContext.hwctx
+ */
+typedef struct AVD3D11VAFramesContext {
+    /**
+     * The canonical texture used for pool allocation. If this is set to NULL
+     * on init, the hwframes implementation will allocate and set an array
+     * texture if initial_pool_size > 0.
+     *
+     * The only situation when the API user should set this is:
+     * - the user wants to do manual pool allocation (setting
+     *   AVHWFramesContext.pool), instead of letting AVHWFramesContext
+     *   allocate the pool
+     * - of an array texture
+     * - and wants it to use it for decoding
+     * - this has to be done before calling av_hwframe_ctx_init()
+     *
+     * Deallocating the AVHWFramesContext will always release this interface,
+     * and it does not matter whether it was user-allocated.
+     *
+     * This is in particular used by the libavcodec D3D11VA hwaccel, which
+     * requires a single array texture. It will create ID3D11VideoDecoderOutputView
+     * objects for each array texture element on decoder initialization.
+     */
+    ID3D11Texture2D *texture;
+
+    /**
+     * D3D11_TEXTURE2D_DESC.BindFlags used for texture creation. The user must
+     * at least set D3D11_BIND_DECODER if the frames context is to be used for
+     * video decoding.
+     * This field is ignored/invalid if a user-allocated texture is provided.
+     */
+    UINT BindFlags;
+
+    /**
+     * D3D11_TEXTURE2D_DESC.MiscFlags used for texture creation.
+     * This field is ignored/invalid if a user-allocated texture is provided.
+     */
+    UINT MiscFlags;
+
+    /**
+     * In case if texture structure member above is not NULL contains the same texture
+     * pointer for all elements and different indexes into the array texture.
+     * In case if texture structure member above is NULL, all elements contains
+     * pointers to separate non-array textures and 0 indexes.
+     * This field is ignored/invalid if a user-allocated texture is provided.
+    */
+    AVD3D11FrameDescriptor *texture_infos;
+} AVD3D11VAFramesContext;
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_D3D11VA_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_drm.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_drm.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..42709f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_drm.h
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_DRM_H
+#define AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_DRM_H
+
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * API-specific header for AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_DRM.
+ *
+ * Internal frame allocation is not currently supported - all frames
+ * must be allocated by the user.  Thus AVHWFramesContext is always
+ * NULL, though this may change if support for frame allocation is
+ * added in future.
+ */
+
+enum {
+    /**
+     * The maximum number of layers/planes in a DRM frame.
+     */
+    AV_DRM_MAX_PLANES = 4
+};
+
+/**
+ * DRM object descriptor.
+ *
+ * Describes a single DRM object, addressing it as a PRIME file
+ * descriptor.
+ */
+typedef struct AVDRMObjectDescriptor {
+    /**
+     * DRM PRIME fd for the object.
+     */
+    int fd;
+    /**
+     * Total size of the object.
+     *
+     * (This includes any parts not which do not contain image data.)
+     */
+    size_t size;
+    /**
+     * Format modifier applied to the object (DRM_FORMAT_MOD_*).
+     *
+     * If the format modifier is unknown then this should be set to
+     * DRM_FORMAT_MOD_INVALID.
+     */
+    uint64_t format_modifier;
+} AVDRMObjectDescriptor;
+
+/**
+ * DRM plane descriptor.
+ *
+ * Describes a single plane of a layer, which is contained within
+ * a single object.
+ */
+typedef struct AVDRMPlaneDescriptor {
+    /**
+     * Index of the object containing this plane in the objects
+     * array of the enclosing frame descriptor.
+     */
+    int object_index;
+    /**
+     * Offset within that object of this plane.
+     */
+    ptrdiff_t offset;
+    /**
+     * Pitch (linesize) of this plane.
+     */
+    ptrdiff_t pitch;
+} AVDRMPlaneDescriptor;
+
+/**
+ * DRM layer descriptor.
+ *
+ * Describes a single layer within a frame.  This has the structure
+ * defined by its format, and will contain one or more planes.
+ */
+typedef struct AVDRMLayerDescriptor {
+    /**
+     * Format of the layer (DRM_FORMAT_*).
+     */
+    uint32_t format;
+    /**
+     * Number of planes in the layer.
+     *
+     * This must match the number of planes required by format.
+     */
+    int nb_planes;
+    /**
+     * Array of planes in this layer.
+     */
+    AVDRMPlaneDescriptor planes[AV_DRM_MAX_PLANES];
+} AVDRMLayerDescriptor;
+
+/**
+ * DRM frame descriptor.
+ *
+ * This is used as the data pointer for AV_PIX_FMT_DRM_PRIME frames.
+ * It is also used by user-allocated frame pools - allocating in
+ * AVHWFramesContext.pool must return AVBufferRefs which contain
+ * an object of this type.
+ *
+ * The fields of this structure should be set such it can be
+ * imported directly by EGL using the EGL_EXT_image_dma_buf_import
+ * and EGL_EXT_image_dma_buf_import_modifiers extensions.
+ * (Note that the exact layout of a particular format may vary between
+ * platforms - we only specify that the same platform should be able
+ * to import it.)
+ *
+ * The total number of planes must not exceed AV_DRM_MAX_PLANES, and
+ * the order of the planes by increasing layer index followed by
+ * increasing plane index must be the same as the order which would
+ * be used for the data pointers in the equivalent software format.
+ */
+typedef struct AVDRMFrameDescriptor {
+    /**
+     * Number of DRM objects making up this frame.
+     */
+    int nb_objects;
+    /**
+     * Array of objects making up the frame.
+     */
+    AVDRMObjectDescriptor objects[AV_DRM_MAX_PLANES];
+    /**
+     * Number of layers in the frame.
+     */
+    int nb_layers;
+    /**
+     * Array of layers in the frame.
+     */
+    AVDRMLayerDescriptor layers[AV_DRM_MAX_PLANES];
+} AVDRMFrameDescriptor;
+
+/**
+ * DRM device.
+ *
+ * Allocated as AVHWDeviceContext.hwctx.
+ */
+typedef struct AVDRMDeviceContext {
+    /**
+     * File descriptor of DRM device.
+     *
+     * This is used as the device to create frames on, and may also be
+     * used in some derivation and mapping operations.
+     *
+     * If no device is required, set to -1.
+     */
+    int fd;
+} AVDRMDeviceContext;
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_DRM_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_dxva2.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_dxva2.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e1b79bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_dxva2.h
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_DXVA2_H
+#define AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_DXVA2_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * An API-specific header for AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_DXVA2.
+ *
+ * Only fixed-size pools are supported.
+ *
+ * For user-allocated pools, AVHWFramesContext.pool must return AVBufferRefs
+ * with the data pointer set to a pointer to IDirect3DSurface9.
+ */
+
+#include <d3d9.h>
+#include <dxva2api.h>
+
+/**
+ * This struct is allocated as AVHWDeviceContext.hwctx
+ */
+typedef struct AVDXVA2DeviceContext {
+    IDirect3DDeviceManager9 *devmgr;
+} AVDXVA2DeviceContext;
+
+/**
+ * This struct is allocated as AVHWFramesContext.hwctx
+ */
+typedef struct AVDXVA2FramesContext {
+    /**
+     * The surface type (e.g. DXVA2_VideoProcessorRenderTarget or
+     * DXVA2_VideoDecoderRenderTarget). Must be set by the caller.
+     */
+    DWORD               surface_type;
+
+    /**
+     * The surface pool. When an external pool is not provided by the caller,
+     * this will be managed (allocated and filled on init, freed on uninit) by
+     * libavutil.
+     */
+    IDirect3DSurface9 **surfaces;
+    int              nb_surfaces;
+
+    /**
+     * Certain drivers require the decoder to be destroyed before the surfaces.
+     * To allow internally managed pools to work properly in such cases, this
+     * field is provided.
+     *
+     * If it is non-NULL, libavutil will call IDirectXVideoDecoder_Release() on
+     * it just before the internal surface pool is freed.
+     *
+     * This is for convenience only. Some code uses other methods to manage the
+     * decoder reference.
+     */
+    IDirectXVideoDecoder *decoder_to_release;
+} AVDXVA2FramesContext;
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_DXVA2_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_mediacodec.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_mediacodec.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..920e177
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_mediacodec.h
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_MEDIACODEC_H
+#define AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_MEDIACODEC_H
+
+/**
+ * MediaCodec details.
+ *
+ * Allocated as AVHWDeviceContext.hwctx
+ */
+typedef struct AVMediaCodecDeviceContext {
+    /**
+     * android/view/Surface handle, to be filled by the user.
+     *
+     * This is the default surface used by decoders on this device.
+     */
+    void *surface;
+
+    /**
+     * Pointer to ANativeWindow.
+     *
+     * It both surface and native_window is NULL, try to create it
+     * automatically if OS support.
+     *
+     * It can be used as output surface for decoder and input surface for
+     * encoder.
+     */
+    void *native_window;
+} AVMediaCodecDeviceContext;
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_MEDIACODEC_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_opencl.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_opencl.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ef54486
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_opencl.h
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_OPENCL_H
+#define AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_OPENCL_H
+
+#ifdef __APPLE__
+#include <OpenCL/cl.h>
+#else
+#include <CL/cl.h>
+#endif
+
+#include "frame.h"
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * API-specific header for AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_OPENCL.
+ *
+ * Pools allocated internally are always dynamic, and are primarily intended
+ * to be used in OpenCL-only cases.  If interoperation is required, it is
+ * typically required to allocate frames in the other API and then map the
+ * frames context to OpenCL with av_hwframe_ctx_create_derived().
+ */
+
+/**
+ * OpenCL frame descriptor for pool allocation.
+ *
+ * In user-allocated pools, AVHWFramesContext.pool must return AVBufferRefs
+ * with the data pointer pointing at an object of this type describing the
+ * planes of the frame.
+ */
+typedef struct AVOpenCLFrameDescriptor {
+    /**
+     * Number of planes in the frame.
+     */
+    int nb_planes;
+    /**
+     * OpenCL image2d objects for each plane of the frame.
+     */
+    cl_mem planes[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS];
+} AVOpenCLFrameDescriptor;
+
+/**
+ * OpenCL device details.
+ *
+ * Allocated as AVHWDeviceContext.hwctx
+ */
+typedef struct AVOpenCLDeviceContext {
+    /**
+     * The primary device ID of the device.  If multiple OpenCL devices
+     * are associated with the context then this is the one which will
+     * be used for all operations internal to FFmpeg.
+     */
+    cl_device_id device_id;
+    /**
+     * The OpenCL context which will contain all operations and frames on
+     * this device.
+     */
+    cl_context context;
+    /**
+     * The default command queue for this device, which will be used by all
+     * frames contexts which do not have their own command queue.  If not
+     * intialised by the user, a default queue will be created on the
+     * primary device.
+     */
+    cl_command_queue command_queue;
+} AVOpenCLDeviceContext;
+
+/**
+ * OpenCL-specific data associated with a frame pool.
+ *
+ * Allocated as AVHWFramesContext.hwctx.
+ */
+typedef struct AVOpenCLFramesContext {
+    /**
+     * The command queue used for internal asynchronous operations on this
+     * device (av_hwframe_transfer_data(), av_hwframe_map()).
+     *
+     * If this is not set, the command queue from the associated device is
+     * used instead.
+     */
+    cl_command_queue command_queue;
+} AVOpenCLFramesContext;
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_OPENCL_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_qsv.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_qsv.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e2dba8a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_qsv.h
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_QSV_H
+#define AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_QSV_H
+
+#include <mfxvideo.h>
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * An API-specific header for AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_QSV.
+ *
+ * This API does not support dynamic frame pools. AVHWFramesContext.pool must
+ * contain AVBufferRefs whose data pointer points to an mfxFrameSurface1 struct.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * This struct is allocated as AVHWDeviceContext.hwctx
+ */
+typedef struct AVQSVDeviceContext {
+    mfxSession session;
+    /**
+     * The mfxLoader handle used for mfxSession creation
+     *
+     * This field is only available for oneVPL user. For non-oneVPL user, this
+     * field must be set to NULL.
+     *
+     * Filled by the user before calling av_hwdevice_ctx_init() and should be
+     * cast to mfxLoader handle. Deallocating the AVHWDeviceContext will always
+     * release this interface.
+     */
+    void *loader;
+} AVQSVDeviceContext;
+
+/**
+ * This struct is allocated as AVHWFramesContext.hwctx
+ */
+typedef struct AVQSVFramesContext {
+    mfxFrameSurface1 *surfaces;
+    int            nb_surfaces;
+
+    /**
+     * A combination of MFX_MEMTYPE_* describing the frame pool.
+     */
+    int frame_type;
+} AVQSVFramesContext;
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_QSV_H */
+
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_vaapi.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_vaapi.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0b2e071
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_vaapi.h
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_VAAPI_H
+#define AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_VAAPI_H
+
+#include <va/va.h>
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * API-specific header for AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_VAAPI.
+ *
+ * Dynamic frame pools are supported, but note that any pool used as a render
+ * target is required to be of fixed size in order to be be usable as an
+ * argument to vaCreateContext().
+ *
+ * For user-allocated pools, AVHWFramesContext.pool must return AVBufferRefs
+ * with the data pointer set to a VASurfaceID.
+ */
+
+enum {
+    /**
+     * The quirks field has been set by the user and should not be detected
+     * automatically by av_hwdevice_ctx_init().
+     */
+    AV_VAAPI_DRIVER_QUIRK_USER_SET = (1 << 0),
+    /**
+     * The driver does not destroy parameter buffers when they are used by
+     * vaRenderPicture().  Additional code will be required to destroy them
+     * separately afterwards.
+     */
+    AV_VAAPI_DRIVER_QUIRK_RENDER_PARAM_BUFFERS = (1 << 1),
+
+    /**
+     * The driver does not support the VASurfaceAttribMemoryType attribute,
+     * so the surface allocation code will not try to use it.
+     */
+    AV_VAAPI_DRIVER_QUIRK_ATTRIB_MEMTYPE = (1 << 2),
+
+    /**
+     * The driver does not support surface attributes at all.
+     * The surface allocation code will never pass them to surface allocation,
+     * and the results of the vaQuerySurfaceAttributes() call will be faked.
+     */
+    AV_VAAPI_DRIVER_QUIRK_SURFACE_ATTRIBUTES = (1 << 3),
+};
+
+/**
+ * VAAPI connection details.
+ *
+ * Allocated as AVHWDeviceContext.hwctx
+ */
+typedef struct AVVAAPIDeviceContext {
+    /**
+     * The VADisplay handle, to be filled by the user.
+     */
+    VADisplay display;
+    /**
+     * Driver quirks to apply - this is filled by av_hwdevice_ctx_init(),
+     * with reference to a table of known drivers, unless the
+     * AV_VAAPI_DRIVER_QUIRK_USER_SET bit is already present.  The user
+     * may need to refer to this field when performing any later
+     * operations using VAAPI with the same VADisplay.
+     */
+    unsigned int driver_quirks;
+} AVVAAPIDeviceContext;
+
+/**
+ * VAAPI-specific data associated with a frame pool.
+ *
+ * Allocated as AVHWFramesContext.hwctx.
+ */
+typedef struct AVVAAPIFramesContext {
+    /**
+     * Set by the user to apply surface attributes to all surfaces in
+     * the frame pool.  If null, default settings are used.
+     */
+    VASurfaceAttrib *attributes;
+    int           nb_attributes;
+    /**
+     * The surfaces IDs of all surfaces in the pool after creation.
+     * Only valid if AVHWFramesContext.initial_pool_size was positive.
+     * These are intended to be used as the render_targets arguments to
+     * vaCreateContext().
+     */
+    VASurfaceID     *surface_ids;
+    int           nb_surfaces;
+} AVVAAPIFramesContext;
+
+/**
+ * VAAPI hardware pipeline configuration details.
+ *
+ * Allocated with av_hwdevice_hwconfig_alloc().
+ */
+typedef struct AVVAAPIHWConfig {
+    /**
+     * ID of a VAAPI pipeline configuration.
+     */
+    VAConfigID config_id;
+} AVVAAPIHWConfig;
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_VAAPI_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_vdpau.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_vdpau.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1b7ea1e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_vdpau.h
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_VDPAU_H
+#define AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_VDPAU_H
+
+#include <vdpau/vdpau.h>
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * An API-specific header for AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_VDPAU.
+ *
+ * This API supports dynamic frame pools. AVHWFramesContext.pool must return
+ * AVBufferRefs whose data pointer is a VdpVideoSurface.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * This struct is allocated as AVHWDeviceContext.hwctx
+ */
+typedef struct AVVDPAUDeviceContext {
+    VdpDevice          device;
+    VdpGetProcAddress *get_proc_address;
+} AVVDPAUDeviceContext;
+
+/**
+ * AVHWFramesContext.hwctx is currently not used
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_VDPAU_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_videotoolbox.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_videotoolbox.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..25dde85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_videotoolbox.h
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_VIDEOTOOLBOX_H
+#define AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_VIDEOTOOLBOX_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+#include <VideoToolbox/VideoToolbox.h>
+
+#include "frame.h"
+#include "pixfmt.h"
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * An API-specific header for AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_VIDEOTOOLBOX.
+ *
+ * This API supports frame allocation using a native CVPixelBufferPool
+ * instead of an AVBufferPool.
+ *
+ * If the API user sets a custom pool, AVHWFramesContext.pool must return
+ * AVBufferRefs whose data pointer is a CVImageBufferRef or CVPixelBufferRef.
+ * Note that the underlying CVPixelBuffer could be retained by OS frameworks
+ * depending on application usage, so it is preferable to let CoreVideo manage
+ * the pool using the default implementation.
+ *
+ * Currently AVHWDeviceContext.hwctx and AVHWFramesContext.hwctx are always
+ * NULL.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Convert a VideoToolbox (actually CoreVideo) format to AVPixelFormat.
+ * Returns AV_PIX_FMT_NONE if no known equivalent was found.
+ */
+enum AVPixelFormat av_map_videotoolbox_format_to_pixfmt(uint32_t cv_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Convert an AVPixelFormat to a VideoToolbox (actually CoreVideo) format.
+ * Returns 0 if no known equivalent was found.
+ */
+uint32_t av_map_videotoolbox_format_from_pixfmt(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Same as av_map_videotoolbox_format_from_pixfmt function, but can map and
+ * return full range pixel formats via a flag.
+ */
+uint32_t av_map_videotoolbox_format_from_pixfmt2(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, bool full_range);
+
+/**
+ * Convert an AVChromaLocation to a VideoToolbox/CoreVideo chroma location string.
+ * Returns 0 if no known equivalent was found.
+ */
+CFStringRef av_map_videotoolbox_chroma_loc_from_av(enum AVChromaLocation loc);
+
+/**
+ * Convert an AVColorSpace to a VideoToolbox/CoreVideo color matrix string.
+ * Returns 0 if no known equivalent was found.
+ */
+CFStringRef av_map_videotoolbox_color_matrix_from_av(enum AVColorSpace space);
+
+/**
+ * Convert an AVColorPrimaries to a VideoToolbox/CoreVideo color primaries string.
+ * Returns 0 if no known equivalent was found.
+ */
+CFStringRef av_map_videotoolbox_color_primaries_from_av(enum AVColorPrimaries pri);
+
+/**
+ * Convert an AVColorTransferCharacteristic to a VideoToolbox/CoreVideo color transfer
+ * function string.
+ * Returns 0 if no known equivalent was found.
+ */
+CFStringRef av_map_videotoolbox_color_trc_from_av(enum AVColorTransferCharacteristic trc);
+
+/**
+ * Update a CVPixelBufferRef's metadata to based on an AVFrame.
+ * Returns 0 if no known equivalent was found.
+ */
+int av_vt_pixbuf_set_attachments(void *log_ctx,
+                                 CVPixelBufferRef pixbuf, const struct AVFrame *src);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_VIDEOTOOLBOX_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_vulkan.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_vulkan.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..df86c85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/hwcontext_vulkan.h
@@ -0,0 +1,281 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_VULKAN_H
+#define AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_VULKAN_H
+
+#if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(VK_USE_PLATFORM_WIN32_KHR)
+#define VK_USE_PLATFORM_WIN32_KHR
+#endif
+#include <vulkan/vulkan.h>
+
+#include "pixfmt.h"
+#include "frame.h"
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * API-specific header for AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_VULKAN.
+ *
+ * For user-allocated pools, AVHWFramesContext.pool must return AVBufferRefs
+ * with the data pointer set to an AVVkFrame.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Main Vulkan context, allocated as AVHWDeviceContext.hwctx.
+ * All of these can be set before init to change what the context uses
+ */
+typedef struct AVVulkanDeviceContext {
+    /**
+     * Custom memory allocator, else NULL
+     */
+    const VkAllocationCallbacks *alloc;
+
+    /**
+     * Pointer to the instance-provided vkGetInstanceProcAddr loading function.
+     * If NULL, will pick either libvulkan or libvolk, depending on libavutil's
+     * compilation settings, and set this field.
+     */
+    PFN_vkGetInstanceProcAddr get_proc_addr;
+
+    /**
+     * Vulkan instance. Must be at least version 1.2.
+     */
+    VkInstance inst;
+
+    /**
+     * Physical device
+     */
+    VkPhysicalDevice phys_dev;
+
+    /**
+     * Active device
+     */
+    VkDevice act_dev;
+
+    /**
+     * This structure should be set to the set of features that present and enabled
+     * during device creation. When a device is created by FFmpeg, it will default to
+     * enabling all that are present of the shaderImageGatherExtended,
+     * fragmentStoresAndAtomics, shaderInt64 and vertexPipelineStoresAndAtomics features.
+     */
+    VkPhysicalDeviceFeatures2 device_features;
+
+    /**
+     * Enabled instance extensions.
+     * If supplying your own device context, set this to an array of strings, with
+     * each entry containing the specified Vulkan extension string to enable.
+     * Duplicates are possible and accepted.
+     * If no extensions are enabled, set these fields to NULL, and 0 respectively.
+     */
+    const char * const *enabled_inst_extensions;
+    int nb_enabled_inst_extensions;
+
+    /**
+     * Enabled device extensions. By default, VK_KHR_external_memory_fd,
+     * VK_EXT_external_memory_dma_buf, VK_EXT_image_drm_format_modifier,
+     * VK_KHR_external_semaphore_fd and VK_EXT_external_memory_host are enabled if found.
+     * If supplying your own device context, these fields takes the same format as
+     * the above fields, with the same conditions that duplicates are possible
+     * and accepted, and that NULL and 0 respectively means no extensions are enabled.
+     */
+    const char * const *enabled_dev_extensions;
+    int nb_enabled_dev_extensions;
+
+    /**
+     * Queue family index for graphics operations, and the number of queues
+     * enabled for it. If unavaiable, will be set to -1. Not required.
+     * av_hwdevice_create() will attempt to find a dedicated queue for each
+     * queue family, or pick the one with the least unrelated flags set.
+     * Queue indices here may overlap if a queue has to share capabilities.
+     */
+    int queue_family_index;
+    int nb_graphics_queues;
+
+    /**
+     * Queue family index for transfer operations and the number of queues
+     * enabled. Required.
+     */
+    int queue_family_tx_index;
+    int nb_tx_queues;
+
+    /**
+     * Queue family index for compute operations and the number of queues
+     * enabled. Required.
+     */
+    int queue_family_comp_index;
+    int nb_comp_queues;
+
+    /**
+     * Queue family index for video encode ops, and the amount of queues enabled.
+     * If the device doesn't support such, queue_family_encode_index will be -1.
+     * Not required.
+     */
+    int queue_family_encode_index;
+    int nb_encode_queues;
+
+    /**
+     * Queue family index for video decode ops, and the amount of queues enabled.
+     * If the device doesn't support such, queue_family_decode_index will be -1.
+     * Not required.
+     */
+    int queue_family_decode_index;
+    int nb_decode_queues;
+} AVVulkanDeviceContext;
+
+/**
+ * Defines the behaviour of frame allocation.
+ */
+typedef enum AVVkFrameFlags {
+    /* Unless this flag is set, autodetected flags will be OR'd based on the
+     * device and tiling during av_hwframe_ctx_init(). */
+    AV_VK_FRAME_FLAG_NONE              = (1ULL << 0),
+
+    /* Image planes will be allocated in a single VkDeviceMemory, rather
+     * than as per-plane VkDeviceMemory allocations. Required for exporting
+     * to VAAPI on Intel devices. */
+    AV_VK_FRAME_FLAG_CONTIGUOUS_MEMORY = (1ULL << 1),
+} AVVkFrameFlags;
+
+/**
+ * Allocated as AVHWFramesContext.hwctx, used to set pool-specific options
+ */
+typedef struct AVVulkanFramesContext {
+    /**
+     * Controls the tiling of allocated frames. If left as optimal tiling,
+     * then during av_hwframe_ctx_init() will decide based on whether the device
+     * supports DRM modifiers, or if the linear_images flag is set, otherwise
+     * will allocate optimally-tiled images.
+     */
+    VkImageTiling tiling;
+
+    /**
+     * Defines extra usage of output frames. If left as 0, the following bits
+     * are set: TRANSFER_SRC, TRANSFER_DST. SAMPLED and STORAGE.
+     */
+    VkImageUsageFlagBits usage;
+
+    /**
+     * Extension data for image creation.
+     * If VkImageDrmFormatModifierListCreateInfoEXT is present in the chain,
+     * and the device supports DRM modifiers, then images will be allocated
+     * with the specific requested DRM modifiers.
+     * Additional structures may be added at av_hwframe_ctx_init() time,
+     * which will be freed automatically on uninit(), so users need only free
+     * any structures they've allocated themselves.
+     */
+    void *create_pnext;
+
+    /**
+     * Extension data for memory allocation. Must have as many entries as
+     * the number of planes of the sw_format.
+     * This will be chained to VkExportMemoryAllocateInfo, which is used
+     * to make all pool images exportable to other APIs if the necessary
+     * extensions are present in enabled_dev_extensions.
+     */
+    void *alloc_pnext[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS];
+
+    /**
+     * A combination of AVVkFrameFlags. Unless AV_VK_FRAME_FLAG_NONE is set,
+     * autodetected flags will be OR'd based on the device and tiling during
+     * av_hwframe_ctx_init().
+     */
+    AVVkFrameFlags flags;
+} AVVulkanFramesContext;
+
+/*
+ * Frame structure, the VkFormat of the image will always match
+ * the pool's sw_format.
+ * All frames, imported or allocated, will be created with the
+ * VK_IMAGE_CREATE_ALIAS_BIT flag set, so the memory may be aliased if needed.
+ *
+ * If all queue family indices in the device context are the same,
+ * images will be created with the EXCLUSIVE sharing mode. Otherwise, all images
+ * will be created using the CONCURRENT sharing mode.
+ *
+ * @note the size of this structure is not part of the ABI, to allocate
+ * you must use @av_vk_frame_alloc().
+ */
+typedef struct AVVkFrame {
+    /**
+     * Vulkan images to which the memory is bound to.
+     */
+    VkImage img[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS];
+
+    /**
+     * The same tiling must be used for all images in the frame.
+     */
+    VkImageTiling tiling;
+
+    /**
+     * Memory backing the images. Could be less than the amount of planes,
+     * in which case the offset value will indicate the binding offset of
+     * each plane in the memory.
+     */
+    VkDeviceMemory mem[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS];
+    size_t size[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS];
+
+    /**
+     * OR'd flags for all memory allocated
+     */
+    VkMemoryPropertyFlagBits flags;
+
+    /**
+     * Updated after every barrier
+     */
+    VkAccessFlagBits access[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS];
+    VkImageLayout layout[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS];
+
+    /**
+     * Synchronization timeline semaphores, one for each sw_format plane.
+     * Must not be freed manually. Must be waited on at every submission using
+     * the value in sem_value, and must be signalled at every submission,
+     * using an incremented value.
+     */
+    VkSemaphore sem[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS];
+
+    /**
+     * Up to date semaphore value at which each image becomes accessible.
+     * Clients must wait on this value when submitting a command queue,
+     * and increment it when signalling.
+     */
+    uint64_t sem_value[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS];
+
+    /**
+     * Internal data.
+     */
+    struct AVVkFrameInternal *internal;
+
+    /**
+     * Describes the binding offset of each plane to the VkDeviceMemory.
+     */
+    ptrdiff_t offset[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS];
+} AVVkFrame;
+
+/**
+ * Allocates a single AVVkFrame and initializes everything as 0.
+ * @note Must be freed via av_free()
+ */
+AVVkFrame *av_vk_frame_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Returns the format of each image up to the number of planes for a given sw_format.
+ * Returns NULL on unsupported formats.
+ */
+const VkFormat *av_vkfmt_from_pixfmt(enum AVPixelFormat p);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_HWCONTEXT_VULKAN_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/imgutils.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/imgutils.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e10ac14
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/imgutils.h
@@ -0,0 +1,331 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_IMGUTILS_H
+#define AVUTIL_IMGUTILS_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * misc image utilities
+ *
+ * @addtogroup lavu_picture
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include "pixdesc.h"
+#include "pixfmt.h"
+#include "rational.h"
+
+/**
+ * Compute the max pixel step for each plane of an image with a
+ * format described by pixdesc.
+ *
+ * The pixel step is the distance in bytes between the first byte of
+ * the group of bytes which describe a pixel component and the first
+ * byte of the successive group in the same plane for the same
+ * component.
+ *
+ * @param max_pixsteps an array which is filled with the max pixel step
+ * for each plane. Since a plane may contain different pixel
+ * components, the computed max_pixsteps[plane] is relative to the
+ * component in the plane with the max pixel step.
+ * @param max_pixstep_comps an array which is filled with the component
+ * for each plane which has the max pixel step. May be NULL.
+ * @param pixdesc the AVPixFmtDescriptor for the image, describing its format
+ */
+void av_image_fill_max_pixsteps(int max_pixsteps[4], int max_pixstep_comps[4],
+                                const AVPixFmtDescriptor *pixdesc);
+
+/**
+ * Compute the size of an image line with format pix_fmt and width
+ * width for the plane plane.
+ *
+ * @return the computed size in bytes
+ */
+int av_image_get_linesize(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, int width, int plane);
+
+/**
+ * Fill plane linesizes for an image with pixel format pix_fmt and
+ * width width.
+ *
+ * @param linesizes array to be filled with the linesize for each plane
+ * @param pix_fmt the AVPixelFormat of the image
+ * @param width width of the image in pixels
+ * @return >= 0 in case of success, a negative error code otherwise
+ */
+int av_image_fill_linesizes(int linesizes[4], enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, int width);
+
+/**
+ * Fill plane sizes for an image with pixel format pix_fmt and height height.
+ *
+ * @param size the array to be filled with the size of each image plane
+ * @param pix_fmt the AVPixelFormat of the image
+ * @param height height of the image in pixels
+ * @param linesizes the array containing the linesize for each
+ *        plane, should be filled by av_image_fill_linesizes()
+ * @return >= 0 in case of success, a negative error code otherwise
+ *
+ * @note The linesize parameters have the type ptrdiff_t here, while they are
+ *       int for av_image_fill_linesizes().
+ */
+int av_image_fill_plane_sizes(size_t size[4], enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt,
+                              int height, const ptrdiff_t linesizes[4]);
+
+/**
+ * Fill plane data pointers for an image with pixel format pix_fmt and
+ * height height.
+ *
+ * @param data pointers array to be filled with the pointer for each image plane
+ * @param pix_fmt the AVPixelFormat of the image
+ * @param height height of the image in pixels
+ * @param ptr the pointer to a buffer which will contain the image
+ * @param linesizes the array containing the linesize for each
+ * plane, should be filled by av_image_fill_linesizes()
+ * @return the size in bytes required for the image buffer, a negative
+ * error code in case of failure
+ */
+int av_image_fill_pointers(uint8_t *data[4], enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, int height,
+                           uint8_t *ptr, const int linesizes[4]);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an image with size w and h and pixel format pix_fmt, and
+ * fill pointers and linesizes accordingly.
+ * The allocated image buffer has to be freed by using
+ * av_freep(&pointers[0]).
+ *
+ * @param pointers array to be filled with the pointer for each image plane
+ * @param linesizes the array filled with the linesize for each plane
+ * @param w width of the image in pixels
+ * @param h height of the image in pixels
+ * @param pix_fmt the AVPixelFormat of the image
+ * @param align the value to use for buffer size alignment
+ * @return the size in bytes required for the image buffer, a negative
+ * error code in case of failure
+ */
+int av_image_alloc(uint8_t *pointers[4], int linesizes[4],
+                   int w, int h, enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, int align);
+
+/**
+ * Copy image plane from src to dst.
+ * That is, copy "height" number of lines of "bytewidth" bytes each.
+ * The first byte of each successive line is separated by *_linesize
+ * bytes.
+ *
+ * bytewidth must be contained by both absolute values of dst_linesize
+ * and src_linesize, otherwise the function behavior is undefined.
+ *
+ * @param dst          destination plane to copy to
+ * @param dst_linesize linesize for the image plane in dst
+ * @param src          source plane to copy from
+ * @param src_linesize linesize for the image plane in src
+ * @param height       height (number of lines) of the plane
+ */
+void av_image_copy_plane(uint8_t       *dst, int dst_linesize,
+                         const uint8_t *src, int src_linesize,
+                         int bytewidth, int height);
+
+/**
+ * Copy image data located in uncacheable (e.g. GPU mapped) memory. Where
+ * available, this function will use special functionality for reading from such
+ * memory, which may result in greatly improved performance compared to plain
+ * av_image_copy_plane().
+ *
+ * bytewidth must be contained by both absolute values of dst_linesize
+ * and src_linesize, otherwise the function behavior is undefined.
+ *
+ * @note The linesize parameters have the type ptrdiff_t here, while they are
+ *       int for av_image_copy_plane().
+ * @note On x86, the linesizes currently need to be aligned to the cacheline
+ *       size (i.e. 64) to get improved performance.
+ */
+void av_image_copy_plane_uc_from(uint8_t       *dst, ptrdiff_t dst_linesize,
+                                 const uint8_t *src, ptrdiff_t src_linesize,
+                                 ptrdiff_t bytewidth, int height);
+
+/**
+ * Copy image in src_data to dst_data.
+ *
+ * @param dst_data      destination image data buffer to copy to
+ * @param dst_linesizes linesizes for the image in dst_data
+ * @param src_data      source image data buffer to copy from
+ * @param src_linesizes linesizes for the image in src_data
+ * @param pix_fmt       the AVPixelFormat of the image
+ * @param width         width of the image in pixels
+ * @param height        height of the image in pixels
+ */
+void av_image_copy(uint8_t *dst_data[4], int dst_linesizes[4],
+                   const uint8_t *src_data[4], const int src_linesizes[4],
+                   enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, int width, int height);
+
+/**
+ * Copy image data located in uncacheable (e.g. GPU mapped) memory. Where
+ * available, this function will use special functionality for reading from such
+ * memory, which may result in greatly improved performance compared to plain
+ * av_image_copy().
+ *
+ * The data pointers and the linesizes must be aligned to the maximum required
+ * by the CPU architecture.
+ *
+ * @note The linesize parameters have the type ptrdiff_t here, while they are
+ *       int for av_image_copy().
+ * @note On x86, the linesizes currently need to be aligned to the cacheline
+ *       size (i.e. 64) to get improved performance.
+ */
+void av_image_copy_uc_from(uint8_t *dst_data[4],       const ptrdiff_t dst_linesizes[4],
+                           const uint8_t *src_data[4], const ptrdiff_t src_linesizes[4],
+                           enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, int width, int height);
+
+/**
+ * Setup the data pointers and linesizes based on the specified image
+ * parameters and the provided array.
+ *
+ * The fields of the given image are filled in by using the src
+ * address which points to the image data buffer. Depending on the
+ * specified pixel format, one or multiple image data pointers and
+ * line sizes will be set.  If a planar format is specified, several
+ * pointers will be set pointing to the different picture planes and
+ * the line sizes of the different planes will be stored in the
+ * lines_sizes array. Call with src == NULL to get the required
+ * size for the src buffer.
+ *
+ * To allocate the buffer and fill in the dst_data and dst_linesize in
+ * one call, use av_image_alloc().
+ *
+ * @param dst_data      data pointers to be filled in
+ * @param dst_linesize  linesizes for the image in dst_data to be filled in
+ * @param src           buffer which will contain or contains the actual image data, can be NULL
+ * @param pix_fmt       the pixel format of the image
+ * @param width         the width of the image in pixels
+ * @param height        the height of the image in pixels
+ * @param align         the value used in src for linesize alignment
+ * @return the size in bytes required for src, a negative error code
+ * in case of failure
+ */
+int av_image_fill_arrays(uint8_t *dst_data[4], int dst_linesize[4],
+                         const uint8_t *src,
+                         enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, int width, int height, int align);
+
+/**
+ * Return the size in bytes of the amount of data required to store an
+ * image with the given parameters.
+ *
+ * @param pix_fmt  the pixel format of the image
+ * @param width    the width of the image in pixels
+ * @param height   the height of the image in pixels
+ * @param align    the assumed linesize alignment
+ * @return the buffer size in bytes, a negative error code in case of failure
+ */
+int av_image_get_buffer_size(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, int width, int height, int align);
+
+/**
+ * Copy image data from an image into a buffer.
+ *
+ * av_image_get_buffer_size() can be used to compute the required size
+ * for the buffer to fill.
+ *
+ * @param dst           a buffer into which picture data will be copied
+ * @param dst_size      the size in bytes of dst
+ * @param src_data      pointers containing the source image data
+ * @param src_linesize  linesizes for the image in src_data
+ * @param pix_fmt       the pixel format of the source image
+ * @param width         the width of the source image in pixels
+ * @param height        the height of the source image in pixels
+ * @param align         the assumed linesize alignment for dst
+ * @return the number of bytes written to dst, or a negative value
+ * (error code) on error
+ */
+int av_image_copy_to_buffer(uint8_t *dst, int dst_size,
+                            const uint8_t * const src_data[4], const int src_linesize[4],
+                            enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, int width, int height, int align);
+
+/**
+ * Check if the given dimension of an image is valid, meaning that all
+ * bytes of the image can be addressed with a signed int.
+ *
+ * @param w the width of the picture
+ * @param h the height of the picture
+ * @param log_offset the offset to sum to the log level for logging with log_ctx
+ * @param log_ctx the parent logging context, it may be NULL
+ * @return >= 0 if valid, a negative error code otherwise
+ */
+int av_image_check_size(unsigned int w, unsigned int h, int log_offset, void *log_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Check if the given dimension of an image is valid, meaning that all
+ * bytes of a plane of an image with the specified pix_fmt can be addressed
+ * with a signed int.
+ *
+ * @param w the width of the picture
+ * @param h the height of the picture
+ * @param max_pixels the maximum number of pixels the user wants to accept
+ * @param pix_fmt the pixel format, can be AV_PIX_FMT_NONE if unknown.
+ * @param log_offset the offset to sum to the log level for logging with log_ctx
+ * @param log_ctx the parent logging context, it may be NULL
+ * @return >= 0 if valid, a negative error code otherwise
+ */
+int av_image_check_size2(unsigned int w, unsigned int h, int64_t max_pixels, enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, int log_offset, void *log_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Check if the given sample aspect ratio of an image is valid.
+ *
+ * It is considered invalid if the denominator is 0 or if applying the ratio
+ * to the image size would make the smaller dimension less than 1. If the
+ * sar numerator is 0, it is considered unknown and will return as valid.
+ *
+ * @param w width of the image
+ * @param h height of the image
+ * @param sar sample aspect ratio of the image
+ * @return 0 if valid, a negative AVERROR code otherwise
+ */
+int av_image_check_sar(unsigned int w, unsigned int h, AVRational sar);
+
+/**
+ * Overwrite the image data with black. This is suitable for filling a
+ * sub-rectangle of an image, meaning the padding between the right most pixel
+ * and the left most pixel on the next line will not be overwritten. For some
+ * formats, the image size might be rounded up due to inherent alignment.
+ *
+ * If the pixel format has alpha, the alpha is cleared to opaque.
+ *
+ * This can return an error if the pixel format is not supported. Normally, all
+ * non-hwaccel pixel formats should be supported.
+ *
+ * Passing NULL for dst_data is allowed. Then the function returns whether the
+ * operation would have succeeded. (It can return an error if the pix_fmt is
+ * not supported.)
+ *
+ * @param dst_data      data pointers to destination image
+ * @param dst_linesize  linesizes for the destination image
+ * @param pix_fmt       the pixel format of the image
+ * @param range         the color range of the image (important for colorspaces such as YUV)
+ * @param width         the width of the image in pixels
+ * @param height        the height of the image in pixels
+ * @return 0 if the image data was cleared, a negative AVERROR code otherwise
+ */
+int av_image_fill_black(uint8_t *dst_data[4], const ptrdiff_t dst_linesize[4],
+                        enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, enum AVColorRange range,
+                        int width, int height);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_IMGUTILS_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/intfloat.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/intfloat.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fe3d7ec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/intfloat.h
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2011 Mans Rullgard
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_INTFLOAT_H
+#define AVUTIL_INTFLOAT_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include "attributes.h"
+
+union av_intfloat32 {
+    uint32_t i;
+    float    f;
+};
+
+union av_intfloat64 {
+    uint64_t i;
+    double   f;
+};
+
+/**
+ * Reinterpret a 32-bit integer as a float.
+ */
+static av_always_inline float av_int2float(uint32_t i)
+{
+    union av_intfloat32 v;
+    v.i = i;
+    return v.f;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Reinterpret a float as a 32-bit integer.
+ */
+static av_always_inline uint32_t av_float2int(float f)
+{
+    union av_intfloat32 v;
+    v.f = f;
+    return v.i;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Reinterpret a 64-bit integer as a double.
+ */
+static av_always_inline double av_int2double(uint64_t i)
+{
+    union av_intfloat64 v;
+    v.i = i;
+    return v.f;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Reinterpret a double as a 64-bit integer.
+ */
+static av_always_inline uint64_t av_double2int(double f)
+{
+    union av_intfloat64 v;
+    v.f = f;
+    return v.i;
+}
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_INTFLOAT_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/intreadwrite.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/intreadwrite.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4c8413a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/intreadwrite.h
@@ -0,0 +1,644 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_INTREADWRITE_H
+#define AVUTIL_INTREADWRITE_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include "libavutil/avconfig.h"
+#include "attributes.h"
+#include "bswap.h"
+
+typedef union {
+    uint64_t u64;
+    uint32_t u32[2];
+    uint16_t u16[4];
+    uint8_t  u8 [8];
+    double   f64;
+    float    f32[2];
+} av_alias av_alias64;
+
+typedef union {
+    uint32_t u32;
+    uint16_t u16[2];
+    uint8_t  u8 [4];
+    float    f32;
+} av_alias av_alias32;
+
+typedef union {
+    uint16_t u16;
+    uint8_t  u8 [2];
+} av_alias av_alias16;
+
+/*
+ * Arch-specific headers can provide any combination of
+ * AV_[RW][BLN](16|24|32|48|64) and AV_(COPY|SWAP|ZERO)(64|128) macros.
+ * Preprocessor symbols must be defined, even if these are implemented
+ * as inline functions.
+ *
+ * R/W means read/write, B/L/N means big/little/native endianness.
+ * The following macros require aligned access, compared to their
+ * unaligned variants: AV_(COPY|SWAP|ZERO)(64|128), AV_[RW]N[8-64]A.
+ * Incorrect usage may range from abysmal performance to crash
+ * depending on the platform.
+ *
+ * The unaligned variants are AV_[RW][BLN][8-64] and AV_COPY*U.
+ */
+
+#ifdef HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H
+
+#include "config.h"
+
+#if   ARCH_ARM
+#   include "arm/intreadwrite.h"
+#elif ARCH_AVR32
+#   include "avr32/intreadwrite.h"
+#elif ARCH_MIPS
+#   include "mips/intreadwrite.h"
+#elif ARCH_PPC
+#   include "ppc/intreadwrite.h"
+#elif ARCH_TOMI
+#   include "tomi/intreadwrite.h"
+#elif ARCH_X86
+#   include "x86/intreadwrite.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif /* HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H */
+
+/*
+ * Map AV_RNXX <-> AV_R[BL]XX for all variants provided by per-arch headers.
+ */
+
+#if AV_HAVE_BIGENDIAN
+
+#   if    defined(AV_RN16) && !defined(AV_RB16)
+#       define AV_RB16(p) AV_RN16(p)
+#   elif !defined(AV_RN16) &&  defined(AV_RB16)
+#       define AV_RN16(p) AV_RB16(p)
+#   endif
+
+#   if    defined(AV_WN16) && !defined(AV_WB16)
+#       define AV_WB16(p, v) AV_WN16(p, v)
+#   elif !defined(AV_WN16) &&  defined(AV_WB16)
+#       define AV_WN16(p, v) AV_WB16(p, v)
+#   endif
+
+#   if    defined(AV_RN24) && !defined(AV_RB24)
+#       define AV_RB24(p) AV_RN24(p)
+#   elif !defined(AV_RN24) &&  defined(AV_RB24)
+#       define AV_RN24(p) AV_RB24(p)
+#   endif
+
+#   if    defined(AV_WN24) && !defined(AV_WB24)
+#       define AV_WB24(p, v) AV_WN24(p, v)
+#   elif !defined(AV_WN24) &&  defined(AV_WB24)
+#       define AV_WN24(p, v) AV_WB24(p, v)
+#   endif
+
+#   if    defined(AV_RN32) && !defined(AV_RB32)
+#       define AV_RB32(p) AV_RN32(p)
+#   elif !defined(AV_RN32) &&  defined(AV_RB32)
+#       define AV_RN32(p) AV_RB32(p)
+#   endif
+
+#   if    defined(AV_WN32) && !defined(AV_WB32)
+#       define AV_WB32(p, v) AV_WN32(p, v)
+#   elif !defined(AV_WN32) &&  defined(AV_WB32)
+#       define AV_WN32(p, v) AV_WB32(p, v)
+#   endif
+
+#   if    defined(AV_RN48) && !defined(AV_RB48)
+#       define AV_RB48(p) AV_RN48(p)
+#   elif !defined(AV_RN48) &&  defined(AV_RB48)
+#       define AV_RN48(p) AV_RB48(p)
+#   endif
+
+#   if    defined(AV_WN48) && !defined(AV_WB48)
+#       define AV_WB48(p, v) AV_WN48(p, v)
+#   elif !defined(AV_WN48) &&  defined(AV_WB48)
+#       define AV_WN48(p, v) AV_WB48(p, v)
+#   endif
+
+#   if    defined(AV_RN64) && !defined(AV_RB64)
+#       define AV_RB64(p) AV_RN64(p)
+#   elif !defined(AV_RN64) &&  defined(AV_RB64)
+#       define AV_RN64(p) AV_RB64(p)
+#   endif
+
+#   if    defined(AV_WN64) && !defined(AV_WB64)
+#       define AV_WB64(p, v) AV_WN64(p, v)
+#   elif !defined(AV_WN64) &&  defined(AV_WB64)
+#       define AV_WN64(p, v) AV_WB64(p, v)
+#   endif
+
+#else /* AV_HAVE_BIGENDIAN */
+
+#   if    defined(AV_RN16) && !defined(AV_RL16)
+#       define AV_RL16(p) AV_RN16(p)
+#   elif !defined(AV_RN16) &&  defined(AV_RL16)
+#       define AV_RN16(p) AV_RL16(p)
+#   endif
+
+#   if    defined(AV_WN16) && !defined(AV_WL16)
+#       define AV_WL16(p, v) AV_WN16(p, v)
+#   elif !defined(AV_WN16) &&  defined(AV_WL16)
+#       define AV_WN16(p, v) AV_WL16(p, v)
+#   endif
+
+#   if    defined(AV_RN24) && !defined(AV_RL24)
+#       define AV_RL24(p) AV_RN24(p)
+#   elif !defined(AV_RN24) &&  defined(AV_RL24)
+#       define AV_RN24(p) AV_RL24(p)
+#   endif
+
+#   if    defined(AV_WN24) && !defined(AV_WL24)
+#       define AV_WL24(p, v) AV_WN24(p, v)
+#   elif !defined(AV_WN24) &&  defined(AV_WL24)
+#       define AV_WN24(p, v) AV_WL24(p, v)
+#   endif
+
+#   if    defined(AV_RN32) && !defined(AV_RL32)
+#       define AV_RL32(p) AV_RN32(p)
+#   elif !defined(AV_RN32) &&  defined(AV_RL32)
+#       define AV_RN32(p) AV_RL32(p)
+#   endif
+
+#   if    defined(AV_WN32) && !defined(AV_WL32)
+#       define AV_WL32(p, v) AV_WN32(p, v)
+#   elif !defined(AV_WN32) &&  defined(AV_WL32)
+#       define AV_WN32(p, v) AV_WL32(p, v)
+#   endif
+
+#   if    defined(AV_RN48) && !defined(AV_RL48)
+#       define AV_RL48(p) AV_RN48(p)
+#   elif !defined(AV_RN48) &&  defined(AV_RL48)
+#       define AV_RN48(p) AV_RL48(p)
+#   endif
+
+#   if    defined(AV_WN48) && !defined(AV_WL48)
+#       define AV_WL48(p, v) AV_WN48(p, v)
+#   elif !defined(AV_WN48) &&  defined(AV_WL48)
+#       define AV_WN48(p, v) AV_WL48(p, v)
+#   endif
+
+#   if    defined(AV_RN64) && !defined(AV_RL64)
+#       define AV_RL64(p) AV_RN64(p)
+#   elif !defined(AV_RN64) &&  defined(AV_RL64)
+#       define AV_RN64(p) AV_RL64(p)
+#   endif
+
+#   if    defined(AV_WN64) && !defined(AV_WL64)
+#       define AV_WL64(p, v) AV_WN64(p, v)
+#   elif !defined(AV_WN64) &&  defined(AV_WL64)
+#       define AV_WN64(p, v) AV_WL64(p, v)
+#   endif
+
+#endif /* !AV_HAVE_BIGENDIAN */
+
+/*
+ * Define AV_[RW]N helper macros to simplify definitions not provided
+ * by per-arch headers.
+ */
+
+#if defined(__GNUC__)
+
+union unaligned_64 { uint64_t l; } __attribute__((packed)) av_alias;
+union unaligned_32 { uint32_t l; } __attribute__((packed)) av_alias;
+union unaligned_16 { uint16_t l; } __attribute__((packed)) av_alias;
+
+#   define AV_RN(s, p) (((const union unaligned_##s *) (p))->l)
+#   define AV_WN(s, p, v) ((((union unaligned_##s *) (p))->l) = (v))
+
+#elif defined(_MSC_VER) && (defined(_M_ARM) || defined(_M_X64) || defined(_M_ARM64)) && AV_HAVE_FAST_UNALIGNED
+
+#   define AV_RN(s, p) (*((const __unaligned uint##s##_t*)(p)))
+#   define AV_WN(s, p, v) (*((__unaligned uint##s##_t*)(p)) = (v))
+
+#elif AV_HAVE_FAST_UNALIGNED
+
+#   define AV_RN(s, p) (((const av_alias##s*)(p))->u##s)
+#   define AV_WN(s, p, v) (((av_alias##s*)(p))->u##s = (v))
+
+#else
+
+#ifndef AV_RB16
+#   define AV_RB16(x)                           \
+    ((((const uint8_t*)(x))[0] << 8) |          \
+      ((const uint8_t*)(x))[1])
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WB16
+#   define AV_WB16(p, val) do {                 \
+        uint16_t d = (val);                     \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[1] = (d);               \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[0] = (d)>>8;            \
+    } while(0)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RL16
+#   define AV_RL16(x)                           \
+    ((((const uint8_t*)(x))[1] << 8) |          \
+      ((const uint8_t*)(x))[0])
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WL16
+#   define AV_WL16(p, val) do {                 \
+        uint16_t d = (val);                     \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[0] = (d);               \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[1] = (d)>>8;            \
+    } while(0)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RB32
+#   define AV_RB32(x)                                \
+    (((uint32_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[0] << 24) |    \
+               (((const uint8_t*)(x))[1] << 16) |    \
+               (((const uint8_t*)(x))[2] <<  8) |    \
+                ((const uint8_t*)(x))[3])
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WB32
+#   define AV_WB32(p, val) do {                 \
+        uint32_t d = (val);                     \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[3] = (d);               \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[2] = (d)>>8;            \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[1] = (d)>>16;           \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[0] = (d)>>24;           \
+    } while(0)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RL32
+#   define AV_RL32(x)                                \
+    (((uint32_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[3] << 24) |    \
+               (((const uint8_t*)(x))[2] << 16) |    \
+               (((const uint8_t*)(x))[1] <<  8) |    \
+                ((const uint8_t*)(x))[0])
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WL32
+#   define AV_WL32(p, val) do {                 \
+        uint32_t d = (val);                     \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[0] = (d);               \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[1] = (d)>>8;            \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[2] = (d)>>16;           \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[3] = (d)>>24;           \
+    } while(0)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RB64
+#   define AV_RB64(x)                                   \
+    (((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[0] << 56) |       \
+     ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[1] << 48) |       \
+     ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[2] << 40) |       \
+     ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[3] << 32) |       \
+     ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[4] << 24) |       \
+     ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[5] << 16) |       \
+     ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[6] <<  8) |       \
+      (uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[7])
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WB64
+#   define AV_WB64(p, val) do {                 \
+        uint64_t d = (val);                     \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[7] = (d);               \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[6] = (d)>>8;            \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[5] = (d)>>16;           \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[4] = (d)>>24;           \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[3] = (d)>>32;           \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[2] = (d)>>40;           \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[1] = (d)>>48;           \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[0] = (d)>>56;           \
+    } while(0)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RL64
+#   define AV_RL64(x)                                   \
+    (((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[7] << 56) |       \
+     ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[6] << 48) |       \
+     ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[5] << 40) |       \
+     ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[4] << 32) |       \
+     ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[3] << 24) |       \
+     ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[2] << 16) |       \
+     ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[1] <<  8) |       \
+      (uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[0])
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WL64
+#   define AV_WL64(p, val) do {                 \
+        uint64_t d = (val);                     \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[0] = (d);               \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[1] = (d)>>8;            \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[2] = (d)>>16;           \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[3] = (d)>>24;           \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[4] = (d)>>32;           \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[5] = (d)>>40;           \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[6] = (d)>>48;           \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[7] = (d)>>56;           \
+    } while(0)
+#endif
+
+#if AV_HAVE_BIGENDIAN
+#   define AV_RN(s, p)    AV_RB##s(p)
+#   define AV_WN(s, p, v) AV_WB##s(p, v)
+#else
+#   define AV_RN(s, p)    AV_RL##s(p)
+#   define AV_WN(s, p, v) AV_WL##s(p, v)
+#endif
+
+#endif /* HAVE_FAST_UNALIGNED */
+
+#ifndef AV_RN16
+#   define AV_RN16(p) AV_RN(16, p)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RN32
+#   define AV_RN32(p) AV_RN(32, p)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RN64
+#   define AV_RN64(p) AV_RN(64, p)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_WN16
+#   define AV_WN16(p, v) AV_WN(16, p, v)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_WN32
+#   define AV_WN32(p, v) AV_WN(32, p, v)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_WN64
+#   define AV_WN64(p, v) AV_WN(64, p, v)
+#endif
+
+#if AV_HAVE_BIGENDIAN
+#   define AV_RB(s, p)    AV_RN##s(p)
+#   define AV_WB(s, p, v) AV_WN##s(p, v)
+#   define AV_RL(s, p)    av_bswap##s(AV_RN##s(p))
+#   define AV_WL(s, p, v) AV_WN##s(p, av_bswap##s(v))
+#else
+#   define AV_RB(s, p)    av_bswap##s(AV_RN##s(p))
+#   define AV_WB(s, p, v) AV_WN##s(p, av_bswap##s(v))
+#   define AV_RL(s, p)    AV_RN##s(p)
+#   define AV_WL(s, p, v) AV_WN##s(p, v)
+#endif
+
+#define AV_RB8(x)     (((const uint8_t*)(x))[0])
+#define AV_WB8(p, d)  do { ((uint8_t*)(p))[0] = (d); } while(0)
+
+#define AV_RL8(x)     AV_RB8(x)
+#define AV_WL8(p, d)  AV_WB8(p, d)
+
+#ifndef AV_RB16
+#   define AV_RB16(p)    AV_RB(16, p)
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WB16
+#   define AV_WB16(p, v) AV_WB(16, p, v)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RL16
+#   define AV_RL16(p)    AV_RL(16, p)
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WL16
+#   define AV_WL16(p, v) AV_WL(16, p, v)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RB32
+#   define AV_RB32(p)    AV_RB(32, p)
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WB32
+#   define AV_WB32(p, v) AV_WB(32, p, v)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RL32
+#   define AV_RL32(p)    AV_RL(32, p)
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WL32
+#   define AV_WL32(p, v) AV_WL(32, p, v)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RB64
+#   define AV_RB64(p)    AV_RB(64, p)
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WB64
+#   define AV_WB64(p, v) AV_WB(64, p, v)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RL64
+#   define AV_RL64(p)    AV_RL(64, p)
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WL64
+#   define AV_WL64(p, v) AV_WL(64, p, v)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RB24
+#   define AV_RB24(x)                           \
+    ((((const uint8_t*)(x))[0] << 16) |         \
+     (((const uint8_t*)(x))[1] <<  8) |         \
+      ((const uint8_t*)(x))[2])
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WB24
+#   define AV_WB24(p, d) do {                   \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[2] = (d);               \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[1] = (d)>>8;            \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[0] = (d)>>16;           \
+    } while(0)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RL24
+#   define AV_RL24(x)                           \
+    ((((const uint8_t*)(x))[2] << 16) |         \
+     (((const uint8_t*)(x))[1] <<  8) |         \
+      ((const uint8_t*)(x))[0])
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WL24
+#   define AV_WL24(p, d) do {                   \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[0] = (d);               \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[1] = (d)>>8;            \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[2] = (d)>>16;           \
+    } while(0)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RB48
+#   define AV_RB48(x)                                     \
+    (((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[0] << 40) |         \
+     ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[1] << 32) |         \
+     ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[2] << 24) |         \
+     ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[3] << 16) |         \
+     ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[4] <<  8) |         \
+      (uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[5])
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WB48
+#   define AV_WB48(p, darg) do {                \
+        uint64_t d = (darg);                    \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[5] = (d);               \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[4] = (d)>>8;            \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[3] = (d)>>16;           \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[2] = (d)>>24;           \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[1] = (d)>>32;           \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[0] = (d)>>40;           \
+    } while(0)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RL48
+#   define AV_RL48(x)                                     \
+    (((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[5] << 40) |         \
+     ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[4] << 32) |         \
+     ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[3] << 24) |         \
+     ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[2] << 16) |         \
+     ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[1] <<  8) |         \
+      (uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[0])
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WL48
+#   define AV_WL48(p, darg) do {                \
+        uint64_t d = (darg);                    \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[0] = (d);               \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[1] = (d)>>8;            \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[2] = (d)>>16;           \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[3] = (d)>>24;           \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[4] = (d)>>32;           \
+        ((uint8_t*)(p))[5] = (d)>>40;           \
+    } while(0)
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * The AV_[RW]NA macros access naturally aligned data
+ * in a type-safe way.
+ */
+
+#define AV_RNA(s, p)    (((const av_alias##s*)(p))->u##s)
+#define AV_WNA(s, p, v) (((av_alias##s*)(p))->u##s = (v))
+
+#ifndef AV_RN16A
+#   define AV_RN16A(p) AV_RNA(16, p)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RN32A
+#   define AV_RN32A(p) AV_RNA(32, p)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RN64A
+#   define AV_RN64A(p) AV_RNA(64, p)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_WN16A
+#   define AV_WN16A(p, v) AV_WNA(16, p, v)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_WN32A
+#   define AV_WN32A(p, v) AV_WNA(32, p, v)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_WN64A
+#   define AV_WN64A(p, v) AV_WNA(64, p, v)
+#endif
+
+#if AV_HAVE_BIGENDIAN
+#   define AV_RLA(s, p)    av_bswap##s(AV_RN##s##A(p))
+#   define AV_WLA(s, p, v) AV_WN##s##A(p, av_bswap##s(v))
+#else
+#   define AV_RLA(s, p)    AV_RN##s##A(p)
+#   define AV_WLA(s, p, v) AV_WN##s##A(p, v)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RL64A
+#   define AV_RL64A(p) AV_RLA(64, p)
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WL64A
+#   define AV_WL64A(p, v) AV_WLA(64, p, v)
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * The AV_COPYxxU macros are suitable for copying data to/from unaligned
+ * memory locations.
+ */
+
+#define AV_COPYU(n, d, s) AV_WN##n(d, AV_RN##n(s));
+
+#ifndef AV_COPY16U
+#   define AV_COPY16U(d, s) AV_COPYU(16, d, s)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_COPY32U
+#   define AV_COPY32U(d, s) AV_COPYU(32, d, s)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_COPY64U
+#   define AV_COPY64U(d, s) AV_COPYU(64, d, s)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_COPY128U
+#   define AV_COPY128U(d, s)                                    \
+    do {                                                        \
+        AV_COPY64U(d, s);                                       \
+        AV_COPY64U((char *)(d) + 8, (const char *)(s) + 8);     \
+    } while(0)
+#endif
+
+/* Parameters for AV_COPY*, AV_SWAP*, AV_ZERO* must be
+ * naturally aligned. They may be implemented using MMX,
+ * so emms_c() must be called before using any float code
+ * afterwards.
+ */
+
+#define AV_COPY(n, d, s) \
+    (((av_alias##n*)(d))->u##n = ((const av_alias##n*)(s))->u##n)
+
+#ifndef AV_COPY16
+#   define AV_COPY16(d, s) AV_COPY(16, d, s)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_COPY32
+#   define AV_COPY32(d, s) AV_COPY(32, d, s)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_COPY64
+#   define AV_COPY64(d, s) AV_COPY(64, d, s)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_COPY128
+#   define AV_COPY128(d, s)                    \
+    do {                                       \
+        AV_COPY64(d, s);                       \
+        AV_COPY64((char*)(d)+8, (char*)(s)+8); \
+    } while(0)
+#endif
+
+#define AV_SWAP(n, a, b) FFSWAP(av_alias##n, *(av_alias##n*)(a), *(av_alias##n*)(b))
+
+#ifndef AV_SWAP64
+#   define AV_SWAP64(a, b) AV_SWAP(64, a, b)
+#endif
+
+#define AV_ZERO(n, d) (((av_alias##n*)(d))->u##n = 0)
+
+#ifndef AV_ZERO16
+#   define AV_ZERO16(d) AV_ZERO(16, d)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_ZERO32
+#   define AV_ZERO32(d) AV_ZERO(32, d)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_ZERO64
+#   define AV_ZERO64(d) AV_ZERO(64, d)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_ZERO128
+#   define AV_ZERO128(d)         \
+    do {                         \
+        AV_ZERO64(d);            \
+        AV_ZERO64((char*)(d)+8); \
+    } while(0)
+#endif
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_INTREADWRITE_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/lfg.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/lfg.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e75a986
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/lfg.h
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+/*
+ * Lagged Fibonacci PRNG
+ * Copyright (c) 2008 Michael Niedermayer
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_LFG_H
+#define AVUTIL_LFG_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+/**
+ * Context structure for the Lagged Fibonacci PRNG.
+ * The exact layout, types and content of this struct may change and should
+ * not be accessed directly. Only its `sizeof()` is guaranteed to stay the same
+ * to allow easy instanciation.
+ */
+typedef struct AVLFG {
+    unsigned int state[64];
+    int index;
+} AVLFG;
+
+void av_lfg_init(AVLFG *c, unsigned int seed);
+
+/**
+ * Seed the state of the ALFG using binary data.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, negative value (AVERROR) on failure.
+ */
+int av_lfg_init_from_data(AVLFG *c, const uint8_t *data, unsigned int length);
+
+/**
+ * Get the next random unsigned 32-bit number using an ALFG.
+ *
+ * Please also consider a simple LCG like state= state*1664525+1013904223,
+ * it may be good enough and faster for your specific use case.
+ */
+static inline unsigned int av_lfg_get(AVLFG *c){
+    unsigned a = c->state[c->index & 63] = c->state[(c->index-24) & 63] + c->state[(c->index-55) & 63];
+    c->index += 1U;
+    return a;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Get the next random unsigned 32-bit number using a MLFG.
+ *
+ * Please also consider av_lfg_get() above, it is faster.
+ */
+static inline unsigned int av_mlfg_get(AVLFG *c){
+    unsigned int a= c->state[(c->index-55) & 63];
+    unsigned int b= c->state[(c->index-24) & 63];
+    a = c->state[c->index & 63] = 2*a*b+a+b;
+    c->index += 1U;
+    return a;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Get the next two numbers generated by a Box-Muller Gaussian
+ * generator using the random numbers issued by lfg.
+ *
+ * @param lfg pointer to the contex structure
+ * @param out array where the two generated numbers are placed
+ */
+void av_bmg_get(AVLFG *lfg, double out[2]);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_LFG_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/log.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/log.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ab7ceab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/log.h
@@ -0,0 +1,387 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2006 Michael Niedermayer <michaelni@gmx.at>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_LOG_H
+#define AVUTIL_LOG_H
+
+#include <stdarg.h>
+#include "attributes.h"
+#include "version.h"
+
+typedef enum {
+    AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_NA = 0,
+    AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_INPUT,
+    AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_OUTPUT,
+    AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_MUXER,
+    AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DEMUXER,
+    AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_ENCODER,
+    AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DECODER,
+    AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_FILTER,
+    AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_BITSTREAM_FILTER,
+    AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_SWSCALER,
+    AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_SWRESAMPLER,
+    AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DEVICE_VIDEO_OUTPUT = 40,
+    AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DEVICE_VIDEO_INPUT,
+    AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DEVICE_AUDIO_OUTPUT,
+    AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DEVICE_AUDIO_INPUT,
+    AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DEVICE_OUTPUT,
+    AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DEVICE_INPUT,
+    AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_NB  ///< not part of ABI/API
+}AVClassCategory;
+
+#define AV_IS_INPUT_DEVICE(category) \
+    (((category) == AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DEVICE_VIDEO_INPUT) || \
+     ((category) == AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DEVICE_AUDIO_INPUT) || \
+     ((category) == AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DEVICE_INPUT))
+
+#define AV_IS_OUTPUT_DEVICE(category) \
+    (((category) == AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DEVICE_VIDEO_OUTPUT) || \
+     ((category) == AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DEVICE_AUDIO_OUTPUT) || \
+     ((category) == AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DEVICE_OUTPUT))
+
+struct AVOptionRanges;
+
+/**
+ * Describe the class of an AVClass context structure. That is an
+ * arbitrary struct of which the first field is a pointer to an
+ * AVClass struct (e.g. AVCodecContext, AVFormatContext etc.).
+ */
+typedef struct AVClass {
+    /**
+     * The name of the class; usually it is the same name as the
+     * context structure type to which the AVClass is associated.
+     */
+    const char* class_name;
+
+    /**
+     * A pointer to a function which returns the name of a context
+     * instance ctx associated with the class.
+     */
+    const char* (*item_name)(void* ctx);
+
+    /**
+     * a pointer to the first option specified in the class if any or NULL
+     *
+     * @see av_set_default_options()
+     */
+    const struct AVOption *option;
+
+    /**
+     * LIBAVUTIL_VERSION with which this structure was created.
+     * This is used to allow fields to be added without requiring major
+     * version bumps everywhere.
+     */
+
+    int version;
+
+    /**
+     * Offset in the structure where log_level_offset is stored.
+     * 0 means there is no such variable
+     */
+    int log_level_offset_offset;
+
+    /**
+     * Offset in the structure where a pointer to the parent context for
+     * logging is stored. For example a decoder could pass its AVCodecContext
+     * to eval as such a parent context, which an av_log() implementation
+     * could then leverage to display the parent context.
+     * The offset can be NULL.
+     */
+    int parent_log_context_offset;
+
+    /**
+     * Category used for visualization (like color)
+     * This is only set if the category is equal for all objects using this class.
+     * available since version (51 << 16 | 56 << 8 | 100)
+     */
+    AVClassCategory category;
+
+    /**
+     * Callback to return the category.
+     * available since version (51 << 16 | 59 << 8 | 100)
+     */
+    AVClassCategory (*get_category)(void* ctx);
+
+    /**
+     * Callback to return the supported/allowed ranges.
+     * available since version (52.12)
+     */
+    int (*query_ranges)(struct AVOptionRanges **, void *obj, const char *key, int flags);
+
+    /**
+     * Return next AVOptions-enabled child or NULL
+     */
+    void* (*child_next)(void *obj, void *prev);
+
+    /**
+     * Iterate over the AVClasses corresponding to potential AVOptions-enabled
+     * children.
+     *
+     * @param iter pointer to opaque iteration state. The caller must initialize
+     *             *iter to NULL before the first call.
+     * @return AVClass for the next AVOptions-enabled child or NULL if there are
+     *         no more such children.
+     *
+     * @note The difference between child_next and this is that child_next
+     *       iterates over _already existing_ objects, while child_class_iterate
+     *       iterates over _all possible_ children.
+     */
+    const struct AVClass* (*child_class_iterate)(void **iter);
+} AVClass;
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_log
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_log_constants Logging Constants
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Print no output.
+ */
+#define AV_LOG_QUIET    -8
+
+/**
+ * Something went really wrong and we will crash now.
+ */
+#define AV_LOG_PANIC     0
+
+/**
+ * Something went wrong and recovery is not possible.
+ * For example, no header was found for a format which depends
+ * on headers or an illegal combination of parameters is used.
+ */
+#define AV_LOG_FATAL     8
+
+/**
+ * Something went wrong and cannot losslessly be recovered.
+ * However, not all future data is affected.
+ */
+#define AV_LOG_ERROR    16
+
+/**
+ * Something somehow does not look correct. This may or may not
+ * lead to problems. An example would be the use of '-vstrict -2'.
+ */
+#define AV_LOG_WARNING  24
+
+/**
+ * Standard information.
+ */
+#define AV_LOG_INFO     32
+
+/**
+ * Detailed information.
+ */
+#define AV_LOG_VERBOSE  40
+
+/**
+ * Stuff which is only useful for libav* developers.
+ */
+#define AV_LOG_DEBUG    48
+
+/**
+ * Extremely verbose debugging, useful for libav* development.
+ */
+#define AV_LOG_TRACE    56
+
+#define AV_LOG_MAX_OFFSET (AV_LOG_TRACE - AV_LOG_QUIET)
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Sets additional colors for extended debugging sessions.
+ * @code
+   av_log(ctx, AV_LOG_DEBUG|AV_LOG_C(134), "Message in purple\n");
+   @endcode
+ * Requires 256color terminal support. Uses outside debugging is not
+ * recommended.
+ */
+#define AV_LOG_C(x) ((x) << 8)
+
+/**
+ * Send the specified message to the log if the level is less than or equal
+ * to the current av_log_level. By default, all logging messages are sent to
+ * stderr. This behavior can be altered by setting a different logging callback
+ * function.
+ * @see av_log_set_callback
+ *
+ * @param avcl A pointer to an arbitrary struct of which the first field is a
+ *        pointer to an AVClass struct or NULL if general log.
+ * @param level The importance level of the message expressed using a @ref
+ *        lavu_log_constants "Logging Constant".
+ * @param fmt The format string (printf-compatible) that specifies how
+ *        subsequent arguments are converted to output.
+ */
+void av_log(void *avcl, int level, const char *fmt, ...) av_printf_format(3, 4);
+
+/**
+ * Send the specified message to the log once with the initial_level and then with
+ * the subsequent_level. By default, all logging messages are sent to
+ * stderr. This behavior can be altered by setting a different logging callback
+ * function.
+ * @see av_log
+ *
+ * @param avcl A pointer to an arbitrary struct of which the first field is a
+ *        pointer to an AVClass struct or NULL if general log.
+ * @param initial_level importance level of the message expressed using a @ref
+ *        lavu_log_constants "Logging Constant" for the first occurance.
+ * @param subsequent_level importance level of the message expressed using a @ref
+ *        lavu_log_constants "Logging Constant" after the first occurance.
+ * @param fmt The format string (printf-compatible) that specifies how
+ *        subsequent arguments are converted to output.
+ * @param state a variable to keep trak of if a message has already been printed
+ *        this must be initialized to 0 before the first use. The same state
+ *        must not be accessed by 2 Threads simultaneously.
+ */
+void av_log_once(void* avcl, int initial_level, int subsequent_level, int *state, const char *fmt, ...) av_printf_format(5, 6);
+
+
+/**
+ * Send the specified message to the log if the level is less than or equal
+ * to the current av_log_level. By default, all logging messages are sent to
+ * stderr. This behavior can be altered by setting a different logging callback
+ * function.
+ * @see av_log_set_callback
+ *
+ * @param avcl A pointer to an arbitrary struct of which the first field is a
+ *        pointer to an AVClass struct.
+ * @param level The importance level of the message expressed using a @ref
+ *        lavu_log_constants "Logging Constant".
+ * @param fmt The format string (printf-compatible) that specifies how
+ *        subsequent arguments are converted to output.
+ * @param vl The arguments referenced by the format string.
+ */
+void av_vlog(void *avcl, int level, const char *fmt, va_list vl);
+
+/**
+ * Get the current log level
+ *
+ * @see lavu_log_constants
+ *
+ * @return Current log level
+ */
+int av_log_get_level(void);
+
+/**
+ * Set the log level
+ *
+ * @see lavu_log_constants
+ *
+ * @param level Logging level
+ */
+void av_log_set_level(int level);
+
+/**
+ * Set the logging callback
+ *
+ * @note The callback must be thread safe, even if the application does not use
+ *       threads itself as some codecs are multithreaded.
+ *
+ * @see av_log_default_callback
+ *
+ * @param callback A logging function with a compatible signature.
+ */
+void av_log_set_callback(void (*callback)(void*, int, const char*, va_list));
+
+/**
+ * Default logging callback
+ *
+ * It prints the message to stderr, optionally colorizing it.
+ *
+ * @param avcl A pointer to an arbitrary struct of which the first field is a
+ *        pointer to an AVClass struct.
+ * @param level The importance level of the message expressed using a @ref
+ *        lavu_log_constants "Logging Constant".
+ * @param fmt The format string (printf-compatible) that specifies how
+ *        subsequent arguments are converted to output.
+ * @param vl The arguments referenced by the format string.
+ */
+void av_log_default_callback(void *avcl, int level, const char *fmt,
+                             va_list vl);
+
+/**
+ * Return the context name
+ *
+ * @param  ctx The AVClass context
+ *
+ * @return The AVClass class_name
+ */
+const char* av_default_item_name(void* ctx);
+AVClassCategory av_default_get_category(void *ptr);
+
+/**
+ * Format a line of log the same way as the default callback.
+ * @param line          buffer to receive the formatted line
+ * @param line_size     size of the buffer
+ * @param print_prefix  used to store whether the prefix must be printed;
+ *                      must point to a persistent integer initially set to 1
+ */
+void av_log_format_line(void *ptr, int level, const char *fmt, va_list vl,
+                        char *line, int line_size, int *print_prefix);
+
+/**
+ * Format a line of log the same way as the default callback.
+ * @param line          buffer to receive the formatted line;
+ *                      may be NULL if line_size is 0
+ * @param line_size     size of the buffer; at most line_size-1 characters will
+ *                      be written to the buffer, plus one null terminator
+ * @param print_prefix  used to store whether the prefix must be printed;
+ *                      must point to a persistent integer initially set to 1
+ * @return Returns a negative value if an error occurred, otherwise returns
+ *         the number of characters that would have been written for a
+ *         sufficiently large buffer, not including the terminating null
+ *         character. If the return value is not less than line_size, it means
+ *         that the log message was truncated to fit the buffer.
+ */
+int av_log_format_line2(void *ptr, int level, const char *fmt, va_list vl,
+                        char *line, int line_size, int *print_prefix);
+
+/**
+ * Skip repeated messages, this requires the user app to use av_log() instead of
+ * (f)printf as the 2 would otherwise interfere and lead to
+ * "Last message repeated x times" messages below (f)printf messages with some
+ * bad luck.
+ * Also to receive the last, "last repeated" line if any, the user app must
+ * call av_log(NULL, AV_LOG_QUIET, "%s", ""); at the end
+ */
+#define AV_LOG_SKIP_REPEATED 1
+
+/**
+ * Include the log severity in messages originating from codecs.
+ *
+ * Results in messages such as:
+ * [rawvideo @ 0xDEADBEEF] [error] encode did not produce valid pts
+ */
+#define AV_LOG_PRINT_LEVEL 2
+
+void av_log_set_flags(int arg);
+int av_log_get_flags(void);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_LOG_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/lzo.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/lzo.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c034039
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/lzo.h
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+/*
+ * LZO 1x decompression
+ * copyright (c) 2006 Reimar Doeffinger
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_LZO_H
+#define AVUTIL_LZO_H
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_lzo LZO
+ * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+/** @name Error flags returned by av_lzo1x_decode
+ * @{ */
+/// end of the input buffer reached before decoding finished
+#define AV_LZO_INPUT_DEPLETED  1
+/// decoded data did not fit into output buffer
+#define AV_LZO_OUTPUT_FULL     2
+/// a reference to previously decoded data was wrong
+#define AV_LZO_INVALID_BACKPTR 4
+/// a non-specific error in the compressed bitstream
+#define AV_LZO_ERROR           8
+/** @} */
+
+#define AV_LZO_INPUT_PADDING   8
+#define AV_LZO_OUTPUT_PADDING 12
+
+/**
+ * @brief Decodes LZO 1x compressed data.
+ * @param out output buffer
+ * @param outlen size of output buffer, number of bytes left are returned here
+ * @param in input buffer
+ * @param inlen size of input buffer, number of bytes left are returned here
+ * @return 0 on success, otherwise a combination of the error flags above
+ *
+ * Make sure all buffers are appropriately padded, in must provide
+ * AV_LZO_INPUT_PADDING, out must provide AV_LZO_OUTPUT_PADDING additional bytes.
+ */
+int av_lzo1x_decode(void *out, int *outlen, const void *in, int *inlen);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_LZO_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/macros.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/macros.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2a7567c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/macros.h
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavu
+ * Utility Preprocessor macros
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_MACROS_H
+#define AVUTIL_MACROS_H
+
+#include "libavutil/avconfig.h"
+
+#if AV_HAVE_BIGENDIAN
+#   define AV_NE(be, le) (be)
+#else
+#   define AV_NE(be, le) (le)
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Comparator.
+ * For two numerical expressions x and y, gives 1 if x > y, -1 if x < y, and 0
+ * if x == y. This is useful for instance in a qsort comparator callback.
+ * Furthermore, compilers are able to optimize this to branchless code, and
+ * there is no risk of overflow with signed types.
+ * As with many macros, this evaluates its argument multiple times, it thus
+ * must not have a side-effect.
+ */
+#define FFDIFFSIGN(x,y) (((x)>(y)) - ((x)<(y)))
+
+#define FFMAX(a,b) ((a) > (b) ? (a) : (b))
+#define FFMAX3(a,b,c) FFMAX(FFMAX(a,b),c)
+#define FFMIN(a,b) ((a) > (b) ? (b) : (a))
+#define FFMIN3(a,b,c) FFMIN(FFMIN(a,b),c)
+
+#define FFSWAP(type,a,b) do{type SWAP_tmp= b; b= a; a= SWAP_tmp;}while(0)
+#define FF_ARRAY_ELEMS(a) (sizeof(a) / sizeof((a)[0]))
+
+#define MKTAG(a,b,c,d)   ((a) | ((b) << 8) | ((c) << 16) | ((unsigned)(d) << 24))
+#define MKBETAG(a,b,c,d) ((d) | ((c) << 8) | ((b) << 16) | ((unsigned)(a) << 24))
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup preproc_misc Preprocessor String Macros
+ *
+ * String manipulation macros
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#define AV_STRINGIFY(s)         AV_TOSTRING(s)
+#define AV_TOSTRING(s) #s
+
+#define AV_GLUE(a, b) a ## b
+#define AV_JOIN(a, b) AV_GLUE(a, b)
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#define AV_PRAGMA(s) _Pragma(#s)
+
+#define FFALIGN(x, a) (((x)+(a)-1)&~((a)-1))
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_MACROS_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/mastering_display_metadata.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/mastering_display_metadata.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c23b07c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/mastering_display_metadata.h
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2016 Neil Birkbeck <neil.birkbeck@gmail.com>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_MASTERING_DISPLAY_METADATA_H
+#define AVUTIL_MASTERING_DISPLAY_METADATA_H
+
+#include "frame.h"
+#include "rational.h"
+
+
+/**
+ * Mastering display metadata capable of representing the color volume of
+ * the display used to master the content (SMPTE 2086:2014).
+ *
+ * To be used as payload of a AVFrameSideData or AVPacketSideData with the
+ * appropriate type.
+ *
+ * @note The struct should be allocated with av_mastering_display_metadata_alloc()
+ *       and its size is not a part of the public ABI.
+ */
+typedef struct AVMasteringDisplayMetadata {
+    /**
+     * CIE 1931 xy chromaticity coords of color primaries (r, g, b order).
+     */
+    AVRational display_primaries[3][2];
+
+    /**
+     * CIE 1931 xy chromaticity coords of white point.
+     */
+    AVRational white_point[2];
+
+    /**
+     * Min luminance of mastering display (cd/m^2).
+     */
+    AVRational min_luminance;
+
+    /**
+     * Max luminance of mastering display (cd/m^2).
+     */
+    AVRational max_luminance;
+
+    /**
+     * Flag indicating whether the display primaries (and white point) are set.
+     */
+    int has_primaries;
+
+    /**
+     * Flag indicating whether the luminance (min_ and max_) have been set.
+     */
+    int has_luminance;
+
+} AVMasteringDisplayMetadata;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVMasteringDisplayMetadata structure and set its fields to
+ * default values. The resulting struct can be freed using av_freep().
+ *
+ * @return An AVMasteringDisplayMetadata filled with default values or NULL
+ *         on failure.
+ */
+AVMasteringDisplayMetadata *av_mastering_display_metadata_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a complete AVMasteringDisplayMetadata and add it to the frame.
+ *
+ * @param frame The frame which side data is added to.
+ *
+ * @return The AVMasteringDisplayMetadata structure to be filled by caller.
+ */
+AVMasteringDisplayMetadata *av_mastering_display_metadata_create_side_data(AVFrame *frame);
+
+/**
+ * Content light level needed by to transmit HDR over HDMI (CTA-861.3).
+ *
+ * To be used as payload of a AVFrameSideData or AVPacketSideData with the
+ * appropriate type.
+ *
+ * @note The struct should be allocated with av_content_light_metadata_alloc()
+ *       and its size is not a part of the public ABI.
+ */
+typedef struct AVContentLightMetadata {
+    /**
+     * Max content light level (cd/m^2).
+     */
+    unsigned MaxCLL;
+
+    /**
+     * Max average light level per frame (cd/m^2).
+     */
+    unsigned MaxFALL;
+} AVContentLightMetadata;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVContentLightMetadata structure and set its fields to
+ * default values. The resulting struct can be freed using av_freep().
+ *
+ * @return An AVContentLightMetadata filled with default values or NULL
+ *         on failure.
+ */
+AVContentLightMetadata *av_content_light_metadata_alloc(size_t *size);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a complete AVContentLightMetadata and add it to the frame.
+ *
+ * @param frame The frame which side data is added to.
+ *
+ * @return The AVContentLightMetadata structure to be filled by caller.
+ */
+AVContentLightMetadata *av_content_light_metadata_create_side_data(AVFrame *frame);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_MASTERING_DISPLAY_METADATA_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/mathematics.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/mathematics.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e4aff1e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/mathematics.h
@@ -0,0 +1,245 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2005-2012 Michael Niedermayer <michaelni@gmx.at>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @addtogroup lavu_math
+ * Mathematical utilities for working with timestamp and time base.
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_MATHEMATICS_H
+#define AVUTIL_MATHEMATICS_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include <math.h>
+#include "attributes.h"
+#include "rational.h"
+#include "intfloat.h"
+
+#ifndef M_E
+#define M_E            2.7182818284590452354   /* e */
+#endif
+#ifndef M_LN2
+#define M_LN2          0.69314718055994530942  /* log_e 2 */
+#endif
+#ifndef M_LN10
+#define M_LN10         2.30258509299404568402  /* log_e 10 */
+#endif
+#ifndef M_LOG2_10
+#define M_LOG2_10      3.32192809488736234787  /* log_2 10 */
+#endif
+#ifndef M_PHI
+#define M_PHI          1.61803398874989484820   /* phi / golden ratio */
+#endif
+#ifndef M_PI
+#define M_PI           3.14159265358979323846  /* pi */
+#endif
+#ifndef M_PI_2
+#define M_PI_2         1.57079632679489661923  /* pi/2 */
+#endif
+#ifndef M_SQRT1_2
+#define M_SQRT1_2      0.70710678118654752440  /* 1/sqrt(2) */
+#endif
+#ifndef M_SQRT2
+#define M_SQRT2        1.41421356237309504880  /* sqrt(2) */
+#endif
+#ifndef NAN
+#define NAN            av_int2float(0x7fc00000)
+#endif
+#ifndef INFINITY
+#define INFINITY       av_int2float(0x7f800000)
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_math
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Rounding methods.
+ */
+enum AVRounding {
+    AV_ROUND_ZERO     = 0, ///< Round toward zero.
+    AV_ROUND_INF      = 1, ///< Round away from zero.
+    AV_ROUND_DOWN     = 2, ///< Round toward -infinity.
+    AV_ROUND_UP       = 3, ///< Round toward +infinity.
+    AV_ROUND_NEAR_INF = 5, ///< Round to nearest and halfway cases away from zero.
+    /**
+     * Flag telling rescaling functions to pass `INT64_MIN`/`MAX` through
+     * unchanged, avoiding special cases for #AV_NOPTS_VALUE.
+     *
+     * Unlike other values of the enumeration AVRounding, this value is a
+     * bitmask that must be used in conjunction with another value of the
+     * enumeration through a bitwise OR, in order to set behavior for normal
+     * cases.
+     *
+     * @code{.c}
+     * av_rescale_rnd(3, 1, 2, AV_ROUND_UP | AV_ROUND_PASS_MINMAX);
+     * // Rescaling 3:
+     * //     Calculating 3 * 1 / 2
+     * //     3 / 2 is rounded up to 2
+     * //     => 2
+     *
+     * av_rescale_rnd(AV_NOPTS_VALUE, 1, 2, AV_ROUND_UP | AV_ROUND_PASS_MINMAX);
+     * // Rescaling AV_NOPTS_VALUE:
+     * //     AV_NOPTS_VALUE == INT64_MIN
+     * //     AV_NOPTS_VALUE is passed through
+     * //     => AV_NOPTS_VALUE
+     * @endcode
+     */
+    AV_ROUND_PASS_MINMAX = 8192,
+};
+
+/**
+ * Compute the greatest common divisor of two integer operands.
+ *
+ * @param a Operand
+ * @param b Operand
+ * @return GCD of a and b up to sign; if a >= 0 and b >= 0, return value is >= 0;
+ * if a == 0 and b == 0, returns 0.
+ */
+int64_t av_const av_gcd(int64_t a, int64_t b);
+
+/**
+ * Rescale a 64-bit integer with rounding to nearest.
+ *
+ * The operation is mathematically equivalent to `a * b / c`, but writing that
+ * directly can overflow.
+ *
+ * This function is equivalent to av_rescale_rnd() with #AV_ROUND_NEAR_INF.
+ *
+ * @see av_rescale_rnd(), av_rescale_q(), av_rescale_q_rnd()
+ */
+int64_t av_rescale(int64_t a, int64_t b, int64_t c) av_const;
+
+/**
+ * Rescale a 64-bit integer with specified rounding.
+ *
+ * The operation is mathematically equivalent to `a * b / c`, but writing that
+ * directly can overflow, and does not support different rounding methods.
+ * If the result is not representable then INT64_MIN is returned.
+ *
+ * @see av_rescale(), av_rescale_q(), av_rescale_q_rnd()
+ */
+int64_t av_rescale_rnd(int64_t a, int64_t b, int64_t c, enum AVRounding rnd) av_const;
+
+/**
+ * Rescale a 64-bit integer by 2 rational numbers.
+ *
+ * The operation is mathematically equivalent to `a * bq / cq`.
+ *
+ * This function is equivalent to av_rescale_q_rnd() with #AV_ROUND_NEAR_INF.
+ *
+ * @see av_rescale(), av_rescale_rnd(), av_rescale_q_rnd()
+ */
+int64_t av_rescale_q(int64_t a, AVRational bq, AVRational cq) av_const;
+
+/**
+ * Rescale a 64-bit integer by 2 rational numbers with specified rounding.
+ *
+ * The operation is mathematically equivalent to `a * bq / cq`.
+ *
+ * @see av_rescale(), av_rescale_rnd(), av_rescale_q()
+ */
+int64_t av_rescale_q_rnd(int64_t a, AVRational bq, AVRational cq,
+                         enum AVRounding rnd) av_const;
+
+/**
+ * Compare two timestamps each in its own time base.
+ *
+ * @return One of the following values:
+ *         - -1 if `ts_a` is before `ts_b`
+ *         - 1 if `ts_a` is after `ts_b`
+ *         - 0 if they represent the same position
+ *
+ * @warning
+ * The result of the function is undefined if one of the timestamps is outside
+ * the `int64_t` range when represented in the other's timebase.
+ */
+int av_compare_ts(int64_t ts_a, AVRational tb_a, int64_t ts_b, AVRational tb_b);
+
+/**
+ * Compare the remainders of two integer operands divided by a common divisor.
+ *
+ * In other words, compare the least significant `log2(mod)` bits of integers
+ * `a` and `b`.
+ *
+ * @code{.c}
+ * av_compare_mod(0x11, 0x02, 0x10) < 0 // since 0x11 % 0x10  (0x1) < 0x02 % 0x10  (0x2)
+ * av_compare_mod(0x11, 0x02, 0x20) > 0 // since 0x11 % 0x20 (0x11) > 0x02 % 0x20 (0x02)
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * @param a Operand
+ * @param b Operand
+ * @param mod Divisor; must be a power of 2
+ * @return
+ *         - a negative value if `a % mod < b % mod`
+ *         - a positive value if `a % mod > b % mod`
+ *         - zero             if `a % mod == b % mod`
+ */
+int64_t av_compare_mod(uint64_t a, uint64_t b, uint64_t mod);
+
+/**
+ * Rescale a timestamp while preserving known durations.
+ *
+ * This function is designed to be called per audio packet to scale the input
+ * timestamp to a different time base. Compared to a simple av_rescale_q()
+ * call, this function is robust against possible inconsistent frame durations.
+ *
+ * The `last` parameter is a state variable that must be preserved for all
+ * subsequent calls for the same stream. For the first call, `*last` should be
+ * initialized to #AV_NOPTS_VALUE.
+ *
+ * @param[in]     in_tb    Input time base
+ * @param[in]     in_ts    Input timestamp
+ * @param[in]     fs_tb    Duration time base; typically this is finer-grained
+ *                         (greater) than `in_tb` and `out_tb`
+ * @param[in]     duration Duration till the next call to this function (i.e.
+ *                         duration of the current packet/frame)
+ * @param[in,out] last     Pointer to a timestamp expressed in terms of
+ *                         `fs_tb`, acting as a state variable
+ * @param[in]     out_tb   Output timebase
+ * @return        Timestamp expressed in terms of `out_tb`
+ *
+ * @note In the context of this function, "duration" is in term of samples, not
+ *       seconds.
+ */
+int64_t av_rescale_delta(AVRational in_tb, int64_t in_ts,  AVRational fs_tb, int duration, int64_t *last, AVRational out_tb);
+
+/**
+ * Add a value to a timestamp.
+ *
+ * This function guarantees that when the same value is repeatly added that
+ * no accumulation of rounding errors occurs.
+ *
+ * @param[in] ts     Input timestamp
+ * @param[in] ts_tb  Input timestamp time base
+ * @param[in] inc    Value to be added
+ * @param[in] inc_tb Time base of `inc`
+ */
+int64_t av_add_stable(AVRational ts_tb, int64_t ts, AVRational inc_tb, int64_t inc);
+
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_MATHEMATICS_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/md5.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/md5.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fc2eabd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/md5.h
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2006 Michael Niedermayer <michaelni@gmx.at>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavu_md5
+ * Public header for MD5 hash function implementation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_MD5_H
+#define AVUTIL_MD5_H
+
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+#include "attributes.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_md5 MD5
+ * @ingroup lavu_hash
+ * MD5 hash function implementation.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+extern const int av_md5_size;
+
+struct AVMD5;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVMD5 context.
+ */
+struct AVMD5 *av_md5_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize MD5 hashing.
+ *
+ * @param ctx pointer to the function context (of size av_md5_size)
+ */
+void av_md5_init(struct AVMD5 *ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Update hash value.
+ *
+ * @param ctx hash function context
+ * @param src input data to update hash with
+ * @param len input data length
+ */
+void av_md5_update(struct AVMD5 *ctx, const uint8_t *src, size_t len);
+
+/**
+ * Finish hashing and output digest value.
+ *
+ * @param ctx hash function context
+ * @param dst buffer where output digest value is stored
+ */
+void av_md5_final(struct AVMD5 *ctx, uint8_t *dst);
+
+/**
+ * Hash an array of data.
+ *
+ * @param dst The output buffer to write the digest into
+ * @param src The data to hash
+ * @param len The length of the data, in bytes
+ */
+void av_md5_sum(uint8_t *dst, const uint8_t *src, size_t len);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_MD5_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/mem.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/mem.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c9c4fcf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/mem.h
@@ -0,0 +1,697 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2006 Michael Niedermayer <michaelni@gmx.at>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavu_mem
+ * Memory handling functions
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_MEM_H
+#define AVUTIL_MEM_H
+
+#include <limits.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+#include "attributes.h"
+#include "avutil.h"
+#include "version.h"
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_mem
+ * Utilities for manipulating memory.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg has several applications of memory that are not required of a typical
+ * program. For example, the computing-heavy components like video decoding and
+ * encoding can be sped up significantly through the use of aligned memory.
+ *
+ * However, for each of FFmpeg's applications of memory, there might not be a
+ * recognized or standardized API for that specific use. Memory alignment, for
+ * instance, varies wildly depending on operating systems, architectures, and
+ * compilers. Hence, this component of @ref libavutil is created to make
+ * dealing with memory consistently possible on all platforms.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#if FF_API_DECLARE_ALIGNED
+/**
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_mem_macros Alignment Macros
+ * Helper macros for declaring aligned variables.
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @def DECLARE_ALIGNED(n,t,v)
+ * Declare a variable that is aligned in memory.
+ *
+ * @code{.c}
+ * DECLARE_ALIGNED(16, uint16_t, aligned_int) = 42;
+ * DECLARE_ALIGNED(32, uint8_t, aligned_array)[128];
+ *
+ * // The default-alignment equivalent would be
+ * uint16_t aligned_int = 42;
+ * uint8_t aligned_array[128];
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * @param n Minimum alignment in bytes
+ * @param t Type of the variable (or array element)
+ * @param v Name of the variable
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @def DECLARE_ASM_ALIGNED(n,t,v)
+ * Declare an aligned variable appropriate for use in inline assembly code.
+ *
+ * @code{.c}
+ * DECLARE_ASM_ALIGNED(16, uint64_t, pw_08) = UINT64_C(0x0008000800080008);
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * @param n Minimum alignment in bytes
+ * @param t Type of the variable (or array element)
+ * @param v Name of the variable
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @def DECLARE_ASM_CONST(n,t,v)
+ * Declare a static constant aligned variable appropriate for use in inline
+ * assembly code.
+ *
+ * @code{.c}
+ * DECLARE_ASM_CONST(16, uint64_t, pw_08) = UINT64_C(0x0008000800080008);
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * @param n Minimum alignment in bytes
+ * @param t Type of the variable (or array element)
+ * @param v Name of the variable
+ */
+
+#if defined(__INTEL_COMPILER) && __INTEL_COMPILER < 1110 || defined(__SUNPRO_C)
+    #define DECLARE_ALIGNED(n,t,v)      t __attribute__ ((aligned (n))) v
+    #define DECLARE_ASM_ALIGNED(n,t,v)  t __attribute__ ((aligned (n))) v
+    #define DECLARE_ASM_CONST(n,t,v)    const t __attribute__ ((aligned (n))) v
+#elif defined(__DJGPP__)
+    #define DECLARE_ALIGNED(n,t,v)      t __attribute__ ((aligned (FFMIN(n, 16)))) v
+    #define DECLARE_ASM_ALIGNED(n,t,v)  t av_used __attribute__ ((aligned (FFMIN(n, 16)))) v
+    #define DECLARE_ASM_CONST(n,t,v)    static const t av_used __attribute__ ((aligned (FFMIN(n, 16)))) v
+#elif defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__clang__)
+    #define DECLARE_ALIGNED(n,t,v)      t __attribute__ ((aligned (n))) v
+    #define DECLARE_ASM_ALIGNED(n,t,v)  t av_used __attribute__ ((aligned (n))) v
+    #define DECLARE_ASM_CONST(n,t,v)    static const t av_used __attribute__ ((aligned (n))) v
+#elif defined(_MSC_VER)
+    #define DECLARE_ALIGNED(n,t,v)      __declspec(align(n)) t v
+    #define DECLARE_ASM_ALIGNED(n,t,v)  __declspec(align(n)) t v
+    #define DECLARE_ASM_CONST(n,t,v)    __declspec(align(n)) static const t v
+#else
+    #define DECLARE_ALIGNED(n,t,v)      t v
+    #define DECLARE_ASM_ALIGNED(n,t,v)  t v
+    #define DECLARE_ASM_CONST(n,t,v)    static const t v
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_mem_attrs Function Attributes
+ * Function attributes applicable to memory handling functions.
+ *
+ * These function attributes can help compilers emit more useful warnings, or
+ * generate better code.
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @def av_malloc_attrib
+ * Function attribute denoting a malloc-like function.
+ *
+ * @see <a href="https://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gcc/Common-Function-Attributes.html#index-g_t_0040code_007bmalloc_007d-function-attribute-3251">Function attribute `malloc` in GCC's documentation</a>
+ */
+
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(3,1)
+    #define av_malloc_attrib __attribute__((__malloc__))
+#else
+    #define av_malloc_attrib
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * @def av_alloc_size(...)
+ * Function attribute used on a function that allocates memory, whose size is
+ * given by the specified parameter(s).
+ *
+ * @code{.c}
+ * void *av_malloc(size_t size) av_alloc_size(1);
+ * void *av_calloc(size_t nmemb, size_t size) av_alloc_size(1, 2);
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * @param ... One or two parameter indexes, separated by a comma
+ *
+ * @see <a href="https://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gcc/Common-Function-Attributes.html#index-g_t_0040code_007balloc_005fsize_007d-function-attribute-3220">Function attribute `alloc_size` in GCC's documentation</a>
+ */
+
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(4,3)
+    #define av_alloc_size(...) __attribute__((alloc_size(__VA_ARGS__)))
+#else
+    #define av_alloc_size(...)
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_mem_funcs Heap Management
+ * Functions responsible for allocating, freeing, and copying memory.
+ *
+ * All memory allocation functions have a built-in upper limit of `INT_MAX`
+ * bytes. This may be changed with av_max_alloc(), although exercise extreme
+ * caution when doing so.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a memory block with alignment suitable for all memory accesses
+ * (including vectors if available on the CPU).
+ *
+ * @param size Size in bytes for the memory block to be allocated
+ * @return Pointer to the allocated block, or `NULL` if the block cannot
+ *         be allocated
+ * @see av_mallocz()
+ */
+void *av_malloc(size_t size) av_malloc_attrib av_alloc_size(1);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a memory block with alignment suitable for all memory accesses
+ * (including vectors if available on the CPU) and zero all the bytes of the
+ * block.
+ *
+ * @param size Size in bytes for the memory block to be allocated
+ * @return Pointer to the allocated block, or `NULL` if it cannot be allocated
+ * @see av_malloc()
+ */
+void *av_mallocz(size_t size) av_malloc_attrib av_alloc_size(1);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a memory block for an array with av_malloc().
+ *
+ * The allocated memory will have size `size * nmemb` bytes.
+ *
+ * @param nmemb Number of element
+ * @param size  Size of a single element
+ * @return Pointer to the allocated block, or `NULL` if the block cannot
+ *         be allocated
+ * @see av_malloc()
+ */
+av_alloc_size(1, 2) void *av_malloc_array(size_t nmemb, size_t size);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a memory block for an array with av_mallocz().
+ *
+ * The allocated memory will have size `size * nmemb` bytes.
+ *
+ * @param nmemb Number of elements
+ * @param size  Size of the single element
+ * @return Pointer to the allocated block, or `NULL` if the block cannot
+ *         be allocated
+ *
+ * @see av_mallocz()
+ * @see av_malloc_array()
+ */
+void *av_calloc(size_t nmemb, size_t size) av_malloc_attrib av_alloc_size(1, 2);
+
+#if FF_API_AV_MALLOCZ_ARRAY
+/**
+ * @deprecated use av_calloc()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+void *av_mallocz_array(size_t nmemb, size_t size) av_malloc_attrib av_alloc_size(1, 2);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Allocate, reallocate, or free a block of memory.
+ *
+ * If `ptr` is `NULL` and `size` > 0, allocate a new block. Otherwise, expand or
+ * shrink that block of memory according to `size`.
+ *
+ * @param ptr  Pointer to a memory block already allocated with
+ *             av_realloc() or `NULL`
+ * @param size Size in bytes of the memory block to be allocated or
+ *             reallocated
+ *
+ * @return Pointer to a newly-reallocated block or `NULL` if the block
+ *         cannot be reallocated
+ *
+ * @warning Unlike av_malloc(), the returned pointer is not guaranteed to be
+ *          correctly aligned. The returned pointer must be freed after even
+ *          if size is zero.
+ * @see av_fast_realloc()
+ * @see av_reallocp()
+ */
+void *av_realloc(void *ptr, size_t size) av_alloc_size(2);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate, reallocate, or free a block of memory through a pointer to a
+ * pointer.
+ *
+ * If `*ptr` is `NULL` and `size` > 0, allocate a new block. If `size` is
+ * zero, free the memory block pointed to by `*ptr`. Otherwise, expand or
+ * shrink that block of memory according to `size`.
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] ptr  Pointer to a pointer to a memory block already allocated
+ *                     with av_realloc(), or a pointer to `NULL`. The pointer
+ *                     is updated on success, or freed on failure.
+ * @param[in]     size Size in bytes for the memory block to be allocated or
+ *                     reallocated
+ *
+ * @return Zero on success, an AVERROR error code on failure
+ *
+ * @warning Unlike av_malloc(), the allocated memory is not guaranteed to be
+ *          correctly aligned.
+ */
+av_warn_unused_result
+int av_reallocp(void *ptr, size_t size);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate, reallocate, or free a block of memory.
+ *
+ * This function does the same thing as av_realloc(), except:
+ * - It takes two size arguments and allocates `nelem * elsize` bytes,
+ *   after checking the result of the multiplication for integer overflow.
+ * - It frees the input block in case of failure, thus avoiding the memory
+ *   leak with the classic
+ *   @code{.c}
+ *   buf = realloc(buf);
+ *   if (!buf)
+ *       return -1;
+ *   @endcode
+ *   pattern.
+ */
+void *av_realloc_f(void *ptr, size_t nelem, size_t elsize);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate, reallocate, or free an array.
+ *
+ * If `ptr` is `NULL` and `nmemb` > 0, allocate a new block.
+ *
+ * @param ptr   Pointer to a memory block already allocated with
+ *              av_realloc() or `NULL`
+ * @param nmemb Number of elements in the array
+ * @param size  Size of the single element of the array
+ *
+ * @return Pointer to a newly-reallocated block or NULL if the block
+ *         cannot be reallocated
+ *
+ * @warning Unlike av_malloc(), the allocated memory is not guaranteed to be
+ *          correctly aligned. The returned pointer must be freed after even if
+ *          nmemb is zero.
+ * @see av_reallocp_array()
+ */
+av_alloc_size(2, 3) void *av_realloc_array(void *ptr, size_t nmemb, size_t size);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate, reallocate an array through a pointer to a pointer.
+ *
+ * If `*ptr` is `NULL` and `nmemb` > 0, allocate a new block.
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] ptr   Pointer to a pointer to a memory block already
+ *                      allocated with av_realloc(), or a pointer to `NULL`.
+ *                      The pointer is updated on success, or freed on failure.
+ * @param[in]     nmemb Number of elements
+ * @param[in]     size  Size of the single element
+ *
+ * @return Zero on success, an AVERROR error code on failure
+ *
+ * @warning Unlike av_malloc(), the allocated memory is not guaranteed to be
+ *          correctly aligned. *ptr must be freed after even if nmemb is zero.
+ */
+int av_reallocp_array(void *ptr, size_t nmemb, size_t size);
+
+/**
+ * Reallocate the given buffer if it is not large enough, otherwise do nothing.
+ *
+ * If the given buffer is `NULL`, then a new uninitialized buffer is allocated.
+ *
+ * If the given buffer is not large enough, and reallocation fails, `NULL` is
+ * returned and `*size` is set to 0, but the original buffer is not changed or
+ * freed.
+ *
+ * A typical use pattern follows:
+ *
+ * @code{.c}
+ * uint8_t *buf = ...;
+ * uint8_t *new_buf = av_fast_realloc(buf, &current_size, size_needed);
+ * if (!new_buf) {
+ *     // Allocation failed; clean up original buffer
+ *     av_freep(&buf);
+ *     return AVERROR(ENOMEM);
+ * }
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] ptr      Already allocated buffer, or `NULL`
+ * @param[in,out] size     Pointer to the size of buffer `ptr`. `*size` is
+ *                         updated to the new allocated size, in particular 0
+ *                         in case of failure.
+ * @param[in]     min_size Desired minimal size of buffer `ptr`
+ * @return `ptr` if the buffer is large enough, a pointer to newly reallocated
+ *         buffer if the buffer was not large enough, or `NULL` in case of
+ *         error
+ * @see av_realloc()
+ * @see av_fast_malloc()
+ */
+void *av_fast_realloc(void *ptr, unsigned int *size, size_t min_size);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a buffer, reusing the given one if large enough.
+ *
+ * Contrary to av_fast_realloc(), the current buffer contents might not be
+ * preserved and on error the old buffer is freed, thus no special handling to
+ * avoid memleaks is necessary.
+ *
+ * `*ptr` is allowed to be `NULL`, in which case allocation always happens if
+ * `size_needed` is greater than 0.
+ *
+ * @code{.c}
+ * uint8_t *buf = ...;
+ * av_fast_malloc(&buf, &current_size, size_needed);
+ * if (!buf) {
+ *     // Allocation failed; buf already freed
+ *     return AVERROR(ENOMEM);
+ * }
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] ptr      Pointer to pointer to an already allocated buffer.
+ *                         `*ptr` will be overwritten with pointer to new
+ *                         buffer on success or `NULL` on failure
+ * @param[in,out] size     Pointer to the size of buffer `*ptr`. `*size` is
+ *                         updated to the new allocated size, in particular 0
+ *                         in case of failure.
+ * @param[in]     min_size Desired minimal size of buffer `*ptr`
+ * @see av_realloc()
+ * @see av_fast_mallocz()
+ */
+void av_fast_malloc(void *ptr, unsigned int *size, size_t min_size);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate and clear a buffer, reusing the given one if large enough.
+ *
+ * Like av_fast_malloc(), but all newly allocated space is initially cleared.
+ * Reused buffer is not cleared.
+ *
+ * `*ptr` is allowed to be `NULL`, in which case allocation always happens if
+ * `size_needed` is greater than 0.
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] ptr      Pointer to pointer to an already allocated buffer.
+ *                         `*ptr` will be overwritten with pointer to new
+ *                         buffer on success or `NULL` on failure
+ * @param[in,out] size     Pointer to the size of buffer `*ptr`. `*size` is
+ *                         updated to the new allocated size, in particular 0
+ *                         in case of failure.
+ * @param[in]     min_size Desired minimal size of buffer `*ptr`
+ * @see av_fast_malloc()
+ */
+void av_fast_mallocz(void *ptr, unsigned int *size, size_t min_size);
+
+/**
+ * Free a memory block which has been allocated with a function of av_malloc()
+ * or av_realloc() family.
+ *
+ * @param ptr Pointer to the memory block which should be freed.
+ *
+ * @note `ptr = NULL` is explicitly allowed.
+ * @note It is recommended that you use av_freep() instead, to prevent leaving
+ *       behind dangling pointers.
+ * @see av_freep()
+ */
+void av_free(void *ptr);
+
+/**
+ * Free a memory block which has been allocated with a function of av_malloc()
+ * or av_realloc() family, and set the pointer pointing to it to `NULL`.
+ *
+ * @code{.c}
+ * uint8_t *buf = av_malloc(16);
+ * av_free(buf);
+ * // buf now contains a dangling pointer to freed memory, and accidental
+ * // dereference of buf will result in a use-after-free, which may be a
+ * // security risk.
+ *
+ * uint8_t *buf = av_malloc(16);
+ * av_freep(&buf);
+ * // buf is now NULL, and accidental dereference will only result in a
+ * // NULL-pointer dereference.
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * @param ptr Pointer to the pointer to the memory block which should be freed
+ * @note `*ptr = NULL` is safe and leads to no action.
+ * @see av_free()
+ */
+void av_freep(void *ptr);
+
+/**
+ * Duplicate a string.
+ *
+ * @param s String to be duplicated
+ * @return Pointer to a newly-allocated string containing a
+ *         copy of `s` or `NULL` if the string cannot be allocated
+ * @see av_strndup()
+ */
+char *av_strdup(const char *s) av_malloc_attrib;
+
+/**
+ * Duplicate a substring of a string.
+ *
+ * @param s   String to be duplicated
+ * @param len Maximum length of the resulting string (not counting the
+ *            terminating byte)
+ * @return Pointer to a newly-allocated string containing a
+ *         substring of `s` or `NULL` if the string cannot be allocated
+ */
+char *av_strndup(const char *s, size_t len) av_malloc_attrib;
+
+/**
+ * Duplicate a buffer with av_malloc().
+ *
+ * @param p    Buffer to be duplicated
+ * @param size Size in bytes of the buffer copied
+ * @return Pointer to a newly allocated buffer containing a
+ *         copy of `p` or `NULL` if the buffer cannot be allocated
+ */
+void *av_memdup(const void *p, size_t size);
+
+/**
+ * Overlapping memcpy() implementation.
+ *
+ * @param dst  Destination buffer
+ * @param back Number of bytes back to start copying (i.e. the initial size of
+ *             the overlapping window); must be > 0
+ * @param cnt  Number of bytes to copy; must be >= 0
+ *
+ * @note `cnt > back` is valid, this will copy the bytes we just copied,
+ *       thus creating a repeating pattern with a period length of `back`.
+ */
+void av_memcpy_backptr(uint8_t *dst, int back, int cnt);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_mem_dynarray Dynamic Array
+ *
+ * Utilities to make an array grow when needed.
+ *
+ * Sometimes, the programmer would want to have an array that can grow when
+ * needed. The libavutil dynamic array utilities fill that need.
+ *
+ * libavutil supports two systems of appending elements onto a dynamically
+ * allocated array, the first one storing the pointer to the value in the
+ * array, and the second storing the value directly. In both systems, the
+ * caller is responsible for maintaining a variable containing the length of
+ * the array, as well as freeing of the array after use.
+ *
+ * The first system stores pointers to values in a block of dynamically
+ * allocated memory. Since only pointers are stored, the function does not need
+ * to know the size of the type. Both av_dynarray_add() and
+ * av_dynarray_add_nofree() implement this system.
+ *
+ * @code
+ * type **array = NULL; //< an array of pointers to values
+ * int    nb    = 0;    //< a variable to keep track of the length of the array
+ *
+ * type to_be_added  = ...;
+ * type to_be_added2 = ...;
+ *
+ * av_dynarray_add(&array, &nb, &to_be_added);
+ * if (nb == 0)
+ *     return AVERROR(ENOMEM);
+ *
+ * av_dynarray_add(&array, &nb, &to_be_added2);
+ * if (nb == 0)
+ *     return AVERROR(ENOMEM);
+ *
+ * // Now:
+ * //  nb           == 2
+ * // &to_be_added  == array[0]
+ * // &to_be_added2 == array[1]
+ *
+ * av_freep(&array);
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * The second system stores the value directly in a block of memory. As a
+ * result, the function has to know the size of the type. av_dynarray2_add()
+ * implements this mechanism.
+ *
+ * @code
+ * type *array = NULL; //< an array of values
+ * int   nb    = 0;    //< a variable to keep track of the length of the array
+ *
+ * type to_be_added  = ...;
+ * type to_be_added2 = ...;
+ *
+ * type *addr = av_dynarray2_add((void **)&array, &nb, sizeof(*array), NULL);
+ * if (!addr)
+ *     return AVERROR(ENOMEM);
+ * memcpy(addr, &to_be_added, sizeof(to_be_added));
+ *
+ * // Shortcut of the above.
+ * type *addr = av_dynarray2_add((void **)&array, &nb, sizeof(*array),
+ *                               (const void *)&to_be_added2);
+ * if (!addr)
+ *     return AVERROR(ENOMEM);
+ *
+ * // Now:
+ * //  nb           == 2
+ * //  to_be_added  == array[0]
+ * //  to_be_added2 == array[1]
+ *
+ * av_freep(&array);
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Add the pointer to an element to a dynamic array.
+ *
+ * The array to grow is supposed to be an array of pointers to
+ * structures, and the element to add must be a pointer to an already
+ * allocated structure.
+ *
+ * The array is reallocated when its size reaches powers of 2.
+ * Therefore, the amortized cost of adding an element is constant.
+ *
+ * In case of success, the pointer to the array is updated in order to
+ * point to the new grown array, and the number pointed to by `nb_ptr`
+ * is incremented.
+ * In case of failure, the array is freed, `*tab_ptr` is set to `NULL` and
+ * `*nb_ptr` is set to 0.
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] tab_ptr Pointer to the array to grow
+ * @param[in,out] nb_ptr  Pointer to the number of elements in the array
+ * @param[in]     elem    Element to add
+ * @see av_dynarray_add_nofree(), av_dynarray2_add()
+ */
+void av_dynarray_add(void *tab_ptr, int *nb_ptr, void *elem);
+
+/**
+ * Add an element to a dynamic array.
+ *
+ * Function has the same functionality as av_dynarray_add(),
+ * but it doesn't free memory on fails. It returns error code
+ * instead and leave current buffer untouched.
+ *
+ * @return >=0 on success, negative otherwise
+ * @see av_dynarray_add(), av_dynarray2_add()
+ */
+av_warn_unused_result
+int av_dynarray_add_nofree(void *tab_ptr, int *nb_ptr, void *elem);
+
+/**
+ * Add an element of size `elem_size` to a dynamic array.
+ *
+ * The array is reallocated when its number of elements reaches powers of 2.
+ * Therefore, the amortized cost of adding an element is constant.
+ *
+ * In case of success, the pointer to the array is updated in order to
+ * point to the new grown array, and the number pointed to by `nb_ptr`
+ * is incremented.
+ * In case of failure, the array is freed, `*tab_ptr` is set to `NULL` and
+ * `*nb_ptr` is set to 0.
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] tab_ptr   Pointer to the array to grow
+ * @param[in,out] nb_ptr    Pointer to the number of elements in the array
+ * @param[in]     elem_size Size in bytes of an element in the array
+ * @param[in]     elem_data Pointer to the data of the element to add. If
+ *                          `NULL`, the space of the newly added element is
+ *                          allocated but left uninitialized.
+ *
+ * @return Pointer to the data of the element to copy in the newly allocated
+ *         space
+ * @see av_dynarray_add(), av_dynarray_add_nofree()
+ */
+void *av_dynarray2_add(void **tab_ptr, int *nb_ptr, size_t elem_size,
+                       const uint8_t *elem_data);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_mem_misc Miscellaneous Functions
+ *
+ * Other functions related to memory allocation.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Multiply two `size_t` values checking for overflow.
+ *
+ * @param[in]  a   Operand of multiplication
+ * @param[in]  b   Operand of multiplication
+ * @param[out] r   Pointer to the result of the operation
+ * @return 0 on success, AVERROR(EINVAL) on overflow
+ */
+int av_size_mult(size_t a, size_t b, size_t *r);
+
+/**
+ * Set the maximum size that may be allocated in one block.
+ *
+ * The value specified with this function is effective for all libavutil's @ref
+ * lavu_mem_funcs "heap management functions."
+ *
+ * By default, the max value is defined as `INT_MAX`.
+ *
+ * @param max Value to be set as the new maximum size
+ *
+ * @warning Exercise extreme caution when using this function. Don't touch
+ *          this if you do not understand the full consequence of doing so.
+ */
+void av_max_alloc(size_t max);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_MEM_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/motion_vector.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/motion_vector.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ec29556
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/motion_vector.h
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_MOTION_VECTOR_H
+#define AVUTIL_MOTION_VECTOR_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+typedef struct AVMotionVector {
+    /**
+     * Where the current macroblock comes from; negative value when it comes
+     * from the past, positive value when it comes from the future.
+     * XXX: set exact relative ref frame reference instead of a +/- 1 "direction".
+     */
+    int32_t source;
+    /**
+     * Width and height of the block.
+     */
+    uint8_t w, h;
+    /**
+     * Absolute source position. Can be outside the frame area.
+     */
+    int16_t src_x, src_y;
+    /**
+     * Absolute destination position. Can be outside the frame area.
+     */
+    int16_t dst_x, dst_y;
+    /**
+     * Extra flag information.
+     * Currently unused.
+     */
+    uint64_t flags;
+    /**
+     * Motion vector
+     * src_x = dst_x + motion_x / motion_scale
+     * src_y = dst_y + motion_y / motion_scale
+     */
+    int32_t motion_x, motion_y;
+    uint16_t motion_scale;
+} AVMotionVector;
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_MOTION_VECTOR_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/murmur3.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/murmur3.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d90bc2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/murmur3.h
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (C) 2013 Reimar Döffinger <Reimar.Doeffinger@gmx.de>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavu_murmur3
+ * Public header for MurmurHash3 hash function implementation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_MURMUR3_H
+#define AVUTIL_MURMUR3_H
+
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_murmur3 Murmur3
+ * @ingroup lavu_hash
+ * MurmurHash3 hash function implementation.
+ *
+ * MurmurHash3 is a non-cryptographic hash function, of which three
+ * incompatible versions were created by its inventor Austin Appleby:
+ *
+ * - 32-bit output
+ * - 128-bit output for 32-bit platforms
+ * - 128-bit output for 64-bit platforms
+ *
+ * FFmpeg only implements the last variant: 128-bit output designed for 64-bit
+ * platforms. Even though the hash function was designed for 64-bit platforms,
+ * the function in reality works on 32-bit systems too, only with reduced
+ * performance.
+ *
+ * @anchor lavu_murmur3_seedinfo
+ * By design, MurmurHash3 requires a seed to operate. In response to this,
+ * libavutil provides two functions for hash initiation, one that requires a
+ * seed (av_murmur3_init_seeded()) and one that uses a fixed arbitrary integer
+ * as the seed, and therefore does not (av_murmur3_init()).
+ *
+ * To make hashes comparable, you should provide the same seed for all calls to
+ * this hash function -- if you are supplying one yourself, that is.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVMurMur3 hash context.
+ *
+ * @return Uninitialized hash context or `NULL` in case of error
+ */
+struct AVMurMur3 *av_murmur3_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize or reinitialize an AVMurMur3 hash context with a seed.
+ *
+ * @param[out] c    Hash context
+ * @param[in]  seed Random seed
+ *
+ * @see av_murmur3_init()
+ * @see @ref lavu_murmur3_seedinfo "Detailed description" on a discussion of
+ * seeds for MurmurHash3.
+ */
+void av_murmur3_init_seeded(struct AVMurMur3 *c, uint64_t seed);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize or reinitialize an AVMurMur3 hash context.
+ *
+ * Equivalent to av_murmur3_init_seeded() with a built-in seed.
+ *
+ * @param[out] c    Hash context
+ *
+ * @see av_murmur3_init_seeded()
+ * @see @ref lavu_murmur3_seedinfo "Detailed description" on a discussion of
+ * seeds for MurmurHash3.
+ */
+void av_murmur3_init(struct AVMurMur3 *c);
+
+/**
+ * Update hash context with new data.
+ *
+ * @param[out] c    Hash context
+ * @param[in]  src  Input data to update hash with
+ * @param[in]  len  Number of bytes to read from `src`
+ */
+void av_murmur3_update(struct AVMurMur3 *c, const uint8_t *src, size_t len);
+
+/**
+ * Finish hashing and output digest value.
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] c    Hash context
+ * @param[out]    dst  Buffer where output digest value is stored
+ */
+void av_murmur3_final(struct AVMurMur3 *c, uint8_t dst[16]);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_MURMUR3_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/opt.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/opt.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..461b5d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/opt.h
@@ -0,0 +1,891 @@
+/*
+ * AVOptions
+ * copyright (c) 2005 Michael Niedermayer <michaelni@gmx.at>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_OPT_H
+#define AVUTIL_OPT_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * AVOptions
+ */
+
+#include "rational.h"
+#include "avutil.h"
+#include "channel_layout.h"
+#include "dict.h"
+#include "log.h"
+#include "pixfmt.h"
+#include "samplefmt.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup avoptions AVOptions
+ * @ingroup lavu_data
+ * @{
+ * AVOptions provide a generic system to declare options on arbitrary structs
+ * ("objects"). An option can have a help text, a type and a range of possible
+ * values. Options may then be enumerated, read and written to.
+ *
+ * @section avoptions_implement Implementing AVOptions
+ * This section describes how to add AVOptions capabilities to a struct.
+ *
+ * All AVOptions-related information is stored in an AVClass. Therefore
+ * the first member of the struct should be a pointer to an AVClass describing it.
+ * The option field of the AVClass must be set to a NULL-terminated static array
+ * of AVOptions. Each AVOption must have a non-empty name, a type, a default
+ * value and for number-type AVOptions also a range of allowed values. It must
+ * also declare an offset in bytes from the start of the struct, where the field
+ * associated with this AVOption is located. Other fields in the AVOption struct
+ * should also be set when applicable, but are not required.
+ *
+ * The following example illustrates an AVOptions-enabled struct:
+ * @code
+ * typedef struct test_struct {
+ *     const AVClass *class;
+ *     int      int_opt;
+ *     char    *str_opt;
+ *     uint8_t *bin_opt;
+ *     int      bin_len;
+ * } test_struct;
+ *
+ * static const AVOption test_options[] = {
+ *   { "test_int", "This is a test option of int type.", offsetof(test_struct, int_opt),
+ *     AV_OPT_TYPE_INT, { .i64 = -1 }, INT_MIN, INT_MAX },
+ *   { "test_str", "This is a test option of string type.", offsetof(test_struct, str_opt),
+ *     AV_OPT_TYPE_STRING },
+ *   { "test_bin", "This is a test option of binary type.", offsetof(test_struct, bin_opt),
+ *     AV_OPT_TYPE_BINARY },
+ *   { NULL },
+ * };
+ *
+ * static const AVClass test_class = {
+ *     .class_name = "test class",
+ *     .item_name  = av_default_item_name,
+ *     .option     = test_options,
+ *     .version    = LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_INT,
+ * };
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * Next, when allocating your struct, you must ensure that the AVClass pointer
+ * is set to the correct value. Then, av_opt_set_defaults() can be called to
+ * initialize defaults. After that the struct is ready to be used with the
+ * AVOptions API.
+ *
+ * When cleaning up, you may use the av_opt_free() function to automatically
+ * free all the allocated string and binary options.
+ *
+ * Continuing with the above example:
+ *
+ * @code
+ * test_struct *alloc_test_struct(void)
+ * {
+ *     test_struct *ret = av_mallocz(sizeof(*ret));
+ *     ret->class = &test_class;
+ *     av_opt_set_defaults(ret);
+ *     return ret;
+ * }
+ * void free_test_struct(test_struct **foo)
+ * {
+ *     av_opt_free(*foo);
+ *     av_freep(foo);
+ * }
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * @subsection avoptions_implement_nesting Nesting
+ *      It may happen that an AVOptions-enabled struct contains another
+ *      AVOptions-enabled struct as a member (e.g. AVCodecContext in
+ *      libavcodec exports generic options, while its priv_data field exports
+ *      codec-specific options). In such a case, it is possible to set up the
+ *      parent struct to export a child's options. To do that, simply
+ *      implement AVClass.child_next() and AVClass.child_class_iterate() in the
+ *      parent struct's AVClass.
+ *      Assuming that the test_struct from above now also contains a
+ *      child_struct field:
+ *
+ *      @code
+ *      typedef struct child_struct {
+ *          AVClass *class;
+ *          int flags_opt;
+ *      } child_struct;
+ *      static const AVOption child_opts[] = {
+ *          { "test_flags", "This is a test option of flags type.",
+ *            offsetof(child_struct, flags_opt), AV_OPT_TYPE_FLAGS, { .i64 = 0 }, INT_MIN, INT_MAX },
+ *          { NULL },
+ *      };
+ *      static const AVClass child_class = {
+ *          .class_name = "child class",
+ *          .item_name  = av_default_item_name,
+ *          .option     = child_opts,
+ *          .version    = LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_INT,
+ *      };
+ *
+ *      void *child_next(void *obj, void *prev)
+ *      {
+ *          test_struct *t = obj;
+ *          if (!prev && t->child_struct)
+ *              return t->child_struct;
+ *          return NULL
+ *      }
+ *      const AVClass child_class_iterate(void **iter)
+ *      {
+ *          const AVClass *c = *iter ? NULL : &child_class;
+ *          *iter = (void*)(uintptr_t)c;
+ *          return c;
+ *      }
+ *      @endcode
+ *      Putting child_next() and child_class_iterate() as defined above into
+ *      test_class will now make child_struct's options accessible through
+ *      test_struct (again, proper setup as described above needs to be done on
+ *      child_struct right after it is created).
+ *
+ *      From the above example it might not be clear why both child_next()
+ *      and child_class_iterate() are needed. The distinction is that child_next()
+ *      iterates over actually existing objects, while child_class_iterate()
+ *      iterates over all possible child classes. E.g. if an AVCodecContext
+ *      was initialized to use a codec which has private options, then its
+ *      child_next() will return AVCodecContext.priv_data and finish
+ *      iterating. OTOH child_class_iterate() on AVCodecContext.av_class will
+ *      iterate over all available codecs with private options.
+ *
+ * @subsection avoptions_implement_named_constants Named constants
+ *      It is possible to create named constants for options. Simply set the unit
+ *      field of the option the constants should apply to a string and
+ *      create the constants themselves as options of type AV_OPT_TYPE_CONST
+ *      with their unit field set to the same string.
+ *      Their default_val field should contain the value of the named
+ *      constant.
+ *      For example, to add some named constants for the test_flags option
+ *      above, put the following into the child_opts array:
+ *      @code
+ *      { "test_flags", "This is a test option of flags type.",
+ *        offsetof(child_struct, flags_opt), AV_OPT_TYPE_FLAGS, { .i64 = 0 }, INT_MIN, INT_MAX, "test_unit" },
+ *      { "flag1", "This is a flag with value 16", 0, AV_OPT_TYPE_CONST, { .i64 = 16 }, 0, 0, "test_unit" },
+ *      @endcode
+ *
+ * @section avoptions_use Using AVOptions
+ * This section deals with accessing options in an AVOptions-enabled struct.
+ * Such structs in FFmpeg are e.g. AVCodecContext in libavcodec or
+ * AVFormatContext in libavformat.
+ *
+ * @subsection avoptions_use_examine Examining AVOptions
+ * The basic functions for examining options are av_opt_next(), which iterates
+ * over all options defined for one object, and av_opt_find(), which searches
+ * for an option with the given name.
+ *
+ * The situation is more complicated with nesting. An AVOptions-enabled struct
+ * may have AVOptions-enabled children. Passing the AV_OPT_SEARCH_CHILDREN flag
+ * to av_opt_find() will make the function search children recursively.
+ *
+ * For enumerating there are basically two cases. The first is when you want to
+ * get all options that may potentially exist on the struct and its children
+ * (e.g.  when constructing documentation). In that case you should call
+ * av_opt_child_class_iterate() recursively on the parent struct's AVClass.  The
+ * second case is when you have an already initialized struct with all its
+ * children and you want to get all options that can be actually written or read
+ * from it. In that case you should call av_opt_child_next() recursively (and
+ * av_opt_next() on each result).
+ *
+ * @subsection avoptions_use_get_set Reading and writing AVOptions
+ * When setting options, you often have a string read directly from the
+ * user. In such a case, simply passing it to av_opt_set() is enough. For
+ * non-string type options, av_opt_set() will parse the string according to the
+ * option type.
+ *
+ * Similarly av_opt_get() will read any option type and convert it to a string
+ * which will be returned. Do not forget that the string is allocated, so you
+ * have to free it with av_free().
+ *
+ * In some cases it may be more convenient to put all options into an
+ * AVDictionary and call av_opt_set_dict() on it. A specific case of this
+ * are the format/codec open functions in lavf/lavc which take a dictionary
+ * filled with option as a parameter. This makes it possible to set some options
+ * that cannot be set otherwise, since e.g. the input file format is not known
+ * before the file is actually opened.
+ */
+
+enum AVOptionType{
+    AV_OPT_TYPE_FLAGS,
+    AV_OPT_TYPE_INT,
+    AV_OPT_TYPE_INT64,
+    AV_OPT_TYPE_DOUBLE,
+    AV_OPT_TYPE_FLOAT,
+    AV_OPT_TYPE_STRING,
+    AV_OPT_TYPE_RATIONAL,
+    AV_OPT_TYPE_BINARY,  ///< offset must point to a pointer immediately followed by an int for the length
+    AV_OPT_TYPE_DICT,
+    AV_OPT_TYPE_UINT64,
+    AV_OPT_TYPE_CONST,
+    AV_OPT_TYPE_IMAGE_SIZE, ///< offset must point to two consecutive integers
+    AV_OPT_TYPE_PIXEL_FMT,
+    AV_OPT_TYPE_SAMPLE_FMT,
+    AV_OPT_TYPE_VIDEO_RATE, ///< offset must point to AVRational
+    AV_OPT_TYPE_DURATION,
+    AV_OPT_TYPE_COLOR,
+#if FF_API_OLD_CHANNEL_LAYOUT
+    AV_OPT_TYPE_CHANNEL_LAYOUT,
+#endif
+    AV_OPT_TYPE_BOOL,
+    AV_OPT_TYPE_CHLAYOUT,
+};
+
+/**
+ * AVOption
+ */
+typedef struct AVOption {
+    const char *name;
+
+    /**
+     * short English help text
+     * @todo What about other languages?
+     */
+    const char *help;
+
+    /**
+     * The offset relative to the context structure where the option
+     * value is stored. It should be 0 for named constants.
+     */
+    int offset;
+    enum AVOptionType type;
+
+    /**
+     * the default value for scalar options
+     */
+    union {
+        int64_t i64;
+        double dbl;
+        const char *str;
+        /* TODO those are unused now */
+        AVRational q;
+    } default_val;
+    double min;                 ///< minimum valid value for the option
+    double max;                 ///< maximum valid value for the option
+
+    int flags;
+#define AV_OPT_FLAG_ENCODING_PARAM  1   ///< a generic parameter which can be set by the user for muxing or encoding
+#define AV_OPT_FLAG_DECODING_PARAM  2   ///< a generic parameter which can be set by the user for demuxing or decoding
+#define AV_OPT_FLAG_AUDIO_PARAM     8
+#define AV_OPT_FLAG_VIDEO_PARAM     16
+#define AV_OPT_FLAG_SUBTITLE_PARAM  32
+/**
+ * The option is intended for exporting values to the caller.
+ */
+#define AV_OPT_FLAG_EXPORT          64
+/**
+ * The option may not be set through the AVOptions API, only read.
+ * This flag only makes sense when AV_OPT_FLAG_EXPORT is also set.
+ */
+#define AV_OPT_FLAG_READONLY        128
+#define AV_OPT_FLAG_BSF_PARAM       (1<<8) ///< a generic parameter which can be set by the user for bit stream filtering
+#define AV_OPT_FLAG_RUNTIME_PARAM   (1<<15) ///< a generic parameter which can be set by the user at runtime
+#define AV_OPT_FLAG_FILTERING_PARAM (1<<16) ///< a generic parameter which can be set by the user for filtering
+#define AV_OPT_FLAG_DEPRECATED      (1<<17) ///< set if option is deprecated, users should refer to AVOption.help text for more information
+#define AV_OPT_FLAG_CHILD_CONSTS    (1<<18) ///< set if option constants can also reside in child objects
+//FIXME think about enc-audio, ... style flags
+
+    /**
+     * The logical unit to which the option belongs. Non-constant
+     * options and corresponding named constants share the same
+     * unit. May be NULL.
+     */
+    const char *unit;
+} AVOption;
+
+/**
+ * A single allowed range of values, or a single allowed value.
+ */
+typedef struct AVOptionRange {
+    const char *str;
+    /**
+     * Value range.
+     * For string ranges this represents the min/max length.
+     * For dimensions this represents the min/max pixel count or width/height in multi-component case.
+     */
+    double value_min, value_max;
+    /**
+     * Value's component range.
+     * For string this represents the unicode range for chars, 0-127 limits to ASCII.
+     */
+    double component_min, component_max;
+    /**
+     * Range flag.
+     * If set to 1 the struct encodes a range, if set to 0 a single value.
+     */
+    int is_range;
+} AVOptionRange;
+
+/**
+ * List of AVOptionRange structs.
+ */
+typedef struct AVOptionRanges {
+    /**
+     * Array of option ranges.
+     *
+     * Most of option types use just one component.
+     * Following describes multi-component option types:
+     *
+     * AV_OPT_TYPE_IMAGE_SIZE:
+     * component index 0: range of pixel count (width * height).
+     * component index 1: range of width.
+     * component index 2: range of height.
+     *
+     * @note To obtain multi-component version of this structure, user must
+     *       provide AV_OPT_MULTI_COMPONENT_RANGE to av_opt_query_ranges or
+     *       av_opt_query_ranges_default function.
+     *
+     * Multi-component range can be read as in following example:
+     *
+     * @code
+     * int range_index, component_index;
+     * AVOptionRanges *ranges;
+     * AVOptionRange *range[3]; //may require more than 3 in the future.
+     * av_opt_query_ranges(&ranges, obj, key, AV_OPT_MULTI_COMPONENT_RANGE);
+     * for (range_index = 0; range_index < ranges->nb_ranges; range_index++) {
+     *     for (component_index = 0; component_index < ranges->nb_components; component_index++)
+     *         range[component_index] = ranges->range[ranges->nb_ranges * component_index + range_index];
+     *     //do something with range here.
+     * }
+     * av_opt_freep_ranges(&ranges);
+     * @endcode
+     */
+    AVOptionRange **range;
+    /**
+     * Number of ranges per component.
+     */
+    int nb_ranges;
+    /**
+     * Number of componentes.
+     */
+    int nb_components;
+} AVOptionRanges;
+
+/**
+ * Show the obj options.
+ *
+ * @param req_flags requested flags for the options to show. Show only the
+ * options for which it is opt->flags & req_flags.
+ * @param rej_flags rejected flags for the options to show. Show only the
+ * options for which it is !(opt->flags & req_flags).
+ * @param av_log_obj log context to use for showing the options
+ */
+int av_opt_show2(void *obj, void *av_log_obj, int req_flags, int rej_flags);
+
+/**
+ * Set the values of all AVOption fields to their default values.
+ *
+ * @param s an AVOption-enabled struct (its first member must be a pointer to AVClass)
+ */
+void av_opt_set_defaults(void *s);
+
+/**
+ * Set the values of all AVOption fields to their default values. Only these
+ * AVOption fields for which (opt->flags & mask) == flags will have their
+ * default applied to s.
+ *
+ * @param s an AVOption-enabled struct (its first member must be a pointer to AVClass)
+ * @param mask combination of AV_OPT_FLAG_*
+ * @param flags combination of AV_OPT_FLAG_*
+ */
+void av_opt_set_defaults2(void *s, int mask, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Parse the key/value pairs list in opts. For each key/value pair
+ * found, stores the value in the field in ctx that is named like the
+ * key. ctx must be an AVClass context, storing is done using
+ * AVOptions.
+ *
+ * @param opts options string to parse, may be NULL
+ * @param key_val_sep a 0-terminated list of characters used to
+ * separate key from value
+ * @param pairs_sep a 0-terminated list of characters used to separate
+ * two pairs from each other
+ * @return the number of successfully set key/value pairs, or a negative
+ * value corresponding to an AVERROR code in case of error:
+ * AVERROR(EINVAL) if opts cannot be parsed,
+ * the error code issued by av_opt_set() if a key/value pair
+ * cannot be set
+ */
+int av_set_options_string(void *ctx, const char *opts,
+                          const char *key_val_sep, const char *pairs_sep);
+
+/**
+ * Parse the key-value pairs list in opts. For each key=value pair found,
+ * set the value of the corresponding option in ctx.
+ *
+ * @param ctx          the AVClass object to set options on
+ * @param opts         the options string, key-value pairs separated by a
+ *                     delimiter
+ * @param shorthand    a NULL-terminated array of options names for shorthand
+ *                     notation: if the first field in opts has no key part,
+ *                     the key is taken from the first element of shorthand;
+ *                     then again for the second, etc., until either opts is
+ *                     finished, shorthand is finished or a named option is
+ *                     found; after that, all options must be named
+ * @param key_val_sep  a 0-terminated list of characters used to separate
+ *                     key from value, for example '='
+ * @param pairs_sep    a 0-terminated list of characters used to separate
+ *                     two pairs from each other, for example ':' or ','
+ * @return  the number of successfully set key=value pairs, or a negative
+ *          value corresponding to an AVERROR code in case of error:
+ *          AVERROR(EINVAL) if opts cannot be parsed,
+ *          the error code issued by av_set_string3() if a key/value pair
+ *          cannot be set
+ *
+ * Options names must use only the following characters: a-z A-Z 0-9 - . / _
+ * Separators must use characters distinct from option names and from each
+ * other.
+ */
+int av_opt_set_from_string(void *ctx, const char *opts,
+                           const char *const *shorthand,
+                           const char *key_val_sep, const char *pairs_sep);
+/**
+ * Free all allocated objects in obj.
+ */
+void av_opt_free(void *obj);
+
+/**
+ * Check whether a particular flag is set in a flags field.
+ *
+ * @param field_name the name of the flag field option
+ * @param flag_name the name of the flag to check
+ * @return non-zero if the flag is set, zero if the flag isn't set,
+ *         isn't of the right type, or the flags field doesn't exist.
+ */
+int av_opt_flag_is_set(void *obj, const char *field_name, const char *flag_name);
+
+/**
+ * Set all the options from a given dictionary on an object.
+ *
+ * @param obj a struct whose first element is a pointer to AVClass
+ * @param options options to process. This dictionary will be freed and replaced
+ *                by a new one containing all options not found in obj.
+ *                Of course this new dictionary needs to be freed by caller
+ *                with av_dict_free().
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR if some option was found in obj,
+ *         but could not be set.
+ *
+ * @see av_dict_copy()
+ */
+int av_opt_set_dict(void *obj, struct AVDictionary **options);
+
+
+/**
+ * Set all the options from a given dictionary on an object.
+ *
+ * @param obj a struct whose first element is a pointer to AVClass
+ * @param options options to process. This dictionary will be freed and replaced
+ *                by a new one containing all options not found in obj.
+ *                Of course this new dictionary needs to be freed by caller
+ *                with av_dict_free().
+ * @param search_flags A combination of AV_OPT_SEARCH_*.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR if some option was found in obj,
+ *         but could not be set.
+ *
+ * @see av_dict_copy()
+ */
+int av_opt_set_dict2(void *obj, struct AVDictionary **options, int search_flags);
+
+/**
+ * Extract a key-value pair from the beginning of a string.
+ *
+ * @param ropts        pointer to the options string, will be updated to
+ *                     point to the rest of the string (one of the pairs_sep
+ *                     or the final NUL)
+ * @param key_val_sep  a 0-terminated list of characters used to separate
+ *                     key from value, for example '='
+ * @param pairs_sep    a 0-terminated list of characters used to separate
+ *                     two pairs from each other, for example ':' or ','
+ * @param flags        flags; see the AV_OPT_FLAG_* values below
+ * @param rkey         parsed key; must be freed using av_free()
+ * @param rval         parsed value; must be freed using av_free()
+ *
+ * @return  >=0 for success, or a negative value corresponding to an
+ *          AVERROR code in case of error; in particular:
+ *          AVERROR(EINVAL) if no key is present
+ *
+ */
+int av_opt_get_key_value(const char **ropts,
+                         const char *key_val_sep, const char *pairs_sep,
+                         unsigned flags,
+                         char **rkey, char **rval);
+
+enum {
+
+    /**
+     * Accept to parse a value without a key; the key will then be returned
+     * as NULL.
+     */
+    AV_OPT_FLAG_IMPLICIT_KEY = 1,
+};
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup opt_eval_funcs Evaluating option strings
+ * @{
+ * This group of functions can be used to evaluate option strings
+ * and get numbers out of them. They do the same thing as av_opt_set(),
+ * except the result is written into the caller-supplied pointer.
+ *
+ * @param obj a struct whose first element is a pointer to AVClass.
+ * @param o an option for which the string is to be evaluated.
+ * @param val string to be evaluated.
+ * @param *_out value of the string will be written here.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative number on failure.
+ */
+int av_opt_eval_flags (void *obj, const AVOption *o, const char *val, int        *flags_out);
+int av_opt_eval_int   (void *obj, const AVOption *o, const char *val, int        *int_out);
+int av_opt_eval_int64 (void *obj, const AVOption *o, const char *val, int64_t    *int64_out);
+int av_opt_eval_float (void *obj, const AVOption *o, const char *val, float      *float_out);
+int av_opt_eval_double(void *obj, const AVOption *o, const char *val, double     *double_out);
+int av_opt_eval_q     (void *obj, const AVOption *o, const char *val, AVRational *q_out);
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#define AV_OPT_SEARCH_CHILDREN   (1 << 0) /**< Search in possible children of the
+                                               given object first. */
+/**
+ *  The obj passed to av_opt_find() is fake -- only a double pointer to AVClass
+ *  instead of a required pointer to a struct containing AVClass. This is
+ *  useful for searching for options without needing to allocate the corresponding
+ *  object.
+ */
+#define AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ   (1 << 1)
+
+/**
+ *  In av_opt_get, return NULL if the option has a pointer type and is set to NULL,
+ *  rather than returning an empty string.
+ */
+#define AV_OPT_ALLOW_NULL (1 << 2)
+
+/**
+ *  Allows av_opt_query_ranges and av_opt_query_ranges_default to return more than
+ *  one component for certain option types.
+ *  @see AVOptionRanges for details.
+ */
+#define AV_OPT_MULTI_COMPONENT_RANGE (1 << 12)
+
+/**
+ * Look for an option in an object. Consider only options which
+ * have all the specified flags set.
+ *
+ * @param[in] obj A pointer to a struct whose first element is a
+ *                pointer to an AVClass.
+ *                Alternatively a double pointer to an AVClass, if
+ *                AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ search flag is set.
+ * @param[in] name The name of the option to look for.
+ * @param[in] unit When searching for named constants, name of the unit
+ *                 it belongs to.
+ * @param opt_flags Find only options with all the specified flags set (AV_OPT_FLAG).
+ * @param search_flags A combination of AV_OPT_SEARCH_*.
+ *
+ * @return A pointer to the option found, or NULL if no option
+ *         was found.
+ *
+ * @note Options found with AV_OPT_SEARCH_CHILDREN flag may not be settable
+ * directly with av_opt_set(). Use special calls which take an options
+ * AVDictionary (e.g. avformat_open_input()) to set options found with this
+ * flag.
+ */
+const AVOption *av_opt_find(void *obj, const char *name, const char *unit,
+                            int opt_flags, int search_flags);
+
+/**
+ * Look for an option in an object. Consider only options which
+ * have all the specified flags set.
+ *
+ * @param[in] obj A pointer to a struct whose first element is a
+ *                pointer to an AVClass.
+ *                Alternatively a double pointer to an AVClass, if
+ *                AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ search flag is set.
+ * @param[in] name The name of the option to look for.
+ * @param[in] unit When searching for named constants, name of the unit
+ *                 it belongs to.
+ * @param opt_flags Find only options with all the specified flags set (AV_OPT_FLAG).
+ * @param search_flags A combination of AV_OPT_SEARCH_*.
+ * @param[out] target_obj if non-NULL, an object to which the option belongs will be
+ * written here. It may be different from obj if AV_OPT_SEARCH_CHILDREN is present
+ * in search_flags. This parameter is ignored if search_flags contain
+ * AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ.
+ *
+ * @return A pointer to the option found, or NULL if no option
+ *         was found.
+ */
+const AVOption *av_opt_find2(void *obj, const char *name, const char *unit,
+                             int opt_flags, int search_flags, void **target_obj);
+
+/**
+ * Iterate over all AVOptions belonging to obj.
+ *
+ * @param obj an AVOptions-enabled struct or a double pointer to an
+ *            AVClass describing it.
+ * @param prev result of the previous call to av_opt_next() on this object
+ *             or NULL
+ * @return next AVOption or NULL
+ */
+const AVOption *av_opt_next(const void *obj, const AVOption *prev);
+
+/**
+ * Iterate over AVOptions-enabled children of obj.
+ *
+ * @param prev result of a previous call to this function or NULL
+ * @return next AVOptions-enabled child or NULL
+ */
+void *av_opt_child_next(void *obj, void *prev);
+
+/**
+ * Iterate over potential AVOptions-enabled children of parent.
+ *
+ * @param iter a pointer where iteration state is stored.
+ * @return AVClass corresponding to next potential child or NULL
+ */
+const AVClass *av_opt_child_class_iterate(const AVClass *parent, void **iter);
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup opt_set_funcs Option setting functions
+ * @{
+ * Those functions set the field of obj with the given name to value.
+ *
+ * @param[in] obj A struct whose first element is a pointer to an AVClass.
+ * @param[in] name the name of the field to set
+ * @param[in] val The value to set. In case of av_opt_set() if the field is not
+ * of a string type, then the given string is parsed.
+ * SI postfixes and some named scalars are supported.
+ * If the field is of a numeric type, it has to be a numeric or named
+ * scalar. Behavior with more than one scalar and +- infix operators
+ * is undefined.
+ * If the field is of a flags type, it has to be a sequence of numeric
+ * scalars or named flags separated by '+' or '-'. Prefixing a flag
+ * with '+' causes it to be set without affecting the other flags;
+ * similarly, '-' unsets a flag.
+ * If the field is of a dictionary type, it has to be a ':' separated list of
+ * key=value parameters. Values containing ':' special characters must be
+ * escaped.
+ * @param search_flags flags passed to av_opt_find2. I.e. if AV_OPT_SEARCH_CHILDREN
+ * is passed here, then the option may be set on a child of obj.
+ *
+ * @return 0 if the value has been set, or an AVERROR code in case of
+ * error:
+ * AVERROR_OPTION_NOT_FOUND if no matching option exists
+ * AVERROR(ERANGE) if the value is out of range
+ * AVERROR(EINVAL) if the value is not valid
+ */
+int av_opt_set         (void *obj, const char *name, const char *val, int search_flags);
+int av_opt_set_int     (void *obj, const char *name, int64_t     val, int search_flags);
+int av_opt_set_double  (void *obj, const char *name, double      val, int search_flags);
+int av_opt_set_q       (void *obj, const char *name, AVRational  val, int search_flags);
+int av_opt_set_bin     (void *obj, const char *name, const uint8_t *val, int size, int search_flags);
+int av_opt_set_image_size(void *obj, const char *name, int w, int h, int search_flags);
+int av_opt_set_pixel_fmt (void *obj, const char *name, enum AVPixelFormat fmt, int search_flags);
+int av_opt_set_sample_fmt(void *obj, const char *name, enum AVSampleFormat fmt, int search_flags);
+int av_opt_set_video_rate(void *obj, const char *name, AVRational val, int search_flags);
+#if FF_API_OLD_CHANNEL_LAYOUT
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_opt_set_channel_layout(void *obj, const char *name, int64_t ch_layout, int search_flags);
+#endif
+int av_opt_set_chlayout(void *obj, const char *name, const AVChannelLayout *layout, int search_flags);
+/**
+ * @note Any old dictionary present is discarded and replaced with a copy of the new one. The
+ * caller still owns val is and responsible for freeing it.
+ */
+int av_opt_set_dict_val(void *obj, const char *name, const AVDictionary *val, int search_flags);
+
+/**
+ * Set a binary option to an integer list.
+ *
+ * @param obj    AVClass object to set options on
+ * @param name   name of the binary option
+ * @param val    pointer to an integer list (must have the correct type with
+ *               regard to the contents of the list)
+ * @param term   list terminator (usually 0 or -1)
+ * @param flags  search flags
+ */
+#define av_opt_set_int_list(obj, name, val, term, flags) \
+    (av_int_list_length(val, term) > INT_MAX / sizeof(*(val)) ? \
+     AVERROR(EINVAL) : \
+     av_opt_set_bin(obj, name, (const uint8_t *)(val), \
+                    av_int_list_length(val, term) * sizeof(*(val)), flags))
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup opt_get_funcs Option getting functions
+ * @{
+ * Those functions get a value of the option with the given name from an object.
+ *
+ * @param[in] obj a struct whose first element is a pointer to an AVClass.
+ * @param[in] name name of the option to get.
+ * @param[in] search_flags flags passed to av_opt_find2. I.e. if AV_OPT_SEARCH_CHILDREN
+ * is passed here, then the option may be found in a child of obj.
+ * @param[out] out_val value of the option will be written here
+ * @return >=0 on success, a negative error code otherwise
+ */
+/**
+ * @note the returned string will be av_malloc()ed and must be av_free()ed by the caller
+ *
+ * @note if AV_OPT_ALLOW_NULL is set in search_flags in av_opt_get, and the
+ * option is of type AV_OPT_TYPE_STRING, AV_OPT_TYPE_BINARY or AV_OPT_TYPE_DICT
+ * and is set to NULL, *out_val will be set to NULL instead of an allocated
+ * empty string.
+ */
+int av_opt_get         (void *obj, const char *name, int search_flags, uint8_t   **out_val);
+int av_opt_get_int     (void *obj, const char *name, int search_flags, int64_t    *out_val);
+int av_opt_get_double  (void *obj, const char *name, int search_flags, double     *out_val);
+int av_opt_get_q       (void *obj, const char *name, int search_flags, AVRational *out_val);
+int av_opt_get_image_size(void *obj, const char *name, int search_flags, int *w_out, int *h_out);
+int av_opt_get_pixel_fmt (void *obj, const char *name, int search_flags, enum AVPixelFormat *out_fmt);
+int av_opt_get_sample_fmt(void *obj, const char *name, int search_flags, enum AVSampleFormat *out_fmt);
+int av_opt_get_video_rate(void *obj, const char *name, int search_flags, AVRational *out_val);
+#if FF_API_OLD_CHANNEL_LAYOUT
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_opt_get_channel_layout(void *obj, const char *name, int search_flags, int64_t *ch_layout);
+#endif
+int av_opt_get_chlayout(void *obj, const char *name, int search_flags, AVChannelLayout *layout);
+/**
+ * @param[out] out_val The returned dictionary is a copy of the actual value and must
+ * be freed with av_dict_free() by the caller
+ */
+int av_opt_get_dict_val(void *obj, const char *name, int search_flags, AVDictionary **out_val);
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+/**
+ * Gets a pointer to the requested field in a struct.
+ * This function allows accessing a struct even when its fields are moved or
+ * renamed since the application making the access has been compiled,
+ *
+ * @returns a pointer to the field, it can be cast to the correct type and read
+ *          or written to.
+ */
+void *av_opt_ptr(const AVClass *avclass, void *obj, const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * Free an AVOptionRanges struct and set it to NULL.
+ */
+void av_opt_freep_ranges(AVOptionRanges **ranges);
+
+/**
+ * Get a list of allowed ranges for the given option.
+ *
+ * The returned list may depend on other fields in obj like for example profile.
+ *
+ * @param flags is a bitmask of flags, undefined flags should not be set and should be ignored
+ *              AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ indicates that the obj is a double pointer to a AVClass instead of a full instance
+ *              AV_OPT_MULTI_COMPONENT_RANGE indicates that function may return more than one component, @see AVOptionRanges
+ *
+ * The result must be freed with av_opt_freep_ranges.
+ *
+ * @return number of compontents returned on success, a negative errro code otherwise
+ */
+int av_opt_query_ranges(AVOptionRanges **, void *obj, const char *key, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Copy options from src object into dest object.
+ *
+ * The underlying AVClass of both src and dest must coincide. The guarantee
+ * below does not apply if this is not fulfilled.
+ *
+ * Options that require memory allocation (e.g. string or binary) are malloc'ed in dest object.
+ * Original memory allocated for such options is freed unless both src and dest options points to the same memory.
+ *
+ * Even on error it is guaranteed that allocated options from src and dest
+ * no longer alias each other afterwards; in particular calling av_opt_free()
+ * on both src and dest is safe afterwards if dest has been memdup'ed from src.
+ *
+ * @param dest Object to copy from
+ * @param src  Object to copy into
+ * @return 0 on success, negative on error
+ */
+int av_opt_copy(void *dest, const void *src);
+
+/**
+ * Get a default list of allowed ranges for the given option.
+ *
+ * This list is constructed without using the AVClass.query_ranges() callback
+ * and can be used as fallback from within the callback.
+ *
+ * @param flags is a bitmask of flags, undefined flags should not be set and should be ignored
+ *              AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ indicates that the obj is a double pointer to a AVClass instead of a full instance
+ *              AV_OPT_MULTI_COMPONENT_RANGE indicates that function may return more than one component, @see AVOptionRanges
+ *
+ * The result must be freed with av_opt_free_ranges.
+ *
+ * @return number of compontents returned on success, a negative errro code otherwise
+ */
+int av_opt_query_ranges_default(AVOptionRanges **, void *obj, const char *key, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Check if given option is set to its default value.
+ *
+ * Options o must belong to the obj. This function must not be called to check child's options state.
+ * @see av_opt_is_set_to_default_by_name().
+ *
+ * @param obj  AVClass object to check option on
+ * @param o    option to be checked
+ * @return     >0 when option is set to its default,
+ *              0 when option is not set its default,
+ *             <0 on error
+ */
+int av_opt_is_set_to_default(void *obj, const AVOption *o);
+
+/**
+ * Check if given option is set to its default value.
+ *
+ * @param obj          AVClass object to check option on
+ * @param name         option name
+ * @param search_flags combination of AV_OPT_SEARCH_*
+ * @return             >0 when option is set to its default,
+ *                     0 when option is not set its default,
+ *                     <0 on error
+ */
+int av_opt_is_set_to_default_by_name(void *obj, const char *name, int search_flags);
+
+
+#define AV_OPT_SERIALIZE_SKIP_DEFAULTS              0x00000001  ///< Serialize options that are not set to default values only.
+#define AV_OPT_SERIALIZE_OPT_FLAGS_EXACT            0x00000002  ///< Serialize options that exactly match opt_flags only.
+
+/**
+ * Serialize object's options.
+ *
+ * Create a string containing object's serialized options.
+ * Such string may be passed back to av_opt_set_from_string() in order to restore option values.
+ * A key/value or pairs separator occurring in the serialized value or
+ * name string are escaped through the av_escape() function.
+ *
+ * @param[in]  obj           AVClass object to serialize
+ * @param[in]  opt_flags     serialize options with all the specified flags set (AV_OPT_FLAG)
+ * @param[in]  flags         combination of AV_OPT_SERIALIZE_* flags
+ * @param[out] buffer        Pointer to buffer that will be allocated with string containg serialized options.
+ *                           Buffer must be freed by the caller when is no longer needed.
+ * @param[in]  key_val_sep   character used to separate key from value
+ * @param[in]  pairs_sep     character used to separate two pairs from each other
+ * @return                   >= 0 on success, negative on error
+ * @warning Separators cannot be neither '\\' nor '\0'. They also cannot be the same.
+ */
+int av_opt_serialize(void *obj, int opt_flags, int flags, char **buffer,
+                     const char key_val_sep, const char pairs_sep);
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_OPT_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/parseutils.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/parseutils.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dad5c27
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/parseutils.h
@@ -0,0 +1,197 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_PARSEUTILS_H
+#define AVUTIL_PARSEUTILS_H
+
+#include <time.h>
+
+#include "rational.h"
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * misc parsing utilities
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Parse str and store the parsed ratio in q.
+ *
+ * Note that a ratio with infinite (1/0) or negative value is
+ * considered valid, so you should check on the returned value if you
+ * want to exclude those values.
+ *
+ * The undefined value can be expressed using the "0:0" string.
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] q pointer to the AVRational which will contain the ratio
+ * @param[in] str the string to parse: it has to be a string in the format
+ * num:den, a float number or an expression
+ * @param[in] max the maximum allowed numerator and denominator
+ * @param[in] log_offset log level offset which is applied to the log
+ * level of log_ctx
+ * @param[in] log_ctx parent logging context
+ * @return >= 0 on success, a negative error code otherwise
+ */
+int av_parse_ratio(AVRational *q, const char *str, int max,
+                   int log_offset, void *log_ctx);
+
+#define av_parse_ratio_quiet(rate, str, max) \
+    av_parse_ratio(rate, str, max, AV_LOG_MAX_OFFSET, NULL)
+
+/**
+ * Parse str and put in width_ptr and height_ptr the detected values.
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] width_ptr pointer to the variable which will contain the detected
+ * width value
+ * @param[in,out] height_ptr pointer to the variable which will contain the detected
+ * height value
+ * @param[in] str the string to parse: it has to be a string in the format
+ * width x height or a valid video size abbreviation.
+ * @return >= 0 on success, a negative error code otherwise
+ */
+int av_parse_video_size(int *width_ptr, int *height_ptr, const char *str);
+
+/**
+ * Parse str and store the detected values in *rate.
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] rate pointer to the AVRational which will contain the detected
+ * frame rate
+ * @param[in] str the string to parse: it has to be a string in the format
+ * rate_num / rate_den, a float number or a valid video rate abbreviation
+ * @return >= 0 on success, a negative error code otherwise
+ */
+int av_parse_video_rate(AVRational *rate, const char *str);
+
+/**
+ * Put the RGBA values that correspond to color_string in rgba_color.
+ *
+ * @param rgba_color 4-elements array of uint8_t values, where the respective
+ * red, green, blue and alpha component values are written.
+ * @param color_string a string specifying a color. It can be the name of
+ * a color (case insensitive match) or a [0x|#]RRGGBB[AA] sequence,
+ * possibly followed by "@" and a string representing the alpha
+ * component.
+ * The alpha component may be a string composed by "0x" followed by an
+ * hexadecimal number or a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0, which
+ * represents the opacity value (0x00/0.0 means completely transparent,
+ * 0xff/1.0 completely opaque).
+ * If the alpha component is not specified then 0xff is assumed.
+ * The string "random" will result in a random color.
+ * @param slen length of the initial part of color_string containing the
+ * color. It can be set to -1 if color_string is a null terminated string
+ * containing nothing else than the color.
+ * @param log_ctx a pointer to an arbitrary struct of which the first field
+ * is a pointer to an AVClass struct (used for av_log()). Can be NULL.
+ * @return >= 0 in case of success, a negative value in case of
+ * failure (for example if color_string cannot be parsed).
+ */
+int av_parse_color(uint8_t *rgba_color, const char *color_string, int slen,
+                   void *log_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Get the name of a color from the internal table of hard-coded named
+ * colors.
+ *
+ * This function is meant to enumerate the color names recognized by
+ * av_parse_color().
+ *
+ * @param color_idx index of the requested color, starting from 0
+ * @param rgb      if not NULL, will point to a 3-elements array with the color value in RGB
+ * @return the color name string or NULL if color_idx is not in the array
+ */
+const char *av_get_known_color_name(int color_idx, const uint8_t **rgb);
+
+/**
+ * Parse timestr and return in *time a corresponding number of
+ * microseconds.
+ *
+ * @param timeval puts here the number of microseconds corresponding
+ * to the string in timestr. If the string represents a duration, it
+ * is the number of microseconds contained in the time interval.  If
+ * the string is a date, is the number of microseconds since 1st of
+ * January, 1970 up to the time of the parsed date.  If timestr cannot
+ * be successfully parsed, set *time to INT64_MIN.
+
+ * @param timestr a string representing a date or a duration.
+ * - If a date the syntax is:
+ * @code
+ * [{YYYY-MM-DD|YYYYMMDD}[T|t| ]]{{HH:MM:SS[.m...]]]}|{HHMMSS[.m...]]]}}[Z]
+ * now
+ * @endcode
+ * If the value is "now" it takes the current time.
+ * Time is local time unless Z is appended, in which case it is
+ * interpreted as UTC.
+ * If the year-month-day part is not specified it takes the current
+ * year-month-day.
+ * - If a duration the syntax is:
+ * @code
+ * [-][HH:]MM:SS[.m...]
+ * [-]S+[.m...]
+ * @endcode
+ * @param duration flag which tells how to interpret timestr, if not
+ * zero timestr is interpreted as a duration, otherwise as a date
+ * @return >= 0 in case of success, a negative value corresponding to an
+ * AVERROR code otherwise
+ */
+int av_parse_time(int64_t *timeval, const char *timestr, int duration);
+
+/**
+ * Attempt to find a specific tag in a URL.
+ *
+ * syntax: '?tag1=val1&tag2=val2...'. Little URL decoding is done.
+ * Return 1 if found.
+ */
+int av_find_info_tag(char *arg, int arg_size, const char *tag1, const char *info);
+
+/**
+ * Simplified version of strptime
+ *
+ * Parse the input string p according to the format string fmt and
+ * store its results in the structure dt.
+ * This implementation supports only a subset of the formats supported
+ * by the standard strptime().
+ *
+ * The supported input field descriptors are listed below.
+ * - `%%H`: the hour as a decimal number, using a 24-hour clock, in the
+ *   range '00' through '23'
+ * - `%%J`: hours as a decimal number, in the range '0' through INT_MAX
+ * - `%%M`: the minute as a decimal number, using a 24-hour clock, in the
+ *   range '00' through '59'
+ * - `%%S`: the second as a decimal number, using a 24-hour clock, in the
+ *   range '00' through '59'
+ * - `%%Y`: the year as a decimal number, using the Gregorian calendar
+ * - `%%m`: the month as a decimal number, in the range '1' through '12'
+ * - `%%d`: the day of the month as a decimal number, in the range '1'
+ *   through '31'
+ * - `%%T`: alias for `%%H:%%M:%%S`
+ * - `%%`: a literal `%`
+ *
+ * @return a pointer to the first character not processed in this function
+ *         call. In case the input string contains more characters than
+ *         required by the format string the return value points right after
+ *         the last consumed input character. In case the whole input string
+ *         is consumed the return value points to the null byte at the end of
+ *         the string. On failure NULL is returned.
+ */
+char *av_small_strptime(const char *p, const char *fmt, struct tm *dt);
+
+/**
+ * Convert the decomposed UTC time in tm to a time_t value.
+ */
+time_t av_timegm(struct tm *tm);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_PARSEUTILS_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/pixdesc.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/pixdesc.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0df73e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/pixdesc.h
@@ -0,0 +1,435 @@
+/*
+ * pixel format descriptor
+ * Copyright (c) 2009 Michael Niedermayer <michaelni@gmx.at>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_PIXDESC_H
+#define AVUTIL_PIXDESC_H
+
+#include <inttypes.h>
+
+#include "attributes.h"
+#include "pixfmt.h"
+
+typedef struct AVComponentDescriptor {
+    /**
+     * Which of the 4 planes contains the component.
+     */
+    int plane;
+
+    /**
+     * Number of elements between 2 horizontally consecutive pixels.
+     * Elements are bits for bitstream formats, bytes otherwise.
+     */
+    int step;
+
+    /**
+     * Number of elements before the component of the first pixel.
+     * Elements are bits for bitstream formats, bytes otherwise.
+     */
+    int offset;
+
+    /**
+     * Number of least significant bits that must be shifted away
+     * to get the value.
+     */
+    int shift;
+
+    /**
+     * Number of bits in the component.
+     */
+    int depth;
+} AVComponentDescriptor;
+
+/**
+ * Descriptor that unambiguously describes how the bits of a pixel are
+ * stored in the up to 4 data planes of an image. It also stores the
+ * subsampling factors and number of components.
+ *
+ * @note This is separate of the colorspace (RGB, YCbCr, YPbPr, JPEG-style YUV
+ *       and all the YUV variants) AVPixFmtDescriptor just stores how values
+ *       are stored not what these values represent.
+ */
+typedef struct AVPixFmtDescriptor {
+    const char *name;
+    uint8_t nb_components;  ///< The number of components each pixel has, (1-4)
+
+    /**
+     * Amount to shift the luma width right to find the chroma width.
+     * For YV12 this is 1 for example.
+     * chroma_width = AV_CEIL_RSHIFT(luma_width, log2_chroma_w)
+     * The note above is needed to ensure rounding up.
+     * This value only refers to the chroma components.
+     */
+    uint8_t log2_chroma_w;
+
+    /**
+     * Amount to shift the luma height right to find the chroma height.
+     * For YV12 this is 1 for example.
+     * chroma_height= AV_CEIL_RSHIFT(luma_height, log2_chroma_h)
+     * The note above is needed to ensure rounding up.
+     * This value only refers to the chroma components.
+     */
+    uint8_t log2_chroma_h;
+
+    /**
+     * Combination of AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_... flags.
+     */
+    uint64_t flags;
+
+    /**
+     * Parameters that describe how pixels are packed.
+     * If the format has 1 or 2 components, then luma is 0.
+     * If the format has 3 or 4 components:
+     *   if the RGB flag is set then 0 is red, 1 is green and 2 is blue;
+     *   otherwise 0 is luma, 1 is chroma-U and 2 is chroma-V.
+     *
+     * If present, the Alpha channel is always the last component.
+     */
+    AVComponentDescriptor comp[4];
+
+    /**
+     * Alternative comma-separated names.
+     */
+    const char *alias;
+} AVPixFmtDescriptor;
+
+/**
+ * Pixel format is big-endian.
+ */
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_BE           (1 << 0)
+/**
+ * Pixel format has a palette in data[1], values are indexes in this palette.
+ */
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_PAL          (1 << 1)
+/**
+ * All values of a component are bit-wise packed end to end.
+ */
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_BITSTREAM    (1 << 2)
+/**
+ * Pixel format is an HW accelerated format.
+ */
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_HWACCEL      (1 << 3)
+/**
+ * At least one pixel component is not in the first data plane.
+ */
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_PLANAR       (1 << 4)
+/**
+ * The pixel format contains RGB-like data (as opposed to YUV/grayscale).
+ */
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_RGB          (1 << 5)
+
+/**
+ * The pixel format has an alpha channel. This is set on all formats that
+ * support alpha in some way, including AV_PIX_FMT_PAL8. The alpha is always
+ * straight, never pre-multiplied.
+ *
+ * If a codec or a filter does not support alpha, it should set all alpha to
+ * opaque, or use the equivalent pixel formats without alpha component, e.g.
+ * AV_PIX_FMT_RGB0 (or AV_PIX_FMT_RGB24 etc.) instead of AV_PIX_FMT_RGBA.
+ */
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_ALPHA        (1 << 7)
+
+/**
+ * The pixel format is following a Bayer pattern
+ */
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_BAYER        (1 << 8)
+
+/**
+ * The pixel format contains IEEE-754 floating point values. Precision (double,
+ * single, or half) should be determined by the pixel size (64, 32, or 16 bits).
+ */
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_FLOAT        (1 << 9)
+
+/**
+ * Return the number of bits per pixel used by the pixel format
+ * described by pixdesc. Note that this is not the same as the number
+ * of bits per sample.
+ *
+ * The returned number of bits refers to the number of bits actually
+ * used for storing the pixel information, that is padding bits are
+ * not counted.
+ */
+int av_get_bits_per_pixel(const AVPixFmtDescriptor *pixdesc);
+
+/**
+ * Return the number of bits per pixel for the pixel format
+ * described by pixdesc, including any padding or unused bits.
+ */
+int av_get_padded_bits_per_pixel(const AVPixFmtDescriptor *pixdesc);
+
+/**
+ * @return a pixel format descriptor for provided pixel format or NULL if
+ * this pixel format is unknown.
+ */
+const AVPixFmtDescriptor *av_pix_fmt_desc_get(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Iterate over all pixel format descriptors known to libavutil.
+ *
+ * @param prev previous descriptor. NULL to get the first descriptor.
+ *
+ * @return next descriptor or NULL after the last descriptor
+ */
+const AVPixFmtDescriptor *av_pix_fmt_desc_next(const AVPixFmtDescriptor *prev);
+
+/**
+ * @return an AVPixelFormat id described by desc, or AV_PIX_FMT_NONE if desc
+ * is not a valid pointer to a pixel format descriptor.
+ */
+enum AVPixelFormat av_pix_fmt_desc_get_id(const AVPixFmtDescriptor *desc);
+
+/**
+ * Utility function to access log2_chroma_w log2_chroma_h from
+ * the pixel format AVPixFmtDescriptor.
+ *
+ * @param[in]  pix_fmt the pixel format
+ * @param[out] h_shift store log2_chroma_w (horizontal/width shift)
+ * @param[out] v_shift store log2_chroma_h (vertical/height shift)
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, AVERROR(ENOSYS) on invalid or unknown pixel format
+ */
+int av_pix_fmt_get_chroma_sub_sample(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt,
+                                     int *h_shift, int *v_shift);
+
+/**
+ * @return number of planes in pix_fmt, a negative AVERROR if pix_fmt is not a
+ * valid pixel format.
+ */
+int av_pix_fmt_count_planes(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * @return the name for provided color range or NULL if unknown.
+ */
+const char *av_color_range_name(enum AVColorRange range);
+
+/**
+ * @return the AVColorRange value for name or an AVError if not found.
+ */
+int av_color_range_from_name(const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * @return the name for provided color primaries or NULL if unknown.
+ */
+const char *av_color_primaries_name(enum AVColorPrimaries primaries);
+
+/**
+ * @return the AVColorPrimaries value for name or an AVError if not found.
+ */
+int av_color_primaries_from_name(const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * @return the name for provided color transfer or NULL if unknown.
+ */
+const char *av_color_transfer_name(enum AVColorTransferCharacteristic transfer);
+
+/**
+ * @return the AVColorTransferCharacteristic value for name or an AVError if not found.
+ */
+int av_color_transfer_from_name(const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * @return the name for provided color space or NULL if unknown.
+ */
+const char *av_color_space_name(enum AVColorSpace space);
+
+/**
+ * @return the AVColorSpace value for name or an AVError if not found.
+ */
+int av_color_space_from_name(const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * @return the name for provided chroma location or NULL if unknown.
+ */
+const char *av_chroma_location_name(enum AVChromaLocation location);
+
+/**
+ * @return the AVChromaLocation value for name or an AVError if not found.
+ */
+int av_chroma_location_from_name(const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * Converts AVChromaLocation to swscale x/y chroma position.
+ *
+ * The positions represent the chroma (0,0) position in a coordinates system
+ * with luma (0,0) representing the origin and luma(1,1) representing 256,256
+ *
+ * @param xpos  horizontal chroma sample position
+ * @param ypos  vertical   chroma sample position
+ */
+int av_chroma_location_enum_to_pos(int *xpos, int *ypos, enum AVChromaLocation pos);
+
+/**
+ * Converts swscale x/y chroma position to AVChromaLocation.
+ *
+ * The positions represent the chroma (0,0) position in a coordinates system
+ * with luma (0,0) representing the origin and luma(1,1) representing 256,256
+ *
+ * @param xpos  horizontal chroma sample position
+ * @param ypos  vertical   chroma sample position
+ */
+enum AVChromaLocation av_chroma_location_pos_to_enum(int xpos, int ypos);
+
+/**
+ * Return the pixel format corresponding to name.
+ *
+ * If there is no pixel format with name name, then looks for a
+ * pixel format with the name corresponding to the native endian
+ * format of name.
+ * For example in a little-endian system, first looks for "gray16",
+ * then for "gray16le".
+ *
+ * Finally if no pixel format has been found, returns AV_PIX_FMT_NONE.
+ */
+enum AVPixelFormat av_get_pix_fmt(const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * Return the short name for a pixel format, NULL in case pix_fmt is
+ * unknown.
+ *
+ * @see av_get_pix_fmt(), av_get_pix_fmt_string()
+ */
+const char *av_get_pix_fmt_name(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Print in buf the string corresponding to the pixel format with
+ * number pix_fmt, or a header if pix_fmt is negative.
+ *
+ * @param buf the buffer where to write the string
+ * @param buf_size the size of buf
+ * @param pix_fmt the number of the pixel format to print the
+ * corresponding info string, or a negative value to print the
+ * corresponding header.
+ */
+char *av_get_pix_fmt_string(char *buf, int buf_size,
+                            enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Read a line from an image, and write the values of the
+ * pixel format component c to dst.
+ *
+ * @param data the array containing the pointers to the planes of the image
+ * @param linesize the array containing the linesizes of the image
+ * @param desc the pixel format descriptor for the image
+ * @param x the horizontal coordinate of the first pixel to read
+ * @param y the vertical coordinate of the first pixel to read
+ * @param w the width of the line to read, that is the number of
+ * values to write to dst
+ * @param read_pal_component if not zero and the format is a paletted
+ * format writes the values corresponding to the palette
+ * component c in data[1] to dst, rather than the palette indexes in
+ * data[0]. The behavior is undefined if the format is not paletted.
+ * @param dst_element_size size of elements in dst array (2 or 4 byte)
+ */
+void av_read_image_line2(void *dst, const uint8_t *data[4],
+                        const int linesize[4], const AVPixFmtDescriptor *desc,
+                        int x, int y, int c, int w, int read_pal_component,
+                        int dst_element_size);
+
+void av_read_image_line(uint16_t *dst, const uint8_t *data[4],
+                        const int linesize[4], const AVPixFmtDescriptor *desc,
+                        int x, int y, int c, int w, int read_pal_component);
+
+/**
+ * Write the values from src to the pixel format component c of an
+ * image line.
+ *
+ * @param src array containing the values to write
+ * @param data the array containing the pointers to the planes of the
+ * image to write into. It is supposed to be zeroed.
+ * @param linesize the array containing the linesizes of the image
+ * @param desc the pixel format descriptor for the image
+ * @param x the horizontal coordinate of the first pixel to write
+ * @param y the vertical coordinate of the first pixel to write
+ * @param w the width of the line to write, that is the number of
+ * values to write to the image line
+ * @param src_element_size size of elements in src array (2 or 4 byte)
+ */
+void av_write_image_line2(const void *src, uint8_t *data[4],
+                         const int linesize[4], const AVPixFmtDescriptor *desc,
+                         int x, int y, int c, int w, int src_element_size);
+
+void av_write_image_line(const uint16_t *src, uint8_t *data[4],
+                         const int linesize[4], const AVPixFmtDescriptor *desc,
+                         int x, int y, int c, int w);
+
+/**
+ * Utility function to swap the endianness of a pixel format.
+ *
+ * @param[in]  pix_fmt the pixel format
+ *
+ * @return pixel format with swapped endianness if it exists,
+ * otherwise AV_PIX_FMT_NONE
+ */
+enum AVPixelFormat av_pix_fmt_swap_endianness(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt);
+
+#define FF_LOSS_RESOLUTION        0x0001 /**< loss due to resolution change */
+#define FF_LOSS_DEPTH             0x0002 /**< loss due to color depth change */
+#define FF_LOSS_COLORSPACE        0x0004 /**< loss due to color space conversion */
+#define FF_LOSS_ALPHA             0x0008 /**< loss of alpha bits */
+#define FF_LOSS_COLORQUANT        0x0010 /**< loss due to color quantization */
+#define FF_LOSS_CHROMA            0x0020 /**< loss of chroma (e.g. RGB to gray conversion) */
+#define FF_LOSS_EXCESS_RESOLUTION 0x0040 /**< loss due to unneeded extra resolution */
+#define FF_LOSS_EXCESS_DEPTH      0x0080 /**< loss due to unneeded extra color depth */
+
+
+/**
+ * Compute what kind of losses will occur when converting from one specific
+ * pixel format to another.
+ * When converting from one pixel format to another, information loss may occur.
+ * For example, when converting from RGB24 to GRAY, the color information will
+ * be lost. Similarly, other losses occur when converting from some formats to
+ * other formats. These losses can involve loss of chroma, but also loss of
+ * resolution, loss of color depth, loss due to the color space conversion, loss
+ * of the alpha bits or loss due to color quantization.
+ * av_get_fix_fmt_loss() informs you about the various types of losses
+ * which will occur when converting from one pixel format to another.
+ *
+ * @param[in] dst_pix_fmt destination pixel format
+ * @param[in] src_pix_fmt source pixel format
+ * @param[in] has_alpha Whether the source pixel format alpha channel is used.
+ * @return Combination of flags informing you what kind of losses will occur
+ * (maximum loss for an invalid dst_pix_fmt).
+ */
+int av_get_pix_fmt_loss(enum AVPixelFormat dst_pix_fmt,
+                        enum AVPixelFormat src_pix_fmt,
+                        int has_alpha);
+
+/**
+ * Compute what kind of losses will occur when converting from one specific
+ * pixel format to another.
+ * When converting from one pixel format to another, information loss may occur.
+ * For example, when converting from RGB24 to GRAY, the color information will
+ * be lost. Similarly, other losses occur when converting from some formats to
+ * other formats. These losses can involve loss of chroma, but also loss of
+ * resolution, loss of color depth, loss due to the color space conversion, loss
+ * of the alpha bits or loss due to color quantization.
+ * av_get_fix_fmt_loss() informs you about the various types of losses
+ * which will occur when converting from one pixel format to another.
+ *
+ * @param[in] dst_pix_fmt destination pixel format
+ * @param[in] src_pix_fmt source pixel format
+ * @param[in] has_alpha Whether the source pixel format alpha channel is used.
+ * @return Combination of flags informing you what kind of losses will occur
+ * (maximum loss for an invalid dst_pix_fmt).
+ */
+enum AVPixelFormat av_find_best_pix_fmt_of_2(enum AVPixelFormat dst_pix_fmt1, enum AVPixelFormat dst_pix_fmt2,
+                                             enum AVPixelFormat src_pix_fmt, int has_alpha, int *loss_ptr);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_PIXDESC_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/pixelutils.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/pixelutils.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7a997cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/pixelutils.h
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_PIXELUTILS_H
+#define AVUTIL_PIXELUTILS_H
+
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+/**
+ * Sum of abs(src1[x] - src2[x])
+ */
+typedef int (*av_pixelutils_sad_fn)(const uint8_t *src1, ptrdiff_t stride1,
+                                    const uint8_t *src2, ptrdiff_t stride2);
+
+/**
+ * Get a potentially optimized pointer to a Sum-of-absolute-differences
+ * function (see the av_pixelutils_sad_fn prototype).
+ *
+ * @param w_bits  1<<w_bits is the requested width of the block size
+ * @param h_bits  1<<h_bits is the requested height of the block size
+ * @param aligned If set to 2, the returned sad function will assume src1 and
+ *                src2 addresses are aligned on the block size.
+ *                If set to 1, the returned sad function will assume src1 is
+ *                aligned on the block size.
+ *                If set to 0, the returned sad function assume no particular
+ *                alignment.
+ * @param log_ctx context used for logging, can be NULL
+ *
+ * @return a pointer to the SAD function or NULL in case of error (because of
+ *         invalid parameters)
+ */
+av_pixelutils_sad_fn av_pixelutils_get_sad_fn(int w_bits, int h_bits,
+                                              int aligned, void *log_ctx);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_PIXELUTILS_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/pixfmt.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/pixfmt.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..37c2c79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/pixfmt.h
@@ -0,0 +1,691 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2006 Michael Niedermayer <michaelni@gmx.at>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_PIXFMT_H
+#define AVUTIL_PIXFMT_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * pixel format definitions
+ */
+
+#include "libavutil/avconfig.h"
+#include "version.h"
+
+#define AVPALETTE_SIZE 1024
+#define AVPALETTE_COUNT 256
+
+/**
+ * Pixel format.
+ *
+ * @note
+ * AV_PIX_FMT_RGB32 is handled in an endian-specific manner. An RGBA
+ * color is put together as:
+ *  (A << 24) | (R << 16) | (G << 8) | B
+ * This is stored as BGRA on little-endian CPU architectures and ARGB on
+ * big-endian CPUs.
+ *
+ * @note
+ * If the resolution is not a multiple of the chroma subsampling factor
+ * then the chroma plane resolution must be rounded up.
+ *
+ * @par
+ * When the pixel format is palettized RGB32 (AV_PIX_FMT_PAL8), the palettized
+ * image data is stored in AVFrame.data[0]. The palette is transported in
+ * AVFrame.data[1], is 1024 bytes long (256 4-byte entries) and is
+ * formatted the same as in AV_PIX_FMT_RGB32 described above (i.e., it is
+ * also endian-specific). Note also that the individual RGB32 palette
+ * components stored in AVFrame.data[1] should be in the range 0..255.
+ * This is important as many custom PAL8 video codecs that were designed
+ * to run on the IBM VGA graphics adapter use 6-bit palette components.
+ *
+ * @par
+ * For all the 8 bits per pixel formats, an RGB32 palette is in data[1] like
+ * for pal8. This palette is filled in automatically by the function
+ * allocating the picture.
+ */
+enum AVPixelFormat {
+    AV_PIX_FMT_NONE = -1,
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P,   ///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 12bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUYV422,   ///< packed YUV 4:2:2, 16bpp, Y0 Cb Y1 Cr
+    AV_PIX_FMT_RGB24,     ///< packed RGB 8:8:8, 24bpp, RGBRGB...
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BGR24,     ///< packed RGB 8:8:8, 24bpp, BGRBGR...
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P,   ///< planar YUV 4:2:2, 16bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P,   ///< planar YUV 4:4:4, 24bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV410P,   ///< planar YUV 4:1:0,  9bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 4x4 Y samples)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV411P,   ///< planar YUV 4:1:1, 12bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 4x1 Y samples)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GRAY8,     ///<        Y        ,  8bpp
+    AV_PIX_FMT_MONOWHITE, ///<        Y        ,  1bpp, 0 is white, 1 is black, in each byte pixels are ordered from the msb to the lsb
+    AV_PIX_FMT_MONOBLACK, ///<        Y        ,  1bpp, 0 is black, 1 is white, in each byte pixels are ordered from the msb to the lsb
+    AV_PIX_FMT_PAL8,      ///< 8 bits with AV_PIX_FMT_RGB32 palette
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVJ420P,  ///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 12bpp, full scale (JPEG), deprecated in favor of AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P and setting color_range
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVJ422P,  ///< planar YUV 4:2:2, 16bpp, full scale (JPEG), deprecated in favor of AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P and setting color_range
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVJ444P,  ///< planar YUV 4:4:4, 24bpp, full scale (JPEG), deprecated in favor of AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P and setting color_range
+    AV_PIX_FMT_UYVY422,   ///< packed YUV 4:2:2, 16bpp, Cb Y0 Cr Y1
+    AV_PIX_FMT_UYYVYY411, ///< packed YUV 4:1:1, 12bpp, Cb Y0 Y1 Cr Y2 Y3
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BGR8,      ///< packed RGB 3:3:2,  8bpp, (msb)2B 3G 3R(lsb)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BGR4,      ///< packed RGB 1:2:1 bitstream,  4bpp, (msb)1B 2G 1R(lsb), a byte contains two pixels, the first pixel in the byte is the one composed by the 4 msb bits
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BGR4_BYTE, ///< packed RGB 1:2:1,  8bpp, (msb)1B 2G 1R(lsb)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_RGB8,      ///< packed RGB 3:3:2,  8bpp, (msb)2R 3G 3B(lsb)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_RGB4,      ///< packed RGB 1:2:1 bitstream,  4bpp, (msb)1R 2G 1B(lsb), a byte contains two pixels, the first pixel in the byte is the one composed by the 4 msb bits
+    AV_PIX_FMT_RGB4_BYTE, ///< packed RGB 1:2:1,  8bpp, (msb)1R 2G 1B(lsb)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_NV12,      ///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 12bpp, 1 plane for Y and 1 plane for the UV components, which are interleaved (first byte U and the following byte V)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_NV21,      ///< as above, but U and V bytes are swapped
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_ARGB,      ///< packed ARGB 8:8:8:8, 32bpp, ARGBARGB...
+    AV_PIX_FMT_RGBA,      ///< packed RGBA 8:8:8:8, 32bpp, RGBARGBA...
+    AV_PIX_FMT_ABGR,      ///< packed ABGR 8:8:8:8, 32bpp, ABGRABGR...
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BGRA,      ///< packed BGRA 8:8:8:8, 32bpp, BGRABGRA...
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GRAY16BE,  ///<        Y        , 16bpp, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GRAY16LE,  ///<        Y        , 16bpp, little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV440P,   ///< planar YUV 4:4:0 (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x2 Y samples)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVJ440P,  ///< planar YUV 4:4:0 full scale (JPEG), deprecated in favor of AV_PIX_FMT_YUV440P and setting color_range
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA420P,  ///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 20bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y & A samples)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_RGB48BE,   ///< packed RGB 16:16:16, 48bpp, 16R, 16G, 16B, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B component is stored as big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_RGB48LE,   ///< packed RGB 16:16:16, 48bpp, 16R, 16G, 16B, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B component is stored as little-endian
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_RGB565BE,  ///< packed RGB 5:6:5, 16bpp, (msb)   5R 6G 5B(lsb), big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_RGB565LE,  ///< packed RGB 5:6:5, 16bpp, (msb)   5R 6G 5B(lsb), little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_RGB555BE,  ///< packed RGB 5:5:5, 16bpp, (msb)1X 5R 5G 5B(lsb), big-endian   , X=unused/undefined
+    AV_PIX_FMT_RGB555LE,  ///< packed RGB 5:5:5, 16bpp, (msb)1X 5R 5G 5B(lsb), little-endian, X=unused/undefined
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BGR565BE,  ///< packed BGR 5:6:5, 16bpp, (msb)   5B 6G 5R(lsb), big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BGR565LE,  ///< packed BGR 5:6:5, 16bpp, (msb)   5B 6G 5R(lsb), little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BGR555BE,  ///< packed BGR 5:5:5, 16bpp, (msb)1X 5B 5G 5R(lsb), big-endian   , X=unused/undefined
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BGR555LE,  ///< packed BGR 5:5:5, 16bpp, (msb)1X 5B 5G 5R(lsb), little-endian, X=unused/undefined
+
+    /**
+     *  Hardware acceleration through VA-API, data[3] contains a
+     *  VASurfaceID.
+     */
+    AV_PIX_FMT_VAAPI,
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P16LE,  ///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 24bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P16BE,  ///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 24bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P16LE,  ///< planar YUV 4:2:2, 32bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P16BE,  ///< planar YUV 4:2:2, 32bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P16LE,  ///< planar YUV 4:4:4, 48bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P16BE,  ///< planar YUV 4:4:4, 48bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_DXVA2_VLD,    ///< HW decoding through DXVA2, Picture.data[3] contains a LPDIRECT3DSURFACE9 pointer
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_RGB444LE,  ///< packed RGB 4:4:4, 16bpp, (msb)4X 4R 4G 4B(lsb), little-endian, X=unused/undefined
+    AV_PIX_FMT_RGB444BE,  ///< packed RGB 4:4:4, 16bpp, (msb)4X 4R 4G 4B(lsb), big-endian,    X=unused/undefined
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BGR444LE,  ///< packed BGR 4:4:4, 16bpp, (msb)4X 4B 4G 4R(lsb), little-endian, X=unused/undefined
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BGR444BE,  ///< packed BGR 4:4:4, 16bpp, (msb)4X 4B 4G 4R(lsb), big-endian,    X=unused/undefined
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YA8,       ///< 8 bits gray, 8 bits alpha
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_Y400A = AV_PIX_FMT_YA8, ///< alias for AV_PIX_FMT_YA8
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GRAY8A= AV_PIX_FMT_YA8, ///< alias for AV_PIX_FMT_YA8
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BGR48BE,   ///< packed RGB 16:16:16, 48bpp, 16B, 16G, 16R, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B component is stored as big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BGR48LE,   ///< packed RGB 16:16:16, 48bpp, 16B, 16G, 16R, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B component is stored as little-endian
+
+    /**
+     * The following 12 formats have the disadvantage of needing 1 format for each bit depth.
+     * Notice that each 9/10 bits sample is stored in 16 bits with extra padding.
+     * If you want to support multiple bit depths, then using AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P16* with the bpp stored separately is better.
+     */
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P9BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 13.5bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P9LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 13.5bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P10BE,///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 15bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P10LE,///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 15bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P10BE,///< planar YUV 4:2:2, 20bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P10LE,///< planar YUV 4:2:2, 20bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P9BE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4, 27bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P9LE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4, 27bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P10BE,///< planar YUV 4:4:4, 30bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P10LE,///< planar YUV 4:4:4, 30bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P9BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2, 18bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P9LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2, 18bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP,      ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 24bpp
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GBR24P = AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP, // alias for #AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP9BE,   ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 27bpp, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP9LE,   ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 27bpp, little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP10BE,  ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 30bpp, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP10LE,  ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 30bpp, little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP16BE,  ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 48bpp, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP16LE,  ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 48bpp, little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA422P,  ///< planar YUV 4:2:2 24bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y & A samples)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA444P,  ///< planar YUV 4:4:4 32bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y & A samples)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA420P9BE,  ///< planar YUV 4:2:0 22.5bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y & A samples), big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA420P9LE,  ///< planar YUV 4:2:0 22.5bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y & A samples), little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA422P9BE,  ///< planar YUV 4:2:2 27bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y & A samples), big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA422P9LE,  ///< planar YUV 4:2:2 27bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y & A samples), little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA444P9BE,  ///< planar YUV 4:4:4 36bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y & A samples), big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA444P9LE,  ///< planar YUV 4:4:4 36bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y & A samples), little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA420P10BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0 25bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y & A samples, big-endian)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA420P10LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0 25bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y & A samples, little-endian)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA422P10BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2 30bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y & A samples, big-endian)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA422P10LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2 30bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y & A samples, little-endian)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA444P10BE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4 40bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y & A samples, big-endian)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA444P10LE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4 40bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y & A samples, little-endian)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA420P16BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0 40bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y & A samples, big-endian)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA420P16LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0 40bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y & A samples, little-endian)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA422P16BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2 48bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y & A samples, big-endian)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA422P16LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2 48bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y & A samples, little-endian)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA444P16BE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4 64bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y & A samples, big-endian)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA444P16LE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4 64bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y & A samples, little-endian)
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_VDPAU,     ///< HW acceleration through VDPAU, Picture.data[3] contains a VdpVideoSurface
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_XYZ12LE,      ///< packed XYZ 4:4:4, 36 bpp, (msb) 12X, 12Y, 12Z (lsb), the 2-byte value for each X/Y/Z is stored as little-endian, the 4 lower bits are set to 0
+    AV_PIX_FMT_XYZ12BE,      ///< packed XYZ 4:4:4, 36 bpp, (msb) 12X, 12Y, 12Z (lsb), the 2-byte value for each X/Y/Z is stored as big-endian, the 4 lower bits are set to 0
+    AV_PIX_FMT_NV16,         ///< interleaved chroma YUV 4:2:2, 16bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_NV20LE,       ///< interleaved chroma YUV 4:2:2, 20bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_NV20BE,       ///< interleaved chroma YUV 4:2:2, 20bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), big-endian
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_RGBA64BE,     ///< packed RGBA 16:16:16:16, 64bpp, 16R, 16G, 16B, 16A, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B/A component is stored as big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_RGBA64LE,     ///< packed RGBA 16:16:16:16, 64bpp, 16R, 16G, 16B, 16A, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B/A component is stored as little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BGRA64BE,     ///< packed RGBA 16:16:16:16, 64bpp, 16B, 16G, 16R, 16A, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B/A component is stored as big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BGRA64LE,     ///< packed RGBA 16:16:16:16, 64bpp, 16B, 16G, 16R, 16A, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B/A component is stored as little-endian
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YVYU422,   ///< packed YUV 4:2:2, 16bpp, Y0 Cr Y1 Cb
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YA16BE,       ///< 16 bits gray, 16 bits alpha (big-endian)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YA16LE,       ///< 16 bits gray, 16 bits alpha (little-endian)
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GBRAP,        ///< planar GBRA 4:4:4:4 32bpp
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GBRAP16BE,    ///< planar GBRA 4:4:4:4 64bpp, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GBRAP16LE,    ///< planar GBRA 4:4:4:4 64bpp, little-endian
+    /**
+     * HW acceleration through QSV, data[3] contains a pointer to the
+     * mfxFrameSurface1 structure.
+     *
+     * Before FFmpeg 5.0:
+     * mfxFrameSurface1.Data.MemId contains a pointer when importing
+     * the following frames as QSV frames:
+     *
+     * VAAPI:
+     * mfxFrameSurface1.Data.MemId contains a pointer to VASurfaceID
+     *
+     * DXVA2:
+     * mfxFrameSurface1.Data.MemId contains a pointer to IDirect3DSurface9
+     *
+     * FFmpeg 5.0 and above:
+     * mfxFrameSurface1.Data.MemId contains a pointer to the mfxHDLPair
+     * structure when importing the following frames as QSV frames:
+     *
+     * VAAPI:
+     * mfxHDLPair.first contains a VASurfaceID pointer.
+     * mfxHDLPair.second is always MFX_INFINITE.
+     *
+     * DXVA2:
+     * mfxHDLPair.first contains IDirect3DSurface9 pointer.
+     * mfxHDLPair.second is always MFX_INFINITE.
+     *
+     * D3D11:
+     * mfxHDLPair.first contains a ID3D11Texture2D pointer.
+     * mfxHDLPair.second contains the texture array index of the frame if the
+     * ID3D11Texture2D is an array texture, or always MFX_INFINITE if it is a
+     * normal texture.
+     */
+    AV_PIX_FMT_QSV,
+    /**
+     * HW acceleration though MMAL, data[3] contains a pointer to the
+     * MMAL_BUFFER_HEADER_T structure.
+     */
+    AV_PIX_FMT_MMAL,
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_D3D11VA_VLD,  ///< HW decoding through Direct3D11 via old API, Picture.data[3] contains a ID3D11VideoDecoderOutputView pointer
+
+    /**
+     * HW acceleration through CUDA. data[i] contain CUdeviceptr pointers
+     * exactly as for system memory frames.
+     */
+    AV_PIX_FMT_CUDA,
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_0RGB,        ///< packed RGB 8:8:8, 32bpp, XRGBXRGB...   X=unused/undefined
+    AV_PIX_FMT_RGB0,        ///< packed RGB 8:8:8, 32bpp, RGBXRGBX...   X=unused/undefined
+    AV_PIX_FMT_0BGR,        ///< packed BGR 8:8:8, 32bpp, XBGRXBGR...   X=unused/undefined
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BGR0,        ///< packed BGR 8:8:8, 32bpp, BGRXBGRX...   X=unused/undefined
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P12BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0,18bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P12LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0,18bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P14BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0,21bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P14LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0,21bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P12BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2,24bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P12LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2,24bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P14BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2,28bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P14LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2,28bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P12BE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4,36bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P12LE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4,36bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P14BE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4,42bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P14LE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4,42bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP12BE,    ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 36bpp, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP12LE,    ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 36bpp, little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP14BE,    ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 42bpp, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP14LE,    ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 42bpp, little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVJ411P,    ///< planar YUV 4:1:1, 12bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 4x1 Y samples) full scale (JPEG), deprecated in favor of AV_PIX_FMT_YUV411P and setting color_range
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_BGGR8,    ///< bayer, BGBG..(odd line), GRGR..(even line), 8-bit samples
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_RGGB8,    ///< bayer, RGRG..(odd line), GBGB..(even line), 8-bit samples
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_GBRG8,    ///< bayer, GBGB..(odd line), RGRG..(even line), 8-bit samples
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_GRBG8,    ///< bayer, GRGR..(odd line), BGBG..(even line), 8-bit samples
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_BGGR16LE, ///< bayer, BGBG..(odd line), GRGR..(even line), 16-bit samples, little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_BGGR16BE, ///< bayer, BGBG..(odd line), GRGR..(even line), 16-bit samples, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_RGGB16LE, ///< bayer, RGRG..(odd line), GBGB..(even line), 16-bit samples, little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_RGGB16BE, ///< bayer, RGRG..(odd line), GBGB..(even line), 16-bit samples, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_GBRG16LE, ///< bayer, GBGB..(odd line), RGRG..(even line), 16-bit samples, little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_GBRG16BE, ///< bayer, GBGB..(odd line), RGRG..(even line), 16-bit samples, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_GRBG16LE, ///< bayer, GRGR..(odd line), BGBG..(even line), 16-bit samples, little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_GRBG16BE, ///< bayer, GRGR..(odd line), BGBG..(even line), 16-bit samples, big-endian
+
+#if FF_API_XVMC
+    AV_PIX_FMT_XVMC,///< XVideo Motion Acceleration via common packet passing
+#endif
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV440P10LE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:0,20bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x2 Y samples), little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV440P10BE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:0,20bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x2 Y samples), big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV440P12LE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:0,24bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x2 Y samples), little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUV440P12BE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:0,24bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x2 Y samples), big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_AYUV64LE,    ///< packed AYUV 4:4:4,64bpp (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y & A samples), little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_AYUV64BE,    ///< packed AYUV 4:4:4,64bpp (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y & A samples), big-endian
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_VIDEOTOOLBOX, ///< hardware decoding through Videotoolbox
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_P010LE, ///< like NV12, with 10bpp per component, data in the high bits, zeros in the low bits, little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_P010BE, ///< like NV12, with 10bpp per component, data in the high bits, zeros in the low bits, big-endian
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GBRAP12BE,  ///< planar GBR 4:4:4:4 48bpp, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GBRAP12LE,  ///< planar GBR 4:4:4:4 48bpp, little-endian
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GBRAP10BE,  ///< planar GBR 4:4:4:4 40bpp, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GBRAP10LE,  ///< planar GBR 4:4:4:4 40bpp, little-endian
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_MEDIACODEC, ///< hardware decoding through MediaCodec
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GRAY12BE,   ///<        Y        , 12bpp, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GRAY12LE,   ///<        Y        , 12bpp, little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GRAY10BE,   ///<        Y        , 10bpp, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GRAY10LE,   ///<        Y        , 10bpp, little-endian
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_P016LE, ///< like NV12, with 16bpp per component, little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_P016BE, ///< like NV12, with 16bpp per component, big-endian
+
+    /**
+     * Hardware surfaces for Direct3D11.
+     *
+     * This is preferred over the legacy AV_PIX_FMT_D3D11VA_VLD. The new D3D11
+     * hwaccel API and filtering support AV_PIX_FMT_D3D11 only.
+     *
+     * data[0] contains a ID3D11Texture2D pointer, and data[1] contains the
+     * texture array index of the frame as intptr_t if the ID3D11Texture2D is
+     * an array texture (or always 0 if it's a normal texture).
+     */
+    AV_PIX_FMT_D3D11,
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GRAY9BE,   ///<        Y        , 9bpp, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GRAY9LE,   ///<        Y        , 9bpp, little-endian
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GBRPF32BE,  ///< IEEE-754 single precision planar GBR 4:4:4,     96bpp, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GBRPF32LE,  ///< IEEE-754 single precision planar GBR 4:4:4,     96bpp, little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GBRAPF32BE, ///< IEEE-754 single precision planar GBRA 4:4:4:4, 128bpp, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GBRAPF32LE, ///< IEEE-754 single precision planar GBRA 4:4:4:4, 128bpp, little-endian
+
+    /**
+     * DRM-managed buffers exposed through PRIME buffer sharing.
+     *
+     * data[0] points to an AVDRMFrameDescriptor.
+     */
+    AV_PIX_FMT_DRM_PRIME,
+    /**
+     * Hardware surfaces for OpenCL.
+     *
+     * data[i] contain 2D image objects (typed in C as cl_mem, used
+     * in OpenCL as image2d_t) for each plane of the surface.
+     */
+    AV_PIX_FMT_OPENCL,
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GRAY14BE,   ///<        Y        , 14bpp, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GRAY14LE,   ///<        Y        , 14bpp, little-endian
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GRAYF32BE,  ///< IEEE-754 single precision Y, 32bpp, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_GRAYF32LE,  ///< IEEE-754 single precision Y, 32bpp, little-endian
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA422P12BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2,24bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), 12b alpha, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA422P12LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2,24bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), 12b alpha, little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA444P12BE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4,36bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), 12b alpha, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA444P12LE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4,36bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), 12b alpha, little-endian
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_NV24,      ///< planar YUV 4:4:4, 24bpp, 1 plane for Y and 1 plane for the UV components, which are interleaved (first byte U and the following byte V)
+    AV_PIX_FMT_NV42,      ///< as above, but U and V bytes are swapped
+
+    /**
+     * Vulkan hardware images.
+     *
+     * data[0] points to an AVVkFrame
+     */
+    AV_PIX_FMT_VULKAN,
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_Y210BE,    ///< packed YUV 4:2:2 like YUYV422, 20bpp, data in the high bits, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_Y210LE,    ///< packed YUV 4:2:2 like YUYV422, 20bpp, data in the high bits, little-endian
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_X2RGB10LE, ///< packed RGB 10:10:10, 30bpp, (msb)2X 10R 10G 10B(lsb), little-endian, X=unused/undefined
+    AV_PIX_FMT_X2RGB10BE, ///< packed RGB 10:10:10, 30bpp, (msb)2X 10R 10G 10B(lsb), big-endian, X=unused/undefined
+    AV_PIX_FMT_X2BGR10LE, ///< packed BGR 10:10:10, 30bpp, (msb)2X 10B 10G 10R(lsb), little-endian, X=unused/undefined
+    AV_PIX_FMT_X2BGR10BE, ///< packed BGR 10:10:10, 30bpp, (msb)2X 10B 10G 10R(lsb), big-endian, X=unused/undefined
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_P210BE,      ///< interleaved chroma YUV 4:2:2, 20bpp, data in the high bits, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_P210LE,      ///< interleaved chroma YUV 4:2:2, 20bpp, data in the high bits, little-endian
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_P410BE,      ///< interleaved chroma YUV 4:4:4, 30bpp, data in the high bits, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_P410LE,      ///< interleaved chroma YUV 4:4:4, 30bpp, data in the high bits, little-endian
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_P216BE,      ///< interleaved chroma YUV 4:2:2, 32bpp, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_P216LE,      ///< interleaved chroma YUV 4:2:2, 32bpp, little-endian
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_P416BE,      ///< interleaved chroma YUV 4:4:4, 48bpp, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_P416LE,      ///< interleaved chroma YUV 4:4:4, 48bpp, little-endian
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_VUYA,        ///< packed VUYA 4:4:4, 32bpp, VUYAVUYA...
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_RGBAF16BE,   ///< IEEE-754 half precision packed RGBA 16:16:16:16, 64bpp, RGBARGBA..., big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_RGBAF16LE,   ///< IEEE-754 half precision packed RGBA 16:16:16:16, 64bpp, RGBARGBA..., little-endian
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_VUYX,        ///< packed VUYX 4:4:4, 32bpp, Variant of VUYA where alpha channel is left undefined
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_P012LE,      ///< like NV12, with 12bpp per component, data in the high bits, zeros in the low bits, little-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_P012BE,      ///< like NV12, with 12bpp per component, data in the high bits, zeros in the low bits, big-endian
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_Y212BE,      ///< packed YUV 4:2:2 like YUYV422, 24bpp, data in the high bits, zeros in the low bits, big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_Y212LE,      ///< packed YUV 4:2:2 like YUYV422, 24bpp, data in the high bits, zeros in the low bits, little-endian
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_XV30BE,      ///< packed XVYU 4:4:4, 32bpp, (msb)2X 10V 10Y 10U(lsb), big-endian, variant of Y410 where alpha channel is left undefined
+    AV_PIX_FMT_XV30LE,      ///< packed XVYU 4:4:4, 32bpp, (msb)2X 10V 10Y 10U(lsb), little-endian, variant of Y410 where alpha channel is left undefined
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_XV36BE,      ///< packed XVYU 4:4:4, 48bpp, data in the high bits, zeros in the low bits, big-endian, variant of Y412 where alpha channel is left undefined
+    AV_PIX_FMT_XV36LE,      ///< packed XVYU 4:4:4, 48bpp, data in the high bits, zeros in the low bits, little-endian, variant of Y412 where alpha channel is left undefined
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_RGBF32BE,    ///< IEEE-754 single precision packed RGB 32:32:32, 96bpp, RGBRGB..., big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_RGBF32LE,    ///< IEEE-754 single precision packed RGB 32:32:32, 96bpp, RGBRGB..., little-endian
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_RGBAF32BE,   ///< IEEE-754 single precision packed RGBA 32:32:32:32, 128bpp, RGBARGBA..., big-endian
+    AV_PIX_FMT_RGBAF32LE,   ///< IEEE-754 single precision packed RGBA 32:32:32:32, 128bpp, RGBARGBA..., little-endian
+
+    AV_PIX_FMT_NB         ///< number of pixel formats, DO NOT USE THIS if you want to link with shared libav* because the number of formats might differ between versions
+};
+
+#if AV_HAVE_BIGENDIAN
+#   define AV_PIX_FMT_NE(be, le) AV_PIX_FMT_##be
+#else
+#   define AV_PIX_FMT_NE(be, le) AV_PIX_FMT_##le
+#endif
+
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_RGB32   AV_PIX_FMT_NE(ARGB, BGRA)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_RGB32_1 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(RGBA, ABGR)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_BGR32   AV_PIX_FMT_NE(ABGR, RGBA)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_BGR32_1 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(BGRA, ARGB)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_0RGB32  AV_PIX_FMT_NE(0RGB, BGR0)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_0BGR32  AV_PIX_FMT_NE(0BGR, RGB0)
+
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_GRAY9  AV_PIX_FMT_NE(GRAY9BE,  GRAY9LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_GRAY10 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(GRAY10BE, GRAY10LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_GRAY12 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(GRAY12BE, GRAY12LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_GRAY14 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(GRAY14BE, GRAY14LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_GRAY16 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(GRAY16BE, GRAY16LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YA16   AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YA16BE,   YA16LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_RGB48  AV_PIX_FMT_NE(RGB48BE,  RGB48LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_RGB565 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(RGB565BE, RGB565LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_RGB555 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(RGB555BE, RGB555LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_RGB444 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(RGB444BE, RGB444LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_RGBA64 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(RGBA64BE, RGBA64LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_BGR48  AV_PIX_FMT_NE(BGR48BE,  BGR48LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_BGR565 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(BGR565BE, BGR565LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_BGR555 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(BGR555BE, BGR555LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_BGR444 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(BGR444BE, BGR444LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_BGRA64 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(BGRA64BE, BGRA64LE)
+
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P9  AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV420P9BE , YUV420P9LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P9  AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV422P9BE , YUV422P9LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P9  AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV444P9BE , YUV444P9LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P10 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV420P10BE, YUV420P10LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P10 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV422P10BE, YUV422P10LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV440P10 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV440P10BE, YUV440P10LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P10 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV444P10BE, YUV444P10LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P12 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV420P12BE, YUV420P12LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P12 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV422P12BE, YUV422P12LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV440P12 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV440P12BE, YUV440P12LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P12 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV444P12BE, YUV444P12LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P14 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV420P14BE, YUV420P14LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P14 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV422P14BE, YUV422P14LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P14 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV444P14BE, YUV444P14LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P16 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV420P16BE, YUV420P16LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P16 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV422P16BE, YUV422P16LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P16 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV444P16BE, YUV444P16LE)
+
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP9     AV_PIX_FMT_NE(GBRP9BE ,    GBRP9LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP10    AV_PIX_FMT_NE(GBRP10BE,    GBRP10LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP12    AV_PIX_FMT_NE(GBRP12BE,    GBRP12LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP14    AV_PIX_FMT_NE(GBRP14BE,    GBRP14LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP16    AV_PIX_FMT_NE(GBRP16BE,    GBRP16LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_GBRAP10   AV_PIX_FMT_NE(GBRAP10BE,   GBRAP10LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_GBRAP12   AV_PIX_FMT_NE(GBRAP12BE,   GBRAP12LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_GBRAP16   AV_PIX_FMT_NE(GBRAP16BE,   GBRAP16LE)
+
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_BGGR16 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(BAYER_BGGR16BE,    BAYER_BGGR16LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_RGGB16 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(BAYER_RGGB16BE,    BAYER_RGGB16LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_GBRG16 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(BAYER_GBRG16BE,    BAYER_GBRG16LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_GRBG16 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(BAYER_GRBG16BE,    BAYER_GRBG16LE)
+
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_GBRPF32    AV_PIX_FMT_NE(GBRPF32BE,  GBRPF32LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_GBRAPF32   AV_PIX_FMT_NE(GBRAPF32BE, GBRAPF32LE)
+
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_GRAYF32    AV_PIX_FMT_NE(GRAYF32BE, GRAYF32LE)
+
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA420P9  AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUVA420P9BE , YUVA420P9LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA422P9  AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUVA422P9BE , YUVA422P9LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA444P9  AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUVA444P9BE , YUVA444P9LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA420P10 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUVA420P10BE, YUVA420P10LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA422P10 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUVA422P10BE, YUVA422P10LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA444P10 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUVA444P10BE, YUVA444P10LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA422P12 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUVA422P12BE, YUVA422P12LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA444P12 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUVA444P12BE, YUVA444P12LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA420P16 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUVA420P16BE, YUVA420P16LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA422P16 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUVA422P16BE, YUVA422P16LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA444P16 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUVA444P16BE, YUVA444P16LE)
+
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_XYZ12      AV_PIX_FMT_NE(XYZ12BE, XYZ12LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_NV20       AV_PIX_FMT_NE(NV20BE,  NV20LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_AYUV64     AV_PIX_FMT_NE(AYUV64BE, AYUV64LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_P010       AV_PIX_FMT_NE(P010BE,  P010LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_P012       AV_PIX_FMT_NE(P012BE,  P012LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_P016       AV_PIX_FMT_NE(P016BE,  P016LE)
+
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_Y210       AV_PIX_FMT_NE(Y210BE,  Y210LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_Y212       AV_PIX_FMT_NE(Y212BE,  Y212LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_XV30       AV_PIX_FMT_NE(XV30BE,  XV30LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_XV36       AV_PIX_FMT_NE(XV36BE,  XV36LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_X2RGB10    AV_PIX_FMT_NE(X2RGB10BE, X2RGB10LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_X2BGR10    AV_PIX_FMT_NE(X2BGR10BE, X2BGR10LE)
+
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_P210       AV_PIX_FMT_NE(P210BE, P210LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_P410       AV_PIX_FMT_NE(P410BE, P410LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_P216       AV_PIX_FMT_NE(P216BE, P216LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_P416       AV_PIX_FMT_NE(P416BE, P416LE)
+
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_RGBAF16    AV_PIX_FMT_NE(RGBAF16BE, RGBAF16LE)
+
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_RGBF32     AV_PIX_FMT_NE(RGBF32BE, RGBF32LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_RGBAF32    AV_PIX_FMT_NE(RGBAF32BE, RGBAF32LE)
+
+/**
+  * Chromaticity coordinates of the source primaries.
+  * These values match the ones defined by ISO/IEC 23091-2_2019 subclause 8.1 and ITU-T H.273.
+  */
+enum AVColorPrimaries {
+    AVCOL_PRI_RESERVED0   = 0,
+    AVCOL_PRI_BT709       = 1,  ///< also ITU-R BT1361 / IEC 61966-2-4 / SMPTE RP 177 Annex B
+    AVCOL_PRI_UNSPECIFIED = 2,
+    AVCOL_PRI_RESERVED    = 3,
+    AVCOL_PRI_BT470M      = 4,  ///< also FCC Title 47 Code of Federal Regulations 73.682 (a)(20)
+
+    AVCOL_PRI_BT470BG     = 5,  ///< also ITU-R BT601-6 625 / ITU-R BT1358 625 / ITU-R BT1700 625 PAL & SECAM
+    AVCOL_PRI_SMPTE170M   = 6,  ///< also ITU-R BT601-6 525 / ITU-R BT1358 525 / ITU-R BT1700 NTSC
+    AVCOL_PRI_SMPTE240M   = 7,  ///< identical to above, also called "SMPTE C" even though it uses D65
+    AVCOL_PRI_FILM        = 8,  ///< colour filters using Illuminant C
+    AVCOL_PRI_BT2020      = 9,  ///< ITU-R BT2020
+    AVCOL_PRI_SMPTE428    = 10, ///< SMPTE ST 428-1 (CIE 1931 XYZ)
+    AVCOL_PRI_SMPTEST428_1 = AVCOL_PRI_SMPTE428,
+    AVCOL_PRI_SMPTE431    = 11, ///< SMPTE ST 431-2 (2011) / DCI P3
+    AVCOL_PRI_SMPTE432    = 12, ///< SMPTE ST 432-1 (2010) / P3 D65 / Display P3
+    AVCOL_PRI_EBU3213     = 22, ///< EBU Tech. 3213-E (nothing there) / one of JEDEC P22 group phosphors
+    AVCOL_PRI_JEDEC_P22   = AVCOL_PRI_EBU3213,
+    AVCOL_PRI_NB                ///< Not part of ABI
+};
+
+/**
+ * Color Transfer Characteristic.
+ * These values match the ones defined by ISO/IEC 23091-2_2019 subclause 8.2.
+ */
+enum AVColorTransferCharacteristic {
+    AVCOL_TRC_RESERVED0    = 0,
+    AVCOL_TRC_BT709        = 1,  ///< also ITU-R BT1361
+    AVCOL_TRC_UNSPECIFIED  = 2,
+    AVCOL_TRC_RESERVED     = 3,
+    AVCOL_TRC_GAMMA22      = 4,  ///< also ITU-R BT470M / ITU-R BT1700 625 PAL & SECAM
+    AVCOL_TRC_GAMMA28      = 5,  ///< also ITU-R BT470BG
+    AVCOL_TRC_SMPTE170M    = 6,  ///< also ITU-R BT601-6 525 or 625 / ITU-R BT1358 525 or 625 / ITU-R BT1700 NTSC
+    AVCOL_TRC_SMPTE240M    = 7,
+    AVCOL_TRC_LINEAR       = 8,  ///< "Linear transfer characteristics"
+    AVCOL_TRC_LOG          = 9,  ///< "Logarithmic transfer characteristic (100:1 range)"
+    AVCOL_TRC_LOG_SQRT     = 10, ///< "Logarithmic transfer characteristic (100 * Sqrt(10) : 1 range)"
+    AVCOL_TRC_IEC61966_2_4 = 11, ///< IEC 61966-2-4
+    AVCOL_TRC_BT1361_ECG   = 12, ///< ITU-R BT1361 Extended Colour Gamut
+    AVCOL_TRC_IEC61966_2_1 = 13, ///< IEC 61966-2-1 (sRGB or sYCC)
+    AVCOL_TRC_BT2020_10    = 14, ///< ITU-R BT2020 for 10-bit system
+    AVCOL_TRC_BT2020_12    = 15, ///< ITU-R BT2020 for 12-bit system
+    AVCOL_TRC_SMPTE2084    = 16, ///< SMPTE ST 2084 for 10-, 12-, 14- and 16-bit systems
+    AVCOL_TRC_SMPTEST2084  = AVCOL_TRC_SMPTE2084,
+    AVCOL_TRC_SMPTE428     = 17, ///< SMPTE ST 428-1
+    AVCOL_TRC_SMPTEST428_1 = AVCOL_TRC_SMPTE428,
+    AVCOL_TRC_ARIB_STD_B67 = 18, ///< ARIB STD-B67, known as "Hybrid log-gamma"
+    AVCOL_TRC_NB                 ///< Not part of ABI
+};
+
+/**
+ * YUV colorspace type.
+ * These values match the ones defined by ISO/IEC 23091-2_2019 subclause 8.3.
+ */
+enum AVColorSpace {
+    AVCOL_SPC_RGB         = 0,  ///< order of coefficients is actually GBR, also IEC 61966-2-1 (sRGB), YZX and ST 428-1
+    AVCOL_SPC_BT709       = 1,  ///< also ITU-R BT1361 / IEC 61966-2-4 xvYCC709 / derived in SMPTE RP 177 Annex B
+    AVCOL_SPC_UNSPECIFIED = 2,
+    AVCOL_SPC_RESERVED    = 3,  ///< reserved for future use by ITU-T and ISO/IEC just like 15-255 are
+    AVCOL_SPC_FCC         = 4,  ///< FCC Title 47 Code of Federal Regulations 73.682 (a)(20)
+    AVCOL_SPC_BT470BG     = 5,  ///< also ITU-R BT601-6 625 / ITU-R BT1358 625 / ITU-R BT1700 625 PAL & SECAM / IEC 61966-2-4 xvYCC601
+    AVCOL_SPC_SMPTE170M   = 6,  ///< also ITU-R BT601-6 525 / ITU-R BT1358 525 / ITU-R BT1700 NTSC / functionally identical to above
+    AVCOL_SPC_SMPTE240M   = 7,  ///< derived from 170M primaries and D65 white point, 170M is derived from BT470 System M's primaries
+    AVCOL_SPC_YCGCO       = 8,  ///< used by Dirac / VC-2 and H.264 FRext, see ITU-T SG16
+    AVCOL_SPC_YCOCG       = AVCOL_SPC_YCGCO,
+    AVCOL_SPC_BT2020_NCL  = 9,  ///< ITU-R BT2020 non-constant luminance system
+    AVCOL_SPC_BT2020_CL   = 10, ///< ITU-R BT2020 constant luminance system
+    AVCOL_SPC_SMPTE2085   = 11, ///< SMPTE 2085, Y'D'zD'x
+    AVCOL_SPC_CHROMA_DERIVED_NCL = 12, ///< Chromaticity-derived non-constant luminance system
+    AVCOL_SPC_CHROMA_DERIVED_CL = 13, ///< Chromaticity-derived constant luminance system
+    AVCOL_SPC_ICTCP       = 14, ///< ITU-R BT.2100-0, ICtCp
+    AVCOL_SPC_NB                ///< Not part of ABI
+};
+
+/**
+ * Visual content value range.
+ *
+ * These values are based on definitions that can be found in multiple
+ * specifications, such as ITU-T BT.709 (3.4 - Quantization of RGB, luminance
+ * and colour-difference signals), ITU-T BT.2020 (Table 5 - Digital
+ * Representation) as well as ITU-T BT.2100 (Table 9 - Digital 10- and 12-bit
+ * integer representation). At the time of writing, the BT.2100 one is
+ * recommended, as it also defines the full range representation.
+ *
+ * Common definitions:
+ *   - For RGB and luma planes such as Y in YCbCr and I in ICtCp,
+ *     'E' is the original value in range of 0.0 to 1.0.
+ *   - For chroma planes such as Cb,Cr and Ct,Cp, 'E' is the original
+ *     value in range of -0.5 to 0.5.
+ *   - 'n' is the output bit depth.
+ *   - For additional definitions such as rounding and clipping to valid n
+ *     bit unsigned integer range, please refer to BT.2100 (Table 9).
+ */
+enum AVColorRange {
+    AVCOL_RANGE_UNSPECIFIED = 0,
+
+    /**
+     * Narrow or limited range content.
+     *
+     * - For luma planes:
+     *
+     *       (219 * E + 16) * 2^(n-8)
+     *
+     *   F.ex. the range of 16-235 for 8 bits
+     *
+     * - For chroma planes:
+     *
+     *       (224 * E + 128) * 2^(n-8)
+     *
+     *   F.ex. the range of 16-240 for 8 bits
+     */
+    AVCOL_RANGE_MPEG        = 1,
+
+    /**
+     * Full range content.
+     *
+     * - For RGB and luma planes:
+     *
+     *       (2^n - 1) * E
+     *
+     *   F.ex. the range of 0-255 for 8 bits
+     *
+     * - For chroma planes:
+     *
+     *       (2^n - 1) * E + 2^(n - 1)
+     *
+     *   F.ex. the range of 1-255 for 8 bits
+     */
+    AVCOL_RANGE_JPEG        = 2,
+    AVCOL_RANGE_NB               ///< Not part of ABI
+};
+
+/**
+ * Location of chroma samples.
+ *
+ * Illustration showing the location of the first (top left) chroma sample of the
+ * image, the left shows only luma, the right
+ * shows the location of the chroma sample, the 2 could be imagined to overlay
+ * each other but are drawn separately due to limitations of ASCII
+ *
+ *                1st 2nd       1st 2nd horizontal luma sample positions
+ *                 v   v         v   v
+ *                 ______        ______
+ *1st luma line > |X   X ...    |3 4 X ...     X are luma samples,
+ *                |             |1 2           1-6 are possible chroma positions
+ *2nd luma line > |X   X ...    |5 6 X ...     0 is undefined/unknown position
+ */
+enum AVChromaLocation {
+    AVCHROMA_LOC_UNSPECIFIED = 0,
+    AVCHROMA_LOC_LEFT        = 1, ///< MPEG-2/4 4:2:0, H.264 default for 4:2:0
+    AVCHROMA_LOC_CENTER      = 2, ///< MPEG-1 4:2:0, JPEG 4:2:0, H.263 4:2:0
+    AVCHROMA_LOC_TOPLEFT     = 3, ///< ITU-R 601, SMPTE 274M 296M S314M(DV 4:1:1), mpeg2 4:2:2
+    AVCHROMA_LOC_TOP         = 4,
+    AVCHROMA_LOC_BOTTOMLEFT  = 5,
+    AVCHROMA_LOC_BOTTOM      = 6,
+    AVCHROMA_LOC_NB               ///< Not part of ABI
+};
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_PIXFMT_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/random_seed.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/random_seed.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0462a04
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/random_seed.h
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2009 Baptiste Coudurier <baptiste.coudurier@gmail.com>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_RANDOM_SEED_H
+#define AVUTIL_RANDOM_SEED_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_crypto
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Get a seed to use in conjunction with random functions.
+ * This function tries to provide a good seed at a best effort bases.
+ * Its possible to call this function multiple times if more bits are needed.
+ * It can be quite slow, which is why it should only be used as seed for a faster
+ * PRNG. The quality of the seed depends on the platform.
+ */
+uint32_t av_get_random_seed(void);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_RANDOM_SEED_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/rational.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/rational.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8cbfc8e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/rational.h
@@ -0,0 +1,221 @@
+/*
+ * rational numbers
+ * Copyright (c) 2003 Michael Niedermayer <michaelni@gmx.at>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavu_math_rational
+ * Utilties for rational number calculation.
+ * @author Michael Niedermayer <michaelni@gmx.at>
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_RATIONAL_H
+#define AVUTIL_RATIONAL_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include <limits.h>
+#include "attributes.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_math_rational AVRational
+ * @ingroup lavu_math
+ * Rational number calculation.
+ *
+ * While rational numbers can be expressed as floating-point numbers, the
+ * conversion process is a lossy one, so are floating-point operations. On the
+ * other hand, the nature of FFmpeg demands highly accurate calculation of
+ * timestamps. This set of rational number utilities serves as a generic
+ * interface for manipulating rational numbers as pairs of numerators and
+ * denominators.
+ *
+ * Many of the functions that operate on AVRational's have the suffix `_q`, in
+ * reference to the mathematical symbol "ℚ" (Q) which denotes the set of all
+ * rational numbers.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Rational number (pair of numerator and denominator).
+ */
+typedef struct AVRational{
+    int num; ///< Numerator
+    int den; ///< Denominator
+} AVRational;
+
+/**
+ * Create an AVRational.
+ *
+ * Useful for compilers that do not support compound literals.
+ *
+ * @note The return value is not reduced.
+ * @see av_reduce()
+ */
+static inline AVRational av_make_q(int num, int den)
+{
+    AVRational r = { num, den };
+    return r;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Compare two rationals.
+ *
+ * @param a First rational
+ * @param b Second rational
+ *
+ * @return One of the following values:
+ *         - 0 if `a == b`
+ *         - 1 if `a > b`
+ *         - -1 if `a < b`
+ *         - `INT_MIN` if one of the values is of the form `0 / 0`
+ */
+static inline int av_cmp_q(AVRational a, AVRational b){
+    const int64_t tmp= a.num * (int64_t)b.den - b.num * (int64_t)a.den;
+
+    if(tmp) return (int)((tmp ^ a.den ^ b.den)>>63)|1;
+    else if(b.den && a.den) return 0;
+    else if(a.num && b.num) return (a.num>>31) - (b.num>>31);
+    else                    return INT_MIN;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Convert an AVRational to a `double`.
+ * @param a AVRational to convert
+ * @return `a` in floating-point form
+ * @see av_d2q()
+ */
+static inline double av_q2d(AVRational a){
+    return a.num / (double) a.den;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Reduce a fraction.
+ *
+ * This is useful for framerate calculations.
+ *
+ * @param[out] dst_num Destination numerator
+ * @param[out] dst_den Destination denominator
+ * @param[in]      num Source numerator
+ * @param[in]      den Source denominator
+ * @param[in]      max Maximum allowed values for `dst_num` & `dst_den`
+ * @return 1 if the operation is exact, 0 otherwise
+ */
+int av_reduce(int *dst_num, int *dst_den, int64_t num, int64_t den, int64_t max);
+
+/**
+ * Multiply two rationals.
+ * @param b First rational
+ * @param c Second rational
+ * @return b*c
+ */
+AVRational av_mul_q(AVRational b, AVRational c) av_const;
+
+/**
+ * Divide one rational by another.
+ * @param b First rational
+ * @param c Second rational
+ * @return b/c
+ */
+AVRational av_div_q(AVRational b, AVRational c) av_const;
+
+/**
+ * Add two rationals.
+ * @param b First rational
+ * @param c Second rational
+ * @return b+c
+ */
+AVRational av_add_q(AVRational b, AVRational c) av_const;
+
+/**
+ * Subtract one rational from another.
+ * @param b First rational
+ * @param c Second rational
+ * @return b-c
+ */
+AVRational av_sub_q(AVRational b, AVRational c) av_const;
+
+/**
+ * Invert a rational.
+ * @param q value
+ * @return 1 / q
+ */
+static av_always_inline AVRational av_inv_q(AVRational q)
+{
+    AVRational r = { q.den, q.num };
+    return r;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Convert a double precision floating point number to a rational.
+ *
+ * In case of infinity, the returned value is expressed as `{1, 0}` or
+ * `{-1, 0}` depending on the sign.
+ *
+ * @param d   `double` to convert
+ * @param max Maximum allowed numerator and denominator
+ * @return `d` in AVRational form
+ * @see av_q2d()
+ */
+AVRational av_d2q(double d, int max) av_const;
+
+/**
+ * Find which of the two rationals is closer to another rational.
+ *
+ * @param q     Rational to be compared against
+ * @param q1    Rational to be tested
+ * @param q2    Rational to be tested
+ * @return One of the following values:
+ *         - 1 if `q1` is nearer to `q` than `q2`
+ *         - -1 if `q2` is nearer to `q` than `q1`
+ *         - 0 if they have the same distance
+ */
+int av_nearer_q(AVRational q, AVRational q1, AVRational q2);
+
+/**
+ * Find the value in a list of rationals nearest a given reference rational.
+ *
+ * @param q      Reference rational
+ * @param q_list Array of rationals terminated by `{0, 0}`
+ * @return Index of the nearest value found in the array
+ */
+int av_find_nearest_q_idx(AVRational q, const AVRational* q_list);
+
+/**
+ * Convert an AVRational to a IEEE 32-bit `float` expressed in fixed-point
+ * format.
+ *
+ * @param q Rational to be converted
+ * @return Equivalent floating-point value, expressed as an unsigned 32-bit
+ *         integer.
+ * @note The returned value is platform-indepedant.
+ */
+uint32_t av_q2intfloat(AVRational q);
+
+/**
+ * Return the best rational so that a and b are multiple of it.
+ * If the resulting denominator is larger than max_den, return def.
+ */
+AVRational av_gcd_q(AVRational a, AVRational b, int max_den, AVRational def);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_RATIONAL_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/rc4.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/rc4.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bf0ca6e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/rc4.h
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+/*
+ * RC4 encryption/decryption/pseudo-random number generator
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_RC4_H
+#define AVUTIL_RC4_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_rc4 RC4
+ * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+ * @{
+ */
+
+typedef struct AVRC4 {
+    uint8_t state[256];
+    int x, y;
+} AVRC4;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVRC4 context.
+ */
+AVRC4 *av_rc4_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes an AVRC4 context.
+ *
+ * @param d pointer to the AVRC4 context
+ * @param key buffer containig the key
+ * @param key_bits must be a multiple of 8
+ * @param decrypt 0 for encryption, 1 for decryption, currently has no effect
+ * @return zero on success, negative value otherwise
+ */
+int av_rc4_init(struct AVRC4 *d, const uint8_t *key, int key_bits, int decrypt);
+
+/**
+ * @brief Encrypts / decrypts using the RC4 algorithm.
+ *
+ * @param d pointer to the AVRC4 context
+ * @param count number of bytes
+ * @param dst destination array, can be equal to src
+ * @param src source array, can be equal to dst, may be NULL
+ * @param iv not (yet) used for RC4, should be NULL
+ * @param decrypt 0 for encryption, 1 for decryption, not (yet) used
+ */
+void av_rc4_crypt(struct AVRC4 *d, uint8_t *dst, const uint8_t *src, int count, uint8_t *iv, int decrypt);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_RC4_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/replaygain.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/replaygain.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b49bf1a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/replaygain.h
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_REPLAYGAIN_H
+#define AVUTIL_REPLAYGAIN_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+/**
+ * ReplayGain information (see
+ * http://wiki.hydrogenaudio.org/index.php?title=ReplayGain_1.0_specification).
+ * The size of this struct is a part of the public ABI.
+ */
+typedef struct AVReplayGain {
+    /**
+     * Track replay gain in microbels (divide by 100000 to get the value in dB).
+     * Should be set to INT32_MIN when unknown.
+     */
+    int32_t track_gain;
+    /**
+     * Peak track amplitude, with 100000 representing full scale (but values
+     * may overflow). 0 when unknown.
+     */
+    uint32_t track_peak;
+    /**
+     * Same as track_gain, but for the whole album.
+     */
+    int32_t album_gain;
+    /**
+     * Same as track_peak, but for the whole album,
+     */
+    uint32_t album_peak;
+} AVReplayGain;
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_REPLAYGAIN_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/ripemd.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/ripemd.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9df9f90
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/ripemd.h
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (C) 2007 Michael Niedermayer <michaelni@gmx.at>
+ * Copyright (C) 2013 James Almer <jamrial@gmail.com>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavu_ripemd
+ * Public header for RIPEMD hash function implementation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_RIPEMD_H
+#define AVUTIL_RIPEMD_H
+
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+#include "attributes.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_ripemd RIPEMD
+ * @ingroup lavu_hash
+ * RIPEMD hash function implementation.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+extern const int av_ripemd_size;
+
+struct AVRIPEMD;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVRIPEMD context.
+ */
+struct AVRIPEMD *av_ripemd_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize RIPEMD hashing.
+ *
+ * @param context pointer to the function context (of size av_ripemd_size)
+ * @param bits    number of bits in digest (128, 160, 256 or 320 bits)
+ * @return        zero if initialization succeeded, -1 otherwise
+ */
+int av_ripemd_init(struct AVRIPEMD* context, int bits);
+
+/**
+ * Update hash value.
+ *
+ * @param context hash function context
+ * @param data    input data to update hash with
+ * @param len     input data length
+ */
+void av_ripemd_update(struct AVRIPEMD* context, const uint8_t* data, size_t len);
+
+/**
+ * Finish hashing and output digest value.
+ *
+ * @param context hash function context
+ * @param digest  buffer where output digest value is stored
+ */
+void av_ripemd_final(struct AVRIPEMD* context, uint8_t *digest);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_RIPEMD_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/samplefmt.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/samplefmt.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bad0e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/samplefmt.h
@@ -0,0 +1,269 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_SAMPLEFMT_H
+#define AVUTIL_SAMPLEFMT_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_audio
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_sampfmts Audio sample formats
+ *
+ * Audio sample format enumeration and related convenience functions.
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Audio sample formats
+ *
+ * - The data described by the sample format is always in native-endian order.
+ *   Sample values can be expressed by native C types, hence the lack of a signed
+ *   24-bit sample format even though it is a common raw audio data format.
+ *
+ * - The floating-point formats are based on full volume being in the range
+ *   [-1.0, 1.0]. Any values outside this range are beyond full volume level.
+ *
+ * - The data layout as used in av_samples_fill_arrays() and elsewhere in FFmpeg
+ *   (such as AVFrame in libavcodec) is as follows:
+ *
+ * @par
+ * For planar sample formats, each audio channel is in a separate data plane,
+ * and linesize is the buffer size, in bytes, for a single plane. All data
+ * planes must be the same size. For packed sample formats, only the first data
+ * plane is used, and samples for each channel are interleaved. In this case,
+ * linesize is the buffer size, in bytes, for the 1 plane.
+ *
+ */
+enum AVSampleFormat {
+    AV_SAMPLE_FMT_NONE = -1,
+    AV_SAMPLE_FMT_U8,          ///< unsigned 8 bits
+    AV_SAMPLE_FMT_S16,         ///< signed 16 bits
+    AV_SAMPLE_FMT_S32,         ///< signed 32 bits
+    AV_SAMPLE_FMT_FLT,         ///< float
+    AV_SAMPLE_FMT_DBL,         ///< double
+
+    AV_SAMPLE_FMT_U8P,         ///< unsigned 8 bits, planar
+    AV_SAMPLE_FMT_S16P,        ///< signed 16 bits, planar
+    AV_SAMPLE_FMT_S32P,        ///< signed 32 bits, planar
+    AV_SAMPLE_FMT_FLTP,        ///< float, planar
+    AV_SAMPLE_FMT_DBLP,        ///< double, planar
+    AV_SAMPLE_FMT_S64,         ///< signed 64 bits
+    AV_SAMPLE_FMT_S64P,        ///< signed 64 bits, planar
+
+    AV_SAMPLE_FMT_NB           ///< Number of sample formats. DO NOT USE if linking dynamically
+};
+
+/**
+ * Return the name of sample_fmt, or NULL if sample_fmt is not
+ * recognized.
+ */
+const char *av_get_sample_fmt_name(enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Return a sample format corresponding to name, or AV_SAMPLE_FMT_NONE
+ * on error.
+ */
+enum AVSampleFormat av_get_sample_fmt(const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * Return the planar<->packed alternative form of the given sample format, or
+ * AV_SAMPLE_FMT_NONE on error. If the passed sample_fmt is already in the
+ * requested planar/packed format, the format returned is the same as the
+ * input.
+ */
+enum AVSampleFormat av_get_alt_sample_fmt(enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt, int planar);
+
+/**
+ * Get the packed alternative form of the given sample format.
+ *
+ * If the passed sample_fmt is already in packed format, the format returned is
+ * the same as the input.
+ *
+ * @return  the packed alternative form of the given sample format or
+            AV_SAMPLE_FMT_NONE on error.
+ */
+enum AVSampleFormat av_get_packed_sample_fmt(enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Get the planar alternative form of the given sample format.
+ *
+ * If the passed sample_fmt is already in planar format, the format returned is
+ * the same as the input.
+ *
+ * @return  the planar alternative form of the given sample format or
+            AV_SAMPLE_FMT_NONE on error.
+ */
+enum AVSampleFormat av_get_planar_sample_fmt(enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Generate a string corresponding to the sample format with
+ * sample_fmt, or a header if sample_fmt is negative.
+ *
+ * @param buf the buffer where to write the string
+ * @param buf_size the size of buf
+ * @param sample_fmt the number of the sample format to print the
+ * corresponding info string, or a negative value to print the
+ * corresponding header.
+ * @return the pointer to the filled buffer or NULL if sample_fmt is
+ * unknown or in case of other errors
+ */
+char *av_get_sample_fmt_string(char *buf, int buf_size, enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Return number of bytes per sample.
+ *
+ * @param sample_fmt the sample format
+ * @return number of bytes per sample or zero if unknown for the given
+ * sample format
+ */
+int av_get_bytes_per_sample(enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Check if the sample format is planar.
+ *
+ * @param sample_fmt the sample format to inspect
+ * @return 1 if the sample format is planar, 0 if it is interleaved
+ */
+int av_sample_fmt_is_planar(enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Get the required buffer size for the given audio parameters.
+ *
+ * @param[out] linesize calculated linesize, may be NULL
+ * @param nb_channels   the number of channels
+ * @param nb_samples    the number of samples in a single channel
+ * @param sample_fmt    the sample format
+ * @param align         buffer size alignment (0 = default, 1 = no alignment)
+ * @return              required buffer size, or negative error code on failure
+ */
+int av_samples_get_buffer_size(int *linesize, int nb_channels, int nb_samples,
+                               enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt, int align);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_sampmanip Samples manipulation
+ *
+ * Functions that manipulate audio samples
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Fill plane data pointers and linesize for samples with sample
+ * format sample_fmt.
+ *
+ * The audio_data array is filled with the pointers to the samples data planes:
+ * for planar, set the start point of each channel's data within the buffer,
+ * for packed, set the start point of the entire buffer only.
+ *
+ * The value pointed to by linesize is set to the aligned size of each
+ * channel's data buffer for planar layout, or to the aligned size of the
+ * buffer for all channels for packed layout.
+ *
+ * The buffer in buf must be big enough to contain all the samples
+ * (use av_samples_get_buffer_size() to compute its minimum size),
+ * otherwise the audio_data pointers will point to invalid data.
+ *
+ * @see enum AVSampleFormat
+ * The documentation for AVSampleFormat describes the data layout.
+ *
+ * @param[out] audio_data  array to be filled with the pointer for each channel
+ * @param[out] linesize    calculated linesize, may be NULL
+ * @param buf              the pointer to a buffer containing the samples
+ * @param nb_channels      the number of channels
+ * @param nb_samples       the number of samples in a single channel
+ * @param sample_fmt       the sample format
+ * @param align            buffer size alignment (0 = default, 1 = no alignment)
+ * @return                 minimum size in bytes required for the buffer on success,
+ *                         or a negative error code on failure
+ */
+int av_samples_fill_arrays(uint8_t **audio_data, int *linesize,
+                           const uint8_t *buf,
+                           int nb_channels, int nb_samples,
+                           enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt, int align);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a samples buffer for nb_samples samples, and fill data pointers and
+ * linesize accordingly.
+ * The allocated samples buffer can be freed by using av_freep(&audio_data[0])
+ * Allocated data will be initialized to silence.
+ *
+ * @see enum AVSampleFormat
+ * The documentation for AVSampleFormat describes the data layout.
+ *
+ * @param[out] audio_data  array to be filled with the pointer for each channel
+ * @param[out] linesize    aligned size for audio buffer(s), may be NULL
+ * @param nb_channels      number of audio channels
+ * @param nb_samples       number of samples per channel
+ * @param sample_fmt       the sample format
+ * @param align            buffer size alignment (0 = default, 1 = no alignment)
+ * @return                 >=0 on success or a negative error code on failure
+ * @todo return the size of the allocated buffer in case of success at the next bump
+ * @see av_samples_fill_arrays()
+ * @see av_samples_alloc_array_and_samples()
+ */
+int av_samples_alloc(uint8_t **audio_data, int *linesize, int nb_channels,
+                     int nb_samples, enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt, int align);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a data pointers array, samples buffer for nb_samples
+ * samples, and fill data pointers and linesize accordingly.
+ *
+ * This is the same as av_samples_alloc(), but also allocates the data
+ * pointers array.
+ *
+ * @see av_samples_alloc()
+ */
+int av_samples_alloc_array_and_samples(uint8_t ***audio_data, int *linesize, int nb_channels,
+                                       int nb_samples, enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt, int align);
+
+/**
+ * Copy samples from src to dst.
+ *
+ * @param dst destination array of pointers to data planes
+ * @param src source array of pointers to data planes
+ * @param dst_offset offset in samples at which the data will be written to dst
+ * @param src_offset offset in samples at which the data will be read from src
+ * @param nb_samples number of samples to be copied
+ * @param nb_channels number of audio channels
+ * @param sample_fmt audio sample format
+ */
+int av_samples_copy(uint8_t **dst, uint8_t * const *src, int dst_offset,
+                    int src_offset, int nb_samples, int nb_channels,
+                    enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Fill an audio buffer with silence.
+ *
+ * @param audio_data  array of pointers to data planes
+ * @param offset      offset in samples at which to start filling
+ * @param nb_samples  number of samples to fill
+ * @param nb_channels number of audio channels
+ * @param sample_fmt  audio sample format
+ */
+int av_samples_set_silence(uint8_t **audio_data, int offset, int nb_samples,
+                           int nb_channels, enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ * @}
+ */
+#endif /* AVUTIL_SAMPLEFMT_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/sha.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/sha.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2e1220a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/sha.h
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (C) 2007 Michael Niedermayer <michaelni@gmx.at>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavu_sha
+ * Public header for SHA-1 & SHA-256 hash function implementations.
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_SHA_H
+#define AVUTIL_SHA_H
+
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+#include "attributes.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_sha SHA
+ * @ingroup lavu_hash
+ * SHA-1 and SHA-256 (Secure Hash Algorithm) hash function implementations.
+ *
+ * This module supports the following SHA hash functions:
+ *
+ * - SHA-1: 160 bits
+ * - SHA-224: 224 bits, as a variant of SHA-2
+ * - SHA-256: 256 bits, as a variant of SHA-2
+ *
+ * @see For SHA-384, SHA-512, and variants thereof, see @ref lavu_sha512.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+extern const int av_sha_size;
+
+struct AVSHA;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVSHA context.
+ */
+struct AVSHA *av_sha_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize SHA-1 or SHA-2 hashing.
+ *
+ * @param context pointer to the function context (of size av_sha_size)
+ * @param bits    number of bits in digest (SHA-1 - 160 bits, SHA-2 224 or 256 bits)
+ * @return        zero if initialization succeeded, -1 otherwise
+ */
+int av_sha_init(struct AVSHA* context, int bits);
+
+/**
+ * Update hash value.
+ *
+ * @param ctx     hash function context
+ * @param data    input data to update hash with
+ * @param len     input data length
+ */
+void av_sha_update(struct AVSHA *ctx, const uint8_t *data, size_t len);
+
+/**
+ * Finish hashing and output digest value.
+ *
+ * @param context hash function context
+ * @param digest  buffer where output digest value is stored
+ */
+void av_sha_final(struct AVSHA* context, uint8_t *digest);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_SHA_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/sha512.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/sha512.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a4a3f23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/sha512.h
@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (C) 2007 Michael Niedermayer <michaelni@gmx.at>
+ * Copyright (C) 2013 James Almer <jamrial@gmail.com>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavu_sha512
+ * Public header for SHA-512 implementation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_SHA512_H
+#define AVUTIL_SHA512_H
+
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+#include "attributes.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_sha512 SHA-512
+ * @ingroup lavu_hash
+ * SHA-512 (Secure Hash Algorithm) hash function implementations.
+ *
+ * This module supports the following SHA-2 hash functions:
+ *
+ * - SHA-512/224: 224 bits
+ * - SHA-512/256: 256 bits
+ * - SHA-384: 384 bits
+ * - SHA-512: 512 bits
+ *
+ * @see For SHA-1, SHA-256, and variants thereof, see @ref lavu_sha.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+extern const int av_sha512_size;
+
+struct AVSHA512;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVSHA512 context.
+ */
+struct AVSHA512 *av_sha512_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize SHA-2 512 hashing.
+ *
+ * @param context pointer to the function context (of size av_sha512_size)
+ * @param bits    number of bits in digest (224, 256, 384 or 512 bits)
+ * @return        zero if initialization succeeded, -1 otherwise
+ */
+int av_sha512_init(struct AVSHA512* context, int bits);
+
+/**
+ * Update hash value.
+ *
+ * @param context hash function context
+ * @param data    input data to update hash with
+ * @param len     input data length
+ */
+void av_sha512_update(struct AVSHA512* context, const uint8_t* data, size_t len);
+
+/**
+ * Finish hashing and output digest value.
+ *
+ * @param context hash function context
+ * @param digest  buffer where output digest value is stored
+ */
+void av_sha512_final(struct AVSHA512* context, uint8_t *digest);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_SHA512_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/spherical.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/spherical.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..828ac83
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/spherical.h
@@ -0,0 +1,227 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2016 Vittorio Giovara <vittorio.giovara@gmail.com>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavu_video_spherical
+ * Spherical video
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_SPHERICAL_H
+#define AVUTIL_SPHERICAL_H
+
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_video_spherical Spherical video mapping
+ * @ingroup lavu_video
+ *
+ * A spherical video file contains surfaces that need to be mapped onto a
+ * sphere. Depending on how the frame was converted, a different distortion
+ * transformation or surface recomposition function needs to be applied before
+ * the video should be mapped and displayed.
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Projection of the video surface(s) on a sphere.
+ */
+enum AVSphericalProjection {
+    /**
+     * Video represents a sphere mapped on a flat surface using
+     * equirectangular projection.
+     */
+    AV_SPHERICAL_EQUIRECTANGULAR,
+
+    /**
+     * Video frame is split into 6 faces of a cube, and arranged on a
+     * 3x2 layout. Faces are oriented upwards for the front, left, right,
+     * and back faces. The up face is oriented so the top of the face is
+     * forwards and the down face is oriented so the top of the face is
+     * to the back.
+     */
+    AV_SPHERICAL_CUBEMAP,
+
+    /**
+     * Video represents a portion of a sphere mapped on a flat surface
+     * using equirectangular projection. The @ref bounding fields indicate
+     * the position of the current video in a larger surface.
+     */
+    AV_SPHERICAL_EQUIRECTANGULAR_TILE,
+};
+
+/**
+ * This structure describes how to handle spherical videos, outlining
+ * information about projection, initial layout, and any other view modifier.
+ *
+ * @note The struct must be allocated with av_spherical_alloc() and
+ *       its size is not a part of the public ABI.
+ */
+typedef struct AVSphericalMapping {
+    /**
+     * Projection type.
+     */
+    enum AVSphericalProjection projection;
+
+    /**
+     * @name Initial orientation
+     * @{
+     * There fields describe additional rotations applied to the sphere after
+     * the video frame is mapped onto it. The sphere is rotated around the
+     * viewer, who remains stationary. The order of transformation is always
+     * yaw, followed by pitch, and finally by roll.
+     *
+     * The coordinate system matches the one defined in OpenGL, where the
+     * forward vector (z) is coming out of screen, and it is equivalent to
+     * a rotation matrix of R = r_y(yaw) * r_x(pitch) * r_z(roll).
+     *
+     * A positive yaw rotates the portion of the sphere in front of the viewer
+     * toward their right. A positive pitch rotates the portion of the sphere
+     * in front of the viewer upwards. A positive roll tilts the portion of
+     * the sphere in front of the viewer to the viewer's right.
+     *
+     * These values are exported as 16.16 fixed point.
+     *
+     * See this equirectangular projection as example:
+     *
+     * @code{.unparsed}
+     *                   Yaw
+     *     -180           0           180
+     *   90 +-------------+-------------+  180
+     *      |             |             |                  up
+     * P    |             |             |                 y|    forward
+     * i    |             ^             |                  |   /z
+     * t  0 +-------------X-------------+    0 Roll        |  /
+     * c    |             |             |                  | /
+     * h    |             |             |                 0|/_____right
+     *      |             |             |                        x
+     *  -90 +-------------+-------------+ -180
+     *
+     * X - the default camera center
+     * ^ - the default up vector
+     * @endcode
+     */
+    int32_t yaw;   ///< Rotation around the up vector [-180, 180].
+    int32_t pitch; ///< Rotation around the right vector [-90, 90].
+    int32_t roll;  ///< Rotation around the forward vector [-180, 180].
+    /**
+     * @}
+     */
+
+    /**
+     * @name Bounding rectangle
+     * @anchor bounding
+     * @{
+     * These fields indicate the location of the current tile, and where
+     * it should be mapped relative to the original surface. They are
+     * exported as 0.32 fixed point, and can be converted to classic
+     * pixel values with av_spherical_bounds().
+     *
+     * @code{.unparsed}
+     *      +----------------+----------+
+     *      |                |bound_top |
+     *      |            +--------+     |
+     *      | bound_left |tile    |     |
+     *      +<---------->|        |<--->+bound_right
+     *      |            +--------+     |
+     *      |                |          |
+     *      |    bound_bottom|          |
+     *      +----------------+----------+
+     * @endcode
+     *
+     * If needed, the original video surface dimensions can be derived
+     * by adding the current stream or frame size to the related bounds,
+     * like in the following example:
+     *
+     * @code{c}
+     *     original_width  = tile->width  + bound_left + bound_right;
+     *     original_height = tile->height + bound_top  + bound_bottom;
+     * @endcode
+     *
+     * @note These values are valid only for the tiled equirectangular
+     *       projection type (@ref AV_SPHERICAL_EQUIRECTANGULAR_TILE),
+     *       and should be ignored in all other cases.
+     */
+    uint32_t bound_left;   ///< Distance from the left edge
+    uint32_t bound_top;    ///< Distance from the top edge
+    uint32_t bound_right;  ///< Distance from the right edge
+    uint32_t bound_bottom; ///< Distance from the bottom edge
+    /**
+     * @}
+     */
+
+    /**
+     * Number of pixels to pad from the edge of each cube face.
+     *
+     * @note This value is valid for only for the cubemap projection type
+     *       (@ref AV_SPHERICAL_CUBEMAP), and should be ignored in all other
+     *       cases.
+     */
+    uint32_t padding;
+} AVSphericalMapping;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a AVSphericalVideo structure and initialize its fields to default
+ * values.
+ *
+ * @return the newly allocated struct or NULL on failure
+ */
+AVSphericalMapping *av_spherical_alloc(size_t *size);
+
+/**
+ * Convert the @ref bounding fields from an AVSphericalVideo
+ * from 0.32 fixed point to pixels.
+ *
+ * @param map    The AVSphericalVideo map to read bound values from.
+ * @param width  Width of the current frame or stream.
+ * @param height Height of the current frame or stream.
+ * @param left   Pixels from the left edge.
+ * @param top    Pixels from the top edge.
+ * @param right  Pixels from the right edge.
+ * @param bottom Pixels from the bottom edge.
+ */
+void av_spherical_tile_bounds(const AVSphericalMapping *map,
+                              size_t width, size_t height,
+                              size_t *left, size_t *top,
+                              size_t *right, size_t *bottom);
+
+/**
+ * Provide a human-readable name of a given AVSphericalProjection.
+ *
+ * @param projection The input AVSphericalProjection.
+ *
+ * @return The name of the AVSphericalProjection, or "unknown".
+ */
+const char *av_spherical_projection_name(enum AVSphericalProjection projection);
+
+/**
+ * Get the AVSphericalProjection form a human-readable name.
+ *
+ * @param name The input string.
+ *
+ * @return The AVSphericalProjection value, or -1 if not found.
+ */
+int av_spherical_from_name(const char *name);
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_SPHERICAL_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/stereo3d.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/stereo3d.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3aab959
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/stereo3d.h
@@ -0,0 +1,229 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2013 Vittorio Giovara <vittorio.giovara@gmail.com>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavu_video_stereo3d
+ * Stereoscopic video
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_STEREO3D_H
+#define AVUTIL_STEREO3D_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+#include "frame.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_video_stereo3d Stereo3D types and functions
+ * @ingroup lavu_video
+ *
+ * A stereoscopic video file consists in multiple views embedded in a single
+ * frame, usually describing two views of a scene. This file describes all
+ * possible codec-independent view arrangements.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * List of possible 3D Types
+ */
+enum AVStereo3DType {
+    /**
+     * Video is not stereoscopic (and metadata has to be there).
+     */
+    AV_STEREO3D_2D,
+
+    /**
+     * Views are next to each other.
+     *
+     * @code{.unparsed}
+     *    LLLLRRRR
+     *    LLLLRRRR
+     *    LLLLRRRR
+     *    ...
+     * @endcode
+     */
+    AV_STEREO3D_SIDEBYSIDE,
+
+    /**
+     * Views are on top of each other.
+     *
+     * @code{.unparsed}
+     *    LLLLLLLL
+     *    LLLLLLLL
+     *    RRRRRRRR
+     *    RRRRRRRR
+     * @endcode
+     */
+    AV_STEREO3D_TOPBOTTOM,
+
+    /**
+     * Views are alternated temporally.
+     *
+     * @code{.unparsed}
+     *     frame0   frame1   frame2   ...
+     *    LLLLLLLL RRRRRRRR LLLLLLLL
+     *    LLLLLLLL RRRRRRRR LLLLLLLL
+     *    LLLLLLLL RRRRRRRR LLLLLLLL
+     *    ...      ...      ...
+     * @endcode
+     */
+    AV_STEREO3D_FRAMESEQUENCE,
+
+    /**
+     * Views are packed in a checkerboard-like structure per pixel.
+     *
+     * @code{.unparsed}
+     *    LRLRLRLR
+     *    RLRLRLRL
+     *    LRLRLRLR
+     *    ...
+     * @endcode
+     */
+    AV_STEREO3D_CHECKERBOARD,
+
+    /**
+     * Views are next to each other, but when upscaling
+     * apply a checkerboard pattern.
+     *
+     * @code{.unparsed}
+     *     LLLLRRRR          L L L L    R R R R
+     *     LLLLRRRR    =>     L L L L  R R R R
+     *     LLLLRRRR          L L L L    R R R R
+     *     LLLLRRRR           L L L L  R R R R
+     * @endcode
+     */
+    AV_STEREO3D_SIDEBYSIDE_QUINCUNX,
+
+    /**
+     * Views are packed per line, as if interlaced.
+     *
+     * @code{.unparsed}
+     *    LLLLLLLL
+     *    RRRRRRRR
+     *    LLLLLLLL
+     *    ...
+     * @endcode
+     */
+    AV_STEREO3D_LINES,
+
+    /**
+     * Views are packed per column.
+     *
+     * @code{.unparsed}
+     *    LRLRLRLR
+     *    LRLRLRLR
+     *    LRLRLRLR
+     *    ...
+     * @endcode
+     */
+    AV_STEREO3D_COLUMNS,
+};
+
+/**
+ * List of possible view types.
+ */
+enum AVStereo3DView {
+    /**
+     * Frame contains two packed views.
+     */
+    AV_STEREO3D_VIEW_PACKED,
+
+    /**
+     * Frame contains only the left view.
+     */
+    AV_STEREO3D_VIEW_LEFT,
+
+    /**
+     * Frame contains only the right view.
+     */
+    AV_STEREO3D_VIEW_RIGHT,
+};
+
+/**
+ * Inverted views, Right/Bottom represents the left view.
+ */
+#define AV_STEREO3D_FLAG_INVERT     (1 << 0)
+
+/**
+ * Stereo 3D type: this structure describes how two videos are packed
+ * within a single video surface, with additional information as needed.
+ *
+ * @note The struct must be allocated with av_stereo3d_alloc() and
+ *       its size is not a part of the public ABI.
+ */
+typedef struct AVStereo3D {
+    /**
+     * How views are packed within the video.
+     */
+    enum AVStereo3DType type;
+
+    /**
+     * Additional information about the frame packing.
+     */
+    int flags;
+
+    /**
+     * Determines which views are packed.
+     */
+    enum AVStereo3DView view;
+} AVStereo3D;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVStereo3D structure and set its fields to default values.
+ * The resulting struct can be freed using av_freep().
+ *
+ * @return An AVStereo3D filled with default values or NULL on failure.
+ */
+AVStereo3D *av_stereo3d_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a complete AVFrameSideData and add it to the frame.
+ *
+ * @param frame The frame which side data is added to.
+ *
+ * @return The AVStereo3D structure to be filled by caller.
+ */
+AVStereo3D *av_stereo3d_create_side_data(AVFrame *frame);
+
+/**
+ * Provide a human-readable name of a given stereo3d type.
+ *
+ * @param type The input stereo3d type value.
+ *
+ * @return The name of the stereo3d value, or "unknown".
+ */
+const char *av_stereo3d_type_name(unsigned int type);
+
+/**
+ * Get the AVStereo3DType form a human-readable name.
+ *
+ * @param name The input string.
+ *
+ * @return The AVStereo3DType value, or -1 if not found.
+ */
+int av_stereo3d_from_name(const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_STEREO3D_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/tea.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/tea.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dd929bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/tea.h
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+/*
+ * A 32-bit implementation of the TEA algorithm
+ * Copyright (c) 2015 Vesselin Bontchev
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_TEA_H
+#define AVUTIL_TEA_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @brief Public header for libavutil TEA algorithm
+ * @defgroup lavu_tea TEA
+ * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+ * @{
+ */
+
+extern const int av_tea_size;
+
+struct AVTEA;
+
+/**
+  * Allocate an AVTEA context
+  * To free the struct: av_free(ptr)
+  */
+struct AVTEA *av_tea_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize an AVTEA context.
+ *
+ * @param ctx an AVTEA context
+ * @param key a key of 16 bytes used for encryption/decryption
+ * @param rounds the number of rounds in TEA (64 is the "standard")
+ */
+void av_tea_init(struct AVTEA *ctx, const uint8_t key[16], int rounds);
+
+/**
+ * Encrypt or decrypt a buffer using a previously initialized context.
+ *
+ * @param ctx an AVTEA context
+ * @param dst destination array, can be equal to src
+ * @param src source array, can be equal to dst
+ * @param count number of 8 byte blocks
+ * @param iv initialization vector for CBC mode, if NULL then ECB will be used
+ * @param decrypt 0 for encryption, 1 for decryption
+ */
+void av_tea_crypt(struct AVTEA *ctx, uint8_t *dst, const uint8_t *src,
+                  int count, uint8_t *iv, int decrypt);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_TEA_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/threadmessage.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/threadmessage.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..42ce655
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/threadmessage.h
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License
+ * as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+ * GNU Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License
+ * along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
+ * 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_THREADMESSAGE_H
+#define AVUTIL_THREADMESSAGE_H
+
+typedef struct AVThreadMessageQueue AVThreadMessageQueue;
+
+typedef enum AVThreadMessageFlags {
+
+    /**
+     * Perform non-blocking operation.
+     * If this flag is set, send and recv operations are non-blocking and
+     * return AVERROR(EAGAIN) immediately if they can not proceed.
+     */
+    AV_THREAD_MESSAGE_NONBLOCK = 1,
+
+} AVThreadMessageFlags;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a new message queue.
+ *
+ * @param mq      pointer to the message queue
+ * @param nelem   maximum number of elements in the queue
+ * @param elsize  size of each element in the queue
+ * @return  >=0 for success; <0 for error, in particular AVERROR(ENOSYS) if
+ *          lavu was built without thread support
+ */
+int av_thread_message_queue_alloc(AVThreadMessageQueue **mq,
+                                  unsigned nelem,
+                                  unsigned elsize);
+
+/**
+ * Free a message queue.
+ *
+ * The message queue must no longer be in use by another thread.
+ */
+void av_thread_message_queue_free(AVThreadMessageQueue **mq);
+
+/**
+ * Send a message on the queue.
+ */
+int av_thread_message_queue_send(AVThreadMessageQueue *mq,
+                                 void *msg,
+                                 unsigned flags);
+
+/**
+ * Receive a message from the queue.
+ */
+int av_thread_message_queue_recv(AVThreadMessageQueue *mq,
+                                 void *msg,
+                                 unsigned flags);
+
+/**
+ * Set the sending error code.
+ *
+ * If the error code is set to non-zero, av_thread_message_queue_send() will
+ * return it immediately. Conventional values, such as AVERROR_EOF or
+ * AVERROR(EAGAIN), can be used to cause the sending thread to stop or
+ * suspend its operation.
+ */
+void av_thread_message_queue_set_err_send(AVThreadMessageQueue *mq,
+                                          int err);
+
+/**
+ * Set the receiving error code.
+ *
+ * If the error code is set to non-zero, av_thread_message_queue_recv() will
+ * return it immediately when there are no longer available messages.
+ * Conventional values, such as AVERROR_EOF or AVERROR(EAGAIN), can be used
+ * to cause the receiving thread to stop or suspend its operation.
+ */
+void av_thread_message_queue_set_err_recv(AVThreadMessageQueue *mq,
+                                          int err);
+
+/**
+ * Set the optional free message callback function which will be called if an
+ * operation is removing messages from the queue.
+ */
+void av_thread_message_queue_set_free_func(AVThreadMessageQueue *mq,
+                                           void (*free_func)(void *msg));
+
+/**
+ * Return the current number of messages in the queue.
+ *
+ * @return the current number of messages or AVERROR(ENOSYS) if lavu was built
+ *         without thread support
+ */
+int av_thread_message_queue_nb_elems(AVThreadMessageQueue *mq);
+
+/**
+ * Flush the message queue
+ *
+ * This function is mostly equivalent to reading and free-ing every message
+ * except that it will be done in a single operation (no lock/unlock between
+ * reads).
+ */
+void av_thread_message_flush(AVThreadMessageQueue *mq);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_THREADMESSAGE_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/time.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/time.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dc169b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/time.h
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000-2003 Fabrice Bellard
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_TIME_H
+#define AVUTIL_TIME_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+/**
+ * Get the current time in microseconds.
+ */
+int64_t av_gettime(void);
+
+/**
+ * Get the current time in microseconds since some unspecified starting point.
+ * On platforms that support it, the time comes from a monotonic clock
+ * This property makes this time source ideal for measuring relative time.
+ * The returned values may not be monotonic on platforms where a monotonic
+ * clock is not available.
+ */
+int64_t av_gettime_relative(void);
+
+/**
+ * Indicates with a boolean result if the av_gettime_relative() time source
+ * is monotonic.
+ */
+int av_gettime_relative_is_monotonic(void);
+
+/**
+ * Sleep for a period of time.  Although the duration is expressed in
+ * microseconds, the actual delay may be rounded to the precision of the
+ * system timer.
+ *
+ * @param  usec Number of microseconds to sleep.
+ * @return zero on success or (negative) error code.
+ */
+int av_usleep(unsigned usec);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_TIME_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/timecode.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/timecode.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..060574a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/timecode.h
@@ -0,0 +1,199 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2006 Smartjog S.A.S, Baptiste Coudurier <baptiste.coudurier@gmail.com>
+ * Copyright (c) 2011-2012 Smartjog S.A.S, Clément Bœsch <clement.boesch@smartjog.com>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * Timecode helpers header
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_TIMECODE_H
+#define AVUTIL_TIMECODE_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include "rational.h"
+
+#define AV_TIMECODE_STR_SIZE 23
+
+enum AVTimecodeFlag {
+    AV_TIMECODE_FLAG_DROPFRAME      = 1<<0, ///< timecode is drop frame
+    AV_TIMECODE_FLAG_24HOURSMAX     = 1<<1, ///< timecode wraps after 24 hours
+    AV_TIMECODE_FLAG_ALLOWNEGATIVE  = 1<<2, ///< negative time values are allowed
+};
+
+typedef struct {
+    int start;          ///< timecode frame start (first base frame number)
+    uint32_t flags;     ///< flags such as drop frame, +24 hours support, ...
+    AVRational rate;    ///< frame rate in rational form
+    unsigned fps;       ///< frame per second; must be consistent with the rate field
+} AVTimecode;
+
+/**
+ * Adjust frame number for NTSC drop frame time code.
+ *
+ * @param framenum frame number to adjust
+ * @param fps      frame per second, multiples of 30
+ * @return         adjusted frame number
+ * @warning        adjustment is only valid for multiples of NTSC 29.97
+ */
+int av_timecode_adjust_ntsc_framenum2(int framenum, int fps);
+
+/**
+ * Convert frame number to SMPTE 12M binary representation.
+ *
+ * @param tc       timecode data correctly initialized
+ * @param framenum frame number
+ * @return         the SMPTE binary representation
+ *
+ * See SMPTE ST 314M-2005 Sec 4.4.2.2.1 "Time code pack (TC)"
+ * the format description as follows:
+ * bits 0-5:   hours, in BCD(6bits)
+ * bits 6:     BGF1
+ * bits 7:     BGF2 (NTSC) or FIELD (PAL)
+ * bits 8-14:  minutes, in BCD(7bits)
+ * bits 15:    BGF0 (NTSC) or BGF2 (PAL)
+ * bits 16-22: seconds, in BCD(7bits)
+ * bits 23:    FIELD (NTSC) or BGF0 (PAL)
+ * bits 24-29: frames, in BCD(6bits)
+ * bits 30:    drop  frame flag (0: non drop,    1: drop)
+ * bits 31:    color frame flag (0: unsync mode, 1: sync mode)
+ * @note BCD numbers (6 or 7 bits): 4 or 5 lower bits for units, 2 higher bits for tens.
+ * @note Frame number adjustment is automatically done in case of drop timecode,
+ *       you do NOT have to call av_timecode_adjust_ntsc_framenum2().
+ * @note The frame number is relative to tc->start.
+ * @note Color frame (CF) and binary group flags (BGF) bits are set to zero.
+ */
+uint32_t av_timecode_get_smpte_from_framenum(const AVTimecode *tc, int framenum);
+
+/**
+ * Convert sei info to SMPTE 12M binary representation.
+ *
+ * @param rate     frame rate in rational form
+ * @param drop     drop flag
+ * @param hh       hour
+ * @param mm       minute
+ * @param ss       second
+ * @param ff       frame number
+ * @return         the SMPTE binary representation
+ */
+uint32_t av_timecode_get_smpte(AVRational rate, int drop, int hh, int mm, int ss, int ff);
+
+/**
+ * Load timecode string in buf.
+ *
+ * @param buf      destination buffer, must be at least AV_TIMECODE_STR_SIZE long
+ * @param tc       timecode data correctly initialized
+ * @param framenum frame number
+ * @return         the buf parameter
+ *
+ * @note Timecode representation can be a negative timecode and have more than
+ *       24 hours, but will only be honored if the flags are correctly set.
+ * @note The frame number is relative to tc->start.
+ */
+char *av_timecode_make_string(const AVTimecode *tc, char *buf, int framenum);
+
+/**
+ * Get the timecode string from the SMPTE timecode format.
+ *
+ * In contrast to av_timecode_make_smpte_tc_string this function supports 50/60
+ * fps timecodes by using the field bit.
+ *
+ * @param buf        destination buffer, must be at least AV_TIMECODE_STR_SIZE long
+ * @param rate       frame rate of the timecode
+ * @param tcsmpte    the 32-bit SMPTE timecode
+ * @param prevent_df prevent the use of a drop flag when it is known the DF bit
+ *                   is arbitrary
+ * @param skip_field prevent the use of a field flag when it is known the field
+ *                   bit is arbitrary (e.g. because it is used as PC flag)
+ * @return           the buf parameter
+ */
+char *av_timecode_make_smpte_tc_string2(char *buf, AVRational rate, uint32_t tcsmpte, int prevent_df, int skip_field);
+
+/**
+ * Get the timecode string from the SMPTE timecode format.
+ *
+ * @param buf        destination buffer, must be at least AV_TIMECODE_STR_SIZE long
+ * @param tcsmpte    the 32-bit SMPTE timecode
+ * @param prevent_df prevent the use of a drop flag when it is known the DF bit
+ *                   is arbitrary
+ * @return           the buf parameter
+ */
+char *av_timecode_make_smpte_tc_string(char *buf, uint32_t tcsmpte, int prevent_df);
+
+/**
+ * Get the timecode string from the 25-bit timecode format (MPEG GOP format).
+ *
+ * @param buf     destination buffer, must be at least AV_TIMECODE_STR_SIZE long
+ * @param tc25bit the 25-bits timecode
+ * @return        the buf parameter
+ */
+char *av_timecode_make_mpeg_tc_string(char *buf, uint32_t tc25bit);
+
+/**
+ * Init a timecode struct with the passed parameters.
+ *
+ * @param log_ctx     a pointer to an arbitrary struct of which the first field
+ *                    is a pointer to an AVClass struct (used for av_log)
+ * @param tc          pointer to an allocated AVTimecode
+ * @param rate        frame rate in rational form
+ * @param flags       miscellaneous flags such as drop frame, +24 hours, ...
+ *                    (see AVTimecodeFlag)
+ * @param frame_start the first frame number
+ * @return            0 on success, AVERROR otherwise
+ */
+int av_timecode_init(AVTimecode *tc, AVRational rate, int flags, int frame_start, void *log_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Init a timecode struct from the passed timecode components.
+ *
+ * @param log_ctx     a pointer to an arbitrary struct of which the first field
+ *                    is a pointer to an AVClass struct (used for av_log)
+ * @param tc          pointer to an allocated AVTimecode
+ * @param rate        frame rate in rational form
+ * @param flags       miscellaneous flags such as drop frame, +24 hours, ...
+ *                    (see AVTimecodeFlag)
+ * @param hh          hours
+ * @param mm          minutes
+ * @param ss          seconds
+ * @param ff          frames
+ * @return            0 on success, AVERROR otherwise
+ */
+int av_timecode_init_from_components(AVTimecode *tc, AVRational rate, int flags, int hh, int mm, int ss, int ff, void *log_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Parse timecode representation (hh:mm:ss[:;.]ff).
+ *
+ * @param log_ctx a pointer to an arbitrary struct of which the first field is a
+ *                pointer to an AVClass struct (used for av_log).
+ * @param tc      pointer to an allocated AVTimecode
+ * @param rate    frame rate in rational form
+ * @param str     timecode string which will determine the frame start
+ * @return        0 on success, AVERROR otherwise
+ */
+int av_timecode_init_from_string(AVTimecode *tc, AVRational rate, const char *str, void *log_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Check if the timecode feature is available for the given frame rate
+ *
+ * @return 0 if supported, <0 otherwise
+ */
+int av_timecode_check_frame_rate(AVRational rate);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_TIMECODE_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/timestamp.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/timestamp.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e082f01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/timestamp.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * timestamp utils, mostly useful for debugging/logging purposes
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_TIMESTAMP_H
+#define AVUTIL_TIMESTAMP_H
+
+#include "common.h"
+
+#if defined(__cplusplus) && !defined(__STDC_FORMAT_MACROS) && !defined(PRId64)
+#error missing -D__STDC_FORMAT_MACROS / #define __STDC_FORMAT_MACROS
+#endif
+
+#define AV_TS_MAX_STRING_SIZE 32
+
+/**
+ * Fill the provided buffer with a string containing a timestamp
+ * representation.
+ *
+ * @param buf a buffer with size in bytes of at least AV_TS_MAX_STRING_SIZE
+ * @param ts the timestamp to represent
+ * @return the buffer in input
+ */
+static inline char *av_ts_make_string(char *buf, int64_t ts)
+{
+    if (ts == AV_NOPTS_VALUE) snprintf(buf, AV_TS_MAX_STRING_SIZE, "NOPTS");
+    else                      snprintf(buf, AV_TS_MAX_STRING_SIZE, "%" PRId64, ts);
+    return buf;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Convenience macro, the return value should be used only directly in
+ * function arguments but never stand-alone.
+ */
+#define av_ts2str(ts) av_ts_make_string((char[AV_TS_MAX_STRING_SIZE]){0}, ts)
+
+/**
+ * Fill the provided buffer with a string containing a timestamp time
+ * representation.
+ *
+ * @param buf a buffer with size in bytes of at least AV_TS_MAX_STRING_SIZE
+ * @param ts the timestamp to represent
+ * @param tb the timebase of the timestamp
+ * @return the buffer in input
+ */
+static inline char *av_ts_make_time_string(char *buf, int64_t ts, AVRational *tb)
+{
+    if (ts == AV_NOPTS_VALUE) snprintf(buf, AV_TS_MAX_STRING_SIZE, "NOPTS");
+    else                      snprintf(buf, AV_TS_MAX_STRING_SIZE, "%.6g", av_q2d(*tb) * ts);
+    return buf;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Convenience macro, the return value should be used only directly in
+ * function arguments but never stand-alone.
+ */
+#define av_ts2timestr(ts, tb) av_ts_make_time_string((char[AV_TS_MAX_STRING_SIZE]){0}, ts, tb)
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_TIMESTAMP_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/tree.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/tree.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bbb8fbb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/tree.h
@@ -0,0 +1,137 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2006 Michael Niedermayer <michaelni@gmx.at>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * A tree container.
+ * @author Michael Niedermayer <michaelni@gmx.at>
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_TREE_H
+#define AVUTIL_TREE_H
+
+#include "attributes.h"
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_tree AVTree
+ * @ingroup lavu_data
+ *
+ * Low-complexity tree container
+ *
+ * Insertion, removal, finding equal, largest which is smaller than and
+ * smallest which is larger than, all have O(log n) worst-case complexity.
+ * @{
+ */
+
+
+struct AVTreeNode;
+extern const int av_tree_node_size;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVTreeNode.
+ */
+struct AVTreeNode *av_tree_node_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Find an element.
+ * @param root a pointer to the root node of the tree
+ * @param next If next is not NULL, then next[0] will contain the previous
+ *             element and next[1] the next element. If either does not exist,
+ *             then the corresponding entry in next is unchanged.
+ * @param cmp compare function used to compare elements in the tree,
+ *            API identical to that of Standard C's qsort
+ *            It is guaranteed that the first and only the first argument to cmp()
+ *            will be the key parameter to av_tree_find(), thus it could if the
+ *            user wants, be a different type (like an opaque context).
+ * @return An element with cmp(key, elem) == 0 or NULL if no such element
+ *         exists in the tree.
+ */
+void *av_tree_find(const struct AVTreeNode *root, void *key,
+                   int (*cmp)(const void *key, const void *b), void *next[2]);
+
+/**
+ * Insert or remove an element.
+ *
+ * If *next is NULL, then the supplied element will be removed if it exists.
+ * If *next is non-NULL, then the supplied element will be inserted, unless
+ * it already exists in the tree.
+ *
+ * @param rootp A pointer to a pointer to the root node of the tree; note that
+ *              the root node can change during insertions, this is required
+ *              to keep the tree balanced.
+ * @param key  pointer to the element key to insert in the tree
+ * @param next Used to allocate and free AVTreeNodes. For insertion the user
+ *             must set it to an allocated and zeroed object of at least
+ *             av_tree_node_size bytes size. av_tree_insert() will set it to
+ *             NULL if it has been consumed.
+ *             For deleting elements *next is set to NULL by the user and
+ *             av_tree_insert() will set it to the AVTreeNode which was
+ *             used for the removed element.
+ *             This allows the use of flat arrays, which have
+ *             lower overhead compared to many malloced elements.
+ *             You might want to define a function like:
+ *             @code
+ *             void *tree_insert(struct AVTreeNode **rootp, void *key,
+ *                               int (*cmp)(void *key, const void *b),
+ *                               AVTreeNode **next)
+ *             {
+ *                 if (!*next)
+ *                     *next = av_mallocz(av_tree_node_size);
+ *                 return av_tree_insert(rootp, key, cmp, next);
+ *             }
+ *             void *tree_remove(struct AVTreeNode **rootp, void *key,
+ *                               int (*cmp)(void *key, const void *b, AVTreeNode **next))
+ *             {
+ *                 av_freep(next);
+ *                 return av_tree_insert(rootp, key, cmp, next);
+ *             }
+ *             @endcode
+ * @param cmp compare function used to compare elements in the tree, API identical
+ *            to that of Standard C's qsort
+ * @return If no insertion happened, the found element; if an insertion or
+ *         removal happened, then either key or NULL will be returned.
+ *         Which one it is depends on the tree state and the implementation. You
+ *         should make no assumptions that it's one or the other in the code.
+ */
+void *av_tree_insert(struct AVTreeNode **rootp, void *key,
+                     int (*cmp)(const void *key, const void *b),
+                     struct AVTreeNode **next);
+
+void av_tree_destroy(struct AVTreeNode *t);
+
+/**
+ * Apply enu(opaque, &elem) to all the elements in the tree in a given range.
+ *
+ * @param cmp a comparison function that returns < 0 for an element below the
+ *            range, > 0 for an element above the range and == 0 for an
+ *            element inside the range
+ *
+ * @note The cmp function should use the same ordering used to construct the
+ *       tree.
+ */
+void av_tree_enumerate(struct AVTreeNode *t, void *opaque,
+                       int (*cmp)(void *opaque, void *elem),
+                       int (*enu)(void *opaque, void *elem));
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_TREE_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/twofish.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/twofish.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..67f359e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/twofish.h
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+/*
+ * An implementation of the TwoFish algorithm
+ * Copyright (c) 2015 Supraja Meedinti
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_TWOFISH_H
+#define AVUTIL_TWOFISH_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+
+/**
+  * @file
+  * @brief Public header for libavutil TWOFISH algorithm
+  * @defgroup lavu_twofish TWOFISH
+  * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+  * @{
+  */
+
+extern const int av_twofish_size;
+
+struct AVTWOFISH;
+
+/**
+  * Allocate an AVTWOFISH context
+  * To free the struct: av_free(ptr)
+  */
+struct AVTWOFISH *av_twofish_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+  * Initialize an AVTWOFISH context.
+  *
+  * @param ctx an AVTWOFISH context
+  * @param key a key of size ranging from 1 to 32 bytes used for encryption/decryption
+  * @param key_bits number of keybits: 128, 192, 256 If less than the required, padded with zeroes to nearest valid value; return value is 0 if key_bits is 128/192/256, -1 if less than 0, 1 otherwise
+ */
+int av_twofish_init(struct AVTWOFISH *ctx, const uint8_t *key, int key_bits);
+
+/**
+  * Encrypt or decrypt a buffer using a previously initialized context
+  *
+  * @param ctx an AVTWOFISH context
+  * @param dst destination array, can be equal to src
+  * @param src source array, can be equal to dst
+  * @param count number of 16 byte blocks
+  * @param iv initialization vector for CBC mode, NULL for ECB mode
+  * @param decrypt 0 for encryption, 1 for decryption
+ */
+void av_twofish_crypt(struct AVTWOFISH *ctx, uint8_t *dst, const uint8_t *src, int count, uint8_t* iv, int decrypt);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+#endif /* AVUTIL_TWOFISH_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/tx.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/tx.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..064edbc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/tx.h
@@ -0,0 +1,176 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_TX_H
+#define AVUTIL_TX_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include <stddef.h>
+
+typedef struct AVTXContext AVTXContext;
+
+typedef struct AVComplexFloat {
+    float re, im;
+} AVComplexFloat;
+
+typedef struct AVComplexDouble {
+    double re, im;
+} AVComplexDouble;
+
+typedef struct AVComplexInt32 {
+    int32_t re, im;
+} AVComplexInt32;
+
+enum AVTXType {
+    /**
+     * Standard complex to complex FFT with sample data type of AVComplexFloat,
+     * AVComplexDouble or AVComplexInt32, for each respective variant.
+     *
+     * Output is not 1/len normalized. Scaling currently unsupported.
+     * The stride parameter must be set to the size of a single sample in bytes.
+     */
+    AV_TX_FLOAT_FFT  = 0,
+    AV_TX_DOUBLE_FFT = 2,
+    AV_TX_INT32_FFT  = 4,
+
+    /**
+     * Standard MDCT with a sample data type of float, double or int32_t,
+     * respecively. For the float and int32 variants, the scale type is
+     * 'float', while for the double variant, it's 'double'.
+     * If scale is NULL, 1.0 will be used as a default.
+     *
+     * Length is the frame size, not the window size (which is 2x frame).
+     * For forward transforms, the stride specifies the spacing between each
+     * sample in the output array in bytes. The input must be a flat array.
+     *
+     * For inverse transforms, the stride specifies the spacing between each
+     * sample in the input array in bytes. The output must be a flat array.
+     *
+     * NOTE: the inverse transform is half-length, meaning the output will not
+     * contain redundant data. This is what most codecs work with. To do a full
+     * inverse transform, set the AV_TX_FULL_IMDCT flag on init.
+     */
+    AV_TX_FLOAT_MDCT  = 1,
+    AV_TX_DOUBLE_MDCT = 3,
+    AV_TX_INT32_MDCT  = 5,
+
+    /**
+     * Real to complex and complex to real DFTs.
+     * For the float and int32 variants, the scale type is 'float', while for
+     * the double variant, it's a 'double'. If scale is NULL, 1.0 will be used
+     * as a default.
+     *
+     * For forward transforms (R2C), stride must be the spacing between two
+     * samples in bytes. For inverse transforms, the stride must be set
+     * to the spacing between two complex values in bytes.
+     *
+     * The forward transform performs a real-to-complex DFT of N samples to
+     * N/2+1 complex values.
+     *
+     * The inverse transform performs a complex-to-real DFT of N/2+1 complex
+     * values to N real samples. The output is not normalized, but can be
+     * made so by setting the scale value to 1.0/len.
+     * NOTE: the inverse transform always overwrites the input.
+     */
+    AV_TX_FLOAT_RDFT  = 6,
+    AV_TX_DOUBLE_RDFT = 7,
+    AV_TX_INT32_RDFT  = 8,
+
+    /**
+     * Real to real (DCT) transforms.
+     *
+     * The forward transform is a DCT-II.
+     * The inverse transform is a DCT-III.
+     *
+     * The input array is always overwritten. DCT-III requires that the
+     * input be padded with 2 extra samples. Stride must be set to the
+     * spacing between two samples in bytes.
+     */
+    AV_TX_FLOAT_DCT  = 9,
+    AV_TX_DOUBLE_DCT = 10,
+    AV_TX_INT32_DCT  = 11,
+
+    /* Not part of the API, do not use */
+    AV_TX_NB,
+};
+
+/**
+ * Function pointer to a function to perform the transform.
+ *
+ * @note Using a different context than the one allocated during av_tx_init()
+ * is not allowed.
+ *
+ * @param s the transform context
+ * @param out the output array
+ * @param in the input array
+ * @param stride the input or output stride in bytes
+ *
+ * The out and in arrays must be aligned to the maximum required by the CPU
+ * architecture unless the AV_TX_UNALIGNED flag was set in av_tx_init().
+ * The stride must follow the constraints the transform type has specified.
+ */
+typedef void (*av_tx_fn)(AVTXContext *s, void *out, void *in, ptrdiff_t stride);
+
+/**
+ * Flags for av_tx_init()
+ */
+enum AVTXFlags {
+    /**
+     * Allows for in-place transformations, where input == output.
+     * May be unsupported or slower for some transform types.
+     */
+    AV_TX_INPLACE = 1ULL << 0,
+
+    /**
+     * Relaxes alignment requirement for the in and out arrays of av_tx_fn().
+     * May be slower with certain transform types.
+     */
+    AV_TX_UNALIGNED = 1ULL << 1,
+
+    /**
+     * Performs a full inverse MDCT rather than leaving out samples that can be
+     * derived through symmetry. Requires an output array of 'len' floats,
+     * rather than the usual 'len/2' floats.
+     * Ignored for all transforms but inverse MDCTs.
+     */
+    AV_TX_FULL_IMDCT = 1ULL << 2,
+};
+
+/**
+ * Initialize a transform context with the given configuration
+ * (i)MDCTs with an odd length are currently not supported.
+ *
+ * @param ctx the context to allocate, will be NULL on error
+ * @param tx pointer to the transform function pointer to set
+ * @param type type the type of transform
+ * @param inv whether to do an inverse or a forward transform
+ * @param len the size of the transform in samples
+ * @param scale pointer to the value to scale the output if supported by type
+ * @param flags a bitmask of AVTXFlags or 0
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, negative error code on failure
+ */
+int av_tx_init(AVTXContext **ctx, av_tx_fn *tx, enum AVTXType type,
+               int inv, int len, const void *scale, uint64_t flags);
+
+/**
+ * Frees a context and sets *ctx to NULL, does nothing when *ctx == NULL.
+ */
+void av_tx_uninit(AVTXContext **ctx);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_TX_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/uuid.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/uuid.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..748b7ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/uuid.h
@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2022 Pierre-Anthony Lemieux <pal@palemieux.com>
+ *                    Zane van Iperen <zane@zanevaniperen.com>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * UUID parsing and serialization utilities.
+ * The library treats the UUID as an opaque sequence of 16 unsigned bytes,
+ * i.e. ignoring the internal layout of the UUID, which depends on the type
+ * of the UUID.
+ *
+ * @author Pierre-Anthony Lemieux <pal@palemieux.com>
+ * @author Zane van Iperen <zane@zanevaniperen.com>
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_UUID_H
+#define AVUTIL_UUID_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include <string.h>
+
+#define AV_PRI_UUID                          \
+    "%02hhx%02hhx%02hhx%02hhx-%02hhx%02hhx-" \
+    "%02hhx%02hhx-%02hhx%02hhx-%02hhx%02hhx%02hhx%02hhx%02hhx%02hhx"
+
+#define AV_PRI_URN_UUID                               \
+    "urn:uuid:%02hhx%02hhx%02hhx%02hhx-%02hhx%02hhx-" \
+    "%02hhx%02hhx-%02hhx%02hhx-%02hhx%02hhx%02hhx%02hhx%02hhx%02hhx"
+
+/* AV_UUID_ARG() is used together with AV_PRI_UUID() or AV_PRI_URN_UUID
+ * to print UUIDs, e.g.
+ * av_log(NULL, AV_LOG_DEBUG, "UUID: " AV_PRI_UUID, AV_UUID_ARG(uuid));
+ */
+#define AV_UUID_ARG(x)                  \
+    (x)[ 0], (x)[ 1], (x)[ 2], (x)[ 3], \
+    (x)[ 4], (x)[ 5], (x)[ 6], (x)[ 7], \
+    (x)[ 8], (x)[ 9], (x)[10], (x)[11], \
+    (x)[12], (x)[13], (x)[14], (x)[15]
+
+#define AV_UUID_LEN 16
+
+/* Binary representation of a UUID */
+typedef uint8_t AVUUID[AV_UUID_LEN];
+
+/**
+ * Parses a string representation of a UUID formatted according to IETF RFC 4122
+ * into an AVUUID. The parsing is case-insensitive. The string must be 37
+ * characters long, including the terminating NUL character.
+ *
+ * Example string representation: "2fceebd0-7017-433d-bafb-d073a7116696"
+ *
+ * @param[in]  in  String representation of a UUID,
+ *                 e.g. 2fceebd0-7017-433d-bafb-d073a7116696
+ * @param[out] uu  AVUUID
+ * @return         A non-zero value in case of an error.
+ */
+int av_uuid_parse(const char *in, AVUUID uu);
+
+/**
+ * Parses a URN representation of a UUID, as specified at IETF RFC 4122,
+ * into an AVUUID. The parsing is case-insensitive. The string must be 46
+ * characters long, including the terminating NUL character.
+ *
+ * Example string representation: "urn:uuid:2fceebd0-7017-433d-bafb-d073a7116696"
+ *
+ * @param[in]  in  URN UUID
+ * @param[out] uu  AVUUID
+ * @return         A non-zero value in case of an error.
+ */
+int av_uuid_urn_parse(const char *in, AVUUID uu);
+
+/**
+ * Parses a string representation of a UUID formatted according to IETF RFC 4122
+ * into an AVUUID. The parsing is case-insensitive.
+ *
+ * @param[in]  in_start Pointer to the first character of the string representation
+ * @param[in]  in_end   Pointer to the character after the last character of the
+ *                      string representation. That memory location is never
+ *                      accessed. It is an error if `in_end - in_start != 36`.
+ * @param[out] uu       AVUUID
+ * @return              A non-zero value in case of an error.
+ */
+int av_uuid_parse_range(const char *in_start, const char *in_end, AVUUID uu);
+
+/**
+ * Serializes a AVUUID into a string representation according to IETF RFC 4122.
+ * The string is lowercase and always 37 characters long, including the
+ * terminating NUL character.
+ *
+ * @param[in]  uu  AVUUID
+ * @param[out] out Pointer to an array of no less than 37 characters.
+ */
+void av_uuid_unparse(const AVUUID uu, char *out);
+
+/**
+ * Compares two UUIDs for equality.
+ *
+ * @param[in]  uu1  AVUUID
+ * @param[in]  uu2  AVUUID
+ * @return          Nonzero if uu1 and uu2 are identical, 0 otherwise
+ */
+static inline int av_uuid_equal(const AVUUID uu1, const AVUUID uu2)
+{
+    return memcmp(uu1, uu2, AV_UUID_LEN) == 0;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Copies the bytes of src into dest.
+ *
+ * @param[out]  dest  AVUUID
+ * @param[in]   src   AVUUID
+ */
+static inline void av_uuid_copy(AVUUID dest, const AVUUID src)
+{
+    memcpy(dest, src, AV_UUID_LEN);
+}
+
+/**
+ * Sets a UUID to the nil UUID, i.e. a UUID with have all
+ * its 128 bits set to zero.
+ *
+ * @param[in,out]  uu  UUID to be set to the nil UUID
+ */
+static inline void av_uuid_nil(AVUUID uu)
+{
+    memset(uu, 0, AV_UUID_LEN);
+}
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_UUID_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/version.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/version.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3b616ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/version.h
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2003 Fabrice Bellard
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavu
+ * Libavutil version macros
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_VERSION_H
+#define AVUTIL_VERSION_H
+
+#include "macros.h"
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup version_utils
+ *
+ * Useful to check and match library version in order to maintain
+ * backward compatibility.
+ *
+ * The FFmpeg libraries follow a versioning sheme very similar to
+ * Semantic Versioning (http://semver.org/)
+ * The difference is that the component called PATCH is called MICRO in FFmpeg
+ * and its value is reset to 100 instead of 0 to keep it above or equal to 100.
+ * Also we do not increase MICRO for every bugfix or change in git master.
+ *
+ * Prior to FFmpeg 3.2 point releases did not change any lib version number to
+ * avoid aliassing different git master checkouts.
+ * Starting with FFmpeg 3.2, the released library versions will occupy
+ * a separate MAJOR.MINOR that is not used on the master development branch.
+ * That is if we branch a release of master 55.10.123 we will bump to 55.11.100
+ * for the release and master will continue at 55.12.100 after it. Each new
+ * point release will then bump the MICRO improving the usefulness of the lib
+ * versions.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#define AV_VERSION_INT(a, b, c) ((a)<<16 | (b)<<8 | (c))
+#define AV_VERSION_DOT(a, b, c) a ##.## b ##.## c
+#define AV_VERSION(a, b, c) AV_VERSION_DOT(a, b, c)
+
+/**
+ * Extract version components from the full ::AV_VERSION_INT int as returned
+ * by functions like ::avformat_version() and ::avcodec_version()
+ */
+#define AV_VERSION_MAJOR(a) ((a) >> 16)
+#define AV_VERSION_MINOR(a) (((a) & 0x00FF00) >> 8)
+#define AV_VERSION_MICRO(a) ((a) & 0xFF)
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_ver Version and Build diagnostics
+ *
+ * Macros and function useful to check at compiletime and at runtime
+ * which version of libavutil is in use.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#define LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR  57
+#define LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MINOR  43
+#define LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MICRO 100
+
+#define LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_INT   AV_VERSION_INT(LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR, \
+                                               LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MINOR, \
+                                               LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBAVUTIL_VERSION       AV_VERSION(LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR,     \
+                                           LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MINOR,     \
+                                           LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBAVUTIL_BUILD         LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_INT
+
+#define LIBAVUTIL_IDENT         "Lavu" AV_STRINGIFY(LIBAVUTIL_VERSION)
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_depr_guards Deprecation Guards
+ * FF_API_* defines may be placed below to indicate public API that will be
+ * dropped at a future version bump. The defines themselves are not part of
+ * the public API and may change, break or disappear at any time.
+ *
+ * @note, when bumping the major version it is recommended to manually
+ * disable each FF_API_* in its own commit instead of disabling them all
+ * at once through the bump. This improves the git bisect-ability of the change.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#define FF_API_D2STR                    (LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR < 58)
+#define FF_API_DECLARE_ALIGNED          (LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR < 58)
+#define FF_API_COLORSPACE_NAME          (LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR < 58)
+#define FF_API_AV_MALLOCZ_ARRAY         (LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR < 58)
+#define FF_API_FIFO_PEEK2               (LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR < 58)
+#define FF_API_FIFO_OLD_API             (LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR < 58)
+#define FF_API_XVMC                     (LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR < 58)
+#define FF_API_OLD_CHANNEL_LAYOUT       (LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR < 58)
+#define FF_API_AV_FOPEN_UTF8            (LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR < 58)
+#define FF_API_PKT_DURATION             (LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR < 58)
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_VERSION_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/video_enc_params.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/video_enc_params.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fc0c3bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/video_enc_params.h
@@ -0,0 +1,171 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_VIDEO_ENC_PARAMS_H
+#define AVUTIL_VIDEO_ENC_PARAMS_H
+
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+#include "libavutil/avassert.h"
+#include "libavutil/frame.h"
+
+enum AVVideoEncParamsType {
+    AV_VIDEO_ENC_PARAMS_NONE = -1,
+    /**
+     * VP9 stores:
+     * - per-frame base (luma AC) quantizer index, exported as AVVideoEncParams.qp
+     * - deltas for luma DC, chroma AC and chroma DC, exported in the
+     *   corresponding entries in AVVideoEncParams.delta_qp
+     * - per-segment delta, exported as for each block as AVVideoBlockParams.delta_qp
+     *
+     * To compute the resulting quantizer index for a block:
+     * - for luma AC, add the base qp and the per-block delta_qp, saturating to
+     *   unsigned 8-bit.
+     * - for luma DC and chroma AC/DC, add the corresponding
+     *   AVVideoBlockParams.delta_qp to the luma AC index, again saturating to
+     *   unsigned 8-bit.
+     */
+    AV_VIDEO_ENC_PARAMS_VP9,
+
+    /**
+     * H.264 stores:
+     * - in PPS (per-picture):
+     *   * initial QP_Y (luma) value, exported as AVVideoEncParams.qp
+     *   * delta(s) for chroma QP values (same for both, or each separately),
+     *     exported as in the corresponding entries in AVVideoEncParams.delta_qp
+     * - per-slice QP delta, not exported directly, added to the per-MB value
+     * - per-MB delta; not exported directly; the final per-MB quantizer
+     *   parameter - QP_Y - minus the value in AVVideoEncParams.qp is exported
+     *   as AVVideoBlockParams.qp_delta.
+     */
+    AV_VIDEO_ENC_PARAMS_H264,
+
+    /*
+     * MPEG-2-compatible quantizer.
+     *
+     * Summing the frame-level qp with the per-block delta_qp gives the
+     * resulting quantizer for the block.
+     */
+    AV_VIDEO_ENC_PARAMS_MPEG2,
+};
+
+/**
+ * Video encoding parameters for a given frame. This struct is allocated along
+ * with an optional array of per-block AVVideoBlockParams descriptors.
+ * Must be allocated with av_video_enc_params_alloc().
+ */
+typedef struct AVVideoEncParams {
+    /**
+     * Number of blocks in the array.
+     *
+     * May be 0, in which case no per-block information is present. In this case
+     * the values of blocks_offset / block_size are unspecified and should not
+     * be accessed.
+     */
+    unsigned int nb_blocks;
+    /**
+     * Offset in bytes from the beginning of this structure at which the array
+     * of blocks starts.
+     */
+    size_t blocks_offset;
+    /*
+     * Size of each block in bytes. May not match sizeof(AVVideoBlockParams).
+     */
+    size_t block_size;
+
+    /**
+     * Type of the parameters (the codec they are used with).
+     */
+    enum AVVideoEncParamsType type;
+
+    /**
+     * Base quantisation parameter for the frame. The final quantiser for a
+     * given block in a given plane is obtained from this value, possibly
+     * combined with {@code delta_qp} and the per-block delta in a manner
+     * documented for each type.
+     */
+    int32_t qp;
+
+    /**
+     * Quantisation parameter offset from the base (per-frame) qp for a given
+     * plane (first index) and AC/DC coefficients (second index).
+     */
+    int32_t delta_qp[4][2];
+} AVVideoEncParams;
+
+/**
+ * Data structure for storing block-level encoding information.
+ * It is allocated as a part of AVVideoEncParams and should be retrieved with
+ * av_video_enc_params_block().
+ *
+ * sizeof(AVVideoBlockParams) is not a part of the ABI and new fields may be
+ * added to it.
+ */
+typedef struct AVVideoBlockParams {
+    /**
+     * Distance in luma pixels from the top-left corner of the visible frame
+     * to the top-left corner of the block.
+     * Can be negative if top/right padding is present on the coded frame.
+     */
+    int src_x, src_y;
+    /**
+     * Width and height of the block in luma pixels.
+     */
+    int w, h;
+
+    /**
+     * Difference between this block's final quantization parameter and the
+     * corresponding per-frame value.
+     */
+    int32_t delta_qp;
+} AVVideoBlockParams;
+
+/*
+ * Get the block at the specified {@code idx}. Must be between 0 and nb_blocks.
+ */
+static av_always_inline AVVideoBlockParams*
+av_video_enc_params_block(AVVideoEncParams *par, unsigned int idx)
+{
+    av_assert0(idx < par->nb_blocks);
+    return (AVVideoBlockParams *)((uint8_t *)par + par->blocks_offset +
+                                  idx * par->block_size);
+}
+
+/**
+ * Allocates memory for AVVideoEncParams of the given type, plus an array of
+ * {@code nb_blocks} AVVideoBlockParams and initializes the variables. Can be
+ * freed with a normal av_free() call.
+ *
+ * @param out_size if non-NULL, the size in bytes of the resulting data array is
+ * written here.
+ */
+AVVideoEncParams *av_video_enc_params_alloc(enum AVVideoEncParamsType type,
+                                            unsigned int nb_blocks, size_t *out_size);
+
+/**
+ * Allocates memory for AVEncodeInfoFrame plus an array of
+ * {@code nb_blocks} AVEncodeInfoBlock in the given AVFrame {@code frame}
+ * as AVFrameSideData of type AV_FRAME_DATA_VIDEO_ENC_PARAMS
+ * and initializes the variables.
+ */
+AVVideoEncParams*
+av_video_enc_params_create_side_data(AVFrame *frame, enum AVVideoEncParamsType type,
+                                     unsigned int nb_blocks);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_VIDEO_ENC_PARAMS_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libavutil/xtea.h b/dependencies/include/libavutil/xtea.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..735427c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libavutil/xtea.h
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+/*
+ * A 32-bit implementation of the XTEA algorithm
+ * Copyright (c) 2012 Samuel Pitoiset
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_XTEA_H
+#define AVUTIL_XTEA_H
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @brief Public header for libavutil XTEA algorithm
+ * @defgroup lavu_xtea XTEA
+ * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+ * @{
+ */
+
+typedef struct AVXTEA {
+    uint32_t key[16];
+} AVXTEA;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVXTEA context.
+ */
+AVXTEA *av_xtea_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize an AVXTEA context.
+ *
+ * @param ctx an AVXTEA context
+ * @param key a key of 16 bytes used for encryption/decryption,
+ *            interpreted as big endian 32 bit numbers
+ */
+void av_xtea_init(struct AVXTEA *ctx, const uint8_t key[16]);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize an AVXTEA context.
+ *
+ * @param ctx an AVXTEA context
+ * @param key a key of 16 bytes used for encryption/decryption,
+ *            interpreted as little endian 32 bit numbers
+ */
+void av_xtea_le_init(struct AVXTEA *ctx, const uint8_t key[16]);
+
+/**
+ * Encrypt or decrypt a buffer using a previously initialized context,
+ * in big endian format.
+ *
+ * @param ctx an AVXTEA context
+ * @param dst destination array, can be equal to src
+ * @param src source array, can be equal to dst
+ * @param count number of 8 byte blocks
+ * @param iv initialization vector for CBC mode, if NULL then ECB will be used
+ * @param decrypt 0 for encryption, 1 for decryption
+ */
+void av_xtea_crypt(struct AVXTEA *ctx, uint8_t *dst, const uint8_t *src,
+                   int count, uint8_t *iv, int decrypt);
+
+/**
+ * Encrypt or decrypt a buffer using a previously initialized context,
+ * in little endian format.
+ *
+ * @param ctx an AVXTEA context
+ * @param dst destination array, can be equal to src
+ * @param src source array, can be equal to dst
+ * @param count number of 8 byte blocks
+ * @param iv initialization vector for CBC mode, if NULL then ECB will be used
+ * @param decrypt 0 for encryption, 1 for decryption
+ */
+void av_xtea_le_crypt(struct AVXTEA *ctx, uint8_t *dst, const uint8_t *src,
+                      int count, uint8_t *iv, int decrypt);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_XTEA_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libpostproc/postprocess.h b/dependencies/include/libpostproc/postprocess.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5decb7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libpostproc/postprocess.h
@@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (C) 2001-2003 Michael Niedermayer (michaelni@gmx.at)
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+ * the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+ * (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+ * GNU General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+ * along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef POSTPROC_POSTPROCESS_H
+#define POSTPROC_POSTPROCESS_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lpp
+ * external API header
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lpp libpostproc
+ * Video postprocessing library.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#include "libpostproc/version_major.h"
+#ifndef HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H
+/* When included as part of the ffmpeg build, only include the major version
+ * to avoid unnecessary rebuilds. When included externally, keep including
+ * the full version information. */
+#include "libpostproc/version.h"
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Return the LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION_INT constant.
+ */
+unsigned postproc_version(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libpostproc build-time configuration.
+ */
+const char *postproc_configuration(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libpostproc license.
+ */
+const char *postproc_license(void);
+
+#define PP_QUALITY_MAX 6
+
+#include <inttypes.h>
+
+typedef void pp_context;
+typedef void pp_mode;
+
+extern const char pp_help[]; ///< a simple help text
+
+void  pp_postprocess(const uint8_t * src[3], const int srcStride[3],
+                     uint8_t * dst[3], const int dstStride[3],
+                     int horizontalSize, int verticalSize,
+                     const int8_t *QP_store,  int QP_stride,
+                     pp_mode *mode, pp_context *ppContext, int pict_type);
+
+
+/**
+ * Return a pp_mode or NULL if an error occurred.
+ *
+ * @param name    the string after "-pp" on the command line
+ * @param quality a number from 0 to PP_QUALITY_MAX
+ */
+pp_mode *pp_get_mode_by_name_and_quality(const char *name, int quality);
+void pp_free_mode(pp_mode *mode);
+
+pp_context *pp_get_context(int width, int height, int flags);
+void pp_free_context(pp_context *ppContext);
+
+#define PP_CPU_CAPS_MMX   0x80000000
+#define PP_CPU_CAPS_MMX2  0x20000000
+#define PP_CPU_CAPS_3DNOW 0x40000000
+#define PP_CPU_CAPS_ALTIVEC 0x10000000
+#define PP_CPU_CAPS_AUTO  0x00080000
+
+#define PP_FORMAT         0x00000008
+#define PP_FORMAT_420    (0x00000011|PP_FORMAT)
+#define PP_FORMAT_422    (0x00000001|PP_FORMAT)
+#define PP_FORMAT_411    (0x00000002|PP_FORMAT)
+#define PP_FORMAT_444    (0x00000000|PP_FORMAT)
+#define PP_FORMAT_440    (0x00000010|PP_FORMAT)
+
+#define PP_PICT_TYPE_QP2  0x00000010 ///< MPEG2 style QScale
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* POSTPROC_POSTPROCESS_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libpostproc/version.h b/dependencies/include/libpostproc/version.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c258957
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libpostproc/version.h
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+/*
+ * Version macros.
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef POSTPROC_VERSION_H
+#define POSTPROC_VERSION_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * Libpostproc version macros
+ */
+
+#include "libavutil/version.h"
+
+#include "version_major.h"
+
+#define LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION_MINOR   7
+#define LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION_MICRO 100
+
+#define LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION_INT AV_VERSION_INT(LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION_MAJOR, \
+                                               LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION_MINOR, \
+                                               LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION     AV_VERSION(LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION_MAJOR, \
+                                           LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION_MINOR, \
+                                           LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBPOSTPROC_BUILD       LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION_INT
+
+#define LIBPOSTPROC_IDENT       "postproc" AV_STRINGIFY(LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION)
+
+#endif /* POSTPROC_VERSION_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libpostproc/version_major.h b/dependencies/include/libpostproc/version_major.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7afc4db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libpostproc/version_major.h
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+/*
+ * Version macros.
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef POSTPROC_VERSION_MAJOR_H
+#define POSTPROC_VERSION_MAJOR_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * Libpostproc version macros
+ */
+
+#define LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION_MAJOR  56
+
+#endif /* POSTPROC_VERSION_MAJOR_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libswresample/swresample.h b/dependencies/include/libswresample/swresample.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d4dcaeb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libswresample/swresample.h
@@ -0,0 +1,650 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (C) 2011-2013 Michael Niedermayer (michaelni@gmx.at)
+ *
+ * This file is part of libswresample
+ *
+ * libswresample is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * libswresample is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with libswresample; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef SWRESAMPLE_SWRESAMPLE_H
+#define SWRESAMPLE_SWRESAMPLE_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lswr
+ * libswresample public header
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lswr libswresample
+ * @{
+ *
+ * Audio resampling, sample format conversion and mixing library.
+ *
+ * Interaction with lswr is done through SwrContext, which is
+ * allocated with swr_alloc() or swr_alloc_set_opts2(). It is opaque, so all parameters
+ * must be set with the @ref avoptions API.
+ *
+ * The first thing you will need to do in order to use lswr is to allocate
+ * SwrContext. This can be done with swr_alloc() or swr_alloc_set_opts2(). If you
+ * are using the former, you must set options through the @ref avoptions API.
+ * The latter function provides the same feature, but it allows you to set some
+ * common options in the same statement.
+ *
+ * For example the following code will setup conversion from planar float sample
+ * format to interleaved signed 16-bit integer, downsampling from 48kHz to
+ * 44.1kHz and downmixing from 5.1 channels to stereo (using the default mixing
+ * matrix). This is using the swr_alloc() function.
+ * @code
+ * SwrContext *swr = swr_alloc();
+ * av_opt_set_channel_layout(swr, "in_channel_layout",  AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT1, 0);
+ * av_opt_set_channel_layout(swr, "out_channel_layout", AV_CH_LAYOUT_STEREO,  0);
+ * av_opt_set_int(swr, "in_sample_rate",     48000,                0);
+ * av_opt_set_int(swr, "out_sample_rate",    44100,                0);
+ * av_opt_set_sample_fmt(swr, "in_sample_fmt",  AV_SAMPLE_FMT_FLTP, 0);
+ * av_opt_set_sample_fmt(swr, "out_sample_fmt", AV_SAMPLE_FMT_S16,  0);
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * The same job can be done using swr_alloc_set_opts2() as well:
+ * @code
+ * SwrContext *swr = NULL;
+ * int ret = swr_alloc_set_opts2(&swr,         // we're allocating a new context
+ *                       &(AVChannelLayout)AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_STEREO, // out_ch_layout
+ *                       AV_SAMPLE_FMT_S16,    // out_sample_fmt
+ *                       44100,                // out_sample_rate
+ *                       &(AVChannelLayout)AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_5POINT1, // in_ch_layout
+ *                       AV_SAMPLE_FMT_FLTP,   // in_sample_fmt
+ *                       48000,                // in_sample_rate
+ *                       0,                    // log_offset
+ *                       NULL);                // log_ctx
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * Once all values have been set, it must be initialized with swr_init(). If
+ * you need to change the conversion parameters, you can change the parameters
+ * using @ref avoptions, as described above in the first example; or by using
+ * swr_alloc_set_opts2(), but with the first argument the allocated context.
+ * You must then call swr_init() again.
+ *
+ * The conversion itself is done by repeatedly calling swr_convert().
+ * Note that the samples may get buffered in swr if you provide insufficient
+ * output space or if sample rate conversion is done, which requires "future"
+ * samples. Samples that do not require future input can be retrieved at any
+ * time by using swr_convert() (in_count can be set to 0).
+ * At the end of conversion the resampling buffer can be flushed by calling
+ * swr_convert() with NULL in and 0 in_count.
+ *
+ * The samples used in the conversion process can be managed with the libavutil
+ * @ref lavu_sampmanip "samples manipulation" API, including av_samples_alloc()
+ * function used in the following example.
+ *
+ * The delay between input and output, can at any time be found by using
+ * swr_get_delay().
+ *
+ * The following code demonstrates the conversion loop assuming the parameters
+ * from above and caller-defined functions get_input() and handle_output():
+ * @code
+ * uint8_t **input;
+ * int in_samples;
+ *
+ * while (get_input(&input, &in_samples)) {
+ *     uint8_t *output;
+ *     int out_samples = av_rescale_rnd(swr_get_delay(swr, 48000) +
+ *                                      in_samples, 44100, 48000, AV_ROUND_UP);
+ *     av_samples_alloc(&output, NULL, 2, out_samples,
+ *                      AV_SAMPLE_FMT_S16, 0);
+ *     out_samples = swr_convert(swr, &output, out_samples,
+ *                                      input, in_samples);
+ *     handle_output(output, out_samples);
+ *     av_freep(&output);
+ * }
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * When the conversion is finished, the conversion
+ * context and everything associated with it must be freed with swr_free().
+ * A swr_close() function is also available, but it exists mainly for
+ * compatibility with libavresample, and is not required to be called.
+ *
+ * There will be no memory leak if the data is not completely flushed before
+ * swr_free().
+ */
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include "libavutil/channel_layout.h"
+#include "libavutil/frame.h"
+#include "libavutil/samplefmt.h"
+
+#include "libswresample/version_major.h"
+#ifndef HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H
+/* When included as part of the ffmpeg build, only include the major version
+ * to avoid unnecessary rebuilds. When included externally, keep including
+ * the full version information. */
+#include "libswresample/version.h"
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * @name Option constants
+ * These constants are used for the @ref avoptions interface for lswr.
+ * @{
+ *
+ */
+
+#define SWR_FLAG_RESAMPLE 1 ///< Force resampling even if equal sample rate
+//TODO use int resample ?
+//long term TODO can we enable this dynamically?
+
+/** Dithering algorithms */
+enum SwrDitherType {
+    SWR_DITHER_NONE = 0,
+    SWR_DITHER_RECTANGULAR,
+    SWR_DITHER_TRIANGULAR,
+    SWR_DITHER_TRIANGULAR_HIGHPASS,
+
+    SWR_DITHER_NS = 64,         ///< not part of API/ABI
+    SWR_DITHER_NS_LIPSHITZ,
+    SWR_DITHER_NS_F_WEIGHTED,
+    SWR_DITHER_NS_MODIFIED_E_WEIGHTED,
+    SWR_DITHER_NS_IMPROVED_E_WEIGHTED,
+    SWR_DITHER_NS_SHIBATA,
+    SWR_DITHER_NS_LOW_SHIBATA,
+    SWR_DITHER_NS_HIGH_SHIBATA,
+    SWR_DITHER_NB,              ///< not part of API/ABI
+};
+
+/** Resampling Engines */
+enum SwrEngine {
+    SWR_ENGINE_SWR,             /**< SW Resampler */
+    SWR_ENGINE_SOXR,            /**< SoX Resampler */
+    SWR_ENGINE_NB,              ///< not part of API/ABI
+};
+
+/** Resampling Filter Types */
+enum SwrFilterType {
+    SWR_FILTER_TYPE_CUBIC,              /**< Cubic */
+    SWR_FILTER_TYPE_BLACKMAN_NUTTALL,   /**< Blackman Nuttall windowed sinc */
+    SWR_FILTER_TYPE_KAISER,             /**< Kaiser windowed sinc */
+};
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * The libswresample context. Unlike libavcodec and libavformat, this structure
+ * is opaque. This means that if you would like to set options, you must use
+ * the @ref avoptions API and cannot directly set values to members of the
+ * structure.
+ */
+typedef struct SwrContext SwrContext;
+
+/**
+ * Get the AVClass for SwrContext. It can be used in combination with
+ * AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ for examining options.
+ *
+ * @see av_opt_find().
+ * @return the AVClass of SwrContext
+ */
+const AVClass *swr_get_class(void);
+
+/**
+ * @name SwrContext constructor functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Allocate SwrContext.
+ *
+ * If you use this function you will need to set the parameters (manually or
+ * with swr_alloc_set_opts2()) before calling swr_init().
+ *
+ * @see swr_alloc_set_opts2(), swr_init(), swr_free()
+ * @return NULL on error, allocated context otherwise
+ */
+struct SwrContext *swr_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize context after user parameters have been set.
+ * @note The context must be configured using the AVOption API.
+ *
+ * @see av_opt_set_int()
+ * @see av_opt_set_dict()
+ *
+ * @param[in,out]   s Swr context to initialize
+ * @return AVERROR error code in case of failure.
+ */
+int swr_init(struct SwrContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * Check whether an swr context has been initialized or not.
+ *
+ * @param[in]       s Swr context to check
+ * @see swr_init()
+ * @return positive if it has been initialized, 0 if not initialized
+ */
+int swr_is_initialized(struct SwrContext *s);
+
+#if FF_API_OLD_CHANNEL_LAYOUT
+/**
+ * Allocate SwrContext if needed and set/reset common parameters.
+ *
+ * This function does not require s to be allocated with swr_alloc(). On the
+ * other hand, swr_alloc() can use swr_alloc_set_opts() to set the parameters
+ * on the allocated context.
+ *
+ * @param s               existing Swr context if available, or NULL if not
+ * @param out_ch_layout   output channel layout (AV_CH_LAYOUT_*)
+ * @param out_sample_fmt  output sample format (AV_SAMPLE_FMT_*).
+ * @param out_sample_rate output sample rate (frequency in Hz)
+ * @param in_ch_layout    input channel layout (AV_CH_LAYOUT_*)
+ * @param in_sample_fmt   input sample format (AV_SAMPLE_FMT_*).
+ * @param in_sample_rate  input sample rate (frequency in Hz)
+ * @param log_offset      logging level offset
+ * @param log_ctx         parent logging context, can be NULL
+ *
+ * @see swr_init(), swr_free()
+ * @return NULL on error, allocated context otherwise
+ * @deprecated use @ref swr_alloc_set_opts2()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+struct SwrContext *swr_alloc_set_opts(struct SwrContext *s,
+                                      int64_t out_ch_layout, enum AVSampleFormat out_sample_fmt, int out_sample_rate,
+                                      int64_t  in_ch_layout, enum AVSampleFormat  in_sample_fmt, int  in_sample_rate,
+                                      int log_offset, void *log_ctx);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Allocate SwrContext if needed and set/reset common parameters.
+ *
+ * This function does not require *ps to be allocated with swr_alloc(). On the
+ * other hand, swr_alloc() can use swr_alloc_set_opts2() to set the parameters
+ * on the allocated context.
+ *
+ * @param ps              Pointer to an existing Swr context if available, or to NULL if not.
+ *                        On success, *ps will be set to the allocated context.
+ * @param out_ch_layout   output channel layout (e.g. AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_*)
+ * @param out_sample_fmt  output sample format (AV_SAMPLE_FMT_*).
+ * @param out_sample_rate output sample rate (frequency in Hz)
+ * @param in_ch_layout    input channel layout (e.g. AV_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_*)
+ * @param in_sample_fmt   input sample format (AV_SAMPLE_FMT_*).
+ * @param in_sample_rate  input sample rate (frequency in Hz)
+ * @param log_offset      logging level offset
+ * @param log_ctx         parent logging context, can be NULL
+ *
+ * @see swr_init(), swr_free()
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR code on error.
+ *         On error, the Swr context is freed and *ps set to NULL.
+ */
+int swr_alloc_set_opts2(struct SwrContext **ps,
+                        const AVChannelLayout *out_ch_layout, enum AVSampleFormat out_sample_fmt, int out_sample_rate,
+                        const AVChannelLayout *in_ch_layout, enum AVSampleFormat  in_sample_fmt, int  in_sample_rate,
+                        int log_offset, void *log_ctx);
+/**
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @name SwrContext destructor functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Free the given SwrContext and set the pointer to NULL.
+ *
+ * @param[in] s a pointer to a pointer to Swr context
+ */
+void swr_free(struct SwrContext **s);
+
+/**
+ * Closes the context so that swr_is_initialized() returns 0.
+ *
+ * The context can be brought back to life by running swr_init(),
+ * swr_init() can also be used without swr_close().
+ * This function is mainly provided for simplifying the usecase
+ * where one tries to support libavresample and libswresample.
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] s Swr context to be closed
+ */
+void swr_close(struct SwrContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @name Core conversion functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** Convert audio.
+ *
+ * in and in_count can be set to 0 to flush the last few samples out at the
+ * end.
+ *
+ * If more input is provided than output space, then the input will be buffered.
+ * You can avoid this buffering by using swr_get_out_samples() to retrieve an
+ * upper bound on the required number of output samples for the given number of
+ * input samples. Conversion will run directly without copying whenever possible.
+ *
+ * @param s         allocated Swr context, with parameters set
+ * @param out       output buffers, only the first one need be set in case of packed audio
+ * @param out_count amount of space available for output in samples per channel
+ * @param in        input buffers, only the first one need to be set in case of packed audio
+ * @param in_count  number of input samples available in one channel
+ *
+ * @return number of samples output per channel, negative value on error
+ */
+int swr_convert(struct SwrContext *s, uint8_t **out, int out_count,
+                                const uint8_t **in , int in_count);
+
+/**
+ * Convert the next timestamp from input to output
+ * timestamps are in 1/(in_sample_rate * out_sample_rate) units.
+ *
+ * @note There are 2 slightly differently behaving modes.
+ *       @li When automatic timestamp compensation is not used, (min_compensation >= FLT_MAX)
+ *              in this case timestamps will be passed through with delays compensated
+ *       @li When automatic timestamp compensation is used, (min_compensation < FLT_MAX)
+ *              in this case the output timestamps will match output sample numbers.
+ *              See ffmpeg-resampler(1) for the two modes of compensation.
+ *
+ * @param[in] s     initialized Swr context
+ * @param[in] pts   timestamp for the next input sample, INT64_MIN if unknown
+ * @see swr_set_compensation(), swr_drop_output(), and swr_inject_silence() are
+ *      function used internally for timestamp compensation.
+ * @return the output timestamp for the next output sample
+ */
+int64_t swr_next_pts(struct SwrContext *s, int64_t pts);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @name Low-level option setting functions
+ * These functons provide a means to set low-level options that is not possible
+ * with the AVOption API.
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Activate resampling compensation ("soft" compensation). This function is
+ * internally called when needed in swr_next_pts().
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] s             allocated Swr context. If it is not initialized,
+ *                              or SWR_FLAG_RESAMPLE is not set, swr_init() is
+ *                              called with the flag set.
+ * @param[in]     sample_delta  delta in PTS per sample
+ * @param[in]     compensation_distance number of samples to compensate for
+ * @return    >= 0 on success, AVERROR error codes if:
+ *            @li @c s is NULL,
+ *            @li @c compensation_distance is less than 0,
+ *            @li @c compensation_distance is 0 but sample_delta is not,
+ *            @li compensation unsupported by resampler, or
+ *            @li swr_init() fails when called.
+ */
+int swr_set_compensation(struct SwrContext *s, int sample_delta, int compensation_distance);
+
+/**
+ * Set a customized input channel mapping.
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] s           allocated Swr context, not yet initialized
+ * @param[in]     channel_map customized input channel mapping (array of channel
+ *                            indexes, -1 for a muted channel)
+ * @return >= 0 on success, or AVERROR error code in case of failure.
+ */
+int swr_set_channel_mapping(struct SwrContext *s, const int *channel_map);
+
+#if FF_API_OLD_CHANNEL_LAYOUT
+/**
+ * Generate a channel mixing matrix.
+ *
+ * This function is the one used internally by libswresample for building the
+ * default mixing matrix. It is made public just as a utility function for
+ * building custom matrices.
+ *
+ * @param in_layout           input channel layout
+ * @param out_layout          output channel layout
+ * @param center_mix_level    mix level for the center channel
+ * @param surround_mix_level  mix level for the surround channel(s)
+ * @param lfe_mix_level       mix level for the low-frequency effects channel
+ * @param rematrix_maxval     if 1.0, coefficients will be normalized to prevent
+ *                            overflow. if INT_MAX, coefficients will not be
+ *                            normalized.
+ * @param[out] matrix         mixing coefficients; matrix[i + stride * o] is
+ *                            the weight of input channel i in output channel o.
+ * @param stride              distance between adjacent input channels in the
+ *                            matrix array
+ * @param matrix_encoding     matrixed stereo downmix mode (e.g. dplii)
+ * @param log_ctx             parent logging context, can be NULL
+ * @return                    0 on success, negative AVERROR code on failure
+ * @deprecated                use @ref swr_build_matrix2()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int swr_build_matrix(uint64_t in_layout, uint64_t out_layout,
+                     double center_mix_level, double surround_mix_level,
+                     double lfe_mix_level, double rematrix_maxval,
+                     double rematrix_volume, double *matrix,
+                     int stride, enum AVMatrixEncoding matrix_encoding,
+                     void *log_ctx);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Generate a channel mixing matrix.
+ *
+ * This function is the one used internally by libswresample for building the
+ * default mixing matrix. It is made public just as a utility function for
+ * building custom matrices.
+ *
+ * @param in_layout           input channel layout
+ * @param out_layout          output channel layout
+ * @param center_mix_level    mix level for the center channel
+ * @param surround_mix_level  mix level for the surround channel(s)
+ * @param lfe_mix_level       mix level for the low-frequency effects channel
+ * @param rematrix_maxval     if 1.0, coefficients will be normalized to prevent
+ *                            overflow. if INT_MAX, coefficients will not be
+ *                            normalized.
+ * @param[out] matrix         mixing coefficients; matrix[i + stride * o] is
+ *                            the weight of input channel i in output channel o.
+ * @param stride              distance between adjacent input channels in the
+ *                            matrix array
+ * @param matrix_encoding     matrixed stereo downmix mode (e.g. dplii)
+ * @param log_ctx             parent logging context, can be NULL
+ * @return                    0 on success, negative AVERROR code on failure
+ */
+int swr_build_matrix2(const AVChannelLayout *in_layout, const AVChannelLayout *out_layout,
+                      double center_mix_level, double surround_mix_level,
+                      double lfe_mix_level, double maxval,
+                      double rematrix_volume, double *matrix,
+                      ptrdiff_t stride, enum AVMatrixEncoding matrix_encoding,
+                      void *log_context);
+
+/**
+ * Set a customized remix matrix.
+ *
+ * @param s       allocated Swr context, not yet initialized
+ * @param matrix  remix coefficients; matrix[i + stride * o] is
+ *                the weight of input channel i in output channel o
+ * @param stride  offset between lines of the matrix
+ * @return  >= 0 on success, or AVERROR error code in case of failure.
+ */
+int swr_set_matrix(struct SwrContext *s, const double *matrix, int stride);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @name Sample handling functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Drops the specified number of output samples.
+ *
+ * This function, along with swr_inject_silence(), is called by swr_next_pts()
+ * if needed for "hard" compensation.
+ *
+ * @param s     allocated Swr context
+ * @param count number of samples to be dropped
+ *
+ * @return >= 0 on success, or a negative AVERROR code on failure
+ */
+int swr_drop_output(struct SwrContext *s, int count);
+
+/**
+ * Injects the specified number of silence samples.
+ *
+ * This function, along with swr_drop_output(), is called by swr_next_pts()
+ * if needed for "hard" compensation.
+ *
+ * @param s     allocated Swr context
+ * @param count number of samples to be dropped
+ *
+ * @return >= 0 on success, or a negative AVERROR code on failure
+ */
+int swr_inject_silence(struct SwrContext *s, int count);
+
+/**
+ * Gets the delay the next input sample will experience relative to the next output sample.
+ *
+ * Swresample can buffer data if more input has been provided than available
+ * output space, also converting between sample rates needs a delay.
+ * This function returns the sum of all such delays.
+ * The exact delay is not necessarily an integer value in either input or
+ * output sample rate. Especially when downsampling by a large value, the
+ * output sample rate may be a poor choice to represent the delay, similarly
+ * for upsampling and the input sample rate.
+ *
+ * @param s     swr context
+ * @param base  timebase in which the returned delay will be:
+ *              @li if it's set to 1 the returned delay is in seconds
+ *              @li if it's set to 1000 the returned delay is in milliseconds
+ *              @li if it's set to the input sample rate then the returned
+ *                  delay is in input samples
+ *              @li if it's set to the output sample rate then the returned
+ *                  delay is in output samples
+ *              @li if it's the least common multiple of in_sample_rate and
+ *                  out_sample_rate then an exact rounding-free delay will be
+ *                  returned
+ * @returns     the delay in 1 / @c base units.
+ */
+int64_t swr_get_delay(struct SwrContext *s, int64_t base);
+
+/**
+ * Find an upper bound on the number of samples that the next swr_convert
+ * call will output, if called with in_samples of input samples. This
+ * depends on the internal state, and anything changing the internal state
+ * (like further swr_convert() calls) will may change the number of samples
+ * swr_get_out_samples() returns for the same number of input samples.
+ *
+ * @param in_samples    number of input samples.
+ * @note any call to swr_inject_silence(), swr_convert(), swr_next_pts()
+ *       or swr_set_compensation() invalidates this limit
+ * @note it is recommended to pass the correct available buffer size
+ *       to all functions like swr_convert() even if swr_get_out_samples()
+ *       indicates that less would be used.
+ * @returns an upper bound on the number of samples that the next swr_convert
+ *          will output or a negative value to indicate an error
+ */
+int swr_get_out_samples(struct SwrContext *s, int in_samples);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @name Configuration accessors
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Return the @ref LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION_INT constant.
+ *
+ * This is useful to check if the build-time libswresample has the same version
+ * as the run-time one.
+ *
+ * @returns     the unsigned int-typed version
+ */
+unsigned swresample_version(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the swr build-time configuration.
+ *
+ * @returns     the build-time @c ./configure flags
+ */
+const char *swresample_configuration(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the swr license.
+ *
+ * @returns     the license of libswresample, determined at build-time
+ */
+const char *swresample_license(void);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @name AVFrame based API
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Convert the samples in the input AVFrame and write them to the output AVFrame.
+ *
+ * Input and output AVFrames must have channel_layout, sample_rate and format set.
+ *
+ * If the output AVFrame does not have the data pointers allocated the nb_samples
+ * field will be set using av_frame_get_buffer()
+ * is called to allocate the frame.
+ *
+ * The output AVFrame can be NULL or have fewer allocated samples than required.
+ * In this case, any remaining samples not written to the output will be added
+ * to an internal FIFO buffer, to be returned at the next call to this function
+ * or to swr_convert().
+ *
+ * If converting sample rate, there may be data remaining in the internal
+ * resampling delay buffer. swr_get_delay() tells the number of
+ * remaining samples. To get this data as output, call this function or
+ * swr_convert() with NULL input.
+ *
+ * If the SwrContext configuration does not match the output and
+ * input AVFrame settings the conversion does not take place and depending on
+ * which AVFrame is not matching AVERROR_OUTPUT_CHANGED, AVERROR_INPUT_CHANGED
+ * or the result of a bitwise-OR of them is returned.
+ *
+ * @see swr_delay()
+ * @see swr_convert()
+ * @see swr_get_delay()
+ *
+ * @param swr             audio resample context
+ * @param output          output AVFrame
+ * @param input           input AVFrame
+ * @return                0 on success, AVERROR on failure or nonmatching
+ *                        configuration.
+ */
+int swr_convert_frame(SwrContext *swr,
+                      AVFrame *output, const AVFrame *input);
+
+/**
+ * Configure or reconfigure the SwrContext using the information
+ * provided by the AVFrames.
+ *
+ * The original resampling context is reset even on failure.
+ * The function calls swr_close() internally if the context is open.
+ *
+ * @see swr_close();
+ *
+ * @param swr             audio resample context
+ * @param out             output AVFrame
+ * @param in              input AVFrame
+ * @return                0 on success, AVERROR on failure.
+ */
+int swr_config_frame(SwrContext *swr, const AVFrame *out, const AVFrame *in);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* SWRESAMPLE_SWRESAMPLE_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libswresample/version.h b/dependencies/include/libswresample/version.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4b9952d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libswresample/version.h
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+/*
+ * Version macros.
+ *
+ * This file is part of libswresample
+ *
+ * libswresample is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * libswresample is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with libswresample; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef SWRESAMPLE_VERSION_H
+#define SWRESAMPLE_VERSION_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * Libswresample version macros
+ */
+
+#include "libavutil/version.h"
+
+#include "version_major.h"
+
+#define LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION_MINOR   9
+#define LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION_MICRO 100
+
+#define LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION_INT  AV_VERSION_INT(LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION_MAJOR, \
+                                                  LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION_MINOR, \
+                                                  LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION      AV_VERSION(LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION_MAJOR, \
+                                              LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION_MINOR, \
+                                              LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBSWRESAMPLE_BUILD        LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION_INT
+
+#define LIBSWRESAMPLE_IDENT        "SwR" AV_STRINGIFY(LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION)
+
+#endif /* SWRESAMPLE_VERSION_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libswresample/version_major.h b/dependencies/include/libswresample/version_major.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7f265c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libswresample/version_major.h
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+/*
+ * Version macros.
+ *
+ * This file is part of libswresample
+ *
+ * libswresample is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * libswresample is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with libswresample; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef SWRESAMPLE_VERSION_MAJOR_H
+#define SWRESAMPLE_VERSION_MAJOR_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * Libswresample version macros
+ */
+
+#define LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION_MAJOR   4
+
+#endif /* SWRESAMPLE_VERSION_MAJOR_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libswscale/swscale.h b/dependencies/include/libswscale/swscale.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9d4612a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libswscale/swscale.h
@@ -0,0 +1,436 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (C) 2001-2011 Michael Niedermayer <michaelni@gmx.at>
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef SWSCALE_SWSCALE_H
+#define SWSCALE_SWSCALE_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup libsws
+ * external API header
+ */
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+#include "libavutil/avutil.h"
+#include "libavutil/frame.h"
+#include "libavutil/log.h"
+#include "libavutil/pixfmt.h"
+#include "version_major.h"
+#ifndef HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H
+/* When included as part of the ffmpeg build, only include the major version
+ * to avoid unnecessary rebuilds. When included externally, keep including
+ * the full version information. */
+#include "version.h"
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup libsws libswscale
+ * Color conversion and scaling library.
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * Return the LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_INT constant.
+ */
+unsigned swscale_version(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libswscale build-time configuration.
+ */
+const char *swscale_configuration(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libswscale license.
+ */
+const char *swscale_license(void);
+
+/* values for the flags, the stuff on the command line is different */
+#define SWS_FAST_BILINEAR     1
+#define SWS_BILINEAR          2
+#define SWS_BICUBIC           4
+#define SWS_X                 8
+#define SWS_POINT          0x10
+#define SWS_AREA           0x20
+#define SWS_BICUBLIN       0x40
+#define SWS_GAUSS          0x80
+#define SWS_SINC          0x100
+#define SWS_LANCZOS       0x200
+#define SWS_SPLINE        0x400
+
+#define SWS_SRC_V_CHR_DROP_MASK     0x30000
+#define SWS_SRC_V_CHR_DROP_SHIFT    16
+
+#define SWS_PARAM_DEFAULT           123456
+
+#define SWS_PRINT_INFO              0x1000
+
+//the following 3 flags are not completely implemented
+//internal chrominance subsampling info
+#define SWS_FULL_CHR_H_INT    0x2000
+//input subsampling info
+#define SWS_FULL_CHR_H_INP    0x4000
+#define SWS_DIRECT_BGR        0x8000
+#define SWS_ACCURATE_RND      0x40000
+#define SWS_BITEXACT          0x80000
+#define SWS_ERROR_DIFFUSION  0x800000
+
+#define SWS_MAX_REDUCE_CUTOFF 0.002
+
+#define SWS_CS_ITU709         1
+#define SWS_CS_FCC            4
+#define SWS_CS_ITU601         5
+#define SWS_CS_ITU624         5
+#define SWS_CS_SMPTE170M      5
+#define SWS_CS_SMPTE240M      7
+#define SWS_CS_DEFAULT        5
+#define SWS_CS_BT2020         9
+
+/**
+ * Return a pointer to yuv<->rgb coefficients for the given colorspace
+ * suitable for sws_setColorspaceDetails().
+ *
+ * @param colorspace One of the SWS_CS_* macros. If invalid,
+ * SWS_CS_DEFAULT is used.
+ */
+const int *sws_getCoefficients(int colorspace);
+
+// when used for filters they must have an odd number of elements
+// coeffs cannot be shared between vectors
+typedef struct SwsVector {
+    double *coeff;              ///< pointer to the list of coefficients
+    int length;                 ///< number of coefficients in the vector
+} SwsVector;
+
+// vectors can be shared
+typedef struct SwsFilter {
+    SwsVector *lumH;
+    SwsVector *lumV;
+    SwsVector *chrH;
+    SwsVector *chrV;
+} SwsFilter;
+
+struct SwsContext;
+
+/**
+ * Return a positive value if pix_fmt is a supported input format, 0
+ * otherwise.
+ */
+int sws_isSupportedInput(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Return a positive value if pix_fmt is a supported output format, 0
+ * otherwise.
+ */
+int sws_isSupportedOutput(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * @param[in]  pix_fmt the pixel format
+ * @return a positive value if an endianness conversion for pix_fmt is
+ * supported, 0 otherwise.
+ */
+int sws_isSupportedEndiannessConversion(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an empty SwsContext. This must be filled and passed to
+ * sws_init_context(). For filling see AVOptions, options.c and
+ * sws_setColorspaceDetails().
+ */
+struct SwsContext *sws_alloc_context(void);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize the swscaler context sws_context.
+ *
+ * @return zero or positive value on success, a negative value on
+ * error
+ */
+av_warn_unused_result
+int sws_init_context(struct SwsContext *sws_context, SwsFilter *srcFilter, SwsFilter *dstFilter);
+
+/**
+ * Free the swscaler context swsContext.
+ * If swsContext is NULL, then does nothing.
+ */
+void sws_freeContext(struct SwsContext *swsContext);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate and return an SwsContext. You need it to perform
+ * scaling/conversion operations using sws_scale().
+ *
+ * @param srcW the width of the source image
+ * @param srcH the height of the source image
+ * @param srcFormat the source image format
+ * @param dstW the width of the destination image
+ * @param dstH the height of the destination image
+ * @param dstFormat the destination image format
+ * @param flags specify which algorithm and options to use for rescaling
+ * @param param extra parameters to tune the used scaler
+ *              For SWS_BICUBIC param[0] and [1] tune the shape of the basis
+ *              function, param[0] tunes f(1) and param[1] f´(1)
+ *              For SWS_GAUSS param[0] tunes the exponent and thus cutoff
+ *              frequency
+ *              For SWS_LANCZOS param[0] tunes the width of the window function
+ * @return a pointer to an allocated context, or NULL in case of error
+ * @note this function is to be removed after a saner alternative is
+ *       written
+ */
+struct SwsContext *sws_getContext(int srcW, int srcH, enum AVPixelFormat srcFormat,
+                                  int dstW, int dstH, enum AVPixelFormat dstFormat,
+                                  int flags, SwsFilter *srcFilter,
+                                  SwsFilter *dstFilter, const double *param);
+
+/**
+ * Scale the image slice in srcSlice and put the resulting scaled
+ * slice in the image in dst. A slice is a sequence of consecutive
+ * rows in an image.
+ *
+ * Slices have to be provided in sequential order, either in
+ * top-bottom or bottom-top order. If slices are provided in
+ * non-sequential order the behavior of the function is undefined.
+ *
+ * @param c         the scaling context previously created with
+ *                  sws_getContext()
+ * @param srcSlice  the array containing the pointers to the planes of
+ *                  the source slice
+ * @param srcStride the array containing the strides for each plane of
+ *                  the source image
+ * @param srcSliceY the position in the source image of the slice to
+ *                  process, that is the number (counted starting from
+ *                  zero) in the image of the first row of the slice
+ * @param srcSliceH the height of the source slice, that is the number
+ *                  of rows in the slice
+ * @param dst       the array containing the pointers to the planes of
+ *                  the destination image
+ * @param dstStride the array containing the strides for each plane of
+ *                  the destination image
+ * @return          the height of the output slice
+ */
+int sws_scale(struct SwsContext *c, const uint8_t *const srcSlice[],
+              const int srcStride[], int srcSliceY, int srcSliceH,
+              uint8_t *const dst[], const int dstStride[]);
+
+/**
+ * Scale source data from src and write the output to dst.
+ *
+ * This is merely a convenience wrapper around
+ * - sws_frame_start()
+ * - sws_send_slice(0, src->height)
+ * - sws_receive_slice(0, dst->height)
+ * - sws_frame_end()
+ *
+ * @param c   The scaling context
+ * @param dst The destination frame. See documentation for sws_frame_start() for
+ *            more details.
+ * @param src The source frame.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR code on failure
+ */
+int sws_scale_frame(struct SwsContext *c, AVFrame *dst, const AVFrame *src);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize the scaling process for a given pair of source/destination frames.
+ * Must be called before any calls to sws_send_slice() and sws_receive_slice().
+ *
+ * This function will retain references to src and dst, so they must both use
+ * refcounted buffers (if allocated by the caller, in case of dst).
+ *
+ * @param c   The scaling context
+ * @param dst The destination frame.
+ *
+ *            The data buffers may either be already allocated by the caller or
+ *            left clear, in which case they will be allocated by the scaler.
+ *            The latter may have performance advantages - e.g. in certain cases
+ *            some output planes may be references to input planes, rather than
+ *            copies.
+ *
+ *            Output data will be written into this frame in successful
+ *            sws_receive_slice() calls.
+ * @param src The source frame. The data buffers must be allocated, but the
+ *            frame data does not have to be ready at this point. Data
+ *            availability is then signalled by sws_send_slice().
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR code on failure
+ *
+ * @see sws_frame_end()
+ */
+int sws_frame_start(struct SwsContext *c, AVFrame *dst, const AVFrame *src);
+
+/**
+ * Finish the scaling process for a pair of source/destination frames previously
+ * submitted with sws_frame_start(). Must be called after all sws_send_slice()
+ * and sws_receive_slice() calls are done, before any new sws_frame_start()
+ * calls.
+ *
+ * @param c   The scaling context
+ */
+void sws_frame_end(struct SwsContext *c);
+
+/**
+ * Indicate that a horizontal slice of input data is available in the source
+ * frame previously provided to sws_frame_start(). The slices may be provided in
+ * any order, but may not overlap. For vertically subsampled pixel formats, the
+ * slices must be aligned according to subsampling.
+ *
+ * @param c   The scaling context
+ * @param slice_start first row of the slice
+ * @param slice_height number of rows in the slice
+ *
+ * @return a non-negative number on success, a negative AVERROR code on failure.
+ */
+int sws_send_slice(struct SwsContext *c, unsigned int slice_start,
+                   unsigned int slice_height);
+
+/**
+ * Request a horizontal slice of the output data to be written into the frame
+ * previously provided to sws_frame_start().
+ *
+ * @param c   The scaling context
+ * @param slice_start first row of the slice; must be a multiple of
+ *                    sws_receive_slice_alignment()
+ * @param slice_height number of rows in the slice; must be a multiple of
+ *                     sws_receive_slice_alignment(), except for the last slice
+ *                     (i.e. when slice_start+slice_height is equal to output
+ *                     frame height)
+ *
+ * @return a non-negative number if the data was successfully written into the output
+ *         AVERROR(EAGAIN) if more input data needs to be provided before the
+ *                         output can be produced
+ *         another negative AVERROR code on other kinds of scaling failure
+ */
+int sws_receive_slice(struct SwsContext *c, unsigned int slice_start,
+                      unsigned int slice_height);
+
+/**
+ * Get the alignment required for slices
+ *
+ * @param c   The scaling context
+ * @return alignment required for output slices requested with sws_receive_slice().
+ *         Slice offsets and sizes passed to sws_receive_slice() must be
+ *         multiples of the value returned from this function.
+ */
+unsigned int sws_receive_slice_alignment(const struct SwsContext *c);
+
+/**
+ * @param c the scaling context
+ * @param dstRange flag indicating the while-black range of the output (1=jpeg / 0=mpeg)
+ * @param srcRange flag indicating the while-black range of the input (1=jpeg / 0=mpeg)
+ * @param table the yuv2rgb coefficients describing the output yuv space, normally ff_yuv2rgb_coeffs[x]
+ * @param inv_table the yuv2rgb coefficients describing the input yuv space, normally ff_yuv2rgb_coeffs[x]
+ * @param brightness 16.16 fixed point brightness correction
+ * @param contrast 16.16 fixed point contrast correction
+ * @param saturation 16.16 fixed point saturation correction
+ *
+ * @return A negative error code on error, non negative otherwise.
+ *         If `LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_MAJOR < 7`, returns -1 if not supported.
+ */
+int sws_setColorspaceDetails(struct SwsContext *c, const int inv_table[4],
+                             int srcRange, const int table[4], int dstRange,
+                             int brightness, int contrast, int saturation);
+
+/**
+ * @return A negative error code on error, non negative otherwise.
+ *         If `LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_MAJOR < 7`, returns -1 if not supported.
+ */
+int sws_getColorspaceDetails(struct SwsContext *c, int **inv_table,
+                             int *srcRange, int **table, int *dstRange,
+                             int *brightness, int *contrast, int *saturation);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate and return an uninitialized vector with length coefficients.
+ */
+SwsVector *sws_allocVec(int length);
+
+/**
+ * Return a normalized Gaussian curve used to filter stuff
+ * quality = 3 is high quality, lower is lower quality.
+ */
+SwsVector *sws_getGaussianVec(double variance, double quality);
+
+/**
+ * Scale all the coefficients of a by the scalar value.
+ */
+void sws_scaleVec(SwsVector *a, double scalar);
+
+/**
+ * Scale all the coefficients of a so that their sum equals height.
+ */
+void sws_normalizeVec(SwsVector *a, double height);
+
+void sws_freeVec(SwsVector *a);
+
+SwsFilter *sws_getDefaultFilter(float lumaGBlur, float chromaGBlur,
+                                float lumaSharpen, float chromaSharpen,
+                                float chromaHShift, float chromaVShift,
+                                int verbose);
+void sws_freeFilter(SwsFilter *filter);
+
+/**
+ * Check if context can be reused, otherwise reallocate a new one.
+ *
+ * If context is NULL, just calls sws_getContext() to get a new
+ * context. Otherwise, checks if the parameters are the ones already
+ * saved in context. If that is the case, returns the current
+ * context. Otherwise, frees context and gets a new context with
+ * the new parameters.
+ *
+ * Be warned that srcFilter and dstFilter are not checked, they
+ * are assumed to remain the same.
+ */
+struct SwsContext *sws_getCachedContext(struct SwsContext *context,
+                                        int srcW, int srcH, enum AVPixelFormat srcFormat,
+                                        int dstW, int dstH, enum AVPixelFormat dstFormat,
+                                        int flags, SwsFilter *srcFilter,
+                                        SwsFilter *dstFilter, const double *param);
+
+/**
+ * Convert an 8-bit paletted frame into a frame with a color depth of 32 bits.
+ *
+ * The output frame will have the same packed format as the palette.
+ *
+ * @param src        source frame buffer
+ * @param dst        destination frame buffer
+ * @param num_pixels number of pixels to convert
+ * @param palette    array with [256] entries, which must match color arrangement (RGB or BGR) of src
+ */
+void sws_convertPalette8ToPacked32(const uint8_t *src, uint8_t *dst, int num_pixels, const uint8_t *palette);
+
+/**
+ * Convert an 8-bit paletted frame into a frame with a color depth of 24 bits.
+ *
+ * With the palette format "ABCD", the destination frame ends up with the format "ABC".
+ *
+ * @param src        source frame buffer
+ * @param dst        destination frame buffer
+ * @param num_pixels number of pixels to convert
+ * @param palette    array with [256] entries, which must match color arrangement (RGB or BGR) of src
+ */
+void sws_convertPalette8ToPacked24(const uint8_t *src, uint8_t *dst, int num_pixels, const uint8_t *palette);
+
+/**
+ * Get the AVClass for swsContext. It can be used in combination with
+ * AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ for examining options.
+ *
+ * @see av_opt_find().
+ */
+const AVClass *sws_get_class(void);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* SWSCALE_SWSCALE_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libswscale/version.h b/dependencies/include/libswscale/version.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9bb3b17
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libswscale/version.h
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef SWSCALE_VERSION_H
+#define SWSCALE_VERSION_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * swscale version macros
+ */
+
+#include "libavutil/version.h"
+
+#include "version_major.h"
+
+#define LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_MINOR   8
+#define LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_MICRO 112
+
+#define LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_INT  AV_VERSION_INT(LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_MAJOR, \
+                                               LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_MINOR, \
+                                               LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBSWSCALE_VERSION      AV_VERSION(LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_MAJOR, \
+                                           LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_MINOR, \
+                                           LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBSWSCALE_BUILD        LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_INT
+
+#define LIBSWSCALE_IDENT        "SwS" AV_STRINGIFY(LIBSWSCALE_VERSION)
+
+#endif /* SWSCALE_VERSION_H */
diff --git a/dependencies/include/libswscale/version_major.h b/dependencies/include/libswscale/version_major.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2f84187
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/include/libswscale/version_major.h
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef SWSCALE_VERSION_MAJOR_H
+#define SWSCALE_VERSION_MAJOR_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * swscale version macros
+ */
+
+#define LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_MAJOR   6
+
+/**
+ * FF_API_* defines may be placed below to indicate public API that will be
+ * dropped at a future version bump. The defines themselves are not part of
+ * the public API and may change, break or disappear at any time.
+ */
+
+#endif /* SWSCALE_VERSION_MAJOR_H */
diff --git a/lib/miniz.h b/dependencies/include/miniz.h
index 6b4944d..6b4944d 100644
--- a/lib/miniz.h
+++ b/dependencies/include/miniz.h
diff --git a/lib/base64.c b/dependencies/src/base64.c
index 07caa0a..07caa0a 100644
--- a/lib/base64.c
+++ b/dependencies/src/base64.c
diff --git a/lib/glad.c b/dependencies/src/glad.c
index 20186f7..bbb7c06 100644
--- a/lib/glad.c
+++ b/dependencies/src/glad.c
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
     APIs: gl=3.3
     Profile: core
     Extensions:
-        
+
     Loader: True
     Local files: False
     Omit khrplatform: False
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
 #include <stdio.h>
 #include <stdlib.h>
 #include <string.h>
-#include <glad/glad.h>
+#include <glad.h>
 
 static void* get_proc(const char *namez);
 
diff --git a/dependencies/src/imgui/LICENSE.txt b/dependencies/src/imgui/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4023e0c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/src/imgui/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+The MIT License (MIT)
+
+Copyright (c) 2014-2022 Omar Cornut
+
+Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy
+of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal
+in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights
+to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
+copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
+furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
+
+The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all
+copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+
+THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
+IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
+FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
+AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
+LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
+OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
+SOFTWARE.
diff --git a/dependencies/src/imgui/imgui.cpp b/dependencies/src/imgui/imgui.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1625396
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/src/imgui/imgui.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,19145 @@
+// dear imgui, v1.89 WIP
+// (main code and documentation)
+
+// Help:
+// - Read FAQ at http://dearimgui.org/faq
+// - Newcomers, read 'Programmer guide' below for notes on how to setup Dear ImGui in your codebase.
+// - Call and read ImGui::ShowDemoWindow() in imgui_demo.cpp. All applications in examples/ are doing that.
+// Read imgui.cpp for details, links and comments.
+
+// Resources:
+// - FAQ                   http://dearimgui.org/faq
+// - Homepage & latest     https://github.com/ocornut/imgui
+// - Releases & changelog  https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/releases
+// - Gallery               https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/5243 (please post your screenshots/video there!)
+// - Wiki                  https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki (lots of good stuff there)
+// - Glossary              https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Glossary
+// - Issues & support      https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues
+
+// Getting Started?
+// - For first-time users having issues compiling/linking/running or issues loading fonts:
+//   please post in https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/discussions if you cannot find a solution in resources above.
+
+// Developed by Omar Cornut and every direct or indirect contributors to the GitHub.
+// See LICENSE.txt for copyright and licensing details (standard MIT License).
+// This library is free but needs your support to sustain development and maintenance.
+// Businesses: you can support continued development via invoiced technical support, maintenance and sponsoring contracts. Please reach out to "contact AT dearimgui.com".
+// Individuals: you can support continued development via donations. See docs/README or web page.
+
+// It is recommended that you don't modify imgui.cpp! It will become difficult for you to update the library.
+// Note that 'ImGui::' being a namespace, you can add functions into the namespace from your own source files, without
+// modifying imgui.h or imgui.cpp. You may include imgui_internal.h to access internal data structures, but it doesn't
+// come with any guarantee of forward compatibility. Discussing your changes on the GitHub Issue Tracker may lead you
+// to a better solution or official support for them.
+
+/*
+
+Index of this file:
+
+DOCUMENTATION
+
+- MISSION STATEMENT
+- END-USER GUIDE
+- PROGRAMMER GUIDE
+  - READ FIRST
+  - HOW TO UPDATE TO A NEWER VERSION OF DEAR IMGUI
+  - GETTING STARTED WITH INTEGRATING DEAR IMGUI IN YOUR CODE/ENGINE
+  - HOW A SIMPLE APPLICATION MAY LOOK LIKE
+  - HOW A SIMPLE RENDERING FUNCTION MAY LOOK LIKE
+  - USING GAMEPAD/KEYBOARD NAVIGATION CONTROLS
+- API BREAKING CHANGES (read me when you update!)
+- FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQ)
+  - Read all answers online: https://www.dearimgui.org/faq, or in docs/FAQ.md (with a Markdown viewer)
+
+CODE
+(search for "[SECTION]" in the code to find them)
+
+// [SECTION] INCLUDES
+// [SECTION] FORWARD DECLARATIONS
+// [SECTION] CONTEXT AND MEMORY ALLOCATORS
+// [SECTION] USER FACING STRUCTURES (ImGuiStyle, ImGuiIO)
+// [SECTION] MISC HELPERS/UTILITIES (Geometry functions)
+// [SECTION] MISC HELPERS/UTILITIES (String, Format, Hash functions)
+// [SECTION] MISC HELPERS/UTILITIES (File functions)
+// [SECTION] MISC HELPERS/UTILITIES (ImText* functions)
+// [SECTION] MISC HELPERS/UTILITIES (Color functions)
+// [SECTION] ImGuiStorage
+// [SECTION] ImGuiTextFilter
+// [SECTION] ImGuiTextBuffer
+// [SECTION] ImGuiListClipper
+// [SECTION] STYLING
+// [SECTION] RENDER HELPERS
+// [SECTION] MAIN CODE (most of the code! lots of stuff, needs tidying up!)
+// [SECTION] INPUTS
+// [SECTION] ERROR CHECKING
+// [SECTION] LAYOUT
+// [SECTION] SCROLLING
+// [SECTION] TOOLTIPS
+// [SECTION] POPUPS
+// [SECTION] KEYBOARD/GAMEPAD NAVIGATION
+// [SECTION] DRAG AND DROP
+// [SECTION] LOGGING/CAPTURING
+// [SECTION] SETTINGS
+// [SECTION] VIEWPORTS, PLATFORM WINDOWS
+// [SECTION] DOCKING
+// [SECTION] PLATFORM DEPENDENT HELPERS
+// [SECTION] METRICS/DEBUGGER WINDOW
+// [SECTION] DEBUG LOG WINDOW
+// [SECTION] OTHER DEBUG TOOLS (ITEM PICKER, STACK TOOL)
+
+*/
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// DOCUMENTATION
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+/*
+
+ MISSION STATEMENT
+ =================
+
+ - Easy to use to create code-driven and data-driven tools.
+ - Easy to use to create ad hoc short-lived tools and long-lived, more elaborate tools.
+ - Easy to hack and improve.
+ - Minimize setup and maintenance.
+ - Minimize state storage on user side.
+ - Minimize state synchronization.
+ - Portable, minimize dependencies, run on target (consoles, phones, etc.).
+ - Efficient runtime and memory consumption.
+
+ Designed for developers and content-creators, not the typical end-user! Some of the current weaknesses includes:
+
+ - Doesn't look fancy, doesn't animate.
+ - Limited layout features, intricate layouts are typically crafted in code.
+
+
+ END-USER GUIDE
+ ==============
+
+ - Double-click on title bar to collapse window.
+ - Click upper right corner to close a window, available when 'bool* p_open' is passed to ImGui::Begin().
+ - Click and drag on lower right corner to resize window (double-click to auto fit window to its contents).
+ - Click and drag on any empty space to move window.
+ - TAB/SHIFT+TAB to cycle through keyboard editable fields.
+ - CTRL+Click on a slider or drag box to input value as text.
+ - Use mouse wheel to scroll.
+ - Text editor:
+   - Hold SHIFT or use mouse to select text.
+   - CTRL+Left/Right to word jump.
+   - CTRL+Shift+Left/Right to select words.
+   - CTRL+A our Double-Click to select all.
+   - CTRL+X,CTRL+C,CTRL+V to use OS clipboard/
+   - CTRL+Z,CTRL+Y to undo/redo.
+   - ESCAPE to revert text to its original value.
+   - Controls are automatically adjusted for OSX to match standard OSX text editing operations.
+ - General Keyboard controls: enable with ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard.
+ - General Gamepad controls: enable with ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad. Download controller mapping PNG/PSD at http://dearimgui.org/controls_sheets
+
+
+ PROGRAMMER GUIDE
+ ================
+
+ READ FIRST
+ ----------
+ - Remember to check the wonderful Wiki (https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki)
+ - Your code creates the UI, if your code doesn't run the UI is gone! The UI can be highly dynamic, there are no construction or
+   destruction steps, less superfluous data retention on your side, less state duplication, less state synchronization, fewer bugs.
+ - Call and read ImGui::ShowDemoWindow() for demo code demonstrating most features.
+ - The library is designed to be built from sources. Avoid pre-compiled binaries and packaged versions. See imconfig.h to configure your build.
+ - Dear ImGui is an implementation of the IMGUI paradigm (immediate-mode graphical user interface, a term coined by Casey Muratori).
+   You can learn about IMGUI principles at http://www.johno.se/book/imgui.html, http://mollyrocket.com/861 & more links in Wiki.
+ - Dear ImGui is a "single pass" rasterizing implementation of the IMGUI paradigm, aimed at ease of use and high-performances.
+   For every application frame, your UI code will be called only once. This is in contrast to e.g. Unity's implementation of an IMGUI,
+   where the UI code is called multiple times ("multiple passes") from a single entry point. There are pros and cons to both approaches.
+ - Our origin is on the top-left. In axis aligned bounding boxes, Min = top-left, Max = bottom-right.
+ - This codebase is also optimized to yield decent performances with typical "Debug" builds settings.
+ - Please make sure you have asserts enabled (IM_ASSERT redirects to assert() by default, but can be redirected).
+   If you get an assert, read the messages and comments around the assert.
+ - C++: this is a very C-ish codebase: we don't rely on C++11, we don't include any C++ headers, and ImGui:: is a namespace.
+ - C++: ImVec2/ImVec4 do not expose math operators by default, because it is expected that you use your own math types.
+   See FAQ "How can I use my own math types instead of ImVec2/ImVec4?" for details about setting up imconfig.h for that.
+   However, imgui_internal.h can optionally export math operators for ImVec2/ImVec4, which we use in this codebase.
+ - C++: pay attention that ImVector<> manipulates plain-old-data and does not honor construction/destruction (avoid using it in your code!).
+
+
+ HOW TO UPDATE TO A NEWER VERSION OF DEAR IMGUI
+ ----------------------------------------------
+ - Overwrite all the sources files except for imconfig.h (if you have modified your copy of imconfig.h)
+ - Or maintain your own branch where you have imconfig.h modified as a top-most commit which you can regularly rebase over "master".
+ - You can also use '#define IMGUI_USER_CONFIG "my_config_file.h" to redirect configuration to your own file.
+ - Read the "API BREAKING CHANGES" section (below). This is where we list occasional API breaking changes.
+   If a function/type has been renamed / or marked obsolete, try to fix the name in your code before it is permanently removed
+   from the public API. If you have a problem with a missing function/symbols, search for its name in the code, there will
+   likely be a comment about it. Please report any issue to the GitHub page!
+ - To find out usage of old API, you can add '#define IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS' in your configuration file.
+ - Try to keep your copy of Dear ImGui reasonably up to date.
+
+
+ GETTING STARTED WITH INTEGRATING DEAR IMGUI IN YOUR CODE/ENGINE
+ ---------------------------------------------------------------
+ - Run and study the examples and demo in imgui_demo.cpp to get acquainted with the library.
+ - In the majority of cases you should be able to use unmodified backends files available in the backends/ folder.
+ - Add the Dear ImGui source files + selected backend source files to your projects or using your preferred build system.
+   It is recommended you build and statically link the .cpp files as part of your project and NOT as a shared library (DLL).
+ - You can later customize the imconfig.h file to tweak some compile-time behavior, such as integrating Dear ImGui types with your own maths types.
+ - When using Dear ImGui, your programming IDE is your friend: follow the declaration of variables, functions and types to find comments about them.
+ - Dear ImGui never touches or knows about your GPU state. The only function that knows about GPU is the draw function that you provide.
+   Effectively it means you can create widgets at any time in your code, regardless of considerations of being in "update" vs "render"
+   phases of your own application. All rendering information is stored into command-lists that you will retrieve after calling ImGui::Render().
+ - Refer to the backends and demo applications in the examples/ folder for instruction on how to setup your code.
+ - If you are running over a standard OS with a common graphics API, you should be able to use unmodified imgui_impl_*** files from the examples/ folder.
+
+
+ HOW A SIMPLE APPLICATION MAY LOOK LIKE
+ --------------------------------------
+ EXHIBIT 1: USING THE EXAMPLE BACKENDS (= imgui_impl_XXX.cpp files from the backends/ folder).
+ The sub-folders in examples/ contain examples applications following this structure.
+
+     // Application init: create a dear imgui context, setup some options, load fonts
+     ImGui::CreateContext();
+     ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+     // TODO: Set optional io.ConfigFlags values, e.g. 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard' to enable keyboard controls.
+     // TODO: Fill optional fields of the io structure later.
+     // TODO: Load TTF/OTF fonts if you don't want to use the default font.
+
+     // Initialize helper Platform and Renderer backends (here we are using imgui_impl_win32.cpp and imgui_impl_dx11.cpp)
+     ImGui_ImplWin32_Init(hwnd);
+     ImGui_ImplDX11_Init(g_pd3dDevice, g_pd3dDeviceContext);
+
+     // Application main loop
+     while (true)
+     {
+         // Feed inputs to dear imgui, start new frame
+         ImGui_ImplDX11_NewFrame();
+         ImGui_ImplWin32_NewFrame();
+         ImGui::NewFrame();
+
+         // Any application code here
+         ImGui::Text("Hello, world!");
+
+         // Render dear imgui into screen
+         ImGui::Render();
+         ImGui_ImplDX11_RenderDrawData(ImGui::GetDrawData());
+         g_pSwapChain->Present(1, 0);
+     }
+
+     // Shutdown
+     ImGui_ImplDX11_Shutdown();
+     ImGui_ImplWin32_Shutdown();
+     ImGui::DestroyContext();
+
+ EXHIBIT 2: IMPLEMENTING CUSTOM BACKEND / CUSTOM ENGINE
+
+     // Application init: create a dear imgui context, setup some options, load fonts
+     ImGui::CreateContext();
+     ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+     // TODO: Set optional io.ConfigFlags values, e.g. 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard' to enable keyboard controls.
+     // TODO: Fill optional fields of the io structure later.
+     // TODO: Load TTF/OTF fonts if you don't want to use the default font.
+
+     // Build and load the texture atlas into a texture
+     // (In the examples/ app this is usually done within the ImGui_ImplXXX_Init() function from one of the demo Renderer)
+     int width, height;
+     unsigned char* pixels = NULL;
+     io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsRGBA32(&pixels, &width, &height);
+
+     // At this point you've got the texture data and you need to upload that to your graphic system:
+     // After we have created the texture, store its pointer/identifier (_in whichever format your engine uses_) in 'io.Fonts->TexID'.
+     // This will be passed back to your via the renderer. Basically ImTextureID == void*. Read FAQ for details about ImTextureID.
+     MyTexture* texture = MyEngine::CreateTextureFromMemoryPixels(pixels, width, height, TEXTURE_TYPE_RGBA32)
+     io.Fonts->SetTexID((void*)texture);
+
+     // Application main loop
+     while (true)
+     {
+        // Setup low-level inputs, e.g. on Win32: calling GetKeyboardState(), or write to those fields from your Windows message handlers, etc.
+        // (In the examples/ app this is usually done within the ImGui_ImplXXX_NewFrame() function from one of the demo Platform Backends)
+        io.DeltaTime = 1.0f/60.0f;              // set the time elapsed since the previous frame (in seconds)
+        io.DisplaySize.x = 1920.0f;             // set the current display width
+        io.DisplaySize.y = 1280.0f;             // set the current display height here
+        io.AddMousePosEvent(mouse_x, mouse_y);  // update mouse position
+        io.AddMouseButtonEvent(0, mouse_b[0]);  // update mouse button states
+        io.AddMouseButtonEvent(1, mouse_b[1]);  // update mouse button states
+
+        // Call NewFrame(), after this point you can use ImGui::* functions anytime
+        // (So you want to try calling NewFrame() as early as you can in your main loop to be able to use Dear ImGui everywhere)
+        ImGui::NewFrame();
+
+        // Most of your application code here
+        ImGui::Text("Hello, world!");
+        MyGameUpdate(); // may use any Dear ImGui functions, e.g. ImGui::Begin("My window"); ImGui::Text("Hello, world!"); ImGui::End();
+        MyGameRender(); // may use any Dear ImGui functions as well!
+
+        // Render dear imgui, swap buffers
+        // (You want to try calling EndFrame/Render as late as you can, to be able to use Dear ImGui in your own game rendering code)
+        ImGui::EndFrame();
+        ImGui::Render();
+        ImDrawData* draw_data = ImGui::GetDrawData();
+        MyImGuiRenderFunction(draw_data);
+        SwapBuffers();
+     }
+
+     // Shutdown
+     ImGui::DestroyContext();
+
+ To decide whether to dispatch mouse/keyboard inputs to Dear ImGui to the rest of your application,
+ you should read the 'io.WantCaptureMouse', 'io.WantCaptureKeyboard' and 'io.WantTextInput' flags!
+ Please read the FAQ and example applications for details about this!
+
+
+ HOW A SIMPLE RENDERING FUNCTION MAY LOOK LIKE
+ ---------------------------------------------
+ The backends in impl_impl_XXX.cpp files contain many working implementations of a rendering function.
+
+    void void MyImGuiRenderFunction(ImDrawData* draw_data)
+    {
+       // TODO: Setup render state: alpha-blending enabled, no face culling, no depth testing, scissor enabled
+       // TODO: Setup texture sampling state: sample with bilinear filtering (NOT point/nearest filtering). Use 'io.Fonts->Flags |= ImFontAtlasFlags_NoBakedLines;' to allow point/nearest filtering.
+       // TODO: Setup viewport covering draw_data->DisplayPos to draw_data->DisplayPos + draw_data->DisplaySize
+       // TODO: Setup orthographic projection matrix cover draw_data->DisplayPos to draw_data->DisplayPos + draw_data->DisplaySize
+       // TODO: Setup shader: vertex { float2 pos, float2 uv, u32 color }, fragment shader sample color from 1 texture, multiply by vertex color.
+       ImVec2 clip_off = draw_data->DisplayPos;
+       for (int n = 0; n < draw_data->CmdListsCount; n++)
+       {
+          const ImDrawList* cmd_list = draw_data->CmdLists[n];
+          const ImDrawVert* vtx_buffer = cmd_list->VtxBuffer.Data;  // vertex buffer generated by Dear ImGui
+          const ImDrawIdx* idx_buffer = cmd_list->IdxBuffer.Data;   // index buffer generated by Dear ImGui
+          for (int cmd_i = 0; cmd_i < cmd_list->CmdBuffer.Size; cmd_i++)
+          {
+             const ImDrawCmd* pcmd = &cmd_list->CmdBuffer[cmd_i];
+             if (pcmd->UserCallback)
+             {
+                 pcmd->UserCallback(cmd_list, pcmd);
+             }
+             else
+             {
+                 // Project scissor/clipping rectangles into framebuffer space
+                 ImVec2 clip_min(pcmd->ClipRect.x - clip_off.x, pcmd->ClipRect.y - clip_off.y);
+                 ImVec2 clip_max(pcmd->ClipRect.z - clip_off.x, pcmd->ClipRect.w - clip_off.y);
+                 if (clip_max.x <= clip_min.x || clip_max.y <= clip_min.y)
+                     continue;
+
+                 // We are using scissoring to clip some objects. All low-level graphics API should support it.
+                 // - If your engine doesn't support scissoring yet, you may ignore this at first. You will get some small glitches
+                 //   (some elements visible outside their bounds) but you can fix that once everything else works!
+                 // - Clipping coordinates are provided in imgui coordinates space:
+                 //   - For a given viewport, draw_data->DisplayPos == viewport->Pos and draw_data->DisplaySize == viewport->Size
+                 //   - In a single viewport application, draw_data->DisplayPos == (0,0) and draw_data->DisplaySize == io.DisplaySize, but always use GetMainViewport()->Pos/Size instead of hardcoding those values.
+                 //   - In the interest of supporting multi-viewport applications (see 'docking' branch on github),
+                 //     always subtract draw_data->DisplayPos from clipping bounds to convert them to your viewport space.
+                 // - Note that pcmd->ClipRect contains Min+Max bounds. Some graphics API may use Min+Max, other may use Min+Size (size being Max-Min)
+                 MyEngineSetScissor(clip_min.x, clip_min.y, clip_max.x, clip_max.y);
+
+                 // The texture for the draw call is specified by pcmd->GetTexID().
+                 // The vast majority of draw calls will use the Dear ImGui texture atlas, which value you have set yourself during initialization.
+                 MyEngineBindTexture((MyTexture*)pcmd->GetTexID());
+
+                 // Render 'pcmd->ElemCount/3' indexed triangles.
+                 // By default the indices ImDrawIdx are 16-bit, you can change them to 32-bit in imconfig.h if your engine doesn't support 16-bit indices.
+                 MyEngineDrawIndexedTriangles(pcmd->ElemCount, sizeof(ImDrawIdx) == 2 ? GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT : GL_UNSIGNED_INT, idx_buffer + pcmd->IdxOffset, vtx_buffer, pcmd->VtxOffset);
+             }
+          }
+       }
+    }
+
+
+ USING GAMEPAD/KEYBOARD NAVIGATION CONTROLS
+ ------------------------------------------
+ - The gamepad/keyboard navigation is fairly functional and keeps being improved.
+ - Gamepad support is particularly useful to use Dear ImGui on a console system (e.g. PlayStation, Switch, Xbox) without a mouse!
+ - The initial focus was to support game controllers, but keyboard is becoming increasingly and decently usable.
+ - Keyboard:
+    - Application: Set io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard to enable.
+    - When keyboard navigation is active (io.NavActive + ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard),
+      the io.WantCaptureKeyboard flag will be set. For more advanced uses, you may want to read from:
+       - io.NavActive: true when a window is focused and it doesn't have the ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs flag set.
+       - io.NavVisible: true when the navigation cursor is visible (and usually goes false when mouse is used).
+       - or query focus information with e.g. IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow), IsItemFocused() etc. functions.
+      Please reach out if you think the game vs navigation input sharing could be improved.
+ - Gamepad:
+    - Application: Set io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad to enable.
+    - Backend: Set io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad + call io.AddKeyEvent/AddKeyAnalogEvent() with ImGuiKey_Gamepad_XXX keys.
+      For analog values (0.0f to 1.0f), backend is responsible to handling a dead-zone and rescaling inputs accordingly.
+      Backend code will probably need to transform your raw inputs (such as e.g. remapping your 0.2..0.9 raw input range to 0.0..1.0 imgui range, etc.).
+    - BEFORE 1.87, BACKENDS USED TO WRITE TO io.NavInputs[]. This is now obsolete. Please call io functions instead!
+    - You can download PNG/PSD files depicting the gamepad controls for common controllers at: http://dearimgui.org/controls_sheets
+    - If you need to share inputs between your game and the Dear ImGui interface, the easiest approach is to go all-or-nothing,
+      with a buttons combo to toggle the target. Please reach out if you think the game vs navigation input sharing could be improved.
+ - Mouse:
+    - PS4/PS5 users: Consider emulating a mouse cursor with DualShock4 touch pad or a spare analog stick as a mouse-emulation fallback.
+    - Consoles/Tablet/Phone users: Consider using a Synergy 1.x server (on your PC) + uSynergy.c (on your console/tablet/phone app) to share your PC mouse/keyboard.
+    - On a TV/console system where readability may be lower or mouse inputs may be awkward, you may want to set the ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos flag.
+      Enabling ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos + ImGuiBackendFlags_HasSetMousePos instructs dear imgui to move your mouse cursor along with navigation movements.
+      When enabled, the NewFrame() function may alter 'io.MousePos' and set 'io.WantSetMousePos' to notify you that it wants the mouse cursor to be moved.
+      When that happens your backend NEEDS to move the OS or underlying mouse cursor on the next frame. Some of the backends in examples/ do that.
+      (If you set the NavEnableSetMousePos flag but don't honor 'io.WantSetMousePos' properly, imgui will misbehave as it will see your mouse moving back and forth!)
+      (In a setup when you may not have easy control over the mouse cursor, e.g. uSynergy.c doesn't expose moving remote mouse cursor, you may want
+       to set a boolean to ignore your other external mouse positions until the external source is moved again.)
+
+
+ API BREAKING CHANGES
+ ====================
+
+ Occasionally introducing changes that are breaking the API. We try to make the breakage minor and easy to fix.
+ Below is a change-log of API breaking changes only. If you are using one of the functions listed, expect to have to fix some code.
+ When you are not sure about an old symbol or function name, try using the Search/Find function of your IDE to look for comments or references in all imgui files.
+ You can read releases logs https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/releases for more details.
+
+(Docking/Viewport Branch)
+ - 2022/XX/XX (1.XX) - when multi-viewports are enabled, all positions will be in your natural OS coordinates space. It means that:
+                        - reference to hard-coded positions such as in SetNextWindowPos(ImVec2(0,0)) are probably not what you want anymore.
+                          you may use GetMainViewport()->Pos to offset hard-coded positions, e.g. SetNextWindowPos(GetMainViewport()->Pos)
+                        - likewise io.MousePos and GetMousePos() will use OS coordinates.
+                          If you query mouse positions to interact with non-imgui coordinates you will need to offset them, e.g. subtract GetWindowViewport()->Pos.
+
+ - 2022/07/08 (1.88) - inputs: removed io.NavInputs[] and ImGuiNavInput enum (following 1.87 changes).
+                        - Official backends from 1.87+                  -> no issue.
+                        - Official backends from 1.60 to 1.86           -> will build and convert gamepad inputs, unless IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO is defined. Need updating!
+                        - Custom backends not writing to io.NavInputs[] -> no issue.
+                        - Custom backends writing to io.NavInputs[]     -> will build and convert gamepad inputs, unless IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO is defined. Need fixing!
+                        - TL;DR: Backends should call io.AddKeyEvent()/io.AddKeyAnalogEvent() with ImGuiKey_GamepadXXX values instead of filling io.NavInput[].
+ - 2022/06/15 (1.88) - renamed IMGUI_DISABLE_METRICS_WINDOW to IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS for correctness. kept support for old define (will obsolete).
+ - 2022/05/03 (1.88) - backends: osx: removed ImGui_ImplOSX_HandleEvent() from backend API in favor of backend automatically handling event capture. All ImGui_ImplOSX_HandleEvent() calls should be removed as they are now unnecessary.
+ - 2022/04/05 (1.88) - inputs: renamed ImGuiKeyModFlags to ImGuiModFlags. Kept inline redirection enums (will obsolete). This was never used in public API functions but technically present in imgui.h and ImGuiIO.
+ - 2022/01/20 (1.87) - inputs: reworded gamepad IO.
+                        - Backend writing to io.NavInputs[]            -> backend should call io.AddKeyEvent()/io.AddKeyAnalogEvent() with ImGuiKey_GamepadXXX values.
+ - 2022/01/19 (1.87) - sliders, drags: removed support for legacy arithmetic operators (+,+-,*,/) when inputing text. This doesn't break any api/code but a feature that used to be accessible by end-users (which seemingly no one used).
+ - 2022/01/17 (1.87) - inputs: reworked mouse IO.
+                        - Backend writing to io.MousePos               -> backend should call io.AddMousePosEvent()
+                        - Backend writing to io.MouseDown[]            -> backend should call io.AddMouseButtonEvent()
+                        - Backend writing to io.MouseWheel             -> backend should call io.AddMouseWheelEvent()
+                        - Backend writing to io.MouseHoveredViewport   -> backend should call io.AddMouseViewportEvent() [Docking branch w/ multi-viewports only]
+                       note: for all calls to IO new functions, the Dear ImGui context should be bound/current.
+                       read https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/4921 for details.
+ - 2022/01/10 (1.87) - inputs: reworked keyboard IO. Removed io.KeyMap[], io.KeysDown[] in favor of calling io.AddKeyEvent(). Removed GetKeyIndex(), now unecessary. All IsKeyXXX() functions now take ImGuiKey values. All features are still functional until IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO is defined. Read Changelog and Release Notes for details.
+                        - IsKeyPressed(MY_NATIVE_KEY_XXX)              -> use IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_XXX)
+                        - IsKeyPressed(GetKeyIndex(ImGuiKey_XXX))      -> use IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_XXX)
+                        - Backend writing to io.KeyMap[],io.KeysDown[] -> backend should call io.AddKeyEvent() (+ call io.SetKeyEventNativeData() if you want legacy user code to stil function with legacy key codes).
+                        - Backend writing to io.KeyCtrl, io.KeyShift.. -> backend should call io.AddKeyEvent() with ImGuiKey_ModXXX values. *IF YOU PULLED CODE BETWEEN 2021/01/10 and 2021/01/27: We used to have a io.AddKeyModsEvent() function which was now replaced by io.AddKeyEvent() with ImGuiKey_ModXXX values.*
+                     - one case won't work with backward compatibility: if your custom backend used ImGuiKey as mock native indices (e.g. "io.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_A] = ImGuiKey_A") because those values are now larger than the legacy KeyDown[] array. Will assert.
+                     - inputs: added ImGuiKey_ModCtrl/ImGuiKey_ModShift/ImGuiKey_ModAlt/ImGuiKey_ModSuper values to submit keyboard modifiers using io.AddKeyEvent(), instead of writing directly to io.KeyCtrl, io.KeyShift, io.KeyAlt, io.KeySuper.
+ - 2022/01/05 (1.87) - inputs: renamed ImGuiKey_KeyPadEnter to ImGuiKey_KeypadEnter to align with new symbols. Kept redirection enum.
+ - 2022/01/05 (1.87) - removed io.ImeSetInputScreenPosFn() in favor of more flexible io.SetPlatformImeDataFn(). Removed 'void* io.ImeWindowHandle' in favor of writing to 'void* ImGuiViewport::PlatformHandleRaw'.
+ - 2022/01/01 (1.87) - commented out redirecting functions/enums names that were marked obsolete in 1.69, 1.70, 1.71, 1.72 (March-July 2019)
+                        - ImGui::SetNextTreeNodeOpen()        -> use ImGui::SetNextItemOpen()
+                        - ImGui::GetContentRegionAvailWidth() -> use ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x
+                        - ImGui::TreeAdvanceToLabelPos()      -> use ImGui::SetCursorPosX(ImGui::GetCursorPosX() + ImGui::GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing());
+                        - ImFontAtlas::CustomRect             -> use ImFontAtlasCustomRect
+                        - ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB/HSV/HEX     -> use ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB/HSV/Hex
+ - 2021/12/20 (1.86) - backends: removed obsolete Marmalade backend (imgui_impl_marmalade.cpp) + example. Find last supported version at https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Bindings
+ - 2021/11/04 (1.86) - removed CalcListClipping() function. Prefer using ImGuiListClipper which can return non-contiguous ranges. Please open an issue if you think you really need this function.
+ - 2021/08/23 (1.85) - removed GetWindowContentRegionWidth() function. keep inline redirection helper. can use 'GetWindowContentRegionMax().x - GetWindowContentRegionMin().x' instead for generally 'GetContentRegionAvail().x' is more useful.
+ - 2021/07/26 (1.84) - commented out redirecting functions/enums names that were marked obsolete in 1.67 and 1.69 (March 2019):
+                        - ImGui::GetOverlayDrawList() -> use ImGui::GetForegroundDrawList()
+                        - ImFont::GlyphRangesBuilder  -> use ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder
+ - 2021/05/19 (1.83) - backends: obsoleted direct access to ImDrawCmd::TextureId in favor of calling ImDrawCmd::GetTexID().
+                        - if you are using official backends from the source tree: you have nothing to do.
+                        - if you have copied old backend code or using your own: change access to draw_cmd->TextureId to draw_cmd->GetTexID().
+ - 2021/03/12 (1.82) - upgraded ImDrawList::AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), PathRect() to use ImDrawFlags instead of ImDrawCornersFlags.
+                        - ImDrawCornerFlags_TopLeft  -> use ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft
+                        - ImDrawCornerFlags_BotRight -> use ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight
+                        - ImDrawCornerFlags_None     -> use ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone etc.
+                       flags now sanely defaults to 0 instead of 0x0F, consistent with all other flags in the API.
+                       breaking: the default with rounding > 0.0f is now "round all corners" vs old implicit "round no corners":
+                        - rounding == 0.0f + flags == 0 --> meant no rounding  --> unchanged (common use)
+                        - rounding  > 0.0f + flags != 0 --> meant rounding     --> unchanged (common use)
+                        - rounding == 0.0f + flags != 0 --> meant no rounding  --> unchanged (unlikely use)
+                        - rounding  > 0.0f + flags == 0 --> meant no rounding  --> BREAKING (unlikely use): will now round all corners --> use ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone or rounding == 0.0f.
+                       this ONLY matters for hard coded use of 0 + rounding > 0.0f. Use of named ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone (new) or ImDrawCornerFlags_None (old) are ok.
+                       the old ImDrawCornersFlags used awkward default values of ~0 or 0xF (4 lower bits set) to signify "round all corners" and we sometimes encouraged using them as shortcuts.
+                       legacy path still support use of hard coded ~0 or any value from 0x1 or 0xF. They will behave the same with legacy paths enabled (will assert otherwise).
+ - 2021/03/11 (1.82) - removed redirecting functions/enums names that were marked obsolete in 1.66 (September 2018):
+                        - ImGui::SetScrollHere()              -> use ImGui::SetScrollHereY()
+ - 2021/03/11 (1.82) - clarified that ImDrawList::PathArcTo(), ImDrawList::PathArcToFast() won't render with radius < 0.0f. Previously it sorts of accidentally worked but would generally lead to counter-clockwise paths and have an effect on anti-aliasing.
+ - 2021/03/10 (1.82) - upgraded ImDrawList::AddPolyline() and PathStroke() "bool closed" parameter to "ImDrawFlags flags". The matching ImDrawFlags_Closed value is guaranteed to always stay == 1 in the future.
+ - 2021/02/22 (1.82) - (*undone in 1.84*) win32+mingw: Re-enabled IME functions by default even under MinGW. In July 2016, issue #738 had me incorrectly disable those default functions for MinGW. MinGW users should: either link with -limm32, either set their imconfig file  with '#define IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS'.
+ - 2021/02/17 (1.82) - renamed rarely used style.CircleSegmentMaxError (old default = 1.60f) to style.CircleTessellationMaxError (new default = 0.30f) as the meaning of the value changed.
+ - 2021/02/03 (1.81) - renamed ListBoxHeader(const char* label, ImVec2 size) to BeginListBox(). Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete).
+                     - removed ListBoxHeader(const char* label, int items_count, int height_in_items = -1) in favor of specifying size. Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete).
+                     - renamed ListBoxFooter() to EndListBox(). Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete).
+ - 2021/01/26 (1.81) - removed ImGuiFreeType::BuildFontAtlas(). Kept inline redirection function. Prefer using '#define IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE', but there's a runtime selection path available too. The shared extra flags parameters (very rarely used) are now stored in ImFontAtlas::FontBuilderFlags.
+                     - renamed ImFontConfig::RasterizerFlags (used by FreeType) to ImFontConfig::FontBuilderFlags.
+                     - renamed ImGuiFreeType::XXX flags to ImGuiFreeTypeBuilderFlags_XXX for consistency with other API.
+ - 2020/10/12 (1.80) - removed redirecting functions/enums that were marked obsolete in 1.63 (August 2018):
+                        - ImGui::IsItemDeactivatedAfterChange() -> use ImGui::IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit().
+                        - ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDarkening       -> use ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg
+                        - ImGuiInputTextCallback              -> use ImGuiTextEditCallback
+                        - ImGuiInputTextCallbackData          -> use ImGuiTextEditCallbackData
+ - 2020/12/21 (1.80) - renamed ImDrawList::AddBezierCurve() to AddBezierCubic(), and PathBezierCurveTo() to PathBezierCubicCurveTo(). Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete).
+ - 2020/12/04 (1.80) - added imgui_tables.cpp file! Manually constructed project files will need the new file added!
+ - 2020/11/18 (1.80) - renamed undocumented/internals ImGuiColumnsFlags_* to ImGuiOldColumnFlags_* in prevision of incoming Tables API.
+ - 2020/11/03 (1.80) - renamed io.ConfigWindowsMemoryCompactTimer to io.ConfigMemoryCompactTimer as the feature will apply to other data structures
+ - 2020/10/14 (1.80) - backends: moved all backends files (imgui_impl_XXXX.cpp, imgui_impl_XXXX.h) from examples/ to backends/.
+ - 2020/10/12 (1.80) - removed redirecting functions/enums that were marked obsolete in 1.60 (April 2018):
+                        - io.RenderDrawListsFn pointer        -> use ImGui::GetDrawData() value and call the render function of your backend
+                        - ImGui::IsAnyWindowFocused()         -> use ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow)
+                        - ImGui::IsAnyWindowHovered()         -> use ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow)
+                        - ImGuiStyleVar_Count_                -> use ImGuiStyleVar_COUNT
+                        - ImGuiMouseCursor_Count_             -> use ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT
+                      - removed redirecting functions names that were marked obsolete in 1.61 (May 2018):
+                        - InputFloat (... int decimal_precision ...) -> use InputFloat (... const char* format ...) with format = "%.Xf" where X is your value for decimal_precision.
+                        - same for InputFloat2()/InputFloat3()/InputFloat4() variants taking a `int decimal_precision` parameter.
+ - 2020/10/05 (1.79) - removed ImGuiListClipper: Renamed constructor parameters which created an ambiguous alternative to using the ImGuiListClipper::Begin() function, with misleading edge cases (note: imgui_memory_editor <0.40 from imgui_club/ used this old clipper API. Update your copy if needed).
+ - 2020/09/25 (1.79) - renamed ImGuiSliderFlags_ClampOnInput to ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp. Kept redirection enum (will obsolete sooner because previous name was added recently).
+ - 2020/09/25 (1.79) - renamed style.TabMinWidthForUnselectedCloseButton to style.TabMinWidthForCloseButton.
+ - 2020/09/21 (1.79) - renamed OpenPopupContextItem() back to OpenPopupOnItemClick(), reverting the change from 1.77. For varieties of reason this is more self-explanatory.
+ - 2020/09/21 (1.79) - removed return value from OpenPopupOnItemClick() - returned true on mouse release on an item - because it is inconsistent with other popup APIs and makes others misleading. It's also and unnecessary: you can use IsWindowAppearing() after BeginPopup() for a similar result.
+ - 2020/09/17 (1.79) - removed ImFont::DisplayOffset in favor of ImFontConfig::GlyphOffset. DisplayOffset was applied after scaling and not very meaningful/useful outside of being needed by the default ProggyClean font. If you scaled this value after calling AddFontDefault(), this is now done automatically. It was also getting in the way of better font scaling, so let's get rid of it now!
+ - 2020/08/17 (1.78) - obsoleted use of the trailing 'float power=1.0f' parameter for DragFloat(), DragFloat2(), DragFloat3(), DragFloat4(), DragFloatRange2(), DragScalar(), DragScalarN(), SliderFloat(), SliderFloat2(), SliderFloat3(), SliderFloat4(), SliderScalar(), SliderScalarN(), VSliderFloat() and VSliderScalar().
+                       replaced the 'float power=1.0f' argument with integer-based flags defaulting to 0 (as with all our flags).
+                       worked out a backward-compatibility scheme so hopefully most C++ codebase should not be affected. in short, when calling those functions:
+                       - if you omitted the 'power' parameter (likely!), you are not affected.
+                       - if you set the 'power' parameter to 1.0f (same as previous default value): 1/ your compiler may warn on float>int conversion, 2/ everything else will work. 3/ you can replace the 1.0f value with 0 to fix the warning, and be technically correct.
+                       - if you set the 'power' parameter to >1.0f (to enable non-linear editing): 1/ your compiler may warn on float>int conversion, 2/ code will assert at runtime, 3/ in case asserts are disabled, the code will not crash and enable the _Logarithmic flag. 4/ you can replace the >1.0f value with ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic to fix the warning/assert and get a _similar_ effect as previous uses of power >1.0f.
+                       see https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/3361 for all details.
+                       kept inline redirection functions (will obsolete) apart for: DragFloatRange2(), VSliderFloat(), VSliderScalar(). For those three the 'float power=1.0f' version was removed directly as they were most unlikely ever used.
+                       for shared code, you can version check at compile-time with `#if IMGUI_VERSION_NUM >= 17704`.
+                     - obsoleted use of v_min > v_max in DragInt, DragFloat, DragScalar to lock edits (introduced in 1.73, was not demoed nor documented very), will be replaced by a more generic ReadOnly feature. You may use the ImGuiSliderFlags_ReadOnly internal flag in the meantime.
+ - 2020/06/23 (1.77) - removed BeginPopupContextWindow(const char*, int mouse_button, bool also_over_items) in favor of BeginPopupContextWindow(const char*, ImGuiPopupFlags flags) with ImGuiPopupFlags_NoOverItems.
+ - 2020/06/15 (1.77) - renamed OpenPopupOnItemClick() to OpenPopupContextItem(). Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete). [NOTE: THIS WAS REVERTED IN 1.79]
+ - 2020/06/15 (1.77) - removed CalcItemRectClosestPoint() entry point which was made obsolete and asserting in December 2017.
+ - 2020/04/23 (1.77) - removed unnecessary ID (first arg) of ImFontAtlas::AddCustomRectRegular().
+ - 2020/01/22 (1.75) - ImDrawList::AddCircle()/AddCircleFilled() functions don't accept negative radius any more.
+ - 2019/12/17 (1.75) - [undid this change in 1.76] made Columns() limited to 64 columns by asserting above that limit. While the current code technically supports it, future code may not so we're putting the restriction ahead.
+ - 2019/12/13 (1.75) - [imgui_internal.h] changed ImRect() default constructor initializes all fields to 0.0f instead of (FLT_MAX,FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX). If you used ImRect::Add() to create bounding boxes by adding multiple points into it, you may need to fix your initial value.
+ - 2019/12/08 (1.75) - removed redirecting functions/enums that were marked obsolete in 1.53 (December 2017):
+                       - ShowTestWindow()                    -> use ShowDemoWindow()
+                       - IsRootWindowFocused()               -> use IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow)
+                       - IsRootWindowOrAnyChildFocused()     -> use IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootAndChildWindows)
+                       - SetNextWindowContentWidth(w)        -> use SetNextWindowContentSize(ImVec2(w, 0.0f)
+                       - GetItemsLineHeightWithSpacing()     -> use GetFrameHeightWithSpacing()
+                       - ImGuiCol_ChildWindowBg              -> use ImGuiCol_ChildBg
+                       - ImGuiStyleVar_ChildWindowRounding   -> use ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding
+                       - ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowOverlapMode -> use ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap
+                       - IMGUI_DISABLE_TEST_WINDOWS          -> use IMGUI_DISABLE_DEMO_WINDOWS
+ - 2019/12/08 (1.75) - obsoleted calling ImDrawList::PrimReserve() with a negative count (which was vaguely documented and rarely if ever used). Instead, we added an explicit PrimUnreserve() API.
+ - 2019/12/06 (1.75) - removed implicit default parameter to IsMouseDragging(int button = 0) to be consistent with other mouse functions (none of the other functions have it).
+ - 2019/11/21 (1.74) - ImFontAtlas::AddCustomRectRegular() now requires an ID larger than 0x110000 (instead of 0x10000) to conform with supporting Unicode planes 1-16 in a future update. ID below 0x110000 will now assert.
+ - 2019/11/19 (1.74) - renamed IMGUI_DISABLE_FORMAT_STRING_FUNCTIONS to IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FORMAT_FUNCTIONS for consistency.
+ - 2019/11/19 (1.74) - renamed IMGUI_DISABLE_MATH_FUNCTIONS to IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_MATH_FUNCTIONS for consistency.
+ - 2019/10/22 (1.74) - removed redirecting functions/enums that were marked obsolete in 1.52 (October 2017):
+                       - Begin() [old 5 args version]        -> use Begin() [3 args], use SetNextWindowSize() SetNextWindowBgAlpha() if needed
+                       - IsRootWindowOrAnyChildHovered()     -> use IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootAndChildWindows)
+                       - AlignFirstTextHeightToWidgets()     -> use AlignTextToFramePadding()
+                       - SetNextWindowPosCenter()            -> use SetNextWindowPos() with a pivot of (0.5f, 0.5f)
+                       - ImFont::Glyph                       -> use ImFontGlyph
+ - 2019/10/14 (1.74) - inputs: Fixed a miscalculation in the keyboard/mouse "typematic" repeat delay/rate calculation, used by keys and e.g. repeating mouse buttons as well as the GetKeyPressedAmount() function.
+                       if you were using a non-default value for io.KeyRepeatRate (previous default was 0.250), you can add +io.KeyRepeatDelay to it to compensate for the fix.
+                       The function was triggering on: 0.0 and (delay+rate*N) where (N>=1). Fixed formula responds to (N>=0). Effectively it made io.KeyRepeatRate behave like it was set to (io.KeyRepeatRate + io.KeyRepeatDelay).
+                       If you never altered io.KeyRepeatRate nor used GetKeyPressedAmount() this won't affect you.
+ - 2019/07/15 (1.72) - removed TreeAdvanceToLabelPos() which is rarely used and only does SetCursorPosX(GetCursorPosX() + GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing()). Kept redirection function (will obsolete).
+ - 2019/07/12 (1.72) - renamed ImFontAtlas::CustomRect to ImFontAtlasCustomRect. Kept redirection typedef (will obsolete).
+ - 2019/06/14 (1.72) - removed redirecting functions/enums names that were marked obsolete in 1.51 (June 2017): ImGuiCol_Column*, ImGuiSetCond_*, IsItemHoveredRect(), IsPosHoveringAnyWindow(), IsMouseHoveringAnyWindow(), IsMouseHoveringWindow(), IMGUI_ONCE_UPON_A_FRAME. Grep this log for details and new names, or see how they were implemented until 1.71.
+ - 2019/06/07 (1.71) - rendering of child window outer decorations (bg color, border, scrollbars) is now performed as part of the parent window. If you have
+                       overlapping child windows in a same parent, and relied on their relative z-order to be mapped to their submission order, this will affect your rendering.
+                       This optimization is disabled if the parent window has no visual output, because it appears to be the most common situation leading to the creation of overlapping child windows.
+                       Please reach out if you are affected.
+ - 2019/05/13 (1.71) - renamed SetNextTreeNodeOpen() to SetNextItemOpen(). Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete).
+ - 2019/05/11 (1.71) - changed io.AddInputCharacter(unsigned short c) signature to io.AddInputCharacter(unsigned int c).
+ - 2019/04/29 (1.70) - improved ImDrawList thick strokes (>1.0f) preserving correct thickness up to 90 degrees angles (e.g. rectangles). If you have custom rendering using thick lines, they will appear thicker now.
+ - 2019/04/29 (1.70) - removed GetContentRegionAvailWidth(), use GetContentRegionAvail().x instead. Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete).
+ - 2019/03/04 (1.69) - renamed GetOverlayDrawList() to GetForegroundDrawList(). Kept redirection function (will obsolete).
+ - 2019/02/26 (1.69) - renamed ImGuiColorEditFlags_RGB/ImGuiColorEditFlags_HSV/ImGuiColorEditFlags_HEX to ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB/ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV/ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex. Kept redirection enums (will obsolete).
+ - 2019/02/14 (1.68) - made it illegal/assert when io.DisplayTime == 0.0f (with an exception for the first frame). If for some reason your time step calculation gives you a zero value, replace it with an arbitrarily small value!
+ - 2019/02/01 (1.68) - removed io.DisplayVisibleMin/DisplayVisibleMax (which were marked obsolete and removed from viewport/docking branch already).
+ - 2019/01/06 (1.67) - renamed io.InputCharacters[], marked internal as was always intended. Please don't access directly, and use AddInputCharacter() instead!
+ - 2019/01/06 (1.67) - renamed ImFontAtlas::GlyphRangesBuilder to ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder. Kept redirection typedef (will obsolete).
+ - 2018/12/20 (1.67) - made it illegal to call Begin("") with an empty string. This somehow half-worked before but had various undesirable side-effects.
+ - 2018/12/10 (1.67) - renamed io.ConfigResizeWindowsFromEdges to io.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges as we are doing a large pass on configuration flags.
+ - 2018/10/12 (1.66) - renamed misc/stl/imgui_stl.* to misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.* in prevision for other C++ helper files.
+ - 2018/09/28 (1.66) - renamed SetScrollHere() to SetScrollHereY(). Kept redirection function (will obsolete).
+ - 2018/09/06 (1.65) - renamed stb_truetype.h to imstb_truetype.h, stb_textedit.h to imstb_textedit.h, and stb_rect_pack.h to imstb_rectpack.h.
+                       If you were conveniently using the imgui copy of those STB headers in your project you will have to update your include paths.
+ - 2018/09/05 (1.65) - renamed io.OptCursorBlink/io.ConfigCursorBlink to io.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink. (#1427)
+ - 2018/08/31 (1.64) - added imgui_widgets.cpp file, extracted and moved widgets code out of imgui.cpp into imgui_widgets.cpp. Re-ordered some of the code remaining in imgui.cpp.
+                       NONE OF THE FUNCTIONS HAVE CHANGED. THE CODE IS SEMANTICALLY 100% IDENTICAL, BUT _EVERY_ FUNCTION HAS BEEN MOVED.
+                       Because of this, any local modifications to imgui.cpp will likely conflict when you update. Read docs/CHANGELOG.txt for suggestions.
+ - 2018/08/22 (1.63) - renamed IsItemDeactivatedAfterChange() to IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit() for consistency with new IsItemEdited() API. Kept redirection function (will obsolete soonish as IsItemDeactivatedAfterChange() is very recent).
+ - 2018/08/21 (1.63) - renamed ImGuiTextEditCallback to ImGuiInputTextCallback, ImGuiTextEditCallbackData to ImGuiInputTextCallbackData for consistency. Kept redirection types (will obsolete).
+ - 2018/08/21 (1.63) - removed ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::ReadOnly since it is a duplication of (ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::Flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly).
+ - 2018/08/01 (1.63) - removed per-window ImGuiWindowFlags_ResizeFromAnySide beta flag in favor of a global io.ConfigResizeWindowsFromEdges [update 1.67 renamed to ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges] to enable the feature.
+ - 2018/08/01 (1.63) - renamed io.OptCursorBlink to io.ConfigCursorBlink [-> io.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink in 1.65], io.OptMacOSXBehaviors to ConfigMacOSXBehaviors for consistency.
+ - 2018/07/22 (1.63) - changed ImGui::GetTime() return value from float to double to avoid accumulating floating point imprecisions over time.
+ - 2018/07/08 (1.63) - style: renamed ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDarkening to ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg for consistency with other features. Kept redirection enum (will obsolete).
+ - 2018/06/08 (1.62) - examples: the imgui_impl_XXX files have been split to separate platform (Win32, GLFW, SDL2, etc.) from renderer (DX11, OpenGL, Vulkan,  etc.).
+                       old backends will still work as is, however prefer using the separated backends as they will be updated to support multi-viewports.
+                       when adopting new backends follow the main.cpp code of your preferred examples/ folder to know which functions to call.
+                       in particular, note that old backends called ImGui::NewFrame() at the end of their ImGui_ImplXXXX_NewFrame() function.
+ - 2018/06/06 (1.62) - renamed GetGlyphRangesChinese() to GetGlyphRangesChineseFull() to distinguish other variants and discourage using the full set.
+ - 2018/06/06 (1.62) - TreeNodeEx()/TreeNodeBehavior(): the ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader helper now include the ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen flag. See Changelog for details.
+ - 2018/05/03 (1.61) - DragInt(): the default compile-time format string has been changed from "%.0f" to "%d", as we are not using integers internally any more.
+                       If you used DragInt() with custom format strings, make sure you change them to use %d or an integer-compatible format.
+                       To honor backward-compatibility, the DragInt() code will currently parse and modify format strings to replace %*f with %d, giving time to users to upgrade their code.
+                       If you have IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS enabled, the code will instead assert! You may run a reg-exp search on your codebase for e.g. "DragInt.*%f" to help you find them.
+ - 2018/04/28 (1.61) - obsoleted InputFloat() functions taking an optional "int decimal_precision" in favor of an equivalent and more flexible "const char* format",
+                       consistent with other functions. Kept redirection functions (will obsolete).
+ - 2018/04/09 (1.61) - IM_DELETE() helper function added in 1.60 doesn't clear the input _pointer_ reference, more consistent with expectation and allows passing r-value.
+ - 2018/03/20 (1.60) - renamed io.WantMoveMouse to io.WantSetMousePos for consistency and ease of understanding (was added in 1.52, _not_ used by core and only honored by some backend ahead of merging the Nav branch).
+ - 2018/03/12 (1.60) - removed ImGuiCol_CloseButton, ImGuiCol_CloseButtonActive, ImGuiCol_CloseButtonHovered as the closing cross uses regular button colors now.
+ - 2018/03/08 (1.60) - changed ImFont::DisplayOffset.y to default to 0 instead of +1. Fixed rounding of Ascent/Descent to match TrueType renderer. If you were adding or subtracting to ImFont::DisplayOffset check if your fonts are correctly aligned vertically.
+ - 2018/03/03 (1.60) - renamed ImGuiStyleVar_Count_ to ImGuiStyleVar_COUNT and ImGuiMouseCursor_Count_ to ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT for consistency with other public enums.
+ - 2018/02/18 (1.60) - BeginDragDropSource(): temporarily removed the optional mouse_button=0 parameter because it is not really usable in many situations at the moment.
+ - 2018/02/16 (1.60) - obsoleted the io.RenderDrawListsFn callback, you can call your graphics engine render function after ImGui::Render(). Use ImGui::GetDrawData() to retrieve the ImDrawData* to display.
+ - 2018/02/07 (1.60) - reorganized context handling to be more explicit,
+                       - YOU NOW NEED TO CALL ImGui::CreateContext() AT THE BEGINNING OF YOUR APP, AND CALL ImGui::DestroyContext() AT THE END.
+                       - removed Shutdown() function, as DestroyContext() serve this purpose.
+                       - you may pass a ImFontAtlas* pointer to CreateContext() to share a font atlas between contexts. Otherwise CreateContext() will create its own font atlas instance.
+                       - removed allocator parameters from CreateContext(), they are now setup with SetAllocatorFunctions(), and shared by all contexts.
+                       - removed the default global context and font atlas instance, which were confusing for users of DLL reloading and users of multiple contexts.
+ - 2018/01/31 (1.60) - moved sample TTF files from extra_fonts/ to misc/fonts/. If you loaded files directly from the imgui repo you may need to update your paths.
+ - 2018/01/11 (1.60) - obsoleted IsAnyWindowHovered() in favor of IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow). Kept redirection function (will obsolete).
+ - 2018/01/11 (1.60) - obsoleted IsAnyWindowFocused() in favor of IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow). Kept redirection function (will obsolete).
+ - 2018/01/03 (1.60) - renamed ImGuiSizeConstraintCallback to ImGuiSizeCallback, ImGuiSizeConstraintCallbackData to ImGuiSizeCallbackData.
+ - 2017/12/29 (1.60) - removed CalcItemRectClosestPoint() which was weird and not really used by anyone except demo code. If you need it it's easy to replicate on your side.
+ - 2017/12/24 (1.53) - renamed the emblematic ShowTestWindow() function to ShowDemoWindow(). Kept redirection function (will obsolete).
+ - 2017/12/21 (1.53) - ImDrawList: renamed style.AntiAliasedShapes to style.AntiAliasedFill for consistency and as a way to explicitly break code that manipulate those flag at runtime. You can now manipulate ImDrawList::Flags
+ - 2017/12/21 (1.53) - ImDrawList: removed 'bool anti_aliased = true' final parameter of ImDrawList::AddPolyline() and ImDrawList::AddConvexPolyFilled(). Prefer manipulating ImDrawList::Flags if you need to toggle them during the frame.
+ - 2017/12/14 (1.53) - using the ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse flag on a child window forwards the mouse wheel event to the parent window, unless either ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs or ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar are also set.
+ - 2017/12/13 (1.53) - renamed GetItemsLineHeightWithSpacing() to GetFrameHeightWithSpacing(). Kept redirection function (will obsolete).
+ - 2017/12/13 (1.53) - obsoleted IsRootWindowFocused() in favor of using IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow). Kept redirection function (will obsolete).
+                     - obsoleted IsRootWindowOrAnyChildFocused() in favor of using IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootAndChildWindows). Kept redirection function (will obsolete).
+ - 2017/12/12 (1.53) - renamed ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowOverlapMode to ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap. Kept redirection enum (will obsolete).
+ - 2017/12/10 (1.53) - removed SetNextWindowContentWidth(), prefer using SetNextWindowContentSize(). Kept redirection function (will obsolete).
+ - 2017/11/27 (1.53) - renamed ImGuiTextBuffer::append() helper to appendf(), appendv() to appendfv(). If you copied the 'Log' demo in your code, it uses appendv() so that needs to be renamed.
+ - 2017/11/18 (1.53) - Style, Begin: removed ImGuiWindowFlags_ShowBorders window flag. Borders are now fully set up in the ImGuiStyle structure (see e.g. style.FrameBorderSize, style.WindowBorderSize). Use ImGui::ShowStyleEditor() to look them up.
+                       Please note that the style system will keep evolving (hopefully stabilizing in Q1 2018), and so custom styles will probably subtly break over time. It is recommended you use the StyleColorsClassic(), StyleColorsDark(), StyleColorsLight() functions.
+ - 2017/11/18 (1.53) - Style: removed ImGuiCol_ComboBg in favor of combo boxes using ImGuiCol_PopupBg for consistency.
+ - 2017/11/18 (1.53) - Style: renamed ImGuiCol_ChildWindowBg to ImGuiCol_ChildBg.
+ - 2017/11/18 (1.53) - Style: renamed style.ChildWindowRounding to style.ChildRounding, ImGuiStyleVar_ChildWindowRounding to ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding.
+ - 2017/11/02 (1.53) - obsoleted IsRootWindowOrAnyChildHovered() in favor of using IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootAndChildWindows);
+ - 2017/10/24 (1.52) - renamed IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCS/IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCS to IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS/IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS for consistency.
+ - 2017/10/20 (1.52) - changed IsWindowHovered() default parameters behavior to return false if an item is active in another window (e.g. click-dragging item from another window to this window). You can use the newly introduced IsWindowHovered() flags to requests this specific behavior if you need it.
+ - 2017/10/20 (1.52) - marked IsItemHoveredRect()/IsMouseHoveringWindow() as obsolete, in favor of using the newly introduced flags for IsItemHovered() and IsWindowHovered(). See https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/1382 for details.
+                       removed the IsItemRectHovered()/IsWindowRectHovered() names introduced in 1.51 since they were merely more consistent names for the two functions we are now obsoleting.
+                         IsItemHoveredRect()        --> IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_RectOnly)
+                         IsMouseHoveringAnyWindow() --> IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow)
+                         IsMouseHoveringWindow()    --> IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup | ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem) [weird, old behavior]
+ - 2017/10/17 (1.52) - marked the old 5-parameters version of Begin() as obsolete (still available). Use SetNextWindowSize()+Begin() instead!
+ - 2017/10/11 (1.52) - renamed AlignFirstTextHeightToWidgets() to AlignTextToFramePadding(). Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete).
+ - 2017/09/26 (1.52) - renamed ImFont::Glyph to ImFontGlyph. Kept redirection typedef (will obsolete).
+ - 2017/09/25 (1.52) - removed SetNextWindowPosCenter() because SetNextWindowPos() now has the optional pivot information to do the same and more. Kept redirection function (will obsolete).
+ - 2017/08/25 (1.52) - io.MousePos needs to be set to ImVec2(-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX) when mouse is unavailable/missing. Previously ImVec2(-1,-1) was enough but we now accept negative mouse coordinates. In your backend if you need to support unavailable mouse, make sure to replace "io.MousePos = ImVec2(-1,-1)" with "io.MousePos = ImVec2(-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX)".
+ - 2017/08/22 (1.51) - renamed IsItemHoveredRect() to IsItemRectHovered(). Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete). -> (1.52) use IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_RectOnly)!
+                     - renamed IsMouseHoveringAnyWindow() to IsAnyWindowHovered() for consistency. Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete).
+                     - renamed IsMouseHoveringWindow() to IsWindowRectHovered() for consistency. Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete).
+ - 2017/08/20 (1.51) - renamed GetStyleColName() to GetStyleColorName() for consistency.
+ - 2017/08/20 (1.51) - added PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol idx, ImU32 col) overload, which _might_ cause an "ambiguous call" compilation error if you are using ImColor() with implicit cast. Cast to ImU32 or ImVec4 explicily to fix.
+ - 2017/08/15 (1.51) - marked the weird IMGUI_ONCE_UPON_A_FRAME helper macro as obsolete. prefer using the more explicit ImGuiOnceUponAFrame type.
+ - 2017/08/15 (1.51) - changed parameter order for BeginPopupContextWindow() from (const char*,int buttons,bool also_over_items) to (const char*,int buttons,bool also_over_items). Note that most calls relied on default parameters completely.
+ - 2017/08/13 (1.51) - renamed ImGuiCol_Column to ImGuiCol_Separator, ImGuiCol_ColumnHovered to ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered, ImGuiCol_ColumnActive to ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive. Kept redirection enums (will obsolete).
+ - 2017/08/11 (1.51) - renamed ImGuiSetCond_Always to ImGuiCond_Always, ImGuiSetCond_Once to ImGuiCond_Once, ImGuiSetCond_FirstUseEver to ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver, ImGuiSetCond_Appearing to ImGuiCond_Appearing. Kept redirection enums (will obsolete).
+ - 2017/08/09 (1.51) - removed ValueColor() helpers, they are equivalent to calling Text(label) + SameLine() + ColorButton().
+ - 2017/08/08 (1.51) - removed ColorEditMode() and ImGuiColorEditMode in favor of ImGuiColorEditFlags and parameters to the various Color*() functions. The SetColorEditOptions() allows to initialize default but the user can still change them with right-click context menu.
+                     - changed prototype of 'ColorEdit4(const char* label, float col[4], bool show_alpha = true)' to 'ColorEdit4(const char* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0)', where passing flags = 0x01 is a safe no-op (hello dodgy backward compatibility!). - check and run the demo window, under "Color/Picker Widgets", to understand the various new options.
+                     - changed prototype of rarely used 'ColorButton(ImVec4 col, bool small_height = false, bool outline_border = true)' to 'ColorButton(const char* desc_id, ImVec4 col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = 0, ImVec2 size = ImVec2(0, 0))'
+ - 2017/07/20 (1.51) - removed IsPosHoveringAnyWindow(ImVec2), which was partly broken and misleading. ASSERT + redirect user to io.WantCaptureMouse
+ - 2017/05/26 (1.50) - removed ImFontConfig::MergeGlyphCenterV in favor of a more multipurpose ImFontConfig::GlyphOffset.
+ - 2017/05/01 (1.50) - renamed ImDrawList::PathFill() (rarely used directly) to ImDrawList::PathFillConvex() for clarity.
+ - 2016/11/06 (1.50) - BeginChild(const char*) now applies the stack id to the provided label, consistently with other functions as it should always have been. It shouldn't affect you unless (extremely unlikely) you were appending multiple times to a same child from different locations of the stack id. If that's the case, generate an id with GetID() and use it instead of passing string to BeginChild().
+ - 2016/10/15 (1.50) - avoid 'void* user_data' parameter to io.SetClipboardTextFn/io.GetClipboardTextFn pointers. We pass io.ClipboardUserData to it.
+ - 2016/09/25 (1.50) - style.WindowTitleAlign is now a ImVec2 (ImGuiAlign enum was removed). set to (0.5f,0.5f) for horizontal+vertical centering, (0.0f,0.0f) for upper-left, etc.
+ - 2016/07/30 (1.50) - SameLine(x) with x>0.0f is now relative to left of column/group if any, and not always to left of window. This was sort of always the intent and hopefully, breakage should be minimal.
+ - 2016/05/12 (1.49) - title bar (using ImGuiCol_TitleBg/ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive colors) isn't rendered over a window background (ImGuiCol_WindowBg color) anymore.
+                       If your TitleBg/TitleBgActive alpha was 1.0f or you are using the default theme it will not affect you, otherwise if <1.0f you need to tweak your custom theme to readjust for the fact that we don't draw a WindowBg background behind the title bar.
+                       This helper function will convert an old TitleBg/TitleBgActive color into a new one with the same visual output, given the OLD color and the OLD WindowBg color:
+                       ImVec4 ConvertTitleBgCol(const ImVec4& win_bg_col, const ImVec4& title_bg_col) { float new_a = 1.0f - ((1.0f - win_bg_col.w) * (1.0f - title_bg_col.w)), k = title_bg_col.w / new_a; return ImVec4((win_bg_col.x * win_bg_col.w + title_bg_col.x) * k, (win_bg_col.y * win_bg_col.w + title_bg_col.y) * k, (win_bg_col.z * win_bg_col.w + title_bg_col.z) * k, new_a); }
+                       If this is confusing, pick the RGB value from title bar from an old screenshot and apply this as TitleBg/TitleBgActive. Or you may just create TitleBgActive from a tweaked TitleBg color.
+ - 2016/05/07 (1.49) - removed confusing set of GetInternalState(), GetInternalStateSize(), SetInternalState() functions. Now using CreateContext(), DestroyContext(), GetCurrentContext(), SetCurrentContext().
+ - 2016/05/02 (1.49) - renamed SetNextTreeNodeOpened() to SetNextTreeNodeOpen(), no redirection.
+ - 2016/05/01 (1.49) - obsoleted old signature of CollapsingHeader(const char* label, const char* str_id = NULL, bool display_frame = true, bool default_open = false) as extra parameters were badly designed and rarely used. You can replace the "default_open = true" flag in new API with CollapsingHeader(label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen).
+ - 2016/04/26 (1.49) - changed ImDrawList::PushClipRect(ImVec4 rect) to ImDrawList::PushClipRect(Imvec2 min,ImVec2 max,bool intersect_with_current_clip_rect=false). Note that higher-level ImGui::PushClipRect() is preferable because it will clip at logic/widget level, whereas ImDrawList::PushClipRect() only affect your renderer.
+ - 2016/04/03 (1.48) - removed style.WindowFillAlphaDefault setting which was redundant. Bake default BG alpha inside style.Colors[ImGuiCol_WindowBg] and all other Bg color values. (ref GitHub issue #337).
+ - 2016/04/03 (1.48) - renamed ImGuiCol_TooltipBg to ImGuiCol_PopupBg, used by popups/menus and tooltips. popups/menus were previously using ImGuiCol_WindowBg. (ref github issue #337)
+ - 2016/03/21 (1.48) - renamed GetWindowFont() to GetFont(), GetWindowFontSize() to GetFontSize(). Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete).
+ - 2016/03/02 (1.48) - InputText() completion/history/always callbacks: if you modify the text buffer manually (without using DeleteChars()/InsertChars() helper) you need to maintain the BufTextLen field. added an assert.
+ - 2016/01/23 (1.48) - fixed not honoring exact width passed to PushItemWidth(), previously it would add extra FramePadding.x*2 over that width. if you had manual pixel-perfect alignment in place it might affect you.
+ - 2015/12/27 (1.48) - fixed ImDrawList::AddRect() which used to render a rectangle 1 px too large on each axis.
+ - 2015/12/04 (1.47) - renamed Color() helpers to ValueColor() - dangerously named, rarely used and probably to be made obsolete.
+ - 2015/08/29 (1.45) - with the addition of horizontal scrollbar we made various fixes to inconsistencies with dealing with cursor position.
+                       GetCursorPos()/SetCursorPos() functions now include the scrolled amount. It shouldn't affect the majority of users, but take note that SetCursorPosX(100.0f) puts you at +100 from the starting x position which may include scrolling, not at +100 from the window left side.
+                       GetContentRegionMax()/GetWindowContentRegionMin()/GetWindowContentRegionMax() functions allow include the scrolled amount. Typically those were used in cases where no scrolling would happen so it may not be a problem, but watch out!
+ - 2015/08/29 (1.45) - renamed style.ScrollbarWidth to style.ScrollbarSize
+ - 2015/08/05 (1.44) - split imgui.cpp into extra files: imgui_demo.cpp imgui_draw.cpp imgui_internal.h that you need to add to your project.
+ - 2015/07/18 (1.44) - fixed angles in ImDrawList::PathArcTo(), PathArcToFast() (introduced in 1.43) being off by an extra PI for no justifiable reason
+ - 2015/07/14 (1.43) - add new ImFontAtlas::AddFont() API. For the old AddFont***, moved the 'font_no' parameter of ImFontAtlas::AddFont** functions to the ImFontConfig structure.
+                       you need to render your textured triangles with bilinear filtering to benefit from sub-pixel positioning of text.
+ - 2015/07/08 (1.43) - switched rendering data to use indexed rendering. this is saving a fair amount of CPU/GPU and enables us to get anti-aliasing for a marginal cost.
+                       this necessary change will break your rendering function! the fix should be very easy. sorry for that :(
+                     - if you are using a vanilla copy of one of the imgui_impl_XXX.cpp provided in the example, you just need to update your copy and you can ignore the rest.
+                     - the signature of the io.RenderDrawListsFn handler has changed!
+                       old: ImGui_XXXX_RenderDrawLists(ImDrawList** const cmd_lists, int cmd_lists_count)
+                       new: ImGui_XXXX_RenderDrawLists(ImDrawData* draw_data).
+                         parameters: 'cmd_lists' becomes 'draw_data->CmdLists', 'cmd_lists_count' becomes 'draw_data->CmdListsCount'
+                         ImDrawList: 'commands' becomes 'CmdBuffer', 'vtx_buffer' becomes 'VtxBuffer', 'IdxBuffer' is new.
+                         ImDrawCmd:  'vtx_count' becomes 'ElemCount', 'clip_rect' becomes 'ClipRect', 'user_callback' becomes 'UserCallback', 'texture_id' becomes 'TextureId'.
+                     - each ImDrawList now contains both a vertex buffer and an index buffer. For each command, render ElemCount/3 triangles using indices from the index buffer.
+                     - if you REALLY cannot render indexed primitives, you can call the draw_data->DeIndexAllBuffers() method to de-index the buffers. This is slow and a waste of CPU/GPU. Prefer using indexed rendering!
+                     - refer to code in the examples/ folder or ask on the GitHub if you are unsure of how to upgrade. please upgrade!
+ - 2015/07/10 (1.43) - changed SameLine() parameters from int to float.
+ - 2015/07/02 (1.42) - renamed SetScrollPosHere() to SetScrollFromCursorPos(). Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete).
+ - 2015/07/02 (1.42) - renamed GetScrollPosY() to GetScrollY(). Necessary to reduce confusion along with other scrolling functions, because positions (e.g. cursor position) are not equivalent to scrolling amount.
+ - 2015/06/14 (1.41) - changed ImageButton() default bg_col parameter from (0,0,0,1) (black) to (0,0,0,0) (transparent) - makes a difference when texture have transparence
+ - 2015/06/14 (1.41) - changed Selectable() API from (label, selected, size) to (label, selected, flags, size). Size override should have been rarely used. Sorry!
+ - 2015/05/31 (1.40) - renamed GetWindowCollapsed() to IsWindowCollapsed() for consistency. Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete).
+ - 2015/05/31 (1.40) - renamed IsRectClipped() to IsRectVisible() for consistency. Note that return value is opposite! Kept inline redirection function (will obsolete).
+ - 2015/05/27 (1.40) - removed the third 'repeat_if_held' parameter from Button() - sorry! it was rarely used and inconsistent. Use PushButtonRepeat(true) / PopButtonRepeat() to enable repeat on desired buttons.
+ - 2015/05/11 (1.40) - changed BeginPopup() API, takes a string identifier instead of a bool. ImGui needs to manage the open/closed state of popups. Call OpenPopup() to actually set the "open" state of a popup. BeginPopup() returns true if the popup is opened.
+ - 2015/05/03 (1.40) - removed style.AutoFitPadding, using style.WindowPadding makes more sense (the default values were already the same).
+ - 2015/04/13 (1.38) - renamed IsClipped() to IsRectClipped(). Kept inline redirection function until 1.50.
+ - 2015/04/09 (1.38) - renamed ImDrawList::AddArc() to ImDrawList::AddArcFast() for compatibility with future API
+ - 2015/04/03 (1.38) - removed ImGuiCol_CheckHovered, ImGuiCol_CheckActive, replaced with the more general ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered, ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive.
+ - 2014/04/03 (1.38) - removed support for passing -FLT_MAX..+FLT_MAX as the range for a SliderFloat(). Use DragFloat() or Inputfloat() instead.
+ - 2015/03/17 (1.36) - renamed GetItemBoxMin()/GetItemBoxMax()/IsMouseHoveringBox() to GetItemRectMin()/GetItemRectMax()/IsMouseHoveringRect(). Kept inline redirection function until 1.50.
+ - 2015/03/15 (1.36) - renamed style.TreeNodeSpacing to style.IndentSpacing, ImGuiStyleVar_TreeNodeSpacing to ImGuiStyleVar_IndentSpacing
+ - 2015/03/13 (1.36) - renamed GetWindowIsFocused() to IsWindowFocused(). Kept inline redirection function until 1.50.
+ - 2015/03/08 (1.35) - renamed style.ScrollBarWidth to style.ScrollbarWidth (casing)
+ - 2015/02/27 (1.34) - renamed OpenNextNode(bool) to SetNextTreeNodeOpened(bool, ImGuiSetCond). Kept inline redirection function until 1.50.
+ - 2015/02/27 (1.34) - renamed ImGuiSetCondition_*** to ImGuiSetCond_***, and _FirstUseThisSession becomes _Once.
+ - 2015/02/11 (1.32) - changed text input callback ImGuiTextEditCallback return type from void-->int. reserved for future use, return 0 for now.
+ - 2015/02/10 (1.32) - renamed GetItemWidth() to CalcItemWidth() to clarify its evolving behavior
+ - 2015/02/08 (1.31) - renamed GetTextLineSpacing() to GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing()
+ - 2015/02/01 (1.31) - removed IO.MemReallocFn (unused)
+ - 2015/01/19 (1.30) - renamed ImGuiStorage::GetIntPtr()/GetFloatPtr() to GetIntRef()/GetIntRef() because Ptr was conflicting with actual pointer storage functions.
+ - 2015/01/11 (1.30) - big font/image API change! now loads TTF file. allow for multiple fonts. no need for a PNG loader.
+ - 2015/01/11 (1.30) - removed GetDefaultFontData(). uses io.Fonts->GetTextureData*() API to retrieve uncompressed pixels.
+                       - old:  const void* png_data; unsigned int png_size; ImGui::GetDefaultFontData(NULL, NULL, &png_data, &png_size); [..Upload texture to GPU..];
+                       - new:  unsigned char* pixels; int width, height; io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsRGBA32(&pixels, &width, &height); [..Upload texture to GPU..]; io.Fonts->SetTexID(YourTexIdentifier);
+                       you now have more flexibility to load multiple TTF fonts and manage the texture buffer for internal needs. It is now recommended that you sample the font texture with bilinear interpolation.
+ - 2015/01/11 (1.30) - added texture identifier in ImDrawCmd passed to your render function (we can now render images). make sure to call io.Fonts->SetTexID()
+ - 2015/01/11 (1.30) - removed IO.PixelCenterOffset (unnecessary, can be handled in user projection matrix)
+ - 2015/01/11 (1.30) - removed ImGui::IsItemFocused() in favor of ImGui::IsItemActive() which handles all widgets
+ - 2014/12/10 (1.18) - removed SetNewWindowDefaultPos() in favor of new generic API SetNextWindowPos(pos, ImGuiSetCondition_FirstUseEver)
+ - 2014/11/28 (1.17) - moved IO.Font*** options to inside the IO.Font-> structure (FontYOffset, FontTexUvForWhite, FontBaseScale, FontFallbackGlyph)
+ - 2014/11/26 (1.17) - reworked syntax of IMGUI_ONCE_UPON_A_FRAME helper macro to increase compiler compatibility
+ - 2014/11/07 (1.15) - renamed IsHovered() to IsItemHovered()
+ - 2014/10/02 (1.14) - renamed IMGUI_INCLUDE_IMGUI_USER_CPP to IMGUI_INCLUDE_IMGUI_USER_INL and imgui_user.cpp to imgui_user.inl (more IDE friendly)
+ - 2014/09/25 (1.13) - removed 'text_end' parameter from IO.SetClipboardTextFn (the string is now always zero-terminated for simplicity)
+ - 2014/09/24 (1.12) - renamed SetFontScale() to SetWindowFontScale()
+ - 2014/09/24 (1.12) - moved IM_MALLOC/IM_REALLOC/IM_FREE preprocessor defines to IO.MemAllocFn/IO.MemReallocFn/IO.MemFreeFn
+ - 2014/08/30 (1.09) - removed IO.FontHeight (now computed automatically)
+ - 2014/08/30 (1.09) - moved IMGUI_FONT_TEX_UV_FOR_WHITE preprocessor define to IO.FontTexUvForWhite
+ - 2014/08/28 (1.09) - changed the behavior of IO.PixelCenterOffset following various rendering fixes
+
+
+ FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQ)
+ ================================
+
+ Read all answers online:
+   https://www.dearimgui.org/faq or https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/blob/master/docs/FAQ.md (same url)
+ Read all answers locally (with a text editor or ideally a Markdown viewer):
+   docs/FAQ.md
+ Some answers are copied down here to facilitate searching in code.
+
+ Q&A: Basics
+ ===========
+
+ Q: Where is the documentation?
+ A: This library is poorly documented at the moment and expects the user to be acquainted with C/C++.
+    - Run the examples/ and explore them.
+    - See demo code in imgui_demo.cpp and particularly the ImGui::ShowDemoWindow() function.
+    - The demo covers most features of Dear ImGui, so you can read the code and see its output.
+    - See documentation and comments at the top of imgui.cpp + effectively imgui.h.
+    - Dozens of standalone example applications using e.g. OpenGL/DirectX are provided in the
+      examples/ folder to explain how to integrate Dear ImGui with your own engine/application.
+    - The Wiki (https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki) has many resources and links.
+    - The Glossary (https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Glossary) page also may be useful.
+    - Your programming IDE is your friend, find the type or function declaration to find comments
+      associated with it.
+
+ Q: What is this library called?
+ Q: Which version should I get?
+ >> This library is called "Dear ImGui", please don't call it "ImGui" :)
+ >> See https://www.dearimgui.org/faq for details.
+
+ Q&A: Integration
+ ================
+
+ Q: How to get started?
+ A: Read 'PROGRAMMER GUIDE' above. Read examples/README.txt.
+
+ Q: How can I tell whether to dispatch mouse/keyboard to Dear ImGui or my application?
+ A: You should read the 'io.WantCaptureMouse', 'io.WantCaptureKeyboard' and 'io.WantTextInput' flags!
+ >> See https://www.dearimgui.org/faq for a fully detailed answer. You really want to read this.
+
+ Q. How can I enable keyboard controls?
+ Q: How can I use this without a mouse, without a keyboard or without a screen? (gamepad, input share, remote display)
+ Q: I integrated Dear ImGui in my engine and little squares are showing instead of text...
+ Q: I integrated Dear ImGui in my engine and some elements are clipping or disappearing when I move windows around...
+ Q: I integrated Dear ImGui in my engine and some elements are displaying outside their expected windows boundaries...
+ >> See https://www.dearimgui.org/faq
+
+ Q&A: Usage
+ ----------
+
+ Q: About the ID Stack system..
+   - Why is my widget not reacting when I click on it?
+   - How can I have widgets with an empty label?
+   - How can I have multiple widgets with the same label?
+   - How can I have multiple windows with the same label?
+ Q: How can I display an image? What is ImTextureID, how does it works?
+ Q: How can I use my own math types instead of ImVec2/ImVec4?
+ Q: How can I interact with standard C++ types (such as std::string and std::vector)?
+ Q: How can I display custom shapes? (using low-level ImDrawList API)
+ >> See https://www.dearimgui.org/faq
+
+ Q&A: Fonts, Text
+ ================
+
+ Q: How should I handle DPI in my application?
+ Q: How can I load a different font than the default?
+ Q: How can I easily use icons in my application?
+ Q: How can I load multiple fonts?
+ Q: How can I display and input non-Latin characters such as Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Cyrillic?
+ >> See https://www.dearimgui.org/faq and https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/edit/master/docs/FONTS.md
+
+ Q&A: Concerns
+ =============
+
+ Q: Who uses Dear ImGui?
+ Q: Can you create elaborate/serious tools with Dear ImGui?
+ Q: Can you reskin the look of Dear ImGui?
+ Q: Why using C++ (as opposed to C)?
+ >> See https://www.dearimgui.org/faq
+
+ Q&A: Community
+ ==============
+
+ Q: How can I help?
+ A: - Businesses: please reach out to "contact AT dearimgui.com" if you work in a place using Dear ImGui!
+      We can discuss ways for your company to fund development via invoiced technical support, maintenance or sponsoring contacts.
+      This is among the most useful thing you can do for Dear ImGui. With increased funding, we can hire more people working on this project.
+    - Individuals: you can support continued development via PayPal donations. See README.
+    - If you are experienced with Dear ImGui and C++, look at the GitHub issues, look at the Wiki, read docs/TODO.txt
+      and see how you want to help and can help!
+    - Disclose your usage of Dear ImGui via a dev blog post, a tweet, a screenshot, a mention somewhere etc.
+      You may post screenshot or links in the gallery threads. Visuals are ideal as they inspire other programmers.
+      But even without visuals, disclosing your use of dear imgui helps the library grow credibility, and help other teams and programmers with taking decisions.
+    - If you have issues or if you need to hack into the library, even if you don't expect any support it is useful that you share your issues (on GitHub or privately).
+
+*/
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] INCLUDES
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(_CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS)
+#define _CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS
+#endif
+
+#include "imgui.h"
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE
+
+#ifndef IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS
+#define IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS
+#endif
+#include "imgui_internal.h"
+
+// System includes
+#include <ctype.h>      // toupper
+#include <stdio.h>      // vsnprintf, sscanf, printf
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER <= 1500 // MSVC 2008 or earlier
+#include <stddef.h>     // intptr_t
+#else
+#include <stdint.h>     // intptr_t
+#endif
+
+// [Windows] On non-Visual Studio compilers, we default to IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS unless explicitly enabled
+#if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(IMGUI_ENABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS)
+#define IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS
+#endif
+
+// [Windows] OS specific includes (optional)
+#if defined(_WIN32) && defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FILE_FUNCTIONS) && defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS) && defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_FUNCTIONS)
+#define IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_FUNCTIONS
+#endif
+#if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_FUNCTIONS)
+#ifndef WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
+#define WIN32_LEAN_AND_MEAN
+#endif
+#ifndef NOMINMAX
+#define NOMINMAX
+#endif
+#ifndef __MINGW32__
+#include <Windows.h>        // _wfopen, OpenClipboard
+#else
+#include <windows.h>
+#endif
+#if defined(WINAPI_FAMILY) && (WINAPI_FAMILY == WINAPI_FAMILY_APP) // UWP doesn't have all Win32 functions
+#define IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS
+#define IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS
+#endif
+#endif
+
+// [Apple] OS specific includes
+#if defined(__APPLE__)
+#include <TargetConditionals.h>
+#endif
+
+// Visual Studio warnings
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+#pragma warning (disable: 4127)             // condition expression is constant
+#pragma warning (disable: 4996)             // 'This function or variable may be unsafe': strcpy, strdup, sprintf, vsnprintf, sscanf, fopen
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER >= 1922   // MSVC 2019 16.2 or later
+#pragma warning (disable: 5054)             // operator '|': deprecated between enumerations of different types
+#endif
+#pragma warning (disable: 26451)            // [Static Analyzer] Arithmetic overflow : Using operator 'xxx' on a 4 byte value and then casting the result to a 8 byte value. Cast the value to the wider type before calling operator 'xxx' to avoid overflow(io.2).
+#pragma warning (disable: 26495)            // [Static Analyzer] Variable 'XXX' is uninitialized. Always initialize a member variable (type.6).
+#pragma warning (disable: 26812)            // [Static Analyzer] The enum type 'xxx' is unscoped. Prefer 'enum class' over 'enum' (Enum.3).
+#endif
+
+// Clang/GCC warnings with -Weverything
+#if defined(__clang__)
+#if __has_warning("-Wunknown-warning-option")
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-warning-option"         // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx'                      // not all warnings are known by all Clang versions and they tend to be rename-happy.. so ignoring warnings triggers new warnings on some configuration. Great!
+#endif
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-pragmas"                // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx'
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast"                 // warning: use of old-style cast                            // yes, they are more terse.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wfloat-equal"                    // warning: comparing floating point with == or != is unsafe // storing and comparing against same constants (typically 0.0f) is ok.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-nonliteral"              // warning: format string is not a string literal            // passing non-literal to vsnformat(). yes, user passing incorrect format strings can crash the code.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wexit-time-destructors"          // warning: declaration requires an exit-time destructor     // exit-time destruction order is undefined. if MemFree() leads to users code that has been disabled before exit it might cause problems. ImGui coding style welcomes static/globals.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wglobal-constructors"            // warning: declaration requires a global destructor         // similar to above, not sure what the exact difference is.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wsign-conversion"                // warning: implicit conversion changes signedness
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-pedantic"                // warning: format specifies type 'void *' but the argument has type 'xxxx *' // unreasonable, would lead to casting every %p arg to void*. probably enabled by -pedantic.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wint-to-void-pointer-cast"       // warning: cast to 'void *' from smaller integer type 'int'
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant"  // warning: zero as null pointer constant                    // some standard header variations use #define NULL 0
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion"               // warning: implicit conversion from 'float' to 'double' when passing argument to function  // using printf() is a misery with this as C++ va_arg ellipsis changes float to double.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wimplicit-int-float-conversion"  // warning: implicit conversion from 'xxx' to 'float' may lose precision
+#elif defined(__GNUC__)
+// We disable -Wpragmas because GCC doesn't provide an has_warning equivalent and some forks/patches may not following the warning/version association.
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wpragmas"                  // warning: unknown option after '#pragma GCC diagnostic' kind
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wunused-function"          // warning: 'xxxx' defined but not used
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wint-to-pointer-cast"      // warning: cast to pointer from integer of different size
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wformat"                   // warning: format '%p' expects argument of type 'void*', but argument 6 has type 'ImGuiWindow*'
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion"         // warning: implicit conversion from 'float' to 'double' when passing argument to function
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wconversion"               // warning: conversion to 'xxxx' from 'xxxx' may alter its value
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-nonliteral"        // warning: format not a string literal, format string not checked
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wstrict-overflow"          // warning: assuming signed overflow does not occur when assuming that (X - c) > X is always false
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wclass-memaccess"          // [__GNUC__ >= 8] warning: 'memset/memcpy' clearing/writing an object of type 'xxxx' with no trivial copy-assignment; use assignment or value-initialization instead
+#endif
+
+// Debug options
+#define IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_SCORING     0   // Display navigation scoring preview when hovering items. Display last moving direction matches when holding CTRL
+#define IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_RECTS       0   // Display the reference navigation rectangle for each window
+#define IMGUI_DEBUG_INI_SETTINGS    0   // Save additional comments in .ini file (particularly helps for Docking, but makes saving slower)
+
+// When using CTRL+TAB (or Gamepad Square+L/R) we delay the visual a little in order to reduce visual noise doing a fast switch.
+static const float NAV_WINDOWING_HIGHLIGHT_DELAY            = 0.20f;    // Time before the highlight and screen dimming starts fading in
+static const float NAV_WINDOWING_LIST_APPEAR_DELAY          = 0.15f;    // Time before the window list starts to appear
+
+// Window resizing from edges (when io.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges = true and ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors is set in io.BackendFlags by backend)
+static const float WINDOWS_HOVER_PADDING                    = 4.0f;     // Extend outside window for hovering/resizing (maxxed with TouchPadding) and inside windows for borders. Affect FindHoveredWindow().
+static const float WINDOWS_RESIZE_FROM_EDGES_FEEDBACK_TIMER = 0.04f;    // Reduce visual noise by only highlighting the border after a certain time.
+static const float WINDOWS_MOUSE_WHEEL_SCROLL_LOCK_TIMER    = 2.00f;    // Lock scrolled window (so it doesn't pick child windows that are scrolling through) for a certain time, unless mouse moved.
+
+// Docking
+static const float DOCKING_TRANSPARENT_PAYLOAD_ALPHA        = 0.50f;    // For use with io.ConfigDockingTransparentPayload. Apply to Viewport _or_ WindowBg in host viewport.
+static const float DOCKING_SPLITTER_SIZE                    = 2.0f;
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] FORWARD DECLARATIONS
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+static void             SetCurrentWindow(ImGuiWindow* window);
+static void             FindHoveredWindow();
+static ImGuiWindow*     CreateNewWindow(const char* name, ImGuiWindowFlags flags);
+static ImVec2           CalcNextScrollFromScrollTargetAndClamp(ImGuiWindow* window);
+
+static void             AddDrawListToDrawData(ImVector<ImDrawList*>* out_list, ImDrawList* draw_list);
+static void             AddWindowToSortBuffer(ImVector<ImGuiWindow*>* out_sorted_windows, ImGuiWindow* window);
+
+// Settings
+static void             WindowSettingsHandler_ClearAll(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*);
+static void*            WindowSettingsHandler_ReadOpen(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*, const char* name);
+static void             WindowSettingsHandler_ReadLine(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*, void* entry, const char* line);
+static void             WindowSettingsHandler_ApplyAll(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*);
+static void             WindowSettingsHandler_WriteAll(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*, ImGuiTextBuffer* buf);
+
+// Platform Dependents default implementation for IO functions
+static const char*      GetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl(void* user_data);
+static void             SetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl(void* user_data, const char* text);
+static void             SetPlatformImeDataFn_DefaultImpl(ImGuiViewport* viewport, ImGuiPlatformImeData* data);
+
+namespace ImGui
+{
+// Navigation
+static void             NavUpdate();
+static void             NavUpdateWindowing();
+static void             NavUpdateWindowingOverlay();
+static void             NavUpdateCancelRequest();
+static void             NavUpdateCreateMoveRequest();
+static void             NavUpdateCreateTabbingRequest();
+static float            NavUpdatePageUpPageDown();
+static inline void      NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag();
+static void             NavUpdateCreateWrappingRequest();
+static void             NavEndFrame();
+static bool             NavScoreItem(ImGuiNavItemData* result);
+static void             NavApplyItemToResult(ImGuiNavItemData* result);
+static void             NavProcessItem();
+static void             NavProcessItemForTabbingRequest(ImGuiID id);
+static ImVec2           NavCalcPreferredRefPos();
+static void             NavSaveLastChildNavWindowIntoParent(ImGuiWindow* nav_window);
+static ImGuiWindow*     NavRestoreLastChildNavWindow(ImGuiWindow* window);
+static void             NavRestoreLayer(ImGuiNavLayer layer);
+static void             NavRestoreHighlightAfterMove();
+static int              FindWindowFocusIndex(ImGuiWindow* window);
+
+// Error Checking and Debug Tools
+static void             ErrorCheckNewFrameSanityChecks();
+static void             ErrorCheckEndFrameSanityChecks();
+static void             UpdateDebugToolItemPicker();
+static void             UpdateDebugToolStackQueries();
+
+// Misc
+static void             UpdateSettings();
+static void             UpdateKeyboardInputs();
+static void             UpdateMouseInputs();
+static void             UpdateMouseWheel();
+static bool             UpdateWindowManualResize(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& size_auto_fit, int* border_held, int resize_grip_count, ImU32 resize_grip_col[4], const ImRect& visibility_rect);
+static void             RenderWindowOuterBorders(ImGuiWindow* window);
+static void             RenderWindowDecorations(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& title_bar_rect, bool title_bar_is_highlight, bool handle_borders_and_resize_grips, int resize_grip_count, const ImU32 resize_grip_col[4], float resize_grip_draw_size);
+static void             RenderWindowTitleBarContents(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& title_bar_rect, const char* name, bool* p_open);
+static void             RenderDimmedBackgroundBehindWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, ImU32 col);
+static void             RenderDimmedBackgrounds();
+static ImGuiWindow*     FindBlockingModal(ImGuiWindow* window);
+
+// Viewports
+const ImGuiID           IMGUI_VIEWPORT_DEFAULT_ID = 0x11111111; // Using an arbitrary constant instead of e.g. ImHashStr("ViewportDefault", 0); so it's easier to spot in the debugger. The exact value doesn't matter.
+static ImGuiViewportP*  AddUpdateViewport(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& platform_pos, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiViewportFlags flags);
+static void             DestroyViewport(ImGuiViewportP* viewport);
+static void             UpdateViewportsNewFrame();
+static void             UpdateViewportsEndFrame();
+static void             WindowSelectViewport(ImGuiWindow* window);
+static void             WindowSyncOwnedViewport(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindow* parent_window_in_stack);
+static bool             UpdateTryMergeWindowIntoHostViewport(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiViewportP* host_viewport);
+static bool             UpdateTryMergeWindowIntoHostViewports(ImGuiWindow* window);
+static bool             GetWindowAlwaysWantOwnViewport(ImGuiWindow* window);
+static int              FindPlatformMonitorForPos(const ImVec2& pos);
+static int              FindPlatformMonitorForRect(const ImRect& r);
+static void             UpdateViewportPlatformMonitor(ImGuiViewportP* viewport);
+
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] CONTEXT AND MEMORY ALLOCATORS
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// DLL users:
+// - Heaps and globals are not shared across DLL boundaries!
+// - You will need to call SetCurrentContext() + SetAllocatorFunctions() for each static/DLL boundary you are calling from.
+// - Same applies for hot-reloading mechanisms that are reliant on reloading DLL (note that many hot-reloading mechanisms work without DLL).
+// - Using Dear ImGui via a shared library is not recommended, because of function call overhead and because we don't guarantee backward nor forward ABI compatibility.
+// - Confused? In a debugger: add GImGui to your watch window and notice how its value changes depending on your current location (which DLL boundary you are in).
+
+// Current context pointer. Implicitly used by all Dear ImGui functions. Always assumed to be != NULL.
+// - ImGui::CreateContext() will automatically set this pointer if it is NULL.
+//   Change to a different context by calling ImGui::SetCurrentContext().
+// - Important: Dear ImGui functions are not thread-safe because of this pointer.
+//   If you want thread-safety to allow N threads to access N different contexts:
+//   - Change this variable to use thread local storage so each thread can refer to a different context, in your imconfig.h:
+//         struct ImGuiContext;
+//         extern thread_local ImGuiContext* MyImGuiTLS;
+//         #define GImGui MyImGuiTLS
+//     And then define MyImGuiTLS in one of your cpp files. Note that thread_local is a C++11 keyword, earlier C++ uses compiler-specific keyword.
+//   - Future development aims to make this context pointer explicit to all calls. Also read https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/586
+//   - If you need a finite number of contexts, you may compile and use multiple instances of the ImGui code from a different namespace.
+// - DLL users: read comments above.
+#ifndef GImGui
+ImGuiContext*   GImGui = NULL;
+#endif
+
+// Memory Allocator functions. Use SetAllocatorFunctions() to change them.
+// - You probably don't want to modify that mid-program, and if you use global/static e.g. ImVector<> instances you may need to keep them accessible during program destruction.
+// - DLL users: read comments above.
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_ALLOCATORS
+static void*   MallocWrapper(size_t size, void* user_data)    { IM_UNUSED(user_data); return malloc(size); }
+static void    FreeWrapper(void* ptr, void* user_data)        { IM_UNUSED(user_data); free(ptr); }
+#else
+static void*   MallocWrapper(size_t size, void* user_data)    { IM_UNUSED(user_data); IM_UNUSED(size); IM_ASSERT(0); return NULL; }
+static void    FreeWrapper(void* ptr, void* user_data)        { IM_UNUSED(user_data); IM_UNUSED(ptr); IM_ASSERT(0); }
+#endif
+static ImGuiMemAllocFunc    GImAllocatorAllocFunc = MallocWrapper;
+static ImGuiMemFreeFunc     GImAllocatorFreeFunc = FreeWrapper;
+static void*                GImAllocatorUserData = NULL;
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] USER FACING STRUCTURES (ImGuiStyle, ImGuiIO)
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+ImGuiStyle::ImGuiStyle()
+{
+    Alpha                   = 1.0f;             // Global alpha applies to everything in Dear ImGui.
+    DisabledAlpha           = 0.60f;            // Additional alpha multiplier applied by BeginDisabled(). Multiply over current value of Alpha.
+    WindowPadding           = ImVec2(8,8);      // Padding within a window
+    WindowRounding          = 0.0f;             // Radius of window corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular windows. Large values tend to lead to variety of artifacts and are not recommended.
+    WindowBorderSize        = 1.0f;             // Thickness of border around windows. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. Other values not well tested.
+    WindowMinSize           = ImVec2(32,32);    // Minimum window size
+    WindowTitleAlign        = ImVec2(0.0f,0.5f);// Alignment for title bar text
+    WindowMenuButtonPosition= ImGuiDir_Left;    // Position of the collapsing/docking button in the title bar (left/right). Defaults to ImGuiDir_Left.
+    ChildRounding           = 0.0f;             // Radius of child window corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular child windows
+    ChildBorderSize         = 1.0f;             // Thickness of border around child windows. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. Other values not well tested.
+    PopupRounding           = 0.0f;             // Radius of popup window corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular child windows
+    PopupBorderSize         = 1.0f;             // Thickness of border around popup or tooltip windows. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. Other values not well tested.
+    FramePadding            = ImVec2(4,3);      // Padding within a framed rectangle (used by most widgets)
+    FrameRounding           = 0.0f;             // Radius of frame corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular frames (used by most widgets).
+    FrameBorderSize         = 0.0f;             // Thickness of border around frames. Generally set to 0.0f or 1.0f. Other values not well tested.
+    ItemSpacing             = ImVec2(8,4);      // Horizontal and vertical spacing between widgets/lines
+    ItemInnerSpacing        = ImVec2(4,4);      // Horizontal and vertical spacing between within elements of a composed widget (e.g. a slider and its label)
+    CellPadding             = ImVec2(4,2);      // Padding within a table cell
+    TouchExtraPadding       = ImVec2(0,0);      // Expand reactive bounding box for touch-based system where touch position is not accurate enough. Unfortunately we don't sort widgets so priority on overlap will always be given to the first widget. So don't grow this too much!
+    IndentSpacing           = 21.0f;            // Horizontal spacing when e.g. entering a tree node. Generally == (FontSize + FramePadding.x*2).
+    ColumnsMinSpacing       = 6.0f;             // Minimum horizontal spacing between two columns. Preferably > (FramePadding.x + 1).
+    ScrollbarSize           = 14.0f;            // Width of the vertical scrollbar, Height of the horizontal scrollbar
+    ScrollbarRounding       = 9.0f;             // Radius of grab corners rounding for scrollbar
+    GrabMinSize             = 12.0f;            // Minimum width/height of a grab box for slider/scrollbar
+    GrabRounding            = 0.0f;             // Radius of grabs corners rounding. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular slider grabs.
+    LogSliderDeadzone       = 4.0f;             // The size in pixels of the dead-zone around zero on logarithmic sliders that cross zero.
+    TabRounding             = 4.0f;             // Radius of upper corners of a tab. Set to 0.0f to have rectangular tabs.
+    TabBorderSize           = 0.0f;             // Thickness of border around tabs.
+    TabMinWidthForCloseButton = 0.0f;           // Minimum width for close button to appears on an unselected tab when hovered. Set to 0.0f to always show when hovering, set to FLT_MAX to never show close button unless selected.
+    ColorButtonPosition     = ImGuiDir_Right;   // Side of the color button in the ColorEdit4 widget (left/right). Defaults to ImGuiDir_Right.
+    ButtonTextAlign         = ImVec2(0.5f,0.5f);// Alignment of button text when button is larger than text.
+    SelectableTextAlign     = ImVec2(0.0f,0.0f);// Alignment of selectable text. Defaults to (0.0f, 0.0f) (top-left aligned). It's generally important to keep this left-aligned if you want to lay multiple items on a same line.
+    DisplayWindowPadding    = ImVec2(19,19);    // Window position are clamped to be visible within the display area or monitors by at least this amount. Only applies to regular windows.
+    DisplaySafeAreaPadding  = ImVec2(3,3);      // If you cannot see the edge of your screen (e.g. on a TV) increase the safe area padding. Covers popups/tooltips as well regular windows.
+    MouseCursorScale        = 1.0f;             // Scale software rendered mouse cursor (when io.MouseDrawCursor is enabled). May be removed later.
+    AntiAliasedLines        = true;             // Enable anti-aliased lines/borders. Disable if you are really tight on CPU/GPU.
+    AntiAliasedLinesUseTex  = true;             // Enable anti-aliased lines/borders using textures where possible. Require backend to render with bilinear filtering (NOT point/nearest filtering).
+    AntiAliasedFill         = true;             // Enable anti-aliased filled shapes (rounded rectangles, circles, etc.).
+    CurveTessellationTol    = 1.25f;            // Tessellation tolerance when using PathBezierCurveTo() without a specific number of segments. Decrease for highly tessellated curves (higher quality, more polygons), increase to reduce quality.
+    CircleTessellationMaxError = 0.30f;         // Maximum error (in pixels) allowed when using AddCircle()/AddCircleFilled() or drawing rounded corner rectangles with no explicit segment count specified. Decrease for higher quality but more geometry.
+
+    // Default theme
+    ImGui::StyleColorsDark(this);
+}
+
+// To scale your entire UI (e.g. if you want your app to use High DPI or generally be DPI aware) you may use this helper function. Scaling the fonts is done separately and is up to you.
+// Important: This operation is lossy because we round all sizes to integer. If you need to change your scale multiples, call this over a freshly initialized ImGuiStyle structure rather than scaling multiple times.
+void ImGuiStyle::ScaleAllSizes(float scale_factor)
+{
+    WindowPadding = ImFloor(WindowPadding * scale_factor);
+    WindowRounding = ImFloor(WindowRounding * scale_factor);
+    WindowMinSize = ImFloor(WindowMinSize * scale_factor);
+    ChildRounding = ImFloor(ChildRounding * scale_factor);
+    PopupRounding = ImFloor(PopupRounding * scale_factor);
+    FramePadding = ImFloor(FramePadding * scale_factor);
+    FrameRounding = ImFloor(FrameRounding * scale_factor);
+    ItemSpacing = ImFloor(ItemSpacing * scale_factor);
+    ItemInnerSpacing = ImFloor(ItemInnerSpacing * scale_factor);
+    CellPadding = ImFloor(CellPadding * scale_factor);
+    TouchExtraPadding = ImFloor(TouchExtraPadding * scale_factor);
+    IndentSpacing = ImFloor(IndentSpacing * scale_factor);
+    ColumnsMinSpacing = ImFloor(ColumnsMinSpacing * scale_factor);
+    ScrollbarSize = ImFloor(ScrollbarSize * scale_factor);
+    ScrollbarRounding = ImFloor(ScrollbarRounding * scale_factor);
+    GrabMinSize = ImFloor(GrabMinSize * scale_factor);
+    GrabRounding = ImFloor(GrabRounding * scale_factor);
+    LogSliderDeadzone = ImFloor(LogSliderDeadzone * scale_factor);
+    TabRounding = ImFloor(TabRounding * scale_factor);
+    TabMinWidthForCloseButton = (TabMinWidthForCloseButton != FLT_MAX) ? ImFloor(TabMinWidthForCloseButton * scale_factor) : FLT_MAX;
+    DisplayWindowPadding = ImFloor(DisplayWindowPadding * scale_factor);
+    DisplaySafeAreaPadding = ImFloor(DisplaySafeAreaPadding * scale_factor);
+    MouseCursorScale = ImFloor(MouseCursorScale * scale_factor);
+}
+
+ImGuiIO::ImGuiIO()
+{
+    // Most fields are initialized with zero
+    memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this));
+    IM_STATIC_ASSERT(IM_ARRAYSIZE(ImGuiIO::MouseDown) == ImGuiMouseButton_COUNT && IM_ARRAYSIZE(ImGuiIO::MouseClicked) == ImGuiMouseButton_COUNT);
+
+    // Settings
+    ConfigFlags = ImGuiConfigFlags_None;
+    BackendFlags = ImGuiBackendFlags_None;
+    DisplaySize = ImVec2(-1.0f, -1.0f);
+    DeltaTime = 1.0f / 60.0f;
+    IniSavingRate = 5.0f;
+    IniFilename = "imgui.ini"; // Important: "imgui.ini" is relative to current working dir, most apps will want to lock this to an absolute path (e.g. same path as executables).
+    LogFilename = "imgui_log.txt";
+    MouseDoubleClickTime = 0.30f;
+    MouseDoubleClickMaxDist = 6.0f;
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
+    for (int i = 0; i < ImGuiKey_COUNT; i++)
+        KeyMap[i] = -1;
+#endif
+    KeyRepeatDelay = 0.275f;
+    KeyRepeatRate = 0.050f;
+    UserData = NULL;
+
+    Fonts = NULL;
+    FontGlobalScale = 1.0f;
+    FontDefault = NULL;
+    FontAllowUserScaling = false;
+    DisplayFramebufferScale = ImVec2(1.0f, 1.0f);
+
+    // Docking options (when ImGuiConfigFlags_DockingEnable is set)
+    ConfigDockingNoSplit = false;
+    ConfigDockingWithShift = false;
+    ConfigDockingAlwaysTabBar = false;
+    ConfigDockingTransparentPayload = false;
+
+    // Viewport options (when ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable is set)
+    ConfigViewportsNoAutoMerge = false;
+    ConfigViewportsNoTaskBarIcon = false;
+    ConfigViewportsNoDecoration = true;
+    ConfigViewportsNoDefaultParent = false;
+
+    // Miscellaneous options
+    MouseDrawCursor = false;
+#ifdef __APPLE__
+    ConfigMacOSXBehaviors = true;  // Set Mac OS X style defaults based on __APPLE__ compile time flag
+#else
+    ConfigMacOSXBehaviors = false;
+#endif
+    ConfigInputTrickleEventQueue = true;
+    ConfigInputTextCursorBlink = true;
+    ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges = true;
+    ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly = false;
+    ConfigMemoryCompactTimer = 60.0f;
+
+    // Platform Functions
+    BackendPlatformName = BackendRendererName = NULL;
+    BackendPlatformUserData = BackendRendererUserData = BackendLanguageUserData = NULL;
+    GetClipboardTextFn = GetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl;   // Platform dependent default implementations
+    SetClipboardTextFn = SetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl;
+    ClipboardUserData = NULL;
+    SetPlatformImeDataFn = SetPlatformImeDataFn_DefaultImpl;
+
+    // Input (NB: we already have memset zero the entire structure!)
+    MousePos = ImVec2(-FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX);
+    MousePosPrev = ImVec2(-FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX);
+    MouseDragThreshold = 6.0f;
+    for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(MouseDownDuration); i++) MouseDownDuration[i] = MouseDownDurationPrev[i] = -1.0f;
+    for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(KeysData); i++) { KeysData[i].DownDuration = KeysData[i].DownDurationPrev = -1.0f; }
+    AppAcceptingEvents = true;
+    BackendUsingLegacyKeyArrays = (ImS8)-1;
+    BackendUsingLegacyNavInputArray = true; // assume using legacy array until proven wrong
+}
+
+// Pass in translated ASCII characters for text input.
+// - with glfw you can get those from the callback set in glfwSetCharCallback()
+// - on Windows you can get those using ToAscii+keyboard state, or via the WM_CHAR message
+// FIXME: Should in theory be called "AddCharacterEvent()" to be consistent with new API
+void ImGuiIO::AddInputCharacter(unsigned int c)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(&g.IO == this && "Can only add events to current context.");
+    if (c == 0 || !AppAcceptingEvents)
+        return;
+
+    ImGuiInputEvent e;
+    e.Type = ImGuiInputEventType_Text;
+    e.Source = ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard;
+    e.Text.Char = c;
+    g.InputEventsQueue.push_back(e);
+}
+
+// UTF16 strings use surrogate pairs to encode codepoints >= 0x10000, so
+// we should save the high surrogate.
+void ImGuiIO::AddInputCharacterUTF16(ImWchar16 c)
+{
+    if ((c == 0 && InputQueueSurrogate == 0) || !AppAcceptingEvents)
+        return;
+
+    if ((c & 0xFC00) == 0xD800) // High surrogate, must save
+    {
+        if (InputQueueSurrogate != 0)
+            AddInputCharacter(IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_INVALID);
+        InputQueueSurrogate = c;
+        return;
+    }
+
+    ImWchar cp = c;
+    if (InputQueueSurrogate != 0)
+    {
+        if ((c & 0xFC00) != 0xDC00) // Invalid low surrogate
+        {
+            AddInputCharacter(IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_INVALID);
+        }
+        else
+        {
+#if IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX == 0xFFFF
+            cp = IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_INVALID; // Codepoint will not fit in ImWchar
+#else
+            cp = (ImWchar)(((InputQueueSurrogate - 0xD800) << 10) + (c - 0xDC00) + 0x10000);
+#endif
+        }
+
+        InputQueueSurrogate = 0;
+    }
+    AddInputCharacter((unsigned)cp);
+}
+
+void ImGuiIO::AddInputCharactersUTF8(const char* utf8_chars)
+{
+    if (!AppAcceptingEvents)
+        return;
+    while (*utf8_chars != 0)
+    {
+        unsigned int c = 0;
+        utf8_chars += ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, utf8_chars, NULL);
+        if (c != 0)
+            AddInputCharacter(c);
+    }
+}
+
+void ImGuiIO::ClearInputCharacters()
+{
+    InputQueueCharacters.resize(0);
+}
+
+void ImGuiIO::ClearInputKeys()
+{
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
+    memset(KeysDown, 0, sizeof(KeysDown));
+#endif
+    for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(KeysData); n++)
+    {
+        KeysData[n].Down             = false;
+        KeysData[n].DownDuration     = -1.0f;
+        KeysData[n].DownDurationPrev = -1.0f;
+    }
+    KeyCtrl = KeyShift = KeyAlt = KeySuper = false;
+    KeyMods = ImGuiModFlags_None;
+}
+
+// Queue a new key down/up event.
+// - ImGuiKey key:       Translated key (as in, generally ImGuiKey_A matches the key end-user would use to emit an 'A' character)
+// - bool down:          Is the key down? use false to signify a key release.
+// - float analog_value: 0.0f..1.0f
+void ImGuiIO::AddKeyAnalogEvent(ImGuiKey key, bool down, float analog_value)
+{
+    //if (e->Down) { IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_IO("AddKeyEvent() Key='%s' %d, NativeKeycode = %d, NativeScancode = %d\n", ImGui::GetKeyName(e->Key), e->Down, e->NativeKeycode, e->NativeScancode); }
+    if (key == ImGuiKey_None || !AppAcceptingEvents)
+        return;
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(&g.IO == this && "Can only add events to current context.");
+    IM_ASSERT(ImGui::IsNamedKey(key)); // Backend needs to pass a valid ImGuiKey_ constant. 0..511 values are legacy native key codes which are not accepted by this API.
+
+    // Verify that backend isn't mixing up using new io.AddKeyEvent() api and old io.KeysDown[] + io.KeyMap[] data.
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
+    IM_ASSERT((BackendUsingLegacyKeyArrays == -1 || BackendUsingLegacyKeyArrays == 0) && "Backend needs to either only use io.AddKeyEvent(), either only fill legacy io.KeysDown[] + io.KeyMap[]. Not both!");
+    if (BackendUsingLegacyKeyArrays == -1)
+        for (int n = ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN; n < ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END; n++)
+            IM_ASSERT(KeyMap[n] == -1 && "Backend needs to either only use io.AddKeyEvent(), either only fill legacy io.KeysDown[] + io.KeyMap[]. Not both!");
+    BackendUsingLegacyKeyArrays = 0;
+#endif
+    if (ImGui::IsGamepadKey(key))
+        BackendUsingLegacyNavInputArray = false;
+
+    // Partial filter of duplicates (not strictly needed, but makes data neater in particular for key mods and gamepad values which are most commonly spmamed)
+    ImGuiKeyData* key_data = ImGui::GetKeyData(key);
+    if (key_data->Down == down && key_data->AnalogValue == analog_value)
+    {
+        bool found = false;
+        for (int n = g.InputEventsQueue.Size - 1; n >= 0 && !found; n--)
+            if (g.InputEventsQueue[n].Type == ImGuiInputEventType_Key && g.InputEventsQueue[n].Key.Key == key)
+                found = true;
+        if (!found)
+            return;
+    }
+
+    // Add event
+    ImGuiInputEvent e;
+    e.Type = ImGuiInputEventType_Key;
+    e.Source = ImGui::IsGamepadKey(key) ? ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad : ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard;
+    e.Key.Key = key;
+    e.Key.Down = down;
+    e.Key.AnalogValue = analog_value;
+    g.InputEventsQueue.push_back(e);
+}
+
+void ImGuiIO::AddKeyEvent(ImGuiKey key, bool down)
+{
+    if (!AppAcceptingEvents)
+        return;
+    AddKeyAnalogEvent(key, down, down ? 1.0f : 0.0f);
+}
+
+// [Optional] Call after AddKeyEvent().
+// Specify native keycode, scancode + Specify index for legacy <1.87 IsKeyXXX() functions with native indices.
+// If you are writing a backend in 2022 or don't use IsKeyXXX() with native values that are not ImGuiKey values, you can avoid calling this.
+void ImGuiIO::SetKeyEventNativeData(ImGuiKey key, int native_keycode, int native_scancode, int native_legacy_index)
+{
+    if (key == ImGuiKey_None)
+        return;
+    IM_ASSERT(ImGui::IsNamedKey(key)); // >= 512
+    IM_ASSERT(native_legacy_index == -1 || ImGui::IsLegacyKey(native_legacy_index)); // >= 0 && <= 511
+    IM_UNUSED(native_keycode);  // Yet unused
+    IM_UNUSED(native_scancode); // Yet unused
+
+    // Build native->imgui map so old user code can still call key functions with native 0..511 values.
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
+    const int legacy_key = (native_legacy_index != -1) ? native_legacy_index : native_keycode;
+    if (!ImGui::IsLegacyKey(legacy_key))
+        return;
+    KeyMap[legacy_key] = key;
+    KeyMap[key] = legacy_key;
+#else
+    IM_UNUSED(key);
+    IM_UNUSED(native_legacy_index);
+#endif
+}
+
+// Set master flag for accepting key/mouse/text events (default to true). Useful if you have native dialog boxes that are interrupting your application loop/refresh, and you want to disable events being queued while your app is frozen.
+void ImGuiIO::SetAppAcceptingEvents(bool accepting_events)
+{
+    AppAcceptingEvents = accepting_events;
+}
+
+// Queue a mouse move event
+void ImGuiIO::AddMousePosEvent(float x, float y)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(&g.IO == this && "Can only add events to current context.");
+    if (!AppAcceptingEvents)
+        return;
+
+    ImGuiInputEvent e;
+    e.Type = ImGuiInputEventType_MousePos;
+    e.Source = ImGuiInputSource_Mouse;
+    e.MousePos.PosX = x;
+    e.MousePos.PosY = y;
+    g.InputEventsQueue.push_back(e);
+}
+
+void ImGuiIO::AddMouseButtonEvent(int mouse_button, bool down)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(&g.IO == this && "Can only add events to current context.");
+    IM_ASSERT(mouse_button >= 0 && mouse_button < ImGuiMouseButton_COUNT);
+    if (!AppAcceptingEvents)
+        return;
+
+    ImGuiInputEvent e;
+    e.Type = ImGuiInputEventType_MouseButton;
+    e.Source = ImGuiInputSource_Mouse;
+    e.MouseButton.Button = mouse_button;
+    e.MouseButton.Down = down;
+    g.InputEventsQueue.push_back(e);
+}
+
+// Queue a mouse wheel event (most mouse/API will only have a Y component)
+void ImGuiIO::AddMouseWheelEvent(float wheel_x, float wheel_y)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(&g.IO == this && "Can only add events to current context.");
+    if ((wheel_x == 0.0f && wheel_y == 0.0f) || !AppAcceptingEvents)
+        return;
+
+    ImGuiInputEvent e;
+    e.Type = ImGuiInputEventType_MouseWheel;
+    e.Source = ImGuiInputSource_Mouse;
+    e.MouseWheel.WheelX = wheel_x;
+    e.MouseWheel.WheelY = wheel_y;
+    g.InputEventsQueue.push_back(e);
+}
+
+void ImGuiIO::AddMouseViewportEvent(ImGuiID viewport_id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(&g.IO == this && "Can only add events to current context.");
+    IM_ASSERT(g.IO.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseHoveredViewport);
+
+    ImGuiInputEvent e;
+    e.Type = ImGuiInputEventType_MouseViewport;
+    e.Source = ImGuiInputSource_Mouse;
+    e.MouseViewport.HoveredViewportID = viewport_id;
+    g.InputEventsQueue.push_back(e);
+}
+
+void ImGuiIO::AddFocusEvent(bool focused)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(&g.IO == this && "Can only add events to current context.");
+
+    ImGuiInputEvent e;
+    e.Type = ImGuiInputEventType_Focus;
+    e.AppFocused.Focused = focused;
+    g.InputEventsQueue.push_back(e);
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] MISC HELPERS/UTILITIES (Geometry functions)
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+ImVec2 ImBezierCubicClosestPoint(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, const ImVec2& p, int num_segments)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(num_segments > 0); // Use ImBezierCubicClosestPointCasteljau()
+    ImVec2 p_last = p1;
+    ImVec2 p_closest;
+    float p_closest_dist2 = FLT_MAX;
+    float t_step = 1.0f / (float)num_segments;
+    for (int i_step = 1; i_step <= num_segments; i_step++)
+    {
+        ImVec2 p_current = ImBezierCubicCalc(p1, p2, p3, p4, t_step * i_step);
+        ImVec2 p_line = ImLineClosestPoint(p_last, p_current, p);
+        float dist2 = ImLengthSqr(p - p_line);
+        if (dist2 < p_closest_dist2)
+        {
+            p_closest = p_line;
+            p_closest_dist2 = dist2;
+        }
+        p_last = p_current;
+    }
+    return p_closest;
+}
+
+// Closely mimics PathBezierToCasteljau() in imgui_draw.cpp
+static void ImBezierCubicClosestPointCasteljauStep(const ImVec2& p, ImVec2& p_closest, ImVec2& p_last, float& p_closest_dist2, float x1, float y1, float x2, float y2, float x3, float y3, float x4, float y4, float tess_tol, int level)
+{
+    float dx = x4 - x1;
+    float dy = y4 - y1;
+    float d2 = ((x2 - x4) * dy - (y2 - y4) * dx);
+    float d3 = ((x3 - x4) * dy - (y3 - y4) * dx);
+    d2 = (d2 >= 0) ? d2 : -d2;
+    d3 = (d3 >= 0) ? d3 : -d3;
+    if ((d2 + d3) * (d2 + d3) < tess_tol * (dx * dx + dy * dy))
+    {
+        ImVec2 p_current(x4, y4);
+        ImVec2 p_line = ImLineClosestPoint(p_last, p_current, p);
+        float dist2 = ImLengthSqr(p - p_line);
+        if (dist2 < p_closest_dist2)
+        {
+            p_closest = p_line;
+            p_closest_dist2 = dist2;
+        }
+        p_last = p_current;
+    }
+    else if (level < 10)
+    {
+        float x12 = (x1 + x2)*0.5f,       y12 = (y1 + y2)*0.5f;
+        float x23 = (x2 + x3)*0.5f,       y23 = (y2 + y3)*0.5f;
+        float x34 = (x3 + x4)*0.5f,       y34 = (y3 + y4)*0.5f;
+        float x123 = (x12 + x23)*0.5f,    y123 = (y12 + y23)*0.5f;
+        float x234 = (x23 + x34)*0.5f,    y234 = (y23 + y34)*0.5f;
+        float x1234 = (x123 + x234)*0.5f, y1234 = (y123 + y234)*0.5f;
+        ImBezierCubicClosestPointCasteljauStep(p, p_closest, p_last, p_closest_dist2, x1, y1, x12, y12, x123, y123, x1234, y1234, tess_tol, level + 1);
+        ImBezierCubicClosestPointCasteljauStep(p, p_closest, p_last, p_closest_dist2, x1234, y1234, x234, y234, x34, y34, x4, y4, tess_tol, level + 1);
+    }
+}
+
+// tess_tol is generally the same value you would find in ImGui::GetStyle().CurveTessellationTol
+// Because those ImXXX functions are lower-level than ImGui:: we cannot access this value automatically.
+ImVec2 ImBezierCubicClosestPointCasteljau(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, const ImVec2& p, float tess_tol)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(tess_tol > 0.0f);
+    ImVec2 p_last = p1;
+    ImVec2 p_closest;
+    float p_closest_dist2 = FLT_MAX;
+    ImBezierCubicClosestPointCasteljauStep(p, p_closest, p_last, p_closest_dist2, p1.x, p1.y, p2.x, p2.y, p3.x, p3.y, p4.x, p4.y, tess_tol, 0);
+    return p_closest;
+}
+
+ImVec2 ImLineClosestPoint(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& p)
+{
+    ImVec2 ap = p - a;
+    ImVec2 ab_dir = b - a;
+    float dot = ap.x * ab_dir.x + ap.y * ab_dir.y;
+    if (dot < 0.0f)
+        return a;
+    float ab_len_sqr = ab_dir.x * ab_dir.x + ab_dir.y * ab_dir.y;
+    if (dot > ab_len_sqr)
+        return b;
+    return a + ab_dir * dot / ab_len_sqr;
+}
+
+bool ImTriangleContainsPoint(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& c, const ImVec2& p)
+{
+    bool b1 = ((p.x - b.x) * (a.y - b.y) - (p.y - b.y) * (a.x - b.x)) < 0.0f;
+    bool b2 = ((p.x - c.x) * (b.y - c.y) - (p.y - c.y) * (b.x - c.x)) < 0.0f;
+    bool b3 = ((p.x - a.x) * (c.y - a.y) - (p.y - a.y) * (c.x - a.x)) < 0.0f;
+    return ((b1 == b2) && (b2 == b3));
+}
+
+void ImTriangleBarycentricCoords(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& c, const ImVec2& p, float& out_u, float& out_v, float& out_w)
+{
+    ImVec2 v0 = b - a;
+    ImVec2 v1 = c - a;
+    ImVec2 v2 = p - a;
+    const float denom = v0.x * v1.y - v1.x * v0.y;
+    out_v = (v2.x * v1.y - v1.x * v2.y) / denom;
+    out_w = (v0.x * v2.y - v2.x * v0.y) / denom;
+    out_u = 1.0f - out_v - out_w;
+}
+
+ImVec2 ImTriangleClosestPoint(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& c, const ImVec2& p)
+{
+    ImVec2 proj_ab = ImLineClosestPoint(a, b, p);
+    ImVec2 proj_bc = ImLineClosestPoint(b, c, p);
+    ImVec2 proj_ca = ImLineClosestPoint(c, a, p);
+    float dist2_ab = ImLengthSqr(p - proj_ab);
+    float dist2_bc = ImLengthSqr(p - proj_bc);
+    float dist2_ca = ImLengthSqr(p - proj_ca);
+    float m = ImMin(dist2_ab, ImMin(dist2_bc, dist2_ca));
+    if (m == dist2_ab)
+        return proj_ab;
+    if (m == dist2_bc)
+        return proj_bc;
+    return proj_ca;
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] MISC HELPERS/UTILITIES (String, Format, Hash functions)
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Consider using _stricmp/_strnicmp under Windows or strcasecmp/strncasecmp. We don't actually use either ImStricmp/ImStrnicmp in the codebase any more.
+int ImStricmp(const char* str1, const char* str2)
+{
+    int d;
+    while ((d = toupper(*str2) - toupper(*str1)) == 0 && *str1) { str1++; str2++; }
+    return d;
+}
+
+int ImStrnicmp(const char* str1, const char* str2, size_t count)
+{
+    int d = 0;
+    while (count > 0 && (d = toupper(*str2) - toupper(*str1)) == 0 && *str1) { str1++; str2++; count--; }
+    return d;
+}
+
+void ImStrncpy(char* dst, const char* src, size_t count)
+{
+    if (count < 1)
+        return;
+    if (count > 1)
+        strncpy(dst, src, count - 1);
+    dst[count - 1] = 0;
+}
+
+char* ImStrdup(const char* str)
+{
+    size_t len = strlen(str);
+    void* buf = IM_ALLOC(len + 1);
+    return (char*)memcpy(buf, (const void*)str, len + 1);
+}
+
+char* ImStrdupcpy(char* dst, size_t* p_dst_size, const char* src)
+{
+    size_t dst_buf_size = p_dst_size ? *p_dst_size : strlen(dst) + 1;
+    size_t src_size = strlen(src) + 1;
+    if (dst_buf_size < src_size)
+    {
+        IM_FREE(dst);
+        dst = (char*)IM_ALLOC(src_size);
+        if (p_dst_size)
+            *p_dst_size = src_size;
+    }
+    return (char*)memcpy(dst, (const void*)src, src_size);
+}
+
+const char* ImStrchrRange(const char* str, const char* str_end, char c)
+{
+    const char* p = (const char*)memchr(str, (int)c, str_end - str);
+    return p;
+}
+
+int ImStrlenW(const ImWchar* str)
+{
+    //return (int)wcslen((const wchar_t*)str);  // FIXME-OPT: Could use this when wchar_t are 16-bit
+    int n = 0;
+    while (*str++) n++;
+    return n;
+}
+
+// Find end-of-line. Return pointer will point to either first \n, either str_end.
+const char* ImStreolRange(const char* str, const char* str_end)
+{
+    const char* p = (const char*)memchr(str, '\n', str_end - str);
+    return p ? p : str_end;
+}
+
+const ImWchar* ImStrbolW(const ImWchar* buf_mid_line, const ImWchar* buf_begin) // find beginning-of-line
+{
+    while (buf_mid_line > buf_begin && buf_mid_line[-1] != '\n')
+        buf_mid_line--;
+    return buf_mid_line;
+}
+
+const char* ImStristr(const char* haystack, const char* haystack_end, const char* needle, const char* needle_end)
+{
+    if (!needle_end)
+        needle_end = needle + strlen(needle);
+
+    const char un0 = (char)toupper(*needle);
+    while ((!haystack_end && *haystack) || (haystack_end && haystack < haystack_end))
+    {
+        if (toupper(*haystack) == un0)
+        {
+            const char* b = needle + 1;
+            for (const char* a = haystack + 1; b < needle_end; a++, b++)
+                if (toupper(*a) != toupper(*b))
+                    break;
+            if (b == needle_end)
+                return haystack;
+        }
+        haystack++;
+    }
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+// Trim str by offsetting contents when there's leading data + writing a \0 at the trailing position. We use this in situation where the cost is negligible.
+void ImStrTrimBlanks(char* buf)
+{
+    char* p = buf;
+    while (p[0] == ' ' || p[0] == '\t')     // Leading blanks
+        p++;
+    char* p_start = p;
+    while (*p != 0)                         // Find end of string
+        p++;
+    while (p > p_start && (p[-1] == ' ' || p[-1] == '\t'))  // Trailing blanks
+        p--;
+    if (p_start != buf)                     // Copy memory if we had leading blanks
+        memmove(buf, p_start, p - p_start);
+    buf[p - p_start] = 0;                   // Zero terminate
+}
+
+const char* ImStrSkipBlank(const char* str)
+{
+    while (str[0] == ' ' || str[0] == '\t')
+        str++;
+    return str;
+}
+
+// A) MSVC version appears to return -1 on overflow, whereas glibc appears to return total count (which may be >= buf_size).
+// Ideally we would test for only one of those limits at runtime depending on the behavior the vsnprintf(), but trying to deduct it at compile time sounds like a pandora can of worm.
+// B) When buf==NULL vsnprintf() will return the output size.
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FORMAT_FUNCTIONS
+
+// We support stb_sprintf which is much faster (see: https://github.com/nothings/stb/blob/master/stb_sprintf.h)
+// You may set IMGUI_USE_STB_SPRINTF to use our default wrapper, or set IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FORMAT_FUNCTIONS
+// and setup the wrapper yourself. (FIXME-OPT: Some of our high-level operations such as ImGuiTextBuffer::appendfv() are
+// designed using two-passes worst case, which probably could be improved using the stbsp_vsprintfcb() function.)
+#ifdef IMGUI_USE_STB_SPRINTF
+#define STB_SPRINTF_IMPLEMENTATION
+#ifdef IMGUI_STB_SPRINTF_FILENAME
+#include IMGUI_STB_SPRINTF_FILENAME
+#else
+#include "stb_sprintf.h"
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(vsnprintf)
+#define vsnprintf _vsnprintf
+#endif
+
+int ImFormatString(char* buf, size_t buf_size, const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+    va_list args;
+    va_start(args, fmt);
+#ifdef IMGUI_USE_STB_SPRINTF
+    int w = stbsp_vsnprintf(buf, (int)buf_size, fmt, args);
+#else
+    int w = vsnprintf(buf, buf_size, fmt, args);
+#endif
+    va_end(args);
+    if (buf == NULL)
+        return w;
+    if (w == -1 || w >= (int)buf_size)
+        w = (int)buf_size - 1;
+    buf[w] = 0;
+    return w;
+}
+
+int ImFormatStringV(char* buf, size_t buf_size, const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+#ifdef IMGUI_USE_STB_SPRINTF
+    int w = stbsp_vsnprintf(buf, (int)buf_size, fmt, args);
+#else
+    int w = vsnprintf(buf, buf_size, fmt, args);
+#endif
+    if (buf == NULL)
+        return w;
+    if (w == -1 || w >= (int)buf_size)
+        w = (int)buf_size - 1;
+    buf[w] = 0;
+    return w;
+}
+#endif // #ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FORMAT_FUNCTIONS
+
+void ImFormatStringToTempBuffer(const char** out_buf, const char** out_buf_end, const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    va_list args;
+    va_start(args, fmt);
+    int buf_len = ImFormatStringV(g.TempBuffer.Data, g.TempBuffer.Size, fmt, args);
+    *out_buf = g.TempBuffer.Data;
+    if (out_buf_end) { *out_buf_end = g.TempBuffer.Data + buf_len; }
+    va_end(args);
+}
+
+void ImFormatStringToTempBufferV(const char** out_buf, const char** out_buf_end, const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    int buf_len = ImFormatStringV(g.TempBuffer.Data, g.TempBuffer.Size, fmt, args);
+    *out_buf = g.TempBuffer.Data;
+    if (out_buf_end) { *out_buf_end = g.TempBuffer.Data + buf_len; }
+}
+
+// CRC32 needs a 1KB lookup table (not cache friendly)
+// Although the code to generate the table is simple and shorter than the table itself, using a const table allows us to easily:
+// - avoid an unnecessary branch/memory tap, - keep the ImHashXXX functions usable by static constructors, - make it thread-safe.
+static const ImU32 GCrc32LookupTable[256] =
+{
+    0x00000000,0x77073096,0xEE0E612C,0x990951BA,0x076DC419,0x706AF48F,0xE963A535,0x9E6495A3,0x0EDB8832,0x79DCB8A4,0xE0D5E91E,0x97D2D988,0x09B64C2B,0x7EB17CBD,0xE7B82D07,0x90BF1D91,
+    0x1DB71064,0x6AB020F2,0xF3B97148,0x84BE41DE,0x1ADAD47D,0x6DDDE4EB,0xF4D4B551,0x83D385C7,0x136C9856,0x646BA8C0,0xFD62F97A,0x8A65C9EC,0x14015C4F,0x63066CD9,0xFA0F3D63,0x8D080DF5,
+    0x3B6E20C8,0x4C69105E,0xD56041E4,0xA2677172,0x3C03E4D1,0x4B04D447,0xD20D85FD,0xA50AB56B,0x35B5A8FA,0x42B2986C,0xDBBBC9D6,0xACBCF940,0x32D86CE3,0x45DF5C75,0xDCD60DCF,0xABD13D59,
+    0x26D930AC,0x51DE003A,0xC8D75180,0xBFD06116,0x21B4F4B5,0x56B3C423,0xCFBA9599,0xB8BDA50F,0x2802B89E,0x5F058808,0xC60CD9B2,0xB10BE924,0x2F6F7C87,0x58684C11,0xC1611DAB,0xB6662D3D,
+    0x76DC4190,0x01DB7106,0x98D220BC,0xEFD5102A,0x71B18589,0x06B6B51F,0x9FBFE4A5,0xE8B8D433,0x7807C9A2,0x0F00F934,0x9609A88E,0xE10E9818,0x7F6A0DBB,0x086D3D2D,0x91646C97,0xE6635C01,
+    0x6B6B51F4,0x1C6C6162,0x856530D8,0xF262004E,0x6C0695ED,0x1B01A57B,0x8208F4C1,0xF50FC457,0x65B0D9C6,0x12B7E950,0x8BBEB8EA,0xFCB9887C,0x62DD1DDF,0x15DA2D49,0x8CD37CF3,0xFBD44C65,
+    0x4DB26158,0x3AB551CE,0xA3BC0074,0xD4BB30E2,0x4ADFA541,0x3DD895D7,0xA4D1C46D,0xD3D6F4FB,0x4369E96A,0x346ED9FC,0xAD678846,0xDA60B8D0,0x44042D73,0x33031DE5,0xAA0A4C5F,0xDD0D7CC9,
+    0x5005713C,0x270241AA,0xBE0B1010,0xC90C2086,0x5768B525,0x206F85B3,0xB966D409,0xCE61E49F,0x5EDEF90E,0x29D9C998,0xB0D09822,0xC7D7A8B4,0x59B33D17,0x2EB40D81,0xB7BD5C3B,0xC0BA6CAD,
+    0xEDB88320,0x9ABFB3B6,0x03B6E20C,0x74B1D29A,0xEAD54739,0x9DD277AF,0x04DB2615,0x73DC1683,0xE3630B12,0x94643B84,0x0D6D6A3E,0x7A6A5AA8,0xE40ECF0B,0x9309FF9D,0x0A00AE27,0x7D079EB1,
+    0xF00F9344,0x8708A3D2,0x1E01F268,0x6906C2FE,0xF762575D,0x806567CB,0x196C3671,0x6E6B06E7,0xFED41B76,0x89D32BE0,0x10DA7A5A,0x67DD4ACC,0xF9B9DF6F,0x8EBEEFF9,0x17B7BE43,0x60B08ED5,
+    0xD6D6A3E8,0xA1D1937E,0x38D8C2C4,0x4FDFF252,0xD1BB67F1,0xA6BC5767,0x3FB506DD,0x48B2364B,0xD80D2BDA,0xAF0A1B4C,0x36034AF6,0x41047A60,0xDF60EFC3,0xA867DF55,0x316E8EEF,0x4669BE79,
+    0xCB61B38C,0xBC66831A,0x256FD2A0,0x5268E236,0xCC0C7795,0xBB0B4703,0x220216B9,0x5505262F,0xC5BA3BBE,0xB2BD0B28,0x2BB45A92,0x5CB36A04,0xC2D7FFA7,0xB5D0CF31,0x2CD99E8B,0x5BDEAE1D,
+    0x9B64C2B0,0xEC63F226,0x756AA39C,0x026D930A,0x9C0906A9,0xEB0E363F,0x72076785,0x05005713,0x95BF4A82,0xE2B87A14,0x7BB12BAE,0x0CB61B38,0x92D28E9B,0xE5D5BE0D,0x7CDCEFB7,0x0BDBDF21,
+    0x86D3D2D4,0xF1D4E242,0x68DDB3F8,0x1FDA836E,0x81BE16CD,0xF6B9265B,0x6FB077E1,0x18B74777,0x88085AE6,0xFF0F6A70,0x66063BCA,0x11010B5C,0x8F659EFF,0xF862AE69,0x616BFFD3,0x166CCF45,
+    0xA00AE278,0xD70DD2EE,0x4E048354,0x3903B3C2,0xA7672661,0xD06016F7,0x4969474D,0x3E6E77DB,0xAED16A4A,0xD9D65ADC,0x40DF0B66,0x37D83BF0,0xA9BCAE53,0xDEBB9EC5,0x47B2CF7F,0x30B5FFE9,
+    0xBDBDF21C,0xCABAC28A,0x53B39330,0x24B4A3A6,0xBAD03605,0xCDD70693,0x54DE5729,0x23D967BF,0xB3667A2E,0xC4614AB8,0x5D681B02,0x2A6F2B94,0xB40BBE37,0xC30C8EA1,0x5A05DF1B,0x2D02EF8D,
+};
+
+// Known size hash
+// It is ok to call ImHashData on a string with known length but the ### operator won't be supported.
+// FIXME-OPT: Replace with e.g. FNV1a hash? CRC32 pretty much randomly access 1KB. Need to do proper measurements.
+ImGuiID ImHashData(const void* data_p, size_t data_size, ImU32 seed)
+{
+    ImU32 crc = ~seed;
+    const unsigned char* data = (const unsigned char*)data_p;
+    const ImU32* crc32_lut = GCrc32LookupTable;
+    while (data_size-- != 0)
+        crc = (crc >> 8) ^ crc32_lut[(crc & 0xFF) ^ *data++];
+    return ~crc;
+}
+
+// Zero-terminated string hash, with support for ### to reset back to seed value
+// We support a syntax of "label###id" where only "###id" is included in the hash, and only "label" gets displayed.
+// Because this syntax is rarely used we are optimizing for the common case.
+// - If we reach ### in the string we discard the hash so far and reset to the seed.
+// - We don't do 'current += 2; continue;' after handling ### to keep the code smaller/faster (measured ~10% diff in Debug build)
+// FIXME-OPT: Replace with e.g. FNV1a hash? CRC32 pretty much randomly access 1KB. Need to do proper measurements.
+ImGuiID ImHashStr(const char* data_p, size_t data_size, ImU32 seed)
+{
+    seed = ~seed;
+    ImU32 crc = seed;
+    const unsigned char* data = (const unsigned char*)data_p;
+    const ImU32* crc32_lut = GCrc32LookupTable;
+    if (data_size != 0)
+    {
+        while (data_size-- != 0)
+        {
+            unsigned char c = *data++;
+            if (c == '#' && data_size >= 2 && data[0] == '#' && data[1] == '#')
+                crc = seed;
+            crc = (crc >> 8) ^ crc32_lut[(crc & 0xFF) ^ c];
+        }
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        while (unsigned char c = *data++)
+        {
+            if (c == '#' && data[0] == '#' && data[1] == '#')
+                crc = seed;
+            crc = (crc >> 8) ^ crc32_lut[(crc & 0xFF) ^ c];
+        }
+    }
+    return ~crc;
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] MISC HELPERS/UTILITIES (File functions)
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Default file functions
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FILE_FUNCTIONS
+
+ImFileHandle ImFileOpen(const char* filename, const char* mode)
+{
+#if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_FUNCTIONS) && !defined(__CYGWIN__) && !defined(__GNUC__)
+    // We need a fopen() wrapper because MSVC/Windows fopen doesn't handle UTF-8 filenames.
+    // Previously we used ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8/ImTextStrFromUtf8 here but we now need to support ImWchar16 and ImWchar32!
+    const int filename_wsize = ::MultiByteToWideChar(CP_UTF8, 0, filename, -1, NULL, 0);
+    const int mode_wsize = ::MultiByteToWideChar(CP_UTF8, 0, mode, -1, NULL, 0);
+    ImVector<ImWchar> buf;
+    buf.resize(filename_wsize + mode_wsize);
+    ::MultiByteToWideChar(CP_UTF8, 0, filename, -1, (wchar_t*)&buf[0], filename_wsize);
+    ::MultiByteToWideChar(CP_UTF8, 0, mode, -1, (wchar_t*)&buf[filename_wsize], mode_wsize);
+    return ::_wfopen((const wchar_t*)&buf[0], (const wchar_t*)&buf[filename_wsize]);
+#else
+    return fopen(filename, mode);
+#endif
+}
+
+// We should in theory be using fseeko()/ftello() with off_t and _fseeki64()/_ftelli64() with __int64, waiting for the PR that does that in a very portable pre-C++11 zero-warnings way.
+bool    ImFileClose(ImFileHandle f)     { return fclose(f) == 0; }
+ImU64   ImFileGetSize(ImFileHandle f)   { long off = 0, sz = 0; return ((off = ftell(f)) != -1 && !fseek(f, 0, SEEK_END) && (sz = ftell(f)) != -1 && !fseek(f, off, SEEK_SET)) ? (ImU64)sz : (ImU64)-1; }
+ImU64   ImFileRead(void* data, ImU64 sz, ImU64 count, ImFileHandle f)           { return fread(data, (size_t)sz, (size_t)count, f); }
+ImU64   ImFileWrite(const void* data, ImU64 sz, ImU64 count, ImFileHandle f)    { return fwrite(data, (size_t)sz, (size_t)count, f); }
+#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FILE_FUNCTIONS
+
+// Helper: Load file content into memory
+// Memory allocated with IM_ALLOC(), must be freed by user using IM_FREE() == ImGui::MemFree()
+// This can't really be used with "rt" because fseek size won't match read size.
+void*   ImFileLoadToMemory(const char* filename, const char* mode, size_t* out_file_size, int padding_bytes)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(filename && mode);
+    if (out_file_size)
+        *out_file_size = 0;
+
+    ImFileHandle f;
+    if ((f = ImFileOpen(filename, mode)) == NULL)
+        return NULL;
+
+    size_t file_size = (size_t)ImFileGetSize(f);
+    if (file_size == (size_t)-1)
+    {
+        ImFileClose(f);
+        return NULL;
+    }
+
+    void* file_data = IM_ALLOC(file_size + padding_bytes);
+    if (file_data == NULL)
+    {
+        ImFileClose(f);
+        return NULL;
+    }
+    if (ImFileRead(file_data, 1, file_size, f) != file_size)
+    {
+        ImFileClose(f);
+        IM_FREE(file_data);
+        return NULL;
+    }
+    if (padding_bytes > 0)
+        memset((void*)(((char*)file_data) + file_size), 0, (size_t)padding_bytes);
+
+    ImFileClose(f);
+    if (out_file_size)
+        *out_file_size = file_size;
+
+    return file_data;
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] MISC HELPERS/UTILITIES (ImText* functions)
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Convert UTF-8 to 32-bit character, process single character input.
+// A nearly-branchless UTF-8 decoder, based on work of Christopher Wellons (https://github.com/skeeto/branchless-utf8).
+// We handle UTF-8 decoding error by skipping forward.
+int ImTextCharFromUtf8(unsigned int* out_char, const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end)
+{
+    static const char lengths[32] = { 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 2, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 4, 0 };
+    static const int masks[]  = { 0x00, 0x7f, 0x1f, 0x0f, 0x07 };
+    static const uint32_t mins[] = { 0x400000, 0, 0x80, 0x800, 0x10000 };
+    static const int shiftc[] = { 0, 18, 12, 6, 0 };
+    static const int shifte[] = { 0, 6, 4, 2, 0 };
+    int len = lengths[*(const unsigned char*)in_text >> 3];
+    int wanted = len + !len;
+
+    if (in_text_end == NULL)
+        in_text_end = in_text + wanted; // Max length, nulls will be taken into account.
+
+    // Copy at most 'len' bytes, stop copying at 0 or past in_text_end. Branch predictor does a good job here,
+    // so it is fast even with excessive branching.
+    unsigned char s[4];
+    s[0] = in_text + 0 < in_text_end ? in_text[0] : 0;
+    s[1] = in_text + 1 < in_text_end ? in_text[1] : 0;
+    s[2] = in_text + 2 < in_text_end ? in_text[2] : 0;
+    s[3] = in_text + 3 < in_text_end ? in_text[3] : 0;
+
+    // Assume a four-byte character and load four bytes. Unused bits are shifted out.
+    *out_char  = (uint32_t)(s[0] & masks[len]) << 18;
+    *out_char |= (uint32_t)(s[1] & 0x3f) << 12;
+    *out_char |= (uint32_t)(s[2] & 0x3f) <<  6;
+    *out_char |= (uint32_t)(s[3] & 0x3f) <<  0;
+    *out_char >>= shiftc[len];
+
+    // Accumulate the various error conditions.
+    int e = 0;
+    e  = (*out_char < mins[len]) << 6; // non-canonical encoding
+    e |= ((*out_char >> 11) == 0x1b) << 7;  // surrogate half?
+    e |= (*out_char > IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX) << 8;  // out of range?
+    e |= (s[1] & 0xc0) >> 2;
+    e |= (s[2] & 0xc0) >> 4;
+    e |= (s[3]       ) >> 6;
+    e ^= 0x2a; // top two bits of each tail byte correct?
+    e >>= shifte[len];
+
+    if (e)
+    {
+        // No bytes are consumed when *in_text == 0 || in_text == in_text_end.
+        // One byte is consumed in case of invalid first byte of in_text.
+        // All available bytes (at most `len` bytes) are consumed on incomplete/invalid second to last bytes.
+        // Invalid or incomplete input may consume less bytes than wanted, therefore every byte has to be inspected in s.
+        wanted = ImMin(wanted, !!s[0] + !!s[1] + !!s[2] + !!s[3]);
+        *out_char = IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_INVALID;
+    }
+
+    return wanted;
+}
+
+int ImTextStrFromUtf8(ImWchar* buf, int buf_size, const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end, const char** in_text_remaining)
+{
+    ImWchar* buf_out = buf;
+    ImWchar* buf_end = buf + buf_size;
+    while (buf_out < buf_end - 1 && (!in_text_end || in_text < in_text_end) && *in_text)
+    {
+        unsigned int c;
+        in_text += ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, in_text, in_text_end);
+        if (c == 0)
+            break;
+        *buf_out++ = (ImWchar)c;
+    }
+    *buf_out = 0;
+    if (in_text_remaining)
+        *in_text_remaining = in_text;
+    return (int)(buf_out - buf);
+}
+
+int ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end)
+{
+    int char_count = 0;
+    while ((!in_text_end || in_text < in_text_end) && *in_text)
+    {
+        unsigned int c;
+        in_text += ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, in_text, in_text_end);
+        if (c == 0)
+            break;
+        char_count++;
+    }
+    return char_count;
+}
+
+// Based on stb_to_utf8() from github.com/nothings/stb/
+static inline int ImTextCharToUtf8_inline(char* buf, int buf_size, unsigned int c)
+{
+    if (c < 0x80)
+    {
+        buf[0] = (char)c;
+        return 1;
+    }
+    if (c < 0x800)
+    {
+        if (buf_size < 2) return 0;
+        buf[0] = (char)(0xc0 + (c >> 6));
+        buf[1] = (char)(0x80 + (c & 0x3f));
+        return 2;
+    }
+    if (c < 0x10000)
+    {
+        if (buf_size < 3) return 0;
+        buf[0] = (char)(0xe0 + (c >> 12));
+        buf[1] = (char)(0x80 + ((c >> 6) & 0x3f));
+        buf[2] = (char)(0x80 + ((c ) & 0x3f));
+        return 3;
+    }
+    if (c <= 0x10FFFF)
+    {
+        if (buf_size < 4) return 0;
+        buf[0] = (char)(0xf0 + (c >> 18));
+        buf[1] = (char)(0x80 + ((c >> 12) & 0x3f));
+        buf[2] = (char)(0x80 + ((c >> 6) & 0x3f));
+        buf[3] = (char)(0x80 + ((c ) & 0x3f));
+        return 4;
+    }
+    // Invalid code point, the max unicode is 0x10FFFF
+    return 0;
+}
+
+const char* ImTextCharToUtf8(char out_buf[5], unsigned int c)
+{
+    int count = ImTextCharToUtf8_inline(out_buf, 5, c);
+    out_buf[count] = 0;
+    return out_buf;
+}
+
+// Not optimal but we very rarely use this function.
+int ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromChar(const char* in_text, const char* in_text_end)
+{
+    unsigned int unused = 0;
+    return ImTextCharFromUtf8(&unused, in_text, in_text_end);
+}
+
+static inline int ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromChar(unsigned int c)
+{
+    if (c < 0x80) return 1;
+    if (c < 0x800) return 2;
+    if (c < 0x10000) return 3;
+    if (c <= 0x10FFFF) return 4;
+    return 3;
+}
+
+int ImTextStrToUtf8(char* out_buf, int out_buf_size, const ImWchar* in_text, const ImWchar* in_text_end)
+{
+    char* buf_p = out_buf;
+    const char* buf_end = out_buf + out_buf_size;
+    while (buf_p < buf_end - 1 && (!in_text_end || in_text < in_text_end) && *in_text)
+    {
+        unsigned int c = (unsigned int)(*in_text++);
+        if (c < 0x80)
+            *buf_p++ = (char)c;
+        else
+            buf_p += ImTextCharToUtf8_inline(buf_p, (int)(buf_end - buf_p - 1), c);
+    }
+    *buf_p = 0;
+    return (int)(buf_p - out_buf);
+}
+
+int ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(const ImWchar* in_text, const ImWchar* in_text_end)
+{
+    int bytes_count = 0;
+    while ((!in_text_end || in_text < in_text_end) && *in_text)
+    {
+        unsigned int c = (unsigned int)(*in_text++);
+        if (c < 0x80)
+            bytes_count++;
+        else
+            bytes_count += ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromChar(c);
+    }
+    return bytes_count;
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] MISC HELPERS/UTILITIES (Color functions)
+// Note: The Convert functions are early design which are not consistent with other API.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+IMGUI_API ImU32 ImAlphaBlendColors(ImU32 col_a, ImU32 col_b)
+{
+    float t = ((col_b >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT) & 0xFF) / 255.f;
+    int r = ImLerp((int)(col_a >> IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) & 0xFF, (int)(col_b >> IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) & 0xFF, t);
+    int g = ImLerp((int)(col_a >> IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) & 0xFF, (int)(col_b >> IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) & 0xFF, t);
+    int b = ImLerp((int)(col_a >> IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) & 0xFF, (int)(col_b >> IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) & 0xFF, t);
+    return IM_COL32(r, g, b, 0xFF);
+}
+
+ImVec4 ImGui::ColorConvertU32ToFloat4(ImU32 in)
+{
+    float s = 1.0f / 255.0f;
+    return ImVec4(
+        ((in >> IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * s,
+        ((in >> IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * s,
+        ((in >> IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * s,
+        ((in >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT) & 0xFF) * s);
+}
+
+ImU32 ImGui::ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(const ImVec4& in)
+{
+    ImU32 out;
+    out  = ((ImU32)IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(in.x)) << IM_COL32_R_SHIFT;
+    out |= ((ImU32)IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(in.y)) << IM_COL32_G_SHIFT;
+    out |= ((ImU32)IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(in.z)) << IM_COL32_B_SHIFT;
+    out |= ((ImU32)IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(in.w)) << IM_COL32_A_SHIFT;
+    return out;
+}
+
+// Convert rgb floats ([0-1],[0-1],[0-1]) to hsv floats ([0-1],[0-1],[0-1]), from Foley & van Dam p592
+// Optimized http://lolengine.net/blog/2013/01/13/fast-rgb-to-hsv
+void ImGui::ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(float r, float g, float b, float& out_h, float& out_s, float& out_v)
+{
+    float K = 0.f;
+    if (g < b)
+    {
+        ImSwap(g, b);
+        K = -1.f;
+    }
+    if (r < g)
+    {
+        ImSwap(r, g);
+        K = -2.f / 6.f - K;
+    }
+
+    const float chroma = r - (g < b ? g : b);
+    out_h = ImFabs(K + (g - b) / (6.f * chroma + 1e-20f));
+    out_s = chroma / (r + 1e-20f);
+    out_v = r;
+}
+
+// Convert hsv floats ([0-1],[0-1],[0-1]) to rgb floats ([0-1],[0-1],[0-1]), from Foley & van Dam p593
+// also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/HSL_and_HSV
+void ImGui::ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(float h, float s, float v, float& out_r, float& out_g, float& out_b)
+{
+    if (s == 0.0f)
+    {
+        // gray
+        out_r = out_g = out_b = v;
+        return;
+    }
+
+    h = ImFmod(h, 1.0f) / (60.0f / 360.0f);
+    int   i = (int)h;
+    float f = h - (float)i;
+    float p = v * (1.0f - s);
+    float q = v * (1.0f - s * f);
+    float t = v * (1.0f - s * (1.0f - f));
+
+    switch (i)
+    {
+    case 0: out_r = v; out_g = t; out_b = p; break;
+    case 1: out_r = q; out_g = v; out_b = p; break;
+    case 2: out_r = p; out_g = v; out_b = t; break;
+    case 3: out_r = p; out_g = q; out_b = v; break;
+    case 4: out_r = t; out_g = p; out_b = v; break;
+    case 5: default: out_r = v; out_g = p; out_b = q; break;
+    }
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] ImGuiStorage
+// Helper: Key->value storage
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// std::lower_bound but without the bullshit
+static ImGuiStorage::ImGuiStoragePair* LowerBound(ImVector<ImGuiStorage::ImGuiStoragePair>& data, ImGuiID key)
+{
+    ImGuiStorage::ImGuiStoragePair* first = data.Data;
+    ImGuiStorage::ImGuiStoragePair* last = data.Data + data.Size;
+    size_t count = (size_t)(last - first);
+    while (count > 0)
+    {
+        size_t count2 = count >> 1;
+        ImGuiStorage::ImGuiStoragePair* mid = first + count2;
+        if (mid->key < key)
+        {
+            first = ++mid;
+            count -= count2 + 1;
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            count = count2;
+        }
+    }
+    return first;
+}
+
+// For quicker full rebuild of a storage (instead of an incremental one), you may add all your contents and then sort once.
+void ImGuiStorage::BuildSortByKey()
+{
+    struct StaticFunc
+    {
+        static int IMGUI_CDECL PairComparerByID(const void* lhs, const void* rhs)
+        {
+            // We can't just do a subtraction because qsort uses signed integers and subtracting our ID doesn't play well with that.
+            if (((const ImGuiStoragePair*)lhs)->key > ((const ImGuiStoragePair*)rhs)->key) return +1;
+            if (((const ImGuiStoragePair*)lhs)->key < ((const ImGuiStoragePair*)rhs)->key) return -1;
+            return 0;
+        }
+    };
+    ImQsort(Data.Data, (size_t)Data.Size, sizeof(ImGuiStoragePair), StaticFunc::PairComparerByID);
+}
+
+int ImGuiStorage::GetInt(ImGuiID key, int default_val) const
+{
+    ImGuiStoragePair* it = LowerBound(const_cast<ImVector<ImGuiStoragePair>&>(Data), key);
+    if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
+        return default_val;
+    return it->val_i;
+}
+
+bool ImGuiStorage::GetBool(ImGuiID key, bool default_val) const
+{
+    return GetInt(key, default_val ? 1 : 0) != 0;
+}
+
+float ImGuiStorage::GetFloat(ImGuiID key, float default_val) const
+{
+    ImGuiStoragePair* it = LowerBound(const_cast<ImVector<ImGuiStoragePair>&>(Data), key);
+    if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
+        return default_val;
+    return it->val_f;
+}
+
+void* ImGuiStorage::GetVoidPtr(ImGuiID key) const
+{
+    ImGuiStoragePair* it = LowerBound(const_cast<ImVector<ImGuiStoragePair>&>(Data), key);
+    if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
+        return NULL;
+    return it->val_p;
+}
+
+// References are only valid until a new value is added to the storage. Calling a Set***() function or a Get***Ref() function invalidates the pointer.
+int* ImGuiStorage::GetIntRef(ImGuiID key, int default_val)
+{
+    ImGuiStoragePair* it = LowerBound(Data, key);
+    if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
+        it = Data.insert(it, ImGuiStoragePair(key, default_val));
+    return &it->val_i;
+}
+
+bool* ImGuiStorage::GetBoolRef(ImGuiID key, bool default_val)
+{
+    return (bool*)GetIntRef(key, default_val ? 1 : 0);
+}
+
+float* ImGuiStorage::GetFloatRef(ImGuiID key, float default_val)
+{
+    ImGuiStoragePair* it = LowerBound(Data, key);
+    if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
+        it = Data.insert(it, ImGuiStoragePair(key, default_val));
+    return &it->val_f;
+}
+
+void** ImGuiStorage::GetVoidPtrRef(ImGuiID key, void* default_val)
+{
+    ImGuiStoragePair* it = LowerBound(Data, key);
+    if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
+        it = Data.insert(it, ImGuiStoragePair(key, default_val));
+    return &it->val_p;
+}
+
+// FIXME-OPT: Need a way to reuse the result of lower_bound when doing GetInt()/SetInt() - not too bad because it only happens on explicit interaction (maximum one a frame)
+void ImGuiStorage::SetInt(ImGuiID key, int val)
+{
+    ImGuiStoragePair* it = LowerBound(Data, key);
+    if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
+    {
+        Data.insert(it, ImGuiStoragePair(key, val));
+        return;
+    }
+    it->val_i = val;
+}
+
+void ImGuiStorage::SetBool(ImGuiID key, bool val)
+{
+    SetInt(key, val ? 1 : 0);
+}
+
+void ImGuiStorage::SetFloat(ImGuiID key, float val)
+{
+    ImGuiStoragePair* it = LowerBound(Data, key);
+    if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
+    {
+        Data.insert(it, ImGuiStoragePair(key, val));
+        return;
+    }
+    it->val_f = val;
+}
+
+void ImGuiStorage::SetVoidPtr(ImGuiID key, void* val)
+{
+    ImGuiStoragePair* it = LowerBound(Data, key);
+    if (it == Data.end() || it->key != key)
+    {
+        Data.insert(it, ImGuiStoragePair(key, val));
+        return;
+    }
+    it->val_p = val;
+}
+
+void ImGuiStorage::SetAllInt(int v)
+{
+    for (int i = 0; i < Data.Size; i++)
+        Data[i].val_i = v;
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] ImGuiTextFilter
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Helper: Parse and apply text filters. In format "aaaaa[,bbbb][,ccccc]"
+ImGuiTextFilter::ImGuiTextFilter(const char* default_filter) //-V1077
+{
+    InputBuf[0] = 0;
+    CountGrep = 0;
+    if (default_filter)
+    {
+        ImStrncpy(InputBuf, default_filter, IM_ARRAYSIZE(InputBuf));
+        Build();
+    }
+}
+
+bool ImGuiTextFilter::Draw(const char* label, float width)
+{
+    if (width != 0.0f)
+        ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(width);
+    bool value_changed = ImGui::InputText(label, InputBuf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(InputBuf));
+    if (value_changed)
+        Build();
+    return value_changed;
+}
+
+void ImGuiTextFilter::ImGuiTextRange::split(char separator, ImVector<ImGuiTextRange>* out) const
+{
+    out->resize(0);
+    const char* wb = b;
+    const char* we = wb;
+    while (we < e)
+    {
+        if (*we == separator)
+        {
+            out->push_back(ImGuiTextRange(wb, we));
+            wb = we + 1;
+        }
+        we++;
+    }
+    if (wb != we)
+        out->push_back(ImGuiTextRange(wb, we));
+}
+
+void ImGuiTextFilter::Build()
+{
+    Filters.resize(0);
+    ImGuiTextRange input_range(InputBuf, InputBuf + strlen(InputBuf));
+    input_range.split(',', &Filters);
+
+    CountGrep = 0;
+    for (int i = 0; i != Filters.Size; i++)
+    {
+        ImGuiTextRange& f = Filters[i];
+        while (f.b < f.e && ImCharIsBlankA(f.b[0]))
+            f.b++;
+        while (f.e > f.b && ImCharIsBlankA(f.e[-1]))
+            f.e--;
+        if (f.empty())
+            continue;
+        if (Filters[i].b[0] != '-')
+            CountGrep += 1;
+    }
+}
+
+bool ImGuiTextFilter::PassFilter(const char* text, const char* text_end) const
+{
+    if (Filters.empty())
+        return true;
+
+    if (text == NULL)
+        text = "";
+
+    for (int i = 0; i != Filters.Size; i++)
+    {
+        const ImGuiTextRange& f = Filters[i];
+        if (f.empty())
+            continue;
+        if (f.b[0] == '-')
+        {
+            // Subtract
+            if (ImStristr(text, text_end, f.b + 1, f.e) != NULL)
+                return false;
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            // Grep
+            if (ImStristr(text, text_end, f.b, f.e) != NULL)
+                return true;
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Implicit * grep
+    if (CountGrep == 0)
+        return true;
+
+    return false;
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] ImGuiTextBuffer
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// On some platform vsnprintf() takes va_list by reference and modifies it.
+// va_copy is the 'correct' way to copy a va_list but Visual Studio prior to 2013 doesn't have it.
+#ifndef va_copy
+#if defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__clang__)
+#define va_copy(dest, src) __builtin_va_copy(dest, src)
+#else
+#define va_copy(dest, src) (dest = src)
+#endif
+#endif
+
+char ImGuiTextBuffer::EmptyString[1] = { 0 };
+
+void ImGuiTextBuffer::append(const char* str, const char* str_end)
+{
+    int len = str_end ? (int)(str_end - str) : (int)strlen(str);
+
+    // Add zero-terminator the first time
+    const int write_off = (Buf.Size != 0) ? Buf.Size : 1;
+    const int needed_sz = write_off + len;
+    if (write_off + len >= Buf.Capacity)
+    {
+        int new_capacity = Buf.Capacity * 2;
+        Buf.reserve(needed_sz > new_capacity ? needed_sz : new_capacity);
+    }
+
+    Buf.resize(needed_sz);
+    memcpy(&Buf[write_off - 1], str, (size_t)len);
+    Buf[write_off - 1 + len] = 0;
+}
+
+void ImGuiTextBuffer::appendf(const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+    va_list args;
+    va_start(args, fmt);
+    appendfv(fmt, args);
+    va_end(args);
+}
+
+// Helper: Text buffer for logging/accumulating text
+void ImGuiTextBuffer::appendfv(const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+    va_list args_copy;
+    va_copy(args_copy, args);
+
+    int len = ImFormatStringV(NULL, 0, fmt, args);         // FIXME-OPT: could do a first pass write attempt, likely successful on first pass.
+    if (len <= 0)
+    {
+        va_end(args_copy);
+        return;
+    }
+
+    // Add zero-terminator the first time
+    const int write_off = (Buf.Size != 0) ? Buf.Size : 1;
+    const int needed_sz = write_off + len;
+    if (write_off + len >= Buf.Capacity)
+    {
+        int new_capacity = Buf.Capacity * 2;
+        Buf.reserve(needed_sz > new_capacity ? needed_sz : new_capacity);
+    }
+
+    Buf.resize(needed_sz);
+    ImFormatStringV(&Buf[write_off - 1], (size_t)len + 1, fmt, args_copy);
+    va_end(args_copy);
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] ImGuiListClipper
+// This is currently not as flexible/powerful as it should be and really confusing/spaghetti, mostly because we changed
+// the API mid-way through development and support two ways to using the clipper, needs some rework (see TODO)
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// FIXME-TABLE: This prevents us from using ImGuiListClipper _inside_ a table cell.
+// The problem we have is that without a Begin/End scheme for rows using the clipper is ambiguous.
+static bool GetSkipItemForListClipping()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return (g.CurrentTable ? g.CurrentTable->HostSkipItems : g.CurrentWindow->SkipItems);
+}
+
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+// Legacy helper to calculate coarse clipping of large list of evenly sized items.
+// This legacy API is not ideal because it assume we will return a single contiguous rectangle.
+// Prefer using ImGuiListClipper which can returns non-contiguous ranges.
+void ImGui::CalcListClipping(int items_count, float items_height, int* out_items_display_start, int* out_items_display_end)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (g.LogEnabled)
+    {
+        // If logging is active, do not perform any clipping
+        *out_items_display_start = 0;
+        *out_items_display_end = items_count;
+        return;
+    }
+    if (GetSkipItemForListClipping())
+    {
+        *out_items_display_start = *out_items_display_end = 0;
+        return;
+    }
+
+    // We create the union of the ClipRect and the scoring rect which at worst should be 1 page away from ClipRect
+    // We don't include g.NavId's rectangle in there (unless g.NavJustMovedToId is set) because the rectangle enlargement can get costly.
+    ImRect rect = window->ClipRect;
+    if (g.NavMoveScoringItems)
+        rect.Add(g.NavScoringNoClipRect);
+    if (g.NavJustMovedToId && window->NavLastIds[0] == g.NavJustMovedToId)
+        rect.Add(WindowRectRelToAbs(window, window->NavRectRel[0])); // Could store and use NavJustMovedToRectRel
+
+    const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+    int start = (int)((rect.Min.y - pos.y) / items_height);
+    int end = (int)((rect.Max.y - pos.y) / items_height);
+
+    // When performing a navigation request, ensure we have one item extra in the direction we are moving to
+    // FIXME: Verify this works with tabbing
+    const bool is_nav_request = (g.NavMoveScoringItems && g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow->RootWindowForNav == window->RootWindowForNav);
+    if (is_nav_request && g.NavMoveClipDir == ImGuiDir_Up)
+        start--;
+    if (is_nav_request && g.NavMoveClipDir == ImGuiDir_Down)
+        end++;
+
+    start = ImClamp(start, 0, items_count);
+    end = ImClamp(end + 1, start, items_count);
+    *out_items_display_start = start;
+    *out_items_display_end = end;
+}
+#endif
+
+static void ImGuiListClipper_SortAndFuseRanges(ImVector<ImGuiListClipperRange>& ranges, int offset = 0)
+{
+    if (ranges.Size - offset <= 1)
+        return;
+
+    // Helper to order ranges and fuse them together if possible (bubble sort is fine as we are only sorting 2-3 entries)
+    for (int sort_end = ranges.Size - offset - 1; sort_end > 0; --sort_end)
+        for (int i = offset; i < sort_end + offset; ++i)
+            if (ranges[i].Min > ranges[i + 1].Min)
+                ImSwap(ranges[i], ranges[i + 1]);
+
+    // Now fuse ranges together as much as possible.
+    for (int i = 1 + offset; i < ranges.Size; i++)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(!ranges[i].PosToIndexConvert && !ranges[i - 1].PosToIndexConvert);
+        if (ranges[i - 1].Max < ranges[i].Min)
+            continue;
+        ranges[i - 1].Min = ImMin(ranges[i - 1].Min, ranges[i].Min);
+        ranges[i - 1].Max = ImMax(ranges[i - 1].Max, ranges[i].Max);
+        ranges.erase(ranges.Data + i);
+        i--;
+    }
+}
+
+static void ImGuiListClipper_SeekCursorAndSetupPrevLine(float pos_y, float line_height)
+{
+    // Set cursor position and a few other things so that SetScrollHereY() and Columns() can work when seeking cursor.
+    // FIXME: It is problematic that we have to do that here, because custom/equivalent end-user code would stumble on the same issue.
+    // The clipper should probably have a final step to display the last item in a regular manner, maybe with an opt-out flag for data sets which may have costly seek?
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    float off_y = pos_y - window->DC.CursorPos.y;
+    window->DC.CursorPos.y = pos_y;
+    window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y, pos_y - g.Style.ItemSpacing.y);
+    window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y = window->DC.CursorPos.y - line_height;  // Setting those fields so that SetScrollHereY() can properly function after the end of our clipper usage.
+    window->DC.PrevLineSize.y = (line_height - g.Style.ItemSpacing.y);      // If we end up needing more accurate data (to e.g. use SameLine) we may as well make the clipper have a fourth step to let user process and display the last item in their list.
+    if (ImGuiOldColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns)
+        columns->LineMinY = window->DC.CursorPos.y;                         // Setting this so that cell Y position are set properly
+    if (ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable)
+    {
+        if (table->IsInsideRow)
+            ImGui::TableEndRow(table);
+        table->RowPosY2 = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
+        const int row_increase = (int)((off_y / line_height) + 0.5f);
+        //table->CurrentRow += row_increase; // Can't do without fixing TableEndRow()
+        table->RowBgColorCounter += row_increase;
+    }
+}
+
+static void ImGuiListClipper_SeekCursorForItem(ImGuiListClipper* clipper, int item_n)
+{
+    // StartPosY starts from ItemsFrozen hence the subtraction
+    // Perform the add and multiply with double to allow seeking through larger ranges
+    ImGuiListClipperData* data = (ImGuiListClipperData*)clipper->TempData;
+    float pos_y = (float)((double)clipper->StartPosY + data->LossynessOffset + (double)(item_n - data->ItemsFrozen) * clipper->ItemsHeight);
+    ImGuiListClipper_SeekCursorAndSetupPrevLine(pos_y, clipper->ItemsHeight);
+}
+
+ImGuiListClipper::ImGuiListClipper()
+{
+    memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this));
+    ItemsCount = -1;
+}
+
+ImGuiListClipper::~ImGuiListClipper()
+{
+    End();
+}
+
+// Use case A: Begin() called from constructor with items_height<0, then called again from Step() in StepNo 1
+// Use case B: Begin() called from constructor with items_height>0
+// FIXME-LEGACY: Ideally we should remove the Begin/End functions but they are part of the legacy API we still support. This is why some of the code in Step() calling Begin() and reassign some fields, spaghetti style.
+void ImGuiListClipper::Begin(int items_count, float items_height)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+    if (ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable)
+        if (table->IsInsideRow)
+            ImGui::TableEndRow(table);
+
+    StartPosY = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
+    ItemsHeight = items_height;
+    ItemsCount = items_count;
+    DisplayStart = -1;
+    DisplayEnd = 0;
+
+    // Acquire temporary buffer
+    if (++g.ClipperTempDataStacked > g.ClipperTempData.Size)
+        g.ClipperTempData.resize(g.ClipperTempDataStacked, ImGuiListClipperData());
+    ImGuiListClipperData* data = &g.ClipperTempData[g.ClipperTempDataStacked - 1];
+    data->Reset(this);
+    data->LossynessOffset = window->DC.CursorStartPosLossyness.y;
+    TempData = data;
+}
+
+void ImGuiListClipper::End()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (ImGuiListClipperData* data = (ImGuiListClipperData*)TempData)
+    {
+        // In theory here we should assert that we are already at the right position, but it seems saner to just seek at the end and not assert/crash the user.
+        if (ItemsCount >= 0 && ItemsCount < INT_MAX && DisplayStart >= 0)
+            ImGuiListClipper_SeekCursorForItem(this, ItemsCount);
+
+        // Restore temporary buffer and fix back pointers which may be invalidated when nesting
+        IM_ASSERT(data->ListClipper == this);
+        data->StepNo = data->Ranges.Size;
+        if (--g.ClipperTempDataStacked > 0)
+        {
+            data = &g.ClipperTempData[g.ClipperTempDataStacked - 1];
+            data->ListClipper->TempData = data;
+        }
+        TempData = NULL;
+    }
+    ItemsCount = -1;
+}
+
+void ImGuiListClipper::ForceDisplayRangeByIndices(int item_min, int item_max)
+{
+    ImGuiListClipperData* data = (ImGuiListClipperData*)TempData;
+    IM_ASSERT(DisplayStart < 0); // Only allowed after Begin() and if there has not been a specified range yet.
+    IM_ASSERT(item_min <= item_max);
+    if (item_min < item_max)
+        data->Ranges.push_back(ImGuiListClipperRange::FromIndices(item_min, item_max));
+}
+
+bool ImGuiListClipper::Step()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    ImGuiListClipperData* data = (ImGuiListClipperData*)TempData;
+    IM_ASSERT(data != NULL && "Called ImGuiListClipper::Step() too many times, or before ImGuiListClipper::Begin() ?");
+
+    ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable;
+    if (table && table->IsInsideRow)
+        ImGui::TableEndRow(table);
+
+    // No items
+    if (ItemsCount == 0 || GetSkipItemForListClipping())
+        return (void)End(), false;
+
+    // While we are in frozen row state, keep displaying items one by one, unclipped
+    // FIXME: Could be stored as a table-agnostic state.
+    if (data->StepNo == 0 && table != NULL && !table->IsUnfrozenRows)
+    {
+        DisplayStart = data->ItemsFrozen;
+        DisplayEnd = data->ItemsFrozen + 1;
+        if (DisplayStart >= ItemsCount)
+            return (void)End(), false;
+        data->ItemsFrozen++;
+        return true;
+    }
+
+    // Step 0: Let you process the first element (regardless of it being visible or not, so we can measure the element height)
+    bool calc_clipping = false;
+    if (data->StepNo == 0)
+    {
+        StartPosY = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
+        if (ItemsHeight <= 0.0f)
+        {
+            // Submit the first item (or range) so we can measure its height (generally the first range is 0..1)
+            data->Ranges.push_front(ImGuiListClipperRange::FromIndices(data->ItemsFrozen, data->ItemsFrozen + 1));
+            DisplayStart = ImMax(data->Ranges[0].Min, data->ItemsFrozen);
+            DisplayEnd = ImMin(data->Ranges[0].Max, ItemsCount);
+            if (DisplayStart == DisplayEnd)
+                return (void)End(), false;
+            data->StepNo = 1;
+            return true;
+        }
+        calc_clipping = true;   // If on the first step with known item height, calculate clipping.
+    }
+
+    // Step 1: Let the clipper infer height from first range
+    if (ItemsHeight <= 0.0f)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(data->StepNo == 1);
+        if (table)
+            IM_ASSERT(table->RowPosY1 == StartPosY && table->RowPosY2 == window->DC.CursorPos.y);
+
+        ItemsHeight = (window->DC.CursorPos.y - StartPosY) / (float)(DisplayEnd - DisplayStart);
+        bool affected_by_floating_point_precision = ImIsFloatAboveGuaranteedIntegerPrecision(StartPosY) || ImIsFloatAboveGuaranteedIntegerPrecision(window->DC.CursorPos.y);
+        if (affected_by_floating_point_precision)
+            ItemsHeight = window->DC.PrevLineSize.y + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y; // FIXME: Technically wouldn't allow multi-line entries.
+
+        IM_ASSERT(ItemsHeight > 0.0f && "Unable to calculate item height! First item hasn't moved the cursor vertically!");
+        calc_clipping = true;   // If item height had to be calculated, calculate clipping afterwards.
+    }
+
+    // Step 0 or 1: Calculate the actual ranges of visible elements.
+    const int already_submitted = DisplayEnd;
+    if (calc_clipping)
+    {
+        if (g.LogEnabled)
+        {
+            // If logging is active, do not perform any clipping
+            data->Ranges.push_back(ImGuiListClipperRange::FromIndices(0, ItemsCount));
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            // Add range selected to be included for navigation
+            const bool is_nav_request = (g.NavMoveScoringItems && g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow->RootWindowForNav == window->RootWindowForNav);
+            if (is_nav_request)
+                data->Ranges.push_back(ImGuiListClipperRange::FromPositions(g.NavScoringNoClipRect.Min.y, g.NavScoringNoClipRect.Max.y, 0, 0));
+            if (is_nav_request && (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Tabbing) && g.NavTabbingDir == -1)
+                data->Ranges.push_back(ImGuiListClipperRange::FromIndices(ItemsCount - 1, ItemsCount));
+
+            // Add focused/active item
+            ImRect nav_rect_abs = ImGui::WindowRectRelToAbs(window, window->NavRectRel[0]);
+            if (g.NavId != 0 && window->NavLastIds[0] == g.NavId)
+                data->Ranges.push_back(ImGuiListClipperRange::FromPositions(nav_rect_abs.Min.y, nav_rect_abs.Max.y, 0, 0));
+
+            // Add visible range
+            const int off_min = (is_nav_request && g.NavMoveClipDir == ImGuiDir_Up) ? -1 : 0;
+            const int off_max = (is_nav_request && g.NavMoveClipDir == ImGuiDir_Down) ? 1 : 0;
+            data->Ranges.push_back(ImGuiListClipperRange::FromPositions(window->ClipRect.Min.y, window->ClipRect.Max.y, off_min, off_max));
+        }
+
+        // Convert position ranges to item index ranges
+        // - Very important: when a starting position is after our maximum item, we set Min to (ItemsCount - 1). This allows us to handle most forms of wrapping.
+        // - Due to how Selectable extra padding they tend to be "unaligned" with exact unit in the item list,
+        //   which with the flooring/ceiling tend to lead to 2 items instead of one being submitted.
+        for (int i = 0; i < data->Ranges.Size; i++)
+            if (data->Ranges[i].PosToIndexConvert)
+            {
+                int m1 = (int)(((double)data->Ranges[i].Min - window->DC.CursorPos.y - data->LossynessOffset) / ItemsHeight);
+                int m2 = (int)((((double)data->Ranges[i].Max - window->DC.CursorPos.y - data->LossynessOffset) / ItemsHeight) + 0.999999f);
+                data->Ranges[i].Min = ImClamp(already_submitted + m1 + data->Ranges[i].PosToIndexOffsetMin, already_submitted, ItemsCount - 1);
+                data->Ranges[i].Max = ImClamp(already_submitted + m2 + data->Ranges[i].PosToIndexOffsetMax, data->Ranges[i].Min + 1, ItemsCount);
+                data->Ranges[i].PosToIndexConvert = false;
+            }
+        ImGuiListClipper_SortAndFuseRanges(data->Ranges, data->StepNo);
+    }
+
+    // Step 0+ (if item height is given in advance) or 1+: Display the next range in line.
+    if (data->StepNo < data->Ranges.Size)
+    {
+        DisplayStart = ImMax(data->Ranges[data->StepNo].Min, already_submitted);
+        DisplayEnd = ImMin(data->Ranges[data->StepNo].Max, ItemsCount);
+        if (DisplayStart > already_submitted) //-V1051
+            ImGuiListClipper_SeekCursorForItem(this, DisplayStart);
+        data->StepNo++;
+        return true;
+    }
+
+    // After the last step: Let the clipper validate that we have reached the expected Y position (corresponding to element DisplayEnd),
+    // Advance the cursor to the end of the list and then returns 'false' to end the loop.
+    if (ItemsCount < INT_MAX)
+        ImGuiListClipper_SeekCursorForItem(this, ItemsCount);
+
+    End();
+    return false;
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] STYLING
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+ImGuiStyle& ImGui::GetStyle()
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(GImGui != NULL && "No current context. Did you call ImGui::CreateContext() and ImGui::SetCurrentContext() ?");
+    return GImGui->Style;
+}
+
+ImU32 ImGui::GetColorU32(ImGuiCol idx, float alpha_mul)
+{
+    ImGuiStyle& style = GImGui->Style;
+    ImVec4 c = style.Colors[idx];
+    c.w *= style.Alpha * alpha_mul;
+    return ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(c);
+}
+
+ImU32 ImGui::GetColorU32(const ImVec4& col)
+{
+    ImGuiStyle& style = GImGui->Style;
+    ImVec4 c = col;
+    c.w *= style.Alpha;
+    return ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(c);
+}
+
+const ImVec4& ImGui::GetStyleColorVec4(ImGuiCol idx)
+{
+    ImGuiStyle& style = GImGui->Style;
+    return style.Colors[idx];
+}
+
+ImU32 ImGui::GetColorU32(ImU32 col)
+{
+    ImGuiStyle& style = GImGui->Style;
+    if (style.Alpha >= 1.0f)
+        return col;
+    ImU32 a = (col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT;
+    a = (ImU32)(a * style.Alpha); // We don't need to clamp 0..255 because Style.Alpha is in 0..1 range.
+    return (col & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK) | (a << IM_COL32_A_SHIFT);
+}
+
+// FIXME: This may incur a round-trip (if the end user got their data from a float4) but eventually we aim to store the in-flight colors as ImU32
+void ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol idx, ImU32 col)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiColorMod backup;
+    backup.Col = idx;
+    backup.BackupValue = g.Style.Colors[idx];
+    g.ColorStack.push_back(backup);
+    g.Style.Colors[idx] = ColorConvertU32ToFloat4(col);
+}
+
+void ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol idx, const ImVec4& col)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiColorMod backup;
+    backup.Col = idx;
+    backup.BackupValue = g.Style.Colors[idx];
+    g.ColorStack.push_back(backup);
+    g.Style.Colors[idx] = col;
+}
+
+void ImGui::PopStyleColor(int count)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    while (count > 0)
+    {
+        ImGuiColorMod& backup = g.ColorStack.back();
+        g.Style.Colors[backup.Col] = backup.BackupValue;
+        g.ColorStack.pop_back();
+        count--;
+    }
+}
+
+struct ImGuiStyleVarInfo
+{
+    ImGuiDataType   Type;
+    ImU32           Count;
+    ImU32           Offset;
+    void*           GetVarPtr(ImGuiStyle* style) const { return (void*)((unsigned char*)style + Offset); }
+};
+
+static const ImGuiCol GWindowDockStyleColors[ImGuiWindowDockStyleCol_COUNT] =
+{
+    ImGuiCol_Text, ImGuiCol_Tab, ImGuiCol_TabHovered, ImGuiCol_TabActive, ImGuiCol_TabUnfocused, ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive
+};
+
+static const ImGuiStyleVarInfo GStyleVarInfo[] =
+{
+    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, Alpha) },               // ImGuiStyleVar_Alpha
+    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, DisabledAlpha) },       // ImGuiStyleVar_DisabledAlpha
+    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, WindowPadding) },       // ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding
+    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, WindowRounding) },      // ImGuiStyleVar_WindowRounding
+    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, WindowBorderSize) },    // ImGuiStyleVar_WindowBorderSize
+    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, WindowMinSize) },       // ImGuiStyleVar_WindowMinSize
+    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, WindowTitleAlign) },    // ImGuiStyleVar_WindowTitleAlign
+    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ChildRounding) },       // ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding
+    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ChildBorderSize) },     // ImGuiStyleVar_ChildBorderSize
+    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, PopupRounding) },       // ImGuiStyleVar_PopupRounding
+    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, PopupBorderSize) },     // ImGuiStyleVar_PopupBorderSize
+    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, FramePadding) },        // ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding
+    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, FrameRounding) },       // ImGuiStyleVar_FrameRounding
+    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, FrameBorderSize) },     // ImGuiStyleVar_FrameBorderSize
+    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ItemSpacing) },         // ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing
+    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ItemInnerSpacing) },    // ImGuiStyleVar_ItemInnerSpacing
+    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, IndentSpacing) },       // ImGuiStyleVar_IndentSpacing
+    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, CellPadding) },         // ImGuiStyleVar_CellPadding
+    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ScrollbarSize) },       // ImGuiStyleVar_ScrollbarSize
+    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ScrollbarRounding) },   // ImGuiStyleVar_ScrollbarRounding
+    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, GrabMinSize) },         // ImGuiStyleVar_GrabMinSize
+    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, GrabRounding) },        // ImGuiStyleVar_GrabRounding
+    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 1, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, TabRounding) },         // ImGuiStyleVar_TabRounding
+    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, ButtonTextAlign) },     // ImGuiStyleVar_ButtonTextAlign
+    { ImGuiDataType_Float, 2, (ImU32)IM_OFFSETOF(ImGuiStyle, SelectableTextAlign) }, // ImGuiStyleVar_SelectableTextAlign
+};
+
+static const ImGuiStyleVarInfo* GetStyleVarInfo(ImGuiStyleVar idx)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(idx >= 0 && idx < ImGuiStyleVar_COUNT);
+    IM_ASSERT(IM_ARRAYSIZE(GStyleVarInfo) == ImGuiStyleVar_COUNT);
+    return &GStyleVarInfo[idx];
+}
+
+void ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar idx, float val)
+{
+    const ImGuiStyleVarInfo* var_info = GetStyleVarInfo(idx);
+    if (var_info->Type == ImGuiDataType_Float && var_info->Count == 1)
+    {
+        ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+        float* pvar = (float*)var_info->GetVarPtr(&g.Style);
+        g.StyleVarStack.push_back(ImGuiStyleMod(idx, *pvar));
+        *pvar = val;
+        return;
+    }
+    IM_ASSERT(0 && "Called PushStyleVar() float variant but variable is not a float!");
+}
+
+void ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar idx, const ImVec2& val)
+{
+    const ImGuiStyleVarInfo* var_info = GetStyleVarInfo(idx);
+    if (var_info->Type == ImGuiDataType_Float && var_info->Count == 2)
+    {
+        ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+        ImVec2* pvar = (ImVec2*)var_info->GetVarPtr(&g.Style);
+        g.StyleVarStack.push_back(ImGuiStyleMod(idx, *pvar));
+        *pvar = val;
+        return;
+    }
+    IM_ASSERT(0 && "Called PushStyleVar() ImVec2 variant but variable is not a ImVec2!");
+}
+
+void ImGui::PopStyleVar(int count)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    while (count > 0)
+    {
+        // We avoid a generic memcpy(data, &backup.Backup.., GDataTypeSize[info->Type] * info->Count), the overhead in Debug is not worth it.
+        ImGuiStyleMod& backup = g.StyleVarStack.back();
+        const ImGuiStyleVarInfo* info = GetStyleVarInfo(backup.VarIdx);
+        void* data = info->GetVarPtr(&g.Style);
+        if (info->Type == ImGuiDataType_Float && info->Count == 1)      { ((float*)data)[0] = backup.BackupFloat[0]; }
+        else if (info->Type == ImGuiDataType_Float && info->Count == 2) { ((float*)data)[0] = backup.BackupFloat[0]; ((float*)data)[1] = backup.BackupFloat[1]; }
+        g.StyleVarStack.pop_back();
+        count--;
+    }
+}
+
+const char* ImGui::GetStyleColorName(ImGuiCol idx)
+{
+    // Create switch-case from enum with regexp: ImGuiCol_{.*}, --> case ImGuiCol_\1: return "\1";
+    switch (idx)
+    {
+    case ImGuiCol_Text: return "Text";
+    case ImGuiCol_TextDisabled: return "TextDisabled";
+    case ImGuiCol_WindowBg: return "WindowBg";
+    case ImGuiCol_ChildBg: return "ChildBg";
+    case ImGuiCol_PopupBg: return "PopupBg";
+    case ImGuiCol_Border: return "Border";
+    case ImGuiCol_BorderShadow: return "BorderShadow";
+    case ImGuiCol_FrameBg: return "FrameBg";
+    case ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered: return "FrameBgHovered";
+    case ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive: return "FrameBgActive";
+    case ImGuiCol_TitleBg: return "TitleBg";
+    case ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive: return "TitleBgActive";
+    case ImGuiCol_TitleBgCollapsed: return "TitleBgCollapsed";
+    case ImGuiCol_MenuBarBg: return "MenuBarBg";
+    case ImGuiCol_ScrollbarBg: return "ScrollbarBg";
+    case ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrab: return "ScrollbarGrab";
+    case ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabHovered: return "ScrollbarGrabHovered";
+    case ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabActive: return "ScrollbarGrabActive";
+    case ImGuiCol_CheckMark: return "CheckMark";
+    case ImGuiCol_SliderGrab: return "SliderGrab";
+    case ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive: return "SliderGrabActive";
+    case ImGuiCol_Button: return "Button";
+    case ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered: return "ButtonHovered";
+    case ImGuiCol_ButtonActive: return "ButtonActive";
+    case ImGuiCol_Header: return "Header";
+    case ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered: return "HeaderHovered";
+    case ImGuiCol_HeaderActive: return "HeaderActive";
+    case ImGuiCol_Separator: return "Separator";
+    case ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered: return "SeparatorHovered";
+    case ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive: return "SeparatorActive";
+    case ImGuiCol_ResizeGrip: return "ResizeGrip";
+    case ImGuiCol_ResizeGripHovered: return "ResizeGripHovered";
+    case ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive: return "ResizeGripActive";
+    case ImGuiCol_Tab: return "Tab";
+    case ImGuiCol_TabHovered: return "TabHovered";
+    case ImGuiCol_TabActive: return "TabActive";
+    case ImGuiCol_TabUnfocused: return "TabUnfocused";
+    case ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive: return "TabUnfocusedActive";
+    case ImGuiCol_DockingPreview: return "DockingPreview";
+    case ImGuiCol_DockingEmptyBg: return "DockingEmptyBg";
+    case ImGuiCol_PlotLines: return "PlotLines";
+    case ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered: return "PlotLinesHovered";
+    case ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram: return "PlotHistogram";
+    case ImGuiCol_PlotHistogramHovered: return "PlotHistogramHovered";
+    case ImGuiCol_TableHeaderBg: return "TableHeaderBg";
+    case ImGuiCol_TableBorderStrong: return "TableBorderStrong";
+    case ImGuiCol_TableBorderLight: return "TableBorderLight";
+    case ImGuiCol_TableRowBg: return "TableRowBg";
+    case ImGuiCol_TableRowBgAlt: return "TableRowBgAlt";
+    case ImGuiCol_TextSelectedBg: return "TextSelectedBg";
+    case ImGuiCol_DragDropTarget: return "DragDropTarget";
+    case ImGuiCol_NavHighlight: return "NavHighlight";
+    case ImGuiCol_NavWindowingHighlight: return "NavWindowingHighlight";
+    case ImGuiCol_NavWindowingDimBg: return "NavWindowingDimBg";
+    case ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg: return "ModalWindowDimBg";
+    }
+    IM_ASSERT(0);
+    return "Unknown";
+}
+
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] RENDER HELPERS
+// Some of those (internal) functions are currently quite a legacy mess - their signature and behavior will change,
+// we need a nicer separation between low-level functions and high-level functions relying on the ImGui context.
+// Also see imgui_draw.cpp for some more which have been reworked to not rely on ImGui:: context.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+const char* ImGui::FindRenderedTextEnd(const char* text, const char* text_end)
+{
+    const char* text_display_end = text;
+    if (!text_end)
+        text_end = (const char*)-1;
+
+    while (text_display_end < text_end && *text_display_end != '\0' && (text_display_end[0] != '#' || text_display_end[1] != '#'))
+        text_display_end++;
+    return text_display_end;
+}
+
+// Internal ImGui functions to render text
+// RenderText***() functions calls ImDrawList::AddText() calls ImBitmapFont::RenderText()
+void ImGui::RenderText(ImVec2 pos, const char* text, const char* text_end, bool hide_text_after_hash)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+    // Hide anything after a '##' string
+    const char* text_display_end;
+    if (hide_text_after_hash)
+    {
+        text_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(text, text_end);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        if (!text_end)
+            text_end = text + strlen(text); // FIXME-OPT
+        text_display_end = text_end;
+    }
+
+    if (text != text_display_end)
+    {
+        window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, pos, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), text, text_display_end);
+        if (g.LogEnabled)
+            LogRenderedText(&pos, text, text_display_end);
+    }
+}
+
+void ImGui::RenderTextWrapped(ImVec2 pos, const char* text, const char* text_end, float wrap_width)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+    if (!text_end)
+        text_end = text + strlen(text); // FIXME-OPT
+
+    if (text != text_end)
+    {
+        window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, pos, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), text, text_end, wrap_width);
+        if (g.LogEnabled)
+            LogRenderedText(&pos, text, text_end);
+    }
+}
+
+// Default clip_rect uses (pos_min,pos_max)
+// Handle clipping on CPU immediately (vs typically let the GPU clip the triangles that are overlapping the clipping rectangle edges)
+void ImGui::RenderTextClippedEx(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImVec2& pos_min, const ImVec2& pos_max, const char* text, const char* text_display_end, const ImVec2* text_size_if_known, const ImVec2& align, const ImRect* clip_rect)
+{
+    // Perform CPU side clipping for single clipped element to avoid using scissor state
+    ImVec2 pos = pos_min;
+    const ImVec2 text_size = text_size_if_known ? *text_size_if_known : CalcTextSize(text, text_display_end, false, 0.0f);
+
+    const ImVec2* clip_min = clip_rect ? &clip_rect->Min : &pos_min;
+    const ImVec2* clip_max = clip_rect ? &clip_rect->Max : &pos_max;
+    bool need_clipping = (pos.x + text_size.x >= clip_max->x) || (pos.y + text_size.y >= clip_max->y);
+    if (clip_rect) // If we had no explicit clipping rectangle then pos==clip_min
+        need_clipping |= (pos.x < clip_min->x) || (pos.y < clip_min->y);
+
+    // Align whole block. We should defer that to the better rendering function when we'll have support for individual line alignment.
+    if (align.x > 0.0f) pos.x = ImMax(pos.x, pos.x + (pos_max.x - pos.x - text_size.x) * align.x);
+    if (align.y > 0.0f) pos.y = ImMax(pos.y, pos.y + (pos_max.y - pos.y - text_size.y) * align.y);
+
+    // Render
+    if (need_clipping)
+    {
+        ImVec4 fine_clip_rect(clip_min->x, clip_min->y, clip_max->x, clip_max->y);
+        draw_list->AddText(NULL, 0.0f, pos, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), text, text_display_end, 0.0f, &fine_clip_rect);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        draw_list->AddText(NULL, 0.0f, pos, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), text, text_display_end, 0.0f, NULL);
+    }
+}
+
+void ImGui::RenderTextClipped(const ImVec2& pos_min, const ImVec2& pos_max, const char* text, const char* text_end, const ImVec2* text_size_if_known, const ImVec2& align, const ImRect* clip_rect)
+{
+    // Hide anything after a '##' string
+    const char* text_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(text, text_end);
+    const int text_len = (int)(text_display_end - text);
+    if (text_len == 0)
+        return;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    RenderTextClippedEx(window->DrawList, pos_min, pos_max, text, text_display_end, text_size_if_known, align, clip_rect);
+    if (g.LogEnabled)
+        LogRenderedText(&pos_min, text, text_display_end);
+}
+
+
+// Another overly complex function until we reorganize everything into a nice all-in-one helper.
+// This is made more complex because we have dissociated the layout rectangle (pos_min..pos_max) which define _where_ the ellipsis is, from actual clipping of text and limit of the ellipsis display.
+// This is because in the context of tabs we selectively hide part of the text when the Close Button appears, but we don't want the ellipsis to move.
+void ImGui::RenderTextEllipsis(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImVec2& pos_min, const ImVec2& pos_max, float clip_max_x, float ellipsis_max_x, const char* text, const char* text_end_full, const ImVec2* text_size_if_known)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (text_end_full == NULL)
+        text_end_full = FindRenderedTextEnd(text);
+    const ImVec2 text_size = text_size_if_known ? *text_size_if_known : CalcTextSize(text, text_end_full, false, 0.0f);
+
+    //draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(pos_max.x, pos_min.y - 4), ImVec2(pos_max.x, pos_max.y + 4), IM_COL32(0, 0, 255, 255));
+    //draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(ellipsis_max_x, pos_min.y-2), ImVec2(ellipsis_max_x, pos_max.y+2), IM_COL32(0, 255, 0, 255));
+    //draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(clip_max_x, pos_min.y), ImVec2(clip_max_x, pos_max.y), IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 255));
+    // FIXME: We could technically remove (last_glyph->AdvanceX - last_glyph->X1) from text_size.x here and save a few pixels.
+    if (text_size.x > pos_max.x - pos_min.x)
+    {
+        // Hello wo...
+        // |       |   |
+        // min   max   ellipsis_max
+        //          <-> this is generally some padding value
+
+        const ImFont* font = draw_list->_Data->Font;
+        const float font_size = draw_list->_Data->FontSize;
+        const char* text_end_ellipsis = NULL;
+
+        ImWchar ellipsis_char = font->EllipsisChar;
+        int ellipsis_char_count = 1;
+        if (ellipsis_char == (ImWchar)-1)
+        {
+            ellipsis_char = font->DotChar;
+            ellipsis_char_count = 3;
+        }
+        const ImFontGlyph* glyph = font->FindGlyph(ellipsis_char);
+
+        float ellipsis_glyph_width = glyph->X1;                 // Width of the glyph with no padding on either side
+        float ellipsis_total_width = ellipsis_glyph_width;      // Full width of entire ellipsis
+
+        if (ellipsis_char_count > 1)
+        {
+            // Full ellipsis size without free spacing after it.
+            const float spacing_between_dots = 1.0f * (draw_list->_Data->FontSize / font->FontSize);
+            ellipsis_glyph_width = glyph->X1 - glyph->X0 + spacing_between_dots;
+            ellipsis_total_width = ellipsis_glyph_width * (float)ellipsis_char_count - spacing_between_dots;
+        }
+
+        // We can now claim the space between pos_max.x and ellipsis_max.x
+        const float text_avail_width = ImMax((ImMax(pos_max.x, ellipsis_max_x) - ellipsis_total_width) - pos_min.x, 1.0f);
+        float text_size_clipped_x = font->CalcTextSizeA(font_size, text_avail_width, 0.0f, text, text_end_full, &text_end_ellipsis).x;
+        if (text == text_end_ellipsis && text_end_ellipsis < text_end_full)
+        {
+            // Always display at least 1 character if there's no room for character + ellipsis
+            text_end_ellipsis = text + ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromChar(text, text_end_full);
+            text_size_clipped_x = font->CalcTextSizeA(font_size, FLT_MAX, 0.0f, text, text_end_ellipsis).x;
+        }
+        while (text_end_ellipsis > text && ImCharIsBlankA(text_end_ellipsis[-1]))
+        {
+            // Trim trailing space before ellipsis (FIXME: Supporting non-ascii blanks would be nice, for this we need a function to backtrack in UTF-8 text)
+            text_end_ellipsis--;
+            text_size_clipped_x -= font->CalcTextSizeA(font_size, FLT_MAX, 0.0f, text_end_ellipsis, text_end_ellipsis + 1).x; // Ascii blanks are always 1 byte
+        }
+
+        // Render text, render ellipsis
+        RenderTextClippedEx(draw_list, pos_min, ImVec2(clip_max_x, pos_max.y), text, text_end_ellipsis, &text_size, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
+        float ellipsis_x = pos_min.x + text_size_clipped_x;
+        if (ellipsis_x + ellipsis_total_width <= ellipsis_max_x)
+            for (int i = 0; i < ellipsis_char_count; i++)
+            {
+                font->RenderChar(draw_list, font_size, ImVec2(ellipsis_x, pos_min.y), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), ellipsis_char);
+                ellipsis_x += ellipsis_glyph_width;
+            }
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        RenderTextClippedEx(draw_list, pos_min, ImVec2(clip_max_x, pos_max.y), text, text_end_full, &text_size, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
+    }
+
+    if (g.LogEnabled)
+        LogRenderedText(&pos_min, text, text_end_full);
+}
+
+// Render a rectangle shaped with optional rounding and borders
+void ImGui::RenderFrame(ImVec2 p_min, ImVec2 p_max, ImU32 fill_col, bool border, float rounding)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(p_min, p_max, fill_col, rounding);
+    const float border_size = g.Style.FrameBorderSize;
+    if (border && border_size > 0.0f)
+    {
+        window->DrawList->AddRect(p_min + ImVec2(1, 1), p_max + ImVec2(1, 1), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_BorderShadow), rounding, 0, border_size);
+        window->DrawList->AddRect(p_min, p_max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), rounding, 0, border_size);
+    }
+}
+
+void ImGui::RenderFrameBorder(ImVec2 p_min, ImVec2 p_max, float rounding)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    const float border_size = g.Style.FrameBorderSize;
+    if (border_size > 0.0f)
+    {
+        window->DrawList->AddRect(p_min + ImVec2(1, 1), p_max + ImVec2(1, 1), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_BorderShadow), rounding, 0, border_size);
+        window->DrawList->AddRect(p_min, p_max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), rounding, 0, border_size);
+    }
+}
+
+void ImGui::RenderNavHighlight(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (id != g.NavId)
+        return;
+    if (g.NavDisableHighlight && !(flags & ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_AlwaysDraw))
+        return;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (window->DC.NavHideHighlightOneFrame)
+        return;
+
+    float rounding = (flags & ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_NoRounding) ? 0.0f : g.Style.FrameRounding;
+    ImRect display_rect = bb;
+    display_rect.ClipWith(window->ClipRect);
+    if (flags & ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeDefault)
+    {
+        const float THICKNESS = 2.0f;
+        const float DISTANCE = 3.0f + THICKNESS * 0.5f;
+        display_rect.Expand(ImVec2(DISTANCE, DISTANCE));
+        bool fully_visible = window->ClipRect.Contains(display_rect);
+        if (!fully_visible)
+            window->DrawList->PushClipRect(display_rect.Min, display_rect.Max);
+        window->DrawList->AddRect(display_rect.Min + ImVec2(THICKNESS * 0.5f, THICKNESS * 0.5f), display_rect.Max - ImVec2(THICKNESS * 0.5f, THICKNESS * 0.5f), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_NavHighlight), rounding, 0, THICKNESS);
+        if (!fully_visible)
+            window->DrawList->PopClipRect();
+    }
+    if (flags & ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin)
+    {
+        window->DrawList->AddRect(display_rect.Min, display_rect.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_NavHighlight), rounding, 0, 1.0f);
+    }
+}
+
+void ImGui::RenderMouseCursor(ImVec2 base_pos, float base_scale, ImGuiMouseCursor mouse_cursor, ImU32 col_fill, ImU32 col_border, ImU32 col_shadow)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(mouse_cursor > ImGuiMouseCursor_None && mouse_cursor < ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT);
+    ImFontAtlas* font_atlas = g.DrawListSharedData.Font->ContainerAtlas;
+    for (int n = 0; n < g.Viewports.Size; n++)
+    {
+        // We scale cursor with current viewport/monitor, however Windows 10 for its own hardware cursor seems to be using a different scale factor.
+        ImVec2 offset, size, uv[4];
+        if (!font_atlas->GetMouseCursorTexData(mouse_cursor, &offset, &size, &uv[0], &uv[2]))
+            continue;
+        ImGuiViewportP* viewport = g.Viewports[n];
+        const ImVec2 pos = base_pos - offset;
+        const float scale = base_scale * viewport->DpiScale;
+        if (!viewport->GetMainRect().Overlaps(ImRect(pos, pos + ImVec2(size.x + 2, size.y + 2) * scale)))
+            continue;
+        ImDrawList* draw_list = GetForegroundDrawList(viewport);
+        ImTextureID tex_id = font_atlas->TexID;
+        draw_list->PushTextureID(tex_id);
+        draw_list->AddImage(tex_id, pos + ImVec2(1, 0) * scale, pos + (ImVec2(1, 0) + size) * scale, uv[2], uv[3], col_shadow);
+        draw_list->AddImage(tex_id, pos + ImVec2(2, 0) * scale, pos + (ImVec2(2, 0) + size) * scale, uv[2], uv[3], col_shadow);
+        draw_list->AddImage(tex_id, pos,                        pos + size * scale,                  uv[2], uv[3], col_border);
+        draw_list->AddImage(tex_id, pos,                        pos + size * scale,                  uv[0], uv[1], col_fill);
+        draw_list->PopTextureID();
+    }
+}
+
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] MAIN CODE (most of the code! lots of stuff, needs tidying up!)
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// ImGuiWindow is mostly a dumb struct. It merely has a constructor and a few helper methods
+ImGuiWindow::ImGuiWindow(ImGuiContext* context, const char* name) : DrawListInst(NULL)
+{
+    memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this));
+    Name = ImStrdup(name);
+    NameBufLen = (int)strlen(name) + 1;
+    ID = ImHashStr(name);
+    IDStack.push_back(ID);
+    ViewportAllowPlatformMonitorExtend = -1;
+    ViewportPos = ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);
+    MoveId = GetID("#MOVE");
+    TabId = GetID("#TAB");
+    ScrollTarget = ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);
+    ScrollTargetCenterRatio = ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f);
+    AutoFitFramesX = AutoFitFramesY = -1;
+    AutoPosLastDirection = ImGuiDir_None;
+    SetWindowPosAllowFlags = SetWindowSizeAllowFlags = SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags = SetWindowDockAllowFlags = ImGuiCond_Always | ImGuiCond_Once | ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver | ImGuiCond_Appearing;
+    SetWindowPosVal = SetWindowPosPivot = ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);
+    LastFrameActive = -1;
+    LastFrameJustFocused = -1;
+    LastTimeActive = -1.0f;
+    FontWindowScale = FontDpiScale = 1.0f;
+    SettingsOffset = -1;
+    DockOrder = -1;
+    DrawList = &DrawListInst;
+    DrawList->_Data = &context->DrawListSharedData;
+    DrawList->_OwnerName = Name;
+    IM_PLACEMENT_NEW(&WindowClass) ImGuiWindowClass();
+}
+
+ImGuiWindow::~ImGuiWindow()
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(DrawList == &DrawListInst);
+    IM_DELETE(Name);
+    ColumnsStorage.clear_destruct();
+}
+
+ImGuiID ImGuiWindow::GetID(const char* str, const char* str_end)
+{
+    ImGuiID seed = IDStack.back();
+    ImGuiID id = ImHashStr(str, str_end ? (str_end - str) : 0, seed);
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.DebugHookIdInfo == id)
+        ImGui::DebugHookIdInfo(id, ImGuiDataType_String, str, str_end);
+    return id;
+}
+
+ImGuiID ImGuiWindow::GetID(const void* ptr)
+{
+    ImGuiID seed = IDStack.back();
+    ImGuiID id = ImHashData(&ptr, sizeof(void*), seed);
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.DebugHookIdInfo == id)
+        ImGui::DebugHookIdInfo(id, ImGuiDataType_Pointer, ptr, NULL);
+    return id;
+}
+
+ImGuiID ImGuiWindow::GetID(int n)
+{
+    ImGuiID seed = IDStack.back();
+    ImGuiID id = ImHashData(&n, sizeof(n), seed);
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.DebugHookIdInfo == id)
+        ImGui::DebugHookIdInfo(id, ImGuiDataType_S32, (void*)(intptr_t)n, NULL);
+    return id;
+}
+
+// This is only used in rare/specific situations to manufacture an ID out of nowhere.
+ImGuiID ImGuiWindow::GetIDFromRectangle(const ImRect& r_abs)
+{
+    ImGuiID seed = IDStack.back();
+    ImRect r_rel = ImGui::WindowRectAbsToRel(this, r_abs);
+    ImGuiID id = ImHashData(&r_rel, sizeof(r_rel), seed);
+    return id;
+}
+
+static void SetCurrentWindow(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.CurrentWindow = window;
+    g.CurrentTable = window && window->DC.CurrentTableIdx != -1 ? g.Tables.GetByIndex(window->DC.CurrentTableIdx) : NULL;
+    if (window)
+        g.FontSize = g.DrawListSharedData.FontSize = window->CalcFontSize();
+}
+
+void ImGui::GcCompactTransientMiscBuffers()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.ItemFlagsStack.clear();
+    g.GroupStack.clear();
+    TableGcCompactSettings();
+}
+
+// Free up/compact internal window buffers, we can use this when a window becomes unused.
+// Not freed:
+// - ImGuiWindow, ImGuiWindowSettings, Name, StateStorage, ColumnsStorage (may hold useful data)
+// This should have no noticeable visual effect. When the window reappear however, expect new allocation/buffer growth/copy cost.
+void ImGui::GcCompactTransientWindowBuffers(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    window->MemoryCompacted = true;
+    window->MemoryDrawListIdxCapacity = window->DrawList->IdxBuffer.Capacity;
+    window->MemoryDrawListVtxCapacity = window->DrawList->VtxBuffer.Capacity;
+    window->IDStack.clear();
+    window->DrawList->_ClearFreeMemory();
+    window->DC.ChildWindows.clear();
+    window->DC.ItemWidthStack.clear();
+    window->DC.TextWrapPosStack.clear();
+}
+
+void ImGui::GcAwakeTransientWindowBuffers(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    // We stored capacity of the ImDrawList buffer to reduce growth-caused allocation/copy when awakening.
+    // The other buffers tends to amortize much faster.
+    window->MemoryCompacted = false;
+    window->DrawList->IdxBuffer.reserve(window->MemoryDrawListIdxCapacity);
+    window->DrawList->VtxBuffer.reserve(window->MemoryDrawListVtxCapacity);
+    window->MemoryDrawListIdxCapacity = window->MemoryDrawListVtxCapacity = 0;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetActiveID(ImGuiID id, ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    // While most behaved code would make an effort to not steal active id during window move/drag operations,
+    // we at least need to be resilient to it. Cancelling the move is rather aggressive and users of 'master' branch
+    // may prefer the weird ill-defined half working situation ('docking' did assert), so may need to rework that.
+    if (g.MovingWindow != NULL && g.ActiveId == g.MovingWindow->MoveId)
+    {
+        IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_ACTIVEID("SetActiveID() cancel MovingWindow\n");
+        g.MovingWindow = NULL;
+    }
+
+    // Set active id
+    g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated = (g.ActiveId != id);
+    if (g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
+    {
+        IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_ACTIVEID("SetActiveID() old:0x%08X (window \"%s\") -> new:0x%08X (window \"%s\")\n", g.ActiveId, g.ActiveIdWindow ? g.ActiveIdWindow->Name : "", id, window ? window->Name : "");
+        g.ActiveIdTimer = 0.0f;
+        g.ActiveIdHasBeenPressedBefore = false;
+        g.ActiveIdHasBeenEditedBefore = false;
+        g.ActiveIdMouseButton = -1;
+        if (id != 0)
+        {
+            g.LastActiveId = id;
+            g.LastActiveIdTimer = 0.0f;
+        }
+    }
+    g.ActiveId = id;
+    g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = false;
+    g.ActiveIdNoClearOnFocusLoss = false;
+    g.ActiveIdWindow = window;
+    g.ActiveIdHasBeenEditedThisFrame = false;
+    if (id)
+    {
+        g.ActiveIdIsAlive = id;
+        g.ActiveIdSource = (g.NavActivateId == id || g.NavActivateInputId == id || g.NavJustMovedToId == id) ? (ImGuiInputSource)ImGuiInputSource_Nav : ImGuiInputSource_Mouse;
+    }
+
+    // Clear declaration of inputs claimed by the widget
+    // (Please note that this is WIP and not all keys/inputs are thoroughly declared by all widgets yet)
+    g.ActiveIdUsingMouseWheel = false;
+    g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask = 0x00;
+    g.ActiveIdUsingKeyInputMask.ClearAllBits();
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
+    g.ActiveIdUsingNavInputMask = 0x00;
+#endif
+}
+
+void ImGui::ClearActiveID()
+{
+    SetActiveID(0, NULL); // g.ActiveId = 0;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetHoveredID(ImGuiID id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.HoveredId = id;
+    g.HoveredIdAllowOverlap = false;
+    g.HoveredIdUsingMouseWheel = false;
+    if (id != 0 && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != id)
+        g.HoveredIdTimer = g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer = 0.0f;
+}
+
+ImGuiID ImGui::GetHoveredID()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.HoveredId ? g.HoveredId : g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame;
+}
+
+// This is called by ItemAdd().
+// Code not using ItemAdd() may need to call this manually otherwise ActiveId will be cleared. In IMGUI_VERSION_NUM < 18717 this was called by GetID().
+void ImGui::KeepAliveID(ImGuiID id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.ActiveId == id)
+        g.ActiveIdIsAlive = id;
+    if (g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame == id)
+        g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive = true;
+}
+
+void ImGui::MarkItemEdited(ImGuiID id)
+{
+    // This marking is solely to be able to provide info for IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit().
+    // ActiveId might have been released by the time we call this (as in the typical press/release button behavior) but still need need to fill the data.
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.ActiveId == id || g.ActiveId == 0 || g.DragDropActive);
+    IM_UNUSED(id); // Avoid unused variable warnings when asserts are compiled out.
+    //IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindow->DC.LastItemId == id);
+    g.ActiveIdHasBeenEditedThisFrame = true;
+    g.ActiveIdHasBeenEditedBefore = true;
+    g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Edited;
+}
+
+static inline bool IsWindowContentHoverable(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiHoveredFlags flags)
+{
+    // An active popup disable hovering on other windows (apart from its own children)
+    // FIXME-OPT: This could be cached/stored within the window.
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.NavWindow)
+        if (ImGuiWindow* focused_root_window = g.NavWindow->RootWindowDockTree)
+            if (focused_root_window->WasActive && focused_root_window != window->RootWindowDockTree)
+            {
+                // For the purpose of those flags we differentiate "standard popup" from "modal popup"
+                // NB: The order of those two tests is important because Modal windows are also Popups.
+                if (focused_root_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)
+                    return false;
+                if ((focused_root_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !(flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup))
+                    return false;
+            }
+
+    // Filter by viewport
+    if (window->Viewport != g.MouseViewport)
+        if (g.MovingWindow == NULL || window->RootWindowDockTree != g.MovingWindow->RootWindowDockTree)
+            return false;
+
+    return true;
+}
+
+// This is roughly matching the behavior of internal-facing ItemHoverable()
+// - we allow hovering to be true when ActiveId==window->MoveID, so that clicking on non-interactive items such as a Text() item still returns true with IsItemHovered()
+// - this should work even for non-interactive items that have no ID, so we cannot use LastItemId
+bool ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (g.NavDisableMouseHover && !g.NavDisableHighlight && !(flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoNavOverride))
+    {
+        if ((g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled) && !(flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenDisabled))
+            return false;
+        if (!IsItemFocused())
+            return false;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Test for bounding box overlap, as updated as ItemAdd()
+        ImGuiItemStatusFlags status_flags = g.LastItemData.StatusFlags;
+        if (!(status_flags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect))
+            return false;
+        IM_ASSERT((flags & (ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow | ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows | ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoPopupHierarchy | ImGuiHoveredFlags_DockHierarchy)) == 0);   // Flags not supported by this function
+
+        // Test if we are hovering the right window (our window could be behind another window)
+        // [2021/03/02] Reworked / reverted the revert, finally. Note we want e.g. BeginGroup/ItemAdd/EndGroup to work as well. (#3851)
+        // [2017/10/16] Reverted commit 344d48be3 and testing RootWindow instead. I believe it is correct to NOT test for RootWindow but this leaves us unable
+        // to use IsItemHovered() after EndChild() itself. Until a solution is found I believe reverting to the test from 2017/09/27 is safe since this was
+        // the test that has been running for a long while.
+        if (g.HoveredWindow != window && (status_flags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredWindow) == 0)
+            if ((flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlapped) == 0)
+                return false;
+
+        // Test if another item is active (e.g. being dragged)
+        if ((flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem) == 0)
+            if (g.ActiveId != 0 && g.ActiveId != g.LastItemData.ID && !g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap)
+                if (g.ActiveId != window->MoveId && g.ActiveId != window->TabId)
+                    return false;
+
+        // Test if interactions on this window are blocked by an active popup or modal.
+        // The ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup flag will be tested here.
+        if (!IsWindowContentHoverable(window, flags))
+            return false;
+
+        // Test if the item is disabled
+        if ((g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled) && !(flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenDisabled))
+            return false;
+
+        // Special handling for calling after Begin() which represent the title bar or tab.
+        // When the window is skipped/collapsed (SkipItems==true) that last item (always ->MoveId submitted by Begin)
+        // will never be overwritten so we need to detect the case.
+        if (g.LastItemData.ID == window->MoveId && window->WriteAccessed)
+            return false;
+    }
+
+    return true;
+}
+
+// Internal facing ItemHoverable() used when submitting widgets. Differs slightly from IsItemHovered().
+bool ImGui::ItemHoverable(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.HoveredId != 0 && g.HoveredId != id && !g.HoveredIdAllowOverlap)
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (g.HoveredWindow != window)
+        return false;
+    if (g.ActiveId != 0 && g.ActiveId != id && !g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap)
+        return false;
+    if (!IsMouseHoveringRect(bb.Min, bb.Max))
+        return false;
+    if (!IsWindowContentHoverable(window, ImGuiHoveredFlags_None))
+    {
+        g.HoveredIdDisabled = true;
+        return false;
+    }
+
+    // We exceptionally allow this function to be called with id==0 to allow using it for easy high-level
+    // hover test in widgets code. We could also decide to split this function is two.
+    if (id != 0)
+        SetHoveredID(id);
+
+    // When disabled we'll return false but still set HoveredId
+    ImGuiItemFlags item_flags = (g.LastItemData.ID == id ? g.LastItemData.InFlags : g.CurrentItemFlags);
+    if (item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled)
+    {
+        // Release active id if turning disabled
+        if (g.ActiveId == id)
+            ClearActiveID();
+        g.HoveredIdDisabled = true;
+        return false;
+    }
+
+    if (id != 0)
+    {
+        // [DEBUG] Item Picker tool!
+        // We perform the check here because SetHoveredID() is not frequently called (1~ time a frame), making
+        // the cost of this tool near-zero. We can get slightly better call-stack and support picking non-hovered
+        // items if we perform the test in ItemAdd(), but that would incur a small runtime cost.
+        // #define IMGUI_DEBUG_TOOL_ITEM_PICKER_EX in imconfig.h if you want this check to also be performed in ItemAdd().
+        if (g.DebugItemPickerActive && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame == id)
+            GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255));
+        if (g.DebugItemPickerBreakId == id)
+            IM_DEBUG_BREAK();
+    }
+
+    if (g.NavDisableMouseHover)
+        return false;
+
+    return true;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsClippedEx(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (!bb.Overlaps(window->ClipRect))
+        if (id == 0 || (id != g.ActiveId && id != g.NavId))
+            if (!g.LogEnabled)
+                return true;
+    return false;
+}
+
+// This is also inlined in ItemAdd()
+// Note: if ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDisplayRect is set, user needs to set window->DC.LastItemDisplayRect!
+void ImGui::SetLastItemData(ImGuiID item_id, ImGuiItemFlags in_flags, ImGuiItemStatusFlags item_flags, const ImRect& item_rect)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.LastItemData.ID = item_id;
+    g.LastItemData.InFlags = in_flags;
+    g.LastItemData.StatusFlags = item_flags;
+    g.LastItemData.Rect = item_rect;
+}
+
+float ImGui::CalcWrapWidthForPos(const ImVec2& pos, float wrap_pos_x)
+{
+    if (wrap_pos_x < 0.0f)
+        return 0.0f;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (wrap_pos_x == 0.0f)
+    {
+        // We could decide to setup a default wrapping max point for auto-resizing windows,
+        // or have auto-wrap (with unspecified wrapping pos) behave as a ContentSize extending function?
+        //if (window->Hidden && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize))
+        //    wrap_pos_x = ImMax(window->WorkRect.Min.x + g.FontSize * 10.0f, window->WorkRect.Max.x);
+        //else
+        wrap_pos_x = window->WorkRect.Max.x;
+    }
+    else if (wrap_pos_x > 0.0f)
+    {
+        wrap_pos_x += window->Pos.x - window->Scroll.x; // wrap_pos_x is provided is window local space
+    }
+
+    return ImMax(wrap_pos_x - pos.x, 1.0f);
+}
+
+// IM_ALLOC() == ImGui::MemAlloc()
+void* ImGui::MemAlloc(size_t size)
+{
+    if (ImGuiContext* ctx = GImGui)
+        ctx->IO.MetricsActiveAllocations++;
+    return (*GImAllocatorAllocFunc)(size, GImAllocatorUserData);
+}
+
+// IM_FREE() == ImGui::MemFree()
+void ImGui::MemFree(void* ptr)
+{
+    if (ptr)
+        if (ImGuiContext* ctx = GImGui)
+            ctx->IO.MetricsActiveAllocations--;
+    return (*GImAllocatorFreeFunc)(ptr, GImAllocatorUserData);
+}
+
+const char* ImGui::GetClipboardText()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.IO.GetClipboardTextFn ? g.IO.GetClipboardTextFn(g.IO.ClipboardUserData) : "";
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetClipboardText(const char* text)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.IO.SetClipboardTextFn)
+        g.IO.SetClipboardTextFn(g.IO.ClipboardUserData, text);
+}
+
+const char* ImGui::GetVersion()
+{
+    return IMGUI_VERSION;
+}
+
+// Internal state access - if you want to share Dear ImGui state between modules (e.g. DLL) or allocate it yourself
+// Note that we still point to some static data and members (such as GFontAtlas), so the state instance you end up using will point to the static data within its module
+ImGuiContext* ImGui::GetCurrentContext()
+{
+    return GImGui;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetCurrentContext(ImGuiContext* ctx)
+{
+#ifdef IMGUI_SET_CURRENT_CONTEXT_FUNC
+    IMGUI_SET_CURRENT_CONTEXT_FUNC(ctx); // For custom thread-based hackery you may want to have control over this.
+#else
+    GImGui = ctx;
+#endif
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetAllocatorFunctions(ImGuiMemAllocFunc alloc_func, ImGuiMemFreeFunc free_func, void* user_data)
+{
+    GImAllocatorAllocFunc = alloc_func;
+    GImAllocatorFreeFunc = free_func;
+    GImAllocatorUserData = user_data;
+}
+
+// This is provided to facilitate copying allocators from one static/DLL boundary to another (e.g. retrieve default allocator of your executable address space)
+void ImGui::GetAllocatorFunctions(ImGuiMemAllocFunc* p_alloc_func, ImGuiMemFreeFunc* p_free_func, void** p_user_data)
+{
+    *p_alloc_func = GImAllocatorAllocFunc;
+    *p_free_func = GImAllocatorFreeFunc;
+    *p_user_data = GImAllocatorUserData;
+}
+
+ImGuiContext* ImGui::CreateContext(ImFontAtlas* shared_font_atlas)
+{
+    ImGuiContext* prev_ctx = GetCurrentContext();
+    ImGuiContext* ctx = IM_NEW(ImGuiContext)(shared_font_atlas);
+    SetCurrentContext(ctx);
+    Initialize();
+    if (prev_ctx != NULL)
+        SetCurrentContext(prev_ctx); // Restore previous context if any, else keep new one.
+    return ctx;
+}
+
+void ImGui::DestroyContext(ImGuiContext* ctx)
+{
+    ImGuiContext* prev_ctx = GetCurrentContext();
+    if (ctx == NULL) //-V1051
+        ctx = prev_ctx;
+    SetCurrentContext(ctx);
+    Shutdown();
+    SetCurrentContext((prev_ctx != ctx) ? prev_ctx : NULL);
+    IM_DELETE(ctx);
+}
+
+// No specific ordering/dependency support, will see as needed
+ImGuiID ImGui::AddContextHook(ImGuiContext* ctx, const ImGuiContextHook* hook)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+    IM_ASSERT(hook->Callback != NULL && hook->HookId == 0 && hook->Type != ImGuiContextHookType_PendingRemoval_);
+    g.Hooks.push_back(*hook);
+    g.Hooks.back().HookId = ++g.HookIdNext;
+    return g.HookIdNext;
+}
+
+// Deferred removal, avoiding issue with changing vector while iterating it
+void ImGui::RemoveContextHook(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiID hook_id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+    IM_ASSERT(hook_id != 0);
+    for (int n = 0; n < g.Hooks.Size; n++)
+        if (g.Hooks[n].HookId == hook_id)
+            g.Hooks[n].Type = ImGuiContextHookType_PendingRemoval_;
+}
+
+// Call context hooks (used by e.g. test engine)
+// We assume a small number of hooks so all stored in same array
+void ImGui::CallContextHooks(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiContextHookType hook_type)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+    for (int n = 0; n < g.Hooks.Size; n++)
+        if (g.Hooks[n].Type == hook_type)
+            g.Hooks[n].Callback(&g, &g.Hooks[n]);
+}
+
+ImGuiIO& ImGui::GetIO()
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(GImGui != NULL && "No current context. Did you call ImGui::CreateContext() and ImGui::SetCurrentContext() ?");
+    return GImGui->IO;
+}
+
+ImGuiPlatformIO& ImGui::GetPlatformIO()
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(GImGui != NULL && "No current context. Did you call ImGui::CreateContext() or ImGui::SetCurrentContext()?");
+    return GImGui->PlatformIO;
+}
+
+// Pass this to your backend rendering function! Valid after Render() and until the next call to NewFrame()
+ImDrawData* ImGui::GetDrawData()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiViewportP* viewport = g.Viewports[0];
+    return viewport->DrawDataP.Valid ? &viewport->DrawDataP : NULL;
+}
+
+double ImGui::GetTime()
+{
+    return GImGui->Time;
+}
+
+int ImGui::GetFrameCount()
+{
+    return GImGui->FrameCount;
+}
+
+static ImDrawList* GetViewportDrawList(ImGuiViewportP* viewport, size_t drawlist_no, const char* drawlist_name)
+{
+    // Create the draw list on demand, because they are not frequently used for all viewports
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(drawlist_no < IM_ARRAYSIZE(viewport->DrawLists));
+    ImDrawList* draw_list = viewport->DrawLists[drawlist_no];
+    if (draw_list == NULL)
+    {
+        draw_list = IM_NEW(ImDrawList)(&g.DrawListSharedData);
+        draw_list->_OwnerName = drawlist_name;
+        viewport->DrawLists[drawlist_no] = draw_list;
+    }
+
+    // Our ImDrawList system requires that there is always a command
+    if (viewport->DrawListsLastFrame[drawlist_no] != g.FrameCount)
+    {
+        draw_list->_ResetForNewFrame();
+        draw_list->PushTextureID(g.IO.Fonts->TexID);
+        draw_list->PushClipRect(viewport->Pos, viewport->Pos + viewport->Size, false);
+        viewport->DrawListsLastFrame[drawlist_no] = g.FrameCount;
+    }
+    return draw_list;
+}
+
+ImDrawList* ImGui::GetBackgroundDrawList(ImGuiViewport* viewport)
+{
+    return GetViewportDrawList((ImGuiViewportP*)viewport, 0, "##Background");
+}
+
+ImDrawList* ImGui::GetBackgroundDrawList()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return GetBackgroundDrawList(g.CurrentWindow->Viewport);
+}
+
+ImDrawList* ImGui::GetForegroundDrawList(ImGuiViewport* viewport)
+{
+    return GetViewportDrawList((ImGuiViewportP*)viewport, 1, "##Foreground");
+}
+
+ImDrawList* ImGui::GetForegroundDrawList()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return GetForegroundDrawList(g.CurrentWindow->Viewport);
+}
+
+ImDrawListSharedData* ImGui::GetDrawListSharedData()
+{
+    return &GImGui->DrawListSharedData;
+}
+
+void ImGui::StartMouseMovingWindow(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    // Set ActiveId even if the _NoMove flag is set. Without it, dragging away from a window with _NoMove would activate hover on other windows.
+    // We _also_ call this when clicking in a window empty space when io.ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly is set, but clear g.MovingWindow afterward.
+    // This is because we want ActiveId to be set even when the window is not permitted to move.
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    FocusWindow(window);
+    SetActiveID(window->MoveId, window);
+    g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
+    g.ActiveIdClickOffset = g.IO.MouseClickedPos[0] - window->RootWindowDockTree->Pos;
+    g.ActiveIdNoClearOnFocusLoss = true;
+    SetActiveIdUsingNavAndKeys();
+
+    bool can_move_window = true;
+    if ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove) || (window->RootWindowDockTree->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove))
+        can_move_window = false;
+    if (ImGuiDockNode* node = window->DockNodeAsHost)
+        if (node->VisibleWindow && (node->VisibleWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove))
+            can_move_window = false;
+    if (can_move_window)
+        g.MovingWindow = window;
+}
+
+// We use 'undock_floating_node == false' when dragging from title bar to allow moving groups of floating nodes without undocking them.
+// - undock_floating_node == true: when dragging from a floating node within a hierarchy, always undock the node.
+// - undock_floating_node == false: when dragging from a floating node within a hierarchy, move root window.
+void ImGui::StartMouseMovingWindowOrNode(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiDockNode* node, bool undock_floating_node)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    bool can_undock_node = false;
+    if (node != NULL && node->VisibleWindow && (node->VisibleWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove) == 0)
+    {
+        // Can undock if:
+        // - part of a floating node hierarchy with more than one visible node (if only one is visible, we'll just move the whole hierarchy)
+        // - part of a dockspace node hierarchy (trivia: undocking from a fixed/central node will create a new node and copy windows)
+        ImGuiDockNode* root_node = DockNodeGetRootNode(node);
+        if (root_node->OnlyNodeWithWindows != node || root_node->CentralNode != NULL)   // -V1051 PVS-Studio thinks node should be root_node and is wrong about that.
+            if (undock_floating_node || root_node->IsDockSpace())
+                can_undock_node = true;
+    }
+
+    const bool clicked = IsMouseClicked(0);
+    const bool dragging = IsMouseDragging(0, g.IO.MouseDragThreshold * 1.70f);
+    if (can_undock_node && dragging)
+        DockContextQueueUndockNode(&g, node); // Will lead to DockNodeStartMouseMovingWindow() -> StartMouseMovingWindow() being called next frame
+    else if (!can_undock_node && (clicked || dragging) && g.MovingWindow != window)
+        StartMouseMovingWindow(window);
+}
+
+// Handle mouse moving window
+// Note: moving window with the navigation keys (Square + d-pad / CTRL+TAB + Arrows) are processed in NavUpdateWindowing()
+// FIXME: We don't have strong guarantee that g.MovingWindow stay synched with g.ActiveId == g.MovingWindow->MoveId.
+// This is currently enforced by the fact that BeginDragDropSource() is setting all g.ActiveIdUsingXXXX flags to inhibit navigation inputs,
+// but if we should more thoroughly test cases where g.ActiveId or g.MovingWindow gets changed and not the other.
+void ImGui::UpdateMouseMovingWindowNewFrame()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.MovingWindow != NULL)
+    {
+        // We actually want to move the root window. g.MovingWindow == window we clicked on (could be a child window).
+        // We track it to preserve Focus and so that generally ActiveIdWindow == MovingWindow and ActiveId == MovingWindow->MoveId for consistency.
+        KeepAliveID(g.ActiveId);
+        IM_ASSERT(g.MovingWindow && g.MovingWindow->RootWindowDockTree);
+        ImGuiWindow* moving_window = g.MovingWindow->RootWindowDockTree;
+
+        // When a window stop being submitted while being dragged, it may will its viewport until next Begin()
+        const bool window_disappared = ((!moving_window->WasActive && !moving_window->Active) || moving_window->Viewport == NULL);
+        if (g.IO.MouseDown[0] && IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos) && !window_disappared)
+        {
+            ImVec2 pos = g.IO.MousePos - g.ActiveIdClickOffset;
+            if (moving_window->Pos.x != pos.x || moving_window->Pos.y != pos.y)
+            {
+                SetWindowPos(moving_window, pos, ImGuiCond_Always);
+                if (moving_window->ViewportOwned) // Synchronize viewport immediately because some overlays may relies on clipping rectangle before we Begin() into the window.
+                {
+                    moving_window->Viewport->Pos = pos;
+                    moving_window->Viewport->UpdateWorkRect();
+                }
+            }
+            FocusWindow(g.MovingWindow);
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            if (!window_disappared)
+            {
+                // Try to merge the window back into the main viewport.
+                // This works because MouseViewport should be != MovingWindow->Viewport on release (as per code in UpdateViewports)
+                if (g.ConfigFlagsCurrFrame & ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable)
+                    UpdateTryMergeWindowIntoHostViewport(moving_window, g.MouseViewport);
+
+                // Restore the mouse viewport so that we don't hover the viewport _under_ the moved window during the frame we released the mouse button.
+                if (!IsDragDropPayloadBeingAccepted())
+                    g.MouseViewport = moving_window->Viewport;
+
+                // Clear the NoInput window flag set by the Viewport system
+                moving_window->Viewport->Flags &= ~ImGuiViewportFlags_NoInputs; // FIXME-VIEWPORT: Test engine managed to crash here because Viewport was NULL.
+            }
+
+            g.MovingWindow = NULL;
+            ClearActiveID();
+        }
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // When clicking/dragging from a window that has the _NoMove flag, we still set the ActiveId in order to prevent hovering others.
+        if (g.ActiveIdWindow && g.ActiveIdWindow->MoveId == g.ActiveId)
+        {
+            KeepAliveID(g.ActiveId);
+            if (!g.IO.MouseDown[0])
+                ClearActiveID();
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+// Initiate moving window when clicking on empty space or title bar.
+// Handle left-click and right-click focus.
+void ImGui::UpdateMouseMovingWindowEndFrame()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.ActiveId != 0 || g.HoveredId != 0)
+        return;
+
+    // Unless we just made a window/popup appear
+    if (g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow->Appearing)
+        return;
+
+    // Click on empty space to focus window and start moving
+    // (after we're done with all our widgets, so e.g. clicking on docking tab-bar which have set HoveredId already and not get us here!)
+    if (g.IO.MouseClicked[0])
+    {
+        // Handle the edge case of a popup being closed while clicking in its empty space.
+        // If we try to focus it, FocusWindow() > ClosePopupsOverWindow() will accidentally close any parent popups because they are not linked together any more.
+        ImGuiWindow* root_window = g.HoveredWindow ? g.HoveredWindow->RootWindow : NULL;
+        const bool is_closed_popup = root_window && (root_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !IsPopupOpen(root_window->PopupId, ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupLevel);
+
+        if (root_window != NULL && !is_closed_popup)
+        {
+            StartMouseMovingWindow(g.HoveredWindow); //-V595
+
+            // Cancel moving if clicked outside of title bar
+            if (g.IO.ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly)
+                if (!(root_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) || root_window->DockIsActive)
+                    if (!root_window->TitleBarRect().Contains(g.IO.MouseClickedPos[0]))
+                        g.MovingWindow = NULL;
+
+            // Cancel moving if clicked over an item which was disabled or inhibited by popups (note that we know HoveredId == 0 already)
+            if (g.HoveredIdDisabled)
+                g.MovingWindow = NULL;
+        }
+        else if (root_window == NULL && g.NavWindow != NULL && GetTopMostPopupModal() == NULL)
+        {
+            // Clicking on void disable focus
+            FocusWindow(NULL);
+        }
+    }
+
+    // With right mouse button we close popups without changing focus based on where the mouse is aimed
+    // Instead, focus will be restored to the window under the bottom-most closed popup.
+    // (The left mouse button path calls FocusWindow on the hovered window, which will lead NewFrame->ClosePopupsOverWindow to trigger)
+    if (g.IO.MouseClicked[1])
+    {
+        // Find the top-most window between HoveredWindow and the top-most Modal Window.
+        // This is where we can trim the popup stack.
+        ImGuiWindow* modal = GetTopMostPopupModal();
+        bool hovered_window_above_modal = g.HoveredWindow && (modal == NULL || IsWindowAbove(g.HoveredWindow, modal));
+        ClosePopupsOverWindow(hovered_window_above_modal ? g.HoveredWindow : modal, true);
+    }
+}
+
+// This is called during NewFrame()->UpdateViewportsNewFrame() only.
+// Need to keep in sync with SetWindowPos()
+static void TranslateWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& delta)
+{
+    window->Pos += delta;
+    window->ClipRect.Translate(delta);
+    window->OuterRectClipped.Translate(delta);
+    window->InnerRect.Translate(delta);
+    window->DC.CursorPos += delta;
+    window->DC.CursorStartPos += delta;
+    window->DC.CursorMaxPos += delta;
+    window->DC.IdealMaxPos += delta;
+}
+
+static void ScaleWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, float scale)
+{
+    ImVec2 origin = window->Viewport->Pos;
+    window->Pos = ImFloor((window->Pos - origin) * scale + origin);
+    window->Size = ImFloor(window->Size * scale);
+    window->SizeFull = ImFloor(window->SizeFull * scale);
+    window->ContentSize = ImFloor(window->ContentSize * scale);
+}
+
+static bool IsWindowActiveAndVisible(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    return (window->Active) && (!window->Hidden);
+}
+
+static void ImGui::UpdateKeyboardInputs()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiIO& io = g.IO;
+
+    // Import legacy keys or verify they are not used
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
+    if (io.BackendUsingLegacyKeyArrays == 0)
+    {
+        // Backend used new io.AddKeyEvent() API: Good! Verify that old arrays are never written to externally.
+        for (int n = 0; n < ImGuiKey_LegacyNativeKey_END; n++)
+            IM_ASSERT((io.KeysDown[n] == false || IsKeyDown(n)) && "Backend needs to either only use io.AddKeyEvent(), either only fill legacy io.KeysDown[] + io.KeyMap[]. Not both!");
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        if (g.FrameCount == 0)
+            for (int n = ImGuiKey_LegacyNativeKey_BEGIN; n < ImGuiKey_LegacyNativeKey_END; n++)
+                IM_ASSERT(g.IO.KeyMap[n] == -1 && "Backend is not allowed to write to io.KeyMap[0..511]!");
+
+        // Build reverse KeyMap (Named -> Legacy)
+        for (int n = ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN; n < ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END; n++)
+            if (io.KeyMap[n] != -1)
+            {
+                IM_ASSERT(IsLegacyKey((ImGuiKey)io.KeyMap[n]));
+                io.KeyMap[io.KeyMap[n]] = n;
+            }
+
+        // Import legacy keys into new ones
+        for (int n = ImGuiKey_LegacyNativeKey_BEGIN; n < ImGuiKey_LegacyNativeKey_END; n++)
+            if (io.KeysDown[n] || io.BackendUsingLegacyKeyArrays == 1)
+            {
+                const ImGuiKey key = (ImGuiKey)(io.KeyMap[n] != -1 ? io.KeyMap[n] : n);
+                IM_ASSERT(io.KeyMap[n] == -1 || IsNamedKey(key));
+                io.KeysData[key].Down = io.KeysDown[n];
+                if (key != n)
+                    io.KeysDown[key] = io.KeysDown[n]; // Allow legacy code using io.KeysDown[GetKeyIndex()] with old backends
+                io.BackendUsingLegacyKeyArrays = 1;
+            }
+        if (io.BackendUsingLegacyKeyArrays == 1)
+        {
+            io.KeysData[ImGuiKey_ModCtrl].Down = io.KeyCtrl;
+            io.KeysData[ImGuiKey_ModShift].Down = io.KeyShift;
+            io.KeysData[ImGuiKey_ModAlt].Down = io.KeyAlt;
+            io.KeysData[ImGuiKey_ModSuper].Down = io.KeySuper;
+        }
+    }
+
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
+    const bool nav_gamepad_active = (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad) != 0 && (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad) != 0;
+    if (io.BackendUsingLegacyNavInputArray && nav_gamepad_active)
+    {
+        #define MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY1(_KEY, _NAV1)           do { io.KeysData[_KEY].Down = (io.NavInputs[_NAV1] > 0.0f); io.KeysData[_KEY].AnalogValue = io.NavInputs[_NAV1]; } while (0)
+        #define MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY2(_KEY, _NAV1, _NAV2)    do { io.KeysData[_KEY].Down = (io.NavInputs[_NAV1] > 0.0f) || (io.NavInputs[_NAV2] > 0.0f); io.KeysData[_KEY].AnalogValue = ImMax(io.NavInputs[_NAV1], io.NavInputs[_NAV2]); } while (0)
+        MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY1(ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceDown, ImGuiNavInput_Activate);
+        MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY1(ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceRight, ImGuiNavInput_Cancel);
+        MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY1(ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceLeft, ImGuiNavInput_Menu);
+        MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY1(ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceUp, ImGuiNavInput_Input);
+        MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY1(ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadLeft, ImGuiNavInput_DpadLeft);
+        MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY1(ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadRight, ImGuiNavInput_DpadRight);
+        MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY1(ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadUp, ImGuiNavInput_DpadUp);
+        MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY1(ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadDown, ImGuiNavInput_DpadDown);
+        MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY2(ImGuiKey_GamepadL1, ImGuiNavInput_FocusPrev, ImGuiNavInput_TweakSlow);
+        MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY2(ImGuiKey_GamepadR1, ImGuiNavInput_FocusNext, ImGuiNavInput_TweakFast);
+        MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY1(ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickLeft, ImGuiNavInput_LStickLeft);
+        MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY1(ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickRight, ImGuiNavInput_LStickRight);
+        MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY1(ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickUp, ImGuiNavInput_LStickUp);
+        MAP_LEGACY_NAV_INPUT_TO_KEY1(ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickDown, ImGuiNavInput_LStickDown);
+        #undef NAV_MAP_KEY
+    }
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
+    // Synchronize io.KeyMods with individual modifiers io.KeyXXX bools
+    io.KeyMods = GetMergedModFlags();
+
+    // Clear gamepad data if disabled
+    if ((io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad) == 0)
+        for (int i = ImGuiKey_Gamepad_BEGIN; i < ImGuiKey_Gamepad_END; i++)
+        {
+            io.KeysData[i - ImGuiKey_KeysData_OFFSET].Down = false;
+            io.KeysData[i - ImGuiKey_KeysData_OFFSET].AnalogValue = 0.0f;
+        }
+
+    // Update keys
+    for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(io.KeysData); i++)
+    {
+        ImGuiKeyData* key_data = &io.KeysData[i];
+        key_data->DownDurationPrev = key_data->DownDuration;
+        key_data->DownDuration = key_data->Down ? (key_data->DownDuration < 0.0f ? 0.0f : key_data->DownDuration + io.DeltaTime) : -1.0f;
+    }
+}
+
+static void ImGui::UpdateMouseInputs()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiIO& io = g.IO;
+
+    // Round mouse position to avoid spreading non-rounded position (e.g. UpdateManualResize doesn't support them well)
+    if (IsMousePosValid(&io.MousePos))
+        io.MousePos = g.MouseLastValidPos = ImFloorSigned(io.MousePos);
+
+    // If mouse just appeared or disappeared (usually denoted by -FLT_MAX components) we cancel out movement in MouseDelta
+    if (IsMousePosValid(&io.MousePos) && IsMousePosValid(&io.MousePosPrev))
+        io.MouseDelta = io.MousePos - io.MousePosPrev;
+    else
+        io.MouseDelta = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+
+    // If mouse moved we re-enable mouse hovering in case it was disabled by gamepad/keyboard. In theory should use a >0.0f threshold but would need to reset in everywhere we set this to true.
+    if (io.MouseDelta.x != 0.0f || io.MouseDelta.y != 0.0f)
+        g.NavDisableMouseHover = false;
+
+    io.MousePosPrev = io.MousePos;
+    for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(io.MouseDown); i++)
+    {
+        io.MouseClicked[i] = io.MouseDown[i] && io.MouseDownDuration[i] < 0.0f;
+        io.MouseClickedCount[i] = 0; // Will be filled below
+        io.MouseReleased[i] = !io.MouseDown[i] && io.MouseDownDuration[i] >= 0.0f;
+        io.MouseDownDurationPrev[i] = io.MouseDownDuration[i];
+        io.MouseDownDuration[i] = io.MouseDown[i] ? (io.MouseDownDuration[i] < 0.0f ? 0.0f : io.MouseDownDuration[i] + io.DeltaTime) : -1.0f;
+        if (io.MouseClicked[i])
+        {
+            bool is_repeated_click = false;
+            if ((float)(g.Time - io.MouseClickedTime[i]) < io.MouseDoubleClickTime)
+            {
+                ImVec2 delta_from_click_pos = IsMousePosValid(&io.MousePos) ? (io.MousePos - io.MouseClickedPos[i]) : ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+                if (ImLengthSqr(delta_from_click_pos) < io.MouseDoubleClickMaxDist * io.MouseDoubleClickMaxDist)
+                    is_repeated_click = true;
+            }
+            if (is_repeated_click)
+                io.MouseClickedLastCount[i]++;
+            else
+                io.MouseClickedLastCount[i] = 1;
+            io.MouseClickedTime[i] = g.Time;
+            io.MouseClickedPos[i] = io.MousePos;
+            io.MouseClickedCount[i] = io.MouseClickedLastCount[i];
+            io.MouseDragMaxDistanceAbs[i] = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+            io.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[i] = 0.0f;
+        }
+        else if (io.MouseDown[i])
+        {
+            // Maintain the maximum distance we reaching from the initial click position, which is used with dragging threshold
+            ImVec2 delta_from_click_pos = IsMousePosValid(&io.MousePos) ? (io.MousePos - io.MouseClickedPos[i]) : ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+            io.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[i] = ImMax(io.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[i], ImLengthSqr(delta_from_click_pos));
+            io.MouseDragMaxDistanceAbs[i].x = ImMax(io.MouseDragMaxDistanceAbs[i].x, delta_from_click_pos.x < 0.0f ? -delta_from_click_pos.x : delta_from_click_pos.x);
+            io.MouseDragMaxDistanceAbs[i].y = ImMax(io.MouseDragMaxDistanceAbs[i].y, delta_from_click_pos.y < 0.0f ? -delta_from_click_pos.y : delta_from_click_pos.y);
+        }
+
+        // We provide io.MouseDoubleClicked[] as a legacy service
+        io.MouseDoubleClicked[i] = (io.MouseClickedCount[i] == 2);
+
+        // Clicking any mouse button reactivate mouse hovering which may have been deactivated by gamepad/keyboard navigation
+        if (io.MouseClicked[i])
+            g.NavDisableMouseHover = false;
+    }
+}
+
+static void StartLockWheelingWindow(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.WheelingWindow == window)
+        return;
+    g.WheelingWindow = window;
+    g.WheelingWindowRefMousePos = g.IO.MousePos;
+    g.WheelingWindowTimer = WINDOWS_MOUSE_WHEEL_SCROLL_LOCK_TIMER;
+}
+
+void ImGui::UpdateMouseWheel()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    // Reset the locked window if we move the mouse or after the timer elapses
+    if (g.WheelingWindow != NULL)
+    {
+        g.WheelingWindowTimer -= g.IO.DeltaTime;
+        if (IsMousePosValid() && ImLengthSqr(g.IO.MousePos - g.WheelingWindowRefMousePos) > g.IO.MouseDragThreshold * g.IO.MouseDragThreshold)
+            g.WheelingWindowTimer = 0.0f;
+        if (g.WheelingWindowTimer <= 0.0f)
+        {
+            g.WheelingWindow = NULL;
+            g.WheelingWindowTimer = 0.0f;
+        }
+    }
+
+    float wheel_x = g.IO.MouseWheelH;
+    float wheel_y = g.IO.MouseWheel;
+    if (wheel_x == 0.0f && wheel_y == 0.0f)
+        return;
+
+    if ((g.ActiveId != 0 && g.ActiveIdUsingMouseWheel) || (g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != 0 && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrameUsingMouseWheel))
+        return;
+
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.WheelingWindow ? g.WheelingWindow : g.HoveredWindow;
+    if (!window || window->Collapsed)
+        return;
+
+    // Zoom / Scale window
+    // FIXME-OBSOLETE: This is an old feature, it still works but pretty much nobody is using it and may be best redesigned.
+    if (wheel_y != 0.0f && g.IO.KeyCtrl && g.IO.FontAllowUserScaling)
+    {
+        StartLockWheelingWindow(window);
+        const float new_font_scale = ImClamp(window->FontWindowScale + g.IO.MouseWheel * 0.10f, 0.50f, 2.50f);
+        const float scale = new_font_scale / window->FontWindowScale;
+        window->FontWindowScale = new_font_scale;
+        if (window == window->RootWindow)
+        {
+            const ImVec2 offset = window->Size * (1.0f - scale) * (g.IO.MousePos - window->Pos) / window->Size;
+            SetWindowPos(window, window->Pos + offset, 0);
+            window->Size = ImFloor(window->Size * scale);
+            window->SizeFull = ImFloor(window->SizeFull * scale);
+        }
+        return;
+    }
+
+    // Mouse wheel scrolling
+    // If a child window has the ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse flag, we give a chance to scroll its parent
+    if (g.IO.KeyCtrl)
+        return;
+
+    // As a standard behavior holding SHIFT while using Vertical Mouse Wheel triggers Horizontal scroll instead
+    // (we avoid doing it on OSX as it the OS input layer handles this already)
+    const bool swap_axis = g.IO.KeyShift && !g.IO.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors;
+    if (swap_axis)
+    {
+        wheel_x = wheel_y;
+        wheel_y = 0.0f;
+    }
+
+    // Vertical Mouse Wheel scrolling
+    if (wheel_y != 0.0f)
+    {
+        StartLockWheelingWindow(window);
+        while ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && ((window->ScrollMax.y == 0.0f) || ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse) && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs))))
+            window = window->ParentWindow;
+        if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse) && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs))
+        {
+            float max_step = window->InnerRect.GetHeight() * 0.67f;
+            float scroll_step = ImFloor(ImMin(5 * window->CalcFontSize(), max_step));
+            SetScrollY(window, window->Scroll.y - wheel_y * scroll_step);
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Horizontal Mouse Wheel scrolling, or Vertical Mouse Wheel w/ Shift held
+    if (wheel_x != 0.0f)
+    {
+        StartLockWheelingWindow(window);
+        while ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && ((window->ScrollMax.x == 0.0f) || ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse) && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs))))
+            window = window->ParentWindow;
+        if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse) && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs))
+        {
+            float max_step = window->InnerRect.GetWidth() * 0.67f;
+            float scroll_step = ImFloor(ImMin(2 * window->CalcFontSize(), max_step));
+            SetScrollX(window, window->Scroll.x - wheel_x * scroll_step);
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+// The reason this is exposed in imgui_internal.h is: on touch-based system that don't have hovering, we want to dispatch inputs to the right target (imgui vs imgui+app)
+void ImGui::UpdateHoveredWindowAndCaptureFlags()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiIO& io = g.IO;
+    g.WindowsHoverPadding = ImMax(g.Style.TouchExtraPadding, ImVec2(WINDOWS_HOVER_PADDING, WINDOWS_HOVER_PADDING));
+
+    // Find the window hovered by mouse:
+    // - Child windows can extend beyond the limit of their parent so we need to derive HoveredRootWindow from HoveredWindow.
+    // - When moving a window we can skip the search, which also conveniently bypasses the fact that window->WindowRectClipped is lagging as this point of the frame.
+    // - We also support the moved window toggling the NoInputs flag after moving has started in order to be able to detect windows below it, which is useful for e.g. docking mechanisms.
+    bool clear_hovered_windows = false;
+    FindHoveredWindow();
+    IM_ASSERT(g.HoveredWindow == NULL || g.HoveredWindow == g.MovingWindow || g.HoveredWindow->Viewport == g.MouseViewport);
+
+    // Modal windows prevents mouse from hovering behind them.
+    ImGuiWindow* modal_window = GetTopMostPopupModal();
+    if (modal_window && g.HoveredWindow && !IsWindowWithinBeginStackOf(g.HoveredWindow->RootWindow, modal_window)) // FIXME-MERGE: RootWindowDockTree ?
+        clear_hovered_windows = true;
+
+    // Disabled mouse?
+    if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouse)
+        clear_hovered_windows = true;
+
+    // We track click ownership. When clicked outside of a window the click is owned by the application and
+    // won't report hovering nor request capture even while dragging over our windows afterward.
+    const bool has_open_popup = (g.OpenPopupStack.Size > 0);
+    const bool has_open_modal = (modal_window != NULL);
+    int mouse_earliest_down = -1;
+    bool mouse_any_down = false;
+    for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(io.MouseDown); i++)
+    {
+        if (io.MouseClicked[i])
+        {
+            io.MouseDownOwned[i] = (g.HoveredWindow != NULL) || has_open_popup;
+            io.MouseDownOwnedUnlessPopupClose[i] = (g.HoveredWindow != NULL) || has_open_modal;
+        }
+        mouse_any_down |= io.MouseDown[i];
+        if (io.MouseDown[i])
+            if (mouse_earliest_down == -1 || io.MouseClickedTime[i] < io.MouseClickedTime[mouse_earliest_down])
+                mouse_earliest_down = i;
+    }
+    const bool mouse_avail = (mouse_earliest_down == -1) || io.MouseDownOwned[mouse_earliest_down];
+    const bool mouse_avail_unless_popup_close = (mouse_earliest_down == -1) || io.MouseDownOwnedUnlessPopupClose[mouse_earliest_down];
+
+    // If mouse was first clicked outside of ImGui bounds we also cancel out hovering.
+    // FIXME: For patterns of drag and drop across OS windows, we may need to rework/remove this test (first committed 311c0ca9 on 2015/02)
+    const bool mouse_dragging_extern_payload = g.DragDropActive && (g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceExtern) != 0;
+    if (!mouse_avail && !mouse_dragging_extern_payload)
+        clear_hovered_windows = true;
+
+    if (clear_hovered_windows)
+        g.HoveredWindow = g.HoveredWindowUnderMovingWindow = NULL;
+
+    // Update io.WantCaptureMouse for the user application (true = dispatch mouse info to Dear ImGui only, false = dispatch mouse to Dear ImGui + underlying app)
+    // Update io.WantCaptureMouseAllowPopupClose (experimental) to give a chance for app to react to popup closure with a drag
+    if (g.WantCaptureMouseNextFrame != -1)
+    {
+        io.WantCaptureMouse = io.WantCaptureMouseUnlessPopupClose = (g.WantCaptureMouseNextFrame != 0);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        io.WantCaptureMouse = (mouse_avail && (g.HoveredWindow != NULL || mouse_any_down)) || has_open_popup;
+        io.WantCaptureMouseUnlessPopupClose = (mouse_avail_unless_popup_close && (g.HoveredWindow != NULL || mouse_any_down)) || has_open_modal;
+    }
+
+    // Update io.WantCaptureKeyboard for the user application (true = dispatch keyboard info to Dear ImGui only, false = dispatch keyboard info to Dear ImGui + underlying app)
+    if (g.WantCaptureKeyboardNextFrame != -1)
+        io.WantCaptureKeyboard = (g.WantCaptureKeyboardNextFrame != 0);
+    else
+        io.WantCaptureKeyboard = (g.ActiveId != 0) || (modal_window != NULL);
+    if (io.NavActive && (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard) && !(io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavNoCaptureKeyboard))
+        io.WantCaptureKeyboard = true;
+
+    // Update io.WantTextInput flag, this is to allow systems without a keyboard (e.g. mobile, hand-held) to show a software keyboard if possible
+    io.WantTextInput = (g.WantTextInputNextFrame != -1) ? (g.WantTextInputNextFrame != 0) : false;
+}
+
+// [Internal] Do not use directly (can read io.KeyMods instead)
+ImGuiModFlags ImGui::GetMergedModFlags()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiModFlags key_mods = ImGuiModFlags_None;
+    if (g.IO.KeyCtrl)   { key_mods |= ImGuiModFlags_Ctrl; }
+    if (g.IO.KeyShift)  { key_mods |= ImGuiModFlags_Shift; }
+    if (g.IO.KeyAlt)    { key_mods |= ImGuiModFlags_Alt; }
+    if (g.IO.KeySuper)  { key_mods |= ImGuiModFlags_Super; }
+    return key_mods;
+}
+
+void ImGui::NewFrame()
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(GImGui != NULL && "No current context. Did you call ImGui::CreateContext() and ImGui::SetCurrentContext() ?");
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    // Remove pending delete hooks before frame start.
+    // This deferred removal avoid issues of removal while iterating the hook vector
+    for (int n = g.Hooks.Size - 1; n >= 0; n--)
+        if (g.Hooks[n].Type == ImGuiContextHookType_PendingRemoval_)
+            g.Hooks.erase(&g.Hooks[n]);
+
+    CallContextHooks(&g, ImGuiContextHookType_NewFramePre);
+
+    // Check and assert for various common IO and Configuration mistakes
+    g.ConfigFlagsLastFrame = g.ConfigFlagsCurrFrame;
+    ErrorCheckNewFrameSanityChecks();
+    g.ConfigFlagsCurrFrame = g.IO.ConfigFlags;
+
+    // Load settings on first frame, save settings when modified (after a delay)
+    UpdateSettings();
+
+    g.Time += g.IO.DeltaTime;
+    g.WithinFrameScope = true;
+    g.FrameCount += 1;
+    g.TooltipOverrideCount = 0;
+    g.WindowsActiveCount = 0;
+    g.MenusIdSubmittedThisFrame.resize(0);
+
+    // Calculate frame-rate for the user, as a purely luxurious feature
+    g.FramerateSecPerFrameAccum += g.IO.DeltaTime - g.FramerateSecPerFrame[g.FramerateSecPerFrameIdx];
+    g.FramerateSecPerFrame[g.FramerateSecPerFrameIdx] = g.IO.DeltaTime;
+    g.FramerateSecPerFrameIdx = (g.FramerateSecPerFrameIdx + 1) % IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.FramerateSecPerFrame);
+    g.FramerateSecPerFrameCount = ImMin(g.FramerateSecPerFrameCount + 1, IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.FramerateSecPerFrame));
+    g.IO.Framerate = (g.FramerateSecPerFrameAccum > 0.0f) ? (1.0f / (g.FramerateSecPerFrameAccum / (float)g.FramerateSecPerFrameCount)) : FLT_MAX;
+
+    UpdateViewportsNewFrame();
+
+    // Setup current font and draw list shared data
+    // FIXME-VIEWPORT: the concept of a single ClipRectFullscreen is not ideal!
+    g.IO.Fonts->Locked = true;
+    SetCurrentFont(GetDefaultFont());
+    IM_ASSERT(g.Font->IsLoaded());
+    ImRect virtual_space(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX);
+    for (int n = 0; n < g.Viewports.Size; n++)
+        virtual_space.Add(g.Viewports[n]->GetMainRect());
+    g.DrawListSharedData.ClipRectFullscreen = virtual_space.ToVec4();
+    g.DrawListSharedData.CurveTessellationTol = g.Style.CurveTessellationTol;
+    g.DrawListSharedData.SetCircleTessellationMaxError(g.Style.CircleTessellationMaxError);
+    g.DrawListSharedData.InitialFlags = ImDrawListFlags_None;
+    if (g.Style.AntiAliasedLines)
+        g.DrawListSharedData.InitialFlags |= ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLines;
+    if (g.Style.AntiAliasedLinesUseTex && !(g.Font->ContainerAtlas->Flags & ImFontAtlasFlags_NoBakedLines))
+        g.DrawListSharedData.InitialFlags |= ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLinesUseTex;
+    if (g.Style.AntiAliasedFill)
+        g.DrawListSharedData.InitialFlags |= ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedFill;
+    if (g.IO.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset)
+        g.DrawListSharedData.InitialFlags |= ImDrawListFlags_AllowVtxOffset;
+
+    // Mark rendering data as invalid to prevent user who may have a handle on it to use it.
+    for (int n = 0; n < g.Viewports.Size; n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiViewportP* viewport = g.Viewports[n];
+        viewport->DrawData = NULL;
+        viewport->DrawDataP.Clear();
+    }
+
+    // Drag and drop keep the source ID alive so even if the source disappear our state is consistent
+    if (g.DragDropActive && g.DragDropPayload.SourceId == g.ActiveId)
+        KeepAliveID(g.DragDropPayload.SourceId);
+
+    // Update HoveredId data
+    if (!g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame)
+        g.HoveredIdTimer = 0.0f;
+    if (!g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame || (g.HoveredId && g.ActiveId == g.HoveredId))
+        g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer = 0.0f;
+    if (g.HoveredId)
+        g.HoveredIdTimer += g.IO.DeltaTime;
+    if (g.HoveredId && g.ActiveId != g.HoveredId)
+        g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer += g.IO.DeltaTime;
+    g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame = g.HoveredId;
+    g.HoveredIdPreviousFrameUsingMouseWheel = g.HoveredIdUsingMouseWheel;
+    g.HoveredId = 0;
+    g.HoveredIdAllowOverlap = false;
+    g.HoveredIdUsingMouseWheel = false;
+    g.HoveredIdDisabled = false;
+
+    // Clear ActiveID if the item is not alive anymore.
+    // In 1.87, the common most call to KeepAliveID() was moved from GetID() to ItemAdd().
+    // As a result, custom widget using ButtonBehavior() _without_ ItemAdd() need to call KeepAliveID() themselves.
+    if (g.ActiveId != 0 && g.ActiveIdIsAlive != g.ActiveId && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame == g.ActiveId)
+    {
+        IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_ACTIVEID("NewFrame(): ClearActiveID() because it isn't marked alive anymore!\n");
+        ClearActiveID();
+    }
+
+    // Update ActiveId data (clear reference to active widget if the widget isn't alive anymore)
+    if (g.ActiveId)
+        g.ActiveIdTimer += g.IO.DeltaTime;
+    g.LastActiveIdTimer += g.IO.DeltaTime;
+    g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame = g.ActiveId;
+    g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameWindow = g.ActiveIdWindow;
+    g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameHasBeenEditedBefore = g.ActiveIdHasBeenEditedBefore;
+    g.ActiveIdIsAlive = 0;
+    g.ActiveIdHasBeenEditedThisFrame = false;
+    g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive = false;
+    g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated = false;
+    if (g.TempInputId != 0 && g.ActiveId != g.TempInputId)
+        g.TempInputId = 0;
+    if (g.ActiveId == 0)
+    {
+        g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask = 0x00;
+        g.ActiveIdUsingKeyInputMask.ClearAllBits();
+    }
+
+    // Drag and drop
+    g.DragDropAcceptIdPrev = g.DragDropAcceptIdCurr;
+    g.DragDropAcceptIdCurr = 0;
+    g.DragDropAcceptIdCurrRectSurface = FLT_MAX;
+    g.DragDropWithinSource = false;
+    g.DragDropWithinTarget = false;
+    g.DragDropHoldJustPressedId = 0;
+
+    // Close popups on focus lost (currently wip/opt-in)
+    //if (g.IO.AppFocusLost)
+    //    ClosePopupsExceptModals();
+
+    // Process input queue (trickle as many events as possible)
+    g.InputEventsTrail.resize(0);
+    UpdateInputEvents(g.IO.ConfigInputTrickleEventQueue);
+
+    // Update keyboard input state
+    UpdateKeyboardInputs();
+
+    //IM_ASSERT(g.IO.KeyCtrl == IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_LeftCtrl) || IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_RightCtrl));
+    //IM_ASSERT(g.IO.KeyShift == IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_LeftShift) || IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_RightShift));
+    //IM_ASSERT(g.IO.KeyAlt == IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_LeftAlt) || IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_RightAlt));
+    //IM_ASSERT(g.IO.KeySuper == IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_LeftSuper) || IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_RightSuper));
+
+    // Update gamepad/keyboard navigation
+    NavUpdate();
+
+    // Update mouse input state
+    UpdateMouseInputs();
+
+    // Undocking
+    // (needs to be before UpdateMouseMovingWindowNewFrame so the window is already offset and following the mouse on the detaching frame)
+    DockContextNewFrameUpdateUndocking(&g);
+
+    // Find hovered window
+    // (needs to be before UpdateMouseMovingWindowNewFrame so we fill g.HoveredWindowUnderMovingWindow on the mouse release frame)
+    UpdateHoveredWindowAndCaptureFlags();
+
+    // Handle user moving window with mouse (at the beginning of the frame to avoid input lag or sheering)
+    UpdateMouseMovingWindowNewFrame();
+
+    // Background darkening/whitening
+    if (GetTopMostPopupModal() != NULL || (g.NavWindowingTarget != NULL && g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha > 0.0f))
+        g.DimBgRatio = ImMin(g.DimBgRatio + g.IO.DeltaTime * 6.0f, 1.0f);
+    else
+        g.DimBgRatio = ImMax(g.DimBgRatio - g.IO.DeltaTime * 10.0f, 0.0f);
+
+    g.MouseCursor = ImGuiMouseCursor_Arrow;
+    g.WantCaptureMouseNextFrame = g.WantCaptureKeyboardNextFrame = g.WantTextInputNextFrame = -1;
+
+    // Platform IME data: reset for the frame
+    g.PlatformImeDataPrev = g.PlatformImeData;
+    g.PlatformImeData.WantVisible = false;
+
+    // Mouse wheel scrolling, scale
+    UpdateMouseWheel();
+
+    // Mark all windows as not visible and compact unused memory.
+    IM_ASSERT(g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size <= g.Windows.Size);
+    const float memory_compact_start_time = (g.GcCompactAll || g.IO.ConfigMemoryCompactTimer < 0.0f) ? FLT_MAX : (float)g.Time - g.IO.ConfigMemoryCompactTimer;
+    for (int i = 0; i != g.Windows.Size; i++)
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[i];
+        window->WasActive = window->Active;
+        window->BeginCount = 0;
+        window->Active = false;
+        window->WriteAccessed = false;
+
+        // Garbage collect transient buffers of recently unused windows
+        if (!window->WasActive && !window->MemoryCompacted && window->LastTimeActive < memory_compact_start_time)
+            GcCompactTransientWindowBuffers(window);
+    }
+
+    // Garbage collect transient buffers of recently unused tables
+    for (int i = 0; i < g.TablesLastTimeActive.Size; i++)
+        if (g.TablesLastTimeActive[i] >= 0.0f && g.TablesLastTimeActive[i] < memory_compact_start_time)
+            TableGcCompactTransientBuffers(g.Tables.GetByIndex(i));
+    for (int i = 0; i < g.TablesTempData.Size; i++)
+        if (g.TablesTempData[i].LastTimeActive >= 0.0f && g.TablesTempData[i].LastTimeActive < memory_compact_start_time)
+            TableGcCompactTransientBuffers(&g.TablesTempData[i]);
+    if (g.GcCompactAll)
+        GcCompactTransientMiscBuffers();
+    g.GcCompactAll = false;
+
+    // Closing the focused window restore focus to the first active root window in descending z-order
+    if (g.NavWindow && !g.NavWindow->WasActive)
+        FocusTopMostWindowUnderOne(NULL, NULL);
+
+    // No window should be open at the beginning of the frame.
+    // But in order to allow the user to call NewFrame() multiple times without calling Render(), we are doing an explicit clear.
+    g.CurrentWindowStack.resize(0);
+    g.BeginPopupStack.resize(0);
+    g.ItemFlagsStack.resize(0);
+    g.ItemFlagsStack.push_back(ImGuiItemFlags_None);
+    g.GroupStack.resize(0);
+
+    // Docking
+    DockContextNewFrameUpdateDocking(&g);
+
+    // [DEBUG] Update debug features
+    UpdateDebugToolItemPicker();
+    UpdateDebugToolStackQueries();
+
+    // Create implicit/fallback window - which we will only render it if the user has added something to it.
+    // We don't use "Debug" to avoid colliding with user trying to create a "Debug" window with custom flags.
+    // This fallback is particularly important as it avoid ImGui:: calls from crashing.
+    g.WithinFrameScopeWithImplicitWindow = true;
+    SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(400, 400), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver);
+    Begin("Debug##Default");
+    IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindow->IsFallbackWindow == true);
+
+    CallContextHooks(&g, ImGuiContextHookType_NewFramePost);
+}
+
+void ImGui::Initialize()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(!g.Initialized && !g.SettingsLoaded);
+
+    // Add .ini handle for ImGuiWindow type
+    {
+        ImGuiSettingsHandler ini_handler;
+        ini_handler.TypeName = "Window";
+        ini_handler.TypeHash = ImHashStr("Window");
+        ini_handler.ClearAllFn = WindowSettingsHandler_ClearAll;
+        ini_handler.ReadOpenFn = WindowSettingsHandler_ReadOpen;
+        ini_handler.ReadLineFn = WindowSettingsHandler_ReadLine;
+        ini_handler.ApplyAllFn = WindowSettingsHandler_ApplyAll;
+        ini_handler.WriteAllFn = WindowSettingsHandler_WriteAll;
+        AddSettingsHandler(&ini_handler);
+    }
+
+    // Add .ini handle for ImGuiTable type
+    TableSettingsAddSettingsHandler();
+
+    // Create default viewport
+    ImGuiViewportP* viewport = IM_NEW(ImGuiViewportP)();
+    viewport->ID = IMGUI_VIEWPORT_DEFAULT_ID;
+    viewport->Idx = 0;
+    viewport->PlatformWindowCreated = true;
+    viewport->Flags = ImGuiViewportFlags_OwnedByApp;
+    g.Viewports.push_back(viewport);
+    g.TempBuffer.resize(1024 * 3 + 1, 0);
+    g.PlatformIO.Viewports.push_back(g.Viewports[0]);
+
+#ifdef IMGUI_HAS_DOCK
+    // Initialize Docking
+    DockContextInitialize(&g);
+#endif
+
+    g.Initialized = true;
+}
+
+// This function is merely here to free heap allocations.
+void ImGui::Shutdown()
+{
+    // The fonts atlas can be used prior to calling NewFrame(), so we clear it even if g.Initialized is FALSE (which would happen if we never called NewFrame)
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.IO.Fonts && g.FontAtlasOwnedByContext)
+    {
+        g.IO.Fonts->Locked = false;
+        IM_DELETE(g.IO.Fonts);
+    }
+    g.IO.Fonts = NULL;
+
+    // Cleanup of other data are conditional on actually having initialized Dear ImGui.
+    if (!g.Initialized)
+        return;
+
+    // Save settings (unless we haven't attempted to load them: CreateContext/DestroyContext without a call to NewFrame shouldn't save an empty file)
+    if (g.SettingsLoaded && g.IO.IniFilename != NULL)
+        SaveIniSettingsToDisk(g.IO.IniFilename);
+
+    // Destroy platform windows
+    DestroyPlatformWindows();
+
+    // Shutdown extensions
+    DockContextShutdown(&g);
+
+    CallContextHooks(&g, ImGuiContextHookType_Shutdown);
+
+    // Clear everything else
+    g.Windows.clear_delete();
+    g.WindowsFocusOrder.clear();
+    g.WindowsTempSortBuffer.clear();
+    g.CurrentWindow = NULL;
+    g.CurrentWindowStack.clear();
+    g.WindowsById.Clear();
+    g.NavWindow = NULL;
+    g.HoveredWindow = g.HoveredWindowUnderMovingWindow = NULL;
+    g.ActiveIdWindow = g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameWindow = NULL;
+    g.MovingWindow = NULL;
+    g.ColorStack.clear();
+    g.StyleVarStack.clear();
+    g.FontStack.clear();
+    g.OpenPopupStack.clear();
+    g.BeginPopupStack.clear();
+
+    g.CurrentViewport = g.MouseViewport = g.MouseLastHoveredViewport = NULL;
+    g.Viewports.clear_delete();
+
+    g.TabBars.Clear();
+    g.CurrentTabBarStack.clear();
+    g.ShrinkWidthBuffer.clear();
+
+    g.ClipperTempData.clear_destruct();
+
+    g.Tables.Clear();
+    g.TablesTempData.clear_destruct();
+    g.DrawChannelsTempMergeBuffer.clear();
+
+    g.ClipboardHandlerData.clear();
+    g.MenusIdSubmittedThisFrame.clear();
+    g.InputTextState.ClearFreeMemory();
+
+    g.SettingsWindows.clear();
+    g.SettingsHandlers.clear();
+
+    if (g.LogFile)
+    {
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_TTY_FUNCTIONS
+        if (g.LogFile != stdout)
+#endif
+            ImFileClose(g.LogFile);
+        g.LogFile = NULL;
+    }
+    g.LogBuffer.clear();
+    g.DebugLogBuf.clear();
+
+    g.Initialized = false;
+}
+
+// FIXME: Add a more explicit sort order in the window structure.
+static int IMGUI_CDECL ChildWindowComparer(const void* lhs, const void* rhs)
+{
+    const ImGuiWindow* const a = *(const ImGuiWindow* const *)lhs;
+    const ImGuiWindow* const b = *(const ImGuiWindow* const *)rhs;
+    if (int d = (a->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) - (b->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup))
+        return d;
+    if (int d = (a->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip) - (b->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip))
+        return d;
+    return (a->BeginOrderWithinParent - b->BeginOrderWithinParent);
+}
+
+static void AddWindowToSortBuffer(ImVector<ImGuiWindow*>* out_sorted_windows, ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    out_sorted_windows->push_back(window);
+    if (window->Active)
+    {
+        int count = window->DC.ChildWindows.Size;
+        ImQsort(window->DC.ChildWindows.Data, (size_t)count, sizeof(ImGuiWindow*), ChildWindowComparer);
+        for (int i = 0; i < count; i++)
+        {
+            ImGuiWindow* child = window->DC.ChildWindows[i];
+            if (child->Active)
+                AddWindowToSortBuffer(out_sorted_windows, child);
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+static void AddDrawListToDrawData(ImVector<ImDrawList*>* out_list, ImDrawList* draw_list)
+{
+    if (draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size == 0)
+        return;
+    if (draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size == 1 && draw_list->CmdBuffer[0].ElemCount == 0 && draw_list->CmdBuffer[0].UserCallback == NULL)
+        return;
+
+    // Draw list sanity check. Detect mismatch between PrimReserve() calls and incrementing _VtxCurrentIdx, _VtxWritePtr etc.
+    // May trigger for you if you are using PrimXXX functions incorrectly.
+    IM_ASSERT(draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size == 0 || draw_list->_VtxWritePtr == draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data + draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size);
+    IM_ASSERT(draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size == 0 || draw_list->_IdxWritePtr == draw_list->IdxBuffer.Data + draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size);
+    if (!(draw_list->Flags & ImDrawListFlags_AllowVtxOffset))
+        IM_ASSERT((int)draw_list->_VtxCurrentIdx == draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size);
+
+    // Check that draw_list doesn't use more vertices than indexable (default ImDrawIdx = unsigned short = 2 bytes = 64K vertices per ImDrawList = per window)
+    // If this assert triggers because you are drawing lots of stuff manually:
+    // - First, make sure you are coarse clipping yourself and not trying to draw many things outside visible bounds.
+    //   Be mindful that the ImDrawList API doesn't filter vertices. Use the Metrics/Debugger window to inspect draw list contents.
+    // - If you want large meshes with more than 64K vertices, you can either:
+    //   (A) Handle the ImDrawCmd::VtxOffset value in your renderer backend, and set 'io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset'.
+    //       Most example backends already support this from 1.71. Pre-1.71 backends won't.
+    //       Some graphics API such as GL ES 1/2 don't have a way to offset the starting vertex so it is not supported for them.
+    //   (B) Or handle 32-bit indices in your renderer backend, and uncomment '#define ImDrawIdx unsigned int' line in imconfig.h.
+    //       Most example backends already support this. For example, the OpenGL example code detect index size at compile-time:
+    //         glDrawElements(GL_TRIANGLES, (GLsizei)pcmd->ElemCount, sizeof(ImDrawIdx) == 2 ? GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT : GL_UNSIGNED_INT, idx_buffer_offset);
+    //       Your own engine or render API may use different parameters or function calls to specify index sizes.
+    //       2 and 4 bytes indices are generally supported by most graphics API.
+    // - If for some reason neither of those solutions works for you, a workaround is to call BeginChild()/EndChild() before reaching
+    //   the 64K limit to split your draw commands in multiple draw lists.
+    if (sizeof(ImDrawIdx) == 2)
+        IM_ASSERT(draw_list->_VtxCurrentIdx < (1 << 16) && "Too many vertices in ImDrawList using 16-bit indices. Read comment above");
+
+    out_list->push_back(draw_list);
+}
+
+static void AddWindowToDrawData(ImGuiWindow* window, int layer)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiViewportP* viewport = window->Viewport;
+    g.IO.MetricsRenderWindows++;
+    if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_DockNodeHost)
+        window->DrawList->ChannelsMerge();
+    AddDrawListToDrawData(&viewport->DrawDataBuilder.Layers[layer], window->DrawList);
+    for (int i = 0; i < window->DC.ChildWindows.Size; i++)
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* child = window->DC.ChildWindows[i];
+        if (IsWindowActiveAndVisible(child)) // Clipped children may have been marked not active
+            AddWindowToDrawData(child, layer);
+    }
+}
+
+static inline int GetWindowDisplayLayer(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    return (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip) ? 1 : 0;
+}
+
+// Layer is locked for the root window, however child windows may use a different viewport (e.g. extruding menu)
+static inline void AddRootWindowToDrawData(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    AddWindowToDrawData(window, GetWindowDisplayLayer(window));
+}
+
+void ImDrawDataBuilder::FlattenIntoSingleLayer()
+{
+    int n = Layers[0].Size;
+    int size = n;
+    for (int i = 1; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(Layers); i++)
+        size += Layers[i].Size;
+    Layers[0].resize(size);
+    for (int layer_n = 1; layer_n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(Layers); layer_n++)
+    {
+        ImVector<ImDrawList*>& layer = Layers[layer_n];
+        if (layer.empty())
+            continue;
+        memcpy(&Layers[0][n], &layer[0], layer.Size * sizeof(ImDrawList*));
+        n += layer.Size;
+        layer.resize(0);
+    }
+}
+
+static void SetupViewportDrawData(ImGuiViewportP* viewport, ImVector<ImDrawList*>* draw_lists)
+{
+    // When minimized, we report draw_data->DisplaySize as zero to be consistent with non-viewport mode,
+    // and to allow applications/backends to easily skip rendering.
+    // FIXME: Note that we however do NOT attempt to report "zero drawlist / vertices" into the ImDrawData structure.
+    // This is because the work has been done already, and its wasted! We should fix that and add optimizations for
+    // it earlier in the pipeline, rather than pretend to hide the data at the end of the pipeline.
+    const bool is_minimized = (viewport->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_Minimized) != 0;
+
+    ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+    ImDrawData* draw_data = &viewport->DrawDataP;
+    viewport->DrawData = draw_data; // Make publicly accessible
+    draw_data->Valid = true;
+    draw_data->CmdLists = (draw_lists->Size > 0) ? draw_lists->Data : NULL;
+    draw_data->CmdListsCount = draw_lists->Size;
+    draw_data->TotalVtxCount = draw_data->TotalIdxCount = 0;
+    draw_data->DisplayPos = viewport->Pos;
+    draw_data->DisplaySize = is_minimized ? ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f) : viewport->Size;
+    draw_data->FramebufferScale = io.DisplayFramebufferScale; // FIXME-VIEWPORT: This may vary on a per-monitor/viewport basis?
+    draw_data->OwnerViewport = viewport;
+    for (int n = 0; n < draw_lists->Size; n++)
+    {
+        ImDrawList* draw_list = draw_lists->Data[n];
+        draw_list->_PopUnusedDrawCmd();
+        draw_data->TotalVtxCount += draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size;
+        draw_data->TotalIdxCount += draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size;
+    }
+}
+
+// Push a clipping rectangle for both ImGui logic (hit-testing etc.) and low-level ImDrawList rendering.
+// - When using this function it is sane to ensure that float are perfectly rounded to integer values,
+//   so that e.g. (int)(max.x-min.x) in user's render produce correct result.
+// - If the code here changes, may need to update code of functions like NextColumn() and PushColumnClipRect():
+//   some frequently called functions which to modify both channels and clipping simultaneously tend to use the
+//   more specialized SetWindowClipRectBeforeSetChannel() to avoid extraneous updates of underlying ImDrawCmds.
+void ImGui::PushClipRect(const ImVec2& clip_rect_min, const ImVec2& clip_rect_max, bool intersect_with_current_clip_rect)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    window->DrawList->PushClipRect(clip_rect_min, clip_rect_max, intersect_with_current_clip_rect);
+    window->ClipRect = window->DrawList->_ClipRectStack.back();
+}
+
+void ImGui::PopClipRect()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    window->DrawList->PopClipRect();
+    window->ClipRect = window->DrawList->_ClipRectStack.back();
+}
+
+static ImGuiWindow* FindFrontMostVisibleChildWindow(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    for (int n = window->DC.ChildWindows.Size - 1; n >= 0; n--)
+        if (IsWindowActiveAndVisible(window->DC.ChildWindows[n]))
+            return FindFrontMostVisibleChildWindow(window->DC.ChildWindows[n]);
+    return window;
+}
+
+static void ImGui::RenderDimmedBackgroundBehindWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, ImU32 col)
+{
+    if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0)
+        return;
+
+    ImGuiViewportP* viewport = window->Viewport;
+    ImRect viewport_rect = viewport->GetMainRect();
+
+    // Draw behind window by moving the draw command at the FRONT of the draw list
+    {
+        // We've already called AddWindowToDrawData() which called DrawList->ChannelsMerge() on DockNodeHost windows,
+        // and draw list have been trimmed already, hence the explicit recreation of a draw command if missing.
+        // FIXME: This is creating complication, might be simpler if we could inject a drawlist in drawdata at a given position and not attempt to manipulate ImDrawCmd order.
+        ImDrawList* draw_list = window->RootWindowDockTree->DrawList;
+        if (draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size == 0)
+            draw_list->AddDrawCmd();
+        draw_list->PushClipRect(viewport_rect.Min - ImVec2(1, 1), viewport_rect.Max + ImVec2(1, 1), false); // Ensure ImDrawCmd are not merged
+        draw_list->AddRectFilled(viewport_rect.Min, viewport_rect.Max, col);
+        ImDrawCmd cmd = draw_list->CmdBuffer.back();
+        IM_ASSERT(cmd.ElemCount == 6);
+        draw_list->CmdBuffer.pop_back();
+        draw_list->CmdBuffer.push_front(cmd);
+        draw_list->PopClipRect();
+        draw_list->AddDrawCmd(); // We need to create a command as CmdBuffer.back().IdxOffset won't be correct if we append to same command.
+    }
+
+    // Draw over sibling docking nodes in a same docking tree
+    if (window->RootWindow->DockIsActive)
+    {
+        ImDrawList* draw_list = FindFrontMostVisibleChildWindow(window->RootWindowDockTree)->DrawList;
+        if (draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size == 0)
+            draw_list->AddDrawCmd();
+        draw_list->PushClipRect(viewport_rect.Min, viewport_rect.Max, false);
+        RenderRectFilledWithHole(draw_list, window->RootWindowDockTree->Rect(), window->RootWindow->Rect(), col, 0.0f);// window->RootWindowDockTree->WindowRounding);
+        draw_list->PopClipRect();
+    }
+}
+
+ImGuiWindow* ImGui::FindBottomMostVisibleWindowWithinBeginStack(ImGuiWindow* parent_window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* bottom_most_visible_window = parent_window;
+    for (int i = FindWindowDisplayIndex(parent_window); i >= 0; i--)
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[i];
+        if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)
+            continue;
+        if (!IsWindowWithinBeginStackOf(window, parent_window))
+            break;
+        if (IsWindowActiveAndVisible(window) && GetWindowDisplayLayer(window) <= GetWindowDisplayLayer(parent_window))
+            bottom_most_visible_window = window;
+    }
+    return bottom_most_visible_window;
+}
+
+static void ImGui::RenderDimmedBackgrounds()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* modal_window = GetTopMostAndVisiblePopupModal();
+    if (g.DimBgRatio <= 0.0f && g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha <= 0.0f)
+        return;
+    const bool dim_bg_for_modal = (modal_window != NULL);
+    const bool dim_bg_for_window_list = (g.NavWindowingTargetAnim != NULL && g.NavWindowingTargetAnim->Active);
+    if (!dim_bg_for_modal && !dim_bg_for_window_list)
+        return;
+
+    ImGuiViewport* viewports_already_dimmed[2] = { NULL, NULL };
+    if (dim_bg_for_modal)
+    {
+        // Draw dimming behind modal or a begin stack child, whichever comes first in draw order.
+        ImGuiWindow* dim_behind_window = FindBottomMostVisibleWindowWithinBeginStack(modal_window);
+        RenderDimmedBackgroundBehindWindow(dim_behind_window, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg, g.DimBgRatio));
+        viewports_already_dimmed[0] = modal_window->Viewport;
+    }
+    else if (dim_bg_for_window_list)
+    {
+        // Draw dimming behind CTRL+Tab target window and behind CTRL+Tab UI window
+        RenderDimmedBackgroundBehindWindow(g.NavWindowingTargetAnim, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_NavWindowingDimBg, g.DimBgRatio));
+        if (g.NavWindowingListWindow != NULL && g.NavWindowingListWindow->Viewport && g.NavWindowingListWindow->Viewport != g.NavWindowingTargetAnim->Viewport)
+            RenderDimmedBackgroundBehindWindow(g.NavWindowingListWindow, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_NavWindowingDimBg, g.DimBgRatio));
+        viewports_already_dimmed[0] = g.NavWindowingTargetAnim->Viewport;
+        viewports_already_dimmed[1] = g.NavWindowingListWindow ? g.NavWindowingListWindow->Viewport : NULL;
+
+        // Draw border around CTRL+Tab target window
+        ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindowingTargetAnim;
+        ImGuiViewport* viewport = window->Viewport;
+        float distance = g.FontSize;
+        ImRect bb = window->Rect();
+        bb.Expand(distance);
+        if (bb.GetWidth() >= viewport->Size.x && bb.GetHeight() >= viewport->Size.y)
+            bb.Expand(-distance - 1.0f); // If a window fits the entire viewport, adjust its highlight inward
+        if (window->DrawList->CmdBuffer.Size == 0)
+            window->DrawList->AddDrawCmd();
+        window->DrawList->PushClipRect(viewport->Pos, viewport->Pos + viewport->Size);
+        window->DrawList->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_NavWindowingHighlight, g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha), window->WindowRounding, 0, 3.0f);
+        window->DrawList->PopClipRect();
+    }
+
+    // Draw dimming background on _other_ viewports than the ones our windows are in
+    for (int viewport_n = 0; viewport_n < g.Viewports.Size; viewport_n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiViewportP* viewport = g.Viewports[viewport_n];
+        if (viewport == viewports_already_dimmed[0] || viewport == viewports_already_dimmed[1])
+            continue;
+        if (modal_window && viewport->Window && IsWindowAbove(viewport->Window, modal_window))
+            continue;
+        ImDrawList* draw_list = GetForegroundDrawList(viewport);
+        const ImU32 dim_bg_col = GetColorU32(dim_bg_for_modal ? ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg : ImGuiCol_NavWindowingDimBg, g.DimBgRatio);
+        draw_list->AddRectFilled(viewport->Pos, viewport->Pos + viewport->Size, dim_bg_col);
+    }
+}
+
+// This is normally called by Render(). You may want to call it directly if you want to avoid calling Render() but the gain will be very minimal.
+void ImGui::EndFrame()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.Initialized);
+
+    // Don't process EndFrame() multiple times.
+    if (g.FrameCountEnded == g.FrameCount)
+        return;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.WithinFrameScope && "Forgot to call ImGui::NewFrame()?");
+
+    CallContextHooks(&g, ImGuiContextHookType_EndFramePre);
+
+    ErrorCheckEndFrameSanityChecks();
+
+    // Notify Platform/OS when our Input Method Editor cursor has moved (e.g. CJK inputs using Microsoft IME)
+    if (g.IO.SetPlatformImeDataFn && memcmp(&g.PlatformImeData, &g.PlatformImeDataPrev, sizeof(ImGuiPlatformImeData)) != 0)
+    {
+        ImGuiViewport* viewport = FindViewportByID(g.PlatformImeViewport);
+        g.IO.SetPlatformImeDataFn(viewport ? viewport : GetMainViewport(), &g.PlatformImeData);
+    }
+
+    // Hide implicit/fallback "Debug" window if it hasn't been used
+    g.WithinFrameScopeWithImplicitWindow = false;
+    if (g.CurrentWindow && !g.CurrentWindow->WriteAccessed)
+        g.CurrentWindow->Active = false;
+    End();
+
+    // Update navigation: CTRL+Tab, wrap-around requests
+    NavEndFrame();
+
+    // Update docking
+    DockContextEndFrame(&g);
+
+    SetCurrentViewport(NULL, NULL);
+
+    // Drag and Drop: Elapse payload (if delivered, or if source stops being submitted)
+    if (g.DragDropActive)
+    {
+        bool is_delivered = g.DragDropPayload.Delivery;
+        bool is_elapsed = (g.DragDropPayload.DataFrameCount + 1 < g.FrameCount) && ((g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceAutoExpirePayload) || !IsMouseDown(g.DragDropMouseButton));
+        if (is_delivered || is_elapsed)
+            ClearDragDrop();
+    }
+
+    // Drag and Drop: Fallback for source tooltip. This is not ideal but better than nothing.
+    if (g.DragDropActive && g.DragDropSourceFrameCount < g.FrameCount && !(g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoPreviewTooltip))
+    {
+        g.DragDropWithinSource = true;
+        SetTooltip("...");
+        g.DragDropWithinSource = false;
+    }
+
+    // End frame
+    g.WithinFrameScope = false;
+    g.FrameCountEnded = g.FrameCount;
+
+    // Initiate moving window + handle left-click and right-click focus
+    UpdateMouseMovingWindowEndFrame();
+
+    // Update user-facing viewport list (g.Viewports -> g.PlatformIO.Viewports after filtering out some)
+    UpdateViewportsEndFrame();
+
+    // Sort the window list so that all child windows are after their parent
+    // We cannot do that on FocusWindow() because children may not exist yet
+    g.WindowsTempSortBuffer.resize(0);
+    g.WindowsTempSortBuffer.reserve(g.Windows.Size);
+    for (int i = 0; i != g.Windows.Size; i++)
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[i];
+        if (window->Active && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow))       // if a child is active its parent will add it
+            continue;
+        AddWindowToSortBuffer(&g.WindowsTempSortBuffer, window);
+    }
+
+    // This usually assert if there is a mismatch between the ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow / ParentWindow values and DC.ChildWindows[] in parents, aka we've done something wrong.
+    IM_ASSERT(g.Windows.Size == g.WindowsTempSortBuffer.Size);
+    g.Windows.swap(g.WindowsTempSortBuffer);
+    g.IO.MetricsActiveWindows = g.WindowsActiveCount;
+
+    // Unlock font atlas
+    g.IO.Fonts->Locked = false;
+
+    // Clear Input data for next frame
+    g.IO.MouseWheel = g.IO.MouseWheelH = 0.0f;
+    g.IO.InputQueueCharacters.resize(0);
+
+    CallContextHooks(&g, ImGuiContextHookType_EndFramePost);
+}
+
+// Prepare the data for rendering so you can call GetDrawData()
+// (As with anything within the ImGui:: namspace this doesn't touch your GPU or graphics API at all:
+// it is the role of the ImGui_ImplXXXX_RenderDrawData() function provided by the renderer backend)
+void ImGui::Render()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.Initialized);
+
+    if (g.FrameCountEnded != g.FrameCount)
+        EndFrame();
+    const bool first_render_of_frame = (g.FrameCountRendered != g.FrameCount);
+    g.FrameCountRendered = g.FrameCount;
+    g.IO.MetricsRenderWindows = 0;
+
+    CallContextHooks(&g, ImGuiContextHookType_RenderPre);
+
+    // Add background ImDrawList (for each active viewport)
+    for (int n = 0; n != g.Viewports.Size; n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiViewportP* viewport = g.Viewports[n];
+        viewport->DrawDataBuilder.Clear();
+        if (viewport->DrawLists[0] != NULL)
+            AddDrawListToDrawData(&viewport->DrawDataBuilder.Layers[0], GetBackgroundDrawList(viewport));
+    }
+
+    // Add ImDrawList to render
+    ImGuiWindow* windows_to_render_top_most[2];
+    windows_to_render_top_most[0] = (g.NavWindowingTarget && !(g.NavWindowingTarget->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus)) ? g.NavWindowingTarget->RootWindowDockTree : NULL;
+    windows_to_render_top_most[1] = (g.NavWindowingTarget ? g.NavWindowingListWindow : NULL);
+    for (int n = 0; n != g.Windows.Size; n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[n];
+        IM_MSVC_WARNING_SUPPRESS(6011); // Static Analysis false positive "warning C6011: Dereferencing NULL pointer 'window'"
+        if (IsWindowActiveAndVisible(window) && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) == 0 && window != windows_to_render_top_most[0] && window != windows_to_render_top_most[1])
+            AddRootWindowToDrawData(window);
+    }
+    for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(windows_to_render_top_most); n++)
+        if (windows_to_render_top_most[n] && IsWindowActiveAndVisible(windows_to_render_top_most[n])) // NavWindowingTarget is always temporarily displayed as the top-most window
+            AddRootWindowToDrawData(windows_to_render_top_most[n]);
+
+    // Draw modal/window whitening backgrounds
+    if (first_render_of_frame)
+        RenderDimmedBackgrounds();
+
+    // Draw software mouse cursor if requested by io.MouseDrawCursor flag
+    if (g.IO.MouseDrawCursor && first_render_of_frame && g.MouseCursor != ImGuiMouseCursor_None)
+        RenderMouseCursor(g.IO.MousePos, g.Style.MouseCursorScale, g.MouseCursor, IM_COL32_WHITE, IM_COL32_BLACK, IM_COL32(0, 0, 0, 48));
+
+    // Setup ImDrawData structures for end-user
+    g.IO.MetricsRenderVertices = g.IO.MetricsRenderIndices = 0;
+    for (int n = 0; n < g.Viewports.Size; n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiViewportP* viewport = g.Viewports[n];
+        viewport->DrawDataBuilder.FlattenIntoSingleLayer();
+
+        // Add foreground ImDrawList (for each active viewport)
+        if (viewport->DrawLists[1] != NULL)
+            AddDrawListToDrawData(&viewport->DrawDataBuilder.Layers[0], GetForegroundDrawList(viewport));
+
+        SetupViewportDrawData(viewport, &viewport->DrawDataBuilder.Layers[0]);
+        ImDrawData* draw_data = viewport->DrawData;
+        g.IO.MetricsRenderVertices += draw_data->TotalVtxCount;
+        g.IO.MetricsRenderIndices += draw_data->TotalIdxCount;
+    }
+
+    CallContextHooks(&g, ImGuiContextHookType_RenderPost);
+}
+
+// Calculate text size. Text can be multi-line. Optionally ignore text after a ## marker.
+// CalcTextSize("") should return ImVec2(0.0f, g.FontSize)
+ImVec2 ImGui::CalcTextSize(const char* text, const char* text_end, bool hide_text_after_double_hash, float wrap_width)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    const char* text_display_end;
+    if (hide_text_after_double_hash)
+        text_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(text, text_end);      // Hide anything after a '##' string
+    else
+        text_display_end = text_end;
+
+    ImFont* font = g.Font;
+    const float font_size = g.FontSize;
+    if (text == text_display_end)
+        return ImVec2(0.0f, font_size);
+    ImVec2 text_size = font->CalcTextSizeA(font_size, FLT_MAX, wrap_width, text, text_display_end, NULL);
+
+    // Round
+    // FIXME: This has been here since Dec 2015 (7b0bf230) but down the line we want this out.
+    // FIXME: Investigate using ceilf or e.g.
+    // - https://git.musl-libc.org/cgit/musl/tree/src/math/ceilf.c
+    // - https://embarkstudios.github.io/rust-gpu/api/src/libm/math/ceilf.rs.html
+    text_size.x = IM_FLOOR(text_size.x + 0.99999f);
+
+    return text_size;
+}
+
+// Find window given position, search front-to-back
+// FIXME: Note that we have an inconsequential lag here: OuterRectClipped is updated in Begin(), so windows moved programmatically
+// with SetWindowPos() and not SetNextWindowPos() will have that rectangle lagging by a frame at the time FindHoveredWindow() is
+// called, aka before the next Begin(). Moving window isn't affected.
+static void FindHoveredWindow()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    // Special handling for the window being moved: Ignore the mouse viewport check (because it may reset/lose its viewport during the undocking frame)
+    ImGuiViewportP* moving_window_viewport = g.MovingWindow ? g.MovingWindow->Viewport : NULL;
+    if (g.MovingWindow)
+        g.MovingWindow->Viewport = g.MouseViewport;
+
+    ImGuiWindow* hovered_window = NULL;
+    ImGuiWindow* hovered_window_ignoring_moving_window = NULL;
+    if (g.MovingWindow && !(g.MovingWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs))
+        hovered_window = g.MovingWindow;
+
+    ImVec2 padding_regular = g.Style.TouchExtraPadding;
+    ImVec2 padding_for_resize = g.IO.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges ? g.WindowsHoverPadding : padding_regular;
+    for (int i = g.Windows.Size - 1; i >= 0; i--)
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[i];
+        IM_MSVC_WARNING_SUPPRESS(28182); // [Static Analyzer] Dereferencing NULL pointer.
+        if (!window->Active || window->Hidden)
+            continue;
+        if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs)
+            continue;
+        IM_ASSERT(window->Viewport);
+        if (window->Viewport != g.MouseViewport)
+            continue;
+
+        // Using the clipped AABB, a child window will typically be clipped by its parent (not always)
+        ImRect bb(window->OuterRectClipped);
+        if (window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize))
+            bb.Expand(padding_regular);
+        else
+            bb.Expand(padding_for_resize);
+        if (!bb.Contains(g.IO.MousePos))
+            continue;
+
+        // Support for one rectangular hole in any given window
+        // FIXME: Consider generalizing hit-testing override (with more generic data, callback, etc.) (#1512)
+        if (window->HitTestHoleSize.x != 0)
+        {
+            ImVec2 hole_pos(window->Pos.x + (float)window->HitTestHoleOffset.x, window->Pos.y + (float)window->HitTestHoleOffset.y);
+            ImVec2 hole_size((float)window->HitTestHoleSize.x, (float)window->HitTestHoleSize.y);
+            if (ImRect(hole_pos, hole_pos + hole_size).Contains(g.IO.MousePos))
+                continue;
+        }
+
+        if (hovered_window == NULL)
+            hovered_window = window;
+        IM_MSVC_WARNING_SUPPRESS(28182); // [Static Analyzer] Dereferencing NULL pointer.
+        if (hovered_window_ignoring_moving_window == NULL && (!g.MovingWindow || window->RootWindowDockTree != g.MovingWindow->RootWindowDockTree))
+            hovered_window_ignoring_moving_window = window;
+        if (hovered_window && hovered_window_ignoring_moving_window)
+            break;
+    }
+
+    g.HoveredWindow = hovered_window;
+    g.HoveredWindowUnderMovingWindow = hovered_window_ignoring_moving_window;
+
+    if (g.MovingWindow)
+        g.MovingWindow->Viewport = moving_window_viewport;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsItemActive()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.ActiveId)
+        return g.ActiveId == g.LastItemData.ID;
+    return false;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsItemActivated()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.ActiveId)
+        if (g.ActiveId == g.LastItemData.ID && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame != g.LastItemData.ID)
+            return true;
+    return false;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsItemDeactivated()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDeactivated)
+        return (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Deactivated) != 0;
+    return (g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame == g.LastItemData.ID && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame != 0 && g.ActiveId != g.LastItemData.ID);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return IsItemDeactivated() && (g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameHasBeenEditedBefore || (g.ActiveId == 0 && g.ActiveIdHasBeenEditedBefore));
+}
+
+// == GetItemID() == GetFocusID()
+bool ImGui::IsItemFocused()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.NavId != g.LastItemData.ID || g.NavId == 0)
+        return false;
+
+    // Special handling for the dummy item after Begin() which represent the title bar or tab.
+    // When the window is collapsed (SkipItems==true) that last item will never be overwritten so we need to detect the case.
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (g.LastItemData.ID == window->ID && window->WriteAccessed)
+        return false;
+
+    return true;
+}
+
+// Important: this can be useful but it is NOT equivalent to the behavior of e.g.Button()!
+// Most widgets have specific reactions based on mouse-up/down state, mouse position etc.
+bool ImGui::IsItemClicked(ImGuiMouseButton mouse_button)
+{
+    return IsMouseClicked(mouse_button) && IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_None);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsItemToggledOpen()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_ToggledOpen) ? true : false;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsItemToggledSelection()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_ToggledSelection) ? true : false;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsAnyItemHovered()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.HoveredId != 0 || g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != 0;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsAnyItemActive()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.ActiveId != 0;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsAnyItemFocused()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.NavId != 0 && !g.NavDisableHighlight;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsItemVisible()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.CurrentWindow->ClipRect.Overlaps(g.LastItemData.Rect);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsItemEdited()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Edited) != 0;
+}
+
+// Allow last item to be overlapped by a subsequent item. Both may be activated during the same frame before the later one takes priority.
+// FIXME: Although this is exposed, its interaction and ideal idiom with using ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap flag are extremely confusing, need rework.
+void ImGui::SetItemAllowOverlap()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiID id = g.LastItemData.ID;
+    if (g.HoveredId == id)
+        g.HoveredIdAllowOverlap = true;
+    if (g.ActiveId == id)
+        g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = true;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetItemUsingMouseWheel()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiID id = g.LastItemData.ID;
+    if (g.HoveredId == id)
+        g.HoveredIdUsingMouseWheel = true;
+    if (g.ActiveId == id)
+        g.ActiveIdUsingMouseWheel = true;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetActiveIdUsingNavAndKeys()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.ActiveId != 0);
+    g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask = ~(ImU32)0;
+    g.ActiveIdUsingKeyInputMask.SetAllBits();
+    NavMoveRequestCancel();
+}
+
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetItemRectMin()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.LastItemData.Rect.Min;
+}
+
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetItemRectMax()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.LastItemData.Rect.Max;
+}
+
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetItemRectSize()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.LastItemData.Rect.GetSize();
+}
+
+bool ImGui::BeginChildEx(const char* name, ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size_arg, bool border, ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* parent_window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+    flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDocking;
+    flags |= (parent_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove);  // Inherit the NoMove flag
+
+    // Size
+    const ImVec2 content_avail = GetContentRegionAvail();
+    ImVec2 size = ImFloor(size_arg);
+    const int auto_fit_axises = ((size.x == 0.0f) ? (1 << ImGuiAxis_X) : 0x00) | ((size.y == 0.0f) ? (1 << ImGuiAxis_Y) : 0x00);
+    if (size.x <= 0.0f)
+        size.x = ImMax(content_avail.x + size.x, 4.0f); // Arbitrary minimum child size (0.0f causing too much issues)
+    if (size.y <= 0.0f)
+        size.y = ImMax(content_avail.y + size.y, 4.0f);
+    SetNextWindowSize(size);
+
+    // Build up name. If you need to append to a same child from multiple location in the ID stack, use BeginChild(ImGuiID id) with a stable value.
+    const char* temp_window_name;
+    if (name)
+        ImFormatStringToTempBuffer(&temp_window_name, NULL, "%s/%s_%08X", parent_window->Name, name, id);
+    else
+        ImFormatStringToTempBuffer(&temp_window_name, NULL, "%s/%08X", parent_window->Name, id);
+
+    const float backup_border_size = g.Style.ChildBorderSize;
+    if (!border)
+        g.Style.ChildBorderSize = 0.0f;
+    bool ret = Begin(temp_window_name, NULL, flags);
+    g.Style.ChildBorderSize = backup_border_size;
+
+    ImGuiWindow* child_window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    child_window->ChildId = id;
+    child_window->AutoFitChildAxises = (ImS8)auto_fit_axises;
+
+    // Set the cursor to handle case where the user called SetNextWindowPos()+BeginChild() manually.
+    // While this is not really documented/defined, it seems that the expected thing to do.
+    if (child_window->BeginCount == 1)
+        parent_window->DC.CursorPos = child_window->Pos;
+
+    // Process navigation-in immediately so NavInit can run on first frame
+    if (g.NavActivateId == id && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened) && (child_window->DC.NavLayersActiveMask != 0 || child_window->DC.NavHasScroll))
+    {
+        FocusWindow(child_window);
+        NavInitWindow(child_window, false);
+        SetActiveID(id + 1, child_window); // Steal ActiveId with another arbitrary id so that key-press won't activate child item
+        g.ActiveIdSource = ImGuiInputSource_Nav;
+    }
+    return ret;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::BeginChild(const char* str_id, const ImVec2& size_arg, bool border, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_flags)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    return BeginChildEx(str_id, window->GetID(str_id), size_arg, border, extra_flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::BeginChild(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size_arg, bool border, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_flags)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(id != 0);
+    return BeginChildEx(NULL, id, size_arg, border, extra_flags);
+}
+
+void ImGui::EndChild()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+    IM_ASSERT(g.WithinEndChild == false);
+    IM_ASSERT(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow);   // Mismatched BeginChild()/EndChild() calls
+
+    g.WithinEndChild = true;
+    if (window->BeginCount > 1)
+    {
+        End();
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        ImVec2 sz = window->Size;
+        if (window->AutoFitChildAxises & (1 << ImGuiAxis_X)) // Arbitrary minimum zero-ish child size of 4.0f causes less trouble than a 0.0f
+            sz.x = ImMax(4.0f, sz.x);
+        if (window->AutoFitChildAxises & (1 << ImGuiAxis_Y))
+            sz.y = ImMax(4.0f, sz.y);
+        End();
+
+        ImGuiWindow* parent_window = g.CurrentWindow;
+        ImRect bb(parent_window->DC.CursorPos, parent_window->DC.CursorPos + sz);
+        ItemSize(sz);
+        if ((window->DC.NavLayersActiveMask != 0 || window->DC.NavHasScroll) && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened))
+        {
+            ItemAdd(bb, window->ChildId);
+            RenderNavHighlight(bb, window->ChildId);
+
+            // When browsing a window that has no activable items (scroll only) we keep a highlight on the child (pass g.NavId to trick into always displaying)
+            if (window->DC.NavLayersActiveMask == 0 && window == g.NavWindow)
+                RenderNavHighlight(ImRect(bb.Min - ImVec2(2, 2), bb.Max + ImVec2(2, 2)), g.NavId, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin);
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            // Not navigable into
+            ItemAdd(bb, 0);
+        }
+        if (g.HoveredWindow == window)
+            g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredWindow;
+    }
+    g.WithinEndChild = false;
+    g.LogLinePosY = -FLT_MAX; // To enforce a carriage return
+}
+
+// Helper to create a child window / scrolling region that looks like a normal widget frame.
+bool ImGui::BeginChildFrame(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+    PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ChildBg, style.Colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBg]);
+    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding, style.FrameRounding);
+    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildBorderSize, style.FrameBorderSize);
+    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, style.FramePadding);
+    bool ret = BeginChild(id, size, true, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysUseWindowPadding | extra_flags);
+    PopStyleVar(3);
+    PopStyleColor();
+    return ret;
+}
+
+void ImGui::EndChildFrame()
+{
+    EndChild();
+}
+
+static void SetWindowConditionAllowFlags(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiCond flags, bool enabled)
+{
+    window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags       = enabled ? (window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags       | flags) : (window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags       & ~flags);
+    window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags      = enabled ? (window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags      | flags) : (window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags      & ~flags);
+    window->SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags = enabled ? (window->SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags | flags) : (window->SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags & ~flags);
+    window->SetWindowDockAllowFlags      = enabled ? (window->SetWindowDockAllowFlags      | flags) : (window->SetWindowDockAllowFlags      & ~flags);
+}
+
+ImGuiWindow* ImGui::FindWindowByID(ImGuiID id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return (ImGuiWindow*)g.WindowsById.GetVoidPtr(id);
+}
+
+ImGuiWindow* ImGui::FindWindowByName(const char* name)
+{
+    ImGuiID id = ImHashStr(name);
+    return FindWindowByID(id);
+}
+
+static void ApplyWindowSettings(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindowSettings* settings)
+{
+    const ImGuiViewport* main_viewport = ImGui::GetMainViewport();
+    window->ViewportPos = main_viewport->Pos;
+    if (settings->ViewportId)
+    {
+        window->ViewportId = settings->ViewportId;
+        window->ViewportPos = ImVec2(settings->ViewportPos.x, settings->ViewportPos.y);
+    }
+    window->Pos = ImFloor(ImVec2(settings->Pos.x + window->ViewportPos.x, settings->Pos.y + window->ViewportPos.y));
+    if (settings->Size.x > 0 && settings->Size.y > 0)
+        window->Size = window->SizeFull = ImFloor(ImVec2(settings->Size.x, settings->Size.y));
+    window->Collapsed = settings->Collapsed;
+    window->DockId = settings->DockId;
+    window->DockOrder = settings->DockOrder;
+}
+
+static void UpdateWindowInFocusOrderList(ImGuiWindow* window, bool just_created, ImGuiWindowFlags new_flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    const bool new_is_explicit_child = (new_flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) != 0;
+    const bool child_flag_changed = new_is_explicit_child != window->IsExplicitChild;
+    if ((just_created || child_flag_changed) && !new_is_explicit_child)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(!g.WindowsFocusOrder.contains(window));
+        g.WindowsFocusOrder.push_back(window);
+        window->FocusOrder = (short)(g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size - 1);
+    }
+    else if (!just_created && child_flag_changed && new_is_explicit_child)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(g.WindowsFocusOrder[window->FocusOrder] == window);
+        for (int n = window->FocusOrder + 1; n < g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size; n++)
+            g.WindowsFocusOrder[n]->FocusOrder--;
+        g.WindowsFocusOrder.erase(g.WindowsFocusOrder.Data + window->FocusOrder);
+        window->FocusOrder = -1;
+    }
+    window->IsExplicitChild = new_is_explicit_child;
+}
+
+static ImGuiWindow* CreateNewWindow(const char* name, ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    //IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG("CreateNewWindow '%s', flags = 0x%08X\n", name, flags);
+
+    // Create window the first time
+    ImGuiWindow* window = IM_NEW(ImGuiWindow)(&g, name);
+    window->Flags = flags;
+    g.WindowsById.SetVoidPtr(window->ID, window);
+
+    // Default/arbitrary window position. Use SetNextWindowPos() with the appropriate condition flag to change the initial position of a window.
+    const ImGuiViewport* main_viewport = ImGui::GetMainViewport();
+    window->Pos = main_viewport->Pos + ImVec2(60, 60);
+    window->ViewportPos = main_viewport->Pos;
+
+    // User can disable loading and saving of settings. Tooltip and child windows also don't store settings.
+    if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings))
+        if (ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = ImGui::FindWindowSettings(window->ID))
+        {
+            // Retrieve settings from .ini file
+            window->SettingsOffset = g.SettingsWindows.offset_from_ptr(settings);
+            SetWindowConditionAllowFlags(window, ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver, false);
+            ApplyWindowSettings(window, settings);
+        }
+    window->DC.CursorStartPos = window->DC.CursorMaxPos = window->DC.IdealMaxPos = window->Pos; // So first call to CalcWindowContentSizes() doesn't return crazy values
+
+    if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) != 0)
+    {
+        window->AutoFitFramesX = window->AutoFitFramesY = 2;
+        window->AutoFitOnlyGrows = false;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        if (window->Size.x <= 0.0f)
+            window->AutoFitFramesX = 2;
+        if (window->Size.y <= 0.0f)
+            window->AutoFitFramesY = 2;
+        window->AutoFitOnlyGrows = (window->AutoFitFramesX > 0) || (window->AutoFitFramesY > 0);
+    }
+
+    if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus)
+        g.Windows.push_front(window); // Quite slow but rare and only once
+    else
+        g.Windows.push_back(window);
+    UpdateWindowInFocusOrderList(window, true, window->Flags);
+
+    return window;
+}
+
+static ImGuiWindow* GetWindowForTitleDisplay(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    return window->DockNodeAsHost ? window->DockNodeAsHost->VisibleWindow : window;
+}
+
+static ImGuiWindow* GetWindowForTitleAndMenuHeight(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    return (window->DockNodeAsHost && window->DockNodeAsHost->VisibleWindow) ? window->DockNodeAsHost->VisibleWindow : window;
+}
+
+static ImVec2 CalcWindowSizeAfterConstraint(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& size_desired)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImVec2 new_size = size_desired;
+    if (g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSizeConstraint)
+    {
+        // Using -1,-1 on either X/Y axis to preserve the current size.
+        ImRect cr = g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintRect;
+        new_size.x = (cr.Min.x >= 0 && cr.Max.x >= 0) ? ImClamp(new_size.x, cr.Min.x, cr.Max.x) : window->SizeFull.x;
+        new_size.y = (cr.Min.y >= 0 && cr.Max.y >= 0) ? ImClamp(new_size.y, cr.Min.y, cr.Max.y) : window->SizeFull.y;
+        if (g.NextWindowData.SizeCallback)
+        {
+            ImGuiSizeCallbackData data;
+            data.UserData = g.NextWindowData.SizeCallbackUserData;
+            data.Pos = window->Pos;
+            data.CurrentSize = window->SizeFull;
+            data.DesiredSize = new_size;
+            g.NextWindowData.SizeCallback(&data);
+            new_size = data.DesiredSize;
+        }
+        new_size.x = IM_FLOOR(new_size.x);
+        new_size.y = IM_FLOOR(new_size.y);
+    }
+
+    // Minimum size
+    if (!(window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize)))
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* window_for_height = GetWindowForTitleAndMenuHeight(window);
+        const float decoration_up_height = window_for_height->TitleBarHeight() + window_for_height->MenuBarHeight();
+        new_size = ImMax(new_size, g.Style.WindowMinSize);
+        new_size.y = ImMax(new_size.y, decoration_up_height + ImMax(0.0f, g.Style.WindowRounding - 1.0f)); // Reduce artifacts with very small windows
+    }
+    return new_size;
+}
+
+static void CalcWindowContentSizes(ImGuiWindow* window, ImVec2* content_size_current, ImVec2* content_size_ideal)
+{
+    bool preserve_old_content_sizes = false;
+    if (window->Collapsed && window->AutoFitFramesX <= 0 && window->AutoFitFramesY <= 0)
+        preserve_old_content_sizes = true;
+    else if (window->Hidden && window->HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems == 0 && window->HiddenFramesCanSkipItems > 0)
+        preserve_old_content_sizes = true;
+    if (preserve_old_content_sizes)
+    {
+        *content_size_current = window->ContentSize;
+        *content_size_ideal = window->ContentSizeIdeal;
+        return;
+    }
+
+    content_size_current->x = (window->ContentSizeExplicit.x != 0.0f) ? window->ContentSizeExplicit.x : IM_FLOOR(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x - window->DC.CursorStartPos.x);
+    content_size_current->y = (window->ContentSizeExplicit.y != 0.0f) ? window->ContentSizeExplicit.y : IM_FLOOR(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y - window->DC.CursorStartPos.y);
+    content_size_ideal->x = (window->ContentSizeExplicit.x != 0.0f) ? window->ContentSizeExplicit.x : IM_FLOOR(ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x, window->DC.IdealMaxPos.x) - window->DC.CursorStartPos.x);
+    content_size_ideal->y = (window->ContentSizeExplicit.y != 0.0f) ? window->ContentSizeExplicit.y : IM_FLOOR(ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y, window->DC.IdealMaxPos.y) - window->DC.CursorStartPos.y);
+}
+
+static ImVec2 CalcWindowAutoFitSize(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& size_contents)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+    const float decoration_up_height = window->TitleBarHeight() + window->MenuBarHeight();
+    ImVec2 size_pad = window->WindowPadding * 2.0f;
+    ImVec2 size_desired = size_contents + size_pad + ImVec2(0.0f, decoration_up_height);
+    if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)
+    {
+        // Tooltip always resize
+        return size_desired;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Maximum window size is determined by the viewport size or monitor size
+        const bool is_popup = (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) != 0;
+        const bool is_menu = (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) != 0;
+        ImVec2 size_min = style.WindowMinSize;
+        if (is_popup || is_menu) // Popups and menus bypass style.WindowMinSize by default, but we give then a non-zero minimum size to facilitate understanding problematic cases (e.g. empty popups)
+            size_min = ImMin(size_min, ImVec2(4.0f, 4.0f));
+
+        // FIXME-VIEWPORT-WORKAREA: May want to use GetWorkSize() instead of Size depending on the type of windows?
+        ImVec2 avail_size = window->Viewport->Size;
+        if (window->ViewportOwned)
+            avail_size = ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);
+        const int monitor_idx = window->ViewportAllowPlatformMonitorExtend;
+        if (monitor_idx >= 0 && monitor_idx < g.PlatformIO.Monitors.Size)
+            avail_size = g.PlatformIO.Monitors[monitor_idx].WorkSize;
+        ImVec2 size_auto_fit = ImClamp(size_desired, size_min, ImMax(size_min, avail_size - style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding * 2.0f));
+
+        // When the window cannot fit all contents (either because of constraints, either because screen is too small),
+        // we are growing the size on the other axis to compensate for expected scrollbar. FIXME: Might turn bigger than ViewportSize-WindowPadding.
+        ImVec2 size_auto_fit_after_constraint = CalcWindowSizeAfterConstraint(window, size_auto_fit);
+        bool will_have_scrollbar_x = (size_auto_fit_after_constraint.x - size_pad.x - 0.0f                 < size_contents.x && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar) && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar)) || (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysHorizontalScrollbar);
+        bool will_have_scrollbar_y = (size_auto_fit_after_constraint.y - size_pad.y - decoration_up_height < size_contents.y && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar)) || (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysVerticalScrollbar);
+        if (will_have_scrollbar_x)
+            size_auto_fit.y += style.ScrollbarSize;
+        if (will_have_scrollbar_y)
+            size_auto_fit.x += style.ScrollbarSize;
+        return size_auto_fit;
+    }
+}
+
+ImVec2 ImGui::CalcWindowNextAutoFitSize(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImVec2 size_contents_current;
+    ImVec2 size_contents_ideal;
+    CalcWindowContentSizes(window, &size_contents_current, &size_contents_ideal);
+    ImVec2 size_auto_fit = CalcWindowAutoFitSize(window, size_contents_ideal);
+    ImVec2 size_final = CalcWindowSizeAfterConstraint(window, size_auto_fit);
+    return size_final;
+}
+
+static ImGuiCol GetWindowBgColorIdx(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    if (window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup))
+        return ImGuiCol_PopupBg;
+    if ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && !window->DockIsActive)
+        return ImGuiCol_ChildBg;
+    return ImGuiCol_WindowBg;
+}
+
+static void CalcResizePosSizeFromAnyCorner(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& corner_target, const ImVec2& corner_norm, ImVec2* out_pos, ImVec2* out_size)
+{
+    ImVec2 pos_min = ImLerp(corner_target, window->Pos, corner_norm);                // Expected window upper-left
+    ImVec2 pos_max = ImLerp(window->Pos + window->Size, corner_target, corner_norm); // Expected window lower-right
+    ImVec2 size_expected = pos_max - pos_min;
+    ImVec2 size_constrained = CalcWindowSizeAfterConstraint(window, size_expected);
+    *out_pos = pos_min;
+    if (corner_norm.x == 0.0f)
+        out_pos->x -= (size_constrained.x - size_expected.x);
+    if (corner_norm.y == 0.0f)
+        out_pos->y -= (size_constrained.y - size_expected.y);
+    *out_size = size_constrained;
+}
+
+// Data for resizing from corner
+struct ImGuiResizeGripDef
+{
+    ImVec2  CornerPosN;
+    ImVec2  InnerDir;
+    int     AngleMin12, AngleMax12;
+};
+static const ImGuiResizeGripDef resize_grip_def[4] =
+{
+    { ImVec2(1, 1), ImVec2(-1, -1), 0, 3 },  // Lower-right
+    { ImVec2(0, 1), ImVec2(+1, -1), 3, 6 },  // Lower-left
+    { ImVec2(0, 0), ImVec2(+1, +1), 6, 9 },  // Upper-left (Unused)
+    { ImVec2(1, 0), ImVec2(-1, +1), 9, 12 }  // Upper-right (Unused)
+};
+
+// Data for resizing from borders
+struct ImGuiResizeBorderDef
+{
+    ImVec2 InnerDir;
+    ImVec2 SegmentN1, SegmentN2;
+    float  OuterAngle;
+};
+static const ImGuiResizeBorderDef resize_border_def[4] =
+{
+    { ImVec2(+1, 0), ImVec2(0, 1), ImVec2(0, 0), IM_PI * 1.00f }, // Left
+    { ImVec2(-1, 0), ImVec2(1, 0), ImVec2(1, 1), IM_PI * 0.00f }, // Right
+    { ImVec2(0, +1), ImVec2(0, 0), ImVec2(1, 0), IM_PI * 1.50f }, // Up
+    { ImVec2(0, -1), ImVec2(1, 1), ImVec2(0, 1), IM_PI * 0.50f }  // Down
+};
+
+static ImRect GetResizeBorderRect(ImGuiWindow* window, int border_n, float perp_padding, float thickness)
+{
+    ImRect rect = window->Rect();
+    if (thickness == 0.0f)
+        rect.Max -= ImVec2(1, 1);
+    if (border_n == ImGuiDir_Left)  { return ImRect(rect.Min.x - thickness,    rect.Min.y + perp_padding, rect.Min.x + thickness,    rect.Max.y - perp_padding); }
+    if (border_n == ImGuiDir_Right) { return ImRect(rect.Max.x - thickness,    rect.Min.y + perp_padding, rect.Max.x + thickness,    rect.Max.y - perp_padding); }
+    if (border_n == ImGuiDir_Up)    { return ImRect(rect.Min.x + perp_padding, rect.Min.y - thickness,    rect.Max.x - perp_padding, rect.Min.y + thickness);    }
+    if (border_n == ImGuiDir_Down)  { return ImRect(rect.Min.x + perp_padding, rect.Max.y - thickness,    rect.Max.x - perp_padding, rect.Max.y + thickness);    }
+    IM_ASSERT(0);
+    return ImRect();
+}
+
+// 0..3: corners (Lower-right, Lower-left, Unused, Unused)
+ImGuiID ImGui::GetWindowResizeCornerID(ImGuiWindow* window, int n)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(n >= 0 && n < 4);
+    ImGuiID id = window->DockIsActive ? window->DockNode->HostWindow->ID : window->ID;
+    id = ImHashStr("#RESIZE", 0, id);
+    id = ImHashData(&n, sizeof(int), id);
+    return id;
+}
+
+// Borders (Left, Right, Up, Down)
+ImGuiID ImGui::GetWindowResizeBorderID(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiDir dir)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(dir >= 0 && dir < 4);
+    int n = (int)dir + 4;
+    ImGuiID id = window->DockIsActive ? window->DockNode->HostWindow->ID : window->ID;
+    id = ImHashStr("#RESIZE", 0, id);
+    id = ImHashData(&n, sizeof(int), id);
+    return id;
+}
+
+// Handle resize for: Resize Grips, Borders, Gamepad
+// Return true when using auto-fit (double click on resize grip)
+static bool ImGui::UpdateWindowManualResize(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& size_auto_fit, int* border_held, int resize_grip_count, ImU32 resize_grip_col[4], const ImRect& visibility_rect)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindowFlags flags = window->Flags;
+
+    if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize) || (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) || window->AutoFitFramesX > 0 || window->AutoFitFramesY > 0)
+        return false;
+    if (window->WasActive == false) // Early out to avoid running this code for e.g. an hidden implicit/fallback Debug window.
+        return false;
+
+    bool ret_auto_fit = false;
+    const int resize_border_count = g.IO.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges ? 4 : 0;
+    const float grip_draw_size = IM_FLOOR(ImMax(g.FontSize * 1.35f, window->WindowRounding + 1.0f + g.FontSize * 0.2f));
+    const float grip_hover_inner_size = IM_FLOOR(grip_draw_size * 0.75f);
+    const float grip_hover_outer_size = g.IO.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges ? WINDOWS_HOVER_PADDING : 0.0f;
+
+    ImVec2 pos_target(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);
+    ImVec2 size_target(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);
+
+    // Clip mouse interaction rectangles within the viewport rectangle (in practice the narrowing is going to happen most of the time).
+    // - Not narrowing would mostly benefit the situation where OS windows _without_ decoration have a threshold for hovering when outside their limits.
+    //   This is however not the case with current backends under Win32, but a custom borderless window implementation would benefit from it.
+    // - When decoration are enabled we typically benefit from that distance, but then our resize elements would be conflicting with OS resize elements, so we also narrow.
+    // - Note that we are unable to tell if the platform setup allows hovering with a distance threshold (on Win32, decorated window have such threshold).
+    // We only clip interaction so we overwrite window->ClipRect, cannot call PushClipRect() yet as DrawList is not yet setup.
+    const bool clip_with_viewport_rect = !(g.IO.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseHoveredViewport) || (g.IO.MouseHoveredViewport != window->ViewportId) || !(window->Viewport->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_NoDecoration);
+    if (clip_with_viewport_rect)
+        window->ClipRect = window->Viewport->GetMainRect();
+
+    // Resize grips and borders are on layer 1
+    window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Menu;
+
+    // Manual resize grips
+    PushID("#RESIZE");
+    for (int resize_grip_n = 0; resize_grip_n < resize_grip_count; resize_grip_n++)
+    {
+        const ImGuiResizeGripDef& def = resize_grip_def[resize_grip_n];
+        const ImVec2 corner = ImLerp(window->Pos, window->Pos + window->Size, def.CornerPosN);
+
+        // Using the FlattenChilds button flag we make the resize button accessible even if we are hovering over a child window
+        bool hovered, held;
+        ImRect resize_rect(corner - def.InnerDir * grip_hover_outer_size, corner + def.InnerDir * grip_hover_inner_size);
+        if (resize_rect.Min.x > resize_rect.Max.x) ImSwap(resize_rect.Min.x, resize_rect.Max.x);
+        if (resize_rect.Min.y > resize_rect.Max.y) ImSwap(resize_rect.Min.y, resize_rect.Max.y);
+        ImGuiID resize_grip_id = window->GetID(resize_grip_n); // == GetWindowResizeCornerID()
+        KeepAliveID(resize_grip_id);
+        ButtonBehavior(resize_rect, resize_grip_id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren | ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus);
+        //GetForegroundDrawList(window)->AddRect(resize_rect.Min, resize_rect.Max, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255));
+        if (hovered || held)
+            g.MouseCursor = (resize_grip_n & 1) ? ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNESW : ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNWSE;
+
+        if (held && g.IO.MouseClickedCount[0] == 2 && resize_grip_n == 0)
+        {
+            // Manual auto-fit when double-clicking
+            size_target = CalcWindowSizeAfterConstraint(window, size_auto_fit);
+            ret_auto_fit = true;
+            ClearActiveID();
+        }
+        else if (held)
+        {
+            // Resize from any of the four corners
+            // We don't use an incremental MouseDelta but rather compute an absolute target size based on mouse position
+            ImVec2 clamp_min = ImVec2(def.CornerPosN.x == 1.0f ? visibility_rect.Min.x : -FLT_MAX, def.CornerPosN.y == 1.0f ? visibility_rect.Min.y : -FLT_MAX);
+            ImVec2 clamp_max = ImVec2(def.CornerPosN.x == 0.0f ? visibility_rect.Max.x : +FLT_MAX, def.CornerPosN.y == 0.0f ? visibility_rect.Max.y : +FLT_MAX);
+            ImVec2 corner_target = g.IO.MousePos - g.ActiveIdClickOffset + ImLerp(def.InnerDir * grip_hover_outer_size, def.InnerDir * -grip_hover_inner_size, def.CornerPosN); // Corner of the window corresponding to our corner grip
+            corner_target = ImClamp(corner_target, clamp_min, clamp_max);
+            CalcResizePosSizeFromAnyCorner(window, corner_target, def.CornerPosN, &pos_target, &size_target);
+        }
+
+        // Only lower-left grip is visible before hovering/activating
+        if (resize_grip_n == 0 || held || hovered)
+            resize_grip_col[resize_grip_n] = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ResizeGripHovered : ImGuiCol_ResizeGrip);
+    }
+    for (int border_n = 0; border_n < resize_border_count; border_n++)
+    {
+        const ImGuiResizeBorderDef& def = resize_border_def[border_n];
+        const ImGuiAxis axis = (border_n == ImGuiDir_Left || border_n == ImGuiDir_Right) ? ImGuiAxis_X : ImGuiAxis_Y;
+
+        bool hovered, held;
+        ImRect border_rect = GetResizeBorderRect(window, border_n, grip_hover_inner_size, WINDOWS_HOVER_PADDING);
+        ImGuiID border_id = window->GetID(border_n + 4); // == GetWindowResizeBorderID()
+        KeepAliveID(border_id);
+        ButtonBehavior(border_rect, border_id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren | ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus);
+        //GetForegroundDrawLists(window)->AddRect(border_rect.Min, border_rect.Max, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255));
+        if ((hovered && g.HoveredIdTimer > WINDOWS_RESIZE_FROM_EDGES_FEEDBACK_TIMER) || held)
+        {
+            g.MouseCursor = (axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW : ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNS;
+            if (held)
+                *border_held = border_n;
+        }
+        if (held)
+        {
+            ImVec2 clamp_min(border_n == ImGuiDir_Right ? visibility_rect.Min.x : -FLT_MAX, border_n == ImGuiDir_Down ? visibility_rect.Min.y : -FLT_MAX);
+            ImVec2 clamp_max(border_n == ImGuiDir_Left  ? visibility_rect.Max.x : +FLT_MAX, border_n == ImGuiDir_Up   ? visibility_rect.Max.y : +FLT_MAX);
+            ImVec2 border_target = window->Pos;
+            border_target[axis] = g.IO.MousePos[axis] - g.ActiveIdClickOffset[axis] + WINDOWS_HOVER_PADDING;
+            border_target = ImClamp(border_target, clamp_min, clamp_max);
+            CalcResizePosSizeFromAnyCorner(window, border_target, ImMin(def.SegmentN1, def.SegmentN2), &pos_target, &size_target);
+        }
+    }
+    PopID();
+
+    // Restore nav layer
+    window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Main;
+
+    // Navigation resize (keyboard/gamepad)
+    // FIXME: This cannot be moved to NavUpdateWindowing() because CalcWindowSizeAfterConstraint() need to callback into user.
+    // Not even sure the callback works here.
+    if (g.NavWindowingTarget && g.NavWindowingTarget->RootWindowDockTree == window)
+    {
+        ImVec2 nav_resize_dir;
+        if (g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard && g.IO.KeyShift)
+            nav_resize_dir = GetKeyVector2d(ImGuiKey_LeftArrow, ImGuiKey_RightArrow, ImGuiKey_UpArrow, ImGuiKey_DownArrow);
+        if (g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad)
+            nav_resize_dir = GetKeyVector2d(ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadLeft, ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadRight, ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadUp, ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadDown);
+        if (nav_resize_dir.x != 0.0f || nav_resize_dir.y != 0.0f)
+        {
+            const float NAV_RESIZE_SPEED = 600.0f;
+            const float resize_step = NAV_RESIZE_SPEED * g.IO.DeltaTime * ImMin(g.IO.DisplayFramebufferScale.x, g.IO.DisplayFramebufferScale.y);
+            g.NavWindowingAccumDeltaSize += nav_resize_dir * resize_step;
+            g.NavWindowingAccumDeltaSize = ImMax(g.NavWindowingAccumDeltaSize, visibility_rect.Min - window->Pos - window->Size); // We need Pos+Size >= visibility_rect.Min, so Size >= visibility_rect.Min - Pos, so size_delta >= visibility_rect.Min - window->Pos - window->Size
+            g.NavWindowingToggleLayer = false;
+            g.NavDisableMouseHover = true;
+            resize_grip_col[0] = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive);
+            ImVec2 accum_floored = ImFloor(g.NavWindowingAccumDeltaSize);
+            if (accum_floored.x != 0.0f || accum_floored.y != 0.0f)
+            {
+                // FIXME-NAV: Should store and accumulate into a separate size buffer to handle sizing constraints properly, right now a constraint will make us stuck.
+                size_target = CalcWindowSizeAfterConstraint(window, window->SizeFull + accum_floored);
+                g.NavWindowingAccumDeltaSize -= accum_floored;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Apply back modified position/size to window
+    if (size_target.x != FLT_MAX)
+    {
+        window->SizeFull = size_target;
+        MarkIniSettingsDirty(window);
+    }
+    if (pos_target.x != FLT_MAX)
+    {
+        window->Pos = ImFloor(pos_target);
+        MarkIniSettingsDirty(window);
+    }
+
+    window->Size = window->SizeFull;
+    return ret_auto_fit;
+}
+
+static inline void ClampWindowRect(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& visibility_rect)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImVec2 size_for_clamping = window->Size;
+    if (g.IO.ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly && (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) || window->DockNodeAsHost))
+        size_for_clamping.y = ImGui::GetFrameHeight(); // Not using window->TitleBarHeight() as DockNodeAsHost will report 0.0f here.
+    window->Pos = ImClamp(window->Pos, visibility_rect.Min - size_for_clamping, visibility_rect.Max);
+}
+
+static void ImGui::RenderWindowOuterBorders(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    float rounding = window->WindowRounding;
+    float border_size = window->WindowBorderSize;
+    if (border_size > 0.0f && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground))
+        window->DrawList->AddRect(window->Pos, window->Pos + window->Size, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), rounding, 0, border_size);
+
+    int border_held = window->ResizeBorderHeld;
+    if (border_held != -1)
+    {
+        const ImGuiResizeBorderDef& def = resize_border_def[border_held];
+        ImRect border_r = GetResizeBorderRect(window, border_held, rounding, 0.0f);
+        window->DrawList->PathArcTo(ImLerp(border_r.Min, border_r.Max, def.SegmentN1) + ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f) + def.InnerDir * rounding, rounding, def.OuterAngle - IM_PI * 0.25f, def.OuterAngle);
+        window->DrawList->PathArcTo(ImLerp(border_r.Min, border_r.Max, def.SegmentN2) + ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f) + def.InnerDir * rounding, rounding, def.OuterAngle, def.OuterAngle + IM_PI * 0.25f);
+        window->DrawList->PathStroke(GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive), 0, ImMax(2.0f, border_size)); // Thicker than usual
+    }
+    if (g.Style.FrameBorderSize > 0 && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) && !window->DockIsActive)
+    {
+        float y = window->Pos.y + window->TitleBarHeight() - 1;
+        window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(window->Pos.x + border_size, y), ImVec2(window->Pos.x + window->Size.x - border_size, y), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), g.Style.FrameBorderSize);
+    }
+}
+
+// Draw background and borders
+// Draw and handle scrollbars
+void ImGui::RenderWindowDecorations(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& title_bar_rect, bool title_bar_is_highlight, bool handle_borders_and_resize_grips, int resize_grip_count, const ImU32 resize_grip_col[4], float resize_grip_draw_size)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+    ImGuiWindowFlags flags = window->Flags;
+
+    // Ensure that ScrollBar doesn't read last frame's SkipItems
+    IM_ASSERT(window->BeginCount == 0);
+    window->SkipItems = false;
+
+    // Draw window + handle manual resize
+    // As we highlight the title bar when want_focus is set, multiple reappearing windows will have have their title bar highlighted on their reappearing frame.
+    const float window_rounding = window->WindowRounding;
+    const float window_border_size = window->WindowBorderSize;
+    if (window->Collapsed)
+    {
+        // Title bar only
+        float backup_border_size = style.FrameBorderSize;
+        g.Style.FrameBorderSize = window->WindowBorderSize;
+        ImU32 title_bar_col = GetColorU32((title_bar_is_highlight && !g.NavDisableHighlight) ? ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive : ImGuiCol_TitleBgCollapsed);
+        RenderFrame(title_bar_rect.Min, title_bar_rect.Max, title_bar_col, true, window_rounding);
+        g.Style.FrameBorderSize = backup_border_size;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Window background
+        if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground))
+        {
+            bool is_docking_transparent_payload = false;
+            if (g.DragDropActive && (g.FrameCount - g.DragDropAcceptFrameCount) <= 1 && g.IO.ConfigDockingTransparentPayload)
+                if (g.DragDropPayload.IsDataType(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_WINDOW) && *(ImGuiWindow**)g.DragDropPayload.Data == window)
+                    is_docking_transparent_payload = true;
+
+            ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32(GetWindowBgColorIdx(window));
+            if (window->ViewportOwned)
+            {
+                // No alpha
+                bg_col = (bg_col | IM_COL32_A_MASK);
+                if (is_docking_transparent_payload)
+                    window->Viewport->Alpha *= DOCKING_TRANSPARENT_PAYLOAD_ALPHA;
+            }
+            else
+            {
+                // Adjust alpha. For docking
+                bool override_alpha = false;
+                float alpha = 1.0f;
+                if (g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasBgAlpha)
+                {
+                    alpha = g.NextWindowData.BgAlphaVal;
+                    override_alpha = true;
+                }
+                if (is_docking_transparent_payload)
+                {
+                    alpha *= DOCKING_TRANSPARENT_PAYLOAD_ALPHA; // FIXME-DOCK: Should that be an override?
+                    override_alpha = true;
+                }
+                if (override_alpha)
+                    bg_col = (bg_col & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK) | (IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(alpha) << IM_COL32_A_SHIFT);
+            }
+
+            // Render, for docked windows and host windows we ensure bg goes before decorations
+            ImDrawList* bg_draw_list = window->DockIsActive ? window->DockNode->HostWindow->DrawList : window->DrawList;
+            if (window->DockIsActive || (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_DockNodeHost))
+                bg_draw_list->ChannelsSetCurrent(0);
+            if (window->DockIsActive)
+                window->DockNode->LastBgColor = bg_col;
+
+            bg_draw_list->AddRectFilled(window->Pos + ImVec2(0, window->TitleBarHeight()), window->Pos + window->Size, bg_col, window_rounding, (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) ? 0 : ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottom);
+
+            if (window->DockIsActive || (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_DockNodeHost))
+                bg_draw_list->ChannelsSetCurrent(1);
+        }
+        if (window->DockIsActive)
+            window->DockNode->IsBgDrawnThisFrame = true;
+
+        // Title bar
+        // (when docked, DockNode are drawing their own title bar. Individual windows however do NOT set the _NoTitleBar flag,
+        // in order for their pos/size to be matching their undocking state.)
+        if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) && !window->DockIsActive)
+        {
+            ImU32 title_bar_col = GetColorU32(title_bar_is_highlight ? ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive : ImGuiCol_TitleBg);
+            window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(title_bar_rect.Min, title_bar_rect.Max, title_bar_col, window_rounding, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTop);
+        }
+
+        // Menu bar
+        if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar)
+        {
+            ImRect menu_bar_rect = window->MenuBarRect();
+            menu_bar_rect.ClipWith(window->Rect());  // Soft clipping, in particular child window don't have minimum size covering the menu bar so this is useful for them.
+            window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(menu_bar_rect.Min + ImVec2(window_border_size, 0), menu_bar_rect.Max - ImVec2(window_border_size, 0), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_MenuBarBg), (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) ? window_rounding : 0.0f, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTop);
+            if (style.FrameBorderSize > 0.0f && menu_bar_rect.Max.y < window->Pos.y + window->Size.y)
+                window->DrawList->AddLine(menu_bar_rect.GetBL(), menu_bar_rect.GetBR(), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), style.FrameBorderSize);
+        }
+
+        // Docking: Unhide tab bar (small triangle in the corner), drag from small triangle to quickly undock
+        ImGuiDockNode* node = window->DockNode;
+        if (window->DockIsActive && node->IsHiddenTabBar() && !node->IsNoTabBar())
+        {
+            float unhide_sz_draw = ImFloor(g.FontSize * 0.70f);
+            float unhide_sz_hit = ImFloor(g.FontSize * 0.55f);
+            ImVec2 p = node->Pos;
+            ImRect r(p, p + ImVec2(unhide_sz_hit, unhide_sz_hit));
+            ImGuiID unhide_id = window->GetID("#UNHIDE");
+            KeepAliveID(unhide_id);
+            bool hovered, held;
+            if (ButtonBehavior(r, unhide_id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren))
+                node->WantHiddenTabBarToggle = true;
+            else if (held && IsMouseDragging(0))
+                StartMouseMovingWindowOrNode(window, node, true);
+
+            // FIXME-DOCK: Ideally we'd use ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive/ImGuiCol_TitleBg here, but neither is guaranteed to be visible enough at this sort of size..
+            ImU32 col = GetColorU32(((held && hovered) || (node->IsFocused && !hovered)) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
+            window->DrawList->AddTriangleFilled(p, p + ImVec2(unhide_sz_draw, 0.0f), p + ImVec2(0.0f, unhide_sz_draw), col);
+        }
+
+        // Scrollbars
+        if (window->ScrollbarX)
+            Scrollbar(ImGuiAxis_X);
+        if (window->ScrollbarY)
+            Scrollbar(ImGuiAxis_Y);
+
+        // Render resize grips (after their input handling so we don't have a frame of latency)
+        if (handle_borders_and_resize_grips && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize))
+        {
+            for (int resize_grip_n = 0; resize_grip_n < resize_grip_count; resize_grip_n++)
+            {
+                const ImGuiResizeGripDef& grip = resize_grip_def[resize_grip_n];
+                const ImVec2 corner = ImLerp(window->Pos, window->Pos + window->Size, grip.CornerPosN);
+                window->DrawList->PathLineTo(corner + grip.InnerDir * ((resize_grip_n & 1) ? ImVec2(window_border_size, resize_grip_draw_size) : ImVec2(resize_grip_draw_size, window_border_size)));
+                window->DrawList->PathLineTo(corner + grip.InnerDir * ((resize_grip_n & 1) ? ImVec2(resize_grip_draw_size, window_border_size) : ImVec2(window_border_size, resize_grip_draw_size)));
+                window->DrawList->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(corner.x + grip.InnerDir.x * (window_rounding + window_border_size), corner.y + grip.InnerDir.y * (window_rounding + window_border_size)), window_rounding, grip.AngleMin12, grip.AngleMax12);
+                window->DrawList->PathFillConvex(resize_grip_col[resize_grip_n]);
+            }
+        }
+
+        // Borders (for dock node host they will be rendered over after the tab bar)
+        if (handle_borders_and_resize_grips && !window->DockNodeAsHost)
+            RenderWindowOuterBorders(window);
+    }
+}
+
+// Render title text, collapse button, close button
+// When inside a dock node, this is handled in DockNodeCalcTabBarLayout() instead.
+void ImGui::RenderWindowTitleBarContents(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& title_bar_rect, const char* name, bool* p_open)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+    ImGuiWindowFlags flags = window->Flags;
+
+    const bool has_close_button = (p_open != NULL);
+    const bool has_collapse_button = !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse) && (style.WindowMenuButtonPosition != ImGuiDir_None);
+
+    // Close & Collapse button are on the Menu NavLayer and don't default focus (unless there's nothing else on that layer)
+    // FIXME-NAV: Might want (or not?) to set the equivalent of ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus so that mouse clicks on standard title bar items don't necessarily set nav/keyboard ref?
+    const ImGuiItemFlags item_flags_backup = g.CurrentItemFlags;
+    g.CurrentItemFlags |= ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus;
+    window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Menu;
+
+    // Layout buttons
+    // FIXME: Would be nice to generalize the subtleties expressed here into reusable code.
+    float pad_l = style.FramePadding.x;
+    float pad_r = style.FramePadding.x;
+    float button_sz = g.FontSize;
+    ImVec2 close_button_pos;
+    ImVec2 collapse_button_pos;
+    if (has_close_button)
+    {
+        pad_r += button_sz;
+        close_button_pos = ImVec2(title_bar_rect.Max.x - pad_r - style.FramePadding.x, title_bar_rect.Min.y);
+    }
+    if (has_collapse_button && style.WindowMenuButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Right)
+    {
+        pad_r += button_sz;
+        collapse_button_pos = ImVec2(title_bar_rect.Max.x - pad_r - style.FramePadding.x, title_bar_rect.Min.y);
+    }
+    if (has_collapse_button && style.WindowMenuButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Left)
+    {
+        collapse_button_pos = ImVec2(title_bar_rect.Min.x + pad_l - style.FramePadding.x, title_bar_rect.Min.y);
+        pad_l += button_sz;
+    }
+
+    // Collapse button (submitting first so it gets priority when choosing a navigation init fallback)
+    if (has_collapse_button)
+        if (CollapseButton(window->GetID("#COLLAPSE"), collapse_button_pos, NULL))
+            window->WantCollapseToggle = true; // Defer actual collapsing to next frame as we are too far in the Begin() function
+
+    // Close button
+    if (has_close_button)
+        if (CloseButton(window->GetID("#CLOSE"), close_button_pos))
+            *p_open = false;
+
+    window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Main;
+    g.CurrentItemFlags = item_flags_backup;
+
+    // Title bar text (with: horizontal alignment, avoiding collapse/close button, optional "unsaved document" marker)
+    // FIXME: Refactor text alignment facilities along with RenderText helpers, this is WAY too much messy code..
+    const float marker_size_x = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_UnsavedDocument) ? button_sz * 0.80f : 0.0f;
+    const ImVec2 text_size = CalcTextSize(name, NULL, true) + ImVec2(marker_size_x, 0.0f);
+
+    // As a nice touch we try to ensure that centered title text doesn't get affected by visibility of Close/Collapse button,
+    // while uncentered title text will still reach edges correctly.
+    if (pad_l > style.FramePadding.x)
+        pad_l += g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
+    if (pad_r > style.FramePadding.x)
+        pad_r += g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
+    if (style.WindowTitleAlign.x > 0.0f && style.WindowTitleAlign.x < 1.0f)
+    {
+        float centerness = ImSaturate(1.0f - ImFabs(style.WindowTitleAlign.x - 0.5f) * 2.0f); // 0.0f on either edges, 1.0f on center
+        float pad_extend = ImMin(ImMax(pad_l, pad_r), title_bar_rect.GetWidth() - pad_l - pad_r - text_size.x);
+        pad_l = ImMax(pad_l, pad_extend * centerness);
+        pad_r = ImMax(pad_r, pad_extend * centerness);
+    }
+
+    ImRect layout_r(title_bar_rect.Min.x + pad_l, title_bar_rect.Min.y, title_bar_rect.Max.x - pad_r, title_bar_rect.Max.y);
+    ImRect clip_r(layout_r.Min.x, layout_r.Min.y, ImMin(layout_r.Max.x + g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, title_bar_rect.Max.x), layout_r.Max.y);
+    if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_UnsavedDocument)
+    {
+        ImVec2 marker_pos;
+        marker_pos.x = ImClamp(layout_r.Min.x + (layout_r.GetWidth() - text_size.x) * style.WindowTitleAlign.x + text_size.x, layout_r.Min.x, layout_r.Max.x);
+        marker_pos.y = (layout_r.Min.y + layout_r.Max.y) * 0.5f;
+        if (marker_pos.x > layout_r.Min.x)
+        {
+            RenderBullet(window->DrawList, marker_pos, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text));
+            clip_r.Max.x = ImMin(clip_r.Max.x, marker_pos.x - (int)(marker_size_x * 0.5f));
+        }
+    }
+    //if (g.IO.KeyShift) window->DrawList->AddRect(layout_r.Min, layout_r.Max, IM_COL32(255, 128, 0, 255)); // [DEBUG]
+    //if (g.IO.KeyCtrl) window->DrawList->AddRect(clip_r.Min, clip_r.Max, IM_COL32(255, 128, 0, 255)); // [DEBUG]
+    RenderTextClipped(layout_r.Min, layout_r.Max, name, NULL, &text_size, style.WindowTitleAlign, &clip_r);
+}
+
+void ImGui::UpdateWindowParentAndRootLinks(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindowFlags flags, ImGuiWindow* parent_window)
+{
+    window->ParentWindow = parent_window;
+    window->RootWindow = window->RootWindowPopupTree = window->RootWindowDockTree = window->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight = window->RootWindowForNav = window;
+    if (parent_window && (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip))
+    {
+        window->RootWindowDockTree = parent_window->RootWindowDockTree;
+        if (!window->DockIsActive && !(parent_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_DockNodeHost))
+            window->RootWindow = parent_window->RootWindow;
+    }
+    if (parent_window && (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup))
+        window->RootWindowPopupTree = parent_window->RootWindowPopupTree;
+    if (parent_window && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal) && (flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup))) // FIXME: simply use _NoTitleBar ?
+        window->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight = parent_window->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight;
+    while (window->RootWindowForNav->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(window->RootWindowForNav->ParentWindow != NULL);
+        window->RootWindowForNav = window->RootWindowForNav->ParentWindow;
+    }
+}
+
+// When a modal popup is open, newly created windows that want focus (i.e. are not popups and do not specify ImGuiWindowFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing)
+// should be positioned behind that modal window, unless the window was created inside the modal begin-stack.
+// In case of multiple stacked modals newly created window honors begin stack order and does not go below its own modal parent.
+// - Window             // FindBlockingModal() returns Modal1
+//   - Window           //                  .. returns Modal1
+//   - Modal1           //                  .. returns Modal2
+//      - Window        //                  .. returns Modal2
+//          - Window    //                  .. returns Modal2
+//          - Modal2    //                  .. returns Modal2
+static ImGuiWindow* ImGui::FindBlockingModal(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.OpenPopupStack.Size <= 0)
+        return NULL;
+
+    // Find a modal that has common parent with specified window. Specified window should be positioned behind that modal.
+    for (int i = g.OpenPopupStack.Size - 1; i >= 0; i--)
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* popup_window = g.OpenPopupStack.Data[i].Window;
+        if (popup_window == NULL || !(popup_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal))
+            continue;
+        if (!popup_window->Active && !popup_window->WasActive)      // Check WasActive, because this code may run before popup renders on current frame, also check Active to handle newly created windows.
+            continue;
+        if (IsWindowWithinBeginStackOf(window, popup_window))       // Window is rendered over last modal, no render order change needed.
+            break;
+        for (ImGuiWindow* parent = popup_window->ParentWindowInBeginStack->RootWindow; parent != NULL; parent = parent->ParentWindowInBeginStack->RootWindow)
+            if (IsWindowWithinBeginStackOf(window, parent))
+                return popup_window;                                // Place window above its begin stack parent.
+    }
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+// Push a new Dear ImGui window to add widgets to.
+// - A default window called "Debug" is automatically stacked at the beginning of every frame so you can use widgets without explicitly calling a Begin/End pair.
+// - Begin/End can be called multiple times during the frame with the same window name to append content.
+// - The window name is used as a unique identifier to preserve window information across frames (and save rudimentary information to the .ini file).
+//   You can use the "##" or "###" markers to use the same label with different id, or same id with different label. See documentation at the top of this file.
+// - Return false when window is collapsed, so you can early out in your code. You always need to call ImGui::End() even if false is returned.
+// - Passing 'bool* p_open' displays a Close button on the upper-right corner of the window, the pointed value will be set to false when the button is pressed.
+bool ImGui::Begin(const char* name, bool* p_open, ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+    IM_ASSERT(name != NULL && name[0] != '\0');     // Window name required
+    IM_ASSERT(g.WithinFrameScope);                  // Forgot to call ImGui::NewFrame()
+    IM_ASSERT(g.FrameCountEnded != g.FrameCount);   // Called ImGui::Render() or ImGui::EndFrame() and haven't called ImGui::NewFrame() again yet
+
+    // Find or create
+    ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(name);
+    const bool window_just_created = (window == NULL);
+    if (window_just_created)
+        window = CreateNewWindow(name, flags);
+    else
+        UpdateWindowInFocusOrderList(window, window_just_created, flags);
+
+    // Automatically disable manual moving/resizing when NoInputs is set
+    if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs) == ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs)
+        flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize;
+
+    if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened)
+        IM_ASSERT(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow);
+
+    const int current_frame = g.FrameCount;
+    const bool first_begin_of_the_frame = (window->LastFrameActive != current_frame);
+    window->IsFallbackWindow = (g.CurrentWindowStack.Size == 0 && g.WithinFrameScopeWithImplicitWindow);
+
+    // Update the Appearing flag (note: the BeginDocked() path may also set this to true later)
+    bool window_just_activated_by_user = (window->LastFrameActive < current_frame - 1); // Not using !WasActive because the implicit "Debug" window would always toggle off->on
+    if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)
+    {
+        ImGuiPopupData& popup_ref = g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size];
+        window_just_activated_by_user |= (window->PopupId != popup_ref.PopupId); // We recycle popups so treat window as activated if popup id changed
+        window_just_activated_by_user |= (window != popup_ref.Window);
+    }
+
+    // Update Flags, LastFrameActive, BeginOrderXXX fields
+    const bool window_was_appearing = window->Appearing;
+    if (first_begin_of_the_frame)
+    {
+        window->Appearing = window_just_activated_by_user;
+        if (window->Appearing)
+            SetWindowConditionAllowFlags(window, ImGuiCond_Appearing, true);
+
+        window->FlagsPreviousFrame = window->Flags;
+        window->Flags = (ImGuiWindowFlags)flags;
+        window->LastFrameActive = current_frame;
+        window->LastTimeActive = (float)g.Time;
+        window->BeginOrderWithinParent = 0;
+        window->BeginOrderWithinContext = (short)(g.WindowsActiveCount++);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        flags = window->Flags;
+    }
+
+    // Docking
+    // (NB: during the frame dock nodes are created, it is possible that (window->DockIsActive == false) even though (window->DockNode->Windows.Size > 1)
+    IM_ASSERT(window->DockNode == NULL || window->DockNodeAsHost == NULL); // Cannot be both
+    if (g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasDock)
+        SetWindowDock(window, g.NextWindowData.DockId, g.NextWindowData.DockCond);
+    if (first_begin_of_the_frame)
+    {
+        bool has_dock_node = (window->DockId != 0 || window->DockNode != NULL);
+        bool new_auto_dock_node = !has_dock_node && GetWindowAlwaysWantOwnTabBar(window);
+        bool dock_node_was_visible = window->DockNodeIsVisible;
+        bool dock_tab_was_visible = window->DockTabIsVisible;
+        if (has_dock_node || new_auto_dock_node)
+        {
+            BeginDocked(window, p_open);
+            flags = window->Flags;
+            if (window->DockIsActive)
+            {
+                IM_ASSERT(window->DockNode != NULL);
+                g.NextWindowData.Flags &= ~ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSizeConstraint; // Docking currently override constraints
+            }
+
+            // Amend the Appearing flag
+            if (window->DockTabIsVisible && !dock_tab_was_visible && dock_node_was_visible && !window->Appearing && !window_was_appearing)
+            {
+                window->Appearing = true;
+                SetWindowConditionAllowFlags(window, ImGuiCond_Appearing, true);
+            }
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            window->DockIsActive = window->DockNodeIsVisible = window->DockTabIsVisible = false;
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Parent window is latched only on the first call to Begin() of the frame, so further append-calls can be done from a different window stack
+    ImGuiWindow* parent_window_in_stack = (window->DockIsActive && window->DockNode->HostWindow) ? window->DockNode->HostWindow : g.CurrentWindowStack.empty() ? NULL : g.CurrentWindowStack.back().Window;
+    ImGuiWindow* parent_window = first_begin_of_the_frame ? ((flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)) ? parent_window_in_stack : NULL) : window->ParentWindow;
+    IM_ASSERT(parent_window != NULL || !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow));
+
+    // We allow window memory to be compacted so recreate the base stack when needed.
+    if (window->IDStack.Size == 0)
+        window->IDStack.push_back(window->ID);
+
+    // Add to stack
+    // We intentionally set g.CurrentWindow to NULL to prevent usage until when the viewport is set, then will call SetCurrentWindow()
+    g.CurrentWindow = window;
+    ImGuiWindowStackData window_stack_data;
+    window_stack_data.Window = window;
+    window_stack_data.ParentLastItemDataBackup = g.LastItemData;
+    window_stack_data.StackSizesOnBegin.SetToCurrentState();
+    g.CurrentWindowStack.push_back(window_stack_data);
+    g.CurrentWindow = NULL;
+    if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)
+        g.BeginMenuCount++;
+
+    if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)
+    {
+        ImGuiPopupData& popup_ref = g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size];
+        popup_ref.Window = window;
+        popup_ref.ParentNavLayer = parent_window_in_stack->DC.NavLayerCurrent;
+        g.BeginPopupStack.push_back(popup_ref);
+        window->PopupId = popup_ref.PopupId;
+    }
+
+    // Update ->RootWindow and others pointers (before any possible call to FocusWindow)
+    if (first_begin_of_the_frame)
+    {
+        UpdateWindowParentAndRootLinks(window, flags, parent_window);
+        window->ParentWindowInBeginStack = parent_window_in_stack;
+    }
+
+    // Process SetNextWindow***() calls
+    // (FIXME: Consider splitting the HasXXX flags into X/Y components
+    bool window_pos_set_by_api = false;
+    bool window_size_x_set_by_api = false, window_size_y_set_by_api = false;
+    if (g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasPos)
+    {
+        window_pos_set_by_api = (window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags & g.NextWindowData.PosCond) != 0;
+        if (window_pos_set_by_api && ImLengthSqr(g.NextWindowData.PosPivotVal) > 0.00001f)
+        {
+            // May be processed on the next frame if this is our first frame and we are measuring size
+            // FIXME: Look into removing the branch so everything can go through this same code path for consistency.
+            window->SetWindowPosVal = g.NextWindowData.PosVal;
+            window->SetWindowPosPivot = g.NextWindowData.PosPivotVal;
+            window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags &= ~(ImGuiCond_Once | ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver | ImGuiCond_Appearing);
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            SetWindowPos(window, g.NextWindowData.PosVal, g.NextWindowData.PosCond);
+        }
+    }
+    if (g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSize)
+    {
+        window_size_x_set_by_api = (window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags & g.NextWindowData.SizeCond) != 0 && (g.NextWindowData.SizeVal.x > 0.0f);
+        window_size_y_set_by_api = (window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags & g.NextWindowData.SizeCond) != 0 && (g.NextWindowData.SizeVal.y > 0.0f);
+        SetWindowSize(window, g.NextWindowData.SizeVal, g.NextWindowData.SizeCond);
+    }
+    if (g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasScroll)
+    {
+        if (g.NextWindowData.ScrollVal.x >= 0.0f)
+        {
+            window->ScrollTarget.x = g.NextWindowData.ScrollVal.x;
+            window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.x = 0.0f;
+        }
+        if (g.NextWindowData.ScrollVal.y >= 0.0f)
+        {
+            window->ScrollTarget.y = g.NextWindowData.ScrollVal.y;
+            window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.y = 0.0f;
+        }
+    }
+    if (g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasContentSize)
+        window->ContentSizeExplicit = g.NextWindowData.ContentSizeVal;
+    else if (first_begin_of_the_frame)
+        window->ContentSizeExplicit = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+    if (g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasWindowClass)
+        window->WindowClass = g.NextWindowData.WindowClass;
+    if (g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasCollapsed)
+        SetWindowCollapsed(window, g.NextWindowData.CollapsedVal, g.NextWindowData.CollapsedCond);
+    if (g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasFocus)
+        FocusWindow(window);
+    if (window->Appearing)
+        SetWindowConditionAllowFlags(window, ImGuiCond_Appearing, false);
+
+    // When reusing window again multiple times a frame, just append content (don't need to setup again)
+    if (first_begin_of_the_frame)
+    {
+        // Initialize
+        const bool window_is_child_tooltip = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip); // FIXME-WIP: Undocumented behavior of Child+Tooltip for pinned tooltip (#1345)
+        const bool window_just_appearing_after_hidden_for_resize = (window->HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems > 0);
+        window->Active = true;
+        window->HasCloseButton = (p_open != NULL);
+        window->ClipRect = ImVec4(-FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX, +FLT_MAX, +FLT_MAX);
+        window->IDStack.resize(1);
+        window->DrawList->_ResetForNewFrame();
+        window->DC.CurrentTableIdx = -1;
+        if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_DockNodeHost)
+        {
+            window->DrawList->ChannelsSplit(2);
+            window->DrawList->ChannelsSetCurrent(1); // Render decorations on channel 1 as we will render the backgrounds manually later
+        }
+
+        // Restore buffer capacity when woken from a compacted state, to avoid
+        if (window->MemoryCompacted)
+            GcAwakeTransientWindowBuffers(window);
+
+        // Update stored window name when it changes (which can _only_ happen with the "###" operator, so the ID would stay unchanged).
+        // The title bar always display the 'name' parameter, so we only update the string storage if it needs to be visible to the end-user elsewhere.
+        bool window_title_visible_elsewhere = false;
+        if ((window->Viewport && window->Viewport->Window == window) || (window->DockIsActive))
+            window_title_visible_elsewhere = true;
+        else if (g.NavWindowingListWindow != NULL && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus) == 0)   // Window titles visible when using CTRL+TAB
+            window_title_visible_elsewhere = true;
+        if (window_title_visible_elsewhere && !window_just_created && strcmp(name, window->Name) != 0)
+        {
+            size_t buf_len = (size_t)window->NameBufLen;
+            window->Name = ImStrdupcpy(window->Name, &buf_len, name);
+            window->NameBufLen = (int)buf_len;
+        }
+
+        // UPDATE CONTENTS SIZE, UPDATE HIDDEN STATUS
+
+        // Update contents size from last frame for auto-fitting (or use explicit size)
+        CalcWindowContentSizes(window, &window->ContentSize, &window->ContentSizeIdeal);
+
+        // FIXME: These flags are decremented before they are used. This means that in order to have these fields produce their intended behaviors
+        // for one frame we must set them to at least 2, which is counter-intuitive. HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems is a more complicated case because
+        // it has a single usage before this code block and may be set below before it is finally checked.
+        if (window->HiddenFramesCanSkipItems > 0)
+            window->HiddenFramesCanSkipItems--;
+        if (window->HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems > 0)
+            window->HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems--;
+        if (window->HiddenFramesForRenderOnly > 0)
+            window->HiddenFramesForRenderOnly--;
+
+        // Hide new windows for one frame until they calculate their size
+        if (window_just_created && (!window_size_x_set_by_api || !window_size_y_set_by_api))
+            window->HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems = 1;
+
+        // Hide popup/tooltip window when re-opening while we measure size (because we recycle the windows)
+        // We reset Size/ContentSize for reappearing popups/tooltips early in this function, so further code won't be tempted to use the old size.
+        if (window_just_activated_by_user && (flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)) != 0)
+        {
+            window->HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems = 1;
+            if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize)
+            {
+                if (!window_size_x_set_by_api)
+                    window->Size.x = window->SizeFull.x = 0.f;
+                if (!window_size_y_set_by_api)
+                    window->Size.y = window->SizeFull.y = 0.f;
+                window->ContentSize = window->ContentSizeIdeal = ImVec2(0.f, 0.f);
+            }
+        }
+
+        // SELECT VIEWPORT
+        // We need to do this before using any style/font sizes, as viewport with a different DPI may affect font sizes.
+
+        WindowSelectViewport(window);
+        SetCurrentViewport(window, window->Viewport);
+        window->FontDpiScale = (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_DpiEnableScaleFonts) ? window->Viewport->DpiScale : 1.0f;
+        SetCurrentWindow(window);
+        flags = window->Flags;
+
+        // LOCK BORDER SIZE AND PADDING FOR THE FRAME (so that altering them doesn't cause inconsistencies)
+        // We read Style data after the call to UpdateSelectWindowViewport() which might be swapping the style.
+
+        if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)
+            window->WindowBorderSize = style.ChildBorderSize;
+        else
+            window->WindowBorderSize = ((flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)) ? style.PopupBorderSize : style.WindowBorderSize;
+        if (!window->DockIsActive && (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && !(flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysUseWindowPadding | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)) && window->WindowBorderSize == 0.0f)
+            window->WindowPadding = ImVec2(0.0f, (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar) ? style.WindowPadding.y : 0.0f);
+        else
+            window->WindowPadding = style.WindowPadding;
+
+        // Lock menu offset so size calculation can use it as menu-bar windows need a minimum size.
+        window->DC.MenuBarOffset.x = ImMax(ImMax(window->WindowPadding.x, style.ItemSpacing.x), g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal.x);
+        window->DC.MenuBarOffset.y = g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal.y;
+
+        // Collapse window by double-clicking on title bar
+        // At this point we don't have a clipping rectangle setup yet, so we can use the title bar area for hit detection and drawing
+        if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse) && !window->DockIsActive)
+        {
+            // We don't use a regular button+id to test for double-click on title bar (mostly due to legacy reason, could be fixed), so verify that we don't have items over the title bar.
+            ImRect title_bar_rect = window->TitleBarRect();
+            if (g.HoveredWindow == window && g.HoveredId == 0 && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame == 0 && IsMouseHoveringRect(title_bar_rect.Min, title_bar_rect.Max) && g.IO.MouseClickedCount[0] == 2)
+                window->WantCollapseToggle = true;
+            if (window->WantCollapseToggle)
+            {
+                window->Collapsed = !window->Collapsed;
+                MarkIniSettingsDirty(window);
+            }
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            window->Collapsed = false;
+        }
+        window->WantCollapseToggle = false;
+
+        // SIZE
+
+        // Calculate auto-fit size, handle automatic resize
+        const ImVec2 size_auto_fit = CalcWindowAutoFitSize(window, window->ContentSizeIdeal);
+        bool use_current_size_for_scrollbar_x = window_just_created;
+        bool use_current_size_for_scrollbar_y = window_just_created;
+        if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) && !window->Collapsed)
+        {
+            // Using SetNextWindowSize() overrides ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize, so it can be used on tooltips/popups, etc.
+            if (!window_size_x_set_by_api)
+            {
+                window->SizeFull.x = size_auto_fit.x;
+                use_current_size_for_scrollbar_x = true;
+            }
+            if (!window_size_y_set_by_api)
+            {
+                window->SizeFull.y = size_auto_fit.y;
+                use_current_size_for_scrollbar_y = true;
+            }
+        }
+        else if (window->AutoFitFramesX > 0 || window->AutoFitFramesY > 0)
+        {
+            // Auto-fit may only grow window during the first few frames
+            // We still process initial auto-fit on collapsed windows to get a window width, but otherwise don't honor ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize when collapsed.
+            if (!window_size_x_set_by_api && window->AutoFitFramesX > 0)
+            {
+                window->SizeFull.x = window->AutoFitOnlyGrows ? ImMax(window->SizeFull.x, size_auto_fit.x) : size_auto_fit.x;
+                use_current_size_for_scrollbar_x = true;
+            }
+            if (!window_size_y_set_by_api && window->AutoFitFramesY > 0)
+            {
+                window->SizeFull.y = window->AutoFitOnlyGrows ? ImMax(window->SizeFull.y, size_auto_fit.y) : size_auto_fit.y;
+                use_current_size_for_scrollbar_y = true;
+            }
+            if (!window->Collapsed)
+                MarkIniSettingsDirty(window);
+        }
+
+        // Apply minimum/maximum window size constraints and final size
+        window->SizeFull = CalcWindowSizeAfterConstraint(window, window->SizeFull);
+        window->Size = window->Collapsed && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) ? window->TitleBarRect().GetSize() : window->SizeFull;
+
+        // Decoration size
+        const float decoration_up_height = window->TitleBarHeight() + window->MenuBarHeight();
+
+        // POSITION
+
+        // Popup latch its initial position, will position itself when it appears next frame
+        if (window_just_activated_by_user)
+        {
+            window->AutoPosLastDirection = ImGuiDir_None;
+            if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) != 0 && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal) && !window_pos_set_by_api) // FIXME: BeginPopup() could use SetNextWindowPos()
+                window->Pos = g.BeginPopupStack.back().OpenPopupPos;
+        }
+
+        // Position child window
+        if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)
+        {
+            IM_ASSERT(parent_window && parent_window->Active);
+            window->BeginOrderWithinParent = (short)parent_window->DC.ChildWindows.Size;
+            parent_window->DC.ChildWindows.push_back(window);
+            if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !window_pos_set_by_api && !window_is_child_tooltip)
+                window->Pos = parent_window->DC.CursorPos;
+        }
+
+        const bool window_pos_with_pivot = (window->SetWindowPosVal.x != FLT_MAX && window->HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems == 0);
+        if (window_pos_with_pivot)
+            SetWindowPos(window, window->SetWindowPosVal - window->Size * window->SetWindowPosPivot, 0); // Position given a pivot (e.g. for centering)
+        else if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) != 0)
+            window->Pos = FindBestWindowPosForPopup(window);
+        else if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) != 0 && !window_pos_set_by_api && window_just_appearing_after_hidden_for_resize)
+            window->Pos = FindBestWindowPosForPopup(window);
+        else if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip) != 0 && !window_pos_set_by_api && !window_is_child_tooltip)
+            window->Pos = FindBestWindowPosForPopup(window);
+
+        // Late create viewport if we don't fit within our current host viewport.
+        if (window->ViewportAllowPlatformMonitorExtend >= 0 && !window->ViewportOwned && !(window->Viewport->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_Minimized))
+            if (!window->Viewport->GetMainRect().Contains(window->Rect()))
+            {
+                // This is based on the assumption that the DPI will be known ahead (same as the DPI of the selection done in UpdateSelectWindowViewport)
+                //ImGuiViewport* old_viewport = window->Viewport;
+                window->Viewport = AddUpdateViewport(window, window->ID, window->Pos, window->Size, ImGuiViewportFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing);
+
+                // FIXME-DPI
+                //IM_ASSERT(old_viewport->DpiScale == window->Viewport->DpiScale); // FIXME-DPI: Something went wrong
+                SetCurrentViewport(window, window->Viewport);
+                window->FontDpiScale = (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_DpiEnableScaleFonts) ? window->Viewport->DpiScale : 1.0f;
+                SetCurrentWindow(window);
+            }
+
+        if (window->ViewportOwned)
+            WindowSyncOwnedViewport(window, parent_window_in_stack);
+
+        // Calculate the range of allowed position for that window (to be movable and visible past safe area padding)
+        // When clamping to stay visible, we will enforce that window->Pos stays inside of visibility_rect.
+        ImRect viewport_rect(window->Viewport->GetMainRect());
+        ImRect viewport_work_rect(window->Viewport->GetWorkRect());
+        ImVec2 visibility_padding = ImMax(style.DisplayWindowPadding, style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding);
+        ImRect visibility_rect(viewport_work_rect.Min + visibility_padding, viewport_work_rect.Max - visibility_padding);
+
+        // Clamp position/size so window stays visible within its viewport or monitor
+        // Ignore zero-sized display explicitly to avoid losing positions if a window manager reports zero-sized window when initializing or minimizing.
+        // FIXME: Similar to code in GetWindowAllowedExtentRect()
+        if (!window_pos_set_by_api && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && window->AutoFitFramesX <= 0 && window->AutoFitFramesY <= 0)
+        {
+            if (!window->ViewportOwned && viewport_rect.GetWidth() > 0 && viewport_rect.GetHeight() > 0.0f)
+            {
+                ClampWindowRect(window, visibility_rect);
+            }
+            else if (window->ViewportOwned && g.PlatformIO.Monitors.Size > 0)
+            {
+                // Lost windows (e.g. a monitor disconnected) will naturally moved to the fallback/dummy monitor aka the main viewport.
+                const ImGuiPlatformMonitor* monitor = GetViewportPlatformMonitor(window->Viewport);
+                visibility_rect.Min = monitor->WorkPos + visibility_padding;
+                visibility_rect.Max = monitor->WorkPos + monitor->WorkSize - visibility_padding;
+                ClampWindowRect(window, visibility_rect);
+            }
+        }
+        window->Pos = ImFloor(window->Pos);
+
+        // Lock window rounding for the frame (so that altering them doesn't cause inconsistencies)
+        // Large values tend to lead to variety of artifacts and are not recommended.
+        if (window->ViewportOwned || window->DockIsActive)
+            window->WindowRounding = 0.0f;
+        else
+            window->WindowRounding = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) ? style.ChildRounding : ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)) ? style.PopupRounding : style.WindowRounding;
+
+        // For windows with title bar or menu bar, we clamp to FrameHeight(FontSize + FramePadding.y * 2.0f) to completely hide artifacts.
+        //if ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar) || !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar))
+        //    window->WindowRounding = ImMin(window->WindowRounding, g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f);
+
+        // Apply window focus (new and reactivated windows are moved to front)
+        bool want_focus = false;
+        if (window_just_activated_by_user && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing))
+        {
+            if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)
+                want_focus = true;
+            else if ((window->DockIsActive || (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) == 0) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip))
+                want_focus = true;
+
+            ImGuiWindow* modal = GetTopMostPopupModal();
+            if (modal != NULL && !IsWindowWithinBeginStackOf(window, modal))
+            {
+                // Avoid focusing a window that is created outside of active modal. This will prevent active modal from being closed.
+                // Since window is not focused it would reappear at the same display position like the last time it was visible.
+                // In case of completely new windows it would go to the top (over current modal), but input to such window would still be blocked by modal.
+                // Position window behind a modal that is not a begin-parent of this window.
+                want_focus = false;
+                if (window == window->RootWindow)
+                {
+                    ImGuiWindow* blocking_modal = FindBlockingModal(window);
+                    IM_ASSERT(blocking_modal != NULL);
+                    BringWindowToDisplayBehind(window, blocking_modal);
+                }
+            }
+        }
+
+        // [Test Engine] Register whole window in the item system
+#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_TEST_ENGINE
+        if (g.TestEngineHookItems)
+        {
+            IM_ASSERT(window->IDStack.Size == 1);
+            window->IDStack.Size = 0;
+            IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_ADD(window->Rect(), window->ID);
+            IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(window->ID, window->Name, (g.HoveredWindow == window) ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect : 0);
+            window->IDStack.Size = 1;
+        }
+#endif
+
+        // Decide if we are going to handle borders and resize grips
+        const bool handle_borders_and_resize_grips = (window->DockNodeAsHost || !window->DockIsActive);
+
+        // Handle manual resize: Resize Grips, Borders, Gamepad
+        int border_held = -1;
+        ImU32 resize_grip_col[4] = {};
+        const int resize_grip_count = g.IO.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges ? 2 : 1; // Allow resize from lower-left if we have the mouse cursor feedback for it.
+        const float resize_grip_draw_size = IM_FLOOR(ImMax(g.FontSize * 1.10f, window->WindowRounding + 1.0f + g.FontSize * 0.2f));
+        if (handle_borders_and_resize_grips && !window->Collapsed)
+            if (UpdateWindowManualResize(window, size_auto_fit, &border_held, resize_grip_count, &resize_grip_col[0], visibility_rect))
+                use_current_size_for_scrollbar_x = use_current_size_for_scrollbar_y = true;
+        window->ResizeBorderHeld = (signed char)border_held;
+
+        // Synchronize window --> viewport again and one last time (clamping and manual resize may have affected either)
+        if (window->ViewportOwned)
+        {
+            if (!window->Viewport->PlatformRequestMove)
+                window->Viewport->Pos = window->Pos;
+            if (!window->Viewport->PlatformRequestResize)
+                window->Viewport->Size = window->Size;
+            window->Viewport->UpdateWorkRect();
+            viewport_rect = window->Viewport->GetMainRect();
+        }
+
+        // Save last known viewport position within the window itself (so it can be saved in .ini file and restored)
+        window->ViewportPos = window->Viewport->Pos;
+
+        // SCROLLBAR VISIBILITY
+
+        // Update scrollbar visibility (based on the Size that was effective during last frame or the auto-resized Size).
+        if (!window->Collapsed)
+        {
+            // When reading the current size we need to read it after size constraints have been applied.
+            // When we use InnerRect here we are intentionally reading last frame size, same for ScrollbarSizes values before we set them again.
+            ImVec2 avail_size_from_current_frame = ImVec2(window->SizeFull.x, window->SizeFull.y - decoration_up_height);
+            ImVec2 avail_size_from_last_frame = window->InnerRect.GetSize() + window->ScrollbarSizes;
+            ImVec2 needed_size_from_last_frame = window_just_created ? ImVec2(0, 0) : window->ContentSize + window->WindowPadding * 2.0f;
+            float size_x_for_scrollbars = use_current_size_for_scrollbar_x ? avail_size_from_current_frame.x : avail_size_from_last_frame.x;
+            float size_y_for_scrollbars = use_current_size_for_scrollbar_y ? avail_size_from_current_frame.y : avail_size_from_last_frame.y;
+            //bool scrollbar_y_from_last_frame = window->ScrollbarY; // FIXME: May want to use that in the ScrollbarX expression? How many pros vs cons?
+            window->ScrollbarY = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysVerticalScrollbar) || ((needed_size_from_last_frame.y > size_y_for_scrollbars) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar));
+            window->ScrollbarX = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysHorizontalScrollbar) || ((needed_size_from_last_frame.x > size_x_for_scrollbars - (window->ScrollbarY ? style.ScrollbarSize : 0.0f)) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar) && (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar));
+            if (window->ScrollbarX && !window->ScrollbarY)
+                window->ScrollbarY = (needed_size_from_last_frame.y > size_y_for_scrollbars) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar);
+            window->ScrollbarSizes = ImVec2(window->ScrollbarY ? style.ScrollbarSize : 0.0f, window->ScrollbarX ? style.ScrollbarSize : 0.0f);
+        }
+
+        // UPDATE RECTANGLES (1- THOSE NOT AFFECTED BY SCROLLING)
+        // Update various regions. Variables they depends on should be set above in this function.
+        // We set this up after processing the resize grip so that our rectangles doesn't lag by a frame.
+
+        // Outer rectangle
+        // Not affected by window border size. Used by:
+        // - FindHoveredWindow() (w/ extra padding when border resize is enabled)
+        // - Begin() initial clipping rect for drawing window background and borders.
+        // - Begin() clipping whole child
+        const ImRect host_rect = ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !window_is_child_tooltip) ? parent_window->ClipRect : viewport_rect;
+        const ImRect outer_rect = window->Rect();
+        const ImRect title_bar_rect = window->TitleBarRect();
+        window->OuterRectClipped = outer_rect;
+        if (window->DockIsActive)
+            window->OuterRectClipped.Min.y += window->TitleBarHeight();
+        window->OuterRectClipped.ClipWith(host_rect);
+
+        // Inner rectangle
+        // Not affected by window border size. Used by:
+        // - InnerClipRect
+        // - ScrollToRectEx()
+        // - NavUpdatePageUpPageDown()
+        // - Scrollbar()
+        window->InnerRect.Min.x = window->Pos.x;
+        window->InnerRect.Min.y = window->Pos.y + decoration_up_height;
+        window->InnerRect.Max.x = window->Pos.x + window->Size.x - window->ScrollbarSizes.x;
+        window->InnerRect.Max.y = window->Pos.y + window->Size.y - window->ScrollbarSizes.y;
+
+        // Inner clipping rectangle.
+        // Will extend a little bit outside the normal work region.
+        // This is to allow e.g. Selectable or CollapsingHeader or some separators to cover that space.
+        // Force round operator last to ensure that e.g. (int)(max.x-min.x) in user's render code produce correct result.
+        // Note that if our window is collapsed we will end up with an inverted (~null) clipping rectangle which is the correct behavior.
+        // Affected by window/frame border size. Used by:
+        // - Begin() initial clip rect
+        float top_border_size = (((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar) || !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar)) ? style.FrameBorderSize : window->WindowBorderSize);
+        window->InnerClipRect.Min.x = ImFloor(0.5f + window->InnerRect.Min.x + ImMax(ImFloor(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f), window->WindowBorderSize));
+        window->InnerClipRect.Min.y = ImFloor(0.5f + window->InnerRect.Min.y + top_border_size);
+        window->InnerClipRect.Max.x = ImFloor(0.5f + window->InnerRect.Max.x - ImMax(ImFloor(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f), window->WindowBorderSize));
+        window->InnerClipRect.Max.y = ImFloor(0.5f + window->InnerRect.Max.y - window->WindowBorderSize);
+        window->InnerClipRect.ClipWithFull(host_rect);
+
+        // Default item width. Make it proportional to window size if window manually resizes
+        if (window->Size.x > 0.0f && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize))
+            window->ItemWidthDefault = ImFloor(window->Size.x * 0.65f);
+        else
+            window->ItemWidthDefault = ImFloor(g.FontSize * 16.0f);
+
+        // SCROLLING
+
+        // Lock down maximum scrolling
+        // The value of ScrollMax are ahead from ScrollbarX/ScrollbarY which is intentionally using InnerRect from previous rect in order to accommodate
+        // for right/bottom aligned items without creating a scrollbar.
+        window->ScrollMax.x = ImMax(0.0f, window->ContentSize.x + window->WindowPadding.x * 2.0f - window->InnerRect.GetWidth());
+        window->ScrollMax.y = ImMax(0.0f, window->ContentSize.y + window->WindowPadding.y * 2.0f - window->InnerRect.GetHeight());
+
+        // Apply scrolling
+        window->Scroll = CalcNextScrollFromScrollTargetAndClamp(window);
+        window->ScrollTarget = ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);
+
+        // DRAWING
+
+        // Setup draw list and outer clipping rectangle
+        IM_ASSERT(window->DrawList->CmdBuffer.Size == 1 && window->DrawList->CmdBuffer[0].ElemCount == 0);
+        window->DrawList->PushTextureID(g.Font->ContainerAtlas->TexID);
+        PushClipRect(host_rect.Min, host_rect.Max, false);
+
+        // Child windows can render their decoration (bg color, border, scrollbars, etc.) within their parent to save a draw call (since 1.71)
+        // When using overlapping child windows, this will break the assumption that child z-order is mapped to submission order.
+        // FIXME: User code may rely on explicit sorting of overlapping child window and would need to disable this somehow. Please get in contact if you are affected (github #4493)
+        const bool is_undocked_or_docked_visible = !window->DockIsActive || window->DockTabIsVisible;
+        if (is_undocked_or_docked_visible)
+        {
+            bool render_decorations_in_parent = false;
+            if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !window_is_child_tooltip)
+            {
+                // - We test overlap with the previous child window only (testing all would end up being O(log N) not a good investment here)
+                // - We disable this when the parent window has zero vertices, which is a common pattern leading to laying out multiple overlapping childs
+                ImGuiWindow* previous_child = parent_window->DC.ChildWindows.Size >= 2 ? parent_window->DC.ChildWindows[parent_window->DC.ChildWindows.Size - 2] : NULL;
+                bool previous_child_overlapping = previous_child ? previous_child->Rect().Overlaps(window->Rect()) : false;
+                bool parent_is_empty = parent_window->DrawList->VtxBuffer.Size > 0;
+                if (window->DrawList->CmdBuffer.back().ElemCount == 0 && parent_is_empty && !previous_child_overlapping)
+                    render_decorations_in_parent = true;
+            }
+            if (render_decorations_in_parent)
+                window->DrawList = parent_window->DrawList;
+
+            // Handle title bar, scrollbar, resize grips and resize borders
+            const ImGuiWindow* window_to_highlight = g.NavWindowingTarget ? g.NavWindowingTarget : g.NavWindow;
+            const bool title_bar_is_highlight = want_focus || (window_to_highlight && (window->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight == window_to_highlight->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight || (window->DockNode && window->DockNode == window_to_highlight->DockNode)));
+            RenderWindowDecorations(window, title_bar_rect, title_bar_is_highlight, handle_borders_and_resize_grips, resize_grip_count, resize_grip_col, resize_grip_draw_size);
+
+            if (render_decorations_in_parent)
+                window->DrawList = &window->DrawListInst;
+        }
+
+        // UPDATE RECTANGLES (2- THOSE AFFECTED BY SCROLLING)
+
+        // Work rectangle.
+        // Affected by window padding and border size. Used by:
+        // - Columns() for right-most edge
+        // - TreeNode(), CollapsingHeader() for right-most edge
+        // - BeginTabBar() for right-most edge
+        const bool allow_scrollbar_x = !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar) && (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar);
+        const bool allow_scrollbar_y = !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar);
+        const float work_rect_size_x = (window->ContentSizeExplicit.x != 0.0f ? window->ContentSizeExplicit.x : ImMax(allow_scrollbar_x ? window->ContentSize.x : 0.0f, window->Size.x - window->WindowPadding.x * 2.0f - window->ScrollbarSizes.x));
+        const float work_rect_size_y = (window->ContentSizeExplicit.y != 0.0f ? window->ContentSizeExplicit.y : ImMax(allow_scrollbar_y ? window->ContentSize.y : 0.0f, window->Size.y - window->WindowPadding.y * 2.0f - decoration_up_height - window->ScrollbarSizes.y));
+        window->WorkRect.Min.x = ImFloor(window->InnerRect.Min.x - window->Scroll.x + ImMax(window->WindowPadding.x, window->WindowBorderSize));
+        window->WorkRect.Min.y = ImFloor(window->InnerRect.Min.y - window->Scroll.y + ImMax(window->WindowPadding.y, window->WindowBorderSize));
+        window->WorkRect.Max.x = window->WorkRect.Min.x + work_rect_size_x;
+        window->WorkRect.Max.y = window->WorkRect.Min.y + work_rect_size_y;
+        window->ParentWorkRect = window->WorkRect;
+
+        // [LEGACY] Content Region
+        // FIXME-OBSOLETE: window->ContentRegionRect.Max is currently very misleading / partly faulty, but some BeginChild() patterns relies on it.
+        // Used by:
+        // - Mouse wheel scrolling + many other things
+        window->ContentRegionRect.Min.x = window->Pos.x - window->Scroll.x + window->WindowPadding.x;
+        window->ContentRegionRect.Min.y = window->Pos.y - window->Scroll.y + window->WindowPadding.y + decoration_up_height;
+        window->ContentRegionRect.Max.x = window->ContentRegionRect.Min.x + (window->ContentSizeExplicit.x != 0.0f ? window->ContentSizeExplicit.x : (window->Size.x - window->WindowPadding.x * 2.0f - window->ScrollbarSizes.x));
+        window->ContentRegionRect.Max.y = window->ContentRegionRect.Min.y + (window->ContentSizeExplicit.y != 0.0f ? window->ContentSizeExplicit.y : (window->Size.y - window->WindowPadding.y * 2.0f - decoration_up_height - window->ScrollbarSizes.y));
+
+        // Setup drawing context
+        // (NB: That term "drawing context / DC" lost its meaning a long time ago. Initially was meant to hold transient data only. Nowadays difference between window-> and window->DC-> is dubious.)
+        window->DC.Indent.x = 0.0f + window->WindowPadding.x - window->Scroll.x;
+        window->DC.GroupOffset.x = 0.0f;
+        window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = 0.0f;
+
+        // Record the loss of precision of CursorStartPos which can happen due to really large scrolling amount.
+        // This is used by clipper to compensate and fix the most common use case of large scroll area. Easy and cheap, next best thing compared to switching everything to double or ImU64.
+        double start_pos_highp_x = (double)window->Pos.x + window->WindowPadding.x - (double)window->Scroll.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x;
+        double start_pos_highp_y = (double)window->Pos.y + window->WindowPadding.y - (double)window->Scroll.y + decoration_up_height;
+        window->DC.CursorStartPos  = ImVec2((float)start_pos_highp_x, (float)start_pos_highp_y);
+        window->DC.CursorStartPosLossyness = ImVec2((float)(start_pos_highp_x - window->DC.CursorStartPos.x), (float)(start_pos_highp_y - window->DC.CursorStartPos.y));
+        window->DC.CursorPos = window->DC.CursorStartPos;
+        window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine = window->DC.CursorPos;
+        window->DC.CursorMaxPos = window->DC.CursorStartPos;
+        window->DC.IdealMaxPos = window->DC.CursorStartPos;
+        window->DC.CurrLineSize = window->DC.PrevLineSize = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+        window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset = window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset = 0.0f;
+        window->DC.IsSameLine = false;
+
+        window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Main;
+        window->DC.NavLayersActiveMask = window->DC.NavLayersActiveMaskNext;
+        window->DC.NavLayersActiveMaskNext = 0x00;
+        window->DC.NavHideHighlightOneFrame = false;
+        window->DC.NavHasScroll = (window->ScrollMax.y > 0.0f);
+
+        window->DC.MenuBarAppending = false;
+        window->DC.MenuColumns.Update(style.ItemSpacing.x, window_just_activated_by_user);
+        window->DC.TreeDepth = 0;
+        window->DC.TreeJumpToParentOnPopMask = 0x00;
+        window->DC.ChildWindows.resize(0);
+        window->DC.StateStorage = &window->StateStorage;
+        window->DC.CurrentColumns = NULL;
+        window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical;
+        window->DC.ParentLayoutType = parent_window ? parent_window->DC.LayoutType : ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical;
+
+        window->DC.ItemWidth = window->ItemWidthDefault;
+        window->DC.TextWrapPos = -1.0f; // disabled
+        window->DC.ItemWidthStack.resize(0);
+        window->DC.TextWrapPosStack.resize(0);
+
+        if (window->AutoFitFramesX > 0)
+            window->AutoFitFramesX--;
+        if (window->AutoFitFramesY > 0)
+            window->AutoFitFramesY--;
+
+        // Apply focus (we need to call FocusWindow() AFTER setting DC.CursorStartPos so our initial navigation reference rectangle can start around there)
+        if (want_focus)
+        {
+            FocusWindow(window);
+            NavInitWindow(window, false); // <-- this is in the way for us to be able to defer and sort reappearing FocusWindow() calls
+        }
+
+        // Close requested by platform window
+        if (p_open != NULL && window->Viewport->PlatformRequestClose && window->Viewport != GetMainViewport())
+        {
+            if (!window->DockIsActive || window->DockTabIsVisible)
+            {
+                window->Viewport->PlatformRequestClose = false;
+                g.NavWindowingToggleLayer = false; // Assume user mapped PlatformRequestClose on ALT-F4 so we disable ALT for menu toggle. False positive not an issue.
+                IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_VIEWPORT("[viewport] Window '%s' PlatformRequestClose\n", window->Name);
+                *p_open = false;
+            }
+        }
+
+        // Title bar
+        if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) && !window->DockIsActive)
+            RenderWindowTitleBarContents(window, ImRect(title_bar_rect.Min.x + window->WindowBorderSize, title_bar_rect.Min.y, title_bar_rect.Max.x - window->WindowBorderSize, title_bar_rect.Max.y), name, p_open);
+
+        // Clear hit test shape every frame
+        window->HitTestHoleSize.x = window->HitTestHoleSize.y = 0;
+
+        // Pressing CTRL+C while holding on a window copy its content to the clipboard
+        // This works but 1. doesn't handle multiple Begin/End pairs, 2. recursing into another Begin/End pair - so we need to work that out and add better logging scope.
+        // Maybe we can support CTRL+C on every element?
+        /*
+        //if (g.NavWindow == window && g.ActiveId == 0)
+        if (g.ActiveId == window->MoveId)
+            if (g.IO.KeyCtrl && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_C))
+                LogToClipboard();
+        */
+
+        if (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_DockingEnable)
+        {
+            // Docking: Dragging a dockable window (or any of its child) turns it into a drag and drop source.
+            // We need to do this _before_ we overwrite window->DC.LastItemId below because BeginDockableDragDropSource() also overwrites it.
+            if ((g.MovingWindow == window) && (g.IO.ConfigDockingWithShift == g.IO.KeyShift))
+                if ((window->RootWindowDockTree->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDocking) == 0)
+                    BeginDockableDragDropSource(window);
+
+            // Docking: Any dockable window can act as a target. For dock node hosts we call BeginDockableDragDropTarget() in DockNodeUpdate() instead.
+            if (g.DragDropActive && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDocking))
+                if (g.MovingWindow == NULL || g.MovingWindow->RootWindowDockTree != window)
+                    if ((window == window->RootWindowDockTree) && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_DockNodeHost))
+                        BeginDockableDragDropTarget(window);
+        }
+
+        // We fill last item data based on Title Bar/Tab, in order for IsItemHovered() and IsItemActive() to be usable after Begin().
+        // This is useful to allow creating context menus on title bar only, etc.
+        if (window->DockIsActive)
+            SetLastItemData(window->MoveId, g.CurrentItemFlags, window->DockTabItemStatusFlags, window->DockTabItemRect);
+        else
+            SetLastItemData(window->MoveId, g.CurrentItemFlags, IsMouseHoveringRect(title_bar_rect.Min, title_bar_rect.Max, false) ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect : 0, title_bar_rect);
+
+        // [Test Engine] Register title bar / tab
+        if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar))
+            IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_ADD(g.LastItemData.Rect, g.LastItemData.ID);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Append
+        SetCurrentViewport(window, window->Viewport);
+        SetCurrentWindow(window);
+    }
+
+    // Pull/inherit current state
+    window->DC.NavFocusScopeIdCurrent = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) ? parent_window->DC.NavFocusScopeIdCurrent : window->GetID("#FOCUSSCOPE"); // Inherit from parent only // -V595
+
+    if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_DockNodeHost))
+        PushClipRect(window->InnerClipRect.Min, window->InnerClipRect.Max, true);
+
+    // Clear 'accessed' flag last thing (After PushClipRect which will set the flag. We want the flag to stay false when the default "Debug" window is unused)
+    window->WriteAccessed = false;
+    window->BeginCount++;
+    g.NextWindowData.ClearFlags();
+
+    // Update visibility
+    if (first_begin_of_the_frame)
+    {
+        // When we are about to select this tab (which will only be visible on the _next frame_), flag it with a non-zero HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems.
+        // This will have the important effect of actually returning true in Begin() and not setting SkipItems, allowing an earlier submission of the window contents.
+        // This is analogous to regular windows being hidden from one frame.
+        // It is especially important as e.g. nested TabBars would otherwise generate flicker in the form of one empty frame, or focus requests won't be processed.
+        if (window->DockIsActive && !window->DockTabIsVisible)
+        {
+            if (window->LastFrameJustFocused == g.FrameCount)
+                window->HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems = 1;
+            else
+                window->HiddenFramesCanSkipItems = 1;
+        }
+
+        if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)
+        {
+            // Child window can be out of sight and have "negative" clip windows.
+            // Mark them as collapsed so commands are skipped earlier (we can't manually collapse them because they have no title bar).
+            IM_ASSERT((flags& ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) != 0 || (window->DockIsActive));
+            if (!(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) && window->AutoFitFramesX <= 0 && window->AutoFitFramesY <= 0) // FIXME: Doesn't make sense for ChildWindow??
+            {
+                const bool nav_request = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened) && (g.NavAnyRequest && g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow->RootWindowForNav == window->RootWindowForNav);
+                if (!g.LogEnabled && !nav_request)
+                    if (window->OuterRectClipped.Min.x >= window->OuterRectClipped.Max.x || window->OuterRectClipped.Min.y >= window->OuterRectClipped.Max.y)
+                        window->HiddenFramesCanSkipItems = 1;
+            }
+
+            // Hide along with parent or if parent is collapsed
+            if (parent_window && (parent_window->Collapsed || parent_window->HiddenFramesCanSkipItems > 0))
+                window->HiddenFramesCanSkipItems = 1;
+            if (parent_window && (parent_window->Collapsed || parent_window->HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems > 0))
+                window->HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems = 1;
+        }
+
+        // Don't render if style alpha is 0.0 at the time of Begin(). This is arbitrary and inconsistent but has been there for a long while (may remove at some point)
+        if (style.Alpha <= 0.0f)
+            window->HiddenFramesCanSkipItems = 1;
+
+        // Update the Hidden flag
+        bool hidden_regular = (window->HiddenFramesCanSkipItems > 0) || (window->HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems > 0);
+        window->Hidden = hidden_regular || (window->HiddenFramesForRenderOnly > 0);
+
+        // Disable inputs for requested number of frames
+        if (window->DisableInputsFrames > 0)
+        {
+            window->DisableInputsFrames--;
+            window->Flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs;
+        }
+
+        // Update the SkipItems flag, used to early out of all items functions (no layout required)
+        bool skip_items = false;
+        if (window->Collapsed || !window->Active || hidden_regular)
+            if (window->AutoFitFramesX <= 0 && window->AutoFitFramesY <= 0 && window->HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems <= 0)
+                skip_items = true;
+        window->SkipItems = skip_items;
+
+        // Restore NavLayersActiveMaskNext to previous value when not visible, so a CTRL+Tab back can use a safe value.
+        if (window->SkipItems)
+            window->DC.NavLayersActiveMaskNext = window->DC.NavLayersActiveMask;
+
+        // Sanity check: there are two spots which can set Appearing = true
+        // - when 'window_just_activated_by_user' is set -> HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems is set -> SkipItems always false
+        // - in BeginDocked() path when DockNodeIsVisible == DockTabIsVisible == true -> hidden _should_ be all zero // FIXME: Not formally proven, hence the assert.
+        if (window->SkipItems && !window->Appearing)
+            IM_ASSERT(window->Appearing == false); // Please report on GitHub if this triggers: https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/4177
+    }
+
+    return !window->SkipItems;
+}
+
+void ImGui::End()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+    // Error checking: verify that user hasn't called End() too many times!
+    if (g.CurrentWindowStack.Size <= 1 && g.WithinFrameScopeWithImplicitWindow)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(g.CurrentWindowStack.Size > 1, "Calling End() too many times!");
+        return;
+    }
+    IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindowStack.Size > 0);
+
+    // Error checking: verify that user doesn't directly call End() on a child window.
+    if ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_DockNodeHost) && !window->DockIsActive)
+        IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(g.WithinEndChild, "Must call EndChild() and not End()!");
+
+    // Close anything that is open
+    if (window->DC.CurrentColumns)
+        EndColumns();
+    if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_DockNodeHost))   // Pop inner window clip rectangle
+        PopClipRect();
+
+    // Stop logging
+    if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow))    // FIXME: add more options for scope of logging
+        LogFinish();
+
+    // Docking: report contents sizes to parent to allow for auto-resize
+    if (window->DockNode && window->DockTabIsVisible)
+        if (ImGuiWindow* host_window = window->DockNode->HostWindow)         // FIXME-DOCK
+            host_window->DC.CursorMaxPos = window->DC.CursorMaxPos + window->WindowPadding - host_window->WindowPadding;
+
+    // Pop from window stack
+    g.LastItemData = g.CurrentWindowStack.back().ParentLastItemDataBackup;
+    if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)
+        g.BeginMenuCount--;
+    if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)
+        g.BeginPopupStack.pop_back();
+    g.CurrentWindowStack.back().StackSizesOnBegin.CompareWithCurrentState();
+    g.CurrentWindowStack.pop_back();
+    SetCurrentWindow(g.CurrentWindowStack.Size == 0 ? NULL : g.CurrentWindowStack.back().Window);
+    if (g.CurrentWindow)
+        SetCurrentViewport(g.CurrentWindow, g.CurrentWindow->Viewport);
+}
+
+void ImGui::BringWindowToFocusFront(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(window == window->RootWindow);
+
+    const int cur_order = window->FocusOrder;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.WindowsFocusOrder[cur_order] == window);
+    if (g.WindowsFocusOrder.back() == window)
+        return;
+
+    const int new_order = g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size - 1;
+    for (int n = cur_order; n < new_order; n++)
+    {
+        g.WindowsFocusOrder[n] = g.WindowsFocusOrder[n + 1];
+        g.WindowsFocusOrder[n]->FocusOrder--;
+        IM_ASSERT(g.WindowsFocusOrder[n]->FocusOrder == n);
+    }
+    g.WindowsFocusOrder[new_order] = window;
+    window->FocusOrder = (short)new_order;
+}
+
+void ImGui::BringWindowToDisplayFront(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* current_front_window = g.Windows.back();
+    if (current_front_window == window || current_front_window->RootWindowDockTree == window) // Cheap early out (could be better)
+        return;
+    for (int i = g.Windows.Size - 2; i >= 0; i--) // We can ignore the top-most window
+        if (g.Windows[i] == window)
+        {
+            memmove(&g.Windows[i], &g.Windows[i + 1], (size_t)(g.Windows.Size - i - 1) * sizeof(ImGuiWindow*));
+            g.Windows[g.Windows.Size - 1] = window;
+            break;
+        }
+}
+
+void ImGui::BringWindowToDisplayBack(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.Windows[0] == window)
+        return;
+    for (int i = 0; i < g.Windows.Size; i++)
+        if (g.Windows[i] == window)
+        {
+            memmove(&g.Windows[1], &g.Windows[0], (size_t)i * sizeof(ImGuiWindow*));
+            g.Windows[0] = window;
+            break;
+        }
+}
+
+void ImGui::BringWindowToDisplayBehind(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindow* behind_window)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(window != NULL && behind_window != NULL);
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    window = window->RootWindow;
+    behind_window = behind_window->RootWindow;
+    int pos_wnd = FindWindowDisplayIndex(window);
+    int pos_beh = FindWindowDisplayIndex(behind_window);
+    if (pos_wnd < pos_beh)
+    {
+        size_t copy_bytes = (pos_beh - pos_wnd - 1) * sizeof(ImGuiWindow*);
+        memmove(&g.Windows.Data[pos_wnd], &g.Windows.Data[pos_wnd + 1], copy_bytes);
+        g.Windows[pos_beh - 1] = window;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        size_t copy_bytes = (pos_wnd - pos_beh) * sizeof(ImGuiWindow*);
+        memmove(&g.Windows.Data[pos_beh + 1], &g.Windows.Data[pos_beh], copy_bytes);
+        g.Windows[pos_beh] = window;
+    }
+}
+
+int ImGui::FindWindowDisplayIndex(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.Windows.index_from_ptr(g.Windows.find(window));
+}
+
+// Moving window to front of display and set focus (which happens to be back of our sorted list)
+void ImGui::FocusWindow(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    if (g.NavWindow != window)
+    {
+        SetNavWindow(window);
+        if (window && g.NavDisableMouseHover)
+            g.NavMousePosDirty = true;
+        g.NavId = window ? window->NavLastIds[0] : 0; // Restore NavId
+        g.NavLayer = ImGuiNavLayer_Main;
+        g.NavFocusScopeId = 0;
+        g.NavIdIsAlive = false;
+    }
+
+    // Close popups if any
+    ClosePopupsOverWindow(window, false);
+
+    // Move the root window to the top of the pile
+    IM_ASSERT(window == NULL || window->RootWindowDockTree != NULL);
+    ImGuiWindow* focus_front_window = window ? window->RootWindow : NULL;
+    ImGuiWindow* display_front_window = window ? window->RootWindowDockTree : NULL;
+    ImGuiDockNode* dock_node = window ? window->DockNode : NULL;
+    bool active_id_window_is_dock_node_host = (g.ActiveIdWindow && dock_node && dock_node->HostWindow == g.ActiveIdWindow);
+
+    // Steal active widgets. Some of the cases it triggers includes:
+    // - Focus a window while an InputText in another window is active, if focus happens before the old InputText can run.
+    // - When using Nav to activate menu items (due to timing of activating on press->new window appears->losing ActiveId)
+    // - Using dock host items (tab, collapse button) can trigger this before we redirect the ActiveIdWindow toward the child window.
+    if (g.ActiveId != 0 && g.ActiveIdWindow && g.ActiveIdWindow->RootWindow != focus_front_window)
+        if (!g.ActiveIdNoClearOnFocusLoss && !active_id_window_is_dock_node_host)
+            ClearActiveID();
+
+    // Passing NULL allow to disable keyboard focus
+    if (!window)
+        return;
+    window->LastFrameJustFocused = g.FrameCount;
+
+    // Select in dock node
+    if (dock_node && dock_node->TabBar)
+        dock_node->TabBar->SelectedTabId = dock_node->TabBar->NextSelectedTabId = window->TabId;
+
+    // Bring to front
+    BringWindowToFocusFront(focus_front_window);
+    if (((window->Flags | focus_front_window->Flags | display_front_window->Flags) & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus) == 0)
+        BringWindowToDisplayFront(display_front_window);
+}
+
+void ImGui::FocusTopMostWindowUnderOne(ImGuiWindow* under_this_window, ImGuiWindow* ignore_window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    int start_idx = g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size - 1;
+    if (under_this_window != NULL)
+    {
+        // Aim at root window behind us, if we are in a child window that's our own root (see #4640)
+        int offset = -1;
+        while (under_this_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)
+        {
+            under_this_window = under_this_window->ParentWindow;
+            offset = 0;
+        }
+        start_idx = FindWindowFocusIndex(under_this_window) + offset;
+    }
+    for (int i = start_idx; i >= 0; i--)
+    {
+        // We may later decide to test for different NoXXXInputs based on the active navigation input (mouse vs nav) but that may feel more confusing to the user.
+        ImGuiWindow* window = g.WindowsFocusOrder[i];
+        IM_ASSERT(window == window->RootWindow);
+        if (window != ignore_window && window->WasActive)
+            if ((window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs)) != (ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs))
+            {
+                // FIXME-DOCK: This is failing (lagging by one frame) for docked windows.
+                // If A and B are docked into window and B disappear, at the NewFrame() call site window->NavLastChildNavWindow will still point to B.
+                // We might leverage the tab order implicitly stored in window->DockNodeAsHost->TabBar (essentially the 'most_recently_selected_tab' code in tab bar will do that but on next update)
+                // to tell which is the "previous" window. Or we may leverage 'LastFrameFocused/LastFrameJustFocused' and have this function handle child window itself?
+                ImGuiWindow* focus_window = NavRestoreLastChildNavWindow(window);
+                FocusWindow(focus_window);
+                return;
+            }
+    }
+    FocusWindow(NULL);
+}
+
+// Important: this alone doesn't alter current ImDrawList state. This is called by PushFont/PopFont only.
+void ImGui::SetCurrentFont(ImFont* font)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(font && font->IsLoaded());    // Font Atlas not created. Did you call io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsRGBA32 / GetTexDataAsAlpha8 ?
+    IM_ASSERT(font->Scale > 0.0f);
+    g.Font = font;
+    g.FontBaseSize = ImMax(1.0f, g.IO.FontGlobalScale * g.Font->FontSize * g.Font->Scale);
+    g.FontSize = g.CurrentWindow ? g.CurrentWindow->CalcFontSize() : 0.0f;
+
+    ImFontAtlas* atlas = g.Font->ContainerAtlas;
+    g.DrawListSharedData.TexUvWhitePixel = atlas->TexUvWhitePixel;
+    g.DrawListSharedData.TexUvLines = atlas->TexUvLines;
+    g.DrawListSharedData.Font = g.Font;
+    g.DrawListSharedData.FontSize = g.FontSize;
+}
+
+void ImGui::PushFont(ImFont* font)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (!font)
+        font = GetDefaultFont();
+    SetCurrentFont(font);
+    g.FontStack.push_back(font);
+    g.CurrentWindow->DrawList->PushTextureID(font->ContainerAtlas->TexID);
+}
+
+void  ImGui::PopFont()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.CurrentWindow->DrawList->PopTextureID();
+    g.FontStack.pop_back();
+    SetCurrentFont(g.FontStack.empty() ? GetDefaultFont() : g.FontStack.back());
+}
+
+void ImGui::PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags option, bool enabled)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiItemFlags item_flags = g.CurrentItemFlags;
+    IM_ASSERT(item_flags == g.ItemFlagsStack.back());
+    if (enabled)
+        item_flags |= option;
+    else
+        item_flags &= ~option;
+    g.CurrentItemFlags = item_flags;
+    g.ItemFlagsStack.push_back(item_flags);
+}
+
+void ImGui::PopItemFlag()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.ItemFlagsStack.Size > 1); // Too many calls to PopItemFlag() - we always leave a 0 at the bottom of the stack.
+    g.ItemFlagsStack.pop_back();
+    g.CurrentItemFlags = g.ItemFlagsStack.back();
+}
+
+// BeginDisabled()/EndDisabled()
+// - Those can be nested but it cannot be used to enable an already disabled section (a single BeginDisabled(true) in the stack is enough to keep everything disabled)
+// - Visually this is currently altering alpha, but it is expected that in a future styling system this would work differently.
+// - Feedback welcome at https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/211
+// - BeginDisabled(false) essentially does nothing useful but is provided to facilitate use of boolean expressions. If you can avoid calling BeginDisabled(False)/EndDisabled() best to avoid it.
+// - Optimized shortcuts instead of PushStyleVar() + PushItemFlag()
+void ImGui::BeginDisabled(bool disabled)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    bool was_disabled = (g.CurrentItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled) != 0;
+    if (!was_disabled && disabled)
+    {
+        g.DisabledAlphaBackup = g.Style.Alpha;
+        g.Style.Alpha *= g.Style.DisabledAlpha; // PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_Alpha, g.Style.Alpha * g.Style.DisabledAlpha);
+    }
+    if (was_disabled || disabled)
+        g.CurrentItemFlags |= ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled;
+    g.ItemFlagsStack.push_back(g.CurrentItemFlags);
+    g.DisabledStackSize++;
+}
+
+void ImGui::EndDisabled()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.DisabledStackSize > 0);
+    g.DisabledStackSize--;
+    bool was_disabled = (g.CurrentItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled) != 0;
+    //PopItemFlag();
+    g.ItemFlagsStack.pop_back();
+    g.CurrentItemFlags = g.ItemFlagsStack.back();
+    if (was_disabled && (g.CurrentItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled) == 0)
+        g.Style.Alpha = g.DisabledAlphaBackup; //PopStyleVar();
+}
+
+// FIXME: Look into renaming this once we have settled the new Focus/Activation/TabStop system.
+void ImGui::PushAllowKeyboardFocus(bool allow_keyboard_focus)
+{
+    PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoTabStop, !allow_keyboard_focus);
+}
+
+void ImGui::PopAllowKeyboardFocus()
+{
+    PopItemFlag();
+}
+
+void ImGui::PushButtonRepeat(bool repeat)
+{
+    PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat, repeat);
+}
+
+void ImGui::PopButtonRepeat()
+{
+    PopItemFlag();
+}
+
+void ImGui::PushTextWrapPos(float wrap_pos_x)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    window->DC.TextWrapPosStack.push_back(window->DC.TextWrapPos);
+    window->DC.TextWrapPos = wrap_pos_x;
+}
+
+void ImGui::PopTextWrapPos()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    window->DC.TextWrapPos = window->DC.TextWrapPosStack.back();
+    window->DC.TextWrapPosStack.pop_back();
+}
+
+static ImGuiWindow* GetCombinedRootWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, bool popup_hierarchy, bool dock_hierarchy)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* last_window = NULL;
+    while (last_window != window)
+    {
+        last_window = window;
+        window = window->RootWindow;
+        if (popup_hierarchy)
+            window = window->RootWindowPopupTree;
+		if (dock_hierarchy)
+			window = window->RootWindowDockTree;
+	}
+    return window;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsWindowChildOf(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindow* potential_parent, bool popup_hierarchy, bool dock_hierarchy)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window_root = GetCombinedRootWindow(window, popup_hierarchy, dock_hierarchy);
+    if (window_root == potential_parent)
+        return true;
+    while (window != NULL)
+    {
+        if (window == potential_parent)
+            return true;
+        if (window == window_root) // end of chain
+            return false;
+        window = window->ParentWindow;
+    }
+    return false;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsWindowWithinBeginStackOf(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindow* potential_parent)
+{
+    if (window->RootWindow == potential_parent)
+        return true;
+    while (window != NULL)
+    {
+        if (window == potential_parent)
+            return true;
+        window = window->ParentWindowInBeginStack;
+    }
+    return false;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsWindowAbove(ImGuiWindow* potential_above, ImGuiWindow* potential_below)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    // It would be saner to ensure that display layer is always reflected in the g.Windows[] order, which would likely requires altering all manipulations of that array
+    const int display_layer_delta = GetWindowDisplayLayer(potential_above) - GetWindowDisplayLayer(potential_below);
+    if (display_layer_delta != 0)
+        return display_layer_delta > 0;
+
+    for (int i = g.Windows.Size - 1; i >= 0; i--)
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* candidate_window = g.Windows[i];
+        if (candidate_window == potential_above)
+            return true;
+        if (candidate_window == potential_below)
+            return false;
+    }
+    return false;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags flags)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT((flags & (ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlapped | ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenDisabled)) == 0);   // Flags not supported by this function
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* ref_window = g.HoveredWindow;
+    ImGuiWindow* cur_window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (ref_window == NULL)
+        return false;
+
+    if ((flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow) == 0)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(cur_window); // Not inside a Begin()/End()
+        const bool popup_hierarchy = (flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoPopupHierarchy) == 0;
+        const bool dock_hierarchy = (flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_DockHierarchy) != 0;
+        if (flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow)
+            cur_window = GetCombinedRootWindow(cur_window, popup_hierarchy, dock_hierarchy);
+
+        bool result;
+        if (flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows)
+            result = IsWindowChildOf(ref_window, cur_window, popup_hierarchy, dock_hierarchy);
+        else
+            result = (ref_window == cur_window);
+        if (!result)
+            return false;
+    }
+
+    if (!IsWindowContentHoverable(ref_window, flags))
+        return false;
+    if (!(flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem))
+        if (g.ActiveId != 0 && !g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap && g.ActiveId != ref_window->MoveId)
+            return false;
+    return true;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* ref_window = g.NavWindow;
+    ImGuiWindow* cur_window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+    if (ref_window == NULL)
+        return false;
+    if (flags & ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow)
+        return true;
+
+    IM_ASSERT(cur_window); // Not inside a Begin()/End()
+    const bool popup_hierarchy = (flags & ImGuiFocusedFlags_NoPopupHierarchy) == 0;
+    const bool dock_hierarchy = (flags & ImGuiFocusedFlags_DockHierarchy) != 0;
+    if (flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow)
+        cur_window = GetCombinedRootWindow(cur_window, popup_hierarchy, dock_hierarchy);
+
+    if (flags & ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows)
+        return IsWindowChildOf(ref_window, cur_window, popup_hierarchy, dock_hierarchy);
+    else
+        return (ref_window == cur_window);
+}
+
+ImGuiID ImGui::GetWindowDockID()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.CurrentWindow->DockId;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsWindowDocked()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.CurrentWindow->DockIsActive;
+}
+
+// Can we focus this window with CTRL+TAB (or PadMenu + PadFocusPrev/PadFocusNext)
+// Note that NoNavFocus makes the window not reachable with CTRL+TAB but it can still be focused with mouse or programmatically.
+// If you want a window to never be focused, you may use the e.g. NoInputs flag.
+bool ImGui::IsWindowNavFocusable(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    return window->WasActive && window == window->RootWindow && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus);
+}
+
+float ImGui::GetWindowWidth()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+    return window->Size.x;
+}
+
+float ImGui::GetWindowHeight()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+    return window->Size.y;
+}
+
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetWindowPos()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    return window->Pos;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetWindowPos(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond)
+{
+    // Test condition (NB: bit 0 is always true) and clear flags for next time
+    if (cond && (window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags & cond) == 0)
+        return;
+
+    IM_ASSERT(cond == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(cond)); // Make sure the user doesn't attempt to combine multiple condition flags.
+    window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags &= ~(ImGuiCond_Once | ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver | ImGuiCond_Appearing);
+    window->SetWindowPosVal = ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);
+
+    // Set
+    const ImVec2 old_pos = window->Pos;
+    window->Pos = ImFloor(pos);
+    ImVec2 offset = window->Pos - old_pos;
+    if (offset.x == 0.0f && offset.y == 0.0f)
+        return;
+    MarkIniSettingsDirty(window);
+    // FIXME: share code with TranslateWindow(), need to confirm whether the 3 rect modified by TranslateWindow() are desirable here.
+    window->DC.CursorPos += offset;         // As we happen to move the window while it is being appended to (which is a bad idea - will smear) let's at least offset the cursor
+    window->DC.CursorMaxPos += offset;      // And more importantly we need to offset CursorMaxPos/CursorStartPos this so ContentSize calculation doesn't get affected.
+    window->DC.IdealMaxPos += offset;
+    window->DC.CursorStartPos += offset;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetWindowPos(const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+    SetWindowPos(window, pos, cond);
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetWindowPos(const char* name, const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond)
+{
+    if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(name))
+        SetWindowPos(window, pos, cond);
+}
+
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetWindowSize()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+    return window->Size;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetWindowSize(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond)
+{
+    // Test condition (NB: bit 0 is always true) and clear flags for next time
+    if (cond && (window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags & cond) == 0)
+        return;
+
+    IM_ASSERT(cond == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(cond)); // Make sure the user doesn't attempt to combine multiple condition flags.
+    window->SetWindowSizeAllowFlags &= ~(ImGuiCond_Once | ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver | ImGuiCond_Appearing);
+
+    // Set
+    ImVec2 old_size = window->SizeFull;
+    window->AutoFitFramesX = (size.x <= 0.0f) ? 2 : 0;
+    window->AutoFitFramesY = (size.y <= 0.0f) ? 2 : 0;
+    if (size.x <= 0.0f)
+        window->AutoFitOnlyGrows = false;
+    else
+        window->SizeFull.x = IM_FLOOR(size.x);
+    if (size.y <= 0.0f)
+        window->AutoFitOnlyGrows = false;
+    else
+        window->SizeFull.y = IM_FLOOR(size.y);
+    if (old_size.x != window->SizeFull.x || old_size.y != window->SizeFull.y)
+        MarkIniSettingsDirty(window);
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetWindowSize(const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond)
+{
+    SetWindowSize(GImGui->CurrentWindow, size, cond);
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetWindowSize(const char* name, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond)
+{
+    if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(name))
+        SetWindowSize(window, size, cond);
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetWindowCollapsed(ImGuiWindow* window, bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond)
+{
+    // Test condition (NB: bit 0 is always true) and clear flags for next time
+    if (cond && (window->SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags & cond) == 0)
+        return;
+    window->SetWindowCollapsedAllowFlags &= ~(ImGuiCond_Once | ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver | ImGuiCond_Appearing);
+
+    // Set
+    window->Collapsed = collapsed;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetWindowHitTestHole(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImVec2& pos, const ImVec2& size)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(window->HitTestHoleSize.x == 0);     // We don't support multiple holes/hit test filters
+    window->HitTestHoleSize = ImVec2ih(size);
+    window->HitTestHoleOffset = ImVec2ih(pos - window->Pos);
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetWindowCollapsed(bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond)
+{
+    SetWindowCollapsed(GImGui->CurrentWindow, collapsed, cond);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsWindowCollapsed()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+    return window->Collapsed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsWindowAppearing()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+    return window->Appearing;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetWindowCollapsed(const char* name, bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond)
+{
+    if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(name))
+        SetWindowCollapsed(window, collapsed, cond);
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetWindowFocus()
+{
+    FocusWindow(GImGui->CurrentWindow);
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetWindowFocus(const char* name)
+{
+    if (name)
+    {
+        if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(name))
+            FocusWindow(window);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        FocusWindow(NULL);
+    }
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiCond cond, const ImVec2& pivot)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(cond == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(cond)); // Make sure the user doesn't attempt to combine multiple condition flags.
+    g.NextWindowData.Flags |= ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasPos;
+    g.NextWindowData.PosVal = pos;
+    g.NextWindowData.PosPivotVal = pivot;
+    g.NextWindowData.PosCond = cond ? cond : ImGuiCond_Always;
+    g.NextWindowData.PosUndock = true;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(const ImVec2& size, ImGuiCond cond)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(cond == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(cond)); // Make sure the user doesn't attempt to combine multiple condition flags.
+    g.NextWindowData.Flags |= ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSize;
+    g.NextWindowData.SizeVal = size;
+    g.NextWindowData.SizeCond = cond ? cond : ImGuiCond_Always;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(const ImVec2& size_min, const ImVec2& size_max, ImGuiSizeCallback custom_callback, void* custom_callback_user_data)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.NextWindowData.Flags |= ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSizeConstraint;
+    g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintRect = ImRect(size_min, size_max);
+    g.NextWindowData.SizeCallback = custom_callback;
+    g.NextWindowData.SizeCallbackUserData = custom_callback_user_data;
+}
+
+// Content size = inner scrollable rectangle, padded with WindowPadding.
+// SetNextWindowContentSize(ImVec2(100,100) + ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize will always allow submitting a 100x100 item.
+void ImGui::SetNextWindowContentSize(const ImVec2& size)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.NextWindowData.Flags |= ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasContentSize;
+    g.NextWindowData.ContentSizeVal = ImFloor(size);
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetNextWindowScroll(const ImVec2& scroll)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.NextWindowData.Flags |= ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasScroll;
+    g.NextWindowData.ScrollVal = scroll;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetNextWindowCollapsed(bool collapsed, ImGuiCond cond)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(cond == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(cond)); // Make sure the user doesn't attempt to combine multiple condition flags.
+    g.NextWindowData.Flags |= ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasCollapsed;
+    g.NextWindowData.CollapsedVal = collapsed;
+    g.NextWindowData.CollapsedCond = cond ? cond : ImGuiCond_Always;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetNextWindowFocus()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.NextWindowData.Flags |= ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasFocus;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetNextWindowBgAlpha(float alpha)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.NextWindowData.Flags |= ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasBgAlpha;
+    g.NextWindowData.BgAlphaVal = alpha;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetNextWindowViewport(ImGuiID id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.NextWindowData.Flags |= ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasViewport;
+    g.NextWindowData.ViewportId = id;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetNextWindowDockID(ImGuiID id, ImGuiCond cond)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.NextWindowData.Flags |= ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasDock;
+    g.NextWindowData.DockCond = cond ? cond : ImGuiCond_Always;
+    g.NextWindowData.DockId = id;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetNextWindowClass(const ImGuiWindowClass* window_class)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT((window_class->ViewportFlagsOverrideSet & window_class->ViewportFlagsOverrideClear) == 0); // Cannot set both set and clear for the same bit
+    g.NextWindowData.Flags |= ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasWindowClass;
+    g.NextWindowData.WindowClass = *window_class;
+}
+
+ImDrawList* ImGui::GetWindowDrawList()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    return window->DrawList;
+}
+
+float ImGui::GetWindowDpiScale()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.CurrentDpiScale;
+}
+
+ImGuiViewport* ImGui::GetWindowViewport()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentViewport != NULL && g.CurrentViewport == g.CurrentWindow->Viewport);
+    return g.CurrentViewport;
+}
+
+ImFont* ImGui::GetFont()
+{
+    return GImGui->Font;
+}
+
+float ImGui::GetFontSize()
+{
+    return GImGui->FontSize;
+}
+
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetFontTexUvWhitePixel()
+{
+    return GImGui->DrawListSharedData.TexUvWhitePixel;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetWindowFontScale(float scale)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(scale > 0.0f);
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    window->FontWindowScale = scale;
+    g.FontSize = g.DrawListSharedData.FontSize = window->CalcFontSize();
+}
+
+void ImGui::ActivateItem(ImGuiID id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.NavNextActivateId = id;
+    g.NavNextActivateFlags = ImGuiActivateFlags_None;
+}
+
+void ImGui::PushFocusScope(ImGuiID id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    g.FocusScopeStack.push_back(window->DC.NavFocusScopeIdCurrent);
+    window->DC.NavFocusScopeIdCurrent = id;
+}
+
+void ImGui::PopFocusScope()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.FocusScopeStack.Size > 0); // Too many PopFocusScope() ?
+    window->DC.NavFocusScopeIdCurrent = g.FocusScopeStack.back();
+    g.FocusScopeStack.pop_back();
+}
+
+// Note: this will likely be called ActivateItem() once we rework our Focus/Activation system!
+void ImGui::SetKeyboardFocusHere(int offset)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    IM_ASSERT(offset >= -1);    // -1 is allowed but not below
+    IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_ACTIVEID("SetKeyboardFocusHere(%d) in window \"%s\"\n", offset, window->Name);
+
+    // It makes sense in the vast majority of cases to never interrupt a drag and drop.
+    // When we refactor this function into ActivateItem() we may want to make this an option.
+    // MovingWindow is protected from most user inputs using SetActiveIdUsingNavAndKeys(), but
+    // is also automatically dropped in the event g.ActiveId is stolen.
+    if (g.DragDropActive || g.MovingWindow != NULL)
+    {
+        IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_ACTIVEID("SetKeyboardFocusHere() ignored while DragDropActive!\n");
+        return;
+    }
+
+    SetNavWindow(window);
+
+    ImGuiScrollFlags scroll_flags = window->Appearing ? ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeX | ImGuiScrollFlags_AlwaysCenterY : ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeX | ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeY;
+    NavMoveRequestSubmit(ImGuiDir_None, offset < 0 ? ImGuiDir_Up : ImGuiDir_Down, ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Tabbing | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_FocusApi, scroll_flags); // FIXME-NAV: Once we refactor tabbing, add LegacyApi flag to not activate non-inputable.
+    if (offset == -1)
+    {
+        NavMoveRequestResolveWithLastItem(&g.NavMoveResultLocal);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        g.NavTabbingDir = 1;
+        g.NavTabbingCounter = offset + 1;
+    }
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetItemDefaultFocus()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (!window->Appearing)
+        return;
+    if (g.NavWindow != window->RootWindowForNav || (!g.NavInitRequest && g.NavInitResultId == 0) || g.NavLayer != window->DC.NavLayerCurrent)
+        return;
+
+    g.NavInitRequest = false;
+    g.NavInitResultId = g.LastItemData.ID;
+    g.NavInitResultRectRel = WindowRectAbsToRel(window, g.LastItemData.Rect);
+    NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag();
+
+    // Scroll could be done in NavInitRequestApplyResult() via a opt-in flag (we however don't want regular init requests to scroll)
+    if (!IsItemVisible())
+        ScrollToRectEx(window, g.LastItemData.Rect, ImGuiScrollFlags_None);
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetStateStorage(ImGuiStorage* tree)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+    window->DC.StateStorage = tree ? tree : &window->StateStorage;
+}
+
+ImGuiStorage* ImGui::GetStateStorage()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+    return window->DC.StateStorage;
+}
+
+void ImGui::PushID(const char* str_id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id);
+    window->IDStack.push_back(id);
+}
+
+void ImGui::PushID(const char* str_id_begin, const char* str_id_end)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id_begin, str_id_end);
+    window->IDStack.push_back(id);
+}
+
+void ImGui::PushID(const void* ptr_id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    ImGuiID id = window->GetID(ptr_id);
+    window->IDStack.push_back(id);
+}
+
+void ImGui::PushID(int int_id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    ImGuiID id = window->GetID(int_id);
+    window->IDStack.push_back(id);
+}
+
+// Push a given id value ignoring the ID stack as a seed.
+void ImGui::PushOverrideID(ImGuiID id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (g.DebugHookIdInfo == id)
+        DebugHookIdInfo(id, ImGuiDataType_ID, NULL, NULL);
+    window->IDStack.push_back(id);
+}
+
+// Helper to avoid a common series of PushOverrideID -> GetID() -> PopID() call
+// (note that when using this pattern, TestEngine's "Stack Tool" will tend to not display the intermediate stack level.
+//  for that to work we would need to do PushOverrideID() -> ItemAdd() -> PopID() which would alter widget code a little more)
+ImGuiID ImGui::GetIDWithSeed(const char* str, const char* str_end, ImGuiID seed)
+{
+    ImGuiID id = ImHashStr(str, str_end ? (str_end - str) : 0, seed);
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.DebugHookIdInfo == id)
+        DebugHookIdInfo(id, ImGuiDataType_String, str, str_end);
+    return id;
+}
+
+void ImGui::PopID()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+    IM_ASSERT(window->IDStack.Size > 1); // Too many PopID(), or could be popping in a wrong/different window?
+    window->IDStack.pop_back();
+}
+
+ImGuiID ImGui::GetID(const char* str_id)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+    return window->GetID(str_id);
+}
+
+ImGuiID ImGui::GetID(const char* str_id_begin, const char* str_id_end)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+    return window->GetID(str_id_begin, str_id_end);
+}
+
+ImGuiID ImGui::GetID(const void* ptr_id)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+    return window->GetID(ptr_id);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsRectVisible(const ImVec2& size)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+    return window->ClipRect.Overlaps(ImRect(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size));
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsRectVisible(const ImVec2& rect_min, const ImVec2& rect_max)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+    return window->ClipRect.Overlaps(ImRect(rect_min, rect_max));
+}
+
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] INPUTS
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Test if mouse cursor is hovering given rectangle
+// NB- Rectangle is clipped by our current clip setting
+// NB- Expand the rectangle to be generous on imprecise inputs systems (g.Style.TouchExtraPadding)
+bool ImGui::IsMouseHoveringRect(const ImVec2& r_min, const ImVec2& r_max, bool clip)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    // Clip
+    ImRect rect_clipped(r_min, r_max);
+    if (clip)
+        rect_clipped.ClipWith(g.CurrentWindow->ClipRect);
+
+    // Expand for touch input
+    const ImRect rect_for_touch(rect_clipped.Min - g.Style.TouchExtraPadding, rect_clipped.Max + g.Style.TouchExtraPadding);
+    if (!rect_for_touch.Contains(g.IO.MousePos))
+        return false;
+    if (!g.MouseViewport->GetMainRect().Overlaps(rect_clipped))
+        return false;
+    return true;
+}
+
+ImGuiKeyData* ImGui::GetKeyData(ImGuiKey key)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    int index;
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
+    IM_ASSERT(key >= ImGuiKey_LegacyNativeKey_BEGIN && key < ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END);
+    if (IsLegacyKey(key))
+        index = (g.IO.KeyMap[key] != -1) ? g.IO.KeyMap[key] : key; // Remap native->imgui or imgui->native
+    else
+        index = key;
+#else
+    IM_ASSERT(IsNamedKey(key) && "Support for user key indices was dropped in favor of ImGuiKey. Please update backend & user code.");
+    index = key - ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN;
+#endif
+    return &g.IO.KeysData[index];
+}
+
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
+int ImGui::GetKeyIndex(ImGuiKey key)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(IsNamedKey(key));
+    const ImGuiKeyData* key_data = GetKeyData(key);
+    return (int)(key_data - g.IO.KeysData);
+}
+#endif
+
+// Those names a provided for debugging purpose and are not meant to be saved persistently not compared.
+static const char* const GKeyNames[] =
+{
+    "Tab", "LeftArrow", "RightArrow", "UpArrow", "DownArrow", "PageUp", "PageDown",
+    "Home", "End", "Insert", "Delete", "Backspace", "Space", "Enter", "Escape",
+    "LeftCtrl", "LeftShift", "LeftAlt", "LeftSuper", "RightCtrl", "RightShift", "RightAlt", "RightSuper", "Menu",
+    "0", "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", "9", "A", "B", "C", "D", "E", "F", "G", "H",
+    "I", "J", "K", "L", "M", "N", "O", "P", "Q", "R", "S", "T", "U", "V", "W", "X", "Y", "Z",
+    "F1", "F2", "F3", "F4", "F5", "F6", "F7", "F8", "F9", "F10", "F11", "F12",
+    "Apostrophe", "Comma", "Minus", "Period", "Slash", "Semicolon", "Equal", "LeftBracket",
+    "Backslash", "RightBracket", "GraveAccent", "CapsLock", "ScrollLock", "NumLock", "PrintScreen",
+    "Pause", "Keypad0", "Keypad1", "Keypad2", "Keypad3", "Keypad4", "Keypad5", "Keypad6",
+    "Keypad7", "Keypad8", "Keypad9", "KeypadDecimal", "KeypadDivide", "KeypadMultiply",
+    "KeypadSubtract", "KeypadAdd", "KeypadEnter", "KeypadEqual",
+    "GamepadStart", "GamepadBack",
+    "GamepadFaceLeft", "GamepadFaceRight", "GamepadFaceUp", "GamepadFaceDown",
+    "GamepadDpadLeft", "GamepadDpadRight", "GamepadDpadUp", "GamepadDpadDown",
+    "GamepadL1", "GamepadR1", "GamepadL2", "GamepadR2", "GamepadL3", "GamepadR3",
+    "GamepadLStickLeft", "GamepadLStickRight", "GamepadLStickUp", "GamepadLStickDown",
+    "GamepadRStickLeft", "GamepadRStickRight", "GamepadRStickUp", "GamepadRStickDown",
+    "ModCtrl", "ModShift", "ModAlt", "ModSuper"
+};
+IM_STATIC_ASSERT(ImGuiKey_NamedKey_COUNT == IM_ARRAYSIZE(GKeyNames));
+
+const char* ImGui::GetKeyName(ImGuiKey key)
+{
+#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
+    IM_ASSERT((IsNamedKey(key) || key == ImGuiKey_None) && "Support for user key indices was dropped in favor of ImGuiKey. Please update backend and user code.");
+#else
+    if (IsLegacyKey(key))
+    {
+        ImGuiIO& io = GetIO();
+        if (io.KeyMap[key] == -1)
+            return "N/A";
+        IM_ASSERT(IsNamedKey((ImGuiKey)io.KeyMap[key]));
+        key = (ImGuiKey)io.KeyMap[key];
+    }
+#endif
+    if (key == ImGuiKey_None)
+        return "None";
+    if (!IsNamedKey(key))
+        return "Unknown";
+
+    return GKeyNames[key - ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN];
+}
+
+// t0 = previous time (e.g.: g.Time - g.IO.DeltaTime)
+// t1 = current time (e.g.: g.Time)
+// An event is triggered at:
+//  t = 0.0f     t = repeat_delay,    t = repeat_delay + repeat_rate*N
+int ImGui::CalcTypematicRepeatAmount(float t0, float t1, float repeat_delay, float repeat_rate)
+{
+    if (t1 == 0.0f)
+        return 1;
+    if (t0 >= t1)
+        return 0;
+    if (repeat_rate <= 0.0f)
+        return (t0 < repeat_delay) && (t1 >= repeat_delay);
+    const int count_t0 = (t0 < repeat_delay) ? -1 : (int)((t0 - repeat_delay) / repeat_rate);
+    const int count_t1 = (t1 < repeat_delay) ? -1 : (int)((t1 - repeat_delay) / repeat_rate);
+    const int count = count_t1 - count_t0;
+    return count;
+}
+
+void ImGui::GetTypematicRepeatRate(ImGuiInputReadFlags flags, float* repeat_delay, float* repeat_rate)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    switch (flags & ImGuiInputReadFlags_RepeatRateMask_)
+    {
+    case ImGuiInputReadFlags_RepeatRateNavMove:             *repeat_delay = g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay * 0.72f; *repeat_rate = g.IO.KeyRepeatRate * 0.80f; return;
+    case ImGuiInputReadFlags_RepeatRateNavTweak:            *repeat_delay = g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay * 0.72f; *repeat_rate = g.IO.KeyRepeatRate * 0.30f; return;
+    case ImGuiInputReadFlags_RepeatRateDefault: default:    *repeat_delay = g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay * 1.00f; *repeat_rate = g.IO.KeyRepeatRate * 1.00f; return;
+    }
+}
+
+// Return value representing the number of presses in the last time period, for the given repeat rate
+// (most often returns 0 or 1. The result is generally only >1 when RepeatRate is smaller than DeltaTime, aka large DeltaTime or fast RepeatRate)
+int ImGui::GetKeyPressedAmount(ImGuiKey key, float repeat_delay, float repeat_rate)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const ImGuiKeyData* key_data = GetKeyData(key);
+    const float t = key_data->DownDuration;
+    return CalcTypematicRepeatAmount(t - g.IO.DeltaTime, t, repeat_delay, repeat_rate);
+}
+
+// Return 2D vector representing the combination of four cardinal direction, with analog value support (for e.g. ImGuiKey_GamepadLStick* values).
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetKeyVector2d(ImGuiKey key_left, ImGuiKey key_right, ImGuiKey key_up, ImGuiKey key_down)
+{
+    return ImVec2(
+        GetKeyData(key_right)->AnalogValue - GetKeyData(key_left)->AnalogValue,
+        GetKeyData(key_down)->AnalogValue - GetKeyData(key_up)->AnalogValue);
+}
+
+// Note that Dear ImGui doesn't know the meaning/semantic of ImGuiKey from 0..511: they are legacy native keycodes.
+// Consider transitioning from 'IsKeyDown(MY_ENGINE_KEY_A)' (<1.87) to IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_A) (>= 1.87)
+bool ImGui::IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey key)
+{
+    const ImGuiKeyData* key_data = GetKeyData(key);
+    if (!key_data->Down)
+        return false;
+    return true;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey key, bool repeat)
+{
+    return IsKeyPressedEx(key, repeat ? ImGuiInputReadFlags_Repeat : ImGuiInputReadFlags_None);
+}
+
+// Important: unlike legacy IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey, bool repeat=true) which DEFAULT to repeat, this requires EXPLICIT repeat.
+// [Internal] 2022/07: Do not call this directly! It is a temporary entry point which we will soon replace with an overload for IsKeyPressed() when we introduce key ownership.
+bool ImGui::IsKeyPressedEx(ImGuiKey key, ImGuiInputReadFlags flags)
+{
+    const ImGuiKeyData* key_data = GetKeyData(key);
+    const float t = key_data->DownDuration;
+    if (t < 0.0f)
+        return false;
+
+    bool pressed = (t == 0.0f);
+    if (!pressed && ((flags & ImGuiInputReadFlags_Repeat) != 0))
+    {
+        float repeat_delay, repeat_rate;
+        GetTypematicRepeatRate(flags, &repeat_delay, &repeat_rate);
+        pressed = (t > repeat_delay) && GetKeyPressedAmount(key, repeat_delay, repeat_rate) > 0;
+    }
+
+    if (!pressed)
+        return false;
+    return true;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsKeyReleased(ImGuiKey key)
+{
+    const ImGuiKeyData* key_data = GetKeyData(key);
+    if (key_data->DownDurationPrev < 0.0f || key_data->Down)
+        return false;
+    return true;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton button)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
+    return g.IO.MouseDown[button];
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsMouseClicked(ImGuiMouseButton button, bool repeat)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
+    const float t = g.IO.MouseDownDuration[button];
+    if (t == 0.0f)
+        return true;
+    if (repeat && t > g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay)
+        return CalcTypematicRepeatAmount(t - g.IO.DeltaTime, t, g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay, g.IO.KeyRepeatRate) > 0;
+    return false;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsMouseReleased(ImGuiMouseButton button)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
+    return g.IO.MouseReleased[button];
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsMouseDoubleClicked(ImGuiMouseButton button)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
+    return g.IO.MouseClickedCount[button] == 2;
+}
+
+int ImGui::GetMouseClickedCount(ImGuiMouseButton button)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
+    return g.IO.MouseClickedCount[button];
+}
+
+// Return if a mouse click/drag went past the given threshold. Valid to call during the MouseReleased frame.
+// [Internal] This doesn't test if the button is pressed
+bool ImGui::IsMouseDragPastThreshold(ImGuiMouseButton button, float lock_threshold)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
+    if (lock_threshold < 0.0f)
+        lock_threshold = g.IO.MouseDragThreshold;
+    return g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[button] >= lock_threshold * lock_threshold;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton button, float lock_threshold)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
+    if (!g.IO.MouseDown[button])
+        return false;
+    return IsMouseDragPastThreshold(button, lock_threshold);
+}
+
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetMousePos()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.IO.MousePos;
+}
+
+// NB: prefer to call right after BeginPopup(). At the time Selectable/MenuItem is activated, the popup is already closed!
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetMousePosOnOpeningCurrentPopup()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.BeginPopupStack.Size > 0)
+        return g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size - 1].OpenMousePos;
+    return g.IO.MousePos;
+}
+
+// We typically use ImVec2(-FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX) to denote an invalid mouse position.
+bool ImGui::IsMousePosValid(const ImVec2* mouse_pos)
+{
+    // The assert is only to silence a false-positive in XCode Static Analysis.
+    // Because GImGui is not dereferenced in every code path, the static analyzer assume that it may be NULL (which it doesn't for other functions).
+    IM_ASSERT(GImGui != NULL);
+    const float MOUSE_INVALID = -256000.0f;
+    ImVec2 p = mouse_pos ? *mouse_pos : GImGui->IO.MousePos;
+    return p.x >= MOUSE_INVALID && p.y >= MOUSE_INVALID;
+}
+
+// [WILL OBSOLETE] This was designed for backends, but prefer having backend maintain a mask of held mouse buttons, because upcoming input queue system will make this invalid.
+bool ImGui::IsAnyMouseDown()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown); n++)
+        if (g.IO.MouseDown[n])
+            return true;
+    return false;
+}
+
+// Return the delta from the initial clicking position while the mouse button is clicked or was just released.
+// This is locked and return 0.0f until the mouse moves past a distance threshold at least once.
+// NB: This is only valid if IsMousePosValid(). backends in theory should always keep mouse position valid when dragging even outside the client window.
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetMouseDragDelta(ImGuiMouseButton button, float lock_threshold)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
+    if (lock_threshold < 0.0f)
+        lock_threshold = g.IO.MouseDragThreshold;
+    if (g.IO.MouseDown[button] || g.IO.MouseReleased[button])
+        if (g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr[button] >= lock_threshold * lock_threshold)
+            if (IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos) && IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MouseClickedPos[button]))
+                return g.IO.MousePos - g.IO.MouseClickedPos[button];
+    return ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+}
+
+void ImGui::ResetMouseDragDelta(ImGuiMouseButton button)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
+    // NB: We don't need to reset g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceSqr
+    g.IO.MouseClickedPos[button] = g.IO.MousePos;
+}
+
+ImGuiMouseCursor ImGui::GetMouseCursor()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.MouseCursor;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor cursor_type)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.MouseCursor = cursor_type;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetNextFrameWantCaptureKeyboard(bool want_capture_keyboard)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.WantCaptureKeyboardNextFrame = want_capture_keyboard ? 1 : 0;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetNextFrameWantCaptureMouse(bool want_capture_mouse)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.WantCaptureMouseNextFrame = want_capture_mouse ? 1 : 0;
+}
+
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS
+static const char* GetInputSourceName(ImGuiInputSource source)
+{
+    const char* input_source_names[] = { "None", "Mouse", "Keyboard", "Gamepad", "Nav", "Clipboard" };
+    IM_ASSERT(IM_ARRAYSIZE(input_source_names) == ImGuiInputSource_COUNT && source >= 0 && source < ImGuiInputSource_COUNT);
+    return input_source_names[source];
+}
+#endif
+
+/*static void DebugPrintInputEvent(const char* prefix, const ImGuiInputEvent* e)
+{
+    if (e->Type == ImGuiInputEventType_MousePos)    { IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_IO("%s: MousePos (%.1f %.1f)\n", prefix, e->MousePos.PosX, e->MousePos.PosY); return; }
+    if (e->Type == ImGuiInputEventType_MouseButton) { IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_IO("%s: MouseButton %d %s\n", prefix, e->MouseButton.Button, e->MouseButton.Down ? "Down" : "Up"); return; }
+    if (e->Type == ImGuiInputEventType_MouseWheel)  { IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_IO("%s: MouseWheel (%.1f %.1f)\n", prefix, e->MouseWheel.WheelX, e->MouseWheel.WheelY); return; }
+    if (e->Type == ImGuiInputEventType_Key)         { IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_IO("%s: Key \"%s\" %s\n", prefix, ImGui::GetKeyName(e->Key.Key), e->Key.Down ? "Down" : "Up"); return; }
+    if (e->Type == ImGuiInputEventType_Text)        { IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_IO("%s: Text: %c (U+%08X)\n", prefix, e->Text.Char, e->Text.Char); return; }
+    if (e->Type == ImGuiInputEventType_Focus)       { IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_IO("%s: AppFocused %d\n", prefix, e->AppFocused.Focused); return; }
+}*/
+
+// Process input queue
+// We always call this with the value of 'bool g.IO.ConfigInputTrickleEventQueue'.
+// - trickle_fast_inputs = false : process all events, turn into flattened input state (e.g. successive down/up/down/up will be lost)
+// - trickle_fast_inputs = true  : process as many events as possible (successive down/up/down/up will be trickled over several frames so nothing is lost) (new feature in 1.87)
+void ImGui::UpdateInputEvents(bool trickle_fast_inputs)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiIO& io = g.IO;
+
+    // Only trickle chars<>key when working with InputText()
+    // FIXME: InputText() could parse event trail?
+    // FIXME: Could specialize chars<>keys trickling rules for control keys (those not typically associated to characters)
+    const bool trickle_interleaved_keys_and_text = (trickle_fast_inputs && g.WantTextInputNextFrame == 1);
+
+    bool mouse_moved = false, mouse_wheeled = false, key_changed = false, text_inputted = false;
+    int  mouse_button_changed = 0x00;
+    ImBitArray<ImGuiKey_KeysData_SIZE> key_changed_mask;
+
+    int event_n = 0;
+    for (; event_n < g.InputEventsQueue.Size; event_n++)
+    {
+        const ImGuiInputEvent* e = &g.InputEventsQueue[event_n];
+        if (e->Type == ImGuiInputEventType_MousePos)
+        {
+            ImVec2 event_pos(e->MousePos.PosX, e->MousePos.PosY);
+            if (IsMousePosValid(&event_pos))
+                event_pos = ImVec2(ImFloorSigned(event_pos.x), ImFloorSigned(event_pos.y)); // Apply same flooring as UpdateMouseInputs()
+            if (io.MousePos.x != event_pos.x || io.MousePos.y != event_pos.y)
+            {
+                // Trickling Rule: Stop processing queued events if we already handled a mouse button change
+                if (trickle_fast_inputs && (mouse_button_changed != 0 || mouse_wheeled || key_changed || text_inputted))
+                    break;
+                io.MousePos = event_pos;
+                mouse_moved = true;
+            }
+        }
+        else if (e->Type == ImGuiInputEventType_MouseButton)
+        {
+            const ImGuiMouseButton button = e->MouseButton.Button;
+            IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < ImGuiMouseButton_COUNT);
+            if (io.MouseDown[button] != e->MouseButton.Down)
+            {
+                // Trickling Rule: Stop processing queued events if we got multiple action on the same button
+                if (trickle_fast_inputs && ((mouse_button_changed & (1 << button)) || mouse_wheeled))
+                    break;
+                io.MouseDown[button] = e->MouseButton.Down;
+                mouse_button_changed |= (1 << button);
+            }
+        }
+        else if (e->Type == ImGuiInputEventType_MouseWheel)
+        {
+            if (e->MouseWheel.WheelX != 0.0f || e->MouseWheel.WheelY != 0.0f)
+            {
+                // Trickling Rule: Stop processing queued events if we got multiple action on the event
+                if (trickle_fast_inputs && (mouse_moved || mouse_button_changed != 0))
+                    break;
+                io.MouseWheelH += e->MouseWheel.WheelX;
+                io.MouseWheel += e->MouseWheel.WheelY;
+                mouse_wheeled = true;
+            }
+        }
+        else if (e->Type == ImGuiInputEventType_MouseViewport)
+        {
+            io.MouseHoveredViewport = e->MouseViewport.HoveredViewportID;
+        }
+        else if (e->Type == ImGuiInputEventType_Key)
+        {
+            ImGuiKey key = e->Key.Key;
+            IM_ASSERT(key != ImGuiKey_None);
+            const int keydata_index = (key - ImGuiKey_KeysData_OFFSET);
+            ImGuiKeyData* keydata = &io.KeysData[keydata_index];
+            if (keydata->Down != e->Key.Down || keydata->AnalogValue != e->Key.AnalogValue)
+            {
+                // Trickling Rule: Stop processing queued events if we got multiple action on the same button
+                if (trickle_fast_inputs && keydata->Down != e->Key.Down && (key_changed_mask.TestBit(keydata_index) || text_inputted || mouse_button_changed != 0))
+                    break;
+                keydata->Down = e->Key.Down;
+                keydata->AnalogValue = e->Key.AnalogValue;
+                key_changed = true;
+                key_changed_mask.SetBit(keydata_index);
+
+                if (key == ImGuiKey_ModCtrl || key == ImGuiKey_ModShift || key == ImGuiKey_ModAlt || key == ImGuiKey_ModSuper)
+                {
+                    if (key == ImGuiKey_ModCtrl) { io.KeyCtrl = keydata->Down; }
+                    if (key == ImGuiKey_ModShift) { io.KeyShift = keydata->Down; }
+                    if (key == ImGuiKey_ModAlt) { io.KeyAlt = keydata->Down; }
+                    if (key == ImGuiKey_ModSuper) { io.KeySuper = keydata->Down; }
+                    io.KeyMods = GetMergedModFlags();
+                }
+
+                // Allow legacy code using io.KeysDown[GetKeyIndex()] with new backends
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
+                io.KeysDown[key] = keydata->Down;
+                if (io.KeyMap[key] != -1)
+                    io.KeysDown[io.KeyMap[key]] = keydata->Down;
+#endif
+            }
+        }
+        else if (e->Type == ImGuiInputEventType_Text)
+        {
+            // Trickling Rule: Stop processing queued events if keys/mouse have been interacted with
+            if (trickle_fast_inputs && ((key_changed && trickle_interleaved_keys_and_text) || mouse_button_changed != 0 || mouse_moved || mouse_wheeled))
+                break;
+            unsigned int c = e->Text.Char;
+            io.InputQueueCharacters.push_back(c <= IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX ? (ImWchar)c : IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_INVALID);
+            if (trickle_interleaved_keys_and_text)
+                text_inputted = true;
+        }
+        else if (e->Type == ImGuiInputEventType_Focus)
+        {
+            // We intentionally overwrite this and process lower, in order to give a chance
+            // to multi-viewports backends to queue AddFocusEvent(false) + AddFocusEvent(true) in same frame.
+            io.AppFocusLost = !e->AppFocused.Focused;
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            IM_ASSERT(0 && "Unknown event!");
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Record trail (for domain-specific applications wanting to access a precise trail)
+    //if (event_n != 0) IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_IO("Processed: %d / Remaining: %d\n", event_n, g.InputEventsQueue.Size - event_n);
+    for (int n = 0; n < event_n; n++)
+        g.InputEventsTrail.push_back(g.InputEventsQueue[n]);
+
+    // [DEBUG]
+    /*if (event_n != 0)
+        for (int n = 0; n < g.InputEventsQueue.Size; n++)
+            DebugPrintInputEvent(n < event_n ? "Processed" : "Remaining", &g.InputEventsQueue[n]);*/
+
+    // Remaining events will be processed on the next frame
+    if (event_n == g.InputEventsQueue.Size)
+        g.InputEventsQueue.resize(0);
+    else
+        g.InputEventsQueue.erase(g.InputEventsQueue.Data, g.InputEventsQueue.Data + event_n);
+
+    // Clear buttons state when focus is lost
+    // (this is useful so e.g. releasing Alt after focus loss on Alt-Tab doesn't trigger the Alt menu toggle)
+    if (g.IO.AppFocusLost)
+    {
+        g.IO.ClearInputKeys();
+        g.IO.AppFocusLost = false;
+    }
+}
+
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] ERROR CHECKING
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Helper function to verify ABI compatibility between caller code and compiled version of Dear ImGui.
+// Verify that the type sizes are matching between the calling file's compilation unit and imgui.cpp's compilation unit
+// If this triggers you have an issue:
+// - Most commonly: mismatched headers and compiled code version.
+// - Or: mismatched configuration #define, compilation settings, packing pragma etc.
+//   The configuration settings mentioned in imconfig.h must be set for all compilation units involved with Dear ImGui,
+//   which is way it is required you put them in your imconfig file (and not just before including imgui.h).
+//   Otherwise it is possible that different compilation units would see different structure layout
+bool ImGui::DebugCheckVersionAndDataLayout(const char* version, size_t sz_io, size_t sz_style, size_t sz_vec2, size_t sz_vec4, size_t sz_vert, size_t sz_idx)
+{
+    bool error = false;
+    if (strcmp(version, IMGUI_VERSION) != 0) { error = true; IM_ASSERT(strcmp(version, IMGUI_VERSION) == 0 && "Mismatched version string!"); }
+    if (sz_io != sizeof(ImGuiIO)) { error = true; IM_ASSERT(sz_io == sizeof(ImGuiIO) && "Mismatched struct layout!"); }
+    if (sz_style != sizeof(ImGuiStyle)) { error = true; IM_ASSERT(sz_style == sizeof(ImGuiStyle) && "Mismatched struct layout!"); }
+    if (sz_vec2 != sizeof(ImVec2)) { error = true; IM_ASSERT(sz_vec2 == sizeof(ImVec2) && "Mismatched struct layout!"); }
+    if (sz_vec4 != sizeof(ImVec4)) { error = true; IM_ASSERT(sz_vec4 == sizeof(ImVec4) && "Mismatched struct layout!"); }
+    if (sz_vert != sizeof(ImDrawVert)) { error = true; IM_ASSERT(sz_vert == sizeof(ImDrawVert) && "Mismatched struct layout!"); }
+    if (sz_idx != sizeof(ImDrawIdx)) { error = true; IM_ASSERT(sz_idx == sizeof(ImDrawIdx) && "Mismatched struct layout!"); }
+    return !error;
+}
+
+static void ImGui::ErrorCheckNewFrameSanityChecks()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    // Check user IM_ASSERT macro
+    // (IF YOU GET A WARNING OR COMPILE ERROR HERE: it means your assert macro is incorrectly defined!
+    //  If your macro uses multiple statements, it NEEDS to be surrounded by a 'do { ... } while (0)' block.
+    //  This is a common C/C++ idiom to allow multiple statements macros to be used in control flow blocks.)
+    // #define IM_ASSERT(EXPR)   if (SomeCode(EXPR)) SomeMoreCode();                    // Wrong!
+    // #define IM_ASSERT(EXPR)   do { if (SomeCode(EXPR)) SomeMoreCode(); } while (0)   // Correct!
+    if (true) IM_ASSERT(1); else IM_ASSERT(0);
+
+    // Check user data
+    // (We pass an error message in the assert expression to make it visible to programmers who are not using a debugger, as most assert handlers display their argument)
+    IM_ASSERT(g.Initialized);
+    IM_ASSERT((g.IO.DeltaTime > 0.0f || g.FrameCount == 0)              && "Need a positive DeltaTime!");
+    IM_ASSERT((g.FrameCount == 0 || g.FrameCountEnded == g.FrameCount)  && "Forgot to call Render() or EndFrame() at the end of the previous frame?");
+    IM_ASSERT(g.IO.DisplaySize.x >= 0.0f && g.IO.DisplaySize.y >= 0.0f  && "Invalid DisplaySize value!");
+    IM_ASSERT(g.IO.Fonts->IsBuilt()                                     && "Font Atlas not built! Make sure you called ImGui_ImplXXXX_NewFrame() function for renderer backend, which should call io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsRGBA32() / GetTexDataAsAlpha8()");
+    IM_ASSERT(g.Style.CurveTessellationTol > 0.0f                       && "Invalid style setting!");
+    IM_ASSERT(g.Style.CircleTessellationMaxError > 0.0f                 && "Invalid style setting!");
+    IM_ASSERT(g.Style.Alpha >= 0.0f && g.Style.Alpha <= 1.0f            && "Invalid style setting!"); // Allows us to avoid a few clamps in color computations
+    IM_ASSERT(g.Style.WindowMinSize.x >= 1.0f && g.Style.WindowMinSize.y >= 1.0f && "Invalid style setting.");
+    IM_ASSERT(g.Style.WindowMenuButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_None || g.Style.WindowMenuButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Left || g.Style.WindowMenuButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Right);
+    IM_ASSERT(g.Style.ColorButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Left || g.Style.ColorButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Right);
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
+    for (int n = ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN; n < ImGuiKey_COUNT; n++)
+        IM_ASSERT(g.IO.KeyMap[n] >= -1 && g.IO.KeyMap[n] < ImGuiKey_LegacyNativeKey_END && "io.KeyMap[] contains an out of bound value (need to be 0..511, or -1 for unmapped key)");
+
+    // Check: required key mapping (we intentionally do NOT check all keys to not pressure user into setting up everything, but Space is required and was only added in 1.60 WIP)
+    if ((g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard) && g.IO.BackendUsingLegacyKeyArrays == 1)
+        IM_ASSERT(g.IO.KeyMap[ImGuiKey_Space] != -1 && "ImGuiKey_Space is not mapped, required for keyboard navigation.");
+#endif
+
+    // Check: the io.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges option requires backend to honor mouse cursor changes and set the ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors flag accordingly.
+    if (g.IO.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges && !(g.IO.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors))
+        g.IO.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges = false;
+
+    // Perform simple check: error if Docking or Viewport are enabled _exactly_ on frame 1 (instead of frame 0 or later), which is a common error leading to loss of .ini data.
+    if (g.FrameCount == 1 && (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_DockingEnable) && (g.ConfigFlagsLastFrame & ImGuiConfigFlags_DockingEnable) == 0)
+        IM_ASSERT(0 && "Please set DockingEnable before the first call to NewFrame()! Otherwise you will lose your .ini settings!");
+    if (g.FrameCount == 1 && (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable) && (g.ConfigFlagsLastFrame & ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable) == 0)
+        IM_ASSERT(0 && "Please set ViewportsEnable before the first call to NewFrame()! Otherwise you will lose your .ini settings!");
+
+    // Perform simple checks: multi-viewport and platform windows support
+    if (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable)
+    {
+        if ((g.IO.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_PlatformHasViewports) && (g.IO.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasViewports))
+        {
+            IM_ASSERT((g.FrameCount == 0 || g.FrameCount == g.FrameCountPlatformEnded) && "Forgot to call UpdatePlatformWindows() in main loop after EndFrame()? Check examples/ applications for reference.");
+            IM_ASSERT(g.PlatformIO.Platform_CreateWindow  != NULL && "Platform init didn't install handlers?");
+            IM_ASSERT(g.PlatformIO.Platform_DestroyWindow != NULL && "Platform init didn't install handlers?");
+            IM_ASSERT(g.PlatformIO.Platform_GetWindowPos  != NULL && "Platform init didn't install handlers?");
+            IM_ASSERT(g.PlatformIO.Platform_SetWindowPos  != NULL && "Platform init didn't install handlers?");
+            IM_ASSERT(g.PlatformIO.Platform_GetWindowSize != NULL && "Platform init didn't install handlers?");
+            IM_ASSERT(g.PlatformIO.Platform_SetWindowSize != NULL && "Platform init didn't install handlers?");
+            IM_ASSERT(g.PlatformIO.Monitors.Size > 0 && "Platform init didn't setup Monitors list?");
+            IM_ASSERT((g.Viewports[0]->PlatformUserData != NULL || g.Viewports[0]->PlatformHandle != NULL) && "Platform init didn't setup main viewport.");
+            if (g.IO.ConfigDockingTransparentPayload && (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_DockingEnable))
+                IM_ASSERT(g.PlatformIO.Platform_SetWindowAlpha != NULL && "Platform_SetWindowAlpha handler is required to use io.ConfigDockingTransparent!");
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            // Disable feature, our backends do not support it
+            g.IO.ConfigFlags &= ~ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable;
+        }
+
+        // Perform simple checks on platform monitor data + compute a total bounding box for quick early outs
+        for (int monitor_n = 0; monitor_n < g.PlatformIO.Monitors.Size; monitor_n++)
+        {
+            ImGuiPlatformMonitor& mon = g.PlatformIO.Monitors[monitor_n];
+            IM_UNUSED(mon);
+            IM_ASSERT(mon.MainSize.x > 0.0f && mon.MainSize.y > 0.0f && "Monitor main bounds not setup properly.");
+            IM_ASSERT(ImRect(mon.MainPos, mon.MainPos + mon.MainSize).Contains(ImRect(mon.WorkPos, mon.WorkPos + mon.WorkSize)) && "Monitor work bounds not setup properly. If you don't have work area information, just copy MainPos/MainSize into them.");
+            IM_ASSERT(mon.DpiScale != 0.0f);
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+static void ImGui::ErrorCheckEndFrameSanityChecks()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    // Verify that io.KeyXXX fields haven't been tampered with. Key mods should not be modified between NewFrame() and EndFrame()
+    // One possible reason leading to this assert is that your backends update inputs _AFTER_ NewFrame().
+    // It is known that when some modal native windows called mid-frame takes focus away, some backends such as GLFW will
+    // send key release events mid-frame. This would normally trigger this assertion and lead to sheared inputs.
+    // We silently accommodate for this case by ignoring/ the case where all io.KeyXXX modifiers were released (aka key_mod_flags == 0),
+    // while still correctly asserting on mid-frame key press events.
+    const ImGuiModFlags key_mods = GetMergedModFlags();
+    IM_ASSERT((key_mods == 0 || g.IO.KeyMods == key_mods) && "Mismatching io.KeyCtrl/io.KeyShift/io.KeyAlt/io.KeySuper vs io.KeyMods");
+    IM_UNUSED(key_mods);
+
+    // [EXPERIMENTAL] Recover from errors: You may call this yourself before EndFrame().
+    //ErrorCheckEndFrameRecover();
+
+    // Report when there is a mismatch of Begin/BeginChild vs End/EndChild calls. Important: Remember that the Begin/BeginChild API requires you
+    // to always call End/EndChild even if Begin/BeginChild returns false! (this is unfortunately inconsistent with most other Begin* API).
+    if (g.CurrentWindowStack.Size != 1)
+    {
+        if (g.CurrentWindowStack.Size > 1)
+        {
+            IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(g.CurrentWindowStack.Size == 1, "Mismatched Begin/BeginChild vs End/EndChild calls: did you forget to call End/EndChild?");
+            while (g.CurrentWindowStack.Size > 1)
+                End();
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(g.CurrentWindowStack.Size == 1, "Mismatched Begin/BeginChild vs End/EndChild calls: did you call End/EndChild too much?");
+        }
+    }
+
+    IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(g.GroupStack.Size == 0, "Missing EndGroup call!");
+}
+
+// Experimental recovery from incorrect usage of BeginXXX/EndXXX/PushXXX/PopXXX calls.
+// Must be called during or before EndFrame().
+// This is generally flawed as we are not necessarily End/Popping things in the right order.
+// FIXME: Can't recover from inside BeginTabItem/EndTabItem yet.
+// FIXME: Can't recover from interleaved BeginTabBar/Begin
+void    ImGui::ErrorCheckEndFrameRecover(ImGuiErrorLogCallback log_callback, void* user_data)
+{
+    // PVS-Studio V1044 is "Loop break conditions do not depend on the number of iterations"
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    while (g.CurrentWindowStack.Size > 0) //-V1044
+    {
+        ErrorCheckEndWindowRecover(log_callback, user_data);
+        ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+        if (g.CurrentWindowStack.Size == 1)
+        {
+            IM_ASSERT(window->IsFallbackWindow);
+            break;
+        }
+        if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)
+        {
+            if (log_callback) log_callback(user_data, "Recovered from missing EndChild() for '%s'", window->Name);
+            EndChild();
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            if (log_callback) log_callback(user_data, "Recovered from missing End() for '%s'", window->Name);
+            End();
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+// Must be called before End()/EndChild()
+void    ImGui::ErrorCheckEndWindowRecover(ImGuiErrorLogCallback log_callback, void* user_data)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    while (g.CurrentTable && (g.CurrentTable->OuterWindow == g.CurrentWindow || g.CurrentTable->InnerWindow == g.CurrentWindow))
+    {
+        if (log_callback) log_callback(user_data, "Recovered from missing EndTable() in '%s'", g.CurrentTable->OuterWindow->Name);
+        EndTable();
+    }
+
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    ImGuiStackSizes* stack_sizes = &g.CurrentWindowStack.back().StackSizesOnBegin;
+    IM_ASSERT(window != NULL);
+    while (g.CurrentTabBar != NULL) //-V1044
+    {
+        if (log_callback) log_callback(user_data, "Recovered from missing EndTabBar() in '%s'", window->Name);
+        EndTabBar();
+    }
+    while (window->DC.TreeDepth > 0)
+    {
+        if (log_callback) log_callback(user_data, "Recovered from missing TreePop() in '%s'", window->Name);
+        TreePop();
+    }
+    while (g.GroupStack.Size > stack_sizes->SizeOfGroupStack) //-V1044
+    {
+        if (log_callback) log_callback(user_data, "Recovered from missing EndGroup() in '%s'", window->Name);
+        EndGroup();
+    }
+    while (window->IDStack.Size > 1)
+    {
+        if (log_callback) log_callback(user_data, "Recovered from missing PopID() in '%s'", window->Name);
+        PopID();
+    }
+    while (g.DisabledStackSize > stack_sizes->SizeOfDisabledStack) //-V1044
+    {
+        if (log_callback) log_callback(user_data, "Recovered from missing EndDisabled() in '%s'", window->Name);
+        EndDisabled();
+    }
+    while (g.ColorStack.Size > stack_sizes->SizeOfColorStack)
+    {
+        if (log_callback) log_callback(user_data, "Recovered from missing PopStyleColor() in '%s' for ImGuiCol_%s", window->Name, GetStyleColorName(g.ColorStack.back().Col));
+        PopStyleColor();
+    }
+    while (g.ItemFlagsStack.Size > stack_sizes->SizeOfItemFlagsStack) //-V1044
+    {
+        if (log_callback) log_callback(user_data, "Recovered from missing PopItemFlag() in '%s'", window->Name);
+        PopItemFlag();
+    }
+    while (g.StyleVarStack.Size > stack_sizes->SizeOfStyleVarStack) //-V1044
+    {
+        if (log_callback) log_callback(user_data, "Recovered from missing PopStyleVar() in '%s'", window->Name);
+        PopStyleVar();
+    }
+    while (g.FocusScopeStack.Size > stack_sizes->SizeOfFocusScopeStack) //-V1044
+    {
+        if (log_callback) log_callback(user_data, "Recovered from missing PopFocusScope() in '%s'", window->Name);
+        PopFocusScope();
+    }
+}
+
+// Save current stack sizes for later compare
+void ImGuiStackSizes::SetToCurrentState()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    SizeOfIDStack = (short)window->IDStack.Size;
+    SizeOfColorStack = (short)g.ColorStack.Size;
+    SizeOfStyleVarStack = (short)g.StyleVarStack.Size;
+    SizeOfFontStack = (short)g.FontStack.Size;
+    SizeOfFocusScopeStack = (short)g.FocusScopeStack.Size;
+    SizeOfGroupStack = (short)g.GroupStack.Size;
+    SizeOfItemFlagsStack = (short)g.ItemFlagsStack.Size;
+    SizeOfBeginPopupStack = (short)g.BeginPopupStack.Size;
+    SizeOfDisabledStack = (short)g.DisabledStackSize;
+}
+
+// Compare to detect usage errors
+void ImGuiStackSizes::CompareWithCurrentState()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    IM_UNUSED(window);
+
+    // Window stacks
+    // NOT checking: DC.ItemWidth, DC.TextWrapPos (per window) to allow user to conveniently push once and not pop (they are cleared on Begin)
+    IM_ASSERT(SizeOfIDStack         == window->IDStack.Size     && "PushID/PopID or TreeNode/TreePop Mismatch!");
+
+    // Global stacks
+    // For color, style and font stacks there is an incentive to use Push/Begin/Pop/.../End patterns, so we relax our checks a little to allow them.
+    IM_ASSERT(SizeOfGroupStack      == g.GroupStack.Size        && "BeginGroup/EndGroup Mismatch!");
+    IM_ASSERT(SizeOfBeginPopupStack == g.BeginPopupStack.Size   && "BeginPopup/EndPopup or BeginMenu/EndMenu Mismatch!");
+    IM_ASSERT(SizeOfDisabledStack   == g.DisabledStackSize      && "BeginDisabled/EndDisabled Mismatch!");
+    IM_ASSERT(SizeOfItemFlagsStack  >= g.ItemFlagsStack.Size    && "PushItemFlag/PopItemFlag Mismatch!");
+    IM_ASSERT(SizeOfColorStack      >= g.ColorStack.Size        && "PushStyleColor/PopStyleColor Mismatch!");
+    IM_ASSERT(SizeOfStyleVarStack   >= g.StyleVarStack.Size     && "PushStyleVar/PopStyleVar Mismatch!");
+    IM_ASSERT(SizeOfFontStack       >= g.FontStack.Size         && "PushFont/PopFont Mismatch!");
+    IM_ASSERT(SizeOfFocusScopeStack == g.FocusScopeStack.Size   && "PushFocusScope/PopFocusScope Mismatch!");
+}
+
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] LAYOUT
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - ItemSize()
+// - ItemAdd()
+// - SameLine()
+// - GetCursorScreenPos()
+// - SetCursorScreenPos()
+// - GetCursorPos(), GetCursorPosX(), GetCursorPosY()
+// - SetCursorPos(), SetCursorPosX(), SetCursorPosY()
+// - GetCursorStartPos()
+// - Indent()
+// - Unindent()
+// - SetNextItemWidth()
+// - PushItemWidth()
+// - PushMultiItemsWidths()
+// - PopItemWidth()
+// - CalcItemWidth()
+// - CalcItemSize()
+// - GetTextLineHeight()
+// - GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing()
+// - GetFrameHeight()
+// - GetFrameHeightWithSpacing()
+// - GetContentRegionMax()
+// - GetContentRegionMaxAbs() [Internal]
+// - GetContentRegionAvail(),
+// - GetWindowContentRegionMin(), GetWindowContentRegionMax()
+// - BeginGroup()
+// - EndGroup()
+// Also see in imgui_widgets: tab bars, and in imgui_tables: tables, columns.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Advance cursor given item size for layout.
+// Register minimum needed size so it can extend the bounding box used for auto-fit calculation.
+// See comments in ItemAdd() about how/why the size provided to ItemSize() vs ItemAdd() may often different.
+void ImGui::ItemSize(const ImVec2& size, float text_baseline_y)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return;
+
+    // We increase the height in this function to accommodate for baseline offset.
+    // In theory we should be offsetting the starting position (window->DC.CursorPos), that will be the topic of a larger refactor,
+    // but since ItemSize() is not yet an API that moves the cursor (to handle e.g. wrapping) enlarging the height has the same effect.
+    const float offset_to_match_baseline_y = (text_baseline_y >= 0) ? ImMax(0.0f, window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset - text_baseline_y) : 0.0f;
+
+    const float line_y1 = window->DC.IsSameLine ? window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y : window->DC.CursorPos.y;
+    const float line_height = ImMax(window->DC.CurrLineSize.y, /*ImMax(*/window->DC.CursorPos.y - line_y1/*, 0.0f)*/ + size.y + offset_to_match_baseline_y);
+
+    // Always align ourselves on pixel boundaries
+    //if (g.IO.KeyAlt) window->DrawList->AddRect(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(size.x, line_height), IM_COL32(255,0,0,200)); // [DEBUG]
+    window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.x = window->DC.CursorPos.x + size.x;
+    window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y = line_y1;
+    window->DC.CursorPos.x = IM_FLOOR(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);    // Next line
+    window->DC.CursorPos.y = IM_FLOOR(line_y1 + line_height + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y);                    // Next line
+    window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x, window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.x);
+    window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y, window->DC.CursorPos.y - g.Style.ItemSpacing.y);
+    //if (g.IO.KeyAlt) window->DrawList->AddCircle(window->DC.CursorMaxPos, 3.0f, IM_COL32(255,0,0,255), 4); // [DEBUG]
+
+    window->DC.PrevLineSize.y = line_height;
+    window->DC.CurrLineSize.y = 0.0f;
+    window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset = ImMax(window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset, text_baseline_y);
+    window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset = 0.0f;
+    window->DC.IsSameLine = false;
+
+    // Horizontal layout mode
+    if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal)
+        SameLine();
+}
+
+// Declare item bounding box for clipping and interaction.
+// Note that the size can be different than the one provided to ItemSize(). Typically, widgets that spread over available surface
+// declare their minimum size requirement to ItemSize() and provide a larger region to ItemAdd() which is used drawing/interaction.
+bool ImGui::ItemAdd(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, const ImRect* nav_bb_arg, ImGuiItemFlags extra_flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+    // Set item data
+    // (DisplayRect is left untouched, made valid when ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDisplayRect is set)
+    g.LastItemData.ID = id;
+    g.LastItemData.Rect = bb;
+    g.LastItemData.NavRect = nav_bb_arg ? *nav_bb_arg : bb;
+    g.LastItemData.InFlags = g.CurrentItemFlags | extra_flags;
+    g.LastItemData.StatusFlags = ImGuiItemStatusFlags_None;
+
+    // Directional navigation processing
+    if (id != 0)
+    {
+        KeepAliveID(id);
+
+        // Runs prior to clipping early-out
+        //  (a) So that NavInitRequest can be honored, for newly opened windows to select a default widget
+        //  (b) So that we can scroll up/down past clipped items. This adds a small O(N) cost to regular navigation requests
+        //      unfortunately, but it is still limited to one window. It may not scale very well for windows with ten of
+        //      thousands of item, but at least NavMoveRequest is only set on user interaction, aka maximum once a frame.
+        //      We could early out with "if (is_clipped && !g.NavInitRequest) return false;" but when we wouldn't be able
+        //      to reach unclipped widgets. This would work if user had explicit scrolling control (e.g. mapped on a stick).
+        // We intentionally don't check if g.NavWindow != NULL because g.NavAnyRequest should only be set when it is non null.
+        // If we crash on a NULL g.NavWindow we need to fix the bug elsewhere.
+        window->DC.NavLayersActiveMaskNext |= (1 << window->DC.NavLayerCurrent);
+        if (g.NavId == id || g.NavAnyRequest)
+            if (g.NavWindow->RootWindowForNav == window->RootWindowForNav)
+                if (window == g.NavWindow || ((window->Flags | g.NavWindow->Flags) & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened))
+                    NavProcessItem();
+
+        // [DEBUG] People keep stumbling on this problem and using "" as identifier in the root of a window instead of "##something".
+        // Empty identifier are valid and useful in a small amount of cases, but 99.9% of the time you want to use "##something".
+        // READ THE FAQ: https://dearimgui.org/faq
+        IM_ASSERT(id != window->ID && "Cannot have an empty ID at the root of a window. If you need an empty label, use ## and read the FAQ about how the ID Stack works!");
+
+        // [DEBUG] Item Picker tool, when enabling the "extended" version we perform the check in ItemAdd()
+#ifdef IMGUI_DEBUG_TOOL_ITEM_PICKER_EX
+        if (id == g.DebugItemPickerBreakId)
+        {
+            IM_DEBUG_BREAK();
+            g.DebugItemPickerBreakId = 0;
+        }
+#endif
+    }
+    g.NextItemData.Flags = ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_None;
+
+#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_TEST_ENGINE
+    if (id != 0)
+        IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_ADD(nav_bb_arg ? *nav_bb_arg : bb, id);
+#endif
+
+    // Clipping test
+    const bool is_clipped = IsClippedEx(bb, id);
+    if (is_clipped)
+        return false;
+    //if (g.IO.KeyAlt) window->DrawList->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, IM_COL32(255,255,0,120)); // [DEBUG]
+
+    // We need to calculate this now to take account of the current clipping rectangle (as items like Selectable may change them)
+    if (IsMouseHoveringRect(bb.Min, bb.Max))
+        g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect;
+    return true;
+}
+
+// Gets back to previous line and continue with horizontal layout
+//      offset_from_start_x == 0 : follow right after previous item
+//      offset_from_start_x != 0 : align to specified x position (relative to window/group left)
+//      spacing_w < 0            : use default spacing if pos_x == 0, no spacing if pos_x != 0
+//      spacing_w >= 0           : enforce spacing amount
+void ImGui::SameLine(float offset_from_start_x, float spacing_w)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return;
+
+    if (offset_from_start_x != 0.0f)
+    {
+        if (spacing_w < 0.0f)
+            spacing_w = 0.0f;
+        window->DC.CursorPos.x = window->Pos.x - window->Scroll.x + offset_from_start_x + spacing_w + window->DC.GroupOffset.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x;
+        window->DC.CursorPos.y = window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        if (spacing_w < 0.0f)
+            spacing_w = g.Style.ItemSpacing.x;
+        window->DC.CursorPos.x = window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.x + spacing_w;
+        window->DC.CursorPos.y = window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y;
+    }
+    window->DC.CurrLineSize = window->DC.PrevLineSize;
+    window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset = window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset;
+    window->DC.IsSameLine = true;
+}
+
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+    return window->DC.CursorPos;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(const ImVec2& pos)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    window->DC.CursorPos = pos;
+    window->DC.CursorMaxPos = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos, window->DC.CursorPos);
+}
+
+// User generally sees positions in window coordinates. Internally we store CursorPos in absolute screen coordinates because it is more convenient.
+// Conversion happens as we pass the value to user, but it makes our naming convention confusing because GetCursorPos() == (DC.CursorPos - window.Pos). May want to rename 'DC.CursorPos'.
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetCursorPos()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+    return window->DC.CursorPos - window->Pos + window->Scroll;
+}
+
+float ImGui::GetCursorPosX()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+    return window->DC.CursorPos.x - window->Pos.x + window->Scroll.x;
+}
+
+float ImGui::GetCursorPosY()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+    return window->DC.CursorPos.y - window->Pos.y + window->Scroll.y;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetCursorPos(const ImVec2& local_pos)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    window->DC.CursorPos = window->Pos - window->Scroll + local_pos;
+    window->DC.CursorMaxPos = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos, window->DC.CursorPos);
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetCursorPosX(float x)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    window->DC.CursorPos.x = window->Pos.x - window->Scroll.x + x;
+    window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x, window->DC.CursorPos.x);
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetCursorPosY(float y)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    window->DC.CursorPos.y = window->Pos.y - window->Scroll.y + y;
+    window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y, window->DC.CursorPos.y);
+}
+
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetCursorStartPos()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+    return window->DC.CursorStartPos - window->Pos;
+}
+
+void ImGui::Indent(float indent_w)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    window->DC.Indent.x += (indent_w != 0.0f) ? indent_w : g.Style.IndentSpacing;
+    window->DC.CursorPos.x = window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x;
+}
+
+void ImGui::Unindent(float indent_w)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    window->DC.Indent.x -= (indent_w != 0.0f) ? indent_w : g.Style.IndentSpacing;
+    window->DC.CursorPos.x = window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x;
+}
+
+// Affect large frame+labels widgets only.
+void ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(float item_width)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.NextItemData.Flags |= ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_HasWidth;
+    g.NextItemData.Width = item_width;
+}
+
+// FIXME: Remove the == 0.0f behavior?
+void ImGui::PushItemWidth(float item_width)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    window->DC.ItemWidthStack.push_back(window->DC.ItemWidth); // Backup current width
+    window->DC.ItemWidth = (item_width == 0.0f ? window->ItemWidthDefault : item_width);
+    g.NextItemData.Flags &= ~ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_HasWidth;
+}
+
+void ImGui::PushMultiItemsWidths(int components, float w_full)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+    const float w_item_one  = ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR((w_full - (style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components - 1)) / (float)components));
+    const float w_item_last = ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(w_full - (w_item_one + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components - 1)));
+    window->DC.ItemWidthStack.push_back(window->DC.ItemWidth); // Backup current width
+    window->DC.ItemWidthStack.push_back(w_item_last);
+    for (int i = 0; i < components - 2; i++)
+        window->DC.ItemWidthStack.push_back(w_item_one);
+    window->DC.ItemWidth = (components == 1) ? w_item_last : w_item_one;
+    g.NextItemData.Flags &= ~ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_HasWidth;
+}
+
+void ImGui::PopItemWidth()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    window->DC.ItemWidth = window->DC.ItemWidthStack.back();
+    window->DC.ItemWidthStack.pop_back();
+}
+
+// Calculate default item width given value passed to PushItemWidth() or SetNextItemWidth().
+// The SetNextItemWidth() data is generally cleared/consumed by ItemAdd() or NextItemData.ClearFlags()
+float ImGui::CalcItemWidth()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    float w;
+    if (g.NextItemData.Flags & ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_HasWidth)
+        w = g.NextItemData.Width;
+    else
+        w = window->DC.ItemWidth;
+    if (w < 0.0f)
+    {
+        float region_max_x = GetContentRegionMaxAbs().x;
+        w = ImMax(1.0f, region_max_x - window->DC.CursorPos.x + w);
+    }
+    w = IM_FLOOR(w);
+    return w;
+}
+
+// [Internal] Calculate full item size given user provided 'size' parameter and default width/height. Default width is often == CalcItemWidth().
+// Those two functions CalcItemWidth vs CalcItemSize are awkwardly named because they are not fully symmetrical.
+// Note that only CalcItemWidth() is publicly exposed.
+// The 4.0f here may be changed to match CalcItemWidth() and/or BeginChild() (right now we have a mismatch which is harmless but undesirable)
+ImVec2 ImGui::CalcItemSize(ImVec2 size, float default_w, float default_h)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+    ImVec2 region_max;
+    if (size.x < 0.0f || size.y < 0.0f)
+        region_max = GetContentRegionMaxAbs();
+
+    if (size.x == 0.0f)
+        size.x = default_w;
+    else if (size.x < 0.0f)
+        size.x = ImMax(4.0f, region_max.x - window->DC.CursorPos.x + size.x);
+
+    if (size.y == 0.0f)
+        size.y = default_h;
+    else if (size.y < 0.0f)
+        size.y = ImMax(4.0f, region_max.y - window->DC.CursorPos.y + size.y);
+
+    return size;
+}
+
+float ImGui::GetTextLineHeight()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.FontSize;
+}
+
+float ImGui::GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.FontSize + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y;
+}
+
+float ImGui::GetFrameHeight()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f;
+}
+
+float ImGui::GetFrameHeightWithSpacing()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y;
+}
+
+// FIXME: All the Contents Region function are messy or misleading. WE WILL AIM TO OBSOLETE ALL OF THEM WITH A NEW "WORK RECT" API. Thanks for your patience!
+
+// FIXME: This is in window space (not screen space!).
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetContentRegionMax()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    ImVec2 mx = window->ContentRegionRect.Max - window->Pos;
+    if (window->DC.CurrentColumns || g.CurrentTable)
+        mx.x = window->WorkRect.Max.x - window->Pos.x;
+    return mx;
+}
+
+// [Internal] Absolute coordinate. Saner. This is not exposed until we finishing refactoring work rect features.
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetContentRegionMaxAbs()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    ImVec2 mx = window->ContentRegionRect.Max;
+    if (window->DC.CurrentColumns || g.CurrentTable)
+        mx.x = window->WorkRect.Max.x;
+    return mx;
+}
+
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+    return GetContentRegionMaxAbs() - window->DC.CursorPos;
+}
+
+// In window space (not screen space!)
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetWindowContentRegionMin()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+    return window->ContentRegionRect.Min - window->Pos;
+}
+
+ImVec2 ImGui::GetWindowContentRegionMax()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+    return window->ContentRegionRect.Max - window->Pos;
+}
+
+// Lock horizontal starting position + capture group bounding box into one "item" (so you can use IsItemHovered() or layout primitives such as SameLine() on whole group, etc.)
+// Groups are currently a mishmash of functionalities which should perhaps be clarified and separated.
+// FIXME-OPT: Could we safely early out on ->SkipItems?
+void ImGui::BeginGroup()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+    g.GroupStack.resize(g.GroupStack.Size + 1);
+    ImGuiGroupData& group_data = g.GroupStack.back();
+    group_data.WindowID = window->ID;
+    group_data.BackupCursorPos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+    group_data.BackupCursorMaxPos = window->DC.CursorMaxPos;
+    group_data.BackupIndent = window->DC.Indent;
+    group_data.BackupGroupOffset = window->DC.GroupOffset;
+    group_data.BackupCurrLineSize = window->DC.CurrLineSize;
+    group_data.BackupCurrLineTextBaseOffset = window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset;
+    group_data.BackupActiveIdIsAlive = g.ActiveIdIsAlive;
+    group_data.BackupHoveredIdIsAlive = g.HoveredId != 0;
+    group_data.BackupActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive = g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive;
+    group_data.EmitItem = true;
+
+    window->DC.GroupOffset.x = window->DC.CursorPos.x - window->Pos.x - window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x;
+    window->DC.Indent = window->DC.GroupOffset;
+    window->DC.CursorMaxPos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+    window->DC.CurrLineSize = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+    if (g.LogEnabled)
+        g.LogLinePosY = -FLT_MAX; // To enforce a carriage return
+}
+
+void ImGui::EndGroup()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.GroupStack.Size > 0); // Mismatched BeginGroup()/EndGroup() calls
+
+    ImGuiGroupData& group_data = g.GroupStack.back();
+    IM_ASSERT(group_data.WindowID == window->ID); // EndGroup() in wrong window?
+
+    ImRect group_bb(group_data.BackupCursorPos, ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos, group_data.BackupCursorPos));
+
+    window->DC.CursorPos = group_data.BackupCursorPos;
+    window->DC.CursorMaxPos = ImMax(group_data.BackupCursorMaxPos, window->DC.CursorMaxPos);
+    window->DC.Indent = group_data.BackupIndent;
+    window->DC.GroupOffset = group_data.BackupGroupOffset;
+    window->DC.CurrLineSize = group_data.BackupCurrLineSize;
+    window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset = group_data.BackupCurrLineTextBaseOffset;
+    if (g.LogEnabled)
+        g.LogLinePosY = -FLT_MAX; // To enforce a carriage return
+
+    if (!group_data.EmitItem)
+    {
+        g.GroupStack.pop_back();
+        return;
+    }
+
+    window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset = ImMax(window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset, group_data.BackupCurrLineTextBaseOffset);      // FIXME: Incorrect, we should grab the base offset from the *first line* of the group but it is hard to obtain now.
+    ItemSize(group_bb.GetSize());
+    ItemAdd(group_bb, 0, NULL, ImGuiItemFlags_NoTabStop);
+
+    // If the current ActiveId was declared within the boundary of our group, we copy it to LastItemId so IsItemActive(), IsItemDeactivated() etc. will be functional on the entire group.
+    // It would be be neater if we replaced window.DC.LastItemId by e.g. 'bool LastItemIsActive', but would put a little more burden on individual widgets.
+    // Also if you grep for LastItemId you'll notice it is only used in that context.
+    // (The two tests not the same because ActiveIdIsAlive is an ID itself, in order to be able to handle ActiveId being overwritten during the frame.)
+    const bool group_contains_curr_active_id = (group_data.BackupActiveIdIsAlive != g.ActiveId) && (g.ActiveIdIsAlive == g.ActiveId) && g.ActiveId;
+    const bool group_contains_prev_active_id = (group_data.BackupActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive == false) && (g.ActiveIdPreviousFrameIsAlive == true);
+    if (group_contains_curr_active_id)
+        g.LastItemData.ID = g.ActiveId;
+    else if (group_contains_prev_active_id)
+        g.LastItemData.ID = g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame;
+    g.LastItemData.Rect = group_bb;
+
+    // Forward Hovered flag
+    const bool group_contains_curr_hovered_id = (group_data.BackupHoveredIdIsAlive == false) && g.HoveredId != 0;
+    if (group_contains_curr_hovered_id)
+        g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredWindow;
+
+    // Forward Edited flag
+    if (group_contains_curr_active_id && g.ActiveIdHasBeenEditedThisFrame)
+        g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Edited;
+
+    // Forward Deactivated flag
+    g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDeactivated;
+    if (group_contains_prev_active_id && g.ActiveId != g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame)
+        g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Deactivated;
+
+    g.GroupStack.pop_back();
+    //window->DrawList->AddRect(group_bb.Min, group_bb.Max, IM_COL32(255,0,255,255));   // [Debug]
+}
+
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] SCROLLING
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Helper to snap on edges when aiming at an item very close to the edge,
+// So the difference between WindowPadding and ItemSpacing will be in the visible area after scrolling.
+// When we refactor the scrolling API this may be configurable with a flag?
+// Note that the effect for this won't be visible on X axis with default Style settings as WindowPadding.x == ItemSpacing.x by default.
+static float CalcScrollEdgeSnap(float target, float snap_min, float snap_max, float snap_threshold, float center_ratio)
+{
+    if (target <= snap_min + snap_threshold)
+        return ImLerp(snap_min, target, center_ratio);
+    if (target >= snap_max - snap_threshold)
+        return ImLerp(target, snap_max, center_ratio);
+    return target;
+}
+
+static ImVec2 CalcNextScrollFromScrollTargetAndClamp(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImVec2 scroll = window->Scroll;
+    if (window->ScrollTarget.x < FLT_MAX)
+    {
+        float decoration_total_width = window->ScrollbarSizes.x;
+        float center_x_ratio = window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.x;
+        float scroll_target_x = window->ScrollTarget.x;
+        if (window->ScrollTargetEdgeSnapDist.x > 0.0f)
+        {
+            float snap_x_min = 0.0f;
+            float snap_x_max = window->ScrollMax.x + window->SizeFull.x - decoration_total_width;
+            scroll_target_x = CalcScrollEdgeSnap(scroll_target_x, snap_x_min, snap_x_max, window->ScrollTargetEdgeSnapDist.x, center_x_ratio);
+        }
+        scroll.x = scroll_target_x - center_x_ratio * (window->SizeFull.x - decoration_total_width);
+    }
+    if (window->ScrollTarget.y < FLT_MAX)
+    {
+        float decoration_total_height = window->TitleBarHeight() + window->MenuBarHeight() + window->ScrollbarSizes.y;
+        float center_y_ratio = window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.y;
+        float scroll_target_y = window->ScrollTarget.y;
+        if (window->ScrollTargetEdgeSnapDist.y > 0.0f)
+        {
+            float snap_y_min = 0.0f;
+            float snap_y_max = window->ScrollMax.y + window->SizeFull.y - decoration_total_height;
+            scroll_target_y = CalcScrollEdgeSnap(scroll_target_y, snap_y_min, snap_y_max, window->ScrollTargetEdgeSnapDist.y, center_y_ratio);
+        }
+        scroll.y = scroll_target_y - center_y_ratio * (window->SizeFull.y - decoration_total_height);
+    }
+    scroll.x = IM_FLOOR(ImMax(scroll.x, 0.0f));
+    scroll.y = IM_FLOOR(ImMax(scroll.y, 0.0f));
+    if (!window->Collapsed && !window->SkipItems)
+    {
+        scroll.x = ImMin(scroll.x, window->ScrollMax.x);
+        scroll.y = ImMin(scroll.y, window->ScrollMax.y);
+    }
+    return scroll;
+}
+
+void ImGui::ScrollToItem(ImGuiScrollFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    ScrollToRectEx(window, g.LastItemData.NavRect, flags);
+}
+
+void ImGui::ScrollToRect(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& item_rect, ImGuiScrollFlags flags)
+{
+    ScrollToRectEx(window, item_rect, flags);
+}
+
+// Scroll to keep newly navigated item fully into view
+ImVec2 ImGui::ScrollToRectEx(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& item_rect, ImGuiScrollFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImRect window_rect(window->InnerRect.Min - ImVec2(1, 1), window->InnerRect.Max + ImVec2(1, 1));
+    //GetForegroundDrawList(window)->AddRect(window_rect.Min, window_rect.Max, IM_COL32_WHITE); // [DEBUG]
+
+    // Check that only one behavior is selected per axis
+    IM_ASSERT((flags & ImGuiScrollFlags_MaskX_) == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiScrollFlags_MaskX_));
+    IM_ASSERT((flags & ImGuiScrollFlags_MaskY_) == 0 || ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiScrollFlags_MaskY_));
+
+    // Defaults
+    ImGuiScrollFlags in_flags = flags;
+    if ((flags & ImGuiScrollFlags_MaskX_) == 0 && window->ScrollbarX)
+        flags |= ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeX;
+    if ((flags & ImGuiScrollFlags_MaskY_) == 0)
+        flags |= window->Appearing ? ImGuiScrollFlags_AlwaysCenterY : ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeY;
+
+    const bool fully_visible_x = item_rect.Min.x >= window_rect.Min.x && item_rect.Max.x <= window_rect.Max.x;
+    const bool fully_visible_y = item_rect.Min.y >= window_rect.Min.y && item_rect.Max.y <= window_rect.Max.y;
+    const bool can_be_fully_visible_x = (item_rect.GetWidth() + g.Style.ItemSpacing.x * 2.0f) <= window_rect.GetWidth();
+    const bool can_be_fully_visible_y = (item_rect.GetHeight() + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y * 2.0f) <= window_rect.GetHeight();
+
+    if ((flags & ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeX) && !fully_visible_x)
+    {
+        if (item_rect.Min.x < window_rect.Min.x || !can_be_fully_visible_x)
+            SetScrollFromPosX(window, item_rect.Min.x - g.Style.ItemSpacing.x - window->Pos.x, 0.0f);
+        else if (item_rect.Max.x >= window_rect.Max.x)
+            SetScrollFromPosX(window, item_rect.Max.x + g.Style.ItemSpacing.x - window->Pos.x, 1.0f);
+    }
+    else if (((flags & ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleCenterX) && !fully_visible_x) || (flags & ImGuiScrollFlags_AlwaysCenterX))
+    {
+        float target_x = can_be_fully_visible_x ? ImFloor((item_rect.Min.x + item_rect.Max.x - window->InnerRect.GetWidth()) * 0.5f) : item_rect.Min.x;
+        SetScrollFromPosX(window, target_x - window->Pos.x, 0.0f);
+    }
+
+    if ((flags & ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeY) && !fully_visible_y)
+    {
+        if (item_rect.Min.y < window_rect.Min.y || !can_be_fully_visible_y)
+            SetScrollFromPosY(window, item_rect.Min.y - g.Style.ItemSpacing.y - window->Pos.y, 0.0f);
+        else if (item_rect.Max.y >= window_rect.Max.y)
+            SetScrollFromPosY(window, item_rect.Max.y + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y - window->Pos.y, 1.0f);
+    }
+    else if (((flags & ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleCenterY) && !fully_visible_y) || (flags & ImGuiScrollFlags_AlwaysCenterY))
+    {
+        float target_y = can_be_fully_visible_y ? ImFloor((item_rect.Min.y + item_rect.Max.y - window->InnerRect.GetHeight()) * 0.5f) : item_rect.Min.y;
+        SetScrollFromPosY(window, target_y - window->Pos.y, 0.0f);
+    }
+
+    ImVec2 next_scroll = CalcNextScrollFromScrollTargetAndClamp(window);
+    ImVec2 delta_scroll = next_scroll - window->Scroll;
+
+    // Also scroll parent window to keep us into view if necessary
+    if (!(flags & ImGuiScrollFlags_NoScrollParent) && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow))
+    {
+        // FIXME-SCROLL: May be an option?
+        if ((in_flags & (ImGuiScrollFlags_AlwaysCenterX | ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleCenterX)) != 0)
+            in_flags = (in_flags & ~ImGuiScrollFlags_MaskX_) | ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeX;
+        if ((in_flags & (ImGuiScrollFlags_AlwaysCenterY | ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleCenterY)) != 0)
+            in_flags = (in_flags & ~ImGuiScrollFlags_MaskY_) | ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeY;
+        delta_scroll += ScrollToRectEx(window->ParentWindow, ImRect(item_rect.Min - delta_scroll, item_rect.Max - delta_scroll), in_flags);
+    }
+
+    return delta_scroll;
+}
+
+float ImGui::GetScrollX()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+    return window->Scroll.x;
+}
+
+float ImGui::GetScrollY()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+    return window->Scroll.y;
+}
+
+float ImGui::GetScrollMaxX()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+    return window->ScrollMax.x;
+}
+
+float ImGui::GetScrollMaxY()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+    return window->ScrollMax.y;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetScrollX(ImGuiWindow* window, float scroll_x)
+{
+    window->ScrollTarget.x = scroll_x;
+    window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.x = 0.0f;
+    window->ScrollTargetEdgeSnapDist.x = 0.0f;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetScrollY(ImGuiWindow* window, float scroll_y)
+{
+    window->ScrollTarget.y = scroll_y;
+    window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.y = 0.0f;
+    window->ScrollTargetEdgeSnapDist.y = 0.0f;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetScrollX(float scroll_x)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    SetScrollX(g.CurrentWindow, scroll_x);
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetScrollY(float scroll_y)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    SetScrollY(g.CurrentWindow, scroll_y);
+}
+
+// Note that a local position will vary depending on initial scroll value,
+// This is a little bit confusing so bear with us:
+//  - local_pos = (absolution_pos - window->Pos)
+//  - So local_x/local_y are 0.0f for a position at the upper-left corner of a window,
+//    and generally local_x/local_y are >(padding+decoration) && <(size-padding-decoration) when in the visible area.
+//  - They mostly exists because of legacy API.
+// Following the rules above, when trying to work with scrolling code, consider that:
+//  - SetScrollFromPosY(0.0f) == SetScrollY(0.0f + scroll.y) == has no effect!
+//  - SetScrollFromPosY(-scroll.y) == SetScrollY(-scroll.y + scroll.y) == SetScrollY(0.0f) == reset scroll. Of course writing SetScrollY(0.0f) directly then makes more sense
+// We store a target position so centering and clamping can occur on the next frame when we are guaranteed to have a known window size
+void ImGui::SetScrollFromPosX(ImGuiWindow* window, float local_x, float center_x_ratio)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(center_x_ratio >= 0.0f && center_x_ratio <= 1.0f);
+    window->ScrollTarget.x = IM_FLOOR(local_x + window->Scroll.x); // Convert local position to scroll offset
+    window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.x = center_x_ratio;
+    window->ScrollTargetEdgeSnapDist.x = 0.0f;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetScrollFromPosY(ImGuiWindow* window, float local_y, float center_y_ratio)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(center_y_ratio >= 0.0f && center_y_ratio <= 1.0f);
+    const float decoration_up_height = window->TitleBarHeight() + window->MenuBarHeight(); // FIXME: Would be nice to have a more standardized access to our scrollable/client rect;
+    local_y -= decoration_up_height;
+    window->ScrollTarget.y = IM_FLOOR(local_y + window->Scroll.y); // Convert local position to scroll offset
+    window->ScrollTargetCenterRatio.y = center_y_ratio;
+    window->ScrollTargetEdgeSnapDist.y = 0.0f;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetScrollFromPosX(float local_x, float center_x_ratio)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    SetScrollFromPosX(g.CurrentWindow, local_x, center_x_ratio);
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetScrollFromPosY(float local_y, float center_y_ratio)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    SetScrollFromPosY(g.CurrentWindow, local_y, center_y_ratio);
+}
+
+// center_x_ratio: 0.0f left of last item, 0.5f horizontal center of last item, 1.0f right of last item.
+void ImGui::SetScrollHereX(float center_x_ratio)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    float spacing_x = ImMax(window->WindowPadding.x, g.Style.ItemSpacing.x);
+    float target_pos_x = ImLerp(g.LastItemData.Rect.Min.x - spacing_x, g.LastItemData.Rect.Max.x + spacing_x, center_x_ratio);
+    SetScrollFromPosX(window, target_pos_x - window->Pos.x, center_x_ratio); // Convert from absolute to local pos
+
+    // Tweak: snap on edges when aiming at an item very close to the edge
+    window->ScrollTargetEdgeSnapDist.x = ImMax(0.0f, window->WindowPadding.x - spacing_x);
+}
+
+// center_y_ratio: 0.0f top of last item, 0.5f vertical center of last item, 1.0f bottom of last item.
+void ImGui::SetScrollHereY(float center_y_ratio)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    float spacing_y = ImMax(window->WindowPadding.y, g.Style.ItemSpacing.y);
+    float target_pos_y = ImLerp(window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y - spacing_y, window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine.y + window->DC.PrevLineSize.y + spacing_y, center_y_ratio);
+    SetScrollFromPosY(window, target_pos_y - window->Pos.y, center_y_ratio); // Convert from absolute to local pos
+
+    // Tweak: snap on edges when aiming at an item very close to the edge
+    window->ScrollTargetEdgeSnapDist.y = ImMax(0.0f, window->WindowPadding.y - spacing_y);
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] TOOLTIPS
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+void ImGui::BeginTooltip()
+{
+    BeginTooltipEx(ImGuiTooltipFlags_None, ImGuiWindowFlags_None);
+}
+
+void ImGui::BeginTooltipEx(ImGuiTooltipFlags tooltip_flags, ImGuiWindowFlags extra_window_flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    if (g.DragDropWithinSource || g.DragDropWithinTarget)
+    {
+        // The default tooltip position is a little offset to give space to see the context menu (it's also clamped within the current viewport/monitor)
+        // In the context of a dragging tooltip we try to reduce that offset and we enforce following the cursor.
+        // Whatever we do we want to call SetNextWindowPos() to enforce a tooltip position and disable clipping the tooltip without our display area, like regular tooltip do.
+        //ImVec2 tooltip_pos = g.IO.MousePos - g.ActiveIdClickOffset - g.Style.WindowPadding;
+        ImVec2 tooltip_pos = g.IO.MousePos + ImVec2(16 * g.Style.MouseCursorScale, 8 * g.Style.MouseCursorScale);
+        SetNextWindowPos(tooltip_pos);
+        SetNextWindowBgAlpha(g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_PopupBg].w * 0.60f);
+        //PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_Alpha, g.Style.Alpha * 0.60f); // This would be nice but e.g ColorButton with checkboard has issue with transparent colors :(
+        tooltip_flags |= ImGuiTooltipFlags_OverridePreviousTooltip;
+    }
+
+    char window_name[16];
+    ImFormatString(window_name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(window_name), "##Tooltip_%02d", g.TooltipOverrideCount);
+    if (tooltip_flags & ImGuiTooltipFlags_OverridePreviousTooltip)
+        if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(window_name))
+            if (window->Active)
+            {
+                // Hide previous tooltip from being displayed. We can't easily "reset" the content of a window so we create a new one.
+                window->Hidden = true;
+                window->HiddenFramesCanSkipItems = 1; // FIXME: This may not be necessary?
+                ImFormatString(window_name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(window_name), "##Tooltip_%02d", ++g.TooltipOverrideCount);
+            }
+    ImGuiWindowFlags flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDocking;
+    Begin(window_name, NULL, flags | extra_window_flags);
+}
+
+void ImGui::EndTooltip()
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(GetCurrentWindowRead()->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip);   // Mismatched BeginTooltip()/EndTooltip() calls
+    End();
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetTooltipV(const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+    BeginTooltipEx(ImGuiTooltipFlags_OverridePreviousTooltip, ImGuiWindowFlags_None);
+    TextV(fmt, args);
+    EndTooltip();
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetTooltip(const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+    va_list args;
+    va_start(args, fmt);
+    SetTooltipV(fmt, args);
+    va_end(args);
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] POPUPS
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Supported flags: ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupId, ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupLevel
+bool ImGui::IsPopupOpen(ImGuiID id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (popup_flags & ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupId)
+    {
+        // Return true if any popup is open at the current BeginPopup() level of the popup stack
+        // This may be used to e.g. test for another popups already opened to handle popups priorities at the same level.
+        IM_ASSERT(id == 0);
+        if (popup_flags & ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupLevel)
+            return g.OpenPopupStack.Size > 0;
+        else
+            return g.OpenPopupStack.Size > g.BeginPopupStack.Size;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        if (popup_flags & ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupLevel)
+        {
+            // Return true if the popup is open anywhere in the popup stack
+            for (int n = 0; n < g.OpenPopupStack.Size; n++)
+                if (g.OpenPopupStack[n].PopupId == id)
+                    return true;
+            return false;
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            // Return true if the popup is open at the current BeginPopup() level of the popup stack (this is the most-common query)
+            return g.OpenPopupStack.Size > g.BeginPopupStack.Size && g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size].PopupId == id;
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsPopupOpen(const char* str_id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiID id = (popup_flags & ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupId) ? 0 : g.CurrentWindow->GetID(str_id);
+    if ((popup_flags & ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupLevel) && id != 0)
+        IM_ASSERT(0 && "Cannot use IsPopupOpen() with a string id and ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupLevel."); // But non-string version is legal and used internally
+    return IsPopupOpen(id, popup_flags);
+}
+
+ImGuiWindow* ImGui::GetTopMostPopupModal()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    for (int n = g.OpenPopupStack.Size - 1; n >= 0; n--)
+        if (ImGuiWindow* popup = g.OpenPopupStack.Data[n].Window)
+            if (popup->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)
+                return popup;
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+ImGuiWindow* ImGui::GetTopMostAndVisiblePopupModal()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    for (int n = g.OpenPopupStack.Size - 1; n >= 0; n--)
+        if (ImGuiWindow* popup = g.OpenPopupStack.Data[n].Window)
+            if ((popup->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal) && IsWindowActiveAndVisible(popup))
+                return popup;
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+void ImGui::OpenPopup(const char* str_id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiID id = g.CurrentWindow->GetID(str_id);
+    IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_POPUP("[popup] OpenPopup(\"%s\" -> 0x%08X\n", str_id, id);
+    OpenPopupEx(id, popup_flags);
+}
+
+void ImGui::OpenPopup(ImGuiID id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags)
+{
+    OpenPopupEx(id, popup_flags);
+}
+
+// Mark popup as open (toggle toward open state).
+// Popups are closed when user click outside, or activate a pressable item, or CloseCurrentPopup() is called within a BeginPopup()/EndPopup() block.
+// Popup identifiers are relative to the current ID-stack (so OpenPopup and BeginPopup needs to be at the same level).
+// One open popup per level of the popup hierarchy (NB: when assigning we reset the Window member of ImGuiPopupRef to NULL)
+void ImGui::OpenPopupEx(ImGuiID id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* parent_window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    const int current_stack_size = g.BeginPopupStack.Size;
+
+    if (popup_flags & ImGuiPopupFlags_NoOpenOverExistingPopup)
+        if (IsPopupOpen(0u, ImGuiPopupFlags_AnyPopupId))
+            return;
+
+    ImGuiPopupData popup_ref; // Tagged as new ref as Window will be set back to NULL if we write this into OpenPopupStack.
+    popup_ref.PopupId = id;
+    popup_ref.Window = NULL;
+    popup_ref.SourceWindow = g.NavWindow;
+    popup_ref.OpenFrameCount = g.FrameCount;
+    popup_ref.OpenParentId = parent_window->IDStack.back();
+    popup_ref.OpenPopupPos = NavCalcPreferredRefPos();
+    popup_ref.OpenMousePos = IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos) ? g.IO.MousePos : popup_ref.OpenPopupPos;
+
+    IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_POPUP("[popup] OpenPopupEx(0x%08X)\n", id);
+    if (g.OpenPopupStack.Size < current_stack_size + 1)
+    {
+        g.OpenPopupStack.push_back(popup_ref);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Gently handle the user mistakenly calling OpenPopup() every frame. It is a programming mistake! However, if we were to run the regular code path, the ui
+        // would become completely unusable because the popup will always be in hidden-while-calculating-size state _while_ claiming focus. Which would be a very confusing
+        // situation for the programmer. Instead, we silently allow the popup to proceed, it will keep reappearing and the programming error will be more obvious to understand.
+        if (g.OpenPopupStack[current_stack_size].PopupId == id && g.OpenPopupStack[current_stack_size].OpenFrameCount == g.FrameCount - 1)
+        {
+            g.OpenPopupStack[current_stack_size].OpenFrameCount = popup_ref.OpenFrameCount;
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            // Close child popups if any, then flag popup for open/reopen
+            ClosePopupToLevel(current_stack_size, false);
+            g.OpenPopupStack.push_back(popup_ref);
+        }
+
+        // When reopening a popup we first refocus its parent, otherwise if its parent is itself a popup it would get closed by ClosePopupsOverWindow().
+        // This is equivalent to what ClosePopupToLevel() does.
+        //if (g.OpenPopupStack[current_stack_size].PopupId == id)
+        //    FocusWindow(parent_window);
+    }
+}
+
+// When popups are stacked, clicking on a lower level popups puts focus back to it and close popups above it.
+// This function closes any popups that are over 'ref_window'.
+void ImGui::ClosePopupsOverWindow(ImGuiWindow* ref_window, bool restore_focus_to_window_under_popup)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.OpenPopupStack.Size == 0)
+        return;
+
+    // Don't close our own child popup windows.
+    int popup_count_to_keep = 0;
+    if (ref_window)
+    {
+        // Find the highest popup which is a descendant of the reference window (generally reference window = NavWindow)
+        for (; popup_count_to_keep < g.OpenPopupStack.Size; popup_count_to_keep++)
+        {
+            ImGuiPopupData& popup = g.OpenPopupStack[popup_count_to_keep];
+            if (!popup.Window)
+                continue;
+            IM_ASSERT((popup.Window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) != 0);
+            if (popup.Window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)
+                continue;
+
+            // Trim the stack unless the popup is a direct parent of the reference window (the reference window is often the NavWindow)
+            // - With this stack of window, clicking/focusing Popup1 will close Popup2 and Popup3:
+            //     Window -> Popup1 -> Popup2 -> Popup3
+            // - Each popups may contain child windows, which is why we compare ->RootWindowDockTree!
+            //     Window -> Popup1 -> Popup1_Child -> Popup2 -> Popup2_Child
+            bool ref_window_is_descendent_of_popup = false;
+            for (int n = popup_count_to_keep; n < g.OpenPopupStack.Size; n++)
+                if (ImGuiWindow* popup_window = g.OpenPopupStack[n].Window)
+                    //if (popup_window->RootWindowDockTree == ref_window->RootWindowDockTree) // FIXME-MERGE
+                    if (IsWindowWithinBeginStackOf(ref_window, popup_window))
+                    {
+                        ref_window_is_descendent_of_popup = true;
+                        break;
+                    }
+            if (!ref_window_is_descendent_of_popup)
+                break;
+        }
+    }
+    if (popup_count_to_keep < g.OpenPopupStack.Size) // This test is not required but it allows to set a convenient breakpoint on the statement below
+    {
+        IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_POPUP("[popup] ClosePopupsOverWindow(\"%s\")\n", ref_window ? ref_window->Name : "<NULL>");
+        ClosePopupToLevel(popup_count_to_keep, restore_focus_to_window_under_popup);
+    }
+}
+
+void ImGui::ClosePopupsExceptModals()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    int popup_count_to_keep;
+    for (popup_count_to_keep = g.OpenPopupStack.Size; popup_count_to_keep > 0; popup_count_to_keep--)
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* window = g.OpenPopupStack[popup_count_to_keep - 1].Window;
+        if (!window || window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)
+            break;
+    }
+    if (popup_count_to_keep < g.OpenPopupStack.Size) // This test is not required but it allows to set a convenient breakpoint on the statement below
+        ClosePopupToLevel(popup_count_to_keep, true);
+}
+
+void ImGui::ClosePopupToLevel(int remaining, bool restore_focus_to_window_under_popup)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_POPUP("[popup] ClosePopupToLevel(%d), restore_focus_to_window_under_popup=%d\n", remaining, restore_focus_to_window_under_popup);
+    IM_ASSERT(remaining >= 0 && remaining < g.OpenPopupStack.Size);
+
+    // Trim open popup stack
+    ImGuiWindow* focus_window = g.OpenPopupStack[remaining].SourceWindow;
+    ImGuiWindow* popup_window = g.OpenPopupStack[remaining].Window;
+    g.OpenPopupStack.resize(remaining);
+
+    if (restore_focus_to_window_under_popup)
+    {
+        if (focus_window && !focus_window->WasActive && popup_window)
+        {
+            // Fallback
+            FocusTopMostWindowUnderOne(popup_window, NULL);
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            if (g.NavLayer == ImGuiNavLayer_Main && focus_window)
+                focus_window = NavRestoreLastChildNavWindow(focus_window);
+            FocusWindow(focus_window);
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+// Close the popup we have begin-ed into.
+void ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    int popup_idx = g.BeginPopupStack.Size - 1;
+    if (popup_idx < 0 || popup_idx >= g.OpenPopupStack.Size || g.BeginPopupStack[popup_idx].PopupId != g.OpenPopupStack[popup_idx].PopupId)
+        return;
+
+    // Closing a menu closes its top-most parent popup (unless a modal)
+    while (popup_idx > 0)
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* popup_window = g.OpenPopupStack[popup_idx].Window;
+        ImGuiWindow* parent_popup_window = g.OpenPopupStack[popup_idx - 1].Window;
+        bool close_parent = false;
+        if (popup_window && (popup_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
+            if (parent_popup_window && !(parent_popup_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar))
+                close_parent = true;
+        if (!close_parent)
+            break;
+        popup_idx--;
+    }
+    IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_POPUP("[popup] CloseCurrentPopup %d -> %d\n", g.BeginPopupStack.Size - 1, popup_idx);
+    ClosePopupToLevel(popup_idx, true);
+
+    // A common pattern is to close a popup when selecting a menu item/selectable that will open another window.
+    // To improve this usage pattern, we avoid nav highlight for a single frame in the parent window.
+    // Similarly, we could avoid mouse hover highlight in this window but it is less visually problematic.
+    if (ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow)
+        window->DC.NavHideHighlightOneFrame = true;
+}
+
+// Attention! BeginPopup() adds default flags which BeginPopupEx()!
+bool ImGui::BeginPopupEx(ImGuiID id, ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (!IsPopupOpen(id, ImGuiPopupFlags_None))
+    {
+        g.NextWindowData.ClearFlags(); // We behave like Begin() and need to consume those values
+        return false;
+    }
+
+    char name[20];
+    if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)
+        ImFormatString(name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(name), "##Menu_%02d", g.BeginMenuCount); // Recycle windows based on depth
+    else
+        ImFormatString(name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(name), "##Popup_%08x", id); // Not recycling, so we can close/open during the same frame
+
+    flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDocking;
+    bool is_open = Begin(name, NULL, flags);
+    if (!is_open) // NB: Begin can return false when the popup is completely clipped (e.g. zero size display)
+        EndPopup();
+
+    return is_open;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::BeginPopup(const char* str_id, ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.OpenPopupStack.Size <= g.BeginPopupStack.Size) // Early out for performance
+    {
+        g.NextWindowData.ClearFlags(); // We behave like Begin() and need to consume those values
+        return false;
+    }
+    flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings;
+    ImGuiID id = g.CurrentWindow->GetID(str_id);
+    return BeginPopupEx(id, flags);
+}
+
+// If 'p_open' is specified for a modal popup window, the popup will have a regular close button which will close the popup.
+// Note that popup visibility status is owned by Dear ImGui (and manipulated with e.g. OpenPopup) so the actual value of *p_open is meaningless here.
+bool ImGui::BeginPopupModal(const char* name, bool* p_open, ImGuiWindowFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(name);
+    if (!IsPopupOpen(id, ImGuiPopupFlags_None))
+    {
+        g.NextWindowData.ClearFlags(); // We behave like Begin() and need to consume those values
+        return false;
+    }
+
+    // Center modal windows by default for increased visibility
+    // (this won't really last as settings will kick in, and is mostly for backward compatibility. user may do the same themselves)
+    // FIXME: Should test for (PosCond & window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags) with the upcoming window.
+    if ((g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasPos) == 0)
+    {
+        const ImGuiViewport* viewport = window->WasActive ? window->Viewport : GetMainViewport(); // FIXME-VIEWPORT: What may be our reference viewport?
+        SetNextWindowPos(viewport->GetCenter(), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f));
+    }
+
+    flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDocking;
+    const bool is_open = Begin(name, p_open, flags);
+    if (!is_open || (p_open && !*p_open)) // NB: is_open can be 'false' when the popup is completely clipped (e.g. zero size display)
+    {
+        EndPopup();
+        if (is_open)
+            ClosePopupToLevel(g.BeginPopupStack.Size, true);
+        return false;
+    }
+    return is_open;
+}
+
+void ImGui::EndPopup()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    IM_ASSERT(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup);  // Mismatched BeginPopup()/EndPopup() calls
+    IM_ASSERT(g.BeginPopupStack.Size > 0);
+
+    // Make all menus and popups wrap around for now, may need to expose that policy (e.g. focus scope could include wrap/loop policy flags used by new move requests)
+    if (g.NavWindow == window)
+        NavMoveRequestTryWrapping(window, ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopY);
+
+    // Child-popups don't need to be laid out
+    IM_ASSERT(g.WithinEndChild == false);
+    if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)
+        g.WithinEndChild = true;
+    End();
+    g.WithinEndChild = false;
+}
+
+// Helper to open a popup if mouse button is released over the item
+// - This is essentially the same as BeginPopupContextItem() but without the trailing BeginPopup()
+void ImGui::OpenPopupOnItemClick(const char* str_id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    int mouse_button = (popup_flags & ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonMask_);
+    if (IsMouseReleased(mouse_button) && IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup))
+    {
+        ImGuiID id = str_id ? window->GetID(str_id) : g.LastItemData.ID;    // If user hasn't passed an ID, we can use the LastItemID. Using LastItemID as a Popup ID won't conflict!
+        IM_ASSERT(id != 0);                                             // You cannot pass a NULL str_id if the last item has no identifier (e.g. a Text() item)
+        OpenPopupEx(id, popup_flags);
+    }
+}
+
+// This is a helper to handle the simplest case of associating one named popup to one given widget.
+// - To create a popup associated to the last item, you generally want to pass a NULL value to str_id.
+// - To create a popup with a specific identifier, pass it in str_id.
+//    - This is useful when using using BeginPopupContextItem() on an item which doesn't have an identifier, e.g. a Text() call.
+//    - This is useful when multiple code locations may want to manipulate/open the same popup, given an explicit id.
+// - You may want to handle the whole on user side if you have specific needs (e.g. tweaking IsItemHovered() parameters).
+//   This is essentially the same as:
+//       id = str_id ? GetID(str_id) : GetItemID();
+//       OpenPopupOnItemClick(str_id, ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight);
+//       return BeginPopup(id);
+//   Which is essentially the same as:
+//       id = str_id ? GetID(str_id) : GetItemID();
+//       if (IsItemHovered() && IsMouseReleased(ImGuiMouseButton_Right))
+//           OpenPopup(id);
+//       return BeginPopup(id);
+//   The main difference being that this is tweaked to avoid computing the ID twice.
+bool ImGui::BeginPopupContextItem(const char* str_id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+    ImGuiID id = str_id ? window->GetID(str_id) : g.LastItemData.ID;    // If user hasn't passed an ID, we can use the LastItemID. Using LastItemID as a Popup ID won't conflict!
+    IM_ASSERT(id != 0);                                             // You cannot pass a NULL str_id if the last item has no identifier (e.g. a Text() item)
+    int mouse_button = (popup_flags & ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonMask_);
+    if (IsMouseReleased(mouse_button) && IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup))
+        OpenPopupEx(id, popup_flags);
+    return BeginPopupEx(id, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::BeginPopupContextWindow(const char* str_id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (!str_id)
+        str_id = "window_context";
+    ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id);
+    int mouse_button = (popup_flags & ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonMask_);
+    if (IsMouseReleased(mouse_button) && IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup))
+        if (!(popup_flags & ImGuiPopupFlags_NoOpenOverItems) || !IsAnyItemHovered())
+            OpenPopupEx(id, popup_flags);
+    return BeginPopupEx(id, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::BeginPopupContextVoid(const char* str_id, ImGuiPopupFlags popup_flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (!str_id)
+        str_id = "void_context";
+    ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id);
+    int mouse_button = (popup_flags & ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonMask_);
+    if (IsMouseReleased(mouse_button) && !IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow))
+        if (GetTopMostPopupModal() == NULL)
+            OpenPopupEx(id, popup_flags);
+    return BeginPopupEx(id, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings);
+}
+
+// r_avoid = the rectangle to avoid (e.g. for tooltip it is a rectangle around the mouse cursor which we want to avoid. for popups it's a small point around the cursor.)
+// r_outer = the visible area rectangle, minus safe area padding. If our popup size won't fit because of safe area padding we ignore it.
+// (r_outer is usually equivalent to the viewport rectangle minus padding, but when multi-viewports are enabled and monitor
+//  information are available, it may represent the entire platform monitor from the frame of reference of the current viewport.
+//  this allows us to have tooltips/popups displayed out of the parent viewport.)
+ImVec2 ImGui::FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(const ImVec2& ref_pos, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiDir* last_dir, const ImRect& r_outer, const ImRect& r_avoid, ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy policy)
+{
+    ImVec2 base_pos_clamped = ImClamp(ref_pos, r_outer.Min, r_outer.Max - size);
+    //GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(r_avoid.Min, r_avoid.Max, IM_COL32(255,0,0,255));
+    //GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(r_outer.Min, r_outer.Max, IM_COL32(0,255,0,255));
+
+    // Combo Box policy (we want a connecting edge)
+    if (policy == ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_ComboBox)
+    {
+        const ImGuiDir dir_prefered_order[ImGuiDir_COUNT] = { ImGuiDir_Down, ImGuiDir_Right, ImGuiDir_Left, ImGuiDir_Up };
+        for (int n = (*last_dir != ImGuiDir_None) ? -1 : 0; n < ImGuiDir_COUNT; n++)
+        {
+            const ImGuiDir dir = (n == -1) ? *last_dir : dir_prefered_order[n];
+            if (n != -1 && dir == *last_dir) // Already tried this direction?
+                continue;
+            ImVec2 pos;
+            if (dir == ImGuiDir_Down)  pos = ImVec2(r_avoid.Min.x, r_avoid.Max.y);          // Below, Toward Right (default)
+            if (dir == ImGuiDir_Right) pos = ImVec2(r_avoid.Min.x, r_avoid.Min.y - size.y); // Above, Toward Right
+            if (dir == ImGuiDir_Left)  pos = ImVec2(r_avoid.Max.x - size.x, r_avoid.Max.y); // Below, Toward Left
+            if (dir == ImGuiDir_Up)    pos = ImVec2(r_avoid.Max.x - size.x, r_avoid.Min.y - size.y); // Above, Toward Left
+            if (!r_outer.Contains(ImRect(pos, pos + size)))
+                continue;
+            *last_dir = dir;
+            return pos;
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Tooltip and Default popup policy
+    // (Always first try the direction we used on the last frame, if any)
+    if (policy == ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_Tooltip || policy == ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_Default)
+    {
+        const ImGuiDir dir_prefered_order[ImGuiDir_COUNT] = { ImGuiDir_Right, ImGuiDir_Down, ImGuiDir_Up, ImGuiDir_Left };
+        for (int n = (*last_dir != ImGuiDir_None) ? -1 : 0; n < ImGuiDir_COUNT; n++)
+        {
+            const ImGuiDir dir = (n == -1) ? *last_dir : dir_prefered_order[n];
+            if (n != -1 && dir == *last_dir) // Already tried this direction?
+                continue;
+
+            const float avail_w = (dir == ImGuiDir_Left ? r_avoid.Min.x : r_outer.Max.x) - (dir == ImGuiDir_Right ? r_avoid.Max.x : r_outer.Min.x);
+            const float avail_h = (dir == ImGuiDir_Up ? r_avoid.Min.y : r_outer.Max.y) - (dir == ImGuiDir_Down ? r_avoid.Max.y : r_outer.Min.y);
+
+            // If there not enough room on one axis, there's no point in positioning on a side on this axis (e.g. when not enough width, use a top/bottom position to maximize available width)
+            if (avail_w < size.x && (dir == ImGuiDir_Left || dir == ImGuiDir_Right))
+                continue;
+            if (avail_h < size.y && (dir == ImGuiDir_Up || dir == ImGuiDir_Down))
+                continue;
+
+            ImVec2 pos;
+            pos.x = (dir == ImGuiDir_Left) ? r_avoid.Min.x - size.x : (dir == ImGuiDir_Right) ? r_avoid.Max.x : base_pos_clamped.x;
+            pos.y = (dir == ImGuiDir_Up) ? r_avoid.Min.y - size.y : (dir == ImGuiDir_Down) ? r_avoid.Max.y : base_pos_clamped.y;
+
+            // Clamp top-left corner of popup
+            pos.x = ImMax(pos.x, r_outer.Min.x);
+            pos.y = ImMax(pos.y, r_outer.Min.y);
+
+            *last_dir = dir;
+            return pos;
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Fallback when not enough room:
+    *last_dir = ImGuiDir_None;
+
+    // For tooltip we prefer avoiding the cursor at all cost even if it means that part of the tooltip won't be visible.
+    if (policy == ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_Tooltip)
+        return ref_pos + ImVec2(2, 2);
+
+    // Otherwise try to keep within display
+    ImVec2 pos = ref_pos;
+    pos.x = ImMax(ImMin(pos.x + size.x, r_outer.Max.x) - size.x, r_outer.Min.x);
+    pos.y = ImMax(ImMin(pos.y + size.y, r_outer.Max.y) - size.y, r_outer.Min.y);
+    return pos;
+}
+
+// Note that this is used for popups, which can overlap the non work-area of individual viewports.
+ImRect ImGui::GetPopupAllowedExtentRect(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImRect r_screen;
+    if (window->ViewportAllowPlatformMonitorExtend >= 0)
+    {
+        // Extent with be in the frame of reference of the given viewport (so Min is likely to be negative here)
+        const ImGuiPlatformMonitor& monitor = g.PlatformIO.Monitors[window->ViewportAllowPlatformMonitorExtend];
+        r_screen.Min = monitor.WorkPos;
+        r_screen.Max = monitor.WorkPos + monitor.WorkSize;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Use the full viewport area (not work area) for popups
+        r_screen = window->Viewport->GetMainRect();
+    }
+    ImVec2 padding = g.Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding;
+    r_screen.Expand(ImVec2((r_screen.GetWidth() > padding.x * 2) ? -padding.x : 0.0f, (r_screen.GetHeight() > padding.y * 2) ? -padding.y : 0.0f));
+    return r_screen;
+}
+
+ImVec2 ImGui::FindBestWindowPosForPopup(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    ImRect r_outer = GetPopupAllowedExtentRect(window);
+    if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)
+    {
+        // Child menus typically request _any_ position within the parent menu item, and then we move the new menu outside the parent bounds.
+        // This is how we end up with child menus appearing (most-commonly) on the right of the parent menu.
+        ImGuiWindow* parent_window = window->ParentWindow;
+        float horizontal_overlap = g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x; // We want some overlap to convey the relative depth of each menu (currently the amount of overlap is hard-coded to style.ItemSpacing.x).
+        ImRect r_avoid;
+        if (parent_window->DC.MenuBarAppending)
+            r_avoid = ImRect(-FLT_MAX, parent_window->ClipRect.Min.y, FLT_MAX, parent_window->ClipRect.Max.y); // Avoid parent menu-bar. If we wanted multi-line menu-bar, we may instead want to have the calling window setup e.g. a NextWindowData.PosConstraintAvoidRect field
+        else
+            r_avoid = ImRect(parent_window->Pos.x + horizontal_overlap, -FLT_MAX, parent_window->Pos.x + parent_window->Size.x - horizontal_overlap - parent_window->ScrollbarSizes.x, FLT_MAX);
+        return FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(window->Pos, window->Size, &window->AutoPosLastDirection, r_outer, r_avoid, ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_Default);
+    }
+    if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)
+    {
+        return FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(window->Pos, window->Size, &window->AutoPosLastDirection, r_outer, ImRect(window->Pos, window->Pos), ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_Default); // Ideally we'd disable r_avoid here
+    }
+    if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)
+    {
+        // Position tooltip (always follows mouse)
+        float sc = g.Style.MouseCursorScale;
+        ImVec2 ref_pos = NavCalcPreferredRefPos();
+        ImRect r_avoid;
+        if (!g.NavDisableHighlight && g.NavDisableMouseHover && !(g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos))
+            r_avoid = ImRect(ref_pos.x - 16, ref_pos.y - 8, ref_pos.x + 16, ref_pos.y + 8);
+        else
+            r_avoid = ImRect(ref_pos.x - 16, ref_pos.y - 8, ref_pos.x + 24 * sc, ref_pos.y + 24 * sc); // FIXME: Hard-coded based on mouse cursor shape expectation. Exact dimension not very important.
+        return FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(ref_pos, window->Size, &window->AutoPosLastDirection, r_outer, r_avoid, ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_Tooltip);
+    }
+    IM_ASSERT(0);
+    return window->Pos;
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] KEYBOARD/GAMEPAD NAVIGATION
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// FIXME-NAV: The existence of SetNavID vs SetFocusID vs FocusWindow() needs to be clarified/reworked.
+// In our terminology those should be interchangeable, yet right now this is super confusing.
+// Those two functions are merely a legacy artifact, so at minimum naming should be clarified.
+
+void ImGui::SetNavWindow(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.NavWindow != window)
+    {
+        IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_FOCUS("[focus] SetNavWindow(\"%s\")\n", window ? window->Name : "<NULL>");
+        g.NavWindow = window;
+    }
+    g.NavInitRequest = g.NavMoveSubmitted = g.NavMoveScoringItems = false;
+    NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag();
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetNavID(ImGuiID id, ImGuiNavLayer nav_layer, ImGuiID focus_scope_id, const ImRect& rect_rel)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindow != NULL);
+    IM_ASSERT(nav_layer == ImGuiNavLayer_Main || nav_layer == ImGuiNavLayer_Menu);
+    g.NavId = id;
+    g.NavLayer = nav_layer;
+    g.NavFocusScopeId = focus_scope_id;
+    g.NavWindow->NavLastIds[nav_layer] = id;
+    g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[nav_layer] = rect_rel;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetFocusID(ImGuiID id, ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(id != 0);
+
+    if (g.NavWindow != window)
+       SetNavWindow(window);
+
+    // Assume that SetFocusID() is called in the context where its window->DC.NavLayerCurrent and window->DC.NavFocusScopeIdCurrent are valid.
+    // Note that window may be != g.CurrentWindow (e.g. SetFocusID call in InputTextEx for multi-line text)
+    const ImGuiNavLayer nav_layer = window->DC.NavLayerCurrent;
+    g.NavId = id;
+    g.NavLayer = nav_layer;
+    g.NavFocusScopeId = window->DC.NavFocusScopeIdCurrent;
+    window->NavLastIds[nav_layer] = id;
+    if (g.LastItemData.ID == id)
+        window->NavRectRel[nav_layer] = WindowRectAbsToRel(window, g.LastItemData.NavRect);
+
+    if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Nav)
+        g.NavDisableMouseHover = true;
+    else
+        g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
+}
+
+ImGuiDir ImGetDirQuadrantFromDelta(float dx, float dy)
+{
+    if (ImFabs(dx) > ImFabs(dy))
+        return (dx > 0.0f) ? ImGuiDir_Right : ImGuiDir_Left;
+    return (dy > 0.0f) ? ImGuiDir_Down : ImGuiDir_Up;
+}
+
+static float inline NavScoreItemDistInterval(float a0, float a1, float b0, float b1)
+{
+    if (a1 < b0)
+        return a1 - b0;
+    if (b1 < a0)
+        return a0 - b1;
+    return 0.0f;
+}
+
+static void inline NavClampRectToVisibleAreaForMoveDir(ImGuiDir move_dir, ImRect& r, const ImRect& clip_rect)
+{
+    if (move_dir == ImGuiDir_Left || move_dir == ImGuiDir_Right)
+    {
+        r.Min.y = ImClamp(r.Min.y, clip_rect.Min.y, clip_rect.Max.y);
+        r.Max.y = ImClamp(r.Max.y, clip_rect.Min.y, clip_rect.Max.y);
+    }
+    else // FIXME: PageUp/PageDown are leaving move_dir == None
+    {
+        r.Min.x = ImClamp(r.Min.x, clip_rect.Min.x, clip_rect.Max.x);
+        r.Max.x = ImClamp(r.Max.x, clip_rect.Min.x, clip_rect.Max.x);
+    }
+}
+
+// Scoring function for gamepad/keyboard directional navigation. Based on https://gist.github.com/rygorous/6981057
+static bool ImGui::NavScoreItem(ImGuiNavItemData* result)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (g.NavLayer != window->DC.NavLayerCurrent)
+        return false;
+
+    // FIXME: Those are not good variables names
+    ImRect cand = g.LastItemData.NavRect;   // Current item nav rectangle
+    const ImRect curr = g.NavScoringRect;   // Current modified source rect (NB: we've applied Max.x = Min.x in NavUpdate() to inhibit the effect of having varied item width)
+    g.NavScoringDebugCount++;
+
+    // When entering through a NavFlattened border, we consider child window items as fully clipped for scoring
+    if (window->ParentWindow == g.NavWindow)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT((window->Flags | g.NavWindow->Flags) & ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened);
+        if (!window->ClipRect.Overlaps(cand))
+            return false;
+        cand.ClipWithFull(window->ClipRect); // This allows the scored item to not overlap other candidates in the parent window
+    }
+
+    // We perform scoring on items bounding box clipped by the current clipping rectangle on the other axis (clipping on our movement axis would give us equal scores for all clipped items)
+    // For example, this ensure that items in one column are not reached when moving vertically from items in another column.
+    NavClampRectToVisibleAreaForMoveDir(g.NavMoveClipDir, cand, window->ClipRect);
+
+    // Compute distance between boxes
+    // FIXME-NAV: Introducing biases for vertical navigation, needs to be removed.
+    float dbx = NavScoreItemDistInterval(cand.Min.x, cand.Max.x, curr.Min.x, curr.Max.x);
+    float dby = NavScoreItemDistInterval(ImLerp(cand.Min.y, cand.Max.y, 0.2f), ImLerp(cand.Min.y, cand.Max.y, 0.8f), ImLerp(curr.Min.y, curr.Max.y, 0.2f), ImLerp(curr.Min.y, curr.Max.y, 0.8f)); // Scale down on Y to keep using box-distance for vertically touching items
+    if (dby != 0.0f && dbx != 0.0f)
+        dbx = (dbx / 1000.0f) + ((dbx > 0.0f) ? +1.0f : -1.0f);
+    float dist_box = ImFabs(dbx) + ImFabs(dby);
+
+    // Compute distance between centers (this is off by a factor of 2, but we only compare center distances with each other so it doesn't matter)
+    float dcx = (cand.Min.x + cand.Max.x) - (curr.Min.x + curr.Max.x);
+    float dcy = (cand.Min.y + cand.Max.y) - (curr.Min.y + curr.Max.y);
+    float dist_center = ImFabs(dcx) + ImFabs(dcy); // L1 metric (need this for our connectedness guarantee)
+
+    // Determine which quadrant of 'curr' our candidate item 'cand' lies in based on distance
+    ImGuiDir quadrant;
+    float dax = 0.0f, day = 0.0f, dist_axial = 0.0f;
+    if (dbx != 0.0f || dby != 0.0f)
+    {
+        // For non-overlapping boxes, use distance between boxes
+        dax = dbx;
+        day = dby;
+        dist_axial = dist_box;
+        quadrant = ImGetDirQuadrantFromDelta(dbx, dby);
+    }
+    else if (dcx != 0.0f || dcy != 0.0f)
+    {
+        // For overlapping boxes with different centers, use distance between centers
+        dax = dcx;
+        day = dcy;
+        dist_axial = dist_center;
+        quadrant = ImGetDirQuadrantFromDelta(dcx, dcy);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Degenerate case: two overlapping buttons with same center, break ties arbitrarily (note that LastItemId here is really the _previous_ item order, but it doesn't matter)
+        quadrant = (g.LastItemData.ID < g.NavId) ? ImGuiDir_Left : ImGuiDir_Right;
+    }
+
+#if IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_SCORING
+    char buf[128];
+    if (IsMouseHoveringRect(cand.Min, cand.Max))
+    {
+        ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "dbox (%.2f,%.2f->%.4f)\ndcen (%.2f,%.2f->%.4f)\nd (%.2f,%.2f->%.4f)\nnav %c, quadrant %c", dbx, dby, dist_box, dcx, dcy, dist_center, dax, day, dist_axial, "WENS"[g.NavMoveDir], "WENS"[quadrant]);
+        ImDrawList* draw_list = GetForegroundDrawList(window);
+        draw_list->AddRect(curr.Min, curr.Max, IM_COL32(255,200,0,100));
+        draw_list->AddRect(cand.Min, cand.Max, IM_COL32(255,255,0,200));
+        draw_list->AddRectFilled(cand.Max - ImVec2(4, 4), cand.Max + CalcTextSize(buf) + ImVec2(4, 4), IM_COL32(40,0,0,150));
+        draw_list->AddText(cand.Max, ~0U, buf);
+    }
+    else if (g.IO.KeyCtrl) // Hold to preview score in matching quadrant. Press C to rotate.
+    {
+        if (quadrant == g.NavMoveDir)
+        {
+            ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "%.0f/%.0f", dist_box, dist_center);
+            ImDrawList* draw_list = GetForegroundDrawList(window);
+            draw_list->AddRectFilled(cand.Min, cand.Max, IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 200));
+            draw_list->AddText(cand.Min, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 255), buf);
+        }
+    }
+#endif
+
+    // Is it in the quadrant we're interesting in moving to?
+    bool new_best = false;
+    const ImGuiDir move_dir = g.NavMoveDir;
+    if (quadrant == move_dir)
+    {
+        // Does it beat the current best candidate?
+        if (dist_box < result->DistBox)
+        {
+            result->DistBox = dist_box;
+            result->DistCenter = dist_center;
+            return true;
+        }
+        if (dist_box == result->DistBox)
+        {
+            // Try using distance between center points to break ties
+            if (dist_center < result->DistCenter)
+            {
+                result->DistCenter = dist_center;
+                new_best = true;
+            }
+            else if (dist_center == result->DistCenter)
+            {
+                // Still tied! we need to be extra-careful to make sure everything gets linked properly. We consistently break ties by symbolically moving "later" items
+                // (with higher index) to the right/downwards by an infinitesimal amount since we the current "best" button already (so it must have a lower index),
+                // this is fairly easy. This rule ensures that all buttons with dx==dy==0 will end up being linked in order of appearance along the x axis.
+                if (((move_dir == ImGuiDir_Up || move_dir == ImGuiDir_Down) ? dby : dbx) < 0.0f) // moving bj to the right/down decreases distance
+                    new_best = true;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Axial check: if 'curr' has no link at all in some direction and 'cand' lies roughly in that direction, add a tentative link. This will only be kept if no "real" matches
+    // are found, so it only augments the graph produced by the above method using extra links. (important, since it doesn't guarantee strong connectedness)
+    // This is just to avoid buttons having no links in a particular direction when there's a suitable neighbor. you get good graphs without this too.
+    // 2017/09/29: FIXME: This now currently only enabled inside menu bars, ideally we'd disable it everywhere. Menus in particular need to catch failure. For general navigation it feels awkward.
+    // Disabling it may lead to disconnected graphs when nodes are very spaced out on different axis. Perhaps consider offering this as an option?
+    if (result->DistBox == FLT_MAX && dist_axial < result->DistAxial)  // Check axial match
+        if (g.NavLayer == ImGuiNavLayer_Menu && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
+            if ((move_dir == ImGuiDir_Left && dax < 0.0f) || (move_dir == ImGuiDir_Right && dax > 0.0f) || (move_dir == ImGuiDir_Up && day < 0.0f) || (move_dir == ImGuiDir_Down && day > 0.0f))
+            {
+                result->DistAxial = dist_axial;
+                new_best = true;
+            }
+
+    return new_best;
+}
+
+static void ImGui::NavApplyItemToResult(ImGuiNavItemData* result)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    result->Window = window;
+    result->ID = g.LastItemData.ID;
+    result->FocusScopeId = window->DC.NavFocusScopeIdCurrent;
+    result->InFlags = g.LastItemData.InFlags;
+    result->RectRel = WindowRectAbsToRel(window, g.LastItemData.NavRect);
+}
+
+// We get there when either NavId == id, or when g.NavAnyRequest is set (which is updated by NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag above)
+// This is called after LastItemData is set.
+static void ImGui::NavProcessItem()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    const ImGuiID id = g.LastItemData.ID;
+    const ImRect nav_bb = g.LastItemData.NavRect;
+    const ImGuiItemFlags item_flags = g.LastItemData.InFlags;
+
+    // Process Init Request
+    if (g.NavInitRequest && g.NavLayer == window->DC.NavLayerCurrent && (item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled) == 0)
+    {
+        // Even if 'ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus' is on (typically collapse/close button) we record the first ResultId so they can be used as a fallback
+        const bool candidate_for_nav_default_focus = (item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus) == 0;
+        if (candidate_for_nav_default_focus || g.NavInitResultId == 0)
+        {
+            g.NavInitResultId = id;
+            g.NavInitResultRectRel = WindowRectAbsToRel(window, nav_bb);
+        }
+        if (candidate_for_nav_default_focus)
+        {
+            g.NavInitRequest = false; // Found a match, clear request
+            NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag();
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Process Move Request (scoring for navigation)
+    // FIXME-NAV: Consider policy for double scoring (scoring from NavScoringRect + scoring from a rect wrapped according to current wrapping policy)
+    if (g.NavMoveScoringItems)
+    {
+        const bool is_tab_stop = (item_flags & ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable) && (item_flags & (ImGuiItemFlags_NoTabStop | ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled)) == 0;
+        const bool is_tabbing = (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Tabbing) != 0;
+        if (is_tabbing)
+        {
+            if (is_tab_stop || (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_FocusApi))
+                NavProcessItemForTabbingRequest(id);
+        }
+        else if ((g.NavId != id || (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AllowCurrentNavId)) && !(item_flags & (ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled | ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav)))
+        {
+            ImGuiNavItemData* result = (window == g.NavWindow) ? &g.NavMoveResultLocal : &g.NavMoveResultOther;
+            if (!is_tabbing)
+            {
+                if (NavScoreItem(result))
+                    NavApplyItemToResult(result);
+
+                // Features like PageUp/PageDown need to maintain a separate score for the visible set of items.
+                const float VISIBLE_RATIO = 0.70f;
+                if ((g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AlsoScoreVisibleSet) && window->ClipRect.Overlaps(nav_bb))
+                    if (ImClamp(nav_bb.Max.y, window->ClipRect.Min.y, window->ClipRect.Max.y) - ImClamp(nav_bb.Min.y, window->ClipRect.Min.y, window->ClipRect.Max.y) >= (nav_bb.Max.y - nav_bb.Min.y) * VISIBLE_RATIO)
+                        if (NavScoreItem(&g.NavMoveResultLocalVisible))
+                            NavApplyItemToResult(&g.NavMoveResultLocalVisible);
+            }
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Update window-relative bounding box of navigated item
+    if (g.NavId == id)
+    {
+        if (g.NavWindow != window)
+            SetNavWindow(window); // Always refresh g.NavWindow, because some operations such as FocusItem() may not have a window.
+        g.NavLayer = window->DC.NavLayerCurrent;
+        g.NavFocusScopeId = window->DC.NavFocusScopeIdCurrent;
+        g.NavIdIsAlive = true;
+        window->NavRectRel[window->DC.NavLayerCurrent] = WindowRectAbsToRel(window, nav_bb);    // Store item bounding box (relative to window position)
+    }
+}
+
+// Handle "scoring" of an item for a tabbing/focusing request initiated by NavUpdateCreateTabbingRequest().
+// Note that SetKeyboardFocusHere() API calls are considered tabbing requests!
+// - Case 1: no nav/active id:    set result to first eligible item, stop storing.
+// - Case 2: tab forward:         on ref id set counter, on counter elapse store result
+// - Case 3: tab forward wrap:    set result to first eligible item (preemptively), on ref id set counter, on next frame if counter hasn't elapsed store result. // FIXME-TABBING: Could be done as a next-frame forwarded request
+// - Case 4: tab backward:        store all results, on ref id pick prev, stop storing
+// - Case 5: tab backward wrap:   store all results, on ref id if no result keep storing until last // FIXME-TABBING: Could be done as next-frame forwarded requested
+void ImGui::NavProcessItemForTabbingRequest(ImGuiID id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    // Always store in NavMoveResultLocal (unlike directional request which uses NavMoveResultOther on sibling/flattened windows)
+    ImGuiNavItemData* result = &g.NavMoveResultLocal;
+    if (g.NavTabbingDir == +1)
+    {
+        // Tab Forward or SetKeyboardFocusHere() with >= 0
+        if (g.NavTabbingResultFirst.ID == 0)
+            NavApplyItemToResult(&g.NavTabbingResultFirst);
+        if (--g.NavTabbingCounter == 0)
+            NavMoveRequestResolveWithLastItem(result);
+        else if (g.NavId == id)
+            g.NavTabbingCounter = 1;
+    }
+    else if (g.NavTabbingDir == -1)
+    {
+        // Tab Backward
+        if (g.NavId == id)
+        {
+            if (result->ID)
+            {
+                g.NavMoveScoringItems = false;
+                NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag();
+            }
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            NavApplyItemToResult(result);
+        }
+    }
+    else if (g.NavTabbingDir == 0)
+    {
+        // Tab Init
+        if (g.NavTabbingResultFirst.ID == 0)
+            NavMoveRequestResolveWithLastItem(&g.NavTabbingResultFirst);
+    }
+}
+
+bool ImGui::NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.NavMoveScoringItems && g.NavMoveResultLocal.ID == 0 && g.NavMoveResultOther.ID == 0;
+}
+
+// FIXME: ScoringRect is not set
+void ImGui::NavMoveRequestSubmit(ImGuiDir move_dir, ImGuiDir clip_dir, ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags, ImGuiScrollFlags scroll_flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindow != NULL);
+
+    if (move_flags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Tabbing)
+        move_flags |= ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AllowCurrentNavId;
+
+    g.NavMoveSubmitted = g.NavMoveScoringItems = true;
+    g.NavMoveDir = move_dir;
+    g.NavMoveDirForDebug = move_dir;
+    g.NavMoveClipDir = clip_dir;
+    g.NavMoveFlags = move_flags;
+    g.NavMoveScrollFlags = scroll_flags;
+    g.NavMoveForwardToNextFrame = false;
+    g.NavMoveKeyMods = g.IO.KeyMods;
+    g.NavMoveResultLocal.Clear();
+    g.NavMoveResultLocalVisible.Clear();
+    g.NavMoveResultOther.Clear();
+    g.NavTabbingCounter = 0;
+    g.NavTabbingResultFirst.Clear();
+    NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag();
+}
+
+void ImGui::NavMoveRequestResolveWithLastItem(ImGuiNavItemData* result)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.NavMoveScoringItems = false; // Ensure request doesn't need more processing
+    NavApplyItemToResult(result);
+    NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag();
+}
+
+void ImGui::NavMoveRequestCancel()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.NavMoveSubmitted = g.NavMoveScoringItems = false;
+    NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag();
+}
+
+// Forward will reuse the move request again on the next frame (generally with modifications done to it)
+void ImGui::NavMoveRequestForward(ImGuiDir move_dir, ImGuiDir clip_dir, ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags, ImGuiScrollFlags scroll_flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.NavMoveForwardToNextFrame == false);
+    NavMoveRequestCancel();
+    g.NavMoveForwardToNextFrame = true;
+    g.NavMoveDir = move_dir;
+    g.NavMoveClipDir = clip_dir;
+    g.NavMoveFlags = move_flags | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Forwarded;
+    g.NavMoveScrollFlags = scroll_flags;
+}
+
+// Navigation wrap-around logic is delayed to the end of the frame because this operation is only valid after entire
+// popup is assembled and in case of appended popups it is not clear which EndPopup() call is final.
+void ImGui::NavMoveRequestTryWrapping(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiNavMoveFlags wrap_flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(wrap_flags != 0); // Call with _WrapX, _WrapY, _LoopX, _LoopY
+    // In theory we should test for NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet() but there's no point doing it, NavEndFrame() will do the same test
+    if (g.NavWindow == window && g.NavMoveScoringItems && g.NavLayer == ImGuiNavLayer_Main)
+        g.NavMoveFlags |= wrap_flags;
+}
+
+// FIXME: This could be replaced by updating a frame number in each window when (window == NavWindow) and (NavLayer == 0).
+// This way we could find the last focused window among our children. It would be much less confusing this way?
+static void ImGui::NavSaveLastChildNavWindowIntoParent(ImGuiWindow* nav_window)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* parent = nav_window;
+    while (parent && parent->RootWindow != parent && (parent->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)) == 0)
+        parent = parent->ParentWindow;
+    if (parent && parent != nav_window)
+        parent->NavLastChildNavWindow = nav_window;
+}
+
+// Restore the last focused child.
+// Call when we are expected to land on the Main Layer (0) after FocusWindow()
+static ImGuiWindow* ImGui::NavRestoreLastChildNavWindow(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    if (window->NavLastChildNavWindow && window->NavLastChildNavWindow->WasActive)
+        return window->NavLastChildNavWindow;
+    if (window->DockNodeAsHost && window->DockNodeAsHost->TabBar)
+        if (ImGuiTabItem* tab = TabBarFindMostRecentlySelectedTabForActiveWindow(window->DockNodeAsHost->TabBar))
+            return tab->Window;
+    return window;
+}
+
+void ImGui::NavRestoreLayer(ImGuiNavLayer layer)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (layer == ImGuiNavLayer_Main)
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* prev_nav_window = g.NavWindow;
+        g.NavWindow = NavRestoreLastChildNavWindow(g.NavWindow);    // FIXME-NAV: Should clear ongoing nav requests?
+        if (prev_nav_window)
+            IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_FOCUS("[focus] NavRestoreLayer: from \"%s\" to SetNavWindow(\"%s\")\n", prev_nav_window->Name, g.NavWindow->Name);
+    }
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow;
+    if (window->NavLastIds[layer] != 0)
+    {
+        SetNavID(window->NavLastIds[layer], layer, 0, window->NavRectRel[layer]);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        g.NavLayer = layer;
+        NavInitWindow(window, true);
+    }
+}
+
+void ImGui::NavRestoreHighlightAfterMove()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.NavDisableHighlight = false;
+    g.NavDisableMouseHover = g.NavMousePosDirty = true;
+}
+
+static inline void ImGui::NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.NavAnyRequest = g.NavMoveScoringItems || g.NavInitRequest || (IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_SCORING && g.NavWindow != NULL);
+    if (g.NavAnyRequest)
+        IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindow != NULL);
+}
+
+// This needs to be called before we submit any widget (aka in or before Begin)
+void ImGui::NavInitWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, bool force_reinit)
+{
+    // FIXME: ChildWindow test here is wrong for docking
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(window == g.NavWindow);
+
+    if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs)
+    {
+        g.NavId = g.NavFocusScopeId = 0;
+        return;
+    }
+
+    bool init_for_nav = false;
+    if (window == window->RootWindow || (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) || (window->NavLastIds[0] == 0) || force_reinit)
+        init_for_nav = true;
+    IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_NAV("[nav] NavInitRequest: from NavInitWindow(), init_for_nav=%d, window=\"%s\", layer=%d\n", init_for_nav, window->Name, g.NavLayer);
+    if (init_for_nav)
+    {
+        SetNavID(0, g.NavLayer, 0, ImRect());
+        g.NavInitRequest = true;
+        g.NavInitRequestFromMove = false;
+        g.NavInitResultId = 0;
+        g.NavInitResultRectRel = ImRect();
+        NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag();
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        g.NavId = window->NavLastIds[0];
+        g.NavFocusScopeId = 0;
+    }
+}
+
+static ImVec2 ImGui::NavCalcPreferredRefPos()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow;
+    if (g.NavDisableHighlight || !g.NavDisableMouseHover || !window)
+    {
+        // Mouse (we need a fallback in case the mouse becomes invalid after being used)
+        // The +1.0f offset when stored by OpenPopupEx() allows reopening this or another popup (same or another mouse button) while not moving the mouse, it is pretty standard.
+        // In theory we could move that +1.0f offset in OpenPopupEx()
+        ImVec2 p = IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos) ? g.IO.MousePos : g.MouseLastValidPos;
+        return ImVec2(p.x + 1.0f, p.y);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // When navigation is active and mouse is disabled, pick a position around the bottom left of the currently navigated item
+        // Take account of upcoming scrolling (maybe set mouse pos should be done in EndFrame?)
+        ImRect rect_rel = WindowRectRelToAbs(window, window->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer]);
+        if (window->LastFrameActive != g.FrameCount && (window->ScrollTarget.x != FLT_MAX || window->ScrollTarget.y != FLT_MAX))
+        {
+            ImVec2 next_scroll = CalcNextScrollFromScrollTargetAndClamp(window);
+            rect_rel.Translate(window->Scroll - next_scroll);
+        }
+        ImVec2 pos = ImVec2(rect_rel.Min.x + ImMin(g.Style.FramePadding.x * 4, rect_rel.GetWidth()), rect_rel.Max.y - ImMin(g.Style.FramePadding.y, rect_rel.GetHeight()));
+        ImGuiViewport* viewport = window->Viewport;
+        return ImFloor(ImClamp(pos, viewport->Pos, viewport->Pos + viewport->Size)); // ImFloor() is important because non-integer mouse position application in backend might be lossy and result in undesirable non-zero delta.
+    }
+}
+
+float ImGui::GetNavTweakPressedAmount(ImGuiAxis axis)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    float repeat_delay, repeat_rate;
+    GetTypematicRepeatRate(ImGuiInputReadFlags_RepeatRateNavTweak, &repeat_delay, &repeat_rate);
+
+    ImGuiKey key_less, key_more;
+    if (g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad)
+    {
+        key_less = (axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadLeft : ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadUp;
+        key_more = (axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadRight : ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadDown;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        key_less = (axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? ImGuiKey_LeftArrow : ImGuiKey_UpArrow;
+        key_more = (axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? ImGuiKey_RightArrow : ImGuiKey_DownArrow;
+    }
+    float amount = (float)GetKeyPressedAmount(key_more, repeat_delay, repeat_rate) - (float)GetKeyPressedAmount(key_less, repeat_delay, repeat_rate);
+    if (amount != 0.0f && IsKeyDown(key_less) && IsKeyDown(key_more)) // Cancel when opposite directions are held, regardless of repeat phase
+        amount = 0.0f;
+    return amount;
+}
+
+static void ImGui::NavUpdate()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiIO& io = g.IO;
+
+    io.WantSetMousePos = false;
+    //if (g.NavScoringDebugCount > 0) IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_NAV("[nav] NavScoringDebugCount %d for '%s' layer %d (Init:%d, Move:%d)\n", g.NavScoringDebugCount, g.NavWindow ? g.NavWindow->Name : "NULL", g.NavLayer, g.NavInitRequest || g.NavInitResultId != 0, g.NavMoveRequest);
+
+    // Set input source based on which keys are last pressed (as some features differs when used with Gamepad vs Keyboard)
+    // FIXME-NAV: Now that keys are separated maybe we can get rid of NavInputSource?
+    const bool nav_gamepad_active = (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad) != 0 && (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad) != 0;
+    const ImGuiKey nav_gamepad_keys_to_change_source[] = { ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceRight, ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceLeft, ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceUp, ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceDown, ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadRight, ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadLeft, ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadUp, ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadDown };
+    if (nav_gamepad_active)
+        for (ImGuiKey key : nav_gamepad_keys_to_change_source)
+            if (IsKeyDown(key))
+                g.NavInputSource = ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad;
+    const bool nav_keyboard_active = (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard) != 0;
+    const ImGuiKey nav_keyboard_keys_to_change_source[] = { ImGuiKey_Space, ImGuiKey_Enter, ImGuiKey_Escape, ImGuiKey_RightArrow, ImGuiKey_LeftArrow, ImGuiKey_UpArrow, ImGuiKey_DownArrow };
+    if (nav_keyboard_active)
+        for (ImGuiKey key : nav_keyboard_keys_to_change_source)
+            if (IsKeyDown(key))
+                g.NavInputSource = ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard;
+
+    // Process navigation init request (select first/default focus)
+    if (g.NavInitResultId != 0)
+        NavInitRequestApplyResult();
+    g.NavInitRequest = false;
+    g.NavInitRequestFromMove = false;
+    g.NavInitResultId = 0;
+    g.NavJustMovedToId = 0;
+
+    // Process navigation move request
+    if (g.NavMoveSubmitted)
+        NavMoveRequestApplyResult();
+    g.NavTabbingCounter = 0;
+    g.NavMoveSubmitted = g.NavMoveScoringItems = false;
+
+    // Schedule mouse position update (will be done at the bottom of this function, after 1) processing all move requests and 2) updating scrolling)
+    bool set_mouse_pos = false;
+    if (g.NavMousePosDirty && g.NavIdIsAlive)
+        if (!g.NavDisableHighlight && g.NavDisableMouseHover && g.NavWindow)
+            set_mouse_pos = true;
+    g.NavMousePosDirty = false;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.NavLayer == ImGuiNavLayer_Main || g.NavLayer == ImGuiNavLayer_Menu);
+
+    // Store our return window (for returning from Menu Layer to Main Layer) and clear it as soon as we step back in our own Layer 0
+    if (g.NavWindow)
+        NavSaveLastChildNavWindowIntoParent(g.NavWindow);
+    if (g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow->NavLastChildNavWindow != NULL && g.NavLayer == ImGuiNavLayer_Main)
+        g.NavWindow->NavLastChildNavWindow = NULL;
+
+    // Update CTRL+TAB and Windowing features (hold Square to move/resize/etc.)
+    NavUpdateWindowing();
+
+    // Set output flags for user application
+    io.NavActive = (nav_keyboard_active || nav_gamepad_active) && g.NavWindow && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs);
+    io.NavVisible = (io.NavActive && g.NavId != 0 && !g.NavDisableHighlight) || (g.NavWindowingTarget != NULL);
+
+    // Process NavCancel input (to close a popup, get back to parent, clear focus)
+    NavUpdateCancelRequest();
+
+    // Process manual activation request
+    g.NavActivateId = g.NavActivateDownId = g.NavActivatePressedId = g.NavActivateInputId = 0;
+    g.NavActivateFlags = ImGuiActivateFlags_None;
+    if (g.NavId != 0 && !g.NavDisableHighlight && !g.NavWindowingTarget && g.NavWindow && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs))
+    {
+        const bool activate_down = IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_Space) || IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadActivate);
+        const bool activate_pressed = activate_down && (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Space, false) || IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadActivate, false));
+        const bool input_down = IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_Enter) || IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadInput);
+        const bool input_pressed = input_down && (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Enter, false) || IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadInput, false));
+        if (g.ActiveId == 0 && activate_pressed)
+        {
+            g.NavActivateId = g.NavId;
+            g.NavActivateFlags = ImGuiActivateFlags_PreferTweak;
+        }
+        if ((g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveId == g.NavId) && input_pressed)
+        {
+            g.NavActivateInputId = g.NavId;
+            g.NavActivateFlags = ImGuiActivateFlags_PreferInput;
+        }
+        if ((g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveId == g.NavId) && activate_down)
+            g.NavActivateDownId = g.NavId;
+        if ((g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveId == g.NavId) && activate_pressed)
+            g.NavActivatePressedId = g.NavId;
+    }
+    if (g.NavWindow && (g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs))
+        g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
+    if (g.NavActivateId != 0)
+        IM_ASSERT(g.NavActivateDownId == g.NavActivateId);
+
+    // Process programmatic activation request
+    // FIXME-NAV: Those should eventually be queued (unlike focus they don't cancel each others)
+    if (g.NavNextActivateId != 0)
+    {
+        if (g.NavNextActivateFlags & ImGuiActivateFlags_PreferInput)
+            g.NavActivateInputId = g.NavNextActivateId;
+        else
+            g.NavActivateId = g.NavActivateDownId = g.NavActivatePressedId = g.NavNextActivateId;
+        g.NavActivateFlags = g.NavNextActivateFlags;
+    }
+    g.NavNextActivateId = 0;
+
+    // Process move requests
+    NavUpdateCreateMoveRequest();
+    if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_None)
+        NavUpdateCreateTabbingRequest();
+    NavUpdateAnyRequestFlag();
+    g.NavIdIsAlive = false;
+
+    // Scrolling
+    if (g.NavWindow && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs) && !g.NavWindowingTarget)
+    {
+        // *Fallback* manual-scroll with Nav directional keys when window has no navigable item
+        ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow;
+        const float scroll_speed = IM_ROUND(window->CalcFontSize() * 100 * io.DeltaTime); // We need round the scrolling speed because sub-pixel scroll isn't reliably supported.
+        const ImGuiDir move_dir = g.NavMoveDir;
+        if (window->DC.NavLayersActiveMask == 0x00 && window->DC.NavHasScroll && move_dir != ImGuiDir_None)
+        {
+            if (move_dir == ImGuiDir_Left || move_dir == ImGuiDir_Right)
+                SetScrollX(window, ImFloor(window->Scroll.x + ((move_dir == ImGuiDir_Left) ? -1.0f : +1.0f) * scroll_speed));
+            if (move_dir == ImGuiDir_Up || move_dir == ImGuiDir_Down)
+                SetScrollY(window, ImFloor(window->Scroll.y + ((move_dir == ImGuiDir_Up) ? -1.0f : +1.0f) * scroll_speed));
+        }
+
+        // *Normal* Manual scroll with NavScrollXXX keys
+        // Next movement request will clamp the NavId reference rectangle to the visible area, so navigation will resume within those bounds.
+        const ImVec2 scroll_dir = GetKeyVector2d(ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickLeft, ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickRight, ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickUp, ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickDown);
+        const float tweak_factor = IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadTweakSlow) ? 1.0f / 10.0f : IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadTweakFast) ? 10.0f : 1.0f;
+        if (scroll_dir.x != 0.0f && window->ScrollbarX)
+            SetScrollX(window, ImFloor(window->Scroll.x + scroll_dir.x * scroll_speed * tweak_factor));
+        if (scroll_dir.y != 0.0f)
+            SetScrollY(window, ImFloor(window->Scroll.y + scroll_dir.y * scroll_speed * tweak_factor));
+    }
+
+    // Always prioritize mouse highlight if navigation is disabled
+    if (!nav_keyboard_active && !nav_gamepad_active)
+    {
+        g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
+        g.NavDisableMouseHover = set_mouse_pos = false;
+    }
+
+    // Update mouse position if requested
+    // (This will take into account the possibility that a Scroll was queued in the window to offset our absolute mouse position before scroll has been applied)
+    if (set_mouse_pos && (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos) && (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasSetMousePos))
+    {
+        io.MousePos = io.MousePosPrev = NavCalcPreferredRefPos();
+        io.WantSetMousePos = true;
+        //IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_IO("SetMousePos: (%.1f,%.1f)\n", io.MousePos.x, io.MousePos.y);
+    }
+
+    // [DEBUG]
+    g.NavScoringDebugCount = 0;
+#if IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_RECTS
+    if (g.NavWindow)
+    {
+        ImDrawList* draw_list = GetForegroundDrawList(g.NavWindow);
+        if (1) { for (int layer = 0; layer < 2; layer++) { ImRect r = WindowRectRelToAbs(g.NavWindow, g.NavWindow->NavRectRel[layer]); draw_list->AddRect(r.Min, r.Max, IM_COL32(255,200,0,255)); } } // [DEBUG]
+        if (1) { ImU32 col = (!g.NavWindow->Hidden) ? IM_COL32(255,0,255,255) : IM_COL32(255,0,0,255); ImVec2 p = NavCalcPreferredRefPos(); char buf[32]; ImFormatString(buf, 32, "%d", g.NavLayer); draw_list->AddCircleFilled(p, 3.0f, col); draw_list->AddText(NULL, 13.0f, p + ImVec2(8,-4), col, buf); }
+    }
+#endif
+}
+
+void ImGui::NavInitRequestApplyResult()
+{
+    // In very rare cases g.NavWindow may be null (e.g. clearing focus after requesting an init request, which does happen when releasing Alt while clicking on void)
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (!g.NavWindow)
+        return;
+
+    // Apply result from previous navigation init request (will typically select the first item, unless SetItemDefaultFocus() has been called)
+    // FIXME-NAV: On _NavFlattened windows, g.NavWindow will only be updated during subsequent frame. Not a problem currently.
+    IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_NAV("[nav] NavInitRequest: ApplyResult: NavID 0x%08X in Layer %d Window \"%s\"\n", g.NavInitResultId, g.NavLayer, g.NavWindow->Name);
+    SetNavID(g.NavInitResultId, g.NavLayer, 0, g.NavInitResultRectRel);
+    g.NavIdIsAlive = true; // Mark as alive from previous frame as we got a result
+    if (g.NavInitRequestFromMove)
+        NavRestoreHighlightAfterMove();
+}
+
+void ImGui::NavUpdateCreateMoveRequest()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiIO& io = g.IO;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow;
+
+    if (g.NavMoveForwardToNextFrame && window != NULL)
+    {
+        // Forwarding previous request (which has been modified, e.g. wrap around menus rewrite the requests with a starting rectangle at the other side of the window)
+        // (preserve most state, which were already set by the NavMoveRequestForward() function)
+        IM_ASSERT(g.NavMoveDir != ImGuiDir_None && g.NavMoveClipDir != ImGuiDir_None);
+        IM_ASSERT(g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Forwarded);
+        IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_NAV("[nav] NavMoveRequestForward %d\n", g.NavMoveDir);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Initiate directional inputs request
+        g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_None;
+        g.NavMoveFlags = ImGuiNavMoveFlags_None;
+        g.NavMoveScrollFlags = ImGuiScrollFlags_None;
+        if (window && !g.NavWindowingTarget && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs))
+        {
+            const ImGuiInputReadFlags repeat_mode = ImGuiInputReadFlags_Repeat | ImGuiInputReadFlags_RepeatRateNavMove;
+            if (!IsActiveIdUsingNavDir(ImGuiDir_Left)  && (IsKeyPressedEx(ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadLeft,  repeat_mode) || IsKeyPressedEx(ImGuiKey_LeftArrow,  repeat_mode))) { g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Left; }
+            if (!IsActiveIdUsingNavDir(ImGuiDir_Right) && (IsKeyPressedEx(ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadRight, repeat_mode) || IsKeyPressedEx(ImGuiKey_RightArrow, repeat_mode))) { g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Right; }
+            if (!IsActiveIdUsingNavDir(ImGuiDir_Up)    && (IsKeyPressedEx(ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadUp,    repeat_mode) || IsKeyPressedEx(ImGuiKey_UpArrow,    repeat_mode))) { g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Up; }
+            if (!IsActiveIdUsingNavDir(ImGuiDir_Down)  && (IsKeyPressedEx(ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadDown,  repeat_mode) || IsKeyPressedEx(ImGuiKey_DownArrow,  repeat_mode))) { g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Down; }
+        }
+        g.NavMoveClipDir = g.NavMoveDir;
+        g.NavScoringNoClipRect = ImRect(+FLT_MAX, +FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX);
+    }
+
+    // Update PageUp/PageDown/Home/End scroll
+    // FIXME-NAV: Consider enabling those keys even without the master ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard flag?
+    const bool nav_keyboard_active = (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard) != 0;
+    float scoring_rect_offset_y = 0.0f;
+    if (window && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_None && nav_keyboard_active)
+        scoring_rect_offset_y = NavUpdatePageUpPageDown();
+    if (scoring_rect_offset_y != 0.0f)
+    {
+        g.NavScoringNoClipRect = window->InnerRect;
+        g.NavScoringNoClipRect.TranslateY(scoring_rect_offset_y);
+    }
+
+    // [DEBUG] Always send a request
+#if IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_SCORING
+    if (io.KeyCtrl && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_C))
+        g.NavMoveDirForDebug = (ImGuiDir)((g.NavMoveDirForDebug + 1) & 3);
+    if (io.KeyCtrl && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_None)
+    {
+        g.NavMoveDir = g.NavMoveDirForDebug;
+        g.NavMoveFlags |= ImGuiNavMoveFlags_DebugNoResult;
+    }
+#endif
+
+    // Submit
+    g.NavMoveForwardToNextFrame = false;
+    if (g.NavMoveDir != ImGuiDir_None)
+        NavMoveRequestSubmit(g.NavMoveDir, g.NavMoveClipDir, g.NavMoveFlags, g.NavMoveScrollFlags);
+
+    // Moving with no reference triggers a init request (will be used as a fallback if the direction fails to find a match)
+    if (g.NavMoveSubmitted && g.NavId == 0)
+    {
+        IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_NAV("[nav] NavInitRequest: from move, window \"%s\", layer=%d\n", window ? window->Name : "<NULL>", g.NavLayer);
+        g.NavInitRequest = g.NavInitRequestFromMove = true;
+        g.NavInitResultId = 0;
+        g.NavDisableHighlight = false;
+    }
+
+    // When using gamepad, we project the reference nav bounding box into window visible area.
+    // This is to allow resuming navigation inside the visible area after doing a large amount of scrolling, since with gamepad every movements are relative
+    // (can't focus a visible object like we can with the mouse).
+    if (g.NavMoveSubmitted && g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad && g.NavLayer == ImGuiNavLayer_Main && window != NULL)// && (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Forwarded))
+    {
+        bool clamp_x = (g.NavMoveFlags & (ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopX | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX)) == 0;
+        bool clamp_y = (g.NavMoveFlags & (ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopY | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapY)) == 0;
+        ImRect inner_rect_rel = WindowRectAbsToRel(window, ImRect(window->InnerRect.Min - ImVec2(1, 1), window->InnerRect.Max + ImVec2(1, 1)));
+        if ((clamp_x || clamp_y) && !inner_rect_rel.Contains(window->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer]))
+        {
+            //IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_NAV("[nav] NavMoveRequest: clamp NavRectRel for gamepad move\n");
+            float pad_x = ImMin(inner_rect_rel.GetWidth(), window->CalcFontSize() * 0.5f);
+            float pad_y = ImMin(inner_rect_rel.GetHeight(), window->CalcFontSize() * 0.5f); // Terrible approximation for the intent of starting navigation from first fully visible item
+            inner_rect_rel.Min.x = clamp_x ? (inner_rect_rel.Min.x + pad_x) : -FLT_MAX;
+            inner_rect_rel.Max.x = clamp_x ? (inner_rect_rel.Max.x - pad_x) : +FLT_MAX;
+            inner_rect_rel.Min.y = clamp_y ? (inner_rect_rel.Min.y + pad_y) : -FLT_MAX;
+            inner_rect_rel.Max.y = clamp_y ? (inner_rect_rel.Max.y - pad_y) : +FLT_MAX;
+            window->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer].ClipWithFull(inner_rect_rel);
+            g.NavId = g.NavFocusScopeId = 0;
+        }
+    }
+
+    // For scoring we use a single segment on the left side our current item bounding box (not touching the edge to avoid box overlap with zero-spaced items)
+    ImRect scoring_rect;
+    if (window != NULL)
+    {
+        ImRect nav_rect_rel = !window->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer].IsInverted() ? window->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer] : ImRect(0, 0, 0, 0);
+        scoring_rect = WindowRectRelToAbs(window, nav_rect_rel);
+        scoring_rect.TranslateY(scoring_rect_offset_y);
+        scoring_rect.Min.x = ImMin(scoring_rect.Min.x + 1.0f, scoring_rect.Max.x);
+        scoring_rect.Max.x = scoring_rect.Min.x;
+        IM_ASSERT(!scoring_rect.IsInverted()); // Ensure if we have a finite, non-inverted bounding box here will allows us to remove extraneous ImFabs() calls in NavScoreItem().
+        //GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(scoring_rect.Min, scoring_rect.Max, IM_COL32(255,200,0,255)); // [DEBUG]
+        //if (!g.NavScoringNoClipRect.IsInverted()) { GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(g.NavScoringNoClipRect.Min, g.NavScoringNoClipRect.Max, IM_COL32(255, 200, 0, 255)); } // [DEBUG]
+    }
+    g.NavScoringRect = scoring_rect;
+    g.NavScoringNoClipRect.Add(scoring_rect);
+}
+
+void ImGui::NavUpdateCreateTabbingRequest()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_None);
+    if (window == NULL || g.NavWindowingTarget != NULL || (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs))
+        return;
+
+    const bool tab_pressed = IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Tab, true) && !IsActiveIdUsingKey(ImGuiKey_Tab) && !g.IO.KeyCtrl && !g.IO.KeyAlt;
+    if (!tab_pressed)
+        return;
+
+    // Initiate tabbing request
+    // (this is ALWAYS ENABLED, regardless of ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard flag!)
+    // Initially this was designed to use counters and modulo arithmetic, but that could not work with unsubmitted items (list clipper). Instead we use a strategy close to other move requests.
+    // See NavProcessItemForTabbingRequest() for a description of the various forward/backward tabbing cases with and without wrapping.
+    //// FIXME: We use (g.ActiveId == 0) but (g.NavDisableHighlight == false) might be righter once we can tab through anything
+    g.NavTabbingDir = g.IO.KeyShift ? -1 : (g.ActiveId == 0) ? 0 : +1;
+    ImGuiScrollFlags scroll_flags = window->Appearing ? ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeX | ImGuiScrollFlags_AlwaysCenterY : ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeX | ImGuiScrollFlags_KeepVisibleEdgeY;
+    ImGuiDir clip_dir = (g.NavTabbingDir < 0) ? ImGuiDir_Up : ImGuiDir_Down;
+    NavMoveRequestSubmit(ImGuiDir_None, clip_dir, ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Tabbing, scroll_flags); // FIXME-NAV: Once we refactor tabbing, add LegacyApi flag to not activate non-inputable.
+    g.NavTabbingCounter = -1;
+}
+
+// Apply result from previous frame navigation directional move request. Always called from NavUpdate()
+void ImGui::NavMoveRequestApplyResult()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+#if IMGUI_DEBUG_NAV_SCORING
+    if (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_DebugNoResult) // [DEBUG] Scoring all items in NavWindow at all times
+        return;
+#endif
+
+    // Select which result to use
+    ImGuiNavItemData* result = (g.NavMoveResultLocal.ID != 0) ? &g.NavMoveResultLocal : (g.NavMoveResultOther.ID != 0) ? &g.NavMoveResultOther : NULL;
+
+    // Tabbing forward wrap
+    if (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Tabbing)
+        if ((g.NavTabbingCounter == 1 || g.NavTabbingDir == 0) && g.NavTabbingResultFirst.ID)
+            result = &g.NavTabbingResultFirst;
+
+    // In a situation when there is no results but NavId != 0, re-enable the Navigation highlight (because g.NavId is not considered as a possible result)
+    if (result == NULL)
+    {
+        if (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Tabbing)
+            g.NavMoveFlags |= ImGuiNavMoveFlags_DontSetNavHighlight;
+        if (g.NavId != 0 && (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_DontSetNavHighlight) == 0)
+            NavRestoreHighlightAfterMove();
+        return;
+    }
+
+    // PageUp/PageDown behavior first jumps to the bottom/top mostly visible item, _otherwise_ use the result from the previous/next page.
+    if (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AlsoScoreVisibleSet)
+        if (g.NavMoveResultLocalVisible.ID != 0 && g.NavMoveResultLocalVisible.ID != g.NavId)
+            result = &g.NavMoveResultLocalVisible;
+
+    // Maybe entering a flattened child from the outside? In this case solve the tie using the regular scoring rules.
+    if (result != &g.NavMoveResultOther && g.NavMoveResultOther.ID != 0 && g.NavMoveResultOther.Window->ParentWindow == g.NavWindow)
+        if ((g.NavMoveResultOther.DistBox < result->DistBox) || (g.NavMoveResultOther.DistBox == result->DistBox && g.NavMoveResultOther.DistCenter < result->DistCenter))
+            result = &g.NavMoveResultOther;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindow && result->Window);
+
+    // Scroll to keep newly navigated item fully into view.
+    if (g.NavLayer == ImGuiNavLayer_Main)
+    {
+        if (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_ScrollToEdgeY)
+        {
+            // FIXME: Should remove this
+            float scroll_target = (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Up) ? result->Window->ScrollMax.y : 0.0f;
+            SetScrollY(result->Window, scroll_target);
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            ImRect rect_abs = WindowRectRelToAbs(result->Window, result->RectRel);
+            ScrollToRectEx(result->Window, rect_abs, g.NavMoveScrollFlags);
+        }
+    }
+
+    if (g.NavWindow != result->Window)
+    {
+        IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_FOCUS("[focus] NavMoveRequest: SetNavWindow(\"%s\")\n", result->Window->Name);
+        g.NavWindow = result->Window;
+    }
+    if (g.ActiveId != result->ID)
+        ClearActiveID();
+    if (g.NavId != result->ID)
+    {
+        // Don't set NavJustMovedToId if just landed on the same spot (which may happen with ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AllowCurrentNavId)
+        g.NavJustMovedToId = result->ID;
+        g.NavJustMovedToFocusScopeId = result->FocusScopeId;
+        g.NavJustMovedToKeyMods = g.NavMoveKeyMods;
+    }
+
+    // Focus
+    IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_NAV("[nav] NavMoveRequest: result NavID 0x%08X in Layer %d Window \"%s\"\n", result->ID, g.NavLayer, g.NavWindow->Name);
+    SetNavID(result->ID, g.NavLayer, result->FocusScopeId, result->RectRel);
+
+    // Tabbing: Activates Inputable or Focus non-Inputable
+    if ((g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Tabbing) && (result->InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable))
+    {
+        g.NavNextActivateId = result->ID;
+        g.NavNextActivateFlags = ImGuiActivateFlags_PreferInput | ImGuiActivateFlags_TryToPreserveState;
+        g.NavMoveFlags |= ImGuiNavMoveFlags_DontSetNavHighlight;
+    }
+
+    // Activate
+    if (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Activate)
+    {
+        g.NavNextActivateId = result->ID;
+        g.NavNextActivateFlags = ImGuiActivateFlags_None;
+    }
+
+    // Enable nav highlight
+    if ((g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_DontSetNavHighlight) == 0)
+        NavRestoreHighlightAfterMove();
+}
+
+// Process NavCancel input (to close a popup, get back to parent, clear focus)
+// FIXME: In order to support e.g. Escape to clear a selection we'll need:
+// - either to store the equivalent of ActiveIdUsingKeyInputMask for a FocusScope and test for it.
+// - either to move most/all of those tests to the epilogue/end functions of the scope they are dealing with (e.g. exit child window in EndChild()) or in EndFrame(), to allow an earlier intercept
+static void ImGui::NavUpdateCancelRequest()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (!IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Escape, false) && !IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadCancel, false))
+        return;
+
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
+    // If your custom widget code used:                 { g.ActiveIdUsingNavInputMask |= (1 << ImGuiNavInput_Cancel); }
+    // Since IMGUI_VERSION_NUM >= 18804 it should be:   { SetActiveIdUsingKey(ImGuiKey_Escape); SetActiveIdUsingKey(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadCancel); }
+    if (g.ActiveIdUsingNavInputMask & (1 << ImGuiNavInput_Cancel))
+        SetActiveIdUsingKey(ImGuiKey_Escape);
+    if (g.ActiveIdUsingNavInputMask & ~(1 << ImGuiNavInput_Cancel))
+        IM_ASSERT(0); // Other values unsupported
+#endif
+
+    IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_NAV("[nav] NavUpdateCancelRequest()\n");
+    if (g.ActiveId != 0)
+    {
+        if (!IsActiveIdUsingKey(ImGuiKey_Escape) && !IsActiveIdUsingKey(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadCancel))
+            ClearActiveID();
+    }
+    else if (g.NavLayer != ImGuiNavLayer_Main)
+    {
+        // Leave the "menu" layer
+        NavRestoreLayer(ImGuiNavLayer_Main);
+        NavRestoreHighlightAfterMove();
+    }
+    else if (g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow != g.NavWindow->RootWindow && !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && g.NavWindow->ParentWindow)
+    {
+        // Exit child window
+        ImGuiWindow* child_window = g.NavWindow;
+        ImGuiWindow* parent_window = g.NavWindow->ParentWindow;
+        IM_ASSERT(child_window->ChildId != 0);
+        ImRect child_rect = child_window->Rect();
+        FocusWindow(parent_window);
+        SetNavID(child_window->ChildId, ImGuiNavLayer_Main, 0, WindowRectAbsToRel(parent_window, child_rect));
+        NavRestoreHighlightAfterMove();
+    }
+    else if (g.OpenPopupStack.Size > 0 && !(g.OpenPopupStack.back().Window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal))
+    {
+        // Close open popup/menu
+        ClosePopupToLevel(g.OpenPopupStack.Size - 1, true);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Clear NavLastId for popups but keep it for regular child window so we can leave one and come back where we were
+        if (g.NavWindow && ((g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) || !(g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)))
+            g.NavWindow->NavLastIds[0] = 0;
+        g.NavId = g.NavFocusScopeId = 0;
+    }
+}
+
+// Handle PageUp/PageDown/Home/End keys
+// Called from NavUpdateCreateMoveRequest() which will use our output to create a move request
+// FIXME-NAV: This doesn't work properly with NavFlattened siblings as we use NavWindow rectangle for reference
+// FIXME-NAV: how to get Home/End to aim at the beginning/end of a 2D grid?
+static float ImGui::NavUpdatePageUpPageDown()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow;
+    if ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs) || g.NavWindowingTarget != NULL)
+        return 0.0f;
+
+    const bool page_up_held = IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_PageUp) && !IsActiveIdUsingKey(ImGuiKey_PageUp);
+    const bool page_down_held = IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_PageDown) && !IsActiveIdUsingKey(ImGuiKey_PageDown);
+    const bool home_pressed = IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Home) && !IsActiveIdUsingKey(ImGuiKey_Home);
+    const bool end_pressed = IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_End) && !IsActiveIdUsingKey(ImGuiKey_End);
+    if (page_up_held == page_down_held && home_pressed == end_pressed) // Proceed if either (not both) are pressed, otherwise early out
+        return 0.0f;
+
+    if (g.NavLayer != ImGuiNavLayer_Main)
+        NavRestoreLayer(ImGuiNavLayer_Main);
+
+    if (window->DC.NavLayersActiveMask == 0x00 && window->DC.NavHasScroll)
+    {
+        // Fallback manual-scroll when window has no navigable item
+        if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_PageUp, true))
+            SetScrollY(window, window->Scroll.y - window->InnerRect.GetHeight());
+        else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_PageDown, true))
+            SetScrollY(window, window->Scroll.y + window->InnerRect.GetHeight());
+        else if (home_pressed)
+            SetScrollY(window, 0.0f);
+        else if (end_pressed)
+            SetScrollY(window, window->ScrollMax.y);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        ImRect& nav_rect_rel = window->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer];
+        const float page_offset_y = ImMax(0.0f, window->InnerRect.GetHeight() - window->CalcFontSize() * 1.0f + nav_rect_rel.GetHeight());
+        float nav_scoring_rect_offset_y = 0.0f;
+        if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_PageUp, true))
+        {
+            nav_scoring_rect_offset_y = -page_offset_y;
+            g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Down; // Because our scoring rect is offset up, we request the down direction (so we can always land on the last item)
+            g.NavMoveClipDir = ImGuiDir_Up;
+            g.NavMoveFlags = ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AllowCurrentNavId | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AlsoScoreVisibleSet;
+        }
+        else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_PageDown, true))
+        {
+            nav_scoring_rect_offset_y = +page_offset_y;
+            g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Up; // Because our scoring rect is offset down, we request the up direction (so we can always land on the last item)
+            g.NavMoveClipDir = ImGuiDir_Down;
+            g.NavMoveFlags = ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AllowCurrentNavId | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AlsoScoreVisibleSet;
+        }
+        else if (home_pressed)
+        {
+            // FIXME-NAV: handling of Home/End is assuming that the top/bottom most item will be visible with Scroll.y == 0/ScrollMax.y
+            // Scrolling will be handled via the ImGuiNavMoveFlags_ScrollToEdgeY flag, we don't scroll immediately to avoid scrolling happening before nav result.
+            // Preserve current horizontal position if we have any.
+            nav_rect_rel.Min.y = nav_rect_rel.Max.y = 0.0f;
+            if (nav_rect_rel.IsInverted())
+                nav_rect_rel.Min.x = nav_rect_rel.Max.x = 0.0f;
+            g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Down;
+            g.NavMoveFlags = ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AllowCurrentNavId | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_ScrollToEdgeY;
+            // FIXME-NAV: MoveClipDir left to _None, intentional?
+        }
+        else if (end_pressed)
+        {
+            nav_rect_rel.Min.y = nav_rect_rel.Max.y = window->ContentSize.y;
+            if (nav_rect_rel.IsInverted())
+                nav_rect_rel.Min.x = nav_rect_rel.Max.x = 0.0f;
+            g.NavMoveDir = ImGuiDir_Up;
+            g.NavMoveFlags = ImGuiNavMoveFlags_AllowCurrentNavId | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_ScrollToEdgeY;
+            // FIXME-NAV: MoveClipDir left to _None, intentional?
+        }
+        return nav_scoring_rect_offset_y;
+    }
+    return 0.0f;
+}
+
+static void ImGui::NavEndFrame()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    // Show CTRL+TAB list window
+    if (g.NavWindowingTarget != NULL)
+        NavUpdateWindowingOverlay();
+
+    // Perform wrap-around in menus
+    // FIXME-NAV: Wrap may need to apply a weight bias on the other axis. e.g. 4x4 grid with 2 last items missing on last item won't handle LoopY/WrapY correctly.
+    // FIXME-NAV: Wrap (not Loop) support could be handled by the scoring function and then WrapX would function without an extra frame.
+    const ImGuiNavMoveFlags wanted_flags = ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopX | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapY | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopY;
+    if (g.NavWindow && NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet() && (g.NavMoveFlags & wanted_flags) && (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Forwarded) == 0)
+        NavUpdateCreateWrappingRequest();
+}
+
+static void ImGui::NavUpdateCreateWrappingRequest()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow;
+
+    bool do_forward = false;
+    ImRect bb_rel = window->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer];
+    ImGuiDir clip_dir = g.NavMoveDir;
+    const ImGuiNavMoveFlags move_flags = g.NavMoveFlags;
+    if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && (move_flags & (ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopX)))
+    {
+        bb_rel.Min.x = bb_rel.Max.x = window->ContentSize.x + window->WindowPadding.x;
+        if (move_flags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX)
+        {
+            bb_rel.TranslateY(-bb_rel.GetHeight()); // Previous row
+            clip_dir = ImGuiDir_Up;
+        }
+        do_forward = true;
+    }
+    if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right && (move_flags & (ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopX)))
+    {
+        bb_rel.Min.x = bb_rel.Max.x = -window->WindowPadding.x;
+        if (move_flags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapX)
+        {
+            bb_rel.TranslateY(+bb_rel.GetHeight()); // Next row
+            clip_dir = ImGuiDir_Down;
+        }
+        do_forward = true;
+    }
+    if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Up && (move_flags & (ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapY | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopY)))
+    {
+        bb_rel.Min.y = bb_rel.Max.y = window->ContentSize.y + window->WindowPadding.y;
+        if (move_flags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapY)
+        {
+            bb_rel.TranslateX(-bb_rel.GetWidth()); // Previous column
+            clip_dir = ImGuiDir_Left;
+        }
+        do_forward = true;
+    }
+    if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Down && (move_flags & (ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapY | ImGuiNavMoveFlags_LoopY)))
+    {
+        bb_rel.Min.y = bb_rel.Max.y = -window->WindowPadding.y;
+        if (move_flags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_WrapY)
+        {
+            bb_rel.TranslateX(+bb_rel.GetWidth()); // Next column
+            clip_dir = ImGuiDir_Right;
+        }
+        do_forward = true;
+    }
+    if (!do_forward)
+        return;
+    window->NavRectRel[g.NavLayer] = bb_rel;
+    NavMoveRequestForward(g.NavMoveDir, clip_dir, move_flags, g.NavMoveScrollFlags);
+}
+
+static int ImGui::FindWindowFocusIndex(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_UNUSED(g);
+    int order = window->FocusOrder;
+    IM_ASSERT(window->RootWindow == window); // No child window (not testing _ChildWindow because of docking)
+    IM_ASSERT(g.WindowsFocusOrder[order] == window);
+    return order;
+}
+
+static ImGuiWindow* FindWindowNavFocusable(int i_start, int i_stop, int dir) // FIXME-OPT O(N)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    for (int i = i_start; i >= 0 && i < g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size && i != i_stop; i += dir)
+        if (ImGui::IsWindowNavFocusable(g.WindowsFocusOrder[i]))
+            return g.WindowsFocusOrder[i];
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+static void NavUpdateWindowingHighlightWindow(int focus_change_dir)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindowingTarget);
+    if (g.NavWindowingTarget->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)
+        return;
+
+    const int i_current = ImGui::FindWindowFocusIndex(g.NavWindowingTarget);
+    ImGuiWindow* window_target = FindWindowNavFocusable(i_current + focus_change_dir, -INT_MAX, focus_change_dir);
+    if (!window_target)
+        window_target = FindWindowNavFocusable((focus_change_dir < 0) ? (g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size - 1) : 0, i_current, focus_change_dir);
+    if (window_target) // Don't reset windowing target if there's a single window in the list
+    {
+        g.NavWindowingTarget = g.NavWindowingTargetAnim = window_target;
+        g.NavWindowingAccumDeltaPos = g.NavWindowingAccumDeltaSize = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+    }
+    g.NavWindowingToggleLayer = false;
+}
+
+// Windowing management mode
+// Keyboard: CTRL+Tab (change focus/move/resize), Alt (toggle menu layer)
+// Gamepad:  Hold Menu/Square (change focus/move/resize), Tap Menu/Square (toggle menu layer)
+static void ImGui::NavUpdateWindowing()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiIO& io = g.IO;
+
+    ImGuiWindow* apply_focus_window = NULL;
+    bool apply_toggle_layer = false;
+
+    ImGuiWindow* modal_window = GetTopMostPopupModal();
+    bool allow_windowing = (modal_window == NULL);
+    if (!allow_windowing)
+        g.NavWindowingTarget = NULL;
+
+    // Fade out
+    if (g.NavWindowingTargetAnim && g.NavWindowingTarget == NULL)
+    {
+        g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = ImMax(g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha - io.DeltaTime * 10.0f, 0.0f);
+        if (g.DimBgRatio <= 0.0f && g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha <= 0.0f)
+            g.NavWindowingTargetAnim = NULL;
+    }
+
+    // Start CTRL+Tab or Square+L/R window selection
+    const bool start_windowing_with_gamepad = allow_windowing && !g.NavWindowingTarget && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadMenu, false);
+    const bool start_windowing_with_keyboard = allow_windowing && !g.NavWindowingTarget && io.KeyCtrl && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Tab, false);
+    if (start_windowing_with_gamepad || start_windowing_with_keyboard)
+        if (ImGuiWindow* window = g.NavWindow ? g.NavWindow : FindWindowNavFocusable(g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size - 1, -INT_MAX, -1))
+        {
+            g.NavWindowingTarget = g.NavWindowingTargetAnim = window->RootWindow;
+            g.NavWindowingTimer = g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = 0.0f;
+            g.NavWindowingAccumDeltaPos = g.NavWindowingAccumDeltaSize = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+            g.NavWindowingToggleLayer = start_windowing_with_gamepad ? true : false; // Gamepad starts toggling layer
+            g.NavInputSource = start_windowing_with_keyboard ? ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard : ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad;
+        }
+
+    // Gamepad update
+    g.NavWindowingTimer += io.DeltaTime;
+    if (g.NavWindowingTarget && g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad)
+    {
+        // Highlight only appears after a brief time holding the button, so that a fast tap on PadMenu (to toggle NavLayer) doesn't add visual noise
+        g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = ImMax(g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha, ImSaturate((g.NavWindowingTimer - NAV_WINDOWING_HIGHLIGHT_DELAY) / 0.05f));
+
+        // Select window to focus
+        const int focus_change_dir = (int)IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_GamepadL1) - (int)IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_GamepadR1);
+        if (focus_change_dir != 0)
+        {
+            NavUpdateWindowingHighlightWindow(focus_change_dir);
+            g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = 1.0f;
+        }
+
+        // Single press toggles NavLayer, long press with L/R apply actual focus on release (until then the window was merely rendered top-most)
+        if (!IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadMenu))
+        {
+            g.NavWindowingToggleLayer &= (g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha < 1.0f); // Once button was held long enough we don't consider it a tap-to-toggle-layer press anymore.
+            if (g.NavWindowingToggleLayer && g.NavWindow)
+                apply_toggle_layer = true;
+            else if (!g.NavWindowingToggleLayer)
+                apply_focus_window = g.NavWindowingTarget;
+            g.NavWindowingTarget = NULL;
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Keyboard: Focus
+    if (g.NavWindowingTarget && g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard)
+    {
+        // Visuals only appears after a brief time after pressing TAB the first time, so that a fast CTRL+TAB doesn't add visual noise
+        g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha = ImMax(g.NavWindowingHighlightAlpha, ImSaturate((g.NavWindowingTimer - NAV_WINDOWING_HIGHLIGHT_DELAY) / 0.05f)); // 1.0f
+        if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Tab, true))
+            NavUpdateWindowingHighlightWindow(io.KeyShift ? +1 : -1);
+        if (!io.KeyCtrl)
+            apply_focus_window = g.NavWindowingTarget;
+    }
+
+    // Keyboard: Press and Release ALT to toggle menu layer
+    // - Testing that only Alt is tested prevents Alt+Shift or AltGR from toggling menu layer.
+    // - AltGR is normally Alt+Ctrl but we can't reliably detect it (not all backends/systems/layout emit it as Alt+Ctrl). But even on keyboards without AltGR we don't want Alt+Ctrl to open menu anyway.
+	const bool nav_keyboard_active = (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard) != 0;
+    if (nav_keyboard_active && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_ModAlt))
+    {
+        g.NavWindowingToggleLayer = true;
+        g.NavInputSource = ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard;
+    }
+    if (g.NavWindowingToggleLayer && g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard)
+    {
+        // We cancel toggling nav layer when any text has been typed (generally while holding Alt). (See #370)
+        // We cancel toggling nav layer when other modifiers are pressed. (See #4439)
+        if (io.InputQueueCharacters.Size > 0 || io.KeyCtrl || io.KeyShift || io.KeySuper)
+            g.NavWindowingToggleLayer = false;
+
+        // Apply layer toggle on release
+        // Important: as before version <18314 we lacked an explicit IO event for focus gain/loss, we also compare mouse validity to detect old backends clearing mouse pos on focus loss.
+        if (IsKeyReleased(ImGuiKey_ModAlt) && g.NavWindowingToggleLayer)
+            if (g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap)
+                if (IsMousePosValid(&io.MousePos) == IsMousePosValid(&io.MousePosPrev))
+                    apply_toggle_layer = true;
+        if (!IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_ModAlt))
+            g.NavWindowingToggleLayer = false;
+    }
+
+    // Move window
+    if (g.NavWindowingTarget && !(g.NavWindowingTarget->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove))
+    {
+        ImVec2 nav_move_dir;
+        if (g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard && !io.KeyShift)
+            nav_move_dir = GetKeyVector2d(ImGuiKey_LeftArrow, ImGuiKey_RightArrow, ImGuiKey_UpArrow, ImGuiKey_DownArrow);
+        if (g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad)
+            nav_move_dir = GetKeyVector2d(ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickLeft, ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickRight, ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickUp, ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickDown);
+        if (nav_move_dir.x != 0.0f || nav_move_dir.y != 0.0f)
+        {
+            const float NAV_MOVE_SPEED = 800.0f;
+            const float move_step = NAV_MOVE_SPEED * io.DeltaTime * ImMin(io.DisplayFramebufferScale.x, io.DisplayFramebufferScale.y);
+            g.NavWindowingAccumDeltaPos += nav_move_dir * move_step;
+            g.NavDisableMouseHover = true;
+            ImVec2 accum_floored = ImFloor(g.NavWindowingAccumDeltaPos);
+            if (accum_floored.x != 0.0f || accum_floored.y != 0.0f)
+            {
+                ImGuiWindow* moving_window = g.NavWindowingTarget->RootWindowDockTree;
+                SetWindowPos(moving_window, moving_window->Pos + accum_floored, ImGuiCond_Always);
+                g.NavWindowingAccumDeltaPos -= accum_floored;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Apply final focus
+    if (apply_focus_window && (g.NavWindow == NULL || apply_focus_window != g.NavWindow->RootWindow))
+    {
+        ImGuiViewport* previous_viewport = g.NavWindow ? g.NavWindow->Viewport : NULL;
+        ClearActiveID();
+        NavRestoreHighlightAfterMove();
+        apply_focus_window = NavRestoreLastChildNavWindow(apply_focus_window);
+        ClosePopupsOverWindow(apply_focus_window, false);
+        FocusWindow(apply_focus_window);
+        if (apply_focus_window->NavLastIds[0] == 0)
+            NavInitWindow(apply_focus_window, false);
+
+        // If the window has ONLY a menu layer (no main layer), select it directly
+        // Use NavLayersActiveMaskNext since windows didn't have a chance to be Begin()-ed on this frame,
+        // so CTRL+Tab where the keys are only held for 1 frame will be able to use correct layers mask since
+        // the target window as already been previewed once.
+        // FIXME-NAV: This should be done in NavInit.. or in FocusWindow... However in both of those cases,
+        // we won't have a guarantee that windows has been visible before and therefore NavLayersActiveMask*
+        // won't be valid.
+        if (apply_focus_window->DC.NavLayersActiveMaskNext == (1 << ImGuiNavLayer_Menu))
+            g.NavLayer = ImGuiNavLayer_Menu;
+
+        // Request OS level focus
+        if (apply_focus_window->Viewport != previous_viewport && g.PlatformIO.Platform_SetWindowFocus)
+            g.PlatformIO.Platform_SetWindowFocus(apply_focus_window->Viewport);
+    }
+    if (apply_focus_window)
+        g.NavWindowingTarget = NULL;
+
+    // Apply menu/layer toggle
+    if (apply_toggle_layer && g.NavWindow)
+    {
+        ClearActiveID();
+
+        // Move to parent menu if necessary
+        ImGuiWindow* new_nav_window = g.NavWindow;
+        while (new_nav_window->ParentWindow
+            && (new_nav_window->DC.NavLayersActiveMask & (1 << ImGuiNavLayer_Menu)) == 0
+            && (new_nav_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) != 0
+            && (new_nav_window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)) == 0)
+            new_nav_window = new_nav_window->ParentWindow;
+        if (new_nav_window != g.NavWindow)
+        {
+            ImGuiWindow* old_nav_window = g.NavWindow;
+            FocusWindow(new_nav_window);
+            new_nav_window->NavLastChildNavWindow = old_nav_window;
+        }
+
+        // Toggle layer
+        const ImGuiNavLayer new_nav_layer = (g.NavWindow->DC.NavLayersActiveMask & (1 << ImGuiNavLayer_Menu)) ? (ImGuiNavLayer)((int)g.NavLayer ^ 1) : ImGuiNavLayer_Main;
+        if (new_nav_layer != g.NavLayer)
+        {
+            // Reinitialize navigation when entering menu bar with the Alt key (FIXME: could be a properly of the layer?)
+            const bool preserve_layer_1_nav_id = (new_nav_window->DockNodeAsHost != NULL);
+            if (new_nav_layer == ImGuiNavLayer_Menu && !preserve_layer_1_nav_id)
+                g.NavWindow->NavLastIds[new_nav_layer] = 0;
+            NavRestoreLayer(new_nav_layer);
+            NavRestoreHighlightAfterMove();
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+// Window has already passed the IsWindowNavFocusable()
+static const char* GetFallbackWindowNameForWindowingList(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)
+        return "(Popup)";
+    if ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar) && strcmp(window->Name, "##MainMenuBar") == 0)
+        return "(Main menu bar)";
+    if (window->DockNodeAsHost)
+        return "(Dock node)";
+    return "(Untitled)";
+}
+
+// Overlay displayed when using CTRL+TAB. Called by EndFrame().
+void ImGui::NavUpdateWindowingOverlay()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.NavWindowingTarget != NULL);
+
+    if (g.NavWindowingTimer < NAV_WINDOWING_LIST_APPEAR_DELAY)
+        return;
+
+    if (g.NavWindowingListWindow == NULL)
+        g.NavWindowingListWindow = FindWindowByName("###NavWindowingList");
+    const ImGuiViewport* viewport = /*g.NavWindow ? g.NavWindow->Viewport :*/ GetMainViewport();
+    SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(viewport->Size.x * 0.20f, viewport->Size.y * 0.20f), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX));
+    SetNextWindowPos(viewport->GetCenter(), ImGuiCond_Always, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f));
+    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, g.Style.WindowPadding * 2.0f);
+    Begin("###NavWindowingList", NULL, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoInputs | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings);
+    for (int n = g.WindowsFocusOrder.Size - 1; n >= 0; n--)
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* window = g.WindowsFocusOrder[n];
+        IM_ASSERT(window != NULL); // Fix static analyzers
+        if (!IsWindowNavFocusable(window))
+            continue;
+        const char* label = window->Name;
+        if (label == FindRenderedTextEnd(label))
+            label = GetFallbackWindowNameForWindowingList(window);
+        Selectable(label, g.NavWindowingTarget == window);
+    }
+    End();
+    PopStyleVar();
+}
+
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] DRAG AND DROP
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+bool ImGui::IsDragDropActive()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.DragDropActive;
+}
+
+void ImGui::ClearDragDrop()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.DragDropActive = false;
+    g.DragDropPayload.Clear();
+    g.DragDropAcceptFlags = ImGuiDragDropFlags_None;
+    g.DragDropAcceptIdCurr = g.DragDropAcceptIdPrev = 0;
+    g.DragDropAcceptIdCurrRectSurface = FLT_MAX;
+    g.DragDropAcceptFrameCount = -1;
+
+    g.DragDropPayloadBufHeap.clear();
+    memset(&g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal, 0, sizeof(g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal));
+}
+
+// When this returns true you need to: a) call SetDragDropPayload() exactly once, b) you may render the payload visual/description, c) call EndDragDropSource()
+// If the item has an identifier:
+// - This assume/require the item to be activated (typically via ButtonBehavior).
+// - Therefore if you want to use this with a mouse button other than left mouse button, it is up to the item itself to activate with another button.
+// - We then pull and use the mouse button that was used to activate the item and use it to carry on the drag.
+// If the item has no identifier:
+// - Currently always assume left mouse button.
+bool ImGui::BeginDragDropSource(ImGuiDragDropFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+    // FIXME-DRAGDROP: While in the common-most "drag from non-zero active id" case we can tell the mouse button,
+    // in both SourceExtern and id==0 cases we may requires something else (explicit flags or some heuristic).
+    ImGuiMouseButton mouse_button = ImGuiMouseButton_Left;
+
+    bool source_drag_active = false;
+    ImGuiID source_id = 0;
+    ImGuiID source_parent_id = 0;
+    if (!(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceExtern))
+    {
+        source_id = g.LastItemData.ID;
+        if (source_id != 0)
+        {
+            // Common path: items with ID
+            if (g.ActiveId != source_id)
+                return false;
+            if (g.ActiveIdMouseButton != -1)
+                mouse_button = g.ActiveIdMouseButton;
+            if (g.IO.MouseDown[mouse_button] == false || window->SkipItems)
+                return false;
+            g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = false;
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            // Uncommon path: items without ID
+            if (g.IO.MouseDown[mouse_button] == false || window->SkipItems)
+                return false;
+            if ((g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect) == 0 && (g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveIdWindow != window))
+                return false;
+
+            // If you want to use BeginDragDropSource() on an item with no unique identifier for interaction, such as Text() or Image(), you need to:
+            // A) Read the explanation below, B) Use the ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceAllowNullID flag.
+            if (!(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceAllowNullID))
+            {
+                IM_ASSERT(0);
+                return false;
+            }
+
+            // Magic fallback to handle items with no assigned ID, e.g. Text(), Image()
+            // We build a throwaway ID based on current ID stack + relative AABB of items in window.
+            // THE IDENTIFIER WON'T SURVIVE ANY REPOSITIONING/RESIZINGG OF THE WIDGET, so if your widget moves your dragging operation will be canceled.
+            // We don't need to maintain/call ClearActiveID() as releasing the button will early out this function and trigger !ActiveIdIsAlive.
+            // Rely on keeping other window->LastItemXXX fields intact.
+            source_id = g.LastItemData.ID = window->GetIDFromRectangle(g.LastItemData.Rect);
+            KeepAliveID(source_id);
+            bool is_hovered = ItemHoverable(g.LastItemData.Rect, source_id);
+            if (is_hovered && g.IO.MouseClicked[mouse_button])
+            {
+                SetActiveID(source_id, window);
+                FocusWindow(window);
+            }
+            if (g.ActiveId == source_id) // Allow the underlying widget to display/return hovered during the mouse release frame, else we would get a flicker.
+                g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = is_hovered;
+        }
+        if (g.ActiveId != source_id)
+            return false;
+        source_parent_id = window->IDStack.back();
+        source_drag_active = IsMouseDragging(mouse_button);
+
+        // Disable navigation and key inputs while dragging + cancel existing request if any
+        SetActiveIdUsingNavAndKeys();
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        window = NULL;
+        source_id = ImHashStr("#SourceExtern");
+        source_drag_active = true;
+    }
+
+    if (source_drag_active)
+    {
+        if (!g.DragDropActive)
+        {
+            IM_ASSERT(source_id != 0);
+            ClearDragDrop();
+            ImGuiPayload& payload = g.DragDropPayload;
+            payload.SourceId = source_id;
+            payload.SourceParentId = source_parent_id;
+            g.DragDropActive = true;
+            g.DragDropSourceFlags = flags;
+            g.DragDropMouseButton = mouse_button;
+            if (payload.SourceId == g.ActiveId)
+                g.ActiveIdNoClearOnFocusLoss = true;
+        }
+        g.DragDropSourceFrameCount = g.FrameCount;
+        g.DragDropWithinSource = true;
+
+        if (!(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoPreviewTooltip))
+        {
+            // Target can request the Source to not display its tooltip (we use a dedicated flag to make this request explicit)
+            // We unfortunately can't just modify the source flags and skip the call to BeginTooltip, as caller may be emitting contents.
+            BeginTooltip();
+            if (g.DragDropAcceptIdPrev && (g.DragDropAcceptFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoPreviewTooltip))
+            {
+                ImGuiWindow* tooltip_window = g.CurrentWindow;
+                tooltip_window->Hidden = tooltip_window->SkipItems = true;
+                tooltip_window->HiddenFramesCanSkipItems = 1;
+            }
+        }
+
+        if (!(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoDisableHover) && !(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceExtern))
+            g.LastItemData.StatusFlags &= ~ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect;
+
+        return true;
+    }
+    return false;
+}
+
+void ImGui::EndDragDropSource()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropActive);
+    IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropWithinSource && "Not after a BeginDragDropSource()?");
+
+    if (!(g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoPreviewTooltip))
+        EndTooltip();
+
+    // Discard the drag if have not called SetDragDropPayload()
+    if (g.DragDropPayload.DataFrameCount == -1)
+        ClearDragDrop();
+    g.DragDropWithinSource = false;
+}
+
+// Use 'cond' to choose to submit payload on drag start or every frame
+bool ImGui::SetDragDropPayload(const char* type, const void* data, size_t data_size, ImGuiCond cond)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiPayload& payload = g.DragDropPayload;
+    if (cond == 0)
+        cond = ImGuiCond_Always;
+
+    IM_ASSERT(type != NULL);
+    IM_ASSERT(strlen(type) < IM_ARRAYSIZE(payload.DataType) && "Payload type can be at most 32 characters long");
+    IM_ASSERT((data != NULL && data_size > 0) || (data == NULL && data_size == 0));
+    IM_ASSERT(cond == ImGuiCond_Always || cond == ImGuiCond_Once);
+    IM_ASSERT(payload.SourceId != 0);                               // Not called between BeginDragDropSource() and EndDragDropSource()
+
+    if (cond == ImGuiCond_Always || payload.DataFrameCount == -1)
+    {
+        // Copy payload
+        ImStrncpy(payload.DataType, type, IM_ARRAYSIZE(payload.DataType));
+        g.DragDropPayloadBufHeap.resize(0);
+        if (data_size > sizeof(g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal))
+        {
+            // Store in heap
+            g.DragDropPayloadBufHeap.resize((int)data_size);
+            payload.Data = g.DragDropPayloadBufHeap.Data;
+            memcpy(payload.Data, data, data_size);
+        }
+        else if (data_size > 0)
+        {
+            // Store locally
+            memset(&g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal, 0, sizeof(g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal));
+            payload.Data = g.DragDropPayloadBufLocal;
+            memcpy(payload.Data, data, data_size);
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            payload.Data = NULL;
+        }
+        payload.DataSize = (int)data_size;
+    }
+    payload.DataFrameCount = g.FrameCount;
+
+    // Return whether the payload has been accepted
+    return (g.DragDropAcceptFrameCount == g.FrameCount) || (g.DragDropAcceptFrameCount == g.FrameCount - 1);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::BeginDragDropTargetCustom(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (!g.DragDropActive)
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    ImGuiWindow* hovered_window = g.HoveredWindowUnderMovingWindow;
+    if (hovered_window == NULL || window->RootWindowDockTree != hovered_window->RootWindowDockTree)
+        return false;
+    IM_ASSERT(id != 0);
+    if (!IsMouseHoveringRect(bb.Min, bb.Max) || (id == g.DragDropPayload.SourceId))
+        return false;
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropWithinTarget == false);
+    g.DragDropTargetRect = bb;
+    g.DragDropTargetId = id;
+    g.DragDropWithinTarget = true;
+    return true;
+}
+
+// We don't use BeginDragDropTargetCustom() and duplicate its code because:
+// 1) we use LastItemRectHoveredRect which handles items that pushes a temporarily clip rectangle in their code. Calling BeginDragDropTargetCustom(LastItemRect) would not handle them.
+// 2) and it's faster. as this code may be very frequently called, we want to early out as fast as we can.
+// Also note how the HoveredWindow test is positioned differently in both functions (in both functions we optimize for the cheapest early out case)
+bool ImGui::BeginDragDropTarget()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (!g.DragDropActive)
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (!(g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect))
+        return false;
+    ImGuiWindow* hovered_window = g.HoveredWindowUnderMovingWindow;
+    if (hovered_window == NULL || window->RootWindowDockTree != hovered_window->RootWindowDockTree || window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    const ImRect& display_rect = (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDisplayRect) ? g.LastItemData.DisplayRect : g.LastItemData.Rect;
+    ImGuiID id = g.LastItemData.ID;
+    if (id == 0)
+    {
+        id = window->GetIDFromRectangle(display_rect);
+        KeepAliveID(id);
+    }
+    if (g.DragDropPayload.SourceId == id)
+        return false;
+
+    IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropWithinTarget == false);
+    g.DragDropTargetRect = display_rect;
+    g.DragDropTargetId = id;
+    g.DragDropWithinTarget = true;
+    return true;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::IsDragDropPayloadBeingAccepted()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.DragDropActive && g.DragDropAcceptIdPrev != 0;
+}
+
+const ImGuiPayload* ImGui::AcceptDragDropPayload(const char* type, ImGuiDragDropFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    ImGuiPayload& payload = g.DragDropPayload;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropActive);                        // Not called between BeginDragDropTarget() and EndDragDropTarget() ?
+    IM_ASSERT(payload.DataFrameCount != -1);            // Forgot to call EndDragDropTarget() ?
+    if (type != NULL && !payload.IsDataType(type))
+        return NULL;
+
+    // Accept smallest drag target bounding box, this allows us to nest drag targets conveniently without ordering constraints.
+    // NB: We currently accept NULL id as target. However, overlapping targets requires a unique ID to function!
+    const bool was_accepted_previously = (g.DragDropAcceptIdPrev == g.DragDropTargetId);
+    ImRect r = g.DragDropTargetRect;
+    float r_surface = r.GetWidth() * r.GetHeight();
+    if (r_surface <= g.DragDropAcceptIdCurrRectSurface)
+    {
+        g.DragDropAcceptFlags = flags;
+        g.DragDropAcceptIdCurr = g.DragDropTargetId;
+        g.DragDropAcceptIdCurrRectSurface = r_surface;
+    }
+
+    // Render default drop visuals
+    // FIXME-DRAGDROP: Settle on a proper default visuals for drop target.
+    payload.Preview = was_accepted_previously;
+    flags |= (g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoDrawDefaultRect); // Source can also inhibit the preview (useful for external sources that lives for 1 frame)
+    if (!(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoDrawDefaultRect) && payload.Preview)
+        window->DrawList->AddRect(r.Min - ImVec2(3.5f,3.5f), r.Max + ImVec2(3.5f, 3.5f), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_DragDropTarget), 0.0f, 0, 2.0f);
+
+    g.DragDropAcceptFrameCount = g.FrameCount;
+    payload.Delivery = was_accepted_previously && !IsMouseDown(g.DragDropMouseButton); // For extern drag sources affecting os window focus, it's easier to just test !IsMouseDown() instead of IsMouseReleased()
+    if (!payload.Delivery && !(flags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptBeforeDelivery))
+        return NULL;
+
+    return &payload;
+}
+
+const ImGuiPayload* ImGui::GetDragDropPayload()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.DragDropActive ? &g.DragDropPayload : NULL;
+}
+
+// We don't really use/need this now, but added it for the sake of consistency and because we might need it later.
+void ImGui::EndDragDropTarget()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropActive);
+    IM_ASSERT(g.DragDropWithinTarget);
+    g.DragDropWithinTarget = false;
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] LOGGING/CAPTURING
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// All text output from the interface can be captured into tty/file/clipboard.
+// By default, tree nodes are automatically opened during logging.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Pass text data straight to log (without being displayed)
+static inline void LogTextV(ImGuiContext& g, const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+    if (g.LogFile)
+    {
+        g.LogBuffer.Buf.resize(0);
+        g.LogBuffer.appendfv(fmt, args);
+        ImFileWrite(g.LogBuffer.c_str(), sizeof(char), (ImU64)g.LogBuffer.size(), g.LogFile);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        g.LogBuffer.appendfv(fmt, args);
+    }
+}
+
+void ImGui::LogText(const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (!g.LogEnabled)
+        return;
+
+    va_list args;
+    va_start(args, fmt);
+    LogTextV(g, fmt, args);
+    va_end(args);
+}
+
+void ImGui::LogTextV(const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (!g.LogEnabled)
+        return;
+
+    LogTextV(g, fmt, args);
+}
+
+// Internal version that takes a position to decide on newline placement and pad items according to their depth.
+// We split text into individual lines to add current tree level padding
+// FIXME: This code is a little complicated perhaps, considering simplifying the whole system.
+void ImGui::LogRenderedText(const ImVec2* ref_pos, const char* text, const char* text_end)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+    const char* prefix = g.LogNextPrefix;
+    const char* suffix = g.LogNextSuffix;
+    g.LogNextPrefix = g.LogNextSuffix = NULL;
+
+    if (!text_end)
+        text_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(text, text_end);
+
+    const bool log_new_line = ref_pos && (ref_pos->y > g.LogLinePosY + g.Style.FramePadding.y + 1);
+    if (ref_pos)
+        g.LogLinePosY = ref_pos->y;
+    if (log_new_line)
+    {
+        LogText(IM_NEWLINE);
+        g.LogLineFirstItem = true;
+    }
+
+    if (prefix)
+        LogRenderedText(ref_pos, prefix, prefix + strlen(prefix)); // Calculate end ourself to ensure "##" are included here.
+
+    // Re-adjust padding if we have popped out of our starting depth
+    if (g.LogDepthRef > window->DC.TreeDepth)
+        g.LogDepthRef = window->DC.TreeDepth;
+    const int tree_depth = (window->DC.TreeDepth - g.LogDepthRef);
+
+    const char* text_remaining = text;
+    for (;;)
+    {
+        // Split the string. Each new line (after a '\n') is followed by indentation corresponding to the current depth of our log entry.
+        // We don't add a trailing \n yet to allow a subsequent item on the same line to be captured.
+        const char* line_start = text_remaining;
+        const char* line_end = ImStreolRange(line_start, text_end);
+        const bool is_last_line = (line_end == text_end);
+        if (line_start != line_end || !is_last_line)
+        {
+            const int line_length = (int)(line_end - line_start);
+            const int indentation = g.LogLineFirstItem ? tree_depth * 4 : 1;
+            LogText("%*s%.*s", indentation, "", line_length, line_start);
+            g.LogLineFirstItem = false;
+            if (*line_end == '\n')
+            {
+                LogText(IM_NEWLINE);
+                g.LogLineFirstItem = true;
+            }
+        }
+        if (is_last_line)
+            break;
+        text_remaining = line_end + 1;
+    }
+
+    if (suffix)
+        LogRenderedText(ref_pos, suffix, suffix + strlen(suffix));
+}
+
+// Start logging/capturing text output
+void ImGui::LogBegin(ImGuiLogType type, int auto_open_depth)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.LogEnabled == false);
+    IM_ASSERT(g.LogFile == NULL);
+    IM_ASSERT(g.LogBuffer.empty());
+    g.LogEnabled = true;
+    g.LogType = type;
+    g.LogNextPrefix = g.LogNextSuffix = NULL;
+    g.LogDepthRef = window->DC.TreeDepth;
+    g.LogDepthToExpand = ((auto_open_depth >= 0) ? auto_open_depth : g.LogDepthToExpandDefault);
+    g.LogLinePosY = FLT_MAX;
+    g.LogLineFirstItem = true;
+}
+
+// Important: doesn't copy underlying data, use carefully (prefix/suffix must be in scope at the time of the next LogRenderedText)
+void ImGui::LogSetNextTextDecoration(const char* prefix, const char* suffix)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.LogNextPrefix = prefix;
+    g.LogNextSuffix = suffix;
+}
+
+void ImGui::LogToTTY(int auto_open_depth)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.LogEnabled)
+        return;
+    IM_UNUSED(auto_open_depth);
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_TTY_FUNCTIONS
+    LogBegin(ImGuiLogType_TTY, auto_open_depth);
+    g.LogFile = stdout;
+#endif
+}
+
+// Start logging/capturing text output to given file
+void ImGui::LogToFile(int auto_open_depth, const char* filename)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.LogEnabled)
+        return;
+
+    // FIXME: We could probably open the file in text mode "at", however note that clipboard/buffer logging will still
+    // be subject to outputting OS-incompatible carriage return if within strings the user doesn't use IM_NEWLINE.
+    // By opening the file in binary mode "ab" we have consistent output everywhere.
+    if (!filename)
+        filename = g.IO.LogFilename;
+    if (!filename || !filename[0])
+        return;
+    ImFileHandle f = ImFileOpen(filename, "ab");
+    if (!f)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(0);
+        return;
+    }
+
+    LogBegin(ImGuiLogType_File, auto_open_depth);
+    g.LogFile = f;
+}
+
+// Start logging/capturing text output to clipboard
+void ImGui::LogToClipboard(int auto_open_depth)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.LogEnabled)
+        return;
+    LogBegin(ImGuiLogType_Clipboard, auto_open_depth);
+}
+
+void ImGui::LogToBuffer(int auto_open_depth)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.LogEnabled)
+        return;
+    LogBegin(ImGuiLogType_Buffer, auto_open_depth);
+}
+
+void ImGui::LogFinish()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (!g.LogEnabled)
+        return;
+
+    LogText(IM_NEWLINE);
+    switch (g.LogType)
+    {
+    case ImGuiLogType_TTY:
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_TTY_FUNCTIONS
+        fflush(g.LogFile);
+#endif
+        break;
+    case ImGuiLogType_File:
+        ImFileClose(g.LogFile);
+        break;
+    case ImGuiLogType_Buffer:
+        break;
+    case ImGuiLogType_Clipboard:
+        if (!g.LogBuffer.empty())
+            SetClipboardText(g.LogBuffer.begin());
+        break;
+    case ImGuiLogType_None:
+        IM_ASSERT(0);
+        break;
+    }
+
+    g.LogEnabled = false;
+    g.LogType = ImGuiLogType_None;
+    g.LogFile = NULL;
+    g.LogBuffer.clear();
+}
+
+// Helper to display logging buttons
+// FIXME-OBSOLETE: We should probably obsolete this and let the user have their own helper (this is one of the oldest function alive!)
+void ImGui::LogButtons()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    PushID("LogButtons");
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_TTY_FUNCTIONS
+    const bool log_to_tty = Button("Log To TTY"); SameLine();
+#else
+    const bool log_to_tty = false;
+#endif
+    const bool log_to_file = Button("Log To File"); SameLine();
+    const bool log_to_clipboard = Button("Log To Clipboard"); SameLine();
+    PushAllowKeyboardFocus(false);
+    SetNextItemWidth(80.0f);
+    SliderInt("Default Depth", &g.LogDepthToExpandDefault, 0, 9, NULL);
+    PopAllowKeyboardFocus();
+    PopID();
+
+    // Start logging at the end of the function so that the buttons don't appear in the log
+    if (log_to_tty)
+        LogToTTY();
+    if (log_to_file)
+        LogToFile();
+    if (log_to_clipboard)
+        LogToClipboard();
+}
+
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] SETTINGS
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - UpdateSettings() [Internal]
+// - MarkIniSettingsDirty() [Internal]
+// - CreateNewWindowSettings() [Internal]
+// - FindWindowSettings() [Internal]
+// - FindOrCreateWindowSettings() [Internal]
+// - FindSettingsHandler() [Internal]
+// - ClearIniSettings() [Internal]
+// - LoadIniSettingsFromDisk()
+// - LoadIniSettingsFromMemory()
+// - SaveIniSettingsToDisk()
+// - SaveIniSettingsToMemory()
+// - WindowSettingsHandler_***() [Internal]
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Called by NewFrame()
+void ImGui::UpdateSettings()
+{
+    // Load settings on first frame (if not explicitly loaded manually before)
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (!g.SettingsLoaded)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(g.SettingsWindows.empty());
+        if (g.IO.IniFilename)
+            LoadIniSettingsFromDisk(g.IO.IniFilename);
+        g.SettingsLoaded = true;
+    }
+
+    // Save settings (with a delay after the last modification, so we don't spam disk too much)
+    if (g.SettingsDirtyTimer > 0.0f)
+    {
+        g.SettingsDirtyTimer -= g.IO.DeltaTime;
+        if (g.SettingsDirtyTimer <= 0.0f)
+        {
+            if (g.IO.IniFilename != NULL)
+                SaveIniSettingsToDisk(g.IO.IniFilename);
+            else
+                g.IO.WantSaveIniSettings = true;  // Let user know they can call SaveIniSettingsToMemory(). user will need to clear io.WantSaveIniSettings themselves.
+            g.SettingsDirtyTimer = 0.0f;
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+void ImGui::MarkIniSettingsDirty()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.SettingsDirtyTimer <= 0.0f)
+        g.SettingsDirtyTimer = g.IO.IniSavingRate;
+}
+
+void ImGui::MarkIniSettingsDirty(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings))
+        if (g.SettingsDirtyTimer <= 0.0f)
+            g.SettingsDirtyTimer = g.IO.IniSavingRate;
+}
+
+ImGuiWindowSettings* ImGui::CreateNewWindowSettings(const char* name)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+#if !IMGUI_DEBUG_INI_SETTINGS
+    // Skip to the "###" marker if any. We don't skip past to match the behavior of GetID()
+    // Preserve the full string when IMGUI_DEBUG_INI_SETTINGS is set to make .ini inspection easier.
+    if (const char* p = strstr(name, "###"))
+        name = p;
+#endif
+    const size_t name_len = strlen(name);
+
+    // Allocate chunk
+    const size_t chunk_size = sizeof(ImGuiWindowSettings) + name_len + 1;
+    ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = g.SettingsWindows.alloc_chunk(chunk_size);
+    IM_PLACEMENT_NEW(settings) ImGuiWindowSettings();
+    settings->ID = ImHashStr(name, name_len);
+    memcpy(settings->GetName(), name, name_len + 1);   // Store with zero terminator
+
+    return settings;
+}
+
+ImGuiWindowSettings* ImGui::FindWindowSettings(ImGuiID id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    for (ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = g.SettingsWindows.begin(); settings != NULL; settings = g.SettingsWindows.next_chunk(settings))
+        if (settings->ID == id)
+            return settings;
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+ImGuiWindowSettings* ImGui::FindOrCreateWindowSettings(const char* name)
+{
+    if (ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = FindWindowSettings(ImHashStr(name)))
+        return settings;
+    return CreateNewWindowSettings(name);
+}
+
+void ImGui::AddSettingsHandler(const ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(FindSettingsHandler(handler->TypeName) == NULL);
+    g.SettingsHandlers.push_back(*handler);
+}
+
+void ImGui::RemoveSettingsHandler(const char* type_name)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler = FindSettingsHandler(type_name))
+        g.SettingsHandlers.erase(handler);
+}
+
+ImGuiSettingsHandler* ImGui::FindSettingsHandler(const char* type_name)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const ImGuiID type_hash = ImHashStr(type_name);
+    for (int handler_n = 0; handler_n < g.SettingsHandlers.Size; handler_n++)
+        if (g.SettingsHandlers[handler_n].TypeHash == type_hash)
+            return &g.SettingsHandlers[handler_n];
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+void ImGui::ClearIniSettings()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.SettingsIniData.clear();
+    for (int handler_n = 0; handler_n < g.SettingsHandlers.Size; handler_n++)
+        if (g.SettingsHandlers[handler_n].ClearAllFn)
+            g.SettingsHandlers[handler_n].ClearAllFn(&g, &g.SettingsHandlers[handler_n]);
+}
+
+void ImGui::LoadIniSettingsFromDisk(const char* ini_filename)
+{
+    size_t file_data_size = 0;
+    char* file_data = (char*)ImFileLoadToMemory(ini_filename, "rb", &file_data_size);
+    if (!file_data)
+        return;
+    if (file_data_size > 0)
+        LoadIniSettingsFromMemory(file_data, (size_t)file_data_size);
+    IM_FREE(file_data);
+}
+
+// Zero-tolerance, no error reporting, cheap .ini parsing
+void ImGui::LoadIniSettingsFromMemory(const char* ini_data, size_t ini_size)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.Initialized);
+    //IM_ASSERT(!g.WithinFrameScope && "Cannot be called between NewFrame() and EndFrame()");
+    //IM_ASSERT(g.SettingsLoaded == false && g.FrameCount == 0);
+
+    // For user convenience, we allow passing a non zero-terminated string (hence the ini_size parameter).
+    // For our convenience and to make the code simpler, we'll also write zero-terminators within the buffer. So let's create a writable copy..
+    if (ini_size == 0)
+        ini_size = strlen(ini_data);
+    g.SettingsIniData.Buf.resize((int)ini_size + 1);
+    char* const buf = g.SettingsIniData.Buf.Data;
+    char* const buf_end = buf + ini_size;
+    memcpy(buf, ini_data, ini_size);
+    buf_end[0] = 0;
+
+    // Call pre-read handlers
+    // Some types will clear their data (e.g. dock information) some types will allow merge/override (window)
+    for (int handler_n = 0; handler_n < g.SettingsHandlers.Size; handler_n++)
+        if (g.SettingsHandlers[handler_n].ReadInitFn)
+            g.SettingsHandlers[handler_n].ReadInitFn(&g, &g.SettingsHandlers[handler_n]);
+
+    void* entry_data = NULL;
+    ImGuiSettingsHandler* entry_handler = NULL;
+
+    char* line_end = NULL;
+    for (char* line = buf; line < buf_end; line = line_end + 1)
+    {
+        // Skip new lines markers, then find end of the line
+        while (*line == '\n' || *line == '\r')
+            line++;
+        line_end = line;
+        while (line_end < buf_end && *line_end != '\n' && *line_end != '\r')
+            line_end++;
+        line_end[0] = 0;
+        if (line[0] == ';')
+            continue;
+        if (line[0] == '[' && line_end > line && line_end[-1] == ']')
+        {
+            // Parse "[Type][Name]". Note that 'Name' can itself contains [] characters, which is acceptable with the current format and parsing code.
+            line_end[-1] = 0;
+            const char* name_end = line_end - 1;
+            const char* type_start = line + 1;
+            char* type_end = (char*)(void*)ImStrchrRange(type_start, name_end, ']');
+            const char* name_start = type_end ? ImStrchrRange(type_end + 1, name_end, '[') : NULL;
+            if (!type_end || !name_start)
+                continue;
+            *type_end = 0; // Overwrite first ']'
+            name_start++;  // Skip second '['
+            entry_handler = FindSettingsHandler(type_start);
+            entry_data = entry_handler ? entry_handler->ReadOpenFn(&g, entry_handler, name_start) : NULL;
+        }
+        else if (entry_handler != NULL && entry_data != NULL)
+        {
+            // Let type handler parse the line
+            entry_handler->ReadLineFn(&g, entry_handler, entry_data, line);
+        }
+    }
+    g.SettingsLoaded = true;
+
+    // [DEBUG] Restore untouched copy so it can be browsed in Metrics (not strictly necessary)
+    memcpy(buf, ini_data, ini_size);
+
+    // Call post-read handlers
+    for (int handler_n = 0; handler_n < g.SettingsHandlers.Size; handler_n++)
+        if (g.SettingsHandlers[handler_n].ApplyAllFn)
+            g.SettingsHandlers[handler_n].ApplyAllFn(&g, &g.SettingsHandlers[handler_n]);
+}
+
+void ImGui::SaveIniSettingsToDisk(const char* ini_filename)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.SettingsDirtyTimer = 0.0f;
+    if (!ini_filename)
+        return;
+
+    size_t ini_data_size = 0;
+    const char* ini_data = SaveIniSettingsToMemory(&ini_data_size);
+    ImFileHandle f = ImFileOpen(ini_filename, "wt");
+    if (!f)
+        return;
+    ImFileWrite(ini_data, sizeof(char), ini_data_size, f);
+    ImFileClose(f);
+}
+
+// Call registered handlers (e.g. SettingsHandlerWindow_WriteAll() + custom handlers) to write their stuff into a text buffer
+const char* ImGui::SaveIniSettingsToMemory(size_t* out_size)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.SettingsDirtyTimer = 0.0f;
+    g.SettingsIniData.Buf.resize(0);
+    g.SettingsIniData.Buf.push_back(0);
+    for (int handler_n = 0; handler_n < g.SettingsHandlers.Size; handler_n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler = &g.SettingsHandlers[handler_n];
+        handler->WriteAllFn(&g, handler, &g.SettingsIniData);
+    }
+    if (out_size)
+        *out_size = (size_t)g.SettingsIniData.size();
+    return g.SettingsIniData.c_str();
+}
+
+static void WindowSettingsHandler_ClearAll(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler*)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+    for (int i = 0; i != g.Windows.Size; i++)
+        g.Windows[i]->SettingsOffset = -1;
+    g.SettingsWindows.clear();
+}
+
+static void* WindowSettingsHandler_ReadOpen(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*, const char* name)
+{
+    ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = ImGui::FindOrCreateWindowSettings(name);
+    ImGuiID id = settings->ID;
+    *settings = ImGuiWindowSettings(); // Clear existing if recycling previous entry
+    settings->ID = id;
+    settings->WantApply = true;
+    return (void*)settings;
+}
+
+static void WindowSettingsHandler_ReadLine(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*, void* entry, const char* line)
+{
+    ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = (ImGuiWindowSettings*)entry;
+    int x, y;
+    int i;
+    ImU32 u1;
+    if (sscanf(line, "Pos=%i,%i", &x, &y) == 2)             { settings->Pos = ImVec2ih((short)x, (short)y); }
+    else if (sscanf(line, "Size=%i,%i", &x, &y) == 2)       { settings->Size = ImVec2ih((short)x, (short)y); }
+    else if (sscanf(line, "ViewportId=0x%08X", &u1) == 1)   { settings->ViewportId = u1; }
+    else if (sscanf(line, "ViewportPos=%i,%i", &x, &y) == 2){ settings->ViewportPos = ImVec2ih((short)x, (short)y); }
+    else if (sscanf(line, "Collapsed=%d", &i) == 1)         { settings->Collapsed = (i != 0); }
+    else if (sscanf(line, "DockId=0x%X,%d", &u1, &i) == 2)  { settings->DockId = u1; settings->DockOrder = (short)i; }
+    else if (sscanf(line, "DockId=0x%X", &u1) == 1)         { settings->DockId = u1; settings->DockOrder = -1; }
+    else if (sscanf(line, "ClassId=0x%X", &u1) == 1)        { settings->ClassId = u1; }
+}
+
+// Apply to existing windows (if any)
+static void WindowSettingsHandler_ApplyAll(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler*)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+    for (ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = g.SettingsWindows.begin(); settings != NULL; settings = g.SettingsWindows.next_chunk(settings))
+        if (settings->WantApply)
+        {
+            if (ImGuiWindow* window = ImGui::FindWindowByID(settings->ID))
+                ApplyWindowSettings(window, settings);
+            settings->WantApply = false;
+        }
+}
+
+static void WindowSettingsHandler_WriteAll(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler, ImGuiTextBuffer* buf)
+{
+    // Gather data from windows that were active during this session
+    // (if a window wasn't opened in this session we preserve its settings)
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+    for (int i = 0; i != g.Windows.Size; i++)
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[i];
+        if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings)
+            continue;
+
+        ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = (window->SettingsOffset != -1) ? g.SettingsWindows.ptr_from_offset(window->SettingsOffset) : ImGui::FindWindowSettings(window->ID);
+        if (!settings)
+        {
+            settings = ImGui::CreateNewWindowSettings(window->Name);
+            window->SettingsOffset = g.SettingsWindows.offset_from_ptr(settings);
+        }
+        IM_ASSERT(settings->ID == window->ID);
+        settings->Pos = ImVec2ih(window->Pos - window->ViewportPos);
+        settings->Size = ImVec2ih(window->SizeFull);
+        settings->ViewportId = window->ViewportId;
+        settings->ViewportPos = ImVec2ih(window->ViewportPos);
+        IM_ASSERT(window->DockNode == NULL || window->DockNode->ID == window->DockId);
+        settings->DockId = window->DockId;
+        settings->ClassId = window->WindowClass.ClassId;
+        settings->DockOrder = window->DockOrder;
+        settings->Collapsed = window->Collapsed;
+    }
+
+    // Write to text buffer
+    buf->reserve(buf->size() + g.SettingsWindows.size() * 6); // ballpark reserve
+    for (ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = g.SettingsWindows.begin(); settings != NULL; settings = g.SettingsWindows.next_chunk(settings))
+    {
+        const char* settings_name = settings->GetName();
+        buf->appendf("[%s][%s]\n", handler->TypeName, settings_name);
+        if (settings->ViewportId != 0 && settings->ViewportId != ImGui::IMGUI_VIEWPORT_DEFAULT_ID)
+        {
+            buf->appendf("ViewportPos=%d,%d\n", settings->ViewportPos.x, settings->ViewportPos.y);
+            buf->appendf("ViewportId=0x%08X\n", settings->ViewportId);
+        }
+        if (settings->Pos.x != 0 || settings->Pos.y != 0 || settings->ViewportId == ImGui::IMGUI_VIEWPORT_DEFAULT_ID)
+            buf->appendf("Pos=%d,%d\n", settings->Pos.x, settings->Pos.y);
+        if (settings->Size.x != 0 || settings->Size.y != 0)
+            buf->appendf("Size=%d,%d\n", settings->Size.x, settings->Size.y);
+        buf->appendf("Collapsed=%d\n", settings->Collapsed);
+        if (settings->DockId != 0)
+        {
+            //buf->appendf("TabId=0x%08X\n", ImHashStr("#TAB", 4, settings->ID)); // window->TabId: this is not read back but writing it makes "debugging" the .ini data easier.
+            if (settings->DockOrder == -1)
+                buf->appendf("DockId=0x%08X\n", settings->DockId);
+            else
+                buf->appendf("DockId=0x%08X,%d\n", settings->DockId, settings->DockOrder);
+            if (settings->ClassId != 0)
+                buf->appendf("ClassId=0x%08X\n", settings->ClassId);
+        }
+        buf->append("\n");
+    }
+}
+
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] VIEWPORTS, PLATFORM WINDOWS
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - GetMainViewport()
+// - FindViewportByID()
+// - FindViewportByPlatformHandle()
+// - SetCurrentViewport() [Internal]
+// - SetWindowViewport() [Internal]
+// - GetWindowAlwaysWantOwnViewport() [Internal]
+// - UpdateTryMergeWindowIntoHostViewport() [Internal]
+// - UpdateTryMergeWindowIntoHostViewports() [Internal]
+// - TranslateWindowsInViewport() [Internal]
+// - ScaleWindowsInViewport() [Internal]
+// - FindHoveredViewportFromPlatformWindowStack() [Internal]
+// - UpdateViewportsNewFrame() [Internal]
+// - UpdateViewportsEndFrame() [Internal]
+// - AddUpdateViewport() [Internal]
+// - WindowSelectViewport() [Internal]
+// - WindowSyncOwnedViewport() [Internal]
+// - UpdatePlatformWindows()
+// - RenderPlatformWindowsDefault()
+// - FindPlatformMonitorForPos() [Internal]
+// - FindPlatformMonitorForRect() [Internal]
+// - UpdateViewportPlatformMonitor() [Internal]
+// - DestroyPlatformWindow() [Internal]
+// - DestroyPlatformWindows()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+ImGuiViewport* ImGui::GetMainViewport()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.Viewports[0];
+}
+
+// FIXME: This leaks access to viewports not listed in PlatformIO.Viewports[]. Problematic? (#4236)
+ImGuiViewport* ImGui::FindViewportByID(ImGuiID id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    for (int n = 0; n < g.Viewports.Size; n++)
+        if (g.Viewports[n]->ID == id)
+            return g.Viewports[n];
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+ImGuiViewport* ImGui::FindViewportByPlatformHandle(void* platform_handle)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    for (int i = 0; i != g.Viewports.Size; i++)
+        if (g.Viewports[i]->PlatformHandle == platform_handle)
+            return g.Viewports[i];
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetCurrentViewport(ImGuiWindow* current_window, ImGuiViewportP* viewport)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    (void)current_window;
+
+    if (viewport)
+        viewport->LastFrameActive = g.FrameCount;
+    if (g.CurrentViewport == viewport)
+        return;
+    g.CurrentDpiScale = viewport ? viewport->DpiScale : 1.0f;
+    g.CurrentViewport = viewport;
+    //IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_VIEWPORT("[viewport] SetCurrentViewport changed '%s' 0x%08X\n", current_window ? current_window->Name : NULL, viewport ? viewport->ID : 0);
+
+    // Notify platform layer of viewport changes
+    // FIXME-DPI: This is only currently used for experimenting with handling of multiple DPI
+    if (g.CurrentViewport && g.PlatformIO.Platform_OnChangedViewport)
+        g.PlatformIO.Platform_OnChangedViewport(g.CurrentViewport);
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetWindowViewport(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiViewportP* viewport)
+{
+    // Abandon viewport
+    if (window->ViewportOwned && window->Viewport->Window == window)
+        window->Viewport->Size = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+
+    window->Viewport = viewport;
+    window->ViewportId = viewport->ID;
+    window->ViewportOwned = (viewport->Window == window);
+}
+
+static bool ImGui::GetWindowAlwaysWantOwnViewport(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    // Tooltips and menus are not automatically forced into their own viewport when the NoMerge flag is set, however the multiplication of viewports makes them more likely to protrude and create their own.
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.IO.ConfigViewportsNoAutoMerge || (window->WindowClass.ViewportFlagsOverrideSet & ImGuiViewportFlags_NoAutoMerge))
+        if (g.ConfigFlagsCurrFrame & ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable)
+            if (!window->DockIsActive)
+                if ((window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow | ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu | ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)) == 0)
+                    if ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) == 0 || (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal) != 0)
+                        return true;
+    return false;
+}
+
+static bool ImGui::UpdateTryMergeWindowIntoHostViewport(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiViewportP* viewport)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (window->Viewport == viewport)
+        return false;
+    if ((viewport->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_CanHostOtherWindows) == 0)
+        return false;
+    if ((viewport->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_Minimized) != 0)
+        return false;
+    if (!viewport->GetMainRect().Contains(window->Rect()))
+        return false;
+    if (GetWindowAlwaysWantOwnViewport(window))
+        return false;
+
+    // FIXME: Can't use g.WindowsFocusOrder[] for root windows only as we care about Z order. If we maintained a DisplayOrder along with FocusOrder we could..
+    for (int n = 0; n < g.Windows.Size; n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* window_behind = g.Windows[n];
+        if (window_behind == window)
+            break;
+        if (window_behind->WasActive && window_behind->ViewportOwned && !(window_behind->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow))
+            if (window_behind->Viewport->GetMainRect().Overlaps(window->Rect()))
+                return false;
+    }
+
+    // Move to the existing viewport, Move child/hosted windows as well (FIXME-OPT: iterate child)
+    ImGuiViewportP* old_viewport = window->Viewport;
+    if (window->ViewportOwned)
+        for (int n = 0; n < g.Windows.Size; n++)
+            if (g.Windows[n]->Viewport == old_viewport)
+                SetWindowViewport(g.Windows[n], viewport);
+    SetWindowViewport(window, viewport);
+    BringWindowToDisplayFront(window);
+
+    return true;
+}
+
+// FIXME: handle 0 to N host viewports
+static bool ImGui::UpdateTryMergeWindowIntoHostViewports(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return UpdateTryMergeWindowIntoHostViewport(window, g.Viewports[0]);
+}
+
+// Translate Dear ImGui windows when a Host Viewport has been moved
+// (This additionally keeps windows at the same place when ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable is toggled!)
+void ImGui::TranslateWindowsInViewport(ImGuiViewportP* viewport, const ImVec2& old_pos, const ImVec2& new_pos)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(viewport->Window == NULL && (viewport->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_CanHostOtherWindows));
+
+    // 1) We test if ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable was just toggled, which allows us to conveniently
+    // translate imgui windows from OS-window-local to absolute coordinates or vice-versa.
+    // 2) If it's not going to fit into the new size, keep it at same absolute position.
+    // One problem with this is that most Win32 applications doesn't update their render while dragging,
+    // and so the window will appear to teleport when releasing the mouse.
+    const bool translate_all_windows = (g.ConfigFlagsCurrFrame & ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable) != (g.ConfigFlagsLastFrame & ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable);
+    ImRect test_still_fit_rect(old_pos, old_pos + viewport->Size);
+    ImVec2 delta_pos = new_pos - old_pos;
+    for (int window_n = 0; window_n < g.Windows.Size; window_n++) // FIXME-OPT
+        if (translate_all_windows || (g.Windows[window_n]->Viewport == viewport && test_still_fit_rect.Contains(g.Windows[window_n]->Rect())))
+            TranslateWindow(g.Windows[window_n], delta_pos);
+}
+
+// Scale all windows (position, size). Use when e.g. changing DPI. (This is a lossy operation!)
+void ImGui::ScaleWindowsInViewport(ImGuiViewportP* viewport, float scale)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (viewport->Window)
+    {
+        ScaleWindow(viewport->Window, scale);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        for (int i = 0; i != g.Windows.Size; i++)
+            if (g.Windows[i]->Viewport == viewport)
+                ScaleWindow(g.Windows[i], scale);
+    }
+}
+
+// If the backend doesn't set MouseLastHoveredViewport or doesn't honor ImGuiViewportFlags_NoInputs, we do a search ourselves.
+// A) It won't take account of the possibility that non-imgui windows may be in-between our dragged window and our target window.
+// B) It requires Platform_GetWindowFocus to be implemented by backend.
+ImGuiViewportP* ImGui::FindHoveredViewportFromPlatformWindowStack(const ImVec2& mouse_platform_pos)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiViewportP* best_candidate = NULL;
+    for (int n = 0; n < g.Viewports.Size; n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiViewportP* viewport = g.Viewports[n];
+        if (!(viewport->Flags & (ImGuiViewportFlags_NoInputs | ImGuiViewportFlags_Minimized)) && viewport->GetMainRect().Contains(mouse_platform_pos))
+            if (best_candidate == NULL || best_candidate->LastFrontMostStampCount < viewport->LastFrontMostStampCount)
+                best_candidate = viewport;
+    }
+    return best_candidate;
+}
+
+// Update viewports and monitor infos
+// Note that this is running even if 'ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable' is not set, in order to clear unused viewports (if any) and update monitor info.
+static void ImGui::UpdateViewportsNewFrame()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.PlatformIO.Viewports.Size <= g.Viewports.Size);
+
+    // Update Minimized status (we need it first in order to decide if we'll apply Pos/Size of the main viewport)
+    const bool viewports_enabled = (g.ConfigFlagsCurrFrame & ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable) != 0;
+    if (viewports_enabled)
+    {
+        for (int n = 0; n < g.Viewports.Size; n++)
+        {
+            ImGuiViewportP* viewport = g.Viewports[n];
+            const bool platform_funcs_available = viewport->PlatformWindowCreated;
+            if (g.PlatformIO.Platform_GetWindowMinimized && platform_funcs_available)
+            {
+                bool minimized = g.PlatformIO.Platform_GetWindowMinimized(viewport);
+                if (minimized)
+                    viewport->Flags |= ImGuiViewportFlags_Minimized;
+                else
+                    viewport->Flags &= ~ImGuiViewportFlags_Minimized;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Create/update main viewport with current platform position.
+    // FIXME-VIEWPORT: Size is driven by backend/user code for backward-compatibility but we should aim to make this more consistent.
+    ImGuiViewportP* main_viewport = g.Viewports[0];
+    IM_ASSERT(main_viewport->ID == IMGUI_VIEWPORT_DEFAULT_ID);
+    IM_ASSERT(main_viewport->Window == NULL);
+    ImVec2 main_viewport_pos = viewports_enabled ? g.PlatformIO.Platform_GetWindowPos(main_viewport) : ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+    ImVec2 main_viewport_size = g.IO.DisplaySize;
+    if (viewports_enabled && (main_viewport->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_Minimized))
+    {
+        main_viewport_pos = main_viewport->Pos;    // Preserve last pos/size when minimized (FIXME: We don't do the same for Size outside of the viewport path)
+        main_viewport_size = main_viewport->Size;
+    }
+    AddUpdateViewport(NULL, IMGUI_VIEWPORT_DEFAULT_ID, main_viewport_pos, main_viewport_size, ImGuiViewportFlags_OwnedByApp | ImGuiViewportFlags_CanHostOtherWindows);
+
+    g.CurrentDpiScale = 0.0f;
+    g.CurrentViewport = NULL;
+    g.MouseViewport = NULL;
+    for (int n = 0; n < g.Viewports.Size; n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiViewportP* viewport = g.Viewports[n];
+        viewport->Idx = n;
+
+        // Erase unused viewports
+        if (n > 0 && viewport->LastFrameActive < g.FrameCount - 2)
+        {
+            DestroyViewport(viewport);
+            n--;
+            continue;
+        }
+
+        const bool platform_funcs_available = viewport->PlatformWindowCreated;
+        if (viewports_enabled)
+        {
+            // Update Position and Size (from Platform Window to ImGui) if requested.
+            // We do it early in the frame instead of waiting for UpdatePlatformWindows() to avoid a frame of lag when moving/resizing using OS facilities.
+            if (!(viewport->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_Minimized) && platform_funcs_available)
+            {
+                // Viewport->WorkPos and WorkSize will be updated below
+                if (viewport->PlatformRequestMove)
+                    viewport->Pos = viewport->LastPlatformPos = g.PlatformIO.Platform_GetWindowPos(viewport);
+                if (viewport->PlatformRequestResize)
+                    viewport->Size = viewport->LastPlatformSize = g.PlatformIO.Platform_GetWindowSize(viewport);
+            }
+        }
+
+        // Update/copy monitor info
+        UpdateViewportPlatformMonitor(viewport);
+
+        // Lock down space taken by menu bars and status bars, reset the offset for functions like BeginMainMenuBar() to alter them again.
+        viewport->WorkOffsetMin = viewport->BuildWorkOffsetMin;
+        viewport->WorkOffsetMax = viewport->BuildWorkOffsetMax;
+        viewport->BuildWorkOffsetMin = viewport->BuildWorkOffsetMax = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+        viewport->UpdateWorkRect();
+
+        // Reset alpha every frame. Users of transparency (docking) needs to request a lower alpha back.
+        viewport->Alpha = 1.0f;
+
+        // Translate Dear ImGui windows when a Host Viewport has been moved
+        // (This additionally keeps windows at the same place when ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable is toggled!)
+        const ImVec2 viewport_delta_pos = viewport->Pos - viewport->LastPos;
+        if ((viewport->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_CanHostOtherWindows) && (viewport_delta_pos.x != 0.0f || viewport_delta_pos.y != 0.0f))
+            TranslateWindowsInViewport(viewport, viewport->LastPos, viewport->Pos);
+
+        // Update DPI scale
+        float new_dpi_scale;
+        if (g.PlatformIO.Platform_GetWindowDpiScale && platform_funcs_available)
+            new_dpi_scale = g.PlatformIO.Platform_GetWindowDpiScale(viewport);
+        else if (viewport->PlatformMonitor != -1)
+            new_dpi_scale = g.PlatformIO.Monitors[viewport->PlatformMonitor].DpiScale;
+        else
+            new_dpi_scale = (viewport->DpiScale != 0.0f) ? viewport->DpiScale : 1.0f;
+        if (viewport->DpiScale != 0.0f && new_dpi_scale != viewport->DpiScale)
+        {
+            float scale_factor = new_dpi_scale / viewport->DpiScale;
+            if (g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_DpiEnableScaleViewports)
+                ScaleWindowsInViewport(viewport, scale_factor);
+            //if (viewport == GetMainViewport())
+            //    g.PlatformInterface.SetWindowSize(viewport, viewport->Size * scale_factor);
+
+            // Scale our window moving pivot so that the window will rescale roughly around the mouse position.
+            // FIXME-VIEWPORT: This currently creates a resizing feedback loop when a window is straddling a DPI transition border.
+            // (Minor: since our sizes do not perfectly linearly scale, deferring the click offset scale until we know the actual window scale ratio may get us slightly more precise mouse positioning.)
+            //if (g.MovingWindow != NULL && g.MovingWindow->Viewport == viewport)
+            //    g.ActiveIdClickOffset = ImFloor(g.ActiveIdClickOffset * scale_factor);
+        }
+        viewport->DpiScale = new_dpi_scale;
+    }
+
+    // Update fallback monitor
+    if (g.PlatformIO.Monitors.Size == 0)
+    {
+        ImGuiPlatformMonitor* monitor = &g.FallbackMonitor;
+        monitor->MainPos = main_viewport->Pos;
+        monitor->MainSize = main_viewport->Size;
+        monitor->WorkPos = main_viewport->WorkPos;
+        monitor->WorkSize = main_viewport->WorkSize;
+        monitor->DpiScale = main_viewport->DpiScale;
+    }
+
+    if (!viewports_enabled)
+    {
+        g.MouseViewport = main_viewport;
+        return;
+    }
+
+    // Mouse handling: decide on the actual mouse viewport for this frame between the active/focused viewport and the hovered viewport.
+    // Note that 'viewport_hovered' should skip over any viewport that has the ImGuiViewportFlags_NoInputs flags set.
+    ImGuiViewportP* viewport_hovered = NULL;
+    if (g.IO.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseHoveredViewport)
+    {
+        viewport_hovered = g.IO.MouseHoveredViewport ? (ImGuiViewportP*)FindViewportByID(g.IO.MouseHoveredViewport) : NULL;
+        if (viewport_hovered && (viewport_hovered->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_NoInputs))
+            viewport_hovered = FindHoveredViewportFromPlatformWindowStack(g.IO.MousePos); // Backend failed to handle _NoInputs viewport: revert to our fallback.
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // If the backend doesn't know how to honor ImGuiViewportFlags_NoInputs, we do a search ourselves. Note that this search:
+        // A) won't take account of the possibility that non-imgui windows may be in-between our dragged window and our target window.
+        // B) won't take account of how the backend apply parent<>child relationship to secondary viewports, which affects their Z order.
+        // C) uses LastFrameAsRefViewport as a flawed replacement for the last time a window was focused (we could/should fix that by introducing Focus functions in PlatformIO)
+        viewport_hovered = FindHoveredViewportFromPlatformWindowStack(g.IO.MousePos);
+    }
+    if (viewport_hovered != NULL)
+        g.MouseLastHoveredViewport = viewport_hovered;
+    else if (g.MouseLastHoveredViewport == NULL)
+        g.MouseLastHoveredViewport = g.Viewports[0];
+
+    // Update mouse reference viewport
+    // (when moving a window we aim at its viewport, but this will be overwritten below if we go in drag and drop mode)
+    // (MovingViewport->Viewport will be NULL in the rare situation where the window disappared while moving, set UpdateMouseMovingWindowNewFrame() for details)
+    if (g.MovingWindow && g.MovingWindow->Viewport)
+        g.MouseViewport = g.MovingWindow->Viewport;
+    else
+        g.MouseViewport = g.MouseLastHoveredViewport;
+
+    // When dragging something, always refer to the last hovered viewport.
+    // - when releasing a moving window we will revert to aiming behind (at viewport_hovered)
+    // - when we are between viewports, our dragged preview will tend to show in the last viewport _even_ if we don't have tooltips in their viewports (when lacking monitor info)
+    // - consider the case of holding on a menu item to browse child menus: even thou a mouse button is held, there's no active id because menu items only react on mouse release.
+    // FIXME-VIEWPORT: This is essentially broken, when ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseHoveredViewport is set we want to trust when viewport_hovered==NULL and use that.
+    const bool is_mouse_dragging_with_an_expected_destination = g.DragDropActive;
+    if (is_mouse_dragging_with_an_expected_destination && viewport_hovered == NULL)
+        viewport_hovered = g.MouseLastHoveredViewport;
+    if (is_mouse_dragging_with_an_expected_destination || g.ActiveId == 0 || !IsAnyMouseDown())
+        if (viewport_hovered != NULL && viewport_hovered != g.MouseViewport && !(viewport_hovered->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_NoInputs))
+            g.MouseViewport = viewport_hovered;
+
+    IM_ASSERT(g.MouseViewport != NULL);
+}
+
+// Update user-facing viewport list (g.Viewports -> g.PlatformIO.Viewports after filtering out some)
+static void ImGui::UpdateViewportsEndFrame()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.PlatformIO.Viewports.resize(0);
+    for (int i = 0; i < g.Viewports.Size; i++)
+    {
+        ImGuiViewportP* viewport = g.Viewports[i];
+        viewport->LastPos = viewport->Pos;
+        if (viewport->LastFrameActive < g.FrameCount || viewport->Size.x <= 0.0f || viewport->Size.y <= 0.0f)
+            if (i > 0) // Always include main viewport in the list
+                continue;
+        if (viewport->Window && !IsWindowActiveAndVisible(viewport->Window))
+            continue;
+        if (i > 0)
+            IM_ASSERT(viewport->Window != NULL);
+        g.PlatformIO.Viewports.push_back(viewport);
+    }
+    g.Viewports[0]->ClearRequestFlags(); // Clear main viewport flags because UpdatePlatformWindows() won't do it and may not even be called
+}
+
+// FIXME: We should ideally refactor the system to call this every frame (we currently don't)
+ImGuiViewportP* ImGui::AddUpdateViewport(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& pos, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiViewportFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(id != 0);
+
+    flags |= ImGuiViewportFlags_IsPlatformWindow;
+    if (window != NULL)
+    {
+        if (g.MovingWindow && g.MovingWindow->RootWindowDockTree == window)
+            flags |= ImGuiViewportFlags_NoInputs | ImGuiViewportFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing;
+        if ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs) && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs))
+            flags |= ImGuiViewportFlags_NoInputs;
+        if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing)
+            flags |= ImGuiViewportFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing;
+    }
+
+    ImGuiViewportP* viewport = (ImGuiViewportP*)FindViewportByID(id);
+    if (viewport)
+    {
+        // Always update for main viewport as we are already pulling correct platform pos/size (see #4900)
+        if (!viewport->PlatformRequestMove || viewport->ID == IMGUI_VIEWPORT_DEFAULT_ID)
+            viewport->Pos = pos;
+        if (!viewport->PlatformRequestResize || viewport->ID == IMGUI_VIEWPORT_DEFAULT_ID)
+            viewport->Size = size;
+        viewport->Flags = flags | (viewport->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_Minimized); // Preserve existing flags
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // New viewport
+        viewport = IM_NEW(ImGuiViewportP)();
+        viewport->ID = id;
+        viewport->Idx = g.Viewports.Size;
+        viewport->Pos = viewport->LastPos = pos;
+        viewport->Size = size;
+        viewport->Flags = flags;
+        UpdateViewportPlatformMonitor(viewport);
+        g.Viewports.push_back(viewport);
+        IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_VIEWPORT("[viewport] Add Viewport %08X '%s'\n", id, window ? window->Name : "<NULL>");
+
+        // We normally setup for all viewports in NewFrame() but here need to handle the mid-frame creation of a new viewport.
+        // We need to extend the fullscreen clip rect so the OverlayDrawList clip is correct for that the first frame
+        g.DrawListSharedData.ClipRectFullscreen.x = ImMin(g.DrawListSharedData.ClipRectFullscreen.x, viewport->Pos.x);
+        g.DrawListSharedData.ClipRectFullscreen.y = ImMin(g.DrawListSharedData.ClipRectFullscreen.y, viewport->Pos.y);
+        g.DrawListSharedData.ClipRectFullscreen.z = ImMax(g.DrawListSharedData.ClipRectFullscreen.z, viewport->Pos.x + viewport->Size.x);
+        g.DrawListSharedData.ClipRectFullscreen.w = ImMax(g.DrawListSharedData.ClipRectFullscreen.w, viewport->Pos.y + viewport->Size.y);
+
+        // Store initial DpiScale before the OS platform window creation, based on expected monitor data.
+        // This is so we can select an appropriate font size on the first frame of our window lifetime
+        if (viewport->PlatformMonitor != -1)
+            viewport->DpiScale = g.PlatformIO.Monitors[viewport->PlatformMonitor].DpiScale;
+    }
+
+    viewport->Window = window;
+    viewport->LastFrameActive = g.FrameCount;
+    viewport->UpdateWorkRect();
+    IM_ASSERT(window == NULL || viewport->ID == window->ID);
+
+    if (window != NULL)
+        window->ViewportOwned = true;
+
+    return viewport;
+}
+
+static void ImGui::DestroyViewport(ImGuiViewportP* viewport)
+{
+    // Clear references to this viewport in windows (window->ViewportId becomes the master data)
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    for (int window_n = 0; window_n < g.Windows.Size; window_n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[window_n];
+        if (window->Viewport != viewport)
+            continue;
+        window->Viewport = NULL;
+        window->ViewportOwned = false;
+    }
+    if (viewport == g.MouseLastHoveredViewport)
+        g.MouseLastHoveredViewport = NULL;
+
+    // Destroy
+    IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_VIEWPORT("[viewport] Delete Viewport %08X '%s'\n", viewport->ID, viewport->Window ? viewport->Window->Name : "n/a");
+    DestroyPlatformWindow(viewport); // In most circumstances the platform window will already be destroyed here.
+    IM_ASSERT(g.PlatformIO.Viewports.contains(viewport) == false);
+    IM_ASSERT(g.Viewports[viewport->Idx] == viewport);
+    g.Viewports.erase(g.Viewports.Data + viewport->Idx);
+    IM_DELETE(viewport);
+}
+
+// FIXME-VIEWPORT: This is all super messy and ought to be clarified or rewritten.
+static void ImGui::WindowSelectViewport(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindowFlags flags = window->Flags;
+    window->ViewportAllowPlatformMonitorExtend = -1;
+
+    // Restore main viewport if multi-viewport is not supported by the backend
+    ImGuiViewportP* main_viewport = (ImGuiViewportP*)(void*)GetMainViewport();
+    if (!(g.ConfigFlagsCurrFrame & ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable))
+    {
+        SetWindowViewport(window, main_viewport);
+        return;
+    }
+    window->ViewportOwned = false;
+
+    // Appearing popups reset their viewport so they can inherit again
+    if ((flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)) && window->Appearing)
+    {
+        window->Viewport = NULL;
+        window->ViewportId = 0;
+    }
+
+    if ((g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasViewport) == 0)
+    {
+        // By default inherit from parent window
+        if (window->Viewport == NULL && window->ParentWindow && (!window->ParentWindow->IsFallbackWindow || window->ParentWindow->WasActive))
+            window->Viewport = window->ParentWindow->Viewport;
+
+        // Attempt to restore saved viewport id (= window that hasn't been activated yet), try to restore the viewport based on saved 'window->ViewportPos' restored from .ini file
+        if (window->Viewport == NULL && window->ViewportId != 0)
+        {
+            window->Viewport = (ImGuiViewportP*)FindViewportByID(window->ViewportId);
+            if (window->Viewport == NULL && window->ViewportPos.x != FLT_MAX && window->ViewportPos.y != FLT_MAX)
+                window->Viewport = AddUpdateViewport(window, window->ID, window->ViewportPos, window->Size, ImGuiViewportFlags_None);
+        }
+    }
+
+    bool lock_viewport = false;
+    if (g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasViewport)
+    {
+        // Code explicitly request a viewport
+        window->Viewport = (ImGuiViewportP*)FindViewportByID(g.NextWindowData.ViewportId);
+        window->ViewportId = g.NextWindowData.ViewportId; // Store ID even if Viewport isn't resolved yet.
+        lock_viewport = true;
+    }
+    else if ((flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) || (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
+    {
+        // Always inherit viewport from parent window
+        if (window->DockNode && window->DockNode->HostWindow)
+            IM_ASSERT(window->DockNode->HostWindow->Viewport == window->ParentWindow->Viewport);
+        window->Viewport = window->ParentWindow->Viewport;
+    }
+    else if (window->DockNode && window->DockNode->HostWindow)
+    {
+        // This covers the "always inherit viewport from parent window" case for when a window reattach to a node that was just created mid-frame
+        window->Viewport = window->DockNode->HostWindow->Viewport;
+    }
+    else if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)
+    {
+        window->Viewport = g.MouseViewport;
+    }
+    else if (GetWindowAlwaysWantOwnViewport(window))
+    {
+        window->Viewport = AddUpdateViewport(window, window->ID, window->Pos, window->Size, ImGuiViewportFlags_None);
+    }
+    else if (g.MovingWindow && g.MovingWindow->RootWindowDockTree == window && IsMousePosValid())
+    {
+        if (window->Viewport != NULL && window->Viewport->Window == window)
+            window->Viewport = AddUpdateViewport(window, window->ID, window->Pos, window->Size, ImGuiViewportFlags_None);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Merge into host viewport?
+        // We cannot test window->ViewportOwned as it set lower in the function.
+        // Testing (g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap) to avoid merging during a short-term widget interaction. Main intent was to avoid during resize (see #4212)
+        bool try_to_merge_into_host_viewport = (window->Viewport && window == window->Viewport->Window && (g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap));
+        if (try_to_merge_into_host_viewport)
+            UpdateTryMergeWindowIntoHostViewports(window);
+    }
+
+    // Fallback: merge in default viewport if z-order matches, otherwise create a new viewport
+    if (window->Viewport == NULL)
+        if (!UpdateTryMergeWindowIntoHostViewport(window, main_viewport))
+            window->Viewport = AddUpdateViewport(window, window->ID, window->Pos, window->Size, ImGuiViewportFlags_None);
+
+    // Mark window as allowed to protrude outside of its viewport and into the current monitor
+    if (!lock_viewport)
+    {
+        if (flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup))
+        {
+            // We need to take account of the possibility that mouse may become invalid.
+            // Popups/Tooltip always set ViewportAllowPlatformMonitorExtend so GetWindowAllowedExtentRect() will return full monitor bounds.
+            ImVec2 mouse_ref = (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip) ? g.IO.MousePos : g.BeginPopupStack.back().OpenMousePos;
+            bool use_mouse_ref = (g.NavDisableHighlight || !g.NavDisableMouseHover || !g.NavWindow);
+            bool mouse_valid = IsMousePosValid(&mouse_ref);
+            if ((window->Appearing || (flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip | ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))) && (!use_mouse_ref || mouse_valid))
+                window->ViewportAllowPlatformMonitorExtend = FindPlatformMonitorForPos((use_mouse_ref && mouse_valid) ? mouse_ref : NavCalcPreferredRefPos());
+            else
+                window->ViewportAllowPlatformMonitorExtend = window->Viewport->PlatformMonitor;
+        }
+        else if (window->Viewport && window != window->Viewport->Window && window->Viewport->Window && !(flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && window->DockNode == NULL)
+        {
+            // When called from Begin() we don't have access to a proper version of the Hidden flag yet, so we replicate this code.
+            const bool will_be_visible = (window->DockIsActive && !window->DockTabIsVisible) ? false : true;
+            if ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_DockNodeHost) && window->Viewport->LastFrameActive < g.FrameCount && will_be_visible)
+            {
+                // Steal/transfer ownership
+                IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_VIEWPORT("[viewport] Window '%s' steal Viewport %08X from Window '%s'\n", window->Name, window->Viewport->ID, window->Viewport->Window->Name);
+                window->Viewport->Window = window;
+                window->Viewport->ID = window->ID;
+                window->Viewport->LastNameHash = 0;
+            }
+            else if (!UpdateTryMergeWindowIntoHostViewports(window)) // Merge?
+            {
+                // New viewport
+                window->Viewport = AddUpdateViewport(window, window->ID, window->Pos, window->Size, ImGuiViewportFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing);
+            }
+        }
+        else if (window->ViewportAllowPlatformMonitorExtend < 0 && (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) == 0)
+        {
+            // Regular (non-child, non-popup) windows by default are also allowed to protrude
+            // Child windows are kept contained within their parent.
+            window->ViewportAllowPlatformMonitorExtend = window->Viewport->PlatformMonitor;
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Update flags
+    window->ViewportOwned = (window == window->Viewport->Window);
+    window->ViewportId = window->Viewport->ID;
+
+    // If the OS window has a title bar, hide our imgui title bar
+    //if (window->ViewportOwned && !(window->Viewport->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_NoDecoration))
+    //    window->Flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar;
+}
+
+void ImGui::WindowSyncOwnedViewport(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiWindow* parent_window_in_stack)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    bool viewport_rect_changed = false;
+
+    // Synchronize window --> viewport in most situations
+    // Synchronize viewport -> window in case the platform window has been moved or resized from the OS/WM
+    if (window->Viewport->PlatformRequestMove)
+    {
+        window->Pos = window->Viewport->Pos;
+        MarkIniSettingsDirty(window);
+    }
+    else if (memcmp(&window->Viewport->Pos, &window->Pos, sizeof(window->Pos)) != 0)
+    {
+        viewport_rect_changed = true;
+        window->Viewport->Pos = window->Pos;
+    }
+
+    if (window->Viewport->PlatformRequestResize)
+    {
+        window->Size = window->SizeFull = window->Viewport->Size;
+        MarkIniSettingsDirty(window);
+    }
+    else if (memcmp(&window->Viewport->Size, &window->Size, sizeof(window->Size)) != 0)
+    {
+        viewport_rect_changed = true;
+        window->Viewport->Size = window->Size;
+    }
+    window->Viewport->UpdateWorkRect();
+
+    // The viewport may have changed monitor since the global update in UpdateViewportsNewFrame()
+    // Either a SetNextWindowPos() call in the current frame or a SetWindowPos() call in the previous frame may have this effect.
+    if (viewport_rect_changed)
+        UpdateViewportPlatformMonitor(window->Viewport);
+
+    // Update common viewport flags
+    const ImGuiViewportFlags viewport_flags_to_clear = ImGuiViewportFlags_TopMost | ImGuiViewportFlags_NoTaskBarIcon | ImGuiViewportFlags_NoDecoration | ImGuiViewportFlags_NoRendererClear;
+    ImGuiViewportFlags viewport_flags = window->Viewport->Flags & ~viewport_flags_to_clear;
+    ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = window->Flags;
+    const bool is_modal = (window_flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal) != 0;
+    const bool is_short_lived_floating_window = (window_flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu | ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup)) != 0;
+    if (window_flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)
+        viewport_flags |= ImGuiViewportFlags_TopMost;
+    if ((g.IO.ConfigViewportsNoTaskBarIcon || is_short_lived_floating_window) && !is_modal)
+        viewport_flags |= ImGuiViewportFlags_NoTaskBarIcon;
+    if (g.IO.ConfigViewportsNoDecoration || is_short_lived_floating_window)
+        viewport_flags |= ImGuiViewportFlags_NoDecoration;
+
+    // Not correct to set modal as topmost because:
+    // - Because other popups can be stacked above a modal (e.g. combo box in a modal)
+    // - ImGuiViewportFlags_TopMost is currently handled different in backends: in Win32 it is "appear top most" whereas in GLFW and SDL it is "stay topmost"
+    //if (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)
+    //    viewport_flags |= ImGuiViewportFlags_TopMost;
+
+    // For popups and menus that may be protruding out of their parent viewport, we enable _NoFocusOnClick so that clicking on them
+    // won't steal the OS focus away from their parent window (which may be reflected in OS the title bar decoration).
+    // Setting _NoFocusOnClick would technically prevent us from bringing back to front in case they are being covered by an OS window from a different app,
+    // but it shouldn't be much of a problem considering those are already popups that are closed when clicking elsewhere.
+    if (is_short_lived_floating_window && !is_modal)
+        viewport_flags |= ImGuiViewportFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing | ImGuiViewportFlags_NoFocusOnClick;
+
+    // We can overwrite viewport flags using ImGuiWindowClass (advanced users)
+    if (window->WindowClass.ViewportFlagsOverrideSet)
+        viewport_flags |= window->WindowClass.ViewportFlagsOverrideSet;
+    if (window->WindowClass.ViewportFlagsOverrideClear)
+        viewport_flags &= ~window->WindowClass.ViewportFlagsOverrideClear;
+
+    // We can also tell the backend that clearing the platform window won't be necessary,
+    // as our window background is filling the viewport and we have disabled BgAlpha.
+    // FIXME: Work on support for per-viewport transparency (#2766)
+    if (!(window_flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground))
+        viewport_flags |= ImGuiViewportFlags_NoRendererClear;
+
+    window->Viewport->Flags = viewport_flags;
+
+    // Update parent viewport ID
+    // (the !IsFallbackWindow test mimic the one done in WindowSelectViewport())
+    if (window->WindowClass.ParentViewportId != (ImGuiID)-1)
+        window->Viewport->ParentViewportId = window->WindowClass.ParentViewportId;
+    else if ((window_flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)) && parent_window_in_stack && (!parent_window_in_stack->IsFallbackWindow || parent_window_in_stack->WasActive))
+        window->Viewport->ParentViewportId = parent_window_in_stack->Viewport->ID;
+    else
+        window->Viewport->ParentViewportId = g.IO.ConfigViewportsNoDefaultParent ? 0 : IMGUI_VIEWPORT_DEFAULT_ID;
+}
+
+// Called by user at the end of the main loop, after EndFrame()
+// This will handle the creation/update of all OS windows via function defined in the ImGuiPlatformIO api.
+void ImGui::UpdatePlatformWindows()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.FrameCountEnded == g.FrameCount && "Forgot to call Render() or EndFrame() before UpdatePlatformWindows()?");
+    IM_ASSERT(g.FrameCountPlatformEnded < g.FrameCount);
+    g.FrameCountPlatformEnded = g.FrameCount;
+    if (!(g.ConfigFlagsCurrFrame & ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable))
+        return;
+
+    // Create/resize/destroy platform windows to match each active viewport.
+    // Skip the main viewport (index 0), which is always fully handled by the application!
+    for (int i = 1; i < g.Viewports.Size; i++)
+    {
+        ImGuiViewportP* viewport = g.Viewports[i];
+
+        // Destroy platform window if the viewport hasn't been submitted or if it is hosting a hidden window
+        // (the implicit/fallback Debug##Default window will be registering its viewport then be disabled, causing a dummy DestroyPlatformWindow to be made each frame)
+        bool destroy_platform_window = false;
+        destroy_platform_window |= (viewport->LastFrameActive < g.FrameCount - 1);
+        destroy_platform_window |= (viewport->Window && !IsWindowActiveAndVisible(viewport->Window));
+        if (destroy_platform_window)
+        {
+            DestroyPlatformWindow(viewport);
+            continue;
+        }
+
+        // New windows that appears directly in a new viewport won't always have a size on their first frame
+        if (viewport->LastFrameActive < g.FrameCount || viewport->Size.x <= 0 || viewport->Size.y <= 0)
+            continue;
+
+        // Create window
+        bool is_new_platform_window = (viewport->PlatformWindowCreated == false);
+        if (is_new_platform_window)
+        {
+            IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_VIEWPORT("[viewport] Create Platform Window %08X '%s'\n", viewport->ID, viewport->Window ? viewport->Window->Name : "n/a");
+            g.PlatformIO.Platform_CreateWindow(viewport);
+            if (g.PlatformIO.Renderer_CreateWindow != NULL)
+                g.PlatformIO.Renderer_CreateWindow(viewport);
+            viewport->LastNameHash = 0;
+            viewport->LastPlatformPos = viewport->LastPlatformSize = ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX); // By clearing those we'll enforce a call to Platform_SetWindowPos/Size below, before Platform_ShowWindow (FIXME: Is that necessary?)
+            viewport->LastRendererSize = viewport->Size;                                       // We don't need to call Renderer_SetWindowSize() as it is expected Renderer_CreateWindow() already did it.
+            viewport->PlatformWindowCreated = true;
+        }
+
+        // Apply Position and Size (from ImGui to Platform/Renderer backends)
+        if ((viewport->LastPlatformPos.x != viewport->Pos.x || viewport->LastPlatformPos.y != viewport->Pos.y) && !viewport->PlatformRequestMove)
+            g.PlatformIO.Platform_SetWindowPos(viewport, viewport->Pos);
+        if ((viewport->LastPlatformSize.x != viewport->Size.x || viewport->LastPlatformSize.y != viewport->Size.y) && !viewport->PlatformRequestResize)
+            g.PlatformIO.Platform_SetWindowSize(viewport, viewport->Size);
+        if ((viewport->LastRendererSize.x != viewport->Size.x || viewport->LastRendererSize.y != viewport->Size.y) && g.PlatformIO.Renderer_SetWindowSize)
+            g.PlatformIO.Renderer_SetWindowSize(viewport, viewport->Size);
+        viewport->LastPlatformPos = viewport->Pos;
+        viewport->LastPlatformSize = viewport->LastRendererSize = viewport->Size;
+
+        // Update title bar (if it changed)
+        if (ImGuiWindow* window_for_title = GetWindowForTitleDisplay(viewport->Window))
+        {
+            const char* title_begin = window_for_title->Name;
+            char* title_end = (char*)(intptr_t)FindRenderedTextEnd(title_begin);
+            const ImGuiID title_hash = ImHashStr(title_begin, title_end - title_begin);
+            if (viewport->LastNameHash != title_hash)
+            {
+                char title_end_backup_c = *title_end;
+                *title_end = 0; // Cut existing buffer short instead of doing an alloc/free, no small gain.
+                g.PlatformIO.Platform_SetWindowTitle(viewport, title_begin);
+                *title_end = title_end_backup_c;
+                viewport->LastNameHash = title_hash;
+            }
+        }
+
+        // Update alpha (if it changed)
+        if (viewport->LastAlpha != viewport->Alpha && g.PlatformIO.Platform_SetWindowAlpha)
+            g.PlatformIO.Platform_SetWindowAlpha(viewport, viewport->Alpha);
+        viewport->LastAlpha = viewport->Alpha;
+
+        // Optional, general purpose call to allow the backend to perform general book-keeping even if things haven't changed.
+        if (g.PlatformIO.Platform_UpdateWindow)
+            g.PlatformIO.Platform_UpdateWindow(viewport);
+
+        if (is_new_platform_window)
+        {
+            // On startup ensure new platform window don't steal focus (give it a few frames, as nested contents may lead to viewport being created a few frames late)
+            if (g.FrameCount < 3)
+                viewport->Flags |= ImGuiViewportFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing;
+
+            // Show window
+            g.PlatformIO.Platform_ShowWindow(viewport);
+
+            // Even without focus, we assume the window becomes front-most.
+            // This is useful for our platform z-order heuristic when io.MouseHoveredViewport is not available.
+            if (viewport->LastFrontMostStampCount != g.ViewportFrontMostStampCount)
+                viewport->LastFrontMostStampCount = ++g.ViewportFrontMostStampCount;
+            }
+
+        // Clear request flags
+        viewport->ClearRequestFlags();
+    }
+
+    // Update our implicit z-order knowledge of platform windows, which is used when the backend cannot provide io.MouseHoveredViewport.
+    // When setting Platform_GetWindowFocus, it is expected that the platform backend can handle calls without crashing if it doesn't have data stored.
+    // FIXME-VIEWPORT: We should use this information to also set dear imgui-side focus, allowing us to handle os-level alt+tab.
+    if (g.PlatformIO.Platform_GetWindowFocus != NULL)
+    {
+        ImGuiViewportP* focused_viewport = NULL;
+        for (int n = 0; n < g.Viewports.Size && focused_viewport == NULL; n++)
+        {
+            ImGuiViewportP* viewport = g.Viewports[n];
+            if (viewport->PlatformWindowCreated)
+                if (g.PlatformIO.Platform_GetWindowFocus(viewport))
+                    focused_viewport = viewport;
+        }
+
+        // Store a tag so we can infer z-order easily from all our windows
+        // We compare PlatformLastFocusedViewportId so newly created viewports with _NoFocusOnAppearing flag
+        // will keep the front most stamp instead of losing it back to their parent viewport.
+        if (focused_viewport && g.PlatformLastFocusedViewportId != focused_viewport->ID)
+        {
+            if (focused_viewport->LastFrontMostStampCount != g.ViewportFrontMostStampCount)
+                focused_viewport->LastFrontMostStampCount = ++g.ViewportFrontMostStampCount;
+            g.PlatformLastFocusedViewportId = focused_viewport->ID;
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+// This is a default/basic function for performing the rendering/swap of multiple Platform Windows.
+// Custom renderers may prefer to not call this function at all, and instead iterate the publicly exposed platform data and handle rendering/sync themselves.
+// The Render/Swap functions stored in ImGuiPlatformIO are merely here to allow for this helper to exist, but you can do it yourself:
+//
+//    ImGuiPlatformIO& platform_io = ImGui::GetPlatformIO();
+//    for (int i = 1; i < platform_io.Viewports.Size; i++)
+//        if ((platform_io.Viewports[i]->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_Minimized) == 0)
+//            MyRenderFunction(platform_io.Viewports[i], my_args);
+//    for (int i = 1; i < platform_io.Viewports.Size; i++)
+//        if ((platform_io.Viewports[i]->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_Minimized) == 0)
+//            MySwapBufferFunction(platform_io.Viewports[i], my_args);
+//
+void ImGui::RenderPlatformWindowsDefault(void* platform_render_arg, void* renderer_render_arg)
+{
+    // Skip the main viewport (index 0), which is always fully handled by the application!
+    ImGuiPlatformIO& platform_io = ImGui::GetPlatformIO();
+    for (int i = 1; i < platform_io.Viewports.Size; i++)
+    {
+        ImGuiViewport* viewport = platform_io.Viewports[i];
+        if (viewport->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_Minimized)
+            continue;
+        if (platform_io.Platform_RenderWindow) platform_io.Platform_RenderWindow(viewport, platform_render_arg);
+        if (platform_io.Renderer_RenderWindow) platform_io.Renderer_RenderWindow(viewport, renderer_render_arg);
+    }
+    for (int i = 1; i < platform_io.Viewports.Size; i++)
+    {
+        ImGuiViewport* viewport = platform_io.Viewports[i];
+        if (viewport->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_Minimized)
+            continue;
+        if (platform_io.Platform_SwapBuffers) platform_io.Platform_SwapBuffers(viewport, platform_render_arg);
+        if (platform_io.Renderer_SwapBuffers) platform_io.Renderer_SwapBuffers(viewport, renderer_render_arg);
+    }
+}
+
+static int ImGui::FindPlatformMonitorForPos(const ImVec2& pos)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    for (int monitor_n = 0; monitor_n < g.PlatformIO.Monitors.Size; monitor_n++)
+    {
+        const ImGuiPlatformMonitor& monitor = g.PlatformIO.Monitors[monitor_n];
+        if (ImRect(monitor.MainPos, monitor.MainPos + monitor.MainSize).Contains(pos))
+            return monitor_n;
+    }
+    return -1;
+}
+
+// Search for the monitor with the largest intersection area with the given rectangle
+// We generally try to avoid searching loops but the monitor count should be very small here
+// FIXME-OPT: We could test the last monitor used for that viewport first, and early
+static int ImGui::FindPlatformMonitorForRect(const ImRect& rect)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    const int monitor_count = g.PlatformIO.Monitors.Size;
+    if (monitor_count <= 1)
+        return monitor_count - 1;
+
+    // Use a minimum threshold of 1.0f so a zero-sized rect won't false positive, and will still find the correct monitor given its position.
+    // This is necessary for tooltips which always resize down to zero at first.
+    const float surface_threshold = ImMax(rect.GetWidth() * rect.GetHeight() * 0.5f, 1.0f);
+    int best_monitor_n = -1;
+    float best_monitor_surface = 0.001f;
+
+    for (int monitor_n = 0; monitor_n < g.PlatformIO.Monitors.Size && best_monitor_surface < surface_threshold; monitor_n++)
+    {
+        const ImGuiPlatformMonitor& monitor = g.PlatformIO.Monitors[monitor_n];
+        const ImRect monitor_rect = ImRect(monitor.MainPos, monitor.MainPos + monitor.MainSize);
+        if (monitor_rect.Contains(rect))
+            return monitor_n;
+        ImRect overlapping_rect = rect;
+        overlapping_rect.ClipWithFull(monitor_rect);
+        float overlapping_surface = overlapping_rect.GetWidth() * overlapping_rect.GetHeight();
+        if (overlapping_surface < best_monitor_surface)
+            continue;
+        best_monitor_surface = overlapping_surface;
+        best_monitor_n = monitor_n;
+    }
+    return best_monitor_n;
+}
+
+// Update monitor from viewport rectangle (we'll use this info to clamp windows and save windows lost in a removed monitor)
+static void ImGui::UpdateViewportPlatformMonitor(ImGuiViewportP* viewport)
+{
+    viewport->PlatformMonitor = (short)FindPlatformMonitorForRect(viewport->GetMainRect());
+}
+
+// Return value is always != NULL, but don't hold on it across frames.
+const ImGuiPlatformMonitor* ImGui::GetViewportPlatformMonitor(ImGuiViewport* viewport_p)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiViewportP* viewport = (ImGuiViewportP*)(void*)viewport_p;
+    int monitor_idx = viewport->PlatformMonitor;
+    if (monitor_idx >= 0 && monitor_idx < g.PlatformIO.Monitors.Size)
+        return &g.PlatformIO.Monitors[monitor_idx];
+    return &g.FallbackMonitor;
+}
+
+void ImGui::DestroyPlatformWindow(ImGuiViewportP* viewport)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (viewport->PlatformWindowCreated)
+    {
+        if (g.PlatformIO.Renderer_DestroyWindow)
+            g.PlatformIO.Renderer_DestroyWindow(viewport);
+        if (g.PlatformIO.Platform_DestroyWindow)
+            g.PlatformIO.Platform_DestroyWindow(viewport);
+        IM_ASSERT(viewport->RendererUserData == NULL && viewport->PlatformUserData == NULL);
+
+        // Don't clear PlatformWindowCreated for the main viewport, as we initially set that up to true in Initialize()
+        // The righter way may be to leave it to the backend to set this flag all-together, and made the flag public.
+        if (viewport->ID != IMGUI_VIEWPORT_DEFAULT_ID)
+            viewport->PlatformWindowCreated = false;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(viewport->RendererUserData == NULL && viewport->PlatformUserData == NULL && viewport->PlatformHandle == NULL);
+    }
+    viewport->RendererUserData = viewport->PlatformUserData = viewport->PlatformHandle = NULL;
+    viewport->ClearRequestFlags();
+}
+
+void ImGui::DestroyPlatformWindows()
+{
+    // We call the destroy window on every viewport (including the main viewport, index 0) to give a chance to the backend
+    // to clear any data they may have stored in e.g. PlatformUserData, RendererUserData.
+    // It is convenient for the platform backend code to store something in the main viewport, in order for e.g. the mouse handling
+    // code to operator a consistent manner.
+    // It is expected that the backend can handle calls to Renderer_DestroyWindow/Platform_DestroyWindow without
+    // crashing if it doesn't have data stored.
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    for (int i = 0; i < g.Viewports.Size; i++)
+        DestroyPlatformWindow(g.Viewports[i]);
+}
+
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] DOCKING
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Docking: Internal Types
+// Docking: Forward Declarations
+// Docking: ImGuiDockContext
+// Docking: ImGuiDockContext Docking/Undocking functions
+// Docking: ImGuiDockNode
+// Docking: ImGuiDockNode Tree manipulation functions
+// Docking: Public Functions (SetWindowDock, DockSpace, DockSpaceOverViewport)
+// Docking: Builder Functions
+// Docking: Begin/End Support Functions (called from Begin/End)
+// Docking: Settings
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Typical Docking call flow: (root level is generally public API):
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - NewFrame()                               new dear imgui frame
+//    | DockContextNewFrameUpdateUndocking()  - process queued undocking requests
+//    | - DockContextProcessUndockWindow()    - process one window undocking request
+//    | - DockContextProcessUndockNode()      - process one whole node undocking request
+//    | DockContextNewFrameUpdateUndocking()  - process queue docking requests, create floating dock nodes
+//    | - update g.HoveredDockNode            - [debug] update node hovered by mouse
+//    | - DockContextProcessDock()            - process one docking request
+//    | - DockNodeUpdate()
+//    |   - DockNodeUpdateForRootNode()
+//    |     - DockNodeUpdateFlagsAndCollapse()
+//    |     - DockNodeFindInfo()
+//    |   - destroy unused node or tab bar
+//    |   - create dock node host window
+//    |      - Begin() etc.
+//    |   - DockNodeStartMouseMovingWindow()
+//    |   - DockNodeTreeUpdatePosSize()
+//    |   - DockNodeTreeUpdateSplitter()
+//    |   - draw node background
+//    |   - DockNodeUpdateTabBar()            - create/update tab bar for a docking node
+//    |     - DockNodeAddTabBar()
+//    |     - DockNodeUpdateWindowMenu()
+//    |     - DockNodeCalcTabBarLayout()
+//    |     - BeginTabBarEx()
+//    |     - TabItemEx() calls
+//    |     - EndTabBar()
+//    |   - BeginDockableDragDropTarget()
+//    |      - DockNodeUpdate()               - recurse into child nodes...
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - DockSpace()                              user submit a dockspace into a window
+//    | Begin(Child)                          - create a child window
+//    | DockNodeUpdate()                      - call main dock node update function
+//    | End(Child)
+//    | ItemSize()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - Begin()
+//    | BeginDocked()
+//    | BeginDockableDragDropSource()
+//    | BeginDockableDragDropTarget()
+//    | - DockNodePreviewDockRender()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - EndFrame()
+//    | DockContextEndFrame()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Docking: Internal Types
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - ImGuiDockRequestType
+// - ImGuiDockRequest
+// - ImGuiDockPreviewData
+// - ImGuiDockNodeSettings
+// - ImGuiDockContext
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+enum ImGuiDockRequestType
+{
+    ImGuiDockRequestType_None = 0,
+    ImGuiDockRequestType_Dock,
+    ImGuiDockRequestType_Undock,
+    ImGuiDockRequestType_Split                  // Split is the same as Dock but without a DockPayload
+};
+
+struct ImGuiDockRequest
+{
+    ImGuiDockRequestType    Type;
+    ImGuiWindow*            DockTargetWindow;   // Destination/Target Window to dock into (may be a loose window or a DockNode, might be NULL in which case DockTargetNode cannot be NULL)
+    ImGuiDockNode*          DockTargetNode;     // Destination/Target Node to dock into
+    ImGuiWindow*            DockPayload;        // Source/Payload window to dock (may be a loose window or a DockNode), [Optional]
+    ImGuiDir                DockSplitDir;
+    float                   DockSplitRatio;
+    bool                    DockSplitOuter;
+    ImGuiWindow*            UndockTargetWindow;
+    ImGuiDockNode*          UndockTargetNode;
+
+    ImGuiDockRequest()
+    {
+        Type = ImGuiDockRequestType_None;
+        DockTargetWindow = DockPayload = UndockTargetWindow = NULL;
+        DockTargetNode = UndockTargetNode = NULL;
+        DockSplitDir = ImGuiDir_None;
+        DockSplitRatio = 0.5f;
+        DockSplitOuter = false;
+    }
+};
+
+struct ImGuiDockPreviewData
+{
+    ImGuiDockNode   FutureNode;
+    bool            IsDropAllowed;
+    bool            IsCenterAvailable;
+    bool            IsSidesAvailable;           // Hold your breath, grammar freaks..
+    bool            IsSplitDirExplicit;         // Set when hovered the drop rect (vs. implicit SplitDir==None when hovered the window)
+    ImGuiDockNode*  SplitNode;
+    ImGuiDir        SplitDir;
+    float           SplitRatio;
+    ImRect          DropRectsDraw[ImGuiDir_COUNT + 1];  // May be slightly different from hit-testing drop rects used in DockNodeCalcDropRects()
+
+    ImGuiDockPreviewData() : FutureNode(0) { IsDropAllowed = IsCenterAvailable = IsSidesAvailable = IsSplitDirExplicit = false; SplitNode = NULL; SplitDir = ImGuiDir_None; SplitRatio = 0.f; for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(DropRectsDraw); n++) DropRectsDraw[n] = ImRect(+FLT_MAX, +FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX); }
+};
+
+// Persistent Settings data, stored contiguously in SettingsNodes (sizeof() ~32 bytes)
+struct ImGuiDockNodeSettings
+{
+    ImGuiID             ID;
+    ImGuiID             ParentNodeId;
+    ImGuiID             ParentWindowId;
+    ImGuiID             SelectedTabId;
+    signed char         SplitAxis;
+    char                Depth;
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags  Flags;                  // NB: We save individual flags one by one in ascii format (ImGuiDockNodeFlags_SavedFlagsMask_)
+    ImVec2ih            Pos;
+    ImVec2ih            Size;
+    ImVec2ih            SizeRef;
+    ImGuiDockNodeSettings() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); SplitAxis = ImGuiAxis_None; }
+};
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Docking: Forward Declarations
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+namespace ImGui
+{
+    // ImGuiDockContext
+    static ImGuiDockNode*   DockContextAddNode(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiID id);
+    static void             DockContextRemoveNode(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiDockNode* node, bool merge_sibling_into_parent_node);
+    static void             DockContextQueueNotifyRemovedNode(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiDockNode* node);
+    static void             DockContextProcessDock(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiDockRequest* req);
+    static void             DockContextProcessUndockWindow(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiWindow* window, bool clear_persistent_docking_ref = true);
+    static void             DockContextProcessUndockNode(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiDockNode* node);
+    static void             DockContextPruneUnusedSettingsNodes(ImGuiContext* ctx);
+    static ImGuiDockNode*   DockContextFindNodeByID(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiID id);
+    static ImGuiDockNode*   DockContextBindNodeToWindow(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiWindow* window);
+    static void             DockContextBuildNodesFromSettings(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiDockNodeSettings* node_settings_array, int node_settings_count);
+    static void             DockContextBuildAddWindowsToNodes(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiID root_id);                            // Use root_id==0 to add all
+
+    // ImGuiDockNode
+    static void             DockNodeAddWindow(ImGuiDockNode* node, ImGuiWindow* window, bool add_to_tab_bar);
+    static void             DockNodeMoveWindows(ImGuiDockNode* dst_node, ImGuiDockNode* src_node);
+    static void             DockNodeMoveChildNodes(ImGuiDockNode* dst_node, ImGuiDockNode* src_node);
+    static ImGuiWindow*     DockNodeFindWindowByID(ImGuiDockNode* node, ImGuiID id);
+    static void             DockNodeApplyPosSizeToWindows(ImGuiDockNode* node);
+    static void             DockNodeRemoveWindow(ImGuiDockNode* node, ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiID save_dock_id);
+    static void             DockNodeHideHostWindow(ImGuiDockNode* node);
+    static void             DockNodeUpdate(ImGuiDockNode* node);
+    static void             DockNodeUpdateForRootNode(ImGuiDockNode* node);
+    static void             DockNodeUpdateFlagsAndCollapse(ImGuiDockNode* node);
+    static void             DockNodeUpdateHasCentralNodeChild(ImGuiDockNode* node);
+    static void             DockNodeUpdateTabBar(ImGuiDockNode* node, ImGuiWindow* host_window);
+    static void             DockNodeAddTabBar(ImGuiDockNode* node);
+    static void             DockNodeRemoveTabBar(ImGuiDockNode* node);
+    static ImGuiID          DockNodeUpdateWindowMenu(ImGuiDockNode* node, ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar);
+    static void             DockNodeUpdateVisibleFlag(ImGuiDockNode* node);
+    static void             DockNodeStartMouseMovingWindow(ImGuiDockNode* node, ImGuiWindow* window);
+    static bool             DockNodeIsDropAllowed(ImGuiWindow* host_window, ImGuiWindow* payload_window);
+    static void             DockNodePreviewDockSetup(ImGuiWindow* host_window, ImGuiDockNode* host_node, ImGuiWindow* payload_window, ImGuiDockPreviewData* preview_data, bool is_explicit_target, bool is_outer_docking);
+    static void             DockNodePreviewDockRender(ImGuiWindow* host_window, ImGuiDockNode* host_node, ImGuiWindow* payload_window, const ImGuiDockPreviewData* preview_data);
+    static void             DockNodeCalcTabBarLayout(const ImGuiDockNode* node, ImRect* out_title_rect, ImRect* out_tab_bar_rect, ImVec2* out_window_menu_button_pos, ImVec2* out_close_button_pos);
+    static void             DockNodeCalcSplitRects(ImVec2& pos_old, ImVec2& size_old, ImVec2& pos_new, ImVec2& size_new, ImGuiDir dir, ImVec2 size_new_desired);
+    static bool             DockNodeCalcDropRectsAndTestMousePos(const ImRect& parent, ImGuiDir dir, ImRect& out_draw, bool outer_docking, ImVec2* test_mouse_pos);
+    static const char*      DockNodeGetHostWindowTitle(ImGuiDockNode* node, char* buf, int buf_size) { ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, "##DockNode_%02X", node->ID); return buf; }
+    static int              DockNodeGetTabOrder(ImGuiWindow* window);
+
+    // ImGuiDockNode tree manipulations
+    static void             DockNodeTreeSplit(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiDockNode* parent_node, ImGuiAxis split_axis, int split_first_child, float split_ratio, ImGuiDockNode* new_node);
+    static void             DockNodeTreeMerge(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiDockNode* parent_node, ImGuiDockNode* merge_lead_child);
+    static void             DockNodeTreeUpdatePosSize(ImGuiDockNode* node, ImVec2 pos, ImVec2 size, ImGuiDockNode* only_write_to_single_node = NULL);
+    static void             DockNodeTreeUpdateSplitter(ImGuiDockNode* node);
+    static ImGuiDockNode*   DockNodeTreeFindVisibleNodeByPos(ImGuiDockNode* node, ImVec2 pos);
+    static ImGuiDockNode*   DockNodeTreeFindFallbackLeafNode(ImGuiDockNode* node);
+
+    // Settings
+    static void             DockSettingsRenameNodeReferences(ImGuiID old_node_id, ImGuiID new_node_id);
+    static void             DockSettingsRemoveNodeReferences(ImGuiID* node_ids, int node_ids_count);
+    static ImGuiDockNodeSettings*   DockSettingsFindNodeSettings(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiID node_id);
+    static void             DockSettingsHandler_ClearAll(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*);
+    static void             DockSettingsHandler_ApplyAll(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*);
+    static void*            DockSettingsHandler_ReadOpen(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*, const char* name);
+    static void             DockSettingsHandler_ReadLine(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*, void* entry, const char* line);
+    static void             DockSettingsHandler_WriteAll(ImGuiContext* imgui_ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler, ImGuiTextBuffer* buf);
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Docking: ImGuiDockContext
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// The lifetime model is different from the one of regular windows: we always create a ImGuiDockNode for each ImGuiDockNodeSettings,
+// or we always hold the entire docking node tree. Nodes are frequently hidden, e.g. if the window(s) or child nodes they host are not active.
+// At boot time only, we run a simple GC to remove nodes that have no references.
+// Because dock node settings (which are small, contiguous structures) are always mirrored by their corresponding dock nodes (more complete structures),
+// we can also very easily recreate the nodes from scratch given the settings data (this is what DockContextRebuild() does).
+// This is convenient as docking reconfiguration can be implemented by mostly poking at the simpler settings data.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - DockContextInitialize()
+// - DockContextShutdown()
+// - DockContextClearNodes()
+// - DockContextRebuildNodes()
+// - DockContextNewFrameUpdateUndocking()
+// - DockContextNewFrameUpdateDocking()
+// - DockContextEndFrame()
+// - DockContextFindNodeByID()
+// - DockContextBindNodeToWindow()
+// - DockContextGenNodeID()
+// - DockContextAddNode()
+// - DockContextRemoveNode()
+// - ImGuiDockContextPruneNodeData
+// - DockContextPruneUnusedSettingsNodes()
+// - DockContextBuildNodesFromSettings()
+// - DockContextBuildAddWindowsToNodes()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+void ImGui::DockContextInitialize(ImGuiContext* ctx)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+
+    // Add .ini handle for persistent docking data
+    ImGuiSettingsHandler ini_handler;
+    ini_handler.TypeName = "Docking";
+    ini_handler.TypeHash = ImHashStr("Docking");
+    ini_handler.ClearAllFn = DockSettingsHandler_ClearAll;
+    ini_handler.ReadInitFn = DockSettingsHandler_ClearAll; // Also clear on read
+    ini_handler.ReadOpenFn = DockSettingsHandler_ReadOpen;
+    ini_handler.ReadLineFn = DockSettingsHandler_ReadLine;
+    ini_handler.ApplyAllFn = DockSettingsHandler_ApplyAll;
+    ini_handler.WriteAllFn = DockSettingsHandler_WriteAll;
+    g.SettingsHandlers.push_back(ini_handler);
+}
+
+void ImGui::DockContextShutdown(ImGuiContext* ctx)
+{
+    ImGuiDockContext* dc  = &ctx->DockContext;
+    for (int n = 0; n < dc->Nodes.Data.Size; n++)
+        if (ImGuiDockNode* node = (ImGuiDockNode*)dc->Nodes.Data[n].val_p)
+            IM_DELETE(node);
+}
+
+void ImGui::DockContextClearNodes(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiID root_id, bool clear_settings_refs)
+{
+    IM_UNUSED(ctx);
+    IM_ASSERT(ctx == GImGui);
+    DockBuilderRemoveNodeDockedWindows(root_id, clear_settings_refs);
+    DockBuilderRemoveNodeChildNodes(root_id);
+}
+
+// [DEBUG] This function also acts as a defacto test to make sure we can rebuild from scratch without a glitch
+// (Different from DockSettingsHandler_ClearAll() + DockSettingsHandler_ApplyAll() because this reuses current settings!)
+void ImGui::DockContextRebuildNodes(ImGuiContext* ctx)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+    ImGuiDockContext* dc = &ctx->DockContext;
+    IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_DOCKING("[docking] DockContextRebuildNodes\n");
+    SaveIniSettingsToMemory();
+    ImGuiID root_id = 0; // Rebuild all
+    DockContextClearNodes(ctx, root_id, false);
+    DockContextBuildNodesFromSettings(ctx, dc->NodesSettings.Data, dc->NodesSettings.Size);
+    DockContextBuildAddWindowsToNodes(ctx, root_id);
+}
+
+// Docking context update function, called by NewFrame()
+void ImGui::DockContextNewFrameUpdateUndocking(ImGuiContext* ctx)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+    ImGuiDockContext* dc = &ctx->DockContext;
+    if (!(g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_DockingEnable))
+    {
+        if (dc->Nodes.Data.Size > 0 || dc->Requests.Size > 0)
+            DockContextClearNodes(ctx, 0, true);
+        return;
+    }
+
+    // Setting NoSplit at runtime merges all nodes
+    if (g.IO.ConfigDockingNoSplit)
+        for (int n = 0; n < dc->Nodes.Data.Size; n++)
+            if (ImGuiDockNode* node = (ImGuiDockNode*)dc->Nodes.Data[n].val_p)
+                if (node->IsRootNode() && node->IsSplitNode())
+                {
+                    DockBuilderRemoveNodeChildNodes(node->ID);
+                    //dc->WantFullRebuild = true;
+                }
+
+    // Process full rebuild
+#if 0
+    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGui::GetKeyIndex(ImGuiKey_C)))
+        dc->WantFullRebuild = true;
+#endif
+    if (dc->WantFullRebuild)
+    {
+        DockContextRebuildNodes(ctx);
+        dc->WantFullRebuild = false;
+    }
+
+    // Process Undocking requests (we need to process them _before_ the UpdateMouseMovingWindowNewFrame call in NewFrame)
+    for (int n = 0; n < dc->Requests.Size; n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiDockRequest* req = &dc->Requests[n];
+        if (req->Type == ImGuiDockRequestType_Undock && req->UndockTargetWindow)
+            DockContextProcessUndockWindow(ctx, req->UndockTargetWindow);
+        else if (req->Type == ImGuiDockRequestType_Undock && req->UndockTargetNode)
+            DockContextProcessUndockNode(ctx, req->UndockTargetNode);
+    }
+}
+
+// Docking context update function, called by NewFrame()
+void ImGui::DockContextNewFrameUpdateDocking(ImGuiContext* ctx)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+    ImGuiDockContext* dc  = &ctx->DockContext;
+    if (!(g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_DockingEnable))
+        return;
+
+    // [DEBUG] Store hovered dock node.
+    // We could in theory use DockNodeTreeFindVisibleNodeByPos() on the root host dock node, but using ->DockNode is a good shortcut.
+    // Note this is mostly a debug thing and isn't actually used for docking target, because docking involve more detailed filtering.
+    g.HoveredDockNode = NULL;
+    if (ImGuiWindow* hovered_window = g.HoveredWindowUnderMovingWindow)
+    {
+        if (hovered_window->DockNodeAsHost)
+            g.HoveredDockNode = DockNodeTreeFindVisibleNodeByPos(hovered_window->DockNodeAsHost, g.IO.MousePos);
+        else if (hovered_window->RootWindow->DockNode)
+            g.HoveredDockNode = hovered_window->RootWindow->DockNode;
+    }
+
+    // Process Docking requests
+    for (int n = 0; n < dc->Requests.Size; n++)
+        if (dc->Requests[n].Type == ImGuiDockRequestType_Dock)
+            DockContextProcessDock(ctx, &dc->Requests[n]);
+    dc->Requests.resize(0);
+
+    // Create windows for each automatic docking nodes
+    // We can have NULL pointers when we delete nodes, but because ID are recycled this should amortize nicely (and our node count will never be very high)
+    for (int n = 0; n < dc->Nodes.Data.Size; n++)
+        if (ImGuiDockNode* node = (ImGuiDockNode*)dc->Nodes.Data[n].val_p)
+            if (node->IsFloatingNode())
+                DockNodeUpdate(node);
+}
+
+void ImGui::DockContextEndFrame(ImGuiContext* ctx)
+{
+    // Draw backgrounds of node missing their window
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+    ImGuiDockContext* dc = &g.DockContext;
+    for (int n = 0; n < dc->Nodes.Data.Size; n++)
+        if (ImGuiDockNode* node = (ImGuiDockNode*)dc->Nodes.Data[n].val_p)
+            if (node->LastFrameActive == g.FrameCount && node->IsVisible && node->HostWindow && node->IsLeafNode() && !node->IsBgDrawnThisFrame)
+            {
+                ImRect bg_rect(node->Pos + ImVec2(0.0f, GetFrameHeight()), node->Pos + node->Size);
+                ImDrawFlags bg_rounding_flags = CalcRoundingFlagsForRectInRect(bg_rect, node->HostWindow->Rect(), DOCKING_SPLITTER_SIZE);
+                node->HostWindow->DrawList->ChannelsSetCurrent(0);
+                node->HostWindow->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bg_rect.Min, bg_rect.Max, node->LastBgColor, node->HostWindow->WindowRounding, bg_rounding_flags);
+            }
+}
+
+static ImGuiDockNode* ImGui::DockContextFindNodeByID(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiID id)
+{
+    return (ImGuiDockNode*)ctx->DockContext.Nodes.GetVoidPtr(id);
+}
+
+ImGuiID ImGui::DockContextGenNodeID(ImGuiContext* ctx)
+{
+    // Generate an ID for new node (the exact ID value doesn't matter as long as it is not already used)
+    // FIXME-OPT FIXME-DOCK: This is suboptimal, even if the node count is small enough not to be a worry.0
+    // We should poke in ctx->Nodes to find a suitable ID faster. Even more so trivial that ctx->Nodes lookup is already sorted.
+    ImGuiID id = 0x0001;
+    while (DockContextFindNodeByID(ctx, id) != NULL)
+        id++;
+    return id;
+}
+
+static ImGuiDockNode* ImGui::DockContextAddNode(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiID id)
+{
+    // Generate an ID for the new node (the exact ID value doesn't matter as long as it is not already used) and add the first window.
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+    if (id == 0)
+        id = DockContextGenNodeID(ctx);
+    else
+        IM_ASSERT(DockContextFindNodeByID(ctx, id) == NULL);
+
+    // We don't set node->LastFrameAlive on construction. Nodes are always created at all time to reflect .ini settings!
+    IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_DOCKING("[docking] DockContextAddNode 0x%08X\n", id);
+    ImGuiDockNode* node = IM_NEW(ImGuiDockNode)(id);
+    ctx->DockContext.Nodes.SetVoidPtr(node->ID, node);
+    return node;
+}
+
+static void ImGui::DockContextRemoveNode(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiDockNode* node, bool merge_sibling_into_parent_node)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+    ImGuiDockContext* dc  = &ctx->DockContext;
+
+    IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_DOCKING("[docking] DockContextRemoveNode 0x%08X\n", node->ID);
+    IM_ASSERT(DockContextFindNodeByID(ctx, node->ID) == node);
+    IM_ASSERT(node->ChildNodes[0] == NULL && node->ChildNodes[1] == NULL);
+    IM_ASSERT(node->Windows.Size == 0);
+
+    if (node->HostWindow)
+        node->HostWindow->DockNodeAsHost = NULL;
+
+    ImGuiDockNode* parent_node = node->ParentNode;
+    const bool merge = (merge_sibling_into_parent_node && parent_node != NULL);
+    if (merge)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(parent_node->ChildNodes[0] == node || parent_node->ChildNodes[1] == node);
+        ImGuiDockNode* sibling_node = (parent_node->ChildNodes[0] == node ? parent_node->ChildNodes[1] : parent_node->ChildNodes[0]);
+        DockNodeTreeMerge(&g, parent_node, sibling_node);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        for (int n = 0; parent_node && n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(parent_node->ChildNodes); n++)
+            if (parent_node->ChildNodes[n] == node)
+                node->ParentNode->ChildNodes[n] = NULL;
+        dc->Nodes.SetVoidPtr(node->ID, NULL);
+        IM_DELETE(node);
+    }
+}
+
+static int IMGUI_CDECL DockNodeComparerDepthMostFirst(const void* lhs, const void* rhs)
+{
+    const ImGuiDockNode* a = *(const ImGuiDockNode* const*)lhs;
+    const ImGuiDockNode* b = *(const ImGuiDockNode* const*)rhs;
+    return ImGui::DockNodeGetDepth(b) - ImGui::DockNodeGetDepth(a);
+}
+
+// Pre C++0x doesn't allow us to use a function-local type (without linkage) as template parameter, so we moved this here.
+struct ImGuiDockContextPruneNodeData
+{
+    int         CountWindows, CountChildWindows, CountChildNodes;
+    ImGuiID     RootId;
+    ImGuiDockContextPruneNodeData() { CountWindows = CountChildWindows = CountChildNodes = 0; RootId = 0; }
+};
+
+// Garbage collect unused nodes (run once at init time)
+static void ImGui::DockContextPruneUnusedSettingsNodes(ImGuiContext* ctx)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+    ImGuiDockContext* dc  = &ctx->DockContext;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.Windows.Size == 0);
+
+    ImPool<ImGuiDockContextPruneNodeData> pool;
+    pool.Reserve(dc->NodesSettings.Size);
+
+    // Count child nodes and compute RootID
+    for (int settings_n = 0; settings_n < dc->NodesSettings.Size; settings_n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiDockNodeSettings* settings = &dc->NodesSettings[settings_n];
+        ImGuiDockContextPruneNodeData* parent_data = settings->ParentNodeId ? pool.GetByKey(settings->ParentNodeId) : 0;
+        pool.GetOrAddByKey(settings->ID)->RootId = parent_data ? parent_data->RootId : settings->ID;
+        if (settings->ParentNodeId)
+            pool.GetOrAddByKey(settings->ParentNodeId)->CountChildNodes++;
+    }
+
+    // Count reference to dock ids from dockspaces
+    // We track the 'auto-DockNode <- manual-Window <- manual-DockSpace' in order to avoid 'auto-DockNode' being ditched by DockContextPruneUnusedSettingsNodes()
+    for (int settings_n = 0; settings_n < dc->NodesSettings.Size; settings_n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiDockNodeSettings* settings = &dc->NodesSettings[settings_n];
+        if (settings->ParentWindowId != 0)
+            if (ImGuiWindowSettings* window_settings = FindWindowSettings(settings->ParentWindowId))
+                if (window_settings->DockId)
+                    if (ImGuiDockContextPruneNodeData* data = pool.GetByKey(window_settings->DockId))
+                        data->CountChildNodes++;
+    }
+
+    // Count reference to dock ids from window settings
+    // We guard against the possibility of an invalid .ini file (RootID may point to a missing node)
+    for (ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = g.SettingsWindows.begin(); settings != NULL; settings = g.SettingsWindows.next_chunk(settings))
+        if (ImGuiID dock_id = settings->DockId)
+            if (ImGuiDockContextPruneNodeData* data = pool.GetByKey(dock_id))
+            {
+                data->CountWindows++;
+                if (ImGuiDockContextPruneNodeData* data_root = (data->RootId == dock_id) ? data : pool.GetByKey(data->RootId))
+                    data_root->CountChildWindows++;
+            }
+
+    // Prune
+    for (int settings_n = 0; settings_n < dc->NodesSettings.Size; settings_n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiDockNodeSettings* settings = &dc->NodesSettings[settings_n];
+        ImGuiDockContextPruneNodeData* data = pool.GetByKey(settings->ID);
+        if (data->CountWindows > 1)
+            continue;
+        ImGuiDockContextPruneNodeData* data_root = (data->RootId == settings->ID) ? data : pool.GetByKey(data->RootId);
+
+        bool remove = false;
+        remove |= (data->CountWindows == 1 && settings->ParentNodeId == 0 && data->CountChildNodes == 0 && !(settings->Flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_CentralNode));  // Floating root node with only 1 window
+        remove |= (data->CountWindows == 0 && settings->ParentNodeId == 0 && data->CountChildNodes == 0); // Leaf nodes with 0 window
+        remove |= (data_root->CountChildWindows == 0);
+        if (remove)
+        {
+            IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_DOCKING("[docking] DockContextPruneUnusedSettingsNodes: Prune 0x%08X\n", settings->ID);
+            DockSettingsRemoveNodeReferences(&settings->ID, 1);
+            settings->ID = 0;
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+static void ImGui::DockContextBuildNodesFromSettings(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiDockNodeSettings* node_settings_array, int node_settings_count)
+{
+    // Build nodes
+    for (int node_n = 0; node_n < node_settings_count; node_n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiDockNodeSettings* settings = &node_settings_array[node_n];
+        if (settings->ID == 0)
+            continue;
+        ImGuiDockNode* node = DockContextAddNode(ctx, settings->ID);
+        node->ParentNode = settings->ParentNodeId ? DockContextFindNodeByID(ctx, settings->ParentNodeId) : NULL;
+        node->Pos = ImVec2(settings->Pos.x, settings->Pos.y);
+        node->Size = ImVec2(settings->Size.x, settings->Size.y);
+        node->SizeRef = ImVec2(settings->SizeRef.x, settings->SizeRef.y);
+        node->AuthorityForPos = node->AuthorityForSize = node->AuthorityForViewport = ImGuiDataAuthority_DockNode;
+        if (node->ParentNode && node->ParentNode->ChildNodes[0] == NULL)
+            node->ParentNode->ChildNodes[0] = node;
+        else if (node->ParentNode && node->ParentNode->ChildNodes[1] == NULL)
+            node->ParentNode->ChildNodes[1] = node;
+        node->SelectedTabId = settings->SelectedTabId;
+        node->SplitAxis = (ImGuiAxis)settings->SplitAxis;
+        node->SetLocalFlags(settings->Flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_SavedFlagsMask_);
+
+        // Bind host window immediately if it already exist (in case of a rebuild)
+        // This is useful as the RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight links necessary to highlight the currently focused node requires node->HostWindow to be set.
+        char host_window_title[20];
+        ImGuiDockNode* root_node = DockNodeGetRootNode(node);
+        node->HostWindow = FindWindowByName(DockNodeGetHostWindowTitle(root_node, host_window_title, IM_ARRAYSIZE(host_window_title)));
+    }
+}
+
+void ImGui::DockContextBuildAddWindowsToNodes(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiID root_id)
+{
+    // Rebind all windows to nodes (they can also lazily rebind but we'll have a visible glitch during the first frame)
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+    for (int n = 0; n < g.Windows.Size; n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[n];
+        if (window->DockId == 0 || window->LastFrameActive < g.FrameCount - 1)
+            continue;
+        if (window->DockNode != NULL)
+            continue;
+
+        ImGuiDockNode* node = DockContextFindNodeByID(ctx, window->DockId);
+        IM_ASSERT(node != NULL);   // This should have been called after DockContextBuildNodesFromSettings()
+        if (root_id == 0 || DockNodeGetRootNode(node)->ID == root_id)
+            DockNodeAddWindow(node, window, true);
+    }
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Docking: ImGuiDockContext Docking/Undocking functions
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - DockContextQueueDock()
+// - DockContextQueueUndockWindow()
+// - DockContextQueueUndockNode()
+// - DockContextQueueNotifyRemovedNode()
+// - DockContextProcessDock()
+// - DockContextProcessUndockWindow()
+// - DockContextProcessUndockNode()
+// - DockContextCalcDropPosForDocking()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+void ImGui::DockContextQueueDock(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiWindow* target, ImGuiDockNode* target_node, ImGuiWindow* payload, ImGuiDir split_dir, float split_ratio, bool split_outer)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(target != payload);
+    ImGuiDockRequest req;
+    req.Type = ImGuiDockRequestType_Dock;
+    req.DockTargetWindow = target;
+    req.DockTargetNode = target_node;
+    req.DockPayload = payload;
+    req.DockSplitDir = split_dir;
+    req.DockSplitRatio = split_ratio;
+    req.DockSplitOuter = split_outer;
+    ctx->DockContext.Requests.push_back(req);
+}
+
+void ImGui::DockContextQueueUndockWindow(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImGuiDockRequest req;
+    req.Type = ImGuiDockRequestType_Undock;
+    req.UndockTargetWindow = window;
+    ctx->DockContext.Requests.push_back(req);
+}
+
+void ImGui::DockContextQueueUndockNode(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiDockNode* node)
+{
+    ImGuiDockRequest req;
+    req.Type = ImGuiDockRequestType_Undock;
+    req.UndockTargetNode = node;
+    ctx->DockContext.Requests.push_back(req);
+}
+
+void ImGui::DockContextQueueNotifyRemovedNode(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiDockNode* node)
+{
+    ImGuiDockContext* dc  = &ctx->DockContext;
+    for (int n = 0; n < dc->Requests.Size; n++)
+        if (dc->Requests[n].DockTargetNode == node)
+            dc->Requests[n].Type = ImGuiDockRequestType_None;
+}
+
+void ImGui::DockContextProcessDock(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiDockRequest* req)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT((req->Type == ImGuiDockRequestType_Dock && req->DockPayload != NULL) || (req->Type == ImGuiDockRequestType_Split && req->DockPayload == NULL));
+    IM_ASSERT(req->DockTargetWindow != NULL || req->DockTargetNode != NULL);
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+    IM_UNUSED(g);
+
+    ImGuiWindow* payload_window = req->DockPayload;     // Optional
+    ImGuiWindow* target_window = req->DockTargetWindow;
+    ImGuiDockNode* node = req->DockTargetNode;
+    if (payload_window)
+        IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_DOCKING("[docking] DockContextProcessDock node 0x%08X target '%s' dock window '%s', split_dir %d\n", node ? node->ID : 0, target_window ? target_window->Name : "NULL", payload_window->Name, req->DockSplitDir);
+    else
+        IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_DOCKING("[docking] DockContextProcessDock node 0x%08X, split_dir %d\n", node ? node->ID : 0, req->DockSplitDir);
+
+    // Decide which Tab will be selected at the end of the operation
+    ImGuiID next_selected_id = 0;
+    ImGuiDockNode* payload_node = NULL;
+    if (payload_window)
+    {
+        payload_node = payload_window->DockNodeAsHost;
+        payload_window->DockNodeAsHost = NULL; // Important to clear this as the node will have its life as a child which might be merged/deleted later.
+        if (payload_node && payload_node->IsLeafNode())
+            next_selected_id = payload_node->TabBar->NextSelectedTabId ? payload_node->TabBar->NextSelectedTabId : payload_node->TabBar->SelectedTabId;
+        if (payload_node == NULL)
+            next_selected_id = payload_window->TabId;
+    }
+
+    // FIXME-DOCK: When we are trying to dock an existing single-window node into a loose window, transfer Node ID as well
+    // When processing an interactive split, usually LastFrameAlive will be < g.FrameCount. But DockBuilder operations can make it ==.
+    if (node)
+        IM_ASSERT(node->LastFrameAlive <= g.FrameCount);
+    if (node && target_window && node == target_window->DockNodeAsHost)
+        IM_ASSERT(node->Windows.Size > 0 || node->IsSplitNode() || node->IsCentralNode());
+
+    // Create new node and add existing window to it
+    if (node == NULL)
+    {
+        node = DockContextAddNode(ctx, 0);
+        node->Pos = target_window->Pos;
+        node->Size = target_window->Size;
+        if (target_window->DockNodeAsHost == NULL)
+        {
+            DockNodeAddWindow(node, target_window, true);
+            node->TabBar->Tabs[0].Flags &= ~ImGuiTabItemFlags_Unsorted;
+            target_window->DockIsActive = true;
+        }
+    }
+
+    ImGuiDir split_dir = req->DockSplitDir;
+    if (split_dir != ImGuiDir_None)
+    {
+        // Split into two, one side will be our payload node unless we are dropping a loose window
+        const ImGuiAxis split_axis = (split_dir == ImGuiDir_Left || split_dir == ImGuiDir_Right) ? ImGuiAxis_X : ImGuiAxis_Y;
+        const int split_inheritor_child_idx = (split_dir == ImGuiDir_Left || split_dir == ImGuiDir_Up) ? 1 : 0; // Current contents will be moved to the opposite side
+        const float split_ratio = req->DockSplitRatio;
+        DockNodeTreeSplit(ctx, node, split_axis, split_inheritor_child_idx, split_ratio, payload_node);  // payload_node may be NULL here!
+        ImGuiDockNode* new_node = node->ChildNodes[split_inheritor_child_idx ^ 1];
+        new_node->HostWindow = node->HostWindow;
+        node = new_node;
+    }
+    node->SetLocalFlags(node->LocalFlags & ~ImGuiDockNodeFlags_HiddenTabBar);
+
+    if (node != payload_node)
+    {
+        // Create tab bar before we call DockNodeMoveWindows (which would attempt to move the old tab-bar, which would lead us to payload tabs wrongly appearing before target tabs!)
+        if (node->Windows.Size > 0 && node->TabBar == NULL)
+        {
+            DockNodeAddTabBar(node);
+            for (int n = 0; n < node->Windows.Size; n++)
+                TabBarAddTab(node->TabBar, ImGuiTabItemFlags_None, node->Windows[n]);
+        }
+
+        if (payload_node != NULL)
+        {
+            // Transfer full payload node (with 1+ child windows or child nodes)
+            if (payload_node->IsSplitNode())
+            {
+                if (node->Windows.Size > 0)
+                {
+                    // We can dock a split payload into a node that already has windows _only_ if our payload is a node tree with a single visible node.
+                    // In this situation, we move the windows of the target node into the currently visible node of the payload.
+                    // This allows us to preserve some of the underlying dock tree settings nicely.
+                    IM_ASSERT(payload_node->OnlyNodeWithWindows != NULL); // The docking should have been blocked by DockNodePreviewDockSetup() early on and never submitted.
+                    ImGuiDockNode* visible_node = payload_node->OnlyNodeWithWindows;
+                    if (visible_node->TabBar)
+                        IM_ASSERT(visible_node->TabBar->Tabs.Size > 0);
+                    DockNodeMoveWindows(node, visible_node);
+                    DockNodeMoveWindows(visible_node, node);
+                    DockSettingsRenameNodeReferences(node->ID, visible_node->ID);
+                }
+                if (node->IsCentralNode())
+                {
+                    // Central node property needs to be moved to a leaf node, pick the last focused one.
+                    // FIXME-DOCK: If we had to transfer other flags here, what would the policy be?
+                    ImGuiDockNode* last_focused_node = DockContextFindNodeByID(ctx, payload_node->LastFocusedNodeId);
+                    IM_ASSERT(last_focused_node != NULL);
+                    ImGuiDockNode* last_focused_root_node = DockNodeGetRootNode(last_focused_node);
+                    IM_ASSERT(last_focused_root_node == DockNodeGetRootNode(payload_node));
+                    last_focused_node->SetLocalFlags(last_focused_node->LocalFlags | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_CentralNode);
+                    node->SetLocalFlags(node->LocalFlags & ~ImGuiDockNodeFlags_CentralNode);
+                    last_focused_root_node->CentralNode = last_focused_node;
+                }
+
+                IM_ASSERT(node->Windows.Size == 0);
+                DockNodeMoveChildNodes(node, payload_node);
+            }
+            else
+            {
+                const ImGuiID payload_dock_id = payload_node->ID;
+                DockNodeMoveWindows(node, payload_node);
+                DockSettingsRenameNodeReferences(payload_dock_id, node->ID);
+            }
+            DockContextRemoveNode(ctx, payload_node, true);
+        }
+        else if (payload_window)
+        {
+            // Transfer single window
+            const ImGuiID payload_dock_id = payload_window->DockId;
+            node->VisibleWindow = payload_window;
+            DockNodeAddWindow(node, payload_window, true);
+            if (payload_dock_id != 0)
+                DockSettingsRenameNodeReferences(payload_dock_id, node->ID);
+        }
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // When docking a floating single window node we want to reevaluate auto-hiding of the tab bar
+        node->WantHiddenTabBarUpdate = true;
+    }
+
+    // Update selection immediately
+    if (ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = node->TabBar)
+        tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = next_selected_id;
+    MarkIniSettingsDirty();
+}
+
+// Problem:
+//   Undocking a large (~full screen) window would leave it so large that the bottom right sizing corner would more
+//   than likely be off the screen and the window would be hard to resize to fit on screen. This can be particularly problematic
+//   with 'ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly=true' and/or with 'ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges=false' as well (the later can be
+//   due to missing ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors backend flag).
+// Solution:
+//   When undocking a window we currently force its maximum size to 90% of the host viewport or monitor.
+// Reevaluate this when we implement preserving docked/undocked size ("docking_wip/undocked_size" branch).
+static ImVec2 FixLargeWindowsWhenUndocking(const ImVec2& size, ImGuiViewport* ref_viewport)
+{
+    if (ref_viewport == NULL)
+        return size;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImVec2 max_size = ImFloor(ref_viewport->WorkSize * 0.90f);
+    if (g.ConfigFlagsCurrFrame & ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable)
+    {
+        const ImGuiPlatformMonitor* monitor = ImGui::GetViewportPlatformMonitor(ref_viewport);
+        max_size = ImFloor(monitor->WorkSize * 0.90f);
+    }
+    return ImMin(size, max_size);
+}
+
+void ImGui::DockContextProcessUndockWindow(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiWindow* window, bool clear_persistent_docking_ref)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+    IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_DOCKING("[docking] DockContextProcessUndockWindow window '%s', clear_persistent_docking_ref = %d\n", window->Name, clear_persistent_docking_ref);
+    if (window->DockNode)
+        DockNodeRemoveWindow(window->DockNode, window, clear_persistent_docking_ref ? 0 : window->DockId);
+    else
+        window->DockId = 0;
+    window->Collapsed = false;
+    window->DockIsActive = false;
+    window->DockNodeIsVisible = window->DockTabIsVisible = false;
+    window->Size = window->SizeFull = FixLargeWindowsWhenUndocking(window->SizeFull, window->Viewport);
+
+    MarkIniSettingsDirty();
+}
+
+void ImGui::DockContextProcessUndockNode(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiDockNode* node)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+    IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_DOCKING("[docking] DockContextProcessUndockNode node %08X\n", node->ID);
+    IM_ASSERT(node->IsLeafNode());
+    IM_ASSERT(node->Windows.Size >= 1);
+
+    if (node->IsRootNode() || node->IsCentralNode())
+    {
+        // In the case of a root node or central node, the node will have to stay in place. Create a new node to receive the payload.
+        ImGuiDockNode* new_node = DockContextAddNode(ctx, 0);
+        new_node->Pos = node->Pos;
+        new_node->Size = node->Size;
+        new_node->SizeRef = node->SizeRef;
+        DockNodeMoveWindows(new_node, node);
+        DockSettingsRenameNodeReferences(node->ID, new_node->ID);
+        for (int n = 0; n < new_node->Windows.Size; n++)
+        {
+            ImGuiWindow* window = new_node->Windows[n];
+            window->Flags &= ~ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow;
+            if (window->ParentWindow)
+                window->ParentWindow->DC.ChildWindows.find_erase(window);
+            UpdateWindowParentAndRootLinks(window, window->Flags, NULL);
+        }
+        node = new_node;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Otherwise extract our node and merge our sibling back into the parent node.
+        IM_ASSERT(node->ParentNode->ChildNodes[0] == node || node->ParentNode->ChildNodes[1] == node);
+        int index_in_parent = (node->ParentNode->ChildNodes[0] == node) ? 0 : 1;
+        node->ParentNode->ChildNodes[index_in_parent] = NULL;
+        DockNodeTreeMerge(ctx, node->ParentNode, node->ParentNode->ChildNodes[index_in_parent ^ 1]);
+        node->ParentNode->AuthorityForViewport = ImGuiDataAuthority_Window; // The node that stays in place keeps the viewport, so our newly dragged out node will create a new viewport
+        node->ParentNode = NULL;
+    }
+    node->AuthorityForPos = node->AuthorityForSize = ImGuiDataAuthority_DockNode;
+    node->Size = FixLargeWindowsWhenUndocking(node->Size, node->Windows[0]->Viewport);
+    node->WantMouseMove = true;
+    MarkIniSettingsDirty();
+}
+
+// This is mostly used for automation.
+bool ImGui::DockContextCalcDropPosForDocking(ImGuiWindow* target, ImGuiDockNode* target_node, ImGuiWindow* payload, ImGuiDir split_dir, bool split_outer, ImVec2* out_pos)
+{
+    // In DockNodePreviewDockSetup() for a root central node instead of showing both "inner" and "outer" drop rects
+    // (which would be functionally identical) we only show the outer one. Reflect this here.
+    if (target_node && target_node->ParentNode == NULL && target_node->IsCentralNode() && split_dir != ImGuiDir_None)
+        split_outer = true;
+    ImGuiDockPreviewData split_data;
+    DockNodePreviewDockSetup(target, target_node, payload, &split_data, false, split_outer);
+    if (split_data.DropRectsDraw[split_dir+1].IsInverted())
+        return false;
+    *out_pos = split_data.DropRectsDraw[split_dir+1].GetCenter();
+    return true;
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Docking: ImGuiDockNode
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - DockNodeGetTabOrder()
+// - DockNodeAddWindow()
+// - DockNodeRemoveWindow()
+// - DockNodeMoveChildNodes()
+// - DockNodeMoveWindows()
+// - DockNodeApplyPosSizeToWindows()
+// - DockNodeHideHostWindow()
+// - ImGuiDockNodeFindInfoResults
+// - DockNodeFindInfo()
+// - DockNodeFindWindowByID()
+// - DockNodeUpdateFlagsAndCollapse()
+// - DockNodeUpdateHasCentralNodeFlag()
+// - DockNodeUpdateVisibleFlag()
+// - DockNodeStartMouseMovingWindow()
+// - DockNodeUpdate()
+// - DockNodeUpdateWindowMenu()
+// - DockNodeBeginAmendTabBar()
+// - DockNodeEndAmendTabBar()
+// - DockNodeUpdateTabBar()
+// - DockNodeAddTabBar()
+// - DockNodeRemoveTabBar()
+// - DockNodeIsDropAllowedOne()
+// - DockNodeIsDropAllowed()
+// - DockNodeCalcTabBarLayout()
+// - DockNodeCalcSplitRects()
+// - DockNodeCalcDropRectsAndTestMousePos()
+// - DockNodePreviewDockSetup()
+// - DockNodePreviewDockRender()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+ImGuiDockNode::ImGuiDockNode(ImGuiID id)
+{
+    ID = id;
+    SharedFlags = LocalFlags = LocalFlagsInWindows = MergedFlags = ImGuiDockNodeFlags_None;
+    ParentNode = ChildNodes[0] = ChildNodes[1] = NULL;
+    TabBar = NULL;
+    SplitAxis = ImGuiAxis_None;
+
+    State = ImGuiDockNodeState_Unknown;
+    LastBgColor = IM_COL32_WHITE;
+    HostWindow = VisibleWindow = NULL;
+    CentralNode = OnlyNodeWithWindows = NULL;
+    CountNodeWithWindows = 0;
+    LastFrameAlive = LastFrameActive = LastFrameFocused = -1;
+    LastFocusedNodeId = 0;
+    SelectedTabId = 0;
+    WantCloseTabId = 0;
+    AuthorityForPos = AuthorityForSize = ImGuiDataAuthority_DockNode;
+    AuthorityForViewport = ImGuiDataAuthority_Auto;
+    IsVisible = true;
+    IsFocused = HasCloseButton = HasWindowMenuButton = HasCentralNodeChild = false;
+    IsBgDrawnThisFrame = false;
+    WantCloseAll = WantLockSizeOnce = WantMouseMove = WantHiddenTabBarUpdate = WantHiddenTabBarToggle = false;
+}
+
+ImGuiDockNode::~ImGuiDockNode()
+{
+    IM_DELETE(TabBar);
+    TabBar = NULL;
+    ChildNodes[0] = ChildNodes[1] = NULL;
+}
+
+int ImGui::DockNodeGetTabOrder(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = window->DockNode->TabBar;
+    if (tab_bar == NULL)
+        return -1;
+    ImGuiTabItem* tab = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, window->TabId);
+    return tab ? tab_bar->GetTabOrder(tab) : -1;
+}
+
+static void DockNodeHideWindowDuringHostWindowCreation(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    window->Hidden = true;
+    window->HiddenFramesCanSkipItems = window->Active ? 1 : 2;
+}
+
+static void ImGui::DockNodeAddWindow(ImGuiDockNode* node, ImGuiWindow* window, bool add_to_tab_bar)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; (void)g;
+    if (window->DockNode)
+    {
+        // Can overwrite an existing window->DockNode (e.g. pointing to a disabled DockSpace node)
+        IM_ASSERT(window->DockNode->ID != node->ID);
+        DockNodeRemoveWindow(window->DockNode, window, 0);
+    }
+    IM_ASSERT(window->DockNode == NULL || window->DockNodeAsHost == NULL);
+    IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_DOCKING("[docking] DockNodeAddWindow node 0x%08X window '%s'\n", node->ID, window->Name);
+
+    // If more than 2 windows appeared on the same frame leading to the creation of a new hosting window,
+    // we'll hide windows until the host window is ready. Hide the 1st window after its been output (so it is not visible for one frame).
+    // We will call DockNodeHideWindowDuringHostWindowCreation() on ourselves in Begin()
+    if (node->HostWindow == NULL && node->Windows.Size == 1 && node->Windows[0]->WasActive == false)
+        DockNodeHideWindowDuringHostWindowCreation(node->Windows[0]);
+
+    node->Windows.push_back(window);
+    node->WantHiddenTabBarUpdate = true;
+    window->DockNode = node;
+    window->DockId = node->ID;
+    window->DockIsActive = (node->Windows.Size > 1);
+    window->DockTabWantClose = false;
+
+    // When reactivating a node with one or two loose window, the window pos/size/viewport are authoritative over the node storage.
+    // In particular it is important we init the viewport from the first window so we don't create two viewports and drop one.
+    if (node->HostWindow == NULL && node->IsFloatingNode())
+    {
+        if (node->AuthorityForPos == ImGuiDataAuthority_Auto)
+            node->AuthorityForPos = ImGuiDataAuthority_Window;
+        if (node->AuthorityForSize == ImGuiDataAuthority_Auto)
+            node->AuthorityForSize = ImGuiDataAuthority_Window;
+        if (node->AuthorityForViewport == ImGuiDataAuthority_Auto)
+            node->AuthorityForViewport = ImGuiDataAuthority_Window;
+    }
+
+    // Add to tab bar if requested
+    if (add_to_tab_bar)
+    {
+        if (node->TabBar == NULL)
+        {
+            DockNodeAddTabBar(node);
+            node->TabBar->SelectedTabId = node->TabBar->NextSelectedTabId = node->SelectedTabId;
+
+            // Add existing windows
+            for (int n = 0; n < node->Windows.Size - 1; n++)
+                TabBarAddTab(node->TabBar, ImGuiTabItemFlags_None, node->Windows[n]);
+        }
+        TabBarAddTab(node->TabBar, ImGuiTabItemFlags_Unsorted, window);
+    }
+
+    DockNodeUpdateVisibleFlag(node);
+
+    // Update this without waiting for the next time we Begin() in the window, so our host window will have the proper title bar color on its first frame.
+    if (node->HostWindow)
+        UpdateWindowParentAndRootLinks(window, window->Flags | ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow, node->HostWindow);
+}
+
+static void ImGui::DockNodeRemoveWindow(ImGuiDockNode* node, ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiID save_dock_id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(window->DockNode == node);
+    //IM_ASSERT(window->RootWindowDockTree == node->HostWindow);
+    //IM_ASSERT(window->LastFrameActive < g.FrameCount);    // We may call this from Begin()
+    IM_ASSERT(save_dock_id == 0 || save_dock_id == node->ID);
+    IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_DOCKING("[docking] DockNodeRemoveWindow node 0x%08X window '%s'\n", node->ID, window->Name);
+
+    window->DockNode = NULL;
+    window->DockIsActive = window->DockTabWantClose = false;
+    window->DockId = save_dock_id;
+    window->Flags &= ~ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow;
+    if (window->ParentWindow)
+        window->ParentWindow->DC.ChildWindows.find_erase(window);
+    UpdateWindowParentAndRootLinks(window, window->Flags, NULL); // Update immediately
+
+    // Remove window
+    bool erased = false;
+    for (int n = 0; n < node->Windows.Size; n++)
+        if (node->Windows[n] == window)
+        {
+            node->Windows.erase(node->Windows.Data + n);
+            erased = true;
+            break;
+        }
+    if (!erased)
+        IM_ASSERT(erased);
+    if (node->VisibleWindow == window)
+        node->VisibleWindow = NULL;
+
+    // Remove tab and possibly tab bar
+    node->WantHiddenTabBarUpdate = true;
+    if (node->TabBar)
+    {
+        TabBarRemoveTab(node->TabBar, window->TabId);
+        const int tab_count_threshold_for_tab_bar = node->IsCentralNode() ? 1 : 2;
+        if (node->Windows.Size < tab_count_threshold_for_tab_bar)
+            DockNodeRemoveTabBar(node);
+    }
+
+    if (node->Windows.Size == 0 && !node->IsCentralNode() && !node->IsDockSpace() && window->DockId != node->ID)
+    {
+        // Automatic dock node delete themselves if they are not holding at least one tab
+        DockContextRemoveNode(&g, node, true);
+        return;
+    }
+
+    if (node->Windows.Size == 1 && !node->IsCentralNode() && node->HostWindow)
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* remaining_window = node->Windows[0];
+        if (node->HostWindow->ViewportOwned && node->IsRootNode())
+        {
+            // Transfer viewport back to the remaining loose window
+            IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_VIEWPORT("[viewport] Node %08X transfer Viewport %08X=>%08X for Window '%s'\n", node->ID, node->HostWindow->Viewport->ID, remaining_window->ID, remaining_window->Name);
+            IM_ASSERT(node->HostWindow->Viewport->Window == node->HostWindow);
+            node->HostWindow->Viewport->Window = remaining_window;
+            node->HostWindow->Viewport->ID = remaining_window->ID;
+        }
+        remaining_window->Collapsed = node->HostWindow->Collapsed;
+    }
+
+    // Update visibility immediately is required so the DockNodeUpdateRemoveInactiveChilds() processing can reflect changes up the tree
+    DockNodeUpdateVisibleFlag(node);
+}
+
+static void ImGui::DockNodeMoveChildNodes(ImGuiDockNode* dst_node, ImGuiDockNode* src_node)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(dst_node->Windows.Size == 0);
+    dst_node->ChildNodes[0] = src_node->ChildNodes[0];
+    dst_node->ChildNodes[1] = src_node->ChildNodes[1];
+    if (dst_node->ChildNodes[0])
+        dst_node->ChildNodes[0]->ParentNode = dst_node;
+    if (dst_node->ChildNodes[1])
+        dst_node->ChildNodes[1]->ParentNode = dst_node;
+    dst_node->SplitAxis = src_node->SplitAxis;
+    dst_node->SizeRef = src_node->SizeRef;
+    src_node->ChildNodes[0] = src_node->ChildNodes[1] = NULL;
+}
+
+static void ImGui::DockNodeMoveWindows(ImGuiDockNode* dst_node, ImGuiDockNode* src_node)
+{
+    // Insert tabs in the same orders as currently ordered (node->Windows isn't ordered)
+    IM_ASSERT(src_node && dst_node && dst_node != src_node);
+    ImGuiTabBar* src_tab_bar = src_node->TabBar;
+    if (src_tab_bar != NULL)
+        IM_ASSERT(src_node->Windows.Size <= src_node->TabBar->Tabs.Size);
+
+    // If the dst_node is empty we can just move the entire tab bar (to preserve selection, scrolling, etc.)
+    bool move_tab_bar = (src_tab_bar != NULL) && (dst_node->TabBar == NULL);
+    if (move_tab_bar)
+    {
+        dst_node->TabBar = src_node->TabBar;
+        src_node->TabBar = NULL;
+    }
+
+    for (int n = 0; n < src_node->Windows.Size; n++)
+    {
+        // DockNode's TabBar may have non-window Tabs manually appended by user
+        if (ImGuiWindow* window = src_tab_bar ? src_tab_bar->Tabs[n].Window : src_node->Windows[n])
+        {
+            window->DockNode = NULL;
+            window->DockIsActive = false;
+            DockNodeAddWindow(dst_node, window, move_tab_bar ? false : true);
+        }
+    }
+    src_node->Windows.clear();
+
+    if (!move_tab_bar && src_node->TabBar)
+    {
+        if (dst_node->TabBar)
+            dst_node->TabBar->SelectedTabId = src_node->TabBar->SelectedTabId;
+        DockNodeRemoveTabBar(src_node);
+    }
+}
+
+static void ImGui::DockNodeApplyPosSizeToWindows(ImGuiDockNode* node)
+{
+    for (int n = 0; n < node->Windows.Size; n++)
+    {
+        SetWindowPos(node->Windows[n], node->Pos, ImGuiCond_Always); // We don't assign directly to Pos because it can break the calculation of SizeContents on next frame
+        SetWindowSize(node->Windows[n], node->Size, ImGuiCond_Always);
+    }
+}
+
+static void ImGui::DockNodeHideHostWindow(ImGuiDockNode* node)
+{
+    if (node->HostWindow)
+    {
+        if (node->HostWindow->DockNodeAsHost == node)
+            node->HostWindow->DockNodeAsHost = NULL;
+        node->HostWindow = NULL;
+    }
+
+    if (node->Windows.Size == 1)
+    {
+        node->VisibleWindow = node->Windows[0];
+        node->Windows[0]->DockIsActive = false;
+    }
+
+    if (node->TabBar)
+        DockNodeRemoveTabBar(node);
+}
+
+// Search function called once by root node in DockNodeUpdate()
+struct ImGuiDockNodeTreeInfo
+{
+    ImGuiDockNode*      CentralNode;
+    ImGuiDockNode*      FirstNodeWithWindows;
+    int                 CountNodesWithWindows;
+    //ImGuiWindowClass  WindowClassForMerges;
+
+    ImGuiDockNodeTreeInfo() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+};
+
+static void DockNodeFindInfo(ImGuiDockNode* node, ImGuiDockNodeTreeInfo* info)
+{
+    if (node->Windows.Size > 0)
+    {
+        if (info->FirstNodeWithWindows == NULL)
+            info->FirstNodeWithWindows = node;
+        info->CountNodesWithWindows++;
+    }
+    if (node->IsCentralNode())
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(info->CentralNode == NULL); // Should be only one
+        IM_ASSERT(node->IsLeafNode() && "If you get this assert: please submit .ini file + repro of actions leading to this.");
+        info->CentralNode = node;
+    }
+    if (info->CountNodesWithWindows > 1 && info->CentralNode != NULL)
+        return;
+    if (node->ChildNodes[0])
+        DockNodeFindInfo(node->ChildNodes[0], info);
+    if (node->ChildNodes[1])
+        DockNodeFindInfo(node->ChildNodes[1], info);
+}
+
+static ImGuiWindow* ImGui::DockNodeFindWindowByID(ImGuiDockNode* node, ImGuiID id)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(id != 0);
+    for (int n = 0; n < node->Windows.Size; n++)
+        if (node->Windows[n]->ID == id)
+            return node->Windows[n];
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+// - Remove inactive windows/nodes.
+// - Update visibility flag.
+static void ImGui::DockNodeUpdateFlagsAndCollapse(ImGuiDockNode* node)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(node->ParentNode == NULL || node->ParentNode->ChildNodes[0] == node || node->ParentNode->ChildNodes[1] == node);
+
+    // Inherit most flags
+    if (node->ParentNode)
+        node->SharedFlags = node->ParentNode->SharedFlags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_SharedFlagsInheritMask_;
+
+    // Recurse into children
+    // There is the possibility that one of our child becoming empty will delete itself and moving its sibling contents into 'node'.
+    // If 'node->ChildNode[0]' delete itself, then 'node->ChildNode[1]->Windows' will be moved into 'node'
+    // If 'node->ChildNode[1]' delete itself, then 'node->ChildNode[0]->Windows' will be moved into 'node' and the "remove inactive windows" loop will have run twice on those windows (harmless)
+    node->HasCentralNodeChild = false;
+    if (node->ChildNodes[0])
+        DockNodeUpdateFlagsAndCollapse(node->ChildNodes[0]);
+    if (node->ChildNodes[1])
+        DockNodeUpdateFlagsAndCollapse(node->ChildNodes[1]);
+
+    // Remove inactive windows, collapse nodes
+    // Merge node flags overrides stored in windows
+    node->LocalFlagsInWindows = ImGuiDockNodeFlags_None;
+    for (int window_n = 0; window_n < node->Windows.Size; window_n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* window = node->Windows[window_n];
+        IM_ASSERT(window->DockNode == node);
+
+        bool node_was_active = (node->LastFrameActive + 1 == g.FrameCount);
+        bool remove = false;
+        remove |= node_was_active && (window->LastFrameActive + 1 < g.FrameCount);
+        remove |= node_was_active && (node->WantCloseAll || node->WantCloseTabId == window->TabId) && window->HasCloseButton && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_UnsavedDocument);  // Submit all _expected_ closure from last frame
+        remove |= (window->DockTabWantClose);
+        if (remove)
+        {
+            window->DockTabWantClose = false;
+            if (node->Windows.Size == 1 && !node->IsCentralNode())
+            {
+                DockNodeHideHostWindow(node);
+                node->State = ImGuiDockNodeState_HostWindowHiddenBecauseSingleWindow;
+                DockNodeRemoveWindow(node, window, node->ID); // Will delete the node so it'll be invalid on return
+                return;
+            }
+            DockNodeRemoveWindow(node, window, node->ID);
+            window_n--;
+            continue;
+        }
+
+        // FIXME-DOCKING: Missing policies for conflict resolution, hence the "Experimental" tag on this.
+        //node->LocalFlagsInWindow &= ~window->WindowClass.DockNodeFlagsOverrideClear;
+        node->LocalFlagsInWindows |= window->WindowClass.DockNodeFlagsOverrideSet;
+    }
+    node->UpdateMergedFlags();
+
+    // Auto-hide tab bar option
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags node_flags = node->MergedFlags;
+    if (node->WantHiddenTabBarUpdate && node->Windows.Size == 1 && (node_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_AutoHideTabBar) && !node->IsHiddenTabBar())
+        node->WantHiddenTabBarToggle = true;
+    node->WantHiddenTabBarUpdate = false;
+
+    // Cancel toggling if we know our tab bar is enforced to be hidden at all times
+    if (node->WantHiddenTabBarToggle && node->VisibleWindow && (node->VisibleWindow->WindowClass.DockNodeFlagsOverrideSet & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_HiddenTabBar))
+        node->WantHiddenTabBarToggle = false;
+
+    // Apply toggles at a single point of the frame (here!)
+    if (node->Windows.Size > 1)
+        node->SetLocalFlags(node->LocalFlags & ~ImGuiDockNodeFlags_HiddenTabBar);
+    else if (node->WantHiddenTabBarToggle)
+        node->SetLocalFlags(node->LocalFlags ^ ImGuiDockNodeFlags_HiddenTabBar);
+    node->WantHiddenTabBarToggle = false;
+
+    DockNodeUpdateVisibleFlag(node);
+}
+
+// This is rarely called as DockNodeUpdateForRootNode() generally does it most frames.
+static void ImGui::DockNodeUpdateHasCentralNodeChild(ImGuiDockNode* node)
+{
+    node->HasCentralNodeChild = false;
+    if (node->ChildNodes[0])
+        DockNodeUpdateHasCentralNodeChild(node->ChildNodes[0]);
+    if (node->ChildNodes[1])
+        DockNodeUpdateHasCentralNodeChild(node->ChildNodes[1]);
+    if (node->IsRootNode())
+    {
+        ImGuiDockNode* mark_node = node->CentralNode;
+        while (mark_node)
+        {
+            mark_node->HasCentralNodeChild = true;
+            mark_node = mark_node->ParentNode;
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+static void ImGui::DockNodeUpdateVisibleFlag(ImGuiDockNode* node)
+{
+    // Update visibility flag
+    bool is_visible = (node->ParentNode == NULL) ? node->IsDockSpace() : node->IsCentralNode();
+    is_visible |= (node->Windows.Size > 0);
+    is_visible |= (node->ChildNodes[0] && node->ChildNodes[0]->IsVisible);
+    is_visible |= (node->ChildNodes[1] && node->ChildNodes[1]->IsVisible);
+    node->IsVisible = is_visible;
+}
+
+static void ImGui::DockNodeStartMouseMovingWindow(ImGuiDockNode* node, ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(node->WantMouseMove == true);
+    StartMouseMovingWindow(window);
+    g.ActiveIdClickOffset = g.IO.MouseClickedPos[0] - node->Pos;
+    g.MovingWindow = window; // If we are docked into a non moveable root window, StartMouseMovingWindow() won't set g.MovingWindow. Override that decision.
+    node->WantMouseMove = false;
+}
+
+// Update CentralNode, OnlyNodeWithWindows, LastFocusedNodeID. Copy window class.
+static void ImGui::DockNodeUpdateForRootNode(ImGuiDockNode* node)
+{
+    DockNodeUpdateFlagsAndCollapse(node);
+
+    // - Setup central node pointers
+    // - Find if there's only a single visible window in the hierarchy (in which case we need to display a regular title bar -> FIXME-DOCK: that last part is not done yet!)
+    // Cannot merge this with DockNodeUpdateFlagsAndCollapse() because FirstNodeWithWindows is found after window removal and child collapsing
+    ImGuiDockNodeTreeInfo info;
+    DockNodeFindInfo(node, &info);
+    node->CentralNode = info.CentralNode;
+    node->OnlyNodeWithWindows = (info.CountNodesWithWindows == 1) ? info.FirstNodeWithWindows : NULL;
+    node->CountNodeWithWindows = info.CountNodesWithWindows;
+    if (node->LastFocusedNodeId == 0 && info.FirstNodeWithWindows != NULL)
+        node->LastFocusedNodeId = info.FirstNodeWithWindows->ID;
+
+    // Copy the window class from of our first window so it can be used for proper dock filtering.
+    // When node has mixed windows, prioritize the class with the most constraint (DockingAllowUnclassed = false) as the reference to copy.
+    // FIXME-DOCK: We don't recurse properly, this code could be reworked to work from DockNodeUpdateScanRec.
+    if (ImGuiDockNode* first_node_with_windows = info.FirstNodeWithWindows)
+    {
+        node->WindowClass = first_node_with_windows->Windows[0]->WindowClass;
+        for (int n = 1; n < first_node_with_windows->Windows.Size; n++)
+            if (first_node_with_windows->Windows[n]->WindowClass.DockingAllowUnclassed == false)
+            {
+                node->WindowClass = first_node_with_windows->Windows[n]->WindowClass;
+                break;
+            }
+    }
+
+    ImGuiDockNode* mark_node = node->CentralNode;
+    while (mark_node)
+    {
+        mark_node->HasCentralNodeChild = true;
+        mark_node = mark_node->ParentNode;
+    }
+}
+
+static void DockNodeSetupHostWindow(ImGuiDockNode* node, ImGuiWindow* host_window)
+{
+    // Remove ourselves from any previous different host window
+    // This can happen if a user mistakenly does (see #4295 for details):
+    //  - N+0: DockBuilderAddNode(id, 0)    // missing ImGuiDockNodeFlags_DockSpace
+    //  - N+1: NewFrame()                   // will create floating host window for that node
+    //  - N+1: DockSpace(id)                // requalify node as dockspace, moving host window
+    if (node->HostWindow && node->HostWindow != host_window && node->HostWindow->DockNodeAsHost == node)
+        node->HostWindow->DockNodeAsHost = NULL;
+
+    host_window->DockNodeAsHost = node;
+    node->HostWindow = host_window;
+}
+
+static void ImGui::DockNodeUpdate(ImGuiDockNode* node)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(node->LastFrameActive != g.FrameCount);
+    node->LastFrameAlive = g.FrameCount;
+    node->IsBgDrawnThisFrame = false;
+
+    node->CentralNode = node->OnlyNodeWithWindows = NULL;
+    if (node->IsRootNode())
+        DockNodeUpdateForRootNode(node);
+
+    // Remove tab bar if not needed
+    if (node->TabBar && node->IsNoTabBar())
+        DockNodeRemoveTabBar(node);
+
+    // Early out for hidden root dock nodes (when all DockId references are in inactive windows, or there is only 1 floating window holding on the DockId)
+    bool want_to_hide_host_window = false;
+    if (node->IsFloatingNode())
+    {
+        if (node->Windows.Size <= 1 && node->IsLeafNode())
+            if (!g.IO.ConfigDockingAlwaysTabBar && (node->Windows.Size == 0 || !node->Windows[0]->WindowClass.DockingAlwaysTabBar))
+                want_to_hide_host_window = true;
+        if (node->CountNodeWithWindows == 0)
+            want_to_hide_host_window = true;
+    }
+    if (want_to_hide_host_window)
+    {
+        if (node->Windows.Size == 1)
+        {
+            // Floating window pos/size is authoritative
+            ImGuiWindow* single_window = node->Windows[0];
+            node->Pos = single_window->Pos;
+            node->Size = single_window->SizeFull;
+            node->AuthorityForPos = node->AuthorityForSize = node->AuthorityForViewport = ImGuiDataAuthority_Window;
+
+            // Transfer focus immediately so when we revert to a regular window it is immediately selected
+            if (node->HostWindow && g.NavWindow == node->HostWindow)
+                FocusWindow(single_window);
+            if (node->HostWindow)
+            {
+                single_window->Viewport = node->HostWindow->Viewport;
+                single_window->ViewportId = node->HostWindow->ViewportId;
+                if (node->HostWindow->ViewportOwned)
+                {
+                    single_window->Viewport->Window = single_window;
+                    single_window->ViewportOwned = true;
+                }
+            }
+        }
+
+        DockNodeHideHostWindow(node);
+        node->State = ImGuiDockNodeState_HostWindowHiddenBecauseSingleWindow;
+        node->WantCloseAll = false;
+        node->WantCloseTabId = 0;
+        node->HasCloseButton = node->HasWindowMenuButton = false;
+        node->LastFrameActive = g.FrameCount;
+
+        if (node->WantMouseMove && node->Windows.Size == 1)
+            DockNodeStartMouseMovingWindow(node, node->Windows[0]);
+        return;
+    }
+
+    // In some circumstance we will defer creating the host window (so everything will be kept hidden),
+    // while the expected visible window is resizing itself.
+    // This is important for first-time (no ini settings restored) single window when io.ConfigDockingAlwaysTabBar is enabled,
+    // otherwise the node ends up using the minimum window size. Effectively those windows will take an extra frame to show up:
+    //   N+0: Begin(): window created (with no known size), node is created
+    //   N+1: DockNodeUpdate(): node skip creating host window / Begin(): window size applied, not visible
+    //   N+2: DockNodeUpdate(): node can create host window / Begin(): window becomes visible
+    // We could remove this frame if we could reliably calculate the expected window size during node update, before the Begin() code.
+    // It would require a generalization of CalcWindowExpectedSize(), probably extracting code away from Begin().
+    // In reality it isn't very important as user quickly ends up with size data in .ini file.
+    if (node->IsVisible && node->HostWindow == NULL && node->IsFloatingNode() && node->IsLeafNode())
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(node->Windows.Size > 0);
+        ImGuiWindow* ref_window = NULL;
+        if (node->SelectedTabId != 0) // Note that we prune single-window-node settings on .ini loading, so this is generally 0 for them!
+            ref_window = DockNodeFindWindowByID(node, node->SelectedTabId);
+        if (ref_window == NULL)
+            ref_window = node->Windows[0];
+        if (ref_window->AutoFitFramesX > 0 || ref_window->AutoFitFramesY > 0)
+        {
+            node->State = ImGuiDockNodeState_HostWindowHiddenBecauseWindowsAreResizing;
+            return;
+        }
+    }
+
+    const ImGuiDockNodeFlags node_flags = node->MergedFlags;
+
+    // Decide if the node will have a close button and a window menu button
+    node->HasWindowMenuButton = (node->Windows.Size > 0) && (node_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoWindowMenuButton) == 0;
+    node->HasCloseButton = false;
+    for (int window_n = 0; window_n < node->Windows.Size; window_n++)
+    {
+        // FIXME-DOCK: Setting DockIsActive here means that for single active window in a leaf node, DockIsActive will be cleared until the next Begin() call.
+        ImGuiWindow* window = node->Windows[window_n];
+        node->HasCloseButton |= window->HasCloseButton;
+        window->DockIsActive = (node->Windows.Size > 1);
+    }
+    if (node_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoCloseButton)
+        node->HasCloseButton = false;
+
+    // Bind or create host window
+    ImGuiWindow* host_window = NULL;
+    bool beginned_into_host_window = false;
+    if (node->IsDockSpace())
+    {
+        // [Explicit root dockspace node]
+        IM_ASSERT(node->HostWindow);
+        host_window = node->HostWindow;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // [Automatic root or child nodes]
+        if (node->IsRootNode() && node->IsVisible)
+        {
+            ImGuiWindow* ref_window = (node->Windows.Size > 0) ? node->Windows[0] : NULL;
+
+            // Sync Pos
+            if (node->AuthorityForPos == ImGuiDataAuthority_Window && ref_window)
+                SetNextWindowPos(ref_window->Pos);
+            else if (node->AuthorityForPos == ImGuiDataAuthority_DockNode)
+                SetNextWindowPos(node->Pos);
+
+            // Sync Size
+            if (node->AuthorityForSize == ImGuiDataAuthority_Window && ref_window)
+                SetNextWindowSize(ref_window->SizeFull);
+            else if (node->AuthorityForSize == ImGuiDataAuthority_DockNode)
+                SetNextWindowSize(node->Size);
+
+            // Sync Collapsed
+            if (node->AuthorityForSize == ImGuiDataAuthority_Window && ref_window)
+                SetNextWindowCollapsed(ref_window->Collapsed);
+
+            // Sync Viewport
+            if (node->AuthorityForViewport == ImGuiDataAuthority_Window && ref_window)
+                SetNextWindowViewport(ref_window->ViewportId);
+
+            SetNextWindowClass(&node->WindowClass);
+
+            // Begin into the host window
+            char window_label[20];
+            DockNodeGetHostWindowTitle(node, window_label, IM_ARRAYSIZE(window_label));
+            ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse | ImGuiWindowFlags_DockNodeHost;
+            window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing;
+            window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse;
+            window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar;
+
+            SetNextWindowBgAlpha(0.0f); // Don't set ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground because it disables borders
+            PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, ImVec2(0, 0));
+            Begin(window_label, NULL, window_flags);
+            PopStyleVar();
+            beginned_into_host_window = true;
+
+            host_window = g.CurrentWindow;
+            DockNodeSetupHostWindow(node, host_window);
+            host_window->DC.CursorPos = host_window->Pos;
+            node->Pos = host_window->Pos;
+            node->Size = host_window->Size;
+
+            // We set ImGuiWindowFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing because we don't want the host window to take full focus (e.g. steal NavWindow)
+            // But we still it bring it to the front of display. There's no way to choose this precise behavior via window flags.
+            // One simple case to ponder if: window A has a toggle to create windows B/C/D. Dock B/C/D together, clear the toggle and enable it again.
+            // When reappearing B/C/D will request focus and be moved to the top of the display pile, but they are not linked to the dock host window
+            // during the frame they appear. The dock host window would keep its old display order, and the sorting in EndFrame would move B/C/D back
+            // after the dock host window, losing their top-most status.
+            if (node->HostWindow->Appearing)
+                BringWindowToDisplayFront(node->HostWindow);
+
+            node->AuthorityForPos = node->AuthorityForSize = node->AuthorityForViewport = ImGuiDataAuthority_Auto;
+        }
+        else if (node->ParentNode)
+        {
+            node->HostWindow = host_window = node->ParentNode->HostWindow;
+            node->AuthorityForPos = node->AuthorityForSize = node->AuthorityForViewport = ImGuiDataAuthority_Auto;
+        }
+        if (node->WantMouseMove && node->HostWindow)
+            DockNodeStartMouseMovingWindow(node, node->HostWindow);
+    }
+
+    // Update focused node (the one whose title bar is highlight) within a node tree
+    if (node->IsSplitNode())
+        IM_ASSERT(node->TabBar == NULL);
+    if (node->IsRootNode())
+        if (g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow->RootWindow->DockNode && g.NavWindow->RootWindow->ParentWindow == host_window)
+            node->LastFocusedNodeId = g.NavWindow->RootWindow->DockNode->ID;
+
+    // Register a hit-test hole in the window unless we are currently dragging a window that is compatible with our dockspace
+    ImGuiDockNode* central_node = node->CentralNode;
+    const bool central_node_hole = node->IsRootNode() && host_window && (node_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_PassthruCentralNode) != 0 && central_node != NULL && central_node->IsEmpty();
+    bool central_node_hole_register_hit_test_hole = central_node_hole;
+    if (central_node_hole)
+        if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = ImGui::GetDragDropPayload())
+            if (payload->IsDataType(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_WINDOW) && DockNodeIsDropAllowed(host_window, *(ImGuiWindow**)payload->Data))
+                central_node_hole_register_hit_test_hole = false;
+    if (central_node_hole_register_hit_test_hole)
+    {
+        // We add a little padding to match the "resize from edges" behavior and allow grabbing the splitter easily.
+        // (But we only add it if there's something else on the other side of the hole, otherwise for e.g. fullscreen
+        // covering passthru node we'd have a gap on the edge not covered by the hole)
+        IM_ASSERT(node->IsDockSpace()); // We cannot pass this flag without the DockSpace() api. Testing this because we also setup the hole in host_window->ParentNode
+        ImGuiDockNode* root_node = DockNodeGetRootNode(central_node);
+        ImRect root_rect(root_node->Pos, root_node->Pos + root_node->Size);
+        ImRect hole_rect(central_node->Pos, central_node->Pos + central_node->Size);
+        if (hole_rect.Min.x > root_rect.Min.x) { hole_rect.Min.x += WINDOWS_HOVER_PADDING; }
+        if (hole_rect.Max.x < root_rect.Max.x) { hole_rect.Max.x -= WINDOWS_HOVER_PADDING; }
+        if (hole_rect.Min.y > root_rect.Min.y) { hole_rect.Min.y += WINDOWS_HOVER_PADDING; }
+        if (hole_rect.Max.y < root_rect.Max.y) { hole_rect.Max.y -= WINDOWS_HOVER_PADDING; }
+        //GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(hole_rect.Min, hole_rect.Max, IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 255));
+        if (central_node_hole && !hole_rect.IsInverted())
+        {
+            SetWindowHitTestHole(host_window, hole_rect.Min, hole_rect.Max - hole_rect.Min);
+            if (host_window->ParentWindow)
+                SetWindowHitTestHole(host_window->ParentWindow, hole_rect.Min, hole_rect.Max - hole_rect.Min);
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Update position/size, process and draw resizing splitters
+    if (node->IsRootNode() && host_window)
+    {
+        host_window->DrawList->ChannelsSetCurrent(1);
+        DockNodeTreeUpdatePosSize(node, host_window->Pos, host_window->Size);
+        DockNodeTreeUpdateSplitter(node);
+    }
+
+    // Draw empty node background (currently can only be the Central Node)
+    if (host_window && node->IsEmpty() && node->IsVisible)
+    {
+        host_window->DrawList->ChannelsSetCurrent(0);
+        node->LastBgColor = (node_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_PassthruCentralNode) ? 0 : GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_DockingEmptyBg);
+        if (node->LastBgColor != 0)
+            host_window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(node->Pos, node->Pos + node->Size, node->LastBgColor);
+        node->IsBgDrawnThisFrame = true;
+    }
+
+    // Draw whole dockspace background if ImGuiDockNodeFlags_PassthruCentralNode if set.
+    // We need to draw a background at the root level if requested by ImGuiDockNodeFlags_PassthruCentralNode, but we will only know the correct pos/size
+    // _after_ processing the resizing splitters. So we are using the DrawList channel splitting facility to submit drawing primitives out of order!
+    const bool render_dockspace_bg = node->IsRootNode() && host_window && (node_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_PassthruCentralNode) != 0;
+    if (render_dockspace_bg && node->IsVisible)
+    {
+        host_window->DrawList->ChannelsSetCurrent(0);
+        if (central_node_hole)
+            RenderRectFilledWithHole(host_window->DrawList, node->Rect(), central_node->Rect(), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_WindowBg), 0.0f);
+        else
+            host_window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(node->Pos, node->Pos + node->Size, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_WindowBg), 0.0f);
+    }
+
+    // Draw and populate Tab Bar
+    if (host_window)
+        host_window->DrawList->ChannelsSetCurrent(1);
+    if (host_window && node->Windows.Size > 0)
+    {
+        DockNodeUpdateTabBar(node, host_window);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        node->WantCloseAll = false;
+        node->WantCloseTabId = 0;
+        node->IsFocused = false;
+    }
+    if (node->TabBar && node->TabBar->SelectedTabId)
+        node->SelectedTabId = node->TabBar->SelectedTabId;
+    else if (node->Windows.Size > 0)
+        node->SelectedTabId = node->Windows[0]->TabId;
+
+    // Draw payload drop target
+    if (host_window && node->IsVisible)
+        if (node->IsRootNode() && (g.MovingWindow == NULL || g.MovingWindow->RootWindowDockTree != host_window))
+            BeginDockableDragDropTarget(host_window);
+
+    // We update this after DockNodeUpdateTabBar()
+    node->LastFrameActive = g.FrameCount;
+
+    // Recurse into children
+    // FIXME-DOCK FIXME-OPT: Should not need to recurse into children
+    if (host_window)
+    {
+        if (node->ChildNodes[0])
+            DockNodeUpdate(node->ChildNodes[0]);
+        if (node->ChildNodes[1])
+            DockNodeUpdate(node->ChildNodes[1]);
+
+        // Render outer borders last (after the tab bar)
+        if (node->IsRootNode())
+        {
+            host_window->DrawList->ChannelsSetCurrent(1);
+            RenderWindowOuterBorders(host_window);
+        }
+
+        // Further rendering (= hosted windows background) will be drawn on layer 0
+        host_window->DrawList->ChannelsSetCurrent(0);
+    }
+
+    // End host window
+    if (beginned_into_host_window) //-V1020
+        End();
+}
+
+// Compare TabItem nodes given the last known DockOrder (will persist in .ini file as hint), used to sort tabs when multiple tabs are added on the same frame.
+static int IMGUI_CDECL TabItemComparerByDockOrder(const void* lhs, const void* rhs)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* a = ((const ImGuiTabItem*)lhs)->Window;
+    ImGuiWindow* b = ((const ImGuiTabItem*)rhs)->Window;
+    if (int d = ((a->DockOrder == -1) ? INT_MAX : a->DockOrder) - ((b->DockOrder == -1) ? INT_MAX : b->DockOrder))
+        return d;
+    return (a->BeginOrderWithinContext - b->BeginOrderWithinContext);
+}
+
+static ImGuiID ImGui::DockNodeUpdateWindowMenu(ImGuiDockNode* node, ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar)
+{
+    // Try to position the menu so it is more likely to stays within the same viewport
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiID ret_tab_id = 0;
+    if (g.Style.WindowMenuButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Left)
+        SetNextWindowPos(ImVec2(node->Pos.x, node->Pos.y + GetFrameHeight()), ImGuiCond_Always, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
+    else
+        SetNextWindowPos(ImVec2(node->Pos.x + node->Size.x, node->Pos.y + GetFrameHeight()), ImGuiCond_Always, ImVec2(1.0f, 0.0f));
+    if (BeginPopup("#WindowMenu"))
+    {
+        node->IsFocused = true;
+        if (tab_bar->Tabs.Size == 1)
+        {
+            if (MenuItem("Hide tab bar", NULL, node->IsHiddenTabBar()))
+                node->WantHiddenTabBarToggle = true;
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++)
+            {
+                ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n];
+                if (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button)
+                    continue;
+                if (Selectable(tab_bar->GetTabName(tab), tab->ID == tab_bar->SelectedTabId))
+                    ret_tab_id = tab->ID;
+                SameLine();
+                Text("   ");
+            }
+        }
+        EndPopup();
+    }
+    return ret_tab_id;
+}
+
+// User helper to append/amend into a dock node tab bar. Most commonly used to add e.g. a "+" button.
+bool ImGui::DockNodeBeginAmendTabBar(ImGuiDockNode* node)
+{
+    if (node->TabBar == NULL || node->HostWindow == NULL)
+        return false;
+    if (node->MergedFlags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_KeepAliveOnly)
+        return false;
+    Begin(node->HostWindow->Name);
+    PushOverrideID(node->ID);
+    bool ret = BeginTabBarEx(node->TabBar, node->TabBar->BarRect, node->TabBar->Flags, node);
+    IM_UNUSED(ret);
+    IM_ASSERT(ret);
+    return true;
+}
+
+void ImGui::DockNodeEndAmendTabBar()
+{
+    EndTabBar();
+    PopID();
+    End();
+}
+
+static bool IsDockNodeTitleBarHighlighted(ImGuiDockNode* node, ImGuiDockNode* root_node, ImGuiWindow* host_window)
+{
+    // CTRL+Tab highlight (only highlighting leaf node, not whole hierarchy)
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.NavWindowingTarget)
+        return (g.NavWindowingTarget->DockNode == node);
+
+    // FIXME-DOCKING: May want alternative to treat central node void differently? e.g. if (g.NavWindow == host_window)
+    if (g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight == host_window->RootWindowDockTree && root_node->LastFocusedNodeId == node->ID)
+        for (ImGuiDockNode* parent_node = g.NavWindow->RootWindow->DockNode; parent_node != NULL; parent_node = parent_node->HostWindow ? parent_node->HostWindow->RootWindow->DockNode : NULL)
+            if ((parent_node = ImGui::DockNodeGetRootNode(parent_node)) == root_node)
+                return true;
+    return false;
+}
+
+// Submit the tab bar corresponding to a dock node and various housekeeping details.
+static void ImGui::DockNodeUpdateTabBar(ImGuiDockNode* node, ImGuiWindow* host_window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+
+    const bool node_was_active = (node->LastFrameActive + 1 == g.FrameCount);
+    const bool closed_all = node->WantCloseAll && node_was_active;
+    const ImGuiID closed_one = node->WantCloseTabId && node_was_active;
+    node->WantCloseAll = false;
+    node->WantCloseTabId = 0;
+
+    // Decide if we should use a focused title bar color
+    bool is_focused = false;
+    ImGuiDockNode* root_node = DockNodeGetRootNode(node);
+    if (IsDockNodeTitleBarHighlighted(node, root_node, host_window))
+        is_focused = true;
+
+    // Hidden tab bar will show a triangle on the upper-left (in Begin)
+    if (node->IsHiddenTabBar() || node->IsNoTabBar())
+    {
+        node->VisibleWindow = (node->Windows.Size > 0) ? node->Windows[0] : NULL;
+        node->IsFocused = is_focused;
+        if (is_focused)
+            node->LastFrameFocused = g.FrameCount;
+        if (node->VisibleWindow)
+        {
+            // Notify root of visible window (used to display title in OS task bar)
+            if (is_focused || root_node->VisibleWindow == NULL)
+                root_node->VisibleWindow = node->VisibleWindow;
+            if (node->TabBar)
+                node->TabBar->VisibleTabId = node->VisibleWindow->TabId;
+        }
+        return;
+    }
+
+    // Move ourselves to the Menu layer (so we can be accessed by tapping Alt) + undo SkipItems flag in order to draw over the title bar even if the window is collapsed
+    bool backup_skip_item = host_window->SkipItems;
+    if (!node->IsDockSpace())
+    {
+        host_window->SkipItems = false;
+        host_window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Menu;
+    }
+
+    // Use PushOverrideID() instead of PushID() to use the node id _without_ the host window ID.
+    // This is to facilitate computing those ID from the outside, and will affect more or less only the ID of the collapse button, popup and tabs,
+    // as docked windows themselves will override the stack with their own root ID.
+    PushOverrideID(node->ID);
+    ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = node->TabBar;
+    bool tab_bar_is_recreated = (tab_bar == NULL); // Tab bar are automatically destroyed when a node gets hidden
+    if (tab_bar == NULL)
+    {
+        DockNodeAddTabBar(node);
+        tab_bar = node->TabBar;
+    }
+
+    ImGuiID focus_tab_id = 0;
+    node->IsFocused = is_focused;
+
+    const ImGuiDockNodeFlags node_flags = node->MergedFlags;
+    const bool has_window_menu_button = (node_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoWindowMenuButton) == 0 && (style.WindowMenuButtonPosition != ImGuiDir_None);
+
+    // In a dock node, the Collapse Button turns into the Window Menu button.
+    // FIXME-DOCK FIXME-OPT: Could we recycle popups id across multiple dock nodes?
+    if (has_window_menu_button && IsPopupOpen("#WindowMenu"))
+    {
+        if (ImGuiID tab_id = DockNodeUpdateWindowMenu(node, tab_bar))
+            focus_tab_id = tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = tab_id;
+        is_focused |= node->IsFocused;
+    }
+
+    // Layout
+    ImRect title_bar_rect, tab_bar_rect;
+    ImVec2 window_menu_button_pos;
+    ImVec2 close_button_pos;
+    DockNodeCalcTabBarLayout(node, &title_bar_rect, &tab_bar_rect, &window_menu_button_pos, &close_button_pos);
+
+    // Submit new tabs, they will be added as Unsorted and sorted below based on relative DockOrder value.
+    const int tabs_count_old = tab_bar->Tabs.Size;
+    for (int window_n = 0; window_n < node->Windows.Size; window_n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* window = node->Windows[window_n];
+        if (TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, window->TabId) == NULL)
+            TabBarAddTab(tab_bar, ImGuiTabItemFlags_Unsorted, window);
+    }
+
+    // Title bar
+    if (is_focused)
+        node->LastFrameFocused = g.FrameCount;
+    ImU32 title_bar_col = GetColorU32(host_window->Collapsed ? ImGuiCol_TitleBgCollapsed : is_focused ? ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive : ImGuiCol_TitleBg);
+    ImDrawFlags rounding_flags = CalcRoundingFlagsForRectInRect(title_bar_rect, host_window->Rect(), DOCKING_SPLITTER_SIZE);
+    host_window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(title_bar_rect.Min, title_bar_rect.Max, title_bar_col, host_window->WindowRounding, rounding_flags);
+
+    // Docking/Collapse button
+    if (has_window_menu_button)
+    {
+        if (CollapseButton(host_window->GetID("#COLLAPSE"), window_menu_button_pos, node)) // == DockNodeGetWindowMenuButtonId(node)
+            OpenPopup("#WindowMenu");
+        if (IsItemActive())
+            focus_tab_id = tab_bar->SelectedTabId;
+    }
+
+    // If multiple tabs are appearing on the same frame, sort them based on their persistent DockOrder value
+    int tabs_unsorted_start = tab_bar->Tabs.Size;
+    for (int tab_n = tab_bar->Tabs.Size - 1; tab_n >= 0 && (tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n].Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Unsorted); tab_n--)
+    {
+        // FIXME-DOCK: Consider only clearing the flag after the tab has been alive for a few consecutive frames, allowing late comers to not break sorting?
+        tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n].Flags &= ~ImGuiTabItemFlags_Unsorted;
+        tabs_unsorted_start = tab_n;
+    }
+    if (tab_bar->Tabs.Size > tabs_unsorted_start)
+    {
+        IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_DOCKING("[docking] In node 0x%08X: %d new appearing tabs:%s\n", node->ID, tab_bar->Tabs.Size - tabs_unsorted_start, (tab_bar->Tabs.Size > tabs_unsorted_start + 1) ? " (will sort)" : "");
+        for (int tab_n = tabs_unsorted_start; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++)
+            IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_DOCKING("[docking] - Tab '%s' Order %d\n", tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n].Window->Name, tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n].Window->DockOrder);
+        if (tab_bar->Tabs.Size > tabs_unsorted_start + 1)
+            ImQsort(tab_bar->Tabs.Data + tabs_unsorted_start, tab_bar->Tabs.Size - tabs_unsorted_start, sizeof(ImGuiTabItem), TabItemComparerByDockOrder);
+    }
+
+    // Apply NavWindow focus back to the tab bar
+    if (g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow->RootWindow->DockNode == node)
+        tab_bar->SelectedTabId = g.NavWindow->RootWindow->TabId;
+
+    // Selected newly added tabs, or persistent tab ID if the tab bar was just recreated
+    if (tab_bar_is_recreated && TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, node->SelectedTabId) != NULL)
+        tab_bar->SelectedTabId = tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = node->SelectedTabId;
+    else if (tab_bar->Tabs.Size > tabs_count_old)
+        tab_bar->SelectedTabId = tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = tab_bar->Tabs.back().Window->TabId;
+
+    // Begin tab bar
+    ImGuiTabBarFlags tab_bar_flags = ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTabBarFlags_AutoSelectNewTabs; // | ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoTabListScrollingButtons);
+    tab_bar_flags |= ImGuiTabBarFlags_SaveSettings | ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode;
+    if (!host_window->Collapsed && is_focused)
+        tab_bar_flags |= ImGuiTabBarFlags_IsFocused;
+    BeginTabBarEx(tab_bar, tab_bar_rect, tab_bar_flags, node);
+    //host_window->DrawList->AddRect(tab_bar_rect.Min, tab_bar_rect.Max, IM_COL32(255,0,255,255));
+
+    // Backup style colors
+    ImVec4 backup_style_cols[ImGuiWindowDockStyleCol_COUNT];
+    for (int color_n = 0; color_n < ImGuiWindowDockStyleCol_COUNT; color_n++)
+        backup_style_cols[color_n] = g.Style.Colors[GWindowDockStyleColors[color_n]];
+
+    // Submit actual tabs
+    node->VisibleWindow = NULL;
+    for (int window_n = 0; window_n < node->Windows.Size; window_n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* window = node->Windows[window_n];
+        if ((closed_all || closed_one == window->TabId) && window->HasCloseButton && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_UnsavedDocument))
+            continue;
+        if (window->LastFrameActive + 1 >= g.FrameCount || !node_was_active)
+        {
+            ImGuiTabItemFlags tab_item_flags = 0;
+            tab_item_flags |= window->WindowClass.TabItemFlagsOverrideSet;
+            if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_UnsavedDocument)
+                tab_item_flags |= ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument;
+            if (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton)
+                tab_item_flags |= ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton;
+
+            // Apply stored style overrides for the window
+            for (int color_n = 0; color_n < ImGuiWindowDockStyleCol_COUNT; color_n++)
+                g.Style.Colors[GWindowDockStyleColors[color_n]] = ColorConvertU32ToFloat4(window->DockStyle.Colors[color_n]);
+
+            // Note that TabItemEx() calls TabBarCalcTabID() so our tab item ID will ignore the current ID stack (rightly so)
+            bool tab_open = true;
+            TabItemEx(tab_bar, window->Name, window->HasCloseButton ? &tab_open : NULL, tab_item_flags, window);
+            if (!tab_open)
+                node->WantCloseTabId = window->TabId;
+            if (tab_bar->VisibleTabId == window->TabId)
+                node->VisibleWindow = window;
+
+            // Store last item data so it can be queried with IsItemXXX functions after the user Begin() call
+            window->DockTabItemStatusFlags = g.LastItemData.StatusFlags;
+            window->DockTabItemRect = g.LastItemData.Rect;
+
+            // Update navigation ID on menu layer
+            if (g.NavWindow && g.NavWindow->RootWindow == window && (window->DC.NavLayersActiveMask & (1 << ImGuiNavLayer_Menu)) == 0)
+                host_window->NavLastIds[1] = window->TabId;
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Restore style colors
+    for (int color_n = 0; color_n < ImGuiWindowDockStyleCol_COUNT; color_n++)
+        g.Style.Colors[GWindowDockStyleColors[color_n]] = backup_style_cols[color_n];
+
+    // Notify root of visible window (used to display title in OS task bar)
+    if (node->VisibleWindow)
+        if (is_focused || root_node->VisibleWindow == NULL)
+            root_node->VisibleWindow = node->VisibleWindow;
+
+    // Close button (after VisibleWindow was updated)
+    // Note that VisibleWindow may have been overrided by CTRL+Tabbing, so VisibleWindow->TabId may be != from tab_bar->SelectedTabId
+    const bool close_button_is_enabled = node->HasCloseButton && node->VisibleWindow && node->VisibleWindow->HasCloseButton;
+    const bool close_button_is_visible = node->HasCloseButton;
+    //const bool close_button_is_visible = close_button_is_enabled; // Most people would expect this behavior of not even showing the button (leaving a hole since we can't claim that space as other windows in the tba bar have one)
+    if (close_button_is_visible)
+    {
+        if (!close_button_is_enabled)
+        {
+            PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled, true);
+            PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, style.Colors[ImGuiCol_Text] * ImVec4(1.0f,1.0f,1.0f,0.4f));
+        }
+        if (CloseButton(host_window->GetID("#CLOSE"), close_button_pos))
+        {
+            node->WantCloseAll = true;
+            for (int n = 0; n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; n++)
+                TabBarCloseTab(tab_bar, &tab_bar->Tabs[n]);
+        }
+        //if (IsItemActive())
+        //    focus_tab_id = tab_bar->SelectedTabId;
+        if (!close_button_is_enabled)
+        {
+            PopStyleColor();
+            PopItemFlag();
+        }
+    }
+
+    // When clicking on the title bar outside of tabs, we still focus the selected tab for that node
+    // FIXME: TabItem use AllowItemOverlap so we manually perform a more specific test for now (hovered || held)
+    ImGuiID title_bar_id = host_window->GetID("#TITLEBAR");
+    if (g.HoveredId == 0 || g.HoveredId == title_bar_id || g.ActiveId == title_bar_id)
+    {
+        bool held;
+        ButtonBehavior(title_bar_rect, title_bar_id, NULL, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap);
+        if (g.HoveredId == title_bar_id)
+        {
+            // ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap + SetItemAllowOverlap() required for appending into dock node tab bar,
+            // otherwise dragging window will steal HoveredId and amended tabs cannot get them.
+            g.LastItemData.ID = title_bar_id;
+            SetItemAllowOverlap();
+        }
+        if (held)
+        {
+            if (IsMouseClicked(0))
+                focus_tab_id = tab_bar->SelectedTabId;
+
+            // Forward moving request to selected window
+            if (ImGuiTabItem* tab = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, tab_bar->SelectedTabId))
+                StartMouseMovingWindowOrNode(tab->Window ? tab->Window : node->HostWindow, node, false);
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Forward focus from host node to selected window
+    //if (is_focused && g.NavWindow == host_window && !g.NavWindowingTarget)
+    //    focus_tab_id = tab_bar->SelectedTabId;
+
+    // When clicked on a tab we requested focus to the docked child
+    // This overrides the value set by "forward focus from host node to selected window".
+    if (tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId)
+        focus_tab_id = tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId;
+
+    // Apply navigation focus
+    if (focus_tab_id != 0)
+        if (ImGuiTabItem* tab = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, focus_tab_id))
+            if (tab->Window)
+            {
+                FocusWindow(tab->Window);
+                NavInitWindow(tab->Window, false);
+            }
+
+    EndTabBar();
+    PopID();
+
+    // Restore SkipItems flag
+    if (!node->IsDockSpace())
+    {
+        host_window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Main;
+        host_window->SkipItems = backup_skip_item;
+    }
+}
+
+static void ImGui::DockNodeAddTabBar(ImGuiDockNode* node)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(node->TabBar == NULL);
+    node->TabBar = IM_NEW(ImGuiTabBar);
+}
+
+static void ImGui::DockNodeRemoveTabBar(ImGuiDockNode* node)
+{
+    if (node->TabBar == NULL)
+        return;
+    IM_DELETE(node->TabBar);
+    node->TabBar = NULL;
+}
+
+static bool DockNodeIsDropAllowedOne(ImGuiWindow* payload, ImGuiWindow* host_window)
+{
+    if (host_window->DockNodeAsHost && host_window->DockNodeAsHost->IsDockSpace() && payload->BeginOrderWithinContext < host_window->BeginOrderWithinContext)
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiWindowClass* host_class = host_window->DockNodeAsHost ? &host_window->DockNodeAsHost->WindowClass : &host_window->WindowClass;
+    ImGuiWindowClass* payload_class = &payload->WindowClass;
+    if (host_class->ClassId != payload_class->ClassId)
+    {
+        if (host_class->ClassId != 0 && host_class->DockingAllowUnclassed && payload_class->ClassId == 0)
+            return true;
+        if (payload_class->ClassId != 0 && payload_class->DockingAllowUnclassed && host_class->ClassId == 0)
+            return true;
+        return false;
+    }
+
+    // Prevent docking any window created above a popup
+    // Technically we should support it (e.g. in the case of a long-lived modal window that had fancy docking features),
+    // by e.g. adding a 'if (!ImGui::IsWindowWithinBeginStackOf(host_window, popup_window))' test.
+    // But it would requires more work on our end because the dock host windows is technically created in NewFrame()
+    // and our ->ParentXXX and ->RootXXX pointers inside windows are currently mislading or lacking.
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    for (int i = g.OpenPopupStack.Size - 1; i >= 0; i--)
+        if (ImGuiWindow* popup_window = g.OpenPopupStack[i].Window)
+            if (ImGui::IsWindowWithinBeginStackOf(payload, popup_window))   // Payload is created from within a popup begin stack.
+                return false;
+
+    return true;
+}
+
+static bool ImGui::DockNodeIsDropAllowed(ImGuiWindow* host_window, ImGuiWindow* root_payload)
+{
+    if (root_payload->DockNodeAsHost && root_payload->DockNodeAsHost->IsSplitNode()) // FIXME-DOCK: Missing filtering
+        return true;
+
+    const int payload_count = root_payload->DockNodeAsHost ? root_payload->DockNodeAsHost->Windows.Size : 1;
+    for (int payload_n = 0; payload_n < payload_count; payload_n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* payload = root_payload->DockNodeAsHost ? root_payload->DockNodeAsHost->Windows[payload_n] : root_payload;
+        if (DockNodeIsDropAllowedOne(payload, host_window))
+            return true;
+    }
+    return false;
+}
+
+// window menu button == collapse button when not in a dock node.
+// FIXME: This is similar to RenderWindowTitleBarContents(), may want to share code.
+static void ImGui::DockNodeCalcTabBarLayout(const ImGuiDockNode* node, ImRect* out_title_rect, ImRect* out_tab_bar_rect, ImVec2* out_window_menu_button_pos, ImVec2* out_close_button_pos)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+
+    ImRect r = ImRect(node->Pos.x, node->Pos.y, node->Pos.x + node->Size.x, node->Pos.y + g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f);
+    if (out_title_rect) { *out_title_rect = r; }
+
+    r.Min.x += style.WindowBorderSize;
+    r.Max.x -= style.WindowBorderSize;
+
+    float button_sz = g.FontSize;
+
+    ImVec2 window_menu_button_pos = r.Min;
+    r.Min.x += style.FramePadding.x;
+    r.Max.x -= style.FramePadding.x;
+    if (node->HasCloseButton)
+    {
+        r.Max.x -= button_sz;
+        if (out_close_button_pos) *out_close_button_pos = ImVec2(r.Max.x - style.FramePadding.x, r.Min.y);
+    }
+    if (node->HasWindowMenuButton && style.WindowMenuButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Left)
+    {
+        r.Min.x += button_sz + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
+    }
+    else if (node->HasWindowMenuButton && style.WindowMenuButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Right)
+    {
+        r.Max.x -= button_sz + style.FramePadding.x;
+        window_menu_button_pos = ImVec2(r.Max.x, r.Min.y);
+    }
+    if (out_tab_bar_rect) { *out_tab_bar_rect = r; }
+    if (out_window_menu_button_pos) { *out_window_menu_button_pos = window_menu_button_pos; }
+}
+
+void ImGui::DockNodeCalcSplitRects(ImVec2& pos_old, ImVec2& size_old, ImVec2& pos_new, ImVec2& size_new, ImGuiDir dir, ImVec2 size_new_desired)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const float dock_spacing = g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
+    const ImGuiAxis axis = (dir == ImGuiDir_Left || dir == ImGuiDir_Right) ? ImGuiAxis_X : ImGuiAxis_Y;
+    pos_new[axis ^ 1] = pos_old[axis ^ 1];
+    size_new[axis ^ 1] = size_old[axis ^ 1];
+
+    // Distribute size on given axis (with a desired size or equally)
+    const float w_avail = size_old[axis] - dock_spacing;
+    if (size_new_desired[axis] > 0.0f && size_new_desired[axis] <= w_avail * 0.5f)
+    {
+        size_new[axis] = size_new_desired[axis];
+        size_old[axis] = IM_FLOOR(w_avail - size_new[axis]);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        size_new[axis] = IM_FLOOR(w_avail * 0.5f);
+        size_old[axis] = IM_FLOOR(w_avail - size_new[axis]);
+    }
+
+    // Position each node
+    if (dir == ImGuiDir_Right || dir == ImGuiDir_Down)
+    {
+        pos_new[axis] = pos_old[axis] + size_old[axis] + dock_spacing;
+    }
+    else if (dir == ImGuiDir_Left || dir == ImGuiDir_Up)
+    {
+        pos_new[axis] = pos_old[axis];
+        pos_old[axis] = pos_new[axis] + size_new[axis] + dock_spacing;
+    }
+}
+
+// Retrieve the drop rectangles for a given direction or for the center + perform hit testing.
+bool ImGui::DockNodeCalcDropRectsAndTestMousePos(const ImRect& parent, ImGuiDir dir, ImRect& out_r, bool outer_docking, ImVec2* test_mouse_pos)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    const float parent_smaller_axis = ImMin(parent.GetWidth(), parent.GetHeight());
+    const float hs_for_central_nodes = ImMin(g.FontSize * 1.5f, ImMax(g.FontSize * 0.5f, parent_smaller_axis / 8.0f));
+    float hs_w; // Half-size, longer axis
+    float hs_h; // Half-size, smaller axis
+    ImVec2 off; // Distance from edge or center
+    if (outer_docking)
+    {
+        //hs_w = ImFloor(ImClamp(parent_smaller_axis - hs_for_central_nodes * 4.0f, g.FontSize * 0.5f, g.FontSize * 8.0f));
+        //hs_h = ImFloor(hs_w * 0.15f);
+        //off = ImVec2(ImFloor(parent.GetWidth() * 0.5f - GetFrameHeightWithSpacing() * 1.4f - hs_h), ImFloor(parent.GetHeight() * 0.5f - GetFrameHeightWithSpacing() * 1.4f - hs_h));
+        hs_w = ImFloor(hs_for_central_nodes * 1.50f);
+        hs_h = ImFloor(hs_for_central_nodes * 0.80f);
+        off = ImVec2(ImFloor(parent.GetWidth() * 0.5f - hs_h), ImFloor(parent.GetHeight() * 0.5f - hs_h));
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        hs_w = ImFloor(hs_for_central_nodes);
+        hs_h = ImFloor(hs_for_central_nodes * 0.90f);
+        off = ImVec2(ImFloor(hs_w * 2.40f), ImFloor(hs_w * 2.40f));
+    }
+
+    ImVec2 c = ImFloor(parent.GetCenter());
+    if      (dir == ImGuiDir_None)  { out_r = ImRect(c.x - hs_w, c.y - hs_w,         c.x + hs_w, c.y + hs_w);         }
+    else if (dir == ImGuiDir_Up)    { out_r = ImRect(c.x - hs_w, c.y - off.y - hs_h, c.x + hs_w, c.y - off.y + hs_h); }
+    else if (dir == ImGuiDir_Down)  { out_r = ImRect(c.x - hs_w, c.y + off.y - hs_h, c.x + hs_w, c.y + off.y + hs_h); }
+    else if (dir == ImGuiDir_Left)  { out_r = ImRect(c.x - off.x - hs_h, c.y - hs_w, c.x - off.x + hs_h, c.y + hs_w); }
+    else if (dir == ImGuiDir_Right) { out_r = ImRect(c.x + off.x - hs_h, c.y - hs_w, c.x + off.x + hs_h, c.y + hs_w); }
+
+    if (test_mouse_pos == NULL)
+        return false;
+
+    ImRect hit_r = out_r;
+    if (!outer_docking)
+    {
+        // Custom hit testing for the 5-way selection, designed to reduce flickering when moving diagonally between sides
+        hit_r.Expand(ImFloor(hs_w * 0.30f));
+        ImVec2 mouse_delta = (*test_mouse_pos - c);
+        float mouse_delta_len2 = ImLengthSqr(mouse_delta);
+        float r_threshold_center = hs_w * 1.4f;
+        float r_threshold_sides = hs_w * (1.4f + 1.2f);
+        if (mouse_delta_len2 < r_threshold_center * r_threshold_center)
+            return (dir == ImGuiDir_None);
+        if (mouse_delta_len2 < r_threshold_sides * r_threshold_sides)
+            return (dir == ImGetDirQuadrantFromDelta(mouse_delta.x, mouse_delta.y));
+    }
+    return hit_r.Contains(*test_mouse_pos);
+}
+
+// host_node may be NULL if the window doesn't have a DockNode already.
+// FIXME-DOCK: This is misnamed since it's also doing the filtering.
+static void ImGui::DockNodePreviewDockSetup(ImGuiWindow* host_window, ImGuiDockNode* host_node, ImGuiWindow* root_payload, ImGuiDockPreviewData* data, bool is_explicit_target, bool is_outer_docking)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    // There is an edge case when docking into a dockspace which only has inactive nodes.
+    // In this case DockNodeTreeFindNodeByPos() will have selected a leaf node which is inactive.
+    // Because the inactive leaf node doesn't have proper pos/size yet, we'll use the root node as reference.
+    ImGuiDockNode* root_payload_as_host = root_payload->DockNodeAsHost;
+    ImGuiDockNode* ref_node_for_rect = (host_node && !host_node->IsVisible) ? DockNodeGetRootNode(host_node) : host_node;
+    if (ref_node_for_rect)
+        IM_ASSERT(ref_node_for_rect->IsVisible == true);
+
+    // Filter, figure out where we are allowed to dock
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags src_node_flags = root_payload_as_host ? root_payload_as_host->MergedFlags : root_payload->WindowClass.DockNodeFlagsOverrideSet;
+    ImGuiDockNodeFlags dst_node_flags = host_node ? host_node->MergedFlags : host_window->WindowClass.DockNodeFlagsOverrideSet;
+    data->IsCenterAvailable = true;
+    if (is_outer_docking)
+        data->IsCenterAvailable = false;
+    else if (dst_node_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDocking)
+        data->IsCenterAvailable = false;
+    else if (host_node && (dst_node_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingInCentralNode) && host_node->IsCentralNode())
+        data->IsCenterAvailable = false;
+    else if ((!host_node || !host_node->IsEmpty()) && root_payload_as_host && root_payload_as_host->IsSplitNode() && (root_payload_as_host->OnlyNodeWithWindows == NULL)) // Is _visibly_ split?
+        data->IsCenterAvailable = false;
+    else if (dst_node_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingOverMe)
+        data->IsCenterAvailable = false;
+    else if ((src_node_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingOverOther) && (!host_node || !host_node->IsEmpty()))
+        data->IsCenterAvailable = false;
+    else if ((src_node_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingOverEmpty) && host_node && host_node->IsEmpty())
+        data->IsCenterAvailable = false;
+
+    data->IsSidesAvailable = true;
+    if ((dst_node_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoSplit) || g.IO.ConfigDockingNoSplit)
+        data->IsSidesAvailable = false;
+    else if (!is_outer_docking && host_node && host_node->ParentNode == NULL && host_node->IsCentralNode())
+        data->IsSidesAvailable = false;
+    else if ((dst_node_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingSplitMe) || (src_node_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingSplitOther))
+        data->IsSidesAvailable = false;
+
+    // Build a tentative future node (reuse same structure because it is practical. Shape will be readjusted when previewing a split)
+    data->FutureNode.HasCloseButton = (host_node ? host_node->HasCloseButton : host_window->HasCloseButton) || (root_payload->HasCloseButton);
+    data->FutureNode.HasWindowMenuButton = host_node ? true : ((host_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse) == 0);
+    data->FutureNode.Pos = ref_node_for_rect ? ref_node_for_rect->Pos : host_window->Pos;
+    data->FutureNode.Size = ref_node_for_rect ? ref_node_for_rect->Size : host_window->Size;
+
+    // Calculate drop shapes geometry for allowed splitting directions
+    IM_ASSERT(ImGuiDir_None == -1);
+    data->SplitNode = host_node;
+    data->SplitDir = ImGuiDir_None;
+    data->IsSplitDirExplicit = false;
+    if (!host_window->Collapsed)
+        for (int dir = ImGuiDir_None; dir < ImGuiDir_COUNT; dir++)
+        {
+            if (dir == ImGuiDir_None && !data->IsCenterAvailable)
+                continue;
+            if (dir != ImGuiDir_None && !data->IsSidesAvailable)
+                continue;
+            if (DockNodeCalcDropRectsAndTestMousePos(data->FutureNode.Rect(), (ImGuiDir)dir, data->DropRectsDraw[dir+1], is_outer_docking, &g.IO.MousePos))
+            {
+                data->SplitDir = (ImGuiDir)dir;
+                data->IsSplitDirExplicit = true;
+            }
+        }
+
+    // When docking without holding Shift, we only allow and preview docking when hovering over a drop rect or over the title bar
+    data->IsDropAllowed = (data->SplitDir != ImGuiDir_None) || (data->IsCenterAvailable);
+    if (!is_explicit_target && !data->IsSplitDirExplicit && !g.IO.ConfigDockingWithShift)
+        data->IsDropAllowed = false;
+
+    // Calculate split area
+    data->SplitRatio = 0.0f;
+    if (data->SplitDir != ImGuiDir_None)
+    {
+        ImGuiDir split_dir = data->SplitDir;
+        ImGuiAxis split_axis = (split_dir == ImGuiDir_Left || split_dir == ImGuiDir_Right) ? ImGuiAxis_X : ImGuiAxis_Y;
+        ImVec2 pos_new, pos_old = data->FutureNode.Pos;
+        ImVec2 size_new, size_old = data->FutureNode.Size;
+        DockNodeCalcSplitRects(pos_old, size_old, pos_new, size_new, split_dir, root_payload->Size);
+
+        // Calculate split ratio so we can pass it down the docking request
+        float split_ratio = ImSaturate(size_new[split_axis] / data->FutureNode.Size[split_axis]);
+        data->FutureNode.Pos = pos_new;
+        data->FutureNode.Size = size_new;
+        data->SplitRatio = (split_dir == ImGuiDir_Right || split_dir == ImGuiDir_Down) ? (1.0f - split_ratio) : (split_ratio);
+    }
+}
+
+static void ImGui::DockNodePreviewDockRender(ImGuiWindow* host_window, ImGuiDockNode* host_node, ImGuiWindow* root_payload, const ImGuiDockPreviewData* data)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindow == host_window);   // Because we rely on font size to calculate tab sizes
+
+    // With this option, we only display the preview on the target viewport, and the payload viewport is made transparent.
+    // To compensate for the single layer obstructed by the payload, we'll increase the alpha of the preview nodes.
+    const bool is_transparent_payload = g.IO.ConfigDockingTransparentPayload;
+
+    // In case the two windows involved are on different viewports, we will draw the overlay on each of them.
+    int overlay_draw_lists_count = 0;
+    ImDrawList* overlay_draw_lists[2];
+    overlay_draw_lists[overlay_draw_lists_count++] = GetForegroundDrawList(host_window->Viewport);
+    if (host_window->Viewport != root_payload->Viewport && !is_transparent_payload)
+        overlay_draw_lists[overlay_draw_lists_count++] = GetForegroundDrawList(root_payload->Viewport);
+
+    // Draw main preview rectangle
+    const ImU32 overlay_col_main = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_DockingPreview, is_transparent_payload ? 0.60f : 0.40f);
+    const ImU32 overlay_col_drop = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_DockingPreview, is_transparent_payload ? 0.90f : 0.70f);
+    const ImU32 overlay_col_drop_hovered = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_DockingPreview, is_transparent_payload ? 1.20f : 1.00f);
+    const ImU32 overlay_col_lines = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_NavWindowingHighlight, is_transparent_payload ? 0.80f : 0.60f);
+
+    // Display area preview
+    const bool can_preview_tabs = (root_payload->DockNodeAsHost == NULL || root_payload->DockNodeAsHost->Windows.Size > 0);
+    if (data->IsDropAllowed)
+    {
+        ImRect overlay_rect = data->FutureNode.Rect();
+        if (data->SplitDir == ImGuiDir_None && can_preview_tabs)
+            overlay_rect.Min.y += GetFrameHeight();
+        if (data->SplitDir != ImGuiDir_None || data->IsCenterAvailable)
+            for (int overlay_n = 0; overlay_n < overlay_draw_lists_count; overlay_n++)
+                overlay_draw_lists[overlay_n]->AddRectFilled(overlay_rect.Min, overlay_rect.Max, overlay_col_main, host_window->WindowRounding, CalcRoundingFlagsForRectInRect(overlay_rect, host_window->Rect(), DOCKING_SPLITTER_SIZE));
+    }
+
+    // Display tab shape/label preview unless we are splitting node (it generally makes the situation harder to read)
+    if (data->IsDropAllowed && can_preview_tabs && data->SplitDir == ImGuiDir_None && data->IsCenterAvailable)
+    {
+        // Compute target tab bar geometry so we can locate our preview tabs
+        ImRect tab_bar_rect;
+        DockNodeCalcTabBarLayout(&data->FutureNode, NULL, &tab_bar_rect, NULL, NULL);
+        ImVec2 tab_pos = tab_bar_rect.Min;
+        if (host_node && host_node->TabBar)
+        {
+            if (!host_node->IsHiddenTabBar() && !host_node->IsNoTabBar())
+                tab_pos.x += host_node->TabBar->WidthAllTabs + g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x; // We don't use OffsetNewTab because when using non-persistent-order tab bar it is incremented with each Tab submission.
+            else
+                tab_pos.x += g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + TabItemCalcSize(host_node->Windows[0]->Name, host_node->Windows[0]->HasCloseButton).x;
+        }
+        else if (!(host_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_DockNodeHost))
+        {
+            tab_pos.x += g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + TabItemCalcSize(host_window->Name, host_window->HasCloseButton).x; // Account for slight offset which will be added when changing from title bar to tab bar
+        }
+
+        // Draw tab shape/label preview (payload may be a loose window or a host window carrying multiple tabbed windows)
+        if (root_payload->DockNodeAsHost)
+            IM_ASSERT(root_payload->DockNodeAsHost->Windows.Size <= root_payload->DockNodeAsHost->TabBar->Tabs.Size);
+        ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar_with_payload = root_payload->DockNodeAsHost ? root_payload->DockNodeAsHost->TabBar : NULL;
+        const int payload_count = tab_bar_with_payload ? tab_bar_with_payload->Tabs.Size : 1;
+        for (int payload_n = 0; payload_n < payload_count; payload_n++)
+        {
+            // DockNode's TabBar may have non-window Tabs manually appended by user
+            ImGuiWindow* payload_window = tab_bar_with_payload ? tab_bar_with_payload->Tabs[payload_n].Window : root_payload;
+            if (tab_bar_with_payload && payload_window == NULL)
+                continue;
+            if (!DockNodeIsDropAllowedOne(payload_window, host_window))
+                continue;
+
+            // Calculate the tab bounding box for each payload window
+            ImVec2 tab_size = TabItemCalcSize(payload_window->Name, payload_window->HasCloseButton);
+            ImRect tab_bb(tab_pos.x, tab_pos.y, tab_pos.x + tab_size.x, tab_pos.y + tab_size.y);
+            tab_pos.x += tab_size.x + g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
+            const ImU32 overlay_col_text = GetColorU32(payload_window->DockStyle.Colors[ImGuiWindowDockStyleCol_Text]);
+            const ImU32 overlay_col_tabs = GetColorU32(payload_window->DockStyle.Colors[ImGuiWindowDockStyleCol_TabActive]);
+            PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, overlay_col_text);
+            for (int overlay_n = 0; overlay_n < overlay_draw_lists_count; overlay_n++)
+            {
+                ImGuiTabItemFlags tab_flags = ImGuiTabItemFlags_Preview | ((payload_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_UnsavedDocument) ? ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument : 0);
+                if (!tab_bar_rect.Contains(tab_bb))
+                    overlay_draw_lists[overlay_n]->PushClipRect(tab_bar_rect.Min, tab_bar_rect.Max);
+                TabItemBackground(overlay_draw_lists[overlay_n], tab_bb, tab_flags, overlay_col_tabs);
+                TabItemLabelAndCloseButton(overlay_draw_lists[overlay_n], tab_bb, tab_flags, g.Style.FramePadding, payload_window->Name, 0, 0, false, NULL, NULL);
+                if (!tab_bar_rect.Contains(tab_bb))
+                    overlay_draw_lists[overlay_n]->PopClipRect();
+            }
+            PopStyleColor();
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Display drop boxes
+    const float overlay_rounding = ImMax(3.0f, g.Style.FrameRounding);
+    for (int dir = ImGuiDir_None; dir < ImGuiDir_COUNT; dir++)
+    {
+        if (!data->DropRectsDraw[dir + 1].IsInverted())
+        {
+            ImRect draw_r = data->DropRectsDraw[dir + 1];
+            ImRect draw_r_in = draw_r;
+            draw_r_in.Expand(-2.0f);
+            ImU32 overlay_col = (data->SplitDir == (ImGuiDir)dir && data->IsSplitDirExplicit) ? overlay_col_drop_hovered : overlay_col_drop;
+            for (int overlay_n = 0; overlay_n < overlay_draw_lists_count; overlay_n++)
+            {
+                ImVec2 center = ImFloor(draw_r_in.GetCenter());
+                overlay_draw_lists[overlay_n]->AddRectFilled(draw_r.Min, draw_r.Max, overlay_col, overlay_rounding);
+                overlay_draw_lists[overlay_n]->AddRect(draw_r_in.Min, draw_r_in.Max, overlay_col_lines, overlay_rounding);
+                if (dir == ImGuiDir_Left || dir == ImGuiDir_Right)
+                    overlay_draw_lists[overlay_n]->AddLine(ImVec2(center.x, draw_r_in.Min.y), ImVec2(center.x, draw_r_in.Max.y), overlay_col_lines);
+                if (dir == ImGuiDir_Up || dir == ImGuiDir_Down)
+                    overlay_draw_lists[overlay_n]->AddLine(ImVec2(draw_r_in.Min.x, center.y), ImVec2(draw_r_in.Max.x, center.y), overlay_col_lines);
+            }
+        }
+
+        // Stop after ImGuiDir_None
+        if ((host_node && (host_node->MergedFlags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoSplit)) || g.IO.ConfigDockingNoSplit)
+            return;
+    }
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Docking: ImGuiDockNode Tree manipulation functions
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - DockNodeTreeSplit()
+// - DockNodeTreeMerge()
+// - DockNodeTreeUpdatePosSize()
+// - DockNodeTreeUpdateSplitterFindTouchingNode()
+// - DockNodeTreeUpdateSplitter()
+// - DockNodeTreeFindFallbackLeafNode()
+// - DockNodeTreeFindNodeByPos()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+void ImGui::DockNodeTreeSplit(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiDockNode* parent_node, ImGuiAxis split_axis, int split_inheritor_child_idx, float split_ratio, ImGuiDockNode* new_node)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(split_axis != ImGuiAxis_None);
+
+    ImGuiDockNode* child_0 = (new_node && split_inheritor_child_idx != 0) ? new_node : DockContextAddNode(ctx, 0);
+    child_0->ParentNode = parent_node;
+
+    ImGuiDockNode* child_1 = (new_node && split_inheritor_child_idx != 1) ? new_node : DockContextAddNode(ctx, 0);
+    child_1->ParentNode = parent_node;
+
+    ImGuiDockNode* child_inheritor = (split_inheritor_child_idx == 0) ? child_0 : child_1;
+    DockNodeMoveChildNodes(child_inheritor, parent_node);
+    parent_node->ChildNodes[0] = child_0;
+    parent_node->ChildNodes[1] = child_1;
+    parent_node->ChildNodes[split_inheritor_child_idx]->VisibleWindow = parent_node->VisibleWindow;
+    parent_node->SplitAxis = split_axis;
+    parent_node->VisibleWindow = NULL;
+    parent_node->AuthorityForPos = parent_node->AuthorityForSize = ImGuiDataAuthority_DockNode;
+
+    float size_avail = (parent_node->Size[split_axis] - DOCKING_SPLITTER_SIZE);
+    size_avail = ImMax(size_avail, g.Style.WindowMinSize[split_axis] * 2.0f);
+    IM_ASSERT(size_avail > 0.0f); // If you created a node manually with DockBuilderAddNode(), you need to also call DockBuilderSetNodeSize() before splitting.
+    child_0->SizeRef = child_1->SizeRef = parent_node->Size;
+    child_0->SizeRef[split_axis] = ImFloor(size_avail * split_ratio);
+    child_1->SizeRef[split_axis] = ImFloor(size_avail - child_0->SizeRef[split_axis]);
+
+    DockNodeMoveWindows(parent_node->ChildNodes[split_inheritor_child_idx], parent_node);
+    DockSettingsRenameNodeReferences(parent_node->ID, parent_node->ChildNodes[split_inheritor_child_idx]->ID);
+    DockNodeUpdateHasCentralNodeChild(DockNodeGetRootNode(parent_node));
+    DockNodeTreeUpdatePosSize(parent_node, parent_node->Pos, parent_node->Size);
+
+    // Flags transfer (e.g. this is where we transfer the ImGuiDockNodeFlags_CentralNode property)
+    child_0->SharedFlags = parent_node->SharedFlags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_SharedFlagsInheritMask_;
+    child_1->SharedFlags = parent_node->SharedFlags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_SharedFlagsInheritMask_;
+    child_inheritor->LocalFlags = parent_node->LocalFlags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_LocalFlagsTransferMask_;
+    parent_node->LocalFlags &= ~ImGuiDockNodeFlags_LocalFlagsTransferMask_;
+    child_0->UpdateMergedFlags();
+    child_1->UpdateMergedFlags();
+    parent_node->UpdateMergedFlags();
+    if (child_inheritor->IsCentralNode())
+        DockNodeGetRootNode(parent_node)->CentralNode = child_inheritor;
+}
+
+void ImGui::DockNodeTreeMerge(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiDockNode* parent_node, ImGuiDockNode* merge_lead_child)
+{
+    // When called from DockContextProcessUndockNode() it is possible that one of the child is NULL.
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiDockNode* child_0 = parent_node->ChildNodes[0];
+    ImGuiDockNode* child_1 = parent_node->ChildNodes[1];
+    IM_ASSERT(child_0 || child_1);
+    IM_ASSERT(merge_lead_child == child_0 || merge_lead_child == child_1);
+    if ((child_0 && child_0->Windows.Size > 0) || (child_1 && child_1->Windows.Size > 0))
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(parent_node->TabBar == NULL);
+        IM_ASSERT(parent_node->Windows.Size == 0);
+    }
+    IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_DOCKING("[docking] DockNodeTreeMerge: 0x%08X + 0x%08X back into parent 0x%08X\n", child_0 ? child_0->ID : 0, child_1 ? child_1->ID : 0, parent_node->ID);
+
+    ImVec2 backup_last_explicit_size = parent_node->SizeRef;
+    DockNodeMoveChildNodes(parent_node, merge_lead_child);
+    if (child_0)
+    {
+        DockNodeMoveWindows(parent_node, child_0); // Generally only 1 of the 2 child node will have windows
+        DockSettingsRenameNodeReferences(child_0->ID, parent_node->ID);
+    }
+    if (child_1)
+    {
+        DockNodeMoveWindows(parent_node, child_1);
+        DockSettingsRenameNodeReferences(child_1->ID, parent_node->ID);
+    }
+    DockNodeApplyPosSizeToWindows(parent_node);
+    parent_node->AuthorityForPos = parent_node->AuthorityForSize = parent_node->AuthorityForViewport = ImGuiDataAuthority_Auto;
+    parent_node->VisibleWindow = merge_lead_child->VisibleWindow;
+    parent_node->SizeRef = backup_last_explicit_size;
+
+    // Flags transfer
+    parent_node->LocalFlags &= ~ImGuiDockNodeFlags_LocalFlagsTransferMask_; // Preserve Dockspace flag
+    parent_node->LocalFlags |= (child_0 ? child_0->LocalFlags : 0) & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_LocalFlagsTransferMask_;
+    parent_node->LocalFlags |= (child_1 ? child_1->LocalFlags : 0) & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_LocalFlagsTransferMask_;
+    parent_node->LocalFlagsInWindows = (child_0 ? child_0->LocalFlagsInWindows : 0) | (child_1 ? child_1->LocalFlagsInWindows : 0); // FIXME: Would be more consistent to update from actual windows
+    parent_node->UpdateMergedFlags();
+
+    if (child_0)
+    {
+        ctx->DockContext.Nodes.SetVoidPtr(child_0->ID, NULL);
+        IM_DELETE(child_0);
+    }
+    if (child_1)
+    {
+        ctx->DockContext.Nodes.SetVoidPtr(child_1->ID, NULL);
+        IM_DELETE(child_1);
+    }
+}
+
+// Update Pos/Size for a node hierarchy (don't affect child Windows yet)
+// (Depth-first, Pre-Order)
+void ImGui::DockNodeTreeUpdatePosSize(ImGuiDockNode* node, ImVec2 pos, ImVec2 size, ImGuiDockNode* only_write_to_single_node)
+{
+    // During the regular dock node update we write to all nodes.
+    // 'only_write_to_single_node' is only set when turning a node visible mid-frame and we need its size right-away.
+    const bool write_to_node = only_write_to_single_node == NULL || only_write_to_single_node == node;
+    if (write_to_node)
+    {
+        node->Pos = pos;
+        node->Size = size;
+    }
+
+    if (node->IsLeafNode())
+        return;
+
+    ImGuiDockNode* child_0 = node->ChildNodes[0];
+    ImGuiDockNode* child_1 = node->ChildNodes[1];
+    ImVec2 child_0_pos = pos, child_1_pos = pos;
+    ImVec2 child_0_size = size, child_1_size = size;
+
+    const bool child_0_is_toward_single_node = (only_write_to_single_node != NULL && DockNodeIsInHierarchyOf(only_write_to_single_node, child_0));
+    const bool child_1_is_toward_single_node = (only_write_to_single_node != NULL && DockNodeIsInHierarchyOf(only_write_to_single_node, child_1));
+    const bool child_0_is_or_will_be_visible = child_0->IsVisible || child_0_is_toward_single_node;
+    const bool child_1_is_or_will_be_visible = child_1->IsVisible || child_1_is_toward_single_node;
+
+    if (child_0_is_or_will_be_visible && child_1_is_or_will_be_visible)
+    {
+        ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+        const float spacing = DOCKING_SPLITTER_SIZE;
+        const ImGuiAxis axis = (ImGuiAxis)node->SplitAxis;
+        const float size_avail = ImMax(size[axis] - spacing, 0.0f);
+
+        // Size allocation policy
+        // 1) The first 0..WindowMinSize[axis]*2 are allocated evenly to both windows.
+        const float size_min_each = ImFloor(ImMin(size_avail, g.Style.WindowMinSize[axis] * 2.0f) * 0.5f);
+
+        // FIXME: Blocks 2) and 3) are essentially doing nearly the same thing.
+        // Difference are: write-back to SizeRef; application of a minimum size; rounding before ImFloor()
+        // Clarify and rework differences between Size & SizeRef and purpose of WantLockSizeOnce
+
+        // 2) Process locked absolute size (during a splitter resize we preserve the child of nodes not touching the splitter edge)
+        if (child_0->WantLockSizeOnce && !child_1->WantLockSizeOnce)
+        {
+            child_0_size[axis] = child_0->SizeRef[axis] = ImMin(size_avail - 1.0f, child_0->Size[axis]);
+            child_1_size[axis] = child_1->SizeRef[axis] = (size_avail - child_0_size[axis]);
+            IM_ASSERT(child_0->SizeRef[axis] > 0.0f && child_1->SizeRef[axis] > 0.0f);
+        }
+        else if (child_1->WantLockSizeOnce && !child_0->WantLockSizeOnce)
+        {
+            child_1_size[axis] = child_1->SizeRef[axis] = ImMin(size_avail - 1.0f, child_1->Size[axis]);
+            child_0_size[axis] = child_0->SizeRef[axis] = (size_avail - child_1_size[axis]);
+            IM_ASSERT(child_0->SizeRef[axis] > 0.0f && child_1->SizeRef[axis] > 0.0f);
+        }
+        else if (child_0->WantLockSizeOnce && child_1->WantLockSizeOnce)
+        {
+            // FIXME-DOCK: We cannot honor the requested size, so apply ratio.
+            // Currently this path will only be taken if code programmatically sets WantLockSizeOnce
+            float split_ratio = child_0_size[axis] / (child_0_size[axis] + child_1_size[axis]);
+            child_0_size[axis] = child_0->SizeRef[axis] = ImFloor(size_avail * split_ratio);
+            child_1_size[axis] = child_1->SizeRef[axis] = (size_avail - child_0_size[axis]);
+            IM_ASSERT(child_0->SizeRef[axis] > 0.0f && child_1->SizeRef[axis] > 0.0f);
+        }
+
+        // 3) If one window is the central node (~ use remaining space, should be made explicit!), use explicit size from the other, and remainder for the central node
+        else if (child_0->SizeRef[axis] != 0.0f && child_1->HasCentralNodeChild)
+        {
+            child_0_size[axis] = ImMin(size_avail - size_min_each, child_0->SizeRef[axis]);
+            child_1_size[axis] = (size_avail - child_0_size[axis]);
+        }
+        else if (child_1->SizeRef[axis] != 0.0f && child_0->HasCentralNodeChild)
+        {
+            child_1_size[axis] = ImMin(size_avail - size_min_each, child_1->SizeRef[axis]);
+            child_0_size[axis] = (size_avail - child_1_size[axis]);
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            // 4) Otherwise distribute according to the relative ratio of each SizeRef value
+            float split_ratio = child_0->SizeRef[axis] / (child_0->SizeRef[axis] + child_1->SizeRef[axis]);
+            child_0_size[axis] = ImMax(size_min_each, ImFloor(size_avail * split_ratio + 0.5f));
+            child_1_size[axis] = (size_avail - child_0_size[axis]);
+        }
+
+        child_1_pos[axis] += spacing + child_0_size[axis];
+    }
+
+    if (only_write_to_single_node == NULL)
+        child_0->WantLockSizeOnce = child_1->WantLockSizeOnce = false;
+
+    const bool child_0_recurse = only_write_to_single_node ? child_0_is_toward_single_node : child_0->IsVisible;
+    const bool child_1_recurse = only_write_to_single_node ? child_1_is_toward_single_node : child_1->IsVisible;
+    if (child_0_recurse)
+        DockNodeTreeUpdatePosSize(child_0, child_0_pos, child_0_size);
+    if (child_1_recurse)
+        DockNodeTreeUpdatePosSize(child_1, child_1_pos, child_1_size);
+}
+
+static void DockNodeTreeUpdateSplitterFindTouchingNode(ImGuiDockNode* node, ImGuiAxis axis, int side, ImVector<ImGuiDockNode*>* touching_nodes)
+{
+    if (node->IsLeafNode())
+    {
+        touching_nodes->push_back(node);
+        return;
+    }
+    if (node->ChildNodes[0]->IsVisible)
+        if (node->SplitAxis != axis || side == 0 || !node->ChildNodes[1]->IsVisible)
+            DockNodeTreeUpdateSplitterFindTouchingNode(node->ChildNodes[0], axis, side, touching_nodes);
+    if (node->ChildNodes[1]->IsVisible)
+        if (node->SplitAxis != axis || side == 1 || !node->ChildNodes[0]->IsVisible)
+            DockNodeTreeUpdateSplitterFindTouchingNode(node->ChildNodes[1], axis, side, touching_nodes);
+}
+
+// (Depth-First, Pre-Order)
+void ImGui::DockNodeTreeUpdateSplitter(ImGuiDockNode* node)
+{
+    if (node->IsLeafNode())
+        return;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    ImGuiDockNode* child_0 = node->ChildNodes[0];
+    ImGuiDockNode* child_1 = node->ChildNodes[1];
+    if (child_0->IsVisible && child_1->IsVisible)
+    {
+        // Bounding box of the splitter cover the space between both nodes (w = Spacing, h = Size[xy^1] for when splitting horizontally)
+        const ImGuiAxis axis = (ImGuiAxis)node->SplitAxis;
+        IM_ASSERT(axis != ImGuiAxis_None);
+        ImRect bb;
+        bb.Min = child_0->Pos;
+        bb.Max = child_1->Pos;
+        bb.Min[axis] += child_0->Size[axis];
+        bb.Max[axis ^ 1] += child_1->Size[axis ^ 1];
+        //if (g.IO.KeyCtrl) GetForegroundDrawList(g.CurrentWindow->Viewport)->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, IM_COL32(255,0,255,255));
+
+        const ImGuiDockNodeFlags merged_flags = child_0->MergedFlags | child_1->MergedFlags; // Merged flags for BOTH childs
+        const ImGuiDockNodeFlags no_resize_axis_flag = (axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResizeX : ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResizeY;
+        if ((merged_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResize) || (merged_flags & no_resize_axis_flag))
+        {
+            ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+            window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Separator), g.Style.FrameRounding);
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            //bb.Min[axis] += 1; // Display a little inward so highlight doesn't connect with nearby tabs on the neighbor node.
+            //bb.Max[axis] -= 1;
+            PushID(node->ID);
+
+            // Find resizing limits by gathering list of nodes that are touching the splitter line.
+            ImVector<ImGuiDockNode*> touching_nodes[2];
+            float min_size = g.Style.WindowMinSize[axis];
+            float resize_limits[2];
+            resize_limits[0] = node->ChildNodes[0]->Pos[axis] + min_size;
+            resize_limits[1] = node->ChildNodes[1]->Pos[axis] + node->ChildNodes[1]->Size[axis] - min_size;
+
+            ImGuiID splitter_id = GetID("##Splitter");
+            if (g.ActiveId == splitter_id) // Only process when splitter is active
+            {
+                DockNodeTreeUpdateSplitterFindTouchingNode(child_0, axis, 1, &touching_nodes[0]);
+                DockNodeTreeUpdateSplitterFindTouchingNode(child_1, axis, 0, &touching_nodes[1]);
+                for (int touching_node_n = 0; touching_node_n < touching_nodes[0].Size; touching_node_n++)
+                    resize_limits[0] = ImMax(resize_limits[0], touching_nodes[0][touching_node_n]->Rect().Min[axis] + min_size);
+                for (int touching_node_n = 0; touching_node_n < touching_nodes[1].Size; touching_node_n++)
+                    resize_limits[1] = ImMin(resize_limits[1], touching_nodes[1][touching_node_n]->Rect().Max[axis] - min_size);
+
+                // [DEBUG] Render touching nodes & limits
+                /*
+                ImDrawList* draw_list = node->HostWindow ? GetForegroundDrawList(node->HostWindow) : GetForegroundDrawList(GetMainViewport());
+                for (int n = 0; n < 2; n++)
+                {
+                    for (int touching_node_n = 0; touching_node_n < touching_nodes[n].Size; touching_node_n++)
+                        draw_list->AddRect(touching_nodes[n][touching_node_n]->Pos, touching_nodes[n][touching_node_n]->Pos + touching_nodes[n][touching_node_n]->Size, IM_COL32(0, 255, 0, 255));
+                    if (axis == ImGuiAxis_X)
+                        draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(resize_limits[n], node->ChildNodes[n]->Pos.y), ImVec2(resize_limits[n], node->ChildNodes[n]->Pos.y + node->ChildNodes[n]->Size.y), IM_COL32(255, 0, 255, 255), 3.0f);
+                    else
+                        draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(node->ChildNodes[n]->Pos.x, resize_limits[n]), ImVec2(node->ChildNodes[n]->Pos.x + node->ChildNodes[n]->Size.x, resize_limits[n]), IM_COL32(255, 0, 255, 255), 3.0f);
+                }
+                */
+            }
+
+            // Use a short delay before highlighting the splitter (and changing the mouse cursor) in order for regular mouse movement to not highlight many splitters
+            float cur_size_0 = child_0->Size[axis];
+            float cur_size_1 = child_1->Size[axis];
+            float min_size_0 = resize_limits[0] - child_0->Pos[axis];
+            float min_size_1 = child_1->Pos[axis] + child_1->Size[axis] - resize_limits[1];
+            ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_WindowBg);
+            if (SplitterBehavior(bb, GetID("##Splitter"), axis, &cur_size_0, &cur_size_1, min_size_0, min_size_1, WINDOWS_HOVER_PADDING, WINDOWS_RESIZE_FROM_EDGES_FEEDBACK_TIMER, bg_col))
+            {
+                if (touching_nodes[0].Size > 0 && touching_nodes[1].Size > 0)
+                {
+                    child_0->Size[axis] = child_0->SizeRef[axis] = cur_size_0;
+                    child_1->Pos[axis] -= cur_size_1 - child_1->Size[axis];
+                    child_1->Size[axis] = child_1->SizeRef[axis] = cur_size_1;
+
+                    // Lock the size of every node that is a sibling of the node we are touching
+                    // This might be less desirable if we can merge sibling of a same axis into the same parental level.
+                    for (int side_n = 0; side_n < 2; side_n++)
+                        for (int touching_node_n = 0; touching_node_n < touching_nodes[side_n].Size; touching_node_n++)
+                        {
+                            ImGuiDockNode* touching_node = touching_nodes[side_n][touching_node_n];
+                            //ImDrawList* draw_list = node->HostWindow ? GetForegroundDrawList(node->HostWindow) : GetForegroundDrawList(GetMainViewport());
+                            //draw_list->AddRect(touching_node->Pos, touching_node->Pos + touching_node->Size, IM_COL32(255, 128, 0, 255));
+                            while (touching_node->ParentNode != node)
+                            {
+                                if (touching_node->ParentNode->SplitAxis == axis)
+                                {
+                                    // Mark other node so its size will be preserved during the upcoming call to DockNodeTreeUpdatePosSize().
+                                    ImGuiDockNode* node_to_preserve = touching_node->ParentNode->ChildNodes[side_n];
+                                    node_to_preserve->WantLockSizeOnce = true;
+                                    //draw_list->AddRect(touching_node->Pos, touching_node->Rect().Max, IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 255));
+                                    //draw_list->AddRectFilled(node_to_preserve->Pos, node_to_preserve->Rect().Max, IM_COL32(0, 255, 0, 100));
+                                }
+                                touching_node = touching_node->ParentNode;
+                            }
+                        }
+
+                    DockNodeTreeUpdatePosSize(child_0, child_0->Pos, child_0->Size);
+                    DockNodeTreeUpdatePosSize(child_1, child_1->Pos, child_1->Size);
+                    MarkIniSettingsDirty();
+                }
+            }
+            PopID();
+        }
+    }
+
+    if (child_0->IsVisible)
+        DockNodeTreeUpdateSplitter(child_0);
+    if (child_1->IsVisible)
+        DockNodeTreeUpdateSplitter(child_1);
+}
+
+ImGuiDockNode* ImGui::DockNodeTreeFindFallbackLeafNode(ImGuiDockNode* node)
+{
+    if (node->IsLeafNode())
+        return node;
+    if (ImGuiDockNode* leaf_node = DockNodeTreeFindFallbackLeafNode(node->ChildNodes[0]))
+        return leaf_node;
+    if (ImGuiDockNode* leaf_node = DockNodeTreeFindFallbackLeafNode(node->ChildNodes[1]))
+        return leaf_node;
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+ImGuiDockNode* ImGui::DockNodeTreeFindVisibleNodeByPos(ImGuiDockNode* node, ImVec2 pos)
+{
+    if (!node->IsVisible)
+        return NULL;
+
+    const float dock_spacing = 0.0f;// g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x; // FIXME: Relation to DOCKING_SPLITTER_SIZE?
+    ImRect r(node->Pos, node->Pos + node->Size);
+    r.Expand(dock_spacing * 0.5f);
+    bool inside = r.Contains(pos);
+    if (!inside)
+        return NULL;
+
+    if (node->IsLeafNode())
+        return node;
+    if (ImGuiDockNode* hovered_node = DockNodeTreeFindVisibleNodeByPos(node->ChildNodes[0], pos))
+        return hovered_node;
+    if (ImGuiDockNode* hovered_node = DockNodeTreeFindVisibleNodeByPos(node->ChildNodes[1], pos))
+        return hovered_node;
+
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Docking: Public Functions (SetWindowDock, DockSpace, DockSpaceOverViewport)
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - SetWindowDock() [Internal]
+// - DockSpace()
+// - DockSpaceOverViewport()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// [Internal] Called via SetNextWindowDockID()
+void ImGui::SetWindowDock(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiID dock_id, ImGuiCond cond)
+{
+    // Test condition (NB: bit 0 is always true) and clear flags for next time
+    if (cond && (window->SetWindowDockAllowFlags & cond) == 0)
+        return;
+    window->SetWindowDockAllowFlags &= ~(ImGuiCond_Once | ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver | ImGuiCond_Appearing);
+
+    if (window->DockId == dock_id)
+        return;
+
+    // If the user attempt to set a dock id that is a split node, we'll dig within to find a suitable docking spot
+    ImGuiContext* ctx = GImGui;
+    if (ImGuiDockNode* new_node = DockContextFindNodeByID(ctx, dock_id))
+        if (new_node->IsSplitNode())
+        {
+            // Policy: Find central node or latest focused node. We first move back to our root node.
+            new_node = DockNodeGetRootNode(new_node);
+            if (new_node->CentralNode)
+            {
+                IM_ASSERT(new_node->CentralNode->IsCentralNode());
+                dock_id = new_node->CentralNode->ID;
+            }
+            else
+            {
+                dock_id = new_node->LastFocusedNodeId;
+            }
+        }
+
+    if (window->DockId == dock_id)
+        return;
+
+    if (window->DockNode)
+        DockNodeRemoveWindow(window->DockNode, window, 0);
+    window->DockId = dock_id;
+}
+
+// Create an explicit dockspace node within an existing window. Also expose dock node flags and creates a CentralNode by default.
+// The Central Node is always displayed even when empty and shrink/extend according to the requested size of its neighbors.
+// DockSpace() needs to be submitted _before_ any window they can host. If you use a dockspace, submit it early in your app.
+ImGuiID ImGui::DockSpace(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& size_arg, ImGuiDockNodeFlags flags, const ImGuiWindowClass* window_class)
+{
+    ImGuiContext* ctx = GImGui;
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (!(g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_DockingEnable))
+        return 0;
+
+    // Early out if parent window is hidden/collapsed
+    // This is faster but also DockNodeUpdateTabBar() relies on TabBarLayout() running (which won't if SkipItems=true) to set NextSelectedTabId = 0). See #2960.
+    // If for whichever reason this is causing problem we would need to ensure that DockNodeUpdateTabBar() ends up clearing NextSelectedTabId even if SkipItems=true.
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        flags |= ImGuiDockNodeFlags_KeepAliveOnly;
+
+    IM_ASSERT((flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_DockSpace) == 0);
+    IM_ASSERT(id != 0);
+    ImGuiDockNode* node = DockContextFindNodeByID(ctx, id);
+    if (!node)
+    {
+        IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_DOCKING("[docking] DockSpace: dockspace node 0x%08X created\n", id);
+        node = DockContextAddNode(ctx, id);
+        node->SetLocalFlags(ImGuiDockNodeFlags_CentralNode);
+    }
+    if (window_class && window_class->ClassId != node->WindowClass.ClassId)
+        IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_DOCKING("[docking] DockSpace: dockspace node 0x%08X: setup WindowClass 0x%08X -> 0x%08X\n", id, node->WindowClass.ClassId, window_class->ClassId);
+    node->SharedFlags = flags;
+    node->WindowClass = window_class ? *window_class : ImGuiWindowClass();
+
+    // When a DockSpace transitioned form implicit to explicit this may be called a second time
+    // It is possible that the node has already been claimed by a docked window which appeared before the DockSpace() node, so we overwrite IsDockSpace again.
+    if (node->LastFrameActive == g.FrameCount && !(flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_KeepAliveOnly))
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(node->IsDockSpace() == false && "Cannot call DockSpace() twice a frame with the same ID");
+        node->SetLocalFlags(node->LocalFlags | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_DockSpace);
+        return id;
+    }
+    node->SetLocalFlags(node->LocalFlags | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_DockSpace);
+
+    // Keep alive mode, this is allow windows docked into this node so stay docked even if they are not visible
+    if (flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_KeepAliveOnly)
+    {
+        node->LastFrameAlive = g.FrameCount;
+        return id;
+    }
+
+    const ImVec2 content_avail = GetContentRegionAvail();
+    ImVec2 size = ImFloor(size_arg);
+    if (size.x <= 0.0f)
+        size.x = ImMax(content_avail.x + size.x, 4.0f); // Arbitrary minimum child size (0.0f causing too much issues)
+    if (size.y <= 0.0f)
+        size.y = ImMax(content_avail.y + size.y, 4.0f);
+    IM_ASSERT(size.x > 0.0f && size.y > 0.0f);
+
+    node->Pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+    node->Size = node->SizeRef = size;
+    SetNextWindowPos(node->Pos);
+    SetNextWindowSize(node->Size);
+    g.NextWindowData.PosUndock = false;
+
+    // FIXME-DOCK: Why do we need a child window to host a dockspace, could we host it in the existing window?
+    // FIXME-DOCK: What is the reason for not simply calling BeginChild()? (OK to have a reason but should be commented)
+    ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow | ImGuiWindowFlags_DockNodeHost;
+    window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar;
+    window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse;
+    window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground;
+
+    char title[256];
+    ImFormatString(title, IM_ARRAYSIZE(title), "%s/DockSpace_%08X", window->Name, id);
+
+    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildBorderSize, 0.0f);
+    Begin(title, NULL, window_flags);
+    PopStyleVar();
+
+    ImGuiWindow* host_window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    DockNodeSetupHostWindow(node, host_window);
+    host_window->ChildId = window->GetID(title);
+    node->OnlyNodeWithWindows = NULL;
+
+    IM_ASSERT(node->IsRootNode());
+
+    // We need to handle the rare case were a central node is missing.
+    // This can happen if the node was first created manually with DockBuilderAddNode() but _without_ the ImGuiDockNodeFlags_Dockspace.
+    // Doing it correctly would set the _CentralNode flags, which would then propagate according to subsequent split.
+    // It would also be ambiguous to attempt to assign a central node while there are split nodes, so we wait until there's a single node remaining.
+    // The specific sub-property of _CentralNode we are interested in recovering here is the "Don't delete when empty" property,
+    // as it doesn't make sense for an empty dockspace to not have this property.
+    if (node->IsLeafNode() && !node->IsCentralNode())
+        node->SetLocalFlags(node->LocalFlags | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_CentralNode);
+
+    // Update the node
+    DockNodeUpdate(node);
+
+    End();
+    ItemSize(size);
+    return id;
+}
+
+// Tips: Use with ImGuiDockNodeFlags_PassthruCentralNode!
+// The limitation with this call is that your window won't have a menu bar.
+// Even though we could pass window flags, it would also require the user to be able to call BeginMenuBar() somehow meaning we can't Begin/End in a single function.
+// But you can also use BeginMainMenuBar(). If you really want a menu bar inside the same window as the one hosting the dockspace, you will need to copy this code somewhere and tweak it.
+ImGuiID ImGui::DockSpaceOverViewport(const ImGuiViewport* viewport, ImGuiDockNodeFlags dockspace_flags, const ImGuiWindowClass* window_class)
+{
+    if (viewport == NULL)
+        viewport = GetMainViewport();
+
+    SetNextWindowPos(viewport->WorkPos);
+    SetNextWindowSize(viewport->WorkSize);
+    SetNextWindowViewport(viewport->ID);
+
+    ImGuiWindowFlags host_window_flags = 0;
+    host_window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDocking;
+    host_window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus;
+    if (dockspace_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_PassthruCentralNode)
+        host_window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground;
+
+    char label[32];
+    ImFormatString(label, IM_ARRAYSIZE(label), "DockSpaceViewport_%08X", viewport->ID);
+
+    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowRounding, 0.0f);
+    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowBorderSize, 0.0f);
+    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
+    Begin(label, NULL, host_window_flags);
+    PopStyleVar(3);
+
+    ImGuiID dockspace_id = GetID("DockSpace");
+    DockSpace(dockspace_id, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f), dockspace_flags, window_class);
+    End();
+
+    return dockspace_id;
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Docking: Builder Functions
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Very early end-user API to manipulate dock nodes.
+// Only available in imgui_internal.h. Expect this API to change/break!
+// It is expected that those functions are all called _before_ the dockspace node submission.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - DockBuilderDockWindow()
+// - DockBuilderGetNode()
+// - DockBuilderSetNodePos()
+// - DockBuilderSetNodeSize()
+// - DockBuilderAddNode()
+// - DockBuilderRemoveNode()
+// - DockBuilderRemoveNodeChildNodes()
+// - DockBuilderRemoveNodeDockedWindows()
+// - DockBuilderSplitNode()
+// - DockBuilderCopyNodeRec()
+// - DockBuilderCopyNode()
+// - DockBuilderCopyWindowSettings()
+// - DockBuilderCopyDockSpace()
+// - DockBuilderFinish()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+void ImGui::DockBuilderDockWindow(const char* window_name, ImGuiID node_id)
+{
+    // We don't preserve relative order of multiple docked windows (by clearing DockOrder back to -1)
+    ImGuiID window_id = ImHashStr(window_name);
+    if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByID(window_id))
+    {
+        // Apply to created window
+        SetWindowDock(window, node_id, ImGuiCond_Always);
+        window->DockOrder = -1;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Apply to settings
+        ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = FindWindowSettings(window_id);
+        if (settings == NULL)
+            settings = CreateNewWindowSettings(window_name);
+        settings->DockId = node_id;
+        settings->DockOrder = -1;
+    }
+}
+
+ImGuiDockNode* ImGui::DockBuilderGetNode(ImGuiID node_id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext* ctx = GImGui;
+    return DockContextFindNodeByID(ctx, node_id);
+}
+
+void ImGui::DockBuilderSetNodePos(ImGuiID node_id, ImVec2 pos)
+{
+    ImGuiContext* ctx = GImGui;
+    ImGuiDockNode* node = DockContextFindNodeByID(ctx, node_id);
+    if (node == NULL)
+        return;
+    node->Pos = pos;
+    node->AuthorityForPos = ImGuiDataAuthority_DockNode;
+}
+
+void ImGui::DockBuilderSetNodeSize(ImGuiID node_id, ImVec2 size)
+{
+    ImGuiContext* ctx = GImGui;
+    ImGuiDockNode* node = DockContextFindNodeByID(ctx, node_id);
+    if (node == NULL)
+        return;
+    IM_ASSERT(size.x > 0.0f && size.y > 0.0f);
+    node->Size = node->SizeRef = size;
+    node->AuthorityForSize = ImGuiDataAuthority_DockNode;
+}
+
+// Make sure to use the ImGuiDockNodeFlags_DockSpace flag to create a dockspace node! Otherwise this will create a floating node!
+// - Floating node: you can then call DockBuilderSetNodePos()/DockBuilderSetNodeSize() to position and size the floating node.
+// - Dockspace node: calling DockBuilderSetNodePos() is unnecessary.
+// - If you intend to split a node immediately after creation using DockBuilderSplitNode(), make sure to call DockBuilderSetNodeSize() beforehand!
+//   For various reason, the splitting code currently needs a base size otherwise space may not be allocated as precisely as you would expect.
+// - Use (id == 0) to let the system allocate a node identifier.
+// - Existing node with a same id will be removed.
+ImGuiID ImGui::DockBuilderAddNode(ImGuiID id, ImGuiDockNodeFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext* ctx = GImGui;
+
+    if (id != 0)
+        DockBuilderRemoveNode(id);
+
+    ImGuiDockNode* node = NULL;
+    if (flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_DockSpace)
+    {
+        DockSpace(id, ImVec2(0, 0), (flags & ~ImGuiDockNodeFlags_DockSpace) | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_KeepAliveOnly);
+        node = DockContextFindNodeByID(ctx, id);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        node = DockContextAddNode(ctx, id);
+        node->SetLocalFlags(flags);
+    }
+    node->LastFrameAlive = ctx->FrameCount;   // Set this otherwise BeginDocked will undock during the same frame.
+    return node->ID;
+}
+
+void ImGui::DockBuilderRemoveNode(ImGuiID node_id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext* ctx = GImGui;
+    ImGuiDockNode* node = DockContextFindNodeByID(ctx, node_id);
+    if (node == NULL)
+        return;
+    DockBuilderRemoveNodeDockedWindows(node_id, true);
+    DockBuilderRemoveNodeChildNodes(node_id);
+    // Node may have moved or deleted if e.g. any merge happened
+    node = DockContextFindNodeByID(ctx, node_id);
+    if (node == NULL)
+        return;
+    if (node->IsCentralNode() && node->ParentNode)
+        node->ParentNode->SetLocalFlags(node->ParentNode->LocalFlags | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_CentralNode);
+    DockContextRemoveNode(ctx, node, true);
+}
+
+// root_id = 0 to remove all, root_id != 0 to remove child of given node.
+void ImGui::DockBuilderRemoveNodeChildNodes(ImGuiID root_id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext* ctx = GImGui;
+    ImGuiDockContext* dc  = &ctx->DockContext;
+
+    ImGuiDockNode* root_node = root_id ? DockContextFindNodeByID(ctx, root_id) : NULL;
+    if (root_id && root_node == NULL)
+        return;
+    bool has_central_node = false;
+
+    ImGuiDataAuthority backup_root_node_authority_for_pos = root_node ? root_node->AuthorityForPos : ImGuiDataAuthority_Auto;
+    ImGuiDataAuthority backup_root_node_authority_for_size = root_node ? root_node->AuthorityForSize : ImGuiDataAuthority_Auto;
+
+    // Process active windows
+    ImVector<ImGuiDockNode*> nodes_to_remove;
+    for (int n = 0; n < dc->Nodes.Data.Size; n++)
+        if (ImGuiDockNode* node = (ImGuiDockNode*)dc->Nodes.Data[n].val_p)
+        {
+            bool want_removal = (root_id == 0) || (node->ID != root_id && DockNodeGetRootNode(node)->ID == root_id);
+            if (want_removal)
+            {
+                if (node->IsCentralNode())
+                    has_central_node = true;
+                if (root_id != 0)
+                    DockContextQueueNotifyRemovedNode(ctx, node);
+                if (root_node)
+                {
+                    DockNodeMoveWindows(root_node, node);
+                    DockSettingsRenameNodeReferences(node->ID, root_node->ID);
+                }
+                nodes_to_remove.push_back(node);
+            }
+        }
+
+    // DockNodeMoveWindows->DockNodeAddWindow will normally set those when reaching two windows (which is only adequate during interactive merge)
+    // Make sure we don't lose our current pos/size. (FIXME-DOCK: Consider tidying up that code in DockNodeAddWindow instead)
+    if (root_node)
+    {
+        root_node->AuthorityForPos = backup_root_node_authority_for_pos;
+        root_node->AuthorityForSize = backup_root_node_authority_for_size;
+    }
+
+    // Apply to settings
+    for (ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = ctx->SettingsWindows.begin(); settings != NULL; settings = ctx->SettingsWindows.next_chunk(settings))
+        if (ImGuiID window_settings_dock_id = settings->DockId)
+            for (int n = 0; n < nodes_to_remove.Size; n++)
+                if (nodes_to_remove[n]->ID == window_settings_dock_id)
+                {
+                    settings->DockId = root_id;
+                    break;
+                }
+
+    // Not really efficient, but easier to destroy a whole hierarchy considering DockContextRemoveNode is attempting to merge nodes
+    if (nodes_to_remove.Size > 1)
+        ImQsort(nodes_to_remove.Data, nodes_to_remove.Size, sizeof(ImGuiDockNode*), DockNodeComparerDepthMostFirst);
+    for (int n = 0; n < nodes_to_remove.Size; n++)
+        DockContextRemoveNode(ctx, nodes_to_remove[n], false);
+
+    if (root_id == 0)
+    {
+        dc->Nodes.Clear();
+        dc->Requests.clear();
+    }
+    else if (has_central_node)
+    {
+        root_node->CentralNode = root_node;
+        root_node->SetLocalFlags(root_node->LocalFlags | ImGuiDockNodeFlags_CentralNode);
+    }
+}
+
+void ImGui::DockBuilderRemoveNodeDockedWindows(ImGuiID root_id, bool clear_settings_refs)
+{
+    // Clear references in settings
+    ImGuiContext* ctx = GImGui;
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+    if (clear_settings_refs)
+    {
+        for (ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = g.SettingsWindows.begin(); settings != NULL; settings = g.SettingsWindows.next_chunk(settings))
+        {
+            bool want_removal = (root_id == 0) || (settings->DockId == root_id);
+            if (!want_removal && settings->DockId != 0)
+                if (ImGuiDockNode* node = DockContextFindNodeByID(ctx, settings->DockId))
+                    if (DockNodeGetRootNode(node)->ID == root_id)
+                        want_removal = true;
+            if (want_removal)
+                settings->DockId = 0;
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Clear references in windows
+    for (int n = 0; n < g.Windows.Size; n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[n];
+        bool want_removal = (root_id == 0) || (window->DockNode && DockNodeGetRootNode(window->DockNode)->ID == root_id) || (window->DockNodeAsHost && window->DockNodeAsHost->ID == root_id);
+        if (want_removal)
+        {
+            const ImGuiID backup_dock_id = window->DockId;
+            IM_UNUSED(backup_dock_id);
+            DockContextProcessUndockWindow(ctx, window, clear_settings_refs);
+            if (!clear_settings_refs)
+                IM_ASSERT(window->DockId == backup_dock_id);
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+// If 'out_id_at_dir' or 'out_id_at_opposite_dir' are non NULL, the function will write out the ID of the two new nodes created.
+// Return value is ID of the node at the specified direction, so same as (*out_id_at_dir) if that pointer is set.
+// FIXME-DOCK: We are not exposing nor using split_outer.
+ImGuiID ImGui::DockBuilderSplitNode(ImGuiID id, ImGuiDir split_dir, float size_ratio_for_node_at_dir, ImGuiID* out_id_at_dir, ImGuiID* out_id_at_opposite_dir)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(split_dir != ImGuiDir_None);
+    IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_DOCKING("[docking] DockBuilderSplitNode: node 0x%08X, split_dir %d\n", id, split_dir);
+
+    ImGuiDockNode* node = DockContextFindNodeByID(&g, id);
+    if (node == NULL)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(node != NULL);
+        return 0;
+    }
+
+    IM_ASSERT(!node->IsSplitNode()); // Assert if already Split
+
+    ImGuiDockRequest req;
+    req.Type = ImGuiDockRequestType_Split;
+    req.DockTargetWindow = NULL;
+    req.DockTargetNode = node;
+    req.DockPayload = NULL;
+    req.DockSplitDir = split_dir;
+    req.DockSplitRatio = ImSaturate((split_dir == ImGuiDir_Left || split_dir == ImGuiDir_Up) ? size_ratio_for_node_at_dir : 1.0f - size_ratio_for_node_at_dir);
+    req.DockSplitOuter = false;
+    DockContextProcessDock(&g, &req);
+
+    ImGuiID id_at_dir = node->ChildNodes[(split_dir == ImGuiDir_Left || split_dir == ImGuiDir_Up) ? 0 : 1]->ID;
+    ImGuiID id_at_opposite_dir = node->ChildNodes[(split_dir == ImGuiDir_Left || split_dir == ImGuiDir_Up) ? 1 : 0]->ID;
+    if (out_id_at_dir)
+        *out_id_at_dir = id_at_dir;
+    if (out_id_at_opposite_dir)
+        *out_id_at_opposite_dir = id_at_opposite_dir;
+    return id_at_dir;
+}
+
+static ImGuiDockNode* DockBuilderCopyNodeRec(ImGuiDockNode* src_node, ImGuiID dst_node_id_if_known, ImVector<ImGuiID>* out_node_remap_pairs)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiDockNode* dst_node = ImGui::DockContextAddNode(&g, dst_node_id_if_known);
+    dst_node->SharedFlags = src_node->SharedFlags;
+    dst_node->LocalFlags = src_node->LocalFlags;
+    dst_node->LocalFlagsInWindows = ImGuiDockNodeFlags_None;
+    dst_node->Pos = src_node->Pos;
+    dst_node->Size = src_node->Size;
+    dst_node->SizeRef = src_node->SizeRef;
+    dst_node->SplitAxis = src_node->SplitAxis;
+    dst_node->UpdateMergedFlags();
+
+    out_node_remap_pairs->push_back(src_node->ID);
+    out_node_remap_pairs->push_back(dst_node->ID);
+
+    for (int child_n = 0; child_n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(src_node->ChildNodes); child_n++)
+        if (src_node->ChildNodes[child_n])
+        {
+            dst_node->ChildNodes[child_n] = DockBuilderCopyNodeRec(src_node->ChildNodes[child_n], 0, out_node_remap_pairs);
+            dst_node->ChildNodes[child_n]->ParentNode = dst_node;
+        }
+
+    IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_DOCKING("[docking] Fork node %08X -> %08X (%d childs)\n", src_node->ID, dst_node->ID, dst_node->IsSplitNode() ? 2 : 0);
+    return dst_node;
+}
+
+void ImGui::DockBuilderCopyNode(ImGuiID src_node_id, ImGuiID dst_node_id, ImVector<ImGuiID>* out_node_remap_pairs)
+{
+    ImGuiContext* ctx = GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(src_node_id != 0);
+    IM_ASSERT(dst_node_id != 0);
+    IM_ASSERT(out_node_remap_pairs != NULL);
+
+    DockBuilderRemoveNode(dst_node_id);
+
+    ImGuiDockNode* src_node = DockContextFindNodeByID(ctx, src_node_id);
+    IM_ASSERT(src_node != NULL);
+
+    out_node_remap_pairs->clear();
+    DockBuilderCopyNodeRec(src_node, dst_node_id, out_node_remap_pairs);
+
+    IM_ASSERT((out_node_remap_pairs->Size % 2) == 0);
+}
+
+void ImGui::DockBuilderCopyWindowSettings(const char* src_name, const char* dst_name)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* src_window = FindWindowByName(src_name);
+    if (src_window == NULL)
+        return;
+    if (ImGuiWindow* dst_window = FindWindowByName(dst_name))
+    {
+        dst_window->Pos = src_window->Pos;
+        dst_window->Size = src_window->Size;
+        dst_window->SizeFull = src_window->SizeFull;
+        dst_window->Collapsed = src_window->Collapsed;
+    }
+    else if (ImGuiWindowSettings* dst_settings = FindOrCreateWindowSettings(dst_name))
+    {
+        ImVec2ih window_pos_2ih = ImVec2ih(src_window->Pos);
+        if (src_window->ViewportId != 0 && src_window->ViewportId != IMGUI_VIEWPORT_DEFAULT_ID)
+        {
+            dst_settings->ViewportPos = window_pos_2ih;
+            dst_settings->ViewportId = src_window->ViewportId;
+            dst_settings->Pos = ImVec2ih(0, 0);
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            dst_settings->Pos = window_pos_2ih;
+        }
+        dst_settings->Size = ImVec2ih(src_window->SizeFull);
+        dst_settings->Collapsed = src_window->Collapsed;
+    }
+}
+
+// FIXME: Will probably want to change this signature, in particular how the window remapping pairs are passed.
+void ImGui::DockBuilderCopyDockSpace(ImGuiID src_dockspace_id, ImGuiID dst_dockspace_id, ImVector<const char*>* in_window_remap_pairs)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(src_dockspace_id != 0);
+    IM_ASSERT(dst_dockspace_id != 0);
+    IM_ASSERT(in_window_remap_pairs != NULL);
+    IM_ASSERT((in_window_remap_pairs->Size % 2) == 0);
+
+    // Duplicate entire dock
+    // FIXME: When overwriting dst_dockspace_id, windows that aren't part of our dockspace window class but that are docked in a same node will be split apart,
+    // whereas we could attempt to at least keep them together in a new, same floating node.
+    ImVector<ImGuiID> node_remap_pairs;
+    DockBuilderCopyNode(src_dockspace_id, dst_dockspace_id, &node_remap_pairs);
+
+    // Attempt to transition all the upcoming windows associated to dst_dockspace_id into the newly created hierarchy of dock nodes
+    // (The windows associated to src_dockspace_id are staying in place)
+    ImVector<ImGuiID> src_windows;
+    for (int remap_window_n = 0; remap_window_n < in_window_remap_pairs->Size; remap_window_n += 2)
+    {
+        const char* src_window_name = (*in_window_remap_pairs)[remap_window_n];
+        const char* dst_window_name = (*in_window_remap_pairs)[remap_window_n + 1];
+        ImGuiID src_window_id = ImHashStr(src_window_name);
+        src_windows.push_back(src_window_id);
+
+        // Search in the remapping tables
+        ImGuiID src_dock_id = 0;
+        if (ImGuiWindow* src_window = FindWindowByID(src_window_id))
+            src_dock_id = src_window->DockId;
+        else if (ImGuiWindowSettings* src_window_settings = FindWindowSettings(src_window_id))
+            src_dock_id = src_window_settings->DockId;
+        ImGuiID dst_dock_id = 0;
+        for (int dock_remap_n = 0; dock_remap_n < node_remap_pairs.Size; dock_remap_n += 2)
+            if (node_remap_pairs[dock_remap_n] == src_dock_id)
+            {
+                dst_dock_id = node_remap_pairs[dock_remap_n + 1];
+                //node_remap_pairs[dock_remap_n] = node_remap_pairs[dock_remap_n + 1] = 0; // Clear
+                break;
+            }
+
+        if (dst_dock_id != 0)
+        {
+            // Docked windows gets redocked into the new node hierarchy.
+            IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_DOCKING("[docking] Remap live window '%s' 0x%08X -> '%s' 0x%08X\n", src_window_name, src_dock_id, dst_window_name, dst_dock_id);
+            DockBuilderDockWindow(dst_window_name, dst_dock_id);
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            // Floating windows gets their settings transferred (regardless of whether the new window already exist or not)
+            // When this is leading to a Copy and not a Move, we would get two overlapping floating windows. Could we possibly dock them together?
+            IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_DOCKING("[docking] Remap window settings '%s' -> '%s'\n", src_window_name, dst_window_name);
+            DockBuilderCopyWindowSettings(src_window_name, dst_window_name);
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Anything else in the source nodes of 'node_remap_pairs' are windows that were docked in src_dockspace_id but are not owned by it (unaffiliated windows, e.g. "ImGui Demo")
+    // Find those windows and move to them to the cloned dock node. This may be optional?
+    for (int dock_remap_n = 0; dock_remap_n < node_remap_pairs.Size; dock_remap_n += 2)
+        if (ImGuiID src_dock_id = node_remap_pairs[dock_remap_n])
+        {
+            ImGuiID dst_dock_id = node_remap_pairs[dock_remap_n + 1];
+            ImGuiDockNode* node = DockBuilderGetNode(src_dock_id);
+            for (int window_n = 0; window_n < node->Windows.Size; window_n++)
+            {
+                ImGuiWindow* window = node->Windows[window_n];
+                if (src_windows.contains(window->ID))
+                    continue;
+
+                // Docked windows gets redocked into the new node hierarchy.
+                IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_DOCKING("[docking] Remap window '%s' %08X -> %08X\n", window->Name, src_dock_id, dst_dock_id);
+                DockBuilderDockWindow(window->Name, dst_dock_id);
+            }
+        }
+}
+
+// FIXME-DOCK: This is awkward because in series of split user is likely to loose access to its root node.
+void ImGui::DockBuilderFinish(ImGuiID root_id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext* ctx = GImGui;
+    //DockContextRebuild(ctx);
+    DockContextBuildAddWindowsToNodes(ctx, root_id);
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Docking: Begin/End Support Functions (called from Begin/End)
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - GetWindowAlwaysWantOwnTabBar()
+// - DockContextBindNodeToWindow()
+// - BeginDocked()
+// - BeginDockableDragDropSource()
+// - BeginDockableDragDropTarget()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+bool ImGui::GetWindowAlwaysWantOwnTabBar(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.IO.ConfigDockingAlwaysTabBar || window->WindowClass.DockingAlwaysTabBar)
+        if ((window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDocking)) == 0)
+            if (!window->IsFallbackWindow)    // We don't support AlwaysTabBar on the fallback/implicit window to avoid unused dock-node overhead/noise
+                return true;
+    return false;
+}
+
+static ImGuiDockNode* ImGui::DockContextBindNodeToWindow(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+    ImGuiDockNode* node = DockContextFindNodeByID(ctx, window->DockId);
+    IM_ASSERT(window->DockNode == NULL);
+
+    // We should not be docking into a split node (SetWindowDock should avoid this)
+    if (node && node->IsSplitNode())
+    {
+        DockContextProcessUndockWindow(ctx, window);
+        return NULL;
+    }
+
+    // Create node
+    if (node == NULL)
+    {
+        node = DockContextAddNode(ctx, window->DockId);
+        node->AuthorityForPos = node->AuthorityForSize = node->AuthorityForViewport = ImGuiDataAuthority_Window;
+        node->LastFrameAlive = g.FrameCount;
+    }
+
+    // If the node just turned visible and is part of a hierarchy, it doesn't have a Size assigned by DockNodeTreeUpdatePosSize() yet,
+    // so we're forcing a Pos/Size update from the first ancestor that is already visible (often it will be the root node).
+    // If we don't do this, the window will be assigned a zero-size on its first frame, which won't ideally warm up the layout.
+    // This is a little wonky because we don't normally update the Pos/Size of visible node mid-frame.
+    if (!node->IsVisible)
+    {
+        ImGuiDockNode* ancestor_node = node;
+        while (!ancestor_node->IsVisible && ancestor_node->ParentNode)
+            ancestor_node = ancestor_node->ParentNode;
+        IM_ASSERT(ancestor_node->Size.x > 0.0f && ancestor_node->Size.y > 0.0f);
+        DockNodeUpdateHasCentralNodeChild(DockNodeGetRootNode(ancestor_node));
+        DockNodeTreeUpdatePosSize(ancestor_node, ancestor_node->Pos, ancestor_node->Size, node);
+    }
+
+    // Add window to node
+    bool node_was_visible = node->IsVisible;
+    DockNodeAddWindow(node, window, true);
+    node->IsVisible = node_was_visible; // Don't mark visible right away (so DockContextEndFrame() doesn't render it, maybe other side effects? will see)
+    IM_ASSERT(node == window->DockNode);
+    return node;
+}
+
+void ImGui::BeginDocked(ImGuiWindow* window, bool* p_open)
+{
+    ImGuiContext* ctx = GImGui;
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+
+    // Clear fields ahead so most early-out paths don't have to do it
+    window->DockIsActive = window->DockNodeIsVisible = window->DockTabIsVisible = false;
+
+    const bool auto_dock_node = GetWindowAlwaysWantOwnTabBar(window);
+    if (auto_dock_node)
+    {
+        if (window->DockId == 0)
+        {
+            IM_ASSERT(window->DockNode == NULL);
+            window->DockId = DockContextGenNodeID(ctx);
+        }
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Calling SetNextWindowPos() undock windows by default (by setting PosUndock)
+        bool want_undock = false;
+        want_undock |= (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDocking) != 0;
+        want_undock |= (g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasPos) && (window->SetWindowPosAllowFlags & g.NextWindowData.PosCond) && g.NextWindowData.PosUndock;
+        if (want_undock)
+        {
+            DockContextProcessUndockWindow(ctx, window);
+            return;
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Bind to our dock node
+    ImGuiDockNode* node = window->DockNode;
+    if (node != NULL)
+        IM_ASSERT(window->DockId == node->ID);
+    if (window->DockId != 0 && node == NULL)
+    {
+        node = DockContextBindNodeToWindow(ctx, window);
+        if (node == NULL)
+            return;
+    }
+
+#if 0
+    // Undock if the ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingInCentralNode got set
+    if (node->IsCentralNode && (node->Flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingInCentralNode))
+    {
+        DockContextProcessUndockWindow(ctx, window);
+        return;
+    }
+#endif
+
+    // Undock if our dockspace node disappeared
+    // Note how we are testing for LastFrameAlive and NOT LastFrameActive. A DockSpace node can be maintained alive while being inactive with ImGuiDockNodeFlags_KeepAliveOnly.
+    if (node->LastFrameAlive < g.FrameCount)
+    {
+        // If the window has been orphaned, transition the docknode to an implicit node processed in DockContextNewFrameUpdateDocking()
+        ImGuiDockNode* root_node = DockNodeGetRootNode(node);
+        if (root_node->LastFrameAlive < g.FrameCount)
+            DockContextProcessUndockWindow(ctx, window);
+        else
+            window->DockIsActive = true;
+        return;
+    }
+
+    // Store style overrides
+    for (int color_n = 0; color_n < ImGuiWindowDockStyleCol_COUNT; color_n++)
+        window->DockStyle.Colors[color_n] = ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(g.Style.Colors[GWindowDockStyleColors[color_n]]);
+
+    // Fast path return. It is common for windows to hold on a persistent DockId but be the only visible window,
+    // and never create neither a host window neither a tab bar.
+    // FIXME-DOCK: replace ->HostWindow NULL compare with something more explicit (~was initially intended as a first frame test)
+    if (node->HostWindow == NULL)
+    {
+        if (node->State == ImGuiDockNodeState_HostWindowHiddenBecauseWindowsAreResizing)
+            window->DockIsActive = true;
+        if (node->Windows.Size > 1)
+            DockNodeHideWindowDuringHostWindowCreation(window);
+        return;
+    }
+
+    // We can have zero-sized nodes (e.g. children of a small-size dockspace)
+    IM_ASSERT(node->HostWindow);
+    IM_ASSERT(node->IsLeafNode());
+    IM_ASSERT(node->Size.x >= 0.0f && node->Size.y >= 0.0f);
+    node->State = ImGuiDockNodeState_HostWindowVisible;
+
+    // Undock if we are submitted earlier than the host window
+    if (!(node->MergedFlags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_KeepAliveOnly) && window->BeginOrderWithinContext < node->HostWindow->BeginOrderWithinContext)
+    {
+        DockContextProcessUndockWindow(ctx, window);
+        return;
+    }
+
+    // Position/Size window
+    SetNextWindowPos(node->Pos);
+    SetNextWindowSize(node->Size);
+    g.NextWindowData.PosUndock = false; // Cancel implicit undocking of SetNextWindowPos()
+    window->DockIsActive = true;
+    window->DockNodeIsVisible = true;
+    window->DockTabIsVisible = false;
+    if (node->MergedFlags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_KeepAliveOnly)
+        return;
+
+    // When the window is selected we mark it as visible.
+    if (node->VisibleWindow == window)
+        window->DockTabIsVisible = true;
+
+    // Update window flag
+    IM_ASSERT((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) == 0);
+    window->Flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysUseWindowPadding | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize;
+    if (node->IsHiddenTabBar() || node->IsNoTabBar())
+        window->Flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar;
+    else
+        window->Flags &= ~ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar;      // Clear the NoTitleBar flag in case the user set it: confusingly enough we need a title bar height so we are correctly offset, but it won't be displayed!
+
+    // Save new dock order only if the window has been visible once already
+    // This allows multiple windows to be created in the same frame and have their respective dock orders preserved.
+    if (node->TabBar && window->WasActive)
+        window->DockOrder = (short)DockNodeGetTabOrder(window);
+
+    if ((node->WantCloseAll || node->WantCloseTabId == window->TabId) && p_open != NULL)
+        *p_open = false;
+
+    // Update ChildId to allow returning from Child to Parent with Escape
+    ImGuiWindow* parent_window = window->DockNode->HostWindow;
+    window->ChildId = parent_window->GetID(window->Name);
+}
+
+void ImGui::BeginDockableDragDropSource(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.ActiveId == window->MoveId);
+    IM_ASSERT(g.MovingWindow == window);
+    IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindow == window);
+
+    g.LastItemData.ID = window->MoveId;
+    window = window->RootWindowDockTree;
+    IM_ASSERT((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDocking) == 0);
+    bool is_drag_docking = (g.IO.ConfigDockingWithShift) || ImRect(0, 0, window->SizeFull.x, GetFrameHeight()).Contains(g.ActiveIdClickOffset); // FIXME-DOCKING: Need to make this stateful and explicit
+    if (is_drag_docking && BeginDragDropSource(ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoPreviewTooltip | ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoHoldToOpenOthers | ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceAutoExpirePayload))
+    {
+        SetDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_WINDOW, &window, sizeof(window));
+        EndDragDropSource();
+
+        // Store style overrides
+        for (int color_n = 0; color_n < ImGuiWindowDockStyleCol_COUNT; color_n++)
+            window->DockStyle.Colors[color_n] = ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(g.Style.Colors[GWindowDockStyleColors[color_n]]);
+    }
+}
+
+void ImGui::BeginDockableDragDropTarget(ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext* ctx = GImGui;
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+
+    //IM_ASSERT(window->RootWindowDockTree == window); // May also be a DockSpace
+    IM_ASSERT((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDocking) == 0);
+    if (!g.DragDropActive)
+        return;
+    //GetForegroundDrawList(window)->AddRect(window->Pos, window->Pos + window->Size, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255));
+    if (!BeginDragDropTargetCustom(window->Rect(), window->ID))
+        return;
+
+    // Peek into the payload before calling AcceptDragDropPayload() so we can handle overlapping dock nodes with filtering
+    // (this is a little unusual pattern, normally most code would call AcceptDragDropPayload directly)
+    const ImGuiPayload* payload = &g.DragDropPayload;
+    if (!payload->IsDataType(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_WINDOW) || !DockNodeIsDropAllowed(window, *(ImGuiWindow**)payload->Data))
+    {
+        EndDragDropTarget();
+        return;
+    }
+
+    ImGuiWindow* payload_window = *(ImGuiWindow**)payload->Data;
+    if (AcceptDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_WINDOW, ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptBeforeDelivery | ImGuiDragDropFlags_AcceptNoDrawDefaultRect))
+    {
+        // Select target node
+        // (Important: we cannot use g.HoveredDockNode here! Because each of our target node have filters based on payload, each candidate drop target will do its own evaluation)
+        bool dock_into_floating_window = false;
+        ImGuiDockNode* node = NULL;
+        if (window->DockNodeAsHost)
+        {
+            // Cannot assume that node will != NULL even though we passed the rectangle test: it depends on padding/spacing handled by DockNodeTreeFindVisibleNodeByPos().
+            node = DockNodeTreeFindVisibleNodeByPos(window->DockNodeAsHost, g.IO.MousePos);
+
+            // There is an edge case when docking into a dockspace which only has _inactive_ nodes (because none of the windows are active)
+            // In this case we need to fallback into any leaf mode, possibly the central node.
+            // FIXME-20181220: We should not have to test for IsLeafNode() here but we have another bug to fix first.
+            if (node && node->IsDockSpace() && node->IsRootNode())
+                node = (node->CentralNode && node->IsLeafNode()) ? node->CentralNode : DockNodeTreeFindFallbackLeafNode(node);
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            if (window->DockNode)
+                node = window->DockNode;
+            else
+                dock_into_floating_window = true; // Dock into a regular window
+        }
+
+        const ImRect explicit_target_rect = (node && node->TabBar && !node->IsHiddenTabBar() && !node->IsNoTabBar()) ? node->TabBar->BarRect : ImRect(window->Pos, window->Pos + ImVec2(window->Size.x, GetFrameHeight()));
+        const bool is_explicit_target = g.IO.ConfigDockingWithShift || IsMouseHoveringRect(explicit_target_rect.Min, explicit_target_rect.Max);
+
+        // Preview docking request and find out split direction/ratio
+        //const bool do_preview = true;     // Ignore testing for payload->IsPreview() which removes one frame of delay, but breaks overlapping drop targets within the same window.
+        const bool do_preview = payload->IsPreview() || payload->IsDelivery();
+        if (do_preview && (node != NULL || dock_into_floating_window))
+        {
+            ImGuiDockPreviewData split_inner;
+            ImGuiDockPreviewData split_outer;
+            ImGuiDockPreviewData* split_data = &split_inner;
+            if (node && (node->ParentNode || node->IsCentralNode()))
+                if (ImGuiDockNode* root_node = DockNodeGetRootNode(node))
+                {
+                    DockNodePreviewDockSetup(window, root_node, payload_window, &split_outer, is_explicit_target, true);
+                    if (split_outer.IsSplitDirExplicit)
+                        split_data = &split_outer;
+                }
+            DockNodePreviewDockSetup(window, node, payload_window, &split_inner, is_explicit_target, false);
+            if (split_data == &split_outer)
+                split_inner.IsDropAllowed = false;
+
+            // Draw inner then outer, so that previewed tab (in inner data) will be behind the outer drop boxes
+            DockNodePreviewDockRender(window, node, payload_window, &split_inner);
+            DockNodePreviewDockRender(window, node, payload_window, &split_outer);
+
+            // Queue docking request
+            if (split_data->IsDropAllowed && payload->IsDelivery())
+                DockContextQueueDock(ctx, window, split_data->SplitNode, payload_window, split_data->SplitDir, split_data->SplitRatio, split_data == &split_outer);
+        }
+    }
+    EndDragDropTarget();
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Docking: Settings
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - DockSettingsRenameNodeReferences()
+// - DockSettingsRemoveNodeReferences()
+// - DockSettingsFindNodeSettings()
+// - DockSettingsHandler_ApplyAll()
+// - DockSettingsHandler_ReadOpen()
+// - DockSettingsHandler_ReadLine()
+// - DockSettingsHandler_DockNodeToSettings()
+// - DockSettingsHandler_WriteAll()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+static void ImGui::DockSettingsRenameNodeReferences(ImGuiID old_node_id, ImGuiID new_node_id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IMGUI_DEBUG_LOG_DOCKING("[docking] DockSettingsRenameNodeReferences: from 0x%08X -> to 0x%08X\n", old_node_id, new_node_id);
+    for (int window_n = 0; window_n < g.Windows.Size; window_n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[window_n];
+        if (window->DockId == old_node_id && window->DockNode == NULL)
+            window->DockId = new_node_id;
+    }
+    //// FIXME-OPT: We could remove this loop by storing the index in the map
+    for (ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = g.SettingsWindows.begin(); settings != NULL; settings = g.SettingsWindows.next_chunk(settings))
+        if (settings->DockId == old_node_id)
+            settings->DockId = new_node_id;
+}
+
+// Remove references stored in ImGuiWindowSettings to the given ImGuiDockNodeSettings
+static void ImGui::DockSettingsRemoveNodeReferences(ImGuiID* node_ids, int node_ids_count)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    int found = 0;
+    //// FIXME-OPT: We could remove this loop by storing the index in the map
+    for (ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = g.SettingsWindows.begin(); settings != NULL; settings = g.SettingsWindows.next_chunk(settings))
+        for (int node_n = 0; node_n < node_ids_count; node_n++)
+            if (settings->DockId == node_ids[node_n])
+            {
+                settings->DockId = 0;
+                settings->DockOrder = -1;
+                if (++found < node_ids_count)
+                    break;
+                return;
+            }
+}
+
+static ImGuiDockNodeSettings* ImGui::DockSettingsFindNodeSettings(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiID id)
+{
+    // FIXME-OPT
+    ImGuiDockContext* dc  = &ctx->DockContext;
+    for (int n = 0; n < dc->NodesSettings.Size; n++)
+        if (dc->NodesSettings[n].ID == id)
+            return &dc->NodesSettings[n];
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+// Clear settings data
+static void ImGui::DockSettingsHandler_ClearAll(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler*)
+{
+    ImGuiDockContext* dc  = &ctx->DockContext;
+    dc->NodesSettings.clear();
+    DockContextClearNodes(ctx, 0, true);
+}
+
+// Recreate nodes based on settings data
+static void ImGui::DockSettingsHandler_ApplyAll(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler*)
+{
+    // Prune settings at boot time only
+    ImGuiDockContext* dc  = &ctx->DockContext;
+    if (ctx->Windows.Size == 0)
+        DockContextPruneUnusedSettingsNodes(ctx);
+    DockContextBuildNodesFromSettings(ctx, dc->NodesSettings.Data, dc->NodesSettings.Size);
+    DockContextBuildAddWindowsToNodes(ctx, 0);
+}
+
+static void* ImGui::DockSettingsHandler_ReadOpen(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*, const char* name)
+{
+    if (strcmp(name, "Data") != 0)
+        return NULL;
+    return (void*)1;
+}
+
+static void ImGui::DockSettingsHandler_ReadLine(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler*, void*, const char* line)
+{
+    char c = 0;
+    int x = 0, y = 0;
+    int r = 0;
+
+    // Parsing, e.g.
+    // " DockNode   ID=0x00000001 Pos=383,193 Size=201,322 Split=Y,0.506 "
+    // "   DockNode ID=0x00000002 Parent=0x00000001 "
+    // Important: this code expect currently fields in a fixed order.
+    ImGuiDockNodeSettings node;
+    line = ImStrSkipBlank(line);
+    if      (strncmp(line, "DockNode", 8) == 0)  { line = ImStrSkipBlank(line + strlen("DockNode")); }
+    else if (strncmp(line, "DockSpace", 9) == 0) { line = ImStrSkipBlank(line + strlen("DockSpace")); node.Flags |= ImGuiDockNodeFlags_DockSpace; }
+    else return;
+    if (sscanf(line, "ID=0x%08X%n",      &node.ID, &r) == 1)            { line += r; } else return;
+    if (sscanf(line, " Parent=0x%08X%n", &node.ParentNodeId, &r) == 1)  { line += r; if (node.ParentNodeId == 0) return; }
+    if (sscanf(line, " Window=0x%08X%n", &node.ParentWindowId, &r) ==1) { line += r; if (node.ParentWindowId == 0) return; }
+    if (node.ParentNodeId == 0)
+    {
+        if (sscanf(line, " Pos=%i,%i%n",  &x, &y, &r) == 2)         { line += r; node.Pos = ImVec2ih((short)x, (short)y); } else return;
+        if (sscanf(line, " Size=%i,%i%n", &x, &y, &r) == 2)         { line += r; node.Size = ImVec2ih((short)x, (short)y); } else return;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        if (sscanf(line, " SizeRef=%i,%i%n", &x, &y, &r) == 2)      { line += r; node.SizeRef = ImVec2ih((short)x, (short)y); }
+    }
+    if (sscanf(line, " Split=%c%n", &c, &r) == 1)                   { line += r; if (c == 'X') node.SplitAxis = ImGuiAxis_X; else if (c == 'Y') node.SplitAxis = ImGuiAxis_Y; }
+    if (sscanf(line, " NoResize=%d%n", &x, &r) == 1)                { line += r; if (x != 0) node.Flags |= ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResize; }
+    if (sscanf(line, " CentralNode=%d%n", &x, &r) == 1)             { line += r; if (x != 0) node.Flags |= ImGuiDockNodeFlags_CentralNode; }
+    if (sscanf(line, " NoTabBar=%d%n", &x, &r) == 1)                { line += r; if (x != 0) node.Flags |= ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoTabBar; }
+    if (sscanf(line, " HiddenTabBar=%d%n", &x, &r) == 1)            { line += r; if (x != 0) node.Flags |= ImGuiDockNodeFlags_HiddenTabBar; }
+    if (sscanf(line, " NoWindowMenuButton=%d%n", &x, &r) == 1)      { line += r; if (x != 0) node.Flags |= ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoWindowMenuButton; }
+    if (sscanf(line, " NoCloseButton=%d%n", &x, &r) == 1)           { line += r; if (x != 0) node.Flags |= ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoCloseButton; }
+    if (sscanf(line, " Selected=0x%08X%n", &node.SelectedTabId,&r) == 1) { line += r; }
+    if (node.ParentNodeId != 0)
+        if (ImGuiDockNodeSettings* parent_settings = DockSettingsFindNodeSettings(ctx, node.ParentNodeId))
+            node.Depth = parent_settings->Depth + 1;
+    ctx->DockContext.NodesSettings.push_back(node);
+}
+
+static void DockSettingsHandler_DockNodeToSettings(ImGuiDockContext* dc, ImGuiDockNode* node, int depth)
+{
+    ImGuiDockNodeSettings node_settings;
+    IM_ASSERT(depth < (1 << (sizeof(node_settings.Depth) << 3)));
+    node_settings.ID = node->ID;
+    node_settings.ParentNodeId = node->ParentNode ? node->ParentNode->ID : 0;
+    node_settings.ParentWindowId = (node->IsDockSpace() && node->HostWindow && node->HostWindow->ParentWindow) ? node->HostWindow->ParentWindow->ID : 0;
+    node_settings.SelectedTabId = node->SelectedTabId;
+    node_settings.SplitAxis = (signed char)(node->IsSplitNode() ? node->SplitAxis : ImGuiAxis_None);
+    node_settings.Depth = (char)depth;
+    node_settings.Flags = (node->LocalFlags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_SavedFlagsMask_);
+    node_settings.Pos = ImVec2ih(node->Pos);
+    node_settings.Size = ImVec2ih(node->Size);
+    node_settings.SizeRef = ImVec2ih(node->SizeRef);
+    dc->NodesSettings.push_back(node_settings);
+    if (node->ChildNodes[0])
+        DockSettingsHandler_DockNodeToSettings(dc, node->ChildNodes[0], depth + 1);
+    if (node->ChildNodes[1])
+        DockSettingsHandler_DockNodeToSettings(dc, node->ChildNodes[1], depth + 1);
+}
+
+static void ImGui::DockSettingsHandler_WriteAll(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler, ImGuiTextBuffer* buf)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+    ImGuiDockContext* dc = &ctx->DockContext;
+    if (!(g.IO.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_DockingEnable))
+        return;
+
+    // Gather settings data
+    // (unlike our windows settings, because nodes are always built we can do a full rewrite of the SettingsNode buffer)
+    dc->NodesSettings.resize(0);
+    dc->NodesSettings.reserve(dc->Nodes.Data.Size);
+    for (int n = 0; n < dc->Nodes.Data.Size; n++)
+        if (ImGuiDockNode* node = (ImGuiDockNode*)dc->Nodes.Data[n].val_p)
+            if (node->IsRootNode())
+                DockSettingsHandler_DockNodeToSettings(dc, node, 0);
+
+    int max_depth = 0;
+    for (int node_n = 0; node_n < dc->NodesSettings.Size; node_n++)
+        max_depth = ImMax((int)dc->NodesSettings[node_n].Depth, max_depth);
+
+    // Write to text buffer
+    buf->appendf("[%s][Data]\n", handler->TypeName);
+    for (int node_n = 0; node_n < dc->NodesSettings.Size; node_n++)
+    {
+        const int line_start_pos = buf->size(); (void)line_start_pos;
+        const ImGuiDockNodeSettings* node_settings = &dc->NodesSettings[node_n];
+        buf->appendf("%*s%s%*s", node_settings->Depth * 2, "", (node_settings->Flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_DockSpace) ? "DockSpace" : "DockNode ", (max_depth - node_settings->Depth) * 2, "");  // Text align nodes to facilitate looking at .ini file
+        buf->appendf(" ID=0x%08X", node_settings->ID);
+        if (node_settings->ParentNodeId)
+        {
+            buf->appendf(" Parent=0x%08X SizeRef=%d,%d", node_settings->ParentNodeId, node_settings->SizeRef.x, node_settings->SizeRef.y);
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            if (node_settings->ParentWindowId)
+                buf->appendf(" Window=0x%08X", node_settings->ParentWindowId);
+            buf->appendf(" Pos=%d,%d Size=%d,%d", node_settings->Pos.x, node_settings->Pos.y, node_settings->Size.x, node_settings->Size.y);
+        }
+        if (node_settings->SplitAxis != ImGuiAxis_None)
+            buf->appendf(" Split=%c", (node_settings->SplitAxis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? 'X' : 'Y');
+        if (node_settings->Flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResize)
+            buf->appendf(" NoResize=1");
+        if (node_settings->Flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_CentralNode)
+            buf->appendf(" CentralNode=1");
+        if (node_settings->Flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoTabBar)
+            buf->appendf(" NoTabBar=1");
+        if (node_settings->Flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_HiddenTabBar)
+            buf->appendf(" HiddenTabBar=1");
+        if (node_settings->Flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoWindowMenuButton)
+            buf->appendf(" NoWindowMenuButton=1");
+        if (node_settings->Flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoCloseButton)
+            buf->appendf(" NoCloseButton=1");
+        if (node_settings->SelectedTabId)
+            buf->appendf(" Selected=0x%08X", node_settings->SelectedTabId);
+
+#if IMGUI_DEBUG_INI_SETTINGS
+        // [DEBUG] Include comments in the .ini file to ease debugging
+        if (ImGuiDockNode* node = DockContextFindNodeByID(ctx, node_settings->ID))
+        {
+            buf->appendf("%*s", ImMax(2, (line_start_pos + 92) - buf->size()), "");     // Align everything
+            if (node->IsDockSpace() && node->HostWindow && node->HostWindow->ParentWindow)
+                buf->appendf(" ; in '%s'", node->HostWindow->ParentWindow->Name);
+            // Iterate settings so we can give info about windows that didn't exist during the session.
+            int contains_window = 0;
+            for (ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = g.SettingsWindows.begin(); settings != NULL; settings = g.SettingsWindows.next_chunk(settings))
+                if (settings->DockId == node_settings->ID)
+                {
+                    if (contains_window++ == 0)
+                        buf->appendf(" ; contains ");
+                    buf->appendf("'%s' ", settings->GetName());
+                }
+        }
+#endif
+        buf->appendf("\n");
+    }
+    buf->appendf("\n");
+}
+
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] PLATFORM DEPENDENT HELPERS
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_FUNCTIONS) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS)
+
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+#pragma comment(lib, "user32")
+#pragma comment(lib, "kernel32")
+#endif
+
+// Win32 clipboard implementation
+// We use g.ClipboardHandlerData for temporary storage to ensure it is freed on Shutdown()
+static const char* GetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl(void*)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.ClipboardHandlerData.clear();
+    if (!::OpenClipboard(NULL))
+        return NULL;
+    HANDLE wbuf_handle = ::GetClipboardData(CF_UNICODETEXT);
+    if (wbuf_handle == NULL)
+    {
+        ::CloseClipboard();
+        return NULL;
+    }
+    if (const WCHAR* wbuf_global = (const WCHAR*)::GlobalLock(wbuf_handle))
+    {
+        int buf_len = ::WideCharToMultiByte(CP_UTF8, 0, wbuf_global, -1, NULL, 0, NULL, NULL);
+        g.ClipboardHandlerData.resize(buf_len);
+        ::WideCharToMultiByte(CP_UTF8, 0, wbuf_global, -1, g.ClipboardHandlerData.Data, buf_len, NULL, NULL);
+    }
+    ::GlobalUnlock(wbuf_handle);
+    ::CloseClipboard();
+    return g.ClipboardHandlerData.Data;
+}
+
+static void SetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl(void*, const char* text)
+{
+    if (!::OpenClipboard(NULL))
+        return;
+    const int wbuf_length = ::MultiByteToWideChar(CP_UTF8, 0, text, -1, NULL, 0);
+    HGLOBAL wbuf_handle = ::GlobalAlloc(GMEM_MOVEABLE, (SIZE_T)wbuf_length * sizeof(WCHAR));
+    if (wbuf_handle == NULL)
+    {
+        ::CloseClipboard();
+        return;
+    }
+    WCHAR* wbuf_global = (WCHAR*)::GlobalLock(wbuf_handle);
+    ::MultiByteToWideChar(CP_UTF8, 0, text, -1, wbuf_global, wbuf_length);
+    ::GlobalUnlock(wbuf_handle);
+    ::EmptyClipboard();
+    if (::SetClipboardData(CF_UNICODETEXT, wbuf_handle) == NULL)
+        ::GlobalFree(wbuf_handle);
+    ::CloseClipboard();
+}
+
+#elif defined(__APPLE__) && TARGET_OS_OSX && defined(IMGUI_ENABLE_OSX_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS)
+
+#include <Carbon/Carbon.h>  // Use old API to avoid need for separate .mm file
+static PasteboardRef main_clipboard = 0;
+
+// OSX clipboard implementation
+// If you enable this you will need to add '-framework ApplicationServices' to your linker command-line!
+static void SetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl(void*, const char* text)
+{
+    if (!main_clipboard)
+        PasteboardCreate(kPasteboardClipboard, &main_clipboard);
+    PasteboardClear(main_clipboard);
+    CFDataRef cf_data = CFDataCreate(kCFAllocatorDefault, (const UInt8*)text, strlen(text));
+    if (cf_data)
+    {
+        PasteboardPutItemFlavor(main_clipboard, (PasteboardItemID)1, CFSTR("public.utf8-plain-text"), cf_data, 0);
+        CFRelease(cf_data);
+    }
+}
+
+static const char* GetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl(void*)
+{
+    if (!main_clipboard)
+        PasteboardCreate(kPasteboardClipboard, &main_clipboard);
+    PasteboardSynchronize(main_clipboard);
+
+    ItemCount item_count = 0;
+    PasteboardGetItemCount(main_clipboard, &item_count);
+    for (ItemCount i = 0; i < item_count; i++)
+    {
+        PasteboardItemID item_id = 0;
+        PasteboardGetItemIdentifier(main_clipboard, i + 1, &item_id);
+        CFArrayRef flavor_type_array = 0;
+        PasteboardCopyItemFlavors(main_clipboard, item_id, &flavor_type_array);
+        for (CFIndex j = 0, nj = CFArrayGetCount(flavor_type_array); j < nj; j++)
+        {
+            CFDataRef cf_data;
+            if (PasteboardCopyItemFlavorData(main_clipboard, item_id, CFSTR("public.utf8-plain-text"), &cf_data) == noErr)
+            {
+                ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+                g.ClipboardHandlerData.clear();
+                int length = (int)CFDataGetLength(cf_data);
+                g.ClipboardHandlerData.resize(length + 1);
+                CFDataGetBytes(cf_data, CFRangeMake(0, length), (UInt8*)g.ClipboardHandlerData.Data);
+                g.ClipboardHandlerData[length] = 0;
+                CFRelease(cf_data);
+                return g.ClipboardHandlerData.Data;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+#else
+
+// Local Dear ImGui-only clipboard implementation, if user hasn't defined better clipboard handlers.
+static const char* GetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl(void*)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.ClipboardHandlerData.empty() ? NULL : g.ClipboardHandlerData.begin();
+}
+
+static void SetClipboardTextFn_DefaultImpl(void*, const char* text)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.ClipboardHandlerData.clear();
+    const char* text_end = text + strlen(text);
+    g.ClipboardHandlerData.resize((int)(text_end - text) + 1);
+    memcpy(&g.ClipboardHandlerData[0], text, (size_t)(text_end - text));
+    g.ClipboardHandlerData[(int)(text_end - text)] = 0;
+}
+
+#endif
+
+// Win32 API IME support (for Asian languages, etc.)
+#if defined(_WIN32) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_FUNCTIONS) && !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS)
+
+#include <imm.h>
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+#pragma comment(lib, "imm32")
+#endif
+
+static void SetPlatformImeDataFn_DefaultImpl(ImGuiViewport* viewport, ImGuiPlatformImeData* data)
+{
+    // Notify OS Input Method Editor of text input position
+    HWND hwnd = (HWND)viewport->PlatformHandleRaw;
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+    if (hwnd == 0)
+        hwnd = (HWND)ImGui::GetIO().ImeWindowHandle;
+#endif
+    if (hwnd == 0)
+        return;
+
+    ::ImmAssociateContextEx(hwnd, NULL, data->WantVisible ? IACE_DEFAULT : 0);
+
+    if (HIMC himc = ::ImmGetContext(hwnd))
+    {
+        COMPOSITIONFORM composition_form = {};
+        composition_form.ptCurrentPos.x = (LONG)(data->InputPos.x - viewport->Pos.x);
+        composition_form.ptCurrentPos.y = (LONG)(data->InputPos.y - viewport->Pos.y);
+        composition_form.dwStyle = CFS_FORCE_POSITION;
+        ::ImmSetCompositionWindow(himc, &composition_form);
+        CANDIDATEFORM candidate_form = {};
+        candidate_form.dwStyle = CFS_CANDIDATEPOS;
+        candidate_form.ptCurrentPos.x = (LONG)(data->InputPos.x - viewport->Pos.x);
+        candidate_form.ptCurrentPos.y = (LONG)(data->InputPos.y - viewport->Pos.y);
+        ::ImmSetCandidateWindow(himc, &candidate_form);
+        ::ImmReleaseContext(hwnd, himc);
+    }
+}
+
+#else
+
+static void SetPlatformImeDataFn_DefaultImpl(ImGuiViewport*, ImGuiPlatformImeData*) {}
+
+#endif
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] METRICS/DEBUGGER WINDOW
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - RenderViewportThumbnail() [Internal]
+// - RenderViewportsThumbnails() [Internal]
+// - DebugTextEncoding()
+// - MetricsHelpMarker() [Internal]
+// - ShowFontAtlas() [Internal]
+// - ShowMetricsWindow()
+// - DebugNodeColumns() [Internal]
+// - DebugNodeDockNode() [Internal]
+// - DebugNodeDrawList() [Internal]
+// - DebugNodeDrawCmdShowMeshAndBoundingBox() [Internal]
+// - DebugNodeFont() [Internal]
+// - DebugNodeFontGlyph() [Internal]
+// - DebugNodeStorage() [Internal]
+// - DebugNodeTabBar() [Internal]
+// - DebugNodeViewport() [Internal]
+// - DebugNodeWindow() [Internal]
+// - DebugNodeWindowSettings() [Internal]
+// - DebugNodeWindowsList() [Internal]
+// - DebugNodeWindowsListByBeginStackParent() [Internal]
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS
+
+void ImGui::DebugRenderViewportThumbnail(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImGuiViewportP* viewport, const ImRect& bb)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+    ImVec2 scale = bb.GetSize() / viewport->Size;
+    ImVec2 off = bb.Min - viewport->Pos * scale;
+    float alpha_mul = (viewport->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_Minimized) ? 0.30f : 1.00f;
+    window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb.Min, bb.Max, ImGui::GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border, alpha_mul * 0.40f));
+    for (int i = 0; i != g.Windows.Size; i++)
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* thumb_window = g.Windows[i];
+        if (!thumb_window->WasActive || (thumb_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow))
+            continue;
+        if (thumb_window->Viewport != viewport)
+            continue;
+
+        ImRect thumb_r = thumb_window->Rect();
+        ImRect title_r = thumb_window->TitleBarRect();
+        thumb_r = ImRect(ImFloor(off + thumb_r.Min * scale), ImFloor(off +  thumb_r.Max * scale));
+        title_r = ImRect(ImFloor(off + title_r.Min * scale), ImFloor(off +  ImVec2(title_r.Max.x, title_r.Min.y) * scale) + ImVec2(0,5)); // Exaggerate title bar height
+        thumb_r.ClipWithFull(bb);
+        title_r.ClipWithFull(bb);
+        const bool window_is_focused = (g.NavWindow && thumb_window->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight == g.NavWindow->RootWindowForTitleBarHighlight);
+        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(thumb_r.Min, thumb_r.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_WindowBg, alpha_mul));
+        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(title_r.Min, title_r.Max, GetColorU32(window_is_focused ? ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive : ImGuiCol_TitleBg, alpha_mul));
+        window->DrawList->AddRect(thumb_r.Min, thumb_r.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border, alpha_mul));
+        window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize * 1.0f, title_r.Min, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text, alpha_mul), thumb_window->Name, FindRenderedTextEnd(thumb_window->Name));
+    }
+    draw_list->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border, alpha_mul));
+}
+
+static void RenderViewportsThumbnails()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+    // We don't display full monitor bounds (we could, but it often looks awkward), instead we display just enough to cover all of our viewports.
+    float SCALE = 1.0f / 8.0f;
+    ImRect bb_full(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX);
+    for (int n = 0; n < g.Viewports.Size; n++)
+        bb_full.Add(g.Viewports[n]->GetMainRect());
+    ImVec2 p = window->DC.CursorPos;
+    ImVec2 off = p - bb_full.Min * SCALE;
+    for (int n = 0; n < g.Viewports.Size; n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiViewportP* viewport = g.Viewports[n];
+        ImRect viewport_draw_bb(off + (viewport->Pos) * SCALE, off + (viewport->Pos + viewport->Size) * SCALE);
+        ImGui::DebugRenderViewportThumbnail(window->DrawList, viewport, viewport_draw_bb);
+    }
+    ImGui::Dummy(bb_full.GetSize() * SCALE);
+}
+
+static int IMGUI_CDECL ViewportComparerByFrontMostStampCount(const void* lhs, const void* rhs)
+{
+    const ImGuiViewportP* a = *(const ImGuiViewportP* const*)lhs;
+    const ImGuiViewportP* b = *(const ImGuiViewportP* const*)rhs;
+    return b->LastFrontMostStampCount - a->LastFrontMostStampCount;
+}
+
+// Helper tool to diagnose between text encoding issues and font loading issues. Pass your UTF-8 string and verify that there are correct.
+void ImGui::DebugTextEncoding(const char* str)
+{
+    Text("Text: \"%s\"", str);
+    if (!BeginTable("list", 4, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit))
+        return;
+    TableSetupColumn("Offset");
+    TableSetupColumn("UTF-8");
+    TableSetupColumn("Glyph");
+    TableSetupColumn("Codepoint");
+    TableHeadersRow();
+    for (const char* p = str; *p != 0; )
+    {
+        unsigned int c;
+        const int c_utf8_len = ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, p, NULL);
+        TableNextColumn();
+        Text("%d", (int)(p - str));
+        TableNextColumn();
+        for (int byte_index = 0; byte_index < c_utf8_len; byte_index++)
+        {
+            if (byte_index > 0)
+                SameLine();
+            Text("0x%02X", (int)(unsigned char)p[byte_index]);
+        }
+        TableNextColumn();
+        if (GetFont()->FindGlyphNoFallback((ImWchar)c))
+            TextUnformatted(p, p + c_utf8_len);
+        else
+            TextUnformatted((c == IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_INVALID) ? "[invalid]" : "[missing]");
+        TableNextColumn();
+        Text("U+%04X", (int)c);
+        p += c_utf8_len;
+    }
+    EndTable();
+}
+
+// Avoid naming collision with imgui_demo.cpp's HelpMarker() for unity builds.
+static void MetricsHelpMarker(const char* desc)
+{
+    ImGui::TextDisabled("(?)");
+    if (ImGui::IsItemHovered())
+    {
+        ImGui::BeginTooltip();
+        ImGui::PushTextWrapPos(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 35.0f);
+        ImGui::TextUnformatted(desc);
+        ImGui::PopTextWrapPos();
+        ImGui::EndTooltip();
+    }
+}
+
+// [DEBUG] List fonts in a font atlas and display its texture
+void ImGui::ShowFontAtlas(ImFontAtlas* atlas)
+{
+    for (int i = 0; i < atlas->Fonts.Size; i++)
+    {
+        ImFont* font = atlas->Fonts[i];
+        PushID(font);
+        DebugNodeFont(font);
+        PopID();
+    }
+    if (TreeNode("Atlas texture", "Atlas texture (%dx%d pixels)", atlas->TexWidth, atlas->TexHeight))
+    {
+        ImVec4 tint_col = ImVec4(1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f);
+        ImVec4 border_col = ImVec4(1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f, 0.5f);
+        Image(atlas->TexID, ImVec2((float)atlas->TexWidth, (float)atlas->TexHeight), ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f), ImVec2(1.0f, 1.0f), tint_col, border_col);
+        TreePop();
+    }
+}
+
+void ImGui::ShowMetricsWindow(bool* p_open)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiIO& io = g.IO;
+    ImGuiMetricsConfig* cfg = &g.DebugMetricsConfig;
+    if (cfg->ShowDebugLog)
+        ShowDebugLogWindow(&cfg->ShowDebugLog);
+    if (cfg->ShowStackTool)
+        ShowStackToolWindow(&cfg->ShowStackTool);
+
+    if (!Begin("Dear ImGui Metrics/Debugger", p_open) || GetCurrentWindow()->BeginCount > 1)
+    {
+        End();
+        return;
+    }
+
+    // Basic info
+    Text("Dear ImGui %s", GetVersion());
+    Text("Application average %.3f ms/frame (%.1f FPS)", 1000.0f / io.Framerate, io.Framerate);
+    Text("%d vertices, %d indices (%d triangles)", io.MetricsRenderVertices, io.MetricsRenderIndices, io.MetricsRenderIndices / 3);
+    Text("%d visible windows, %d active allocations", io.MetricsRenderWindows, io.MetricsActiveAllocations);
+    //SameLine(); if (SmallButton("GC")) { g.GcCompactAll = true; }
+
+    Separator();
+
+    // Debugging enums
+    enum { WRT_OuterRect, WRT_OuterRectClipped, WRT_InnerRect, WRT_InnerClipRect, WRT_WorkRect, WRT_Content, WRT_ContentIdeal, WRT_ContentRegionRect, WRT_Count }; // Windows Rect Type
+    const char* wrt_rects_names[WRT_Count] = { "OuterRect", "OuterRectClipped", "InnerRect", "InnerClipRect", "WorkRect", "Content", "ContentIdeal", "ContentRegionRect" };
+    enum { TRT_OuterRect, TRT_InnerRect, TRT_WorkRect, TRT_HostClipRect, TRT_InnerClipRect, TRT_BackgroundClipRect, TRT_ColumnsRect, TRT_ColumnsWorkRect, TRT_ColumnsClipRect, TRT_ColumnsContentHeadersUsed, TRT_ColumnsContentHeadersIdeal, TRT_ColumnsContentFrozen, TRT_ColumnsContentUnfrozen, TRT_Count }; // Tables Rect Type
+    const char* trt_rects_names[TRT_Count] = { "OuterRect", "InnerRect", "WorkRect", "HostClipRect", "InnerClipRect", "BackgroundClipRect", "ColumnsRect", "ColumnsWorkRect", "ColumnsClipRect", "ColumnsContentHeadersUsed", "ColumnsContentHeadersIdeal", "ColumnsContentFrozen", "ColumnsContentUnfrozen" };
+    if (cfg->ShowWindowsRectsType < 0)
+        cfg->ShowWindowsRectsType = WRT_WorkRect;
+    if (cfg->ShowTablesRectsType < 0)
+        cfg->ShowTablesRectsType = TRT_WorkRect;
+
+    struct Funcs
+    {
+        static ImRect GetTableRect(ImGuiTable* table, int rect_type, int n)
+        {
+            ImGuiTableInstanceData* table_instance = TableGetInstanceData(table, table->InstanceCurrent); // Always using last submitted instance
+            if (rect_type == TRT_OuterRect)                     { return table->OuterRect; }
+            else if (rect_type == TRT_InnerRect)                { return table->InnerRect; }
+            else if (rect_type == TRT_WorkRect)                 { return table->WorkRect; }
+            else if (rect_type == TRT_HostClipRect)             { return table->HostClipRect; }
+            else if (rect_type == TRT_InnerClipRect)            { return table->InnerClipRect; }
+            else if (rect_type == TRT_BackgroundClipRect)       { return table->BgClipRect; }
+            else if (rect_type == TRT_ColumnsRect)              { ImGuiTableColumn* c = &table->Columns[n]; return ImRect(c->MinX, table->InnerClipRect.Min.y, c->MaxX, table->InnerClipRect.Min.y + table_instance->LastOuterHeight); }
+            else if (rect_type == TRT_ColumnsWorkRect)          { ImGuiTableColumn* c = &table->Columns[n]; return ImRect(c->WorkMinX, table->WorkRect.Min.y, c->WorkMaxX, table->WorkRect.Max.y); }
+            else if (rect_type == TRT_ColumnsClipRect)          { ImGuiTableColumn* c = &table->Columns[n]; return c->ClipRect; }
+            else if (rect_type == TRT_ColumnsContentHeadersUsed){ ImGuiTableColumn* c = &table->Columns[n]; return ImRect(c->WorkMinX, table->InnerClipRect.Min.y, c->ContentMaxXHeadersUsed, table->InnerClipRect.Min.y + table_instance->LastFirstRowHeight); } // Note: y1/y2 not always accurate
+            else if (rect_type == TRT_ColumnsContentHeadersIdeal){ImGuiTableColumn* c = &table->Columns[n]; return ImRect(c->WorkMinX, table->InnerClipRect.Min.y, c->ContentMaxXHeadersIdeal, table->InnerClipRect.Min.y + table_instance->LastFirstRowHeight); }
+            else if (rect_type == TRT_ColumnsContentFrozen)     { ImGuiTableColumn* c = &table->Columns[n]; return ImRect(c->WorkMinX, table->InnerClipRect.Min.y, c->ContentMaxXFrozen, table->InnerClipRect.Min.y + table_instance->LastFirstRowHeight); }
+            else if (rect_type == TRT_ColumnsContentUnfrozen)   { ImGuiTableColumn* c = &table->Columns[n]; return ImRect(c->WorkMinX, table->InnerClipRect.Min.y + table_instance->LastFirstRowHeight, c->ContentMaxXUnfrozen, table->InnerClipRect.Max.y); }
+            IM_ASSERT(0);
+            return ImRect();
+        }
+
+        static ImRect GetWindowRect(ImGuiWindow* window, int rect_type)
+        {
+            if (rect_type == WRT_OuterRect)                 { return window->Rect(); }
+            else if (rect_type == WRT_OuterRectClipped)     { return window->OuterRectClipped; }
+            else if (rect_type == WRT_InnerRect)            { return window->InnerRect; }
+            else if (rect_type == WRT_InnerClipRect)        { return window->InnerClipRect; }
+            else if (rect_type == WRT_WorkRect)             { return window->WorkRect; }
+            else if (rect_type == WRT_Content)       { ImVec2 min = window->InnerRect.Min - window->Scroll + window->WindowPadding; return ImRect(min, min + window->ContentSize); }
+            else if (rect_type == WRT_ContentIdeal)         { ImVec2 min = window->InnerRect.Min - window->Scroll + window->WindowPadding; return ImRect(min, min + window->ContentSizeIdeal); }
+            else if (rect_type == WRT_ContentRegionRect)    { return window->ContentRegionRect; }
+            IM_ASSERT(0);
+            return ImRect();
+        }
+    };
+
+    // Tools
+    if (TreeNode("Tools"))
+    {
+        bool show_encoding_viewer = TreeNode("UTF-8 Encoding viewer");
+        SameLine();
+        MetricsHelpMarker("You can also call ImGui::DebugTextEncoding() from your code with a given string to test that your UTF-8 encoding settings are correct.");
+        if (show_encoding_viewer)
+        {
+            static char buf[100] = "";
+            SetNextItemWidth(-FLT_MIN);
+            InputText("##Text", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf));
+            if (buf[0] != 0)
+                DebugTextEncoding(buf);
+            TreePop();
+        }
+
+        // The Item Picker tool is super useful to visually select an item and break into the call-stack of where it was submitted.
+        if (Checkbox("Show Item Picker", &g.DebugItemPickerActive) && g.DebugItemPickerActive)
+            DebugStartItemPicker();
+        SameLine();
+        MetricsHelpMarker("Will call the IM_DEBUG_BREAK() macro to break in debugger.\nWarning: If you don't have a debugger attached, this will probably crash.");
+
+        // Stack Tool is your best friend!
+        Checkbox("Show Debug Log", &cfg->ShowDebugLog);
+        SameLine();
+        MetricsHelpMarker("You can also call ImGui::ShowDebugLogWindow() from your code.");
+
+        // Stack Tool is your best friend!
+        Checkbox("Show Stack Tool", &cfg->ShowStackTool);
+        SameLine();
+        MetricsHelpMarker("You can also call ImGui::ShowStackToolWindow() from your code.");
+
+        Checkbox("Show windows begin order", &cfg->ShowWindowsBeginOrder);
+        Checkbox("Show windows rectangles", &cfg->ShowWindowsRects);
+        SameLine();
+        SetNextItemWidth(GetFontSize() * 12);
+        cfg->ShowWindowsRects |= Combo("##show_windows_rect_type", &cfg->ShowWindowsRectsType, wrt_rects_names, WRT_Count, WRT_Count);
+        if (cfg->ShowWindowsRects && g.NavWindow != NULL)
+        {
+            BulletText("'%s':", g.NavWindow->Name);
+            Indent();
+            for (int rect_n = 0; rect_n < WRT_Count; rect_n++)
+            {
+                ImRect r = Funcs::GetWindowRect(g.NavWindow, rect_n);
+                Text("(%6.1f,%6.1f) (%6.1f,%6.1f) Size (%6.1f,%6.1f) %s", r.Min.x, r.Min.y, r.Max.x, r.Max.y, r.GetWidth(), r.GetHeight(), wrt_rects_names[rect_n]);
+            }
+            Unindent();
+        }
+
+        Checkbox("Show tables rectangles", &cfg->ShowTablesRects);
+        SameLine();
+        SetNextItemWidth(GetFontSize() * 12);
+        cfg->ShowTablesRects |= Combo("##show_table_rects_type", &cfg->ShowTablesRectsType, trt_rects_names, TRT_Count, TRT_Count);
+        if (cfg->ShowTablesRects && g.NavWindow != NULL)
+        {
+            for (int table_n = 0; table_n < g.Tables.GetMapSize(); table_n++)
+            {
+                ImGuiTable* table = g.Tables.TryGetMapData(table_n);
+                if (table == NULL || table->LastFrameActive < g.FrameCount - 1 || (table->OuterWindow != g.NavWindow && table->InnerWindow != g.NavWindow))
+                    continue;
+
+                BulletText("Table 0x%08X (%d columns, in '%s')", table->ID, table->ColumnsCount, table->OuterWindow->Name);
+                if (IsItemHovered())
+                    GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(table->OuterRect.Min - ImVec2(1, 1), table->OuterRect.Max + ImVec2(1, 1), IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255), 0.0f, 0, 2.0f);
+                Indent();
+                char buf[128];
+                for (int rect_n = 0; rect_n < TRT_Count; rect_n++)
+                {
+                    if (rect_n >= TRT_ColumnsRect)
+                    {
+                        if (rect_n != TRT_ColumnsRect && rect_n != TRT_ColumnsClipRect)
+                            continue;
+                        for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++)
+                        {
+                            ImRect r = Funcs::GetTableRect(table, rect_n, column_n);
+                            ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "(%6.1f,%6.1f) (%6.1f,%6.1f) Size (%6.1f,%6.1f) Col %d %s", r.Min.x, r.Min.y, r.Max.x, r.Max.y, r.GetWidth(), r.GetHeight(), column_n, trt_rects_names[rect_n]);
+                            Selectable(buf);
+                            if (IsItemHovered())
+                                GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(r.Min - ImVec2(1, 1), r.Max + ImVec2(1, 1), IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255), 0.0f, 0, 2.0f);
+                        }
+                    }
+                    else
+                    {
+                        ImRect r = Funcs::GetTableRect(table, rect_n, -1);
+                        ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "(%6.1f,%6.1f) (%6.1f,%6.1f) Size (%6.1f,%6.1f) %s", r.Min.x, r.Min.y, r.Max.x, r.Max.y, r.GetWidth(), r.GetHeight(), trt_rects_names[rect_n]);
+                        Selectable(buf);
+                        if (IsItemHovered())
+                            GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(r.Min - ImVec2(1, 1), r.Max + ImVec2(1, 1), IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255), 0.0f, 0, 2.0f);
+                    }
+                }
+                Unindent();
+            }
+        }
+
+        TreePop();
+    }
+
+    // Windows
+    if (TreeNode("Windows", "Windows (%d)", g.Windows.Size))
+    {
+        //SetNextItemOpen(true, ImGuiCond_Once);
+        DebugNodeWindowsList(&g.Windows, "By display order");
+        DebugNodeWindowsList(&g.WindowsFocusOrder, "By focus order (root windows)");
+        if (TreeNode("By submission order (begin stack)"))
+        {
+            // Here we display windows in their submitted order/hierarchy, however note that the Begin stack doesn't constitute a Parent<>Child relationship!
+            ImVector<ImGuiWindow*>& temp_buffer = g.WindowsTempSortBuffer;
+            temp_buffer.resize(0);
+            for (int i = 0; i < g.Windows.Size; i++)
+                if (g.Windows[i]->LastFrameActive + 1 >= g.FrameCount)
+                    temp_buffer.push_back(g.Windows[i]);
+            struct Func { static int IMGUI_CDECL WindowComparerByBeginOrder(const void* lhs, const void* rhs) { return ((int)(*(const ImGuiWindow* const *)lhs)->BeginOrderWithinContext - (*(const ImGuiWindow* const*)rhs)->BeginOrderWithinContext); } };
+            ImQsort(temp_buffer.Data, (size_t)temp_buffer.Size, sizeof(ImGuiWindow*), Func::WindowComparerByBeginOrder);
+            DebugNodeWindowsListByBeginStackParent(temp_buffer.Data, temp_buffer.Size, NULL);
+            TreePop();
+        }
+
+        TreePop();
+    }
+
+    // DrawLists
+    int drawlist_count = 0;
+    for (int viewport_i = 0; viewport_i < g.Viewports.Size; viewport_i++)
+        drawlist_count += g.Viewports[viewport_i]->DrawDataBuilder.GetDrawListCount();
+    if (TreeNode("DrawLists", "DrawLists (%d)", drawlist_count))
+    {
+        Checkbox("Show ImDrawCmd mesh when hovering", &cfg->ShowDrawCmdMesh);
+        Checkbox("Show ImDrawCmd bounding boxes when hovering", &cfg->ShowDrawCmdBoundingBoxes);
+        for (int viewport_i = 0; viewport_i < g.Viewports.Size; viewport_i++)
+        {
+            ImGuiViewportP* viewport = g.Viewports[viewport_i];
+            bool viewport_has_drawlist = false;
+            for (int layer_i = 0; layer_i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(viewport->DrawDataBuilder.Layers); layer_i++)
+                for (int draw_list_i = 0; draw_list_i < viewport->DrawDataBuilder.Layers[layer_i].Size; draw_list_i++)
+                {
+                    if (!viewport_has_drawlist)
+                        Text("Active DrawLists in Viewport #%d, ID: 0x%08X", viewport->Idx, viewport->ID);
+                    viewport_has_drawlist = true;
+                    DebugNodeDrawList(NULL, viewport, viewport->DrawDataBuilder.Layers[layer_i][draw_list_i], "DrawList");
+                }
+        }
+        TreePop();
+    }
+
+    // Viewports
+    if (TreeNode("Viewports", "Viewports (%d)", g.Viewports.Size))
+    {
+        Indent(GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing());
+        RenderViewportsThumbnails();
+        Unindent(GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing());
+
+        bool open = TreeNode("Monitors", "Monitors (%d)", g.PlatformIO.Monitors.Size);
+        SameLine();
+        MetricsHelpMarker("Dear ImGui uses monitor data:\n- to query DPI settings on a per monitor basis\n- to position popup/tooltips so they don't straddle monitors.");
+        if (open)
+        {
+            for (int i = 0; i < g.PlatformIO.Monitors.Size; i++)
+            {
+                const ImGuiPlatformMonitor& mon = g.PlatformIO.Monitors[i];
+                BulletText("Monitor #%d: DPI %.0f%%\n MainMin (%.0f,%.0f), MainMax (%.0f,%.0f), MainSize (%.0f,%.0f)\n WorkMin (%.0f,%.0f), WorkMax (%.0f,%.0f), WorkSize (%.0f,%.0f)",
+                    i, mon.DpiScale * 100.0f,
+                    mon.MainPos.x, mon.MainPos.y, mon.MainPos.x + mon.MainSize.x, mon.MainPos.y + mon.MainSize.y, mon.MainSize.x, mon.MainSize.y,
+                    mon.WorkPos.x, mon.WorkPos.y, mon.WorkPos.x + mon.WorkSize.x, mon.WorkPos.y + mon.WorkSize.y, mon.WorkSize.x, mon.WorkSize.y);
+            }
+            TreePop();
+        }
+
+        BulletText("MouseViewport: 0x%08X (UserHovered 0x%08X, LastHovered 0x%08X)", g.MouseViewport ? g.MouseViewport->ID : 0, g.IO.MouseHoveredViewport, g.MouseLastHoveredViewport ? g.MouseLastHoveredViewport->ID : 0);
+        if (TreeNode("Inferred Z order (front-to-back)"))
+        {
+            static ImVector<ImGuiViewportP*> viewports;
+            viewports.resize(g.Viewports.Size);
+            memcpy(viewports.Data, g.Viewports.Data, g.Viewports.size_in_bytes());
+            if (viewports.Size > 1)
+                ImQsort(viewports.Data, viewports.Size, sizeof(ImGuiViewport*), ViewportComparerByFrontMostStampCount);
+            for (int i = 0; i < viewports.Size; i++)
+                BulletText("Viewport #%d, ID: 0x%08X, FrontMostStampCount = %08d, Window: \"%s\"", viewports[i]->Idx, viewports[i]->ID, viewports[i]->LastFrontMostStampCount, viewports[i]->Window ? viewports[i]->Window->Name : "N/A");
+            TreePop();
+        }
+
+        for (int i = 0; i < g.Viewports.Size; i++)
+            DebugNodeViewport(g.Viewports[i]);
+        TreePop();
+    }
+
+    // Details for Popups
+    if (TreeNode("Popups", "Popups (%d)", g.OpenPopupStack.Size))
+    {
+        for (int i = 0; i < g.OpenPopupStack.Size; i++)
+        {
+            ImGuiWindow* window = g.OpenPopupStack[i].Window;
+            BulletText("PopupID: %08x, Window: '%s'%s%s", g.OpenPopupStack[i].PopupId, window ? window->Name : "NULL", window && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) ? " ChildWindow" : "", window && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu) ? " ChildMenu" : "");
+        }
+        TreePop();
+    }
+
+    // Details for TabBars
+    if (TreeNode("TabBars", "Tab Bars (%d)", g.TabBars.GetAliveCount()))
+    {
+        for (int n = 0; n < g.TabBars.GetMapSize(); n++)
+            if (ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.TabBars.TryGetMapData(n))
+            {
+                PushID(tab_bar);
+                DebugNodeTabBar(tab_bar, "TabBar");
+                PopID();
+            }
+        TreePop();
+    }
+
+    // Details for Tables
+    if (TreeNode("Tables", "Tables (%d)", g.Tables.GetAliveCount()))
+    {
+        for (int n = 0; n < g.Tables.GetMapSize(); n++)
+            if (ImGuiTable* table = g.Tables.TryGetMapData(n))
+                DebugNodeTable(table);
+        TreePop();
+    }
+
+    // Details for Fonts
+    ImFontAtlas* atlas = g.IO.Fonts;
+    if (TreeNode("Fonts", "Fonts (%d)", atlas->Fonts.Size))
+    {
+        ShowFontAtlas(atlas);
+        TreePop();
+    }
+
+    // Details for InputText
+    if (TreeNode("InputText"))
+    {
+        DebugNodeInputTextState(&g.InputTextState);
+        TreePop();
+    }
+
+    // Details for Docking
+#ifdef IMGUI_HAS_DOCK
+    if (TreeNode("Docking"))
+    {
+        static bool root_nodes_only = true;
+        ImGuiDockContext* dc = &g.DockContext;
+        Checkbox("List root nodes", &root_nodes_only);
+        Checkbox("Ctrl shows window dock info", &cfg->ShowDockingNodes);
+        if (SmallButton("Clear nodes")) { DockContextClearNodes(&g, 0, true); }
+        SameLine();
+        if (SmallButton("Rebuild all")) { dc->WantFullRebuild = true; }
+        for (int n = 0; n < dc->Nodes.Data.Size; n++)
+            if (ImGuiDockNode* node = (ImGuiDockNode*)dc->Nodes.Data[n].val_p)
+                if (!root_nodes_only || node->IsRootNode())
+                    DebugNodeDockNode(node, "Node");
+        TreePop();
+    }
+#endif // #ifdef IMGUI_HAS_DOCK
+
+    // Settings
+    if (TreeNode("Settings"))
+    {
+        if (SmallButton("Clear"))
+            ClearIniSettings();
+        SameLine();
+        if (SmallButton("Save to memory"))
+            SaveIniSettingsToMemory();
+        SameLine();
+        if (SmallButton("Save to disk"))
+            SaveIniSettingsToDisk(g.IO.IniFilename);
+        SameLine();
+        if (g.IO.IniFilename)
+            Text("\"%s\"", g.IO.IniFilename);
+        else
+            TextUnformatted("<NULL>");
+        Text("SettingsDirtyTimer %.2f", g.SettingsDirtyTimer);
+        if (TreeNode("SettingsHandlers", "Settings handlers: (%d)", g.SettingsHandlers.Size))
+        {
+            for (int n = 0; n < g.SettingsHandlers.Size; n++)
+                BulletText("%s", g.SettingsHandlers[n].TypeName);
+            TreePop();
+        }
+        if (TreeNode("SettingsWindows", "Settings packed data: Windows: %d bytes", g.SettingsWindows.size()))
+        {
+            for (ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = g.SettingsWindows.begin(); settings != NULL; settings = g.SettingsWindows.next_chunk(settings))
+                DebugNodeWindowSettings(settings);
+            TreePop();
+        }
+
+        if (TreeNode("SettingsTables", "Settings packed data: Tables: %d bytes", g.SettingsTables.size()))
+        {
+            for (ImGuiTableSettings* settings = g.SettingsTables.begin(); settings != NULL; settings = g.SettingsTables.next_chunk(settings))
+                DebugNodeTableSettings(settings);
+            TreePop();
+        }
+
+#ifdef IMGUI_HAS_DOCK
+        if (TreeNode("SettingsDocking", "Settings packed data: Docking"))
+        {
+            ImGuiDockContext* dc = &g.DockContext;
+            Text("In SettingsWindows:");
+            for (ImGuiWindowSettings* settings = g.SettingsWindows.begin(); settings != NULL; settings = g.SettingsWindows.next_chunk(settings))
+                if (settings->DockId != 0)
+                    BulletText("Window '%s' -> DockId %08X", settings->GetName(), settings->DockId);
+            Text("In SettingsNodes:");
+            for (int n = 0; n < dc->NodesSettings.Size; n++)
+            {
+                ImGuiDockNodeSettings* settings = &dc->NodesSettings[n];
+                const char* selected_tab_name = NULL;
+                if (settings->SelectedTabId)
+                {
+                    if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByID(settings->SelectedTabId))
+                        selected_tab_name = window->Name;
+                    else if (ImGuiWindowSettings* window_settings = FindWindowSettings(settings->SelectedTabId))
+                        selected_tab_name = window_settings->GetName();
+                }
+                BulletText("Node %08X, Parent %08X, SelectedTab %08X ('%s')", settings->ID, settings->ParentNodeId, settings->SelectedTabId, selected_tab_name ? selected_tab_name : settings->SelectedTabId ? "N/A" : "");
+            }
+            TreePop();
+        }
+#endif // #ifdef IMGUI_HAS_DOCK
+
+        if (TreeNode("SettingsIniData", "Settings unpacked data (.ini): %d bytes", g.SettingsIniData.size()))
+        {
+            InputTextMultiline("##Ini", (char*)(void*)g.SettingsIniData.c_str(), g.SettingsIniData.Buf.Size, ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, GetTextLineHeight() * 20), ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly);
+            TreePop();
+        }
+        TreePop();
+    }
+
+    // Misc Details
+    if (TreeNode("Internal state"))
+    {
+        Text("WINDOWING");
+        Indent();
+        Text("HoveredWindow: '%s'", g.HoveredWindow ? g.HoveredWindow->Name : "NULL");
+        Text("HoveredWindow->Root: '%s'", g.HoveredWindow ? g.HoveredWindow->RootWindowDockTree->Name : "NULL");
+        Text("HoveredWindowUnderMovingWindow: '%s'", g.HoveredWindowUnderMovingWindow ? g.HoveredWindowUnderMovingWindow->Name : "NULL");
+        Text("HoveredDockNode: 0x%08X", g.HoveredDockNode ? g.HoveredDockNode->ID : 0);
+        Text("MovingWindow: '%s'", g.MovingWindow ? g.MovingWindow->Name : "NULL");
+        Text("MouseViewport: 0x%08X (UserHovered 0x%08X, LastHovered 0x%08X)", g.MouseViewport->ID, g.IO.MouseHoveredViewport, g.MouseLastHoveredViewport ? g.MouseLastHoveredViewport->ID : 0);
+        Unindent();
+
+        Text("ITEMS");
+        Indent();
+        Text("ActiveId: 0x%08X/0x%08X (%.2f sec), AllowOverlap: %d, Source: %s", g.ActiveId, g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame, g.ActiveIdTimer, g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap, GetInputSourceName(g.ActiveIdSource));
+        Text("ActiveIdWindow: '%s'", g.ActiveIdWindow ? g.ActiveIdWindow->Name : "NULL");
+
+        int active_id_using_key_input_count = 0;
+        for (int n = ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN; n < ImGuiKey_NamedKey_END; n++)
+            active_id_using_key_input_count += g.ActiveIdUsingKeyInputMask[n] ? 1 : 0;
+        Text("ActiveIdUsing: Wheel: %d, NavDirMask: %X, KeyInputMask: %d key(s)", g.ActiveIdUsingMouseWheel, g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask, active_id_using_key_input_count);
+        Text("HoveredId: 0x%08X (%.2f sec), AllowOverlap: %d", g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame, g.HoveredIdTimer, g.HoveredIdAllowOverlap); // Not displaying g.HoveredId as it is update mid-frame
+        Text("DragDrop: %d, SourceId = 0x%08X, Payload \"%s\" (%d bytes)", g.DragDropActive, g.DragDropPayload.SourceId, g.DragDropPayload.DataType, g.DragDropPayload.DataSize);
+        Unindent();
+
+        Text("NAV,FOCUS");
+        Indent();
+        Text("NavWindow: '%s'", g.NavWindow ? g.NavWindow->Name : "NULL");
+        Text("NavId: 0x%08X, NavLayer: %d", g.NavId, g.NavLayer);
+        Text("NavInputSource: %s", GetInputSourceName(g.NavInputSource));
+        Text("NavActive: %d, NavVisible: %d", g.IO.NavActive, g.IO.NavVisible);
+        Text("NavActivateId/DownId/PressedId/InputId: %08X/%08X/%08X/%08X", g.NavActivateId, g.NavActivateDownId, g.NavActivatePressedId, g.NavActivateInputId);
+        Text("NavActivateFlags: %04X", g.NavActivateFlags);
+        Text("NavDisableHighlight: %d, NavDisableMouseHover: %d", g.NavDisableHighlight, g.NavDisableMouseHover);
+        Text("NavFocusScopeId = 0x%08X", g.NavFocusScopeId);
+        Text("NavWindowingTarget: '%s'", g.NavWindowingTarget ? g.NavWindowingTarget->Name : "NULL");
+        Unindent();
+
+        TreePop();
+    }
+
+    // Overlay: Display windows Rectangles and Begin Order
+    if (cfg->ShowWindowsRects || cfg->ShowWindowsBeginOrder)
+    {
+        for (int n = 0; n < g.Windows.Size; n++)
+        {
+            ImGuiWindow* window = g.Windows[n];
+            if (!window->WasActive)
+                continue;
+            ImDrawList* draw_list = GetForegroundDrawList(window);
+            if (cfg->ShowWindowsRects)
+            {
+                ImRect r = Funcs::GetWindowRect(window, cfg->ShowWindowsRectsType);
+                draw_list->AddRect(r.Min, r.Max, IM_COL32(255, 0, 128, 255));
+            }
+            if (cfg->ShowWindowsBeginOrder && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow))
+            {
+                char buf[32];
+                ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "%d", window->BeginOrderWithinContext);
+                float font_size = GetFontSize();
+                draw_list->AddRectFilled(window->Pos, window->Pos + ImVec2(font_size, font_size), IM_COL32(200, 100, 100, 255));
+                draw_list->AddText(window->Pos, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 255), buf);
+            }
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Overlay: Display Tables Rectangles
+    if (cfg->ShowTablesRects)
+    {
+        for (int table_n = 0; table_n < g.Tables.GetMapSize(); table_n++)
+        {
+            ImGuiTable* table = g.Tables.TryGetMapData(table_n);
+            if (table == NULL || table->LastFrameActive < g.FrameCount - 1)
+                continue;
+            ImDrawList* draw_list = GetForegroundDrawList(table->OuterWindow);
+            if (cfg->ShowTablesRectsType >= TRT_ColumnsRect)
+            {
+                for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++)
+                {
+                    ImRect r = Funcs::GetTableRect(table, cfg->ShowTablesRectsType, column_n);
+                    ImU32 col = (table->HoveredColumnBody == column_n) ? IM_COL32(255, 255, 128, 255) : IM_COL32(255, 0, 128, 255);
+                    float thickness = (table->HoveredColumnBody == column_n) ? 3.0f : 1.0f;
+                    draw_list->AddRect(r.Min, r.Max, col, 0.0f, 0, thickness);
+                }
+            }
+            else
+            {
+                ImRect r = Funcs::GetTableRect(table, cfg->ShowTablesRectsType, -1);
+                draw_list->AddRect(r.Min, r.Max, IM_COL32(255, 0, 128, 255));
+            }
+        }
+    }
+
+#ifdef IMGUI_HAS_DOCK
+    // Overlay: Display Docking info
+    if (cfg->ShowDockingNodes && g.IO.KeyCtrl && g.HoveredDockNode)
+    {
+        char buf[64] = "";
+        char* p = buf;
+        ImGuiDockNode* node = g.HoveredDockNode;
+        ImDrawList* overlay_draw_list = node->HostWindow ? GetForegroundDrawList(node->HostWindow) : GetForegroundDrawList(GetMainViewport());
+        p += ImFormatString(p, buf + IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf) - p, "DockId: %X%s\n", node->ID, node->IsCentralNode() ? " *CentralNode*" : "");
+        p += ImFormatString(p, buf + IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf) - p, "WindowClass: %08X\n", node->WindowClass.ClassId);
+        p += ImFormatString(p, buf + IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf) - p, "Size: (%.0f, %.0f)\n", node->Size.x, node->Size.y);
+        p += ImFormatString(p, buf + IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf) - p, "SizeRef: (%.0f, %.0f)\n", node->SizeRef.x, node->SizeRef.y);
+        int depth = DockNodeGetDepth(node);
+        overlay_draw_list->AddRect(node->Pos + ImVec2(3, 3) * (float)depth, node->Pos + node->Size - ImVec2(3, 3) * (float)depth, IM_COL32(200, 100, 100, 255));
+        ImVec2 pos = node->Pos + ImVec2(3, 3) * (float)depth;
+        overlay_draw_list->AddRectFilled(pos - ImVec2(1, 1), pos + CalcTextSize(buf) + ImVec2(1, 1), IM_COL32(200, 100, 100, 255));
+        overlay_draw_list->AddText(NULL, 0.0f, pos, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 255), buf);
+    }
+#endif // #ifdef IMGUI_HAS_DOCK
+
+    End();
+}
+
+// [DEBUG] Display contents of Columns
+void ImGui::DebugNodeColumns(ImGuiOldColumns* columns)
+{
+    if (!TreeNode((void*)(uintptr_t)columns->ID, "Columns Id: 0x%08X, Count: %d, Flags: 0x%04X", columns->ID, columns->Count, columns->Flags))
+        return;
+    BulletText("Width: %.1f (MinX: %.1f, MaxX: %.1f)", columns->OffMaxX - columns->OffMinX, columns->OffMinX, columns->OffMaxX);
+    for (int column_n = 0; column_n < columns->Columns.Size; column_n++)
+        BulletText("Column %02d: OffsetNorm %.3f (= %.1f px)", column_n, columns->Columns[column_n].OffsetNorm, GetColumnOffsetFromNorm(columns, columns->Columns[column_n].OffsetNorm));
+    TreePop();
+}
+
+static void DebugNodeDockNodeFlags(ImGuiDockNodeFlags* p_flags, const char* label, bool enabled)
+{
+    using namespace ImGui;
+    PushID(label);
+    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
+    Text("%s:", label);
+    if (!enabled)
+        BeginDisabled();
+    CheckboxFlags("NoSplit", p_flags, ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoSplit);
+    CheckboxFlags("NoResize", p_flags, ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResize);
+    CheckboxFlags("NoResizeX", p_flags, ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResizeX);
+    CheckboxFlags("NoResizeY",p_flags, ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResizeY);
+    CheckboxFlags("NoTabBar", p_flags, ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoTabBar);
+    CheckboxFlags("HiddenTabBar", p_flags, ImGuiDockNodeFlags_HiddenTabBar);
+    CheckboxFlags("NoWindowMenuButton", p_flags, ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoWindowMenuButton);
+    CheckboxFlags("NoCloseButton", p_flags, ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoCloseButton);
+    CheckboxFlags("NoDocking", p_flags, ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDocking);
+    CheckboxFlags("NoDockingSplitMe", p_flags, ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingSplitMe);
+    CheckboxFlags("NoDockingSplitOther", p_flags, ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingSplitOther);
+    CheckboxFlags("NoDockingOverMe", p_flags, ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingOverMe);
+    CheckboxFlags("NoDockingOverOther", p_flags, ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingOverOther);
+    CheckboxFlags("NoDockingOverEmpty", p_flags, ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingOverEmpty);
+    if (!enabled)
+        EndDisabled();
+    PopStyleVar();
+    PopID();
+}
+
+// [DEBUG] Display contents of ImDockNode
+void ImGui::DebugNodeDockNode(ImGuiDockNode* node, const char* label)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const bool is_alive = (g.FrameCount - node->LastFrameAlive < 2);    // Submitted with ImGuiDockNodeFlags_KeepAliveOnly
+    const bool is_active = (g.FrameCount - node->LastFrameActive < 2);  // Submitted
+    if (!is_alive) { PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, GetStyleColorVec4(ImGuiCol_TextDisabled)); }
+    bool open;
+    ImGuiTreeNodeFlags tree_node_flags = node->IsFocused ? ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Selected : ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_None;
+    if (node->Windows.Size > 0)
+        open = TreeNodeEx((void*)(intptr_t)node->ID, tree_node_flags, "%s 0x%04X%s: %d windows (vis: '%s')", label, node->ID, node->IsVisible ? "" : " (hidden)", node->Windows.Size, node->VisibleWindow ? node->VisibleWindow->Name : "NULL");
+    else
+        open = TreeNodeEx((void*)(intptr_t)node->ID, tree_node_flags, "%s 0x%04X%s: %s split (vis: '%s')", label, node->ID, node->IsVisible ? "" : " (hidden)", (node->SplitAxis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? "horizontal" : (node->SplitAxis == ImGuiAxis_Y) ? "vertical" : "n/a", node->VisibleWindow ? node->VisibleWindow->Name : "NULL");
+    if (!is_alive) { PopStyleColor(); }
+    if (is_active && IsItemHovered())
+        if (ImGuiWindow* window = node->HostWindow ? node->HostWindow : node->VisibleWindow)
+            GetForegroundDrawList(window)->AddRect(node->Pos, node->Pos + node->Size, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255));
+    if (open)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(node->ChildNodes[0] == NULL || node->ChildNodes[0]->ParentNode == node);
+        IM_ASSERT(node->ChildNodes[1] == NULL || node->ChildNodes[1]->ParentNode == node);
+        BulletText("Pos (%.0f,%.0f), Size (%.0f, %.0f) Ref (%.0f, %.0f)",
+            node->Pos.x, node->Pos.y, node->Size.x, node->Size.y, node->SizeRef.x, node->SizeRef.y);
+        DebugNodeWindow(node->HostWindow, "HostWindow");
+        DebugNodeWindow(node->VisibleWindow, "VisibleWindow");
+        BulletText("SelectedTabID: 0x%08X, LastFocusedNodeID: 0x%08X", node->SelectedTabId, node->LastFocusedNodeId);
+        BulletText("Misc:%s%s%s%s%s%s%s",
+            node->IsDockSpace() ? " IsDockSpace" : "",
+            node->IsCentralNode() ? " IsCentralNode" : "",
+            is_alive ? " IsAlive" : "", is_active ? " IsActive" : "", node->IsFocused ? " IsFocused" : "",
+            node->WantLockSizeOnce ? " WantLockSizeOnce" : "",
+            node->HasCentralNodeChild ? " HasCentralNodeChild" : "");
+        if (TreeNode("flags", "Flags Merged: 0x%04X, Local: 0x%04X, InWindows: 0x%04X, Shared: 0x%04X", node->MergedFlags, node->LocalFlags, node->LocalFlagsInWindows, node->SharedFlags))
+        {
+            if (BeginTable("flags", 4))
+            {
+                TableNextColumn(); DebugNodeDockNodeFlags(&node->MergedFlags, "MergedFlags", false);
+                TableNextColumn(); DebugNodeDockNodeFlags(&node->LocalFlags, "LocalFlags", true);
+                TableNextColumn(); DebugNodeDockNodeFlags(&node->LocalFlagsInWindows, "LocalFlagsInWindows", false);
+                TableNextColumn(); DebugNodeDockNodeFlags(&node->SharedFlags, "SharedFlags", true);
+                EndTable();
+            }
+            TreePop();
+        }
+        if (node->ParentNode)
+            DebugNodeDockNode(node->ParentNode, "ParentNode");
+        if (node->ChildNodes[0])
+            DebugNodeDockNode(node->ChildNodes[0], "Child[0]");
+        if (node->ChildNodes[1])
+            DebugNodeDockNode(node->ChildNodes[1], "Child[1]");
+        if (node->TabBar)
+            DebugNodeTabBar(node->TabBar, "TabBar");
+        TreePop();
+    }
+}
+
+// [DEBUG] Display contents of ImDrawList
+// Note that both 'window' and 'viewport' may be NULL here. Viewport is generally null of destroyed popups which previously owned a viewport.
+void ImGui::DebugNodeDrawList(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiViewportP* viewport, const ImDrawList* draw_list, const char* label)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiMetricsConfig* cfg = &g.DebugMetricsConfig;
+    int cmd_count = draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size;
+    if (cmd_count > 0 && draw_list->CmdBuffer.back().ElemCount == 0 && draw_list->CmdBuffer.back().UserCallback == NULL)
+        cmd_count--;
+    bool node_open = TreeNode(draw_list, "%s: '%s' %d vtx, %d indices, %d cmds", label, draw_list->_OwnerName ? draw_list->_OwnerName : "", draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size, draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size, cmd_count);
+    if (draw_list == GetWindowDrawList())
+    {
+        SameLine();
+        TextColored(ImVec4(1.0f, 0.4f, 0.4f, 1.0f), "CURRENTLY APPENDING"); // Can't display stats for active draw list! (we don't have the data double-buffered)
+        if (node_open)
+            TreePop();
+        return;
+    }
+
+    ImDrawList* fg_draw_list = viewport ? GetForegroundDrawList(viewport) : NULL; // Render additional visuals into the top-most draw list
+    if (window && IsItemHovered() && fg_draw_list)
+        fg_draw_list->AddRect(window->Pos, window->Pos + window->Size, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255));
+    if (!node_open)
+        return;
+
+    if (window && !window->WasActive)
+        TextDisabled("Warning: owning Window is inactive. This DrawList is not being rendered!");
+
+    for (const ImDrawCmd* pcmd = draw_list->CmdBuffer.Data; pcmd < draw_list->CmdBuffer.Data + cmd_count; pcmd++)
+    {
+        if (pcmd->UserCallback)
+        {
+            BulletText("Callback %p, user_data %p", pcmd->UserCallback, pcmd->UserCallbackData);
+            continue;
+        }
+
+        char buf[300];
+        ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "DrawCmd:%5d tris, Tex 0x%p, ClipRect (%4.0f,%4.0f)-(%4.0f,%4.0f)",
+            pcmd->ElemCount / 3, (void*)(intptr_t)pcmd->TextureId,
+            pcmd->ClipRect.x, pcmd->ClipRect.y, pcmd->ClipRect.z, pcmd->ClipRect.w);
+        bool pcmd_node_open = TreeNode((void*)(pcmd - draw_list->CmdBuffer.begin()), "%s", buf);
+        if (IsItemHovered() && (cfg->ShowDrawCmdMesh || cfg->ShowDrawCmdBoundingBoxes) && fg_draw_list)
+            DebugNodeDrawCmdShowMeshAndBoundingBox(fg_draw_list, draw_list, pcmd, cfg->ShowDrawCmdMesh, cfg->ShowDrawCmdBoundingBoxes);
+        if (!pcmd_node_open)
+            continue;
+
+        // Calculate approximate coverage area (touched pixel count)
+        // This will be in pixels squared as long there's no post-scaling happening to the renderer output.
+        const ImDrawIdx* idx_buffer = (draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size > 0) ? draw_list->IdxBuffer.Data : NULL;
+        const ImDrawVert* vtx_buffer = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data + pcmd->VtxOffset;
+        float total_area = 0.0f;
+        for (unsigned int idx_n = pcmd->IdxOffset; idx_n < pcmd->IdxOffset + pcmd->ElemCount; )
+        {
+            ImVec2 triangle[3];
+            for (int n = 0; n < 3; n++, idx_n++)
+                triangle[n] = vtx_buffer[idx_buffer ? idx_buffer[idx_n] : idx_n].pos;
+            total_area += ImTriangleArea(triangle[0], triangle[1], triangle[2]);
+        }
+
+        // Display vertex information summary. Hover to get all triangles drawn in wire-frame
+        ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "Mesh: ElemCount: %d, VtxOffset: +%d, IdxOffset: +%d, Area: ~%0.f px", pcmd->ElemCount, pcmd->VtxOffset, pcmd->IdxOffset, total_area);
+        Selectable(buf);
+        if (IsItemHovered() && fg_draw_list)
+            DebugNodeDrawCmdShowMeshAndBoundingBox(fg_draw_list, draw_list, pcmd, true, false);
+
+        // Display individual triangles/vertices. Hover on to get the corresponding triangle highlighted.
+        ImGuiListClipper clipper;
+        clipper.Begin(pcmd->ElemCount / 3); // Manually coarse clip our print out of individual vertices to save CPU, only items that may be visible.
+        while (clipper.Step())
+            for (int prim = clipper.DisplayStart, idx_i = pcmd->IdxOffset + clipper.DisplayStart * 3; prim < clipper.DisplayEnd; prim++)
+            {
+                char* buf_p = buf, * buf_end = buf + IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf);
+                ImVec2 triangle[3];
+                for (int n = 0; n < 3; n++, idx_i++)
+                {
+                    const ImDrawVert& v = vtx_buffer[idx_buffer ? idx_buffer[idx_i] : idx_i];
+                    triangle[n] = v.pos;
+                    buf_p += ImFormatString(buf_p, buf_end - buf_p, "%s %04d: pos (%8.2f,%8.2f), uv (%.6f,%.6f), col %08X\n",
+                        (n == 0) ? "Vert:" : "     ", idx_i, v.pos.x, v.pos.y, v.uv.x, v.uv.y, v.col);
+                }
+
+                Selectable(buf, false);
+                if (fg_draw_list && IsItemHovered())
+                {
+                    ImDrawListFlags backup_flags = fg_draw_list->Flags;
+                    fg_draw_list->Flags &= ~ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLines; // Disable AA on triangle outlines is more readable for very large and thin triangles.
+                    fg_draw_list->AddPolyline(triangle, 3, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255), ImDrawFlags_Closed, 1.0f);
+                    fg_draw_list->Flags = backup_flags;
+                }
+            }
+        TreePop();
+    }
+    TreePop();
+}
+
+// [DEBUG] Display mesh/aabb of a ImDrawCmd
+void ImGui::DebugNodeDrawCmdShowMeshAndBoundingBox(ImDrawList* out_draw_list, const ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImDrawCmd* draw_cmd, bool show_mesh, bool show_aabb)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(show_mesh || show_aabb);
+
+    // Draw wire-frame version of all triangles
+    ImRect clip_rect = draw_cmd->ClipRect;
+    ImRect vtxs_rect(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX);
+    ImDrawListFlags backup_flags = out_draw_list->Flags;
+    out_draw_list->Flags &= ~ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLines; // Disable AA on triangle outlines is more readable for very large and thin triangles.
+    for (unsigned int idx_n = draw_cmd->IdxOffset, idx_end = draw_cmd->IdxOffset + draw_cmd->ElemCount; idx_n < idx_end; )
+    {
+        ImDrawIdx* idx_buffer = (draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size > 0) ? draw_list->IdxBuffer.Data : NULL; // We don't hold on those pointers past iterations as ->AddPolyline() may invalidate them if out_draw_list==draw_list
+        ImDrawVert* vtx_buffer = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data + draw_cmd->VtxOffset;
+
+        ImVec2 triangle[3];
+        for (int n = 0; n < 3; n++, idx_n++)
+            vtxs_rect.Add((triangle[n] = vtx_buffer[idx_buffer ? idx_buffer[idx_n] : idx_n].pos));
+        if (show_mesh)
+            out_draw_list->AddPolyline(triangle, 3, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255), ImDrawFlags_Closed, 1.0f); // In yellow: mesh triangles
+    }
+    // Draw bounding boxes
+    if (show_aabb)
+    {
+        out_draw_list->AddRect(ImFloor(clip_rect.Min), ImFloor(clip_rect.Max), IM_COL32(255, 0, 255, 255)); // In pink: clipping rectangle submitted to GPU
+        out_draw_list->AddRect(ImFloor(vtxs_rect.Min), ImFloor(vtxs_rect.Max), IM_COL32(0, 255, 255, 255)); // In cyan: bounding box of triangles
+    }
+    out_draw_list->Flags = backup_flags;
+}
+
+// [DEBUG] Display details for a single font, called by ShowStyleEditor().
+void ImGui::DebugNodeFont(ImFont* font)
+{
+    bool opened = TreeNode(font, "Font: \"%s\"\n%.2f px, %d glyphs, %d file(s)",
+        font->ConfigData ? font->ConfigData[0].Name : "", font->FontSize, font->Glyphs.Size, font->ConfigDataCount);
+    SameLine();
+    if (SmallButton("Set as default"))
+        GetIO().FontDefault = font;
+    if (!opened)
+        return;
+
+    // Display preview text
+    PushFont(font);
+    Text("The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog");
+    PopFont();
+
+    // Display details
+    SetNextItemWidth(GetFontSize() * 8);
+    DragFloat("Font scale", &font->Scale, 0.005f, 0.3f, 2.0f, "%.1f");
+    SameLine(); MetricsHelpMarker(
+        "Note than the default embedded font is NOT meant to be scaled.\n\n"
+        "Font are currently rendered into bitmaps at a given size at the time of building the atlas. "
+        "You may oversample them to get some flexibility with scaling. "
+        "You can also render at multiple sizes and select which one to use at runtime.\n\n"
+        "(Glimmer of hope: the atlas system will be rewritten in the future to make scaling more flexible.)");
+    Text("Ascent: %f, Descent: %f, Height: %f", font->Ascent, font->Descent, font->Ascent - font->Descent);
+    char c_str[5];
+    Text("Fallback character: '%s' (U+%04X)", ImTextCharToUtf8(c_str, font->FallbackChar), font->FallbackChar);
+    Text("Ellipsis character: '%s' (U+%04X)", ImTextCharToUtf8(c_str, font->EllipsisChar), font->EllipsisChar);
+    const int surface_sqrt = (int)ImSqrt((float)font->MetricsTotalSurface);
+    Text("Texture Area: about %d px ~%dx%d px", font->MetricsTotalSurface, surface_sqrt, surface_sqrt);
+    for (int config_i = 0; config_i < font->ConfigDataCount; config_i++)
+        if (font->ConfigData)
+            if (const ImFontConfig* cfg = &font->ConfigData[config_i])
+                BulletText("Input %d: \'%s\', Oversample: (%d,%d), PixelSnapH: %d, Offset: (%.1f,%.1f)",
+                    config_i, cfg->Name, cfg->OversampleH, cfg->OversampleV, cfg->PixelSnapH, cfg->GlyphOffset.x, cfg->GlyphOffset.y);
+
+    // Display all glyphs of the fonts in separate pages of 256 characters
+    if (TreeNode("Glyphs", "Glyphs (%d)", font->Glyphs.Size))
+    {
+        ImDrawList* draw_list = GetWindowDrawList();
+        const ImU32 glyph_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
+        const float cell_size = font->FontSize * 1;
+        const float cell_spacing = GetStyle().ItemSpacing.y;
+        for (unsigned int base = 0; base <= IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX; base += 256)
+        {
+            // Skip ahead if a large bunch of glyphs are not present in the font (test in chunks of 4k)
+            // This is only a small optimization to reduce the number of iterations when IM_UNICODE_MAX_CODEPOINT
+            // is large // (if ImWchar==ImWchar32 we will do at least about 272 queries here)
+            if (!(base & 4095) && font->IsGlyphRangeUnused(base, base + 4095))
+            {
+                base += 4096 - 256;
+                continue;
+            }
+
+            int count = 0;
+            for (unsigned int n = 0; n < 256; n++)
+                if (font->FindGlyphNoFallback((ImWchar)(base + n)))
+                    count++;
+            if (count <= 0)
+                continue;
+            if (!TreeNode((void*)(intptr_t)base, "U+%04X..U+%04X (%d %s)", base, base + 255, count, count > 1 ? "glyphs" : "glyph"))
+                continue;
+
+            // Draw a 16x16 grid of glyphs
+            ImVec2 base_pos = GetCursorScreenPos();
+            for (unsigned int n = 0; n < 256; n++)
+            {
+                // We use ImFont::RenderChar as a shortcut because we don't have UTF-8 conversion functions
+                // available here and thus cannot easily generate a zero-terminated UTF-8 encoded string.
+                ImVec2 cell_p1(base_pos.x + (n % 16) * (cell_size + cell_spacing), base_pos.y + (n / 16) * (cell_size + cell_spacing));
+                ImVec2 cell_p2(cell_p1.x + cell_size, cell_p1.y + cell_size);
+                const ImFontGlyph* glyph = font->FindGlyphNoFallback((ImWchar)(base + n));
+                draw_list->AddRect(cell_p1, cell_p2, glyph ? IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 100) : IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 50));
+                if (!glyph)
+                    continue;
+                font->RenderChar(draw_list, cell_size, cell_p1, glyph_col, (ImWchar)(base + n));
+                if (IsMouseHoveringRect(cell_p1, cell_p2))
+                {
+                    BeginTooltip();
+                    DebugNodeFontGlyph(font, glyph);
+                    EndTooltip();
+                }
+            }
+            Dummy(ImVec2((cell_size + cell_spacing) * 16, (cell_size + cell_spacing) * 16));
+            TreePop();
+        }
+        TreePop();
+    }
+    TreePop();
+}
+
+void ImGui::DebugNodeFontGlyph(ImFont*, const ImFontGlyph* glyph)
+{
+    Text("Codepoint: U+%04X", glyph->Codepoint);
+    Separator();
+    Text("Visible: %d", glyph->Visible);
+    Text("AdvanceX: %.1f", glyph->AdvanceX);
+    Text("Pos: (%.2f,%.2f)->(%.2f,%.2f)", glyph->X0, glyph->Y0, glyph->X1, glyph->Y1);
+    Text("UV: (%.3f,%.3f)->(%.3f,%.3f)", glyph->U0, glyph->V0, glyph->U1, glyph->V1);
+}
+
+// [DEBUG] Display contents of ImGuiStorage
+void ImGui::DebugNodeStorage(ImGuiStorage* storage, const char* label)
+{
+    if (!TreeNode(label, "%s: %d entries, %d bytes", label, storage->Data.Size, storage->Data.size_in_bytes()))
+        return;
+    for (int n = 0; n < storage->Data.Size; n++)
+    {
+        const ImGuiStorage::ImGuiStoragePair& p = storage->Data[n];
+        BulletText("Key 0x%08X Value { i: %d }", p.key, p.val_i); // Important: we currently don't store a type, real value may not be integer.
+    }
+    TreePop();
+}
+
+// [DEBUG] Display contents of ImGuiTabBar
+void ImGui::DebugNodeTabBar(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const char* label)
+{
+    // Standalone tab bars (not associated to docking/windows functionality) currently hold no discernible strings.
+    char buf[256];
+    char* p = buf;
+    const char* buf_end = buf + IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf);
+    const bool is_active = (tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible >= GetFrameCount() - 2);
+    p += ImFormatString(p, buf_end - p, "%s 0x%08X (%d tabs)%s", label, tab_bar->ID, tab_bar->Tabs.Size, is_active ? "" : " *Inactive*");
+    p += ImFormatString(p, buf_end - p, "  { ");
+    for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < ImMin(tab_bar->Tabs.Size, 3); tab_n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n];
+        p += ImFormatString(p, buf_end - p, "%s'%s'",
+            tab_n > 0 ? ", " : "", (tab->Window || tab->NameOffset != -1) ? tab_bar->GetTabName(tab) : "???");
+    }
+    p += ImFormatString(p, buf_end - p, (tab_bar->Tabs.Size > 3) ? " ... }" : " } ");
+    if (!is_active) { PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, GetStyleColorVec4(ImGuiCol_TextDisabled)); }
+    bool open = TreeNode(label, "%s", buf);
+    if (!is_active) { PopStyleColor(); }
+    if (is_active && IsItemHovered())
+    {
+        ImDrawList* draw_list = GetForegroundDrawList();
+        draw_list->AddRect(tab_bar->BarRect.Min, tab_bar->BarRect.Max, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255));
+        draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(tab_bar->ScrollingRectMinX, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y), ImVec2(tab_bar->ScrollingRectMinX, tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y), IM_COL32(0, 255, 0, 255));
+        draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(tab_bar->ScrollingRectMaxX, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y), ImVec2(tab_bar->ScrollingRectMaxX, tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y), IM_COL32(0, 255, 0, 255));
+    }
+    if (open)
+    {
+        for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++)
+        {
+            const ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n];
+            PushID(tab);
+            if (SmallButton("<")) { TabBarQueueReorder(tab_bar, tab, -1); } SameLine(0, 2);
+            if (SmallButton(">")) { TabBarQueueReorder(tab_bar, tab, +1); } SameLine();
+            Text("%02d%c Tab 0x%08X '%s' Offset: %.1f, Width: %.1f/%.1f",
+                tab_n, (tab->ID == tab_bar->SelectedTabId) ? '*' : ' ', tab->ID, (tab->Window || tab->NameOffset != -1) ? tab_bar->GetTabName(tab) : "???", tab->Offset, tab->Width, tab->ContentWidth);
+            PopID();
+        }
+        TreePop();
+    }
+}
+
+void ImGui::DebugNodeViewport(ImGuiViewportP* viewport)
+{
+    SetNextItemOpen(true, ImGuiCond_Once);
+    if (TreeNode((void*)(intptr_t)viewport->ID, "Viewport #%d, ID: 0x%08X, Parent: 0x%08X, Window: \"%s\"", viewport->Idx, viewport->ID, viewport->ParentViewportId, viewport->Window ? viewport->Window->Name : "N/A"))
+    {
+        ImGuiWindowFlags flags = viewport->Flags;
+        BulletText("Main Pos: (%.0f,%.0f), Size: (%.0f,%.0f)\nWorkArea Offset Left: %.0f Top: %.0f, Right: %.0f, Bottom: %.0f\nMonitor: %d, DpiScale: %.0f%%",
+            viewport->Pos.x, viewport->Pos.y, viewport->Size.x, viewport->Size.y,
+            viewport->WorkOffsetMin.x, viewport->WorkOffsetMin.y, viewport->WorkOffsetMax.x, viewport->WorkOffsetMax.y,
+            viewport->PlatformMonitor, viewport->DpiScale * 100.0f);
+        if (viewport->Idx > 0) { SameLine(); if (SmallButton("Reset Pos")) { viewport->Pos = ImVec2(200, 200); viewport->UpdateWorkRect(); if (viewport->Window) viewport->Window->Pos = viewport->Pos; } }
+        BulletText("Flags: 0x%04X =%s%s%s%s%s%s%s%s%s%s%s%s", viewport->Flags,
+            //(flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_IsPlatformWindow) ? " IsPlatformWindow" : "", // Omitting because it is the standard
+            (flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_IsPlatformMonitor) ? " IsPlatformMonitor" : "",
+            (flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_OwnedByApp) ? " OwnedByApp" : "",
+            (flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_NoDecoration) ? " NoDecoration" : "",
+            (flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_NoTaskBarIcon) ? " NoTaskBarIcon" : "",
+            (flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing) ? " NoFocusOnAppearing" : "",
+            (flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_NoFocusOnClick) ? " NoFocusOnClick" : "",
+            (flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_NoInputs) ? " NoInputs" : "",
+            (flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_NoRendererClear) ? " NoRendererClear" : "",
+            (flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_TopMost) ? " TopMost" : "",
+            (flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_Minimized) ? " Minimized" : "",
+            (flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_NoAutoMerge) ? " NoAutoMerge" : "",
+            (flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_CanHostOtherWindows) ? " CanHostOtherWindows" : "");
+        for (int layer_i = 0; layer_i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(viewport->DrawDataBuilder.Layers); layer_i++)
+            for (int draw_list_i = 0; draw_list_i < viewport->DrawDataBuilder.Layers[layer_i].Size; draw_list_i++)
+                DebugNodeDrawList(NULL, viewport, viewport->DrawDataBuilder.Layers[layer_i][draw_list_i], "DrawList");
+        TreePop();
+    }
+}
+
+void ImGui::DebugNodeWindow(ImGuiWindow* window, const char* label)
+{
+    if (window == NULL)
+    {
+        BulletText("%s: NULL", label);
+        return;
+    }
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const bool is_active = window->WasActive;
+    ImGuiTreeNodeFlags tree_node_flags = (window == g.NavWindow) ? ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Selected : ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_None;
+    if (!is_active) { PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, GetStyleColorVec4(ImGuiCol_TextDisabled)); }
+    const bool open = TreeNodeEx(label, tree_node_flags, "%s '%s'%s", label, window->Name, is_active ? "" : " *Inactive*");
+    if (!is_active) { PopStyleColor(); }
+    if (IsItemHovered() && is_active)
+        GetForegroundDrawList(window)->AddRect(window->Pos, window->Pos + window->Size, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255));
+    if (!open)
+        return;
+
+    if (window->MemoryCompacted)
+        TextDisabled("Note: some memory buffers have been compacted/freed.");
+
+    ImGuiWindowFlags flags = window->Flags;
+    DebugNodeDrawList(window, window->Viewport, window->DrawList, "DrawList");
+    BulletText("Pos: (%.1f,%.1f), Size: (%.1f,%.1f), ContentSize (%.1f,%.1f) Ideal (%.1f,%.1f)", window->Pos.x, window->Pos.y, window->Size.x, window->Size.y, window->ContentSize.x, window->ContentSize.y, window->ContentSizeIdeal.x, window->ContentSizeIdeal.y);
+    BulletText("Flags: 0x%08X (%s%s%s%s%s%s%s%s%s..)", flags,
+        (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow)  ? "Child " : "",      (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Tooltip)     ? "Tooltip "   : "",  (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) ? "Popup " : "",
+        (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Modal)        ? "Modal " : "",      (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)   ? "ChildMenu " : "",  (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings) ? "NoSavedSettings " : "",
+        (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMouseInputs)? "NoMouseInputs":"", (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavInputs) ? "NoNavInputs" : "", (flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize) ? "AlwaysAutoResize" : "");
+    BulletText("WindowClassId: 0x%08X", window->WindowClass.ClassId);
+    BulletText("Scroll: (%.2f/%.2f,%.2f/%.2f) Scrollbar:%s%s", window->Scroll.x, window->ScrollMax.x, window->Scroll.y, window->ScrollMax.y, window->ScrollbarX ? "X" : "", window->ScrollbarY ? "Y" : "");
+    BulletText("Active: %d/%d, WriteAccessed: %d, BeginOrderWithinContext: %d", window->Active, window->WasActive, window->WriteAccessed, (window->Active || window->WasActive) ? window->BeginOrderWithinContext : -1);
+    BulletText("Appearing: %d, Hidden: %d (CanSkip %d Cannot %d), SkipItems: %d", window->Appearing, window->Hidden, window->HiddenFramesCanSkipItems, window->HiddenFramesCannotSkipItems, window->SkipItems);
+    for (int layer = 0; layer < ImGuiNavLayer_COUNT; layer++)
+    {
+        ImRect r = window->NavRectRel[layer];
+        if (r.Min.x >= r.Max.y && r.Min.y >= r.Max.y)
+        {
+            BulletText("NavLastIds[%d]: 0x%08X", layer, window->NavLastIds[layer]);
+            continue;
+        }
+        BulletText("NavLastIds[%d]: 0x%08X at +(%.1f,%.1f)(%.1f,%.1f)", layer, window->NavLastIds[layer], r.Min.x, r.Min.y, r.Max.x, r.Max.y);
+        if (IsItemHovered())
+            GetForegroundDrawList(window)->AddRect(r.Min + window->Pos, r.Max + window->Pos, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255));
+    }
+    BulletText("NavLayersActiveMask: %X, NavLastChildNavWindow: %s", window->DC.NavLayersActiveMask, window->NavLastChildNavWindow ? window->NavLastChildNavWindow->Name : "NULL");
+
+    BulletText("Viewport: %d%s, ViewportId: 0x%08X, ViewportPos: (%.1f,%.1f)", window->Viewport ? window->Viewport->Idx : -1, window->ViewportOwned ? " (Owned)" : "", window->ViewportId, window->ViewportPos.x, window->ViewportPos.y);
+    BulletText("ViewportMonitor: %d", window->Viewport ? window->Viewport->PlatformMonitor : -1);
+    BulletText("DockId: 0x%04X, DockOrder: %d, Act: %d, Vis: %d", window->DockId, window->DockOrder, window->DockIsActive, window->DockTabIsVisible);
+    if (window->DockNode || window->DockNodeAsHost)
+        DebugNodeDockNode(window->DockNodeAsHost ? window->DockNodeAsHost : window->DockNode, window->DockNodeAsHost ? "DockNodeAsHost" : "DockNode");
+
+    if (window->RootWindow != window)       { DebugNodeWindow(window->RootWindow, "RootWindow"); }
+    if (window->RootWindowDockTree != window->RootWindow) { DebugNodeWindow(window->RootWindowDockTree, "RootWindowDockTree"); }
+    if (window->ParentWindow != NULL)       { DebugNodeWindow(window->ParentWindow, "ParentWindow"); }
+    if (window->DC.ChildWindows.Size > 0)   { DebugNodeWindowsList(&window->DC.ChildWindows, "ChildWindows"); }
+    if (window->ColumnsStorage.Size > 0 && TreeNode("Columns", "Columns sets (%d)", window->ColumnsStorage.Size))
+    {
+        for (int n = 0; n < window->ColumnsStorage.Size; n++)
+            DebugNodeColumns(&window->ColumnsStorage[n]);
+        TreePop();
+    }
+    DebugNodeStorage(&window->StateStorage, "Storage");
+    TreePop();
+}
+
+void ImGui::DebugNodeWindowSettings(ImGuiWindowSettings* settings)
+{
+    Text("0x%08X \"%s\" Pos (%d,%d) Size (%d,%d) Collapsed=%d",
+        settings->ID, settings->GetName(), settings->Pos.x, settings->Pos.y, settings->Size.x, settings->Size.y, settings->Collapsed);
+}
+
+void ImGui::DebugNodeWindowsList(ImVector<ImGuiWindow*>* windows, const char* label)
+{
+    if (!TreeNode(label, "%s (%d)", label, windows->Size))
+        return;
+    for (int i = windows->Size - 1; i >= 0; i--) // Iterate front to back
+    {
+        PushID((*windows)[i]);
+        DebugNodeWindow((*windows)[i], "Window");
+        PopID();
+    }
+    TreePop();
+}
+
+// FIXME-OPT: This is technically suboptimal, but it is simpler this way.
+void ImGui::DebugNodeWindowsListByBeginStackParent(ImGuiWindow** windows, int windows_size, ImGuiWindow* parent_in_begin_stack)
+{
+    for (int i = 0; i < windows_size; i++)
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* window = windows[i];
+        if (window->ParentWindowInBeginStack != parent_in_begin_stack)
+            continue;
+        char buf[20];
+        ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "[%04d] Window", window->BeginOrderWithinContext);
+        //BulletText("[%04d] Window '%s'", window->BeginOrderWithinContext, window->Name);
+        DebugNodeWindow(window, buf);
+        Indent();
+        DebugNodeWindowsListByBeginStackParent(windows + i + 1, windows_size - i - 1, window);
+        Unindent();
+    }
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] DEBUG LOG
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+void ImGui::DebugLog(const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+    va_list args;
+    va_start(args, fmt);
+    DebugLogV(fmt, args);
+    va_end(args);
+}
+
+void ImGui::DebugLogV(const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const int old_size = g.DebugLogBuf.size();
+    g.DebugLogBuf.appendf("[%05d] ", g.FrameCount);
+    g.DebugLogBuf.appendfv(fmt, args);
+    if (g.DebugLogFlags & ImGuiDebugLogFlags_OutputToTTY)
+        IMGUI_DEBUG_PRINTF("%s", g.DebugLogBuf.begin() + old_size);
+}
+
+void ImGui::ShowDebugLogWindow(bool* p_open)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (!(g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSize))
+        SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(0.0f, GetFontSize() * 12.0f), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver);
+    if (!Begin("Dear ImGui Debug Log", p_open) || GetCurrentWindow()->BeginCount > 1)
+    {
+        End();
+        return;
+    }
+
+    AlignTextToFramePadding();
+    Text("Log events:");
+    SameLine(); CheckboxFlags("All", &g.DebugLogFlags, ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventMask_);
+    SameLine(); CheckboxFlags("ActiveId", &g.DebugLogFlags, ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventActiveId);
+    SameLine(); CheckboxFlags("Focus", &g.DebugLogFlags, ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventFocus);
+    SameLine(); CheckboxFlags("Popup", &g.DebugLogFlags, ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventPopup);
+    SameLine(); CheckboxFlags("Nav", &g.DebugLogFlags, ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventNav);
+    SameLine(); CheckboxFlags("Docking", &g.DebugLogFlags, ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventDocking);
+    SameLine(); CheckboxFlags("Viewport", &g.DebugLogFlags, ImGuiDebugLogFlags_EventViewport);
+
+    if (SmallButton("Clear"))
+        g.DebugLogBuf.clear();
+    SameLine();
+    if (SmallButton("Copy"))
+        SetClipboardText(g.DebugLogBuf.c_str());
+    BeginChild("##log", ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f), true, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysVerticalScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysHorizontalScrollbar);
+    TextUnformatted(g.DebugLogBuf.begin(), g.DebugLogBuf.end()); // FIXME-OPT: Could use a line index, but TextUnformatted() has a semi-decent fast path for large text.
+    if (GetScrollY() >= GetScrollMaxY())
+        SetScrollHereY(1.0f);
+    EndChild();
+
+    End();
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] OTHER DEBUG TOOLS (ITEM PICKER, STACK TOOL)
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// [DEBUG] Item picker tool - start with DebugStartItemPicker() - useful to visually select an item and break into its call-stack.
+void ImGui::UpdateDebugToolItemPicker()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    g.DebugItemPickerBreakId = 0;
+    if (!g.DebugItemPickerActive)
+        return;
+
+    const ImGuiID hovered_id = g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame;
+    SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor_Hand);
+    if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Escape))
+        g.DebugItemPickerActive = false;
+    const bool change_mapping = g.IO.KeyMods == (ImGuiModFlags_Ctrl | ImGuiModFlags_Shift);
+    if (!change_mapping && IsMouseClicked(g.DebugItemPickerMouseButton) && hovered_id)
+    {
+        g.DebugItemPickerBreakId = hovered_id;
+        g.DebugItemPickerActive = false;
+    }
+    for (int mouse_button = 0; mouse_button < 3; mouse_button++)
+        if (change_mapping && IsMouseClicked(mouse_button))
+            g.DebugItemPickerMouseButton = (ImU8)mouse_button;
+    SetNextWindowBgAlpha(0.70f);
+    BeginTooltip();
+    Text("HoveredId: 0x%08X", hovered_id);
+    Text("Press ESC to abort picking.");
+    const char* mouse_button_names[] = { "Left", "Right", "Middle" };
+    if (change_mapping)
+        Text("Remap w/ Ctrl+Shift: click anywhere to select new mouse button.");
+    else
+        TextColored(GetStyleColorVec4(hovered_id ? ImGuiCol_Text : ImGuiCol_TextDisabled), "Click %s Button to break in debugger! (remap w/ Ctrl+Shift)", mouse_button_names[g.DebugItemPickerMouseButton]);
+    EndTooltip();
+}
+
+// [DEBUG] Stack Tool: update queries. Called by NewFrame()
+void ImGui::UpdateDebugToolStackQueries()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiStackTool* tool = &g.DebugStackTool;
+
+    // Clear hook when stack tool is not visible
+    g.DebugHookIdInfo = 0;
+    if (g.FrameCount != tool->LastActiveFrame + 1)
+        return;
+
+    // Update queries. The steps are: -1: query Stack, >= 0: query each stack item
+    // We can only perform 1 ID Info query every frame. This is designed so the GetID() tests are cheap and constant-time
+    const ImGuiID query_id = g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame ? g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame : g.ActiveId;
+    if (tool->QueryId != query_id)
+    {
+        tool->QueryId = query_id;
+        tool->StackLevel = -1;
+        tool->Results.resize(0);
+    }
+    if (query_id == 0)
+        return;
+
+    // Advance to next stack level when we got our result, or after 2 frames (in case we never get a result)
+    int stack_level = tool->StackLevel;
+    if (stack_level >= 0 && stack_level < tool->Results.Size)
+        if (tool->Results[stack_level].QuerySuccess || tool->Results[stack_level].QueryFrameCount > 2)
+            tool->StackLevel++;
+
+    // Update hook
+    stack_level = tool->StackLevel;
+    if (stack_level == -1)
+        g.DebugHookIdInfo = query_id;
+    if (stack_level >= 0 && stack_level < tool->Results.Size)
+    {
+        g.DebugHookIdInfo = tool->Results[stack_level].ID;
+        tool->Results[stack_level].QueryFrameCount++;
+    }
+}
+
+// [DEBUG] Stack tool: hooks called by GetID() family functions
+void ImGui::DebugHookIdInfo(ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, const void* data_id, const void* data_id_end)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    ImGuiStackTool* tool = &g.DebugStackTool;
+
+    // Step 0: stack query
+    // This assume that the ID was computed with the current ID stack, which tends to be the case for our widget.
+    if (tool->StackLevel == -1)
+    {
+        tool->StackLevel++;
+        tool->Results.resize(window->IDStack.Size + 1, ImGuiStackLevelInfo());
+        for (int n = 0; n < window->IDStack.Size + 1; n++)
+            tool->Results[n].ID = (n < window->IDStack.Size) ? window->IDStack[n] : id;
+        return;
+    }
+
+    // Step 1+: query for individual level
+    IM_ASSERT(tool->StackLevel >= 0);
+    if (tool->StackLevel != window->IDStack.Size)
+        return;
+    ImGuiStackLevelInfo* info = &tool->Results[tool->StackLevel];
+    IM_ASSERT(info->ID == id && info->QueryFrameCount > 0);
+
+    switch (data_type)
+    {
+    case ImGuiDataType_S32:
+        ImFormatString(info->Desc, IM_ARRAYSIZE(info->Desc), "%d", (int)(intptr_t)data_id);
+        break;
+    case ImGuiDataType_String:
+        ImFormatString(info->Desc, IM_ARRAYSIZE(info->Desc), "%.*s", data_id_end ? (int)((const char*)data_id_end - (const char*)data_id) : (int)strlen((const char*)data_id), (const char*)data_id);
+        break;
+    case ImGuiDataType_Pointer:
+        ImFormatString(info->Desc, IM_ARRAYSIZE(info->Desc), "(void*)0x%p", data_id);
+        break;
+    case ImGuiDataType_ID:
+        if (info->Desc[0] != 0) // PushOverrideID() is often used to avoid hashing twice, which would lead to 2 calls to DebugHookIdInfo(). We prioritize the first one.
+            return;
+        ImFormatString(info->Desc, IM_ARRAYSIZE(info->Desc), "0x%08X [override]", id);
+        break;
+    default:
+        IM_ASSERT(0);
+    }
+    info->QuerySuccess = true;
+    info->DataType = data_type;
+}
+
+static int StackToolFormatLevelInfo(ImGuiStackTool* tool, int n, bool format_for_ui, char* buf, size_t buf_size)
+{
+    ImGuiStackLevelInfo* info = &tool->Results[n];
+    ImGuiWindow* window = (info->Desc[0] == 0 && n == 0) ? ImGui::FindWindowByID(info->ID) : NULL;
+    if (window)                                                                 // Source: window name (because the root ID don't call GetID() and so doesn't get hooked)
+        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format_for_ui ? "\"%s\" [window]" : "%s", window->Name);
+    if (info->QuerySuccess)                                                     // Source: GetID() hooks (prioritize over ItemInfo() because we frequently use patterns like: PushID(str), Button("") where they both have same id)
+        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, (format_for_ui && info->DataType == ImGuiDataType_String) ? "\"%s\"" : "%s", info->Desc);
+    if (tool->StackLevel < tool->Results.Size)                                  // Only start using fallback below when all queries are done, so during queries we don't flickering ??? markers.
+        return (*buf = 0);
+#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_TEST_ENGINE
+    if (const char* label = ImGuiTestEngine_FindItemDebugLabel(GImGui, info->ID))   // Source: ImGuiTestEngine's ItemInfo()
+        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format_for_ui ? "??? \"%s\"" : "%s", label);
+#endif
+    return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, "???");
+}
+
+// Stack Tool: Display UI
+void ImGui::ShowStackToolWindow(bool* p_open)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (!(g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSize))
+        SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(0.0f, GetFontSize() * 8.0f), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver);
+    if (!Begin("Dear ImGui Stack Tool", p_open) || GetCurrentWindow()->BeginCount > 1)
+    {
+        End();
+        return;
+    }
+
+    // Display hovered/active status
+    ImGuiStackTool* tool = &g.DebugStackTool;
+    const ImGuiID hovered_id = g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame;
+    const ImGuiID active_id = g.ActiveId;
+#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_TEST_ENGINE
+    Text("HoveredId: 0x%08X (\"%s\"), ActiveId:  0x%08X (\"%s\")", hovered_id, hovered_id ? ImGuiTestEngine_FindItemDebugLabel(&g, hovered_id) : "", active_id, active_id ? ImGuiTestEngine_FindItemDebugLabel(&g, active_id) : "");
+#else
+    Text("HoveredId: 0x%08X, ActiveId:  0x%08X", hovered_id, active_id);
+#endif
+    SameLine();
+    MetricsHelpMarker("Hover an item with the mouse to display elements of the ID Stack leading to the item's final ID.\nEach level of the stack correspond to a PushID() call.\nAll levels of the stack are hashed together to make the final ID of a widget (ID displayed at the bottom level of the stack).\nRead FAQ entry about the ID stack for details.");
+
+    // CTRL+C to copy path
+    const float time_since_copy = (float)g.Time - tool->CopyToClipboardLastTime;
+    Checkbox("Ctrl+C: copy path to clipboard", &tool->CopyToClipboardOnCtrlC);
+    SameLine();
+    TextColored((time_since_copy >= 0.0f && time_since_copy < 0.75f && ImFmod(time_since_copy, 0.25f) < 0.25f * 0.5f) ? ImVec4(1.f, 1.f, 0.3f, 1.f) : ImVec4(), "*COPIED*");
+    if (tool->CopyToClipboardOnCtrlC && IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_ModCtrl) && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_C))
+    {
+        tool->CopyToClipboardLastTime = (float)g.Time;
+        char* p = g.TempBuffer.Data;
+        char* p_end = p + g.TempBuffer.Size;
+        for (int stack_n = 0; stack_n < tool->Results.Size && p + 3 < p_end; stack_n++)
+        {
+            *p++ = '/';
+            char level_desc[256];
+            StackToolFormatLevelInfo(tool, stack_n, false, level_desc, IM_ARRAYSIZE(level_desc));
+            for (int n = 0; level_desc[n] && p + 2 < p_end; n++)
+            {
+                if (level_desc[n] == '/')
+                    *p++ = '\\';
+                *p++ = level_desc[n];
+            }
+        }
+        *p = '\0';
+        SetClipboardText(g.TempBuffer.Data);
+    }
+
+    // Display decorated stack
+    tool->LastActiveFrame = g.FrameCount;
+    if (tool->Results.Size > 0 && BeginTable("##table", 3, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders))
+    {
+        const float id_width = CalcTextSize("0xDDDDDDDD").x;
+        TableSetupColumn("Seed", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, id_width);
+        TableSetupColumn("PushID", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch);
+        TableSetupColumn("Result", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, id_width);
+        TableHeadersRow();
+        for (int n = 0; n < tool->Results.Size; n++)
+        {
+            ImGuiStackLevelInfo* info = &tool->Results[n];
+            TableNextColumn();
+            Text("0x%08X", (n > 0) ? tool->Results[n - 1].ID : 0);
+            TableNextColumn();
+            StackToolFormatLevelInfo(tool, n, true, g.TempBuffer.Data, g.TempBuffer.Size);
+            TextUnformatted(g.TempBuffer.Data);
+            TableNextColumn();
+            Text("0x%08X", info->ID);
+            if (n == tool->Results.Size - 1)
+                TableSetBgColor(ImGuiTableBgTarget_CellBg, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Header));
+        }
+        EndTable();
+    }
+    End();
+}
+
+#else
+
+void ImGui::ShowMetricsWindow(bool*) {}
+void ImGui::ShowFontAtlas(ImFontAtlas*) {}
+void ImGui::DebugNodeColumns(ImGuiOldColumns*) {}
+void ImGui::DebugNodeDrawList(ImGuiWindow*, ImGuiViewportP*, const ImDrawList*, const char*) {}
+void ImGui::DebugNodeDrawCmdShowMeshAndBoundingBox(ImDrawList*, const ImDrawList*, const ImDrawCmd*, bool, bool) {}
+void ImGui::DebugNodeFont(ImFont*) {}
+void ImGui::DebugNodeStorage(ImGuiStorage*, const char*) {}
+void ImGui::DebugNodeTabBar(ImGuiTabBar*, const char*) {}
+void ImGui::DebugNodeWindow(ImGuiWindow*, const char*) {}
+void ImGui::DebugNodeWindowSettings(ImGuiWindowSettings*) {}
+void ImGui::DebugNodeWindowsList(ImVector<ImGuiWindow*>*, const char*) {}
+void ImGui::DebugNodeViewport(ImGuiViewportP*) {}
+
+void ImGui::DebugLog(const char*, ...) {}
+void ImGui::DebugLogV(const char*, va_list) {}
+void ImGui::ShowDebugLogWindow(bool*) {}
+void ImGui::ShowStackToolWindow(bool*) {}
+void ImGui::DebugHookIdInfo(ImGuiID, ImGuiDataType, const void*, const void*) {}
+void ImGui::UpdateDebugToolItemPicker() {}
+void ImGui::UpdateDebugToolStackQueries() {}
+
+#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Include imgui_user.inl at the end of imgui.cpp to access private data/functions that aren't exposed.
+// Prefer just including imgui_internal.h from your code rather than using this define. If a declaration is missing from imgui_internal.h add it or request it on the github.
+#ifdef IMGUI_INCLUDE_IMGUI_USER_INL
+#include "imgui_user.inl"
+#endif
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE
diff --git a/dependencies/src/imgui/imgui_demo.cpp b/dependencies/src/imgui/imgui_demo.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..47b8341
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/src/imgui/imgui_demo.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,8260 @@
+// dear imgui, v1.89 WIP
+// (demo code)
+
+// Help:
+// - Read FAQ at http://dearimgui.org/faq
+// - Newcomers, read 'Programmer guide' in imgui.cpp for notes on how to setup Dear ImGui in your codebase.
+// - Call and read ImGui::ShowDemoWindow() in imgui_demo.cpp. All applications in examples/ are doing that.
+// Read imgui.cpp for more details, documentation and comments.
+// Get the latest version at https://github.com/ocornut/imgui
+
+// Message to the person tempted to delete this file when integrating Dear ImGui into their codebase:
+// Do NOT remove this file from your project! Think again! It is the most useful reference code that you and other
+// coders will want to refer to and call. Have the ImGui::ShowDemoWindow() function wired in an always-available
+// debug menu of your game/app! Removing this file from your project is hindering access to documentation for everyone
+// in your team, likely leading you to poorer usage of the library.
+// Everything in this file will be stripped out by the linker if you don't call ImGui::ShowDemoWindow().
+// If you want to link core Dear ImGui in your shipped builds but want a thorough guarantee that the demo will not be
+// linked, you can setup your imconfig.h with #define IMGUI_DISABLE_DEMO_WINDOWS and those functions will be empty.
+// In another situation, whenever you have Dear ImGui available you probably want this to be available for reference.
+// Thank you,
+// -Your beloved friend, imgui_demo.cpp (which you won't delete)
+
+// Message to beginner C/C++ programmers about the meaning of the 'static' keyword:
+// In this demo code, we frequently use 'static' variables inside functions. A static variable persists across calls,
+// so it is essentially like a global variable but declared inside the scope of the function. We do this as a way to
+// gather code and data in the same place, to make the demo source code faster to read, faster to write, and smaller
+// in size. It also happens to be a convenient way of storing simple UI related information as long as your function
+// doesn't need to be reentrant or used in multiple threads. This might be a pattern you will want to use in your code,
+// but most of the real data you would be editing is likely going to be stored outside your functions.
+
+// The Demo code in this file is designed to be easy to copy-and-paste into your application!
+// Because of this:
+// - We never omit the ImGui:: prefix when calling functions, even though most code here is in the same namespace.
+// - We try to declare static variables in the local scope, as close as possible to the code using them.
+// - We never use any of the helpers/facilities used internally by Dear ImGui, unless available in the public API.
+// - We never use maths operators on ImVec2/ImVec4. For our other sources files we use them, and they are provided
+//   by imgui_internal.h using the IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS define. For your own sources file they are optional
+//   and require you either enable those, either provide your own via IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA in imconfig.h.
+//   Because we can't assume anything about your support of maths operators, we cannot use them in imgui_demo.cpp.
+
+// Navigating this file:
+// - In Visual Studio IDE: CTRL+comma ("Edit.GoToAll") can follow symbols in comments, whereas CTRL+F12 ("Edit.GoToImplementation") cannot.
+// - With Visual Assist installed: ALT+G ("VAssistX.GoToImplementation") can also follow symbols in comments.
+
+/*
+
+Index of this file:
+
+// [SECTION] Forward Declarations, Helpers
+// [SECTION] Demo Window / ShowDemoWindow()
+// - sub section: ShowDemoWindowWidgets()
+// - sub section: ShowDemoWindowLayout()
+// - sub section: ShowDemoWindowPopups()
+// - sub section: ShowDemoWindowTables()
+// - sub section: ShowDemoWindowMisc()
+// [SECTION] About Window / ShowAboutWindow()
+// [SECTION] Style Editor / ShowStyleEditor()
+// [SECTION] Example App: Main Menu Bar / ShowExampleAppMainMenuBar()
+// [SECTION] Example App: Debug Console / ShowExampleAppConsole()
+// [SECTION] Example App: Debug Log / ShowExampleAppLog()
+// [SECTION] Example App: Simple Layout / ShowExampleAppLayout()
+// [SECTION] Example App: Property Editor / ShowExampleAppPropertyEditor()
+// [SECTION] Example App: Long Text / ShowExampleAppLongText()
+// [SECTION] Example App: Auto Resize / ShowExampleAppAutoResize()
+// [SECTION] Example App: Constrained Resize / ShowExampleAppConstrainedResize()
+// [SECTION] Example App: Simple overlay / ShowExampleAppSimpleOverlay()
+// [SECTION] Example App: Fullscreen window / ShowExampleAppFullscreen()
+// [SECTION] Example App: Manipulating window titles / ShowExampleAppWindowTitles()
+// [SECTION] Example App: Custom Rendering using ImDrawList API / ShowExampleAppCustomRendering()
+// [SECTION] Example App: Docking, DockSpace / ShowExampleAppDockSpace()
+// [SECTION] Example App: Documents Handling / ShowExampleAppDocuments()
+
+*/
+
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(_CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS)
+#define _CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS
+#endif
+
+#include "imgui.h"
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE
+
+// System includes
+#include <ctype.h>          // toupper
+#include <limits.h>         // INT_MIN, INT_MAX
+#include <math.h>           // sqrtf, powf, cosf, sinf, floorf, ceilf
+#include <stdio.h>          // vsnprintf, sscanf, printf
+#include <stdlib.h>         // NULL, malloc, free, atoi
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER <= 1500 // MSVC 2008 or earlier
+#include <stddef.h>         // intptr_t
+#else
+#include <stdint.h>         // intptr_t
+#endif
+
+// Visual Studio warnings
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+#pragma warning (disable: 4127)     // condition expression is constant
+#pragma warning (disable: 4996)     // 'This function or variable may be unsafe': strcpy, strdup, sprintf, vsnprintf, sscanf, fopen
+#pragma warning (disable: 26451)    // [Static Analyzer] Arithmetic overflow : Using operator 'xxx' on a 4 byte value and then casting the result to a 8 byte value. Cast the value to the wider type before calling operator 'xxx' to avoid overflow(io.2).
+#endif
+
+// Clang/GCC warnings with -Weverything
+#if defined(__clang__)
+#if __has_warning("-Wunknown-warning-option")
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-warning-option"         // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx'                     // not all warnings are known by all Clang versions and they tend to be rename-happy.. so ignoring warnings triggers new warnings on some configuration. Great!
+#endif
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-pragmas"                // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx'
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast"                 // warning: use of old-style cast                           // yes, they are more terse.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdeprecated-declarations"        // warning: 'xx' is deprecated: The POSIX name for this..   // for strdup used in demo code (so user can copy & paste the code)
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wint-to-void-pointer-cast"       // warning: cast to 'void *' from smaller integer type
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-security"                // warning: format string is not a string literal
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wexit-time-destructors"          // warning: declaration requires an exit-time destructor    // exit-time destruction order is undefined. if MemFree() leads to users code that has been disabled before exit it might cause problems. ImGui coding style welcomes static/globals.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunused-macros"                  // warning: macro is not used                               // we define snprintf/vsnprintf on Windows so they are available, but not always used.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant"  // warning: zero as null pointer constant                   // some standard header variations use #define NULL 0
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion"               // warning: implicit conversion from 'float' to 'double' when passing argument to function  // using printf() is a misery with this as C++ va_arg ellipsis changes float to double.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wreserved-id-macro"              // warning: macro name is a reserved identifier
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wimplicit-int-float-conversion"  // warning: implicit conversion from 'xxx' to 'float' may lose precision
+#elif defined(__GNUC__)
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wpragmas"                  // warning: unknown option after '#pragma GCC diagnostic' kind
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wint-to-pointer-cast"      // warning: cast to pointer from integer of different size
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-security"          // warning: format string is not a string literal (potentially insecure)
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion"         // warning: implicit conversion from 'float' to 'double' when passing argument to function
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wconversion"               // warning: conversion to 'xxxx' from 'xxxx' may alter its value
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wmisleading-indentation"   // [__GNUC__ >= 6] warning: this 'if' clause does not guard this statement      // GCC 6.0+ only. See #883 on GitHub.
+#endif
+
+// Play it nice with Windows users (Update: May 2018, Notepad now supports Unix-style carriage returns!)
+#ifdef _WIN32
+#define IM_NEWLINE  "\r\n"
+#else
+#define IM_NEWLINE  "\n"
+#endif
+
+// Helpers
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(snprintf)
+#define snprintf    _snprintf
+#endif
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(vsnprintf)
+#define vsnprintf   _vsnprintf
+#endif
+
+// Format specifiers, printing 64-bit hasn't been decently standardized...
+// In a real application you should be using PRId64 and PRIu64 from <inttypes.h> (non-windows) and on Windows define them yourself.
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+#define IM_PRId64   "I64d"
+#define IM_PRIu64   "I64u"
+#else
+#define IM_PRId64   "lld"
+#define IM_PRIu64   "llu"
+#endif
+
+// Helpers macros
+// We normally try to not use many helpers in imgui_demo.cpp in order to make code easier to copy and paste,
+// but making an exception here as those are largely simplifying code...
+// In other imgui sources we can use nicer internal functions from imgui_internal.h (ImMin/ImMax) but not in the demo.
+#define IM_MIN(A, B)            (((A) < (B)) ? (A) : (B))
+#define IM_MAX(A, B)            (((A) >= (B)) ? (A) : (B))
+#define IM_CLAMP(V, MN, MX)     ((V) < (MN) ? (MN) : (V) > (MX) ? (MX) : (V))
+
+// Enforce cdecl calling convention for functions called by the standard library, in case compilation settings changed the default to e.g. __vectorcall
+#ifndef IMGUI_CDECL
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+#define IMGUI_CDECL __cdecl
+#else
+#define IMGUI_CDECL
+#endif
+#endif
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Forward Declarations, Helpers
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if !defined(IMGUI_DISABLE_DEMO_WINDOWS)
+
+// Forward Declarations
+static void ShowExampleAppDockSpace(bool* p_open);
+static void ShowExampleAppDocuments(bool* p_open);
+static void ShowExampleAppMainMenuBar();
+static void ShowExampleAppConsole(bool* p_open);
+static void ShowExampleAppLog(bool* p_open);
+static void ShowExampleAppLayout(bool* p_open);
+static void ShowExampleAppPropertyEditor(bool* p_open);
+static void ShowExampleAppLongText(bool* p_open);
+static void ShowExampleAppAutoResize(bool* p_open);
+static void ShowExampleAppConstrainedResize(bool* p_open);
+static void ShowExampleAppSimpleOverlay(bool* p_open);
+static void ShowExampleAppFullscreen(bool* p_open);
+static void ShowExampleAppWindowTitles(bool* p_open);
+static void ShowExampleAppCustomRendering(bool* p_open);
+static void ShowExampleMenuFile();
+
+// Helper to display a little (?) mark which shows a tooltip when hovered.
+// In your own code you may want to display an actual icon if you are using a merged icon fonts (see docs/FONTS.md)
+static void HelpMarker(const char* desc)
+{
+    ImGui::TextDisabled("(?)");
+    if (ImGui::IsItemHovered())
+    {
+        ImGui::BeginTooltip();
+        ImGui::PushTextWrapPos(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 35.0f);
+        ImGui::TextUnformatted(desc);
+        ImGui::PopTextWrapPos();
+        ImGui::EndTooltip();
+    }
+}
+
+static void ShowDockingDisabledMessage()
+{
+    ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+    ImGui::Text("ERROR: Docking is not enabled! See Demo > Configuration.");
+    ImGui::Text("Set io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_DockingEnable in your code, or ");
+    ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, 0.0f);
+    if (ImGui::SmallButton("click here"))
+        io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_DockingEnable;
+}
+
+// Helper to wire demo markers located in code to a interactive browser
+typedef void (*ImGuiDemoMarkerCallback)(const char* file, int line, const char* section, void* user_data);
+extern ImGuiDemoMarkerCallback  GImGuiDemoMarkerCallback;
+extern void*                    GImGuiDemoMarkerCallbackUserData;
+ImGuiDemoMarkerCallback         GImGuiDemoMarkerCallback = NULL;
+void*                           GImGuiDemoMarkerCallbackUserData = NULL;
+#define IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER(section)  do { if (GImGuiDemoMarkerCallback != NULL) GImGuiDemoMarkerCallback(__FILE__, __LINE__, section, GImGuiDemoMarkerCallbackUserData); } while (0)
+
+// Helper to display basic user controls.
+void ImGui::ShowUserGuide()
+{
+    ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+    ImGui::BulletText("Double-click on title bar to collapse window.");
+    ImGui::BulletText(
+        "Click and drag on lower corner to resize window\n"
+        "(double-click to auto fit window to its contents).");
+    ImGui::BulletText("CTRL+Click on a slider or drag box to input value as text.");
+    ImGui::BulletText("TAB/SHIFT+TAB to cycle through keyboard editable fields.");
+	ImGui::BulletText("CTRL+Tab to select a window.");
+	if (io.FontAllowUserScaling)
+        ImGui::BulletText("CTRL+Mouse Wheel to zoom window contents.");
+    ImGui::BulletText("While inputing text:\n");
+    ImGui::Indent();
+    ImGui::BulletText("CTRL+Left/Right to word jump.");
+    ImGui::BulletText("CTRL+A or double-click to select all.");
+    ImGui::BulletText("CTRL+X/C/V to use clipboard cut/copy/paste.");
+    ImGui::BulletText("CTRL+Z,CTRL+Y to undo/redo.");
+    ImGui::BulletText("ESCAPE to revert.");
+    ImGui::Unindent();
+    ImGui::BulletText("With keyboard navigation enabled:");
+    ImGui::Indent();
+    ImGui::BulletText("Arrow keys to navigate.");
+    ImGui::BulletText("Space to activate a widget.");
+    ImGui::BulletText("Return to input text into a widget.");
+    ImGui::BulletText("Escape to deactivate a widget, close popup, exit child window.");
+    ImGui::BulletText("Alt to jump to the menu layer of a window.");
+    ImGui::Unindent();
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Demo Window / ShowDemoWindow()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - ShowDemoWindowWidgets()
+// - ShowDemoWindowLayout()
+// - ShowDemoWindowPopups()
+// - ShowDemoWindowTables()
+// - ShowDemoWindowColumns()
+// - ShowDemoWindowMisc()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// We split the contents of the big ShowDemoWindow() function into smaller functions
+// (because the link time of very large functions grow non-linearly)
+static void ShowDemoWindowWidgets();
+static void ShowDemoWindowLayout();
+static void ShowDemoWindowPopups();
+static void ShowDemoWindowTables();
+static void ShowDemoWindowColumns();
+static void ShowDemoWindowMisc();
+
+// Demonstrate most Dear ImGui features (this is big function!)
+// You may execute this function to experiment with the UI and understand what it does.
+// You may then search for keywords in the code when you are interested by a specific feature.
+void ImGui::ShowDemoWindow(bool* p_open)
+{
+    // Exceptionally add an extra assert here for people confused about initial Dear ImGui setup
+    // Most ImGui functions would normally just crash if the context is missing.
+    IM_ASSERT(ImGui::GetCurrentContext() != NULL && "Missing dear imgui context. Refer to examples app!");
+
+    // Examples Apps (accessible from the "Examples" menu)
+    static bool show_app_main_menu_bar = false;
+    static bool show_app_dockspace = false;
+    static bool show_app_documents = false;
+
+    static bool show_app_console = false;
+    static bool show_app_log = false;
+    static bool show_app_layout = false;
+    static bool show_app_property_editor = false;
+    static bool show_app_long_text = false;
+    static bool show_app_auto_resize = false;
+    static bool show_app_constrained_resize = false;
+    static bool show_app_simple_overlay = false;
+    static bool show_app_fullscreen = false;
+    static bool show_app_window_titles = false;
+    static bool show_app_custom_rendering = false;
+
+    if (show_app_main_menu_bar)       ShowExampleAppMainMenuBar();
+    if (show_app_dockspace)           ShowExampleAppDockSpace(&show_app_dockspace);     // Process the Docking app first, as explicit DockSpace() nodes needs to be submitted early (read comments near the DockSpace function)
+    if (show_app_documents)           ShowExampleAppDocuments(&show_app_documents);     // Process the Document app next, as it may also use a DockSpace()
+
+    if (show_app_console)             ShowExampleAppConsole(&show_app_console);
+    if (show_app_log)                 ShowExampleAppLog(&show_app_log);
+    if (show_app_layout)              ShowExampleAppLayout(&show_app_layout);
+    if (show_app_property_editor)     ShowExampleAppPropertyEditor(&show_app_property_editor);
+    if (show_app_long_text)           ShowExampleAppLongText(&show_app_long_text);
+    if (show_app_auto_resize)         ShowExampleAppAutoResize(&show_app_auto_resize);
+    if (show_app_constrained_resize)  ShowExampleAppConstrainedResize(&show_app_constrained_resize);
+    if (show_app_simple_overlay)      ShowExampleAppSimpleOverlay(&show_app_simple_overlay);
+    if (show_app_fullscreen)          ShowExampleAppFullscreen(&show_app_fullscreen);
+    if (show_app_window_titles)       ShowExampleAppWindowTitles(&show_app_window_titles);
+    if (show_app_custom_rendering)    ShowExampleAppCustomRendering(&show_app_custom_rendering);
+
+    // Dear ImGui Apps (accessible from the "Tools" menu)
+    static bool show_app_metrics = false;
+    static bool show_app_debug_log = false;
+    static bool show_app_stack_tool = false;
+    static bool show_app_about = false;
+    static bool show_app_style_editor = false;
+
+    if (show_app_metrics)
+        ImGui::ShowMetricsWindow(&show_app_metrics);
+    if (show_app_debug_log)
+        ImGui::ShowDebugLogWindow(&show_app_debug_log);
+    if (show_app_stack_tool)
+        ImGui::ShowStackToolWindow(&show_app_stack_tool);
+    if (show_app_about)
+        ImGui::ShowAboutWindow(&show_app_about);
+    if (show_app_style_editor)
+    {
+        ImGui::Begin("Dear ImGui Style Editor", &show_app_style_editor);
+        ImGui::ShowStyleEditor();
+        ImGui::End();
+    }
+
+    // Demonstrate the various window flags. Typically you would just use the default!
+    static bool no_titlebar = false;
+    static bool no_scrollbar = false;
+    static bool no_menu = false;
+    static bool no_move = false;
+    static bool no_resize = false;
+    static bool no_collapse = false;
+    static bool no_close = false;
+    static bool no_nav = false;
+    static bool no_background = false;
+    static bool no_bring_to_front = false;
+    static bool no_docking = false;
+    static bool unsaved_document = false;
+
+    ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = 0;
+    if (no_titlebar)        window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar;
+    if (no_scrollbar)       window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar;
+    if (!no_menu)           window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar;
+    if (no_move)            window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove;
+    if (no_resize)          window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize;
+    if (no_collapse)        window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse;
+    if (no_nav)             window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNav;
+    if (no_background)      window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground;
+    if (no_bring_to_front)  window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus;
+    if (no_docking)         window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDocking;
+    if (unsaved_document)   window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_UnsavedDocument;
+    if (no_close)           p_open = NULL; // Don't pass our bool* to Begin
+
+    // We specify a default position/size in case there's no data in the .ini file.
+    // We only do it to make the demo applications a little more welcoming, but typically this isn't required.
+    const ImGuiViewport* main_viewport = ImGui::GetMainViewport();
+    ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(ImVec2(main_viewport->WorkPos.x + 650, main_viewport->WorkPos.y + 20), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver);
+    ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(550, 680), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver);
+
+    // Main body of the Demo window starts here.
+    if (!ImGui::Begin("Dear ImGui Demo", p_open, window_flags))
+    {
+        // Early out if the window is collapsed, as an optimization.
+        ImGui::End();
+        return;
+    }
+
+    // Most "big" widgets share a common width settings by default. See 'Demo->Layout->Widgets Width' for details.
+
+    // e.g. Use 2/3 of the space for widgets and 1/3 for labels (right align)
+    //ImGui::PushItemWidth(-ImGui::GetWindowWidth() * 0.35f);
+
+    // e.g. Leave a fixed amount of width for labels (by passing a negative value), the rest goes to widgets.
+    ImGui::PushItemWidth(ImGui::GetFontSize() * -12);
+
+    // Menu Bar
+    if (ImGui::BeginMenuBar())
+    {
+        if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Menu"))
+        {
+            IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Menu/File");
+            ShowExampleMenuFile();
+            ImGui::EndMenu();
+        }
+        if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Examples"))
+        {
+            IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Menu/Examples");
+            ImGui::MenuItem("Main menu bar", NULL, &show_app_main_menu_bar);
+            ImGui::MenuItem("Console", NULL, &show_app_console);
+            ImGui::MenuItem("Log", NULL, &show_app_log);
+            ImGui::MenuItem("Simple layout", NULL, &show_app_layout);
+            ImGui::MenuItem("Property editor", NULL, &show_app_property_editor);
+            ImGui::MenuItem("Long text display", NULL, &show_app_long_text);
+            ImGui::MenuItem("Auto-resizing window", NULL, &show_app_auto_resize);
+            ImGui::MenuItem("Constrained-resizing window", NULL, &show_app_constrained_resize);
+            ImGui::MenuItem("Simple overlay", NULL, &show_app_simple_overlay);
+            ImGui::MenuItem("Fullscreen window", NULL, &show_app_fullscreen);
+            ImGui::MenuItem("Manipulating window titles", NULL, &show_app_window_titles);
+            ImGui::MenuItem("Custom rendering", NULL, &show_app_custom_rendering);
+            ImGui::MenuItem("Dockspace", NULL, &show_app_dockspace);
+            ImGui::MenuItem("Documents", NULL, &show_app_documents);
+            ImGui::EndMenu();
+        }
+        //if (ImGui::MenuItem("MenuItem")) {} // You can also use MenuItem() inside a menu bar!
+        if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Tools"))
+        {
+            IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Menu/Tools");
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS
+            const bool has_debug_tools = true;
+#else
+            const bool has_debug_tools = false;
+#endif
+            ImGui::MenuItem("Metrics/Debugger", NULL, &show_app_metrics, has_debug_tools);
+            ImGui::MenuItem("Debug Log", NULL, &show_app_debug_log, has_debug_tools);
+            ImGui::MenuItem("Stack Tool", NULL, &show_app_stack_tool, has_debug_tools);
+            ImGui::MenuItem("Style Editor", NULL, &show_app_style_editor);
+            ImGui::MenuItem("About Dear ImGui", NULL, &show_app_about);
+            ImGui::EndMenu();
+        }
+        ImGui::EndMenuBar();
+    }
+
+    ImGui::Text("dear imgui says hello! (%s) (%d)", IMGUI_VERSION, IMGUI_VERSION_NUM);
+    ImGui::Spacing();
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Help");
+    if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Help"))
+    {
+        ImGui::Text("ABOUT THIS DEMO:");
+        ImGui::BulletText("Sections below are demonstrating many aspects of the library.");
+        ImGui::BulletText("The \"Examples\" menu above leads to more demo contents.");
+        ImGui::BulletText("The \"Tools\" menu above gives access to: About Box, Style Editor,\n"
+                          "and Metrics/Debugger (general purpose Dear ImGui debugging tool).");
+        ImGui::Separator();
+
+        ImGui::Text("PROGRAMMER GUIDE:");
+        ImGui::BulletText("See the ShowDemoWindow() code in imgui_demo.cpp. <- you are here!");
+        ImGui::BulletText("See comments in imgui.cpp.");
+        ImGui::BulletText("See example applications in the examples/ folder.");
+        ImGui::BulletText("Read the FAQ at http://www.dearimgui.org/faq/");
+        ImGui::BulletText("Set 'io.ConfigFlags |= NavEnableKeyboard' for keyboard controls.");
+        ImGui::BulletText("Set 'io.ConfigFlags |= NavEnableGamepad' for gamepad controls.");
+        ImGui::Separator();
+
+        ImGui::Text("USER GUIDE:");
+        ImGui::ShowUserGuide();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Configuration");
+    if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Configuration"))
+    {
+        ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Configuration##2"))
+        {
+            ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.ConfigFlags: NavEnableKeyboard",    &io.ConfigFlags, ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard);
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Enable keyboard controls.");
+            ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.ConfigFlags: NavEnableGamepad",     &io.ConfigFlags, ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad);
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Enable gamepad controls. Require backend to set io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad.\n\nRead instructions in imgui.cpp for details.");
+            ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.ConfigFlags: NavEnableSetMousePos", &io.ConfigFlags, ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos);
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Instruct navigation to move the mouse cursor. See comment for ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos.");
+            ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.ConfigFlags: NoMouse",              &io.ConfigFlags, ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouse);
+            if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouse)
+            {
+                // The "NoMouse" option can get us stuck with a disabled mouse! Let's provide an alternative way to fix it:
+                if (fmodf((float)ImGui::GetTime(), 0.40f) < 0.20f)
+                {
+                    ImGui::SameLine();
+                    ImGui::Text("<<PRESS SPACE TO DISABLE>>");
+                }
+                if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Space))
+                    io.ConfigFlags &= ~ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouse;
+            }
+            ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.ConfigFlags: NoMouseCursorChange", &io.ConfigFlags, ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouseCursorChange);
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Instruct backend to not alter mouse cursor shape and visibility.");
+
+            ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.ConfigFlags: DockingEnable", &io.ConfigFlags, ImGuiConfigFlags_DockingEnable);
+            ImGui::SameLine();
+            if (io.ConfigDockingWithShift)
+                HelpMarker("Drag from window title bar or their tab to dock/undock. Hold SHIFT to enable docking.\n\nDrag from window menu button (upper-left button) to undock an entire node (all windows).");
+            else
+                HelpMarker("Drag from window title bar or their tab to dock/undock. Hold SHIFT to disable docking.\n\nDrag from window menu button (upper-left button) to undock an entire node (all windows).");
+            if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_DockingEnable)
+            {
+                ImGui::Indent();
+                ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigDockingNoSplit", &io.ConfigDockingNoSplit);
+                ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Simplified docking mode: disable window splitting, so docking is limited to merging multiple windows together into tab-bars.");
+                ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigDockingWithShift", &io.ConfigDockingWithShift);
+                ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Enable docking when holding Shift only (allow to drop in wider space, reduce visual noise)");
+                ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigDockingAlwaysTabBar", &io.ConfigDockingAlwaysTabBar);
+                ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Create a docking node and tab-bar on single floating windows.");
+                ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigDockingTransparentPayload", &io.ConfigDockingTransparentPayload);
+                ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Make window or viewport transparent when docking and only display docking boxes on the target viewport. Useful if rendering of multiple viewport cannot be synced. Best used with ConfigViewportsNoAutoMerge.");
+                ImGui::Unindent();
+            }
+
+            ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.ConfigFlags: ViewportsEnable", &io.ConfigFlags, ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable);
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("[beta] Enable beta multi-viewports support. See ImGuiPlatformIO for details.");
+            if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable)
+            {
+                ImGui::Indent();
+                ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigViewportsNoAutoMerge", &io.ConfigViewportsNoAutoMerge);
+                ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Set to make all floating imgui windows always create their own viewport. Otherwise, they are merged into the main host viewports when overlapping it.");
+                ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigViewportsNoTaskBarIcon", &io.ConfigViewportsNoTaskBarIcon);
+                ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Toggling this at runtime is normally unsupported (most platform backends won't refresh the task bar icon state right away).");
+                ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigViewportsNoDecoration", &io.ConfigViewportsNoDecoration);
+                ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Toggling this at runtime is normally unsupported (most platform backends won't refresh the decoration right away).");
+                ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigViewportsNoDefaultParent", &io.ConfigViewportsNoDefaultParent);
+                ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Toggling this at runtime is normally unsupported (most platform backends won't refresh the parenting right away).");
+                ImGui::Unindent();
+            }
+
+            ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigInputTrickleEventQueue", &io.ConfigInputTrickleEventQueue);
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Enable input queue trickling: some types of events submitted during the same frame (e.g. button down + up) will be spread over multiple frames, improving interactions with low framerates.");
+            ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink", &io.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink);
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Enable blinking cursor (optional as some users consider it to be distracting).");
+            ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigInputTextEnterKeepActive", &io.ConfigInputTextEnterKeepActive);
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Pressing Enter will keep item active and select contents (single-line only).");
+            ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigDragClickToInputText", &io.ConfigDragClickToInputText);
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Enable turning DragXXX widgets into text input with a simple mouse click-release (without moving).");
+            ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges", &io.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges);
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Enable resizing of windows from their edges and from the lower-left corner.\nThis requires (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors) because it needs mouse cursor feedback.");
+            ImGui::Checkbox("io.ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly", &io.ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly);
+            ImGui::Checkbox("io.MouseDrawCursor", &io.MouseDrawCursor);
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Instruct Dear ImGui to render a mouse cursor itself. Note that a mouse cursor rendered via your application GPU rendering path will feel more laggy than hardware cursor, but will be more in sync with your other visuals.\n\nSome desktop applications may use both kinds of cursors (e.g. enable software cursor only when resizing/dragging something).");
+            ImGui::Text("Also see Style->Rendering for rendering options.");
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+            ImGui::Separator();
+        }
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Configuration/Backend Flags");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Backend Flags"))
+        {
+            HelpMarker(
+                "Those flags are set by the backends (imgui_impl_xxx files) to specify their capabilities.\n"
+                "Here we expose them as read-only fields to avoid breaking interactions with your backend.");
+
+            // Make a local copy to avoid modifying actual backend flags.
+            // FIXME: We don't use BeginDisabled() to keep label bright, maybe we need a BeginReadonly() equivalent..
+            ImGuiBackendFlags backend_flags = io.BackendFlags;
+            ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.BackendFlags: HasGamepad",             &backend_flags, ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad);
+            ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.BackendFlags: HasMouseCursors",        &backend_flags, ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors);
+            ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.BackendFlags: HasSetMousePos",         &backend_flags, ImGuiBackendFlags_HasSetMousePos);
+            ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.BackendFlags: PlatformHasViewports",   &backend_flags, ImGuiBackendFlags_PlatformHasViewports);
+            ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.BackendFlags: HasMouseHoveredViewport",&backend_flags, ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseHoveredViewport);
+            ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.BackendFlags: RendererHasVtxOffset",   &backend_flags, ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset);
+            ImGui::CheckboxFlags("io.BackendFlags: RendererHasViewports",   &backend_flags, ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasViewports);
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+            ImGui::Separator();
+        }
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Configuration/Style");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Style"))
+        {
+            HelpMarker("The same contents can be accessed in 'Tools->Style Editor' or by calling the ShowStyleEditor() function.");
+            ImGui::ShowStyleEditor();
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+            ImGui::Separator();
+        }
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Configuration/Capture, Logging");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Capture/Logging"))
+        {
+            HelpMarker(
+                "The logging API redirects all text output so you can easily capture the content of "
+                "a window or a block. Tree nodes can be automatically expanded.\n"
+                "Try opening any of the contents below in this window and then click one of the \"Log To\" button.");
+            ImGui::LogButtons();
+
+            HelpMarker("You can also call ImGui::LogText() to output directly to the log without a visual output.");
+            if (ImGui::Button("Copy \"Hello, world!\" to clipboard"))
+            {
+                ImGui::LogToClipboard();
+                ImGui::LogText("Hello, world!");
+                ImGui::LogFinish();
+            }
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Window options");
+    if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Window options"))
+    {
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("split", 3))
+        {
+            ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Checkbox("No titlebar", &no_titlebar);
+            ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Checkbox("No scrollbar", &no_scrollbar);
+            ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Checkbox("No menu", &no_menu);
+            ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Checkbox("No move", &no_move);
+            ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Checkbox("No resize", &no_resize);
+            ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Checkbox("No collapse", &no_collapse);
+            ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Checkbox("No close", &no_close);
+            ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Checkbox("No nav", &no_nav);
+            ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Checkbox("No background", &no_background);
+            ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Checkbox("No bring to front", &no_bring_to_front);
+            ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Checkbox("No docking", &no_docking);
+            ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Checkbox("Unsaved document", &unsaved_document);
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+    }
+
+    // All demo contents
+    ShowDemoWindowWidgets();
+    ShowDemoWindowLayout();
+    ShowDemoWindowPopups();
+    ShowDemoWindowTables();
+    ShowDemoWindowMisc();
+
+    // End of ShowDemoWindow()
+    ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+    ImGui::End();
+}
+
+static void ShowDemoWindowWidgets()
+{
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets");
+    if (!ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Widgets"))
+        return;
+
+    static bool disable_all = false; // The Checkbox for that is inside the "Disabled" section at the bottom
+    if (disable_all)
+        ImGui::BeginDisabled();
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Basic"))
+    {
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/Button");
+        static int clicked = 0;
+        if (ImGui::Button("Button"))
+            clicked++;
+        if (clicked & 1)
+        {
+            ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::Text("Thanks for clicking me!");
+        }
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/Checkbox");
+        static bool check = true;
+        ImGui::Checkbox("checkbox", &check);
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/RadioButton");
+        static int e = 0;
+        ImGui::RadioButton("radio a", &e, 0); ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::RadioButton("radio b", &e, 1); ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::RadioButton("radio c", &e, 2);
+
+        // Color buttons, demonstrate using PushID() to add unique identifier in the ID stack, and changing style.
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/Buttons (Colored)");
+        for (int i = 0; i < 7; i++)
+        {
+            if (i > 0)
+                ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::PushID(i);
+            ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i / 7.0f, 0.6f, 0.6f));
+            ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i / 7.0f, 0.7f, 0.7f));
+            ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ButtonActive, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i / 7.0f, 0.8f, 0.8f));
+            ImGui::Button("Click");
+            ImGui::PopStyleColor(3);
+            ImGui::PopID();
+        }
+
+        // Use AlignTextToFramePadding() to align text baseline to the baseline of framed widgets elements
+        // (otherwise a Text+SameLine+Button sequence will have the text a little too high by default!)
+        // See 'Demo->Layout->Text Baseline Alignment' for details.
+        ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding();
+        ImGui::Text("Hold to repeat:");
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+
+        // Arrow buttons with Repeater
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/Buttons (Repeating)");
+        static int counter = 0;
+        float spacing = ImGui::GetStyle().ItemInnerSpacing.x;
+        ImGui::PushButtonRepeat(true);
+        if (ImGui::ArrowButton("##left", ImGuiDir_Left)) { counter--; }
+        ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, spacing);
+        if (ImGui::ArrowButton("##right", ImGuiDir_Right)) { counter++; }
+        ImGui::PopButtonRepeat();
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::Text("%d", counter);
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/Tooltips");
+        ImGui::Text("Hover over me");
+        if (ImGui::IsItemHovered())
+            ImGui::SetTooltip("I am a tooltip");
+
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::Text("- or me");
+        if (ImGui::IsItemHovered())
+        {
+            ImGui::BeginTooltip();
+            ImGui::Text("I am a fancy tooltip");
+            static float arr[] = { 0.6f, 0.1f, 1.0f, 0.5f, 0.92f, 0.1f, 0.2f };
+            ImGui::PlotLines("Curve", arr, IM_ARRAYSIZE(arr));
+            ImGui::EndTooltip();
+        }
+
+        ImGui::Separator();
+        ImGui::LabelText("label", "Value");
+
+        {
+            // Using the _simplified_ one-liner Combo() api here
+            // See "Combo" section for examples of how to use the more flexible BeginCombo()/EndCombo() api.
+            IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/Combo");
+            const char* items[] = { "AAAA", "BBBB", "CCCC", "DDDD", "EEEE", "FFFF", "GGGG", "HHHH", "IIIIIII", "JJJJ", "KKKKKKK" };
+            static int item_current = 0;
+            ImGui::Combo("combo", &item_current, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items));
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker(
+                "Using the simplified one-liner Combo API here.\nRefer to the \"Combo\" section below for an explanation of how to use the more flexible and general BeginCombo/EndCombo API.");
+        }
+
+        {
+            // To wire InputText() with std::string or any other custom string type,
+            // see the "Text Input > Resize Callback" section of this demo, and the misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h file.
+            IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/InputText");
+            static char str0[128] = "Hello, world!";
+            ImGui::InputText("input text", str0, IM_ARRAYSIZE(str0));
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker(
+                "USER:\n"
+                "Hold SHIFT or use mouse to select text.\n"
+                "CTRL+Left/Right to word jump.\n"
+                "CTRL+A or double-click to select all.\n"
+                "CTRL+X,CTRL+C,CTRL+V clipboard.\n"
+                "CTRL+Z,CTRL+Y undo/redo.\n"
+                "ESCAPE to revert.\n\n"
+                "PROGRAMMER:\n"
+                "You can use the ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize facility if you need to wire InputText() "
+                "to a dynamic string type. See misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h for an example (this is not demonstrated "
+                "in imgui_demo.cpp).");
+
+            static char str1[128] = "";
+            ImGui::InputTextWithHint("input text (w/ hint)", "enter text here", str1, IM_ARRAYSIZE(str1));
+
+            IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/InputInt, InputFloat");
+            static int i0 = 123;
+            ImGui::InputInt("input int", &i0);
+
+            static float f0 = 0.001f;
+            ImGui::InputFloat("input float", &f0, 0.01f, 1.0f, "%.3f");
+
+            static double d0 = 999999.00000001;
+            ImGui::InputDouble("input double", &d0, 0.01f, 1.0f, "%.8f");
+
+            static float f1 = 1.e10f;
+            ImGui::InputFloat("input scientific", &f1, 0.0f, 0.0f, "%e");
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker(
+                "You can input value using the scientific notation,\n"
+                "  e.g. \"1e+8\" becomes \"100000000\".");
+
+            static float vec4a[4] = { 0.10f, 0.20f, 0.30f, 0.44f };
+            ImGui::InputFloat3("input float3", vec4a);
+        }
+
+        {
+            IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/DragInt, DragFloat");
+            static int i1 = 50, i2 = 42;
+            ImGui::DragInt("drag int", &i1, 1);
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker(
+                "Click and drag to edit value.\n"
+                "Hold SHIFT/ALT for faster/slower edit.\n"
+                "Double-click or CTRL+click to input value.");
+
+            ImGui::DragInt("drag int 0..100", &i2, 1, 0, 100, "%d%%", ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp);
+
+            static float f1 = 1.00f, f2 = 0.0067f;
+            ImGui::DragFloat("drag float", &f1, 0.005f);
+            ImGui::DragFloat("drag small float", &f2, 0.0001f, 0.0f, 0.0f, "%.06f ns");
+        }
+
+        {
+            IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/SliderInt, SliderFloat");
+            static int i1 = 0;
+            ImGui::SliderInt("slider int", &i1, -1, 3);
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("CTRL+click to input value.");
+
+            static float f1 = 0.123f, f2 = 0.0f;
+            ImGui::SliderFloat("slider float", &f1, 0.0f, 1.0f, "ratio = %.3f");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat("slider float (log)", &f2, -10.0f, 10.0f, "%.4f", ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic);
+
+            IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/SliderAngle");
+            static float angle = 0.0f;
+            ImGui::SliderAngle("slider angle", &angle);
+
+            // Using the format string to display a name instead of an integer.
+            // Here we completely omit '%d' from the format string, so it'll only display a name.
+            // This technique can also be used with DragInt().
+            IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/Slider (enum)");
+            enum Element { Element_Fire, Element_Earth, Element_Air, Element_Water, Element_COUNT };
+            static int elem = Element_Fire;
+            const char* elems_names[Element_COUNT] = { "Fire", "Earth", "Air", "Water" };
+            const char* elem_name = (elem >= 0 && elem < Element_COUNT) ? elems_names[elem] : "Unknown";
+            ImGui::SliderInt("slider enum", &elem, 0, Element_COUNT - 1, elem_name);
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Using the format string parameter to display a name instead of the underlying integer.");
+        }
+
+        {
+            IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/ColorEdit3, ColorEdit4");
+            static float col1[3] = { 1.0f, 0.0f, 0.2f };
+            static float col2[4] = { 0.4f, 0.7f, 0.0f, 0.5f };
+            ImGui::ColorEdit3("color 1", col1);
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker(
+                "Click on the color square to open a color picker.\n"
+                "Click and hold to use drag and drop.\n"
+                "Right-click on the color square to show options.\n"
+                "CTRL+click on individual component to input value.\n");
+
+            ImGui::ColorEdit4("color 2", col2);
+        }
+
+        {
+            // Using the _simplified_ one-liner ListBox() api here
+            // See "List boxes" section for examples of how to use the more flexible BeginListBox()/EndListBox() api.
+            IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Basic/ListBox");
+            const char* items[] = { "Apple", "Banana", "Cherry", "Kiwi", "Mango", "Orange", "Pineapple", "Strawberry", "Watermelon" };
+            static int item_current = 1;
+            ImGui::ListBox("listbox", &item_current, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items), 4);
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker(
+                "Using the simplified one-liner ListBox API here.\nRefer to the \"List boxes\" section below for an explanation of how to use the more flexible and general BeginListBox/EndListBox API.");
+        }
+
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    // Testing ImGuiOnceUponAFrame helper.
+    //static ImGuiOnceUponAFrame once;
+    //for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++)
+    //    if (once)
+    //        ImGui::Text("This will be displayed only once.");
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Trees");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Trees"))
+    {
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Trees/Basic trees");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Basic trees"))
+        {
+            for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++)
+            {
+                // Use SetNextItemOpen() so set the default state of a node to be open. We could
+                // also use TreeNodeEx() with the ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen flag to achieve the same thing!
+                if (i == 0)
+                    ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(true, ImGuiCond_Once);
+
+                if (ImGui::TreeNode((void*)(intptr_t)i, "Child %d", i))
+                {
+                    ImGui::Text("blah blah");
+                    ImGui::SameLine();
+                    if (ImGui::SmallButton("button")) {}
+                    ImGui::TreePop();
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Trees/Advanced, with Selectable nodes");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Advanced, with Selectable nodes"))
+        {
+            HelpMarker(
+                "This is a more typical looking tree with selectable nodes.\n"
+                "Click to select, CTRL+Click to toggle, click on arrows or double-click to open.");
+            static ImGuiTreeNodeFlags base_flags = ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAvailWidth;
+            static bool align_label_with_current_x_position = false;
+            static bool test_drag_and_drop = false;
+            ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow",       &base_flags, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow);
+            ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick", &base_flags, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick);
+            ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAvailWidth",    &base_flags, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAvailWidth); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Extend hit area to all available width instead of allowing more items to be laid out after the node.");
+            ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth",     &base_flags, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth);
+            ImGui::Checkbox("Align label with current X position", &align_label_with_current_x_position);
+            ImGui::Checkbox("Test tree node as drag source", &test_drag_and_drop);
+            ImGui::Text("Hello!");
+            if (align_label_with_current_x_position)
+                ImGui::Unindent(ImGui::GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing());
+
+            // 'selection_mask' is dumb representation of what may be user-side selection state.
+            //  You may retain selection state inside or outside your objects in whatever format you see fit.
+            // 'node_clicked' is temporary storage of what node we have clicked to process selection at the end
+            /// of the loop. May be a pointer to your own node type, etc.
+            static int selection_mask = (1 << 2);
+            int node_clicked = -1;
+            for (int i = 0; i < 6; i++)
+            {
+                // Disable the default "open on single-click behavior" + set Selected flag according to our selection.
+                // To alter selection we use IsItemClicked() && !IsItemToggledOpen(), so clicking on an arrow doesn't alter selection.
+                ImGuiTreeNodeFlags node_flags = base_flags;
+                const bool is_selected = (selection_mask & (1 << i)) != 0;
+                if (is_selected)
+                    node_flags |= ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Selected;
+                if (i < 3)
+                {
+                    // Items 0..2 are Tree Node
+                    bool node_open = ImGui::TreeNodeEx((void*)(intptr_t)i, node_flags, "Selectable Node %d", i);
+                    if (ImGui::IsItemClicked() && !ImGui::IsItemToggledOpen())
+                        node_clicked = i;
+                    if (test_drag_and_drop && ImGui::BeginDragDropSource())
+                    {
+                        ImGui::SetDragDropPayload("_TREENODE", NULL, 0);
+                        ImGui::Text("This is a drag and drop source");
+                        ImGui::EndDragDropSource();
+                    }
+                    if (node_open)
+                    {
+                        ImGui::BulletText("Blah blah\nBlah Blah");
+                        ImGui::TreePop();
+                    }
+                }
+                else
+                {
+                    // Items 3..5 are Tree Leaves
+                    // The only reason we use TreeNode at all is to allow selection of the leaf. Otherwise we can
+                    // use BulletText() or advance the cursor by GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing() and call Text().
+                    node_flags |= ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen; // ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet
+                    ImGui::TreeNodeEx((void*)(intptr_t)i, node_flags, "Selectable Leaf %d", i);
+                    if (ImGui::IsItemClicked() && !ImGui::IsItemToggledOpen())
+                        node_clicked = i;
+                    if (test_drag_and_drop && ImGui::BeginDragDropSource())
+                    {
+                        ImGui::SetDragDropPayload("_TREENODE", NULL, 0);
+                        ImGui::Text("This is a drag and drop source");
+                        ImGui::EndDragDropSource();
+                    }
+                }
+            }
+            if (node_clicked != -1)
+            {
+                // Update selection state
+                // (process outside of tree loop to avoid visual inconsistencies during the clicking frame)
+                if (ImGui::GetIO().KeyCtrl)
+                    selection_mask ^= (1 << node_clicked);          // CTRL+click to toggle
+                else //if (!(selection_mask & (1 << node_clicked))) // Depending on selection behavior you want, may want to preserve selection when clicking on item that is part of the selection
+                    selection_mask = (1 << node_clicked);           // Click to single-select
+            }
+            if (align_label_with_current_x_position)
+                ImGui::Indent(ImGui::GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing());
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Collapsing Headers");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Collapsing Headers"))
+    {
+        static bool closable_group = true;
+        ImGui::Checkbox("Show 2nd header", &closable_group);
+        if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Header", ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_None))
+        {
+            ImGui::Text("IsItemHovered: %d", ImGui::IsItemHovered());
+            for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++)
+                ImGui::Text("Some content %d", i);
+        }
+        if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Header with a close button", &closable_group))
+        {
+            ImGui::Text("IsItemHovered: %d", ImGui::IsItemHovered());
+            for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++)
+                ImGui::Text("More content %d", i);
+        }
+        /*
+        if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Header with a bullet", ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet))
+            ImGui::Text("IsItemHovered: %d", ImGui::IsItemHovered());
+        */
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Bullets");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Bullets"))
+    {
+        ImGui::BulletText("Bullet point 1");
+        ImGui::BulletText("Bullet point 2\nOn multiple lines");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Tree node"))
+        {
+            ImGui::BulletText("Another bullet point");
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+        ImGui::Bullet(); ImGui::Text("Bullet point 3 (two calls)");
+        ImGui::Bullet(); ImGui::SmallButton("Button");
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Text");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Text"))
+    {
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Text/Colored Text");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Colorful Text"))
+        {
+            // Using shortcut. You can use PushStyleColor()/PopStyleColor() for more flexibility.
+            ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1.0f, 0.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f), "Pink");
+            ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1.0f, 1.0f, 0.0f, 1.0f), "Yellow");
+            ImGui::TextDisabled("Disabled");
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("The TextDisabled color is stored in ImGuiStyle.");
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Text/Word Wrapping");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Word Wrapping"))
+        {
+            // Using shortcut. You can use PushTextWrapPos()/PopTextWrapPos() for more flexibility.
+            ImGui::TextWrapped(
+                "This text should automatically wrap on the edge of the window. The current implementation "
+                "for text wrapping follows simple rules suitable for English and possibly other languages.");
+            ImGui::Spacing();
+
+            static float wrap_width = 200.0f;
+            ImGui::SliderFloat("Wrap width", &wrap_width, -20, 600, "%.0f");
+
+            ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList();
+            for (int n = 0; n < 2; n++)
+            {
+                ImGui::Text("Test paragraph %d:", n);
+                ImVec2 pos = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
+                ImVec2 marker_min = ImVec2(pos.x + wrap_width, pos.y);
+                ImVec2 marker_max = ImVec2(pos.x + wrap_width + 10, pos.y + ImGui::GetTextLineHeight());
+                ImGui::PushTextWrapPos(ImGui::GetCursorPos().x + wrap_width);
+                if (n == 0)
+                    ImGui::Text("The lazy dog is a good dog. This paragraph should fit within %.0f pixels. Testing a 1 character word. The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.", wrap_width);
+                else
+                    ImGui::Text("aaaaaaaa bbbbbbbb, c cccccccc,dddddddd. d eeeeeeee   ffffffff. gggggggg!hhhhhhhh");
+
+                // Draw actual text bounding box, following by marker of our expected limit (should not overlap!)
+                draw_list->AddRect(ImGui::GetItemRectMin(), ImGui::GetItemRectMax(), IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255));
+                draw_list->AddRectFilled(marker_min, marker_max, IM_COL32(255, 0, 255, 255));
+                ImGui::PopTextWrapPos();
+            }
+
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Text/UTF-8 Text");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("UTF-8 Text"))
+        {
+            // UTF-8 test with Japanese characters
+            // (Needs a suitable font? Try "Google Noto" or "Arial Unicode". See docs/FONTS.md for details.)
+            // - From C++11 you can use the u8"my text" syntax to encode literal strings as UTF-8
+            // - For earlier compiler, you may be able to encode your sources as UTF-8 (e.g. in Visual Studio, you
+            //   can save your source files as 'UTF-8 without signature').
+            // - FOR THIS DEMO FILE ONLY, BECAUSE WE WANT TO SUPPORT OLD COMPILERS, WE ARE *NOT* INCLUDING RAW UTF-8
+            //   CHARACTERS IN THIS SOURCE FILE. Instead we are encoding a few strings with hexadecimal constants.
+            //   Don't do this in your application! Please use u8"text in any language" in your application!
+            // Note that characters values are preserved even by InputText() if the font cannot be displayed,
+            // so you can safely copy & paste garbled characters into another application.
+            ImGui::TextWrapped(
+                "CJK text will only appears if the font was loaded with the appropriate CJK character ranges. "
+                "Call io.Fonts->AddFontFromFileTTF() manually to load extra character ranges. "
+                "Read docs/FONTS.md for details.");
+            ImGui::Text("Hiragana: \xe3\x81\x8b\xe3\x81\x8d\xe3\x81\x8f\xe3\x81\x91\xe3\x81\x93 (kakikukeko)"); // Normally we would use u8"blah blah" with the proper characters directly in the string.
+            ImGui::Text("Kanjis: \xe6\x97\xa5\xe6\x9c\xac\xe8\xaa\x9e (nihongo)");
+            static char buf[32] = "\xe6\x97\xa5\xe6\x9c\xac\xe8\xaa\x9e";
+            //static char buf[32] = u8"NIHONGO"; // <- this is how you would write it with C++11, using real kanjis
+            ImGui::InputText("UTF-8 input", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf));
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Images");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Images"))
+    {
+        ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+        ImGui::TextWrapped(
+            "Below we are displaying the font texture (which is the only texture we have access to in this demo). "
+            "Use the 'ImTextureID' type as storage to pass pointers or identifier to your own texture data. "
+            "Hover the texture for a zoomed view!");
+
+        // Below we are displaying the font texture because it is the only texture we have access to inside the demo!
+        // Remember that ImTextureID is just storage for whatever you want it to be. It is essentially a value that
+        // will be passed to the rendering backend via the ImDrawCmd structure.
+        // If you use one of the default imgui_impl_XXXX.cpp rendering backend, they all have comments at the top
+        // of their respective source file to specify what they expect to be stored in ImTextureID, for example:
+        // - The imgui_impl_dx11.cpp renderer expect a 'ID3D11ShaderResourceView*' pointer
+        // - The imgui_impl_opengl3.cpp renderer expect a GLuint OpenGL texture identifier, etc.
+        // More:
+        // - If you decided that ImTextureID = MyEngineTexture*, then you can pass your MyEngineTexture* pointers
+        //   to ImGui::Image(), and gather width/height through your own functions, etc.
+        // - You can use ShowMetricsWindow() to inspect the draw data that are being passed to your renderer,
+        //   it will help you debug issues if you are confused about it.
+        // - Consider using the lower-level ImDrawList::AddImage() API, via ImGui::GetWindowDrawList()->AddImage().
+        // - Read https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/blob/master/docs/FAQ.md
+        // - Read https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Image-Loading-and-Displaying-Examples
+        ImTextureID my_tex_id = io.Fonts->TexID;
+        float my_tex_w = (float)io.Fonts->TexWidth;
+        float my_tex_h = (float)io.Fonts->TexHeight;
+        {
+            ImGui::Text("%.0fx%.0f", my_tex_w, my_tex_h);
+            ImVec2 pos = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
+            ImVec2 uv_min = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);                 // Top-left
+            ImVec2 uv_max = ImVec2(1.0f, 1.0f);                 // Lower-right
+            ImVec4 tint_col = ImVec4(1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f);   // No tint
+            ImVec4 border_col = ImVec4(1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f, 0.5f); // 50% opaque white
+            ImGui::Image(my_tex_id, ImVec2(my_tex_w, my_tex_h), uv_min, uv_max, tint_col, border_col);
+            if (ImGui::IsItemHovered())
+            {
+                ImGui::BeginTooltip();
+                float region_sz = 32.0f;
+                float region_x = io.MousePos.x - pos.x - region_sz * 0.5f;
+                float region_y = io.MousePos.y - pos.y - region_sz * 0.5f;
+                float zoom = 4.0f;
+                if (region_x < 0.0f) { region_x = 0.0f; }
+                else if (region_x > my_tex_w - region_sz) { region_x = my_tex_w - region_sz; }
+                if (region_y < 0.0f) { region_y = 0.0f; }
+                else if (region_y > my_tex_h - region_sz) { region_y = my_tex_h - region_sz; }
+                ImGui::Text("Min: (%.2f, %.2f)", region_x, region_y);
+                ImGui::Text("Max: (%.2f, %.2f)", region_x + region_sz, region_y + region_sz);
+                ImVec2 uv0 = ImVec2((region_x) / my_tex_w, (region_y) / my_tex_h);
+                ImVec2 uv1 = ImVec2((region_x + region_sz) / my_tex_w, (region_y + region_sz) / my_tex_h);
+                ImGui::Image(my_tex_id, ImVec2(region_sz * zoom, region_sz * zoom), uv0, uv1, tint_col, border_col);
+                ImGui::EndTooltip();
+            }
+        }
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Images/Textured buttons");
+        ImGui::TextWrapped("And now some textured buttons..");
+        static int pressed_count = 0;
+        for (int i = 0; i < 8; i++)
+        {
+            ImGui::PushID(i);
+            int frame_padding = -1 + i;                             // -1 == uses default padding (style.FramePadding)
+            ImVec2 size = ImVec2(32.0f, 32.0f);                     // Size of the image we want to make visible
+            ImVec2 uv0 = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);                        // UV coordinates for lower-left
+            ImVec2 uv1 = ImVec2(32.0f / my_tex_w, 32.0f / my_tex_h);// UV coordinates for (32,32) in our texture
+            ImVec4 bg_col = ImVec4(0.0f, 0.0f, 0.0f, 1.0f);         // Black background
+            ImVec4 tint_col = ImVec4(1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f);       // No tint
+            if (ImGui::ImageButton(my_tex_id, size, uv0, uv1, frame_padding, bg_col, tint_col))
+                pressed_count += 1;
+            ImGui::PopID();
+            ImGui::SameLine();
+        }
+        ImGui::NewLine();
+        ImGui::Text("Pressed %d times.", pressed_count);
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Combo");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Combo"))
+    {
+        // Expose flags as checkbox for the demo
+        static ImGuiComboFlags flags = 0;
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiComboFlags_PopupAlignLeft", &flags, ImGuiComboFlags_PopupAlignLeft);
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Only makes a difference if the popup is larger than the combo");
+        if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton", &flags, ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton))
+            flags &= ~ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview;     // Clear the other flag, as we cannot combine both
+        if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview", &flags, ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview))
+            flags &= ~ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton; // Clear the other flag, as we cannot combine both
+
+        // Using the generic BeginCombo() API, you have full control over how to display the combo contents.
+        // (your selection data could be an index, a pointer to the object, an id for the object, a flag intrusively
+        // stored in the object itself, etc.)
+        const char* items[] = { "AAAA", "BBBB", "CCCC", "DDDD", "EEEE", "FFFF", "GGGG", "HHHH", "IIII", "JJJJ", "KKKK", "LLLLLLL", "MMMM", "OOOOOOO" };
+        static int item_current_idx = 0; // Here we store our selection data as an index.
+        const char* combo_preview_value = items[item_current_idx];  // Pass in the preview value visible before opening the combo (it could be anything)
+        if (ImGui::BeginCombo("combo 1", combo_preview_value, flags))
+        {
+            for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(items); n++)
+            {
+                const bool is_selected = (item_current_idx == n);
+                if (ImGui::Selectable(items[n], is_selected))
+                    item_current_idx = n;
+
+                // Set the initial focus when opening the combo (scrolling + keyboard navigation focus)
+                if (is_selected)
+                    ImGui::SetItemDefaultFocus();
+            }
+            ImGui::EndCombo();
+        }
+
+        // Simplified one-liner Combo() API, using values packed in a single constant string
+        // This is a convenience for when the selection set is small and known at compile-time.
+        static int item_current_2 = 0;
+        ImGui::Combo("combo 2 (one-liner)", &item_current_2, "aaaa\0bbbb\0cccc\0dddd\0eeee\0\0");
+
+        // Simplified one-liner Combo() using an array of const char*
+        // This is not very useful (may obsolete): prefer using BeginCombo()/EndCombo() for full control.
+        static int item_current_3 = -1; // If the selection isn't within 0..count, Combo won't display a preview
+        ImGui::Combo("combo 3 (array)", &item_current_3, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items));
+
+        // Simplified one-liner Combo() using an accessor function
+        struct Funcs { static bool ItemGetter(void* data, int n, const char** out_str) { *out_str = ((const char**)data)[n]; return true; } };
+        static int item_current_4 = 0;
+        ImGui::Combo("combo 4 (function)", &item_current_4, &Funcs::ItemGetter, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items));
+
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/List Boxes");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("List boxes"))
+    {
+        // Using the generic BeginListBox() API, you have full control over how to display the combo contents.
+        // (your selection data could be an index, a pointer to the object, an id for the object, a flag intrusively
+        // stored in the object itself, etc.)
+        const char* items[] = { "AAAA", "BBBB", "CCCC", "DDDD", "EEEE", "FFFF", "GGGG", "HHHH", "IIII", "JJJJ", "KKKK", "LLLLLLL", "MMMM", "OOOOOOO" };
+        static int item_current_idx = 0; // Here we store our selection data as an index.
+        if (ImGui::BeginListBox("listbox 1"))
+        {
+            for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(items); n++)
+            {
+                const bool is_selected = (item_current_idx == n);
+                if (ImGui::Selectable(items[n], is_selected))
+                    item_current_idx = n;
+
+                // Set the initial focus when opening the combo (scrolling + keyboard navigation focus)
+                if (is_selected)
+                    ImGui::SetItemDefaultFocus();
+            }
+            ImGui::EndListBox();
+        }
+
+        // Custom size: use all width, 5 items tall
+        ImGui::Text("Full-width:");
+        if (ImGui::BeginListBox("##listbox 2", ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, 5 * ImGui::GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing())))
+        {
+            for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(items); n++)
+            {
+                const bool is_selected = (item_current_idx == n);
+                if (ImGui::Selectable(items[n], is_selected))
+                    item_current_idx = n;
+
+                // Set the initial focus when opening the combo (scrolling + keyboard navigation focus)
+                if (is_selected)
+                    ImGui::SetItemDefaultFocus();
+            }
+            ImGui::EndListBox();
+        }
+
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Selectables");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Selectables"))
+    {
+        // Selectable() has 2 overloads:
+        // - The one taking "bool selected" as a read-only selection information.
+        //   When Selectable() has been clicked it returns true and you can alter selection state accordingly.
+        // - The one taking "bool* p_selected" as a read-write selection information (convenient in some cases)
+        // The earlier is more flexible, as in real application your selection may be stored in many different ways
+        // and not necessarily inside a bool value (e.g. in flags within objects, as an external list, etc).
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Selectables/Basic");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Basic"))
+        {
+            static bool selection[5] = { false, true, false, false, false };
+            ImGui::Selectable("1. I am selectable", &selection[0]);
+            ImGui::Selectable("2. I am selectable", &selection[1]);
+            ImGui::Text("(I am not selectable)");
+            ImGui::Selectable("4. I am selectable", &selection[3]);
+            if (ImGui::Selectable("5. I am double clickable", selection[4], ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowDoubleClick))
+                if (ImGui::IsMouseDoubleClicked(0))
+                    selection[4] = !selection[4];
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Selectables/Single Selection");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Selection State: Single Selection"))
+        {
+            static int selected = -1;
+            for (int n = 0; n < 5; n++)
+            {
+                char buf[32];
+                sprintf(buf, "Object %d", n);
+                if (ImGui::Selectable(buf, selected == n))
+                    selected = n;
+            }
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Selectables/Multiple Selection");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Selection State: Multiple Selection"))
+        {
+            HelpMarker("Hold CTRL and click to select multiple items.");
+            static bool selection[5] = { false, false, false, false, false };
+            for (int n = 0; n < 5; n++)
+            {
+                char buf[32];
+                sprintf(buf, "Object %d", n);
+                if (ImGui::Selectable(buf, selection[n]))
+                {
+                    if (!ImGui::GetIO().KeyCtrl)    // Clear selection when CTRL is not held
+                        memset(selection, 0, sizeof(selection));
+                    selection[n] ^= 1;
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Selectables/Rendering more text into the same line");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Rendering more text into the same line"))
+        {
+            // Using the Selectable() override that takes "bool* p_selected" parameter,
+            // this function toggle your bool value automatically.
+            static bool selected[3] = { false, false, false };
+            ImGui::Selectable("main.c",    &selected[0]); ImGui::SameLine(300); ImGui::Text(" 2,345 bytes");
+            ImGui::Selectable("Hello.cpp", &selected[1]); ImGui::SameLine(300); ImGui::Text("12,345 bytes");
+            ImGui::Selectable("Hello.h",   &selected[2]); ImGui::SameLine(300); ImGui::Text(" 2,345 bytes");
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Selectables/In columns");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("In columns"))
+        {
+            static bool selected[10] = {};
+
+            if (ImGui::BeginTable("split1", 3, ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiTableFlags_Borders))
+            {
+                for (int i = 0; i < 10; i++)
+                {
+                    char label[32];
+                    sprintf(label, "Item %d", i);
+                    ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                    ImGui::Selectable(label, &selected[i]); // FIXME-TABLE: Selection overlap
+                }
+                ImGui::EndTable();
+            }
+            ImGui::Spacing();
+            if (ImGui::BeginTable("split2", 3, ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiTableFlags_Borders))
+            {
+                for (int i = 0; i < 10; i++)
+                {
+                    char label[32];
+                    sprintf(label, "Item %d", i);
+                    ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                    ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                    ImGui::Selectable(label, &selected[i], ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns);
+                    ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                    ImGui::Text("Some other contents");
+                    ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                    ImGui::Text("123456");
+                }
+                ImGui::EndTable();
+            }
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Selectables/Grid");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Grid"))
+        {
+            static char selected[4][4] = { { 1, 0, 0, 0 }, { 0, 1, 0, 0 }, { 0, 0, 1, 0 }, { 0, 0, 0, 1 } };
+
+            // Add in a bit of silly fun...
+            const float time = (float)ImGui::GetTime();
+            const bool winning_state = memchr(selected, 0, sizeof(selected)) == NULL; // If all cells are selected...
+            if (winning_state)
+                ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_SelectableTextAlign, ImVec2(0.5f + 0.5f * cosf(time * 2.0f), 0.5f + 0.5f * sinf(time * 3.0f)));
+
+            for (int y = 0; y < 4; y++)
+                for (int x = 0; x < 4; x++)
+                {
+                    if (x > 0)
+                        ImGui::SameLine();
+                    ImGui::PushID(y * 4 + x);
+                    if (ImGui::Selectable("Sailor", selected[y][x] != 0, 0, ImVec2(50, 50)))
+                    {
+                        // Toggle clicked cell + toggle neighbors
+                        selected[y][x] ^= 1;
+                        if (x > 0) { selected[y][x - 1] ^= 1; }
+                        if (x < 3) { selected[y][x + 1] ^= 1; }
+                        if (y > 0) { selected[y - 1][x] ^= 1; }
+                        if (y < 3) { selected[y + 1][x] ^= 1; }
+                    }
+                    ImGui::PopID();
+                }
+
+            if (winning_state)
+                ImGui::PopStyleVar();
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Selectables/Alignment");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Alignment"))
+        {
+            HelpMarker(
+                "By default, Selectables uses style.SelectableTextAlign but it can be overridden on a per-item "
+                "basis using PushStyleVar(). You'll probably want to always keep your default situation to "
+                "left-align otherwise it becomes difficult to layout multiple items on a same line");
+            static bool selected[3 * 3] = { true, false, true, false, true, false, true, false, true };
+            for (int y = 0; y < 3; y++)
+            {
+                for (int x = 0; x < 3; x++)
+                {
+                    ImVec2 alignment = ImVec2((float)x / 2.0f, (float)y / 2.0f);
+                    char name[32];
+                    sprintf(name, "(%.1f,%.1f)", alignment.x, alignment.y);
+                    if (x > 0) ImGui::SameLine();
+                    ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_SelectableTextAlign, alignment);
+                    ImGui::Selectable(name, &selected[3 * y + x], ImGuiSelectableFlags_None, ImVec2(80, 80));
+                    ImGui::PopStyleVar();
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    // To wire InputText() with std::string or any other custom string type,
+    // see the "Text Input > Resize Callback" section of this demo, and the misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h file.
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Text Input");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Text Input"))
+    {
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Text Input/Multi-line Text Input");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Multi-line Text Input"))
+        {
+            // Note: we are using a fixed-sized buffer for simplicity here. See ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize
+            // and the code in misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h for how to setup InputText() for dynamically resizing strings.
+            static char text[1024 * 16] =
+                "/*\n"
+                " The Pentium F00F bug, shorthand for F0 0F C7 C8,\n"
+                " the hexadecimal encoding of one offending instruction,\n"
+                " more formally, the invalid operand with locked CMPXCHG8B\n"
+                " instruction bug, is a design flaw in the majority of\n"
+                " Intel Pentium, Pentium MMX, and Pentium OverDrive\n"
+                " processors (all in the P5 microarchitecture).\n"
+                "*/\n\n"
+                "label:\n"
+                "\tlock cmpxchg8b eax\n";
+
+            static ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput;
+            HelpMarker("You can use the ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize facility if you need to wire InputTextMultiline() to a dynamic string type. See misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h for an example. (This is not demonstrated in imgui_demo.cpp because we don't want to include <string> in here)");
+            ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly", &flags, ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly);
+            ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput", &flags, ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput);
+            ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiInputTextFlags_CtrlEnterForNewLine", &flags, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CtrlEnterForNewLine);
+            ImGui::InputTextMultiline("##source", text, IM_ARRAYSIZE(text), ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, ImGui::GetTextLineHeight() * 16), flags);
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Text Input/Filtered Text Input");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Filtered Text Input"))
+        {
+            struct TextFilters
+            {
+                // Return 0 (pass) if the character is 'i' or 'm' or 'g' or 'u' or 'i'
+                static int FilterImGuiLetters(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData* data)
+                {
+                    if (data->EventChar < 256 && strchr("imgui", (char)data->EventChar))
+                        return 0;
+                    return 1;
+                }
+            };
+
+            static char buf1[64] = ""; ImGui::InputText("default",     buf1, 64);
+            static char buf2[64] = ""; ImGui::InputText("decimal",     buf2, 64, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal);
+            static char buf3[64] = ""; ImGui::InputText("hexadecimal", buf3, 64, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase);
+            static char buf4[64] = ""; ImGui::InputText("uppercase",   buf4, 64, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase);
+            static char buf5[64] = ""; ImGui::InputText("no blank",    buf5, 64, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank);
+            static char buf6[64] = ""; ImGui::InputText("\"imgui\" letters", buf6, 64, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter, TextFilters::FilterImGuiLetters);
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Text Input/Password input");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Password Input"))
+        {
+            static char password[64] = "password123";
+            ImGui::InputText("password", password, IM_ARRAYSIZE(password), ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password);
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Display all characters as '*'.\nDisable clipboard cut and copy.\nDisable logging.\n");
+            ImGui::InputTextWithHint("password (w/ hint)", "<password>", password, IM_ARRAYSIZE(password), ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password);
+            ImGui::InputText("password (clear)", password, IM_ARRAYSIZE(password));
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Completion, History, Edit Callbacks"))
+        {
+            struct Funcs
+            {
+                static int MyCallback(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData* data)
+                {
+                    if (data->EventFlag == ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion)
+                    {
+                        data->InsertChars(data->CursorPos, "..");
+                    }
+                    else if (data->EventFlag == ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory)
+                    {
+                        if (data->EventKey == ImGuiKey_UpArrow)
+                        {
+                            data->DeleteChars(0, data->BufTextLen);
+                            data->InsertChars(0, "Pressed Up!");
+                            data->SelectAll();
+                        }
+                        else if (data->EventKey == ImGuiKey_DownArrow)
+                        {
+                            data->DeleteChars(0, data->BufTextLen);
+                            data->InsertChars(0, "Pressed Down!");
+                            data->SelectAll();
+                        }
+                    }
+                    else if (data->EventFlag == ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackEdit)
+                    {
+                        // Toggle casing of first character
+                        char c = data->Buf[0];
+                        if ((c >= 'a' && c <= 'z') || (c >= 'A' && c <= 'Z')) data->Buf[0] ^= 32;
+                        data->BufDirty = true;
+
+                        // Increment a counter
+                        int* p_int = (int*)data->UserData;
+                        *p_int = *p_int + 1;
+                    }
+                    return 0;
+                }
+            };
+            static char buf1[64];
+            ImGui::InputText("Completion", buf1, 64, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion, Funcs::MyCallback);
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Here we append \"..\" each time Tab is pressed. See 'Examples>Console' for a more meaningful demonstration of using this callback.");
+
+            static char buf2[64];
+            ImGui::InputText("History", buf2, 64, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory, Funcs::MyCallback);
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Here we replace and select text each time Up/Down are pressed. See 'Examples>Console' for a more meaningful demonstration of using this callback.");
+
+            static char buf3[64];
+            static int edit_count = 0;
+            ImGui::InputText("Edit", buf3, 64, ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackEdit, Funcs::MyCallback, (void*)&edit_count);
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Here we toggle the casing of the first character on every edits + count edits.");
+            ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::Text("(%d)", edit_count);
+
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Text Input/Resize Callback");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Resize Callback"))
+        {
+            // To wire InputText() with std::string or any other custom string type,
+            // you can use the ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize flag + create a custom ImGui::InputText() wrapper
+            // using your preferred type. See misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h for an implementation of this using std::string.
+            HelpMarker(
+                "Using ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize to wire your custom string type to InputText().\n\n"
+                "See misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h for an implementation of this for std::string.");
+            struct Funcs
+            {
+                static int MyResizeCallback(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData* data)
+                {
+                    if (data->EventFlag == ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize)
+                    {
+                        ImVector<char>* my_str = (ImVector<char>*)data->UserData;
+                        IM_ASSERT(my_str->begin() == data->Buf);
+                        my_str->resize(data->BufSize); // NB: On resizing calls, generally data->BufSize == data->BufTextLen + 1
+                        data->Buf = my_str->begin();
+                    }
+                    return 0;
+                }
+
+                // Note: Because ImGui:: is a namespace you would typically add your own function into the namespace.
+                // For example, you code may declare a function 'ImGui::InputText(const char* label, MyString* my_str)'
+                static bool MyInputTextMultiline(const char* label, ImVector<char>* my_str, const ImVec2& size = ImVec2(0, 0), ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = 0)
+                {
+                    IM_ASSERT((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize) == 0);
+                    return ImGui::InputTextMultiline(label, my_str->begin(), (size_t)my_str->size(), size, flags | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize, Funcs::MyResizeCallback, (void*)my_str);
+                }
+            };
+
+            // For this demo we are using ImVector as a string container.
+            // Note that because we need to store a terminating zero character, our size/capacity are 1 more
+            // than usually reported by a typical string class.
+            static ImVector<char> my_str;
+            if (my_str.empty())
+                my_str.push_back(0);
+            Funcs::MyInputTextMultiline("##MyStr", &my_str, ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, ImGui::GetTextLineHeight() * 16));
+            ImGui::Text("Data: %p\nSize: %d\nCapacity: %d", (void*)my_str.begin(), my_str.size(), my_str.capacity());
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    // Tabs
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Tabs");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Tabs"))
+    {
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Tabs/Basic");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Basic"))
+        {
+            ImGuiTabBarFlags tab_bar_flags = ImGuiTabBarFlags_None;
+            if (ImGui::BeginTabBar("MyTabBar", tab_bar_flags))
+            {
+                if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Avocado"))
+                {
+                    ImGui::Text("This is the Avocado tab!\nblah blah blah blah blah");
+                    ImGui::EndTabItem();
+                }
+                if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Broccoli"))
+                {
+                    ImGui::Text("This is the Broccoli tab!\nblah blah blah blah blah");
+                    ImGui::EndTabItem();
+                }
+                if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Cucumber"))
+                {
+                    ImGui::Text("This is the Cucumber tab!\nblah blah blah blah blah");
+                    ImGui::EndTabItem();
+                }
+                ImGui::EndTabBar();
+            }
+            ImGui::Separator();
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Tabs/Advanced & Close Button");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Advanced & Close Button"))
+        {
+            // Expose a couple of the available flags. In most cases you may just call BeginTabBar() with no flags (0).
+            static ImGuiTabBarFlags tab_bar_flags = ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable;
+            ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable", &tab_bar_flags, ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable);
+            ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTabBarFlags_AutoSelectNewTabs", &tab_bar_flags, ImGuiTabBarFlags_AutoSelectNewTabs);
+            ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTabBarFlags_TabListPopupButton", &tab_bar_flags, ImGuiTabBarFlags_TabListPopupButton);
+            ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton", &tab_bar_flags, ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton);
+            if ((tab_bar_flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyMask_) == 0)
+                tab_bar_flags |= ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyDefault_;
+            if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown", &tab_bar_flags, ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown))
+                tab_bar_flags &= ~(ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyMask_ ^ ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown);
+            if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll", &tab_bar_flags, ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll))
+                tab_bar_flags &= ~(ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyMask_ ^ ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll);
+
+            // Tab Bar
+            const char* names[4] = { "Artichoke", "Beetroot", "Celery", "Daikon" };
+            static bool opened[4] = { true, true, true, true }; // Persistent user state
+            for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(opened); n++)
+            {
+                if (n > 0) { ImGui::SameLine(); }
+                ImGui::Checkbox(names[n], &opened[n]);
+            }
+
+            // Passing a bool* to BeginTabItem() is similar to passing one to Begin():
+            // the underlying bool will be set to false when the tab is closed.
+            if (ImGui::BeginTabBar("MyTabBar", tab_bar_flags))
+            {
+                for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(opened); n++)
+                    if (opened[n] && ImGui::BeginTabItem(names[n], &opened[n], ImGuiTabItemFlags_None))
+                    {
+                        ImGui::Text("This is the %s tab!", names[n]);
+                        if (n & 1)
+                            ImGui::Text("I am an odd tab.");
+                        ImGui::EndTabItem();
+                    }
+                ImGui::EndTabBar();
+            }
+            ImGui::Separator();
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Tabs/TabItemButton & Leading-Trailing flags");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("TabItemButton & Leading/Trailing flags"))
+        {
+            static ImVector<int> active_tabs;
+            static int next_tab_id = 0;
+            if (next_tab_id == 0) // Initialize with some default tabs
+                for (int i = 0; i < 3; i++)
+                    active_tabs.push_back(next_tab_id++);
+
+            // TabItemButton() and Leading/Trailing flags are distinct features which we will demo together.
+            // (It is possible to submit regular tabs with Leading/Trailing flags, or TabItemButton tabs without Leading/Trailing flags...
+            // but they tend to make more sense together)
+            static bool show_leading_button = true;
+            static bool show_trailing_button = true;
+            ImGui::Checkbox("Show Leading TabItemButton()", &show_leading_button);
+            ImGui::Checkbox("Show Trailing TabItemButton()", &show_trailing_button);
+
+            // Expose some other flags which are useful to showcase how they interact with Leading/Trailing tabs
+            static ImGuiTabBarFlags tab_bar_flags = ImGuiTabBarFlags_AutoSelectNewTabs | ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown;
+            ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTabBarFlags_TabListPopupButton", &tab_bar_flags, ImGuiTabBarFlags_TabListPopupButton);
+            if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown", &tab_bar_flags, ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown))
+                tab_bar_flags &= ~(ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyMask_ ^ ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown);
+            if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll", &tab_bar_flags, ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll))
+                tab_bar_flags &= ~(ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyMask_ ^ ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll);
+
+            if (ImGui::BeginTabBar("MyTabBar", tab_bar_flags))
+            {
+                // Demo a Leading TabItemButton(): click the "?" button to open a menu
+                if (show_leading_button)
+                    if (ImGui::TabItemButton("?", ImGuiTabItemFlags_Leading | ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoTooltip))
+                        ImGui::OpenPopup("MyHelpMenu");
+                if (ImGui::BeginPopup("MyHelpMenu"))
+                {
+                    ImGui::Selectable("Hello!");
+                    ImGui::EndPopup();
+                }
+
+                // Demo Trailing Tabs: click the "+" button to add a new tab (in your app you may want to use a font icon instead of the "+")
+                // Note that we submit it before the regular tabs, but because of the ImGuiTabItemFlags_Trailing flag it will always appear at the end.
+                if (show_trailing_button)
+                    if (ImGui::TabItemButton("+", ImGuiTabItemFlags_Trailing | ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoTooltip))
+                        active_tabs.push_back(next_tab_id++); // Add new tab
+
+                // Submit our regular tabs
+                for (int n = 0; n < active_tabs.Size; )
+                {
+                    bool open = true;
+                    char name[16];
+                    snprintf(name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(name), "%04d", active_tabs[n]);
+                    if (ImGui::BeginTabItem(name, &open, ImGuiTabItemFlags_None))
+                    {
+                        ImGui::Text("This is the %s tab!", name);
+                        ImGui::EndTabItem();
+                    }
+
+                    if (!open)
+                        active_tabs.erase(active_tabs.Data + n);
+                    else
+                        n++;
+                }
+
+                ImGui::EndTabBar();
+            }
+            ImGui::Separator();
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    // Plot/Graph widgets are not very good.
+    // Consider using a third-party library such as ImPlot: https://github.com/epezent/implot
+    // (see others https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Useful-Extensions)
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Plotting");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Plotting"))
+    {
+        static bool animate = true;
+        ImGui::Checkbox("Animate", &animate);
+
+        // Plot as lines and plot as histogram
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Plotting/PlotLines, PlotHistogram");
+        static float arr[] = { 0.6f, 0.1f, 1.0f, 0.5f, 0.92f, 0.1f, 0.2f };
+        ImGui::PlotLines("Frame Times", arr, IM_ARRAYSIZE(arr));
+        ImGui::PlotHistogram("Histogram", arr, IM_ARRAYSIZE(arr), 0, NULL, 0.0f, 1.0f, ImVec2(0, 80.0f));
+
+        // Fill an array of contiguous float values to plot
+        // Tip: If your float aren't contiguous but part of a structure, you can pass a pointer to your first float
+        // and the sizeof() of your structure in the "stride" parameter.
+        static float values[90] = {};
+        static int values_offset = 0;
+        static double refresh_time = 0.0;
+        if (!animate || refresh_time == 0.0)
+            refresh_time = ImGui::GetTime();
+        while (refresh_time < ImGui::GetTime()) // Create data at fixed 60 Hz rate for the demo
+        {
+            static float phase = 0.0f;
+            values[values_offset] = cosf(phase);
+            values_offset = (values_offset + 1) % IM_ARRAYSIZE(values);
+            phase += 0.10f * values_offset;
+            refresh_time += 1.0f / 60.0f;
+        }
+
+        // Plots can display overlay texts
+        // (in this example, we will display an average value)
+        {
+            float average = 0.0f;
+            for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(values); n++)
+                average += values[n];
+            average /= (float)IM_ARRAYSIZE(values);
+            char overlay[32];
+            sprintf(overlay, "avg %f", average);
+            ImGui::PlotLines("Lines", values, IM_ARRAYSIZE(values), values_offset, overlay, -1.0f, 1.0f, ImVec2(0, 80.0f));
+        }
+
+        // Use functions to generate output
+        // FIXME: This is rather awkward because current plot API only pass in indices.
+        // We probably want an API passing floats and user provide sample rate/count.
+        struct Funcs
+        {
+            static float Sin(void*, int i) { return sinf(i * 0.1f); }
+            static float Saw(void*, int i) { return (i & 1) ? 1.0f : -1.0f; }
+        };
+        static int func_type = 0, display_count = 70;
+        ImGui::Separator();
+        ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 8);
+        ImGui::Combo("func", &func_type, "Sin\0Saw\0");
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::SliderInt("Sample count", &display_count, 1, 400);
+        float (*func)(void*, int) = (func_type == 0) ? Funcs::Sin : Funcs::Saw;
+        ImGui::PlotLines("Lines", func, NULL, display_count, 0, NULL, -1.0f, 1.0f, ImVec2(0, 80));
+        ImGui::PlotHistogram("Histogram", func, NULL, display_count, 0, NULL, -1.0f, 1.0f, ImVec2(0, 80));
+        ImGui::Separator();
+
+        // Animate a simple progress bar
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Plotting/ProgressBar");
+        static float progress = 0.0f, progress_dir = 1.0f;
+        if (animate)
+        {
+            progress += progress_dir * 0.4f * ImGui::GetIO().DeltaTime;
+            if (progress >= +1.1f) { progress = +1.1f; progress_dir *= -1.0f; }
+            if (progress <= -0.1f) { progress = -0.1f; progress_dir *= -1.0f; }
+        }
+
+        // Typically we would use ImVec2(-1.0f,0.0f) or ImVec2(-FLT_MIN,0.0f) to use all available width,
+        // or ImVec2(width,0.0f) for a specified width. ImVec2(0.0f,0.0f) uses ItemWidth.
+        ImGui::ProgressBar(progress, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
+        ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, ImGui::GetStyle().ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+        ImGui::Text("Progress Bar");
+
+        float progress_saturated = IM_CLAMP(progress, 0.0f, 1.0f);
+        char buf[32];
+        sprintf(buf, "%d/%d", (int)(progress_saturated * 1753), 1753);
+        ImGui::ProgressBar(progress, ImVec2(0.f, 0.f), buf);
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Color");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Color/Picker Widgets"))
+    {
+        static ImVec4 color = ImVec4(114.0f / 255.0f, 144.0f / 255.0f, 154.0f / 255.0f, 200.0f / 255.0f);
+
+        static bool alpha_preview = true;
+        static bool alpha_half_preview = false;
+        static bool drag_and_drop = true;
+        static bool options_menu = true;
+        static bool hdr = false;
+        ImGui::Checkbox("With Alpha Preview", &alpha_preview);
+        ImGui::Checkbox("With Half Alpha Preview", &alpha_half_preview);
+        ImGui::Checkbox("With Drag and Drop", &drag_and_drop);
+        ImGui::Checkbox("With Options Menu", &options_menu); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Right-click on the individual color widget to show options.");
+        ImGui::Checkbox("With HDR", &hdr); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Currently all this does is to lift the 0..1 limits on dragging widgets.");
+        ImGuiColorEditFlags misc_flags = (hdr ? ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR : 0) | (drag_and_drop ? 0 : ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop) | (alpha_half_preview ? ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf : (alpha_preview ? ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview : 0)) | (options_menu ? 0 : ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions);
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Color/ColorEdit");
+        ImGui::Text("Color widget:");
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker(
+            "Click on the color square to open a color picker.\n"
+            "CTRL+click on individual component to input value.\n");
+        ImGui::ColorEdit3("MyColor##1", (float*)&color, misc_flags);
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Color/ColorEdit (HSV, with Alpha)");
+        ImGui::Text("Color widget HSV with Alpha:");
+        ImGui::ColorEdit4("MyColor##2", (float*)&color, ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV | misc_flags);
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Color/ColorEdit (float display)");
+        ImGui::Text("Color widget with Float Display:");
+        ImGui::ColorEdit4("MyColor##2f", (float*)&color, ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float | misc_flags);
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Color/ColorButton (with Picker)");
+        ImGui::Text("Color button with Picker:");
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker(
+            "With the ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs flag you can hide all the slider/text inputs.\n"
+            "With the ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel flag you can pass a non-empty label which will only "
+            "be used for the tooltip and picker popup.");
+        ImGui::ColorEdit4("MyColor##3", (float*)&color, ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel | misc_flags);
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Color/ColorButton (with custom Picker popup)");
+        ImGui::Text("Color button with Custom Picker Popup:");
+
+        // Generate a default palette. The palette will persist and can be edited.
+        static bool saved_palette_init = true;
+        static ImVec4 saved_palette[32] = {};
+        if (saved_palette_init)
+        {
+            for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(saved_palette); n++)
+            {
+                ImGui::ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(n / 31.0f, 0.8f, 0.8f,
+                    saved_palette[n].x, saved_palette[n].y, saved_palette[n].z);
+                saved_palette[n].w = 1.0f; // Alpha
+            }
+            saved_palette_init = false;
+        }
+
+        static ImVec4 backup_color;
+        bool open_popup = ImGui::ColorButton("MyColor##3b", color, misc_flags);
+        ImGui::SameLine(0, ImGui::GetStyle().ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+        open_popup |= ImGui::Button("Palette");
+        if (open_popup)
+        {
+            ImGui::OpenPopup("mypicker");
+            backup_color = color;
+        }
+        if (ImGui::BeginPopup("mypicker"))
+        {
+            ImGui::Text("MY CUSTOM COLOR PICKER WITH AN AMAZING PALETTE!");
+            ImGui::Separator();
+            ImGui::ColorPicker4("##picker", (float*)&color, misc_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview);
+            ImGui::SameLine();
+
+            ImGui::BeginGroup(); // Lock X position
+            ImGui::Text("Current");
+            ImGui::ColorButton("##current", color, ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf, ImVec2(60, 40));
+            ImGui::Text("Previous");
+            if (ImGui::ColorButton("##previous", backup_color, ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf, ImVec2(60, 40)))
+                color = backup_color;
+            ImGui::Separator();
+            ImGui::Text("Palette");
+            for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(saved_palette); n++)
+            {
+                ImGui::PushID(n);
+                if ((n % 8) != 0)
+                    ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, ImGui::GetStyle().ItemSpacing.y);
+
+                ImGuiColorEditFlags palette_button_flags = ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip;
+                if (ImGui::ColorButton("##palette", saved_palette[n], palette_button_flags, ImVec2(20, 20)))
+                    color = ImVec4(saved_palette[n].x, saved_palette[n].y, saved_palette[n].z, color.w); // Preserve alpha!
+
+                // Allow user to drop colors into each palette entry. Note that ColorButton() is already a
+                // drag source by default, unless specifying the ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop flag.
+                if (ImGui::BeginDragDropTarget())
+                {
+                    if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = ImGui::AcceptDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F))
+                        memcpy((float*)&saved_palette[n], payload->Data, sizeof(float) * 3);
+                    if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = ImGui::AcceptDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F))
+                        memcpy((float*)&saved_palette[n], payload->Data, sizeof(float) * 4);
+                    ImGui::EndDragDropTarget();
+                }
+
+                ImGui::PopID();
+            }
+            ImGui::EndGroup();
+            ImGui::EndPopup();
+        }
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Color/ColorButton (simple)");
+        ImGui::Text("Color button only:");
+        static bool no_border = false;
+        ImGui::Checkbox("ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoBorder", &no_border);
+        ImGui::ColorButton("MyColor##3c", *(ImVec4*)&color, misc_flags | (no_border ? ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoBorder : 0), ImVec2(80, 80));
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Color/ColorPicker");
+        ImGui::Text("Color picker:");
+        static bool alpha = true;
+        static bool alpha_bar = true;
+        static bool side_preview = true;
+        static bool ref_color = false;
+        static ImVec4 ref_color_v(1.0f, 0.0f, 1.0f, 0.5f);
+        static int display_mode = 0;
+        static int picker_mode = 0;
+        ImGui::Checkbox("With Alpha", &alpha);
+        ImGui::Checkbox("With Alpha Bar", &alpha_bar);
+        ImGui::Checkbox("With Side Preview", &side_preview);
+        if (side_preview)
+        {
+            ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::Checkbox("With Ref Color", &ref_color);
+            if (ref_color)
+            {
+                ImGui::SameLine();
+                ImGui::ColorEdit4("##RefColor", &ref_color_v.x, ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs | misc_flags);
+            }
+        }
+        ImGui::Combo("Display Mode", &display_mode, "Auto/Current\0None\0RGB Only\0HSV Only\0Hex Only\0");
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker(
+            "ColorEdit defaults to displaying RGB inputs if you don't specify a display mode, "
+            "but the user can change it with a right-click on those inputs.\n\nColorPicker defaults to displaying RGB+HSV+Hex "
+            "if you don't specify a display mode.\n\nYou can change the defaults using SetColorEditOptions().");
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("When not specified explicitly (Auto/Current mode), user can right-click the picker to change mode.");
+        ImGuiColorEditFlags flags = misc_flags;
+        if (!alpha)            flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha;        // This is by default if you call ColorPicker3() instead of ColorPicker4()
+        if (alpha_bar)         flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar;
+        if (!side_preview)     flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview;
+        if (picker_mode == 1)  flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar;
+        if (picker_mode == 2)  flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel;
+        if (display_mode == 1) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs;       // Disable all RGB/HSV/Hex displays
+        if (display_mode == 2) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB;     // Override display mode
+        if (display_mode == 3) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV;
+        if (display_mode == 4) flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex;
+        ImGui::ColorPicker4("MyColor##4", (float*)&color, flags, ref_color ? &ref_color_v.x : NULL);
+
+        ImGui::Text("Set defaults in code:");
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker(
+            "SetColorEditOptions() is designed to allow you to set boot-time default.\n"
+            "We don't have Push/Pop functions because you can force options on a per-widget basis if needed,"
+            "and the user can change non-forced ones with the options menu.\nWe don't have a getter to avoid"
+            "encouraging you to persistently save values that aren't forward-compatible.");
+        if (ImGui::Button("Default: Uint8 + HSV + Hue Bar"))
+            ImGui::SetColorEditOptions(ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8 | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV | ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar);
+        if (ImGui::Button("Default: Float + HDR + Hue Wheel"))
+            ImGui::SetColorEditOptions(ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR | ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel);
+
+        // Always both a small version of both types of pickers (to make it more visible in the demo to people who are skimming quickly through it)
+        ImGui::Text("Both types:");
+        float w = (ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x - ImGui::GetStyle().ItemSpacing.y) * 0.40f;
+        ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(w);
+        ImGui::ColorPicker3("##MyColor##5", (float*)&color, ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha);
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(w);
+        ImGui::ColorPicker3("##MyColor##6", (float*)&color, ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha);
+
+        // HSV encoded support (to avoid RGB<>HSV round trips and singularities when S==0 or V==0)
+        static ImVec4 color_hsv(0.23f, 1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f); // Stored as HSV!
+        ImGui::Spacing();
+        ImGui::Text("HSV encoded colors");
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker(
+            "By default, colors are given to ColorEdit and ColorPicker in RGB, but ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV"
+            "allows you to store colors as HSV and pass them to ColorEdit and ColorPicker as HSV. This comes with the"
+            "added benefit that you can manipulate hue values with the picker even when saturation or value are zero.");
+        ImGui::Text("Color widget with InputHSV:");
+        ImGui::ColorEdit4("HSV shown as RGB##1", (float*)&color_hsv, ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV | ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float);
+        ImGui::ColorEdit4("HSV shown as HSV##1", (float*)&color_hsv, ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV | ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV | ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float);
+        ImGui::DragFloat4("Raw HSV values", (float*)&color_hsv, 0.01f, 0.0f, 1.0f);
+
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Drag and Slider Flags");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Drag/Slider Flags"))
+    {
+        // Demonstrate using advanced flags for DragXXX and SliderXXX functions. Note that the flags are the same!
+        static ImGuiSliderFlags flags = ImGuiSliderFlags_None;
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp", &flags, ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp);
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Always clamp value to min/max bounds (if any) when input manually with CTRL+Click.");
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic", &flags, ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic);
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Enable logarithmic editing (more precision for small values).");
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiSliderFlags_NoRoundToFormat", &flags, ImGuiSliderFlags_NoRoundToFormat);
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Disable rounding underlying value to match precision of the format string (e.g. %.3f values are rounded to those 3 digits).");
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiSliderFlags_NoInput", &flags, ImGuiSliderFlags_NoInput);
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Disable CTRL+Click or Enter key allowing to input text directly into the widget.");
+
+        // Drags
+        static float drag_f = 0.5f;
+        static int drag_i = 50;
+        ImGui::Text("Underlying float value: %f", drag_f);
+        ImGui::DragFloat("DragFloat (0 -> 1)", &drag_f, 0.005f, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.3f", flags);
+        ImGui::DragFloat("DragFloat (0 -> +inf)", &drag_f, 0.005f, 0.0f, FLT_MAX, "%.3f", flags);
+        ImGui::DragFloat("DragFloat (-inf -> 1)", &drag_f, 0.005f, -FLT_MAX, 1.0f, "%.3f", flags);
+        ImGui::DragFloat("DragFloat (-inf -> +inf)", &drag_f, 0.005f, -FLT_MAX, +FLT_MAX, "%.3f", flags);
+        ImGui::DragInt("DragInt (0 -> 100)", &drag_i, 0.5f, 0, 100, "%d", flags);
+
+        // Sliders
+        static float slider_f = 0.5f;
+        static int slider_i = 50;
+        ImGui::Text("Underlying float value: %f", slider_f);
+        ImGui::SliderFloat("SliderFloat (0 -> 1)", &slider_f, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.3f", flags);
+        ImGui::SliderInt("SliderInt (0 -> 100)", &slider_i, 0, 100, "%d", flags);
+
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Range Widgets");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Range Widgets"))
+    {
+        static float begin = 10, end = 90;
+        static int begin_i = 100, end_i = 1000;
+        ImGui::DragFloatRange2("range float", &begin, &end, 0.25f, 0.0f, 100.0f, "Min: %.1f %%", "Max: %.1f %%", ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp);
+        ImGui::DragIntRange2("range int", &begin_i, &end_i, 5, 0, 1000, "Min: %d units", "Max: %d units");
+        ImGui::DragIntRange2("range int (no bounds)", &begin_i, &end_i, 5, 0, 0, "Min: %d units", "Max: %d units");
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Data Types");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Data Types"))
+    {
+        // DragScalar/InputScalar/SliderScalar functions allow various data types
+        // - signed/unsigned
+        // - 8/16/32/64-bits
+        // - integer/float/double
+        // To avoid polluting the public API with all possible combinations, we use the ImGuiDataType enum
+        // to pass the type, and passing all arguments by pointer.
+        // This is the reason the test code below creates local variables to hold "zero" "one" etc. for each types.
+        // In practice, if you frequently use a given type that is not covered by the normal API entry points,
+        // you can wrap it yourself inside a 1 line function which can take typed argument as value instead of void*,
+        // and then pass their address to the generic function. For example:
+        //   bool MySliderU64(const char *label, u64* value, u64 min = 0, u64 max = 0, const char* format = "%lld")
+        //   {
+        //      return SliderScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_U64, value, &min, &max, format);
+        //   }
+
+        // Setup limits (as helper variables so we can take their address, as explained above)
+        // Note: SliderScalar() functions have a maximum usable range of half the natural type maximum, hence the /2.
+        #ifndef LLONG_MIN
+        ImS64 LLONG_MIN = -9223372036854775807LL - 1;
+        ImS64 LLONG_MAX = 9223372036854775807LL;
+        ImU64 ULLONG_MAX = (2ULL * 9223372036854775807LL + 1);
+        #endif
+        const char    s8_zero  = 0,   s8_one  = 1,   s8_fifty  = 50, s8_min  = -128,        s8_max = 127;
+        const ImU8    u8_zero  = 0,   u8_one  = 1,   u8_fifty  = 50, u8_min  = 0,           u8_max = 255;
+        const short   s16_zero = 0,   s16_one = 1,   s16_fifty = 50, s16_min = -32768,      s16_max = 32767;
+        const ImU16   u16_zero = 0,   u16_one = 1,   u16_fifty = 50, u16_min = 0,           u16_max = 65535;
+        const ImS32   s32_zero = 0,   s32_one = 1,   s32_fifty = 50, s32_min = INT_MIN/2,   s32_max = INT_MAX/2,    s32_hi_a = INT_MAX/2 - 100,    s32_hi_b = INT_MAX/2;
+        const ImU32   u32_zero = 0,   u32_one = 1,   u32_fifty = 50, u32_min = 0,           u32_max = UINT_MAX/2,   u32_hi_a = UINT_MAX/2 - 100,   u32_hi_b = UINT_MAX/2;
+        const ImS64   s64_zero = 0,   s64_one = 1,   s64_fifty = 50, s64_min = LLONG_MIN/2, s64_max = LLONG_MAX/2,  s64_hi_a = LLONG_MAX/2 - 100,  s64_hi_b = LLONG_MAX/2;
+        const ImU64   u64_zero = 0,   u64_one = 1,   u64_fifty = 50, u64_min = 0,           u64_max = ULLONG_MAX/2, u64_hi_a = ULLONG_MAX/2 - 100, u64_hi_b = ULLONG_MAX/2;
+        const float   f32_zero = 0.f, f32_one = 1.f, f32_lo_a = -10000000000.0f, f32_hi_a = +10000000000.0f;
+        const double  f64_zero = 0.,  f64_one = 1.,  f64_lo_a = -1000000000000000.0, f64_hi_a = +1000000000000000.0;
+
+        // State
+        static char   s8_v  = 127;
+        static ImU8   u8_v  = 255;
+        static short  s16_v = 32767;
+        static ImU16  u16_v = 65535;
+        static ImS32  s32_v = -1;
+        static ImU32  u32_v = (ImU32)-1;
+        static ImS64  s64_v = -1;
+        static ImU64  u64_v = (ImU64)-1;
+        static float  f32_v = 0.123f;
+        static double f64_v = 90000.01234567890123456789;
+
+        const float drag_speed = 0.2f;
+        static bool drag_clamp = false;
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Data Types/Drags");
+        ImGui::Text("Drags:");
+        ImGui::Checkbox("Clamp integers to 0..50", &drag_clamp);
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker(
+            "As with every widgets in dear imgui, we never modify values unless there is a user interaction.\n"
+            "You can override the clamping limits by using CTRL+Click to input a value.");
+        ImGui::DragScalar("drag s8",        ImGuiDataType_S8,     &s8_v,  drag_speed, drag_clamp ? &s8_zero  : NULL, drag_clamp ? &s8_fifty  : NULL);
+        ImGui::DragScalar("drag u8",        ImGuiDataType_U8,     &u8_v,  drag_speed, drag_clamp ? &u8_zero  : NULL, drag_clamp ? &u8_fifty  : NULL, "%u ms");
+        ImGui::DragScalar("drag s16",       ImGuiDataType_S16,    &s16_v, drag_speed, drag_clamp ? &s16_zero : NULL, drag_clamp ? &s16_fifty : NULL);
+        ImGui::DragScalar("drag u16",       ImGuiDataType_U16,    &u16_v, drag_speed, drag_clamp ? &u16_zero : NULL, drag_clamp ? &u16_fifty : NULL, "%u ms");
+        ImGui::DragScalar("drag s32",       ImGuiDataType_S32,    &s32_v, drag_speed, drag_clamp ? &s32_zero : NULL, drag_clamp ? &s32_fifty : NULL);
+        ImGui::DragScalar("drag s32 hex",   ImGuiDataType_S32,    &s32_v, drag_speed, drag_clamp ? &s32_zero : NULL, drag_clamp ? &s32_fifty : NULL, "0x%08X");
+        ImGui::DragScalar("drag u32",       ImGuiDataType_U32,    &u32_v, drag_speed, drag_clamp ? &u32_zero : NULL, drag_clamp ? &u32_fifty : NULL, "%u ms");
+        ImGui::DragScalar("drag s64",       ImGuiDataType_S64,    &s64_v, drag_speed, drag_clamp ? &s64_zero : NULL, drag_clamp ? &s64_fifty : NULL);
+        ImGui::DragScalar("drag u64",       ImGuiDataType_U64,    &u64_v, drag_speed, drag_clamp ? &u64_zero : NULL, drag_clamp ? &u64_fifty : NULL);
+        ImGui::DragScalar("drag float",     ImGuiDataType_Float,  &f32_v, 0.005f,  &f32_zero, &f32_one, "%f");
+        ImGui::DragScalar("drag float log", ImGuiDataType_Float,  &f32_v, 0.005f,  &f32_zero, &f32_one, "%f", ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic);
+        ImGui::DragScalar("drag double",    ImGuiDataType_Double, &f64_v, 0.0005f, &f64_zero, NULL,     "%.10f grams");
+        ImGui::DragScalar("drag double log",ImGuiDataType_Double, &f64_v, 0.0005f, &f64_zero, &f64_one, "0 < %.10f < 1", ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic);
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Data Types/Sliders");
+        ImGui::Text("Sliders");
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s8 full",       ImGuiDataType_S8,     &s8_v,  &s8_min,   &s8_max,   "%d");
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u8 full",       ImGuiDataType_U8,     &u8_v,  &u8_min,   &u8_max,   "%u");
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s16 full",      ImGuiDataType_S16,    &s16_v, &s16_min,  &s16_max,  "%d");
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u16 full",      ImGuiDataType_U16,    &u16_v, &u16_min,  &u16_max,  "%u");
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s32 low",       ImGuiDataType_S32,    &s32_v, &s32_zero, &s32_fifty,"%d");
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s32 high",      ImGuiDataType_S32,    &s32_v, &s32_hi_a, &s32_hi_b, "%d");
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s32 full",      ImGuiDataType_S32,    &s32_v, &s32_min,  &s32_max,  "%d");
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s32 hex",       ImGuiDataType_S32,    &s32_v, &s32_zero, &s32_fifty, "0x%04X");
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u32 low",       ImGuiDataType_U32,    &u32_v, &u32_zero, &u32_fifty,"%u");
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u32 high",      ImGuiDataType_U32,    &u32_v, &u32_hi_a, &u32_hi_b, "%u");
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u32 full",      ImGuiDataType_U32,    &u32_v, &u32_min,  &u32_max,  "%u");
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s64 low",       ImGuiDataType_S64,    &s64_v, &s64_zero, &s64_fifty,"%" IM_PRId64);
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s64 high",      ImGuiDataType_S64,    &s64_v, &s64_hi_a, &s64_hi_b, "%" IM_PRId64);
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s64 full",      ImGuiDataType_S64,    &s64_v, &s64_min,  &s64_max,  "%" IM_PRId64);
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u64 low",       ImGuiDataType_U64,    &u64_v, &u64_zero, &u64_fifty,"%" IM_PRIu64 " ms");
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u64 high",      ImGuiDataType_U64,    &u64_v, &u64_hi_a, &u64_hi_b, "%" IM_PRIu64 " ms");
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u64 full",      ImGuiDataType_U64,    &u64_v, &u64_min,  &u64_max,  "%" IM_PRIu64 " ms");
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider float low",     ImGuiDataType_Float,  &f32_v, &f32_zero, &f32_one);
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider float low log", ImGuiDataType_Float,  &f32_v, &f32_zero, &f32_one,  "%.10f", ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic);
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider float high",    ImGuiDataType_Float,  &f32_v, &f32_lo_a, &f32_hi_a, "%e");
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider double low",    ImGuiDataType_Double, &f64_v, &f64_zero, &f64_one,  "%.10f grams");
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider double low log",ImGuiDataType_Double, &f64_v, &f64_zero, &f64_one,  "%.10f", ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic);
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider double high",   ImGuiDataType_Double, &f64_v, &f64_lo_a, &f64_hi_a, "%e grams");
+
+        ImGui::Text("Sliders (reverse)");
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s8 reverse",    ImGuiDataType_S8,   &s8_v,  &s8_max,    &s8_min,   "%d");
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u8 reverse",    ImGuiDataType_U8,   &u8_v,  &u8_max,    &u8_min,   "%u");
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s32 reverse",   ImGuiDataType_S32,  &s32_v, &s32_fifty, &s32_zero, "%d");
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u32 reverse",   ImGuiDataType_U32,  &u32_v, &u32_fifty, &u32_zero, "%u");
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider s64 reverse",   ImGuiDataType_S64,  &s64_v, &s64_fifty, &s64_zero, "%" IM_PRId64);
+        ImGui::SliderScalar("slider u64 reverse",   ImGuiDataType_U64,  &u64_v, &u64_fifty, &u64_zero, "%" IM_PRIu64 " ms");
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Data Types/Inputs");
+        static bool inputs_step = true;
+        ImGui::Text("Inputs");
+        ImGui::Checkbox("Show step buttons", &inputs_step);
+        ImGui::InputScalar("input s8",      ImGuiDataType_S8,     &s8_v,  inputs_step ? &s8_one  : NULL, NULL, "%d");
+        ImGui::InputScalar("input u8",      ImGuiDataType_U8,     &u8_v,  inputs_step ? &u8_one  : NULL, NULL, "%u");
+        ImGui::InputScalar("input s16",     ImGuiDataType_S16,    &s16_v, inputs_step ? &s16_one : NULL, NULL, "%d");
+        ImGui::InputScalar("input u16",     ImGuiDataType_U16,    &u16_v, inputs_step ? &u16_one : NULL, NULL, "%u");
+        ImGui::InputScalar("input s32",     ImGuiDataType_S32,    &s32_v, inputs_step ? &s32_one : NULL, NULL, "%d");
+        ImGui::InputScalar("input s32 hex", ImGuiDataType_S32,    &s32_v, inputs_step ? &s32_one : NULL, NULL, "%04X");
+        ImGui::InputScalar("input u32",     ImGuiDataType_U32,    &u32_v, inputs_step ? &u32_one : NULL, NULL, "%u");
+        ImGui::InputScalar("input u32 hex", ImGuiDataType_U32,    &u32_v, inputs_step ? &u32_one : NULL, NULL, "%08X");
+        ImGui::InputScalar("input s64",     ImGuiDataType_S64,    &s64_v, inputs_step ? &s64_one : NULL);
+        ImGui::InputScalar("input u64",     ImGuiDataType_U64,    &u64_v, inputs_step ? &u64_one : NULL);
+        ImGui::InputScalar("input float",   ImGuiDataType_Float,  &f32_v, inputs_step ? &f32_one : NULL);
+        ImGui::InputScalar("input double",  ImGuiDataType_Double, &f64_v, inputs_step ? &f64_one : NULL);
+
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Multi-component Widgets");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Multi-component Widgets"))
+    {
+        static float vec4f[4] = { 0.10f, 0.20f, 0.30f, 0.44f };
+        static int vec4i[4] = { 1, 5, 100, 255 };
+
+        ImGui::InputFloat2("input float2", vec4f);
+        ImGui::DragFloat2("drag float2", vec4f, 0.01f, 0.0f, 1.0f);
+        ImGui::SliderFloat2("slider float2", vec4f, 0.0f, 1.0f);
+        ImGui::InputInt2("input int2", vec4i);
+        ImGui::DragInt2("drag int2", vec4i, 1, 0, 255);
+        ImGui::SliderInt2("slider int2", vec4i, 0, 255);
+        ImGui::Spacing();
+
+        ImGui::InputFloat3("input float3", vec4f);
+        ImGui::DragFloat3("drag float3", vec4f, 0.01f, 0.0f, 1.0f);
+        ImGui::SliderFloat3("slider float3", vec4f, 0.0f, 1.0f);
+        ImGui::InputInt3("input int3", vec4i);
+        ImGui::DragInt3("drag int3", vec4i, 1, 0, 255);
+        ImGui::SliderInt3("slider int3", vec4i, 0, 255);
+        ImGui::Spacing();
+
+        ImGui::InputFloat4("input float4", vec4f);
+        ImGui::DragFloat4("drag float4", vec4f, 0.01f, 0.0f, 1.0f);
+        ImGui::SliderFloat4("slider float4", vec4f, 0.0f, 1.0f);
+        ImGui::InputInt4("input int4", vec4i);
+        ImGui::DragInt4("drag int4", vec4i, 1, 0, 255);
+        ImGui::SliderInt4("slider int4", vec4i, 0, 255);
+
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Vertical Sliders");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Vertical Sliders"))
+    {
+        const float spacing = 4;
+        ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(spacing, spacing));
+
+        static int int_value = 0;
+        ImGui::VSliderInt("##int", ImVec2(18, 160), &int_value, 0, 5);
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+
+        static float values[7] = { 0.0f, 0.60f, 0.35f, 0.9f, 0.70f, 0.20f, 0.0f };
+        ImGui::PushID("set1");
+        for (int i = 0; i < 7; i++)
+        {
+            if (i > 0) ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::PushID(i);
+            ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_FrameBg, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i / 7.0f, 0.5f, 0.5f));
+            ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i / 7.0f, 0.6f, 0.5f));
+            ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i / 7.0f, 0.7f, 0.5f));
+            ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_SliderGrab, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(i / 7.0f, 0.9f, 0.9f));
+            ImGui::VSliderFloat("##v", ImVec2(18, 160), &values[i], 0.0f, 1.0f, "");
+            if (ImGui::IsItemActive() || ImGui::IsItemHovered())
+                ImGui::SetTooltip("%.3f", values[i]);
+            ImGui::PopStyleColor(4);
+            ImGui::PopID();
+        }
+        ImGui::PopID();
+
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::PushID("set2");
+        static float values2[4] = { 0.20f, 0.80f, 0.40f, 0.25f };
+        const int rows = 3;
+        const ImVec2 small_slider_size(18, (float)(int)((160.0f - (rows - 1) * spacing) / rows));
+        for (int nx = 0; nx < 4; nx++)
+        {
+            if (nx > 0) ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::BeginGroup();
+            for (int ny = 0; ny < rows; ny++)
+            {
+                ImGui::PushID(nx * rows + ny);
+                ImGui::VSliderFloat("##v", small_slider_size, &values2[nx], 0.0f, 1.0f, "");
+                if (ImGui::IsItemActive() || ImGui::IsItemHovered())
+                    ImGui::SetTooltip("%.3f", values2[nx]);
+                ImGui::PopID();
+            }
+            ImGui::EndGroup();
+        }
+        ImGui::PopID();
+
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::PushID("set3");
+        for (int i = 0; i < 4; i++)
+        {
+            if (i > 0) ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::PushID(i);
+            ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_GrabMinSize, 40);
+            ImGui::VSliderFloat("##v", ImVec2(40, 160), &values[i], 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.2f\nsec");
+            ImGui::PopStyleVar();
+            ImGui::PopID();
+        }
+        ImGui::PopID();
+        ImGui::PopStyleVar();
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Drag and drop");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Drag and Drop"))
+    {
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Drag and drop/Standard widgets");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Drag and drop in standard widgets"))
+        {
+            // ColorEdit widgets automatically act as drag source and drag target.
+            // They are using standardized payload strings IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F and IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F
+            // to allow your own widgets to use colors in their drag and drop interaction.
+            // Also see 'Demo->Widgets->Color/Picker Widgets->Palette' demo.
+            HelpMarker("You can drag from the color squares.");
+            static float col1[3] = { 1.0f, 0.0f, 0.2f };
+            static float col2[4] = { 0.4f, 0.7f, 0.0f, 0.5f };
+            ImGui::ColorEdit3("color 1", col1);
+            ImGui::ColorEdit4("color 2", col2);
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Drag and drop/Copy-swap items");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Drag and drop to copy/swap items"))
+        {
+            enum Mode
+            {
+                Mode_Copy,
+                Mode_Move,
+                Mode_Swap
+            };
+            static int mode = 0;
+            if (ImGui::RadioButton("Copy", mode == Mode_Copy)) { mode = Mode_Copy; } ImGui::SameLine();
+            if (ImGui::RadioButton("Move", mode == Mode_Move)) { mode = Mode_Move; } ImGui::SameLine();
+            if (ImGui::RadioButton("Swap", mode == Mode_Swap)) { mode = Mode_Swap; }
+            static const char* names[9] =
+            {
+                "Bobby", "Beatrice", "Betty",
+                "Brianna", "Barry", "Bernard",
+                "Bibi", "Blaine", "Bryn"
+            };
+            for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(names); n++)
+            {
+                ImGui::PushID(n);
+                if ((n % 3) != 0)
+                    ImGui::SameLine();
+                ImGui::Button(names[n], ImVec2(60, 60));
+
+                // Our buttons are both drag sources and drag targets here!
+                if (ImGui::BeginDragDropSource(ImGuiDragDropFlags_None))
+                {
+                    // Set payload to carry the index of our item (could be anything)
+                    ImGui::SetDragDropPayload("DND_DEMO_CELL", &n, sizeof(int));
+
+                    // Display preview (could be anything, e.g. when dragging an image we could decide to display
+                    // the filename and a small preview of the image, etc.)
+                    if (mode == Mode_Copy) { ImGui::Text("Copy %s", names[n]); }
+                    if (mode == Mode_Move) { ImGui::Text("Move %s", names[n]); }
+                    if (mode == Mode_Swap) { ImGui::Text("Swap %s", names[n]); }
+                    ImGui::EndDragDropSource();
+                }
+                if (ImGui::BeginDragDropTarget())
+                {
+                    if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = ImGui::AcceptDragDropPayload("DND_DEMO_CELL"))
+                    {
+                        IM_ASSERT(payload->DataSize == sizeof(int));
+                        int payload_n = *(const int*)payload->Data;
+                        if (mode == Mode_Copy)
+                        {
+                            names[n] = names[payload_n];
+                        }
+                        if (mode == Mode_Move)
+                        {
+                            names[n] = names[payload_n];
+                            names[payload_n] = "";
+                        }
+                        if (mode == Mode_Swap)
+                        {
+                            const char* tmp = names[n];
+                            names[n] = names[payload_n];
+                            names[payload_n] = tmp;
+                        }
+                    }
+                    ImGui::EndDragDropTarget();
+                }
+                ImGui::PopID();
+            }
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Drag and Drop/Drag to reorder items (simple)");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Drag to reorder items (simple)"))
+        {
+            // Simple reordering
+            HelpMarker(
+                "We don't use the drag and drop api at all here! "
+                "Instead we query when the item is held but not hovered, and order items accordingly.");
+            static const char* item_names[] = { "Item One", "Item Two", "Item Three", "Item Four", "Item Five" };
+            for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(item_names); n++)
+            {
+                const char* item = item_names[n];
+                ImGui::Selectable(item);
+
+                if (ImGui::IsItemActive() && !ImGui::IsItemHovered())
+                {
+                    int n_next = n + (ImGui::GetMouseDragDelta(0).y < 0.f ? -1 : 1);
+                    if (n_next >= 0 && n_next < IM_ARRAYSIZE(item_names))
+                    {
+                        item_names[n] = item_names[n_next];
+                        item_names[n_next] = item;
+                        ImGui::ResetMouseDragDelta();
+                    }
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Querying Item Status (Edited,Active,Hovered etc.)");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Querying Item Status (Edited/Active/Hovered etc.)"))
+    {
+        // Select an item type
+        const char* item_names[] =
+        {
+            "Text", "Button", "Button (w/ repeat)", "Checkbox", "SliderFloat", "InputText", "InputTextMultiline", "InputFloat",
+            "InputFloat3", "ColorEdit4", "Selectable", "MenuItem", "TreeNode", "TreeNode (w/ double-click)", "Combo", "ListBox"
+        };
+        static int item_type = 4;
+        static bool item_disabled = false;
+        ImGui::Combo("Item Type", &item_type, item_names, IM_ARRAYSIZE(item_names), IM_ARRAYSIZE(item_names));
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        HelpMarker("Testing how various types of items are interacting with the IsItemXXX functions. Note that the bool return value of most ImGui function is generally equivalent to calling ImGui::IsItemHovered().");
+        ImGui::Checkbox("Item Disabled",  &item_disabled);
+
+        // Submit selected item item so we can query their status in the code following it.
+        bool ret = false;
+        static bool b = false;
+        static float col4f[4] = { 1.0f, 0.5, 0.0f, 1.0f };
+        static char str[16] = {};
+        if (item_disabled)
+            ImGui::BeginDisabled(true);
+        if (item_type == 0) { ImGui::Text("ITEM: Text"); }                                              // Testing text items with no identifier/interaction
+        if (item_type == 1) { ret = ImGui::Button("ITEM: Button"); }                                    // Testing button
+        if (item_type == 2) { ImGui::PushButtonRepeat(true); ret = ImGui::Button("ITEM: Button"); ImGui::PopButtonRepeat(); } // Testing button (with repeater)
+        if (item_type == 3) { ret = ImGui::Checkbox("ITEM: Checkbox", &b); }                            // Testing checkbox
+        if (item_type == 4) { ret = ImGui::SliderFloat("ITEM: SliderFloat", &col4f[0], 0.0f, 1.0f); }   // Testing basic item
+        if (item_type == 5) { ret = ImGui::InputText("ITEM: InputText", &str[0], IM_ARRAYSIZE(str)); }  // Testing input text (which handles tabbing)
+        if (item_type == 6) { ret = ImGui::InputTextMultiline("ITEM: InputTextMultiline", &str[0], IM_ARRAYSIZE(str)); } // Testing input text (which uses a child window)
+        if (item_type == 7) { ret = ImGui::InputFloat("ITEM: InputFloat", col4f, 1.0f); }               // Testing +/- buttons on scalar input
+        if (item_type == 8) { ret = ImGui::InputFloat3("ITEM: InputFloat3", col4f); }                   // Testing multi-component items (IsItemXXX flags are reported merged)
+        if (item_type == 9) { ret = ImGui::ColorEdit4("ITEM: ColorEdit4", col4f); }                     // Testing multi-component items (IsItemXXX flags are reported merged)
+        if (item_type == 10){ ret = ImGui::Selectable("ITEM: Selectable"); }                            // Testing selectable item
+        if (item_type == 11){ ret = ImGui::MenuItem("ITEM: MenuItem"); }                                // Testing menu item (they use ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnRelease button policy)
+        if (item_type == 12){ ret = ImGui::TreeNode("ITEM: TreeNode"); if (ret) ImGui::TreePop(); }     // Testing tree node
+        if (item_type == 13){ ret = ImGui::TreeNodeEx("ITEM: TreeNode w/ ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick", ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen); } // Testing tree node with ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick button policy.
+        if (item_type == 14){ const char* items[] = { "Apple", "Banana", "Cherry", "Kiwi" }; static int current = 1; ret = ImGui::Combo("ITEM: Combo", &current, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items)); }
+        if (item_type == 15){ const char* items[] = { "Apple", "Banana", "Cherry", "Kiwi" }; static int current = 1; ret = ImGui::ListBox("ITEM: ListBox", &current, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items), IM_ARRAYSIZE(items)); }
+
+        // Display the values of IsItemHovered() and other common item state functions.
+        // Note that the ImGuiHoveredFlags_XXX flags can be combined.
+        // Because BulletText is an item itself and that would affect the output of IsItemXXX functions,
+        // we query every state in a single call to avoid storing them and to simplify the code.
+        ImGui::BulletText(
+            "Return value = %d\n"
+            "IsItemFocused() = %d\n"
+            "IsItemHovered() = %d\n"
+            "IsItemHovered(_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup) = %d\n"
+            "IsItemHovered(_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem) = %d\n"
+            "IsItemHovered(_AllowWhenOverlapped) = %d\n"
+            "IsItemHovered(_AllowWhenDisabled) = %d\n"
+            "IsItemHovered(_RectOnly) = %d\n"
+            "IsItemActive() = %d\n"
+            "IsItemEdited() = %d\n"
+            "IsItemActivated() = %d\n"
+            "IsItemDeactivated() = %d\n"
+            "IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit() = %d\n"
+            "IsItemVisible() = %d\n"
+            "IsItemClicked() = %d\n"
+            "IsItemToggledOpen() = %d\n"
+            "GetItemRectMin() = (%.1f, %.1f)\n"
+            "GetItemRectMax() = (%.1f, %.1f)\n"
+            "GetItemRectSize() = (%.1f, %.1f)",
+            ret,
+            ImGui::IsItemFocused(),
+            ImGui::IsItemHovered(),
+            ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup),
+            ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem),
+            ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenOverlapped),
+            ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenDisabled),
+            ImGui::IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_RectOnly),
+            ImGui::IsItemActive(),
+            ImGui::IsItemEdited(),
+            ImGui::IsItemActivated(),
+            ImGui::IsItemDeactivated(),
+            ImGui::IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit(),
+            ImGui::IsItemVisible(),
+            ImGui::IsItemClicked(),
+            ImGui::IsItemToggledOpen(),
+            ImGui::GetItemRectMin().x, ImGui::GetItemRectMin().y,
+            ImGui::GetItemRectMax().x, ImGui::GetItemRectMax().y,
+            ImGui::GetItemRectSize().x, ImGui::GetItemRectSize().y
+        );
+
+        if (item_disabled)
+            ImGui::EndDisabled();
+
+        char buf[1] = "";
+        ImGui::InputText("unused", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly);
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        HelpMarker("This widget is only here to be able to tab-out of the widgets above and see e.g. Deactivated() status.");
+
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Querying Window Status (Focused,Hovered etc.)");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Querying Window Status (Focused/Hovered etc.)"))
+    {
+        static bool embed_all_inside_a_child_window = false;
+        ImGui::Checkbox("Embed everything inside a child window for testing _RootWindow flag.", &embed_all_inside_a_child_window);
+        if (embed_all_inside_a_child_window)
+            ImGui::BeginChild("outer_child", ImVec2(0, ImGui::GetFontSize() * 20.0f), true);
+
+        // Testing IsWindowFocused() function with its various flags.
+        ImGui::BulletText(
+            "IsWindowFocused() = %d\n"
+            "IsWindowFocused(_ChildWindows) = %d\n"
+            "IsWindowFocused(_ChildWindows|_NoPopupHierarchy) = %d\n"
+            "IsWindowFocused(_ChildWindows|_DockHierarchy) = %d\n"
+            "IsWindowFocused(_ChildWindows|_RootWindow) = %d\n"
+            "IsWindowFocused(_ChildWindows|_RootWindow|_NoPopupHierarchy) = %d\n"
+            "IsWindowFocused(_ChildWindows|_RootWindow|_DockHierarchy) = %d\n"
+            "IsWindowFocused(_RootWindow) = %d\n"
+            "IsWindowFocused(_RootWindow|_NoPopupHierarchy) = %d\n"
+            "IsWindowFocused(_RootWindow|_DockHierarchy) = %d\n"
+            "IsWindowFocused(_AnyWindow) = %d\n",
+            ImGui::IsWindowFocused(),
+            ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows),
+            ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows | ImGuiFocusedFlags_NoPopupHierarchy),
+            ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows | ImGuiFocusedFlags_DockHierarchy),
+            ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows | ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow),
+            ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows | ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiFocusedFlags_NoPopupHierarchy),
+            ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows | ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiFocusedFlags_DockHierarchy),
+            ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow),
+            ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiFocusedFlags_NoPopupHierarchy),
+            ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiFocusedFlags_DockHierarchy),
+            ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_AnyWindow));
+
+        // Testing IsWindowHovered() function with its various flags.
+        ImGui::BulletText(
+            "IsWindowHovered() = %d\n"
+            "IsWindowHovered(_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup) = %d\n"
+            "IsWindowHovered(_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem) = %d\n"
+            "IsWindowHovered(_ChildWindows) = %d\n"
+            "IsWindowHovered(_ChildWindows|_NoPopupHierarchy) = %d\n"
+            "IsWindowHovered(_ChildWindows|_DockHierarchy) = %d\n"
+            "IsWindowHovered(_ChildWindows|_RootWindow) = %d\n"
+            "IsWindowHovered(_ChildWindows|_RootWindow|_NoPopupHierarchy) = %d\n"
+            "IsWindowHovered(_ChildWindows|_RootWindow|_DockHierarchy) = %d\n"
+            "IsWindowHovered(_RootWindow) = %d\n"
+            "IsWindowHovered(_RootWindow|_NoPopupHierarchy) = %d\n"
+            "IsWindowHovered(_RootWindow|_DockHierarchy) = %d\n"
+            "IsWindowHovered(_ChildWindows|_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup) = %d\n"
+            "IsWindowHovered(_AnyWindow) = %d\n",
+            ImGui::IsWindowHovered(),
+            ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup),
+            ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem),
+            ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows),
+            ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows | ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoPopupHierarchy),
+            ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows | ImGuiHoveredFlags_DockHierarchy),
+            ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows | ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow),
+            ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows | ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoPopupHierarchy),
+            ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows | ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiHoveredFlags_DockHierarchy),
+            ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow),
+            ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiHoveredFlags_NoPopupHierarchy),
+            ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_RootWindow | ImGuiHoveredFlags_DockHierarchy),
+            ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_ChildWindows | ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup),
+            ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AnyWindow));
+
+        ImGui::BeginChild("child", ImVec2(0, 50), true);
+        ImGui::Text("This is another child window for testing the _ChildWindows flag.");
+        ImGui::EndChild();
+        if (embed_all_inside_a_child_window)
+            ImGui::EndChild();
+
+        // Calling IsItemHovered() after begin returns the hovered status of the title bar.
+        // This is useful in particular if you want to create a context menu associated to the title bar of a window.
+        // This will also work when docked into a Tab (the Tab replace the Title Bar and guarantee the same properties).
+        static bool test_window = false;
+        ImGui::Checkbox("Hovered/Active tests after Begin() for title bar testing", &test_window);
+        if (test_window)
+        {
+            // FIXME-DOCK: This window cannot be docked within the ImGui Demo window, this will cause a feedback loop and get them stuck.
+            // Could we fix this through an ImGuiWindowClass feature? Or an API call to tag our parent as "don't skip items"?
+            ImGui::Begin("Title bar Hovered/Active tests", &test_window);
+            if (ImGui::BeginPopupContextItem()) // <-- This is using IsItemHovered()
+            {
+                if (ImGui::MenuItem("Close")) { test_window = false; }
+                ImGui::EndPopup();
+            }
+            ImGui::Text(
+                "IsItemHovered() after begin = %d (== is title bar hovered)\n"
+                "IsItemActive() after begin = %d (== is window being clicked/moved)\n",
+                ImGui::IsItemHovered(), ImGui::IsItemActive());
+            ImGui::End();
+        }
+
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    // Demonstrate BeginDisabled/EndDisabled using a checkbox located at the bottom of the section (which is a bit odd:
+    // logically we'd have this checkbox at the top of the section, but we don't want this feature to steal that space)
+    if (disable_all)
+        ImGui::EndDisabled();
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Widgets/Disable Block");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Disable block"))
+    {
+        ImGui::Checkbox("Disable entire section above", &disable_all);
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Demonstrate using BeginDisabled()/EndDisabled() across this section.");
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+}
+
+static void ShowDemoWindowLayout()
+{
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout");
+    if (!ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Layout & Scrolling"))
+        return;
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Child windows");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Child windows"))
+    {
+        HelpMarker("Use child windows to begin into a self-contained independent scrolling/clipping regions within a host window.");
+        static bool disable_mouse_wheel = false;
+        static bool disable_menu = false;
+        ImGui::Checkbox("Disable Mouse Wheel", &disable_mouse_wheel);
+        ImGui::Checkbox("Disable Menu", &disable_menu);
+
+        // Child 1: no border, enable horizontal scrollbar
+        {
+            ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar;
+            if (disable_mouse_wheel)
+                window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse;
+            ImGui::BeginChild("ChildL", ImVec2(ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x * 0.5f, 260), false, window_flags);
+            for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++)
+                ImGui::Text("%04d: scrollable region", i);
+            ImGui::EndChild();
+        }
+
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+
+        // Child 2: rounded border
+        {
+            ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_None;
+            if (disable_mouse_wheel)
+                window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse;
+            if (!disable_menu)
+                window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar;
+            ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding, 5.0f);
+            ImGui::BeginChild("ChildR", ImVec2(0, 260), true, window_flags);
+            if (!disable_menu && ImGui::BeginMenuBar())
+            {
+                if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Menu"))
+                {
+                    ShowExampleMenuFile();
+                    ImGui::EndMenu();
+                }
+                ImGui::EndMenuBar();
+            }
+            if (ImGui::BeginTable("split", 2, ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_NoSavedSettings))
+            {
+                for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++)
+                {
+                    char buf[32];
+                    sprintf(buf, "%03d", i);
+                    ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                    ImGui::Button(buf, ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, 0.0f));
+                }
+                ImGui::EndTable();
+            }
+            ImGui::EndChild();
+            ImGui::PopStyleVar();
+        }
+
+        ImGui::Separator();
+
+        // Demonstrate a few extra things
+        // - Changing ImGuiCol_ChildBg (which is transparent black in default styles)
+        // - Using SetCursorPos() to position child window (the child window is an item from the POV of parent window)
+        //   You can also call SetNextWindowPos() to position the child window. The parent window will effectively
+        //   layout from this position.
+        // - Using ImGui::GetItemRectMin/Max() to query the "item" state (because the child window is an item from
+        //   the POV of the parent window). See 'Demo->Querying Status (Edited/Active/Hovered etc.)' for details.
+        {
+            static int offset_x = 0;
+            ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 8);
+            ImGui::DragInt("Offset X", &offset_x, 1.0f, -1000, 1000);
+
+            ImGui::SetCursorPosX(ImGui::GetCursorPosX() + (float)offset_x);
+            ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ChildBg, IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 100));
+            ImGui::BeginChild("Red", ImVec2(200, 100), true, ImGuiWindowFlags_None);
+            for (int n = 0; n < 50; n++)
+                ImGui::Text("Some test %d", n);
+            ImGui::EndChild();
+            bool child_is_hovered = ImGui::IsItemHovered();
+            ImVec2 child_rect_min = ImGui::GetItemRectMin();
+            ImVec2 child_rect_max = ImGui::GetItemRectMax();
+            ImGui::PopStyleColor();
+            ImGui::Text("Hovered: %d", child_is_hovered);
+            ImGui::Text("Rect of child window is: (%.0f,%.0f) (%.0f,%.0f)", child_rect_min.x, child_rect_min.y, child_rect_max.x, child_rect_max.y);
+        }
+
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Widgets Width");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Widgets Width"))
+    {
+        static float f = 0.0f;
+        static bool show_indented_items = true;
+        ImGui::Checkbox("Show indented items", &show_indented_items);
+
+        // Use SetNextItemWidth() to set the width of a single upcoming item.
+        // Use PushItemWidth()/PopItemWidth() to set the width of a group of items.
+        // In real code use you'll probably want to choose width values that are proportional to your font size
+        // e.g. Using '20.0f * GetFontSize()' as width instead of '200.0f', etc.
+
+        ImGui::Text("SetNextItemWidth/PushItemWidth(100)");
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Fixed width.");
+        ImGui::PushItemWidth(100);
+        ImGui::DragFloat("float##1b", &f);
+        if (show_indented_items)
+        {
+            ImGui::Indent();
+            ImGui::DragFloat("float (indented)##1b", &f);
+            ImGui::Unindent();
+        }
+        ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+
+        ImGui::Text("SetNextItemWidth/PushItemWidth(-100)");
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Align to right edge minus 100");
+        ImGui::PushItemWidth(-100);
+        ImGui::DragFloat("float##2a", &f);
+        if (show_indented_items)
+        {
+            ImGui::Indent();
+            ImGui::DragFloat("float (indented)##2b", &f);
+            ImGui::Unindent();
+        }
+        ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+
+        ImGui::Text("SetNextItemWidth/PushItemWidth(GetContentRegionAvail().x * 0.5f)");
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Half of available width.\n(~ right-cursor_pos)\n(works within a column set)");
+        ImGui::PushItemWidth(ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x * 0.5f);
+        ImGui::DragFloat("float##3a", &f);
+        if (show_indented_items)
+        {
+            ImGui::Indent();
+            ImGui::DragFloat("float (indented)##3b", &f);
+            ImGui::Unindent();
+        }
+        ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+
+        ImGui::Text("SetNextItemWidth/PushItemWidth(-GetContentRegionAvail().x * 0.5f)");
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Align to right edge minus half");
+        ImGui::PushItemWidth(-ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x * 0.5f);
+        ImGui::DragFloat("float##4a", &f);
+        if (show_indented_items)
+        {
+            ImGui::Indent();
+            ImGui::DragFloat("float (indented)##4b", &f);
+            ImGui::Unindent();
+        }
+        ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+
+        // Demonstrate using PushItemWidth to surround three items.
+        // Calling SetNextItemWidth() before each of them would have the same effect.
+        ImGui::Text("SetNextItemWidth/PushItemWidth(-FLT_MIN)");
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Align to right edge");
+        ImGui::PushItemWidth(-FLT_MIN);
+        ImGui::DragFloat("##float5a", &f);
+        if (show_indented_items)
+        {
+            ImGui::Indent();
+            ImGui::DragFloat("float (indented)##5b", &f);
+            ImGui::Unindent();
+        }
+        ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Basic Horizontal Layout");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Basic Horizontal Layout"))
+    {
+        ImGui::TextWrapped("(Use ImGui::SameLine() to keep adding items to the right of the preceding item)");
+
+        // Text
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Basic Horizontal Layout/SameLine");
+        ImGui::Text("Two items: Hello"); ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1,1,0,1), "Sailor");
+
+        // Adjust spacing
+        ImGui::Text("More spacing: Hello"); ImGui::SameLine(0, 20);
+        ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1,1,0,1), "Sailor");
+
+        // Button
+        ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding();
+        ImGui::Text("Normal buttons"); ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::Button("Banana"); ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::Button("Apple"); ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::Button("Corniflower");
+
+        // Button
+        ImGui::Text("Small buttons"); ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::SmallButton("Like this one"); ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::Text("can fit within a text block.");
+
+        // Aligned to arbitrary position. Easy/cheap column.
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Basic Horizontal Layout/SameLine (with offset)");
+        ImGui::Text("Aligned");
+        ImGui::SameLine(150); ImGui::Text("x=150");
+        ImGui::SameLine(300); ImGui::Text("x=300");
+        ImGui::Text("Aligned");
+        ImGui::SameLine(150); ImGui::SmallButton("x=150");
+        ImGui::SameLine(300); ImGui::SmallButton("x=300");
+
+        // Checkbox
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Basic Horizontal Layout/SameLine (more)");
+        static bool c1 = false, c2 = false, c3 = false, c4 = false;
+        ImGui::Checkbox("My", &c1); ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::Checkbox("Tailor", &c2); ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::Checkbox("Is", &c3); ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::Checkbox("Rich", &c4);
+
+        // Various
+        static float f0 = 1.0f, f1 = 2.0f, f2 = 3.0f;
+        ImGui::PushItemWidth(80);
+        const char* items[] = { "AAAA", "BBBB", "CCCC", "DDDD" };
+        static int item = -1;
+        ImGui::Combo("Combo", &item, items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items)); ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::SliderFloat("X", &f0, 0.0f, 5.0f); ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::SliderFloat("Y", &f1, 0.0f, 5.0f); ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::SliderFloat("Z", &f2, 0.0f, 5.0f);
+        ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+
+        ImGui::PushItemWidth(80);
+        ImGui::Text("Lists:");
+        static int selection[4] = { 0, 1, 2, 3 };
+        for (int i = 0; i < 4; i++)
+        {
+            if (i > 0) ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::PushID(i);
+            ImGui::ListBox("", &selection[i], items, IM_ARRAYSIZE(items));
+            ImGui::PopID();
+            //if (ImGui::IsItemHovered()) ImGui::SetTooltip("ListBox %d hovered", i);
+        }
+        ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+
+        // Dummy
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Basic Horizontal Layout/Dummy");
+        ImVec2 button_sz(40, 40);
+        ImGui::Button("A", button_sz); ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::Dummy(button_sz); ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::Button("B", button_sz);
+
+        // Manually wrapping
+        // (we should eventually provide this as an automatic layout feature, but for now you can do it manually)
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Basic Horizontal Layout/Manual wrapping");
+        ImGui::Text("Manual wrapping:");
+        ImGuiStyle& style = ImGui::GetStyle();
+        int buttons_count = 20;
+        float window_visible_x2 = ImGui::GetWindowPos().x + ImGui::GetWindowContentRegionMax().x;
+        for (int n = 0; n < buttons_count; n++)
+        {
+            ImGui::PushID(n);
+            ImGui::Button("Box", button_sz);
+            float last_button_x2 = ImGui::GetItemRectMax().x;
+            float next_button_x2 = last_button_x2 + style.ItemSpacing.x + button_sz.x; // Expected position if next button was on same line
+            if (n + 1 < buttons_count && next_button_x2 < window_visible_x2)
+                ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::PopID();
+        }
+
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Groups");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Groups"))
+    {
+        HelpMarker(
+            "BeginGroup() basically locks the horizontal position for new line. "
+            "EndGroup() bundles the whole group so that you can use \"item\" functions such as "
+            "IsItemHovered()/IsItemActive() or SameLine() etc. on the whole group.");
+        ImGui::BeginGroup();
+        {
+            ImGui::BeginGroup();
+            ImGui::Button("AAA");
+            ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::Button("BBB");
+            ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::BeginGroup();
+            ImGui::Button("CCC");
+            ImGui::Button("DDD");
+            ImGui::EndGroup();
+            ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::Button("EEE");
+            ImGui::EndGroup();
+            if (ImGui::IsItemHovered())
+                ImGui::SetTooltip("First group hovered");
+        }
+        // Capture the group size and create widgets using the same size
+        ImVec2 size = ImGui::GetItemRectSize();
+        const float values[5] = { 0.5f, 0.20f, 0.80f, 0.60f, 0.25f };
+        ImGui::PlotHistogram("##values", values, IM_ARRAYSIZE(values), 0, NULL, 0.0f, 1.0f, size);
+
+        ImGui::Button("ACTION", ImVec2((size.x - ImGui::GetStyle().ItemSpacing.x) * 0.5f, size.y));
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::Button("REACTION", ImVec2((size.x - ImGui::GetStyle().ItemSpacing.x) * 0.5f, size.y));
+        ImGui::EndGroup();
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+
+        ImGui::Button("LEVERAGE\nBUZZWORD", size);
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+
+        if (ImGui::BeginListBox("List", size))
+        {
+            ImGui::Selectable("Selected", true);
+            ImGui::Selectable("Not Selected", false);
+            ImGui::EndListBox();
+        }
+
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Text Baseline Alignment");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Text Baseline Alignment"))
+    {
+        {
+            ImGui::BulletText("Text baseline:");
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker(
+                "This is testing the vertical alignment that gets applied on text to keep it aligned with widgets. "
+                "Lines only composed of text or \"small\" widgets use less vertical space than lines with framed widgets.");
+            ImGui::Indent();
+
+            ImGui::Text("KO Blahblah"); ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::Button("Some framed item"); ImGui::SameLine();
+            HelpMarker("Baseline of button will look misaligned with text..");
+
+            // If your line starts with text, call AlignTextToFramePadding() to align text to upcoming widgets.
+            // (because we don't know what's coming after the Text() statement, we need to move the text baseline
+            // down by FramePadding.y ahead of time)
+            ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding();
+            ImGui::Text("OK Blahblah"); ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::Button("Some framed item"); ImGui::SameLine();
+            HelpMarker("We call AlignTextToFramePadding() to vertically align the text baseline by +FramePadding.y");
+
+            // SmallButton() uses the same vertical padding as Text
+            ImGui::Button("TEST##1"); ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::Text("TEST"); ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::SmallButton("TEST##2");
+
+            // If your line starts with text, call AlignTextToFramePadding() to align text to upcoming widgets.
+            ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding();
+            ImGui::Text("Text aligned to framed item"); ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::Button("Item##1"); ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::Text("Item"); ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::SmallButton("Item##2"); ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::Button("Item##3");
+
+            ImGui::Unindent();
+        }
+
+        ImGui::Spacing();
+
+        {
+            ImGui::BulletText("Multi-line text:");
+            ImGui::Indent();
+            ImGui::Text("One\nTwo\nThree"); ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::Text("Hello\nWorld"); ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::Text("Banana");
+
+            ImGui::Text("Banana"); ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::Text("Hello\nWorld"); ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::Text("One\nTwo\nThree");
+
+            ImGui::Button("HOP##1"); ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::Text("Banana"); ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::Text("Hello\nWorld"); ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::Text("Banana");
+
+            ImGui::Button("HOP##2"); ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::Text("Hello\nWorld"); ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::Text("Banana");
+            ImGui::Unindent();
+        }
+
+        ImGui::Spacing();
+
+        {
+            ImGui::BulletText("Misc items:");
+            ImGui::Indent();
+
+            // SmallButton() sets FramePadding to zero. Text baseline is aligned to match baseline of previous Button.
+            ImGui::Button("80x80", ImVec2(80, 80));
+            ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::Button("50x50", ImVec2(50, 50));
+            ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::Button("Button()");
+            ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::SmallButton("SmallButton()");
+
+            // Tree
+            const float spacing = ImGui::GetStyle().ItemInnerSpacing.x;
+            ImGui::Button("Button##1");
+            ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, spacing);
+            if (ImGui::TreeNode("Node##1"))
+            {
+                // Placeholder tree data
+                for (int i = 0; i < 6; i++)
+                    ImGui::BulletText("Item %d..", i);
+                ImGui::TreePop();
+            }
+
+            // Vertically align text node a bit lower so it'll be vertically centered with upcoming widget.
+            // Otherwise you can use SmallButton() (smaller fit).
+            ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding();
+
+            // Common mistake to avoid: if we want to SameLine after TreeNode we need to do it before we add
+            // other contents below the node.
+            bool node_open = ImGui::TreeNode("Node##2");
+            ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, spacing); ImGui::Button("Button##2");
+            if (node_open)
+            {
+                // Placeholder tree data
+                for (int i = 0; i < 6; i++)
+                    ImGui::BulletText("Item %d..", i);
+                ImGui::TreePop();
+            }
+
+            // Bullet
+            ImGui::Button("Button##3");
+            ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, spacing);
+            ImGui::BulletText("Bullet text");
+
+            ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding();
+            ImGui::BulletText("Node");
+            ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, spacing); ImGui::Button("Button##4");
+            ImGui::Unindent();
+        }
+
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Scrolling");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Scrolling"))
+    {
+        // Vertical scroll functions
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Scrolling/Vertical");
+        HelpMarker("Use SetScrollHereY() or SetScrollFromPosY() to scroll to a given vertical position.");
+
+        static int track_item = 50;
+        static bool enable_track = true;
+        static bool enable_extra_decorations = false;
+        static float scroll_to_off_px = 0.0f;
+        static float scroll_to_pos_px = 200.0f;
+
+        ImGui::Checkbox("Decoration", &enable_extra_decorations);
+
+        ImGui::Checkbox("Track", &enable_track);
+        ImGui::PushItemWidth(100);
+        ImGui::SameLine(140); enable_track |= ImGui::DragInt("##item", &track_item, 0.25f, 0, 99, "Item = %d");
+
+        bool scroll_to_off = ImGui::Button("Scroll Offset");
+        ImGui::SameLine(140); scroll_to_off |= ImGui::DragFloat("##off", &scroll_to_off_px, 1.00f, 0, FLT_MAX, "+%.0f px");
+
+        bool scroll_to_pos = ImGui::Button("Scroll To Pos");
+        ImGui::SameLine(140); scroll_to_pos |= ImGui::DragFloat("##pos", &scroll_to_pos_px, 1.00f, -10, FLT_MAX, "X/Y = %.0f px");
+        ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+
+        if (scroll_to_off || scroll_to_pos)
+            enable_track = false;
+
+        ImGuiStyle& style = ImGui::GetStyle();
+        float child_w = (ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x - 4 * style.ItemSpacing.x) / 5;
+        if (child_w < 1.0f)
+            child_w = 1.0f;
+        ImGui::PushID("##VerticalScrolling");
+        for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++)
+        {
+            if (i > 0) ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::BeginGroup();
+            const char* names[] = { "Top", "25%", "Center", "75%", "Bottom" };
+            ImGui::TextUnformatted(names[i]);
+
+            const ImGuiWindowFlags child_flags = enable_extra_decorations ? ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar : 0;
+            const ImGuiID child_id = ImGui::GetID((void*)(intptr_t)i);
+            const bool child_is_visible = ImGui::BeginChild(child_id, ImVec2(child_w, 200.0f), true, child_flags);
+            if (ImGui::BeginMenuBar())
+            {
+                ImGui::TextUnformatted("abc");
+                ImGui::EndMenuBar();
+            }
+            if (scroll_to_off)
+                ImGui::SetScrollY(scroll_to_off_px);
+            if (scroll_to_pos)
+                ImGui::SetScrollFromPosY(ImGui::GetCursorStartPos().y + scroll_to_pos_px, i * 0.25f);
+            if (child_is_visible) // Avoid calling SetScrollHereY when running with culled items
+            {
+                for (int item = 0; item < 100; item++)
+                {
+                    if (enable_track && item == track_item)
+                    {
+                        ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1, 1, 0, 1), "Item %d", item);
+                        ImGui::SetScrollHereY(i * 0.25f); // 0.0f:top, 0.5f:center, 1.0f:bottom
+                    }
+                    else
+                    {
+                        ImGui::Text("Item %d", item);
+                    }
+                }
+            }
+            float scroll_y = ImGui::GetScrollY();
+            float scroll_max_y = ImGui::GetScrollMaxY();
+            ImGui::EndChild();
+            ImGui::Text("%.0f/%.0f", scroll_y, scroll_max_y);
+            ImGui::EndGroup();
+        }
+        ImGui::PopID();
+
+        // Horizontal scroll functions
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Scrolling/Horizontal");
+        ImGui::Spacing();
+        HelpMarker(
+            "Use SetScrollHereX() or SetScrollFromPosX() to scroll to a given horizontal position.\n\n"
+            "Because the clipping rectangle of most window hides half worth of WindowPadding on the "
+            "left/right, using SetScrollFromPosX(+1) will usually result in clipped text whereas the "
+            "equivalent SetScrollFromPosY(+1) wouldn't.");
+        ImGui::PushID("##HorizontalScrolling");
+        for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++)
+        {
+            float child_height = ImGui::GetTextLineHeight() + style.ScrollbarSize + style.WindowPadding.y * 2.0f;
+            ImGuiWindowFlags child_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar | (enable_extra_decorations ? ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysVerticalScrollbar : 0);
+            ImGuiID child_id = ImGui::GetID((void*)(intptr_t)i);
+            bool child_is_visible = ImGui::BeginChild(child_id, ImVec2(-100, child_height), true, child_flags);
+            if (scroll_to_off)
+                ImGui::SetScrollX(scroll_to_off_px);
+            if (scroll_to_pos)
+                ImGui::SetScrollFromPosX(ImGui::GetCursorStartPos().x + scroll_to_pos_px, i * 0.25f);
+            if (child_is_visible) // Avoid calling SetScrollHereY when running with culled items
+            {
+                for (int item = 0; item < 100; item++)
+                {
+                    if (item > 0)
+                        ImGui::SameLine();
+                    if (enable_track && item == track_item)
+                    {
+                        ImGui::TextColored(ImVec4(1, 1, 0, 1), "Item %d", item);
+                        ImGui::SetScrollHereX(i * 0.25f); // 0.0f:left, 0.5f:center, 1.0f:right
+                    }
+                    else
+                    {
+                        ImGui::Text("Item %d", item);
+                    }
+                }
+            }
+            float scroll_x = ImGui::GetScrollX();
+            float scroll_max_x = ImGui::GetScrollMaxX();
+            ImGui::EndChild();
+            ImGui::SameLine();
+            const char* names[] = { "Left", "25%", "Center", "75%", "Right" };
+            ImGui::Text("%s\n%.0f/%.0f", names[i], scroll_x, scroll_max_x);
+            ImGui::Spacing();
+        }
+        ImGui::PopID();
+
+        // Miscellaneous Horizontal Scrolling Demo
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Scrolling/Horizontal (more)");
+        HelpMarker(
+            "Horizontal scrolling for a window is enabled via the ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar flag.\n\n"
+            "You may want to also explicitly specify content width by using SetNextWindowContentWidth() before Begin().");
+        static int lines = 7;
+        ImGui::SliderInt("Lines", &lines, 1, 15);
+        ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FrameRounding, 3.0f);
+        ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(2.0f, 1.0f));
+        ImVec2 scrolling_child_size = ImVec2(0, ImGui::GetFrameHeightWithSpacing() * 7 + 30);
+        ImGui::BeginChild("scrolling", scrolling_child_size, true, ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar);
+        for (int line = 0; line < lines; line++)
+        {
+            // Display random stuff. For the sake of this trivial demo we are using basic Button() + SameLine()
+            // If you want to create your own time line for a real application you may be better off manipulating
+            // the cursor position yourself, aka using SetCursorPos/SetCursorScreenPos to position the widgets
+            // yourself. You may also want to use the lower-level ImDrawList API.
+            int num_buttons = 10 + ((line & 1) ? line * 9 : line * 3);
+            for (int n = 0; n < num_buttons; n++)
+            {
+                if (n > 0) ImGui::SameLine();
+                ImGui::PushID(n + line * 1000);
+                char num_buf[16];
+                sprintf(num_buf, "%d", n);
+                const char* label = (!(n % 15)) ? "FizzBuzz" : (!(n % 3)) ? "Fizz" : (!(n % 5)) ? "Buzz" : num_buf;
+                float hue = n * 0.05f;
+                ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(hue, 0.6f, 0.6f));
+                ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(hue, 0.7f, 0.7f));
+                ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ButtonActive, (ImVec4)ImColor::HSV(hue, 0.8f, 0.8f));
+                ImGui::Button(label, ImVec2(40.0f + sinf((float)(line + n)) * 20.0f, 0.0f));
+                ImGui::PopStyleColor(3);
+                ImGui::PopID();
+            }
+        }
+        float scroll_x = ImGui::GetScrollX();
+        float scroll_max_x = ImGui::GetScrollMaxX();
+        ImGui::EndChild();
+        ImGui::PopStyleVar(2);
+        float scroll_x_delta = 0.0f;
+        ImGui::SmallButton("<<");
+        if (ImGui::IsItemActive())
+            scroll_x_delta = -ImGui::GetIO().DeltaTime * 1000.0f;
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::Text("Scroll from code"); ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::SmallButton(">>");
+        if (ImGui::IsItemActive())
+            scroll_x_delta = +ImGui::GetIO().DeltaTime * 1000.0f;
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::Text("%.0f/%.0f", scroll_x, scroll_max_x);
+        if (scroll_x_delta != 0.0f)
+        {
+            // Demonstrate a trick: you can use Begin to set yourself in the context of another window
+            // (here we are already out of your child window)
+            ImGui::BeginChild("scrolling");
+            ImGui::SetScrollX(ImGui::GetScrollX() + scroll_x_delta);
+            ImGui::EndChild();
+        }
+        ImGui::Spacing();
+
+        static bool show_horizontal_contents_size_demo_window = false;
+        ImGui::Checkbox("Show Horizontal contents size demo window", &show_horizontal_contents_size_demo_window);
+
+        if (show_horizontal_contents_size_demo_window)
+        {
+            static bool show_h_scrollbar = true;
+            static bool show_button = true;
+            static bool show_tree_nodes = true;
+            static bool show_text_wrapped = false;
+            static bool show_columns = true;
+            static bool show_tab_bar = true;
+            static bool show_child = false;
+            static bool explicit_content_size = false;
+            static float contents_size_x = 300.0f;
+            if (explicit_content_size)
+                ImGui::SetNextWindowContentSize(ImVec2(contents_size_x, 0.0f));
+            ImGui::Begin("Horizontal contents size demo window", &show_horizontal_contents_size_demo_window, show_h_scrollbar ? ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar : 0);
+            IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Scrolling/Horizontal contents size demo window");
+            ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(2, 0));
+            ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(2, 0));
+            HelpMarker("Test of different widgets react and impact the work rectangle growing when horizontal scrolling is enabled.\n\nUse 'Metrics->Tools->Show windows rectangles' to visualize rectangles.");
+            ImGui::Checkbox("H-scrollbar", &show_h_scrollbar);
+            ImGui::Checkbox("Button", &show_button);            // Will grow contents size (unless explicitly overwritten)
+            ImGui::Checkbox("Tree nodes", &show_tree_nodes);    // Will grow contents size and display highlight over full width
+            ImGui::Checkbox("Text wrapped", &show_text_wrapped);// Will grow and use contents size
+            ImGui::Checkbox("Columns", &show_columns);          // Will use contents size
+            ImGui::Checkbox("Tab bar", &show_tab_bar);          // Will use contents size
+            ImGui::Checkbox("Child", &show_child);              // Will grow and use contents size
+            ImGui::Checkbox("Explicit content size", &explicit_content_size);
+            ImGui::Text("Scroll %.1f/%.1f %.1f/%.1f", ImGui::GetScrollX(), ImGui::GetScrollMaxX(), ImGui::GetScrollY(), ImGui::GetScrollMaxY());
+            if (explicit_content_size)
+            {
+                ImGui::SameLine();
+                ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(100);
+                ImGui::DragFloat("##csx", &contents_size_x);
+                ImVec2 p = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
+                ImGui::GetWindowDrawList()->AddRectFilled(p, ImVec2(p.x + 10, p.y + 10), IM_COL32_WHITE);
+                ImGui::GetWindowDrawList()->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(p.x + contents_size_x - 10, p.y), ImVec2(p.x + contents_size_x, p.y + 10), IM_COL32_WHITE);
+                ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2(0, 10));
+            }
+            ImGui::PopStyleVar(2);
+            ImGui::Separator();
+            if (show_button)
+            {
+                ImGui::Button("this is a 300-wide button", ImVec2(300, 0));
+            }
+            if (show_tree_nodes)
+            {
+                bool open = true;
+                if (ImGui::TreeNode("this is a tree node"))
+                {
+                    if (ImGui::TreeNode("another one of those tree node..."))
+                    {
+                        ImGui::Text("Some tree contents");
+                        ImGui::TreePop();
+                    }
+                    ImGui::TreePop();
+                }
+                ImGui::CollapsingHeader("CollapsingHeader", &open);
+            }
+            if (show_text_wrapped)
+            {
+                ImGui::TextWrapped("This text should automatically wrap on the edge of the work rectangle.");
+            }
+            if (show_columns)
+            {
+                ImGui::Text("Tables:");
+                if (ImGui::BeginTable("table", 4, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders))
+                {
+                    for (int n = 0; n < 4; n++)
+                    {
+                        ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                        ImGui::Text("Width %.2f", ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x);
+                    }
+                    ImGui::EndTable();
+                }
+                ImGui::Text("Columns:");
+                ImGui::Columns(4);
+                for (int n = 0; n < 4; n++)
+                {
+                    ImGui::Text("Width %.2f", ImGui::GetColumnWidth());
+                    ImGui::NextColumn();
+                }
+                ImGui::Columns(1);
+            }
+            if (show_tab_bar && ImGui::BeginTabBar("Hello"))
+            {
+                if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("OneOneOne")) { ImGui::EndTabItem(); }
+                if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("TwoTwoTwo")) { ImGui::EndTabItem(); }
+                if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("ThreeThreeThree")) { ImGui::EndTabItem(); }
+                if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("FourFourFour")) { ImGui::EndTabItem(); }
+                ImGui::EndTabBar();
+            }
+            if (show_child)
+            {
+                ImGui::BeginChild("child", ImVec2(0, 0), true);
+                ImGui::EndChild();
+            }
+            ImGui::End();
+        }
+
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Layout/Clipping");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Clipping"))
+    {
+        static ImVec2 size(100.0f, 100.0f);
+        static ImVec2 offset(30.0f, 30.0f);
+        ImGui::DragFloat2("size", (float*)&size, 0.5f, 1.0f, 200.0f, "%.0f");
+        ImGui::TextWrapped("(Click and drag to scroll)");
+
+        HelpMarker(
+            "(Left) Using ImGui::PushClipRect():\n"
+            "Will alter ImGui hit-testing logic + ImDrawList rendering.\n"
+            "(use this if you want your clipping rectangle to affect interactions)\n\n"
+            "(Center) Using ImDrawList::PushClipRect():\n"
+            "Will alter ImDrawList rendering only.\n"
+            "(use this as a shortcut if you are only using ImDrawList calls)\n\n"
+            "(Right) Using ImDrawList::AddText() with a fine ClipRect:\n"
+            "Will alter only this specific ImDrawList::AddText() rendering.\n"
+            "This is often used internally to avoid altering the clipping rectangle and minimize draw calls.");
+
+        for (int n = 0; n < 3; n++)
+        {
+            if (n > 0)
+                ImGui::SameLine();
+
+            ImGui::PushID(n);
+            ImGui::InvisibleButton("##canvas", size);
+            if (ImGui::IsItemActive() && ImGui::IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton_Left))
+            {
+                offset.x += ImGui::GetIO().MouseDelta.x;
+                offset.y += ImGui::GetIO().MouseDelta.y;
+            }
+            ImGui::PopID();
+            if (!ImGui::IsItemVisible()) // Skip rendering as ImDrawList elements are not clipped.
+                continue;
+
+            const ImVec2 p0 = ImGui::GetItemRectMin();
+            const ImVec2 p1 = ImGui::GetItemRectMax();
+            const char* text_str = "Line 1 hello\nLine 2 clip me!";
+            const ImVec2 text_pos = ImVec2(p0.x + offset.x, p0.y + offset.y);
+            ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList();
+            switch (n)
+            {
+            case 0:
+                ImGui::PushClipRect(p0, p1, true);
+                draw_list->AddRectFilled(p0, p1, IM_COL32(90, 90, 120, 255));
+                draw_list->AddText(text_pos, IM_COL32_WHITE, text_str);
+                ImGui::PopClipRect();
+                break;
+            case 1:
+                draw_list->PushClipRect(p0, p1, true);
+                draw_list->AddRectFilled(p0, p1, IM_COL32(90, 90, 120, 255));
+                draw_list->AddText(text_pos, IM_COL32_WHITE, text_str);
+                draw_list->PopClipRect();
+                break;
+            case 2:
+                ImVec4 clip_rect(p0.x, p0.y, p1.x, p1.y); // AddText() takes a ImVec4* here so let's convert.
+                draw_list->AddRectFilled(p0, p1, IM_COL32(90, 90, 120, 255));
+                draw_list->AddText(ImGui::GetFont(), ImGui::GetFontSize(), text_pos, IM_COL32_WHITE, text_str, NULL, 0.0f, &clip_rect);
+                break;
+            }
+        }
+
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+}
+
+static void ShowDemoWindowPopups()
+{
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Popups");
+    if (!ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Popups & Modal windows"))
+        return;
+
+    // The properties of popups windows are:
+    // - They block normal mouse hovering detection outside them. (*)
+    // - Unless modal, they can be closed by clicking anywhere outside them, or by pressing ESCAPE.
+    // - Their visibility state (~bool) is held internally by Dear ImGui instead of being held by the programmer as
+    //   we are used to with regular Begin() calls. User can manipulate the visibility state by calling OpenPopup().
+    // (*) One can use IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup) to bypass it and detect hovering even
+    //     when normally blocked by a popup.
+    // Those three properties are connected. The library needs to hold their visibility state BECAUSE it can close
+    // popups at any time.
+
+    // Typical use for regular windows:
+    //   bool my_tool_is_active = false; if (ImGui::Button("Open")) my_tool_is_active = true; [...] if (my_tool_is_active) Begin("My Tool", &my_tool_is_active) { [...] } End();
+    // Typical use for popups:
+    //   if (ImGui::Button("Open")) ImGui::OpenPopup("MyPopup"); if (ImGui::BeginPopup("MyPopup") { [...] EndPopup(); }
+
+    // With popups we have to go through a library call (here OpenPopup) to manipulate the visibility state.
+    // This may be a bit confusing at first but it should quickly make sense. Follow on the examples below.
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Popups/Popups");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Popups"))
+    {
+        ImGui::TextWrapped(
+            "When a popup is active, it inhibits interacting with windows that are behind the popup. "
+            "Clicking outside the popup closes it.");
+
+        static int selected_fish = -1;
+        const char* names[] = { "Bream", "Haddock", "Mackerel", "Pollock", "Tilefish" };
+        static bool toggles[] = { true, false, false, false, false };
+
+        // Simple selection popup (if you want to show the current selection inside the Button itself,
+        // you may want to build a string using the "###" operator to preserve a constant ID with a variable label)
+        if (ImGui::Button("Select.."))
+            ImGui::OpenPopup("my_select_popup");
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::TextUnformatted(selected_fish == -1 ? "<None>" : names[selected_fish]);
+        if (ImGui::BeginPopup("my_select_popup"))
+        {
+            ImGui::Text("Aquarium");
+            ImGui::Separator();
+            for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(names); i++)
+                if (ImGui::Selectable(names[i]))
+                    selected_fish = i;
+            ImGui::EndPopup();
+        }
+
+        // Showing a menu with toggles
+        if (ImGui::Button("Toggle.."))
+            ImGui::OpenPopup("my_toggle_popup");
+        if (ImGui::BeginPopup("my_toggle_popup"))
+        {
+            for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(names); i++)
+                ImGui::MenuItem(names[i], "", &toggles[i]);
+            if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Sub-menu"))
+            {
+                ImGui::MenuItem("Click me");
+                ImGui::EndMenu();
+            }
+
+            ImGui::Separator();
+            ImGui::Text("Tooltip here");
+            if (ImGui::IsItemHovered())
+                ImGui::SetTooltip("I am a tooltip over a popup");
+
+            if (ImGui::Button("Stacked Popup"))
+                ImGui::OpenPopup("another popup");
+            if (ImGui::BeginPopup("another popup"))
+            {
+                for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(names); i++)
+                    ImGui::MenuItem(names[i], "", &toggles[i]);
+                if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Sub-menu"))
+                {
+                    ImGui::MenuItem("Click me");
+                    if (ImGui::Button("Stacked Popup"))
+                        ImGui::OpenPopup("another popup");
+                    if (ImGui::BeginPopup("another popup"))
+                    {
+                        ImGui::Text("I am the last one here.");
+                        ImGui::EndPopup();
+                    }
+                    ImGui::EndMenu();
+                }
+                ImGui::EndPopup();
+            }
+            ImGui::EndPopup();
+        }
+
+        // Call the more complete ShowExampleMenuFile which we use in various places of this demo
+        if (ImGui::Button("With a menu.."))
+            ImGui::OpenPopup("my_file_popup");
+        if (ImGui::BeginPopup("my_file_popup", ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar))
+        {
+            if (ImGui::BeginMenuBar())
+            {
+                if (ImGui::BeginMenu("File"))
+                {
+                    ShowExampleMenuFile();
+                    ImGui::EndMenu();
+                }
+                if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Edit"))
+                {
+                    ImGui::MenuItem("Dummy");
+                    ImGui::EndMenu();
+                }
+                ImGui::EndMenuBar();
+            }
+            ImGui::Text("Hello from popup!");
+            ImGui::Button("This is a dummy button..");
+            ImGui::EndPopup();
+        }
+
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Popups/Context menus");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Context menus"))
+    {
+        HelpMarker("\"Context\" functions are simple helpers to associate a Popup to a given Item or Window identifier.");
+
+        // BeginPopupContextItem() is a helper to provide common/simple popup behavior of essentially doing:
+        //     if (id == 0)
+        //         id = GetItemID(); // Use last item id
+        //     if (IsItemHovered() && IsMouseReleased(ImGuiMouseButton_Right))
+        //         OpenPopup(id);
+        //     return BeginPopup(id);
+        // For advanced advanced uses you may want to replicate and customize this code.
+        // See more details in BeginPopupContextItem().
+
+        // Example 1
+        // When used after an item that has an ID (e.g. Button), we can skip providing an ID to BeginPopupContextItem(),
+        // and BeginPopupContextItem() will use the last item ID as the popup ID.
+        {
+            const char* names[5] = { "Label1", "Label2", "Label3", "Label4", "Label5" };
+            for (int n = 0; n < 5; n++)
+            {
+                ImGui::Selectable(names[n]);
+                if (ImGui::BeginPopupContextItem()) // <-- use last item id as popup id
+                {
+                    ImGui::Text("This a popup for \"%s\"!", names[n]);
+                    if (ImGui::Button("Close"))
+                        ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup();
+                    ImGui::EndPopup();
+                }
+                if (ImGui::IsItemHovered())
+                    ImGui::SetTooltip("Right-click to open popup");
+            }
+        }
+
+        // Example 2
+        // Popup on a Text() element which doesn't have an identifier: we need to provide an identifier to BeginPopupContextItem().
+        // Using an explicit identifier is also convenient if you want to activate the popups from different locations.
+        {
+            HelpMarker("Text() elements don't have stable identifiers so we need to provide one.");
+            static float value = 0.5f;
+            ImGui::Text("Value = %.3f <-- (1) right-click this text", value);
+            if (ImGui::BeginPopupContextItem("my popup"))
+            {
+                if (ImGui::Selectable("Set to zero")) value = 0.0f;
+                if (ImGui::Selectable("Set to PI")) value = 3.1415f;
+                ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(-FLT_MIN);
+                ImGui::DragFloat("##Value", &value, 0.1f, 0.0f, 0.0f);
+                ImGui::EndPopup();
+            }
+
+            // We can also use OpenPopupOnItemClick() to toggle the visibility of a given popup.
+            // Here we make it that right-clicking this other text element opens the same popup as above.
+            // The popup itself will be submitted by the code above.
+            ImGui::Text("(2) Or right-click this text");
+            ImGui::OpenPopupOnItemClick("my popup", ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight);
+
+            // Back to square one: manually open the same popup.
+            if (ImGui::Button("(3) Or click this button"))
+                ImGui::OpenPopup("my popup");
+        }
+
+        // Example 3
+        // When using BeginPopupContextItem() with an implicit identifier (NULL == use last item ID),
+        // we need to make sure your item identifier is stable.
+        // In this example we showcase altering the item label while preserving its identifier, using the ### operator (see FAQ).
+        {
+            HelpMarker("Showcase using a popup ID linked to item ID, with the item having a changing label + stable ID using the ### operator.");
+            static char name[32] = "Label1";
+            char buf[64];
+            sprintf(buf, "Button: %s###Button", name); // ### operator override ID ignoring the preceding label
+            ImGui::Button(buf);
+            if (ImGui::BeginPopupContextItem())
+            {
+                ImGui::Text("Edit name:");
+                ImGui::InputText("##edit", name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(name));
+                if (ImGui::Button("Close"))
+                    ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup();
+                ImGui::EndPopup();
+            }
+            ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::Text("(<-- right-click here)");
+        }
+
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Popups/Modals");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Modals"))
+    {
+        ImGui::TextWrapped("Modal windows are like popups but the user cannot close them by clicking outside.");
+
+        if (ImGui::Button("Delete.."))
+            ImGui::OpenPopup("Delete?");
+
+        // Always center this window when appearing
+        ImVec2 center = ImGui::GetMainViewport()->GetCenter();
+        ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(center, ImGuiCond_Appearing, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f));
+
+        if (ImGui::BeginPopupModal("Delete?", NULL, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize))
+        {
+            ImGui::Text("All those beautiful files will be deleted.\nThis operation cannot be undone!\n\n");
+            ImGui::Separator();
+
+            //static int unused_i = 0;
+            //ImGui::Combo("Combo", &unused_i, "Delete\0Delete harder\0");
+
+            static bool dont_ask_me_next_time = false;
+            ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(0, 0));
+            ImGui::Checkbox("Don't ask me next time", &dont_ask_me_next_time);
+            ImGui::PopStyleVar();
+
+            if (ImGui::Button("OK", ImVec2(120, 0))) { ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup(); }
+            ImGui::SetItemDefaultFocus();
+            ImGui::SameLine();
+            if (ImGui::Button("Cancel", ImVec2(120, 0))) { ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup(); }
+            ImGui::EndPopup();
+        }
+
+        if (ImGui::Button("Stacked modals.."))
+            ImGui::OpenPopup("Stacked 1");
+        if (ImGui::BeginPopupModal("Stacked 1", NULL, ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar))
+        {
+            if (ImGui::BeginMenuBar())
+            {
+                if (ImGui::BeginMenu("File"))
+                {
+                    if (ImGui::MenuItem("Some menu item")) {}
+                    ImGui::EndMenu();
+                }
+                ImGui::EndMenuBar();
+            }
+            ImGui::Text("Hello from Stacked The First\nUsing style.Colors[ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg] behind it.");
+
+            // Testing behavior of widgets stacking their own regular popups over the modal.
+            static int item = 1;
+            static float color[4] = { 0.4f, 0.7f, 0.0f, 0.5f };
+            ImGui::Combo("Combo", &item, "aaaa\0bbbb\0cccc\0dddd\0eeee\0\0");
+            ImGui::ColorEdit4("color", color);
+
+            if (ImGui::Button("Add another modal.."))
+                ImGui::OpenPopup("Stacked 2");
+
+            // Also demonstrate passing a bool* to BeginPopupModal(), this will create a regular close button which
+            // will close the popup. Note that the visibility state of popups is owned by imgui, so the input value
+            // of the bool actually doesn't matter here.
+            bool unused_open = true;
+            if (ImGui::BeginPopupModal("Stacked 2", &unused_open))
+            {
+                ImGui::Text("Hello from Stacked The Second!");
+                if (ImGui::Button("Close"))
+                    ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup();
+                ImGui::EndPopup();
+            }
+
+            if (ImGui::Button("Close"))
+                ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup();
+            ImGui::EndPopup();
+        }
+
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Popups/Menus inside a regular window");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Menus inside a regular window"))
+    {
+        ImGui::TextWrapped("Below we are testing adding menu items to a regular window. It's rather unusual but should work!");
+        ImGui::Separator();
+
+        ImGui::MenuItem("Menu item", "CTRL+M");
+        if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Menu inside a regular window"))
+        {
+            ShowExampleMenuFile();
+            ImGui::EndMenu();
+        }
+        ImGui::Separator();
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+}
+
+// Dummy data structure that we use for the Table demo.
+// (pre-C++11 doesn't allow us to instantiate ImVector<MyItem> template if this structure if defined inside the demo function)
+namespace
+{
+// We are passing our own identifier to TableSetupColumn() to facilitate identifying columns in the sorting code.
+// This identifier will be passed down into ImGuiTableSortSpec::ColumnUserID.
+// But it is possible to omit the user id parameter of TableSetupColumn() and just use the column index instead! (ImGuiTableSortSpec::ColumnIndex)
+// If you don't use sorting, you will generally never care about giving column an ID!
+enum MyItemColumnID
+{
+    MyItemColumnID_ID,
+    MyItemColumnID_Name,
+    MyItemColumnID_Action,
+    MyItemColumnID_Quantity,
+    MyItemColumnID_Description
+};
+
+struct MyItem
+{
+    int         ID;
+    const char* Name;
+    int         Quantity;
+
+    // We have a problem which is affecting _only this demo_ and should not affect your code:
+    // As we don't rely on std:: or other third-party library to compile dear imgui, we only have reliable access to qsort(),
+    // however qsort doesn't allow passing user data to comparing function.
+    // As a workaround, we are storing the sort specs in a static/global for the comparing function to access.
+    // In your own use case you would probably pass the sort specs to your sorting/comparing functions directly and not use a global.
+    // We could technically call ImGui::TableGetSortSpecs() in CompareWithSortSpecs(), but considering that this function is called
+    // very often by the sorting algorithm it would be a little wasteful.
+    static const ImGuiTableSortSpecs* s_current_sort_specs;
+
+    // Compare function to be used by qsort()
+    static int IMGUI_CDECL CompareWithSortSpecs(const void* lhs, const void* rhs)
+    {
+        const MyItem* a = (const MyItem*)lhs;
+        const MyItem* b = (const MyItem*)rhs;
+        for (int n = 0; n < s_current_sort_specs->SpecsCount; n++)
+        {
+            // Here we identify columns using the ColumnUserID value that we ourselves passed to TableSetupColumn()
+            // We could also choose to identify columns based on their index (sort_spec->ColumnIndex), which is simpler!
+            const ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs* sort_spec = &s_current_sort_specs->Specs[n];
+            int delta = 0;
+            switch (sort_spec->ColumnUserID)
+            {
+            case MyItemColumnID_ID:             delta = (a->ID - b->ID);                break;
+            case MyItemColumnID_Name:           delta = (strcmp(a->Name, b->Name));     break;
+            case MyItemColumnID_Quantity:       delta = (a->Quantity - b->Quantity);    break;
+            case MyItemColumnID_Description:    delta = (strcmp(a->Name, b->Name));     break;
+            default: IM_ASSERT(0); break;
+            }
+            if (delta > 0)
+                return (sort_spec->SortDirection == ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending) ? +1 : -1;
+            if (delta < 0)
+                return (sort_spec->SortDirection == ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending) ? -1 : +1;
+        }
+
+        // qsort() is instable so always return a way to differenciate items.
+        // Your own compare function may want to avoid fallback on implicit sort specs e.g. a Name compare if it wasn't already part of the sort specs.
+        return (a->ID - b->ID);
+    }
+};
+const ImGuiTableSortSpecs* MyItem::s_current_sort_specs = NULL;
+}
+
+// Make the UI compact because there are so many fields
+static void PushStyleCompact()
+{
+    ImGuiStyle& style = ImGui::GetStyle();
+    ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x, (float)(int)(style.FramePadding.y * 0.60f)));
+    ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(style.ItemSpacing.x, (float)(int)(style.ItemSpacing.y * 0.60f)));
+}
+
+static void PopStyleCompact()
+{
+    ImGui::PopStyleVar(2);
+}
+
+// Show a combo box with a choice of sizing policies
+static void EditTableSizingFlags(ImGuiTableFlags* p_flags)
+{
+    struct EnumDesc { ImGuiTableFlags Value; const char* Name; const char* Tooltip; };
+    static const EnumDesc policies[] =
+    {
+        { ImGuiTableFlags_None,               "Default",                            "Use default sizing policy:\n- ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit if ScrollX is on or if host window has ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize.\n- ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame otherwise." },
+        { ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit,     "ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit",     "Columns default to _WidthFixed (if resizable) or _WidthAuto (if not resizable), matching contents width." },
+        { ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame,    "ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame",    "Columns are all the same width, matching the maximum contents width.\nImplicitly disable ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable and enable ImGuiTableFlags_NoKeepColumnsVisible." },
+        { ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchProp,  "ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchProp",  "Columns default to _WidthStretch with weights proportional to their widths." },
+        { ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame,  "ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame",  "Columns default to _WidthStretch with same weights." }
+    };
+    int idx;
+    for (idx = 0; idx < IM_ARRAYSIZE(policies); idx++)
+        if (policies[idx].Value == (*p_flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_))
+            break;
+    const char* preview_text = (idx < IM_ARRAYSIZE(policies)) ? policies[idx].Name + (idx > 0 ? strlen("ImGuiTableFlags") : 0) : "";
+    if (ImGui::BeginCombo("Sizing Policy", preview_text))
+    {
+        for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(policies); n++)
+            if (ImGui::Selectable(policies[n].Name, idx == n))
+                *p_flags = (*p_flags & ~ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_) | policies[n].Value;
+        ImGui::EndCombo();
+    }
+    ImGui::SameLine();
+    ImGui::TextDisabled("(?)");
+    if (ImGui::IsItemHovered())
+    {
+        ImGui::BeginTooltip();
+        ImGui::PushTextWrapPos(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 50.0f);
+        for (int m = 0; m < IM_ARRAYSIZE(policies); m++)
+        {
+            ImGui::Separator();
+            ImGui::Text("%s:", policies[m].Name);
+            ImGui::Separator();
+            ImGui::SetCursorPosX(ImGui::GetCursorPosX() + ImGui::GetStyle().IndentSpacing * 0.5f);
+            ImGui::TextUnformatted(policies[m].Tooltip);
+        }
+        ImGui::PopTextWrapPos();
+        ImGui::EndTooltip();
+    }
+}
+
+static void EditTableColumnsFlags(ImGuiTableColumnFlags* p_flags)
+{
+    ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_Disabled", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_Disabled); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Master disable flag (also hide from context menu)");
+    ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_DefaultHide", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultHide);
+    ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_DefaultSort", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultSort);
+    if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_WidthStretch", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch))
+        *p_flags &= ~(ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthMask_ ^ ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch);
+    if (ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_WidthFixed", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed))
+        *p_flags &= ~(ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthMask_ ^ ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed);
+    ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_NoResize", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize);
+    ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_NoReorder", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoReorder);
+    ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_NoHide", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHide);
+    ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_NoClip", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoClip);
+    ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_NoSort", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort);
+    ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_NoSortAscending", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortAscending);
+    ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_NoSortDescending", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortDescending);
+    ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_NoHeaderLabel", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHeaderLabel);
+    ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_NoHeaderWidth", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHeaderWidth);
+    ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_PreferSortAscending", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortAscending);
+    ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_PreferSortDescending", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortDescending);
+    ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_IndentEnable", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentEnable); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Default for column 0");
+    ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_IndentDisable", p_flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentDisable); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Default for column >0");
+}
+
+static void ShowTableColumnsStatusFlags(ImGuiTableColumnFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_IsEnabled", &flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsEnabled);
+    ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_IsVisible", &flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsVisible);
+    ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_IsSorted", &flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsSorted);
+    ImGui::CheckboxFlags("_IsHovered", &flags, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsHovered);
+}
+
+static void ShowDemoWindowTables()
+{
+    //ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(true, ImGuiCond_Once);
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables");
+    if (!ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Tables & Columns"))
+        return;
+
+    // Using those as a base value to create width/height that are factor of the size of our font
+    const float TEXT_BASE_WIDTH = ImGui::CalcTextSize("A").x;
+    const float TEXT_BASE_HEIGHT = ImGui::GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing();
+
+    ImGui::PushID("Tables");
+
+    int open_action = -1;
+    if (ImGui::Button("Open all"))
+        open_action = 1;
+    ImGui::SameLine();
+    if (ImGui::Button("Close all"))
+        open_action = 0;
+    ImGui::SameLine();
+
+    // Options
+    static bool disable_indent = false;
+    ImGui::Checkbox("Disable tree indentation", &disable_indent);
+    ImGui::SameLine();
+    HelpMarker("Disable the indenting of tree nodes so demo tables can use the full window width.");
+    ImGui::Separator();
+    if (disable_indent)
+        ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_IndentSpacing, 0.0f);
+
+    // About Styling of tables
+    // Most settings are configured on a per-table basis via the flags passed to BeginTable() and TableSetupColumns APIs.
+    // There are however a few settings that a shared and part of the ImGuiStyle structure:
+    //   style.CellPadding                          // Padding within each cell
+    //   style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TableHeaderBg]       // Table header background
+    //   style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TableBorderStrong]   // Table outer and header borders
+    //   style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TableBorderLight]    // Table inner borders
+    //   style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TableRowBg]          // Table row background when ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg is enabled (even rows)
+    //   style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TableRowBgAlt]       // Table row background when ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg is enabled (odds rows)
+
+    // Demos
+    if (open_action != -1)
+        ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0);
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Basic");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Basic"))
+    {
+        // Here we will showcase three different ways to output a table.
+        // They are very simple variations of a same thing!
+
+        // [Method 1] Using TableNextRow() to create a new row, and TableSetColumnIndex() to select the column.
+        // In many situations, this is the most flexible and easy to use pattern.
+        HelpMarker("Using TableNextRow() + calling TableSetColumnIndex() _before_ each cell, in a loop.");
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table1", 3))
+        {
+            for (int row = 0; row < 4; row++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++)
+                {
+                    ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column);
+                    ImGui::Text("Row %d Column %d", row, column);
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+
+        // [Method 2] Using TableNextColumn() called multiple times, instead of using a for loop + TableSetColumnIndex().
+        // This is generally more convenient when you have code manually submitting the contents of each columns.
+        HelpMarker("Using TableNextRow() + calling TableNextColumn() _before_ each cell, manually.");
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table2", 3))
+        {
+            for (int row = 0; row < 4; row++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                ImGui::Text("Row %d", row);
+                ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                ImGui::Text("Some contents");
+                ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                ImGui::Text("123.456");
+            }
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+
+        // [Method 3] We call TableNextColumn() _before_ each cell. We never call TableNextRow(),
+        // as TableNextColumn() will automatically wrap around and create new roes as needed.
+        // This is generally more convenient when your cells all contains the same type of data.
+        HelpMarker(
+            "Only using TableNextColumn(), which tends to be convenient for tables where every cells contains the same type of contents.\n"
+            "This is also more similar to the old NextColumn() function of the Columns API, and provided to facilitate the Columns->Tables API transition.");
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table3", 3))
+        {
+            for (int item = 0; item < 14; item++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                ImGui::Text("Item %d", item);
+            }
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    if (open_action != -1)
+        ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0);
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Borders, background");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Borders, background"))
+    {
+        // Expose a few Borders related flags interactively
+        enum ContentsType { CT_Text, CT_FillButton };
+        static ImGuiTableFlags flags = ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg;
+        static bool display_headers = false;
+        static int contents_type = CT_Text;
+
+        PushStyleCompact();
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Borders", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders);
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("ImGuiTableFlags_Borders\n = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV\n | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV\n | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV\n | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH");
+        ImGui::Indent();
+
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersH", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersH);
+        ImGui::Indent();
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH);
+        ImGui::Unindent();
+
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV);
+        ImGui::Indent();
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV);
+        ImGui::Unindent();
+
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInner", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInner);
+        ImGui::Unindent();
+
+        ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding(); ImGui::Text("Cell contents:");
+        ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::RadioButton("Text", &contents_type, CT_Text);
+        ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::RadioButton("FillButton", &contents_type, CT_FillButton);
+        ImGui::Checkbox("Display headers", &display_headers);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Disable vertical borders in columns Body (borders will always appears in Headers");
+        PopStyleCompact();
+
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table1", 3, flags))
+        {
+            // Display headers so we can inspect their interaction with borders.
+            // (Headers are not the main purpose of this section of the demo, so we are not elaborating on them too much. See other sections for details)
+            if (display_headers)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableSetupColumn("One");
+                ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Two");
+                ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Three");
+                ImGui::TableHeadersRow();
+            }
+
+            for (int row = 0; row < 5; row++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++)
+                {
+                    ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column);
+                    char buf[32];
+                    sprintf(buf, "Hello %d,%d", column, row);
+                    if (contents_type == CT_Text)
+                        ImGui::TextUnformatted(buf);
+                    else if (contents_type == CT_FillButton)
+                        ImGui::Button(buf, ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, 0.0f));
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    if (open_action != -1)
+        ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0);
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Resizable, stretch");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Resizable, stretch"))
+    {
+        // By default, if we don't enable ScrollX the sizing policy for each columns is "Stretch"
+        // Each columns maintain a sizing weight, and they will occupy all available width.
+        static ImGuiTableFlags flags = ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV | ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody;
+        PushStyleCompact();
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV);
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Using the _Resizable flag automatically enables the _BordersInnerV flag as well, this is why the resize borders are still showing when unchecking this.");
+        PopStyleCompact();
+
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table1", 3, flags))
+        {
+            for (int row = 0; row < 5; row++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++)
+                {
+                    ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column);
+                    ImGui::Text("Hello %d,%d", column, row);
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    if (open_action != -1)
+        ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0);
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Resizable, fixed");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Resizable, fixed"))
+    {
+        // Here we use ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit (even though _ScrollX is not set)
+        // So columns will adopt the "Fixed" policy and will maintain a fixed width regardless of the whole available width (unless table is small)
+        // If there is not enough available width to fit all columns, they will however be resized down.
+        // FIXME-TABLE: Providing a stretch-on-init would make sense especially for tables which don't have saved settings
+        HelpMarker(
+            "Using _Resizable + _SizingFixedFit flags.\n"
+            "Fixed-width columns generally makes more sense if you want to use horizontal scrolling.\n\n"
+            "Double-click a column border to auto-fit the column to its contents.");
+        PushStyleCompact();
+        static ImGuiTableFlags flags = ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV | ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody;
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX);
+        PopStyleCompact();
+
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table1", 3, flags))
+        {
+            for (int row = 0; row < 5; row++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++)
+                {
+                    ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column);
+                    ImGui::Text("Hello %d,%d", column, row);
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    if (open_action != -1)
+        ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0);
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Resizable, mixed");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Resizable, mixed"))
+    {
+        HelpMarker(
+            "Using TableSetupColumn() to alter resizing policy on a per-column basis.\n\n"
+            "When combining Fixed and Stretch columns, generally you only want one, maybe two trailing columns to use _WidthStretch.");
+        static ImGuiTableFlags flags = ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg | ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable;
+
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table1", 3, flags))
+        {
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("AAA", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed);
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("BBB", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed);
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("CCC", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch);
+            ImGui::TableHeadersRow();
+            for (int row = 0; row < 5; row++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++)
+                {
+                    ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column);
+                    ImGui::Text("%s %d,%d", (column == 2) ? "Stretch" : "Fixed", column, row);
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table2", 6, flags))
+        {
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("AAA", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed);
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("BBB", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed);
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("CCC", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultHide);
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("DDD", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch);
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("EEE", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch);
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("FFF", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultHide);
+            ImGui::TableHeadersRow();
+            for (int row = 0; row < 5; row++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                for (int column = 0; column < 6; column++)
+                {
+                    ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column);
+                    ImGui::Text("%s %d,%d", (column >= 3) ? "Stretch" : "Fixed", column, row);
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    if (open_action != -1)
+        ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0);
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Reorderable, hideable, with headers");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Reorderable, hideable, with headers"))
+    {
+        HelpMarker(
+            "Click and drag column headers to reorder columns.\n\n"
+            "Right-click on a header to open a context menu.");
+        static ImGuiTableFlags flags = ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV;
+        PushStyleCompact();
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Disable vertical borders in columns Body until hovered for resize (borders will always appears in Headers)");
+        PopStyleCompact();
+
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table1", 3, flags))
+        {
+            // Submit columns name with TableSetupColumn() and call TableHeadersRow() to create a row with a header in each column.
+            // (Later we will show how TableSetupColumn() has other uses, optional flags, sizing weight etc.)
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("One");
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Two");
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Three");
+            ImGui::TableHeadersRow();
+            for (int row = 0; row < 6; row++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++)
+                {
+                    ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column);
+                    ImGui::Text("Hello %d,%d", column, row);
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+
+        // Use outer_size.x == 0.0f instead of default to make the table as tight as possible (only valid when no scrolling and no stretch column)
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table2", 3, flags | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f)))
+        {
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("One");
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Two");
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Three");
+            ImGui::TableHeadersRow();
+            for (int row = 0; row < 6; row++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++)
+                {
+                    ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column);
+                    ImGui::Text("Fixed %d,%d", column, row);
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    if (open_action != -1)
+        ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0);
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Padding");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Padding"))
+    {
+        // First example: showcase use of padding flags and effect of BorderOuterV/BorderInnerV on X padding.
+        // We don't expose BorderOuterH/BorderInnerH here because they have no effect on X padding.
+        HelpMarker(
+            "We often want outer padding activated when any using features which makes the edges of a column visible:\n"
+            "e.g.:\n"
+            "- BorderOuterV\n"
+            "- any form of row selection\n"
+            "Because of this, activating BorderOuterV sets the default to PadOuterX. Using PadOuterX or NoPadOuterX you can override the default.\n\n"
+            "Actual padding values are using style.CellPadding.\n\n"
+            "In this demo we don't show horizontal borders to emphasis how they don't affect default horizontal padding.");
+
+        static ImGuiTableFlags flags1 = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV;
+        PushStyleCompact();
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_PadOuterX", &flags1, ImGuiTableFlags_PadOuterX);
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Enable outer-most padding (default if ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV is set)");
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadOuterX", &flags1, ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadOuterX);
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Disable outer-most padding (default if ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV is not set)");
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadInnerX", &flags1, ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadInnerX);
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Disable inner padding between columns (double inner padding if BordersOuterV is on, single inner padding if BordersOuterV is off)");
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV", &flags1, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV", &flags1, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV);
+        static bool show_headers = false;
+        ImGui::Checkbox("show_headers", &show_headers);
+        PopStyleCompact();
+
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_padding", 3, flags1))
+        {
+            if (show_headers)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableSetupColumn("One");
+                ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Two");
+                ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Three");
+                ImGui::TableHeadersRow();
+            }
+
+            for (int row = 0; row < 5; row++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++)
+                {
+                    ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column);
+                    if (row == 0)
+                    {
+                        ImGui::Text("Avail %.2f", ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x);
+                    }
+                    else
+                    {
+                        char buf[32];
+                        sprintf(buf, "Hello %d,%d", column, row);
+                        ImGui::Button(buf, ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, 0.0f));
+                    }
+                    //if (ImGui::TableGetColumnFlags() & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsHovered)
+                    //    ImGui::TableSetBgColor(ImGuiTableBgTarget_CellBg, IM_COL32(0, 100, 0, 255));
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+
+        // Second example: set style.CellPadding to (0.0) or a custom value.
+        // FIXME-TABLE: Vertical border effectively not displayed the same way as horizontal one...
+        HelpMarker("Setting style.CellPadding to (0,0) or a custom value.");
+        static ImGuiTableFlags flags2 = ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg;
+        static ImVec2 cell_padding(0.0f, 0.0f);
+        static bool show_widget_frame_bg = true;
+
+        PushStyleCompact();
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Borders", &flags2, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersH", &flags2, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersH);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV", &flags2, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInner", &flags2, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInner);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter", &flags2, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg", &flags2, ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable", &flags2, ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable);
+        ImGui::Checkbox("show_widget_frame_bg", &show_widget_frame_bg);
+        ImGui::SliderFloat2("CellPadding", &cell_padding.x, 0.0f, 10.0f, "%.0f");
+        PopStyleCompact();
+
+        ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_CellPadding, cell_padding);
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_padding_2", 3, flags2))
+        {
+            static char text_bufs[3 * 5][16]; // Mini text storage for 3x5 cells
+            static bool init = true;
+            if (!show_widget_frame_bg)
+                ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_FrameBg, 0);
+            for (int cell = 0; cell < 3 * 5; cell++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                if (init)
+                    strcpy(text_bufs[cell], "edit me");
+                ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(-FLT_MIN);
+                ImGui::PushID(cell);
+                ImGui::InputText("##cell", text_bufs[cell], IM_ARRAYSIZE(text_bufs[cell]));
+                ImGui::PopID();
+            }
+            if (!show_widget_frame_bg)
+                ImGui::PopStyleColor();
+            init = false;
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+        ImGui::PopStyleVar();
+
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    if (open_action != -1)
+        ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0);
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Explicit widths");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Sizing policies"))
+    {
+        static ImGuiTableFlags flags1 = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg | ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody;
+        PushStyleCompact();
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable", &flags1, ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX", &flags1, ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX);
+        PopStyleCompact();
+
+        static ImGuiTableFlags sizing_policy_flags[4] = { ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit, ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame, ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchProp, ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame };
+        for (int table_n = 0; table_n < 4; table_n++)
+        {
+            ImGui::PushID(table_n);
+            ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(TEXT_BASE_WIDTH * 30);
+            EditTableSizingFlags(&sizing_policy_flags[table_n]);
+
+            // To make it easier to understand the different sizing policy,
+            // For each policy: we display one table where the columns have equal contents width, and one where the columns have different contents width.
+            if (ImGui::BeginTable("table1", 3, sizing_policy_flags[table_n] | flags1))
+            {
+                for (int row = 0; row < 3; row++)
+                {
+                    ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                    ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Text("Oh dear");
+                    ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Text("Oh dear");
+                    ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Text("Oh dear");
+                }
+                ImGui::EndTable();
+            }
+            if (ImGui::BeginTable("table2", 3, sizing_policy_flags[table_n] | flags1))
+            {
+                for (int row = 0; row < 3; row++)
+                {
+                    ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                    ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Text("AAAA");
+                    ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Text("BBBBBBBB");
+                    ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Text("CCCCCCCCCCCC");
+                }
+                ImGui::EndTable();
+            }
+            ImGui::PopID();
+        }
+
+        ImGui::Spacing();
+        ImGui::TextUnformatted("Advanced");
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        HelpMarker("This section allows you to interact and see the effect of various sizing policies depending on whether Scroll is enabled and the contents of your columns.");
+
+        enum ContentsType { CT_ShowWidth, CT_ShortText, CT_LongText, CT_Button, CT_FillButton, CT_InputText };
+        static ImGuiTableFlags flags = ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY | ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable;
+        static int contents_type = CT_ShowWidth;
+        static int column_count = 3;
+
+        PushStyleCompact();
+        ImGui::PushID("Advanced");
+        ImGui::PushItemWidth(TEXT_BASE_WIDTH * 30);
+        EditTableSizingFlags(&flags);
+        ImGui::Combo("Contents", &contents_type, "Show width\0Short Text\0Long Text\0Button\0Fill Button\0InputText\0");
+        if (contents_type == CT_FillButton)
+        {
+            ImGui::SameLine();
+            HelpMarker("Be mindful that using right-alignment (e.g. size.x = -FLT_MIN) creates a feedback loop where contents width can feed into auto-column width can feed into contents width.");
+        }
+        ImGui::DragInt("Columns", &column_count, 0.1f, 1, 64, "%d", ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_PreciseWidths", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_PreciseWidths);
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Disable distributing remainder width to stretched columns (width allocation on a 100-wide table with 3 columns: Without this flag: 33,33,34. With this flag: 33,33,33). With larger number of columns, resizing will appear to be less smooth.");
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip);
+        ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+        ImGui::PopID();
+        PopStyleCompact();
+
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table2", column_count, flags, ImVec2(0.0f, TEXT_BASE_HEIGHT * 7)))
+        {
+            for (int cell = 0; cell < 10 * column_count; cell++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                int column = ImGui::TableGetColumnIndex();
+                int row = ImGui::TableGetRowIndex();
+
+                ImGui::PushID(cell);
+                char label[32];
+                static char text_buf[32] = "";
+                sprintf(label, "Hello %d,%d", column, row);
+                switch (contents_type)
+                {
+                case CT_ShortText:  ImGui::TextUnformatted(label); break;
+                case CT_LongText:   ImGui::Text("Some %s text %d,%d\nOver two lines..", column == 0 ? "long" : "longeeer", column, row); break;
+                case CT_ShowWidth:  ImGui::Text("W: %.1f", ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x); break;
+                case CT_Button:     ImGui::Button(label); break;
+                case CT_FillButton: ImGui::Button(label, ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, 0.0f)); break;
+                case CT_InputText:  ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(-FLT_MIN); ImGui::InputText("##", text_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(text_buf)); break;
+                }
+                ImGui::PopID();
+            }
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    if (open_action != -1)
+        ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0);
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Vertical scrolling, with clipping");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Vertical scrolling, with clipping"))
+    {
+        HelpMarker("Here we activate ScrollY, which will create a child window container to allow hosting scrollable contents.\n\nWe also demonstrate using ImGuiListClipper to virtualize the submission of many items.");
+        static ImGuiTableFlags flags = ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable;
+
+        PushStyleCompact();
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY);
+        PopStyleCompact();
+
+        // When using ScrollX or ScrollY we need to specify a size for our table container!
+        // Otherwise by default the table will fit all available space, like a BeginChild() call.
+        ImVec2 outer_size = ImVec2(0.0f, TEXT_BASE_HEIGHT * 8);
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_scrolly", 3, flags, outer_size))
+        {
+            ImGui::TableSetupScrollFreeze(0, 1); // Make top row always visible
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("One", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_None);
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Two", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_None);
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Three", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_None);
+            ImGui::TableHeadersRow();
+
+            // Demonstrate using clipper for large vertical lists
+            ImGuiListClipper clipper;
+            clipper.Begin(1000);
+            while (clipper.Step())
+            {
+                for (int row = clipper.DisplayStart; row < clipper.DisplayEnd; row++)
+                {
+                    ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                    for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++)
+                    {
+                        ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column);
+                        ImGui::Text("Hello %d,%d", column, row);
+                    }
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    if (open_action != -1)
+        ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0);
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Horizontal scrolling");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Horizontal scrolling"))
+    {
+        HelpMarker(
+            "When ScrollX is enabled, the default sizing policy becomes ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit, "
+            "as automatically stretching columns doesn't make much sense with horizontal scrolling.\n\n"
+            "Also note that as of the current version, you will almost always want to enable ScrollY along with ScrollX,"
+            "because the container window won't automatically extend vertically to fix contents (this may be improved in future versions).");
+        static ImGuiTableFlags flags = ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable;
+        static int freeze_cols = 1;
+        static int freeze_rows = 1;
+
+        PushStyleCompact();
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY);
+        ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetFrameHeight());
+        ImGui::DragInt("freeze_cols", &freeze_cols, 0.2f, 0, 9, NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags_NoInput);
+        ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetFrameHeight());
+        ImGui::DragInt("freeze_rows", &freeze_rows, 0.2f, 0, 9, NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags_NoInput);
+        PopStyleCompact();
+
+        // When using ScrollX or ScrollY we need to specify a size for our table container!
+        // Otherwise by default the table will fit all available space, like a BeginChild() call.
+        ImVec2 outer_size = ImVec2(0.0f, TEXT_BASE_HEIGHT * 8);
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_scrollx", 7, flags, outer_size))
+        {
+            ImGui::TableSetupScrollFreeze(freeze_cols, freeze_rows);
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Line #", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHide); // Make the first column not hideable to match our use of TableSetupScrollFreeze()
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("One");
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Two");
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Three");
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Four");
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Five");
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Six");
+            ImGui::TableHeadersRow();
+            for (int row = 0; row < 20; row++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                for (int column = 0; column < 7; column++)
+                {
+                    // Both TableNextColumn() and TableSetColumnIndex() return true when a column is visible or performing width measurement.
+                    // Because here we know that:
+                    // - A) all our columns are contributing the same to row height
+                    // - B) column 0 is always visible,
+                    // We only always submit this one column and can skip others.
+                    // More advanced per-column clipping behaviors may benefit from polling the status flags via TableGetColumnFlags().
+                    if (!ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column) && column > 0)
+                        continue;
+                    if (column == 0)
+                        ImGui::Text("Line %d", row);
+                    else
+                        ImGui::Text("Hello world %d,%d", column, row);
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+
+        ImGui::Spacing();
+        ImGui::TextUnformatted("Stretch + ScrollX");
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        HelpMarker(
+            "Showcase using Stretch columns + ScrollX together: "
+            "this is rather unusual and only makes sense when specifying an 'inner_width' for the table!\n"
+            "Without an explicit value, inner_width is == outer_size.x and therefore using Stretch columns + ScrollX together doesn't make sense.");
+        static ImGuiTableFlags flags2 = ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg | ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody;
+        static float inner_width = 1000.0f;
+        PushStyleCompact();
+        ImGui::PushID("flags3");
+        ImGui::PushItemWidth(TEXT_BASE_WIDTH * 30);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX", &flags2, ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX);
+        ImGui::DragFloat("inner_width", &inner_width, 1.0f, 0.0f, FLT_MAX, "%.1f");
+        ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+        ImGui::PopID();
+        PopStyleCompact();
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table2", 7, flags2, outer_size, inner_width))
+        {
+            for (int cell = 0; cell < 20 * 7; cell++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                ImGui::Text("Hello world %d,%d", ImGui::TableGetColumnIndex(), ImGui::TableGetRowIndex());
+            }
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    if (open_action != -1)
+        ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0);
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Columns flags");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Columns flags"))
+    {
+        // Create a first table just to show all the options/flags we want to make visible in our example!
+        const int column_count = 3;
+        const char* column_names[column_count] = { "One", "Two", "Three" };
+        static ImGuiTableColumnFlags column_flags[column_count] = { ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultSort, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_None, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultHide };
+        static ImGuiTableColumnFlags column_flags_out[column_count] = { 0, 0, 0 }; // Output from TableGetColumnFlags()
+
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_columns_flags_checkboxes", column_count, ImGuiTableFlags_None))
+        {
+            PushStyleCompact();
+            for (int column = 0; column < column_count; column++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                ImGui::PushID(column);
+                ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding(); // FIXME-TABLE: Workaround for wrong text baseline propagation across columns
+                ImGui::Text("'%s'", column_names[column]);
+                ImGui::Spacing();
+                ImGui::Text("Input flags:");
+                EditTableColumnsFlags(&column_flags[column]);
+                ImGui::Spacing();
+                ImGui::Text("Output flags:");
+                ImGui::BeginDisabled();
+                ShowTableColumnsStatusFlags(column_flags_out[column]);
+                ImGui::EndDisabled();
+                ImGui::PopID();
+            }
+            PopStyleCompact();
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+
+        // Create the real table we care about for the example!
+        // We use a scrolling table to be able to showcase the difference between the _IsEnabled and _IsVisible flags above, otherwise in
+        // a non-scrolling table columns are always visible (unless using ImGuiTableFlags_NoKeepColumnsVisible + resizing the parent window down)
+        const ImGuiTableFlags flags
+            = ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY
+            | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV
+            | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable | ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable;
+        ImVec2 outer_size = ImVec2(0.0f, TEXT_BASE_HEIGHT * 9);
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_columns_flags", column_count, flags, outer_size))
+        {
+            for (int column = 0; column < column_count; column++)
+                ImGui::TableSetupColumn(column_names[column], column_flags[column]);
+            ImGui::TableHeadersRow();
+            for (int column = 0; column < column_count; column++)
+                column_flags_out[column] = ImGui::TableGetColumnFlags(column);
+            float indent_step = (float)((int)TEXT_BASE_WIDTH / 2);
+            for (int row = 0; row < 8; row++)
+            {
+                ImGui::Indent(indent_step); // Add some indentation to demonstrate usage of per-column IndentEnable/IndentDisable flags.
+                ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                for (int column = 0; column < column_count; column++)
+                {
+                    ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column);
+                    ImGui::Text("%s %s", (column == 0) ? "Indented" : "Hello", ImGui::TableGetColumnName(column));
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::Unindent(indent_step * 8.0f);
+
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    if (open_action != -1)
+        ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0);
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Columns widths");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Columns widths"))
+    {
+        HelpMarker("Using TableSetupColumn() to setup default width.");
+
+        static ImGuiTableFlags flags1 = ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize;
+        PushStyleCompact();
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable", &flags1, ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize", &flags1, ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize);
+        PopStyleCompact();
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table1", 3, flags1))
+        {
+            // We could also set ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit on the table and all columns will default to ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed.
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("one", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, 100.0f); // Default to 100.0f
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("two", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, 200.0f); // Default to 200.0f
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("three", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed);       // Default to auto
+            ImGui::TableHeadersRow();
+            for (int row = 0; row < 4; row++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++)
+                {
+                    ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column);
+                    if (row == 0)
+                        ImGui::Text("(w: %5.1f)", ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x);
+                    else
+                        ImGui::Text("Hello %d,%d", column, row);
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+
+        HelpMarker("Using TableSetupColumn() to setup explicit width.\n\nUnless _NoKeepColumnsVisible is set, fixed columns with set width may still be shrunk down if there's not enough space in the host.");
+
+        static ImGuiTableFlags flags2 = ImGuiTableFlags_None;
+        PushStyleCompact();
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoKeepColumnsVisible", &flags2, ImGuiTableFlags_NoKeepColumnsVisible);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV", &flags2, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV", &flags2, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV);
+        PopStyleCompact();
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table2", 4, flags2))
+        {
+            // We could also set ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit on the table and all columns will default to ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed.
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, 100.0f);
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, TEXT_BASE_WIDTH * 15.0f);
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, TEXT_BASE_WIDTH * 30.0f);
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, TEXT_BASE_WIDTH * 15.0f);
+            for (int row = 0; row < 5; row++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                for (int column = 0; column < 4; column++)
+                {
+                    ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column);
+                    if (row == 0)
+                        ImGui::Text("(w: %5.1f)", ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x);
+                    else
+                        ImGui::Text("Hello %d,%d", column, row);
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    if (open_action != -1)
+        ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0);
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Nested tables");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Nested tables"))
+    {
+        HelpMarker("This demonstrate embedding a table into another table cell.");
+
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_nested1", 2, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable))
+        {
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("A0");
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("A1");
+            ImGui::TableHeadersRow();
+
+            ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+            ImGui::Text("A0 Row 0");
+            {
+                float rows_height = TEXT_BASE_HEIGHT * 2;
+                if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_nested2", 2, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable))
+                {
+                    ImGui::TableSetupColumn("B0");
+                    ImGui::TableSetupColumn("B1");
+                    ImGui::TableHeadersRow();
+
+                    ImGui::TableNextRow(ImGuiTableRowFlags_None, rows_height);
+                    ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                    ImGui::Text("B0 Row 0");
+                    ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                    ImGui::Text("B1 Row 0");
+                    ImGui::TableNextRow(ImGuiTableRowFlags_None, rows_height);
+                    ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                    ImGui::Text("B0 Row 1");
+                    ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                    ImGui::Text("B1 Row 1");
+
+                    ImGui::EndTable();
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Text("A1 Row 0");
+            ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Text("A0 Row 1");
+            ImGui::TableNextColumn(); ImGui::Text("A1 Row 1");
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    if (open_action != -1)
+        ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0);
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Row height");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Row height"))
+    {
+        HelpMarker("You can pass a 'min_row_height' to TableNextRow().\n\nRows are padded with 'style.CellPadding.y' on top and bottom, so effectively the minimum row height will always be >= 'style.CellPadding.y * 2.0f'.\n\nWe cannot honor a _maximum_ row height as that would requires a unique clipping rectangle per row.");
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_row_height", 1, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV))
+        {
+            for (int row = 0; row < 10; row++)
+            {
+                float min_row_height = (float)(int)(TEXT_BASE_HEIGHT * 0.30f * row);
+                ImGui::TableNextRow(ImGuiTableRowFlags_None, min_row_height);
+                ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                ImGui::Text("min_row_height = %.2f", min_row_height);
+            }
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    if (open_action != -1)
+        ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0);
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Outer size");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Outer size"))
+    {
+        // Showcasing use of ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX and ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY
+        // Important to that note how the two flags have slightly different behaviors!
+        ImGui::Text("Using NoHostExtendX and NoHostExtendY:");
+        PushStyleCompact();
+        static ImGuiTableFlags flags = ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit | ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX;
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX);
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Make outer width auto-fit to columns, overriding outer_size.x value.\n\nOnly available when ScrollX/ScrollY are disabled and Stretch columns are not used.");
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY);
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Make outer height stop exactly at outer_size.y (prevent auto-extending table past the limit).\n\nOnly available when ScrollX/ScrollY are disabled. Data below the limit will be clipped and not visible.");
+        PopStyleCompact();
+
+        ImVec2 outer_size = ImVec2(0.0f, TEXT_BASE_HEIGHT * 5.5f);
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table1", 3, flags, outer_size))
+        {
+            for (int row = 0; row < 10; row++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++)
+                {
+                    ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                    ImGui::Text("Cell %d,%d", column, row);
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::Text("Hello!");
+
+        ImGui::Spacing();
+
+        ImGui::Text("Using explicit size:");
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table2", 3, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg, ImVec2(TEXT_BASE_WIDTH * 30, 0.0f)))
+        {
+            for (int row = 0; row < 5; row++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++)
+                {
+                    ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                    ImGui::Text("Cell %d,%d", column, row);
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table3", 3, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg, ImVec2(TEXT_BASE_WIDTH * 30, 0.0f)))
+        {
+            for (int row = 0; row < 3; row++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableNextRow(0, TEXT_BASE_HEIGHT * 1.5f);
+                for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++)
+                {
+                    ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                    ImGui::Text("Cell %d,%d", column, row);
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    if (open_action != -1)
+        ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0);
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Background color");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Background color"))
+    {
+        static ImGuiTableFlags flags = ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg;
+        static int row_bg_type = 1;
+        static int row_bg_target = 1;
+        static int cell_bg_type = 1;
+
+        PushStyleCompact();
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Borders", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg);
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg automatically sets RowBg0 to alternative colors pulled from the Style.");
+        ImGui::Combo("row bg type", (int*)&row_bg_type, "None\0Red\0Gradient\0");
+        ImGui::Combo("row bg target", (int*)&row_bg_target, "RowBg0\0RowBg1\0"); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Target RowBg0 to override the alternating odd/even colors,\nTarget RowBg1 to blend with them.");
+        ImGui::Combo("cell bg type", (int*)&cell_bg_type, "None\0Blue\0"); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("We are colorizing cells to B1->C2 here.");
+        IM_ASSERT(row_bg_type >= 0 && row_bg_type <= 2);
+        IM_ASSERT(row_bg_target >= 0 && row_bg_target <= 1);
+        IM_ASSERT(cell_bg_type >= 0 && cell_bg_type <= 1);
+        PopStyleCompact();
+
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table1", 5, flags))
+        {
+            for (int row = 0; row < 6; row++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableNextRow();
+
+                // Demonstrate setting a row background color with 'ImGui::TableSetBgColor(ImGuiTableBgTarget_RowBgX, ...)'
+                // We use a transparent color so we can see the one behind in case our target is RowBg1 and RowBg0 was already targeted by the ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg flag.
+                if (row_bg_type != 0)
+                {
+                    ImU32 row_bg_color = ImGui::GetColorU32(row_bg_type == 1 ? ImVec4(0.7f, 0.3f, 0.3f, 0.65f) : ImVec4(0.2f + row * 0.1f, 0.2f, 0.2f, 0.65f)); // Flat or Gradient?
+                    ImGui::TableSetBgColor(ImGuiTableBgTarget_RowBg0 + row_bg_target, row_bg_color);
+                }
+
+                // Fill cells
+                for (int column = 0; column < 5; column++)
+                {
+                    ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column);
+                    ImGui::Text("%c%c", 'A' + row, '0' + column);
+
+                    // Change background of Cells B1->C2
+                    // Demonstrate setting a cell background color with 'ImGui::TableSetBgColor(ImGuiTableBgTarget_CellBg, ...)'
+                    // (the CellBg color will be blended over the RowBg and ColumnBg colors)
+                    // We can also pass a column number as a third parameter to TableSetBgColor() and do this outside the column loop.
+                    if (row >= 1 && row <= 2 && column >= 1 && column <= 2 && cell_bg_type == 1)
+                    {
+                        ImU32 cell_bg_color = ImGui::GetColorU32(ImVec4(0.3f, 0.3f, 0.7f, 0.65f));
+                        ImGui::TableSetBgColor(ImGuiTableBgTarget_CellBg, cell_bg_color);
+                    }
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    if (open_action != -1)
+        ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0);
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Tree view");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Tree view"))
+    {
+        static ImGuiTableFlags flags = ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg | ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody;
+
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("3ways", 3, flags))
+        {
+            // The first column will use the default _WidthStretch when ScrollX is Off and _WidthFixed when ScrollX is On
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Name", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHide);
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Size", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, TEXT_BASE_WIDTH * 12.0f);
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Type", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, TEXT_BASE_WIDTH * 18.0f);
+            ImGui::TableHeadersRow();
+
+            // Simple storage to output a dummy file-system.
+            struct MyTreeNode
+            {
+                const char*     Name;
+                const char*     Type;
+                int             Size;
+                int             ChildIdx;
+                int             ChildCount;
+                static void DisplayNode(const MyTreeNode* node, const MyTreeNode* all_nodes)
+                {
+                    ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                    ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                    const bool is_folder = (node->ChildCount > 0);
+                    if (is_folder)
+                    {
+                        bool open = ImGui::TreeNodeEx(node->Name, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth);
+                        ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                        ImGui::TextDisabled("--");
+                        ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                        ImGui::TextUnformatted(node->Type);
+                        if (open)
+                        {
+                            for (int child_n = 0; child_n < node->ChildCount; child_n++)
+                                DisplayNode(&all_nodes[node->ChildIdx + child_n], all_nodes);
+                            ImGui::TreePop();
+                        }
+                    }
+                    else
+                    {
+                        ImGui::TreeNodeEx(node->Name, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth);
+                        ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                        ImGui::Text("%d", node->Size);
+                        ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                        ImGui::TextUnformatted(node->Type);
+                    }
+                }
+            };
+            static const MyTreeNode nodes[] =
+            {
+                { "Root",                         "Folder",       -1,       1, 3    }, // 0
+                { "Music",                        "Folder",       -1,       4, 2    }, // 1
+                { "Textures",                     "Folder",       -1,       6, 3    }, // 2
+                { "desktop.ini",                  "System file",  1024,    -1,-1    }, // 3
+                { "File1_a.wav",                  "Audio file",   123000,  -1,-1    }, // 4
+                { "File1_b.wav",                  "Audio file",   456000,  -1,-1    }, // 5
+                { "Image001.png",                 "Image file",   203128,  -1,-1    }, // 6
+                { "Copy of Image001.png",         "Image file",   203256,  -1,-1    }, // 7
+                { "Copy of Image001 (Final2).png","Image file",   203512,  -1,-1    }, // 8
+            };
+
+            MyTreeNode::DisplayNode(&nodes[0], nodes);
+
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    if (open_action != -1)
+        ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0);
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Item width");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Item width"))
+    {
+        HelpMarker(
+            "Showcase using PushItemWidth() and how it is preserved on a per-column basis.\n\n"
+            "Note that on auto-resizing non-resizable fixed columns, querying the content width for e.g. right-alignment doesn't make sense.");
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_item_width", 3, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders))
+        {
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("small");
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("half");
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("right-align");
+            ImGui::TableHeadersRow();
+
+            for (int row = 0; row < 3; row++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                if (row == 0)
+                {
+                    // Setup ItemWidth once (instead of setting up every time, which is also possible but less efficient)
+                    ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(0);
+                    ImGui::PushItemWidth(TEXT_BASE_WIDTH * 3.0f); // Small
+                    ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(1);
+                    ImGui::PushItemWidth(-ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x * 0.5f);
+                    ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(2);
+                    ImGui::PushItemWidth(-FLT_MIN); // Right-aligned
+                }
+
+                // Draw our contents
+                static float dummy_f = 0.0f;
+                ImGui::PushID(row);
+                ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(0);
+                ImGui::SliderFloat("float0", &dummy_f, 0.0f, 1.0f);
+                ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(1);
+                ImGui::SliderFloat("float1", &dummy_f, 0.0f, 1.0f);
+                ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(2);
+                ImGui::SliderFloat("##float2", &dummy_f, 0.0f, 1.0f); // No visible label since right-aligned
+                ImGui::PopID();
+            }
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    // Demonstrate using TableHeader() calls instead of TableHeadersRow()
+    if (open_action != -1)
+        ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0);
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Custom headers");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Custom headers"))
+    {
+        const int COLUMNS_COUNT = 3;
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_custom_headers", COLUMNS_COUNT, ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable))
+        {
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Apricot");
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Banana");
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Cherry");
+
+            // Dummy entire-column selection storage
+            // FIXME: It would be nice to actually demonstrate full-featured selection using those checkbox.
+            static bool column_selected[3] = {};
+
+            // Instead of calling TableHeadersRow() we'll submit custom headers ourselves
+            ImGui::TableNextRow(ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers);
+            for (int column = 0; column < COLUMNS_COUNT; column++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column);
+                const char* column_name = ImGui::TableGetColumnName(column); // Retrieve name passed to TableSetupColumn()
+                ImGui::PushID(column);
+                ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(0, 0));
+                ImGui::Checkbox("##checkall", &column_selected[column]);
+                ImGui::PopStyleVar();
+                ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, ImGui::GetStyle().ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+                ImGui::TableHeader(column_name);
+                ImGui::PopID();
+            }
+
+            for (int row = 0; row < 5; row++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                for (int column = 0; column < 3; column++)
+                {
+                    char buf[32];
+                    sprintf(buf, "Cell %d,%d", column, row);
+                    ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column);
+                    ImGui::Selectable(buf, column_selected[column]);
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    // Demonstrate creating custom context menus inside columns, while playing it nice with context menus provided by TableHeadersRow()/TableHeader()
+    if (open_action != -1)
+        ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0);
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Context menus");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Context menus"))
+    {
+        HelpMarker("By default, right-clicking over a TableHeadersRow()/TableHeader() line will open the default context-menu.\nUsing ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody we also allow right-clicking over columns body.");
+        static ImGuiTableFlags flags1 = ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable | ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody;
+
+        PushStyleCompact();
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody", &flags1, ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody);
+        PopStyleCompact();
+
+        // Context Menus: first example
+        // [1.1] Right-click on the TableHeadersRow() line to open the default table context menu.
+        // [1.2] Right-click in columns also open the default table context menu (if ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody is set)
+        const int COLUMNS_COUNT = 3;
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_context_menu", COLUMNS_COUNT, flags1))
+        {
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("One");
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Two");
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Three");
+
+            // [1.1]] Right-click on the TableHeadersRow() line to open the default table context menu.
+            ImGui::TableHeadersRow();
+
+            // Submit dummy contents
+            for (int row = 0; row < 4; row++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                for (int column = 0; column < COLUMNS_COUNT; column++)
+                {
+                    ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column);
+                    ImGui::Text("Cell %d,%d", column, row);
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+
+        // Context Menus: second example
+        // [2.1] Right-click on the TableHeadersRow() line to open the default table context menu.
+        // [2.2] Right-click on the ".." to open a custom popup
+        // [2.3] Right-click in columns to open another custom popup
+        HelpMarker("Demonstrate mixing table context menu (over header), item context button (over button) and custom per-colum context menu (over column body).");
+        ImGuiTableFlags flags2 = ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable | ImGuiTableFlags_Borders;
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_context_menu_2", COLUMNS_COUNT, flags2))
+        {
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("One");
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Two");
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Three");
+
+            // [2.1] Right-click on the TableHeadersRow() line to open the default table context menu.
+            ImGui::TableHeadersRow();
+            for (int row = 0; row < 4; row++)
+            {
+                ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                for (int column = 0; column < COLUMNS_COUNT; column++)
+                {
+                    // Submit dummy contents
+                    ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(column);
+                    ImGui::Text("Cell %d,%d", column, row);
+                    ImGui::SameLine();
+
+                    // [2.2] Right-click on the ".." to open a custom popup
+                    ImGui::PushID(row * COLUMNS_COUNT + column);
+                    ImGui::SmallButton("..");
+                    if (ImGui::BeginPopupContextItem())
+                    {
+                        ImGui::Text("This is the popup for Button(\"..\") in Cell %d,%d", column, row);
+                        if (ImGui::Button("Close"))
+                            ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup();
+                        ImGui::EndPopup();
+                    }
+                    ImGui::PopID();
+                }
+            }
+
+            // [2.3] Right-click anywhere in columns to open another custom popup
+            // (instead of testing for !IsAnyItemHovered() we could also call OpenPopup() with ImGuiPopupFlags_NoOpenOverExistingPopup
+            // to manage popup priority as the popups triggers, here "are we hovering a column" are overlapping)
+            int hovered_column = -1;
+            for (int column = 0; column < COLUMNS_COUNT + 1; column++)
+            {
+                ImGui::PushID(column);
+                if (ImGui::TableGetColumnFlags(column) & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsHovered)
+                    hovered_column = column;
+                if (hovered_column == column && !ImGui::IsAnyItemHovered() && ImGui::IsMouseReleased(1))
+                    ImGui::OpenPopup("MyPopup");
+                if (ImGui::BeginPopup("MyPopup"))
+                {
+                    if (column == COLUMNS_COUNT)
+                        ImGui::Text("This is a custom popup for unused space after the last column.");
+                    else
+                        ImGui::Text("This is a custom popup for Column %d", column);
+                    if (ImGui::Button("Close"))
+                        ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup();
+                    ImGui::EndPopup();
+                }
+                ImGui::PopID();
+            }
+
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+            ImGui::Text("Hovered column: %d", hovered_column);
+        }
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    // Demonstrate creating multiple tables with the same ID
+    if (open_action != -1)
+        ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0);
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Synced instances");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Synced instances"))
+    {
+        HelpMarker("Multiple tables with the same identifier will share their settings, width, visibility, order etc.");
+        for (int n = 0; n < 3; n++)
+        {
+            char buf[32];
+            sprintf(buf, "Synced Table %d", n);
+            bool open = ImGui::CollapsingHeader(buf, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen);
+            if (open && ImGui::BeginTable("Table", 3, ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable | ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit | ImGuiTableFlags_NoSavedSettings))
+            {
+                ImGui::TableSetupColumn("One");
+                ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Two");
+                ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Three");
+                ImGui::TableHeadersRow();
+                for (int cell = 0; cell < 9; cell++)
+                {
+                    ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                    ImGui::Text("this cell %d", cell);
+                }
+                ImGui::EndTable();
+            }
+        }
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    // Demonstrate using Sorting facilities
+    // This is a simplified version of the "Advanced" example, where we mostly focus on the code necessary to handle sorting.
+    // Note that the "Advanced" example also showcase manually triggering a sort (e.g. if item quantities have been modified)
+    static const char* template_items_names[] =
+    {
+        "Banana", "Apple", "Cherry", "Watermelon", "Grapefruit", "Strawberry", "Mango",
+        "Kiwi", "Orange", "Pineapple", "Blueberry", "Plum", "Coconut", "Pear", "Apricot"
+    };
+    if (open_action != -1)
+        ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0);
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Sorting");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Sorting"))
+    {
+        // Create item list
+        static ImVector<MyItem> items;
+        if (items.Size == 0)
+        {
+            items.resize(50, MyItem());
+            for (int n = 0; n < items.Size; n++)
+            {
+                const int template_n = n % IM_ARRAYSIZE(template_items_names);
+                MyItem& item = items[n];
+                item.ID = n;
+                item.Name = template_items_names[template_n];
+                item.Quantity = (n * n - n) % 20; // Assign default quantities
+            }
+        }
+
+        // Options
+        static ImGuiTableFlags flags =
+            ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable | ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable | ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti
+            | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter | ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV | ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody
+            | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY;
+        PushStyleCompact();
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti);
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("When sorting is enabled: hold shift when clicking headers to sort on multiple column. TableGetSortSpecs() may return specs where (SpecsCount > 1).");
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate);
+        ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("When sorting is enabled: allow no sorting, disable default sorting. TableGetSortSpecs() may return specs where (SpecsCount == 0).");
+        PopStyleCompact();
+
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_sorting", 4, flags, ImVec2(0.0f, TEXT_BASE_HEIGHT * 15), 0.0f))
+        {
+            // Declare columns
+            // We use the "user_id" parameter of TableSetupColumn() to specify a user id that will be stored in the sort specifications.
+            // This is so our sort function can identify a column given our own identifier. We could also identify them based on their index!
+            // Demonstrate using a mixture of flags among available sort-related flags:
+            // - ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultSort
+            // - ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort / ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortAscending / ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortDescending
+            // - ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortAscending / ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortDescending
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("ID",       ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultSort          | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed,   0.0f, MyItemColumnID_ID);
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Name",                                                  ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed,   0.0f, MyItemColumnID_Name);
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Action",   ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort               | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed,   0.0f, MyItemColumnID_Action);
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Quantity", ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortDescending | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch, 0.0f, MyItemColumnID_Quantity);
+            ImGui::TableSetupScrollFreeze(0, 1); // Make row always visible
+            ImGui::TableHeadersRow();
+
+            // Sort our data if sort specs have been changed!
+            if (ImGuiTableSortSpecs* sorts_specs = ImGui::TableGetSortSpecs())
+                if (sorts_specs->SpecsDirty)
+                {
+                    MyItem::s_current_sort_specs = sorts_specs; // Store in variable accessible by the sort function.
+                    if (items.Size > 1)
+                        qsort(&items[0], (size_t)items.Size, sizeof(items[0]), MyItem::CompareWithSortSpecs);
+                    MyItem::s_current_sort_specs = NULL;
+                    sorts_specs->SpecsDirty = false;
+                }
+
+            // Demonstrate using clipper for large vertical lists
+            ImGuiListClipper clipper;
+            clipper.Begin(items.Size);
+            while (clipper.Step())
+                for (int row_n = clipper.DisplayStart; row_n < clipper.DisplayEnd; row_n++)
+                {
+                    // Display a data item
+                    MyItem* item = &items[row_n];
+                    ImGui::PushID(item->ID);
+                    ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                    ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                    ImGui::Text("%04d", item->ID);
+                    ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                    ImGui::TextUnformatted(item->Name);
+                    ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                    ImGui::SmallButton("None");
+                    ImGui::TableNextColumn();
+                    ImGui::Text("%d", item->Quantity);
+                    ImGui::PopID();
+                }
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    // In this example we'll expose most table flags and settings.
+    // For specific flags and settings refer to the corresponding section for more detailed explanation.
+    // This section is mostly useful to experiment with combining certain flags or settings with each others.
+    //ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(true, ImGuiCond_Once); // [DEBUG]
+    if (open_action != -1)
+        ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(open_action != 0);
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tables/Advanced");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Advanced"))
+    {
+        static ImGuiTableFlags flags =
+            ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable
+            | ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable | ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti
+            | ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg | ImGuiTableFlags_Borders | ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody
+            | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY
+            | ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit;
+
+        enum ContentsType { CT_Text, CT_Button, CT_SmallButton, CT_FillButton, CT_Selectable, CT_SelectableSpanRow };
+        static int contents_type = CT_SelectableSpanRow;
+        const char* contents_type_names[] = { "Text", "Button", "SmallButton", "FillButton", "Selectable", "Selectable (span row)" };
+        static int freeze_cols = 1;
+        static int freeze_rows = 1;
+        static int items_count = IM_ARRAYSIZE(template_items_names) * 2;
+        static ImVec2 outer_size_value = ImVec2(0.0f, TEXT_BASE_HEIGHT * 12);
+        static float row_min_height = 0.0f; // Auto
+        static float inner_width_with_scroll = 0.0f; // Auto-extend
+        static bool outer_size_enabled = true;
+        static bool show_headers = true;
+        static bool show_wrapped_text = false;
+        //static ImGuiTextFilter filter;
+        //ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(true, ImGuiCond_Once); // FIXME-TABLE: Enabling this results in initial clipped first pass on table which tend to affects column sizing
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Options"))
+        {
+            // Make the UI compact because there are so many fields
+            PushStyleCompact();
+            ImGui::PushItemWidth(TEXT_BASE_WIDTH * 28.0f);
+
+            if (ImGui::TreeNodeEx("Features:", ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen))
+            {
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable);
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable);
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable);
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable);
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoSavedSettings", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoSavedSettings);
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody);
+                ImGui::TreePop();
+            }
+
+            if (ImGui::TreeNodeEx("Decorations:", ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen))
+            {
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg);
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersV);
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV);
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV);
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersH", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersH);
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH);
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH);
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Disable vertical borders in columns Body (borders will always appears in Headers");
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Disable vertical borders in columns Body until hovered for resize (borders will always appears in Headers)");
+                ImGui::TreePop();
+            }
+
+            if (ImGui::TreeNodeEx("Sizing:", ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen))
+            {
+                EditTableSizingFlags(&flags);
+                ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("In the Advanced demo we override the policy of each column so those table-wide settings have less effect that typical.");
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX);
+                ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Make outer width auto-fit to columns, overriding outer_size.x value.\n\nOnly available when ScrollX/ScrollY are disabled and Stretch columns are not used.");
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY);
+                ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Make outer height stop exactly at outer_size.y (prevent auto-extending table past the limit).\n\nOnly available when ScrollX/ScrollY are disabled. Data below the limit will be clipped and not visible.");
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoKeepColumnsVisible", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoKeepColumnsVisible);
+                ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Only available if ScrollX is disabled.");
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_PreciseWidths", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_PreciseWidths);
+                ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Disable distributing remainder width to stretched columns (width allocation on a 100-wide table with 3 columns: Without this flag: 33,33,34. With this flag: 33,33,33). With larger number of columns, resizing will appear to be less smooth.");
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip);
+                ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Disable clipping rectangle for every individual columns (reduce draw command count, items will be able to overflow into other columns). Generally incompatible with ScrollFreeze options.");
+                ImGui::TreePop();
+            }
+
+            if (ImGui::TreeNodeEx("Padding:", ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen))
+            {
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_PadOuterX", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_PadOuterX);
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadOuterX", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadOuterX);
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadInnerX", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadInnerX);
+                ImGui::TreePop();
+            }
+
+            if (ImGui::TreeNodeEx("Scrolling:", ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen))
+            {
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX);
+                ImGui::SameLine();
+                ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetFrameHeight());
+                ImGui::DragInt("freeze_cols", &freeze_cols, 0.2f, 0, 9, NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags_NoInput);
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY);
+                ImGui::SameLine();
+                ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetFrameHeight());
+                ImGui::DragInt("freeze_rows", &freeze_rows, 0.2f, 0, 9, NULL, ImGuiSliderFlags_NoInput);
+                ImGui::TreePop();
+            }
+
+            if (ImGui::TreeNodeEx("Sorting:", ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen))
+            {
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti);
+                ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("When sorting is enabled: hold shift when clicking headers to sort on multiple column. TableGetSortSpecs() may return specs where (SpecsCount > 1).");
+                ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate", &flags, ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate);
+                ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("When sorting is enabled: allow no sorting, disable default sorting. TableGetSortSpecs() may return specs where (SpecsCount == 0).");
+                ImGui::TreePop();
+            }
+
+            if (ImGui::TreeNodeEx("Other:", ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen))
+            {
+                ImGui::Checkbox("show_headers", &show_headers);
+                ImGui::Checkbox("show_wrapped_text", &show_wrapped_text);
+
+                ImGui::DragFloat2("##OuterSize", &outer_size_value.x);
+                ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, ImGui::GetStyle().ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+                ImGui::Checkbox("outer_size", &outer_size_enabled);
+                ImGui::SameLine();
+                HelpMarker("If scrolling is disabled (ScrollX and ScrollY not set):\n"
+                    "- The table is output directly in the parent window.\n"
+                    "- OuterSize.x < 0.0f will right-align the table.\n"
+                    "- OuterSize.x = 0.0f will narrow fit the table unless there are any Stretch column.\n"
+                    "- OuterSize.y then becomes the minimum size for the table, which will extend vertically if there are more rows (unless NoHostExtendY is set).");
+
+                // From a user point of view we will tend to use 'inner_width' differently depending on whether our table is embedding scrolling.
+                // To facilitate toying with this demo we will actually pass 0.0f to the BeginTable() when ScrollX is disabled.
+                ImGui::DragFloat("inner_width (when ScrollX active)", &inner_width_with_scroll, 1.0f, 0.0f, FLT_MAX);
+
+                ImGui::DragFloat("row_min_height", &row_min_height, 1.0f, 0.0f, FLT_MAX);
+                ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Specify height of the Selectable item.");
+
+                ImGui::DragInt("items_count", &items_count, 0.1f, 0, 9999);
+                ImGui::Combo("items_type (first column)", &contents_type, contents_type_names, IM_ARRAYSIZE(contents_type_names));
+                //filter.Draw("filter");
+                ImGui::TreePop();
+            }
+
+            ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+            PopStyleCompact();
+            ImGui::Spacing();
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+
+        // Update item list if we changed the number of items
+        static ImVector<MyItem> items;
+        static ImVector<int> selection;
+        static bool items_need_sort = false;
+        if (items.Size != items_count)
+        {
+            items.resize(items_count, MyItem());
+            for (int n = 0; n < items_count; n++)
+            {
+                const int template_n = n % IM_ARRAYSIZE(template_items_names);
+                MyItem& item = items[n];
+                item.ID = n;
+                item.Name = template_items_names[template_n];
+                item.Quantity = (template_n == 3) ? 10 : (template_n == 4) ? 20 : 0; // Assign default quantities
+            }
+        }
+
+        const ImDrawList* parent_draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList();
+        const int parent_draw_list_draw_cmd_count = parent_draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size;
+        ImVec2 table_scroll_cur, table_scroll_max; // For debug display
+        const ImDrawList* table_draw_list = NULL;  // "
+
+        // Submit table
+        const float inner_width_to_use = (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) ? inner_width_with_scroll : 0.0f;
+        if (ImGui::BeginTable("table_advanced", 6, flags, outer_size_enabled ? outer_size_value : ImVec2(0, 0), inner_width_to_use))
+        {
+            // Declare columns
+            // We use the "user_id" parameter of TableSetupColumn() to specify a user id that will be stored in the sort specifications.
+            // This is so our sort function can identify a column given our own identifier. We could also identify them based on their index!
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("ID",           ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultSort | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHide, 0.0f, MyItemColumnID_ID);
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Name",         ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, 0.0f, MyItemColumnID_Name);
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Action",       ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, 0.0f, MyItemColumnID_Action);
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Quantity",     ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortDescending, 0.0f, MyItemColumnID_Quantity);
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Description",  (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX) ? 0 : ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch, 0.0f, MyItemColumnID_Description);
+            ImGui::TableSetupColumn("Hidden",       ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultHide | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort);
+            ImGui::TableSetupScrollFreeze(freeze_cols, freeze_rows);
+
+            // Sort our data if sort specs have been changed!
+            ImGuiTableSortSpecs* sorts_specs = ImGui::TableGetSortSpecs();
+            if (sorts_specs && sorts_specs->SpecsDirty)
+                items_need_sort = true;
+            if (sorts_specs && items_need_sort && items.Size > 1)
+            {
+                MyItem::s_current_sort_specs = sorts_specs; // Store in variable accessible by the sort function.
+                qsort(&items[0], (size_t)items.Size, sizeof(items[0]), MyItem::CompareWithSortSpecs);
+                MyItem::s_current_sort_specs = NULL;
+                sorts_specs->SpecsDirty = false;
+            }
+            items_need_sort = false;
+
+            // Take note of whether we are currently sorting based on the Quantity field,
+            // we will use this to trigger sorting when we know the data of this column has been modified.
+            const bool sorts_specs_using_quantity = (ImGui::TableGetColumnFlags(3) & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsSorted) != 0;
+
+            // Show headers
+            if (show_headers)
+                ImGui::TableHeadersRow();
+
+            // Show data
+            // FIXME-TABLE FIXME-NAV: How we can get decent up/down even though we have the buttons here?
+            ImGui::PushButtonRepeat(true);
+#if 1
+            // Demonstrate using clipper for large vertical lists
+            ImGuiListClipper clipper;
+            clipper.Begin(items.Size);
+            while (clipper.Step())
+            {
+                for (int row_n = clipper.DisplayStart; row_n < clipper.DisplayEnd; row_n++)
+#else
+            // Without clipper
+            {
+                for (int row_n = 0; row_n < items.Size; row_n++)
+#endif
+                {
+                    MyItem* item = &items[row_n];
+                    //if (!filter.PassFilter(item->Name))
+                    //    continue;
+
+                    const bool item_is_selected = selection.contains(item->ID);
+                    ImGui::PushID(item->ID);
+                    ImGui::TableNextRow(ImGuiTableRowFlags_None, row_min_height);
+
+                    // For the demo purpose we can select among different type of items submitted in the first column
+                    ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(0);
+                    char label[32];
+                    sprintf(label, "%04d", item->ID);
+                    if (contents_type == CT_Text)
+                        ImGui::TextUnformatted(label);
+                    else if (contents_type == CT_Button)
+                        ImGui::Button(label);
+                    else if (contents_type == CT_SmallButton)
+                        ImGui::SmallButton(label);
+                    else if (contents_type == CT_FillButton)
+                        ImGui::Button(label, ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, 0.0f));
+                    else if (contents_type == CT_Selectable || contents_type == CT_SelectableSpanRow)
+                    {
+                        ImGuiSelectableFlags selectable_flags = (contents_type == CT_SelectableSpanRow) ? ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns | ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowItemOverlap : ImGuiSelectableFlags_None;
+                        if (ImGui::Selectable(label, item_is_selected, selectable_flags, ImVec2(0, row_min_height)))
+                        {
+                            if (ImGui::GetIO().KeyCtrl)
+                            {
+                                if (item_is_selected)
+                                    selection.find_erase_unsorted(item->ID);
+                                else
+                                    selection.push_back(item->ID);
+                            }
+                            else
+                            {
+                                selection.clear();
+                                selection.push_back(item->ID);
+                            }
+                        }
+                    }
+
+                    if (ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(1))
+                        ImGui::TextUnformatted(item->Name);
+
+                    // Here we demonstrate marking our data set as needing to be sorted again if we modified a quantity,
+                    // and we are currently sorting on the column showing the Quantity.
+                    // To avoid triggering a sort while holding the button, we only trigger it when the button has been released.
+                    // You will probably need a more advanced system in your code if you want to automatically sort when a specific entry changes.
+                    if (ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(2))
+                    {
+                        if (ImGui::SmallButton("Chop")) { item->Quantity += 1; }
+                        if (sorts_specs_using_quantity && ImGui::IsItemDeactivated()) { items_need_sort = true; }
+                        ImGui::SameLine();
+                        if (ImGui::SmallButton("Eat")) { item->Quantity -= 1; }
+                        if (sorts_specs_using_quantity && ImGui::IsItemDeactivated()) { items_need_sort = true; }
+                    }
+
+                    if (ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(3))
+                        ImGui::Text("%d", item->Quantity);
+
+                    ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(4);
+                    if (show_wrapped_text)
+                        ImGui::TextWrapped("Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet");
+                    else
+                        ImGui::Text("Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet");
+
+                    if (ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(5))
+                        ImGui::Text("1234");
+
+                    ImGui::PopID();
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::PopButtonRepeat();
+
+            // Store some info to display debug details below
+            table_scroll_cur = ImVec2(ImGui::GetScrollX(), ImGui::GetScrollY());
+            table_scroll_max = ImVec2(ImGui::GetScrollMaxX(), ImGui::GetScrollMaxY());
+            table_draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList();
+            ImGui::EndTable();
+        }
+        static bool show_debug_details = false;
+        ImGui::Checkbox("Debug details", &show_debug_details);
+        if (show_debug_details && table_draw_list)
+        {
+            ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, 0.0f);
+            const int table_draw_list_draw_cmd_count = table_draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size;
+            if (table_draw_list == parent_draw_list)
+                ImGui::Text(": DrawCmd: +%d (in same window)",
+                    table_draw_list_draw_cmd_count - parent_draw_list_draw_cmd_count);
+            else
+                ImGui::Text(": DrawCmd: +%d (in child window), Scroll: (%.f/%.f) (%.f/%.f)",
+                    table_draw_list_draw_cmd_count - 1, table_scroll_cur.x, table_scroll_max.x, table_scroll_cur.y, table_scroll_max.y);
+        }
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    ImGui::PopID();
+
+    ShowDemoWindowColumns();
+
+    if (disable_indent)
+        ImGui::PopStyleVar();
+}
+
+// Demonstrate old/legacy Columns API!
+// [2020: Columns are under-featured and not maintained. Prefer using the more flexible and powerful BeginTable() API!]
+static void ShowDemoWindowColumns()
+{
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Columns (legacy API)");
+    bool open = ImGui::TreeNode("Legacy Columns API");
+    ImGui::SameLine();
+    HelpMarker("Columns() is an old API! Prefer using the more flexible and powerful BeginTable() API!");
+    if (!open)
+        return;
+
+    // Basic columns
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Columns (legacy API)/Basic");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Basic"))
+    {
+        ImGui::Text("Without border:");
+        ImGui::Columns(3, "mycolumns3", false);  // 3-ways, no border
+        ImGui::Separator();
+        for (int n = 0; n < 14; n++)
+        {
+            char label[32];
+            sprintf(label, "Item %d", n);
+            if (ImGui::Selectable(label)) {}
+            //if (ImGui::Button(label, ImVec2(-FLT_MIN,0.0f))) {}
+            ImGui::NextColumn();
+        }
+        ImGui::Columns(1);
+        ImGui::Separator();
+
+        ImGui::Text("With border:");
+        ImGui::Columns(4, "mycolumns"); // 4-ways, with border
+        ImGui::Separator();
+        ImGui::Text("ID"); ImGui::NextColumn();
+        ImGui::Text("Name"); ImGui::NextColumn();
+        ImGui::Text("Path"); ImGui::NextColumn();
+        ImGui::Text("Hovered"); ImGui::NextColumn();
+        ImGui::Separator();
+        const char* names[3] = { "One", "Two", "Three" };
+        const char* paths[3] = { "/path/one", "/path/two", "/path/three" };
+        static int selected = -1;
+        for (int i = 0; i < 3; i++)
+        {
+            char label[32];
+            sprintf(label, "%04d", i);
+            if (ImGui::Selectable(label, selected == i, ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns))
+                selected = i;
+            bool hovered = ImGui::IsItemHovered();
+            ImGui::NextColumn();
+            ImGui::Text(names[i]); ImGui::NextColumn();
+            ImGui::Text(paths[i]); ImGui::NextColumn();
+            ImGui::Text("%d", hovered); ImGui::NextColumn();
+        }
+        ImGui::Columns(1);
+        ImGui::Separator();
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Columns (legacy API)/Borders");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Borders"))
+    {
+        // NB: Future columns API should allow automatic horizontal borders.
+        static bool h_borders = true;
+        static bool v_borders = true;
+        static int columns_count = 4;
+        const int lines_count = 3;
+        ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 8);
+        ImGui::DragInt("##columns_count", &columns_count, 0.1f, 2, 10, "%d columns");
+        if (columns_count < 2)
+            columns_count = 2;
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::Checkbox("horizontal", &h_borders);
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::Checkbox("vertical", &v_borders);
+        ImGui::Columns(columns_count, NULL, v_borders);
+        for (int i = 0; i < columns_count * lines_count; i++)
+        {
+            if (h_borders && ImGui::GetColumnIndex() == 0)
+                ImGui::Separator();
+            ImGui::Text("%c%c%c", 'a' + i, 'a' + i, 'a' + i);
+            ImGui::Text("Width %.2f", ImGui::GetColumnWidth());
+            ImGui::Text("Avail %.2f", ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail().x);
+            ImGui::Text("Offset %.2f", ImGui::GetColumnOffset());
+            ImGui::Text("Long text that is likely to clip");
+            ImGui::Button("Button", ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, 0.0f));
+            ImGui::NextColumn();
+        }
+        ImGui::Columns(1);
+        if (h_borders)
+            ImGui::Separator();
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    // Create multiple items in a same cell before switching to next column
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Columns (legacy API)/Mixed items");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Mixed items"))
+    {
+        ImGui::Columns(3, "mixed");
+        ImGui::Separator();
+
+        ImGui::Text("Hello");
+        ImGui::Button("Banana");
+        ImGui::NextColumn();
+
+        ImGui::Text("ImGui");
+        ImGui::Button("Apple");
+        static float foo = 1.0f;
+        ImGui::InputFloat("red", &foo, 0.05f, 0, "%.3f");
+        ImGui::Text("An extra line here.");
+        ImGui::NextColumn();
+
+        ImGui::Text("Sailor");
+        ImGui::Button("Corniflower");
+        static float bar = 1.0f;
+        ImGui::InputFloat("blue", &bar, 0.05f, 0, "%.3f");
+        ImGui::NextColumn();
+
+        if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Category A")) { ImGui::Text("Blah blah blah"); } ImGui::NextColumn();
+        if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Category B")) { ImGui::Text("Blah blah blah"); } ImGui::NextColumn();
+        if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Category C")) { ImGui::Text("Blah blah blah"); } ImGui::NextColumn();
+        ImGui::Columns(1);
+        ImGui::Separator();
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    // Word wrapping
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Columns (legacy API)/Word-wrapping");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Word-wrapping"))
+    {
+        ImGui::Columns(2, "word-wrapping");
+        ImGui::Separator();
+        ImGui::TextWrapped("The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.");
+        ImGui::TextWrapped("Hello Left");
+        ImGui::NextColumn();
+        ImGui::TextWrapped("The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.");
+        ImGui::TextWrapped("Hello Right");
+        ImGui::Columns(1);
+        ImGui::Separator();
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Columns (legacy API)/Horizontal Scrolling");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Horizontal Scrolling"))
+    {
+        ImGui::SetNextWindowContentSize(ImVec2(1500.0f, 0.0f));
+        ImVec2 child_size = ImVec2(0, ImGui::GetFontSize() * 20.0f);
+        ImGui::BeginChild("##ScrollingRegion", child_size, false, ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar);
+        ImGui::Columns(10);
+
+        // Also demonstrate using clipper for large vertical lists
+        int ITEMS_COUNT = 2000;
+        ImGuiListClipper clipper;
+        clipper.Begin(ITEMS_COUNT);
+        while (clipper.Step())
+        {
+            for (int i = clipper.DisplayStart; i < clipper.DisplayEnd; i++)
+                for (int j = 0; j < 10; j++)
+                {
+                    ImGui::Text("Line %d Column %d...", i, j);
+                    ImGui::NextColumn();
+                }
+        }
+        ImGui::Columns(1);
+        ImGui::EndChild();
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Columns (legacy API)/Tree");
+    if (ImGui::TreeNode("Tree"))
+    {
+        ImGui::Columns(2, "tree", true);
+        for (int x = 0; x < 3; x++)
+        {
+            bool open1 = ImGui::TreeNode((void*)(intptr_t)x, "Node%d", x);
+            ImGui::NextColumn();
+            ImGui::Text("Node contents");
+            ImGui::NextColumn();
+            if (open1)
+            {
+                for (int y = 0; y < 3; y++)
+                {
+                    bool open2 = ImGui::TreeNode((void*)(intptr_t)y, "Node%d.%d", x, y);
+                    ImGui::NextColumn();
+                    ImGui::Text("Node contents");
+                    if (open2)
+                    {
+                        ImGui::Text("Even more contents");
+                        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Tree in column"))
+                        {
+                            ImGui::Text("The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog");
+                            ImGui::TreePop();
+                        }
+                    }
+                    ImGui::NextColumn();
+                    if (open2)
+                        ImGui::TreePop();
+                }
+                ImGui::TreePop();
+            }
+        }
+        ImGui::Columns(1);
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+
+    ImGui::TreePop();
+}
+
+namespace ImGui { extern ImGuiKeyData* GetKeyData(ImGuiKey key); }
+
+static void ShowDemoWindowMisc()
+{
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Filtering");
+    if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Filtering"))
+    {
+        // Helper class to easy setup a text filter.
+        // You may want to implement a more feature-full filtering scheme in your own application.
+        static ImGuiTextFilter filter;
+        ImGui::Text("Filter usage:\n"
+                    "  \"\"         display all lines\n"
+                    "  \"xxx\"      display lines containing \"xxx\"\n"
+                    "  \"xxx,yyy\"  display lines containing \"xxx\" or \"yyy\"\n"
+                    "  \"-xxx\"     hide lines containing \"xxx\"");
+        filter.Draw();
+        const char* lines[] = { "aaa1.c", "bbb1.c", "ccc1.c", "aaa2.cpp", "bbb2.cpp", "ccc2.cpp", "abc.h", "hello, world" };
+        for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(lines); i++)
+            if (filter.PassFilter(lines[i]))
+                ImGui::BulletText("%s", lines[i]);
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Inputs, Navigation & Focus");
+    if (ImGui::CollapsingHeader("Inputs, Navigation & Focus"))
+    {
+        ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+
+        // Display ImGuiIO output flags
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Inputs, Navigation & Focus/Output");
+        ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(true, ImGuiCond_Once);
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Output"))
+        {
+            ImGui::Text("io.WantCaptureMouse: %d", io.WantCaptureMouse);
+            ImGui::Text("io.WantCaptureMouseUnlessPopupClose: %d", io.WantCaptureMouseUnlessPopupClose);
+            ImGui::Text("io.WantCaptureKeyboard: %d", io.WantCaptureKeyboard);
+            ImGui::Text("io.WantTextInput: %d", io.WantTextInput);
+            ImGui::Text("io.WantSetMousePos: %d", io.WantSetMousePos);
+            ImGui::Text("io.NavActive: %d, io.NavVisible: %d", io.NavActive, io.NavVisible);
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+
+        // Display Mouse state
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Inputs, Navigation & Focus/Mouse State");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Mouse State"))
+        {
+            if (ImGui::IsMousePosValid())
+                ImGui::Text("Mouse pos: (%g, %g)", io.MousePos.x, io.MousePos.y);
+            else
+                ImGui::Text("Mouse pos: <INVALID>");
+            ImGui::Text("Mouse delta: (%g, %g)", io.MouseDelta.x, io.MouseDelta.y);
+
+            int count = IM_ARRAYSIZE(io.MouseDown);
+            ImGui::Text("Mouse down:");         for (int i = 0; i < count; i++) if (ImGui::IsMouseDown(i))      { ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::Text("b%d (%.02f secs)", i, io.MouseDownDuration[i]); }
+            ImGui::Text("Mouse clicked:");      for (int i = 0; i < count; i++) if (ImGui::IsMouseClicked(i))   { ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::Text("b%d (%d)", i, ImGui::GetMouseClickedCount(i)); }
+            ImGui::Text("Mouse released:");     for (int i = 0; i < count; i++) if (ImGui::IsMouseReleased(i))  { ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::Text("b%d", i); }
+            ImGui::Text("Mouse wheel: %.1f", io.MouseWheel);
+            ImGui::Text("Pen Pressure: %.1f", io.PenPressure); // Note: currently unused
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+
+        // Display Keyboard/Mouse state
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Inputs, Navigation & Focus/Keyboard, Gamepad & Navigation State");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Keyboard, Gamepad & Navigation State"))
+        {
+            // We iterate both legacy native range and named ImGuiKey ranges, which is a little odd but this allow displaying the data for old/new backends.
+            // User code should never have to go through such hoops: old code may use native keycodes, new code may use ImGuiKey codes.
+#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
+            struct funcs { static bool IsLegacyNativeDupe(ImGuiKey) { return false; } };
+            const ImGuiKey key_first = ImGuiKey_NamedKey_BEGIN;
+#else
+            struct funcs { static bool IsLegacyNativeDupe(ImGuiKey key) { return key < 512 && ImGui::GetIO().KeyMap[key] != -1; } }; // Hide Native<>ImGuiKey duplicates when both exists in the array
+            const ImGuiKey key_first = 0;
+            //ImGui::Text("Legacy raw:");       for (ImGuiKey key = key_first; key < ImGuiKey_COUNT; key++) { if (io.KeysDown[key]) { ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::Text("\"%s\" %d", ImGui::GetKeyName(key), key); } }
+#endif
+            ImGui::Text("Keys down:");          for (ImGuiKey key = key_first; key < ImGuiKey_COUNT; key++) { if (funcs::IsLegacyNativeDupe(key)) continue; if (ImGui::IsKeyDown(key)) { ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::Text("\"%s\" %d (%.02f secs)", ImGui::GetKeyName(key), key, ImGui::GetKeyData(key)->DownDuration); } }
+            ImGui::Text("Keys pressed:");       for (ImGuiKey key = key_first; key < ImGuiKey_COUNT; key++) { if (funcs::IsLegacyNativeDupe(key)) continue; if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(key)) { ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::Text("\"%s\" %d", ImGui::GetKeyName(key), key); } }
+            ImGui::Text("Keys released:");      for (ImGuiKey key = key_first; key < ImGuiKey_COUNT; key++) { if (funcs::IsLegacyNativeDupe(key)) continue; if (ImGui::IsKeyReleased(key)) { ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::Text("\"%s\" %d", ImGui::GetKeyName(key), key); } }
+            ImGui::Text("Keys mods: %s%s%s%s", io.KeyCtrl ? "CTRL " : "", io.KeyShift ? "SHIFT " : "", io.KeyAlt ? "ALT " : "", io.KeySuper ? "SUPER " : "");
+            ImGui::Text("Chars queue:");        for (int i = 0; i < io.InputQueueCharacters.Size; i++) { ImWchar c = io.InputQueueCharacters[i]; ImGui::SameLine();  ImGui::Text("\'%c\' (0x%04X)", (c > ' ' && c <= 255) ? (char)c : '?', c); } // FIXME: We should convert 'c' to UTF-8 here but the functions are not public.
+
+            // Draw an arbitrary US keyboard layout to visualize translated keys
+            {
+                const ImVec2 key_size = ImVec2(35.0f, 35.0f);
+                const float  key_rounding = 3.0f;
+                const ImVec2 key_face_size = ImVec2(25.0f, 25.0f);
+                const ImVec2 key_face_pos = ImVec2(5.0f, 3.0f);
+                const float  key_face_rounding = 2.0f;
+                const ImVec2 key_label_pos = ImVec2(7.0f, 4.0f);
+                const ImVec2 key_step = ImVec2(key_size.x - 1.0f, key_size.y - 1.0f);
+                const float  key_row_offset = 9.0f;
+
+                ImVec2 board_min = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
+                ImVec2 board_max = ImVec2(board_min.x + 3 * key_step.x + 2 * key_row_offset + 10.0f, board_min.y + 3 * key_step.y + 10.0f);
+                ImVec2 start_pos = ImVec2(board_min.x + 5.0f - key_step.x, board_min.y);
+
+                struct KeyLayoutData { int Row, Col; const char* Label; ImGuiKey Key; };
+                const KeyLayoutData keys_to_display[] =
+                {
+                    { 0, 0, "", ImGuiKey_Tab },      { 0, 1, "Q", ImGuiKey_Q }, { 0, 2, "W", ImGuiKey_W }, { 0, 3, "E", ImGuiKey_E }, { 0, 4, "R", ImGuiKey_R },
+                    { 1, 0, "", ImGuiKey_CapsLock }, { 1, 1, "A", ImGuiKey_A }, { 1, 2, "S", ImGuiKey_S }, { 1, 3, "D", ImGuiKey_D }, { 1, 4, "F", ImGuiKey_F },
+                    { 2, 0, "", ImGuiKey_LeftShift },{ 2, 1, "Z", ImGuiKey_Z }, { 2, 2, "X", ImGuiKey_X }, { 2, 3, "C", ImGuiKey_C }, { 2, 4, "V", ImGuiKey_V }
+                };
+
+                // Elements rendered manually via ImDrawList API are not clipped automatically.
+                // While not strictly necessary, here IsItemVisible() is used to avoid rendering these shapes when they are out of view.
+                ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2(board_max.x - board_min.x, board_max.y - board_min.y));
+                if (ImGui::IsItemVisible())
+                {
+                    ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList();
+                    draw_list->PushClipRect(board_min, board_max, true);
+                    for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(keys_to_display); n++)
+                    {
+                        const KeyLayoutData* key_data = &keys_to_display[n];
+                        ImVec2 key_min = ImVec2(start_pos.x + key_data->Col * key_step.x + key_data->Row * key_row_offset, start_pos.y + key_data->Row * key_step.y);
+                        ImVec2 key_max = ImVec2(key_min.x + key_size.x, key_min.y + key_size.y);
+                        draw_list->AddRectFilled(key_min, key_max, IM_COL32(204, 204, 204, 255), key_rounding);
+                        draw_list->AddRect(key_min, key_max, IM_COL32(24, 24, 24, 255), key_rounding);
+                        ImVec2 face_min = ImVec2(key_min.x + key_face_pos.x, key_min.y + key_face_pos.y);
+                        ImVec2 face_max = ImVec2(face_min.x + key_face_size.x, face_min.y + key_face_size.y);
+                        draw_list->AddRect(face_min, face_max, IM_COL32(193, 193, 193, 255), key_face_rounding, ImDrawFlags_None, 2.0f);
+                        draw_list->AddRectFilled(face_min, face_max, IM_COL32(252, 252, 252, 255), key_face_rounding);
+                        ImVec2 label_min = ImVec2(key_min.x + key_label_pos.x, key_min.y + key_label_pos.y);
+                        draw_list->AddText(label_min, IM_COL32(64, 64, 64, 255), key_data->Label);
+                        if (ImGui::IsKeyDown(key_data->Key))
+                            draw_list->AddRectFilled(key_min, key_max, IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 128), key_rounding);
+                    }
+                    draw_list->PopClipRect();
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Capture override"))
+        {
+            HelpMarker(
+                "The value of io.WantCaptureMouse and io.WantCaptureKeyboard are normally set by Dear ImGui "
+                "to instruct your application of how to route inputs. Typically, when a value is true, it means "
+                "Dear ImGui wants the corresponding inputs and we expect the underlying application to ignore them.\n\n"
+                "The most typical case is: when hovering a window, Dear ImGui set io.WantCaptureMouse to true, "
+                "and underlying application should ignore mouse inputs (in practice there are many and more subtle "
+                "rules leading to how those flags are set).");
+
+            ImGui::Text("io.WantCaptureMouse: %d", io.WantCaptureMouse);
+            ImGui::Text("io.WantCaptureMouseUnlessPopupClose: %d", io.WantCaptureMouseUnlessPopupClose);
+            ImGui::Text("io.WantCaptureKeyboard: %d", io.WantCaptureKeyboard);
+
+            HelpMarker(
+                "Hovering the colored canvas will override io.WantCaptureXXX fields.\n"
+                "Notice how normally (when set to none), the value of io.WantCaptureKeyboard would be false when hovering and true when clicking.");
+            static int capture_override_mouse = -1;
+            static int capture_override_keyboard = -1;
+            const char* capture_override_desc[] = { "None", "Set to false", "Set to true" };
+            ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 15);
+            ImGui::SliderInt("SetNextFrameWantCaptureMouse()", &capture_override_mouse, -1, +1, capture_override_desc[capture_override_mouse + 1], ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp);
+            ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 15);
+            ImGui::SliderInt("SetNextFrameWantCaptureKeyboard()", &capture_override_keyboard, -1, +1, capture_override_desc[capture_override_keyboard + 1], ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp);
+
+            ImGui::ColorButton("##panel", ImVec4(0.7f, 0.1f, 0.7f, 1.0f), ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop, ImVec2(256.0f, 192.0f)); // Dummy item
+            if (ImGui::IsItemHovered() && capture_override_mouse != -1)
+                ImGui::SetNextFrameWantCaptureMouse(capture_override_mouse == 1);
+            if (ImGui::IsItemHovered() && capture_override_keyboard != -1)
+                ImGui::SetNextFrameWantCaptureKeyboard(capture_override_keyboard == 1);
+
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Inputs, Navigation & Focus/Tabbing");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Tabbing"))
+        {
+            ImGui::Text("Use TAB/SHIFT+TAB to cycle through keyboard editable fields.");
+            static char buf[32] = "hello";
+            ImGui::InputText("1", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf));
+            ImGui::InputText("2", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf));
+            ImGui::InputText("3", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf));
+            ImGui::PushAllowKeyboardFocus(false);
+            ImGui::InputText("4 (tab skip)", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf));
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Item won't be cycled through when using TAB or Shift+Tab.");
+            ImGui::PopAllowKeyboardFocus();
+            ImGui::InputText("5", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf));
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Inputs, Navigation & Focus/Focus from code");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Focus from code"))
+        {
+            bool focus_1 = ImGui::Button("Focus on 1"); ImGui::SameLine();
+            bool focus_2 = ImGui::Button("Focus on 2"); ImGui::SameLine();
+            bool focus_3 = ImGui::Button("Focus on 3");
+            int has_focus = 0;
+            static char buf[128] = "click on a button to set focus";
+
+            if (focus_1) ImGui::SetKeyboardFocusHere();
+            ImGui::InputText("1", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf));
+            if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) has_focus = 1;
+
+            if (focus_2) ImGui::SetKeyboardFocusHere();
+            ImGui::InputText("2", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf));
+            if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) has_focus = 2;
+
+            ImGui::PushAllowKeyboardFocus(false);
+            if (focus_3) ImGui::SetKeyboardFocusHere();
+            ImGui::InputText("3 (tab skip)", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf));
+            if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) has_focus = 3;
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Item won't be cycled through when using TAB or Shift+Tab.");
+            ImGui::PopAllowKeyboardFocus();
+
+            if (has_focus)
+                ImGui::Text("Item with focus: %d", has_focus);
+            else
+                ImGui::Text("Item with focus: <none>");
+
+            // Use >= 0 parameter to SetKeyboardFocusHere() to focus an upcoming item
+            static float f3[3] = { 0.0f, 0.0f, 0.0f };
+            int focus_ahead = -1;
+            if (ImGui::Button("Focus on X")) { focus_ahead = 0; } ImGui::SameLine();
+            if (ImGui::Button("Focus on Y")) { focus_ahead = 1; } ImGui::SameLine();
+            if (ImGui::Button("Focus on Z")) { focus_ahead = 2; }
+            if (focus_ahead != -1) ImGui::SetKeyboardFocusHere(focus_ahead);
+            ImGui::SliderFloat3("Float3", &f3[0], 0.0f, 1.0f);
+
+            ImGui::TextWrapped("NB: Cursor & selection are preserved when refocusing last used item in code.");
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Inputs, Navigation & Focus/Dragging");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Dragging"))
+        {
+            ImGui::TextWrapped("You can use ImGui::GetMouseDragDelta(0) to query for the dragged amount on any widget.");
+            for (int button = 0; button < 3; button++)
+            {
+                ImGui::Text("IsMouseDragging(%d):", button);
+                ImGui::Text("  w/ default threshold: %d,", ImGui::IsMouseDragging(button));
+                ImGui::Text("  w/ zero threshold: %d,", ImGui::IsMouseDragging(button, 0.0f));
+                ImGui::Text("  w/ large threshold: %d,", ImGui::IsMouseDragging(button, 20.0f));
+            }
+
+            ImGui::Button("Drag Me");
+            if (ImGui::IsItemActive())
+                ImGui::GetForegroundDrawList()->AddLine(io.MouseClickedPos[0], io.MousePos, ImGui::GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Button), 4.0f); // Draw a line between the button and the mouse cursor
+
+            // Drag operations gets "unlocked" when the mouse has moved past a certain threshold
+            // (the default threshold is stored in io.MouseDragThreshold). You can request a lower or higher
+            // threshold using the second parameter of IsMouseDragging() and GetMouseDragDelta().
+            ImVec2 value_raw = ImGui::GetMouseDragDelta(0, 0.0f);
+            ImVec2 value_with_lock_threshold = ImGui::GetMouseDragDelta(0);
+            ImVec2 mouse_delta = io.MouseDelta;
+            ImGui::Text("GetMouseDragDelta(0):");
+            ImGui::Text("  w/ default threshold: (%.1f, %.1f)", value_with_lock_threshold.x, value_with_lock_threshold.y);
+            ImGui::Text("  w/ zero threshold: (%.1f, %.1f)", value_raw.x, value_raw.y);
+            ImGui::Text("io.MouseDelta: (%.1f, %.1f)", mouse_delta.x, mouse_delta.y);
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Inputs, Navigation & Focus/Mouse cursors");
+        if (ImGui::TreeNode("Mouse cursors"))
+        {
+            const char* mouse_cursors_names[] = { "Arrow", "TextInput", "ResizeAll", "ResizeNS", "ResizeEW", "ResizeNESW", "ResizeNWSE", "Hand", "NotAllowed" };
+            IM_ASSERT(IM_ARRAYSIZE(mouse_cursors_names) == ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT);
+
+            ImGuiMouseCursor current = ImGui::GetMouseCursor();
+            ImGui::Text("Current mouse cursor = %d: %s", current, mouse_cursors_names[current]);
+            ImGui::Text("Hover to see mouse cursors:");
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker(
+                "Your application can render a different mouse cursor based on what ImGui::GetMouseCursor() returns. "
+                "If software cursor rendering (io.MouseDrawCursor) is set ImGui will draw the right cursor for you, "
+                "otherwise your backend needs to handle it.");
+            for (int i = 0; i < ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT; i++)
+            {
+                char label[32];
+                sprintf(label, "Mouse cursor %d: %s", i, mouse_cursors_names[i]);
+                ImGui::Bullet(); ImGui::Selectable(label, false);
+                if (ImGui::IsItemHovered())
+                    ImGui::SetMouseCursor(i);
+            }
+            ImGui::TreePop();
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] About Window / ShowAboutWindow()
+// Access from Dear ImGui Demo -> Tools -> About
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+void ImGui::ShowAboutWindow(bool* p_open)
+{
+    if (!ImGui::Begin("About Dear ImGui", p_open, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize))
+    {
+        ImGui::End();
+        return;
+    }
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tools/About Dear ImGui");
+    ImGui::Text("Dear ImGui %s", ImGui::GetVersion());
+    ImGui::Separator();
+    ImGui::Text("By Omar Cornut and all Dear ImGui contributors.");
+    ImGui::Text("Dear ImGui is licensed under the MIT License, see LICENSE for more information.");
+
+    static bool show_config_info = false;
+    ImGui::Checkbox("Config/Build Information", &show_config_info);
+    if (show_config_info)
+    {
+        ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+        ImGuiStyle& style = ImGui::GetStyle();
+
+        bool copy_to_clipboard = ImGui::Button("Copy to clipboard");
+        ImVec2 child_size = ImVec2(0, ImGui::GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * 18);
+        ImGui::BeginChildFrame(ImGui::GetID("cfg_infos"), child_size, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove);
+        if (copy_to_clipboard)
+        {
+            ImGui::LogToClipboard();
+            ImGui::LogText("```\n"); // Back quotes will make text appears without formatting when pasting on GitHub
+        }
+
+        ImGui::Text("Dear ImGui %s (%d)", IMGUI_VERSION, IMGUI_VERSION_NUM);
+        ImGui::Separator();
+        ImGui::Text("sizeof(size_t): %d, sizeof(ImDrawIdx): %d, sizeof(ImDrawVert): %d", (int)sizeof(size_t), (int)sizeof(ImDrawIdx), (int)sizeof(ImDrawVert));
+        ImGui::Text("define: __cplusplus=%d", (int)__cplusplus);
+#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+        ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS");
+#endif
+#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO
+        ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO");
+#endif
+#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS
+        ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_CLIPBOARD_FUNCTIONS");
+#endif
+#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS
+        ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_DEFAULT_IME_FUNCTIONS");
+#endif
+#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_FUNCTIONS
+        ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_WIN32_FUNCTIONS");
+#endif
+#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FORMAT_FUNCTIONS
+        ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FORMAT_FUNCTIONS");
+#endif
+#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_MATH_FUNCTIONS
+        ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_MATH_FUNCTIONS");
+#endif
+#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FILE_FUNCTIONS
+        ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_FILE_FUNCTIONS");
+#endif
+#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_FILE_FUNCTIONS
+        ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_FILE_FUNCTIONS");
+#endif
+#ifdef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_ALLOCATORS
+        ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_DISABLE_DEFAULT_ALLOCATORS");
+#endif
+#ifdef IMGUI_USE_BGRA_PACKED_COLOR
+        ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_USE_BGRA_PACKED_COLOR");
+#endif
+#ifdef _WIN32
+        ImGui::Text("define: _WIN32");
+#endif
+#ifdef _WIN64
+        ImGui::Text("define: _WIN64");
+#endif
+#ifdef __linux__
+        ImGui::Text("define: __linux__");
+#endif
+#ifdef __APPLE__
+        ImGui::Text("define: __APPLE__");
+#endif
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+        ImGui::Text("define: _MSC_VER=%d", _MSC_VER);
+#endif
+#ifdef _MSVC_LANG
+        ImGui::Text("define: _MSVC_LANG=%d", (int)_MSVC_LANG);
+#endif
+#ifdef __MINGW32__
+        ImGui::Text("define: __MINGW32__");
+#endif
+#ifdef __MINGW64__
+        ImGui::Text("define: __MINGW64__");
+#endif
+#ifdef __GNUC__
+        ImGui::Text("define: __GNUC__=%d", (int)__GNUC__);
+#endif
+#ifdef __clang_version__
+        ImGui::Text("define: __clang_version__=%s", __clang_version__);
+#endif
+#ifdef IMGUI_HAS_VIEWPORT
+        ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_HAS_VIEWPORT");
+#endif
+#ifdef IMGUI_HAS_DOCK
+        ImGui::Text("define: IMGUI_HAS_DOCK");
+#endif
+        ImGui::Separator();
+        ImGui::Text("io.BackendPlatformName: %s", io.BackendPlatformName ? io.BackendPlatformName : "NULL");
+        ImGui::Text("io.BackendRendererName: %s", io.BackendRendererName ? io.BackendRendererName : "NULL");
+        ImGui::Text("io.ConfigFlags: 0x%08X", io.ConfigFlags);
+        if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableKeyboard)        ImGui::Text(" NavEnableKeyboard");
+        if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad)         ImGui::Text(" NavEnableGamepad");
+        if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos)     ImGui::Text(" NavEnableSetMousePos");
+        if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavNoCaptureKeyboard)     ImGui::Text(" NavNoCaptureKeyboard");
+        if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouse)                  ImGui::Text(" NoMouse");
+        if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouseCursorChange)      ImGui::Text(" NoMouseCursorChange");
+        if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_DockingEnable)            ImGui::Text(" DockingEnable");
+        if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable)          ImGui::Text(" ViewportsEnable");
+        if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_DpiEnableScaleViewports)  ImGui::Text(" DpiEnableScaleViewports");
+        if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_DpiEnableScaleFonts)      ImGui::Text(" DpiEnableScaleFonts");
+        if (io.MouseDrawCursor)                                         ImGui::Text("io.MouseDrawCursor");
+        if (io.ConfigViewportsNoAutoMerge)                              ImGui::Text("io.ConfigViewportsNoAutoMerge");
+        if (io.ConfigViewportsNoTaskBarIcon)                            ImGui::Text("io.ConfigViewportsNoTaskBarIcon");
+        if (io.ConfigViewportsNoDecoration)                             ImGui::Text("io.ConfigViewportsNoDecoration");
+        if (io.ConfigViewportsNoDefaultParent)                          ImGui::Text("io.ConfigViewportsNoDefaultParent");
+        if (io.ConfigDockingNoSplit)                                    ImGui::Text("io.ConfigDockingNoSplit");
+        if (io.ConfigDockingWithShift)                                  ImGui::Text("io.ConfigDockingWithShift");
+        if (io.ConfigDockingAlwaysTabBar)                               ImGui::Text("io.ConfigDockingAlwaysTabBar");
+        if (io.ConfigDockingTransparentPayload)                         ImGui::Text("io.ConfigDockingTransparentPayload");
+        if (io.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors)                                   ImGui::Text("io.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors");
+        if (io.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink)                              ImGui::Text("io.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink");
+        if (io.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges)                            ImGui::Text("io.ConfigWindowsResizeFromEdges");
+        if (io.ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly)                       ImGui::Text("io.ConfigWindowsMoveFromTitleBarOnly");
+        if (io.ConfigMemoryCompactTimer >= 0.0f)                        ImGui::Text("io.ConfigMemoryCompactTimer = %.1f", io.ConfigMemoryCompactTimer);
+        ImGui::Text("io.BackendFlags: 0x%08X", io.BackendFlags);
+        if (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad)             ImGui::Text(" HasGamepad");
+        if (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors)        ImGui::Text(" HasMouseCursors");
+        if (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasSetMousePos)         ImGui::Text(" HasSetMousePos");
+        if (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_PlatformHasViewports)   ImGui::Text(" PlatformHasViewports");
+        if (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseHoveredViewport)ImGui::Text(" HasMouseHoveredViewport");
+        if (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset)   ImGui::Text(" RendererHasVtxOffset");
+        if (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasViewports)   ImGui::Text(" RendererHasViewports");
+        ImGui::Separator();
+        ImGui::Text("io.Fonts: %d fonts, Flags: 0x%08X, TexSize: %d,%d", io.Fonts->Fonts.Size, io.Fonts->Flags, io.Fonts->TexWidth, io.Fonts->TexHeight);
+        ImGui::Text("io.DisplaySize: %.2f,%.2f", io.DisplaySize.x, io.DisplaySize.y);
+        ImGui::Text("io.DisplayFramebufferScale: %.2f,%.2f", io.DisplayFramebufferScale.x, io.DisplayFramebufferScale.y);
+        ImGui::Separator();
+        ImGui::Text("style.WindowPadding: %.2f,%.2f", style.WindowPadding.x, style.WindowPadding.y);
+        ImGui::Text("style.WindowBorderSize: %.2f", style.WindowBorderSize);
+        ImGui::Text("style.FramePadding: %.2f,%.2f", style.FramePadding.x, style.FramePadding.y);
+        ImGui::Text("style.FrameRounding: %.2f", style.FrameRounding);
+        ImGui::Text("style.FrameBorderSize: %.2f", style.FrameBorderSize);
+        ImGui::Text("style.ItemSpacing: %.2f,%.2f", style.ItemSpacing.x, style.ItemSpacing.y);
+        ImGui::Text("style.ItemInnerSpacing: %.2f,%.2f", style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, style.ItemInnerSpacing.y);
+
+        if (copy_to_clipboard)
+        {
+            ImGui::LogText("\n```\n");
+            ImGui::LogFinish();
+        }
+        ImGui::EndChildFrame();
+    }
+    ImGui::End();
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Style Editor / ShowStyleEditor()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - ShowFontSelector()
+// - ShowStyleSelector()
+// - ShowStyleEditor()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Forward declare ShowFontAtlas() which isn't worth putting in public API yet
+namespace ImGui { IMGUI_API void ShowFontAtlas(ImFontAtlas* atlas); }
+
+// Demo helper function to select among loaded fonts.
+// Here we use the regular BeginCombo()/EndCombo() api which is the more flexible one.
+void ImGui::ShowFontSelector(const char* label)
+{
+    ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+    ImFont* font_current = ImGui::GetFont();
+    if (ImGui::BeginCombo(label, font_current->GetDebugName()))
+    {
+        for (int n = 0; n < io.Fonts->Fonts.Size; n++)
+        {
+            ImFont* font = io.Fonts->Fonts[n];
+            ImGui::PushID((void*)font);
+            if (ImGui::Selectable(font->GetDebugName(), font == font_current))
+                io.FontDefault = font;
+            ImGui::PopID();
+        }
+        ImGui::EndCombo();
+    }
+    ImGui::SameLine();
+    HelpMarker(
+        "- Load additional fonts with io.Fonts->AddFontFromFileTTF().\n"
+        "- The font atlas is built when calling io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsXXXX() or io.Fonts->Build().\n"
+        "- Read FAQ and docs/FONTS.md for more details.\n"
+        "- If you need to add/remove fonts at runtime (e.g. for DPI change), do it before calling NewFrame().");
+}
+
+// Demo helper function to select among default colors. See ShowStyleEditor() for more advanced options.
+// Here we use the simplified Combo() api that packs items into a single literal string.
+// Useful for quick combo boxes where the choices are known locally.
+bool ImGui::ShowStyleSelector(const char* label)
+{
+    static int style_idx = -1;
+    if (ImGui::Combo(label, &style_idx, "Dark\0Light\0Classic\0"))
+    {
+        switch (style_idx)
+        {
+        case 0: ImGui::StyleColorsDark(); break;
+        case 1: ImGui::StyleColorsLight(); break;
+        case 2: ImGui::StyleColorsClassic(); break;
+        }
+        return true;
+    }
+    return false;
+}
+
+void ImGui::ShowStyleEditor(ImGuiStyle* ref)
+{
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Tools/Style Editor");
+    // You can pass in a reference ImGuiStyle structure to compare to, revert to and save to
+    // (without a reference style pointer, we will use one compared locally as a reference)
+    ImGuiStyle& style = ImGui::GetStyle();
+    static ImGuiStyle ref_saved_style;
+
+    // Default to using internal storage as reference
+    static bool init = true;
+    if (init && ref == NULL)
+        ref_saved_style = style;
+    init = false;
+    if (ref == NULL)
+        ref = &ref_saved_style;
+
+    ImGui::PushItemWidth(ImGui::GetWindowWidth() * 0.50f);
+
+    if (ImGui::ShowStyleSelector("Colors##Selector"))
+        ref_saved_style = style;
+    ImGui::ShowFontSelector("Fonts##Selector");
+
+    // Simplified Settings (expose floating-pointer border sizes as boolean representing 0.0f or 1.0f)
+    if (ImGui::SliderFloat("FrameRounding", &style.FrameRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f"))
+        style.GrabRounding = style.FrameRounding; // Make GrabRounding always the same value as FrameRounding
+    { bool border = (style.WindowBorderSize > 0.0f); if (ImGui::Checkbox("WindowBorder", &border)) { style.WindowBorderSize = border ? 1.0f : 0.0f; } }
+    ImGui::SameLine();
+    { bool border = (style.FrameBorderSize > 0.0f);  if (ImGui::Checkbox("FrameBorder",  &border)) { style.FrameBorderSize  = border ? 1.0f : 0.0f; } }
+    ImGui::SameLine();
+    { bool border = (style.PopupBorderSize > 0.0f);  if (ImGui::Checkbox("PopupBorder",  &border)) { style.PopupBorderSize  = border ? 1.0f : 0.0f; } }
+
+    // Save/Revert button
+    if (ImGui::Button("Save Ref"))
+        *ref = ref_saved_style = style;
+    ImGui::SameLine();
+    if (ImGui::Button("Revert Ref"))
+        style = *ref;
+    ImGui::SameLine();
+    HelpMarker(
+        "Save/Revert in local non-persistent storage. Default Colors definition are not affected. "
+        "Use \"Export\" below to save them somewhere.");
+
+    ImGui::Separator();
+
+    if (ImGui::BeginTabBar("##tabs", ImGuiTabBarFlags_None))
+    {
+        if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Sizes"))
+        {
+            ImGui::Text("Main");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat2("WindowPadding", (float*)&style.WindowPadding, 0.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat2("FramePadding", (float*)&style.FramePadding, 0.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat2("CellPadding", (float*)&style.CellPadding, 0.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat2("ItemSpacing", (float*)&style.ItemSpacing, 0.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat2("ItemInnerSpacing", (float*)&style.ItemInnerSpacing, 0.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat2("TouchExtraPadding", (float*)&style.TouchExtraPadding, 0.0f, 10.0f, "%.0f");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat("IndentSpacing", &style.IndentSpacing, 0.0f, 30.0f, "%.0f");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat("ScrollbarSize", &style.ScrollbarSize, 1.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat("GrabMinSize", &style.GrabMinSize, 1.0f, 20.0f, "%.0f");
+            ImGui::Text("Borders");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat("WindowBorderSize", &style.WindowBorderSize, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.0f");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat("ChildBorderSize", &style.ChildBorderSize, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.0f");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat("PopupBorderSize", &style.PopupBorderSize, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.0f");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat("FrameBorderSize", &style.FrameBorderSize, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.0f");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat("TabBorderSize", &style.TabBorderSize, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.0f");
+            ImGui::Text("Rounding");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat("WindowRounding", &style.WindowRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat("ChildRounding", &style.ChildRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat("FrameRounding", &style.FrameRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat("PopupRounding", &style.PopupRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat("ScrollbarRounding", &style.ScrollbarRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat("GrabRounding", &style.GrabRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat("LogSliderDeadzone", &style.LogSliderDeadzone, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat("TabRounding", &style.TabRounding, 0.0f, 12.0f, "%.0f");
+            ImGui::Text("Alignment");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat2("WindowTitleAlign", (float*)&style.WindowTitleAlign, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.2f");
+            int window_menu_button_position = style.WindowMenuButtonPosition + 1;
+            if (ImGui::Combo("WindowMenuButtonPosition", (int*)&window_menu_button_position, "None\0Left\0Right\0"))
+                style.WindowMenuButtonPosition = window_menu_button_position - 1;
+            ImGui::Combo("ColorButtonPosition", (int*)&style.ColorButtonPosition, "Left\0Right\0");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat2("ButtonTextAlign", (float*)&style.ButtonTextAlign, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.2f");
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Alignment applies when a button is larger than its text content.");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat2("SelectableTextAlign", (float*)&style.SelectableTextAlign, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.2f");
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Alignment applies when a selectable is larger than its text content.");
+            ImGui::Text("Safe Area Padding");
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Adjust if you cannot see the edges of your screen (e.g. on a TV where scaling has not been configured).");
+            ImGui::SliderFloat2("DisplaySafeAreaPadding", (float*)&style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding, 0.0f, 30.0f, "%.0f");
+            ImGui::EndTabItem();
+        }
+
+        if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Colors"))
+        {
+            static int output_dest = 0;
+            static bool output_only_modified = true;
+            if (ImGui::Button("Export"))
+            {
+                if (output_dest == 0)
+                    ImGui::LogToClipboard();
+                else
+                    ImGui::LogToTTY();
+                ImGui::LogText("ImVec4* colors = ImGui::GetStyle().Colors;" IM_NEWLINE);
+                for (int i = 0; i < ImGuiCol_COUNT; i++)
+                {
+                    const ImVec4& col = style.Colors[i];
+                    const char* name = ImGui::GetStyleColorName(i);
+                    if (!output_only_modified || memcmp(&col, &ref->Colors[i], sizeof(ImVec4)) != 0)
+                        ImGui::LogText("colors[ImGuiCol_%s]%*s= ImVec4(%.2ff, %.2ff, %.2ff, %.2ff);" IM_NEWLINE,
+                            name, 23 - (int)strlen(name), "", col.x, col.y, col.z, col.w);
+                }
+                ImGui::LogFinish();
+            }
+            ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(120); ImGui::Combo("##output_type", &output_dest, "To Clipboard\0To TTY\0");
+            ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::Checkbox("Only Modified Colors", &output_only_modified);
+
+            static ImGuiTextFilter filter;
+            filter.Draw("Filter colors", ImGui::GetFontSize() * 16);
+
+            static ImGuiColorEditFlags alpha_flags = 0;
+            if (ImGui::RadioButton("Opaque", alpha_flags == ImGuiColorEditFlags_None))             { alpha_flags = ImGuiColorEditFlags_None; } ImGui::SameLine();
+            if (ImGui::RadioButton("Alpha",  alpha_flags == ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview))     { alpha_flags = ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview; } ImGui::SameLine();
+            if (ImGui::RadioButton("Both",   alpha_flags == ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf)) { alpha_flags = ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf; } ImGui::SameLine();
+            HelpMarker(
+                "In the color list:\n"
+                "Left-click on color square to open color picker,\n"
+                "Right-click to open edit options menu.");
+
+            ImGui::BeginChild("##colors", ImVec2(0, 0), true, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysVerticalScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysHorizontalScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NavFlattened);
+            ImGui::PushItemWidth(-160);
+            for (int i = 0; i < ImGuiCol_COUNT; i++)
+            {
+                const char* name = ImGui::GetStyleColorName(i);
+                if (!filter.PassFilter(name))
+                    continue;
+                ImGui::PushID(i);
+                ImGui::ColorEdit4("##color", (float*)&style.Colors[i], ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar | alpha_flags);
+                if (memcmp(&style.Colors[i], &ref->Colors[i], sizeof(ImVec4)) != 0)
+                {
+                    // Tips: in a real user application, you may want to merge and use an icon font into the main font,
+                    // so instead of "Save"/"Revert" you'd use icons!
+                    // Read the FAQ and docs/FONTS.md about using icon fonts. It's really easy and super convenient!
+                    ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); if (ImGui::Button("Save")) { ref->Colors[i] = style.Colors[i]; }
+                    ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x); if (ImGui::Button("Revert")) { style.Colors[i] = ref->Colors[i]; }
+                }
+                ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+                ImGui::TextUnformatted(name);
+                ImGui::PopID();
+            }
+            ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+            ImGui::EndChild();
+
+            ImGui::EndTabItem();
+        }
+
+        if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Fonts"))
+        {
+            ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+            ImFontAtlas* atlas = io.Fonts;
+            HelpMarker("Read FAQ and docs/FONTS.md for details on font loading.");
+            ImGui::ShowFontAtlas(atlas);
+
+            // Post-baking font scaling. Note that this is NOT the nice way of scaling fonts, read below.
+            // (we enforce hard clamping manually as by default DragFloat/SliderFloat allows CTRL+Click text to get out of bounds).
+            const float MIN_SCALE = 0.3f;
+            const float MAX_SCALE = 2.0f;
+            HelpMarker(
+                "Those are old settings provided for convenience.\n"
+                "However, the _correct_ way of scaling your UI is currently to reload your font at the designed size, "
+                "rebuild the font atlas, and call style.ScaleAllSizes() on a reference ImGuiStyle structure.\n"
+                "Using those settings here will give you poor quality results.");
+            static float window_scale = 1.0f;
+            ImGui::PushItemWidth(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 8);
+            if (ImGui::DragFloat("window scale", &window_scale, 0.005f, MIN_SCALE, MAX_SCALE, "%.2f", ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp)) // Scale only this window
+                ImGui::SetWindowFontScale(window_scale);
+            ImGui::DragFloat("global scale", &io.FontGlobalScale, 0.005f, MIN_SCALE, MAX_SCALE, "%.2f", ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp); // Scale everything
+            ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+
+            ImGui::EndTabItem();
+        }
+
+        if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Rendering"))
+        {
+            ImGui::Checkbox("Anti-aliased lines", &style.AntiAliasedLines);
+            ImGui::SameLine();
+            HelpMarker("When disabling anti-aliasing lines, you'll probably want to disable borders in your style as well.");
+
+            ImGui::Checkbox("Anti-aliased lines use texture", &style.AntiAliasedLinesUseTex);
+            ImGui::SameLine();
+            HelpMarker("Faster lines using texture data. Require backend to render with bilinear filtering (not point/nearest filtering).");
+
+            ImGui::Checkbox("Anti-aliased fill", &style.AntiAliasedFill);
+            ImGui::PushItemWidth(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 8);
+            ImGui::DragFloat("Curve Tessellation Tolerance", &style.CurveTessellationTol, 0.02f, 0.10f, 10.0f, "%.2f");
+            if (style.CurveTessellationTol < 0.10f) style.CurveTessellationTol = 0.10f;
+
+            // When editing the "Circle Segment Max Error" value, draw a preview of its effect on auto-tessellated circles.
+            ImGui::DragFloat("Circle Tessellation Max Error", &style.CircleTessellationMaxError , 0.005f, 0.10f, 5.0f, "%.2f", ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp);
+            if (ImGui::IsItemActive())
+            {
+                ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos());
+                ImGui::BeginTooltip();
+                ImGui::TextUnformatted("(R = radius, N = number of segments)");
+                ImGui::Spacing();
+                ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList();
+                const float min_widget_width = ImGui::CalcTextSize("N: MMM\nR: MMM").x;
+                for (int n = 0; n < 8; n++)
+                {
+                    const float RAD_MIN = 5.0f;
+                    const float RAD_MAX = 70.0f;
+                    const float rad = RAD_MIN + (RAD_MAX - RAD_MIN) * (float)n / (8.0f - 1.0f);
+
+                    ImGui::BeginGroup();
+
+                    ImGui::Text("R: %.f\nN: %d", rad, draw_list->_CalcCircleAutoSegmentCount(rad));
+
+                    const float canvas_width = IM_MAX(min_widget_width, rad * 2.0f);
+                    const float offset_x     = floorf(canvas_width * 0.5f);
+                    const float offset_y     = floorf(RAD_MAX);
+
+                    const ImVec2 p1 = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
+                    draw_list->AddCircle(ImVec2(p1.x + offset_x, p1.y + offset_y), rad, ImGui::GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text));
+                    ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2(canvas_width, RAD_MAX * 2));
+
+                    /*
+                    const ImVec2 p2 = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
+                    draw_list->AddCircleFilled(ImVec2(p2.x + offset_x, p2.y + offset_y), rad, ImGui::GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text));
+                    ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2(canvas_width, RAD_MAX * 2));
+                    */
+
+                    ImGui::EndGroup();
+                    ImGui::SameLine();
+                }
+                ImGui::EndTooltip();
+            }
+            ImGui::SameLine();
+            HelpMarker("When drawing circle primitives with \"num_segments == 0\" tesselation will be calculated automatically.");
+
+            ImGui::DragFloat("Global Alpha", &style.Alpha, 0.005f, 0.20f, 1.0f, "%.2f"); // Not exposing zero here so user doesn't "lose" the UI (zero alpha clips all widgets). But application code could have a toggle to switch between zero and non-zero.
+            ImGui::DragFloat("Disabled Alpha", &style.DisabledAlpha, 0.005f, 0.0f, 1.0f, "%.2f"); ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("Additional alpha multiplier for disabled items (multiply over current value of Alpha).");
+            ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+
+            ImGui::EndTabItem();
+        }
+
+        ImGui::EndTabBar();
+    }
+
+    ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Example App: Main Menu Bar / ShowExampleAppMainMenuBar()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - ShowExampleAppMainMenuBar()
+// - ShowExampleMenuFile()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Demonstrate creating a "main" fullscreen menu bar and populating it.
+// Note the difference between BeginMainMenuBar() and BeginMenuBar():
+// - BeginMenuBar() = menu-bar inside current window (which needs the ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar flag!)
+// - BeginMainMenuBar() = helper to create menu-bar-sized window at the top of the main viewport + call BeginMenuBar() into it.
+static void ShowExampleAppMainMenuBar()
+{
+    if (ImGui::BeginMainMenuBar())
+    {
+        if (ImGui::BeginMenu("File"))
+        {
+            ShowExampleMenuFile();
+            ImGui::EndMenu();
+        }
+        if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Edit"))
+        {
+            if (ImGui::MenuItem("Undo", "CTRL+Z")) {}
+            if (ImGui::MenuItem("Redo", "CTRL+Y", false, false)) {}  // Disabled item
+            ImGui::Separator();
+            if (ImGui::MenuItem("Cut", "CTRL+X")) {}
+            if (ImGui::MenuItem("Copy", "CTRL+C")) {}
+            if (ImGui::MenuItem("Paste", "CTRL+V")) {}
+            ImGui::EndMenu();
+        }
+        ImGui::EndMainMenuBar();
+    }
+}
+
+// Note that shortcuts are currently provided for display only
+// (future version will add explicit flags to BeginMenu() to request processing shortcuts)
+static void ShowExampleMenuFile()
+{
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Menu");
+    ImGui::MenuItem("(demo menu)", NULL, false, false);
+    if (ImGui::MenuItem("New")) {}
+    if (ImGui::MenuItem("Open", "Ctrl+O")) {}
+    if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Open Recent"))
+    {
+        ImGui::MenuItem("fish_hat.c");
+        ImGui::MenuItem("fish_hat.inl");
+        ImGui::MenuItem("fish_hat.h");
+        if (ImGui::BeginMenu("More.."))
+        {
+            ImGui::MenuItem("Hello");
+            ImGui::MenuItem("Sailor");
+            if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Recurse.."))
+            {
+                ShowExampleMenuFile();
+                ImGui::EndMenu();
+            }
+            ImGui::EndMenu();
+        }
+        ImGui::EndMenu();
+    }
+    if (ImGui::MenuItem("Save", "Ctrl+S")) {}
+    if (ImGui::MenuItem("Save As..")) {}
+
+    ImGui::Separator();
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Menu/Options");
+    if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Options"))
+    {
+        static bool enabled = true;
+        ImGui::MenuItem("Enabled", "", &enabled);
+        ImGui::BeginChild("child", ImVec2(0, 60), true);
+        for (int i = 0; i < 10; i++)
+            ImGui::Text("Scrolling Text %d", i);
+        ImGui::EndChild();
+        static float f = 0.5f;
+        static int n = 0;
+        ImGui::SliderFloat("Value", &f, 0.0f, 1.0f);
+        ImGui::InputFloat("Input", &f, 0.1f);
+        ImGui::Combo("Combo", &n, "Yes\0No\0Maybe\0\0");
+        ImGui::EndMenu();
+    }
+
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Menu/Colors");
+    if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Colors"))
+    {
+        float sz = ImGui::GetTextLineHeight();
+        for (int i = 0; i < ImGuiCol_COUNT; i++)
+        {
+            const char* name = ImGui::GetStyleColorName((ImGuiCol)i);
+            ImVec2 p = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
+            ImGui::GetWindowDrawList()->AddRectFilled(p, ImVec2(p.x + sz, p.y + sz), ImGui::GetColorU32((ImGuiCol)i));
+            ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2(sz, sz));
+            ImGui::SameLine();
+            ImGui::MenuItem(name);
+        }
+        ImGui::EndMenu();
+    }
+
+    // Here we demonstrate appending again to the "Options" menu (which we already created above)
+    // Of course in this demo it is a little bit silly that this function calls BeginMenu("Options") twice.
+    // In a real code-base using it would make senses to use this feature from very different code locations.
+    if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Options")) // <-- Append!
+    {
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Menu/Append to an existing menu");
+        static bool b = true;
+        ImGui::Checkbox("SomeOption", &b);
+        ImGui::EndMenu();
+    }
+
+    if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Disabled", false)) // Disabled
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(0);
+    }
+    if (ImGui::MenuItem("Checked", NULL, true)) {}
+    if (ImGui::MenuItem("Quit", "Alt+F4")) {}
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Example App: Debug Console / ShowExampleAppConsole()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Demonstrate creating a simple console window, with scrolling, filtering, completion and history.
+// For the console example, we are using a more C++ like approach of declaring a class to hold both data and functions.
+struct ExampleAppConsole
+{
+    char                  InputBuf[256];
+    ImVector<char*>       Items;
+    ImVector<const char*> Commands;
+    ImVector<char*>       History;
+    int                   HistoryPos;    // -1: new line, 0..History.Size-1 browsing history.
+    ImGuiTextFilter       Filter;
+    bool                  AutoScroll;
+    bool                  ScrollToBottom;
+
+    ExampleAppConsole()
+    {
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Console");
+        ClearLog();
+        memset(InputBuf, 0, sizeof(InputBuf));
+        HistoryPos = -1;
+
+        // "CLASSIFY" is here to provide the test case where "C"+[tab] completes to "CL" and display multiple matches.
+        Commands.push_back("HELP");
+        Commands.push_back("HISTORY");
+        Commands.push_back("CLEAR");
+        Commands.push_back("CLASSIFY");
+        AutoScroll = true;
+        ScrollToBottom = false;
+        AddLog("Welcome to Dear ImGui!");
+    }
+    ~ExampleAppConsole()
+    {
+        ClearLog();
+        for (int i = 0; i < History.Size; i++)
+            free(History[i]);
+    }
+
+    // Portable helpers
+    static int   Stricmp(const char* s1, const char* s2)         { int d; while ((d = toupper(*s2) - toupper(*s1)) == 0 && *s1) { s1++; s2++; } return d; }
+    static int   Strnicmp(const char* s1, const char* s2, int n) { int d = 0; while (n > 0 && (d = toupper(*s2) - toupper(*s1)) == 0 && *s1) { s1++; s2++; n--; } return d; }
+    static char* Strdup(const char* s)                           { IM_ASSERT(s); size_t len = strlen(s) + 1; void* buf = malloc(len); IM_ASSERT(buf); return (char*)memcpy(buf, (const void*)s, len); }
+    static void  Strtrim(char* s)                                { char* str_end = s + strlen(s); while (str_end > s && str_end[-1] == ' ') str_end--; *str_end = 0; }
+
+    void    ClearLog()
+    {
+        for (int i = 0; i < Items.Size; i++)
+            free(Items[i]);
+        Items.clear();
+    }
+
+    void    AddLog(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(2)
+    {
+        // FIXME-OPT
+        char buf[1024];
+        va_list args;
+        va_start(args, fmt);
+        vsnprintf(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), fmt, args);
+        buf[IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf)-1] = 0;
+        va_end(args);
+        Items.push_back(Strdup(buf));
+    }
+
+    void    Draw(const char* title, bool* p_open)
+    {
+        ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(520, 600), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver);
+        if (!ImGui::Begin(title, p_open))
+        {
+            ImGui::End();
+            return;
+        }
+
+        // As a specific feature guaranteed by the library, after calling Begin() the last Item represent the title bar.
+        // So e.g. IsItemHovered() will return true when hovering the title bar.
+        // Here we create a context menu only available from the title bar.
+        if (ImGui::BeginPopupContextItem())
+        {
+            if (ImGui::MenuItem("Close Console"))
+                *p_open = false;
+            ImGui::EndPopup();
+        }
+
+        ImGui::TextWrapped(
+            "This example implements a console with basic coloring, completion (TAB key) and history (Up/Down keys). A more elaborate "
+            "implementation may want to store entries along with extra data such as timestamp, emitter, etc.");
+        ImGui::TextWrapped("Enter 'HELP' for help.");
+
+        // TODO: display items starting from the bottom
+
+        if (ImGui::SmallButton("Add Debug Text"))  { AddLog("%d some text", Items.Size); AddLog("some more text"); AddLog("display very important message here!"); }
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        if (ImGui::SmallButton("Add Debug Error")) { AddLog("[error] something went wrong"); }
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        if (ImGui::SmallButton("Clear"))           { ClearLog(); }
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        bool copy_to_clipboard = ImGui::SmallButton("Copy");
+        //static float t = 0.0f; if (ImGui::GetTime() - t > 0.02f) { t = ImGui::GetTime(); AddLog("Spam %f", t); }
+
+        ImGui::Separator();
+
+        // Options menu
+        if (ImGui::BeginPopup("Options"))
+        {
+            ImGui::Checkbox("Auto-scroll", &AutoScroll);
+            ImGui::EndPopup();
+        }
+
+        // Options, Filter
+        if (ImGui::Button("Options"))
+            ImGui::OpenPopup("Options");
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        Filter.Draw("Filter (\"incl,-excl\") (\"error\")", 180);
+        ImGui::Separator();
+
+        // Reserve enough left-over height for 1 separator + 1 input text
+        const float footer_height_to_reserve = ImGui::GetStyle().ItemSpacing.y + ImGui::GetFrameHeightWithSpacing();
+        ImGui::BeginChild("ScrollingRegion", ImVec2(0, -footer_height_to_reserve), false, ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar);
+        if (ImGui::BeginPopupContextWindow())
+        {
+            if (ImGui::Selectable("Clear")) ClearLog();
+            ImGui::EndPopup();
+        }
+
+        // Display every line as a separate entry so we can change their color or add custom widgets.
+        // If you only want raw text you can use ImGui::TextUnformatted(log.begin(), log.end());
+        // NB- if you have thousands of entries this approach may be too inefficient and may require user-side clipping
+        // to only process visible items. The clipper will automatically measure the height of your first item and then
+        // "seek" to display only items in the visible area.
+        // To use the clipper we can replace your standard loop:
+        //      for (int i = 0; i < Items.Size; i++)
+        //   With:
+        //      ImGuiListClipper clipper;
+        //      clipper.Begin(Items.Size);
+        //      while (clipper.Step())
+        //         for (int i = clipper.DisplayStart; i < clipper.DisplayEnd; i++)
+        // - That your items are evenly spaced (same height)
+        // - That you have cheap random access to your elements (you can access them given their index,
+        //   without processing all the ones before)
+        // You cannot this code as-is if a filter is active because it breaks the 'cheap random-access' property.
+        // We would need random-access on the post-filtered list.
+        // A typical application wanting coarse clipping and filtering may want to pre-compute an array of indices
+        // or offsets of items that passed the filtering test, recomputing this array when user changes the filter,
+        // and appending newly elements as they are inserted. This is left as a task to the user until we can manage
+        // to improve this example code!
+        // If your items are of variable height:
+        // - Split them into same height items would be simpler and facilitate random-seeking into your list.
+        // - Consider using manual call to IsRectVisible() and skipping extraneous decoration from your items.
+        ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(4, 1)); // Tighten spacing
+        if (copy_to_clipboard)
+            ImGui::LogToClipboard();
+        for (int i = 0; i < Items.Size; i++)
+        {
+            const char* item = Items[i];
+            if (!Filter.PassFilter(item))
+                continue;
+
+            // Normally you would store more information in your item than just a string.
+            // (e.g. make Items[] an array of structure, store color/type etc.)
+            ImVec4 color;
+            bool has_color = false;
+            if (strstr(item, "[error]"))          { color = ImVec4(1.0f, 0.4f, 0.4f, 1.0f); has_color = true; }
+            else if (strncmp(item, "# ", 2) == 0) { color = ImVec4(1.0f, 0.8f, 0.6f, 1.0f); has_color = true; }
+            if (has_color)
+                ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, color);
+            ImGui::TextUnformatted(item);
+            if (has_color)
+                ImGui::PopStyleColor();
+        }
+        if (copy_to_clipboard)
+            ImGui::LogFinish();
+
+        if (ScrollToBottom || (AutoScroll && ImGui::GetScrollY() >= ImGui::GetScrollMaxY()))
+            ImGui::SetScrollHereY(1.0f);
+        ScrollToBottom = false;
+
+        ImGui::PopStyleVar();
+        ImGui::EndChild();
+        ImGui::Separator();
+
+        // Command-line
+        bool reclaim_focus = false;
+        ImGuiInputTextFlags input_text_flags = ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory;
+        if (ImGui::InputText("Input", InputBuf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(InputBuf), input_text_flags, &TextEditCallbackStub, (void*)this))
+        {
+            char* s = InputBuf;
+            Strtrim(s);
+            if (s[0])
+                ExecCommand(s);
+            strcpy(s, "");
+            reclaim_focus = true;
+        }
+
+        // Auto-focus on window apparition
+        ImGui::SetItemDefaultFocus();
+        if (reclaim_focus)
+            ImGui::SetKeyboardFocusHere(-1); // Auto focus previous widget
+
+        ImGui::End();
+    }
+
+    void    ExecCommand(const char* command_line)
+    {
+        AddLog("# %s\n", command_line);
+
+        // Insert into history. First find match and delete it so it can be pushed to the back.
+        // This isn't trying to be smart or optimal.
+        HistoryPos = -1;
+        for (int i = History.Size - 1; i >= 0; i--)
+            if (Stricmp(History[i], command_line) == 0)
+            {
+                free(History[i]);
+                History.erase(History.begin() + i);
+                break;
+            }
+        History.push_back(Strdup(command_line));
+
+        // Process command
+        if (Stricmp(command_line, "CLEAR") == 0)
+        {
+            ClearLog();
+        }
+        else if (Stricmp(command_line, "HELP") == 0)
+        {
+            AddLog("Commands:");
+            for (int i = 0; i < Commands.Size; i++)
+                AddLog("- %s", Commands[i]);
+        }
+        else if (Stricmp(command_line, "HISTORY") == 0)
+        {
+            int first = History.Size - 10;
+            for (int i = first > 0 ? first : 0; i < History.Size; i++)
+                AddLog("%3d: %s\n", i, History[i]);
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            AddLog("Unknown command: '%s'\n", command_line);
+        }
+
+        // On command input, we scroll to bottom even if AutoScroll==false
+        ScrollToBottom = true;
+    }
+
+    // In C++11 you'd be better off using lambdas for this sort of forwarding callbacks
+    static int TextEditCallbackStub(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData* data)
+    {
+        ExampleAppConsole* console = (ExampleAppConsole*)data->UserData;
+        return console->TextEditCallback(data);
+    }
+
+    int     TextEditCallback(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData* data)
+    {
+        //AddLog("cursor: %d, selection: %d-%d", data->CursorPos, data->SelectionStart, data->SelectionEnd);
+        switch (data->EventFlag)
+        {
+        case ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion:
+            {
+                // Example of TEXT COMPLETION
+
+                // Locate beginning of current word
+                const char* word_end = data->Buf + data->CursorPos;
+                const char* word_start = word_end;
+                while (word_start > data->Buf)
+                {
+                    const char c = word_start[-1];
+                    if (c == ' ' || c == '\t' || c == ',' || c == ';')
+                        break;
+                    word_start--;
+                }
+
+                // Build a list of candidates
+                ImVector<const char*> candidates;
+                for (int i = 0; i < Commands.Size; i++)
+                    if (Strnicmp(Commands[i], word_start, (int)(word_end - word_start)) == 0)
+                        candidates.push_back(Commands[i]);
+
+                if (candidates.Size == 0)
+                {
+                    // No match
+                    AddLog("No match for \"%.*s\"!\n", (int)(word_end - word_start), word_start);
+                }
+                else if (candidates.Size == 1)
+                {
+                    // Single match. Delete the beginning of the word and replace it entirely so we've got nice casing.
+                    data->DeleteChars((int)(word_start - data->Buf), (int)(word_end - word_start));
+                    data->InsertChars(data->CursorPos, candidates[0]);
+                    data->InsertChars(data->CursorPos, " ");
+                }
+                else
+                {
+                    // Multiple matches. Complete as much as we can..
+                    // So inputing "C"+Tab will complete to "CL" then display "CLEAR" and "CLASSIFY" as matches.
+                    int match_len = (int)(word_end - word_start);
+                    for (;;)
+                    {
+                        int c = 0;
+                        bool all_candidates_matches = true;
+                        for (int i = 0; i < candidates.Size && all_candidates_matches; i++)
+                            if (i == 0)
+                                c = toupper(candidates[i][match_len]);
+                            else if (c == 0 || c != toupper(candidates[i][match_len]))
+                                all_candidates_matches = false;
+                        if (!all_candidates_matches)
+                            break;
+                        match_len++;
+                    }
+
+                    if (match_len > 0)
+                    {
+                        data->DeleteChars((int)(word_start - data->Buf), (int)(word_end - word_start));
+                        data->InsertChars(data->CursorPos, candidates[0], candidates[0] + match_len);
+                    }
+
+                    // List matches
+                    AddLog("Possible matches:\n");
+                    for (int i = 0; i < candidates.Size; i++)
+                        AddLog("- %s\n", candidates[i]);
+                }
+
+                break;
+            }
+        case ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory:
+            {
+                // Example of HISTORY
+                const int prev_history_pos = HistoryPos;
+                if (data->EventKey == ImGuiKey_UpArrow)
+                {
+                    if (HistoryPos == -1)
+                        HistoryPos = History.Size - 1;
+                    else if (HistoryPos > 0)
+                        HistoryPos--;
+                }
+                else if (data->EventKey == ImGuiKey_DownArrow)
+                {
+                    if (HistoryPos != -1)
+                        if (++HistoryPos >= History.Size)
+                            HistoryPos = -1;
+                }
+
+                // A better implementation would preserve the data on the current input line along with cursor position.
+                if (prev_history_pos != HistoryPos)
+                {
+                    const char* history_str = (HistoryPos >= 0) ? History[HistoryPos] : "";
+                    data->DeleteChars(0, data->BufTextLen);
+                    data->InsertChars(0, history_str);
+                }
+            }
+        }
+        return 0;
+    }
+};
+
+static void ShowExampleAppConsole(bool* p_open)
+{
+    static ExampleAppConsole console;
+    console.Draw("Example: Console", p_open);
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Example App: Debug Log / ShowExampleAppLog()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Usage:
+//  static ExampleAppLog my_log;
+//  my_log.AddLog("Hello %d world\n", 123);
+//  my_log.Draw("title");
+struct ExampleAppLog
+{
+    ImGuiTextBuffer     Buf;
+    ImGuiTextFilter     Filter;
+    ImVector<int>       LineOffsets; // Index to lines offset. We maintain this with AddLog() calls.
+    bool                AutoScroll;  // Keep scrolling if already at the bottom.
+
+    ExampleAppLog()
+    {
+        AutoScroll = true;
+        Clear();
+    }
+
+    void    Clear()
+    {
+        Buf.clear();
+        LineOffsets.clear();
+        LineOffsets.push_back(0);
+    }
+
+    void    AddLog(const char* fmt, ...) IM_FMTARGS(2)
+    {
+        int old_size = Buf.size();
+        va_list args;
+        va_start(args, fmt);
+        Buf.appendfv(fmt, args);
+        va_end(args);
+        for (int new_size = Buf.size(); old_size < new_size; old_size++)
+            if (Buf[old_size] == '\n')
+                LineOffsets.push_back(old_size + 1);
+    }
+
+    void    Draw(const char* title, bool* p_open = NULL)
+    {
+        if (!ImGui::Begin(title, p_open))
+        {
+            ImGui::End();
+            return;
+        }
+
+        // Options menu
+        if (ImGui::BeginPopup("Options"))
+        {
+            ImGui::Checkbox("Auto-scroll", &AutoScroll);
+            ImGui::EndPopup();
+        }
+
+        // Main window
+        if (ImGui::Button("Options"))
+            ImGui::OpenPopup("Options");
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        bool clear = ImGui::Button("Clear");
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        bool copy = ImGui::Button("Copy");
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        Filter.Draw("Filter", -100.0f);
+
+        ImGui::Separator();
+        ImGui::BeginChild("scrolling", ImVec2(0, 0), false, ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar);
+
+        if (clear)
+            Clear();
+        if (copy)
+            ImGui::LogToClipboard();
+
+        ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(0, 0));
+        const char* buf = Buf.begin();
+        const char* buf_end = Buf.end();
+        if (Filter.IsActive())
+        {
+            // In this example we don't use the clipper when Filter is enabled.
+            // This is because we don't have a random access on the result on our filter.
+            // A real application processing logs with ten of thousands of entries may want to store the result of
+            // search/filter.. especially if the filtering function is not trivial (e.g. reg-exp).
+            for (int line_no = 0; line_no < LineOffsets.Size; line_no++)
+            {
+                const char* line_start = buf + LineOffsets[line_no];
+                const char* line_end = (line_no + 1 < LineOffsets.Size) ? (buf + LineOffsets[line_no + 1] - 1) : buf_end;
+                if (Filter.PassFilter(line_start, line_end))
+                    ImGui::TextUnformatted(line_start, line_end);
+            }
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            // The simplest and easy way to display the entire buffer:
+            //   ImGui::TextUnformatted(buf_begin, buf_end);
+            // And it'll just work. TextUnformatted() has specialization for large blob of text and will fast-forward
+            // to skip non-visible lines. Here we instead demonstrate using the clipper to only process lines that are
+            // within the visible area.
+            // If you have tens of thousands of items and their processing cost is non-negligible, coarse clipping them
+            // on your side is recommended. Using ImGuiListClipper requires
+            // - A) random access into your data
+            // - B) items all being the  same height,
+            // both of which we can handle since we an array pointing to the beginning of each line of text.
+            // When using the filter (in the block of code above) we don't have random access into the data to display
+            // anymore, which is why we don't use the clipper. Storing or skimming through the search result would make
+            // it possible (and would be recommended if you want to search through tens of thousands of entries).
+            ImGuiListClipper clipper;
+            clipper.Begin(LineOffsets.Size);
+            while (clipper.Step())
+            {
+                for (int line_no = clipper.DisplayStart; line_no < clipper.DisplayEnd; line_no++)
+                {
+                    const char* line_start = buf + LineOffsets[line_no];
+                    const char* line_end = (line_no + 1 < LineOffsets.Size) ? (buf + LineOffsets[line_no + 1] - 1) : buf_end;
+                    ImGui::TextUnformatted(line_start, line_end);
+                }
+            }
+            clipper.End();
+        }
+        ImGui::PopStyleVar();
+
+        if (AutoScroll && ImGui::GetScrollY() >= ImGui::GetScrollMaxY())
+            ImGui::SetScrollHereY(1.0f);
+
+        ImGui::EndChild();
+        ImGui::End();
+    }
+};
+
+// Demonstrate creating a simple log window with basic filtering.
+static void ShowExampleAppLog(bool* p_open)
+{
+    static ExampleAppLog log;
+
+    // For the demo: add a debug button _BEFORE_ the normal log window contents
+    // We take advantage of a rarely used feature: multiple calls to Begin()/End() are appending to the _same_ window.
+    // Most of the contents of the window will be added by the log.Draw() call.
+    ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(500, 400), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver);
+    ImGui::Begin("Example: Log", p_open);
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Log");
+    if (ImGui::SmallButton("[Debug] Add 5 entries"))
+    {
+        static int counter = 0;
+        const char* categories[3] = { "info", "warn", "error" };
+        const char* words[] = { "Bumfuzzled", "Cattywampus", "Snickersnee", "Abibliophobia", "Absquatulate", "Nincompoop", "Pauciloquent" };
+        for (int n = 0; n < 5; n++)
+        {
+            const char* category = categories[counter % IM_ARRAYSIZE(categories)];
+            const char* word = words[counter % IM_ARRAYSIZE(words)];
+            log.AddLog("[%05d] [%s] Hello, current time is %.1f, here's a word: '%s'\n",
+                ImGui::GetFrameCount(), category, ImGui::GetTime(), word);
+            counter++;
+        }
+    }
+    ImGui::End();
+
+    // Actually call in the regular Log helper (which will Begin() into the same window as we just did)
+    log.Draw("Example: Log", p_open);
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Example App: Simple Layout / ShowExampleAppLayout()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Demonstrate create a window with multiple child windows.
+static void ShowExampleAppLayout(bool* p_open)
+{
+    ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(500, 440), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver);
+    if (ImGui::Begin("Example: Simple layout", p_open, ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar))
+    {
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Simple layout");
+        if (ImGui::BeginMenuBar())
+        {
+            if (ImGui::BeginMenu("File"))
+            {
+                if (ImGui::MenuItem("Close")) *p_open = false;
+                ImGui::EndMenu();
+            }
+            ImGui::EndMenuBar();
+        }
+
+        // Left
+        static int selected = 0;
+        {
+            ImGui::BeginChild("left pane", ImVec2(150, 0), true);
+            for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++)
+            {
+                // FIXME: Good candidate to use ImGuiSelectableFlags_SelectOnNav
+                char label[128];
+                sprintf(label, "MyObject %d", i);
+                if (ImGui::Selectable(label, selected == i))
+                    selected = i;
+            }
+            ImGui::EndChild();
+        }
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+
+        // Right
+        {
+            ImGui::BeginGroup();
+            ImGui::BeginChild("item view", ImVec2(0, -ImGui::GetFrameHeightWithSpacing())); // Leave room for 1 line below us
+            ImGui::Text("MyObject: %d", selected);
+            ImGui::Separator();
+            if (ImGui::BeginTabBar("##Tabs", ImGuiTabBarFlags_None))
+            {
+                if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Description"))
+                {
+                    ImGui::TextWrapped("Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit, sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua. ");
+                    ImGui::EndTabItem();
+                }
+                if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Details"))
+                {
+                    ImGui::Text("ID: 0123456789");
+                    ImGui::EndTabItem();
+                }
+                ImGui::EndTabBar();
+            }
+            ImGui::EndChild();
+            if (ImGui::Button("Revert")) {}
+            ImGui::SameLine();
+            if (ImGui::Button("Save")) {}
+            ImGui::EndGroup();
+        }
+    }
+    ImGui::End();
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Example App: Property Editor / ShowExampleAppPropertyEditor()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+static void ShowPlaceholderObject(const char* prefix, int uid)
+{
+    // Use object uid as identifier. Most commonly you could also use the object pointer as a base ID.
+    ImGui::PushID(uid);
+
+    // Text and Tree nodes are less high than framed widgets, using AlignTextToFramePadding() we add vertical spacing to make the tree lines equal high.
+    ImGui::TableNextRow();
+    ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(0);
+    ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding();
+    bool node_open = ImGui::TreeNode("Object", "%s_%u", prefix, uid);
+    ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(1);
+    ImGui::Text("my sailor is rich");
+
+    if (node_open)
+    {
+        static float placeholder_members[8] = { 0.0f, 0.0f, 1.0f, 3.1416f, 100.0f, 999.0f };
+        for (int i = 0; i < 8; i++)
+        {
+            ImGui::PushID(i); // Use field index as identifier.
+            if (i < 2)
+            {
+                ShowPlaceholderObject("Child", 424242);
+            }
+            else
+            {
+                // Here we use a TreeNode to highlight on hover (we could use e.g. Selectable as well)
+                ImGui::TableNextRow();
+                ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(0);
+                ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding();
+                ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags = ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet;
+                ImGui::TreeNodeEx("Field", flags, "Field_%d", i);
+
+                ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(1);
+                ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(-FLT_MIN);
+                if (i >= 5)
+                    ImGui::InputFloat("##value", &placeholder_members[i], 1.0f);
+                else
+                    ImGui::DragFloat("##value", &placeholder_members[i], 0.01f);
+                ImGui::NextColumn();
+            }
+            ImGui::PopID();
+        }
+        ImGui::TreePop();
+    }
+    ImGui::PopID();
+}
+
+// Demonstrate create a simple property editor.
+static void ShowExampleAppPropertyEditor(bool* p_open)
+{
+    ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(430, 450), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver);
+    if (!ImGui::Begin("Example: Property editor", p_open))
+    {
+        ImGui::End();
+        return;
+    }
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Property Editor");
+
+    HelpMarker(
+        "This example shows how you may implement a property editor using two columns.\n"
+        "All objects/fields data are dummies here.\n"
+        "Remember that in many simple cases, you can use ImGui::SameLine(xxx) to position\n"
+        "your cursor horizontally instead of using the Columns() API.");
+
+    ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, ImVec2(2, 2));
+    if (ImGui::BeginTable("split", 2, ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter | ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable))
+    {
+        // Iterate placeholder objects (all the same data)
+        for (int obj_i = 0; obj_i < 4; obj_i++)
+        {
+            ShowPlaceholderObject("Object", obj_i);
+            //ImGui::Separator();
+        }
+        ImGui::EndTable();
+    }
+    ImGui::PopStyleVar();
+    ImGui::End();
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Example App: Long Text / ShowExampleAppLongText()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Demonstrate/test rendering huge amount of text, and the incidence of clipping.
+static void ShowExampleAppLongText(bool* p_open)
+{
+    ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(ImVec2(520, 600), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver);
+    if (!ImGui::Begin("Example: Long text display", p_open))
+    {
+        ImGui::End();
+        return;
+    }
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Long text display");
+
+    static int test_type = 0;
+    static ImGuiTextBuffer log;
+    static int lines = 0;
+    ImGui::Text("Printing unusually long amount of text.");
+    ImGui::Combo("Test type", &test_type,
+        "Single call to TextUnformatted()\0"
+        "Multiple calls to Text(), clipped\0"
+        "Multiple calls to Text(), not clipped (slow)\0");
+    ImGui::Text("Buffer contents: %d lines, %d bytes", lines, log.size());
+    if (ImGui::Button("Clear")) { log.clear(); lines = 0; }
+    ImGui::SameLine();
+    if (ImGui::Button("Add 1000 lines"))
+    {
+        for (int i = 0; i < 1000; i++)
+            log.appendf("%i The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog\n", lines + i);
+        lines += 1000;
+    }
+    ImGui::BeginChild("Log");
+    switch (test_type)
+    {
+    case 0:
+        // Single call to TextUnformatted() with a big buffer
+        ImGui::TextUnformatted(log.begin(), log.end());
+        break;
+    case 1:
+        {
+            // Multiple calls to Text(), manually coarsely clipped - demonstrate how to use the ImGuiListClipper helper.
+            ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(0, 0));
+            ImGuiListClipper clipper;
+            clipper.Begin(lines);
+            while (clipper.Step())
+                for (int i = clipper.DisplayStart; i < clipper.DisplayEnd; i++)
+                    ImGui::Text("%i The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog", i);
+            ImGui::PopStyleVar();
+            break;
+        }
+    case 2:
+        // Multiple calls to Text(), not clipped (slow)
+        ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(0, 0));
+        for (int i = 0; i < lines; i++)
+            ImGui::Text("%i The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog", i);
+        ImGui::PopStyleVar();
+        break;
+    }
+    ImGui::EndChild();
+    ImGui::End();
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Example App: Auto Resize / ShowExampleAppAutoResize()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Demonstrate creating a window which gets auto-resized according to its content.
+static void ShowExampleAppAutoResize(bool* p_open)
+{
+    if (!ImGui::Begin("Example: Auto-resizing window", p_open, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize))
+    {
+        ImGui::End();
+        return;
+    }
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Auto-resizing window");
+
+    static int lines = 10;
+    ImGui::TextUnformatted(
+        "Window will resize every-frame to the size of its content.\n"
+        "Note that you probably don't want to query the window size to\n"
+        "output your content because that would create a feedback loop.");
+    ImGui::SliderInt("Number of lines", &lines, 1, 20);
+    for (int i = 0; i < lines; i++)
+        ImGui::Text("%*sThis is line %d", i * 4, "", i); // Pad with space to extend size horizontally
+    ImGui::End();
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Example App: Constrained Resize / ShowExampleAppConstrainedResize()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Demonstrate creating a window with custom resize constraints.
+static void ShowExampleAppConstrainedResize(bool* p_open)
+{
+    struct CustomConstraints
+    {
+        // Helper functions to demonstrate programmatic constraints
+        static void Square(ImGuiSizeCallbackData* data) { data->DesiredSize.x = data->DesiredSize.y = IM_MAX(data->DesiredSize.x, data->DesiredSize.y); }
+        static void Step(ImGuiSizeCallbackData* data)   { float step = (float)(int)(intptr_t)data->UserData; data->DesiredSize = ImVec2((int)(data->DesiredSize.x / step + 0.5f) * step, (int)(data->DesiredSize.y / step + 0.5f) * step); }
+    };
+
+    const char* test_desc[] =
+    {
+        "Resize vertical only",
+        "Resize horizontal only",
+        "Width > 100, Height > 100",
+        "Width 400-500",
+        "Height 400-500",
+        "Custom: Always Square",
+        "Custom: Fixed Steps (100)",
+    };
+
+    static bool auto_resize = false;
+    static int type = 0;
+    static int display_lines = 10;
+    if (type == 0) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(-1, 0),    ImVec2(-1, FLT_MAX));      // Vertical only
+    if (type == 1) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0, -1),    ImVec2(FLT_MAX, -1));      // Horizontal only
+    if (type == 2) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(100, 100), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX)); // Width > 100, Height > 100
+    if (type == 3) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(400, -1),  ImVec2(500, -1));          // Width 400-500
+    if (type == 4) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(-1, 400),  ImVec2(-1, 500));          // Height 400-500
+    if (type == 5) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0, 0),     ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX), CustomConstraints::Square);                     // Always Square
+    if (type == 6) ImGui::SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0, 0),     ImVec2(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX), CustomConstraints::Step, (void*)(intptr_t)100); // Fixed Step
+
+    ImGuiWindowFlags flags = auto_resize ? ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize : 0;
+    if (ImGui::Begin("Example: Constrained Resize", p_open, flags))
+    {
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Constrained Resizing window");
+        if (ImGui::IsWindowDocked())
+            ImGui::Text("Warning: Sizing Constraints won't work if the window is docked!");
+        if (ImGui::Button("200x200")) { ImGui::SetWindowSize(ImVec2(200, 200)); } ImGui::SameLine();
+        if (ImGui::Button("500x500")) { ImGui::SetWindowSize(ImVec2(500, 500)); } ImGui::SameLine();
+        if (ImGui::Button("800x200")) { ImGui::SetWindowSize(ImVec2(800, 200)); }
+        ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(200);
+        ImGui::Combo("Constraint", &type, test_desc, IM_ARRAYSIZE(test_desc));
+        ImGui::SetNextItemWidth(200);
+        ImGui::DragInt("Lines", &display_lines, 0.2f, 1, 100);
+        ImGui::Checkbox("Auto-resize", &auto_resize);
+        for (int i = 0; i < display_lines; i++)
+            ImGui::Text("%*sHello, sailor! Making this line long enough for the example.", i * 4, "");
+    }
+    ImGui::End();
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Example App: Simple overlay / ShowExampleAppSimpleOverlay()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Demonstrate creating a simple static window with no decoration
+// + a context-menu to choose which corner of the screen to use.
+static void ShowExampleAppSimpleOverlay(bool* p_open)
+{
+    static int corner = 0;
+    ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+    ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDecoration | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDocking | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNav;
+    if (corner != -1)
+    {
+        const float PAD = 10.0f;
+        const ImGuiViewport* viewport = ImGui::GetMainViewport();
+        ImVec2 work_pos = viewport->WorkPos; // Use work area to avoid menu-bar/task-bar, if any!
+        ImVec2 work_size = viewport->WorkSize;
+        ImVec2 window_pos, window_pos_pivot;
+        window_pos.x = (corner & 1) ? (work_pos.x + work_size.x - PAD) : (work_pos.x + PAD);
+        window_pos.y = (corner & 2) ? (work_pos.y + work_size.y - PAD) : (work_pos.y + PAD);
+        window_pos_pivot.x = (corner & 1) ? 1.0f : 0.0f;
+        window_pos_pivot.y = (corner & 2) ? 1.0f : 0.0f;
+        ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(window_pos, ImGuiCond_Always, window_pos_pivot);
+        ImGui::SetNextWindowViewport(viewport->ID);
+        window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove;
+    }
+    ImGui::SetNextWindowBgAlpha(0.35f); // Transparent background
+    if (ImGui::Begin("Example: Simple overlay", p_open, window_flags))
+    {
+        IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Simple Overlay");
+        ImGui::Text("Simple overlay\n" "in the corner of the screen.\n" "(right-click to change position)");
+        ImGui::Separator();
+        if (ImGui::IsMousePosValid())
+            ImGui::Text("Mouse Position: (%.1f,%.1f)", io.MousePos.x, io.MousePos.y);
+        else
+            ImGui::Text("Mouse Position: <invalid>");
+        if (ImGui::BeginPopupContextWindow())
+        {
+            if (ImGui::MenuItem("Custom",       NULL, corner == -1)) corner = -1;
+            if (ImGui::MenuItem("Top-left",     NULL, corner == 0)) corner = 0;
+            if (ImGui::MenuItem("Top-right",    NULL, corner == 1)) corner = 1;
+            if (ImGui::MenuItem("Bottom-left",  NULL, corner == 2)) corner = 2;
+            if (ImGui::MenuItem("Bottom-right", NULL, corner == 3)) corner = 3;
+            if (p_open && ImGui::MenuItem("Close")) *p_open = false;
+            ImGui::EndPopup();
+        }
+    }
+    ImGui::End();
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Example App: Fullscreen window / ShowExampleAppFullscreen()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Demonstrate creating a window covering the entire screen/viewport
+static void ShowExampleAppFullscreen(bool* p_open)
+{
+    static bool use_work_area = true;
+    static ImGuiWindowFlags flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDecoration | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings;
+
+    // We demonstrate using the full viewport area or the work area (without menu-bars, task-bars etc.)
+    // Based on your use case you may want one of the other.
+    const ImGuiViewport* viewport = ImGui::GetMainViewport();
+    ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(use_work_area ? viewport->WorkPos : viewport->Pos);
+    ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(use_work_area ? viewport->WorkSize : viewport->Size);
+
+    if (ImGui::Begin("Example: Fullscreen window", p_open, flags))
+    {
+        ImGui::Checkbox("Use work area instead of main area", &use_work_area);
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        HelpMarker("Main Area = entire viewport,\nWork Area = entire viewport minus sections used by the main menu bars, task bars etc.\n\nEnable the main-menu bar in Examples menu to see the difference.");
+
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground", &flags, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDecoration", &flags, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDecoration);
+        ImGui::Indent();
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar", &flags, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse", &flags, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse);
+        ImGui::CheckboxFlags("ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar", &flags, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar);
+        ImGui::Unindent();
+
+        if (p_open && ImGui::Button("Close this window"))
+            *p_open = false;
+    }
+    ImGui::End();
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Example App: Manipulating Window Titles / ShowExampleAppWindowTitles()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Demonstrate using "##" and "###" in identifiers to manipulate ID generation.
+// This apply to all regular items as well.
+// Read FAQ section "How can I have multiple widgets with the same label?" for details.
+static void ShowExampleAppWindowTitles(bool*)
+{
+    const ImGuiViewport* viewport = ImGui::GetMainViewport();
+    const ImVec2 base_pos = viewport->Pos;
+
+    // By default, Windows are uniquely identified by their title.
+    // You can use the "##" and "###" markers to manipulate the display/ID.
+
+    // Using "##" to display same title but have unique identifier.
+    ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(ImVec2(base_pos.x + 100, base_pos.y + 100), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver);
+    ImGui::Begin("Same title as another window##1");
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Manipulating window titles");
+    ImGui::Text("This is window 1.\nMy title is the same as window 2, but my identifier is unique.");
+    ImGui::End();
+
+    ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(ImVec2(base_pos.x + 100, base_pos.y + 200), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver);
+    ImGui::Begin("Same title as another window##2");
+    ImGui::Text("This is window 2.\nMy title is the same as window 1, but my identifier is unique.");
+    ImGui::End();
+
+    // Using "###" to display a changing title but keep a static identifier "AnimatedTitle"
+    char buf[128];
+    sprintf(buf, "Animated title %c %d###AnimatedTitle", "|/-\\"[(int)(ImGui::GetTime() / 0.25f) & 3], ImGui::GetFrameCount());
+    ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(ImVec2(base_pos.x + 100, base_pos.y + 300), ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver);
+    ImGui::Begin(buf);
+    ImGui::Text("This window has a changing title.");
+    ImGui::End();
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Example App: Custom Rendering using ImDrawList API / ShowExampleAppCustomRendering()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Demonstrate using the low-level ImDrawList to draw custom shapes.
+static void ShowExampleAppCustomRendering(bool* p_open)
+{
+    if (!ImGui::Begin("Example: Custom rendering", p_open))
+    {
+        ImGui::End();
+        return;
+    }
+    IMGUI_DEMO_MARKER("Examples/Custom Rendering");
+
+    // Tip: If you do a lot of custom rendering, you probably want to use your own geometrical types and benefit of
+    // overloaded operators, etc. Define IM_VEC2_CLASS_EXTRA in imconfig.h to create implicit conversions between your
+    // types and ImVec2/ImVec4. Dear ImGui defines overloaded operators but they are internal to imgui.cpp and not
+    // exposed outside (to avoid messing with your types) In this example we are not using the maths operators!
+
+    if (ImGui::BeginTabBar("##TabBar"))
+    {
+        if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Primitives"))
+        {
+            ImGui::PushItemWidth(-ImGui::GetFontSize() * 15);
+            ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList();
+
+            // Draw gradients
+            // (note that those are currently exacerbating our sRGB/Linear issues)
+            // Calling ImGui::GetColorU32() multiplies the given colors by the current Style Alpha, but you may pass the IM_COL32() directly as well..
+            ImGui::Text("Gradients");
+            ImVec2 gradient_size = ImVec2(ImGui::CalcItemWidth(), ImGui::GetFrameHeight());
+            {
+                ImVec2 p0 = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
+                ImVec2 p1 = ImVec2(p0.x + gradient_size.x, p0.y + gradient_size.y);
+                ImU32 col_a = ImGui::GetColorU32(IM_COL32(0, 0, 0, 255));
+                ImU32 col_b = ImGui::GetColorU32(IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 255));
+                draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(p0, p1, col_a, col_b, col_b, col_a);
+                ImGui::InvisibleButton("##gradient1", gradient_size);
+            }
+            {
+                ImVec2 p0 = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
+                ImVec2 p1 = ImVec2(p0.x + gradient_size.x, p0.y + gradient_size.y);
+                ImU32 col_a = ImGui::GetColorU32(IM_COL32(0, 255, 0, 255));
+                ImU32 col_b = ImGui::GetColorU32(IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 255));
+                draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(p0, p1, col_a, col_b, col_b, col_a);
+                ImGui::InvisibleButton("##gradient2", gradient_size);
+            }
+
+            // Draw a bunch of primitives
+            ImGui::Text("All primitives");
+            static float sz = 36.0f;
+            static float thickness = 3.0f;
+            static int ngon_sides = 6;
+            static bool circle_segments_override = false;
+            static int circle_segments_override_v = 12;
+            static bool curve_segments_override = false;
+            static int curve_segments_override_v = 8;
+            static ImVec4 colf = ImVec4(1.0f, 1.0f, 0.4f, 1.0f);
+            ImGui::DragFloat("Size", &sz, 0.2f, 2.0f, 100.0f, "%.0f");
+            ImGui::DragFloat("Thickness", &thickness, 0.05f, 1.0f, 8.0f, "%.02f");
+            ImGui::SliderInt("N-gon sides", &ngon_sides, 3, 12);
+            ImGui::Checkbox("##circlesegmentoverride", &circle_segments_override);
+            ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, ImGui::GetStyle().ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+            circle_segments_override |= ImGui::SliderInt("Circle segments override", &circle_segments_override_v, 3, 40);
+            ImGui::Checkbox("##curvessegmentoverride", &curve_segments_override);
+            ImGui::SameLine(0.0f, ImGui::GetStyle().ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+            curve_segments_override |= ImGui::SliderInt("Curves segments override", &curve_segments_override_v, 3, 40);
+            ImGui::ColorEdit4("Color", &colf.x);
+
+            const ImVec2 p = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
+            const ImU32 col = ImColor(colf);
+            const float spacing = 10.0f;
+            const ImDrawFlags corners_tl_br = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight;
+            const float rounding = sz / 5.0f;
+            const int circle_segments = circle_segments_override ? circle_segments_override_v : 0;
+            const int curve_segments = curve_segments_override ? curve_segments_override_v : 0;
+            float x = p.x + 4.0f;
+            float y = p.y + 4.0f;
+            for (int n = 0; n < 2; n++)
+            {
+                // First line uses a thickness of 1.0f, second line uses the configurable thickness
+                float th = (n == 0) ? 1.0f : thickness;
+                draw_list->AddNgon(ImVec2(x + sz*0.5f, y + sz*0.5f), sz*0.5f, col, ngon_sides, th);                 x += sz + spacing;  // N-gon
+                draw_list->AddCircle(ImVec2(x + sz*0.5f, y + sz*0.5f), sz*0.5f, col, circle_segments, th);          x += sz + spacing;  // Circle
+                draw_list->AddRect(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz), col, 0.0f, ImDrawFlags_None, th);          x += sz + spacing;  // Square
+                draw_list->AddRect(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz), col, rounding, ImDrawFlags_None, th);      x += sz + spacing;  // Square with all rounded corners
+                draw_list->AddRect(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz), col, rounding, corners_tl_br, th);         x += sz + spacing;  // Square with two rounded corners
+                draw_list->AddTriangle(ImVec2(x+sz*0.5f,y), ImVec2(x+sz, y+sz-0.5f), ImVec2(x, y+sz-0.5f), col, th);x += sz + spacing;  // Triangle
+                //draw_list->AddTriangle(ImVec2(x+sz*0.2f,y), ImVec2(x, y+sz-0.5f), ImVec2(x+sz*0.4f, y+sz-0.5f), col, th);x+= sz*0.4f + spacing; // Thin triangle
+                draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y), col, th);                                       x += sz + spacing;  // Horizontal line (note: drawing a filled rectangle will be faster!)
+                draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x, y + sz), col, th);                                       x += spacing;       // Vertical line (note: drawing a filled rectangle will be faster!)
+                draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz), col, th);                                  x += sz + spacing;  // Diagonal line
+
+                // Quadratic Bezier Curve (3 control points)
+                ImVec2 cp3[3] = { ImVec2(x, y + sz * 0.6f), ImVec2(x + sz * 0.5f, y - sz * 0.4f), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz) };
+                draw_list->AddBezierQuadratic(cp3[0], cp3[1], cp3[2], col, th, curve_segments); x += sz + spacing;
+
+                // Cubic Bezier Curve (4 control points)
+                ImVec2 cp4[4] = { ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz * 1.3f, y + sz * 0.3f), ImVec2(x + sz - sz * 1.3f, y + sz - sz * 0.3f), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz) };
+                draw_list->AddBezierCubic(cp4[0], cp4[1], cp4[2], cp4[3], col, th, curve_segments);
+
+                x = p.x + 4;
+                y += sz + spacing;
+            }
+            draw_list->AddNgonFilled(ImVec2(x + sz * 0.5f, y + sz * 0.5f), sz*0.5f, col, ngon_sides);               x += sz + spacing;  // N-gon
+            draw_list->AddCircleFilled(ImVec2(x + sz*0.5f, y + sz*0.5f), sz*0.5f, col, circle_segments);            x += sz + spacing;  // Circle
+            draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz), col);                                    x += sz + spacing;  // Square
+            draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz), col, 10.0f);                             x += sz + spacing;  // Square with all rounded corners
+            draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz), col, 10.0f, corners_tl_br);              x += sz + spacing;  // Square with two rounded corners
+            draw_list->AddTriangleFilled(ImVec2(x+sz*0.5f,y), ImVec2(x+sz, y+sz-0.5f), ImVec2(x, y+sz-0.5f), col);  x += sz + spacing;  // Triangle
+            //draw_list->AddTriangleFilled(ImVec2(x+sz*0.2f,y), ImVec2(x, y+sz-0.5f), ImVec2(x+sz*0.4f, y+sz-0.5f), col); x += sz*0.4f + spacing; // Thin triangle
+            draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y + thickness), col);                             x += sz + spacing;  // Horizontal line (faster than AddLine, but only handle integer thickness)
+            draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + thickness, y + sz), col);                             x += spacing * 2.0f;// Vertical line (faster than AddLine, but only handle integer thickness)
+            draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + 1, y + 1), col);                                      x += sz;            // Pixel (faster than AddLine)
+            draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(ImVec2(x, y), ImVec2(x + sz, y + sz), IM_COL32(0, 0, 0, 255), IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 255), IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255), IM_COL32(0, 255, 0, 255));
+
+            ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2((sz + spacing) * 10.2f, (sz + spacing) * 3.0f));
+            ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+            ImGui::EndTabItem();
+        }
+
+        if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("Canvas"))
+        {
+            static ImVector<ImVec2> points;
+            static ImVec2 scrolling(0.0f, 0.0f);
+            static bool opt_enable_grid = true;
+            static bool opt_enable_context_menu = true;
+            static bool adding_line = false;
+
+            ImGui::Checkbox("Enable grid", &opt_enable_grid);
+            ImGui::Checkbox("Enable context menu", &opt_enable_context_menu);
+            ImGui::Text("Mouse Left: drag to add lines,\nMouse Right: drag to scroll, click for context menu.");
+
+            // Typically you would use a BeginChild()/EndChild() pair to benefit from a clipping region + own scrolling.
+            // Here we demonstrate that this can be replaced by simple offsetting + custom drawing + PushClipRect/PopClipRect() calls.
+            // To use a child window instead we could use, e.g:
+            //      ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, ImVec2(0, 0));      // Disable padding
+            //      ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ChildBg, IM_COL32(50, 50, 50, 255));  // Set a background color
+            //      ImGui::BeginChild("canvas", ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f), true, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove);
+            //      ImGui::PopStyleColor();
+            //      ImGui::PopStyleVar();
+            //      [...]
+            //      ImGui::EndChild();
+
+            // Using InvisibleButton() as a convenience 1) it will advance the layout cursor and 2) allows us to use IsItemHovered()/IsItemActive()
+            ImVec2 canvas_p0 = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();      // ImDrawList API uses screen coordinates!
+            ImVec2 canvas_sz = ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail();   // Resize canvas to what's available
+            if (canvas_sz.x < 50.0f) canvas_sz.x = 50.0f;
+            if (canvas_sz.y < 50.0f) canvas_sz.y = 50.0f;
+            ImVec2 canvas_p1 = ImVec2(canvas_p0.x + canvas_sz.x, canvas_p0.y + canvas_sz.y);
+
+            // Draw border and background color
+            ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+            ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList();
+            draw_list->AddRectFilled(canvas_p0, canvas_p1, IM_COL32(50, 50, 50, 255));
+            draw_list->AddRect(canvas_p0, canvas_p1, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 255));
+
+            // This will catch our interactions
+            ImGui::InvisibleButton("canvas", canvas_sz, ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonLeft | ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonRight);
+            const bool is_hovered = ImGui::IsItemHovered(); // Hovered
+            const bool is_active = ImGui::IsItemActive();   // Held
+            const ImVec2 origin(canvas_p0.x + scrolling.x, canvas_p0.y + scrolling.y); // Lock scrolled origin
+            const ImVec2 mouse_pos_in_canvas(io.MousePos.x - origin.x, io.MousePos.y - origin.y);
+
+            // Add first and second point
+            if (is_hovered && !adding_line && ImGui::IsMouseClicked(ImGuiMouseButton_Left))
+            {
+                points.push_back(mouse_pos_in_canvas);
+                points.push_back(mouse_pos_in_canvas);
+                adding_line = true;
+            }
+            if (adding_line)
+            {
+                points.back() = mouse_pos_in_canvas;
+                if (!ImGui::IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton_Left))
+                    adding_line = false;
+            }
+
+            // Pan (we use a zero mouse threshold when there's no context menu)
+            // You may decide to make that threshold dynamic based on whether the mouse is hovering something etc.
+            const float mouse_threshold_for_pan = opt_enable_context_menu ? -1.0f : 0.0f;
+            if (is_active && ImGui::IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton_Right, mouse_threshold_for_pan))
+            {
+                scrolling.x += io.MouseDelta.x;
+                scrolling.y += io.MouseDelta.y;
+            }
+
+            // Context menu (under default mouse threshold)
+            ImVec2 drag_delta = ImGui::GetMouseDragDelta(ImGuiMouseButton_Right);
+            if (opt_enable_context_menu && drag_delta.x == 0.0f && drag_delta.y == 0.0f)
+                ImGui::OpenPopupOnItemClick("context", ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight);
+            if (ImGui::BeginPopup("context"))
+            {
+                if (adding_line)
+                    points.resize(points.size() - 2);
+                adding_line = false;
+                if (ImGui::MenuItem("Remove one", NULL, false, points.Size > 0)) { points.resize(points.size() - 2); }
+                if (ImGui::MenuItem("Remove all", NULL, false, points.Size > 0)) { points.clear(); }
+                ImGui::EndPopup();
+            }
+
+            // Draw grid + all lines in the canvas
+            draw_list->PushClipRect(canvas_p0, canvas_p1, true);
+            if (opt_enable_grid)
+            {
+                const float GRID_STEP = 64.0f;
+                for (float x = fmodf(scrolling.x, GRID_STEP); x < canvas_sz.x; x += GRID_STEP)
+                    draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(canvas_p0.x + x, canvas_p0.y), ImVec2(canvas_p0.x + x, canvas_p1.y), IM_COL32(200, 200, 200, 40));
+                for (float y = fmodf(scrolling.y, GRID_STEP); y < canvas_sz.y; y += GRID_STEP)
+                    draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(canvas_p0.x, canvas_p0.y + y), ImVec2(canvas_p1.x, canvas_p0.y + y), IM_COL32(200, 200, 200, 40));
+            }
+            for (int n = 0; n < points.Size; n += 2)
+                draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(origin.x + points[n].x, origin.y + points[n].y), ImVec2(origin.x + points[n + 1].x, origin.y + points[n + 1].y), IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255), 2.0f);
+            draw_list->PopClipRect();
+
+            ImGui::EndTabItem();
+        }
+
+        if (ImGui::BeginTabItem("BG/FG draw lists"))
+        {
+            static bool draw_bg = true;
+            static bool draw_fg = true;
+            ImGui::Checkbox("Draw in Background draw list", &draw_bg);
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("The Background draw list will be rendered below every Dear ImGui windows.");
+            ImGui::Checkbox("Draw in Foreground draw list", &draw_fg);
+            ImGui::SameLine(); HelpMarker("The Foreground draw list will be rendered over every Dear ImGui windows.");
+            ImVec2 window_pos = ImGui::GetWindowPos();
+            ImVec2 window_size = ImGui::GetWindowSize();
+            ImVec2 window_center = ImVec2(window_pos.x + window_size.x * 0.5f, window_pos.y + window_size.y * 0.5f);
+            if (draw_bg)
+                ImGui::GetBackgroundDrawList()->AddCircle(window_center, window_size.x * 0.6f, IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 200), 0, 10 + 4);
+            if (draw_fg)
+                ImGui::GetForegroundDrawList()->AddCircle(window_center, window_size.y * 0.6f, IM_COL32(0, 255, 0, 200), 0, 10);
+            ImGui::EndTabItem();
+        }
+
+        ImGui::EndTabBar();
+    }
+
+    ImGui::End();
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Example App: Docking, DockSpace / ShowExampleAppDockSpace()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Demonstrate using DockSpace() to create an explicit docking node within an existing window.
+// Note: You can use most Docking facilities without calling any API. You DO NOT need to call DockSpace() to use Docking!
+// - Drag from window title bar or their tab to dock/undock. Hold SHIFT to disable docking.
+// - Drag from window menu button (upper-left button) to undock an entire node (all windows).
+// - When io.ConfigDockingWithShift == true, you instead need to hold SHIFT to _enable_ docking/undocking.
+// About dockspaces:
+// - Use DockSpace() to create an explicit dock node _within_ an existing window.
+// - Use DockSpaceOverViewport() to create an explicit dock node covering the screen or a specific viewport.
+//   This is often used with ImGuiDockNodeFlags_PassthruCentralNode.
+// - Important: Dockspaces need to be submitted _before_ any window they can host. Submit it early in your frame! (*)
+// - Important: Dockspaces need to be kept alive if hidden, otherwise windows docked into it will be undocked.
+//   e.g. if you have multiple tabs with a dockspace inside each tab: submit the non-visible dockspaces with ImGuiDockNodeFlags_KeepAliveOnly.
+// (*) because of this constraint, the implicit \"Debug\" window can not be docked into an explicit DockSpace() node,
+// because that window is submitted as part of the part of the NewFrame() call. An easy workaround is that you can create
+// your own implicit "Debug##2" window after calling DockSpace() and leave it in the window stack for anyone to use.
+void ShowExampleAppDockSpace(bool* p_open)
+{
+    // If you strip some features of, this demo is pretty much equivalent to calling DockSpaceOverViewport()!
+    // In most cases you should be able to just call DockSpaceOverViewport() and ignore all the code below!
+    // In this specific demo, we are not using DockSpaceOverViewport() because:
+    // - we allow the host window to be floating/moveable instead of filling the viewport (when opt_fullscreen == false)
+    // - we allow the host window to have padding (when opt_padding == true)
+    // - we have a local menu bar in the host window (vs. you could use BeginMainMenuBar() + DockSpaceOverViewport() in your code!)
+    // TL;DR; this demo is more complicated than what you would normally use.
+    // If we removed all the options we are showcasing, this demo would become:
+    //     void ShowExampleAppDockSpace()
+    //     {
+    //         ImGui::DockSpaceOverViewport(ImGui::GetMainViewport());
+    //     }
+
+    static bool opt_fullscreen = true;
+    static bool opt_padding = false;
+    static ImGuiDockNodeFlags dockspace_flags = ImGuiDockNodeFlags_None;
+
+    // We are using the ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDocking flag to make the parent window not dockable into,
+    // because it would be confusing to have two docking targets within each others.
+    ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDocking;
+    if (opt_fullscreen)
+    {
+        const ImGuiViewport* viewport = ImGui::GetMainViewport();
+        ImGui::SetNextWindowPos(viewport->WorkPos);
+        ImGui::SetNextWindowSize(viewport->WorkSize);
+        ImGui::SetNextWindowViewport(viewport->ID);
+        ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowRounding, 0.0f);
+        ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowBorderSize, 0.0f);
+        window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoCollapse | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove;
+        window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBringToFrontOnFocus | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        dockspace_flags &= ~ImGuiDockNodeFlags_PassthruCentralNode;
+    }
+
+    // When using ImGuiDockNodeFlags_PassthruCentralNode, DockSpace() will render our background
+    // and handle the pass-thru hole, so we ask Begin() to not render a background.
+    if (dockspace_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_PassthruCentralNode)
+        window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoBackground;
+
+    // Important: note that we proceed even if Begin() returns false (aka window is collapsed).
+    // This is because we want to keep our DockSpace() active. If a DockSpace() is inactive,
+    // all active windows docked into it will lose their parent and become undocked.
+    // We cannot preserve the docking relationship between an active window and an inactive docking, otherwise
+    // any change of dockspace/settings would lead to windows being stuck in limbo and never being visible.
+    if (!opt_padding)
+        ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
+    ImGui::Begin("DockSpace Demo", p_open, window_flags);
+    if (!opt_padding)
+        ImGui::PopStyleVar();
+
+    if (opt_fullscreen)
+        ImGui::PopStyleVar(2);
+
+    // Submit the DockSpace
+    ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+    if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_DockingEnable)
+    {
+        ImGuiID dockspace_id = ImGui::GetID("MyDockSpace");
+        ImGui::DockSpace(dockspace_id, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f), dockspace_flags);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        ShowDockingDisabledMessage();
+    }
+
+    if (ImGui::BeginMenuBar())
+    {
+        if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Options"))
+        {
+            // Disabling fullscreen would allow the window to be moved to the front of other windows,
+            // which we can't undo at the moment without finer window depth/z control.
+            ImGui::MenuItem("Fullscreen", NULL, &opt_fullscreen);
+            ImGui::MenuItem("Padding", NULL, &opt_padding);
+            ImGui::Separator();
+
+            if (ImGui::MenuItem("Flag: NoSplit",                "", (dockspace_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoSplit) != 0))                 { dockspace_flags ^= ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoSplit; }
+            if (ImGui::MenuItem("Flag: NoResize",               "", (dockspace_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResize) != 0))                { dockspace_flags ^= ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoResize; }
+            if (ImGui::MenuItem("Flag: NoDockingInCentralNode", "", (dockspace_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingInCentralNode) != 0))  { dockspace_flags ^= ImGuiDockNodeFlags_NoDockingInCentralNode; }
+            if (ImGui::MenuItem("Flag: AutoHideTabBar",         "", (dockspace_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_AutoHideTabBar) != 0))          { dockspace_flags ^= ImGuiDockNodeFlags_AutoHideTabBar; }
+            if (ImGui::MenuItem("Flag: PassthruCentralNode",    "", (dockspace_flags & ImGuiDockNodeFlags_PassthruCentralNode) != 0, opt_fullscreen)) { dockspace_flags ^= ImGuiDockNodeFlags_PassthruCentralNode; }
+            ImGui::Separator();
+
+            if (ImGui::MenuItem("Close", NULL, false, p_open != NULL))
+                *p_open = false;
+            ImGui::EndMenu();
+        }
+        HelpMarker(
+            "When docking is enabled, you can ALWAYS dock MOST window into another! Try it now!" "\n"
+            "- Drag from window title bar or their tab to dock/undock." "\n"
+            "- Drag from window menu button (upper-left button) to undock an entire node (all windows)." "\n"
+            "- Hold SHIFT to disable docking (if io.ConfigDockingWithShift == false, default)" "\n"
+            "- Hold SHIFT to enable docking (if io.ConfigDockingWithShift == true)" "\n"
+            "This demo app has nothing to do with enabling docking!" "\n\n"
+            "This demo app only demonstrate the use of ImGui::DockSpace() which allows you to manually create a docking node _within_ another window." "\n\n"
+            "Read comments in ShowExampleAppDockSpace() for more details.");
+
+        ImGui::EndMenuBar();
+    }
+
+    ImGui::End();
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Example App: Documents Handling / ShowExampleAppDocuments()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Simplified structure to mimic a Document model
+struct MyDocument
+{
+    const char* Name;       // Document title
+    bool        Open;       // Set when open (we keep an array of all available documents to simplify demo code!)
+    bool        OpenPrev;   // Copy of Open from last update.
+    bool        Dirty;      // Set when the document has been modified
+    bool        WantClose;  // Set when the document
+    ImVec4      Color;      // An arbitrary variable associated to the document
+
+    MyDocument(const char* name, bool open = true, const ImVec4& color = ImVec4(1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f))
+    {
+        Name = name;
+        Open = OpenPrev = open;
+        Dirty = false;
+        WantClose = false;
+        Color = color;
+    }
+    void DoOpen()       { Open = true; }
+    void DoQueueClose() { WantClose = true; }
+    void DoForceClose() { Open = false; Dirty = false; }
+    void DoSave()       { Dirty = false; }
+
+    // Display placeholder contents for the Document
+    static void DisplayContents(MyDocument* doc)
+    {
+        ImGui::PushID(doc);
+        ImGui::Text("Document \"%s\"", doc->Name);
+        ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, doc->Color);
+        ImGui::TextWrapped("Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consectetur adipiscing elit, sed do eiusmod tempor incididunt ut labore et dolore magna aliqua.");
+        ImGui::PopStyleColor();
+        if (ImGui::Button("Modify", ImVec2(100, 0)))
+            doc->Dirty = true;
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        if (ImGui::Button("Save", ImVec2(100, 0)))
+            doc->DoSave();
+        ImGui::ColorEdit3("color", &doc->Color.x);  // Useful to test drag and drop and hold-dragged-to-open-tab behavior.
+        ImGui::PopID();
+    }
+
+    // Display context menu for the Document
+    static void DisplayContextMenu(MyDocument* doc)
+    {
+        if (!ImGui::BeginPopupContextItem())
+            return;
+
+        char buf[256];
+        sprintf(buf, "Save %s", doc->Name);
+        if (ImGui::MenuItem(buf, "CTRL+S", false, doc->Open))
+            doc->DoSave();
+        if (ImGui::MenuItem("Close", "CTRL+W", false, doc->Open))
+            doc->DoQueueClose();
+        ImGui::EndPopup();
+    }
+};
+
+struct ExampleAppDocuments
+{
+    ImVector<MyDocument> Documents;
+
+    ExampleAppDocuments()
+    {
+        Documents.push_back(MyDocument("Lettuce",             true,  ImVec4(0.4f, 0.8f, 0.4f, 1.0f)));
+        Documents.push_back(MyDocument("Eggplant",            true,  ImVec4(0.8f, 0.5f, 1.0f, 1.0f)));
+        Documents.push_back(MyDocument("Carrot",              true,  ImVec4(1.0f, 0.8f, 0.5f, 1.0f)));
+        Documents.push_back(MyDocument("Tomato",              false, ImVec4(1.0f, 0.3f, 0.4f, 1.0f)));
+        Documents.push_back(MyDocument("A Rather Long Title", false));
+        Documents.push_back(MyDocument("Some Document",       false));
+    }
+};
+
+// [Optional] Notify the system of Tabs/Windows closure that happened outside the regular tab interface.
+// If a tab has been closed programmatically (aka closed from another source such as the Checkbox() in the demo,
+// as opposed to clicking on the regular tab closing button) and stops being submitted, it will take a frame for
+// the tab bar to notice its absence. During this frame there will be a gap in the tab bar, and if the tab that has
+// disappeared was the selected one, the tab bar will report no selected tab during the frame. This will effectively
+// give the impression of a flicker for one frame.
+// We call SetTabItemClosed() to manually notify the Tab Bar or Docking system of removed tabs to avoid this glitch.
+// Note that this completely optional, and only affect tab bars with the ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable flag.
+static void NotifyOfDocumentsClosedElsewhere(ExampleAppDocuments& app)
+{
+    for (int doc_n = 0; doc_n < app.Documents.Size; doc_n++)
+    {
+        MyDocument* doc = &app.Documents[doc_n];
+        if (!doc->Open && doc->OpenPrev)
+            ImGui::SetTabItemClosed(doc->Name);
+        doc->OpenPrev = doc->Open;
+    }
+}
+
+void ShowExampleAppDocuments(bool* p_open)
+{
+    static ExampleAppDocuments app;
+
+    // Options
+    enum Target
+    {
+        Target_None,
+        Target_Tab,                 // Create documents as local tab into a local tab bar
+        Target_DockSpaceAndWindow   // Create documents as regular windows, and create an embedded dockspace
+    };
+    static Target opt_target = Target_Tab;
+    static bool opt_reorderable = true;
+    static ImGuiTabBarFlags opt_fitting_flags = ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyDefault_;
+
+    // When (opt_target == Target_DockSpaceAndWindow) there is the possibily that one of our child Document window (e.g. "Eggplant")
+    // that we emit gets docked into the same spot as the parent window ("Example: Documents").
+    // This would create a problematic feedback loop because selecting the "Eggplant" tab would make the "Example: Documents" tab
+    // not visible, which in turn would stop submitting the "Eggplant" window.
+    // We avoid this problem by submitting our documents window even if our parent window is not currently visible.
+    // Another solution may be to make the "Example: Documents" window use the ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDocking.
+
+    bool window_contents_visible = ImGui::Begin("Example: Documents", p_open, ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar);
+    if (!window_contents_visible && opt_target != Target_DockSpaceAndWindow)
+    {
+        ImGui::End();
+        return;
+    }
+
+    // Menu
+    if (ImGui::BeginMenuBar())
+    {
+        if (ImGui::BeginMenu("File"))
+        {
+            int open_count = 0;
+            for (int doc_n = 0; doc_n < app.Documents.Size; doc_n++)
+                open_count += app.Documents[doc_n].Open ? 1 : 0;
+
+            if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Open", open_count < app.Documents.Size))
+            {
+                for (int doc_n = 0; doc_n < app.Documents.Size; doc_n++)
+                {
+                    MyDocument* doc = &app.Documents[doc_n];
+                    if (!doc->Open)
+                        if (ImGui::MenuItem(doc->Name))
+                            doc->DoOpen();
+                }
+                ImGui::EndMenu();
+            }
+            if (ImGui::MenuItem("Close All Documents", NULL, false, open_count > 0))
+                for (int doc_n = 0; doc_n < app.Documents.Size; doc_n++)
+                    app.Documents[doc_n].DoQueueClose();
+            if (ImGui::MenuItem("Exit", "Ctrl+F4") && p_open)
+                *p_open = false;
+            ImGui::EndMenu();
+        }
+        ImGui::EndMenuBar();
+    }
+
+    // [Debug] List documents with one checkbox for each
+    for (int doc_n = 0; doc_n < app.Documents.Size; doc_n++)
+    {
+        MyDocument* doc = &app.Documents[doc_n];
+        if (doc_n > 0)
+            ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::PushID(doc);
+        if (ImGui::Checkbox(doc->Name, &doc->Open))
+            if (!doc->Open)
+                doc->DoForceClose();
+        ImGui::PopID();
+    }
+    ImGui::PushItemWidth(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 12);
+    ImGui::Combo("Output", (int*)&opt_target, "None\0TabBar+Tabs\0DockSpace+Window\0");
+    ImGui::PopItemWidth();
+    bool redock_all = false;
+    if (opt_target == Target_Tab)                { ImGui::SameLine(); ImGui::Checkbox("Reorderable Tabs", &opt_reorderable); }
+    if (opt_target == Target_DockSpaceAndWindow) { ImGui::SameLine(); redock_all = ImGui::Button("Redock all"); }
+
+    ImGui::Separator();
+
+    // About the ImGuiWindowFlags_UnsavedDocument / ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument flags.
+    // They have multiple effects:
+    // - Display a dot next to the title.
+    // - Tab is selected when clicking the X close button.
+    // - Closure is not assumed (will wait for user to stop submitting the tab).
+    //   Otherwise closure is assumed when pressing the X, so if you keep submitting the tab may reappear at end of tab bar.
+    //   We need to assume closure by default otherwise waiting for "lack of submission" on the next frame would leave an empty
+    //   hole for one-frame, both in the tab-bar and in tab-contents when closing a tab/window.
+    //   The rarely used SetTabItemClosed() function is a way to notify of programmatic closure to avoid the one-frame hole.
+
+    // Tabs
+    if (opt_target == Target_Tab)
+    {
+        ImGuiTabBarFlags tab_bar_flags = (opt_fitting_flags) | (opt_reorderable ? ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable : 0);
+        if (ImGui::BeginTabBar("##tabs", tab_bar_flags))
+        {
+            if (opt_reorderable)
+                NotifyOfDocumentsClosedElsewhere(app);
+
+            // [DEBUG] Stress tests
+            //if ((ImGui::GetFrameCount() % 30) == 0) docs[1].Open ^= 1;            // [DEBUG] Automatically show/hide a tab. Test various interactions e.g. dragging with this on.
+            //if (ImGui::GetIO().KeyCtrl) ImGui::SetTabItemSelected(docs[1].Name);  // [DEBUG] Test SetTabItemSelected(), probably not very useful as-is anyway..
+
+            // Submit Tabs
+            for (int doc_n = 0; doc_n < app.Documents.Size; doc_n++)
+            {
+                MyDocument* doc = &app.Documents[doc_n];
+                if (!doc->Open)
+                    continue;
+
+                ImGuiTabItemFlags tab_flags = (doc->Dirty ? ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument : 0);
+                bool visible = ImGui::BeginTabItem(doc->Name, &doc->Open, tab_flags);
+
+                // Cancel attempt to close when unsaved add to save queue so we can display a popup.
+                if (!doc->Open && doc->Dirty)
+                {
+                    doc->Open = true;
+                    doc->DoQueueClose();
+                }
+
+                MyDocument::DisplayContextMenu(doc);
+                if (visible)
+                {
+                    MyDocument::DisplayContents(doc);
+                    ImGui::EndTabItem();
+                }
+            }
+
+            ImGui::EndTabBar();
+        }
+    }
+    else if (opt_target == Target_DockSpaceAndWindow)
+    {
+        if (ImGui::GetIO().ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_DockingEnable)
+        {
+            NotifyOfDocumentsClosedElsewhere(app);
+
+            // Create a DockSpace node where any window can be docked
+            ImGuiID dockspace_id = ImGui::GetID("MyDockSpace");
+            ImGui::DockSpace(dockspace_id);
+
+            // Create Windows
+            for (int doc_n = 0; doc_n < app.Documents.Size; doc_n++)
+            {
+                MyDocument* doc = &app.Documents[doc_n];
+                if (!doc->Open)
+                    continue;
+
+                ImGui::SetNextWindowDockID(dockspace_id, redock_all ? ImGuiCond_Always : ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver);
+                ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = (doc->Dirty ? ImGuiWindowFlags_UnsavedDocument : 0);
+                bool visible = ImGui::Begin(doc->Name, &doc->Open, window_flags);
+
+                // Cancel attempt to close when unsaved add to save queue so we can display a popup.
+                if (!doc->Open && doc->Dirty)
+                {
+                    doc->Open = true;
+                    doc->DoQueueClose();
+                }
+
+                MyDocument::DisplayContextMenu(doc);
+                if (visible)
+                    MyDocument::DisplayContents(doc);
+
+                ImGui::End();
+            }
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            ShowDockingDisabledMessage();
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Early out other contents
+    if (!window_contents_visible)
+    {
+        ImGui::End();
+        return;
+    }
+
+    // Update closing queue
+    static ImVector<MyDocument*> close_queue;
+    if (close_queue.empty())
+    {
+        // Close queue is locked once we started a popup
+        for (int doc_n = 0; doc_n < app.Documents.Size; doc_n++)
+        {
+            MyDocument* doc = &app.Documents[doc_n];
+            if (doc->WantClose)
+            {
+                doc->WantClose = false;
+                close_queue.push_back(doc);
+            }
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Display closing confirmation UI
+    if (!close_queue.empty())
+    {
+        int close_queue_unsaved_documents = 0;
+        for (int n = 0; n < close_queue.Size; n++)
+            if (close_queue[n]->Dirty)
+                close_queue_unsaved_documents++;
+
+        if (close_queue_unsaved_documents == 0)
+        {
+            // Close documents when all are unsaved
+            for (int n = 0; n < close_queue.Size; n++)
+                close_queue[n]->DoForceClose();
+            close_queue.clear();
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            if (!ImGui::IsPopupOpen("Save?"))
+                ImGui::OpenPopup("Save?");
+            if (ImGui::BeginPopupModal("Save?", NULL, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize))
+            {
+                ImGui::Text("Save change to the following items?");
+                float item_height = ImGui::GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing();
+                if (ImGui::BeginChildFrame(ImGui::GetID("frame"), ImVec2(-FLT_MIN, 6.25f * item_height)))
+                {
+                    for (int n = 0; n < close_queue.Size; n++)
+                        if (close_queue[n]->Dirty)
+                            ImGui::Text("%s", close_queue[n]->Name);
+                    ImGui::EndChildFrame();
+                }
+
+                ImVec2 button_size(ImGui::GetFontSize() * 7.0f, 0.0f);
+                if (ImGui::Button("Yes", button_size))
+                {
+                    for (int n = 0; n < close_queue.Size; n++)
+                    {
+                        if (close_queue[n]->Dirty)
+                            close_queue[n]->DoSave();
+                        close_queue[n]->DoForceClose();
+                    }
+                    close_queue.clear();
+                    ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup();
+                }
+                ImGui::SameLine();
+                if (ImGui::Button("No", button_size))
+                {
+                    for (int n = 0; n < close_queue.Size; n++)
+                        close_queue[n]->DoForceClose();
+                    close_queue.clear();
+                    ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup();
+                }
+                ImGui::SameLine();
+                if (ImGui::Button("Cancel", button_size))
+                {
+                    close_queue.clear();
+                    ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup();
+                }
+                ImGui::EndPopup();
+            }
+        }
+    }
+
+    ImGui::End();
+}
+
+// End of Demo code
+#else
+
+void ImGui::ShowAboutWindow(bool*) {}
+void ImGui::ShowDemoWindow(bool*) {}
+void ImGui::ShowUserGuide() {}
+void ImGui::ShowStyleEditor(ImGuiStyle*) {}
+
+#endif
+
+#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE
diff --git a/dependencies/src/imgui/imgui_draw.cpp b/dependencies/src/imgui/imgui_draw.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..82e1925
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/src/imgui/imgui_draw.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,4190 @@
+// dear imgui, v1.89 WIP
+// (drawing and font code)
+
+/*
+
+Index of this file:
+
+// [SECTION] STB libraries implementation
+// [SECTION] Style functions
+// [SECTION] ImDrawList
+// [SECTION] ImDrawListSplitter
+// [SECTION] ImDrawData
+// [SECTION] Helpers ShadeVertsXXX functions
+// [SECTION] ImFontConfig
+// [SECTION] ImFontAtlas
+// [SECTION] ImFontAtlas glyph ranges helpers
+// [SECTION] ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder
+// [SECTION] ImFont
+// [SECTION] ImGui Internal Render Helpers
+// [SECTION] Decompression code
+// [SECTION] Default font data (ProggyClean.ttf)
+
+*/
+
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(_CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS)
+#define _CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS
+#endif
+
+#include "imgui.h"
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE
+
+#ifndef IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS
+#define IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS
+#endif
+
+#include "imgui_internal.h"
+#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE
+#include "misc/freetype/imgui_freetype.h"
+#endif
+
+#include <stdio.h>      // vsnprintf, sscanf, printf
+#if !defined(alloca)
+#if defined(__GLIBC__) || defined(__sun) || defined(__APPLE__) || defined(__NEWLIB__)
+#include <alloca.h>     // alloca (glibc uses <alloca.h>. Note that Cygwin may have _WIN32 defined, so the order matters here)
+#elif defined(_WIN32)
+#include <malloc.h>     // alloca
+#if !defined(alloca)
+#define alloca _alloca  // for clang with MS Codegen
+#endif
+#else
+#include <stdlib.h>     // alloca
+#endif
+#endif
+
+// Visual Studio warnings
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+#pragma warning (disable: 4127)     // condition expression is constant
+#pragma warning (disable: 4505)     // unreferenced local function has been removed (stb stuff)
+#pragma warning (disable: 4996)     // 'This function or variable may be unsafe': strcpy, strdup, sprintf, vsnprintf, sscanf, fopen
+#pragma warning (disable: 6255)     // [Static Analyzer] _alloca indicates failure by raising a stack overflow exception.  Consider using _malloca instead.
+#pragma warning (disable: 26451)    // [Static Analyzer] Arithmetic overflow : Using operator 'xxx' on a 4 byte value and then casting the result to a 8 byte value. Cast the value to the wider type before calling operator 'xxx' to avoid overflow(io.2).
+#pragma warning (disable: 26812)    // [Static Analyzer] The enum type 'xxx' is unscoped. Prefer 'enum class' over 'enum' (Enum.3). [MSVC Static Analyzer)
+#endif
+
+// Clang/GCC warnings with -Weverything
+#if defined(__clang__)
+#if __has_warning("-Wunknown-warning-option")
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-warning-option"         // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx'                      // not all warnings are known by all Clang versions and they tend to be rename-happy.. so ignoring warnings triggers new warnings on some configuration. Great!
+#endif
+#if __has_warning("-Walloca")
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Walloca"                         // warning: use of function '__builtin_alloca' is discouraged
+#endif
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-pragmas"                // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx'
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast"                 // warning: use of old-style cast                            // yes, they are more terse.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wfloat-equal"                    // warning: comparing floating point with == or != is unsafe // storing and comparing against same constants ok.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wglobal-constructors"            // warning: declaration requires a global destructor         // similar to above, not sure what the exact difference is.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wsign-conversion"                // warning: implicit conversion changes signedness
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant"  // warning: zero as null pointer constant                    // some standard header variations use #define NULL 0
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wcomma"                          // warning: possible misuse of comma operator here
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wreserved-id-macro"              // warning: macro name is a reserved identifier
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion"               // warning: implicit conversion from 'float' to 'double' when passing argument to function  // using printf() is a misery with this as C++ va_arg ellipsis changes float to double.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wimplicit-int-float-conversion"  // warning: implicit conversion from 'xxx' to 'float' may lose precision
+#elif defined(__GNUC__)
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wpragmas"                  // warning: unknown option after '#pragma GCC diagnostic' kind
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wunused-function"          // warning: 'xxxx' defined but not used
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion"         // warning: implicit conversion from 'float' to 'double' when passing argument to function
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wconversion"               // warning: conversion to 'xxxx' from 'xxxx' may alter its value
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wstack-protector"          // warning: stack protector not protecting local variables: variable length buffer
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wclass-memaccess"          // [__GNUC__ >= 8] warning: 'memset/memcpy' clearing/writing an object of type 'xxxx' with no trivial copy-assignment; use assignment or value-initialization instead
+#endif
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] STB libraries implementation (for stb_truetype and stb_rect_pack)
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Compile time options:
+//#define IMGUI_STB_NAMESPACE           ImStb
+//#define IMGUI_STB_TRUETYPE_FILENAME   "my_folder/stb_truetype.h"
+//#define IMGUI_STB_RECT_PACK_FILENAME  "my_folder/stb_rect_pack.h"
+//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION
+//#define IMGUI_DISABLE_STB_RECT_PACK_IMPLEMENTATION
+
+#ifdef IMGUI_STB_NAMESPACE
+namespace IMGUI_STB_NAMESPACE
+{
+#endif
+
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+#pragma warning (push)
+#pragma warning (disable: 4456)                             // declaration of 'xx' hides previous local declaration
+#pragma warning (disable: 6011)                             // (stb_rectpack) Dereferencing NULL pointer 'cur->next'.
+#pragma warning (disable: 6385)                             // (stb_truetype) Reading invalid data from 'buffer':  the readable size is '_Old_3`kernel_width' bytes, but '3' bytes may be read.
+#pragma warning (disable: 28182)                            // (stb_rectpack) Dereferencing NULL pointer. 'cur' contains the same NULL value as 'cur->next' did.
+#endif
+
+#if defined(__clang__)
+#pragma clang diagnostic push
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunused-function"
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wmissing-prototypes"
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wimplicit-fallthrough"
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wcast-qual"              // warning: cast from 'const xxxx *' to 'xxx *' drops const qualifier
+#endif
+
+#if defined(__GNUC__)
+#pragma GCC diagnostic push
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wtype-limits"              // warning: comparison is always true due to limited range of data type [-Wtype-limits]
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wcast-qual"                // warning: cast from type 'const xxxx *' to type 'xxxx *' casts away qualifiers
+#endif
+
+#ifndef STB_RECT_PACK_IMPLEMENTATION                        // in case the user already have an implementation in the _same_ compilation unit (e.g. unity builds)
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_STB_RECT_PACK_IMPLEMENTATION          // in case the user already have an implementation in another compilation unit
+#define STBRP_STATIC
+#define STBRP_ASSERT(x)     do { IM_ASSERT(x); } while (0)
+#define STBRP_SORT          ImQsort
+#define STB_RECT_PACK_IMPLEMENTATION
+#endif
+#ifdef IMGUI_STB_RECT_PACK_FILENAME
+#include IMGUI_STB_RECT_PACK_FILENAME
+#else
+#include "imstb_rectpack.h"
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#ifdef  IMGUI_ENABLE_STB_TRUETYPE
+#ifndef STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION                         // in case the user already have an implementation in the _same_ compilation unit (e.g. unity builds)
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION           // in case the user already have an implementation in another compilation unit
+#define STBTT_malloc(x,u)   ((void)(u), IM_ALLOC(x))
+#define STBTT_free(x,u)     ((void)(u), IM_FREE(x))
+#define STBTT_assert(x)     do { IM_ASSERT(x); } while(0)
+#define STBTT_fmod(x,y)     ImFmod(x,y)
+#define STBTT_sqrt(x)       ImSqrt(x)
+#define STBTT_pow(x,y)      ImPow(x,y)
+#define STBTT_fabs(x)       ImFabs(x)
+#define STBTT_ifloor(x)     ((int)ImFloorSigned(x))
+#define STBTT_iceil(x)      ((int)ImCeil(x))
+#define STBTT_STATIC
+#define STB_TRUETYPE_IMPLEMENTATION
+#else
+#define STBTT_DEF extern
+#endif
+#ifdef IMGUI_STB_TRUETYPE_FILENAME
+#include IMGUI_STB_TRUETYPE_FILENAME
+#else
+#include "imstb_truetype.h"
+#endif
+#endif
+#endif // IMGUI_ENABLE_STB_TRUETYPE
+
+#if defined(__GNUC__)
+#pragma GCC diagnostic pop
+#endif
+
+#if defined(__clang__)
+#pragma clang diagnostic pop
+#endif
+
+#if defined(_MSC_VER)
+#pragma warning (pop)
+#endif
+
+#ifdef IMGUI_STB_NAMESPACE
+} // namespace ImStb
+using namespace IMGUI_STB_NAMESPACE;
+#endif
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Style functions
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+void ImGui::StyleColorsDark(ImGuiStyle* dst)
+{
+    ImGuiStyle* style = dst ? dst : &ImGui::GetStyle();
+    ImVec4* colors = style->Colors;
+
+    colors[ImGuiCol_Text]                   = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]           = ImVec4(0.50f, 0.50f, 0.50f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_WindowBg]               = ImVec4(0.06f, 0.06f, 0.06f, 0.94f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ChildBg]                = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_PopupBg]                = ImVec4(0.08f, 0.08f, 0.08f, 0.94f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_Border]                 = ImVec4(0.43f, 0.43f, 0.50f, 0.50f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_BorderShadow]           = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBg]                = ImVec4(0.16f, 0.29f, 0.48f, 0.54f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered]         = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.40f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive]          = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.67f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBg]                = ImVec4(0.04f, 0.04f, 0.04f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive]          = ImVec4(0.16f, 0.29f, 0.48f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgCollapsed]       = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.51f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_MenuBarBg]              = ImVec4(0.14f, 0.14f, 0.14f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarBg]            = ImVec4(0.02f, 0.02f, 0.02f, 0.53f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrab]          = ImVec4(0.31f, 0.31f, 0.31f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabHovered]   = ImVec4(0.41f, 0.41f, 0.41f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabActive]    = ImVec4(0.51f, 0.51f, 0.51f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_CheckMark]              = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_SliderGrab]             = ImVec4(0.24f, 0.52f, 0.88f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive]       = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_Button]                 = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.40f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered]          = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ButtonActive]           = ImVec4(0.06f, 0.53f, 0.98f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_Header]                 = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.31f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered]          = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.80f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderActive]           = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_Separator]              = colors[ImGuiCol_Border];
+    colors[ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered]       = ImVec4(0.10f, 0.40f, 0.75f, 0.78f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive]        = ImVec4(0.10f, 0.40f, 0.75f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGrip]             = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.20f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGripHovered]      = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.67f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive]       = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.95f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_Tab]                    = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_Header],       colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive], 0.80f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TabHovered]             = colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered];
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TabActive]              = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderActive], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive], 0.60f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TabUnfocused]           = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_Tab],          colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBg], 0.80f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive]     = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_TabActive],    colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBg], 0.40f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_DockingPreview]         = colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderActive] * ImVec4(1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f, 0.7f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_DockingEmptyBg]         = ImVec4(0.20f, 0.20f, 0.20f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_PlotLines]              = ImVec4(0.61f, 0.61f, 0.61f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered]       = ImVec4(1.00f, 0.43f, 0.35f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram]          = ImVec4(0.90f, 0.70f, 0.00f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_PlotHistogramHovered]   = ImVec4(1.00f, 0.60f, 0.00f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TableHeaderBg]          = ImVec4(0.19f, 0.19f, 0.20f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TableBorderStrong]      = ImVec4(0.31f, 0.31f, 0.35f, 1.00f);   // Prefer using Alpha=1.0 here
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TableBorderLight]       = ImVec4(0.23f, 0.23f, 0.25f, 1.00f);   // Prefer using Alpha=1.0 here
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TableRowBg]             = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TableRowBgAlt]          = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f, 0.06f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TextSelectedBg]         = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.35f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_DragDropTarget]         = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 0.00f, 0.90f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_NavHighlight]           = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_NavWindowingHighlight]  = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f, 0.70f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_NavWindowingDimBg]      = ImVec4(0.80f, 0.80f, 0.80f, 0.20f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg]       = ImVec4(0.80f, 0.80f, 0.80f, 0.35f);
+}
+
+void ImGui::StyleColorsClassic(ImGuiStyle* dst)
+{
+    ImGuiStyle* style = dst ? dst : &ImGui::GetStyle();
+    ImVec4* colors = style->Colors;
+
+    colors[ImGuiCol_Text]                   = ImVec4(0.90f, 0.90f, 0.90f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]           = ImVec4(0.60f, 0.60f, 0.60f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_WindowBg]               = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.85f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ChildBg]                = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_PopupBg]                = ImVec4(0.11f, 0.11f, 0.14f, 0.92f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_Border]                 = ImVec4(0.50f, 0.50f, 0.50f, 0.50f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_BorderShadow]           = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBg]                = ImVec4(0.43f, 0.43f, 0.43f, 0.39f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered]         = ImVec4(0.47f, 0.47f, 0.69f, 0.40f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive]          = ImVec4(0.42f, 0.41f, 0.64f, 0.69f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBg]                = ImVec4(0.27f, 0.27f, 0.54f, 0.83f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive]          = ImVec4(0.32f, 0.32f, 0.63f, 0.87f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgCollapsed]       = ImVec4(0.40f, 0.40f, 0.80f, 0.20f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_MenuBarBg]              = ImVec4(0.40f, 0.40f, 0.55f, 0.80f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarBg]            = ImVec4(0.20f, 0.25f, 0.30f, 0.60f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrab]          = ImVec4(0.40f, 0.40f, 0.80f, 0.30f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabHovered]   = ImVec4(0.40f, 0.40f, 0.80f, 0.40f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabActive]    = ImVec4(0.41f, 0.39f, 0.80f, 0.60f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_CheckMark]              = ImVec4(0.90f, 0.90f, 0.90f, 0.50f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_SliderGrab]             = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f, 0.30f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive]       = ImVec4(0.41f, 0.39f, 0.80f, 0.60f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_Button]                 = ImVec4(0.35f, 0.40f, 0.61f, 0.62f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered]          = ImVec4(0.40f, 0.48f, 0.71f, 0.79f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ButtonActive]           = ImVec4(0.46f, 0.54f, 0.80f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_Header]                 = ImVec4(0.40f, 0.40f, 0.90f, 0.45f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered]          = ImVec4(0.45f, 0.45f, 0.90f, 0.80f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderActive]           = ImVec4(0.53f, 0.53f, 0.87f, 0.80f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_Separator]              = ImVec4(0.50f, 0.50f, 0.50f, 0.60f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered]       = ImVec4(0.60f, 0.60f, 0.70f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive]        = ImVec4(0.70f, 0.70f, 0.90f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGrip]             = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f, 0.10f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGripHovered]      = ImVec4(0.78f, 0.82f, 1.00f, 0.60f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive]       = ImVec4(0.78f, 0.82f, 1.00f, 0.90f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_Tab]                    = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_Header],       colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive], 0.80f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TabHovered]             = colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered];
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TabActive]              = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderActive], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive], 0.60f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TabUnfocused]           = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_Tab],          colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBg], 0.80f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive]     = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_TabActive],    colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBg], 0.40f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_DockingPreview]         = colors[ImGuiCol_Header] * ImVec4(1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f, 0.7f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_DockingEmptyBg]         = ImVec4(0.20f, 0.20f, 0.20f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_PlotLines]              = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered]       = ImVec4(0.90f, 0.70f, 0.00f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram]          = ImVec4(0.90f, 0.70f, 0.00f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_PlotHistogramHovered]   = ImVec4(1.00f, 0.60f, 0.00f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TableHeaderBg]          = ImVec4(0.27f, 0.27f, 0.38f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TableBorderStrong]      = ImVec4(0.31f, 0.31f, 0.45f, 1.00f);   // Prefer using Alpha=1.0 here
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TableBorderLight]       = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.26f, 0.28f, 1.00f);   // Prefer using Alpha=1.0 here
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TableRowBg]             = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TableRowBgAlt]          = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f, 0.07f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TextSelectedBg]         = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 1.00f, 0.35f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_DragDropTarget]         = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 0.00f, 0.90f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_NavHighlight]           = colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered];
+    colors[ImGuiCol_NavWindowingHighlight]  = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f, 0.70f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_NavWindowingDimBg]      = ImVec4(0.80f, 0.80f, 0.80f, 0.20f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg]       = ImVec4(0.20f, 0.20f, 0.20f, 0.35f);
+}
+
+// Those light colors are better suited with a thicker font than the default one + FrameBorder
+void ImGui::StyleColorsLight(ImGuiStyle* dst)
+{
+    ImGuiStyle* style = dst ? dst : &ImGui::GetStyle();
+    ImVec4* colors = style->Colors;
+
+    colors[ImGuiCol_Text]                   = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]           = ImVec4(0.60f, 0.60f, 0.60f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_WindowBg]               = ImVec4(0.94f, 0.94f, 0.94f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ChildBg]                = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_PopupBg]                = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f, 0.98f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_Border]                 = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.30f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_BorderShadow]           = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBg]                = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered]         = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.40f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive]          = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.67f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBg]                = ImVec4(0.96f, 0.96f, 0.96f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive]          = ImVec4(0.82f, 0.82f, 0.82f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgCollapsed]       = ImVec4(1.00f, 1.00f, 1.00f, 0.51f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_MenuBarBg]              = ImVec4(0.86f, 0.86f, 0.86f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarBg]            = ImVec4(0.98f, 0.98f, 0.98f, 0.53f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrab]          = ImVec4(0.69f, 0.69f, 0.69f, 0.80f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabHovered]   = ImVec4(0.49f, 0.49f, 0.49f, 0.80f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabActive]    = ImVec4(0.49f, 0.49f, 0.49f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_CheckMark]              = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_SliderGrab]             = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.78f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive]       = ImVec4(0.46f, 0.54f, 0.80f, 0.60f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_Button]                 = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.40f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered]          = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ButtonActive]           = ImVec4(0.06f, 0.53f, 0.98f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_Header]                 = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.31f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered]          = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.80f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderActive]           = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_Separator]              = ImVec4(0.39f, 0.39f, 0.39f, 0.62f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered]       = ImVec4(0.14f, 0.44f, 0.80f, 0.78f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive]        = ImVec4(0.14f, 0.44f, 0.80f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGrip]             = ImVec4(0.35f, 0.35f, 0.35f, 0.17f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGripHovered]      = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.67f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ResizeGripActive]       = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.95f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_Tab]                    = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_Header],       colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive], 0.90f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TabHovered]             = colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered];
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TabActive]              = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderActive], colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive], 0.60f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TabUnfocused]           = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_Tab],          colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBg], 0.80f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive]     = ImLerp(colors[ImGuiCol_TabActive],    colors[ImGuiCol_TitleBg], 0.40f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_DockingPreview]         = colors[ImGuiCol_Header] * ImVec4(1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f, 0.7f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_DockingEmptyBg]         = ImVec4(0.20f, 0.20f, 0.20f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_PlotLines]              = ImVec4(0.39f, 0.39f, 0.39f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered]       = ImVec4(1.00f, 0.43f, 0.35f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram]          = ImVec4(0.90f, 0.70f, 0.00f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_PlotHistogramHovered]   = ImVec4(1.00f, 0.45f, 0.00f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TableHeaderBg]          = ImVec4(0.78f, 0.87f, 0.98f, 1.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TableBorderStrong]      = ImVec4(0.57f, 0.57f, 0.64f, 1.00f);   // Prefer using Alpha=1.0 here
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TableBorderLight]       = ImVec4(0.68f, 0.68f, 0.74f, 1.00f);   // Prefer using Alpha=1.0 here
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TableRowBg]             = ImVec4(0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f, 0.00f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TableRowBgAlt]          = ImVec4(0.30f, 0.30f, 0.30f, 0.09f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_TextSelectedBg]         = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.35f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_DragDropTarget]         = ImVec4(0.26f, 0.59f, 0.98f, 0.95f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_NavHighlight]           = colors[ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered];
+    colors[ImGuiCol_NavWindowingHighlight]  = ImVec4(0.70f, 0.70f, 0.70f, 0.70f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_NavWindowingDimBg]      = ImVec4(0.20f, 0.20f, 0.20f, 0.20f);
+    colors[ImGuiCol_ModalWindowDimBg]       = ImVec4(0.20f, 0.20f, 0.20f, 0.35f);
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] ImDrawList
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+ImDrawListSharedData::ImDrawListSharedData()
+{
+    memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this));
+    for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(ArcFastVtx); i++)
+    {
+        const float a = ((float)i * 2 * IM_PI) / (float)IM_ARRAYSIZE(ArcFastVtx);
+        ArcFastVtx[i] = ImVec2(ImCos(a), ImSin(a));
+    }
+    ArcFastRadiusCutoff = IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_CALC_R(IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX, CircleSegmentMaxError);
+}
+
+void ImDrawListSharedData::SetCircleTessellationMaxError(float max_error)
+{
+    if (CircleSegmentMaxError == max_error)
+        return;
+
+    IM_ASSERT(max_error > 0.0f);
+    CircleSegmentMaxError = max_error;
+    for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(CircleSegmentCounts); i++)
+    {
+        const float radius = (float)i;
+        CircleSegmentCounts[i] = (ImU8)((i > 0) ? IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_CALC(radius, CircleSegmentMaxError) : IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX);
+    }
+    ArcFastRadiusCutoff = IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_CALC_R(IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX, CircleSegmentMaxError);
+}
+
+// Initialize before use in a new frame. We always have a command ready in the buffer.
+void ImDrawList::_ResetForNewFrame()
+{
+    // Verify that the ImDrawCmd fields we want to memcmp() are contiguous in memory.
+    IM_STATIC_ASSERT(IM_OFFSETOF(ImDrawCmd, ClipRect) == 0);
+    IM_STATIC_ASSERT(IM_OFFSETOF(ImDrawCmd, TextureId) == sizeof(ImVec4));
+    IM_STATIC_ASSERT(IM_OFFSETOF(ImDrawCmd, VtxOffset) == sizeof(ImVec4) + sizeof(ImTextureID));
+    if (_Splitter._Count > 1)
+        _Splitter.Merge(this);
+
+    CmdBuffer.resize(0);
+    IdxBuffer.resize(0);
+    VtxBuffer.resize(0);
+    Flags = _Data->InitialFlags;
+    memset(&_CmdHeader, 0, sizeof(_CmdHeader));
+    _VtxCurrentIdx = 0;
+    _VtxWritePtr = NULL;
+    _IdxWritePtr = NULL;
+    _ClipRectStack.resize(0);
+    _TextureIdStack.resize(0);
+    _Path.resize(0);
+    _Splitter.Clear();
+    CmdBuffer.push_back(ImDrawCmd());
+    _FringeScale = 1.0f;
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::_ClearFreeMemory()
+{
+    CmdBuffer.clear();
+    IdxBuffer.clear();
+    VtxBuffer.clear();
+    Flags = ImDrawListFlags_None;
+    _VtxCurrentIdx = 0;
+    _VtxWritePtr = NULL;
+    _IdxWritePtr = NULL;
+    _ClipRectStack.clear();
+    _TextureIdStack.clear();
+    _Path.clear();
+    _Splitter.ClearFreeMemory();
+}
+
+ImDrawList* ImDrawList::CloneOutput() const
+{
+    ImDrawList* dst = IM_NEW(ImDrawList(_Data));
+    dst->CmdBuffer = CmdBuffer;
+    dst->IdxBuffer = IdxBuffer;
+    dst->VtxBuffer = VtxBuffer;
+    dst->Flags = Flags;
+    return dst;
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::AddDrawCmd()
+{
+    ImDrawCmd draw_cmd;
+    draw_cmd.ClipRect = _CmdHeader.ClipRect;    // Same as calling ImDrawCmd_HeaderCopy()
+    draw_cmd.TextureId = _CmdHeader.TextureId;
+    draw_cmd.VtxOffset = _CmdHeader.VtxOffset;
+    draw_cmd.IdxOffset = IdxBuffer.Size;
+
+    IM_ASSERT(draw_cmd.ClipRect.x <= draw_cmd.ClipRect.z && draw_cmd.ClipRect.y <= draw_cmd.ClipRect.w);
+    CmdBuffer.push_back(draw_cmd);
+}
+
+// Pop trailing draw command (used before merging or presenting to user)
+// Note that this leaves the ImDrawList in a state unfit for further commands, as most code assume that CmdBuffer.Size > 0 && CmdBuffer.back().UserCallback == NULL
+void ImDrawList::_PopUnusedDrawCmd()
+{
+    if (CmdBuffer.Size == 0)
+        return;
+    ImDrawCmd* curr_cmd = &CmdBuffer.Data[CmdBuffer.Size - 1];
+    if (curr_cmd->ElemCount == 0 && curr_cmd->UserCallback == NULL)
+        CmdBuffer.pop_back();
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::AddCallback(ImDrawCallback callback, void* callback_data)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT_PARANOID(CmdBuffer.Size > 0);
+    ImDrawCmd* curr_cmd = &CmdBuffer.Data[CmdBuffer.Size - 1];
+    IM_ASSERT(curr_cmd->UserCallback == NULL);
+    if (curr_cmd->ElemCount != 0)
+    {
+        AddDrawCmd();
+        curr_cmd = &CmdBuffer.Data[CmdBuffer.Size - 1];
+    }
+    curr_cmd->UserCallback = callback;
+    curr_cmd->UserCallbackData = callback_data;
+
+    AddDrawCmd(); // Force a new command after us (see comment below)
+}
+
+// Compare ClipRect, TextureId and VtxOffset with a single memcmp()
+#define ImDrawCmd_HeaderSize                            (IM_OFFSETOF(ImDrawCmd, VtxOffset) + sizeof(unsigned int))
+#define ImDrawCmd_HeaderCompare(CMD_LHS, CMD_RHS)       (memcmp(CMD_LHS, CMD_RHS, ImDrawCmd_HeaderSize))    // Compare ClipRect, TextureId, VtxOffset
+#define ImDrawCmd_HeaderCopy(CMD_DST, CMD_SRC)          (memcpy(CMD_DST, CMD_SRC, ImDrawCmd_HeaderSize))    // Copy ClipRect, TextureId, VtxOffset
+#define ImDrawCmd_AreSequentialIdxOffset(CMD_0, CMD_1)  (CMD_0->IdxOffset + CMD_0->ElemCount == CMD_1->IdxOffset)
+
+// Try to merge two last draw commands
+void ImDrawList::_TryMergeDrawCmds()
+{
+    IM_ASSERT_PARANOID(CmdBuffer.Size > 0);
+    ImDrawCmd* curr_cmd = &CmdBuffer.Data[CmdBuffer.Size - 1];
+    ImDrawCmd* prev_cmd = curr_cmd - 1;
+    if (ImDrawCmd_HeaderCompare(curr_cmd, prev_cmd) == 0 && ImDrawCmd_AreSequentialIdxOffset(prev_cmd, curr_cmd) && curr_cmd->UserCallback == NULL && prev_cmd->UserCallback == NULL)
+    {
+        prev_cmd->ElemCount += curr_cmd->ElemCount;
+        CmdBuffer.pop_back();
+    }
+}
+
+// Our scheme may appears a bit unusual, basically we want the most-common calls AddLine AddRect etc. to not have to perform any check so we always have a command ready in the stack.
+// The cost of figuring out if a new command has to be added or if we can merge is paid in those Update** functions only.
+void ImDrawList::_OnChangedClipRect()
+{
+    // If current command is used with different settings we need to add a new command
+    IM_ASSERT_PARANOID(CmdBuffer.Size > 0);
+    ImDrawCmd* curr_cmd = &CmdBuffer.Data[CmdBuffer.Size - 1];
+    if (curr_cmd->ElemCount != 0 && memcmp(&curr_cmd->ClipRect, &_CmdHeader.ClipRect, sizeof(ImVec4)) != 0)
+    {
+        AddDrawCmd();
+        return;
+    }
+    IM_ASSERT(curr_cmd->UserCallback == NULL);
+
+    // Try to merge with previous command if it matches, else use current command
+    ImDrawCmd* prev_cmd = curr_cmd - 1;
+    if (curr_cmd->ElemCount == 0 && CmdBuffer.Size > 1 && ImDrawCmd_HeaderCompare(&_CmdHeader, prev_cmd) == 0 && ImDrawCmd_AreSequentialIdxOffset(prev_cmd, curr_cmd) && prev_cmd->UserCallback == NULL)
+    {
+        CmdBuffer.pop_back();
+        return;
+    }
+
+    curr_cmd->ClipRect = _CmdHeader.ClipRect;
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::_OnChangedTextureID()
+{
+    // If current command is used with different settings we need to add a new command
+    IM_ASSERT_PARANOID(CmdBuffer.Size > 0);
+    ImDrawCmd* curr_cmd = &CmdBuffer.Data[CmdBuffer.Size - 1];
+    if (curr_cmd->ElemCount != 0 && curr_cmd->TextureId != _CmdHeader.TextureId)
+    {
+        AddDrawCmd();
+        return;
+    }
+    IM_ASSERT(curr_cmd->UserCallback == NULL);
+
+    // Try to merge with previous command if it matches, else use current command
+    ImDrawCmd* prev_cmd = curr_cmd - 1;
+    if (curr_cmd->ElemCount == 0 && CmdBuffer.Size > 1 && ImDrawCmd_HeaderCompare(&_CmdHeader, prev_cmd) == 0 && ImDrawCmd_AreSequentialIdxOffset(prev_cmd, curr_cmd) && prev_cmd->UserCallback == NULL)
+    {
+        CmdBuffer.pop_back();
+        return;
+    }
+
+    curr_cmd->TextureId = _CmdHeader.TextureId;
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::_OnChangedVtxOffset()
+{
+    // We don't need to compare curr_cmd->VtxOffset != _CmdHeader.VtxOffset because we know it'll be different at the time we call this.
+    _VtxCurrentIdx = 0;
+    IM_ASSERT_PARANOID(CmdBuffer.Size > 0);
+    ImDrawCmd* curr_cmd = &CmdBuffer.Data[CmdBuffer.Size - 1];
+    //IM_ASSERT(curr_cmd->VtxOffset != _CmdHeader.VtxOffset); // See #3349
+    if (curr_cmd->ElemCount != 0)
+    {
+        AddDrawCmd();
+        return;
+    }
+    IM_ASSERT(curr_cmd->UserCallback == NULL);
+    curr_cmd->VtxOffset = _CmdHeader.VtxOffset;
+}
+
+int ImDrawList::_CalcCircleAutoSegmentCount(float radius) const
+{
+    // Automatic segment count
+    const int radius_idx = (int)(radius + 0.999999f); // ceil to never reduce accuracy
+    if (radius_idx < IM_ARRAYSIZE(_Data->CircleSegmentCounts))
+        return _Data->CircleSegmentCounts[radius_idx]; // Use cached value
+    else
+        return IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_CALC(radius, _Data->CircleSegmentMaxError);
+}
+
+// Render-level scissoring. This is passed down to your render function but not used for CPU-side coarse clipping. Prefer using higher-level ImGui::PushClipRect() to affect logic (hit-testing and widget culling)
+void ImDrawList::PushClipRect(const ImVec2& cr_min, const ImVec2& cr_max, bool intersect_with_current_clip_rect)
+{
+    ImVec4 cr(cr_min.x, cr_min.y, cr_max.x, cr_max.y);
+    if (intersect_with_current_clip_rect)
+    {
+        ImVec4 current = _CmdHeader.ClipRect;
+        if (cr.x < current.x) cr.x = current.x;
+        if (cr.y < current.y) cr.y = current.y;
+        if (cr.z > current.z) cr.z = current.z;
+        if (cr.w > current.w) cr.w = current.w;
+    }
+    cr.z = ImMax(cr.x, cr.z);
+    cr.w = ImMax(cr.y, cr.w);
+
+    _ClipRectStack.push_back(cr);
+    _CmdHeader.ClipRect = cr;
+    _OnChangedClipRect();
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::PushClipRectFullScreen()
+{
+    PushClipRect(ImVec2(_Data->ClipRectFullscreen.x, _Data->ClipRectFullscreen.y), ImVec2(_Data->ClipRectFullscreen.z, _Data->ClipRectFullscreen.w));
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::PopClipRect()
+{
+    _ClipRectStack.pop_back();
+    _CmdHeader.ClipRect = (_ClipRectStack.Size == 0) ? _Data->ClipRectFullscreen : _ClipRectStack.Data[_ClipRectStack.Size - 1];
+    _OnChangedClipRect();
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::PushTextureID(ImTextureID texture_id)
+{
+    _TextureIdStack.push_back(texture_id);
+    _CmdHeader.TextureId = texture_id;
+    _OnChangedTextureID();
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::PopTextureID()
+{
+    _TextureIdStack.pop_back();
+    _CmdHeader.TextureId = (_TextureIdStack.Size == 0) ? (ImTextureID)NULL : _TextureIdStack.Data[_TextureIdStack.Size - 1];
+    _OnChangedTextureID();
+}
+
+// Reserve space for a number of vertices and indices.
+// You must finish filling your reserved data before calling PrimReserve() again, as it may reallocate or
+// submit the intermediate results. PrimUnreserve() can be used to release unused allocations.
+void ImDrawList::PrimReserve(int idx_count, int vtx_count)
+{
+    // Large mesh support (when enabled)
+    IM_ASSERT_PARANOID(idx_count >= 0 && vtx_count >= 0);
+    if (sizeof(ImDrawIdx) == 2 && (_VtxCurrentIdx + vtx_count >= (1 << 16)) && (Flags & ImDrawListFlags_AllowVtxOffset))
+    {
+        // FIXME: In theory we should be testing that vtx_count <64k here.
+        // In practice, RenderText() relies on reserving ahead for a worst case scenario so it is currently useful for us
+        // to not make that check until we rework the text functions to handle clipping and large horizontal lines better.
+        _CmdHeader.VtxOffset = VtxBuffer.Size;
+        _OnChangedVtxOffset();
+    }
+
+    ImDrawCmd* draw_cmd = &CmdBuffer.Data[CmdBuffer.Size - 1];
+    draw_cmd->ElemCount += idx_count;
+
+    int vtx_buffer_old_size = VtxBuffer.Size;
+    VtxBuffer.resize(vtx_buffer_old_size + vtx_count);
+    _VtxWritePtr = VtxBuffer.Data + vtx_buffer_old_size;
+
+    int idx_buffer_old_size = IdxBuffer.Size;
+    IdxBuffer.resize(idx_buffer_old_size + idx_count);
+    _IdxWritePtr = IdxBuffer.Data + idx_buffer_old_size;
+}
+
+// Release the a number of reserved vertices/indices from the end of the last reservation made with PrimReserve().
+void ImDrawList::PrimUnreserve(int idx_count, int vtx_count)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT_PARANOID(idx_count >= 0 && vtx_count >= 0);
+
+    ImDrawCmd* draw_cmd = &CmdBuffer.Data[CmdBuffer.Size - 1];
+    draw_cmd->ElemCount -= idx_count;
+    VtxBuffer.shrink(VtxBuffer.Size - vtx_count);
+    IdxBuffer.shrink(IdxBuffer.Size - idx_count);
+}
+
+// Fully unrolled with inline call to keep our debug builds decently fast.
+void ImDrawList::PrimRect(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& c, ImU32 col)
+{
+    ImVec2 b(c.x, a.y), d(a.x, c.y), uv(_Data->TexUvWhitePixel);
+    ImDrawIdx idx = (ImDrawIdx)_VtxCurrentIdx;
+    _IdxWritePtr[0] = idx; _IdxWritePtr[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx+1); _IdxWritePtr[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx+2);
+    _IdxWritePtr[3] = idx; _IdxWritePtr[4] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx+2); _IdxWritePtr[5] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx+3);
+    _VtxWritePtr[0].pos = a; _VtxWritePtr[0].uv = uv; _VtxWritePtr[0].col = col;
+    _VtxWritePtr[1].pos = b; _VtxWritePtr[1].uv = uv; _VtxWritePtr[1].col = col;
+    _VtxWritePtr[2].pos = c; _VtxWritePtr[2].uv = uv; _VtxWritePtr[2].col = col;
+    _VtxWritePtr[3].pos = d; _VtxWritePtr[3].uv = uv; _VtxWritePtr[3].col = col;
+    _VtxWritePtr += 4;
+    _VtxCurrentIdx += 4;
+    _IdxWritePtr += 6;
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::PrimRectUV(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& c, const ImVec2& uv_a, const ImVec2& uv_c, ImU32 col)
+{
+    ImVec2 b(c.x, a.y), d(a.x, c.y), uv_b(uv_c.x, uv_a.y), uv_d(uv_a.x, uv_c.y);
+    ImDrawIdx idx = (ImDrawIdx)_VtxCurrentIdx;
+    _IdxWritePtr[0] = idx; _IdxWritePtr[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx+1); _IdxWritePtr[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx+2);
+    _IdxWritePtr[3] = idx; _IdxWritePtr[4] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx+2); _IdxWritePtr[5] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx+3);
+    _VtxWritePtr[0].pos = a; _VtxWritePtr[0].uv = uv_a; _VtxWritePtr[0].col = col;
+    _VtxWritePtr[1].pos = b; _VtxWritePtr[1].uv = uv_b; _VtxWritePtr[1].col = col;
+    _VtxWritePtr[2].pos = c; _VtxWritePtr[2].uv = uv_c; _VtxWritePtr[2].col = col;
+    _VtxWritePtr[3].pos = d; _VtxWritePtr[3].uv = uv_d; _VtxWritePtr[3].col = col;
+    _VtxWritePtr += 4;
+    _VtxCurrentIdx += 4;
+    _IdxWritePtr += 6;
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::PrimQuadUV(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& c, const ImVec2& d, const ImVec2& uv_a, const ImVec2& uv_b, const ImVec2& uv_c, const ImVec2& uv_d, ImU32 col)
+{
+    ImDrawIdx idx = (ImDrawIdx)_VtxCurrentIdx;
+    _IdxWritePtr[0] = idx; _IdxWritePtr[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx+1); _IdxWritePtr[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx+2);
+    _IdxWritePtr[3] = idx; _IdxWritePtr[4] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx+2); _IdxWritePtr[5] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx+3);
+    _VtxWritePtr[0].pos = a; _VtxWritePtr[0].uv = uv_a; _VtxWritePtr[0].col = col;
+    _VtxWritePtr[1].pos = b; _VtxWritePtr[1].uv = uv_b; _VtxWritePtr[1].col = col;
+    _VtxWritePtr[2].pos = c; _VtxWritePtr[2].uv = uv_c; _VtxWritePtr[2].col = col;
+    _VtxWritePtr[3].pos = d; _VtxWritePtr[3].uv = uv_d; _VtxWritePtr[3].col = col;
+    _VtxWritePtr += 4;
+    _VtxCurrentIdx += 4;
+    _IdxWritePtr += 6;
+}
+
+// On AddPolyline() and AddConvexPolyFilled() we intentionally avoid using ImVec2 and superfluous function calls to optimize debug/non-inlined builds.
+// - Those macros expects l-values and need to be used as their own statement.
+// - Those macros are intentionally not surrounded by the 'do {} while (0)' idiom because even that translates to runtime with debug compilers.
+#define IM_NORMALIZE2F_OVER_ZERO(VX,VY)     { float d2 = VX*VX + VY*VY; if (d2 > 0.0f) { float inv_len = ImRsqrt(d2); VX *= inv_len; VY *= inv_len; } } (void)0
+#define IM_FIXNORMAL2F_MAX_INVLEN2          100.0f // 500.0f (see #4053, #3366)
+#define IM_FIXNORMAL2F(VX,VY)               { float d2 = VX*VX + VY*VY; if (d2 > 0.000001f) { float inv_len2 = 1.0f / d2; if (inv_len2 > IM_FIXNORMAL2F_MAX_INVLEN2) inv_len2 = IM_FIXNORMAL2F_MAX_INVLEN2; VX *= inv_len2; VY *= inv_len2; } } (void)0
+
+// TODO: Thickness anti-aliased lines cap are missing their AA fringe.
+// We avoid using the ImVec2 math operators here to reduce cost to a minimum for debug/non-inlined builds.
+void ImDrawList::AddPolyline(const ImVec2* points, const int points_count, ImU32 col, ImDrawFlags flags, float thickness)
+{
+    if (points_count < 2)
+        return;
+
+    const bool closed = (flags & ImDrawFlags_Closed) != 0;
+    const ImVec2 opaque_uv = _Data->TexUvWhitePixel;
+    const int count = closed ? points_count : points_count - 1; // The number of line segments we need to draw
+    const bool thick_line = (thickness > _FringeScale);
+
+    if (Flags & ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLines)
+    {
+        // Anti-aliased stroke
+        const float AA_SIZE = _FringeScale;
+        const ImU32 col_trans = col & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK;
+
+        // Thicknesses <1.0 should behave like thickness 1.0
+        thickness = ImMax(thickness, 1.0f);
+        const int integer_thickness = (int)thickness;
+        const float fractional_thickness = thickness - integer_thickness;
+
+        // Do we want to draw this line using a texture?
+        // - For now, only draw integer-width lines using textures to avoid issues with the way scaling occurs, could be improved.
+        // - If AA_SIZE is not 1.0f we cannot use the texture path.
+        const bool use_texture = (Flags & ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLinesUseTex) && (integer_thickness < IM_DRAWLIST_TEX_LINES_WIDTH_MAX) && (fractional_thickness <= 0.00001f) && (AA_SIZE == 1.0f);
+
+        // We should never hit this, because NewFrame() doesn't set ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLinesUseTex unless ImFontAtlasFlags_NoBakedLines is off
+        IM_ASSERT_PARANOID(!use_texture || !(_Data->Font->ContainerAtlas->Flags & ImFontAtlasFlags_NoBakedLines));
+
+        const int idx_count = use_texture ? (count * 6) : (thick_line ? count * 18 : count * 12);
+        const int vtx_count = use_texture ? (points_count * 2) : (thick_line ? points_count * 4 : points_count * 3);
+        PrimReserve(idx_count, vtx_count);
+
+        // Temporary buffer
+        // The first <points_count> items are normals at each line point, then after that there are either 2 or 4 temp points for each line point
+        ImVec2* temp_normals = (ImVec2*)alloca(points_count * ((use_texture || !thick_line) ? 3 : 5) * sizeof(ImVec2)); //-V630
+        ImVec2* temp_points = temp_normals + points_count;
+
+        // Calculate normals (tangents) for each line segment
+        for (int i1 = 0; i1 < count; i1++)
+        {
+            const int i2 = (i1 + 1) == points_count ? 0 : i1 + 1;
+            float dx = points[i2].x - points[i1].x;
+            float dy = points[i2].y - points[i1].y;
+            IM_NORMALIZE2F_OVER_ZERO(dx, dy);
+            temp_normals[i1].x = dy;
+            temp_normals[i1].y = -dx;
+        }
+        if (!closed)
+            temp_normals[points_count - 1] = temp_normals[points_count - 2];
+
+        // If we are drawing a one-pixel-wide line without a texture, or a textured line of any width, we only need 2 or 3 vertices per point
+        if (use_texture || !thick_line)
+        {
+            // [PATH 1] Texture-based lines (thick or non-thick)
+            // [PATH 2] Non texture-based lines (non-thick)
+
+            // The width of the geometry we need to draw - this is essentially <thickness> pixels for the line itself, plus "one pixel" for AA.
+            // - In the texture-based path, we don't use AA_SIZE here because the +1 is tied to the generated texture
+            //   (see ImFontAtlasBuildRenderLinesTexData() function), and so alternate values won't work without changes to that code.
+            // - In the non texture-based paths, we would allow AA_SIZE to potentially be != 1.0f with a patch (e.g. fringe_scale patch to
+            //   allow scaling geometry while preserving one-screen-pixel AA fringe).
+            const float half_draw_size = use_texture ? ((thickness * 0.5f) + 1) : AA_SIZE;
+
+            // If line is not closed, the first and last points need to be generated differently as there are no normals to blend
+            if (!closed)
+            {
+                temp_points[0] = points[0] + temp_normals[0] * half_draw_size;
+                temp_points[1] = points[0] - temp_normals[0] * half_draw_size;
+                temp_points[(points_count-1)*2+0] = points[points_count-1] + temp_normals[points_count-1] * half_draw_size;
+                temp_points[(points_count-1)*2+1] = points[points_count-1] - temp_normals[points_count-1] * half_draw_size;
+            }
+
+            // Generate the indices to form a number of triangles for each line segment, and the vertices for the line edges
+            // This takes points n and n+1 and writes into n+1, with the first point in a closed line being generated from the final one (as n+1 wraps)
+            // FIXME-OPT: Merge the different loops, possibly remove the temporary buffer.
+            unsigned int idx1 = _VtxCurrentIdx; // Vertex index for start of line segment
+            for (int i1 = 0; i1 < count; i1++) // i1 is the first point of the line segment
+            {
+                const int i2 = (i1 + 1) == points_count ? 0 : i1 + 1; // i2 is the second point of the line segment
+                const unsigned int idx2 = ((i1 + 1) == points_count) ? _VtxCurrentIdx : (idx1 + (use_texture ? 2 : 3)); // Vertex index for end of segment
+
+                // Average normals
+                float dm_x = (temp_normals[i1].x + temp_normals[i2].x) * 0.5f;
+                float dm_y = (temp_normals[i1].y + temp_normals[i2].y) * 0.5f;
+                IM_FIXNORMAL2F(dm_x, dm_y);
+                dm_x *= half_draw_size; // dm_x, dm_y are offset to the outer edge of the AA area
+                dm_y *= half_draw_size;
+
+                // Add temporary vertexes for the outer edges
+                ImVec2* out_vtx = &temp_points[i2 * 2];
+                out_vtx[0].x = points[i2].x + dm_x;
+                out_vtx[0].y = points[i2].y + dm_y;
+                out_vtx[1].x = points[i2].x - dm_x;
+                out_vtx[1].y = points[i2].y - dm_y;
+
+                if (use_texture)
+                {
+                    // Add indices for two triangles
+                    _IdxWritePtr[0] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 0); _IdxWritePtr[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 0); _IdxWritePtr[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 1); // Right tri
+                    _IdxWritePtr[3] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 1); _IdxWritePtr[4] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 1); _IdxWritePtr[5] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 0); // Left tri
+                    _IdxWritePtr += 6;
+                }
+                else
+                {
+                    // Add indexes for four triangles
+                    _IdxWritePtr[0] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 0); _IdxWritePtr[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 0); _IdxWritePtr[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 2); // Right tri 1
+                    _IdxWritePtr[3] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 2); _IdxWritePtr[4] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 2); _IdxWritePtr[5] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 0); // Right tri 2
+                    _IdxWritePtr[6] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 1); _IdxWritePtr[7] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 1); _IdxWritePtr[8] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 0); // Left tri 1
+                    _IdxWritePtr[9] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 0); _IdxWritePtr[10] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 0); _IdxWritePtr[11] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 1); // Left tri 2
+                    _IdxWritePtr += 12;
+                }
+
+                idx1 = idx2;
+            }
+
+            // Add vertexes for each point on the line
+            if (use_texture)
+            {
+                // If we're using textures we only need to emit the left/right edge vertices
+                ImVec4 tex_uvs = _Data->TexUvLines[integer_thickness];
+                /*if (fractional_thickness != 0.0f) // Currently always zero when use_texture==false!
+                {
+                    const ImVec4 tex_uvs_1 = _Data->TexUvLines[integer_thickness + 1];
+                    tex_uvs.x = tex_uvs.x + (tex_uvs_1.x - tex_uvs.x) * fractional_thickness; // inlined ImLerp()
+                    tex_uvs.y = tex_uvs.y + (tex_uvs_1.y - tex_uvs.y) * fractional_thickness;
+                    tex_uvs.z = tex_uvs.z + (tex_uvs_1.z - tex_uvs.z) * fractional_thickness;
+                    tex_uvs.w = tex_uvs.w + (tex_uvs_1.w - tex_uvs.w) * fractional_thickness;
+                }*/
+                ImVec2 tex_uv0(tex_uvs.x, tex_uvs.y);
+                ImVec2 tex_uv1(tex_uvs.z, tex_uvs.w);
+                for (int i = 0; i < points_count; i++)
+                {
+                    _VtxWritePtr[0].pos = temp_points[i * 2 + 0]; _VtxWritePtr[0].uv = tex_uv0; _VtxWritePtr[0].col = col; // Left-side outer edge
+                    _VtxWritePtr[1].pos = temp_points[i * 2 + 1]; _VtxWritePtr[1].uv = tex_uv1; _VtxWritePtr[1].col = col; // Right-side outer edge
+                    _VtxWritePtr += 2;
+                }
+            }
+            else
+            {
+                // If we're not using a texture, we need the center vertex as well
+                for (int i = 0; i < points_count; i++)
+                {
+                    _VtxWritePtr[0].pos = points[i];              _VtxWritePtr[0].uv = opaque_uv; _VtxWritePtr[0].col = col;       // Center of line
+                    _VtxWritePtr[1].pos = temp_points[i * 2 + 0]; _VtxWritePtr[1].uv = opaque_uv; _VtxWritePtr[1].col = col_trans; // Left-side outer edge
+                    _VtxWritePtr[2].pos = temp_points[i * 2 + 1]; _VtxWritePtr[2].uv = opaque_uv; _VtxWritePtr[2].col = col_trans; // Right-side outer edge
+                    _VtxWritePtr += 3;
+                }
+            }
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            // [PATH 2] Non texture-based lines (thick): we need to draw the solid line core and thus require four vertices per point
+            const float half_inner_thickness = (thickness - AA_SIZE) * 0.5f;
+
+            // If line is not closed, the first and last points need to be generated differently as there are no normals to blend
+            if (!closed)
+            {
+                const int points_last = points_count - 1;
+                temp_points[0] = points[0] + temp_normals[0] * (half_inner_thickness + AA_SIZE);
+                temp_points[1] = points[0] + temp_normals[0] * (half_inner_thickness);
+                temp_points[2] = points[0] - temp_normals[0] * (half_inner_thickness);
+                temp_points[3] = points[0] - temp_normals[0] * (half_inner_thickness + AA_SIZE);
+                temp_points[points_last * 4 + 0] = points[points_last] + temp_normals[points_last] * (half_inner_thickness + AA_SIZE);
+                temp_points[points_last * 4 + 1] = points[points_last] + temp_normals[points_last] * (half_inner_thickness);
+                temp_points[points_last * 4 + 2] = points[points_last] - temp_normals[points_last] * (half_inner_thickness);
+                temp_points[points_last * 4 + 3] = points[points_last] - temp_normals[points_last] * (half_inner_thickness + AA_SIZE);
+            }
+
+            // Generate the indices to form a number of triangles for each line segment, and the vertices for the line edges
+            // This takes points n and n+1 and writes into n+1, with the first point in a closed line being generated from the final one (as n+1 wraps)
+            // FIXME-OPT: Merge the different loops, possibly remove the temporary buffer.
+            unsigned int idx1 = _VtxCurrentIdx; // Vertex index for start of line segment
+            for (int i1 = 0; i1 < count; i1++) // i1 is the first point of the line segment
+            {
+                const int i2 = (i1 + 1) == points_count ? 0 : (i1 + 1); // i2 is the second point of the line segment
+                const unsigned int idx2 = (i1 + 1) == points_count ? _VtxCurrentIdx : (idx1 + 4); // Vertex index for end of segment
+
+                // Average normals
+                float dm_x = (temp_normals[i1].x + temp_normals[i2].x) * 0.5f;
+                float dm_y = (temp_normals[i1].y + temp_normals[i2].y) * 0.5f;
+                IM_FIXNORMAL2F(dm_x, dm_y);
+                float dm_out_x = dm_x * (half_inner_thickness + AA_SIZE);
+                float dm_out_y = dm_y * (half_inner_thickness + AA_SIZE);
+                float dm_in_x = dm_x * half_inner_thickness;
+                float dm_in_y = dm_y * half_inner_thickness;
+
+                // Add temporary vertices
+                ImVec2* out_vtx = &temp_points[i2 * 4];
+                out_vtx[0].x = points[i2].x + dm_out_x;
+                out_vtx[0].y = points[i2].y + dm_out_y;
+                out_vtx[1].x = points[i2].x + dm_in_x;
+                out_vtx[1].y = points[i2].y + dm_in_y;
+                out_vtx[2].x = points[i2].x - dm_in_x;
+                out_vtx[2].y = points[i2].y - dm_in_y;
+                out_vtx[3].x = points[i2].x - dm_out_x;
+                out_vtx[3].y = points[i2].y - dm_out_y;
+
+                // Add indexes
+                _IdxWritePtr[0]  = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 1); _IdxWritePtr[1]  = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 1); _IdxWritePtr[2]  = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 2);
+                _IdxWritePtr[3]  = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 2); _IdxWritePtr[4]  = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 2); _IdxWritePtr[5]  = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 1);
+                _IdxWritePtr[6]  = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 1); _IdxWritePtr[7]  = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 1); _IdxWritePtr[8]  = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 0);
+                _IdxWritePtr[9]  = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 0); _IdxWritePtr[10] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 0); _IdxWritePtr[11] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 1);
+                _IdxWritePtr[12] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 2); _IdxWritePtr[13] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 2); _IdxWritePtr[14] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 3);
+                _IdxWritePtr[15] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx1 + 3); _IdxWritePtr[16] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 3); _IdxWritePtr[17] = (ImDrawIdx)(idx2 + 2);
+                _IdxWritePtr += 18;
+
+                idx1 = idx2;
+            }
+
+            // Add vertices
+            for (int i = 0; i < points_count; i++)
+            {
+                _VtxWritePtr[0].pos = temp_points[i * 4 + 0]; _VtxWritePtr[0].uv = opaque_uv; _VtxWritePtr[0].col = col_trans;
+                _VtxWritePtr[1].pos = temp_points[i * 4 + 1]; _VtxWritePtr[1].uv = opaque_uv; _VtxWritePtr[1].col = col;
+                _VtxWritePtr[2].pos = temp_points[i * 4 + 2]; _VtxWritePtr[2].uv = opaque_uv; _VtxWritePtr[2].col = col;
+                _VtxWritePtr[3].pos = temp_points[i * 4 + 3]; _VtxWritePtr[3].uv = opaque_uv; _VtxWritePtr[3].col = col_trans;
+                _VtxWritePtr += 4;
+            }
+        }
+        _VtxCurrentIdx += (ImDrawIdx)vtx_count;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // [PATH 4] Non texture-based, Non anti-aliased lines
+        const int idx_count = count * 6;
+        const int vtx_count = count * 4;    // FIXME-OPT: Not sharing edges
+        PrimReserve(idx_count, vtx_count);
+
+        for (int i1 = 0; i1 < count; i1++)
+        {
+            const int i2 = (i1 + 1) == points_count ? 0 : i1 + 1;
+            const ImVec2& p1 = points[i1];
+            const ImVec2& p2 = points[i2];
+
+            float dx = p2.x - p1.x;
+            float dy = p2.y - p1.y;
+            IM_NORMALIZE2F_OVER_ZERO(dx, dy);
+            dx *= (thickness * 0.5f);
+            dy *= (thickness * 0.5f);
+
+            _VtxWritePtr[0].pos.x = p1.x + dy; _VtxWritePtr[0].pos.y = p1.y - dx; _VtxWritePtr[0].uv = opaque_uv; _VtxWritePtr[0].col = col;
+            _VtxWritePtr[1].pos.x = p2.x + dy; _VtxWritePtr[1].pos.y = p2.y - dx; _VtxWritePtr[1].uv = opaque_uv; _VtxWritePtr[1].col = col;
+            _VtxWritePtr[2].pos.x = p2.x - dy; _VtxWritePtr[2].pos.y = p2.y + dx; _VtxWritePtr[2].uv = opaque_uv; _VtxWritePtr[2].col = col;
+            _VtxWritePtr[3].pos.x = p1.x - dy; _VtxWritePtr[3].pos.y = p1.y + dx; _VtxWritePtr[3].uv = opaque_uv; _VtxWritePtr[3].col = col;
+            _VtxWritePtr += 4;
+
+            _IdxWritePtr[0] = (ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx); _IdxWritePtr[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx + 1); _IdxWritePtr[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx + 2);
+            _IdxWritePtr[3] = (ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx); _IdxWritePtr[4] = (ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx + 2); _IdxWritePtr[5] = (ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx + 3);
+            _IdxWritePtr += 6;
+            _VtxCurrentIdx += 4;
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+// - We intentionally avoid using ImVec2 and its math operators here to reduce cost to a minimum for debug/non-inlined builds.
+// - Filled shapes must always use clockwise winding order. The anti-aliasing fringe depends on it. Counter-clockwise shapes will have "inward" anti-aliasing.
+void ImDrawList::AddConvexPolyFilled(const ImVec2* points, const int points_count, ImU32 col)
+{
+    if (points_count < 3)
+        return;
+
+    const ImVec2 uv = _Data->TexUvWhitePixel;
+
+    if (Flags & ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedFill)
+    {
+        // Anti-aliased Fill
+        const float AA_SIZE = _FringeScale;
+        const ImU32 col_trans = col & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK;
+        const int idx_count = (points_count - 2)*3 + points_count * 6;
+        const int vtx_count = (points_count * 2);
+        PrimReserve(idx_count, vtx_count);
+
+        // Add indexes for fill
+        unsigned int vtx_inner_idx = _VtxCurrentIdx;
+        unsigned int vtx_outer_idx = _VtxCurrentIdx + 1;
+        for (int i = 2; i < points_count; i++)
+        {
+            _IdxWritePtr[0] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_inner_idx); _IdxWritePtr[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_inner_idx + ((i - 1) << 1)); _IdxWritePtr[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_inner_idx + (i << 1));
+            _IdxWritePtr += 3;
+        }
+
+        // Compute normals
+        ImVec2* temp_normals = (ImVec2*)alloca(points_count * sizeof(ImVec2)); //-V630
+        for (int i0 = points_count - 1, i1 = 0; i1 < points_count; i0 = i1++)
+        {
+            const ImVec2& p0 = points[i0];
+            const ImVec2& p1 = points[i1];
+            float dx = p1.x - p0.x;
+            float dy = p1.y - p0.y;
+            IM_NORMALIZE2F_OVER_ZERO(dx, dy);
+            temp_normals[i0].x = dy;
+            temp_normals[i0].y = -dx;
+        }
+
+        for (int i0 = points_count - 1, i1 = 0; i1 < points_count; i0 = i1++)
+        {
+            // Average normals
+            const ImVec2& n0 = temp_normals[i0];
+            const ImVec2& n1 = temp_normals[i1];
+            float dm_x = (n0.x + n1.x) * 0.5f;
+            float dm_y = (n0.y + n1.y) * 0.5f;
+            IM_FIXNORMAL2F(dm_x, dm_y);
+            dm_x *= AA_SIZE * 0.5f;
+            dm_y *= AA_SIZE * 0.5f;
+
+            // Add vertices
+            _VtxWritePtr[0].pos.x = (points[i1].x - dm_x); _VtxWritePtr[0].pos.y = (points[i1].y - dm_y); _VtxWritePtr[0].uv = uv; _VtxWritePtr[0].col = col;        // Inner
+            _VtxWritePtr[1].pos.x = (points[i1].x + dm_x); _VtxWritePtr[1].pos.y = (points[i1].y + dm_y); _VtxWritePtr[1].uv = uv; _VtxWritePtr[1].col = col_trans;  // Outer
+            _VtxWritePtr += 2;
+
+            // Add indexes for fringes
+            _IdxWritePtr[0] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_inner_idx + (i1 << 1)); _IdxWritePtr[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_inner_idx + (i0 << 1)); _IdxWritePtr[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_outer_idx + (i0 << 1));
+            _IdxWritePtr[3] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_outer_idx + (i0 << 1)); _IdxWritePtr[4] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_outer_idx + (i1 << 1)); _IdxWritePtr[5] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_inner_idx + (i1 << 1));
+            _IdxWritePtr += 6;
+        }
+        _VtxCurrentIdx += (ImDrawIdx)vtx_count;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Non Anti-aliased Fill
+        const int idx_count = (points_count - 2)*3;
+        const int vtx_count = points_count;
+        PrimReserve(idx_count, vtx_count);
+        for (int i = 0; i < vtx_count; i++)
+        {
+            _VtxWritePtr[0].pos = points[i]; _VtxWritePtr[0].uv = uv; _VtxWritePtr[0].col = col;
+            _VtxWritePtr++;
+        }
+        for (int i = 2; i < points_count; i++)
+        {
+            _IdxWritePtr[0] = (ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx); _IdxWritePtr[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx + i - 1); _IdxWritePtr[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx + i);
+            _IdxWritePtr += 3;
+        }
+        _VtxCurrentIdx += (ImDrawIdx)vtx_count;
+    }
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::_PathArcToFastEx(const ImVec2& center, float radius, int a_min_sample, int a_max_sample, int a_step)
+{
+    if (radius < 0.5f)
+    {
+        _Path.push_back(center);
+        return;
+    }
+
+    // Calculate arc auto segment step size
+    if (a_step <= 0)
+        a_step = IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX / _CalcCircleAutoSegmentCount(radius);
+
+    // Make sure we never do steps larger than one quarter of the circle
+    a_step = ImClamp(a_step, 1, IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_TABLE_SIZE / 4);
+
+    const int sample_range = ImAbs(a_max_sample - a_min_sample);
+    const int a_next_step = a_step;
+
+    int samples = sample_range + 1;
+    bool extra_max_sample = false;
+    if (a_step > 1)
+    {
+        samples            = sample_range / a_step + 1;
+        const int overstep = sample_range % a_step;
+
+        if (overstep > 0)
+        {
+            extra_max_sample = true;
+            samples++;
+
+            // When we have overstep to avoid awkwardly looking one long line and one tiny one at the end,
+            // distribute first step range evenly between them by reducing first step size.
+            if (sample_range > 0)
+                a_step -= (a_step - overstep) / 2;
+        }
+    }
+
+    _Path.resize(_Path.Size + samples);
+    ImVec2* out_ptr = _Path.Data + (_Path.Size - samples);
+
+    int sample_index = a_min_sample;
+    if (sample_index < 0 || sample_index >= IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX)
+    {
+        sample_index = sample_index % IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX;
+        if (sample_index < 0)
+            sample_index += IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX;
+    }
+
+    if (a_max_sample >= a_min_sample)
+    {
+        for (int a = a_min_sample; a <= a_max_sample; a += a_step, sample_index += a_step, a_step = a_next_step)
+        {
+            // a_step is clamped to IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX, so we have guaranteed that it will not wrap over range twice or more
+            if (sample_index >= IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX)
+                sample_index -= IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX;
+
+            const ImVec2 s = _Data->ArcFastVtx[sample_index];
+            out_ptr->x = center.x + s.x * radius;
+            out_ptr->y = center.y + s.y * radius;
+            out_ptr++;
+        }
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        for (int a = a_min_sample; a >= a_max_sample; a -= a_step, sample_index -= a_step, a_step = a_next_step)
+        {
+            // a_step is clamped to IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX, so we have guaranteed that it will not wrap over range twice or more
+            if (sample_index < 0)
+                sample_index += IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX;
+
+            const ImVec2 s = _Data->ArcFastVtx[sample_index];
+            out_ptr->x = center.x + s.x * radius;
+            out_ptr->y = center.y + s.y * radius;
+            out_ptr++;
+        }
+    }
+
+    if (extra_max_sample)
+    {
+        int normalized_max_sample = a_max_sample % IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX;
+        if (normalized_max_sample < 0)
+            normalized_max_sample += IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX;
+
+        const ImVec2 s = _Data->ArcFastVtx[normalized_max_sample];
+        out_ptr->x = center.x + s.x * radius;
+        out_ptr->y = center.y + s.y * radius;
+        out_ptr++;
+    }
+
+    IM_ASSERT_PARANOID(_Path.Data + _Path.Size == out_ptr);
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::_PathArcToN(const ImVec2& center, float radius, float a_min, float a_max, int num_segments)
+{
+    if (radius < 0.5f)
+    {
+        _Path.push_back(center);
+        return;
+    }
+
+    // Note that we are adding a point at both a_min and a_max.
+    // If you are trying to draw a full closed circle you don't want the overlapping points!
+    _Path.reserve(_Path.Size + (num_segments + 1));
+    for (int i = 0; i <= num_segments; i++)
+    {
+        const float a = a_min + ((float)i / (float)num_segments) * (a_max - a_min);
+        _Path.push_back(ImVec2(center.x + ImCos(a) * radius, center.y + ImSin(a) * radius));
+    }
+}
+
+// 0: East, 3: South, 6: West, 9: North, 12: East
+void ImDrawList::PathArcToFast(const ImVec2& center, float radius, int a_min_of_12, int a_max_of_12)
+{
+    if (radius < 0.5f)
+    {
+        _Path.push_back(center);
+        return;
+    }
+    _PathArcToFastEx(center, radius, a_min_of_12 * IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX / 12, a_max_of_12 * IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX / 12, 0);
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::PathArcTo(const ImVec2& center, float radius, float a_min, float a_max, int num_segments)
+{
+    if (radius < 0.5f)
+    {
+        _Path.push_back(center);
+        return;
+    }
+
+    if (num_segments > 0)
+    {
+        _PathArcToN(center, radius, a_min, a_max, num_segments);
+        return;
+    }
+
+    // Automatic segment count
+    if (radius <= _Data->ArcFastRadiusCutoff)
+    {
+        const bool a_is_reverse = a_max < a_min;
+
+        // We are going to use precomputed values for mid samples.
+        // Determine first and last sample in lookup table that belong to the arc.
+        const float a_min_sample_f = IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX * a_min / (IM_PI * 2.0f);
+        const float a_max_sample_f = IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX * a_max / (IM_PI * 2.0f);
+
+        const int a_min_sample = a_is_reverse ? (int)ImFloorSigned(a_min_sample_f) : (int)ImCeil(a_min_sample_f);
+        const int a_max_sample = a_is_reverse ? (int)ImCeil(a_max_sample_f) : (int)ImFloorSigned(a_max_sample_f);
+        const int a_mid_samples = a_is_reverse ? ImMax(a_min_sample - a_max_sample, 0) : ImMax(a_max_sample - a_min_sample, 0);
+
+        const float a_min_segment_angle = a_min_sample * IM_PI * 2.0f / IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX;
+        const float a_max_segment_angle = a_max_sample * IM_PI * 2.0f / IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX;
+        const bool a_emit_start = ImAbs(a_min_segment_angle - a_min) >= 1e-5f;
+        const bool a_emit_end = ImAbs(a_max - a_max_segment_angle) >= 1e-5f;
+
+        _Path.reserve(_Path.Size + (a_mid_samples + 1 + (a_emit_start ? 1 : 0) + (a_emit_end ? 1 : 0)));
+        if (a_emit_start)
+            _Path.push_back(ImVec2(center.x + ImCos(a_min) * radius, center.y + ImSin(a_min) * radius));
+        if (a_mid_samples > 0)
+            _PathArcToFastEx(center, radius, a_min_sample, a_max_sample, 0);
+        if (a_emit_end)
+            _Path.push_back(ImVec2(center.x + ImCos(a_max) * radius, center.y + ImSin(a_max) * radius));
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        const float arc_length = ImAbs(a_max - a_min);
+        const int circle_segment_count = _CalcCircleAutoSegmentCount(radius);
+        const int arc_segment_count = ImMax((int)ImCeil(circle_segment_count * arc_length / (IM_PI * 2.0f)), (int)(2.0f * IM_PI / arc_length));
+        _PathArcToN(center, radius, a_min, a_max, arc_segment_count);
+    }
+}
+
+ImVec2 ImBezierCubicCalc(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, float t)
+{
+    float u = 1.0f - t;
+    float w1 = u * u * u;
+    float w2 = 3 * u * u * t;
+    float w3 = 3 * u * t * t;
+    float w4 = t * t * t;
+    return ImVec2(w1 * p1.x + w2 * p2.x + w3 * p3.x + w4 * p4.x, w1 * p1.y + w2 * p2.y + w3 * p3.y + w4 * p4.y);
+}
+
+ImVec2 ImBezierQuadraticCalc(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, float t)
+{
+    float u = 1.0f - t;
+    float w1 = u * u;
+    float w2 = 2 * u * t;
+    float w3 = t * t;
+    return ImVec2(w1 * p1.x + w2 * p2.x + w3 * p3.x, w1 * p1.y + w2 * p2.y + w3 * p3.y);
+}
+
+// Closely mimics ImBezierCubicClosestPointCasteljau() in imgui.cpp
+static void PathBezierCubicCurveToCasteljau(ImVector<ImVec2>* path, float x1, float y1, float x2, float y2, float x3, float y3, float x4, float y4, float tess_tol, int level)
+{
+    float dx = x4 - x1;
+    float dy = y4 - y1;
+    float d2 = (x2 - x4) * dy - (y2 - y4) * dx;
+    float d3 = (x3 - x4) * dy - (y3 - y4) * dx;
+    d2 = (d2 >= 0) ? d2 : -d2;
+    d3 = (d3 >= 0) ? d3 : -d3;
+    if ((d2 + d3) * (d2 + d3) < tess_tol * (dx * dx + dy * dy))
+    {
+        path->push_back(ImVec2(x4, y4));
+    }
+    else if (level < 10)
+    {
+        float x12 = (x1 + x2) * 0.5f, y12 = (y1 + y2) * 0.5f;
+        float x23 = (x2 + x3) * 0.5f, y23 = (y2 + y3) * 0.5f;
+        float x34 = (x3 + x4) * 0.5f, y34 = (y3 + y4) * 0.5f;
+        float x123 = (x12 + x23) * 0.5f, y123 = (y12 + y23) * 0.5f;
+        float x234 = (x23 + x34) * 0.5f, y234 = (y23 + y34) * 0.5f;
+        float x1234 = (x123 + x234) * 0.5f, y1234 = (y123 + y234) * 0.5f;
+        PathBezierCubicCurveToCasteljau(path, x1, y1, x12, y12, x123, y123, x1234, y1234, tess_tol, level + 1);
+        PathBezierCubicCurveToCasteljau(path, x1234, y1234, x234, y234, x34, y34, x4, y4, tess_tol, level + 1);
+    }
+}
+
+static void PathBezierQuadraticCurveToCasteljau(ImVector<ImVec2>* path, float x1, float y1, float x2, float y2, float x3, float y3, float tess_tol, int level)
+{
+    float dx = x3 - x1, dy = y3 - y1;
+    float det = (x2 - x3) * dy - (y2 - y3) * dx;
+    if (det * det * 4.0f < tess_tol * (dx * dx + dy * dy))
+    {
+        path->push_back(ImVec2(x3, y3));
+    }
+    else if (level < 10)
+    {
+        float x12 = (x1 + x2) * 0.5f, y12 = (y1 + y2) * 0.5f;
+        float x23 = (x2 + x3) * 0.5f, y23 = (y2 + y3) * 0.5f;
+        float x123 = (x12 + x23) * 0.5f, y123 = (y12 + y23) * 0.5f;
+        PathBezierQuadraticCurveToCasteljau(path, x1, y1, x12, y12, x123, y123, tess_tol, level + 1);
+        PathBezierQuadraticCurveToCasteljau(path, x123, y123, x23, y23, x3, y3, tess_tol, level + 1);
+    }
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::PathBezierCubicCurveTo(const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, int num_segments)
+{
+    ImVec2 p1 = _Path.back();
+    if (num_segments == 0)
+    {
+        PathBezierCubicCurveToCasteljau(&_Path, p1.x, p1.y, p2.x, p2.y, p3.x, p3.y, p4.x, p4.y, _Data->CurveTessellationTol, 0); // Auto-tessellated
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        float t_step = 1.0f / (float)num_segments;
+        for (int i_step = 1; i_step <= num_segments; i_step++)
+            _Path.push_back(ImBezierCubicCalc(p1, p2, p3, p4, t_step * i_step));
+    }
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::PathBezierQuadraticCurveTo(const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, int num_segments)
+{
+    ImVec2 p1 = _Path.back();
+    if (num_segments == 0)
+    {
+        PathBezierQuadraticCurveToCasteljau(&_Path, p1.x, p1.y, p2.x, p2.y, p3.x, p3.y, _Data->CurveTessellationTol, 0);// Auto-tessellated
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        float t_step = 1.0f / (float)num_segments;
+        for (int i_step = 1; i_step <= num_segments; i_step++)
+            _Path.push_back(ImBezierQuadraticCalc(p1, p2, p3, t_step * i_step));
+    }
+}
+
+IM_STATIC_ASSERT(ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft == (1 << 4));
+static inline ImDrawFlags FixRectCornerFlags(ImDrawFlags flags)
+{
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+    // Legacy Support for hard coded ~0 (used to be a suggested equivalent to ImDrawCornerFlags_All)
+    //   ~0   --> ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll or 0
+    if (flags == ~0)
+        return ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll;
+
+    // Legacy Support for hard coded 0x01 to 0x0F (matching 15 out of 16 old flags combinations)
+    //   0x01 --> ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft (VALUE 0x01 OVERLAPS ImDrawFlags_Closed but ImDrawFlags_Closed is never valid in this path!)
+    //   0x02 --> ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight
+    //   0x03 --> ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight
+    //   0x04 --> ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBotLeft
+    //   0x05 --> ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft | ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBotLeft
+    //   ...
+    //   0x0F --> ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll or 0
+    // (See all values in ImDrawCornerFlags_)
+    if (flags >= 0x01 && flags <= 0x0F)
+        return (flags << 4);
+
+    // We cannot support hard coded 0x00 with 'float rounding > 0.0f' --> replace with ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone or use 'float rounding = 0.0f'
+#endif
+
+    // If this triggers, please update your code replacing hardcoded values with new ImDrawFlags_RoundCorners* values.
+    // Note that ImDrawFlags_Closed (== 0x01) is an invalid flag for AddRect(), AddRectFilled(), PathRect() etc...
+    IM_ASSERT((flags & 0x0F) == 0 && "Misuse of legacy hardcoded ImDrawCornerFlags values!");
+
+    if ((flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersMask_) == 0)
+        flags |= ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll;
+
+    return flags;
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::PathRect(const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, float rounding, ImDrawFlags flags)
+{
+    flags = FixRectCornerFlags(flags);
+    rounding = ImMin(rounding, ImFabs(b.x - a.x) * ( ((flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTop)  == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTop)  || ((flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottom) == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottom) ? 0.5f : 1.0f ) - 1.0f);
+    rounding = ImMin(rounding, ImFabs(b.y - a.y) * ( ((flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersLeft) == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersLeft) || ((flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersRight)  == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersRight)  ? 0.5f : 1.0f ) - 1.0f);
+
+    if (rounding < 0.5f || (flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersMask_) == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone)
+    {
+        PathLineTo(a);
+        PathLineTo(ImVec2(b.x, a.y));
+        PathLineTo(b);
+        PathLineTo(ImVec2(a.x, b.y));
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        const float rounding_tl = (flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft)     ? rounding : 0.0f;
+        const float rounding_tr = (flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight)    ? rounding : 0.0f;
+        const float rounding_br = (flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight) ? rounding : 0.0f;
+        const float rounding_bl = (flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft)  ? rounding : 0.0f;
+        PathArcToFast(ImVec2(a.x + rounding_tl, a.y + rounding_tl), rounding_tl, 6, 9);
+        PathArcToFast(ImVec2(b.x - rounding_tr, a.y + rounding_tr), rounding_tr, 9, 12);
+        PathArcToFast(ImVec2(b.x - rounding_br, b.y - rounding_br), rounding_br, 0, 3);
+        PathArcToFast(ImVec2(a.x + rounding_bl, b.y - rounding_bl), rounding_bl, 3, 6);
+    }
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::AddLine(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, ImU32 col, float thickness)
+{
+    if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0)
+        return;
+    PathLineTo(p1 + ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f));
+    PathLineTo(p2 + ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f));
+    PathStroke(col, 0, thickness);
+}
+
+// p_min = upper-left, p_max = lower-right
+// Note we don't render 1 pixels sized rectangles properly.
+void ImDrawList::AddRect(const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, ImU32 col, float rounding, ImDrawFlags flags, float thickness)
+{
+    if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0)
+        return;
+    if (Flags & ImDrawListFlags_AntiAliasedLines)
+        PathRect(p_min + ImVec2(0.50f, 0.50f), p_max - ImVec2(0.50f, 0.50f), rounding, flags);
+    else
+        PathRect(p_min + ImVec2(0.50f, 0.50f), p_max - ImVec2(0.49f, 0.49f), rounding, flags); // Better looking lower-right corner and rounded non-AA shapes.
+    PathStroke(col, ImDrawFlags_Closed, thickness);
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::AddRectFilled(const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, ImU32 col, float rounding, ImDrawFlags flags)
+{
+    if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0)
+        return;
+    if (rounding < 0.5f || (flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersMask_) == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone)
+    {
+        PrimReserve(6, 4);
+        PrimRect(p_min, p_max, col);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        PathRect(p_min, p_max, rounding, flags);
+        PathFillConvex(col);
+    }
+}
+
+// p_min = upper-left, p_max = lower-right
+void ImDrawList::AddRectFilledMultiColor(const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, ImU32 col_upr_left, ImU32 col_upr_right, ImU32 col_bot_right, ImU32 col_bot_left)
+{
+    if (((col_upr_left | col_upr_right | col_bot_right | col_bot_left) & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0)
+        return;
+
+    const ImVec2 uv = _Data->TexUvWhitePixel;
+    PrimReserve(6, 4);
+    PrimWriteIdx((ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx)); PrimWriteIdx((ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx + 1)); PrimWriteIdx((ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx + 2));
+    PrimWriteIdx((ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx)); PrimWriteIdx((ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx + 2)); PrimWriteIdx((ImDrawIdx)(_VtxCurrentIdx + 3));
+    PrimWriteVtx(p_min, uv, col_upr_left);
+    PrimWriteVtx(ImVec2(p_max.x, p_min.y), uv, col_upr_right);
+    PrimWriteVtx(p_max, uv, col_bot_right);
+    PrimWriteVtx(ImVec2(p_min.x, p_max.y), uv, col_bot_left);
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::AddQuad(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, ImU32 col, float thickness)
+{
+    if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0)
+        return;
+
+    PathLineTo(p1);
+    PathLineTo(p2);
+    PathLineTo(p3);
+    PathLineTo(p4);
+    PathStroke(col, ImDrawFlags_Closed, thickness);
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::AddQuadFilled(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, ImU32 col)
+{
+    if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0)
+        return;
+
+    PathLineTo(p1);
+    PathLineTo(p2);
+    PathLineTo(p3);
+    PathLineTo(p4);
+    PathFillConvex(col);
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::AddTriangle(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, ImU32 col, float thickness)
+{
+    if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0)
+        return;
+
+    PathLineTo(p1);
+    PathLineTo(p2);
+    PathLineTo(p3);
+    PathStroke(col, ImDrawFlags_Closed, thickness);
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::AddTriangleFilled(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, ImU32 col)
+{
+    if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0)
+        return;
+
+    PathLineTo(p1);
+    PathLineTo(p2);
+    PathLineTo(p3);
+    PathFillConvex(col);
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::AddCircle(const ImVec2& center, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments, float thickness)
+{
+    if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0 || radius < 0.5f)
+        return;
+
+    if (num_segments <= 0)
+    {
+        // Use arc with automatic segment count
+        _PathArcToFastEx(center, radius - 0.5f, 0, IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX, 0);
+        _Path.Size--;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Explicit segment count (still clamp to avoid drawing insanely tessellated shapes)
+        num_segments = ImClamp(num_segments, 3, IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_MAX);
+
+        // Because we are filling a closed shape we remove 1 from the count of segments/points
+        const float a_max = (IM_PI * 2.0f) * ((float)num_segments - 1.0f) / (float)num_segments;
+        PathArcTo(center, radius - 0.5f, 0.0f, a_max, num_segments - 1);
+    }
+
+    PathStroke(col, ImDrawFlags_Closed, thickness);
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::AddCircleFilled(const ImVec2& center, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments)
+{
+    if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0 || radius < 0.5f)
+        return;
+
+    if (num_segments <= 0)
+    {
+        // Use arc with automatic segment count
+        _PathArcToFastEx(center, radius, 0, IM_DRAWLIST_ARCFAST_SAMPLE_MAX, 0);
+        _Path.Size--;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Explicit segment count (still clamp to avoid drawing insanely tessellated shapes)
+        num_segments = ImClamp(num_segments, 3, IM_DRAWLIST_CIRCLE_AUTO_SEGMENT_MAX);
+
+        // Because we are filling a closed shape we remove 1 from the count of segments/points
+        const float a_max = (IM_PI * 2.0f) * ((float)num_segments - 1.0f) / (float)num_segments;
+        PathArcTo(center, radius, 0.0f, a_max, num_segments - 1);
+    }
+
+    PathFillConvex(col);
+}
+
+// Guaranteed to honor 'num_segments'
+void ImDrawList::AddNgon(const ImVec2& center, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments, float thickness)
+{
+    if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0 || num_segments <= 2)
+        return;
+
+    // Because we are filling a closed shape we remove 1 from the count of segments/points
+    const float a_max = (IM_PI * 2.0f) * ((float)num_segments - 1.0f) / (float)num_segments;
+    PathArcTo(center, radius - 0.5f, 0.0f, a_max, num_segments - 1);
+    PathStroke(col, ImDrawFlags_Closed, thickness);
+}
+
+// Guaranteed to honor 'num_segments'
+void ImDrawList::AddNgonFilled(const ImVec2& center, float radius, ImU32 col, int num_segments)
+{
+    if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0 || num_segments <= 2)
+        return;
+
+    // Because we are filling a closed shape we remove 1 from the count of segments/points
+    const float a_max = (IM_PI * 2.0f) * ((float)num_segments - 1.0f) / (float)num_segments;
+    PathArcTo(center, radius, 0.0f, a_max, num_segments - 1);
+    PathFillConvex(col);
+}
+
+// Cubic Bezier takes 4 controls points
+void ImDrawList::AddBezierCubic(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, ImU32 col, float thickness, int num_segments)
+{
+    if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0)
+        return;
+
+    PathLineTo(p1);
+    PathBezierCubicCurveTo(p2, p3, p4, num_segments);
+    PathStroke(col, 0, thickness);
+}
+
+// Quadratic Bezier takes 3 controls points
+void ImDrawList::AddBezierQuadratic(const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, ImU32 col, float thickness, int num_segments)
+{
+    if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0)
+        return;
+
+    PathLineTo(p1);
+    PathBezierQuadraticCurveTo(p2, p3, num_segments);
+    PathStroke(col, 0, thickness);
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::AddText(const ImFont* font, float font_size, const ImVec2& pos, ImU32 col, const char* text_begin, const char* text_end, float wrap_width, const ImVec4* cpu_fine_clip_rect)
+{
+    if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0)
+        return;
+
+    if (text_end == NULL)
+        text_end = text_begin + strlen(text_begin);
+    if (text_begin == text_end)
+        return;
+
+    // Pull default font/size from the shared ImDrawListSharedData instance
+    if (font == NULL)
+        font = _Data->Font;
+    if (font_size == 0.0f)
+        font_size = _Data->FontSize;
+
+    IM_ASSERT(font->ContainerAtlas->TexID == _CmdHeader.TextureId);  // Use high-level ImGui::PushFont() or low-level ImDrawList::PushTextureId() to change font.
+
+    ImVec4 clip_rect = _CmdHeader.ClipRect;
+    if (cpu_fine_clip_rect)
+    {
+        clip_rect.x = ImMax(clip_rect.x, cpu_fine_clip_rect->x);
+        clip_rect.y = ImMax(clip_rect.y, cpu_fine_clip_rect->y);
+        clip_rect.z = ImMin(clip_rect.z, cpu_fine_clip_rect->z);
+        clip_rect.w = ImMin(clip_rect.w, cpu_fine_clip_rect->w);
+    }
+    font->RenderText(this, font_size, pos, col, clip_rect, text_begin, text_end, wrap_width, cpu_fine_clip_rect != NULL);
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::AddText(const ImVec2& pos, ImU32 col, const char* text_begin, const char* text_end)
+{
+    AddText(NULL, 0.0f, pos, col, text_begin, text_end);
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::AddImage(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, const ImVec2& uv_min, const ImVec2& uv_max, ImU32 col)
+{
+    if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0)
+        return;
+
+    const bool push_texture_id = user_texture_id != _CmdHeader.TextureId;
+    if (push_texture_id)
+        PushTextureID(user_texture_id);
+
+    PrimReserve(6, 4);
+    PrimRectUV(p_min, p_max, uv_min, uv_max, col);
+
+    if (push_texture_id)
+        PopTextureID();
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::AddImageQuad(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& p1, const ImVec2& p2, const ImVec2& p3, const ImVec2& p4, const ImVec2& uv1, const ImVec2& uv2, const ImVec2& uv3, const ImVec2& uv4, ImU32 col)
+{
+    if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0)
+        return;
+
+    const bool push_texture_id = user_texture_id != _CmdHeader.TextureId;
+    if (push_texture_id)
+        PushTextureID(user_texture_id);
+
+    PrimReserve(6, 4);
+    PrimQuadUV(p1, p2, p3, p4, uv1, uv2, uv3, uv4, col);
+
+    if (push_texture_id)
+        PopTextureID();
+}
+
+void ImDrawList::AddImageRounded(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& p_min, const ImVec2& p_max, const ImVec2& uv_min, const ImVec2& uv_max, ImU32 col, float rounding, ImDrawFlags flags)
+{
+    if ((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) == 0)
+        return;
+
+    flags = FixRectCornerFlags(flags);
+    if (rounding < 0.5f || (flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersMask_) == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone)
+    {
+        AddImage(user_texture_id, p_min, p_max, uv_min, uv_max, col);
+        return;
+    }
+
+    const bool push_texture_id = user_texture_id != _CmdHeader.TextureId;
+    if (push_texture_id)
+        PushTextureID(user_texture_id);
+
+    int vert_start_idx = VtxBuffer.Size;
+    PathRect(p_min, p_max, rounding, flags);
+    PathFillConvex(col);
+    int vert_end_idx = VtxBuffer.Size;
+    ImGui::ShadeVertsLinearUV(this, vert_start_idx, vert_end_idx, p_min, p_max, uv_min, uv_max, true);
+
+    if (push_texture_id)
+        PopTextureID();
+}
+
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] ImDrawListSplitter
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// FIXME: This may be a little confusing, trying to be a little too low-level/optimal instead of just doing vector swap..
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+void ImDrawListSplitter::ClearFreeMemory()
+{
+    for (int i = 0; i < _Channels.Size; i++)
+    {
+        if (i == _Current)
+            memset(&_Channels[i], 0, sizeof(_Channels[i]));  // Current channel is a copy of CmdBuffer/IdxBuffer, don't destruct again
+        _Channels[i]._CmdBuffer.clear();
+        _Channels[i]._IdxBuffer.clear();
+    }
+    _Current = 0;
+    _Count = 1;
+    _Channels.clear();
+}
+
+void ImDrawListSplitter::Split(ImDrawList* draw_list, int channels_count)
+{
+    IM_UNUSED(draw_list);
+    IM_ASSERT(_Current == 0 && _Count <= 1 && "Nested channel splitting is not supported. Please use separate instances of ImDrawListSplitter.");
+    int old_channels_count = _Channels.Size;
+    if (old_channels_count < channels_count)
+    {
+        _Channels.reserve(channels_count); // Avoid over reserving since this is likely to stay stable
+        _Channels.resize(channels_count);
+    }
+    _Count = channels_count;
+
+    // Channels[] (24/32 bytes each) hold storage that we'll swap with draw_list->_CmdBuffer/_IdxBuffer
+    // The content of Channels[0] at this point doesn't matter. We clear it to make state tidy in a debugger but we don't strictly need to.
+    // When we switch to the next channel, we'll copy draw_list->_CmdBuffer/_IdxBuffer into Channels[0] and then Channels[1] into draw_list->CmdBuffer/_IdxBuffer
+    memset(&_Channels[0], 0, sizeof(ImDrawChannel));
+    for (int i = 1; i < channels_count; i++)
+    {
+        if (i >= old_channels_count)
+        {
+            IM_PLACEMENT_NEW(&_Channels[i]) ImDrawChannel();
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            _Channels[i]._CmdBuffer.resize(0);
+            _Channels[i]._IdxBuffer.resize(0);
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+void ImDrawListSplitter::Merge(ImDrawList* draw_list)
+{
+    // Note that we never use or rely on _Channels.Size because it is merely a buffer that we never shrink back to 0 to keep all sub-buffers ready for use.
+    if (_Count <= 1)
+        return;
+
+    SetCurrentChannel(draw_list, 0);
+    draw_list->_PopUnusedDrawCmd();
+
+    // Calculate our final buffer sizes. Also fix the incorrect IdxOffset values in each command.
+    int new_cmd_buffer_count = 0;
+    int new_idx_buffer_count = 0;
+    ImDrawCmd* last_cmd = (_Count > 0 && draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size > 0) ? &draw_list->CmdBuffer.back() : NULL;
+    int idx_offset = last_cmd ? last_cmd->IdxOffset + last_cmd->ElemCount : 0;
+    for (int i = 1; i < _Count; i++)
+    {
+        ImDrawChannel& ch = _Channels[i];
+        if (ch._CmdBuffer.Size > 0 && ch._CmdBuffer.back().ElemCount == 0 && ch._CmdBuffer.back().UserCallback == NULL) // Equivalent of PopUnusedDrawCmd()
+            ch._CmdBuffer.pop_back();
+
+        if (ch._CmdBuffer.Size > 0 && last_cmd != NULL)
+        {
+            // Do not include ImDrawCmd_AreSequentialIdxOffset() in the compare as we rebuild IdxOffset values ourselves.
+            // Manipulating IdxOffset (e.g. by reordering draw commands like done by RenderDimmedBackgroundBehindWindow()) is not supported within a splitter.
+            ImDrawCmd* next_cmd = &ch._CmdBuffer[0];
+            if (ImDrawCmd_HeaderCompare(last_cmd, next_cmd) == 0 && last_cmd->UserCallback == NULL && next_cmd->UserCallback == NULL)
+            {
+                // Merge previous channel last draw command with current channel first draw command if matching.
+                last_cmd->ElemCount += next_cmd->ElemCount;
+                idx_offset += next_cmd->ElemCount;
+                ch._CmdBuffer.erase(ch._CmdBuffer.Data); // FIXME-OPT: Improve for multiple merges.
+            }
+        }
+        if (ch._CmdBuffer.Size > 0)
+            last_cmd = &ch._CmdBuffer.back();
+        new_cmd_buffer_count += ch._CmdBuffer.Size;
+        new_idx_buffer_count += ch._IdxBuffer.Size;
+        for (int cmd_n = 0; cmd_n < ch._CmdBuffer.Size; cmd_n++)
+        {
+            ch._CmdBuffer.Data[cmd_n].IdxOffset = idx_offset;
+            idx_offset += ch._CmdBuffer.Data[cmd_n].ElemCount;
+        }
+    }
+    draw_list->CmdBuffer.resize(draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size + new_cmd_buffer_count);
+    draw_list->IdxBuffer.resize(draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size + new_idx_buffer_count);
+
+    // Write commands and indices in order (they are fairly small structures, we don't copy vertices only indices)
+    ImDrawCmd* cmd_write = draw_list->CmdBuffer.Data + draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size - new_cmd_buffer_count;
+    ImDrawIdx* idx_write = draw_list->IdxBuffer.Data + draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size - new_idx_buffer_count;
+    for (int i = 1; i < _Count; i++)
+    {
+        ImDrawChannel& ch = _Channels[i];
+        if (int sz = ch._CmdBuffer.Size) { memcpy(cmd_write, ch._CmdBuffer.Data, sz * sizeof(ImDrawCmd)); cmd_write += sz; }
+        if (int sz = ch._IdxBuffer.Size) { memcpy(idx_write, ch._IdxBuffer.Data, sz * sizeof(ImDrawIdx)); idx_write += sz; }
+    }
+    draw_list->_IdxWritePtr = idx_write;
+
+    // Ensure there's always a non-callback draw command trailing the command-buffer
+    if (draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size == 0 || draw_list->CmdBuffer.back().UserCallback != NULL)
+        draw_list->AddDrawCmd();
+
+    // If current command is used with different settings we need to add a new command
+    ImDrawCmd* curr_cmd = &draw_list->CmdBuffer.Data[draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size - 1];
+    if (curr_cmd->ElemCount == 0)
+        ImDrawCmd_HeaderCopy(curr_cmd, &draw_list->_CmdHeader); // Copy ClipRect, TextureId, VtxOffset
+    else if (ImDrawCmd_HeaderCompare(curr_cmd, &draw_list->_CmdHeader) != 0)
+        draw_list->AddDrawCmd();
+
+    _Count = 1;
+}
+
+void ImDrawListSplitter::SetCurrentChannel(ImDrawList* draw_list, int idx)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(idx >= 0 && idx < _Count);
+    if (_Current == idx)
+        return;
+
+    // Overwrite ImVector (12/16 bytes), four times. This is merely a silly optimization instead of doing .swap()
+    memcpy(&_Channels.Data[_Current]._CmdBuffer, &draw_list->CmdBuffer, sizeof(draw_list->CmdBuffer));
+    memcpy(&_Channels.Data[_Current]._IdxBuffer, &draw_list->IdxBuffer, sizeof(draw_list->IdxBuffer));
+    _Current = idx;
+    memcpy(&draw_list->CmdBuffer, &_Channels.Data[idx]._CmdBuffer, sizeof(draw_list->CmdBuffer));
+    memcpy(&draw_list->IdxBuffer, &_Channels.Data[idx]._IdxBuffer, sizeof(draw_list->IdxBuffer));
+    draw_list->_IdxWritePtr = draw_list->IdxBuffer.Data + draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size;
+
+    // If current command is used with different settings we need to add a new command
+    ImDrawCmd* curr_cmd = (draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size == 0) ? NULL : &draw_list->CmdBuffer.Data[draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size - 1];
+    if (curr_cmd == NULL)
+        draw_list->AddDrawCmd();
+    else if (curr_cmd->ElemCount == 0)
+        ImDrawCmd_HeaderCopy(curr_cmd, &draw_list->_CmdHeader); // Copy ClipRect, TextureId, VtxOffset
+    else if (ImDrawCmd_HeaderCompare(curr_cmd, &draw_list->_CmdHeader) != 0)
+        draw_list->AddDrawCmd();
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] ImDrawData
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// For backward compatibility: convert all buffers from indexed to de-indexed, in case you cannot render indexed. Note: this is slow and most likely a waste of resources. Always prefer indexed rendering!
+void ImDrawData::DeIndexAllBuffers()
+{
+    ImVector<ImDrawVert> new_vtx_buffer;
+    TotalVtxCount = TotalIdxCount = 0;
+    for (int i = 0; i < CmdListsCount; i++)
+    {
+        ImDrawList* cmd_list = CmdLists[i];
+        if (cmd_list->IdxBuffer.empty())
+            continue;
+        new_vtx_buffer.resize(cmd_list->IdxBuffer.Size);
+        for (int j = 0; j < cmd_list->IdxBuffer.Size; j++)
+            new_vtx_buffer[j] = cmd_list->VtxBuffer[cmd_list->IdxBuffer[j]];
+        cmd_list->VtxBuffer.swap(new_vtx_buffer);
+        cmd_list->IdxBuffer.resize(0);
+        TotalVtxCount += cmd_list->VtxBuffer.Size;
+    }
+}
+
+// Helper to scale the ClipRect field of each ImDrawCmd.
+// Use if your final output buffer is at a different scale than draw_data->DisplaySize,
+// or if there is a difference between your window resolution and framebuffer resolution.
+void ImDrawData::ScaleClipRects(const ImVec2& fb_scale)
+{
+    for (int i = 0; i < CmdListsCount; i++)
+    {
+        ImDrawList* cmd_list = CmdLists[i];
+        for (int cmd_i = 0; cmd_i < cmd_list->CmdBuffer.Size; cmd_i++)
+        {
+            ImDrawCmd* cmd = &cmd_list->CmdBuffer[cmd_i];
+            cmd->ClipRect = ImVec4(cmd->ClipRect.x * fb_scale.x, cmd->ClipRect.y * fb_scale.y, cmd->ClipRect.z * fb_scale.x, cmd->ClipRect.w * fb_scale.y);
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Helpers ShadeVertsXXX functions
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Generic linear color gradient, write to RGB fields, leave A untouched.
+void ImGui::ShadeVertsLinearColorGradientKeepAlpha(ImDrawList* draw_list, int vert_start_idx, int vert_end_idx, ImVec2 gradient_p0, ImVec2 gradient_p1, ImU32 col0, ImU32 col1)
+{
+    ImVec2 gradient_extent = gradient_p1 - gradient_p0;
+    float gradient_inv_length2 = 1.0f / ImLengthSqr(gradient_extent);
+    ImDrawVert* vert_start = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data + vert_start_idx;
+    ImDrawVert* vert_end = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data + vert_end_idx;
+    const int col0_r = (int)(col0 >> IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) & 0xFF;
+    const int col0_g = (int)(col0 >> IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) & 0xFF;
+    const int col0_b = (int)(col0 >> IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) & 0xFF;
+    const int col_delta_r = ((int)(col1 >> IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) & 0xFF) - col0_r;
+    const int col_delta_g = ((int)(col1 >> IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) & 0xFF) - col0_g;
+    const int col_delta_b = ((int)(col1 >> IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) & 0xFF) - col0_b;
+    for (ImDrawVert* vert = vert_start; vert < vert_end; vert++)
+    {
+        float d = ImDot(vert->pos - gradient_p0, gradient_extent);
+        float t = ImClamp(d * gradient_inv_length2, 0.0f, 1.0f);
+        int r = (int)(col0_r + col_delta_r * t);
+        int g = (int)(col0_g + col_delta_g * t);
+        int b = (int)(col0_b + col_delta_b * t);
+        vert->col = (r << IM_COL32_R_SHIFT) | (g << IM_COL32_G_SHIFT) | (b << IM_COL32_B_SHIFT) | (vert->col & IM_COL32_A_MASK);
+    }
+}
+
+// Distribute UV over (a, b) rectangle
+void ImGui::ShadeVertsLinearUV(ImDrawList* draw_list, int vert_start_idx, int vert_end_idx, const ImVec2& a, const ImVec2& b, const ImVec2& uv_a, const ImVec2& uv_b, bool clamp)
+{
+    const ImVec2 size = b - a;
+    const ImVec2 uv_size = uv_b - uv_a;
+    const ImVec2 scale = ImVec2(
+        size.x != 0.0f ? (uv_size.x / size.x) : 0.0f,
+        size.y != 0.0f ? (uv_size.y / size.y) : 0.0f);
+
+    ImDrawVert* vert_start = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data + vert_start_idx;
+    ImDrawVert* vert_end = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data + vert_end_idx;
+    if (clamp)
+    {
+        const ImVec2 min = ImMin(uv_a, uv_b);
+        const ImVec2 max = ImMax(uv_a, uv_b);
+        for (ImDrawVert* vertex = vert_start; vertex < vert_end; ++vertex)
+            vertex->uv = ImClamp(uv_a + ImMul(ImVec2(vertex->pos.x, vertex->pos.y) - a, scale), min, max);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        for (ImDrawVert* vertex = vert_start; vertex < vert_end; ++vertex)
+            vertex->uv = uv_a + ImMul(ImVec2(vertex->pos.x, vertex->pos.y) - a, scale);
+    }
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] ImFontConfig
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+ImFontConfig::ImFontConfig()
+{
+    memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this));
+    FontDataOwnedByAtlas = true;
+    OversampleH = 3; // FIXME: 2 may be a better default?
+    OversampleV = 1;
+    GlyphMaxAdvanceX = FLT_MAX;
+    RasterizerMultiply = 1.0f;
+    EllipsisChar = (ImWchar)-1;
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] ImFontAtlas
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// A work of art lies ahead! (. = white layer, X = black layer, others are blank)
+// The 2x2 white texels on the top left are the ones we'll use everywhere in Dear ImGui to render filled shapes.
+// (This is used when io.MouseDrawCursor = true)
+const int FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_W = 122; // Actual texture will be 2 times that + 1 spacing.
+const int FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_H = 27;
+static const char FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_PIXELS[FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_W * FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_H + 1] =
+{
+    "..-         -XXXXXXX-    X    -           X           -XXXXXXX          -          XXXXXXX-     XX          - XX       XX "
+    "..-         -X.....X-   X.X   -          X.X          -X.....X          -          X.....X-    X..X         -X..X     X..X"
+    "---         -XXX.XXX-  X...X  -         X...X         -X....X           -           X....X-    X..X         -X...X   X...X"
+    "X           -  X.X  - X.....X -        X.....X        -X...X            -            X...X-    X..X         - X...X X...X "
+    "XX          -  X.X  -X.......X-       X.......X       -X..X.X           -           X.X..X-    X..X         -  X...X...X  "
+    "X.X         -  X.X  -XXXX.XXXX-       XXXX.XXXX       -X.X X.X          -          X.X X.X-    X..XXX       -   X.....X   "
+    "X..X        -  X.X  -   X.X   -          X.X          -XX   X.X         -         X.X   XX-    X..X..XXX    -    X...X    "
+    "X...X       -  X.X  -   X.X   -    XX    X.X    XX    -      X.X        -        X.X      -    X..X..X..XX  -     X.X     "
+    "X....X      -  X.X  -   X.X   -   X.X    X.X    X.X   -       X.X       -       X.X       -    X..X..X..X.X -    X...X    "
+    "X.....X     -  X.X  -   X.X   -  X..X    X.X    X..X  -        X.X      -      X.X        -XXX X..X..X..X..X-   X.....X   "
+    "X......X    -  X.X  -   X.X   - X...XXXXXX.XXXXXX...X -         X.X   XX-XX   X.X         -X..XX........X..X-  X...X...X  "
+    "X.......X   -  X.X  -   X.X   -X.....................X-          X.X X.X-X.X X.X          -X...X...........X- X...X X...X "
+    "X........X  -  X.X  -   X.X   - X...XXXXXX.XXXXXX...X -           X.X..X-X..X.X           - X..............X-X...X   X...X"
+    "X.........X -XXX.XXX-   X.X   -  X..X    X.X    X..X  -            X...X-X...X            -  X.............X-X..X     X..X"
+    "X..........X-X.....X-   X.X   -   X.X    X.X    X.X   -           X....X-X....X           -  X.............X- XX       XX "
+    "X......XXXXX-XXXXXXX-   X.X   -    XX    X.X    XX    -          X.....X-X.....X          -   X............X--------------"
+    "X...X..X    ---------   X.X   -          X.X          -          XXXXXXX-XXXXXXX          -   X...........X -             "
+    "X..X X..X   -       -XXXX.XXXX-       XXXX.XXXX       -------------------------------------    X..........X -             "
+    "X.X  X..X   -       -X.......X-       X.......X       -    XX           XX    -           -    X..........X -             "
+    "XX    X..X  -       - X.....X -        X.....X        -   X.X           X.X   -           -     X........X  -             "
+    "      X..X  -       -  X...X  -         X...X         -  X..X           X..X  -           -     X........X  -             "
+    "       XX   -       -   X.X   -          X.X          - X...XXXXXXXXXXXXX...X -           -     XXXXXXXXXX  -             "
+    "-------------       -    X    -           X           -X.....................X-           -------------------             "
+    "                    ----------------------------------- X...XXXXXXXXXXXXX...X -                                           "
+    "                                                      -  X..X           X..X  -                                           "
+    "                                                      -   X.X           X.X   -                                           "
+    "                                                      -    XX           XX    -                                           "
+};
+
+static const ImVec2 FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_CURSOR_DATA[ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT][3] =
+{
+    // Pos ........ Size ......... Offset ......
+    { ImVec2( 0,3), ImVec2(12,19), ImVec2( 0, 0) }, // ImGuiMouseCursor_Arrow
+    { ImVec2(13,0), ImVec2( 7,16), ImVec2( 1, 8) }, // ImGuiMouseCursor_TextInput
+    { ImVec2(31,0), ImVec2(23,23), ImVec2(11,11) }, // ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeAll
+    { ImVec2(21,0), ImVec2( 9,23), ImVec2( 4,11) }, // ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNS
+    { ImVec2(55,18),ImVec2(23, 9), ImVec2(11, 4) }, // ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW
+    { ImVec2(73,0), ImVec2(17,17), ImVec2( 8, 8) }, // ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNESW
+    { ImVec2(55,0), ImVec2(17,17), ImVec2( 8, 8) }, // ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNWSE
+    { ImVec2(91,0), ImVec2(17,22), ImVec2( 5, 0) }, // ImGuiMouseCursor_Hand
+    { ImVec2(109,0),ImVec2(13,15), ImVec2( 6, 7) }, // ImGuiMouseCursor_NotAllowed
+};
+
+ImFontAtlas::ImFontAtlas()
+{
+    memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this));
+    TexGlyphPadding = 1;
+    PackIdMouseCursors = PackIdLines = -1;
+}
+
+ImFontAtlas::~ImFontAtlas()
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(!Locked && "Cannot modify a locked ImFontAtlas between NewFrame() and EndFrame/Render()!");
+    Clear();
+}
+
+void    ImFontAtlas::ClearInputData()
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(!Locked && "Cannot modify a locked ImFontAtlas between NewFrame() and EndFrame/Render()!");
+    for (int i = 0; i < ConfigData.Size; i++)
+        if (ConfigData[i].FontData && ConfigData[i].FontDataOwnedByAtlas)
+        {
+            IM_FREE(ConfigData[i].FontData);
+            ConfigData[i].FontData = NULL;
+        }
+
+    // When clearing this we lose access to the font name and other information used to build the font.
+    for (int i = 0; i < Fonts.Size; i++)
+        if (Fonts[i]->ConfigData >= ConfigData.Data && Fonts[i]->ConfigData < ConfigData.Data + ConfigData.Size)
+        {
+            Fonts[i]->ConfigData = NULL;
+            Fonts[i]->ConfigDataCount = 0;
+        }
+    ConfigData.clear();
+    CustomRects.clear();
+    PackIdMouseCursors = PackIdLines = -1;
+    // Important: we leave TexReady untouched
+}
+
+void    ImFontAtlas::ClearTexData()
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(!Locked && "Cannot modify a locked ImFontAtlas between NewFrame() and EndFrame/Render()!");
+    if (TexPixelsAlpha8)
+        IM_FREE(TexPixelsAlpha8);
+    if (TexPixelsRGBA32)
+        IM_FREE(TexPixelsRGBA32);
+    TexPixelsAlpha8 = NULL;
+    TexPixelsRGBA32 = NULL;
+    TexPixelsUseColors = false;
+    // Important: we leave TexReady untouched
+}
+
+void    ImFontAtlas::ClearFonts()
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(!Locked && "Cannot modify a locked ImFontAtlas between NewFrame() and EndFrame/Render()!");
+    Fonts.clear_delete();
+    TexReady = false;
+}
+
+void    ImFontAtlas::Clear()
+{
+    ClearInputData();
+    ClearTexData();
+    ClearFonts();
+}
+
+void    ImFontAtlas::GetTexDataAsAlpha8(unsigned char** out_pixels, int* out_width, int* out_height, int* out_bytes_per_pixel)
+{
+    // Build atlas on demand
+    if (TexPixelsAlpha8 == NULL)
+        Build();
+
+    *out_pixels = TexPixelsAlpha8;
+    if (out_width) *out_width = TexWidth;
+    if (out_height) *out_height = TexHeight;
+    if (out_bytes_per_pixel) *out_bytes_per_pixel = 1;
+}
+
+void    ImFontAtlas::GetTexDataAsRGBA32(unsigned char** out_pixels, int* out_width, int* out_height, int* out_bytes_per_pixel)
+{
+    // Convert to RGBA32 format on demand
+    // Although it is likely to be the most commonly used format, our font rendering is 1 channel / 8 bpp
+    if (!TexPixelsRGBA32)
+    {
+        unsigned char* pixels = NULL;
+        GetTexDataAsAlpha8(&pixels, NULL, NULL);
+        if (pixels)
+        {
+            TexPixelsRGBA32 = (unsigned int*)IM_ALLOC((size_t)TexWidth * (size_t)TexHeight * 4);
+            const unsigned char* src = pixels;
+            unsigned int* dst = TexPixelsRGBA32;
+            for (int n = TexWidth * TexHeight; n > 0; n--)
+                *dst++ = IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, (unsigned int)(*src++));
+        }
+    }
+
+    *out_pixels = (unsigned char*)TexPixelsRGBA32;
+    if (out_width) *out_width = TexWidth;
+    if (out_height) *out_height = TexHeight;
+    if (out_bytes_per_pixel) *out_bytes_per_pixel = 4;
+}
+
+ImFont* ImFontAtlas::AddFont(const ImFontConfig* font_cfg)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(!Locked && "Cannot modify a locked ImFontAtlas between NewFrame() and EndFrame/Render()!");
+    IM_ASSERT(font_cfg->FontData != NULL && font_cfg->FontDataSize > 0);
+    IM_ASSERT(font_cfg->SizePixels > 0.0f);
+
+    // Create new font
+    if (!font_cfg->MergeMode)
+        Fonts.push_back(IM_NEW(ImFont));
+    else
+        IM_ASSERT(!Fonts.empty() && "Cannot use MergeMode for the first font"); // When using MergeMode make sure that a font has already been added before. You can use ImGui::GetIO().Fonts->AddFontDefault() to add the default imgui font.
+
+    ConfigData.push_back(*font_cfg);
+    ImFontConfig& new_font_cfg = ConfigData.back();
+    if (new_font_cfg.DstFont == NULL)
+        new_font_cfg.DstFont = Fonts.back();
+    if (!new_font_cfg.FontDataOwnedByAtlas)
+    {
+        new_font_cfg.FontData = IM_ALLOC(new_font_cfg.FontDataSize);
+        new_font_cfg.FontDataOwnedByAtlas = true;
+        memcpy(new_font_cfg.FontData, font_cfg->FontData, (size_t)new_font_cfg.FontDataSize);
+    }
+
+    if (new_font_cfg.DstFont->EllipsisChar == (ImWchar)-1)
+        new_font_cfg.DstFont->EllipsisChar = font_cfg->EllipsisChar;
+
+    // Invalidate texture
+    TexReady = false;
+    ClearTexData();
+    return new_font_cfg.DstFont;
+}
+
+// Default font TTF is compressed with stb_compress then base85 encoded (see misc/fonts/binary_to_compressed_c.cpp for encoder)
+static unsigned int stb_decompress_length(const unsigned char* input);
+static unsigned int stb_decompress(unsigned char* output, const unsigned char* input, unsigned int length);
+static const char*  GetDefaultCompressedFontDataTTFBase85();
+static unsigned int Decode85Byte(char c)                                    { return c >= '\\' ? c-36 : c-35; }
+static void         Decode85(const unsigned char* src, unsigned char* dst)
+{
+    while (*src)
+    {
+        unsigned int tmp = Decode85Byte(src[0]) + 85 * (Decode85Byte(src[1]) + 85 * (Decode85Byte(src[2]) + 85 * (Decode85Byte(src[3]) + 85 * Decode85Byte(src[4]))));
+        dst[0] = ((tmp >> 0) & 0xFF); dst[1] = ((tmp >> 8) & 0xFF); dst[2] = ((tmp >> 16) & 0xFF); dst[3] = ((tmp >> 24) & 0xFF);   // We can't assume little-endianness.
+        src += 5;
+        dst += 4;
+    }
+}
+
+// Load embedded ProggyClean.ttf at size 13, disable oversampling
+ImFont* ImFontAtlas::AddFontDefault(const ImFontConfig* font_cfg_template)
+{
+    ImFontConfig font_cfg = font_cfg_template ? *font_cfg_template : ImFontConfig();
+    if (!font_cfg_template)
+    {
+        font_cfg.OversampleH = font_cfg.OversampleV = 1;
+        font_cfg.PixelSnapH = true;
+    }
+    if (font_cfg.SizePixels <= 0.0f)
+        font_cfg.SizePixels = 13.0f * 1.0f;
+    if (font_cfg.Name[0] == '\0')
+        ImFormatString(font_cfg.Name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(font_cfg.Name), "ProggyClean.ttf, %dpx", (int)font_cfg.SizePixels);
+    font_cfg.EllipsisChar = (ImWchar)0x0085;
+    font_cfg.GlyphOffset.y = 1.0f * IM_FLOOR(font_cfg.SizePixels / 13.0f);  // Add +1 offset per 13 units
+
+    const char* ttf_compressed_base85 = GetDefaultCompressedFontDataTTFBase85();
+    const ImWchar* glyph_ranges = font_cfg.GlyphRanges != NULL ? font_cfg.GlyphRanges : GetGlyphRangesDefault();
+    ImFont* font = AddFontFromMemoryCompressedBase85TTF(ttf_compressed_base85, font_cfg.SizePixels, &font_cfg, glyph_ranges);
+    return font;
+}
+
+ImFont* ImFontAtlas::AddFontFromFileTTF(const char* filename, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg_template, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(!Locked && "Cannot modify a locked ImFontAtlas between NewFrame() and EndFrame/Render()!");
+    size_t data_size = 0;
+    void* data = ImFileLoadToMemory(filename, "rb", &data_size, 0);
+    if (!data)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(0, "Could not load font file!");
+        return NULL;
+    }
+    ImFontConfig font_cfg = font_cfg_template ? *font_cfg_template : ImFontConfig();
+    if (font_cfg.Name[0] == '\0')
+    {
+        // Store a short copy of filename into into the font name for convenience
+        const char* p;
+        for (p = filename + strlen(filename); p > filename && p[-1] != '/' && p[-1] != '\\'; p--) {}
+        ImFormatString(font_cfg.Name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(font_cfg.Name), "%s, %.0fpx", p, size_pixels);
+    }
+    return AddFontFromMemoryTTF(data, (int)data_size, size_pixels, &font_cfg, glyph_ranges);
+}
+
+// NB: Transfer ownership of 'ttf_data' to ImFontAtlas, unless font_cfg_template->FontDataOwnedByAtlas == false. Owned TTF buffer will be deleted after Build().
+ImFont* ImFontAtlas::AddFontFromMemoryTTF(void* ttf_data, int ttf_size, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg_template, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(!Locked && "Cannot modify a locked ImFontAtlas between NewFrame() and EndFrame/Render()!");
+    ImFontConfig font_cfg = font_cfg_template ? *font_cfg_template : ImFontConfig();
+    IM_ASSERT(font_cfg.FontData == NULL);
+    font_cfg.FontData = ttf_data;
+    font_cfg.FontDataSize = ttf_size;
+    font_cfg.SizePixels = size_pixels > 0.0f ? size_pixels : font_cfg.SizePixels;
+    if (glyph_ranges)
+        font_cfg.GlyphRanges = glyph_ranges;
+    return AddFont(&font_cfg);
+}
+
+ImFont* ImFontAtlas::AddFontFromMemoryCompressedTTF(const void* compressed_ttf_data, int compressed_ttf_size, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg_template, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges)
+{
+    const unsigned int buf_decompressed_size = stb_decompress_length((const unsigned char*)compressed_ttf_data);
+    unsigned char* buf_decompressed_data = (unsigned char*)IM_ALLOC(buf_decompressed_size);
+    stb_decompress(buf_decompressed_data, (const unsigned char*)compressed_ttf_data, (unsigned int)compressed_ttf_size);
+
+    ImFontConfig font_cfg = font_cfg_template ? *font_cfg_template : ImFontConfig();
+    IM_ASSERT(font_cfg.FontData == NULL);
+    font_cfg.FontDataOwnedByAtlas = true;
+    return AddFontFromMemoryTTF(buf_decompressed_data, (int)buf_decompressed_size, size_pixels, &font_cfg, glyph_ranges);
+}
+
+ImFont* ImFontAtlas::AddFontFromMemoryCompressedBase85TTF(const char* compressed_ttf_data_base85, float size_pixels, const ImFontConfig* font_cfg, const ImWchar* glyph_ranges)
+{
+    int compressed_ttf_size = (((int)strlen(compressed_ttf_data_base85) + 4) / 5) * 4;
+    void* compressed_ttf = IM_ALLOC((size_t)compressed_ttf_size);
+    Decode85((const unsigned char*)compressed_ttf_data_base85, (unsigned char*)compressed_ttf);
+    ImFont* font = AddFontFromMemoryCompressedTTF(compressed_ttf, compressed_ttf_size, size_pixels, font_cfg, glyph_ranges);
+    IM_FREE(compressed_ttf);
+    return font;
+}
+
+int ImFontAtlas::AddCustomRectRegular(int width, int height)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(width > 0 && width <= 0xFFFF);
+    IM_ASSERT(height > 0 && height <= 0xFFFF);
+    ImFontAtlasCustomRect r;
+    r.Width = (unsigned short)width;
+    r.Height = (unsigned short)height;
+    CustomRects.push_back(r);
+    return CustomRects.Size - 1; // Return index
+}
+
+int ImFontAtlas::AddCustomRectFontGlyph(ImFont* font, ImWchar id, int width, int height, float advance_x, const ImVec2& offset)
+{
+#ifdef IMGUI_USE_WCHAR32
+    IM_ASSERT(id <= IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX);
+#endif
+    IM_ASSERT(font != NULL);
+    IM_ASSERT(width > 0 && width <= 0xFFFF);
+    IM_ASSERT(height > 0 && height <= 0xFFFF);
+    ImFontAtlasCustomRect r;
+    r.Width = (unsigned short)width;
+    r.Height = (unsigned short)height;
+    r.GlyphID = id;
+    r.GlyphAdvanceX = advance_x;
+    r.GlyphOffset = offset;
+    r.Font = font;
+    CustomRects.push_back(r);
+    return CustomRects.Size - 1; // Return index
+}
+
+void ImFontAtlas::CalcCustomRectUV(const ImFontAtlasCustomRect* rect, ImVec2* out_uv_min, ImVec2* out_uv_max) const
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(TexWidth > 0 && TexHeight > 0);   // Font atlas needs to be built before we can calculate UV coordinates
+    IM_ASSERT(rect->IsPacked());                // Make sure the rectangle has been packed
+    *out_uv_min = ImVec2((float)rect->X * TexUvScale.x, (float)rect->Y * TexUvScale.y);
+    *out_uv_max = ImVec2((float)(rect->X + rect->Width) * TexUvScale.x, (float)(rect->Y + rect->Height) * TexUvScale.y);
+}
+
+bool ImFontAtlas::GetMouseCursorTexData(ImGuiMouseCursor cursor_type, ImVec2* out_offset, ImVec2* out_size, ImVec2 out_uv_border[2], ImVec2 out_uv_fill[2])
+{
+    if (cursor_type <= ImGuiMouseCursor_None || cursor_type >= ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT)
+        return false;
+    if (Flags & ImFontAtlasFlags_NoMouseCursors)
+        return false;
+
+    IM_ASSERT(PackIdMouseCursors != -1);
+    ImFontAtlasCustomRect* r = GetCustomRectByIndex(PackIdMouseCursors);
+    ImVec2 pos = FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_CURSOR_DATA[cursor_type][0] + ImVec2((float)r->X, (float)r->Y);
+    ImVec2 size = FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_CURSOR_DATA[cursor_type][1];
+    *out_size = size;
+    *out_offset = FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_CURSOR_DATA[cursor_type][2];
+    out_uv_border[0] = (pos) * TexUvScale;
+    out_uv_border[1] = (pos + size) * TexUvScale;
+    pos.x += FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_W + 1;
+    out_uv_fill[0] = (pos) * TexUvScale;
+    out_uv_fill[1] = (pos + size) * TexUvScale;
+    return true;
+}
+
+bool    ImFontAtlas::Build()
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(!Locked && "Cannot modify a locked ImFontAtlas between NewFrame() and EndFrame/Render()!");
+
+    // Default font is none are specified
+    if (ConfigData.Size == 0)
+        AddFontDefault();
+
+    // Select builder
+    // - Note that we do not reassign to atlas->FontBuilderIO, since it is likely to point to static data which
+    //   may mess with some hot-reloading schemes. If you need to assign to this (for dynamic selection) AND are
+    //   using a hot-reloading scheme that messes up static data, store your own instance of ImFontBuilderIO somewhere
+    //   and point to it instead of pointing directly to return value of the GetBuilderXXX functions.
+    const ImFontBuilderIO* builder_io = FontBuilderIO;
+    if (builder_io == NULL)
+    {
+#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_FREETYPE
+        builder_io = ImGuiFreeType::GetBuilderForFreeType();
+#elif defined(IMGUI_ENABLE_STB_TRUETYPE)
+        builder_io = ImFontAtlasGetBuilderForStbTruetype();
+#else
+        IM_ASSERT(0); // Invalid Build function
+#endif
+    }
+
+    // Build
+    return builder_io->FontBuilder_Build(this);
+}
+
+void    ImFontAtlasBuildMultiplyCalcLookupTable(unsigned char out_table[256], float in_brighten_factor)
+{
+    for (unsigned int i = 0; i < 256; i++)
+    {
+        unsigned int value = (unsigned int)(i * in_brighten_factor);
+        out_table[i] = value > 255 ? 255 : (value & 0xFF);
+    }
+}
+
+void    ImFontAtlasBuildMultiplyRectAlpha8(const unsigned char table[256], unsigned char* pixels, int x, int y, int w, int h, int stride)
+{
+    unsigned char* data = pixels + x + y * stride;
+    for (int j = h; j > 0; j--, data += stride)
+        for (int i = 0; i < w; i++)
+            data[i] = table[data[i]];
+}
+
+#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_STB_TRUETYPE
+// Temporary data for one source font (multiple source fonts can be merged into one destination ImFont)
+// (C++03 doesn't allow instancing ImVector<> with function-local types so we declare the type here.)
+struct ImFontBuildSrcData
+{
+    stbtt_fontinfo      FontInfo;
+    stbtt_pack_range    PackRange;          // Hold the list of codepoints to pack (essentially points to Codepoints.Data)
+    stbrp_rect*         Rects;              // Rectangle to pack. We first fill in their size and the packer will give us their position.
+    stbtt_packedchar*   PackedChars;        // Output glyphs
+    const ImWchar*      SrcRanges;          // Ranges as requested by user (user is allowed to request too much, e.g. 0x0020..0xFFFF)
+    int                 DstIndex;           // Index into atlas->Fonts[] and dst_tmp_array[]
+    int                 GlyphsHighest;      // Highest requested codepoint
+    int                 GlyphsCount;        // Glyph count (excluding missing glyphs and glyphs already set by an earlier source font)
+    ImBitVector         GlyphsSet;          // Glyph bit map (random access, 1-bit per codepoint. This will be a maximum of 8KB)
+    ImVector<int>       GlyphsList;         // Glyph codepoints list (flattened version of GlyphsMap)
+};
+
+// Temporary data for one destination ImFont* (multiple source fonts can be merged into one destination ImFont)
+struct ImFontBuildDstData
+{
+    int                 SrcCount;           // Number of source fonts targeting this destination font.
+    int                 GlyphsHighest;
+    int                 GlyphsCount;
+    ImBitVector         GlyphsSet;          // This is used to resolve collision when multiple sources are merged into a same destination font.
+};
+
+static void UnpackBitVectorToFlatIndexList(const ImBitVector* in, ImVector<int>* out)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(sizeof(in->Storage.Data[0]) == sizeof(int));
+    const ImU32* it_begin = in->Storage.begin();
+    const ImU32* it_end = in->Storage.end();
+    for (const ImU32* it = it_begin; it < it_end; it++)
+        if (ImU32 entries_32 = *it)
+            for (ImU32 bit_n = 0; bit_n < 32; bit_n++)
+                if (entries_32 & ((ImU32)1 << bit_n))
+                    out->push_back((int)(((it - it_begin) << 5) + bit_n));
+}
+
+static bool ImFontAtlasBuildWithStbTruetype(ImFontAtlas* atlas)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(atlas->ConfigData.Size > 0);
+
+    ImFontAtlasBuildInit(atlas);
+
+    // Clear atlas
+    atlas->TexID = (ImTextureID)NULL;
+    atlas->TexWidth = atlas->TexHeight = 0;
+    atlas->TexUvScale = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+    atlas->TexUvWhitePixel = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+    atlas->ClearTexData();
+
+    // Temporary storage for building
+    ImVector<ImFontBuildSrcData> src_tmp_array;
+    ImVector<ImFontBuildDstData> dst_tmp_array;
+    src_tmp_array.resize(atlas->ConfigData.Size);
+    dst_tmp_array.resize(atlas->Fonts.Size);
+    memset(src_tmp_array.Data, 0, (size_t)src_tmp_array.size_in_bytes());
+    memset(dst_tmp_array.Data, 0, (size_t)dst_tmp_array.size_in_bytes());
+
+    // 1. Initialize font loading structure, check font data validity
+    for (int src_i = 0; src_i < atlas->ConfigData.Size; src_i++)
+    {
+        ImFontBuildSrcData& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i];
+        ImFontConfig& cfg = atlas->ConfigData[src_i];
+        IM_ASSERT(cfg.DstFont && (!cfg.DstFont->IsLoaded() || cfg.DstFont->ContainerAtlas == atlas));
+
+        // Find index from cfg.DstFont (we allow the user to set cfg.DstFont. Also it makes casual debugging nicer than when storing indices)
+        src_tmp.DstIndex = -1;
+        for (int output_i = 0; output_i < atlas->Fonts.Size && src_tmp.DstIndex == -1; output_i++)
+            if (cfg.DstFont == atlas->Fonts[output_i])
+                src_tmp.DstIndex = output_i;
+        if (src_tmp.DstIndex == -1)
+        {
+            IM_ASSERT(src_tmp.DstIndex != -1); // cfg.DstFont not pointing within atlas->Fonts[] array?
+            return false;
+        }
+        // Initialize helper structure for font loading and verify that the TTF/OTF data is correct
+        const int font_offset = stbtt_GetFontOffsetForIndex((unsigned char*)cfg.FontData, cfg.FontNo);
+        IM_ASSERT(font_offset >= 0 && "FontData is incorrect, or FontNo cannot be found.");
+        if (!stbtt_InitFont(&src_tmp.FontInfo, (unsigned char*)cfg.FontData, font_offset))
+            return false;
+
+        // Measure highest codepoints
+        ImFontBuildDstData& dst_tmp = dst_tmp_array[src_tmp.DstIndex];
+        src_tmp.SrcRanges = cfg.GlyphRanges ? cfg.GlyphRanges : atlas->GetGlyphRangesDefault();
+        for (const ImWchar* src_range = src_tmp.SrcRanges; src_range[0] && src_range[1]; src_range += 2)
+            src_tmp.GlyphsHighest = ImMax(src_tmp.GlyphsHighest, (int)src_range[1]);
+        dst_tmp.SrcCount++;
+        dst_tmp.GlyphsHighest = ImMax(dst_tmp.GlyphsHighest, src_tmp.GlyphsHighest);
+    }
+
+    // 2. For every requested codepoint, check for their presence in the font data, and handle redundancy or overlaps between source fonts to avoid unused glyphs.
+    int total_glyphs_count = 0;
+    for (int src_i = 0; src_i < src_tmp_array.Size; src_i++)
+    {
+        ImFontBuildSrcData& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i];
+        ImFontBuildDstData& dst_tmp = dst_tmp_array[src_tmp.DstIndex];
+        src_tmp.GlyphsSet.Create(src_tmp.GlyphsHighest + 1);
+        if (dst_tmp.GlyphsSet.Storage.empty())
+            dst_tmp.GlyphsSet.Create(dst_tmp.GlyphsHighest + 1);
+
+        for (const ImWchar* src_range = src_tmp.SrcRanges; src_range[0] && src_range[1]; src_range += 2)
+            for (unsigned int codepoint = src_range[0]; codepoint <= src_range[1]; codepoint++)
+            {
+                if (dst_tmp.GlyphsSet.TestBit(codepoint))    // Don't overwrite existing glyphs. We could make this an option for MergeMode (e.g. MergeOverwrite==true)
+                    continue;
+                if (!stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(&src_tmp.FontInfo, codepoint))    // It is actually in the font?
+                    continue;
+
+                // Add to avail set/counters
+                src_tmp.GlyphsCount++;
+                dst_tmp.GlyphsCount++;
+                src_tmp.GlyphsSet.SetBit(codepoint);
+                dst_tmp.GlyphsSet.SetBit(codepoint);
+                total_glyphs_count++;
+            }
+    }
+
+    // 3. Unpack our bit map into a flat list (we now have all the Unicode points that we know are requested _and_ available _and_ not overlapping another)
+    for (int src_i = 0; src_i < src_tmp_array.Size; src_i++)
+    {
+        ImFontBuildSrcData& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i];
+        src_tmp.GlyphsList.reserve(src_tmp.GlyphsCount);
+        UnpackBitVectorToFlatIndexList(&src_tmp.GlyphsSet, &src_tmp.GlyphsList);
+        src_tmp.GlyphsSet.Clear();
+        IM_ASSERT(src_tmp.GlyphsList.Size == src_tmp.GlyphsCount);
+    }
+    for (int dst_i = 0; dst_i < dst_tmp_array.Size; dst_i++)
+        dst_tmp_array[dst_i].GlyphsSet.Clear();
+    dst_tmp_array.clear();
+
+    // Allocate packing character data and flag packed characters buffer as non-packed (x0=y0=x1=y1=0)
+    // (We technically don't need to zero-clear buf_rects, but let's do it for the sake of sanity)
+    ImVector<stbrp_rect> buf_rects;
+    ImVector<stbtt_packedchar> buf_packedchars;
+    buf_rects.resize(total_glyphs_count);
+    buf_packedchars.resize(total_glyphs_count);
+    memset(buf_rects.Data, 0, (size_t)buf_rects.size_in_bytes());
+    memset(buf_packedchars.Data, 0, (size_t)buf_packedchars.size_in_bytes());
+
+    // 4. Gather glyphs sizes so we can pack them in our virtual canvas.
+    int total_surface = 0;
+    int buf_rects_out_n = 0;
+    int buf_packedchars_out_n = 0;
+    for (int src_i = 0; src_i < src_tmp_array.Size; src_i++)
+    {
+        ImFontBuildSrcData& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i];
+        if (src_tmp.GlyphsCount == 0)
+            continue;
+
+        src_tmp.Rects = &buf_rects[buf_rects_out_n];
+        src_tmp.PackedChars = &buf_packedchars[buf_packedchars_out_n];
+        buf_rects_out_n += src_tmp.GlyphsCount;
+        buf_packedchars_out_n += src_tmp.GlyphsCount;
+
+        // Convert our ranges in the format stb_truetype wants
+        ImFontConfig& cfg = atlas->ConfigData[src_i];
+        src_tmp.PackRange.font_size = cfg.SizePixels;
+        src_tmp.PackRange.first_unicode_codepoint_in_range = 0;
+        src_tmp.PackRange.array_of_unicode_codepoints = src_tmp.GlyphsList.Data;
+        src_tmp.PackRange.num_chars = src_tmp.GlyphsList.Size;
+        src_tmp.PackRange.chardata_for_range = src_tmp.PackedChars;
+        src_tmp.PackRange.h_oversample = (unsigned char)cfg.OversampleH;
+        src_tmp.PackRange.v_oversample = (unsigned char)cfg.OversampleV;
+
+        // Gather the sizes of all rectangles we will need to pack (this loop is based on stbtt_PackFontRangesGatherRects)
+        const float scale = (cfg.SizePixels > 0) ? stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(&src_tmp.FontInfo, cfg.SizePixels) : stbtt_ScaleForMappingEmToPixels(&src_tmp.FontInfo, -cfg.SizePixels);
+        const int padding = atlas->TexGlyphPadding;
+        for (int glyph_i = 0; glyph_i < src_tmp.GlyphsList.Size; glyph_i++)
+        {
+            int x0, y0, x1, y1;
+            const int glyph_index_in_font = stbtt_FindGlyphIndex(&src_tmp.FontInfo, src_tmp.GlyphsList[glyph_i]);
+            IM_ASSERT(glyph_index_in_font != 0);
+            stbtt_GetGlyphBitmapBoxSubpixel(&src_tmp.FontInfo, glyph_index_in_font, scale * cfg.OversampleH, scale * cfg.OversampleV, 0, 0, &x0, &y0, &x1, &y1);
+            src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].w = (stbrp_coord)(x1 - x0 + padding + cfg.OversampleH - 1);
+            src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].h = (stbrp_coord)(y1 - y0 + padding + cfg.OversampleV - 1);
+            total_surface += src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].w * src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].h;
+        }
+    }
+
+    // We need a width for the skyline algorithm, any width!
+    // The exact width doesn't really matter much, but some API/GPU have texture size limitations and increasing width can decrease height.
+    // User can override TexDesiredWidth and TexGlyphPadding if they wish, otherwise we use a simple heuristic to select the width based on expected surface.
+    const int surface_sqrt = (int)ImSqrt((float)total_surface) + 1;
+    atlas->TexHeight = 0;
+    if (atlas->TexDesiredWidth > 0)
+        atlas->TexWidth = atlas->TexDesiredWidth;
+    else
+        atlas->TexWidth = (surface_sqrt >= 4096 * 0.7f) ? 4096 : (surface_sqrt >= 2048 * 0.7f) ? 2048 : (surface_sqrt >= 1024 * 0.7f) ? 1024 : 512;
+
+    // 5. Start packing
+    // Pack our extra data rectangles first, so it will be on the upper-left corner of our texture (UV will have small values).
+    const int TEX_HEIGHT_MAX = 1024 * 32;
+    stbtt_pack_context spc = {};
+    stbtt_PackBegin(&spc, NULL, atlas->TexWidth, TEX_HEIGHT_MAX, 0, atlas->TexGlyphPadding, NULL);
+    ImFontAtlasBuildPackCustomRects(atlas, spc.pack_info);
+
+    // 6. Pack each source font. No rendering yet, we are working with rectangles in an infinitely tall texture at this point.
+    for (int src_i = 0; src_i < src_tmp_array.Size; src_i++)
+    {
+        ImFontBuildSrcData& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i];
+        if (src_tmp.GlyphsCount == 0)
+            continue;
+
+        stbrp_pack_rects((stbrp_context*)spc.pack_info, src_tmp.Rects, src_tmp.GlyphsCount);
+
+        // Extend texture height and mark missing glyphs as non-packed so we won't render them.
+        // FIXME: We are not handling packing failure here (would happen if we got off TEX_HEIGHT_MAX or if a single if larger than TexWidth?)
+        for (int glyph_i = 0; glyph_i < src_tmp.GlyphsCount; glyph_i++)
+            if (src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].was_packed)
+                atlas->TexHeight = ImMax(atlas->TexHeight, src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].y + src_tmp.Rects[glyph_i].h);
+    }
+
+    // 7. Allocate texture
+    atlas->TexHeight = (atlas->Flags & ImFontAtlasFlags_NoPowerOfTwoHeight) ? (atlas->TexHeight + 1) : ImUpperPowerOfTwo(atlas->TexHeight);
+    atlas->TexUvScale = ImVec2(1.0f / atlas->TexWidth, 1.0f / atlas->TexHeight);
+    atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8 = (unsigned char*)IM_ALLOC(atlas->TexWidth * atlas->TexHeight);
+    memset(atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8, 0, atlas->TexWidth * atlas->TexHeight);
+    spc.pixels = atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8;
+    spc.height = atlas->TexHeight;
+
+    // 8. Render/rasterize font characters into the texture
+    for (int src_i = 0; src_i < src_tmp_array.Size; src_i++)
+    {
+        ImFontConfig& cfg = atlas->ConfigData[src_i];
+        ImFontBuildSrcData& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i];
+        if (src_tmp.GlyphsCount == 0)
+            continue;
+
+        stbtt_PackFontRangesRenderIntoRects(&spc, &src_tmp.FontInfo, &src_tmp.PackRange, 1, src_tmp.Rects);
+
+        // Apply multiply operator
+        if (cfg.RasterizerMultiply != 1.0f)
+        {
+            unsigned char multiply_table[256];
+            ImFontAtlasBuildMultiplyCalcLookupTable(multiply_table, cfg.RasterizerMultiply);
+            stbrp_rect* r = &src_tmp.Rects[0];
+            for (int glyph_i = 0; glyph_i < src_tmp.GlyphsCount; glyph_i++, r++)
+                if (r->was_packed)
+                    ImFontAtlasBuildMultiplyRectAlpha8(multiply_table, atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8, r->x, r->y, r->w, r->h, atlas->TexWidth * 1);
+        }
+        src_tmp.Rects = NULL;
+    }
+
+    // End packing
+    stbtt_PackEnd(&spc);
+    buf_rects.clear();
+
+    // 9. Setup ImFont and glyphs for runtime
+    for (int src_i = 0; src_i < src_tmp_array.Size; src_i++)
+    {
+        ImFontBuildSrcData& src_tmp = src_tmp_array[src_i];
+        if (src_tmp.GlyphsCount == 0)
+            continue;
+
+        // When merging fonts with MergeMode=true:
+        // - We can have multiple input fonts writing into a same destination font.
+        // - dst_font->ConfigData is != from cfg which is our source configuration.
+        ImFontConfig& cfg = atlas->ConfigData[src_i];
+        ImFont* dst_font = cfg.DstFont;
+
+        const float font_scale = stbtt_ScaleForPixelHeight(&src_tmp.FontInfo, cfg.SizePixels);
+        int unscaled_ascent, unscaled_descent, unscaled_line_gap;
+        stbtt_GetFontVMetrics(&src_tmp.FontInfo, &unscaled_ascent, &unscaled_descent, &unscaled_line_gap);
+
+        const float ascent = ImFloor(unscaled_ascent * font_scale + ((unscaled_ascent > 0.0f) ? +1 : -1));
+        const float descent = ImFloor(unscaled_descent * font_scale + ((unscaled_descent > 0.0f) ? +1 : -1));
+        ImFontAtlasBuildSetupFont(atlas, dst_font, &cfg, ascent, descent);
+        const float font_off_x = cfg.GlyphOffset.x;
+        const float font_off_y = cfg.GlyphOffset.y + IM_ROUND(dst_font->Ascent);
+
+        for (int glyph_i = 0; glyph_i < src_tmp.GlyphsCount; glyph_i++)
+        {
+            // Register glyph
+            const int codepoint = src_tmp.GlyphsList[glyph_i];
+            const stbtt_packedchar& pc = src_tmp.PackedChars[glyph_i];
+            stbtt_aligned_quad q;
+            float unused_x = 0.0f, unused_y = 0.0f;
+            stbtt_GetPackedQuad(src_tmp.PackedChars, atlas->TexWidth, atlas->TexHeight, glyph_i, &unused_x, &unused_y, &q, 0);
+            dst_font->AddGlyph(&cfg, (ImWchar)codepoint, q.x0 + font_off_x, q.y0 + font_off_y, q.x1 + font_off_x, q.y1 + font_off_y, q.s0, q.t0, q.s1, q.t1, pc.xadvance);
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Cleanup
+    src_tmp_array.clear_destruct();
+
+    ImFontAtlasBuildFinish(atlas);
+    return true;
+}
+
+const ImFontBuilderIO* ImFontAtlasGetBuilderForStbTruetype()
+{
+    static ImFontBuilderIO io;
+    io.FontBuilder_Build = ImFontAtlasBuildWithStbTruetype;
+    return &io;
+}
+
+#endif // IMGUI_ENABLE_STB_TRUETYPE
+
+void ImFontAtlasBuildSetupFont(ImFontAtlas* atlas, ImFont* font, ImFontConfig* font_config, float ascent, float descent)
+{
+    if (!font_config->MergeMode)
+    {
+        font->ClearOutputData();
+        font->FontSize = font_config->SizePixels;
+        font->ConfigData = font_config;
+        font->ConfigDataCount = 0;
+        font->ContainerAtlas = atlas;
+        font->Ascent = ascent;
+        font->Descent = descent;
+    }
+    font->ConfigDataCount++;
+}
+
+void ImFontAtlasBuildPackCustomRects(ImFontAtlas* atlas, void* stbrp_context_opaque)
+{
+    stbrp_context* pack_context = (stbrp_context*)stbrp_context_opaque;
+    IM_ASSERT(pack_context != NULL);
+
+    ImVector<ImFontAtlasCustomRect>& user_rects = atlas->CustomRects;
+    IM_ASSERT(user_rects.Size >= 1); // We expect at least the default custom rects to be registered, else something went wrong.
+
+    ImVector<stbrp_rect> pack_rects;
+    pack_rects.resize(user_rects.Size);
+    memset(pack_rects.Data, 0, (size_t)pack_rects.size_in_bytes());
+    for (int i = 0; i < user_rects.Size; i++)
+    {
+        pack_rects[i].w = user_rects[i].Width;
+        pack_rects[i].h = user_rects[i].Height;
+    }
+    stbrp_pack_rects(pack_context, &pack_rects[0], pack_rects.Size);
+    for (int i = 0; i < pack_rects.Size; i++)
+        if (pack_rects[i].was_packed)
+        {
+            user_rects[i].X = (unsigned short)pack_rects[i].x;
+            user_rects[i].Y = (unsigned short)pack_rects[i].y;
+            IM_ASSERT(pack_rects[i].w == user_rects[i].Width && pack_rects[i].h == user_rects[i].Height);
+            atlas->TexHeight = ImMax(atlas->TexHeight, pack_rects[i].y + pack_rects[i].h);
+        }
+}
+
+void ImFontAtlasBuildRender8bppRectFromString(ImFontAtlas* atlas, int x, int y, int w, int h, const char* in_str, char in_marker_char, unsigned char in_marker_pixel_value)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(x >= 0 && x + w <= atlas->TexWidth);
+    IM_ASSERT(y >= 0 && y + h <= atlas->TexHeight);
+    unsigned char* out_pixel = atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8 + x + (y * atlas->TexWidth);
+    for (int off_y = 0; off_y < h; off_y++, out_pixel += atlas->TexWidth, in_str += w)
+        for (int off_x = 0; off_x < w; off_x++)
+            out_pixel[off_x] = (in_str[off_x] == in_marker_char) ? in_marker_pixel_value : 0x00;
+}
+
+void ImFontAtlasBuildRender32bppRectFromString(ImFontAtlas* atlas, int x, int y, int w, int h, const char* in_str, char in_marker_char, unsigned int in_marker_pixel_value)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(x >= 0 && x + w <= atlas->TexWidth);
+    IM_ASSERT(y >= 0 && y + h <= atlas->TexHeight);
+    unsigned int* out_pixel = atlas->TexPixelsRGBA32 + x + (y * atlas->TexWidth);
+    for (int off_y = 0; off_y < h; off_y++, out_pixel += atlas->TexWidth, in_str += w)
+        for (int off_x = 0; off_x < w; off_x++)
+            out_pixel[off_x] = (in_str[off_x] == in_marker_char) ? in_marker_pixel_value : IM_COL32_BLACK_TRANS;
+}
+
+static void ImFontAtlasBuildRenderDefaultTexData(ImFontAtlas* atlas)
+{
+    ImFontAtlasCustomRect* r = atlas->GetCustomRectByIndex(atlas->PackIdMouseCursors);
+    IM_ASSERT(r->IsPacked());
+
+    const int w = atlas->TexWidth;
+    if (!(atlas->Flags & ImFontAtlasFlags_NoMouseCursors))
+    {
+        // Render/copy pixels
+        IM_ASSERT(r->Width == FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_W * 2 + 1 && r->Height == FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_H);
+        const int x_for_white = r->X;
+        const int x_for_black = r->X + FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_W + 1;
+        if (atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8 != NULL)
+        {
+            ImFontAtlasBuildRender8bppRectFromString(atlas, x_for_white, r->Y, FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_W, FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_H, FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_PIXELS, '.', 0xFF);
+            ImFontAtlasBuildRender8bppRectFromString(atlas, x_for_black, r->Y, FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_W, FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_H, FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_PIXELS, 'X', 0xFF);
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            ImFontAtlasBuildRender32bppRectFromString(atlas, x_for_white, r->Y, FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_W, FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_H, FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_PIXELS, '.', IM_COL32_WHITE);
+            ImFontAtlasBuildRender32bppRectFromString(atlas, x_for_black, r->Y, FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_W, FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_H, FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_PIXELS, 'X', IM_COL32_WHITE);
+        }
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Render 4 white pixels
+        IM_ASSERT(r->Width == 2 && r->Height == 2);
+        const int offset = (int)r->X + (int)r->Y * w;
+        if (atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8 != NULL)
+        {
+            atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8[offset] = atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8[offset + 1] = atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8[offset + w] = atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8[offset + w + 1] = 0xFF;
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            atlas->TexPixelsRGBA32[offset] = atlas->TexPixelsRGBA32[offset + 1] = atlas->TexPixelsRGBA32[offset + w] = atlas->TexPixelsRGBA32[offset + w + 1] = IM_COL32_WHITE;
+        }
+    }
+    atlas->TexUvWhitePixel = ImVec2((r->X + 0.5f) * atlas->TexUvScale.x, (r->Y + 0.5f) * atlas->TexUvScale.y);
+}
+
+static void ImFontAtlasBuildRenderLinesTexData(ImFontAtlas* atlas)
+{
+    if (atlas->Flags & ImFontAtlasFlags_NoBakedLines)
+        return;
+
+    // This generates a triangular shape in the texture, with the various line widths stacked on top of each other to allow interpolation between them
+    ImFontAtlasCustomRect* r = atlas->GetCustomRectByIndex(atlas->PackIdLines);
+    IM_ASSERT(r->IsPacked());
+    for (unsigned int n = 0; n < IM_DRAWLIST_TEX_LINES_WIDTH_MAX + 1; n++) // +1 because of the zero-width row
+    {
+        // Each line consists of at least two empty pixels at the ends, with a line of solid pixels in the middle
+        unsigned int y = n;
+        unsigned int line_width = n;
+        unsigned int pad_left = (r->Width - line_width) / 2;
+        unsigned int pad_right = r->Width - (pad_left + line_width);
+
+        // Write each slice
+        IM_ASSERT(pad_left + line_width + pad_right == r->Width && y < r->Height); // Make sure we're inside the texture bounds before we start writing pixels
+        if (atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8 != NULL)
+        {
+            unsigned char* write_ptr = &atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8[r->X + ((r->Y + y) * atlas->TexWidth)];
+            for (unsigned int i = 0; i < pad_left; i++)
+                *(write_ptr + i) = 0x00;
+
+            for (unsigned int i = 0; i < line_width; i++)
+                *(write_ptr + pad_left + i) = 0xFF;
+
+            for (unsigned int i = 0; i < pad_right; i++)
+                *(write_ptr + pad_left + line_width + i) = 0x00;
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            unsigned int* write_ptr = &atlas->TexPixelsRGBA32[r->X + ((r->Y + y) * atlas->TexWidth)];
+            for (unsigned int i = 0; i < pad_left; i++)
+                *(write_ptr + i) = IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 0);
+
+            for (unsigned int i = 0; i < line_width; i++)
+                *(write_ptr + pad_left + i) = IM_COL32_WHITE;
+
+            for (unsigned int i = 0; i < pad_right; i++)
+                *(write_ptr + pad_left + line_width + i) = IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 0);
+        }
+
+        // Calculate UVs for this line
+        ImVec2 uv0 = ImVec2((float)(r->X + pad_left - 1), (float)(r->Y + y)) * atlas->TexUvScale;
+        ImVec2 uv1 = ImVec2((float)(r->X + pad_left + line_width + 1), (float)(r->Y + y + 1)) * atlas->TexUvScale;
+        float half_v = (uv0.y + uv1.y) * 0.5f; // Calculate a constant V in the middle of the row to avoid sampling artifacts
+        atlas->TexUvLines[n] = ImVec4(uv0.x, half_v, uv1.x, half_v);
+    }
+}
+
+// Note: this is called / shared by both the stb_truetype and the FreeType builder
+void ImFontAtlasBuildInit(ImFontAtlas* atlas)
+{
+    // Register texture region for mouse cursors or standard white pixels
+    if (atlas->PackIdMouseCursors < 0)
+    {
+        if (!(atlas->Flags & ImFontAtlasFlags_NoMouseCursors))
+            atlas->PackIdMouseCursors = atlas->AddCustomRectRegular(FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_W * 2 + 1, FONT_ATLAS_DEFAULT_TEX_DATA_H);
+        else
+            atlas->PackIdMouseCursors = atlas->AddCustomRectRegular(2, 2);
+    }
+
+    // Register texture region for thick lines
+    // The +2 here is to give space for the end caps, whilst height +1 is to accommodate the fact we have a zero-width row
+    if (atlas->PackIdLines < 0)
+    {
+        if (!(atlas->Flags & ImFontAtlasFlags_NoBakedLines))
+            atlas->PackIdLines = atlas->AddCustomRectRegular(IM_DRAWLIST_TEX_LINES_WIDTH_MAX + 2, IM_DRAWLIST_TEX_LINES_WIDTH_MAX + 1);
+    }
+}
+
+// This is called/shared by both the stb_truetype and the FreeType builder.
+void ImFontAtlasBuildFinish(ImFontAtlas* atlas)
+{
+    // Render into our custom data blocks
+    IM_ASSERT(atlas->TexPixelsAlpha8 != NULL || atlas->TexPixelsRGBA32 != NULL);
+    ImFontAtlasBuildRenderDefaultTexData(atlas);
+    ImFontAtlasBuildRenderLinesTexData(atlas);
+
+    // Register custom rectangle glyphs
+    for (int i = 0; i < atlas->CustomRects.Size; i++)
+    {
+        const ImFontAtlasCustomRect* r = &atlas->CustomRects[i];
+        if (r->Font == NULL || r->GlyphID == 0)
+            continue;
+
+        // Will ignore ImFontConfig settings: GlyphMinAdvanceX, GlyphMinAdvanceY, GlyphExtraSpacing, PixelSnapH
+        IM_ASSERT(r->Font->ContainerAtlas == atlas);
+        ImVec2 uv0, uv1;
+        atlas->CalcCustomRectUV(r, &uv0, &uv1);
+        r->Font->AddGlyph(NULL, (ImWchar)r->GlyphID, r->GlyphOffset.x, r->GlyphOffset.y, r->GlyphOffset.x + r->Width, r->GlyphOffset.y + r->Height, uv0.x, uv0.y, uv1.x, uv1.y, r->GlyphAdvanceX);
+    }
+
+    // Build all fonts lookup tables
+    for (int i = 0; i < atlas->Fonts.Size; i++)
+        if (atlas->Fonts[i]->DirtyLookupTables)
+            atlas->Fonts[i]->BuildLookupTable();
+
+    atlas->TexReady = true;
+}
+
+// Retrieve list of range (2 int per range, values are inclusive)
+const ImWchar*   ImFontAtlas::GetGlyphRangesDefault()
+{
+    static const ImWchar ranges[] =
+    {
+        0x0020, 0x00FF, // Basic Latin + Latin Supplement
+        0,
+    };
+    return &ranges[0];
+}
+
+const ImWchar*  ImFontAtlas::GetGlyphRangesKorean()
+{
+    static const ImWchar ranges[] =
+    {
+        0x0020, 0x00FF, // Basic Latin + Latin Supplement
+        0x3131, 0x3163, // Korean alphabets
+        0xAC00, 0xD7A3, // Korean characters
+        0xFFFD, 0xFFFD, // Invalid
+        0,
+    };
+    return &ranges[0];
+}
+
+const ImWchar*  ImFontAtlas::GetGlyphRangesChineseFull()
+{
+    static const ImWchar ranges[] =
+    {
+        0x0020, 0x00FF, // Basic Latin + Latin Supplement
+        0x2000, 0x206F, // General Punctuation
+        0x3000, 0x30FF, // CJK Symbols and Punctuations, Hiragana, Katakana
+        0x31F0, 0x31FF, // Katakana Phonetic Extensions
+        0xFF00, 0xFFEF, // Half-width characters
+        0xFFFD, 0xFFFD, // Invalid
+        0x4e00, 0x9FAF, // CJK Ideograms
+        0,
+    };
+    return &ranges[0];
+}
+
+static void UnpackAccumulativeOffsetsIntoRanges(int base_codepoint, const short* accumulative_offsets, int accumulative_offsets_count, ImWchar* out_ranges)
+{
+    for (int n = 0; n < accumulative_offsets_count; n++, out_ranges += 2)
+    {
+        out_ranges[0] = out_ranges[1] = (ImWchar)(base_codepoint + accumulative_offsets[n]);
+        base_codepoint += accumulative_offsets[n];
+    }
+    out_ranges[0] = 0;
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] ImFontAtlas glyph ranges helpers
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+const ImWchar*  ImFontAtlas::GetGlyphRangesChineseSimplifiedCommon()
+{
+    // Store 2500 regularly used characters for Simplified Chinese.
+    // Sourced from https://zh.wiktionary.org/wiki/%E9%99%84%E5%BD%95:%E7%8E%B0%E4%BB%A3%E6%B1%89%E8%AF%AD%E5%B8%B8%E7%94%A8%E5%AD%97%E8%A1%A8
+    // This table covers 97.97% of all characters used during the month in July, 1987.
+    // You can use ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder to create your own ranges derived from this, by merging existing ranges or adding new characters.
+    // (Stored as accumulative offsets from the initial unicode codepoint 0x4E00. This encoding is designed to helps us compact the source code size.)
+    static const short accumulative_offsets_from_0x4E00[] =
+    {
+        0,1,2,4,1,1,1,1,2,1,3,2,1,2,2,1,1,1,1,1,5,2,1,2,3,3,3,2,2,4,1,1,1,2,1,5,2,3,1,2,1,2,1,1,2,1,1,2,2,1,4,1,1,1,1,5,10,1,2,19,2,1,2,1,2,1,2,1,2,
+        1,5,1,6,3,2,1,2,2,1,1,1,4,8,5,1,1,4,1,1,3,1,2,1,5,1,2,1,1,1,10,1,1,5,2,4,6,1,4,2,2,2,12,2,1,1,6,1,1,1,4,1,1,4,6,5,1,4,2,2,4,10,7,1,1,4,2,4,
+        2,1,4,3,6,10,12,5,7,2,14,2,9,1,1,6,7,10,4,7,13,1,5,4,8,4,1,1,2,28,5,6,1,1,5,2,5,20,2,2,9,8,11,2,9,17,1,8,6,8,27,4,6,9,20,11,27,6,68,2,2,1,1,
+        1,2,1,2,2,7,6,11,3,3,1,1,3,1,2,1,1,1,1,1,3,1,1,8,3,4,1,5,7,2,1,4,4,8,4,2,1,2,1,1,4,5,6,3,6,2,12,3,1,3,9,2,4,3,4,1,5,3,3,1,3,7,1,5,1,1,1,1,2,
+        3,4,5,2,3,2,6,1,1,2,1,7,1,7,3,4,5,15,2,2,1,5,3,22,19,2,1,1,1,1,2,5,1,1,1,6,1,1,12,8,2,9,18,22,4,1,1,5,1,16,1,2,7,10,15,1,1,6,2,4,1,2,4,1,6,
+        1,1,3,2,4,1,6,4,5,1,2,1,1,2,1,10,3,1,3,2,1,9,3,2,5,7,2,19,4,3,6,1,1,1,1,1,4,3,2,1,1,1,2,5,3,1,1,1,2,2,1,1,2,1,1,2,1,3,1,1,1,3,7,1,4,1,1,2,1,
+        1,2,1,2,4,4,3,8,1,1,1,2,1,3,5,1,3,1,3,4,6,2,2,14,4,6,6,11,9,1,15,3,1,28,5,2,5,5,3,1,3,4,5,4,6,14,3,2,3,5,21,2,7,20,10,1,2,19,2,4,28,28,2,3,
+        2,1,14,4,1,26,28,42,12,40,3,52,79,5,14,17,3,2,2,11,3,4,6,3,1,8,2,23,4,5,8,10,4,2,7,3,5,1,1,6,3,1,2,2,2,5,28,1,1,7,7,20,5,3,29,3,17,26,1,8,4,
+        27,3,6,11,23,5,3,4,6,13,24,16,6,5,10,25,35,7,3,2,3,3,14,3,6,2,6,1,4,2,3,8,2,1,1,3,3,3,4,1,1,13,2,2,4,5,2,1,14,14,1,2,2,1,4,5,2,3,1,14,3,12,
+        3,17,2,16,5,1,2,1,8,9,3,19,4,2,2,4,17,25,21,20,28,75,1,10,29,103,4,1,2,1,1,4,2,4,1,2,3,24,2,2,2,1,1,2,1,3,8,1,1,1,2,1,1,3,1,1,1,6,1,5,3,1,1,
+        1,3,4,1,1,5,2,1,5,6,13,9,16,1,1,1,1,3,2,3,2,4,5,2,5,2,2,3,7,13,7,2,2,1,1,1,1,2,3,3,2,1,6,4,9,2,1,14,2,14,2,1,18,3,4,14,4,11,41,15,23,15,23,
+        176,1,3,4,1,1,1,1,5,3,1,2,3,7,3,1,1,2,1,2,4,4,6,2,4,1,9,7,1,10,5,8,16,29,1,1,2,2,3,1,3,5,2,4,5,4,1,1,2,2,3,3,7,1,6,10,1,17,1,44,4,6,2,1,1,6,
+        5,4,2,10,1,6,9,2,8,1,24,1,2,13,7,8,8,2,1,4,1,3,1,3,3,5,2,5,10,9,4,9,12,2,1,6,1,10,1,1,7,7,4,10,8,3,1,13,4,3,1,6,1,3,5,2,1,2,17,16,5,2,16,6,
+        1,4,2,1,3,3,6,8,5,11,11,1,3,3,2,4,6,10,9,5,7,4,7,4,7,1,1,4,2,1,3,6,8,7,1,6,11,5,5,3,24,9,4,2,7,13,5,1,8,82,16,61,1,1,1,4,2,2,16,10,3,8,1,1,
+        6,4,2,1,3,1,1,1,4,3,8,4,2,2,1,1,1,1,1,6,3,5,1,1,4,6,9,2,1,1,1,2,1,7,2,1,6,1,5,4,4,3,1,8,1,3,3,1,3,2,2,2,2,3,1,6,1,2,1,2,1,3,7,1,8,2,1,2,1,5,
+        2,5,3,5,10,1,2,1,1,3,2,5,11,3,9,3,5,1,1,5,9,1,2,1,5,7,9,9,8,1,3,3,3,6,8,2,3,2,1,1,32,6,1,2,15,9,3,7,13,1,3,10,13,2,14,1,13,10,2,1,3,10,4,15,
+        2,15,15,10,1,3,9,6,9,32,25,26,47,7,3,2,3,1,6,3,4,3,2,8,5,4,1,9,4,2,2,19,10,6,2,3,8,1,2,2,4,2,1,9,4,4,4,6,4,8,9,2,3,1,1,1,1,3,5,5,1,3,8,4,6,
+        2,1,4,12,1,5,3,7,13,2,5,8,1,6,1,2,5,14,6,1,5,2,4,8,15,5,1,23,6,62,2,10,1,1,8,1,2,2,10,4,2,2,9,2,1,1,3,2,3,1,5,3,3,2,1,3,8,1,1,1,11,3,1,1,4,
+        3,7,1,14,1,2,3,12,5,2,5,1,6,7,5,7,14,11,1,3,1,8,9,12,2,1,11,8,4,4,2,6,10,9,13,1,1,3,1,5,1,3,2,4,4,1,18,2,3,14,11,4,29,4,2,7,1,3,13,9,2,2,5,
+        3,5,20,7,16,8,5,72,34,6,4,22,12,12,28,45,36,9,7,39,9,191,1,1,1,4,11,8,4,9,2,3,22,1,1,1,1,4,17,1,7,7,1,11,31,10,2,4,8,2,3,2,1,4,2,16,4,32,2,
+        3,19,13,4,9,1,5,2,14,8,1,1,3,6,19,6,5,1,16,6,2,10,8,5,1,2,3,1,5,5,1,11,6,6,1,3,3,2,6,3,8,1,1,4,10,7,5,7,7,5,8,9,2,1,3,4,1,1,3,1,3,3,2,6,16,
+        1,4,6,3,1,10,6,1,3,15,2,9,2,10,25,13,9,16,6,2,2,10,11,4,3,9,1,2,6,6,5,4,30,40,1,10,7,12,14,33,6,3,6,7,3,1,3,1,11,14,4,9,5,12,11,49,18,51,31,
+        140,31,2,2,1,5,1,8,1,10,1,4,4,3,24,1,10,1,3,6,6,16,3,4,5,2,1,4,2,57,10,6,22,2,22,3,7,22,6,10,11,36,18,16,33,36,2,5,5,1,1,1,4,10,1,4,13,2,7,
+        5,2,9,3,4,1,7,43,3,7,3,9,14,7,9,1,11,1,1,3,7,4,18,13,1,14,1,3,6,10,73,2,2,30,6,1,11,18,19,13,22,3,46,42,37,89,7,3,16,34,2,2,3,9,1,7,1,1,1,2,
+        2,4,10,7,3,10,3,9,5,28,9,2,6,13,7,3,1,3,10,2,7,2,11,3,6,21,54,85,2,1,4,2,2,1,39,3,21,2,2,5,1,1,1,4,1,1,3,4,15,1,3,2,4,4,2,3,8,2,20,1,8,7,13,
+        4,1,26,6,2,9,34,4,21,52,10,4,4,1,5,12,2,11,1,7,2,30,12,44,2,30,1,1,3,6,16,9,17,39,82,2,2,24,7,1,7,3,16,9,14,44,2,1,2,1,2,3,5,2,4,1,6,7,5,3,
+        2,6,1,11,5,11,2,1,18,19,8,1,3,24,29,2,1,3,5,2,2,1,13,6,5,1,46,11,3,5,1,1,5,8,2,10,6,12,6,3,7,11,2,4,16,13,2,5,1,1,2,2,5,2,28,5,2,23,10,8,4,
+        4,22,39,95,38,8,14,9,5,1,13,5,4,3,13,12,11,1,9,1,27,37,2,5,4,4,63,211,95,2,2,2,1,3,5,2,1,1,2,2,1,1,1,3,2,4,1,2,1,1,5,2,2,1,1,2,3,1,3,1,1,1,
+        3,1,4,2,1,3,6,1,1,3,7,15,5,3,2,5,3,9,11,4,2,22,1,6,3,8,7,1,4,28,4,16,3,3,25,4,4,27,27,1,4,1,2,2,7,1,3,5,2,28,8,2,14,1,8,6,16,25,3,3,3,14,3,
+        3,1,1,2,1,4,6,3,8,4,1,1,1,2,3,6,10,6,2,3,18,3,2,5,5,4,3,1,5,2,5,4,23,7,6,12,6,4,17,11,9,5,1,1,10,5,12,1,1,11,26,33,7,3,6,1,17,7,1,5,12,1,11,
+        2,4,1,8,14,17,23,1,2,1,7,8,16,11,9,6,5,2,6,4,16,2,8,14,1,11,8,9,1,1,1,9,25,4,11,19,7,2,15,2,12,8,52,7,5,19,2,16,4,36,8,1,16,8,24,26,4,6,2,9,
+        5,4,36,3,28,12,25,15,37,27,17,12,59,38,5,32,127,1,2,9,17,14,4,1,2,1,1,8,11,50,4,14,2,19,16,4,17,5,4,5,26,12,45,2,23,45,104,30,12,8,3,10,2,2,
+        3,3,1,4,20,7,2,9,6,15,2,20,1,3,16,4,11,15,6,134,2,5,59,1,2,2,2,1,9,17,3,26,137,10,211,59,1,2,4,1,4,1,1,1,2,6,2,3,1,1,2,3,2,3,1,3,4,4,2,3,3,
+        1,4,3,1,7,2,2,3,1,2,1,3,3,3,2,2,3,2,1,3,14,6,1,3,2,9,6,15,27,9,34,145,1,1,2,1,1,1,1,2,1,1,1,1,2,2,2,3,1,2,1,1,1,2,3,5,8,3,5,2,4,1,3,2,2,2,12,
+        4,1,1,1,10,4,5,1,20,4,16,1,15,9,5,12,2,9,2,5,4,2,26,19,7,1,26,4,30,12,15,42,1,6,8,172,1,1,4,2,1,1,11,2,2,4,2,1,2,1,10,8,1,2,1,4,5,1,2,5,1,8,
+        4,1,3,4,2,1,6,2,1,3,4,1,2,1,1,1,1,12,5,7,2,4,3,1,1,1,3,3,6,1,2,2,3,3,3,2,1,2,12,14,11,6,6,4,12,2,8,1,7,10,1,35,7,4,13,15,4,3,23,21,28,52,5,
+        26,5,6,1,7,10,2,7,53,3,2,1,1,1,2,163,532,1,10,11,1,3,3,4,8,2,8,6,2,2,23,22,4,2,2,4,2,1,3,1,3,3,5,9,8,2,1,2,8,1,10,2,12,21,20,15,105,2,3,1,1,
+        3,2,3,1,1,2,5,1,4,15,11,19,1,1,1,1,5,4,5,1,1,2,5,3,5,12,1,2,5,1,11,1,1,15,9,1,4,5,3,26,8,2,1,3,1,1,15,19,2,12,1,2,5,2,7,2,19,2,20,6,26,7,5,
+        2,2,7,34,21,13,70,2,128,1,1,2,1,1,2,1,1,3,2,2,2,15,1,4,1,3,4,42,10,6,1,49,85,8,1,2,1,1,4,4,2,3,6,1,5,7,4,3,211,4,1,2,1,2,5,1,2,4,2,2,6,5,6,
+        10,3,4,48,100,6,2,16,296,5,27,387,2,2,3,7,16,8,5,38,15,39,21,9,10,3,7,59,13,27,21,47,5,21,6
+    };
+    static ImWchar base_ranges[] = // not zero-terminated
+    {
+        0x0020, 0x00FF, // Basic Latin + Latin Supplement
+        0x2000, 0x206F, // General Punctuation
+        0x3000, 0x30FF, // CJK Symbols and Punctuations, Hiragana, Katakana
+        0x31F0, 0x31FF, // Katakana Phonetic Extensions
+        0xFF00, 0xFFEF, // Half-width characters
+        0xFFFD, 0xFFFD  // Invalid
+    };
+    static ImWchar full_ranges[IM_ARRAYSIZE(base_ranges) + IM_ARRAYSIZE(accumulative_offsets_from_0x4E00) * 2 + 1] = { 0 };
+    if (!full_ranges[0])
+    {
+        memcpy(full_ranges, base_ranges, sizeof(base_ranges));
+        UnpackAccumulativeOffsetsIntoRanges(0x4E00, accumulative_offsets_from_0x4E00, IM_ARRAYSIZE(accumulative_offsets_from_0x4E00), full_ranges + IM_ARRAYSIZE(base_ranges));
+    }
+    return &full_ranges[0];
+}
+
+const ImWchar*  ImFontAtlas::GetGlyphRangesJapanese()
+{
+    // 2999 ideograms code points for Japanese
+    // - 2136 Joyo (meaning "for regular use" or "for common use") Kanji code points
+    // - 863 Jinmeiyo (meaning "for personal name") Kanji code points
+    // - Sourced from the character information database of the Information-technology Promotion Agency, Japan
+    //   - https://mojikiban.ipa.go.jp/mji/
+    //   - Available under the terms of the Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 2.1 Japan (CC BY-SA 2.1 JP).
+    //     - https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/2.1/jp/deed.en
+    //     - https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/2.1/jp/legalcode
+    //   - You can generate this code by the script at:
+    //     - https://github.com/vaiorabbit/everyday_use_kanji
+    // - References:
+    //   - List of Joyo Kanji
+    //     - (Official list by the Agency for Cultural Affairs) https://www.bunka.go.jp/kokugo_nihongo/sisaku/joho/joho/kakuki/14/tosin02/index.html
+    //     - (Wikipedia) https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_j%C5%8Dy%C5%8D_kanji
+    //   - List of Jinmeiyo Kanji
+    //     - (Official list by the Ministry of Justice) http://www.moj.go.jp/MINJI/minji86.html
+    //     - (Wikipedia) https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Jinmeiy%C5%8D_kanji
+    // - Missing 1 Joyo Kanji: U+20B9F (Kun'yomi: Shikaru, On'yomi: Shitsu,shichi), see https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/pull/3627 for details.
+    // You can use ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder to create your own ranges derived from this, by merging existing ranges or adding new characters.
+    // (Stored as accumulative offsets from the initial unicode codepoint 0x4E00. This encoding is designed to helps us compact the source code size.)
+    static const short accumulative_offsets_from_0x4E00[] =
+    {
+        0,1,2,4,1,1,1,1,2,1,3,3,2,2,1,5,3,5,7,5,6,1,2,1,7,2,6,3,1,8,1,1,4,1,1,18,2,11,2,6,2,1,2,1,5,1,2,1,3,1,2,1,2,3,3,1,1,2,3,1,1,1,12,7,9,1,4,5,1,
+        1,2,1,10,1,1,9,2,2,4,5,6,9,3,1,1,1,1,9,3,18,5,2,2,2,2,1,6,3,7,1,1,1,1,2,2,4,2,1,23,2,10,4,3,5,2,4,10,2,4,13,1,6,1,9,3,1,1,6,6,7,6,3,1,2,11,3,
+        2,2,3,2,15,2,2,5,4,3,6,4,1,2,5,2,12,16,6,13,9,13,2,1,1,7,16,4,7,1,19,1,5,1,2,2,7,7,8,2,6,5,4,9,18,7,4,5,9,13,11,8,15,2,1,1,1,2,1,2,2,1,2,2,8,
+        2,9,3,3,1,1,4,4,1,1,1,4,9,1,4,3,5,5,2,7,5,3,4,8,2,1,13,2,3,3,1,14,1,1,4,5,1,3,6,1,5,2,1,1,3,3,3,3,1,1,2,7,6,6,7,1,4,7,6,1,1,1,1,1,12,3,3,9,5,
+        2,6,1,5,6,1,2,3,18,2,4,14,4,1,3,6,1,1,6,3,5,5,3,2,2,2,2,12,3,1,4,2,3,2,3,11,1,7,4,1,2,1,3,17,1,9,1,24,1,1,4,2,2,4,1,2,7,1,1,1,3,1,2,2,4,15,1,
+        1,2,1,1,2,1,5,2,5,20,2,5,9,1,10,8,7,6,1,1,1,1,1,1,6,2,1,2,8,1,1,1,1,5,1,1,3,1,1,1,1,3,1,1,12,4,1,3,1,1,1,1,1,10,3,1,7,5,13,1,2,3,4,6,1,1,30,
+        2,9,9,1,15,38,11,3,1,8,24,7,1,9,8,10,2,1,9,31,2,13,6,2,9,4,49,5,2,15,2,1,10,2,1,1,1,2,2,6,15,30,35,3,14,18,8,1,16,10,28,12,19,45,38,1,3,2,3,
+        13,2,1,7,3,6,5,3,4,3,1,5,7,8,1,5,3,18,5,3,6,1,21,4,24,9,24,40,3,14,3,21,3,2,1,2,4,2,3,1,15,15,6,5,1,1,3,1,5,6,1,9,7,3,3,2,1,4,3,8,21,5,16,4,
+        5,2,10,11,11,3,6,3,2,9,3,6,13,1,2,1,1,1,1,11,12,6,6,1,4,2,6,5,2,1,1,3,3,6,13,3,1,1,5,1,2,3,3,14,2,1,2,2,2,5,1,9,5,1,1,6,12,3,12,3,4,13,2,14,
+        2,8,1,17,5,1,16,4,2,2,21,8,9,6,23,20,12,25,19,9,38,8,3,21,40,25,33,13,4,3,1,4,1,2,4,1,2,5,26,2,1,1,2,1,3,6,2,1,1,1,1,1,1,2,3,1,1,1,9,2,3,1,1,
+        1,3,6,3,2,1,1,6,6,1,8,2,2,2,1,4,1,2,3,2,7,3,2,4,1,2,1,2,2,1,1,1,1,1,3,1,2,5,4,10,9,4,9,1,1,1,1,1,1,5,3,2,1,6,4,9,6,1,10,2,31,17,8,3,7,5,40,1,
+        7,7,1,6,5,2,10,7,8,4,15,39,25,6,28,47,18,10,7,1,3,1,1,2,1,1,1,3,3,3,1,1,1,3,4,2,1,4,1,3,6,10,7,8,6,2,2,1,3,3,2,5,8,7,9,12,2,15,1,1,4,1,2,1,1,
+        1,3,2,1,3,3,5,6,2,3,2,10,1,4,2,8,1,1,1,11,6,1,21,4,16,3,1,3,1,4,2,3,6,5,1,3,1,1,3,3,4,6,1,1,10,4,2,7,10,4,7,4,2,9,4,3,1,1,1,4,1,8,3,4,1,3,1,
+        6,1,4,2,1,4,7,2,1,8,1,4,5,1,1,2,2,4,6,2,7,1,10,1,1,3,4,11,10,8,21,4,6,1,3,5,2,1,2,28,5,5,2,3,13,1,2,3,1,4,2,1,5,20,3,8,11,1,3,3,3,1,8,10,9,2,
+        10,9,2,3,1,1,2,4,1,8,3,6,1,7,8,6,11,1,4,29,8,4,3,1,2,7,13,1,4,1,6,2,6,12,12,2,20,3,2,3,6,4,8,9,2,7,34,5,1,18,6,1,1,4,4,5,7,9,1,2,2,4,3,4,1,7,
+        2,2,2,6,2,3,25,5,3,6,1,4,6,7,4,2,1,4,2,13,6,4,4,3,1,5,3,4,4,3,2,1,1,4,1,2,1,1,3,1,11,1,6,3,1,7,3,6,2,8,8,6,9,3,4,11,3,2,10,12,2,5,11,1,6,4,5,
+        3,1,8,5,4,6,6,3,5,1,1,3,2,1,2,2,6,17,12,1,10,1,6,12,1,6,6,19,9,6,16,1,13,4,4,15,7,17,6,11,9,15,12,6,7,2,1,2,2,15,9,3,21,4,6,49,18,7,3,2,3,1,
+        6,8,2,2,6,2,9,1,3,6,4,4,1,2,16,2,5,2,1,6,2,3,5,3,1,2,5,1,2,1,9,3,1,8,6,4,8,11,3,1,1,1,1,3,1,13,8,4,1,3,2,2,1,4,1,11,1,5,2,1,5,2,5,8,6,1,1,7,
+        4,3,8,3,2,7,2,1,5,1,5,2,4,7,6,2,8,5,1,11,4,5,3,6,18,1,2,13,3,3,1,21,1,1,4,1,4,1,1,1,8,1,2,2,7,1,2,4,2,2,9,2,1,1,1,4,3,6,3,12,5,1,1,1,5,6,3,2,
+        4,8,2,2,4,2,7,1,8,9,5,2,3,2,1,3,2,13,7,14,6,5,1,1,2,1,4,2,23,2,1,1,6,3,1,4,1,15,3,1,7,3,9,14,1,3,1,4,1,1,5,8,1,3,8,3,8,15,11,4,14,4,4,2,5,5,
+        1,7,1,6,14,7,7,8,5,15,4,8,6,5,6,2,1,13,1,20,15,11,9,2,5,6,2,11,2,6,2,5,1,5,8,4,13,19,25,4,1,1,11,1,34,2,5,9,14,6,2,2,6,1,1,14,1,3,14,13,1,6,
+        12,21,14,14,6,32,17,8,32,9,28,1,2,4,11,8,3,1,14,2,5,15,1,1,1,1,3,6,4,1,3,4,11,3,1,1,11,30,1,5,1,4,1,5,8,1,1,3,2,4,3,17,35,2,6,12,17,3,1,6,2,
+        1,1,12,2,7,3,3,2,1,16,2,8,3,6,5,4,7,3,3,8,1,9,8,5,1,2,1,3,2,8,1,2,9,12,1,1,2,3,8,3,24,12,4,3,7,5,8,3,3,3,3,3,3,1,23,10,3,1,2,2,6,3,1,16,1,16,
+        22,3,10,4,11,6,9,7,7,3,6,2,2,2,4,10,2,1,1,2,8,7,1,6,4,1,3,3,3,5,10,12,12,2,3,12,8,15,1,1,16,6,6,1,5,9,11,4,11,4,2,6,12,1,17,5,13,1,4,9,5,1,11,
+        2,1,8,1,5,7,28,8,3,5,10,2,17,3,38,22,1,2,18,12,10,4,38,18,1,4,44,19,4,1,8,4,1,12,1,4,31,12,1,14,7,75,7,5,10,6,6,13,3,2,11,11,3,2,5,28,15,6,18,
+        18,5,6,4,3,16,1,7,18,7,36,3,5,3,1,7,1,9,1,10,7,2,4,2,6,2,9,7,4,3,32,12,3,7,10,2,23,16,3,1,12,3,31,4,11,1,3,8,9,5,1,30,15,6,12,3,2,2,11,19,9,
+        14,2,6,2,3,19,13,17,5,3,3,25,3,14,1,1,1,36,1,3,2,19,3,13,36,9,13,31,6,4,16,34,2,5,4,2,3,3,5,1,1,1,4,3,1,17,3,2,3,5,3,1,3,2,3,5,6,3,12,11,1,3,
+        1,2,26,7,12,7,2,14,3,3,7,7,11,25,25,28,16,4,36,1,2,1,6,2,1,9,3,27,17,4,3,4,13,4,1,3,2,2,1,10,4,2,4,6,3,8,2,1,18,1,1,24,2,2,4,33,2,3,63,7,1,6,
+        40,7,3,4,4,2,4,15,18,1,16,1,1,11,2,41,14,1,3,18,13,3,2,4,16,2,17,7,15,24,7,18,13,44,2,2,3,6,1,1,7,5,1,7,1,4,3,3,5,10,8,2,3,1,8,1,1,27,4,2,1,
+        12,1,2,1,10,6,1,6,7,5,2,3,7,11,5,11,3,6,6,2,3,15,4,9,1,1,2,1,2,11,2,8,12,8,5,4,2,3,1,5,2,2,1,14,1,12,11,4,1,11,17,17,4,3,2,5,5,7,3,1,5,9,9,8,
+        2,5,6,6,13,13,2,1,2,6,1,2,2,49,4,9,1,2,10,16,7,8,4,3,2,23,4,58,3,29,1,14,19,19,11,11,2,7,5,1,3,4,6,2,18,5,12,12,17,17,3,3,2,4,1,6,2,3,4,3,1,
+        1,1,1,5,1,1,9,1,3,1,3,6,1,8,1,1,2,6,4,14,3,1,4,11,4,1,3,32,1,2,4,13,4,1,2,4,2,1,3,1,11,1,4,2,1,4,4,6,3,5,1,6,5,7,6,3,23,3,5,3,5,3,3,13,3,9,10,
+        1,12,10,2,3,18,13,7,160,52,4,2,2,3,2,14,5,4,12,4,6,4,1,20,4,11,6,2,12,27,1,4,1,2,2,7,4,5,2,28,3,7,25,8,3,19,3,6,10,2,2,1,10,2,5,4,1,3,4,1,5,
+        3,2,6,9,3,6,2,16,3,3,16,4,5,5,3,2,1,2,16,15,8,2,6,21,2,4,1,22,5,8,1,1,21,11,2,1,11,11,19,13,12,4,2,3,2,3,6,1,8,11,1,4,2,9,5,2,1,11,2,9,1,1,2,
+        14,31,9,3,4,21,14,4,8,1,7,2,2,2,5,1,4,20,3,3,4,10,1,11,9,8,2,1,4,5,14,12,14,2,17,9,6,31,4,14,1,20,13,26,5,2,7,3,6,13,2,4,2,19,6,2,2,18,9,3,5,
+        12,12,14,4,6,2,3,6,9,5,22,4,5,25,6,4,8,5,2,6,27,2,35,2,16,3,7,8,8,6,6,5,9,17,2,20,6,19,2,13,3,1,1,1,4,17,12,2,14,7,1,4,18,12,38,33,2,10,1,1,
+        2,13,14,17,11,50,6,33,20,26,74,16,23,45,50,13,38,33,6,6,7,4,4,2,1,3,2,5,8,7,8,9,3,11,21,9,13,1,3,10,6,7,1,2,2,18,5,5,1,9,9,2,68,9,19,13,2,5,
+        1,4,4,7,4,13,3,9,10,21,17,3,26,2,1,5,2,4,5,4,1,7,4,7,3,4,2,1,6,1,1,20,4,1,9,2,2,1,3,3,2,3,2,1,1,1,20,2,3,1,6,2,3,6,2,4,8,1,3,2,10,3,5,3,4,4,
+        3,4,16,1,6,1,10,2,4,2,1,1,2,10,11,2,2,3,1,24,31,4,10,10,2,5,12,16,164,15,4,16,7,9,15,19,17,1,2,1,1,5,1,1,1,1,1,3,1,4,3,1,3,1,3,1,2,1,1,3,3,7,
+        2,8,1,2,2,2,1,3,4,3,7,8,12,92,2,10,3,1,3,14,5,25,16,42,4,7,7,4,2,21,5,27,26,27,21,25,30,31,2,1,5,13,3,22,5,6,6,11,9,12,1,5,9,7,5,5,22,60,3,5,
+        13,1,1,8,1,1,3,3,2,1,9,3,3,18,4,1,2,3,7,6,3,1,2,3,9,1,3,1,3,2,1,3,1,1,1,2,1,11,3,1,6,9,1,3,2,3,1,2,1,5,1,1,4,3,4,1,2,2,4,4,1,7,2,1,2,2,3,5,13,
+        18,3,4,14,9,9,4,16,3,7,5,8,2,6,48,28,3,1,1,4,2,14,8,2,9,2,1,15,2,4,3,2,10,16,12,8,7,1,1,3,1,1,1,2,7,4,1,6,4,38,39,16,23,7,15,15,3,2,12,7,21,
+        37,27,6,5,4,8,2,10,8,8,6,5,1,2,1,3,24,1,16,17,9,23,10,17,6,1,51,55,44,13,294,9,3,6,2,4,2,2,15,1,1,1,13,21,17,68,14,8,9,4,1,4,9,3,11,7,1,1,1,
+        5,6,3,2,1,1,1,2,3,8,1,2,2,4,1,5,5,2,1,4,3,7,13,4,1,4,1,3,1,1,1,5,5,10,1,6,1,5,2,1,5,2,4,1,4,5,7,3,18,2,9,11,32,4,3,3,2,4,7,11,16,9,11,8,13,38,
+        32,8,4,2,1,1,2,1,2,4,4,1,1,1,4,1,21,3,11,1,16,1,1,6,1,3,2,4,9,8,57,7,44,1,3,3,13,3,10,1,1,7,5,2,7,21,47,63,3,15,4,7,1,16,1,1,2,8,2,3,42,15,4,
+        1,29,7,22,10,3,78,16,12,20,18,4,67,11,5,1,3,15,6,21,31,32,27,18,13,71,35,5,142,4,10,1,2,50,19,33,16,35,37,16,19,27,7,1,133,19,1,4,8,7,20,1,4,
+        4,1,10,3,1,6,1,2,51,5,40,15,24,43,22928,11,1,13,154,70,3,1,1,7,4,10,1,2,1,1,2,1,2,1,2,2,1,1,2,1,1,1,1,1,2,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,2,1,1,1,
+        3,2,1,1,1,1,2,1,1,
+    };
+    static ImWchar base_ranges[] = // not zero-terminated
+    {
+        0x0020, 0x00FF, // Basic Latin + Latin Supplement
+        0x3000, 0x30FF, // CJK Symbols and Punctuations, Hiragana, Katakana
+        0x31F0, 0x31FF, // Katakana Phonetic Extensions
+        0xFF00, 0xFFEF, // Half-width characters
+        0xFFFD, 0xFFFD  // Invalid
+    };
+    static ImWchar full_ranges[IM_ARRAYSIZE(base_ranges) + IM_ARRAYSIZE(accumulative_offsets_from_0x4E00)*2 + 1] = { 0 };
+    if (!full_ranges[0])
+    {
+        memcpy(full_ranges, base_ranges, sizeof(base_ranges));
+        UnpackAccumulativeOffsetsIntoRanges(0x4E00, accumulative_offsets_from_0x4E00, IM_ARRAYSIZE(accumulative_offsets_from_0x4E00), full_ranges + IM_ARRAYSIZE(base_ranges));
+    }
+    return &full_ranges[0];
+}
+
+const ImWchar*  ImFontAtlas::GetGlyphRangesCyrillic()
+{
+    static const ImWchar ranges[] =
+    {
+        0x0020, 0x00FF, // Basic Latin + Latin Supplement
+        0x0400, 0x052F, // Cyrillic + Cyrillic Supplement
+        0x2DE0, 0x2DFF, // Cyrillic Extended-A
+        0xA640, 0xA69F, // Cyrillic Extended-B
+        0,
+    };
+    return &ranges[0];
+}
+
+const ImWchar*  ImFontAtlas::GetGlyphRangesThai()
+{
+    static const ImWchar ranges[] =
+    {
+        0x0020, 0x00FF, // Basic Latin
+        0x2010, 0x205E, // Punctuations
+        0x0E00, 0x0E7F, // Thai
+        0,
+    };
+    return &ranges[0];
+}
+
+const ImWchar*  ImFontAtlas::GetGlyphRangesVietnamese()
+{
+    static const ImWchar ranges[] =
+    {
+        0x0020, 0x00FF, // Basic Latin
+        0x0102, 0x0103,
+        0x0110, 0x0111,
+        0x0128, 0x0129,
+        0x0168, 0x0169,
+        0x01A0, 0x01A1,
+        0x01AF, 0x01B0,
+        0x1EA0, 0x1EF9,
+        0,
+    };
+    return &ranges[0];
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+void ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder::AddText(const char* text, const char* text_end)
+{
+    while (text_end ? (text < text_end) : *text)
+    {
+        unsigned int c = 0;
+        int c_len = ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, text, text_end);
+        text += c_len;
+        if (c_len == 0)
+            break;
+        AddChar((ImWchar)c);
+    }
+}
+
+void ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder::AddRanges(const ImWchar* ranges)
+{
+    for (; ranges[0]; ranges += 2)
+        for (unsigned int c = ranges[0]; c <= ranges[1] && c <= IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX; c++) //-V560
+            AddChar((ImWchar)c);
+}
+
+void ImFontGlyphRangesBuilder::BuildRanges(ImVector<ImWchar>* out_ranges)
+{
+    const int max_codepoint = IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX;
+    for (int n = 0; n <= max_codepoint; n++)
+        if (GetBit(n))
+        {
+            out_ranges->push_back((ImWchar)n);
+            while (n < max_codepoint && GetBit(n + 1))
+                n++;
+            out_ranges->push_back((ImWchar)n);
+        }
+    out_ranges->push_back(0);
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] ImFont
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+ImFont::ImFont()
+{
+    FontSize = 0.0f;
+    FallbackAdvanceX = 0.0f;
+    FallbackChar = (ImWchar)-1;
+    EllipsisChar = (ImWchar)-1;
+    DotChar = (ImWchar)-1;
+    FallbackGlyph = NULL;
+    ContainerAtlas = NULL;
+    ConfigData = NULL;
+    ConfigDataCount = 0;
+    DirtyLookupTables = false;
+    Scale = 1.0f;
+    Ascent = Descent = 0.0f;
+    MetricsTotalSurface = 0;
+    memset(Used4kPagesMap, 0, sizeof(Used4kPagesMap));
+}
+
+ImFont::~ImFont()
+{
+    ClearOutputData();
+}
+
+void    ImFont::ClearOutputData()
+{
+    FontSize = 0.0f;
+    FallbackAdvanceX = 0.0f;
+    Glyphs.clear();
+    IndexAdvanceX.clear();
+    IndexLookup.clear();
+    FallbackGlyph = NULL;
+    ContainerAtlas = NULL;
+    DirtyLookupTables = true;
+    Ascent = Descent = 0.0f;
+    MetricsTotalSurface = 0;
+}
+
+static ImWchar FindFirstExistingGlyph(ImFont* font, const ImWchar* candidate_chars, int candidate_chars_count)
+{
+    for (int n = 0; n < candidate_chars_count; n++)
+        if (font->FindGlyphNoFallback(candidate_chars[n]) != NULL)
+            return candidate_chars[n];
+    return (ImWchar)-1;
+}
+
+void ImFont::BuildLookupTable()
+{
+    int max_codepoint = 0;
+    for (int i = 0; i != Glyphs.Size; i++)
+        max_codepoint = ImMax(max_codepoint, (int)Glyphs[i].Codepoint);
+
+    // Build lookup table
+    IM_ASSERT(Glyphs.Size < 0xFFFF); // -1 is reserved
+    IndexAdvanceX.clear();
+    IndexLookup.clear();
+    DirtyLookupTables = false;
+    memset(Used4kPagesMap, 0, sizeof(Used4kPagesMap));
+    GrowIndex(max_codepoint + 1);
+    for (int i = 0; i < Glyphs.Size; i++)
+    {
+        int codepoint = (int)Glyphs[i].Codepoint;
+        IndexAdvanceX[codepoint] = Glyphs[i].AdvanceX;
+        IndexLookup[codepoint] = (ImWchar)i;
+
+        // Mark 4K page as used
+        const int page_n = codepoint / 4096;
+        Used4kPagesMap[page_n >> 3] |= 1 << (page_n & 7);
+    }
+
+    // Create a glyph to handle TAB
+    // FIXME: Needs proper TAB handling but it needs to be contextualized (or we could arbitrary say that each string starts at "column 0" ?)
+    if (FindGlyph((ImWchar)' '))
+    {
+        if (Glyphs.back().Codepoint != '\t')   // So we can call this function multiple times (FIXME: Flaky)
+            Glyphs.resize(Glyphs.Size + 1);
+        ImFontGlyph& tab_glyph = Glyphs.back();
+        tab_glyph = *FindGlyph((ImWchar)' ');
+        tab_glyph.Codepoint = '\t';
+        tab_glyph.AdvanceX *= IM_TABSIZE;
+        IndexAdvanceX[(int)tab_glyph.Codepoint] = (float)tab_glyph.AdvanceX;
+        IndexLookup[(int)tab_glyph.Codepoint] = (ImWchar)(Glyphs.Size - 1);
+    }
+
+    // Mark special glyphs as not visible (note that AddGlyph already mark as non-visible glyphs with zero-size polygons)
+    SetGlyphVisible((ImWchar)' ', false);
+    SetGlyphVisible((ImWchar)'\t', false);
+
+    // Ellipsis character is required for rendering elided text. We prefer using U+2026 (horizontal ellipsis).
+    // However some old fonts may contain ellipsis at U+0085. Here we auto-detect most suitable ellipsis character.
+    // FIXME: Note that 0x2026 is rarely included in our font ranges. Because of this we are more likely to use three individual dots.
+    const ImWchar ellipsis_chars[] = { (ImWchar)0x2026, (ImWchar)0x0085 };
+    const ImWchar dots_chars[] = { (ImWchar)'.', (ImWchar)0xFF0E };
+    if (EllipsisChar == (ImWchar)-1)
+        EllipsisChar = FindFirstExistingGlyph(this, ellipsis_chars, IM_ARRAYSIZE(ellipsis_chars));
+    if (DotChar == (ImWchar)-1)
+        DotChar = FindFirstExistingGlyph(this, dots_chars, IM_ARRAYSIZE(dots_chars));
+
+    // Setup fallback character
+    const ImWchar fallback_chars[] = { (ImWchar)IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_INVALID, (ImWchar)'?', (ImWchar)' ' };
+    FallbackGlyph = FindGlyphNoFallback(FallbackChar);
+    if (FallbackGlyph == NULL)
+    {
+        FallbackChar = FindFirstExistingGlyph(this, fallback_chars, IM_ARRAYSIZE(fallback_chars));
+        FallbackGlyph = FindGlyphNoFallback(FallbackChar);
+        if (FallbackGlyph == NULL)
+        {
+            FallbackGlyph = &Glyphs.back();
+            FallbackChar = (ImWchar)FallbackGlyph->Codepoint;
+        }
+    }
+
+    FallbackAdvanceX = FallbackGlyph->AdvanceX;
+    for (int i = 0; i < max_codepoint + 1; i++)
+        if (IndexAdvanceX[i] < 0.0f)
+            IndexAdvanceX[i] = FallbackAdvanceX;
+}
+
+// API is designed this way to avoid exposing the 4K page size
+// e.g. use with IsGlyphRangeUnused(0, 255)
+bool ImFont::IsGlyphRangeUnused(unsigned int c_begin, unsigned int c_last)
+{
+    unsigned int page_begin = (c_begin / 4096);
+    unsigned int page_last = (c_last / 4096);
+    for (unsigned int page_n = page_begin; page_n <= page_last; page_n++)
+        if ((page_n >> 3) < sizeof(Used4kPagesMap))
+            if (Used4kPagesMap[page_n >> 3] & (1 << (page_n & 7)))
+                return false;
+    return true;
+}
+
+void ImFont::SetGlyphVisible(ImWchar c, bool visible)
+{
+    if (ImFontGlyph* glyph = (ImFontGlyph*)(void*)FindGlyph((ImWchar)c))
+        glyph->Visible = visible ? 1 : 0;
+}
+
+void ImFont::GrowIndex(int new_size)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(IndexAdvanceX.Size == IndexLookup.Size);
+    if (new_size <= IndexLookup.Size)
+        return;
+    IndexAdvanceX.resize(new_size, -1.0f);
+    IndexLookup.resize(new_size, (ImWchar)-1);
+}
+
+// x0/y0/x1/y1 are offset from the character upper-left layout position, in pixels. Therefore x0/y0 are often fairly close to zero.
+// Not to be mistaken with texture coordinates, which are held by u0/v0/u1/v1 in normalized format (0.0..1.0 on each texture axis).
+// 'cfg' is not necessarily == 'this->ConfigData' because multiple source fonts+configs can be used to build one target font.
+void ImFont::AddGlyph(const ImFontConfig* cfg, ImWchar codepoint, float x0, float y0, float x1, float y1, float u0, float v0, float u1, float v1, float advance_x)
+{
+    if (cfg != NULL)
+    {
+        // Clamp & recenter if needed
+        const float advance_x_original = advance_x;
+        advance_x = ImClamp(advance_x, cfg->GlyphMinAdvanceX, cfg->GlyphMaxAdvanceX);
+        if (advance_x != advance_x_original)
+        {
+            float char_off_x = cfg->PixelSnapH ? ImFloor((advance_x - advance_x_original) * 0.5f) : (advance_x - advance_x_original) * 0.5f;
+            x0 += char_off_x;
+            x1 += char_off_x;
+        }
+
+        // Snap to pixel
+        if (cfg->PixelSnapH)
+            advance_x = IM_ROUND(advance_x);
+
+        // Bake spacing
+        advance_x += cfg->GlyphExtraSpacing.x;
+    }
+
+    Glyphs.resize(Glyphs.Size + 1);
+    ImFontGlyph& glyph = Glyphs.back();
+    glyph.Codepoint = (unsigned int)codepoint;
+    glyph.Visible = (x0 != x1) && (y0 != y1);
+    glyph.Colored = false;
+    glyph.X0 = x0;
+    glyph.Y0 = y0;
+    glyph.X1 = x1;
+    glyph.Y1 = y1;
+    glyph.U0 = u0;
+    glyph.V0 = v0;
+    glyph.U1 = u1;
+    glyph.V1 = v1;
+    glyph.AdvanceX = advance_x;
+
+    // Compute rough surface usage metrics (+1 to account for average padding, +0.99 to round)
+    // We use (U1-U0)*TexWidth instead of X1-X0 to account for oversampling.
+    float pad = ContainerAtlas->TexGlyphPadding + 0.99f;
+    DirtyLookupTables = true;
+    MetricsTotalSurface += (int)((glyph.U1 - glyph.U0) * ContainerAtlas->TexWidth + pad) * (int)((glyph.V1 - glyph.V0) * ContainerAtlas->TexHeight + pad);
+}
+
+void ImFont::AddRemapChar(ImWchar dst, ImWchar src, bool overwrite_dst)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(IndexLookup.Size > 0);    // Currently this can only be called AFTER the font has been built, aka after calling ImFontAtlas::GetTexDataAs*() function.
+    unsigned int index_size = (unsigned int)IndexLookup.Size;
+
+    if (dst < index_size && IndexLookup.Data[dst] == (ImWchar)-1 && !overwrite_dst) // 'dst' already exists
+        return;
+    if (src >= index_size && dst >= index_size) // both 'dst' and 'src' don't exist -> no-op
+        return;
+
+    GrowIndex(dst + 1);
+    IndexLookup[dst] = (src < index_size) ? IndexLookup.Data[src] : (ImWchar)-1;
+    IndexAdvanceX[dst] = (src < index_size) ? IndexAdvanceX.Data[src] : 1.0f;
+}
+
+const ImFontGlyph* ImFont::FindGlyph(ImWchar c) const
+{
+    if (c >= (size_t)IndexLookup.Size)
+        return FallbackGlyph;
+    const ImWchar i = IndexLookup.Data[c];
+    if (i == (ImWchar)-1)
+        return FallbackGlyph;
+    return &Glyphs.Data[i];
+}
+
+const ImFontGlyph* ImFont::FindGlyphNoFallback(ImWchar c) const
+{
+    if (c >= (size_t)IndexLookup.Size)
+        return NULL;
+    const ImWchar i = IndexLookup.Data[c];
+    if (i == (ImWchar)-1)
+        return NULL;
+    return &Glyphs.Data[i];
+}
+
+const char* ImFont::CalcWordWrapPositionA(float scale, const char* text, const char* text_end, float wrap_width) const
+{
+    // Simple word-wrapping for English, not full-featured. Please submit failing cases!
+    // FIXME: Much possible improvements (don't cut things like "word !", "word!!!" but cut within "word,,,,", more sensible support for punctuations, support for Unicode punctuations, etc.)
+
+    // For references, possible wrap point marked with ^
+    //  "aaa bbb, ccc,ddd. eee   fff. ggg!"
+    //      ^    ^    ^   ^   ^__    ^    ^
+
+    // List of hardcoded separators: .,;!?'"
+
+    // Skip extra blanks after a line returns (that includes not counting them in width computation)
+    // e.g. "Hello    world" --> "Hello" "World"
+
+    // Cut words that cannot possibly fit within one line.
+    // e.g.: "The tropical fish" with ~5 characters worth of width --> "The tr" "opical" "fish"
+
+    float line_width = 0.0f;
+    float word_width = 0.0f;
+    float blank_width = 0.0f;
+    wrap_width /= scale; // We work with unscaled widths to avoid scaling every characters
+
+    const char* word_end = text;
+    const char* prev_word_end = NULL;
+    bool inside_word = true;
+
+    const char* s = text;
+    while (s < text_end)
+    {
+        unsigned int c = (unsigned int)*s;
+        const char* next_s;
+        if (c < 0x80)
+            next_s = s + 1;
+        else
+            next_s = s + ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, s, text_end);
+        if (c == 0)
+            break;
+
+        if (c < 32)
+        {
+            if (c == '\n')
+            {
+                line_width = word_width = blank_width = 0.0f;
+                inside_word = true;
+                s = next_s;
+                continue;
+            }
+            if (c == '\r')
+            {
+                s = next_s;
+                continue;
+            }
+        }
+
+        const float char_width = ((int)c < IndexAdvanceX.Size ? IndexAdvanceX.Data[c] : FallbackAdvanceX);
+        if (ImCharIsBlankW(c))
+        {
+            if (inside_word)
+            {
+                line_width += blank_width;
+                blank_width = 0.0f;
+                word_end = s;
+            }
+            blank_width += char_width;
+            inside_word = false;
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            word_width += char_width;
+            if (inside_word)
+            {
+                word_end = next_s;
+            }
+            else
+            {
+                prev_word_end = word_end;
+                line_width += word_width + blank_width;
+                word_width = blank_width = 0.0f;
+            }
+
+            // Allow wrapping after punctuation.
+            inside_word = (c != '.' && c != ',' && c != ';' && c != '!' && c != '?' && c != '\"');
+        }
+
+        // We ignore blank width at the end of the line (they can be skipped)
+        if (line_width + word_width > wrap_width)
+        {
+            // Words that cannot possibly fit within an entire line will be cut anywhere.
+            if (word_width < wrap_width)
+                s = prev_word_end ? prev_word_end : word_end;
+            break;
+        }
+
+        s = next_s;
+    }
+
+    return s;
+}
+
+ImVec2 ImFont::CalcTextSizeA(float size, float max_width, float wrap_width, const char* text_begin, const char* text_end, const char** remaining) const
+{
+    if (!text_end)
+        text_end = text_begin + strlen(text_begin); // FIXME-OPT: Need to avoid this.
+
+    const float line_height = size;
+    const float scale = size / FontSize;
+
+    ImVec2 text_size = ImVec2(0, 0);
+    float line_width = 0.0f;
+
+    const bool word_wrap_enabled = (wrap_width > 0.0f);
+    const char* word_wrap_eol = NULL;
+
+    const char* s = text_begin;
+    while (s < text_end)
+    {
+        if (word_wrap_enabled)
+        {
+            // Calculate how far we can render. Requires two passes on the string data but keeps the code simple and not intrusive for what's essentially an uncommon feature.
+            if (!word_wrap_eol)
+            {
+                word_wrap_eol = CalcWordWrapPositionA(scale, s, text_end, wrap_width - line_width);
+                if (word_wrap_eol == s) // Wrap_width is too small to fit anything. Force displaying 1 character to minimize the height discontinuity.
+                    word_wrap_eol++;    // +1 may not be a character start point in UTF-8 but it's ok because we use s >= word_wrap_eol below
+            }
+
+            if (s >= word_wrap_eol)
+            {
+                if (text_size.x < line_width)
+                    text_size.x = line_width;
+                text_size.y += line_height;
+                line_width = 0.0f;
+                word_wrap_eol = NULL;
+
+                // Wrapping skips upcoming blanks
+                while (s < text_end)
+                {
+                    const char c = *s;
+                    if (ImCharIsBlankA(c)) { s++; } else if (c == '\n') { s++; break; } else { break; }
+                }
+                continue;
+            }
+        }
+
+        // Decode and advance source
+        const char* prev_s = s;
+        unsigned int c = (unsigned int)*s;
+        if (c < 0x80)
+        {
+            s += 1;
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            s += ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, s, text_end);
+            if (c == 0) // Malformed UTF-8?
+                break;
+        }
+
+        if (c < 32)
+        {
+            if (c == '\n')
+            {
+                text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, line_width);
+                text_size.y += line_height;
+                line_width = 0.0f;
+                continue;
+            }
+            if (c == '\r')
+                continue;
+        }
+
+        const float char_width = ((int)c < IndexAdvanceX.Size ? IndexAdvanceX.Data[c] : FallbackAdvanceX) * scale;
+        if (line_width + char_width >= max_width)
+        {
+            s = prev_s;
+            break;
+        }
+
+        line_width += char_width;
+    }
+
+    if (text_size.x < line_width)
+        text_size.x = line_width;
+
+    if (line_width > 0 || text_size.y == 0.0f)
+        text_size.y += line_height;
+
+    if (remaining)
+        *remaining = s;
+
+    return text_size;
+}
+
+// Note: as with every ImDrawList drawing function, this expects that the font atlas texture is bound.
+void ImFont::RenderChar(ImDrawList* draw_list, float size, const ImVec2& pos, ImU32 col, ImWchar c) const
+{
+    const ImFontGlyph* glyph = FindGlyph(c);
+    if (!glyph || !glyph->Visible)
+        return;
+    if (glyph->Colored)
+        col |= ~IM_COL32_A_MASK;
+    float scale = (size >= 0.0f) ? (size / FontSize) : 1.0f;
+    float x = IM_FLOOR(pos.x);
+    float y = IM_FLOOR(pos.y);
+    draw_list->PrimReserve(6, 4);
+    draw_list->PrimRectUV(ImVec2(x + glyph->X0 * scale, y + glyph->Y0 * scale), ImVec2(x + glyph->X1 * scale, y + glyph->Y1 * scale), ImVec2(glyph->U0, glyph->V0), ImVec2(glyph->U1, glyph->V1), col);
+}
+
+// Note: as with every ImDrawList drawing function, this expects that the font atlas texture is bound.
+void ImFont::RenderText(ImDrawList* draw_list, float size, const ImVec2& pos, ImU32 col, const ImVec4& clip_rect, const char* text_begin, const char* text_end, float wrap_width, bool cpu_fine_clip) const
+{
+    if (!text_end)
+        text_end = text_begin + strlen(text_begin); // ImGui:: functions generally already provides a valid text_end, so this is merely to handle direct calls.
+
+    // Align to be pixel perfect
+    float x = IM_FLOOR(pos.x);
+    float y = IM_FLOOR(pos.y);
+    if (y > clip_rect.w)
+        return;
+
+    const float start_x = x;
+    const float scale = size / FontSize;
+    const float line_height = FontSize * scale;
+    const bool word_wrap_enabled = (wrap_width > 0.0f);
+    const char* word_wrap_eol = NULL;
+
+    // Fast-forward to first visible line
+    const char* s = text_begin;
+    if (y + line_height < clip_rect.y && !word_wrap_enabled)
+        while (y + line_height < clip_rect.y && s < text_end)
+        {
+            s = (const char*)memchr(s, '\n', text_end - s);
+            s = s ? s + 1 : text_end;
+            y += line_height;
+        }
+
+    // For large text, scan for the last visible line in order to avoid over-reserving in the call to PrimReserve()
+    // Note that very large horizontal line will still be affected by the issue (e.g. a one megabyte string buffer without a newline will likely crash atm)
+    if (text_end - s > 10000 && !word_wrap_enabled)
+    {
+        const char* s_end = s;
+        float y_end = y;
+        while (y_end < clip_rect.w && s_end < text_end)
+        {
+            s_end = (const char*)memchr(s_end, '\n', text_end - s_end);
+            s_end = s_end ? s_end + 1 : text_end;
+            y_end += line_height;
+        }
+        text_end = s_end;
+    }
+    if (s == text_end)
+        return;
+
+    // Reserve vertices for remaining worse case (over-reserving is useful and easily amortized)
+    const int vtx_count_max = (int)(text_end - s) * 4;
+    const int idx_count_max = (int)(text_end - s) * 6;
+    const int idx_expected_size = draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size + idx_count_max;
+    draw_list->PrimReserve(idx_count_max, vtx_count_max);
+
+    ImDrawVert* vtx_write = draw_list->_VtxWritePtr;
+    ImDrawIdx* idx_write = draw_list->_IdxWritePtr;
+    unsigned int vtx_current_idx = draw_list->_VtxCurrentIdx;
+
+    const ImU32 col_untinted = col | ~IM_COL32_A_MASK;
+
+    while (s < text_end)
+    {
+        if (word_wrap_enabled)
+        {
+            // Calculate how far we can render. Requires two passes on the string data but keeps the code simple and not intrusive for what's essentially an uncommon feature.
+            if (!word_wrap_eol)
+            {
+                word_wrap_eol = CalcWordWrapPositionA(scale, s, text_end, wrap_width - (x - start_x));
+                if (word_wrap_eol == s) // Wrap_width is too small to fit anything. Force displaying 1 character to minimize the height discontinuity.
+                    word_wrap_eol++;    // +1 may not be a character start point in UTF-8 but it's ok because we use s >= word_wrap_eol below
+            }
+
+            if (s >= word_wrap_eol)
+            {
+                x = start_x;
+                y += line_height;
+                word_wrap_eol = NULL;
+
+                // Wrapping skips upcoming blanks
+                while (s < text_end)
+                {
+                    const char c = *s;
+                    if (ImCharIsBlankA(c)) { s++; } else if (c == '\n') { s++; break; } else { break; }
+                }
+                continue;
+            }
+        }
+
+        // Decode and advance source
+        unsigned int c = (unsigned int)*s;
+        if (c < 0x80)
+        {
+            s += 1;
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            s += ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, s, text_end);
+            if (c == 0) // Malformed UTF-8?
+                break;
+        }
+
+        if (c < 32)
+        {
+            if (c == '\n')
+            {
+                x = start_x;
+                y += line_height;
+                if (y > clip_rect.w)
+                    break; // break out of main loop
+                continue;
+            }
+            if (c == '\r')
+                continue;
+        }
+
+        const ImFontGlyph* glyph = FindGlyph((ImWchar)c);
+        if (glyph == NULL)
+            continue;
+
+        float char_width = glyph->AdvanceX * scale;
+        if (glyph->Visible)
+        {
+            // We don't do a second finer clipping test on the Y axis as we've already skipped anything before clip_rect.y and exit once we pass clip_rect.w
+            float x1 = x + glyph->X0 * scale;
+            float x2 = x + glyph->X1 * scale;
+            float y1 = y + glyph->Y0 * scale;
+            float y2 = y + glyph->Y1 * scale;
+            if (x1 <= clip_rect.z && x2 >= clip_rect.x)
+            {
+                // Render a character
+                float u1 = glyph->U0;
+                float v1 = glyph->V0;
+                float u2 = glyph->U1;
+                float v2 = glyph->V1;
+
+                // CPU side clipping used to fit text in their frame when the frame is too small. Only does clipping for axis aligned quads.
+                if (cpu_fine_clip)
+                {
+                    if (x1 < clip_rect.x)
+                    {
+                        u1 = u1 + (1.0f - (x2 - clip_rect.x) / (x2 - x1)) * (u2 - u1);
+                        x1 = clip_rect.x;
+                    }
+                    if (y1 < clip_rect.y)
+                    {
+                        v1 = v1 + (1.0f - (y2 - clip_rect.y) / (y2 - y1)) * (v2 - v1);
+                        y1 = clip_rect.y;
+                    }
+                    if (x2 > clip_rect.z)
+                    {
+                        u2 = u1 + ((clip_rect.z - x1) / (x2 - x1)) * (u2 - u1);
+                        x2 = clip_rect.z;
+                    }
+                    if (y2 > clip_rect.w)
+                    {
+                        v2 = v1 + ((clip_rect.w - y1) / (y2 - y1)) * (v2 - v1);
+                        y2 = clip_rect.w;
+                    }
+                    if (y1 >= y2)
+                    {
+                        x += char_width;
+                        continue;
+                    }
+                }
+
+                // Support for untinted glyphs
+                ImU32 glyph_col = glyph->Colored ? col_untinted : col;
+
+                // We are NOT calling PrimRectUV() here because non-inlined causes too much overhead in a debug builds. Inlined here:
+                {
+                    idx_write[0] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_current_idx); idx_write[1] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_current_idx+1); idx_write[2] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_current_idx+2);
+                    idx_write[3] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_current_idx); idx_write[4] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_current_idx+2); idx_write[5] = (ImDrawIdx)(vtx_current_idx+3);
+                    vtx_write[0].pos.x = x1; vtx_write[0].pos.y = y1; vtx_write[0].col = glyph_col; vtx_write[0].uv.x = u1; vtx_write[0].uv.y = v1;
+                    vtx_write[1].pos.x = x2; vtx_write[1].pos.y = y1; vtx_write[1].col = glyph_col; vtx_write[1].uv.x = u2; vtx_write[1].uv.y = v1;
+                    vtx_write[2].pos.x = x2; vtx_write[2].pos.y = y2; vtx_write[2].col = glyph_col; vtx_write[2].uv.x = u2; vtx_write[2].uv.y = v2;
+                    vtx_write[3].pos.x = x1; vtx_write[3].pos.y = y2; vtx_write[3].col = glyph_col; vtx_write[3].uv.x = u1; vtx_write[3].uv.y = v2;
+                    vtx_write += 4;
+                    vtx_current_idx += 4;
+                    idx_write += 6;
+                }
+            }
+        }
+        x += char_width;
+    }
+
+    // Give back unused vertices (clipped ones, blanks) ~ this is essentially a PrimUnreserve() action.
+    draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size = (int)(vtx_write - draw_list->VtxBuffer.Data); // Same as calling shrink()
+    draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size = (int)(idx_write - draw_list->IdxBuffer.Data);
+    draw_list->CmdBuffer[draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size - 1].ElemCount -= (idx_expected_size - draw_list->IdxBuffer.Size);
+    draw_list->_VtxWritePtr = vtx_write;
+    draw_list->_IdxWritePtr = idx_write;
+    draw_list->_VtxCurrentIdx = vtx_current_idx;
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] ImGui Internal Render Helpers
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Vaguely redesigned to stop accessing ImGui global state:
+// - RenderArrow()
+// - RenderBullet()
+// - RenderCheckMark()
+// - RenderArrowDockMenu()
+// - RenderArrowPointingAt()
+// - RenderRectFilledRangeH()
+// - RenderRectFilledWithHole()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Function in need of a redesign (legacy mess)
+// - RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Render an arrow aimed to be aligned with text (p_min is a position in the same space text would be positioned). To e.g. denote expanded/collapsed state
+void ImGui::RenderArrow(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImU32 col, ImGuiDir dir, float scale)
+{
+    const float h = draw_list->_Data->FontSize * 1.00f;
+    float r = h * 0.40f * scale;
+    ImVec2 center = pos + ImVec2(h * 0.50f, h * 0.50f * scale);
+
+    ImVec2 a, b, c;
+    switch (dir)
+    {
+    case ImGuiDir_Up:
+    case ImGuiDir_Down:
+        if (dir == ImGuiDir_Up) r = -r;
+        a = ImVec2(+0.000f, +0.750f) * r;
+        b = ImVec2(-0.866f, -0.750f) * r;
+        c = ImVec2(+0.866f, -0.750f) * r;
+        break;
+    case ImGuiDir_Left:
+    case ImGuiDir_Right:
+        if (dir == ImGuiDir_Left) r = -r;
+        a = ImVec2(+0.750f, +0.000f) * r;
+        b = ImVec2(-0.750f, +0.866f) * r;
+        c = ImVec2(-0.750f, -0.866f) * r;
+        break;
+    case ImGuiDir_None:
+    case ImGuiDir_COUNT:
+        IM_ASSERT(0);
+        break;
+    }
+    draw_list->AddTriangleFilled(center + a, center + b, center + c, col);
+}
+
+void ImGui::RenderBullet(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImU32 col)
+{
+    draw_list->AddCircleFilled(pos, draw_list->_Data->FontSize * 0.20f, col, 8);
+}
+
+void ImGui::RenderCheckMark(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImU32 col, float sz)
+{
+    float thickness = ImMax(sz / 5.0f, 1.0f);
+    sz -= thickness * 0.5f;
+    pos += ImVec2(thickness * 0.25f, thickness * 0.25f);
+
+    float third = sz / 3.0f;
+    float bx = pos.x + third;
+    float by = pos.y + sz - third * 0.5f;
+    draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bx - third, by - third));
+    draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bx, by));
+    draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bx + third * 2.0f, by - third * 2.0f));
+    draw_list->PathStroke(col, 0, thickness);
+}
+
+// Render an arrow. 'pos' is position of the arrow tip. half_sz.x is length from base to tip. half_sz.y is length on each side.
+void ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImVec2 half_sz, ImGuiDir direction, ImU32 col)
+{
+    switch (direction)
+    {
+    case ImGuiDir_Left:  draw_list->AddTriangleFilled(ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x, pos.y - half_sz.y), ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x, pos.y + half_sz.y), pos, col); return;
+    case ImGuiDir_Right: draw_list->AddTriangleFilled(ImVec2(pos.x - half_sz.x, pos.y + half_sz.y), ImVec2(pos.x - half_sz.x, pos.y - half_sz.y), pos, col); return;
+    case ImGuiDir_Up:    draw_list->AddTriangleFilled(ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x, pos.y + half_sz.y), ImVec2(pos.x - half_sz.x, pos.y + half_sz.y), pos, col); return;
+    case ImGuiDir_Down:  draw_list->AddTriangleFilled(ImVec2(pos.x - half_sz.x, pos.y - half_sz.y), ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x, pos.y - half_sz.y), pos, col); return;
+    case ImGuiDir_None: case ImGuiDir_COUNT: break; // Fix warnings
+    }
+}
+
+// This is less wide than RenderArrow() and we use in dock nodes instead of the regular RenderArrow() to denote a change of functionality,
+// and because the saved space means that the left-most tab label can stay at exactly the same position as the label of a loose window.
+void ImGui::RenderArrowDockMenu(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 p_min, float sz, ImU32 col)
+{
+    draw_list->AddRectFilled(p_min + ImVec2(sz * 0.20f, sz * 0.15f), p_min + ImVec2(sz * 0.80f, sz * 0.30f), col);
+    RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, p_min + ImVec2(sz * 0.50f, sz * 0.85f), ImVec2(sz * 0.30f, sz * 0.40f), ImGuiDir_Down, col);
+}
+
+static inline float ImAcos01(float x)
+{
+    if (x <= 0.0f) return IM_PI * 0.5f;
+    if (x >= 1.0f) return 0.0f;
+    return ImAcos(x);
+    //return (-0.69813170079773212f * x * x - 0.87266462599716477f) * x + 1.5707963267948966f; // Cheap approximation, may be enough for what we do.
+}
+
+// FIXME: Cleanup and move code to ImDrawList.
+void ImGui::RenderRectFilledRangeH(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& rect, ImU32 col, float x_start_norm, float x_end_norm, float rounding)
+{
+    if (x_end_norm == x_start_norm)
+        return;
+    if (x_start_norm > x_end_norm)
+        ImSwap(x_start_norm, x_end_norm);
+
+    ImVec2 p0 = ImVec2(ImLerp(rect.Min.x, rect.Max.x, x_start_norm), rect.Min.y);
+    ImVec2 p1 = ImVec2(ImLerp(rect.Min.x, rect.Max.x, x_end_norm), rect.Max.y);
+    if (rounding == 0.0f)
+    {
+        draw_list->AddRectFilled(p0, p1, col, 0.0f);
+        return;
+    }
+
+    rounding = ImClamp(ImMin((rect.Max.x - rect.Min.x) * 0.5f, (rect.Max.y - rect.Min.y) * 0.5f) - 1.0f, 0.0f, rounding);
+    const float inv_rounding = 1.0f / rounding;
+    const float arc0_b = ImAcos01(1.0f - (p0.x - rect.Min.x) * inv_rounding);
+    const float arc0_e = ImAcos01(1.0f - (p1.x - rect.Min.x) * inv_rounding);
+    const float half_pi = IM_PI * 0.5f; // We will == compare to this because we know this is the exact value ImAcos01 can return.
+    const float x0 = ImMax(p0.x, rect.Min.x + rounding);
+    if (arc0_b == arc0_e)
+    {
+        draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(x0, p1.y));
+        draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(x0, p0.y));
+    }
+    else if (arc0_b == 0.0f && arc0_e == half_pi)
+    {
+        draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(x0, p1.y - rounding), rounding, 3, 6); // BL
+        draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(x0, p0.y + rounding), rounding, 6, 9); // TR
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        draw_list->PathArcTo(ImVec2(x0, p1.y - rounding), rounding, IM_PI - arc0_e, IM_PI - arc0_b, 3); // BL
+        draw_list->PathArcTo(ImVec2(x0, p0.y + rounding), rounding, IM_PI + arc0_b, IM_PI + arc0_e, 3); // TR
+    }
+    if (p1.x > rect.Min.x + rounding)
+    {
+        const float arc1_b = ImAcos01(1.0f - (rect.Max.x - p1.x) * inv_rounding);
+        const float arc1_e = ImAcos01(1.0f - (rect.Max.x - p0.x) * inv_rounding);
+        const float x1 = ImMin(p1.x, rect.Max.x - rounding);
+        if (arc1_b == arc1_e)
+        {
+            draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(x1, p0.y));
+            draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(x1, p1.y));
+        }
+        else if (arc1_b == 0.0f && arc1_e == half_pi)
+        {
+            draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(x1, p0.y + rounding), rounding, 9, 12); // TR
+            draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(x1, p1.y - rounding), rounding, 0, 3);  // BR
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            draw_list->PathArcTo(ImVec2(x1, p0.y + rounding), rounding, -arc1_e, -arc1_b, 3); // TR
+            draw_list->PathArcTo(ImVec2(x1, p1.y - rounding), rounding, +arc1_b, +arc1_e, 3); // BR
+        }
+    }
+    draw_list->PathFillConvex(col);
+}
+
+void ImGui::RenderRectFilledWithHole(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& outer, const ImRect& inner, ImU32 col, float rounding)
+{
+    const bool fill_L = (inner.Min.x > outer.Min.x);
+    const bool fill_R = (inner.Max.x < outer.Max.x);
+    const bool fill_U = (inner.Min.y > outer.Min.y);
+    const bool fill_D = (inner.Max.y < outer.Max.y);
+    if (fill_L) draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(outer.Min.x, inner.Min.y), ImVec2(inner.Min.x, inner.Max.y), col, rounding, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone | (fill_U ? 0 : ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft)    | (fill_D ? 0 : ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft));
+    if (fill_R) draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(inner.Max.x, inner.Min.y), ImVec2(outer.Max.x, inner.Max.y), col, rounding, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone | (fill_U ? 0 : ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight)   | (fill_D ? 0 : ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight));
+    if (fill_U) draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(inner.Min.x, outer.Min.y), ImVec2(inner.Max.x, inner.Min.y), col, rounding, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone | (fill_L ? 0 : ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft)    | (fill_R ? 0 : ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight));
+    if (fill_D) draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(inner.Min.x, inner.Max.y), ImVec2(inner.Max.x, outer.Max.y), col, rounding, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone | (fill_L ? 0 : ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft) | (fill_R ? 0 : ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight));
+    if (fill_L && fill_U) draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(outer.Min.x, outer.Min.y), ImVec2(inner.Min.x, inner.Min.y), col, rounding, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft);
+    if (fill_R && fill_U) draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(inner.Max.x, outer.Min.y), ImVec2(outer.Max.x, inner.Min.y), col, rounding, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight);
+    if (fill_L && fill_D) draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(outer.Min.x, inner.Max.y), ImVec2(inner.Min.x, outer.Max.y), col, rounding, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft);
+    if (fill_R && fill_D) draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(inner.Max.x, inner.Max.y), ImVec2(outer.Max.x, outer.Max.y), col, rounding, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight);
+}
+
+ImDrawFlags ImGui::CalcRoundingFlagsForRectInRect(const ImRect& r_in, const ImRect& r_outer, float threshold)
+{
+    bool round_l = r_in.Min.x <= r_outer.Min.x + threshold;
+    bool round_r = r_in.Max.x >= r_outer.Max.x - threshold;
+    bool round_t = r_in.Min.y <= r_outer.Min.y + threshold;
+    bool round_b = r_in.Max.y >= r_outer.Max.y - threshold;
+    return ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone
+        | ((round_t && round_l) ? ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft : 0) | ((round_t && round_r) ? ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight : 0)
+        | ((round_b && round_l) ? ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft : 0) | ((round_b && round_r) ? ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight : 0);
+}
+
+// Helper for ColorPicker4()
+// NB: This is rather brittle and will show artifact when rounding this enabled if rounded corners overlap multiple cells. Caller currently responsible for avoiding that.
+// Spent a non reasonable amount of time trying to getting this right for ColorButton with rounding+anti-aliasing+ImGuiColorEditFlags_HalfAlphaPreview flag + various grid sizes and offsets, and eventually gave up... probably more reasonable to disable rounding altogether.
+// FIXME: uses ImGui::GetColorU32
+void ImGui::RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 p_min, ImVec2 p_max, ImU32 col, float grid_step, ImVec2 grid_off, float rounding, ImDrawFlags flags)
+{
+    if ((flags & ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersMask_) == 0)
+        flags = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersDefault_;
+    if (((col & IM_COL32_A_MASK) >> IM_COL32_A_SHIFT) < 0xFF)
+    {
+        ImU32 col_bg1 = GetColorU32(ImAlphaBlendColors(IM_COL32(204, 204, 204, 255), col));
+        ImU32 col_bg2 = GetColorU32(ImAlphaBlendColors(IM_COL32(128, 128, 128, 255), col));
+        draw_list->AddRectFilled(p_min, p_max, col_bg1, rounding, flags);
+
+        int yi = 0;
+        for (float y = p_min.y + grid_off.y; y < p_max.y; y += grid_step, yi++)
+        {
+            float y1 = ImClamp(y, p_min.y, p_max.y), y2 = ImMin(y + grid_step, p_max.y);
+            if (y2 <= y1)
+                continue;
+            for (float x = p_min.x + grid_off.x + (yi & 1) * grid_step; x < p_max.x; x += grid_step * 2.0f)
+            {
+                float x1 = ImClamp(x, p_min.x, p_max.x), x2 = ImMin(x + grid_step, p_max.x);
+                if (x2 <= x1)
+                    continue;
+                ImDrawFlags cell_flags = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone;
+                if (y1 <= p_min.y) { if (x1 <= p_min.x) cell_flags |= ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopLeft; if (x2 >= p_max.x) cell_flags |= ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight; }
+                if (y2 >= p_max.y) { if (x1 <= p_min.x) cell_flags |= ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft; if (x2 >= p_max.x) cell_flags |= ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight; }
+
+                // Combine flags
+                cell_flags = (flags == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone || cell_flags == ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone) ? ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone : (cell_flags & flags);
+                draw_list->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(x1, y1), ImVec2(x2, y2), col_bg2, rounding, cell_flags);
+            }
+        }
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        draw_list->AddRectFilled(p_min, p_max, col, rounding, flags);
+    }
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Decompression code
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Compressed with stb_compress() then converted to a C array and encoded as base85.
+// Use the program in misc/fonts/binary_to_compressed_c.cpp to create the array from a TTF file.
+// The purpose of encoding as base85 instead of "0x00,0x01,..." style is only save on _source code_ size.
+// Decompression from stb.h (public domain) by Sean Barrett https://github.com/nothings/stb/blob/master/stb.h
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+static unsigned int stb_decompress_length(const unsigned char *input)
+{
+    return (input[8] << 24) + (input[9] << 16) + (input[10] << 8) + input[11];
+}
+
+static unsigned char *stb__barrier_out_e, *stb__barrier_out_b;
+static const unsigned char *stb__barrier_in_b;
+static unsigned char *stb__dout;
+static void stb__match(const unsigned char *data, unsigned int length)
+{
+    // INVERSE of memmove... write each byte before copying the next...
+    IM_ASSERT(stb__dout + length <= stb__barrier_out_e);
+    if (stb__dout + length > stb__barrier_out_e) { stb__dout += length; return; }
+    if (data < stb__barrier_out_b) { stb__dout = stb__barrier_out_e+1; return; }
+    while (length--) *stb__dout++ = *data++;
+}
+
+static void stb__lit(const unsigned char *data, unsigned int length)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(stb__dout + length <= stb__barrier_out_e);
+    if (stb__dout + length > stb__barrier_out_e) { stb__dout += length; return; }
+    if (data < stb__barrier_in_b) { stb__dout = stb__barrier_out_e+1; return; }
+    memcpy(stb__dout, data, length);
+    stb__dout += length;
+}
+
+#define stb__in2(x)   ((i[x] << 8) + i[(x)+1])
+#define stb__in3(x)   ((i[x] << 16) + stb__in2((x)+1))
+#define stb__in4(x)   ((i[x] << 24) + stb__in3((x)+1))
+
+static const unsigned char *stb_decompress_token(const unsigned char *i)
+{
+    if (*i >= 0x20) { // use fewer if's for cases that expand small
+        if (*i >= 0x80)       stb__match(stb__dout-i[1]-1, i[0] - 0x80 + 1), i += 2;
+        else if (*i >= 0x40)  stb__match(stb__dout-(stb__in2(0) - 0x4000 + 1), i[2]+1), i += 3;
+        else /* *i >= 0x20 */ stb__lit(i+1, i[0] - 0x20 + 1), i += 1 + (i[0] - 0x20 + 1);
+    } else { // more ifs for cases that expand large, since overhead is amortized
+        if (*i >= 0x18)       stb__match(stb__dout-(stb__in3(0) - 0x180000 + 1), i[3]+1), i += 4;
+        else if (*i >= 0x10)  stb__match(stb__dout-(stb__in3(0) - 0x100000 + 1), stb__in2(3)+1), i += 5;
+        else if (*i >= 0x08)  stb__lit(i+2, stb__in2(0) - 0x0800 + 1), i += 2 + (stb__in2(0) - 0x0800 + 1);
+        else if (*i == 0x07)  stb__lit(i+3, stb__in2(1) + 1), i += 3 + (stb__in2(1) + 1);
+        else if (*i == 0x06)  stb__match(stb__dout-(stb__in3(1)+1), i[4]+1), i += 5;
+        else if (*i == 0x04)  stb__match(stb__dout-(stb__in3(1)+1), stb__in2(4)+1), i += 6;
+    }
+    return i;
+}
+
+static unsigned int stb_adler32(unsigned int adler32, unsigned char *buffer, unsigned int buflen)
+{
+    const unsigned long ADLER_MOD = 65521;
+    unsigned long s1 = adler32 & 0xffff, s2 = adler32 >> 16;
+    unsigned long blocklen = buflen % 5552;
+
+    unsigned long i;
+    while (buflen) {
+        for (i=0; i + 7 < blocklen; i += 8) {
+            s1 += buffer[0], s2 += s1;
+            s1 += buffer[1], s2 += s1;
+            s1 += buffer[2], s2 += s1;
+            s1 += buffer[3], s2 += s1;
+            s1 += buffer[4], s2 += s1;
+            s1 += buffer[5], s2 += s1;
+            s1 += buffer[6], s2 += s1;
+            s1 += buffer[7], s2 += s1;
+
+            buffer += 8;
+        }
+
+        for (; i < blocklen; ++i)
+            s1 += *buffer++, s2 += s1;
+
+        s1 %= ADLER_MOD, s2 %= ADLER_MOD;
+        buflen -= blocklen;
+        blocklen = 5552;
+    }
+    return (unsigned int)(s2 << 16) + (unsigned int)s1;
+}
+
+static unsigned int stb_decompress(unsigned char *output, const unsigned char *i, unsigned int /*length*/)
+{
+    if (stb__in4(0) != 0x57bC0000) return 0;
+    if (stb__in4(4) != 0)          return 0; // error! stream is > 4GB
+    const unsigned int olen = stb_decompress_length(i);
+    stb__barrier_in_b = i;
+    stb__barrier_out_e = output + olen;
+    stb__barrier_out_b = output;
+    i += 16;
+
+    stb__dout = output;
+    for (;;) {
+        const unsigned char *old_i = i;
+        i = stb_decompress_token(i);
+        if (i == old_i) {
+            if (*i == 0x05 && i[1] == 0xfa) {
+                IM_ASSERT(stb__dout == output + olen);
+                if (stb__dout != output + olen) return 0;
+                if (stb_adler32(1, output, olen) != (unsigned int) stb__in4(2))
+                    return 0;
+                return olen;
+            } else {
+                IM_ASSERT(0); /* NOTREACHED */
+                return 0;
+            }
+        }
+        IM_ASSERT(stb__dout <= output + olen);
+        if (stb__dout > output + olen)
+            return 0;
+    }
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Default font data (ProggyClean.ttf)
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// ProggyClean.ttf
+// Copyright (c) 2004, 2005 Tristan Grimmer
+// MIT license (see License.txt in http://www.upperbounds.net/download/ProggyClean.ttf.zip)
+// Download and more information at http://upperbounds.net
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// File: 'ProggyClean.ttf' (41208 bytes)
+// Exported using misc/fonts/binary_to_compressed_c.cpp (with compression + base85 string encoding).
+// The purpose of encoding as base85 instead of "0x00,0x01,..." style is only save on _source code_ size.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+static const char proggy_clean_ttf_compressed_data_base85[11980 + 1] =
+    "7])#######hV0qs'/###[),##/l:$#Q6>##5[n42>c-TH`->>#/e>11NNV=Bv(*:.F?uu#(gRU.o0XGH`$vhLG1hxt9?W`#,5LsCp#-i>.r$<$6pD>Lb';9Crc6tgXmKVeU2cD4Eo3R/"
+    "2*>]b(MC;$jPfY.;h^`IWM9<Lh2TlS+f-s$o6Q<BWH`YiU.xfLq$N;$0iR/GX:U(jcW2p/W*q?-qmnUCI;jHSAiFWM.R*kU@C=GH?a9wp8f$e.-4^Qg1)Q-GL(lf(r/7GrRgwV%MS=C#"
+    "`8ND>Qo#t'X#(v#Y9w0#1D$CIf;W'#pWUPXOuxXuU(H9M(1<q-UE31#^-V'8IRUo7Qf./L>=Ke$$'5F%)]0^#0X@U.a<r:QLtFsLcL6##lOj)#.Y5<-R&KgLwqJfLgN&;Q?gI^#DY2uL"
+    "i@^rMl9t=cWq6##weg>$FBjVQTSDgEKnIS7EM9>ZY9w0#L;>>#Mx&4Mvt//L[MkA#W@lK.N'[0#7RL_&#w+F%HtG9M#XL`N&.,GM4Pg;-<nLENhvx>-VsM.M0rJfLH2eTM`*oJMHRC`N"
+    "kfimM2J,W-jXS:)r0wK#@Fge$U>`w'N7G#$#fB#$E^$#:9:hk+eOe--6x)F7*E%?76%^GMHePW-Z5l'&GiF#$956:rS?dA#fiK:)Yr+`&#0j@'DbG&#^$PG.Ll+DNa<XCMKEV*N)LN/N"
+    "*b=%Q6pia-Xg8I$<MR&,VdJe$<(7G;Ckl'&hF;;$<_=X(b.RS%%)###MPBuuE1V:v&cX&#2m#(&cV]`k9OhLMbn%s$G2,B$BfD3X*sp5#l,$R#]x_X1xKX%b5U*[r5iMfUo9U`N99hG)"
+    "tm+/Us9pG)XPu`<0s-)WTt(gCRxIg(%6sfh=ktMKn3j)<6<b5Sk_/0(^]AaN#(p/L>&VZ>1i%h1S9u5o@YaaW$e+b<TWFn/Z:Oh(Cx2$lNEoN^e)#CFY@@I;BOQ*sRwZtZxRcU7uW6CX"
+    "ow0i(?$Q[cjOd[P4d)]>ROPOpxTO7Stwi1::iB1q)C_=dV26J;2,]7op$]uQr@_V7$q^%lQwtuHY]=DX,n3L#0PHDO4f9>dC@O>HBuKPpP*E,N+b3L#lpR/MrTEH.IAQk.a>D[.e;mc."
+    "x]Ip.PH^'/aqUO/$1WxLoW0[iLA<QT;5HKD+@qQ'NQ(3_PLhE48R.qAPSwQ0/WK?Z,[x?-J;jQTWA0X@KJ(_Y8N-:/M74:/-ZpKrUss?d#dZq]DAbkU*JqkL+nwX@@47`5>w=4h(9.`G"
+    "CRUxHPeR`5Mjol(dUWxZa(>STrPkrJiWx`5U7F#.g*jrohGg`cg:lSTvEY/EV_7H4Q9[Z%cnv;JQYZ5q.l7Zeas:HOIZOB?G<Nald$qs]@]L<J7bR*>gv:[7MI2k).'2($5FNP&EQ(,)"
+    "U]W]+fh18.vsai00);D3@4ku5P?DP8aJt+;qUM]=+b'8@;mViBKx0DE[-auGl8:PJ&Dj+M6OC]O^((##]`0i)drT;-7X`=-H3[igUnPG-NZlo.#k@h#=Ork$m>a>$-?Tm$UV(?#P6YY#"
+    "'/###xe7q.73rI3*pP/$1>s9)W,JrM7SN]'/4C#v$U`0#V.[0>xQsH$fEmPMgY2u7Kh(G%siIfLSoS+MK2eTM$=5,M8p`A.;_R%#u[K#$x4AG8.kK/HSB==-'Ie/QTtG?-.*^N-4B/ZM"
+    "_3YlQC7(p7q)&](`6_c)$/*JL(L-^(]$wIM`dPtOdGA,U3:w2M-0<q-]L_?^)1vw'.,MRsqVr.L;aN&#/EgJ)PBc[-f>+WomX2u7lqM2iEumMTcsF?-aT=Z-97UEnXglEn1K-bnEO`gu"
+    "Ft(c%=;Am_Qs@jLooI&NX;]0#j4#F14;gl8-GQpgwhrq8'=l_f-b49'UOqkLu7-##oDY2L(te+Mch&gLYtJ,MEtJfLh'x'M=$CS-ZZ%P]8bZ>#S?YY#%Q&q'3^Fw&?D)UDNrocM3A76/"
+    "/oL?#h7gl85[qW/NDOk%16ij;+:1a'iNIdb-ou8.P*w,v5#EI$TWS>Pot-R*H'-SEpA:g)f+O$%%`kA#G=8RMmG1&O`>to8bC]T&$,n.LoO>29sp3dt-52U%VM#q7'DHpg+#Z9%H[K<L"
+    "%a2E-grWVM3@2=-k22tL]4$##6We'8UJCKE[d_=%wI;'6X-GsLX4j^SgJ$##R*w,vP3wK#iiW&#*h^D&R?jp7+/u&#(AP##XU8c$fSYW-J95_-Dp[g9wcO&#M-h1OcJlc-*vpw0xUX&#"
+    "OQFKNX@QI'IoPp7nb,QU//MQ&ZDkKP)X<WSVL(68uVl&#c'[0#(s1X&xm$Y%B7*K:eDA323j998GXbA#pwMs-jgD$9QISB-A_(aN4xoFM^@C58D0+Q+q3n0#3U1InDjF682-SjMXJK)("
+    "h$hxua_K]ul92%'BOU&#BRRh-slg8KDlr:%L71Ka:.A;%YULjDPmL<LYs8i#XwJOYaKPKc1h:'9Ke,g)b),78=I39B;xiY$bgGw-&.Zi9InXDuYa%G*f2Bq7mn9^#p1vv%#(Wi-;/Z5h"
+    "o;#2:;%d&#x9v68C5g?ntX0X)pT`;%pB3q7mgGN)3%(P8nTd5L7GeA-GL@+%J3u2:(Yf>et`e;)f#Km8&+DC$I46>#Kr]]u-[=99tts1.qb#q72g1WJO81q+eN'03'eM>&1XxY-caEnO"
+    "j%2n8)),?ILR5^.Ibn<-X-Mq7[a82Lq:F&#ce+S9wsCK*x`569E8ew'He]h:sI[2LM$[guka3ZRd6:t%IG:;$%YiJ:Nq=?eAw;/:nnDq0(CYcMpG)qLN4$##&J<j$UpK<Q4a1]MupW^-"
+    "sj_$%[HK%'F####QRZJ::Y3EGl4'@%FkiAOg#p[##O`gukTfBHagL<LHw%q&OV0##F=6/:chIm0@eCP8X]:kFI%hl8hgO@RcBhS-@Qb$%+m=hPDLg*%K8ln(wcf3/'DW-$.lR?n[nCH-"
+    "eXOONTJlh:.RYF%3'p6sq:UIMA945&^HFS87@$EP2iG<-lCO$%c`uKGD3rC$x0BL8aFn--`ke%#HMP'vh1/R&O_J9'um,.<tx[@%wsJk&bUT2`0uMv7gg#qp/ij.L56'hl;.s5CUrxjO"
+    "M7-##.l+Au'A&O:-T72L]P`&=;ctp'XScX*rU.>-XTt,%OVU4)S1+R-#dg0/Nn?Ku1^0f$B*P:Rowwm-`0PKjYDDM'3]d39VZHEl4,.j']Pk-M.h^&:0FACm$maq-&sgw0t7/6(^xtk%"
+    "LuH88Fj-ekm>GA#_>568x6(OFRl-IZp`&b,_P'$M<Jnq79VsJW/mWS*PUiq76;]/NM_>hLbxfc$mj`,O;&%W2m`Zh:/)Uetw:aJ%]K9h:TcF]u_-Sj9,VK3M.*'&0D[Ca]J9gp8,kAW]"
+    "%(?A%R$f<->Zts'^kn=-^@c4%-pY6qI%J%1IGxfLU9CP8cbPlXv);C=b),<2mOvP8up,UVf3839acAWAW-W?#ao/^#%KYo8fRULNd2.>%m]UK:n%r$'sw]J;5pAoO_#2mO3n,'=H5(et"
+    "Hg*`+RLgv>=4U8guD$I%D:W>-r5V*%j*W:Kvej.Lp$<M-SGZ':+Q_k+uvOSLiEo(<aD/K<CCc`'Lx>'?;++O'>()jLR-^u68PHm8ZFWe+ej8h:9r6L*0//c&iH&R8pRbA#Kjm%upV1g:"
+    "a_#Ur7FuA#(tRh#.Y5K+@?3<-8m0$PEn;J:rh6?I6uG<-`wMU'ircp0LaE_OtlMb&1#6T.#FDKu#1Lw%u%+GM+X'e?YLfjM[VO0MbuFp7;>Q&#WIo)0@F%q7c#4XAXN-U&VB<HFF*qL("
+    "$/V,;(kXZejWO`<[5?\?ewY(*9=%wDc;,u<'9t3W-(H1th3+G]ucQ]kLs7df($/*JL]@*t7Bu_G3_7mp7<iaQjO@.kLg;x3B0lqp7Hf,^Ze7-##@/c58Mo(3;knp0%)A7?-W+eI'o8)b<"
+    "nKnw'Ho8C=Y>pqB>0ie&jhZ[?iLR@@_AvA-iQC(=ksRZRVp7`.=+NpBC%rh&3]R:8XDmE5^V8O(x<<aG/1N$#FX$0V5Y6x'aErI3I$7x%E`v<-BY,)%-?Psf*l?%C3.mM(=/M0:JxG'?"
+    "7WhH%o'a<-80g0NBxoO(GH<dM]n.+%q@jH?f.UsJ2Ggs&4<-e47&Kl+f//9@`b+?.TeN_&B8Ss?v;^Trk;f#YvJkl&w$]>-+k?'(<S:68tq*WoDfZu';mM?8X[ma8W%*`-=;D.(nc7/;"
+    ")g:T1=^J$&BRV(-lTmNB6xqB[@0*o.erM*<SWF]u2=st-*(6v>^](H.aREZSi,#1:[IXaZFOm<-ui#qUq2$##Ri;u75OK#(RtaW-K-F`S+cF]uN`-KMQ%rP/Xri.LRcB##=YL3BgM/3M"
+    "D?@f&1'BW-)Ju<L25gl8uhVm1hL$##*8###'A3/LkKW+(^rWX?5W_8g)a(m&K8P>#bmmWCMkk&#TR`C,5d>g)F;t,4:@_l8G/5h4vUd%&%950:VXD'QdWoY-F$BtUwmfe$YqL'8(PWX("
+    "P?^@Po3$##`MSs?DWBZ/S>+4%>fX,VWv/w'KD`LP5IbH;rTV>n3cEK8U#bX]l-/V+^lj3;vlMb&[5YQ8#pekX9JP3XUC72L,,?+Ni&co7ApnO*5NK,((W-i:$,kp'UDAO(G0Sq7MVjJs"
+    "bIu)'Z,*[>br5fX^:FPAWr-m2KgL<LUN098kTF&#lvo58=/vjDo;.;)Ka*hLR#/k=rKbxuV`>Q_nN6'8uTG&#1T5g)uLv:873UpTLgH+#FgpH'_o1780Ph8KmxQJ8#H72L4@768@Tm&Q"
+    "h4CB/5OvmA&,Q&QbUoi$a_%3M01H)4x7I^&KQVgtFnV+;[Pc>[m4k//,]1?#`VY[Jr*3&&slRfLiVZJ:]?=K3Sw=[$=uRB?3xk48@aeg<Z'<$#4H)6,>e0jT6'N#(q%.O=?2S]u*(m<-"
+    "V8J'(1)G][68hW$5'q[GC&5j`TE?m'esFGNRM)j,ffZ?-qx8;->g4t*:CIP/[Qap7/9'#(1sao7w-.qNUdkJ)tCF&#B^;xGvn2r9FEPFFFcL@.iFNkTve$m%#QvQS8U@)2Z+3K:AKM5i"
+    "sZ88+dKQ)W6>J%CL<KE>`.d*(B`-n8D9oK<Up]c$X$(,)M8Zt7/[rdkqTgl-0cuGMv'?>-XV1q['-5k'cAZ69e;D_?$ZPP&s^+7])$*$#@QYi9,5P&#9r+$%CE=68>K8r0=dSC%%(@p7"
+    ".m7jilQ02'0-VWAg<a/''3u.=4L$Y)6k/K:_[3=&jvL<L0C/2'v:^;-DIBW,B4E68:kZ;%?8(Q8BH=kO65BW?xSG&#@uU,DS*,?.+(o(#1vCS8#CHF>TlGW'b)Tq7VT9q^*^$$.:&N@@"
+    "$&)WHtPm*5_rO0&e%K&#-30j(E4#'Zb.o/(Tpm$>K'f@[PvFl,hfINTNU6u'0pao7%XUp9]5.>%h`8_=VYbxuel.NTSsJfLacFu3B'lQSu/m6-Oqem8T+oE--$0a/k]uj9EwsG>%veR*"
+    "hv^BFpQj:K'#SJ,sB-'#](j.Lg92rTw-*n%@/;39rrJF,l#qV%OrtBeC6/,;qB3ebNW[?,Hqj2L.1NP&GjUR=1D8QaS3Up&@*9wP?+lo7b?@%'k4`p0Z$22%K3+iCZj?XJN4Nm&+YF]u"
+    "@-W$U%VEQ/,,>>#)D<h#`)h0:<Q6909ua+&VU%n2:cG3FJ-%@Bj-DgLr`Hw&HAKjKjseK</xKT*)B,N9X3]krc12t'pgTV(Lv-tL[xg_%=M_q7a^x?7Ubd>#%8cY#YZ?=,`Wdxu/ae&#"
+    "w6)R89tI#6@s'(6Bf7a&?S=^ZI_kS&ai`&=tE72L_D,;^R)7[$s<Eh#c&)q.MXI%#v9ROa5FZO%sF7q7Nwb&#ptUJ:aqJe$Sl68%.D###EC><?-aF&#RNQv>o8lKN%5/$(vdfq7+ebA#"
+    "u1p]ovUKW&Y%q]'>$1@-[xfn$7ZTp7mM,G,Ko7a&Gu%G[RMxJs[0MM%wci.LFDK)(<c`Q8N)jEIF*+?P2a8g%)$q]o2aH8C&<SibC/q,(e:v;-b#6[$NtDZ84Je2KNvB#$P5?tQ3nt(0"
+    "d=j.LQf./Ll33+(;q3L-w=8dX$#WF&uIJ@-bfI>%:_i2B5CsR8&9Z&#=mPEnm0f`<&c)QL5uJ#%u%lJj+D-r;BoF&#4DoS97h5g)E#o:&S4weDF,9^Hoe`h*L+_a*NrLW-1pG_&2UdB8"
+    "6e%B/:=>)N4xeW.*wft-;$'58-ESqr<b?UI(_%@[P46>#U`'6AQ]m&6/`Z>#S?YY#Vc;r7U2&326d=w&H####?TZ`*4?&.MK?LP8Vxg>$[QXc%QJv92.(Db*B)gb*BM9dM*hJMAo*c&#"
+    "b0v=Pjer]$gG&JXDf->'StvU7505l9$AFvgYRI^&<^b68?j#q9QX4SM'RO#&sL1IM.rJfLUAj221]d##DW=m83u5;'bYx,*Sl0hL(W;;$doB&O/TQ:(Z^xBdLjL<Lni;''X.`$#8+1GD"
+    ":k$YUWsbn8ogh6rxZ2Z9]%nd+>V#*8U_72Lh+2Q8Cj0i:6hp&$C/:p(HK>T8Y[gHQ4`4)'$Ab(Nof%V'8hL&#<NEdtg(n'=S1A(Q1/I&4([%dM`,Iu'1:_hL>SfD07&6D<fp8dHM7/g+"
+    "tlPN9J*rKaPct&?'uBCem^jn%9_K)<,C5K3s=5g&GmJb*[SYq7K;TRLGCsM-$$;S%:Y@r7AK0pprpL<Lrh,q7e/%KWK:50I^+m'vi`3?%Zp+<-d+$L-Sv:@.o19n$s0&39;kn;S%BSq*"
+    "$3WoJSCLweV[aZ'MQIjO<7;X-X;&+dMLvu#^UsGEC9WEc[X(wI7#2.(F0jV*eZf<-Qv3J-c+J5AlrB#$p(H68LvEA'q3n0#m,[`*8Ft)FcYgEud]CWfm68,(aLA$@EFTgLXoBq/UPlp7"
+    ":d[/;r_ix=:TF`S5H-b<LI&HY(K=h#)]Lk$K14lVfm:x$H<3^Ql<M`$OhapBnkup'D#L$Pb_`N*g]2e;X/Dtg,bsj&K#2[-:iYr'_wgH)NUIR8a1n#S?Yej'h8^58UbZd+^FKD*T@;6A"
+    "7aQC[K8d-(v6GI$x:T<&'Gp5Uf>@M.*J:;$-rv29'M]8qMv-tLp,'886iaC=Hb*YJoKJ,(j%K=H`K.v9HggqBIiZu'QvBT.#=)0ukruV&.)3=(^1`o*Pj4<-<aN((^7('#Z0wK#5GX@7"
+    "u][`*S^43933A4rl][`*O4CgLEl]v$1Q3AeF37dbXk,.)vj#x'd`;qgbQR%FW,2(?LO=s%Sc68%NP'##Aotl8x=BE#j1UD([3$M(]UI2LX3RpKN@;/#f'f/&_mt&F)XdF<9t4)Qa.*kT"
+    "LwQ'(TTB9.xH'>#MJ+gLq9-##@HuZPN0]u:h7.T..G:;$/Usj(T7`Q8tT72LnYl<-qx8;-HV7Q-&Xdx%1a,hC=0u+HlsV>nuIQL-5<N?)NBS)QN*_I,?&)2'IM%L3I)X((e/dl2&8'<M"
+    ":^#M*Q+[T.Xri.LYS3v%fF`68h;b-X[/En'CR.q7E)p'/kle2HM,u;^%OKC-N+Ll%F9CF<Nf'^#t2L,;27W:0O@6##U6W7:$rJfLWHj$#)woqBefIZ.PK<b*t7ed;p*_m;4ExK#h@&]>"
+    "_>@kXQtMacfD.m-VAb8;IReM3$wf0''hra*so568'Ip&vRs849'MRYSp%:t:h5qSgwpEr$B>Q,;s(C#$)`svQuF$##-D,##,g68@2[T;.XSdN9Qe)rpt._K-#5wF)sP'##p#C0c%-Gb%"
+    "hd+<-j'Ai*x&&HMkT]C'OSl##5RG[JXaHN;d'uA#x._U;.`PU@(Z3dt4r152@:v,'R.Sj'w#0<-;kPI)FfJ&#AYJ&#//)>-k=m=*XnK$>=)72L]0I%>.G690a:$##<,);?;72#?x9+d;"
+    "^V'9;jY@;)br#q^YQpx:X#Te$Z^'=-=bGhLf:D6&bNwZ9-ZD#n^9HhLMr5G;']d&6'wYmTFmL<LD)F^%[tC'8;+9E#C$g%#5Y>q9wI>P(9mI[>kC-ekLC/R&CH+s'B;K-M6$EB%is00:"
+    "+A4[7xks.LrNk0&E)wILYF@2L'0Nb$+pv<(2.768/FrY&h$^3i&@+G%JT'<-,v`3;_)I9M^AE]CN?Cl2AZg+%4iTpT3<n-&%H%b<FDj2M<hH=&Eh<2Len$b*aTX=-8QxN)k11IM1c^j%"
+    "9s<L<NFSo)B?+<-(GxsF,^-Eh@$4dXhN$+#rxK8'je'D7k`e;)2pYwPA'_p9&@^18ml1^[@g4t*[JOa*[=Qp7(qJ_oOL^('7fB&Hq-:sf,sNj8xq^>$U4O]GKx'm9)b@p7YsvK3w^YR-"
+    "CdQ*:Ir<($u&)#(&?L9Rg3H)4fiEp^iI9O8KnTj,]H?D*r7'M;PwZ9K0E^k&-cpI;.p/6_vwoFMV<->#%Xi.LxVnrU(4&8/P+:hLSKj$#U%]49t'I:rgMi'FL@a:0Y-uA[39',(vbma*"
+    "hU%<-SRF`Tt:542R_VV$p@[p8DV[A,?1839FWdF<TddF<9Ah-6&9tWoDlh]&1SpGMq>Ti1O*H&#(AL8[_P%.M>v^-))qOT*F5Cq0`Ye%+$B6i:7@0IX<N+T+0MlMBPQ*Vj>SsD<U4JHY"
+    "8kD2)2fU/M#$e.)T4,_=8hLim[&);?UkK'-x?'(:siIfL<$pFM`i<?%W(mGDHM%>iWP,##P`%/L<eXi:@Z9C.7o=@(pXdAO/NLQ8lPl+HPOQa8wD8=^GlPa8TKI1CjhsCTSLJM'/Wl>-"
+    "S(qw%sf/@%#B6;/U7K]uZbi^Oc^2n<bhPmUkMw>%t<)'mEVE''n`WnJra$^TKvX5B>;_aSEK',(hwa0:i4G?.Bci.(X[?b*($,=-n<.Q%`(X=?+@Am*Js0&=3bh8K]mL<LoNs'6,'85`"
+    "0?t/'_U59@]ddF<#LdF<eWdF<OuN/45rY<-L@&#+fm>69=Lb,OcZV/);TTm8VI;?%OtJ<(b4mq7M6:u?KRdF<gR@2L=FNU-<b[(9c/ML3m;Z[$oF3g)GAWqpARc=<ROu7cL5l;-[A]%/"
+    "+fsd;l#SafT/f*W]0=O'$(Tb<[)*@e775R-:Yob%g*>l*:xP?Yb.5)%w_I?7uk5JC+FS(m#i'k.'a0i)9<7b'fs'59hq$*5Uhv##pi^8+hIEBF`nvo`;'l0.^S1<-wUK2/Coh58KKhLj"
+    "M=SO*rfO`+qC`W-On.=AJ56>>i2@2LH6A:&5q`?9I3@@'04&p2/LVa*T-4<-i3;M9UvZd+N7>b*eIwg:CC)c<>nO&#<IGe;__.thjZl<%w(Wk2xmp4Q@I#I9,DF]u7-P=.-_:YJ]aS@V"
+    "?6*C()dOp7:WL,b&3Rg/.cmM9&r^>$(>.Z-I&J(Q0Hd5Q%7Co-b`-c<N(6r@ip+AurK<m86QIth*#v;-OBqi+L7wDE-Ir8K['m+DDSLwK&/.?-V%U_%3:qKNu$_b*B-kp7NaD'QdWQPK"
+    "Yq[@>P)hI;*_F]u`Rb[.j8_Q/<&>uu+VsH$sM9TA%?)(vmJ80),P7E>)tjD%2L=-t#fK[%`v=Q8<FfNkgg^oIbah*#8/Qt$F&:K*-(N/'+1vMB,u()-a.VUU*#[e%gAAO(S>WlA2);Sa"
+    ">gXm8YB`1d@K#n]76-a$U,mF<fX]idqd)<3,]J7JmW4`6]uks=4-72L(jEk+:bJ0M^q-8Dm_Z?0olP1C9Sa&H[d&c$ooQUj]Exd*3ZM@-WGW2%s',B-_M%>%Ul:#/'xoFM9QX-$.QN'>"
+    "[%$Z$uF6pA6Ki2O5:8w*vP1<-1`[G,)-m#>0`P&#eb#.3i)rtB61(o'$?X3B</R90;eZ]%Ncq;-Tl]#F>2Qft^ae_5tKL9MUe9b*sLEQ95C&`=G?@Mj=wh*'3E>=-<)Gt*Iw)'QG:`@I"
+    "wOf7&]1i'S01B+Ev/Nac#9S;=;YQpg_6U`*kVY39xK,[/6Aj7:'1Bm-_1EYfa1+o&o4hp7KN_Q(OlIo@S%;jVdn0'1<Vc52=u`3^o-n1'g4v58Hj&6_t7$##?M)c<$bgQ_'SY((-xkA#"
+    "Y(,p'H9rIVY-b,'%bCPF7.J<Up^,(dU1VY*5#WkTU>h19w,WQhLI)3S#f$2(eb,jr*b;3Vw]*7NH%$c4Vs,eD9>XW8?N]o+(*pgC%/72LV-u<Hp,3@e^9UB1J+ak9-TN/mhKPg+AJYd$"
+    "MlvAF_jCK*.O-^(63adMT->W%iewS8W6m2rtCpo'RS1R84=@paTKt)>=%&1[)*vp'u+x,VrwN;&]kuO9JDbg=pO$J*.jVe;u'm0dr9l,<*wMK*Oe=g8lV_KEBFkO'oU]^=[-792#ok,)"
+    "i]lR8qQ2oA8wcRCZ^7w/Njh;?.stX?Q1>S1q4Bn$)K1<-rGdO'$Wr.Lc.CG)$/*JL4tNR/,SVO3,aUw'DJN:)Ss;wGn9A32ijw%FL+Z0Fn.U9;reSq)bmI32U==5ALuG&#Vf1398/pVo"
+    "1*c-(aY168o<`JsSbk-,1N;$>0:OUas(3:8Z972LSfF8eb=c-;>SPw7.6hn3m`9^Xkn(r.qS[0;T%&Qc=+STRxX'q1BNk3&*eu2;&8q$&x>Q#Q7^Tf+6<(d%ZVmj2bDi%.3L2n+4W'$P"
+    "iDDG)g,r%+?,$@?uou5tSe2aN_AQU*<h`e-GI7)?OK2A.d7_c)?wQ5AS@DL3r#7fSkgl6-++D:'A,uq7SvlB$pcpH'q3n0#_%dY#xCpr-l<F0NR@-##FEV6NTF6##$l84N1w?AO>'IAO"
+    "URQ##V^Fv-XFbGM7Fl(N<3DhLGF%q.1rC$#:T__&Pi68%0xi_&[qFJ(77j_&JWoF.V735&T,[R*:xFR*K5>>#`bW-?4Ne_&6Ne_&6Ne_&n`kr-#GJcM6X;uM6X;uM(.a..^2TkL%oR(#"
+    ";u.T%fAr%4tJ8&><1=GHZ_+m9/#H1F^R#SC#*N=BA9(D?v[UiFY>>^8p,KKF.W]L29uLkLlu/+4T<XoIB&hx=T1PcDaB&;HH+-AFr?(m9HZV)FKS8JCw;SD=6[^/DZUL`EUDf]GGlG&>"
+    "w$)F./^n3+rlo+DB;5sIYGNk+i1t-69Jg--0pao7Sm#K)pdHW&;LuDNH@H>#/X-TI(;P>#,Gc>#0Su>#4`1?#8lC?#<xU?#@.i?#D:%@#HF7@#LRI@#P_[@#Tkn@#Xw*A#]-=A#a9OA#"
+    "d<F&#*;G##.GY##2Sl##6`($#:l:$#>xL$#B.`$#F:r$#JF.%#NR@%#R_R%#Vke%#Zww%#_-4&#3^Rh%Sflr-k'MS.o?.5/sWel/wpEM0%3'/1)K^f1-d>G21&v(35>V`39V7A4=onx4"
+    "A1OY5EI0;6Ibgr6M$HS7Q<)58C5w,;WoA*#[%T*#`1g*#d=#+#hI5+#lUG+#pbY+#tnl+#x$),#&1;,#*=M,#.I`,#2Ur,#6b.-#;w[H#iQtA#m^0B#qjBB#uvTB##-hB#'9$C#+E6C#"
+    "/QHC#3^ZC#7jmC#;v)D#?,<D#C8ND#GDaD#KPsD#O]/E#g1A5#KA*1#gC17#MGd;#8(02#L-d3#rWM4#Hga1#,<w0#T.j<#O#'2#CYN1#qa^:#_4m3#o@/=#eG8=#t8J5#`+78#4uI-#"
+    "m3B2#SB[8#Q0@8#i[*9#iOn8#1Nm;#^sN9#qh<9#:=x-#P;K2#$%X9#bC+.#Rg;<#mN=.#MTF.#RZO.#2?)4#Y#(/#[)1/#b;L/#dAU/#0Sv;#lY$0#n`-0#sf60#(F24#wrH0#%/e0#"
+    "TmD<#%JSMFove:CTBEXI:<eh2g)B,3h2^G3i;#d3jD>)4kMYD4lVu`4m`:&5niUA5@(A5BA1]PBB:xlBCC=2CDLXMCEUtiCf&0g2'tN?PGT4CPGT4CPGT4CPGT4CPGT4CPGT4CPGT4CP"
+    "GT4CPGT4CPGT4CPGT4CPGT4CPGT4CP-qekC`.9kEg^+F$kwViFJTB&5KTB&5KTB&5KTB&5KTB&5KTB&5KTB&5KTB&5KTB&5KTB&5KTB&5KTB&5KTB&5KTB&5KTB&5o,^<-28ZI'O?;xp"
+    "O?;xpO?;xpO?;xpO?;xpO?;xpO?;xpO?;xpO?;xpO?;xpO?;xpO?;xpO?;xpO?;xp;7q-#lLYI:xvD=#";
+
+static const char* GetDefaultCompressedFontDataTTFBase85()
+{
+    return proggy_clean_ttf_compressed_data_base85;
+}
+
+#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE
diff --git a/dependencies/src/imgui/imgui_impl_opengl3.cpp b/dependencies/src/imgui/imgui_impl_opengl3.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b7587d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/src/imgui/imgui_impl_opengl3.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,910 @@
+// dear imgui: Renderer Backend for modern OpenGL with shaders / programmatic pipeline
+// - Desktop GL: 2.x 3.x 4.x
+// - Embedded GL: ES 2.0 (WebGL 1.0), ES 3.0 (WebGL 2.0)
+// This needs to be used along with a Platform Backend (e.g. GLFW, SDL, Win32, custom..)
+
+// Implemented features:
+//  [X] Renderer: User texture binding. Use 'GLuint' OpenGL texture identifier as void*/ImTextureID. Read the FAQ about ImTextureID!
+//  [X] Renderer: Multi-viewport support (multiple windows). Enable with 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable'.
+//  [x] Renderer: Large meshes support (64k+ vertices) with 16-bit indices (Desktop OpenGL only).
+
+// You can use unmodified imgui_impl_* files in your project. See examples/ folder for examples of using this.
+// Prefer including the entire imgui/ repository into your project (either as a copy or as a submodule), and only build the backends you need.
+// If you are new to Dear ImGui, read documentation from the docs/ folder + read the top of imgui.cpp.
+// Read online: https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/tree/master/docs
+
+// CHANGELOG
+// (minor and older changes stripped away, please see git history for details)
+//  2022-XX-XX: Platform: Added support for multiple windows via the ImGuiPlatformIO interface.
+//  2022-05-23: OpenGL: Reworking 2021-12-15 "Using buffer orphaning" so it only happens on Intel GPU, seems to cause problems otherwise. (#4468, #4825, #4832, #5127).
+//  2022-05-13: OpenGL: Fix state corruption on OpenGL ES 2.0 due to not preserving GL_ELEMENT_ARRAY_BUFFER_BINDING and vertex attribute states.
+//  2021-12-15: OpenGL: Using buffer orphaning + glBufferSubData(), seems to fix leaks with multi-viewports with some Intel HD drivers.
+//  2021-08-23: OpenGL: Fixed ES 3.0 shader ("#version 300 es") use normal precision floats to avoid wobbly rendering at HD resolutions.
+//  2021-08-19: OpenGL: Embed and use our own minimal GL loader (imgui_impl_opengl3_loader.h), removing requirement and support for third-party loader.
+//  2021-06-29: Reorganized backend to pull data from a single structure to facilitate usage with multiple-contexts (all g_XXXX access changed to bd->XXXX).
+//  2021-06-25: OpenGL: Use OES_vertex_array extension on Emscripten + backup/restore current state.
+//  2021-06-21: OpenGL: Destroy individual vertex/fragment shader objects right after they are linked into the main shader.
+//  2021-05-24: OpenGL: Access GL_CLIP_ORIGIN when "GL_ARB_clip_control" extension is detected, inside of just OpenGL 4.5 version.
+//  2021-05-19: OpenGL: Replaced direct access to ImDrawCmd::TextureId with a call to ImDrawCmd::GetTexID(). (will become a requirement)
+//  2021-04-06: OpenGL: Don't try to read GL_CLIP_ORIGIN unless we're OpenGL 4.5 or greater.
+//  2021-02-18: OpenGL: Change blending equation to preserve alpha in output buffer.
+//  2021-01-03: OpenGL: Backup, setup and restore GL_STENCIL_TEST state.
+//  2020-10-23: OpenGL: Backup, setup and restore GL_PRIMITIVE_RESTART state.
+//  2020-10-15: OpenGL: Use glGetString(GL_VERSION) instead of glGetIntegerv(GL_MAJOR_VERSION, ...) when the later returns zero (e.g. Desktop GL 2.x)
+//  2020-09-17: OpenGL: Fix to avoid compiling/calling glBindSampler() on ES or pre 3.3 context which have the defines set by a loader.
+//  2020-07-10: OpenGL: Added support for glad2 OpenGL loader.
+//  2020-05-08: OpenGL: Made default GLSL version 150 (instead of 130) on OSX.
+//  2020-04-21: OpenGL: Fixed handling of glClipControl(GL_UPPER_LEFT) by inverting projection matrix.
+//  2020-04-12: OpenGL: Fixed context version check mistakenly testing for 4.0+ instead of 3.2+ to enable ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset.
+//  2020-03-24: OpenGL: Added support for glbinding 2.x OpenGL loader.
+//  2020-01-07: OpenGL: Added support for glbinding 3.x OpenGL loader.
+//  2019-10-25: OpenGL: Using a combination of GL define and runtime GL version to decide whether to use glDrawElementsBaseVertex(). Fix building with pre-3.2 GL loaders.
+//  2019-09-22: OpenGL: Detect default GL loader using __has_include compiler facility.
+//  2019-09-16: OpenGL: Tweak initialization code to allow application calling ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_CreateFontsTexture() before the first NewFrame() call.
+//  2019-05-29: OpenGL: Desktop GL only: Added support for large mesh (64K+ vertices), enable ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset flag.
+//  2019-04-30: OpenGL: Added support for special ImDrawCallback_ResetRenderState callback to reset render state.
+//  2019-03-29: OpenGL: Not calling glBindBuffer more than necessary in the render loop.
+//  2019-03-15: OpenGL: Added a GL call + comments in ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_Init() to detect uninitialized GL function loaders early.
+//  2019-03-03: OpenGL: Fix support for ES 2.0 (WebGL 1.0).
+//  2019-02-20: OpenGL: Fix for OSX not supporting OpenGL 4.5, we don't try to read GL_CLIP_ORIGIN even if defined by the headers/loader.
+//  2019-02-11: OpenGL: Projecting clipping rectangles correctly using draw_data->FramebufferScale to allow multi-viewports for retina display.
+//  2019-02-01: OpenGL: Using GLSL 410 shaders for any version over 410 (e.g. 430, 450).
+//  2018-11-30: Misc: Setting up io.BackendRendererName so it can be displayed in the About Window.
+//  2018-11-13: OpenGL: Support for GL 4.5's glClipControl(GL_UPPER_LEFT) / GL_CLIP_ORIGIN.
+//  2018-08-29: OpenGL: Added support for more OpenGL loaders: glew and glad, with comments indicative that any loader can be used.
+//  2018-08-09: OpenGL: Default to OpenGL ES 3 on iOS and Android. GLSL version default to "#version 300 ES".
+//  2018-07-30: OpenGL: Support for GLSL 300 ES and 410 core. Fixes for Emscripten compilation.
+//  2018-07-10: OpenGL: Support for more GLSL versions (based on the GLSL version string). Added error output when shaders fail to compile/link.
+//  2018-06-08: Misc: Extracted imgui_impl_opengl3.cpp/.h away from the old combined GLFW/SDL+OpenGL3 examples.
+//  2018-06-08: OpenGL: Use draw_data->DisplayPos and draw_data->DisplaySize to setup projection matrix and clipping rectangle.
+//  2018-05-25: OpenGL: Removed unnecessary backup/restore of GL_ELEMENT_ARRAY_BUFFER_BINDING since this is part of the VAO state.
+//  2018-05-14: OpenGL: Making the call to glBindSampler() optional so 3.2 context won't fail if the function is a NULL pointer.
+//  2018-03-06: OpenGL: Added const char* glsl_version parameter to ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_Init() so user can override the GLSL version e.g. "#version 150".
+//  2018-02-23: OpenGL: Create the VAO in the render function so the setup can more easily be used with multiple shared GL context.
+//  2018-02-16: Misc: Obsoleted the io.RenderDrawListsFn callback and exposed ImGui_ImplSdlGL3_RenderDrawData() in the .h file so you can call it yourself.
+//  2018-01-07: OpenGL: Changed GLSL shader version from 330 to 150.
+//  2017-09-01: OpenGL: Save and restore current bound sampler. Save and restore current polygon mode.
+//  2017-05-01: OpenGL: Fixed save and restore of current blend func state.
+//  2017-05-01: OpenGL: Fixed save and restore of current GL_ACTIVE_TEXTURE.
+//  2016-09-05: OpenGL: Fixed save and restore of current scissor rectangle.
+//  2016-07-29: OpenGL: Explicitly setting GL_UNPACK_ROW_LENGTH to reduce issues because SDL changes it. (#752)
+
+//----------------------------------------
+// OpenGL    GLSL      GLSL
+// version   version   string
+//----------------------------------------
+//  2.0       110       "#version 110"
+//  2.1       120       "#version 120"
+//  3.0       130       "#version 130"
+//  3.1       140       "#version 140"
+//  3.2       150       "#version 150"
+//  3.3       330       "#version 330 core"
+//  4.0       400       "#version 400 core"
+//  4.1       410       "#version 410 core"
+//  4.2       420       "#version 410 core"
+//  4.3       430       "#version 430 core"
+//  ES 2.0    100       "#version 100"      = WebGL 1.0
+//  ES 3.0    300       "#version 300 es"   = WebGL 2.0
+//----------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(_CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS)
+#define _CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS
+#endif
+
+#include "imgui.h"
+#include "imgui_impl_opengl3.h"
+#include <stdio.h>
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER <= 1500 // MSVC 2008 or earlier
+#include <stddef.h>     // intptr_t
+#else
+#include <stdint.h>     // intptr_t
+#endif
+#if defined(__APPLE__)
+#include <TargetConditionals.h>
+#endif
+
+// Clang warnings with -Weverything
+#if defined(__clang__)
+#pragma clang diagnostic push
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast"     // warning: use of old-style cast
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wsign-conversion"    // warning: implicit conversion changes signedness
+#if __has_warning("-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant")
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant"
+#endif
+#endif
+
+// GL includes
+#if defined(IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_ES2)
+#if (defined(__APPLE__) && (TARGET_OS_IOS || TARGET_OS_TV))
+#include <OpenGLES/ES2/gl.h>    // Use GL ES 2
+#else
+#include <GLES2/gl2.h>          // Use GL ES 2
+#endif
+#if defined(__EMSCRIPTEN__)
+#ifndef GL_GLEXT_PROTOTYPES
+#define GL_GLEXT_PROTOTYPES
+#endif
+#include <GLES2/gl2ext.h>
+#endif
+#elif defined(IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_ES3)
+#if (defined(__APPLE__) && (TARGET_OS_IOS || TARGET_OS_TV))
+#include <OpenGLES/ES3/gl.h>    // Use GL ES 3
+#else
+#include <GLES3/gl3.h>          // Use GL ES 3
+#endif
+#elif !defined(IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_LOADER_CUSTOM)
+// Modern desktop OpenGL doesn't have a standard portable header file to load OpenGL function pointers.
+// Helper libraries are often used for this purpose! Here we are using our own minimal custom loader based on gl3w.
+// In the rest of your app/engine, you can use another loader of your choice (gl3w, glew, glad, glbinding, glext, glLoadGen, etc.).
+// If you happen to be developing a new feature for this backend (imgui_impl_opengl3.cpp):
+// - You may need to regenerate imgui_impl_opengl3_loader.h to add new symbols. See https://github.com/dearimgui/gl3w_stripped
+// - You can temporarily use an unstripped version. See https://github.com/dearimgui/gl3w_stripped/releases
+// Changes to this backend using new APIs should be accompanied by a regenerated stripped loader version.
+#define IMGL3W_IMPL
+#include "imgui_impl_opengl3_loader.h"
+#endif
+
+// Vertex arrays are not supported on ES2/WebGL1 unless Emscripten which uses an extension
+#ifndef IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_ES2
+#define IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_USE_VERTEX_ARRAY
+#elif defined(__EMSCRIPTEN__)
+#define IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_USE_VERTEX_ARRAY
+#define glBindVertexArray       glBindVertexArrayOES
+#define glGenVertexArrays       glGenVertexArraysOES
+#define glDeleteVertexArrays    glDeleteVertexArraysOES
+#define GL_VERTEX_ARRAY_BINDING GL_VERTEX_ARRAY_BINDING_OES
+#endif
+
+// Desktop GL 2.0+ has glPolygonMode() which GL ES and WebGL don't have.
+#ifdef GL_POLYGON_MODE
+#define IMGUI_IMPL_HAS_POLYGON_MODE
+#endif
+
+// Desktop GL 3.2+ has glDrawElementsBaseVertex() which GL ES and WebGL don't have.
+#if !defined(IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_ES2) && !defined(IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_ES3) && defined(GL_VERSION_3_2)
+#define IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_MAY_HAVE_VTX_OFFSET
+#endif
+
+// Desktop GL 3.3+ has glBindSampler()
+#if !defined(IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_ES2) && !defined(IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_ES3) && defined(GL_VERSION_3_3)
+#define IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_MAY_HAVE_BIND_SAMPLER
+#endif
+
+// Desktop GL 3.1+ has GL_PRIMITIVE_RESTART state
+#if !defined(IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_ES2) && !defined(IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_ES3) && defined(GL_VERSION_3_1)
+#define IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_MAY_HAVE_PRIMITIVE_RESTART
+#endif
+
+// Desktop GL use extension detection
+#if !defined(IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_ES2) && !defined(IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_ES3)
+#define IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_MAY_HAVE_EXTENSIONS
+#endif
+
+// OpenGL Data
+struct ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_Data
+{
+    GLuint          GlVersion;               // Extracted at runtime using GL_MAJOR_VERSION, GL_MINOR_VERSION queries (e.g. 320 for GL 3.2)
+    char            GlslVersionString[32];   // Specified by user or detected based on compile time GL settings.
+    GLuint          FontTexture;
+    GLuint          ShaderHandle;
+    GLint           AttribLocationTex;       // Uniforms location
+    GLint           AttribLocationProjMtx;
+    GLuint          AttribLocationVtxPos;    // Vertex attributes location
+    GLuint          AttribLocationVtxUV;
+    GLuint          AttribLocationVtxColor;
+    unsigned int    VboHandle, ElementsHandle;
+    GLsizeiptr      VertexBufferSize;
+    GLsizeiptr      IndexBufferSize;
+    bool            HasClipOrigin;
+    bool            UseBufferSubData;
+
+    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_Data() { memset((void*)this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+};
+
+// Backend data stored in io.BackendRendererUserData to allow support for multiple Dear ImGui contexts
+// It is STRONGLY preferred that you use docking branch with multi-viewports (== single Dear ImGui context + multiple windows) instead of multiple Dear ImGui contexts.
+static ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_Data* ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_GetBackendData()
+{
+    return ImGui::GetCurrentContext() ? (ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_Data*)ImGui::GetIO().BackendRendererUserData : NULL;
+}
+
+// Forward Declarations
+static void ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_InitPlatformInterface();
+static void ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_ShutdownPlatformInterface();
+
+// OpenGL vertex attribute state (for ES 1.0 and ES 2.0 only)
+#ifndef IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_USE_VERTEX_ARRAY
+struct ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_VtxAttribState
+{
+    GLint   Enabled, Size, Type, Normalized, Stride;
+    GLvoid* Ptr;
+
+    void GetState(GLint index)
+    {
+        glGetVertexAttribiv(index, GL_VERTEX_ATTRIB_ARRAY_ENABLED, &Enabled);
+        glGetVertexAttribiv(index, GL_VERTEX_ATTRIB_ARRAY_SIZE, &Size);
+        glGetVertexAttribiv(index, GL_VERTEX_ATTRIB_ARRAY_TYPE, &Type);
+        glGetVertexAttribiv(index, GL_VERTEX_ATTRIB_ARRAY_NORMALIZED, &Normalized);
+        glGetVertexAttribiv(index, GL_VERTEX_ATTRIB_ARRAY_STRIDE, &Stride);
+        glGetVertexAttribPointerv(index, GL_VERTEX_ATTRIB_ARRAY_POINTER, &Ptr);
+    }
+    void SetState(GLint index)
+    {
+        glVertexAttribPointer(index, Size, Type, (GLboolean)Normalized, Stride, Ptr);
+        if (Enabled) glEnableVertexAttribArray(index); else glDisableVertexAttribArray(index);
+    }
+};
+#endif
+
+// Functions
+bool    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_Init(const char* glsl_version)
+{
+    ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+    IM_ASSERT(io.BackendRendererUserData == NULL && "Already initialized a renderer backend!");
+
+    // Initialize our loader
+#if !defined(IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_ES2) && !defined(IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_ES3) && !defined(IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_LOADER_CUSTOM)
+    if (imgl3wInit() != 0)
+    {
+        fprintf(stderr, "Failed to initialize OpenGL loader!\n");
+        return false;
+    }
+#endif
+
+    // Setup backend capabilities flags
+    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_Data* bd = IM_NEW(ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_Data)();
+    io.BackendRendererUserData = (void*)bd;
+    io.BackendRendererName = "imgui_impl_opengl3";
+
+    // Query for GL version (e.g. 320 for GL 3.2)
+#if !defined(IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_ES2)
+    GLint major = 0;
+    GLint minor = 0;
+    glGetIntegerv(GL_MAJOR_VERSION, &major);
+    glGetIntegerv(GL_MINOR_VERSION, &minor);
+    if (major == 0 && minor == 0)
+    {
+        // Query GL_VERSION in desktop GL 2.x, the string will start with "<major>.<minor>"
+        const char* gl_version = (const char*)glGetString(GL_VERSION);
+        sscanf(gl_version, "%d.%d", &major, &minor);
+    }
+    bd->GlVersion = (GLuint)(major * 100 + minor * 10);
+
+    // Query vendor to enable glBufferSubData kludge
+#ifdef _WIN32
+    if (const char* vendor = (const char*)glGetString(GL_VENDOR))
+        if (strncmp(vendor, "Intel", 5) == 0)
+            bd->UseBufferSubData = true;
+#endif
+    //printf("GL_MAJOR_VERSION = %d\nGL_MINOR_VERSION = %d\nGL_VENDOR = '%s'\nGL_RENDERER = '%s'\n", major, minor, (const char*)glGetString(GL_VENDOR), (const char*)glGetString(GL_RENDERER)); // [DEBUG]
+#else
+    bd->GlVersion = 200; // GLES 2
+#endif
+
+#ifdef IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_MAY_HAVE_VTX_OFFSET
+    if (bd->GlVersion >= 320)
+        io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasVtxOffset;  // We can honor the ImDrawCmd::VtxOffset field, allowing for large meshes.
+#endif
+    io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_RendererHasViewports;  // We can create multi-viewports on the Renderer side (optional)
+
+    // Store GLSL version string so we can refer to it later in case we recreate shaders.
+    // Note: GLSL version is NOT the same as GL version. Leave this to NULL if unsure.
+    if (glsl_version == NULL)
+    {
+#if defined(IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_ES2)
+        glsl_version = "#version 100";
+#elif defined(IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_ES3)
+        glsl_version = "#version 300 es";
+#elif defined(__APPLE__)
+        glsl_version = "#version 150";
+#else
+        glsl_version = "#version 130";
+#endif
+    }
+    IM_ASSERT((int)strlen(glsl_version) + 2 < IM_ARRAYSIZE(bd->GlslVersionString));
+    strcpy(bd->GlslVersionString, glsl_version);
+    strcat(bd->GlslVersionString, "\n");
+
+    // Make an arbitrary GL call (we don't actually need the result)
+    // IF YOU GET A CRASH HERE: it probably means the OpenGL function loader didn't do its job. Let us know!
+    GLint current_texture;
+    glGetIntegerv(GL_TEXTURE_BINDING_2D, &current_texture);
+
+    // Detect extensions we support
+    bd->HasClipOrigin = (bd->GlVersion >= 450);
+#ifdef IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_MAY_HAVE_EXTENSIONS
+    GLint num_extensions = 0;
+    glGetIntegerv(GL_NUM_EXTENSIONS, &num_extensions);
+    for (GLint i = 0; i < num_extensions; i++)
+    {
+        const char* extension = (const char*)glGetStringi(GL_EXTENSIONS, i);
+        if (extension != NULL && strcmp(extension, "GL_ARB_clip_control") == 0)
+            bd->HasClipOrigin = true;
+    }
+#endif
+
+    if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable)
+        ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_InitPlatformInterface();
+
+    return true;
+}
+
+void    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_Shutdown()
+{
+    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_GetBackendData();
+    IM_ASSERT(bd != NULL && "No renderer backend to shutdown, or already shutdown?");
+    ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+
+    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_ShutdownPlatformInterface();
+    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_DestroyDeviceObjects();
+    io.BackendRendererName = NULL;
+    io.BackendRendererUserData = NULL;
+    IM_DELETE(bd);
+}
+
+void    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_NewFrame()
+{
+    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_GetBackendData();
+    IM_ASSERT(bd != NULL && "Did you call ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_Init()?");
+
+    if (!bd->ShaderHandle)
+        ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_CreateDeviceObjects();
+}
+
+static void ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_SetupRenderState(ImDrawData* draw_data, int fb_width, int fb_height, GLuint vertex_array_object)
+{
+    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_GetBackendData();
+
+    // Setup render state: alpha-blending enabled, no face culling, no depth testing, scissor enabled, polygon fill
+    glEnable(GL_BLEND);
+    glBlendEquation(GL_FUNC_ADD);
+    glBlendFuncSeparate(GL_SRC_ALPHA, GL_ONE_MINUS_SRC_ALPHA, GL_ONE, GL_ONE_MINUS_SRC_ALPHA);
+    glDisable(GL_CULL_FACE);
+    glDisable(GL_DEPTH_TEST);
+    glDisable(GL_STENCIL_TEST);
+    glEnable(GL_SCISSOR_TEST);
+#ifdef IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_MAY_HAVE_PRIMITIVE_RESTART
+    if (bd->GlVersion >= 310)
+        glDisable(GL_PRIMITIVE_RESTART);
+#endif
+#ifdef IMGUI_IMPL_HAS_POLYGON_MODE
+    glPolygonMode(GL_FRONT_AND_BACK, GL_FILL);
+#endif
+
+    // Support for GL 4.5 rarely used glClipControl(GL_UPPER_LEFT)
+#if defined(GL_CLIP_ORIGIN)
+    bool clip_origin_lower_left = true;
+    if (bd->HasClipOrigin)
+    {
+        GLenum current_clip_origin = 0; glGetIntegerv(GL_CLIP_ORIGIN, (GLint*)&current_clip_origin);
+        if (current_clip_origin == GL_UPPER_LEFT)
+            clip_origin_lower_left = false;
+    }
+#endif
+
+    // Setup viewport, orthographic projection matrix
+    // Our visible imgui space lies from draw_data->DisplayPos (top left) to draw_data->DisplayPos+data_data->DisplaySize (bottom right). DisplayPos is (0,0) for single viewport apps.
+    glViewport(0, 0, (GLsizei)fb_width, (GLsizei)fb_height);
+    float L = draw_data->DisplayPos.x;
+    float R = draw_data->DisplayPos.x + draw_data->DisplaySize.x;
+    float T = draw_data->DisplayPos.y;
+    float B = draw_data->DisplayPos.y + draw_data->DisplaySize.y;
+#if defined(GL_CLIP_ORIGIN)
+    if (!clip_origin_lower_left) { float tmp = T; T = B; B = tmp; } // Swap top and bottom if origin is upper left
+#endif
+    const float ortho_projection[4][4] =
+    {
+        { 2.0f/(R-L),   0.0f,         0.0f,   0.0f },
+        { 0.0f,         2.0f/(T-B),   0.0f,   0.0f },
+        { 0.0f,         0.0f,        -1.0f,   0.0f },
+        { (R+L)/(L-R),  (T+B)/(B-T),  0.0f,   1.0f },
+    };
+    glUseProgram(bd->ShaderHandle);
+    glUniform1i(bd->AttribLocationTex, 0);
+    glUniformMatrix4fv(bd->AttribLocationProjMtx, 1, GL_FALSE, &ortho_projection[0][0]);
+
+#ifdef IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_MAY_HAVE_BIND_SAMPLER
+    if (bd->GlVersion >= 330)
+        glBindSampler(0, 0); // We use combined texture/sampler state. Applications using GL 3.3 may set that otherwise.
+#endif
+
+    (void)vertex_array_object;
+#ifdef IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_USE_VERTEX_ARRAY
+    glBindVertexArray(vertex_array_object);
+#endif
+
+    // Bind vertex/index buffers and setup attributes for ImDrawVert
+    glBindBuffer(GL_ARRAY_BUFFER, bd->VboHandle);
+    glBindBuffer(GL_ELEMENT_ARRAY_BUFFER, bd->ElementsHandle);
+    glEnableVertexAttribArray(bd->AttribLocationVtxPos);
+    glEnableVertexAttribArray(bd->AttribLocationVtxUV);
+    glEnableVertexAttribArray(bd->AttribLocationVtxColor);
+    glVertexAttribPointer(bd->AttribLocationVtxPos,   2, GL_FLOAT,         GL_FALSE, sizeof(ImDrawVert), (GLvoid*)IM_OFFSETOF(ImDrawVert, pos));
+    glVertexAttribPointer(bd->AttribLocationVtxUV,    2, GL_FLOAT,         GL_FALSE, sizeof(ImDrawVert), (GLvoid*)IM_OFFSETOF(ImDrawVert, uv));
+    glVertexAttribPointer(bd->AttribLocationVtxColor, 4, GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, GL_TRUE,  sizeof(ImDrawVert), (GLvoid*)IM_OFFSETOF(ImDrawVert, col));
+}
+
+// OpenGL3 Render function.
+// Note that this implementation is little overcomplicated because we are saving/setting up/restoring every OpenGL state explicitly.
+// This is in order to be able to run within an OpenGL engine that doesn't do so.
+void    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_RenderDrawData(ImDrawData* draw_data)
+{
+    // Avoid rendering when minimized, scale coordinates for retina displays (screen coordinates != framebuffer coordinates)
+    int fb_width = (int)(draw_data->DisplaySize.x * draw_data->FramebufferScale.x);
+    int fb_height = (int)(draw_data->DisplaySize.y * draw_data->FramebufferScale.y);
+    if (fb_width <= 0 || fb_height <= 0)
+        return;
+
+    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_GetBackendData();
+
+    // Backup GL state
+    GLenum last_active_texture; glGetIntegerv(GL_ACTIVE_TEXTURE, (GLint*)&last_active_texture);
+    glActiveTexture(GL_TEXTURE0);
+    GLuint last_program; glGetIntegerv(GL_CURRENT_PROGRAM, (GLint*)&last_program);
+    GLuint last_texture; glGetIntegerv(GL_TEXTURE_BINDING_2D, (GLint*)&last_texture);
+#ifdef IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_MAY_HAVE_BIND_SAMPLER
+    GLuint last_sampler; if (bd->GlVersion >= 330) { glGetIntegerv(GL_SAMPLER_BINDING, (GLint*)&last_sampler); } else { last_sampler = 0; }
+#endif
+    GLuint last_array_buffer; glGetIntegerv(GL_ARRAY_BUFFER_BINDING, (GLint*)&last_array_buffer);
+#ifndef IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_USE_VERTEX_ARRAY
+    // This is part of VAO on OpenGL 3.0+ and OpenGL ES 3.0+.
+    GLint last_element_array_buffer; glGetIntegerv(GL_ELEMENT_ARRAY_BUFFER_BINDING, &last_element_array_buffer);
+    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_VtxAttribState last_vtx_attrib_state_pos; last_vtx_attrib_state_pos.GetState(bd->AttribLocationVtxPos);
+    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_VtxAttribState last_vtx_attrib_state_uv; last_vtx_attrib_state_uv.GetState(bd->AttribLocationVtxUV);
+    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_VtxAttribState last_vtx_attrib_state_color; last_vtx_attrib_state_color.GetState(bd->AttribLocationVtxColor);
+#endif
+#ifdef IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_USE_VERTEX_ARRAY
+    GLuint last_vertex_array_object; glGetIntegerv(GL_VERTEX_ARRAY_BINDING, (GLint*)&last_vertex_array_object);
+#endif
+#ifdef IMGUI_IMPL_HAS_POLYGON_MODE
+    GLint last_polygon_mode[2]; glGetIntegerv(GL_POLYGON_MODE, last_polygon_mode);
+#endif
+    GLint last_viewport[4]; glGetIntegerv(GL_VIEWPORT, last_viewport);
+    GLint last_scissor_box[4]; glGetIntegerv(GL_SCISSOR_BOX, last_scissor_box);
+    GLenum last_blend_src_rgb; glGetIntegerv(GL_BLEND_SRC_RGB, (GLint*)&last_blend_src_rgb);
+    GLenum last_blend_dst_rgb; glGetIntegerv(GL_BLEND_DST_RGB, (GLint*)&last_blend_dst_rgb);
+    GLenum last_blend_src_alpha; glGetIntegerv(GL_BLEND_SRC_ALPHA, (GLint*)&last_blend_src_alpha);
+    GLenum last_blend_dst_alpha; glGetIntegerv(GL_BLEND_DST_ALPHA, (GLint*)&last_blend_dst_alpha);
+    GLenum last_blend_equation_rgb; glGetIntegerv(GL_BLEND_EQUATION_RGB, (GLint*)&last_blend_equation_rgb);
+    GLenum last_blend_equation_alpha; glGetIntegerv(GL_BLEND_EQUATION_ALPHA, (GLint*)&last_blend_equation_alpha);
+    GLboolean last_enable_blend = glIsEnabled(GL_BLEND);
+    GLboolean last_enable_cull_face = glIsEnabled(GL_CULL_FACE);
+    GLboolean last_enable_depth_test = glIsEnabled(GL_DEPTH_TEST);
+    GLboolean last_enable_stencil_test = glIsEnabled(GL_STENCIL_TEST);
+    GLboolean last_enable_scissor_test = glIsEnabled(GL_SCISSOR_TEST);
+#ifdef IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_MAY_HAVE_PRIMITIVE_RESTART
+    GLboolean last_enable_primitive_restart = (bd->GlVersion >= 310) ? glIsEnabled(GL_PRIMITIVE_RESTART) : GL_FALSE;
+#endif
+
+    // Setup desired GL state
+    // Recreate the VAO every time (this is to easily allow multiple GL contexts to be rendered to. VAO are not shared among GL contexts)
+    // The renderer would actually work without any VAO bound, but then our VertexAttrib calls would overwrite the default one currently bound.
+    GLuint vertex_array_object = 0;
+#ifdef IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_USE_VERTEX_ARRAY
+    glGenVertexArrays(1, &vertex_array_object);
+#endif
+    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_SetupRenderState(draw_data, fb_width, fb_height, vertex_array_object);
+
+    // Will project scissor/clipping rectangles into framebuffer space
+    ImVec2 clip_off = draw_data->DisplayPos;         // (0,0) unless using multi-viewports
+    ImVec2 clip_scale = draw_data->FramebufferScale; // (1,1) unless using retina display which are often (2,2)
+
+    // Render command lists
+    for (int n = 0; n < draw_data->CmdListsCount; n++)
+    {
+        const ImDrawList* cmd_list = draw_data->CmdLists[n];
+
+        // Upload vertex/index buffers
+        // - On Intel windows drivers we got reports that regular glBufferData() led to accumulating leaks when using multi-viewports, so we started using orphaning + glBufferSubData(). (See https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/4468)
+        // - On NVIDIA drivers we got reports that using orphaning + glBufferSubData() led to glitches when using multi-viewports.
+        // - OpenGL drivers are in a very sorry state in 2022, for now we are switching code path based on vendors.
+        const GLsizeiptr vtx_buffer_size = (GLsizeiptr)cmd_list->VtxBuffer.Size * (int)sizeof(ImDrawVert);
+        const GLsizeiptr idx_buffer_size = (GLsizeiptr)cmd_list->IdxBuffer.Size * (int)sizeof(ImDrawIdx);
+        if (bd->UseBufferSubData)
+        {
+            if (bd->VertexBufferSize < vtx_buffer_size)
+            {
+                bd->VertexBufferSize = vtx_buffer_size;
+                glBufferData(GL_ARRAY_BUFFER, bd->VertexBufferSize, NULL, GL_STREAM_DRAW);
+            }
+            if (bd->IndexBufferSize < idx_buffer_size)
+            {
+                bd->IndexBufferSize = idx_buffer_size;
+                glBufferData(GL_ELEMENT_ARRAY_BUFFER, bd->IndexBufferSize, NULL, GL_STREAM_DRAW);
+            }
+            glBufferSubData(GL_ARRAY_BUFFER, 0, vtx_buffer_size, (const GLvoid*)cmd_list->VtxBuffer.Data);
+            glBufferSubData(GL_ELEMENT_ARRAY_BUFFER, 0, idx_buffer_size, (const GLvoid*)cmd_list->IdxBuffer.Data);
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            glBufferData(GL_ARRAY_BUFFER, vtx_buffer_size, (const GLvoid*)cmd_list->VtxBuffer.Data, GL_STREAM_DRAW);
+            glBufferData(GL_ELEMENT_ARRAY_BUFFER, idx_buffer_size, (const GLvoid*)cmd_list->IdxBuffer.Data, GL_STREAM_DRAW);
+        }
+
+        for (int cmd_i = 0; cmd_i < cmd_list->CmdBuffer.Size; cmd_i++)
+        {
+            const ImDrawCmd* pcmd = &cmd_list->CmdBuffer[cmd_i];
+            if (pcmd->UserCallback != NULL)
+            {
+                // User callback, registered via ImDrawList::AddCallback()
+                // (ImDrawCallback_ResetRenderState is a special callback value used by the user to request the renderer to reset render state.)
+                if (pcmd->UserCallback == ImDrawCallback_ResetRenderState)
+                    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_SetupRenderState(draw_data, fb_width, fb_height, vertex_array_object);
+                else
+                    pcmd->UserCallback(cmd_list, pcmd);
+            }
+            else
+            {
+                // Project scissor/clipping rectangles into framebuffer space
+                ImVec2 clip_min((pcmd->ClipRect.x - clip_off.x) * clip_scale.x, (pcmd->ClipRect.y - clip_off.y) * clip_scale.y);
+                ImVec2 clip_max((pcmd->ClipRect.z - clip_off.x) * clip_scale.x, (pcmd->ClipRect.w - clip_off.y) * clip_scale.y);
+                if (clip_max.x <= clip_min.x || clip_max.y <= clip_min.y)
+                    continue;
+
+                // Apply scissor/clipping rectangle (Y is inverted in OpenGL)
+                glScissor((int)clip_min.x, (int)((float)fb_height - clip_max.y), (int)(clip_max.x - clip_min.x), (int)(clip_max.y - clip_min.y));
+
+                // Bind texture, Draw
+                glBindTexture(GL_TEXTURE_2D, (GLuint)(intptr_t)pcmd->GetTexID());
+#ifdef IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_MAY_HAVE_VTX_OFFSET
+                if (bd->GlVersion >= 320)
+                    glDrawElementsBaseVertex(GL_TRIANGLES, (GLsizei)pcmd->ElemCount, sizeof(ImDrawIdx) == 2 ? GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT : GL_UNSIGNED_INT, (void*)(intptr_t)(pcmd->IdxOffset * sizeof(ImDrawIdx)), (GLint)pcmd->VtxOffset);
+                else
+#endif
+                glDrawElements(GL_TRIANGLES, (GLsizei)pcmd->ElemCount, sizeof(ImDrawIdx) == 2 ? GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT : GL_UNSIGNED_INT, (void*)(intptr_t)(pcmd->IdxOffset * sizeof(ImDrawIdx)));
+            }
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Destroy the temporary VAO
+#ifdef IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_USE_VERTEX_ARRAY
+    glDeleteVertexArrays(1, &vertex_array_object);
+#endif
+
+    // Restore modified GL state
+    glUseProgram(last_program);
+    glBindTexture(GL_TEXTURE_2D, last_texture);
+#ifdef IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_MAY_HAVE_BIND_SAMPLER
+    if (bd->GlVersion >= 330)
+        glBindSampler(0, last_sampler);
+#endif
+    glActiveTexture(last_active_texture);
+#ifdef IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_USE_VERTEX_ARRAY
+    glBindVertexArray(last_vertex_array_object);
+#endif
+    glBindBuffer(GL_ARRAY_BUFFER, last_array_buffer);
+#ifndef IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_USE_VERTEX_ARRAY
+    glBindBuffer(GL_ELEMENT_ARRAY_BUFFER, last_element_array_buffer);
+    last_vtx_attrib_state_pos.SetState(bd->AttribLocationVtxPos);
+    last_vtx_attrib_state_uv.SetState(bd->AttribLocationVtxUV);
+    last_vtx_attrib_state_color.SetState(bd->AttribLocationVtxColor);
+#endif
+    glBlendEquationSeparate(last_blend_equation_rgb, last_blend_equation_alpha);
+    glBlendFuncSeparate(last_blend_src_rgb, last_blend_dst_rgb, last_blend_src_alpha, last_blend_dst_alpha);
+    if (last_enable_blend) glEnable(GL_BLEND); else glDisable(GL_BLEND);
+    if (last_enable_cull_face) glEnable(GL_CULL_FACE); else glDisable(GL_CULL_FACE);
+    if (last_enable_depth_test) glEnable(GL_DEPTH_TEST); else glDisable(GL_DEPTH_TEST);
+    if (last_enable_stencil_test) glEnable(GL_STENCIL_TEST); else glDisable(GL_STENCIL_TEST);
+    if (last_enable_scissor_test) glEnable(GL_SCISSOR_TEST); else glDisable(GL_SCISSOR_TEST);
+#ifdef IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_MAY_HAVE_PRIMITIVE_RESTART
+    if (bd->GlVersion >= 310) { if (last_enable_primitive_restart) glEnable(GL_PRIMITIVE_RESTART); else glDisable(GL_PRIMITIVE_RESTART); }
+#endif
+
+#ifdef IMGUI_IMPL_HAS_POLYGON_MODE
+    glPolygonMode(GL_FRONT_AND_BACK, (GLenum)last_polygon_mode[0]);
+#endif
+    glViewport(last_viewport[0], last_viewport[1], (GLsizei)last_viewport[2], (GLsizei)last_viewport[3]);
+    glScissor(last_scissor_box[0], last_scissor_box[1], (GLsizei)last_scissor_box[2], (GLsizei)last_scissor_box[3]);
+    (void)bd; // Not all compilation paths use this
+}
+
+bool ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_CreateFontsTexture()
+{
+    ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_GetBackendData();
+
+    // Build texture atlas
+    unsigned char* pixels;
+    int width, height;
+    io.Fonts->GetTexDataAsRGBA32(&pixels, &width, &height);   // Load as RGBA 32-bit (75% of the memory is wasted, but default font is so small) because it is more likely to be compatible with user's existing shaders. If your ImTextureId represent a higher-level concept than just a GL texture id, consider calling GetTexDataAsAlpha8() instead to save on GPU memory.
+
+    // Upload texture to graphics system
+    // (Bilinear sampling is required by default. Set 'io.Fonts->Flags |= ImFontAtlasFlags_NoBakedLines' or 'style.AntiAliasedLinesUseTex = false' to allow point/nearest sampling)
+    GLint last_texture;
+    glGetIntegerv(GL_TEXTURE_BINDING_2D, &last_texture);
+    glGenTextures(1, &bd->FontTexture);
+    glBindTexture(GL_TEXTURE_2D, bd->FontTexture);
+    glTexParameteri(GL_TEXTURE_2D, GL_TEXTURE_MIN_FILTER, GL_LINEAR);
+    glTexParameteri(GL_TEXTURE_2D, GL_TEXTURE_MAG_FILTER, GL_LINEAR);
+#ifdef GL_UNPACK_ROW_LENGTH // Not on WebGL/ES
+    glPixelStorei(GL_UNPACK_ROW_LENGTH, 0);
+#endif
+    glTexImage2D(GL_TEXTURE_2D, 0, GL_RGBA, width, height, 0, GL_RGBA, GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE, pixels);
+
+    // Store our identifier
+    io.Fonts->SetTexID((ImTextureID)(intptr_t)bd->FontTexture);
+
+    // Restore state
+    glBindTexture(GL_TEXTURE_2D, last_texture);
+
+    return true;
+}
+
+void ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_DestroyFontsTexture()
+{
+    ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_GetBackendData();
+    if (bd->FontTexture)
+    {
+        glDeleteTextures(1, &bd->FontTexture);
+        io.Fonts->SetTexID(0);
+        bd->FontTexture = 0;
+    }
+}
+
+// If you get an error please report on github. You may try different GL context version or GLSL version. See GL<>GLSL version table at the top of this file.
+static bool CheckShader(GLuint handle, const char* desc)
+{
+    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_GetBackendData();
+    GLint status = 0, log_length = 0;
+    glGetShaderiv(handle, GL_COMPILE_STATUS, &status);
+    glGetShaderiv(handle, GL_INFO_LOG_LENGTH, &log_length);
+    if ((GLboolean)status == GL_FALSE)
+        fprintf(stderr, "ERROR: ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_CreateDeviceObjects: failed to compile %s! With GLSL: %s\n", desc, bd->GlslVersionString);
+    if (log_length > 1)
+    {
+        ImVector<char> buf;
+        buf.resize((int)(log_length + 1));
+        glGetShaderInfoLog(handle, log_length, NULL, (GLchar*)buf.begin());
+        fprintf(stderr, "%s\n", buf.begin());
+    }
+    return (GLboolean)status == GL_TRUE;
+}
+
+// If you get an error please report on GitHub. You may try different GL context version or GLSL version.
+static bool CheckProgram(GLuint handle, const char* desc)
+{
+    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_GetBackendData();
+    GLint status = 0, log_length = 0;
+    glGetProgramiv(handle, GL_LINK_STATUS, &status);
+    glGetProgramiv(handle, GL_INFO_LOG_LENGTH, &log_length);
+    if ((GLboolean)status == GL_FALSE)
+        fprintf(stderr, "ERROR: ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_CreateDeviceObjects: failed to link %s! With GLSL %s\n", desc, bd->GlslVersionString);
+    if (log_length > 1)
+    {
+        ImVector<char> buf;
+        buf.resize((int)(log_length + 1));
+        glGetProgramInfoLog(handle, log_length, NULL, (GLchar*)buf.begin());
+        fprintf(stderr, "%s\n", buf.begin());
+    }
+    return (GLboolean)status == GL_TRUE;
+}
+
+bool    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_CreateDeviceObjects()
+{
+    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_GetBackendData();
+
+    // Backup GL state
+    GLint last_texture, last_array_buffer;
+    glGetIntegerv(GL_TEXTURE_BINDING_2D, &last_texture);
+    glGetIntegerv(GL_ARRAY_BUFFER_BINDING, &last_array_buffer);
+#ifdef IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_USE_VERTEX_ARRAY
+    GLint last_vertex_array;
+    glGetIntegerv(GL_VERTEX_ARRAY_BINDING, &last_vertex_array);
+#endif
+
+    // Parse GLSL version string
+    int glsl_version = 130;
+    sscanf(bd->GlslVersionString, "#version %d", &glsl_version);
+
+    const GLchar* vertex_shader_glsl_120 =
+        "uniform mat4 ProjMtx;\n"
+        "attribute vec2 Position;\n"
+        "attribute vec2 UV;\n"
+        "attribute vec4 Color;\n"
+        "varying vec2 Frag_UV;\n"
+        "varying vec4 Frag_Color;\n"
+        "void main()\n"
+        "{\n"
+        "    Frag_UV = UV;\n"
+        "    Frag_Color = Color;\n"
+        "    gl_Position = ProjMtx * vec4(Position.xy,0,1);\n"
+        "}\n";
+
+    const GLchar* vertex_shader_glsl_130 =
+        "uniform mat4 ProjMtx;\n"
+        "in vec2 Position;\n"
+        "in vec2 UV;\n"
+        "in vec4 Color;\n"
+        "out vec2 Frag_UV;\n"
+        "out vec4 Frag_Color;\n"
+        "void main()\n"
+        "{\n"
+        "    Frag_UV = UV;\n"
+        "    Frag_Color = Color;\n"
+        "    gl_Position = ProjMtx * vec4(Position.xy,0,1);\n"
+        "}\n";
+
+    const GLchar* vertex_shader_glsl_300_es =
+        "precision highp float;\n"
+        "layout (location = 0) in vec2 Position;\n"
+        "layout (location = 1) in vec2 UV;\n"
+        "layout (location = 2) in vec4 Color;\n"
+        "uniform mat4 ProjMtx;\n"
+        "out vec2 Frag_UV;\n"
+        "out vec4 Frag_Color;\n"
+        "void main()\n"
+        "{\n"
+        "    Frag_UV = UV;\n"
+        "    Frag_Color = Color;\n"
+        "    gl_Position = ProjMtx * vec4(Position.xy,0,1);\n"
+        "}\n";
+
+    const GLchar* vertex_shader_glsl_410_core =
+        "layout (location = 0) in vec2 Position;\n"
+        "layout (location = 1) in vec2 UV;\n"
+        "layout (location = 2) in vec4 Color;\n"
+        "uniform mat4 ProjMtx;\n"
+        "out vec2 Frag_UV;\n"
+        "out vec4 Frag_Color;\n"
+        "void main()\n"
+        "{\n"
+        "    Frag_UV = UV;\n"
+        "    Frag_Color = Color;\n"
+        "    gl_Position = ProjMtx * vec4(Position.xy,0,1);\n"
+        "}\n";
+
+    const GLchar* fragment_shader_glsl_120 =
+        "#ifdef GL_ES\n"
+        "    precision mediump float;\n"
+        "#endif\n"
+        "uniform sampler2D Texture;\n"
+        "varying vec2 Frag_UV;\n"
+        "varying vec4 Frag_Color;\n"
+        "void main()\n"
+        "{\n"
+        "    gl_FragColor = Frag_Color * texture2D(Texture, Frag_UV.st);\n"
+        "}\n";
+
+    const GLchar* fragment_shader_glsl_130 =
+        "uniform sampler2D Texture;\n"
+        "in vec2 Frag_UV;\n"
+        "in vec4 Frag_Color;\n"
+        "out vec4 Out_Color;\n"
+        "void main()\n"
+        "{\n"
+        "    Out_Color = Frag_Color * texture(Texture, Frag_UV.st);\n"
+        "}\n";
+
+    const GLchar* fragment_shader_glsl_300_es =
+        "precision mediump float;\n"
+        "uniform sampler2D Texture;\n"
+        "in vec2 Frag_UV;\n"
+        "in vec4 Frag_Color;\n"
+        "layout (location = 0) out vec4 Out_Color;\n"
+        "void main()\n"
+        "{\n"
+        "    Out_Color = Frag_Color * texture(Texture, Frag_UV.st);\n"
+        "}\n";
+
+    const GLchar* fragment_shader_glsl_410_core =
+        "in vec2 Frag_UV;\n"
+        "in vec4 Frag_Color;\n"
+        "uniform sampler2D Texture;\n"
+        "layout (location = 0) out vec4 Out_Color;\n"
+        "void main()\n"
+        "{\n"
+        "    Out_Color = Frag_Color * texture(Texture, Frag_UV.st);\n"
+        "}\n";
+
+    // Select shaders matching our GLSL versions
+    const GLchar* vertex_shader = NULL;
+    const GLchar* fragment_shader = NULL;
+    if (glsl_version < 130)
+    {
+        vertex_shader = vertex_shader_glsl_120;
+        fragment_shader = fragment_shader_glsl_120;
+    }
+    else if (glsl_version >= 410)
+    {
+        vertex_shader = vertex_shader_glsl_410_core;
+        fragment_shader = fragment_shader_glsl_410_core;
+    }
+    else if (glsl_version == 300)
+    {
+        vertex_shader = vertex_shader_glsl_300_es;
+        fragment_shader = fragment_shader_glsl_300_es;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        vertex_shader = vertex_shader_glsl_130;
+        fragment_shader = fragment_shader_glsl_130;
+    }
+
+    // Create shaders
+    const GLchar* vertex_shader_with_version[2] = { bd->GlslVersionString, vertex_shader };
+    GLuint vert_handle = glCreateShader(GL_VERTEX_SHADER);
+    glShaderSource(vert_handle, 2, vertex_shader_with_version, NULL);
+    glCompileShader(vert_handle);
+    CheckShader(vert_handle, "vertex shader");
+
+    const GLchar* fragment_shader_with_version[2] = { bd->GlslVersionString, fragment_shader };
+    GLuint frag_handle = glCreateShader(GL_FRAGMENT_SHADER);
+    glShaderSource(frag_handle, 2, fragment_shader_with_version, NULL);
+    glCompileShader(frag_handle);
+    CheckShader(frag_handle, "fragment shader");
+
+    // Link
+    bd->ShaderHandle = glCreateProgram();
+    glAttachShader(bd->ShaderHandle, vert_handle);
+    glAttachShader(bd->ShaderHandle, frag_handle);
+    glLinkProgram(bd->ShaderHandle);
+    CheckProgram(bd->ShaderHandle, "shader program");
+
+    glDetachShader(bd->ShaderHandle, vert_handle);
+    glDetachShader(bd->ShaderHandle, frag_handle);
+    glDeleteShader(vert_handle);
+    glDeleteShader(frag_handle);
+
+    bd->AttribLocationTex = glGetUniformLocation(bd->ShaderHandle, "Texture");
+    bd->AttribLocationProjMtx = glGetUniformLocation(bd->ShaderHandle, "ProjMtx");
+    bd->AttribLocationVtxPos = (GLuint)glGetAttribLocation(bd->ShaderHandle, "Position");
+    bd->AttribLocationVtxUV = (GLuint)glGetAttribLocation(bd->ShaderHandle, "UV");
+    bd->AttribLocationVtxColor = (GLuint)glGetAttribLocation(bd->ShaderHandle, "Color");
+
+    // Create buffers
+    glGenBuffers(1, &bd->VboHandle);
+    glGenBuffers(1, &bd->ElementsHandle);
+
+    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_CreateFontsTexture();
+
+    // Restore modified GL state
+    glBindTexture(GL_TEXTURE_2D, last_texture);
+    glBindBuffer(GL_ARRAY_BUFFER, last_array_buffer);
+#ifdef IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_USE_VERTEX_ARRAY
+    glBindVertexArray(last_vertex_array);
+#endif
+
+    return true;
+}
+
+void    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_DestroyDeviceObjects()
+{
+    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_GetBackendData();
+    if (bd->VboHandle)      { glDeleteBuffers(1, &bd->VboHandle); bd->VboHandle = 0; }
+    if (bd->ElementsHandle) { glDeleteBuffers(1, &bd->ElementsHandle); bd->ElementsHandle = 0; }
+    if (bd->ShaderHandle)   { glDeleteProgram(bd->ShaderHandle); bd->ShaderHandle = 0; }
+    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_DestroyFontsTexture();
+}
+
+//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// MULTI-VIEWPORT / PLATFORM INTERFACE SUPPORT
+// This is an _advanced_ and _optional_ feature, allowing the backend to create and handle multiple viewports simultaneously.
+// If you are new to dear imgui or creating a new binding for dear imgui, it is recommended that you completely ignore this section first..
+//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+static void ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_RenderWindow(ImGuiViewport* viewport, void*)
+{
+    if (!(viewport->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_NoRendererClear))
+    {
+        ImVec4 clear_color = ImVec4(0.0f, 0.0f, 0.0f, 1.0f);
+        glClearColor(clear_color.x, clear_color.y, clear_color.z, clear_color.w);
+        glClear(GL_COLOR_BUFFER_BIT);
+    }
+    ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_RenderDrawData(viewport->DrawData);
+}
+
+static void ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_InitPlatformInterface()
+{
+    ImGuiPlatformIO& platform_io = ImGui::GetPlatformIO();
+    platform_io.Renderer_RenderWindow = ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_RenderWindow;
+}
+
+static void ImGui_ImplOpenGL3_ShutdownPlatformInterface()
+{
+    ImGui::DestroyPlatformWindows();
+}
+
+#if defined(__clang__)
+#pragma clang diagnostic pop
+#endif
diff --git a/dependencies/src/imgui/imgui_impl_sdl.cpp b/dependencies/src/imgui/imgui_impl_sdl.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1273a2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/src/imgui/imgui_impl_sdl.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,940 @@
+// dear imgui: Platform Backend for SDL2
+// This needs to be used along with a Renderer (e.g. DirectX11, OpenGL3, Vulkan..)
+// (Info: SDL2 is a cross-platform general purpose library for handling windows, inputs, graphics context creation, etc.)
+// (Prefer SDL 2.0.5+ for full feature support.)
+
+// Implemented features:
+//  [X] Platform: Clipboard support.
+//  [X] Platform: Keyboard support. Since 1.87 we are using the io.AddKeyEvent() function. Pass ImGuiKey values to all key functions e.g. ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Space). [Legacy SDL_SCANCODE_* values will also be supported unless IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_KEYIO is set]
+//  [X] Platform: Gamepad support. Enabled with 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad'.
+//  [X] Platform: Mouse cursor shape and visibility. Disable with 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouseCursorChange'.
+//  [X] Platform: Multi-viewport support (multiple windows). Enable with 'io.ConfigFlags |= ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable'.
+// Missing features:
+//  [ ] Platform: SDL2 handling of IME under Windows appears to be broken and it explicitly disable the regular Windows IME. You can restore Windows IME by compiling SDL with SDL_DISABLE_WINDOWS_IME.
+//  [ ] Platform: Multi-viewport + Minimized windows seems to break mouse wheel events (at least under Windows).
+
+// You can use unmodified imgui_impl_* files in your project. See examples/ folder for examples of using this.
+// Prefer including the entire imgui/ repository into your project (either as a copy or as a submodule), and only build the backends you need.
+// If you are new to Dear ImGui, read documentation from the docs/ folder + read the top of imgui.cpp.
+// Read online: https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/tree/master/docs
+
+// CHANGELOG
+// (minor and older changes stripped away, please see git history for details)
+//  2022-XX-XX: Platform: Added support for multiple windows via the ImGuiPlatformIO interface.
+//  2022-03-22: Inputs: Fix mouse position issues when dragging outside of boundaries. SDL_CaptureMouse() erroneously still gives out LEAVE events when hovering OS decorations.
+//  2022-03-22: Inputs: Added support for extra mouse buttons (SDL_BUTTON_X1/SDL_BUTTON_X2).
+//  2022-02-04: Added SDL_Renderer* parameter to ImGui_ImplSDL2_InitForSDLRenderer(), so we can use SDL_GetRendererOutputSize() instead of SDL_GL_GetDrawableSize() when bound to a SDL_Renderer.
+//  2022-01-26: Inputs: replaced short-lived io.AddKeyModsEvent() (added two weeks ago) with io.AddKeyEvent() using ImGuiKey_ModXXX flags. Sorry for the confusion.
+//  2021-01-20: Inputs: calling new io.AddKeyAnalogEvent() for gamepad support, instead of writing directly to io.NavInputs[].
+//  2022-01-17: Inputs: calling new io.AddMousePosEvent(), io.AddMouseButtonEvent(), io.AddMouseWheelEvent() API (1.87+).
+//  2022-01-17: Inputs: always update key mods next and before key event (not in NewFrame) to fix input queue with very low framerates.
+//  2022-01-12: Update mouse inputs using SDL_MOUSEMOTION/SDL_WINDOWEVENT_LEAVE + fallback to provide it when focused but not hovered/captured. More standard and will allow us to pass it to future input queue API.
+//  2022-01-12: Maintain our own copy of MouseButtonsDown mask instead of using ImGui::IsAnyMouseDown() which will be obsoleted.
+//  2022-01-10: Inputs: calling new io.AddKeyEvent(), io.AddKeyModsEvent() + io.SetKeyEventNativeData() API (1.87+). Support for full ImGuiKey range.
+//  2021-08-17: Calling io.AddFocusEvent() on SDL_WINDOWEVENT_FOCUS_GAINED/SDL_WINDOWEVENT_FOCUS_LOST.
+//  2021-07-29: Inputs: MousePos is correctly reported when the host platform window is hovered but not focused (using SDL_GetMouseFocus() + SDL_HINT_MOUSE_FOCUS_CLICKTHROUGH, requires SDL 2.0.5+)
+//  2021-06:29: *BREAKING CHANGE* Removed 'SDL_Window* window' parameter to ImGui_ImplSDL2_NewFrame() which was unnecessary.
+//  2021-06-29: Reorganized backend to pull data from a single structure to facilitate usage with multiple-contexts (all g_XXXX access changed to bd->XXXX).
+//  2021-03-22: Rework global mouse pos availability check listing supported platforms explicitly, effectively fixing mouse access on Raspberry Pi. (#2837, #3950)
+//  2020-05-25: Misc: Report a zero display-size when window is minimized, to be consistent with other backends.
+//  2020-02-20: Inputs: Fixed mapping for ImGuiKey_KeyPadEnter (using SDL_SCANCODE_KP_ENTER instead of SDL_SCANCODE_RETURN2).
+//  2019-12-17: Inputs: On Wayland, use SDL_GetMouseState (because there is no global mouse state).
+//  2019-12-05: Inputs: Added support for ImGuiMouseCursor_NotAllowed mouse cursor.
+//  2019-07-21: Inputs: Added mapping for ImGuiKey_KeyPadEnter.
+//  2019-04-23: Inputs: Added support for SDL_GameController (if ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad is set by user application).
+//  2019-03-12: Misc: Preserve DisplayFramebufferScale when main window is minimized.
+//  2018-12-21: Inputs: Workaround for Android/iOS which don't seem to handle focus related calls.
+//  2018-11-30: Misc: Setting up io.BackendPlatformName so it can be displayed in the About Window.
+//  2018-11-14: Changed the signature of ImGui_ImplSDL2_ProcessEvent() to take a 'const SDL_Event*'.
+//  2018-08-01: Inputs: Workaround for Emscripten which doesn't seem to handle focus related calls.
+//  2018-06-29: Inputs: Added support for the ImGuiMouseCursor_Hand cursor.
+//  2018-06-08: Misc: Extracted imgui_impl_sdl.cpp/.h away from the old combined SDL2+OpenGL/Vulkan examples.
+//  2018-06-08: Misc: ImGui_ImplSDL2_InitForOpenGL() now takes a SDL_GLContext parameter.
+//  2018-05-09: Misc: Fixed clipboard paste memory leak (we didn't call SDL_FreeMemory on the data returned by SDL_GetClipboardText).
+//  2018-03-20: Misc: Setup io.BackendFlags ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors flag + honor ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouseCursorChange flag.
+//  2018-02-16: Inputs: Added support for mouse cursors, honoring ImGui::GetMouseCursor() value.
+//  2018-02-06: Misc: Removed call to ImGui::Shutdown() which is not available from 1.60 WIP, user needs to call CreateContext/DestroyContext themselves.
+//  2018-02-06: Inputs: Added mapping for ImGuiKey_Space.
+//  2018-02-05: Misc: Using SDL_GetPerformanceCounter() instead of SDL_GetTicks() to be able to handle very high framerate (1000+ FPS).
+//  2018-02-05: Inputs: Keyboard mapping is using scancodes everywhere instead of a confusing mixture of keycodes and scancodes.
+//  2018-01-20: Inputs: Added Horizontal Mouse Wheel support.
+//  2018-01-19: Inputs: When available (SDL 2.0.4+) using SDL_CaptureMouse() to retrieve coordinates outside of client area when dragging. Otherwise (SDL 2.0.3 and before) testing for SDL_WINDOW_INPUT_FOCUS instead of SDL_WINDOW_MOUSE_FOCUS.
+//  2018-01-18: Inputs: Added mapping for ImGuiKey_Insert.
+//  2017-08-25: Inputs: MousePos set to -FLT_MAX,-FLT_MAX when mouse is unavailable/missing (instead of -1,-1).
+//  2016-10-15: Misc: Added a void* user_data parameter to Clipboard function handlers.
+
+#include "imgui.h"
+#include "imgui_impl_sdl.h"
+
+// SDL
+// (the multi-viewports feature requires SDL features supported from SDL 2.0.4+. SDL 2.0.5+ is highly recommended)
+#include <SDL.h>
+#include <SDL_syswm.h>
+#if defined(__APPLE__)
+#include <TargetConditionals.h>
+#endif
+
+#if SDL_VERSION_ATLEAST(2,0,4) && !defined(__EMSCRIPTEN__) && !defined(__ANDROID__) && !(defined(__APPLE__) && TARGET_OS_IOS) && !defined(__amigaos4__)
+#define SDL_HAS_CAPTURE_AND_GLOBAL_MOUSE    1
+#else
+#define SDL_HAS_CAPTURE_AND_GLOBAL_MOUSE    0
+#endif
+#define SDL_HAS_MOUSE_FOCUS_CLICKTHROUGH    SDL_VERSION_ATLEAST(2,0,5)
+#define SDL_HAS_WINDOW_ALPHA                SDL_VERSION_ATLEAST(2,0,5)
+#define SDL_HAS_ALWAYS_ON_TOP               SDL_VERSION_ATLEAST(2,0,5)
+#define SDL_HAS_USABLE_DISPLAY_BOUNDS       SDL_VERSION_ATLEAST(2,0,5)
+#define SDL_HAS_PER_MONITOR_DPI             SDL_VERSION_ATLEAST(2,0,4)
+#define SDL_HAS_VULKAN                      SDL_VERSION_ATLEAST(2,0,6)
+#if !SDL_HAS_VULKAN
+static const Uint32 SDL_WINDOW_VULKAN = 0x10000000;
+#endif
+
+// SDL Data
+struct ImGui_ImplSDL2_Data
+{
+    SDL_Window*     Window;
+    SDL_Renderer*   Renderer;
+    Uint64          Time;
+    Uint32          MouseWindowID;
+    int             MouseButtonsDown;
+    SDL_Cursor*     MouseCursors[ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT];
+    int             PendingMouseLeaveFrame;
+    char*           ClipboardTextData;
+    bool            MouseCanUseGlobalState;
+    bool            UseVulkan;
+
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_Data()   { memset((void*)this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+};
+
+// Backend data stored in io.BackendPlatformUserData to allow support for multiple Dear ImGui contexts
+// It is STRONGLY preferred that you use docking branch with multi-viewports (== single Dear ImGui context + multiple windows) instead of multiple Dear ImGui contexts.
+// FIXME: multi-context support is not well tested and probably dysfunctional in this backend.
+// FIXME: some shared resources (mouse cursor shape, gamepad) are mishandled when using multi-context.
+static ImGui_ImplSDL2_Data* ImGui_ImplSDL2_GetBackendData()
+{
+    return ImGui::GetCurrentContext() ? (ImGui_ImplSDL2_Data*)ImGui::GetIO().BackendPlatformUserData : NULL;
+}
+
+// Forward Declarations
+static void ImGui_ImplSDL2_UpdateMonitors();
+static void ImGui_ImplSDL2_InitPlatformInterface(SDL_Window* window, void* sdl_gl_context);
+static void ImGui_ImplSDL2_ShutdownPlatformInterface();
+
+// Functions
+static const char* ImGui_ImplSDL2_GetClipboardText(void*)
+{
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplSDL2_GetBackendData();
+    if (bd->ClipboardTextData)
+        SDL_free(bd->ClipboardTextData);
+    bd->ClipboardTextData = SDL_GetClipboardText();
+    return bd->ClipboardTextData;
+}
+
+static void ImGui_ImplSDL2_SetClipboardText(void*, const char* text)
+{
+    SDL_SetClipboardText(text);
+}
+
+static ImGuiKey ImGui_ImplSDL2_KeycodeToImGuiKey(int keycode)
+{
+    switch (keycode)
+    {
+        case SDLK_TAB: return ImGuiKey_Tab;
+        case SDLK_LEFT: return ImGuiKey_LeftArrow;
+        case SDLK_RIGHT: return ImGuiKey_RightArrow;
+        case SDLK_UP: return ImGuiKey_UpArrow;
+        case SDLK_DOWN: return ImGuiKey_DownArrow;
+        case SDLK_PAGEUP: return ImGuiKey_PageUp;
+        case SDLK_PAGEDOWN: return ImGuiKey_PageDown;
+        case SDLK_HOME: return ImGuiKey_Home;
+        case SDLK_END: return ImGuiKey_End;
+        case SDLK_INSERT: return ImGuiKey_Insert;
+        case SDLK_DELETE: return ImGuiKey_Delete;
+        case SDLK_BACKSPACE: return ImGuiKey_Backspace;
+        case SDLK_SPACE: return ImGuiKey_Space;
+        case SDLK_RETURN: return ImGuiKey_Enter;
+        case SDLK_ESCAPE: return ImGuiKey_Escape;
+        case SDLK_QUOTE: return ImGuiKey_Apostrophe;
+        case SDLK_COMMA: return ImGuiKey_Comma;
+        case SDLK_MINUS: return ImGuiKey_Minus;
+        case SDLK_PERIOD: return ImGuiKey_Period;
+        case SDLK_SLASH: return ImGuiKey_Slash;
+        case SDLK_SEMICOLON: return ImGuiKey_Semicolon;
+        case SDLK_EQUALS: return ImGuiKey_Equal;
+        case SDLK_LEFTBRACKET: return ImGuiKey_LeftBracket;
+        case SDLK_BACKSLASH: return ImGuiKey_Backslash;
+        case SDLK_RIGHTBRACKET: return ImGuiKey_RightBracket;
+        case SDLK_BACKQUOTE: return ImGuiKey_GraveAccent;
+        case SDLK_CAPSLOCK: return ImGuiKey_CapsLock;
+        case SDLK_SCROLLLOCK: return ImGuiKey_ScrollLock;
+        case SDLK_NUMLOCKCLEAR: return ImGuiKey_NumLock;
+        case SDLK_PRINTSCREEN: return ImGuiKey_PrintScreen;
+        case SDLK_PAUSE: return ImGuiKey_Pause;
+        case SDLK_KP_0: return ImGuiKey_Keypad0;
+        case SDLK_KP_1: return ImGuiKey_Keypad1;
+        case SDLK_KP_2: return ImGuiKey_Keypad2;
+        case SDLK_KP_3: return ImGuiKey_Keypad3;
+        case SDLK_KP_4: return ImGuiKey_Keypad4;
+        case SDLK_KP_5: return ImGuiKey_Keypad5;
+        case SDLK_KP_6: return ImGuiKey_Keypad6;
+        case SDLK_KP_7: return ImGuiKey_Keypad7;
+        case SDLK_KP_8: return ImGuiKey_Keypad8;
+        case SDLK_KP_9: return ImGuiKey_Keypad9;
+        case SDLK_KP_PERIOD: return ImGuiKey_KeypadDecimal;
+        case SDLK_KP_DIVIDE: return ImGuiKey_KeypadDivide;
+        case SDLK_KP_MULTIPLY: return ImGuiKey_KeypadMultiply;
+        case SDLK_KP_MINUS: return ImGuiKey_KeypadSubtract;
+        case SDLK_KP_PLUS: return ImGuiKey_KeypadAdd;
+        case SDLK_KP_ENTER: return ImGuiKey_KeypadEnter;
+        case SDLK_KP_EQUALS: return ImGuiKey_KeypadEqual;
+        case SDLK_LCTRL: return ImGuiKey_LeftCtrl;
+        case SDLK_LSHIFT: return ImGuiKey_LeftShift;
+        case SDLK_LALT: return ImGuiKey_LeftAlt;
+        case SDLK_LGUI: return ImGuiKey_LeftSuper;
+        case SDLK_RCTRL: return ImGuiKey_RightCtrl;
+        case SDLK_RSHIFT: return ImGuiKey_RightShift;
+        case SDLK_RALT: return ImGuiKey_RightAlt;
+        case SDLK_RGUI: return ImGuiKey_RightSuper;
+        case SDLK_APPLICATION: return ImGuiKey_Menu;
+        case SDLK_0: return ImGuiKey_0;
+        case SDLK_1: return ImGuiKey_1;
+        case SDLK_2: return ImGuiKey_2;
+        case SDLK_3: return ImGuiKey_3;
+        case SDLK_4: return ImGuiKey_4;
+        case SDLK_5: return ImGuiKey_5;
+        case SDLK_6: return ImGuiKey_6;
+        case SDLK_7: return ImGuiKey_7;
+        case SDLK_8: return ImGuiKey_8;
+        case SDLK_9: return ImGuiKey_9;
+        case SDLK_a: return ImGuiKey_A;
+        case SDLK_b: return ImGuiKey_B;
+        case SDLK_c: return ImGuiKey_C;
+        case SDLK_d: return ImGuiKey_D;
+        case SDLK_e: return ImGuiKey_E;
+        case SDLK_f: return ImGuiKey_F;
+        case SDLK_g: return ImGuiKey_G;
+        case SDLK_h: return ImGuiKey_H;
+        case SDLK_i: return ImGuiKey_I;
+        case SDLK_j: return ImGuiKey_J;
+        case SDLK_k: return ImGuiKey_K;
+        case SDLK_l: return ImGuiKey_L;
+        case SDLK_m: return ImGuiKey_M;
+        case SDLK_n: return ImGuiKey_N;
+        case SDLK_o: return ImGuiKey_O;
+        case SDLK_p: return ImGuiKey_P;
+        case SDLK_q: return ImGuiKey_Q;
+        case SDLK_r: return ImGuiKey_R;
+        case SDLK_s: return ImGuiKey_S;
+        case SDLK_t: return ImGuiKey_T;
+        case SDLK_u: return ImGuiKey_U;
+        case SDLK_v: return ImGuiKey_V;
+        case SDLK_w: return ImGuiKey_W;
+        case SDLK_x: return ImGuiKey_X;
+        case SDLK_y: return ImGuiKey_Y;
+        case SDLK_z: return ImGuiKey_Z;
+        case SDLK_F1: return ImGuiKey_F1;
+        case SDLK_F2: return ImGuiKey_F2;
+        case SDLK_F3: return ImGuiKey_F3;
+        case SDLK_F4: return ImGuiKey_F4;
+        case SDLK_F5: return ImGuiKey_F5;
+        case SDLK_F6: return ImGuiKey_F6;
+        case SDLK_F7: return ImGuiKey_F7;
+        case SDLK_F8: return ImGuiKey_F8;
+        case SDLK_F9: return ImGuiKey_F9;
+        case SDLK_F10: return ImGuiKey_F10;
+        case SDLK_F11: return ImGuiKey_F11;
+        case SDLK_F12: return ImGuiKey_F12;
+    }
+    return ImGuiKey_None;
+}
+
+static void ImGui_ImplSDL2_UpdateKeyModifiers(SDL_Keymod sdl_key_mods)
+{
+    ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+    io.AddKeyEvent(ImGuiKey_ModCtrl, (sdl_key_mods & KMOD_CTRL) != 0);
+    io.AddKeyEvent(ImGuiKey_ModShift, (sdl_key_mods & KMOD_SHIFT) != 0);
+    io.AddKeyEvent(ImGuiKey_ModAlt, (sdl_key_mods & KMOD_ALT) != 0);
+    io.AddKeyEvent(ImGuiKey_ModSuper, (sdl_key_mods & KMOD_GUI) != 0);
+}
+
+// You can read the io.WantCaptureMouse, io.WantCaptureKeyboard flags to tell if dear imgui wants to use your inputs.
+// - When io.WantCaptureMouse is true, do not dispatch mouse input data to your main application, or clear/overwrite your copy of the mouse data.
+// - When io.WantCaptureKeyboard is true, do not dispatch keyboard input data to your main application, or clear/overwrite your copy of the keyboard data.
+// Generally you may always pass all inputs to dear imgui, and hide them from your application based on those two flags.
+// If you have multiple SDL events and some of them are not meant to be used by dear imgui, you may need to filter events based on their windowID field.
+bool ImGui_ImplSDL2_ProcessEvent(const SDL_Event* event)
+{
+    ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplSDL2_GetBackendData();
+
+    switch (event->type)
+    {
+        case SDL_MOUSEMOTION:
+        {
+            ImVec2 mouse_pos((float)event->motion.x, (float)event->motion.y);
+            if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable)
+            {
+                int window_x, window_y;
+                SDL_GetWindowPosition(SDL_GetWindowFromID(event->motion.windowID), &window_x, &window_y);
+                mouse_pos.x += window_x;
+                mouse_pos.y += window_y;
+            }
+            io.AddMousePosEvent(mouse_pos.x, mouse_pos.y);
+            return true;
+        }
+        case SDL_MOUSEWHEEL:
+        {
+            float wheel_x = (event->wheel.x > 0) ? 1.0f : (event->wheel.x < 0) ? -1.0f : 0.0f;
+            float wheel_y = (event->wheel.y > 0) ? 1.0f : (event->wheel.y < 0) ? -1.0f : 0.0f;
+            io.AddMouseWheelEvent(wheel_x, wheel_y);
+            return true;
+        }
+        case SDL_MOUSEBUTTONDOWN:
+        case SDL_MOUSEBUTTONUP:
+        {
+            int mouse_button = -1;
+            if (event->button.button == SDL_BUTTON_LEFT) { mouse_button = 0; }
+            if (event->button.button == SDL_BUTTON_RIGHT) { mouse_button = 1; }
+            if (event->button.button == SDL_BUTTON_MIDDLE) { mouse_button = 2; }
+            if (event->button.button == SDL_BUTTON_X1) { mouse_button = 3; }
+            if (event->button.button == SDL_BUTTON_X2) { mouse_button = 4; }
+            if (mouse_button == -1)
+                break;
+            io.AddMouseButtonEvent(mouse_button, (event->type == SDL_MOUSEBUTTONDOWN));
+            bd->MouseButtonsDown = (event->type == SDL_MOUSEBUTTONDOWN) ? (bd->MouseButtonsDown | (1 << mouse_button)) : (bd->MouseButtonsDown & ~(1 << mouse_button));
+            return true;
+        }
+        case SDL_TEXTINPUT:
+        {
+            io.AddInputCharactersUTF8(event->text.text);
+            return true;
+        }
+        case SDL_KEYDOWN:
+        case SDL_KEYUP:
+        {
+            ImGui_ImplSDL2_UpdateKeyModifiers((SDL_Keymod)event->key.keysym.mod);
+            ImGuiKey key = ImGui_ImplSDL2_KeycodeToImGuiKey(event->key.keysym.sym);
+            io.AddKeyEvent(key, (event->type == SDL_KEYDOWN));
+            io.SetKeyEventNativeData(key, event->key.keysym.sym, event->key.keysym.scancode, event->key.keysym.scancode); // To support legacy indexing (<1.87 user code). Legacy backend uses SDLK_*** as indices to IsKeyXXX() functions.
+            return true;
+        }
+        case SDL_WINDOWEVENT:
+        {
+            // - When capturing mouse, SDL will send a bunch of conflicting LEAVE/ENTER event on every mouse move, but the final ENTER tends to be right.
+            // - However we won't get a correct LEAVE event for a captured window.
+            // - In some cases, when detaching a window from main viewport SDL may send SDL_WINDOWEVENT_ENTER one frame too late,
+            //   causing SDL_WINDOWEVENT_LEAVE on previous frame to interrupt drag operation by clear mouse position. This is why
+            //   we delay process the SDL_WINDOWEVENT_LEAVE events by one frame. See issue #5012 for details.
+            Uint8 window_event = event->window.event;
+            if (window_event == SDL_WINDOWEVENT_ENTER)
+            {
+                bd->MouseWindowID = event->window.windowID;
+                bd->PendingMouseLeaveFrame = 0;
+            }
+            if (window_event == SDL_WINDOWEVENT_LEAVE)
+                bd->PendingMouseLeaveFrame = ImGui::GetFrameCount() + 1;
+            if (window_event == SDL_WINDOWEVENT_FOCUS_GAINED)
+                io.AddFocusEvent(true);
+            else if (window_event == SDL_WINDOWEVENT_FOCUS_LOST)
+                io.AddFocusEvent(false);
+            if (window_event == SDL_WINDOWEVENT_CLOSE || window_event == SDL_WINDOWEVENT_MOVED || window_event == SDL_WINDOWEVENT_RESIZED)
+                if (ImGuiViewport* viewport = ImGui::FindViewportByPlatformHandle((void*)SDL_GetWindowFromID(event->window.windowID)))
+                {
+                    if (window_event == SDL_WINDOWEVENT_CLOSE)
+                        viewport->PlatformRequestClose = true;
+                    if (window_event == SDL_WINDOWEVENT_MOVED)
+                        viewport->PlatformRequestMove = true;
+                    if (window_event == SDL_WINDOWEVENT_RESIZED)
+                        viewport->PlatformRequestResize = true;
+                    return true;
+                }
+            return true;
+        }
+    }
+    return false;
+}
+
+static bool ImGui_ImplSDL2_Init(SDL_Window* window, SDL_Renderer* renderer, void* sdl_gl_context)
+{
+    ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+    IM_ASSERT(io.BackendPlatformUserData == NULL && "Already initialized a platform backend!");
+
+    // Check and store if we are on a SDL backend that supports global mouse position
+    // ("wayland" and "rpi" don't support it, but we chose to use a white-list instead of a black-list)
+    bool mouse_can_use_global_state = false;
+#if SDL_HAS_CAPTURE_AND_GLOBAL_MOUSE
+    const char* sdl_backend = SDL_GetCurrentVideoDriver();
+    const char* global_mouse_whitelist[] = { "windows", "cocoa", "x11", "DIVE", "VMAN" };
+    for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(global_mouse_whitelist); n++)
+        if (strncmp(sdl_backend, global_mouse_whitelist[n], strlen(global_mouse_whitelist[n])) == 0)
+            mouse_can_use_global_state = true;
+#endif
+
+    // Setup backend capabilities flags
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_Data* bd = IM_NEW(ImGui_ImplSDL2_Data)();
+    io.BackendPlatformUserData = (void*)bd;
+    io.BackendPlatformName = "imgui_impl_sdl";
+    io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseCursors;           // We can honor GetMouseCursor() values (optional)
+    io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_HasSetMousePos;            // We can honor io.WantSetMousePos requests (optional, rarely used)
+    if (mouse_can_use_global_state)
+        io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_PlatformHasViewports;  // We can create multi-viewports on the Platform side (optional)
+
+    // SDL on Linux/OSX doesn't report events for unfocused windows (see https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/4960)
+#ifndef __APPLE__
+    if (mouse_can_use_global_state)
+        io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseHoveredViewport;// We can call io.AddMouseViewportEvent() with correct data (optional)
+#endif
+
+    bd->Window = window;
+    bd->Renderer = renderer;
+    bd->MouseCanUseGlobalState = mouse_can_use_global_state;
+
+    io.SetClipboardTextFn = ImGui_ImplSDL2_SetClipboardText;
+    io.GetClipboardTextFn = ImGui_ImplSDL2_GetClipboardText;
+    io.ClipboardUserData = NULL;
+
+    // Load mouse cursors
+    bd->MouseCursors[ImGuiMouseCursor_Arrow] = SDL_CreateSystemCursor(SDL_SYSTEM_CURSOR_ARROW);
+    bd->MouseCursors[ImGuiMouseCursor_TextInput] = SDL_CreateSystemCursor(SDL_SYSTEM_CURSOR_IBEAM);
+    bd->MouseCursors[ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeAll] = SDL_CreateSystemCursor(SDL_SYSTEM_CURSOR_SIZEALL);
+    bd->MouseCursors[ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNS] = SDL_CreateSystemCursor(SDL_SYSTEM_CURSOR_SIZENS);
+    bd->MouseCursors[ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW] = SDL_CreateSystemCursor(SDL_SYSTEM_CURSOR_SIZEWE);
+    bd->MouseCursors[ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNESW] = SDL_CreateSystemCursor(SDL_SYSTEM_CURSOR_SIZENESW);
+    bd->MouseCursors[ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNWSE] = SDL_CreateSystemCursor(SDL_SYSTEM_CURSOR_SIZENWSE);
+    bd->MouseCursors[ImGuiMouseCursor_Hand] = SDL_CreateSystemCursor(SDL_SYSTEM_CURSOR_HAND);
+    bd->MouseCursors[ImGuiMouseCursor_NotAllowed] = SDL_CreateSystemCursor(SDL_SYSTEM_CURSOR_NO);
+
+    // Set platform dependent data in viewport
+    // Our mouse update function expect PlatformHandle to be filled for the main viewport
+    ImGuiViewport* main_viewport = ImGui::GetMainViewport();
+    main_viewport->PlatformHandle = (void*)window;
+    SDL_SysWMinfo info;
+    SDL_VERSION(&info.version);
+    if (SDL_GetWindowWMInfo(window, &info))
+    {
+#ifdef _WIN32
+        main_viewport->PlatformHandleRaw = (void*)info.info.win.window;
+#elif defined(__APPLE__)
+        main_viewport->PlatformHandleRaw = (void*)info.info.cocoa.window;
+#endif
+    }
+
+    // Set SDL hint to receive mouse click events on window focus, otherwise SDL doesn't emit the event.
+    // Without this, when clicking to gain focus, our widgets wouldn't activate even though they showed as hovered.
+    // (This is unfortunately a global SDL setting, so enabling it might have a side-effect on your application.
+    // It is unlikely to make a difference, but if your app absolutely needs to ignore the initial on-focus click:
+    // you can ignore SDL_MOUSEBUTTONDOWN events coming right after a SDL_WINDOWEVENT_FOCUS_GAINED)
+#if SDL_HAS_MOUSE_FOCUS_CLICKTHROUGH
+    SDL_SetHint(SDL_HINT_MOUSE_FOCUS_CLICKTHROUGH, "1");
+#endif
+
+    // Update monitors
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_UpdateMonitors();
+
+    // We need SDL_CaptureMouse(), SDL_GetGlobalMouseState() from SDL 2.0.4+ to support multiple viewports.
+    // We left the call to ImGui_ImplSDL2_InitPlatformInterface() outside of #ifdef to avoid unused-function warnings.
+    if ((io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable) && (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_PlatformHasViewports))
+        ImGui_ImplSDL2_InitPlatformInterface(window, sdl_gl_context);
+
+    return true;
+}
+
+bool ImGui_ImplSDL2_InitForOpenGL(SDL_Window* window, void* sdl_gl_context)
+{
+    return ImGui_ImplSDL2_Init(window, NULL, sdl_gl_context);
+}
+
+bool ImGui_ImplSDL2_InitForVulkan(SDL_Window* window)
+{
+#if !SDL_HAS_VULKAN
+    IM_ASSERT(0 && "Unsupported");
+#endif
+    if (!ImGui_ImplSDL2_Init(window, NULL, NULL))
+        return false;
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplSDL2_GetBackendData();
+    bd->UseVulkan = true;
+    return true;
+}
+
+bool ImGui_ImplSDL2_InitForD3D(SDL_Window* window)
+{
+#if !defined(_WIN32)
+    IM_ASSERT(0 && "Unsupported");
+#endif
+    return ImGui_ImplSDL2_Init(window, NULL, NULL);
+}
+
+bool ImGui_ImplSDL2_InitForMetal(SDL_Window* window)
+{
+    return ImGui_ImplSDL2_Init(window, NULL, NULL);
+}
+
+bool ImGui_ImplSDL2_InitForSDLRenderer(SDL_Window* window, SDL_Renderer* renderer)
+{
+    return ImGui_ImplSDL2_Init(window, renderer, NULL);
+}
+
+void ImGui_ImplSDL2_Shutdown()
+{
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplSDL2_GetBackendData();
+    IM_ASSERT(bd != NULL && "No platform backend to shutdown, or already shutdown?");
+    ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_ShutdownPlatformInterface();
+
+    if (bd->ClipboardTextData)
+        SDL_free(bd->ClipboardTextData);
+    for (ImGuiMouseCursor cursor_n = 0; cursor_n < ImGuiMouseCursor_COUNT; cursor_n++)
+        SDL_FreeCursor(bd->MouseCursors[cursor_n]);
+
+    io.BackendPlatformName = NULL;
+    io.BackendPlatformUserData = NULL;
+    IM_DELETE(bd);
+}
+
+// This code is incredibly messy because some of the functions we need for full viewport support are not available in SDL < 2.0.4.
+static void ImGui_ImplSDL2_UpdateMouseData()
+{
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplSDL2_GetBackendData();
+    ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+
+    // We forward mouse input when hovered or captured (via SDL_MOUSEMOTION) or when focused (below)
+#if SDL_HAS_CAPTURE_AND_GLOBAL_MOUSE
+    // SDL_CaptureMouse() let the OS know e.g. that our imgui drag outside the SDL window boundaries shouldn't e.g. trigger other operations outside
+    SDL_CaptureMouse(bd->MouseButtonsDown != 0 ? SDL_TRUE : SDL_FALSE);
+    SDL_Window* focused_window = SDL_GetKeyboardFocus();
+    const bool is_app_focused = (focused_window && (bd->Window == focused_window || ImGui::FindViewportByPlatformHandle((void*)focused_window)));
+#else
+    SDL_Window* focused_window = bd->Window;
+    const bool is_app_focused = (SDL_GetWindowFlags(bd->Window) & SDL_WINDOW_INPUT_FOCUS) != 0; // SDL 2.0.3 and non-windowed systems: single-viewport only
+#endif
+
+    if (is_app_focused)
+    {
+        // (Optional) Set OS mouse position from Dear ImGui if requested (rarely used, only when ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableSetMousePos is enabled by user)
+        if (io.WantSetMousePos)
+        {
+#if SDL_HAS_CAPTURE_AND_GLOBAL_MOUSE
+            if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable)
+                SDL_WarpMouseGlobal((int)io.MousePos.x, (int)io.MousePos.y);
+            else
+#endif
+                SDL_WarpMouseInWindow(bd->Window, (int)io.MousePos.x, (int)io.MousePos.y);
+        }
+
+        // (Optional) Fallback to provide mouse position when focused (SDL_MOUSEMOTION already provides this when hovered or captured)
+        if (bd->MouseCanUseGlobalState && bd->MouseButtonsDown == 0)
+        {
+            // Single-viewport mode: mouse position in client window coordinates (io.MousePos is (0,0) when the mouse is on the upper-left corner of the app window)
+            // Multi-viewport mode: mouse position in OS absolute coordinates (io.MousePos is (0,0) when the mouse is on the upper-left of the primary monitor)
+            int mouse_x, mouse_y, window_x, window_y;
+            SDL_GetGlobalMouseState(&mouse_x, &mouse_y);
+            if (!(io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsEnable))
+            {
+                SDL_GetWindowPosition(focused_window, &window_x, &window_y);
+                mouse_x -= window_x;
+                mouse_y -= window_y;
+            }
+            io.AddMousePosEvent((float)mouse_x, (float)mouse_y);
+        }
+    }
+
+    // (Optional) When using multiple viewports: call io.AddMouseViewportEvent() with the viewport the OS mouse cursor is hovering.
+    // If ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseHoveredViewport is not set by the backend, Dear imGui will ignore this field and infer the information using its flawed heuristic.
+    // - [!] SDL backend does NOT correctly ignore viewports with the _NoInputs flag.
+    //       Some backend are not able to handle that correctly. If a backend report an hovered viewport that has the _NoInputs flag (e.g. when dragging a window
+    //       for docking, the viewport has the _NoInputs flag in order to allow us to find the viewport under), then Dear ImGui is forced to ignore the value reported
+    //       by the backend, and use its flawed heuristic to guess the viewport behind.
+    // - [X] SDL backend correctly reports this regardless of another viewport behind focused and dragged from (we need this to find a useful drag and drop target).
+    if (io.BackendFlags & ImGuiBackendFlags_HasMouseHoveredViewport)
+    {
+        ImGuiID mouse_viewport_id = 0;
+        if (SDL_Window* sdl_mouse_window = SDL_GetWindowFromID(bd->MouseWindowID))
+            if (ImGuiViewport* mouse_viewport = ImGui::FindViewportByPlatformHandle((void*)sdl_mouse_window))
+                mouse_viewport_id = mouse_viewport->ID;
+        io.AddMouseViewportEvent(mouse_viewport_id);
+    }
+}
+
+static void ImGui_ImplSDL2_UpdateMouseCursor()
+{
+    ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+    if (io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NoMouseCursorChange)
+        return;
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplSDL2_GetBackendData();
+
+    ImGuiMouseCursor imgui_cursor = ImGui::GetMouseCursor();
+    if (io.MouseDrawCursor || imgui_cursor == ImGuiMouseCursor_None)
+    {
+        // Hide OS mouse cursor if imgui is drawing it or if it wants no cursor
+        SDL_ShowCursor(SDL_FALSE);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Show OS mouse cursor
+        SDL_SetCursor(bd->MouseCursors[imgui_cursor] ? bd->MouseCursors[imgui_cursor] : bd->MouseCursors[ImGuiMouseCursor_Arrow]);
+        SDL_ShowCursor(SDL_TRUE);
+    }
+}
+
+static void ImGui_ImplSDL2_UpdateGamepads()
+{
+    ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+    if ((io.ConfigFlags & ImGuiConfigFlags_NavEnableGamepad) == 0)
+        return;
+
+    // Get gamepad
+    io.BackendFlags &= ~ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad;
+    SDL_GameController* game_controller = SDL_GameControllerOpen(0);
+    if (!game_controller)
+        return;
+    io.BackendFlags |= ImGuiBackendFlags_HasGamepad;
+
+    // Update gamepad inputs
+    #define IM_SATURATE(V)                      (V < 0.0f ? 0.0f : V > 1.0f ? 1.0f : V)
+    #define MAP_BUTTON(KEY_NO, BUTTON_NO)       { io.AddKeyEvent(KEY_NO, SDL_GameControllerGetButton(game_controller, BUTTON_NO) != 0); }
+    #define MAP_ANALOG(KEY_NO, AXIS_NO, V0, V1) { float vn = (float)(SDL_GameControllerGetAxis(game_controller, AXIS_NO) - V0) / (float)(V1 - V0); vn = IM_SATURATE(vn); io.AddKeyAnalogEvent(KEY_NO, vn > 0.1f, vn); }
+    const int thumb_dead_zone = 8000;           // SDL_gamecontroller.h suggests using this value.
+    MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadStart,           SDL_CONTROLLER_BUTTON_START);
+    MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadBack,            SDL_CONTROLLER_BUTTON_BACK);
+    MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceLeft,        SDL_CONTROLLER_BUTTON_X);              // Xbox X, PS Square
+    MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceRight,       SDL_CONTROLLER_BUTTON_B);              // Xbox B, PS Circle
+    MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceUp,          SDL_CONTROLLER_BUTTON_Y);              // Xbox Y, PS Triangle
+    MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadFaceDown,        SDL_CONTROLLER_BUTTON_A);              // Xbox A, PS Cross
+    MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadLeft,        SDL_CONTROLLER_BUTTON_DPAD_LEFT);
+    MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadRight,       SDL_CONTROLLER_BUTTON_DPAD_RIGHT);
+    MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadUp,          SDL_CONTROLLER_BUTTON_DPAD_UP);
+    MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadDpadDown,        SDL_CONTROLLER_BUTTON_DPAD_DOWN);
+    MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadL1,              SDL_CONTROLLER_BUTTON_LEFTSHOULDER);
+    MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadR1,              SDL_CONTROLLER_BUTTON_RIGHTSHOULDER);
+    MAP_ANALOG(ImGuiKey_GamepadL2,              SDL_CONTROLLER_AXIS_TRIGGERLEFT,  0.0f, 32767);
+    MAP_ANALOG(ImGuiKey_GamepadR2,              SDL_CONTROLLER_AXIS_TRIGGERRIGHT, 0.0f, 32767);
+    MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadL3,              SDL_CONTROLLER_BUTTON_LEFTSTICK);
+    MAP_BUTTON(ImGuiKey_GamepadR3,              SDL_CONTROLLER_BUTTON_RIGHTSTICK);
+    MAP_ANALOG(ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickLeft,      SDL_CONTROLLER_AXIS_LEFTX,  -thumb_dead_zone, -32768);
+    MAP_ANALOG(ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickRight,     SDL_CONTROLLER_AXIS_LEFTX,  +thumb_dead_zone, +32767);
+    MAP_ANALOG(ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickUp,        SDL_CONTROLLER_AXIS_LEFTY,  -thumb_dead_zone, -32768);
+    MAP_ANALOG(ImGuiKey_GamepadLStickDown,      SDL_CONTROLLER_AXIS_LEFTY,  +thumb_dead_zone, +32767);
+    MAP_ANALOG(ImGuiKey_GamepadRStickLeft,      SDL_CONTROLLER_AXIS_RIGHTX, -thumb_dead_zone, -32768);
+    MAP_ANALOG(ImGuiKey_GamepadRStickRight,     SDL_CONTROLLER_AXIS_RIGHTX, +thumb_dead_zone, +32767);
+    MAP_ANALOG(ImGuiKey_GamepadRStickUp,        SDL_CONTROLLER_AXIS_RIGHTY, -thumb_dead_zone, -32768);
+    MAP_ANALOG(ImGuiKey_GamepadRStickDown,      SDL_CONTROLLER_AXIS_RIGHTY, +thumb_dead_zone, +32767);
+    #undef MAP_BUTTON
+    #undef MAP_ANALOG
+}
+
+// FIXME-PLATFORM: SDL doesn't have an event to notify the application of display/monitor changes
+static void ImGui_ImplSDL2_UpdateMonitors()
+{
+    ImGuiPlatformIO& platform_io = ImGui::GetPlatformIO();
+    platform_io.Monitors.resize(0);
+    int display_count = SDL_GetNumVideoDisplays();
+    for (int n = 0; n < display_count; n++)
+    {
+        // Warning: the validity of monitor DPI information on Windows depends on the application DPI awareness settings, which generally needs to be set in the manifest or at runtime.
+        ImGuiPlatformMonitor monitor;
+        SDL_Rect r;
+        SDL_GetDisplayBounds(n, &r);
+        monitor.MainPos = monitor.WorkPos = ImVec2((float)r.x, (float)r.y);
+        monitor.MainSize = monitor.WorkSize = ImVec2((float)r.w, (float)r.h);
+#if SDL_HAS_USABLE_DISPLAY_BOUNDS
+        SDL_GetDisplayUsableBounds(n, &r);
+        monitor.WorkPos = ImVec2((float)r.x, (float)r.y);
+        monitor.WorkSize = ImVec2((float)r.w, (float)r.h);
+#endif
+#if SDL_HAS_PER_MONITOR_DPI
+        // FIXME-VIEWPORT: On MacOS SDL reports actual monitor DPI scale, ignoring OS configuration. We may want to set
+        //  DpiScale to cocoa_window.backingScaleFactor here.
+        float dpi = 0.0f;
+        if (!SDL_GetDisplayDPI(n, &dpi, NULL, NULL))
+            monitor.DpiScale = dpi / 96.0f;
+#endif
+        platform_io.Monitors.push_back(monitor);
+    }
+}
+
+void ImGui_ImplSDL2_NewFrame()
+{
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplSDL2_GetBackendData();
+    IM_ASSERT(bd != NULL && "Did you call ImGui_ImplSDL2_Init()?");
+    ImGuiIO& io = ImGui::GetIO();
+
+    // Setup display size (every frame to accommodate for window resizing)
+    int w, h;
+    int display_w, display_h;
+    SDL_GetWindowSize(bd->Window, &w, &h);
+    if (SDL_GetWindowFlags(bd->Window) & SDL_WINDOW_MINIMIZED)
+        w = h = 0;
+    if (bd->Renderer != NULL)
+        SDL_GetRendererOutputSize(bd->Renderer, &display_w, &display_h);
+    else
+        SDL_GL_GetDrawableSize(bd->Window, &display_w, &display_h);
+    io.DisplaySize = ImVec2((float)w, (float)h);
+    if (w > 0 && h > 0)
+        io.DisplayFramebufferScale = ImVec2((float)display_w / w, (float)display_h / h);
+
+    // Setup time step (we don't use SDL_GetTicks() because it is using millisecond resolution)
+    static Uint64 frequency = SDL_GetPerformanceFrequency();
+    Uint64 current_time = SDL_GetPerformanceCounter();
+    io.DeltaTime = bd->Time > 0 ? (float)((double)(current_time - bd->Time) / frequency) : (float)(1.0f / 60.0f);
+    bd->Time = current_time;
+
+    if (bd->PendingMouseLeaveFrame && bd->PendingMouseLeaveFrame >= ImGui::GetFrameCount() && bd->MouseButtonsDown == 0)
+    {
+        bd->MouseWindowID = 0;
+        bd->PendingMouseLeaveFrame = 0;
+        io.AddMousePosEvent(-FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX);
+    }
+
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_UpdateMouseData();
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_UpdateMouseCursor();
+
+    // Update game controllers (if enabled and available)
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_UpdateGamepads();
+}
+
+//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// MULTI-VIEWPORT / PLATFORM INTERFACE SUPPORT
+// This is an _advanced_ and _optional_ feature, allowing the backend to create and handle multiple viewports simultaneously.
+// If you are new to dear imgui or creating a new binding for dear imgui, it is recommended that you completely ignore this section first..
+//--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Helper structure we store in the void* RenderUserData field of each ImGuiViewport to easily retrieve our backend data.
+struct ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData
+{
+    SDL_Window*     Window;
+    Uint32          WindowID;
+    bool            WindowOwned;
+    SDL_GLContext   GLContext;
+
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData() { Window = NULL; WindowID = 0; WindowOwned = false; GLContext = NULL; }
+    ~ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData() { IM_ASSERT(Window == NULL && GLContext == NULL); }
+};
+
+static void ImGui_ImplSDL2_CreateWindow(ImGuiViewport* viewport)
+{
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_Data* bd = ImGui_ImplSDL2_GetBackendData();
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData* vd = IM_NEW(ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData)();
+    viewport->PlatformUserData = vd;
+
+    ImGuiViewport* main_viewport = ImGui::GetMainViewport();
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData* main_viewport_data = (ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData*)main_viewport->PlatformUserData;
+
+    // Share GL resources with main context
+    bool use_opengl = (main_viewport_data->GLContext != NULL);
+    SDL_GLContext backup_context = NULL;
+    if (use_opengl)
+    {
+        backup_context = SDL_GL_GetCurrentContext();
+        SDL_GL_SetAttribute(SDL_GL_SHARE_WITH_CURRENT_CONTEXT, 1);
+        SDL_GL_MakeCurrent(main_viewport_data->Window, main_viewport_data->GLContext);
+    }
+
+    Uint32 sdl_flags = 0;
+    sdl_flags |= use_opengl ? SDL_WINDOW_OPENGL : (bd->UseVulkan ? SDL_WINDOW_VULKAN : 0);
+    sdl_flags |= SDL_GetWindowFlags(bd->Window) & SDL_WINDOW_ALLOW_HIGHDPI;
+    sdl_flags |= SDL_WINDOW_HIDDEN;
+    sdl_flags |= (viewport->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_NoDecoration) ? SDL_WINDOW_BORDERLESS : 0;
+    sdl_flags |= (viewport->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_NoDecoration) ? 0 : SDL_WINDOW_RESIZABLE;
+#if !defined(_WIN32)
+    // See SDL hack in ImGui_ImplSDL2_ShowWindow().
+    sdl_flags |= (viewport->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_NoTaskBarIcon) ? SDL_WINDOW_SKIP_TASKBAR : 0;
+#endif
+#if SDL_HAS_ALWAYS_ON_TOP
+    sdl_flags |= (viewport->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_TopMost) ? SDL_WINDOW_ALWAYS_ON_TOP : 0;
+#endif
+    vd->Window = SDL_CreateWindow("No Title Yet", (int)viewport->Pos.x, (int)viewport->Pos.y, (int)viewport->Size.x, (int)viewport->Size.y, sdl_flags);
+    vd->WindowOwned = true;
+    if (use_opengl)
+    {
+        vd->GLContext = SDL_GL_CreateContext(vd->Window);
+        SDL_GL_SetSwapInterval(0);
+    }
+    if (use_opengl && backup_context)
+        SDL_GL_MakeCurrent(vd->Window, backup_context);
+
+    viewport->PlatformHandle = (void*)vd->Window;
+    SDL_SysWMinfo info;
+    SDL_VERSION(&info.version);
+    if (SDL_GetWindowWMInfo(vd->Window, &info))
+    {
+#if defined(_WIN32)
+        viewport->PlatformHandleRaw = info.info.win.window;
+#elif defined(__APPLE__)
+        viewport->PlatformHandleRaw = (void*)info.info.cocoa.window;
+#endif
+    }
+}
+
+static void ImGui_ImplSDL2_DestroyWindow(ImGuiViewport* viewport)
+{
+    if (ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData* vd = (ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData*)viewport->PlatformUserData)
+    {
+        if (vd->GLContext && vd->WindowOwned)
+            SDL_GL_DeleteContext(vd->GLContext);
+        if (vd->Window && vd->WindowOwned)
+            SDL_DestroyWindow(vd->Window);
+        vd->GLContext = NULL;
+        vd->Window = NULL;
+        IM_DELETE(vd);
+    }
+    viewport->PlatformUserData = viewport->PlatformHandle = NULL;
+}
+
+static void ImGui_ImplSDL2_ShowWindow(ImGuiViewport* viewport)
+{
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData* vd = (ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData*)viewport->PlatformUserData;
+#if defined(_WIN32)
+    HWND hwnd = (HWND)viewport->PlatformHandleRaw;
+
+    // SDL hack: Hide icon from task bar
+    // Note: SDL 2.0.6+ has a SDL_WINDOW_SKIP_TASKBAR flag which is supported under Windows but the way it create the window breaks our seamless transition.
+    if (viewport->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_NoTaskBarIcon)
+    {
+        LONG ex_style = ::GetWindowLong(hwnd, GWL_EXSTYLE);
+        ex_style &= ~WS_EX_APPWINDOW;
+        ex_style |= WS_EX_TOOLWINDOW;
+        ::SetWindowLong(hwnd, GWL_EXSTYLE, ex_style);
+    }
+
+    // SDL hack: SDL always activate/focus windows :/
+    if (viewport->Flags & ImGuiViewportFlags_NoFocusOnAppearing)
+    {
+        ::ShowWindow(hwnd, SW_SHOWNA);
+        return;
+    }
+#endif
+
+    SDL_ShowWindow(vd->Window);
+}
+
+static ImVec2 ImGui_ImplSDL2_GetWindowPos(ImGuiViewport* viewport)
+{
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData* vd = (ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData*)viewport->PlatformUserData;
+    int x = 0, y = 0;
+    SDL_GetWindowPosition(vd->Window, &x, &y);
+    return ImVec2((float)x, (float)y);
+}
+
+static void ImGui_ImplSDL2_SetWindowPos(ImGuiViewport* viewport, ImVec2 pos)
+{
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData* vd = (ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData*)viewport->PlatformUserData;
+    SDL_SetWindowPosition(vd->Window, (int)pos.x, (int)pos.y);
+}
+
+static ImVec2 ImGui_ImplSDL2_GetWindowSize(ImGuiViewport* viewport)
+{
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData* vd = (ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData*)viewport->PlatformUserData;
+    int w = 0, h = 0;
+    SDL_GetWindowSize(vd->Window, &w, &h);
+    return ImVec2((float)w, (float)h);
+}
+
+static void ImGui_ImplSDL2_SetWindowSize(ImGuiViewport* viewport, ImVec2 size)
+{
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData* vd = (ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData*)viewport->PlatformUserData;
+    SDL_SetWindowSize(vd->Window, (int)size.x, (int)size.y);
+}
+
+static void ImGui_ImplSDL2_SetWindowTitle(ImGuiViewport* viewport, const char* title)
+{
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData* vd = (ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData*)viewport->PlatformUserData;
+    SDL_SetWindowTitle(vd->Window, title);
+}
+
+#if SDL_HAS_WINDOW_ALPHA
+static void ImGui_ImplSDL2_SetWindowAlpha(ImGuiViewport* viewport, float alpha)
+{
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData* vd = (ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData*)viewport->PlatformUserData;
+    SDL_SetWindowOpacity(vd->Window, alpha);
+}
+#endif
+
+static void ImGui_ImplSDL2_SetWindowFocus(ImGuiViewport* viewport)
+{
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData* vd = (ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData*)viewport->PlatformUserData;
+    SDL_RaiseWindow(vd->Window);
+}
+
+static bool ImGui_ImplSDL2_GetWindowFocus(ImGuiViewport* viewport)
+{
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData* vd = (ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData*)viewport->PlatformUserData;
+    return (SDL_GetWindowFlags(vd->Window) & SDL_WINDOW_INPUT_FOCUS) != 0;
+}
+
+static bool ImGui_ImplSDL2_GetWindowMinimized(ImGuiViewport* viewport)
+{
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData* vd = (ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData*)viewport->PlatformUserData;
+    return (SDL_GetWindowFlags(vd->Window) & SDL_WINDOW_MINIMIZED) != 0;
+}
+
+static void ImGui_ImplSDL2_RenderWindow(ImGuiViewport* viewport, void*)
+{
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData* vd = (ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData*)viewport->PlatformUserData;
+    if (vd->GLContext)
+        SDL_GL_MakeCurrent(vd->Window, vd->GLContext);
+}
+
+static void ImGui_ImplSDL2_SwapBuffers(ImGuiViewport* viewport, void*)
+{
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData* vd = (ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData*)viewport->PlatformUserData;
+    if (vd->GLContext)
+    {
+        SDL_GL_MakeCurrent(vd->Window, vd->GLContext);
+        SDL_GL_SwapWindow(vd->Window);
+    }
+}
+
+// Vulkan support (the Vulkan renderer needs to call a platform-side support function to create the surface)
+// SDL is graceful enough to _not_ need <vulkan/vulkan.h> so we can safely include this.
+#if SDL_HAS_VULKAN
+#include <SDL_vulkan.h>
+static int ImGui_ImplSDL2_CreateVkSurface(ImGuiViewport* viewport, ImU64 vk_instance, const void* vk_allocator, ImU64* out_vk_surface)
+{
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData* vd = (ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData*)viewport->PlatformUserData;
+    (void)vk_allocator;
+    SDL_bool ret = SDL_Vulkan_CreateSurface(vd->Window, (VkInstance)vk_instance, (VkSurfaceKHR*)out_vk_surface);
+    return ret ? 0 : 1; // ret ? VK_SUCCESS : VK_NOT_READY
+}
+#endif // SDL_HAS_VULKAN
+
+static void ImGui_ImplSDL2_InitPlatformInterface(SDL_Window* window, void* sdl_gl_context)
+{
+    // Register platform interface (will be coupled with a renderer interface)
+    ImGuiPlatformIO& platform_io = ImGui::GetPlatformIO();
+    platform_io.Platform_CreateWindow = ImGui_ImplSDL2_CreateWindow;
+    platform_io.Platform_DestroyWindow = ImGui_ImplSDL2_DestroyWindow;
+    platform_io.Platform_ShowWindow = ImGui_ImplSDL2_ShowWindow;
+    platform_io.Platform_SetWindowPos = ImGui_ImplSDL2_SetWindowPos;
+    platform_io.Platform_GetWindowPos = ImGui_ImplSDL2_GetWindowPos;
+    platform_io.Platform_SetWindowSize = ImGui_ImplSDL2_SetWindowSize;
+    platform_io.Platform_GetWindowSize = ImGui_ImplSDL2_GetWindowSize;
+    platform_io.Platform_SetWindowFocus = ImGui_ImplSDL2_SetWindowFocus;
+    platform_io.Platform_GetWindowFocus = ImGui_ImplSDL2_GetWindowFocus;
+    platform_io.Platform_GetWindowMinimized = ImGui_ImplSDL2_GetWindowMinimized;
+    platform_io.Platform_SetWindowTitle = ImGui_ImplSDL2_SetWindowTitle;
+    platform_io.Platform_RenderWindow = ImGui_ImplSDL2_RenderWindow;
+    platform_io.Platform_SwapBuffers = ImGui_ImplSDL2_SwapBuffers;
+#if SDL_HAS_WINDOW_ALPHA
+    platform_io.Platform_SetWindowAlpha = ImGui_ImplSDL2_SetWindowAlpha;
+#endif
+#if SDL_HAS_VULKAN
+    platform_io.Platform_CreateVkSurface = ImGui_ImplSDL2_CreateVkSurface;
+#endif
+
+    // Register main window handle (which is owned by the main application, not by us)
+    // This is mostly for simplicity and consistency, so that our code (e.g. mouse handling etc.) can use same logic for main and secondary viewports.
+    ImGuiViewport* main_viewport = ImGui::GetMainViewport();
+    ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData* vd = IM_NEW(ImGui_ImplSDL2_ViewportData)();
+    vd->Window = window;
+    vd->WindowID = SDL_GetWindowID(window);
+    vd->WindowOwned = false;
+    vd->GLContext = sdl_gl_context;
+    main_viewport->PlatformUserData = vd;
+    main_viewport->PlatformHandle = vd->Window;
+}
+
+static void ImGui_ImplSDL2_ShutdownPlatformInterface()
+{
+    ImGui::DestroyPlatformWindows();
+}
diff --git a/dependencies/src/imgui/imgui_tables.cpp b/dependencies/src/imgui/imgui_tables.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9b18f41
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/src/imgui/imgui_tables.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,4071 @@
+// dear imgui, v1.89 WIP
+// (tables and columns code)
+
+/*
+
+Index of this file:
+
+// [SECTION] Commentary
+// [SECTION] Header mess
+// [SECTION] Tables: Main code
+// [SECTION] Tables: Simple accessors
+// [SECTION] Tables: Row changes
+// [SECTION] Tables: Columns changes
+// [SECTION] Tables: Columns width management
+// [SECTION] Tables: Drawing
+// [SECTION] Tables: Sorting
+// [SECTION] Tables: Headers
+// [SECTION] Tables: Context Menu
+// [SECTION] Tables: Settings (.ini data)
+// [SECTION] Tables: Garbage Collection
+// [SECTION] Tables: Debugging
+// [SECTION] Columns, BeginColumns, EndColumns, etc.
+
+*/
+
+// Navigating this file:
+// - In Visual Studio IDE: CTRL+comma ("Edit.GoToAll") can follow symbols in comments, whereas CTRL+F12 ("Edit.GoToImplementation") cannot.
+// - With Visual Assist installed: ALT+G ("VAssistX.GoToImplementation") can also follow symbols in comments.
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Commentary
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Typical tables call flow: (root level is generally public API):
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - BeginTable()                               user begin into a table
+//    | BeginChild()                            - (if ScrollX/ScrollY is set)
+//    | TableBeginInitMemory()                  - first time table is used
+//    | TableResetSettings()                    - on settings reset
+//    | TableLoadSettings()                     - on settings load
+//    | TableBeginApplyRequests()               - apply queued resizing/reordering/hiding requests
+//    | - TableSetColumnWidth()                 - apply resizing width (for mouse resize, often requested by previous frame)
+//    |    - TableUpdateColumnsWeightFromWidth()- recompute columns weights (of stretch columns) from their respective width
+// - TableSetupColumn()                         user submit columns details (optional)
+// - TableSetupScrollFreeze()                   user submit scroll freeze information (optional)
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - TableUpdateLayout() [Internal]             followup to BeginTable(): setup everything: widths, columns positions, clipping rectangles. Automatically called by the FIRST call to TableNextRow() or TableHeadersRow().
+//    | TableSetupDrawChannels()                - setup ImDrawList channels
+//    | TableUpdateBorders()                    - detect hovering columns for resize, ahead of contents submission
+//    | TableDrawContextMenu()                  - draw right-click context menu
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - TableHeadersRow() or TableHeader()         user submit a headers row (optional)
+//    | TableSortSpecsClickColumn()             - when left-clicked: alter sort order and sort direction
+//    | TableOpenContextMenu()                  - when right-clicked: trigger opening of the default context menu
+// - TableGetSortSpecs()                        user queries updated sort specs (optional, generally after submitting headers)
+// - TableNextRow()                             user begin into a new row (also automatically called by TableHeadersRow())
+//    | TableEndRow()                           - finish existing row
+//    | TableBeginRow()                         - add a new row
+// - TableSetColumnIndex() / TableNextColumn()  user begin into a cell
+//    | TableEndCell()                          - close existing column/cell
+//    | TableBeginCell()                        - enter into current column/cell
+// - [...]                                      user emit contents
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - EndTable()                                 user ends the table
+//    | TableDrawBorders()                      - draw outer borders, inner vertical borders
+//    | TableMergeDrawChannels()                - merge draw channels if clipping isn't required
+//    | EndChild()                              - (if ScrollX/ScrollY is set)
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// TABLE SIZING
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// (Read carefully because this is subtle but it does make sense!)
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// About 'outer_size':
+// Its meaning needs to differ slightly depending on if we are using ScrollX/ScrollY flags.
+// Default value is ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f).
+//   X
+//   - outer_size.x <= 0.0f  ->  Right-align from window/work-rect right-most edge. With -FLT_MIN or 0.0f will align exactly on right-most edge.
+//   - outer_size.x  > 0.0f  ->  Set Fixed width.
+//   Y with ScrollX/ScrollY disabled: we output table directly in current window
+//   - outer_size.y  < 0.0f  ->  Bottom-align (but will auto extend, unless _NoHostExtendY is set). Not meaningful is parent window can vertically scroll.
+//   - outer_size.y  = 0.0f  ->  No minimum height (but will auto extend, unless _NoHostExtendY is set)
+//   - outer_size.y  > 0.0f  ->  Set Minimum height (but will auto extend, unless _NoHostExtenY is set)
+//   Y with ScrollX/ScrollY enabled: using a child window for scrolling
+//   - outer_size.y  < 0.0f  ->  Bottom-align. Not meaningful is parent window can vertically scroll.
+//   - outer_size.y  = 0.0f  ->  Bottom-align, consistent with BeginChild(). Not recommended unless table is last item in parent window.
+//   - outer_size.y  > 0.0f  ->  Set Exact height. Recommended when using Scrolling on any axis.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Outer size is also affected by the NoHostExtendX/NoHostExtendY flags.
+// Important to that note how the two flags have slightly different behaviors!
+//   - ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX -> Make outer width auto-fit to columns (overriding outer_size.x value). Only available when ScrollX/ScrollY are disabled and Stretch columns are not used.
+//   - ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY -> Make outer height stop exactly at outer_size.y (prevent auto-extending table past the limit). Only available when ScrollX/ScrollY is disabled. Data below the limit will be clipped and not visible.
+// In theory ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY could be the default and any non-scrolling tables with outer_size.y != 0.0f would use exact height.
+// This would be consistent but perhaps less useful and more confusing (as vertically clipped items are not easily noticeable)
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// About 'inner_width':
+//   With ScrollX disabled:
+//   - inner_width          ->  *ignored*
+//   With ScrollX enabled:
+//   - inner_width  < 0.0f  ->  *illegal* fit in known width (right align from outer_size.x) <-- weird
+//   - inner_width  = 0.0f  ->  fit in outer_width: Fixed size columns will take space they need (if avail, otherwise shrink down), Stretch columns becomes Fixed columns.
+//   - inner_width  > 0.0f  ->  override scrolling width, generally to be larger than outer_size.x. Fixed column take space they need (if avail, otherwise shrink down), Stretch columns share remaining space!
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Details:
+// - If you want to use Stretch columns with ScrollX, you generally need to specify 'inner_width' otherwise the concept
+//   of "available space" doesn't make sense.
+// - Even if not really useful, we allow 'inner_width < outer_size.x' for consistency and to facilitate understanding
+//   of what the value does.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// COLUMNS SIZING POLICIES
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// About overriding column sizing policy and width/weight with TableSetupColumn():
+// We use a default parameter of 'init_width_or_weight == -1'.
+//   - with ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed,    init_width  <= 0 (default)  --> width is automatic
+//   - with ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed,    init_width  >  0 (explicit) --> width is custom
+//   - with ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch,  init_weight <= 0 (default)  --> weight is 1.0f
+//   - with ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch,  init_weight >  0 (explicit) --> weight is custom
+// Widths are specified _without_ CellPadding. If you specify a width of 100.0f, the column will be cover (100.0f + Padding * 2.0f)
+// and you can fit a 100.0f wide item in it without clipping and with full padding.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// About default sizing policy (if you don't specify a ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthXXXX flag)
+//   - with Table policy ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit      --> default Column policy is ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, default Width is equal to contents width
+//   - with Table policy ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame     --> default Column policy is ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed, default Width is max of all contents width
+//   - with Table policy ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame   --> default Column policy is ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch, default Weight is 1.0f
+//   - with Table policy ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchWeight --> default Column policy is ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch, default Weight is proportional to contents
+// Default Width and default Weight can be overridden when calling TableSetupColumn().
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// About mixing Fixed/Auto and Stretch columns together:
+//   - the typical use of mixing sizing policies is: any number of LEADING Fixed columns, followed by one or two TRAILING Stretch columns.
+//   - using mixed policies with ScrollX does not make much sense, as using Stretch columns with ScrollX does not make much sense in the first place!
+//     that is, unless 'inner_width' is passed to BeginTable() to explicitly provide a total width to layout columns in.
+//   - when using ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame with mixed columns, only the Fixed/Auto columns will match their widths to the width of the maximum contents.
+//   - when using ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame with mixed columns, only the Stretch columns will match their weight/widths.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// About using column width:
+// If a column is manual resizable or has a width specified with TableSetupColumn():
+//   - you may use GetContentRegionAvail().x to query the width available in a given column.
+//   - right-side alignment features such as SetNextItemWidth(-x) or PushItemWidth(-x) will rely on this width.
+// If the column is not resizable and has no width specified with TableSetupColumn():
+//   - its width will be automatic and be set to the max of items submitted.
+//   - therefore you generally cannot have ALL items of the columns use e.g. SetNextItemWidth(-FLT_MIN).
+//   - but if the column has one or more items of known/fixed size, this will become the reference width used by SetNextItemWidth(-FLT_MIN).
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// TABLES CLIPPING/CULLING
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// About clipping/culling of Rows in Tables:
+// - For large numbers of rows, it is recommended you use ImGuiListClipper to only submit visible rows.
+//   ImGuiListClipper is reliant on the fact that rows are of equal height.
+//   See 'Demo->Tables->Vertical Scrolling' or 'Demo->Tables->Advanced' for a demo of using the clipper.
+// - Note that auto-resizing columns don't play well with using the clipper.
+//   By default a table with _ScrollX but without _Resizable will have column auto-resize.
+//   So, if you want to use the clipper, make sure to either enable _Resizable, either setup columns width explicitly with _WidthFixed.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// About clipping/culling of Columns in Tables:
+// - Both TableSetColumnIndex() and TableNextColumn() return true when the column is visible or performing
+//   width measurements. Otherwise, you may skip submitting the contents of a cell/column, BUT ONLY if you know
+//   it is not going to contribute to row height.
+//   In many situations, you may skip submitting contents for every column but one (e.g. the first one).
+// - Case A: column is not hidden by user, and at least partially in sight (most common case).
+// - Case B: column is clipped / out of sight (because of scrolling or parent ClipRect): TableNextColumn() return false as a hint but we still allow layout output.
+// - Case C: column is hidden explicitly by the user (e.g. via the context menu, or _DefaultHide column flag, etc.).
+//
+//                        [A]         [B]          [C]
+//  TableNextColumn():    true        false        false       -> [userland] when TableNextColumn() / TableSetColumnIndex() return false, user can skip submitting items but only if the column doesn't contribute to row height.
+//          SkipItems:    false       false        true        -> [internal] when SkipItems is true, most widgets will early out if submitted, resulting is no layout output.
+//           ClipRect:    normal      zero-width   zero-width  -> [internal] when ClipRect is zero, ItemAdd() will return false and most widgets will early out mid-way.
+//  ImDrawList output:    normal      dummy        dummy       -> [internal] when using the dummy channel, ImDrawList submissions (if any) will be wasted (because cliprect is zero-width anyway).
+//
+// - We need to distinguish those cases because non-hidden columns that are clipped outside of scrolling bounds should still contribute their height to the row.
+//   However, in the majority of cases, the contribution to row height is the same for all columns, or the tallest cells are known by the programmer.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// About clipping/culling of whole Tables:
+// - Scrolling tables with a known outer size can be clipped earlier as BeginTable() will return false.
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Header mess
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(_CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS)
+#define _CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS
+#endif
+
+#include "imgui.h"
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE
+
+#ifndef IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS
+#define IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS
+#endif
+#include "imgui_internal.h"
+
+// System includes
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER <= 1500 // MSVC 2008 or earlier
+#include <stddef.h>     // intptr_t
+#else
+#include <stdint.h>     // intptr_t
+#endif
+
+// Visual Studio warnings
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+#pragma warning (disable: 4127)     // condition expression is constant
+#pragma warning (disable: 4996)     // 'This function or variable may be unsafe': strcpy, strdup, sprintf, vsnprintf, sscanf, fopen
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER >= 1922 // MSVC 2019 16.2 or later
+#pragma warning (disable: 5054)     // operator '|': deprecated between enumerations of different types
+#endif
+#pragma warning (disable: 26451)    // [Static Analyzer] Arithmetic overflow : Using operator 'xxx' on a 4 byte value and then casting the result to a 8 byte value. Cast the value to the wider type before calling operator 'xxx' to avoid overflow(io.2).
+#pragma warning (disable: 26812)    // [Static Analyzer] The enum type 'xxx' is unscoped. Prefer 'enum class' over 'enum' (Enum.3).
+#endif
+
+// Clang/GCC warnings with -Weverything
+#if defined(__clang__)
+#if __has_warning("-Wunknown-warning-option")
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-warning-option"         // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx'                      // not all warnings are known by all Clang versions and they tend to be rename-happy.. so ignoring warnings triggers new warnings on some configuration. Great!
+#endif
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-pragmas"                // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx'
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast"                 // warning: use of old-style cast                            // yes, they are more terse.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wfloat-equal"                    // warning: comparing floating point with == or != is unsafe // storing and comparing against same constants (typically 0.0f) is ok.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-nonliteral"              // warning: format string is not a string literal            // passing non-literal to vsnformat(). yes, user passing incorrect format strings can crash the code.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wsign-conversion"                // warning: implicit conversion changes signedness
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant"  // warning: zero as null pointer constant                    // some standard header variations use #define NULL 0
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion"               // warning: implicit conversion from 'float' to 'double' when passing argument to function  // using printf() is a misery with this as C++ va_arg ellipsis changes float to double.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wenum-enum-conversion"           // warning: bitwise operation between different enumeration types ('XXXFlags_' and 'XXXFlagsPrivate_')
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdeprecated-enum-enum-conversion"// warning: bitwise operation between different enumeration types ('XXXFlags_' and 'XXXFlagsPrivate_') is deprecated
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wimplicit-int-float-conversion"  // warning: implicit conversion from 'xxx' to 'float' may lose precision
+#elif defined(__GNUC__)
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wpragmas"                          // warning: unknown option after '#pragma GCC diagnostic' kind
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-nonliteral"                // warning: format not a string literal, format string not checked
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wclass-memaccess"                  // [__GNUC__ >= 8] warning: 'memset/memcpy' clearing/writing an object of type 'xxxx' with no trivial copy-assignment; use assignment or value-initialization instead
+#endif
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Tables: Main code
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - TableFixFlags() [Internal]
+// - TableFindByID() [Internal]
+// - BeginTable()
+// - BeginTableEx() [Internal]
+// - TableBeginInitMemory() [Internal]
+// - TableBeginApplyRequests() [Internal]
+// - TableSetupColumnFlags() [Internal]
+// - TableUpdateLayout() [Internal]
+// - TableUpdateBorders() [Internal]
+// - EndTable()
+// - TableSetupColumn()
+// - TableSetupScrollFreeze()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Configuration
+static const int TABLE_DRAW_CHANNEL_BG0 = 0;
+static const int TABLE_DRAW_CHANNEL_BG2_FROZEN = 1;
+static const int TABLE_DRAW_CHANNEL_NOCLIP = 2;                     // When using ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip (this becomes the last visible channel)
+static const float TABLE_BORDER_SIZE                     = 1.0f;    // FIXME-TABLE: Currently hard-coded because of clipping assumptions with outer borders rendering.
+static const float TABLE_RESIZE_SEPARATOR_HALF_THICKNESS = 4.0f;    // Extend outside inner borders.
+static const float TABLE_RESIZE_SEPARATOR_FEEDBACK_TIMER = 0.06f;   // Delay/timer before making the hover feedback (color+cursor) visible because tables/columns tends to be more cramped.
+
+// Helper
+inline ImGuiTableFlags TableFixFlags(ImGuiTableFlags flags, ImGuiWindow* outer_window)
+{
+    // Adjust flags: set default sizing policy
+    if ((flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_) == 0)
+        flags |= ((flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) || (outer_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize)) ? ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit : ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame;
+
+    // Adjust flags: enable NoKeepColumnsVisible when using ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame
+    if ((flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_) == ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame)
+        flags |= ImGuiTableFlags_NoKeepColumnsVisible;
+
+    // Adjust flags: enforce borders when resizable
+    if (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable)
+        flags |= ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV;
+
+    // Adjust flags: disable NoHostExtendX/NoHostExtendY if we have any scrolling going on
+    if (flags & (ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY))
+        flags &= ~(ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX | ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY);
+
+    // Adjust flags: NoBordersInBodyUntilResize takes priority over NoBordersInBody
+    if (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize)
+        flags &= ~ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody;
+
+    // Adjust flags: disable saved settings if there's nothing to save
+    if ((flags & (ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable)) == 0)
+        flags |= ImGuiTableFlags_NoSavedSettings;
+
+    // Inherit _NoSavedSettings from top-level window (child windows always have _NoSavedSettings set)
+    if (outer_window->RootWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings)
+        flags |= ImGuiTableFlags_NoSavedSettings;
+
+    return flags;
+}
+
+ImGuiTable* ImGui::TableFindByID(ImGuiID id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.Tables.GetByKey(id);
+}
+
+// Read about "TABLE SIZING" at the top of this file.
+bool    ImGui::BeginTable(const char* str_id, int columns_count, ImGuiTableFlags flags, const ImVec2& outer_size, float inner_width)
+{
+    ImGuiID id = GetID(str_id);
+    return BeginTableEx(str_id, id, columns_count, flags, outer_size, inner_width);
+}
+
+bool    ImGui::BeginTableEx(const char* name, ImGuiID id, int columns_count, ImGuiTableFlags flags, const ImVec2& outer_size, float inner_width)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* outer_window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (outer_window->SkipItems) // Consistent with other tables + beneficial side effect that assert on miscalling EndTable() will be more visible.
+        return false;
+
+    // Sanity checks
+    IM_ASSERT(columns_count > 0 && columns_count <= IMGUI_TABLE_MAX_COLUMNS && "Only 1..64 columns allowed!");
+    if (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX)
+        IM_ASSERT(inner_width >= 0.0f);
+
+    // If an outer size is specified ahead we will be able to early out when not visible. Exact clipping rules may evolve.
+    const bool use_child_window = (flags & (ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY)) != 0;
+    const ImVec2 avail_size = GetContentRegionAvail();
+    ImVec2 actual_outer_size = CalcItemSize(outer_size, ImMax(avail_size.x, 1.0f), use_child_window ? ImMax(avail_size.y, 1.0f) : 0.0f);
+    ImRect outer_rect(outer_window->DC.CursorPos, outer_window->DC.CursorPos + actual_outer_size);
+    if (use_child_window && IsClippedEx(outer_rect, 0))
+    {
+        ItemSize(outer_rect);
+        return false;
+    }
+
+    // Acquire storage for the table
+    ImGuiTable* table = g.Tables.GetOrAddByKey(id);
+    const int instance_no = (table->LastFrameActive != g.FrameCount) ? 0 : table->InstanceCurrent + 1;
+    const ImGuiID instance_id = id + instance_no;
+    const ImGuiTableFlags table_last_flags = table->Flags;
+    if (instance_no > 0)
+        IM_ASSERT(table->ColumnsCount == columns_count && "BeginTable(): Cannot change columns count mid-frame while preserving same ID");
+
+    // Acquire temporary buffers
+    const int table_idx = g.Tables.GetIndex(table);
+    if (++g.TablesTempDataStacked > g.TablesTempData.Size)
+        g.TablesTempData.resize(g.TablesTempDataStacked, ImGuiTableTempData());
+    ImGuiTableTempData* temp_data = table->TempData = &g.TablesTempData[g.TablesTempDataStacked - 1];
+    temp_data->TableIndex = table_idx;
+    table->DrawSplitter = &table->TempData->DrawSplitter;
+    table->DrawSplitter->Clear();
+
+    // Fix flags
+    table->IsDefaultSizingPolicy = (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_) == 0;
+    flags = TableFixFlags(flags, outer_window);
+
+    // Initialize
+    table->ID = id;
+    table->Flags = flags;
+    table->InstanceCurrent = (ImS16)instance_no;
+    table->LastFrameActive = g.FrameCount;
+    table->OuterWindow = table->InnerWindow = outer_window;
+    table->ColumnsCount = columns_count;
+    table->IsLayoutLocked = false;
+    table->InnerWidth = inner_width;
+    temp_data->UserOuterSize = outer_size;
+    if (instance_no > 0 && table->InstanceDataExtra.Size < instance_no)
+        table->InstanceDataExtra.push_back(ImGuiTableInstanceData());
+
+    // When not using a child window, WorkRect.Max will grow as we append contents.
+    if (use_child_window)
+    {
+        // Ensure no vertical scrollbar appears if we only want horizontal one, to make flag consistent
+        // (we have no other way to disable vertical scrollbar of a window while keeping the horizontal one showing)
+        ImVec2 override_content_size(FLT_MAX, FLT_MAX);
+        if ((flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) && !(flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY))
+            override_content_size.y = FLT_MIN;
+
+        // Ensure specified width (when not specified, Stretched columns will act as if the width == OuterWidth and
+        // never lead to any scrolling). We don't handle inner_width < 0.0f, we could potentially use it to right-align
+        // based on the right side of the child window work rect, which would require knowing ahead if we are going to
+        // have decoration taking horizontal spaces (typically a vertical scrollbar).
+        if ((flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) && inner_width > 0.0f)
+            override_content_size.x = inner_width;
+
+        if (override_content_size.x != FLT_MAX || override_content_size.y != FLT_MAX)
+            SetNextWindowContentSize(ImVec2(override_content_size.x != FLT_MAX ? override_content_size.x : 0.0f, override_content_size.y != FLT_MAX ? override_content_size.y : 0.0f));
+
+        // Reset scroll if we are reactivating it
+        if ((table_last_flags & (ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX | ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY)) == 0)
+            SetNextWindowScroll(ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
+
+        // Create scrolling region (without border and zero window padding)
+        ImGuiWindowFlags child_flags = (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) ? ImGuiWindowFlags_HorizontalScrollbar : ImGuiWindowFlags_None;
+        BeginChildEx(name, instance_id, outer_rect.GetSize(), false, child_flags);
+        table->InnerWindow = g.CurrentWindow;
+        table->WorkRect = table->InnerWindow->WorkRect;
+        table->OuterRect = table->InnerWindow->Rect();
+        table->InnerRect = table->InnerWindow->InnerRect;
+        IM_ASSERT(table->InnerWindow->WindowPadding.x == 0.0f && table->InnerWindow->WindowPadding.y == 0.0f && table->InnerWindow->WindowBorderSize == 0.0f);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // For non-scrolling tables, WorkRect == OuterRect == InnerRect.
+        // But at this point we do NOT have a correct value for .Max.y (unless a height has been explicitly passed in). It will only be updated in EndTable().
+        table->WorkRect = table->OuterRect = table->InnerRect = outer_rect;
+    }
+
+    // Push a standardized ID for both child-using and not-child-using tables
+    PushOverrideID(instance_id);
+
+    // Backup a copy of host window members we will modify
+    ImGuiWindow* inner_window = table->InnerWindow;
+    table->HostIndentX = inner_window->DC.Indent.x;
+    table->HostClipRect = inner_window->ClipRect;
+    table->HostSkipItems = inner_window->SkipItems;
+    temp_data->HostBackupWorkRect = inner_window->WorkRect;
+    temp_data->HostBackupParentWorkRect = inner_window->ParentWorkRect;
+    temp_data->HostBackupColumnsOffset = outer_window->DC.ColumnsOffset;
+    temp_data->HostBackupPrevLineSize = inner_window->DC.PrevLineSize;
+    temp_data->HostBackupCurrLineSize = inner_window->DC.CurrLineSize;
+    temp_data->HostBackupCursorMaxPos = inner_window->DC.CursorMaxPos;
+    temp_data->HostBackupItemWidth = outer_window->DC.ItemWidth;
+    temp_data->HostBackupItemWidthStackSize = outer_window->DC.ItemWidthStack.Size;
+    inner_window->DC.PrevLineSize = inner_window->DC.CurrLineSize = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+
+    // Padding and Spacing
+    // - None               ........Content..... Pad .....Content........
+    // - PadOuter           | Pad ..Content..... Pad .....Content.. Pad |
+    // - PadInner           ........Content.. Pad | Pad ..Content........
+    // - PadOuter+PadInner  | Pad ..Content.. Pad | Pad ..Content.. Pad |
+    const bool pad_outer_x = (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadOuterX) ? false : (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_PadOuterX) ? true : (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV) != 0;
+    const bool pad_inner_x = (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoPadInnerX) ? false : true;
+    const float inner_spacing_for_border = (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV) ? TABLE_BORDER_SIZE : 0.0f;
+    const float inner_spacing_explicit = (pad_inner_x && (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV) == 0) ? g.Style.CellPadding.x : 0.0f;
+    const float inner_padding_explicit = (pad_inner_x && (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV) != 0) ? g.Style.CellPadding.x : 0.0f;
+    table->CellSpacingX1 = inner_spacing_explicit + inner_spacing_for_border;
+    table->CellSpacingX2 = inner_spacing_explicit;
+    table->CellPaddingX = inner_padding_explicit;
+    table->CellPaddingY = g.Style.CellPadding.y;
+
+    const float outer_padding_for_border = (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV) ? TABLE_BORDER_SIZE : 0.0f;
+    const float outer_padding_explicit = pad_outer_x ? g.Style.CellPadding.x : 0.0f;
+    table->OuterPaddingX = (outer_padding_for_border + outer_padding_explicit) - table->CellPaddingX;
+
+    table->CurrentColumn = -1;
+    table->CurrentRow = -1;
+    table->RowBgColorCounter = 0;
+    table->LastRowFlags = ImGuiTableRowFlags_None;
+    table->InnerClipRect = (inner_window == outer_window) ? table->WorkRect : inner_window->ClipRect;
+    table->InnerClipRect.ClipWith(table->WorkRect);     // We need this to honor inner_width
+    table->InnerClipRect.ClipWithFull(table->HostClipRect);
+    table->InnerClipRect.Max.y = (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY) ? ImMin(table->InnerClipRect.Max.y, inner_window->WorkRect.Max.y) : inner_window->ClipRect.Max.y;
+
+    table->RowPosY1 = table->RowPosY2 = table->WorkRect.Min.y; // This is needed somehow
+    table->RowTextBaseline = 0.0f; // This will be cleared again by TableBeginRow()
+    table->FreezeRowsRequest = table->FreezeRowsCount = 0; // This will be setup by TableSetupScrollFreeze(), if any
+    table->FreezeColumnsRequest = table->FreezeColumnsCount = 0;
+    table->IsUnfrozenRows = true;
+    table->DeclColumnsCount = 0;
+
+    // Using opaque colors facilitate overlapping elements of the grid
+    table->BorderColorStrong = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TableBorderStrong);
+    table->BorderColorLight = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TableBorderLight);
+
+    // Make table current
+    g.CurrentTable = table;
+    outer_window->DC.CurrentTableIdx = table_idx;
+    if (inner_window != outer_window) // So EndChild() within the inner window can restore the table properly.
+        inner_window->DC.CurrentTableIdx = table_idx;
+
+    if ((table_last_flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable) && (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable) == 0)
+        table->IsResetDisplayOrderRequest = true;
+
+    // Mark as used
+    if (table_idx >= g.TablesLastTimeActive.Size)
+        g.TablesLastTimeActive.resize(table_idx + 1, -1.0f);
+    g.TablesLastTimeActive[table_idx] = (float)g.Time;
+    temp_data->LastTimeActive = (float)g.Time;
+    table->MemoryCompacted = false;
+
+    // Setup memory buffer (clear data if columns count changed)
+    ImGuiTableColumn* old_columns_to_preserve = NULL;
+    void* old_columns_raw_data = NULL;
+    const int old_columns_count = table->Columns.size();
+    if (old_columns_count != 0 && old_columns_count != columns_count)
+    {
+        // Attempt to preserve width on column count change (#4046)
+        old_columns_to_preserve = table->Columns.Data;
+        old_columns_raw_data = table->RawData;
+        table->RawData = NULL;
+    }
+    if (table->RawData == NULL)
+    {
+        TableBeginInitMemory(table, columns_count);
+        table->IsInitializing = table->IsSettingsRequestLoad = true;
+    }
+    if (table->IsResetAllRequest)
+        TableResetSettings(table);
+    if (table->IsInitializing)
+    {
+        // Initialize
+        table->SettingsOffset = -1;
+        table->IsSortSpecsDirty = true;
+        table->InstanceInteracted = -1;
+        table->ContextPopupColumn = -1;
+        table->ReorderColumn = table->ResizedColumn = table->LastResizedColumn = -1;
+        table->AutoFitSingleColumn = -1;
+        table->HoveredColumnBody = table->HoveredColumnBorder = -1;
+        for (int n = 0; n < columns_count; n++)
+        {
+            ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[n];
+            if (old_columns_to_preserve && n < old_columns_count)
+            {
+                // FIXME: We don't attempt to preserve column order in this path.
+                *column = old_columns_to_preserve[n];
+            }
+            else
+            {
+                float width_auto = column->WidthAuto;
+                *column = ImGuiTableColumn();
+                column->WidthAuto = width_auto;
+                column->IsPreserveWidthAuto = true; // Preserve WidthAuto when reinitializing a live table: not technically necessary but remove a visible flicker
+                column->IsEnabled = column->IsUserEnabled = column->IsUserEnabledNextFrame = true;
+            }
+            column->DisplayOrder = table->DisplayOrderToIndex[n] = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)n;
+        }
+    }
+    if (old_columns_raw_data)
+        IM_FREE(old_columns_raw_data);
+
+    // Load settings
+    if (table->IsSettingsRequestLoad)
+        TableLoadSettings(table);
+
+    // Handle DPI/font resize
+    // This is designed to facilitate DPI changes with the assumption that e.g. style.CellPadding has been scaled as well.
+    // It will also react to changing fonts with mixed results. It doesn't need to be perfect but merely provide a decent transition.
+    // FIXME-DPI: Provide consistent standards for reference size. Perhaps using g.CurrentDpiScale would be more self explanatory.
+    // This is will lead us to non-rounded WidthRequest in columns, which should work but is a poorly tested path.
+    const float new_ref_scale_unit = g.FontSize; // g.Font->GetCharAdvance('A') ?
+    if (table->RefScale != 0.0f && table->RefScale != new_ref_scale_unit)
+    {
+        const float scale_factor = new_ref_scale_unit / table->RefScale;
+        //IMGUI_DEBUG_PRINT("[table] %08X RefScaleUnit %.3f -> %.3f, scaling width by %.3f\n", table->ID, table->RefScaleUnit, new_ref_scale_unit, scale_factor);
+        for (int n = 0; n < columns_count; n++)
+            table->Columns[n].WidthRequest = table->Columns[n].WidthRequest * scale_factor;
+    }
+    table->RefScale = new_ref_scale_unit;
+
+    // Disable output until user calls TableNextRow() or TableNextColumn() leading to the TableUpdateLayout() call..
+    // This is not strictly necessary but will reduce cases were "out of table" output will be misleading to the user.
+    // Because we cannot safely assert in EndTable() when no rows have been created, this seems like our best option.
+    inner_window->SkipItems = true;
+
+    // Clear names
+    // At this point the ->NameOffset field of each column will be invalid until TableUpdateLayout() or the first call to TableSetupColumn()
+    if (table->ColumnsNames.Buf.Size > 0)
+        table->ColumnsNames.Buf.resize(0);
+
+    // Apply queued resizing/reordering/hiding requests
+    TableBeginApplyRequests(table);
+
+    return true;
+}
+
+// For reference, the average total _allocation count_ for a table is:
+// + 0 (for ImGuiTable instance, we are pooling allocations in g.Tables)
+// + 1 (for table->RawData allocated below)
+// + 1 (for table->ColumnsNames, if names are used)
+// Shared allocations per number of nested tables
+// + 1 (for table->Splitter._Channels)
+// + 2 * active_channels_count (for ImDrawCmd and ImDrawIdx buffers inside channels)
+// Where active_channels_count is variable but often == columns_count or columns_count + 1, see TableSetupDrawChannels() for details.
+// Unused channels don't perform their +2 allocations.
+void ImGui::TableBeginInitMemory(ImGuiTable* table, int columns_count)
+{
+    // Allocate single buffer for our arrays
+    ImSpanAllocator<3> span_allocator;
+    span_allocator.Reserve(0, columns_count * sizeof(ImGuiTableColumn));
+    span_allocator.Reserve(1, columns_count * sizeof(ImGuiTableColumnIdx));
+    span_allocator.Reserve(2, columns_count * sizeof(ImGuiTableCellData), 4);
+    table->RawData = IM_ALLOC(span_allocator.GetArenaSizeInBytes());
+    memset(table->RawData, 0, span_allocator.GetArenaSizeInBytes());
+    span_allocator.SetArenaBasePtr(table->RawData);
+    span_allocator.GetSpan(0, &table->Columns);
+    span_allocator.GetSpan(1, &table->DisplayOrderToIndex);
+    span_allocator.GetSpan(2, &table->RowCellData);
+}
+
+// Apply queued resizing/reordering/hiding requests
+void ImGui::TableBeginApplyRequests(ImGuiTable* table)
+{
+    // Handle resizing request
+    // (We process this at the first TableBegin of the frame)
+    // FIXME-TABLE: Contains columns if our work area doesn't allow for scrolling?
+    if (table->InstanceCurrent == 0)
+    {
+        if (table->ResizedColumn != -1 && table->ResizedColumnNextWidth != FLT_MAX)
+            TableSetColumnWidth(table->ResizedColumn, table->ResizedColumnNextWidth);
+        table->LastResizedColumn = table->ResizedColumn;
+        table->ResizedColumnNextWidth = FLT_MAX;
+        table->ResizedColumn = -1;
+
+        // Process auto-fit for single column, which is a special case for stretch columns and fixed columns with FixedSame policy.
+        // FIXME-TABLE: Would be nice to redistribute available stretch space accordingly to other weights, instead of giving it all to siblings.
+        if (table->AutoFitSingleColumn != -1)
+        {
+            TableSetColumnWidth(table->AutoFitSingleColumn, table->Columns[table->AutoFitSingleColumn].WidthAuto);
+            table->AutoFitSingleColumn = -1;
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Handle reordering request
+    // Note: we don't clear ReorderColumn after handling the request.
+    if (table->InstanceCurrent == 0)
+    {
+        if (table->HeldHeaderColumn == -1 && table->ReorderColumn != -1)
+            table->ReorderColumn = -1;
+        table->HeldHeaderColumn = -1;
+        if (table->ReorderColumn != -1 && table->ReorderColumnDir != 0)
+        {
+            // We need to handle reordering across hidden columns.
+            // In the configuration below, moving C to the right of E will lead to:
+            //    ... C [D] E  --->  ... [D] E  C   (Column name/index)
+            //    ... 2  3  4        ...  2  3  4   (Display order)
+            const int reorder_dir = table->ReorderColumnDir;
+            IM_ASSERT(reorder_dir == -1 || reorder_dir == +1);
+            IM_ASSERT(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable);
+            ImGuiTableColumn* src_column = &table->Columns[table->ReorderColumn];
+            ImGuiTableColumn* dst_column = &table->Columns[(reorder_dir == -1) ? src_column->PrevEnabledColumn : src_column->NextEnabledColumn];
+            IM_UNUSED(dst_column);
+            const int src_order = src_column->DisplayOrder;
+            const int dst_order = dst_column->DisplayOrder;
+            src_column->DisplayOrder = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)dst_order;
+            for (int order_n = src_order + reorder_dir; order_n != dst_order + reorder_dir; order_n += reorder_dir)
+                table->Columns[table->DisplayOrderToIndex[order_n]].DisplayOrder -= (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)reorder_dir;
+            IM_ASSERT(dst_column->DisplayOrder == dst_order - reorder_dir);
+
+            // Display order is stored in both columns->IndexDisplayOrder and table->DisplayOrder[],
+            // rebuild the later from the former.
+            for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++)
+                table->DisplayOrderToIndex[table->Columns[column_n].DisplayOrder] = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n;
+            table->ReorderColumnDir = 0;
+            table->IsSettingsDirty = true;
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Handle display order reset request
+    if (table->IsResetDisplayOrderRequest)
+    {
+        for (int n = 0; n < table->ColumnsCount; n++)
+            table->DisplayOrderToIndex[n] = table->Columns[n].DisplayOrder = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)n;
+        table->IsResetDisplayOrderRequest = false;
+        table->IsSettingsDirty = true;
+    }
+}
+
+// Adjust flags: default width mode + stretch columns are not allowed when auto extending
+static void TableSetupColumnFlags(ImGuiTable* table, ImGuiTableColumn* column, ImGuiTableColumnFlags flags_in)
+{
+    ImGuiTableColumnFlags flags = flags_in;
+
+    // Sizing Policy
+    if ((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthMask_) == 0)
+    {
+        const ImGuiTableFlags table_sizing_policy = (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_);
+        if (table_sizing_policy == ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit || table_sizing_policy == ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame)
+            flags |= ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed;
+        else
+            flags |= ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthMask_)); // Check that only 1 of each set is used.
+    }
+
+    // Resize
+    if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable) == 0)
+        flags |= ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize;
+
+    // Sorting
+    if ((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortAscending) && (flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortDescending))
+        flags |= ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort;
+
+    // Indentation
+    if ((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentMask_) == 0)
+        flags |= (table->Columns.index_from_ptr(column) == 0) ? ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentEnable : ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentDisable;
+
+    // Alignment
+    //if ((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_AlignMask_) == 0)
+    //    flags |= ImGuiTableColumnFlags_AlignCenter;
+    //IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_AlignMask_)); // Check that only 1 of each set is used.
+
+    // Preserve status flags
+    column->Flags = flags | (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_StatusMask_);
+
+    // Build an ordered list of available sort directions
+    column->SortDirectionsAvailCount = column->SortDirectionsAvailMask = column->SortDirectionsAvailList = 0;
+    if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable)
+    {
+        int count = 0, mask = 0, list = 0;
+        if ((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortAscending)  != 0 && (flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortAscending)  == 0) { mask |= 1 << ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending;  list |= ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending  << (count << 1); count++; }
+        if ((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortDescending) != 0 && (flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortDescending) == 0) { mask |= 1 << ImGuiSortDirection_Descending; list |= ImGuiSortDirection_Descending << (count << 1); count++; }
+        if ((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortAscending)  == 0 && (flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortAscending)  == 0) { mask |= 1 << ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending;  list |= ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending  << (count << 1); count++; }
+        if ((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortDescending) == 0 && (flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortDescending) == 0) { mask |= 1 << ImGuiSortDirection_Descending; list |= ImGuiSortDirection_Descending << (count << 1); count++; }
+        if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate) || count == 0) { mask |= 1 << ImGuiSortDirection_None; count++; }
+        column->SortDirectionsAvailList = (ImU8)list;
+        column->SortDirectionsAvailMask = (ImU8)mask;
+        column->SortDirectionsAvailCount = (ImU8)count;
+        ImGui::TableFixColumnSortDirection(table, column);
+    }
+}
+
+// Layout columns for the frame. This is in essence the followup to BeginTable().
+// Runs on the first call to TableNextRow(), to give a chance for TableSetupColumn() to be called first.
+// FIXME-TABLE: Our width (and therefore our WorkRect) will be minimal in the first frame for _WidthAuto columns.
+// Increase feedback side-effect with widgets relying on WorkRect.Max.x... Maybe provide a default distribution for _WidthAuto columns?
+void ImGui::TableUpdateLayout(ImGuiTable* table)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(table->IsLayoutLocked == false);
+
+    const ImGuiTableFlags table_sizing_policy = (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_);
+    table->IsDefaultDisplayOrder = true;
+    table->ColumnsEnabledCount = 0;
+    table->EnabledMaskByIndex = 0x00;
+    table->EnabledMaskByDisplayOrder = 0x00;
+    table->LeftMostEnabledColumn = -1;
+    table->MinColumnWidth = ImMax(1.0f, g.Style.FramePadding.x * 1.0f); // g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing; // FIXME-TABLE
+
+    // [Part 1] Apply/lock Enabled and Order states. Calculate auto/ideal width for columns. Count fixed/stretch columns.
+    // Process columns in their visible orders as we are building the Prev/Next indices.
+    int count_fixed = 0;                // Number of columns that have fixed sizing policies
+    int count_stretch = 0;              // Number of columns that have stretch sizing policies
+    int prev_visible_column_idx = -1;
+    bool has_auto_fit_request = false;
+    bool has_resizable = false;
+    float stretch_sum_width_auto = 0.0f;
+    float fixed_max_width_auto = 0.0f;
+    for (int order_n = 0; order_n < table->ColumnsCount; order_n++)
+    {
+        const int column_n = table->DisplayOrderToIndex[order_n];
+        if (column_n != order_n)
+            table->IsDefaultDisplayOrder = false;
+        ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
+
+        // Clear column setup if not submitted by user. Currently we make it mandatory to call TableSetupColumn() every frame.
+        // It would easily work without but we're not ready to guarantee it since e.g. names need resubmission anyway.
+        // We take a slight shortcut but in theory we could be calling TableSetupColumn() here with dummy values, it should yield the same effect.
+        if (table->DeclColumnsCount <= column_n)
+        {
+            TableSetupColumnFlags(table, column, ImGuiTableColumnFlags_None);
+            column->NameOffset = -1;
+            column->UserID = 0;
+            column->InitStretchWeightOrWidth = -1.0f;
+        }
+
+        // Update Enabled state, mark settings and sort specs dirty
+        if (!(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable) || (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHide))
+            column->IsUserEnabledNextFrame = true;
+        if (column->IsUserEnabled != column->IsUserEnabledNextFrame)
+        {
+            column->IsUserEnabled = column->IsUserEnabledNextFrame;
+            table->IsSettingsDirty = true;
+        }
+        column->IsEnabled = column->IsUserEnabled && (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_Disabled) == 0;
+
+        if (column->SortOrder != -1 && !column->IsEnabled)
+            table->IsSortSpecsDirty = true;
+        if (column->SortOrder > 0 && !(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti))
+            table->IsSortSpecsDirty = true;
+
+        // Auto-fit unsized columns
+        const bool start_auto_fit = (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed) ? (column->WidthRequest < 0.0f) : (column->StretchWeight < 0.0f);
+        if (start_auto_fit)
+            column->AutoFitQueue = column->CannotSkipItemsQueue = (1 << 3) - 1; // Fit for three frames
+
+        if (!column->IsEnabled)
+        {
+            column->IndexWithinEnabledSet = -1;
+            continue;
+        }
+
+        // Mark as enabled and link to previous/next enabled column
+        column->PrevEnabledColumn = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)prev_visible_column_idx;
+        column->NextEnabledColumn = -1;
+        if (prev_visible_column_idx != -1)
+            table->Columns[prev_visible_column_idx].NextEnabledColumn = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n;
+        else
+            table->LeftMostEnabledColumn = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n;
+        column->IndexWithinEnabledSet = table->ColumnsEnabledCount++;
+        table->EnabledMaskByIndex |= (ImU64)1 << column_n;
+        table->EnabledMaskByDisplayOrder |= (ImU64)1 << column->DisplayOrder;
+        prev_visible_column_idx = column_n;
+        IM_ASSERT(column->IndexWithinEnabledSet <= column->DisplayOrder);
+
+        // Calculate ideal/auto column width (that's the width required for all contents to be visible without clipping)
+        // Combine width from regular rows + width from headers unless requested not to.
+        if (!column->IsPreserveWidthAuto)
+            column->WidthAuto = TableGetColumnWidthAuto(table, column);
+
+        // Non-resizable columns keep their requested width (apply user value regardless of IsPreserveWidthAuto)
+        const bool column_is_resizable = (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize) == 0;
+        if (column_is_resizable)
+            has_resizable = true;
+        if ((column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed) && column->InitStretchWeightOrWidth > 0.0f && !column_is_resizable)
+            column->WidthAuto = column->InitStretchWeightOrWidth;
+
+        if (column->AutoFitQueue != 0x00)
+            has_auto_fit_request = true;
+        if (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch)
+        {
+            stretch_sum_width_auto += column->WidthAuto;
+            count_stretch++;
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            fixed_max_width_auto = ImMax(fixed_max_width_auto, column->WidthAuto);
+            count_fixed++;
+        }
+    }
+    if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable) && table->SortSpecsCount == 0 && !(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate))
+        table->IsSortSpecsDirty = true;
+    table->RightMostEnabledColumn = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)prev_visible_column_idx;
+    IM_ASSERT(table->LeftMostEnabledColumn >= 0 && table->RightMostEnabledColumn >= 0);
+
+    // [Part 2] Disable child window clipping while fitting columns. This is not strictly necessary but makes it possible
+    // to avoid the column fitting having to wait until the first visible frame of the child container (may or not be a good thing).
+    // FIXME-TABLE: for always auto-resizing columns may not want to do that all the time.
+    if (has_auto_fit_request && table->OuterWindow != table->InnerWindow)
+        table->InnerWindow->SkipItems = false;
+    if (has_auto_fit_request)
+        table->IsSettingsDirty = true;
+
+    // [Part 3] Fix column flags and record a few extra information.
+    float sum_width_requests = 0.0f;        // Sum of all width for fixed and auto-resize columns, excluding width contributed by Stretch columns but including spacing/padding.
+    float stretch_sum_weights = 0.0f;       // Sum of all weights for stretch columns.
+    table->LeftMostStretchedColumn = table->RightMostStretchedColumn = -1;
+    for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++)
+    {
+        if (!(table->EnabledMaskByIndex & ((ImU64)1 << column_n)))
+            continue;
+        ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
+
+        const bool column_is_resizable = (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize) == 0;
+        if (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed)
+        {
+            // Apply same widths policy
+            float width_auto = column->WidthAuto;
+            if (table_sizing_policy == ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame && (column->AutoFitQueue != 0x00 || !column_is_resizable))
+                width_auto = fixed_max_width_auto;
+
+            // Apply automatic width
+            // Latch initial size for fixed columns and update it constantly for auto-resizing column (unless clipped!)
+            if (column->AutoFitQueue != 0x00)
+                column->WidthRequest = width_auto;
+            else if ((column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed) && !column_is_resizable && (table->RequestOutputMaskByIndex & ((ImU64)1 << column_n)))
+                column->WidthRequest = width_auto;
+
+            // FIXME-TABLE: Increase minimum size during init frame to avoid biasing auto-fitting widgets
+            // (e.g. TextWrapped) too much. Otherwise what tends to happen is that TextWrapped would output a very
+            // large height (= first frame scrollbar display very off + clipper would skip lots of items).
+            // This is merely making the side-effect less extreme, but doesn't properly fixes it.
+            // FIXME: Move this to ->WidthGiven to avoid temporary lossyless?
+            // FIXME: This break IsPreserveWidthAuto from not flickering if the stored WidthAuto was smaller.
+            if (column->AutoFitQueue > 0x01 && table->IsInitializing && !column->IsPreserveWidthAuto)
+                column->WidthRequest = ImMax(column->WidthRequest, table->MinColumnWidth * 4.0f); // FIXME-TABLE: Another constant/scale?
+            sum_width_requests += column->WidthRequest;
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            // Initialize stretch weight
+            if (column->AutoFitQueue != 0x00 || column->StretchWeight < 0.0f || !column_is_resizable)
+            {
+                if (column->InitStretchWeightOrWidth > 0.0f)
+                    column->StretchWeight = column->InitStretchWeightOrWidth;
+                else if (table_sizing_policy == ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchProp)
+                    column->StretchWeight = (column->WidthAuto / stretch_sum_width_auto) * count_stretch;
+                else
+                    column->StretchWeight = 1.0f;
+            }
+
+            stretch_sum_weights += column->StretchWeight;
+            if (table->LeftMostStretchedColumn == -1 || table->Columns[table->LeftMostStretchedColumn].DisplayOrder > column->DisplayOrder)
+                table->LeftMostStretchedColumn = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n;
+            if (table->RightMostStretchedColumn == -1 || table->Columns[table->RightMostStretchedColumn].DisplayOrder < column->DisplayOrder)
+                table->RightMostStretchedColumn = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n;
+        }
+        column->IsPreserveWidthAuto = false;
+        sum_width_requests += table->CellPaddingX * 2.0f;
+    }
+    table->ColumnsEnabledFixedCount = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)count_fixed;
+    table->ColumnsStretchSumWeights = stretch_sum_weights;
+
+    // [Part 4] Apply final widths based on requested widths
+    const ImRect work_rect = table->WorkRect;
+    const float width_spacings = (table->OuterPaddingX * 2.0f) + (table->CellSpacingX1 + table->CellSpacingX2) * (table->ColumnsEnabledCount - 1);
+    const float width_avail = ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) && table->InnerWidth == 0.0f) ? table->InnerClipRect.GetWidth() : work_rect.GetWidth();
+    const float width_avail_for_stretched_columns = width_avail - width_spacings - sum_width_requests;
+    float width_remaining_for_stretched_columns = width_avail_for_stretched_columns;
+    table->ColumnsGivenWidth = width_spacings + (table->CellPaddingX * 2.0f) * table->ColumnsEnabledCount;
+    for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++)
+    {
+        if (!(table->EnabledMaskByIndex & ((ImU64)1 << column_n)))
+            continue;
+        ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
+
+        // Allocate width for stretched/weighted columns (StretchWeight gets converted into WidthRequest)
+        if (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch)
+        {
+            float weight_ratio = column->StretchWeight / stretch_sum_weights;
+            column->WidthRequest = IM_FLOOR(ImMax(width_avail_for_stretched_columns * weight_ratio, table->MinColumnWidth) + 0.01f);
+            width_remaining_for_stretched_columns -= column->WidthRequest;
+        }
+
+        // [Resize Rule 1] The right-most Visible column is not resizable if there is at least one Stretch column
+        // See additional comments in TableSetColumnWidth().
+        if (column->NextEnabledColumn == -1 && table->LeftMostStretchedColumn != -1)
+            column->Flags |= ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoDirectResize_;
+
+        // Assign final width, record width in case we will need to shrink
+        column->WidthGiven = ImFloor(ImMax(column->WidthRequest, table->MinColumnWidth));
+        table->ColumnsGivenWidth += column->WidthGiven;
+    }
+
+    // [Part 5] Redistribute stretch remainder width due to rounding (remainder width is < 1.0f * number of Stretch column).
+    // Using right-to-left distribution (more likely to match resizing cursor).
+    if (width_remaining_for_stretched_columns >= 1.0f && !(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_PreciseWidths))
+        for (int order_n = table->ColumnsCount - 1; stretch_sum_weights > 0.0f && width_remaining_for_stretched_columns >= 1.0f && order_n >= 0; order_n--)
+        {
+            if (!(table->EnabledMaskByDisplayOrder & ((ImU64)1 << order_n)))
+                continue;
+            ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[table->DisplayOrderToIndex[order_n]];
+            if (!(column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch))
+                continue;
+            column->WidthRequest += 1.0f;
+            column->WidthGiven += 1.0f;
+            width_remaining_for_stretched_columns -= 1.0f;
+        }
+
+    ImGuiTableInstanceData* table_instance = TableGetInstanceData(table, table->InstanceCurrent);
+    table->HoveredColumnBody = -1;
+    table->HoveredColumnBorder = -1;
+    const ImRect mouse_hit_rect(table->OuterRect.Min.x, table->OuterRect.Min.y, table->OuterRect.Max.x, ImMax(table->OuterRect.Max.y, table->OuterRect.Min.y + table_instance->LastOuterHeight));
+    const bool is_hovering_table = ItemHoverable(mouse_hit_rect, 0);
+
+    // [Part 6] Setup final position, offset, skip/clip states and clipping rectangles, detect hovered column
+    // Process columns in their visible orders as we are comparing the visible order and adjusting host_clip_rect while looping.
+    int visible_n = 0;
+    bool offset_x_frozen = (table->FreezeColumnsCount > 0);
+    float offset_x = ((table->FreezeColumnsCount > 0) ? table->OuterRect.Min.x : work_rect.Min.x) + table->OuterPaddingX - table->CellSpacingX1;
+    ImRect host_clip_rect = table->InnerClipRect;
+    //host_clip_rect.Max.x += table->CellPaddingX + table->CellSpacingX2;
+    table->VisibleMaskByIndex = 0x00;
+    table->RequestOutputMaskByIndex = 0x00;
+    for (int order_n = 0; order_n < table->ColumnsCount; order_n++)
+    {
+        const int column_n = table->DisplayOrderToIndex[order_n];
+        ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
+
+        column->NavLayerCurrent = (ImS8)((table->FreezeRowsCount > 0 || column_n < table->FreezeColumnsCount) ? ImGuiNavLayer_Menu : ImGuiNavLayer_Main);
+
+        if (offset_x_frozen && table->FreezeColumnsCount == visible_n)
+        {
+            offset_x += work_rect.Min.x - table->OuterRect.Min.x;
+            offset_x_frozen = false;
+        }
+
+        // Clear status flags
+        column->Flags &= ~ImGuiTableColumnFlags_StatusMask_;
+
+        if ((table->EnabledMaskByDisplayOrder & ((ImU64)1 << order_n)) == 0)
+        {
+            // Hidden column: clear a few fields and we are done with it for the remainder of the function.
+            // We set a zero-width clip rect but set Min.y/Max.y properly to not interfere with the clipper.
+            column->MinX = column->MaxX = column->WorkMinX = column->ClipRect.Min.x = column->ClipRect.Max.x = offset_x;
+            column->WidthGiven = 0.0f;
+            column->ClipRect.Min.y = work_rect.Min.y;
+            column->ClipRect.Max.y = FLT_MAX;
+            column->ClipRect.ClipWithFull(host_clip_rect);
+            column->IsVisibleX = column->IsVisibleY = column->IsRequestOutput = false;
+            column->IsSkipItems = true;
+            column->ItemWidth = 1.0f;
+            continue;
+        }
+
+        // Detect hovered column
+        if (is_hovering_table && g.IO.MousePos.x >= column->ClipRect.Min.x && g.IO.MousePos.x < column->ClipRect.Max.x)
+            table->HoveredColumnBody = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n;
+
+        // Lock start position
+        column->MinX = offset_x;
+
+        // Lock width based on start position and minimum/maximum width for this position
+        float max_width = TableGetMaxColumnWidth(table, column_n);
+        column->WidthGiven = ImMin(column->WidthGiven, max_width);
+        column->WidthGiven = ImMax(column->WidthGiven, ImMin(column->WidthRequest, table->MinColumnWidth));
+        column->MaxX = offset_x + column->WidthGiven + table->CellSpacingX1 + table->CellSpacingX2 + table->CellPaddingX * 2.0f;
+
+        // Lock other positions
+        // - ClipRect.Min.x: Because merging draw commands doesn't compare min boundaries, we make ClipRect.Min.x match left bounds to be consistent regardless of merging.
+        // - ClipRect.Max.x: using WorkMaxX instead of MaxX (aka including padding) makes things more consistent when resizing down, tho slightly detrimental to visibility in very-small column.
+        // - ClipRect.Max.x: using MaxX makes it easier for header to receive hover highlight with no discontinuity and display sorting arrow.
+        // - FIXME-TABLE: We want equal width columns to have equal (ClipRect.Max.x - WorkMinX) width, which means ClipRect.max.x cannot stray off host_clip_rect.Max.x else right-most column may appear shorter.
+        column->WorkMinX = column->MinX + table->CellPaddingX + table->CellSpacingX1;
+        column->WorkMaxX = column->MaxX - table->CellPaddingX - table->CellSpacingX2; // Expected max
+        column->ItemWidth = ImFloor(column->WidthGiven * 0.65f);
+        column->ClipRect.Min.x = column->MinX;
+        column->ClipRect.Min.y = work_rect.Min.y;
+        column->ClipRect.Max.x = column->MaxX; //column->WorkMaxX;
+        column->ClipRect.Max.y = FLT_MAX;
+        column->ClipRect.ClipWithFull(host_clip_rect);
+
+        // Mark column as Clipped (not in sight)
+        // Note that scrolling tables (where inner_window != outer_window) handle Y clipped earlier in BeginTable() so IsVisibleY really only applies to non-scrolling tables.
+        // FIXME-TABLE: Because InnerClipRect.Max.y is conservatively ==outer_window->ClipRect.Max.y, we never can mark columns _Above_ the scroll line as not IsVisibleY.
+        // Taking advantage of LastOuterHeight would yield good results there...
+        // FIXME-TABLE: Y clipping is disabled because it effectively means not submitting will reduce contents width which is fed to outer_window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x,
+        // and this may be used (e.g. typically by outer_window using AlwaysAutoResize or outer_window's horizontal scrollbar, but could be something else).
+        // Possible solution to preserve last known content width for clipped column. Test 'table_reported_size' fails when enabling Y clipping and window is resized small.
+        column->IsVisibleX = (column->ClipRect.Max.x > column->ClipRect.Min.x);
+        column->IsVisibleY = true; // (column->ClipRect.Max.y > column->ClipRect.Min.y);
+        const bool is_visible = column->IsVisibleX; //&& column->IsVisibleY;
+        if (is_visible)
+            table->VisibleMaskByIndex |= ((ImU64)1 << column_n);
+
+        // Mark column as requesting output from user. Note that fixed + non-resizable sets are auto-fitting at all times and therefore always request output.
+        column->IsRequestOutput = is_visible || column->AutoFitQueue != 0 || column->CannotSkipItemsQueue != 0;
+        if (column->IsRequestOutput)
+            table->RequestOutputMaskByIndex |= ((ImU64)1 << column_n);
+
+        // Mark column as SkipItems (ignoring all items/layout)
+        column->IsSkipItems = !column->IsEnabled || table->HostSkipItems;
+        if (column->IsSkipItems)
+            IM_ASSERT(!is_visible);
+
+        // Update status flags
+        column->Flags |= ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsEnabled;
+        if (is_visible)
+            column->Flags |= ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsVisible;
+        if (column->SortOrder != -1)
+            column->Flags |= ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsSorted;
+        if (table->HoveredColumnBody == column_n)
+            column->Flags |= ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsHovered;
+
+        // Alignment
+        // FIXME-TABLE: This align based on the whole column width, not per-cell, and therefore isn't useful in
+        // many cases (to be able to honor this we might be able to store a log of cells width, per row, for
+        // visible rows, but nav/programmatic scroll would have visible artifacts.)
+        //if (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_AlignRight)
+        //    column->WorkMinX = ImMax(column->WorkMinX, column->MaxX - column->ContentWidthRowsUnfrozen);
+        //else if (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_AlignCenter)
+        //    column->WorkMinX = ImLerp(column->WorkMinX, ImMax(column->StartX, column->MaxX - column->ContentWidthRowsUnfrozen), 0.5f);
+
+        // Reset content width variables
+        column->ContentMaxXFrozen = column->ContentMaxXUnfrozen = column->WorkMinX;
+        column->ContentMaxXHeadersUsed = column->ContentMaxXHeadersIdeal = column->WorkMinX;
+
+        // Don't decrement auto-fit counters until container window got a chance to submit its items
+        if (table->HostSkipItems == false)
+        {
+            column->AutoFitQueue >>= 1;
+            column->CannotSkipItemsQueue >>= 1;
+        }
+
+        if (visible_n < table->FreezeColumnsCount)
+            host_clip_rect.Min.x = ImClamp(column->MaxX + TABLE_BORDER_SIZE, host_clip_rect.Min.x, host_clip_rect.Max.x);
+
+        offset_x += column->WidthGiven + table->CellSpacingX1 + table->CellSpacingX2 + table->CellPaddingX * 2.0f;
+        visible_n++;
+    }
+
+    // [Part 7] Detect/store when we are hovering the unused space after the right-most column (so e.g. context menus can react on it)
+    // Clear Resizable flag if none of our column are actually resizable (either via an explicit _NoResize flag, either
+    // because of using _WidthAuto/_WidthStretch). This will hide the resizing option from the context menu.
+    const float unused_x1 = ImMax(table->WorkRect.Min.x, table->Columns[table->RightMostEnabledColumn].ClipRect.Max.x);
+    if (is_hovering_table && table->HoveredColumnBody == -1)
+    {
+        if (g.IO.MousePos.x >= unused_x1)
+            table->HoveredColumnBody = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)table->ColumnsCount;
+    }
+    if (has_resizable == false && (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable))
+        table->Flags &= ~ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable;
+
+    // [Part 8] Lock actual OuterRect/WorkRect right-most position.
+    // This is done late to handle the case of fixed-columns tables not claiming more widths that they need.
+    // Because of this we are careful with uses of WorkRect and InnerClipRect before this point.
+    if (table->RightMostStretchedColumn != -1)
+        table->Flags &= ~ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX;
+    if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX)
+    {
+        table->OuterRect.Max.x = table->WorkRect.Max.x = unused_x1;
+        table->InnerClipRect.Max.x = ImMin(table->InnerClipRect.Max.x, unused_x1);
+    }
+    table->InnerWindow->ParentWorkRect = table->WorkRect;
+    table->BorderX1 = table->InnerClipRect.Min.x;// +((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter) ? 0.0f : -1.0f);
+    table->BorderX2 = table->InnerClipRect.Max.x;// +((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter) ? 0.0f : +1.0f);
+
+    // [Part 9] Allocate draw channels and setup background cliprect
+    TableSetupDrawChannels(table);
+
+    // [Part 10] Hit testing on borders
+    if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable)
+        TableUpdateBorders(table);
+    table_instance->LastFirstRowHeight = 0.0f;
+    table->IsLayoutLocked = true;
+    table->IsUsingHeaders = false;
+
+    // [Part 11] Context menu
+    if (TableBeginContextMenuPopup(table))
+    {
+        TableDrawContextMenu(table);
+        EndPopup();
+    }
+
+    // [Part 13] Sanitize and build sort specs before we have a change to use them for display.
+    // This path will only be exercised when sort specs are modified before header rows (e.g. init or visibility change)
+    if (table->IsSortSpecsDirty && (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable))
+        TableSortSpecsBuild(table);
+
+    // Initial state
+    ImGuiWindow* inner_window = table->InnerWindow;
+    if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip)
+        table->DrawSplitter->SetCurrentChannel(inner_window->DrawList, TABLE_DRAW_CHANNEL_NOCLIP);
+    else
+        inner_window->DrawList->PushClipRect(inner_window->ClipRect.Min, inner_window->ClipRect.Max, false);
+}
+
+// Process hit-testing on resizing borders. Actual size change will be applied in EndTable()
+// - Set table->HoveredColumnBorder with a short delay/timer to reduce feedback noise
+// - Submit ahead of table contents and header, use ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap to prioritize widgets
+//   overlapping the same area.
+void ImGui::TableUpdateBorders(ImGuiTable* table)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable);
+
+    // At this point OuterRect height may be zero or under actual final height, so we rely on temporal coherency and
+    // use the final height from last frame. Because this is only affecting _interaction_ with columns, it is not
+    // really problematic (whereas the actual visual will be displayed in EndTable() and using the current frame height).
+    // Actual columns highlight/render will be performed in EndTable() and not be affected.
+    ImGuiTableInstanceData* table_instance = TableGetInstanceData(table, table->InstanceCurrent);
+    const float hit_half_width = TABLE_RESIZE_SEPARATOR_HALF_THICKNESS;
+    const float hit_y1 = table->OuterRect.Min.y;
+    const float hit_y2_body = ImMax(table->OuterRect.Max.y, hit_y1 + table_instance->LastOuterHeight);
+    const float hit_y2_head = hit_y1 + table_instance->LastFirstRowHeight;
+
+    for (int order_n = 0; order_n < table->ColumnsCount; order_n++)
+    {
+        if (!(table->EnabledMaskByDisplayOrder & ((ImU64)1 << order_n)))
+            continue;
+
+        const int column_n = table->DisplayOrderToIndex[order_n];
+        ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
+        if (column->Flags & (ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoDirectResize_))
+            continue;
+
+        // ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize will be honored in TableDrawBorders()
+        const float border_y2_hit = (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody) ? hit_y2_head : hit_y2_body;
+        if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody) && table->IsUsingHeaders == false)
+            continue;
+
+        if (!column->IsVisibleX && table->LastResizedColumn != column_n)
+            continue;
+
+        ImGuiID column_id = TableGetColumnResizeID(table, column_n, table->InstanceCurrent);
+        ImRect hit_rect(column->MaxX - hit_half_width, hit_y1, column->MaxX + hit_half_width, border_y2_hit);
+        //GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(hit_rect.Min, hit_rect.Max, IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 100));
+        KeepAliveID(column_id);
+
+        bool hovered = false, held = false;
+        bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(hit_rect, column_id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren | ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus);
+        if (pressed && IsMouseDoubleClicked(0))
+        {
+            TableSetColumnWidthAutoSingle(table, column_n);
+            ClearActiveID();
+            held = hovered = false;
+        }
+        if (held)
+        {
+            if (table->LastResizedColumn == -1)
+                table->ResizeLockMinContentsX2 = table->RightMostEnabledColumn != -1 ? table->Columns[table->RightMostEnabledColumn].MaxX : -FLT_MAX;
+            table->ResizedColumn = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n;
+            table->InstanceInteracted = table->InstanceCurrent;
+        }
+        if ((hovered && g.HoveredIdTimer > TABLE_RESIZE_SEPARATOR_FEEDBACK_TIMER) || held)
+        {
+            table->HoveredColumnBorder = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n;
+            SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW);
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+void    ImGui::EndTable()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable;
+    IM_ASSERT(table != NULL && "Only call EndTable() if BeginTable() returns true!");
+
+    // This assert would be very useful to catch a common error... unfortunately it would probably trigger in some
+    // cases, and for consistency user may sometimes output empty tables (and still benefit from e.g. outer border)
+    //IM_ASSERT(table->IsLayoutLocked && "Table unused: never called TableNextRow(), is that the intent?");
+
+    // If the user never got to call TableNextRow() or TableNextColumn(), we call layout ourselves to ensure all our
+    // code paths are consistent (instead of just hoping that TableBegin/TableEnd will work), get borders drawn, etc.
+    if (!table->IsLayoutLocked)
+        TableUpdateLayout(table);
+
+    const ImGuiTableFlags flags = table->Flags;
+    ImGuiWindow* inner_window = table->InnerWindow;
+    ImGuiWindow* outer_window = table->OuterWindow;
+    ImGuiTableTempData* temp_data = table->TempData;
+    IM_ASSERT(inner_window == g.CurrentWindow);
+    IM_ASSERT(outer_window == inner_window || outer_window == inner_window->ParentWindow);
+
+    if (table->IsInsideRow)
+        TableEndRow(table);
+
+    // Context menu in columns body
+    if (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody)
+        if (table->HoveredColumnBody != -1 && !IsAnyItemHovered() && IsMouseReleased(ImGuiMouseButton_Right))
+            TableOpenContextMenu((int)table->HoveredColumnBody);
+
+    // Finalize table height
+    ImGuiTableInstanceData* table_instance = TableGetInstanceData(table, table->InstanceCurrent);
+    inner_window->DC.PrevLineSize = temp_data->HostBackupPrevLineSize;
+    inner_window->DC.CurrLineSize = temp_data->HostBackupCurrLineSize;
+    inner_window->DC.CursorMaxPos = temp_data->HostBackupCursorMaxPos;
+    const float inner_content_max_y = table->RowPosY2;
+    IM_ASSERT(table->RowPosY2 == inner_window->DC.CursorPos.y);
+    if (inner_window != outer_window)
+        inner_window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y = inner_content_max_y;
+    else if (!(flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY))
+        table->OuterRect.Max.y = table->InnerRect.Max.y = ImMax(table->OuterRect.Max.y, inner_content_max_y); // Patch OuterRect/InnerRect height
+    table->WorkRect.Max.y = ImMax(table->WorkRect.Max.y, table->OuterRect.Max.y);
+    table_instance->LastOuterHeight = table->OuterRect.GetHeight();
+
+    // Setup inner scrolling range
+    // FIXME: This ideally should be done earlier, in BeginTable() SetNextWindowContentSize call, just like writing to inner_window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y,
+    // but since the later is likely to be impossible to do we'd rather update both axises together.
+    if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX)
+    {
+        const float outer_padding_for_border = (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV) ? TABLE_BORDER_SIZE : 0.0f;
+        float max_pos_x = table->InnerWindow->DC.CursorMaxPos.x;
+        if (table->RightMostEnabledColumn != -1)
+            max_pos_x = ImMax(max_pos_x, table->Columns[table->RightMostEnabledColumn].WorkMaxX + table->CellPaddingX + table->OuterPaddingX - outer_padding_for_border);
+        if (table->ResizedColumn != -1)
+            max_pos_x = ImMax(max_pos_x, table->ResizeLockMinContentsX2);
+        table->InnerWindow->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = max_pos_x;
+    }
+
+    // Pop clipping rect
+    if (!(flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip))
+        inner_window->DrawList->PopClipRect();
+    inner_window->ClipRect = inner_window->DrawList->_ClipRectStack.back();
+
+    // Draw borders
+    if ((flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Borders) != 0)
+        TableDrawBorders(table);
+
+#if 0
+    // Strip out dummy channel draw calls
+    // We have no way to prevent user submitting direct ImDrawList calls into a hidden column (but ImGui:: calls will be clipped out)
+    // Pros: remove draw calls which will have no effect. since they'll have zero-size cliprect they may be early out anyway.
+    // Cons: making it harder for users watching metrics/debugger to spot the wasted vertices.
+    if (table->DummyDrawChannel != (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)-1)
+    {
+        ImDrawChannel* dummy_channel = &table->DrawSplitter._Channels[table->DummyDrawChannel];
+        dummy_channel->_CmdBuffer.resize(0);
+        dummy_channel->_IdxBuffer.resize(0);
+    }
+#endif
+
+    // Flatten channels and merge draw calls
+    ImDrawListSplitter* splitter = table->DrawSplitter;
+    splitter->SetCurrentChannel(inner_window->DrawList, 0);
+    if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip) == 0)
+        TableMergeDrawChannels(table);
+    splitter->Merge(inner_window->DrawList);
+
+    // Update ColumnsAutoFitWidth to get us ahead for host using our size to auto-resize without waiting for next BeginTable()
+    float auto_fit_width_for_fixed = 0.0f;
+    float auto_fit_width_for_stretched = 0.0f;
+    float auto_fit_width_for_stretched_min = 0.0f;
+    for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++)
+        if (table->EnabledMaskByIndex & ((ImU64)1 << column_n))
+        {
+            ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
+            float column_width_request = ((column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed) && !(column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize)) ? column->WidthRequest : TableGetColumnWidthAuto(table, column);
+            if (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed)
+                auto_fit_width_for_fixed += column_width_request;
+            else
+                auto_fit_width_for_stretched += column_width_request;
+            if ((column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch) && (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize) != 0)
+                auto_fit_width_for_stretched_min = ImMax(auto_fit_width_for_stretched_min, column_width_request / (column->StretchWeight / table->ColumnsStretchSumWeights));
+        }
+    const float width_spacings = (table->OuterPaddingX * 2.0f) + (table->CellSpacingX1 + table->CellSpacingX2) * (table->ColumnsEnabledCount - 1);
+    table->ColumnsAutoFitWidth = width_spacings + (table->CellPaddingX * 2.0f) * table->ColumnsEnabledCount + auto_fit_width_for_fixed + ImMax(auto_fit_width_for_stretched, auto_fit_width_for_stretched_min);
+
+    // Update scroll
+    if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) == 0 && inner_window != outer_window)
+    {
+        inner_window->Scroll.x = 0.0f;
+    }
+    else if (table->LastResizedColumn != -1 && table->ResizedColumn == -1 && inner_window->ScrollbarX && table->InstanceInteracted == table->InstanceCurrent)
+    {
+        // When releasing a column being resized, scroll to keep the resulting column in sight
+        const float neighbor_width_to_keep_visible = table->MinColumnWidth + table->CellPaddingX * 2.0f;
+        ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[table->LastResizedColumn];
+        if (column->MaxX < table->InnerClipRect.Min.x)
+            SetScrollFromPosX(inner_window, column->MaxX - inner_window->Pos.x - neighbor_width_to_keep_visible, 1.0f);
+        else if (column->MaxX > table->InnerClipRect.Max.x)
+            SetScrollFromPosX(inner_window, column->MaxX - inner_window->Pos.x + neighbor_width_to_keep_visible, 1.0f);
+    }
+
+    // Apply resizing/dragging at the end of the frame
+    if (table->ResizedColumn != -1 && table->InstanceCurrent == table->InstanceInteracted)
+    {
+        ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[table->ResizedColumn];
+        const float new_x2 = (g.IO.MousePos.x - g.ActiveIdClickOffset.x + TABLE_RESIZE_SEPARATOR_HALF_THICKNESS);
+        const float new_width = ImFloor(new_x2 - column->MinX - table->CellSpacingX1 - table->CellPaddingX * 2.0f);
+        table->ResizedColumnNextWidth = new_width;
+    }
+
+    // Pop from id stack
+    IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(inner_window->IDStack.back() == table->ID + table->InstanceCurrent, "Mismatching PushID/PopID!");
+    IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(outer_window->DC.ItemWidthStack.Size >= temp_data->HostBackupItemWidthStackSize, "Too many PopItemWidth!");
+    PopID();
+
+    // Restore window data that we modified
+    const ImVec2 backup_outer_max_pos = outer_window->DC.CursorMaxPos;
+    inner_window->WorkRect = temp_data->HostBackupWorkRect;
+    inner_window->ParentWorkRect = temp_data->HostBackupParentWorkRect;
+    inner_window->SkipItems = table->HostSkipItems;
+    outer_window->DC.CursorPos = table->OuterRect.Min;
+    outer_window->DC.ItemWidth = temp_data->HostBackupItemWidth;
+    outer_window->DC.ItemWidthStack.Size = temp_data->HostBackupItemWidthStackSize;
+    outer_window->DC.ColumnsOffset = temp_data->HostBackupColumnsOffset;
+
+    // Layout in outer window
+    // (FIXME: To allow auto-fit and allow desirable effect of SameLine() we dissociate 'used' vs 'ideal' size by overriding
+    // CursorPosPrevLine and CursorMaxPos manually. That should be a more general layout feature, see same problem e.g. #3414)
+    if (inner_window != outer_window)
+    {
+        EndChild();
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        ItemSize(table->OuterRect.GetSize());
+        ItemAdd(table->OuterRect, 0);
+    }
+
+    // Override declared contents width/height to enable auto-resize while not needlessly adding a scrollbar
+    if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX)
+    {
+        // FIXME-TABLE: Could we remove this section?
+        // ColumnsAutoFitWidth may be one frame ahead here since for Fixed+NoResize is calculated from latest contents
+        IM_ASSERT((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) == 0);
+        outer_window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = ImMax(backup_outer_max_pos.x, table->OuterRect.Min.x + table->ColumnsAutoFitWidth);
+    }
+    else if (temp_data->UserOuterSize.x <= 0.0f)
+    {
+        const float decoration_size = (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) ? inner_window->ScrollbarSizes.x : 0.0f;
+        outer_window->DC.IdealMaxPos.x = ImMax(outer_window->DC.IdealMaxPos.x, table->OuterRect.Min.x + table->ColumnsAutoFitWidth + decoration_size - temp_data->UserOuterSize.x);
+        outer_window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = ImMax(backup_outer_max_pos.x, ImMin(table->OuterRect.Max.x, table->OuterRect.Min.x + table->ColumnsAutoFitWidth));
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        outer_window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = ImMax(backup_outer_max_pos.x, table->OuterRect.Max.x);
+    }
+    if (temp_data->UserOuterSize.y <= 0.0f)
+    {
+        const float decoration_size = (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY) ? inner_window->ScrollbarSizes.y : 0.0f;
+        outer_window->DC.IdealMaxPos.y = ImMax(outer_window->DC.IdealMaxPos.y, inner_content_max_y + decoration_size - temp_data->UserOuterSize.y);
+        outer_window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y = ImMax(backup_outer_max_pos.y, ImMin(table->OuterRect.Max.y, inner_content_max_y));
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // OuterRect.Max.y may already have been pushed downward from the initial value (unless ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY is set)
+        outer_window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y = ImMax(backup_outer_max_pos.y, table->OuterRect.Max.y);
+    }
+
+    // Save settings
+    if (table->IsSettingsDirty)
+        TableSaveSettings(table);
+    table->IsInitializing = false;
+
+    // Clear or restore current table, if any
+    IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentWindow == outer_window && g.CurrentTable == table);
+    IM_ASSERT(g.TablesTempDataStacked > 0);
+    temp_data = (--g.TablesTempDataStacked > 0) ? &g.TablesTempData[g.TablesTempDataStacked - 1] : NULL;
+    g.CurrentTable = temp_data ? g.Tables.GetByIndex(temp_data->TableIndex) : NULL;
+    if (g.CurrentTable)
+    {
+        g.CurrentTable->TempData = temp_data;
+        g.CurrentTable->DrawSplitter = &temp_data->DrawSplitter;
+    }
+    outer_window->DC.CurrentTableIdx = g.CurrentTable ? g.Tables.GetIndex(g.CurrentTable) : -1;
+}
+
+// See "COLUMN SIZING POLICIES" comments at the top of this file
+// If (init_width_or_weight <= 0.0f) it is ignored
+void ImGui::TableSetupColumn(const char* label, ImGuiTableColumnFlags flags, float init_width_or_weight, ImGuiID user_id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable;
+    IM_ASSERT(table != NULL && "Need to call TableSetupColumn() after BeginTable()!");
+    IM_ASSERT(table->IsLayoutLocked == false && "Need to call call TableSetupColumn() before first row!");
+    IM_ASSERT((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_StatusMask_) == 0 && "Illegal to pass StatusMask values to TableSetupColumn()");
+    if (table->DeclColumnsCount >= table->ColumnsCount)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(table->DeclColumnsCount < table->ColumnsCount, "Called TableSetupColumn() too many times!");
+        return;
+    }
+
+    ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[table->DeclColumnsCount];
+    table->DeclColumnsCount++;
+
+    // Assert when passing a width or weight if policy is entirely left to default, to avoid storing width into weight and vice-versa.
+    // Give a grace to users of ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX.
+    if (table->IsDefaultSizingPolicy && (flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthMask_) == 0 && (flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) == 0)
+        IM_ASSERT(init_width_or_weight <= 0.0f && "Can only specify width/weight if sizing policy is set explicitly in either Table or Column.");
+
+    // When passing a width automatically enforce WidthFixed policy
+    // (whereas TableSetupColumnFlags would default to WidthAuto if table is not Resizable)
+    if ((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthMask_) == 0 && init_width_or_weight > 0.0f)
+        if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_) == ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit || (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_) == ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame)
+            flags |= ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed;
+
+    TableSetupColumnFlags(table, column, flags);
+    column->UserID = user_id;
+    flags = column->Flags;
+
+    // Initialize defaults
+    column->InitStretchWeightOrWidth = init_width_or_weight;
+    if (table->IsInitializing)
+    {
+        // Init width or weight
+        if (column->WidthRequest < 0.0f && column->StretchWeight < 0.0f)
+        {
+            if ((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed) && init_width_or_weight > 0.0f)
+                column->WidthRequest = init_width_or_weight;
+            if (flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch)
+                column->StretchWeight = (init_width_or_weight > 0.0f) ? init_width_or_weight : -1.0f;
+
+            // Disable auto-fit if an explicit width/weight has been specified
+            if (init_width_or_weight > 0.0f)
+                column->AutoFitQueue = 0x00;
+        }
+
+        // Init default visibility/sort state
+        if ((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultHide) && (table->SettingsLoadedFlags & ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable) == 0)
+            column->IsUserEnabled = column->IsUserEnabledNextFrame = false;
+        if (flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultSort && (table->SettingsLoadedFlags & ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable) == 0)
+        {
+            column->SortOrder = 0; // Multiple columns using _DefaultSort will be reassigned unique SortOrder values when building the sort specs.
+            column->SortDirection = (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_PreferSortDescending) ? (ImS8)ImGuiSortDirection_Descending : (ImU8)(ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending);
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Store name (append with zero-terminator in contiguous buffer)
+    column->NameOffset = -1;
+    if (label != NULL && label[0] != 0)
+    {
+        column->NameOffset = (ImS16)table->ColumnsNames.size();
+        table->ColumnsNames.append(label, label + strlen(label) + 1);
+    }
+}
+
+// [Public]
+void ImGui::TableSetupScrollFreeze(int columns, int rows)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable;
+    IM_ASSERT(table != NULL && "Need to call TableSetupColumn() after BeginTable()!");
+    IM_ASSERT(table->IsLayoutLocked == false && "Need to call TableSetupColumn() before first row!");
+    IM_ASSERT(columns >= 0 && columns < IMGUI_TABLE_MAX_COLUMNS);
+    IM_ASSERT(rows >= 0 && rows < 128); // Arbitrary limit
+
+    table->FreezeColumnsRequest = (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX) ? (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)ImMin(columns, table->ColumnsCount) : 0;
+    table->FreezeColumnsCount = (table->InnerWindow->Scroll.x != 0.0f) ? table->FreezeColumnsRequest : 0;
+    table->FreezeRowsRequest = (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollY) ? (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)rows : 0;
+    table->FreezeRowsCount = (table->InnerWindow->Scroll.y != 0.0f) ? table->FreezeRowsRequest : 0;
+    table->IsUnfrozenRows = (table->FreezeRowsCount == 0); // Make sure this is set before TableUpdateLayout() so ImGuiListClipper can benefit from it.b
+
+    // Ensure frozen columns are ordered in their section. We still allow multiple frozen columns to be reordered.
+    // FIXME-TABLE: This work for preserving 2143 into 21|43. How about 4321 turning into 21|43? (preserve relative order in each section)
+    for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->FreezeColumnsRequest; column_n++)
+    {
+        int order_n = table->DisplayOrderToIndex[column_n];
+        if (order_n != column_n && order_n >= table->FreezeColumnsRequest)
+        {
+            ImSwap(table->Columns[table->DisplayOrderToIndex[order_n]].DisplayOrder, table->Columns[table->DisplayOrderToIndex[column_n]].DisplayOrder);
+            ImSwap(table->DisplayOrderToIndex[order_n], table->DisplayOrderToIndex[column_n]);
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Tables: Simple accessors
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - TableGetColumnCount()
+// - TableGetColumnName()
+// - TableGetColumnName() [Internal]
+// - TableSetColumnEnabled()
+// - TableGetColumnFlags()
+// - TableGetCellBgRect() [Internal]
+// - TableGetColumnResizeID() [Internal]
+// - TableGetHoveredColumn() [Internal]
+// - TableSetBgColor()
+//-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+int ImGui::TableGetColumnCount()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable;
+    return table ? table->ColumnsCount : 0;
+}
+
+const char* ImGui::TableGetColumnName(int column_n)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable;
+    if (!table)
+        return NULL;
+    if (column_n < 0)
+        column_n = table->CurrentColumn;
+    return TableGetColumnName(table, column_n);
+}
+
+const char* ImGui::TableGetColumnName(const ImGuiTable* table, int column_n)
+{
+    if (table->IsLayoutLocked == false && column_n >= table->DeclColumnsCount)
+        return ""; // NameOffset is invalid at this point
+    const ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
+    if (column->NameOffset == -1)
+        return "";
+    return &table->ColumnsNames.Buf[column->NameOffset];
+}
+
+// Change user accessible enabled/disabled state of a column (often perceived as "showing/hiding" from users point of view)
+// Note that end-user can use the context menu to change this themselves (right-click in headers, or right-click in columns body with ImGuiTableFlags_ContextMenuInBody)
+// - Require table to have the ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable flag because we are manipulating user accessible state.
+// - Request will be applied during next layout, which happens on the first call to TableNextRow() after BeginTable().
+// - For the getter you can test (TableGetColumnFlags() & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsEnabled) != 0.
+// - Alternative: the ImGuiTableColumnFlags_Disabled is an overriding/master disable flag which will also hide the column from context menu.
+void ImGui::TableSetColumnEnabled(int column_n, bool enabled)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable;
+    IM_ASSERT(table != NULL);
+    if (!table)
+        return;
+    IM_ASSERT(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable); // See comments above
+    if (column_n < 0)
+        column_n = table->CurrentColumn;
+    IM_ASSERT(column_n >= 0 && column_n < table->ColumnsCount);
+    ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
+    column->IsUserEnabledNextFrame = enabled;
+}
+
+// We allow querying for an extra column in order to poll the IsHovered state of the right-most section
+ImGuiTableColumnFlags ImGui::TableGetColumnFlags(int column_n)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable;
+    if (!table)
+        return ImGuiTableColumnFlags_None;
+    if (column_n < 0)
+        column_n = table->CurrentColumn;
+    if (column_n == table->ColumnsCount)
+        return (table->HoveredColumnBody == column_n) ? ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsHovered : ImGuiTableColumnFlags_None;
+    return table->Columns[column_n].Flags;
+}
+
+// Return the cell rectangle based on currently known height.
+// - Important: we generally don't know our row height until the end of the row, so Max.y will be incorrect in many situations.
+//   The only case where this is correct is if we provided a min_row_height to TableNextRow() and don't go below it, or in TableEndRow() when we locked that height.
+// - Important: if ImGuiTableFlags_PadOuterX is set but ImGuiTableFlags_PadInnerX is not set, the outer-most left and right
+//   columns report a small offset so their CellBgRect can extend up to the outer border.
+//   FIXME: But the rendering code in TableEndRow() nullifies that with clamping required for scrolling.
+ImRect ImGui::TableGetCellBgRect(const ImGuiTable* table, int column_n)
+{
+    const ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
+    float x1 = column->MinX;
+    float x2 = column->MaxX;
+    //if (column->PrevEnabledColumn == -1)
+    //    x1 -= table->OuterPaddingX;
+    //if (column->NextEnabledColumn == -1)
+    //    x2 += table->OuterPaddingX;
+    x1 = ImMax(x1, table->WorkRect.Min.x);
+    x2 = ImMin(x2, table->WorkRect.Max.x);
+    return ImRect(x1, table->RowPosY1, x2, table->RowPosY2);
+}
+
+// Return the resizing ID for the right-side of the given column.
+ImGuiID ImGui::TableGetColumnResizeID(const ImGuiTable* table, int column_n, int instance_no)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(column_n >= 0 && column_n < table->ColumnsCount);
+    ImGuiID id = table->ID + 1 + (instance_no * table->ColumnsCount) + column_n;
+    return id;
+}
+
+// Return -1 when table is not hovered. return columns_count if the unused space at the right of visible columns is hovered.
+int ImGui::TableGetHoveredColumn()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable;
+    if (!table)
+        return -1;
+    return (int)table->HoveredColumnBody;
+}
+
+void ImGui::TableSetBgColor(ImGuiTableBgTarget target, ImU32 color, int column_n)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable;
+    IM_ASSERT(target != ImGuiTableBgTarget_None);
+
+    if (color == IM_COL32_DISABLE)
+        color = 0;
+
+    // We cannot draw neither the cell or row background immediately as we don't know the row height at this point in time.
+    switch (target)
+    {
+    case ImGuiTableBgTarget_CellBg:
+    {
+        if (table->RowPosY1 > table->InnerClipRect.Max.y) // Discard
+            return;
+        if (column_n == -1)
+            column_n = table->CurrentColumn;
+        if ((table->VisibleMaskByIndex & ((ImU64)1 << column_n)) == 0)
+            return;
+        if (table->RowCellDataCurrent < 0 || table->RowCellData[table->RowCellDataCurrent].Column != column_n)
+            table->RowCellDataCurrent++;
+        ImGuiTableCellData* cell_data = &table->RowCellData[table->RowCellDataCurrent];
+        cell_data->BgColor = color;
+        cell_data->Column = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n;
+        break;
+    }
+    case ImGuiTableBgTarget_RowBg0:
+    case ImGuiTableBgTarget_RowBg1:
+    {
+        if (table->RowPosY1 > table->InnerClipRect.Max.y) // Discard
+            return;
+        IM_ASSERT(column_n == -1);
+        int bg_idx = (target == ImGuiTableBgTarget_RowBg1) ? 1 : 0;
+        table->RowBgColor[bg_idx] = color;
+        break;
+    }
+    default:
+        IM_ASSERT(0);
+    }
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Tables: Row changes
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - TableGetRowIndex()
+// - TableNextRow()
+// - TableBeginRow() [Internal]
+// - TableEndRow() [Internal]
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// [Public] Note: for row coloring we use ->RowBgColorCounter which is the same value without counting header rows
+int ImGui::TableGetRowIndex()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable;
+    if (!table)
+        return 0;
+    return table->CurrentRow;
+}
+
+// [Public] Starts into the first cell of a new row
+void ImGui::TableNextRow(ImGuiTableRowFlags row_flags, float row_min_height)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable;
+
+    if (!table->IsLayoutLocked)
+        TableUpdateLayout(table);
+    if (table->IsInsideRow)
+        TableEndRow(table);
+
+    table->LastRowFlags = table->RowFlags;
+    table->RowFlags = row_flags;
+    table->RowMinHeight = row_min_height;
+    TableBeginRow(table);
+
+    // We honor min_row_height requested by user, but cannot guarantee per-row maximum height,
+    // because that would essentially require a unique clipping rectangle per-cell.
+    table->RowPosY2 += table->CellPaddingY * 2.0f;
+    table->RowPosY2 = ImMax(table->RowPosY2, table->RowPosY1 + row_min_height);
+
+    // Disable output until user calls TableNextColumn()
+    table->InnerWindow->SkipItems = true;
+}
+
+// [Internal] Called by TableNextRow()
+void ImGui::TableBeginRow(ImGuiTable* table)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = table->InnerWindow;
+    IM_ASSERT(!table->IsInsideRow);
+
+    // New row
+    table->CurrentRow++;
+    table->CurrentColumn = -1;
+    table->RowBgColor[0] = table->RowBgColor[1] = IM_COL32_DISABLE;
+    table->RowCellDataCurrent = -1;
+    table->IsInsideRow = true;
+
+    // Begin frozen rows
+    float next_y1 = table->RowPosY2;
+    if (table->CurrentRow == 0 && table->FreezeRowsCount > 0)
+        next_y1 = window->DC.CursorPos.y = table->OuterRect.Min.y;
+
+    table->RowPosY1 = table->RowPosY2 = next_y1;
+    table->RowTextBaseline = 0.0f;
+    table->RowIndentOffsetX = window->DC.Indent.x - table->HostIndentX; // Lock indent
+    window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset = 0.0f;
+    window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y = next_y1;
+
+    // Making the header BG color non-transparent will allow us to overlay it multiple times when handling smooth dragging.
+    if (table->RowFlags & ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers)
+    {
+        TableSetBgColor(ImGuiTableBgTarget_RowBg0, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TableHeaderBg));
+        if (table->CurrentRow == 0)
+            table->IsUsingHeaders = true;
+    }
+}
+
+// [Internal] Called by TableNextRow()
+void ImGui::TableEndRow(ImGuiTable* table)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    IM_ASSERT(window == table->InnerWindow);
+    IM_ASSERT(table->IsInsideRow);
+
+    if (table->CurrentColumn != -1)
+        TableEndCell(table);
+
+    // Logging
+    if (g.LogEnabled)
+        LogRenderedText(NULL, "|");
+
+    // Position cursor at the bottom of our row so it can be used for e.g. clipping calculation. However it is
+    // likely that the next call to TableBeginCell() will reposition the cursor to take account of vertical padding.
+    window->DC.CursorPos.y = table->RowPosY2;
+
+    // Row background fill
+    const float bg_y1 = table->RowPosY1;
+    const float bg_y2 = table->RowPosY2;
+    const bool unfreeze_rows_actual = (table->CurrentRow + 1 == table->FreezeRowsCount);
+    const bool unfreeze_rows_request = (table->CurrentRow + 1 == table->FreezeRowsRequest);
+    if (table->CurrentRow == 0)
+        TableGetInstanceData(table, table->InstanceCurrent)->LastFirstRowHeight = bg_y2 - bg_y1;
+
+    const bool is_visible = (bg_y2 >= table->InnerClipRect.Min.y && bg_y1 <= table->InnerClipRect.Max.y);
+    if (is_visible)
+    {
+        // Decide of background color for the row
+        ImU32 bg_col0 = 0;
+        ImU32 bg_col1 = 0;
+        if (table->RowBgColor[0] != IM_COL32_DISABLE)
+            bg_col0 = table->RowBgColor[0];
+        else if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_RowBg)
+            bg_col0 = GetColorU32((table->RowBgColorCounter & 1) ? ImGuiCol_TableRowBgAlt : ImGuiCol_TableRowBg);
+        if (table->RowBgColor[1] != IM_COL32_DISABLE)
+            bg_col1 = table->RowBgColor[1];
+
+        // Decide of top border color
+        ImU32 border_col = 0;
+        const float border_size = TABLE_BORDER_SIZE;
+        if (table->CurrentRow > 0 || table->InnerWindow == table->OuterWindow)
+            if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH)
+                border_col = (table->LastRowFlags & ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers) ? table->BorderColorStrong : table->BorderColorLight;
+
+        const bool draw_cell_bg_color = table->RowCellDataCurrent >= 0;
+        const bool draw_strong_bottom_border = unfreeze_rows_actual;
+        if ((bg_col0 | bg_col1 | border_col) != 0 || draw_strong_bottom_border || draw_cell_bg_color)
+        {
+            // In theory we could call SetWindowClipRectBeforeSetChannel() but since we know TableEndRow() is
+            // always followed by a change of clipping rectangle we perform the smallest overwrite possible here.
+            if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip) == 0)
+                window->DrawList->_CmdHeader.ClipRect = table->Bg0ClipRectForDrawCmd.ToVec4();
+            table->DrawSplitter->SetCurrentChannel(window->DrawList, TABLE_DRAW_CHANNEL_BG0);
+        }
+
+        // Draw row background
+        // We soft/cpu clip this so all backgrounds and borders can share the same clipping rectangle
+        if (bg_col0 || bg_col1)
+        {
+            ImRect row_rect(table->WorkRect.Min.x, bg_y1, table->WorkRect.Max.x, bg_y2);
+            row_rect.ClipWith(table->BgClipRect);
+            if (bg_col0 != 0 && row_rect.Min.y < row_rect.Max.y)
+                window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(row_rect.Min, row_rect.Max, bg_col0);
+            if (bg_col1 != 0 && row_rect.Min.y < row_rect.Max.y)
+                window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(row_rect.Min, row_rect.Max, bg_col1);
+        }
+
+        // Draw cell background color
+        if (draw_cell_bg_color)
+        {
+            ImGuiTableCellData* cell_data_end = &table->RowCellData[table->RowCellDataCurrent];
+            for (ImGuiTableCellData* cell_data = &table->RowCellData[0]; cell_data <= cell_data_end; cell_data++)
+            {
+                // As we render the BG here we need to clip things (for layout we would not)
+                // FIXME: This cancels the OuterPadding addition done by TableGetCellBgRect(), need to keep it while rendering correctly while scrolling.
+                const ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[cell_data->Column];
+                ImRect cell_bg_rect = TableGetCellBgRect(table, cell_data->Column);
+                cell_bg_rect.ClipWith(table->BgClipRect);
+                cell_bg_rect.Min.x = ImMax(cell_bg_rect.Min.x, column->ClipRect.Min.x);     // So that first column after frozen one gets clipped when scrolling
+                cell_bg_rect.Max.x = ImMin(cell_bg_rect.Max.x, column->MaxX);
+                window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(cell_bg_rect.Min, cell_bg_rect.Max, cell_data->BgColor);
+            }
+        }
+
+        // Draw top border
+        if (border_col && bg_y1 >= table->BgClipRect.Min.y && bg_y1 < table->BgClipRect.Max.y)
+            window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(table->BorderX1, bg_y1), ImVec2(table->BorderX2, bg_y1), border_col, border_size);
+
+        // Draw bottom border at the row unfreezing mark (always strong)
+        if (draw_strong_bottom_border && bg_y2 >= table->BgClipRect.Min.y && bg_y2 < table->BgClipRect.Max.y)
+            window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(table->BorderX1, bg_y2), ImVec2(table->BorderX2, bg_y2), table->BorderColorStrong, border_size);
+    }
+
+    // End frozen rows (when we are past the last frozen row line, teleport cursor and alter clipping rectangle)
+    // We need to do that in TableEndRow() instead of TableBeginRow() so the list clipper can mark end of row and
+    // get the new cursor position.
+    if (unfreeze_rows_request)
+        for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++)
+        {
+            ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
+            column->NavLayerCurrent = (ImS8)((column_n < table->FreezeColumnsCount) ? ImGuiNavLayer_Menu : ImGuiNavLayer_Main);
+        }
+    if (unfreeze_rows_actual)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(table->IsUnfrozenRows == false);
+        table->IsUnfrozenRows = true;
+
+        // BgClipRect starts as table->InnerClipRect, reduce it now and make BgClipRectForDrawCmd == BgClipRect
+        float y0 = ImMax(table->RowPosY2 + 1, window->InnerClipRect.Min.y);
+        table->BgClipRect.Min.y = table->Bg2ClipRectForDrawCmd.Min.y = ImMin(y0, window->InnerClipRect.Max.y);
+        table->BgClipRect.Max.y = table->Bg2ClipRectForDrawCmd.Max.y = window->InnerClipRect.Max.y;
+        table->Bg2DrawChannelCurrent = table->Bg2DrawChannelUnfrozen;
+        IM_ASSERT(table->Bg2ClipRectForDrawCmd.Min.y <= table->Bg2ClipRectForDrawCmd.Max.y);
+
+        float row_height = table->RowPosY2 - table->RowPosY1;
+        table->RowPosY2 = window->DC.CursorPos.y = table->WorkRect.Min.y + table->RowPosY2 - table->OuterRect.Min.y;
+        table->RowPosY1 = table->RowPosY2 - row_height;
+        for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++)
+        {
+            ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
+            column->DrawChannelCurrent = column->DrawChannelUnfrozen;
+            column->ClipRect.Min.y = table->Bg2ClipRectForDrawCmd.Min.y;
+        }
+
+        // Update cliprect ahead of TableBeginCell() so clipper can access to new ClipRect->Min.y
+        SetWindowClipRectBeforeSetChannel(window, table->Columns[0].ClipRect);
+        table->DrawSplitter->SetCurrentChannel(window->DrawList, table->Columns[0].DrawChannelCurrent);
+    }
+
+    if (!(table->RowFlags & ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers))
+        table->RowBgColorCounter++;
+    table->IsInsideRow = false;
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Tables: Columns changes
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - TableGetColumnIndex()
+// - TableSetColumnIndex()
+// - TableNextColumn()
+// - TableBeginCell() [Internal]
+// - TableEndCell() [Internal]
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+int ImGui::TableGetColumnIndex()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable;
+    if (!table)
+        return 0;
+    return table->CurrentColumn;
+}
+
+// [Public] Append into a specific column
+bool ImGui::TableSetColumnIndex(int column_n)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable;
+    if (!table)
+        return false;
+
+    if (table->CurrentColumn != column_n)
+    {
+        if (table->CurrentColumn != -1)
+            TableEndCell(table);
+        IM_ASSERT(column_n >= 0 && table->ColumnsCount);
+        TableBeginCell(table, column_n);
+    }
+
+    // Return whether the column is visible. User may choose to skip submitting items based on this return value,
+    // however they shouldn't skip submitting for columns that may have the tallest contribution to row height.
+    return (table->RequestOutputMaskByIndex & ((ImU64)1 << column_n)) != 0;
+}
+
+// [Public] Append into the next column, wrap and create a new row when already on last column
+bool ImGui::TableNextColumn()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable;
+    if (!table)
+        return false;
+
+    if (table->IsInsideRow && table->CurrentColumn + 1 < table->ColumnsCount)
+    {
+        if (table->CurrentColumn != -1)
+            TableEndCell(table);
+        TableBeginCell(table, table->CurrentColumn + 1);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        TableNextRow();
+        TableBeginCell(table, 0);
+    }
+
+    // Return whether the column is visible. User may choose to skip submitting items based on this return value,
+    // however they shouldn't skip submitting for columns that may have the tallest contribution to row height.
+    int column_n = table->CurrentColumn;
+    return (table->RequestOutputMaskByIndex & ((ImU64)1 << column_n)) != 0;
+}
+
+
+// [Internal] Called by TableSetColumnIndex()/TableNextColumn()
+// This is called very frequently, so we need to be mindful of unnecessary overhead.
+// FIXME-TABLE FIXME-OPT: Could probably shortcut some things for non-active or clipped columns.
+void ImGui::TableBeginCell(ImGuiTable* table, int column_n)
+{
+    ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
+    ImGuiWindow* window = table->InnerWindow;
+    table->CurrentColumn = column_n;
+
+    // Start position is roughly ~~ CellRect.Min + CellPadding + Indent
+    float start_x = column->WorkMinX;
+    if (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IndentEnable)
+        start_x += table->RowIndentOffsetX; // ~~ += window.DC.Indent.x - table->HostIndentX, except we locked it for the row.
+
+    window->DC.CursorPos.x = start_x;
+    window->DC.CursorPos.y = table->RowPosY1 + table->CellPaddingY;
+    window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = window->DC.CursorPos.x;
+    window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = start_x - window->Pos.x - window->DC.Indent.x; // FIXME-WORKRECT
+    window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset = table->RowTextBaseline;
+    window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = (ImGuiNavLayer)column->NavLayerCurrent;
+
+    window->WorkRect.Min.y = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
+    window->WorkRect.Min.x = column->WorkMinX;
+    window->WorkRect.Max.x = column->WorkMaxX;
+    window->DC.ItemWidth = column->ItemWidth;
+
+    // To allow ImGuiListClipper to function we propagate our row height
+    if (!column->IsEnabled)
+        window->DC.CursorPos.y = ImMax(window->DC.CursorPos.y, table->RowPosY2);
+
+    window->SkipItems = column->IsSkipItems;
+    if (column->IsSkipItems)
+    {
+        ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+        g.LastItemData.ID = 0;
+        g.LastItemData.StatusFlags = 0;
+    }
+
+    if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip)
+    {
+        // FIXME: if we end up drawing all borders/bg in EndTable, could remove this and just assert that channel hasn't changed.
+        table->DrawSplitter->SetCurrentChannel(window->DrawList, TABLE_DRAW_CHANNEL_NOCLIP);
+        //IM_ASSERT(table->DrawSplitter._Current == TABLE_DRAW_CHANNEL_NOCLIP);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // FIXME-TABLE: Could avoid this if draw channel is dummy channel?
+        SetWindowClipRectBeforeSetChannel(window, column->ClipRect);
+        table->DrawSplitter->SetCurrentChannel(window->DrawList, column->DrawChannelCurrent);
+    }
+
+    // Logging
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.LogEnabled && !column->IsSkipItems)
+    {
+        LogRenderedText(&window->DC.CursorPos, "|");
+        g.LogLinePosY = FLT_MAX;
+    }
+}
+
+// [Internal] Called by TableNextRow()/TableSetColumnIndex()/TableNextColumn()
+void ImGui::TableEndCell(ImGuiTable* table)
+{
+    ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[table->CurrentColumn];
+    ImGuiWindow* window = table->InnerWindow;
+
+    // Report maximum position so we can infer content size per column.
+    float* p_max_pos_x;
+    if (table->RowFlags & ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers)
+        p_max_pos_x = &column->ContentMaxXHeadersUsed;  // Useful in case user submit contents in header row that is not a TableHeader() call
+    else
+        p_max_pos_x = table->IsUnfrozenRows ? &column->ContentMaxXUnfrozen : &column->ContentMaxXFrozen;
+    *p_max_pos_x = ImMax(*p_max_pos_x, window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x);
+    table->RowPosY2 = ImMax(table->RowPosY2, window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y + table->CellPaddingY);
+    column->ItemWidth = window->DC.ItemWidth;
+
+    // Propagate text baseline for the entire row
+    // FIXME-TABLE: Here we propagate text baseline from the last line of the cell.. instead of the first one.
+    table->RowTextBaseline = ImMax(table->RowTextBaseline, window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset);
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Tables: Columns width management
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - TableGetMaxColumnWidth() [Internal]
+// - TableGetColumnWidthAuto() [Internal]
+// - TableSetColumnWidth()
+// - TableSetColumnWidthAutoSingle() [Internal]
+// - TableSetColumnWidthAutoAll() [Internal]
+// - TableUpdateColumnsWeightFromWidth() [Internal]
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Maximum column content width given current layout. Use column->MinX so this value on a per-column basis.
+float ImGui::TableGetMaxColumnWidth(const ImGuiTable* table, int column_n)
+{
+    const ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
+    float max_width = FLT_MAX;
+    const float min_column_distance = table->MinColumnWidth + table->CellPaddingX * 2.0f + table->CellSpacingX1 + table->CellSpacingX2;
+    if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_ScrollX)
+    {
+        // Frozen columns can't reach beyond visible width else scrolling will naturally break.
+        // (we use DisplayOrder as within a set of multiple frozen column reordering is possible)
+        if (column->DisplayOrder < table->FreezeColumnsRequest)
+        {
+            max_width = (table->InnerClipRect.Max.x - (table->FreezeColumnsRequest - column->DisplayOrder) * min_column_distance) - column->MinX;
+            max_width = max_width - table->OuterPaddingX - table->CellPaddingX - table->CellSpacingX2;
+        }
+    }
+    else if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoKeepColumnsVisible) == 0)
+    {
+        // If horizontal scrolling if disabled, we apply a final lossless shrinking of columns in order to make
+        // sure they are all visible. Because of this we also know that all of the columns will always fit in
+        // table->WorkRect and therefore in table->InnerRect (because ScrollX is off)
+        // FIXME-TABLE: This is solved incorrectly but also quite a difficult problem to fix as we also want ClipRect width to match.
+        // See "table_width_distrib" and "table_width_keep_visible" tests
+        max_width = table->WorkRect.Max.x - (table->ColumnsEnabledCount - column->IndexWithinEnabledSet - 1) * min_column_distance - column->MinX;
+        //max_width -= table->CellSpacingX1;
+        max_width -= table->CellSpacingX2;
+        max_width -= table->CellPaddingX * 2.0f;
+        max_width -= table->OuterPaddingX;
+    }
+    return max_width;
+}
+
+// Note this is meant to be stored in column->WidthAuto, please generally use the WidthAuto field
+float ImGui::TableGetColumnWidthAuto(ImGuiTable* table, ImGuiTableColumn* column)
+{
+    const float content_width_body = ImMax(column->ContentMaxXFrozen, column->ContentMaxXUnfrozen) - column->WorkMinX;
+    const float content_width_headers = column->ContentMaxXHeadersIdeal - column->WorkMinX;
+    float width_auto = content_width_body;
+    if (!(column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHeaderWidth))
+        width_auto = ImMax(width_auto, content_width_headers);
+
+    // Non-resizable fixed columns preserve their requested width
+    if ((column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed) && column->InitStretchWeightOrWidth > 0.0f)
+        if (!(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable) || (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize))
+            width_auto = column->InitStretchWeightOrWidth;
+
+    return ImMax(width_auto, table->MinColumnWidth);
+}
+
+// 'width' = inner column width, without padding
+void ImGui::TableSetColumnWidth(int column_n, float width)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable;
+    IM_ASSERT(table != NULL && table->IsLayoutLocked == false);
+    IM_ASSERT(column_n >= 0 && column_n < table->ColumnsCount);
+    ImGuiTableColumn* column_0 = &table->Columns[column_n];
+    float column_0_width = width;
+
+    // Apply constraints early
+    // Compare both requested and actual given width to avoid overwriting requested width when column is stuck (minimum size, bounded)
+    IM_ASSERT(table->MinColumnWidth > 0.0f);
+    const float min_width = table->MinColumnWidth;
+    const float max_width = ImMax(min_width, TableGetMaxColumnWidth(table, column_n));
+    column_0_width = ImClamp(column_0_width, min_width, max_width);
+    if (column_0->WidthGiven == column_0_width || column_0->WidthRequest == column_0_width)
+        return;
+
+    //IMGUI_DEBUG_PRINT("TableSetColumnWidth(%d, %.1f->%.1f)\n", column_0_idx, column_0->WidthGiven, column_0_width);
+    ImGuiTableColumn* column_1 = (column_0->NextEnabledColumn != -1) ? &table->Columns[column_0->NextEnabledColumn] : NULL;
+
+    // In this surprisingly not simple because of how we support mixing Fixed and multiple Stretch columns.
+    // - All fixed: easy.
+    // - All stretch: easy.
+    // - One or more fixed + one stretch: easy.
+    // - One or more fixed + more than one stretch: tricky.
+    // Qt when manual resize is enabled only support a single _trailing_ stretch column.
+
+    // When forwarding resize from Wn| to Fn+1| we need to be considerate of the _NoResize flag on Fn+1.
+    // FIXME-TABLE: Find a way to rewrite all of this so interactions feel more consistent for the user.
+    // Scenarios:
+    // - F1 F2 F3  resize from F1| or F2|   --> ok: alter ->WidthRequested of Fixed column. Subsequent columns will be offset.
+    // - F1 F2 F3  resize from F3|          --> ok: alter ->WidthRequested of Fixed column. If active, ScrollX extent can be altered.
+    // - F1 F2 W3  resize from F1| or F2|   --> ok: alter ->WidthRequested of Fixed column. If active, ScrollX extent can be altered, but it doesn't make much sense as the Stretch column will always be minimal size.
+    // - F1 F2 W3  resize from W3|          --> ok: no-op (disabled by Resize Rule 1)
+    // - W1 W2 W3  resize from W1| or W2|   --> ok
+    // - W1 W2 W3  resize from W3|          --> ok: no-op (disabled by Resize Rule 1)
+    // - W1 F2 F3  resize from F3|          --> ok: no-op (disabled by Resize Rule 1)
+    // - W1 F2     resize from F2|          --> ok: no-op (disabled by Resize Rule 1)
+    // - W1 W2 F3  resize from W1| or W2|   --> ok
+    // - W1 F2 W3  resize from W1| or F2|   --> ok
+    // - F1 W2 F3  resize from W2|          --> ok
+    // - F1 W3 F2  resize from W3|          --> ok
+    // - W1 F2 F3  resize from W1|          --> ok: equivalent to resizing |F2. F3 will not move.
+    // - W1 F2 F3  resize from F2|          --> ok
+    // All resizes from a Wx columns are locking other columns.
+
+    // Possible improvements:
+    // - W1 W2 W3  resize W1|               --> to not be stuck, both W2 and W3 would stretch down. Seems possible to fix. Would be most beneficial to simplify resize of all-weighted columns.
+    // - W3 F1 F2  resize W3|               --> to not be stuck past F1|, both F1 and F2 would need to stretch down, which would be lossy or ambiguous. Seems hard to fix.
+
+    // [Resize Rule 1] Can't resize from right of right-most visible column if there is any Stretch column. Implemented in TableUpdateLayout().
+
+    // If we have all Fixed columns OR resizing a Fixed column that doesn't come after a Stretch one, we can do an offsetting resize.
+    // This is the preferred resize path
+    if (column_0->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed)
+        if (!column_1 || table->LeftMostStretchedColumn == -1 || table->Columns[table->LeftMostStretchedColumn].DisplayOrder >= column_0->DisplayOrder)
+        {
+            column_0->WidthRequest = column_0_width;
+            table->IsSettingsDirty = true;
+            return;
+        }
+
+    // We can also use previous column if there's no next one (this is used when doing an auto-fit on the right-most stretch column)
+    if (column_1 == NULL)
+        column_1 = (column_0->PrevEnabledColumn != -1) ? &table->Columns[column_0->PrevEnabledColumn] : NULL;
+    if (column_1 == NULL)
+        return;
+
+    // Resizing from right-side of a Stretch column before a Fixed column forward sizing to left-side of fixed column.
+    // (old_a + old_b == new_a + new_b) --> (new_a == old_a + old_b - new_b)
+    float column_1_width = ImMax(column_1->WidthRequest - (column_0_width - column_0->WidthRequest), min_width);
+    column_0_width = column_0->WidthRequest + column_1->WidthRequest - column_1_width;
+    IM_ASSERT(column_0_width > 0.0f && column_1_width > 0.0f);
+    column_0->WidthRequest = column_0_width;
+    column_1->WidthRequest = column_1_width;
+    if ((column_0->Flags | column_1->Flags) & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch)
+        TableUpdateColumnsWeightFromWidth(table);
+    table->IsSettingsDirty = true;
+}
+
+// Disable clipping then auto-fit, will take 2 frames
+// (we don't take a shortcut for unclipped columns to reduce inconsistencies when e.g. resizing multiple columns)
+void ImGui::TableSetColumnWidthAutoSingle(ImGuiTable* table, int column_n)
+{
+    // Single auto width uses auto-fit
+    ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
+    if (!column->IsEnabled)
+        return;
+    column->CannotSkipItemsQueue = (1 << 0);
+    table->AutoFitSingleColumn = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n;
+}
+
+void ImGui::TableSetColumnWidthAutoAll(ImGuiTable* table)
+{
+    for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
+        if (!column->IsEnabled && !(column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch)) // Cannot reset weight of hidden stretch column
+            continue;
+        column->CannotSkipItemsQueue = (1 << 0);
+        column->AutoFitQueue = (1 << 1);
+    }
+}
+
+void ImGui::TableUpdateColumnsWeightFromWidth(ImGuiTable* table)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(table->LeftMostStretchedColumn != -1 && table->RightMostStretchedColumn != -1);
+
+    // Measure existing quantity
+    float visible_weight = 0.0f;
+    float visible_width = 0.0f;
+    for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
+        if (!column->IsEnabled || !(column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch))
+            continue;
+        IM_ASSERT(column->StretchWeight > 0.0f);
+        visible_weight += column->StretchWeight;
+        visible_width += column->WidthRequest;
+    }
+    IM_ASSERT(visible_weight > 0.0f && visible_width > 0.0f);
+
+    // Apply new weights
+    for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
+        if (!column->IsEnabled || !(column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch))
+            continue;
+        column->StretchWeight = (column->WidthRequest / visible_width) * visible_weight;
+        IM_ASSERT(column->StretchWeight > 0.0f);
+    }
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Tables: Drawing
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - TablePushBackgroundChannel() [Internal]
+// - TablePopBackgroundChannel() [Internal]
+// - TableSetupDrawChannels() [Internal]
+// - TableMergeDrawChannels() [Internal]
+// - TableDrawBorders() [Internal]
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Bg2 is used by Selectable (and possibly other widgets) to render to the background.
+// Unlike our Bg0/1 channel which we uses for RowBg/CellBg/Borders and where we guarantee all shapes to be CPU-clipped, the Bg2 channel being widgets-facing will rely on regular ClipRect.
+void ImGui::TablePushBackgroundChannel()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable;
+
+    // Optimization: avoid SetCurrentChannel() + PushClipRect()
+    table->HostBackupInnerClipRect = window->ClipRect;
+    SetWindowClipRectBeforeSetChannel(window, table->Bg2ClipRectForDrawCmd);
+    table->DrawSplitter->SetCurrentChannel(window->DrawList, table->Bg2DrawChannelCurrent);
+}
+
+void ImGui::TablePopBackgroundChannel()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable;
+    ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[table->CurrentColumn];
+
+    // Optimization: avoid PopClipRect() + SetCurrentChannel()
+    SetWindowClipRectBeforeSetChannel(window, table->HostBackupInnerClipRect);
+    table->DrawSplitter->SetCurrentChannel(window->DrawList, column->DrawChannelCurrent);
+}
+
+// Allocate draw channels. Called by TableUpdateLayout()
+// - We allocate them following storage order instead of display order so reordering columns won't needlessly
+//   increase overall dormant memory cost.
+// - We isolate headers draw commands in their own channels instead of just altering clip rects.
+//   This is in order to facilitate merging of draw commands.
+// - After crossing FreezeRowsCount, all columns see their current draw channel changed to a second set of channels.
+// - We only use the dummy draw channel so we can push a null clipping rectangle into it without affecting other
+//   channels, while simplifying per-row/per-cell overhead. It will be empty and discarded when merged.
+// - We allocate 1 or 2 background draw channels. This is because we know TablePushBackgroundChannel() is only used for
+//   horizontal spanning. If we allowed vertical spanning we'd need one background draw channel per merge group (1-4).
+// Draw channel allocation (before merging):
+// - NoClip                       --> 2+D+1 channels: bg0/1 + bg2 + foreground (same clip rect == always 1 draw call)
+// - Clip                         --> 2+D+N channels
+// - FreezeRows                   --> 2+D+N*2 (unless scrolling value is zero)
+// - FreezeRows || FreezeColunns  --> 3+D+N*2 (unless scrolling value is zero)
+// Where D is 1 if any column is clipped or hidden (dummy channel) otherwise 0.
+void ImGui::TableSetupDrawChannels(ImGuiTable* table)
+{
+    const int freeze_row_multiplier = (table->FreezeRowsCount > 0) ? 2 : 1;
+    const int channels_for_row = (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip) ? 1 : table->ColumnsEnabledCount;
+    const int channels_for_bg = 1 + 1 * freeze_row_multiplier;
+    const int channels_for_dummy = (table->ColumnsEnabledCount < table->ColumnsCount || table->VisibleMaskByIndex != table->EnabledMaskByIndex) ? +1 : 0;
+    const int channels_total = channels_for_bg + (channels_for_row * freeze_row_multiplier) + channels_for_dummy;
+    table->DrawSplitter->Split(table->InnerWindow->DrawList, channels_total);
+    table->DummyDrawChannel = (ImGuiTableDrawChannelIdx)((channels_for_dummy > 0) ? channels_total - 1 : -1);
+    table->Bg2DrawChannelCurrent = TABLE_DRAW_CHANNEL_BG2_FROZEN;
+    table->Bg2DrawChannelUnfrozen = (ImGuiTableDrawChannelIdx)((table->FreezeRowsCount > 0) ? 2 + channels_for_row : TABLE_DRAW_CHANNEL_BG2_FROZEN);
+
+    int draw_channel_current = 2;
+    for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
+        if (column->IsVisibleX && column->IsVisibleY)
+        {
+            column->DrawChannelFrozen = (ImGuiTableDrawChannelIdx)(draw_channel_current);
+            column->DrawChannelUnfrozen = (ImGuiTableDrawChannelIdx)(draw_channel_current + (table->FreezeRowsCount > 0 ? channels_for_row + 1 : 0));
+            if (!(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoClip))
+                draw_channel_current++;
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            column->DrawChannelFrozen = column->DrawChannelUnfrozen = table->DummyDrawChannel;
+        }
+        column->DrawChannelCurrent = column->DrawChannelFrozen;
+    }
+
+    // Initial draw cmd starts with a BgClipRect that matches the one of its host, to facilitate merge draw commands by default.
+    // All our cell highlight are manually clipped with BgClipRect. When unfreezing it will be made smaller to fit scrolling rect.
+    // (This technically isn't part of setting up draw channels, but is reasonably related to be done here)
+    table->BgClipRect = table->InnerClipRect;
+    table->Bg0ClipRectForDrawCmd = table->OuterWindow->ClipRect;
+    table->Bg2ClipRectForDrawCmd = table->HostClipRect;
+    IM_ASSERT(table->BgClipRect.Min.y <= table->BgClipRect.Max.y);
+}
+
+// This function reorder draw channels based on matching clip rectangle, to facilitate merging them. Called by EndTable().
+// For simplicity we call it TableMergeDrawChannels() but in fact it only reorder channels + overwrite ClipRect,
+// actual merging is done by table->DrawSplitter.Merge() which is called right after TableMergeDrawChannels().
+//
+// Columns where the contents didn't stray off their local clip rectangle can be merged. To achieve
+// this we merge their clip rect and make them contiguous in the channel list, so they can be merged
+// by the call to DrawSplitter.Merge() following to the call to this function.
+// We reorder draw commands by arranging them into a maximum of 4 distinct groups:
+//
+//   1 group:               2 groups:              2 groups:              4 groups:
+//   [ 0. ] no freeze       [ 0. ] row freeze      [ 01 ] col freeze      [ 01 ] row+col freeze
+//   [ .. ]  or no scroll   [ 2. ]  and v-scroll   [ .. ]  and h-scroll   [ 23 ]  and v+h-scroll
+//
+// Each column itself can use 1 channel (row freeze disabled) or 2 channels (row freeze enabled).
+// When the contents of a column didn't stray off its limit, we move its channels into the corresponding group
+// based on its position (within frozen rows/columns groups or not).
+// At the end of the operation our 1-4 groups will each have a ImDrawCmd using the same ClipRect.
+// This function assume that each column are pointing to a distinct draw channel,
+// otherwise merge_group->ChannelsCount will not match set bit count of merge_group->ChannelsMask.
+//
+// Column channels will not be merged into one of the 1-4 groups in the following cases:
+// - The contents stray off its clipping rectangle (we only compare the MaxX value, not the MinX value).
+//   Direct ImDrawList calls won't be taken into account by default, if you use them make sure the ImGui:: bounds
+//   matches, by e.g. calling SetCursorScreenPos().
+// - The channel uses more than one draw command itself. We drop all our attempt at merging stuff here..
+//   we could do better but it's going to be rare and probably not worth the hassle.
+// Columns for which the draw channel(s) haven't been merged with other will use their own ImDrawCmd.
+//
+// This function is particularly tricky to understand.. take a breath.
+void ImGui::TableMergeDrawChannels(ImGuiTable* table)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImDrawListSplitter* splitter = table->DrawSplitter;
+    const bool has_freeze_v = (table->FreezeRowsCount > 0);
+    const bool has_freeze_h = (table->FreezeColumnsCount > 0);
+    IM_ASSERT(splitter->_Current == 0);
+
+    // Track which groups we are going to attempt to merge, and which channels goes into each group.
+    struct MergeGroup
+    {
+        ImRect  ClipRect;
+        int     ChannelsCount;
+        ImBitArray<IMGUI_TABLE_MAX_DRAW_CHANNELS> ChannelsMask;
+
+        MergeGroup() { ChannelsCount = 0; }
+    };
+    int merge_group_mask = 0x00;
+    MergeGroup merge_groups[4];
+
+    // 1. Scan channels and take note of those which can be merged
+    for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++)
+    {
+        if ((table->VisibleMaskByIndex & ((ImU64)1 << column_n)) == 0)
+            continue;
+        ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
+
+        const int merge_group_sub_count = has_freeze_v ? 2 : 1;
+        for (int merge_group_sub_n = 0; merge_group_sub_n < merge_group_sub_count; merge_group_sub_n++)
+        {
+            const int channel_no = (merge_group_sub_n == 0) ? column->DrawChannelFrozen : column->DrawChannelUnfrozen;
+
+            // Don't attempt to merge if there are multiple draw calls within the column
+            ImDrawChannel* src_channel = &splitter->_Channels[channel_no];
+            if (src_channel->_CmdBuffer.Size > 0 && src_channel->_CmdBuffer.back().ElemCount == 0 && src_channel->_CmdBuffer.back().UserCallback == NULL) // Equivalent of PopUnusedDrawCmd()
+                src_channel->_CmdBuffer.pop_back();
+            if (src_channel->_CmdBuffer.Size != 1)
+                continue;
+
+            // Find out the width of this merge group and check if it will fit in our column
+            // (note that we assume that rendering didn't stray on the left direction. we should need a CursorMinPos to detect it)
+            if (!(column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoClip))
+            {
+                float content_max_x;
+                if (!has_freeze_v)
+                    content_max_x = ImMax(column->ContentMaxXUnfrozen, column->ContentMaxXHeadersUsed); // No row freeze
+                else if (merge_group_sub_n == 0)
+                    content_max_x = ImMax(column->ContentMaxXFrozen, column->ContentMaxXHeadersUsed);   // Row freeze: use width before freeze
+                else
+                    content_max_x = column->ContentMaxXUnfrozen;                                        // Row freeze: use width after freeze
+                if (content_max_x > column->ClipRect.Max.x)
+                    continue;
+            }
+
+            const int merge_group_n = (has_freeze_h && column_n < table->FreezeColumnsCount ? 0 : 1) + (has_freeze_v && merge_group_sub_n == 0 ? 0 : 2);
+            IM_ASSERT(channel_no < IMGUI_TABLE_MAX_DRAW_CHANNELS);
+            MergeGroup* merge_group = &merge_groups[merge_group_n];
+            if (merge_group->ChannelsCount == 0)
+                merge_group->ClipRect = ImRect(+FLT_MAX, +FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX, -FLT_MAX);
+            merge_group->ChannelsMask.SetBit(channel_no);
+            merge_group->ChannelsCount++;
+            merge_group->ClipRect.Add(src_channel->_CmdBuffer[0].ClipRect);
+            merge_group_mask |= (1 << merge_group_n);
+        }
+
+        // Invalidate current draw channel
+        // (we don't clear DrawChannelFrozen/DrawChannelUnfrozen solely to facilitate debugging/later inspection of data)
+        column->DrawChannelCurrent = (ImGuiTableDrawChannelIdx)-1;
+    }
+
+    // [DEBUG] Display merge groups
+#if 0
+    if (g.IO.KeyShift)
+        for (int merge_group_n = 0; merge_group_n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(merge_groups); merge_group_n++)
+        {
+            MergeGroup* merge_group = &merge_groups[merge_group_n];
+            if (merge_group->ChannelsCount == 0)
+                continue;
+            char buf[32];
+            ImFormatString(buf, 32, "MG%d:%d", merge_group_n, merge_group->ChannelsCount);
+            ImVec2 text_pos = merge_group->ClipRect.Min + ImVec2(4, 4);
+            ImVec2 text_size = CalcTextSize(buf, NULL);
+            GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRectFilled(text_pos, text_pos + text_size, IM_COL32(0, 0, 0, 255));
+            GetForegroundDrawList()->AddText(text_pos, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255), buf, NULL);
+            GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(merge_group->ClipRect.Min, merge_group->ClipRect.Max, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255));
+        }
+#endif
+
+    // 2. Rewrite channel list in our preferred order
+    if (merge_group_mask != 0)
+    {
+        // We skip channel 0 (Bg0/Bg1) and 1 (Bg2 frozen) from the shuffling since they won't move - see channels allocation in TableSetupDrawChannels().
+        const int LEADING_DRAW_CHANNELS = 2;
+        g.DrawChannelsTempMergeBuffer.resize(splitter->_Count - LEADING_DRAW_CHANNELS); // Use shared temporary storage so the allocation gets amortized
+        ImDrawChannel* dst_tmp = g.DrawChannelsTempMergeBuffer.Data;
+        ImBitArray<IMGUI_TABLE_MAX_DRAW_CHANNELS> remaining_mask;                       // We need 132-bit of storage
+        remaining_mask.SetBitRange(LEADING_DRAW_CHANNELS, splitter->_Count);
+        remaining_mask.ClearBit(table->Bg2DrawChannelUnfrozen);
+        IM_ASSERT(has_freeze_v == false || table->Bg2DrawChannelUnfrozen != TABLE_DRAW_CHANNEL_BG2_FROZEN);
+        int remaining_count = splitter->_Count - (has_freeze_v ? LEADING_DRAW_CHANNELS + 1 : LEADING_DRAW_CHANNELS);
+        //ImRect host_rect = (table->InnerWindow == table->OuterWindow) ? table->InnerClipRect : table->HostClipRect;
+        ImRect host_rect = table->HostClipRect;
+        for (int merge_group_n = 0; merge_group_n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(merge_groups); merge_group_n++)
+        {
+            if (int merge_channels_count = merge_groups[merge_group_n].ChannelsCount)
+            {
+                MergeGroup* merge_group = &merge_groups[merge_group_n];
+                ImRect merge_clip_rect = merge_group->ClipRect;
+
+                // Extend outer-most clip limits to match those of host, so draw calls can be merged even if
+                // outer-most columns have some outer padding offsetting them from their parent ClipRect.
+                // The principal cases this is dealing with are:
+                // - On a same-window table (not scrolling = single group), all fitting columns ClipRect -> will extend and match host ClipRect -> will merge
+                // - Columns can use padding and have left-most ClipRect.Min.x and right-most ClipRect.Max.x != from host ClipRect -> will extend and match host ClipRect -> will merge
+                // FIXME-TABLE FIXME-WORKRECT: We are wasting a merge opportunity on tables without scrolling if column doesn't fit
+                // within host clip rect, solely because of the half-padding difference between window->WorkRect and window->InnerClipRect.
+                if ((merge_group_n & 1) == 0 || !has_freeze_h)
+                    merge_clip_rect.Min.x = ImMin(merge_clip_rect.Min.x, host_rect.Min.x);
+                if ((merge_group_n & 2) == 0 || !has_freeze_v)
+                    merge_clip_rect.Min.y = ImMin(merge_clip_rect.Min.y, host_rect.Min.y);
+                if ((merge_group_n & 1) != 0)
+                    merge_clip_rect.Max.x = ImMax(merge_clip_rect.Max.x, host_rect.Max.x);
+                if ((merge_group_n & 2) != 0 && (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendY) == 0)
+                    merge_clip_rect.Max.y = ImMax(merge_clip_rect.Max.y, host_rect.Max.y);
+#if 0
+                GetOverlayDrawList()->AddRect(merge_group->ClipRect.Min, merge_group->ClipRect.Max, IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 200), 0.0f, 0, 1.0f);
+                GetOverlayDrawList()->AddLine(merge_group->ClipRect.Min, merge_clip_rect.Min, IM_COL32(255, 100, 0, 200));
+                GetOverlayDrawList()->AddLine(merge_group->ClipRect.Max, merge_clip_rect.Max, IM_COL32(255, 100, 0, 200));
+#endif
+                remaining_count -= merge_group->ChannelsCount;
+                for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(remaining_mask.Storage); n++)
+                    remaining_mask.Storage[n] &= ~merge_group->ChannelsMask.Storage[n];
+                for (int n = 0; n < splitter->_Count && merge_channels_count != 0; n++)
+                {
+                    // Copy + overwrite new clip rect
+                    if (!merge_group->ChannelsMask.TestBit(n))
+                        continue;
+                    merge_group->ChannelsMask.ClearBit(n);
+                    merge_channels_count--;
+
+                    ImDrawChannel* channel = &splitter->_Channels[n];
+                    IM_ASSERT(channel->_CmdBuffer.Size == 1 && merge_clip_rect.Contains(ImRect(channel->_CmdBuffer[0].ClipRect)));
+                    channel->_CmdBuffer[0].ClipRect = merge_clip_rect.ToVec4();
+                    memcpy(dst_tmp++, channel, sizeof(ImDrawChannel));
+                }
+            }
+
+            // Make sure Bg2DrawChannelUnfrozen appears in the middle of our groups (whereas Bg0/Bg1 and Bg2 frozen are fixed to 0 and 1)
+            if (merge_group_n == 1 && has_freeze_v)
+                memcpy(dst_tmp++, &splitter->_Channels[table->Bg2DrawChannelUnfrozen], sizeof(ImDrawChannel));
+        }
+
+        // Append unmergeable channels that we didn't reorder at the end of the list
+        for (int n = 0; n < splitter->_Count && remaining_count != 0; n++)
+        {
+            if (!remaining_mask.TestBit(n))
+                continue;
+            ImDrawChannel* channel = &splitter->_Channels[n];
+            memcpy(dst_tmp++, channel, sizeof(ImDrawChannel));
+            remaining_count--;
+        }
+        IM_ASSERT(dst_tmp == g.DrawChannelsTempMergeBuffer.Data + g.DrawChannelsTempMergeBuffer.Size);
+        memcpy(splitter->_Channels.Data + LEADING_DRAW_CHANNELS, g.DrawChannelsTempMergeBuffer.Data, (splitter->_Count - LEADING_DRAW_CHANNELS) * sizeof(ImDrawChannel));
+    }
+}
+
+// FIXME-TABLE: This is a mess, need to redesign how we render borders (as some are also done in TableEndRow)
+void ImGui::TableDrawBorders(ImGuiTable* table)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* inner_window = table->InnerWindow;
+    if (!table->OuterWindow->ClipRect.Overlaps(table->OuterRect))
+        return;
+
+    ImDrawList* inner_drawlist = inner_window->DrawList;
+    table->DrawSplitter->SetCurrentChannel(inner_drawlist, TABLE_DRAW_CHANNEL_BG0);
+    inner_drawlist->PushClipRect(table->Bg0ClipRectForDrawCmd.Min, table->Bg0ClipRectForDrawCmd.Max, false);
+
+    // Draw inner border and resizing feedback
+    ImGuiTableInstanceData* table_instance = TableGetInstanceData(table, table->InstanceCurrent);
+    const float border_size = TABLE_BORDER_SIZE;
+    const float draw_y1 = table->InnerRect.Min.y;
+    const float draw_y2_body = table->InnerRect.Max.y;
+    const float draw_y2_head = table->IsUsingHeaders ? ImMin(table->InnerRect.Max.y, (table->FreezeRowsCount >= 1 ? table->InnerRect.Min.y : table->WorkRect.Min.y) + table_instance->LastFirstRowHeight) : draw_y1;
+    if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerV)
+    {
+        for (int order_n = 0; order_n < table->ColumnsCount; order_n++)
+        {
+            if (!(table->EnabledMaskByDisplayOrder & ((ImU64)1 << order_n)))
+                continue;
+
+            const int column_n = table->DisplayOrderToIndex[order_n];
+            ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
+            const bool is_hovered = (table->HoveredColumnBorder == column_n);
+            const bool is_resized = (table->ResizedColumn == column_n) && (table->InstanceInteracted == table->InstanceCurrent);
+            const bool is_resizable = (column->Flags & (ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize | ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoDirectResize_)) == 0;
+            const bool is_frozen_separator = (table->FreezeColumnsCount == order_n + 1);
+            if (column->MaxX > table->InnerClipRect.Max.x && !is_resized)
+                continue;
+
+            // Decide whether right-most column is visible
+            if (column->NextEnabledColumn == -1 && !is_resizable)
+                if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_) != ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame || (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoHostExtendX))
+                    continue;
+            if (column->MaxX <= column->ClipRect.Min.x) // FIXME-TABLE FIXME-STYLE: Assume BorderSize==1, this is problematic if we want to increase the border size..
+                continue;
+
+            // Draw in outer window so right-most column won't be clipped
+            // Always draw full height border when being resized/hovered, or on the delimitation of frozen column scrolling.
+            ImU32 col;
+            float draw_y2;
+            if (is_hovered || is_resized || is_frozen_separator)
+            {
+                draw_y2 = draw_y2_body;
+                col = is_resized ? GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive) : is_hovered ? GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered) : table->BorderColorStrong;
+            }
+            else
+            {
+                draw_y2 = (table->Flags & (ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody | ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize)) ? draw_y2_head : draw_y2_body;
+                col = (table->Flags & (ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBody | ImGuiTableFlags_NoBordersInBodyUntilResize)) ? table->BorderColorStrong : table->BorderColorLight;
+            }
+
+            if (draw_y2 > draw_y1)
+                inner_drawlist->AddLine(ImVec2(column->MaxX, draw_y1), ImVec2(column->MaxX, draw_y2), col, border_size);
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Draw outer border
+    // FIXME: could use AddRect or explicit VLine/HLine helper?
+    if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter)
+    {
+        // Display outer border offset by 1 which is a simple way to display it without adding an extra draw call
+        // (Without the offset, in outer_window it would be rendered behind cells, because child windows are above their
+        // parent. In inner_window, it won't reach out over scrollbars. Another weird solution would be to display part
+        // of it in inner window, and the part that's over scrollbars in the outer window..)
+        // Either solution currently won't allow us to use a larger border size: the border would clipped.
+        const ImRect outer_border = table->OuterRect;
+        const ImU32 outer_col = table->BorderColorStrong;
+        if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter) == ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuter)
+        {
+            inner_drawlist->AddRect(outer_border.Min, outer_border.Max, outer_col, 0.0f, 0, border_size);
+        }
+        else if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterV)
+        {
+            inner_drawlist->AddLine(outer_border.Min, ImVec2(outer_border.Min.x, outer_border.Max.y), outer_col, border_size);
+            inner_drawlist->AddLine(ImVec2(outer_border.Max.x, outer_border.Min.y), outer_border.Max, outer_col, border_size);
+        }
+        else if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersOuterH)
+        {
+            inner_drawlist->AddLine(outer_border.Min, ImVec2(outer_border.Max.x, outer_border.Min.y), outer_col, border_size);
+            inner_drawlist->AddLine(ImVec2(outer_border.Min.x, outer_border.Max.y), outer_border.Max, outer_col, border_size);
+        }
+    }
+    if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_BordersInnerH) && table->RowPosY2 < table->OuterRect.Max.y)
+    {
+        // Draw bottom-most row border
+        const float border_y = table->RowPosY2;
+        if (border_y >= table->BgClipRect.Min.y && border_y < table->BgClipRect.Max.y)
+            inner_drawlist->AddLine(ImVec2(table->BorderX1, border_y), ImVec2(table->BorderX2, border_y), table->BorderColorLight, border_size);
+    }
+
+    inner_drawlist->PopClipRect();
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Tables: Sorting
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - TableGetSortSpecs()
+// - TableFixColumnSortDirection() [Internal]
+// - TableGetColumnNextSortDirection() [Internal]
+// - TableSetColumnSortDirection() [Internal]
+// - TableSortSpecsSanitize() [Internal]
+// - TableSortSpecsBuild() [Internal]
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Return NULL if no sort specs (most often when ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable is not set)
+// You can sort your data again when 'SpecsChanged == true'. It will be true with sorting specs have changed since
+// last call, or the first time.
+// Lifetime: don't hold on this pointer over multiple frames or past any subsequent call to BeginTable()!
+ImGuiTableSortSpecs* ImGui::TableGetSortSpecs()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable;
+    IM_ASSERT(table != NULL);
+
+    if (!(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable))
+        return NULL;
+
+    // Require layout (in case TableHeadersRow() hasn't been called) as it may alter IsSortSpecsDirty in some paths.
+    if (!table->IsLayoutLocked)
+        TableUpdateLayout(table);
+
+    TableSortSpecsBuild(table);
+
+    return &table->SortSpecs;
+}
+
+static inline ImGuiSortDirection TableGetColumnAvailSortDirection(ImGuiTableColumn* column, int n)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(n < column->SortDirectionsAvailCount);
+    return (column->SortDirectionsAvailList >> (n << 1)) & 0x03;
+}
+
+// Fix sort direction if currently set on a value which is unavailable (e.g. activating NoSortAscending/NoSortDescending)
+void ImGui::TableFixColumnSortDirection(ImGuiTable* table, ImGuiTableColumn* column)
+{
+    if (column->SortOrder == -1 || (column->SortDirectionsAvailMask & (1 << column->SortDirection)) != 0)
+        return;
+    column->SortDirection = (ImU8)TableGetColumnAvailSortDirection(column, 0);
+    table->IsSortSpecsDirty = true;
+}
+
+// Calculate next sort direction that would be set after clicking the column
+// - If the PreferSortDescending flag is set, we will default to a Descending direction on the first click.
+// - Note that the PreferSortAscending flag is never checked, it is essentially the default and therefore a no-op.
+IM_STATIC_ASSERT(ImGuiSortDirection_None == 0 && ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending == 1 && ImGuiSortDirection_Descending == 2);
+ImGuiSortDirection ImGui::TableGetColumnNextSortDirection(ImGuiTableColumn* column)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(column->SortDirectionsAvailCount > 0);
+    if (column->SortOrder == -1)
+        return TableGetColumnAvailSortDirection(column, 0);
+    for (int n = 0; n < 3; n++)
+        if (column->SortDirection == TableGetColumnAvailSortDirection(column, n))
+            return TableGetColumnAvailSortDirection(column, (n + 1) % column->SortDirectionsAvailCount);
+    IM_ASSERT(0);
+    return ImGuiSortDirection_None;
+}
+
+// Note that the NoSortAscending/NoSortDescending flags are processed in TableSortSpecsSanitize(), and they may change/revert
+// the value of SortDirection. We could technically also do it here but it would be unnecessary and duplicate code.
+void ImGui::TableSetColumnSortDirection(int column_n, ImGuiSortDirection sort_direction, bool append_to_sort_specs)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable;
+
+    if (!(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti))
+        append_to_sort_specs = false;
+    if (!(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate))
+        IM_ASSERT(sort_direction != ImGuiSortDirection_None);
+
+    ImGuiTableColumnIdx sort_order_max = 0;
+    if (append_to_sort_specs)
+        for (int other_column_n = 0; other_column_n < table->ColumnsCount; other_column_n++)
+            sort_order_max = ImMax(sort_order_max, table->Columns[other_column_n].SortOrder);
+
+    ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
+    column->SortDirection = (ImU8)sort_direction;
+    if (column->SortDirection == ImGuiSortDirection_None)
+        column->SortOrder = -1;
+    else if (column->SortOrder == -1 || !append_to_sort_specs)
+        column->SortOrder = append_to_sort_specs ? sort_order_max + 1 : 0;
+
+    for (int other_column_n = 0; other_column_n < table->ColumnsCount; other_column_n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiTableColumn* other_column = &table->Columns[other_column_n];
+        if (other_column != column && !append_to_sort_specs)
+            other_column->SortOrder = -1;
+        TableFixColumnSortDirection(table, other_column);
+    }
+    table->IsSettingsDirty = true;
+    table->IsSortSpecsDirty = true;
+}
+
+void ImGui::TableSortSpecsSanitize(ImGuiTable* table)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable);
+
+    // Clear SortOrder from hidden column and verify that there's no gap or duplicate.
+    int sort_order_count = 0;
+    ImU64 sort_order_mask = 0x00;
+    for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
+        if (column->SortOrder != -1 && !column->IsEnabled)
+            column->SortOrder = -1;
+        if (column->SortOrder == -1)
+            continue;
+        sort_order_count++;
+        sort_order_mask |= ((ImU64)1 << column->SortOrder);
+        IM_ASSERT(sort_order_count < (int)sizeof(sort_order_mask) * 8);
+    }
+
+    const bool need_fix_linearize = ((ImU64)1 << sort_order_count) != (sort_order_mask + 1);
+    const bool need_fix_single_sort_order = (sort_order_count > 1) && !(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SortMulti);
+    if (need_fix_linearize || need_fix_single_sort_order)
+    {
+        ImU64 fixed_mask = 0x00;
+        for (int sort_n = 0; sort_n < sort_order_count; sort_n++)
+        {
+            // Fix: Rewrite sort order fields if needed so they have no gap or duplicate.
+            // (e.g. SortOrder 0 disappeared, SortOrder 1..2 exists --> rewrite then as SortOrder 0..1)
+            int column_with_smallest_sort_order = -1;
+            for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++)
+                if ((fixed_mask & ((ImU64)1 << (ImU64)column_n)) == 0 && table->Columns[column_n].SortOrder != -1)
+                    if (column_with_smallest_sort_order == -1 || table->Columns[column_n].SortOrder < table->Columns[column_with_smallest_sort_order].SortOrder)
+                        column_with_smallest_sort_order = column_n;
+            IM_ASSERT(column_with_smallest_sort_order != -1);
+            fixed_mask |= ((ImU64)1 << column_with_smallest_sort_order);
+            table->Columns[column_with_smallest_sort_order].SortOrder = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)sort_n;
+
+            // Fix: Make sure only one column has a SortOrder if ImGuiTableFlags_MultiSortable is not set.
+            if (need_fix_single_sort_order)
+            {
+                sort_order_count = 1;
+                for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++)
+                    if (column_n != column_with_smallest_sort_order)
+                        table->Columns[column_n].SortOrder = -1;
+                break;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Fallback default sort order (if no column had the ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultSort flag)
+    if (sort_order_count == 0 && !(table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SortTristate))
+        for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++)
+        {
+            ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
+            if (column->IsEnabled && !(column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort))
+            {
+                sort_order_count = 1;
+                column->SortOrder = 0;
+                column->SortDirection = (ImU8)TableGetColumnAvailSortDirection(column, 0);
+                break;
+            }
+        }
+
+    table->SortSpecsCount = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)sort_order_count;
+}
+
+void ImGui::TableSortSpecsBuild(ImGuiTable* table)
+{
+    bool dirty = table->IsSortSpecsDirty;
+    if (dirty)
+    {
+        TableSortSpecsSanitize(table);
+        table->SortSpecsMulti.resize(table->SortSpecsCount <= 1 ? 0 : table->SortSpecsCount);
+        table->SortSpecs.SpecsDirty = true; // Mark as dirty for user
+        table->IsSortSpecsDirty = false; // Mark as not dirty for us
+    }
+
+    // Write output
+    ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs* sort_specs = (table->SortSpecsCount == 0) ? NULL : (table->SortSpecsCount == 1) ? &table->SortSpecsSingle : table->SortSpecsMulti.Data;
+    if (dirty && sort_specs != NULL)
+        for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++)
+        {
+            ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
+            if (column->SortOrder == -1)
+                continue;
+            IM_ASSERT(column->SortOrder < table->SortSpecsCount);
+            ImGuiTableColumnSortSpecs* sort_spec = &sort_specs[column->SortOrder];
+            sort_spec->ColumnUserID = column->UserID;
+            sort_spec->ColumnIndex = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n;
+            sort_spec->SortOrder = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column->SortOrder;
+            sort_spec->SortDirection = column->SortDirection;
+        }
+
+    table->SortSpecs.Specs = sort_specs;
+    table->SortSpecs.SpecsCount = table->SortSpecsCount;
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Tables: Headers
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - TableGetHeaderRowHeight() [Internal]
+// - TableHeadersRow()
+// - TableHeader()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+float ImGui::TableGetHeaderRowHeight()
+{
+    // Caring for a minor edge case:
+    // Calculate row height, for the unlikely case that some labels may be taller than others.
+    // If we didn't do that, uneven header height would highlight but smaller one before the tallest wouldn't catch input for all height.
+    // In your custom header row you may omit this all together and just call TableNextRow() without a height...
+    float row_height = GetTextLineHeight();
+    int columns_count = TableGetColumnCount();
+    for (int column_n = 0; column_n < columns_count; column_n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiTableColumnFlags flags = TableGetColumnFlags(column_n);
+        if ((flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_IsEnabled) && !(flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHeaderLabel))
+            row_height = ImMax(row_height, CalcTextSize(TableGetColumnName(column_n)).y);
+    }
+    row_height += GetStyle().CellPadding.y * 2.0f;
+    return row_height;
+}
+
+// [Public] This is a helper to output TableHeader() calls based on the column names declared in TableSetupColumn().
+// The intent is that advanced users willing to create customized headers would not need to use this helper
+// and can create their own! For example: TableHeader() may be preceeded by Checkbox() or other custom widgets.
+// See 'Demo->Tables->Custom headers' for a demonstration of implementing a custom version of this.
+// This code is constructed to not make much use of internal functions, as it is intended to be a template to copy.
+// FIXME-TABLE: TableOpenContextMenu() and TableGetHeaderRowHeight() are not public.
+void ImGui::TableHeadersRow()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable;
+    IM_ASSERT(table != NULL && "Need to call TableHeadersRow() after BeginTable()!");
+
+    // Layout if not already done (this is automatically done by TableNextRow, we do it here solely to facilitate stepping in debugger as it is frequent to step in TableUpdateLayout)
+    if (!table->IsLayoutLocked)
+        TableUpdateLayout(table);
+
+    // Open row
+    const float row_y1 = GetCursorScreenPos().y;
+    const float row_height = TableGetHeaderRowHeight();
+    TableNextRow(ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers, row_height);
+    if (table->HostSkipItems) // Merely an optimization, you may skip in your own code.
+        return;
+
+    const int columns_count = TableGetColumnCount();
+    for (int column_n = 0; column_n < columns_count; column_n++)
+    {
+        if (!TableSetColumnIndex(column_n))
+            continue;
+
+        // Push an id to allow unnamed labels (generally accidental, but let's behave nicely with them)
+        // - in your own code you may omit the PushID/PopID all-together, provided you know they won't collide
+        // - table->InstanceCurrent is only >0 when we use multiple BeginTable/EndTable calls with same identifier.
+        const char* name = (TableGetColumnFlags(column_n) & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHeaderLabel) ? "" : TableGetColumnName(column_n);
+        PushID(table->InstanceCurrent * table->ColumnsCount + column_n);
+        TableHeader(name);
+        PopID();
+    }
+
+    // Allow opening popup from the right-most section after the last column.
+    ImVec2 mouse_pos = ImGui::GetMousePos();
+    if (IsMouseReleased(1) && TableGetHoveredColumn() == columns_count)
+        if (mouse_pos.y >= row_y1 && mouse_pos.y < row_y1 + row_height)
+            TableOpenContextMenu(-1); // Will open a non-column-specific popup.
+}
+
+// Emit a column header (text + optional sort order)
+// We cpu-clip text here so that all columns headers can be merged into a same draw call.
+// Note that because of how we cpu-clip and display sorting indicators, you _cannot_ use SameLine() after a TableHeader()
+void ImGui::TableHeader(const char* label)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return;
+
+    ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable;
+    IM_ASSERT(table != NULL && "Need to call TableHeader() after BeginTable()!");
+    IM_ASSERT(table->CurrentColumn != -1);
+    const int column_n = table->CurrentColumn;
+    ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
+
+    // Label
+    if (label == NULL)
+        label = "";
+    const char* label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
+    ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, label_end, true);
+    ImVec2 label_pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+
+    // If we already got a row height, there's use that.
+    // FIXME-TABLE: Padding problem if the correct outer-padding CellBgRect strays off our ClipRect?
+    ImRect cell_r = TableGetCellBgRect(table, column_n);
+    float label_height = ImMax(label_size.y, table->RowMinHeight - table->CellPaddingY * 2.0f);
+
+    // Calculate ideal size for sort order arrow
+    float w_arrow = 0.0f;
+    float w_sort_text = 0.0f;
+    char sort_order_suf[4] = "";
+    const float ARROW_SCALE = 0.65f;
+    if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable) && !(column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort))
+    {
+        w_arrow = ImFloor(g.FontSize * ARROW_SCALE + g.Style.FramePadding.x);
+        if (column->SortOrder > 0)
+        {
+            ImFormatString(sort_order_suf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(sort_order_suf), "%d", column->SortOrder + 1);
+            w_sort_text = g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + CalcTextSize(sort_order_suf).x;
+        }
+    }
+
+    // We feed our unclipped width to the column without writing on CursorMaxPos, so that column is still considering for merging.
+    float max_pos_x = label_pos.x + label_size.x + w_sort_text + w_arrow;
+    column->ContentMaxXHeadersUsed = ImMax(column->ContentMaxXHeadersUsed, column->WorkMaxX);
+    column->ContentMaxXHeadersIdeal = ImMax(column->ContentMaxXHeadersIdeal, max_pos_x);
+
+    // Keep header highlighted when context menu is open.
+    const bool selected = (table->IsContextPopupOpen && table->ContextPopupColumn == column_n && table->InstanceInteracted == table->InstanceCurrent);
+    ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
+    ImRect bb(cell_r.Min.x, cell_r.Min.y, cell_r.Max.x, ImMax(cell_r.Max.y, cell_r.Min.y + label_height + g.Style.CellPadding.y * 2.0f));
+    ItemSize(ImVec2(0.0f, label_height)); // Don't declare unclipped width, it'll be fed ContentMaxPosHeadersIdeal
+    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
+        return;
+
+    //GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(cell_r.Min, cell_r.Max, IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 255)); // [DEBUG]
+    //GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 255)); // [DEBUG]
+
+    // Using AllowItemOverlap mode because we cover the whole cell, and we want user to be able to submit subsequent items.
+    bool hovered, held;
+    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap);
+    if (g.ActiveId != id)
+        SetItemAllowOverlap();
+    if (held || hovered || selected)
+    {
+        const ImU32 col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_HeaderActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered : ImGuiCol_Header);
+        //RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, false, 0.0f);
+        TableSetBgColor(ImGuiTableBgTarget_CellBg, col, table->CurrentColumn);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Submit single cell bg color in the case we didn't submit a full header row
+        if ((table->RowFlags & ImGuiTableRowFlags_Headers) == 0)
+            TableSetBgColor(ImGuiTableBgTarget_CellBg, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TableHeaderBg), table->CurrentColumn);
+    }
+    RenderNavHighlight(bb, id, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin | ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_NoRounding);
+    if (held)
+        table->HeldHeaderColumn = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n;
+    window->DC.CursorPos.y -= g.Style.ItemSpacing.y * 0.5f;
+
+    // Drag and drop to re-order columns.
+    // FIXME-TABLE: Scroll request while reordering a column and it lands out of the scrolling zone.
+    if (held && (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable) && IsMouseDragging(0) && !g.DragDropActive)
+    {
+        // While moving a column it will jump on the other side of the mouse, so we also test for MouseDelta.x
+        table->ReorderColumn = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n;
+        table->InstanceInteracted = table->InstanceCurrent;
+
+        // We don't reorder: through the frozen<>unfrozen line, or through a column that is marked with ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoReorder.
+        if (g.IO.MouseDelta.x < 0.0f && g.IO.MousePos.x < cell_r.Min.x)
+            if (ImGuiTableColumn* prev_column = (column->PrevEnabledColumn != -1) ? &table->Columns[column->PrevEnabledColumn] : NULL)
+                if (!((column->Flags | prev_column->Flags) & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoReorder))
+                    if ((column->IndexWithinEnabledSet < table->FreezeColumnsRequest) == (prev_column->IndexWithinEnabledSet < table->FreezeColumnsRequest))
+                        table->ReorderColumnDir = -1;
+        if (g.IO.MouseDelta.x > 0.0f && g.IO.MousePos.x > cell_r.Max.x)
+            if (ImGuiTableColumn* next_column = (column->NextEnabledColumn != -1) ? &table->Columns[column->NextEnabledColumn] : NULL)
+                if (!((column->Flags | next_column->Flags) & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoReorder))
+                    if ((column->IndexWithinEnabledSet < table->FreezeColumnsRequest) == (next_column->IndexWithinEnabledSet < table->FreezeColumnsRequest))
+                        table->ReorderColumnDir = +1;
+    }
+
+    // Sort order arrow
+    const float ellipsis_max = cell_r.Max.x - w_arrow - w_sort_text;
+    if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable) && !(column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort))
+    {
+        if (column->SortOrder != -1)
+        {
+            float x = ImMax(cell_r.Min.x, cell_r.Max.x - w_arrow - w_sort_text);
+            float y = label_pos.y;
+            if (column->SortOrder > 0)
+            {
+                PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text, 0.70f));
+                RenderText(ImVec2(x + g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, y), sort_order_suf);
+                PopStyleColor();
+                x += w_sort_text;
+            }
+            RenderArrow(window->DrawList, ImVec2(x, y), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), column->SortDirection == ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending ? ImGuiDir_Up : ImGuiDir_Down, ARROW_SCALE);
+        }
+
+        // Handle clicking on column header to adjust Sort Order
+        if (pressed && table->ReorderColumn != column_n)
+        {
+            ImGuiSortDirection sort_direction = TableGetColumnNextSortDirection(column);
+            TableSetColumnSortDirection(column_n, sort_direction, g.IO.KeyShift);
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Render clipped label. Clipping here ensure that in the majority of situations, all our header cells will
+    // be merged into a single draw call.
+    //window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(ImVec2(ellipsis_max, label_pos.y), 40, IM_COL32_WHITE);
+    RenderTextEllipsis(window->DrawList, label_pos, ImVec2(ellipsis_max, label_pos.y + label_height + g.Style.FramePadding.y), ellipsis_max, ellipsis_max, label, label_end, &label_size);
+
+    const bool text_clipped = label_size.x > (ellipsis_max - label_pos.x);
+    if (text_clipped && hovered && g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer > g.TooltipSlowDelay)
+        SetTooltip("%.*s", (int)(label_end - label), label);
+
+    // We don't use BeginPopupContextItem() because we want the popup to stay up even after the column is hidden
+    if (IsMouseReleased(1) && IsItemHovered())
+        TableOpenContextMenu(column_n);
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Tables: Context Menu
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - TableOpenContextMenu() [Internal]
+// - TableDrawContextMenu() [Internal]
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Use -1 to open menu not specific to a given column.
+void ImGui::TableOpenContextMenu(int column_n)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable;
+    if (column_n == -1 && table->CurrentColumn != -1)   // When called within a column automatically use this one (for consistency)
+        column_n = table->CurrentColumn;
+    if (column_n == table->ColumnsCount)                // To facilitate using with TableGetHoveredColumn()
+        column_n = -1;
+    IM_ASSERT(column_n >= -1 && column_n < table->ColumnsCount);
+    if (table->Flags & (ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable | ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable | ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable))
+    {
+        table->IsContextPopupOpen = true;
+        table->ContextPopupColumn = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n;
+        table->InstanceInteracted = table->InstanceCurrent;
+        const ImGuiID context_menu_id = ImHashStr("##ContextMenu", 0, table->ID);
+        OpenPopupEx(context_menu_id, ImGuiPopupFlags_None);
+    }
+}
+
+bool ImGui::TableBeginContextMenuPopup(ImGuiTable* table)
+{
+    if (!table->IsContextPopupOpen || table->InstanceCurrent != table->InstanceInteracted)
+        return false;
+    const ImGuiID context_menu_id = ImHashStr("##ContextMenu", 0, table->ID);
+    if (BeginPopupEx(context_menu_id, ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings))
+        return true;
+    table->IsContextPopupOpen = false;
+    return false;
+}
+
+// Output context menu into current window (generally a popup)
+// FIXME-TABLE: Ideally this should be writable by the user. Full programmatic access to that data?
+void ImGui::TableDrawContextMenu(ImGuiTable* table)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return;
+
+    bool want_separator = false;
+    const int column_n = (table->ContextPopupColumn >= 0 && table->ContextPopupColumn < table->ColumnsCount) ? table->ContextPopupColumn : -1;
+    ImGuiTableColumn* column = (column_n != -1) ? &table->Columns[column_n] : NULL;
+
+    // Sizing
+    if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable)
+    {
+        if (column != NULL)
+        {
+            const bool can_resize = !(column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize) && column->IsEnabled;
+            if (MenuItem("Size column to fit###SizeOne", NULL, false, can_resize))
+                TableSetColumnWidthAutoSingle(table, column_n);
+        }
+
+        const char* size_all_desc;
+        if (table->ColumnsEnabledFixedCount == table->ColumnsEnabledCount && (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_) != ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame)
+            size_all_desc = "Size all columns to fit###SizeAll";        // All fixed
+        else
+            size_all_desc = "Size all columns to default###SizeAll";    // All stretch or mixed
+        if (MenuItem(size_all_desc, NULL))
+            TableSetColumnWidthAutoAll(table);
+        want_separator = true;
+    }
+
+    // Ordering
+    if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable)
+    {
+        if (MenuItem("Reset order", NULL, false, !table->IsDefaultDisplayOrder))
+            table->IsResetDisplayOrderRequest = true;
+        want_separator = true;
+    }
+
+    // Reset all (should work but seems unnecessary/noisy to expose?)
+    //if (MenuItem("Reset all"))
+    //    table->IsResetAllRequest = true;
+
+    // Sorting
+    // (modify TableOpenContextMenu() to add _Sortable flag if enabling this)
+#if 0
+    if ((table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable) && column != NULL && (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSort) == 0)
+    {
+        if (want_separator)
+            Separator();
+        want_separator = true;
+
+        bool append_to_sort_specs = g.IO.KeyShift;
+        if (MenuItem("Sort in Ascending Order", NULL, column->SortOrder != -1 && column->SortDirection == ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending, (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortAscending) == 0))
+            TableSetColumnSortDirection(table, column_n, ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending, append_to_sort_specs);
+        if (MenuItem("Sort in Descending Order", NULL, column->SortOrder != -1 && column->SortDirection == ImGuiSortDirection_Descending, (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoSortDescending) == 0))
+            TableSetColumnSortDirection(table, column_n, ImGuiSortDirection_Descending, append_to_sort_specs);
+    }
+#endif
+
+    // Hiding / Visibility
+    if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable)
+    {
+        if (want_separator)
+            Separator();
+        want_separator = true;
+
+        PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_SelectableDontClosePopup, true);
+        for (int other_column_n = 0; other_column_n < table->ColumnsCount; other_column_n++)
+        {
+            ImGuiTableColumn* other_column = &table->Columns[other_column_n];
+            if (other_column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_Disabled)
+                continue;
+
+            const char* name = TableGetColumnName(table, other_column_n);
+            if (name == NULL || name[0] == 0)
+                name = "<Unknown>";
+
+            // Make sure we can't hide the last active column
+            bool menu_item_active = (other_column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoHide) ? false : true;
+            if (other_column->IsUserEnabled && table->ColumnsEnabledCount <= 1)
+                menu_item_active = false;
+            if (MenuItem(name, NULL, other_column->IsUserEnabled, menu_item_active))
+                other_column->IsUserEnabledNextFrame = !other_column->IsUserEnabled;
+        }
+        PopItemFlag();
+    }
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Tables: Settings (.ini data)
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// FIXME: The binding/finding/creating flow are too confusing.
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - TableSettingsInit() [Internal]
+// - TableSettingsCalcChunkSize() [Internal]
+// - TableSettingsCreate() [Internal]
+// - TableSettingsFindByID() [Internal]
+// - TableGetBoundSettings() [Internal]
+// - TableResetSettings()
+// - TableSaveSettings() [Internal]
+// - TableLoadSettings() [Internal]
+// - TableSettingsHandler_ClearAll() [Internal]
+// - TableSettingsHandler_ApplyAll() [Internal]
+// - TableSettingsHandler_ReadOpen() [Internal]
+// - TableSettingsHandler_ReadLine() [Internal]
+// - TableSettingsHandler_WriteAll() [Internal]
+// - TableSettingsInstallHandler() [Internal]
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [Init] 1: TableSettingsHandler_ReadXXXX()   Load and parse .ini file into TableSettings.
+// [Main] 2: TableLoadSettings()               When table is created, bind Table to TableSettings, serialize TableSettings data into Table.
+// [Main] 3: TableSaveSettings()               When table properties are modified, serialize Table data into bound or new TableSettings, mark .ini as dirty.
+// [Main] 4: TableSettingsHandler_WriteAll()   When .ini file is dirty (which can come from other source), save TableSettings into .ini file.
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Clear and initialize empty settings instance
+static void TableSettingsInit(ImGuiTableSettings* settings, ImGuiID id, int columns_count, int columns_count_max)
+{
+    IM_PLACEMENT_NEW(settings) ImGuiTableSettings();
+    ImGuiTableColumnSettings* settings_column = settings->GetColumnSettings();
+    for (int n = 0; n < columns_count_max; n++, settings_column++)
+        IM_PLACEMENT_NEW(settings_column) ImGuiTableColumnSettings();
+    settings->ID = id;
+    settings->ColumnsCount = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)columns_count;
+    settings->ColumnsCountMax = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)columns_count_max;
+    settings->WantApply = true;
+}
+
+static size_t TableSettingsCalcChunkSize(int columns_count)
+{
+    return sizeof(ImGuiTableSettings) + (size_t)columns_count * sizeof(ImGuiTableColumnSettings);
+}
+
+ImGuiTableSettings* ImGui::TableSettingsCreate(ImGuiID id, int columns_count)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiTableSettings* settings = g.SettingsTables.alloc_chunk(TableSettingsCalcChunkSize(columns_count));
+    TableSettingsInit(settings, id, columns_count, columns_count);
+    return settings;
+}
+
+// Find existing settings
+ImGuiTableSettings* ImGui::TableSettingsFindByID(ImGuiID id)
+{
+    // FIXME-OPT: Might want to store a lookup map for this?
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    for (ImGuiTableSettings* settings = g.SettingsTables.begin(); settings != NULL; settings = g.SettingsTables.next_chunk(settings))
+        if (settings->ID == id)
+            return settings;
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+// Get settings for a given table, NULL if none
+ImGuiTableSettings* ImGui::TableGetBoundSettings(ImGuiTable* table)
+{
+    if (table->SettingsOffset != -1)
+    {
+        ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+        ImGuiTableSettings* settings = g.SettingsTables.ptr_from_offset(table->SettingsOffset);
+        IM_ASSERT(settings->ID == table->ID);
+        if (settings->ColumnsCountMax >= table->ColumnsCount)
+            return settings; // OK
+        settings->ID = 0; // Invalidate storage, we won't fit because of a count change
+    }
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+// Restore initial state of table (with or without saved settings)
+void ImGui::TableResetSettings(ImGuiTable* table)
+{
+    table->IsInitializing = table->IsSettingsDirty = true;
+    table->IsResetAllRequest = false;
+    table->IsSettingsRequestLoad = false;                   // Don't reload from ini
+    table->SettingsLoadedFlags = ImGuiTableFlags_None;      // Mark as nothing loaded so our initialized data becomes authoritative
+}
+
+void ImGui::TableSaveSettings(ImGuiTable* table)
+{
+    table->IsSettingsDirty = false;
+    if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoSavedSettings)
+        return;
+
+    // Bind or create settings data
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiTableSettings* settings = TableGetBoundSettings(table);
+    if (settings == NULL)
+    {
+        settings = TableSettingsCreate(table->ID, table->ColumnsCount);
+        table->SettingsOffset = g.SettingsTables.offset_from_ptr(settings);
+    }
+    settings->ColumnsCount = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)table->ColumnsCount;
+
+    // Serialize ImGuiTable/ImGuiTableColumn into ImGuiTableSettings/ImGuiTableColumnSettings
+    IM_ASSERT(settings->ID == table->ID);
+    IM_ASSERT(settings->ColumnsCount == table->ColumnsCount && settings->ColumnsCountMax >= settings->ColumnsCount);
+    ImGuiTableColumn* column = table->Columns.Data;
+    ImGuiTableColumnSettings* column_settings = settings->GetColumnSettings();
+
+    bool save_ref_scale = false;
+    settings->SaveFlags = ImGuiTableFlags_None;
+    for (int n = 0; n < table->ColumnsCount; n++, column++, column_settings++)
+    {
+        const float width_or_weight = (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch) ? column->StretchWeight : column->WidthRequest;
+        column_settings->WidthOrWeight = width_or_weight;
+        column_settings->Index = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)n;
+        column_settings->DisplayOrder = column->DisplayOrder;
+        column_settings->SortOrder = column->SortOrder;
+        column_settings->SortDirection = column->SortDirection;
+        column_settings->IsEnabled = column->IsUserEnabled;
+        column_settings->IsStretch = (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch) ? 1 : 0;
+        if ((column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch) == 0)
+            save_ref_scale = true;
+
+        // We skip saving some data in the .ini file when they are unnecessary to restore our state.
+        // Note that fixed width where initial width was derived from auto-fit will always be saved as InitStretchWeightOrWidth will be 0.0f.
+        // FIXME-TABLE: We don't have logic to easily compare SortOrder to DefaultSortOrder yet so it's always saved when present.
+        if (width_or_weight != column->InitStretchWeightOrWidth)
+            settings->SaveFlags |= ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable;
+        if (column->DisplayOrder != n)
+            settings->SaveFlags |= ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable;
+        if (column->SortOrder != -1)
+            settings->SaveFlags |= ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable;
+        if (column->IsUserEnabled != ((column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_DefaultHide) == 0))
+            settings->SaveFlags |= ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable;
+    }
+    settings->SaveFlags &= table->Flags;
+    settings->RefScale = save_ref_scale ? table->RefScale : 0.0f;
+
+    MarkIniSettingsDirty();
+}
+
+void ImGui::TableLoadSettings(ImGuiTable* table)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    table->IsSettingsRequestLoad = false;
+    if (table->Flags & ImGuiTableFlags_NoSavedSettings)
+        return;
+
+    // Bind settings
+    ImGuiTableSettings* settings;
+    if (table->SettingsOffset == -1)
+    {
+        settings = TableSettingsFindByID(table->ID);
+        if (settings == NULL)
+            return;
+        if (settings->ColumnsCount != table->ColumnsCount) // Allow settings if columns count changed. We could otherwise decide to return...
+            table->IsSettingsDirty = true;
+        table->SettingsOffset = g.SettingsTables.offset_from_ptr(settings);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        settings = TableGetBoundSettings(table);
+    }
+
+    table->SettingsLoadedFlags = settings->SaveFlags;
+    table->RefScale = settings->RefScale;
+
+    // Serialize ImGuiTableSettings/ImGuiTableColumnSettings into ImGuiTable/ImGuiTableColumn
+    ImGuiTableColumnSettings* column_settings = settings->GetColumnSettings();
+    ImU64 display_order_mask = 0;
+    for (int data_n = 0; data_n < settings->ColumnsCount; data_n++, column_settings++)
+    {
+        int column_n = column_settings->Index;
+        if (column_n < 0 || column_n >= table->ColumnsCount)
+            continue;
+
+        ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[column_n];
+        if (settings->SaveFlags & ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable)
+        {
+            if (column_settings->IsStretch)
+                column->StretchWeight = column_settings->WidthOrWeight;
+            else
+                column->WidthRequest = column_settings->WidthOrWeight;
+            column->AutoFitQueue = 0x00;
+        }
+        if (settings->SaveFlags & ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable)
+            column->DisplayOrder = column_settings->DisplayOrder;
+        else
+            column->DisplayOrder = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n;
+        display_order_mask |= (ImU64)1 << column->DisplayOrder;
+        column->IsUserEnabled = column->IsUserEnabledNextFrame = column_settings->IsEnabled;
+        column->SortOrder = column_settings->SortOrder;
+        column->SortDirection = column_settings->SortDirection;
+    }
+
+    // Validate and fix invalid display order data
+    const ImU64 expected_display_order_mask = (settings->ColumnsCount == 64) ? ~0 : ((ImU64)1 << settings->ColumnsCount) - 1;
+    if (display_order_mask != expected_display_order_mask)
+        for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++)
+            table->Columns[column_n].DisplayOrder = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n;
+
+    // Rebuild index
+    for (int column_n = 0; column_n < table->ColumnsCount; column_n++)
+        table->DisplayOrderToIndex[table->Columns[column_n].DisplayOrder] = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n;
+}
+
+static void TableSettingsHandler_ClearAll(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler*)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+    for (int i = 0; i != g.Tables.GetMapSize(); i++)
+        if (ImGuiTable* table = g.Tables.TryGetMapData(i))
+            table->SettingsOffset = -1;
+    g.SettingsTables.clear();
+}
+
+// Apply to existing windows (if any)
+static void TableSettingsHandler_ApplyAll(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler*)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+    for (int i = 0; i != g.Tables.GetMapSize(); i++)
+        if (ImGuiTable* table = g.Tables.TryGetMapData(i))
+        {
+            table->IsSettingsRequestLoad = true;
+            table->SettingsOffset = -1;
+        }
+}
+
+static void* TableSettingsHandler_ReadOpen(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*, const char* name)
+{
+    ImGuiID id = 0;
+    int columns_count = 0;
+    if (sscanf(name, "0x%08X,%d", &id, &columns_count) < 2)
+        return NULL;
+
+    if (ImGuiTableSettings* settings = ImGui::TableSettingsFindByID(id))
+    {
+        if (settings->ColumnsCountMax >= columns_count)
+        {
+            TableSettingsInit(settings, id, columns_count, settings->ColumnsCountMax); // Recycle
+            return settings;
+        }
+        settings->ID = 0; // Invalidate storage, we won't fit because of a count change
+    }
+    return ImGui::TableSettingsCreate(id, columns_count);
+}
+
+static void TableSettingsHandler_ReadLine(ImGuiContext*, ImGuiSettingsHandler*, void* entry, const char* line)
+{
+    // "Column 0  UserID=0x42AD2D21 Width=100 Visible=1 Order=0 Sort=0v"
+    ImGuiTableSettings* settings = (ImGuiTableSettings*)entry;
+    float f = 0.0f;
+    int column_n = 0, r = 0, n = 0;
+
+    if (sscanf(line, "RefScale=%f", &f) == 1) { settings->RefScale = f; return; }
+
+    if (sscanf(line, "Column %d%n", &column_n, &r) == 1)
+    {
+        if (column_n < 0 || column_n >= settings->ColumnsCount)
+            return;
+        line = ImStrSkipBlank(line + r);
+        char c = 0;
+        ImGuiTableColumnSettings* column = settings->GetColumnSettings() + column_n;
+        column->Index = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)column_n;
+        if (sscanf(line, "UserID=0x%08X%n", (ImU32*)&n, &r)==1) { line = ImStrSkipBlank(line + r); column->UserID = (ImGuiID)n; }
+        if (sscanf(line, "Width=%d%n", &n, &r) == 1)            { line = ImStrSkipBlank(line + r); column->WidthOrWeight = (float)n; column->IsStretch = 0; settings->SaveFlags |= ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable; }
+        if (sscanf(line, "Weight=%f%n", &f, &r) == 1)           { line = ImStrSkipBlank(line + r); column->WidthOrWeight = f; column->IsStretch = 1; settings->SaveFlags |= ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable; }
+        if (sscanf(line, "Visible=%d%n", &n, &r) == 1)          { line = ImStrSkipBlank(line + r); column->IsEnabled = (ImU8)n; settings->SaveFlags |= ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable; }
+        if (sscanf(line, "Order=%d%n", &n, &r) == 1)            { line = ImStrSkipBlank(line + r); column->DisplayOrder = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)n; settings->SaveFlags |= ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable; }
+        if (sscanf(line, "Sort=%d%c%n", &n, &c, &r) == 2)       { line = ImStrSkipBlank(line + r); column->SortOrder = (ImGuiTableColumnIdx)n; column->SortDirection = (c == '^') ? ImGuiSortDirection_Descending : ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending; settings->SaveFlags |= ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable; }
+    }
+}
+
+static void TableSettingsHandler_WriteAll(ImGuiContext* ctx, ImGuiSettingsHandler* handler, ImGuiTextBuffer* buf)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *ctx;
+    for (ImGuiTableSettings* settings = g.SettingsTables.begin(); settings != NULL; settings = g.SettingsTables.next_chunk(settings))
+    {
+        if (settings->ID == 0) // Skip ditched settings
+            continue;
+
+        // TableSaveSettings() may clear some of those flags when we establish that the data can be stripped
+        // (e.g. Order was unchanged)
+        const bool save_size    = (settings->SaveFlags & ImGuiTableFlags_Resizable) != 0;
+        const bool save_visible = (settings->SaveFlags & ImGuiTableFlags_Hideable) != 0;
+        const bool save_order   = (settings->SaveFlags & ImGuiTableFlags_Reorderable) != 0;
+        const bool save_sort    = (settings->SaveFlags & ImGuiTableFlags_Sortable) != 0;
+        if (!save_size && !save_visible && !save_order && !save_sort)
+            continue;
+
+        buf->reserve(buf->size() + 30 + settings->ColumnsCount * 50); // ballpark reserve
+        buf->appendf("[%s][0x%08X,%d]\n", handler->TypeName, settings->ID, settings->ColumnsCount);
+        if (settings->RefScale != 0.0f)
+            buf->appendf("RefScale=%g\n", settings->RefScale);
+        ImGuiTableColumnSettings* column = settings->GetColumnSettings();
+        for (int column_n = 0; column_n < settings->ColumnsCount; column_n++, column++)
+        {
+            // "Column 0  UserID=0x42AD2D21 Width=100 Visible=1 Order=0 Sort=0v"
+            bool save_column = column->UserID != 0 || save_size || save_visible || save_order || (save_sort && column->SortOrder != -1);
+            if (!save_column)
+                continue;
+            buf->appendf("Column %-2d", column_n);
+            if (column->UserID != 0)                    buf->appendf(" UserID=%08X", column->UserID);
+            if (save_size && column->IsStretch)         buf->appendf(" Weight=%.4f", column->WidthOrWeight);
+            if (save_size && !column->IsStretch)        buf->appendf(" Width=%d", (int)column->WidthOrWeight);
+            if (save_visible)                           buf->appendf(" Visible=%d", column->IsEnabled);
+            if (save_order)                             buf->appendf(" Order=%d", column->DisplayOrder);
+            if (save_sort && column->SortOrder != -1)   buf->appendf(" Sort=%d%c", column->SortOrder, (column->SortDirection == ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending) ? 'v' : '^');
+            buf->append("\n");
+        }
+        buf->append("\n");
+    }
+}
+
+void ImGui::TableSettingsAddSettingsHandler()
+{
+    ImGuiSettingsHandler ini_handler;
+    ini_handler.TypeName = "Table";
+    ini_handler.TypeHash = ImHashStr("Table");
+    ini_handler.ClearAllFn = TableSettingsHandler_ClearAll;
+    ini_handler.ReadOpenFn = TableSettingsHandler_ReadOpen;
+    ini_handler.ReadLineFn = TableSettingsHandler_ReadLine;
+    ini_handler.ApplyAllFn = TableSettingsHandler_ApplyAll;
+    ini_handler.WriteAllFn = TableSettingsHandler_WriteAll;
+    AddSettingsHandler(&ini_handler);
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Tables: Garbage Collection
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - TableRemove() [Internal]
+// - TableGcCompactTransientBuffers() [Internal]
+// - TableGcCompactSettings() [Internal]
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Remove Table (currently only used by TestEngine)
+void ImGui::TableRemove(ImGuiTable* table)
+{
+    //IMGUI_DEBUG_PRINT("TableRemove() id=0x%08X\n", table->ID);
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    int table_idx = g.Tables.GetIndex(table);
+    //memset(table->RawData.Data, 0, table->RawData.size_in_bytes());
+    //memset(table, 0, sizeof(ImGuiTable));
+    g.Tables.Remove(table->ID, table);
+    g.TablesLastTimeActive[table_idx] = -1.0f;
+}
+
+// Free up/compact internal Table buffers for when it gets unused
+void ImGui::TableGcCompactTransientBuffers(ImGuiTable* table)
+{
+    //IMGUI_DEBUG_PRINT("TableGcCompactTransientBuffers() id=0x%08X\n", table->ID);
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(table->MemoryCompacted == false);
+    table->SortSpecs.Specs = NULL;
+    table->SortSpecsMulti.clear();
+    table->IsSortSpecsDirty = true; // FIXME: shouldn't have to leak into user performing a sort
+    table->ColumnsNames.clear();
+    table->MemoryCompacted = true;
+    for (int n = 0; n < table->ColumnsCount; n++)
+        table->Columns[n].NameOffset = -1;
+    g.TablesLastTimeActive[g.Tables.GetIndex(table)] = -1.0f;
+}
+
+void ImGui::TableGcCompactTransientBuffers(ImGuiTableTempData* temp_data)
+{
+    temp_data->DrawSplitter.ClearFreeMemory();
+    temp_data->LastTimeActive = -1.0f;
+}
+
+// Compact and remove unused settings data (currently only used by TestEngine)
+void ImGui::TableGcCompactSettings()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    int required_memory = 0;
+    for (ImGuiTableSettings* settings = g.SettingsTables.begin(); settings != NULL; settings = g.SettingsTables.next_chunk(settings))
+        if (settings->ID != 0)
+            required_memory += (int)TableSettingsCalcChunkSize(settings->ColumnsCount);
+    if (required_memory == g.SettingsTables.Buf.Size)
+        return;
+    ImChunkStream<ImGuiTableSettings> new_chunk_stream;
+    new_chunk_stream.Buf.reserve(required_memory);
+    for (ImGuiTableSettings* settings = g.SettingsTables.begin(); settings != NULL; settings = g.SettingsTables.next_chunk(settings))
+        if (settings->ID != 0)
+            memcpy(new_chunk_stream.alloc_chunk(TableSettingsCalcChunkSize(settings->ColumnsCount)), settings, TableSettingsCalcChunkSize(settings->ColumnsCount));
+    g.SettingsTables.swap(new_chunk_stream);
+}
+
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Tables: Debugging
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - DebugNodeTable() [Internal]
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS
+
+static const char* DebugNodeTableGetSizingPolicyDesc(ImGuiTableFlags sizing_policy)
+{
+    sizing_policy &= ImGuiTableFlags_SizingMask_;
+    if (sizing_policy == ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedFit)    { return "FixedFit"; }
+    if (sizing_policy == ImGuiTableFlags_SizingFixedSame)   { return "FixedSame"; }
+    if (sizing_policy == ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchProp) { return "StretchProp"; }
+    if (sizing_policy == ImGuiTableFlags_SizingStretchSame) { return "StretchSame"; }
+    return "N/A";
+}
+
+void ImGui::DebugNodeTable(ImGuiTable* table)
+{
+    char buf[512];
+    char* p = buf;
+    const char* buf_end = buf + IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf);
+    const bool is_active = (table->LastFrameActive >= ImGui::GetFrameCount() - 2); // Note that fully clipped early out scrolling tables will appear as inactive here.
+    ImFormatString(p, buf_end - p, "Table 0x%08X (%d columns, in '%s')%s", table->ID, table->ColumnsCount, table->OuterWindow->Name, is_active ? "" : " *Inactive*");
+    if (!is_active) { PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, GetStyleColorVec4(ImGuiCol_TextDisabled)); }
+    bool open = TreeNode(table, "%s", buf);
+    if (!is_active) { PopStyleColor(); }
+    if (IsItemHovered())
+        GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(table->OuterRect.Min, table->OuterRect.Max, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255));
+    if (IsItemVisible() && table->HoveredColumnBody != -1)
+        GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(GetItemRectMin(), GetItemRectMax(), IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255));
+    if (!open)
+        return;
+    if (table->InstanceCurrent > 0)
+        ImGui::Text("** %d instances of same table! Some data below will refer to last instance.", table->InstanceCurrent + 1);
+    bool clear_settings = SmallButton("Clear settings");
+    BulletText("OuterRect: Pos: (%.1f,%.1f) Size: (%.1f,%.1f) Sizing: '%s'", table->OuterRect.Min.x, table->OuterRect.Min.y, table->OuterRect.GetWidth(), table->OuterRect.GetHeight(), DebugNodeTableGetSizingPolicyDesc(table->Flags));
+    BulletText("ColumnsGivenWidth: %.1f, ColumnsAutoFitWidth: %.1f, InnerWidth: %.1f%s", table->ColumnsGivenWidth, table->ColumnsAutoFitWidth, table->InnerWidth, table->InnerWidth == 0.0f ? " (auto)" : "");
+    BulletText("CellPaddingX: %.1f, CellSpacingX: %.1f/%.1f, OuterPaddingX: %.1f", table->CellPaddingX, table->CellSpacingX1, table->CellSpacingX2, table->OuterPaddingX);
+    BulletText("HoveredColumnBody: %d, HoveredColumnBorder: %d", table->HoveredColumnBody, table->HoveredColumnBorder);
+    BulletText("ResizedColumn: %d, ReorderColumn: %d, HeldHeaderColumn: %d", table->ResizedColumn, table->ReorderColumn, table->HeldHeaderColumn);
+    //BulletText("BgDrawChannels: %d/%d", 0, table->BgDrawChannelUnfrozen);
+    float sum_weights = 0.0f;
+    for (int n = 0; n < table->ColumnsCount; n++)
+        if (table->Columns[n].Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch)
+            sum_weights += table->Columns[n].StretchWeight;
+    for (int n = 0; n < table->ColumnsCount; n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiTableColumn* column = &table->Columns[n];
+        const char* name = TableGetColumnName(table, n);
+        ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf),
+            "Column %d order %d '%s': offset %+.2f to %+.2f%s\n"
+            "Enabled: %d, VisibleX/Y: %d/%d, RequestOutput: %d, SkipItems: %d, DrawChannels: %d,%d\n"
+            "WidthGiven: %.1f, Request/Auto: %.1f/%.1f, StretchWeight: %.3f (%.1f%%)\n"
+            "MinX: %.1f, MaxX: %.1f (%+.1f), ClipRect: %.1f to %.1f (+%.1f)\n"
+            "ContentWidth: %.1f,%.1f, HeadersUsed/Ideal %.1f/%.1f\n"
+            "Sort: %d%s, UserID: 0x%08X, Flags: 0x%04X: %s%s%s..",
+            n, column->DisplayOrder, name, column->MinX - table->WorkRect.Min.x, column->MaxX - table->WorkRect.Min.x, (n < table->FreezeColumnsRequest) ? " (Frozen)" : "",
+            column->IsEnabled, column->IsVisibleX, column->IsVisibleY, column->IsRequestOutput, column->IsSkipItems, column->DrawChannelFrozen, column->DrawChannelUnfrozen,
+            column->WidthGiven, column->WidthRequest, column->WidthAuto, column->StretchWeight, column->StretchWeight > 0.0f ? (column->StretchWeight / sum_weights) * 100.0f : 0.0f,
+            column->MinX, column->MaxX, column->MaxX - column->MinX, column->ClipRect.Min.x, column->ClipRect.Max.x, column->ClipRect.Max.x - column->ClipRect.Min.x,
+            column->ContentMaxXFrozen - column->WorkMinX, column->ContentMaxXUnfrozen - column->WorkMinX, column->ContentMaxXHeadersUsed - column->WorkMinX, column->ContentMaxXHeadersIdeal - column->WorkMinX,
+            column->SortOrder, (column->SortDirection == ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending) ? " (Asc)" : (column->SortDirection == ImGuiSortDirection_Descending) ? " (Des)" : "", column->UserID, column->Flags,
+            (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthStretch) ? "WidthStretch " : "",
+            (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_WidthFixed) ? "WidthFixed " : "",
+            (column->Flags & ImGuiTableColumnFlags_NoResize) ? "NoResize " : "");
+        Bullet();
+        Selectable(buf);
+        if (IsItemHovered())
+        {
+            ImRect r(column->MinX, table->OuterRect.Min.y, column->MaxX, table->OuterRect.Max.y);
+            GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(r.Min, r.Max, IM_COL32(255, 255, 0, 255));
+        }
+    }
+    if (ImGuiTableSettings* settings = TableGetBoundSettings(table))
+        DebugNodeTableSettings(settings);
+    if (clear_settings)
+        table->IsResetAllRequest = true;
+    TreePop();
+}
+
+void ImGui::DebugNodeTableSettings(ImGuiTableSettings* settings)
+{
+    if (!TreeNode((void*)(intptr_t)settings->ID, "Settings 0x%08X (%d columns)", settings->ID, settings->ColumnsCount))
+        return;
+    BulletText("SaveFlags: 0x%08X", settings->SaveFlags);
+    BulletText("ColumnsCount: %d (max %d)", settings->ColumnsCount, settings->ColumnsCountMax);
+    for (int n = 0; n < settings->ColumnsCount; n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiTableColumnSettings* column_settings = &settings->GetColumnSettings()[n];
+        ImGuiSortDirection sort_dir = (column_settings->SortOrder != -1) ? (ImGuiSortDirection)column_settings->SortDirection : ImGuiSortDirection_None;
+        BulletText("Column %d Order %d SortOrder %d %s Vis %d %s %7.3f UserID 0x%08X",
+            n, column_settings->DisplayOrder, column_settings->SortOrder,
+            (sort_dir == ImGuiSortDirection_Ascending) ? "Asc" : (sort_dir == ImGuiSortDirection_Descending) ? "Des" : "---",
+            column_settings->IsEnabled, column_settings->IsStretch ? "Weight" : "Width ", column_settings->WidthOrWeight, column_settings->UserID);
+    }
+    TreePop();
+}
+
+#else // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS
+
+void ImGui::DebugNodeTable(ImGuiTable*) {}
+void ImGui::DebugNodeTableSettings(ImGuiTableSettings*) {}
+
+#endif
+
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Columns, BeginColumns, EndColumns, etc.
+// (This is a legacy API, prefer using BeginTable/EndTable!)
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// FIXME: sizing is lossy when columns width is very small (default width may turn negative etc.)
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - SetWindowClipRectBeforeSetChannel() [Internal]
+// - GetColumnIndex()
+// - GetColumnsCount()
+// - GetColumnOffset()
+// - GetColumnWidth()
+// - SetColumnOffset()
+// - SetColumnWidth()
+// - PushColumnClipRect() [Internal]
+// - PushColumnsBackground() [Internal]
+// - PopColumnsBackground() [Internal]
+// - FindOrCreateColumns() [Internal]
+// - GetColumnsID() [Internal]
+// - BeginColumns()
+// - NextColumn()
+// - EndColumns()
+// - Columns()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// [Internal] Small optimization to avoid calls to PopClipRect/SetCurrentChannel/PushClipRect in sequences,
+// they would meddle many times with the underlying ImDrawCmd.
+// Instead, we do a preemptive overwrite of clipping rectangle _without_ altering the command-buffer and let
+// the subsequent single call to SetCurrentChannel() does it things once.
+void ImGui::SetWindowClipRectBeforeSetChannel(ImGuiWindow* window, const ImRect& clip_rect)
+{
+    ImVec4 clip_rect_vec4 = clip_rect.ToVec4();
+    window->ClipRect = clip_rect;
+    window->DrawList->_CmdHeader.ClipRect = clip_rect_vec4;
+    window->DrawList->_ClipRectStack.Data[window->DrawList->_ClipRectStack.Size - 1] = clip_rect_vec4;
+}
+
+int ImGui::GetColumnIndex()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+    return window->DC.CurrentColumns ? window->DC.CurrentColumns->Current : 0;
+}
+
+int ImGui::GetColumnsCount()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+    return window->DC.CurrentColumns ? window->DC.CurrentColumns->Count : 1;
+}
+
+float ImGui::GetColumnOffsetFromNorm(const ImGuiOldColumns* columns, float offset_norm)
+{
+    return offset_norm * (columns->OffMaxX - columns->OffMinX);
+}
+
+float ImGui::GetColumnNormFromOffset(const ImGuiOldColumns* columns, float offset)
+{
+    return offset / (columns->OffMaxX - columns->OffMinX);
+}
+
+static const float COLUMNS_HIT_RECT_HALF_WIDTH = 4.0f;
+
+static float GetDraggedColumnOffset(ImGuiOldColumns* columns, int column_index)
+{
+    // Active (dragged) column always follow mouse. The reason we need this is that dragging a column to the right edge of an auto-resizing
+    // window creates a feedback loop because we store normalized positions. So while dragging we enforce absolute positioning.
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    IM_ASSERT(column_index > 0); // We are not supposed to drag column 0.
+    IM_ASSERT(g.ActiveId == columns->ID + ImGuiID(column_index));
+
+    float x = g.IO.MousePos.x - g.ActiveIdClickOffset.x + COLUMNS_HIT_RECT_HALF_WIDTH - window->Pos.x;
+    x = ImMax(x, ImGui::GetColumnOffset(column_index - 1) + g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing);
+    if ((columns->Flags & ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoPreserveWidths))
+        x = ImMin(x, ImGui::GetColumnOffset(column_index + 1) - g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing);
+
+    return x;
+}
+
+float ImGui::GetColumnOffset(int column_index)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+    ImGuiOldColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
+    if (columns == NULL)
+        return 0.0f;
+
+    if (column_index < 0)
+        column_index = columns->Current;
+    IM_ASSERT(column_index < columns->Columns.Size);
+
+    const float t = columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm;
+    const float x_offset = ImLerp(columns->OffMinX, columns->OffMaxX, t);
+    return x_offset;
+}
+
+static float GetColumnWidthEx(ImGuiOldColumns* columns, int column_index, bool before_resize = false)
+{
+    if (column_index < 0)
+        column_index = columns->Current;
+
+    float offset_norm;
+    if (before_resize)
+        offset_norm = columns->Columns[column_index + 1].OffsetNormBeforeResize - columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNormBeforeResize;
+    else
+        offset_norm = columns->Columns[column_index + 1].OffsetNorm - columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm;
+    return ImGui::GetColumnOffsetFromNorm(columns, offset_norm);
+}
+
+float ImGui::GetColumnWidth(int column_index)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    ImGuiOldColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
+    if (columns == NULL)
+        return GetContentRegionAvail().x;
+
+    if (column_index < 0)
+        column_index = columns->Current;
+    return GetColumnOffsetFromNorm(columns, columns->Columns[column_index + 1].OffsetNorm - columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm);
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetColumnOffset(int column_index, float offset)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    ImGuiOldColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
+    IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL);
+
+    if (column_index < 0)
+        column_index = columns->Current;
+    IM_ASSERT(column_index < columns->Columns.Size);
+
+    const bool preserve_width = !(columns->Flags & ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoPreserveWidths) && (column_index < columns->Count - 1);
+    const float width = preserve_width ? GetColumnWidthEx(columns, column_index, columns->IsBeingResized) : 0.0f;
+
+    if (!(columns->Flags & ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoForceWithinWindow))
+        offset = ImMin(offset, columns->OffMaxX - g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing * (columns->Count - column_index));
+    columns->Columns[column_index].OffsetNorm = GetColumnNormFromOffset(columns, offset - columns->OffMinX);
+
+    if (preserve_width)
+        SetColumnOffset(column_index + 1, offset + ImMax(g.Style.ColumnsMinSpacing, width));
+}
+
+void ImGui::SetColumnWidth(int column_index, float width)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+    ImGuiOldColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
+    IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL);
+
+    if (column_index < 0)
+        column_index = columns->Current;
+    SetColumnOffset(column_index + 1, GetColumnOffset(column_index) + width);
+}
+
+void ImGui::PushColumnClipRect(int column_index)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+    ImGuiOldColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
+    if (column_index < 0)
+        column_index = columns->Current;
+
+    ImGuiOldColumnData* column = &columns->Columns[column_index];
+    PushClipRect(column->ClipRect.Min, column->ClipRect.Max, false);
+}
+
+// Get into the columns background draw command (which is generally the same draw command as before we called BeginColumns)
+void ImGui::PushColumnsBackground()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+    ImGuiOldColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
+    if (columns->Count == 1)
+        return;
+
+    // Optimization: avoid SetCurrentChannel() + PushClipRect()
+    columns->HostBackupClipRect = window->ClipRect;
+    SetWindowClipRectBeforeSetChannel(window, columns->HostInitialClipRect);
+    columns->Splitter.SetCurrentChannel(window->DrawList, 0);
+}
+
+void ImGui::PopColumnsBackground()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindowRead();
+    ImGuiOldColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
+    if (columns->Count == 1)
+        return;
+
+    // Optimization: avoid PopClipRect() + SetCurrentChannel()
+    SetWindowClipRectBeforeSetChannel(window, columns->HostBackupClipRect);
+    columns->Splitter.SetCurrentChannel(window->DrawList, columns->Current + 1);
+}
+
+ImGuiOldColumns* ImGui::FindOrCreateColumns(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiID id)
+{
+    // We have few columns per window so for now we don't need bother much with turning this into a faster lookup.
+    for (int n = 0; n < window->ColumnsStorage.Size; n++)
+        if (window->ColumnsStorage[n].ID == id)
+            return &window->ColumnsStorage[n];
+
+    window->ColumnsStorage.push_back(ImGuiOldColumns());
+    ImGuiOldColumns* columns = &window->ColumnsStorage.back();
+    columns->ID = id;
+    return columns;
+}
+
+ImGuiID ImGui::GetColumnsID(const char* str_id, int columns_count)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+
+    // Differentiate column ID with an arbitrary prefix for cases where users name their columns set the same as another widget.
+    // In addition, when an identifier isn't explicitly provided we include the number of columns in the hash to make it uniquer.
+    PushID(0x11223347 + (str_id ? 0 : columns_count));
+    ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id ? str_id : "columns");
+    PopID();
+
+    return id;
+}
+
+void ImGui::BeginColumns(const char* str_id, int columns_count, ImGuiOldColumnFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+
+    IM_ASSERT(columns_count >= 1);
+    IM_ASSERT(window->DC.CurrentColumns == NULL);   // Nested columns are currently not supported
+
+    // Acquire storage for the columns set
+    ImGuiID id = GetColumnsID(str_id, columns_count);
+    ImGuiOldColumns* columns = FindOrCreateColumns(window, id);
+    IM_ASSERT(columns->ID == id);
+    columns->Current = 0;
+    columns->Count = columns_count;
+    columns->Flags = flags;
+    window->DC.CurrentColumns = columns;
+
+    columns->HostCursorPosY = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
+    columns->HostCursorMaxPosX = window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x;
+    columns->HostInitialClipRect = window->ClipRect;
+    columns->HostBackupParentWorkRect = window->ParentWorkRect;
+    window->ParentWorkRect = window->WorkRect;
+
+    // Set state for first column
+    // We aim so that the right-most column will have the same clipping width as other after being clipped by parent ClipRect
+    const float column_padding = g.Style.ItemSpacing.x;
+    const float half_clip_extend_x = ImFloor(ImMax(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f, window->WindowBorderSize));
+    const float max_1 = window->WorkRect.Max.x + column_padding - ImMax(column_padding - window->WindowPadding.x, 0.0f);
+    const float max_2 = window->WorkRect.Max.x + half_clip_extend_x;
+    columns->OffMinX = window->DC.Indent.x - column_padding + ImMax(column_padding - window->WindowPadding.x, 0.0f);
+    columns->OffMaxX = ImMax(ImMin(max_1, max_2) - window->Pos.x, columns->OffMinX + 1.0f);
+    columns->LineMinY = columns->LineMaxY = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
+
+    // Clear data if columns count changed
+    if (columns->Columns.Size != 0 && columns->Columns.Size != columns_count + 1)
+        columns->Columns.resize(0);
+
+    // Initialize default widths
+    columns->IsFirstFrame = (columns->Columns.Size == 0);
+    if (columns->Columns.Size == 0)
+    {
+        columns->Columns.reserve(columns_count + 1);
+        for (int n = 0; n < columns_count + 1; n++)
+        {
+            ImGuiOldColumnData column;
+            column.OffsetNorm = n / (float)columns_count;
+            columns->Columns.push_back(column);
+        }
+    }
+
+    for (int n = 0; n < columns_count; n++)
+    {
+        // Compute clipping rectangle
+        ImGuiOldColumnData* column = &columns->Columns[n];
+        float clip_x1 = IM_ROUND(window->Pos.x + GetColumnOffset(n));
+        float clip_x2 = IM_ROUND(window->Pos.x + GetColumnOffset(n + 1) - 1.0f);
+        column->ClipRect = ImRect(clip_x1, -FLT_MAX, clip_x2, +FLT_MAX);
+        column->ClipRect.ClipWithFull(window->ClipRect);
+    }
+
+    if (columns->Count > 1)
+    {
+        columns->Splitter.Split(window->DrawList, 1 + columns->Count);
+        columns->Splitter.SetCurrentChannel(window->DrawList, 1);
+        PushColumnClipRect(0);
+    }
+
+    // We don't generally store Indent.x inside ColumnsOffset because it may be manipulated by the user.
+    float offset_0 = GetColumnOffset(columns->Current);
+    float offset_1 = GetColumnOffset(columns->Current + 1);
+    float width = offset_1 - offset_0;
+    PushItemWidth(width * 0.65f);
+    window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = ImMax(column_padding - window->WindowPadding.x, 0.0f);
+    window->DC.CursorPos.x = IM_FLOOR(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);
+    window->WorkRect.Max.x = window->Pos.x + offset_1 - column_padding;
+}
+
+void ImGui::NextColumn()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems || window->DC.CurrentColumns == NULL)
+        return;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiOldColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
+
+    if (columns->Count == 1)
+    {
+        window->DC.CursorPos.x = IM_FLOOR(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);
+        IM_ASSERT(columns->Current == 0);
+        return;
+    }
+
+    // Next column
+    if (++columns->Current == columns->Count)
+        columns->Current = 0;
+
+    PopItemWidth();
+
+    // Optimization: avoid PopClipRect() + SetCurrentChannel() + PushClipRect()
+    // (which would needlessly attempt to update commands in the wrong channel, then pop or overwrite them),
+    ImGuiOldColumnData* column = &columns->Columns[columns->Current];
+    SetWindowClipRectBeforeSetChannel(window, column->ClipRect);
+    columns->Splitter.SetCurrentChannel(window->DrawList, columns->Current + 1);
+
+    const float column_padding = g.Style.ItemSpacing.x;
+    columns->LineMaxY = ImMax(columns->LineMaxY, window->DC.CursorPos.y);
+    if (columns->Current > 0)
+    {
+        // Columns 1+ ignore IndentX (by canceling it out)
+        // FIXME-COLUMNS: Unnecessary, could be locked?
+        window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = GetColumnOffset(columns->Current) - window->DC.Indent.x + column_padding;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // New row/line: column 0 honor IndentX.
+        window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = ImMax(column_padding - window->WindowPadding.x, 0.0f);
+        columns->LineMinY = columns->LineMaxY;
+    }
+    window->DC.CursorPos.x = IM_FLOOR(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);
+    window->DC.CursorPos.y = columns->LineMinY;
+    window->DC.CurrLineSize = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+    window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset = 0.0f;
+
+    // FIXME-COLUMNS: Share code with BeginColumns() - move code on columns setup.
+    float offset_0 = GetColumnOffset(columns->Current);
+    float offset_1 = GetColumnOffset(columns->Current + 1);
+    float width = offset_1 - offset_0;
+    PushItemWidth(width * 0.65f);
+    window->WorkRect.Max.x = window->Pos.x + offset_1 - column_padding;
+}
+
+void ImGui::EndColumns()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    ImGuiOldColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
+    IM_ASSERT(columns != NULL);
+
+    PopItemWidth();
+    if (columns->Count > 1)
+    {
+        PopClipRect();
+        columns->Splitter.Merge(window->DrawList);
+    }
+
+    const ImGuiOldColumnFlags flags = columns->Flags;
+    columns->LineMaxY = ImMax(columns->LineMaxY, window->DC.CursorPos.y);
+    window->DC.CursorPos.y = columns->LineMaxY;
+    if (!(flags & ImGuiOldColumnFlags_GrowParentContentsSize))
+        window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x = columns->HostCursorMaxPosX;  // Restore cursor max pos, as columns don't grow parent
+
+    // Draw columns borders and handle resize
+    // The IsBeingResized flag ensure we preserve pre-resize columns width so back-and-forth are not lossy
+    bool is_being_resized = false;
+    if (!(flags & ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoBorder) && !window->SkipItems)
+    {
+        // We clip Y boundaries CPU side because very long triangles are mishandled by some GPU drivers.
+        const float y1 = ImMax(columns->HostCursorPosY, window->ClipRect.Min.y);
+        const float y2 = ImMin(window->DC.CursorPos.y, window->ClipRect.Max.y);
+        int dragging_column = -1;
+        for (int n = 1; n < columns->Count; n++)
+        {
+            ImGuiOldColumnData* column = &columns->Columns[n];
+            float x = window->Pos.x + GetColumnOffset(n);
+            const ImGuiID column_id = columns->ID + ImGuiID(n);
+            const float column_hit_hw = COLUMNS_HIT_RECT_HALF_WIDTH;
+            const ImRect column_hit_rect(ImVec2(x - column_hit_hw, y1), ImVec2(x + column_hit_hw, y2));
+            KeepAliveID(column_id);
+            if (IsClippedEx(column_hit_rect, column_id)) // FIXME: Can be removed or replaced with a lower-level test
+                continue;
+
+            bool hovered = false, held = false;
+            if (!(flags & ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoResize))
+            {
+                ButtonBehavior(column_hit_rect, column_id, &hovered, &held);
+                if (hovered || held)
+                    g.MouseCursor = ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW;
+                if (held && !(column->Flags & ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoResize))
+                    dragging_column = n;
+            }
+
+            // Draw column
+            const ImU32 col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered : ImGuiCol_Separator);
+            const float xi = IM_FLOOR(x);
+            window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(xi, y1 + 1.0f), ImVec2(xi, y2), col);
+        }
+
+        // Apply dragging after drawing the column lines, so our rendered lines are in sync with how items were displayed during the frame.
+        if (dragging_column != -1)
+        {
+            if (!columns->IsBeingResized)
+                for (int n = 0; n < columns->Count + 1; n++)
+                    columns->Columns[n].OffsetNormBeforeResize = columns->Columns[n].OffsetNorm;
+            columns->IsBeingResized = is_being_resized = true;
+            float x = GetDraggedColumnOffset(columns, dragging_column);
+            SetColumnOffset(dragging_column, x);
+        }
+    }
+    columns->IsBeingResized = is_being_resized;
+
+    window->WorkRect = window->ParentWorkRect;
+    window->ParentWorkRect = columns->HostBackupParentWorkRect;
+    window->DC.CurrentColumns = NULL;
+    window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x = 0.0f;
+    window->DC.CursorPos.x = IM_FLOOR(window->Pos.x + window->DC.Indent.x + window->DC.ColumnsOffset.x);
+}
+
+void ImGui::Columns(int columns_count, const char* id, bool border)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    IM_ASSERT(columns_count >= 1);
+
+    ImGuiOldColumnFlags flags = (border ? 0 : ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoBorder);
+    //flags |= ImGuiOldColumnFlags_NoPreserveWidths; // NB: Legacy behavior
+    ImGuiOldColumns* columns = window->DC.CurrentColumns;
+    if (columns != NULL && columns->Count == columns_count && columns->Flags == flags)
+        return;
+
+    if (columns != NULL)
+        EndColumns();
+
+    if (columns_count != 1)
+        BeginColumns(id, columns_count, flags);
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE
diff --git a/dependencies/src/imgui/imgui_widgets.cpp b/dependencies/src/imgui/imgui_widgets.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4fe2260
--- /dev/null
+++ b/dependencies/src/imgui/imgui_widgets.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,8555 @@
+// dear imgui, v1.89 WIP
+// (widgets code)
+
+/*
+
+Index of this file:
+
+// [SECTION] Forward Declarations
+// [SECTION] Widgets: Text, etc.
+// [SECTION] Widgets: Main (Button, Image, Checkbox, RadioButton, ProgressBar, Bullet, etc.)
+// [SECTION] Widgets: Low-level Layout helpers (Spacing, Dummy, NewLine, Separator, etc.)
+// [SECTION] Widgets: ComboBox
+// [SECTION] Data Type and Data Formatting Helpers
+// [SECTION] Widgets: DragScalar, DragFloat, DragInt, etc.
+// [SECTION] Widgets: SliderScalar, SliderFloat, SliderInt, etc.
+// [SECTION] Widgets: InputScalar, InputFloat, InputInt, etc.
+// [SECTION] Widgets: InputText, InputTextMultiline
+// [SECTION] Widgets: ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton, etc.
+// [SECTION] Widgets: TreeNode, CollapsingHeader, etc.
+// [SECTION] Widgets: Selectable
+// [SECTION] Widgets: ListBox
+// [SECTION] Widgets: PlotLines, PlotHistogram
+// [SECTION] Widgets: Value helpers
+// [SECTION] Widgets: MenuItem, BeginMenu, EndMenu, etc.
+// [SECTION] Widgets: BeginTabBar, EndTabBar, etc.
+// [SECTION] Widgets: BeginTabItem, EndTabItem, etc.
+// [SECTION] Widgets: Columns, BeginColumns, EndColumns, etc.
+
+*/
+
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && !defined(_CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS)
+#define _CRT_SECURE_NO_WARNINGS
+#endif
+
+#include "imgui.h"
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE
+
+#ifndef IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS
+#define IMGUI_DEFINE_MATH_OPERATORS
+#endif
+#include "imgui_internal.h"
+
+// System includes
+#include <ctype.h>      // toupper
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER <= 1500 // MSVC 2008 or earlier
+#include <stddef.h>     // intptr_t
+#else
+#include <stdint.h>     // intptr_t
+#endif
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Warnings
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Visual Studio warnings
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+#pragma warning (disable: 4127)     // condition expression is constant
+#pragma warning (disable: 4996)     // 'This function or variable may be unsafe': strcpy, strdup, sprintf, vsnprintf, sscanf, fopen
+#if defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER >= 1922 // MSVC 2019 16.2 or later
+#pragma warning (disable: 5054)     // operator '|': deprecated between enumerations of different types
+#endif
+#pragma warning (disable: 26451)    // [Static Analyzer] Arithmetic overflow : Using operator 'xxx' on a 4 byte value and then casting the result to a 8 byte value. Cast the value to the wider type before calling operator 'xxx' to avoid overflow(io.2).
+#pragma warning (disable: 26812)    // [Static Analyzer] The enum type 'xxx' is unscoped. Prefer 'enum class' over 'enum' (Enum.3).
+#endif
+
+// Clang/GCC warnings with -Weverything
+#if defined(__clang__)
+#if __has_warning("-Wunknown-warning-option")
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-warning-option"         // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx'                      // not all warnings are known by all Clang versions and they tend to be rename-happy.. so ignoring warnings triggers new warnings on some configuration. Great!
+#endif
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wunknown-pragmas"                // warning: unknown warning group 'xxx'
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wold-style-cast"                 // warning: use of old-style cast                            // yes, they are more terse.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wfloat-equal"                    // warning: comparing floating point with == or != is unsafe // storing and comparing against same constants (typically 0.0f) is ok.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-nonliteral"              // warning: format string is not a string literal            // passing non-literal to vsnformat(). yes, user passing incorrect format strings can crash the code.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wsign-conversion"                // warning: implicit conversion changes signedness
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wzero-as-null-pointer-constant"  // warning: zero as null pointer constant                    // some standard header variations use #define NULL 0
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdouble-promotion"               // warning: implicit conversion from 'float' to 'double' when passing argument to function  // using printf() is a misery with this as C++ va_arg ellipsis changes float to double.
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wenum-enum-conversion"           // warning: bitwise operation between different enumeration types ('XXXFlags_' and 'XXXFlagsPrivate_')
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wdeprecated-enum-enum-conversion"// warning: bitwise operation between different enumeration types ('XXXFlags_' and 'XXXFlagsPrivate_') is deprecated
+#pragma clang diagnostic ignored "-Wimplicit-int-float-conversion"  // warning: implicit conversion from 'xxx' to 'float' may lose precision
+#elif defined(__GNUC__)
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wpragmas"                          // warning: unknown option after '#pragma GCC diagnostic' kind
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wformat-nonliteral"                // warning: format not a string literal, format string not checked
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wclass-memaccess"                  // [__GNUC__ >= 8] warning: 'memset/memcpy' clearing/writing an object of type 'xxxx' with no trivial copy-assignment; use assignment or value-initialization instead
+#pragma GCC diagnostic ignored "-Wdeprecated-enum-enum-conversion"  // warning: bitwise operation between different enumeration types ('XXXFlags_' and 'XXXFlagsPrivate_') is deprecated
+#endif
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Data
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Widgets
+static const float          DRAGDROP_HOLD_TO_OPEN_TIMER = 0.70f;    // Time for drag-hold to activate items accepting the ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold button behavior.
+static const float          DRAG_MOUSE_THRESHOLD_FACTOR = 0.50f;    // Multiplier for the default value of io.MouseDragThreshold to make DragFloat/DragInt react faster to mouse drags.
+
+// Those MIN/MAX values are not define because we need to point to them
+static const signed char    IM_S8_MIN  = -128;
+static const signed char    IM_S8_MAX  = 127;
+static const unsigned char  IM_U8_MIN  = 0;
+static const unsigned char  IM_U8_MAX  = 0xFF;
+static const signed short   IM_S16_MIN = -32768;
+static const signed short   IM_S16_MAX = 32767;
+static const unsigned short IM_U16_MIN = 0;
+static const unsigned short IM_U16_MAX = 0xFFFF;
+static const ImS32          IM_S32_MIN = INT_MIN;    // (-2147483647 - 1), (0x80000000);
+static const ImS32          IM_S32_MAX = INT_MAX;    // (2147483647), (0x7FFFFFFF)
+static const ImU32          IM_U32_MIN = 0;
+static const ImU32          IM_U32_MAX = UINT_MAX;   // (0xFFFFFFFF)
+#ifdef LLONG_MIN
+static const ImS64          IM_S64_MIN = LLONG_MIN;  // (-9223372036854775807ll - 1ll);
+static const ImS64          IM_S64_MAX = LLONG_MAX;  // (9223372036854775807ll);
+#else
+static const ImS64          IM_S64_MIN = -9223372036854775807LL - 1;
+static const ImS64          IM_S64_MAX = 9223372036854775807LL;
+#endif
+static const ImU64          IM_U64_MIN = 0;
+#ifdef ULLONG_MAX
+static const ImU64          IM_U64_MAX = ULLONG_MAX; // (0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFull);
+#else
+static const ImU64          IM_U64_MAX = (2ULL * 9223372036854775807LL + 1);
+#endif
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Forward Declarations
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// For InputTextEx()
+static bool             InputTextFilterCharacter(unsigned int* p_char, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data, ImGuiInputSource input_source);
+static int              InputTextCalcTextLenAndLineCount(const char* text_begin, const char** out_text_end);
+static ImVec2           InputTextCalcTextSizeW(const ImWchar* text_begin, const ImWchar* text_end, const ImWchar** remaining = NULL, ImVec2* out_offset = NULL, bool stop_on_new_line = false);
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: Text, etc.
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - TextEx() [Internal]
+// - TextUnformatted()
+// - Text()
+// - TextV()
+// - TextColored()
+// - TextColoredV()
+// - TextDisabled()
+// - TextDisabledV()
+// - TextWrapped()
+// - TextWrappedV()
+// - LabelText()
+// - LabelTextV()
+// - BulletText()
+// - BulletTextV()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+void ImGui::TextEx(const char* text, const char* text_end, ImGuiTextFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return;
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    // Accept null ranges
+    if (text == text_end)
+        text = text_end = "";
+
+    // Calculate length
+    const char* text_begin = text;
+    if (text_end == NULL)
+        text_end = text + strlen(text); // FIXME-OPT
+
+    const ImVec2 text_pos(window->DC.CursorPos.x, window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset);
+    const float wrap_pos_x = window->DC.TextWrapPos;
+    const bool wrap_enabled = (wrap_pos_x >= 0.0f);
+    if (text_end - text <= 2000 || wrap_enabled)
+    {
+        // Common case
+        const float wrap_width = wrap_enabled ? CalcWrapWidthForPos(window->DC.CursorPos, wrap_pos_x) : 0.0f;
+        const ImVec2 text_size = CalcTextSize(text_begin, text_end, false, wrap_width);
+
+        ImRect bb(text_pos, text_pos + text_size);
+        ItemSize(text_size, 0.0f);
+        if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
+            return;
+
+        // Render (we don't hide text after ## in this end-user function)
+        RenderTextWrapped(bb.Min, text_begin, text_end, wrap_width);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Long text!
+        // Perform manual coarse clipping to optimize for long multi-line text
+        // - From this point we will only compute the width of lines that are visible. Optimization only available when word-wrapping is disabled.
+        // - We also don't vertically center the text within the line full height, which is unlikely to matter because we are likely the biggest and only item on the line.
+        // - We use memchr(), pay attention that well optimized versions of those str/mem functions are much faster than a casually written loop.
+        const char* line = text;
+        const float line_height = GetTextLineHeight();
+        ImVec2 text_size(0, 0);
+
+        // Lines to skip (can't skip when logging text)
+        ImVec2 pos = text_pos;
+        if (!g.LogEnabled)
+        {
+            int lines_skippable = (int)((window->ClipRect.Min.y - text_pos.y) / line_height);
+            if (lines_skippable > 0)
+            {
+                int lines_skipped = 0;
+                while (line < text_end && lines_skipped < lines_skippable)
+                {
+                    const char* line_end = (const char*)memchr(line, '\n', text_end - line);
+                    if (!line_end)
+                        line_end = text_end;
+                    if ((flags & ImGuiTextFlags_NoWidthForLargeClippedText) == 0)
+                        text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, CalcTextSize(line, line_end).x);
+                    line = line_end + 1;
+                    lines_skipped++;
+                }
+                pos.y += lines_skipped * line_height;
+            }
+        }
+
+        // Lines to render
+        if (line < text_end)
+        {
+            ImRect line_rect(pos, pos + ImVec2(FLT_MAX, line_height));
+            while (line < text_end)
+            {
+                if (IsClippedEx(line_rect, 0))
+                    break;
+
+                const char* line_end = (const char*)memchr(line, '\n', text_end - line);
+                if (!line_end)
+                    line_end = text_end;
+                text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, CalcTextSize(line, line_end).x);
+                RenderText(pos, line, line_end, false);
+                line = line_end + 1;
+                line_rect.Min.y += line_height;
+                line_rect.Max.y += line_height;
+                pos.y += line_height;
+            }
+
+            // Count remaining lines
+            int lines_skipped = 0;
+            while (line < text_end)
+            {
+                const char* line_end = (const char*)memchr(line, '\n', text_end - line);
+                if (!line_end)
+                    line_end = text_end;
+                if ((flags & ImGuiTextFlags_NoWidthForLargeClippedText) == 0)
+                    text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, CalcTextSize(line, line_end).x);
+                line = line_end + 1;
+                lines_skipped++;
+            }
+            pos.y += lines_skipped * line_height;
+        }
+        text_size.y = (pos - text_pos).y;
+
+        ImRect bb(text_pos, text_pos + text_size);
+        ItemSize(text_size, 0.0f);
+        ItemAdd(bb, 0);
+    }
+}
+
+void ImGui::TextUnformatted(const char* text, const char* text_end)
+{
+    TextEx(text, text_end, ImGuiTextFlags_NoWidthForLargeClippedText);
+}
+
+void ImGui::Text(const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+    va_list args;
+    va_start(args, fmt);
+    TextV(fmt, args);
+    va_end(args);
+}
+
+void ImGui::TextV(const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return;
+
+    // FIXME-OPT: Handle the %s shortcut?
+    const char* text, *text_end;
+    ImFormatStringToTempBufferV(&text, &text_end, fmt, args);
+    TextEx(text, text_end, ImGuiTextFlags_NoWidthForLargeClippedText);
+}
+
+void ImGui::TextColored(const ImVec4& col, const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+    va_list args;
+    va_start(args, fmt);
+    TextColoredV(col, fmt, args);
+    va_end(args);
+}
+
+void ImGui::TextColoredV(const ImVec4& col, const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+    PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, col);
+    if (fmt[0] == '%' && fmt[1] == 's' && fmt[2] == 0)
+        TextEx(va_arg(args, const char*), NULL, ImGuiTextFlags_NoWidthForLargeClippedText); // Skip formatting
+    else
+        TextV(fmt, args);
+    PopStyleColor();
+}
+
+void ImGui::TextDisabled(const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+    va_list args;
+    va_start(args, fmt);
+    TextDisabledV(fmt, args);
+    va_end(args);
+}
+
+void ImGui::TextDisabledV(const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]);
+    if (fmt[0] == '%' && fmt[1] == 's' && fmt[2] == 0)
+        TextEx(va_arg(args, const char*), NULL, ImGuiTextFlags_NoWidthForLargeClippedText); // Skip formatting
+    else
+        TextV(fmt, args);
+    PopStyleColor();
+}
+
+void ImGui::TextWrapped(const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+    va_list args;
+    va_start(args, fmt);
+    TextWrappedV(fmt, args);
+    va_end(args);
+}
+
+void ImGui::TextWrappedV(const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    bool need_backup = (g.CurrentWindow->DC.TextWrapPos < 0.0f);  // Keep existing wrap position if one is already set
+    if (need_backup)
+        PushTextWrapPos(0.0f);
+    if (fmt[0] == '%' && fmt[1] == 's' && fmt[2] == 0)
+        TextEx(va_arg(args, const char*), NULL, ImGuiTextFlags_NoWidthForLargeClippedText); // Skip formatting
+    else
+        TextV(fmt, args);
+    if (need_backup)
+        PopTextWrapPos();
+}
+
+void ImGui::LabelText(const char* label, const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+    va_list args;
+    va_start(args, fmt);
+    LabelTextV(label, fmt, args);
+    va_end(args);
+}
+
+// Add a label+text combo aligned to other label+value widgets
+void ImGui::LabelTextV(const char* label, const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+    const float w = CalcItemWidth();
+
+    const char* value_text_begin, *value_text_end;
+    ImFormatStringToTempBufferV(&value_text_begin, &value_text_end, fmt, args);
+    const ImVec2 value_size = CalcTextSize(value_text_begin, value_text_end, false);
+    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+
+    const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+    const ImRect value_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(w, value_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2));
+    const ImRect total_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(w + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f), ImMax(value_size.y, label_size.y) + style.FramePadding.y * 2));
+    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
+    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, 0))
+        return;
+
+    // Render
+    RenderTextClipped(value_bb.Min + style.FramePadding, value_bb.Max, value_text_begin, value_text_end, &value_size, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
+    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
+        RenderText(ImVec2(value_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, value_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);
+}
+
+void ImGui::BulletText(const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+    va_list args;
+    va_start(args, fmt);
+    BulletTextV(fmt, args);
+    va_end(args);
+}
+
+// Text with a little bullet aligned to the typical tree node.
+void ImGui::BulletTextV(const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+
+    const char* text_begin, *text_end;
+    ImFormatStringToTempBufferV(&text_begin, &text_end, fmt, args);
+    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(text_begin, text_end, false);
+    const ImVec2 total_size = ImVec2(g.FontSize + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? (label_size.x + style.FramePadding.x * 2) : 0.0f), label_size.y);  // Empty text doesn't add padding
+    ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+    pos.y += window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset;
+    ItemSize(total_size, 0.0f);
+    const ImRect bb(pos, pos + total_size);
+    if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
+        return;
+
+    // Render
+    ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
+    RenderBullet(window->DrawList, bb.Min + ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x + g.FontSize * 0.5f, g.FontSize * 0.5f), text_col);
+    RenderText(bb.Min + ImVec2(g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.x * 2, 0.0f), text_begin, text_end, false);
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: Main
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - ButtonBehavior() [Internal]
+// - Button()
+// - SmallButton()
+// - InvisibleButton()
+// - ArrowButton()
+// - CloseButton() [Internal]
+// - CollapseButton() [Internal]
+// - GetWindowScrollbarID() [Internal]
+// - GetWindowScrollbarRect() [Internal]
+// - Scrollbar() [Internal]
+// - ScrollbarEx() [Internal]
+// - Image()
+// - ImageButton()
+// - Checkbox()
+// - CheckboxFlagsT() [Internal]
+// - CheckboxFlags()
+// - RadioButton()
+// - ProgressBar()
+// - Bullet()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// The ButtonBehavior() function is key to many interactions and used by many/most widgets.
+// Because we handle so many cases (keyboard/gamepad navigation, drag and drop) and many specific behavior (via ImGuiButtonFlags_),
+// this code is a little complex.
+// By far the most common path is interacting with the Mouse using the default ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease button behavior.
+// See the series of events below and the corresponding state reported by dear imgui:
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// with PressedOnClickRelease:             return-value  IsItemHovered()  IsItemActive()  IsItemActivated()  IsItemDeactivated()  IsItemClicked()
+//   Frame N+0 (mouse is outside bb)        -             -                -               -                  -                    -
+//   Frame N+1 (mouse moves inside bb)      -             true             -               -                  -                    -
+//   Frame N+2 (mouse button is down)       -             true             true            true               -                    true
+//   Frame N+3 (mouse button is down)       -             true             true            -                  -                    -
+//   Frame N+4 (mouse moves outside bb)     -             -                true            -                  -                    -
+//   Frame N+5 (mouse moves inside bb)      -             true             true            -                  -                    -
+//   Frame N+6 (mouse button is released)   true          true             -               -                  true                 -
+//   Frame N+7 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  -                    -
+//   Frame N+8 (mouse moves outside bb)     -             -                -               -                  -                    -
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// with PressedOnClick:                    return-value  IsItemHovered()  IsItemActive()  IsItemActivated()  IsItemDeactivated()  IsItemClicked()
+//   Frame N+2 (mouse button is down)       true          true             true            true               -                    true
+//   Frame N+3 (mouse button is down)       -             true             true            -                  -                    -
+//   Frame N+6 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  true                 -
+//   Frame N+7 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  -                    -
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// with PressedOnRelease:                  return-value  IsItemHovered()  IsItemActive()  IsItemActivated()  IsItemDeactivated()  IsItemClicked()
+//   Frame N+2 (mouse button is down)       -             true             -               -                  -                    true
+//   Frame N+3 (mouse button is down)       -             true             -               -                  -                    -
+//   Frame N+6 (mouse button is released)   true          true             -               -                  -                    -
+//   Frame N+7 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  -                    -
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// with PressedOnDoubleClick:              return-value  IsItemHovered()  IsItemActive()  IsItemActivated()  IsItemDeactivated()  IsItemClicked()
+//   Frame N+0 (mouse button is down)       -             true             -               -                  -                    true
+//   Frame N+1 (mouse button is down)       -             true             -               -                  -                    -
+//   Frame N+2 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  -                    -
+//   Frame N+3 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  -                    -
+//   Frame N+4 (mouse button is down)       true          true             true            true               -                    true
+//   Frame N+5 (mouse button is down)       -             true             true            -                  -                    -
+//   Frame N+6 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  true                 -
+//   Frame N+7 (mouse button is released)   -             true             -               -                  -                    -
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Note that some combinations are supported,
+// - PressedOnDragDropHold can generally be associated with any flag.
+// - PressedOnDoubleClick can be associated by PressedOnClickRelease/PressedOnRelease, in which case the second release event won't be reported.
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// The behavior of the return-value changes when ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat is set:
+//                                         Repeat+                  Repeat+           Repeat+             Repeat+
+//                                         PressedOnClickRelease    PressedOnClick    PressedOnRelease    PressedOnDoubleClick
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+//   Frame N+0 (mouse button is down)       -                        true              -                   true
+//   ...                                    -                        -                 -                   -
+//   Frame N + RepeatDelay                  true                     true              -                   true
+//   ...                                    -                        -                 -                   -
+//   Frame N + RepeatDelay + RepeatRate*N   true                     true              -                   true
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+bool ImGui::ButtonBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, bool* out_hovered, bool* out_held, ImGuiButtonFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+
+    // Default only reacts to left mouse button
+    if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonMask_) == 0)
+        flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonDefault_;
+
+    // Default behavior requires click + release inside bounding box
+    if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnMask_) == 0)
+        flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDefault_;
+
+    ImGuiWindow* backup_hovered_window = g.HoveredWindow;
+    const bool flatten_hovered_children = (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren) && g.HoveredWindow && g.HoveredWindow->RootWindowDockTree == window->RootWindowDockTree;
+    if (flatten_hovered_children)
+        g.HoveredWindow = window;
+
+#ifdef IMGUI_ENABLE_TEST_ENGINE
+    if (id != 0 && g.LastItemData.ID != id)
+        IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_ADD(bb, id);
+#endif
+
+    bool pressed = false;
+    bool hovered = ItemHoverable(bb, id);
+
+    // Drag source doesn't report as hovered
+    if (hovered && g.DragDropActive && g.DragDropPayload.SourceId == id && !(g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoDisableHover))
+        hovered = false;
+
+    // Special mode for Drag and Drop where holding button pressed for a long time while dragging another item triggers the button
+    if (g.DragDropActive && (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold) && !(g.DragDropSourceFlags & ImGuiDragDropFlags_SourceNoHoldToOpenOthers))
+        if (IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByActiveItem))
+        {
+            hovered = true;
+            SetHoveredID(id);
+            if (g.HoveredIdTimer - g.IO.DeltaTime <= DRAGDROP_HOLD_TO_OPEN_TIMER && g.HoveredIdTimer >= DRAGDROP_HOLD_TO_OPEN_TIMER)
+            {
+                pressed = true;
+                g.DragDropHoldJustPressedId = id;
+                FocusWindow(window);
+            }
+        }
+
+    if (flatten_hovered_children)
+        g.HoveredWindow = backup_hovered_window;
+
+    // AllowOverlap mode (rarely used) requires previous frame HoveredId to be null or to match. This allows using patterns where a later submitted widget overlaps a previous one.
+    if (hovered && (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap) && (g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != id && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame != 0))
+        hovered = false;
+
+    // Mouse handling
+    if (hovered)
+    {
+        if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoKeyModifiers) || (!g.IO.KeyCtrl && !g.IO.KeyShift && !g.IO.KeyAlt))
+        {
+            // Poll buttons
+            int mouse_button_clicked = -1;
+            if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonLeft) && g.IO.MouseClicked[0])         { mouse_button_clicked = 0; }
+            else if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonRight) && g.IO.MouseClicked[1])   { mouse_button_clicked = 1; }
+            else if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonMiddle) && g.IO.MouseClicked[2])  { mouse_button_clicked = 2; }
+
+            if (mouse_button_clicked != -1 && g.ActiveId != id)
+            {
+                if (flags & (ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickReleaseAnywhere))
+                {
+                    SetActiveID(id, window);
+                    g.ActiveIdMouseButton = mouse_button_clicked;
+                    if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus))
+                        SetFocusID(id, window);
+                    FocusWindow(window);
+                }
+                if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick) || ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick) && g.IO.MouseClickedCount[mouse_button_clicked] == 2))
+                {
+                    pressed = true;
+                    if (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoHoldingActiveId)
+                        ClearActiveID();
+                    else
+                        SetActiveID(id, window); // Hold on ID
+                    if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus))
+                        SetFocusID(id, window);
+                    g.ActiveIdMouseButton = mouse_button_clicked;
+                    FocusWindow(window);
+                }
+            }
+            if (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnRelease)
+            {
+                int mouse_button_released = -1;
+                if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonLeft) && g.IO.MouseReleased[0])        { mouse_button_released = 0; }
+                else if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonRight) && g.IO.MouseReleased[1])  { mouse_button_released = 1; }
+                else if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonMiddle) && g.IO.MouseReleased[2]) { mouse_button_released = 2; }
+                if (mouse_button_released != -1)
+                {
+                    const bool has_repeated_at_least_once = (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat) && g.IO.MouseDownDurationPrev[mouse_button_released] >= g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay; // Repeat mode trumps on release behavior
+                    if (!has_repeated_at_least_once)
+                        pressed = true;
+                    if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus))
+                        SetFocusID(id, window);
+                    ClearActiveID();
+                }
+            }
+
+            // 'Repeat' mode acts when held regardless of _PressedOn flags (see table above).
+            // Relies on repeat logic of IsMouseClicked() but we may as well do it ourselves if we end up exposing finer RepeatDelay/RepeatRate settings.
+            if (g.ActiveId == id && (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat))
+                if (g.IO.MouseDownDuration[g.ActiveIdMouseButton] > 0.0f && IsMouseClicked(g.ActiveIdMouseButton, true))
+                    pressed = true;
+        }
+
+        if (pressed)
+            g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
+    }
+
+    // Gamepad/Keyboard navigation
+    // We report navigated item as hovered but we don't set g.HoveredId to not interfere with mouse.
+    if (g.NavId == id && !g.NavDisableHighlight && g.NavDisableMouseHover && (g.ActiveId == 0 || g.ActiveId == id || g.ActiveId == window->MoveId))
+        if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoHoveredOnFocus))
+            hovered = true;
+    if (g.NavActivateDownId == id)
+    {
+        bool nav_activated_by_code = (g.NavActivateId == id);
+        bool nav_activated_by_inputs = (g.NavActivatePressedId == id);
+        if (!nav_activated_by_inputs && (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat))
+        {
+            // Avoid pressing both keys from triggering double amount of repeat events
+            const ImGuiKeyData* key1 = GetKeyData(ImGuiKey_Space);
+            const ImGuiKeyData* key2 = GetKeyData(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadActivate);
+            const float t1 = ImMax(key1->DownDuration, key2->DownDuration);
+            nav_activated_by_inputs = CalcTypematicRepeatAmount(t1 - g.IO.DeltaTime, t1, g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay, g.IO.KeyRepeatRate) > 0;
+        }
+        if (nav_activated_by_code || nav_activated_by_inputs)
+        {
+            // Set active id so it can be queried by user via IsItemActive(), equivalent of holding the mouse button.
+            pressed = true;
+            SetActiveID(id, window);
+            g.ActiveIdSource = ImGuiInputSource_Nav;
+            if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus))
+                SetFocusID(id, window);
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Process while held
+    bool held = false;
+    if (g.ActiveId == id)
+    {
+        if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse)
+        {
+            if (g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
+                g.ActiveIdClickOffset = g.IO.MousePos - bb.Min;
+
+            const int mouse_button = g.ActiveIdMouseButton;
+            IM_ASSERT(mouse_button >= 0 && mouse_button < ImGuiMouseButton_COUNT);
+            if (g.IO.MouseDown[mouse_button])
+            {
+                held = true;
+            }
+            else
+            {
+                bool release_in = hovered && (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease) != 0;
+                bool release_anywhere = (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickReleaseAnywhere) != 0;
+                if ((release_in || release_anywhere) && !g.DragDropActive)
+                {
+                    // Report as pressed when releasing the mouse (this is the most common path)
+                    bool is_double_click_release = (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick) && g.IO.MouseReleased[mouse_button] && g.IO.MouseClickedLastCount[mouse_button] == 2;
+                    bool is_repeating_already = (flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat) && g.IO.MouseDownDurationPrev[mouse_button] >= g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay; // Repeat mode trumps <on release>
+                    if (!is_double_click_release && !is_repeating_already)
+                        pressed = true;
+                }
+                ClearActiveID();
+            }
+            if (!(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus))
+                g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
+        }
+        else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Nav)
+        {
+            // When activated using Nav, we hold on the ActiveID until activation button is released
+            if (g.NavActivateDownId != id)
+                ClearActiveID();
+        }
+        if (pressed)
+            g.ActiveIdHasBeenPressedBefore = true;
+    }
+
+    if (out_hovered) *out_hovered = hovered;
+    if (out_held) *out_held = held;
+
+    return pressed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::ButtonEx(const char* label, const ImVec2& size_arg, ImGuiButtonFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
+    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+
+    ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+    if ((flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_AlignTextBaseLine) && style.FramePadding.y < window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset) // Try to vertically align buttons that are smaller/have no padding so that text baseline matches (bit hacky, since it shouldn't be a flag)
+        pos.y += window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset - style.FramePadding.y;
+    ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, label_size.x + style.FramePadding.x * 2.0f, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f);
+
+    const ImRect bb(pos, pos + size);
+    ItemSize(size, style.FramePadding.y);
+    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
+        return false;
+
+    if (g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat)
+        flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat;
+
+    bool hovered, held;
+    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, flags);
+
+    // Render
+    const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
+    RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
+    RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, true, style.FrameRounding);
+
+    if (g.LogEnabled)
+        LogSetNextTextDecoration("[", "]");
+    RenderTextClipped(bb.Min + style.FramePadding, bb.Max - style.FramePadding, label, NULL, &label_size, style.ButtonTextAlign, &bb);
+
+    // Automatically close popups
+    //if (pressed && !(flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_DontClosePopups) && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup))
+    //    CloseCurrentPopup();
+
+    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags);
+    return pressed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::Button(const char* label, const ImVec2& size_arg)
+{
+    return ButtonEx(label, size_arg, ImGuiButtonFlags_None);
+}
+
+// Small buttons fits within text without additional vertical spacing.
+bool ImGui::SmallButton(const char* label)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    float backup_padding_y = g.Style.FramePadding.y;
+    g.Style.FramePadding.y = 0.0f;
+    bool pressed = ButtonEx(label, ImVec2(0, 0), ImGuiButtonFlags_AlignTextBaseLine);
+    g.Style.FramePadding.y = backup_padding_y;
+    return pressed;
+}
+
+// Tip: use ImGui::PushID()/PopID() to push indices or pointers in the ID stack.
+// Then you can keep 'str_id' empty or the same for all your buttons (instead of creating a string based on a non-string id)
+bool ImGui::InvisibleButton(const char* str_id, const ImVec2& size_arg, ImGuiButtonFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    // Cannot use zero-size for InvisibleButton(). Unlike Button() there is not way to fallback using the label size.
+    IM_ASSERT(size_arg.x != 0.0f && size_arg.y != 0.0f);
+
+    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id);
+    ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, 0.0f, 0.0f);
+    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
+    ItemSize(size);
+    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
+        return false;
+
+    bool hovered, held;
+    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, flags);
+
+    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, str_id, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags);
+    return pressed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::ArrowButtonEx(const char* str_id, ImGuiDir dir, ImVec2 size, ImGuiButtonFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id);
+    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
+    const float default_size = GetFrameHeight();
+    ItemSize(size, (size.y >= default_size) ? g.Style.FramePadding.y : -1.0f);
+    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
+        return false;
+
+    if (g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_ButtonRepeat)
+        flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat;
+
+    bool hovered, held;
+    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, flags);
+
+    // Render
+    const ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
+    const ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
+    RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
+    RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, bg_col, true, g.Style.FrameRounding);
+    RenderArrow(window->DrawList, bb.Min + ImVec2(ImMax(0.0f, (size.x - g.FontSize) * 0.5f), ImMax(0.0f, (size.y - g.FontSize) * 0.5f)), text_col, dir);
+
+    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, str_id, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags);
+    return pressed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::ArrowButton(const char* str_id, ImGuiDir dir)
+{
+    float sz = GetFrameHeight();
+    return ArrowButtonEx(str_id, dir, ImVec2(sz, sz), ImGuiButtonFlags_None);
+}
+
+// Button to close a window
+bool ImGui::CloseButton(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& pos)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+    // Tweak 1: Shrink hit-testing area if button covers an abnormally large proportion of the visible region. That's in order to facilitate moving the window away. (#3825)
+    // This may better be applied as a general hit-rect reduction mechanism for all widgets to ensure the area to move window is always accessible?
+    const ImRect bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(g.FontSize, g.FontSize) + g.Style.FramePadding * 2.0f);
+    ImRect bb_interact = bb;
+    const float area_to_visible_ratio = window->OuterRectClipped.GetArea() / bb.GetArea();
+    if (area_to_visible_ratio < 1.5f)
+        bb_interact.Expand(ImFloor(bb_interact.GetSize() * -0.25f));
+
+    // Tweak 2: We intentionally allow interaction when clipped so that a mechanical Alt,Right,Activate sequence can always close a window.
+    // (this isn't the regular behavior of buttons, but it doesn't affect the user much because navigation tends to keep items visible).
+    bool is_clipped = !ItemAdd(bb_interact, id);
+
+    bool hovered, held;
+    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb_interact, id, &hovered, &held);
+    if (is_clipped)
+        return pressed;
+
+    // Render
+    // FIXME: Clarify this mess
+    ImU32 col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered);
+    ImVec2 center = bb.GetCenter();
+    if (hovered)
+        window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(center, ImMax(2.0f, g.FontSize * 0.5f + 1.0f), col, 12);
+
+    float cross_extent = g.FontSize * 0.5f * 0.7071f - 1.0f;
+    ImU32 cross_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
+    center -= ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f);
+    window->DrawList->AddLine(center + ImVec2(+cross_extent, +cross_extent), center + ImVec2(-cross_extent, -cross_extent), cross_col, 1.0f);
+    window->DrawList->AddLine(center + ImVec2(+cross_extent, -cross_extent), center + ImVec2(-cross_extent, +cross_extent), cross_col, 1.0f);
+
+    return pressed;
+}
+
+// The Collapse button also functions as a Dock Menu button.
+bool ImGui::CollapseButton(ImGuiID id, const ImVec2& pos, ImGuiDockNode* dock_node)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+    ImRect bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(g.FontSize, g.FontSize) + g.Style.FramePadding * 2.0f);
+    ItemAdd(bb, id);
+    bool hovered, held;
+    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_None);
+
+    // Render
+    //bool is_dock_menu = (window->DockNodeAsHost && !window->Collapsed);
+    ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
+    ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
+    if (hovered || held)
+        window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(bb.GetCenter() + ImVec2(0,-0.5f), g.FontSize * 0.5f + 1.0f, bg_col, 12);
+
+    if (dock_node)
+        RenderArrowDockMenu(window->DrawList, bb.Min + g.Style.FramePadding, g.FontSize, text_col);
+    else
+        RenderArrow(window->DrawList, bb.Min + g.Style.FramePadding, text_col, window->Collapsed ? ImGuiDir_Right : ImGuiDir_Down, 1.0f);
+
+    // Switch to moving the window after mouse is moved beyond the initial drag threshold
+    if (IsItemActive() && IsMouseDragging(0))
+        StartMouseMovingWindowOrNode(window, dock_node, true);
+
+    return pressed;
+}
+
+ImGuiID ImGui::GetWindowScrollbarID(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiAxis axis)
+{
+    return window->GetID(axis == ImGuiAxis_X ? "#SCROLLX" : "#SCROLLY");
+}
+
+// Return scrollbar rectangle, must only be called for corresponding axis if window->ScrollbarX/Y is set.
+ImRect ImGui::GetWindowScrollbarRect(ImGuiWindow* window, ImGuiAxis axis)
+{
+    const ImRect outer_rect = window->Rect();
+    const ImRect inner_rect = window->InnerRect;
+    const float border_size = window->WindowBorderSize;
+    const float scrollbar_size = window->ScrollbarSizes[axis ^ 1]; // (ScrollbarSizes.x = width of Y scrollbar; ScrollbarSizes.y = height of X scrollbar)
+    IM_ASSERT(scrollbar_size > 0.0f);
+    if (axis == ImGuiAxis_X)
+        return ImRect(inner_rect.Min.x, ImMax(outer_rect.Min.y, outer_rect.Max.y - border_size - scrollbar_size), inner_rect.Max.x, outer_rect.Max.y);
+    else
+        return ImRect(ImMax(outer_rect.Min.x, outer_rect.Max.x - border_size - scrollbar_size), inner_rect.Min.y, outer_rect.Max.x, inner_rect.Max.y);
+}
+
+void ImGui::Scrollbar(ImGuiAxis axis)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    const ImGuiID id = GetWindowScrollbarID(window, axis);
+
+    // Calculate scrollbar bounding box
+    ImRect bb = GetWindowScrollbarRect(window, axis);
+    ImDrawFlags rounding_corners = ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersNone;
+    if (axis == ImGuiAxis_X)
+    {
+        rounding_corners |= ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomLeft;
+        if (!window->ScrollbarY)
+            rounding_corners |= ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        if ((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar) && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar))
+            rounding_corners |= ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersTopRight;
+        if (!window->ScrollbarX)
+            rounding_corners |= ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersBottomRight;
+    }
+    float size_avail = window->InnerRect.Max[axis] - window->InnerRect.Min[axis];
+    float size_contents = window->ContentSize[axis] + window->WindowPadding[axis] * 2.0f;
+    ImS64 scroll = (ImS64)window->Scroll[axis];
+    ScrollbarEx(bb, id, axis, &scroll, (ImS64)size_avail, (ImS64)size_contents, rounding_corners);
+    window->Scroll[axis] = (float)scroll;
+}
+
+// Vertical/Horizontal scrollbar
+// The entire piece of code below is rather confusing because:
+// - We handle absolute seeking (when first clicking outside the grab) and relative manipulation (afterward or when clicking inside the grab)
+// - We store values as normalized ratio and in a form that allows the window content to change while we are holding on a scrollbar
+// - We handle both horizontal and vertical scrollbars, which makes the terminology not ideal.
+// Still, the code should probably be made simpler..
+bool ImGui::ScrollbarEx(const ImRect& bb_frame, ImGuiID id, ImGuiAxis axis, ImS64* p_scroll_v, ImS64 size_avail_v, ImS64 size_contents_v, ImDrawFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    KeepAliveID(id);
+
+    const float bb_frame_width = bb_frame.GetWidth();
+    const float bb_frame_height = bb_frame.GetHeight();
+    if (bb_frame_width <= 0.0f || bb_frame_height <= 0.0f)
+        return false;
+
+    // When we are too small, start hiding and disabling the grab (this reduce visual noise on very small window and facilitate using the window resize grab)
+    float alpha = 1.0f;
+    if ((axis == ImGuiAxis_Y) && bb_frame_height < g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f)
+        alpha = ImSaturate((bb_frame_height - g.FontSize) / (g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
+    if (alpha <= 0.0f)
+        return false;
+
+    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+    const bool allow_interaction = (alpha >= 1.0f);
+
+    ImRect bb = bb_frame;
+    bb.Expand(ImVec2(-ImClamp(IM_FLOOR((bb_frame_width - 2.0f) * 0.5f), 0.0f, 3.0f), -ImClamp(IM_FLOOR((bb_frame_height - 2.0f) * 0.5f), 0.0f, 3.0f)));
+
+    // V denote the main, longer axis of the scrollbar (= height for a vertical scrollbar)
+    const float scrollbar_size_v = (axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? bb.GetWidth() : bb.GetHeight();
+
+    // Calculate the height of our grabbable box. It generally represent the amount visible (vs the total scrollable amount)
+    // But we maintain a minimum size in pixel to allow for the user to still aim inside.
+    IM_ASSERT(ImMax(size_contents_v, size_avail_v) > 0.0f); // Adding this assert to check if the ImMax(XXX,1.0f) is still needed. PLEASE CONTACT ME if this triggers.
+    const ImS64 win_size_v = ImMax(ImMax(size_contents_v, size_avail_v), (ImS64)1);
+    const float grab_h_pixels = ImClamp(scrollbar_size_v * ((float)size_avail_v / (float)win_size_v), style.GrabMinSize, scrollbar_size_v);
+    const float grab_h_norm = grab_h_pixels / scrollbar_size_v;
+
+    // Handle input right away. None of the code of Begin() is relying on scrolling position before calling Scrollbar().
+    bool held = false;
+    bool hovered = false;
+    ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_NoNavFocus);
+
+    const ImS64 scroll_max = ImMax((ImS64)1, size_contents_v - size_avail_v);
+    float scroll_ratio = ImSaturate((float)*p_scroll_v / (float)scroll_max);
+    float grab_v_norm = scroll_ratio * (scrollbar_size_v - grab_h_pixels) / scrollbar_size_v; // Grab position in normalized space
+    if (held && allow_interaction && grab_h_norm < 1.0f)
+    {
+        const float scrollbar_pos_v = bb.Min[axis];
+        const float mouse_pos_v = g.IO.MousePos[axis];
+
+        // Click position in scrollbar normalized space (0.0f->1.0f)
+        const float clicked_v_norm = ImSaturate((mouse_pos_v - scrollbar_pos_v) / scrollbar_size_v);
+        SetHoveredID(id);
+
+        bool seek_absolute = false;
+        if (g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
+        {
+            // On initial click calculate the distance between mouse and the center of the grab
+            seek_absolute = (clicked_v_norm < grab_v_norm || clicked_v_norm > grab_v_norm + grab_h_norm);
+            if (seek_absolute)
+                g.ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter = 0.0f;
+            else
+                g.ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter = clicked_v_norm - grab_v_norm - grab_h_norm * 0.5f;
+        }
+
+        // Apply scroll (p_scroll_v will generally point on one member of window->Scroll)
+        // It is ok to modify Scroll here because we are being called in Begin() after the calculation of ContentSize and before setting up our starting position
+        const float scroll_v_norm = ImSaturate((clicked_v_norm - g.ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter - grab_h_norm * 0.5f) / (1.0f - grab_h_norm));
+        *p_scroll_v = (ImS64)(scroll_v_norm * scroll_max);
+
+        // Update values for rendering
+        scroll_ratio = ImSaturate((float)*p_scroll_v / (float)scroll_max);
+        grab_v_norm = scroll_ratio * (scrollbar_size_v - grab_h_pixels) / scrollbar_size_v;
+
+        // Update distance to grab now that we have seeked and saturated
+        if (seek_absolute)
+            g.ScrollbarClickDeltaToGrabCenter = clicked_v_norm - grab_v_norm - grab_h_norm * 0.5f;
+    }
+
+    // Render
+    const ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_ScrollbarBg);
+    const ImU32 grab_col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrabHovered : ImGuiCol_ScrollbarGrab, alpha);
+    window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_frame.Min, bb_frame.Max, bg_col, window->WindowRounding, flags);
+    ImRect grab_rect;
+    if (axis == ImGuiAxis_X)
+        grab_rect = ImRect(ImLerp(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x, grab_v_norm), bb.Min.y, ImLerp(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x, grab_v_norm) + grab_h_pixels, bb.Max.y);
+    else
+        grab_rect = ImRect(bb.Min.x, ImLerp(bb.Min.y, bb.Max.y, grab_v_norm), bb.Max.x, ImLerp(bb.Min.y, bb.Max.y, grab_v_norm) + grab_h_pixels);
+    window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(grab_rect.Min, grab_rect.Max, grab_col, style.ScrollbarRounding);
+
+    return held;
+}
+
+void ImGui::Image(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0, const ImVec2& uv1, const ImVec4& tint_col, const ImVec4& border_col)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return;
+
+    ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
+    if (border_col.w > 0.0f)
+        bb.Max += ImVec2(2, 2);
+    ItemSize(bb);
+    if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
+        return;
+
+    if (border_col.w > 0.0f)
+    {
+        window->DrawList->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(border_col), 0.0f);
+        window->DrawList->AddImage(user_texture_id, bb.Min + ImVec2(1, 1), bb.Max - ImVec2(1, 1), uv0, uv1, GetColorU32(tint_col));
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        window->DrawList->AddImage(user_texture_id, bb.Min, bb.Max, uv0, uv1, GetColorU32(tint_col));
+    }
+}
+
+// ImageButton() is flawed as 'id' is always derived from 'texture_id' (see #2464 #1390)
+// We provide this internal helper to write your own variant while we figure out how to redesign the public ImageButton() API.
+bool ImGui::ImageButtonEx(ImGuiID id, ImTextureID texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0, const ImVec2& uv1, const ImVec2& padding, const ImVec4& bg_col, const ImVec4& tint_col)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size + padding * 2);
+    ItemSize(bb);
+    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
+        return false;
+
+    bool hovered, held;
+    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held);
+
+    // Render
+    const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
+    RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
+    RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, true, ImClamp((float)ImMin(padding.x, padding.y), 0.0f, g.Style.FrameRounding));
+    if (bg_col.w > 0.0f)
+        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb.Min + padding, bb.Max - padding, GetColorU32(bg_col));
+    window->DrawList->AddImage(texture_id, bb.Min + padding, bb.Max - padding, uv0, uv1, GetColorU32(tint_col));
+
+    return pressed;
+}
+
+// frame_padding < 0: uses FramePadding from style (default)
+// frame_padding = 0: no framing
+// frame_padding > 0: set framing size
+bool ImGui::ImageButton(ImTextureID user_texture_id, const ImVec2& size, const ImVec2& uv0, const ImVec2& uv1, int frame_padding, const ImVec4& bg_col, const ImVec4& tint_col)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    // Default to using texture ID as ID. User can still push string/integer prefixes.
+    PushID((void*)(intptr_t)user_texture_id);
+    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID("#image");
+    PopID();
+
+    const ImVec2 padding = (frame_padding >= 0) ? ImVec2((float)frame_padding, (float)frame_padding) : g.Style.FramePadding;
+    return ImageButtonEx(id, user_texture_id, size, uv0, uv1, padding, bg_col, tint_col);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::Checkbox(const char* label, bool* v)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
+    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+
+    const float square_sz = GetFrameHeight();
+    const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+    const ImRect total_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(square_sz + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f), label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
+    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
+    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id))
+    {
+        IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checkable | (*v ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checked : 0));
+        return false;
+    }
+
+    bool hovered, held;
+    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(total_bb, id, &hovered, &held);
+    if (pressed)
+    {
+        *v = !(*v);
+        MarkItemEdited(id);
+    }
+
+    const ImRect check_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(square_sz, square_sz));
+    RenderNavHighlight(total_bb, id);
+    RenderFrame(check_bb.Min, check_bb.Max, GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding);
+    ImU32 check_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_CheckMark);
+    bool mixed_value = (g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_MixedValue) != 0;
+    if (mixed_value)
+    {
+        // Undocumented tristate/mixed/indeterminate checkbox (#2644)
+        // This may seem awkwardly designed because the aim is to make ImGuiItemFlags_MixedValue supported by all widgets (not just checkbox)
+        ImVec2 pad(ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(square_sz / 3.6f)), ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(square_sz / 3.6f)));
+        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(check_bb.Min + pad, check_bb.Max - pad, check_col, style.FrameRounding);
+    }
+    else if (*v)
+    {
+        const float pad = ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(square_sz / 6.0f));
+        RenderCheckMark(window->DrawList, check_bb.Min + ImVec2(pad, pad), check_col, square_sz - pad * 2.0f);
+    }
+
+    ImVec2 label_pos = ImVec2(check_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, check_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y);
+    if (g.LogEnabled)
+        LogRenderedText(&label_pos, mixed_value ? "[~]" : *v ? "[x]" : "[ ]");
+    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
+        RenderText(label_pos, label);
+
+    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checkable | (*v ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checked : 0));
+    return pressed;
+}
+
+template<typename T>
+bool ImGui::CheckboxFlagsT(const char* label, T* flags, T flags_value)
+{
+    bool all_on = (*flags & flags_value) == flags_value;
+    bool any_on = (*flags & flags_value) != 0;
+    bool pressed;
+    if (!all_on && any_on)
+    {
+        ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+        ImGuiItemFlags backup_item_flags = g.CurrentItemFlags;
+        g.CurrentItemFlags |= ImGuiItemFlags_MixedValue;
+        pressed = Checkbox(label, &all_on);
+        g.CurrentItemFlags = backup_item_flags;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        pressed = Checkbox(label, &all_on);
+
+    }
+    if (pressed)
+    {
+        if (all_on)
+            *flags |= flags_value;
+        else
+            *flags &= ~flags_value;
+    }
+    return pressed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::CheckboxFlags(const char* label, int* flags, int flags_value)
+{
+    return CheckboxFlagsT(label, flags, flags_value);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::CheckboxFlags(const char* label, unsigned int* flags, unsigned int flags_value)
+{
+    return CheckboxFlagsT(label, flags, flags_value);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::CheckboxFlags(const char* label, ImS64* flags, ImS64 flags_value)
+{
+    return CheckboxFlagsT(label, flags, flags_value);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::CheckboxFlags(const char* label, ImU64* flags, ImU64 flags_value)
+{
+    return CheckboxFlagsT(label, flags, flags_value);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::RadioButton(const char* label, bool active)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
+    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+
+    const float square_sz = GetFrameHeight();
+    const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+    const ImRect check_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(square_sz, square_sz));
+    const ImRect total_bb(pos, pos + ImVec2(square_sz + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f), label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
+    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
+    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id))
+        return false;
+
+    ImVec2 center = check_bb.GetCenter();
+    center.x = IM_ROUND(center.x);
+    center.y = IM_ROUND(center.y);
+    const float radius = (square_sz - 1.0f) * 0.5f;
+
+    bool hovered, held;
+    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(total_bb, id, &hovered, &held);
+    if (pressed)
+        MarkItemEdited(id);
+
+    RenderNavHighlight(total_bb, id);
+    window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(center, radius, GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg), 16);
+    if (active)
+    {
+        const float pad = ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(square_sz / 6.0f));
+        window->DrawList->AddCircleFilled(center, radius - pad, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_CheckMark), 16);
+    }
+
+    if (style.FrameBorderSize > 0.0f)
+    {
+        window->DrawList->AddCircle(center + ImVec2(1, 1), radius, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_BorderShadow), 16, style.FrameBorderSize);
+        window->DrawList->AddCircle(center, radius, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), 16, style.FrameBorderSize);
+    }
+
+    ImVec2 label_pos = ImVec2(check_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, check_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y);
+    if (g.LogEnabled)
+        LogRenderedText(&label_pos, active ? "(x)" : "( )");
+    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
+        RenderText(label_pos, label);
+
+    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags);
+    return pressed;
+}
+
+// FIXME: This would work nicely if it was a public template, e.g. 'template<T> RadioButton(const char* label, T* v, T v_button)', but I'm not sure how we would expose it..
+bool ImGui::RadioButton(const char* label, int* v, int v_button)
+{
+    const bool pressed = RadioButton(label, *v == v_button);
+    if (pressed)
+        *v = v_button;
+    return pressed;
+}
+
+// size_arg (for each axis) < 0.0f: align to end, 0.0f: auto, > 0.0f: specified size
+void ImGui::ProgressBar(float fraction, const ImVec2& size_arg, const char* overlay)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+
+    ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+    ImVec2 size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, CalcItemWidth(), g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f);
+    ImRect bb(pos, pos + size);
+    ItemSize(size, style.FramePadding.y);
+    if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
+        return;
+
+    // Render
+    fraction = ImSaturate(fraction);
+    RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding);
+    bb.Expand(ImVec2(-style.FrameBorderSize, -style.FrameBorderSize));
+    const ImVec2 fill_br = ImVec2(ImLerp(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x, fraction), bb.Max.y);
+    RenderRectFilledRangeH(window->DrawList, bb, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram), 0.0f, fraction, style.FrameRounding);
+
+    // Default displaying the fraction as percentage string, but user can override it
+    char overlay_buf[32];
+    if (!overlay)
+    {
+        ImFormatString(overlay_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(overlay_buf), "%.0f%%", fraction * 100 + 0.01f);
+        overlay = overlay_buf;
+    }
+
+    ImVec2 overlay_size = CalcTextSize(overlay, NULL);
+    if (overlay_size.x > 0.0f)
+        RenderTextClipped(ImVec2(ImClamp(fill_br.x + style.ItemSpacing.x, bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x - overlay_size.x - style.ItemInnerSpacing.x), bb.Min.y), bb.Max, overlay, NULL, &overlay_size, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.5f), &bb);
+}
+
+void ImGui::Bullet()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+    const float line_height = ImMax(ImMin(window->DC.CurrLineSize.y, g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.y * 2), g.FontSize);
+    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(g.FontSize, line_height));
+    ItemSize(bb);
+    if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
+    {
+        SameLine(0, style.FramePadding.x * 2);
+        return;
+    }
+
+    // Render and stay on same line
+    ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
+    RenderBullet(window->DrawList, bb.Min + ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x + g.FontSize * 0.5f, line_height * 0.5f), text_col);
+    SameLine(0, style.FramePadding.x * 2.0f);
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: Low-level Layout helpers
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - Spacing()
+// - Dummy()
+// - NewLine()
+// - AlignTextToFramePadding()
+// - SeparatorEx() [Internal]
+// - Separator()
+// - SplitterBehavior() [Internal]
+// - ShrinkWidths() [Internal]
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+void ImGui::Spacing()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return;
+    ItemSize(ImVec2(0, 0));
+}
+
+void ImGui::Dummy(const ImVec2& size)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return;
+
+    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
+    ItemSize(size);
+    ItemAdd(bb, 0);
+}
+
+void ImGui::NewLine()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const ImGuiLayoutType backup_layout_type = window->DC.LayoutType;
+    window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical;
+    window->DC.IsSameLine = false;
+    if (window->DC.CurrLineSize.y > 0.0f)     // In the event that we are on a line with items that is smaller that FontSize high, we will preserve its height.
+        ItemSize(ImVec2(0, 0));
+    else
+        ItemSize(ImVec2(0.0f, g.FontSize));
+    window->DC.LayoutType = backup_layout_type;
+}
+
+void ImGui::AlignTextToFramePadding()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    window->DC.CurrLineSize.y = ImMax(window->DC.CurrLineSize.y, g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2);
+    window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset = ImMax(window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset, g.Style.FramePadding.y);
+}
+
+// Horizontal/vertical separating line
+void ImGui::SeparatorEx(ImGuiSeparatorFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & (ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Horizontal | ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical)));   // Check that only 1 option is selected
+
+    float thickness_draw = 1.0f;
+    float thickness_layout = 0.0f;
+    if (flags & ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical)
+    {
+        // Vertical separator, for menu bars (use current line height). Not exposed because it is misleading and it doesn't have an effect on regular layout.
+        float y1 = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
+        float y2 = window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrLineSize.y;
+        const ImRect bb(ImVec2(window->DC.CursorPos.x, y1), ImVec2(window->DC.CursorPos.x + thickness_draw, y2));
+        ItemSize(ImVec2(thickness_layout, 0.0f));
+        if (!ItemAdd(bb, 0))
+            return;
+
+        // Draw
+        window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(bb.Min.x, bb.Min.y), ImVec2(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.y), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Separator));
+        if (g.LogEnabled)
+            LogText(" |");
+    }
+    else if (flags & ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Horizontal)
+    {
+        // Horizontal Separator
+        float x1 = window->Pos.x;
+        float x2 = window->Pos.x + window->Size.x;
+
+        // FIXME-WORKRECT: old hack (#205) until we decide of consistent behavior with WorkRect/Indent and Separator
+        if (g.GroupStack.Size > 0 && g.GroupStack.back().WindowID == window->ID)
+            x1 += window->DC.Indent.x;
+
+        // FIXME-WORKRECT: In theory we should simply be using WorkRect.Min.x/Max.x everywhere but it isn't aesthetically what we want,
+        // need to introduce a variant of WorkRect for that purpose. (#4787)
+        if (ImGuiTable* table = g.CurrentTable)
+        {
+            x1 = table->Columns[table->CurrentColumn].MinX;
+            x2 = table->Columns[table->CurrentColumn].MaxX;
+        }
+
+        ImGuiOldColumns* columns = (flags & ImGuiSeparatorFlags_SpanAllColumns) ? window->DC.CurrentColumns : NULL;
+        if (columns)
+            PushColumnsBackground();
+
+        // We don't provide our width to the layout so that it doesn't get feed back into AutoFit
+        // FIXME: This prevents ->CursorMaxPos based bounding box evaluation from working (e.g. TableEndCell)
+        const ImRect bb(ImVec2(x1, window->DC.CursorPos.y), ImVec2(x2, window->DC.CursorPos.y + thickness_draw));
+        ItemSize(ImVec2(0.0f, thickness_layout));
+        const bool item_visible = ItemAdd(bb, 0);
+        if (item_visible)
+        {
+            // Draw
+            window->DrawList->AddLine(bb.Min, ImVec2(bb.Max.x, bb.Min.y), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Separator));
+            if (g.LogEnabled)
+                LogRenderedText(&bb.Min, "--------------------------------\n");
+
+        }
+        if (columns)
+        {
+            PopColumnsBackground();
+            columns->LineMinY = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+void ImGui::Separator()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return;
+
+    // Those flags should eventually be overridable by the user
+    ImGuiSeparatorFlags flags = (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal) ? ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Vertical : ImGuiSeparatorFlags_Horizontal;
+    flags |= ImGuiSeparatorFlags_SpanAllColumns; // NB: this only applies to legacy Columns() api as they relied on Separator() a lot.
+    SeparatorEx(flags);
+}
+
+// Using 'hover_visibility_delay' allows us to hide the highlight and mouse cursor for a short time, which can be convenient to reduce visual noise.
+bool ImGui::SplitterBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiAxis axis, float* size1, float* size2, float min_size1, float min_size2, float hover_extend, float hover_visibility_delay, ImU32 bg_col)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+    const ImGuiItemFlags item_flags_backup = g.CurrentItemFlags;
+    g.CurrentItemFlags |= ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav | ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus;
+    bool item_add = ItemAdd(bb, id);
+    g.CurrentItemFlags = item_flags_backup;
+    if (!item_add)
+        return false;
+
+    bool hovered, held;
+    ImRect bb_interact = bb;
+    bb_interact.Expand(axis == ImGuiAxis_Y ? ImVec2(0.0f, hover_extend) : ImVec2(hover_extend, 0.0f));
+    ButtonBehavior(bb_interact, id, &hovered, &held, ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren | ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap);
+    if (hovered)
+        g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect; // for IsItemHovered(), because bb_interact is larger than bb
+    if (g.ActiveId != id)
+        SetItemAllowOverlap();
+
+    if (held || (hovered && g.HoveredIdPreviousFrame == id && g.HoveredIdTimer >= hover_visibility_delay))
+        SetMouseCursor(axis == ImGuiAxis_Y ? ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeNS : ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW);
+
+    ImRect bb_render = bb;
+    if (held)
+    {
+        ImVec2 mouse_delta_2d = g.IO.MousePos - g.ActiveIdClickOffset - bb_interact.Min;
+        float mouse_delta = (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y) ? mouse_delta_2d.y : mouse_delta_2d.x;
+
+        // Minimum pane size
+        float size_1_maximum_delta = ImMax(0.0f, *size1 - min_size1);
+        float size_2_maximum_delta = ImMax(0.0f, *size2 - min_size2);
+        if (mouse_delta < -size_1_maximum_delta)
+            mouse_delta = -size_1_maximum_delta;
+        if (mouse_delta > size_2_maximum_delta)
+            mouse_delta = size_2_maximum_delta;
+
+        // Apply resize
+        if (mouse_delta != 0.0f)
+        {
+            if (mouse_delta < 0.0f)
+                IM_ASSERT(*size1 + mouse_delta >= min_size1);
+            if (mouse_delta > 0.0f)
+                IM_ASSERT(*size2 - mouse_delta >= min_size2);
+            *size1 += mouse_delta;
+            *size2 -= mouse_delta;
+            bb_render.Translate((axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? ImVec2(mouse_delta, 0.0f) : ImVec2(0.0f, mouse_delta));
+            MarkItemEdited(id);
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Render at new position
+    if (bg_col & IM_COL32_A_MASK)
+        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_render.Min, bb_render.Max, bg_col, 0.0f);
+    const ImU32 col = GetColorU32(held ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorActive : (hovered && g.HoveredIdTimer >= hover_visibility_delay) ? ImGuiCol_SeparatorHovered : ImGuiCol_Separator);
+    window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_render.Min, bb_render.Max, col, 0.0f);
+
+    return held;
+}
+
+static int IMGUI_CDECL ShrinkWidthItemComparer(const void* lhs, const void* rhs)
+{
+    const ImGuiShrinkWidthItem* a = (const ImGuiShrinkWidthItem*)lhs;
+    const ImGuiShrinkWidthItem* b = (const ImGuiShrinkWidthItem*)rhs;
+    if (int d = (int)(b->Width - a->Width))
+        return d;
+    return (b->Index - a->Index);
+}
+
+// Shrink excess width from a set of item, by removing width from the larger items first.
+// Set items Width to -1.0f to disable shrinking this item.
+void ImGui::ShrinkWidths(ImGuiShrinkWidthItem* items, int count, float width_excess)
+{
+    if (count == 1)
+    {
+        if (items[0].Width >= 0.0f)
+            items[0].Width = ImMax(items[0].Width - width_excess, 1.0f);
+        return;
+    }
+    ImQsort(items, (size_t)count, sizeof(ImGuiShrinkWidthItem), ShrinkWidthItemComparer);
+    int count_same_width = 1;
+    while (width_excess > 0.0f && count_same_width < count)
+    {
+        while (count_same_width < count && items[0].Width <= items[count_same_width].Width)
+            count_same_width++;
+        float max_width_to_remove_per_item = (count_same_width < count && items[count_same_width].Width >= 0.0f) ? (items[0].Width - items[count_same_width].Width) : (items[0].Width - 1.0f);
+        if (max_width_to_remove_per_item <= 0.0f)
+            break;
+        float width_to_remove_per_item = ImMin(width_excess / count_same_width, max_width_to_remove_per_item);
+        for (int item_n = 0; item_n < count_same_width; item_n++)
+            items[item_n].Width -= width_to_remove_per_item;
+        width_excess -= width_to_remove_per_item * count_same_width;
+    }
+
+    // Round width and redistribute remainder
+    // Ensure that e.g. the right-most tab of a shrunk tab-bar always reaches exactly at the same distance from the right-most edge of the tab bar separator.
+    width_excess = 0.0f;
+    for (int n = 0; n < count; n++)
+    {
+        float width_rounded = ImFloor(items[n].Width);
+        width_excess += items[n].Width - width_rounded;
+        items[n].Width = width_rounded;
+    }
+    while (width_excess > 0.0f)
+        for (int n = 0; n < count; n++)
+            if (items[n].Width + 1.0f <= items[n].InitialWidth)
+            {
+                items[n].Width += 1.0f;
+                width_excess -= 1.0f;
+            }
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: ComboBox
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount() [Internal]
+// - BeginCombo()
+// - BeginComboPopup() [Internal]
+// - EndCombo()
+// - BeginComboPreview() [Internal]
+// - EndComboPreview() [Internal]
+// - Combo()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+static float CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount(int items_count)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (items_count <= 0)
+        return FLT_MAX;
+    return (g.FontSize + g.Style.ItemSpacing.y) * items_count - g.Style.ItemSpacing.y + (g.Style.WindowPadding.y * 2);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::BeginCombo(const char* label, const char* preview_value, ImGuiComboFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+
+    ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags backup_next_window_data_flags = g.NextWindowData.Flags;
+    g.NextWindowData.ClearFlags(); // We behave like Begin() and need to consume those values
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
+    IM_ASSERT((flags & (ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton | ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview)) != (ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton | ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview)); // Can't use both flags together
+
+    const float arrow_size = (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton) ? 0.0f : GetFrameHeight();
+    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+    const float w = (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview) ? arrow_size : CalcItemWidth();
+    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
+    const ImRect total_bb(bb.Min, bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));
+    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
+    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &bb))
+        return false;
+
+    // Open on click
+    bool hovered, held;
+    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held);
+    const ImGuiID popup_id = ImHashStr("##ComboPopup", 0, id);
+    bool popup_open = IsPopupOpen(popup_id, ImGuiPopupFlags_None);
+    if (pressed && !popup_open)
+    {
+        OpenPopupEx(popup_id, ImGuiPopupFlags_None);
+        popup_open = true;
+    }
+
+    // Render shape
+    const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
+    const float value_x2 = ImMax(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x - arrow_size);
+    RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
+    if (!(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview))
+        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb.Min, ImVec2(value_x2, bb.Max.y), frame_col, style.FrameRounding, (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton) ? ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll : ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersLeft);
+    if (!(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoArrowButton))
+    {
+        ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32((popup_open || hovered) ? ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered : ImGuiCol_Button);
+        ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
+        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(ImVec2(value_x2, bb.Min.y), bb.Max, bg_col, style.FrameRounding, (w <= arrow_size) ? ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersAll : ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersRight);
+        if (value_x2 + arrow_size - style.FramePadding.x <= bb.Max.x)
+            RenderArrow(window->DrawList, ImVec2(value_x2 + style.FramePadding.y, bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), text_col, ImGuiDir_Down, 1.0f);
+    }
+    RenderFrameBorder(bb.Min, bb.Max, style.FrameRounding);
+
+    // Custom preview
+    if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_CustomPreview)
+    {
+        g.ComboPreviewData.PreviewRect = ImRect(bb.Min.x, bb.Min.y, value_x2, bb.Max.y);
+        IM_ASSERT(preview_value == NULL || preview_value[0] == 0);
+        preview_value = NULL;
+    }
+
+    // Render preview and label
+    if (preview_value != NULL && !(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview))
+    {
+        if (g.LogEnabled)
+            LogSetNextTextDecoration("{", "}");
+        RenderTextClipped(bb.Min + style.FramePadding, ImVec2(value_x2, bb.Max.y), preview_value, NULL, NULL);
+    }
+    if (label_size.x > 0)
+        RenderText(ImVec2(bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);
+
+    if (!popup_open)
+        return false;
+
+    g.NextWindowData.Flags = backup_next_window_data_flags;
+    return BeginComboPopup(popup_id, bb, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::BeginComboPopup(ImGuiID popup_id, const ImRect& bb, ImGuiComboFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (!IsPopupOpen(popup_id, ImGuiPopupFlags_None))
+    {
+        g.NextWindowData.ClearFlags();
+        return false;
+    }
+
+    // Set popup size
+    float w = bb.GetWidth();
+    if (g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSizeConstraint)
+    {
+        g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintRect.Min.x = ImMax(g.NextWindowData.SizeConstraintRect.Min.x, w);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        if ((flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightMask_) == 0)
+            flags |= ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular;
+        IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightMask_)); // Only one
+        int popup_max_height_in_items = -1;
+        if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightRegular)     popup_max_height_in_items = 8;
+        else if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightSmall)  popup_max_height_in_items = 4;
+        else if (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLarge)  popup_max_height_in_items = 20;
+        SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(w, 0.0f), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount(popup_max_height_in_items)));
+    }
+
+    // This is essentially a specialized version of BeginPopupEx()
+    char name[16];
+    ImFormatString(name, IM_ARRAYSIZE(name), "##Combo_%02d", g.BeginPopupStack.Size); // Recycle windows based on depth
+
+    // Set position given a custom constraint (peak into expected window size so we can position it)
+    // FIXME: This might be easier to express with an hypothetical SetNextWindowPosConstraints() function?
+    // FIXME: This might be moved to Begin() or at least around the same spot where Tooltips and other Popups are calling FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx()?
+    if (ImGuiWindow* popup_window = FindWindowByName(name))
+        if (popup_window->WasActive)
+        {
+            // Always override 'AutoPosLastDirection' to not leave a chance for a past value to affect us.
+            ImVec2 size_expected = CalcWindowNextAutoFitSize(popup_window);
+            popup_window->AutoPosLastDirection = (flags & ImGuiComboFlags_PopupAlignLeft) ? ImGuiDir_Left : ImGuiDir_Down; // Left = "Below, Toward Left", Down = "Below, Toward Right (default)"
+            ImRect r_outer = GetPopupAllowedExtentRect(popup_window);
+            ImVec2 pos = FindBestWindowPosForPopupEx(bb.GetBL(), size_expected, &popup_window->AutoPosLastDirection, r_outer, bb, ImGuiPopupPositionPolicy_ComboBox);
+            SetNextWindowPos(pos);
+        }
+
+    // We don't use BeginPopupEx() solely because we have a custom name string, which we could make an argument to BeginPopupEx()
+    ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove;
+    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, ImVec2(g.Style.FramePadding.x, g.Style.WindowPadding.y)); // Horizontally align ourselves with the framed text
+    bool ret = Begin(name, NULL, window_flags);
+    PopStyleVar();
+    if (!ret)
+    {
+        EndPopup();
+        IM_ASSERT(0);   // This should never happen as we tested for IsPopupOpen() above
+        return false;
+    }
+    return true;
+}
+
+void ImGui::EndCombo()
+{
+    EndPopup();
+}
+
+// Call directly after the BeginCombo/EndCombo block. The preview is designed to only host non-interactive elements
+// (Experimental, see GitHub issues: #1658, #4168)
+bool ImGui::BeginComboPreview()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    ImGuiComboPreviewData* preview_data = &g.ComboPreviewData;
+
+    if (window->SkipItems || !window->ClipRect.Overlaps(g.LastItemData.Rect)) // FIXME: Because we don't have a ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Visible flag to test last ItemAdd() result
+        return false;
+    IM_ASSERT(g.LastItemData.Rect.Min.x == preview_data->PreviewRect.Min.x && g.LastItemData.Rect.Min.y == preview_data->PreviewRect.Min.y); // Didn't call after BeginCombo/EndCombo block or forgot to pass ImGuiComboFlags_CustomPreview flag?
+    if (!window->ClipRect.Contains(preview_data->PreviewRect)) // Narrower test (optional)
+        return false;
+
+    // FIXME: This could be contained in a PushWorkRect() api
+    preview_data->BackupCursorPos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+    preview_data->BackupCursorMaxPos = window->DC.CursorMaxPos;
+    preview_data->BackupCursorPosPrevLine = window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine;
+    preview_data->BackupPrevLineTextBaseOffset = window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset;
+    preview_data->BackupLayout = window->DC.LayoutType;
+    window->DC.CursorPos = preview_data->PreviewRect.Min + g.Style.FramePadding;
+    window->DC.CursorMaxPos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+    window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal;
+    window->DC.IsSameLine = false;
+    PushClipRect(preview_data->PreviewRect.Min, preview_data->PreviewRect.Max, true);
+
+    return true;
+}
+
+void ImGui::EndComboPreview()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    ImGuiComboPreviewData* preview_data = &g.ComboPreviewData;
+
+    // FIXME: Using CursorMaxPos approximation instead of correct AABB which we will store in ImDrawCmd in the future
+    ImDrawList* draw_list = window->DrawList;
+    if (window->DC.CursorMaxPos.x < preview_data->PreviewRect.Max.x && window->DC.CursorMaxPos.y < preview_data->PreviewRect.Max.y)
+        if (draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size > 1) // Unlikely case that the PushClipRect() didn't create a command
+        {
+            draw_list->_CmdHeader.ClipRect = draw_list->CmdBuffer[draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size - 1].ClipRect = draw_list->CmdBuffer[draw_list->CmdBuffer.Size - 2].ClipRect;
+            draw_list->_TryMergeDrawCmds();
+        }
+    PopClipRect();
+    window->DC.CursorPos = preview_data->BackupCursorPos;
+    window->DC.CursorMaxPos = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos, preview_data->BackupCursorMaxPos);
+    window->DC.CursorPosPrevLine = preview_data->BackupCursorPosPrevLine;
+    window->DC.PrevLineTextBaseOffset = preview_data->BackupPrevLineTextBaseOffset;
+    window->DC.LayoutType = preview_data->BackupLayout;
+    window->DC.IsSameLine = false;
+    preview_data->PreviewRect = ImRect();
+}
+
+// Getter for the old Combo() API: const char*[]
+static bool Items_ArrayGetter(void* data, int idx, const char** out_text)
+{
+    const char* const* items = (const char* const*)data;
+    if (out_text)
+        *out_text = items[idx];
+    return true;
+}
+
+// Getter for the old Combo() API: "item1\0item2\0item3\0"
+static bool Items_SingleStringGetter(void* data, int idx, const char** out_text)
+{
+    // FIXME-OPT: we could pre-compute the indices to fasten this. But only 1 active combo means the waste is limited.
+    const char* items_separated_by_zeros = (const char*)data;
+    int items_count = 0;
+    const char* p = items_separated_by_zeros;
+    while (*p)
+    {
+        if (idx == items_count)
+            break;
+        p += strlen(p) + 1;
+        items_count++;
+    }
+    if (!*p)
+        return false;
+    if (out_text)
+        *out_text = p;
+    return true;
+}
+
+// Old API, prefer using BeginCombo() nowadays if you can.
+bool ImGui::Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, bool (*items_getter)(void*, int, const char**), void* data, int items_count, int popup_max_height_in_items)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    // Call the getter to obtain the preview string which is a parameter to BeginCombo()
+    const char* preview_value = NULL;
+    if (*current_item >= 0 && *current_item < items_count)
+        items_getter(data, *current_item, &preview_value);
+
+    // The old Combo() API exposed "popup_max_height_in_items". The new more general BeginCombo() API doesn't have/need it, but we emulate it here.
+    if (popup_max_height_in_items != -1 && !(g.NextWindowData.Flags & ImGuiNextWindowDataFlags_HasSizeConstraint))
+        SetNextWindowSizeConstraints(ImVec2(0, 0), ImVec2(FLT_MAX, CalcMaxPopupHeightFromItemCount(popup_max_height_in_items)));
+
+    if (!BeginCombo(label, preview_value, ImGuiComboFlags_None))
+        return false;
+
+    // Display items
+    // FIXME-OPT: Use clipper (but we need to disable it on the appearing frame to make sure our call to SetItemDefaultFocus() is processed)
+    bool value_changed = false;
+    for (int i = 0; i < items_count; i++)
+    {
+        PushID(i);
+        const bool item_selected = (i == *current_item);
+        const char* item_text;
+        if (!items_getter(data, i, &item_text))
+            item_text = "*Unknown item*";
+        if (Selectable(item_text, item_selected))
+        {
+            value_changed = true;
+            *current_item = i;
+        }
+        if (item_selected)
+            SetItemDefaultFocus();
+        PopID();
+    }
+
+    EndCombo();
+
+    if (value_changed)
+        MarkItemEdited(g.LastItemData.ID);
+
+    return value_changed;
+}
+
+// Combo box helper allowing to pass an array of strings.
+bool ImGui::Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* const items[], int items_count, int height_in_items)
+{
+    const bool value_changed = Combo(label, current_item, Items_ArrayGetter, (void*)items, items_count, height_in_items);
+    return value_changed;
+}
+
+// Combo box helper allowing to pass all items in a single string literal holding multiple zero-terminated items "item1\0item2\0"
+bool ImGui::Combo(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* items_separated_by_zeros, int height_in_items)
+{
+    int items_count = 0;
+    const char* p = items_separated_by_zeros;       // FIXME-OPT: Avoid computing this, or at least only when combo is open
+    while (*p)
+    {
+        p += strlen(p) + 1;
+        items_count++;
+    }
+    bool value_changed = Combo(label, current_item, Items_SingleStringGetter, (void*)items_separated_by_zeros, items_count, height_in_items);
+    return value_changed;
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Data Type and Data Formatting Helpers [Internal]
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - PatchFormatStringFloatToInt()
+// - DataTypeGetInfo()
+// - DataTypeFormatString()
+// - DataTypeApplyOp()
+// - DataTypeApplyOpFromText()
+// - DataTypeCompare()
+// - DataTypeClamp()
+// - GetMinimumStepAtDecimalPrecision
+// - RoundScalarWithFormat<>()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+static const ImGuiDataTypeInfo GDataTypeInfo[] =
+{
+    { sizeof(char),             "S8",   "%d",   "%d"    },  // ImGuiDataType_S8
+    { sizeof(unsigned char),    "U8",   "%u",   "%u"    },
+    { sizeof(short),            "S16",  "%d",   "%d"    },  // ImGuiDataType_S16
+    { sizeof(unsigned short),   "U16",  "%u",   "%u"    },
+    { sizeof(int),              "S32",  "%d",   "%d"    },  // ImGuiDataType_S32
+    { sizeof(unsigned int),     "U32",  "%u",   "%u"    },
+#ifdef _MSC_VER
+    { sizeof(ImS64),            "S64",  "%I64d","%I64d" },  // ImGuiDataType_S64
+    { sizeof(ImU64),            "U64",  "%I64u","%I64u" },
+#else
+    { sizeof(ImS64),            "S64",  "%lld", "%lld"  },  // ImGuiDataType_S64
+    { sizeof(ImU64),            "U64",  "%llu", "%llu"  },
+#endif
+    { sizeof(float),            "float", "%.3f","%f"    },  // ImGuiDataType_Float (float are promoted to double in va_arg)
+    { sizeof(double),           "double","%f",  "%lf"   },  // ImGuiDataType_Double
+};
+IM_STATIC_ASSERT(IM_ARRAYSIZE(GDataTypeInfo) == ImGuiDataType_COUNT);
+
+// FIXME-LEGACY: Prior to 1.61 our DragInt() function internally used floats and because of this the compile-time default value for format was "%.0f".
+// Even though we changed the compile-time default, we expect users to have carried %f around, which would break the display of DragInt() calls.
+// To honor backward compatibility we are rewriting the format string, unless IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS is enabled. What could possibly go wrong?!
+static const char* PatchFormatStringFloatToInt(const char* fmt)
+{
+    if (fmt[0] == '%' && fmt[1] == '.' && fmt[2] == '0' && fmt[3] == 'f' && fmt[4] == 0) // Fast legacy path for "%.0f" which is expected to be the most common case.
+        return "%d";
+    const char* fmt_start = ImParseFormatFindStart(fmt);    // Find % (if any, and ignore %%)
+    const char* fmt_end = ImParseFormatFindEnd(fmt_start);  // Find end of format specifier, which itself is an exercise of confidence/recklessness (because snprintf is dependent on libc or user).
+    if (fmt_end > fmt_start && fmt_end[-1] == 'f')
+    {
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+        if (fmt_start == fmt && fmt_end[0] == 0)
+            return "%d";
+        const char* tmp_format;
+        ImFormatStringToTempBuffer(&tmp_format, NULL, "%.*s%%d%s", (int)(fmt_start - fmt), fmt, fmt_end); // Honor leading and trailing decorations, but lose alignment/precision.
+        return tmp_format;
+#else
+        IM_ASSERT(0 && "DragInt(): Invalid format string!"); // Old versions used a default parameter of "%.0f", please replace with e.g. "%d"
+#endif
+    }
+    return fmt;
+}
+
+const ImGuiDataTypeInfo* ImGui::DataTypeGetInfo(ImGuiDataType data_type)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(data_type >= 0 && data_type < ImGuiDataType_COUNT);
+    return &GDataTypeInfo[data_type];
+}
+
+int ImGui::DataTypeFormatString(char* buf, int buf_size, ImGuiDataType data_type, const void* p_data, const char* format)
+{
+    // Signedness doesn't matter when pushing integer arguments
+    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32 || data_type == ImGuiDataType_U32)
+        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImU32*)p_data);
+    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S64 || data_type == ImGuiDataType_U64)
+        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImU64*)p_data);
+    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float)
+        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const float*)p_data);
+    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double)
+        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const double*)p_data);
+    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S8)
+        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImS8*)p_data);
+    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_U8)
+        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImU8*)p_data);
+    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S16)
+        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImS16*)p_data);
+    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_U16)
+        return ImFormatString(buf, buf_size, format, *(const ImU16*)p_data);
+    IM_ASSERT(0);
+    return 0;
+}
+
+void ImGui::DataTypeApplyOp(ImGuiDataType data_type, int op, void* output, const void* arg1, const void* arg2)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(op == '+' || op == '-');
+    switch (data_type)
+    {
+        case ImGuiDataType_S8:
+            if (op == '+') { *(ImS8*)output  = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImS8*)arg1,  *(const ImS8*)arg2,  IM_S8_MIN,  IM_S8_MAX); }
+            if (op == '-') { *(ImS8*)output  = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImS8*)arg1,  *(const ImS8*)arg2,  IM_S8_MIN,  IM_S8_MAX); }
+            return;
+        case ImGuiDataType_U8:
+            if (op == '+') { *(ImU8*)output  = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImU8*)arg1,  *(const ImU8*)arg2,  IM_U8_MIN,  IM_U8_MAX); }
+            if (op == '-') { *(ImU8*)output  = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImU8*)arg1,  *(const ImU8*)arg2,  IM_U8_MIN,  IM_U8_MAX); }
+            return;
+        case ImGuiDataType_S16:
+            if (op == '+') { *(ImS16*)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImS16*)arg1, *(const ImS16*)arg2, IM_S16_MIN, IM_S16_MAX); }
+            if (op == '-') { *(ImS16*)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImS16*)arg1, *(const ImS16*)arg2, IM_S16_MIN, IM_S16_MAX); }
+            return;
+        case ImGuiDataType_U16:
+            if (op == '+') { *(ImU16*)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImU16*)arg1, *(const ImU16*)arg2, IM_U16_MIN, IM_U16_MAX); }
+            if (op == '-') { *(ImU16*)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImU16*)arg1, *(const ImU16*)arg2, IM_U16_MIN, IM_U16_MAX); }
+            return;
+        case ImGuiDataType_S32:
+            if (op == '+') { *(ImS32*)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImS32*)arg1, *(const ImS32*)arg2, IM_S32_MIN, IM_S32_MAX); }
+            if (op == '-') { *(ImS32*)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImS32*)arg1, *(const ImS32*)arg2, IM_S32_MIN, IM_S32_MAX); }
+            return;
+        case ImGuiDataType_U32:
+            if (op == '+') { *(ImU32*)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImU32*)arg1, *(const ImU32*)arg2, IM_U32_MIN, IM_U32_MAX); }
+            if (op == '-') { *(ImU32*)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImU32*)arg1, *(const ImU32*)arg2, IM_U32_MIN, IM_U32_MAX); }
+            return;
+        case ImGuiDataType_S64:
+            if (op == '+') { *(ImS64*)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImS64*)arg1, *(const ImS64*)arg2, IM_S64_MIN, IM_S64_MAX); }
+            if (op == '-') { *(ImS64*)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImS64*)arg1, *(const ImS64*)arg2, IM_S64_MIN, IM_S64_MAX); }
+            return;
+        case ImGuiDataType_U64:
+            if (op == '+') { *(ImU64*)output = ImAddClampOverflow(*(const ImU64*)arg1, *(const ImU64*)arg2, IM_U64_MIN, IM_U64_MAX); }
+            if (op == '-') { *(ImU64*)output = ImSubClampOverflow(*(const ImU64*)arg1, *(const ImU64*)arg2, IM_U64_MIN, IM_U64_MAX); }
+            return;
+        case ImGuiDataType_Float:
+            if (op == '+') { *(float*)output = *(const float*)arg1 + *(const float*)arg2; }
+            if (op == '-') { *(float*)output = *(const float*)arg1 - *(const float*)arg2; }
+            return;
+        case ImGuiDataType_Double:
+            if (op == '+') { *(double*)output = *(const double*)arg1 + *(const double*)arg2; }
+            if (op == '-') { *(double*)output = *(const double*)arg1 - *(const double*)arg2; }
+            return;
+        case ImGuiDataType_COUNT: break;
+    }
+    IM_ASSERT(0);
+}
+
+// User can input math operators (e.g. +100) to edit a numerical values.
+// NB: This is _not_ a full expression evaluator. We should probably add one and replace this dumb mess..
+bool ImGui::DataTypeApplyFromText(const char* buf, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const char* format)
+{
+    while (ImCharIsBlankA(*buf))
+        buf++;
+    if (!buf[0])
+        return false;
+
+    // Copy the value in an opaque buffer so we can compare at the end of the function if it changed at all.
+    const ImGuiDataTypeInfo* type_info = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type);
+    ImGuiDataTypeTempStorage data_backup;
+    memcpy(&data_backup, p_data, type_info->Size);
+
+    // Sanitize format
+    // For float/double we have to ignore format with precision (e.g. "%.2f") because sscanf doesn't take them in, so force them into %f and %lf
+    char format_sanitized[32];
+    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double)
+        format = type_info->ScanFmt;
+    else
+        format = ImParseFormatSanitizeForScanning(format, format_sanitized, IM_ARRAYSIZE(format_sanitized));
+
+    // Small types need a 32-bit buffer to receive the result from scanf()
+    int v32 = 0;
+    if (sscanf(buf, format, type_info->Size >= 4 ? p_data : &v32) < 1)
+        return false;
+    if (type_info->Size < 4)
+    {
+        if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S8)
+            *(ImS8*)p_data = (ImS8)ImClamp(v32, (int)IM_S8_MIN, (int)IM_S8_MAX);
+        else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_U8)
+            *(ImU8*)p_data = (ImU8)ImClamp(v32, (int)IM_U8_MIN, (int)IM_U8_MAX);
+        else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S16)
+            *(ImS16*)p_data = (ImS16)ImClamp(v32, (int)IM_S16_MIN, (int)IM_S16_MAX);
+        else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_U16)
+            *(ImU16*)p_data = (ImU16)ImClamp(v32, (int)IM_U16_MIN, (int)IM_U16_MAX);
+        else
+            IM_ASSERT(0);
+    }
+
+    return memcmp(&data_backup, p_data, type_info->Size) != 0;
+}
+
+template<typename T>
+static int DataTypeCompareT(const T* lhs, const T* rhs)
+{
+    if (*lhs < *rhs) return -1;
+    if (*lhs > *rhs) return +1;
+    return 0;
+}
+
+int ImGui::DataTypeCompare(ImGuiDataType data_type, const void* arg_1, const void* arg_2)
+{
+    switch (data_type)
+    {
+    case ImGuiDataType_S8:     return DataTypeCompareT<ImS8  >((const ImS8*  )arg_1, (const ImS8*  )arg_2);
+    case ImGuiDataType_U8:     return DataTypeCompareT<ImU8  >((const ImU8*  )arg_1, (const ImU8*  )arg_2);
+    case ImGuiDataType_S16:    return DataTypeCompareT<ImS16 >((const ImS16* )arg_1, (const ImS16* )arg_2);
+    case ImGuiDataType_U16:    return DataTypeCompareT<ImU16 >((const ImU16* )arg_1, (const ImU16* )arg_2);
+    case ImGuiDataType_S32:    return DataTypeCompareT<ImS32 >((const ImS32* )arg_1, (const ImS32* )arg_2);
+    case ImGuiDataType_U32:    return DataTypeCompareT<ImU32 >((const ImU32* )arg_1, (const ImU32* )arg_2);
+    case ImGuiDataType_S64:    return DataTypeCompareT<ImS64 >((const ImS64* )arg_1, (const ImS64* )arg_2);
+    case ImGuiDataType_U64:    return DataTypeCompareT<ImU64 >((const ImU64* )arg_1, (const ImU64* )arg_2);
+    case ImGuiDataType_Float:  return DataTypeCompareT<float >((const float* )arg_1, (const float* )arg_2);
+    case ImGuiDataType_Double: return DataTypeCompareT<double>((const double*)arg_1, (const double*)arg_2);
+    case ImGuiDataType_COUNT:  break;
+    }
+    IM_ASSERT(0);
+    return 0;
+}
+
+template<typename T>
+static bool DataTypeClampT(T* v, const T* v_min, const T* v_max)
+{
+    // Clamp, both sides are optional, return true if modified
+    if (v_min && *v < *v_min) { *v = *v_min; return true; }
+    if (v_max && *v > *v_max) { *v = *v_max; return true; }
+    return false;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::DataTypeClamp(ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_min, const void* p_max)
+{
+    switch (data_type)
+    {
+    case ImGuiDataType_S8:     return DataTypeClampT<ImS8  >((ImS8*  )p_data, (const ImS8*  )p_min, (const ImS8*  )p_max);
+    case ImGuiDataType_U8:     return DataTypeClampT<ImU8  >((ImU8*  )p_data, (const ImU8*  )p_min, (const ImU8*  )p_max);
+    case ImGuiDataType_S16:    return DataTypeClampT<ImS16 >((ImS16* )p_data, (const ImS16* )p_min, (const ImS16* )p_max);
+    case ImGuiDataType_U16:    return DataTypeClampT<ImU16 >((ImU16* )p_data, (const ImU16* )p_min, (const ImU16* )p_max);
+    case ImGuiDataType_S32:    return DataTypeClampT<ImS32 >((ImS32* )p_data, (const ImS32* )p_min, (const ImS32* )p_max);
+    case ImGuiDataType_U32:    return DataTypeClampT<ImU32 >((ImU32* )p_data, (const ImU32* )p_min, (const ImU32* )p_max);
+    case ImGuiDataType_S64:    return DataTypeClampT<ImS64 >((ImS64* )p_data, (const ImS64* )p_min, (const ImS64* )p_max);
+    case ImGuiDataType_U64:    return DataTypeClampT<ImU64 >((ImU64* )p_data, (const ImU64* )p_min, (const ImU64* )p_max);
+    case ImGuiDataType_Float:  return DataTypeClampT<float >((float* )p_data, (const float* )p_min, (const float* )p_max);
+    case ImGuiDataType_Double: return DataTypeClampT<double>((double*)p_data, (const double*)p_min, (const double*)p_max);
+    case ImGuiDataType_COUNT:  break;
+    }
+    IM_ASSERT(0);
+    return false;
+}
+
+static float GetMinimumStepAtDecimalPrecision(int decimal_precision)
+{
+    static const float min_steps[10] = { 1.0f, 0.1f, 0.01f, 0.001f, 0.0001f, 0.00001f, 0.000001f, 0.0000001f, 0.00000001f, 0.000000001f };
+    if (decimal_precision < 0)
+        return FLT_MIN;
+    return (decimal_precision < IM_ARRAYSIZE(min_steps)) ? min_steps[decimal_precision] : ImPow(10.0f, (float)-decimal_precision);
+}
+
+template<typename TYPE>
+TYPE ImGui::RoundScalarWithFormatT(const char* format, ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE v)
+{
+    IM_UNUSED(data_type);
+    IM_ASSERT(data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double);
+    const char* fmt_start = ImParseFormatFindStart(format);
+    if (fmt_start[0] != '%' || fmt_start[1] == '%') // Don't apply if the value is not visible in the format string
+        return v;
+
+    // Sanitize format
+    char fmt_sanitized[32];
+    ImParseFormatSanitizeForPrinting(fmt_start, fmt_sanitized, IM_ARRAYSIZE(fmt_sanitized));
+    fmt_start = fmt_sanitized;
+
+    // Format value with our rounding, and read back
+    char v_str[64];
+    ImFormatString(v_str, IM_ARRAYSIZE(v_str), fmt_start, v);
+    const char* p = v_str;
+    while (*p == ' ')
+        p++;
+    v = (TYPE)ImAtof(p);
+
+    return v;
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: DragScalar, DragFloat, DragInt, etc.
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - DragBehaviorT<>() [Internal]
+// - DragBehavior() [Internal]
+// - DragScalar()
+// - DragScalarN()
+// - DragFloat()
+// - DragFloat2()
+// - DragFloat3()
+// - DragFloat4()
+// - DragFloatRange2()
+// - DragInt()
+// - DragInt2()
+// - DragInt3()
+// - DragInt4()
+// - DragIntRange2()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// This is called by DragBehavior() when the widget is active (held by mouse or being manipulated with Nav controls)
+template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
+bool ImGui::DragBehaviorT(ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE* v, float v_speed, const TYPE v_min, const TYPE v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const ImGuiAxis axis = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_Vertical) ? ImGuiAxis_Y : ImGuiAxis_X;
+    const bool is_clamped = (v_min < v_max);
+    const bool is_logarithmic = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic) != 0;
+    const bool is_floating_point = (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float) || (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double);
+
+    // Default tweak speed
+    if (v_speed == 0.0f && is_clamped && (v_max - v_min < FLT_MAX))
+        v_speed = (float)((v_max - v_min) * g.DragSpeedDefaultRatio);
+
+    // Inputs accumulates into g.DragCurrentAccum, which is flushed into the current value as soon as it makes a difference with our precision settings
+    float adjust_delta = 0.0f;
+    if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse && IsMousePosValid() && IsMouseDragPastThreshold(0, g.IO.MouseDragThreshold * DRAG_MOUSE_THRESHOLD_FACTOR))
+    {
+        adjust_delta = g.IO.MouseDelta[axis];
+        if (g.IO.KeyAlt)
+            adjust_delta *= 1.0f / 100.0f;
+        if (g.IO.KeyShift)
+            adjust_delta *= 10.0f;
+    }
+    else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Nav)
+    {
+        const int decimal_precision = is_floating_point ? ImParseFormatPrecision(format, 3) : 0;
+        const bool tweak_slow = IsKeyDown((g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad) ? ImGuiKey_NavGamepadTweakSlow : ImGuiKey_NavKeyboardTweakSlow);
+        const bool tweak_fast = IsKeyDown((g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad) ? ImGuiKey_NavGamepadTweakFast : ImGuiKey_NavKeyboardTweakFast);
+        const float tweak_factor = tweak_slow ? 1.0f / 1.0f : tweak_fast ? 10.0f : 1.0f;
+        adjust_delta = GetNavTweakPressedAmount(axis) * tweak_factor;
+        v_speed = ImMax(v_speed, GetMinimumStepAtDecimalPrecision(decimal_precision));
+    }
+    adjust_delta *= v_speed;
+
+    // For vertical drag we currently assume that Up=higher value (like we do with vertical sliders). This may become a parameter.
+    if (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y)
+        adjust_delta = -adjust_delta;
+
+    // For logarithmic use our range is effectively 0..1 so scale the delta into that range
+    if (is_logarithmic && (v_max - v_min < FLT_MAX) && ((v_max - v_min) > 0.000001f)) // Epsilon to avoid /0
+        adjust_delta /= (float)(v_max - v_min);
+
+    // Clear current value on activation
+    // Avoid altering values and clamping when we are _already_ past the limits and heading in the same direction, so e.g. if range is 0..255, current value is 300 and we are pushing to the right side, keep the 300.
+    bool is_just_activated = g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated;
+    bool is_already_past_limits_and_pushing_outward = is_clamped && ((*v >= v_max && adjust_delta > 0.0f) || (*v <= v_min && adjust_delta < 0.0f));
+    if (is_just_activated || is_already_past_limits_and_pushing_outward)
+    {
+        g.DragCurrentAccum = 0.0f;
+        g.DragCurrentAccumDirty = false;
+    }
+    else if (adjust_delta != 0.0f)
+    {
+        g.DragCurrentAccum += adjust_delta;
+        g.DragCurrentAccumDirty = true;
+    }
+
+    if (!g.DragCurrentAccumDirty)
+        return false;
+
+    TYPE v_cur = *v;
+    FLOATTYPE v_old_ref_for_accum_remainder = (FLOATTYPE)0.0f;
+
+    float logarithmic_zero_epsilon = 0.0f; // Only valid when is_logarithmic is true
+    const float zero_deadzone_halfsize = 0.0f; // Drag widgets have no deadzone (as it doesn't make sense)
+    if (is_logarithmic)
+    {
+        // When using logarithmic sliders, we need to clamp to avoid hitting zero, but our choice of clamp value greatly affects slider precision. We attempt to use the specified precision to estimate a good lower bound.
+        const int decimal_precision = is_floating_point ? ImParseFormatPrecision(format, 3) : 1;
+        logarithmic_zero_epsilon = ImPow(0.1f, (float)decimal_precision);
+
+        // Convert to parametric space, apply delta, convert back
+        float v_old_parametric = ScaleRatioFromValueT<TYPE, SIGNEDTYPE, FLOATTYPE>(data_type, v_cur, v_min, v_max, is_logarithmic, logarithmic_zero_epsilon, zero_deadzone_halfsize);
+        float v_new_parametric = v_old_parametric + g.DragCurrentAccum;
+        v_cur = ScaleValueFromRatioT<TYPE, SIGNEDTYPE, FLOATTYPE>(data_type, v_new_parametric, v_min, v_max, is_logarithmic, logarithmic_zero_epsilon, zero_deadzone_halfsize);
+        v_old_ref_for_accum_remainder = v_old_parametric;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        v_cur += (SIGNEDTYPE)g.DragCurrentAccum;
+    }
+
+    // Round to user desired precision based on format string
+    if (is_floating_point && !(flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_NoRoundToFormat))
+        v_cur = RoundScalarWithFormatT<TYPE>(format, data_type, v_cur);
+
+    // Preserve remainder after rounding has been applied. This also allow slow tweaking of values.
+    g.DragCurrentAccumDirty = false;
+    if (is_logarithmic)
+    {
+        // Convert to parametric space, apply delta, convert back
+        float v_new_parametric = ScaleRatioFromValueT<TYPE, SIGNEDTYPE, FLOATTYPE>(data_type, v_cur, v_min, v_max, is_logarithmic, logarithmic_zero_epsilon, zero_deadzone_halfsize);
+        g.DragCurrentAccum -= (float)(v_new_parametric - v_old_ref_for_accum_remainder);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        g.DragCurrentAccum -= (float)((SIGNEDTYPE)v_cur - (SIGNEDTYPE)*v);
+    }
+
+    // Lose zero sign for float/double
+    if (v_cur == (TYPE)-0)
+        v_cur = (TYPE)0;
+
+    // Clamp values (+ handle overflow/wrap-around for integer types)
+    if (*v != v_cur && is_clamped)
+    {
+        if (v_cur < v_min || (v_cur > *v && adjust_delta < 0.0f && !is_floating_point))
+            v_cur = v_min;
+        if (v_cur > v_max || (v_cur < *v && adjust_delta > 0.0f && !is_floating_point))
+            v_cur = v_max;
+    }
+
+    // Apply result
+    if (*v == v_cur)
+        return false;
+    *v = v_cur;
+    return true;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::DragBehavior(ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_v, float v_speed, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    // Read imgui.cpp "API BREAKING CHANGES" section for 1.78 if you hit this assert.
+    IM_ASSERT((flags == 1 || (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_InvalidMask_) == 0) && "Invalid ImGuiSliderFlags flags! Has the 'float power' argument been mistakenly cast to flags? Call function with ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic flags instead.");
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.ActiveId == id)
+    {
+        // Those are the things we can do easily outside the DragBehaviorT<> template, saves code generation.
+        if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse && !g.IO.MouseDown[0])
+            ClearActiveID();
+        else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Nav && g.NavActivatePressedId == id && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
+            ClearActiveID();
+    }
+    if (g.ActiveId != id)
+        return false;
+    if ((g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_ReadOnly) || (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_ReadOnly))
+        return false;
+
+    switch (data_type)
+    {
+    case ImGuiDataType_S8:     { ImS32 v32 = (ImS32)*(ImS8*)p_v;  bool r = DragBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float>(ImGuiDataType_S32, &v32, v_speed, p_min ? *(const ImS8*) p_min : IM_S8_MIN,  p_max ? *(const ImS8*)p_max  : IM_S8_MAX,  format, flags); if (r) *(ImS8*)p_v = (ImS8)v32; return r; }
+    case ImGuiDataType_U8:     { ImU32 v32 = (ImU32)*(ImU8*)p_v;  bool r = DragBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float>(ImGuiDataType_U32, &v32, v_speed, p_min ? *(const ImU8*) p_min : IM_U8_MIN,  p_max ? *(const ImU8*)p_max  : IM_U8_MAX,  format, flags); if (r) *(ImU8*)p_v = (ImU8)v32; return r; }
+    case ImGuiDataType_S16:    { ImS32 v32 = (ImS32)*(ImS16*)p_v; bool r = DragBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float>(ImGuiDataType_S32, &v32, v_speed, p_min ? *(const ImS16*)p_min : IM_S16_MIN, p_max ? *(const ImS16*)p_max : IM_S16_MAX, format, flags); if (r) *(ImS16*)p_v = (ImS16)v32; return r; }
+    case ImGuiDataType_U16:    { ImU32 v32 = (ImU32)*(ImU16*)p_v; bool r = DragBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float>(ImGuiDataType_U32, &v32, v_speed, p_min ? *(const ImU16*)p_min : IM_U16_MIN, p_max ? *(const ImU16*)p_max : IM_U16_MAX, format, flags); if (r) *(ImU16*)p_v = (ImU16)v32; return r; }
+    case ImGuiDataType_S32:    return DragBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float >(data_type, (ImS32*)p_v,  v_speed, p_min ? *(const ImS32* )p_min : IM_S32_MIN, p_max ? *(const ImS32* )p_max : IM_S32_MAX, format, flags);
+    case ImGuiDataType_U32:    return DragBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float >(data_type, (ImU32*)p_v,  v_speed, p_min ? *(const ImU32* )p_min : IM_U32_MIN, p_max ? *(const ImU32* )p_max : IM_U32_MAX, format, flags);
+    case ImGuiDataType_S64:    return DragBehaviorT<ImS64, ImS64, double>(data_type, (ImS64*)p_v,  v_speed, p_min ? *(const ImS64* )p_min : IM_S64_MIN, p_max ? *(const ImS64* )p_max : IM_S64_MAX, format, flags);
+    case ImGuiDataType_U64:    return DragBehaviorT<ImU64, ImS64, double>(data_type, (ImU64*)p_v,  v_speed, p_min ? *(const ImU64* )p_min : IM_U64_MIN, p_max ? *(const ImU64* )p_max : IM_U64_MAX, format, flags);
+    case ImGuiDataType_Float:  return DragBehaviorT<float, float, float >(data_type, (float*)p_v,  v_speed, p_min ? *(const float* )p_min : -FLT_MAX,   p_max ? *(const float* )p_max : FLT_MAX,    format, flags);
+    case ImGuiDataType_Double: return DragBehaviorT<double,double,double>(data_type, (double*)p_v, v_speed, p_min ? *(const double*)p_min : -DBL_MAX,   p_max ? *(const double*)p_max : DBL_MAX,    format, flags);
+    case ImGuiDataType_COUNT:  break;
+    }
+    IM_ASSERT(0);
+    return false;
+}
+
+// Note: p_data, p_min and p_max are _pointers_ to a memory address holding the data. For a Drag widget, p_min and p_max are optional.
+// Read code of e.g. DragFloat(), DragInt() etc. or examples in 'Demo->Widgets->Data Types' to understand how to use this function directly.
+bool ImGui::DragScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, float v_speed, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
+    const float w = CalcItemWidth();
+
+    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
+    const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));
+
+    const bool temp_input_allowed = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_NoInput) == 0;
+    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
+    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb, temp_input_allowed ? ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable : 0))
+        return false;
+
+    // Default format string when passing NULL
+    if (format == NULL)
+        format = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type)->PrintFmt;
+    else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32 && strcmp(format, "%d") != 0) // (FIXME-LEGACY: Patch old "%.0f" format string to use "%d", read function more details.)
+        format = PatchFormatStringFloatToInt(format);
+
+    const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);
+    bool temp_input_is_active = temp_input_allowed && TempInputIsActive(id);
+    if (!temp_input_is_active)
+    {
+        // Tabbing or CTRL-clicking on Drag turns it into an InputText
+        const bool input_requested_by_tabbing = temp_input_allowed && (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_FocusedByTabbing) != 0;
+        const bool clicked = (hovered && g.IO.MouseClicked[0]);
+        const bool double_clicked = (hovered && g.IO.MouseClickedCount[0] == 2);
+        const bool make_active = (input_requested_by_tabbing || clicked || double_clicked || g.NavActivateId == id || g.NavActivateInputId == id);
+        if (make_active && temp_input_allowed)
+            if (input_requested_by_tabbing || (clicked && g.IO.KeyCtrl) || double_clicked || g.NavActivateInputId == id)
+                temp_input_is_active = true;
+
+        // (Optional) simple click (without moving) turns Drag into an InputText
+        if (g.IO.ConfigDragClickToInputText && temp_input_allowed && !temp_input_is_active)
+            if (g.ActiveId == id && hovered && g.IO.MouseReleased[0] && !IsMouseDragPastThreshold(0, g.IO.MouseDragThreshold * DRAG_MOUSE_THRESHOLD_FACTOR))
+            {
+                g.NavActivateId = g.NavActivateInputId = id;
+                g.NavActivateFlags = ImGuiActivateFlags_PreferInput;
+                temp_input_is_active = true;
+            }
+
+        if (make_active && !temp_input_is_active)
+        {
+            SetActiveID(id, window);
+            SetFocusID(id, window);
+            FocusWindow(window);
+            g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask = (1 << ImGuiDir_Left) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Right);
+        }
+    }
+
+    if (temp_input_is_active)
+    {
+        // Only clamp CTRL+Click input when ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp is set
+        const bool is_clamp_input = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp) != 0 && (p_min == NULL || p_max == NULL || DataTypeCompare(data_type, p_min, p_max) < 0);
+        return TempInputScalar(frame_bb, id, label, data_type, p_data, format, is_clamp_input ? p_min : NULL, is_clamp_input ? p_max : NULL);
+    }
+
+    // Draw frame
+    const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
+    RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
+    RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, frame_col, true, style.FrameRounding);
+
+    // Drag behavior
+    const bool value_changed = DragBehavior(id, data_type, p_data, v_speed, p_min, p_max, format, flags);
+    if (value_changed)
+        MarkItemEdited(id);
+
+    // Display value using user-provided display format so user can add prefix/suffix/decorations to the value.
+    char value_buf[64];
+    const char* value_buf_end = value_buf + DataTypeFormatString(value_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(value_buf), data_type, p_data, format);
+    if (g.LogEnabled)
+        LogSetNextTextDecoration("{", "}");
+    RenderTextClipped(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, value_buf, value_buf_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f));
+
+    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
+        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);
+
+    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags);
+    return value_changed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::DragScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, int components, float v_speed, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    bool value_changed = false;
+    BeginGroup();
+    PushID(label);
+    PushMultiItemsWidths(components, CalcItemWidth());
+    size_t type_size = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size;
+    for (int i = 0; i < components; i++)
+    {
+        PushID(i);
+        if (i > 0)
+            SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+        value_changed |= DragScalar("", data_type, p_data, v_speed, p_min, p_max, format, flags);
+        PopID();
+        PopItemWidth();
+        p_data = (void*)((char*)p_data + type_size);
+    }
+    PopID();
+
+    const char* label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
+    if (label != label_end)
+    {
+        SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+        TextEx(label, label_end);
+    }
+
+    EndGroup();
+    return value_changed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::DragFloat(const char* label, float* v, float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    return DragScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::DragFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::DragFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::DragFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
+}
+
+// NB: You likely want to specify the ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp when using this.
+bool ImGui::DragFloatRange2(const char* label, float* v_current_min, float* v_current_max, float v_speed, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, const char* format_max, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    PushID(label);
+    BeginGroup();
+    PushMultiItemsWidths(2, CalcItemWidth());
+
+    float min_min = (v_min >= v_max) ? -FLT_MAX : v_min;
+    float min_max = (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_max : ImMin(v_max, *v_current_max);
+    ImGuiSliderFlags min_flags = flags | ((min_min == min_max) ? ImGuiSliderFlags_ReadOnly : 0);
+    bool value_changed = DragScalar("##min", ImGuiDataType_Float, v_current_min, v_speed, &min_min, &min_max, format, min_flags);
+    PopItemWidth();
+    SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+
+    float max_min = (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_min : ImMax(v_min, *v_current_min);
+    float max_max = (v_min >= v_max) ? FLT_MAX : v_max;
+    ImGuiSliderFlags max_flags = flags | ((max_min == max_max) ? ImGuiSliderFlags_ReadOnly : 0);
+    value_changed |= DragScalar("##max", ImGuiDataType_Float, v_current_max, v_speed, &max_min, &max_max, format_max ? format_max : format, max_flags);
+    PopItemWidth();
+    SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+
+    TextEx(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label));
+    EndGroup();
+    PopID();
+
+    return value_changed;
+}
+
+// NB: v_speed is float to allow adjusting the drag speed with more precision
+bool ImGui::DragInt(const char* label, int* v, float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    return DragScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::DragInt2(const char* label, int v[2], float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 2, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::DragInt3(const char* label, int v[3], float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 3, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::DragInt4(const char* label, int v[4], float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    return DragScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 4, v_speed, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
+}
+
+// NB: You likely want to specify the ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp when using this.
+bool ImGui::DragIntRange2(const char* label, int* v_current_min, int* v_current_max, float v_speed, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format, const char* format_max, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    PushID(label);
+    BeginGroup();
+    PushMultiItemsWidths(2, CalcItemWidth());
+
+    int min_min = (v_min >= v_max) ? INT_MIN : v_min;
+    int min_max = (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_max : ImMin(v_max, *v_current_max);
+    ImGuiSliderFlags min_flags = flags | ((min_min == min_max) ? ImGuiSliderFlags_ReadOnly : 0);
+    bool value_changed = DragInt("##min", v_current_min, v_speed, min_min, min_max, format, min_flags);
+    PopItemWidth();
+    SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+
+    int max_min = (v_min >= v_max) ? *v_current_min : ImMax(v_min, *v_current_min);
+    int max_max = (v_min >= v_max) ? INT_MAX : v_max;
+    ImGuiSliderFlags max_flags = flags | ((max_min == max_max) ? ImGuiSliderFlags_ReadOnly : 0);
+    value_changed |= DragInt("##max", v_current_max, v_speed, max_min, max_max, format_max ? format_max : format, max_flags);
+    PopItemWidth();
+    SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+
+    TextEx(label, FindRenderedTextEnd(label));
+    EndGroup();
+    PopID();
+
+    return value_changed;
+}
+
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+
+// Obsolete versions with power parameter. See https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/3361 for details.
+bool ImGui::DragScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, float v_speed, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, float power)
+{
+    ImGuiSliderFlags drag_flags = ImGuiSliderFlags_None;
+    if (power != 1.0f)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(power == 1.0f && "Call function with ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic flags instead of using the old 'float power' function!");
+        IM_ASSERT(p_min != NULL && p_max != NULL);  // When using a power curve the drag needs to have known bounds
+        drag_flags |= ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic;   // Fallback for non-asserting paths
+    }
+    return DragScalar(label, data_type, p_data, v_speed, p_min, p_max, format, drag_flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::DragScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, int components, float v_speed, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, float power)
+{
+    ImGuiSliderFlags drag_flags = ImGuiSliderFlags_None;
+    if (power != 1.0f)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(power == 1.0f && "Call function with ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic flags instead of using the old 'float power' function!");
+        IM_ASSERT(p_min != NULL && p_max != NULL);  // When using a power curve the drag needs to have known bounds
+        drag_flags |= ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic;   // Fallback for non-asserting paths
+    }
+    return DragScalarN(label, data_type, p_data, components, v_speed, p_min, p_max, format, drag_flags);
+}
+
+#endif // IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: SliderScalar, SliderFloat, SliderInt, etc.
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - ScaleRatioFromValueT<> [Internal]
+// - ScaleValueFromRatioT<> [Internal]
+// - SliderBehaviorT<>() [Internal]
+// - SliderBehavior() [Internal]
+// - SliderScalar()
+// - SliderScalarN()
+// - SliderFloat()
+// - SliderFloat2()
+// - SliderFloat3()
+// - SliderFloat4()
+// - SliderAngle()
+// - SliderInt()
+// - SliderInt2()
+// - SliderInt3()
+// - SliderInt4()
+// - VSliderScalar()
+// - VSliderFloat()
+// - VSliderInt()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Convert a value v in the output space of a slider into a parametric position on the slider itself (the logical opposite of ScaleValueFromRatioT)
+template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
+float ImGui::ScaleRatioFromValueT(ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE v, TYPE v_min, TYPE v_max, bool is_logarithmic, float logarithmic_zero_epsilon, float zero_deadzone_halfsize)
+{
+    if (v_min == v_max)
+        return 0.0f;
+    IM_UNUSED(data_type);
+
+    const TYPE v_clamped = (v_min < v_max) ? ImClamp(v, v_min, v_max) : ImClamp(v, v_max, v_min);
+    if (is_logarithmic)
+    {
+        bool flipped = v_max < v_min;
+
+        if (flipped) // Handle the case where the range is backwards
+            ImSwap(v_min, v_max);
+
+        // Fudge min/max to avoid getting close to log(0)
+        FLOATTYPE v_min_fudged = (ImAbs((FLOATTYPE)v_min) < logarithmic_zero_epsilon) ? ((v_min < 0.0f) ? -logarithmic_zero_epsilon : logarithmic_zero_epsilon) : (FLOATTYPE)v_min;
+        FLOATTYPE v_max_fudged = (ImAbs((FLOATTYPE)v_max) < logarithmic_zero_epsilon) ? ((v_max < 0.0f) ? -logarithmic_zero_epsilon : logarithmic_zero_epsilon) : (FLOATTYPE)v_max;
+
+        // Awkward special cases - we need ranges of the form (-100 .. 0) to convert to (-100 .. -epsilon), not (-100 .. epsilon)
+        if ((v_min == 0.0f) && (v_max < 0.0f))
+            v_min_fudged = -logarithmic_zero_epsilon;
+        else if ((v_max == 0.0f) && (v_min < 0.0f))
+            v_max_fudged = -logarithmic_zero_epsilon;
+
+        float result;
+        if (v_clamped <= v_min_fudged)
+            result = 0.0f; // Workaround for values that are in-range but below our fudge
+        else if (v_clamped >= v_max_fudged)
+            result = 1.0f; // Workaround for values that are in-range but above our fudge
+        else if ((v_min * v_max) < 0.0f) // Range crosses zero, so split into two portions
+        {
+            float zero_point_center = (-(float)v_min) / ((float)v_max - (float)v_min); // The zero point in parametric space.  There's an argument we should take the logarithmic nature into account when calculating this, but for now this should do (and the most common case of a symmetrical range works fine)
+            float zero_point_snap_L = zero_point_center - zero_deadzone_halfsize;
+            float zero_point_snap_R = zero_point_center + zero_deadzone_halfsize;
+            if (v == 0.0f)
+                result = zero_point_center; // Special case for exactly zero
+            else if (v < 0.0f)
+                result = (1.0f - (float)(ImLog(-(FLOATTYPE)v_clamped / logarithmic_zero_epsilon) / ImLog(-v_min_fudged / logarithmic_zero_epsilon))) * zero_point_snap_L;
+            else
+                result = zero_point_snap_R + ((float)(ImLog((FLOATTYPE)v_clamped / logarithmic_zero_epsilon) / ImLog(v_max_fudged / logarithmic_zero_epsilon)) * (1.0f - zero_point_snap_R));
+        }
+        else if ((v_min < 0.0f) || (v_max < 0.0f)) // Entirely negative slider
+            result = 1.0f - (float)(ImLog(-(FLOATTYPE)v_clamped / -v_max_fudged) / ImLog(-v_min_fudged / -v_max_fudged));
+        else
+            result = (float)(ImLog((FLOATTYPE)v_clamped / v_min_fudged) / ImLog(v_max_fudged / v_min_fudged));
+
+        return flipped ? (1.0f - result) : result;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Linear slider
+        return (float)((FLOATTYPE)(SIGNEDTYPE)(v_clamped - v_min) / (FLOATTYPE)(SIGNEDTYPE)(v_max - v_min));
+    }
+}
+
+// Convert a parametric position on a slider into a value v in the output space (the logical opposite of ScaleRatioFromValueT)
+template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
+TYPE ImGui::ScaleValueFromRatioT(ImGuiDataType data_type, float t, TYPE v_min, TYPE v_max, bool is_logarithmic, float logarithmic_zero_epsilon, float zero_deadzone_halfsize)
+{
+    // We special-case the extents because otherwise our logarithmic fudging can lead to "mathematically correct"
+    // but non-intuitive behaviors like a fully-left slider not actually reaching the minimum value. Also generally simpler.
+    if (t <= 0.0f || v_min == v_max)
+        return v_min;
+    if (t >= 1.0f)
+        return v_max;
+
+    TYPE result = (TYPE)0;
+    if (is_logarithmic)
+    {
+        // Fudge min/max to avoid getting silly results close to zero
+        FLOATTYPE v_min_fudged = (ImAbs((FLOATTYPE)v_min) < logarithmic_zero_epsilon) ? ((v_min < 0.0f) ? -logarithmic_zero_epsilon : logarithmic_zero_epsilon) : (FLOATTYPE)v_min;
+        FLOATTYPE v_max_fudged = (ImAbs((FLOATTYPE)v_max) < logarithmic_zero_epsilon) ? ((v_max < 0.0f) ? -logarithmic_zero_epsilon : logarithmic_zero_epsilon) : (FLOATTYPE)v_max;
+
+        const bool flipped = v_max < v_min; // Check if range is "backwards"
+        if (flipped)
+            ImSwap(v_min_fudged, v_max_fudged);
+
+        // Awkward special case - we need ranges of the form (-100 .. 0) to convert to (-100 .. -epsilon), not (-100 .. epsilon)
+        if ((v_max == 0.0f) && (v_min < 0.0f))
+            v_max_fudged = -logarithmic_zero_epsilon;
+
+        float t_with_flip = flipped ? (1.0f - t) : t; // t, but flipped if necessary to account for us flipping the range
+
+        if ((v_min * v_max) < 0.0f) // Range crosses zero, so we have to do this in two parts
+        {
+            float zero_point_center = (-(float)ImMin(v_min, v_max)) / ImAbs((float)v_max - (float)v_min); // The zero point in parametric space
+            float zero_point_snap_L = zero_point_center - zero_deadzone_halfsize;
+            float zero_point_snap_R = zero_point_center + zero_deadzone_halfsize;
+            if (t_with_flip >= zero_point_snap_L && t_with_flip <= zero_point_snap_R)
+                result = (TYPE)0.0f; // Special case to make getting exactly zero possible (the epsilon prevents it otherwise)
+            else if (t_with_flip < zero_point_center)
+                result = (TYPE)-(logarithmic_zero_epsilon * ImPow(-v_min_fudged / logarithmic_zero_epsilon, (FLOATTYPE)(1.0f - (t_with_flip / zero_point_snap_L))));
+            else
+                result = (TYPE)(logarithmic_zero_epsilon * ImPow(v_max_fudged / logarithmic_zero_epsilon, (FLOATTYPE)((t_with_flip - zero_point_snap_R) / (1.0f - zero_point_snap_R))));
+        }
+        else if ((v_min < 0.0f) || (v_max < 0.0f)) // Entirely negative slider
+            result = (TYPE)-(-v_max_fudged * ImPow(-v_min_fudged / -v_max_fudged, (FLOATTYPE)(1.0f - t_with_flip)));
+        else
+            result = (TYPE)(v_min_fudged * ImPow(v_max_fudged / v_min_fudged, (FLOATTYPE)t_with_flip));
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Linear slider
+        const bool is_floating_point = (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float) || (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double);
+        if (is_floating_point)
+        {
+            result = ImLerp(v_min, v_max, t);
+        }
+        else if (t < 1.0)
+        {
+            // - For integer values we want the clicking position to match the grab box so we round above
+            //   This code is carefully tuned to work with large values (e.g. high ranges of U64) while preserving this property..
+            // - Not doing a *1.0 multiply at the end of a range as it tends to be lossy. While absolute aiming at a large s64/u64
+            //   range is going to be imprecise anyway, with this check we at least make the edge values matches expected limits.
+            FLOATTYPE v_new_off_f = (SIGNEDTYPE)(v_max - v_min) * t;
+            result = (TYPE)((SIGNEDTYPE)v_min + (SIGNEDTYPE)(v_new_off_f + (FLOATTYPE)(v_min > v_max ? -0.5 : 0.5)));
+        }
+    }
+
+    return result;
+}
+
+// FIXME: Try to move more of the code into shared SliderBehavior()
+template<typename TYPE, typename SIGNEDTYPE, typename FLOATTYPE>
+bool ImGui::SliderBehaviorT(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, TYPE* v, const TYPE v_min, const TYPE v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags, ImRect* out_grab_bb)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+
+    const ImGuiAxis axis = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_Vertical) ? ImGuiAxis_Y : ImGuiAxis_X;
+    const bool is_logarithmic = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic) != 0;
+    const bool is_floating_point = (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float) || (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double);
+    const SIGNEDTYPE v_range = (v_min < v_max ? v_max - v_min : v_min - v_max);
+
+    // Calculate bounds
+    const float grab_padding = 2.0f; // FIXME: Should be part of style.
+    const float slider_sz = (bb.Max[axis] - bb.Min[axis]) - grab_padding * 2.0f;
+    float grab_sz = style.GrabMinSize;
+    if (!is_floating_point && v_range >= 0)                                     // v_range < 0 may happen on integer overflows
+        grab_sz = ImMax((float)(slider_sz / (v_range + 1)), style.GrabMinSize); // For integer sliders: if possible have the grab size represent 1 unit
+    grab_sz = ImMin(grab_sz, slider_sz);
+    const float slider_usable_sz = slider_sz - grab_sz;
+    const float slider_usable_pos_min = bb.Min[axis] + grab_padding + grab_sz * 0.5f;
+    const float slider_usable_pos_max = bb.Max[axis] - grab_padding - grab_sz * 0.5f;
+
+    float logarithmic_zero_epsilon = 0.0f; // Only valid when is_logarithmic is true
+    float zero_deadzone_halfsize = 0.0f; // Only valid when is_logarithmic is true
+    if (is_logarithmic)
+    {
+        // When using logarithmic sliders, we need to clamp to avoid hitting zero, but our choice of clamp value greatly affects slider precision. We attempt to use the specified precision to estimate a good lower bound.
+        const int decimal_precision = is_floating_point ? ImParseFormatPrecision(format, 3) : 1;
+        logarithmic_zero_epsilon = ImPow(0.1f, (float)decimal_precision);
+        zero_deadzone_halfsize = (style.LogSliderDeadzone * 0.5f) / ImMax(slider_usable_sz, 1.0f);
+    }
+
+    // Process interacting with the slider
+    bool value_changed = false;
+    if (g.ActiveId == id)
+    {
+        bool set_new_value = false;
+        float clicked_t = 0.0f;
+        if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Mouse)
+        {
+            if (!g.IO.MouseDown[0])
+            {
+                ClearActiveID();
+            }
+            else
+            {
+                const float mouse_abs_pos = g.IO.MousePos[axis];
+                if (g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
+                {
+                    float grab_t = ScaleRatioFromValueT<TYPE, SIGNEDTYPE, FLOATTYPE>(data_type, *v, v_min, v_max, is_logarithmic, logarithmic_zero_epsilon, zero_deadzone_halfsize);
+                    if (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y)
+                        grab_t = 1.0f - grab_t;
+                    const float grab_pos = ImLerp(slider_usable_pos_min, slider_usable_pos_max, grab_t);
+                    const bool clicked_around_grab = (mouse_abs_pos >= grab_pos - grab_sz * 0.5f - 1.0f) && (mouse_abs_pos <= grab_pos + grab_sz * 0.5f + 1.0f); // No harm being extra generous here.
+                    g.SliderGrabClickOffset = (clicked_around_grab && is_floating_point) ? mouse_abs_pos - grab_pos : 0.0f;
+                }
+                if (slider_usable_sz > 0.0f)
+                    clicked_t = ImSaturate((mouse_abs_pos - g.SliderGrabClickOffset - slider_usable_pos_min) / slider_usable_sz);
+                if (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y)
+                    clicked_t = 1.0f - clicked_t;
+                set_new_value = true;
+            }
+        }
+        else if (g.ActiveIdSource == ImGuiInputSource_Nav)
+        {
+            if (g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
+            {
+                g.SliderCurrentAccum = 0.0f; // Reset any stored nav delta upon activation
+                g.SliderCurrentAccumDirty = false;
+            }
+
+            float input_delta = (axis == ImGuiAxis_X) ? GetNavTweakPressedAmount(axis) : -GetNavTweakPressedAmount(axis);
+            if (input_delta != 0.0f)
+            {
+                const bool tweak_slow = IsKeyDown((g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad) ? ImGuiKey_NavGamepadTweakSlow : ImGuiKey_NavKeyboardTweakSlow);
+                const bool tweak_fast = IsKeyDown((g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Gamepad) ? ImGuiKey_NavGamepadTweakFast : ImGuiKey_NavKeyboardTweakFast);
+                const int decimal_precision = is_floating_point ? ImParseFormatPrecision(format, 3) : 0;
+                if (decimal_precision > 0)
+                {
+                    input_delta /= 100.0f;    // Gamepad/keyboard tweak speeds in % of slider bounds
+                    if (tweak_slow)
+                        input_delta /= 10.0f;
+                }
+                else
+                {
+                    if ((v_range >= -100.0f && v_range <= 100.0f) || tweak_slow)
+                        input_delta = ((input_delta < 0.0f) ? -1.0f : +1.0f) / (float)v_range; // Gamepad/keyboard tweak speeds in integer steps
+                    else
+                        input_delta /= 100.0f;
+                }
+                if (tweak_fast)
+                    input_delta *= 10.0f;
+
+                g.SliderCurrentAccum += input_delta;
+                g.SliderCurrentAccumDirty = true;
+            }
+
+            float delta = g.SliderCurrentAccum;
+            if (g.NavActivatePressedId == id && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
+            {
+                ClearActiveID();
+            }
+            else if (g.SliderCurrentAccumDirty)
+            {
+                clicked_t = ScaleRatioFromValueT<TYPE, SIGNEDTYPE, FLOATTYPE>(data_type, *v, v_min, v_max, is_logarithmic, logarithmic_zero_epsilon, zero_deadzone_halfsize);
+
+                if ((clicked_t >= 1.0f && delta > 0.0f) || (clicked_t <= 0.0f && delta < 0.0f)) // This is to avoid applying the saturation when already past the limits
+                {
+                    set_new_value = false;
+                    g.SliderCurrentAccum = 0.0f; // If pushing up against the limits, don't continue to accumulate
+                }
+                else
+                {
+                    set_new_value = true;
+                    float old_clicked_t = clicked_t;
+                    clicked_t = ImSaturate(clicked_t + delta);
+
+                    // Calculate what our "new" clicked_t will be, and thus how far we actually moved the slider, and subtract this from the accumulator
+                    TYPE v_new = ScaleValueFromRatioT<TYPE, SIGNEDTYPE, FLOATTYPE>(data_type, clicked_t, v_min, v_max, is_logarithmic, logarithmic_zero_epsilon, zero_deadzone_halfsize);
+                    if (is_floating_point && !(flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_NoRoundToFormat))
+                        v_new = RoundScalarWithFormatT<TYPE>(format, data_type, v_new);
+                    float new_clicked_t = ScaleRatioFromValueT<TYPE, SIGNEDTYPE, FLOATTYPE>(data_type, v_new, v_min, v_max, is_logarithmic, logarithmic_zero_epsilon, zero_deadzone_halfsize);
+
+                    if (delta > 0)
+                        g.SliderCurrentAccum -= ImMin(new_clicked_t - old_clicked_t, delta);
+                    else
+                        g.SliderCurrentAccum -= ImMax(new_clicked_t - old_clicked_t, delta);
+                }
+
+                g.SliderCurrentAccumDirty = false;
+            }
+        }
+
+        if (set_new_value)
+        {
+            TYPE v_new = ScaleValueFromRatioT<TYPE, SIGNEDTYPE, FLOATTYPE>(data_type, clicked_t, v_min, v_max, is_logarithmic, logarithmic_zero_epsilon, zero_deadzone_halfsize);
+
+            // Round to user desired precision based on format string
+            if (is_floating_point && !(flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_NoRoundToFormat))
+                v_new = RoundScalarWithFormatT<TYPE>(format, data_type, v_new);
+
+            // Apply result
+            if (*v != v_new)
+            {
+                *v = v_new;
+                value_changed = true;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+
+    if (slider_sz < 1.0f)
+    {
+        *out_grab_bb = ImRect(bb.Min, bb.Min);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Output grab position so it can be displayed by the caller
+        float grab_t = ScaleRatioFromValueT<TYPE, SIGNEDTYPE, FLOATTYPE>(data_type, *v, v_min, v_max, is_logarithmic, logarithmic_zero_epsilon, zero_deadzone_halfsize);
+        if (axis == ImGuiAxis_Y)
+            grab_t = 1.0f - grab_t;
+        const float grab_pos = ImLerp(slider_usable_pos_min, slider_usable_pos_max, grab_t);
+        if (axis == ImGuiAxis_X)
+            *out_grab_bb = ImRect(grab_pos - grab_sz * 0.5f, bb.Min.y + grab_padding, grab_pos + grab_sz * 0.5f, bb.Max.y - grab_padding);
+        else
+            *out_grab_bb = ImRect(bb.Min.x + grab_padding, grab_pos - grab_sz * 0.5f, bb.Max.x - grab_padding, grab_pos + grab_sz * 0.5f);
+    }
+
+    return value_changed;
+}
+
+// For 32-bit and larger types, slider bounds are limited to half the natural type range.
+// So e.g. an integer Slider between INT_MAX-10 and INT_MAX will fail, but an integer Slider between INT_MAX/2-10 and INT_MAX/2 will be ok.
+// It would be possible to lift that limitation with some work but it doesn't seem to be worth it for sliders.
+bool ImGui::SliderBehavior(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_v, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags, ImRect* out_grab_bb)
+{
+    // Read imgui.cpp "API BREAKING CHANGES" section for 1.78 if you hit this assert.
+    IM_ASSERT((flags == 1 || (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_InvalidMask_) == 0) && "Invalid ImGuiSliderFlags flag!  Has the 'float power' argument been mistakenly cast to flags? Call function with ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic flags instead.");
+
+    // Those are the things we can do easily outside the SliderBehaviorT<> template, saves code generation.
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if ((g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_ReadOnly) || (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_ReadOnly))
+        return false;
+
+    switch (data_type)
+    {
+    case ImGuiDataType_S8:  { ImS32 v32 = (ImS32)*(ImS8*)p_v;  bool r = SliderBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float>(bb, id, ImGuiDataType_S32, &v32, *(const ImS8*)p_min,  *(const ImS8*)p_max,  format, flags, out_grab_bb); if (r) *(ImS8*)p_v  = (ImS8)v32;  return r; }
+    case ImGuiDataType_U8:  { ImU32 v32 = (ImU32)*(ImU8*)p_v;  bool r = SliderBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float>(bb, id, ImGuiDataType_U32, &v32, *(const ImU8*)p_min,  *(const ImU8*)p_max,  format, flags, out_grab_bb); if (r) *(ImU8*)p_v  = (ImU8)v32;  return r; }
+    case ImGuiDataType_S16: { ImS32 v32 = (ImS32)*(ImS16*)p_v; bool r = SliderBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float>(bb, id, ImGuiDataType_S32, &v32, *(const ImS16*)p_min, *(const ImS16*)p_max, format, flags, out_grab_bb); if (r) *(ImS16*)p_v = (ImS16)v32; return r; }
+    case ImGuiDataType_U16: { ImU32 v32 = (ImU32)*(ImU16*)p_v; bool r = SliderBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float>(bb, id, ImGuiDataType_U32, &v32, *(const ImU16*)p_min, *(const ImU16*)p_max, format, flags, out_grab_bb); if (r) *(ImU16*)p_v = (ImU16)v32; return r; }
+    case ImGuiDataType_S32:
+        IM_ASSERT(*(const ImS32*)p_min >= IM_S32_MIN / 2 && *(const ImS32*)p_max <= IM_S32_MAX / 2);
+        return SliderBehaviorT<ImS32, ImS32, float >(bb, id, data_type, (ImS32*)p_v,  *(const ImS32*)p_min,  *(const ImS32*)p_max,  format, flags, out_grab_bb);
+    case ImGuiDataType_U32:
+        IM_ASSERT(*(const ImU32*)p_max <= IM_U32_MAX / 2);
+        return SliderBehaviorT<ImU32, ImS32, float >(bb, id, data_type, (ImU32*)p_v,  *(const ImU32*)p_min,  *(const ImU32*)p_max,  format, flags, out_grab_bb);
+    case ImGuiDataType_S64:
+        IM_ASSERT(*(const ImS64*)p_min >= IM_S64_MIN / 2 && *(const ImS64*)p_max <= IM_S64_MAX / 2);
+        return SliderBehaviorT<ImS64, ImS64, double>(bb, id, data_type, (ImS64*)p_v,  *(const ImS64*)p_min,  *(const ImS64*)p_max,  format, flags, out_grab_bb);
+    case ImGuiDataType_U64:
+        IM_ASSERT(*(const ImU64*)p_max <= IM_U64_MAX / 2);
+        return SliderBehaviorT<ImU64, ImS64, double>(bb, id, data_type, (ImU64*)p_v,  *(const ImU64*)p_min,  *(const ImU64*)p_max,  format, flags, out_grab_bb);
+    case ImGuiDataType_Float:
+        IM_ASSERT(*(const float*)p_min >= -FLT_MAX / 2.0f && *(const float*)p_max <= FLT_MAX / 2.0f);
+        return SliderBehaviorT<float, float, float >(bb, id, data_type, (float*)p_v,  *(const float*)p_min,  *(const float*)p_max,  format, flags, out_grab_bb);
+    case ImGuiDataType_Double:
+        IM_ASSERT(*(const double*)p_min >= -DBL_MAX / 2.0f && *(const double*)p_max <= DBL_MAX / 2.0f);
+        return SliderBehaviorT<double, double, double>(bb, id, data_type, (double*)p_v, *(const double*)p_min, *(const double*)p_max, format, flags, out_grab_bb);
+    case ImGuiDataType_COUNT: break;
+    }
+    IM_ASSERT(0);
+    return false;
+}
+
+// Note: p_data, p_min and p_max are _pointers_ to a memory address holding the data. For a slider, they are all required.
+// Read code of e.g. SliderFloat(), SliderInt() etc. or examples in 'Demo->Widgets->Data Types' to understand how to use this function directly.
+bool ImGui::SliderScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
+    const float w = CalcItemWidth();
+
+    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + ImVec2(w, label_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
+    const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));
+
+    const bool temp_input_allowed = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_NoInput) == 0;
+    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
+    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb, temp_input_allowed ? ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable : 0))
+        return false;
+
+    // Default format string when passing NULL
+    if (format == NULL)
+        format = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type)->PrintFmt;
+    else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32 && strcmp(format, "%d") != 0) // (FIXME-LEGACY: Patch old "%.0f" format string to use "%d", read function more details.)
+        format = PatchFormatStringFloatToInt(format);
+
+    const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);
+    bool temp_input_is_active = temp_input_allowed && TempInputIsActive(id);
+    if (!temp_input_is_active)
+    {
+        // Tabbing or CTRL-clicking on Slider turns it into an input box
+        const bool input_requested_by_tabbing = temp_input_allowed && (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_FocusedByTabbing) != 0;
+        const bool clicked = (hovered && g.IO.MouseClicked[0]);
+        const bool make_active = (input_requested_by_tabbing || clicked || g.NavActivateId == id || g.NavActivateInputId == id);
+        if (make_active && temp_input_allowed)
+            if (input_requested_by_tabbing || (clicked && g.IO.KeyCtrl) || g.NavActivateInputId == id)
+                temp_input_is_active = true;
+
+        if (make_active && !temp_input_is_active)
+        {
+            SetActiveID(id, window);
+            SetFocusID(id, window);
+            FocusWindow(window);
+            g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask |= (1 << ImGuiDir_Left) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Right);
+        }
+    }
+
+    if (temp_input_is_active)
+    {
+        // Only clamp CTRL+Click input when ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp is set
+        const bool is_clamp_input = (flags & ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp) != 0;
+        return TempInputScalar(frame_bb, id, label, data_type, p_data, format, is_clamp_input ? p_min : NULL, is_clamp_input ? p_max : NULL);
+    }
+
+    // Draw frame
+    const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
+    RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
+    RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, frame_col, true, g.Style.FrameRounding);
+
+    // Slider behavior
+    ImRect grab_bb;
+    const bool value_changed = SliderBehavior(frame_bb, id, data_type, p_data, p_min, p_max, format, flags, &grab_bb);
+    if (value_changed)
+        MarkItemEdited(id);
+
+    // Render grab
+    if (grab_bb.Max.x > grab_bb.Min.x)
+        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(grab_bb.Min, grab_bb.Max, GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive : ImGuiCol_SliderGrab), style.GrabRounding);
+
+    // Display value using user-provided display format so user can add prefix/suffix/decorations to the value.
+    char value_buf[64];
+    const char* value_buf_end = value_buf + DataTypeFormatString(value_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(value_buf), data_type, p_data, format);
+    if (g.LogEnabled)
+        LogSetNextTextDecoration("{", "}");
+    RenderTextClipped(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, value_buf, value_buf_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.5f));
+
+    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
+        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);
+
+    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags);
+    return value_changed;
+}
+
+// Add multiple sliders on 1 line for compact edition of multiple components
+bool ImGui::SliderScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, int components, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    bool value_changed = false;
+    BeginGroup();
+    PushID(label);
+    PushMultiItemsWidths(components, CalcItemWidth());
+    size_t type_size = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size;
+    for (int i = 0; i < components; i++)
+    {
+        PushID(i);
+        if (i > 0)
+            SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+        value_changed |= SliderScalar("", data_type, v, v_min, v_max, format, flags);
+        PopID();
+        PopItemWidth();
+        v = (void*)((char*)v + type_size);
+    }
+    PopID();
+
+    const char* label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
+    if (label != label_end)
+    {
+        SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+        TextEx(label, label_end);
+    }
+
+    EndGroup();
+    return value_changed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::SliderFloat(const char* label, float* v, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    return SliderScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::SliderFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::SliderFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::SliderFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::SliderAngle(const char* label, float* v_rad, float v_degrees_min, float v_degrees_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    if (format == NULL)
+        format = "%.0f deg";
+    float v_deg = (*v_rad) * 360.0f / (2 * IM_PI);
+    bool value_changed = SliderFloat(label, &v_deg, v_degrees_min, v_degrees_max, format, flags);
+    *v_rad = v_deg * (2 * IM_PI) / 360.0f;
+    return value_changed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::SliderInt(const char* label, int* v, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    return SliderScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::SliderInt2(const char* label, int v[2], int v_min, int v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 2, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::SliderInt3(const char* label, int v[3], int v_min, int v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 3, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::SliderInt4(const char* label, int v[4], int v_min, int v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    return SliderScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 4, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::VSliderScalar(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
+
+    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
+    const ImRect bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));
+
+    ItemSize(bb, style.FramePadding.y);
+    if (!ItemAdd(frame_bb, id))
+        return false;
+
+    // Default format string when passing NULL
+    if (format == NULL)
+        format = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type)->PrintFmt;
+    else if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_S32 && strcmp(format, "%d") != 0) // (FIXME-LEGACY: Patch old "%.0f" format string to use "%d", read function more details.)
+        format = PatchFormatStringFloatToInt(format);
+
+    const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);
+    if ((hovered && g.IO.MouseClicked[0]) || g.NavActivateId == id || g.NavActivateInputId == id)
+    {
+        SetActiveID(id, window);
+        SetFocusID(id, window);
+        FocusWindow(window);
+        g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask |= (1 << ImGuiDir_Up) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Down);
+    }
+
+    // Draw frame
+    const ImU32 frame_col = GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_FrameBgHovered : ImGuiCol_FrameBg);
+    RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
+    RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, frame_col, true, g.Style.FrameRounding);
+
+    // Slider behavior
+    ImRect grab_bb;
+    const bool value_changed = SliderBehavior(frame_bb, id, data_type, p_data, p_min, p_max, format, flags | ImGuiSliderFlags_Vertical, &grab_bb);
+    if (value_changed)
+        MarkItemEdited(id);
+
+    // Render grab
+    if (grab_bb.Max.y > grab_bb.Min.y)
+        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(grab_bb.Min, grab_bb.Max, GetColorU32(g.ActiveId == id ? ImGuiCol_SliderGrabActive : ImGuiCol_SliderGrab), style.GrabRounding);
+
+    // Display value using user-provided display format so user can add prefix/suffix/decorations to the value.
+    // For the vertical slider we allow centered text to overlap the frame padding
+    char value_buf[64];
+    const char* value_buf_end = value_buf + DataTypeFormatString(value_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(value_buf), data_type, p_data, format);
+    RenderTextClipped(ImVec2(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), frame_bb.Max, value_buf, value_buf_end, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.0f));
+    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
+        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);
+
+    return value_changed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::VSliderFloat(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, float* v, float v_min, float v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    return VSliderScalar(label, size, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::VSliderInt(const char* label, const ImVec2& size, int* v, int v_min, int v_max, const char* format, ImGuiSliderFlags flags)
+{
+    return VSliderScalar(label, size, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, &v_min, &v_max, format, flags);
+}
+
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+
+// Obsolete versions with power parameter. See https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/issues/3361 for details.
+bool ImGui::SliderScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_min, const void* p_max, const char* format, float power)
+{
+    ImGuiSliderFlags slider_flags = ImGuiSliderFlags_None;
+    if (power != 1.0f)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(power == 1.0f && "Call function with ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic flags instead of using the old 'float power' function!");
+        slider_flags |= ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic;   // Fallback for non-asserting paths
+    }
+    return SliderScalar(label, data_type, p_data, p_min, p_max, format, slider_flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::SliderScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* v, int components, const void* v_min, const void* v_max, const char* format, float power)
+{
+    ImGuiSliderFlags slider_flags = ImGuiSliderFlags_None;
+    if (power != 1.0f)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(power == 1.0f && "Call function with ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic flags instead of using the old 'float power' function!");
+        slider_flags |= ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic;   // Fallback for non-asserting paths
+    }
+    return SliderScalarN(label, data_type, v, components, v_min, v_max, format, slider_flags);
+}
+
+#endif // IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: InputScalar, InputFloat, InputInt, etc.
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - ImParseFormatFindStart() [Internal]
+// - ImParseFormatFindEnd() [Internal]
+// - ImParseFormatTrimDecorations() [Internal]
+// - ImParseFormatSanitizeForPrinting() [Internal]
+// - ImParseFormatSanitizeForScanning() [Internal]
+// - ImParseFormatPrecision() [Internal]
+// - TempInputTextScalar() [Internal]
+// - InputScalar()
+// - InputScalarN()
+// - InputFloat()
+// - InputFloat2()
+// - InputFloat3()
+// - InputFloat4()
+// - InputInt()
+// - InputInt2()
+// - InputInt3()
+// - InputInt4()
+// - InputDouble()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// We don't use strchr() because our strings are usually very short and often start with '%'
+const char* ImParseFormatFindStart(const char* fmt)
+{
+    while (char c = fmt[0])
+    {
+        if (c == '%' && fmt[1] != '%')
+            return fmt;
+        else if (c == '%')
+            fmt++;
+        fmt++;
+    }
+    return fmt;
+}
+
+const char* ImParseFormatFindEnd(const char* fmt)
+{
+    // Printf/scanf types modifiers: I/L/h/j/l/t/w/z. Other uppercase letters qualify as types aka end of the format.
+    if (fmt[0] != '%')
+        return fmt;
+    const unsigned int ignored_uppercase_mask = (1 << ('I'-'A')) | (1 << ('L'-'A'));
+    const unsigned int ignored_lowercase_mask = (1 << ('h'-'a')) | (1 << ('j'-'a')) | (1 << ('l'-'a')) | (1 << ('t'-'a')) | (1 << ('w'-'a')) | (1 << ('z'-'a'));
+    for (char c; (c = *fmt) != 0; fmt++)
+    {
+        if (c >= 'A' && c <= 'Z' && ((1 << (c - 'A')) & ignored_uppercase_mask) == 0)
+            return fmt + 1;
+        if (c >= 'a' && c <= 'z' && ((1 << (c - 'a')) & ignored_lowercase_mask) == 0)
+            return fmt + 1;
+    }
+    return fmt;
+}
+
+// Extract the format out of a format string with leading or trailing decorations
+//  fmt = "blah blah"  -> return fmt
+//  fmt = "%.3f"       -> return fmt
+//  fmt = "hello %.3f" -> return fmt + 6
+//  fmt = "%.3f hello" -> return buf written with "%.3f"
+const char* ImParseFormatTrimDecorations(const char* fmt, char* buf, size_t buf_size)
+{
+    const char* fmt_start = ImParseFormatFindStart(fmt);
+    if (fmt_start[0] != '%')
+        return fmt;
+    const char* fmt_end = ImParseFormatFindEnd(fmt_start);
+    if (fmt_end[0] == 0) // If we only have leading decoration, we don't need to copy the data.
+        return fmt_start;
+    ImStrncpy(buf, fmt_start, ImMin((size_t)(fmt_end - fmt_start) + 1, buf_size));
+    return buf;
+}
+
+// Sanitize format
+// - Zero terminate so extra characters after format (e.g. "%f123") don't confuse atof/atoi
+// - stb_sprintf.h supports several new modifiers which format numbers in a way that also makes them incompatible atof/atoi.
+void ImParseFormatSanitizeForPrinting(const char* fmt_in, char* fmt_out, size_t fmt_out_size)
+{
+    const char* fmt_end = ImParseFormatFindEnd(fmt_in);
+    IM_UNUSED(fmt_out_size);
+    IM_ASSERT((size_t)(fmt_end - fmt_in + 1) < fmt_out_size); // Format is too long, let us know if this happens to you!
+    while (fmt_in < fmt_end)
+    {
+        char c = *fmt_in++;
+        if (c != '\'' && c != '$' && c != '_') // Custom flags provided by stb_sprintf.h. POSIX 2008 also supports '.
+            *(fmt_out++) = c;
+    }
+    *fmt_out = 0; // Zero-terminate
+}
+
+// - For scanning we need to remove all width and precision fields "%3.7f" -> "%f". BUT don't strip types like "%I64d" which includes digits. ! "%07I64d" -> "%I64d"
+const char* ImParseFormatSanitizeForScanning(const char* fmt_in, char* fmt_out, size_t fmt_out_size)
+{
+    const char* fmt_end = ImParseFormatFindEnd(fmt_in);
+    const char* fmt_out_begin = fmt_out;
+    IM_UNUSED(fmt_out_size);
+    IM_ASSERT((size_t)(fmt_end - fmt_in + 1) < fmt_out_size); // Format is too long, let us know if this happens to you!
+    bool has_type = false;
+    while (fmt_in < fmt_end)
+    {
+        char c = *fmt_in++;
+        if (!has_type && ((c >= '0' && c <= '9') || c == '.'))
+            continue;
+        has_type |= ((c >= 'a' && c <= 'z') || (c >= 'A' && c <= 'Z')); // Stop skipping digits
+        if (c != '\'' && c != '$' && c != '_') // Custom flags provided by stb_sprintf.h. POSIX 2008 also supports '.
+            *(fmt_out++) = c;
+    }
+    *fmt_out = 0; // Zero-terminate
+    return fmt_out_begin;
+}
+
+template<typename TYPE>
+static const char* ImAtoi(const char* src, TYPE* output)
+{
+    int negative = 0;
+    if (*src == '-') { negative = 1; src++; }
+    if (*src == '+') { src++; }
+    TYPE v = 0;
+    while (*src >= '0' && *src <= '9')
+        v = (v * 10) + (*src++ - '0');
+    *output = negative ? -v : v;
+    return src;
+}
+
+// Parse display precision back from the display format string
+// FIXME: This is still used by some navigation code path to infer a minimum tweak step, but we should aim to rework widgets so it isn't needed.
+int ImParseFormatPrecision(const char* fmt, int default_precision)
+{
+    fmt = ImParseFormatFindStart(fmt);
+    if (fmt[0] != '%')
+        return default_precision;
+    fmt++;
+    while (*fmt >= '0' && *fmt <= '9')
+        fmt++;
+    int precision = INT_MAX;
+    if (*fmt == '.')
+    {
+        fmt = ImAtoi<int>(fmt + 1, &precision);
+        if (precision < 0 || precision > 99)
+            precision = default_precision;
+    }
+    if (*fmt == 'e' || *fmt == 'E') // Maximum precision with scientific notation
+        precision = -1;
+    if ((*fmt == 'g' || *fmt == 'G') && precision == INT_MAX)
+        precision = -1;
+    return (precision == INT_MAX) ? default_precision : precision;
+}
+
+// Create text input in place of another active widget (e.g. used when doing a CTRL+Click on drag/slider widgets)
+// FIXME: Facilitate using this in variety of other situations.
+bool ImGui::TempInputText(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, const char* label, char* buf, int buf_size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+    // On the first frame, g.TempInputTextId == 0, then on subsequent frames it becomes == id.
+    // We clear ActiveID on the first frame to allow the InputText() taking it back.
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const bool init = (g.TempInputId != id);
+    if (init)
+        ClearActiveID();
+
+    g.CurrentWindow->DC.CursorPos = bb.Min;
+    bool value_changed = InputTextEx(label, NULL, buf, buf_size, bb.GetSize(), flags | ImGuiInputTextFlags_MergedItem);
+    if (init)
+    {
+        // First frame we started displaying the InputText widget, we expect it to take the active id.
+        IM_ASSERT(g.ActiveId == id);
+        g.TempInputId = g.ActiveId;
+    }
+    return value_changed;
+}
+
+static inline ImGuiInputTextFlags InputScalar_DefaultCharsFilter(ImGuiDataType data_type, const char* format)
+{
+    if (data_type == ImGuiDataType_Float || data_type == ImGuiDataType_Double)
+        return ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific;
+    const char format_last_char = format[0] ? format[strlen(format) - 1] : 0;
+    return (format_last_char == 'x' || format_last_char == 'X') ? ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal : ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal;
+}
+
+// Note that Drag/Slider functions are only forwarding the min/max values clamping values if the ImGuiSliderFlags_AlwaysClamp flag is set!
+// This is intended: this way we allow CTRL+Click manual input to set a value out of bounds, for maximum flexibility.
+// However this may not be ideal for all uses, as some user code may break on out of bound values.
+bool ImGui::TempInputScalar(const ImRect& bb, ImGuiID id, const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const char* format, const void* p_clamp_min, const void* p_clamp_max)
+{
+    char fmt_buf[32];
+    char data_buf[32];
+    format = ImParseFormatTrimDecorations(format, fmt_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(fmt_buf));
+    DataTypeFormatString(data_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(data_buf), data_type, p_data, format);
+    ImStrTrimBlanks(data_buf);
+
+    ImGuiInputTextFlags flags = ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll | ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoMarkEdited;
+    flags |= InputScalar_DefaultCharsFilter(data_type, format);
+
+    bool value_changed = false;
+    if (TempInputText(bb, id, label, data_buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(data_buf), flags))
+    {
+        // Backup old value
+        size_t data_type_size = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type)->Size;
+        ImGuiDataTypeTempStorage data_backup;
+        memcpy(&data_backup, p_data, data_type_size);
+
+        // Apply new value (or operations) then clamp
+        DataTypeApplyFromText(data_buf, data_type, p_data, format);
+        if (p_clamp_min || p_clamp_max)
+        {
+            if (p_clamp_min && p_clamp_max && DataTypeCompare(data_type, p_clamp_min, p_clamp_max) > 0)
+                ImSwap(p_clamp_min, p_clamp_max);
+            DataTypeClamp(data_type, p_data, p_clamp_min, p_clamp_max);
+        }
+
+        // Only mark as edited if new value is different
+        value_changed = memcmp(&data_backup, p_data, data_type_size) != 0;
+        if (value_changed)
+            MarkItemEdited(id);
+    }
+    return value_changed;
+}
+
+// Note: p_data, p_step, p_step_fast are _pointers_ to a memory address holding the data. For an Input widget, p_step and p_step_fast are optional.
+// Read code of e.g. InputFloat(), InputInt() etc. or examples in 'Demo->Widgets->Data Types' to understand how to use this function directly.
+bool ImGui::InputScalar(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, const void* p_step, const void* p_step_fast, const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+
+    if (format == NULL)
+        format = DataTypeGetInfo(data_type)->PrintFmt;
+
+    char buf[64];
+    DataTypeFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), data_type, p_data, format);
+
+    // Testing ActiveId as a minor optimization as filtering is not needed until active
+    if (g.ActiveId == 0 && (flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific)) == 0)
+        flags |= InputScalar_DefaultCharsFilter(data_type, format);
+    flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll | ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoMarkEdited; // We call MarkItemEdited() ourselves by comparing the actual data rather than the string.
+
+    bool value_changed = false;
+    if (p_step != NULL)
+    {
+        const float button_size = GetFrameHeight();
+
+        BeginGroup(); // The only purpose of the group here is to allow the caller to query item data e.g. IsItemActive()
+        PushID(label);
+        SetNextItemWidth(ImMax(1.0f, CalcItemWidth() - (button_size + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * 2));
+        if (InputText("", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), flags)) // PushId(label) + "" gives us the expected ID from outside point of view
+            value_changed = DataTypeApplyFromText(buf, data_type, p_data, format);
+
+        // Step buttons
+        const ImVec2 backup_frame_padding = style.FramePadding;
+        style.FramePadding.x = style.FramePadding.y;
+        ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat | ImGuiButtonFlags_DontClosePopups;
+        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly)
+            BeginDisabled();
+        SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+        if (ButtonEx("-", ImVec2(button_size, button_size), button_flags))
+        {
+            DataTypeApplyOp(data_type, '-', p_data, p_data, g.IO.KeyCtrl && p_step_fast ? p_step_fast : p_step);
+            value_changed = true;
+        }
+        SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+        if (ButtonEx("+", ImVec2(button_size, button_size), button_flags))
+        {
+            DataTypeApplyOp(data_type, '+', p_data, p_data, g.IO.KeyCtrl && p_step_fast ? p_step_fast : p_step);
+            value_changed = true;
+        }
+        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly)
+            EndDisabled();
+
+        const char* label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
+        if (label != label_end)
+        {
+            SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+            TextEx(label, label_end);
+        }
+        style.FramePadding = backup_frame_padding;
+
+        PopID();
+        EndGroup();
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        if (InputText(label, buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), flags))
+            value_changed = DataTypeApplyFromText(buf, data_type, p_data, format);
+    }
+    if (value_changed)
+        MarkItemEdited(g.LastItemData.ID);
+
+    return value_changed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::InputScalarN(const char* label, ImGuiDataType data_type, void* p_data, int components, const void* p_step, const void* p_step_fast, const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    bool value_changed = false;
+    BeginGroup();
+    PushID(label);
+    PushMultiItemsWidths(components, CalcItemWidth());
+    size_t type_size = GDataTypeInfo[data_type].Size;
+    for (int i = 0; i < components; i++)
+    {
+        PushID(i);
+        if (i > 0)
+            SameLine(0, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+        value_changed |= InputScalar("", data_type, p_data, p_step, p_step_fast, format, flags);
+        PopID();
+        PopItemWidth();
+        p_data = (void*)((char*)p_data + type_size);
+    }
+    PopID();
+
+    const char* label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
+    if (label != label_end)
+    {
+        SameLine(0.0f, g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+        TextEx(label, label_end);
+    }
+
+    EndGroup();
+    return value_changed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::InputFloat(const char* label, float* v, float step, float step_fast, const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+    flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific;
+    return InputScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, (void*)v, (void*)(step > 0.0f ? &step : NULL), (void*)(step_fast > 0.0f ? &step_fast : NULL), format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::InputFloat2(const char* label, float v[2], const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 2, NULL, NULL, format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::InputFloat3(const char* label, float v[3], const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 3, NULL, NULL, format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::InputFloat4(const char* label, float v[4], const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_Float, v, 4, NULL, NULL, format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::InputInt(const char* label, int* v, int step, int step_fast, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+    // Hexadecimal input provided as a convenience but the flag name is awkward. Typically you'd use InputText() to parse your own data, if you want to handle prefixes.
+    const char* format = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal) ? "%08X" : "%d";
+    return InputScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, (void*)v, (void*)(step > 0 ? &step : NULL), (void*)(step_fast > 0 ? &step_fast : NULL), format, flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::InputInt2(const char* label, int v[2], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 2, NULL, NULL, "%d", flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::InputInt3(const char* label, int v[3], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 3, NULL, NULL, "%d", flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::InputInt4(const char* label, int v[4], ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+    return InputScalarN(label, ImGuiDataType_S32, v, 4, NULL, NULL, "%d", flags);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::InputDouble(const char* label, double* v, double step, double step_fast, const char* format, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags)
+{
+    flags |= ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific;
+    return InputScalar(label, ImGuiDataType_Double, (void*)v, (void*)(step > 0.0 ? &step : NULL), (void*)(step_fast > 0.0 ? &step_fast : NULL), format, flags);
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: InputText, InputTextMultiline, InputTextWithHint
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - InputText()
+// - InputTextWithHint()
+// - InputTextMultiline()
+// - InputTextGetCharInfo() [Internal]
+// - InputTextReindexLines() [Internal]
+// - InputTextReindexLinesRange() [Internal]
+// - InputTextEx() [Internal]
+// - DebugNodeInputTextState() [Internal]
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+bool ImGui::InputText(const char* label, char* buf, size_t buf_size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(!(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline)); // call InputTextMultiline()
+    return InputTextEx(label, NULL, buf, (int)buf_size, ImVec2(0, 0), flags, callback, user_data);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::InputTextMultiline(const char* label, char* buf, size_t buf_size, const ImVec2& size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data)
+{
+    return InputTextEx(label, NULL, buf, (int)buf_size, size, flags | ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline, callback, user_data);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::InputTextWithHint(const char* label, const char* hint, char* buf, size_t buf_size, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(!(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline)); // call InputTextMultiline() or  InputTextEx() manually if you need multi-line + hint.
+    return InputTextEx(label, hint, buf, (int)buf_size, ImVec2(0, 0), flags, callback, user_data);
+}
+
+static int InputTextCalcTextLenAndLineCount(const char* text_begin, const char** out_text_end)
+{
+    int line_count = 0;
+    const char* s = text_begin;
+    while (char c = *s++) // We are only matching for \n so we can ignore UTF-8 decoding
+        if (c == '\n')
+            line_count++;
+    s--;
+    if (s[0] != '\n' && s[0] != '\r')
+        line_count++;
+    *out_text_end = s;
+    return line_count;
+}
+
+static ImVec2 InputTextCalcTextSizeW(const ImWchar* text_begin, const ImWchar* text_end, const ImWchar** remaining, ImVec2* out_offset, bool stop_on_new_line)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImFont* font = g.Font;
+    const float line_height = g.FontSize;
+    const float scale = line_height / font->FontSize;
+
+    ImVec2 text_size = ImVec2(0, 0);
+    float line_width = 0.0f;
+
+    const ImWchar* s = text_begin;
+    while (s < text_end)
+    {
+        unsigned int c = (unsigned int)(*s++);
+        if (c == '\n')
+        {
+            text_size.x = ImMax(text_size.x, line_width);
+            text_size.y += line_height;
+            line_width = 0.0f;
+            if (stop_on_new_line)
+                break;
+            continue;
+        }
+        if (c == '\r')
+            continue;
+
+        const float char_width = font->GetCharAdvance((ImWchar)c) * scale;
+        line_width += char_width;
+    }
+
+    if (text_size.x < line_width)
+        text_size.x = line_width;
+
+    if (out_offset)
+        *out_offset = ImVec2(line_width, text_size.y + line_height);  // offset allow for the possibility of sitting after a trailing \n
+
+    if (line_width > 0 || text_size.y == 0.0f)                        // whereas size.y will ignore the trailing \n
+        text_size.y += line_height;
+
+    if (remaining)
+        *remaining = s;
+
+    return text_size;
+}
+
+// Wrapper for stb_textedit.h to edit text (our wrapper is for: statically sized buffer, single-line, wchar characters. InputText converts between UTF-8 and wchar)
+namespace ImStb
+{
+
+static int     STB_TEXTEDIT_STRINGLEN(const ImGuiInputTextState* obj)                             { return obj->CurLenW; }
+static ImWchar STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(const ImGuiInputTextState* obj, int idx)                      { return obj->TextW[idx]; }
+static float   STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH(ImGuiInputTextState* obj, int line_start_idx, int char_idx)  { ImWchar c = obj->TextW[line_start_idx + char_idx]; if (c == '\n') return STB_TEXTEDIT_GETWIDTH_NEWLINE; ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui; return g.Font->GetCharAdvance(c) * (g.FontSize / g.Font->FontSize); }
+static int     STB_TEXTEDIT_KEYTOTEXT(int key)                                                    { return key >= 0x200000 ? 0 : key; }
+static ImWchar STB_TEXTEDIT_NEWLINE = '\n';
+static void    STB_TEXTEDIT_LAYOUTROW(StbTexteditRow* r, ImGuiInputTextState* obj, int line_start_idx)
+{
+    const ImWchar* text = obj->TextW.Data;
+    const ImWchar* text_remaining = NULL;
+    const ImVec2 size = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(text + line_start_idx, text + obj->CurLenW, &text_remaining, NULL, true);
+    r->x0 = 0.0f;
+    r->x1 = size.x;
+    r->baseline_y_delta = size.y;
+    r->ymin = 0.0f;
+    r->ymax = size.y;
+    r->num_chars = (int)(text_remaining - (text + line_start_idx));
+}
+
+// When ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password is set, we don't want actions such as CTRL+Arrow to leak the fact that underlying data are blanks or separators.
+static bool is_separator(unsigned int c)                                        { return ImCharIsBlankW(c) || c==',' || c==';' || c=='(' || c==')' || c=='{' || c=='}' || c=='[' || c==']' || c=='|' || c=='\n' || c=='\r'; }
+static int  is_word_boundary_from_right(ImGuiInputTextState* obj, int idx)      { if (obj->Flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password) return 0; return idx > 0 ? (is_separator(obj->TextW[idx - 1]) && !is_separator(obj->TextW[idx]) ) : 1; }
+static int  is_word_boundary_from_left(ImGuiInputTextState* obj, int idx)       { if (obj->Flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password) return 0; return idx > 0 ? (!is_separator(obj->TextW[idx - 1]) && is_separator(obj->TextW[idx])) : 1; }
+static int  STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT_IMPL(ImGuiInputTextState* obj, int idx)   { idx--; while (idx >= 0 && !is_word_boundary_from_right(obj, idx)) idx--; return idx < 0 ? 0 : idx; }
+static int  STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_MAC(ImGuiInputTextState* obj, int idx)   { idx++; int len = obj->CurLenW; while (idx < len && !is_word_boundary_from_left(obj, idx)) idx++; return idx > len ? len : idx; }
+static int  STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_WIN(ImGuiInputTextState* obj, int idx)   { idx++; int len = obj->CurLenW; while (idx < len && !is_word_boundary_from_right(obj, idx)) idx++; return idx > len ? len : idx; }
+static int  STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_IMPL(ImGuiInputTextState* obj, int idx)  { if (ImGui::GetIO().ConfigMacOSXBehaviors) return STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_MAC(obj, idx); else return STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_WIN(obj, idx); }
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT   STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDLEFT_IMPL  // They need to be #define for stb_textedit.h
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT  STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_IMPL
+
+static void STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(ImGuiInputTextState* obj, int pos, int n)
+{
+    ImWchar* dst = obj->TextW.Data + pos;
+
+    // We maintain our buffer length in both UTF-8 and wchar formats
+    obj->Edited = true;
+    obj->CurLenA -= ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(dst, dst + n);
+    obj->CurLenW -= n;
+
+    // Offset remaining text (FIXME-OPT: Use memmove)
+    const ImWchar* src = obj->TextW.Data + pos + n;
+    while (ImWchar c = *src++)
+        *dst++ = c;
+    *dst = '\0';
+}
+
+static bool STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(ImGuiInputTextState* obj, int pos, const ImWchar* new_text, int new_text_len)
+{
+    const bool is_resizable = (obj->Flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize) != 0;
+    const int text_len = obj->CurLenW;
+    IM_ASSERT(pos <= text_len);
+
+    const int new_text_len_utf8 = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(new_text, new_text + new_text_len);
+    if (!is_resizable && (new_text_len_utf8 + obj->CurLenA + 1 > obj->BufCapacityA))
+        return false;
+
+    // Grow internal buffer if needed
+    if (new_text_len + text_len + 1 > obj->TextW.Size)
+    {
+        if (!is_resizable)
+            return false;
+        IM_ASSERT(text_len < obj->TextW.Size);
+        obj->TextW.resize(text_len + ImClamp(new_text_len * 4, 32, ImMax(256, new_text_len)) + 1);
+    }
+
+    ImWchar* text = obj->TextW.Data;
+    if (pos != text_len)
+        memmove(text + pos + new_text_len, text + pos, (size_t)(text_len - pos) * sizeof(ImWchar));
+    memcpy(text + pos, new_text, (size_t)new_text_len * sizeof(ImWchar));
+
+    obj->Edited = true;
+    obj->CurLenW += new_text_len;
+    obj->CurLenA += new_text_len_utf8;
+    obj->TextW[obj->CurLenW] = '\0';
+
+    return true;
+}
+
+// We don't use an enum so we can build even with conflicting symbols (if another user of stb_textedit.h leak their STB_TEXTEDIT_K_* symbols)
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT         0x200000 // keyboard input to move cursor left
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT        0x200001 // keyboard input to move cursor right
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP           0x200002 // keyboard input to move cursor up
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN         0x200003 // keyboard input to move cursor down
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART    0x200004 // keyboard input to move cursor to start of line
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND      0x200005 // keyboard input to move cursor to end of line
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART    0x200006 // keyboard input to move cursor to start of text
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND      0x200007 // keyboard input to move cursor to end of text
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE       0x200008 // keyboard input to delete selection or character under cursor
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE    0x200009 // keyboard input to delete selection or character left of cursor
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UNDO         0x20000A // keyboard input to perform undo
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_REDO         0x20000B // keyboard input to perform redo
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT     0x20000C // keyboard input to move cursor left one word
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT    0x20000D // keyboard input to move cursor right one word
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGUP         0x20000E // keyboard input to move cursor up a page
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGDOWN       0x20000F // keyboard input to move cursor down a page
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT        0x400000
+
+#define STB_TEXTEDIT_IMPLEMENTATION
+#include "imstb_textedit.h"
+
+// stb_textedit internally allows for a single undo record to do addition and deletion, but somehow, calling
+// the stb_textedit_paste() function creates two separate records, so we perform it manually. (FIXME: Report to nothings/stb?)
+static void stb_textedit_replace(ImGuiInputTextState* str, STB_TexteditState* state, const STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE* text, int text_len)
+{
+    stb_text_makeundo_replace(str, state, 0, str->CurLenW, text_len);
+    ImStb::STB_TEXTEDIT_DELETECHARS(str, 0, str->CurLenW);
+    if (text_len <= 0)
+        return;
+    if (ImStb::STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS(str, 0, text, text_len))
+    {
+        state->cursor = text_len;
+        state->has_preferred_x = 0;
+        return;
+    }
+    IM_ASSERT(0); // Failed to insert character, normally shouldn't happen because of how we currently use stb_textedit_replace()
+}
+
+} // namespace ImStb
+
+void ImGuiInputTextState::OnKeyPressed(int key)
+{
+    stb_textedit_key(this, &Stb, key);
+    CursorFollow = true;
+    CursorAnimReset();
+}
+
+ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::ImGuiInputTextCallbackData()
+{
+    memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this));
+}
+
+// Public API to manipulate UTF-8 text
+// We expose UTF-8 to the user (unlike the STB_TEXTEDIT_* functions which are manipulating wchar)
+// FIXME: The existence of this rarely exercised code path is a bit of a nuisance.
+void ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::DeleteChars(int pos, int bytes_count)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(pos + bytes_count <= BufTextLen);
+    char* dst = Buf + pos;
+    const char* src = Buf + pos + bytes_count;
+    while (char c = *src++)
+        *dst++ = c;
+    *dst = '\0';
+
+    if (CursorPos >= pos + bytes_count)
+        CursorPos -= bytes_count;
+    else if (CursorPos >= pos)
+        CursorPos = pos;
+    SelectionStart = SelectionEnd = CursorPos;
+    BufDirty = true;
+    BufTextLen -= bytes_count;
+}
+
+void ImGuiInputTextCallbackData::InsertChars(int pos, const char* new_text, const char* new_text_end)
+{
+    const bool is_resizable = (Flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize) != 0;
+    const int new_text_len = new_text_end ? (int)(new_text_end - new_text) : (int)strlen(new_text);
+    if (new_text_len + BufTextLen >= BufSize)
+    {
+        if (!is_resizable)
+            return;
+
+        // Contrary to STB_TEXTEDIT_INSERTCHARS() this is working in the UTF8 buffer, hence the mildly similar code (until we remove the U16 buffer altogether!)
+        ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+        ImGuiInputTextState* edit_state = &g.InputTextState;
+        IM_ASSERT(edit_state->ID != 0 && g.ActiveId == edit_state->ID);
+        IM_ASSERT(Buf == edit_state->TextA.Data);
+        int new_buf_size = BufTextLen + ImClamp(new_text_len * 4, 32, ImMax(256, new_text_len)) + 1;
+        edit_state->TextA.reserve(new_buf_size + 1);
+        Buf = edit_state->TextA.Data;
+        BufSize = edit_state->BufCapacityA = new_buf_size;
+    }
+
+    if (BufTextLen != pos)
+        memmove(Buf + pos + new_text_len, Buf + pos, (size_t)(BufTextLen - pos));
+    memcpy(Buf + pos, new_text, (size_t)new_text_len * sizeof(char));
+    Buf[BufTextLen + new_text_len] = '\0';
+
+    if (CursorPos >= pos)
+        CursorPos += new_text_len;
+    SelectionStart = SelectionEnd = CursorPos;
+    BufDirty = true;
+    BufTextLen += new_text_len;
+}
+
+// Return false to discard a character.
+static bool InputTextFilterCharacter(unsigned int* p_char, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* user_data, ImGuiInputSource input_source)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(input_source == ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard || input_source == ImGuiInputSource_Clipboard);
+    unsigned int c = *p_char;
+
+    // Filter non-printable (NB: isprint is unreliable! see #2467)
+    bool apply_named_filters = true;
+    if (c < 0x20)
+    {
+        bool pass = false;
+        pass |= (c == '\n' && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline)); // Note that an Enter KEY will emit \r and be ignored (we poll for KEY in InputText() code)
+        pass |= (c == '\t' && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput));
+        if (!pass)
+            return false;
+        apply_named_filters = false; // Override named filters below so newline and tabs can still be inserted.
+    }
+
+    if (input_source != ImGuiInputSource_Clipboard)
+    {
+        // We ignore Ascii representation of delete (emitted from Backspace on OSX, see #2578, #2817)
+        if (c == 127)
+            return false;
+
+        // Filter private Unicode range. GLFW on OSX seems to send private characters for special keys like arrow keys (FIXME)
+        if (c >= 0xE000 && c <= 0xF8FF)
+            return false;
+    }
+
+    // Filter Unicode ranges we are not handling in this build
+    if (c > IM_UNICODE_CODEPOINT_MAX)
+        return false;
+
+    // Generic named filters
+    if (apply_named_filters && (flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific)))
+    {
+        // The libc allows overriding locale, with e.g. 'setlocale(LC_NUMERIC, "de_DE.UTF-8");' which affect the output/input of printf/scanf to use e.g. ',' instead of '.'.
+        // The standard mandate that programs starts in the "C" locale where the decimal point is '.'.
+        // We don't really intend to provide widespread support for it, but out of empathy for people stuck with using odd API, we support the bare minimum aka overriding the decimal point.
+        // Change the default decimal_point with:
+        //   ImGui::GetCurrentContext()->PlatformLocaleDecimalPoint = *localeconv()->decimal_point;
+        // Users of non-default decimal point (in particular ',') may be affected by word-selection logic (is_word_boundary_from_right/is_word_boundary_from_left) functions.
+        ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+        const unsigned c_decimal_point = (unsigned int)g.PlatformLocaleDecimalPoint;
+
+        // Allow 0-9 . - + * /
+        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsDecimal)
+            if (!(c >= '0' && c <= '9') && (c != c_decimal_point) && (c != '-') && (c != '+') && (c != '*') && (c != '/'))
+                return false;
+
+        // Allow 0-9 . - + * / e E
+        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsScientific)
+            if (!(c >= '0' && c <= '9') && (c != c_decimal_point) && (c != '-') && (c != '+') && (c != '*') && (c != '/') && (c != 'e') && (c != 'E'))
+                return false;
+
+        // Allow 0-9 a-F A-F
+        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal)
+            if (!(c >= '0' && c <= '9') && !(c >= 'a' && c <= 'f') && !(c >= 'A' && c <= 'F'))
+                return false;
+
+        // Turn a-z into A-Z
+        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase)
+            if (c >= 'a' && c <= 'z')
+                *p_char = (c += (unsigned int)('A' - 'a'));
+
+        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsNoBlank)
+            if (ImCharIsBlankW(c))
+                return false;
+    }
+
+    // Custom callback filter
+    if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter)
+    {
+        ImGuiInputTextCallbackData callback_data;
+        memset(&callback_data, 0, sizeof(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData));
+        callback_data.EventFlag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCharFilter;
+        callback_data.EventChar = (ImWchar)c;
+        callback_data.Flags = flags;
+        callback_data.UserData = user_data;
+        if (callback(&callback_data) != 0)
+            return false;
+        *p_char = callback_data.EventChar;
+        if (!callback_data.EventChar)
+            return false;
+    }
+
+    return true;
+}
+
+// Find the shortest single replacement we can make to get the new text from the old text.
+// Important: needs to be run before TextW is rewritten with the new characters because calling STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR() at the end.
+// FIXME: Ideally we should transition toward (1) making InsertChars()/DeleteChars() update undo-stack (2) discourage (and keep reconcile) or obsolete (and remove reconcile) accessing buffer directly.
+static void InputTextReconcileUndoStateAfterUserCallback(ImGuiInputTextState* state, const char* new_buf_a, int new_length_a)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const ImWchar* old_buf = state->TextW.Data;
+    const int old_length = state->CurLenW;
+    const int new_length = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(new_buf_a, new_buf_a + new_length_a);
+    g.TempBuffer.reserve_discard((new_length + 1) * sizeof(ImWchar));
+    ImWchar* new_buf = (ImWchar*)(void*)g.TempBuffer.Data;
+    ImTextStrFromUtf8(new_buf, new_length + 1, new_buf_a, new_buf_a + new_length_a);
+
+    const int shorter_length = ImMin(old_length, new_length);
+    int first_diff;
+    for (first_diff = 0; first_diff < shorter_length; first_diff++)
+        if (old_buf[first_diff] != new_buf[first_diff])
+            break;
+    if (first_diff == old_length && first_diff == new_length)
+        return;
+
+    int old_last_diff = old_length - 1;
+    int new_last_diff = new_length - 1;
+    for (; old_last_diff >= first_diff && new_last_diff >= first_diff; old_last_diff--, new_last_diff--)
+        if (old_buf[old_last_diff] != new_buf[new_last_diff])
+            break;
+
+    const int insert_len = new_last_diff - first_diff + 1;
+    const int delete_len = old_last_diff - first_diff + 1;
+    if (insert_len > 0 || delete_len > 0)
+        if (STB_TEXTEDIT_CHARTYPE* p = stb_text_createundo(&state->Stb.undostate, first_diff, delete_len, insert_len))
+            for (int i = 0; i < delete_len; i++)
+                p[i] = ImStb::STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(state, first_diff + i);
+}
+
+// Edit a string of text
+// - buf_size account for the zero-terminator, so a buf_size of 6 can hold "Hello" but not "Hello!".
+//   This is so we can easily call InputText() on static arrays using ARRAYSIZE() and to match
+//   Note that in std::string world, capacity() would omit 1 byte used by the zero-terminator.
+// - When active, hold on a privately held copy of the text (and apply back to 'buf'). So changing 'buf' while the InputText is active has no effect.
+// - If you want to use ImGui::InputText() with std::string, see misc/cpp/imgui_stdlib.h
+// (FIXME: Rather confusing and messy function, among the worse part of our codebase, expecting to rewrite a V2 at some point.. Partly because we are
+//  doing UTF8 > U16 > UTF8 conversions on the go to easily interface with stb_textedit. Ideally should stay in UTF-8 all the time. See https://github.com/nothings/stb/issues/188)
+bool ImGui::InputTextEx(const char* label, const char* hint, char* buf, int buf_size, const ImVec2& size_arg, ImGuiInputTextFlags flags, ImGuiInputTextCallback callback, void* callback_user_data)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    IM_ASSERT(buf != NULL && buf_size >= 0);
+    IM_ASSERT(!((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory) && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline)));        // Can't use both together (they both use up/down keys)
+    IM_ASSERT(!((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion) && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput))); // Can't use both together (they both use tab key)
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiIO& io = g.IO;
+    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+
+    const bool RENDER_SELECTION_WHEN_INACTIVE = false;
+    const bool is_multiline = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Multiline) != 0;
+    const bool is_readonly = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_ReadOnly) != 0;
+    const bool is_password = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_Password) != 0;
+    const bool is_undoable = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoUndoRedo) == 0;
+    const bool is_resizable = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize) != 0;
+    if (is_resizable)
+        IM_ASSERT(callback != NULL); // Must provide a callback if you set the ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize flag!
+
+    if (is_multiline) // Open group before calling GetID() because groups tracks id created within their scope (including the scrollbar)
+        BeginGroup();
+    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
+    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+    const ImVec2 frame_size = CalcItemSize(size_arg, CalcItemWidth(), (is_multiline ? g.FontSize * 8.0f : label_size.y) + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f); // Arbitrary default of 8 lines high for multi-line
+    const ImVec2 total_size = ImVec2(frame_size.x + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f), frame_size.y);
+
+    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + frame_size);
+    const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Min + total_size);
+
+    ImGuiWindow* draw_window = window;
+    ImVec2 inner_size = frame_size;
+    ImGuiItemStatusFlags item_status_flags = 0;
+    ImGuiLastItemData item_data_backup;
+    if (is_multiline)
+    {
+        ImVec2 backup_pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+        ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
+        if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb, ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable))
+        {
+            EndGroup();
+            return false;
+        }
+        item_status_flags = g.LastItemData.StatusFlags;
+        item_data_backup = g.LastItemData;
+        window->DC.CursorPos = backup_pos;
+
+        // We reproduce the contents of BeginChildFrame() in order to provide 'label' so our window internal data are easier to read/debug.
+        // FIXME-NAV: Pressing NavActivate will trigger general child activation right before triggering our own below. Harmless but bizarre.
+        PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ChildBg, style.Colors[ImGuiCol_FrameBg]);
+        PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding, style.FrameRounding);
+        PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildBorderSize, style.FrameBorderSize);
+        PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, ImVec2(0, 0)); // Ensure no clip rect so mouse hover can reach FramePadding edges
+        bool child_visible = BeginChildEx(label, id, frame_bb.GetSize(), true, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove);
+        PopStyleVar(3);
+        PopStyleColor();
+        if (!child_visible)
+        {
+            EndChild();
+            EndGroup();
+            return false;
+        }
+        draw_window = g.CurrentWindow; // Child window
+        draw_window->DC.NavLayersActiveMaskNext |= (1 << draw_window->DC.NavLayerCurrent); // This is to ensure that EndChild() will display a navigation highlight so we can "enter" into it.
+        draw_window->DC.CursorPos += style.FramePadding;
+        inner_size.x -= draw_window->ScrollbarSizes.x;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Support for internal ImGuiInputTextFlags_MergedItem flag, which could be redesigned as an ItemFlags if needed (with test performed in ItemAdd)
+        ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
+        if (!(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_MergedItem))
+            if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, id, &frame_bb, ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable))
+                return false;
+        item_status_flags = g.LastItemData.StatusFlags;
+    }
+    const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);
+    if (hovered)
+        g.MouseCursor = ImGuiMouseCursor_TextInput;
+
+    // We are only allowed to access the state if we are already the active widget.
+    ImGuiInputTextState* state = GetInputTextState(id);
+
+    const bool input_requested_by_tabbing = (item_status_flags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_FocusedByTabbing) != 0;
+    const bool input_requested_by_nav = (g.ActiveId != id) && ((g.NavActivateInputId == id) || (g.NavActivateId == id && g.NavInputSource == ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard));
+
+    const bool user_clicked = hovered && io.MouseClicked[0];
+    const bool user_scroll_finish = is_multiline && state != NULL && g.ActiveId == 0 && g.ActiveIdPreviousFrame == GetWindowScrollbarID(draw_window, ImGuiAxis_Y);
+    const bool user_scroll_active = is_multiline && state != NULL && g.ActiveId == GetWindowScrollbarID(draw_window, ImGuiAxis_Y);
+    bool clear_active_id = false;
+    bool select_all = false;
+
+    float scroll_y = is_multiline ? draw_window->Scroll.y : FLT_MAX;
+
+    const bool init_changed_specs = (state != NULL && state->Stb.single_line != !is_multiline);
+    const bool init_make_active = (user_clicked || user_scroll_finish || input_requested_by_nav || input_requested_by_tabbing);
+    const bool init_state = (init_make_active || user_scroll_active);
+    if ((init_state && g.ActiveId != id) || init_changed_specs)
+    {
+        // Access state even if we don't own it yet.
+        state = &g.InputTextState;
+        state->CursorAnimReset();
+
+        // Take a copy of the initial buffer value (both in original UTF-8 format and converted to wchar)
+        // From the moment we focused we are ignoring the content of 'buf' (unless we are in read-only mode)
+        const int buf_len = (int)strlen(buf);
+        state->InitialTextA.resize(buf_len + 1);    // UTF-8. we use +1 to make sure that .Data is always pointing to at least an empty string.
+        memcpy(state->InitialTextA.Data, buf, buf_len + 1);
+
+        // Preserve cursor position and undo/redo stack if we come back to same widget
+        // FIXME: Since we reworked this on 2022/06, may want to differenciate recycle_cursor vs recycle_undostate?
+        bool recycle_state = (state->ID == id && !init_changed_specs);
+        if (recycle_state && (state->CurLenA != buf_len || (state->TextAIsValid && strncmp(state->TextA.Data, buf, buf_len) != 0)))
+            recycle_state = false;
+
+        // Start edition
+        const char* buf_end = NULL;
+        state->ID = id;
+        state->TextW.resize(buf_size + 1);          // wchar count <= UTF-8 count. we use +1 to make sure that .Data is always pointing to at least an empty string.
+        state->TextA.resize(0);
+        state->TextAIsValid = false;                // TextA is not valid yet (we will display buf until then)
+        state->CurLenW = ImTextStrFromUtf8(state->TextW.Data, buf_size, buf, NULL, &buf_end);
+        state->CurLenA = (int)(buf_end - buf);      // We can't get the result from ImStrncpy() above because it is not UTF-8 aware. Here we'll cut off malformed UTF-8.
+
+        if (recycle_state)
+        {
+            // Recycle existing cursor/selection/undo stack but clamp position
+            // Note a single mouse click will override the cursor/position immediately by calling stb_textedit_click handler.
+            state->CursorClamp();
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            state->ScrollX = 0.0f;
+            stb_textedit_initialize_state(&state->Stb, !is_multiline);
+        }
+
+        if (!is_multiline)
+        {
+            if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AutoSelectAll)
+                select_all = true;
+            if (input_requested_by_nav && (!recycle_state || !(g.NavActivateFlags & ImGuiActivateFlags_TryToPreserveState)))
+                select_all = true;
+            if (input_requested_by_tabbing || (user_clicked && io.KeyCtrl))
+                select_all = true;
+        }
+
+        if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AlwaysOverwrite)
+            state->Stb.insert_mode = 1; // stb field name is indeed incorrect (see #2863)
+    }
+
+    if (g.ActiveId != id && init_make_active)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(state && state->ID == id);
+        SetActiveID(id, window);
+        SetFocusID(id, window);
+        FocusWindow(window);
+
+        // Declare our inputs
+        g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask |= (1 << ImGuiDir_Left) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Right);
+        if (is_multiline || (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory))
+            g.ActiveIdUsingNavDirMask |= (1 << ImGuiDir_Up) | (1 << ImGuiDir_Down);
+        SetActiveIdUsingKey(ImGuiKey_Escape);
+        SetActiveIdUsingKey(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadCancel);
+        SetActiveIdUsingKey(ImGuiKey_Home);
+        SetActiveIdUsingKey(ImGuiKey_End);
+        if (is_multiline)
+        {
+            SetActiveIdUsingKey(ImGuiKey_PageUp);
+            SetActiveIdUsingKey(ImGuiKey_PageDown);
+        }
+        if (flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion | ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput)) // Disable keyboard tabbing out as we will use the \t character.
+        {
+            SetActiveIdUsingKey(ImGuiKey_Tab);
+        }
+    }
+
+    // We have an edge case if ActiveId was set through another widget (e.g. widget being swapped), clear id immediately (don't wait until the end of the function)
+    if (g.ActiveId == id && state == NULL)
+        ClearActiveID();
+
+    // Release focus when we click outside
+    if (g.ActiveId == id && io.MouseClicked[0] && !init_state && !init_make_active) //-V560
+        clear_active_id = true;
+
+    // Lock the decision of whether we are going to take the path displaying the cursor or selection
+    const bool render_cursor = (g.ActiveId == id) || (state && user_scroll_active);
+    bool render_selection = state && (state->HasSelection() || select_all) && (RENDER_SELECTION_WHEN_INACTIVE || render_cursor);
+    bool value_changed = false;
+    bool validated = false;
+
+    // When read-only we always use the live data passed to the function
+    // FIXME-OPT: Because our selection/cursor code currently needs the wide text we need to convert it when active, which is not ideal :(
+    if (is_readonly && state != NULL && (render_cursor || render_selection))
+    {
+        const char* buf_end = NULL;
+        state->TextW.resize(buf_size + 1);
+        state->CurLenW = ImTextStrFromUtf8(state->TextW.Data, state->TextW.Size, buf, NULL, &buf_end);
+        state->CurLenA = (int)(buf_end - buf);
+        state->CursorClamp();
+        render_selection &= state->HasSelection();
+    }
+
+    // Select the buffer to render.
+    const bool buf_display_from_state = (render_cursor || render_selection || g.ActiveId == id) && !is_readonly && state && state->TextAIsValid;
+    const bool is_displaying_hint = (hint != NULL && (buf_display_from_state ? state->TextA.Data : buf)[0] == 0);
+
+    // Password pushes a temporary font with only a fallback glyph
+    if (is_password && !is_displaying_hint)
+    {
+        const ImFontGlyph* glyph = g.Font->FindGlyph('*');
+        ImFont* password_font = &g.InputTextPasswordFont;
+        password_font->FontSize = g.Font->FontSize;
+        password_font->Scale = g.Font->Scale;
+        password_font->Ascent = g.Font->Ascent;
+        password_font->Descent = g.Font->Descent;
+        password_font->ContainerAtlas = g.Font->ContainerAtlas;
+        password_font->FallbackGlyph = glyph;
+        password_font->FallbackAdvanceX = glyph->AdvanceX;
+        IM_ASSERT(password_font->Glyphs.empty() && password_font->IndexAdvanceX.empty() && password_font->IndexLookup.empty());
+        PushFont(password_font);
+    }
+
+    // Process mouse inputs and character inputs
+    int backup_current_text_length = 0;
+    if (g.ActiveId == id)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(state != NULL);
+        backup_current_text_length = state->CurLenA;
+        state->Edited = false;
+        state->BufCapacityA = buf_size;
+        state->Flags = flags;
+
+        // Although we are active we don't prevent mouse from hovering other elements unless we are interacting right now with the widget.
+        // Down the line we should have a cleaner library-wide concept of Selected vs Active.
+        g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap = !io.MouseDown[0];
+        g.WantTextInputNextFrame = 1;
+
+        // Edit in progress
+        const float mouse_x = (io.MousePos.x - frame_bb.Min.x - style.FramePadding.x) + state->ScrollX;
+        const float mouse_y = (is_multiline ? (io.MousePos.y - draw_window->DC.CursorPos.y) : (g.FontSize * 0.5f));
+
+        const bool is_osx = io.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors;
+        if (select_all)
+        {
+            state->SelectAll();
+            state->SelectedAllMouseLock = true;
+        }
+        else if (hovered && io.MouseClickedCount[0] >= 2 && !io.KeyShift)
+        {
+            stb_textedit_click(state, &state->Stb, mouse_x, mouse_y);
+            const int multiclick_count = (io.MouseClickedCount[0] - 2);
+            if ((multiclick_count % 2) == 0)
+            {
+                // Double-click: Select word
+                // We always use the "Mac" word advance for double-click select vs CTRL+Right which use the platform dependent variant:
+                // FIXME: There are likely many ways to improve this behavior, but there's no "right" behavior (depends on use-case, software, OS)
+                const bool is_bol = (state->Stb.cursor == 0) || ImStb::STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(state, state->Stb.cursor - 1) == '\n';
+                if (STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(&state->Stb) || !is_bol)
+                    state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT);
+                //state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
+                if (!STB_TEXT_HAS_SELECTION(&state->Stb))
+                    ImStb::stb_textedit_prep_selection_at_cursor(&state->Stb);
+                state->Stb.cursor = ImStb::STB_TEXTEDIT_MOVEWORDRIGHT_MAC(state, state->Stb.cursor);
+                state->Stb.select_end = state->Stb.cursor;
+                ImStb::stb_textedit_clamp(state, &state->Stb);
+            }
+            else
+            {
+                // Triple-click: Select line
+                const bool is_eol = ImStb::STB_TEXTEDIT_GETCHAR(state, state->Stb.cursor) == '\n';
+                state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART);
+                state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
+                state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
+                if (!is_eol && is_multiline)
+                {
+                    ImSwap(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end);
+                    state->Stb.cursor = state->Stb.select_end;
+                }
+                state->CursorFollow = false;
+            }
+            state->CursorAnimReset();
+        }
+        else if (io.MouseClicked[0] && !state->SelectedAllMouseLock)
+        {
+            // FIXME: unselect on late click could be done release?
+            if (hovered)
+            {
+                stb_textedit_click(state, &state->Stb, mouse_x, mouse_y);
+                state->CursorAnimReset();
+            }
+        }
+        else if (io.MouseDown[0] && !state->SelectedAllMouseLock && (io.MouseDelta.x != 0.0f || io.MouseDelta.y != 0.0f))
+        {
+            stb_textedit_drag(state, &state->Stb, mouse_x, mouse_y);
+            state->CursorAnimReset();
+            state->CursorFollow = true;
+        }
+        if (state->SelectedAllMouseLock && !io.MouseDown[0])
+            state->SelectedAllMouseLock = false;
+
+        // We expect backends to emit a Tab key but some also emit a Tab character which we ignore (#2467, #1336)
+        // (For Tab and Enter: Win32/SFML/Allegro are sending both keys and chars, GLFW and SDL are only sending keys. For Space they all send all threes)
+        const bool ignore_char_inputs = (io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyAlt) || (is_osx && io.KeySuper);
+        if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_AllowTabInput) && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Tab) && !ignore_char_inputs && !io.KeyShift && !is_readonly)
+        {
+            unsigned int c = '\t'; // Insert TAB
+            if (InputTextFilterCharacter(&c, flags, callback, callback_user_data, ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard))
+                state->OnKeyPressed((int)c);
+        }
+
+        // Process regular text input (before we check for Return because using some IME will effectively send a Return?)
+        // We ignore CTRL inputs, but need to allow ALT+CTRL as some keyboards (e.g. German) use AltGR (which _is_ Alt+Ctrl) to input certain characters.
+        if (io.InputQueueCharacters.Size > 0)
+        {
+            if (!ignore_char_inputs && !is_readonly && !input_requested_by_nav)
+                for (int n = 0; n < io.InputQueueCharacters.Size; n++)
+                {
+                    // Insert character if they pass filtering
+                    unsigned int c = (unsigned int)io.InputQueueCharacters[n];
+                    if (c == '\t') // Skip Tab, see above.
+                        continue;
+                    if (InputTextFilterCharacter(&c, flags, callback, callback_user_data, ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard))
+                        state->OnKeyPressed((int)c);
+                }
+
+            // Consume characters
+            io.InputQueueCharacters.resize(0);
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Process other shortcuts/key-presses
+    bool cancel_edit = false;
+    if (g.ActiveId == id && !g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated && !clear_active_id)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(state != NULL);
+
+        const int row_count_per_page = ImMax((int)((inner_size.y - style.FramePadding.y) / g.FontSize), 1);
+        state->Stb.row_count_per_page = row_count_per_page;
+
+        const int k_mask = (io.KeyShift ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT : 0);
+        const bool is_osx = io.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors;
+        const bool is_osx_shift_shortcut = is_osx && (io.KeyMods == (ImGuiModFlags_Super | ImGuiModFlags_Shift));
+        const bool is_wordmove_key_down = is_osx ? io.KeyAlt : io.KeyCtrl;                     // OS X style: Text editing cursor movement using Alt instead of Ctrl
+        const bool is_startend_key_down = is_osx && io.KeySuper && !io.KeyCtrl && !io.KeyAlt;  // OS X style: Line/Text Start and End using Cmd+Arrows instead of Home/End
+        const bool is_ctrl_key_only = (io.KeyMods == ImGuiModFlags_Ctrl);
+        const bool is_shift_key_only = (io.KeyMods == ImGuiModFlags_Shift);
+        const bool is_shortcut_key = g.IO.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors ? (io.KeyMods == ImGuiModFlags_Super) : (io.KeyMods == ImGuiModFlags_Ctrl);
+
+        const bool is_cut   = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_X)) || (is_shift_key_only && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Delete))) && !is_readonly && !is_password && (!is_multiline || state->HasSelection());
+        const bool is_copy  = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_C)) || (is_ctrl_key_only  && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Insert))) && !is_password && (!is_multiline || state->HasSelection());
+        const bool is_paste = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_V)) || (is_shift_key_only && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Insert))) && !is_readonly;
+        const bool is_undo  = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Z)) && !is_readonly && is_undoable);
+        const bool is_redo  = ((is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Y)) || (is_osx_shift_shortcut && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Z))) && !is_readonly && is_undoable;
+        const bool is_select_all = is_shortcut_key && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_A);
+
+        // We allow validate/cancel with Nav source (gamepad) to makes it easier to undo an accidental NavInput press with no keyboard wired, but otherwise it isn't very useful.
+        const bool is_enter_pressed = IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Enter, true) || IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_KeypadEnter, true);
+        const bool is_gamepad_validate = IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadActivate, false) || IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadInput, false);
+        const bool is_cancel = IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Escape, false) || IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_NavGamepadCancel, false);
+
+        if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_LeftArrow))                        { state->OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART : is_wordmove_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LEFT) | k_mask); }
+        else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_RightArrow))                  { state->OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND : is_wordmove_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDRIGHT : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_RIGHT) | k_mask); }
+        else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_UpArrow) && is_multiline)     { if (io.KeyCtrl) SetScrollY(draw_window, ImMax(draw_window->Scroll.y - g.FontSize, 0.0f)); else state->OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UP) | k_mask); }
+        else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_DownArrow) && is_multiline)   { if (io.KeyCtrl) SetScrollY(draw_window, ImMin(draw_window->Scroll.y + g.FontSize, GetScrollMaxY())); else state->OnKeyPressed((is_startend_key_down ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DOWN) | k_mask); }
+        else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_PageUp) && is_multiline)      { state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGUP | k_mask); scroll_y -= row_count_per_page * g.FontSize; }
+        else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_PageDown) && is_multiline)    { state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_PGDOWN | k_mask); scroll_y += row_count_per_page * g.FontSize; }
+        else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Home))                        { state->OnKeyPressed(io.KeyCtrl ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTSTART | k_mask : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART | k_mask); }
+        else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_End))                         { state->OnKeyPressed(io.KeyCtrl ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_TEXTEND | k_mask : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINEEND | k_mask); }
+        else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Delete) && !is_readonly && !is_cut) { state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_DELETE | k_mask); }
+        else if (IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Backspace) && !is_readonly)
+        {
+            if (!state->HasSelection())
+            {
+                if (is_wordmove_key_down)
+                    state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_WORDLEFT | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
+                else if (is_osx && io.KeySuper && !io.KeyAlt && !io.KeyCtrl)
+                    state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_LINESTART | STB_TEXTEDIT_K_SHIFT);
+            }
+            state->OnKeyPressed(STB_TEXTEDIT_K_BACKSPACE | k_mask);
+        }
+        else if (is_enter_pressed || is_gamepad_validate)
+        {
+            // Determine if we turn Enter into a \n character
+            bool ctrl_enter_for_new_line = (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CtrlEnterForNewLine) != 0;
+            if (!is_multiline || is_gamepad_validate || (ctrl_enter_for_new_line && !io.KeyCtrl) || (!ctrl_enter_for_new_line && io.KeyCtrl))
+            {
+                validated = true;
+                if (io.ConfigInputTextEnterKeepActive && !is_multiline)
+                    state->SelectAll(); // No need to scroll
+                else
+                    clear_active_id = true;
+            }
+            else if (!is_readonly)
+            {
+                unsigned int c = '\n'; // Insert new line
+                if (InputTextFilterCharacter(&c, flags, callback, callback_user_data, ImGuiInputSource_Keyboard))
+                    state->OnKeyPressed((int)c);
+            }
+        }
+        else if (is_cancel)
+        {
+            clear_active_id = cancel_edit = true;
+        }
+        else if (is_undo || is_redo)
+        {
+            state->OnKeyPressed(is_undo ? STB_TEXTEDIT_K_UNDO : STB_TEXTEDIT_K_REDO);
+            state->ClearSelection();
+        }
+        else if (is_select_all)
+        {
+            state->SelectAll();
+            state->CursorFollow = true;
+        }
+        else if (is_cut || is_copy)
+        {
+            // Cut, Copy
+            if (io.SetClipboardTextFn)
+            {
+                const int ib = state->HasSelection() ? ImMin(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end) : 0;
+                const int ie = state->HasSelection() ? ImMax(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end) : state->CurLenW;
+                const int clipboard_data_len = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(state->TextW.Data + ib, state->TextW.Data + ie) + 1;
+                char* clipboard_data = (char*)IM_ALLOC(clipboard_data_len * sizeof(char));
+                ImTextStrToUtf8(clipboard_data, clipboard_data_len, state->TextW.Data + ib, state->TextW.Data + ie);
+                SetClipboardText(clipboard_data);
+                MemFree(clipboard_data);
+            }
+            if (is_cut)
+            {
+                if (!state->HasSelection())
+                    state->SelectAll();
+                state->CursorFollow = true;
+                stb_textedit_cut(state, &state->Stb);
+            }
+        }
+        else if (is_paste)
+        {
+            if (const char* clipboard = GetClipboardText())
+            {
+                // Filter pasted buffer
+                const int clipboard_len = (int)strlen(clipboard);
+                ImWchar* clipboard_filtered = (ImWchar*)IM_ALLOC((clipboard_len + 1) * sizeof(ImWchar));
+                int clipboard_filtered_len = 0;
+                for (const char* s = clipboard; *s; )
+                {
+                    unsigned int c;
+                    s += ImTextCharFromUtf8(&c, s, NULL);
+                    if (c == 0)
+                        break;
+                    if (!InputTextFilterCharacter(&c, flags, callback, callback_user_data, ImGuiInputSource_Clipboard))
+                        continue;
+                    clipboard_filtered[clipboard_filtered_len++] = (ImWchar)c;
+                }
+                clipboard_filtered[clipboard_filtered_len] = 0;
+                if (clipboard_filtered_len > 0) // If everything was filtered, ignore the pasting operation
+                {
+                    stb_textedit_paste(state, &state->Stb, clipboard_filtered, clipboard_filtered_len);
+                    state->CursorFollow = true;
+                }
+                MemFree(clipboard_filtered);
+            }
+        }
+
+        // Update render selection flag after events have been handled, so selection highlight can be displayed during the same frame.
+        render_selection |= state->HasSelection() && (RENDER_SELECTION_WHEN_INACTIVE || render_cursor);
+    }
+
+    // Process callbacks and apply result back to user's buffer.
+    const char* apply_new_text = NULL;
+    int apply_new_text_length = 0;
+    if (g.ActiveId == id)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(state != NULL);
+        if (cancel_edit)
+        {
+            // Restore initial value. Only return true if restoring to the initial value changes the current buffer contents.
+            if (!is_readonly && strcmp(buf, state->InitialTextA.Data) != 0)
+            {
+                // Push records into the undo stack so we can CTRL+Z the revert operation itself
+                apply_new_text = state->InitialTextA.Data;
+                apply_new_text_length = state->InitialTextA.Size - 1;
+                ImVector<ImWchar> w_text;
+                if (apply_new_text_length > 0)
+                {
+                    w_text.resize(ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(apply_new_text, apply_new_text + apply_new_text_length) + 1);
+                    ImTextStrFromUtf8(w_text.Data, w_text.Size, apply_new_text, apply_new_text + apply_new_text_length);
+                }
+                stb_textedit_replace(state, &state->Stb, w_text.Data, (apply_new_text_length > 0) ? (w_text.Size - 1) : 0);
+            }
+        }
+
+        // Apply ASCII value
+        if (!is_readonly)
+        {
+            state->TextAIsValid = true;
+            state->TextA.resize(state->TextW.Size * 4 + 1);
+            ImTextStrToUtf8(state->TextA.Data, state->TextA.Size, state->TextW.Data, NULL);
+        }
+
+        // When using 'ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue' as a special case we reapply the live buffer back to the input buffer before clearing ActiveId, even though strictly speaking it wasn't modified on this frame.
+        // If we didn't do that, code like InputInt() with ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue would fail.
+        // This also allows the user to use InputText() with ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue without maintaining any user-side storage (please note that if you use this property along ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize you can end up with your temporary string object unnecessarily allocating once a frame, either store your string data, either if you don't then don't use ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize).
+        const bool apply_edit_back_to_user_buffer = !cancel_edit || (validated && (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue) != 0);
+        if (apply_edit_back_to_user_buffer)
+        {
+            // Apply new value immediately - copy modified buffer back
+            // Note that as soon as the input box is active, the in-widget value gets priority over any underlying modification of the input buffer
+            // FIXME: We actually always render 'buf' when calling DrawList->AddText, making the comment above incorrect.
+            // FIXME-OPT: CPU waste to do this every time the widget is active, should mark dirty state from the stb_textedit callbacks.
+
+            // User callback
+            if ((flags & (ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackEdit | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways)) != 0)
+            {
+                IM_ASSERT(callback != NULL);
+
+                // The reason we specify the usage semantic (Completion/History) is that Completion needs to disable keyboard TABBING at the moment.
+                ImGuiInputTextFlags event_flag = 0;
+                ImGuiKey event_key = ImGuiKey_None;
+                if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion) != 0 && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Tab))
+                {
+                    event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion;
+                    event_key = ImGuiKey_Tab;
+                }
+                else if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory) != 0 && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_UpArrow))
+                {
+                    event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory;
+                    event_key = ImGuiKey_UpArrow;
+                }
+                else if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory) != 0 && IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_DownArrow))
+                {
+                    event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackHistory;
+                    event_key = ImGuiKey_DownArrow;
+                }
+                else if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackEdit) && state->Edited)
+                {
+                    event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackEdit;
+                }
+                else if (flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways)
+                {
+                    event_flag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackAlways;
+                }
+
+                if (event_flag)
+                {
+                    ImGuiInputTextCallbackData callback_data;
+                    memset(&callback_data, 0, sizeof(ImGuiInputTextCallbackData));
+                    callback_data.EventFlag = event_flag;
+                    callback_data.Flags = flags;
+                    callback_data.UserData = callback_user_data;
+
+                    char* callback_buf = is_readonly ? buf : state->TextA.Data;
+                    callback_data.EventKey = event_key;
+                    callback_data.Buf = callback_buf;
+                    callback_data.BufTextLen = state->CurLenA;
+                    callback_data.BufSize = state->BufCapacityA;
+                    callback_data.BufDirty = false;
+
+                    // We have to convert from wchar-positions to UTF-8-positions, which can be pretty slow (an incentive to ditch the ImWchar buffer, see https://github.com/nothings/stb/issues/188)
+                    ImWchar* text = state->TextW.Data;
+                    const int utf8_cursor_pos = callback_data.CursorPos = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(text, text + state->Stb.cursor);
+                    const int utf8_selection_start = callback_data.SelectionStart = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(text, text + state->Stb.select_start);
+                    const int utf8_selection_end = callback_data.SelectionEnd = ImTextCountUtf8BytesFromStr(text, text + state->Stb.select_end);
+
+                    // Call user code
+                    callback(&callback_data);
+
+                    // Read back what user may have modified
+                    callback_buf = is_readonly ? buf : state->TextA.Data; // Pointer may have been invalidated by a resize callback
+                    IM_ASSERT(callback_data.Buf == callback_buf);         // Invalid to modify those fields
+                    IM_ASSERT(callback_data.BufSize == state->BufCapacityA);
+                    IM_ASSERT(callback_data.Flags == flags);
+                    const bool buf_dirty = callback_data.BufDirty;
+                    if (callback_data.CursorPos != utf8_cursor_pos || buf_dirty)            { state->Stb.cursor = ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(callback_data.Buf, callback_data.Buf + callback_data.CursorPos); state->CursorFollow = true; }
+                    if (callback_data.SelectionStart != utf8_selection_start || buf_dirty)  { state->Stb.select_start = (callback_data.SelectionStart == callback_data.CursorPos) ? state->Stb.cursor : ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(callback_data.Buf, callback_data.Buf + callback_data.SelectionStart); }
+                    if (callback_data.SelectionEnd != utf8_selection_end || buf_dirty)      { state->Stb.select_end = (callback_data.SelectionEnd == callback_data.SelectionStart) ? state->Stb.select_start : ImTextCountCharsFromUtf8(callback_data.Buf, callback_data.Buf + callback_data.SelectionEnd); }
+                    if (buf_dirty)
+                    {
+                        IM_ASSERT(callback_data.BufTextLen == (int)strlen(callback_data.Buf)); // You need to maintain BufTextLen if you change the text!
+                        InputTextReconcileUndoStateAfterUserCallback(state, callback_data.Buf, callback_data.BufTextLen); // FIXME: Move the rest of this block inside function and rename to InputTextReconcileStateAfterUserCallback() ?
+                        if (callback_data.BufTextLen > backup_current_text_length && is_resizable)
+                            state->TextW.resize(state->TextW.Size + (callback_data.BufTextLen - backup_current_text_length)); // Worse case scenario resize
+                        state->CurLenW = ImTextStrFromUtf8(state->TextW.Data, state->TextW.Size, callback_data.Buf, NULL);
+                        state->CurLenA = callback_data.BufTextLen;  // Assume correct length and valid UTF-8 from user, saves us an extra strlen()
+                        state->CursorAnimReset();
+                    }
+                }
+            }
+
+            // Will copy result string if modified
+            if (!is_readonly && strcmp(state->TextA.Data, buf) != 0)
+            {
+                apply_new_text = state->TextA.Data;
+                apply_new_text_length = state->CurLenA;
+            }
+        }
+
+        // Clear temporary user storage
+        state->Flags = ImGuiInputTextFlags_None;
+    }
+
+    // Copy result to user buffer. This can currently only happen when (g.ActiveId == id)
+    if (apply_new_text != NULL)
+    {
+        // We cannot test for 'backup_current_text_length != apply_new_text_length' here because we have no guarantee that the size
+        // of our owned buffer matches the size of the string object held by the user, and by design we allow InputText() to be used
+        // without any storage on user's side.
+        IM_ASSERT(apply_new_text_length >= 0);
+        if (is_resizable)
+        {
+            ImGuiInputTextCallbackData callback_data;
+            callback_data.EventFlag = ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackResize;
+            callback_data.Flags = flags;
+            callback_data.Buf = buf;
+            callback_data.BufTextLen = apply_new_text_length;
+            callback_data.BufSize = ImMax(buf_size, apply_new_text_length + 1);
+            callback_data.UserData = callback_user_data;
+            callback(&callback_data);
+            buf = callback_data.Buf;
+            buf_size = callback_data.BufSize;
+            apply_new_text_length = ImMin(callback_data.BufTextLen, buf_size - 1);
+            IM_ASSERT(apply_new_text_length <= buf_size);
+        }
+        //IMGUI_DEBUG_PRINT("InputText(\"%s\"): apply_new_text length %d\n", label, apply_new_text_length);
+
+        // If the underlying buffer resize was denied or not carried to the next frame, apply_new_text_length+1 may be >= buf_size.
+        ImStrncpy(buf, apply_new_text, ImMin(apply_new_text_length + 1, buf_size));
+        value_changed = true;
+    }
+
+    // Release active ID at the end of the function (so e.g. pressing Return still does a final application of the value)
+    if (clear_active_id && g.ActiveId == id)
+        ClearActiveID();
+
+    // Render frame
+    if (!is_multiline)
+    {
+        RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id);
+        RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding);
+    }
+
+    const ImVec4 clip_rect(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Min.y, frame_bb.Min.x + inner_size.x, frame_bb.Min.y + inner_size.y); // Not using frame_bb.Max because we have adjusted size
+    ImVec2 draw_pos = is_multiline ? draw_window->DC.CursorPos : frame_bb.Min + style.FramePadding;
+    ImVec2 text_size(0.0f, 0.0f);
+
+    // Set upper limit of single-line InputTextEx() at 2 million characters strings. The current pathological worst case is a long line
+    // without any carriage return, which would makes ImFont::RenderText() reserve too many vertices and probably crash. Avoid it altogether.
+    // Note that we only use this limit on single-line InputText(), so a pathologically large line on a InputTextMultiline() would still crash.
+    const int buf_display_max_length = 2 * 1024 * 1024;
+    const char* buf_display = buf_display_from_state ? state->TextA.Data : buf; //-V595
+    const char* buf_display_end = NULL; // We have specialized paths below for setting the length
+    if (is_displaying_hint)
+    {
+        buf_display = hint;
+        buf_display_end = hint + strlen(hint);
+    }
+
+    // Render text. We currently only render selection when the widget is active or while scrolling.
+    // FIXME: We could remove the '&& render_cursor' to keep rendering selection when inactive.
+    if (render_cursor || render_selection)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(state != NULL);
+        if (!is_displaying_hint)
+            buf_display_end = buf_display + state->CurLenA;
+
+        // Render text (with cursor and selection)
+        // This is going to be messy. We need to:
+        // - Display the text (this alone can be more easily clipped)
+        // - Handle scrolling, highlight selection, display cursor (those all requires some form of 1d->2d cursor position calculation)
+        // - Measure text height (for scrollbar)
+        // We are attempting to do most of that in **one main pass** to minimize the computation cost (non-negligible for large amount of text) + 2nd pass for selection rendering (we could merge them by an extra refactoring effort)
+        // FIXME: This should occur on buf_display but we'd need to maintain cursor/select_start/select_end for UTF-8.
+        const ImWchar* text_begin = state->TextW.Data;
+        ImVec2 cursor_offset, select_start_offset;
+
+        {
+            // Find lines numbers straddling 'cursor' (slot 0) and 'select_start' (slot 1) positions.
+            const ImWchar* searches_input_ptr[2] = { NULL, NULL };
+            int searches_result_line_no[2] = { -1000, -1000 };
+            int searches_remaining = 0;
+            if (render_cursor)
+            {
+                searches_input_ptr[0] = text_begin + state->Stb.cursor;
+                searches_result_line_no[0] = -1;
+                searches_remaining++;
+            }
+            if (render_selection)
+            {
+                searches_input_ptr[1] = text_begin + ImMin(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end);
+                searches_result_line_no[1] = -1;
+                searches_remaining++;
+            }
+
+            // Iterate all lines to find our line numbers
+            // In multi-line mode, we never exit the loop until all lines are counted, so add one extra to the searches_remaining counter.
+            searches_remaining += is_multiline ? 1 : 0;
+            int line_count = 0;
+            //for (const ImWchar* s = text_begin; (s = (const ImWchar*)wcschr((const wchar_t*)s, (wchar_t)'\n')) != NULL; s++)  // FIXME-OPT: Could use this when wchar_t are 16-bit
+            for (const ImWchar* s = text_begin; *s != 0; s++)
+                if (*s == '\n')
+                {
+                    line_count++;
+                    if (searches_result_line_no[0] == -1 && s >= searches_input_ptr[0]) { searches_result_line_no[0] = line_count; if (--searches_remaining <= 0) break; }
+                    if (searches_result_line_no[1] == -1 && s >= searches_input_ptr[1]) { searches_result_line_no[1] = line_count; if (--searches_remaining <= 0) break; }
+                }
+            line_count++;
+            if (searches_result_line_no[0] == -1)
+                searches_result_line_no[0] = line_count;
+            if (searches_result_line_no[1] == -1)
+                searches_result_line_no[1] = line_count;
+
+            // Calculate 2d position by finding the beginning of the line and measuring distance
+            cursor_offset.x = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(ImStrbolW(searches_input_ptr[0], text_begin), searches_input_ptr[0]).x;
+            cursor_offset.y = searches_result_line_no[0] * g.FontSize;
+            if (searches_result_line_no[1] >= 0)
+            {
+                select_start_offset.x = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(ImStrbolW(searches_input_ptr[1], text_begin), searches_input_ptr[1]).x;
+                select_start_offset.y = searches_result_line_no[1] * g.FontSize;
+            }
+
+            // Store text height (note that we haven't calculated text width at all, see GitHub issues #383, #1224)
+            if (is_multiline)
+                text_size = ImVec2(inner_size.x, line_count * g.FontSize);
+        }
+
+        // Scroll
+        if (render_cursor && state->CursorFollow)
+        {
+            // Horizontal scroll in chunks of quarter width
+            if (!(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoHorizontalScroll))
+            {
+                const float scroll_increment_x = inner_size.x * 0.25f;
+                const float visible_width = inner_size.x - style.FramePadding.x;
+                if (cursor_offset.x < state->ScrollX)
+                    state->ScrollX = IM_FLOOR(ImMax(0.0f, cursor_offset.x - scroll_increment_x));
+                else if (cursor_offset.x - visible_width >= state->ScrollX)
+                    state->ScrollX = IM_FLOOR(cursor_offset.x - visible_width + scroll_increment_x);
+            }
+            else
+            {
+                state->ScrollX = 0.0f;
+            }
+
+            // Vertical scroll
+            if (is_multiline)
+            {
+                // Test if cursor is vertically visible
+                if (cursor_offset.y - g.FontSize < scroll_y)
+                    scroll_y = ImMax(0.0f, cursor_offset.y - g.FontSize);
+                else if (cursor_offset.y - (inner_size.y - style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f) >= scroll_y)
+                    scroll_y = cursor_offset.y - inner_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f;
+                const float scroll_max_y = ImMax((text_size.y + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f) - inner_size.y, 0.0f);
+                scroll_y = ImClamp(scroll_y, 0.0f, scroll_max_y);
+                draw_pos.y += (draw_window->Scroll.y - scroll_y);   // Manipulate cursor pos immediately avoid a frame of lag
+                draw_window->Scroll.y = scroll_y;
+            }
+
+            state->CursorFollow = false;
+        }
+
+        // Draw selection
+        const ImVec2 draw_scroll = ImVec2(state->ScrollX, 0.0f);
+        if (render_selection)
+        {
+            const ImWchar* text_selected_begin = text_begin + ImMin(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end);
+            const ImWchar* text_selected_end = text_begin + ImMax(state->Stb.select_start, state->Stb.select_end);
+
+            ImU32 bg_color = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TextSelectedBg, render_cursor ? 1.0f : 0.6f); // FIXME: current code flow mandate that render_cursor is always true here, we are leaving the transparent one for tests.
+            float bg_offy_up = is_multiline ? 0.0f : -1.0f;    // FIXME: those offsets should be part of the style? they don't play so well with multi-line selection.
+            float bg_offy_dn = is_multiline ? 0.0f : 2.0f;
+            ImVec2 rect_pos = draw_pos + select_start_offset - draw_scroll;
+            for (const ImWchar* p = text_selected_begin; p < text_selected_end; )
+            {
+                if (rect_pos.y > clip_rect.w + g.FontSize)
+                    break;
+                if (rect_pos.y < clip_rect.y)
+                {
+                    //p = (const ImWchar*)wmemchr((const wchar_t*)p, '\n', text_selected_end - p);  // FIXME-OPT: Could use this when wchar_t are 16-bit
+                    //p = p ? p + 1 : text_selected_end;
+                    while (p < text_selected_end)
+                        if (*p++ == '\n')
+                            break;
+                }
+                else
+                {
+                    ImVec2 rect_size = InputTextCalcTextSizeW(p, text_selected_end, &p, NULL, true);
+                    if (rect_size.x <= 0.0f) rect_size.x = IM_FLOOR(g.Font->GetCharAdvance((ImWchar)' ') * 0.50f); // So we can see selected empty lines
+                    ImRect rect(rect_pos + ImVec2(0.0f, bg_offy_up - g.FontSize), rect_pos + ImVec2(rect_size.x, bg_offy_dn));
+                    rect.ClipWith(clip_rect);
+                    if (rect.Overlaps(clip_rect))
+                        draw_window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(rect.Min, rect.Max, bg_color);
+                }
+                rect_pos.x = draw_pos.x - draw_scroll.x;
+                rect_pos.y += g.FontSize;
+            }
+        }
+
+        // We test for 'buf_display_max_length' as a way to avoid some pathological cases (e.g. single-line 1 MB string) which would make ImDrawList crash.
+        if (is_multiline || (buf_display_end - buf_display) < buf_display_max_length)
+        {
+            ImU32 col = GetColorU32(is_displaying_hint ? ImGuiCol_TextDisabled : ImGuiCol_Text);
+            draw_window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, draw_pos - draw_scroll, col, buf_display, buf_display_end, 0.0f, is_multiline ? NULL : &clip_rect);
+        }
+
+        // Draw blinking cursor
+        if (render_cursor)
+        {
+            state->CursorAnim += io.DeltaTime;
+            bool cursor_is_visible = (!g.IO.ConfigInputTextCursorBlink) || (state->CursorAnim <= 0.0f) || ImFmod(state->CursorAnim, 1.20f) <= 0.80f;
+            ImVec2 cursor_screen_pos = ImFloor(draw_pos + cursor_offset - draw_scroll);
+            ImRect cursor_screen_rect(cursor_screen_pos.x, cursor_screen_pos.y - g.FontSize + 0.5f, cursor_screen_pos.x + 1.0f, cursor_screen_pos.y - 1.5f);
+            if (cursor_is_visible && cursor_screen_rect.Overlaps(clip_rect))
+                draw_window->DrawList->AddLine(cursor_screen_rect.Min, cursor_screen_rect.GetBL(), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text));
+
+            // Notify OS of text input position for advanced IME (-1 x offset so that Windows IME can cover our cursor. Bit of an extra nicety.)
+            if (!is_readonly)
+            {
+                g.PlatformImeData.WantVisible = true;
+                g.PlatformImeData.InputPos = ImVec2(cursor_screen_pos.x - 1.0f, cursor_screen_pos.y - g.FontSize);
+                g.PlatformImeData.InputLineHeight = g.FontSize;
+                g.PlatformImeViewport = window->Viewport->ID;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Render text only (no selection, no cursor)
+        if (is_multiline)
+            text_size = ImVec2(inner_size.x, InputTextCalcTextLenAndLineCount(buf_display, &buf_display_end) * g.FontSize); // We don't need width
+        else if (!is_displaying_hint && g.ActiveId == id)
+            buf_display_end = buf_display + state->CurLenA;
+        else if (!is_displaying_hint)
+            buf_display_end = buf_display + strlen(buf_display);
+
+        if (is_multiline || (buf_display_end - buf_display) < buf_display_max_length)
+        {
+            ImU32 col = GetColorU32(is_displaying_hint ? ImGuiCol_TextDisabled : ImGuiCol_Text);
+            draw_window->DrawList->AddText(g.Font, g.FontSize, draw_pos, col, buf_display, buf_display_end, 0.0f, is_multiline ? NULL : &clip_rect);
+        }
+    }
+
+    if (is_password && !is_displaying_hint)
+        PopFont();
+
+    if (is_multiline)
+    {
+        // For focus requests to work on our multiline we need to ensure our child ItemAdd() call specifies the ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable (ref issue #4761)...
+        Dummy(ImVec2(text_size.x, text_size.y + style.FramePadding.y));
+        ImGuiItemFlags backup_item_flags = g.CurrentItemFlags;
+        g.CurrentItemFlags |= ImGuiItemFlags_Inputable | ImGuiItemFlags_NoTabStop;
+        EndChild();
+        item_data_backup.StatusFlags |= (g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredWindow);
+        g.CurrentItemFlags = backup_item_flags;
+
+        // ...and then we need to undo the group overriding last item data, which gets a bit messy as EndGroup() tries to forward scrollbar being active...
+        // FIXME: This quite messy/tricky, should attempt to get rid of the child window.
+        EndGroup();
+        if (g.LastItemData.ID == 0)
+        {
+            g.LastItemData.ID = id;
+            g.LastItemData.InFlags = item_data_backup.InFlags;
+            g.LastItemData.StatusFlags = item_data_backup.StatusFlags;
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Log as text
+    if (g.LogEnabled && (!is_password || is_displaying_hint))
+    {
+        LogSetNextTextDecoration("{", "}");
+        LogRenderedText(&draw_pos, buf_display, buf_display_end);
+    }
+
+    if (label_size.x > 0)
+        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), label);
+
+    if (value_changed && !(flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_NoMarkEdited))
+        MarkItemEdited(id);
+
+    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags);
+    if ((flags & ImGuiInputTextFlags_EnterReturnsTrue) != 0)
+        return validated;
+    else
+        return value_changed;
+}
+
+void ImGui::DebugNodeInputTextState(ImGuiInputTextState* state)
+{
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_DEBUG_TOOLS
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImStb::STB_TexteditState* stb_state = &state->Stb;
+    ImStb::StbUndoState* undo_state = &stb_state->undostate;
+    Text("ID: 0x%08X, ActiveID: 0x%08X", state->ID, g.ActiveId);
+    Text("CurLenW: %d, CurLenA: %d, Cursor: %d, Selection: %d..%d", state->CurLenA, state->CurLenW, stb_state->cursor, stb_state->select_start, stb_state->select_end);
+    Text("undo_point: %d, redo_point: %d, undo_char_point: %d, redo_char_point: %d", undo_state->undo_point, undo_state->redo_point, undo_state->undo_char_point, undo_state->redo_char_point);
+    if (BeginChild("undopoints", ImVec2(0.0f, GetTextLineHeight() * 15), true)) // Visualize undo state
+    {
+        PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(0, 0));
+        for (int n = 0; n < STB_TEXTEDIT_UNDOSTATECOUNT; n++)
+        {
+            ImStb::StbUndoRecord* undo_rec = &undo_state->undo_rec[n];
+            const char undo_rec_type = (n < undo_state->undo_point) ? 'u' : (n >= undo_state->redo_point) ? 'r' : ' ';
+            if (undo_rec_type == ' ')
+                BeginDisabled();
+            char buf[64] = "";
+            if (undo_rec_type != ' ' && undo_rec->char_storage != -1)
+                ImTextStrToUtf8(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), undo_state->undo_char + undo_rec->char_storage, undo_state->undo_char + undo_rec->char_storage + undo_rec->insert_length);
+            Text("%c [%02d] where %03d, insert %03d, delete %03d, char_storage %03d \"%s\"",
+                undo_rec_type, n, undo_rec->where, undo_rec->insert_length, undo_rec->delete_length, undo_rec->char_storage, buf);
+            if (undo_rec_type == ' ')
+                EndDisabled();
+        }
+        PopStyleVar();
+    }
+    EndChild();
+#else
+    IM_UNUSED(state);
+#endif
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: ColorEdit, ColorPicker, ColorButton, etc.
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - ColorEdit3()
+// - ColorEdit4()
+// - ColorPicker3()
+// - RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard() [Internal]
+// - ColorPicker4()
+// - ColorButton()
+// - SetColorEditOptions()
+// - ColorTooltip() [Internal]
+// - ColorEditOptionsPopup() [Internal]
+// - ColorPickerOptionsPopup() [Internal]
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+bool ImGui::ColorEdit3(const char* label, float col[3], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
+{
+    return ColorEdit4(label, col, flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha);
+}
+
+// ColorEdit supports RGB and HSV inputs. In case of RGB input resulting color may have undefined hue and/or saturation.
+// Since widget displays both RGB and HSV values we must preserve hue and saturation to prevent these values resetting.
+static void ColorEditRestoreHS(const float* col, float* H, float* S, float* V)
+{
+    // This check is optional. Suppose we have two color widgets side by side, both widgets display different colors, but both colors have hue and/or saturation undefined.
+    // With color check: hue/saturation is preserved in one widget. Editing color in one widget would reset hue/saturation in another one.
+    // Without color check: common hue/saturation would be displayed in all widgets that have hue/saturation undefined.
+    // g.ColorEditLastColor is stored as ImU32 RGB value: this essentially gives us color equality check with reduced precision.
+    // Tiny external color changes would not be detected and this check would still pass. This is OK, since we only restore hue/saturation _only_ if they are undefined,
+    // therefore this change flipping hue/saturation from undefined to a very tiny value would still be represented in color picker.
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.ColorEditLastColor != ImGui::ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(ImVec4(col[0], col[1], col[2], 0)))
+        return;
+
+    // When S == 0, H is undefined.
+    // When H == 1 it wraps around to 0.
+    if (*S == 0.0f || (*H == 0.0f && g.ColorEditLastHue == 1))
+        *H = g.ColorEditLastHue;
+
+    // When V == 0, S is undefined.
+    if (*V == 0.0f)
+        *S = g.ColorEditLastSat;
+}
+
+// Edit colors components (each component in 0.0f..1.0f range).
+// See enum ImGuiColorEditFlags_ for available options. e.g. Only access 3 floats if ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha flag is set.
+// With typical options: Left-click on color square to open color picker. Right-click to open option menu. CTRL-Click over input fields to edit them and TAB to go to next item.
+bool ImGui::ColorEdit4(const char* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+    const float square_sz = GetFrameHeight();
+    const float w_full = CalcItemWidth();
+    const float w_button = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview) ? 0.0f : (square_sz + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+    const float w_inputs = w_full - w_button;
+    const char* label_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
+    g.NextItemData.ClearFlags();
+
+    BeginGroup();
+    PushID(label);
+
+    // If we're not showing any slider there's no point in doing any HSV conversions
+    const ImGuiColorEditFlags flags_untouched = flags;
+    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs)
+        flags = (flags & (~ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_)) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions;
+
+    // Context menu: display and modify options (before defaults are applied)
+    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
+        ColorEditOptionsPopup(col, flags);
+
+    // Read stored options
+    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_))
+        flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_);
+    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_))
+        flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_);
+    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_))
+        flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_);
+    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_))
+        flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_);
+    flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ~(ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_));
+    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_)); // Check that only 1 is selected
+    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_));   // Check that only 1 is selected
+
+    const bool alpha = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) == 0;
+    const bool hdr = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR) != 0;
+    const int components = alpha ? 4 : 3;
+
+    // Convert to the formats we need
+    float f[4] = { col[0], col[1], col[2], alpha ? col[3] : 1.0f };
+    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV) && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB))
+        ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(f[0], f[1], f[2], f[0], f[1], f[2]);
+    else if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB) && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV))
+    {
+        // Hue is lost when converting from greyscale rgb (saturation=0). Restore it.
+        ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(f[0], f[1], f[2], f[0], f[1], f[2]);
+        ColorEditRestoreHS(col, &f[0], &f[1], &f[2]);
+    }
+    int i[4] = { IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[0]), IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[1]), IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[2]), IM_F32_TO_INT8_UNBOUND(f[3]) };
+
+    bool value_changed = false;
+    bool value_changed_as_float = false;
+
+    const ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+    const float inputs_offset_x = (style.ColorButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Left) ? w_button : 0.0f;
+    window->DC.CursorPos.x = pos.x + inputs_offset_x;
+
+    if ((flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV)) != 0 && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) == 0)
+    {
+        // RGB/HSV 0..255 Sliders
+        const float w_item_one  = ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR((w_inputs - (style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components - 1)) / (float)components));
+        const float w_item_last = ImMax(1.0f, IM_FLOOR(w_inputs - (w_item_one + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x) * (components - 1)));
+
+        const bool hide_prefix = (w_item_one <= CalcTextSize((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float) ? "M:0.000" : "M:000").x);
+        static const char* ids[4] = { "##X", "##Y", "##Z", "##W" };
+        static const char* fmt_table_int[3][4] =
+        {
+            {   "%3d",   "%3d",   "%3d",   "%3d" }, // Short display
+            { "R:%3d", "G:%3d", "B:%3d", "A:%3d" }, // Long display for RGBA
+            { "H:%3d", "S:%3d", "V:%3d", "A:%3d" }  // Long display for HSVA
+        };
+        static const char* fmt_table_float[3][4] =
+        {
+            {   "%0.3f",   "%0.3f",   "%0.3f",   "%0.3f" }, // Short display
+            { "R:%0.3f", "G:%0.3f", "B:%0.3f", "A:%0.3f" }, // Long display for RGBA
+            { "H:%0.3f", "S:%0.3f", "V:%0.3f", "A:%0.3f" }  // Long display for HSVA
+        };
+        const int fmt_idx = hide_prefix ? 0 : (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV) ? 2 : 1;
+
+        for (int n = 0; n < components; n++)
+        {
+            if (n > 0)
+                SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+            SetNextItemWidth((n + 1 < components) ? w_item_one : w_item_last);
+
+            // FIXME: When ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR flag is passed HS values snap in weird ways when SV values go below 0.
+            if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float)
+            {
+                value_changed |= DragFloat(ids[n], &f[n], 1.0f / 255.0f, 0.0f, hdr ? 0.0f : 1.0f, fmt_table_float[fmt_idx][n]);
+                value_changed_as_float |= value_changed;
+            }
+            else
+            {
+                value_changed |= DragInt(ids[n], &i[n], 1.0f, 0, hdr ? 0 : 255, fmt_table_int[fmt_idx][n]);
+            }
+            if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
+                OpenPopupOnItemClick("context", ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight);
+        }
+    }
+    else if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex) != 0 && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) == 0)
+    {
+        // RGB Hexadecimal Input
+        char buf[64];
+        if (alpha)
+            ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "#%02X%02X%02X%02X", ImClamp(i[0], 0, 255), ImClamp(i[1], 0, 255), ImClamp(i[2], 0, 255), ImClamp(i[3], 0, 255));
+        else
+            ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "#%02X%02X%02X", ImClamp(i[0], 0, 255), ImClamp(i[1], 0, 255), ImClamp(i[2], 0, 255));
+        SetNextItemWidth(w_inputs);
+        if (InputText("##Text", buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsHexadecimal | ImGuiInputTextFlags_CharsUppercase))
+        {
+            value_changed = true;
+            char* p = buf;
+            while (*p == '#' || ImCharIsBlankA(*p))
+                p++;
+            i[0] = i[1] = i[2] = 0;
+            i[3] = 0xFF; // alpha default to 255 is not parsed by scanf (e.g. inputting #FFFFFF omitting alpha)
+            int r;
+            if (alpha)
+                r = sscanf(p, "%02X%02X%02X%02X", (unsigned int*)&i[0], (unsigned int*)&i[1], (unsigned int*)&i[2], (unsigned int*)&i[3]); // Treat at unsigned (%X is unsigned)
+            else
+                r = sscanf(p, "%02X%02X%02X", (unsigned int*)&i[0], (unsigned int*)&i[1], (unsigned int*)&i[2]);
+            IM_UNUSED(r); // Fixes C6031: Return value ignored: 'sscanf'.
+        }
+        if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
+            OpenPopupOnItemClick("context", ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight);
+    }
+
+    ImGuiWindow* picker_active_window = NULL;
+    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview))
+    {
+        const float button_offset_x = ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) || (style.ColorButtonPosition == ImGuiDir_Left)) ? 0.0f : w_inputs + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
+        window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(pos.x + button_offset_x, pos.y);
+
+        const ImVec4 col_v4(col[0], col[1], col[2], alpha ? col[3] : 1.0f);
+        if (ColorButton("##ColorButton", col_v4, flags))
+        {
+            if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker))
+            {
+                // Store current color and open a picker
+                g.ColorPickerRef = col_v4;
+                OpenPopup("picker");
+                SetNextWindowPos(g.LastItemData.Rect.GetBL() + ImVec2(0.0f, style.ItemSpacing.y));
+            }
+        }
+        if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
+            OpenPopupOnItemClick("context", ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight);
+
+        if (BeginPopup("picker"))
+        {
+            picker_active_window = g.CurrentWindow;
+            if (label != label_display_end)
+            {
+                TextEx(label, label_display_end);
+                Spacing();
+            }
+            ImGuiColorEditFlags picker_flags_to_forward = ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar;
+            ImGuiColorEditFlags picker_flags = (flags_untouched & picker_flags_to_forward) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf;
+            SetNextItemWidth(square_sz * 12.0f); // Use 256 + bar sizes?
+            value_changed |= ColorPicker4("##picker", col, picker_flags, &g.ColorPickerRef.x);
+            EndPopup();
+        }
+    }
+
+    if (label != label_display_end && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel))
+    {
+        SameLine(0.0f, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+        TextEx(label, label_display_end);
+    }
+
+    // Convert back
+    if (value_changed && picker_active_window == NULL)
+    {
+        if (!value_changed_as_float)
+            for (int n = 0; n < 4; n++)
+                f[n] = i[n] / 255.0f;
+        if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV) && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB))
+        {
+            g.ColorEditLastHue = f[0];
+            g.ColorEditLastSat = f[1];
+            ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(f[0], f[1], f[2], f[0], f[1], f[2]);
+            g.ColorEditLastColor = ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(ImVec4(f[0], f[1], f[2], 0));
+        }
+        if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB) && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV))
+            ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(f[0], f[1], f[2], f[0], f[1], f[2]);
+
+        col[0] = f[0];
+        col[1] = f[1];
+        col[2] = f[2];
+        if (alpha)
+            col[3] = f[3];
+    }
+
+    PopID();
+    EndGroup();
+
+    // Drag and Drop Target
+    // NB: The flag test is merely an optional micro-optimization, BeginDragDropTarget() does the same test.
+    if ((g.LastItemData.StatusFlags & ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredRect) && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop) && BeginDragDropTarget())
+    {
+        bool accepted_drag_drop = false;
+        if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = AcceptDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F))
+        {
+            memcpy((float*)col, payload->Data, sizeof(float) * 3); // Preserve alpha if any //-V512
+            value_changed = accepted_drag_drop = true;
+        }
+        if (const ImGuiPayload* payload = AcceptDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F))
+        {
+            memcpy((float*)col, payload->Data, sizeof(float) * components);
+            value_changed = accepted_drag_drop = true;
+        }
+
+        // Drag-drop payloads are always RGB
+        if (accepted_drag_drop && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV))
+            ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(col[0], col[1], col[2], col[0], col[1], col[2]);
+        EndDragDropTarget();
+    }
+
+    // When picker is being actively used, use its active id so IsItemActive() will function on ColorEdit4().
+    if (picker_active_window && g.ActiveId != 0 && g.ActiveIdWindow == picker_active_window)
+        g.LastItemData.ID = g.ActiveId;
+
+    if (value_changed)
+        MarkItemEdited(g.LastItemData.ID);
+
+    return value_changed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::ColorPicker3(const char* label, float col[3], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
+{
+    float col4[4] = { col[0], col[1], col[2], 1.0f };
+    if (!ColorPicker4(label, col4, flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha))
+        return false;
+    col[0] = col4[0]; col[1] = col4[1]; col[2] = col4[2];
+    return true;
+}
+
+// Helper for ColorPicker4()
+static void RenderArrowsForVerticalBar(ImDrawList* draw_list, ImVec2 pos, ImVec2 half_sz, float bar_w, float alpha)
+{
+    ImU32 alpha8 = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(alpha);
+    ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x + 1,         pos.y), ImVec2(half_sz.x + 2, half_sz.y + 1), ImGuiDir_Right, IM_COL32(0,0,0,alpha8));
+    ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + half_sz.x,             pos.y), half_sz,                              ImGuiDir_Right, IM_COL32(255,255,255,alpha8));
+    ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + bar_w - half_sz.x - 1, pos.y), ImVec2(half_sz.x + 2, half_sz.y + 1), ImGuiDir_Left,  IM_COL32(0,0,0,alpha8));
+    ImGui::RenderArrowPointingAt(draw_list, ImVec2(pos.x + bar_w - half_sz.x,     pos.y), half_sz,                              ImGuiDir_Left,  IM_COL32(255,255,255,alpha8));
+}
+
+// Note: ColorPicker4() only accesses 3 floats if ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha flag is set.
+// (In C++ the 'float col[4]' notation for a function argument is equivalent to 'float* col', we only specify a size to facilitate understanding of the code.)
+// FIXME: we adjust the big color square height based on item width, which may cause a flickering feedback loop (if automatic height makes a vertical scrollbar appears, affecting automatic width..)
+// FIXME: this is trying to be aware of style.Alpha but not fully correct. Also, the color wheel will have overlapping glitches with (style.Alpha < 1.0)
+bool ImGui::ColorPicker4(const char* label, float col[4], ImGuiColorEditFlags flags, const float* ref_col)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    ImDrawList* draw_list = window->DrawList;
+    ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+    ImGuiIO& io = g.IO;
+
+    const float width = CalcItemWidth();
+    g.NextItemData.ClearFlags();
+
+    PushID(label);
+    BeginGroup();
+
+    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview))
+        flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview;
+
+    // Context menu: display and store options.
+    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
+        ColorPickerOptionsPopup(col, flags);
+
+    // Read stored options
+    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_))
+        flags |= ((g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_) ? g.ColorEditOptions : ImGuiColorEditFlags_DefaultOptions_) & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_;
+    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_))
+        flags |= ((g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_) ? g.ColorEditOptions : ImGuiColorEditFlags_DefaultOptions_) & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_;
+    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_)); // Check that only 1 is selected
+    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_));  // Check that only 1 is selected
+    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
+        flags |= (g.ColorEditOptions & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar);
+
+    // Setup
+    int components = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 3 : 4;
+    bool alpha_bar = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar) && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha);
+    ImVec2 picker_pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+    float square_sz = GetFrameHeight();
+    float bars_width = square_sz; // Arbitrary smallish width of Hue/Alpha picking bars
+    float sv_picker_size = ImMax(bars_width * 1, width - (alpha_bar ? 2 : 1) * (bars_width + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x)); // Saturation/Value picking box
+    float bar0_pos_x = picker_pos.x + sv_picker_size + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
+    float bar1_pos_x = bar0_pos_x + bars_width + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
+    float bars_triangles_half_sz = IM_FLOOR(bars_width * 0.20f);
+
+    float backup_initial_col[4];
+    memcpy(backup_initial_col, col, components * sizeof(float));
+
+    float wheel_thickness = sv_picker_size * 0.08f;
+    float wheel_r_outer = sv_picker_size * 0.50f;
+    float wheel_r_inner = wheel_r_outer - wheel_thickness;
+    ImVec2 wheel_center(picker_pos.x + (sv_picker_size + bars_width)*0.5f, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size * 0.5f);
+
+    // Note: the triangle is displayed rotated with triangle_pa pointing to Hue, but most coordinates stays unrotated for logic.
+    float triangle_r = wheel_r_inner - (int)(sv_picker_size * 0.027f);
+    ImVec2 triangle_pa = ImVec2(triangle_r, 0.0f); // Hue point.
+    ImVec2 triangle_pb = ImVec2(triangle_r * -0.5f, triangle_r * -0.866025f); // Black point.
+    ImVec2 triangle_pc = ImVec2(triangle_r * -0.5f, triangle_r * +0.866025f); // White point.
+
+    float H = col[0], S = col[1], V = col[2];
+    float R = col[0], G = col[1], B = col[2];
+    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB)
+    {
+        // Hue is lost when converting from greyscale rgb (saturation=0). Restore it.
+        ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(R, G, B, H, S, V);
+        ColorEditRestoreHS(col, &H, &S, &V);
+    }
+    else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV)
+    {
+        ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, S, V, R, G, B);
+    }
+
+    bool value_changed = false, value_changed_h = false, value_changed_sv = false;
+
+    PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav, true);
+    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel)
+    {
+        // Hue wheel + SV triangle logic
+        InvisibleButton("hsv", ImVec2(sv_picker_size + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + bars_width, sv_picker_size));
+        if (IsItemActive())
+        {
+            ImVec2 initial_off = g.IO.MouseClickedPos[0] - wheel_center;
+            ImVec2 current_off = g.IO.MousePos - wheel_center;
+            float initial_dist2 = ImLengthSqr(initial_off);
+            if (initial_dist2 >= (wheel_r_inner - 1) * (wheel_r_inner - 1) && initial_dist2 <= (wheel_r_outer + 1) * (wheel_r_outer + 1))
+            {
+                // Interactive with Hue wheel
+                H = ImAtan2(current_off.y, current_off.x) / IM_PI * 0.5f;
+                if (H < 0.0f)
+                    H += 1.0f;
+                value_changed = value_changed_h = true;
+            }
+            float cos_hue_angle = ImCos(-H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
+            float sin_hue_angle = ImSin(-H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
+            if (ImTriangleContainsPoint(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, ImRotate(initial_off, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle)))
+            {
+                // Interacting with SV triangle
+                ImVec2 current_off_unrotated = ImRotate(current_off, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
+                if (!ImTriangleContainsPoint(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, current_off_unrotated))
+                    current_off_unrotated = ImTriangleClosestPoint(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, current_off_unrotated);
+                float uu, vv, ww;
+                ImTriangleBarycentricCoords(triangle_pa, triangle_pb, triangle_pc, current_off_unrotated, uu, vv, ww);
+                V = ImClamp(1.0f - vv, 0.0001f, 1.0f);
+                S = ImClamp(uu / V, 0.0001f, 1.0f);
+                value_changed = value_changed_sv = true;
+            }
+        }
+        if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
+            OpenPopupOnItemClick("context", ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight);
+    }
+    else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar)
+    {
+        // SV rectangle logic
+        InvisibleButton("sv", ImVec2(sv_picker_size, sv_picker_size));
+        if (IsItemActive())
+        {
+            S = ImSaturate((io.MousePos.x - picker_pos.x) / (sv_picker_size - 1));
+            V = 1.0f - ImSaturate((io.MousePos.y - picker_pos.y) / (sv_picker_size - 1));
+
+            // Greatly reduces hue jitter and reset to 0 when hue == 255 and color is rapidly modified using SV square.
+            if (g.ColorEditLastColor == ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(ImVec4(col[0], col[1], col[2], 0)))
+                H = g.ColorEditLastHue;
+            value_changed = value_changed_sv = true;
+        }
+        if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions))
+            OpenPopupOnItemClick("context", ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight);
+
+        // Hue bar logic
+        SetCursorScreenPos(ImVec2(bar0_pos_x, picker_pos.y));
+        InvisibleButton("hue", ImVec2(bars_width, sv_picker_size));
+        if (IsItemActive())
+        {
+            H = ImSaturate((io.MousePos.y - picker_pos.y) / (sv_picker_size - 1));
+            value_changed = value_changed_h = true;
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Alpha bar logic
+    if (alpha_bar)
+    {
+        SetCursorScreenPos(ImVec2(bar1_pos_x, picker_pos.y));
+        InvisibleButton("alpha", ImVec2(bars_width, sv_picker_size));
+        if (IsItemActive())
+        {
+            col[3] = 1.0f - ImSaturate((io.MousePos.y - picker_pos.y) / (sv_picker_size - 1));
+            value_changed = true;
+        }
+    }
+    PopItemFlag(); // ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav
+
+    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview))
+    {
+        SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+        BeginGroup();
+    }
+
+    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel))
+    {
+        const char* label_display_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
+        if (label != label_display_end)
+        {
+            if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview))
+                SameLine(0, style.ItemInnerSpacing.x);
+            TextEx(label, label_display_end);
+        }
+    }
+
+    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview))
+    {
+        PushItemFlag(ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus, true);
+        ImVec4 col_v4(col[0], col[1], col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : col[3]);
+        if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel))
+            Text("Current");
+
+        ImGuiColorEditFlags sub_flags_to_forward = ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip;
+        ColorButton("##current", col_v4, (flags & sub_flags_to_forward), ImVec2(square_sz * 3, square_sz * 2));
+        if (ref_col != NULL)
+        {
+            Text("Original");
+            ImVec4 ref_col_v4(ref_col[0], ref_col[1], ref_col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : ref_col[3]);
+            if (ColorButton("##original", ref_col_v4, (flags & sub_flags_to_forward), ImVec2(square_sz * 3, square_sz * 2)))
+            {
+                memcpy(col, ref_col, components * sizeof(float));
+                value_changed = true;
+            }
+        }
+        PopItemFlag();
+        EndGroup();
+    }
+
+    // Convert back color to RGB
+    if (value_changed_h || value_changed_sv)
+    {
+        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB)
+        {
+            ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, S, V, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
+            g.ColorEditLastHue = H;
+            g.ColorEditLastSat = S;
+            g.ColorEditLastColor = ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(ImVec4(col[0], col[1], col[2], 0));
+        }
+        else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV)
+        {
+            col[0] = H;
+            col[1] = S;
+            col[2] = V;
+        }
+    }
+
+    // R,G,B and H,S,V slider color editor
+    bool value_changed_fix_hue_wrap = false;
+    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs) == 0)
+    {
+        PushItemWidth((alpha_bar ? bar1_pos_x : bar0_pos_x) + bars_width - picker_pos.x);
+        ImGuiColorEditFlags sub_flags_to_forward = ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_HDR | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf;
+        ImGuiColorEditFlags sub_flags = (flags & sub_flags_to_forward) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoPicker;
+        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB || (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_) == 0)
+            if (ColorEdit4("##rgb", col, sub_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB))
+            {
+                // FIXME: Hackily differentiating using the DragInt (ActiveId != 0 && !ActiveIdAllowOverlap) vs. using the InputText or DropTarget.
+                // For the later we don't want to run the hue-wrap canceling code. If you are well versed in HSV picker please provide your input! (See #2050)
+                value_changed_fix_hue_wrap = (g.ActiveId != 0 && !g.ActiveIdAllowOverlap);
+                value_changed = true;
+            }
+        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV || (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_) == 0)
+            value_changed |= ColorEdit4("##hsv", col, sub_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV);
+        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex || (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_) == 0)
+            value_changed |= ColorEdit4("##hex", col, sub_flags | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex);
+        PopItemWidth();
+    }
+
+    // Try to cancel hue wrap (after ColorEdit4 call), if any
+    if (value_changed_fix_hue_wrap && (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB))
+    {
+        float new_H, new_S, new_V;
+        ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(col[0], col[1], col[2], new_H, new_S, new_V);
+        if (new_H <= 0 && H > 0)
+        {
+            if (new_V <= 0 && V != new_V)
+                ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, S, new_V <= 0 ? V * 0.5f : new_V, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
+            else if (new_S <= 0)
+                ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, new_S <= 0 ? S * 0.5f : new_S, new_V, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
+        }
+    }
+
+    if (value_changed)
+    {
+        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB)
+        {
+            R = col[0];
+            G = col[1];
+            B = col[2];
+            ColorConvertRGBtoHSV(R, G, B, H, S, V);
+            ColorEditRestoreHS(col, &H, &S, &V);   // Fix local Hue as display below will use it immediately.
+        }
+        else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV)
+        {
+            H = col[0];
+            S = col[1];
+            V = col[2];
+            ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, S, V, R, G, B);
+        }
+    }
+
+    const int style_alpha8 = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(style.Alpha);
+    const ImU32 col_black = IM_COL32(0,0,0,style_alpha8);
+    const ImU32 col_white = IM_COL32(255,255,255,style_alpha8);
+    const ImU32 col_midgrey = IM_COL32(128,128,128,style_alpha8);
+    const ImU32 col_hues[6 + 1] = { IM_COL32(255,0,0,style_alpha8), IM_COL32(255,255,0,style_alpha8), IM_COL32(0,255,0,style_alpha8), IM_COL32(0,255,255,style_alpha8), IM_COL32(0,0,255,style_alpha8), IM_COL32(255,0,255,style_alpha8), IM_COL32(255,0,0,style_alpha8) };
+
+    ImVec4 hue_color_f(1, 1, 1, style.Alpha); ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(H, 1, 1, hue_color_f.x, hue_color_f.y, hue_color_f.z);
+    ImU32 hue_color32 = ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(hue_color_f);
+    ImU32 user_col32_striped_of_alpha = ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(ImVec4(R, G, B, style.Alpha)); // Important: this is still including the main rendering/style alpha!!
+
+    ImVec2 sv_cursor_pos;
+
+    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel)
+    {
+        // Render Hue Wheel
+        const float aeps = 0.5f / wheel_r_outer; // Half a pixel arc length in radians (2pi cancels out).
+        const int segment_per_arc = ImMax(4, (int)wheel_r_outer / 12);
+        for (int n = 0; n < 6; n++)
+        {
+            const float a0 = (n)     /6.0f * 2.0f * IM_PI - aeps;
+            const float a1 = (n+1.0f)/6.0f * 2.0f * IM_PI + aeps;
+            const int vert_start_idx = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size;
+            draw_list->PathArcTo(wheel_center, (wheel_r_inner + wheel_r_outer)*0.5f, a0, a1, segment_per_arc);
+            draw_list->PathStroke(col_white, 0, wheel_thickness);
+            const int vert_end_idx = draw_list->VtxBuffer.Size;
+
+            // Paint colors over existing vertices
+            ImVec2 gradient_p0(wheel_center.x + ImCos(a0) * wheel_r_inner, wheel_center.y + ImSin(a0) * wheel_r_inner);
+            ImVec2 gradient_p1(wheel_center.x + ImCos(a1) * wheel_r_inner, wheel_center.y + ImSin(a1) * wheel_r_inner);
+            ShadeVertsLinearColorGradientKeepAlpha(draw_list, vert_start_idx, vert_end_idx, gradient_p0, gradient_p1, col_hues[n], col_hues[n + 1]);
+        }
+
+        // Render Cursor + preview on Hue Wheel
+        float cos_hue_angle = ImCos(H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
+        float sin_hue_angle = ImSin(H * 2.0f * IM_PI);
+        ImVec2 hue_cursor_pos(wheel_center.x + cos_hue_angle * (wheel_r_inner + wheel_r_outer) * 0.5f, wheel_center.y + sin_hue_angle * (wheel_r_inner + wheel_r_outer) * 0.5f);
+        float hue_cursor_rad = value_changed_h ? wheel_thickness * 0.65f : wheel_thickness * 0.55f;
+        int hue_cursor_segments = ImClamp((int)(hue_cursor_rad / 1.4f), 9, 32);
+        draw_list->AddCircleFilled(hue_cursor_pos, hue_cursor_rad, hue_color32, hue_cursor_segments);
+        draw_list->AddCircle(hue_cursor_pos, hue_cursor_rad + 1, col_midgrey, hue_cursor_segments);
+        draw_list->AddCircle(hue_cursor_pos, hue_cursor_rad, col_white, hue_cursor_segments);
+
+        // Render SV triangle (rotated according to hue)
+        ImVec2 tra = wheel_center + ImRotate(triangle_pa, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
+        ImVec2 trb = wheel_center + ImRotate(triangle_pb, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
+        ImVec2 trc = wheel_center + ImRotate(triangle_pc, cos_hue_angle, sin_hue_angle);
+        ImVec2 uv_white = GetFontTexUvWhitePixel();
+        draw_list->PrimReserve(6, 6);
+        draw_list->PrimVtx(tra, uv_white, hue_color32);
+        draw_list->PrimVtx(trb, uv_white, hue_color32);
+        draw_list->PrimVtx(trc, uv_white, col_white);
+        draw_list->PrimVtx(tra, uv_white, 0);
+        draw_list->PrimVtx(trb, uv_white, col_black);
+        draw_list->PrimVtx(trc, uv_white, 0);
+        draw_list->AddTriangle(tra, trb, trc, col_midgrey, 1.5f);
+        sv_cursor_pos = ImLerp(ImLerp(trc, tra, ImSaturate(S)), trb, ImSaturate(1 - V));
+    }
+    else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar)
+    {
+        // Render SV Square
+        draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(picker_pos, picker_pos + ImVec2(sv_picker_size, sv_picker_size), col_white, hue_color32, hue_color32, col_white);
+        draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(picker_pos, picker_pos + ImVec2(sv_picker_size, sv_picker_size), 0, 0, col_black, col_black);
+        RenderFrameBorder(picker_pos, picker_pos + ImVec2(sv_picker_size, sv_picker_size), 0.0f);
+        sv_cursor_pos.x = ImClamp(IM_ROUND(picker_pos.x + ImSaturate(S)     * sv_picker_size), picker_pos.x + 2, picker_pos.x + sv_picker_size - 2); // Sneakily prevent the circle to stick out too much
+        sv_cursor_pos.y = ImClamp(IM_ROUND(picker_pos.y + ImSaturate(1 - V) * sv_picker_size), picker_pos.y + 2, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size - 2);
+
+        // Render Hue Bar
+        for (int i = 0; i < 6; ++i)
+            draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(ImVec2(bar0_pos_x, picker_pos.y + i * (sv_picker_size / 6)), ImVec2(bar0_pos_x + bars_width, picker_pos.y + (i + 1) * (sv_picker_size / 6)), col_hues[i], col_hues[i], col_hues[i + 1], col_hues[i + 1]);
+        float bar0_line_y = IM_ROUND(picker_pos.y + H * sv_picker_size);
+        RenderFrameBorder(ImVec2(bar0_pos_x, picker_pos.y), ImVec2(bar0_pos_x + bars_width, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size), 0.0f);
+        RenderArrowsForVerticalBar(draw_list, ImVec2(bar0_pos_x - 1, bar0_line_y), ImVec2(bars_triangles_half_sz + 1, bars_triangles_half_sz), bars_width + 2.0f, style.Alpha);
+    }
+
+    // Render cursor/preview circle (clamp S/V within 0..1 range because floating points colors may lead HSV values to be out of range)
+    float sv_cursor_rad = value_changed_sv ? 10.0f : 6.0f;
+    draw_list->AddCircleFilled(sv_cursor_pos, sv_cursor_rad, user_col32_striped_of_alpha, 12);
+    draw_list->AddCircle(sv_cursor_pos, sv_cursor_rad + 1, col_midgrey, 12);
+    draw_list->AddCircle(sv_cursor_pos, sv_cursor_rad, col_white, 12);
+
+    // Render alpha bar
+    if (alpha_bar)
+    {
+        float alpha = ImSaturate(col[3]);
+        ImRect bar1_bb(bar1_pos_x, picker_pos.y, bar1_pos_x + bars_width, picker_pos.y + sv_picker_size);
+        RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(draw_list, bar1_bb.Min, bar1_bb.Max, 0, bar1_bb.GetWidth() / 2.0f, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
+        draw_list->AddRectFilledMultiColor(bar1_bb.Min, bar1_bb.Max, user_col32_striped_of_alpha, user_col32_striped_of_alpha, user_col32_striped_of_alpha & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK, user_col32_striped_of_alpha & ~IM_COL32_A_MASK);
+        float bar1_line_y = IM_ROUND(picker_pos.y + (1.0f - alpha) * sv_picker_size);
+        RenderFrameBorder(bar1_bb.Min, bar1_bb.Max, 0.0f);
+        RenderArrowsForVerticalBar(draw_list, ImVec2(bar1_pos_x - 1, bar1_line_y), ImVec2(bars_triangles_half_sz + 1, bars_triangles_half_sz), bars_width + 2.0f, style.Alpha);
+    }
+
+    EndGroup();
+
+    if (value_changed && memcmp(backup_initial_col, col, components * sizeof(float)) == 0)
+        value_changed = false;
+    if (value_changed)
+        MarkItemEdited(g.LastItemData.ID);
+
+    PopID();
+
+    return value_changed;
+}
+
+// A little color square. Return true when clicked.
+// FIXME: May want to display/ignore the alpha component in the color display? Yet show it in the tooltip.
+// 'desc_id' is not called 'label' because we don't display it next to the button, but only in the tooltip.
+// Note that 'col' may be encoded in HSV if ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV is set.
+bool ImGui::ColorButton(const char* desc_id, const ImVec4& col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags, const ImVec2& size_arg)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(desc_id);
+    const float default_size = GetFrameHeight();
+    const ImVec2 size(size_arg.x == 0.0f ? default_size : size_arg.x, size_arg.y == 0.0f ? default_size : size_arg.y);
+    const ImRect bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + size);
+    ItemSize(bb, (size.y >= default_size) ? g.Style.FramePadding.y : 0.0f);
+    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
+        return false;
+
+    bool hovered, held;
+    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held);
+
+    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
+        flags &= ~(ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf);
+
+    ImVec4 col_rgb = col;
+    if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV)
+        ColorConvertHSVtoRGB(col_rgb.x, col_rgb.y, col_rgb.z, col_rgb.x, col_rgb.y, col_rgb.z);
+
+    ImVec4 col_rgb_without_alpha(col_rgb.x, col_rgb.y, col_rgb.z, 1.0f);
+    float grid_step = ImMin(size.x, size.y) / 2.99f;
+    float rounding = ImMin(g.Style.FrameRounding, grid_step * 0.5f);
+    ImRect bb_inner = bb;
+    float off = 0.0f;
+    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoBorder) == 0)
+    {
+        off = -0.75f; // The border (using Col_FrameBg) tends to look off when color is near-opaque and rounding is enabled. This offset seemed like a good middle ground to reduce those artifacts.
+        bb_inner.Expand(off);
+    }
+    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf) && col_rgb.w < 1.0f)
+    {
+        float mid_x = IM_ROUND((bb_inner.Min.x + bb_inner.Max.x) * 0.5f);
+        RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(window->DrawList, ImVec2(bb_inner.Min.x + grid_step, bb_inner.Min.y), bb_inner.Max, GetColorU32(col_rgb), grid_step, ImVec2(-grid_step + off, off), rounding, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersRight);
+        window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_inner.Min, ImVec2(mid_x, bb_inner.Max.y), GetColorU32(col_rgb_without_alpha), rounding, ImDrawFlags_RoundCornersLeft);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Because GetColorU32() multiplies by the global style Alpha and we don't want to display a checkerboard if the source code had no alpha
+        ImVec4 col_source = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview) ? col_rgb : col_rgb_without_alpha;
+        if (col_source.w < 1.0f)
+            RenderColorRectWithAlphaCheckerboard(window->DrawList, bb_inner.Min, bb_inner.Max, GetColorU32(col_source), grid_step, ImVec2(off, off), rounding);
+        else
+            window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(bb_inner.Min, bb_inner.Max, GetColorU32(col_source), rounding);
+    }
+    RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
+    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoBorder) == 0)
+    {
+        if (g.Style.FrameBorderSize > 0.0f)
+            RenderFrameBorder(bb.Min, bb.Max, rounding);
+        else
+            window->DrawList->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), rounding); // Color button are often in need of some sort of border
+    }
+
+    // Drag and Drop Source
+    // NB: The ActiveId test is merely an optional micro-optimization, BeginDragDropSource() does the same test.
+    if (g.ActiveId == id && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoDragDrop) && BeginDragDropSource())
+    {
+        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
+            SetDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_3F, &col_rgb, sizeof(float) * 3, ImGuiCond_Once);
+        else
+            SetDragDropPayload(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_COLOR_4F, &col_rgb, sizeof(float) * 4, ImGuiCond_Once);
+        ColorButton(desc_id, col, flags);
+        SameLine();
+        TextEx("Color");
+        EndDragDropSource();
+    }
+
+    // Tooltip
+    if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip) && hovered)
+        ColorTooltip(desc_id, &col.x, flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf));
+
+    return pressed;
+}
+
+// Initialize/override default color options
+void ImGui::SetColorEditOptions(ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_) == 0)
+        flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_DefaultOptions_ & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_;
+    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_) == 0)
+        flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_DefaultOptions_ & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_;
+    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_) == 0)
+        flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_DefaultOptions_ & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_;
+    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_) == 0)
+        flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_DefaultOptions_ & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_;
+    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_));    // Check only 1 option is selected
+    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_));   // Check only 1 option is selected
+    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_));     // Check only 1 option is selected
+    IM_ASSERT(ImIsPowerOfTwo(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_));      // Check only 1 option is selected
+    g.ColorEditOptions = flags;
+}
+
+// Note: only access 3 floats if ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha flag is set.
+void ImGui::ColorTooltip(const char* text, const float* col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    BeginTooltipEx(ImGuiTooltipFlags_OverridePreviousTooltip, ImGuiWindowFlags_None);
+    const char* text_end = text ? FindRenderedTextEnd(text, NULL) : text;
+    if (text_end > text)
+    {
+        TextEx(text, text_end);
+        Separator();
+    }
+
+    ImVec2 sz(g.FontSize * 3 + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2, g.FontSize * 3 + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2);
+    ImVec4 cf(col[0], col[1], col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : col[3]);
+    int cr = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[0]), cg = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[1]), cb = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[2]), ca = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 255 : IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[3]);
+    ColorButton("##preview", cf, (flags & (ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_ | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview | ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreviewHalf)) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoTooltip, sz);
+    SameLine();
+    if ((flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputRGB) || !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputMask_))
+    {
+        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
+            Text("#%02X%02X%02X\nR: %d, G: %d, B: %d\n(%.3f, %.3f, %.3f)", cr, cg, cb, cr, cg, cb, col[0], col[1], col[2]);
+        else
+            Text("#%02X%02X%02X%02X\nR:%d, G:%d, B:%d, A:%d\n(%.3f, %.3f, %.3f, %.3f)", cr, cg, cb, ca, cr, cg, cb, ca, col[0], col[1], col[2], col[3]);
+    }
+    else if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_InputHSV)
+    {
+        if (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha)
+            Text("H: %.3f, S: %.3f, V: %.3f", col[0], col[1], col[2]);
+        else
+            Text("H: %.3f, S: %.3f, V: %.3f, A: %.3f", col[0], col[1], col[2], col[3]);
+    }
+    EndTooltip();
+}
+
+void ImGui::ColorEditOptionsPopup(const float* col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
+{
+    bool allow_opt_inputs = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_);
+    bool allow_opt_datatype = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_);
+    if ((!allow_opt_inputs && !allow_opt_datatype) || !BeginPopup("context"))
+        return;
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags opts = g.ColorEditOptions;
+    if (allow_opt_inputs)
+    {
+        if (RadioButton("RGB", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB;
+        if (RadioButton("HSV", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV;
+        if (RadioButton("Hex", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayMask_) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex;
+    }
+    if (allow_opt_datatype)
+    {
+        if (allow_opt_inputs) Separator();
+        if (RadioButton("0..255",     (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_Uint8;
+        if (RadioButton("0.00..1.00", (opts & ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float) != 0)) opts = (opts & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags_DataTypeMask_) | ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float;
+    }
+
+    if (allow_opt_inputs || allow_opt_datatype)
+        Separator();
+    if (Button("Copy as..", ImVec2(-1, 0)))
+        OpenPopup("Copy");
+    if (BeginPopup("Copy"))
+    {
+        int cr = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[0]), cg = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[1]), cb = IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[2]), ca = (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 255 : IM_F32_TO_INT8_SAT(col[3]);
+        char buf[64];
+        ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "(%.3ff, %.3ff, %.3ff, %.3ff)", col[0], col[1], col[2], (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 1.0f : col[3]);
+        if (Selectable(buf))
+            SetClipboardText(buf);
+        ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "(%d,%d,%d,%d)", cr, cg, cb, ca);
+        if (Selectable(buf))
+            SetClipboardText(buf);
+        ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "#%02X%02X%02X", cr, cg, cb);
+        if (Selectable(buf))
+            SetClipboardText(buf);
+        if (!(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha))
+        {
+            ImFormatString(buf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(buf), "#%02X%02X%02X%02X", cr, cg, cb, ca);
+            if (Selectable(buf))
+                SetClipboardText(buf);
+        }
+        EndPopup();
+    }
+
+    g.ColorEditOptions = opts;
+    EndPopup();
+}
+
+void ImGui::ColorPickerOptionsPopup(const float* ref_col, ImGuiColorEditFlags flags)
+{
+    bool allow_opt_picker = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_);
+    bool allow_opt_alpha_bar = !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) && !(flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar);
+    if ((!allow_opt_picker && !allow_opt_alpha_bar) || !BeginPopup("context"))
+        return;
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (allow_opt_picker)
+    {
+        ImVec2 picker_size(g.FontSize * 8, ImMax(g.FontSize * 8 - (GetFrameHeight() + g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x), 1.0f)); // FIXME: Picker size copied from main picker function
+        PushItemWidth(picker_size.x);
+        for (int picker_type = 0; picker_type < 2; picker_type++)
+        {
+            // Draw small/thumbnail version of each picker type (over an invisible button for selection)
+            if (picker_type > 0) Separator();
+            PushID(picker_type);
+            ImGuiColorEditFlags picker_flags = ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoOptions | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoLabel | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview | (flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha);
+            if (picker_type == 0) picker_flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar;
+            if (picker_type == 1) picker_flags |= ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueWheel;
+            ImVec2 backup_pos = GetCursorScreenPos();
+            if (Selectable("##selectable", false, 0, picker_size)) // By default, Selectable() is closing popup
+                g.ColorEditOptions = (g.ColorEditOptions & ~ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_) | (picker_flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerMask_);
+            SetCursorScreenPos(backup_pos);
+            ImVec4 previewing_ref_col;
+            memcpy(&previewing_ref_col, ref_col, sizeof(float) * ((picker_flags & ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoAlpha) ? 3 : 4));
+            ColorPicker4("##previewing_picker", &previewing_ref_col.x, picker_flags);
+            PopID();
+        }
+        PopItemWidth();
+    }
+    if (allow_opt_alpha_bar)
+    {
+        if (allow_opt_picker) Separator();
+        CheckboxFlags("Alpha Bar", &g.ColorEditOptions, ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar);
+    }
+    EndPopup();
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: TreeNode, CollapsingHeader, etc.
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - TreeNode()
+// - TreeNodeV()
+// - TreeNodeEx()
+// - TreeNodeExV()
+// - TreeNodeBehavior() [Internal]
+// - TreePush()
+// - TreePop()
+// - GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing()
+// - SetNextItemOpen()
+// - CollapsingHeader()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+bool ImGui::TreeNode(const char* str_id, const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+    va_list args;
+    va_start(args, fmt);
+    bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(str_id, 0, fmt, args);
+    va_end(args);
+    return is_open;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::TreeNode(const void* ptr_id, const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+    va_list args;
+    va_start(args, fmt);
+    bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(ptr_id, 0, fmt, args);
+    va_end(args);
+    return is_open;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::TreeNode(const char* label)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+    return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(label), 0, label, NULL);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::TreeNodeV(const char* str_id, const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+    return TreeNodeExV(str_id, 0, fmt, args);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::TreeNodeV(const void* ptr_id, const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+    return TreeNodeExV(ptr_id, 0, fmt, args);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::TreeNodeEx(const char* label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(label), flags, label, NULL);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::TreeNodeEx(const char* str_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+    va_list args;
+    va_start(args, fmt);
+    bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(str_id, flags, fmt, args);
+    va_end(args);
+    return is_open;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::TreeNodeEx(const void* ptr_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, ...)
+{
+    va_list args;
+    va_start(args, fmt);
+    bool is_open = TreeNodeExV(ptr_id, flags, fmt, args);
+    va_end(args);
+    return is_open;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::TreeNodeExV(const char* str_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    const char* label, *label_end;
+    ImFormatStringToTempBufferV(&label, &label_end, fmt, args);
+    return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(str_id), flags, label, label_end);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::TreeNodeExV(const void* ptr_id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* fmt, va_list args)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    const char* label, *label_end;
+    ImFormatStringToTempBufferV(&label, &label_end, fmt, args);
+    return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(ptr_id), flags, label, label_end);
+}
+
+void ImGui::TreeNodeSetOpen(ImGuiID id, bool open)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiStorage* storage = g.CurrentWindow->DC.StateStorage;
+    storage->SetInt(id, open ? 1 : 0);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::TreeNodeUpdateNextOpen(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
+{
+    if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf)
+        return true;
+
+    // We only write to the tree storage if the user clicks (or explicitly use the SetNextItemOpen function)
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    ImGuiStorage* storage = window->DC.StateStorage;
+
+    bool is_open;
+    if (g.NextItemData.Flags & ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_HasOpen)
+    {
+        if (g.NextItemData.OpenCond & ImGuiCond_Always)
+        {
+            is_open = g.NextItemData.OpenVal;
+            TreeNodeSetOpen(id, is_open);
+        }
+        else
+        {
+            // We treat ImGuiCond_Once and ImGuiCond_FirstUseEver the same because tree node state are not saved persistently.
+            const int stored_value = storage->GetInt(id, -1);
+            if (stored_value == -1)
+            {
+                is_open = g.NextItemData.OpenVal;
+                TreeNodeSetOpen(id, is_open);
+            }
+            else
+            {
+                is_open = stored_value != 0;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        is_open = storage->GetInt(id, (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen) ? 1 : 0) != 0;
+    }
+
+    // When logging is enabled, we automatically expand tree nodes (but *NOT* collapsing headers.. seems like sensible behavior).
+    // NB- If we are above max depth we still allow manually opened nodes to be logged.
+    if (g.LogEnabled && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoAutoOpenOnLog) && (window->DC.TreeDepth - g.LogDepthRef) < g.LogDepthToExpand)
+        is_open = true;
+
+    return is_open;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::TreeNodeBehavior(ImGuiID id, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags, const char* label, const char* label_end)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+    const bool display_frame = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Framed) != 0;
+    const ImVec2 padding = (display_frame || (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_FramePadding)) ? style.FramePadding : ImVec2(style.FramePadding.x, ImMin(window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset, style.FramePadding.y));
+
+    if (!label_end)
+        label_end = FindRenderedTextEnd(label);
+    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, label_end, false);
+
+    // We vertically grow up to current line height up the typical widget height.
+    const float frame_height = ImMax(ImMin(window->DC.CurrLineSize.y, g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.y * 2), label_size.y + padding.y * 2);
+    ImRect frame_bb;
+    frame_bb.Min.x = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth) ? window->WorkRect.Min.x : window->DC.CursorPos.x;
+    frame_bb.Min.y = window->DC.CursorPos.y;
+    frame_bb.Max.x = window->WorkRect.Max.x;
+    frame_bb.Max.y = window->DC.CursorPos.y + frame_height;
+    if (display_frame)
+    {
+        // Framed header expand a little outside the default padding, to the edge of InnerClipRect
+        // (FIXME: May remove this at some point and make InnerClipRect align with WindowPadding.x instead of WindowPadding.x*0.5f)
+        frame_bb.Min.x -= IM_FLOOR(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f - 1.0f);
+        frame_bb.Max.x += IM_FLOOR(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f);
+    }
+
+    const float text_offset_x = g.FontSize + (display_frame ? padding.x * 3 : padding.x * 2);           // Collapser arrow width + Spacing
+    const float text_offset_y = ImMax(padding.y, window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset);                    // Latch before ItemSize changes it
+    const float text_width = g.FontSize + (label_size.x > 0.0f ? label_size.x + padding.x * 2 : 0.0f);  // Include collapser
+    ImVec2 text_pos(window->DC.CursorPos.x + text_offset_x, window->DC.CursorPos.y + text_offset_y);
+    ItemSize(ImVec2(text_width, frame_height), padding.y);
+
+    // For regular tree nodes, we arbitrary allow to click past 2 worth of ItemSpacing
+    ImRect interact_bb = frame_bb;
+    if (!display_frame && (flags & (ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanAvailWidth | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_SpanFullWidth)) == 0)
+        interact_bb.Max.x = frame_bb.Min.x + text_width + style.ItemSpacing.x * 2.0f;
+
+    // Store a flag for the current depth to tell if we will allow closing this node when navigating one of its child.
+    // For this purpose we essentially compare if g.NavIdIsAlive went from 0 to 1 between TreeNode() and TreePop().
+    // This is currently only support 32 level deep and we are fine with (1 << Depth) overflowing into a zero.
+    const bool is_leaf = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Leaf) != 0;
+    bool is_open = TreeNodeUpdateNextOpen(id, flags);
+    if (is_open && !g.NavIdIsAlive && (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NavLeftJumpsBackHere) && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen))
+        window->DC.TreeJumpToParentOnPopMask |= (1 << window->DC.TreeDepth);
+
+    bool item_add = ItemAdd(interact_bb, id);
+    g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HasDisplayRect;
+    g.LastItemData.DisplayRect = frame_bb;
+
+    if (!item_add)
+    {
+        if (is_open && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen))
+            TreePushOverrideID(id);
+        IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(g.LastItemData.ID, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | (is_leaf ? 0 : ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Openable) | (is_open ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Opened : 0));
+        return is_open;
+    }
+
+    ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_None;
+    if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap)
+        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap;
+    if (!is_leaf)
+        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold;
+
+    // We allow clicking on the arrow section with keyboard modifiers held, in order to easily
+    // allow browsing a tree while preserving selection with code implementing multi-selection patterns.
+    // When clicking on the rest of the tree node we always disallow keyboard modifiers.
+    const float arrow_hit_x1 = (text_pos.x - text_offset_x) - style.TouchExtraPadding.x;
+    const float arrow_hit_x2 = (text_pos.x - text_offset_x) + (g.FontSize + padding.x * 2.0f) + style.TouchExtraPadding.x;
+    const bool is_mouse_x_over_arrow = (g.IO.MousePos.x >= arrow_hit_x1 && g.IO.MousePos.x < arrow_hit_x2);
+    if (window != g.HoveredWindow || !is_mouse_x_over_arrow)
+        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_NoKeyModifiers;
+
+    // Open behaviors can be altered with the _OpenOnArrow and _OnOnDoubleClick flags.
+    // Some alteration have subtle effects (e.g. toggle on MouseUp vs MouseDown events) due to requirements for multi-selection and drag and drop support.
+    // - Single-click on label = Toggle on MouseUp (default, when _OpenOnArrow=0)
+    // - Single-click on arrow = Toggle on MouseDown (when _OpenOnArrow=0)
+    // - Single-click on arrow = Toggle on MouseDown (when _OpenOnArrow=1)
+    // - Double-click on label = Toggle on MouseDoubleClick (when _OpenOnDoubleClick=1)
+    // - Double-click on arrow = Toggle on MouseDoubleClick (when _OpenOnDoubleClick=1 and _OpenOnArrow=0)
+    // It is rather standard that arrow click react on Down rather than Up.
+    // We set ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease on OpenOnDoubleClick because we want the item to be active on the initial MouseDown in order for drag and drop to work.
+    if (is_mouse_x_over_arrow)
+        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick;
+    else if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick)
+        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick;
+    else
+        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease;
+
+    bool selected = (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Selected) != 0;
+    const bool was_selected = selected;
+
+    bool hovered, held;
+    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(interact_bb, id, &hovered, &held, button_flags);
+    bool toggled = false;
+    if (!is_leaf)
+    {
+        if (pressed && g.DragDropHoldJustPressedId != id)
+        {
+            if ((flags & (ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick)) == 0 || (g.NavActivateId == id))
+                toggled = true;
+            if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnArrow)
+                toggled |= is_mouse_x_over_arrow && !g.NavDisableMouseHover; // Lightweight equivalent of IsMouseHoveringRect() since ButtonBehavior() already did the job
+            if ((flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_OpenOnDoubleClick) && g.IO.MouseClickedCount[0] == 2)
+                toggled = true;
+        }
+        else if (pressed && g.DragDropHoldJustPressedId == id)
+        {
+            IM_ASSERT(button_flags & ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold);
+            if (!is_open) // When using Drag and Drop "hold to open" we keep the node highlighted after opening, but never close it again.
+                toggled = true;
+        }
+
+        if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && is_open)
+        {
+            toggled = true;
+            NavMoveRequestCancel();
+        }
+        if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right && !is_open) // If there's something upcoming on the line we may want to give it the priority?
+        {
+            toggled = true;
+            NavMoveRequestCancel();
+        }
+
+        if (toggled)
+        {
+            is_open = !is_open;
+            window->DC.StateStorage->SetInt(id, is_open);
+            g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_ToggledOpen;
+        }
+    }
+    if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap)
+        SetItemAllowOverlap();
+
+    // In this branch, TreeNodeBehavior() cannot toggle the selection so this will never trigger.
+    if (selected != was_selected) //-V547
+        g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_ToggledSelection;
+
+    // Render
+    const ImU32 text_col = GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
+    ImGuiNavHighlightFlags nav_highlight_flags = ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin;
+    if (display_frame)
+    {
+        // Framed type
+        const ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_HeaderActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered : ImGuiCol_Header);
+        RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, bg_col, true, style.FrameRounding);
+        RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id, nav_highlight_flags);
+        if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet)
+            RenderBullet(window->DrawList, ImVec2(text_pos.x - text_offset_x * 0.60f, text_pos.y + g.FontSize * 0.5f), text_col);
+        else if (!is_leaf)
+            RenderArrow(window->DrawList, ImVec2(text_pos.x - text_offset_x + padding.x, text_pos.y), text_col, is_open ? ImGuiDir_Down : ImGuiDir_Right, 1.0f);
+        else // Leaf without bullet, left-adjusted text
+            text_pos.x -= text_offset_x;
+        if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_ClipLabelForTrailingButton)
+            frame_bb.Max.x -= g.FontSize + style.FramePadding.x;
+
+        if (g.LogEnabled)
+            LogSetNextTextDecoration("###", "###");
+        RenderTextClipped(text_pos, frame_bb.Max, label, label_end, &label_size);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Unframed typed for tree nodes
+        if (hovered || selected)
+        {
+            const ImU32 bg_col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_HeaderActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered : ImGuiCol_Header);
+            RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, bg_col, false);
+        }
+        RenderNavHighlight(frame_bb, id, nav_highlight_flags);
+        if (flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_Bullet)
+            RenderBullet(window->DrawList, ImVec2(text_pos.x - text_offset_x * 0.5f, text_pos.y + g.FontSize * 0.5f), text_col);
+        else if (!is_leaf)
+            RenderArrow(window->DrawList, ImVec2(text_pos.x - text_offset_x + padding.x, text_pos.y + g.FontSize * 0.15f), text_col, is_open ? ImGuiDir_Down : ImGuiDir_Right, 0.70f);
+        if (g.LogEnabled)
+            LogSetNextTextDecoration(">", NULL);
+        RenderText(text_pos, label, label_end, false);
+    }
+
+    if (is_open && !(flags & ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen))
+        TreePushOverrideID(id);
+    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | (is_leaf ? 0 : ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Openable) | (is_open ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Opened : 0));
+    return is_open;
+}
+
+void ImGui::TreePush(const char* str_id)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    Indent();
+    window->DC.TreeDepth++;
+    PushID(str_id);
+}
+
+void ImGui::TreePush(const void* ptr_id)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    Indent();
+    window->DC.TreeDepth++;
+    PushID(ptr_id);
+}
+
+void ImGui::TreePushOverrideID(ImGuiID id)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    Indent();
+    window->DC.TreeDepth++;
+    PushOverrideID(id);
+}
+
+void ImGui::TreePop()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    Unindent();
+
+    window->DC.TreeDepth--;
+    ImU32 tree_depth_mask = (1 << window->DC.TreeDepth);
+
+    // Handle Left arrow to move to parent tree node (when ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NavLeftJumpsBackHere is enabled)
+    if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && g.NavWindow == window && NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet())
+        if (g.NavIdIsAlive && (window->DC.TreeJumpToParentOnPopMask & tree_depth_mask))
+        {
+            SetNavID(window->IDStack.back(), g.NavLayer, 0, ImRect());
+            NavMoveRequestCancel();
+        }
+    window->DC.TreeJumpToParentOnPopMask &= tree_depth_mask - 1;
+
+    IM_ASSERT(window->IDStack.Size > 1); // There should always be 1 element in the IDStack (pushed during window creation). If this triggers you called TreePop/PopID too much.
+    PopID();
+}
+
+// Horizontal distance preceding label when using TreeNode() or Bullet()
+float ImGui::GetTreeNodeToLabelSpacing()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.FontSize + (g.Style.FramePadding.x * 2.0f);
+}
+
+// Set next TreeNode/CollapsingHeader open state.
+void ImGui::SetNextItemOpen(bool is_open, ImGuiCond cond)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.CurrentWindow->SkipItems)
+        return;
+    g.NextItemData.Flags |= ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_HasOpen;
+    g.NextItemData.OpenVal = is_open;
+    g.NextItemData.OpenCond = cond ? cond : ImGuiCond_Always;
+}
+
+// CollapsingHeader returns true when opened but do not indent nor push into the ID stack (because of the ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_NoTreePushOnOpen flag).
+// This is basically the same as calling TreeNodeEx(label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader). You can remove the _NoTreePushOnOpen flag if you want behavior closer to normal TreeNode().
+bool ImGui::CollapsingHeader(const char* label, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    return TreeNodeBehavior(window->GetID(label), flags | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader, label);
+}
+
+// p_visible == NULL                        : regular collapsing header
+// p_visible != NULL && *p_visible == true  : show a small close button on the corner of the header, clicking the button will set *p_visible = false
+// p_visible != NULL && *p_visible == false : do not show the header at all
+// Do not mistake this with the Open state of the header itself, which you can adjust with SetNextItemOpen() or ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_DefaultOpen.
+bool ImGui::CollapsingHeader(const char* label, bool* p_visible, ImGuiTreeNodeFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    if (p_visible && !*p_visible)
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
+    flags |= ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_CollapsingHeader;
+    if (p_visible)
+        flags |= ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_AllowItemOverlap | ImGuiTreeNodeFlags_ClipLabelForTrailingButton;
+    bool is_open = TreeNodeBehavior(id, flags, label);
+    if (p_visible != NULL)
+    {
+        // Create a small overlapping close button
+        // FIXME: We can evolve this into user accessible helpers to add extra buttons on title bars, headers, etc.
+        // FIXME: CloseButton can overlap into text, need find a way to clip the text somehow.
+        ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+        ImGuiLastItemData last_item_backup = g.LastItemData;
+        float button_size = g.FontSize;
+        float button_x = ImMax(g.LastItemData.Rect.Min.x, g.LastItemData.Rect.Max.x - g.Style.FramePadding.x * 2.0f - button_size);
+        float button_y = g.LastItemData.Rect.Min.y;
+        ImGuiID close_button_id = GetIDWithSeed("#CLOSE", NULL, id);
+        if (CloseButton(close_button_id, ImVec2(button_x, button_y)))
+            *p_visible = false;
+        g.LastItemData = last_item_backup;
+    }
+
+    return is_open;
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: Selectable
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - Selectable()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Tip: pass a non-visible label (e.g. "##hello") then you can use the space to draw other text or image.
+// But you need to make sure the ID is unique, e.g. enclose calls in PushID/PopID or use ##unique_id.
+// With this scheme, ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns and ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowItemOverlap are also frequently used flags.
+// FIXME: Selectable() with (size.x == 0.0f) and (SelectableTextAlign.x > 0.0f) followed by SameLine() is currently not supported.
+bool ImGui::Selectable(const char* label, bool selected, ImGuiSelectableFlags flags, const ImVec2& size_arg)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+
+    // Submit label or explicit size to ItemSize(), whereas ItemAdd() will submit a larger/spanning rectangle.
+    ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
+    ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+    ImVec2 size(size_arg.x != 0.0f ? size_arg.x : label_size.x, size_arg.y != 0.0f ? size_arg.y : label_size.y);
+    ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+    pos.y += window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset;
+    ItemSize(size, 0.0f);
+
+    // Fill horizontal space
+    // We don't support (size < 0.0f) in Selectable() because the ItemSpacing extension would make explicitly right-aligned sizes not visibly match other widgets.
+    const bool span_all_columns = (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAllColumns) != 0;
+    const float min_x = span_all_columns ? window->ParentWorkRect.Min.x : pos.x;
+    const float max_x = span_all_columns ? window->ParentWorkRect.Max.x : window->WorkRect.Max.x;
+    if (size_arg.x == 0.0f || (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAvailWidth))
+        size.x = ImMax(label_size.x, max_x - min_x);
+
+    // Text stays at the submission position, but bounding box may be extended on both sides
+    const ImVec2 text_min = pos;
+    const ImVec2 text_max(min_x + size.x, pos.y + size.y);
+
+    // Selectables are meant to be tightly packed together with no click-gap, so we extend their box to cover spacing between selectable.
+    ImRect bb(min_x, pos.y, text_max.x, text_max.y);
+    if ((flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoPadWithHalfSpacing) == 0)
+    {
+        const float spacing_x = span_all_columns ? 0.0f : style.ItemSpacing.x;
+        const float spacing_y = style.ItemSpacing.y;
+        const float spacing_L = IM_FLOOR(spacing_x * 0.50f);
+        const float spacing_U = IM_FLOOR(spacing_y * 0.50f);
+        bb.Min.x -= spacing_L;
+        bb.Min.y -= spacing_U;
+        bb.Max.x += (spacing_x - spacing_L);
+        bb.Max.y += (spacing_y - spacing_U);
+    }
+    //if (g.IO.KeyCtrl) { GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(bb.Min, bb.Max, IM_COL32(0, 255, 0, 255)); }
+
+    // Modify ClipRect for the ItemAdd(), faster than doing a PushColumnsBackground/PushTableBackground for every Selectable..
+    const float backup_clip_rect_min_x = window->ClipRect.Min.x;
+    const float backup_clip_rect_max_x = window->ClipRect.Max.x;
+    if (span_all_columns)
+    {
+        window->ClipRect.Min.x = window->ParentWorkRect.Min.x;
+        window->ClipRect.Max.x = window->ParentWorkRect.Max.x;
+    }
+
+    const bool disabled_item = (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_Disabled) != 0;
+    const bool item_add = ItemAdd(bb, id, NULL, disabled_item ? ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled : ImGuiItemFlags_None);
+    if (span_all_columns)
+    {
+        window->ClipRect.Min.x = backup_clip_rect_min_x;
+        window->ClipRect.Max.x = backup_clip_rect_max_x;
+    }
+
+    if (!item_add)
+        return false;
+
+    const bool disabled_global = (g.CurrentItemFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_Disabled) != 0;
+    if (disabled_item && !disabled_global) // Only testing this as an optimization
+        BeginDisabled();
+
+    // FIXME: We can standardize the behavior of those two, we could also keep the fast path of override ClipRect + full push on render only,
+    // which would be advantageous since most selectable are not selected.
+    if (span_all_columns && window->DC.CurrentColumns)
+        PushColumnsBackground();
+    else if (span_all_columns && g.CurrentTable)
+        TablePushBackgroundChannel();
+
+    // We use NoHoldingActiveID on menus so user can click and _hold_ on a menu then drag to browse child entries
+    ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = 0;
+    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoHoldingActiveID) { button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_NoHoldingActiveId; }
+    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SelectOnClick)     { button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick; }
+    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SelectOnRelease)   { button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnRelease; }
+    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowDoubleClick)  { button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease | ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDoubleClick; }
+    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowItemOverlap)  { button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap; }
+
+    const bool was_selected = selected;
+    bool hovered, held;
+    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, button_flags);
+
+    // Auto-select when moved into
+    // - This will be more fully fleshed in the range-select branch
+    // - This is not exposed as it won't nicely work with some user side handling of shift/control
+    // - We cannot do 'if (g.NavJustMovedToId != id) { selected = false; pressed = was_selected; }' for two reasons
+    //   - (1) it would require focus scope to be set, need exposing PushFocusScope() or equivalent (e.g. BeginSelection() calling PushFocusScope())
+    //   - (2) usage will fail with clipped items
+    //   The multi-select API aim to fix those issues, e.g. may be replaced with a BeginSelection() API.
+    if ((flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SelectOnNav) && g.NavJustMovedToId != 0 && g.NavJustMovedToFocusScopeId == window->DC.NavFocusScopeIdCurrent)
+        if (g.NavJustMovedToId == id)
+            selected = pressed = true;
+
+    // Update NavId when clicking or when Hovering (this doesn't happen on most widgets), so navigation can be resumed with gamepad/keyboard
+    if (pressed || (hovered && (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_SetNavIdOnHover)))
+    {
+        if (!g.NavDisableMouseHover && g.NavWindow == window && g.NavLayer == window->DC.NavLayerCurrent)
+        {
+            SetNavID(id, window->DC.NavLayerCurrent, window->DC.NavFocusScopeIdCurrent, WindowRectAbsToRel(window, bb)); // (bb == NavRect)
+            g.NavDisableHighlight = true;
+        }
+    }
+    if (pressed)
+        MarkItemEdited(id);
+
+    if (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_AllowItemOverlap)
+        SetItemAllowOverlap();
+
+    // In this branch, Selectable() cannot toggle the selection so this will never trigger.
+    if (selected != was_selected) //-V547
+        g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_ToggledSelection;
+
+    // Render
+    if (held && (flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_DrawHoveredWhenHeld))
+        hovered = true;
+    if (hovered || selected)
+    {
+        const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((held && hovered) ? ImGuiCol_HeaderActive : hovered ? ImGuiCol_HeaderHovered : ImGuiCol_Header);
+        RenderFrame(bb.Min, bb.Max, col, false, 0.0f);
+    }
+    RenderNavHighlight(bb, id, ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_TypeThin | ImGuiNavHighlightFlags_NoRounding);
+
+    if (span_all_columns && window->DC.CurrentColumns)
+        PopColumnsBackground();
+    else if (span_all_columns && g.CurrentTable)
+        TablePopBackgroundChannel();
+
+    RenderTextClipped(text_min, text_max, label, NULL, &label_size, style.SelectableTextAlign, &bb);
+
+    // Automatically close popups
+    if (pressed && (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && !(flags & ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups) && !(g.LastItemData.InFlags & ImGuiItemFlags_SelectableDontClosePopup))
+        CloseCurrentPopup();
+
+    if (disabled_item && !disabled_global)
+        EndDisabled();
+
+    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags);
+    return pressed; //-V1020
+}
+
+bool ImGui::Selectable(const char* label, bool* p_selected, ImGuiSelectableFlags flags, const ImVec2& size_arg)
+{
+    if (Selectable(label, *p_selected, flags, size_arg))
+    {
+        *p_selected = !*p_selected;
+        return true;
+    }
+    return false;
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: ListBox
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - BeginListBox()
+// - EndListBox()
+// - ListBox()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Tip: To have a list filling the entire window width, use size.x = -FLT_MIN and pass an non-visible label e.g. "##empty"
+// Tip: If your vertical size is calculated from an item count (e.g. 10 * item_height) consider adding a fractional part to facilitate seeing scrolling boundaries (e.g. 10.25 * item_height).
+bool ImGui::BeginListBox(const char* label, const ImVec2& size_arg)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+    const ImGuiID id = GetID(label);
+    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+
+    // Size default to hold ~7.25 items.
+    // Fractional number of items helps seeing that we can scroll down/up without looking at scrollbar.
+    ImVec2 size = ImFloor(CalcItemSize(size_arg, CalcItemWidth(), GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * 7.25f + style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
+    ImVec2 frame_size = ImVec2(size.x, ImMax(size.y, label_size.y));
+    ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + frame_size);
+    ImRect bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0.0f));
+    g.NextItemData.ClearFlags();
+
+    if (!IsRectVisible(bb.Min, bb.Max))
+    {
+        ItemSize(bb.GetSize(), style.FramePadding.y);
+        ItemAdd(bb, 0, &frame_bb);
+        return false;
+    }
+
+    // FIXME-OPT: We could omit the BeginGroup() if label_size.x but would need to omit the EndGroup() as well.
+    BeginGroup();
+    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
+    {
+        ImVec2 label_pos = ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y);
+        RenderText(label_pos, label);
+        window->DC.CursorMaxPos = ImMax(window->DC.CursorMaxPos, label_pos + label_size);
+    }
+
+    BeginChildFrame(id, frame_bb.GetSize());
+    return true;
+}
+
+#ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE_OBSOLETE_FUNCTIONS
+// OBSOLETED in 1.81 (from February 2021)
+bool ImGui::ListBoxHeader(const char* label, int items_count, int height_in_items)
+{
+    // If height_in_items == -1, default height is maximum 7.
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    float height_in_items_f = (height_in_items < 0 ? ImMin(items_count, 7) : height_in_items) + 0.25f;
+    ImVec2 size;
+    size.x = 0.0f;
+    size.y = GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * height_in_items_f + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f;
+    return BeginListBox(label, size);
+}
+#endif
+
+void ImGui::EndListBox()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    IM_ASSERT((window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow) && "Mismatched BeginListBox/EndListBox calls. Did you test the return value of BeginListBox?");
+    IM_UNUSED(window);
+
+    EndChildFrame();
+    EndGroup(); // This is only required to be able to do IsItemXXX query on the whole ListBox including label
+}
+
+bool ImGui::ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, const char* const items[], int items_count, int height_items)
+{
+    const bool value_changed = ListBox(label, current_item, Items_ArrayGetter, (void*)items, items_count, height_items);
+    return value_changed;
+}
+
+// This is merely a helper around BeginListBox(), EndListBox().
+// Considering using those directly to submit custom data or store selection differently.
+bool ImGui::ListBox(const char* label, int* current_item, bool (*items_getter)(void*, int, const char**), void* data, int items_count, int height_in_items)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    // Calculate size from "height_in_items"
+    if (height_in_items < 0)
+        height_in_items = ImMin(items_count, 7);
+    float height_in_items_f = height_in_items + 0.25f;
+    ImVec2 size(0.0f, ImFloor(GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing() * height_in_items_f + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f));
+
+    if (!BeginListBox(label, size))
+        return false;
+
+    // Assume all items have even height (= 1 line of text). If you need items of different height,
+    // you can create a custom version of ListBox() in your code without using the clipper.
+    bool value_changed = false;
+    ImGuiListClipper clipper;
+    clipper.Begin(items_count, GetTextLineHeightWithSpacing()); // We know exactly our line height here so we pass it as a minor optimization, but generally you don't need to.
+    while (clipper.Step())
+        for (int i = clipper.DisplayStart; i < clipper.DisplayEnd; i++)
+        {
+            const char* item_text;
+            if (!items_getter(data, i, &item_text))
+                item_text = "*Unknown item*";
+
+            PushID(i);
+            const bool item_selected = (i == *current_item);
+            if (Selectable(item_text, item_selected))
+            {
+                *current_item = i;
+                value_changed = true;
+            }
+            if (item_selected)
+                SetItemDefaultFocus();
+            PopID();
+        }
+    EndListBox();
+
+    if (value_changed)
+        MarkItemEdited(g.LastItemData.ID);
+
+    return value_changed;
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: PlotLines, PlotHistogram
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - PlotEx() [Internal]
+// - PlotLines()
+// - PlotHistogram()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// Plot/Graph widgets are not very good.
+// Consider writing your own, or using a third-party one, see:
+// - ImPlot https://github.com/epezent/implot
+// - others https://github.com/ocornut/imgui/wiki/Useful-Extensions
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+int ImGui::PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType plot_type, const char* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 frame_size)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return -1;
+
+    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
+
+    const ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+    if (frame_size.x == 0.0f)
+        frame_size.x = CalcItemWidth();
+    if (frame_size.y == 0.0f)
+        frame_size.y = label_size.y + (style.FramePadding.y * 2);
+
+    const ImRect frame_bb(window->DC.CursorPos, window->DC.CursorPos + frame_size);
+    const ImRect inner_bb(frame_bb.Min + style.FramePadding, frame_bb.Max - style.FramePadding);
+    const ImRect total_bb(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max + ImVec2(label_size.x > 0.0f ? style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + label_size.x : 0.0f, 0));
+    ItemSize(total_bb, style.FramePadding.y);
+    if (!ItemAdd(total_bb, 0, &frame_bb))
+        return -1;
+    const bool hovered = ItemHoverable(frame_bb, id);
+
+    // Determine scale from values if not specified
+    if (scale_min == FLT_MAX || scale_max == FLT_MAX)
+    {
+        float v_min = FLT_MAX;
+        float v_max = -FLT_MAX;
+        for (int i = 0; i < values_count; i++)
+        {
+            const float v = values_getter(data, i);
+            if (v != v) // Ignore NaN values
+                continue;
+            v_min = ImMin(v_min, v);
+            v_max = ImMax(v_max, v);
+        }
+        if (scale_min == FLT_MAX)
+            scale_min = v_min;
+        if (scale_max == FLT_MAX)
+            scale_max = v_max;
+    }
+
+    RenderFrame(frame_bb.Min, frame_bb.Max, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_FrameBg), true, style.FrameRounding);
+
+    const int values_count_min = (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? 2 : 1;
+    int idx_hovered = -1;
+    if (values_count >= values_count_min)
+    {
+        int res_w = ImMin((int)frame_size.x, values_count) + ((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? -1 : 0);
+        int item_count = values_count + ((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? -1 : 0);
+
+        // Tooltip on hover
+        if (hovered && inner_bb.Contains(g.IO.MousePos))
+        {
+            const float t = ImClamp((g.IO.MousePos.x - inner_bb.Min.x) / (inner_bb.Max.x - inner_bb.Min.x), 0.0f, 0.9999f);
+            const int v_idx = (int)(t * item_count);
+            IM_ASSERT(v_idx >= 0 && v_idx < values_count);
+
+            const float v0 = values_getter(data, (v_idx + values_offset) % values_count);
+            const float v1 = values_getter(data, (v_idx + 1 + values_offset) % values_count);
+            if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines)
+                SetTooltip("%d: %8.4g\n%d: %8.4g", v_idx, v0, v_idx + 1, v1);
+            else if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Histogram)
+                SetTooltip("%d: %8.4g", v_idx, v0);
+            idx_hovered = v_idx;
+        }
+
+        const float t_step = 1.0f / (float)res_w;
+        const float inv_scale = (scale_min == scale_max) ? 0.0f : (1.0f / (scale_max - scale_min));
+
+        float v0 = values_getter(data, (0 + values_offset) % values_count);
+        float t0 = 0.0f;
+        ImVec2 tp0 = ImVec2( t0, 1.0f - ImSaturate((v0 - scale_min) * inv_scale) );                       // Point in the normalized space of our target rectangle
+        float histogram_zero_line_t = (scale_min * scale_max < 0.0f) ? (1 + scale_min * inv_scale) : (scale_min < 0.0f ? 0.0f : 1.0f);   // Where does the zero line stands
+
+        const ImU32 col_base = GetColorU32((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? ImGuiCol_PlotLines : ImGuiCol_PlotHistogram);
+        const ImU32 col_hovered = GetColorU32((plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? ImGuiCol_PlotLinesHovered : ImGuiCol_PlotHistogramHovered);
+
+        for (int n = 0; n < res_w; n++)
+        {
+            const float t1 = t0 + t_step;
+            const int v1_idx = (int)(t0 * item_count + 0.5f);
+            IM_ASSERT(v1_idx >= 0 && v1_idx < values_count);
+            const float v1 = values_getter(data, (v1_idx + values_offset + 1) % values_count);
+            const ImVec2 tp1 = ImVec2( t1, 1.0f - ImSaturate((v1 - scale_min) * inv_scale) );
+
+            // NB: Draw calls are merged together by the DrawList system. Still, we should render our batch are lower level to save a bit of CPU.
+            ImVec2 pos0 = ImLerp(inner_bb.Min, inner_bb.Max, tp0);
+            ImVec2 pos1 = ImLerp(inner_bb.Min, inner_bb.Max, (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines) ? tp1 : ImVec2(tp1.x, histogram_zero_line_t));
+            if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Lines)
+            {
+                window->DrawList->AddLine(pos0, pos1, idx_hovered == v1_idx ? col_hovered : col_base);
+            }
+            else if (plot_type == ImGuiPlotType_Histogram)
+            {
+                if (pos1.x >= pos0.x + 2.0f)
+                    pos1.x -= 1.0f;
+                window->DrawList->AddRectFilled(pos0, pos1, idx_hovered == v1_idx ? col_hovered : col_base);
+            }
+
+            t0 = t1;
+            tp0 = tp1;
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Text overlay
+    if (overlay_text)
+        RenderTextClipped(ImVec2(frame_bb.Min.x, frame_bb.Min.y + style.FramePadding.y), frame_bb.Max, overlay_text, NULL, NULL, ImVec2(0.5f, 0.0f));
+
+    if (label_size.x > 0.0f)
+        RenderText(ImVec2(frame_bb.Max.x + style.ItemInnerSpacing.x, inner_bb.Min.y), label);
+
+    // Return hovered index or -1 if none are hovered.
+    // This is currently not exposed in the public API because we need a larger redesign of the whole thing, but in the short-term we are making it available in PlotEx().
+    return idx_hovered;
+}
+
+struct ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData
+{
+    const float* Values;
+    int Stride;
+
+    ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData(const float* values, int stride) { Values = values; Stride = stride; }
+};
+
+static float Plot_ArrayGetter(void* data, int idx)
+{
+    ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData* plot_data = (ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData*)data;
+    const float v = *(const float*)(const void*)((const unsigned char*)plot_data->Values + (size_t)idx * plot_data->Stride);
+    return v;
+}
+
+void ImGui::PlotLines(const char* label, const float* values, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size, int stride)
+{
+    ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData data(values, stride);
+    PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Lines, label, &Plot_ArrayGetter, (void*)&data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
+}
+
+void ImGui::PlotLines(const char* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size)
+{
+    PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Lines, label, values_getter, data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
+}
+
+void ImGui::PlotHistogram(const char* label, const float* values, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size, int stride)
+{
+    ImGuiPlotArrayGetterData data(values, stride);
+    PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Histogram, label, &Plot_ArrayGetter, (void*)&data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
+}
+
+void ImGui::PlotHistogram(const char* label, float (*values_getter)(void* data, int idx), void* data, int values_count, int values_offset, const char* overlay_text, float scale_min, float scale_max, ImVec2 graph_size)
+{
+    PlotEx(ImGuiPlotType_Histogram, label, values_getter, data, values_count, values_offset, overlay_text, scale_min, scale_max, graph_size);
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: Value helpers
+// Those is not very useful, legacy API.
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - Value()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+void ImGui::Value(const char* prefix, bool b)
+{
+    Text("%s: %s", prefix, (b ? "true" : "false"));
+}
+
+void ImGui::Value(const char* prefix, int v)
+{
+    Text("%s: %d", prefix, v);
+}
+
+void ImGui::Value(const char* prefix, unsigned int v)
+{
+    Text("%s: %d", prefix, v);
+}
+
+void ImGui::Value(const char* prefix, float v, const char* float_format)
+{
+    if (float_format)
+    {
+        char fmt[64];
+        ImFormatString(fmt, IM_ARRAYSIZE(fmt), "%%s: %s", float_format);
+        Text(fmt, prefix, v);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        Text("%s: %.3f", prefix, v);
+    }
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] MenuItem, BeginMenu, EndMenu, etc.
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - ImGuiMenuColumns [Internal]
+// - BeginMenuBar()
+// - EndMenuBar()
+// - BeginMainMenuBar()
+// - EndMainMenuBar()
+// - BeginMenu()
+// - EndMenu()
+// - MenuItemEx() [Internal]
+// - MenuItem()
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+// Helpers for internal use
+void ImGuiMenuColumns::Update(float spacing, bool window_reappearing)
+{
+    if (window_reappearing)
+        memset(Widths, 0, sizeof(Widths));
+    Spacing = (ImU16)spacing;
+    CalcNextTotalWidth(true);
+    memset(Widths, 0, sizeof(Widths));
+    TotalWidth = NextTotalWidth;
+    NextTotalWidth = 0;
+}
+
+void ImGuiMenuColumns::CalcNextTotalWidth(bool update_offsets)
+{
+    ImU16 offset = 0;
+    bool want_spacing = false;
+    for (int i = 0; i < IM_ARRAYSIZE(Widths); i++)
+    {
+        ImU16 width = Widths[i];
+        if (want_spacing && width > 0)
+            offset += Spacing;
+        want_spacing |= (width > 0);
+        if (update_offsets)
+        {
+            if (i == 1) { OffsetLabel = offset; }
+            if (i == 2) { OffsetShortcut = offset; }
+            if (i == 3) { OffsetMark = offset; }
+        }
+        offset += width;
+    }
+    NextTotalWidth = offset;
+}
+
+float ImGuiMenuColumns::DeclColumns(float w_icon, float w_label, float w_shortcut, float w_mark)
+{
+    Widths[0] = ImMax(Widths[0], (ImU16)w_icon);
+    Widths[1] = ImMax(Widths[1], (ImU16)w_label);
+    Widths[2] = ImMax(Widths[2], (ImU16)w_shortcut);
+    Widths[3] = ImMax(Widths[3], (ImU16)w_mark);
+    CalcNextTotalWidth(false);
+    return (float)ImMax(TotalWidth, NextTotalWidth);
+}
+
+// FIXME: Provided a rectangle perhaps e.g. a BeginMenuBarEx() could be used anywhere..
+// Currently the main responsibility of this function being to setup clip-rect + horizontal layout + menu navigation layer.
+// Ideally we also want this to be responsible for claiming space out of the main window scrolling rectangle, in which case ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar will become unnecessary.
+// Then later the same system could be used for multiple menu-bars, scrollbars, side-bars.
+bool ImGui::BeginMenuBar()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+    if (!(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar))
+        return false;
+
+    IM_ASSERT(!window->DC.MenuBarAppending);
+    BeginGroup(); // Backup position on layer 0 // FIXME: Misleading to use a group for that backup/restore
+    PushID("##menubar");
+
+    // We don't clip with current window clipping rectangle as it is already set to the area below. However we clip with window full rect.
+    // We remove 1 worth of rounding to Max.x to that text in long menus and small windows don't tend to display over the lower-right rounded area, which looks particularly glitchy.
+    ImRect bar_rect = window->MenuBarRect();
+    ImRect clip_rect(IM_ROUND(bar_rect.Min.x + window->WindowBorderSize), IM_ROUND(bar_rect.Min.y + window->WindowBorderSize), IM_ROUND(ImMax(bar_rect.Min.x, bar_rect.Max.x - ImMax(window->WindowRounding, window->WindowBorderSize))), IM_ROUND(bar_rect.Max.y));
+    clip_rect.ClipWith(window->OuterRectClipped);
+    PushClipRect(clip_rect.Min, clip_rect.Max, false);
+
+    // We overwrite CursorMaxPos because BeginGroup sets it to CursorPos (essentially the .EmitItem hack in EndMenuBar() would need something analogous here, maybe a BeginGroupEx() with flags).
+    window->DC.CursorPos = window->DC.CursorMaxPos = ImVec2(bar_rect.Min.x + window->DC.MenuBarOffset.x, bar_rect.Min.y + window->DC.MenuBarOffset.y);
+    window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal;
+    window->DC.IsSameLine = false;
+    window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Menu;
+    window->DC.MenuBarAppending = true;
+    AlignTextToFramePadding();
+    return true;
+}
+
+void ImGui::EndMenuBar()
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return;
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+
+    // Nav: When a move request within one of our child menu failed, capture the request to navigate among our siblings.
+    if (NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet() && (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left || g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right) && (g.NavWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
+    {
+        // Try to find out if the request is for one of our child menu
+        ImGuiWindow* nav_earliest_child = g.NavWindow;
+        while (nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow && (nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
+            nav_earliest_child = nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow;
+        if (nav_earliest_child->ParentWindow == window && nav_earliest_child->DC.ParentLayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal && (g.NavMoveFlags & ImGuiNavMoveFlags_Forwarded) == 0)
+        {
+            // To do so we claim focus back, restore NavId and then process the movement request for yet another frame.
+            // This involve a one-frame delay which isn't very problematic in this situation. We could remove it by scoring in advance for multiple window (probably not worth bothering)
+            const ImGuiNavLayer layer = ImGuiNavLayer_Menu;
+            IM_ASSERT(window->DC.NavLayersActiveMaskNext & (1 << layer)); // Sanity check
+            FocusWindow(window);
+            SetNavID(window->NavLastIds[layer], layer, 0, window->NavRectRel[layer]);
+            g.NavDisableHighlight = true; // Hide highlight for the current frame so we don't see the intermediary selection.
+            g.NavDisableMouseHover = g.NavMousePosDirty = true;
+            NavMoveRequestForward(g.NavMoveDir, g.NavMoveClipDir, g.NavMoveFlags, g.NavMoveScrollFlags); // Repeat
+        }
+    }
+
+    IM_MSVC_WARNING_SUPPRESS(6011); // Static Analysis false positive "warning C6011: Dereferencing NULL pointer 'window'"
+    IM_ASSERT(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar);
+    IM_ASSERT(window->DC.MenuBarAppending);
+    PopClipRect();
+    PopID();
+    window->DC.MenuBarOffset.x = window->DC.CursorPos.x - window->Pos.x; // Save horizontal position so next append can reuse it. This is kinda equivalent to a per-layer CursorPos.
+    g.GroupStack.back().EmitItem = false;
+    EndGroup(); // Restore position on layer 0
+    window->DC.LayoutType = ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical;
+    window->DC.IsSameLine = false;
+    window->DC.NavLayerCurrent = ImGuiNavLayer_Main;
+    window->DC.MenuBarAppending = false;
+}
+
+// Important: calling order matters!
+// FIXME: Somehow overlapping with docking tech.
+// FIXME: The "rect-cut" aspect of this could be formalized into a lower-level helper (rect-cut: https://halt.software/dead-simple-layouts)
+bool ImGui::BeginViewportSideBar(const char* name, ImGuiViewport* viewport_p, ImGuiDir dir, float axis_size, ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(dir != ImGuiDir_None);
+
+    ImGuiWindow* bar_window = FindWindowByName(name);
+    ImGuiViewportP* viewport = (ImGuiViewportP*)(void*)(viewport_p ? viewport_p : GetMainViewport());
+    if (bar_window == NULL || bar_window->BeginCount == 0)
+    {
+        // Calculate and set window size/position
+        ImRect avail_rect = viewport->GetBuildWorkRect();
+        ImGuiAxis axis = (dir == ImGuiDir_Up || dir == ImGuiDir_Down) ? ImGuiAxis_Y : ImGuiAxis_X;
+        ImVec2 pos = avail_rect.Min;
+        if (dir == ImGuiDir_Right || dir == ImGuiDir_Down)
+            pos[axis] = avail_rect.Max[axis] - axis_size;
+        ImVec2 size = avail_rect.GetSize();
+        size[axis] = axis_size;
+        SetNextWindowPos(pos);
+        SetNextWindowSize(size);
+
+        // Report our size into work area (for next frame) using actual window size
+        if (dir == ImGuiDir_Up || dir == ImGuiDir_Left)
+            viewport->BuildWorkOffsetMin[axis] += axis_size;
+        else if (dir == ImGuiDir_Down || dir == ImGuiDir_Right)
+            viewport->BuildWorkOffsetMax[axis] -= axis_size;
+    }
+
+    window_flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoDocking;
+    SetNextWindowViewport(viewport->ID); // Enforce viewport so we don't create our own viewport when ImGuiConfigFlags_ViewportsNoMerge is set.
+    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowRounding, 0.0f);
+    PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowMinSize, ImVec2(0, 0)); // Lift normal size constraint
+    bool is_open = Begin(name, NULL, window_flags);
+    PopStyleVar(2);
+
+    return is_open;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::BeginMainMenuBar()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiViewportP* viewport = (ImGuiViewportP*)(void*)GetMainViewport();
+
+    // Notify of viewport change so GetFrameHeight() can be accurate in case of DPI change
+    SetCurrentViewport(NULL, viewport);
+
+    // For the main menu bar, which cannot be moved, we honor g.Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding to ensure text can be visible on a TV set.
+    // FIXME: This could be generalized as an opt-in way to clamp window->DC.CursorStartPos to avoid SafeArea?
+    // FIXME: Consider removing support for safe area down the line... it's messy. Nowadays consoles have support for TV calibration in OS settings.
+    g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal = ImVec2(g.Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding.x, ImMax(g.Style.DisplaySafeAreaPadding.y - g.Style.FramePadding.y, 0.0f));
+    ImGuiWindowFlags window_flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar;
+    float height = GetFrameHeight();
+    bool is_open = BeginViewportSideBar("##MainMenuBar", viewport, ImGuiDir_Up, height, window_flags);
+    g.NextWindowData.MenuBarOffsetMinVal = ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
+
+    if (is_open)
+        BeginMenuBar();
+    else
+        End();
+    return is_open;
+}
+
+void ImGui::EndMainMenuBar()
+{
+    EndMenuBar();
+
+    // When the user has left the menu layer (typically: closed menus through activation of an item), we restore focus to the previous window
+    // FIXME: With this strategy we won't be able to restore a NULL focus.
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.CurrentWindow == g.NavWindow && g.NavLayer == ImGuiNavLayer_Main && !g.NavAnyRequest)
+        FocusTopMostWindowUnderOne(g.NavWindow, NULL);
+
+    End();
+}
+
+static bool IsRootOfOpenMenuSet()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if ((g.OpenPopupStack.Size <= g.BeginPopupStack.Size) || (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
+        return false;
+
+    // Initially we used 'upper_popup->OpenParentId == window->IDStack.back()' to differentiate multiple menu sets from each others
+    // (e.g. inside menu bar vs loose menu items) based on parent ID.
+    // This would however prevent the use of e.g. PuhsID() user code submitting menus.
+    // Previously this worked between popup and a first child menu because the first child menu always had the _ChildWindow flag,
+    // making  hovering on parent popup possible while first child menu was focused - but this was generally a bug with other side effects.
+    // Instead we don't treat Popup specifically (in order to consistently support menu features in them), maybe the first child menu of a Popup
+    // doesn't have the _ChildWindow flag, and we rely on this IsRootOfOpenMenuSet() check to allow hovering between root window/popup and first child menu.
+    // In the end, lack of ID check made it so we could no longer differentiate between separate menu sets. To compensate for that, we at least check parent window nav layer.
+    // This fixes the most common case of menu opening on hover when moving between window content and menu bar. Multiple different menu sets in same nav layer would still
+    // open on hover, but that should be a lesser problem, because if such menus are close in proximity in window content then it won't feel weird and if they are far apart
+    // it likely won't be a problem anyone runs into.
+    const ImGuiPopupData* upper_popup = &g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size];
+    return (window->DC.NavLayerCurrent == upper_popup->ParentNavLayer && upper_popup->Window && (upper_popup->Window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu));
+}
+
+bool ImGui::BeginMenuEx(const char* label, const char* icon, bool enabled)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+    const ImGuiID id = window->GetID(label);
+    bool menu_is_open = IsPopupOpen(id, ImGuiPopupFlags_None);
+
+    // Sub-menus are ChildWindow so that mouse can be hovering across them (otherwise top-most popup menu would steal focus and not allow hovering on parent menu)
+    // The first menu in a hierarchy isn't so hovering doesn't get across (otherwise e.g. resizing borders with ImGuiButtonFlags_FlattenChildren would react), but top-most BeginMenu() will bypass that limitation.
+    ImGuiWindowFlags flags = ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu | ImGuiWindowFlags_AlwaysAutoResize | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoTitleBar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoSavedSettings | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoNavFocus;
+    if (window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu)
+        flags |= ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildWindow;
+
+    // If a menu with same the ID was already submitted, we will append to it, matching the behavior of Begin().
+    // We are relying on a O(N) search - so O(N log N) over the frame - which seems like the most efficient for the expected small amount of BeginMenu() calls per frame.
+    // If somehow this is ever becoming a problem we can switch to use e.g. ImGuiStorage mapping key to last frame used.
+    if (g.MenusIdSubmittedThisFrame.contains(id))
+    {
+        if (menu_is_open)
+            menu_is_open = BeginPopupEx(id, flags); // menu_is_open can be 'false' when the popup is completely clipped (e.g. zero size display)
+        else
+            g.NextWindowData.ClearFlags();          // we behave like Begin() and need to consume those values
+        return menu_is_open;
+    }
+
+    // Tag menu as used. Next time BeginMenu() with same ID is called it will append to existing menu
+    g.MenusIdSubmittedThisFrame.push_back(id);
+
+    ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+
+    // Odd hack to allow hovering across menus of a same menu-set (otherwise we wouldn't be able to hover parent without always being a Child window)
+    const bool menuset_is_open = IsRootOfOpenMenuSet();
+    ImGuiWindow* backed_nav_window = g.NavWindow;
+    if (menuset_is_open)
+        g.NavWindow = window;
+
+    // The reference position stored in popup_pos will be used by Begin() to find a suitable position for the child menu,
+    // However the final position is going to be different! It is chosen by FindBestWindowPosForPopup().
+    // e.g. Menus tend to overlap each other horizontally to amplify relative Z-ordering.
+    ImVec2 popup_pos, pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+    PushID(label);
+    if (!enabled)
+        BeginDisabled();
+    const ImGuiMenuColumns* offsets = &window->DC.MenuColumns;
+    bool pressed;
+    const ImGuiSelectableFlags selectable_flags = ImGuiSelectableFlags_NoHoldingActiveID | ImGuiSelectableFlags_SelectOnClick | ImGuiSelectableFlags_DontClosePopups;
+    if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal)
+    {
+        // Menu inside an horizontal menu bar
+        // Selectable extend their highlight by half ItemSpacing in each direction.
+        // For ChildMenu, the popup position will be overwritten by the call to FindBestWindowPosForPopup() in Begin()
+        popup_pos = ImVec2(pos.x - 1.0f - IM_FLOOR(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f), pos.y - style.FramePadding.y + window->MenuBarHeight());
+        window->DC.CursorPos.x += IM_FLOOR(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f);
+        PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(style.ItemSpacing.x * 2.0f, style.ItemSpacing.y));
+        float w = label_size.x;
+        ImVec2 text_pos(window->DC.CursorPos.x + offsets->OffsetLabel, window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset);
+        pressed = Selectable("", menu_is_open, selectable_flags, ImVec2(w, 0.0f));
+        RenderText(text_pos, label);
+        PopStyleVar();
+        window->DC.CursorPos.x += IM_FLOOR(style.ItemSpacing.x * (-1.0f + 0.5f)); // -1 spacing to compensate the spacing added when Selectable() did a SameLine(). It would also work to call SameLine() ourselves after the PopStyleVar().
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Menu inside a regular/vertical menu
+        // (In a typical menu window where all items are BeginMenu() or MenuItem() calls, extra_w will always be 0.0f.
+        //  Only when they are other items sticking out we're going to add spacing, yet only register minimum width into the layout system.
+        popup_pos = ImVec2(pos.x, pos.y - style.WindowPadding.y);
+        float icon_w = (icon && icon[0]) ? CalcTextSize(icon, NULL).x : 0.0f;
+        float checkmark_w = IM_FLOOR(g.FontSize * 1.20f);
+        float min_w = window->DC.MenuColumns.DeclColumns(icon_w, label_size.x, 0.0f, checkmark_w); // Feedback to next frame
+        float extra_w = ImMax(0.0f, GetContentRegionAvail().x - min_w);
+        ImVec2 text_pos(window->DC.CursorPos.x + offsets->OffsetLabel, window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset);
+        pressed = Selectable("", menu_is_open, selectable_flags | ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAvailWidth, ImVec2(min_w, 0.0f));
+        RenderText(text_pos, label);
+        if (icon_w > 0.0f)
+            RenderText(pos + ImVec2(offsets->OffsetIcon, 0.0f), icon);
+        RenderArrow(window->DrawList, pos + ImVec2(offsets->OffsetMark + extra_w + g.FontSize * 0.30f, 0.0f), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), ImGuiDir_Right);
+    }
+    if (!enabled)
+        EndDisabled();
+
+    const bool hovered = (g.HoveredId == id) && enabled && !g.NavDisableMouseHover;
+    if (menuset_is_open)
+        g.NavWindow = backed_nav_window;
+
+    bool want_open = false;
+    bool want_close = false;
+    if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical) // (window->Flags & (ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup|ImGuiWindowFlags_ChildMenu))
+    {
+        // Close menu when not hovering it anymore unless we are moving roughly in the direction of the menu
+        // Implement http://bjk5.com/post/44698559168/breaking-down-amazons-mega-dropdown to avoid using timers, so menus feels more reactive.
+        bool moving_toward_child_menu = false;
+        ImGuiWindow* child_menu_window = (g.BeginPopupStack.Size < g.OpenPopupStack.Size && g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size].SourceWindow == window) ? g.OpenPopupStack[g.BeginPopupStack.Size].Window : NULL;
+        if (g.HoveredWindow == window && child_menu_window != NULL && !(window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar))
+        {
+            float ref_unit = g.FontSize; // FIXME-DPI
+            ImRect next_window_rect = child_menu_window->Rect();
+            ImVec2 ta = (g.IO.MousePos - g.IO.MouseDelta);
+            ImVec2 tb = (window->Pos.x < child_menu_window->Pos.x) ? next_window_rect.GetTL() : next_window_rect.GetTR();
+            ImVec2 tc = (window->Pos.x < child_menu_window->Pos.x) ? next_window_rect.GetBL() : next_window_rect.GetBR();
+            float extra = ImClamp(ImFabs(ta.x - tb.x) * 0.30f, ref_unit * 0.5f, ref_unit * 2.5f);   // add a bit of extra slack.
+            ta.x += (window->Pos.x < child_menu_window->Pos.x) ? -0.5f : +0.5f;                     // to avoid numerical issues (FIXME: ??)
+            tb.y = ta.y + ImMax((tb.y - extra) - ta.y, -ref_unit * 8.0f);                           // triangle has maximum height to limit the slope and the bias toward large sub-menus
+            tc.y = ta.y + ImMin((tc.y + extra) - ta.y, +ref_unit * 8.0f);
+            moving_toward_child_menu = ImTriangleContainsPoint(ta, tb, tc, g.IO.MousePos);
+            //GetForegroundDrawList()->AddTriangleFilled(ta, tb, tc, moving_toward_other_child_menu ? IM_COL32(0,128,0,128) : IM_COL32(128,0,0,128)); // [DEBUG]
+        }
+
+        // The 'HovereWindow == window' check creates an inconsistency (e.g. moving away from menu slowly tends to hit same window, whereas moving away fast does not)
+        // But we also need to not close the top-menu menu when moving over void. Perhaps we should extend the triangle check to a larger polygon.
+        // (Remember to test this on BeginPopup("A")->BeginMenu("B") sequence which behaves slightly differently as B isn't a Child of A and hovering isn't shared.)
+        if (menu_is_open && !hovered && g.HoveredWindow == window && !moving_toward_child_menu)
+            want_close = true;
+
+        // Open
+        if (!menu_is_open && pressed) // Click/activate to open
+            want_open = true;
+        else if (!menu_is_open && hovered && !moving_toward_child_menu) // Hover to open
+            want_open = true;
+        if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Right) // Nav-Right to open
+        {
+            want_open = true;
+            NavMoveRequestCancel();
+        }
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Menu bar
+        if (menu_is_open && pressed && menuset_is_open) // Click an open menu again to close it
+        {
+            want_close = true;
+            want_open = menu_is_open = false;
+        }
+        else if (pressed || (hovered && menuset_is_open && !menu_is_open)) // First click to open, then hover to open others
+        {
+            want_open = true;
+        }
+        else if (g.NavId == id && g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Down) // Nav-Down to open
+        {
+            want_open = true;
+            NavMoveRequestCancel();
+        }
+    }
+
+    if (!enabled) // explicitly close if an open menu becomes disabled, facilitate users code a lot in pattern such as 'if (BeginMenu("options", has_object)) { ..use object.. }'
+        want_close = true;
+    if (want_close && IsPopupOpen(id, ImGuiPopupFlags_None))
+        ClosePopupToLevel(g.BeginPopupStack.Size, true);
+
+    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Openable | (menu_is_open ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Opened : 0));
+    PopID();
+
+    if (!menu_is_open && want_open && g.OpenPopupStack.Size > g.BeginPopupStack.Size)
+    {
+        // Don't recycle same menu level in the same frame, first close the other menu and yield for a frame.
+        OpenPopup(label);
+        return false;
+    }
+
+    menu_is_open |= want_open;
+    if (want_open)
+        OpenPopup(label);
+
+    if (menu_is_open)
+    {
+        SetNextWindowPos(popup_pos, ImGuiCond_Always); // Note: this is super misleading! The value will serve as reference for FindBestWindowPosForPopup(), not actual pos.
+        PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ChildRounding, style.PopupRounding); // First level will use _PopupRounding, subsequent will use _ChildRounding
+        menu_is_open = BeginPopupEx(id, flags); // menu_is_open can be 'false' when the popup is completely clipped (e.g. zero size display)
+        PopStyleVar();
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        g.NextWindowData.ClearFlags(); // We behave like Begin() and need to consume those values
+    }
+
+    return menu_is_open;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::BeginMenu(const char* label, bool enabled)
+{
+    return BeginMenuEx(label, NULL, enabled);
+}
+
+void ImGui::EndMenu()
+{
+    // Nav: When a left move request _within our child menu_ failed, close ourselves (the _parent_ menu).
+    // A menu doesn't close itself because EndMenuBar() wants the catch the last Left<>Right inputs.
+    // However, it means that with the current code, a BeginMenu() from outside another menu or a menu-bar won't be closable with the Left direction.
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (g.NavMoveDir == ImGuiDir_Left && NavMoveRequestButNoResultYet() && window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Vertical)
+        if (g.NavWindow && (g.NavWindow->RootWindowForNav->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_Popup) && g.NavWindow->RootWindowForNav->ParentWindow == window)
+        {
+            ClosePopupToLevel(g.BeginPopupStack.Size, true);
+            NavMoveRequestCancel();
+        }
+
+    EndPopup();
+}
+
+bool ImGui::MenuItemEx(const char* label, const char* icon, const char* shortcut, bool selected, bool enabled)
+{
+    ImGuiWindow* window = GetCurrentWindow();
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+    ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+    ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+
+    const bool menuset_is_open = IsRootOfOpenMenuSet();
+    ImGuiWindow* backed_nav_window = g.NavWindow;
+    if (menuset_is_open)
+        g.NavWindow = window;
+
+    // We've been using the equivalent of ImGuiSelectableFlags_SetNavIdOnHover on all Selectable() since early Nav system days (commit 43ee5d73),
+    // but I am unsure whether this should be kept at all. For now moved it to be an opt-in feature used by menus only.
+    bool pressed;
+    PushID(label);
+    if (!enabled)
+        BeginDisabled();
+
+    const ImGuiSelectableFlags selectable_flags = ImGuiSelectableFlags_SelectOnRelease | ImGuiSelectableFlags_SetNavIdOnHover;
+    const ImGuiMenuColumns* offsets = &window->DC.MenuColumns;
+    if (window->DC.LayoutType == ImGuiLayoutType_Horizontal)
+    {
+        // Mimic the exact layout spacing of BeginMenu() to allow MenuItem() inside a menu bar, which is a little misleading but may be useful
+        // Note that in this situation: we don't render the shortcut, we render a highlight instead of the selected tick mark.
+        float w = label_size.x;
+        window->DC.CursorPos.x += IM_FLOOR(style.ItemSpacing.x * 0.5f);
+        ImVec2 text_pos(window->DC.CursorPos.x + offsets->OffsetLabel, window->DC.CursorPos.y + window->DC.CurrLineTextBaseOffset);
+        PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(style.ItemSpacing.x * 2.0f, style.ItemSpacing.y));
+        pressed = Selectable("", selected, selectable_flags, ImVec2(w, 0.0f));
+        PopStyleVar();
+        RenderText(text_pos, label);
+        window->DC.CursorPos.x += IM_FLOOR(style.ItemSpacing.x * (-1.0f + 0.5f)); // -1 spacing to compensate the spacing added when Selectable() did a SameLine(). It would also work to call SameLine() ourselves after the PopStyleVar().
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Menu item inside a vertical menu
+        // (In a typical menu window where all items are BeginMenu() or MenuItem() calls, extra_w will always be 0.0f.
+        //  Only when they are other items sticking out we're going to add spacing, yet only register minimum width into the layout system.
+        float icon_w = (icon && icon[0]) ? CalcTextSize(icon, NULL).x : 0.0f;
+        float shortcut_w = (shortcut && shortcut[0]) ? CalcTextSize(shortcut, NULL).x : 0.0f;
+        float checkmark_w = IM_FLOOR(g.FontSize * 1.20f);
+        float min_w = window->DC.MenuColumns.DeclColumns(icon_w, label_size.x, shortcut_w, checkmark_w); // Feedback for next frame
+        float stretch_w = ImMax(0.0f, GetContentRegionAvail().x - min_w);
+        pressed = Selectable("", false, selectable_flags | ImGuiSelectableFlags_SpanAvailWidth, ImVec2(min_w, 0.0f));
+        RenderText(pos + ImVec2(offsets->OffsetLabel, 0.0f), label);
+        if (icon_w > 0.0f)
+            RenderText(pos + ImVec2(offsets->OffsetIcon, 0.0f), icon);
+        if (shortcut_w > 0.0f)
+        {
+            PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, style.Colors[ImGuiCol_TextDisabled]);
+            RenderText(pos + ImVec2(offsets->OffsetShortcut + stretch_w, 0.0f), shortcut, NULL, false);
+            PopStyleColor();
+        }
+        if (selected)
+            RenderCheckMark(window->DrawList, pos + ImVec2(offsets->OffsetMark + stretch_w + g.FontSize * 0.40f, g.FontSize * 0.134f * 0.5f), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text), g.FontSize  * 0.866f);
+    }
+    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(g.LastItemData.ID, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags | ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checkable | (selected ? ImGuiItemStatusFlags_Checked : 0));
+    if (!enabled)
+        EndDisabled();
+    PopID();
+    if (menuset_is_open)
+        g.NavWindow = backed_nav_window;
+
+    return pressed;
+}
+
+bool ImGui::MenuItem(const char* label, const char* shortcut, bool selected, bool enabled)
+{
+    return MenuItemEx(label, NULL, shortcut, selected, enabled);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::MenuItem(const char* label, const char* shortcut, bool* p_selected, bool enabled)
+{
+    if (MenuItemEx(label, NULL, shortcut, p_selected ? *p_selected : false, enabled))
+    {
+        if (p_selected)
+            *p_selected = !*p_selected;
+        return true;
+    }
+    return false;
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: BeginTabBar, EndTabBar, etc.
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - BeginTabBar()
+// - BeginTabBarEx() [Internal]
+// - EndTabBar()
+// - TabBarLayout() [Internal]
+// - TabBarCalcTabID() [Internal]
+// - TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth() [Internal]
+// - TabBarFindTabById() [Internal]
+// - TabBarAddTab() [Internal]
+// - TabBarRemoveTab() [Internal]
+// - TabBarCloseTab() [Internal]
+// - TabBarScrollClamp() [Internal]
+// - TabBarScrollToTab() [Internal]
+// - TabBarQueueChangeTabOrder() [Internal]
+// - TabBarScrollingButtons() [Internal]
+// - TabBarTabListPopupButton() [Internal]
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+struct ImGuiTabBarSection
+{
+    int                 TabCount;               // Number of tabs in this section.
+    float               Width;                  // Sum of width of tabs in this section (after shrinking down)
+    float               Spacing;                // Horizontal spacing at the end of the section.
+
+    ImGuiTabBarSection() { memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this)); }
+};
+
+namespace ImGui
+{
+    static void             TabBarLayout(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar);
+    static ImU32            TabBarCalcTabID(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const char* label, ImGuiWindow* docked_window);
+    static float            TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth();
+    static float            TabBarScrollClamp(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, float scrolling);
+    static void             TabBarScrollToTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiID tab_id, ImGuiTabBarSection* sections);
+    static ImGuiTabItem*    TabBarScrollingButtons(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar);
+    static ImGuiTabItem*    TabBarTabListPopupButton(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar);
+}
+
+ImGuiTabBar::ImGuiTabBar()
+{
+    memset(this, 0, sizeof(*this));
+    CurrFrameVisible = PrevFrameVisible = -1;
+    LastTabItemIdx = -1;
+}
+
+static inline int TabItemGetSectionIdx(const ImGuiTabItem* tab)
+{
+    return (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Leading) ? 0 : (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Trailing) ? 2 : 1;
+}
+
+static int IMGUI_CDECL TabItemComparerBySection(const void* lhs, const void* rhs)
+{
+    const ImGuiTabItem* a = (const ImGuiTabItem*)lhs;
+    const ImGuiTabItem* b = (const ImGuiTabItem*)rhs;
+    const int a_section = TabItemGetSectionIdx(a);
+    const int b_section = TabItemGetSectionIdx(b);
+    if (a_section != b_section)
+        return a_section - b_section;
+    return (int)(a->IndexDuringLayout - b->IndexDuringLayout);
+}
+
+static int IMGUI_CDECL TabItemComparerByBeginOrder(const void* lhs, const void* rhs)
+{
+    const ImGuiTabItem* a = (const ImGuiTabItem*)lhs;
+    const ImGuiTabItem* b = (const ImGuiTabItem*)rhs;
+    return (int)(a->BeginOrder - b->BeginOrder);
+}
+
+static ImGuiTabBar* GetTabBarFromTabBarRef(const ImGuiPtrOrIndex& ref)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return ref.Ptr ? (ImGuiTabBar*)ref.Ptr : g.TabBars.GetByIndex(ref.Index);
+}
+
+static ImGuiPtrOrIndex GetTabBarRefFromTabBar(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (g.TabBars.Contains(tab_bar))
+        return ImGuiPtrOrIndex(g.TabBars.GetIndex(tab_bar));
+    return ImGuiPtrOrIndex(tab_bar);
+}
+
+bool    ImGui::BeginTabBar(const char* str_id, ImGuiTabBarFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiID id = window->GetID(str_id);
+    ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.TabBars.GetOrAddByKey(id);
+    ImRect tab_bar_bb = ImRect(window->DC.CursorPos.x, window->DC.CursorPos.y, window->WorkRect.Max.x, window->DC.CursorPos.y + g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2);
+    tab_bar->ID = id;
+    return BeginTabBarEx(tab_bar, tab_bar_bb, flags | ImGuiTabBarFlags_IsFocused, NULL);
+}
+
+bool    ImGui::BeginTabBarEx(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const ImRect& tab_bar_bb, ImGuiTabBarFlags flags, ImGuiDockNode* dock_node)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    if ((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode) == 0)
+        PushOverrideID(tab_bar->ID);
+
+    // Add to stack
+    g.CurrentTabBarStack.push_back(GetTabBarRefFromTabBar(tab_bar));
+    g.CurrentTabBar = tab_bar;
+
+    // Append with multiple BeginTabBar()/EndTabBar() pairs.
+    tab_bar->BackupCursorPos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+    if (tab_bar->CurrFrameVisible == g.FrameCount)
+    {
+        window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y + tab_bar->ItemSpacingY);
+        tab_bar->BeginCount++;
+        return true;
+    }
+
+    // Ensure correct ordering when toggling ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable flag, or when a new tab was added while being not reorderable
+    if ((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable) != (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable) || (tab_bar->TabsAddedNew && !(flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable)))
+        if ((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode) == 0) // FIXME: TabBar with DockNode can now be hybrid
+            ImQsort(tab_bar->Tabs.Data, tab_bar->Tabs.Size, sizeof(ImGuiTabItem), TabItemComparerByBeginOrder);
+    tab_bar->TabsAddedNew = false;
+
+    // Flags
+    if ((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyMask_) == 0)
+        flags |= ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyDefault_;
+
+    tab_bar->Flags = flags;
+    tab_bar->BarRect = tab_bar_bb;
+    tab_bar->WantLayout = true; // Layout will be done on the first call to ItemTab()
+    tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible = tab_bar->CurrFrameVisible;
+    tab_bar->CurrFrameVisible = g.FrameCount;
+    tab_bar->PrevTabsContentsHeight = tab_bar->CurrTabsContentsHeight;
+    tab_bar->CurrTabsContentsHeight = 0.0f;
+    tab_bar->ItemSpacingY = g.Style.ItemSpacing.y;
+    tab_bar->FramePadding = g.Style.FramePadding;
+    tab_bar->TabsActiveCount = 0;
+    tab_bar->BeginCount = 1;
+
+    // Set cursor pos in a way which only be used in the off-chance the user erroneously submits item before BeginTabItem(): items will overlap
+    window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y + tab_bar->ItemSpacingY);
+
+    // Draw separator
+    const ImU32 col = GetColorU32((flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_IsFocused) ? ImGuiCol_TabActive : ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive);
+    const float y = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y - 1.0f;
+    if (dock_node != NULL)
+    {
+        const float separator_min_x = dock_node->Pos.x + window->WindowBorderSize;
+        const float separator_max_x = dock_node->Pos.x + dock_node->Size.x - window->WindowBorderSize;
+        window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(separator_min_x, y), ImVec2(separator_max_x, y), col, 1.0f);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        const float separator_min_x = tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x - IM_FLOOR(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f);
+        const float separator_max_x = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x + IM_FLOOR(window->WindowPadding.x * 0.5f);
+        window->DrawList->AddLine(ImVec2(separator_min_x, y), ImVec2(separator_max_x, y), col, 1.0f);
+    }
+    return true;
+}
+
+void    ImGui::EndTabBar()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return;
+
+    ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar;
+    if (tab_bar == NULL)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(tab_bar != NULL, "Mismatched BeginTabBar()/EndTabBar()!");
+        return;
+    }
+
+    // Fallback in case no TabItem have been submitted
+    if (tab_bar->WantLayout)
+        TabBarLayout(tab_bar);
+
+    // Restore the last visible height if no tab is visible, this reduce vertical flicker/movement when a tabs gets removed without calling SetTabItemClosed().
+    const bool tab_bar_appearing = (tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible + 1 < g.FrameCount);
+    if (tab_bar->VisibleTabWasSubmitted || tab_bar->VisibleTabId == 0 || tab_bar_appearing)
+    {
+        tab_bar->CurrTabsContentsHeight = ImMax(window->DC.CursorPos.y - tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y, tab_bar->CurrTabsContentsHeight);
+        window->DC.CursorPos.y = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y + tab_bar->CurrTabsContentsHeight;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        window->DC.CursorPos.y = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y + tab_bar->PrevTabsContentsHeight;
+    }
+    if (tab_bar->BeginCount > 1)
+        window->DC.CursorPos = tab_bar->BackupCursorPos;
+
+    if ((tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode) == 0)
+        PopID();
+
+    g.CurrentTabBarStack.pop_back();
+    g.CurrentTabBar = g.CurrentTabBarStack.empty() ? NULL : GetTabBarFromTabBarRef(g.CurrentTabBarStack.back());
+}
+
+// This is called only once a frame before by the first call to ItemTab()
+// The reason we're not calling it in BeginTabBar() is to leave a chance to the user to call the SetTabItemClosed() functions.
+static void ImGui::TabBarLayout(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    tab_bar->WantLayout = false;
+
+    // Garbage collect by compacting list
+    // Detect if we need to sort out tab list (e.g. in rare case where a tab changed section)
+    int tab_dst_n = 0;
+    bool need_sort_by_section = false;
+    ImGuiTabBarSection sections[3]; // Layout sections: Leading, Central, Trailing
+    for (int tab_src_n = 0; tab_src_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_src_n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_src_n];
+        if (tab->LastFrameVisible < tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible || tab->WantClose)
+        {
+            // Remove tab
+            if (tab_bar->VisibleTabId == tab->ID) { tab_bar->VisibleTabId = 0; }
+            if (tab_bar->SelectedTabId == tab->ID) { tab_bar->SelectedTabId = 0; }
+            if (tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId == tab->ID) { tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = 0; }
+            continue;
+        }
+        if (tab_dst_n != tab_src_n)
+            tab_bar->Tabs[tab_dst_n] = tab_bar->Tabs[tab_src_n];
+
+        tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_dst_n];
+        tab->IndexDuringLayout = (ImS16)tab_dst_n;
+
+        // We will need sorting if tabs have changed section (e.g. moved from one of Leading/Central/Trailing to another)
+        int curr_tab_section_n = TabItemGetSectionIdx(tab);
+        if (tab_dst_n > 0)
+        {
+            ImGuiTabItem* prev_tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_dst_n - 1];
+            int prev_tab_section_n = TabItemGetSectionIdx(prev_tab);
+            if (curr_tab_section_n == 0 && prev_tab_section_n != 0)
+                need_sort_by_section = true;
+            if (prev_tab_section_n == 2 && curr_tab_section_n != 2)
+                need_sort_by_section = true;
+        }
+
+        sections[curr_tab_section_n].TabCount++;
+        tab_dst_n++;
+    }
+    if (tab_bar->Tabs.Size != tab_dst_n)
+        tab_bar->Tabs.resize(tab_dst_n);
+
+    if (need_sort_by_section)
+        ImQsort(tab_bar->Tabs.Data, tab_bar->Tabs.Size, sizeof(ImGuiTabItem), TabItemComparerBySection);
+
+    // Calculate spacing between sections
+    sections[0].Spacing = sections[0].TabCount > 0 && (sections[1].TabCount + sections[2].TabCount) > 0 ? g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x : 0.0f;
+    sections[1].Spacing = sections[1].TabCount > 0 && sections[2].TabCount > 0 ? g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x : 0.0f;
+
+    // Setup next selected tab
+    ImGuiID scroll_to_tab_id = 0;
+    if (tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId)
+    {
+        tab_bar->SelectedTabId = tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId;
+        tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = 0;
+        scroll_to_tab_id = tab_bar->SelectedTabId;
+    }
+
+    // Process order change request (we could probably process it when requested but it's just saner to do it in a single spot).
+    if (tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId != 0)
+    {
+        if (TabBarProcessReorder(tab_bar))
+            if (tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId == tab_bar->SelectedTabId)
+                scroll_to_tab_id = tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId;
+        tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId = 0;
+    }
+
+    // Tab List Popup (will alter tab_bar->BarRect and therefore the available width!)
+    const bool tab_list_popup_button = (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_TabListPopupButton) != 0;
+    if (tab_list_popup_button)
+        if (ImGuiTabItem* tab_to_select = TabBarTabListPopupButton(tab_bar)) // NB: Will alter BarRect.Min.x!
+            scroll_to_tab_id = tab_bar->SelectedTabId = tab_to_select->ID;
+
+    // Leading/Trailing tabs will be shrink only if central one aren't visible anymore, so layout the shrink data as: leading, trailing, central
+    // (whereas our tabs are stored as: leading, central, trailing)
+    int shrink_buffer_indexes[3] = { 0, sections[0].TabCount + sections[2].TabCount, sections[0].TabCount };
+    g.ShrinkWidthBuffer.resize(tab_bar->Tabs.Size);
+
+    // Compute ideal tabs widths + store them into shrink buffer
+    ImGuiTabItem* most_recently_selected_tab = NULL;
+    int curr_section_n = -1;
+    bool found_selected_tab_id = false;
+    for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n];
+        IM_ASSERT(tab->LastFrameVisible >= tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible);
+
+        if ((most_recently_selected_tab == NULL || most_recently_selected_tab->LastFrameSelected < tab->LastFrameSelected) && !(tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button))
+            most_recently_selected_tab = tab;
+        if (tab->ID == tab_bar->SelectedTabId)
+            found_selected_tab_id = true;
+        if (scroll_to_tab_id == 0 && g.NavJustMovedToId == tab->ID)
+            scroll_to_tab_id = tab->ID;
+
+        // Refresh tab width immediately, otherwise changes of style e.g. style.FramePadding.x would noticeably lag in the tab bar.
+        // Additionally, when using TabBarAddTab() to manipulate tab bar order we occasionally insert new tabs that don't have a width yet,
+        // and we cannot wait for the next BeginTabItem() call. We cannot compute this width within TabBarAddTab() because font size depends on the active window.
+        const char* tab_name = tab_bar->GetTabName(tab);
+        const bool has_close_button = (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton) ? false : true;
+        tab->ContentWidth = (tab->RequestedWidth > 0.0f) ? tab->RequestedWidth : TabItemCalcSize(tab_name, has_close_button).x;
+
+        int section_n = TabItemGetSectionIdx(tab);
+        ImGuiTabBarSection* section = &sections[section_n];
+        section->Width += tab->ContentWidth + (section_n == curr_section_n ? g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x : 0.0f);
+        curr_section_n = section_n;
+
+        // Store data so we can build an array sorted by width if we need to shrink tabs down
+        IM_MSVC_WARNING_SUPPRESS(6385);
+        ImGuiShrinkWidthItem* shrink_width_item = &g.ShrinkWidthBuffer[shrink_buffer_indexes[section_n]++];
+        shrink_width_item->Index = tab_n;
+        shrink_width_item->Width = shrink_width_item->InitialWidth = tab->ContentWidth;
+
+        IM_ASSERT(tab->ContentWidth > 0.0f);
+        tab->Width = tab->ContentWidth;
+    }
+
+    // Compute total ideal width (used for e.g. auto-resizing a window)
+    tab_bar->WidthAllTabsIdeal = 0.0f;
+    for (int section_n = 0; section_n < 3; section_n++)
+        tab_bar->WidthAllTabsIdeal += sections[section_n].Width + sections[section_n].Spacing;
+
+    // Horizontal scrolling buttons
+    // (note that TabBarScrollButtons() will alter BarRect.Max.x)
+    if ((tab_bar->WidthAllTabsIdeal > tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth() && tab_bar->Tabs.Size > 1) && !(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoTabListScrollingButtons) && (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll))
+        if (ImGuiTabItem* scroll_and_select_tab = TabBarScrollingButtons(tab_bar))
+        {
+            scroll_to_tab_id = scroll_and_select_tab->ID;
+            if ((scroll_and_select_tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button) == 0)
+                tab_bar->SelectedTabId = scroll_to_tab_id;
+        }
+
+    // Shrink widths if full tabs don't fit in their allocated space
+    float section_0_w = sections[0].Width + sections[0].Spacing;
+    float section_1_w = sections[1].Width + sections[1].Spacing;
+    float section_2_w = sections[2].Width + sections[2].Spacing;
+    bool central_section_is_visible = (section_0_w + section_2_w) < tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth();
+    float width_excess;
+    if (central_section_is_visible)
+        width_excess = ImMax(section_1_w - (tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth() - section_0_w - section_2_w), 0.0f); // Excess used to shrink central section
+    else
+        width_excess = (section_0_w + section_2_w) - tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth(); // Excess used to shrink leading/trailing section
+
+    // With ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyScroll policy, we will only shrink leading/trailing if the central section is not visible anymore
+    if (width_excess > 0.0f && ((tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_FittingPolicyResizeDown) || !central_section_is_visible))
+    {
+        int shrink_data_count = (central_section_is_visible ? sections[1].TabCount : sections[0].TabCount + sections[2].TabCount);
+        int shrink_data_offset = (central_section_is_visible ? sections[0].TabCount + sections[2].TabCount : 0);
+        ShrinkWidths(g.ShrinkWidthBuffer.Data + shrink_data_offset, shrink_data_count, width_excess);
+
+        // Apply shrunk values into tabs and sections
+        for (int tab_n = shrink_data_offset; tab_n < shrink_data_offset + shrink_data_count; tab_n++)
+        {
+            ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[g.ShrinkWidthBuffer[tab_n].Index];
+            float shrinked_width = IM_FLOOR(g.ShrinkWidthBuffer[tab_n].Width);
+            if (shrinked_width < 0.0f)
+                continue;
+
+            int section_n = TabItemGetSectionIdx(tab);
+            sections[section_n].Width -= (tab->Width - shrinked_width);
+            tab->Width = shrinked_width;
+        }
+    }
+
+    // Layout all active tabs
+    int section_tab_index = 0;
+    float tab_offset = 0.0f;
+    tab_bar->WidthAllTabs = 0.0f;
+    for (int section_n = 0; section_n < 3; section_n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiTabBarSection* section = &sections[section_n];
+        if (section_n == 2)
+            tab_offset = ImMin(ImMax(0.0f, tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth() - section->Width), tab_offset);
+
+        for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < section->TabCount; tab_n++)
+        {
+            ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[section_tab_index + tab_n];
+            tab->Offset = tab_offset;
+            tab->NameOffset = -1;
+            tab_offset += tab->Width + (tab_n < section->TabCount - 1 ? g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x : 0.0f);
+        }
+        tab_bar->WidthAllTabs += ImMax(section->Width + section->Spacing, 0.0f);
+        tab_offset += section->Spacing;
+        section_tab_index += section->TabCount;
+    }
+
+    // Clear name buffers
+    tab_bar->TabsNames.Buf.resize(0);
+
+    // If we have lost the selected tab, select the next most recently active one
+    if (found_selected_tab_id == false)
+        tab_bar->SelectedTabId = 0;
+    if (tab_bar->SelectedTabId == 0 && tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId == 0 && most_recently_selected_tab != NULL)
+        scroll_to_tab_id = tab_bar->SelectedTabId = most_recently_selected_tab->ID;
+
+    // Lock in visible tab
+    tab_bar->VisibleTabId = tab_bar->SelectedTabId;
+    tab_bar->VisibleTabWasSubmitted = false;
+
+    // CTRL+TAB can override visible tab temporarily
+    if (g.NavWindowingTarget != NULL && g.NavWindowingTarget->DockNode && g.NavWindowingTarget->DockNode->TabBar == tab_bar)
+        tab_bar->VisibleTabId = scroll_to_tab_id = g.NavWindowingTarget->TabId;
+
+    // Update scrolling
+    if (scroll_to_tab_id != 0)
+        TabBarScrollToTab(tab_bar, scroll_to_tab_id, sections);
+    tab_bar->ScrollingAnim = TabBarScrollClamp(tab_bar, tab_bar->ScrollingAnim);
+    tab_bar->ScrollingTarget = TabBarScrollClamp(tab_bar, tab_bar->ScrollingTarget);
+    if (tab_bar->ScrollingAnim != tab_bar->ScrollingTarget)
+    {
+        // Scrolling speed adjust itself so we can always reach our target in 1/3 seconds.
+        // Teleport if we are aiming far off the visible line
+        tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed = ImMax(tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed, 70.0f * g.FontSize);
+        tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed = ImMax(tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed, ImFabs(tab_bar->ScrollingTarget - tab_bar->ScrollingAnim) / 0.3f);
+        const bool teleport = (tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible + 1 < g.FrameCount) || (tab_bar->ScrollingTargetDistToVisibility > 10.0f * g.FontSize);
+        tab_bar->ScrollingAnim = teleport ? tab_bar->ScrollingTarget : ImLinearSweep(tab_bar->ScrollingAnim, tab_bar->ScrollingTarget, g.IO.DeltaTime * tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed);
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        tab_bar->ScrollingSpeed = 0.0f;
+    }
+    tab_bar->ScrollingRectMinX = tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x + sections[0].Width + sections[0].Spacing;
+    tab_bar->ScrollingRectMaxX = tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x - sections[2].Width - sections[1].Spacing;
+
+    // Actual layout in host window (we don't do it in BeginTabBar() so as not to waste an extra frame)
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    window->DC.CursorPos = tab_bar->BarRect.Min;
+    ItemSize(ImVec2(tab_bar->WidthAllTabs, tab_bar->BarRect.GetHeight()), tab_bar->FramePadding.y);
+    window->DC.IdealMaxPos.x = ImMax(window->DC.IdealMaxPos.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x + tab_bar->WidthAllTabsIdeal);
+}
+
+// Dockable uses Name/ID in the global namespace. Non-dockable items use the ID stack.
+static ImU32   ImGui::TabBarCalcTabID(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const char* label, ImGuiWindow* docked_window)
+{
+    if (docked_window != NULL)
+    {
+        IM_UNUSED(tab_bar);
+        IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode);
+        ImGuiID id = docked_window->TabId;
+        KeepAliveID(id);
+        return id;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        ImGuiWindow* window = GImGui->CurrentWindow;
+        return window->GetID(label);
+    }
+}
+
+static float ImGui::TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    return g.FontSize * 20.0f;
+}
+
+ImGuiTabItem* ImGui::TabBarFindTabByID(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiID tab_id)
+{
+    if (tab_id != 0)
+        for (int n = 0; n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; n++)
+            if (tab_bar->Tabs[n].ID == tab_id)
+                return &tab_bar->Tabs[n];
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+// FIXME: See references to #2304 in TODO.txt
+ImGuiTabItem* ImGui::TabBarFindMostRecentlySelectedTabForActiveWindow(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar)
+{
+    ImGuiTabItem* most_recently_selected_tab = NULL;
+    for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++)
+    {
+        ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n];
+        if (most_recently_selected_tab == NULL || most_recently_selected_tab->LastFrameSelected < tab->LastFrameSelected)
+            if (tab->Window && tab->Window->WasActive)
+                most_recently_selected_tab = tab;
+    }
+    return most_recently_selected_tab;
+}
+
+// The purpose of this call is to register tab in advance so we can control their order at the time they appear.
+// Otherwise calling this is unnecessary as tabs are appending as needed by the BeginTabItem() function.
+void ImGui::TabBarAddTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiTabItemFlags tab_flags, ImGuiWindow* window)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, window->TabId) == NULL);
+    IM_ASSERT(g.CurrentTabBar != tab_bar);  // Can't work while the tab bar is active as our tab doesn't have an X offset yet, in theory we could/should test something like (tab_bar->CurrFrameVisible < g.FrameCount) but we'd need to solve why triggers the commented early-out assert in BeginTabBarEx() (probably dock node going from implicit to explicit in same frame)
+
+    if (!window->HasCloseButton)
+        tab_flags |= ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton;       // Set _NoCloseButton immediately because it will be used for first-frame width calculation.
+
+    ImGuiTabItem new_tab;
+    new_tab.ID = window->TabId;
+    new_tab.Flags = tab_flags;
+    new_tab.LastFrameVisible = tab_bar->CurrFrameVisible;   // Required so BeginTabBar() doesn't ditch the tab
+    if (new_tab.LastFrameVisible == -1)
+        new_tab.LastFrameVisible = g.FrameCount - 1;
+    new_tab.Window = window;                                // Required so tab bar layout can compute the tab width before tab submission
+    tab_bar->Tabs.push_back(new_tab);
+}
+
+// The *TabId fields be already set by the docking system _before_ the actual TabItem was created, so we clear them regardless.
+void ImGui::TabBarRemoveTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiID tab_id)
+{
+    if (ImGuiTabItem* tab = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, tab_id))
+        tab_bar->Tabs.erase(tab);
+    if (tab_bar->VisibleTabId == tab_id)      { tab_bar->VisibleTabId = 0; }
+    if (tab_bar->SelectedTabId == tab_id)     { tab_bar->SelectedTabId = 0; }
+    if (tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId == tab_id) { tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = 0; }
+}
+
+// Called on manual closure attempt
+void ImGui::TabBarCloseTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiTabItem* tab)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(!(tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button));
+    if (!(tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument))
+    {
+        // This will remove a frame of lag for selecting another tab on closure.
+        // However we don't run it in the case where the 'Unsaved' flag is set, so user gets a chance to fully undo the closure
+        tab->WantClose = true;
+        if (tab_bar->VisibleTabId == tab->ID)
+        {
+            tab->LastFrameVisible = -1;
+            tab_bar->SelectedTabId = tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = 0;
+        }
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        // Actually select before expecting closure attempt (on an UnsavedDocument tab user is expect to e.g. show a popup)
+        if (tab_bar->VisibleTabId != tab->ID)
+            tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = tab->ID;
+    }
+}
+
+static float ImGui::TabBarScrollClamp(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, float scrolling)
+{
+    scrolling = ImMin(scrolling, tab_bar->WidthAllTabs - tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth());
+    return ImMax(scrolling, 0.0f);
+}
+
+// Note: we may scroll to tab that are not selected! e.g. using keyboard arrow keys
+static void ImGui::TabBarScrollToTab(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, ImGuiID tab_id, ImGuiTabBarSection* sections)
+{
+    ImGuiTabItem* tab = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, tab_id);
+    if (tab == NULL)
+        return;
+    if (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SectionMask_)
+        return;
+
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    float margin = g.FontSize * 1.0f; // When to scroll to make Tab N+1 visible always make a bit of N visible to suggest more scrolling area (since we don't have a scrollbar)
+    int order = tab_bar->GetTabOrder(tab);
+
+    // Scrolling happens only in the central section (leading/trailing sections are not scrolling)
+    // FIXME: This is all confusing.
+    float scrollable_width = tab_bar->BarRect.GetWidth() - sections[0].Width - sections[2].Width - sections[1].Spacing;
+
+    // We make all tabs positions all relative Sections[0].Width to make code simpler
+    float tab_x1 = tab->Offset - sections[0].Width + (order > sections[0].TabCount - 1 ? -margin : 0.0f);
+    float tab_x2 = tab->Offset - sections[0].Width + tab->Width + (order + 1 < tab_bar->Tabs.Size - sections[2].TabCount ? margin : 1.0f);
+    tab_bar->ScrollingTargetDistToVisibility = 0.0f;
+    if (tab_bar->ScrollingTarget > tab_x1 || (tab_x2 - tab_x1 >= scrollable_width))
+    {
+        // Scroll to the left
+        tab_bar->ScrollingTargetDistToVisibility = ImMax(tab_bar->ScrollingAnim - tab_x2, 0.0f);
+        tab_bar->ScrollingTarget = tab_x1;
+    }
+    else if (tab_bar->ScrollingTarget < tab_x2 - scrollable_width)
+    {
+        // Scroll to the right
+        tab_bar->ScrollingTargetDistToVisibility = ImMax((tab_x1 - scrollable_width) - tab_bar->ScrollingAnim, 0.0f);
+        tab_bar->ScrollingTarget = tab_x2 - scrollable_width;
+    }
+}
+
+void ImGui::TabBarQueueReorder(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const ImGuiTabItem* tab, int offset)
+{
+    IM_ASSERT(offset != 0);
+    IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId == 0);
+    tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId = tab->ID;
+    tab_bar->ReorderRequestOffset = (ImS16)offset;
+}
+
+void ImGui::TabBarQueueReorderFromMousePos(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const ImGuiTabItem* src_tab, ImVec2 mouse_pos)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId == 0);
+    if ((tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable) == 0)
+        return;
+
+    const bool is_central_section = (src_tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SectionMask_) == 0;
+    const float bar_offset = tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x - (is_central_section ? tab_bar->ScrollingTarget : 0);
+
+    // Count number of contiguous tabs we are crossing over
+    const int dir = (bar_offset + src_tab->Offset) > mouse_pos.x ? -1 : +1;
+    const int src_idx = tab_bar->Tabs.index_from_ptr(src_tab);
+    int dst_idx = src_idx;
+    for (int i = src_idx; i >= 0 && i < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; i += dir)
+    {
+        // Reordered tabs must share the same section
+        const ImGuiTabItem* dst_tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[i];
+        if (dst_tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoReorder)
+            break;
+        if ((dst_tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SectionMask_) != (src_tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SectionMask_))
+            break;
+        dst_idx = i;
+
+        // Include spacing after tab, so when mouse cursor is between tabs we would not continue checking further tabs that are not hovered.
+        const float x1 = bar_offset + dst_tab->Offset - g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
+        const float x2 = bar_offset + dst_tab->Offset + dst_tab->Width + g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x;
+        //GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(ImVec2(x1, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y), ImVec2(x2, tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y), IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 255));
+        if ((dir < 0 && mouse_pos.x > x1) || (dir > 0 && mouse_pos.x < x2))
+            break;
+    }
+
+    if (dst_idx != src_idx)
+        TabBarQueueReorder(tab_bar, src_tab, dst_idx - src_idx);
+}
+
+bool ImGui::TabBarProcessReorder(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar)
+{
+    ImGuiTabItem* tab1 = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, tab_bar->ReorderRequestTabId);
+    if (tab1 == NULL || (tab1->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoReorder))
+        return false;
+
+    //IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable); // <- this may happen when using debug tools
+    int tab2_order = tab_bar->GetTabOrder(tab1) + tab_bar->ReorderRequestOffset;
+    if (tab2_order < 0 || tab2_order >= tab_bar->Tabs.Size)
+        return false;
+
+    // Reordered tabs must share the same section
+    // (Note: TabBarQueueReorderFromMousePos() also has a similar test but since we allow direct calls to TabBarQueueReorder() we do it here too)
+    ImGuiTabItem* tab2 = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab2_order];
+    if (tab2->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoReorder)
+        return false;
+    if ((tab1->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SectionMask_) != (tab2->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SectionMask_))
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiTabItem item_tmp = *tab1;
+    ImGuiTabItem* src_tab = (tab_bar->ReorderRequestOffset > 0) ? tab1 + 1 : tab2;
+    ImGuiTabItem* dst_tab = (tab_bar->ReorderRequestOffset > 0) ? tab1 : tab2 + 1;
+    const int move_count = (tab_bar->ReorderRequestOffset > 0) ? tab_bar->ReorderRequestOffset : -tab_bar->ReorderRequestOffset;
+    memmove(dst_tab, src_tab, move_count * sizeof(ImGuiTabItem));
+    *tab2 = item_tmp;
+
+    if (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_SaveSettings)
+        MarkIniSettingsDirty();
+    return true;
+}
+
+static ImGuiTabItem* ImGui::TabBarScrollingButtons(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+    const ImVec2 arrow_button_size(g.FontSize - 2.0f, g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f);
+    const float scrolling_buttons_width = arrow_button_size.x * 2.0f;
+
+    const ImVec2 backup_cursor_pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+    //window->DrawList->AddRect(ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x - scrolling_buttons_width, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y), ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Max.y), IM_COL32(255,0,0,255));
+
+    int select_dir = 0;
+    ImVec4 arrow_col = g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_Text];
+    arrow_col.w *= 0.5f;
+
+    PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, arrow_col);
+    PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, ImVec4(0, 0, 0, 0));
+    const float backup_repeat_delay = g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay;
+    const float backup_repeat_rate = g.IO.KeyRepeatRate;
+    g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay = 0.250f;
+    g.IO.KeyRepeatRate = 0.200f;
+    float x = ImMax(tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x - scrolling_buttons_width);
+    window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(x, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y);
+    if (ArrowButtonEx("##<", ImGuiDir_Left, arrow_button_size, ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat))
+        select_dir = -1;
+    window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(x + arrow_button_size.x, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y);
+    if (ArrowButtonEx("##>", ImGuiDir_Right, arrow_button_size, ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick | ImGuiButtonFlags_Repeat))
+        select_dir = +1;
+    PopStyleColor(2);
+    g.IO.KeyRepeatRate = backup_repeat_rate;
+    g.IO.KeyRepeatDelay = backup_repeat_delay;
+
+    ImGuiTabItem* tab_to_scroll_to = NULL;
+    if (select_dir != 0)
+        if (ImGuiTabItem* tab_item = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, tab_bar->SelectedTabId))
+        {
+            int selected_order = tab_bar->GetTabOrder(tab_item);
+            int target_order = selected_order + select_dir;
+
+            // Skip tab item buttons until another tab item is found or end is reached
+            while (tab_to_scroll_to == NULL)
+            {
+                // If we are at the end of the list, still scroll to make our tab visible
+                tab_to_scroll_to = &tab_bar->Tabs[(target_order >= 0 && target_order < tab_bar->Tabs.Size) ? target_order : selected_order];
+
+                // Cross through buttons
+                // (even if first/last item is a button, return it so we can update the scroll)
+                if (tab_to_scroll_to->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button)
+                {
+                    target_order += select_dir;
+                    selected_order += select_dir;
+                    tab_to_scroll_to = (target_order < 0 || target_order >= tab_bar->Tabs.Size) ? tab_to_scroll_to : NULL;
+                }
+            }
+        }
+    window->DC.CursorPos = backup_cursor_pos;
+    tab_bar->BarRect.Max.x -= scrolling_buttons_width + 1.0f;
+
+    return tab_to_scroll_to;
+}
+
+static ImGuiTabItem* ImGui::TabBarTabListPopupButton(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+
+    // We use g.Style.FramePadding.y to match the square ArrowButton size
+    const float tab_list_popup_button_width = g.FontSize + g.Style.FramePadding.y;
+    const ImVec2 backup_cursor_pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+    window->DC.CursorPos = ImVec2(tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x - g.Style.FramePadding.y, tab_bar->BarRect.Min.y);
+    tab_bar->BarRect.Min.x += tab_list_popup_button_width;
+
+    ImVec4 arrow_col = g.Style.Colors[ImGuiCol_Text];
+    arrow_col.w *= 0.5f;
+    PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Text, arrow_col);
+    PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, ImVec4(0, 0, 0, 0));
+    bool open = BeginCombo("##v", NULL, ImGuiComboFlags_NoPreview | ImGuiComboFlags_HeightLargest);
+    PopStyleColor(2);
+
+    ImGuiTabItem* tab_to_select = NULL;
+    if (open)
+    {
+        for (int tab_n = 0; tab_n < tab_bar->Tabs.Size; tab_n++)
+        {
+            ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_n];
+            if (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button)
+                continue;
+
+            const char* tab_name = tab_bar->GetTabName(tab);
+            if (Selectable(tab_name, tab_bar->SelectedTabId == tab->ID))
+                tab_to_select = tab;
+        }
+        EndCombo();
+    }
+
+    window->DC.CursorPos = backup_cursor_pos;
+    return tab_to_select;
+}
+
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// [SECTION] Widgets: BeginTabItem, EndTabItem, etc.
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// - BeginTabItem()
+// - EndTabItem()
+// - TabItemButton()
+// - TabItemEx() [Internal]
+// - SetTabItemClosed()
+// - TabItemCalcSize() [Internal]
+// - TabItemBackground() [Internal]
+// - TabItemLabelAndCloseButton() [Internal]
+//-------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+bool    ImGui::BeginTabItem(const char* label, bool* p_open, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar;
+    if (tab_bar == NULL)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(tab_bar, "Needs to be called between BeginTabBar() and EndTabBar()!");
+        return false;
+    }
+    IM_ASSERT((flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button) == 0);             // BeginTabItem() Can't be used with button flags, use TabItemButton() instead!
+
+    bool ret = TabItemEx(tab_bar, label, p_open, flags, NULL);
+    if (ret && !(flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoPushId))
+    {
+        ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx];
+        PushOverrideID(tab->ID); // We already hashed 'label' so push into the ID stack directly instead of doing another hash through PushID(label)
+    }
+    return ret;
+}
+
+void    ImGui::EndTabItem()
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return;
+
+    ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar;
+    if (tab_bar == NULL)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(tab_bar != NULL, "Needs to be called between BeginTabBar() and EndTabBar()!");
+        return;
+    }
+    IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx >= 0);
+    ImGuiTabItem* tab = &tab_bar->Tabs[tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx];
+    if (!(tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoPushId))
+        PopID();
+}
+
+bool    ImGui::TabItemButton(const char* label, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar;
+    if (tab_bar == NULL)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT_USER_ERROR(tab_bar != NULL, "Needs to be called between BeginTabBar() and EndTabBar()!");
+        return false;
+    }
+    return TabItemEx(tab_bar, label, NULL, flags | ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button | ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoReorder, NULL);
+}
+
+bool    ImGui::TabItemEx(ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar, const char* label, bool* p_open, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags, ImGuiWindow* docked_window)
+{
+    // Layout whole tab bar if not already done
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    if (tab_bar->WantLayout)
+    {
+        ImGuiNextItemData backup_next_item_data = g.NextItemData;
+        TabBarLayout(tab_bar);
+        g.NextItemData = backup_next_item_data;
+    }
+    ImGuiWindow* window = g.CurrentWindow;
+    if (window->SkipItems)
+        return false;
+
+    const ImGuiStyle& style = g.Style;
+    const ImGuiID id = TabBarCalcTabID(tab_bar, label, docked_window);
+
+    // If the user called us with *p_open == false, we early out and don't render.
+    // We make a call to ItemAdd() so that attempts to use a contextual popup menu with an implicit ID won't use an older ID.
+    IMGUI_TEST_ENGINE_ITEM_INFO(id, label, g.LastItemData.StatusFlags);
+    if (p_open && !*p_open)
+    {
+        ItemAdd(ImRect(), id, NULL, ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav | ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus);
+        return false;
+    }
+
+    IM_ASSERT(!p_open || !(flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button));
+    IM_ASSERT((flags & (ImGuiTabItemFlags_Leading | ImGuiTabItemFlags_Trailing)) != (ImGuiTabItemFlags_Leading | ImGuiTabItemFlags_Trailing)); // Can't use both Leading and Trailing
+
+    // Store into ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton, also honor ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton passed by user (although not documented)
+    if (flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton)
+        p_open = NULL;
+    else if (p_open == NULL)
+        flags |= ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseButton;
+
+    // Acquire tab data
+    ImGuiTabItem* tab = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, id);
+    bool tab_is_new = false;
+    if (tab == NULL)
+    {
+        tab_bar->Tabs.push_back(ImGuiTabItem());
+        tab = &tab_bar->Tabs.back();
+        tab->ID = id;
+        tab_bar->TabsAddedNew = tab_is_new = true;
+    }
+    tab_bar->LastTabItemIdx = (ImS16)tab_bar->Tabs.index_from_ptr(tab);
+
+    // Calculate tab contents size
+    ImVec2 size = TabItemCalcSize(label, p_open != NULL);
+    tab->RequestedWidth = -1.0f;
+    if (g.NextItemData.Flags & ImGuiNextItemDataFlags_HasWidth)
+        size.x = tab->RequestedWidth = g.NextItemData.Width;
+    if (tab_is_new)
+        tab->Width = size.x;
+    tab->ContentWidth = size.x;
+    tab->BeginOrder = tab_bar->TabsActiveCount++;
+
+    const bool tab_bar_appearing = (tab_bar->PrevFrameVisible + 1 < g.FrameCount);
+    const bool tab_bar_focused = (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_IsFocused) != 0;
+    const bool tab_appearing = (tab->LastFrameVisible + 1 < g.FrameCount);
+    const bool is_tab_button = (flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button) != 0;
+    tab->LastFrameVisible = g.FrameCount;
+    tab->Flags = flags;
+    tab->Window = docked_window;
+
+    // Append name with zero-terminator
+    // (regular tabs are permitted in a DockNode tab bar, but window tabs not permitted in a non-DockNode tab bar)
+    if (tab->Window != NULL)
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode);
+        tab->NameOffset = -1;
+    }
+    else
+    {
+        IM_ASSERT(tab->Window == NULL);
+        tab->NameOffset = (ImS32)tab_bar->TabsNames.size();
+        tab_bar->TabsNames.append(label, label + strlen(label) + 1); // Append name _with_ the zero-terminator.
+    }
+
+    // Update selected tab
+    if (!is_tab_button)
+    {
+        if (tab_appearing && (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_AutoSelectNewTabs) && tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId == 0)
+            if (!tab_bar_appearing || tab_bar->SelectedTabId == 0)
+                tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = id;  // New tabs gets activated
+        if ((flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SetSelected) && (tab_bar->SelectedTabId != id)) // _SetSelected can only be passed on explicit tab bar
+            tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = id;
+    }
+
+    // Lock visibility
+    // (Note: tab_contents_visible != tab_selected... because CTRL+TAB operations may preview some tabs without selecting them!)
+    bool tab_contents_visible = (tab_bar->VisibleTabId == id);
+    if (tab_contents_visible)
+        tab_bar->VisibleTabWasSubmitted = true;
+
+    // On the very first frame of a tab bar we let first tab contents be visible to minimize appearing glitches
+    if (!tab_contents_visible && tab_bar->SelectedTabId == 0 && tab_bar_appearing && docked_window == NULL)
+        if (tab_bar->Tabs.Size == 1 && !(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_AutoSelectNewTabs))
+            tab_contents_visible = true;
+
+    // Note that tab_is_new is not necessarily the same as tab_appearing! When a tab bar stops being submitted
+    // and then gets submitted again, the tabs will have 'tab_appearing=true' but 'tab_is_new=false'.
+    if (tab_appearing && (!tab_bar_appearing || tab_is_new))
+    {
+        ItemAdd(ImRect(), id, NULL, ImGuiItemFlags_NoNav | ImGuiItemFlags_NoNavDefaultFocus);
+        if (is_tab_button)
+            return false;
+        return tab_contents_visible;
+    }
+
+    if (tab_bar->SelectedTabId == id)
+        tab->LastFrameSelected = g.FrameCount;
+
+    // Backup current layout position
+    const ImVec2 backup_main_cursor_pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+
+    // Layout
+    const bool is_central_section = (tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_SectionMask_) == 0;
+    size.x = tab->Width;
+    if (is_central_section)
+        window->DC.CursorPos = tab_bar->BarRect.Min + ImVec2(IM_FLOOR(tab->Offset - tab_bar->ScrollingAnim), 0.0f);
+    else
+        window->DC.CursorPos = tab_bar->BarRect.Min + ImVec2(tab->Offset, 0.0f);
+    ImVec2 pos = window->DC.CursorPos;
+    ImRect bb(pos, pos + size);
+
+    // We don't have CPU clipping primitives to clip the CloseButton (until it becomes a texture), so need to add an extra draw call (temporary in the case of vertical animation)
+    const bool want_clip_rect = is_central_section && (bb.Min.x < tab_bar->ScrollingRectMinX || bb.Max.x > tab_bar->ScrollingRectMaxX);
+    if (want_clip_rect)
+        PushClipRect(ImVec2(ImMax(bb.Min.x, tab_bar->ScrollingRectMinX), bb.Min.y - 1), ImVec2(tab_bar->ScrollingRectMaxX, bb.Max.y), true);
+
+    ImVec2 backup_cursor_max_pos = window->DC.CursorMaxPos;
+    ItemSize(bb.GetSize(), style.FramePadding.y);
+    window->DC.CursorMaxPos = backup_cursor_max_pos;
+
+    if (!ItemAdd(bb, id))
+    {
+        if (want_clip_rect)
+            PopClipRect();
+        window->DC.CursorPos = backup_main_cursor_pos;
+        return tab_contents_visible;
+    }
+
+    // Click to Select a tab
+    ImGuiButtonFlags button_flags = ((is_tab_button ? ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClickRelease : ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnClick) | ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowItemOverlap);
+    if (g.DragDropActive && !g.DragDropPayload.IsDataType(IMGUI_PAYLOAD_TYPE_WINDOW)) // FIXME: May be an opt-in property of the payload to disable this
+        button_flags |= ImGuiButtonFlags_PressedOnDragDropHold;
+    bool hovered, held;
+    bool pressed = ButtonBehavior(bb, id, &hovered, &held, button_flags);
+    if (pressed && !is_tab_button)
+        tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = id;
+
+    // Transfer active id window so the active id is not owned by the dock host (as StartMouseMovingWindow()
+    // will only do it on the drag). This allows FocusWindow() to be more conservative in how it clears active id.
+    if (held && docked_window && g.ActiveId == id && g.ActiveIdIsJustActivated)
+        g.ActiveIdWindow = docked_window;
+
+    // Allow the close button to overlap unless we are dragging (in which case we don't want any overlapping tabs to be hovered)
+    if (g.ActiveId != id)
+        SetItemAllowOverlap();
+
+    // Drag and drop a single floating window node moves it
+    ImGuiDockNode* node = docked_window ? docked_window->DockNode : NULL;
+    const bool single_floating_window_node = node && node->IsFloatingNode() && (node->Windows.Size == 1);
+    if (held && single_floating_window_node && IsMouseDragging(0, 0.0f))
+    {
+        // Move
+        StartMouseMovingWindow(docked_window);
+    }
+    else if (held && !tab_appearing && IsMouseDragging(0))
+    {
+        // Drag and drop: re-order tabs
+        int drag_dir = 0;
+        float drag_distance_from_edge_x = 0.0f;
+        if (!g.DragDropActive && ((tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_Reorderable) || (docked_window != NULL)))
+        {
+            // While moving a tab it will jump on the other side of the mouse, so we also test for MouseDelta.x
+            if (g.IO.MouseDelta.x < 0.0f && g.IO.MousePos.x < bb.Min.x)
+            {
+                drag_dir = -1;
+                drag_distance_from_edge_x = bb.Min.x - g.IO.MousePos.x;
+                TabBarQueueReorderFromMousePos(tab_bar, tab, g.IO.MousePos);
+            }
+            else if (g.IO.MouseDelta.x > 0.0f && g.IO.MousePos.x > bb.Max.x)
+            {
+                drag_dir = +1;
+                drag_distance_from_edge_x = g.IO.MousePos.x - bb.Max.x;
+                TabBarQueueReorderFromMousePos(tab_bar, tab, g.IO.MousePos);
+            }
+        }
+
+        // Extract a Dockable window out of it's tab bar
+        if (docked_window != NULL && !(docked_window->Flags & ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove))
+        {
+            // We use a variable threshold to distinguish dragging tabs within a tab bar and extracting them out of the tab bar
+            bool undocking_tab = (g.DragDropActive && g.DragDropPayload.SourceId == id);
+            if (!undocking_tab) //&& (!g.IO.ConfigDockingWithShift || g.IO.KeyShift)
+            {
+                float threshold_base = g.FontSize;
+                float threshold_x = (threshold_base * 2.2f);
+                float threshold_y = (threshold_base * 1.5f) + ImClamp((ImFabs(g.IO.MouseDragMaxDistanceAbs[0].x) - threshold_base * 2.0f) * 0.20f, 0.0f, threshold_base * 4.0f);
+                //GetForegroundDrawList()->AddRect(ImVec2(bb.Min.x - threshold_x, bb.Min.y - threshold_y), ImVec2(bb.Max.x + threshold_x, bb.Max.y + threshold_y), IM_COL32_WHITE); // [DEBUG]
+
+                float distance_from_edge_y = ImMax(bb.Min.y - g.IO.MousePos.y, g.IO.MousePos.y - bb.Max.y);
+                if (distance_from_edge_y >= threshold_y)
+                    undocking_tab = true;
+                if (drag_distance_from_edge_x > threshold_x)
+                    if ((drag_dir < 0 && tab_bar->GetTabOrder(tab) == 0) || (drag_dir > 0 && tab_bar->GetTabOrder(tab) == tab_bar->Tabs.Size - 1))
+                        undocking_tab = true;
+            }
+
+            if (undocking_tab)
+            {
+                // Undock
+                // FIXME: refactor to share more code with e.g. StartMouseMovingWindow
+                DockContextQueueUndockWindow(&g, docked_window);
+                g.MovingWindow = docked_window;
+                SetActiveID(g.MovingWindow->MoveId, g.MovingWindow);
+                g.ActiveIdClickOffset -= g.MovingWindow->Pos - bb.Min;
+                g.ActiveIdNoClearOnFocusLoss = true;
+                SetActiveIdUsingNavAndKeys();
+            }
+        }
+    }
+
+#if 0
+    if (hovered && g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer > TOOLTIP_DELAY && bb.GetWidth() < tab->ContentWidth)
+    {
+        // Enlarge tab display when hovering
+        bb.Max.x = bb.Min.x + IM_FLOOR(ImLerp(bb.GetWidth(), tab->ContentWidth, ImSaturate((g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer - 0.40f) * 6.0f)));
+        display_draw_list = GetForegroundDrawList(window);
+        TabItemBackground(display_draw_list, bb, flags, GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TitleBgActive));
+    }
+#endif
+
+    // Render tab shape
+    ImDrawList* display_draw_list = window->DrawList;
+    const ImU32 tab_col = GetColorU32((held || hovered) ? ImGuiCol_TabHovered : tab_contents_visible ? (tab_bar_focused ? ImGuiCol_TabActive : ImGuiCol_TabUnfocusedActive) : (tab_bar_focused ? ImGuiCol_Tab : ImGuiCol_TabUnfocused));
+    TabItemBackground(display_draw_list, bb, flags, tab_col);
+    RenderNavHighlight(bb, id);
+
+    // Select with right mouse button. This is so the common idiom for context menu automatically highlight the current widget.
+    const bool hovered_unblocked = IsItemHovered(ImGuiHoveredFlags_AllowWhenBlockedByPopup);
+    if (hovered_unblocked && (IsMouseClicked(1) || IsMouseReleased(1)))
+        if (!is_tab_button)
+            tab_bar->NextSelectedTabId = id;
+
+    if (tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton)
+        flags |= ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton;
+
+    // Render tab label, process close button
+    const ImGuiID close_button_id = p_open ? GetIDWithSeed("#CLOSE", NULL, docked_window ? docked_window->ID : id) : 0;
+    bool just_closed;
+    bool text_clipped;
+    TabItemLabelAndCloseButton(display_draw_list, bb, flags, tab_bar->FramePadding, label, id, close_button_id, tab_contents_visible, &just_closed, &text_clipped);
+    if (just_closed && p_open != NULL)
+    {
+        *p_open = false;
+        TabBarCloseTab(tab_bar, tab);
+    }
+
+    // Forward Hovered state so IsItemHovered() after Begin() can work (even though we are technically hovering our parent)
+    // That state is copied to window->DockTabItemStatusFlags by our caller.
+    if (docked_window && (hovered || g.HoveredId == close_button_id))
+        g.LastItemData.StatusFlags |= ImGuiItemStatusFlags_HoveredWindow;
+
+    // Restore main window position so user can draw there
+    if (want_clip_rect)
+        PopClipRect();
+    window->DC.CursorPos = backup_main_cursor_pos;
+
+    // Tooltip
+    // (Won't work over the close button because ItemOverlap systems messes up with HoveredIdTimer-> seems ok)
+    // (We test IsItemHovered() to discard e.g. when another item is active or drag and drop over the tab bar, which g.HoveredId ignores)
+    // FIXME: This is a mess.
+    // FIXME: We may want disabled tab to still display the tooltip?
+    if (text_clipped && g.HoveredId == id && !held && g.HoveredIdNotActiveTimer > g.TooltipSlowDelay && IsItemHovered())
+        if (!(tab_bar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_NoTooltip) && !(tab->Flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoTooltip))
+            SetTooltip("%.*s", (int)(FindRenderedTextEnd(label) - label), label);
+
+    IM_ASSERT(!is_tab_button || !(tab_bar->SelectedTabId == tab->ID && is_tab_button)); // TabItemButton should not be selected
+    if (is_tab_button)
+        return pressed;
+    return tab_contents_visible;
+}
+
+// [Public] This is call is 100% optional but it allows to remove some one-frame glitches when a tab has been unexpectedly removed.
+// To use it to need to call the function SetTabItemClosed() between BeginTabBar() and EndTabBar().
+// Tabs closed by the close button will automatically be flagged to avoid this issue.
+void    ImGui::SetTabItemClosed(const char* label)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    bool is_within_manual_tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar && !(g.CurrentTabBar->Flags & ImGuiTabBarFlags_DockNode);
+    if (is_within_manual_tab_bar)
+    {
+        ImGuiTabBar* tab_bar = g.CurrentTabBar;
+        ImGuiID tab_id = TabBarCalcTabID(tab_bar, label, NULL);
+        if (ImGuiTabItem* tab = TabBarFindTabByID(tab_bar, tab_id))
+            tab->WantClose = true; // Will be processed by next call to TabBarLayout()
+    }
+    else if (ImGuiWindow* window = FindWindowByName(label))
+    {
+        if (window->DockIsActive)
+            if (ImGuiDockNode* node = window->DockNode)
+            {
+                ImGuiID tab_id = TabBarCalcTabID(node->TabBar, label, window);
+                TabBarRemoveTab(node->TabBar, tab_id);
+                window->DockTabWantClose = true;
+            }
+    }
+}
+
+ImVec2 ImGui::TabItemCalcSize(const char* label, bool has_close_button)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+    ImVec2 size = ImVec2(label_size.x + g.Style.FramePadding.x, label_size.y + g.Style.FramePadding.y * 2.0f);
+    if (has_close_button)
+        size.x += g.Style.FramePadding.x + (g.Style.ItemInnerSpacing.x + g.FontSize); // We use Y intentionally to fit the close button circle.
+    else
+        size.x += g.Style.FramePadding.x + 1.0f;
+    return ImVec2(ImMin(size.x, TabBarCalcMaxTabWidth()), size.y);
+}
+
+void ImGui::TabItemBackground(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& bb, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags, ImU32 col)
+{
+    // While rendering tabs, we trim 1 pixel off the top of our bounding box so they can fit within a regular frame height while looking "detached" from it.
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    const float width = bb.GetWidth();
+    IM_UNUSED(flags);
+    IM_ASSERT(width > 0.0f);
+    const float rounding = ImMax(0.0f, ImMin((flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Button) ? g.Style.FrameRounding : g.Style.TabRounding, width * 0.5f - 1.0f));
+    const float y1 = bb.Min.y + 1.0f;
+    const float y2 = bb.Max.y + ((flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_Preview) ? 0.0f : -1.0f);
+    draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bb.Min.x, y2));
+    draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(bb.Min.x + rounding, y1 + rounding), rounding, 6, 9);
+    draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(bb.Max.x - rounding, y1 + rounding), rounding, 9, 12);
+    draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bb.Max.x, y2));
+    draw_list->PathFillConvex(col);
+    if (g.Style.TabBorderSize > 0.0f)
+    {
+        draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bb.Min.x + 0.5f, y2));
+        draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(bb.Min.x + rounding + 0.5f, y1 + rounding + 0.5f), rounding, 6, 9);
+        draw_list->PathArcToFast(ImVec2(bb.Max.x - rounding - 0.5f, y1 + rounding + 0.5f), rounding, 9, 12);
+        draw_list->PathLineTo(ImVec2(bb.Max.x - 0.5f, y2));
+        draw_list->PathStroke(GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Border), 0, g.Style.TabBorderSize);
+    }
+}
+
+// Render text label (with custom clipping) + Unsaved Document marker + Close Button logic
+// We tend to lock style.FramePadding for a given tab-bar, hence the 'frame_padding' parameter.
+void ImGui::TabItemLabelAndCloseButton(ImDrawList* draw_list, const ImRect& bb, ImGuiTabItemFlags flags, ImVec2 frame_padding, const char* label, ImGuiID tab_id, ImGuiID close_button_id, bool is_contents_visible, bool* out_just_closed, bool* out_text_clipped)
+{
+    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
+    ImVec2 label_size = CalcTextSize(label, NULL, true);
+
+    if (out_just_closed)
+        *out_just_closed = false;
+    if (out_text_clipped)
+        *out_text_clipped = false;
+
+    if (bb.GetWidth() <= 1.0f)
+        return;
+
+    // In Style V2 we'll have full override of all colors per state (e.g. focused, selected)
+    // But right now if you want to alter text color of tabs this is what you need to do.
+#if 0
+    const float backup_alpha = g.Style.Alpha;
+    if (!is_contents_visible)
+        g.Style.Alpha *= 0.7f;
+#endif
+
+    // Render text label (with clipping + alpha gradient) + unsaved marker
+    ImRect text_pixel_clip_bb(bb.Min.x + frame_padding.x, bb.Min.y + frame_padding.y, bb.Max.x - frame_padding.x, bb.Max.y);
+    ImRect text_ellipsis_clip_bb = text_pixel_clip_bb;
+
+    // Return clipped state ignoring the close button
+    if (out_text_clipped)
+    {
+        *out_text_clipped = (text_ellipsis_clip_bb.Min.x + label_size.x) > text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x;
+        //draw_list->AddCircle(text_ellipsis_clip_bb.Min, 3.0f, *out_text_clipped ? IM_COL32(255, 0, 0, 255) : IM_COL32(0, 255, 0, 255));
+    }
+
+    const float button_sz = g.FontSize;
+    const ImVec2 button_pos(ImMax(bb.Min.x, bb.Max.x - frame_padding.x * 2.0f - button_sz), bb.Min.y);
+
+    // Close Button & Unsaved Marker
+    // We are relying on a subtle and confusing distinction between 'hovered' and 'g.HoveredId' which happens because we are using ImGuiButtonFlags_AllowOverlapMode + SetItemAllowOverlap()
+    //  'hovered' will be true when hovering the Tab but NOT when hovering the close button
+    //  'g.HoveredId==id' will be true when hovering the Tab including when hovering the close button
+    //  'g.ActiveId==close_button_id' will be true when we are holding on the close button, in which case both hovered booleans are false
+    bool close_button_pressed = false;
+    bool close_button_visible = false;
+    if (close_button_id != 0)
+        if (is_contents_visible || bb.GetWidth() >= ImMax(button_sz, g.Style.TabMinWidthForCloseButton))
+            if (g.HoveredId == tab_id || g.HoveredId == close_button_id || g.ActiveId == tab_id || g.ActiveId == close_button_id)
+                close_button_visible = true;
+    bool unsaved_marker_visible = (flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_UnsavedDocument) != 0 && (button_pos.x + button_sz <= bb.Max.x);
+
+    if (close_button_visible)
+    {
+        ImGuiLastItemData last_item_backup = g.LastItemData;
+        PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_FramePadding, frame_padding);
+        if (CloseButton(close_button_id, button_pos))
+            close_button_pressed = true;
+        PopStyleVar();
+        g.LastItemData = last_item_backup;
+
+        // Close with middle mouse button
+        if (!(flags & ImGuiTabItemFlags_NoCloseWithMiddleMouseButton) && IsMouseClicked(2))
+            close_button_pressed = true;
+    }
+    else if (unsaved_marker_visible)
+    {
+        const ImRect bullet_bb(button_pos, button_pos + ImVec2(button_sz, button_sz) + g.Style.FramePadding * 2.0f);
+        RenderBullet(draw_list, bullet_bb.GetCenter(), GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text));
+    }
+
+    // This is all rather complicated
+    // (the main idea is that because the close button only appears on hover, we don't want it to alter the ellipsis position)
+    // FIXME: if FramePadding is noticeably large, ellipsis_max_x will be wrong here (e.g. #3497), maybe for consistency that parameter of RenderTextEllipsis() shouldn't exist..
+    float ellipsis_max_x = close_button_visible ? text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x : bb.Max.x - 1.0f;
+    if (close_button_visible || unsaved_marker_visible)
+    {
+        text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x -= close_button_visible ? (button_sz) : (button_sz * 0.80f);
+        text_ellipsis_clip_bb.Max.x -= unsaved_marker_visible ? (button_sz * 0.80f) : 0.0f;
+        ellipsis_max_x = text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x;
+    }
+    RenderTextEllipsis(draw_list, text_ellipsis_clip_bb.Min, text_ellipsis_clip_bb.Max, text_pixel_clip_bb.Max.x, ellipsis_max_x, label, NULL, &label_size);
+
+#if 0
+    if (!is_contents_visible)
+        g.Style.Alpha = backup_alpha;
+#endif
+
+    if (out_just_closed)
+        *out_just_closed = close_button_pressed;
+}
+
+
+#endif // #ifndef IMGUI_DISABLE
diff --git a/lib/miniz.c b/dependencies/src/miniz.c
index 24a24f4..24a24f4 100644
--- a/lib/miniz.c
+++ b/dependencies/src/miniz.c
diff --git a/lib/stb_image.h b/dependencies/src/stb_image.h
index 76a9217..76a9217 100644
--- a/lib/stb_image.h
+++ b/dependencies/src/stb_image.h
diff --git a/lib/stb_image_resize.h b/dependencies/src/stb_image_resize.h
index ef9e6fe..ef9e6fe 100644
--- a/lib/stb_image_resize.h
+++ b/dependencies/src/stb_image_resize.h
diff --git a/lib/stb_image_write.h b/dependencies/src/stb_image_write.h
index e4b32ed..e4b32ed 100644
--- a/lib/stb_image_write.h
+++ b/dependencies/src/stb_image_write.h
diff --git a/lib/stb_truetype.h b/dependencies/src/stb_truetype.h
index bbf2284..bbf2284 100644
--- a/lib/stb_truetype.h
+++ b/dependencies/src/stb_truetype.h
diff --git a/ffmpeg_backend.cpp b/ffmpeg_backend.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index a54fb51..0000000
--- a/ffmpeg_backend.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,386 +0,0 @@
-extern "C" {
-#include <libavcodec/avcodec.h>
-#include <libavformat/avformat.h>
-#include <libavformat/avio.h>
-#include <libavutil/avutil.h>
-#include <libswscale/swscale.h>
-}
-
-// workaround to make libav error printing work
-#ifdef av_err2str
-#undef av_err2str
-#include <string>
-av_always_inline std::string av_err2string(int errnum) {
-    char str[AV_ERROR_MAX_STRING_SIZE];
-    return av_make_error_string(str, AV_ERROR_MAX_STRING_SIZE, errnum);
-}
-#define av_err2str(err) av_err2string(err).c_str()
-#endif  // av_err2str
-
-#include "ffmpeg_backend.h"
-
-bool32 AV_TryFrame(av_info *AV, int32 *err)
-{
-    *err = av_read_frame(AV->FileFormatContext, AV->VideoPacket);
-    if (*err >= 0 && AV->VideoPacket->stream_index != AV->VideoStream->index) {
-        av_packet_unref(AV->VideoPacket);
-        return 0;
-    }
-
-    if (*err < 0)
-        *err = avcodec_send_packet(AV->VideoCodecContext, AV->VideoPacket);
-    else {
-        *err = avcodec_send_packet(AV->VideoCodecContext, AV->VideoPacket);
-    }
-    av_packet_unref(AV->VideoPacket);
-
-    if (*err < 0)
-    {
-        fprintf(stderr, "Libav *error: (%s)\n", av_err2str(*err));
-        Assert(0);
-    }
-
-    while (*err >= 0) {
-        *err = avcodec_receive_frame(AV->VideoCodecContext, AV->VideoFrame);
-        if (*err == AVERROR_EOF) {
-            av_seek_frame(AV->FileFormatContext, -1, 0, AVSEEK_FLAG_BACKWARD);
-            *err = 0;
-            break;
-        } else if (*err == AVERROR(EAGAIN)) {
-            *err = 0;
-            break;
-        } else if (*err < 0) {
-            Assert(0);
-        }
-        return 1;
-    }
-    return 0;
-}
-
-bool32 AV_IsFileSupported(char *filename, bool32 *IsVideo)
-{
-    int32 err = 0;
-
-    // enum AVHWDeviceType type;
-    // while((type = av_hwdevice_iterate_types(type)) != AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_NONE)
-    //     printf("%s\n", av_hwdevice_get_type_name(type));
-
-    AVFormatContext *temp = avformat_alloc_context();
-    err = avformat_open_input(&temp, filename, NULL, NULL);;
-
-    if (err < 0) {
-            fprintf(stderr, "Libav error: (%s)\n", av_err2str(err));
-            avformat_free_context(temp);
-            return 0;
-    }
-
-    err = avformat_find_stream_info(temp,  NULL);
-
-    if (err < 0) {
-            fprintf(stderr, "Libav error: (%s)\n", av_err2str(err));
-            avformat_free_context(temp);
-            return 0;
-    }
-
-    for (uint32 i = 0; i < temp->nb_streams; i++)
-    {
-        AVCodecParameters *LocalCodecParameters = NULL;
-        LocalCodecParameters = temp->streams[i]->codecpar;
-        if (LocalCodecParameters->codec_type == AVMEDIA_TYPE_VIDEO) {
-            if (temp->streams[i]->duration > 1) {
-                *IsVideo = true;
-            }
-            avformat_free_context(temp);
-            return 1;
-        }
-    }
-
-    printf("Libav error: No video track found.");
-
-    return 0;
-}
-
-// Note that we can't get away with not having to keep track of the AV pointer
-// for undos by clearing/reallocing these contexts every frame since the state
-// of the PTS value is stored inside FileFormatContext.
-void AV_Dealloc(av_info *AV)
-{
-    Assert(AV);
-    avformat_free_context(AV->FileFormatContext);
-    avcodec_free_context(&AV->VideoCodecContext);
-    av_packet_free(&AV->VideoPacket);
-    av_frame_free(&AV->VideoFrame);
-};
-
-void AV_Init(block_source *Source, av_info *AV, memory *Memory)
-{
-    *AV = {};
-
-    int32 err = 0;
-
-    // enum AVHWDeviceType type;
-    // while((type = av_hwdevice_iterate_types(type)) != AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_NONE)
-    //     printf("%s\n", av_hwdevice_get_type_name(type));
-
-    // The two calls below theoretically shouldn't fail since we already tested them in IsFileSupported.
-
-    AV->FileFormatContext = avformat_alloc_context();
-    char *Path = (char *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Strings, Source->Path_String_Index);
-    err = avformat_open_input(&AV->FileFormatContext, Path, NULL, NULL);;
-    if (err < 0) {
-            fprintf(stderr, "Libav error: (%s)\n", av_err2str(err));
-            Assert(0);
-    }
-
-    err = avformat_find_stream_info(AV->FileFormatContext,  NULL);
-
-    if (err < 0) {
-            fprintf(stderr, "Libav error: (%s)\n", av_err2str(err));
-            Assert(0);
-    }
-
-    for (uint32 i = 0; i < AV->FileFormatContext->nb_streams; i++)
-    {
-        AVCodecParameters *LocalCodecParameters = NULL;
-        LocalCodecParameters = AV->FileFormatContext->streams[i]->codecpar;
-        if (LocalCodecParameters->codec_type == AVMEDIA_TYPE_VIDEO) {
-            AV->VideoCodecParameters = LocalCodecParameters;
-            AV->VideoStream =  AV->FileFormatContext->streams[i];
-            break;
-        }
-    }
-
-    if (!AV->VideoCodecParameters) {
-        printf("Libav error: No video track found.");
-    }
-
-    AV->VideoCodec = avcodec_find_decoder(AV->VideoCodecParameters->codec_id);
-
-    if (!AV->VideoCodec) {
-        printf("Libav error: Suitable decoder could not be identified for codec:\n");
-    }
-/*
-    int16 codecs = 0;
-    for (;;) {
-        AV->VideoHWConfig = avcodec_get_hw_config(AV->VideoCodec, codecs);
-        if (!AV->VideoHWConfig) {
-            printf("Libav error: Hardware acceleration not found for decoder %s.",
-                    AV->VideoCodec->name);
-            break;
-        }
-        AV->HWPixFormat = AV->VideoHWConfig->pix_fmt;
-        break;
-        // if (AV->VideoHWConfig->methods & AV_CODEC_HW_CONFIG_METHOD_HW_DEVICE_CTX &&
-        //     AV->VideoHWConfig->device_type == type) {
-        // }
-        codecs++;
-    }
-*/
-    AV->VideoCodecContext = avcodec_alloc_context3(AV->VideoCodec);
-    if (!AV->VideoCodecContext) {
-        printf("Libav error: Decoder context allocation failed.");
-    }
-    err = avcodec_parameters_to_context(AV->VideoCodecContext, AV->VideoCodecParameters);
-    if (err < 0) {
-            fprintf(stderr, "Libav error: (%s)\n", av_err2str(err));
-    }
-    avcodec_open2(AV->VideoCodecContext, AV->VideoCodec, NULL);
-    if (err < 0) {
-            fprintf(stderr, "Libav error: (%s)\n", av_err2str(err));
-    }
-
-    AV->VideoPacket = av_packet_alloc();
-    if (err < 0) {
-            fprintf(stderr, "Libav error: (%s)\n", av_err2str(err));
-    }
-    AV->VideoFrame = av_frame_alloc();
-    if (err < 0) {
-            fprintf(stderr, "Libav error: (%s)\n", av_err2str(err));
-    }
-
-    Source->BytesPerPixel = 4;
-    Source->FPS = (real32)AV->VideoStream->r_frame_rate.num / AV->VideoStream->r_frame_rate.den;
-    Source->Width = AV->VideoCodecContext->width;
-    Source->Height = AV->VideoCodecContext->height;
-};
-
-
-
-void AV_GetPTSAverage(block_source *Source, av_info *AV, int32 *err)
-{
-    // TODO(fox): This PTS average isn't exact and causes an occasional
-    // frame skip. See libav remarks in forum for more details.
-
-    if (AV->VideoStream->duration == 1) {
-        Source->AvgPTSPerFrame = 1;
-        return;
-    }
-
-    // TODO(fox): Handle footage under five seconds.
-    int16 TestAmount = 5;
-
-    real32 FPS = (real32)AV->VideoStream->r_frame_rate.num / AV->VideoStream->r_frame_rate.den;
-
-    int16 i = 0;
-    real32 AvgPTSPerSecond = 0;
-    for (;;) {
-        if (AV_TryFrame(AV, err)) {
-            if (i >= FPS * TestAmount) {
-                AvgPTSPerSecond = (real32)AV->VideoFrame->pts / TestAmount;
-                printf("frame: %i, pts: %li\n", i, AV->VideoFrame->pts);
-                break;
-            }
-            i++;
-            av_frame_unref(AV->VideoFrame);
-        }
-    }
-
-    Source->AvgPTSPerFrame = (real32)AvgPTSPerSecond / (int32)(FPS + 0.5f);
-    printf("Avg PTS per sec: %.06f, Avg PTS per frame: %.06f\n", AvgPTSPerSecond, Source->AvgPTSPerFrame);
-
-    av_seek_frame(AV->FileFormatContext, -1, 0, AVSEEK_FLAG_BACKWARD);
-}
-
-#if 0
-cached_bitmap * AV_LoadStill(block_source *Source, layer_bitmap_info *BitmapInfo, memory *Memory)
-{
-    av_info *AV = (av_info *)BitmapInfo->AVInfo;
-    int32 *CurrentlyRenderedFrame = &BitmapInfo->CurrentFrame;
-
-    int32 err = 0;
-
-    *CurrentlyRenderedFrame = 0;
-
-    av_seek_frame(AV->FileFormatContext, -1, 0, AVSEEK_FLAG_FRAME);
-
-    while (err >= 0) {
-        if (AV_TryFrame(AV, &err))
-        {
-            uint16 Width = Source->Width;
-            uint16 Height = Source->Height;
-            uint16 BytesPerPixel = Source->BytesPerPixel;
-            int32 Pitch = Width*BytesPerPixel;
-
-            cached_bitmap *Bitmap = Memory_RollingBitmap(Memory, Source, 0);
-            void *Buffer = Bitmap->Data;
-
-            int out_linesize[4] = { Pitch, Pitch, Pitch, Pitch };
-            uint8 *dst_data[4] = { (uint8 *)Buffer, (uint8 *)Buffer + Width*Height*BytesPerPixel,
-                                   (uint8 *)Buffer + Width*Height*BytesPerPixel*2, (uint8 *)Buffer + Width*Height*BytesPerPixel*3 };
-
-            // NOTE(fox): This function will be replaced in the future.
-            AV->RGBContext = sws_getContext(AV->VideoFrame->width, AV->VideoFrame->height, (AVPixelFormat)AV->VideoFrame->format,
-                                            AV->VideoFrame->width, AV->VideoFrame->height, AV_PIX_FMT_RGBA, SWS_BILINEAR,
-                                            NULL, NULL, NULL);
-
-            if(!AV->RGBContext) {
-                printf("Libav error: SwsContext creation failed.");
-            }
-
-            sws_scale(AV->RGBContext, AV->VideoFrame->data, AV->VideoFrame->linesize, 0, AV->VideoFrame->height,
-                      dst_data, out_linesize);
-
-            av_frame_unref(AV->VideoFrame);
-
-            Assert(BitmapInfo->BitmapBuffer);
-            return Bitmap;
-        }
-        av_frame_unref(AV->VideoFrame);
-    }
-    return 0;
-}
-
-cached_bitmap * AV_LoadVideoFrame(source *Source, layer_bitmap_info *BitmapInfo, memory *Memory, int32 TimelineFrame)
-{
-    av_info *AV = (av_info *)BitmapInfo->AVInfo;
-    int32 *CurrentlyRenderedFrame = &BitmapInfo->CurrentFrame;
-
-    int32 err = 0;
-
-    if (!Source->AvgPTSPerFrame) {
-        AV_GetPTSAverage(Source, AV, &err);
-    }
-    Assert(Source->AvgPTSPerFrame);
-
-    int32 FrameToSeek = TimelineFrame - BitmapInfo->FrameOffset;
-    if (*CurrentlyRenderedFrame == FrameToSeek || FrameToSeek < 0)
-        return 0;
-
-    // NOTE(fox): The decoder automatically advances to the next frame, so we
-    // don't need to call av_seek_frame under normal playback.
-    // This function only seeks to the nearest "keyframe."
-
-    if (*CurrentlyRenderedFrame != FrameToSeek - 1) {
-        int64 SeekSeconds = (int64)(FrameToSeek / (int32)(Source->FPS + 0.5f) * AV_TIME_BASE);
-        av_seek_frame(AV->FileFormatContext, -1, SeekSeconds, AVSEEK_FLAG_BACKWARD);
-        printf("Seek activated\n");
-    } else if (*CurrentlyRenderedFrame < 0) {
-        av_seek_frame(AV->FileFormatContext, -1, 0, AVSEEK_FLAG_BACKWARD);
-    }
-
-    *CurrentlyRenderedFrame = FrameToSeek;
-
-    int64 SeekPTS = (int64)(Source->AvgPTSPerFrame*FrameToSeek + 0.5f);
-
-    while (err >= 0) {
-        if (AV_TryFrame(AV, &err)) {
-
-            // The first frame that gets loaded isn't always the actual
-            // first frame, so we need to check until it's correct.
-            if (FrameToSeek == 0 && AV->VideoFrame->pts != AV->VideoStream->start_time) {
-                av_frame_unref(AV->VideoFrame);
-                // printf("NON-START: avg: %li, real pts: %li", SeekPTS, AV->VideoFrame->pts);
-                continue;
-            }
-
-            int64 Difference = AV->VideoFrame->pts - SeekPTS;
-            if (abs(Difference) < Source->AvgPTSPerFrame)
-            {
-                if (AV->PreviousPTS == -1) {
-                    AV->PreviousPTS = AV->VideoFrame->pts;
-                    // printf("avg: %li, real pts: %li, difference: %li\n", SeekPTS, AV->VideoFrame->pts, Difference);
-                } else {
-                    // printf("avg: %li, real pts: %li, difference: %li difference from last pts: %li\n", SeekPTS, AV->VideoFrame->pts, AV->VideoFrame->pts - SeekPTS, AV->VideoFrame->pts - AV->PreviousPTS);
-                    AV->PreviousPTS = AV->VideoFrame->pts;
-                }
-
-                uint16 Width = Source->Width;
-                uint16 Height = Source->Height;
-                uint16 BytesPerPixel = Source->BytesPerPixel;
-                int32 Pitch = Width*BytesPerPixel;
-
-                cached_bitmap *Bitmap = Memory_RollingBitmap(Memory, Source, FrameToSeek);
-                void *Buffer = Bitmap->Data;
-
-                int out_linesize[4] = { Pitch, Pitch, Pitch, Pitch };
-                uint8 *dst_data[4] = { (uint8 *)Buffer, (uint8 *)Buffer + Width*Height*BytesPerPixel,
-                                       (uint8 *)Buffer + Width*Height*BytesPerPixel*2, (uint8 *)Buffer + Width*Height*BytesPerPixel*3 };
-
-                // NOTE(fox): This function will be replaced in the future.
-                AV->RGBContext = sws_getContext(AV->VideoFrame->width, AV->VideoFrame->height, (AVPixelFormat)AV->VideoFrame->format,
-                                                AV->VideoFrame->width, AV->VideoFrame->height, AV_PIX_FMT_RGBA, SWS_BILINEAR,
-                                                NULL, NULL, NULL);
-
-                if(!AV->RGBContext) {
-                    printf("Libav error: SwsContext creation failed.");
-                }
-
-                sws_scale(AV->RGBContext, AV->VideoFrame->data, AV->VideoFrame->linesize, 0, AV->VideoFrame->height,
-                          dst_data, out_linesize);
-
-                av_frame_unref(AV->VideoFrame);
-
-                Assert(BitmapInfo->BitmapBuffer);
-                return Bitmap;
-            }
-            else
-            {
-                // If this gets printed when not seeking, a frame has been skipped!
-                // printf("FRAME SKIP: avg: %li, real pts: %li, difference: %li\n", SeekPTS, AV->VideoFrame->pts, Difference);
-            }
-            av_frame_unref(AV->VideoFrame);
-        }
-    }
-    return 0;
-}
-#endif
diff --git a/ffmpeg_backend.h b/ffmpeg_backend.h
deleted file mode 100644
index 62134fe..0000000
--- a/ffmpeg_backend.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-// NOTE(fox): Even though each layer has its own completely isolated AV
-// instance, it appears two layers with the same file still share something.
-// When the layers aren't at the same position in time, the playhead of one
-// layer gets misaligned every few frames and causes a manual seek back to the
-// position. Different files don't exhibit this behavior.
-
-struct av_info {
-    uint64 PreviousPTS = (uint64)-1; // PTS value of the previous frame, used to check timings.
-
-    AVCodecParameters *VideoCodecParameters;  // Used to supply info about the decoder.
-    const AVCodec* VideoCodec;
-    // const AVCodecHWConfig* VideoHWConfig;  // Haven't done enough research to know if HW decoding is already done by default or if we need these.
-    // AVPixelFormat HWPixFormat;
-    AVStream *VideoStream;    // Which stream, or channel, the video is in. Holds FPS info and is used to verify that the decoded packet belongs to this stream.
-    AVFormatContext *FileFormatContext; // Umbrella for everything else, seems to contain the playhead state
-    AVCodecContext *VideoCodecContext;
-    AVPacket *VideoPacket;
-    AVFrame *VideoFrame;
-    SwsContext *RGBContext;
-};
-
-static bool32 AV_TryFrame(av_info *AVPacket, int32 *err);     // Internal attempt to decode a frame. Typically run in a while loop until it returns true.
-
diff --git a/functions.h b/functions.h
deleted file mode 100644
index de0aaf9..0000000
--- a/functions.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
-static void Memory_Copy(uint8 *Address_Write, uint8 *Address_Read, uint64 Size);
-static void Arbitrary_Zero(uint8 *Address_Write, uint64 Size);
-static void Arbitrary_SwapData(memory *Memory, uint8 *Address_0, uint8 *Address_1, uint64 Size);
-static void Arbitrary_ShiftData(uint8 *Address_Start, uint8 *Address_End, uint64 ShiftAmount, int32 Direction);
-
-static void
-Render_Main(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, sorted_file Sorted, ui *UI, SDL_Window *window, GLuint textureID,
-    void *Data, void *OutputBuffer, render_type RenderType, rectangle RenderRegion);
-
-static void Effect_Curves_Init(block_effect *Effect, property_channel *Property);
-
-static v2 T_CompUVToLayerUV(layer_transforms T, uint32 FileWidth, uint32 FileHeight, uint32 SourceWidth, uint32 SourceHeight, v2 CompUV);
-static header_effect* Effect_EntryFromID(project_state *State, char *ID);
-
-void Effect_Curves_Sort(memory *Memory, block_effect *Effect, uint16 *SortedPointStart, uint16 Which);
-inline v2 Effect_V2(memory *Memory, block_effect *Effect, int Offset);
-
-static void Interact_Transform_Begin(project_data *File, memory *Memory, project_state *State, ImVec2 OGPos, sorted_comp_info *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer *SortedLayerArray);
-
-static v2 Transform_ScreenSpaceToLocal(layer_transforms T, uint32 FileWidth, uint32 FileHeight, uint32 SourceWidth, uint32 SourceHeight, ImVec2 CompPos, ImVec2 CompZoom, ImVec2 ViewportMin, ImVec2 Point);
-static ImVec2 Layer_LocalToScreenSpace(project_state *State, memory *Memory, block_layer *Layer, ui *UI, uint32 PrincipalCompIndex, v2 Point);
-
-static v2 TransformPoint(layer_transforms T, real32 Width, real32 Height, v2 Point);
-
-static void Layer_GetDimensions(memory *Memory, block_layer *Layer, int *Width, int *Height);
-
-static void * Memory_PushScratch(memory *Memory, uint64 Size);
-
-static void Memory_PopScratch(memory *Memory, uint64 Size);
-
-void Bitmap_SwapData(uint8 *Address_0, uint8 *Address_1, uint64 Size, uint16 BytesPerPixel);
-void GL_DeleteHWBuffer(gl_effect_layer *Test);
-
-void GL_UpdateTexture(gl_effect_layer *Test, void *Data, uint16 Width, uint16 Height, uint16 BytesPerPixel, bool32 Multisample);
-
-static bezier_point * Bezier_LookupAddress(memory *Memory, property_channel *Property, uint16 Index, bool32 AssertExists = 1);
-static void           Bezier_EvaluateValue(project_state *State, bezier_point *PointAddress, v2 *Pos, real32 Y_Increment);
-
-static void Transform_ApplyInteractive(interact_transform Interact, real32 *OutputX, real32 *OutputY, real32 *OutputRotation, real32 *OutputScale);
-
-static layer_transforms Layer_GetTransforms(block_layer *Layer);
-void GL_GenAndBindTexture(GLuint *GLTexture, int Width, int Height, int BytesPerPixel, void *BufferAddress);
-
-static real32 Bezier_SolveYForX(v2 Point_P0, v2 Point_P1, v2 Point_P2, v2 Point_P3, real32 X);
-
diff --git a/imgui b/imgui
deleted file mode 160000
-Subproject cb8ead1f7198924f97e52973d115e1d4eaeda2f
diff --git a/keyframes.cpp b/keyframes.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 2bcec9d..0000000
--- a/keyframes.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,399 +0,0 @@
-static keyframe*
-KeyframeLookup(property_channel *Property, int16 i) {
-    int16 b = i / MAX_KEYFRAMES_PER_BLOCK;
-    int16 k = i - b*MAX_KEYFRAMES_PER_BLOCK;
-    return &Property->KeyframeBlock[b]->Keyframe[k];
-}
-
-static keyframe*
-PushKeyframe(property_channel *Property) {
-    int16 i = Property->NumberOfTotalKeyframes;
-    int16 b = i / MAX_KEYFRAMES_PER_BLOCK;
-    int16 k = i - b*MAX_KEYFRAMES_PER_BLOCK;
-    return &Property->KeyframeBlock[b]->Keyframe[k];
-}
-
-static temp_keyframe_list
-GetSelectedKeyframes(project_data *File)
-{
-    temp_keyframe_list KeyframeList;
-    int z = 0;
-    for (int i = 0; i < File->NumberOfLayers; i++) {
-        for (int a = 0; a < AmountOf(File->Layer[i]->Property); a++) {
-            for (int l = 0; l < File->Layer[i]->Property[a].NumberOfTotalKeyframes; l++) {
-                keyframe *Keyframe = KeyframeLookup(&File->Layer[i]->Property[a], l);
-                if (Keyframe->IsSelected) {
-                    KeyframeList.SelectedKeyframe[z] = Keyframe;
-                    z++;
-                }
-            }
-        }
-    }
-    KeyframeList.Amount = z;
-    return KeyframeList;
-}
-
-static void
-SelectKeyframe(project_data *File, project_layer *Layer, property_channel *Property, keyframe *Keyframe)
-{
-    Layer->IsSelected = true;
-    File->NumberOfSelectedLayers++;
-    Property->NumberOfSelectedKeyframes++;
-    Keyframe->IsSelected = true;
-}
-
-static void
-DeselectKeyframe(project_data *File, project_layer *Layer, property_channel *Property, keyframe *Keyframe)
-{
-    Layer->IsSelected = true;
-    File->NumberOfSelectedLayers++;
-    Property->NumberOfSelectedKeyframes++;
-    Keyframe->IsSelected = true;
-}
-
-static void
-CheckKeyframeSort(property_channel *Property, int32 Increment, int32 b)
-{
-    /*
-    int32 i = KeyframeMemoryToIndex(Property, b);
-    if (Increment > 0) {
-        if (i+1 != Property->NumberOfTotalKeyframes) {
-            keyframe *CurrentKeyframe = KeyframeLookupIndex(Property, i);
-            keyframe *NextKeyframe = KeyframeLookupIndex(Property, i + 1);
-            if (NextKeyframe->FrameNumber < CurrentKeyframe->FrameNumber) {
-                uint16 Temp = Property->SortedIndex[i];
-                Property->SortedIndex[i] = Property->SortedIndex[i + 1];
-                Property->SortedIndex[i + 1] = Temp;
-            }
-        }
-    } else {
-        if (i != 0) {
-            keyframe *CurrentKeyframe = KeyframeLookupIndex(Property, i);
-            keyframe *LastKeyframe = KeyframeLookupIndex(Property, i - 1);
-            if (CurrentKeyframe->FrameNumber < LastKeyframe->FrameNumber) {
-                uint16 Temp = Property->SortedIndex[i];
-                Property->SortedIndex[i] = Property->SortedIndex[i - 1];
-                Property->SortedIndex[i - 1] = Temp;
-            }
-        }
-    }
-    */
-}
-
-
-static void
-ResortPropertyChannel(property_channel *Property) {
-    /*
-    for (int16 i = 0; i < Property->NumberOfTotalKeyframes; i++)
-    {
-        Property->SortedIndex[i] = i;
-    }
-    for (;;) {
-        int16 Swaps = 0;
-        for (int16 i = 0; i < Property->NumberOfTotalKeyframes - 1; i++)
-        {
-            keyframe *Keyframe = KeyframeLookupIndex(Property, i);
-            keyframe *NextKeyframe = KeyframeLookupIndex(Property, i + 1);
-            if (Keyframe->FrameNumber > NextKeyframe->FrameNumber) {
-                uint16 Temp = Property->SortedIndex[i];
-                Property->SortedIndex[i] = Property->SortedIndex[i + 1];
-                Property->SortedIndex[i + 1] = Temp;
-                Swaps++;
-            }
-        }
-        if (Swaps == 0)
-            break;
-    }
-    */
-}
-
-static void
-Keyframe_ShiftPointers(property_channel *Property, int16 Increment, int16 StopAt) {
-    if (Increment > 0) {
-        int16 i = Property->NumberOfTotalKeyframes - 1;
-        while (i >= StopAt) {
-            keyframe *CurrentKeyframe = KeyframeLookup(Property, i);
-            keyframe *NextKeyframe = KeyframeLookup(Property, i + Increment);
-            *NextKeyframe = *CurrentKeyframe;
-            i--;
-        }
-    } else  {
-        int16 i = StopAt;
-        while (i <= Property->NumberOfTotalKeyframes - 1) {
-            keyframe *CurrentKeyframe = KeyframeLookup(Property, i);
-            keyframe *NextKeyframe = KeyframeLookup(Property, i - Increment);
-            *CurrentKeyframe = *NextKeyframe;
-            i++;
-        }
-    }
-}
-
-
-static void
-DeleteSelectedKeyframes(project_data *File, memory *Memory)
-{
-    for (int i = 0; i < File->NumberOfLayers; i++) {
-        for (int a = 0; a < AmountOf(File->Layer[i]->Property); a++) {
-            property_channel *Property = &File->Layer[i]->Property[a];
-            for (int l = 0; l < Property->NumberOfTotalKeyframes; l++) {
-                keyframe *Keyframe = KeyframeLookup(Property, l);
-                if (Keyframe->IsSelected) {
-                    int16 ToShift = 1;
-                    bool32 Until = true;
-                    while (Until) {
-                        keyframe *KeyframeN = KeyframeLookup(Property, l + ToShift);
-                        if (KeyframeN->IsSelected) {
-                            ToShift += 1;
-                        } else {
-                            Until = false;
-                        }
-                    }
-                    Keyframe_ShiftPointers(Property, -ToShift, l);
-                }
-            }
-            ResortPropertyChannel(Property);
-        }
-    }
-}
-
-static void
-IncrementKeyframes(property_channel *Property, int16 Increment)
-{
-    /*
-    for (int i = 0; i < Property->NumberOfTotalKeyframes; i++) {
-        keyframe *Keyframe = KeyframeLookupIndex(Property, i);
-        Keyframe->FrameNumber += Increment;
-    }
-    */
-}
-
-static void
-IncrementKeyframesInLayer(project_layer *Layer, int16 Increment)
-{
-    for (int a = 0; a < AmountOf(Layer->Property); a++)
-        IncrementKeyframes(&Layer->Property[a], Increment);
-    for (int e = 0; e < Layer->NumberOfEffects; e++)
-        for (int a = 0; a < Layer->Effect[e]->NumberOfProperties; a++)
-            IncrementKeyframes(&Layer->Effect[e]->Property[a], Increment);
-}
-
-static void
-CreateKeyframeBlock(property_channel *, memory *);
-
-// dir 0 left, 1 right
-static void
-ClampKeyframeHandles(property_channel *Property, int16 b, int16 dir) {
-    if (dir == 0) {
-        if (b > 0) {
-            keyframe *Keyframe = KeyframeLookup(Property, b - 1);
-            keyframe *NextKeyframe = KeyframeLookup(Property, b);
-            real32 XSpan = NextKeyframe->FrameNumber - Keyframe->FrameNumber;
-            // TODO(fox): Fix this!
-#if WINDOWS
-            if (NextKeyframe->TangentLeft.x > XSpan)
-#else
-            if (abs(NextKeyframe->TangentLeft.x) > XSpan)
-#endif
-                NextKeyframe->TangentLeft.x = -XSpan;
-            if (NextKeyframe->TangentLeft.x > 0)
-                NextKeyframe->TangentLeft.x = 0;
-        }
-    }
-    if (dir == 1) {
-        if (b < Property->NumberOfTotalKeyframes - 1) {
-            keyframe *Keyframe = KeyframeLookup(Property, b);
-            keyframe *NextKeyframe = KeyframeLookup(Property, b + 1);
-            real32 XSpan = NextKeyframe->FrameNumber - Keyframe->FrameNumber;
-            if (Keyframe->TangentRight.x > XSpan)
-                Keyframe->TangentRight.x = XSpan;
-            if (Keyframe->TangentRight.x < 0)
-                Keyframe->TangentRight.x = 0;
-        }
-    }
-}
-
-static void
-ClampSurroundingKeyframeHandles(property_channel *Property, int16 b) {
-    ClampKeyframeHandles(Property, b, 0);
-    ClampKeyframeHandles(Property, b, 1);
-    if (b > 0) {
-        ClampKeyframeHandles(Property, b-1, 0);
-        ClampKeyframeHandles(Property, b-1, 1);
-    }
-    if (b < Property->NumberOfTotalKeyframes - 1) {
-        ClampKeyframeHandles(Property, b+1, 0);
-        ClampKeyframeHandles(Property, b+1, 1);
-    }
-}
-
-static uint32
-Keyframe_FindClosestIndex(property_channel *Property, int32 CurrentFrame, bool32 *Overlapping)
-{
-    if (Property->NumberOfTotalKeyframes == 0) {
-        *Overlapping = false;
-        return 0;
-    } else {
-        uint32 Index = Property->NumberOfTotalKeyframes;
-        for (;;) {
-            keyframe *PreviousKeyframe = KeyframeLookup(Property, Index - 1);
-            keyframe *NextKeyframe = KeyframeLookup(Property, Index + 1);
-            if (PreviousKeyframe->FrameNumber < CurrentFrame) {
-                if (NextKeyframe->FrameNumber >= CurrentFrame) {
-                    keyframe *CurrentKeyframe = KeyframeLookup(Property, Index);
-                    if (CurrentKeyframe->FrameNumber == CurrentFrame)  {
-                        *Overlapping = true;
-                        return Index;
-                    } else {
-                        if (CurrentKeyframe->FrameNumber > CurrentFrame) {
-                            *Overlapping = false;
-                            return Index;
-                        } else {
-                            *Overlapping = false;
-                            return Index + 1;
-                        }
-                    }
-                } else if (Index == Property->NumberOfTotalKeyframes) {
-                    *Overlapping = false;
-                    return Index;
-                } else {
-                    Index += (Property->NumberOfTotalKeyframes - Index) / 2;
-                }
-            // We can only progress from this first if statement if
-            // NextKeyframe is valid, so we need to check for these conditions.
-            } else if (Property->NumberOfTotalKeyframes == 1) {
-                keyframe *Keyframe = KeyframeLookup(Property, 0);
-                *Overlapping = (Keyframe->FrameNumber == CurrentFrame);
-                Index = 0;
-                return Index;
-            } else if (Property->NumberOfTotalKeyframes == 2) {
-                // We know we're smaller than index 1, so we just need to compare 0.
-                keyframe *FirstKeyframe = KeyframeLookup(Property, 0);
-                Index = (FirstKeyframe->FrameNumber > CurrentFrame) ? 0 : 1;
-                keyframe *Keyframe = KeyframeLookup(Property, Index);
-                *Overlapping = (Keyframe->FrameNumber == CurrentFrame);
-                return Index;
-            } else if (Index == 0) {
-                keyframe *CurrentKeyframe = KeyframeLookup(Property, Index);
-                if (CurrentKeyframe->FrameNumber == CurrentFrame)  {
-                    *Overlapping = true;
-                    return Index;
-                } else {
-                    Assert(0);
-                }
-            } else {
-                Index = Index / 2;
-            }
-        }
-    }
-}
-
-// NOTE(fox): Delete calls need to increment the total number before shifting!
-static void
-Keyframe_Delete(property_channel *Property, memory *Memory, uint32 Index)
-{
-    History_Entry_Commit(Memory, action_entry_default, "Delete keyframe");
-    keyframe *KeyframeIndex = KeyframeLookup(Property, Index);
-    History_Action_StoreData(Memory, KeyframeIndex, sizeof(keyframe));
-
-    History_Action_Change_Decrement(Memory, &Property->NumberOfTotalKeyframes, action_type_change_u16);
-    History_Action_Shift(Memory, action_type_shift_keyframe, Property, -1, Index);
-    Keyframe_ShiftPointers(Property, -1, Index);
-    History_Entry_End(Memory);
-}
-
-static void
-Keyframe_Insert(property_channel *Property, memory *Memory, int32 CurrentFrame, real32 Val)
-{
-    if (!(Property->NumberOfTotalKeyframes % MAX_KEYFRAMES_PER_BLOCK)) {
-        CreateKeyframeBlock(Property, Memory);
-    }
-    keyframe *Keyframe = NULL;
-    bool32 Overlapping = 0;
-    uint32 Index = Keyframe_FindClosestIndex(Property, CurrentFrame, &Overlapping);
-    Keyframe = KeyframeLookup(Property, Index);
-    if (Overlapping && Val == Keyframe->Value.f)
-        return;
-    if (!Overlapping) {
-        History_Entry_Commit(Memory, action_entry_default, "Insert keyframe");
-        if (Index != Property->NumberOfTotalKeyframes) {
-            History_Action_Shift(Memory, action_type_shift_keyframe, Property, 1, Index);
-            Keyframe_ShiftPointers(Property, 1, Index);
-        }
-
-        History_Action_Change_Increment(Memory, &Property->NumberOfTotalKeyframes, action_type_change_u16);
-        History_Action_Change(Memory, &Keyframe->FrameNumber, &Keyframe->FrameNumber, &CurrentFrame, action_type_change_i32);
-        History_Action_Change_Increment(Memory, &RandomGlobalIncrement, action_type_change_u32);
-        History_Action_Change(Memory, &Keyframe->ImguiID, &Keyframe->ImguiID, &RandomGlobalIncrement, action_type_change_u32);
-
-        Keyframe->Type = bezier;
-        Keyframe->TangentLeft = V2(-1, 0);
-        Keyframe->TangentRight = V2(1, 0);
-    } else {
-        History_Entry_Commit(Memory, action_entry_default, "Adjust keyframe value");
-    }
-    History_Action_Change(Memory, &Keyframe->Value.f, &Keyframe->Value.f, &Val, action_type_change_r32);
-    // Keyframe->Value.f = Val;
-
-    History_Entry_End(Memory);
-}
-
-
-static void
-CalculateKeyframesLinearly(uint16 CurrentFrame, struct property_channel *Property)
-{
-  keyframe *FirstKeyframe = KeyframeLookup(Property, 0);
-
-  keyframe *LastKeyframe = KeyframeLookup(Property, Property->NumberOfTotalKeyframes - 1);
-  if (Property->NumberOfTotalKeyframes == 0) {
-      // do nothing
-  }
-    // check if current frame is before first keyframe or after last
-  else if (Property->NumberOfTotalKeyframes == 1 ||
-          CurrentFrame < FirstKeyframe->FrameNumber) {
-          Property->CurrentValue = FirstKeyframe->Value;
-  }
-  else if (CurrentFrame > LastKeyframe->FrameNumber) {
-          Property->CurrentValue = LastKeyframe->Value;
-  }
-  else if (Property->NumberOfTotalKeyframes > 1) {
-    for (int i = 0; i < (Property->NumberOfTotalKeyframes - 1); i++) {
-      keyframe *Keyframe = KeyframeLookup(Property, i);
-      keyframe *NextKeyframe = KeyframeLookup(Property, i+1);
-      if (CurrentFrame >= Keyframe->FrameNumber &&
-          CurrentFrame <= NextKeyframe->FrameNumber)
-      {
-        real32 FakeVelocity = ((CurrentFrame - Keyframe->FrameNumber) /
-                              (NextKeyframe->FrameNumber -
-                              (real32)Keyframe->FrameNumber));
-         real32 t = FakeVelocity;
-        // real32 u = 1.0f - t;
-        // real32 w1 = u * u * u;
-        // real32 w2 = 3 * u * u * t;
-        // real32 w3 = 3 * u * t * t;
-        // real32 w4 = t * t * t;
-        real32 t2 = t * t;
-        real32 t3 = t2 * t;
-        real32 mt = 1-t;
-        real32 mt2 = mt * mt;
-        real32 mt3 = mt2 * mt;
-        if (Property->VarType == type_real ) {
-          real32 OldValue = Property->CurrentValue.f;
-          real32 CurrentVal = Keyframe->Value.f;
-          real32 CurrentTan = CurrentVal + Keyframe->TangentRight.y;
-          real32 NextVal = NextKeyframe->Value.f;
-          real32 NextTan = NextVal + NextKeyframe->TangentLeft.y;
-          // Property->CurrentValue.f = w1 * CurrentVal + w2 * CurrentTan + w3 * NextTan + w4 * NextVal;
-          Property->CurrentValue.f = CurrentVal*mt3 + 3*CurrentTan*mt2*t + 3*NextTan*mt*t2 + NextVal*t3;
-          //Property->CurrentValue.f = CurrentVal + ((NextVal - CurrentVal) * FakeVelocity);
-        }
-        else if (Property->VarType == type_color) {
-          v4 OldValue = Property->CurrentValue.col;
-          v4 CurrentVal = Keyframe->Value.col;
-          v4 NextVal = NextKeyframe->Value.col;
-          Property->CurrentValue.col = CurrentVal + ((NextVal - CurrentVal) * FakeVelocity);
-        }
-          break;
-      }
-    }
-  }
-}
diff --git a/layer.cpp b/layer.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index 5fb608e..0000000
--- a/layer.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,194 +0,0 @@
-static temp_layer_list
-FindSelectedLayerIndex(project_data *File, int16 NumberOfSelectedLayers)
-{
-    temp_layer_list List = {};
-    if (!NumberOfSelectedLayers) return List;
-    int16 i = 0;
-    int16 n = 0;
-    while (NumberOfSelectedLayers)
-    {
-        if (File->Layer[i]->IsSelected == true) {
-            List.LayerIndex[n] = i;
-            n++;
-            NumberOfSelectedLayers--;
-        }
-        i++;
-        Assert(i <= File->NumberOfLayers);
-    }
-    return List;
-}
-
-static transform_info
-CalculateTransforms(project_layer *Layer, comp_buffer *CompBuffer);
-
-static v2
-CompUVToLayerUV(project_layer *Layer, comp_buffer *CompBuffer, v2 CompUV)
-{
-    real32 X = CompUV.x*CompBuffer->Width;
-    real32 Y = CompUV.y*CompBuffer->Height;
-    transform_info T = CalculateTransforms(Layer, CompBuffer);
-    real32 StartVectorX = X - T.OriginX;
-    real32 StartVectorY = Y - T.OriginY;
-    real32 LayerU = (StartVectorX * T.XAxisPX) + (StartVectorY * T.XAxisPY);
-    real32 LayerV = (StartVectorX * T.YAxisPX) + (StartVectorY * T.YAxisPY);
-    return V2(LayerU, LayerV);
-}
-
-static void
-TransformsInteract(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, ui *UI, transforms_hotkey_interact Mode)
-{
-    if (UI->FocusedWindow == focus_timeline) {
-        temp_layer_list List = FindSelectedLayerIndex(File, State->NumberOfSelectedLayers);
-        for (int i = 0; i < State->NumberOfSelectedLayers; i++) {
-            uint16 Index = List.LayerIndex[i];
-            if (Mode == sliding_position) {
-                File->Layer[Index]->x.IsToggled ^= 1;
-                File->Layer[Index]->y.IsToggled ^= 1;
-            } else if (Mode == sliding_anchorpoint) {
-                File->Layer[Index]->ax.IsToggled ^= 1;
-                File->Layer[Index]->ay.IsToggled ^= 1;
-            } else if (Mode == sliding_rotation) {
-                File->Layer[Index]->rotation.IsToggled ^= 1;
-            } else if (Mode == sliding_scale) {
-                File->Layer[Index]->scale.IsToggled ^= 1;
-            }
-        }
-    } else if (UI->FocusedWindow == focus_viewport) {
-        // TODO(fox): Make multi-select possible!
-        project_layer *Layer = File->Layer[State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer];
-        if (Mode == sliding_position) {
-            State->InteractCache[0] = Layer->x.CurrentValue.f;
-            State->InteractCache[1] = Layer->y.CurrentValue.f;
-        } else if (Mode == sliding_anchorpoint) {
-            State->InteractCache[0] = Layer->x.CurrentValue.f;
-            State->InteractCache[1] = Layer->y.CurrentValue.f;
-            State->InteractCache[2] = Layer->ax.CurrentValue.f;
-            State->InteractCache[3] = Layer->ay.CurrentValue.f;
-        } else if (Mode == sliding_rotation) {
-            State->InteractCache[0] = Layer->rotation.CurrentValue.f;
-        } else if (Mode == sliding_scale) {
-            State->InteractCache[0] = Layer->scale.CurrentValue.f;
-        }
-        State->IsInteracting = true;
-        State->TransformsHotkeyInteract = Mode;
-    }
-}
-
-static void
-SelectLayer(project_layer *Layer, project_state *State, int32 i)
-{
-    Layer->IsSelected = true;
-    State->NumberOfSelectedLayers++;
-    State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer = i;
-}
-
-static void
-DuplicateLayer(project_data *File, project_state *State)
-{
-    project_layer *Layer = File->Layer[State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer];
-}
-
-static void
-DeselectAllLayers(project_data *File, project_state *State)
-{
-    temp_layer_list List = FindSelectedLayerIndex(File, State->NumberOfSelectedLayers);
-    for (int i = 0; i < State->NumberOfSelectedLayers; i++) {
-        uint16 Index = List.LayerIndex[i];
-        File->Layer[Index]->IsSelected = false;
-    }
-    State->NumberOfSelectedLayers = 0;
-    State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer = -1;
-}
-
-// NOTE(fox): We probably can't get away with being _this_ minimal about layer
-// indexing without making the code massively more complicated down the road;
-// keeping an Index value in the layer and just sorting every time the order
-// changes probably won't be much of a performance cost.
-
-static void
-MoveLayersByIncrement(project_data *File, project_state *State, int16 Increment)
-{
-    bool32 AllowMove = true;
-    temp_layer_list List = FindSelectedLayerIndex(File, State->NumberOfSelectedLayers);
-    // The layer list is always sorted, so we should be able to safely check
-    // whether the first and last layer on the list is the
-    // top/bottommost-indexed layer.
-    if ((List.LayerIndex[0] == 0) && (Increment < 0))
-        AllowMove = false;
-    if ((List.LayerIndex[State->NumberOfSelectedLayers - 1] == (File->NumberOfLayers - 1)) && (Increment > 0))
-        AllowMove = false;
-
-    if (AllowMove) {
-        int16 i = 0;
-        int16 c = 1;
-        if (Increment < 0) c = -1;
-        while (i < State->NumberOfSelectedLayers) {
-            // If selected layers are right next to each other, we have to sort
-            // them differently.
-            if ((Increment > 0) && (List.LayerIndex[i + c - 1] == (List.LayerIndex[i+c] - 1))) {
-                c++;
-                continue;
-            }
-            uint16 Index = List.LayerIndex[i];
-            project_layer TopmostLayer = *File->Layer[Index+c];
-            if (c <= 1) {
-                if (Index == State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer)
-                    State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer += Increment;
-                *File->Layer[Index + Increment] = *File->Layer[Index];
-                *File->Layer[Index] = TopmostLayer;
-                i++;
-            } else {
-                int p = c;
-                while (c > 0) {
-                    if (Index+c == State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer)
-                        State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer += Increment;
-                    // project_layer Temp = *File->Layer[Index+c];
-                    *File->Layer[Index+c] = *File->Layer[Index + c - 1];
-                    c--;
-                }
-                if (Index == State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer)
-                    State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer += Increment;
-                *File->Layer[Index] = TopmostLayer;
-                i += p;
-                c = 1;
-            }
-        }
-    }
-}
-
-/*
-
-static bool32
-TestSelectedLayer(project_state *State, uint16 *a, uint16 Index)
-{
-    bool32 Result = 0;
-    if (State->NumberOfSelectedLayers == 0)
-        return Result;
-    if (Index == 0) {
-        for (int i = 0; i < State->NumberOfSelectedLayers; i++) {
-            State->TempSelectedLayerSorted[i] = State->SelectedLayerIndex[i];
-        }
-        bool32 SwapMade = true;
-        while (SwapMade) {
-            int Swaps = 0;
-            for (int i = 0; i < State->NumberOfSelectedLayers - 1; i++) {
-                if (State->TempSelectedLayerSorted[i] > State->TempSelectedLayerSorted[i+1]) {
-                    int32 Temp = State->TempSelectedLayerSorted[i];
-                    State->TempSelectedLayerSorted[i] = State->TempSelectedLayerSorted[i+1];
-                    State->TempSelectedLayerSorted[i+1] = Temp;
-                    Swaps++;
-                }
-            }
-            if (!Swaps) SwapMade = false;
-        }
-    }
-    if (State->TempSelectedLayerSorted[*a] == Index) {
-        Result = 1;
-        *a += 1;
-    }
-    if (*a >= State->NumberOfSelectedLayers)
-        *a = 0;
-    return Result;
-}
-
-*/
diff --git a/misc/ffmpeg_config.sh b/misc/ffmpeg_config.sh
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9266a76
--- /dev/null
+++ b/misc/ffmpeg_config.sh
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+
+# The config flags for the minimal ffmpeg build used in the program, reducing
+# compile time and filesize by a decent amount.
+
+# Surprisingly we don't need to compile and link any other external libaries to
+# be able to decode most of the commonly-used file formats. We'll only start
+# needing them if we want the user to be able to export mp4s or webms directly
+# from the program.
+
+# All bitstream filters and are enabled.
+# All filters, devices, and HW acceleration are disabled.
+# All protocols aside from 'file' are disabled.
+# Encoders and muxers are TBD.
+
+VIDEO_DECODERS="av1,h263,h264,hevc,vp8,vp9"
+AUDIO_DECODERS="aac,ac3,flac,mp3,opus,pcm_s16le,pcm_dvd,pcm_bluray,wmalossless,wmav1"
+VIDEO_DEMUXERS="h261,h263,h264,hevc,matroska,mov,mpc,mpegps,mpegts,webm_dash_manifest"
+AUDIO_DEMUXERS="aac,avi,flac,mp3,ogg,pcm_s16le,wav"
+VIDEO_PARSERS="h261,h263,h264,hevc,mpeg4video,mpegvideo,vc1,vp8,vp9,webp"
+AUDIO_PARSERS="aac,flac,mpegaudio,opus,vorbis"
+
+./configure \
+    --disable-encoders \
+    --disable-decoders \
+    --disable-hwaccels \
+    --disable-muxers \
+    --disable-demuxers \
+    --disable-parsers \
+    --disable-protocols \
+    --disable-devices \
+    --disable-filters \
+    \
+    --enable-decoder=$VIDEO_DECODERS,$AUDIO_DECODERS \
+    --enable-parser=$VIDEO_PARSERS,$AUDIO_PARSERS \
+    --enable-demuxer=$VIDEO_DEMUXERS,$AUDIO_DEMUXERS \
+    --enable-protocol=file \
+    \
+    --enable-avcodec \
+    --enable-avformat \
+    --enable-avutil \
+    --enable-swscale \
+    --disable-avdevice \
+    --disable-network \
+    \
+    --enable-gpl \
+    --enable-static \
+    --disable-shared \
+    --disable-doc \
diff --git a/lib/mac_app_template/Contents/Info.plist b/misc/mac_app_template/Contents/Info.plist
index 106b07c..106b07c 100755
--- a/lib/mac_app_template/Contents/Info.plist
+++ b/misc/mac_app_template/Contents/Info.plist
diff --git a/lib/mac_app_template/Contents/Resources/real.icns b/misc/mac_app_template/Contents/Resources/real.icns
index 877283e..877283e 100755
--- a/lib/mac_app_template/Contents/Resources/real.icns
+++ b/misc/mac_app_template/Contents/Resources/real.icns
diff --git a/lib/mac_app_template/Contents/_CodeSignature/CodeResources b/misc/mac_app_template/Contents/_CodeSignature/CodeResources
index 6ef6ae3..6ef6ae3 100755
--- a/lib/mac_app_template/Contents/_CodeSignature/CodeResources
+++ b/misc/mac_app_template/Contents/_CodeSignature/CodeResources
diff --git a/my_imgui_widgets.cpp b/my_imgui_widgets.cpp
deleted file mode 100644
index f267f67..0000000
--- a/my_imgui_widgets.cpp
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3328 +0,0 @@
-#include "my_imgui_internal_widgets.h"
-#include "imgui_ops.h"
-
-#include "imgui_helper_widgets.cpp"
-
-static void
-ImGui_PropertyInteract_Slider(project_state *State, memory *Memory, property_channel *Property, ImGuiIO &io, ImVec2 WindowMinAbs, ImVec2 WindowMaxAbs, memory_table_list Table)
-{
-    if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) {
-        State->UpdateFrame = true;
-        ImGui_WarpMouse(State, io.MousePos, WindowMinAbs, WindowMaxAbs, 1);
-    }
-
-    if (ImGui::IsItemActivated()) {
-        State->Interact_Offset[0] = Property->CurrentValue;
-        State->Interact_Active = interact_type_slider_scrub;
-    }
-    if (ImGui::IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit()) {
-        // Pressing Esc while dragging a slider conveniently stops the input in
-        // ImGui, so all we need to do is set it back:
-        if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Escape)) {
-            Property->CurrentValue = State->Interact_Offset[0];
-        } else if (!Property->Keyframe_Count) {
-            History_Entry_Commit(Memory, "Property interact");
-            real32 Temp = Property->CurrentValue;
-            Property->CurrentValue = State->Interact_Offset[0];
-            History_Action_Swap(Memory, Table, sizeof(Property->CurrentValue), &Property->CurrentValue);
-            Property->CurrentValue = Temp;
-            History_Entry_End(Memory);
-        }
-        State->Interact_Active = interact_type_none;
-        State->UpdateFrame = true;
-        State->Warp_X = 0;
-        State->Warp_Y = 0;
-    }
-}
-
-static void
-ImGui_RGBAModeSwitch(project_state *State, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io, uint32 *Channel)
-{
-    char *Names[5] = {"All", "R", "G", "B", "A" };
-    if (ImGui::BeginListBox("RGB")) {
-        for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++) {
-            if (ImGui::Selectable(Names[i], (*Channel == i))) {
-                *Channel = i;
-            }
-        }
-        ImGui::EndListBox();
-    }
-}
-
-static void
-ImGui_CurvesUI(project_state *State, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io, block_effect *Effect, property_channel *PropertyStart, uint16 *SortedPointStart)
-{
-
-    real32 Padding = ImGui::GetFontSize()*6;
-    ImVec2 ViewportMin = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos() + Padding/6;
-    ImVec2 ViewportScale = ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail();
-    ViewportScale.y = ViewportScale.x = ViewportScale.x - Padding;  // square seems nice
-    ImVec2 ViewportMax = ViewportMin + ViewportScale;
-
-    ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList();
-    draw_list->AddRectFilled(ViewportMin, ViewportMax, IM_COL32(50, 50, 50, 255));
-    draw_list->AddRect(ViewportMin, ViewportMax, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 255));
-
-    real32 PointSize = 40;
-
-    ImU32 col = ImGui::GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
-    ImU32 col_light = ImGui::GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TextDisabled);
-
-    ImVec2 Point_ScreenPos[4];
-
-    // ocd?
-    draw_list->PushClipRect(ViewportMin + 2, ViewportMax - 2, true);
-
-    for (real32 i = 0.25; i < 1.0; i += 0.25) {
-        ImVec2 Horizontal = ViewportMin + ViewportScale * ImVec2(0, i);
-        ImVec2 Vertical = ViewportMin + ViewportScale * ImVec2(i, 0);
-        draw_list->AddLine(Horizontal, Horizontal + ImVec2(ViewportScale.x, 0), col_light, 1.0f);
-        draw_list->AddLine(Vertical, Vertical + ImVec2(0, ViewportScale.y), col_light, 1.0f);
-    }
-
-    draw_list->PopClipRect();
-
-
-#if 0
-    real32 LUT[5][256] = {};
-
-    for (int a = 0; a < 5; a++) {
-
-        int Num = (a == 0) ? *NumberOfPoints_Main : NumberOfPoints_Col->E[a-1];
-        v2 *CurvePoint = (v2 *)(FileEffectAddress + (a * (sizeof(v2) * 10)));
-
-        for (int i = 0; i < Num; i++) {
-            v2 Point_P1 = CurvePoint[i];
-            v2 Point_P2 = CurvePoint[i + 1];
-            v2 Point_P0 = (i != 0) ? CurvePoint[i - 1] : V2(0, 0);
-            v2 Point_P3 = (i != (Num - 2)) ? CurvePoint[i + 2] : V2(1, 1);
-
-            v2 m1 = (Point_P2 - Point_P0) / (2 * Tau);
-            v2 m2 = (Point_P3 - Point_P1) / (2 * Tau);
-
-            CurvesSolver(LUT[a], Point_P1, Point_P2, m1, m2, i);
-        }
-
-        if (CurvePoint[0].x > 0.0f) {
-           real32 Count_Start = 0;
-           real32 Count_End = (CurvePoint[0].x * 255);
-           real32 Count = Count_Start;
-           while (Count < Count_End) {
-               LUT[a][(uint32)Count] = LUT[a][(uint32)Count_End];
-               Count++;
-           }
-        }
-
-        if (CurvePoint[Num-1].x < 1.0f) {
-           real32 Count_Start = (CurvePoint[Num-1].x * 255) - 0.5;
-           real32 Count_End = 255;
-           real32 Count = Count_Start;
-           while (Count < Count_End) {
-               LUT[a][(uint32)Count] = LUT[a][(uint32)Count_Start];
-               Count++;
-           }
-        }
-
-        for (int i = 0; i < Num; i++) {
-            if (CurvePoint[i].y == 1.0f)
-                LUT[a][255] = 1.0f;
-        }
-    }
-#endif
-
-    real32 *Num = &Effect->ExtraData[0];
-    uint32 *SelectedChannel = (uint32 *)&Effect->ExtraData[5];
-
-    v2 Pos = {};
-    bool32 AddPoint = 0;
-
-    for (uint32 i = 0; i < *(uint32 *)Num; i += 1) {
-
-        v2 Point_P1 = Effect_V2(Memory, Effect, SortedPointStart[i]);
-        v2 Point_P2 = Effect_V2(Memory, Effect, SortedPointStart[i + 1]);
-        v2 Point_P0 = (i != 0) ? Effect_V2(Memory, Effect, SortedPointStart[i - 1]) : V2(0, 0);
-        v2 Point_P3 = (i != (*Num - 2)) ? Effect_V2(Memory, Effect, SortedPointStart[i + 2]) : V2(1, 1);
-
-        ImVec2 Point_P0_ScreenPos = ViewportMin + (ImVec2(Point_P0.x, 1.0f - Point_P0.y) * ViewportScale);
-        ImVec2 Point_P1_ScreenPos = ViewportMin + (ImVec2(Point_P1.x, 1.0f - Point_P1.y) * ViewportScale);
-        ImVec2 Point_P2_ScreenPos = ViewportMin + (ImVec2(Point_P2.x, 1.0f - Point_P2.y) * ViewportScale);
-        ImVec2 Point_P3_ScreenPos = ViewportMin + (ImVec2(Point_P3.x, 1.0f - Point_P3.y) * ViewportScale);
-
-        ImGui::PushID(&PropertyStart[SortedPointStart[i]]);
-
-        draw_list->AddNgon(Point_P1_ScreenPos, 2, col, 8, 5.0f);
-
-        ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(Point_P1_ScreenPos - ImVec2(PointSize/2, PointSize/2));
-        ImGui::InvisibleButton("##point", ImVec2(PointSize, PointSize), ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonLeft);
-
-        if (ImGui::IsItemHovered()) {
-            ImGui::SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor_Hand);
-        }
-
-        if (ImGui::IsItemActivated()) {
-            if (io.KeyCtrl && *Num != 2) {
-                property_channel *Property_X = Effect_Property(Memory, Effect, SortedPointStart[i]);
-                Property_X->Identifier = -1;
-                property_channel *Property_Y = Effect_Property(Memory, Effect, SortedPointStart[i]+1);
-                Property_Y->Identifier = -1;
-                Effect->ExtraData[*SelectedChannel]--;
-            }
-        }
-
-        if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) {
-            property_channel *Property_X = Effect_Property(Memory, Effect, SortedPointStart[i]);
-            property_channel *Property_Y = Effect_Property(Memory, Effect, SortedPointStart[i]+1);
-            v2 Point = V2(((io.MousePos - ViewportMin) / ViewportScale));
-            Point.y = 1.0f - Point.y;
-            Point.x = Normalize(Point.x);
-            Point.y = Normalize(Point.y);
-            Property_X->CurrentValue = Point.x;
-            Property_Y->CurrentValue = Point.y;
-            State->UpdateFrame = true;
-        }
-
-        if (i == (*Num - 1)) {
-            ImGui::PopID();
-            break;
-        }
-
-        // Conversion from Catmull-Rom curves to Bezier curves for display,
-        // referencing https://pomax.github.io/bezierinfo/#catmullconv
-
-        ImVec2 bez_m1 = (Point_P2_ScreenPos - Point_P0_ScreenPos) / (6 * Tau);
-        ImVec2 bez_m2 = (Point_P3_ScreenPos - Point_P1_ScreenPos) / (6 * Tau);
-
-        ImVec2 Point_Bez[4];
-        Point_Bez[0] = Point_P1_ScreenPos;
-        Point_Bez[1] = Point_P1_ScreenPos + bez_m1;
-        Point_Bez[2] = Point_P2_ScreenPos - bez_m2;
-        Point_Bez[3] = Point_P2_ScreenPos;
-
-        draw_list->PushClipRect(ViewportMin, ViewportMax, true);
-
-        draw_list->AddBezierCubic(Point_Bez[0], Point_Bez[1], Point_Bez[2], Point_Bez[3], col, 1.0f, 0);
-
-        if (ImGui::BezierInteractive(Point_Bez[0], Point_Bez[1], Point_Bez[2], Point_Bez[3]) &&
-            io.MousePos.x > (Point_P1_ScreenPos.x + PointSize/2) &&
-            io.MousePos.x < (Point_P2_ScreenPos.x - PointSize/2))
-        {
-            ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(io.MousePos - ImVec2(5,5));
-            ImGui::Button("pointclick", ImVec2(10, 10));
-            if (ImGui::IsItemActivated()) {
-                Pos = V2(((io.MousePos - ViewportMin) / ViewportScale));
-                Pos.y = 1.0f - Pos.y;
-                Pos.x = Normalize(Pos.x);
-                Pos.y = Normalize(Pos.y);
-                AddPoint = true;
-            }
-        }
-
-        if (i == 0)
-            draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(ViewportMin.x, Point_Bez[0].y), Point_Bez[0], col, 1.0f);
-        if (i == (*Num - 2))
-            draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(ViewportMax.x, Point_Bez[3].y), Point_Bez[3], col, 1.0f);
-
-        draw_list->PopClipRect();
-
-#if 0
-        for (int x = 0; x < 256; x++) {
-            v2 Point = V2((real32)x/256, LUT[*ChannelIndex][x]);
-            ImVec2 Point_ScreenPos = ViewportMin + (ImVec2(Point.x, 1.0f - Point.y) * ViewportScale);
-            draw_list->AddNgon(Point_ScreenPos, 1, col, 8, 5.0f);
-        }
-#endif
-
-        draw_list->AddNgon(Point_P1_ScreenPos, 2, col, 8, 5.0f);
-
-
-        ImGui::PopID();
-    }
-
-
-    if (AddPoint) {
-        int x = 0;
-        for (;;) {
-            property_channel *Property_X = Effect_Property(Memory, Effect, x);
-            if (Property_X->Identifier == -1) {
-                Property_X->CurrentValue = Pos.x;
-                Property_X->Identifier = *SelectedChannel;
-                property_channel *Property_Y = Effect_Property(Memory, Effect, x+1);
-                Assert(Property_Y->Identifier == -1);
-                Property_Y->CurrentValue = Pos.y;
-                Property_Y->Identifier = *SelectedChannel;
-                x = MAX_PROPERTIES_PER_EFFECT;
-            }
-            if (x > MAX_PROPERTIES_PER_EFFECT)
-                break;
-            x++;
-        }
-        Effect->ExtraData[*SelectedChannel]++;
-        AddPoint = false;
-    }
-
-    // ImVec2 ButtonPos = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
-    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(ViewportMin);
-
-    ImGui::InvisibleButton("canvas", ViewportScale, ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonLeft | ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonRight);
-    bool32 IsHovered = ImGui::IsItemHovered();
-    bool32 IsActive = ImGui::IsItemActive();
-    bool32 IsActivated = ImGui::IsItemActivated();
-    bool32 IsDeactivated = ImGui::IsItemDeactivated();
-
-    ImVec2 EndPos = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
-
-    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(ViewportMin + ImVec2(ViewportScale.x + 20, 0));
-    ImGui_RGBAModeSwitch(State, Memory, io, SelectedChannel);
-
-    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(EndPos);
-}
-
-static void
-ImGui_PropertiesPanel(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io,
-                      sorted_comp_info *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer *SortedLayerArray,
-                      sorted_property_info *SortedPropertyInfo, uint16 *SortedPropertyArray)
-{
-    bool32 Display = 1;
-    block_layer *Layer = NULL;
-    sorted_layer *SortedLayer = NULL;
-    if (State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer > -1) {
-        Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer, 0);
-        sorted_comp_info SortedCompInfo = SortedCompArray[Layer->Block_Composition_Index];
-        sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo = Layer_GetSortedArray(SortedLayerArray, &SortedCompInfo, Layer->Block_Composition_Index);
-        SortedLayer = &SortedLayerInfo[State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer];
-        if (!Layer->Occupied)
-            Display = 0;
-    } else {
-        Display = 0;
-    }
-    if (Display) {
-        block_string *String = (block_string *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Strings, Layer->Block_String_Index);
-        char buf[256];
-        sprintf(buf, "Properties: %s###Properties", String->Char);
-        ImGui::Begin(buf);
-        if (ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows))
-            State->FocusedWindow = focus_properties;
-        ImVec2 WindowSize = ImGui::GetWindowSize();
-        ImVec2 WindowMinAbs = ImGui::GetWindowPos();
-        ImVec2 WindowMaxAbs = WindowMinAbs + WindowSize;
-        ImGui::Text("Transform");
-
-        sorted_property_info *InfoLocation = SortedPropertyInfo + SortedLayer->SortedPropertyStart;
-        uint16 *ArrayLocation = SortedPropertyArray + SortedLayer->SortedKeyframeStart;
-        int h = 0, c = 0, p = 0;
-        property_channel *Property = NULL;
-        block_effect *Effect = NULL;
-        while (Layer_LoopChannels(State, Memory, &InfoLocation, &ArrayLocation, Layer, &Property, &Effect, &h, &c, &p))
-        {
-            ImGui::PushID(Property);
-            if ((h - 1) < AmountOf(Layer->Property) && c == 0) {
-                if (ImGui::Button("K")) {
-                    Property_AddKeyframe(Memory, F_Layers, Property, State->Frame_Current, ArrayLocation);
-                }
-                ImGui::SameLine();
-#if DEBUG
-                char size[64];
-                sprintf(size, "%s, %i", DefaultChannel[h-1], Property->Keyframe_Count);
-                char *Name = size;
-#else
-                char *Name = DefaultChannel[h-1];
-#endif
-                ImGui::DragScalar(Name, ImGuiDataType_Float, &Property->CurrentValue, Property->ScrubVal, &Property->MinVal, &Property->MaxVal, "%f");
-                ImGui_PropertyInteract_Slider(State, Memory, Property, io, WindowMinAbs, WindowMaxAbs, F_Layers);
-            } else {
-                Assert(Effect);
-                header_effect *EffectHeader = Effect_EntryFromID(State, Effect->ID);
-                header_property ChannelHeader = State->Property[EffectHeader->PropertyStartIndex + c - 1];
-#if DEBUG
-                char size[64];
-                sprintf(size, "%s, %i", ChannelHeader.Name, Property->Keyframe_Count);
-                char *Name = size;
-#else
-                char *Name = ChannelHeader.Name;
-#endif
-                if ((c - 1) == 0) {
-                    ImGui::PushID(Effect->Index);
-#if DEBUG
-                    ImGui::Text("%s, %i", EffectHeader->Name, Effect->Index);
-#else
-                    ImGui::Text(EffectHeader->Name);
-#endif
-                    ImGui::PopID();
-                }
-                if (EffectHeader->DisplayType == effect_display_type_standard) {
-                    if (ChannelHeader.DisplayType == property_display_type_standard) {
-                        if (ImGui::Button("K")) {
-                            Property_AddKeyframe(Memory, F_Properties, Property, State->Frame_Current, ArrayLocation);
-                        }
-                        ImGui::SameLine();
-                        ImGui::DragScalar(Name, ImGuiDataType_Float, &Property->CurrentValue, Property->ScrubVal, &Property->MinVal, &Property->MaxVal, "%f");
-                        ImGui_PropertyInteract_Slider(State, Memory, Property, io, WindowMinAbs, WindowMaxAbs, F_Properties);
-                    } else if (ChannelHeader.DisplayType == property_display_type_color) {
-                        if (ImGui::Button("K")) {
-                            Property_AddKeyframe(Memory, F_Properties, Property, State->Frame_Current, ArrayLocation);
-                        }
-                        ImGui::SameLine();
-                        ImGui::DragScalar(Name, ImGuiDataType_Float, &Property->CurrentValue, Property->ScrubVal, &Property->MinVal, &Property->MaxVal, "%f");
-                        ImGui_PropertyInteract_Slider(State, Memory, Property, io, WindowMinAbs, WindowMaxAbs, F_Properties);
-                        // if (c == 3) {
-                        //     ImGui::ColorEdit4("col", Col, ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float);
-                        // }
-                    } else {
-                        Assert(0);
-                    }
-                } else if (EffectHeader->DisplayType == effect_display_type_curves) {
-#if DEBUG
-                    ImGui::Text("Points (RGBA): %.02f, Points (indiv): %.02f, %.02f, %.02f, %.02f", Effect->ExtraData[0],
-                                Effect->ExtraData[1],  Effect->ExtraData[2], Effect->ExtraData[3], Effect->ExtraData[4]);
-#endif
-                    if (Property->Identifier == -1) {
-                        Effect_Curves_Init(Effect, Property);
-                    }
-                    uint16 SortedPointStart[MAX_PROPERTIES_PER_EFFECT/5];
-                    uint32 VisibleChannel = *(uint32 *)&Effect->ExtraData[5];
-                    Effect_Curves_Sort(Memory, Effect, SortedPointStart, VisibleChannel);
-                    ImGui_CurvesUI(State, Memory, io, Effect, Property, SortedPointStart);
-                    c = EffectHeader->Property_Count; // Causes this loop to only iterate once.
-                } else if (EffectHeader->DisplayType == effect_display_type_levels) {
-                    ImGui::Text("Levels!");
-                    uint32 VisibleChannel = *(uint32 *)&Effect->ExtraData[0];
-                    real32 *P_Left = 0, *P_Mid = 0, *P_Right = 0;
-                    if (VisibleChannel == 0) {
-                        property_channel *Property0 = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect->Block_Property_Index[0]);
-                        property_channel *Property1 = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect->Block_Property_Index[1]);
-                        property_channel *Property2 = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect->Block_Property_Index[2]);
-                        P_Left =  &Property0->CurrentValue;
-                        P_Mid =   &Property1->CurrentValue;
-                        P_Right = &Property2->CurrentValue;
-                    } else {
-                        property_channel *Property0 = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect->Block_Property_Index[3+(VisibleChannel-1)]);
-                        property_channel *Property1 = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect->Block_Property_Index[7+(VisibleChannel-1)]);
-                        property_channel *Property2 = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect->Block_Property_Index[11+(VisibleChannel-1)]);
-                        P_Left =  &Property0->CurrentValue;
-                        P_Mid =   &Property1->CurrentValue;
-                        P_Right = &Property2->CurrentValue;
-                    }
-                    ImGui::SliderLevels("1", "2,", "3", (void *)P_Mid, (void *)P_Left, (void *)P_Right);
-                    if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) {
-                        State->UpdateFrame = true;
-                    }
-                    ImGui_RGBAModeSwitch(State, Memory, io, (uint32 *)&Effect->ExtraData[0]);
-                    c = EffectHeader->Property_Count;
-                } else {
-                    Assert(0);
-                }
-            }
-            ImGui::PopID();
-        }
-#if 0
-        for (int i = 0; i < Layer->Block_Effect_Count; i++)
-        {
-            block_effect Effect = *(block_effect *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Effects, Layer->Block_Effect_Index[i]);
-            header_effect *EffectHeader = Effect_EntryFromID(State, Effect.ID);
-            ImGui::PushID(Effect.Index);
-            ImGui::Text(EffectHeader->Name);
-            ImGui::PopID();
-                for (int c = 0; c < EffectHeader->Property_Count; c++) {
-                    header_property ChannelHeader = State->Property[EffectHeader->PropertyStartIndex + c];
-                    property_channel *Property = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect.Block_Property_Index[c]);
-                    ImGui::PushID(Property);
-                    // NOTE(fox): We might have to make a system for processing create/delete
-                    // calls after the UI if things like the Count get incremented and invalid
-                    // data is read.
-                    if (ChannelHeader.DisplayType == property_display_type_standard) {
-                        if (ImGui::Button("K")) {
-                            uint16 *ArrayLocation = Property_GetSortedArray(SortedPropertyArray, State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer, h);
-                            Property_AddKeyframe(Memory, Property, State->Frame_Current, ArrayLocation);
-                        }
-                        ImGui::SameLine();
-                        ImGui::DragScalar(ChannelHeader.Name, ImGuiDataType_Float, &Property->CurrentValue, Property->ScrubVal, &Property->MinVal, &Property->MaxVal, "%f");
-                        ImGui_PropertyInteract_Slider(State, Memory, Property, io, WindowMinAbs, WindowMaxAbs, F_Properties);
-                    } else if (ChannelHeader.DisplayType == property_display_type_color) {
-                        header_property LastHeader = State->Property[EffectHeader->PropertyStartIndex + c + 3];
-                        Assert(ChannelHeader.DisplayType == property_display_type_color);
-                        property_channel *Property1 = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect.Block_Property_Index[c+1]);
-                        property_channel *Property2 = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect.Block_Property_Index[c+2]);
-                        property_channel *Property3 = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect.Block_Property_Index[c+3]);
-                        real32 Color[4] = { Property->CurrentValue, Property1->CurrentValue, Property2->CurrentValue, Property3->CurrentValue };
-                        if (ImGui::ColorEdit4("color", (real32 *)Color, ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float | ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoInputs)) {
-                        }
-                        if (ImGui::IsItemActivated()) {
-                            // State->Interact_Offset[0] = Property->CurrentValue;
-                            // State->Interact_Offset[1] = Property1->CurrentValue;
-                            // State->Interact_Offset[2] = Property2->CurrentValue;
-                            // State->Interact_Offset[3] = Property3->CurrentValue;
-                            State->Interact_Active = interact_type_slider_scrub;
-                        }
-                        if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) {
-                            State->UpdateFrame = true;
-                            Property->CurrentValue  = Color[0];
-                            Property1->CurrentValue = Color[1];
-                            Property2->CurrentValue = Color[2];
-                            Property3->CurrentValue = Color[3];
-                        }
-
-                        if (ImGui::IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit()) {
-                            if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Escape)) {
-                                Property->CurrentValue = State->Interact_Offset[0];
-                            } else if (!Property->Keyframe_Count) {
-                                // History_Entry_Commit(Memory, "Property interact");
-                                // real32 Temp = Property->CurrentValue;
-                                // Property->CurrentValue = State->Interact_Offset[0];
-                                // History_Action_Swap(Memory, Table, sizeof(Property->CurrentValue), &Property->CurrentValue);
-                                // Property->CurrentValue = Temp;
-                                // History_Entry_End(Memory);
-                            }
-                            State->Interact_Active = interact_type_none;
-                            State->UpdateFrame = true;
-                        }
-                        c += 3;
-                    } else if (ChannelHeader.DisplayType == property_display_type_blendmode) {
-                        uint32 *item_current_idx = (uint32 *)&(Property->CurrentValue); // Here we store our selection data as an index.
-                        if (ImGui::BeginListBox("Blend mode"))
-                        {
-                            for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(BlendmodeNames); n++)
-                            {
-                                const bool is_selected = (*item_current_idx == n);
-                                if (ImGui::Selectable(BlendmodeNames[n], is_selected)) {
-                                    *item_current_idx = n;
-                                    State->UpdateFrame = true;
-                                }
-
-                                // Set the initial focus when opening the combo (scrolling + keyboard navigation focus)
-                                if (is_selected)
-                                    ImGui::SetItemDefaultFocus();
-                            }
-                            ImGui::EndListBox();
-                        }
-                    } else {
-                        Assert(0);
-                    }
-                    ImGui::PopID();
-                }
-            } else {
-                Assert(0);
-            }
-        }
-#endif
-        if (Layer->IsPrecomp) {
-            block_composition *Comp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
-            ImGui::DragScalar("Width", ImGuiDataType_U16, &Comp->Width);
-            if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) {
-                State->UpdateFrame = true;
-            }
-            ImGui::DragScalar("Height", ImGuiDataType_U16, &Comp->Height);
-            if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) {
-                State->UpdateFrame = true;
-            }
-        }
-        ImGui::End();
-    } else {
-        ImGui::Begin("Properties: empty###Properties");
-        if (ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows))
-            State->FocusedWindow = focus_properties;
-        ImGui::End();
-    }
-}
-
-#if DEBUG
-static void
-ImGui_DebugMemoryViewer(memory *Memory, project_state *State)
-{
-    ImGui::Begin("Memory viewer");
-
-    ImVec2 ViewportMin = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
-    ImVec2 ViewportScale = ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail();
-    ImVec2 ViewportMax = ImVec2(ViewportMin.x + ViewportScale.x, ViewportMin.y + ViewportScale.y);
-
-    // ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, ImVec2(0, 0));
-    // ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(0, 0));
-
-    cache_entry *EntryArray = State->Render.Entry;
-    char *Type[4] = { "unassigned", "comp", "source", "layer" };
-    uint32 Blocks_Total = Memory->Slot[B_CachedBitmaps].Size / BitmapBlockSize;
-    uint32 PerRow = sqrt(Blocks_Total);
-    real32 BlockSize = ViewportScale.x / PerRow;
-    for (int c = 0; c < Memory->EntryCount; c++) {
-        ImGui::PushID(c);
-        cache_entry Entry = EntryArray[c];
-        uint32 BlockSpan;
-        if (c+1 != Memory->EntryCount) {
-            cache_entry NextEntry = EntryArray[c+1];
-            BlockSpan = NextEntry.Block_StartIndex - Entry.Block_StartIndex;
-        } else {
-            BlockSpan = 1;
-        }
-        ImVec2 ButtonPos = ViewportMin + ImVec2((Entry.Block_StartIndex % PerRow) * BlockSize, BlockSize * (Entry.Block_StartIndex / PerRow));
-        ImVec2 ButtonSize = ImVec2(BlockSpan * BlockSize, BlockSize);
-        ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(ButtonPos);
-        char size[20];
-        sprintf(size, "%lu##uimemoryblock", EntryArray[c].CycleTime);
-        if (ButtonPos.x + ButtonSize.x > ViewportMax.x) {
-            real32 ButtonSizeSplit = ViewportMax.x - ButtonPos.x;
-            ImGui::Button(size, ImVec2(ButtonSizeSplit, ButtonSize.y));
-            ImVec2 ButtonPos2 = ImVec2(ViewportMin.x, ButtonPos.y + BlockSize);
-            ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(ButtonPos2);
-            ImGui::Button("##uimemoryblockpad", ImVec2(ButtonSize.x - ButtonSizeSplit, ButtonSize.y));
-        } else {
-            ImGui::Button(size, ButtonSize);
-        }
-        if (ImGui::IsItemHovered()) {
-            ImGui::BeginTooltip();
-            ImGui::Text("Type - %s, Start - %i, Info - %i, %i", Type[EntryArray[c].Type], EntryArray[c].Block_StartIndex, EntryArray[c].TypeInfo, EntryArray[c].TypeInfo_Sub);
-            ImGui::EndTooltip();
-        }
-        ImGui::PopID();
-    }
-    // ImGui::PopStyleVar(2);
-    ImGui::End();
-}
-
-static void
-ImGui_DebugRenderQueue(project_state *State)
-{
-    ImGui::Begin("debug_queue");
-    for (int i = 0; i < State->Queue.CurrentIdx; i++) {
-        v2 Pos = State->Queue.Item[i].Pos;
-        char size[20];
-        sprintf(size, "Type %i: %.2f, %.2f", State->Queue.Item[i].Type, Pos.x, Pos.y);
-        ImGui::MenuItem(size, NULL, (i == State->Queue.Playhead));
-    }
-    ImGui::End();
-}
-
-static void
-ImGui_DebugUndoTree(memory *Memory, project_state *State)
-{
-    ImGui::Begin("debug_undotree");
-    for (int i = 0; i < Memory->History.NumberOfEntries; i++) {
-        history_entry Entry = Memory->History.Entry[i];
-        bool32 CurrentPos = (i < Memory->History.EntryPlayhead);
-        ImGui::MenuItem(Entry.Name, NULL, CurrentPos);
-    }
-    ImGui::End();
-}
-#endif
-
-static void
-ImGui_File(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io,
-           sorted_comp_info *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer *SortedLayerArray)
-{
-    ImGui::Begin("Files");
-    ImGui::Text("Application average %.3f ms/frame (%.1f FPS)", 1000.0f / io.Framerate, io.Framerate);
-
-    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Backspace)) {
-
-        /*
-        uint64 SortSize = (sizeof(uint16) * File->Comp_Count);
-        void *SortedArray = Memory_PushScratch(Memory, SortSize);
-        uint16 *SelectedSourceIndex = (uint16 *)SortedArray;
-        int SelectedSourceCount = 0;
-
-        int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
-        int SourceCount = File->Source_Count;
-        while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Sources, SourceCount, &h, &c, &i)) {
-            block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, i);
-            if (Source->IsSelected) {
-                SelectedSourceIndex[SelectedSourceCount] = i;
-                SelectedSourceCount++;
-            }
-        }
-
-        h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
-        int LayerCount = File->Layer_Count;
-        while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, LayerCount, &h, &c, &i)) {
-            block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
-            for (int b = 0; b < SelectedSourceCount; b++) {
-                if (SelectedSourceIndex[b] == Layer->Block_Source_Index) {
-                }
-            }
-        }
-
-        Memory_PopScratch(Memory, SortSize);
-        */
-
-        /*
-        bool32 CommitAction = 0;
-        while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Sources, SourceCount, &h, &c, &i)) {
-            block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, i);
-            if (Source->IsSelected) {
-                if (!CommitAction) {
-                    History_Entry_Commit(Memory, "Delete source");
-                    CommitAction = 1;
-                }
-                Source_Delete(File, Memory, i);
-            }
-        }
-        if (CommitAction)
-            History_Entry_End(Memory);
-        */
-    }
-
-    for (int c = 0; c < File->Comp_Count; c++) {
-        block_composition *Comp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, c);
-        block_string *String = (block_string *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Strings, Comp->Name_String_Index);
-        ImGui::Text(String->Char);
-    }
-    int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
-    while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Sources, File->Source_Count, &h, &c, &i)) {
-        block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, i);
-        block_string *String = (block_string *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Strings, Source->Path_String_Index);
-        ImGui::Selectable(String->Char, Source->IsSelected);
-        if (ImGui::IsItemClicked() || ImGui::IsItemClicked(ImGuiMouseButton_Right)) {
-            if (!io.KeyShift && !Source->IsSelected) {
-                Source_DeselectAll(File, Memory);
-            }
-            Source->IsSelected = 1;
-        }
-        ImGui::OpenPopupOnItemClick("sourcecontext", ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight);
-    }
-
-    if (ImGui::BeginPopup("sourcecontext")) {
-        if (ImGui::MenuItem("Create layer from source")) {
-            State->HotkeyInput = hotkey_newlayerfromsource;
-        }
-        ImGui::EndPopup();
-    }
-
-    // if (!ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows))
-    //     Source_DeselectAll(File, Memory);
-
-#if DEBUG
-
-    for (int i = 0; i < Debug.Temp.WatchedProperties; i++) {
-        if (Debug.Temp.DebugPropertyType[i] == d_float) {
-            ImGui::Text("%s: %f", Debug.Temp.String[i], Debug.Temp.Val[i].f);
-        } else if (Debug.Temp.DebugPropertyType[i] == d_int) {
-            ImGui::Text("%s: %i", Debug.Temp.String[i], Debug.Temp.Val[i].i);
-        } else if (Debug.Temp.DebugPropertyType[i] == d_uint) {
-            ImGui::Text("%s: %u", Debug.Temp.String[i], Debug.Temp.Val[i].u);
-        }
-    }
-#endif
-    ImGui::End();
-}
-
-#if STABLE
-static void
-ImGui_SD_Thumbnail(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io,
-                   sorted_comp_info *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer *SortedLayerArray, uint16 *SourceArray, uint16 SourceCount)
-{
-    ImGui::Begin("SD gallery");
-    ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList();
-    ImVec2 ViewportMin = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
-    ImVec2 ViewportScale = ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail();
-    ImVec2 ViewportMax = ImVec2(ViewportMin.x + ViewportScale.x, ViewportMin.y + ViewportScale.y);
-    if (!SourceCount || ViewportScale.x < 50) {
-        ImGui::End();
-        return;
-    }
-    int test[16];
-    int count = 0;
-    // draw_list->AddImage((void *)(intptr_t)textureID, ViewportMin, ViewportMax);
-    uint32 T_Height = 128;
-    real32 RowPercent = (real32)ViewportScale.x / T_Height;
-    uint32 PerRow = (uint32)RowPercent;
-    uint32 UI_Size = T_Height;
-    bool32 Active = false;
-    for (int i = 0; i < SourceCount; i++) {
-        int32 Y = i / PerRow;
-        int32 X = i % PerRow;
-        block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, SourceArray[i]);
-        // ImGui::Text("Count: %i", Source->RelativeTimestamp);
-        real32 Ratio = (real32)Source->Width / Source->Height;
-        uint32 T_Width = (uint32)(Ratio * T_Height);
-        if (Source->ThumbnailTex == 0) {
-            Source_DumpThumbnail(Memory, Source, T_Width, T_Height);
-        }
-        // draw_list->AddRect(ImgMin, ImgMax, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 64));
-        ImVec2 ImgMin = ViewportMin + ImVec2(X * UI_Size, Y * UI_Size);
-        ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(ImgMin);
-        real32 ClosestSpacing = 0.2;
-        bool32 Wide = (Source->Width > Source->Height);
-        // ImVec2 Min = (Wide) ? ImVec2(0,ClosestSpacing) : ImVec2(ClosestSpacing,0);
-        // ImVec2 Max = (Wide) ? ImVec2(1-ClosestSpacing,1) : ImVec2(1,1-ClosestSpacing);
-        ImVec2 Min(0.2, 0.2);
-        ImVec2 Max(0.8, 0.8);
-        ImGui::ImageButton((void *)(intptr_t)Source->ThumbnailTex, ImVec2(UI_Size, UI_Size), Min, Max, 12);
-        // ImGui::ImageButton(user_texture_id, & sizeconst ImVec2& = ImVec2(0, 0),   = ImVec2(1,1), int frame_padding = -1, const ImVec4& bg_col = ImVec4(0,0,0,0), const ImVec4& tint_col = ImVec4(1,1,1,1));    // <0 frame_padding uses default frame padding settings. 0 for no padding
-        // ImVec2 ImgMax = ImgMin + ImVec2(UI_Size * Ratio, UI_Size);
-        // ImGui::Button("##thumbnail", ImVec2(UI_Size, UI_Size));
-        // draw_list->AddImage((void *)(intptr_t)Source->ThumbnailTex, ImgMin, ImgMax);
-
-        if (ImGui::IsItemHovered()) {
-            State->PreviewSource = SourceArray[i];
-            State->UpdateFrame = true;
-            Active = true;
-            block_source *Source1 = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, 1);
-            block_source *Source2 = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, 2);
-            block_source *Source0 = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, 0);
-            real32 a = 0;
-        }
-
-        if (ImGui::IsItemClicked() || ImGui::IsItemClicked(ImGuiMouseButton_Right)) {
-            if (!io.KeyShift && !Source->IsSelected) {
-                Source_DeselectAll(File, Memory);
-            }
-            Source->IsSelected = 1;
-        }
-        ImGui::OpenPopupOnItemClick("temptosource", ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight);
-    }
-    if (State->PreviewSource != -1 && !Active) {
-        State->PreviewSource = -1;
-        State->UpdateFrame = true;
-    }
-    if (ImGui::BeginPopup("temptosource")) {
-        if (ImGui::MenuItem("Create layer from source")) {
-            State->HotkeyInput = hotkey_newlayerfromsource;
-        }
-        ImGui::EndPopup();
-    }
-
-    ImGui::End();
-}
-
-static void
-ImGui_SD_Prompt(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io,
-                sorted_comp_info *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer *SortedLayerArray)
-{
-    sorted_comp_info *SortedCompInfo = &SortedCompArray[File->PrincipalCompIndex];
-    sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo = Layer_GetSortedArray(SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray,File->PrincipalCompIndex);
-    ImGui::Begin("SD prompt input");
-    sd_state *SD = &File->UI.SD;
-    int Size = ImGui::GetFontSize();
-    ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, IM_COL32(200, 80, 0, 255));
-    if (ImGui::Button("Generate!", ImVec2(Size*8, Size*2))) {
-        if (!State->CurlActive) {
-            if (SD->Mode) {
-                block_layer *Layer = NULL;
-                for (int i = SortedCompInfo->LayerCount - 1; i >= 0; i--) {
-                    sorted_layer SortEntry = SortedLayerInfo[i];
-                    uint32 Index_Physical = SortEntry.Block_Layer_Index;
-                    block_layer *TestLayer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Index_Physical);
-                    if (TestLayer->IsSelected) {
-                        Layer = TestLayer;
-                        break;
-                    }
-                }
-                if (Layer) {
-                    block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
-                    void *BitmapAddress;
-                    if (Source->Type == source_type_principal) {
-                        block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
-                        BitmapAddress = Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_PrincipalBitmaps, Source->Bitmap_Index, 0);
-                    }
-                    else if (Source->Type == source_type_file) {
-                        cache_entry *Entry = Memory_Cache_Search(State, Memory, cache_entry_type_source, Layer->Block_Source_Index, 0);
-                        Assert(Entry->IsCached);
-                        BitmapAddress = Memory_Block_Bitmap_AddressAtIndex(Memory, Entry->Block_StartIndex);
-                    }
-                    uint64 Size = Source->Width * Source->Height * Source->BytesPerPixel;
-
-                    int32 len = 0;
-                    uint8 *PNGBitmap = stbi_write_png_to_mem((uint8 *)BitmapAddress, Source->Width * Source->BytesPerPixel,
-                                          Source->Width, Source->Height, Source->BytesPerPixel, &len);
-                    Assert(PNGBitmap);
-
-                    uint64 EncodedEstimateSize = base64_encode_size((size_t)Size);
-                    uint8 *EncodedOutput = (uint8 *)Memory_PushScratch(Memory, EncodedEstimateSize);
-                    uint64 EncodedTrueSize = 0;
-
-                    base64_encode((uint8 *)PNGBitmap, len, EncodedOutput, (size_t *)&EncodedTrueSize);
-                    Assert(EncodedOutput[EncodedTrueSize] == '\0');
-                    // printf("%s", EncodedOutput);
-
-                    STBIW_FREE(PNGBitmap);
-
-                    SD_AssembleJSON(SD, (char *)State->JSONPayload, EncodedOutput);
-                    Memory_PopScratch(Memory, EncodedEstimateSize);
-                    State->CurlActive = -1;
-                }
-            } else {
-                SD_AssembleJSON(SD, State->JSONPayload);
-                // SD_AssembleJSON(SD, (char *)State->Dump2);
-                State->CurlActive = -1;
-            }
-        }
-    }
-    ImGui::PopStyleColor();
-    if (State->CurlActive) {
-        ImGui::SameLine();
-        ImGui::Text("Est. time: %.1f sec, %.2f", State->SDTimeEstimate, State->SDPercentDone*100);
-    }
-    ImGui::InputText("Address", SD->ServerAddress, SD_LEN_ADDRESS);
-    if (SD->ServerAddress[0] == '\0' && SD->Prompt[0] == '\0') {
-        sprintf(SD->Prompt, "%s", "highres");
-        sprintf(SD->NegPrompt, "%s", "nsfw, \ntext, \ncropped, \nworst quality, \nlow quality, \nnormal quality, \njpeg artifacts, \nsignature, \nwatermark");
-        sprintf(SD->ServerAddress, "%s", "http://127.0.0.1:7860");
-    }
-    if (ImGui::Selectable("txt2img", !SD->Mode))
-        SD->Mode = 0;
-    if (ImGui::Selectable("img2img", SD->Mode))
-        SD->Mode = 1;
-    ImGui::InputTextMultiline("Prompt", SD->Prompt, SD_LEN_PROMPT);
-    ImGui::InputTextMultiline("Negative prompt", SD->NegPrompt, SD_LEN_PROMPT);
-    ImGui::SliderInt("Steps", &SD->Steps, 0, 150);
-    ImGui::SliderInt("Width", &SD->Width, 64, 2048, "%i px");
-    if (ImGui::IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit()) {
-        SD->Width = SD->Width + (64 - (SD->Width % 64));
-    }
-    ImGui::SliderInt("Height", &SD->Height, 64, 2048, "%i px");
-    if (ImGui::IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit()) {
-        SD->Height = SD->Height + (64 - (SD->Height % 64));
-    }
-    ImGui::SliderFloat("CFG scale", &SD->CFG, 1, 30, "%.2f");
-    if (SD->Mode) {
-        ImGui::SliderFloat("Denoising strength", &SD->DenoisingStrength, 0, 1, "%.2f");
-    }
-    ImGui::SliderInt("Batch size", &SD->BatchSize, 1, 8, "%i");
-    ImGui::InputInt("Seed", &SD->Seed);
-    ImGui::End();
-}
-#endif
-
-static void
-ImGui_ColorPanel(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io)
-{
-    ImGuiStyle& style = ImGui::GetStyle();
-
-    ImGui::Begin("Colors");
-
-    ImGuiColorEditFlags flags_primary = ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview |
-                                        ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float;
-    ImGuiColorEditFlags flags_picker  = ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar |
-                                        ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar |
-                                        ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview |
-                                        ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview |
-                                        ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB |
-                                        ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV |
-                                        ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex;
-
-    // Dim window if it's not active so there's not a big saturation square in
-    // the corner of my vision while I'm editing. Personal preference.
-    real32 AlphaMult = (ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows)) ? 1.0f : 0.3f;
-    ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_Alpha, style.Alpha * AlphaMult);
-
-    ImGui::ColorPicker4("##maincolorpicker", &UI->Color.r, flags_primary | flags_picker);
-
-    ImGui::PopStyleVar();
-
-    if (ImGui::ColorButton("##primarycolor", *(ImVec4*)&UI->Color.r, flags_primary, ImVec2(20, 20)))
-    {
-        v4 Temp = UI->Color;
-        UI->Color = UI->AltColor;
-        UI->AltColor = Temp;
-    }
-    if (ImGui::ColorButton("##secondarycolor", *(ImVec4*)&UI->AltColor.r, flags_primary, ImVec2(20, 20)))
-    {
-        v4 Temp = UI->Color;
-        UI->Color = UI->AltColor;
-        UI->AltColor = Temp;
-    }
-
-    if (State->Tool == tool_brush) {
-        real32 BrushSizeMin = 0;
-        real32 BrushSizeMax = 1024;
-        real32 BrushHardnessMin = 0.5;
-        real32 BrushHardnessMax = 100;
-        real32 BrushSpacingMin = 0.1;
-        real32 BrushSpacingMax = 100;
-        if (ImGui::DragScalar("Size", ImGuiDataType_Float, &State->Brush.Size, 1, &BrushSizeMin, &BrushSizeMax, "%.3f")) {
-            Brush_CalcBitmapAlphaFromSize(Memory, &State->Brush, 4);
-            State_BindBrushTexture(Memory, &State->Brush, 4);
-        }
-        if (ImGui::DragScalar("Hardness", ImGuiDataType_Float, &State->Brush.Hardness, 1, &BrushHardnessMin, &BrushHardnessMax, "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic)) {
-            Brush_CalcBitmapAlphaFromSize(Memory, &State->Brush, 4);
-            State_BindBrushTexture(Memory, &State->Brush, 4);
-        }
-        if (ImGui::DragScalar("Spacing", ImGuiDataType_Float, &State->Brush.Spacing, 1, &BrushSpacingMin, &BrushSpacingMax, "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic)) {
-            Brush_CalcBitmapAlphaFromSize(Memory, &State->Brush, 4);
-            State_BindBrushTexture(Memory, &State->Brush, 4);
-        }
-        ImGui::Button(BrushNames[State->Brush.Type]);
-        ImGui::OpenPopupOnItemClick("brush_picker", ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonLeft);
-        if (ImGui::BeginPopup("brush_picker")) {
-            for (int16 b = 0; b < brush_amount; b++) {
-                if (ImGui::MenuItem(BrushNames[b], NULL, false, State->Brush.Type != b)) {
-                    State->Brush.Type = (brush_type)b;
-                }
-            }
-            ImGui::EndPopup();
-        }
-    }
-
-    ImGui::End();
-}
-
-static void
-ImGui_Toolbar(project_state *State, ImDrawList *draw_list)
-{
-    ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, ImVec2(0, 0));
-    ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(0, 0));
-    // ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, IM_COL32(50, 50, 50, 0));
-
-    real32 IconSize = ImGui::GetFontSize() * 4;
-    int ToolCount = (int)tool_count;
-    ImVec2 ButtonSize(IconSize, IconSize);
-    ImVec2 WindowSize(IconSize, IconSize * ToolCount);
-    ImGui::BeginChild("Toolbar", WindowSize, true, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar);
-    for (int i = 0; i < ToolCount; i++) {
-        ImGui::PushID(i);
-        // draw_list->AddImage((void *)(intptr_t)State->ToolIconTex[i], Min, Max);
-        if ((int)State->Tool == i) {
-            ImVec2 Min = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
-            ImVec2 Max = Min + ButtonSize;
-            draw_list->AddRectFilled(Min, Max, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 128));
-        }
-        ImGui::Button(ToolName[i], ButtonSize);
-        if (ImGui::IsItemActivated()) {
-            State->Tool = (tool)i;
-        }
-        ImGui::PopID();
-    }
-    ImGui::EndChild();
-
-    // ImGui::PopStyleColor();
-    ImGui::PopStyleVar(2);
-}
-
-static void
-ImGui_RenderUIBrush(project_state *State, memory *Memory, ImVec2 ViewportMin, ImVec2 ViewportMax, ImVec2 CompZoom, ImGuiIO io, uint16 Width, uint16 Height)
-{
-
-    ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList();
-    if (State->Tool == tool_brush) {
-
-        if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_ModAlt, false)) {
-            State->Brush.UIPos = io.MousePos;
-        }
-
-        ImVec2 CompScale = CompZoom / ImVec2(Width, Height);
-        ImVec2 BrushSize = CompScale * State->Brush.Size;
-        ImVec2 MinBounds = State->Brush.UIPos - BrushSize/2;
-        ImVec2 MaxBounds = MinBounds + BrushSize;
-
-        // if (io.KeyCtrl) {
-        //     ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(State->Brush.UIPos);
-        //     char buf[256];
-        //     sprintf(buf, "RGBA: %.1f, %.1f, %.1f, %.1f", State->Brush.Size, State->Brush.Hardness);
-        // }
-
-        if (io.KeyAlt) {
-            draw_list->PushClipRect(ViewportMin, ViewportMax, true);
-            draw_list->AddImage((void *)(intptr_t)State->Brush.GLTexture, MinBounds, MaxBounds, ImVec2(0, 0), ImVec2(1, 1), 1);
-            draw_list->PopClipRect();
-            ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(State->Brush.UIPos);
-            char buf[256];
-            sprintf(buf, "Size: %.1f, Hardness: %.1f", State->Brush.Size, State->Brush.Hardness);
-            ImGui::Text(buf);
-            if (io.MouseDelta.x || io.MouseDelta.y) {
-                ImVec2 Delta = io.MouseDelta;
-                State->Brush.Size += Delta.x;
-                State->Brush.Hardness += Delta.y*State->Brush.Hardness/100;
-                if (State->Brush.Size < 0)
-                    State->Brush.Size = 0;
-                if (State->Brush.Size > 1024)
-                    State->Brush.Size = 1024;
-                if (State->Brush.Hardness < 0.5)
-                    State->Brush.Hardness = 0.5;
-                if (State->Brush.Hardness > 100)
-                    State->Brush.Hardness = 100;
-                Brush_CalcBitmapAlphaFromSize(Memory, &State->Brush, 4);
-                State_BindBrushTexture(Memory, &State->Brush, 4);
-            }
-        }
-    }
-}
-
-static void
-ImGui_TransformUI(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, ui *UI, ImDrawList *draw_list, ImGuiIO &io,
-                  interact_transform *Interact, ImVec2 ViewportMin, uint32 CompWidth, uint32 CompHeight, uint16 *SortedPropertyArray)
-{
-    v2 InteractMin = Interact->Min + Interact->Position;
-    v2 InteractMax = Interact->Max + Interact->Position;
-
-    v2 BoxLength = InteractMax - InteractMin;
-    v2 Center = InteractMax - (BoxLength/2);
-
-    real32 Point0X = Center.x - InteractMin.x;
-    real32 Point0Y = Center.y - InteractMin.y;
-
-    real32 Rad = Interact->Radians;
-
-    v2 XAxis = (Point0X *  Interact->Scale)*V2(cos(Rad), sin(Rad));
-    v2 YAxis = (Point0Y * -Interact->Scale)*V2(sin(Rad), -cos(Rad));
-
-    // Points are clockwise starting from the top left.
-    real32 X0 = -XAxis.x - YAxis.x + Center.x;
-    real32 Y0 = -XAxis.y - YAxis.y + Center.y;
-    real32 X1 =  X0 + XAxis.x*2;
-    real32 Y1 =  Y0 + XAxis.y*2;
-    real32 X2 =  X1 + YAxis.x*2;
-    real32 Y2 =  Y1 + YAxis.y*2;
-    real32 X3 =  X2 - XAxis.x*2;
-    real32 Y3 =  Y2 - XAxis.y*2;
-
-    // Midway points.
-    real32 Mid_X0 =  X0 + XAxis.x;
-    real32 Mid_Y0 =  Y0 + XAxis.y;
-    real32 Mid_X1 =  X1 + YAxis.x;
-    real32 Mid_Y1 =  Y1 + YAxis.y;
-    real32 Mid_X2 =  X2 - XAxis.x;
-    real32 Mid_Y2 =  Y2 - XAxis.y;
-    real32 Mid_X3 =  X3 - YAxis.x;
-    real32 Mid_Y3 =  Y3 - YAxis.y;
-
-    ImVec2 CompScale = UI->CompZoom / ImVec2(CompWidth, CompHeight);
-
-    ImVec2 P[4];
-    P[0] = ImVec2(X0, Y0)*CompScale + UI->CompPos;
-    P[1] = ImVec2(X1, Y1)*CompScale + UI->CompPos;
-    P[2] = ImVec2(X2, Y2)*CompScale + UI->CompPos;
-    P[3] = ImVec2(X3, Y3)*CompScale + UI->CompPos;
-
-    ImVec2 Mid_P[4];
-    Mid_P[0] = ImVec2(Mid_X0, Mid_Y0)*CompScale + UI->CompPos;
-    Mid_P[1] = ImVec2(Mid_X1, Mid_Y1)*CompScale + UI->CompPos;
-    Mid_P[2] = ImVec2(Mid_X2, Mid_Y2)*CompScale + UI->CompPos;
-    Mid_P[3] = ImVec2(Mid_X3, Mid_Y3)*CompScale + UI->CompPos;
-
-    ImU32 wcol = ImGui::GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
-    draw_list->AddLine(P[0], P[1], wcol, 2.0f);
-    draw_list->AddLine(P[1], P[2], wcol, 2.0f);
-    draw_list->AddLine(P[2], P[3], wcol, 2.0f);
-    draw_list->AddLine(P[3], P[0], wcol, 2.0f);
-
-    v2 XAxis2 = (BoxLength*CompScale.x)*V2(cos(Rad), sin(Rad));
-    v2 YAxis2 = (BoxLength*CompScale.y)*V2(sin(Rad), -cos(Rad));
-
-    v2 XAxisPerp = (1.0f / LengthSq(XAxis))*XAxis;
-    v2 YAxisPerp = (1.0f / LengthSq(YAxis))*YAxis;
-
-    // real32 LocalX = ((io.MousePos.x - UI->CompPos.x) - Center.x) ;
-    // real32 LocalY = ((io.MousePos.y - UI->CompPos.y) - Center.y) ;
-    layer_transforms BoxTransforms = { Center.x, Center.y, 0.5, 0.5, (real32)(Interact->Radians / (PI / 180)), Interact->Scale };
-    v2 LayerPoint = Transform_ScreenSpaceToLocal(BoxTransforms, CompWidth, CompHeight, BoxLength.x, BoxLength.y, UI->CompPos, UI->CompZoom, ViewportMin, io.MousePos);
-
-    real32 U = LayerPoint.x / BoxLength.x;
-    real32 V = LayerPoint.y / BoxLength.y;
-
-    ImVec2 ScaleHandleSize(50, 50);
-
-    bool32 OtherActions = ImGui::IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_Z);
-
-    // First do the halfway scale points, since they don't need UVs considered:
-    for (int i = 0; i < 4; i++) {
-        ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(Mid_P[i] - ScaleHandleSize/2);
-        ImGui::PushID(i);
-
-        ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered, ImGui::ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(ImVec4(0.6f, 0.0f, 0.3f, 1.0f)));
-        ImGui::Button("##ScaleMids", ScaleHandleSize);
-        ImGui::PopStyleColor();
-
-        if (ImGui::IsItemActivated() && !OtherActions) {
-            State->InteractTransformMode = 1;
-        }
-
-        if (State->InteractTransformMode == 1 && ImGui::IsItemActive())
-        {
-            uint32 side = i;
-            if (side == 0) {
-                Interact->Scale -= io.MouseDelta.y / BoxLength.y;
-                Interact->Position.y += io.MouseDelta.y / 2;
-            } else if (side == 1) {
-                Interact->Scale += io.MouseDelta.x / BoxLength.x;
-                Interact->Position.x += io.MouseDelta.x / 2;
-            } else if (side == 2) {
-                Interact->Scale += io.MouseDelta.y / BoxLength.y;
-                Interact->Position.y += io.MouseDelta.y / 2;
-            } else if (side == 3) {
-                Interact->Scale -= io.MouseDelta.x / BoxLength.x;
-                Interact->Position.x += io.MouseDelta.x / 2;
-            }
-        }
-        ImGui::PopID();
-    }
-
-    bool32 InBounds = false;
-    // Scale if cursor is on button within the UV, rotate if outside UV, and position if a non-button is dragged.
-    if (U >= 0.0f && U <= 1.0f && V >= 0.0f && V <= 1.0f)
-    {
-        ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered, ImGui::ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(ImVec4(0.6f, 0.0f, 0.3f, 1.0f)));
-        InBounds = true;
-    }
-
-    for (int i = 0; i < 4; i++) {
-        ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(P[i] - ScaleHandleSize/2);
-        ImGui::PushID(i);
-        ImGui::Button("##ScaleRotateCorners", ScaleHandleSize);
-
-        if (ImGui::IsItemActivated() && !OtherActions) {
-            if (InBounds)
-                State->InteractTransformMode = 1;
-            else
-                State->InteractTransformMode = 2;
-        }
-
-        // Scale part
-        if (State->InteractTransformMode == 1 && ImGui::IsItemActive())
-        {
-            // TODO(fox): Corner dragging scale only works in the X
-            // axis. Mostly feels right when dragged how you expect,
-            // but I'll fix it if someone complains.
-            uint32 side = i;
-            if (side == 0) {
-                Interact->Scale -= io.MouseDelta.x / BoxLength.x;
-                Interact->Position.x += io.MouseDelta.x / 2;
-                Interact->Position.y += io.MouseDelta.x*(BoxLength.y/BoxLength.x) / 2;
-            } else if (side == 1) {
-                Interact->Scale += io.MouseDelta.x / BoxLength.x;
-                Interact->Position.x += io.MouseDelta.x / 2;
-                Interact->Position.y -= io.MouseDelta.x*(BoxLength.y/BoxLength.x) / 2;
-            } else if (side == 2) {
-                Interact->Scale += io.MouseDelta.x / BoxLength.x;
-                Interact->Position.x += io.MouseDelta.x / 2;
-                Interact->Position.y += io.MouseDelta.x*(BoxLength.y/BoxLength.x) / 2;
-            } else if (side == 3) {
-                Interact->Scale -= io.MouseDelta.x / BoxLength.x;
-                Interact->Position.x += io.MouseDelta.x / 2;
-                Interact->Position.y -= io.MouseDelta.x*(BoxLength.y/BoxLength.x) / 2;
-            }
-        }
-
-        // Rotation part
-        if (State->InteractTransformMode == 2 && ImGui::IsItemActive())
-        {
-            real32 LocalX = (io.MousePos.x - UI->CompPos.x)/CompScale.x - InteractMin.x - (BoxLength.x/2);
-            real32 LocalY = (io.MousePos.y - UI->CompPos.y)/CompScale.y - InteractMin.y - (BoxLength.y/2);
-
-            real32 Slope_Mouse = LocalY/LocalX;
-            real32 Slope_Corner = 0;
-            real32 Slope_Flipped = 0;
-            real32 Dot = 0;
-
-            // TODO(fox) learn basic geometry to do this properly
-
-            // We find the angle between the direction of whichever corner the
-            // mouse is grabbing (Slope_Corner) and the mouse's current
-            // position (Slope_Mouse) to get ExtraRadians. The calculation only
-            // works between -90 and 90, so I take the dot product of the
-            // opposite edge of the corner and add the extra degrees when it's negative.
-
-            v2 SlopeDot = V2(BoxLength.x, BoxLength.y);
-            // top left clockwise
-            uint32 side = i;
-            if (side == 0) {
-                Slope_Corner = BoxLength.y / BoxLength.x;
-                Slope_Flipped = -BoxLength.x / BoxLength.y;
-                Dot = LocalX * -SlopeDot.x + LocalY * -SlopeDot.y;
-            } else if (side == 1) {
-                Slope_Corner = -BoxLength.y / BoxLength.x;
-                Slope_Flipped = BoxLength.x / BoxLength.y;
-                Dot = LocalX * SlopeDot.x + LocalY * -SlopeDot.y;
-            } else if (side == 2) {
-                Slope_Corner = BoxLength.y / BoxLength.x;
-                Slope_Flipped = -BoxLength.x / BoxLength.y;
-                Dot = LocalX * SlopeDot.x + LocalY * SlopeDot.y;
-            } else if (side == 3) {
-                Slope_Corner = -BoxLength.y / BoxLength.x;
-                Slope_Flipped = BoxLength.x / BoxLength.y;
-                Dot = LocalX * -SlopeDot.x + LocalY * SlopeDot.y;
-            }
-
-            Interact->Radians = atan((Slope_Mouse - Slope_Corner) / (1 + Slope_Mouse * Slope_Corner));
-            real32 ExtraRadians2 = atan((Slope_Mouse - Slope_Flipped) / (1 + Slope_Mouse * Slope_Flipped));
-
-            if (Dot < 0) {
-                if (Interact->Radians < 0) {
-                    Interact->Radians = (90 * (PI / 180)) + ExtraRadians2;
-                } else {
-                    Interact->Radians = (-90 * (PI / 180)) + ExtraRadians2;
-                }
-            }
-        }
-
-        ImGui::PopID();
-    }
-
-    if (!State->InteractTransformMode && ImGui::IsMouseClicked(ImGuiMouseButton_Left) && InBounds && !OtherActions)
-        State->InteractTransformMode = 3;
-
-    if (State->InteractTransformMode == 3) {
-        Interact->Position.x += (real32)io.MouseDelta.x/CompScale.x;
-        Interact->Position.y += (real32)io.MouseDelta.y/CompScale.y;
-    }
-
-    if (State->InteractTransformMode)
-    {
-        if (io.MouseDelta.x || io.MouseDelta.y)
-            State->UpdateFrame = true;
-        if (!ImGui::IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton_Left))
-            State->InteractTransformMode = 0;
-    }
-
-    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Escape)) {
-        State->Interact_Active = interact_type_none;
-        State->Interact_Modifier = 0;
-        State->UpdateFrame = true;
-    }
-
-    // Second condition so you don't have to reach for Enter.
-    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Enter) || (ImGui::IsMouseClicked(ImGuiMouseButton_Left) && io.KeyCtrl)) {
-        int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
-        if (!io.KeyCtrl)
-            History_Entry_Commit(Memory, "Transform layers");
-        while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, File->Layer_Count, &h, &c, &i)) {
-            block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
-            if (Layer->IsSelected == 1) {
-                if (io.KeyCtrl) {
-                    layer_transforms T = Layer_GetTransforms(Layer);
-                    Transform_ApplyInteractive(*(interact_transform *)&State->Interact_Offset[0], &T.x, &T.y, &T.rotation, &T.scale);
-                    property_channel *Property[4] = { &Layer->x, &Layer->y, &Layer->rotation, &Layer->scale };
-                    real32 Val[4] = { T.x, T.y, T.rotation, T.scale };
-                    for (int a = 0; a < 4; a++) {
-                        if (Property[a]->CurrentValue != Val[a]) {
-                            History_Entry_Commit(Memory, "Add keyframe");
-                            bezier_point Point = { 1, {(real32)State->Frame_Current, Val[a], -1, 0, 1, 0}, interpolation_type_linear, 0, {0, 0, 0}, 0 };
-                            uint16 *ArrayLocation = Property_GetSortedArray(SortedPropertyArray, State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer, h);
-                            Bezier_Add(Memory, F_Layers, Property[a], Point, ArrayLocation);
-                            History_Entry_End(Memory);
-                        }
-                    }
-                } else {
-                    History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(Layer->x.CurrentValue), &Layer->x.CurrentValue);
-                    History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(Layer->y.CurrentValue), &Layer->y.CurrentValue);
-                    History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(Layer->scale.CurrentValue), &Layer->scale.CurrentValue);
-                    History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(Layer->rotation.CurrentValue), &Layer->rotation.CurrentValue);
-                    Transform_ApplyInteractive(*(interact_transform *)&State->Interact_Offset[0], &Layer->x.CurrentValue, &Layer->y.CurrentValue, &Layer->rotation.CurrentValue, &Layer->scale.CurrentValue);
-                }
-            }
-        }
-        if (!io.KeyCtrl)
-            History_Entry_End(Memory);
-        State->Interact_Active = interact_type_none;
-        State->Interact_Modifier = 0;
-        State->UpdateFrame = true;
-    }
-
-    if (InBounds == true) {
-        ImGui::PopStyleColor();
-    }
-
-}
-
-static void
-ImGui_LayerViewportUI(project_state *State, memory *Memory, ui *UI, ImDrawList *draw_list, block_composition *MainComp, uint32 CompIndex, block_layer *ParentLayer[4], uint32 Recursions,
-                      sorted_comp_info *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer *SortedLayerArray)
-{
-    sorted_comp_info *SortedCompInfo = &SortedCompArray[CompIndex];
-    sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo = Layer_GetSortedArray(SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, CompIndex);
-    ImU32 wcol = ImGui::GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
-    for (int i = 0; i < SortedCompInfo->LayerCount; i++)
-    {
-        sorted_layer SortEntry = SortedLayerInfo[i];
-        uint32 Index_Physical = SortEntry.Block_Layer_Index;
-        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Index_Physical);
-        if (Layer->IsPrecomp) {
-            ParentLayer[Recursions] = Layer;
-            ImGui_LayerViewportUI(State, Memory, UI, draw_list, MainComp, Layer->Block_Source_Index, ParentLayer, Recursions + 1, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray);
-        }
-        if (Layer->IsSelected) {
-            uint32 Width = 0, Height = 0;
-            if (!Layer->IsPrecomp) {
-                block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
-                Width = Source->Width;
-                Height = Source->Height;
-            } else {
-                block_composition *Comp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
-                Width = Comp->Width;
-                Height = Comp->Height;
-            }
-
-            v2 Point[5] = { V2(Width*Layer->ax.CurrentValue, Height*Layer->ay.CurrentValue), V2(0, 0), V2(Width, 0), V2(0, Height), V2(Width, Height) };
-
-            layer_transforms T = Layer_GetTransforms(Layer);
-
-            if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_viewport_transform && Layer->IsSelected == 1) {
-                Transform_ApplyInteractive(*(interact_transform *)&State->Interact_Offset[0], &T.x, &T.y, &T.rotation, &T.scale);
-            }
-
-            v2 NewPos[5];
-            for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++) {
-                NewPos[i] = TransformPoint(T, Width, Height, Point[i]);
-            }
-
-            int i = 0;
-            while (i < Recursions) {
-                T = Layer_GetTransforms(ParentLayer[i]);
-                block_composition *Comp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, ParentLayer[i]->Block_Source_Index);
-                Width = Comp->Width;
-                Height = Comp->Height;
-                for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++) {
-                    NewPos[i] = TransformPoint(T, Width, Height, NewPos[i]);
-                }
-                i++;
-            }
-
-            ImVec2 ScreenPoint[5];
-            for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++) {
-                v2 CompUV = NewPos[i] / V2(MainComp->Width, MainComp->Height);
-
-                ScreenPoint[i] = ImVec2(UI->CompPos.x + CompUV.x * UI->CompZoom.x,
-                                        UI->CompPos.y + CompUV.y * UI->CompZoom.y);
-
-            }
-            if (State->Tool != tool_brush) {
-                ImU32 wcol2 = IM_COL32(10, 10, 10, 255);
-                draw_list->AddNgon(ScreenPoint[0], 10, wcol2, 8, 9.0f);
-                draw_list->AddNgon(ScreenPoint[0], 10, wcol, 8, 5.0f);
-            }
-            draw_list->AddLine(ScreenPoint[1], ScreenPoint[2], wcol, 2.0f);
-            draw_list->AddLine(ScreenPoint[2], ScreenPoint[4], wcol, 2.0f);
-            draw_list->AddLine(ScreenPoint[1], ScreenPoint[3], wcol, 2.0f);
-            draw_list->AddLine(ScreenPoint[3], ScreenPoint[4], wcol, 2.0f);
-        }
-    }
-}
-
-static void
-ImGui_Viewport(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io, GLuint textureID,
-               sorted_comp_info *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer *SortedLayerArray, uint16 *SortedPropertyArray)
-{
-    bool open = true;
-    ImGui::Begin("Viewport", &open, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse);
-
-    if (ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows)) {
-        State->FocusedWindow = focus_viewport;
-    }
-
-    block_composition *MainComp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, File->PrincipalCompIndex);
-
-    ImVec2 ViewportMin = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
-    ImVec2 ViewportScale = ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail();
-    ImVec2 ViewportMax = ImVec2(ViewportMin.x + ViewportScale.x, ViewportMin.y + ViewportScale.y);
-
-    if (State->Initializing) {
-        UI->CompZoom = ImVec2(MainComp->Width, MainComp->Height);
-        UI->CompPos = ImVec2(ViewportMin.x + ((ViewportMax.x - ViewportMin.x)/2 - UI->CompZoom.x/2),
-                            ViewportMin.y + ((ViewportMax.y - ViewportMin.y)/2 - UI->CompZoom.y/2));
-    }
-
-    ImVec2 CompPosMin = ImVec2(UI->CompPos.x, UI->CompPos.y);
-    ImVec2 CompPosMax = ImVec2(UI->CompPos.x + UI->CompZoom.x, UI->CompPos.y + UI->CompZoom.y);
-
-    ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList();
-    draw_list->AddRectFilled(ViewportMin, ViewportMax, IM_COL32(50, 50, 50, 255));
-    draw_list->AddRect(ViewportMin, ViewportMax, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 255));
-    draw_list->AddRect(CompPosMin, CompPosMax, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 55));
-
-    real32 FontSize = ImGui::GetFontSize();
-    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(ImVec2(ViewportMax.x - FontSize*2, ViewportMin.y + ViewportScale.y - FontSize*3.0));
-    ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, IM_COL32(0, 0, 0, 80));
-    if (ImGui::Button("?"))
-        State->ImGuiPopups = popup_keybinds;
-    ImGui::PopStyleColor();
-
-
-    // Actual composition texture
-    draw_list->PushClipRect(ViewportMin, ViewportMax, true);
-    draw_list->AddImage((void *)(intptr_t)textureID, CompPosMin, CompPosMax);
-    draw_list->PopClipRect();
-
-    // UI+interaction for layer
-    if (State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer > -1)
-    {
-        block_layer *ParentLayer[4];
-        ImGui_LayerViewportUI(State, Memory, UI, draw_list, MainComp, File->PrincipalCompIndex, ParentLayer, 0, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray);
-        if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_viewport_transform) {
-            ImGui_TransformUI(File, State, Memory, UI, draw_list, io, (interact_transform *)&State->Interact_Offset[0], ViewportMin, MainComp->Width, MainComp->Height, SortedPropertyArray);
-        }
-    }
-
-
-
-    // Interactions for dragging and zooming
-    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(ViewportMin);
-
-    ImGui::InvisibleButton("canvas", ViewportScale, ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonLeft | ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonRight);
-    bool32 IsHovered = ImGui::IsItemHovered();
-#if 1
-    bool32 IsActive = ImGui::IsItemActive();
-    bool32 IsActivated = ImGui::IsItemActivated();
-    bool32 IsDeactivated = ImGui::IsItemDeactivated();
-#else
-    bool32 IsActive = ImGui::IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_3);
-    bool32 IsActivated = ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_3);
-    bool32 IsDeactivated = ImGui::IsKeyReleased(ImGuiKey_3);
-#endif
-
-    if (IsHovered && IsActivated && !ImGui::IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton_Right))
-    {
-        // Point to zoom in on if Z is held
-        State->TempZoomRatio = ImGui_ScreenPointToCompUV(ViewportMin, UI->CompPos, UI->CompZoom, io.MousePos);
-
-        if (State->Tool == tool_brush && State->Interact_Active != interact_type_brush) {
-            sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo = Layer_GetSortedArray(SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, File->PrincipalCompIndex);
-            sorted_comp_info SortedCompInfo = SortedCompArray[File->PrincipalCompIndex];
-            if (!io.KeyCtrl) {
-                int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
-                while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, File->Layer_Count, &h, &c, &i))
-                {
-                    block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
-                    if (!Layer->IsPrecomp) {
-                        block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
-                        if (Layer->IsSelected && Source->Type == source_type_principal) {
-                            Assert(Source->BytesPerPixel == 4);
-                            Arbitrary_Zero((uint8 *)State->Brush.TransientBitmap, 2048*2048*4);
-                            State->Interact_Active = interact_type_brush;
-                            State->Brush.LayerToPaint_Index = i;
-                            break;
-                        }
-                    }
-                }
-            }
-            if (State->Brush.LayerToPaint_Index == -1) {
-                State->HotkeyInput = hotkey_newpaintlayer;
-            }
-        }
-
-        // Layer selection
-        if (!ImGui::IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_Z) && State->Tool == tool_default && State->Interact_Active == interact_type_none) {
-            int32 Selection = Layer_TestSelection(Memory, State, UI, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray, File->PrincipalCompIndex);
-            if (!io.KeyShift && State->Interact_Active == interact_type_none)
-                Layer_DeselectAll(File, State, Memory);
-            if (Selection != -1)
-                Layer_Select(Memory, State, Selection);
-        }
-    }
-
-    /*
-    if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_viewport_transform) {
-            interact_transform *Interact = (interact_transform *)&State->Interact_Offset[0];
-            ImVec2 DragDelta = io.MousePos - Interact->OGPos;
-            Interact->Position = V2(DragDelta.x, DragDelta.y);
-            if (io.MouseDelta.x || io.MouseDelta.y)
-                State->UpdateFrame = true;
-    }
-    */
-
-    if (IsActive && ImGui::IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton_Right, -1.0f))
-    {
-        UI->CompPos.x += io.MouseDelta.x;
-        UI->CompPos.y += io.MouseDelta.y;
-    }
-
-
-    bool32 OtherActions = ImGui::IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_Z) || ImGui::IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton_Right);
-    if (State->Tool == tool_brush && State->Interact_Active == interact_type_brush) {
-        Assert(State->Brush.LayerToPaint_Index != -1);
-        if (IsActive && !OtherActions) {
-            block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, State->Brush.LayerToPaint_Index);
-            layer_transforms T_Layer = Layer_GetTransforms(Layer);
-            block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
-            ImVec2 MouseDelta = io.MouseDelta;
-            real32 Delta = MouseDelta.x + MouseDelta.y;
-            v2 PrincipalCompUV = ImGui_ScreenPointToCompUV(ViewportMin, UI->CompPos, UI->CompZoom, io.MousePos);
-            v2 LayerPos = Layer_TraverseForPoint(File, State, Memory, PrincipalCompUV, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray);
-            if (IsActivated) {
-                RenderQueue_AddBrush(State, LayerPos);
-            } else if (Delta != 0.0f) {
-                v2 PrevPos = State->Brush.PrevPos;
-                v2 Delta = PrevPos - LayerPos;
-                real32 Dist = sqrt(LengthSq(Delta));
-                if (Dist > State->Brush.Spacing) {
-                    RenderQueue_AddBrush(State, LayerPos);
-                }
-            }
-            State->UpdateFrame = true;
-        }
-
-        if (IsDeactivated) {
-            RenderQueue_AddBlit(State);
-        }
-    }
-
-    if (ImGui::IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_Z) && ImGui::IsWindowHovered()) {
-        if (IsActive)
-            ImGui::SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeAll);
-        else
-            ImGui::SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor_Hand);
-    }
-
-    real32 Distance = 0;
-    if (IsActive) {
-        if (ImGui::IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton_Left, -1.0f))
-            Distance = io.MouseDelta.x + io.MouseDelta.y;
-        if (ImGui::IsMouseDoubleClicked(ImGuiMouseButton_Left))
-            Distance = 200;
-    }
-    if (Distance && ImGui::IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_Z))
-    {
-        if (io.KeyShift)
-            Distance *= -1;
-        UI->CompZoom.x += (Distance)*(real32)MainComp->Width/MainComp->Height;
-        UI->CompZoom.y += (Distance);
-        UI->CompPos.x -= ((Distance)*(real32)MainComp->Width/MainComp->Height)*State->TempZoomRatio.x;
-        UI->CompPos.y -= Distance*State->TempZoomRatio.y;
-    }
-
-    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(ImVec2(ViewportMin.x, ViewportMin.y + ViewportScale.y - FontSize*1.5));
-
-    ImGui::Text("%.1f", 100.0f * (UI->CompZoom.x / MainComp->Width));
-    if (State->MsgTime > 0) {
-        ImGui::SameLine();
-        ImGui::SetCursorPosX((ViewportScale.x / 5)*4);
-        ImGui::Text(State->Msg);
-        State->MsgTime--;
-    }
-
-    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(ViewportMin);
-    ImGui_Toolbar(State, draw_list);
-
-    ImGui_RenderUIBrush(State, Memory, ViewportMin, ViewportMax, UI->CompPos, io, MainComp->Width, MainComp->Height);
-
-    ImGui::End();
-
-    /*
-    for (int i = 0; i < AmountOf(Layer->Property); i++) {
-        ImGui::PushID(i);
-        property_channel *Property = &Layer->Property[i];
-        ImGui::DragScalar(Property->Name, ImGuiDataType_Float, &Property->CurrentValue,
-                          Property->ScrubVal, &Property->MinVal, &Property->MaxVal, "%f");
-        if (ImGui::IsItemActive())
-            State->UpdateFrame = true;
-        ImGui::PopID();
-    }
-    */
-}
-
-static void
-ImGui_Timeline_BGElements(project_state *State, ui *UI, ImDrawList *draw_list, ImVec2 TimelineSizeWithBorder, ImVec2 TimelineAbsolutePos, block_composition MainComp,
-                                      ImVec2 TimelineZoomSize, ImVec2 TimelineMoveSize)
-{
-    uint32 PreviewAreaColor = IM_COL32(128, 128, 128, 30);
-    ImVec2 Region_Min = ImVec2(TimelineAbsolutePos.x + TimelineMoveSize.x + ((real32)MainComp.Frame_Start / MainComp.Frame_Count)*TimelineZoomSize.x, TimelineAbsolutePos.y);
-    ImVec2 Region_Max = ImVec2(Region_Min.x + ((real32)(MainComp.Frame_End - MainComp.Frame_Start) / MainComp.Frame_Count)*TimelineZoomSize.x, Region_Min.y + TimelineSizeWithBorder.y);
-    draw_list->AddRectFilled(Region_Min, Region_Max, PreviewAreaColor);
-}
-
-static void
-ImGui_Timeline_HorizontalIncrementDraw(project_state *State, ui *UI, ImDrawList *draw_list, ImVec2 TimelineSizeWithBorder, ImVec2 TimelineAbsolutePos, block_composition MainComp,
-                                      ImVec2 TimelineZoomSize, ImVec2 TimelineMoveSize)
-{
-    uint32 LineColor = IM_COL32(200, 200, 200, 40);
-    uint32 PlayheadColor = IM_COL32(000, 000, 200, 160);
-    uint32 PreviewAreaColor = IM_COL32(128, 128, 128, 60);
-
-    Assert(TimelineZoomSize.x   > 0.0f);
-
-    real32 x = 0;
-    bool32 RightmostEdge = false;
-    real32 Increment = (real32)1 / MainComp.Frame_Count;
-    if (UI->TimelinePercentZoomed.x > 0.90)
-        Increment = (real32)MainComp.FPS / MainComp.Frame_Count;
-    else if (UI->TimelinePercentZoomed.x > 0.40)
-        Increment *= 2;
-
-    while (!RightmostEdge) {
-        ImVec2 Min = ImVec2(TimelineAbsolutePos.x + TimelineMoveSize.x  + x*TimelineZoomSize.x, TimelineAbsolutePos.y);
-        ImVec2 Max = ImVec2(Min.x + 2, TimelineAbsolutePos.y + TimelineSizeWithBorder.y);
-        if (Min.x < TimelineAbsolutePos.x + TimelineSizeWithBorder.x) {
-            draw_list->AddLine(Min, Max, LineColor);
-            char buf2[6];
-            uint32 FrameNumber = (uint32)(x * MainComp.Frame_Count) % MainComp.FPS;
-            if (FrameNumber != 0)
-                sprintf(buf2, ":%.2i", FrameNumber);
-            else
-                sprintf(buf2, "%.2i:00", (uint32)(x * MainComp.Frame_Count) / MainComp.FPS);
-            draw_list->AddText(ImVec2(Min.x, TimelineAbsolutePos.y), IM_COL32(200, 200, 200, 130), buf2);
-            x += Increment;
-            if (x > 1.0f)
-                RightmostEdge = true;
-        } else {
-            RightmostEdge = true;
-        }
-    }
-
-    ImVec2 Min = ImVec2(TimelineAbsolutePos.x + TimelineMoveSize.x  + ((real32)State->Frame_Current / MainComp.Frame_Count)*TimelineZoomSize.x, TimelineAbsolutePos.y);
-    ImVec2 Max = ImVec2(Min.x + 2, TimelineAbsolutePos.y + TimelineSizeWithBorder.y);
-    draw_list->AddLine(Min, Max, PlayheadColor);
-
-    real32 Size = ImGui::GetFontSize() * 2;
-    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(Min - ImVec2(Size / 2, 0));
-    ImGui::Button("##playhead", ImVec2(Size, Size));
-    bool32 IsHovered = ImGui::IsItemHovered();
-    bool32 IsItemActive = ImGui::IsItemActive();
-    bool32 IsItemActivated = ImGui::IsItemActivated();
-    bool32 IsItemDeactivated = ImGui::IsItemDeactivated();
-    if (IsItemActivated) {
-        State->Interact_Active = interact_type_timeline_scrub;
-        State->Interact_Offset[0] = State->Frame_Current;
-    }
-    if (IsItemActive) {
-        ImVec2 DragDelta = ImGui::GetMouseDragDelta();
-        int32 NewCurrent = (int32)(State->Interact_Offset[0] + (DragDelta.x / TimelineZoomSize.x * MainComp.Frame_Count) + 0.5);
-        if (NewCurrent != State->Frame_Current) {
-            State->Frame_Current = NewCurrent;
-            State->UpdateFrame = true;
-        }
-    }
-    if (IsItemDeactivated) {
-        State->Interact_Active = interact_type_none;
-        State->Interact_Modifier = 0;
-    }
-}
-
-
-static void
-ImGui_GraphInfo(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, ui *UI, ImGuiIO io,
-                sorted_comp_info *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer *SortedLayerArray,
-                sorted_property_info *SortedPropertyInfo, uint16 *SortedPropertyArray)
-{
-    bool open = true;
-    ImGui::Begin("Graph info");
-
-    int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
-    while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, File->Layer_Count, &h, &c, &i))
-    {
-        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
-        if (!Layer->IsSelected)
-            continue;
-
-        block_string *String = (block_string *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Strings, Layer->Block_String_Index);
-        ImGui::Text(String->Char);
-
-        ImGui::PushID(i);
-        for (int h = 0; h < AmountOf(Layer->Property); h++) {
-            property_channel *Property = &Layer->Property[h];
-            if (Property->Block_Bezier_Count) {
-                sorted_property_info *InfoLocation = Property_GetSortedInfo(SortedPropertyInfo, i, h);
-                uint16 *ArrayLocation = Property_GetSortedArray(SortedPropertyArray, i, h);
-                ImGui::PushID(Property);
-                if (ImGui::Selectable(DefaultChannel[h], Property_IsGraphSelected(Memory, Property, ArrayLocation))) {
-                    Property_DeselectAll(File, State, Memory, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray, SortedPropertyInfo, SortedPropertyArray);
-                    for (int p = 0; p < Property->Keyframe_Count; p++) {
-                        int k = ArrayLocation[p];
-                        bezier_point *Point = Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, k);
-                        Point->IsSelected = true;
-                    }
-                    State->RecentSelectionType = selection_type_keyframe;
-                }
-                ImGui::PopID();
-            }
-        }
-
-        ImGui::PopID();
-    }
-
-    ImGui::End();
-}
-
-static void
-ImGui_Timeline_DrawKeySheet(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, ui *UI, ImGuiIO io, ImDrawList *draw_list, property_channel *Property, uint16 *ArrayLocation,
-                            ImVec2 Increment, ImVec2 TimelineAbsolutePos, ImVec2 GraphPos, ImVec2 TimelineMoveSize, ImVec2 TimelineZoomSize,
-                            ImVec2 TimelineSize, ImVec2 TimelineSizeWithBorder, real32 LayerIncrement,
-                            sorted_comp_info *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer *SortedLayerArray, sorted_property_info *SortedPropertyInfo, uint16 *SortedPropertyArray)
-{
-    ImGui::PushID(Property);
-
-    for (int p = 0; p < Property->Keyframe_Count; p++) {
-        int k = ArrayLocation[p];
-        bezier_point *PointAddress = Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, k);
-
-        v2 PointPos[3];
-        Bezier_EvaluateValue(State, PointAddress, PointPos);
-
-        real32 LocalPos_Ratio_X = PointPos[0].x * Increment.x;
-        real32 Keyframe_ScreenPos_X = GraphPos.x + TimelineMoveSize.x + LocalPos_Ratio_X * TimelineZoomSize.x;
-
-        ImVec2 Keyframe_ScreenPos(Keyframe_ScreenPos_X, GraphPos.y);
-
-        if (State->BoxSelect) {
-            if (ImGui_TestBoxSelection_Point(Keyframe_ScreenPos, io, &PointAddress->IsSelected))
-                State->RecentSelectionType = selection_type_keyframe;
-        }
-
-        ImVec2 ButtonSize(16, 16);
-
-        ImGui::PushID(p);
-
-        ImU32 PointCol = (PointAddress->IsSelected) ? ImColor(0.8f, 0.5f, 0.0f, 1.0f) : ImColor(0.1f, 0.1f, 0.1f, 1.0f);
-        ImU32 LineCol = (PointAddress->IsSelected) ? ImColor(0.8f, 0.5f, 0.5f, 1.0f) : ImColor(0.4f, 0.4f, 0.4f, 1.0f);
-        ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(Keyframe_ScreenPos - (ButtonSize * 0.5));
-        ImGui::InvisibleButton("##keyframemover", ButtonSize, ImGuiMouseButton_Left);
-        bool32 IsHovered = ImGui::IsItemHovered();
-        bool32 IsItemActive = ImGui::IsItemActive();
-        bool32 IsItemActivated = ImGui::IsItemActivated();
-        bool32 IsItemDeactivated = ImGui::IsItemDeactivated();
-        bool32 LeftClick = ImGui::IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton_Left);
-        bool32 RightClick = ImGui::IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton_Right);
-
-        if (IsHovered) {
-            PointCol = ImColor(1.0f, 0.8f, 0.8f, 1.0f);
-            ImGui::SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor_Hand);
-        }
-
-        if (IsItemActivated) {
-            PointAddress->IsSelected = 1;
-        }
-
-        if (IsItemActive) {
-            if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_none) {
-                State->Interact_Offset[2] = io.MousePos.x;
-                State->Interact_Offset[3] = io.MousePos.y;
-                State->Interact_Active = interact_type_keyframe_move;
-                State->Interact_Modifier = 1;  // X axis movement only
-            } else {
-                Assert(State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_move);
-                ImGui_WarpMouse(State, io.MousePos, TimelineAbsolutePos, TimelineAbsolutePos + TimelineSizeWithBorder, 1);
-                ImVec2 DragDelta = io.MousePos - ImVec2(State->Interact_Offset[2], State->Interact_Offset[3]);
-                DragDelta = DragDelta + (ImVec2(State->Warp_X, State->Warp_Y) * TimelineSize);
-                if (io.MouseDelta.x || io.MouseDelta.y) {
-                    State->UpdateFrame = true;
-                }
-                if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_move) {
-                    State->Interact_Offset[0] = (DragDelta.x / TimelineZoomSize.x) / Increment.x;
-                    State->Interact_Offset[1] = DragDelta.y;
-                }
-            }
-        }
-
-        if (IsItemDeactivated) {
-            Bezier_Commit(File, State, Memory, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray, SortedPropertyInfo, SortedPropertyArray);
-        }
-
-        draw_list->AddCircleFilled(Keyframe_ScreenPos, 4, PointCol);
-
-        ImGui::PopID();
-    }
-    ImGui::PopID();
-}
-
-static void
-ImGui_Timeline_DrawGraph(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, ui *UI, ImGuiIO io, ImDrawList *draw_list,
-                         ImVec2 Increment, ImVec2 TimelineAbsolutePos, ImVec2 TimelineMoveSize, ImVec2 TimelineZoomSize,
-                         ImVec2 TimelineSize, ImVec2 TimelineSizeWithBorder, real32 LayerIncrement,
-                         sorted_comp_info *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer *SortedLayerArray,
-                         sorted_property_info *SortedPropertyInfo, uint16 *SortedPropertyArray)
-{
-    // I'm using the draw splitter here to be able to draw the dots on top of the graph lines.
-    State->Test.Split(draw_list, 2);
-
-    for (int c = 0; c < File->Comp_Count; c++) {
-        sorted_comp_info SortedCompInfo = SortedCompArray[c];
-        sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo = Layer_GetSortedArray(SortedLayerArray, &SortedCompInfo, c);
-        for (int i = 0; i < SortedCompInfo.LayerCount; i++) {
-            sorted_layer *SortedLayer = &SortedLayerInfo[i];
-            block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, SortedLayer->Block_Layer_Index);
-            if (!Layer->IsSelected)
-                continue;
-
-            int32 Frame_Start = Layer->Frame_Start;
-
-            ImGui::PushID(i);
-
-            if ((State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_move ||
-                State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_rotate ||
-                State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_scale))
-            {
-                ImGui_WarpMouse(State, io.MousePos, TimelineAbsolutePos, TimelineAbsolutePos + TimelineSizeWithBorder);
-                ImVec2 DragDelta = io.MousePos - ImVec2(State->Interact_Offset[2], State->Interact_Offset[3]);
-                DragDelta = DragDelta + (ImVec2(State->Warp_X, State->Warp_Y) * TimelineSize);
-                if (io.MouseDelta.x || io.MouseDelta.y) {
-                    State->UpdateFrame = true;
-                }
-                if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_move) {
-                    // The Y increment varies between graphs, so we have to do it in the Bezier_EvaluateValue call.
-                    State->Interact_Offset[0] = (DragDelta.x / TimelineZoomSize.x) / Increment.x;
-                    State->Interact_Offset[1] = DragDelta.y;
-                } else if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_scale) {
-                    State->Interact_Offset[0] = (DragDelta.x / TimelineSizeWithBorder.x * UI->TimelinePercentZoomed.x) / Increment.x;
-                } else if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_rotate) {
-                    State->Interact_Offset[0] = (DragDelta.x / TimelineZoomSize.x);
-                    /*
-                    real32 Slope_Old = (Keyframe_ScreenPos.y - State->Interact_Offset[3]) / (Keyframe_ScreenPos.x - State->Interact_Offset[2]);
-                    real32 Slope_New = (Keyframe_ScreenPos.y - io.MousePos.y) / (Keyframe_ScreenPos.x - io.MousePos.x);
-                    State->Interact_Offset[0] = atan((Slope_Old - Slope_New) / (1 + Slope_Old * Slope_New));
-                    */
-                }
-                ImGui::SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeAll);
-            }
-
-            sorted_property_info *InfoLocation = SortedPropertyInfo + SortedLayer->SortedPropertyStart;
-            uint16 *ArrayLocation = SortedPropertyArray + SortedLayer->SortedKeyframeStart;
-            int h1 = 0, c1 = 0, p = 0;
-            property_channel *Property = NULL;
-            while (Layer_LoopChannels(State, Memory, &InfoLocation, &ArrayLocation, Layer, &Property, NULL, &h1, &c1, &p))
-            {
-                ImGui::PushID(Property);
-                if (Property->Block_Bezier_Count) {
-                    real32 MinY, MaxY;
-                    Property_MinMax_Y(Memory, State, Property, InfoLocation, &MinY, &MaxY, 0);
-                    Assert(InfoLocation->MinYIndex < Property->Keyframe_Count);
-                    Assert(InfoLocation->MaxYIndex < Property->Keyframe_Count);
-                    Assert(MaxY >= MinY);
-                    real32 Y_Increment = (MaxY - MinY) ? (1 / (MaxY - MinY)) : 0.5;
-
-                    real32 GraphScale = 0;
-                    real32 GraphPos = 0;
-                    if ((1 / Y_Increment) < 5) {
-                        GraphScale = 0.2;
-                        GraphPos = 0.3;
-                    } else if ((1 / Y_Increment) > 700) {
-                        GraphScale = 0.6;
-                        GraphPos = 0.06;
-                    } else {
-                        GraphScale = 0.4;
-                        GraphPos = 0.2;
-                    }
-
-
-                    real32 GraphMoveHeight = TimelineMoveSize.y + (TimelineZoomSize.y * GraphPos);
-                    real32 GraphZoomHeight = TimelineZoomSize.y * GraphScale;
-
-                    bool32 IsGraphSelected = Property_IsGraphSelected(Memory, Property, ArrayLocation);
-                    uint32 GraphCol = IsGraphSelected ? IM_COL32(255, 180, 150, 255) : IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 70);
-
-                    bezier_point *PointAddress[2] = {};
-                    ImVec2 Keyframe_ScreenPos[6] = {};
-                    for (int p = 0; p < Property->Keyframe_Count; p++) {
-                        int k = ArrayLocation[p];
-                        if (Property->Keyframe_Count == 1)
-                            int b = 0;
-                        int Idx = (p % 2);
-                        int NewIdx = Idx * 3;
-                        int OldIdx = (NewIdx == 3) ? 0 : 3;
-                        PointAddress[Idx] = Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, k);
-
-                        v2 PointPos[3];
-                        Bezier_EvaluateValue(State, PointAddress[Idx], PointPos, GraphZoomHeight, Y_Increment);
-
-                        ImVec2 Keyframe_LocalPos[3] = { V2(PointPos[0]), V2(PointPos[0] + PointPos[1]), V2(PointPos[0] + PointPos[2]) };
-
-                        ImVec2 Keyframe_LocalPos_Ratio[3];
-                        for (int b = 0; b < 3; b++) {
-                            Keyframe_LocalPos_Ratio[b] = (Keyframe_LocalPos[b] - ImVec2(0, MinY)) * ImVec2(Increment.x, Y_Increment);
-                            Keyframe_ScreenPos[NewIdx + b] = TimelineAbsolutePos + ImVec2(TimelineMoveSize.x, GraphMoveHeight) + ((ImVec2(1, -1) * Keyframe_LocalPos_Ratio[b] + ImVec2(0, 1)) * ImVec2(TimelineZoomSize.x, GraphZoomHeight));
-                        }
-
-                        if (State->BoxSelect) {
-                            if (ImGui_TestBoxSelection_Point(Keyframe_ScreenPos[NewIdx], io, &PointAddress[Idx]->IsSelected))
-                                State->RecentSelectionType = selection_type_keyframe;
-                        }
-
-                        State->Test.SetCurrentChannel(draw_list, 1);
-
-                        ImVec2 ButtonSize(16, 16);
-
-                        ImGui::PushID(k);
-                        int Max = PointAddress[Idx]->IsSelected ? 2 : 0;
-                        for (int b = Max; b >= 0; b--) {
-                            ImU32 PointCol = ((PointAddress[Idx]->IsSelected - 1) == b) ? ImColor(0.8f, 0.5f, 0.0f, 1.0f) : ImColor(0.1f, 0.1f, 0.1f, 1.0f);
-                            ImU32 LineCol = ((PointAddress[Idx]->IsSelected - 1) == b) ? ImColor(0.8f, 0.5f, 0.5f, 1.0f) : ImColor(0.4f, 0.4f, 0.4f, 1.0f);
-                            ImGui::PushID(b);
-                            ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(Keyframe_ScreenPos[NewIdx + b] - (ButtonSize * 0.5));
-                            ImGui::InvisibleButton("##keyframemover", ButtonSize, ImGuiMouseButton_Left);
-                            bool32 IsHovered = ImGui::IsItemHovered();
-                            bool32 IsItemActive = ImGui::IsItemActive();
-                            bool32 IsItemActivated = ImGui::IsItemActivated();
-                            bool32 IsItemDeactivated = ImGui::IsItemDeactivated();
-                            bool32 LeftClick = ImGui::IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton_Left);
-                            bool32 RightClick = ImGui::IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton_Right);
-
-                            if (IsHovered) {
-                                PointCol = ImColor(1.0f, 0.8f, 0.8f, 1.0f);
-                                ImGui::SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor_Hand);
-                            }
-
-                            if (IsItemActivated) {
-                                PointAddress[Idx]->IsSelected = b+1;
-                            }
-
-                            if (b != 0 && PointAddress[Idx]->IsSelected)
-                                draw_list->AddLine(Keyframe_ScreenPos[NewIdx], Keyframe_ScreenPos[NewIdx + b], LineCol, 2.0f);
-
-                            if (b == 0) {
-                                draw_list->AddCircleFilled(Keyframe_ScreenPos[NewIdx + b], 4, PointCol);
-                                if (IsGraphSelected) {
-                                    char buf[8];
-                                    sprintf(buf, "%.2f", Keyframe_LocalPos[0].y);
-                                    draw_list->AddText(Keyframe_ScreenPos[NewIdx + b], 0xFFFFFFFF,  buf);
-                                }
-                            } else {
-                                draw_list->AddCircle(Keyframe_ScreenPos[NewIdx + b], 6, PointCol, 0, 2);
-                            }
-
-                            ImGui::PopID();
-                        }
-                        ImGui::PopID();
-
-                        State->Test.SetCurrentChannel(draw_list, 0);
-
-                        if (p != 0) {
-                            if (PointAddress[0]->Type == interpolation_type_bezier && PointAddress[1]->Type == interpolation_type_bezier) {
-                                draw_list->AddBezierCubic(Keyframe_ScreenPos[OldIdx], Keyframe_ScreenPos[OldIdx + 2],
-                                                          Keyframe_ScreenPos[NewIdx + 1], Keyframe_ScreenPos[NewIdx], GraphCol, 1.0f, 0);
-                            } else {
-                                draw_list->AddLine(Keyframe_ScreenPos[0], Keyframe_ScreenPos[3], GraphCol, 1.0f);
-                            }
-                        }
-                    }
-                }
-                ImGui::PopID();
-            }
-            ImGui::PopID();
-        }
-    }
-    State->Test.Merge(draw_list);
-}
-
-
-static void
-ImGui_Timeline_DrawPrecomp(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, ui *UI, ImGuiIO io, ImDrawList *draw_list, int16 RecursionIdx[MAX_PRECOMP_RECURSIONS], uint32 Recursions,
-                           ImVec2 Increment, ImVec2 TimelineAbsolutePos, ImVec2 TimelineMoveSize, ImVec2 TimelineZoomSize,
-                           ImVec2 TimelineSize, ImVec2 TimelineSizeWithBorder, real32 LayerIncrement,
-                           sorted_comp_info *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer *SortedLayerArray, sorted_property_info *SortedPropertyInfo, uint16 *SortedPropertyArray)
-{
-    uint16 CompIndex = 0;
-    if (RecursionIdx[Recursions] == -1) {
-        CompIndex = File->PrincipalCompIndex;
-    } else {
-        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, RecursionIdx[Recursions]);
-        CompIndex = Layer->Block_Source_Index;
-    }
-    block_composition *Comp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, CompIndex);
-    sorted_comp_info SortedCompInfo = SortedCompArray[CompIndex];
-    sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo = Layer_GetSortedArray(SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, CompIndex);
-
-    ImGui::PushID(CompIndex);
-
-    // NOTE(fox): Layer sorting pre-calculates UI positioning, so the order layers are drawn is arbitrary.
-    real32 DisplayOffset = 0;
-    for (int i = SortedCompInfo.LayerCount - 1; i >= 0; i--)
-    {
-        sorted_layer SortEntry = SortedLayerInfo[i];
-        uint32 Index_Physical = SortEntry.Block_Layer_Index;
-        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Index_Physical);
-
-        int32 Frame_Start = Layer->Frame_Start;
-        int32 Frame_End = Layer->Frame_End;
-        real32 Vertical_Offset = SortEntry.SortedOffset + DisplayOffset;
-
-        Layer_Evaluate_Display(State, Memory, Layer, SortedPropertyInfo, SortedPropertyArray, SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerInfo, i, &DisplayOffset);
-
-        if (Layer->IsSelected)
-            Layer_Interact_Evaluate(Memory, State, Index_Physical, SortedCompInfo, SortedLayerInfo, &Frame_Start, &Frame_End);
-
-        ImVec2 Layer_LocalPos = ImVec2(Frame_Start, Vertical_Offset);
-        ImVec2 Layer_LocalSize = ImVec2(Frame_End - Frame_Start, Layer->Vertical_Height);
-
-        ImVec2 Layer_LocalPos_Ratio = (Layer_LocalPos * Increment);
-        ImVec2 Layer_LocalSize_Ratio = Layer_LocalSize * Increment;
-        ImVec2 Layer_ScreenPos_Min = TimelineAbsolutePos + TimelineMoveSize + (Layer_LocalPos_Ratio * TimelineZoomSize);
-        ImVec2 Layer_ScreenPos_Max = TimelineAbsolutePos + TimelineMoveSize + ((Layer_LocalPos_Ratio + Layer_LocalSize_Ratio) * TimelineZoomSize);
-        ImVec2 Layer_ScreenSize = Layer_ScreenPos_Max - Layer_ScreenPos_Min;
-
-        // UI
-
-        ImU32 LayerColor = 0;
-        ImU32 BorderColor = 0;
-        LayerColor = ImColor(UI->LayerColors[Layer->ColIndex]);
-        BorderColor = ImColor(0.2, 0.2, 0.2, 1.0f);
-
-        draw_list->AddRectFilled(Layer_ScreenPos_Min, Layer_ScreenPos_Max, LayerColor);
-        draw_list->AddRect(Layer_ScreenPos_Min, Layer_ScreenPos_Max, BorderColor, 2);
-        block_string *String = (block_string *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Strings, Layer->Block_String_Index);
-        char buf[128];
-#if DEBUG
-        sprintf(buf, "%s, %i", String->Char, Index_Physical);
-#else
-        sprintf(buf, "%s", String->Char);
-#endif
-        if (UI->TimelinePercentZoomed.y <= 1.0f)
-            draw_list->AddText(Layer_ScreenPos_Min, 0xFFFFFFFF,  buf);
-
-        if (Layer->IsSelected == 1) {
-            draw_list->AddRectFilled(Layer_ScreenPos_Min, Layer_ScreenPos_Max, ImColor(0.25f, 0.25f, 0.25f, 0.5f), 2);
-            draw_list->AddRect(Layer_ScreenPos_Min, Layer_ScreenPos_Max, ImColor(1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f, 0.5f), 2);
-        } else if (Layer->IsSelected == 2) {
-            // draw_list->AddRectFilled(Layer_ScreenPos_Min, Layer_ScreenPos_Max, ImColor(0.25f, 0.25f, 0.25f, 0.5f), 2);
-            draw_list->AddRect(Layer_ScreenPos_Min, Layer_ScreenPos_Max, ImColor(0.0f, 0.9f, 0.0f, 0.9f), 4);
-        }
-
-        //
-
-        // Main interaction
-
-        ImGui::PushID(i);
-        if (State->TimelineMode == timeline_mode_default) {
-
-            if (State->BoxSelect && State->TimelineMode == timeline_mode_default) {
-                bool32 Test = 0;
-                if (io.MouseClickedPos[0].y < io.MousePos.y)
-                    Test = (Layer_ScreenPos_Min.y >= io.MouseClickedPos[0].y && Layer_ScreenPos_Min.y <= io.MousePos.y);
-                else
-                    Test = (Layer_ScreenPos_Max.y <= io.MouseClickedPos[0].y && Layer_ScreenPos_Max.y >= io.MousePos.y);
-
-                if (io.MouseClickedPos[0].x < io.MousePos.x)
-                    Test &= (Layer_ScreenPos_Max.x >= io.MouseClickedPos[0].x && Layer_ScreenPos_Min.x <= io.MousePos.x);
-                else
-                    Test &= (Layer_ScreenPos_Min.x <= io.MouseClickedPos[0].x && Layer_ScreenPos_Max.x >= io.MousePos.x);
-
-                if (Test) {
-                    if (!Layer->IsSelected) {
-                        Layer_Select(Memory, State, Index_Physical);
-                    }
-                } else if (!io.KeyShift) {
-                    Layer->IsSelected = false;
-                }
-            }
-
-
-            ImVec2 ResizeSize = ImVec2(Increment.x * 0.45 * TimelineZoomSize.x, Layer_ScreenSize.y);
-            ImVec2 ResizePos[2] = { Layer_ScreenPos_Min, ImVec2(Layer_ScreenPos_Max.x - ResizeSize.x, Layer_ScreenPos_Min.y) };
-            for (int b = 0; b < 2; b++) {
-                ImGui::PushID(b);
-                ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(ResizePos[b]);
-                ImGui::Button("##layer_resize", ResizeSize);
-
-                if (ImGui::IsItemHovered()) {
-                    ImGui::SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW);
-                }
-                if (ImGui::IsItemActivated()) {
-                    if (!Layer->IsSelected) {
-                        if (!io.KeyShift) Layer_DeselectAll(File, State, Memory);
-                        Layer_Select(Memory, State, Index_Physical);
-                    }
-                }
-                if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) {
-                    if (ImGui::IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton_Left, -1)) {
-                        Assert(Layer->IsSelected);
-                        State->Interact_Active = interact_type_layer_timeadjust;
-                        ImVec2 DragDelta = ImGui::GetMouseDragDelta();
-                        DragDelta = DragDelta + (ImVec2(State->Warp_X, State->Warp_Y) * TimelineSize);
-
-                        State->Interact_Offset[0] = (DragDelta.x / TimelineSizeWithBorder.x * UI->TimelinePercentZoomed.x) * Comp->Frame_Count;
-                        State->Interact_Offset[1] = b;
-                    }
-                }
-                if (ImGui::IsItemDeactivated()) {
-                    if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_layer_timeadjust) {
-                        History_Entry_Commit(Memory, "Adjust layer timing");
-                        int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
-                        while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, File->Layer_Count, &h, &c, &i)) {
-                            block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
-                            if (Layer->IsSelected) {
-                                // NOTE(fox): Some data on the tree could be saved here.
-                                History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(Layer->Frame_Start), &Layer->Frame_Start);
-                                History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(Layer->Frame_End), &Layer->Frame_End);
-                                Layer_Interact_Evaluate(Memory, State, Index_Physical, SortedCompInfo, SortedLayerInfo, &Layer->Frame_Start, &Layer->Frame_End);
-                            }
-                        }
-                        History_Entry_End(Memory);
-                        State->Interact_Active = interact_type_none;
-                        State->Interact_Modifier = 0;
-                        State->Interact_Offset[0] = 0;
-                        State->Interact_Offset[1] = 0;
-                    }
-                }
-
-                ImGui::PopID();
-            }
-
-            ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(Layer_ScreenPos_Min);
-            ImGui::InvisibleButton("##layer_mid", Layer_ScreenSize, ImGuiMouseButton_Left);
-
-            if (ImGui::IsItemActivated()) {
-                if (!Layer->IsSelected) {
-                    if (!io.KeyShift) Layer_DeselectAll(File, State, Memory);
-                    Layer_Select(Memory, State, Index_Physical);
-                    Layer_Select_RecurseUp(Memory, State, Index_Physical, RecursionIdx, Recursions);
-                }
-            }
-
-            ImGui::OpenPopupOnItemClick("layerpopup", ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight);
-            if (ImGui::BeginPopup("layerpopup")) {
-                if (ImGui::Selectable("Visible")) {
-                    bool32 Commit = false;
-                    int h = 0, z = 0, i = 0;
-                    while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, File->Layer_Count, &h, &z, &i)) {
-                        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
-                        if (Layer->IsSelected) {
-                            if (!Commit) {
-                                History_Entry_Commit(Memory, "Toggle visibility");
-                                Commit = true;
-                            }
-                            History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(Layer->IsVisible), &Layer->IsVisible);
-                            Layer->IsVisible ^= 1;
-                        }
-                    }
-                    if (Commit) {
-                        History_Entry_End(Memory);
-                        State->UpdateFrame = true;
-                    }
-                }
-                if (ImGui::MenuItem("Pre-compose layer")) {
-                    Precomp_UICreateButton(File, State, Memory, CompIndex, SortedCompInfo, SortedLayerInfo);
-                    State->UpdateKeyframes = true;
-                }
-                if (ImGui::MenuItem("Duplicate layer")) {
-                    Precomp_UIDuplicate(File, State, Memory, CompIndex, SortedCompInfo, SortedLayerInfo);
-                }
-                if (ImGui::MenuItem("Delete layer")) {
-                    Precomp_UICreateButton(File, State, Memory, CompIndex, SortedCompInfo, SortedLayerInfo);
-                    State->UpdateKeyframes = true;
-                }
-                if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Layer color"))
-                {
-                    ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
-                    for (int c = 0; c < AmountOf(UI->LayerColors); c++) {
-                        ImGui::PushID(c);
-                        ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, UI->LayerColors[c]);
-                        real32 Size = ImGui::GetFontSize() * 2;
-                        ImVec2 ColSize(Size, Size);
-                        if (ImGui::Button("##test", ColSize)) {
-                            int h = 0, z = 0, i = 0;
-                            while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, File->Layer_Count, &h, &z, &i)) {
-                                block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
-                                if (Layer->IsSelected) {
-                                    Layer->ColIndex = c;
-                                }
-                            }
-                        }
-                        if ((c+1) % 4) { ImGui::SameLine(); }
-                        ImGui::PopStyleColor();
-                        ImGui::PopID();
-                    }
-                    ImGui::PopStyleVar();
-                    ImGui::EndMenu();
-                }
-                uint32 *item_current_idx = (uint32 *)&Layer->BlendMode; // Here we store our selection data as an index.
-                if (ImGui::BeginListBox("Blend mode"))
-                {
-                    for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(BlendmodeNames); n++)
-                    {
-                        const bool is_selected = (*item_current_idx == n);
-                        if (ImGui::Selectable(BlendmodeNames[n], is_selected)) {
-                            *item_current_idx = n;
-                            State->UpdateFrame = true;
-                        }
-
-                        // Set the initial focus when opening the combo (scrolling + keyboard navigation focus)
-                        if (is_selected)
-                            ImGui::SetItemDefaultFocus();
-                    }
-                    ImGui::EndListBox();
-                }
-                ImGui::EndPopup();
-            }
-
-            if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) {
-                if (ImGui::IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton_Left, -1)) {
-                    if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_none) {
-                        State->Interact_Active = interact_type_layer_move;
-                        // TODO(fox): Selected layers inside precomps will have interactions doubled,
-                        // so I'm forcing interaction to only be with members of the same precomp.
-                        // Could be made more intuitive later.
-                        Layer_RecursiveDeselect(Memory, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray, Layer->Block_Composition_Index, File->PrincipalCompIndex);
-                    }
-                    ImVec2 DragDelta = ImGui::GetMouseDragDelta();
-                    DragDelta = DragDelta + (ImVec2(State->Warp_X, State->Warp_Y) * TimelineSize);
-
-                    ImVec2 Offset_Old = ImVec2(State->Interact_Offset[0], State->Interact_Offset[1]);
-                    ImVec2 Offset_New = (DragDelta / TimelineSizeWithBorder * UI->TimelinePercentZoomed) * ImVec2(Comp->Frame_Count, -LayerIncrement);
-
-                    // if (((int32)Offset_Old.x != (int32)Offset_New.x) || ((int32)Offset_Old.y != (int32)Offset_New.y))
-                    State->UpdateFrame = true;
-
-                    State->Interact_Offset[0] = Offset_New.x;
-                    State->Interact_Offset[1] = Offset_New.y;
-                }
-            }
-
-            if (ImGui::IsItemDeactivated()) {
-                if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_layer_move) {
-                    History_Entry_Commit(Memory, "Move layers");
-                    for (int i = 0; i < SortedCompInfo.LayerCount; i++)
-                    {
-                        sorted_layer SortEntry = SortedLayerInfo[i];
-                        uint32 Index_Physical = SortEntry.Block_Layer_Index;
-                        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Index_Physical);
-                        // NOTE(fox): Some data on the tree could be saved here.
-                        History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(Layer->Vertical_Offset), &Layer->Vertical_Offset);
-                        Layer->Vertical_Offset = SortEntry.SortedOffset;
-                        if (Layer->IsSelected) {
-                            History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(Layer->Frame_Start), &Layer->Frame_Start);
-                            History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(Layer->Frame_End), &Layer->Frame_End);
-                            Layer_Interact_Evaluate(Memory, State, Index_Physical, SortedCompInfo, SortedLayerInfo, &Layer->Frame_Start, &Layer->Frame_End);
-                        }
-                    }
-                    State->Interact_Active = interact_type_none;
-                    State->Interact_Modifier = 0;
-                    History_Entry_End(Memory);
-                }
-            }
-
-            // Keyframe view
-            uint32 Channel = 0;
-
-            sorted_property_info *InfoLocation = SortedPropertyInfo + SortedLayerInfo->SortedPropertyStart;
-            uint16 *ArrayLocation = SortedPropertyArray + SortedLayerInfo->SortedKeyframeStart;
-            int h = 0, c = 0, p = 0;
-            property_channel *Property = NULL;
-            block_effect *Effect = NULL;
-            while (Layer_LoopChannels(State, Memory, &InfoLocation, &ArrayLocation, Layer, &Property, &Effect, &h, &c, &p))
-            {
-                if (Property->IsToggled) {
-                    ImVec2 GraphMinPos = ImVec2(TimelineAbsolutePos.x, Layer_ScreenPos_Min.y + Layer_ScreenSize.y + (Layer_ScreenSize.y * Channel));
-                    ImVec2 GraphPos = GraphMinPos + ImVec2(0, Layer_ScreenSize.y);
-                    ImVec2 GraphMinBounds = GraphMinPos + ImVec2(0, Layer_ScreenSize.y * 0.5);
-                    ImVec2 GraphMaxBounds = GraphMinBounds + ImVec2(TimelineSizeWithBorder.x, Layer_ScreenSize.y);
-                    uint32 col = (Channel % 2) ? IM_COL32(50, 50, 50, 255) : IM_COL32(50, 50, 50, 128);
-                    draw_list->AddRectFilled(GraphMinBounds, GraphMaxBounds, col);
-                    ImGui_Timeline_DrawKeySheet(File, State, Memory, UI, io, draw_list, Property, ArrayLocation,
-                                                Increment, TimelineAbsolutePos, GraphPos, TimelineMoveSize, TimelineZoomSize,
-                                                TimelineSize, TimelineSizeWithBorder, LayerIncrement,
-                                                SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray, SortedPropertyInfo, SortedPropertyArray);
-                    Channel++;
-                }
-            }
-        }
-
-        //
-
-        // Precomp recursion
-
-        if (Layer->IsPrecomp && Layer->Precomp_Toggled) {
-
-            sorted_layer *Precomp_SortedLayerInfo = Layer_GetSortedArray(SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
-            sorted_comp_info Precomp_SortedCompInfo = SortedCompArray[Layer->Block_Source_Index];
-
-            block_layer *Layer_Top = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Precomp_SortedLayerInfo[Precomp_SortedCompInfo.LayerCount - 1].Block_Layer_Index);
-            block_layer *Layer_Bottom = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Precomp_SortedLayerInfo[0].Block_Layer_Index);
-            real32 SmallestY = Layer_Top->Vertical_Offset;
-            real32 LargestY = Layer_Bottom->Vertical_Offset;
-            // Layer_Evaluate_Display(Layer_Top, SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, Precomp_SortedLayerInfo, Precomp_SortedCompInfo.LayerCount - 1, &SmallestY);
-            // Layer_Evaluate_Display(Layer_Bottom, SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, Precomp_SortedLayerInfo, 0, &LargestY);
-            real32 PrecompHeight = LargestY - SmallestY + 2;
-
-            ImVec2 MinClipPos = ImVec2(Layer_ScreenPos_Min.x, Layer_ScreenPos_Max.y);
-            ImVec2 MaxClipPos = ImVec2(Layer_ScreenPos_Max.x, MinClipPos.y + (PrecompHeight * Increment.y * TimelineZoomSize.y));
-            draw_list->AddRectFilled(MinClipPos, MaxClipPos, ImColor(0.2f, 0.2f, 0.2f, 1.0f));
-
-
-            ImVec2 Layer_LocalPos_Screen = Layer_LocalPos_Ratio * TimelineZoomSize;
-            ImVec2 NestedTimelineAbsolutePos = TimelineAbsolutePos + Layer_LocalPos_Screen - ImVec2(0, SmallestY * Increment.y * TimelineZoomSize.y) + ImVec2(0, Layer_ScreenSize.y * 1.5);
-
-            ImGui::PushClipRect(MinClipPos, MaxClipPos, true);
-            draw_list->PushClipRect(MinClipPos, MaxClipPos, true);
-            uint32 RecursionsCount = Recursions+1;
-            RecursionIdx[RecursionsCount] = Index_Physical;
-            ImGui_Timeline_DrawPrecomp(File, State, Memory, UI, io, draw_list, RecursionIdx, RecursionsCount,
-                                       Increment, NestedTimelineAbsolutePos, TimelineMoveSize, TimelineZoomSize,
-                                       TimelineSize, TimelineSizeWithBorder, LayerIncrement,
-                                       SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray, SortedPropertyInfo, SortedPropertyArray);
-            draw_list->PopClipRect();
-            ImGui::PopClipRect();
-
-        }
-
-        //
-
-        ImGui::PopID();
-    }
-
-    ImGui::PopID();
-}
-
-static void
-ImGui_Timeline(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, ui *UI, ImGuiIO io,
-              sorted_comp_info *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer *SortedLayerArray, sorted_property_info *SortedPropertyInfo, uint16 *SortedPropertyArray)
-{
-    ImVec2 FramePadding = ImGui::GetStyle().FramePadding;
-    ImVec2 ItemSpacing = ImGui::GetStyle().ItemSpacing;
-    ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, ImVec2(0, 0));
-    ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(0, 0));       // makes setting up the layout easier
-    ImGui::Begin("Timeline", NULL);
-
-    if (ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows)) {
-        State->FocusedWindow = focus_timeline;
-    }
-
-    // if (State->TimelineMode == timeline_mode_graph)
-    //     ImGui_GraphInfo(File, State, Memory, UI, io, SortedPropertyInfo, SortedPropertyArray);
-
-    real32 FontHeight = ImGui::GetFontSize();
-
-    ImVec2 WindowSize = ImGui::GetWindowSize();
-
-    if (WindowSize.x < 50 || WindowSize.y < 50) {
-        ImGui::PopStyleVar(2);
-        ImGui::End();
-        return;
-    }
-
-    block_composition *MainComp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, File->PrincipalCompIndex);
-
-    ImVec2 WindowMinAbs = ImGui::GetWindowPos();
-    ImVec2 WindowMaxAbs = WindowMinAbs + WindowSize;
-
-    ImVec2 ButtonSize = ImVec2(FontHeight*2, FontHeight*2);
-
-    ImVec2 TimelineBorderPadding = ImVec2(FontHeight, FontHeight);
-
-    ImVec2 TimelineSize = ImVec2(WindowSize.x, WindowSize.y);
-    ImVec2 TimelineSizeWithBorder = TimelineSize - TimelineBorderPadding*2;
-    ImVec2 TimelineAbsolutePos = WindowMinAbs + TimelineBorderPadding;
-
-    ImVec2 KeyframeSize = ImVec2(FontHeight, FontHeight);
-
-    int32 FrameCount = MainComp->Frame_Count;
-
-    ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList();
-    draw_list->AddRectFilled(WindowMinAbs, WindowMaxAbs,
-                             IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 50));
-
-
-    ImGui::BeginChild("Timeline",  TimelineSize, true, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar);
-
-    ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(0.0f, ItemSpacing.y));
-
-    ImGui::PushClipRect(TimelineAbsolutePos, TimelineAbsolutePos + TimelineSizeWithBorder, true);
-    draw_list->PushClipRect(TimelineAbsolutePos, TimelineAbsolutePos + TimelineSizeWithBorder, true);
-
-    real32 LayerIncrement = 40;
-
-    ImVec2 Val_Min(0, 0);
-    ImVec2 Val_Max(40, LayerIncrement);
-
-    // DebugWatchVar("Selection", &State->RecentSelectionType, d_int);
-
-    // ImVec2 *ActivePercentZoomed = (UI->TimelineMode != timeline_mode_graph) ? &UI->TimelinePercentZoomed : &UI->GraphPercentZoomed;
-    // ImVec2 *ActivePercentOffset = (UI->TimelineMode != timeline_mode_graph) ? &UI->TimelinePercentOffset : &UI->GraphPercentOffset;
-    ImVec2 *ActivePercentZoomed = &UI->TimelinePercentZoomed;
-    ImVec2 *ActivePercentOffset = &UI->TimelinePercentOffset;
-
-    if (ActivePercentZoomed->x == 0) {
-        *ActivePercentZoomed = ImVec2(1, 1);
-    }
-
-    ImVec2 ActiveZoomSize = TimelineSizeWithBorder / *ActivePercentZoomed;
-    ImVec2 ActiveMoveSize = TimelineSizeWithBorder * *ActivePercentOffset / *ActivePercentZoomed;
-
-    ImVec2 TimelineZoomSize = TimelineSizeWithBorder / UI->TimelinePercentZoomed;
-    ImVec2 TimelineMoveSize = TimelineSizeWithBorder * UI->TimelinePercentOffset / UI->TimelinePercentZoomed;
-
-    // DebugWatchVar("TimelineY: ", &TimelineMoveSize.y, d_float);
-
-    ImVec2 Increment = ImVec2((real32)1 / MainComp->Frame_Count, (real32)1 / LayerIncrement);
-
-    ImGui_Timeline_BGElements(State, UI, draw_list, TimelineSizeWithBorder, TimelineAbsolutePos, *MainComp, TimelineZoomSize, TimelineMoveSize);
-
-    int16 RecursionIdx[MAX_PRECOMP_RECURSIONS] = {};
-    int32 Recursions = 0;
-    RecursionIdx[0] = -1;
-    ImGui_Timeline_DrawPrecomp(File, State, Memory, UI, io, draw_list, RecursionIdx, Recursions,
-                               Increment, TimelineAbsolutePos, TimelineMoveSize, TimelineZoomSize,
-                               TimelineSize, TimelineSizeWithBorder, LayerIncrement,
-                               SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray, SortedPropertyInfo, SortedPropertyArray);
-
-    if (State->TimelineMode == timeline_mode_graph) {
-
-        if (UI->GraphMoveSize.y == 0) {
-            UI->GraphZoomSize = ImVec2(1, UI->TimelinePercentZoomed.y );
-            UI->GraphMoveSize = ImVec2(0, -UI->TimelinePercentOffset.y );
-        }
-
-        ImVec2 ZoomDifference = (UI->TimelinePercentZoomed / UI->GraphZoomSize);
-        ImVec2 MoveDifference = (UI->TimelinePercentOffset + (UI->GraphMoveSize));
-        // DebugWatchVar("zoomdif: ", &ZoomDifference.y, d_float);
-        // DebugWatchVar("movedif: ", &MoveDifference.y, d_float);
-        ImVec2 GraphZoomSize = TimelineSizeWithBorder / ZoomDifference;
-        ImVec2 GraphMoveSize = TimelineSizeWithBorder * (MoveDifference) / UI->TimelinePercentZoomed;
-        // DebugWatchVar("zoomsize: ", &GraphZoomSize.y, d_float);
-        // DebugWatchVar("movesize: ", &GraphMoveSize.y, d_float);
-
-        draw_list->AddRectFilled(WindowMinAbs, WindowMaxAbs,
-                                 IM_COL32(50, 50, 50, 230));
-        ImGui_Timeline_DrawGraph(File, State, Memory, UI, io, draw_list,
-                                 Increment, TimelineAbsolutePos, GraphMoveSize, GraphZoomSize,
-                                 TimelineSize, TimelineSizeWithBorder, LayerIncrement,
-                                 SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray,
-                                 SortedPropertyInfo, SortedPropertyArray);
-    }
-
-    ImGui_Timeline_HorizontalIncrementDraw(State, UI, draw_list, TimelineSizeWithBorder, TimelineAbsolutePos, *MainComp, TimelineZoomSize, TimelineMoveSize);
-
-
-    ImVec2 MouseDelta = io.MouseDelta / TimelineSize;
-
-    real32 BarHandleSize = FontHeight;
-    real32 BarThickness = 50;
-    real32 BarMinZoom = 0.01;
-
-    real32 BarH_Pos = -TimelineSizeWithBorder.x * ActivePercentOffset->x;
-    real32 BarH_Size = TimelineSizeWithBorder.x / (1 / ActivePercentZoomed->x);
-
-    // I use "UI" to denote the size/position after clipping the bar so that it
-    // doesn't go out of bounds and the handles are always selectable at the edges.
-
-    real32 BarH_Offset = Max(BarH_Pos, 0);
-
-    real32 BarH_SizeUI = (BarH_Size + BarH_Pos > TimelineSizeWithBorder.x) ?
-                             TimelineSizeWithBorder.x - BarH_Pos :
-                             BarH_Size + (BarH_Pos - BarH_Offset);
-
-    if (BarH_Offset == 0 && BarH_SizeUI > TimelineSizeWithBorder.x)
-        BarH_SizeUI = TimelineSizeWithBorder.x;
-
-    BarH_SizeUI = BarH_SizeUI - BarHandleSize*2;
-
-    BarH_SizeUI = Max(BarH_SizeUI, FontHeight*4);
-
-    BarH_Offset = Min(BarH_Offset, TimelineSize.x - BarH_SizeUI - BarHandleSize*4);
-    ImVec2 BarH_PosUI = TimelineAbsolutePos + ImVec2(BarH_Offset, TimelineSize.y - BarThickness);
-    bool32 BarHeld = false;
-
-    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(BarH_PosUI);
-    ImGui::Button("##scrollbarleft", ImVec2(BarHandleSize, BarThickness));
-
-    if ((ImGui::IsItemActive() && ImGui::IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton_Left, -1)))
-    {
-        if ((ActivePercentZoomed->x - MouseDelta.x) > BarMinZoom) {
-            ActivePercentZoomed->x -= MouseDelta.x;
-            ActivePercentOffset->x -= MouseDelta.x;
-        }
-        BarHeld = true;
-    }
-
-    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(BarH_PosUI + ImVec2(BarHandleSize, 0));
-    ImGui::Button("##scrollbarhori", ImVec2(BarH_SizeUI, BarThickness));
-
-    if (ImGui::IsItemActive() && ImGui::IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton_Left, -1))
-    {
-        ActivePercentOffset->x -= MouseDelta.x;
-        BarHeld = true;
-    }
-
-    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(BarH_PosUI + ImVec2(BarHandleSize, 0) + ImVec2(BarH_SizeUI, 0));
-    ImGui::Button("##scrollbarright", ImVec2(BarHandleSize, BarThickness));
-
-    if ((ImGui::IsItemActive() && ImGui::IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton_Left, -1)))
-    {
-        if ((ActivePercentZoomed->x + MouseDelta.x) > BarMinZoom) {
-            ActivePercentZoomed->x += MouseDelta.x;
-        }
-        BarHeld = true;
-    }
-
-    if (BarHeld) {
-        ImGui_WarpMouse(State, io.MousePos, TimelineAbsolutePos, TimelineAbsolutePos + TimelineSizeWithBorder, 1);
-    }
-
-    Assert(ActivePercentZoomed->x > BarMinZoom);
-
-    real32 BarV_MaxSize = TimelineSizeWithBorder.y - BarThickness/2;
-    real32 BarV_Pos = -BarV_MaxSize * ActivePercentOffset->y;
-    real32 BarV_Size = BarV_MaxSize / (1 / ActivePercentZoomed->y);
-    BarV_Size = Max(BarV_Size, FontHeight*4);
-
-    real32 BarV_Offset = Max(BarV_Pos, 0);
-
-    real32 BarV_SizeUI = (BarV_Size + BarV_Pos > BarV_MaxSize) ?
-                             BarV_MaxSize - BarV_Pos :
-                             BarV_Size + (BarV_Pos - BarV_Offset);
-
-    if (BarV_Offset == 0 && BarV_SizeUI > BarV_MaxSize)
-        BarV_SizeUI = BarV_MaxSize;
-
-    BarV_SizeUI = BarV_SizeUI - BarHandleSize*2;
-
-    BarV_SizeUI = Max(BarV_SizeUI, FontHeight*4);
-
-    BarV_Offset = Min(BarV_Offset, BarV_MaxSize - BarV_SizeUI - BarHandleSize*4);
-    ImVec2 BarV_PosUI = TimelineAbsolutePos + ImVec2(TimelineSize.x - BarThickness, BarV_Offset);
-    BarHeld = false;
-
-    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(BarV_PosUI);
-    ImGui::Button("##h-scrollbarleft", ImVec2(BarThickness, BarHandleSize));
-
-    if ((ImGui::IsItemActive() && ImGui::IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton_Left, -1)))
-    {
-        ActivePercentZoomed->y -= MouseDelta.y;
-        ActivePercentOffset->y -= MouseDelta.y;
-        BarHeld = true;
-    }
-
-    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(BarV_PosUI + ImVec2(0, BarHandleSize));
-    ImGui::Button("##h-scrollbar", ImVec2(BarThickness, BarV_SizeUI));
-
-    if (ImGui::IsItemHovered() && io.MouseWheel)
-    {
-        ActivePercentOffset->y -= io.MouseWheel/10;
-    }
-
-    if (ImGui::IsItemActive() && ImGui::IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton_Left, -1))
-    {
-        ActivePercentOffset->y -= MouseDelta.y;
-        BarHeld = true;
-    }
-
-    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(BarV_PosUI + ImVec2(0, BarHandleSize) + ImVec2(0, BarV_SizeUI));
-    ImGui::Button("##h-scrollbarright", ImVec2(BarThickness, BarHandleSize));
-
-    if ((ImGui::IsItemActive() && ImGui::IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton_Left, -1)))
-    {
-        ActivePercentZoomed->y += MouseDelta.y;
-        BarHeld = true;
-    }
-
-    ActivePercentZoomed->y = Max(ActivePercentZoomed->y, 0.01);
-
-    if (BarHeld) {
-        ImGui_WarpMouse(State, io.MousePos, TimelineAbsolutePos, TimelineAbsolutePos + TimelineSizeWithBorder, 2);
-    }
-
-    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(TimelineAbsolutePos);
-    ImGui::InvisibleButton("TimelineMoving", TimelineSizeWithBorder, ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonLeft | ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonRight);
-    // ImGui::Button("TimelineMoving", TimelineSizeWithBorder);
-    bool32 IsHovered = ImGui::IsItemHovered();
-    bool32 IsItemActive = ImGui::IsItemActive();
-    bool32 IsItemActivated = ImGui::IsItemActivated();
-    bool32 IsItemDeactivated = ImGui::IsItemDeactivated();
-    bool32 LeftClick = ImGui::IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton_Left);
-    bool32 RightClick = ImGui::IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton_Right);
-
-    if (IsHovered && io.MouseWheel) {
-        real32 Increment = 0.1;
-        bool32 Direction = (io.MouseWheel > 0) ? 1 : -1;
-        ImVec2 Offset = (io.MousePos - (TimelineAbsolutePos + ActiveMoveSize)) / ActiveZoomSize;
-        if (io.KeyShift) {
-                ActivePercentOffset->y += Increment*Direction;
-        } else if (io.KeyCtrl) {
-                ActivePercentOffset->x += Increment*Direction*0.3;
-        } else {
-            if (Direction == 1) {
-                *ActivePercentZoomed = *ActivePercentZoomed - (*ActivePercentZoomed * Increment);
-                *ActivePercentOffset = *ActivePercentOffset - ((*ActivePercentOffset * Increment) + Offset*Increment);
-            } else {
-                *ActivePercentOffset = ((*ActivePercentOffset + Offset*Increment) / (1.0f - Increment));
-                *ActivePercentZoomed = (*ActivePercentZoomed / (1.0f - Increment));
-            }
-        }
-    }
-
-    if (LeftClick) {
-        if (IsItemActivated) {
-            if (!io.KeyShift && State->TimelineMode == timeline_mode_default) Layer_DeselectAll(File, State, Memory);
-            if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_move ||
-                State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_rotate ||
-                State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_scale) {
-                Bezier_Commit(File, State, Memory, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray, SortedPropertyInfo, SortedPropertyArray);
-            }
-            State->BoxSelect = true;
-        }
-        if (IsItemActive) {
-            Assert(State->BoxSelect);
-            draw_list->AddRectFilled(io.MouseClickedPos[0], io.MousePos,
-                                     IM_COL32(0, 0, 200, 50));
-        }
-    } else {
-        State->Warp_X = 0;
-        State->Warp_Y = 0;
-    }
-
-    if (IsItemDeactivated) {
-        State->BoxSelect = false;
-    }
-
-    draw_list->PopClipRect();
-    ImGui::PopClipRect();
-
-    ImGui::PopStyleVar();
-
-
-    ImGui::EndChild();
-
-    ImGui::PopStyleVar(2);
-
-    ImGui::End();
-}
-
-#include "keybinds.h"
-
-static void
-ImGui_Key_GetUIInfo(key_entry KeyEntry, real32 KeySize, ImVec2 *Offset_ScreenPos, ImVec2 *KeyScreenSize) {
-    ImVec2 Extra(0, 0);
-    if (KeyEntry.Sector == 0) {
-        if (KeyEntry.Offset.x != 0) {
-            if (KeyEntry.Offset.y == 1) {
-                Extra.x += 0.5;
-            }
-            if (KeyEntry.Offset.y == 2) {
-                Extra.x += 0.75;
-            }
-            if (KeyEntry.Offset.y == 3) {
-                Extra.x += 1.5;
-            }
-        }
-    }
-    *Offset_ScreenPos = ImVec2(KeySize, KeySize) * (SectorOffset[KeyEntry.Sector] + Extra + KeyEntry.Offset);
-    *KeyScreenSize = (KeyEntry.WidthRatio > 0.0f) ? ImVec2(KeySize * KeyEntry.WidthRatio, KeySize) : ImVec2(KeySize, KeySize * -KeyEntry.WidthRatio);
-}
-
-static void
-ImGui_KeybindUI(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io)
-{
-    real32 KeySize = ImGui::GetFontSize()*2;
-    real32 KeyboardWidth = KeySize * 23.5;
-    real32 KeyboardHeight = KeySize * 7;
-    ImVec2 WindowSize = ImGui::GetWindowSize();
-    ImVec2 WindowMinAbs = ImGui::GetWindowPos();
-    ImVec2 WindowMaxAbs = WindowMinAbs + WindowSize;
-    ImVec2 KeyboardPos((WindowSize.x - KeyboardWidth) / 2, KeySize*2);
-    ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList();
-    ImVec2 SectorOffset[4] = { ImVec2(0, 1.25), ImVec2(0,0), ImVec2(15.25, 1.25), ImVec2(19.5, 1.25) };
-
-    ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, IM_COL32(190, 0, 50, 180));
-    if (ImGui::Button("X"))
-        ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup();
-    ImGui::PopStyleColor();
-
-    State->Split_KeybindUI.Split(draw_list, 2);
-    State->Split_KeybindUI.SetCurrentChannel(draw_list, 1);
-
-    // keyboard
-    ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, IM_COL32(0, 0, 0, 180));
-    for (int k = 0; k < AmountOf(KeyEntries); k++) {
-        key_entry KeyEntry = KeyEntries[k];
-        ImVec2 Offset_ScreenPos(0,0);
-        ImVec2 KeyScreenSize(0,0);
-        ImGui_Key_GetUIInfo(KeyEntry, KeySize, &Offset_ScreenPos, &KeyScreenSize);
-        if (KeyEntry.Name[0] != '\0') {
-            ImGui::PushID(k);
-            ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(WindowMinAbs + KeyboardPos + Offset_ScreenPos);
-            ImGui::Button(KeyEntry.Name, KeyScreenSize);
-            ImGui::PopID();
-        }
-    }
-    ImGui::PopStyleColor();
-
-    State->Split_KeybindUI.SetCurrentChannel(draw_list, 0);
-
-    // list
-    ImVec2 SubwindowMinPos(WindowMinAbs + KeyboardPos + ImVec2(0, KeyboardHeight + KeySize));
-    ImVec2 SubwindowSize(KeyboardWidth, WindowSize.y - KeyboardHeight - KeySize*4);
-    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(SubwindowMinPos);
-    ImGui::BeginChild("Keybinds info", SubwindowSize);
-    key_mode CurrentKeyMode = (key_mode)9999;
-    for (int a = 0; a < AmountOf(ShortcutArray); a++) {
-        shortcut_entry ShortcutEntry = ShortcutArray[a];
-
-        // header info
-        if (CurrentKeyMode != ShortcutEntry.Mode) {
-            ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2(1, KeySize));
-            CurrentKeyMode = ShortcutEntry.Mode;
-            ImVec2 Size = ImGui::CalcTextSize(KeyModeTitles[CurrentKeyMode]);
-            ImGui::SetCursorPosX(((SubwindowSize.x / 2) - (Size.x / 2)));
-            ImGui::Text(KeyModeTitles[CurrentKeyMode]);
-            ImGui::SetCursorPosX((SubwindowSize.x / 2) - (ImGui::CalcTextSize("-----").x / 2));
-            ImGui::TextColored(ImColor(UI->LayerColors[CurrentKeyMode]), "-----");
-            ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2(1, KeySize/4));
-            while (ShortcutEntry.Key == ImGuiKey_None) {
-                ImVec2 Size = ImGui::CalcTextSize(ShortcutEntry.Name);
-                ImGui::SetCursorPosX(((SubwindowSize.x / 2) - (Size.x / 2)));
-                ImGui::Text(ShortcutEntry.Name);
-                a++;
-                ShortcutEntry = ShortcutArray[a];
-            }
-            ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2(1, KeySize/2));
-        }
-
-        // shortcut text + key
-        Assert(ShortcutEntry.Key != ImGuiKey_None);
-        key_entry KeyEntry = KeyEntries[ShortcutEntry.Key - ImGuiKey_Tab];
-        real32 Padding = KeySize;
-        ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2(Padding, 1));
-        ImGui::SameLine();
-        ImGui::Text(ShortcutEntry.Name);
-        ImGui::SameLine();
-        char buf[64];
-        if (ShortcutEntry.Mods == Mod_None) {
-            sprintf(buf, "%s", KeyEntry.Name);
-        } else if (ShortcutEntry.Mods == Mod_Shift) {
-            sprintf(buf, "%s", KeyEntry.ShiftName);
-        } else {
-            sprintf(buf, "%s + %s", KeyModText[ShortcutEntry.Mods], KeyEntry.Name);
-        }
-        ImVec2 Size = ImGui::CalcTextSize(buf);
-        ImGui::SetCursorPosX(SubwindowSize.x - Size.x - Padding*1.5);
-        ImGui::Text(buf);
-
-        // indicator on keyboard
-        ImVec2 Offset_ScreenPos(0,0);
-        ImVec2 KeyScreenSize(0,0);
-        ImGui_Key_GetUIInfo(KeyEntry, KeySize, &Offset_ScreenPos, &KeyScreenSize);
-        real32 ModeSliverSize = KeySize / key_mode_count;
-        Offset_ScreenPos.x += (ShortcutEntry.Mode * ModeSliverSize);
-        KeyScreenSize = ImVec2(ModeSliverSize, KeyScreenSize.y);
-        ImVec2 MinPos = WindowMinAbs + KeyboardPos + Offset_ScreenPos;
-        draw_list->AddRectFilled(MinPos, MinPos + KeyScreenSize, UI->LayerColors[CurrentKeyMode]);
-    }
-    ImGui::EndChild();
-    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Escape)) {
-        ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup();
-    }
-    ImGui::EndPopup();
-
-    State->Split_KeybindUI.Merge(draw_list);
-}
-
-static void
-ImGui_Popups(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io)
-{
-    switch (State->ImGuiPopups)
-    {
-        case popup_none:
-        {
-        } break;
-        case popup_saveas:
-        {
-            ImGui::OpenPopup("Save as");
-            ImGui::SetKeyboardFocusHere();
-        } break;
-        case popup_keybinds:
-        {
-            ImGui::OpenPopup("Keybinds");
-            ImGui::SetKeyboardFocusHere();
-        } break;
-        default:
-        {
-            Assert(0);
-        }
-    }
-    State->ImGuiPopups = popup_none;
-
-    if (ImGui::BeginPopupModal("Save as")) {
-        ImGui::Text("Destination path...");
-        ImGui::InputText("File", State->Filename, 512);
-        if (ImGui::Button("Save file")) {
-            ImGui::Text("Saving...");
-            File_SaveAs(File, State, Memory, State->Filename);
-            ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup();
-        }
-        if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Escape)) {
-            ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup();
-        }
-        ImGui::EndPopup();
-    }
-    if (ImGui::BeginPopupModal("Keybinds")) {
-        ImGui_KeybindUI(File, State, UI, Memory, io);
-    }
-}
-
-static void
-ImGui_ProcessInputs(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io, sorted_file Sorted)
-{
-    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Q)) {
-        State->IsRunning = false;
-    }
-    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_W)) {
-        block_composition *MainComp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, File->PrincipalCompIndex);
-        State->Frame_Current = ((State->Frame_Current - 1) < 0) ? 0 : State->Frame_Current - 1;
-        State->UpdateFrame = true;
-        State->UpdateKeyframes = true;
-    }
-    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_E)) {
-        if (!io.KeyShift) {
-            block_composition *MainComp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, File->PrincipalCompIndex);
-            State->Frame_Current = ((State->Frame_Current + 1) >= MainComp->Frame_Count) ? 0 : State->Frame_Current + 1;
-            State->UpdateFrame = true;
-            State->UpdateKeyframes = true;
-        } else {
-            State->Brush.EraseMode ^= 1;
-        }
-    }
-    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_U)) {
-        Project_ToggleAllChannels(File, State, Memory, Sorted.CompArray, Sorted.LayerArray, Sorted.PropertyInfo, Sorted.PropertyArray);
-    }
-    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_X)) {
-        if (State->TimelineMode == timeline_mode_graph && State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_move) {
-            if (State->Interact_Modifier != 1)
-                State->Interact_Modifier = 1;
-            else
-                State->Interact_Modifier = 0;
-        } else {
-            v4 Temp = UI->Color;
-            UI->Color = UI->AltColor;
-            UI->AltColor = Temp;
-        }
-    }
-    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Y)) {
-        if (State->TimelineMode == timeline_mode_graph && State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_move) {
-            if (State->Interact_Modifier != 2)
-                State->Interact_Modifier = 2;
-            else
-                State->Interact_Modifier = 0;
-        }
-    }
-    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_V)) {
-        State->Tool = tool_default;
-    }
-    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_B)) {
-        State->Tool = tool_brush;
-    }
-    // NOTE(fox): File data not tracked on undo tree!
-    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_N)) {
-        if (io.KeyShift) {
-            block_composition *MainComp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, File->PrincipalCompIndex);
-            if (MainComp->Frame_Start < State->Frame_Current)
-                MainComp->Frame_End = State->Frame_Current;
-        } else {
-            block_composition *MainComp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, File->PrincipalCompIndex);
-            if (MainComp->Frame_End > State->Frame_Current)
-                MainComp->Frame_Start = State->Frame_Current;
-        }
-    }
-    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Tab)) {
-        State->TimelineMode = (State->TimelineMode == timeline_mode_default) ? timeline_mode_graph : timeline_mode_default;
-        UI->GraphZoomSize = ImVec2(0, 0);
-        UI->GraphMoveSize = ImVec2(0, 0);
-    }
-    if (!io.KeyCtrl) {
-        // NOTE(fox): Checking IsWindowHovered seems to be all we need to do to
-        // make per-window hotkeys work; setting it as the focused window causes
-        // problems with popups.
-        if (State->FocusedWindow == focus_timeline) {
-            if (State->TimelineMode == timeline_mode_default) {
-                if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_G)) {
-                    Layer_ToggleChannel(File, Memory, 0);
-                    Layer_ToggleChannel(File, Memory, 1);
-                } else if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_A)) {
-                    Layer_ToggleChannel(File, Memory, 2);
-                    Layer_ToggleChannel(File, Memory, 3);
-                } else if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_R)) {
-                    Layer_ToggleChannel(File, Memory, 4);
-                } else if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_S)) {
-                    Layer_ToggleChannel(File, Memory, 5);
-                } else if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_T)) {
-                    if (io.KeyShift) {
-                        Layer_ToggleChannel(File, Memory, 6);
-                    } else {
-                        Layer_ToggleChannel(File, Memory, 7);
-                    }
-                }
-            } else if (State->TimelineMode == timeline_mode_graph) {
-                if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_G)) {
-                        State->Interact_Offset[2] = io.MousePos.x;
-                        State->Interact_Offset[3] = io.MousePos.y;
-                        State->Interact_Active = interact_type_keyframe_move;
-                } else if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_R)) {
-                        // State->Interact_Offset[2] = io.MousePos.x;
-                        // State->Interact_Offset[3] = io.MousePos.y;
-                        // State->Interact_Active = interact_type_keyframe_rotate;
-                } else if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_S)) {
-                        State->Interact_Offset[2] = io.MousePos.x;
-                        State->Interact_Offset[3] = io.MousePos.y;
-                        State->Interact_Active = interact_type_keyframe_scale;
-                }
-            }
-        } else if (State->FocusedWindow == focus_viewport) {
-            if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_T)) {
-                Interact_Transform_Begin(File, Memory, State, io.MousePos, Sorted.CompArray, Sorted.LayerArray);
-                State->Tool = tool_default;
-            }
-        }
-    }
-    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Escape)) {
-        if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_move ||
-            State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_rotate ||
-            State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_scale) {
-            State->Interact_Offset[0] = 0;
-            State->Interact_Offset[1] = 0;
-            State->Interact_Offset[2] = 0;
-            State->Interact_Offset[3] = 0;
-            State->Interact_Active = interact_type_none;
-            State->Interact_Modifier = 0;
-            State->UpdateFrame = true;
-        }
-    }
-    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Space) ) {
-        if (io.KeyShift) {
-            State->RerouteEffects = true;
-        } else { State->IsPlaying ^= 1;
-        }
-    }
-    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_2)) {
-        int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
-        while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, File->Layer_Count, &h, &c, &i)) {
-            block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
-            if (Layer->IsSelected && Layer->IsPrecomp) {
-                Layer->Precomp_Toggled ^= 1;
-            }
-        }
-    }
-
-    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Delete))
-    {
-        State->HotkeyInput = hotkey_deletelayer;
-    }
-
-    if (io.KeyShift && ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Slash))
-    {
-        State->ImGuiPopups = popup_keybinds;
-    }
-
-#if DEBUG
-    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_3))
-    {
-        // State->ImGuiPopups = popup_keybinds;
-        Debug.DisableAlpha = 0;
-        State->UpdateFrame = true;
-    }
-    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_4))
-    {
-        Debug.DisableAlpha = 1;
-        State->UpdateFrame = true;
-    }
-    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_5))
-    {
-        Debug.DisableAlpha = 2;
-        State->UpdateFrame = true;
-    }
-    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_F))
-    {
-        sprintf(State->DummyName, "test2");
-        File_Open(File, State, Memory, State->DummyName);
-        State->UpdateFrame = true;
-        State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer = 0;
-    }
-    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_0))
-    {
-        Debug.ReloadUI ^= 1;
-    }
-    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_1))
-    {
-        Debug.ToggleWindow ^= 1;
-    }
-#endif
-
-    bool32 mod_key = io.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors ? io.KeySuper : io.KeyCtrl;
-    if (mod_key) {
-        if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_S)) {
-            if (io.KeyShift) {
-                State->ImGuiPopups = popup_saveas;
-            } else {
-                if (State->Filename[0] == '\0') {
-                    State->ImGuiPopups = popup_saveas;
-                } else {
-                    File_SaveAs(File, State, Memory, State->Filename);
-                }
-            }
-        }
-        if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_C)) {
-            Clipboard_Store(File, State, Memory, Sorted.CompArray, Sorted.LayerArray, Sorted.PropertyInfo, Sorted.PropertyArray);
-        }
-        if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_V)) {
-            Clipboard_Paste(File, State, Memory, Sorted.CompArray, Sorted.LayerArray, Sorted.PropertyArray);
-        }
-        if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Z)) {
-            if (io.KeyShift) {
-                State->HotkeyInput = hotkey_redo;
-            } else {
-                State->HotkeyInput = hotkey_undo;
-            }
-        }
-    }
-}
-
-static void
-ImGui_Menu(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io)
-{
-    bool open = true;
-    ImGui::Begin("Menu", &open, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar);
-    if (ImGui::BeginMenuBar())
-    {
-        if (ImGui::BeginMenu("File"))
-        {
-            if (ImGui::MenuItem("Save", "Ctrl+S"))
-            {
-                if (State->Filename[0] == '\0')
-                    State->ImGuiPopups = popup_saveas;
-                else
-                    File_SaveAs(File, State, Memory, State->Filename);
-            }
-            if (ImGui::MenuItem("Save as", "Ctrl+Shift+S"))
-            {
-                State->ImGuiPopups = popup_saveas;
-            }
-            if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Open file"))
-            {
-                ImGui::InputText("Filename", State->DummyName, 512);
-                if (ImGui::IsItemDeactivated() && ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Enter)) {
-                    if (File_Open(File, State, Memory, State->DummyName)) {
-                        State->UpdateFrame = true;
-                    } else {
-                        PostMsg(State, "File not found.");
-                    }
-                }
-                ImGui::EndMenu();
-            }
-            ImGui::EndMenu();
-        }
-        if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Layer"))
-        {
-            if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Import source from file"))
-            {
-                ImGui::InputText("Path to image", State->DummyName2, 512);
-                if (ImGui::IsItemDeactivated() && ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Enter)) {
-                    int SourceIndex = Source_Generate(File, State, Memory, (void *)State->DummyName2);
-                    State->UpdateFrame = true;
-                }
-                ImGui::EndMenu();
-            }
-            ImGui::EndMenu();
-        }
-        if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Window"))
-        {
-#if STABLE
-            if (ImGui::Selectable("Stable Diffusion tools", UI->StableEnabled))
-                UI->StableEnabled ^= 1;
-            ImGui::EndMenu();
-#endif
-        }
-        ImGui::EndMenuBar();
-    }
-
-    ImGui::End();
-}
-
-static void
-ImGui_EffectsPanel(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, ui *UI, ImGuiIO io)
-{
-    ImGui::Begin("Effects list", NULL);
-    if (State->RerouteEffects) {
-        ImGui::SetKeyboardFocusHere();
-        State->RerouteEffects = 0;
-    }
-    int value_changed = ImGui::InputText("Effect name...", State->filter.InputBuf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(State->filter.InputBuf),
-                                          ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion, EffectConsoleCallback);
-
-    if (Hacko) {
-        if (!io.KeyShift)
-            EffectSel++;
-        else
-            EffectSel--;
-        Hacko = 0;
-    }
-    if (value_changed) {
-        State->filter.Build();
-        EffectSel = -1;
-    }
-    // Enter conveniently deactivates the InputText field
-    if (ImGui::IsItemDeactivated() && ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Enter)) {
-        int32 p = 0;
-        for (int32 i = 0; i < State->Playhead_Effect; i++) {
-            header_effect *EffectHeader = &State->Effect[i];
-            if (State->filter.PassFilter(EffectHeader->Name)) {
-                if (EffectSel == p && State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer != -1) {
-                    Effect_Add(File, State, Memory, i);
-                    State->UpdateFrame = true;
-                }
-                p++;
-            }
-        }
-        EffectSel = -1;
-    }
-    int32 p = 0;
-    for (int32 i = 0; i < State->Playhead_Effect; i++) {
-        header_effect *EffectHeader = &State->Effect[i];
-        if (State->filter.PassFilter(EffectHeader->Name)) {
-            bool t = false;
-            if (EffectSel == p) {
-                t = true;
-            }
-            ImGui::Selectable(EffectHeader->Name, &t);
-            if (ImGui::IsItemClicked()) {
-                if (ImGui::IsMouseDoubleClicked(ImGuiMouseButton_Left) && State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer != -1) {
-                    Effect_Add(File, State, Memory, i);
-                    State->UpdateFrame = true;
-                }
-            }
-            p++;
-        }
-    }
-    ImGui::End();
-}
-
-static char ImGuiPrefs[] = "[Window][DockSpaceViewport_11111111]\n"
-"Pos=0,0\n"
-"Size=3840,2160\n"
-"Collapsed=0\n"
-"\n"
-"[Window][Debug##Default]\n"
-"Pos=122,442\n"
-"Size=400,400\n"
-"Collapsed=0\n"
-"\n"
-"[Window][Viewport]\n"
-"Pos=443,34\n"
-"Size=2872,1565\n"
-"Collapsed=0\n"
-"DockId=0x00000010,0\n"
-"\n"
-"[Window][###Properties]\n"
-"Pos=0,34\n"
-"Size=441,1565\n"
-"Collapsed=0\n"
-"DockId=0x0000000B,0\n"
-"\n"
-"[Window][Timeline]\n"
-"Pos=0,1601\n"
-"Size=3840,559\n"
-"Collapsed=0\n"
-"DockId=0x0000000A,0\n"
-"\n"
-"[Window][Dear ImGui Demo]\n"
-"Pos=2677,34\n"
-"Size=523,437\n"
-"Collapsed=0\n"
-"DockId=0x00000011,1\n"
-"\n"
-"[Window][Files]\n"
-"Pos=3317,604\n"
-"Size=523,743\n"
-"Collapsed=0\n"
-"DockId=0x00000007,0\n"
-"\n"
-"[Window][Effects list]\n"
-"Pos=3317,1349\n"
-"Size=523,250\n"
-"Collapsed=0\n"
-"DockId=0x00000008,0\n"
-"\n"
-"[Window][Graph editor]\n"
-"Pos=0,949\n"
-"Size=3200,526\n"
-"Collapsed=0\n"
-"DockId=0x00000009,0\n"
-"\n"
-"[Window][undotree]\n"
-"Pos=2677,473\n"
-"Size=523,572\n"
-"Collapsed=0\n"
-"DockId=0x00000007,2\n"
-"\n"
-"[Window][memoryviewer]\n"
-"Pos=50,273\n"
-"Size=800,200\n"
-"Collapsed=0\n"
-"\n"
-"[Window][Example: Custom rendering]\n"
-"Pos=758,789\n"
-"Size=485,414\n"
-"Collapsed=0\n"
-"\n"
-"[Window][Memory viewer]\n"
-"Pos=2677,473\n"
-"Size=523,572\n"
-"Collapsed=0\n"
-"DockId=0x00000007,1\n"
-"\n"
-"[Window][Graph info]\n"
-"Pos=2838,1265\n"
-"Size=235,353\n"
-"Collapsed=0\n"
-"\n"
-"[Window][Properties]\n"
-"Pos=0,34\n"
-"Size=495,1056\n"
-"Collapsed=0\n"
-"DockId=0x0000000F,0\n"
-"\n"
-"[Window][Colors]\n"
-"Pos=3317,34\n"
-"Size=523,568\n"
-"Collapsed=0\n"
-"DockId=0x00000011,0\n"
-"\n"
-"[Window][Menu]\n"
-"Pos=0,0\n"
-"Size=3840,32\n"
-"Collapsed=0\n"
-"DockId=0x0000000D,0\n"
-"\n"
-"[Window][Stable Diffusion]\n"
-"Pos=2206,684\n"
-"Size=421,462\n"
-"Collapsed=0\n"
-"\n"
-"[Window][SD prompt input]\n"
-"Pos=2677,473\n"
-"Size=523,541\n"
-"Collapsed=0\n"
-"DockId=0x00000007,2\n"
-"\n"
-"[Window][Example: Console]\n"
-"Pos=747,851\n"
-"Size=520,600\n"
-"Collapsed=0\n"
-"\n"
-"[Window][SD gallery]\n"
-"Pos=0,718\n"
-"Size=441,557\n"
-"Collapsed=0\n"
-"DockId=0x0000000C,0\n"
-"\n"
-"[Window][Save as]\n"
-"Pos=1782,1058\n"
-"Size=300,116\n"
-"Collapsed=0\n"
-"\n"
-"[Window][Keybinds]\n"
-"Pos=1573,769\n"
-"Size=750,639\n"
-"Collapsed=0\n"
-"\n"
-"[Table][0x861D378E,3]\n"
-"Column 0  Weight=1.0000\n"
-"Column 1  Weight=1.0000\n"
-"Column 2  Weight=1.0000\n"
-"\n"
-"[Table][0x1F146634,3]\n"
-"RefScale=13\n"
-"Column 0  Width=63\n"
-"Column 1  Width=63\n"
-"Column 2  Width=63\n"
-"\n"
-"[Table][0x64418101,3]\n"
-"RefScale=13\n"
-"Column 0  Width=63\n"
-"Column 1  Width=63\n"
-"Column 2  Width=63\n"
-"\n"
-"[Table][0xC9935533,3]\n"
-"Column 0  Weight=1.0000\n"
-"Column 1  Weight=1.0000\n"
-"Column 2  Weight=1.0000\n"
-"\n"
-"[Docking][Data]\n"
-"DockSpace             ID=0x8B93E3BD Window=0xA787BDB4 Pos=0,0 Size=3840,2160 Split=Y Selected=0x13926F0B\n"
-"  DockNode            ID=0x0000000D Parent=0x8B93E3BD SizeRef=3200,32 HiddenTabBar=1 Selected=0xA57AB2C6\n"
-"  DockNode            ID=0x0000000E Parent=0x8B93E3BD SizeRef=3200,1299 Split=Y\n"
-"    DockNode          ID=0x00000001 Parent=0x0000000E SizeRef=3200,1205 Split=X Selected=0x13926F0B\n"
-"      DockNode        ID=0x00000003 Parent=0x00000001 SizeRef=441,1171 Split=Y Selected=0xDBB8CEFA\n"
-"        DockNode      ID=0x0000000B Parent=0x00000003 SizeRef=521,425 Selected=0xDBB8CEFA\n"
-"        DockNode      ID=0x0000000C Parent=0x00000003 SizeRef=521,347 Selected=0x56290987\n"
-"      DockNode        ID=0x00000004 Parent=0x00000001 SizeRef=1690,1171 Split=X Selected=0x13926F0B\n"
-"        DockNode      ID=0x00000005 Parent=0x00000004 SizeRef=1165,1171 Split=X Selected=0x13926F0B\n"
-"          DockNode    ID=0x0000000F Parent=0x00000005 SizeRef=495,856 Selected=0x199AB496\n"
-"          DockNode    ID=0x00000010 Parent=0x00000005 SizeRef=2199,856 CentralNode=1 Selected=0x13926F0B\n"
-"        DockNode      ID=0x00000006 Parent=0x00000004 SizeRef=523,1171 Split=Y Selected=0x86FA2F90\n"
-"          DockNode    ID=0x00000011 Parent=0x00000006 SizeRef=483,437 Selected=0xBF7DFDC9\n"
-"          DockNode    ID=0x00000012 Parent=0x00000006 SizeRef=483,766 Split=Y Selected=0x59A2A092\n"
-"            DockNode  ID=0x00000007 Parent=0x00000012 SizeRef=523,572 Selected=0x86FA2F90\n"
-"            DockNode  ID=0x00000008 Parent=0x00000012 SizeRef=523,192 Selected=0x812F222D\n"
-"    DockNode          ID=0x00000002 Parent=0x0000000E SizeRef=3200,559 Split=Y Selected=0x0F18B61B\n"
-"      DockNode        ID=0x00000009 Parent=0x00000002 SizeRef=3250,526 Selected=0xA1F22F4D\n"
-"      DockNode        ID=0x0000000A Parent=0x00000002 SizeRef=3250,323 HiddenTabBar=1 Selected=0x0F18B61B\n"
-"\0";
diff --git a/bezier.cpp b/src/bezier.cpp
index 1a177c4..6fca5cc 100644
--- a/bezier.cpp
+++ b/src/bezier.cpp
@@ -34,6 +34,74 @@ Bezier_SolveYForX(v2 Point_P0, v2 Point_P1, v2 Point_P2, v2 Point_P3, real32 Tar
     return Y;
 }
 
+static bezier_point *
+Bezier_LookupAddress(memory *Memory, property_channel *Property, uint16 Index, bool32 AssertExists)
+{
+    Assert(Index < MAX_KEYFRAMES_PER_BLOCK); // TODO(fox): Test multiple keyframe blocks!
+    block_bezier *Bezier = (block_bezier *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Bezier, Property->Block_Bezier_Index[0], AssertExists);
+    return &Bezier->Point[Index];
+}
+
+static void
+Bezier_Interact_Evaluate(project_state *State, bezier_point *PointAddress, v2 *Pos, real32 GraphZoomHeight, real32 Y_Increment)
+{
+    Pos[0] = PointAddress->Pos[0];
+    Pos[1] = PointAddress->Pos[1];
+    Pos[2] = PointAddress->Pos[2];
+    if (PointAddress->IsSelected) {
+        if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_move) {
+            if (State->Interact_Modifier != 2)
+                Pos[PointAddress->IsSelected - 1].x += (int32)State->Interact_Offset[0];
+            if (State->Interact_Modifier != 1)
+                Pos[PointAddress->IsSelected - 1].y -= (State->Interact_Offset[1] / GraphZoomHeight / Y_Increment);
+        } else if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_scale) {
+            Pos[1].x += State->Interact_Offset[0];
+            Pos[2].x -= State->Interact_Offset[0];
+        } else if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_rotate) {
+            // how do I do this??
+            Assert(0);
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+static void
+Bezier_Add(memory *Memory, memory_table_list TableName, property_channel *Property, bezier_point PointData, uint16 *ArrayLocation)
+{
+    if (!Property->Block_Bezier_Count) {
+        // TODO(fox): Test multiple keyframe blocks!
+        Assert(Property->Keyframe_Count < MAX_KEYFRAMES_PER_BLOCK);
+        Property->Block_Bezier_Index[0] = Memory_Block_AllocateNew(Memory, F_Bezier);
+        block_bezier *Bezier = (block_bezier *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Bezier, Property->Block_Bezier_Index[0], 0);
+        Bezier->Occupied = true;
+        History_Action_Swap(Memory, TableName, sizeof(Property->Block_Bezier_Count), &Property->Block_Bezier_Count);
+        Property->Block_Bezier_Count++;
+    }
+    // First check to see if the point to add overlaps an existing keyframe:
+    if (ArrayLocation) {
+        for (int p = 0; p < Property->Keyframe_Count; p++) {
+            int k = ArrayLocation[p];
+            bezier_point *Point = Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, k);
+            if (Point->Pos[0].x == PointData.Pos[0].x) {
+                History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_Bezier, sizeof(*Point), Point);
+                *Point = PointData;
+                return;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+    int k = 0;
+    for (;;) {
+        bezier_point *Point = Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, k, 0);
+        if (!Point->Occupied) {
+            History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_Bezier, sizeof(*Point), Point);
+            *Point = PointData;
+            History_Action_Swap(Memory, TableName, sizeof(Property->Keyframe_Count), &Property->Keyframe_Count);
+            Property->Keyframe_Count++;
+            return;
+        }
+        k++;
+    }
+}
+
 #if 0
 // A modified version of the bezier code in ImGui with extra features for bitmap and path interaction.
 
diff --git a/createcalls.cpp b/src/createcalls.cpp
index 4be6b45..ee8888d 100644
--- a/createcalls.cpp
+++ b/src/createcalls.cpp
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ IO_Save(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, char *Filename
 
     void *CompressedLocation = Memory_PushScratch(Memory, FileSize);
 
-    uint64 CompressedSize = Data_Compress(Memory, File, FileSize, CompressedLocation, FileSize, Z_BEST_COMPRESSION);
+    uint64 CompressedSize = Data_Compress(Memory, File, FileSize, CompressedLocation, FileSize, 0); // Z_BEST_COMPRESSION);
 
     Memory_PopScratch(Memory, FileSize);
 
@@ -115,9 +115,15 @@ Source_Generate_Blank(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory,
     return Index;
 }
 
-static bool32 Source_IsFileSupported(char *Path, bool32 *IsVideo) {
-    return stbi_info(Path, NULL, NULL, NULL);
-    // AV_IsFileSupported(Path, IsVideo)
+static bool32 Source_IsFileSupported(char *Path, bool32 *IsVideo, bool32 *HasAudio) {
+    AV_IsFileSupported(Path, IsVideo, HasAudio);
+    if (IsVideo || HasAudio) {
+        return 1;
+    } else {
+        return stbi_info(Path, NULL, NULL, NULL);
+    }
+    Assert(0);
+    return 0;
 }
 
 static void
@@ -151,8 +157,8 @@ Source_Generate(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, void *
 {
     Assert(File->Source_Count < MAX_SOURCES);
 
-    bool32 IsVideo = 0;
-    if (Source_IsFileSupported((char *)TempString, &IsVideo)) {
+    bool32 IsVideo = 0, HasAudio = 0;
+    if (Source_IsFileSupported((char *)TempString, &IsVideo, &HasAudio)) {
         uint16 Index = Memory_Block_AllocateNew(Memory, F_Sources);
         block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, Index, 0);
         History_Entry_Commit(Memory, "Add source");
@@ -160,8 +166,9 @@ Source_Generate(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, void *
 
         Source->Occupied = 1;
         Source->Path_String_Index = String_AddToFile(Memory, (char *)TempString);
-        Assert(!IsVideo);
         Source->Type = source_type_file;
+        Source->HasAudio = HasAudio;
+        Source->HasVideo = IsVideo;
 
         History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(File->Source_Count), &File->Source_Count);
         File->Source_Count++;
@@ -174,74 +181,6 @@ Source_Generate(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, void *
     return -1;
 }
 
-static bezier_point *
-Bezier_LookupAddress(memory *Memory, property_channel *Property, uint16 Index, bool32 AssertExists)
-{
-    Assert(Index < MAX_KEYFRAMES_PER_BLOCK);
-    block_bezier *Bezier = (block_bezier *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Bezier, Property->Block_Bezier_Index[0], AssertExists);
-    return &Bezier->Point[Index];
-}
-
-// NOTE(fox): It's not required for the Y to be set correctly in i.e. sorting.
-static void
-Bezier_EvaluateValue(project_state *State, bezier_point *PointAddress, v2 *Pos, real32 GraphZoomHeight = 1, real32 Y_Increment = 1)
-{
-    Pos[0] = PointAddress->Pos[0];
-    Pos[1] = PointAddress->Pos[1];
-    Pos[2] = PointAddress->Pos[2];
-    if (PointAddress->IsSelected) {
-        if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_move) {
-            if (State->Interact_Modifier != 2)
-                Pos[PointAddress->IsSelected - 1].x += (int32)State->Interact_Offset[0];
-            if (State->Interact_Modifier != 1)
-                Pos[PointAddress->IsSelected - 1].y -= (State->Interact_Offset[1] / GraphZoomHeight / Y_Increment);
-        } else if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_scale) {
-            Pos[1].x += State->Interact_Offset[0];
-            Pos[2].x -= State->Interact_Offset[0];
-        } else if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_rotate) {
-            // how do I do this??
-            Assert(0);
-        }
-    }
-}
-
-// TODO(fox): Test multiple keyframe blocks!
-static void
-Bezier_Add(memory *Memory, memory_table_list TableName, property_channel *Property, bezier_point PointData, uint16 *ArrayLocation)
-{
-    if (!Property->Block_Bezier_Count) {
-        Assert(Property->Keyframe_Count < MAX_KEYFRAMES_PER_BLOCK);
-        Property->Block_Bezier_Index[0] = Memory_Block_AllocateNew(Memory, F_Bezier);
-        block_bezier *Bezier = (block_bezier *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Bezier, Property->Block_Bezier_Index[0], 0);
-        Bezier->Occupied = true;
-        History_Action_Swap(Memory, TableName, sizeof(Property->Block_Bezier_Count), &Property->Block_Bezier_Count);
-        Property->Block_Bezier_Count++;
-    }
-    // First check to see if the point to add overlaps an existing keyframe:
-    if (ArrayLocation) {
-        for (int p = 0; p < Property->Keyframe_Count; p++) {
-            int k = ArrayLocation[p];
-            bezier_point *Point = Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, k);
-            if (Point->Pos[0].x == PointData.Pos[0].x) {
-                History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_Bezier, sizeof(*Point), Point);
-                *Point = PointData;
-                return;
-            }
-        }
-    }
-    int k = 0;
-    for (;;) {
-        bezier_point *Point = Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, k, 0);
-        if (!Point->Occupied) {
-            History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_Bezier, sizeof(*Point), Point);
-            *Point = PointData;
-            History_Action_Swap(Memory, TableName, sizeof(Property->Keyframe_Count), &Property->Keyframe_Count);
-            Property->Keyframe_Count++;
-            return;
-        }
-        k++;
-    }
-}
 
 static void
 Property_AddKeyframe(memory *Memory, memory_table_list TableName, property_channel *Property, int Frame, uint16 *ArrayLocation)
@@ -252,13 +191,8 @@ Property_AddKeyframe(memory *Memory, memory_table_list TableName, property_chann
     History_Entry_End(Memory);
 }
 
-// static void
-// Property_InitFloat(char *Name, real32 Val, real32 ScrubVal, real32 MinVal = PROPERTY_REAL_MIN, real32 MaxVal = PROPERTY_REAL_MAX, bool32 AlwaysInteger = 0) {
-// {
-// }
-
 static property_channel
-Property_InitFloat(real32 Val, real32 ScrubVal, real32 MinVal = PROPERTY_REAL_MIN, real32 MaxVal = PROPERTY_REAL_MAX, bool32 AlwaysInteger = 0) {
+Property_InitFloat(real32 Val, real32 ScrubVal, real32 MinVal, real32 MaxVal, bool32 AlwaysInteger) {
     property_channel Property = {};
     Property.CurrentValue = Val;
     Property.MinVal = MinVal;
@@ -290,32 +224,6 @@ Precomp_Init(project_data *File, memory *Memory)
     return Comp;
 }
 
-static layer_transforms
-Layer_GetTransforms(block_layer *Layer) {
-    return { Layer->x.CurrentValue, Layer->y.CurrentValue, Layer->ax.CurrentValue, Layer->ay.CurrentValue, Layer->rotation.CurrentValue, Layer->scale.CurrentValue };
-}
-
-static void
-Layer_Interact_Evaluate(memory *Memory, project_state *State, uint16 Layer_Index_Physical, sorted_comp_info SortedCompInfo, sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo,
-                        int32 *Frame_Start, int32 *Frame_End)
-{
-    if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_layer_move) {
-        *Frame_Start += (int32)(State->Interact_Offset[0] + 0);
-        *Frame_End += (int32)(State->Interact_Offset[0] + 0);
-    }
-    if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_layer_timeadjust) {
-        int Side[2] = {0};
-        Assert(State->Interact_Offset[1] == 0 || State->Interact_Offset[1] == 1);
-        Side[(int)State->Interact_Offset[1]] = 1;
-        *Frame_Start += (int32)(State->Interact_Offset[0] * Side[0]);
-        if (*Frame_Start >= *Frame_End)
-            *Frame_Start = *Frame_End - 1;
-        *Frame_End += (int32)(State->Interact_Offset[0] * Side[1]);
-        if (*Frame_End <= *Frame_Start)
-            *Frame_End = *Frame_Start + 1;
-    }
-}
-
 static uint32
 Effect_Init(project_state *State, memory *Memory, uint32 EffectEntryIndex, int EffectCount)
 {
@@ -327,7 +235,6 @@ Effect_Init(project_state *State, memory *Memory, uint32 EffectEntryIndex, int E
     header_effect *EffectHeader = &State->Effect[EffectEntryIndex];
     String_Copy(Effect->ID, EffectHeader->ID, 8);
     Effect->IsToggled = true;
-    Effect->Index = EffectCount;
     for (int e = 0; e < EffectHeader->Property_Count; e++) {
         Effect->Block_Property_Index[e] = Memory_Block_AllocateNew(Memory, F_Properties);
         property_channel *Property = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect->Block_Property_Index[e], 0);
@@ -362,112 +269,6 @@ Effect_Add(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, uint32 Effe
     Assert(Selected);
 }
 
-static void
-Layer_UpdateMasksEffects(project_state *State, block_layer *Layer, memory *Memory, void *EffectBitmapAddress,
-        int Width, int Height, int BytesPerPixel)
-{
-    uint64 Size = Width*Height*BytesPerPixel;
-
-    // We need two of these: one with multisampling enabled and a
-    // non-multisampled one that we can blit to.
-    gl_effect_layer TestL = {};
-    gl_effect_layer TestM = {};
-
-    GL_UpdateTexture(&TestL, EffectBitmapAddress, Width, Height, BytesPerPixel, 0);
-    GL_UpdateTexture(&TestM, EffectBitmapAddress, Width, Height, BytesPerPixel, 1);
-
-    for (int i = 0; i < Layer->Block_Effect_Count; i++)
-    {
-        block_effect Effect = *(block_effect *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Effects, Layer->Block_Effect_Index[i]);
-        header_effect *EffectEntry = Effect_EntryFromID(State, Effect.ID);
-
-        if (Effect.IsToggled) {
-            uint64 Size = (sizeof(real32) * MAX_PROPERTIES_PER_EFFECT) + (sizeof(real32) * 10);
-            real32 *Data;
-            if (EffectEntry->DisplayType == effect_display_type_curves) {
-                Data = (real32 *)Memory_PushScratch(Memory, Size);
-                uint16 SortedPointIndex[MAX_PROPERTIES_PER_EFFECT];
-                v2 *SortedPointValues = (v2 *)(Data + 5);
-                for (int c = 0; c < 5; c++) {
-                    *(Data + c) = Effect.ExtraData[c];
-                    uint32 Shift = MAX_PROPERTIES_PER_EFFECT / 5 * c;
-                    uint16 *SortedPointIndexPlayhead = SortedPointIndex + Shift;
-                    v2 *SortedPointValuesPlayhead = SortedPointValues + Shift;
-                    Effect_Curves_Sort(Memory, &Effect, SortedPointIndexPlayhead, c);
-                    for (int a = 0; a < Effect.ExtraData[c]; a++) {
-                        *SortedPointValuesPlayhead = Effect_V2(Memory, &Effect, SortedPointIndexPlayhead[a]);
-                        SortedPointValuesPlayhead++;
-                    }
-                }
-            } else {
-                Data = (real32 *)Memory_PushScratch(Memory, Size);
-                for (int c = 0; c < EffectEntry->Property_Count; c++) {
-                    property_channel *Property = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect.Block_Property_Index[c]);
-                    Data[c] = Property->CurrentValue;
-                }
-            }
-            EffectEntry->func(Data, Width, Height, BytesPerPixel, EffectBitmapAddress, EffectEntry->GLShaderIndex);
-            Memory_PopScratch(Memory, Size);
-        }
-    }
-    /*
-    if (Layer->NumberOfMasks) {
-        for (int i = 0; i < Layer->NumberOfMasks; i++) {
-            file_mask_header *MaskHeader = (file_mask_header *)((uint8 *)Layer + sizeof(file_layer) + MaskOffset);
-            if (MaskHeader->IsClosed && MaskHeader->IsToggled) {
-                mask_point *Point = (mask_point *)((uint8 *)MaskHeader + sizeof(file_mask_header));
-                Mask_TriangulateAndRasterize(TestM, TestL, Memory, MaskHeader, Point, Source->Width, Source->Height, Source->BytesPerPixel, EffectBitmapAddress);
-            }
-        }
-        Bitmap_StencilAlpha(SourceBitmapAddress, EffectBitmapAddress, Source->BytesPerPixel, Size);
-    }
-
-    Layer->OutputBitmapLocation = EffectBitmapAddress;
-    */
-
-    GL_DeleteHWBuffer(&TestL);
-    GL_DeleteHWBuffer(&TestM);
-}
-
-static void
-Layer_ToggleChannel(project_data *File, memory *Memory, int32 a)
-{
-    int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
-    while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, File->Layer_Count, &h, &c, &i))
-    {
-        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
-        if (Layer->IsSelected)
-            Layer->Property[a].IsToggled ^= 1;
-    }
-}
-
-static void
-Layer_Select(memory *Memory, project_state *State, int32 i)
-{
-    block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
-    Layer->IsSelected = true;
-    State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer = i;
-    State->RecentSelectionType = selection_type_layer;
-}
-
-static void
-Layer_Select_RecurseUp(memory *Memory, project_state *State, int32 i, int16 RecursionIdx[MAX_PRECOMP_RECURSIONS], uint32 Recursions)
-{
-    for (int a = 1; a <= Recursions; a++) {
-        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, RecursionIdx[a]);
-        Layer->IsSelected = 2;
-    }
-}
-
-void Layer_DeselectAll(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory) {
-    int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
-    while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, File->Layer_Count, &h, &c, &i)) {
-        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
-        Layer->IsSelected = false;
-    }
-    State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer = -1;
-}
-
 void Source_DeselectAll(project_data *File, memory *Memory)
 {
     int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
@@ -477,133 +278,21 @@ void Source_DeselectAll(project_data *File, memory *Memory)
     }
 }
 
-// h: index of the total amount of properties and effects
-// c: index of the amount of properties in a given effect
-// p: prior property's keyframe count, so we can increment the sorted keyframe array properly
-static bool32
-Layer_LoopChannels(project_state *State, memory *Memory, sorted_property_info **SortedProperty, uint16 **SortedKeyframe, block_layer *Layer,
-                   property_channel **Property, block_effect **EffectOut, int *h, int *c, int *p)
-{
-    uint32 Amount = AmountOf(Layer->Property) + Layer->Block_Effect_Count;
-    // Assert(Layer->Block_Effect_Count < 2);
-    while (*h < Amount) {
-        if (*h < AmountOf(Layer->Property) && *c == 0) {
-            *Property = &Layer->Property[*h];
-            if (*h != 0) {
-                *SortedProperty += 1;
-                *SortedKeyframe += *p;
-            }
-            *h += 1;
-            *p = (**Property).Keyframe_Count;
-            return 1;
-        } else {
-            uint16 EffectIdx = Layer->Block_Effect_Index[*h - AmountOf(Layer->Property)];
-            block_effect *Effect = (block_effect *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Effects, EffectIdx);
-            if (EffectOut)
-                *EffectOut = Effect;
-            header_effect *EffectHeader = Effect_EntryFromID(State, Effect->ID);
-            while (*c < EffectHeader->Property_Count) {
-                // header_property ChannelHeader = State->Property[EffectHeader->PropertyStartIndex + c];
-                *Property = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect->Block_Property_Index[*c]);
-                *SortedProperty += 1;
-                *SortedKeyframe += *p;
-                *p = (**Property).Keyframe_Count;
-                *c += 1;
-                return 1;
-            }
-            *h += 1;
-            *c = 0;
-        }
-    }
-    Assert(*h != (Amount - 1));
-    return 0;
-}
-
-static void
-Layer_ToggleAllChannels(project_state *State, memory *Memory, block_layer *Layer,
-                        sorted_comp_info *SortedCompInfo, sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo,
-                        sorted_property_info *SortedPropertyInfo, uint16 *SortedPropertyArray)
-{
-    bool32 ToggleMode = 1;
-    {
-        sorted_property_info *InfoLocation = SortedPropertyInfo + SortedLayerInfo->SortedPropertyStart;
-        uint16 *ArrayLocation = SortedPropertyArray + SortedLayerInfo->SortedKeyframeStart;
-        int h = 0, c = 0, p = 0;
-        property_channel *Property = NULL;
-        block_effect *Effect = NULL;
-        while (Layer_LoopChannels(State, Memory, &InfoLocation, &ArrayLocation, Layer, &Property, &Effect, &h, &c, &p))
-        {
-            if (Property->IsToggled) {
-                ToggleMode = 0;
-                break;
-            }
-        }
-    }
-    sorted_property_info *InfoLocation = SortedPropertyInfo + SortedLayerInfo->SortedPropertyStart;
-    uint16 *ArrayLocation = SortedPropertyArray + SortedLayerInfo->SortedKeyframeStart;
-    int h = 0, c = 0, p = 0;
-    property_channel *Property = NULL;
-    block_effect *Effect = NULL;
-    while (Layer_LoopChannels(State, Memory, &InfoLocation, &ArrayLocation, Layer, &Property, &Effect, &h, &c, &p))
-    {
-        if (Property->Keyframe_Count) {
-            Property->IsToggled = ToggleMode;
-        }
-    }
-}
-
-static void
-Project_ToggleAllChannels(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory,
-                          sorted_comp_info *SortedCompInfo, sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo,
-                          sorted_property_info *SortedPropertyInfo, uint16 *SortedPropertyArray)
-{
-    int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
-    while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, File->Layer_Count, &h, &c, &i)) {
-        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
-        if (Layer->IsSelected) {
-            Layer_ToggleAllChannels(State, Memory, Layer, SortedCompInfo, SortedLayerInfo, SortedPropertyInfo, SortedPropertyArray);
-        }
-    }
-}
-
-inline sorted_property_info *
-Property_GetSortedInfo(sorted_property_info *SortedPropertyInfo, int i, int h)
-{
-    Assert(0);
-    return SortedPropertyInfo + (i * 8) + h;
-}
-inline uint16 *
-Property_GetSortedArray(uint16 *SortedPropertyArray, int i, int h)
-{
-    Assert(0);
-    return SortedPropertyArray + (i * 8 * MAX_KEYFRAMES_PER_BLOCK) + (h * MAX_KEYFRAMES_PER_BLOCK);
-}
-
-static sorted_layer *
-Layer_GetSortedArray(sorted_layer *LayerArrayStart, sorted_comp_info *SortedCompStart, uint32 TargetComp)
-{
-    uint32 LayerOffset = 0; int s = 0;
-    while (s < TargetComp) {
-        LayerOffset += SortedCompStart[s].LayerCount;
-        s++;
-    }
-    return LayerArrayStart + LayerOffset;
-}
 
 static void
-Bezier_Commit(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory,
-              sorted_comp_info *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer *SortedLayerArray,
-              sorted_property_info *SortedPropertyInfo, uint16 *SortedPropertyArray)
+Keyframe_Commit(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory,
+                sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray,
+                sorted_property_array *SortedPropertyStart, uint16 *SortedKeyframeArray)
 {
     History_Entry_Commit(Memory, "Move keyframe");
     int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
     while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, File->Layer_Count, &h, &c, &i)) {
         block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
-        sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo = Layer_GetSortedArray(SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, Layer->Block_Composition_Index);
+        sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart = Sorted_GetLayerStart(SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, Layer->Block_Composition_Index);
         if ((State->TimelineMode == timeline_mode_graph) && !Layer->IsSelected)
             continue;
-        sorted_property_info *InfoLocation = SortedPropertyInfo + SortedLayerInfo->SortedPropertyStart;
-        uint16 *ArrayLocation = SortedPropertyArray + SortedLayerInfo->SortedKeyframeStart;
+        sorted_property_array *InfoLocation = SortedPropertyStart + SortedLayerStart->SortedPropertyStart;
+        uint16 *ArrayLocation = SortedKeyframeArray + SortedLayerStart->SortedKeyframeStart;
         int h = 0, c = 0, p = 0;
         property_channel *Property = NULL;
         block_effect *Effect = NULL;
@@ -616,7 +305,7 @@ Bezier_Commit(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory,
                 bezier_point *PointAddress = Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, k);
                 if (PointAddress->IsSelected) {
                     v2 NewPos[3];
-                    Bezier_EvaluateValue(State, PointAddress, NewPos);
+                    Bezier_Interact_Evaluate(State, PointAddress, NewPos);
                     History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_Bezier, sizeof(PointAddress->Pos), &PointAddress->Pos);
                     PointAddress->Pos[0] = NewPos[0];
                     PointAddress->Pos[1] = NewPos[1];
@@ -636,14 +325,14 @@ Bezier_Commit(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory,
 
 // NOTE(fox): This won't work with precomps!
 
-void Clipboard_Paste(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, sorted_comp_info *SortedCompInfo, sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo, uint16 *SortedPropertyArray)
+void Clipboard_Paste(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, sorted_comp_array *SortedCompStart, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart, uint16 *SortedKeyframeArray)
 {
     clipboard_contents *Contents = (clipboard_contents *)State->ClipboardBuffer;
     if (Contents->Type == selection_type_none)
         return;
     uint64 ClipboardPos = sizeof(clipboard_contents);
     ClipboardPos = sizeof(clipboard_contents);
-    int i = SortedCompInfo->LayerCount - 1;
+    int i = SortedCompStart->LayerCount - 1;
     block_layer *Layer = NULL;
     clipboard_channel *Channel;
     int b = 0;
@@ -664,7 +353,7 @@ void Clipboard_Paste(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, s
         Channel = &Contents->Channel[b];
         while (i >= 0)
         {
-            sorted_layer SortEntry = SortedLayerInfo[i];
+            sorted_layer_array SortEntry = SortedLayerStart[i];
             uint32 Index_Physical = SortEntry.Block_Layer_Index;
             block_layer *TestLayer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
             if (TestLayer->IsSelected) {
@@ -685,7 +374,7 @@ void Clipboard_Paste(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, s
                 for (int p = 0; p < Channel->KeyframeCount; p++) {
                     bezier_point PointData = *(bezier_point *)((uint8 *)State->ClipboardBuffer + ClipboardPos);
                     PointData.Pos[0].x += State->Frame_Current;
-                    uint16 *ArrayLocation = Property_GetSortedArray(SortedPropertyArray, i, h);
+                    uint16 *ArrayLocation = Property_GetSortedArray(SortedKeyframeArray, i, h);
                     Bezier_Add(Memory, F_Layers, Property, PointData, ArrayLocation);
                     ClipboardPos += sizeof(bezier_point);
                 }
@@ -704,7 +393,7 @@ void Clipboard_Paste(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, s
     }
 }
 
-void Clipboard_Store(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, sorted_comp_info *SortedCompInfo, sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo, sorted_property_info *SortedPropertyInfo, uint16 *SortedPropertyArray)
+void Clipboard_Store(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, sorted_comp_array *SortedCompStart, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart, sorted_property_array *SortedPropertyStart, uint16 *SortedKeyframeArray)
 {
     int LocalOffset = 0;
     clipboard_contents *Contents = (clipboard_contents *)State->ClipboardBuffer;
@@ -714,16 +403,16 @@ void Clipboard_Store(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, s
     if (Contents->Type == selection_type_none)
         return;
     else if (Contents->Type == selection_type_keyframe) {
-        for (int i = SortedCompInfo->LayerCount - 1; i >= 0; i--)
+        for (int i = SortedCompStart->LayerCount - 1; i >= 0; i--)
         {
-            sorted_layer SortEntry = SortedLayerInfo[i];
+            sorted_layer_array SortEntry = SortedLayerStart[i];
             uint32 Index_Physical = SortEntry.Block_Layer_Index;
             block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Index_Physical);
             for (int h = 0; h < AmountOf(Layer->Property); h++) {
                 property_channel *Property = &Layer->Property[h];
                 if (Property->IsToggled || Layer->IsSelected) {
-                    sorted_property_info *InfoLocation = Property_GetSortedInfo(SortedPropertyInfo, i, h);
-                    uint16 *ArrayLocation = Property_GetSortedArray(SortedPropertyArray, i, h);
+                    sorted_property_array *InfoLocation = Property_GetSortedInfo(SortedPropertyStart, i, h);
+                    uint16 *ArrayLocation = Property_GetSortedArray(SortedKeyframeArray, i, h);
                     clipboard_channel *Channel = &Contents->Channel[Contents->ChannelCount];
                     bezier_point *FirstPoint = NULL;
                     int TimeOffset = 0;
@@ -757,162 +446,34 @@ void Clipboard_Store(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, s
     }
 }
 
-static void
-Layer_Select_Traverse(uint16 PrincipalCompIndex, memory *Memory, project_state *State, int32 IndexToFind, sorted_comp_info *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer *SortedLayerArray,
-                      int16 RecursionIdx[MAX_PRECOMP_RECURSIONS], int32 *Recursions)
-{
-    uint16 CompIndex = 0;
-    if (RecursionIdx[*Recursions] == -1) {
-        CompIndex = PrincipalCompIndex;
-    } else {
-        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, RecursionIdx[*Recursions]);
-        CompIndex = Layer->Block_Source_Index;
-    }
-    sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo = Layer_GetSortedArray(SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, CompIndex);
-    sorted_comp_info SortedCompInfo = SortedCompArray[CompIndex];
-    uint32 RecursionsCurrent = *Recursions;
-    for (int i = SortedCompInfo.LayerCount - 1; i >= 0; i--)
-    {
-        sorted_layer SortEntry = SortedLayerInfo[i];
-        uint32 Index_Physical = SortEntry.Block_Layer_Index;
-        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Index_Physical);
-        if (Layer->IsPrecomp && Layer->IsSelected == 2) {
-            *Recursions = RecursionsCurrent + 1;
-            RecursionIdx[*Recursions] = Index_Physical;
-            Layer_Select_Traverse(PrincipalCompIndex, Memory, State, IndexToFind, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray, RecursionIdx, Recursions);
-        } else if (Index_Physical == IndexToFind) {
-            return;
-        }
-    }
-}
-
-static v2
-Layer_TraverseForPoint(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, v2 PrincipalCompUV, sorted_comp_info *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer *SortedLayerArray)
-{
-    int16 RecursionIdx[MAX_PRECOMP_RECURSIONS] = {};
-    RecursionIdx[0] = -1;
-    int32 Recursions = 0;
-    sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo = Layer_GetSortedArray(SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, File->PrincipalCompIndex);
-    sorted_comp_info SortedCompInfo = SortedCompArray[File->PrincipalCompIndex];
-    block_composition *Comp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, File->PrincipalCompIndex);
-    Layer_Select_Traverse(File->PrincipalCompIndex, Memory, State, State->Brush.LayerToPaint_Index, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray, RecursionIdx, &Recursions);
-    v2 PointUV = {0, 0};
-    int OuterWidth = Comp->Width, OuterHeight = Comp->Height;
-    int InnerWidth = 0, InnerHeight = 0;
-    if (Recursions == 0) {
-        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, State->Brush.LayerToPaint_Index);
-        layer_transforms T = Layer_GetTransforms(Layer);
-        Layer_GetDimensions(Memory, Layer, &InnerWidth, &InnerHeight);
-        PointUV = T_CompUVToLayerUV(T, OuterWidth, OuterHeight, InnerWidth, InnerHeight, PrincipalCompUV);
-    } else {
-        for (int i = 1; i <= Recursions; i++) {
-            block_layer *InnerLayer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, RecursionIdx[i]);
-            layer_transforms T = Layer_GetTransforms(InnerLayer);
-            Layer_GetDimensions(Memory, InnerLayer, &InnerWidth, &InnerHeight);
-            PointUV = T_CompUVToLayerUV(T, OuterWidth, OuterHeight, InnerWidth, InnerHeight, PrincipalCompUV);
-            OuterWidth = InnerWidth;
-            OuterHeight = InnerHeight;
-        }
-    }
-    return PointUV * V2(InnerWidth, InnerHeight);
-}
-
-int32 Layer_TestSelection(memory *Memory, project_state *State, ui *UI, sorted_comp_info *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer *SortedLayerArray, uint16 PrincipalIndex)
-{
-    block_composition *Comp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, PrincipalIndex);
-    sorted_comp_info SortedCompInfo = SortedCompArray[PrincipalIndex];
-    sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo = Layer_GetSortedArray(SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, PrincipalIndex);
-    int SelectionCount = 0;
-    int SelectedLayerIndex = 0;
-    for (int i = SortedCompInfo.LayerCount - 1; i >= 0; i--) {
-        sorted_layer SortEntry = SortedLayerInfo[i];
-        uint32 Index_Physical = SortEntry.Block_Layer_Index;
-        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Index_Physical);
-        block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
-        layer_transforms T = Layer_GetTransforms(Layer);
-        v2 UV = T_CompUVToLayerUV(T, Comp->Width, Comp->Height, Source->Width, Source->Height, State->TempZoomRatio);
-        if (UV.x <= 1.0f && UV.x >= 0.0f && UV.y <= 1.0f && UV.y >= 0.0f && Layer->IsSelected)
-        {
-            SelectionCount++;
-            SelectedLayerIndex = i;
-        }
-    }
-    int32 LayerIndex = -1;
-    for (int i = SortedCompInfo.LayerCount - 1; i >= 0; i--) {
-        sorted_layer SortEntry = SortedLayerInfo[i];
-        uint32 Index_Physical = SortEntry.Block_Layer_Index;
-        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Index_Physical);
-        block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
-        layer_transforms T = Layer_GetTransforms(Layer);
-        v2 UV = T_CompUVToLayerUV(T, Comp->Width, Comp->Height, Source->Width, Source->Height, State->TempZoomRatio);
-        if (UV.x <= 1.0f && UV.x >= 0.0f && UV.y <= 1.0f && UV.y >= 0.0f && !Layer->IsSelected)
-        {
-            if (SelectionCount == 1) {
-                if (i < SelectedLayerIndex) {
-                    LayerIndex = Index_Physical;
-                    break;
-                }
-            } else {
-                LayerIndex = Index_Physical;
-                break;
-            }
-        }
-        // if (Layer->IsPrecomp) {
-        //     Layer_RecursiveDeselect(Memory, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray, TargetIndex, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
-        // }
-        // if (Layer->Block_Composition_Index != TargetIndex) {
-        //     Layer->IsSelected = false;
-        // }
-    }
-    return LayerIndex;
-}
-
-void Layer_RecursiveDeselect(memory *Memory, sorted_comp_info *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer *SortedLayerArray, uint16 TargetIndex, uint16 PrincipalIndex)
-{
-    block_composition *Comp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, PrincipalIndex);
-    sorted_comp_info SortedCompInfo = SortedCompArray[PrincipalIndex];
-    sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo = Layer_GetSortedArray(SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, PrincipalIndex);
-    for (int i = 0; i < SortedCompInfo.LayerCount; i++) {
-        sorted_layer SortEntry = SortedLayerInfo[i];
-        uint32 Index_Physical = SortEntry.Block_Layer_Index;
-        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Index_Physical);
-        if (Layer->IsPrecomp) {
-            Layer_RecursiveDeselect(Memory, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray, TargetIndex, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
-        }
-        if (Layer->Block_Composition_Index != TargetIndex) {
-            Layer->IsSelected = false;
-        }
-    }
-}
-
 void Property_MinMax_X(memory *Memory, project_state *State, property_channel *Property,
                        uint16 *ArrayLocation, real32 *Min, real32 *Max)
 {
     v2 FirstPointPos[3];
     bezier_point *FirstPointAddress = Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, ArrayLocation[0]);
-    Bezier_EvaluateValue(State, FirstPointAddress, FirstPointPos);
+    Bezier_Interact_Evaluate(State, FirstPointAddress, FirstPointPos);
     *Min = FirstPointPos[0].x;
     v2 LastPointPos[3];
     bezier_point *LastPointAddress =  Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, ArrayLocation[Property->Keyframe_Count - 1]);
-    Bezier_EvaluateValue(State, LastPointAddress, LastPointPos);
+    Bezier_Interact_Evaluate(State, LastPointAddress, LastPointPos);
     *Max = LastPointPos[0].x;
 }
 void Property_MinMax_Y(memory *Memory, project_state *State, property_channel *Property,
-                       sorted_property_info *PropertyInfo, real32 *Min, real32 *Max, bool32 Evaluate = 1)
+                       sorted_property_array *PropertyStart, real32 *Min, real32 *Max, bool32 Evaluate = 1)
 {
     if (Evaluate) {
         v2 MinYPointPos[3];
-        bezier_point *MinYPointAddress =  Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, PropertyInfo->MinYIndex);
-        Bezier_EvaluateValue(State, MinYPointAddress, MinYPointPos);
+        bezier_point *MinYPointAddress =  Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, PropertyStart->MinYIndex);
+        Bezier_Interact_Evaluate(State, MinYPointAddress, MinYPointPos);
         *Min = MinYPointPos[0].y;
         v2 MaxYPointPos[3];
-        bezier_point *MaxYPointAddress =  Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, PropertyInfo->MaxYIndex);
-        Bezier_EvaluateValue(State, MaxYPointAddress, MaxYPointPos);
+        bezier_point *MaxYPointAddress =  Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, PropertyStart->MaxYIndex);
+        Bezier_Interact_Evaluate(State, MaxYPointAddress, MaxYPointPos);
         *Max = MaxYPointPos[0].y;
     } else {
-        bezier_point *MinYPointAddress =  Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, PropertyInfo->MinYIndex);
+        bezier_point *MinYPointAddress =  Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, PropertyStart->MinYIndex);
         *Min = MinYPointAddress->Pos[0].y;
-        bezier_point *MaxYPointAddress =  Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, PropertyInfo->MaxYIndex);
+        bezier_point *MaxYPointAddress =  Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, PropertyStart->MaxYIndex);
         *Max = MaxYPointAddress->Pos[0].y;
     }
 }
@@ -966,68 +527,39 @@ void Effect_Curves_Sort(memory *Memory, block_effect *Effect, uint16 *SortedPoin
     }
 }
 
-// The sorting algorithm is straightforward: read every point, evaluate it if
-// it's currently being interacted with by the user, record index in a sorted
-// list, and repeat, shiftig the list as necessary.
-
-void Property_SortAll(memory *Memory, project_state *State, property_channel *Property, sorted_property_info *PropertyInfo, uint16 *PropertyArrayStart)
+static void
+Interact_Evaluate_Layer(memory *Memory, project_state *State, uint16 Layer_Index_Physical, sorted_comp_array SortedCompStart, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart,
+                        int32 *Frame_Start, int32 *Frame_End)
 {
-    int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
-    uint32 CurrentSortIndex = 0;
-    real32 MinY = 1000000;
-    real32 MaxY = -1000000;
-    int32 Offset = (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_move) ? (int32)State->Interact_Offset[0] : 0;
-    while (Block_Loop(Memory, Property, Property->Keyframe_Count, &h, &c, &i)) {
-        v2 PointPos[3];
-        bezier_point *PointAddress = Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, i);
-
-        Bezier_EvaluateValue(State, PointAddress, PointPos);
-
-        if (MinY > PointAddress->Pos[0].y) {
-            MinY = PointAddress->Pos[0].y;
-            PropertyInfo->MinYIndex = i;
-        }
-        if (MaxY < PointAddress->Pos[0].y) {
-            MaxY = PointAddress->Pos[0].y;
-            PropertyInfo->MaxYIndex = i;
-        }
-
-        uint32 SortedIndex_Playhead = 0;
-        while (SortedIndex_Playhead < CurrentSortIndex) {
-            uint16 TestPointEntry = PropertyArrayStart[SortedIndex_Playhead];
-            v2 TestPointPos[3];
-            bezier_point *TestPointAddress = Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, TestPointEntry);
-            Bezier_EvaluateValue(State, TestPointAddress, TestPointPos);
-            if (PointPos[0].x < TestPointPos[0].x ) {
-                break;
-            } else {
-                SortedIndex_Playhead++;
-            }
-        }
-        if (SortedIndex_Playhead != CurrentSortIndex) {
-            uint8 *Address_Start = (uint8 *)(PropertyArrayStart + SortedIndex_Playhead);
-            uint8 *Address_End = (uint8 *)(PropertyArrayStart + CurrentSortIndex) - 1;
-            Assert(CurrentSortIndex != Property->Keyframe_Count);
-            Arbitrary_ShiftData(Address_Start, Address_End, sizeof(uint16), 1);
-        }
-        uint16 *PointEntry = PropertyArrayStart + SortedIndex_Playhead;
-        *PointEntry = i;
-        CurrentSortIndex++;
+    if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_layer_move) {
+        *Frame_Start += (int32)(State->Interact_Offset[0] + 0);
+        *Frame_End += (int32)(State->Interact_Offset[0] + 0);
+    }
+    if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_layer_timeadjust) {
+        int Side[2] = {0};
+        Assert(State->Interact_Offset[1] == 0 || State->Interact_Offset[1] == 1);
+        Side[(int)State->Interact_Offset[1]] = 1;
+        *Frame_Start += (int32)(State->Interact_Offset[0] * Side[0]);
+        if (*Frame_Start >= *Frame_End)
+            *Frame_Start = *Frame_End - 1;
+        *Frame_End += (int32)(State->Interact_Offset[0] * Side[1]);
+        if (*Frame_End <= *Frame_Start)
+            *Frame_End = *Frame_Start + 1;
     }
 }
 
-void Property_DeselectAll(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory,
-                          sorted_comp_info *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer *SortedLayerArray,
-                          sorted_property_info *SortedPropertyInfo, uint16 *SortedPropertyArray)
+void File_DeselectAllKeyframes(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory,
+                          sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray,
+                          sorted_property_array *SortedPropertyStart, uint16 *SortedKeyframeArray)
 {
     int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
     while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, File->Layer_Count, &h, &c, &i)) {
         block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
         if (!Layer->IsSelected)
             continue;
-        sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo = Layer_GetSortedArray(SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, Layer->Block_Composition_Index);
-        sorted_property_info *InfoLocation = SortedPropertyInfo + SortedLayerInfo->SortedPropertyStart;
-        uint16 *ArrayLocation = SortedPropertyArray + SortedLayerInfo->SortedKeyframeStart;
+        sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart = Sorted_GetLayerStart(SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, Layer->Block_Composition_Index);
+        sorted_property_array *InfoLocation = SortedPropertyStart + SortedLayerStart->SortedPropertyStart;
+        uint16 *ArrayLocation = SortedKeyframeArray + SortedLayerStart->SortedKeyframeStart;
         int h = 0, c = 0, p = 0;
         property_channel *Property = NULL;
         block_effect *Effect = NULL;
@@ -1042,33 +574,15 @@ void Property_DeselectAll(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memo
     }
 }
 
-void Layer_Sort_CheckPrev(memory *Memory, int i, int Direction, sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo, sorted_comp_info SortedCompInfo, int *EntriesPassed, sorted_layer *LayerEntry, bool32 AltMethod)
-{
-    int PrevOffsetIndex = i + Direction + (*EntriesPassed * Direction);
-    bool32 OutOfBounds = (Direction > 0) ? (PrevOffsetIndex > (SortedCompInfo.LayerCount - 1)) : (PrevOffsetIndex < 0);
-    if (!OutOfBounds) {
-        sorted_layer *PrevLayerEntry = &SortedLayerInfo[PrevOffsetIndex];
-        real32 PrevOffset = PrevLayerEntry->SortedOffset;
-        if (PrevOffset == (LayerEntry->SortedOffset - Direction)) {
-            (*EntriesPassed)++;
-            if (!AltMethod) {
-                PrevLayerEntry->SortedOffset += Direction;
-            } else {
-                LayerEntry->SortedOffset -= Direction;
-                Layer_Sort_CheckPrev(Memory, i, Direction, SortedLayerInfo, SortedCompInfo, EntriesPassed, LayerEntry, AltMethod);
-            }
-        }
-    }
-}
 
 void Layer_Evaluate_Display(project_state *State, memory *Memory, block_layer *Layer,
-                            sorted_property_info *SortedPropertyInfo, uint16 *SortedPropertyArray,
-                            sorted_layer *LayerArrayStart, sorted_comp_info *CompStart, sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo,
+                            sorted_property_array *SortedPropertyStart, uint16 *SortedKeyframeArray,
+                            sorted_layer_array *LayerArrayStart, sorted_comp_array *CompStart, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart,
                             int i, real32 *Offset)
 {
     int ExtraPad = 1;
-    sorted_property_info *InfoLocation = SortedPropertyInfo + SortedLayerInfo->SortedPropertyStart;
-    uint16 *ArrayLocation = SortedPropertyArray + SortedLayerInfo->SortedKeyframeStart;
+    sorted_property_array *InfoLocation = SortedPropertyStart + SortedLayerStart->SortedPropertyStart;
+    uint16 *ArrayLocation = SortedKeyframeArray + SortedLayerStart->SortedKeyframeStart;
     int h = 0, c = 0, p = 0;
     property_channel *Property = NULL;
     block_effect *Effect = NULL;
@@ -1082,279 +596,15 @@ void Layer_Evaluate_Display(project_state *State, memory *Memory, block_layer *L
     /*
     if (Layer->Precomp_Toggled) {
         Assert(Layer->IsPrecomp);
-        sorted_comp_info *Layer_SortedCompInfo = &CompStart[Layer->Block_Source_Index];
-        sorted_layer *Layer_SortedLayerInfo = Layer_GetSortedArray(LayerArrayStart, CompStart, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
-        sorted_layer *TopLayerEntry = &Layer_SortedLayerInfo[0];
-        sorted_layer *BottomLayerEntry = &Layer_SortedLayerInfo[Layer_SortedCompInfo->LayerCount - 1];
+        sorted_comp_array *Layer_SortedCompStart = &CompStart[Layer->Block_Source_Index];
+        sorted_layer_array *Layer_SortedLayerStart = Sorted_GetLayerStart(LayerArrayStart, CompStart, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
+        sorted_layer_array *TopLayerEntry = &Layer_SortedLayerStart[0];
+        sorted_layer_array *BottomLayerEntry = &Layer_SortedLayerStart[Layer_SortedCompStart->LayerCount - 1];
         *Offset += TopLayerEntry->SortedOffset - BottomLayerEntry->SortedOffset + 2;
     }
     */
 }
 
-void TempSource_SortAll(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, uint16 *SourceArrayStart, uint16 *TempSourceCount)
-{
-    int count = 0;
-    int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
-    while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Sources, File->Source_Count, &h, &c, &i)) {
-        block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, i);
-        if (Source->Type == source_type_principal_temp) {
-            uint32 Playhead = 0;
-            while (Playhead < count) {
-                block_source *TestSource = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, SourceArrayStart[Playhead]);
-                Assert(TestSource->Type == source_type_principal_temp);
-                if (TestSource->RelativeTimestamp > Source->RelativeTimestamp) {
-                    break;
-                } else {
-                   Playhead++;
-                }
-            }
-            if (Playhead != count) {
-                uint8 *Address_Start = (uint8 *)(SourceArrayStart + Playhead);
-                uint8 *Address_End = (uint8 *)(SourceArrayStart + count) - 1;
-                Arbitrary_ShiftData(Address_Start, Address_End, sizeof(uint16), 1);
-            }
-            SourceArrayStart[Playhead] = i;
-            count++;
-        }
-    }
-    *TempSourceCount = count;
-}
-
-// The first loop is for counting how many layers are in each precomp, the
-// second is for sorting the layers by offset, and the third is for applying
-// interactivity if the user is moving any layers.
-
-void Layer_SortAll(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory,
-                   sorted_layer *LayerArrayStart,  sorted_comp_info *CompStart,
-                   uint32 LayerCount, uint32 CompCount)
-{
-    int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
-    while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, File->Layer_Count, &h, &c, &i)) {
-        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
-        Assert(Layer->Block_Composition_Index < CompCount);
-        CompStart[Layer->Block_Composition_Index].LayerCount++;
-    }
-    h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
-    while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, File->Layer_Count, &h, &c, &i)) {
-        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
-        sorted_comp_info *SortedCompInfo = &CompStart[Layer->Block_Composition_Index];
-        sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo = Layer_GetSortedArray(LayerArrayStart, CompStart, Layer->Block_Composition_Index);
-        uint32 SortedIndex_Playhead = 0;
-        while (SortedIndex_Playhead < SortedCompInfo->CurrentSortIndex) {
-            sorted_layer LayerEntry = SortedLayerInfo[SortedIndex_Playhead];
-            block_layer *TestLayer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, LayerEntry.Block_Layer_Index);
-            if (-Layer->Vertical_Offset < -TestLayer->Vertical_Offset) {
-                break;
-            } else {
-                SortedIndex_Playhead++;
-            }
-        }
-        if (SortedIndex_Playhead != SortedCompInfo->CurrentSortIndex) {
-            uint8 *Address_Start = (uint8 *)(SortedLayerInfo + SortedIndex_Playhead);
-            uint8 *Address_End = (uint8 *)(SortedLayerInfo + SortedCompInfo->CurrentSortIndex) - 1;
-            Assert(SortedCompInfo->CurrentSortIndex != SortedCompInfo->LayerCount);
-            Arbitrary_ShiftData(Address_Start, Address_End, sizeof(sorted_layer), 1);
-        }
-        sorted_layer *LayerEntry = SortedLayerInfo + SortedIndex_Playhead;
-        LayerEntry->Block_Layer_Index = i;
-        LayerEntry->SortedOffset = Layer->Vertical_Offset;
-        SortedCompInfo->CurrentSortIndex++;
-    }
-    if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_layer_move) {
-        int32 Offset = (int32)State->Interact_Offset[1];
-        bool32 Direction = (Offset > 0) ? 1 : -1;
-        for (uint32 c = 0; c < CompCount; c++) {
-            sorted_comp_info *SortedCompInfo = &CompStart[c];
-            if (!SortedCompInfo->LayerCount)
-                continue;
-            sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo = Layer_GetSortedArray(LayerArrayStart, CompStart, c);
-            int i = (Direction > 0) ? SortedCompInfo->LayerCount - 1 : 0;
-            bool32 Case = 1;
-            while (Case) {
-                int32 EntriesPassed = 0;
-                sorted_layer *LayerEntry = &SortedLayerInfo[i];
-                block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, LayerEntry->Block_Layer_Index);
-                Assert(LayerEntry->SortedOffset == Layer->Vertical_Offset);
-                if (Layer->IsSelected) {
-                    int32 SpacesToMove = Offset * Direction;
-                    while (SpacesToMove) {
-                        Layer_Sort_CheckPrev(Memory, i, Direction, SortedLayerInfo, *SortedCompInfo, &EntriesPassed, LayerEntry, 0);
-                        LayerEntry->SortedOffset -= Direction;
-                        SpacesToMove--;
-                    }
-                }
-                int b = 0;
-                while (b < EntriesPassed) {
-                    sorted_layer *FrontEntry = &SortedLayerInfo[i+(b*Direction)];
-                    sorted_layer *BackEntry = &SortedLayerInfo[i+((b+1)*Direction)];
-                    sorted_layer Swap = *FrontEntry;
-                    *FrontEntry = *BackEntry;
-                    *BackEntry = Swap;
-                    b++;
-                }
-                i -= Direction;
-                Case = (Direction > 0) ? (i >= 0) : (i < SortedCompInfo->LayerCount);
-            }
-        }
-    }
-}
-
-// NOTE(fox): We could be slightly more efficient and just allocate redundant data
-// instead of having another loop.
-void LayerProperty_Allocate(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, sorted_layer *LayerArrayStart,
-                            sorted_comp_info *CompStart, uint32 LayerCount, uint32 CompCount,
-                            uint32 *TotalPropertyCount, uint32 *TotalKeyframeCount)
-{
-    uint32 SortedPropertyPlayhead = 0;
-    uint32 SortedKeyframePlayhead = 0;
-    for (int c = 0; c < CompCount; c++) {
-        sorted_comp_info SortedCompInfo = CompStart[c];
-        sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo = Layer_GetSortedArray(LayerArrayStart, CompStart, c);
-        for (int i = 0; i < SortedCompInfo.LayerCount; i++) {
-            sorted_layer *SortedLayer = &SortedLayerInfo[i];
-            block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, SortedLayer->Block_Layer_Index);
-            SortedLayer->SortedPropertyStart = SortedPropertyPlayhead;
-            SortedLayer->SortedKeyframeStart = SortedKeyframePlayhead;
-            for (int h = 0; h < AmountOf(Layer->Property); h++) {
-                property_channel *Property = &Layer->Property[h];
-                if (Property->Keyframe_Count) {
-                    SortedKeyframePlayhead += Property->Keyframe_Count;
-                }
-                SortedPropertyPlayhead++;
-            }
-            for (int i = 0; i < Layer->Block_Effect_Count; i++) {
-                block_effect Effect = *(block_effect *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Effects, Layer->Block_Effect_Index[i]);
-                header_effect *EffectHeader = Effect_EntryFromID(State, Effect.ID);
-                for (int h = 0; h < EffectHeader->Property_Count; h++) {
-                    header_property ChannelHeader = State->Property[EffectHeader->PropertyStartIndex + h];
-                    property_channel *Property = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect.Block_Property_Index[h]);
-                    if (Property->Keyframe_Count) {
-                        SortedKeyframePlayhead += Property->Keyframe_Count;
-                    }
-                    SortedPropertyPlayhead++;
-                }
-            }
-        }
-    }
-}
-
-void LayerProperty_SortAll(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, sorted_layer *LayerArrayStart,
-                   sorted_comp_info *CompStart, sorted_property_info *SortedPropertyInfo, uint16 *SortedPropertyArray,
-                   uint32 LayerCount, uint32 CompCount)
-{
-    uint32 SortedPropertyPlayhead = 0;
-    uint32 SortedKeyframePlayhead = 0;
-    for (int c = 0; c < CompCount; c++) {
-        sorted_comp_info SortedCompInfo = CompStart[c];
-        sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo = Layer_GetSortedArray(LayerArrayStart, CompStart, c);
-        for (int i = 0; i < SortedCompInfo.LayerCount; i++) {
-            sorted_layer *SortedLayer = &SortedLayerInfo[i];
-            block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, SortedLayer->Block_Layer_Index);
-            SortedLayer->SortedPropertyStart = SortedPropertyPlayhead;
-            SortedLayer->SortedKeyframeStart = SortedKeyframePlayhead;
-            for (int h = 0; h < AmountOf(Layer->Property); h++) {
-                property_channel *Property = &Layer->Property[h];
-                if (Property->Keyframe_Count) {
-                    sorted_property_info *InfoLocation = SortedPropertyInfo + SortedPropertyPlayhead;
-                    uint16 *ArrayLocation = SortedPropertyArray + SortedKeyframePlayhead;
-                    Property_SortAll(Memory, State, Property, InfoLocation, ArrayLocation);
-                    SortedKeyframePlayhead += Property->Keyframe_Count;
-                }
-                SortedPropertyPlayhead++;
-            }
-            for (int i = 0; i < Layer->Block_Effect_Count; i++) {
-                block_effect Effect = *(block_effect *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Effects, Layer->Block_Effect_Index[i]);
-                header_effect *EffectHeader = Effect_EntryFromID(State, Effect.ID);
-                for (int h = 0; h < EffectHeader->Property_Count; h++) {
-                    header_property ChannelHeader = State->Property[EffectHeader->PropertyStartIndex + h];
-                    property_channel *Property = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect.Block_Property_Index[h]);
-                    if (Property->Keyframe_Count) {
-                        sorted_property_info *InfoLocation = SortedPropertyInfo + SortedPropertyPlayhead;
-                        uint16 *ArrayLocation = SortedPropertyArray + SortedKeyframePlayhead;
-                        Property_SortAll(Memory, State, Property, InfoLocation, ArrayLocation);
-                        SortedKeyframePlayhead += Property->Keyframe_Count;
-                    }
-                    SortedPropertyPlayhead++;
-                }
-            }
-        }
-    }
-    int a = 0;
-}
-
-sorted_file File_Sort_Push(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory)
-{
-    sorted_file Sorted = {0};
-    Sorted.Layer_SortSize = (sizeof(sorted_comp_info) * File->Comp_Count) +
-                            (sizeof(sorted_layer) * File->Layer_Count);
-    void *Layer_SortedArray = Memory_PushScratch(Memory, Sorted.Layer_SortSize);
-    Arbitrary_Zero((uint8 *)Layer_SortedArray, Sorted.Layer_SortSize);
-    Sorted.CompArray = (sorted_comp_info *)Layer_SortedArray;
-    Sorted.LayerArray = (sorted_layer *)((uint8 *)Layer_SortedArray + (sizeof(sorted_comp_info) * File->Comp_Count));
-
-    uint64 SourceArraySize = sizeof(uint16) * File->Source_Count;
-    Sorted.Source_SortSize = SourceArraySize;
-    void *Source_SortedArray = Memory_PushScratch(Memory, Sorted.Source_SortSize);
-    Arbitrary_Zero((uint8 *)Source_SortedArray, Sorted.Source_SortSize);
-    Sorted.SourceArray = (uint16 *)Source_SortedArray;
-
-    uint32 TotalPropertyCount = 0;
-    uint32 TotalKeyframeCount = 0;
-    LayerProperty_Allocate(File, State, Memory, Sorted.LayerArray, Sorted.CompArray, File->Layer_Count, File->Comp_Count, &TotalPropertyCount, &TotalKeyframeCount);
-    uint64 PropertyInfoSize = TotalPropertyCount * sizeof(sorted_property_info);
-    uint64 PropertyArraySize = TotalKeyframeCount * sizeof(uint16);
-    Sorted.Property_SortSize = PropertyArraySize + PropertyInfoSize;
-    void *Property_SortedArray = Memory_PushScratch(Memory, Sorted.Property_SortSize);
-    Arbitrary_Zero((uint8 *)Property_SortedArray, Sorted.Property_SortSize);
-    Sorted.PropertyInfo = (sorted_property_info *)Property_SortedArray;
-    Sorted.PropertyArray = (uint16 *)((uint8 *)Property_SortedArray + PropertyInfoSize);
-
-    TempSource_SortAll(File, State, Memory, Sorted.SourceArray, &Sorted.TempSourceCount);
-    Layer_SortAll(File, State, Memory, Sorted.LayerArray, Sorted.CompArray, File->Layer_Count, File->Comp_Count);
-    LayerProperty_SortAll(File, State, Memory, Sorted.LayerArray, Sorted.CompArray, Sorted.PropertyInfo, Sorted.PropertyArray, File->Layer_Count, File->Comp_Count);
-    return Sorted;
-}
-
-void File_Sort_Pop(memory *Memory, uint64 Layer_SortSize, uint64 Property_SortSize, uint64 Source_SortSize)
-{
-    Memory_PopScratch(Memory, Property_SortSize);
-    Memory_PopScratch(Memory, Source_SortSize);
-    Memory_PopScratch(Memory, Layer_SortSize);
-}
-
-// lots of cleanup...
-static void
-Layer_Delete(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, uint32 Index)
-{
-    block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Index);
-    History_Action_Block_Swap(Memory, F_Layers, Layer);
-    Layer->Occupied = 0;
-
-    block_string *String = (block_string *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Strings, Layer->Block_String_Index, 0);
-    History_Action_Block_Swap(Memory, F_Strings, String);
-    String->Occupied = 0;
-
-    for (int i = 0; i < Layer->Block_Effect_Count; i++) {
-        block_effect *Effect = (block_effect *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Effects, Layer->Block_Effect_Index[i]);
-        header_effect *EffectHeader = Effect_EntryFromID(State, Effect->ID);
-        for (int h = 0; h < EffectHeader->Property_Count; h++) {
-            header_property ChannelHeader = State->Property[EffectHeader->PropertyStartIndex + h];
-            property_channel *Property = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect->Block_Property_Index[h]);
-            if (Property->Block_Bezier_Count) {
-                block_bezier *Bezier = (block_bezier *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Bezier, Property->Block_Bezier_Index[i], 0);
-                History_Action_Block_Swap(Memory, F_Bezier, Bezier);
-                Bezier->Occupied = 0;
-            }
-            History_Action_Block_Swap(Memory, F_Properties, Property);
-            Property->Occupied = 0;
-        }
-        History_Action_Block_Swap(Memory, F_Effects, Effect);
-        Effect->Occupied = 0;
-    }
-    History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(File->Layer_Count), &File->Layer_Count);
-    File->Layer_Count--;
-}
-
 static void
 Project_Layer_Delete(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory)
 {
@@ -1390,54 +640,6 @@ Property_IsGraphSelected(memory *Memory, property_channel *Property, uint16 *Arr
     return 0;
 }
 
-block_layer * Layer_Init(project_data *File, memory *Memory)
-{
-    if (File->Layer_Count + 1 > MAX_LAYERS) {
-        Assert(0);
-    }
-    block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AllocateAddress(Memory, F_Layers);
-    History_Action_Block_Swap(Memory, F_Layers, Layer);
-
-    *Layer = {};
-    Layer->Occupied = 1;
-
-    Layer->Block_String_Index = Memory_Block_AllocateNew(Memory, F_Strings);
-    block_string *String = (block_string *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Strings, Layer->Block_String_Index, 0);
-    sprintf(String->Char, "Layer %i", File->Layer_Count + 1);  // CSbros...
-    History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(String->Occupied), &String->Occupied);
-    String->Occupied = 1;
-
-    Layer->x =        Property_InitFloat(0.0f, 1.0f);
-    Layer->y =        Property_InitFloat(0.0f, 1.0f);
-    Layer->ax =       Property_InitFloat(0.5f, 0.005f);
-    Layer->ay =       Property_InitFloat(0.5f, 0.005f);
-    Layer->scale =    Property_InitFloat(1.0f, 0.005f);
-    Layer->rotation = Property_InitFloat(0.0f, 1.0f);
-    Layer->opacity =  Property_InitFloat(1.0f, 0.005f, 0.0f, 1.0f);
-    Layer->time =     Property_InitFloat(0.0f, 1.0f, 0, 100000, 1);
-
-    Layer->IsVisible = 1;
-
-    History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(File->Layer_Count), &File->Layer_Count);
-    File->Layer_Count++;
-
-    return Layer;
-}
-
-static int
-Layer_GetTopOffset(project_data *File, memory *Memory)
-{
-    int TopOffset = 9999;
-    int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
-    while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, File->Layer_Count, &h, &c, &i)) {
-        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
-        if (Layer->Block_Composition_Index == File->PrincipalCompIndex) {
-            TopOffset = (Layer->Vertical_Offset < TopOffset) ? Layer->Vertical_Offset : TopOffset;
-        }
-    }
-    return TopOffset;
-}
-
 static void
 Project_PaintLayer_New(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory)
 {
@@ -1490,7 +692,6 @@ void Source_UICreateButton(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Mem
             Layer->Vertical_Offset = TopOffset-1;
             Layer->Frame_Start = Comp->Frame_Start;
             Layer->Frame_End = Comp->Frame_End;
-            TopOffset--;
         }
         State->UpdateFrame = true;
     }
@@ -1500,12 +701,12 @@ void Source_UICreateButton(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Mem
 }
 
 void Precomp_UIDuplicate(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, uint16 CompIndex,
-                           sorted_comp_info SortedCompInfo, sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo)
+                           sorted_comp_array SortedCompStart, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart)
 {
     block_layer *Layer = NULL;
-    for (int i = SortedCompInfo.LayerCount - 1; i >= 0; i--)
+    for (int i = SortedCompStart.LayerCount - 1; i >= 0; i--)
     {
-        sorted_layer SortEntry = SortedLayerInfo[i];
+        sorted_layer_array SortEntry = SortedLayerStart[i];
         uint32 Index_Physical = SortEntry.Block_Layer_Index;
         Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Index_Physical);
         if (Layer->IsSelected) {
@@ -1531,12 +732,12 @@ void Precomp_UIDuplicate(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memor
 }
 
 void Precomp_UIDelete(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, uint16 CompIndex,
-                           sorted_comp_info SortedCompInfo, sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo)
+                           sorted_comp_array SortedCompStart, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart)
 {
     block_layer *Layer = NULL;
-    for (int i = SortedCompInfo.LayerCount - 1; i >= 0; i--)
+    for (int i = SortedCompStart.LayerCount - 1; i >= 0; i--)
     {
-        sorted_layer SortEntry = SortedLayerInfo[i];
+        sorted_layer_array SortEntry = SortedLayerStart[i];
         uint32 Index_Physical = SortEntry.Block_Layer_Index;
         Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Index_Physical);
         if (Layer->IsSelected) {
@@ -1545,7 +746,7 @@ void Precomp_UIDelete(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory,
 }
 
 void Precomp_UICreateButton(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, uint16 CompIndex,
-                           sorted_comp_info SortedCompInfo, sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo)
+                           sorted_comp_array SortedCompStart, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart)
 {
     block_composition *Comp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, CompIndex);
     History_Entry_Commit(Memory, "Pre-compose layer");
@@ -1558,9 +759,9 @@ void Precomp_UICreateButton(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Me
     NewComp->Frame_Start = Comp->Frame_Start;
     NewComp->Frame_End = Comp->Frame_End;
     int32 TopOffset = 0;
-    for (int i = SortedCompInfo.LayerCount - 1; i >= 0; i--)
+    for (int i = SortedCompStart.LayerCount - 1; i >= 0; i--)
     {
-        sorted_layer SortEntry = SortedLayerInfo[i];
+        sorted_layer_array SortEntry = SortedLayerStart[i];
         uint32 Index_Physical = SortEntry.Block_Layer_Index;
         block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Index_Physical);
         if (Layer->IsSelected) {
@@ -1568,9 +769,9 @@ void Precomp_UICreateButton(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Me
             break;
         }
     }
-    for (int i = SortedCompInfo.LayerCount - 1; i >= 0; i--)
+    for (int i = SortedCompStart.LayerCount - 1; i >= 0; i--)
     {
-        sorted_layer SortEntry = SortedLayerInfo[i];
+        sorted_layer_array SortEntry = SortedLayerStart[i];
         uint32 Index_Physical = SortEntry.Block_Layer_Index;
         block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Index_Physical);
         if (Layer->IsSelected) {
diff --git a/effects.cpp b/src/effects.cpp
index 1aacddb..1aacddb 100644
--- a/effects.cpp
+++ b/src/effects.cpp
diff --git a/effects_constructors.cpp b/src/effects_constructors.cpp
index 406cb08..406cb08 100644
--- a/effects_constructors.cpp
+++ b/src/effects_constructors.cpp
diff --git a/effects_gl.cpp b/src/effects_gl.cpp
index c3ff444..c3ff444 100644
--- a/effects_gl.cpp
+++ b/src/effects_gl.cpp
diff --git a/effects_gl_shader.cpp b/src/effects_gl_shader.cpp
index b2e1fc1..b2e1fc1 100644
--- a/effects_gl_shader.cpp
+++ b/src/effects_gl_shader.cpp
diff --git a/effects_software.cpp b/src/effects_software.cpp
index 031f0a6..2fde6b9 100644
--- a/effects_software.cpp
+++ b/src/effects_software.cpp
@@ -75,6 +75,14 @@ CurvesSolver(real32 *LUT, v2 Point_P1, v2 Point_P2, v2 m1, v2 m2, int i)
        real32 Count_Total = Count_End - Count_Start;
        real32 Count = Count_Start;
        real32 t = 0;
+       int Timeout = 0;
+
+       // This solver actually works kinda decently when the graph isn't that
+       // complex, taking less than 10 iterations per LUT value. It fails
+       // towards the edges and with harsh curves, going into the hundreds. The
+       // 1000 condition should only be hit when the solver is locked, which can
+       // happen when two points are close together on X.
+
        while (Count < Count_End) {
 
            real32 c = 2*t*t*t - 3*t*t;
@@ -87,11 +95,17 @@ CurvesSolver(real32 *LUT, v2 Point_P1, v2 Point_P2, v2 m1, v2 m2, int i)
 
            real32 TargetX = Count / 256;
 
+           if (Timeout == 1000) {
+               Point.x = TargetX;
+               printf("Solve between %.1f and %.1f reached 1000 iterations at %.f!\n", Count_Start, Count_End, Count);
+           }
+
            // Only record the value if it's within a certain precision.
 
            if (Point.x <= TargetX - Precision ||
                Point.x >= TargetX + Precision) {
                t = t * TargetX / Point.x;
+               Timeout++;
            } else {
                if (Point.y > 1.0f) {
                    LUT[(uint32)Count] = 1.0f;
@@ -102,6 +116,7 @@ CurvesSolver(real32 *LUT, v2 Point_P1, v2 Point_P2, v2 m1, v2 m2, int i)
                }
                t += (Point_Span / Count_Total);
                Count++;
+               Timeout = 0;
            }
        }
    }
@@ -161,13 +176,17 @@ Effect_Software_Curves(int Width, int Height, int BytesPerPixel, void *EffectBit
     Assert(BytesPerPixel == 4);
     while (i < Size) {
         uint32 *Pixel = (uint32 *)EffectBitmapAddress + i;
-        v4 t = Uint32ToCol8(*Pixel);
+
+        uint8 A = (*Pixel >> 24);
+        uint8 B = (*Pixel >> 16);
+        uint8 G = (*Pixel >> 8);
+        uint8 R = (*Pixel >> 0);
 
 #if 1
-        real32 R_Lookup = LUT[1][(uint32)(t.r)];
-        real32 G_Lookup = LUT[2][(uint32)(t.g)];
-        real32 B_Lookup = LUT[3][(uint32)(t.b)];
-        real32 A_Lookup = LUT[4][(uint32)(t.a)];
+        real32 R_Lookup = LUT[1][R];
+        real32 G_Lookup = LUT[2][G];
+        real32 B_Lookup = LUT[3][B];
+        real32 A_Lookup = LUT[4][A];
 
         real32 R_Lookup_All = LUT[0][(uint32)(R_Lookup*255)];
         real32 G_Lookup_All = LUT[0][(uint32)(G_Lookup*255)];
@@ -179,7 +198,7 @@ Effect_Software_Curves(int Width, int Height, int BytesPerPixel, void *EffectBit
 #endif
 
 
-        uint32 Result = (((uint32)((t.a)     + 0.5) << 24) |
+        uint32 Result = (((uint32)((A_Lookup * 255.0f)     + 0.5) << 24) |
                          ((uint32)((B_Lookup_All * 255.0f) + 0.5)  << 16) |
                          ((uint32)((G_Lookup_All * 255.0f) + 0.5)  << 8) |
                          ((uint32)((R_Lookup_All * 255.0f) + 0.5)  << 0));
diff --git a/src/ffmpeg_backend.cpp b/src/ffmpeg_backend.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f4c4492
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/ffmpeg_backend.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,480 @@
+// workaround to make libav error printing work
+#ifdef av_err2str
+#undef av_err2str
+#include <string>
+av_always_inline std::string av_err2string(int errnum) {
+    char str[AV_ERROR_MAX_STRING_SIZE];
+    return av_make_error_string(str, AV_ERROR_MAX_STRING_SIZE, errnum);
+}
+#define av_err2str(err) av_err2string(err).c_str()
+#endif  // av_err2str
+
+bool32 AV_TryFrame(av_info *AV, AVCodecContext *CodecContext, int32 *err, bool32 *EndOfFile, int StreamIndex = -1)
+{
+    *err = av_read_frame(AV->FileFormatContext, AV->Packet);
+    bool32 CheckForStream = (StreamIndex != -1) ? (AV->Packet->stream_index == StreamIndex) : 1;
+    if (!(*err >= 0 && CheckForStream)) {
+        av_packet_unref(AV->Packet);
+        return 0;
+    }
+
+    if (*err < 0)
+        *err = avcodec_send_packet(CodecContext, AV->Packet);
+    else {
+        *err = avcodec_send_packet(CodecContext, AV->Packet);
+    }
+    av_packet_unref(AV->Packet);
+
+    if (*err == AVERROR_EOF)
+    {
+        *err = 0;
+        *EndOfFile = true;
+        av_seek_frame(AV->FileFormatContext, -1, 0, AVSEEK_FLAG_BACKWARD);
+        avcodec_flush_buffers(CodecContext);
+        return 0;
+    }
+
+    if (*err < 0)
+    {
+        fprintf(stderr, "Libav *error: (%s)\n", av_err2str(*err));
+        Assert(0);
+    }
+
+    while (*err >= 0) {
+        *err = avcodec_receive_frame(CodecContext, AV->Frame);
+        if (*err == AVERROR_EOF) {
+            *EndOfFile = true;
+            av_seek_frame(AV->FileFormatContext, -1, 0, AVSEEK_FLAG_BACKWARD);
+            avcodec_flush_buffers(CodecContext);
+            *err = 0;
+            break;
+        } else if (*err == AVERROR(EAGAIN)) {
+            *err = 0;
+            break;
+        } else if (*err < 0) {
+            Assert(0);
+        }
+        return 1;
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
+
+void AV_IsFileSupported(char *filename, bool32 *IsVideo, bool32 *HasAudio)
+{
+    int32 err = 0;
+
+    AVFormatContext *temp = avformat_alloc_context();
+    err = avformat_open_input(&temp, filename, NULL, NULL);;
+
+    if (err < 0) {
+            fprintf(stderr, "Libav error: (%s)\n", av_err2str(err));
+            avformat_free_context(temp);
+            return;
+    }
+
+    err = avformat_find_stream_info(temp,  NULL);
+
+    if (err < 0) {
+            fprintf(stderr, "Libav error: (%s)\n", av_err2str(err));
+            avformat_free_context(temp);
+            return;
+    }
+
+    for (uint32 i = 0; i < temp->nb_streams; i++)
+    {
+        AVCodecParameters *LocalCodecParameters = NULL;
+        LocalCodecParameters = temp->streams[i]->codecpar;
+        const AVCodec *codec = avcodec_find_decoder(LocalCodecParameters->codec_id);
+        if (LocalCodecParameters->codec_type == AVMEDIA_TYPE_AUDIO) {
+            if (codec) {
+                *HasAudio = true;
+            } else {
+                fprintf(stderr, "Codec not found.\n");
+            }
+        }
+        if (LocalCodecParameters->codec_type == AVMEDIA_TYPE_VIDEO) {
+            if (temp->streams[i]->duration == 1) {
+                fprintf(stderr, "TODO(fox): Make single-frame FFmpeg work!\n");
+            } else if (codec) {
+                *IsVideo = true;
+            } else {
+                fprintf(stderr, "Codec not found.\n");
+            }
+        }
+    }
+
+    avformat_free_context(temp);
+}
+
+void AV_Dealloc(av_info *AV)
+{
+    Assert(AV);
+    avformat_free_context(AV->FileFormatContext);
+    avcodec_free_context(&AV->Video.CodecContext);
+    avcodec_free_context(&AV->Audio.CodecContext);
+    av_packet_free(&AV->Packet);
+    av_frame_free(&AV->Frame);
+};
+
+void AV_InitStream(av_stream_info *Stream)
+{
+    int32 err = 0;
+    Stream->Codec = avcodec_find_decoder(Stream->CodecParameters->codec_id);
+
+    if (!Stream->Codec) {
+        printf("Libav error: Suitable decoder could not be identified for codec.\n");
+    }
+
+    Stream->CodecContext = avcodec_alloc_context3(Stream->Codec);
+    if (!Stream->CodecContext) {
+        printf("Libav error: Decoder context allocation failed.");
+    }
+    err = avcodec_parameters_to_context(Stream->CodecContext, Stream->CodecParameters);
+    if (err < 0) {
+            fprintf(stderr, "Libav error: (%s)\n", av_err2str(err));
+    }
+    avcodec_open2(Stream->CodecContext, Stream->Codec, NULL);
+    if (err < 0) {
+            fprintf(stderr, "Libav error: (%s)\n", av_err2str(err));
+    }
+
+}
+
+// The duration isn't always reported in AVStream, but seeking towards the end
+// and advancing until we hit EOF seems to be accurate.
+void AV_GetDuration(av_info *AV, av_stream_info *Stream, uint64 *Duration, uint32 *FrameCount)
+{
+    if (Stream->Stream->duration > 0) {
+        *Duration = Stream->Stream->duration;
+    } else {
+        avformat_seek_file(AV->FileFormatContext, -1, INT64_MIN, 10000000000, INT64_MAX, 0);
+
+        int32 err = 0;
+        bool32 EndOfFile = 0;
+        uint64 TestDuration = 0;
+        while (err >= 0) {
+            if (AV_TryFrame(AV, Stream->CodecContext, &err, &EndOfFile, Stream->Index))
+            {
+                TestDuration = AV->Frame->pts;
+            }
+            av_frame_unref(AV->Frame);
+            if (EndOfFile)
+                break;
+        }
+        *Duration = TestDuration;
+    }
+    if (Stream->Stream->nb_frames > 0) {
+        *FrameCount = Stream->Stream->nb_frames;
+    } else if (AV->Video.CodecContext) {
+        Assert(AV->FileFormatContext->duration > 0);
+        int TotalSeconds = AV->FileFormatContext->duration / 1000000LL;
+        *FrameCount = (int)(TotalSeconds * (real32)AV->Video.Stream->r_frame_rate.num / AV->Video.Stream->r_frame_rate.den);
+    }
+}
+
+
+void AV_Init(block_source *Source, av_info *AV, memory *Memory)
+{
+    int32 err = 0;
+
+    // enum AVHWDeviceType type;
+    // while((type = av_hwdevice_iterate_types(type)) != AV_HWDEVICE_TYPE_NONE)
+    //     printf("%s\n", av_hwdevice_get_type_name(type));
+
+    // The two calls below theoretically shouldn't fail since we already tested them in IsFileSupported.
+
+    AV->FileFormatContext = avformat_alloc_context();
+    block_string *String = (block_string *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Strings, Source->Path_String_Index);
+    err = avformat_open_input(&AV->FileFormatContext, String->Char, NULL, NULL);;
+    if (err < 0) {
+        fprintf(stderr, "Libav error: (%s)\n", av_err2str(err));
+        Assert(0);
+    }
+
+    err = avformat_find_stream_info(AV->FileFormatContext,  NULL);
+
+    if (err < 0) {
+        fprintf(stderr, "Libav error: (%s)\n", av_err2str(err));
+        Assert(0);
+    }
+
+    for (uint32 i = 0; i < AV->FileFormatContext->nb_streams; i++)
+    {
+        AVCodecParameters *LocalCodecParameters = NULL;
+        LocalCodecParameters = AV->FileFormatContext->streams[i]->codecpar;
+        if (LocalCodecParameters->codec_type == AVMEDIA_TYPE_AUDIO) {
+            AV->Audio.Index = i;
+            AV->Audio.CodecParameters = LocalCodecParameters;
+            AV->Audio.Stream =  AV->FileFormatContext->streams[i];
+        }
+        if (LocalCodecParameters->codec_type == AVMEDIA_TYPE_VIDEO) {
+            AV->Video.Index = i;
+            AV->Video.CodecParameters = LocalCodecParameters;
+            AV->Video.Stream =  AV->FileFormatContext->streams[i];
+        }
+        if (AV->Video.Stream && AV->Audio.Stream)
+            break;
+    }
+
+    if (!AV->Video.CodecParameters && !AV->Audio.CodecParameters) {
+        printf("Libav error: No tracks found.");
+    }
+
+    if (AV->Video.CodecParameters)
+        AV_InitStream(&AV->Video);
+    if (AV->Audio.CodecParameters)
+        AV_InitStream(&AV->Audio);
+
+    AV->Packet = av_packet_alloc();
+    if (err < 0) {
+            fprintf(stderr, "Libav error: (%s)\n", av_err2str(err));
+    }
+    AV->Frame = av_frame_alloc();
+    if (err < 0) {
+            fprintf(stderr, "Libav error: (%s)\n", av_err2str(err));
+    }
+
+    if (AV->Video.CodecParameters) {
+        Source->BytesPerPixel = 4;
+        Source->Width = AV->Video.CodecContext->width;
+        Source->Height = AV->Video.CodecContext->height;
+        Source->FPS = (real32)AV->Video.Stream->r_frame_rate.num / AV->Video.Stream->r_frame_rate.den;
+        AV_GetDuration(AV, &AV->Video, &AV->PTSDuration, &AV->FrameCount);
+        AV->LastFrameRendered = -1;
+        av_seek_frame(AV->FileFormatContext, -1, 0, AVSEEK_FLAG_BACKWARD);
+        avcodec_flush_buffers(AV->Video.CodecContext);
+    } else {
+        AV_GetDuration(AV, &AV->Audio, &AV->PTSDuration, &AV->FrameCount);
+        av_seek_frame(AV->FileFormatContext, -1, 0, AVSEEK_FLAG_BACKWARD);
+        avcodec_flush_buffers(AV->Audio.CodecContext);
+    }
+};
+
+uint32 AV_AudioTest(av_info *AV, void *Data, uint32 Size)
+{
+    AVChannelLayout ChannelLayout = {};
+    av_channel_layout_default(&ChannelLayout, 2);
+
+    av_stream_info *Stream = &AV->Audio;
+    Assert(Stream->CodecContext->ch_layout.nb_channels == 2);
+
+    int32 err = 0;
+    bool32 EndOfFile = 0;
+    while (err >= 0) {
+        if (AV_TryFrame(AV, Stream->CodecContext, &err, &EndOfFile, Stream->Index))
+        {
+            if (AV->Frame->pts < Stream->Stream->start_time) {
+                av_frame_unref(AV->Frame);
+                continue;
+            }
+            // NOTE(fox): The docs say Frame->format corresponds to AVSampleFormat, but ffplay doesn't need the cast.
+            SwrContext *Swr = swr_alloc();
+            swr_alloc_set_opts2(&Swr, &ChannelLayout, AV_SAMPLE_FMT_S16, 48000,
+                                &AV->Frame->ch_layout, (AVSampleFormat)AV->Frame->format, AV->Frame->sample_rate,
+                                0, NULL);
+            swr_init(Swr);
+
+            uint8 **Out = (uint8 **)&Data;
+            const uint8 **In = (const uint8_t **)AV->Frame->extended_data;
+            int len = swr_convert(Swr, Out, Size, In, AV->Frame->nb_samples);
+            if (len < 0) {
+                fprintf(stderr, "Libav error: (%s)\n", av_err2str(len));
+                av_log(NULL, AV_LOG_ERROR, "swr_convert() failed\n");
+                Assert(0);
+            }
+            /*
+            int BytesPerSample = av_get_bytes_per_sample(Stream->CodecContext->sample_fmt);
+            Assert(BytesPerSample == 2 || BytesPerSample == 4);
+            int Offset = (BytesPerSample == 4) ? 2 : 1;
+            for (int i = 0; i < (Stream->Frame->nb_samples * 2); i+=2) {
+                uint16 *Channel_L = (uint16 *)Data + i + 0;
+                uint16 *Channel_R = (uint16 *)Data + i + 1;
+                *Channel_L = (*(uint16 *)(Stream->Frame->data[0] + BytesPerSample*i)) / Offset;
+                *Channel_R = (*(uint16 *)(Stream->Frame->data[1] + BytesPerSample*i)) / Offset;
+                int aa = 0;
+            }
+            */
+            return len;
+        }
+        av_frame_unref(AV->Frame);
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
+
+void AV_SeekAudio(av_info *AV, uint32 FPS, int32 FrameToSeek)
+{
+    Assert(FrameToSeek > -1)
+    int64 SeekSeconds = (int64)(FrameToSeek / (int32)(FPS + 0.5f) * AV_TIME_BASE);
+    av_seek_frame(AV->FileFormatContext, -1, SeekSeconds, AVSEEK_FLAG_BACKWARD);
+
+    int64 SeekPTS = (int64)(((real64)FrameToSeek / AV->FrameCount) * AV->PTSDuration);
+
+    //int64 AveragePTS = (AV->Video.CodecContext) ? AV->PTSDuration / AV->FrameCount :
+
+    int32 err = 0;
+    bool32 EndOfFile = 0;
+    while (err >= 0) {
+        if (AV_TryFrame(AV, AV->Audio.CodecContext, &err, &EndOfFile))
+        {
+            int a = 0;
+        }
+    }
+    AV_TryFrame(AV, AV->Video.CodecContext, &err, &EndOfFile);
+
+    int64 AveragePTS = AV->PTSDuration / AV->FrameCount;
+
+    while (err >= 0) {
+        if (AV_TryFrame(AV, AV->Video.CodecContext, &err, &EndOfFile, AV->Video.Index))
+        {
+            // The first frame that gets loaded isn't always the actual
+            // first frame, so we need to check until it's correct.
+            if (FrameToSeek == 0 && AV->Frame->pts < AV->Video.Stream->start_time) {
+                av_frame_unref(AV->Frame);
+                // printf("NON-START: avg: %li, real pts: %li", SeekPTS, AV->VideoFrame->pts);
+                continue;
+            }
+
+            int64 Difference = AV->Frame->pts - SeekPTS;
+            if (abs(Difference) < AveragePTS)
+            {
+                return;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+
+void AV_LoadVideoFrame(memory *Memory, block_source *Source, av_info *AV, int32 FrameToSeek, void *Buffer)
+{
+    int32 *LastFrameRendered = &AV->LastFrameRendered;
+
+    int32 err = 0;
+
+    Assert(FrameToSeek > -1)
+
+    // NOTE(fox): The decoder automatically advances to the next frame, so we
+    // don't need to call av_seek_frame under normal playback.
+    // This function only seeks to the nearest "keyframe."
+
+    if (*LastFrameRendered != FrameToSeek - 1) {
+        int64 SeekSeconds = (int64)(FrameToSeek / (int32)(Source->FPS + 0.5f) * AV_TIME_BASE);
+        av_seek_frame(AV->FileFormatContext, -1, SeekSeconds, AVSEEK_FLAG_BACKWARD);
+        printf("Seek activated\n");
+    } else if (*LastFrameRendered < 0) {
+        av_seek_frame(AV->FileFormatContext, -1, 0, AVSEEK_FLAG_BACKWARD);
+    }
+
+    *LastFrameRendered = FrameToSeek;
+
+    int64 SeekPTS = (int64)(((real64)FrameToSeek / AV->FrameCount) * AV->PTSDuration);
+    int64 AveragePTS = AV->PTSDuration / AV->FrameCount;
+
+    bool32 EndOfFile = 0;
+    while (err >= 0) {
+        if (AV_TryFrame(AV, AV->Video.CodecContext, &err, &EndOfFile, AV->Video.Index))
+        {
+            // The first frame that gets loaded isn't always the actual
+            // first frame, so we need to check until it's correct.
+            if (FrameToSeek == 0 && AV->Frame->pts < AV->Video.Stream->start_time) {
+                av_frame_unref(AV->Frame);
+                // printf("NON-START: avg: %li, real pts: %li", SeekPTS, AV->VideoFrame->pts);
+                continue;
+            }
+
+            int64 Difference = AV->Frame->pts - SeekPTS;
+            if (abs(Difference) < AveragePTS)
+            {
+                if (AV->PreviousPTS == -1) {
+                    AV->PreviousPTS = AV->Frame->pts;
+                    // printf("avg: %li, real pts: %li, difference: %li\n", SeekPTS, AV->Frame->pts, Difference);
+                } else {
+                    // printf("avg: %li, real pts: %li, difference: %li difference from last pts: %li\n", SeekPTS, AV->Frame->pts, AV->Frame->pts - SeekPTS, AV->Frame->pts - AV->PreviousPTS);
+                    AV->PreviousPTS = AV->Frame->pts;
+                }
+
+                uint16 Width = Source->Width;
+                uint16 Height = Source->Height;
+                uint16 BytesPerPixel = Source->BytesPerPixel;
+                int32 Pitch = Width*BytesPerPixel;
+
+                int out_linesize[4] = { Pitch, Pitch, Pitch, Pitch };
+                uint8 *dst_data[4] = { (uint8 *)Buffer, (uint8 *)Buffer + Width*Height*BytesPerPixel,
+                                       (uint8 *)Buffer + Width*Height*BytesPerPixel*2, (uint8 *)Buffer + Width*Height*BytesPerPixel*3 };
+
+                // NOTE(fox): This function will be replaced in the future.
+                AV->RGBContext = sws_getContext(AV->Frame->width, AV->Frame->height, (AVPixelFormat)AV->Frame->format,
+                                                AV->Frame->width, AV->Frame->height, AV_PIX_FMT_RGBA, SWS_BILINEAR,
+                                                NULL, NULL, NULL);
+
+                if(!AV->RGBContext) {
+                    printf("Libav error: SwsContext creation failed.");
+                }
+
+                sws_scale(AV->RGBContext, AV->Frame->data, AV->Frame->linesize, 0, AV->Frame->height,
+                          dst_data, out_linesize);
+
+                av_frame_unref(AV->Frame);
+                return;
+            }
+            else
+            {
+                // If this gets printed when not seeking, a frame has been skipped!
+                // printf("FRAME SKIP: avg: %li, real pts: %li, difference: %li\n", SeekPTS, AV->VideoFrame->pts, Difference);
+            }
+            av_frame_unref(AV->Frame);
+        }
+    }
+    Assert(0);
+}
+
+#if 0
+
+cached_bitmap * AV_LoadStill(block_source *Source, layer_bitmap_info *BitmapInfo, memory *Memory)
+{
+    av_info *AV = (av_info *)BitmapInfo->AVInfo;
+    int32 *CurrentlyRenderedFrame = &BitmapInfo->CurrentFrame;
+
+    int32 err = 0;
+
+    *CurrentlyRenderedFrame = 0;
+
+    av_seek_frame(AV->FileFormatContext, -1, 0, AVSEEK_FLAG_FRAME);
+
+    while (err >= 0) {
+        if (AV_TryFrame(AV, &err))
+        {
+            uint16 Width = Source->Width;
+            uint16 Height = Source->Height;
+            uint16 BytesPerPixel = Source->BytesPerPixel;
+            int32 Pitch = Width*BytesPerPixel;
+
+            cached_bitmap *Bitmap = Memory_RollingBitmap(Memory, Source, 0);
+            void *Buffer = Bitmap->Data;
+
+            int out_linesize[4] = { Pitch, Pitch, Pitch, Pitch };
+            uint8 *dst_data[4] = { (uint8 *)Buffer, (uint8 *)Buffer + Width*Height*BytesPerPixel,
+                                   (uint8 *)Buffer + Width*Height*BytesPerPixel*2, (uint8 *)Buffer + Width*Height*BytesPerPixel*3 };
+
+            // NOTE(fox): This function will be replaced in the future.
+            AV->RGBContext = sws_getContext(AV->VideoFrame->width, AV->VideoFrame->height, (AVPixelFormat)AV->VideoFrame->format,
+                                            AV->VideoFrame->width, AV->VideoFrame->height, AV_PIX_FMT_RGBA, SWS_BILINEAR,
+                                            NULL, NULL, NULL);
+
+            if(!AV->RGBContext) {
+                printf("Libav error: SwsContext creation failed.");
+            }
+
+            sws_scale(AV->RGBContext, AV->VideoFrame->data, AV->VideoFrame->linesize, 0, AV->VideoFrame->height,
+                      dst_data, out_linesize);
+
+            av_frame_unref(AV->VideoFrame);
+
+            Assert(BitmapInfo->BitmapBuffer);
+            return Bitmap;
+        }
+        av_frame_unref(AV->VideoFrame);
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/gl_calls.cpp b/src/gl_calls.cpp
index 1cb408a..1cb408a 100644
--- a/gl_calls.cpp
+++ b/src/gl_calls.cpp
diff --git a/imgui_helper_widgets.cpp b/src/imgui_helper.cpp
index 231b4b9..dc120e1 100644
--- a/imgui_helper_widgets.cpp
+++ b/src/imgui_helper.cpp
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ ImGui_ScreenPointToCompUV(ImVec2 ViewportMin, ImVec2 CompPos, ImVec2 CompZoom, I
 // on SDL_WarpMouseGlobal to update on the first frame of a WantSetPos request.
 
 static void
-ImGui_WarpMouse(project_state *State, ImVec2 MousePos, ImVec2 Min, ImVec2 Max, int Direction = 3)
+ImGui_WarpMouse(project_state *State, ImVec2 MousePos, ImVec2 Min, ImVec2 Max, int Direction)
 {
     if (Direction & 1) {
         if (MousePos.x < Min.x) {
@@ -67,24 +67,6 @@ ImGui_WarpMouseFinish(project_state *State, ImVec2 MousePos)
     }
 }
 
-static ImVec2
-ImGui_Brush_CalcMousePos(project_state *State, ImGuiIO &io, ImVec2 MouseDelta, int32 i, real32 DeltaDistance, real32 DeltaSlope)
-{
-    ImVec2 MousePos;
-    if (State->Brush.Type == brush_normal) {
-        MousePos = io.MousePos - (MouseDelta * (i / DeltaDistance));
-    } else if (State->Brush.Type == brush_wacky1) {
-        MousePos = io.MousePos + (io.MousePos * (i / MouseDelta));
-    } else if (State->Brush.Type == brush_wacky2) {
-        MousePos = io.MousePos - (MouseDelta / (i / DeltaDistance));
-    } else if (State->Brush.Type == brush_wacky3) {
-        MousePos = io.MousePos - (MouseDelta * (i / ImVec2(MouseDelta.y, MouseDelta.x)));
-    } else {
-        Assert(0);
-    }
-    return MousePos;
-}
-
 static bool32
 ImGui_TestBoxSelection_Point(ImVec2 Pos, ImGuiIO &io, bool32 *Test)
 {
diff --git a/my_imgui_internal_widgets.cpp b/src/imgui_helper_internal.cpp
index 1c16b65..3267dcc 100644
--- a/my_imgui_internal_widgets.cpp
+++ b/src/imgui_helper_internal.cpp
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-#include "my_imgui_internal_widgets.h"
+#include "imgui_internal_widgets.h"
 
 
 #include "imgui.h"
@@ -7,35 +7,6 @@
 #endif
 #include "imgui_internal.h"
 
-// In the regular call (GetMouseDragDelta) after the threshold is passed for
-// the first time, it returns true on every delta change even if you call
-// ResetMouseDragDelta, which makes routines like changing the frame number
-// every time the mouse is dragged past a certain distance not work how you'd
-// expect. This function uses the actual mouse delta instead of the stored
-// "max" value.
-ImVec2 ImGui::GetLocalMouseDragDelta(ImGuiMouseButton button, float lock_threshold)
-{
-    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
-    IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
-    ImVec2 delta_from_click_pos = IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos) ? (g.IO.MousePos - g.IO.MouseClickedPos[button]) : ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
-    if (lock_threshold < 0.0f)
-        lock_threshold = g.IO.MouseDragThreshold;
-    if (g.IO.MouseDown[button] || g.IO.MouseReleased[button])
-        if (ImLengthSqr(delta_from_click_pos) >= lock_threshold * lock_threshold)
-            if (IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MousePos) && IsMousePosValid(&g.IO.MouseClickedPos[button]))
-                return g.IO.MousePos - g.IO.MouseClickedPos[button];
-    return ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f);
-}
-
-// To make the above scenario work we also have to be able to subtract from the
-// delta; simply resetting it will cause misalignment from the mouse.
-void ImGui::SetLocalMouseDragDelta(ImGuiMouseButton button, ImVec2 DeltaOffset)
-{
-    ImGuiContext& g = *GImGui;
-    IM_ASSERT(button >= 0 && button < IM_ARRAYSIZE(g.IO.MouseDown));
-    g.IO.MouseClickedPos[button] += DeltaOffset;
-}
-
 // A modded version of ScalarSlider allowing for the minimum and maximum parts
 // of the slider to be draggable by two other buttons. p_mid is from range -1
 // to 1, and s_min and max are from 0-1.
diff --git a/src/imgui_ui.cpp b/src/imgui_ui.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..612ee1a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/imgui_ui.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,1502 @@
+
+#include "imgui_internal_widgets.h"
+
+#include "imgui_ops.h"
+
+#include "imgui_helper.cpp"
+
+#include "imgui_ui_properties.cpp"
+#include "imgui_ui_timeline.cpp"
+
+#if DEBUG
+#include "imgui_ui_debug.cpp"
+#endif
+#if STABLE
+#include "imgui_ui_stable_diffusion.cpp"
+#endif
+
+static void
+ImGui_File(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io,
+           sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray)
+{
+    ImGui::Begin("Files");
+    ImGui::Text("Application average %.3f ms/frame (%.1f FPS)", 1000.0f / io.Framerate, io.Framerate);
+
+    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Backspace)) {
+        // TODO(fox): Delete sources code!
+
+        /*
+        uint64 SortSize = (sizeof(uint16) * File->Comp_Count);
+        void *SortedArray = Memory_PushScratch(Memory, SortSize);
+        uint16 *SelectedSourceIndex = (uint16 *)SortedArray;
+        int SelectedSourceCount = 0;
+
+        int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
+        int SourceCount = File->Source_Count;
+        while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Sources, SourceCount, &h, &c, &i)) {
+            block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, i);
+            if (Source->IsSelected) {
+                SelectedSourceIndex[SelectedSourceCount] = i;
+                SelectedSourceCount++;
+            }
+        }
+
+        h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
+        int LayerCount = File->Layer_Count;
+        while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, LayerCount, &h, &c, &i)) {
+            block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
+            for (int b = 0; b < SelectedSourceCount; b++) {
+                if (SelectedSourceIndex[b] == Layer->Block_Source_Index) {
+                }
+            }
+        }
+
+        Memory_PopScratch(Memory, SortSize);
+        */
+
+        /*
+        bool32 CommitAction = 0;
+        while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Sources, SourceCount, &h, &c, &i)) {
+            block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, i);
+            if (Source->IsSelected) {
+                if (!CommitAction) {
+                    History_Entry_Commit(Memory, "Delete source");
+                    CommitAction = 1;
+                }
+                Source_Delete(File, Memory, i);
+            }
+        }
+        if (CommitAction)
+            History_Entry_End(Memory);
+        */
+    }
+
+    for (int c = 0; c < File->Comp_Count; c++) {
+        block_composition *Comp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, c);
+        block_string *String = (block_string *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Strings, Comp->Name_String_Index);
+        ImGui::Text(String->Char);
+    }
+    int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
+    while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Sources, File->Source_Count, &h, &c, &i)) {
+        block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, i);
+        block_string *String = (block_string *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Strings, Source->Path_String_Index);
+        ImGui::Selectable(String->Char, Source->IsSelected);
+        if (ImGui::IsItemClicked() || ImGui::IsItemClicked(ImGuiMouseButton_Right)) {
+            if (!io.KeyShift && !Source->IsSelected) {
+                Source_DeselectAll(File, Memory);
+            }
+            Source->IsSelected = 1;
+        }
+        ImGui::OpenPopupOnItemClick("sourcecontext", ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight);
+    }
+
+    if (ImGui::BeginPopup("sourcecontext")) {
+        if (ImGui::MenuItem("Create layer from source")) {
+            State->HotkeyInput = hotkey_newlayerfromsource;
+        }
+        ImGui::EndPopup();
+    }
+
+    // if (!ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows))
+    //     Source_DeselectAll(File, Memory);
+
+#if DEBUG
+
+    for (int i = 0; i < Debug.Temp.WatchedProperties; i++) {
+        if (Debug.Temp.DebugPropertyType[i] == d_float) {
+            ImGui::Text("%s: %f", Debug.Temp.String[i], Debug.Temp.Val[i].f);
+        } else if (Debug.Temp.DebugPropertyType[i] == d_int) {
+            ImGui::Text("%s: %i", Debug.Temp.String[i], Debug.Temp.Val[i].i);
+        } else if (Debug.Temp.DebugPropertyType[i] == d_uint) {
+            ImGui::Text("%s: %u", Debug.Temp.String[i], Debug.Temp.Val[i].u);
+        }
+    }
+#endif
+    ImGui::End();
+}
+
+static void
+ImGui_ColorPanel(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io)
+{
+    ImGuiStyle& style = ImGui::GetStyle();
+
+    ImGui::Begin("Colors");
+
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags flags_primary = ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaPreview |
+                                        ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float;
+    ImGuiColorEditFlags flags_picker  = ImGuiColorEditFlags_PickerHueBar |
+                                        ImGuiColorEditFlags_AlphaBar |
+                                        ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSmallPreview |
+                                        ImGuiColorEditFlags_NoSidePreview |
+                                        ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayRGB |
+                                        ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHSV |
+                                        ImGuiColorEditFlags_DisplayHex;
+
+    // Dim window if it's not active so there's not a big saturation square in
+    // the corner of my vision while I'm editing. Personal preference.
+    real32 AlphaMult = (ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows)) ? 1.0f : 0.3f;
+    ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_Alpha, style.Alpha * AlphaMult);
+
+    ImGui::ColorPicker4("##maincolorpicker", &UI->Color.r, flags_primary | flags_picker);
+
+    ImGui::PopStyleVar();
+
+    if (ImGui::ColorButton("##primarycolor", *(ImVec4*)&UI->Color.r, flags_primary, ImVec2(20, 20)))
+    {
+        v4 Temp = UI->Color;
+        UI->Color = UI->AltColor;
+        UI->AltColor = Temp;
+    }
+    if (ImGui::ColorButton("##secondarycolor", *(ImVec4*)&UI->AltColor.r, flags_primary, ImVec2(20, 20)))
+    {
+        v4 Temp = UI->Color;
+        UI->Color = UI->AltColor;
+        UI->AltColor = Temp;
+    }
+
+    if (State->Tool == tool_brush) {
+        real32 BrushSizeMin = 0;
+        real32 BrushSizeMax = 1024;
+        real32 BrushHardnessMin = 0.5;
+        real32 BrushHardnessMax = 100;
+        real32 BrushSpacingMin = 0.1;
+        real32 BrushSpacingMax = 100;
+        if (ImGui::DragScalar("Size", ImGuiDataType_Float, &State->Brush.Size, 1, &BrushSizeMin, &BrushSizeMax, "%.3f")) {
+            Brush_CalcBitmapAlphaFromSize(Memory, &State->Brush, 4);
+            State_BindBrushTexture(Memory, &State->Brush, 4);
+        }
+        if (ImGui::DragScalar("Hardness", ImGuiDataType_Float, &State->Brush.Hardness, 1, &BrushHardnessMin, &BrushHardnessMax, "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic)) {
+            Brush_CalcBitmapAlphaFromSize(Memory, &State->Brush, 4);
+            State_BindBrushTexture(Memory, &State->Brush, 4);
+        }
+        if (ImGui::DragScalar("Spacing", ImGuiDataType_Float, &State->Brush.Spacing, 1, &BrushSpacingMin, &BrushSpacingMax, "%.3f", ImGuiSliderFlags_Logarithmic)) {
+            Brush_CalcBitmapAlphaFromSize(Memory, &State->Brush, 4);
+            State_BindBrushTexture(Memory, &State->Brush, 4);
+        }
+    }
+
+    ImGui::End();
+}
+
+static void
+ImGui_Viewport_Toolbar(project_state *State, ImDrawList *draw_list)
+{
+    ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, ImVec2(0, 0));
+    ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(0, 0));
+    // ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, IM_COL32(50, 50, 50, 0));
+
+    real32 IconSize = ImGui::GetFontSize() * 4;
+    int ToolCount = (int)tool_count;
+    ImVec2 ButtonSize(IconSize, IconSize);
+    ImVec2 WindowSize(IconSize, IconSize * ToolCount);
+    ImGui::BeginChild("Toolbar", WindowSize, true, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar);
+    for (int i = 0; i < ToolCount; i++) {
+        ImGui::PushID(i);
+        // draw_list->AddImage((void *)(intptr_t)State->ToolIconTex[i], Min, Max);
+        if ((int)State->Tool == i) {
+            ImVec2 Min = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
+            ImVec2 Max = Min + ButtonSize;
+            draw_list->AddRectFilled(Min, Max, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 128));
+        }
+        ImGui::Button(ToolName[i], ButtonSize);
+        if (ImGui::IsItemActivated()) {
+            State->Tool = (tool)i;
+        }
+        ImGui::PopID();
+    }
+    ImGui::EndChild();
+
+    // ImGui::PopStyleColor();
+    ImGui::PopStyleVar(2);
+}
+
+static void
+ImGui_Viewport_BrushUI(project_state *State, memory *Memory, ImVec2 ViewportMin, ImVec2 ViewportMax, ImVec2 CompZoom, ImGuiIO io, uint16 Width, uint16 Height)
+{
+
+    ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList();
+    if (State->Tool == tool_brush) {
+
+        if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_ModAlt, false)) {
+            State->Brush.UIPos = io.MousePos;
+        }
+
+        ImVec2 CompScale = CompZoom / ImVec2(Width, Height);
+        ImVec2 BrushSize = CompScale * State->Brush.Size;
+        ImVec2 MinBounds = State->Brush.UIPos - BrushSize/2;
+        ImVec2 MaxBounds = MinBounds + BrushSize;
+
+        // if (io.KeyCtrl) {
+        //     ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(State->Brush.UIPos);
+        //     char buf[256];
+        //     sprintf(buf, "RGBA: %.1f, %.1f, %.1f, %.1f", State->Brush.Size, State->Brush.Hardness);
+        // }
+
+        if (io.KeyAlt) {
+            draw_list->PushClipRect(ViewportMin, ViewportMax, true);
+            draw_list->AddImage((void *)(intptr_t)State->Brush.GLTexture, MinBounds, MaxBounds, ImVec2(0, 0), ImVec2(1, 1), 1);
+            draw_list->PopClipRect();
+            ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(State->Brush.UIPos);
+            char buf[256];
+            sprintf(buf, "Size: %.1f, Hardness: %.1f", State->Brush.Size, State->Brush.Hardness);
+            ImGui::Text(buf);
+            if (io.MouseDelta.x || io.MouseDelta.y) {
+                ImVec2 Delta = io.MouseDelta;
+                State->Brush.Size += Delta.x;
+                State->Brush.Hardness += Delta.y*State->Brush.Hardness/100;
+                if (State->Brush.Size < 0)
+                    State->Brush.Size = 0;
+                if (State->Brush.Size > 1024)
+                    State->Brush.Size = 1024;
+                if (State->Brush.Hardness < 0.5)
+                    State->Brush.Hardness = 0.5;
+                if (State->Brush.Hardness > 100)
+                    State->Brush.Hardness = 100;
+                Brush_CalcBitmapAlphaFromSize(Memory, &State->Brush, 4);
+                State_BindBrushTexture(Memory, &State->Brush, 4);
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+static void
+ImGui_Viewport_TransformUI(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, ui *UI, ImDrawList *draw_list, ImGuiIO &io,
+                  interact_transform *Interact, ImVec2 ViewportMin, uint32 CompWidth, uint32 CompHeight, uint16 *SortedKeyframeArray)
+{
+    v2 InteractMin = Interact->Min + Interact->Position;
+    v2 InteractMax = Interact->Max + Interact->Position;
+
+    v2 BoxLength = InteractMax - InteractMin;
+    v2 Center = InteractMax - (BoxLength/2);
+
+    real32 Point0X = Center.x - InteractMin.x;
+    real32 Point0Y = Center.y - InteractMin.y;
+
+    real32 Rad = Interact->Radians;
+
+    v2 XAxis = (Point0X *  Interact->Scale)*V2(cos(Rad), sin(Rad));
+    v2 YAxis = (Point0Y * -Interact->Scale)*V2(sin(Rad), -cos(Rad));
+
+    // Points are clockwise starting from the top left.
+    real32 X0 = -XAxis.x - YAxis.x + Center.x;
+    real32 Y0 = -XAxis.y - YAxis.y + Center.y;
+    real32 X1 =  X0 + XAxis.x*2;
+    real32 Y1 =  Y0 + XAxis.y*2;
+    real32 X2 =  X1 + YAxis.x*2;
+    real32 Y2 =  Y1 + YAxis.y*2;
+    real32 X3 =  X2 - XAxis.x*2;
+    real32 Y3 =  Y2 - XAxis.y*2;
+
+    // Midway points.
+    real32 Mid_X0 =  X0 + XAxis.x;
+    real32 Mid_Y0 =  Y0 + XAxis.y;
+    real32 Mid_X1 =  X1 + YAxis.x;
+    real32 Mid_Y1 =  Y1 + YAxis.y;
+    real32 Mid_X2 =  X2 - XAxis.x;
+    real32 Mid_Y2 =  Y2 - XAxis.y;
+    real32 Mid_X3 =  X3 - YAxis.x;
+    real32 Mid_Y3 =  Y3 - YAxis.y;
+
+    ImVec2 CompScale = UI->CompZoom / ImVec2(CompWidth, CompHeight);
+
+    ImVec2 P[4];
+    P[0] = ImVec2(X0, Y0)*CompScale + UI->CompPos;
+    P[1] = ImVec2(X1, Y1)*CompScale + UI->CompPos;
+    P[2] = ImVec2(X2, Y2)*CompScale + UI->CompPos;
+    P[3] = ImVec2(X3, Y3)*CompScale + UI->CompPos;
+
+    ImVec2 Mid_P[4];
+    Mid_P[0] = ImVec2(Mid_X0, Mid_Y0)*CompScale + UI->CompPos;
+    Mid_P[1] = ImVec2(Mid_X1, Mid_Y1)*CompScale + UI->CompPos;
+    Mid_P[2] = ImVec2(Mid_X2, Mid_Y2)*CompScale + UI->CompPos;
+    Mid_P[3] = ImVec2(Mid_X3, Mid_Y3)*CompScale + UI->CompPos;
+
+    ImU32 wcol = ImGui::GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
+    draw_list->AddLine(P[0], P[1], wcol, 2.0f);
+    draw_list->AddLine(P[1], P[2], wcol, 2.0f);
+    draw_list->AddLine(P[2], P[3], wcol, 2.0f);
+    draw_list->AddLine(P[3], P[0], wcol, 2.0f);
+
+    v2 XAxis2 = (BoxLength*CompScale.x)*V2(cos(Rad), sin(Rad));
+    v2 YAxis2 = (BoxLength*CompScale.y)*V2(sin(Rad), -cos(Rad));
+
+    v2 XAxisPerp = (1.0f / LengthSq(XAxis))*XAxis;
+    v2 YAxisPerp = (1.0f / LengthSq(YAxis))*YAxis;
+
+    // real32 LocalX = ((io.MousePos.x - UI->CompPos.x) - Center.x) ;
+    // real32 LocalY = ((io.MousePos.y - UI->CompPos.y) - Center.y) ;
+    layer_transforms BoxTransforms = { Center.x, Center.y, 0.5, 0.5, (real32)(Interact->Radians / (PI / 180)), Interact->Scale };
+    v2 LayerPoint = Transform_ScreenSpaceToLocal(BoxTransforms, CompWidth, CompHeight, BoxLength.x, BoxLength.y, UI->CompPos, UI->CompZoom, ViewportMin, io.MousePos);
+
+    real32 U = LayerPoint.x / BoxLength.x;
+    real32 V = LayerPoint.y / BoxLength.y;
+
+    ImVec2 ScaleHandleSize(50, 50);
+
+    bool32 OtherActions = ImGui::IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_Z);
+
+    // First do the halfway scale points, since they don't need UVs considered:
+    for (int i = 0; i < 4; i++) {
+        ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(Mid_P[i] - ScaleHandleSize/2);
+        ImGui::PushID(i);
+
+        ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered, ImGui::ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(ImVec4(0.6f, 0.0f, 0.3f, 1.0f)));
+        ImGui::Button("##ScaleMids", ScaleHandleSize);
+        ImGui::PopStyleColor();
+
+        if (ImGui::IsItemActivated() && !OtherActions) {
+            State->InteractTransformMode = 1;
+        }
+
+        if (State->InteractTransformMode == 1 && ImGui::IsItemActive())
+        {
+            uint32 side = i;
+            if (side == 0) {
+                Interact->Scale -= io.MouseDelta.y / BoxLength.y;
+                Interact->Position.y += io.MouseDelta.y / 2;
+            } else if (side == 1) {
+                Interact->Scale += io.MouseDelta.x / BoxLength.x;
+                Interact->Position.x += io.MouseDelta.x / 2;
+            } else if (side == 2) {
+                Interact->Scale += io.MouseDelta.y / BoxLength.y;
+                Interact->Position.y += io.MouseDelta.y / 2;
+            } else if (side == 3) {
+                Interact->Scale -= io.MouseDelta.x / BoxLength.x;
+                Interact->Position.x += io.MouseDelta.x / 2;
+            }
+        }
+        ImGui::PopID();
+    }
+
+    bool32 InBounds = false;
+    // Scale if cursor is on button within the UV, rotate if outside UV, and position if a non-button is dragged.
+    if (U >= 0.0f && U <= 1.0f && V >= 0.0f && V <= 1.0f)
+    {
+        ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_ButtonHovered, ImGui::ColorConvertFloat4ToU32(ImVec4(0.6f, 0.0f, 0.3f, 1.0f)));
+        InBounds = true;
+    }
+
+    for (int i = 0; i < 4; i++) {
+        ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(P[i] - ScaleHandleSize/2);
+        ImGui::PushID(i);
+        ImGui::Button("##ScaleRotateCorners", ScaleHandleSize);
+
+        if (ImGui::IsItemActivated() && !OtherActions) {
+            if (InBounds)
+                State->InteractTransformMode = 1;
+            else
+                State->InteractTransformMode = 2;
+        }
+
+        // Scale part
+        if (State->InteractTransformMode == 1 && ImGui::IsItemActive())
+        {
+            // TODO(fox): Corner dragging scale only works in the X
+            // axis. Mostly feels right when dragged how you expect,
+            // but I'll fix it if someone complains.
+            uint32 side = i;
+            if (side == 0) {
+                Interact->Scale -= io.MouseDelta.x / BoxLength.x;
+                Interact->Position.x += io.MouseDelta.x / 2;
+                Interact->Position.y += io.MouseDelta.x*(BoxLength.y/BoxLength.x) / 2;
+            } else if (side == 1) {
+                Interact->Scale += io.MouseDelta.x / BoxLength.x;
+                Interact->Position.x += io.MouseDelta.x / 2;
+                Interact->Position.y -= io.MouseDelta.x*(BoxLength.y/BoxLength.x) / 2;
+            } else if (side == 2) {
+                Interact->Scale += io.MouseDelta.x / BoxLength.x;
+                Interact->Position.x += io.MouseDelta.x / 2;
+                Interact->Position.y += io.MouseDelta.x*(BoxLength.y/BoxLength.x) / 2;
+            } else if (side == 3) {
+                Interact->Scale -= io.MouseDelta.x / BoxLength.x;
+                Interact->Position.x += io.MouseDelta.x / 2;
+                Interact->Position.y -= io.MouseDelta.x*(BoxLength.y/BoxLength.x) / 2;
+            }
+        }
+
+        // Rotation part
+        if (State->InteractTransformMode == 2 && ImGui::IsItemActive())
+        {
+            real32 LocalX = (io.MousePos.x - UI->CompPos.x)/CompScale.x - InteractMin.x - (BoxLength.x/2);
+            real32 LocalY = (io.MousePos.y - UI->CompPos.y)/CompScale.y - InteractMin.y - (BoxLength.y/2);
+
+            real32 Slope_Mouse = LocalY/LocalX;
+            real32 Slope_Corner = 0;
+            real32 Slope_Flipped = 0;
+            real32 Dot = 0;
+
+            // TODO(fox) learn basic geometry to do this properly
+
+            // We find the angle between the direction of whichever corner the
+            // mouse is grabbing (Slope_Corner) and the mouse's current
+            // position (Slope_Mouse) to get ExtraRadians. The calculation only
+            // works between -90 and 90, so I take the dot product of the
+            // opposite edge of the corner and add the extra degrees when it's negative.
+
+            v2 SlopeDot = V2(BoxLength.x, BoxLength.y);
+            // top left clockwise
+            uint32 side = i;
+            if (side == 0) {
+                Slope_Corner = BoxLength.y / BoxLength.x;
+                Slope_Flipped = -BoxLength.x / BoxLength.y;
+                Dot = LocalX * -SlopeDot.x + LocalY * -SlopeDot.y;
+            } else if (side == 1) {
+                Slope_Corner = -BoxLength.y / BoxLength.x;
+                Slope_Flipped = BoxLength.x / BoxLength.y;
+                Dot = LocalX * SlopeDot.x + LocalY * -SlopeDot.y;
+            } else if (side == 2) {
+                Slope_Corner = BoxLength.y / BoxLength.x;
+                Slope_Flipped = -BoxLength.x / BoxLength.y;
+                Dot = LocalX * SlopeDot.x + LocalY * SlopeDot.y;
+            } else if (side == 3) {
+                Slope_Corner = -BoxLength.y / BoxLength.x;
+                Slope_Flipped = BoxLength.x / BoxLength.y;
+                Dot = LocalX * -SlopeDot.x + LocalY * SlopeDot.y;
+            }
+
+            Interact->Radians = atan((Slope_Mouse - Slope_Corner) / (1 + Slope_Mouse * Slope_Corner));
+            real32 ExtraRadians2 = atan((Slope_Mouse - Slope_Flipped) / (1 + Slope_Mouse * Slope_Flipped));
+
+            if (Dot < 0) {
+                if (Interact->Radians < 0) {
+                    Interact->Radians = (90 * (PI / 180)) + ExtraRadians2;
+                } else {
+                    Interact->Radians = (-90 * (PI / 180)) + ExtraRadians2;
+                }
+            }
+        }
+
+        ImGui::PopID();
+    }
+
+    if (!State->InteractTransformMode && ImGui::IsMouseClicked(ImGuiMouseButton_Left) && InBounds && !OtherActions)
+        State->InteractTransformMode = 3;
+
+    if (State->InteractTransformMode == 3) {
+        Interact->Position.x += (real32)io.MouseDelta.x/CompScale.x;
+        Interact->Position.y += (real32)io.MouseDelta.y/CompScale.y;
+    }
+
+    if (State->InteractTransformMode)
+    {
+        if (io.MouseDelta.x || io.MouseDelta.y)
+            State->UpdateFrame = true;
+        if (!ImGui::IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton_Left))
+            State->InteractTransformMode = 0;
+    }
+
+    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Escape)) {
+        State->Interact_Active = interact_type_none;
+        State->Interact_Modifier = 0;
+        State->UpdateFrame = true;
+    }
+
+    // Second condition so you don't have to reach for Enter.
+    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Enter) || (ImGui::IsMouseClicked(ImGuiMouseButton_Left) && io.KeyCtrl)) {
+        int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
+        if (!io.KeyCtrl)
+            History_Entry_Commit(Memory, "Transform layers");
+        while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, File->Layer_Count, &h, &c, &i)) {
+            block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
+            if (Layer->IsSelected == 1) {
+                if (io.KeyCtrl) {
+                    layer_transforms T = Layer_GetTransforms(Layer);
+                    Transform_ApplyInteractive(*(interact_transform *)&State->Interact_Offset[0], &T.x, &T.y, &T.rotation, &T.scale);
+                    property_channel *Property[4] = { &Layer->x, &Layer->y, &Layer->rotation, &Layer->scale };
+                    real32 Val[4] = { T.x, T.y, T.rotation, T.scale };
+                    for (int a = 0; a < 4; a++) {
+                        if (Property[a]->CurrentValue != Val[a]) {
+                            History_Entry_Commit(Memory, "Add keyframe");
+                            bezier_point Point = { 1, {(real32)State->Frame_Current, Val[a], -1, 0, 1, 0}, interpolation_type_linear, 0, {0, 0, 0}, 0 };
+                            uint16 *ArrayLocation = Property_GetSortedArray(SortedKeyframeArray, State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer, h);
+                            Bezier_Add(Memory, F_Layers, Property[a], Point, ArrayLocation);
+                            History_Entry_End(Memory);
+                        }
+                    }
+                } else {
+                    History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(Layer->x.CurrentValue), &Layer->x.CurrentValue);
+                    History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(Layer->y.CurrentValue), &Layer->y.CurrentValue);
+                    History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(Layer->scale.CurrentValue), &Layer->scale.CurrentValue);
+                    History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(Layer->rotation.CurrentValue), &Layer->rotation.CurrentValue);
+                    Transform_ApplyInteractive(*(interact_transform *)&State->Interact_Offset[0], &Layer->x.CurrentValue, &Layer->y.CurrentValue, &Layer->rotation.CurrentValue, &Layer->scale.CurrentValue);
+                }
+            }
+        }
+        if (!io.KeyCtrl)
+            History_Entry_End(Memory);
+        State->Interact_Active = interact_type_none;
+        State->Interact_Modifier = 0;
+        State->UpdateFrame = true;
+    }
+
+    if (InBounds == true) {
+        ImGui::PopStyleColor();
+    }
+
+}
+
+static void
+ImGui_Viewport_SelectedLayerUI(project_state *State, memory *Memory, ui *UI, ImDrawList *draw_list, block_composition *MainComp, uint32 CompIndex, block_layer *ParentLayer[4], uint32 Recursions,
+                      sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray)
+{
+    sorted_comp_array *SortedCompStart = &SortedCompArray[CompIndex];
+    sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart = Sorted_GetLayerStart(SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, CompIndex);
+    ImU32 wcol = ImGui::GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
+    for (int i = 0; i < SortedCompStart->LayerCount; i++)
+    {
+        sorted_layer_array SortEntry = SortedLayerStart[i];
+        uint32 Index_Physical = SortEntry.Block_Layer_Index;
+        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Index_Physical);
+        if (Layer->IsPrecomp) {
+            ParentLayer[Recursions] = Layer;
+            ImGui_Viewport_SelectedLayerUI(State, Memory, UI, draw_list, MainComp, Layer->Block_Source_Index, ParentLayer, Recursions + 1, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray);
+        }
+        if (Layer->IsSelected) {
+            uint32 Width = 0, Height = 0;
+            if (!Layer->IsPrecomp) {
+                block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
+                Width = Source->Width;
+                Height = Source->Height;
+            } else {
+                block_composition *Comp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
+                Width = Comp->Width;
+                Height = Comp->Height;
+            }
+
+            v2 Point[5] = { V2(Width*Layer->ax.CurrentValue, Height*Layer->ay.CurrentValue), V2(0, 0), V2(Width, 0), V2(0, Height), V2(Width, Height) };
+
+            layer_transforms T = Layer_GetTransforms(Layer);
+
+            if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_viewport_transform && Layer->IsSelected == 1) {
+                Transform_ApplyInteractive(*(interact_transform *)&State->Interact_Offset[0], &T.x, &T.y, &T.rotation, &T.scale);
+            }
+
+            v2 NewPos[5];
+            for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++) {
+                NewPos[i] = TransformPoint(T, Width, Height, Point[i]);
+            }
+
+            int i = 0;
+            while (i < Recursions) {
+                T = Layer_GetTransforms(ParentLayer[i]);
+                block_composition *Comp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, ParentLayer[i]->Block_Source_Index);
+                Width = Comp->Width;
+                Height = Comp->Height;
+                for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++) {
+                    NewPos[i] = TransformPoint(T, Width, Height, NewPos[i]);
+                }
+                i++;
+            }
+
+            ImVec2 ScreenPoint[5];
+            for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++) {
+                v2 CompUV = NewPos[i] / V2(MainComp->Width, MainComp->Height);
+
+                ScreenPoint[i] = ImVec2(UI->CompPos.x + CompUV.x * UI->CompZoom.x,
+                                        UI->CompPos.y + CompUV.y * UI->CompZoom.y);
+
+            }
+            if (State->Tool != tool_brush) {
+                ImU32 wcol2 = IM_COL32(10, 10, 10, 255);
+                draw_list->AddNgon(ScreenPoint[0], 10, wcol2, 8, 9.0f);
+                draw_list->AddNgon(ScreenPoint[0], 10, wcol, 8, 5.0f);
+            }
+            draw_list->AddLine(ScreenPoint[1], ScreenPoint[2], wcol, 2.0f);
+            draw_list->AddLine(ScreenPoint[2], ScreenPoint[4], wcol, 2.0f);
+            draw_list->AddLine(ScreenPoint[1], ScreenPoint[3], wcol, 2.0f);
+            draw_list->AddLine(ScreenPoint[3], ScreenPoint[4], wcol, 2.0f);
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+static void
+ImGui_Viewport(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io, GLuint textureID,
+               sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray, uint16 *SortedKeyframeArray)
+{
+    bool open = true;
+    ImGui::Begin("Viewport", &open, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollWithMouse);
+
+    if (ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows)) {
+        State->FocusedWindow = focus_viewport;
+    }
+
+    block_composition *MainComp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, File->PrincipalCompIndex);
+
+    ImVec2 ViewportMin = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
+    ImVec2 ViewportScale = ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail();
+    ImVec2 ViewportMax = ImVec2(ViewportMin.x + ViewportScale.x, ViewportMin.y + ViewportScale.y);
+
+    if (State->Initializing) {
+        UI->CompZoom = ImVec2(MainComp->Width, MainComp->Height);
+        UI->CompPos = ImVec2(ViewportMin.x + ((ViewportMax.x - ViewportMin.x)/2 - UI->CompZoom.x/2),
+                            ViewportMin.y + ((ViewportMax.y - ViewportMin.y)/2 - UI->CompZoom.y/2));
+    }
+
+    ImVec2 CompPosMin = ImVec2(UI->CompPos.x, UI->CompPos.y);
+    ImVec2 CompPosMax = ImVec2(UI->CompPos.x + UI->CompZoom.x, UI->CompPos.y + UI->CompZoom.y);
+
+    ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList();
+    draw_list->AddRectFilled(ViewportMin, ViewportMax, IM_COL32(50, 50, 50, 255));
+    draw_list->AddRect(ViewportMin, ViewportMax, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 255));
+    draw_list->AddRect(CompPosMin, CompPosMax, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 55));
+
+    real32 FontSize = ImGui::GetFontSize();
+    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(ImVec2(ViewportMax.x - FontSize*2, ViewportMin.y + ViewportScale.y - FontSize*3.0));
+    ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, IM_COL32(0, 0, 0, 80));
+    if (ImGui::Button("?"))
+        State->ImGuiPopups = popup_keybinds;
+    ImGui::PopStyleColor();
+
+
+    // Actual composition texture
+    draw_list->PushClipRect(ViewportMin, ViewportMax, true);
+    draw_list->AddImage((void *)(intptr_t)textureID, CompPosMin, CompPosMax);
+    draw_list->PopClipRect();
+
+    // UI+interaction for layer
+    if (State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer > -1)
+    {
+        block_layer *ParentLayer[4];
+        ImGui_Viewport_SelectedLayerUI(State, Memory, UI, draw_list, MainComp, File->PrincipalCompIndex, ParentLayer, 0, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray);
+        if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_viewport_transform) {
+            ImGui_Viewport_TransformUI(File, State, Memory, UI, draw_list, io, (interact_transform *)&State->Interact_Offset[0], ViewportMin, MainComp->Width, MainComp->Height, SortedKeyframeArray);
+        }
+    }
+
+
+
+    // Interactions for dragging and zooming
+    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(ViewportMin);
+
+    ImGui::InvisibleButton("canvas", ViewportScale, ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonLeft | ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonRight);
+    bool32 IsHovered = ImGui::IsItemHovered();
+#if 1
+    bool32 IsActive = ImGui::IsItemActive();
+    bool32 IsActivated = ImGui::IsItemActivated();
+    bool32 IsDeactivated = ImGui::IsItemDeactivated();
+#else
+    bool32 IsActive = ImGui::IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_3);
+    bool32 IsActivated = ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_3);
+    bool32 IsDeactivated = ImGui::IsKeyReleased(ImGuiKey_3);
+#endif
+
+    if (IsHovered && IsActivated && !ImGui::IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton_Right))
+    {
+        // Point to zoom in on if Z is held
+        State->TempZoomRatio = ImGui_ScreenPointToCompUV(ViewportMin, UI->CompPos, UI->CompZoom, io.MousePos);
+
+        if (State->Tool == tool_brush && State->Interact_Active != interact_type_brush && !ImGui::IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_Z)) {
+            if (!io.KeyCtrl) {
+                int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
+                while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, File->Layer_Count, &h, &c, &i))
+                {
+                    block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
+                    if (!Layer->IsPrecomp) {
+                        block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
+                        if (Layer->IsSelected && Source->Type == source_type_principal) {
+                            Assert(Source->BytesPerPixel == 4);
+                            Arbitrary_Zero((uint8 *)State->Brush.TransientBitmap, 2048*2048*4);
+                            State->Interact_Active = interact_type_brush;
+                            State->Brush.LayerToPaint_Index = i;
+                            break;
+                        }
+                    }
+                }
+            }
+            if (State->Brush.LayerToPaint_Index == -1) {
+                State->HotkeyInput = hotkey_newpaintlayer;
+            }
+        }
+
+        // Layer selection
+        if (!ImGui::IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_Z) && State->Tool == tool_default && State->Interact_Active == interact_type_none) {
+            int32 Selection = Layer_TestSelection(Memory, State, UI, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray, File->PrincipalCompIndex);
+            if (!io.KeyShift && State->Interact_Active == interact_type_none)
+                Layer_DeselectAll(File, State, Memory);
+            if (Selection != -1)
+                Layer_Select(Memory, State, Selection);
+        }
+    }
+
+    /*
+    if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_viewport_transform) {
+            interact_transform *Interact = (interact_transform *)&State->Interact_Offset[0];
+            ImVec2 DragDelta = io.MousePos - Interact->OGPos;
+            Interact->Position = V2(DragDelta.x, DragDelta.y);
+            if (io.MouseDelta.x || io.MouseDelta.y)
+                State->UpdateFrame = true;
+    }
+    */
+
+    if (IsActive && ImGui::IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton_Right, -1.0f))
+    {
+        UI->CompPos.x += io.MouseDelta.x;
+        UI->CompPos.y += io.MouseDelta.y;
+    }
+
+
+    bool32 OtherActions = ImGui::IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_Z) || ImGui::IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton_Right);
+    if (State->Tool == tool_brush && State->Interact_Active == interact_type_brush) {
+        Assert(State->Brush.LayerToPaint_Index != -1);
+        if (IsActive && !OtherActions) {
+            block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, State->Brush.LayerToPaint_Index);
+            layer_transforms T_Layer = Layer_GetTransforms(Layer);
+            block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
+            ImVec2 MouseDelta = io.MouseDelta;
+            real32 Delta = MouseDelta.x + MouseDelta.y;
+            v2 PrincipalCompUV = ImGui_ScreenPointToCompUV(ViewportMin, UI->CompPos, UI->CompZoom, io.MousePos);
+            v2 LayerPos = Layer_TraverseForPoint(File, State, Memory, PrincipalCompUV, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray);
+            if (IsActivated) {
+                RenderQueue_AddBrush(State, LayerPos);
+            } else if (Delta != 0.0f) {
+                v2 PrevPos = State->Brush.PrevPos;
+                v2 Delta = PrevPos - LayerPos;
+                real32 Dist = sqrt(LengthSq(Delta));
+                if (Dist > State->Brush.Spacing) {
+                    RenderQueue_AddBrush(State, LayerPos);
+                }
+            }
+            State->UpdateFrame = true;
+        }
+
+        if (IsDeactivated) {
+            RenderQueue_AddBlit(State);
+        }
+    }
+
+    if (ImGui::IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_Z) && ImGui::IsWindowHovered()) {
+        if (IsActive)
+            ImGui::SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeAll);
+        else
+            ImGui::SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor_Hand);
+    }
+
+    real32 Distance = 0;
+    if (IsActive) {
+        if (ImGui::IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton_Left, -1.0f))
+            Distance = io.MouseDelta.x + io.MouseDelta.y;
+        if (ImGui::IsMouseDoubleClicked(ImGuiMouseButton_Left))
+            Distance = 200;
+    }
+    if (Distance && ImGui::IsKeyDown(ImGuiKey_Z))
+    {
+        if (io.KeyShift)
+            Distance *= -1;
+        UI->CompZoom.x += (Distance)*(real32)MainComp->Width/MainComp->Height;
+        UI->CompZoom.y += (Distance);
+        UI->CompPos.x -= ((Distance)*(real32)MainComp->Width/MainComp->Height)*State->TempZoomRatio.x;
+        UI->CompPos.y -= Distance*State->TempZoomRatio.y;
+    }
+
+    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(ImVec2(ViewportMin.x, ViewportMin.y + ViewportScale.y - FontSize*1.5));
+
+    ImGui::Text("%.1f", 100.0f * (UI->CompZoom.x / MainComp->Width));
+    if (State->MsgTime > 0) {
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::SetCursorPosX((ViewportScale.x / 5)*4);
+        ImGui::Text(State->Msg);
+        State->MsgTime--;
+    }
+
+    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(ViewportMin);
+    ImGui_Viewport_Toolbar(State, draw_list);
+    ImGui_Viewport_BrushUI(State, Memory, ViewportMin, ViewportMax, UI->CompPos, io, MainComp->Width, MainComp->Height);
+
+    ImGui::End();
+}
+
+#include "keybinds.h"
+
+static void
+ImGui_Key_GetUIInfo(key_entry KeyEntry, real32 KeySize, ImVec2 *Offset_ScreenPos, ImVec2 *KeyScreenSize) {
+    ImVec2 Extra(0, 0);
+    if (KeyEntry.Sector == 0) {
+        if (KeyEntry.Offset.x != 0) {
+            if (KeyEntry.Offset.y == 1) {
+                Extra.x += 0.5;
+            }
+            if (KeyEntry.Offset.y == 2) {
+                Extra.x += 0.75;
+            }
+            if (KeyEntry.Offset.y == 3) {
+                Extra.x += 1.5;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+    *Offset_ScreenPos = ImVec2(KeySize, KeySize) * (SectorOffset[KeyEntry.Sector] + Extra + KeyEntry.Offset);
+    *KeyScreenSize = (KeyEntry.WidthRatio > 0.0f) ? ImVec2(KeySize * KeyEntry.WidthRatio, KeySize) : ImVec2(KeySize, KeySize * -KeyEntry.WidthRatio);
+}
+
+static void
+ImGui_KeybindUI(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io)
+{
+    real32 KeySize = ImGui::GetFontSize()*2;
+    real32 KeyboardWidth = KeySize * 23.5;
+    real32 KeyboardHeight = KeySize * 7;
+    ImVec2 WindowSize = ImGui::GetWindowSize();
+    ImVec2 WindowMinAbs = ImGui::GetWindowPos();
+    ImVec2 WindowMaxAbs = WindowMinAbs + WindowSize;
+    ImVec2 KeyboardPos((WindowSize.x - KeyboardWidth) / 2, KeySize*2);
+    ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList();
+    ImVec2 SectorOffset[4] = { ImVec2(0, 1.25), ImVec2(0,0), ImVec2(15.25, 1.25), ImVec2(19.5, 1.25) };
+
+    ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, IM_COL32(190, 0, 50, 180));
+    if (ImGui::Button("X"))
+        ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup();
+    ImGui::PopStyleColor();
+
+    State->Split_KeybindUI.Split(draw_list, 2);
+    State->Split_KeybindUI.SetCurrentChannel(draw_list, 1);
+
+    // keyboard
+    ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, IM_COL32(0, 0, 0, 180));
+    for (int k = 0; k < AmountOf(KeyEntries); k++) {
+        key_entry KeyEntry = KeyEntries[k];
+        ImVec2 Offset_ScreenPos(0,0);
+        ImVec2 KeyScreenSize(0,0);
+        ImGui_Key_GetUIInfo(KeyEntry, KeySize, &Offset_ScreenPos, &KeyScreenSize);
+        if (KeyEntry.Name[0] != '\0') {
+            ImGui::PushID(k);
+            ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(WindowMinAbs + KeyboardPos + Offset_ScreenPos);
+            ImGui::Button(KeyEntry.Name, KeyScreenSize);
+            ImGui::PopID();
+        }
+    }
+    ImGui::PopStyleColor();
+
+    State->Split_KeybindUI.SetCurrentChannel(draw_list, 0);
+
+    // list
+    ImVec2 SubwindowMinPos(WindowMinAbs + KeyboardPos + ImVec2(0, KeyboardHeight + KeySize));
+    ImVec2 SubwindowSize(KeyboardWidth, WindowSize.y - KeyboardHeight - KeySize*4);
+    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(SubwindowMinPos);
+    ImGui::BeginChild("Keybinds info", SubwindowSize);
+    key_mode CurrentKeyMode = (key_mode)9999;
+    for (int a = 0; a < AmountOf(ShortcutArray); a++) {
+        shortcut_entry ShortcutEntry = ShortcutArray[a];
+
+        // header info
+        if (CurrentKeyMode != ShortcutEntry.Mode) {
+            ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2(1, KeySize));
+            CurrentKeyMode = ShortcutEntry.Mode;
+            ImVec2 Size = ImGui::CalcTextSize(KeyModeTitles[CurrentKeyMode]);
+            ImGui::SetCursorPosX(((SubwindowSize.x / 2) - (Size.x / 2)));
+            ImGui::Text(KeyModeTitles[CurrentKeyMode]);
+            ImGui::SetCursorPosX((SubwindowSize.x / 2) - (ImGui::CalcTextSize("-----").x / 2));
+            ImGui::TextColored(ImColor(UI->LayerColors[CurrentKeyMode]), "-----");
+            ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2(1, KeySize/4));
+            while (ShortcutEntry.Key == ImGuiKey_None) {
+                ImVec2 Size = ImGui::CalcTextSize(ShortcutEntry.Name);
+                ImGui::SetCursorPosX(((SubwindowSize.x / 2) - (Size.x / 2)));
+                ImGui::Text(ShortcutEntry.Name);
+                a++;
+                ShortcutEntry = ShortcutArray[a];
+            }
+            ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2(1, KeySize/2));
+        }
+
+        // shortcut text + key
+        Assert(ShortcutEntry.Key != ImGuiKey_None);
+        key_entry KeyEntry = KeyEntries[ShortcutEntry.Key - ImGuiKey_Tab];
+        real32 Padding = KeySize;
+        ImGui::Dummy(ImVec2(Padding, 1));
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::Text(ShortcutEntry.Name);
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        char buf[64];
+        if (ShortcutEntry.Mods == Mod_None) {
+            sprintf(buf, "%s", KeyEntry.Name);
+        } else if (ShortcutEntry.Mods == Mod_Shift) {
+            sprintf(buf, "%s", KeyEntry.ShiftName);
+        } else {
+            sprintf(buf, "%s + %s", KeyModText[ShortcutEntry.Mods], KeyEntry.Name);
+        }
+        ImVec2 Size = ImGui::CalcTextSize(buf);
+        ImGui::SetCursorPosX(SubwindowSize.x - Size.x - Padding*1.5);
+        ImGui::Text(buf);
+
+        // indicator on keyboard
+        ImVec2 Offset_ScreenPos(0,0);
+        ImVec2 KeyScreenSize(0,0);
+        ImGui_Key_GetUIInfo(KeyEntry, KeySize, &Offset_ScreenPos, &KeyScreenSize);
+        real32 ModeSliverSize = KeySize / key_mode_count;
+        Offset_ScreenPos.x += (ShortcutEntry.Mode * ModeSliverSize);
+        KeyScreenSize = ImVec2(ModeSliverSize, KeyScreenSize.y);
+        ImVec2 MinPos = WindowMinAbs + KeyboardPos + Offset_ScreenPos;
+        draw_list->AddRectFilled(MinPos, MinPos + KeyScreenSize, UI->LayerColors[CurrentKeyMode]);
+    }
+    ImGui::EndChild();
+    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Escape)) {
+        ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup();
+    }
+    ImGui::EndPopup();
+
+    State->Split_KeybindUI.Merge(draw_list);
+}
+
+static void
+ImGui_Popups(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io)
+{
+    switch (State->ImGuiPopups)
+    {
+        case popup_none:
+        {
+        } break;
+        case popup_saveas:
+        {
+            ImGui::OpenPopup("Save as");
+            ImGui::SetKeyboardFocusHere();
+        } break;
+        case popup_keybinds:
+        {
+            ImGui::OpenPopup("Keybinds");
+            ImGui::SetKeyboardFocusHere();
+        } break;
+        default:
+        {
+            Assert(0);
+        }
+    }
+    State->ImGuiPopups = popup_none;
+
+    if (ImGui::BeginPopupModal("Save as")) {
+        ImGui::Text("Destination path...");
+        ImGui::InputText("File", State->Filename, 512);
+        if (ImGui::Button("Save file")) {
+            ImGui::Text("Saving...");
+            File_SaveAs(File, State, Memory, State->Filename);
+            ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup();
+        }
+        if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Escape)) {
+            ImGui::CloseCurrentPopup();
+        }
+        ImGui::EndPopup();
+    }
+    if (ImGui::BeginPopupModal("Keybinds")) {
+        ImGui_KeybindUI(File, State, UI, Memory, io);
+    }
+}
+
+static void
+ImGui_ProcessInputs(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io, sorted_file Sorted)
+{
+    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Q)) {
+        State->IsRunning = false;
+    }
+    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_W)) {
+        block_composition *MainComp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, File->PrincipalCompIndex);
+        State->Frame_Current = ((State->Frame_Current - 1) < 0) ? 0 : State->Frame_Current - 1;
+        State->UpdateFrame = true;
+        State->UpdateKeyframes = true;
+    }
+    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_E)) {
+        if (!io.KeyShift) {
+            block_composition *MainComp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, File->PrincipalCompIndex);
+            State->Frame_Current = ((State->Frame_Current + 1) >= MainComp->Frame_Count) ? 0 : State->Frame_Current + 1;
+            State->UpdateFrame = true;
+            State->UpdateKeyframes = true;
+        } else {
+            State->Brush.EraseMode ^= 1;
+        }
+    }
+    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_U)) {
+        int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
+        while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, File->Layer_Count, &h, &c, &i)) {
+            block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
+            if (Layer->IsSelected) {
+                Layer_ToggleAllChannels(State, Memory, Layer, Sorted.CompArray, Sorted.LayerArray, Sorted.PropertyStart, Sorted.PropertyArray);
+            }
+        }
+    }
+    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_X)) {
+        if (State->TimelineMode == timeline_mode_graph && State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_move) {
+            if (State->Interact_Modifier != 1)
+                State->Interact_Modifier = 1;
+            else
+                State->Interact_Modifier = 0;
+        } else {
+            v4 Temp = UI->Color;
+            UI->Color = UI->AltColor;
+            UI->AltColor = Temp;
+        }
+    }
+    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Y)) {
+        if (State->TimelineMode == timeline_mode_graph && State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_move) {
+            if (State->Interact_Modifier != 2)
+                State->Interact_Modifier = 2;
+            else
+                State->Interact_Modifier = 0;
+        }
+    }
+    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_V)) {
+        State->Tool = tool_default;
+    }
+    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_B)) {
+        State->Tool = tool_brush;
+    }
+    // NOTE(fox): File data not tracked on undo tree!
+    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_N)) {
+        if (io.KeyShift) {
+            block_composition *MainComp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, File->PrincipalCompIndex);
+            if (MainComp->Frame_Start < State->Frame_Current)
+                MainComp->Frame_End = State->Frame_Current;
+        } else {
+            block_composition *MainComp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, File->PrincipalCompIndex);
+            if (MainComp->Frame_End > State->Frame_Current)
+                MainComp->Frame_Start = State->Frame_Current;
+        }
+    }
+    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Tab)) {
+        State->TimelineMode = (State->TimelineMode == timeline_mode_default) ? timeline_mode_graph : timeline_mode_default;
+        UI->GraphZoomSize = ImVec2(0, 0);
+        UI->GraphMoveSize = ImVec2(0, 0);
+    }
+    if (!io.KeyCtrl) {
+        // NOTE(fox): Checking IsWindowHovered seems to be all we need to do to
+        // make per-window hotkeys work; setting it as the focused window causes
+        // problems with popups.
+        if (State->FocusedWindow == focus_timeline) {
+            if (State->TimelineMode == timeline_mode_default) {
+                if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_G)) {
+                    Layer_ToggleChannel(File, Memory, 0);
+                    Layer_ToggleChannel(File, Memory, 1);
+                } else if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_A)) {
+                    Layer_ToggleChannel(File, Memory, 2);
+                    Layer_ToggleChannel(File, Memory, 3);
+                } else if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_R)) {
+                    Layer_ToggleChannel(File, Memory, 4);
+                } else if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_S)) {
+                    Layer_ToggleChannel(File, Memory, 5);
+                } else if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_T)) {
+                    if (io.KeyShift) {
+                        Layer_ToggleChannel(File, Memory, 6);
+                    } else {
+                        Layer_ToggleChannel(File, Memory, 7);
+                    }
+                }
+            } else if (State->TimelineMode == timeline_mode_graph) {
+                if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_G)) {
+                        State->Interact_Offset[2] = io.MousePos.x;
+                        State->Interact_Offset[3] = io.MousePos.y;
+                        State->Interact_Active = interact_type_keyframe_move;
+                } else if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_R)) {
+                        // State->Interact_Offset[2] = io.MousePos.x;
+                        // State->Interact_Offset[3] = io.MousePos.y;
+                        // State->Interact_Active = interact_type_keyframe_rotate;
+                } else if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_S)) {
+                        State->Interact_Offset[2] = io.MousePos.x;
+                        State->Interact_Offset[3] = io.MousePos.y;
+                        State->Interact_Active = interact_type_keyframe_scale;
+                }
+            }
+        } else if (State->FocusedWindow == focus_viewport) {
+            if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_T)) {
+                Interact_Transform_Begin(File, Memory, State, io.MousePos, Sorted.CompArray, Sorted.LayerArray);
+                State->Tool = tool_default;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Escape)) {
+        if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_move ||
+            State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_rotate ||
+            State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_scale) {
+            State->Interact_Offset[0] = 0;
+            State->Interact_Offset[1] = 0;
+            State->Interact_Offset[2] = 0;
+            State->Interact_Offset[3] = 0;
+            State->Interact_Active = interact_type_none;
+            State->Interact_Modifier = 0;
+            State->UpdateFrame = true;
+        }
+    }
+    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Space) ) {
+        if (io.KeyShift) {
+            State->RerouteEffects = true;
+        } else {
+            State->IsPlaying ^= 1;
+            State->HotFramePerf = 1;
+            State->PlayAudio = false;
+            State->FramePlayingCount = 0;
+            switch (SDL_GetAudioStatus())
+            {
+                case SDL_AUDIO_STOPPED: Assert(0); break;
+                case SDL_AUDIO_PLAYING: SDL_PauseAudio(1); break;
+                case SDL_AUDIO_PAUSED:  SDL_PauseAudio(0); break;
+                default: Assert(0); break;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_2)) {
+        int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
+        while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, File->Layer_Count, &h, &c, &i)) {
+            block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
+            if (Layer->IsSelected && Layer->IsPrecomp) {
+                Layer->Precomp_Toggled ^= 1;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+
+    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Delete))
+    {
+        State->HotkeyInput = hotkey_deletelayer;
+    }
+
+    if (io.KeyShift && ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Slash))
+    {
+        State->ImGuiPopups = popup_keybinds;
+    }
+
+#if DEBUG
+    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_3))
+    {
+        // State->ImGuiPopups = popup_keybinds;
+        Debug.DisableAlpha = 0;
+        State->UpdateFrame = true;
+    }
+    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_4))
+    {
+        Debug.DisableAlpha = 1;
+        State->UpdateFrame = true;
+    }
+    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_5))
+    {
+        Debug.DisableAlpha = 2;
+        State->UpdateFrame = true;
+    }
+    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_F))
+    {
+        sprintf(State->DummyName, "test2");
+        File_Open(File, State, Memory, State->DummyName);
+        State->UpdateFrame = true;
+        State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer = 0;
+    }
+    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_0))
+    {
+        Debug.ReloadUI ^= 1;
+    }
+    if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_1))
+    {
+        Debug.ToggleWindow ^= 1;
+    }
+#endif
+
+    bool32 mod_key = io.ConfigMacOSXBehaviors ? io.KeySuper : io.KeyCtrl;
+    if (mod_key) {
+        if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_S)) {
+            if (io.KeyShift) {
+                State->ImGuiPopups = popup_saveas;
+            } else {
+                if (State->Filename[0] == '\0') {
+                    State->ImGuiPopups = popup_saveas;
+                } else {
+                    File_SaveAs(File, State, Memory, State->Filename);
+                }
+            }
+        }
+        if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_C)) {
+            Clipboard_Store(File, State, Memory, Sorted.CompArray, Sorted.LayerArray, Sorted.PropertyStart, Sorted.PropertyArray);
+        }
+        if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_V)) {
+            Clipboard_Paste(File, State, Memory, Sorted.CompArray, Sorted.LayerArray, Sorted.PropertyArray);
+        }
+        if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Z)) {
+            if (io.KeyShift) {
+                State->HotkeyInput = hotkey_redo;
+            } else {
+                State->HotkeyInput = hotkey_undo;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+static void
+ImGui_Menu(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io)
+{
+    bool open = true;
+    ImGui::Begin("Menu", &open, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar | ImGuiWindowFlags_MenuBar);
+    if (ImGui::BeginMenuBar())
+    {
+        if (ImGui::BeginMenu("File"))
+        {
+            if (ImGui::MenuItem("Save", "Ctrl+S"))
+            {
+                if (State->Filename[0] == '\0')
+                    State->ImGuiPopups = popup_saveas;
+                else
+                    File_SaveAs(File, State, Memory, State->Filename);
+            }
+            if (ImGui::MenuItem("Save as", "Ctrl+Shift+S"))
+            {
+                State->ImGuiPopups = popup_saveas;
+            }
+            if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Open file"))
+            {
+                ImGui::InputText("Filename", State->DummyName, 512);
+                if (ImGui::IsItemDeactivated() && ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Enter)) {
+                    if (File_Open(File, State, Memory, State->DummyName)) {
+                        State->UpdateFrame = true;
+                    } else {
+                        PostMsg(State, "File not found.");
+                    }
+                }
+                ImGui::EndMenu();
+            }
+            ImGui::EndMenu();
+        }
+        if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Layer"))
+        {
+            if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Import source from file"))
+            {
+                ImGui::InputText("Path to image", State->DummyName2, 512);
+                if (ImGui::IsItemDeactivated() && ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Enter)) {
+                    int SourceIndex = Source_Generate(File, State, Memory, (void *)State->DummyName2);
+                    State->UpdateFrame = true;
+                }
+                ImGui::EndMenu();
+            }
+            ImGui::EndMenu();
+        }
+        if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Window"))
+        {
+#if STABLE
+            if (ImGui::Selectable("Stable Diffusion tools", UI->StableEnabled))
+                UI->StableEnabled ^= 1;
+            ImGui::EndMenu();
+#endif
+        }
+        ImGui::EndMenuBar();
+    }
+
+    ImGui::End();
+}
+
+static void
+ImGui_EffectsPanel(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, ui *UI, ImGuiIO io)
+{
+    ImGui::Begin("Effects list", NULL);
+    if (State->RerouteEffects) {
+        ImGui::SetKeyboardFocusHere();
+        State->RerouteEffects = 0;
+    }
+    int value_changed = ImGui::InputText("Effect name...", State->filter.InputBuf, IM_ARRAYSIZE(State->filter.InputBuf),
+                                          ImGuiInputTextFlags_CallbackCompletion, EffectConsoleCallback);
+
+    if (Hacko) {
+        if (!io.KeyShift)
+            EffectSel++;
+        else
+            EffectSel--;
+        Hacko = 0;
+    }
+    if (value_changed) {
+        State->filter.Build();
+        EffectSel = -1;
+    }
+    // Enter conveniently deactivates the InputText field
+    if (ImGui::IsItemDeactivated() && ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Enter)) {
+        int32 p = 0;
+        for (int32 i = 0; i < State->Playhead_Effect; i++) {
+            header_effect *EffectHeader = &State->Effect[i];
+            if (State->filter.PassFilter(EffectHeader->Name)) {
+                if (EffectSel == p && State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer != -1) {
+                    Effect_Add(File, State, Memory, i);
+                    State->UpdateFrame = true;
+                }
+                p++;
+            }
+        }
+        EffectSel = -1;
+    }
+    int32 p = 0;
+    for (int32 i = 0; i < State->Playhead_Effect; i++) {
+        header_effect *EffectHeader = &State->Effect[i];
+        if (State->filter.PassFilter(EffectHeader->Name)) {
+            bool t = false;
+            if (EffectSel == p) {
+                t = true;
+            }
+            ImGui::Selectable(EffectHeader->Name, &t);
+            if (ImGui::IsItemClicked()) {
+                if (ImGui::IsMouseDoubleClicked(ImGuiMouseButton_Left) && State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer != -1) {
+                    Effect_Add(File, State, Memory, i);
+                    State->UpdateFrame = true;
+                }
+            }
+            p++;
+        }
+    }
+    ImGui::End();
+}
+
+static char ImGuiPrefs[] = "[Window][DockSpaceViewport_11111111]\n"
+"Pos=0,0\n"
+"Size=3840,2160\n"
+"Collapsed=0\n"
+"\n"
+"[Window][Debug##Default]\n"
+"Pos=122,442\n"
+"Size=400,400\n"
+"Collapsed=0\n"
+"\n"
+"[Window][Viewport]\n"
+"Pos=443,34\n"
+"Size=2872,1565\n"
+"Collapsed=0\n"
+"DockId=0x00000010,0\n"
+"\n"
+"[Window][###Properties]\n"
+"Pos=0,34\n"
+"Size=441,1565\n"
+"Collapsed=0\n"
+"DockId=0x0000000B,0\n"
+"\n"
+"[Window][Timeline]\n"
+"Pos=0,1601\n"
+"Size=3840,559\n"
+"Collapsed=0\n"
+"DockId=0x0000000A,0\n"
+"\n"
+"[Window][Dear ImGui Demo]\n"
+"Pos=2677,34\n"
+"Size=523,437\n"
+"Collapsed=0\n"
+"DockId=0x00000011,1\n"
+"\n"
+"[Window][Files]\n"
+"Pos=3317,604\n"
+"Size=523,743\n"
+"Collapsed=0\n"
+"DockId=0x00000007,0\n"
+"\n"
+"[Window][Effects list]\n"
+"Pos=3317,1349\n"
+"Size=523,250\n"
+"Collapsed=0\n"
+"DockId=0x00000008,0\n"
+"\n"
+"[Window][Graph editor]\n"
+"Pos=0,949\n"
+"Size=3200,526\n"
+"Collapsed=0\n"
+"DockId=0x00000009,0\n"
+"\n"
+"[Window][undotree]\n"
+"Pos=2677,473\n"
+"Size=523,572\n"
+"Collapsed=0\n"
+"DockId=0x00000007,2\n"
+"\n"
+"[Window][memoryviewer]\n"
+"Pos=50,273\n"
+"Size=800,200\n"
+"Collapsed=0\n"
+"\n"
+"[Window][Example: Custom rendering]\n"
+"Pos=758,789\n"
+"Size=485,414\n"
+"Collapsed=0\n"
+"\n"
+"[Window][Memory viewer]\n"
+"Pos=2677,473\n"
+"Size=523,572\n"
+"Collapsed=0\n"
+"DockId=0x00000007,1\n"
+"\n"
+"[Window][Graph info]\n"
+"Pos=2838,1265\n"
+"Size=235,353\n"
+"Collapsed=0\n"
+"\n"
+"[Window][Properties]\n"
+"Pos=0,34\n"
+"Size=495,1056\n"
+"Collapsed=0\n"
+"DockId=0x0000000F,0\n"
+"\n"
+"[Window][Colors]\n"
+"Pos=3317,34\n"
+"Size=523,568\n"
+"Collapsed=0\n"
+"DockId=0x00000011,0\n"
+"\n"
+"[Window][Menu]\n"
+"Pos=0,0\n"
+"Size=3840,32\n"
+"Collapsed=0\n"
+"DockId=0x0000000D,0\n"
+"\n"
+"[Window][Stable Diffusion]\n"
+"Pos=2206,684\n"
+"Size=421,462\n"
+"Collapsed=0\n"
+"\n"
+"[Window][SD prompt input]\n"
+"Pos=2677,473\n"
+"Size=523,541\n"
+"Collapsed=0\n"
+"DockId=0x00000007,2\n"
+"\n"
+"[Window][Example: Console]\n"
+"Pos=747,851\n"
+"Size=520,600\n"
+"Collapsed=0\n"
+"\n"
+"[Window][SD gallery]\n"
+"Pos=0,718\n"
+"Size=441,557\n"
+"Collapsed=0\n"
+"DockId=0x0000000C,0\n"
+"\n"
+"[Window][Save as]\n"
+"Pos=1782,1058\n"
+"Size=300,116\n"
+"Collapsed=0\n"
+"\n"
+"[Window][Keybinds]\n"
+"Pos=1573,769\n"
+"Size=750,639\n"
+"Collapsed=0\n"
+"\n"
+"[Table][0x861D378E,3]\n"
+"Column 0  Weight=1.0000\n"
+"Column 1  Weight=1.0000\n"
+"Column 2  Weight=1.0000\n"
+"\n"
+"[Table][0x1F146634,3]\n"
+"RefScale=13\n"
+"Column 0  Width=63\n"
+"Column 1  Width=63\n"
+"Column 2  Width=63\n"
+"\n"
+"[Table][0x64418101,3]\n"
+"RefScale=13\n"
+"Column 0  Width=63\n"
+"Column 1  Width=63\n"
+"Column 2  Width=63\n"
+"\n"
+"[Table][0xC9935533,3]\n"
+"Column 0  Weight=1.0000\n"
+"Column 1  Weight=1.0000\n"
+"Column 2  Weight=1.0000\n"
+"\n"
+"[Docking][Data]\n"
+"DockSpace             ID=0x8B93E3BD Window=0xA787BDB4 Pos=0,0 Size=3840,2160 Split=Y Selected=0x13926F0B\n"
+"  DockNode            ID=0x0000000D Parent=0x8B93E3BD SizeRef=3200,32 HiddenTabBar=1 Selected=0xA57AB2C6\n"
+"  DockNode            ID=0x0000000E Parent=0x8B93E3BD SizeRef=3200,1299 Split=Y\n"
+"    DockNode          ID=0x00000001 Parent=0x0000000E SizeRef=3200,1205 Split=X Selected=0x13926F0B\n"
+"      DockNode        ID=0x00000003 Parent=0x00000001 SizeRef=441,1171 Split=Y Selected=0xDBB8CEFA\n"
+"        DockNode      ID=0x0000000B Parent=0x00000003 SizeRef=521,425 Selected=0xDBB8CEFA\n"
+"        DockNode      ID=0x0000000C Parent=0x00000003 SizeRef=521,347 Selected=0x56290987\n"
+"      DockNode        ID=0x00000004 Parent=0x00000001 SizeRef=1690,1171 Split=X Selected=0x13926F0B\n"
+"        DockNode      ID=0x00000005 Parent=0x00000004 SizeRef=1165,1171 Split=X Selected=0x13926F0B\n"
+"          DockNode    ID=0x0000000F Parent=0x00000005 SizeRef=495,856 Selected=0x199AB496\n"
+"          DockNode    ID=0x00000010 Parent=0x00000005 SizeRef=2199,856 CentralNode=1 Selected=0x13926F0B\n"
+"        DockNode      ID=0x00000006 Parent=0x00000004 SizeRef=523,1171 Split=Y Selected=0x86FA2F90\n"
+"          DockNode    ID=0x00000011 Parent=0x00000006 SizeRef=483,437 Selected=0xBF7DFDC9\n"
+"          DockNode    ID=0x00000012 Parent=0x00000006 SizeRef=483,766 Split=Y Selected=0x59A2A092\n"
+"            DockNode  ID=0x00000007 Parent=0x00000012 SizeRef=523,572 Selected=0x86FA2F90\n"
+"            DockNode  ID=0x00000008 Parent=0x00000012 SizeRef=523,192 Selected=0x812F222D\n"
+"    DockNode          ID=0x00000002 Parent=0x0000000E SizeRef=3200,559 Split=Y Selected=0x0F18B61B\n"
+"      DockNode        ID=0x00000009 Parent=0x00000002 SizeRef=3250,526 Selected=0xA1F22F4D\n"
+"      DockNode        ID=0x0000000A Parent=0x00000002 SizeRef=3250,323 HiddenTabBar=1 Selected=0x0F18B61B\n"
+"\0";
diff --git a/src/imgui_ui_debug.cpp b/src/imgui_ui_debug.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f79fb88
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/imgui_ui_debug.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+static void
+ImGui_DebugMemoryViewer(memory *Memory, project_state *State)
+{
+    ImGui::Begin("Memory viewer");
+
+    ImVec2 ViewportMin = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
+    ImVec2 ViewportScale = ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail();
+    ImVec2 ViewportMax = ImVec2(ViewportMin.x + ViewportScale.x, ViewportMin.y + ViewportScale.y);
+
+    // ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, ImVec2(0, 0));
+    // ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(0, 0));
+
+    cache_entry *EntryArray = State->Render.Entry;
+    char *Type[4] = { "unassigned", "comp", "source", "layer" };
+    uint32 Blocks_Total = Memory->Slot[B_CachedBitmaps].Size / BitmapBlockSize;
+    uint32 PerRow = sqrt(Blocks_Total);
+    real32 BlockSize = ViewportScale.x / PerRow;
+    for (int c = 0; c < Memory->EntryCount; c++) {
+        ImGui::PushID(c);
+        cache_entry Entry = EntryArray[c];
+        uint32 BlockSpan;
+        if (c+1 != Memory->EntryCount) {
+            cache_entry NextEntry = EntryArray[c+1];
+            BlockSpan = NextEntry.Block_StartIndex - Entry.Block_StartIndex;
+        } else {
+            BlockSpan = 1;
+        }
+        ImVec2 ButtonPos = ViewportMin + ImVec2((Entry.Block_StartIndex % PerRow) * BlockSize, BlockSize * (Entry.Block_StartIndex / PerRow));
+        ImVec2 ButtonSize = ImVec2(BlockSpan * BlockSize, BlockSize);
+        ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(ButtonPos);
+        char size[20];
+        sprintf(size, "%lu##uimemoryblock", EntryArray[c].CycleTime);
+        if (ButtonPos.x + ButtonSize.x > ViewportMax.x) {
+            real32 ButtonSizeSplit = ViewportMax.x - ButtonPos.x;
+            ImGui::Button(size, ImVec2(ButtonSizeSplit, ButtonSize.y));
+            ImVec2 ButtonPos2 = ImVec2(ViewportMin.x, ButtonPos.y + BlockSize);
+            ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(ButtonPos2);
+            ImGui::Button("##uimemoryblockpad", ImVec2(ButtonSize.x - ButtonSizeSplit, ButtonSize.y));
+        } else {
+            ImGui::Button(size, ButtonSize);
+        }
+        if (ImGui::IsItemHovered()) {
+            ImGui::BeginTooltip();
+            ImGui::Text("Type - %s, Start - %i, Info - %i, %i", Type[EntryArray[c].Type], EntryArray[c].Block_StartIndex, EntryArray[c].TypeInfo, EntryArray[c].TypeInfo_Sub);
+            ImGui::EndTooltip();
+        }
+        ImGui::PopID();
+    }
+    // ImGui::PopStyleVar(2);
+    ImGui::End();
+}
+
+static void
+ImGui_DebugRenderQueue(project_state *State)
+{
+    ImGui::Begin("debug_queue");
+    for (int i = 0; i < State->Queue.CurrentIdx; i++) {
+        v2 Pos = State->Queue.Item[i].Pos;
+        char size[20];
+        sprintf(size, "Type %i: %.2f, %.2f", State->Queue.Item[i].Type, Pos.x, Pos.y);
+        ImGui::MenuItem(size, NULL, (i == State->Queue.Playhead));
+    }
+    ImGui::End();
+}
+
+static void
+ImGui_DebugUndoTree(memory *Memory, project_state *State)
+{
+    ImGui::Begin("debug_undotree");
+    for (int i = 0; i < Memory->History.NumberOfEntries; i++) {
+        history_entry Entry = Memory->History.Entry[i];
+        bool32 CurrentPos = (i < Memory->History.EntryPlayhead);
+        ImGui::MenuItem(Entry.Name, NULL, CurrentPos);
+    }
+    ImGui::End();
+}
diff --git a/src/imgui_ui_properties.cpp b/src/imgui_ui_properties.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5fda218
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/imgui_ui_properties.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,441 @@
+static void
+ImGui_Properties_RGBASwitch(project_state *State, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io, uint32 *Channel)
+{
+    char *Names[5] = {"All", "R", "G", "B", "A" };
+    if (ImGui::BeginListBox("RGB")) {
+        for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++) {
+            if (ImGui::Selectable(Names[i], (*Channel == i))) {
+                *Channel = i;
+            }
+        }
+        ImGui::EndListBox();
+    }
+}
+
+static void
+ImGui_Properties_Slider(project_state *State, memory *Memory, property_channel *Property, ImGuiIO &io, ImVec2 WindowMinAbs, ImVec2 WindowMaxAbs, memory_table_list Table)
+{
+    if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) {
+        State->UpdateFrame = true;
+        // ImGui_WarpMouse(State, io.MousePos, WindowMinAbs, WindowMaxAbs, 1);
+    }
+
+    if (ImGui::IsItemActivated()) {
+        State->Interact_Offset[0] = Property->CurrentValue;
+        State->Interact_Active = interact_type_slider_scrub;
+    }
+    if (ImGui::IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit()) {
+        // Pressing Esc while dragging a slider conveniently stops the input in
+        // ImGui, so all we need to do is set it back:
+        if (ImGui::IsKeyPressed(ImGuiKey_Escape)) {
+            Property->CurrentValue = State->Interact_Offset[0];
+        } else if (!Property->Keyframe_Count) {
+            History_Entry_Commit(Memory, "Property interact");
+            real32 Temp = Property->CurrentValue;
+            Property->CurrentValue = State->Interact_Offset[0];
+            History_Action_Swap(Memory, Table, sizeof(Property->CurrentValue), &Property->CurrentValue);
+            Property->CurrentValue = Temp;
+            History_Entry_End(Memory);
+        }
+        State->Interact_Active = interact_type_none;
+        // State->UpdateFrame = true;
+        // State->Warp_X = 0;
+        // State->Warp_Y = 0;
+    }
+}
+
+
+static void
+ImGui_Properties_CurvesUI(project_state *State, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io, block_effect *Effect, property_channel *PropertyStart, uint16 *SortedPointStart)
+{
+
+    real32 Padding = ImGui::GetFontSize()*6;
+    ImVec2 ViewportMin = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos() + Padding/6;
+    ImVec2 ViewportScale = ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail();
+    ViewportScale.y = ViewportScale.x = ViewportScale.x - Padding;  // square seems nice
+    ImVec2 ViewportMax = ViewportMin + ViewportScale;
+
+    ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList();
+    draw_list->AddRectFilled(ViewportMin, ViewportMax, IM_COL32(50, 50, 50, 255));
+    draw_list->AddRect(ViewportMin, ViewportMax, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 255));
+
+    real32 PointSize = 40;
+
+    ImU32 col = ImGui::GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_Text);
+    ImU32 col_light = ImGui::GetColorU32(ImGuiCol_TextDisabled);
+
+    ImVec2 Point_ScreenPos[4];
+
+    // ocd?
+    draw_list->PushClipRect(ViewportMin + 2, ViewportMax - 2, true);
+
+    for (real32 i = 0.25; i < 1.0; i += 0.25) {
+        ImVec2 Horizontal = ViewportMin + ViewportScale * ImVec2(0, i);
+        ImVec2 Vertical = ViewportMin + ViewportScale * ImVec2(i, 0);
+        draw_list->AddLine(Horizontal, Horizontal + ImVec2(ViewportScale.x, 0), col_light, 1.0f);
+        draw_list->AddLine(Vertical, Vertical + ImVec2(0, ViewportScale.y), col_light, 1.0f);
+    }
+
+    draw_list->PopClipRect();
+
+    uint32 *SelectedChannel = (uint32 *)&Effect->ExtraData[5];
+    real32 *Num = &Effect->ExtraData[*SelectedChannel];
+
+    v2 Pos = {};
+    bool32 AddPoint = 0;
+
+    for (uint32 i = 0; i < *(uint32 *)Num; i += 1) {
+
+        v2 Point_P1 = Effect_V2(Memory, Effect, SortedPointStart[i]);
+        v2 Point_P2 = Effect_V2(Memory, Effect, SortedPointStart[i + 1]);
+        v2 Point_P0 = (i != 0) ? Effect_V2(Memory, Effect, SortedPointStart[i - 1]) : V2(0, 0);
+        v2 Point_P3 = (i != (*Num - 2)) ? Effect_V2(Memory, Effect, SortedPointStart[i + 2]) : V2(1, 1);
+
+        ImVec2 Point_P0_ScreenPos = ViewportMin + (ImVec2(Point_P0.x, 1.0f - Point_P0.y) * ViewportScale);
+        ImVec2 Point_P1_ScreenPos = ViewportMin + (ImVec2(Point_P1.x, 1.0f - Point_P1.y) * ViewportScale);
+        ImVec2 Point_P2_ScreenPos = ViewportMin + (ImVec2(Point_P2.x, 1.0f - Point_P2.y) * ViewportScale);
+        ImVec2 Point_P3_ScreenPos = ViewportMin + (ImVec2(Point_P3.x, 1.0f - Point_P3.y) * ViewportScale);
+
+        ImGui::PushID(&PropertyStart[SortedPointStart[i]]);
+
+        draw_list->AddNgon(Point_P1_ScreenPos, 2, col, 8, 5.0f);
+
+        ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(Point_P1_ScreenPos - ImVec2(PointSize/2, PointSize/2));
+        ImGui::InvisibleButton("##point", ImVec2(PointSize, PointSize), ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonLeft);
+
+        if (ImGui::IsItemHovered()) {
+            ImGui::SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor_Hand);
+        }
+
+        if (ImGui::IsItemActivated()) {
+            if (io.KeyCtrl && *Num != 2) {
+                History_Entry_Commit(Memory, "Curves delete point");
+                property_channel *Property_X = Effect_Property(Memory, Effect, SortedPointStart[i]);
+                History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_Properties, sizeof(Property_X->Identifier), &Property_X->Identifier);
+                Property_X->Identifier = -1;
+                property_channel *Property_Y = Effect_Property(Memory, Effect, SortedPointStart[i]+1);
+                History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_Properties, sizeof(Property_Y->Identifier), &Property_Y->Identifier);
+                Property_Y->Identifier = -1;
+                History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_Effects, sizeof(Effect->ExtraData[*SelectedChannel]), &Effect->ExtraData[*SelectedChannel]);
+                Effect->ExtraData[*SelectedChannel]--;
+                History_Entry_End(Memory);
+            }
+        }
+
+        if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) {
+            if (io.MouseDelta.x || io.MouseDelta.y) {
+                property_channel *Property_X = Effect_Property(Memory, Effect, SortedPointStart[i]);
+                property_channel *Property_Y = Effect_Property(Memory, Effect, SortedPointStart[i]+1);
+                v2 Point = V2(((io.MousePos - ViewportMin) / ViewportScale));
+                if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_none) {
+                    State->Interact_Active = interact_type_slider_scrub;
+                    State->Interact_Offset[0] = Property_X->CurrentValue;
+                    State->Interact_Offset[1] = Property_Y->CurrentValue;
+                }
+                Point.y = 1.0f - Point.y;
+                Point.x = Normalize(Point.x);
+                Point.y = Normalize(Point.y);
+                Property_X->CurrentValue = Point.x;
+                Property_Y->CurrentValue = Point.y;
+                State->UpdateFrame = true;
+            }
+        }
+
+        if (ImGui::IsItemDeactivated()) {
+            if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_slider_scrub) {
+                History_Entry_Commit(Memory, "Curves change point pos");
+                property_channel *Property[2] = { Effect_Property(Memory, Effect, SortedPointStart[i]),
+                                                  Effect_Property(Memory, Effect, SortedPointStart[i]+1) };
+                for (int a = 0; a < 2; a++)
+                {
+                    real32 Temp = Property[a]->CurrentValue;
+                    Property[a]->CurrentValue = State->Interact_Offset[a];
+                    History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_Properties, sizeof(Property[a]->CurrentValue), &Property[a]->CurrentValue);
+                    Property[a]->CurrentValue = Temp;
+                }
+                History_Entry_End(Memory);
+                State->Interact_Active = interact_type_none;
+            }
+        }
+
+        if (i == (*Num - 1)) {
+            ImGui::PopID();
+            break;
+        }
+
+        // Conversion from Catmull-Rom curves to Bezier curves for display,
+        // referencing https://pomax.github.io/bezierinfo/#catmullconv
+
+        ImVec2 bez_m1 = (Point_P2_ScreenPos - Point_P0_ScreenPos) / (6 * Tau);
+        ImVec2 bez_m2 = (Point_P3_ScreenPos - Point_P1_ScreenPos) / (6 * Tau);
+
+        ImVec2 Point_Bez[4];
+        Point_Bez[0] = Point_P1_ScreenPos;
+        Point_Bez[1] = Point_P1_ScreenPos + bez_m1;
+        Point_Bez[2] = Point_P2_ScreenPos - bez_m2;
+        Point_Bez[3] = Point_P2_ScreenPos;
+
+        draw_list->PushClipRect(ViewportMin, ViewportMax, true);
+
+        draw_list->AddBezierCubic(Point_Bez[0], Point_Bez[1], Point_Bez[2], Point_Bez[3], col, 1.0f, 0);
+
+        if (ImGui::BezierInteractive(Point_Bez[0], Point_Bez[1], Point_Bez[2], Point_Bez[3]) &&
+            io.MousePos.x > (Point_P1_ScreenPos.x + PointSize/2) &&
+            io.MousePos.x < (Point_P2_ScreenPos.x - PointSize/2))
+        {
+            ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(io.MousePos - ImVec2(5,5));
+            ImGui::Button("pointclick", ImVec2(10, 10));
+            if (ImGui::IsItemActivated()) {
+                Pos = V2(((io.MousePos - ViewportMin) / ViewportScale));
+                Pos.y = 1.0f - Pos.y;
+                Pos.x = Normalize(Pos.x);
+                Pos.y = Normalize(Pos.y);
+                AddPoint = true;
+            }
+        }
+
+        if (i == 0)
+            draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(ViewportMin.x, Point_Bez[0].y), Point_Bez[0], col, 1.0f);
+        if (i == (*Num - 2))
+            draw_list->AddLine(ImVec2(ViewportMax.x, Point_Bez[3].y), Point_Bez[3], col, 1.0f);
+
+        draw_list->PopClipRect();
+
+#if 0
+        for (int x = 0; x < 256; x++) {
+            v2 Point = V2((real32)x/256, LUT[*ChannelIndex][x]);
+            ImVec2 Point_ScreenPos = ViewportMin + (ImVec2(Point.x, 1.0f - Point.y) * ViewportScale);
+            draw_list->AddNgon(Point_ScreenPos, 1, col, 8, 5.0f);
+        }
+#endif
+
+        draw_list->AddNgon(Point_P1_ScreenPos, 2, col, 8, 5.0f);
+
+
+        ImGui::PopID();
+    }
+
+
+    if (AddPoint) {
+        int x = 0;
+        History_Entry_Commit(Memory, "Curves add point");
+        for (;;) {
+            if (x > MAX_PROPERTIES_PER_EFFECT)
+                break;
+            property_channel *Property_X = Effect_Property(Memory, Effect, x);
+            if (Property_X->Identifier == -1) {
+                History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_Properties, sizeof(Property_X->CurrentValue), &Property_X->CurrentValue);
+                Property_X->CurrentValue = Pos.x;
+                History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_Properties, sizeof(Property_X->Identifier), &Property_X->Identifier);
+                Property_X->Identifier = *SelectedChannel;
+                property_channel *Property_Y = Effect_Property(Memory, Effect, x+1);
+                Assert(Property_Y->Identifier == -1);
+                History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_Properties, sizeof(Property_Y->CurrentValue), &Property_Y->CurrentValue);
+                Property_Y->CurrentValue = Pos.y;
+                History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_Properties, sizeof(Property_Y->Identifier), &Property_Y->Identifier);
+                Property_Y->Identifier = *SelectedChannel;
+                x = MAX_PROPERTIES_PER_EFFECT;
+            }
+            x++;
+        }
+        History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_Effects, sizeof(Effect->ExtraData[*SelectedChannel]), &Effect->ExtraData[*SelectedChannel]);
+        Effect->ExtraData[*SelectedChannel]++;
+        AddPoint = false;
+        History_Entry_End(Memory);
+    }
+
+    // ImVec2 ButtonPos = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
+    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(ViewportMin);
+
+    ImGui::InvisibleButton("canvas", ViewportScale, ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonLeft | ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonRight);
+    bool32 IsHovered = ImGui::IsItemHovered();
+    bool32 IsActive = ImGui::IsItemActive();
+    bool32 IsActivated = ImGui::IsItemActivated();
+    bool32 IsDeactivated = ImGui::IsItemDeactivated();
+
+    ImVec2 EndPos = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
+
+    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(ViewportMin + ImVec2(ViewportScale.x + 20, 0));
+    ImGui_Properties_RGBASwitch(State, Memory, io, SelectedChannel);
+
+    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(EndPos);
+}
+
+static void
+ImGui_PropertiesPanel(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io,
+                      sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray,
+                      sorted_property_array *SortedPropertyStart, uint16 *SortedKeyframeArray)
+{
+    bool32 Display = 1;
+    block_layer *Layer = NULL;
+    sorted_layer_array *SortedLayer = NULL;
+    if (State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer > -1) {
+        Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer, 0);
+        sorted_comp_array SortedCompStart = SortedCompArray[Layer->Block_Composition_Index];
+        sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart = Sorted_GetLayerStart(SortedLayerArray, &SortedCompStart, Layer->Block_Composition_Index);
+        SortedLayer = &SortedLayerStart[State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer];
+        if (!Layer->Occupied)
+            Display = 0;
+    } else {
+        Display = 0;
+    }
+    if (Display) {
+        block_string *String = (block_string *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Strings, Layer->Block_String_Index);
+        char buf[256];
+        sprintf(buf, "Properties: %s###Properties", String->Char);
+        ImGui::Begin(buf);
+        if (ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows))
+            State->FocusedWindow = focus_properties;
+        ImVec2 WindowSize = ImGui::GetWindowSize();
+        ImVec2 WindowMinAbs = ImGui::GetWindowPos();
+        ImVec2 WindowMaxAbs = WindowMinAbs + WindowSize;
+        ImGui::Text("Transform");
+
+        sorted_property_array *InfoLocation = SortedPropertyStart + SortedLayer->SortedPropertyStart;
+        uint16 *ArrayLocation = SortedKeyframeArray + SortedLayer->SortedKeyframeStart;
+        int h = 0, c = 0, p = 0;
+        property_channel *Property = NULL;
+        block_effect *Effect = NULL;
+        while (Layer_LoopChannels(State, Memory, &InfoLocation, &ArrayLocation, Layer, &Property, &Effect, &h, &c, &p))
+        {
+            ImGui::PushID(Property);
+            if ((h - 1) < AmountOf(Layer->Property) && c == 0) {
+                if (ImGui::Button("K")) {
+                    Property_AddKeyframe(Memory, F_Layers, Property, State->Frame_Current, ArrayLocation);
+                }
+                ImGui::SameLine();
+#if DEBUG
+                char size[64];
+                sprintf(size, "%s, %i", DefaultChannel[h-1], Property->Keyframe_Count);
+                char *Name = size;
+#else
+                char *Name = DefaultChannel[h-1];
+#endif
+                ImGui::DragScalar(Name, ImGuiDataType_Float, &Property->CurrentValue, Property->ScrubVal, &Property->MinVal, &Property->MaxVal, "%f");
+                ImGui_Properties_Slider(State, Memory, Property, io, WindowMinAbs, WindowMaxAbs, F_Layers);
+            } else {
+                Assert(Effect);
+                header_effect *EffectHeader = Effect_EntryFromID(State, Effect->ID);
+                header_property ChannelHeader = State->Property[EffectHeader->PropertyStartIndex + c - 1];
+#if DEBUG
+                char size[64];
+                sprintf(size, "%s, %i", ChannelHeader.Name, Property->Keyframe_Count);
+                char *Name = size;
+#else
+                char *Name = ChannelHeader.Name;
+#endif
+                if ((c - 1) == 0) {
+                    uint16 EffectIdx = Layer->Block_Effect_Index[h - AmountOf(Layer->Property)];
+                    ImGui::PushID(h);
+#if DEBUG
+                    ImGui::Text("%s, %i", EffectHeader->Name, EffectIdx);
+#else
+                    ImGui::Text(EffectHeader->Name);
+#endif
+                    char T_VisibleIcon[4] = "o -";
+                    char F_VisibleIcon[4] = "- -";
+                    char *Icon = (Effect->IsToggled) ? T_VisibleIcon : F_VisibleIcon;
+
+                    if (ImGui::Button(Icon)) {
+                        History_Entry_Commit(Memory, "Toggle visibility");
+                        History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_Effects, sizeof(Effect->IsToggled), &Effect->IsToggled);
+                        Effect->IsToggled ^= 1;
+                        History_Entry_End(Memory);
+                        State->UpdateFrame = true;
+                    }
+
+                    ImGui::SameLine();
+                    if (ImGui::Button("/\\")) {
+                        if (EffectIdx != 0) {
+                        }
+                    }
+                    ImGui::SameLine();
+                    if (ImGui::Button("\\/")) {
+                    }
+
+                    ImGui::PopID();
+                }
+                if (EffectHeader->DisplayType == effect_display_type_standard) {
+                    if (ChannelHeader.DisplayType == property_display_type_standard) {
+                        if (ImGui::Button("K")) {
+                            Property_AddKeyframe(Memory, F_Properties, Property, State->Frame_Current, ArrayLocation);
+                        }
+                        ImGui::SameLine();
+                        ImGui::DragScalar(Name, ImGuiDataType_Float, &Property->CurrentValue, Property->ScrubVal, &Property->MinVal, &Property->MaxVal, "%f");
+                        ImGui_Properties_Slider(State, Memory, Property, io, WindowMinAbs, WindowMaxAbs, F_Properties);
+                    } else if (ChannelHeader.DisplayType == property_display_type_color) {
+                        if (ImGui::Button("K")) {
+                            Property_AddKeyframe(Memory, F_Properties, Property, State->Frame_Current, ArrayLocation);
+                        }
+                        ImGui::SameLine();
+                        ImGui::DragScalar(Name, ImGuiDataType_Float, &Property->CurrentValue, Property->ScrubVal, &Property->MinVal, &Property->MaxVal, "%f");
+                        ImGui_Properties_Slider(State, Memory, Property, io, WindowMinAbs, WindowMaxAbs, F_Properties);
+                        // if (c == 3) {
+                        //     ImGui::ColorEdit4("col", Col, ImGuiColorEditFlags_Float);
+                        // }
+                    } else {
+                        Assert(0);
+                    }
+                } else if (EffectHeader->DisplayType == effect_display_type_curves) {
+#if DEBUG
+                    ImGui::Text("Points (RGBA): %.02f, Points (indiv): %.02f, %.02f, %.02f, %.02f", Effect->ExtraData[0],
+                                Effect->ExtraData[1],  Effect->ExtraData[2], Effect->ExtraData[3], Effect->ExtraData[4]);
+#endif
+                    if (Property->Identifier == -1) {
+                        Effect_Curves_Init(Effect, Property);
+                    }
+                    uint16 SortedPointStart[MAX_PROPERTIES_PER_EFFECT/5];
+                    uint32 VisibleChannel = *(uint32 *)&Effect->ExtraData[5];
+                    Effect_Curves_Sort(Memory, Effect, SortedPointStart, VisibleChannel);
+                    ImGui_Properties_CurvesUI(State, Memory, io, Effect, Property, SortedPointStart);
+                    c = EffectHeader->Property_Count; // Causes this loop to only iterate once.
+                } else if (EffectHeader->DisplayType == effect_display_type_levels) {
+                    ImGui::Text("Levels!");
+                    uint32 VisibleChannel = *(uint32 *)&Effect->ExtraData[0];
+                    real32 *P_Left = 0, *P_Mid = 0, *P_Right = 0;
+                    if (VisibleChannel == 0) {
+                        property_channel *Property0 = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect->Block_Property_Index[0]);
+                        property_channel *Property1 = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect->Block_Property_Index[1]);
+                        property_channel *Property2 = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect->Block_Property_Index[2]);
+                        P_Left =  &Property0->CurrentValue;
+                        P_Mid =   &Property1->CurrentValue;
+                        P_Right = &Property2->CurrentValue;
+                    } else {
+                        property_channel *Property0 = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect->Block_Property_Index[3+(VisibleChannel-1)]);
+                        property_channel *Property1 = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect->Block_Property_Index[7+(VisibleChannel-1)]);
+                        property_channel *Property2 = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect->Block_Property_Index[11+(VisibleChannel-1)]);
+                        P_Left =  &Property0->CurrentValue;
+                        P_Mid =   &Property1->CurrentValue;
+                        P_Right = &Property2->CurrentValue;
+                    }
+                    ImGui::SliderLevels("1", "2,", "3", (void *)P_Mid, (void *)P_Left, (void *)P_Right);
+                    if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) {
+                        State->UpdateFrame = true;
+                    }
+                    ImGui_Properties_RGBASwitch(State, Memory, io, (uint32 *)&Effect->ExtraData[0]);
+                    c = EffectHeader->Property_Count;
+                } else {
+                    Assert(0);
+                }
+            }
+            ImGui::PopID();
+        }
+        if (Layer->IsPrecomp) {
+            block_composition *Comp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
+            ImGui::DragScalar("Width", ImGuiDataType_U16, &Comp->Width);
+            if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) {
+                State->UpdateFrame = true;
+            }
+            ImGui::DragScalar("Height", ImGuiDataType_U16, &Comp->Height);
+            if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) {
+                State->UpdateFrame = true;
+            }
+        }
+        ImGui::End();
+    } else {
+        ImGui::Begin("Properties: empty###Properties");
+        if (ImGui::IsWindowFocused(ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows))
+            State->FocusedWindow = focus_properties;
+        ImGui::End();
+    }
+}
diff --git a/src/imgui_ui_stable_diffusion.cpp b/src/imgui_ui_stable_diffusion.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a5c93c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/imgui_ui_stable_diffusion.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,175 @@
+static void
+ImGui_SD_Thumbnail(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io,
+                   sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray, uint16 *SourceArray, uint16 SourceCount)
+{
+    ImGui::Begin("SD gallery");
+    ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList();
+    ImVec2 ViewportMin = ImGui::GetCursorScreenPos();
+    ImVec2 ViewportScale = ImGui::GetContentRegionAvail();
+    ImVec2 ViewportMax = ImVec2(ViewportMin.x + ViewportScale.x, ViewportMin.y + ViewportScale.y);
+    if (!SourceCount || ViewportScale.x < 50) {
+        ImGui::End();
+        return;
+    }
+    int test[16];
+    int count = 0;
+    // draw_list->AddImage((void *)(intptr_t)textureID, ViewportMin, ViewportMax);
+    uint32 T_Height = 128;
+    real32 RowPercent = (real32)ViewportScale.x / T_Height;
+    uint32 PerRow = (uint32)RowPercent;
+    uint32 UI_Size = T_Height;
+    bool32 Active = false;
+    for (int i = 0; i < SourceCount; i++) {
+        int32 Y = i / PerRow;
+        int32 X = i % PerRow;
+        block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, SourceArray[i]);
+        // ImGui::Text("Count: %i", Source->RelativeTimestamp);
+        real32 Ratio = (real32)Source->Width / Source->Height;
+        uint32 T_Width = (uint32)(Ratio * T_Height);
+        if (Source->ThumbnailTex == 0) {
+            Source_DumpThumbnail(Memory, Source, T_Width, T_Height);
+        }
+        // draw_list->AddRect(ImgMin, ImgMax, IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 64));
+        ImVec2 ImgMin = ViewportMin + ImVec2(X * UI_Size, Y * UI_Size);
+        ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(ImgMin);
+        real32 ClosestSpacing = 0.2;
+        bool32 Wide = (Source->Width > Source->Height);
+        // ImVec2 Min = (Wide) ? ImVec2(0,ClosestSpacing) : ImVec2(ClosestSpacing,0);
+        // ImVec2 Max = (Wide) ? ImVec2(1-ClosestSpacing,1) : ImVec2(1,1-ClosestSpacing);
+        ImVec2 Min(0.2, 0.2);
+        ImVec2 Max(0.8, 0.8);
+        ImGui::ImageButton((void *)(intptr_t)Source->ThumbnailTex, ImVec2(UI_Size, UI_Size), Min, Max, 12);
+        // ImGui::ImageButton(user_texture_id, & sizeconst ImVec2& = ImVec2(0, 0),   = ImVec2(1,1), int frame_padding = -1, const ImVec4& bg_col = ImVec4(0,0,0,0), const ImVec4& tint_col = ImVec4(1,1,1,1));    // <0 frame_padding uses default frame padding settings. 0 for no padding
+        // ImVec2 ImgMax = ImgMin + ImVec2(UI_Size * Ratio, UI_Size);
+        // ImGui::Button("##thumbnail", ImVec2(UI_Size, UI_Size));
+        // draw_list->AddImage((void *)(intptr_t)Source->ThumbnailTex, ImgMin, ImgMax);
+
+        if (ImGui::IsItemHovered()) {
+            State->PreviewSource = SourceArray[i];
+            State->UpdateFrame = true;
+            Active = true;
+            block_source *Source1 = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, 1);
+            block_source *Source2 = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, 2);
+            block_source *Source0 = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, 0);
+            real32 a = 0;
+        }
+
+        if (ImGui::IsItemClicked() || ImGui::IsItemClicked(ImGuiMouseButton_Right)) {
+            if (!io.KeyShift && !Source->IsSelected) {
+                Source_DeselectAll(File, Memory);
+            }
+            Source->IsSelected = 1;
+        }
+        ImGui::OpenPopupOnItemClick("temptosource", ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight);
+    }
+    if (State->PreviewSource != -1 && !Active) {
+        State->PreviewSource = -1;
+        State->UpdateFrame = true;
+    }
+    if (ImGui::BeginPopup("temptosource")) {
+        if (ImGui::MenuItem("Create layer from source")) {
+            State->HotkeyInput = hotkey_newlayerfromsource;
+        }
+        ImGui::EndPopup();
+    }
+
+    ImGui::End();
+}
+
+static void
+ImGui_SD_Prompt(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io,
+                sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray)
+{
+    sorted_comp_array *SortedCompStart = &SortedCompArray[File->PrincipalCompIndex];
+    sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart = Sorted_GetLayerStart(SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray,File->PrincipalCompIndex);
+    ImGui::Begin("SD prompt input");
+    sd_state *SD = &File->UI.SD;
+    int Size = ImGui::GetFontSize();
+    ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, IM_COL32(200, 80, 0, 255));
+    if (ImGui::Button("Generate!", ImVec2(Size*8, Size*2))) {
+        if (!State->CurlActive) {
+            if (SD->Mode) {
+                block_layer *Layer = NULL;
+                for (int i = SortedCompStart->LayerCount - 1; i >= 0; i--) {
+                    sorted_layer_array SortEntry = SortedLayerStart[i];
+                    uint32 Index_Physical = SortEntry.Block_Layer_Index;
+                    block_layer *TestLayer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Index_Physical);
+                    if (TestLayer->IsSelected) {
+                        Layer = TestLayer;
+                        break;
+                    }
+                }
+                if (Layer) {
+                    block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
+                    void *BitmapAddress;
+                    if (Source->Type == source_type_principal) {
+                        block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
+                        BitmapAddress = Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_PrincipalBitmaps, Source->Bitmap_Index, 0);
+                    }
+                    else if (Source->Type == source_type_file) {
+                        cache_entry *Entry = Memory_Cache_Search(State, Memory, cache_entry_type_source, Layer->Block_Source_Index, 0);
+                        Assert(Entry->IsCached);
+                        BitmapAddress = Memory_Block_Bitmap_AddressAtIndex(Memory, Entry->Block_StartIndex);
+                    }
+                    uint64 Size = Source->Width * Source->Height * Source->BytesPerPixel;
+
+                    int32 len = 0;
+                    uint8 *PNGBitmap = stbi_write_png_to_mem((uint8 *)BitmapAddress, Source->Width * Source->BytesPerPixel,
+                                          Source->Width, Source->Height, Source->BytesPerPixel, &len);
+                    Assert(PNGBitmap);
+
+                    uint64 EncodedEstimateSize = base64_encode_size((size_t)Size);
+                    uint8 *EncodedOutput = (uint8 *)Memory_PushScratch(Memory, EncodedEstimateSize);
+                    uint64 EncodedTrueSize = 0;
+
+                    base64_encode((uint8 *)PNGBitmap, len, EncodedOutput, (size_t *)&EncodedTrueSize);
+                    Assert(EncodedOutput[EncodedTrueSize] == '\0');
+                    // printf("%s", EncodedOutput);
+
+                    STBIW_FREE(PNGBitmap);
+
+                    SD_AssembleJSON(SD, (char *)State->JSONPayload, EncodedOutput);
+                    Memory_PopScratch(Memory, EncodedEstimateSize);
+                    State->CurlActive = -1;
+                }
+            } else {
+                SD_AssembleJSON(SD, State->JSONPayload);
+                // SD_AssembleJSON(SD, (char *)State->Dump2);
+                State->CurlActive = -1;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+    ImGui::PopStyleColor();
+    if (State->CurlActive) {
+        ImGui::SameLine();
+        ImGui::Text("Est. time: %.1f sec, %.2f", State->SDTimeEstimate, State->SDPercentDone*100);
+    }
+    ImGui::InputText("Address", SD->ServerAddress, SD_LEN_ADDRESS);
+    if (SD->ServerAddress[0] == '\0' && SD->Prompt[0] == '\0') {
+        sprintf(SD->Prompt, "%s", "highres");
+        sprintf(SD->NegPrompt, "%s", "nsfw, \ntext, \ncropped, \nworst quality, \nlow quality, \nnormal quality, \njpeg artifacts, \nsignature, \nwatermark");
+        sprintf(SD->ServerAddress, "%s", "http://127.0.0.1:7860");
+    }
+    if (ImGui::Selectable("txt2img", !SD->Mode))
+        SD->Mode = 0;
+    if (ImGui::Selectable("img2img", SD->Mode))
+        SD->Mode = 1;
+    ImGui::InputTextMultiline("Prompt", SD->Prompt, SD_LEN_PROMPT);
+    ImGui::InputTextMultiline("Negative prompt", SD->NegPrompt, SD_LEN_PROMPT);
+    ImGui::SliderInt("Steps", &SD->Steps, 0, 150);
+    ImGui::SliderInt("Width", &SD->Width, 64, 2048, "%i px");
+    if (ImGui::IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit()) {
+        SD->Width = SD->Width + (64 - (SD->Width % 64));
+    }
+    ImGui::SliderInt("Height", &SD->Height, 64, 2048, "%i px");
+    if (ImGui::IsItemDeactivatedAfterEdit()) {
+        SD->Height = SD->Height + (64 - (SD->Height % 64));
+    }
+    ImGui::SliderFloat("CFG scale", &SD->CFG, 1, 30, "%.2f");
+    if (SD->Mode) {
+        ImGui::SliderFloat("Denoising strength", &SD->DenoisingStrength, 0, 1, "%.2f");
+    }
+    ImGui::SliderInt("Batch size", &SD->BatchSize, 1, 8, "%i");
+    ImGui::InputInt("Seed", &SD->Seed);
+    ImGui::End();
+}
diff --git a/src/imgui_ui_timeline.cpp b/src/imgui_ui_timeline.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3a89641
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/imgui_ui_timeline.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,1070 @@
+static void
+ImGui_Timeline_BGElements(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, ui *UI, ImDrawList *draw_list, ImVec2 TimelineSizeWithBorder, ImVec2 TimelineAbsolutePos, block_composition MainComp,
+                                      ImVec2 TimelineZoomSize, ImVec2 TimelineMoveSize)
+{
+    // start/end regions
+    uint32 PreviewAreaColor = IM_COL32(128, 128, 128, 30);
+    ImVec2 Region_Min = ImVec2(TimelineAbsolutePos.x + TimelineMoveSize.x + ((real32)MainComp.Frame_Start / MainComp.Frame_Count)*TimelineZoomSize.x, TimelineAbsolutePos.y);
+    ImVec2 Region_Max = ImVec2(Region_Min.x + ((real32)(MainComp.Frame_End - MainComp.Frame_Start) / MainComp.Frame_Count)*TimelineZoomSize.x, Region_Min.y + TimelineSizeWithBorder.y);
+    draw_list->AddRectFilled(Region_Min, Region_Max, PreviewAreaColor);
+    // cache bar
+    cache_entry *EntryArray = State->Render.Entry;
+    int c = 0;
+    int count = Memory->EntryCount;
+    while (count != 0) {
+        if (EntryArray[c].IsCached) {
+            if (EntryArray[c].Type == cache_entry_type_comp &&
+                EntryArray[c].TypeInfo == File->PrincipalCompIndex) {
+                int Frame = EntryArray[c].TypeInfo_Sub;
+                ImVec2 Region_Min = ImVec2(TimelineAbsolutePos.x + TimelineMoveSize.x + ((real32)Frame / MainComp.Frame_Count)*TimelineZoomSize.x, TimelineAbsolutePos.y);
+                ImVec2 Region_Max = ImVec2(Region_Min.x + ((real32)(1) / MainComp.Frame_Count)*TimelineZoomSize.x, Region_Min.y + 2.0f);
+                draw_list->AddRectFilled(Region_Min, Region_Max, IM_COL32(0, 0, 128, 100));
+            }
+            count--;
+        }
+        c++;
+    }
+}
+
+static void
+ImGui_Timeline_HorizontalIncrementDraw(project_state *State, ui *UI, ImDrawList *draw_list, ImVec2 TimelineSizeWithBorder, ImVec2 TimelineAbsolutePos, block_composition MainComp,
+                                      ImVec2 TimelineZoomSize, ImVec2 TimelineMoveSize)
+{
+    uint32 LineColor = IM_COL32(200, 200, 200, 40);
+    uint32 PlayheadColor = IM_COL32(000, 000, 200, 160);
+    uint32 PreviewAreaColor = IM_COL32(128, 128, 128, 60);
+
+    Assert(TimelineZoomSize.x   > 0.0f);
+
+    real32 x = 0;
+    bool32 RightmostEdge = false;
+    real32 Increment = (real32)1 / MainComp.Frame_Count;
+    if (UI->TimelinePercentZoomed.x > 0.90)
+        Increment = (real32)MainComp.FPS / MainComp.Frame_Count;
+    else if (UI->TimelinePercentZoomed.x > 0.40)
+        Increment *= 2;
+
+    while (!RightmostEdge) {
+        ImVec2 Min = ImVec2(TimelineAbsolutePos.x + TimelineMoveSize.x  + x*TimelineZoomSize.x, TimelineAbsolutePos.y);
+        ImVec2 Max = ImVec2(Min.x + 2, TimelineAbsolutePos.y + TimelineSizeWithBorder.y);
+        if (Min.x < TimelineAbsolutePos.x + TimelineSizeWithBorder.x) {
+            draw_list->AddLine(Min, Max, LineColor);
+            char buf2[6];
+            uint32 FrameNumber = (uint32)(x * MainComp.Frame_Count) % MainComp.FPS;
+            if (FrameNumber != 0)
+                sprintf(buf2, ":%.2i", FrameNumber);
+            else
+                sprintf(buf2, "%.2i:00", (uint32)(x * MainComp.Frame_Count) / MainComp.FPS);
+            draw_list->AddText(ImVec2(Min.x, TimelineAbsolutePos.y), IM_COL32(200, 200, 200, 130), buf2);
+            x += Increment;
+            if (x > 1.0f)
+                RightmostEdge = true;
+        } else {
+            RightmostEdge = true;
+        }
+    }
+
+    ImVec2 Min = ImVec2(TimelineAbsolutePos.x + TimelineMoveSize.x  + ((real32)State->Frame_Current / MainComp.Frame_Count)*TimelineZoomSize.x, TimelineAbsolutePos.y);
+    ImVec2 Max = ImVec2(Min.x + 2, TimelineAbsolutePos.y + TimelineSizeWithBorder.y);
+    draw_list->AddLine(Min, Max, PlayheadColor);
+
+    real32 Size = ImGui::GetFontSize() * 2;
+    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(Min - ImVec2(Size / 2, 0));
+    ImGui::Button("##playhead", ImVec2(Size, Size));
+    bool32 IsHovered = ImGui::IsItemHovered();
+    bool32 IsItemActive = ImGui::IsItemActive();
+    bool32 IsItemActivated = ImGui::IsItemActivated();
+    bool32 IsItemDeactivated = ImGui::IsItemDeactivated();
+    if (IsItemActivated) {
+        State->Interact_Active = interact_type_timeline_scrub;
+        State->Interact_Offset[0] = State->Frame_Current;
+    }
+    if (IsItemActive) {
+        ImVec2 DragDelta = ImGui::GetMouseDragDelta();
+        int32 NewCurrent = (int32)(State->Interact_Offset[0] + (DragDelta.x / TimelineZoomSize.x * MainComp.Frame_Count) + 0.5);
+        if (NewCurrent != State->Frame_Current) {
+            State->Frame_Current = NewCurrent;
+            State->UpdateFrame = true;
+        }
+    }
+    if (IsItemDeactivated) {
+        State->Interact_Active = interact_type_none;
+        State->Interact_Modifier = 0;
+    }
+}
+
+// TODO(fox): Bring back graph info!
+static void
+ImGui_Timeline_GraphInfo(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, ui *UI, ImGuiIO io,
+                         sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray,
+                         sorted_property_array *SortedPropertyStart, uint16 *SortedKeyframeArray)
+{
+    bool open = true;
+    ImGui::Begin("Graph info");
+
+    int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
+    while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, File->Layer_Count, &h, &c, &i))
+    {
+        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
+        if (!Layer->IsSelected)
+            continue;
+
+        block_string *String = (block_string *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Strings, Layer->Block_String_Index);
+        ImGui::Text(String->Char);
+
+        ImGui::PushID(i);
+        for (int h = 0; h < AmountOf(Layer->Property); h++) {
+            property_channel *Property = &Layer->Property[h];
+            if (Property->Block_Bezier_Count) {
+                sorted_property_array *InfoLocation = Property_GetSortedInfo(SortedPropertyStart, i, h);
+                uint16 *ArrayLocation = Property_GetSortedArray(SortedKeyframeArray, i, h);
+                ImGui::PushID(Property);
+                if (ImGui::Selectable(DefaultChannel[h], Property_IsGraphSelected(Memory, Property, ArrayLocation))) {
+                    File_DeselectAllKeyframes(File, State, Memory, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray, SortedPropertyStart, SortedKeyframeArray);
+                    for (int p = 0; p < Property->Keyframe_Count; p++) {
+                        int k = ArrayLocation[p];
+                        bezier_point *Point = Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, k);
+                        Point->IsSelected = true;
+                    }
+                    State->RecentSelectionType = selection_type_keyframe;
+                }
+                ImGui::PopID();
+            }
+        }
+
+        ImGui::PopID();
+    }
+
+    ImGui::End();
+}
+
+static void
+ImGui_Timeline_DrawKeySheet(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, ui *UI, ImGuiIO io, ImDrawList *draw_list, property_channel *Property, uint16 *ArrayLocation,
+                            ImVec2 Increment, ImVec2 TimelineAbsolutePos, ImVec2 GraphPos, ImVec2 TimelineMoveSize, ImVec2 TimelineZoomSize,
+                            ImVec2 TimelineSize, ImVec2 TimelineSizeWithBorder, real32 LayerIncrement,
+                            sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray, sorted_property_array *SortedPropertyStart, uint16 *SortedKeyframeArray)
+{
+    ImGui::PushID(Property);
+
+    for (int p = 0; p < Property->Keyframe_Count; p++) {
+        int k = ArrayLocation[p];
+        bezier_point *PointAddress = Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, k);
+
+        v2 PointPos[3];
+        Bezier_Interact_Evaluate(State, PointAddress, PointPos);
+
+        real32 LocalPos_Ratio_X = PointPos[0].x * Increment.x;
+        real32 Keyframe_ScreenPos_X = GraphPos.x + TimelineMoveSize.x + LocalPos_Ratio_X * TimelineZoomSize.x;
+
+        ImVec2 Keyframe_ScreenPos(Keyframe_ScreenPos_X, GraphPos.y);
+
+        if (State->BoxSelect) {
+            if (ImGui_TestBoxSelection_Point(Keyframe_ScreenPos, io, &PointAddress->IsSelected))
+                State->RecentSelectionType = selection_type_keyframe;
+        }
+
+        ImVec2 ButtonSize(16, 16);
+
+        ImGui::PushID(p);
+
+        ImU32 PointCol = (PointAddress->IsSelected) ? ImColor(0.8f, 0.5f, 0.0f, 1.0f) : ImColor(0.1f, 0.1f, 0.1f, 1.0f);
+        ImU32 LineCol = (PointAddress->IsSelected) ? ImColor(0.8f, 0.5f, 0.5f, 1.0f) : ImColor(0.4f, 0.4f, 0.4f, 1.0f);
+        ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(Keyframe_ScreenPos - (ButtonSize * 0.5));
+        ImGui::InvisibleButton("##keyframemover", ButtonSize, ImGuiMouseButton_Left);
+        bool32 IsHovered = ImGui::IsItemHovered();
+        bool32 IsItemActive = ImGui::IsItemActive();
+        bool32 IsItemActivated = ImGui::IsItemActivated();
+        bool32 IsItemDeactivated = ImGui::IsItemDeactivated();
+        bool32 LeftClick = ImGui::IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton_Left);
+        bool32 RightClick = ImGui::IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton_Right);
+
+        if (IsHovered) {
+            PointCol = ImColor(1.0f, 0.8f, 0.8f, 1.0f);
+            ImGui::SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor_Hand);
+        }
+
+        if (IsItemActivated) {
+            PointAddress->IsSelected = 1;
+        }
+
+        if (IsItemActive) {
+            if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_none) {
+                State->Interact_Offset[2] = io.MousePos.x;
+                State->Interact_Offset[3] = io.MousePos.y;
+                State->Interact_Active = interact_type_keyframe_move;
+                State->Interact_Modifier = 1;  // X axis movement only
+            } else {
+                Assert(State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_move);
+                ImGui_WarpMouse(State, io.MousePos, TimelineAbsolutePos, TimelineAbsolutePos + TimelineSizeWithBorder, 1);
+                ImVec2 DragDelta = io.MousePos - ImVec2(State->Interact_Offset[2], State->Interact_Offset[3]);
+                DragDelta = DragDelta + (ImVec2(State->Warp_X, State->Warp_Y) * TimelineSize);
+                if (io.MouseDelta.x || io.MouseDelta.y) {
+                    State->UpdateFrame = true;
+                }
+                if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_move) {
+                    State->Interact_Offset[0] = (DragDelta.x / TimelineZoomSize.x) / Increment.x;
+                    State->Interact_Offset[1] = DragDelta.y;
+                }
+            }
+        }
+
+        if (IsItemDeactivated) {
+            Keyframe_Commit(File, State, Memory, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray, SortedPropertyStart, SortedKeyframeArray);
+        }
+
+        draw_list->AddCircleFilled(Keyframe_ScreenPos, 4, PointCol);
+
+        ImGui::PopID();
+    }
+    ImGui::PopID();
+}
+
+static void
+ImGui_Timeline_DrawGraph(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, ui *UI, ImGuiIO io, ImDrawList *draw_list,
+                         ImVec2 Increment, ImVec2 TimelineAbsolutePos, ImVec2 TimelineMoveSize, ImVec2 TimelineZoomSize,
+                         ImVec2 TimelineSize, ImVec2 TimelineSizeWithBorder, real32 LayerIncrement,
+                         sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray,
+                         sorted_property_array *SortedPropertyStart, uint16 *SortedKeyframeArray)
+{
+    // I'm using the draw splitter here to be able to draw the dots on top of the graph lines.
+    State->Test.Split(draw_list, 2);
+
+    for (int c = 0; c < File->Comp_Count; c++) {
+        sorted_comp_array SortedCompStart = SortedCompArray[c];
+        sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart = Sorted_GetLayerStart(SortedLayerArray, &SortedCompStart, c);
+        for (int i = 0; i < SortedCompStart.LayerCount; i++) {
+            sorted_layer_array *SortedLayer = &SortedLayerStart[i];
+            block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, SortedLayer->Block_Layer_Index);
+            if (!Layer->IsSelected)
+                continue;
+
+            int32 Frame_Start = Layer->Frame_Start;
+
+            ImGui::PushID(i);
+
+            if ((State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_move ||
+                State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_rotate ||
+                State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_scale))
+            {
+                ImGui_WarpMouse(State, io.MousePos, TimelineAbsolutePos, TimelineAbsolutePos + TimelineSizeWithBorder);
+                ImVec2 DragDelta = io.MousePos - ImVec2(State->Interact_Offset[2], State->Interact_Offset[3]);
+                DragDelta = DragDelta + (ImVec2(State->Warp_X, State->Warp_Y) * TimelineSize);
+                if (io.MouseDelta.x || io.MouseDelta.y) {
+                    State->UpdateFrame = true;
+                }
+                if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_move) {
+                    // The Y increment varies between graphs, so we have to do it in the Bezier_EvaluateValue call.
+                    State->Interact_Offset[0] = (DragDelta.x / TimelineZoomSize.x) / Increment.x;
+                    State->Interact_Offset[1] = DragDelta.y;
+                } else if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_scale) {
+                    State->Interact_Offset[0] = (DragDelta.x / TimelineSizeWithBorder.x * UI->TimelinePercentZoomed.x) / Increment.x;
+                } else if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_rotate) {
+                    State->Interact_Offset[0] = (DragDelta.x / TimelineZoomSize.x);
+                    /*
+                    real32 Slope_Old = (Keyframe_ScreenPos.y - State->Interact_Offset[3]) / (Keyframe_ScreenPos.x - State->Interact_Offset[2]);
+                    real32 Slope_New = (Keyframe_ScreenPos.y - io.MousePos.y) / (Keyframe_ScreenPos.x - io.MousePos.x);
+                    State->Interact_Offset[0] = atan((Slope_Old - Slope_New) / (1 + Slope_Old * Slope_New));
+                    */
+                }
+                ImGui::SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeAll);
+            }
+
+            sorted_property_array *InfoLocation = SortedPropertyStart + SortedLayer->SortedPropertyStart;
+            uint16 *ArrayLocation = SortedKeyframeArray + SortedLayer->SortedKeyframeStart;
+            int h1 = 0, c1 = 0, p = 0;
+            property_channel *Property = NULL;
+            while (Layer_LoopChannels(State, Memory, &InfoLocation, &ArrayLocation, Layer, &Property, NULL, &h1, &c1, &p))
+            {
+                ImGui::PushID(Property);
+                if (Property->Block_Bezier_Count) {
+                    real32 MinY, MaxY;
+                    Property_MinMax_Y(Memory, State, Property, InfoLocation, &MinY, &MaxY, 0);
+                    Assert(InfoLocation->MinYIndex < Property->Keyframe_Count);
+                    Assert(InfoLocation->MaxYIndex < Property->Keyframe_Count);
+                    Assert(MaxY >= MinY);
+                    real32 Y_Increment = (MaxY - MinY) ? (1 / (MaxY - MinY)) : 0.5;
+
+                    real32 GraphScale = 0;
+                    real32 GraphPos = 0;
+                    if ((1 / Y_Increment) < 5) {
+                        GraphScale = 0.2;
+                        GraphPos = 0.3;
+                    } else if ((1 / Y_Increment) > 700) {
+                        GraphScale = 0.6;
+                        GraphPos = 0.06;
+                    } else {
+                        GraphScale = 0.4;
+                        GraphPos = 0.2;
+                    }
+
+
+                    real32 GraphMoveHeight = TimelineMoveSize.y + (TimelineZoomSize.y * GraphPos);
+                    real32 GraphZoomHeight = TimelineZoomSize.y * GraphScale;
+
+                    bool32 IsGraphSelected = Property_IsGraphSelected(Memory, Property, ArrayLocation);
+                    uint32 GraphCol = IsGraphSelected ? IM_COL32(255, 180, 150, 255) : IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 70);
+
+                    bezier_point *PointAddress[2] = {};
+                    ImVec2 Keyframe_ScreenPos[6] = {};
+                    for (int p = 0; p < Property->Keyframe_Count; p++) {
+                        int k = ArrayLocation[p];
+                        if (Property->Keyframe_Count == 1)
+                            int b = 0;
+                        int Idx = (p % 2);
+                        int NewIdx = Idx * 3;
+                        int OldIdx = (NewIdx == 3) ? 0 : 3;
+                        PointAddress[Idx] = Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, k);
+
+                        v2 PointPos[3];
+                        Bezier_Interact_Evaluate(State, PointAddress[Idx], PointPos, GraphZoomHeight, Y_Increment);
+
+                        ImVec2 Keyframe_LocalPos[3] = { V2(PointPos[0]), V2(PointPos[0] + PointPos[1]), V2(PointPos[0] + PointPos[2]) };
+
+                        ImVec2 Keyframe_LocalPos_Ratio[3];
+                        for (int b = 0; b < 3; b++) {
+                            Keyframe_LocalPos_Ratio[b] = (Keyframe_LocalPos[b] - ImVec2(0, MinY)) * ImVec2(Increment.x, Y_Increment);
+                            Keyframe_ScreenPos[NewIdx + b] = TimelineAbsolutePos + ImVec2(TimelineMoveSize.x, GraphMoveHeight) + ((ImVec2(1, -1) * Keyframe_LocalPos_Ratio[b] + ImVec2(0, 1)) * ImVec2(TimelineZoomSize.x, GraphZoomHeight));
+                        }
+
+                        if (State->BoxSelect) {
+                            if (ImGui_TestBoxSelection_Point(Keyframe_ScreenPos[NewIdx], io, &PointAddress[Idx]->IsSelected))
+                                State->RecentSelectionType = selection_type_keyframe;
+                        }
+
+                        State->Test.SetCurrentChannel(draw_list, 1);
+
+                        ImVec2 ButtonSize(16, 16);
+
+                        ImGui::PushID(k);
+                        int Max = PointAddress[Idx]->IsSelected ? 2 : 0;
+                        for (int b = Max; b >= 0; b--) {
+                            ImU32 PointCol = ((PointAddress[Idx]->IsSelected - 1) == b) ? ImColor(0.8f, 0.5f, 0.0f, 1.0f) : ImColor(0.1f, 0.1f, 0.1f, 1.0f);
+                            ImU32 LineCol = ((PointAddress[Idx]->IsSelected - 1) == b) ? ImColor(0.8f, 0.5f, 0.5f, 1.0f) : ImColor(0.4f, 0.4f, 0.4f, 1.0f);
+                            ImGui::PushID(b);
+                            ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(Keyframe_ScreenPos[NewIdx + b] - (ButtonSize * 0.5));
+                            ImGui::InvisibleButton("##keyframemover", ButtonSize, ImGuiMouseButton_Left);
+                            bool32 IsHovered = ImGui::IsItemHovered();
+                            bool32 IsItemActive = ImGui::IsItemActive();
+                            bool32 IsItemActivated = ImGui::IsItemActivated();
+                            bool32 IsItemDeactivated = ImGui::IsItemDeactivated();
+                            bool32 LeftClick = ImGui::IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton_Left);
+                            bool32 RightClick = ImGui::IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton_Right);
+
+                            if (IsHovered) {
+                                PointCol = ImColor(1.0f, 0.8f, 0.8f, 1.0f);
+                                ImGui::SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor_Hand);
+                            }
+
+                            if (IsItemActivated) {
+                                PointAddress[Idx]->IsSelected = b+1;
+                            }
+
+                            if (b != 0 && PointAddress[Idx]->IsSelected)
+                                draw_list->AddLine(Keyframe_ScreenPos[NewIdx], Keyframe_ScreenPos[NewIdx + b], LineCol, 2.0f);
+
+                            if (b == 0) {
+                                draw_list->AddCircleFilled(Keyframe_ScreenPos[NewIdx + b], 4, PointCol);
+                                if (IsGraphSelected) {
+                                    char buf[8];
+                                    sprintf(buf, "%.2f", Keyframe_LocalPos[0].y);
+                                    draw_list->AddText(Keyframe_ScreenPos[NewIdx + b], 0xFFFFFFFF,  buf);
+                                }
+                            } else {
+                                draw_list->AddCircle(Keyframe_ScreenPos[NewIdx + b], 6, PointCol, 0, 2);
+                            }
+
+                            ImGui::PopID();
+                        }
+                        ImGui::PopID();
+
+                        State->Test.SetCurrentChannel(draw_list, 0);
+
+                        if (p != 0) {
+                            if (PointAddress[0]->Type == interpolation_type_bezier && PointAddress[1]->Type == interpolation_type_bezier) {
+                                draw_list->AddBezierCubic(Keyframe_ScreenPos[OldIdx], Keyframe_ScreenPos[OldIdx + 2],
+                                                          Keyframe_ScreenPos[NewIdx + 1], Keyframe_ScreenPos[NewIdx], GraphCol, 1.0f, 0);
+                            } else {
+                                draw_list->AddLine(Keyframe_ScreenPos[0], Keyframe_ScreenPos[3], GraphCol, 1.0f);
+                            }
+                        }
+                    }
+                }
+                ImGui::PopID();
+            }
+            ImGui::PopID();
+        }
+    }
+    State->Test.Merge(draw_list);
+}
+
+
+static void
+ImGui_Timeline_DrawPrecomp(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, ui *UI, ImGuiIO io, ImDrawList *draw_list, int16 RecursionIdx[MAX_PRECOMP_RECURSIONS], uint32 Recursions,
+                           ImVec2 Increment, ImVec2 TimelineAbsolutePos, ImVec2 TimelineMoveSize, ImVec2 TimelineZoomSize,
+                           ImVec2 TimelineSize, ImVec2 TimelineSizeWithBorder, real32 LayerIncrement,
+                           sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray, sorted_property_array *SortedPropertyStart, uint16 *SortedKeyframeArray)
+{
+    uint16 CompIndex = 0;
+    if (RecursionIdx[Recursions] == -1) {
+        CompIndex = File->PrincipalCompIndex;
+    } else {
+        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, RecursionIdx[Recursions]);
+        CompIndex = Layer->Block_Source_Index;
+    }
+    block_composition *Comp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, CompIndex);
+    sorted_comp_array SortedCompStart = SortedCompArray[CompIndex];
+    sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart = Sorted_GetLayerStart(SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, CompIndex);
+
+    ImGui::PushID(CompIndex);
+
+    // NOTE(fox): Layer sorting pre-calculates UI positioning, so the order layers are drawn is arbitrary.
+    real32 DisplayOffset = 0;
+    for (int i = SortedCompStart.LayerCount - 1; i >= 0; i--)
+    {
+        sorted_layer_array SortEntry = SortedLayerStart[i];
+        uint32 Index_Physical = SortEntry.Block_Layer_Index;
+        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Index_Physical);
+
+        int32 Frame_Start = Layer->Frame_Start;
+        int32 Frame_End = Layer->Frame_End;
+        real32 Vertical_Offset = SortEntry.SortedOffset + DisplayOffset;
+
+        Layer_Evaluate_Display(State, Memory, Layer, SortedPropertyStart, SortedKeyframeArray, SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerStart, i, &DisplayOffset);
+
+        if (Layer->IsSelected)
+            Interact_Evaluate_Layer(Memory, State, Index_Physical, SortedCompStart, SortedLayerStart, &Frame_Start, &Frame_End);
+
+        ImVec2 Layer_LocalPos = ImVec2(Frame_Start, Vertical_Offset);
+        ImVec2 Layer_LocalSize = ImVec2(Frame_End - Frame_Start, Layer->Vertical_Height);
+
+        ImVec2 Layer_LocalPos_Ratio = (Layer_LocalPos * Increment);
+        ImVec2 Layer_LocalSize_Ratio = Layer_LocalSize * Increment;
+        ImVec2 Layer_ScreenPos_Min = TimelineAbsolutePos + TimelineMoveSize + (Layer_LocalPos_Ratio * TimelineZoomSize);
+        ImVec2 Layer_ScreenPos_Max = TimelineAbsolutePos + TimelineMoveSize + ((Layer_LocalPos_Ratio + Layer_LocalSize_Ratio) * TimelineZoomSize);
+        ImVec2 Layer_ScreenSize = Layer_ScreenPos_Max - Layer_ScreenPos_Min;
+
+        // UI
+
+        ImU32 LayerColor = 0;
+        ImU32 BorderColor = 0;
+        LayerColor = ImColor(UI->LayerColors[Layer->ColIndex]);
+        BorderColor = ImColor(0.2, 0.2, 0.2, 1.0f);
+
+        draw_list->AddRectFilled(Layer_ScreenPos_Min, Layer_ScreenPos_Max, LayerColor);
+        draw_list->AddRect(Layer_ScreenPos_Min, Layer_ScreenPos_Max, BorderColor, 2);
+        block_string *String = (block_string *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Strings, Layer->Block_String_Index);
+        char buf[128];
+#if DEBUG
+        sprintf(buf, "%s, %i", String->Char, Index_Physical);
+#else
+        sprintf(buf, "%s", String->Char);
+#endif
+        if (UI->TimelinePercentZoomed.y <= 1.0f)
+            draw_list->AddText(Layer_ScreenPos_Min, 0xFFFFFFFF,  buf);
+
+        if (Layer->IsSelected == 1) {
+            draw_list->AddRectFilled(Layer_ScreenPos_Min, Layer_ScreenPos_Max, ImColor(0.25f, 0.25f, 0.25f, 0.5f), 2);
+            draw_list->AddRect(Layer_ScreenPos_Min, Layer_ScreenPos_Max, ImColor(1.0f, 1.0f, 1.0f, 0.5f), 2);
+        } else if (Layer->IsSelected == 2) {
+            // draw_list->AddRectFilled(Layer_ScreenPos_Min, Layer_ScreenPos_Max, ImColor(0.25f, 0.25f, 0.25f, 0.5f), 2);
+            draw_list->AddRect(Layer_ScreenPos_Min, Layer_ScreenPos_Max, ImColor(0.0f, 0.9f, 0.0f, 0.9f), 4);
+        }
+
+        //
+
+        // Main interaction
+
+        ImGui::PushID(i);
+        if (State->TimelineMode == timeline_mode_default) {
+
+            if (State->BoxSelect && State->TimelineMode == timeline_mode_default) {
+                bool32 Test = 0;
+                if (io.MouseClickedPos[0].y < io.MousePos.y)
+                    Test = (Layer_ScreenPos_Min.y >= io.MouseClickedPos[0].y && Layer_ScreenPos_Min.y <= io.MousePos.y);
+                else
+                    Test = (Layer_ScreenPos_Max.y <= io.MouseClickedPos[0].y && Layer_ScreenPos_Max.y >= io.MousePos.y);
+
+                if (io.MouseClickedPos[0].x < io.MousePos.x)
+                    Test &= (Layer_ScreenPos_Max.x >= io.MouseClickedPos[0].x && Layer_ScreenPos_Min.x <= io.MousePos.x);
+                else
+                    Test &= (Layer_ScreenPos_Min.x <= io.MouseClickedPos[0].x && Layer_ScreenPos_Max.x >= io.MousePos.x);
+
+                if (Test) {
+                    if (!Layer->IsSelected) {
+                        Layer_Select(Memory, State, Index_Physical);
+                    }
+                } else if (!io.KeyShift) {
+                    Layer->IsSelected = false;
+                }
+            }
+
+
+            ImVec2 ResizeSize = ImVec2(Increment.x * 0.45 * TimelineZoomSize.x, Layer_ScreenSize.y);
+            ImVec2 ResizePos[2] = { Layer_ScreenPos_Min, ImVec2(Layer_ScreenPos_Max.x - ResizeSize.x, Layer_ScreenPos_Min.y) };
+            for (int b = 0; b < 2; b++) {
+                ImGui::PushID(b);
+                ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(ResizePos[b]);
+                ImGui::Button("##layer_resize", ResizeSize);
+
+                if (ImGui::IsItemHovered()) {
+                    ImGui::SetMouseCursor(ImGuiMouseCursor_ResizeEW);
+                }
+                if (ImGui::IsItemActivated()) {
+                    if (!Layer->IsSelected) {
+                        if (!io.KeyShift) Layer_DeselectAll(File, State, Memory);
+                        Layer_Select(Memory, State, Index_Physical);
+                    }
+                }
+                if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) {
+                    if (ImGui::IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton_Left, -1)) {
+                        Assert(Layer->IsSelected);
+                        State->Interact_Active = interact_type_layer_timeadjust;
+                        ImVec2 DragDelta = ImGui::GetMouseDragDelta();
+                        DragDelta = DragDelta + (ImVec2(State->Warp_X, State->Warp_Y) * TimelineSize);
+
+                        State->Interact_Offset[0] = (DragDelta.x / TimelineSizeWithBorder.x * UI->TimelinePercentZoomed.x) * Comp->Frame_Count;
+                        State->Interact_Offset[1] = b;
+                    }
+                }
+                if (ImGui::IsItemDeactivated()) {
+                    if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_layer_timeadjust) {
+                        History_Entry_Commit(Memory, "Adjust layer timing");
+                        int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
+                        while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, File->Layer_Count, &h, &c, &i)) {
+                            block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
+                            if (Layer->IsSelected) {
+                                // NOTE(fox): Some data on the tree could be saved here.
+                                History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(Layer->Frame_Start), &Layer->Frame_Start);
+                                History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(Layer->Frame_End), &Layer->Frame_End);
+                                Interact_Evaluate_Layer(Memory, State, Index_Physical, SortedCompStart, SortedLayerStart, &Layer->Frame_Start, &Layer->Frame_End);
+                            }
+                        }
+                        History_Entry_End(Memory);
+                        State->Interact_Active = interact_type_none;
+                        State->Interact_Modifier = 0;
+                        State->Interact_Offset[0] = 0;
+                        State->Interact_Offset[1] = 0;
+                    }
+                }
+
+                ImGui::PopID();
+            }
+
+            ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(Layer_ScreenPos_Min);
+            ImGui::InvisibleButton("##layer_mid", Layer_ScreenSize, ImGuiMouseButton_Left);
+
+            if (ImGui::IsItemActivated()) {
+                if (!Layer->IsSelected) {
+                    if (!io.KeyShift) Layer_DeselectAll(File, State, Memory);
+                    Layer_Select(Memory, State, Index_Physical);
+                    Layer_Select_RecurseUp(Memory, State, Index_Physical, RecursionIdx, Recursions);
+                }
+            }
+
+            ImGui::OpenPopupOnItemClick("layerpopup", ImGuiPopupFlags_MouseButtonRight);
+            if (ImGui::BeginPopup("layerpopup")) {
+                if (ImGui::Selectable("Visible")) {
+                    bool32 Commit = false;
+                    int h = 0, z = 0, i = 0;
+                    while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, File->Layer_Count, &h, &z, &i)) {
+                        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
+                        if (Layer->IsSelected) {
+                            if (!Commit) {
+                                History_Entry_Commit(Memory, "Toggle visibility");
+                                Commit = true;
+                            }
+                            History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(Layer->IsVisible), &Layer->IsVisible);
+                            Layer->IsVisible ^= 1;
+                        }
+                    }
+                    if (Commit) {
+                        History_Entry_End(Memory);
+                        State->UpdateFrame = true;
+                    }
+                }
+                if (ImGui::MenuItem("Pre-compose layer")) {
+                    Precomp_UICreateButton(File, State, Memory, CompIndex, SortedCompStart, SortedLayerStart);
+                    State->UpdateKeyframes = true;
+                }
+                if (ImGui::MenuItem("Duplicate layer")) {
+                    Precomp_UIDuplicate(File, State, Memory, CompIndex, SortedCompStart, SortedLayerStart);
+                }
+                if (ImGui::MenuItem("Delete layer")) {
+                    Precomp_UICreateButton(File, State, Memory, CompIndex, SortedCompStart, SortedLayerStart);
+                    State->UpdateKeyframes = true;
+                }
+                if (ImGui::BeginMenu("Layer color"))
+                {
+                    ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(0.0f, 0.0f));
+                    for (int c = 0; c < AmountOf(UI->LayerColors); c++) {
+                        ImGui::PushID(c);
+                        ImGui::PushStyleColor(ImGuiCol_Button, UI->LayerColors[c]);
+                        real32 Size = ImGui::GetFontSize() * 2;
+                        ImVec2 ColSize(Size, Size);
+                        if (ImGui::Button("##test", ColSize)) {
+                            int h = 0, z = 0, i = 0;
+                            while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, File->Layer_Count, &h, &z, &i)) {
+                                block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
+                                if (Layer->IsSelected) {
+                                    Layer->ColIndex = c;
+                                }
+                            }
+                        }
+                        if ((c+1) % 4) { ImGui::SameLine(); }
+                        ImGui::PopStyleColor();
+                        ImGui::PopID();
+                    }
+                    ImGui::PopStyleVar();
+                    ImGui::EndMenu();
+                }
+                uint32 *item_current_idx = (uint32 *)&Layer->BlendMode; // Here we store our selection data as an index.
+                if (ImGui::BeginListBox("Blend mode"))
+                {
+                    for (int n = 0; n < IM_ARRAYSIZE(BlendmodeNames); n++)
+                    {
+                        const bool is_selected = (*item_current_idx == n);
+                        if (ImGui::Selectable(BlendmodeNames[n], is_selected)) {
+                            *item_current_idx = n;
+                            State->UpdateFrame = true;
+                        }
+
+                        // Set the initial focus when opening the combo (scrolling + keyboard navigation focus)
+                        if (is_selected)
+                            ImGui::SetItemDefaultFocus();
+                    }
+                    ImGui::EndListBox();
+                }
+                ImGui::EndPopup();
+            }
+
+            if (ImGui::IsItemActive()) {
+                if (ImGui::IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton_Left, -1)) {
+                    if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_none) {
+                        State->Interact_Active = interact_type_layer_move;
+                        // TODO(fox): Selected layers inside precomps will have interactions doubled,
+                        // so I'm forcing interaction to only be with members of the same precomp.
+                        // Could be made more intuitive later.
+                        Layer_RecursiveDeselect(Memory, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray, Layer->Block_Composition_Index, File->PrincipalCompIndex);
+                    }
+                    ImVec2 DragDelta = ImGui::GetMouseDragDelta();
+                    DragDelta = DragDelta + (ImVec2(State->Warp_X, State->Warp_Y) * TimelineSize);
+
+                    ImVec2 Offset_Old = ImVec2(State->Interact_Offset[0], State->Interact_Offset[1]);
+                    ImVec2 Offset_New = (DragDelta / TimelineSizeWithBorder * UI->TimelinePercentZoomed) * ImVec2(Comp->Frame_Count, -LayerIncrement);
+
+                    // if (((int32)Offset_Old.x != (int32)Offset_New.x) || ((int32)Offset_Old.y != (int32)Offset_New.y))
+                    State->UpdateFrame = true;
+
+                    State->Interact_Offset[0] = Offset_New.x;
+                    State->Interact_Offset[1] = Offset_New.y;
+                }
+            }
+
+            if (ImGui::IsItemDeactivated()) {
+                if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_layer_move) {
+                    History_Entry_Commit(Memory, "Move layers");
+                    for (int i = 0; i < SortedCompStart.LayerCount; i++)
+                    {
+                        sorted_layer_array SortEntry = SortedLayerStart[i];
+                        uint32 Index_Physical = SortEntry.Block_Layer_Index;
+                        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Index_Physical);
+                        // NOTE(fox): Some data on the tree could be saved here.
+                        History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(Layer->Vertical_Offset), &Layer->Vertical_Offset);
+                        Layer->Vertical_Offset = SortEntry.SortedOffset;
+                        if (Layer->IsSelected) {
+                            History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(Layer->Frame_Start), &Layer->Frame_Start);
+                            History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(Layer->Frame_End), &Layer->Frame_End);
+                            Interact_Evaluate_Layer(Memory, State, Index_Physical, SortedCompStart, SortedLayerStart, &Layer->Frame_Start, &Layer->Frame_End);
+                        }
+                    }
+                    State->Interact_Active = interact_type_none;
+                    State->Interact_Modifier = 0;
+                    History_Entry_End(Memory);
+                }
+            }
+
+            // Keyframe view
+            uint32 Channel = 0;
+
+            sorted_property_array *InfoLocation = SortedPropertyStart + SortedLayerStart->SortedPropertyStart;
+            uint16 *ArrayLocation = SortedKeyframeArray + SortedLayerStart->SortedKeyframeStart;
+            int h = 0, c = 0, p = 0;
+            property_channel *Property = NULL;
+            block_effect *Effect = NULL;
+            while (Layer_LoopChannels(State, Memory, &InfoLocation, &ArrayLocation, Layer, &Property, &Effect, &h, &c, &p))
+            {
+                if (Property->IsToggled) {
+                    ImVec2 GraphMinPos = ImVec2(TimelineAbsolutePos.x, Layer_ScreenPos_Min.y + Layer_ScreenSize.y + (Layer_ScreenSize.y * Channel));
+                    ImVec2 GraphPos = GraphMinPos + ImVec2(0, Layer_ScreenSize.y);
+                    ImVec2 GraphMinBounds = GraphMinPos + ImVec2(0, Layer_ScreenSize.y * 0.5);
+                    ImVec2 GraphMaxBounds = GraphMinBounds + ImVec2(TimelineSizeWithBorder.x, Layer_ScreenSize.y);
+                    uint32 col = (Channel % 2) ? IM_COL32(50, 50, 50, 255) : IM_COL32(50, 50, 50, 128);
+                    draw_list->AddRectFilled(GraphMinBounds, GraphMaxBounds, col);
+                    ImGui_Timeline_DrawKeySheet(File, State, Memory, UI, io, draw_list, Property, ArrayLocation,
+                                                Increment, TimelineAbsolutePos, GraphPos, TimelineMoveSize, TimelineZoomSize,
+                                                TimelineSize, TimelineSizeWithBorder, LayerIncrement,
+                                                SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray, SortedPropertyStart, SortedKeyframeArray);
+                    Channel++;
+                }
+            }
+        }
+
+        //
+
+        // Precomp recursion
+
+        if (Layer->IsPrecomp && Layer->Precomp_Toggled) {
+
+            sorted_layer_array *Precomp_SortedLayerStart = Sorted_GetLayerStart(SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
+            sorted_comp_array Precomp_SortedCompStart = SortedCompArray[Layer->Block_Source_Index];
+
+            block_layer *Layer_Top = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Precomp_SortedLayerStart[Precomp_SortedCompStart.LayerCount - 1].Block_Layer_Index);
+            block_layer *Layer_Bottom = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Precomp_SortedLayerStart[0].Block_Layer_Index);
+            real32 SmallestY = Layer_Top->Vertical_Offset;
+            real32 LargestY = Layer_Bottom->Vertical_Offset;
+            // Layer_Evaluate_Display(Layer_Top, SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, Precomp_SortedLayerStart, Precomp_SortedCompStart.LayerCount - 1, &SmallestY);
+            // Layer_Evaluate_Display(Layer_Bottom, SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, Precomp_SortedLayerStart, 0, &LargestY);
+            real32 PrecompHeight = LargestY - SmallestY + 2;
+
+            ImVec2 MinClipPos = ImVec2(Layer_ScreenPos_Min.x, Layer_ScreenPos_Max.y);
+            ImVec2 MaxClipPos = ImVec2(Layer_ScreenPos_Max.x, MinClipPos.y + (PrecompHeight * Increment.y * TimelineZoomSize.y));
+            draw_list->AddRectFilled(MinClipPos, MaxClipPos, ImColor(0.2f, 0.2f, 0.2f, 1.0f));
+
+
+            ImVec2 Layer_LocalPos_Screen = Layer_LocalPos_Ratio * TimelineZoomSize;
+            ImVec2 NestedTimelineAbsolutePos = TimelineAbsolutePos + Layer_LocalPos_Screen - ImVec2(0, SmallestY * Increment.y * TimelineZoomSize.y) + ImVec2(0, Layer_ScreenSize.y * 1.5);
+
+            ImGui::PushClipRect(MinClipPos, MaxClipPos, true);
+            draw_list->PushClipRect(MinClipPos, MaxClipPos, true);
+            uint32 RecursionsCount = Recursions+1;
+            RecursionIdx[RecursionsCount] = Index_Physical;
+            ImGui_Timeline_DrawPrecomp(File, State, Memory, UI, io, draw_list, RecursionIdx, RecursionsCount,
+                                       Increment, NestedTimelineAbsolutePos, TimelineMoveSize, TimelineZoomSize,
+                                       TimelineSize, TimelineSizeWithBorder, LayerIncrement,
+                                       SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray, SortedPropertyStart, SortedKeyframeArray);
+            draw_list->PopClipRect();
+            ImGui::PopClipRect();
+
+        }
+
+        //
+
+        ImGui::PopID();
+    }
+
+    ImGui::PopID();
+}
+
+static void
+ImGui_Timeline(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, ui *UI, ImGuiIO io,
+              sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray, sorted_property_array *SortedPropertyStart, uint16 *SortedKeyframeArray)
+{
+    ImVec2 FramePadding = ImGui::GetStyle().FramePadding;
+    ImVec2 ItemSpacing = ImGui::GetStyle().ItemSpacing;
+    ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_WindowPadding, ImVec2(0, 0));
+    ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(0, 0));       // makes setting up the layout easier
+    ImGui::Begin("Timeline", NULL);
+
+    if (ImGui::IsWindowHovered(ImGuiFocusedFlags_ChildWindows)) {
+        State->FocusedWindow = focus_timeline;
+    }
+
+    // if (State->TimelineMode == timeline_mode_graph)
+    //     ImGui_GraphInfo(File, State, Memory, UI, io, SortedPropertyStart, SortedKeyframeArray);
+
+    real32 FontHeight = ImGui::GetFontSize();
+
+    ImVec2 WindowSize = ImGui::GetWindowSize();
+
+    if (WindowSize.x < 50 || WindowSize.y < 50) {
+        ImGui::PopStyleVar(2);
+        ImGui::End();
+        return;
+    }
+
+    block_composition *MainComp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, File->PrincipalCompIndex);
+
+    ImVec2 WindowMinAbs = ImGui::GetWindowPos();
+    ImVec2 WindowMaxAbs = WindowMinAbs + WindowSize;
+
+    ImVec2 ButtonSize = ImVec2(FontHeight*2, FontHeight*2);
+
+    ImVec2 TimelineBorderPadding = ImVec2(FontHeight, FontHeight);
+
+    ImVec2 TimelineSize = ImVec2(WindowSize.x, WindowSize.y);
+    ImVec2 TimelineSizeWithBorder = TimelineSize - TimelineBorderPadding*2;
+    ImVec2 TimelineAbsolutePos = WindowMinAbs + TimelineBorderPadding;
+
+    ImVec2 KeyframeSize = ImVec2(FontHeight, FontHeight);
+
+    int32 FrameCount = MainComp->Frame_Count;
+
+    ImDrawList* draw_list = ImGui::GetWindowDrawList();
+    draw_list->AddRectFilled(WindowMinAbs, WindowMaxAbs,
+                             IM_COL32(255, 255, 255, 50));
+
+
+    ImGui::BeginChild("Timeline",  TimelineSize, true, ImGuiWindowFlags_NoMove | ImGuiWindowFlags_NoScrollbar);
+
+    ImGui::PushStyleVar(ImGuiStyleVar_ItemSpacing, ImVec2(0.0f, ItemSpacing.y));
+
+    ImGui::PushClipRect(TimelineAbsolutePos, TimelineAbsolutePos + TimelineSizeWithBorder, true);
+    draw_list->PushClipRect(TimelineAbsolutePos, TimelineAbsolutePos + TimelineSizeWithBorder, true);
+
+    real32 LayerIncrement = 40;
+
+    ImVec2 Val_Min(0, 0);
+    ImVec2 Val_Max(40, LayerIncrement);
+
+    // DebugWatchVar("Selection", &State->RecentSelectionType, d_int);
+
+    // ImVec2 *ActivePercentZoomed = (UI->TimelineMode != timeline_mode_graph) ? &UI->TimelinePercentZoomed : &UI->GraphPercentZoomed;
+    // ImVec2 *ActivePercentOffset = (UI->TimelineMode != timeline_mode_graph) ? &UI->TimelinePercentOffset : &UI->GraphPercentOffset;
+    ImVec2 *ActivePercentZoomed = &UI->TimelinePercentZoomed;
+    ImVec2 *ActivePercentOffset = &UI->TimelinePercentOffset;
+
+    if (ActivePercentZoomed->x == 0) {
+        *ActivePercentZoomed = ImVec2(1, 1);
+    }
+
+    ImVec2 ActiveZoomSize = TimelineSizeWithBorder / *ActivePercentZoomed;
+    ImVec2 ActiveMoveSize = TimelineSizeWithBorder * *ActivePercentOffset / *ActivePercentZoomed;
+
+    ImVec2 TimelineZoomSize = TimelineSizeWithBorder / UI->TimelinePercentZoomed;
+    ImVec2 TimelineMoveSize = TimelineSizeWithBorder * UI->TimelinePercentOffset / UI->TimelinePercentZoomed;
+
+    // DebugWatchVar("TimelineY: ", &TimelineMoveSize.y, d_float);
+
+    ImVec2 Increment = ImVec2((real32)1 / MainComp->Frame_Count, (real32)1 / LayerIncrement);
+
+    ImGui_Timeline_BGElements(File, State, Memory, UI, draw_list, TimelineSizeWithBorder, TimelineAbsolutePos, *MainComp, TimelineZoomSize, TimelineMoveSize);
+
+    int16 RecursionIdx[MAX_PRECOMP_RECURSIONS] = {};
+    int32 Recursions = 0;
+    RecursionIdx[0] = -1;
+    ImGui_Timeline_DrawPrecomp(File, State, Memory, UI, io, draw_list, RecursionIdx, Recursions,
+                               Increment, TimelineAbsolutePos, TimelineMoveSize, TimelineZoomSize,
+                               TimelineSize, TimelineSizeWithBorder, LayerIncrement,
+                               SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray, SortedPropertyStart, SortedKeyframeArray);
+
+    if (State->TimelineMode == timeline_mode_graph) {
+
+        if (UI->GraphMoveSize.y == 0) {
+            UI->GraphZoomSize = ImVec2(1, UI->TimelinePercentZoomed.y );
+            UI->GraphMoveSize = ImVec2(0, -UI->TimelinePercentOffset.y );
+        }
+
+        ImVec2 ZoomDifference = (UI->TimelinePercentZoomed / UI->GraphZoomSize);
+        ImVec2 MoveDifference = (UI->TimelinePercentOffset + (UI->GraphMoveSize));
+        // DebugWatchVar("zoomdif: ", &ZoomDifference.y, d_float);
+        // DebugWatchVar("movedif: ", &MoveDifference.y, d_float);
+        ImVec2 GraphZoomSize = TimelineSizeWithBorder / ZoomDifference;
+        ImVec2 GraphMoveSize = TimelineSizeWithBorder * (MoveDifference) / UI->TimelinePercentZoomed;
+        // DebugWatchVar("zoomsize: ", &GraphZoomSize.y, d_float);
+        // DebugWatchVar("movesize: ", &GraphMoveSize.y, d_float);
+
+        draw_list->AddRectFilled(WindowMinAbs, WindowMaxAbs,
+                                 IM_COL32(50, 50, 50, 230));
+        ImGui_Timeline_DrawGraph(File, State, Memory, UI, io, draw_list,
+                                 Increment, TimelineAbsolutePos, GraphMoveSize, GraphZoomSize,
+                                 TimelineSize, TimelineSizeWithBorder, LayerIncrement,
+                                 SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray,
+                                 SortedPropertyStart, SortedKeyframeArray);
+    }
+
+    ImGui_Timeline_HorizontalIncrementDraw(State, UI, draw_list, TimelineSizeWithBorder, TimelineAbsolutePos, *MainComp, TimelineZoomSize, TimelineMoveSize);
+
+
+    ImVec2 MouseDelta = io.MouseDelta / TimelineSize;
+
+    real32 BarHandleSize = FontHeight;
+    real32 BarThickness = 50;
+    real32 BarMinZoom = 0.01;
+
+    real32 BarH_Pos = -TimelineSizeWithBorder.x * ActivePercentOffset->x;
+    real32 BarH_Size = TimelineSizeWithBorder.x / (1 / ActivePercentZoomed->x);
+
+    // I use "UI" to denote the size/position after clipping the bar so that it
+    // doesn't go out of bounds and the handles are always selectable at the edges.
+
+    real32 BarH_Offset = Max(BarH_Pos, 0);
+
+    real32 BarH_SizeUI = (BarH_Size + BarH_Pos > TimelineSizeWithBorder.x) ?
+                             TimelineSizeWithBorder.x - BarH_Pos :
+                             BarH_Size + (BarH_Pos - BarH_Offset);
+
+    if (BarH_Offset == 0 && BarH_SizeUI > TimelineSizeWithBorder.x)
+        BarH_SizeUI = TimelineSizeWithBorder.x;
+
+    BarH_SizeUI = BarH_SizeUI - BarHandleSize*2;
+
+    BarH_SizeUI = Max(BarH_SizeUI, FontHeight*4);
+
+    BarH_Offset = Min(BarH_Offset, TimelineSize.x - BarH_SizeUI - BarHandleSize*4);
+    ImVec2 BarH_PosUI = TimelineAbsolutePos + ImVec2(BarH_Offset, TimelineSize.y - BarThickness);
+    bool32 BarHeld = false;
+
+    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(BarH_PosUI);
+    ImGui::Button("##scrollbarleft", ImVec2(BarHandleSize, BarThickness));
+
+    if ((ImGui::IsItemActive() && ImGui::IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton_Left, -1)))
+    {
+        if ((ActivePercentZoomed->x - MouseDelta.x) > BarMinZoom) {
+            ActivePercentZoomed->x -= MouseDelta.x;
+            ActivePercentOffset->x -= MouseDelta.x;
+        }
+        BarHeld = true;
+    }
+
+    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(BarH_PosUI + ImVec2(BarHandleSize, 0));
+    ImGui::Button("##scrollbarhori", ImVec2(BarH_SizeUI, BarThickness));
+
+    if (ImGui::IsItemActive() && ImGui::IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton_Left, -1))
+    {
+        ActivePercentOffset->x -= MouseDelta.x;
+        BarHeld = true;
+    }
+
+    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(BarH_PosUI + ImVec2(BarHandleSize, 0) + ImVec2(BarH_SizeUI, 0));
+    ImGui::Button("##scrollbarright", ImVec2(BarHandleSize, BarThickness));
+
+    if ((ImGui::IsItemActive() && ImGui::IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton_Left, -1)))
+    {
+        if ((ActivePercentZoomed->x + MouseDelta.x) > BarMinZoom) {
+            ActivePercentZoomed->x += MouseDelta.x;
+        }
+        BarHeld = true;
+    }
+
+    if (BarHeld) {
+        ImGui_WarpMouse(State, io.MousePos, TimelineAbsolutePos, TimelineAbsolutePos + TimelineSizeWithBorder, 1);
+    }
+
+    Assert(ActivePercentZoomed->x > BarMinZoom);
+
+    real32 BarV_MaxSize = TimelineSizeWithBorder.y - BarThickness/2;
+    real32 BarV_Pos = -BarV_MaxSize * ActivePercentOffset->y;
+    real32 BarV_Size = BarV_MaxSize / (1 / ActivePercentZoomed->y);
+    BarV_Size = Max(BarV_Size, FontHeight*4);
+
+    real32 BarV_Offset = Max(BarV_Pos, 0);
+
+    real32 BarV_SizeUI = (BarV_Size + BarV_Pos > BarV_MaxSize) ?
+                             BarV_MaxSize - BarV_Pos :
+                             BarV_Size + (BarV_Pos - BarV_Offset);
+
+    if (BarV_Offset == 0 && BarV_SizeUI > BarV_MaxSize)
+        BarV_SizeUI = BarV_MaxSize;
+
+    BarV_SizeUI = BarV_SizeUI - BarHandleSize*2;
+
+    BarV_SizeUI = Max(BarV_SizeUI, FontHeight*4);
+
+    BarV_Offset = Min(BarV_Offset, BarV_MaxSize - BarV_SizeUI - BarHandleSize*4);
+    ImVec2 BarV_PosUI = TimelineAbsolutePos + ImVec2(TimelineSize.x - BarThickness, BarV_Offset);
+    BarHeld = false;
+
+    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(BarV_PosUI);
+    ImGui::Button("##h-scrollbarleft", ImVec2(BarThickness, BarHandleSize));
+
+    if ((ImGui::IsItemActive() && ImGui::IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton_Left, -1)))
+    {
+        ActivePercentZoomed->y -= MouseDelta.y;
+        ActivePercentOffset->y -= MouseDelta.y;
+        BarHeld = true;
+    }
+
+    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(BarV_PosUI + ImVec2(0, BarHandleSize));
+    ImGui::Button("##h-scrollbar", ImVec2(BarThickness, BarV_SizeUI));
+
+    if (ImGui::IsItemHovered() && io.MouseWheel)
+    {
+        ActivePercentOffset->y -= io.MouseWheel/10;
+    }
+
+    if (ImGui::IsItemActive() && ImGui::IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton_Left, -1))
+    {
+        ActivePercentOffset->y -= MouseDelta.y;
+        BarHeld = true;
+    }
+
+    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(BarV_PosUI + ImVec2(0, BarHandleSize) + ImVec2(0, BarV_SizeUI));
+    ImGui::Button("##h-scrollbarright", ImVec2(BarThickness, BarHandleSize));
+
+    if ((ImGui::IsItemActive() && ImGui::IsMouseDragging(ImGuiMouseButton_Left, -1)))
+    {
+        ActivePercentZoomed->y += MouseDelta.y;
+        BarHeld = true;
+    }
+
+    ActivePercentZoomed->y = Max(ActivePercentZoomed->y, 0.01);
+
+    if (BarHeld) {
+        ImGui_WarpMouse(State, io.MousePos, TimelineAbsolutePos, TimelineAbsolutePos + TimelineSizeWithBorder, 2);
+    }
+
+    ImGui::SetCursorScreenPos(TimelineAbsolutePos);
+    ImGui::InvisibleButton("TimelineMoving", TimelineSizeWithBorder, ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonLeft | ImGuiButtonFlags_MouseButtonRight);
+    // ImGui::Button("TimelineMoving", TimelineSizeWithBorder);
+    bool32 IsHovered = ImGui::IsItemHovered();
+    bool32 IsItemActive = ImGui::IsItemActive();
+    bool32 IsItemActivated = ImGui::IsItemActivated();
+    bool32 IsItemDeactivated = ImGui::IsItemDeactivated();
+    bool32 LeftClick = ImGui::IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton_Left);
+    bool32 RightClick = ImGui::IsMouseDown(ImGuiMouseButton_Right);
+
+    if (IsHovered && io.MouseWheel) {
+        real32 Increment = 0.1;
+        bool32 Direction = (io.MouseWheel > 0) ? 1 : -1;
+        ImVec2 Offset = (io.MousePos - (TimelineAbsolutePos + ActiveMoveSize)) / ActiveZoomSize;
+        if (io.KeyShift) {
+                ActivePercentOffset->y += Increment*Direction;
+        } else if (io.KeyCtrl) {
+                ActivePercentOffset->x += Increment*Direction*0.3;
+        } else {
+            if (Direction == 1) {
+                *ActivePercentZoomed = *ActivePercentZoomed - (*ActivePercentZoomed * Increment);
+                *ActivePercentOffset = *ActivePercentOffset - ((*ActivePercentOffset * Increment) + Offset*Increment);
+            } else {
+                *ActivePercentOffset = ((*ActivePercentOffset + Offset*Increment) / (1.0f - Increment));
+                *ActivePercentZoomed = (*ActivePercentZoomed / (1.0f - Increment));
+            }
+        }
+    }
+
+    if (LeftClick) {
+        if (IsItemActivated) {
+            if (!io.KeyShift && State->TimelineMode == timeline_mode_default) Layer_DeselectAll(File, State, Memory);
+            if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_move ||
+                State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_rotate ||
+                State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_scale) {
+                Keyframe_Commit(File, State, Memory, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray, SortedPropertyStart, SortedKeyframeArray);
+            }
+            State->BoxSelect = true;
+        }
+        if (IsItemActive) {
+            Assert(State->BoxSelect);
+            draw_list->AddRectFilled(io.MouseClickedPos[0], io.MousePos,
+                                     IM_COL32(0, 0, 200, 50));
+        }
+    } else {
+        State->Warp_X = 0;
+        State->Warp_Y = 0;
+    }
+
+    if (IsItemDeactivated) {
+        State->BoxSelect = false;
+    }
+
+    draw_list->PopClipRect();
+    ImGui::PopClipRect();
+
+    ImGui::PopStyleVar();
+
+
+    ImGui::EndChild();
+
+    ImGui::PopStyleVar(2);
+
+    ImGui::End();
+}
diff --git a/debug.h b/src/include/debug.h
index 6321679..6321679 100644
--- a/debug.h
+++ b/src/include/debug.h
diff --git a/defines.h b/src/include/defines.h
index 8216f1c..8216f1c 100644
--- a/defines.h
+++ b/src/include/defines.h
diff --git a/src/include/ffmpeg_backend.h b/src/include/ffmpeg_backend.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..717a33d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/include/ffmpeg_backend.h
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+// NOTE(fox): Even though each layer has its own completely isolated AV
+// instance, it appears two layers with the same file still share something.
+// When the layers aren't at the same position in time, the playhead of one
+// layer gets misaligned every few frames and causes a manual seek back to the
+// position. Different files don't exhibit this behavior.
+
+struct av_stream_info {
+    uint32 Index;
+    AVCodecParameters *CodecParameters;  // Used to supply info about the decoder.
+    const AVCodec* Codec;
+    AVStream *Stream;    // Which stream, or channel, the video is in. Holds FPS info and is used to verify that the decoded packet belongs to this stream.
+    AVCodecContext *CodecContext;
+};
+
+
+struct av_info {
+    uint8 Occupied;
+
+    uint16 Block_Source_Index;
+
+    int LastFrameRendered; // Convenient to know this to only seek when we actually need to.
+    uint64 PreviousPTS;  // PTS value of the previous frame, used to check timings in debug.
+
+    AVFormatContext *FileFormatContext; // Umbrella for everything else, seems to contain the playhead state
+
+    av_stream_info Video;
+    av_stream_info Audio;
+
+    AVPacket *Packet;
+    AVFrame *Frame;
+
+    uint32 FrameCount;
+    uint64 PTSDuration;     // likely not always 100% accurate
+
+    SwsContext *RGBContext;
+};
+
diff --git a/src/include/functions.h b/src/include/functions.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..23d741e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/include/functions.h
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+
+// Memory
+
+static void Memory_Copy(uint8 *Address_Write, uint8 *Address_Read, uint64 Size);
+static void Arbitrary_Zero(uint8 *Address_Write, uint64 Size);
+static void Arbitrary_SwapData(memory *Memory, uint8 *Address_0, uint8 *Address_1, uint64 Size);
+static void Arbitrary_ShiftData(uint8 *Address_Start, uint8 *Address_End, uint64 ShiftAmount, int32 Direction);
+
+
+// Rudimentary guess-until-correct solver for bezier curves, used to evaluate
+// the keyframe graph. Similar to the Catmull-Rom solver in CurvesSolver().
+
+static real32         Bezier_SolveYForX(v2 Point_P0, v2 Point_P1, v2 Point_P2, v2 Point_P3, real32 TargetX);
+static bezier_point * Bezier_LookupAddress(memory *Memory, property_channel *Property, uint16 Index, bool32 AssertExists = 1);
+static void           Bezier_Interact_Evaluate(project_state *State, bezier_point *PointAddress, v2 *Pos, real32 GraphZoomHeight = 1, real32 Y_Increment = 1);
+// NOTE(fox): GraphZoomHeight and Y_Increment don't have to be specified if the Y value isn't needed, i.e. in Property_SortAll().
+static void           Bezier_Add(memory *Memory, memory_table_list TableName, property_channel *Property, bezier_point PointData, uint16 *ArrayLocation);
+
+
+static void ImGui_ProcessInputs(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io, sorted_file Sorted);
+static void ImGui_PropertiesPanel(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io, sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray, sorted_property_array *SortedPropertyStart, uint16 *SortedKeyframeArray);
+static void ImGui_Viewport(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io, GLuint textureID, sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray, uint16 *SortedKeyframeArray);
+static void ImGui_Timeline(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, ui *UI, ImGuiIO io, sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray, sorted_property_array *SortedPropertyStart, uint16 *SortedKeyframeArray);
+
+static void ImGui_File(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io, sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray);
+static void ImGui_EffectsPanel(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, ui *UI, ImGuiIO io);
+static void ImGui_ColorPanel(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io);
+
+static void ImGui_Menu(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io);
+static void ImGui_Popups(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io);
+static void ImGui_KeybindUI(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io);
+
+#if DEBUG
+static void ImGui_DebugMemoryViewer(memory *Memory, project_state *State);
+static void ImGui_DebugRenderQueue(project_state *State);
+static void ImGui_DebugUndoTree(memory *Memory, project_state *State);
+#endif
+#if SD
+static void ImGui_SD_Thumbnail(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io, sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray, uint16 *SourceArray, uint16 SourceCount);
+static void ImGui_SD_Prompt(project_data *File, project_state *State, ui *UI, memory *Memory, ImGuiIO io, sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray);
+#endif
+
+// Widgets not involving drawing UI.
+
+static v2 ImGui_ScreenPointToCompUV(ImVec2 ViewportMin, ImVec2 CompPos, ImVec2 CompZoom, ImVec2 MousePos);
+static void ImGui_WarpMouse(project_state *State, ImVec2 MousePos, ImVec2 Min, ImVec2 Max, int Direction = 3);
+static void ImGui_WarpMouseFinish(project_state *State, ImVec2 MousePos);
+static ImVec2 ImGui_Brush_CalcMousePos(project_state *State, ImGuiIO &io, ImVec2 MouseDelta, int32 i, real32 DeltaDistance, real32 DeltaSlope);
+static bool32 ImGui_TestBoxSelection_Point(ImVec2 Pos, ImGuiIO &io, bool32 *Test);
+
+
+static void
+Render_Main(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, sorted_file Sorted, ui *UI, SDL_Window *window, GLuint textureID,
+    void *Data, void *OutputBuffer, render_type RenderType, rectangle RenderRegion);
+
+static void Effect_Curves_Init(block_effect *Effect, property_channel *Property);
+
+void AV_IsFileSupported(char *filename, bool32 *IsVideo, bool32 *HasAudio);
+
+static v2 T_CompUVToLayerUV(layer_transforms T, uint32 FileWidth, uint32 FileHeight, uint32 SourceWidth, uint32 SourceHeight, v2 CompUV);
+static header_effect* Effect_EntryFromID(project_state *State, char *ID);
+
+void Effect_Curves_Sort(memory *Memory, block_effect *Effect, uint16 *SortedPointStart, uint16 Which);
+inline v2 Effect_V2(memory *Memory, block_effect *Effect, int Offset);
+
+static void Interact_Transform_Begin(project_data *File, memory *Memory, project_state *State, ImVec2 OGPos, sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray);
+
+static v2 Transform_ScreenSpaceToLocal(layer_transforms T, uint32 FileWidth, uint32 FileHeight, uint32 SourceWidth, uint32 SourceHeight, ImVec2 CompPos, ImVec2 CompZoom, ImVec2 ViewportMin, ImVec2 Point);
+static ImVec2 Layer_LocalToScreenSpace(project_state *State, memory *Memory, block_layer *Layer, ui *UI, uint32 PrincipalCompIndex, v2 Point);
+
+static v2 TransformPoint(layer_transforms T, real32 Width, real32 Height, v2 Point);
+
+static void Layer_GetDimensions(memory *Memory, block_layer *Layer, int *Width, int *Height);
+
+static void * Memory_PushScratch(memory *Memory, uint64 Size);
+
+static void Memory_PopScratch(memory *Memory, uint64 Size);
+
+void Bitmap_SwapData(uint8 *Address_0, uint8 *Address_1, uint64 Size, uint16 BytesPerPixel);
+void GL_DeleteHWBuffer(gl_effect_layer *Test);
+
+void GL_UpdateTexture(gl_effect_layer *Test, void *Data, uint16 Width, uint16 Height, uint16 BytesPerPixel, bool32 Multisample);
+
+static void Transform_ApplyInteractive(interact_transform Interact, real32 *OutputX, real32 *OutputY, real32 *OutputRotation, real32 *OutputScale);
+
+static layer_transforms Layer_GetTransforms(block_layer *Layer);
+void GL_GenAndBindTexture(GLuint *GLTexture, int Width, int Height, int BytesPerPixel, void *BufferAddress);
+
+static real32 Bezier_SolveYForX(v2 Point_P0, v2 Point_P1, v2 Point_P2, v2 Point_P3, real32 X);
+
diff --git a/gl_calls.h b/src/include/gl_calls.h
index fa0a00c..fa0a00c 100644
--- a/gl_calls.h
+++ b/src/include/gl_calls.h
diff --git a/my_imgui_internal_widgets.h b/src/include/imgui_internal_widgets.h
index 2841c2d..52fdc74 100644
--- a/my_imgui_internal_widgets.h
+++ b/src/include/imgui_internal_widgets.h
@@ -6,8 +6,6 @@
 
 // NOTE(fox): Appending to the standard ImGui namespace so I don't have to convert all the functions to ImGui::Function()
 namespace ImGui {
-    IMGUI_API ImVec2 GetLocalMouseDragDelta(ImGuiMouseButton button, float lock_threshold);
-    IMGUI_API void SetLocalMouseDragDelta(ImGuiMouseButton button, ImVec2 DeltaOffset);
     IMGUI_API bool SliderLevels(const char* label, const char* label2, const char* label3, void* p_data, void* p_min, void* p_max);
     IMGUI_API bool TestLine(ImVec2 P1, ImVec2 P2);
     IMGUI_API bool BezierInteractive(ImVec2 p0, ImVec2 p1, ImVec2 p2, ImVec2 p3);
diff --git a/imgui_ops.h b/src/include/imgui_ops.h
index 6089f94..6089f94 100644
--- a/imgui_ops.h
+++ b/src/include/imgui_ops.h
diff --git a/keybinds.h b/src/include/keybinds.h
index 3fe5f64..3fe5f64 100644
--- a/keybinds.h
+++ b/src/include/keybinds.h
diff --git a/src/include/layer.h b/src/include/layer.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..85d980d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/include/layer.h
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+static block_layer *
+Layer_Init(project_data *File, memory *Memory);
+
+static void
+Layer_Delete(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, uint32 Index);
+
+static layer_transforms
+Layer_GetTransforms(block_layer *Layer);
+
+static int
+Layer_GetTopOffset(project_data *File, memory *Memory);
+
+static void
+Layer_UpdateMasksEffects(project_state *State, block_layer *Layer, memory *Memory, void *EffectBitmapAddress,
+        int Width, int Height, int BytesPerPixel);
+
+static void
+Layer_ToggleChannel(project_data *File, memory *Memory, int32 a);
+
+static void
+Layer_Select(memory *Memory, project_state *State, int32 i);
+
+static void
+Layer_Select_RecurseUp(memory *Memory, project_state *State, int32 i, int16 RecursionIdx[MAX_PRECOMP_RECURSIONS], uint32 Recursions);
+
+static void
+Layer_DeselectAll(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory);
+
+static bool32
+Layer_LoopChannels(project_state *State, memory *Memory, sorted_property_array **SortedProperty, uint16 **SortedKeyframe, block_layer *Layer,
+                   property_channel **Property, block_effect **EffectOut, int *h, int *c, int *p);
+
+static void
+Layer_ToggleAllChannels(project_state *State, memory *Memory, block_layer *Layer,
+                        sorted_comp_array *SortedCompStart, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart,
+                        sorted_property_array *SortedPropertyStart, uint16 *SortedKeyframeArray);
+
+static void
+Layer_Select_Traverse(uint16 PrincipalCompIndex, memory *Memory, project_state *State, int32 IndexToFind, sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray,
+                      int16 RecursionIdx[MAX_PRECOMP_RECURSIONS], int32 *Recursions);
+
+static v2
+Layer_TraverseForPoint(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, v2 PrincipalCompUV, sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray);
+
+static int32
+Layer_TestSelection(memory *Memory, project_state *State, ui *UI, sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray, uint16 PrincipalIndex);
+
+static void
+Layer_RecursiveDeselect(memory *Memory, sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray, uint16 TargetIndex, uint16 PrincipalIndex);
+
diff --git a/main.h b/src/include/main.h
index 2bda728..3c7ff83 100644
--- a/main.h
+++ b/src/include/main.h
@@ -54,8 +54,7 @@ enum cache_entry_type
 {
     cache_entry_type_assert,
     cache_entry_type_comp,
-    cache_entry_type_source,
-    cache_entry_type_layer,
+    cache_entry_type_source
 };
 
 struct cache_entry
@@ -148,19 +147,19 @@ enum focused_window
     focus_timeline
 };
 
-struct sorted_property_info
+struct sorted_property_array
 {
     uint32 MinYIndex;
     uint32 MaxYIndex;
 };
 
-struct sorted_comp_info
+struct sorted_comp_array
 {
     uint32 LayerCount;
     uint32 CurrentSortIndex;        // Used intermediately in the sorting algorithm
 };
 
-struct sorted_layer
+struct sorted_layer_array
 {
     uint16 Block_Layer_Index;
     real32 SortedOffset;
@@ -171,11 +170,11 @@ struct sorted_layer
 
 struct sorted_file
 {
-    sorted_layer *LayerArray;
-    sorted_comp_info *CompArray;
-    sorted_property_info *PropertyInfo;
+    sorted_comp_array *CompArray;
+    sorted_layer_array *LayerArray;
+    sorted_property_array *PropertyStart;
     uint16 *PropertyArray;
-    uint16 *SourceArray;        // sort by recency, temp only
+    uint16 *SourceArray;        // sorted by 'recency,' wip for stablediffusion stuff
     uint16 TempSourceCount;
     uint64 Layer_SortSize;
     uint64 Property_SortSize;
@@ -192,22 +191,6 @@ struct pen_state {
     bool32 IsActive;
 };
 
-enum brush_type
-{
-    brush_normal,
-    brush_wacky1,
-    brush_wacky2,
-    brush_wacky3,
-    brush_amount
-};
-
-char *BrushNames[brush_amount] = {
-    "brush_normal",
-    "brush_wacky1",
-    "brush_wacky2",
-    "brush_wacky3"
-};
-
 struct brush_state
 {
     ImVec2 UIPos;               // Initial position when ctrl is held
@@ -215,7 +198,6 @@ struct brush_state
     real32 Hardness = 0.55f;     // From 1 to 100
     real32 Spacing = 1.0f;
     bool32 EraseMode = 0;
-    brush_type Type = brush_normal;
     GLuint GLTexture;
     v2 PrevPos;
     void *PaintBuffer;
@@ -313,7 +295,6 @@ struct block_effect
     uint8 Occupied;
     char ID[8];
     bool32 IsToggled;
-    uint16 Index;
     uint32 Block_Property_Index[MAX_PROPERTIES_PER_EFFECT];
     real32 ExtraData[16];
 };
@@ -342,6 +323,11 @@ struct project_state
     bool32 UpdateKeyframes = 0;
     bool32 UpdateFrame = 1;         // only refreshes frame; set UpdateKeyframes to update animation
     bool32 DebugDisableCache = 1;
+    uint32 CachedFrameCount;
+
+    uint64 HotFramePerf = 0;
+
+    uint32 AVCount;
 
     render_state Render;
     render_queue Queue;
@@ -378,7 +364,10 @@ struct project_state
 
     bool32 IsRunning = 1;
     bool32 IsPlaying;
+    bool32 PlayAudio;
+    int32 FramePlayingCount;
     bool32 FirstFrame = 1;
+    int32 AudioLayerIndex = -1;
 
     void *ClipboardBuffer;
     uint64 ClipboardSize;
@@ -488,21 +477,14 @@ struct block_composition
 
     uint16 Width;
     uint16 Height;
-    uint16 FPS;
     uint16 BytesPerPixel;
+    uint16 FPS;
 
     uint32 Frame_Count;
      int32 Frame_Start;
      int32 Frame_End;
 };
 
-enum source_type {
-    source_type_none,
-    source_type_principal,
-    source_type_principal_temp,
-    source_type_file
-};
-
 struct layer_transforms
 {
     real32 x;
@@ -513,6 +495,13 @@ struct layer_transforms
     real32 scale;
 };
 
+enum source_type {
+    source_type_none,
+    source_type_principal,
+    source_type_principal_temp,
+    source_type_file
+};
+
 struct block_source
 {
     uint8 Occupied;
@@ -529,7 +518,12 @@ struct block_source
     uint16 Height;
     uint16 BytesPerPixel;
 
-    uint32 RelativeTimestamp; //
+    // LibAV specific
+    real32 FPS;
+    bool32 HasAudio;
+    bool32 HasVideo;
+
+    uint32 RelativeTimestamp;
     GLuint ThumbnailTex;
 
     source_type Type;
@@ -592,7 +586,6 @@ struct block_layer {
     bool32 IsVisible;
     bool32 IsAdjustment;
 
-    int32 Frame_Offset;
     int32 Frame_Start;
     int32 Frame_End;
 
diff --git a/memory.h b/src/include/memory.h
index f4460ed..dab6ed4 100644
--- a/memory.h
+++ b/src/include/memory.h
@@ -16,6 +16,7 @@ enum memory_table_list {
 
     B_Thumbnails,
     B_ScratchSpace,
+    B_CacheEntries,
     B_CachedBitmaps,
 };
 
@@ -65,5 +66,6 @@ struct memory {
     uint64 ScratchPos;
     uint32 EntryCount;
     bool32 IsFileSaved;
+    bool32 PurgeCache;
 };
 
diff --git a/my_math.h b/src/include/my_math.h
index af6beb1..92d43b7 100644
--- a/my_math.h
+++ b/src/include/my_math.h
@@ -676,9 +676,9 @@ inline v4
 Uint32ToCol8(uint32 LayerPixel)
 {
         uint8 A2 = (LayerPixel >> 24);
-        uint8 R2 = (LayerPixel >> 16);
+        uint8 B2 = (LayerPixel >> 16);
         uint8 G2 = (LayerPixel >> 8);
-        uint8 B2 = (LayerPixel >> 0);
+        uint8 R2 = (LayerPixel >> 0);
         v4 Color = {(real32)R2,
                     (real32)G2,
                     (real32)B2,
diff --git a/sharebuffer.h b/src/include/sharebuffer.h
index c25deb2..c25deb2 100644
--- a/sharebuffer.h
+++ b/src/include/sharebuffer.h
diff --git a/stable_diffusion.h b/src/include/stable_diffusion.h
index 3335796..3335796 100644
--- a/stable_diffusion.h
+++ b/src/include/stable_diffusion.h
diff --git a/structs.h b/src/include/structs.h
index fbb97ed..fbb97ed 100644
--- a/structs.h
+++ b/src/include/structs.h
diff --git a/undo.h b/src/include/undo.h
index 139597f..139597f 100644
--- a/undo.h
+++ b/src/include/undo.h
diff --git a/io.cpp b/src/io.cpp
index 50ffbcf..50ffbcf 100644
--- a/io.cpp
+++ b/src/io.cpp
diff --git a/src/layer.cpp b/src/layer.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f1ce0f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/layer.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,405 @@
+
+static property_channel
+Property_InitFloat(real32 Val, real32 ScrubVal, real32 MinVal = PROPERTY_REAL_MIN, real32 MaxVal = PROPERTY_REAL_MAX, bool32 AlwaysInteger = 0);
+
+static block_layer *
+Layer_Init(project_data *File, memory *Memory)
+{
+    if (File->Layer_Count + 1 > MAX_LAYERS) {
+        Assert(0);
+    }
+    block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AllocateAddress(Memory, F_Layers);
+    History_Action_Block_Swap(Memory, F_Layers, Layer);
+
+    *Layer = {};
+    Layer->Occupied = 1;
+
+    Layer->Block_String_Index = Memory_Block_AllocateNew(Memory, F_Strings);
+    block_string *String = (block_string *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Strings, Layer->Block_String_Index, 0);
+    sprintf(String->Char, "Layer %i", File->Layer_Count + 1);  // CSbros...
+    History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(String->Occupied), &String->Occupied);
+    String->Occupied = 1;
+
+    Layer->x =        Property_InitFloat(0.0f, 1.0f);
+    Layer->y =        Property_InitFloat(0.0f, 1.0f);
+    Layer->ax =       Property_InitFloat(0.5f, 0.005f);
+    Layer->ay =       Property_InitFloat(0.5f, 0.005f);
+    Layer->scale =    Property_InitFloat(1.0f, 0.005f);
+    Layer->rotation = Property_InitFloat(0.0f, 1.0f);
+    Layer->opacity =  Property_InitFloat(1.0f, 0.005f, 0.0f, 1.0f);
+    Layer->time =     Property_InitFloat(0.0f, 1.0f, 0, 100000, 1);
+
+    Layer->IsVisible = 1;
+
+    History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(File->Layer_Count), &File->Layer_Count);
+    File->Layer_Count++;
+
+    return Layer;
+}
+
+// lots of cleanup...
+static void
+Layer_Delete(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, uint32 Index)
+{
+    block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Index);
+    History_Action_Block_Swap(Memory, F_Layers, Layer);
+    Layer->Occupied = 0;
+
+    block_string *String = (block_string *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Strings, Layer->Block_String_Index, 0);
+    History_Action_Block_Swap(Memory, F_Strings, String);
+    String->Occupied = 0;
+
+    for (int i = 0; i < Layer->Block_Effect_Count; i++) {
+        block_effect *Effect = (block_effect *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Effects, Layer->Block_Effect_Index[i]);
+        header_effect *EffectHeader = Effect_EntryFromID(State, Effect->ID);
+        for (int h = 0; h < EffectHeader->Property_Count; h++) {
+            header_property ChannelHeader = State->Property[EffectHeader->PropertyStartIndex + h];
+            property_channel *Property = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect->Block_Property_Index[h]);
+            if (Property->Block_Bezier_Count) {
+                block_bezier *Bezier = (block_bezier *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Bezier, Property->Block_Bezier_Index[i], 0);
+                History_Action_Block_Swap(Memory, F_Bezier, Bezier);
+                Bezier->Occupied = 0;
+            }
+            History_Action_Block_Swap(Memory, F_Properties, Property);
+            Property->Occupied = 0;
+        }
+        History_Action_Block_Swap(Memory, F_Effects, Effect);
+        Effect->Occupied = 0;
+    }
+    History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_File, sizeof(File->Layer_Count), &File->Layer_Count);
+    File->Layer_Count--;
+}
+
+static layer_transforms
+Layer_GetTransforms(block_layer *Layer) {
+    return { Layer->x.CurrentValue, Layer->y.CurrentValue, Layer->ax.CurrentValue, Layer->ay.CurrentValue, Layer->rotation.CurrentValue, Layer->scale.CurrentValue };
+}
+
+static int
+Layer_GetTopOffset(project_data *File, memory *Memory)
+{
+    if (File->Layer_Count == 0)
+        return 11;
+    int TopOffset = 9999;
+    int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
+    while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, File->Layer_Count, &h, &c, &i)) {
+        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
+        if (Layer->Block_Composition_Index == File->PrincipalCompIndex) {
+            TopOffset = (Layer->Vertical_Offset < TopOffset) ? Layer->Vertical_Offset : TopOffset;
+        }
+    }
+    return TopOffset;
+}
+
+
+static void
+Layer_UpdateMasksEffects(project_state *State, block_layer *Layer, memory *Memory, void *EffectBitmapAddress,
+        int Width, int Height, int BytesPerPixel)
+{
+    uint64 Size = Width*Height*BytesPerPixel;
+
+    // We need two of these: one with multisampling enabled and a
+    // non-multisampled one that we can blit to.
+    gl_effect_layer TestL = {};
+    gl_effect_layer TestM = {};
+
+    GL_UpdateTexture(&TestL, EffectBitmapAddress, Width, Height, BytesPerPixel, 0);
+    GL_UpdateTexture(&TestM, EffectBitmapAddress, Width, Height, BytesPerPixel, 1);
+
+    for (int i = 0; i < Layer->Block_Effect_Count; i++)
+    {
+        block_effect Effect = *(block_effect *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Effects, Layer->Block_Effect_Index[i]);
+        header_effect *EffectEntry = Effect_EntryFromID(State, Effect.ID);
+
+        if (Effect.IsToggled) {
+            uint64 Size = (sizeof(real32) * MAX_PROPERTIES_PER_EFFECT) + (sizeof(real32) * 10);
+            real32 *Data;
+            if (EffectEntry->DisplayType == effect_display_type_curves) {
+                Data = (real32 *)Memory_PushScratch(Memory, Size);
+                uint16 SortedPointIndex[MAX_PROPERTIES_PER_EFFECT];
+                v2 *SortedPointValues = (v2 *)(Data + 5);
+                for (int c = 0; c < 5; c++) {
+                    *(Data + c) = Effect.ExtraData[c];
+                    uint32 Shift = MAX_PROPERTIES_PER_EFFECT / 5 * c;
+                    uint16 *SortedPointIndexPlayhead = SortedPointIndex + Shift;
+                    v2 *SortedPointValuesPlayhead = SortedPointValues + Shift;
+                    Effect_Curves_Sort(Memory, &Effect, SortedPointIndexPlayhead, c);
+                    for (int a = 0; a < Effect.ExtraData[c]; a++) {
+                        *SortedPointValuesPlayhead = Effect_V2(Memory, &Effect, SortedPointIndexPlayhead[a]);
+                        SortedPointValuesPlayhead++;
+                    }
+                }
+            } else {
+                Data = (real32 *)Memory_PushScratch(Memory, Size);
+                for (int c = 0; c < EffectEntry->Property_Count; c++) {
+                    property_channel *Property = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect.Block_Property_Index[c]);
+                    Data[c] = Property->CurrentValue;
+                }
+            }
+            EffectEntry->func(Data, Width, Height, BytesPerPixel, EffectBitmapAddress, EffectEntry->GLShaderIndex);
+            Memory_PopScratch(Memory, Size);
+        }
+    }
+    /*
+    if (Layer->NumberOfMasks) {
+        for (int i = 0; i < Layer->NumberOfMasks; i++) {
+            file_mask_header *MaskHeader = (file_mask_header *)((uint8 *)Layer + sizeof(file_layer) + MaskOffset);
+            if (MaskHeader->IsClosed && MaskHeader->IsToggled) {
+                mask_point *Point = (mask_point *)((uint8 *)MaskHeader + sizeof(file_mask_header));
+                Mask_TriangulateAndRasterize(TestM, TestL, Memory, MaskHeader, Point, Source->Width, Source->Height, Source->BytesPerPixel, EffectBitmapAddress);
+            }
+        }
+        Bitmap_StencilAlpha(SourceBitmapAddress, EffectBitmapAddress, Source->BytesPerPixel, Size);
+    }
+
+    Layer->OutputBitmapLocation = EffectBitmapAddress;
+    */
+
+    GL_DeleteHWBuffer(&TestL);
+    GL_DeleteHWBuffer(&TestM);
+}
+
+static void
+Layer_ToggleChannel(project_data *File, memory *Memory, int32 a)
+{
+    int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
+    while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, File->Layer_Count, &h, &c, &i))
+    {
+        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
+        if (Layer->IsSelected)
+            Layer->Property[a].IsToggled ^= 1;
+    }
+}
+
+static void
+Layer_Select(memory *Memory, project_state *State, int32 i)
+{
+    block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
+    Layer->IsSelected = true;
+    State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer = i;
+    State->RecentSelectionType = selection_type_layer;
+}
+
+static void
+Layer_Select_RecurseUp(memory *Memory, project_state *State, int32 i, int16 RecursionIdx[MAX_PRECOMP_RECURSIONS], uint32 Recursions)
+{
+    for (int a = 1; a <= Recursions; a++) {
+        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, RecursionIdx[a]);
+        Layer->IsSelected = 2;
+    }
+}
+
+static void
+Layer_DeselectAll(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory) {
+    int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
+    while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, File->Layer_Count, &h, &c, &i)) {
+        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
+        Layer->IsSelected = false;
+    }
+    State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer = -1;
+}
+
+// h: index of the total amount of properties and effects
+// c: index of the amount of properties in a given effect
+// p: prior property's keyframe count, so we can increment the sorted keyframe array properly
+static bool32
+Layer_LoopChannels(project_state *State, memory *Memory, sorted_property_array **SortedProperty, uint16 **SortedKeyframe, block_layer *Layer,
+                   property_channel **Property, block_effect **EffectOut, int *h, int *c, int *p)
+{
+    uint32 Amount = AmountOf(Layer->Property) + Layer->Block_Effect_Count;
+    // Assert(Layer->Block_Effect_Count < 2);
+    while (*h < Amount) {
+        if (*h < AmountOf(Layer->Property) && *c == 0) {
+            *Property = &Layer->Property[*h];
+            if (*h != 0) {
+                *SortedProperty += 1;
+                *SortedKeyframe += *p;
+            }
+            *h += 1;
+            *p = (**Property).Keyframe_Count;
+            return 1;
+        } else {
+            uint16 EffectIdx = Layer->Block_Effect_Index[*h - AmountOf(Layer->Property)];
+            block_effect *Effect = (block_effect *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Effects, EffectIdx);
+            if (EffectOut)
+                *EffectOut = Effect;
+            header_effect *EffectHeader = Effect_EntryFromID(State, Effect->ID);
+            while (*c < EffectHeader->Property_Count) {
+                // header_property ChannelHeader = State->Property[EffectHeader->PropertyStartIndex + c];
+                *Property = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect->Block_Property_Index[*c]);
+                *SortedProperty += 1;
+                *SortedKeyframe += *p;
+                *p = (**Property).Keyframe_Count;
+                *c += 1;
+                return 1;
+            }
+            *h += 1;
+            *c = 0;
+        }
+    }
+    Assert(*h != (Amount - 1));
+    return 0;
+}
+
+static void
+Layer_ToggleAllChannels(project_state *State, memory *Memory, block_layer *Layer,
+                        sorted_comp_array *SortedCompStart, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart,
+                        sorted_property_array *SortedPropertyStart, uint16 *SortedKeyframeArray)
+{
+    bool32 ToggleMode = 1;
+    {
+        sorted_property_array *InfoLocation = SortedPropertyStart + SortedLayerStart->SortedPropertyStart;
+        uint16 *ArrayLocation = SortedKeyframeArray + SortedLayerStart->SortedKeyframeStart;
+        int h = 0, c = 0, p = 0;
+        property_channel *Property = NULL;
+        block_effect *Effect = NULL;
+        while (Layer_LoopChannels(State, Memory, &InfoLocation, &ArrayLocation, Layer, &Property, &Effect, &h, &c, &p))
+        {
+            if (Property->IsToggled) {
+                ToggleMode = 0;
+                break;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+    sorted_property_array *InfoLocation = SortedPropertyStart + SortedLayerStart->SortedPropertyStart;
+    uint16 *ArrayLocation = SortedKeyframeArray + SortedLayerStart->SortedKeyframeStart;
+    int h = 0, c = 0, p = 0;
+    property_channel *Property = NULL;
+    block_effect *Effect = NULL;
+    while (Layer_LoopChannels(State, Memory, &InfoLocation, &ArrayLocation, Layer, &Property, &Effect, &h, &c, &p))
+    {
+        if (Property->Keyframe_Count) {
+            Property->IsToggled = ToggleMode;
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+static void
+Layer_Select_Traverse(uint16 PrincipalCompIndex, memory *Memory, project_state *State, int32 IndexToFind, sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray,
+                      int16 RecursionIdx[MAX_PRECOMP_RECURSIONS], int32 *Recursions)
+{
+    uint16 CompIndex = 0;
+    if (RecursionIdx[*Recursions] == -1) {
+        CompIndex = PrincipalCompIndex;
+    } else {
+        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, RecursionIdx[*Recursions]);
+        CompIndex = Layer->Block_Source_Index;
+    }
+    sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart = Sorted_GetLayerStart(SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, CompIndex);
+    sorted_comp_array SortedCompStart = SortedCompArray[CompIndex];
+    uint32 RecursionsCurrent = *Recursions;
+    for (int i = SortedCompStart.LayerCount - 1; i >= 0; i--)
+    {
+        sorted_layer_array SortEntry = SortedLayerStart[i];
+        uint32 Index_Physical = SortEntry.Block_Layer_Index;
+        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Index_Physical);
+        if (Layer->IsPrecomp && Layer->IsSelected == 2) {
+            *Recursions = RecursionsCurrent + 1;
+            RecursionIdx[*Recursions] = Index_Physical;
+            Layer_Select_Traverse(PrincipalCompIndex, Memory, State, IndexToFind, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray, RecursionIdx, Recursions);
+        } else if (Index_Physical == IndexToFind) {
+            return;
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+static v2
+Layer_TraverseForPoint(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, v2 PrincipalCompUV, sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray)
+{
+    int16 RecursionIdx[MAX_PRECOMP_RECURSIONS] = {};
+    RecursionIdx[0] = -1;
+    int32 Recursions = 0;
+    sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart = Sorted_GetLayerStart(SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, File->PrincipalCompIndex);
+    sorted_comp_array SortedCompStart = SortedCompArray[File->PrincipalCompIndex];
+    block_composition *Comp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, File->PrincipalCompIndex);
+    Layer_Select_Traverse(File->PrincipalCompIndex, Memory, State, State->Brush.LayerToPaint_Index, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray, RecursionIdx, &Recursions);
+    v2 PointUV = {0, 0};
+    int OuterWidth = Comp->Width, OuterHeight = Comp->Height;
+    int InnerWidth = 0, InnerHeight = 0;
+    if (Recursions == 0) {
+        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, State->Brush.LayerToPaint_Index);
+        layer_transforms T = Layer_GetTransforms(Layer);
+        Layer_GetDimensions(Memory, Layer, &InnerWidth, &InnerHeight);
+        PointUV = T_CompUVToLayerUV(T, OuterWidth, OuterHeight, InnerWidth, InnerHeight, PrincipalCompUV);
+    } else {
+        for (int i = 1; i <= Recursions; i++) {
+            block_layer *InnerLayer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, RecursionIdx[i]);
+            layer_transforms T = Layer_GetTransforms(InnerLayer);
+            Layer_GetDimensions(Memory, InnerLayer, &InnerWidth, &InnerHeight);
+            PointUV = T_CompUVToLayerUV(T, OuterWidth, OuterHeight, InnerWidth, InnerHeight, PrincipalCompUV);
+            OuterWidth = InnerWidth;
+            OuterHeight = InnerHeight;
+        }
+    }
+    return PointUV * V2(InnerWidth, InnerHeight);
+}
+
+static int32
+Layer_TestSelection(memory *Memory, project_state *State, ui *UI, sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray, uint16 PrincipalIndex)
+{
+    block_composition *Comp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, PrincipalIndex);
+    sorted_comp_array SortedCompStart = SortedCompArray[PrincipalIndex];
+    sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart = Sorted_GetLayerStart(SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, PrincipalIndex);
+    int SelectionCount = 0;
+    int SelectedLayerIndex = 0;
+    for (int i = SortedCompStart.LayerCount - 1; i >= 0; i--) {
+        sorted_layer_array SortEntry = SortedLayerStart[i];
+        uint32 Index_Physical = SortEntry.Block_Layer_Index;
+        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Index_Physical);
+        block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
+        layer_transforms T = Layer_GetTransforms(Layer);
+        v2 UV = T_CompUVToLayerUV(T, Comp->Width, Comp->Height, Source->Width, Source->Height, State->TempZoomRatio);
+        if (UV.x <= 1.0f && UV.x >= 0.0f && UV.y <= 1.0f && UV.y >= 0.0f && Layer->IsSelected)
+        {
+            SelectionCount++;
+            SelectedLayerIndex = i;
+        }
+    }
+    int32 LayerIndex = -1;
+    for (int i = SortedCompStart.LayerCount - 1; i >= 0; i--) {
+        sorted_layer_array SortEntry = SortedLayerStart[i];
+        uint32 Index_Physical = SortEntry.Block_Layer_Index;
+        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Index_Physical);
+        block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
+        layer_transforms T = Layer_GetTransforms(Layer);
+        v2 UV = T_CompUVToLayerUV(T, Comp->Width, Comp->Height, Source->Width, Source->Height, State->TempZoomRatio);
+        if (UV.x <= 1.0f && UV.x >= 0.0f && UV.y <= 1.0f && UV.y >= 0.0f && !Layer->IsSelected)
+        {
+            if (SelectionCount == 1) {
+                if (i < SelectedLayerIndex) {
+                    LayerIndex = Index_Physical;
+                    break;
+                }
+            } else {
+                LayerIndex = Index_Physical;
+                break;
+            }
+        }
+        // if (Layer->IsPrecomp) {
+        //     Layer_RecursiveDeselect(Memory, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray, TargetIndex, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
+        // }
+        // if (Layer->Block_Composition_Index != TargetIndex) {
+        //     Layer->IsSelected = false;
+        // }
+    }
+    return LayerIndex;
+}
+
+static void
+Layer_RecursiveDeselect(memory *Memory, sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray, uint16 TargetIndex, uint16 PrincipalIndex)
+{
+    block_composition *Comp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, PrincipalIndex);
+    sorted_comp_array SortedCompStart = SortedCompArray[PrincipalIndex];
+    sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart = Sorted_GetLayerStart(SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, PrincipalIndex);
+    for (int i = 0; i < SortedCompStart.LayerCount; i++) {
+        sorted_layer_array SortEntry = SortedLayerStart[i];
+        uint32 Index_Physical = SortEntry.Block_Layer_Index;
+        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Index_Physical);
+        if (Layer->IsPrecomp) {
+            Layer_RecursiveDeselect(Memory, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray, TargetIndex, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
+        }
+        if (Layer->Block_Composition_Index != TargetIndex) {
+            Layer->IsSelected = false;
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/main.cpp b/src/main.cpp
index de14019..a3b3724 100644
--- a/main.cpp
+++ b/src/main.cpp
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-#include <glad/glad.h>
+#include <glad.h>
 
 #include <stdio.h>
 #if WINDOWS
@@ -15,9 +15,9 @@
 #include <smmintrin.h>
 #endif
 
-#include "imgui/imgui.h"
-#include "imgui/backends/imgui_impl_sdl.h"
-#include "imgui/backends/imgui_impl_opengl3.h"
+#include "imgui.h"
+#include "imgui_impl_sdl.h"
+#include "imgui_impl_opengl3.h"
 #include <SDL.h>
 #if defined(IMGUI_IMPL_OPENGL_ES2)
 #include <SDL_opengles2.h>
@@ -27,21 +27,26 @@
 
 #define STB_IMAGE_IMPLEMENTATION
 #define STBI_FAILURE_USERMSG
-#include "lib/stb_image.h"
+#include "stb_image.h"
 
 #define STB_IMAGE_WRITE_IMPLEMENTATION
-#include "lib/stb_image_write.h"
+#include "stb_image_write.h"
 
 // TODO(fox): Used for thumbnails. The renderer could be expanded to do this
 // much more efficiently.
 #define STB_IMAGE_RESIZE_IMPLEMENTATION
-#include "lib/stb_image_resize.h"
+#include "stb_image_resize.h"
 
 extern "C" {
-#include "lib/miniz.h"
-#include "lib/miniz.c"
+#include <libavcodec/avcodec.h>
+#include <libavformat/avformat.h>
+#include <libavformat/avio.h>
+#include <libavutil/avutil.h>
+#include <libswscale/swscale.h>
+#include <libswresample/swresample.h>
 }
 
+
 #include "defines.h"
 #include "my_math.h"
 #include "structs.h"
@@ -50,10 +55,11 @@ extern "C" {
 #endif
 #include "memory.h"
 #include "main.h"
+#include "ffmpeg_backend.h"
 
+#include "layer.h"
 #include "debug.h"
 #include "functions.h"
-// #include "sharebuffer.h"
 
 SDL_Thread *Thread[8];
 SDL_sem *Semaphore;
@@ -71,21 +77,23 @@ static uint32 RandomGlobalIncrement = 0;
 uint32 BitmapFill = 0x00000001;
 
 #if STABLE
-#include "lib/base64.c"
+#include "base64.c"
 #include <curl/curl.h>
 #endif
 
 #include "memory.cpp"
 #include "undo.cpp"
 #include "io.cpp"
+#include "sorted.cpp"
+#include "layer.cpp"
 #include "strings.cpp"
 #include "threading.cpp"
 #include "createcalls.cpp"
 #if STABLE
 #include "stable_diffusion.cpp"
 #endif
-// #include "ffmpeg_backend.cpp"
-#include "my_imgui_widgets.cpp"
+#include "ffmpeg_backend.cpp"
+#include "imgui_ui.cpp"
 #include "prenderer.cpp"
 #include "gl_calls.cpp"
 #include "bezier.cpp"
@@ -154,9 +162,9 @@ Main_InputTest(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, sorted_
 #endif
 
     ImGui_Viewport(File, State, UI, Memory, io, textureID, Sorted.CompArray, Sorted.LayerArray, Sorted.PropertyArray);
-    ImGui_Timeline(File, State, Memory, UI, io, Sorted.CompArray, Sorted.LayerArray, Sorted.PropertyInfo, Sorted.PropertyArray);
+    ImGui_Timeline(File, State, Memory, UI, io, Sorted.CompArray, Sorted.LayerArray, Sorted.PropertyStart, Sorted.PropertyArray);
     ImGui_File(File, State, Memory, io, Sorted.CompArray, Sorted.LayerArray);
-    ImGui_PropertiesPanel(File, State, UI, Memory, io, Sorted.CompArray, Sorted.LayerArray, Sorted.PropertyInfo, Sorted.PropertyArray);
+    ImGui_PropertiesPanel(File, State, UI, Memory, io, Sorted.CompArray, Sorted.LayerArray, Sorted.PropertyStart, Sorted.PropertyArray);
     ImGui_ColorPanel(File, State, UI, Memory, io);
     ImGui_EffectsPanel(File, State, Memory, UI, io);
 #if STABLE
@@ -173,6 +181,11 @@ Main_InputTest(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, sorted_
 #endif
 
     ImGui::EndFrame();
+
+    if (Memory->PurgeCache) {
+        Memory_Cache_Purge(File, State, Memory);
+        Memory->PurgeCache = false;
+    }
 }
 
 static void
@@ -191,7 +204,7 @@ Render_Main(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, sorted_fil
 
 static void
 Layer_UpdateAllKeyframes(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, block_layer *Layer, uint16 Index_Physical,
-                         sorted_property_info *SortedProperty, uint16 *SortedKeyframe, uint16 Frame_Current)
+                         sorted_property_array *SortedProperty, uint16 *SortedKeyframe, uint16 Frame_Current)
 {
     int32 Offset = (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_move) ? (int32)State->Interact_Offset[0] : 0;
     int h = 0, c = 0, p = 0;
@@ -205,10 +218,10 @@ Layer_UpdateAllKeyframes(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memor
             real32 Y_Increment = 1 / (MaxY - MinY);
             v2 FirstPointPos[3];
             bezier_point *FirstPointAddress = Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, SortedKeyframe[0]);
-            Bezier_EvaluateValue(State, FirstPointAddress, FirstPointPos);
+            Bezier_Interact_Evaluate(State, FirstPointAddress, FirstPointPos);
             v2 LastPointPos[3];
             bezier_point *LastPointAddress =  Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, SortedKeyframe[Property->Keyframe_Count - 1]);
-            Bezier_EvaluateValue(State, LastPointAddress, LastPointPos);
+            Bezier_Interact_Evaluate(State, LastPointAddress, LastPointPos);
             if (FirstPointPos[0].x >= Frame_Current) {
                 Property->CurrentValue = FirstPointPos[0].y;
             } else if (LastPointPos[0].x <= Frame_Current) {
@@ -218,17 +231,17 @@ Layer_UpdateAllKeyframes(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memor
                 for (;;) {
                     v2 PointPos[3];
                     bezier_point *PointAddress = Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, SortedKeyframe[KeyframeIndex + 1]);
-                    Bezier_EvaluateValue(State, PointAddress, PointPos, 1, Y_Increment);
+                    Bezier_Interact_Evaluate(State, PointAddress, PointPos, 1, Y_Increment);
                     if (PointPos[0].x >= Frame_Current)
                         break;
                     KeyframeIndex++;
                 }
                 v2 PointPos[3];
                 bezier_point *PointAddress = Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, SortedKeyframe[KeyframeIndex]);
-                Bezier_EvaluateValue(State, PointAddress, PointPos, 1, Y_Increment);
+                Bezier_Interact_Evaluate(State, PointAddress, PointPos, 1, Y_Increment);
                 v2 NextPointPos[3];
                 bezier_point *NextPointAddress = Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, SortedKeyframe[KeyframeIndex + 1]);
-                Bezier_EvaluateValue(State, NextPointAddress, NextPointPos, 1, Y_Increment);
+                Bezier_Interact_Evaluate(State, NextPointAddress, NextPointPos, 1, Y_Increment);
                 if (PointAddress->Type == interpolation_type_hold) {
                     Property->CurrentValue = PointPos[0].y;
                 } else if (PointAddress->Type == interpolation_type_linear && NextPointAddress->Type == interpolation_type_linear) {
@@ -242,35 +255,56 @@ Layer_UpdateAllKeyframes(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memor
     }
 }
 
+static av_info *
+AV_Retrieve(project_state *State, memory *Memory, uint32 SourceIndex)
+{
+    av_info *AV = NULL;
+    int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
+    while (Block_Loop(Memory, P_AVInfo, State->AVCount, &h, &c, &i)) {
+        av_info *TestAV = (av_info *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, P_AVInfo, i);
+        if (TestAV->Block_Source_Index == SourceIndex) {
+            AV = TestAV;
+            break;
+        }
+    }
+    return AV;
+}
+
+static void
+File_RetrieveBitmap(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, block_source *Source, int32 FrameToSeek, void *Bitmap, uint32 LayerIndex)
+{
+}
+
 static void *
 Render_Comp(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, sorted_file Sorted, ui *UI, SDL_Window *window, GLuint textureID, ImGuiIO io,
-            sorted_comp_info *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer *SortedLayerArray,
-            sorted_property_info *SortedPropertyInfo, uint16 *SortedPropertyArray, uint32 CompIndex, int32 Frame_Current)
+            sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray,
+            sorted_property_array *SortedPropertyStart, uint16 *SortedKeyframeArray, uint32 CompIndex, int32 Frame_Current)
 {
     block_composition *Comp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, CompIndex);
     cache_entry *Entry_Main = Memory_Cache_Search(State, Memory, cache_entry_type_comp, CompIndex, Frame_Current);
     void *CompBuffer = Memory_Block_Bitmap_AddressAtIndex(Memory, Entry_Main->Block_StartIndex);
     uint64 Size = Comp->Width * Comp->Height * Comp->BytesPerPixel;
-    Arbitrary_Zero((uint8 *)CompBuffer, Size);
 
-    // if (Entry_Main->IsCached)
-    //     return CompBuffer;
+    if (Entry_Main->IsCached)
+        return CompBuffer;
+
+    Arbitrary_Zero((uint8 *)CompBuffer, Size);
 
     uint64 Comp_TimeStart = GetCPUTime();
 
-    sorted_comp_info *SortedCompInfo = &SortedCompArray[CompIndex];
-    sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo = Layer_GetSortedArray(SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, CompIndex);
+    sorted_comp_array *SortedCompStart = &SortedCompArray[CompIndex];
+    sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart = Sorted_GetLayerStart(SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, CompIndex);
 
-    for (int i = 0; i < SortedCompInfo->LayerCount; i++) {
-        sorted_layer SortEntry = SortedLayerInfo[i];
+    for (int i = 0; i < SortedCompStart->LayerCount; i++) {
+        sorted_layer_array SortEntry = SortedLayerStart[i];
         uint32 Index_Physical = SortEntry.Block_Layer_Index;
         block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Index_Physical);
         if (Layer->Frame_Start <= Frame_Current &&
             Layer->Frame_End   >  Frame_Current && Layer->IsVisible)
         {
             if (State->UpdateKeyframes) {
-                sorted_property_info *SortedLayerProperties = SortedPropertyInfo + SortedLayerInfo->SortedPropertyStart;
-                uint16 *SortedLayerKeyframes = SortedPropertyArray + SortedLayerInfo->SortedKeyframeStart;
+                sorted_property_array *SortedLayerProperties = SortedPropertyStart + SortEntry.SortedPropertyStart;
+                uint16 *SortedLayerKeyframes = SortedKeyframeArray + SortEntry.SortedKeyframeStart;
                 Layer_UpdateAllKeyframes(File, State, Memory, Layer, Index_Physical, SortedLayerProperties, SortedLayerKeyframes, Frame_Current);
             }
 
@@ -280,15 +314,39 @@ Render_Comp(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, sorted_fil
             int Width = 0, Height = 0, BytesPerPixel = 0;
 
             if (!Layer->IsPrecomp) {
-                block_source *Source = NULL;
-                if ((State->PreviewSource != -1) && Layer->IsSelected) {
-                    Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, State->PreviewSource);
-                } else {
-                    Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
+                block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
+                av_info *AV = NULL;
+                if (Source->Type == source_type_file) {
+                    AV = AV_Retrieve(State, Memory, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
+                    if (!AV) {
+                        AV = (av_info *)Memory_Block_AllocateAddress(Memory, P_AVInfo);
+                        AV->Occupied = 1;
+                        AV->Block_Source_Index = Layer->Block_Source_Index;
+                        AV_Init(Source, AV, Memory);
+                        State->AVCount++;
+                    }
                 }
+                if (Source->HasAudio && !Source->HasVideo) {
+                    Assert(Source->Type == source_type_file);
+                    if (State->AudioLayerIndex == -1)
+                        State->AudioLayerIndex = Index_Physical;
+                    continue;
+                }
+                // if ((State->PreviewSource != -1) && Layer->IsSelected) {
+                //     Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, State->PreviewSource);
+                // } else {
+                // }
                 if (Source->Type == source_type_principal || Source->Type == source_type_principal_temp) {
                     BitmapAddress = Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_PrincipalBitmaps, Source->Bitmap_Index, 0);
                 } else {
+                    cache_entry *CacheEntry = Memory_Cache_Search(State, Memory, cache_entry_type_source, Layer->Block_Source_Index, State->Frame_Current);
+                    BitmapAddress = Memory_Block_Bitmap_AddressAtIndex(Memory, CacheEntry->Block_StartIndex);
+                    if (!CacheEntry->IsCached) {
+                        int FrameToSeek = State->Frame_Current - Layer->Frame_Start;
+                        AV_LoadVideoFrame(Memory, Source, AV, FrameToSeek, BitmapAddress);
+                        CacheEntry->IsCached = true;
+                    }
+                    /*
                     cache_entry *Entry = Memory_Cache_Search(State, Memory, cache_entry_type_source, Layer->Block_Source_Index, 0);
                     if (!Entry->IsCached) {
                         uint64 Src_TimeStart = GetCPUTime();
@@ -301,6 +359,7 @@ Render_Comp(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, sorted_fil
                         uint64 Size = Source->Width * Source->Height * Source->BytesPerPixel;
                         void *Source_Address = Memory_Block_Bitmap_AddressAtIndex(Memory, Entry->Block_StartIndex);
                         Memory_Copy((uint8 *)Source_Address, (uint8 *)temp, Size);
+                        Bitmap_SRGBToLinear(Source_Address, Source->Width, Source->Height, Source->BytesPerPixel, 1);
                         stbi_image_free(temp);
                         BitmapState->ToUpdate = false;
                         BitmapState->CurrentFrame = 0;
@@ -310,6 +369,7 @@ Render_Comp(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, sorted_fil
                         Entry->IsCached = true;
                     }
                     BitmapAddress = Memory_Block_Bitmap_AddressAtIndex(Memory, Entry->Block_StartIndex);
+                    */
                 }
                 Width = Source->Width;
                 Height = Source->Height;
@@ -317,7 +377,7 @@ Render_Comp(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, sorted_fil
             } else {
                 block_composition *Precomp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, Layer->Block_Source_Index);
                 BitmapAddress = Render_Comp(File, State, Memory, Sorted, UI, window, textureID, io, SortedCompArray, SortedLayerArray,
-                                            SortedPropertyInfo, SortedPropertyArray, Layer->Block_Source_Index, (int32)Layer->time.CurrentValue);
+                                            SortedPropertyStart, SortedKeyframeArray, Layer->Block_Source_Index, (int32)Layer->time.CurrentValue);
                 Width = Precomp->Width;
                 Height = Precomp->Height;
                 BytesPerPixel = Precomp->BytesPerPixel;
@@ -336,12 +396,13 @@ Render_Comp(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, sorted_fil
                                      Bitmap_ByteInfo(BytesPerPixel), UI->Color.a, blend_normal,
                                      RenderRegion, State->Brush.TransientBitmap, 0, 0};
                 Render_Main(File, State, Memory, Sorted, UI, window, textureID, (void *)&Info, RenderAddress, render_type_notransform, State->Brush.CacheBounds);
-            } else if (Layer->Block_Effect_Count || Layer->Block_Mask_Count) {
+            }
+            if (Layer->Block_Effect_Count || Layer->Block_Mask_Count) {
                 Layer_UpdateMasksEffects(State, Layer, Memory, RenderAddress, Width, Height, BytesPerPixel);
             }
 
-            Assert(Width);
-            Assert(Height);
+            Assert(Width && Width <= 2048);
+            Assert(Height && Height <= 2048);
             transform_info T = Transform_Calculate(State, Memory, File, Layer, Comp, Width, Height, BytesPerPixel);
             T.SourceBuffer = RenderAddress;
             rectangle RenderRegion = {0, 0, Comp->Width, Comp->Height};
@@ -352,6 +413,10 @@ Render_Comp(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, sorted_fil
     }
     Entry_Main->CycleTime = GetCPUTime() - Comp_TimeStart;
     Entry_Main->IsCached = true;
+
+    if (CompIndex == File->PrincipalCompIndex)
+        State->CachedFrameCount++;
+
     return CompBuffer;
 }
 
@@ -400,13 +465,12 @@ static void
 Main_Renderer(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, sorted_file Sorted, ui *UI, SDL_Window *window, GLuint textureID, ImGuiIO io)
 {
     State->UpdateFrame = false;
-    State->UpdateKeyframes = false;
 
     block_composition *MainComp = (block_composition *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Precomps, File->PrincipalCompIndex);
 
     void *MainCompBuffer = Render_Comp(File, State, Memory, Sorted, UI, window, textureID, io, Sorted.CompArray, Sorted.LayerArray,
-                                      Sorted.PropertyInfo, Sorted.PropertyArray, File->PrincipalCompIndex, State->Frame_Current);
-    Bitmap_SRGBToLinear(MainCompBuffer, MainComp->Width, MainComp->Height, MainComp->BytesPerPixel, 0);
+                                      Sorted.PropertyStart, Sorted.PropertyArray, File->PrincipalCompIndex, State->Frame_Current);
+    // Bitmap_SRGBToLinear(MainCompBuffer, MainComp->Width, MainComp->Height, MainComp->BytesPerPixel, 0);
     glBindTexture(GL_TEXTURE_2D, textureID);
 
     int ByteFlag2 = (MainComp->BytesPerPixel == 4) ? GL_UNSIGNED_BYTE : GL_UNSIGNED_SHORT;
@@ -417,8 +481,12 @@ Main_Renderer(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, sorted_f
     glTexSubImage2D(GL_TEXTURE_2D, 0, 0, 0, MainComp->Width, MainComp->Height, GL_RGBA, ByteFlag2, MainCompBuffer);
 
     // TODO(fox): garbage collect AV state!
+
+    State->UpdateKeyframes = false;
+
 }
 
+
 int main(int argc, char *argv[]) {
 
     global_memory GlobalMemory = {};
@@ -442,7 +510,7 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) {
 
     memory Memory = {};
 
-    Memory_InitTable(&GlobalMemory, &Memory, 1 * 1024 * 1024, P_AVInfo, "Image/video headers");
+    Memory_InitTable(&GlobalMemory, &Memory, 1 * 1024 * 1024, P_AVInfo, "FFmpeg state", sizeof(av_info));
     Memory_InitTable(&GlobalMemory, &Memory, 10 * 1024 * 1024, P_UndoBuffer, "Undo buffer");
     Memory_InitTable(&GlobalMemory, &Memory, 40 * 1024 * 1024, P_MiscCache, "Misc persistent");
 
@@ -458,7 +526,8 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) {
 
     Memory_InitTable(&GlobalMemory, &Memory, (uint64)5 * 1024 * 1024, B_Thumbnails, "Thumbnails");
     Memory_InitTable(&GlobalMemory, &Memory, (uint64)64 * 1024 * 1024, B_ScratchSpace, "Scratch");
-    Memory_InitTable(&GlobalMemory, &Memory, (uint64)200 * 1024 * 1024, B_CachedBitmaps, "Cached bitmap buffer");
+    // Memory_InitTable(&GlobalMemory, &Memory, (uint64)1 * 1024 * 1024, B_CacheEntries, "Cache entries", sizeof(cache_entry));
+    Memory_InitTable(&GlobalMemory, &Memory, (uint64)700 * 1024 * 1024, B_CachedBitmaps, "Cached bitmap buffer");
 
 
 #if ARM
@@ -472,6 +541,9 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) {
     }
 #endif
 
+    int SamplesPerSecond = 48000;
+    int BytesPerSample = sizeof(int16) * 2;
+
     project_state State_ = {};
     project_state *State = &State_;
     project_data *File = (project_data *)Memory_Block_AllocateAddress(&Memory, F_File);
@@ -491,6 +563,9 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) {
     State->Dump1 = (void *)((uint8 *)Memory.Slot[B_ScratchSpace].Address + Memory.ScratchPos);
     Memory.ScratchPos += ScratchPaintSize;
     State->Dump2 = (void *)((uint8 *)Memory.Slot[B_ScratchSpace].Address + Memory.ScratchPos);
+    uint32 AudioBufferSize = 48000 * sizeof(uint16) * 60;
+    void *AudioData = (void *)((uint8 *)Memory.Slot[B_ScratchSpace].Address + Memory.ScratchPos);
+    Memory.ScratchPos += AudioBufferSize;
 
     State->ClipboardBuffer = (void *)((uint8 *)Memory.Slot[B_ScratchSpace].Address + Memory.ScratchPos);
     State->ClipboardSize = 1024*1024;
@@ -502,16 +577,30 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) {
 
     MainComp->Width = 1280;
     MainComp->Height = 720;
-    MainComp->FPS = 24;
+    MainComp->FPS = 60;
     MainComp->BytesPerPixel = 4;
-    MainComp->Frame_Count = 48;
-    MainComp->Frame_End = 48;
+    MainComp->Frame_Count = 80;
+    MainComp->Frame_End = 80;
     MainComp->Occupied = 1;
     MainComp->Name_String_Index = String_AddToFile(&Memory, "Main comp");
 
     File->Comp_Count = 1;
 
-    SDL_Init(SDL_INIT_VIDEO);
+    SDL_Init(SDL_INIT_VIDEO | SDL_INIT_AUDIO);
+
+    SDL_AudioSpec Audio = {0};
+
+    //AUDIO
+    Audio.freq = 48000;
+    Audio.format = AUDIO_S16LSB;
+    Audio.channels = 2;
+    Audio.samples = SamplesPerSecond * BytesPerSample / 60;
+
+    SDL_OpenAudio(&Audio, 0);
+
+    Assert(Audio.format == AUDIO_S16LSB);
+
+    SDL_PauseAudio(1);
 
     Semaphore = SDL_CreateSemaphore(0);
 
@@ -600,8 +689,8 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) {
     // I'm loading the window positions from this convenient tool. ImGui by
     // default saves window position to an external .ini file, which can be
     // loaded from disk or memory.
-    io.IniFilename = NULL;
-    ImGui::LoadIniSettingsFromMemory(ImGuiPrefs);
+    // io.IniFilename = NULL;
+    // ImGui::LoadIniSettingsFromMemory(ImGuiPrefs);
     // ImGui::SaveIniSettingsToDisk("imgui.ini");
 
     ImGui::StyleColorsDark();
@@ -635,11 +724,18 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) {
     File_Open(File, State, &Memory, State->DummyName);
     State->UpdateFrame = true;
     State->MostRecentlySelectedLayer = 0;
+    uint16 SourceIndex = Source_Generate(File, State, &Memory, (void *)"../asset/24.mp4");
+    block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(&Memory, F_Sources, SourceIndex);
+    Source->IsSelected = true;
+    Source_UICreateButton(File, State, &Memory);
 #endif
 #endif
 
     while (State->IsRunning)
     {
+        uint64 PerfFrequency = SDL_GetPerformanceFrequency();
+        uint64 PerfStart = SDL_GetPerformanceCounter();
+
 #if STABLE
         if (State->CurlActive) {
             Curl_Main(File, State, &Memory, &MainHandle, &ProgHandle);
@@ -654,6 +750,17 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) {
                 {
                     Assert(0);
                 } break;
+                // case hotkey_effect_indexup:
+                // {
+                //     History_Entry_Commit(Memory, "Swap effect order");
+                //     History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_Effects, sizeof(Effect->Index), &Effect->Index);
+                //     Effect->Index += 1;
+                //     uint16 NextEffectIdx = Layer->Block_Effect_Index[h - AmountOf(Layer->Property) + 1];
+                //     block_effect *NextEffect = (block_effect *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Effects, NextEffectIdx, 0);
+                //     History_Action_Swap(Memory, F_Effects, sizeof(NextEffect->Index), &NextEffect->Index);
+                //     NextEffect->Index -= 1;
+                //     History_Entry_End(Memory);
+                // } break;
                 case hotkey_newpaintlayer:
                 {
                     Project_PaintLayer_New(File, State, &Memory);
@@ -670,11 +777,13 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) {
                 case hotkey_undo:
                 {
                     History_Undo(&Memory);
+                    Memory_Cache_Purge(File, State, &Memory);
                     State->UpdateFrame = true;
                 } break;
                 case hotkey_redo:
                 {
                     History_Redo(&Memory);
+                    Memory_Cache_Purge(File, State, &Memory);
                     State->UpdateFrame = true;
                 } break;
                 default:
@@ -696,13 +805,59 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) {
             State->UpdateKeyframes = true;
         }
 
+        if ((State->AudioLayerIndex != -1) &&
+           (State->CachedFrameCount == (MainComp->Frame_End - MainComp->Frame_Start)))
+        {
+            block_layer *AudioLayer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(&Memory, F_Layers, State->AudioLayerIndex);
+            // block_source *AudioSource = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(&Memory, F_Sources, SourceIndex);
+            av_info *AV = AV_Retrieve(State, &Memory, AudioLayer->Block_Source_Index);
+            int32 LayerPos = AudioLayer->Frame_Start;
+
+            if (State->Frame_Current >= LayerPos) {
+                if (State->Frame_Current == LayerPos) {
+                    SDL_ClearQueuedAudio(1);
+                    AV_SeekAudio(AV, 60, 0);
+                }
+                if (State->HotFramePerf == 1) {
+                    SDL_ClearQueuedAudio(1);
+                    int32 FrameToSeek = State->Frame_Current - LayerPos;
+                    if (FrameToSeek > -1)
+                        AV_SeekAudio(AV, 60, FrameToSeek);
+                }
+
+                uint32 QueuedAudioSize = SDL_GetQueuedAudioSize(1);
+                int TargetAudioSize = SamplesPerSecond * BytesPerSample / 2;
+                if (QueuedAudioSize < (TargetAudioSize / 2))
+                {
+                    int BytesToWrite = TargetAudioSize - QueuedAudioSize;
+                    printf("%i bytes in queue.\n", QueuedAudioSize);
+                    int BytePlayhead = 0;
+                    while (BytePlayhead < BytesToWrite) {
+                        uint8 *Data = (uint8 *)AudioData + BytePlayhead;
+                        int SampleCount = AV_AudioTest(AV, Data, AudioBufferSize - BytePlayhead);
+                        int Size = SampleCount * BytesPerSample;
+                        BytePlayhead += Size;
+                    }
+                    SDL_QueueAudio(1, AudioData, BytePlayhead);
+                    printf("Queued %i bytes.\n", BytePlayhead);
+                }
+            } else if (SDL_GetQueuedAudioSize(1)) {
+                SDL_ClearQueuedAudio(1);
+            }
+        }
+
         if (State->UpdateFrame) {
+            // Default queue item type simply calls the renderer on the current
+            // frame, so no additional info is needed
             State->Queue.CurrentIdx++;
         }
         for (int i = 0; i < State->Queue.CurrentIdx; i++) {
             render_queue_item Item = State->Queue.Item[i];
             State->Queue.Playhead = i;
             if (Item.Type == 0) {
+                if (State->Interact_Active) {
+                    Memory_Cache_Purge(File, State, &Memory, State->Frame_Current);
+                }
                 Main_Renderer(File, State, &Memory, Sorted, &File->UI, window, textureID, io);
             } else if (Item.Type == 1) {
                 Assert(State->Interact_Active == interact_type_brush);
@@ -722,16 +877,30 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) {
 
         Assert(Debug.ScratchState == 0);
 
-#if DEBUG
-        if (Debug.ReloadUI) {
+        if (State->IsPlaying && State->HotFramePerf > 1) {
+            uint64 RenderTime = SDL_GetPerformanceCounter() - State->HotFramePerf;
+            real64 FrameMS = (1000.0f * (real64)RenderTime) / (real64)PerfFrequency;
+            real64 TargetMS = (1000.0f / MainComp->FPS);
+            if (TargetMS > FrameMS)
+                SDL_Delay((uint64)(TargetMS - FrameMS));
+            Main_RenderUI(io, clear_color, window);
+            State->HotFramePerf = 1;
+        } else {
             Main_RenderUI(io, clear_color, window);
         }
-#else
-        Main_RenderUI(io, clear_color, window);
-#endif
+
+        if (State->HotFramePerf == 1) {
+            State->HotFramePerf = SDL_GetPerformanceCounter();
+        }
 
         if (State->Initializing)
             State->Initializing--;
+
+        uint64 PerfEnd = SDL_GetPerformanceCounter();
+        uint64 PerfTime = PerfEnd - PerfStart;
+        real64 FrameMS = (1000.0f * (real64)PerfTime) / (real64)PerfFrequency;
+        real64 FPS = PerfFrequency / PerfTime;
+        // printf("%.02f ms/f, %.02f frames\n", FrameMS, FPS);
     }
 
     for (int i = 0; i < 7; i++) {
diff --git a/memory.cpp b/src/memory.cpp
index 901fbab..05254cb 100644
--- a/memory.cpp
+++ b/src/memory.cpp
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Block_Loop(memory *Memory, property_channel *Property, uint32 TotalCount, int *H
             *HasIncremented = 0;
             (*Index)++;
         }
-        uint8 *Occupied = (uint8 *)Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, *Index);
+        uint8 *Occupied = (uint8 *)Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, *Index, 0);
         if (*Occupied) {
             *HasIncremented = 1;
             (*CurrentCount)++;
@@ -158,10 +158,6 @@ Memory_Block_Bitmap_AllocateNew(project_state *State, memory *Memory, cache_entr
             uint64 Size = Source.Width * Source.Height * Source.BytesPerPixel;
             LastEntry_BlockCount = (Size / BitmapBlockSize) + 1;
         } break;
-        case cache_entry_type_layer:
-        {
-            Assert(0);
-        } break;
         case cache_entry_type_assert:
         {
             Assert(0);
@@ -182,6 +178,22 @@ Memory_Block_Bitmap_AllocateNew(project_state *State, memory *Memory, cache_entr
     */
 
 }
+static void
+Memory_Cache_Purge(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, int32 SingleFrame = -1)
+{
+    cache_entry *EntryArray = State->Render.Entry;
+    int c = 0;
+    int count = Memory->EntryCount;
+    while (count != 0) {
+        bool32 ExtraCheck = (SingleFrame == -1) ? 1 : EntryArray[c].TypeInfo == SingleFrame;
+        if (EntryArray[c].Type == cache_entry_type_comp &&
+            EntryArray[c].TypeInfo == File->PrincipalCompIndex && SingleFrame) {
+            EntryArray[c].IsCached = 0;
+        }
+        c++;
+        count--;
+    }
+}
 
 static cache_entry *
 Memory_Cache_Search(project_state *State, memory *Memory, cache_entry_type Type, uint32 TypeInfo, uint32 TypeInfo_Sub)
@@ -190,17 +202,10 @@ Memory_Cache_Search(project_state *State, memory *Memory, cache_entry_type Type,
     int c = 0;
     int count = Memory->EntryCount;
     while (count != 0) {
-        if (Type == cache_entry_type_comp) {
-            if (EntryArray[c].Type == Type &&
-                EntryArray[c].TypeInfo == TypeInfo) {
-                return &EntryArray[c];
-            }
-        } else {
-            if (EntryArray[c].Type == Type &&
-                EntryArray[c].TypeInfo == TypeInfo &&
-                EntryArray[c].TypeInfo_Sub == TypeInfo_Sub) {
-                return &EntryArray[c];
-            }
+        if (EntryArray[c].Type == Type &&
+            EntryArray[c].TypeInfo == TypeInfo &&
+            EntryArray[c].TypeInfo_Sub == TypeInfo_Sub) {
+            return &EntryArray[c];
         }
         c++;
         count--;
@@ -307,6 +312,11 @@ Arbitrary_ShiftData(uint8 *Address_Start, uint8 *Address_End, uint64 ShiftAmount
     }
 }
 
+// TODO(fox): Just use zlib...
+extern "C" {
+#include "miniz.c"
+}
+
 static uint64
 Data_Compress(memory *Memory, void *DataSource, uint64 DataSize, void *DataBuffer, uint64 DataBufferSize, int CompressionLevel)
 {
diff --git a/paint.cpp b/src/paint.cpp
index f3170e5..f3170e5 100644
--- a/paint.cpp
+++ b/src/paint.cpp
diff --git a/prenderer.cpp b/src/prenderer.cpp
index 0940d16..54b19cf 100644
--- a/prenderer.cpp
+++ b/src/prenderer.cpp
@@ -104,14 +104,14 @@ Transform_IterateOuterBounds(block_layer *Layer, uint32 Width, uint32 Height, re
 }
 static void
 Transform_Recurse(project_state *State, memory *Memory, block_composition *MainComp, uint32 CompIndex, block_layer *ParentLayer[4], uint32 Recursions,
-                      sorted_comp_info *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer *SortedLayerArray,
+                      sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray,
                       real32 *MinX, real32 *MinY, real32 *MaxX, real32 *MaxY)
 {
-    sorted_comp_info *SortedCompInfo = &SortedCompArray[CompIndex];
-    sorted_layer *SortedLayerInfo = Layer_GetSortedArray(SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, CompIndex);
-    for (int i = 0; i < SortedCompInfo->LayerCount; i++)
+    sorted_comp_array *SortedCompStart = &SortedCompArray[CompIndex];
+    sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart = Sorted_GetLayerStart(SortedLayerArray, SortedCompArray, CompIndex);
+    for (int i = 0; i < SortedCompStart->LayerCount; i++)
     {
-        sorted_layer SortEntry = SortedLayerInfo[i];
+        sorted_layer_array SortEntry = SortedLayerStart[i];
         uint32 Index_Physical = SortEntry.Block_Layer_Index;
         block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, Index_Physical);
         if (Layer->IsPrecomp) {
@@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ Transform_Recurse(project_state *State, memory *Memory, block_composition *MainC
 // until this action is exited/committed!
 static void
 Interact_Transform_Begin(project_data *File, memory *Memory, project_state *State, ImVec2 OGPos,
-                         sorted_comp_info *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer *SortedLayerArray)
+                         sorted_comp_array *SortedCompArray, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerArray)
 {
     real32 MinX =  100000;
     real32 MinY =  100000;
diff --git a/src/sorted.cpp b/src/sorted.cpp
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..394c82f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/src/sorted.cpp
@@ -0,0 +1,336 @@
+
+inline sorted_property_array *
+Property_GetSortedInfo(sorted_property_array *SortedPropertyStart, int i, int h)
+{
+    Assert(0);
+    return SortedPropertyStart + (i * 8) + h;
+}
+inline uint16 *
+Property_GetSortedArray(uint16 *SortedKeyframeArray, int i, int h)
+{
+    Assert(0);
+    return SortedKeyframeArray + (i * 8 * MAX_KEYFRAMES_PER_BLOCK) + (h * MAX_KEYFRAMES_PER_BLOCK);
+}
+
+static sorted_layer_array *
+Sorted_GetLayerStart(sorted_layer_array *LayerArrayStart, sorted_comp_array *SortedCompStart, uint32 TargetComp)
+{
+    uint32 LayerOffset = 0; int s = 0;
+    while (s < TargetComp) {
+        LayerOffset += SortedCompStart[s].LayerCount;
+        s++;
+    }
+    return LayerArrayStart + LayerOffset;
+}
+
+// The sorting algorithm is straightforward: read every point, evaluate it if
+// it's currently being interacted with by the user, record index in a sorted
+// list, and repeat, shiftig the list as necessary.
+
+void Property_SortAll(memory *Memory, project_state *State, property_channel *Property, sorted_property_array *PropertyStart, uint16 *PropertyArrayStart)
+{
+    int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
+    uint32 CurrentSortIndex = 0;
+    real32 MinY = 1000000;
+    real32 MaxY = -1000000;
+    int32 Offset = (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_keyframe_move) ? (int32)State->Interact_Offset[0] : 0;
+    while (Block_Loop(Memory, Property, Property->Keyframe_Count, &h, &c, &i)) {
+        v2 PointPos[3];
+        bezier_point *PointAddress = Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, i);
+
+        Bezier_Interact_Evaluate(State, PointAddress, PointPos);
+
+        if (MinY > PointAddress->Pos[0].y) {
+            MinY = PointAddress->Pos[0].y;
+            PropertyStart->MinYIndex = i;
+        }
+        if (MaxY < PointAddress->Pos[0].y) {
+            MaxY = PointAddress->Pos[0].y;
+            PropertyStart->MaxYIndex = i;
+        }
+
+        uint32 SortedIndex_Playhead = 0;
+        while (SortedIndex_Playhead < CurrentSortIndex) {
+            uint16 TestPointEntry = PropertyArrayStart[SortedIndex_Playhead];
+            v2 TestPointPos[3];
+            bezier_point *TestPointAddress = Bezier_LookupAddress(Memory, Property, TestPointEntry);
+            Bezier_Interact_Evaluate(State, TestPointAddress, TestPointPos);
+            if (PointPos[0].x < TestPointPos[0].x ) {
+                break;
+            } else {
+                SortedIndex_Playhead++;
+            }
+        }
+        if (SortedIndex_Playhead != CurrentSortIndex) {
+            uint8 *Address_Start = (uint8 *)(PropertyArrayStart + SortedIndex_Playhead);
+            uint8 *Address_End = (uint8 *)(PropertyArrayStart + CurrentSortIndex) - 1;
+            Assert(CurrentSortIndex != Property->Keyframe_Count);
+            Arbitrary_ShiftData(Address_Start, Address_End, sizeof(uint16), 1);
+        }
+        uint16 *PointEntry = PropertyArrayStart + SortedIndex_Playhead;
+        *PointEntry = i;
+        CurrentSortIndex++;
+    }
+}
+
+
+static void
+Layer_Sort_CheckPrev(memory *Memory, int i, int Direction, sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart, sorted_comp_array SortedCompStart, int *EntriesPassed, sorted_layer_array *LayerEntry, bool32 AltMethod)
+{
+    int PrevOffsetIndex = i + Direction + (*EntriesPassed * Direction);
+    bool32 OutOfBounds = (Direction > 0) ? (PrevOffsetIndex > (SortedCompStart.LayerCount - 1)) : (PrevOffsetIndex < 0);
+    if (!OutOfBounds) {
+        sorted_layer_array *PrevLayerEntry = &SortedLayerStart[PrevOffsetIndex];
+        real32 PrevOffset = PrevLayerEntry->SortedOffset;
+        if (PrevOffset == (LayerEntry->SortedOffset - Direction)) {
+            (*EntriesPassed)++;
+            if (!AltMethod) {
+                PrevLayerEntry->SortedOffset += Direction;
+            } else {
+                LayerEntry->SortedOffset -= Direction;
+                Layer_Sort_CheckPrev(Memory, i, Direction, SortedLayerStart, SortedCompStart, EntriesPassed, LayerEntry, AltMethod);
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+
+// The first loop is for counting how many layers are in each precomp, the
+// second is for sorting the layers by offset, and the third is for applying
+// interactivity if the user is moving any layers.
+
+static void
+Layer_SortAll(project_state *State, memory *Memory,
+              sorted_layer_array *LayerArrayStart,  sorted_comp_array *CompArrayStart,
+              uint32 LayerCount, uint32 CompCount)
+{
+    int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
+    while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, LayerCount, &h, &c, &i)) {
+        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
+        Assert(Layer->Block_Composition_Index < CompCount);
+        CompArrayStart[Layer->Block_Composition_Index].LayerCount++;
+    }
+    h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
+    while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Layers, LayerCount, &h, &c, &i)) {
+        block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, i);
+        sorted_comp_array *SortedCompStart = &CompArrayStart[Layer->Block_Composition_Index];
+        sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart = Sorted_GetLayerStart(LayerArrayStart, CompArrayStart, Layer->Block_Composition_Index);
+        uint32 SortedIndex_Playhead = 0;
+        while (SortedIndex_Playhead < SortedCompStart->CurrentSortIndex) {
+            sorted_layer_array LayerEntry = SortedLayerStart[SortedIndex_Playhead];
+            block_layer *TestLayer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, LayerEntry.Block_Layer_Index);
+            if (-Layer->Vertical_Offset < -TestLayer->Vertical_Offset) {
+                break;
+            } else {
+                SortedIndex_Playhead++;
+            }
+        }
+        if (SortedIndex_Playhead != SortedCompStart->CurrentSortIndex) {
+            uint8 *Address_Start = (uint8 *)(SortedLayerStart + SortedIndex_Playhead);
+            uint8 *Address_End = (uint8 *)(SortedLayerStart + SortedCompStart->CurrentSortIndex) - 1;
+            Assert(SortedCompStart->CurrentSortIndex != SortedCompStart->LayerCount);
+            Arbitrary_ShiftData(Address_Start, Address_End, sizeof(sorted_layer_array), 1);
+        }
+        sorted_layer_array *LayerEntry = SortedLayerStart + SortedIndex_Playhead;
+        LayerEntry->Block_Layer_Index = i;
+        LayerEntry->SortedOffset = Layer->Vertical_Offset;
+        SortedCompStart->CurrentSortIndex++;
+    }
+    if (State->Interact_Active == interact_type_layer_move) {
+        int32 Offset = (int32)State->Interact_Offset[1];
+        bool32 Direction = (Offset > 0) ? 1 : -1;
+        for (uint32 c = 0; c < CompCount; c++) {
+            sorted_comp_array *SortedCompStart = &CompArrayStart[c];
+            if (!SortedCompStart->LayerCount)
+                continue;
+            sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart = Sorted_GetLayerStart(LayerArrayStart, CompArrayStart, c);
+            int i = (Direction > 0) ? SortedCompStart->LayerCount - 1 : 0;
+            bool32 Case = 1;
+            while (Case) {
+                int32 EntriesPassed = 0;
+                sorted_layer_array *LayerEntry = &SortedLayerStart[i];
+                block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, LayerEntry->Block_Layer_Index);
+                Assert(LayerEntry->SortedOffset == Layer->Vertical_Offset);
+                if (Layer->IsSelected) {
+                    int32 SpacesToMove = Offset * Direction;
+                    while (SpacesToMove) {
+                        Layer_Sort_CheckPrev(Memory, i, Direction, SortedLayerStart, *SortedCompStart, &EntriesPassed, LayerEntry, 0);
+                        LayerEntry->SortedOffset -= Direction;
+                        SpacesToMove--;
+                    }
+                }
+                int b = 0;
+                while (b < EntriesPassed) {
+                    sorted_layer_array *FrontEntry = &SortedLayerStart[i+(b*Direction)];
+                    sorted_layer_array *BackEntry = &SortedLayerStart[i+((b+1)*Direction)];
+                    sorted_layer_array Swap = *FrontEntry;
+                    *FrontEntry = *BackEntry;
+                    *BackEntry = Swap;
+                    b++;
+                }
+                i -= Direction;
+                Case = (Direction > 0) ? (i >= 0) : (i < SortedCompStart->LayerCount);
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+// NOTE(fox): We could be slightly more efficient and just allocate redundant data
+// instead of having another loop.
+void LayerProperty_Count(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, sorted_layer_array *LayerArrayStart,
+                            sorted_comp_array *CompStart, uint32 LayerCount, uint32 CompCount,
+                            uint32 *TotalPropertyCount, uint32 *TotalKeyframeCount)
+{
+    uint32 SortedPropertyPlayhead = 0;
+    uint32 SortedKeyframePlayhead = 0;
+    for (int c = 0; c < CompCount; c++) {
+        sorted_comp_array SortedCompStart = CompStart[c];
+        sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart = Sorted_GetLayerStart(LayerArrayStart, CompStart, c);
+        for (int i = 0; i < SortedCompStart.LayerCount; i++) {
+            sorted_layer_array *SortedLayer = &SortedLayerStart[i];
+            block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, SortedLayer->Block_Layer_Index);
+            SortedLayer->SortedPropertyStart = SortedPropertyPlayhead;
+            SortedLayer->SortedKeyframeStart = SortedKeyframePlayhead;
+            for (int h = 0; h < AmountOf(Layer->Property); h++) {
+                property_channel *Property = &Layer->Property[h];
+                if (Property->Keyframe_Count) {
+                    SortedKeyframePlayhead += Property->Keyframe_Count;
+                }
+                SortedPropertyPlayhead++;
+            }
+            for (int i = 0; i < Layer->Block_Effect_Count; i++) {
+                block_effect Effect = *(block_effect *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Effects, Layer->Block_Effect_Index[i]);
+                header_effect *EffectHeader = Effect_EntryFromID(State, Effect.ID);
+                for (int h = 0; h < EffectHeader->Property_Count; h++) {
+                    header_property ChannelHeader = State->Property[EffectHeader->PropertyStartIndex + h];
+                    property_channel *Property = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect.Block_Property_Index[h]);
+                    if (Property->Keyframe_Count) {
+                        SortedKeyframePlayhead += Property->Keyframe_Count;
+                    }
+                    SortedPropertyPlayhead++;
+                }
+            }
+        }
+    }
+    *TotalPropertyCount = SortedPropertyPlayhead;
+    *TotalKeyframeCount = SortedKeyframePlayhead;
+}
+
+void LayerProperty_SortAll(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, sorted_layer_array *LayerArrayStart,
+                   sorted_comp_array *CompStart, sorted_property_array *SortedPropertyStart, uint16 *SortedKeyframeArray,
+                   uint32 LayerCount, uint32 CompCount)
+{
+    uint32 SortedPropertyPlayhead = 0;
+    uint32 SortedKeyframePlayhead = 0;
+    for (int c = 0; c < CompCount; c++) {
+        sorted_comp_array SortedCompStart = CompStart[c];
+        sorted_layer_array *SortedLayerStart = Sorted_GetLayerStart(LayerArrayStart, CompStart, c);
+        for (int i = 0; i < SortedCompStart.LayerCount; i++) {
+            sorted_layer_array *SortedLayer = &SortedLayerStart[i];
+            block_layer *Layer = (block_layer *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Layers, SortedLayer->Block_Layer_Index);
+            SortedLayer->SortedPropertyStart = SortedPropertyPlayhead;
+            SortedLayer->SortedKeyframeStart = SortedKeyframePlayhead;
+            for (int h = 0; h < AmountOf(Layer->Property); h++) {
+                property_channel *Property = &Layer->Property[h];
+                if (Property->Keyframe_Count) {
+                    sorted_property_array *InfoLocation = SortedPropertyStart + SortedPropertyPlayhead;
+                    uint16 *ArrayLocation = SortedKeyframeArray + SortedKeyframePlayhead;
+                    Property_SortAll(Memory, State, Property, InfoLocation, ArrayLocation);
+                    SortedKeyframePlayhead += Property->Keyframe_Count;
+                }
+                SortedPropertyPlayhead++;
+            }
+            for (int i = 0; i < Layer->Block_Effect_Count; i++) {
+                block_effect Effect = *(block_effect *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Effects, Layer->Block_Effect_Index[i]);
+                header_effect *EffectHeader = Effect_EntryFromID(State, Effect.ID);
+                for (int h = 0; h < EffectHeader->Property_Count; h++) {
+                    header_property ChannelHeader = State->Property[EffectHeader->PropertyStartIndex + h];
+                    property_channel *Property = (property_channel *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Properties, Effect.Block_Property_Index[h]);
+                    if (Property->Keyframe_Count) {
+                        sorted_property_array *InfoLocation = SortedPropertyStart + SortedPropertyPlayhead;
+                        uint16 *ArrayLocation = SortedKeyframeArray + SortedKeyframePlayhead;
+                        Property_SortAll(Memory, State, Property, InfoLocation, ArrayLocation);
+                        SortedKeyframePlayhead += Property->Keyframe_Count;
+                    }
+                    SortedPropertyPlayhead++;
+                }
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+static void
+TempSource_SortAll(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory, uint16 *SourceArrayStart, uint16 *TempSourceCount)
+{
+    int count = 0;
+    int h = 0, c = 0, i = 0;
+    while (Block_Loop(Memory, F_Sources, File->Source_Count, &h, &c, &i)) {
+        block_source *Source = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, i);
+        if (Source->Type == source_type_principal_temp) {
+            uint32 Playhead = 0;
+            while (Playhead < count) {
+                block_source *TestSource = (block_source *)Memory_Block_AddressAtIndex(Memory, F_Sources, SourceArrayStart[Playhead]);
+                Assert(TestSource->Type == source_type_principal_temp);
+                if (TestSource->RelativeTimestamp > Source->RelativeTimestamp) {
+                    break;
+                } else {
+                   Playhead++;
+                }
+            }
+            if (Playhead != count) {
+                uint8 *Address_Start = (uint8 *)(SourceArrayStart + Playhead);
+                uint8 *Address_End = (uint8 *)(SourceArrayStart + count) - 1;
+                Arbitrary_ShiftData(Address_Start, Address_End, sizeof(uint16), 1);
+            }
+            SourceArrayStart[Playhead] = i;
+            count++;
+        }
+    }
+    *TempSourceCount = count;
+}
+
+
+static sorted_file
+File_Sort_Push(project_data *File, project_state *State, memory *Memory)
+{
+    sorted_file Sorted = {0};
+    Sorted.Layer_SortSize = (sizeof(sorted_comp_array) * File->Comp_Count) +
+                            (sizeof(sorted_layer_array) * File->Layer_Count);
+    void *Layer_SortedArray = Memory_PushScratch(Memory, Sorted.Layer_SortSize);
+    Arbitrary_Zero((uint8 *)Layer_SortedArray, Sorted.Layer_SortSize);
+    Sorted.CompArray = (sorted_comp_array *)Layer_SortedArray;
+    Sorted.LayerArray = (sorted_layer_array *)((uint8 *)Layer_SortedArray + (sizeof(sorted_comp_array) * File->Comp_Count));
+
+    uint64 SourceArraySize = sizeof(uint16) * File->Source_Count;
+    Sorted.Source_SortSize = SourceArraySize;
+    void *Source_SortedArray = Memory_PushScratch(Memory, Sorted.Source_SortSize);
+    Arbitrary_Zero((uint8 *)Source_SortedArray, Sorted.Source_SortSize);
+    Sorted.SourceArray = (uint16 *)Source_SortedArray;
+
+    TempSource_SortAll(File, State, Memory, Sorted.SourceArray, &Sorted.TempSourceCount);
+    Layer_SortAll(State, Memory, Sorted.LayerArray, Sorted.CompArray, File->Layer_Count, File->Comp_Count);
+
+    // Property sorting depends on above precomp/layer sorting!
+
+    uint32 TotalPropertyCount = 0;
+    uint32 TotalKeyframeCount = 0;
+    LayerProperty_Count(File, State, Memory, Sorted.LayerArray, Sorted.CompArray, File->Layer_Count, File->Comp_Count, &TotalPropertyCount, &TotalKeyframeCount);
+    uint64 PropertyStartSize = TotalPropertyCount * sizeof(sorted_property_array);
+    uint64 PropertyArraySize = TotalKeyframeCount * sizeof(uint16);
+    Sorted.Property_SortSize = PropertyArraySize + PropertyStartSize;
+    void *Property_SortedArray = Memory_PushScratch(Memory, Sorted.Property_SortSize);
+    Arbitrary_Zero((uint8 *)Property_SortedArray, Sorted.Property_SortSize);
+    Sorted.PropertyStart = (sorted_property_array *)Property_SortedArray;
+    Sorted.PropertyArray = (uint16 *)((uint8 *)Property_SortedArray + PropertyStartSize);
+
+    LayerProperty_SortAll(File, State, Memory, Sorted.LayerArray, Sorted.CompArray, Sorted.PropertyStart, Sorted.PropertyArray, File->Layer_Count, File->Comp_Count);
+    return Sorted;
+}
+
+static void
+File_Sort_Pop(memory *Memory, uint64 Layer_SortSize, uint64 Property_SortSize, uint64 Source_SortSize)
+{
+    Memory_PopScratch(Memory, Property_SortSize);
+    Memory_PopScratch(Memory, Source_SortSize);
+    Memory_PopScratch(Memory, Layer_SortSize);
+}
diff --git a/stable_diffusion.cpp b/src/stable_diffusion.cpp
index 4da327d..4da327d 100644
--- a/stable_diffusion.cpp
+++ b/src/stable_diffusion.cpp
diff --git a/strings.cpp b/src/strings.cpp
index d2acc03..d2acc03 100644
--- a/strings.cpp
+++ b/src/strings.cpp
diff --git a/threading.cpp b/src/threading.cpp
index 5a42ea7..5a42ea7 100644
--- a/threading.cpp
+++ b/src/threading.cpp
diff --git a/undo.cpp b/src/undo.cpp
index bfedc8c..d55cedc 100644
--- a/undo.cpp
+++ b/src/undo.cpp
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ void History_Action_DoSwapBitmap(memory *Memory, history_action *ActionPointer,
     Bitmap_SwapData((uint8 *)UncompressedTempBuffer, (uint8 *)Address_Data, FullSize, Action.Direction);
 
     // Then we recompress the old pixels and evaluate its size, and since the size can be different...
-    uint64 NewSize = Data_Compress(Memory, UncompressedTempBuffer, FullSize, CompressedTempBuffer, BytesForCompressedPart, Z_BEST_SPEED);
+     uint64 NewSize = Data_Compress(Memory, UncompressedTempBuffer, FullSize, CompressedTempBuffer, BytesForCompressedPart, 0); // Z_BEST_SPEED);
 
     // we have to shift the undo stack.
     if (NewSize != CompressedSize) {
@@ -208,6 +208,7 @@ void History_Entry_Commit(memory *Memory, char *Name)
     History->NumberOfEntries++;
     History->EntryPlayhead++;
     Memory->IsFileSaved = false;
+    Memory->PurgeCache = true;
 #if DEBUG
     Assert(Debug.UndoState != 1);   // You forgot to end a History_Entry_Commit()!
     Debug.UndoState = 1;
@@ -253,7 +254,7 @@ static void History_Action_Add(memory *Memory, history_action ActionData, void *
         // history tree as the destination.
         // ShiftAmount is also being used to save the uncompressed size.
         uint32 BytesForCompressedPart = (uint32)100 * 1024 * 1024;
-        Action->Size = Data_Compress(Memory, Address_Data, Action->ShiftAmount, Address_HistoryTree, BytesForCompressedPart, Z_BEST_SPEED);
+        Action->Size = Data_Compress(Memory, Address_Data, Action->ShiftAmount, Address_HistoryTree, BytesForCompressedPart, 0); // Z_BEST_SPEED);
 
     } else if (Action->Type == action_type_shift)
     {